cosmography in four Books Containing the chorography & HISTORY of the whole WORLD, and all the Principal Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles, Thereof.  
By Peter Heylyn  
Virgil Aeneid: 1 Quae regio in terris nostri non plena Laboris▪  
LONDON Printed for Henry Seile over against St Dunstan's Church in Fleetstreet. 1652.  
יהוה Dixit, et factum est  
Spiritus Dni ferebatur super aqua⸫  
Europe Africa Asia America  
Europe Africa Asia America   

cosmography In Four Books. CONTAINING THE chorography AND HISTORY Of the whole WORLD, And all the principal Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof.  
By PETER HEYLYN.  
Acts 17. 24. 26. Deus qui fecit mundum, & omnia quae in eo sunt; fecit ex uno omne genus hominum, inhabitare super universam faciem terrae, definiens tempora & terminos habitationis eorum.  
Plin. in Proem. l. 7. MUNDUS, & in eo Terra, Gentes, Maria, Insulae, insignes Vrbes, ad hunc modum se habent.  
LONDON, Printed for Henry Seile, and are to be sold at his Shop over against Saint Dunstan's Church in Fleetstreet. MDCLII.   

TO THE READER, The Author rendereth this Account of his Undertaking and Performance in the following Work.  
IT is a great complaint with many, that they want time either to undertake great matters, or to accomplish those they have undertaken: Whereas it is more truly affirmed by Seneca, that we do not so much want, as waste it. Non parum temporis habemus, sed multum perdimus, as that Author hath it. We trifle out too much of our precious time, as he well observeth, Aut malè agendo, aut nihil agendo, aut aliud agendo; either in doing ill, or nothing, or else things impertinent: and then cry out, that we want time convenient to perform those duties, which are expected from us, in our several places. Nor have we only time enough to spend, but some time to spare; some privacies and retreats from business; some breathing fits from the affairs of our Vocations: and even of them, those times of leisure and recess, we are to render an Account, in Cato's judgement. Otii reddendam rationem judicabat Cato, as we read in Tully. In which Account, as all men generally are concerned, so am I interessed therein as much as any. For being by the unhappiness of my Destiny, or the infelicity of the times, deprived of my Preferments, and devested of my Ministerial Function (as to the ordinary and public exercise thereof) I cannot choose but say I have leisure enough; the opportunity of spending more idle hours (if I were so minded) than I ever expected or desired. And though perhaps I could have spent those times of leisure, which the change of my affairs hath given me, with greater benefit to myself, and more to the advantage of my private fortunes: yet that of Cato did so overbalance me, that I was willing to do somewhat which might witness to ensuing times, how I had passed away those hours, and employed that leisure. And when I was considering of some particulars within the compass of my power, and answerable to that small stock of Books which I had recruited, (mine own being taken from me and disposed of, contrary unto public Order) I was requested by some friends of no common quality to review my Geography; to make it more complete and useful to an English Reader: My vacancy from business, used by them as an Argument to induce me to it. A motion looked on, when first made, with neglect enough, my desuetude from those younger Studies, my great want of Books, the sad complexion of the times, and the unhandsome entertainment which my endeavours for the public had lately met with, seeming sufficient to dissuade me from the undertaking. Little encouragement, God wot, to write Books for others, when I could not be permitted to enjoy my own; or to employ myself in order to a public service, when not alone my private fortunes, but the public Patrimony of the Church was destroyed and dissipated. But afterwards being pressed unto it by some Members of Parliament, whom I found loath to be denied, and by some others of great rank, but such different Interesses, that I wondered how they could all centre upon the same Proposal: I thought it at the last a more Christian duty to satisfy the honest desires of so many men, than to sacrifice any longer to my own privacy and retiredness, to which I had intended to devote myself. So I resolved to venture on it, though w●ll I saw that my condition in so doing might be resembled unto that of the Israelites in the Land of Egypt: of whom the Taskmasters did expect the full tale of Bricks, and yet denied them their accustomed allowance of Straw and Stubble. My ●ase in this not much unlike to that of the Duke of Alva, who being under the displeasure of the King of Spain in quality of a Prisoner, without the least assurance of recovering the King's favour, or his own liberty, and yet employed in that Conjuncture, for the conquest of Portugal; was wont to say, That he was sent to conquer Kingdoms with his Fetters on.  
And here I cannot but remember a pretty accident which besell me in the month of January, An. 1640. at what time it had been my ill fortune to suffer under some misapprehensions which had been entertained against me, and to be brought before the Committee for the Courts of Justice, on the complaint of M. Prynne, then newly returned from his confinement, and in great credit with the Vulgar. Herd by them, I confess I was, with a great deal of ingenuous patience; but most despitefully reviled and persecuted with excessive both noise and violence, by such as thronged about the doors of that Committee to expect the ●ssue: it being as natural to many weak and inconsiderate men, as it is to Dogs, to bark at those they do not know, and to accompany each other in those kinds of clamours. And though I had the happi●ess to come off clear, without any censure, and to recover by degrees amongst knowing men, that estimation which before had been much endangered, yet such as took up matters upon trust and Hear-say, looked on me as a person forfeited, and marked out for ruin. Amongst others, I was then encountered in my passage from Westminster to Whitehall, by a tall big Gentleman, who thrusting me rudely from the wall, and looking over his shoulder on me in a scornful manner, said in an hoarse voice these word●, Geographie is better than Divinity; and so passed along. Whether his meaning were, that I was a better Geographer than Div●ne; or that Geographie had been a Study of more credit and advantage to me in the eyes of men, than Divinity was like to prove, I am not able to determine. But sure I am, I have since thought very often of it, and that the thought thereof had its influence on me, in drawing me to look back on those younger stuai●●, in which I was resolved to have dealt no more; and thereto, in the Preface to my Microcosm, had obliged myself.  
And it is possible enough, that in respect of that general promise, I may lie under the censure of inconstancy, and breach of Covenant, in that I had solemnly declared in the aforesaid Preface, that the Reader should not fear any further inlargements, which might make him repent his (then) present Markets; that it had received my last hand, and that from thenceforth, I would look upon it as a Stranger only. But it was meant withal, and expressed accordingly, unless it w●re for the amending of such Errors, of which by the strength of mine own judgement, or any ingenuous information, I should be convicted. An● Errors I must needs say, I have found so many on this last perusal, and those not only verbal, but material too; as did not only free me from that Obligation, but did oblige me to a further Review thereof. For being written in an age, on which the pride of youth and self-opinion might have some predominancies, I thought it freer from mistakes than I since have found it: And those mistakes, by running through eight Editions (six of them without my perusal or super-vising) so increased and multiplied, that I could no longer call it mine, or look upon it with any tolerable degree of patience. So that in case the importunity of friends had not enforced me, in a manner, upon this Employment, the necessity of consulting my own fame, and leaving the Work fa●r behind me to succeeding times, would have persuaded me in the end to do somewhat in it. Which though the last, was not the least of those inducements which inclined me to the undertaking of this present Work.  
Having thus plainly and ingenuously laid down the reasons which did induce, though not encourage me, unto this performance: It is now fit I should declare what I have done in it, and what the Reader may expect from so great inlargements. And first the Reader is to know, that my design originally, was only to look over the former Book, to give it a Review, to purge it of the Errors which it had contracted, and not so much ●o make a new Book, as correct the old. But when I had more seriously considered of it, 〈◊〉 found sufficient reason to change that purpose, to make it new both in form and matter, 〈◊〉 to present it to the world with all those advantages which a new Book might carry with ●t. The greater pains I took about it, the greater I conceived would the benefit be which might from thence redound to those who should please to read it: And I would willingly so fain comply with all expectations, that the short Taper of my life should give light to others in the consuming of itself; Non nobis solum nati sumus, may well become a Christians mouth, though an Heathen spoke it. But if all expectations be not satisfied in the completeness of the work, as I fear they will not, I desire it may not be ascribed unto any neglect or fault of mine, but to the wants and difficulties which I was to struggle with. Books I had few to help myself with of mine own; nor live I near so rich a Clergy (most of the Benefices of these parts being poor and mean) as to supply myself from them with such commodities. The greatest helps I had was from Oxford-Librarie, which though but nine or ten miles off from my present dwelling, yet the charge and trouble of the journey, with the loss of time, made my visits to that place less frequent, and consequently the Neighbourhood thereof less useful to me, than the generality of the design might well comport with. So that when all things are considered as they ought to be, it rather may be wondered at by an equal Reader, how I could come to write so much, with so little helps, upon a subject of such a large and diffused variety, than that in any part thereof I have writ too little. And to say truth, the work so prospered in my hand, and swollen so much above my thought and expectation, that I hope I may with modesty enough use those words of Jacob, Voluntas Dei fuit, ut citò occurreret mihi quod volebam; The Lord God brought it to me, as the English reads it.  
In the pursuance of this Work, as I have taken on myself the parts of an Historian and Geographer; so have I not forgotten that I an Englishman, and which is somewhat more, a Churchman. As an Englishman I have been mindful upon all occasions to commit to memory the noble actions of my Country; exploited both by Sea and Land, in most parts of the World, and represented on the same theatres, upon which they were acted. And herein I have followed the example of the great Annalist, Baronius. Who pretending in that learned and laborious Work, a sincere History of the Church, and no more than so; yet tells the Pope in his Epistle, that he principally did intend the same, Pro Sacrarum Traditionum Antiquitate, & Autoritate Romanae Ecclesiae; to manifest therein the Antiquity of such Traditions, and for defence of that Authority and Power, which at this day are taught and exercised in the Church of Kome. And so much I may also say of myself in this performance, though without any by-design to abuse the Reader, that though the History and Chorogrophie of the World he my principal business, yet I have apprehended every modest occasion, of recording the heroic Acts of my native Soil, and filing on the Registers of perpetual Fame the Gallantry and brave Achievements of the People of England. Exemplified in their many victories, and signal services in Italy, France, Spain, Scotland, Belgium, in Palestine, Cyprus, afric and America, and indeed where not? Nor have I pretermitted their great zeal and piety in converting to the Faith so many of the Germane and Northern Nations; Franconians, Thuringians, Hassians, Saxons, Danes, Frisons; as also amongst the Scots and Picts, together with those of Lituania and the people of Norwey: by that means more enlarging Christ's Kingdom than they did their own. And as I have been zealous to record the Actions, so have I been as careful to assert the Rights of the English Nation: inherent personally in their Kings, by way of public interess in the Subject also; as the whole body doth partake of that sense and motion, which is originally in the Head. And of this kind I reckon the true stating of the Title of the Kings of England to the Crown of France; demonstrating the Vassalage of the Kingdom of Scotland to the Crown of England; vouching the legal Interess of the English Nation, in Right of the first Discovery or Premier Seisin, to Estotiland, Terra Corterialis, Newfoundland, Novum Belgium, Guiana, the Countries near the Cape of good Hope, and some other places against all Pretenders: insinuating the precedency of the English Kings before those of Spain; their Sovereignty and Dominion in the British Ocean, with the great benefit which might from thence arise unto us, invaded and almost engrossed by the Hanse and Hollanders. And yet there is another thing which speaks me more an Englishman, than all these together; which I shall fall on soon enough, and indeed too soon, the sadness of the subject being well considered.  
Next, as a Churchman, I have taken more especial notice of the ancient and present face of Christianity, in all parts of the World; the planting and Government of Churches, the Hetrodoxies and opinions of those several Sects into which it now doth stand dismembered. By which it will appear most clearly amongst other things, that the Doctrine and Government of the Church were of equal standing; that this government was no other than that of Bishops; and that wheresoever Christianity did find any admittance, Episcopacy was admitted also as a part thereof: the Gospel being in most places first preached by Bishops, or growing to esteem and strength under their Authority. And it is found on these Recherches, that as Espiscopacie was co-aevall with the Church itself: so the Subordination of Bishops to their several Primates, and the Coordination of those Primates amongst themselves in the common Government thereof, was of such antiquity (as being settled and confirmed in St. Cyprians time, who flourished in the year 250.) that it is hard to trace the beginnings of it. Debere Episcopos in common Ecclesiam regere, is a noted Maxim in St. Hierome; but practically true in the Communicatoriae and Formatae, of the Elder Ages: Which happy course had it been preserved, Episcopacy had been so far from being made a stirrup for Antichrist to mount into his throne, as the Smectymnuans falsely charge it; that it had served rather as a martingale to have kept him down from lifting up his head too high above the rest of his Brethren. And that this conrse was not preserved, came not intentionally from the Popes (for that by Antichrist they mean the Popes of Rome, is a thing past question) but from the Inundation of the barbarous Nations: though I confess the Popes were apt enough to make the best advantage of those various Accidents, which the distresses of the Church did present unto them. For by the overflowing of the Barbarous Nations, Christianity was either quite extinguished, or the authority of the Primates trodden under foot; or that intelligence and commerce which had been anciently amongst them interdicted on good reasons of state, by such Heathen or Mahometan Princes, under whom they lived. And then how easy was it for the Pope, in the new planting of the Gospel in these Western parts (done either by his Ministers, or by his Encouragement) to give unto the Bishops of his own appointing such a limited power, as might make them more and more obnoxious unto his commands, and afterwards to lessen their Authority, as he saw occasion, by granting large Exemptions to Monasteries, Convents, and Cathedrals; with Jurisdiction over the Parochial Churches which belonged unto them. So that it is most evident in the course of Story, that the Popes never came unto their height, nor could obtrude their Superstitions and Novations on the Church of CHRIST; till they had weakened, by degrees, the Episcopal power. Followed in that design, though on different ends, by Wicliff, and some others in the Ages since; who have driven on their private projects under the colour and pretence of a Reformation. Episcopacy as it was co-aevall with the Church of CHRIST, so was it the best and strongest Buttress in that sacred Building. The weakening or subverting of which Primitive Order, did either prostitute the Church to the lust and tyranny of that proud Usurper, or expose the Patrimony thereof unto spoil and rapine; or finally subject it to the Anarchy and licentiousness of Hetrodoxies and confused Opinions. But I fear I have digressed too far in this speculation.  
As a Geographer, I have been punctual and exact, in giving unto every Province its peculiar bounds, in laying out their several Landmarks, tracing the course of most of the principal Rivers, and setting forth the situation and estate of the chiefest Towns; and did once think of beautifying the Work with as many Maps as the several States and Kingdoms which are here described. But upon further consideration, how much it would increase the Book both in bulk and price, and consequently make it of less public use than I did intend it; I laid by those thoughts, and resied satisfied with the adding of four Maps for the four parts of the World: by which the Reader may discern how each Country lies unto the other, though he find not each particular Province, and much less all the Towns and Cities which are here expressed; and on the other side may meet with many Towns of inferior note which are here o●●●●ed. And herein I have took some pains in searching out the first Inhabitants of each several Country, as far as I could see by the light of Letters, or go by probable conjectures; in finding out the place of such ancient Cities as are now decayed, not easily visible in their ruins; and adding to such Cities as are now in being (if of any Antiquity) their Original names. A thing as necessary to the understanding of the Histories of those elder times, as the knowledge of the present names is to the more delightful reading of our modern Stories. And though I have not pretermitted any Town of note, fit to be specified and insisted on in a work of this nature; yet would I not have the Reader look for such a punctual enumeration and description of them, as he may meet withal in those who have written the chorography of some Country only; or think himself unsatisfied in his expectation if he find not here the situation and affairs of each Town of War, or the Quartering place of every Company or Troop of Soldiers, which are presented to him in the Weekly News-Books. In all Country's there are many places which either by the advantage of their situation, or some present exigency of affairs, are fortified and made Towns of War; or otherwise remarkable for some signal battle, in these late bustles and commotions of the Christian World; of which no notice hath been taken in former times, and consequently not within the compass of this Discourse: and yet perhaps may grow as famous and considerable in the times to come, as many of the mightier Cities now decayed and ruined. He that shall think the work imperfect (though I confess it to be nothing but imperfections) for some deficiencies in this kind, may be likened to the Country-fellow in Aristophanes (if my memory fail not) who picked a great quarrel with the Map, because he could not find where his own Farm stood. And such a Countrey-customer I did meet with one, a servant of my elder Brothers, sent by him with some horses to Oxon, to bring me and a friend of mine unto his house. Who having lost his way as we passed thorough the Forest of Whichwood, and not able to recover any beaten Tract; did very earnestly entreat me to lead the way, till I had brought him past the Woods to the open Fields. Which when I had refused to do, as I had good reason, alleging that I never had been there before, and therefore that I could not tell which way to lead him: That's strange, said he, I have heard my old Master your Father say, that you made a Book of all the World, and cannot you find your way out of the Wood? Which being spoken out of an honest simplicity, not out of any pretence to wit, or the least thought of putting a blunt jest upon me, occasioned a great deal of merriment for a long time; but I hope to meet with no such Readers. The greatness of the bulk, and consequently of the price, makes me somewhat confident that none but men of judgement and understanding will peruse these Papers: and such as they will look for no more particulars, than the nature of a general Discourse will fitly bear. Perfection and exactness is to be expected in each kind of Science, as is observed by Aristotle in the 2d Book of his Ethics, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as far forth, as the condition of the Argument may be capable of it. And so much if I have attained unto, it is all which can with reason be expected from me. To look fo● more were as improper and absurd (in the words of Aristotle) as for an Artist to expect Tropes of Rhetoric from a Mathematician, or Demonstrations from an Orator.  
Lastly, as an Historian, I have traced the affairs of each several Country from the first Inhabitants thereof, (such as the Latins call Aborigines, and the Greeks 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉) till these later times. Which that I might be sure to do on a good foundation, I have took more than common care, to settle all the first Adventurers (after the proud attempt at Babel) in their right Plantations: and that too in the way of an Introduction, that I might the better know where I was to find them, and to go on with their affairs with the less disturbance. The rest of their Occurrences I have summed into so short an Abstract, as may be useful to the learned in the way of a Remembrancer; to the less knowing man, in the way of a Tutor; Brevity in this kind, I have much endeavoured; but so as to avoid all obscurity also. Nor have I only kept myself to the Story of Kingdoms, or of the greater Signi●uries, Estates, or Nations, which are or have been of the greatest consideration in the sway of the world: but looked on the Estates of such Dukes, Earls, and inferior Princes, as in their times have had the Government of those parts which gave Title to them; whose actions and successions are distinctly specified, and all such alterations noted, as have happened either in the ruin of such Estates, or the translating of them from one House to another. The Catalogues and Successions of which royal and illustrious Families, I have drawn down unto the year 1648. towards the expiring of which year, I began to set my self upon this Employment. And there I fix as on the top of some dreadful Precipice, which one can neither venture down without danger, nor look down without horror. Some things there are of such a nature, that either to speak of them, or to hold our peace, is alike unsafe. In such a case it is best keeping at a distance. For though Truth be the best Mistress which a man can serve, (Magis amica Veritas, said the great Philosopher;) yet it is well observed withal, that if a man follow her too close at the heels, she may chance to kick out his teeth for his labour.  
In this regard, as also out of that compassionate affection which a true Englishman ought to bear his native Country, although in my approaches towards these present times, I have took notice in some other places of such battles, sieges, and successes in the chances of War, as have happened in these later days: I have forborn to take the least notice of those Tragedies of blood and death, which have been lately acted on the Stage of England. I cannot but with grief confess, that I might find variety of this kind enough, in the late Wars amongst ourselves: in which there have been more pitched fields, more strong pieces taken, more notable traverses of State, and exploits of war, than all the world can parallel in an equal time. But I have too much English bowels to please myself in the recital, or to look back on those unfortunate adventures, which I should rather choose to cover with the Act of Oblivion, or bury in the grave of perpetual silence. How gladly I could have recorded these exploits of war, had they been exercised on a subject more proper for them; my willingness to take notice upon all occasions, of the actions and achievements of the English Nation, will bear witness for me. But the employing of that valour against ourselves, as if not to be conquered but by one another, strikes such horror in me, that I cannot think thereof without much affrightment, nor intimate thus much of it without great reluctancies. I fear it may be said too truly of our late imbroilments, as the Historian of the Civil Wars betwixt Caesar and Pompey; Causa hujus Belli eadem quae omnium, nimia felicitas; that they were principally occasioned by a surfeit of too much felicity. But if we were grown weary of our own prosperities; and that that prayer & passage in the public Liturgy (Give peace in our time O Lord) did not relish with us: how happy had it been if we had found some other field to have tried our valour in● and made some foreign Country that Aceldama, which so fatally was made at home▪ The dishonour which we suffered in the Isle of Re, when beat thence ingloriously by the French; the forcible and long detention of the Palatinate by the power of the Spaniard; the barbarous butchery at Amboyna, and the beating up of the Spanish Fleet within the protection of our Casiles, by those of Holland; the insolences of the Scots, and the rebellions of the Irish, might well have stirred some indignation in an English breast. And had we fought upon those scores, or on none but them, our victories had deserved the honour of a solemn triumph, denied by the old Roman Laws to a Civil War: But our infelicity (as it seems) was like that of Rome, in following those unnatural wars with such animosities; when the unrevenged death of Cra●●is, the blood of so many thousand of their slaughtered Citizens, and the shameful l●ss of so many of the Roman Ensigns, should rather have invited them to the conquest of the Parthian Empire. Of which thus feelingly the Poet, 
Cumque superba foret Babylon spolianda Trophaeis,  
Bella geri placuit, nullos habit ura Triumphos.  
And when proud Babylon should have been constrained  
To give us back our Ensigns lately gained;  
We rather chose such Quarrels to pursue,  
For which no Triumph could be justly due.   
But such is the condition and vicissitude of humane affairs, that there is nothing permanent, and much less of certainty. The greatest Monarchies of the world, the Babylonian, Persian, Grecian, Roman, have all had their periods, nothing remaining of them now but the name and memory. And what is now become of those mighty Cities of the East, Ninive, Babylon, Ecbatana, Susa, with the rest mentioned in the Scriptures, and in Classical Authors? are not their very ruins now become invisible? Where are the puissant Families of the Achaemenides of Persia, the Seleucidae of Syria, the Pharaohs and Ptolemy's of Egypt, the Caesars of Italy the Merovingians and Carolovingians of the Realm of France, & the Plantagenets of England? are they not all extinct & gone, not to be found but by the benefit of story, and some ancient monuments? And if it be so, as it is, with the greatest Monarchies, the most mighty Cities of the world, we must not think that smaller Kingdoms & Estates can either be so evenly balanced, or so surely founded, as not to be obnoxious also to the same vicissitudes. And being that saying of Optatus is most undoubtedly true, Ecclesia est in Republica, that the Church is but a part of the Commonwealth, we must not hope to find it in a better posture than the Civil State in which it is, and under the protection whereof it subsists and flourisheth. The Church must needs miscarry in the ruin of the Civil State, and may miscarry many times, although the Civil State receive no such alterations. Compared for this reason to the Moon by the ancient Fathers, who had observed her in her Prime, in her Increases, and her Full; and finally had not only seen her in the Wane also, but sometimes too under some horrible Eclipses. Which various condition of the Militant Church, the Scriptures and succeeding Stories have set forth so fully, that there need no better nor no clearer demonstrations of it. The Ark of God taken by the Philistines, the Temple destroyed by the Chaldaeans, and profaned by the Syrians, the Apostasy of ten Tribes at once from the Law of their God, and the extermination of the other two in a short time after, abundantly declare the frail condition and estate of the Jewish Church. And find we not the same for the Christian also, in the removing of the Candlestick from the Asian Churches; and making them, together with those of Greece and Egypt, and all the flourishing Churches in the East and South, to languish and decay remedilessly under the merciless encroachments of the Turks and Saracens? He must be more than blind that sees not, more savage than those merciless men that grieves not, at their sad condition: but a dead member, at the most, of Christ's mystical Body, who feels not in himself the sufferings of those wretched Christians.  
If now we look into the causes of that desolation which hath happened in the Civil State of those mighty Empires; to what can we impute it but their crying sins? the pride of the Babylonians, the effeminacy of the Persians, the luxury of the Greeks: and such an aggregation of vices amongst the Romans (or Western Christians) before the breaking in of the barbarous Nations, that they were grown a scandal unto Christianity. In nobis patitur Christus opprobrium, in nobis patitur lex Christiana maledictum, as the devout Salvian then complained. Thus also in reference to the Church, did not the Idolatries of the ten Tribes hasten in the Assyrians? the shedding of the blood of so many Prophets by the other two, as much accelerate the coming in of the Chaldaeans first, and the Romans afterwards? Do we not find the Arianism of the Eastern Churches to usher in the inundation of the Saracens; the Donatism of the South to have set open a wide Door to let in the Vandals? Did not the Saxons follow on the heels of Pelagianism, as soon almost as entertained amongst the Britain's? If so, as most undoubtedly it was in the days of old, why should we think but that the Superstitions and Corruptions of the Church of Rome, the sacrilege and faction of the Churches of the Reformation, shall at the last receive the like Retribution: Or that the Divine Justice is so fast asleep that our sins must cry as loud, as the Priests of Baal did unto their God, before it be awakened by us? Assuredly we are no less sinners than any of those on whom the Tower of the Divine vengeance hath so heavily fallen, whose blood the pilate's of all Ages have mingled with their solemn and religious sacrifices: and therefore have no cause to hope, but that unless we do repent, we shall likewise perish.  
The serious consideration of all these particulars hath made those alterations both in Church and State, which have happened here amongst ourselves, the less strange unto me. For is there any of those things, whereof it may be said, Ecce hoc est novum, Behold this is new? Eccl. 1. 10. Have they not been already in the times before us? Do we not find it positively affirmed by the wisest man that ever was, That which hath been is now, and that which is to be hath already been; Nihil enim novum est sub sole, for there is no new thing under the Sun, Eccl. 3. 15. & 1. 11. And though I cannot tell what effect the reading of this following Book may produce in others, yet I can warrantably say thus much of myself, that the observation of the fall of so many great and puissant Empires, the extirpation of so many mighty and renowned Families, the desolation of so many flourishing Christian Churches, as the composing of this Book did present me with (though formerly no strangers to me in the course of my Studies) did more conduce to the full humbling of my soul under the mighty hand of God, than either the sense of my misfortune, or any other moral consideration which had come before me. And I could wish the Reader may receive so much benefit by it (besides the profit and delight which Books of this nature carry with them) that the mighty man may learn hereby not to glory in his great strength, nor the wise to glory in his wisdoom, or in the cunning carrying on of his great designs. Let the great Leaders of these times in the Art of War, consider the sad ends of Joab, the General of David; and of Belisarius, the Commander of Justinians Armies: whereof the one was slain ingloriously at the Horns of the Altar, after all his services; the other forced to beg his bread at the Gates of the Temple. Let the great Masters of Wit and State-craft have before their eyes, the unsuccesful ends of Achitopel, the Oracle of the times be lived in; and of Caesar Borgia, proposed by Machiavelli for the Pattern of a Politic Prince: of which the one laid violent hands upon himself, because his Counsel was not followed; the other, after the defailment of all his projects, and a long imprisonment to boot, forced to fly his Country, and slain obscurely in an Ambush. Let all men lay unto their hearts the ebbs and floods, those alternations and vicissitudes, to which all humane power is subject; the slippery foundations of that might and greatness, which is not laid upon the Principles of Justice, and regulated by the Maxims of Christian Piety; and that even those which have dominion over others, have a God too above themselves, to whom they are to render an account of all their Actions. Not such a God, as that of Lewis the 11 th'. of France. Of whom it is reported, that he wore a Leaden Medail in his Bonnet in the form of a Crucifix: which, when he had caused any man to be killed whom he feared or hated, he would take into his hands and kiss it, desiring it to pardon him that one murder more, and it should be the last which he would commit. Such mockeries as these may well be put on a Leaden God, but the God of Heaven and Earth will not so be mocked: who being Totus oculus and totum lumen, as the Father calleth him, can easily discern our intents and purposes, notwithstanding those disguises which are put upon them; and see the nakedness of sin in its ugliest shape, though apparelled with the Fig-leaves of the best pretences, which the self-deceiving wit of man can patch up together. God is the same God now as in former times, Primus ad extremum similis sibi, Yesterday, and to day, and the same for ever; and will not put up those affronts which the impieties of men do afflict him with: though in regard of his great patience and long suffering, they may flatter their poor souls, and say, Tush, God doth not see it,  
Lastly, I am to tell the Reader, that I have now no other Patron than himself, to whom to dedicate this Work, and from whom to receive protection and encouragement in it. The time was when I might have said with Seneca, Unus mihi erat pro Populo, that one man was to me instead of all men: the Powers of all the People being virtually united in him. But now, I must be fain to invert that saying, Populus mihi est pro uno; the Body of the Nation is to me, in this respect, as the Head before. But being that all the Members of the Body Collective have not abilities to read, and much less to judge; I look especially on the Nobility, Clergy, Gentry, as their Representatives in this kind; to whose favourable and ingenuous acceptance I present this Work. Which if I can attain unto, it is all I aim at. And it will be no small comfort to me, in the midst of so many sorrows as are round about me, that I have been useful to the public; or added any thing by my Studies, unto the honour and content of the English Nation: whose peace and happiness is heartily commended to Almighty God, by  
The Author of these following Papers, PETER HEYLYN.   

To my Brother the Author.  

THY first prest-Grapes did yield approved Wine,  
Such as did pra●se it 
These verses prefixed before the second Edition of the former book Anno 1624. I have made bold to borrow and imprint with this, to preserve the memory of the Author, who died in February 1640.  yet to endear  
Our Approbation, thou dost here refine  
These former Fruits; and for our better Cheer  
Presentest us with a pure and stronger Vine:  
Lest else some cur ●ous ●ast might it distaste.  
If so, what needs my second Bush? 'Tis Waste.   

Yet well thy choice Minerva merits this.  
This Ivy-garland, everlasting green;  
Which like the Muse's cup proportioned is,  
Whereout thou drinkest, wherein their Liquors been.  
Nor wouldst thou s●●pe the lash of Nemesis.  
If ●●th Diogenes thou should 〈◊〉 refuse,  
To let the t●rsty drink there hence. 'Twere News.   

Thy Book's an Ark which all the World contains,  
And well may bear ashort Encomion.  
'Tis slender meed, yet who s●ch p●y disdains?  
Good Wine may have a Bush, though it need none.  
Nor let these lines of mine seem partial strains.  
Thy Work ingenious is; and Virtue's brood.  
Like it, increaseth with due praise. 'Tis Good.   

Much pains it cost, much cost, and labour more;  
Fame's breath is dear, 'tis hard to purchase Praise.  
The Muse's seat ascends an hundred score,  
And Honour's journey lies not in plain ways.  
Who to Parnassus' high-crowned top will sore,  
Must with elaborate Quill climb up; and such  
Thy tender Genius boasteth thee. 'Tis Much.   

Too much indeed it were, but that in part  
The Guerdon of well-doing is the doing.  
Fame and Reward but wait upon thine Art;  
Which yet deserves that in this Forward going,  
Thy Fortunes may even-balance thy Desert.  
But Fortune's base, and sells the Wages due  
To Worth, unto her Favourites. 'Tis True.   

The Earth thy Ground-plot is, Geographied;  
Kings sometimes are thy Subject's peopling it.  
Thy story, History hath beautified,  
Penned by the vigour of an Homebred wit;  
Whose Art hath travelled all the World beside,  
And can of every Country well declare  
Th'Occurrents, Nature, Site, and Bounds. 'Tis Rare.   

Thus that the Earth, so young thou compassed haste:  
Is Rare, True, Much, Good, News; and my Bush Waste.   
Edw. Heylyn J. C. e soc. Int. Temp.   

A GENERAL INTRODUCTION to the following Work, containing the Creation of the World by Almighty God, and the Plantation of the same by the sons of men; the necessary use of History and Geography, as well for understanding the Affairs of the Ages past, as for converse and correspondence with the Nations present; together with a brief view of some General Praecognita which necessarily are required unto the Knowledge of each.  
WIth great both Piety and Prudence did the Apostles in their summary of the Christian faith, join our Belief in God the Father Almighty, with that clause or Article of making or Creating the Heaven and Earth. For as the name of Father doth imply making (Is not he thy father which hath made thee? saith the Prophet Moses, Deut. 32. v. 6.) so who but an Almighty Father could by his mere word, without any preexistent matter, create that goodly edifice of Heaven and Earth which we behold with so much wonder and applause. A work so full of wonder to the ancient Gentiles, that some of them made the World a God. Vis illum (i. e. Deum) mundum vocare? non falleris; as it is in Seneca: others more rationally conceiving God to be the Soul of the World, as giving animation or beginning to it. And though they erred, as well in making the World a God, as God to be the Soul of the World, yet might they very well have said as one since hath done, That the World is nothing else but God unfolded, and manifested in the Creature. Nil aliud mundus universus quam Deus explicatus, as Cusanus a late Cardinal hath it. For certainly the special motives which did induce God unto this great work, were a desire and purpose to manifest his power, to exercise his providence, and declare his goodness. Not that God needed to have made the World in regard of himself; for the World we know was made in the beginning of time, but God is infinite and eternal before all times: but that it seemed good to him to create it at last, as a thing most conducible to his praise and glory; the Heavens declaring the glory of God, and the Earth showing his handiwork, saith the Royal Psalmist. Some measuring the God of Heaven by their own affections, and finding nothing so agreeable to their own dispositions as to be in company, conceive that God being at last weary of his own solitudes, did create the World, that he might have the company of the Angels in Heaven, and make a start into the Earth (when he saw occasion) to recreate himself with the sons of men. Quae beata esse solitudo queat? What happiness (said Hortensius) can there be in solitude? To which Lactantius, Lib. 1. cap. 7. not being furnished with a better, doth return this Answer; That God cannot be said to be alone; habet enim Ministros quos vocamus Nuntios, as having the society of the Angels. But then Lactantius must suppose that the Angels were Coeternal with God himself, (which were to make all Gods, & no God at all;) or else his Answer is no Answer, as to that Objection. How much more appositely might he have thus repliyed unto Hortensius, That the supreme contentment possible to Almighty God is by reflecting on himself, and in himself contemplating his own infinite glories: which being Coeternal with himself, even from all Eternity, he needed no more company before the World was made, than he hath done since. Lactantius being himself a man of a very great reading, (though indeed a better Humanitian than Divine) could not but know those sweet delights which a man habited in learning takes in contemplation, and the good society he hath of his own dear thoughts when he is most retired from the sight of men. And if the wise Gentile could affirm so sadly, nunquam minus solum quam cum Solus esset, that he was never less alone than when he was by himself: what need can any rational man suppose in Almighty God of having more company than himself to delight himself in? If this suffice not for an answer to that needless question, What God did before he made the World; let him take that of Augustine on the like occasion: who being troubled with the like curious and impertinent Caption, is said to have returned this Answer, fabricasse inferos curiosis, that he made Hell for all such troublesome and idle Questionists. Which resolution of that Father is by Sabinus, a late Dutch Poet, moulded into this handsome Epigram.  
Dum Christum Lybicis Pater Augustinus in oris  
Asserit, & peragit munus in aede suum;  
Dum miranda refert populo primordia mundi,  
Esse docens verbo cuncta creata Dei;  
Impius assurgit, verbisque procacibus, Afer,  
Ergo Opifex rerum quid faciebat, ait,  
Aut quibus intentus fallebat tempora curis,  
Mundus adhuo nondum cum fabricatus erat?  
Praesul ad haec Lybicus, fabricavit tartara, dixit,  
His quos scrutari talia, ment invat.  
Which may be Englished in these words:  
When reverend Austin did in afric preach,  
And in God's House the ruder people teach,  
As he the World's Creation proved, and taught  
That God made all things by his Word, of nought:  
A saucy Swain upstarting needs would know,  
How God before that did his time bestow;  
And what to spend his thoughts upon, he had,  
When neither Heaven, nor Earth, nor Seas were made:  
To which the Father tartly thus; He than  
Made Hell for thee, and such audacious men.  
But not to spend more time in answering so vain a caption, suffice it us to know, that it pleased God at last; when it seemed best unto his infinite and eternal Wisdom, to create the World, and all things visible and invisible in the same contained. A time it had, in which it first began to be, which before was not; This Moses calls Principium, a beginning simply. In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth, in the first words of the Book of Genesis, which is all one as if he had said, the Heaven and Earth had a beginning; or that this unformed Mass or Chaos which he entitleth there by the name of heaven and earth, was the beginning of, or first draught of those several things which after were created in their proper times, that is to say, the first in order of time, because made before them, not in order of causality, as the causes of them. Coelum & terra in principio, i.e. ante omma facta sunt, saith Simon Pottius in his Scholies on S. John's Gospel: So that whether we do expound those words that the Heaven and Earth had a beginning, or that Moses by these words did mean, that out of that matter which he calls Heaven and Earth, as out of the beginning, or first matter, all things were created, it comes all to one: because it is thereby acknowledged that the first matter was created by Almighty God, and therefore of necessity to have a beginning. And to this truth we have not only the authority and consent of Scripture, but of the greatest part of the old Philosophers, guided thereto by this impossibility in nature, that any visible work, whether it be natural or artificial, should either give itself a being, or have that being which it hath from no cause precedent: For from that Principle Tully argueth very rightly in his most excellent Book de Natura Deorum, that as a man coming into a goodly house in which he found nothing but Rats and Mice, could not conceive that either the house had built itself, or had no other maker but those Rats and Mice which were nested in it; so neither can it be imagned, that either this World should be eternal, of a self-existency, or was composed by any natural Agent of what sort soever. And this is that which is more briefly and expressly said by the Apostle, viz: that every house is built by some man, but he that built all things is God, Heb. 3. v. 4. It is true, that Aristotle being a very great enquirer into the works of Nature, conceived the world to be eternal; and yet was not always constant unto that opinion. But than it is as true withal, that there was something else that inclined him to it, than a mere admiration of the works of Nature. Democritus and some others had been of opinion, that the World was made in the beginning fortuitis atomorum concursionibus, by the accidental union or conjunction of those several parcels, of which the Universe consisted; and that man himself was but voluntaria elementorum concretio, a voluntary mixture of all the elements, as Minutius hath observed out of their writings. To which absurd opinion (as it was no better) though it found a general embracement amongst many of the old Philosophers, when Aristotle knew not how to submit his most exquisite judgement, and yet was destitute of such further light as might more fully have instructed him in its true Criginall; he rather chose to grant the world to be eternal, than to be made of such ridiculous, and unsound, though eternal Atoms. Et maluit hanc pulobram mundi faciem ab aeterno esse quam aliquando ex aeterna deformitate emersisse: Valesius in his Book de Sacra Philosophia so pleads the case in his behalf; and I thank him for it, who am (I must confess) a great friend of Aristotle's, whom some account for the precursor of our Saviour Christ in rebus naturalibus, as John the Baptist was in divinis.  
Nor doth the Scripture and the light of Reason tell us only this, that the whole world had a beginning, but by the help of Scripture, and the works of some learned men, we are able to point out the time when it did begin, or to compute how many years it is precisely from the first beginning, without any notable difference in the calculation. For though it be most truly said citius inter Horologias quam Chronologias, that Clocks may sooner be agreed then Chronologers, yet most Chronologers in this point come so near one another, that the difference is scarce observable. From the beginning of the world to the Birth of Christ, in the account of Beroaldus, are 3928. years; 3945. in the computation of the Genevians; 3960. in the esteem of Luther, and 3963. in the calculation of Melanchthon, between whom and Beroaldus (being the least and the greatest) there is but 35. years' difference, which in so long a course of time can be no great matter: Now if unto the calculation made by Beroaldus, which I conceive to be the truest, we add 1648. since the Birth of Christ, the total of the time since the world's creation will be 5576. years, neither more nor less. A thing which I the rather have insisted on, because that from this Epoch or Aera of the World's creation, we shall compute the times of such Kings and Princes, as reigned and flourished in the world before the Incarnation of our Lord and Saviour.  
It being then resolved as a thing undoubted, that God made the World, and that he made it in such time as himself best pleased; let us next look upon the matter and the method which it pleased the Divine Majesty to make use of in this wondrous work.  
First, for the matter, out of which all things were created, I take it, as before was said, to be that which Moses in the first words of Genesis calls the Heaven and the Earth, because they were so in potentia; but after telleth us more explicitly, that that which he calleth Earth, was inanis et vacua, without form and void; and that which he called Heaven was but an overcast of darkness, or tenebrae super faciem Abyssi, as the vulgar reads it: Of which Chaos or confused Mass we thus read in Ovid, who questionless had herein consulted with the works of Moses, being before his time communicated to the learned Gentiles:  
Ante mare & terras & quod tegit omnia Coelum  
Vnus erat toto naturae vultus in Orb,  
Quem dixere Chaos, rudis indigestaque moles,  
Nec quicquam nisi pondus iners, congestaque eodem  
Non benc junctarum discordia semina rerum, etc.  
Which I shall English from G. Sandys with some little change.  
Before the Earth, the Sea, and Heaven were framed,  
One face had nature, which they Chaos named;  
An indigested lump, a barren load,  
Where jarring seeds of things ill-joyned abode:  
No Sun as yet with light the world adorns,  
Nor new Moon had repaired her waning horns:  
Nor hung the self-poized Earth in thin Air placed,  
Nor had the Ocean the vast Shores embraced;  
Earth, Sea, and Air, all mixed: the Earth unstable,  
The Air was dark, the Sea unnavigable.  
No certain form to any one assigned,  
This that resists: For in one body joined  
The cold and hot, the dry and humid fight,  
The soft and hard, the heavy with the light.  
Out of this Chaos, or first matter, did God raise the world, according to those several patts and lineaments which we see it in, not as out of any pre-existent matter which was made before, and had not God for the Author or first Maker of it; but as the first preparatory matter which himself had made, including in the same potentially both the form and matter of the whole Creation, except the soul of man only which God breathed into him: And therefore it is truly said, that God made all things out of nothing; not out of nothing as the matter out of which it was made, for than that nothing must be something, but as the terminus à quo, in giving them a real and corporal being which before they had not, and did then first begin to have by the mere force and efficacy of his powerful Word. And though it be a Maxim in the Schools of Philosophy, Ex nihilo nil fit, that nothing can be made of nothing, that every thing which hath a being doth require some matter, which must be pre-existent to it; yet this must either be condemned for erroneous Doctrine in the Chair of Divinity, or else be limited and restrained to Natural agents, which cannot go beyond the sphere of their own activity. Invisible and supernatural Agents are not tied to Rules, no not in the production of the works of Nature, though Nature constituted and established in a certain course, work every thing by line and measure as a certain Rule: And so it was with God in the World's Creation; he did not only make the world, but he made it out of nothing, by his Word alone: Dixit et facta sunt, he spoke the word and they were made, saith the royal Psalmist, Ps. 33. v. 9 There went no greater pains nor matter to the whole Creation, but a Dixit Deus: And this not only said by Moses, but by David too, Verbo Domini firmati sunt Coeli, & spiritu Oris ejus omnis virtus eorum, v. 6. i.e. by the Word of the Lord were the heavens made, and all the Hosts thereof by the breath of his mouth. In which it is to be observed, that though the Creation of the World be generally ascribed to God the Father, yet both the Son and the Holy Ghost had their parts therein; Verbo Domini, by the Word of the Lord were the Heavens made, saith the Prophet David: In the beginning was the Word; all things were made by him, and without him was nothing made, saith S. john the Apostle. The Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters, saith Moses in the Book of the Law: Et spiritu oris eius, and by the breath (or Spirit) of his mouth were all the Hosts of Heaven created, saith David in the Book of Psalms. Made by his Word, and yet not made together in one instant of time. In the first day he laid the foundation, and no more; in the five next he raised the building: and this he did, to teach us men deliberation in our words and actions: and to set forth withal unto us both his Power and Wisdom. His Power he manifested in the Method of the whole Creation, in that he did produce what effects he pleased without the help of natural causes: as giving Light unto the World before he had created either Sun or Moon; making the Earth fruitful, and to bring forth plants, without the influence or motion of the Heavenly bodies. And for his Wisdom he expressed it in as high a degree, in that he did not create the very Beasts of the field before he had provided them of fodder and sufficient herbage; nor made man after his own Image, before he had finished all the rest of his works, fitted his house, and furnished it with all things necessary both for life and pleasures.  
But all things being fitted and prepared for him, at last comes Man into the world; and he doth make his entrance with a greater pomp than any of the rest of the Creatures which were before him. They came in with no other Ceremony than a Dixit Deus: but in the workmanship of Man there was a Consultation held by the blessed Trinity: It is there, Faciamus Hominem, let us make a Man; each Person contributing somewhat (as it were) to his composition. For God the Father as the chief Workman, or principal Agent, gave him form and feature, in which he did imprint his own heavenly image. The Son, who is the living and eternal Word, gave him voice or speech, that so he might be able to set forth God's praises. The Holy Ghost, the Lord and giver of life, (as the Nicene Fathers truly call him) breathing into his nostrils the breath of life, whereby he became a living Spirit. In this one Creature was amassed whatever thing was excellent in the whole Creation; the quantity or substance of Inanimate creatures, the life of Plants, the sense of Beasts, and the understanding of Angels. In this one Creature did God show the excellency of his power and wisdom, in printing on him his own Image, and giving him Dominion over all the works of his hands; which Image of God they look for in a very wrong place, who hope to find it in man's Body, though of a gallant composition and erected structure. The Heathen Orator was able in this point to inform some erroneous Christians, Ad Divinam imaginem propius accedit humana virtus quam figura, Man doth approach more near to the Image of God in the endowments of his Mind, than in the structure of his body, as divinely Cicero. And as for that Dominion which God gave him over the works of his hands, the Patent is at large laid down in the first of Genesis. For God no sooner said, Faciamus Hominem, let us make man after our own Image, but presently he adds this Charter of Supreme Authority, And let him have dominion over the fish of the Sea, and over the fowls of the Air, and over the cattle, and over all the Earth. A more particular explication of those several points, wherein that Image and this Power do consist especially, I shall not take upon me or endeavour now, as being not of this place and purpose: Which only is to show, that as man in the very act of his Creation participated more of the Divine Image, than all other Creatures; so was he by God's special grant enfeoffed with a larger power than any of the rest could pretend unto. Man, though made lower than the Angels, is in this above them, that all the Creatures of the World were made to be his servants, and to attend upon his pleasure. And yet this great and mighty Prince, this general Lord of all the World, and the Creatures in it (setting aside the dignity of his first Creation) doth come into the world in a worse condition than any of the Creatures which were made to serve him, naked, and impotent, and speechless, without the use of reason; neither of power to help himself, or ask help of others. Whereof Lactantius in my mind gives a very good reason, who telleth us, that God sends man into the world, nudum & intermem, naked, and weak, and undefenced against all violences and dangers; whereas all Creatures else, munita indumentis naturalibus & armata sunt, are naturally both armed and clothed, and able to relieve themselves. And this he doth unto this end, that man being naturally destitute of those outward helps, might make use of his inward faculties of judgement, wit and understanding, in furnishing himself with that which he wants by nature. For hereunto the first original of all Manufactures and mechanic Arts is to be referred, as is most plain and evident from the Book of God; in which we see, that presently upon the procreation of mankind, Abel betook himself unto keeping sheep, and Cain to husbandry; jubal to handle the Harp, Organ, and such Musical Instruments; and Tubal-Cain to work upon brass and iron, two metals very necessary to most kind of Trades. The like may be supposed in all other mysteries and Arts of living, though there be no express mention of them in those early days, except it be the Art of building, or the Carpenter's Trade, which no question is as old as any, as by the building of Cain's City, and Noah's Ark is most clearly evidenced. God made the world, and fitted it with all things necessary for the life of man, leaving man to provide himself of such Additions, as rather serve for comforts and conveniencies in the way of his living, than the necessities of his life.  
Here than we have the works of God, and the works of Men to be considered in pursuit of our present Argument. The works of God, in shadowing the Earth with Trees and Forests, interlacing it with Crystal streams and capacious Rivers, enriching it with fruitful and delicious Vales, adorning it with lofty Mountains, and stocking both the Hills and Vales with all sorts of cattle. But nothing more sets forth the Power and Wisdom of Almighty God, as it relates to these particulars, than that most admirable intermixture of Want with Plenty, whereby he hath united all the parts of the World in a continual Trassique and Commerce with one another; some Countries being destitute of those Commodities with which others abound, and being plentiful in those which the others want. Insomuch that as in the Body of man, that Microsm, or little World, the Head cannot say that it hath no need of the Foot, nor the Foot of the Hand, nor other members of the rest: so neither in the Body of the great World, can Europe say to Asia, or Spain to England, I have no need of your Commodities, or am not wanting in those things whereof thou boastest an abundance. Some thing there is in every Country, which may be spared to supply the defect of others, and are accordingly vented in the way of Merchandise: Of which, thus Du Bartas in his Colonies.  
Hence come our Sugars from Canary Isles.  
From Candie Currans, Muscadels, and Oils.  
From the Moluccoes, Spices; Balsamum  
From Egypt; Odours from Arabia come.  
From India Gums, rich Drugs and Ivory.  
From Syria Mummy; black, red Ebony  
From burning Chus; from Peru Pearls and Gold.  
From Russia Furs to keep the rich from cold.  
From Florence Silks; from Spain Fruit, Saffron, Sacks.  
From Danemark Amber, Cordage, Firs, and Flax.  
From France and Flanders Linen, Woad, and Wine.  
From Holland Hops; Horse from the banks of Rhine.  
From England Wool. All lands, as God distributes,  
To the World's treasure pay their sundry tributes.  
This, as Dn-Bartas speaks of the present times, so questionless the same, or the like Commerce held good in the first Ages of the World's Creation; God furnishing all Countries from the first beginning with some Staple-commodities for the benefit of themselves and others; for the maintaining of that intercourse between Nation and Nation, which makes them link the closer in the bonds of Amity. And to this end also serve those several Manufactures wherewith some Countries do abound in respect of others, but looked on in the present Book as the works of men. And of this kind also are there several Polities and forms of Government: For though all Magistracy in itself be from God originally, and that the Monarchical form comes nearest to the Government used by God himself; yet being that some Polities are merely but humane inventions, and that even Monarchy itself is founded on the consent of men, explicitly or implicitly required unto it; All Government or Magistracy is called an Ordinance of man in holy Scripture. 1 Pet. 11. v. 13. But those particular Works of men which are the most considerable part of our present subject, are Castles, Towns, and Cities of most eminent note; which thrive and prosper in the World according as they do partake of those Conveniencies which conduce most to their Magnificence and Greatness. Of these Boterus gives us many (relation being had to the time he lived in) but of those many we shall touch upon the principal only, passing by those of lesser note, as pleasantness of Site, fruitfulness of Soil, salubrity of Air, and such like obvious Observations. First then, there is required to the Magnificence and Splendour of Cities, a Navigable River, or some such easy passage by Sea, which will bring thither a continual concourse and trade of Merchants; as at Venice, London, Amsterdam. Secondly, some Staple-Manufactures or Commodities, which will draw the like resort of Merchants, though the conveniency of Sea or Rivers invite them not; as in Nurenberg in Germany, a dry Town, but mightily Traded. Thirdly, the Palace of the Prince: For ubi Imperator, ibi Roma, where the Court is, there will be a continual confluence of Nobles, Gentry, Merchants, and all sorts of Trades: And by this means Madrid, not long since a poor beggarly Village, is grown the most populous City in all Spain. Fourthly, the Residence of the Nobility, beautifieth a City with stately and magnificent Buildings; which makes the Cities of Italy so much excel ours in England, their Nobles dwelling in the Cities, and ours for the most part in their Countrie-houses. Fifthly, the Seats, or Tribunals of Justice, on which both Advocates and Clients are to give attendance; as in the Parliamentary Cities in France, and Spires in Germany. Sixtly, Universities and Schools of Learning, to which the Youth from all parts are to make resort; which hath been long the chief cause of the flourishing of Oxford, Cambridge, Bononia in Italy, and other Cities of good note beyond the Seas. Seventhly, Immunity from Tolls and Taxes; most men being most desirous to inhabit there, where their Income will be greatest, their Privileges largest, and their Disbursements lest: So Naples, Florence, Venice, having been desolated by Plagues, were again suddenly repeopled by granting large Immunities to all comers-in. And last of all, the opinion of Sanctity, either for the Relics of Saints, or some noted Shrines, or the residence of some Famons' man, or the Seat of Religion, is not the least Adamant which draws people to it, to the great enriching of some Cities: And of this, Rome itself can give us two most pregnant evidences, the one in reference to the Popes, and these latter times, that famous Town, not otherwise subsisting now, than by the constant residence of the Popes and Cardinals; whose absence while the Papal Sea was kept at Avignon, had made it overgrown with Briars and Brambles, and buried it almost in its own sad ruins. The other, in the person of Titus Livius the Historian, to see which man there came so many from the Coasts of France and Spam, that Saint Hierome elegantly saith, Quos ad suis contemplationem Roma non traxerat, unius hujus hominis fama perduxit; qui jam nrbem tantam ingressi, aliud extra Urbem quaererent.  
Such are the causes of the Greatness and Magnificence of Cities, when they are once built; none of all which might possibly be looked at by the first builders of Cities, I mean by Cain before the Flood, and by Nimrod after it; who aimed more at the love of Empire, and self-preservation, than at the general good of Mankind, or the particular wealth of those amongst whom they lived. Of Cain it is affirmed expressly in the Book of God, That being possessed with this fear, that every one that found him would lay hands upon him and slay him, in revenge of the blood of Abel; He builded a City, and called it by the name of his son Enoch. Gen. 4. 17. Builded a City? For what reason? To fortify and secure himself against all revenge, as the Text doth intimate; or thereby to oppress his Neighbours, as josephus witnesseth. Neither was thi● the only City of the first Ages, though none but this be mentioned in the Book of God. And that which the Scripture saith of Jubal, that he was the Father of such as dwell in Tents, and of such as have cattle; that is to say, he was the first of those which lived upon Pasturage, and followed their cartel up and down with their movable Tents, not having any certain home or habitations, as the wild Arabs now, and the ancient Nomads; Is proof sufficient, that the residue of all Mankind lived a more civil kind of life in their Towns and Villages. And if Pomponius Mela be of any credit (as in these things, I think, he is) he will inform us, that the City of joppa was built before the Flood; that the King thereof was named Cepha; and that his name, and the name of his Brother Phineas, together with the Grounds and Principles of their Religion, were found graven upon certain Altars of stone. But whether this be so, or not, certain it is, that as well Canaan in the West, whereon joppa stood, as the Land of Nod on the East side of Paradise, where Cain built his City, were peopled long before the Flood; and so were most of the other parts of the World besides: And if well peopled in all, or most parts thereof, no doubt but they had Villages and Towns, yea and Cities too, as well for necessary habitation, as for strength and safety. Now that the World was throughly peopled before the Flood, seems clear to me by that great and universal Deluge, which God was pleased to bring upon the Face of all the earth: For what need all the Earth be buried in that Sea of waters, if all the Earth had not been peopled, and all the people of it guilty of oppression in the sight of God? Besides, it is expressly said in the Holy Scripture, that in the time of Abraham, who lived about 350 years after the Flood, in the largest Account, and not 300 in the shortest, there were Kings of Egypt, and of the Philistims, Kings of the Canaanites, of Shinaar, Elasar, Ellan, and of the Nations, who questionless had their Lands well peopled; that both Chaldea, and Mesopotamia, in the time of Abraham, had their several Cities, as Vr in the one, and Haran, or Charan in the other; and that Damascus the chief City of Syria was then founded also: Not to say any thing of the building of Babel, Erech, Accad, and Chalneh in the land of Shinar (or Babylonia) nor of the building of Ninive, Resan, Rehoboth, and Chalah in the land of Assyria, mention whereof is made in the 10 of Genesis. And it is found in good and credible Authors, that Ninus the third Assyrian Monarch (who lived before the birth of Abraham) having subdued the Kings of Media and Armenia, invaded Bactria with an Army of 1700000 Foot, and 200000 Horse, and 10600 armed Charlots, and was encountered by Zoroaster the King thereof with an Army of four hundred thousand. The credibility whereof if it were disputed, might be affirmed from the like numerous Army brought by Xerxes against the Greeks, though in times long after following. And if we will give credit unto Diodorus Sioulus, who voucheth stesias' for his Author, Semiramis the Wife of Ninus invaded India with an Army of three Millions of men, and upwards; and yet was over-matched, and slain by an Indian King. If then within the space of 400 years, we find the Eastern parts to be so well planted, so many Kings possessed of their Regal Thrones, and many of them able to impress such infinite Armies; Why may we not conclude, that in the course of 1656 years (for so long it was from the Creation to the Flood) the whole World was inhabited and planted in all parts thereof; especially considering the long lives of men, amounting to 800, or 900 years, and consequently the long time they had to apply themselves to the Act of Generation. And though I have no certain ground for it in the Book of God, yet I am apt enough to be of Mercators' opinion; who placing the 16 Dynasty of the Kings of Egypt (where Eusebius begins to calculate the Egytian times) at the first planting of that Country by the Sons of Noah, reckoneth the former fifteen to have been before the Flood, and to reach very near the times of the first Creation. That Misraim the Son of Ham was possessed of Egypt within two hundred years after the Flood, is a truth undoubted. Nor see I any cause to doubt, but that in the like space of time from the first Creation, it might be planted also by the sons of Adam; considering, as we ought to do, that in the infancy of the World, when the bodies of men were most perfect, and of greatest vigour, they observed no degree of Kindred or Consanguinity, nor tied themselves so strictly to one woman as they should have done. And for the names of all the Kings of those several Dynasties, either they might be left engraven upon Pillars, such as that of Seth, or upon Altars of stone, as in those of joppa; or Misraim might have them by tradition from the hands of Noah, and so deliver them by tale unto his posterity: the Egyptians being generally very good Heralds, and standing very much on their own Antiquity. And if this may be said of Egypt (as for my part I see no reason but it may) then may the like be said of all Countries else, that they had their several Kings and Rulers, and set forms of Government: The Fathers of Families in those times having the command and sovereignty over all that descended of them. Nor make I any question of it, but they had several Languages and forms of Speech, at least as to the Dialect and pronunciation, although the Radicals of the Language might remain the same: But being there are no Remainders of this first Plantation (unless we will give credit to some jewish Fablers, who tell us of some Giants who saved themselves upon Mount Zion; or that of Masius Damascenus, who speaks of some that saved themselves on an high Hill called Baris, in some part of Armenia) I shall the less insist upon it: Nor had I stood so long upon these first Ages, which Moses passeth over with so short a Narrative, but that it is affirmed by Pererius, a right learned Jesuit, that neither Egypt, nor Assyria, nor the rest of the World was planted and inhabited before the Flood; and that upon no stronger reason, for aught I can find, but that it is affirmed in the last words of the tenth of Genesis, That, by these (that is to say, by the posterity of the Sons of Noah) were the Nations divided in the Earth after the Flood. Out of which words he thus concludeth, Quo significatur talem divisionem non fuisse ante diluviu●; By which it doth appear (saith he) that in the times before the Flood was no such division.  
'Tis true, that this division of the world by the Sons of Noah hath the best evidence in Scripture; because there is express Text for it, which is not for the first Plantations: But looking on the great increase of mankind before the flood, that saying of Berosus will prove tantamont to a Text of Scripture, Ad comparandas novas sedes necessitatem compulisse, that they were driven then by necessity to seek new dwellings; the necessity of providing victuals for themselves and their families, being as strong a motive unto such dispersions, as the Confusion of Tongues was afterwards: The difference is, that that which such necessity would have done in long tract of time, the confusion of Tongues did in an instant: not only making those proud Builders to give over the finishing of the Tower which they had begun, but to unite themselves with such whose language came most near to that which themselves were masters of. It was high time, no question, to desist from this proud attempt, when the Labourer understood not what the Workman called for, but brought him things quite contrary to his expectation. But because some Plantations had no reference to the Confusion of Tongues, but were made before it, or on the sending out of such Colonies as were nearest to the place where the Ark did rest; I think it not amiss to resolve that question touching the resting of the Ark, on which the Plantations of the East have so great dependence. All that the Scripture telleth us of it, is, that the Ark rested on the Mountains of Ararat; but where those Mountains are, that it telleth us not: I know josephus, and some other, of more eminent note, (but such as ground themselves upon his authority) affirm those Mountains of Ararat to be the hills of Armenia, which they do chiefly on these Reasons: First, because Armenia is called Ararat in the Book of God, as it is confessedly. And secondly, because of an old Tradition, countenanced by Berosus, and some others of the ancient Writers, cited by josephus, affirming, that on the Gordiaean Mountains in Armenia Major, some of the Relics of the Ark were remaining in their times, and used as a preservative against enchantments: Which notwithstanding I incline rather to the opinion of Goropius Becanus, (who amongst many strange whimsies broached some notable truths) by whom the Ark is said to rest on the top of Mount Caucasus in the Confines of Tartary, Persia, and India. His Arguments are many, but I look on two as of greatest consequence: the first whereof is grounded upon evident reason; the second on plain Text of Scripture. That which is grounded upon reason, is the exceeding populosity of those Eastern Countries, into which none of those by whom the world was planted after the Confusion of Languages, are yet reported to have travailed with their several Colonies, by any who have took most pains in this discovery. Those infinite numbers which Staurobates, one (and but one of many) of the Kings of the Indians, brought into the field against Semiramis; and the vast Army of Zoroaster the King of Bactria, conducted out of that one Province against Ninus; are proof enough, that those Countries were of an elder Plantation, than to be a second or third Castling of some other Swarm settled in Persia, or Assyria, after the Confusion: For Ninus who was the Husband of Semiramis, was but the Grandchild of Nimrod; and I must needs look upon it, as a thing impossible, that those vast Armies which Semiramis was able to raise out of all her Dominions, should be encountered by one King with an equal force, and that of his own Subjects only; If that one King, and those his Subjects had been some late Colony of those new Plantations, and not possessed of a Country peopled and inhabited before that Confusion. Nor was it but upon some good ground, that the Scythians (who inhabited on the North of Mount Caucasus) were generally esteemed the most ancient Nation in the World; and carried it away from the Egyptians, Phrygians, and all other Competitors, with this public Verdict, Scytharum gens semper antiquissima; which ground could be no other, but the neighbourhood of the Ark unto them (though perhaps that ground long since forgotten, was not stood upon) and the dwelling of Noah and hi● children near the place of the Ark, till numbers, and necessity compelled them to enlarge their border. And in the enlarging of their Bo●der●▪ I shall make no question, but that such parts as lay ne●rest were peopled and possessed before those which lay furthest off; according to the method of Plantations in all Ages since. This, though it be to me a convincing Argument, yet it falls short of that which comes from the Text itself, both in authority and weight; where it is said of the Heads of those several Families which afterwards joined together in the building of Babel, that, As they went from the East, they found a Plain in the land of Shinaar, and there they abode. Gen. 11. v. 2. If then they came from the East to the land of Shinaar, as the Text saith plainly that they did, it might well be that they came from those parts of Asia, on the South of Caucasus, which lie East of Shinaar, though somewhat bending to the North; impossible they should come from the Gordiaean Mountains in the greater Armenia (supposed to be the Hills which the Ark did rest on) which lie not only full North of Shinaar, but many degrees unto the West: For Babylonia, or Shinaar, is situate in the Latitude of 35, and the Longitude of 79, and 80. the Latitude of the Gordiaean Mountains in 41, and their Longitude in 75. By which Account those Mountains are 6 Degrees more Northwards, and 5 Degrees more Westwards than the Land of Shinaar; by no means to be reckoned on the East of that valley, except we make Moses (whose hand God guided in his Books) to speak Cod knows what, or in plain terms, to speak plain non sense. And though this Scripture be so clear, that it needs no Commentary, yet the perplexities I find amongst those of the other opinion, in shifting out of the author; tie of so plain a Text, do add in my conceit some moment and weight unto it. For some will have the Mountains of Ararat to be indeed on the North of the Land of Shinaar, but with some bending towards the East; which were it true, as nothing is more truly false, Moses had never told us that they came from the East, but from some Countries of the North, which lay towards the East. Others will have a double progress of the Heads of their several Families: First, from the Mountains of Ararat, or the Plains of Armenia, to the Fields of Assyria, and Susiana; And secondly, from thence to the land of Shinaar. But of this first journey there is ne gry quidem, nor so much as any one syllable in all the Scripture; besides the needlesness of making them go so far about, and to cross over the great Rivers Euphrates and Tigris; whereas they had a shorter, and an easier passage. Capellus, singular by himself, quarrelleth with the Translation (received without dispute by all other Critics) and will not have the Hebrew Kedem to be rendered East, but to signify that Region, whatsoever it was, which was inhabited by Kedem the son of Ishmael, of whom we find mention Gen. 25. 15. But then besides his quarrel with all other Translations, he supposeth a former progress from the Mountains of Ararat to that land of Kedem; and consequently falleth into a part of the Error before refelled. Bochartus finding (if not fancying) that the Assyrians called all those parts of their Empire beyond Tigris, the Eastern, and those on this side of it, the Western; Would thence conclude, that these Heads may be said by Moses to have come from the East, because they came from one of the Eastern Provinces of the Assyrian Empire. Every way faulty in this point: For besides that, the greatest part of Armenia lieth on the North of Tigris, and the least part of it on the West, and therefore not within the compass of the Eastern Provinces; and that Bochartus hath not proved (nor indeed can prove) that this division was in use in the time of Moses; We may as rationally conclude, and with less absurdity, that the first Inhabitants of Britain, might have been said by Ammianus Marcellinus, or any Writer of that time, to come out of the West (though he well knew they came from Gaul, which is plainly East of it) because Gaul in his time was a Province of the West parts of the Empire. Having thus fortified our opinion both with Scripture and Reason, the Arguments produced against us will be easily answered. For though Armenia be granted to be the Country of Ararat; yet the Mountains of Ararat may extend beyond the Country. That mighty Ridge of Mountains which beginning in Asia the less run as far as India (by the Ancients commonly called Mount Taurus) might very well be called by Moses the Mountains of Ararat, because that was the first Country of the greater Asia by which they passed; and where they were of greater note than they had been formerly. Just as the Adriatic Sea took that name from Adria, than the chief Port of it, though it washed many Shores besides: Or as some Hills with us are called Malvern Hils, because they are highest near that Village, though they extend themselves into other Lordships. And as for the Authority of Tradition, and the Testimony of humane Writers, which (as before was said) are brought in for an help, touching some Relics of the Ark to be seen on the Gordiaean Mountains, I look upon it as an Argument of no weight at all. For first, Berosus (followed herein by all the rest) reports it only on the ground of uncertain hear-say; which is a weak staff for so heavy a cause to rely upon. Secondly, to balance the authority of Berosus (if of any credit in this case) we have the testimony and authority of Porcius Cato, as ancient almost as he, affirming positively, in Scythia Saga renatum esse mortale genus, that Mankind was repaired in that part of Scythia, which after was possessed by the Sacans: And they, we know, dwelled in those parts of Scythia which lay next to Bactria, a Province of the Persian Empire, and not far from the branches of Mount Caucasus. And Thirdly, unto one Tradition to oppose another; those of Mount Caucasus do aver, that a large Vineyard in Margiana, near the foot of that Mountain, was of Noah's Plantation: Of which we shall speak more when we come to Tartary.  
It is now time I should go forwards with the Builders of Babel, and their wide dispersions; for whom it was high time to consort themselves with such as they could understand; the necessity of discourse and conference on that fatal Accident, making them lay aside their old acquaintances, and join themselves to others of their own new Language. I know that many learned men, according to the number of names laid down in the tenth of Gen. being 70, have made so many Languages to have been spoken upon that Confusion: And that of those, 26 being the Posterity of Sem, dispersed themselves about Asia the greater; 30 others of the loins of Cham, peopled afric, Arabia and Syria; and that the 14 which remain, being the issue of Japhet, withdrew themselves towards Europe, and the lesser Asia. But this, as to the number of Languages, I take to be but a conceit, though many, more improbable, have passed for currant: It being plain, that Canaan and his Sons, eleven in all, had but one Language amongst them, which was the Hebrew, or the Language of the land of Canaan. And as for joctar and his Sons, being 13 in number, considering that he was the younger Brother of Phaleg, in whose time, this Confusion happened, it is most probable, and avowed for a certain truth, that either none of them were born, or if they were, yet they were all of them too young to have an hand in the design for the building of the Tower of Babel; and consequently could not be within the curse of confounded Languages. So, here is near a third part of the 70 to be taken off; as possibly might all the Sons of Misraim be, if it were worth the while to insist upon it. This than I take but for a fancy. And as for that, of the dispersion into the said three parts of the (then) known World, I take it to be true enough in long tract of time; but false enough, if understood of any present separation of the Sons of Noah into parts so far remote and distant from one another. For what needed any such remote Plantations be, as long as they had room enough to live one near another, and so enjoy that civil intercourse, and mutual society which the nature of Mankind doth most delight in? And therefore I conceive it to be far more probable, that they who met together for the building of Babel, joining themselves to men of the same Language with them, did first set down upon the places near the Valley of Shinaar; and from thence propagated and dispersed themselves into further Countries, as either the necessity of providing of Victuals; or seeking better and more fruitful habitations for themselves and theirs; or the desire of being out of the reach of some potent Neighbours, whose yoke they found too heavy for their necks to bear, did enforce them to it. And being so settled to their minds, the addition of a few more years brought the like necessity of sending Colonies further off, as they grew more or less populous in their generations: It being in Plantations of Men, as in that of Bees, amongst whom one Swarm sends out another, that begets a Castling, till the whole ground or Garden grow too small to hold them. For thus (to seek no further for an instance of it) the Gauls first planted Britain, the Britan's Ireland, the Irish Scotland and the Isles. Thus the Helvetians finding their old dwellings both too barren to sustain, and too narrow to contain their multitudes, angustos se fines habere arbitrantes, as in Caesar's Commentaries, intended to plant themselves in Gaul. And thus the Syrians and Phoenicians flying the dreadful sword of josuah the son of Nun, sought them out dwellings further off from the present danger, whereof we shall speak more in its proper place. On the like motives and inducements did the first people after the Flood distribute and disperse themselves into several parts, as their posterities have done since, and will do to the end of the World in all probability: Giving their own names, or some names of their own imposing, upon the Countries planted or discovered by them. And though the length, and consuming nature of time, hath either changed or worn out the names imposed by the first Adventurers, I mean the first Planters after the Flood: Yet all the Footsteps of Antiquity are not so defaced, but that some Nations and Cities have preserved the memory of their first Founders and true Parents. In the discovery whereof, as josephus in his Book of jewish Antiquities did first lead the way, and gave good light to those who have traveled in it: So a more notable proficiency hath been made therein by junius in his Notes on the tenth of Genesis, Sir Walter Ralegh in his excellent History, and lately by Bochartus a French Writer in his Book called Geographia Sacra. Out of whose learned labours, and some Animadversions of mine own, I shall here say somewhat concerning the Plantation of the World by the Sons of Noah; leaving the more exact and punctual description of it unto the History of those several Lands and Countries which were planted by them.  
First therefore to begin with the posterity of Sem, as those who fixed themselves in Asia, without wand'ring further, we find Sem to have had five sons, that is to say, Elam, Assur, Arphaxad, Lud, and Aram, of whom there is no issue on Record in holy Scripture, but only of Arphaxad and Aram: And of these two there are but four sons given to Aram, viz Uz, Hul, Gether, and Mesech, and but one to Arphaxad, which was Selah: To Selah was born Heber, to Heber, Phales', the Ancester of Abrabam, and joktan the father of those thirteen sons, whose names we shall rehearse hereafter, if occasion be. From Elam, who is first named, did descend the Elamites, a people bordering on the Medes, and therefore ofttimes joined together in the Scriptures, as, Go up, O Elam; besiege, O Media. Es. 21. v. 2. And all the Kings of Elam, all the Kings of the Medes. jer. 25. v. 25. And in the second of the Acts, Parthians, and Medes, and Elamites, march in rank and file, as being Nations bordering upon one another. The principal City of this people was called Elymais, mention whereof is made in the second of Maccab. cap. 6. v. 2. Sufficiently famous for the rich and magnificent Temple which was there consecrated to Diana. A City seated on the banks of the River Eulaeus, and neighbouring close to Susiana, which therefore is sometimes included in the name of Elam, as Dan. 8. ver. 2. I was (saith he) 〈…〉 not taken for the Province of the 〈…〉 but as it gave denomination unto all these Nations whom they after mastered 〈…〉 of Sem is Assur, of whom there is no question made amongst the Learned, but 〈…〉 was the Father of the Assyrians, called Assyres in some old Greek Writers: Not of the whole 〈◊〉 of that great and unwieldy Empire, who sometimes generally pass by the name of Assyege but of the people of Assyria strictly and properly so called, as it denotes the Country 〈…〉 (the Regal City of that Empire) which after was called Adiabene. juxta hunc Circuicum Adiabene, Assyria priscis temporibus vocata, as in Ammianus Marcellinus, lib. 33. Arphaxad comes next after Assur, and him josephus makes to be the Father of the Chaldaeans, called anciently Arphaxadae●, if he tell us true. But others tells us, and that more probably perhaps, that he planted in that part of Assyria which was first called Arphaxitis, afterwards Arrapachitis; by which name it occurreth in the Tables of Ptolemy. Lud the fourth son is generally said to be the Father of the Lydians, a people of Asia the less; the names of Lud, and Lydi (or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as the Grecians call them) being much alike. And it is possible enough that some of the posterity of this Lud might afterwards settle in those parts, and call the Country by the name of Lud their common Ancestor; as the posterity of Abraham took unto themselves the name of Hebrews from Heber, one of the Progenitors of their father Abraham. But that Lud should in person go so far from the rest of the sons of Sem, I cannot easily imagine. For Aram the fifth and last (as they stand in order of the Text) sets himself down close by his Brethren, in the Land of Syria, which in the Hebrew is called Aram, and from thence the name of Aramites was given to the Inhabitants of it. Of which, and of the several Provinces which were hence denominated, we shall hereafter speak more fully when we come to Syria. Only take now this testimony and acknowledgement from the pen of Strabo, Quos nos Syros vocamus, ipsi Sylli Aramenios' & Arameos vocant. Those (saith he) which we now call Syrians, do call themselves Arameans, or Aramentans. In, and about the same parts did the four Sons of Aram set themselves and their Families; Uz in that part of Syria, which is called Syria Damascena, or Aram Dammesek; the building of the great City of Damascus being generally ascribed unto him; and the Land of Uz, bordering South upon Damascus, taking denomination from him. The like did Hul, or Chul, the next son of Aram, whom both Josephus and St. Hierome settle in Armenia, or Aramenia, as in Strabo: And that not improbably, considering that there is a Region in Armenia, which Stephanus calls Cholobetene; and divers Cities in that tract, which still preserve the Radicals of Hul, or Chul, as Cholus, Cholnata, Cholimna, Colsa, and Colana, whereof mention is made in the Tables of Ptolemy. For Gether, the third son of Aram, it is not yet agreed on where to find his dwelling. Josephus, contrary to all reason, placeth him in Bactria; and Mercer with as little, in Caria, a Province of the lesser Asia, and Acarnania of Greece. Junius sets him down in the Province of Cassiotis, and Seleucis, near his Father Aram, where Ptolemy placeth Gindarus, and the Nation called by Pliny Gindareni: Bochartus on the banks of the River Centrites, which divides Armenia from the Carduchi, as it is in Xenophon. Which River, if it were called originally Getri, as he conjectureth it might be, the controversy were at an end. But being that we find in Ptolemy, a City of Albania (which bordererh on Armenia) called Getara, and a River of the same Country called Getras; I see no cause why we should seek further for the seat of Gether; though the Greek Copies (more subject to corruption in the times of ignorance, than the Latin were) instead of Getara read Gagara. But if this be too far to set him, we shall find Master or Mesch, the last Son, planted nearer hand, even in the Northern part of Syria, towards Mesopotamia, near the Hill called Masius: at the foot whereof there is a people, which Stephanus calls Masieni, and thereabouts a River, which in Xenophon is named Masca. Both which do evidently declare from what root they come.  
Come we next to the second branch of the house of Sem, derived from Arphaxad; whom we left settled in the Region of Arrapachitis, in, or near Assyria. Not far from which in Susiana, a Province of the Persian Empire, there is a City of chief note called Sela; mention of which is made both in Ptolemy's Tables, and the 23 Book of Ammianus Marcell nus. Add unto this the authority of Eustathius Antiochenus, who briefly thus, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, The People of Susiana came from Sala. But this, as I conceive, must be understood only of that part of this people, which lived in and about the City of Sela, and not of the whole Nation of the Susians, or Susiani, which borrowed their nomination from another root. To Sela was born Heber, from whom the people of the Hebraei, or Hebrews do derive their name: And to him Phaleg his firstborn, who in all probability gave name to the Town called Phalga, situate on the River Euphrates, not far from Seleucia: Mention whereof is made by Stephanus in his Book de Urbibus, and by Ptolemy in his Geography; where it is placed right on the banks of Euphrates, where the River Chaboras mingles waters with it; but there corruptly called Pharga instead of Phalga.  
But the great increase of Sems' posterity came by Jocktan, the second Son of Eber, the Father of no fewer than thirteen Sons, whose names are on record in the tenth of Genesis, where it is said, that their dwelling was from Mesha, as thou goest to Sephar, a Mount in the East. And here I must crave leave to differ from Bochartus, who hath thronged Jocktan and his Sons into a little corner of Arabia Felix, where I can find no room for them, and less reason to place them. For being that Chus the son of Cham, and the Chiefs of his posterity, eight in number, were planted in Arabia, as himself confesseth, it must needs be, that they had spread themselves over all the Country before any of the sons of Jocktan were of age sufficient to be the Fathers of Families, and lead Colonies thither. Jocktan is credibly supposed not to have been born when such of Noah's posterity as are mentioned Gen. 10. dispersed themselves into new Plantations; but i● is evident from the Text, that none of his children were then born, if their Father were. And this Bochartus doh acknowledge in two several places. First, granting that neither Phaleg, nor Jocktan were present at the building of Babel, multo minus Jocktanis filii post aliquo● annos geniti; much less the Sons of Joktan begot many years after; Lib. 1. cap. 16. And Secondly, affirming that Jocktan and his children came not within the curse of Confounded Languages, quia nondum erant geniti, because then unborn, Cap. 15. Hereupon I conclude it to be very improbable, that Jocktan and his children should find room in the best parts of Arabia Felix, which Chus and his posterity had inhabited so long before. And as it is improbable that the Sons of Chus would plant themselves in the worst part of the Country for so many Ages, and leave the best and richest of it for some new Adventurers: So it is impossible that the Sons of Jocktan should either be removed so far from the rest of the house of Arphaxad, who were all planted on the East of the River Tigris, as was before showed; or that they should be able, had they been so minded, to break through the whole Countries of the Assyrians, Chusites, and other Nations, to come unto the utmost corners of Arabia Felix. He that believes they did, or could, must have a stronger Faith than mine; but it shall never conduce any thing to his justification. Nor am I moved at all with that which seems to me to be his weightiest Argument, namely, that the Arabians, particularly Joseph Been Abdallatif, and Mahomet Ben Jacob, two of their chief Writers affirm, that Jocktan was the Founder of their Tongue and Nation; no more than I am woved to think that the Saracens are derived from Sara the Wife, and not from Hagar the Concubine and servant of Abraham; because that people so report it for their greater glory.  
And for the several Nations of Arabia Felix, whose original he ascribes to the sons of Jocktan, I see so many transpositions of Syllables, alterations even of Radical Letters, such and so many wrested Originations, as by the like liberty of making quidlibet ex quolibet, it were no difficult matter to find place for them in any Country whatsoever; For how extorted and unnatural are the derivations of the Allumaeotae from Almodad, of the Manitae from Abimail, of the Jobaritae from Jobab? How impossible is it that Jarach should give name to the Isle which Prolomie calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Insula jeracum, or Accipitrum, as the Latin hath it, that is to say, the Isle of Hawks, from the abundance of Hawks which are therein bred: There being another Island of the same name near unto Sardinia (so called for the self same reason) and a Town called jerax in Hammoniaca a Region of Egypt, to which Jarach might as well lay claim (if that would carry it) as to this jeracum, or Accipitrum in the Gulf of Arabia? How improbable that Ophir should give name to Urphire, a poor Isle of the Red Sea, Obal to Sinus Avalites in Aethiopia, on the other side of that Gulf? Or that Dicla must be fixed in Arabia, for no other reason, but because the word signifieth a Palmtree, of which that Country yields good plenty; as if some other Countries did not yield as much? These, and some other reasons hereafter following, have made me bold to differ from that learned man in this particular, whose industry and abilities I do otherwise honour; and rather to look for Joktan and his sons in the East part of the World, where the Scriptures place them; than in the South (with reference to the Wilderness, or land of Madian, in one of which the Book of Genesis was witten) where Bochartus placeth them. Yet so far I must yield to that learned man, that some of the Descendants of Joktan in long tract of time, moved with the rarities of the place, might come from India, and plant themselves upon the Seacoasts of Arabia Felix; as the Arabians at this day moved with the wealth and trade of India, have possessed themselves of many of the Ports and pieces on the shores thereof.  
Now the Text telleth us of the Sons of Joktan, that their dwelling was from Mesha, as thou goest to Sephar, a Mount of the East; so that by these two boundaries, Mesha and Sephar, their habitation must be found. I know Bochartus would have Mesha to be Musa, a noted Port-town on the South-West of Arabia Felix; and Sephar to be the City of Saphar in the Southeast of that Country; that City giving name to some Mount adjoining. But being they both lie directly South of the place in which Moses wrote, I cannot see how this position can agree with the word of Scripture; and therefore we must look for both in some other place. And first to find out Mesha, we need go no further than Bochartus himself, who maketh Mesh, the last of the Sons of Aram, the Son of Sem (according to the general opinion of most Writers else) to be planted in the mountainous tracts of Mesopotamia, from him called Mons Masius; more of which before. And then for Sephar, which the Text calleth a Mount of the East; if it be the Southern part of Mount Imaus, by Ptolemy named Bitigo, by the Moderns Gates, extending from Mount Caucasus to the Cape Comari in the hither India, as Postellus a right learned man doth conceive it to be; We have without more difficulty found out the dwellings of the sons of Jocktan, according to the bounds laid down in Holy Scripture. But for fear this may not satisfy, for want of some Seconds to Postellus (if Truth needs a Second) we have Siphare a City of Aria, directly East from Mons Masius, or the dwellings of Mesh; both in the East parts of the World, with reference unto the place in which Moses writ: Mons Masius being placed by Ptolemy in the 74 degree of Longitude, and the 37 of Latitude; and Siphare 36 degrees more towards the East, but with no more than two degrees of Latitude superadded to it. And this agreeth to the position assigned to the sons of Joktan, by Josephus, E●sebius, and St. Hierome; the emendation of Bochartus coming in to help. It is affirmed by Josephus that the Joktamtes possessed all that Tract, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which lieth about Kophenus a River of India, together with such parts of Syria as did border near it. These words being borrowed from Josephus both by Eusebius and S. Hierome; the first instead of Syria reads Seria, and the other Jeria, but neither rightly: there being no such place in the world as Jeria; and Syria and Seria (or the Country of the Seres) lying too far off to border on Cophenus a River of India. Bochartus therefore helps them out, conceiving (I think right enough) that for Syria we should there read Aria: and withal granting, as he may, that Aria in the largest latitude and extent thereof, comprehending Paropamisus and Arachosia, extendeth as far Eastward as the River Cophenus. So that we have found out a dwelling for the Sons of Joktan, betwixt Mons Masius and Siphare, a Town of Aria: which probably might give name to some Mount adjoining, as Saphar by Bochartus is supposed to do to some of the Arabian hills bordering near unto it. And as these Situations do agree exactly with the meaning of those Ancient Writers; so is it also very suitable to the other Plantations of the Sons of Arphaxad. For this I look on as a matter out of all dispnte, that Phaleg and Joktan being both too young to go upon any new Adventures, when so many of the residue of Noah's Posterity removed toward Shinaar, kept themselves under the tuition of their Grandfather Noah; or at least wandered not from the Plantation of their Father Arphaxad, till Joktan's Sons being grown to be Fathers of Families, were forced to cast about for new habitations. And when necessity compelled them to seek new seats, I would said know, why they should think of making themselves a way to Arabia Felix, through Country's peopled and possessed a long time before; when they had Elbow-room enough on the East of Tigris, and the unpeopled Countries of some parts of India lay so near at hand.  
Nor want we as good evidence and as little forced for some of their Plantations in the Eastern parts, as Bochartus hath fancied for them in Arabia: For Almodad might probably be the Founder of Almodena, the Metropolis of Mesopotamia, not far from Mesha or Mons Masius the Western Boundary; and. Jarach of the Nation of the Arachosians inhabiting near Siphare the Eastern limit, assigned unto the Sons of Joktan. With what an easy change might Obal or Chobal be supposed to be the Father of the Cabolites of Paropamisus? Hadoram of the Orites an Indian people near unto the other? But these North-Eastern parts being peopled, or not very pleasant, how many of the Sons of Joktan shall we find in the Southern parts of India? Bochartus himself confesseth that the Land of Ophir (another of the sons of Joktan) was a part of India, but whether Sumatra, Taprobane, or Aurea Chersonesus, I dispute not here. Like evidence there is for Saba, remembrances of whose name are found in Sabalassa, one of the mouths of the River Indus, Sabana a City of the Golden Chersonese, a River in the same Tract named Sabanus, and a City called Sabe: besides the whole Nation of the Sabaei mentioned by Dionysius in his Periegesis. And though some late Critics read it Sibae instead of Sabaei, (as that there was an Indian Nation called Sibae, is confessed on all sides:) yet seeing Eustathius finds the Sabae in this Country also, I cannot see but that there should be room enough in India for both people to dwell in. For Abimail another of the Sons of Joktan we find more evident footsteps of him in the Mali or Malli an Indian people, in Maleta and Maliba two Towns of India, in Malaeus an Indian Mountain, and finally in Malaei Colon a Promontory of Aurea Chersonesus, than in the Manitae of Bochartus. For if Abimail signify the Father of the Mali, as he saith it doth, he was more like to be the Father of the Mali, commonly and literally so called, whom we find in India; than that we should be forced to look for them in the Manitae, or look for the Manitae in the house of Abimail. If Dicla must be planted in Arabia Felix for no better reason, than because the word signifieth a Palm, whereof there is plenty in that Country; I doubt not to find as many Palms to plant by amongst the Indians, as Bochartus doth among the Arabians. And finally, if Chatramis, or Chatramatitis an Arabian Region, have such resemblance to the name of Chatsarmaveth, as to take that Appellation from him, as Bochartus telleth us it did, we may conclude with equal, if not better reason, that the Chadramotitae an Indian people, seated upon the mouth of the River Indus, upon whose streams some of the residue of his Brethren had their habitations, had their first Original from that Chatsarmaveth. For Havilah or Chavilah the Ancients generally set him in the Indies also, not far from Saba and Ophir two of his Brethren: to whose authority I submit, because I find a Province in the Golden Chersonese, called the Kingdom of Ava, and thought to be so called from this very man. And I conceive the like also of the rest of the Joktamtes, whose habitations might be found in India, or near Mesh and Sephar, if one would take that liberty of Critizizing, altering and transposing letters, as Bochartus doth, only to fix them in a place where they never were. Suffice it that this short Essay may inform the Reader, that Bochartus was too confident a lover of his own opinion, where he affirms, Nec locum alium Sephar nomine, nec ulla posterorum loktan in Aria aut India vestigia jam superesse; that is to say, that there is no such place as Sephar, nor any tract or footstep of the Sons of Joktan to be found in Aria, or the Indies. The contrary whereof is so clearly evidenced.  
These were the Generations and Dispersions of the Sons of Sem, contracted in a narrower compass than either the Posterity of Cham or Japhet: of whom the first, besides the great footing which he had in Asia, did possess all Africa, and the other, besides his share in the greater Asia, filled almost all the lesser Asia, and the whole Continent of Europe with the Isles thereof, with his fruitful Progeny. And first beginning with Cham, we find him the Fath●● of sour sons, that is to say, Cush, Mizraim, Phut, and Canaan; of which only Phut the third Son hath no issue assigned him. To Chush the eldest Son were born Seba and Havilah, and Sabtah, Nimrod, Sabtecha, and Raamah, who was the Father of Sheba and Dedan. And unto Mizraim the second Son were born Ludim, and Amamim, Lebabim, Naphtuhim; Pa●hrusim, Caphtorim, and Casluhim, who was the Father of Philistim. Of Canaan and his issue we shall speak hereafter: In the mean time we will dispose of these first branches of the stock of Cham, beginning first with Chus the eldest, and so descending to the rest of this first Line. And first for Chush, though it be generally said both by the Greek and Jewish Writers, that he was the Father of the Aethiopians in the heart of Africa, yet upon better search he is found to have gone no further than Arabia, possessing himself of a good part of that which is called Petraea, and some part of Arabia Felix. For whereas Zipora the wife of Moses was daughter unto Jethro the Priest or Prince of Madian, Exod. 2. v. 16. etc. and yet is called an Aethiopian woman, in the 12. of Num. v. 1. it must needs be that by Aethiopian, in the last place, must be meant an Arabian; for Madian doubtless was a City of Arabia near unto the Red Sea, as is apparent by Josephus for the Jews, Ptolemy for the Grecians, and S. Hierome for the Latin Writers. But we shall canvas this more throughly in its proper place: the strength of reason serving for a supplement of that one main defect, which is, that there is no remainder of the name of Chus in any of the Cities, Promontories, Hills or Rivers of all that Country, by which his planting there might be made more evident. Seba, the eldest Son of Chus, sets himself down on the shores of the Red Sea, as near his Father as he could, becoming the Original of the great and wealthy Nation of the Sabaeans; the so much celebrated City of Saba, memorable for abundance of the best Frankincense, being their Metropolis or head City. A Nation seated in the most Southern part of this Peninsula, subject in Solomon's time to that famous Lady called in the old Testament from her Country, the Queen of Sheba, and in the new Testament from the situation of it, the Queen of the South: the holy Spirit in both places giving her an ample and remarkable testimony.  
For Havilah or Chavilah the second of the Sons of Chus, most probable it is that he possessed himself of that part of Arabia which lay nearest unto Babylonia, and that he gave name to that Land of Havilah, which the River Pison is said to encompass, Gen. 2. v. 2. Some footsteps of whose name remain in the Chaulotaei of Eratosthenes, the Chaulas● of Festus Anicnus, but more plainly in the Chavelei of Plin●e; being all three but one people, though thus diversely named, and all of them planted towards the Persian Gulf, and so to Babylon. On the same shore of the Persian Gulf, we are to look for Sabta the third son of Chus, where Ptolemy informs us of a City called Saphta, and of an Island in the same Gulf called Sopththa also. From whence in probability some of this people might pass over into Persia, on the other side of the Gulf, and there give name to the Sabtaei, which by the transposition of the letter T. are by Prolomie called the Stabaei. That Nimrod the fourth son of Chus did first plant himself in Babylonia, the Scripture is so plain and positive, that nothing need be added to it. Of Sabteca the fifth son, I confess I can find no tract in any of the ancient Authors. For why we should admit of so great a change, as first, of B. into M. and then, of T. into D. (which could not easily be done by very careless Transcribers) and so find Sabteca in Samydace, a City or Country of the Carmanians on the Persian side of the Gulf, I can see no reason: And therefore rather choose to mingle him and his posterity with the sons of Sabta, and the children of his brother Regma, all planted on the same shore of the Persian Gulf. For that Regma (our English Bibles call him Raama) was settled on the banks of the Bay of Persia, hath so good authority, that there is no dispute to be made of that: Ptolemy placing there the City of Regma (Regama it is called in the Latin Translation) by which name it occurreth in Stephanus also in his Book De Urbibus, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. And Regma, on the Persian Gulf, as his words there are. And not far thence we are to look for his, son Sheba; both being joined together in the Book of God; and both there said to busy and employ themselves in the trade of Merchandizing: The Merchants of Shebah, and Raamah (saith the Text) they were thy Merchants; they occupied in thy Fairs with chief of all Spices, and with all precious Stones, and Gold. Ezek. 27. v. 22. So that the Nations of the Sabaeans, though descended at the first from several parents, inhabited the lower parts of Arabia Felix from one Sea to the other; as evidently appeareth by those words of Pliny; where he informeth us most truly, that the Sabaeans, or Arabian people, well known for their abundance of Frankincense, ad utraque maria porrectis gentibus habitare, had spread themselves over all the Country, even from the Red Sea to the Gulf of Persia. Finally, in the same tract we find Dedan the other son of Regma, and the last of all the sons of Chus; there being on the mouth of the Persian Gulf (but on the Arabian coast thereof) not only a City, but a Province called by the name of Dedan, which both Ortelius, and some other late Geographers do take notice of. And more than so, the Prophet Ezekiel joins him with his brother Sheba, and makes them both to follow the same trade of Merchandise; The men of Dedan were thy Merchants, chap. 27. 15. Sheba, and Dedan, and the Merchants of Tarshish▪ chap. 38. 13. They brought thee horns of Ivory, and Ebony, saith the Prophet in the former Text.  
The head of the next house of the race of Cham, was Mizraim, the second son, of whom it is generally affirmed, that leaving his elder brother Chus and his posterity in the rich and delectable Countries of Arabia Felix, and the next parts to Babylonia, or the land of 〈◊〉, he went with his own sons, and his Brother Phut, into Africa, and there planted Egypt. O●th, there is no question amongst the Learned, though all the tracts and footsteps of 〈◊〉 be quite worn out; unless any thing of it were preserved in the word Mesori, by which the Egyptians anciently called the first Month in the year; or in that of Mesre, by which name the Arabians call Egypt to this day: But being Egypt is called Misraim in the Hebrew Bibles, that only is sufficient without further evidence. And therefore leaving him in Egypt, let us look after his son Ludim, whom he sent out to people Aethiopia, the next Country to him. For that this Ludim was the Father of those Ethiopians, many good reasons are alleged. First, from the Texts of Esatah cap 66. 19 and Jer. 469. where Lud is said to be very skilful in drawing the bow; which agrees punctually with the Character given unto the Ethiopians by Strabo, Herodotus, D●odorus Siculus, and others of the ancient Writers. Secondly, from the joining of the children or people of Ludim with those of Phul, in the place of Esaiah before cited; which Phul may very probably be the City which the Grecians call Philae, situate not far from Sy●ne, on the very borders of Ethiopia, and anciently inhabited both by the Ethiopians and Egyptians, as Strabo, and some others of the Ancients witness. Thirdly, from the conjunction of the children of Lud or Ludim, with those of Chus, on the Gulf of Arabia, and those of Phut, or Lybians, on the other side of Mount Atlas, both next neighbours to them; as in Ezek, 30. ver. 5. and that of Jer. above mentioned; where our English very strangely rendereth Ludim by the name of Lydians, which dwell too far off both from Chush and Phut, to be joined together in one action. But of this, more than enough already, the Arguments being so strong, and also most demonstrative. I go on therefore to the next; only observing by the way, that the Ethiopians mentioned in those Texts of our English Bibles, are not these of Asrica, but the Chusites of Arabia Felix; our Translators always rendering Chus by Ethiopia. The Anamim, who come next, I know not where to find, or in what place to look for them, unless they were the same with the Amantes of Solinus, and the Hammanientes of Pliny, a people seated on the seaside men the greater Syrtis; to which the neighbourhood of the Lehabim may give some countenance; who seem to be the same with the people of Libya, a Province seated betwixt Egypt and Cyrenaica, and were called Libyaegyptii by the old Geographers, to difference them from the inhabitants of the greater Lybia, whereof more hereafter. For the Napthtuhim, I am also at a loss, unless we find them somewhere in Cyrenaica; and that some remnant of the name be in Aptuchi fanum, which occurs in Ptolemy. But for the Pathrusin, I think no question need be made, but that they were the people of that Province of Egypt, which in divers places of the Scripture is called Pathros, as Esay 11. 11. Jer. 44. 1. Ezek. 29. 14. and seems to be that part of Egypt, which is called Thebais, where Ptolemy placeth Pathyris, an Inland Town not far from Theb●. (And Pathuris the Greek or Septuagint term that, which in the Hebrew is called Pathros.)  
Hitherto we have found the Nations which descended from the sons of Misraim, in Egypt, and the Countries adjoining to it. And there, or there abouts, we are to look for Cophtorim, and Casluhim, the two sons remaining. I know there hath been great pains taken to find the Casluhim in Colchis, and the Cophtorim in Cappadocia, or Pontus, not far from Trabezond; where notwithstanding there is no tract of the names remaining. But this being so far off from Egypt, in, and near which, both Misraim himself, and all the rest of his sons were planted, I can by no means yield unto it; though to conteut such Learned men, as would fain have it so, I think it possible enough that some of the Egyptians in succeeding times, moved with the same of that great wealth which Colchis was supposed to yield to some Adventurers, might leave their native soil to inhabit there. And therefore I think rather, with the learned Junius, that the Casluhim were first planted in the Region of Cassiotis (not far from Dumi●●a, a chief town of Egypt) which retains somewhat of the name; and so doth Coptus, an old City of Egypt, of the name of Cophtorim. Or if it did not, as it doth, why the name of Cophti, which at this day is given to the Christians of Egypt, may not be thought to have its first rise from Cophtorim, rather than that they are so called quasi Aegopthti, corruptly for Aegyptii, I must needs say I am not satisfied. Besides, it being clear in Scripture, that the Casluhim, and Cophtorim dwelled near together, and that the Philistims are said to descend from Casluhim, if Casluhim should go for Colchia, and Cophtorim for Cappadocia, we must first carry them I know not how far off from the rest of their Brethren, against the method of all Plantations; and then bring the Philistims back again from Colchis, to find a ●welling on the borders of the land of Egypt, from whence their Ancestors and Allies were so far remote. Whereas by settling these two Naions amongst the rest of their Brethren, the journey of the Philistims unto Canaan, and fetling themselves in the possessions of the Avim (a 〈◊〉 people) whom they had subdued, Deut. 2. 25. is both easy and natural. But before we follow these Philistim● further in their new Plantation amongst the Cananites, we will first see what became of Phut the third son of Cham. And if we guide ourselves in this Labyrinth by the clew of Antiquity, we shall find him settled West of his Brother Misraim, and so to the Atlantic. Ocean, the Lake of Tritonis parting their dominions. Some Relics of the name there were in the time of Josephus, who telleth us of a River of Mauritania, which in his time retained the name of Phut: Pliny makes mention of it also. Ptolo●●● takes notice of a River in those parts called Pthuth, which comes very near it. And so doth Isidore, Origen. l. 9 2. But St. Hierome in my mind puts it out of doubt, whose words I shall put down, and so leave Africa; Phut Librae, à quo & Mauritania fluvi●s usque ad praesens. Phut dicitur, omnisque circa eum. Regio Phutensis; cujus re● multi Scriptores tam Graeci quam Latini testes sunt. Where we have not only a River, but a Province of the name of Phut; and many ancient Writers both Greek and Latin called to witness it.  
And now we should proceed to Canaan and his sons (eleven in all) being the fourth and last branch of the house of Cham. But being they all kept together in or near the land of Canaan, we shall sinned them there, or meet with them in such Plantations and Colonies as they sent abroad, under the title of Phoenicians. And therefore go we next to Japhet, whose Tents God promised to enlarge, as indeed he did; spreading his branches over Europe, the lesse● Asia, and a great part of the greater also. To him were born seven sons in all, that is to say, Gomer and Magog, Maedai and Javan, Tubal, Mesech, and Thyras: Of which, the Issue of two only are upon record, viz. Aschenaz, Riphath, and Togarma, the sons of Gomer: Elisha, Tarshish, Kitt●●, and Dodanim, the sons of Javan. And first for Gomer and his sons, they first possessed themselves of convenient dwellings in the greater, and the lesser Asia. Gomer himself first planting in the mountainous places of Albania, where the Mountains called Cimmerini long retained his name; and after changing that unpleasant, and unfruitful dwelling for the Plains of Phrygia, in which the City Cimmeris, in the days of Pliny, did preserve his memory. For that the posterity and people of Gomer, called at first Gomerians, came to take the name of Cimmerians, as of Cimbri afterwards, is generally agreed upon amongst the Learned. Now then, as Gomer fixed himself in the Greater Phrygia, so did his eldest son Aschenaz in Phrygia minor, and the Country of Troas, spreading himself along upon the Hellespont, and those Greekish Seas, as far as Bithynnia. In all which places there were left some memory of this Plantation: For in Bithynnia there is a In all which places there were left some memory of this Plantation: For in Bithynnia there is a Bay called Sinus Ascavius, together with a River, and a Lake of the same name also. And in the Lesser Phrygia, and the Country of Troas, there was both a City and a Province adjoining, anciently known by the name of Ascania; and the Ascaniae Insulae also on the coasts thereof. Nor is it any thing unlikely, but that in honour of this Aschenaz, the Kings and great men of those parts took the name of Ascanius. Of which name, besides Ascamus the son of Aeneas, we find a King mentioned in the second of Homer's Iliads, which came unto the aid of Priamus at the siege of Troy. In the same quarters of the World we find Riphath also, the founder of the Ripher, a people dwelling in the East parts of Bithynnia, and spreading also over Paphlagonia: In both which Provinces there are some remnants of his name to be found amongst the Ancients. For besides that Josephus saith expressly, that the Paphlagonians anciently were called Riphei; there is mention in Apollonius Argonauticks of the River Rhebaeus, which rising in Bithynnia, emptieth itself into the Pontus Euxinus, near to Paphlagonia, of which River Plime also doth inform us; and Stephanus doth not only acquaint us with the River itself, but tells us also of a Region of the same name, and of a people thereabouts which is called Rhebaei. Nor need we look much further to find out the seat of Togarma the third son of Gomer, whom the Prophet Ezekiel not only joineth with his Father as two neighbouring Nations, but makes both of them to lie Northwards of Judaea; Gomer and all his bands, the house of Togarma in the North quarters and all his bands, cap. 38. 6. So that they do not guests amiss, who place Togarma and his Progeny in Cappadocia; a Country not only bordering near to the Plantations of Gomer, and lying on the North of the land of Canaan, but very well stocked with an excellent breed of Mules and Horses, as Strabo testifieth in the 11 Book of his Geographic; with which commodities they traded at the Fairs of Tyre, as the same Prophet tells us of them, cap. 27. 14. But for a more evident proof of this, that Togarma's dwelling must be found in Cappadocia; we must first know that the Greek Translators call him generally by the name of Torgama; and then, that anciently there was a people in Cappadocia and Galatia, whom Strabo calleth Trocmi, and Tully, Trogmi; by Stephanus they are named Trocmeni, and Trogmades in the Council of Chalcedon, in which Cyriacus Bishop of the Trogmades (〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉) is often mentioned. Having thus done with Gomer, and the sons of Gomer, we will next pursue the rest of the sons of Japhet, except Javan only, whom with his four sons we will keep together. And the next son of Japhet is Magog, concerning whom there hath been much dispute and difference amongst our Antiquaries: some making him the Father of the Scythians, some of the Goths, and others finally of the Tartars; all of them thinking that such terrible names as Gog and Magog, could not belong to any but such terrible Nations. And possible enough it is, that some of his posterity in succeeding times, finding their own seats too narrow for them, might remove further Northwards, and be founders of some Scythian and Tartarian Nations; but that Magog himself in his first Plantation should wander so far out of the way from the rest of his brethren, when he had elbow-room enough amongst them, I cannot easily imagine. When therefore I find a Region in Stephanus called Gogareus, betwixt Iberia and Colchis; and read in Pliny, that the City of C●le Syria, which the Grecians call Hierapolis, was by the Syrians themselves called Magog; I shall not trouble myself to look for Magog any where else, than in those Countries where they have left such evident Landmarks to discern themselves by. But this we shall the better see by looking out the dwellings of his two brethren, Mesech and Tubal, who being joined together with God and Magog, Ezek cap. 38. 2. & 39 1. are very unlike to have their dwellings far asunder: or that they could concur in any public Action against the Jews, according to the scope and purpose of the holy Prophet. Now it is probable (if not more) that Mosech, whom the Ancients named Mosoch, seated himself on the North and North-East of S●ria, in the confines of Colchis and Armenia, and so unto the Caspian, or Hyrcanian Sea. For all along that tract runs a ridge of Hills, which Pliny, Ptolomic, and Pomponius Mela call Montes Moschi●●, disterminating Colchis from Armonia, and both from Iberia; and most like to be the dwelling of Mesech, or Mosoch, and to take denomination from him. And this I am the rather induced to think, because Tubal, whom the Scriptures generally join together with Mesech, is by most Writers said to have settled himself in Iberia, the next Province to it. Josephus also telling us, that anciently the Iberi were called Thobeli, though called Iberians afterwards on some new occasion. And hereunto the constant tradition of the Spaniards gives some good authority, who boast of their descent from Tubal: which can no otherwise be granted, than as they were a Colony of these Iberians, from whence the Concinent of Spain was once called Iberia, and where one of the principal Rivers is still called Iberus. For Madai, the third Son of Japhet, it is most plain by the authority of Scripture (were there no proof else) that he was the Father of the Medes; who in the book of Daniel, and that of Hester, are represented to us by no other name than that of Madai.  
Thus having took a view of those who fixed themselves in either, or in both the Asias; let us look on Thyras, Javan, and the sons of Javan, who not contented with their dwellings in the losser Asia, filled all Europe by degrees with their numerous progenies. And first beginning with Javan as the Elder brother, most Authors make him the Original of those Greek Nations which pass under the general name of jones; and there is very good ground for the assertion, considering that the Greek Translators of the Bible instead of Javan, read Jovan, and that all those, who elsewhere ordinarily are called jones, are by Homer, one of the ancientest of the Greeks, named Jaones. Now Javan and Jaon sound so like each other, that one may very well conclude, that they were the same. A name not only proper to the Athenians, and their Colonies, though probable enough first belonging to them of Attica, but comprehending the ●oeotians and Achaans' also; yea, and extending also into Macedonia, as appears Dan. 8. 21. where Alexander the Great in the Hebrew is called King of Javan, which we English Graecia. Nor do we much dif-joyn Javan from the rest of that stock, by carrying him cross the seas into another part of the World; for he might go along with Gomer in his second Plantation; And leaving him well settled in the greater Phrygia, and his son Ask●naz in the lesser; might then with very little trouble (and no improbalitie at all) pass over the H●llespont, and plant himself in Attica, called at first jonia, saith Plutarch in the life of Theseus. Or if any one notwithstanding conceive this for too great a leap, and will rather think with Hecataeus, that the jones came ou● of Asia into Greece (as Strabo citys him to that purpose) I shall not much contend against that opinion; so it be also granted on the other side, that Javan, not having room enough on the shores of Asia, passed over into Greece, as a land unoccupied. With Javan went Elisha his eldest fonne, the Father of the Aeolus, or Aeolians, on the Asian side, as Josephus hath it; and the founder of Elis in Peloponnesus, and planter of the Gracian Isles, which by the Prophet Ezekiel, 27. 7. are called the Isles of Elisha. And it agree● exceeding well with the Isles of Greece, which by the Prophet is affirmed of the Isles of Elisha; namely, that the inhabitants thereof did trade to Tyre with Blow and Purple; in which some of the Grecian Isles were such excellent Artisans, that Carpathus had the name of Porphyris, and Cythera was called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, only from the abundance of Purple which they had amongst them. Not to say any thing of Coos, Nisyrus, and Gyarus, and some other of the Cycladeses, renowned in good Authors for that commodity.  
A shorter journey, but withal a far shorter Territory fell to the lot of Tarshish the second son; whom Javan when he traveled further upon new discoveries, left settled in Calicia, a Province of the lesser Asia, where either he, or some of his Posterity in honour of him, built the City of Tarsus, the principal City of that Province. For that Tarshish in those early days should go into Spain, and there build Tartessus, I take to be a strange (if not idle) Romance; that Town being built by the Phoenicians many ages after, without relation unto Tarshish, or his memory either. What Voyages or Plantations those of Cilicia or Tarsus made in times succeeding, as I no where find, so is not material to my present purpose; which principally is to settle the sons of Noah in their first habitations. On therefore unto Cittim the third son of Javan, whom Josephus settleth first in the Isle of Cyprus, where he finds a City called C●tium, the birthplace of Z●no the Stoic, thence surnamed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. Josephus is herein followed by St. Hierome in his Notes on Genesis, in whose time (as Pintus telleth us in his Comment on Ezekiel) the Town of Citium was still standing; so do Eastathins in his Hexameron, and divers others. The Author of the Book of Maccabees sets him further off, giving the name of Cittim unto Macedonia. After that (saith the Author) Alexander the son of Philip, went forth of the land of Cethim, and slew Darius' King of the Persians and Medes, cap. 1. v. 1. And after in the 18. Chapter of the same Book, verse 5. Perseus' King of Macedon is called King of the Citims. But this doth no way contradict that of his first planting in Cyprus, where it is very probable that he made his dwelling for a time, by reason of the neighbourhood of his brother Tarshish (Cili●in and the City of Tarsus lying near unto it;) But finding in time that Island to be too small for his people; and that the other parts both of Greece and Asia were taken up already by the first Adventurers, he might finally fix himself, or some of his posterity, in Macedonia, as a spare place which no body could lay claim unto. That either he or any of his sons planted first in Italae, which I see Bochartus would fain have, were against the method of Plantations; and he must give them wings to fly that conveyeth them thither, when as yet Mankind was not taught the use of shipping, or not accustomed at least to make long voyages. But that in course of time, as the World grew fuller, and that Greece was not able to contain its multitudes, some of the race of Cittim might pass over into Italy, the passage thither from some of the Ports of Greece being short and easy, I am apt enough to believe, and in its proper place shall declare myself for it. Nor can I otherwise agree with him, as concerning Dodanim, whom against all right and reason he hath placed in Gaul; making the River Rhodanus, one of the principal of that Country, to be named of him; whom the Greeks, mistaking the letter Daleth for that of Resh (as indeed the letters are so like, that one may very easily be mistake for the other) most commonly present unto us by the name of Rhodanim. Admitting which, it is more proper, in my mind, to settle Rhodanim for a while in the Isle of Rhodes, lying so near the dwellings of his other brethren; till wanting room for the increase of his posterity in so small an Island, he might coast along the shores of Peloponnesus, and fix himself finally in Epirus by his brother Elisha, where in the Province of the Mollossians, we shall find a City called Dodona, without any such mistake or change of letters as before is mentioned. For that the three furthest parts of Europe in respect of Asia should be planted all at once by these sons of Javan, is so incredible an imagination, that he must have a very strong fancy, or be of very light belief, which can entertain it. Finally, as for Thyras the last son of Japhet, having accompanied his brother Javan to the shores of Asia, and seeing him passed over the seas to Greece, he took the opportunity of the next straight of Fretum (since called Thracius Bosphorus) and fixed himself in Thrace, which Country he gave name unto, as most Writers testify. Nor want there such apparent footsteps of the name of Thyras, besides the name of Thracia (as some spell the word) which may add good authority to this general testimony; there being both a River and an Haven-town not far from Byzantium, which Pliny, Ptolemy, and Mela call Athyras: A River and Town called Tyras in the Province of Moesia, bordering next to Thrace, whereof most of all the old Geographers have taken notice; and finally the Thracians calling their God Mars by the name of Thuras. Not to say any thing of Tereus, Therops, and some others of the Kings of Thrace, whose names come very near unto that of Thyras, as the first founder of their Nation.  
Thus have we seen i several Generations and Disper●ions of the Sons of Noah, so far forth as their names are registered in holy Scripture: these being the Heads and Leaders of those several Tribes which joined together in the project of the building of Babel, and afterwards dispersed themselves, as before was shown. But that no more than these (I mean Heads of Families) descended in so long a time from the loins of Noah; that they should have towards the new peopling of the world, in an hundred years (for so long it must be at least from the Flood to the building of Babel) no more than sixteen sons in all; and ten of those sixteen go childless also to the grave, is not a thing to be imagined. Nor is it to be thought, that all the people which were born since the Flood till then, could meet together at one place as by inspiration; or being met would join together in a work of so little profit; or that if Noah or Sem had been there amongst them they would not have dissuaded them from that foolish enterprise. And therefore I should rather be of their opinion, which think that Noah fixed himself in those parts which lay nearest to the place where the Ark took land: and having planted as far Eastward as he thought convenient, sent out the surplusage of his people under the Conduct of one or more of these Undertakers; directing them perhaps to the Land of Shinaar, where himself had dwelled before the Flood. Where being come, and destitute of graver and more sober counsels, they fell upon that vain attempt which became their ruin; and made them scatter and disperse themselves into so many Companies. For in my mind Sir Walt. Ralegh pleads the point exceeding strongly, that it must needs be that Noah was settled in the East, and had well peopled all those parts which lay nearest to him, before he sent this Troop abroad upon new discoveries. For being it is expressly said in holy Scripture, that as they went from the East they found a plain in the Land of Shinaar; it must needs follow without controversy, that they came from the East Countries into Shinaar or Babylonia, and not from any part of Armenia (as the Vulgar opinion is) which lay North thereof. Now that the Countries whence they came were not left utterly desolate upon this remove, but very sufficiently provided both of men and Cities, appeareth by those huge Armies which Zoroaster the King of Bactria, and Staurobates King of the Indians, were able to bring into the field. Of whom the first being invaded by Ninus the Assyrian Monarch, encountered him with an Army of 400000. fight men; the other on the like occasion out-vied Semiramis for numbers: and yet her Army did consist, as we read in Diodorus Siculus, of three millions and an half of men, besides 10000 armed Wagons; whereof if we believe but the third part, it may serve to prove that the East must needs be planted before this Expedition towards Babylonia. For considering that Ninus the husband of Semiramis was but the third in descent from Nimrod, that i● to say, the son of Belus, the son of Nimrod, it had been a most impossible thing that such a vast increase should be made only out of Colonies in so short a time, as needs must be between the planting of the Country's before specified, and these two great Actions, unless God raised them out of stones, or by some such miracle, to abate the pride of these Usurpers over other Nations. Without a miracle of this nature (which I conceive no wise man would expect to find) it is I say, a thing impossible that Staurobates should exceed Semirames in number of men▪ as Diodorus saith he did, he being but a Castling of a second Swarm, and she the great Commandress of that part of the world from whence he came upon a second or a third Plantation. Add unto this, that those who have recorded the Acts of Alexander the great, assure us that he found more Cities and sumptuosities in that little Kingdom of Porus, which lay side by side to the East of the River Indus, than in all his other travels and undertake: And this may serve instead of a further evidence, that the East Countries were not planted after this dispersion, but built, and peopled, and reduced under forms of Government as soon as any in the World. Nor know I else where to find either Noah himself, or Sem and Japhet, unless they stayed behind with their Father Noah, or were disposed of by themselves in their several quarters: there being none of those, though most diligent men, who have writ of the Plantation of the World upon this dispersion, that either speak of any Nations planted by them, or of their settling in the Colonies of any one of their descendants. Which is to me a very strong Argument that they came not with the rest to the plains of Shinaar, but tarried still in those habitations wherein God had placed them. Against this I can see but two Objections of any moment; one from the Text, the other from an old Tradition amongst the Jews. That from the Text is gathered from those words of Moses, where having made his Catalogue of the Families of the Sons of Noah, he adds, And by these were the Nations divided in the Earth after the Flood, Gen. 10. v. ult. But these words, as I take it, do relate only unto that division which was made upon occasion of the confusion of Languages, when they were forced to give over their work, and sort themselves into several Companies; and not to such Plantations as were made before, who being all of one tongue, though in divers dwellings, could not be looked upon as several and divided Nations. For the Tradition of the Jews, 'tis this, that from the beginning of the world to the building of Babel, that language which in aftertimes was called the Hebrew, was the common language of Mankind; and that it did continue uncorrupt in the house of Eber, (whence it had the name) because he joined not with the rest in that proud and ungodly undertaking. Hence it may possibly be objected, that if there were any others of the offspring of Noah which came not with the rest to the plains of Shinaar, and consequently had no hand in that vain attempt, they could not come within the curse of confounded Languages, but must needs speak the Hebrew Tongue, as well as those descended of the loins of Heber. But against this Tradition, and the consequents of it, there are some things to be objected. For first it is but a Tradition, and therefore of no sure foundation to build upon. And secondly, it is such a Tradition as holds no good coherence with the truth of Story, it being a most clear and demonstrative truth, that the Hebrew Tongue was not the Language which Abraham brought with him out of Chaldea and Mesopotamia, but that which he found spoken in the Land of Canaan at his coming thither; to which both he and his Posterity did conform themselves. Or had it been the Language of Heber, as they say it was, (but most undoubtedly was not) Yet, Thirdly, had this been a privilege conferred on Heber, that he and his Posterity should speak the Original Language, without alteration of corruption, it must have been extended to all those of the house of Joktan which descended from him; as also to the house of Laban in Padan Aram, and to the Moabites, and the Ammonites as the seed of Lot; and finally to the Ishmaelites and Idumaeans, descended of Abraham and Esau, and not be limited and confined only to the house of Jacob. Either all these must be partakers of so great a privilege, because their Father Heber had obtained it for himself and his; or else it was not such a prvilege, or given so universally and communicably to the house of Heber, as they say it was. So the Tradition falls to grounds as to this particular. And then admitting it for true, that those who stayed behind with Noah, spoke the same Language which was common to the Fathers before the Flood, (be it the Hebrew, or what else soever it was) I see no reason to the contrary, but that it might in time be branched into several Languages or Dialects of the same one Language, by the commerce and intercourse which they had with Nations of a different speech; as well as those of Judah in so short a time as the Captivity of Babylon, had lost the purity of that Language which they so much brag of, and could not understand their own Bibles at their coming home but by an Interpreter. Of which see Nehem. c. 8. v. 7, 8.  
But to proceed: On this dispersion of the Families of the sons of Noah, it came to pass, that though they all descended from one common Root, yet by the situations of their several dwellings they came to be of several tempers and affections; in which they were so different from one another, that it might seem they had been made at first out of several Principles, and not at all derived from one common Parent. Of which thus Du Bartas.  
O see how full of wonders strange is Nature,  
Sith in each Climate, not alone in stature,  
Strength, colour, hair; but that men differ do  
Both in their humours, and their manners too.  
The Northern man is fair, the Southern fowl;  
That's white, this black, that smiles, and this doth scowl.  
Th' one's blithe and frolic, the other dull and froward;  
Th' one's bookful of courage, th' other a fearful coward, etc.  
The ground or reason of which difference is to be attributed to the different tempers of those Countries in which they live, and to the different influences of the Heavenly Bodies on those several Countries: which do continue still the same, though many times the Countries do shift and change their old Inhabitants. Hinc illa ab antique vitia, & patriâ sorte durantia, quae totas in historiis gentes aut commendant aut notant, saith a Modern, but judicious Author. Two or three evidences of this truth will make it clear and evident to a practical judgement, which otherwise might appear obscure in the search of causes. Florus hath told us of the Gauls, Primum eorum impetum esse majorem quam virorum, secundum minorem quam foeminarum. Which is the same which Rob. Dallington hath told us of the Modern French, That he begins an action like thunder, and ends it in a smoke. Ut sunt Gallorum subita ingenia, saith Caesar of the ancient Gauls: and I believe the present French are altogether as rash and harebrained as the other were. Gallia foecunda Causidorum, was part of the character of the Gauls in the time of Juvenal; and it is told us of the French by some late Observers, that there are commonly more Law-tryals amongst them in one year, than have been in England since the Conquest. And yet the old Gauls in a manner are wholly rooted out of the Country, the several Nations of Franks, Burgundians, Britons, Normans, and Goths being in possession of their several dwellings. Thus also it is said by Tacitus of the ancient Germans, Diem noctemque continuare potando, nulli opprobrium; that it was no disgrace to any to spend the whole day and night in drinking: and more than so, De jungendis assinitatibus, de bello denique & pace in conviviis consultare, that they consulted over their Cups of their weightiest Businesses. Since which time though all Germany hath shifted almost all her old inhabitants, and taken in new Colonies of Sueves, Goths, Vandals, Sclaves, Huns, Saxons, and other Nations, yet still those ill customs are as much in use amongst them, as ever formerly. To go a little further off; the old Philosopher Anacharsis tells us of the ancient Grecians, that at the beginning of their Feasts they used little Goblets, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and greater towards the end when they were almost drunken; which custom still remains amongst them, as G. Sandys observeth, notwithstanding the great length of time, and all the other changes of state and people which have happened since. I shall not speak here of the effeminateness of the asiatics, or the cruelty or implacableness of the African Nations, being as great now as in any of the former times, notwithstanding the great and numerous Plantations of the Greeks, Romans, Vandals, Saracens, Turks, and Tartars, successively, and respectively, in these several Countries: And therefore I conclude this point in these words of Barclay, Haeret itaque in omni gente vis quaedam inconcussa quae hominibus pro conditione terrarum in quibus nasci contigerit suae fata diviserit. Nor is this all the consequent of this dispersion of the Families of the sons of Noah; the separation of their persons producing, first, an alteration of affections, and that engendering natural Animosities, which seconded by their several interesses and Reasans of State, hath left almost no people without some such enemy, as doth particularly and perversely cross them in all their Counsels. Concerning which, take here the Observation of that notable Statesman and Historian, Philip de Comines, which though it be with reference to the Meridian of his own time only, yet it may be accommodated generally to all States and Ages. In rebus humanis ita comparatum est, ut nullus fere sit populus quem non aemulus aliquis exerceat, etc. It is (saith he) so ordered in the state of humane affairs, that there is almost no Nation without a more particular Enemy. The English are enemies to the French, the Scots to the English; the Portugueze have the like inveterate hatred against the Spaniards. The Princes of Italy enjoy great possessions without any good title; but are continually opposed by the more potent Cities of Venice, Florence, Genoa, and Luca. The Arragonian Kings of Naples, have found perpetual Enemies of the Dukes of Anjou; as have the Dukes of Milan of the house of Orleans. The Princes of Italy, and the Florentines, have a stitch at Venice; as the States of Genoa and Sienna have against the Florentines. In Germany the Animosities have been great and of long continuance between the houses of Austria and Bavaria; the hatred grown beyond all hopes of reconciliation which is between the Swissers and the Austrian Family. The Dukes of Cleve and Gulick are always upon ill terms with their neighbours of Gelderland: And in the North, the Cities on the Baltic Seas have their continual quarrels with the Kings of Danemark. Nor are the enmities any thing less, if they be not greater, which are discernible amongst the people of Asia, and afric, than those that are above remembered. So far, and to this purpose saith that notable and judicious Writer.  
The consideration of which points, if there were no other, were of itself sufficient to show the necessary use of History and Geography, as well for the understanding the affairs of the Ages past, as for commerce and correspondency with the Nations present. For had no Histories been written in the former times, in what a dull ignorance had we lived of all those occurrences which do so much concern the whole state of Mankind, and are our principal directors in life and action; in which respect the Orator most truly calleth it, Magistram vitae. For upon the credit of this History, the examples of our Ancestors, the grounds of civil prudence, and the fames of men do most especially depend. And certainly to draw back the mind to the contemplation of matters long ago passed; to search out with diligence, and to deliver with faith, freedom, and the life of expression, such things as are found out on a diligent search; to represent unto our eyes the changes of Times, the characters of Persons, the uncertainties of Coun●●●● 〈…〉 Pretensions, and the secrets of States 〈…〉 of a public●● use, 〈…〉 great both pains and judgement. Besides 〈…〉 eternity to all such men, who by their Counsels or Achievements have de 〈◊〉 〈…〉 those Kingdoms and Commonwealths wherein they lived. And thereupon the Orator doth not only call it Magistram vitae, but Lucem veritatis, Testem tempor●s, Nunciam 〈◊〉 & Vitae memoriam: Accord to which character, I find these Verses set before a Ch●oni●●● of some Kings of England (more worth than all the Book besides.)  
For though in these day's Miracles be fled,  
Yet this shall of good Histories be said,  
They call back time that's past, and give life to the dead.  
Nor want there other motives to endear unto us the use of History, besides the light it give; unto all the remarkable Actions of preceding times, and the eternity (if I may say so) which it conferreth on the Actors themselves, by the preservation of their names from the ruins of Time, and the pit of Oblivion. For First, it stirreth men to Virtue, and deters them from Vice, by showing forth the glorious memories of virtuous men, and the ill savour which is left behind men of ungodly life; and especially keeps persons of most eminent place from letting loose the reins unto all licentiousness, by representing this to their consideration, that all their actions shall be laid open one day to the view of the Vulgar. Secondly, it hath been a principal Conserver of most Arts and Sciences, by keeping on Record the Dictates and Opinions of so many of the old Philosophers, out of which a perfect Body of Philosophy, and others of the Liberal Arts hath been collected and digested. Thirdly, it is the best Schoolmaster in the Art of War, and teacher of Stratagems; and in that can practically afford more punctual directions than can be otherwise obtained; and is withal the best Assistant to the Statesman or Politician, who from hence draw their Observations and Conclusions, and become thereby serviceable to their Prince and Country, though never traveled more than amongst their Books. So Archimedes in his study, and Demosthenes in his Orator's gown, endangered more the enemies of their several Countries; than the Athenians or Syracusans did by dint of sword. And last of all, besides these civil benefits and considerations, and the great help which it affords in the way of discourse, there is no particular branch of knowledge more useful for the true and perfect understanding of holy Scripture, than that of Ecclesiastical and Profane History; or which gives clearer light to many dark passages thereof, especially in the Prophetical writings of either Testament.  
This, as it shows the necessary use and benefit which redounds from History, so doth it serve to usher in that commendation which belongs to the study of Geography also; without some knowledge wherein, the study of History is neither so pleasant, nor so profitable, as a judicious Reader would desire to have it. 'Tis true, Geography without History hath life and motion, but very unstable and at random; but History without Geography, like a dead carcase, hath neither life, nor motion at all, or moves at least but slowly on the understanding. For what delight or satisfaction can any man receive from the reading of Story, without he know somewhat of the places and the conditions of the people which are therein mentioned. In which regard Ammianus Marcellinus the Historian, hath deserved very well of all his Readers, premising to the Actions of every Country, some brief description of the place, and chief Towns therein. For though the greatness of the Action doth ennoble and adorn the place; yet it is the knowledge of the place which adds delight and satisfaction unto the reading of the story which conveys it to us. History therefore and Geography, like the two Fires or Meteors which Philosophers do Castor and Pollux, if joined together, crown our reading with delight and profit; if parted, threaten both with a certain shipwreck: and are like two Sisters dearly loving, not without pity (I had almost said impiety) to be kept asunder. So as that which Sr. Phil. Sidney said of Argalus and Parthenia, 
Her being was in him alone,  
And she not being, he was none.  may be as justly said of History and Geography, as of those two Lovers. And yet this is not all the benefit which redounds from the study of Geography, which is exceeding useful to the reading of the holy Scriptures, as in discovering the situation of Paradise, the bounds and borders of those Countries which are therein mentioved; especially w●th relation to the travels of the Patriarches, Prophets, Evangelists and Apostles, yea of Christ himself, not otherwise to be comprehended and understood but by the help of Geographical Tables and Descriptions. Besides this, it is useful to most sorts of men, as to Astronomers, who are hereby informed of the different appearances of Stars in several Countries, their several influences and aspects, their rising and setting, according to different Orisons. Secondly, to Physicians, who are hereby acquainted with the different temper of men's bodies, according to the Climes they live in; the nature and growth of many Simples and Medicinal Drugs, whereof every Country under Heaven hath some more natural and proper to itself, than to any others. Thirdly, to Statesmen, who from hence draw their knowledge of the nature and disposition of those people with whom they are to negotiate, the bounds and borders both of their own Kingdoms and the Neighbouring Countries, with the extent of their respective Dominions both by Sea and Land; without the exact knowledge of which there would be a perpetual Seminary of wars and discord. Fourthly, to Merchants, Mariners and Soldiers, the several Professors of which kinds of life, find nothing more necessary for them in their several callings, than a competent knowledge in Geography, which presents to them many notable advantages, both for their profit and content●●ent. Finally, by the study of Geography, a man that hath not opportunity nor means of travelling, may with as much benefit, but far less danger and expense, acquaint himself with the particular descriptions of Kingdoms, Provinces, Cities, Towns and Castles, with all things considerable in the same, together with the customs, manners, and dispositions of all Foreign Nations: and that too in as full a manner, as if he had surveyed the one, and observed the other, by a personal visit of the places represented to him.  
Such is the necessary use which men of ingenuws Studies and Professions do and may make of History and Geography, in the course of their callings and employments. And there are some things also necessary to the knowledge of each, that we may study them with the greater benefit and contentation. To History it is only requisite that it be defined, distinguished from such writings as do seem to challenge the name of Histories, and that somewhat be premised of those several Epoches, from which all people do begin their computations. But to Geography it is needful not only that we do define it, but that we explicate those Terms or second Notions, which are not obvious to the understanding of every Reader. First then for History, if we consult the name or Quid no●●●is of it, it is derived 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. Videre, and therefore properly doth signify a Relation of such remarkable actions at which the Author was an Eye-witness, if not an Agent. Apud veteres onim (saith Isidore) nemo scribe●at Historiam, nisi is qui i●●orfuisset, & ●a quae scribenda essent vidisset. But now the customary use of the Word hath taught it a more ample signification. History being defined to be a Perfect Relation of all Occurrents observable happening in the State whereof it is written, described by the Motives, Pretexts, Consultations, Speeches and Events, a special care being had both of time and place.  
As for the writings which do challenge the name of History, but indeed are really distinguished from it, they are Commentaries, Annals, Diaries or Journaels', and Chronologies. First Commentaries set down only a naked continuance of Events and Actions, without the Motives and designs, the Counsels, Speeches, Occasions, and Pretexts of businesses. So that Caesar with more modesty than true propriety of speech, applied the name of Commentaries to the best History in the World. A History commended by King James to his Son Prince Henry, above all other profane Authors, both for the sweet flowing of the stile, and the worthiness of the matter itself. For I have ever (saith he) been of this opinion, that of all Ethnic Emperors, or great Captains, he hath farthest exceeded both in his practice and in his precepts for martial affairs. Which makes me the more wonder at the strange and unjust Censure of Justus Lipsius, who calls them Nudam & simplicem narrationem; for being entitled Commentaries, they do (saith he) nil polliceri praeter nomen, with pride and arrogance enough. 2. For Annals next, they are a bare recital only of the Actions happening every year, without regard had to the causes and pretexts, or any of the chief Ingredients required in History. So that Tacitus had no other Reason to give the name of Annals to his excellent Work, than that it is distinguished by the years of the Consuls. Otherwise there is no great difference as unto the matter betwixt an History and an Annal, the subject of them both being matter of State, and not such trivial things as Triumphs, Pageants, and such like, which stand not with the gravity and authority of Historical Annals: betwixt which and a Diary the same Tacitus (speaking of some magnificent Structures which were built that year) doth make this difference, Res illustres Annalibus, talia diurnis Urbis actis mandari, that matters of the greater moment were committed to Annals, and unto Diaries the Acts and Accidents of a meaner nature. 3. But Diaries, besides this difference in point of matter, are distinguished from Annals also in point of time; a Diary or Journal, as the name imports, containing the Actions of each day; of which kind was the Chronicle called for by Ahas●erus, in which the Actions of his Court were referred to Journals, and in the which he found the relation of the treason intended against him by his Eunuches. And of this kind was that of King Edward the fixed, mentioned in the History of his life by Sir John Hayward. 4. Last of all, for Chronologies they are only bare supputations of times, with some brief touch upon the Actions therein happening, such as are those of Eusebius, Functius, Calvisius, and Helvicus; of which last I dare give that testimony which Paterculus affords to Ovid, viz. that he is perfectissimus in forma operis sui; though he and all the rest are debtors to Eusebius for the incredible pains taken by him in his excellent Chronicon. Out of these four, as out of the four Elements, the Quintessence of History is extracted: borrowing from Annals time, from Diaries and Commentaries matter, from Chronologies consent of time and co-etanity of Princes; and thereto adding of her own all such other Ornaments in which these four are found defective.  
That which remains is to pr●mise somewhat of these several Epoches, from whence particular States, Nations and People, make their computations. These have been very different in former times, according to the several occasions took in several Country's. The Jews had several Epoches peculiar to themselves alone, and one in common with their Neighbours. Those which they had amongst themselves were First from the Creation of the World, or the beginning of time; Secondly, from the universal Deluge, which happened A. M. 1656. Thirdly, from the Confusion of Tongues, A. M. 1786. Fourthly, from Abraham's journey out of Chaldaea into Can●●n, A. M. 2021. Fifthly, from their deliverance out of Egypt, A. M. 2453. Sixthly, from the first year of Jubilee, A. M. 2499. Seventhly, from the building of Solomon's Temple, An. 2932. And lastly, from the Captivity of Babylon, An. 3357. That which they had common with other. Nations, was the Aera or Epoche of the Victory of the Greeks, which took beginning on the first Victory which Seleucus had against Antigonus, which was in A. M. 3637. an Account much used by the Jews, Chaldaeans, Syrians, and other Nations of the East. But the Chaldaeans also had their own Epoch or Account apart, reckoning their time from the first year of Nabonassar (Salmanassar he is called in Scripture) which being 438. years before this of Seleucus, must fall in A. M. 3201. Next for the Grecians, they reckoned a long while by Olympiaeys, the first of which is placed in the year of the World, 3174. (of which more hereafter.) But this Account perishing under the Constantinopolitans, they reckoned after by Indictions (an Account devised by Justinian:) every Indiction containing 15. years, the first beginning A. Ch. 513. which amongst Chronologers is still used. The Romans reckoned first from the foundation of their City, which was A. M. 3213▪ and afterwards from the sixteenth year of Augustus his Empire, (being that which properly is called the Roman Aera) A. M. 3936. An Account used by the Spaniards (where it first begun) till the Reign of Pedro the fourth of Arragon, who abrogated it in his Dominions, An Ch. 1350. followed therein by John the first of Castille, An. 1383. and at last by the King of Portugal also, 1415. The Christians generally do reckon from the Birth of CHRIST, but this they did not use till the year 600. following in the mean time the Account of the Empire. And finally the Mahometans beginning their Hegira (for so they call the time of their Computation) from the flight of their Prophet Mahomet from Mecca, when he was driven thence by the Phylarchae; which happened A. Ch. 617. Of these we shall make use generally but of two alone, those namely of the World's Creation, and our Saviour's Birth; and of the building of Rome, and the flight of Mahomet, in things that do relate to those several States.  
Next for Geography we will first define it, and after explicate such terms or second notions as are not obvious to the understanding of every Reader. First for the definition of it, it is said by Ptolemy to be a description of the whole Earth, or the whole Earth imitated by writing and delineation, with all other things generally annexed unto it. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 (and not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as it is commonly, but corruptly read) 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as his own words are. In which we look not on the Earth simply as it is an Element, for so it belongeth to Philosophy; but as it is a Spherical body proportionably composed of Earth and Water, and so it is the subject of Geography.  
First for the Earth, which is the first part of this body, it is affirmed by the best Writers to be 21600. miles in compass, which is demonstrable enough. For being there are in every of the greater Circles 360. degrees, every degree being reckoned at 60. miles: let 360. be multiplied by 60. and the Product will be 21600. as before is said. So that if it were possible to make a path round about the Earth, an able Footman going constantly 24. miles a day, would compass it in 900. days.  

The Earth is divided  
In respect of men, into the right hand and the left.  
In respect of itself, into parts Real and Imaginary.   
To Poets, which turn their Faces towards the Fortunate Islands (so memorised and chanted by them) the which are situated in the West; the North is the right hand, and the South the left.  
To the Augurs of old, and in our days to Priests and Men in holy Orders, who usually in their Sacrifices, and divine Oblations, conquest themselves unto the East; the South is the right hand, and the North the left.  
To Astronomers, who turn their faces towards the South, because that way the motions of the Planets may be best observed; the West is the right hand, and the East the left.  
Finally, to Geographers, who by reason they have so much to do with the Elevation of the Pole, do turn their faces towards the North; the East is the right hand, and the West the left.  

The Real parts of the Earth are divided commonly into  
Continents,  
Lands.   
A Continent is a great quantity of Land, not separated by any Sea from the rest of the World; as the whole Continent of Europe, Asia, Africa; or the Continents of France, Spain, Germany.  
An Island is a part of the Earth environed round about with some Sea or other; as the Isle of Britain with the Ocean, the Isle of Sicily with the Mediterranean: and therefore in Latin it is called Insula, because it is situate in Salo as some derive it.  
Touching the Continent I have nothing in general to enlarge, till we come to the particular Chorography & description of them. But for Lands (leaving the disquisition of their being, or not being before the Flood) there are four causes to which they may be thought to owe their Original, 1. An Earthquake, which works two ways towards their production: First, when by it one part of a Country is forcibly torn away from the other; and so Eub●●● was divided from the rest of Attica: And Secondly, when some vehement wind or vapour being shut up in such parts of the Earth as be under the Sea, raiseth the Earth above the Water; whereunto the Original of most of those Lands which are far remote from any part of the Continent is probably to be referred. 2. Great Rivers at their entry into the Sea carry with them abundance of gravel, dirt, and weeds; which, if the Sea be not the more working, will in time settle to an Island. So the Corn which Tarqvinius sowed in the Campus Martius, being cut down by the people, and cast into Tiber, settled together, and made the Holy Island. So the River Achelous caused the Echinades, as anon we shall more at large declare. 3. The Sea violently beating on some small Isthmus, weareth it thorough, and turneth the Peniusula into a complete Isle. Thus was Sicily divided from Italy, Cyprus from Syria, England from France, and Wight from the rest of England. And 4. sometimes as it eateth and worketh on some places, so it voluntarily leaveth and abandoneth others, which in sometime grow to be Lands, and firm land under foot. So it is thought the Isles of Zealand have been once part of the main Sea: and Verstegan proveth it, because that the Husbandmen in tilling and manuring the ground, find sometimes Anchors here and there fixed, but very often the bones of huge and great fishes, which could by no other accident come thither. To these kind of Island Pythagoras in Ovid alluding, saith, 
— Vidi factas ex aequore terras,  
Et procul à pelago conchae jacnere marinae,  
Et verus inventa est in montibus anchor a summis.  
Oft have I seen that earth, which once I knew  
Part of the Sea; so that a man might view  
Huge shells of fishes in the upland ground;  
And on the Mountain tops old Anchors found.   
As concerning the situation of Lands, whether commodious or not, this is my judgement. I find in Machiavelli, that for a City whose people covet no Empire but their own Towns, a barren place is better than a fruitful, because in such seats they are compelled to work and labour, by which they are freed from idleness, and by consequence from riotousness: But for a City whose Inhabitants desire to enlarge their confines, a fertile place was rather to be chosen than a sterile, as being move able to nourish multitudes of people. The like I say of Lands. If a Prince desire rather to keep than augment his Dominions, no place sitter for his abode than an Island▪ as being by itself and nature sufficiently defensible. But if a King be minded to add continually to his Empire, an Island is no fit seat for him; because partly by the uncertainty of Winds and Seas, partly by the longsomness of the ways, he is not so well able to supply and keep such forces as he hath on the Continent. An example hereof is England, which hath even to admiration repelled the most puissant Monarch of Europe; but for the causes above mentioned, cannot show any of her win on the firm land, though she hath attempted and achieved as many glorious exploits, as any Country in the World.  

The Continent and Island are subdivided into  
Peninsula.  
Isthmus.  
Promontorium.   
Peninsula, quasi pene Insula, is a tract of land, which being almost encompassed round by water, is joined to the firm land by some little Isthmus; as Peloponnesus, Taurica, and Peruana.  
Isthmus is that little narrow neck of land, which joineth the Peninsula to the Continent; as the straits of Dariene in America, and Corinth in Greece.  
Promontorium, is a high Mountain which shooteth itself into the Sea, the outmost end of which is called a Foreland, or Cape; as the Cape of Good Hope in afric, Cape Comari in India, etc.  
The Imaginary parts of the Earth are such which not being at all in the Earth, must yet be supposed to be so, for the better teaching and learning this Science; and are certain Circles going about the Earth, answerable to them in Heaven, in name.  
These Circles are either the 

Greater,  
Lesser,   in both which there are 360. Degrees, which in the greater Circles are greater than those in the lesser; and every Degree in the greater is 60. miles.  
The greater Circles are either Immutable, as the Aequator▪ 

Mutable, as the 

Horizon.  
Meridian.      
The Aequator is a great Circle going round about the Terrestrial Globe from East to West. It passeth through Habassia, Sumatra, Guiana, etc. The use of it is to show the Latitude of any Town, Promontory, etc. Now the Latitude is the distance of a place South or North from the Aequator, or middle of the World; and must be measured on the Globe by the Degrees in the Meridian.  
The Meridian is a great Circle rounding the earth from Pole to Pole. There are many Meridian's, according to the divers places in which a man liveth; but the chief and first Meridian passeth through the Island St. Michael, one of the Azores. The use of it is to show the Longitude of any place. Now the Longitude of a City, Cape, etc. is the distance of it East and West from the first Meridian, and is usually measured on the Globe by the Degrees of the Aequator.  
The Horizon is a great Circle, designing so great a space of the earth, as a quick sight can ken in an open field. The use of it is to discern the divers risings and settings of the Stars.  
The lesser Circles either are 

Noted with some name, as 

Tropical of 

Cancer.  
Capricorn.    
Polar, either 

Arctic.  
Antarctic      
Noted with no distinct name, and are the Parallels.    
The Tropic of Cancer (so called of the Celestial sign Cancer) is distant from the Equinoctial 2● Degrees Northward, and passeth through Barbary, and India, China, and Nova Hispania.  
The Tropic of Capricorn, equally distant from the Aequator Southward, passeth through Ethiopia inferior, and the midst of Peruana. And this is to be observed in these Tropics, that when the Sun is in the Tropic of Cancer our days are at the longest; and when he is gone back to the Tropic of Capricorn, the days are at the shortest. The first they call the Summer, the last they call the Winter Solstice; the first happening on, or about St. Barnabies day in June, the last on, or about St. Lucy's day in December.  
The Arctic Circle (so called for that it is correspondent to the Constellation in Heaven called the Bear, in Greek Arc●os) is distant from the Tropic of Cancer 45 Degrees, and passeth through Norway, Muscovy, Tartary, etc.  
The Antarctic Circle (so called because opposite to the other) is as much distant from the Tropic of Capricorn, and passeth through Terra Austrialis Incognita. The use of these four Circles is to describe the Zones.  
The Zones are spaces of earth included betwixt two of the lesser nominate Circles. They are in number five, one overhot, two over-cold, and two temperate.  
The overhot, or Torrid Zone, is betwixt the two Tropics, continually scorched with the presence of the Sun.  
The two over-cold, or Frigid Zones, are situate between the two Polar Circles, and the very Poles, continually wanting the neighbourhood of the Sun.  
The two temperate Zones, are betwixt the Tropic of Cancer, and the Arctic, and 'twixt the Tropic of Capricorn, and the Antarctic Circles; enjoying an indifferency between heat and cold; so that the parts next the Torrid Zone are the hotter, and the parts next the Frigid Zone are the colder.  
These five Zones are disposed according to the order of the Zones in heaven; of which thus Ovid Metamorph. 1.  
Utque duae dextra coelum, totidemque sinistra  
Parte secant Zonae, quinta est ardentior illis;  
Sic onus inclusum numero distinxit eodem  
Cura dei, totidemque plagae tellure premuntur.  
Quarum quae media est, non est habitabilis aestu;  
Nix tegit alta duas; totidem inter utramque locavit  
Temperiemque dedit mista cum Frigore Flamma.  
And as two Zones do cut the Heaven's rightside,  
And likewise other two the left divide,  
The midst in heat excelling all the rest;  
Even so it seemed to the Creator best,  
That this our World should so divided be,  
That with the Heavens in Zones it might agree.  
The midst in heat; the outwardmost excel  
In Snow and Ice, scarce fit for men to dwell.  
Betwixt these two extremes, two more are fixed,  
Where heat with cold indifferently is mixed.  
Parallels, called also Aequidistants, circled the Earth from East to West, and are commonly ten Degrees asunder: Such are the Parallels which are set down in our Maps and Globes. But there are another sort of Parallels, two of which go to a Clime: These are called Artificial Parallels because they show the difference of the Artificial days; and are of an unequal breadth, as we shall see in the Table following. The use of these lesser Parallels is to show the Climates.  

〈…〉  0 1 12 15 〈…〉 〈…〉 〈…〉 1 2 12 30 〈…〉 〈…〉 〈…〉 3 12 45 〈…〉 
Heteroscii.  2 4 13 0 〈…〉 〈…〉 〈…〉 5 13 15 〈…〉 3 6 13 30 〈…〉  〈…〉 7 13 45 〈…〉 4 8 14 0 30 47 6 9 Alexandria Egypt. 9 14 15 33 45 5 10 14 30 36 30 5 17 Rhodes and Babylon. 11 14 45 39 2 6 12 15 0 41 22 4 3● Rome and Helesspont. 13 15 15 43 30 7 14 15 30 45 29 3 48 Venice and Mailaine. 15 15 45 47 20 8 16 16 0 49 21 3 13 Poda●a and the Lesser Tartary. 17 16 15 50 23 9 18 16 30 51 58 2 44 Battavia and Wittenberg. 19 16 45 53 17 10 20 17 0 54 29 2 17 Rostoch. 21 17 15 55 34 11 22 17 30 56 37 2 0 Ireland and Muscovy. 23 17 45 57 34 12 24 18 0 58 26 1 40 Bohus a Castle in Norwey. 25 18 15 59 14 13 26 18 30 59 59 1 26 Gothland. 27 18 45 60 40 14 28 19 0 61 18 1 13 Bergen in Norwey. 29 19 15 61 53 15 30 19 30 62 25 1 0 Wiburge in Finland. 31 19 45 62 54 16 32 20 0 63 22 0 52 Arotia in Sweden. 33 20 15 63 46 17 34 20 30 64 6 0 44 The mouth of Darecally a river of Sweeden. 35 20 45 64 30 18 36 21 0 64 49 0 36 Divers places of Norwey. 37 21 15 65 6 19 38 21 30 65 21 0 29 Suecia, Alba, Rusia. 39 21 45 65 35 20 40 22 0 65 47 0 22 With many Lands 41 22 15 65 57 21 42 22 30 66 6 0 17 Thereunto adjoining. 43 22 45 66 14 22 44 23 0 66 20 0 11 Wanting special names 45 23 15 66 25 23 46 23 30 66 28 0 5 And Landmarks. 47 23 45 66 30 24 48 24 0 66 31 0 0 Island under the Arctic circle. 
Periscii.  Here the Climates are accounted by the months, from 56 Degr. 31. min. where the day is 24 hours, unto the Pole itself set at 90. Degrees, where the artificial day is six Menses  These Climates are supposed to pass by Divers Lands within the Arctic circle, as Groenland, Island, Greenland; wherein, as yet, fr the narrownes of these climates coming near together, and the uncertainty of observation, no special places have been assigned, as to the other. 1 67 15 2 69 30 3 73 20 4 78 20 5 84 0 6 90 0  
●ow a Clime, or Climate, is a space of the Earth contained betwixt three Parallels, the middlemost whereof divideth it into two equal parts; serving for setting out the length and shortness of the days in every Country. For under the Aequator the days are of the just length of 12 hours; but afterwards they increase the length of half an hour for every Clime till they come to the length of 24 hours, without night at all; which length attained, they increase no more by hours, but by weeks and months, till they come to the length of half a year. So that we are to reckon 24 Climes Northward, and as many Southward: Those Northward known by the proper name of the place or City over which the middle Parallel of the Clime doth pass, as Dia Meroes', Dia Syenes, etc. Those on the South by the same names, with the addition of Anti, as Anti-Dia-Syenes, Anti-Dia-Meroes, etc. 'Tis true, the ancient Cosmographers made but 7 Climes in all; at the most but nine; Nor needed they to add more, as the case stood with them; the extent of the habitable World towards each of the Poles, not being so fully known to them, as it is to us.  
And here, because those Climes are not of equal breadth or extent of Latitude, but grow narrower and narrower towards each Pole; in which regard it is impossible to describe them under any Rule; I have thought fit to add this ensuing Table, partly framed out of the Commentaries of Clavius on the works of John de Sacro Bosco, and partly out of Hues his Book, Of the use of the Globes. The whole divided into 7 Columns. In the first whereof is showed what Climes are inhabited by the Amphiscii, Periscii, and Heteroscii, which terms we shall anon expound; In the second is set down the number of the Climes themselves; In the third the number of the Parallels; In the fourth the length of the days in Summer; In the fifth the distance of every Clime and Parallel from the Aequator; In the seventh the name of the Town or place, through which the middlemost of the three Parallels doth pass; in this manner following.  

Here followeth the Table of the Climes.  
A second use of these Parallels and other Circles, is for distinction of men in their several dwellings, who are (according as they are treated of in Geography) divided in respect of their shadows into Amphiscii, Periscii, Heteroscii; and in respect of their site and position, into Antoeci, Perïoeci, and Antipodes.  
Amphiscii are such as dwell between the two Tropics: so called, because their shadows are both ways: sometimes (when the Sun is North) to the South; sometimes (when the Sun is South) to the North.  
Periscii are such as dwell beyond the Polar circles: so called, because their shadows are on all sides of them.  
Heteroscii are such as dwell in either of the two temperate Zones: so called, because their shadows reach but one way; viz. in our Zone to the North only; as in the other, to the South only.  
Antoeci are such as dwell under the same Meridian, and the same Latitude or Parallel, equally distant from the Aequator; the one Northward, the other Southward: the days in both places being of a length; but the Summer of the one being the others Winter.  
Perioeci are such as dwell in the same Parallel, on the same side of the Aequator, how distant soever they be East and West: the season of the year, and the length of days being to both alike; but the ones midnight being the others noon.  
Antipodes are such as dwell feet to feet, so as a right line drawn from the one unto the other, passeth from North to South, through the centre of the World. These are distant 180 degrees, which is half the compass of the Earth. They differ in all things, as seasons of the year, length of days, rising and setting of the Sun, with the like. A matter reckoned so ridiculous, and impossible (if not somewhat worse) in the former times, that Boniface Archbishop of Mentz happening to see a Tractate written by Virgilius Bishop of Saltzburg, touching the Antipodes, and not knowing what damnable Doctrine might be couched under that strage name, made complaint first to the Duke of Bohemia, and after to Pope Zacharie, An. 745. by whom the poor Bishop (unfortunate only in being learned in such a time of ignorance) was condemned of Heresy. But Boniface might the rather be excused in regard that many of his betters fell also on the selfsame error. For venerable Bede, a man whose books Archb. Boniface was not worthy to carry, esteemeth the opinion touching the Antipodes, to be no better than a Fable, Neque enim Antipodarum ullatenus est fabulis accommodandu● assensu●, in his Book de Ratione temporum, cap. 32. And yet the marvel is the less, considering that he lived in the darker times of the Church, when the state of learning was in its declination; when S. Augustine and Lactantius, and some others of the Ancient Writers, who lived when learning was at the very height, condemn this point of the Antipodes for an incredible ridiculous Fable: whose words I could put down at large, did I think it necessary. So that we of these Ages have very good cause (to use the words of the late L. Verulam) to congratulate the present times, in that the World in 〈…〉 can be given but the height of the water above the land. Thirdly, so such as land on the shore, the Sea seems to swell into the form of a round hill, till it puts a bound upon our sight. Now that the Sea hover thus over and above the Earth, doth not over-whelm ●●, 〈◊〉 he ●●cri●●ed only to his Power and Providence, who hath made the Waters to stand on the heap, who hath set them abound that they shall not pass, nor turn again to cover the Earth. The other as longing rather to Philosophers, than this present Argument.  
The Sea of Water is divided into 

1. Oceanus.  
2. Mare  
3. Fr●●●●●.  
4. Sinus.  
5. Lacus.  
6. Flumina.   Of which and other Waters thus saith Ovid in his Metamorphosis, 
 
 
 
  
Which may be Englished to this purpose:  
He spread the Seas, which then he did command  
To swell with winds, and compass round the land:  
To those he adds Springs, Ponds, and Lakes immense,  
And Rivers which their winding Borders fence.  
Of these not few Earth's thirsty jaws devour,  
The rest their streams into the Ocean pour,  
When in that liquid Plain with freer Wave,  
The foamy Cliffs instead of Banks they 〈◊〉.  
And first 〈◊〉 the Ocean is that general Collection of all waters, which ●●compasseth the Earth on every side. A point which Ovid hath determined right enough, but 〈◊〉 a● by Herodian in the former times; who counted it a 〈…〉 for any man to 〈◊〉 or write that the Earth was round, or encompassed about with the main Ocean. But modern Navigations have found that to be true, which he held ridiculous; and which the 〈◊〉 learned in those times knew rather by conjecture, than by demonstration. Nor were those Ages so acquainted with those ebbs and flow of the Ocean, and all those other Seas and Rivers which have intercourse with it, as the meanest Sailor at the present. The natural causes of the which seeming so full of difficulty to the best of the Antipoes, Experience hath taught us to ascribe wholly to the Moon, at whose Full and Prime the Tides are ever highest, and the Sea 〈◊〉 furious. For as soon as the Moon cometh forth from under our 〈◊〉, the Sea 〈◊〉 to swell, and floweth towards the East, (as it were to wait upon her, or bear her company) 〈…〉 come unto the height of our Meridean: after which till her setting or Western fall, the Sea abateth or decreaseth; which we call the Ebb. And when she passeth out of our 〈◊〉 towards the Antipodes, the Ocean begins to swell till the height of Midnight, and coming towards our Hemisphere doth again abate. In brief, from the New Moon till the first quarter the Sea decreaseth, from the first quarter to the full it is said to spring; from the full to the last quarter it is said to ●●pe; and from the last quarter to the 〈◊〉 it springs again. As for the uncertainty of the Tides, varying every day, it is not so perplexed and intricate, but that they which live on the Banks or Shores thereof, know well when to look for it, the next days Tide coming for the most part one hour, 10. minutes after the time it happened on the day foregoing.  
2. Mare, the Sea, is a part of the main Ocean, to which 〈◊〉 cannot come but through some 〈◊〉 or Straight; as More 〈◊〉. And it 〈◊〉 name, First, either from the adjacent shore, as More 〈◊〉, from the City of 〈…〉, from the Coast of Tus●●nie; Or, Secondly, from the first Discoverer, as 〈…〉, from 〈◊〉 who first ●ound it; Or, Thirdly, from some remarkable Accident, as Mare 〈…〉, from the drowning of 〈◊〉 the son of Dedalus.  
3. 〈◊〉, a 〈◊〉, is a part of the Ocean, penned within narrow bounds, and opening a way into some Sea, or out of some Sea into the Ocean; as the Straight of hellespont, Gibrather, 〈…〉, etc.  
4. 〈◊〉 a 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 is a Sea contained within a crooked or circling sho●e, wherewith it is almost environed; as 〈…〉, etc. and this is sometimes called a Gulf, as the Gulf of 〈◊〉.  
5. 〈◊〉, a 〈◊〉, is a 〈◊〉 body or collection of waters which hath no visible intercouse with the Sea, or influx into it, as the Lake of Thrasimene in Italy, the Lacus Asphaltites, or the Dead Sea in the Land of Canaan. And of this kind properly is the Mare Caspium, though by reason of the greatness of it, it is called a Sea.  
6. Flumina or Fluvius, is a watercourse continually running, whereby it differeth from Stagnum, or a standing Pool, issuing from some Spring or Lake, and emptying itself into some part of the Sea, or some other great River, the mouth or outlet of which is called Ostium, Tiberinaque long Ostia, as the Poet hath it. These are conceived in the Earth, and derive both their birth and continual sustenance from the Air; which piercing the open chinks or Chasma's of the Earth, and congealed by the extreme cold of that Element, dissolves into water (as we see the Air in winter-nights to be melted into a pearly dew, sticking on our glass-windows) and being grown to some quantity, will (like Annibal in the Alps) either find a way, or make a way, to vent its superfluity. Which beginning is seconded by the Ocean, which running through the hidden passages of the Earth, joineth itself with this aerial vapour, and continueth the begun current. This Sea-water (though in itself of a salt and brackish savour, yet) passing through divers windings and turnings of the Earth, is deprived of all unpleasantnets; and by how much the spring-heads of Rivers are remote from the Sea, by so much usually are their waters affected with a delightful relish. Rivers having thus entered themselves into a good course, are never without the assistance of neighbouring springs and waters, by whose addition they augment their streams, till they dischannel themselves into the Sea. Now there is of Rivers a treble use. First, that out of them drink may be afforded to man and beast. Secondly, that running through the earth, as blood through the body, by interlacing it, and sometimes overwhelming it, it might make the Earth able to produce those fruits which are necessary for the life of man. The last use of Rivers is, easiness and speediness of conduct; and hereto are required four conditions. First the depth, because deep waters sustain the bigger burdens, and on them navigation is more safe. Secondly, pleasantness, whereby the passage is easy both with the stream and against it: whereas in Rivers of a violent current, or such as fall down by great locks or Cataracts, the sailing or rowing up the water is as dangerous, as laborious. Thirdly, the thickness of the water: for by how much the more slimy and gross a water is, by so much can it carry the heavier burdens. So Tiber, a River of more fame than depth, or breadth, is better for navigation, by reason of its fatness, than the pure and thin waters of the large and excellent River Niliu. Fourthly, the broadness of the channel, that ships and other vessels may conveniently wind and turn, and give way to each other. Some of the old Philosophers reputed this conduct so dangerous, that one of them being asked whether he thought the living or the dead were the greater number, would not declare himself, because he knew not in which rank to place such as were at Sea. And Cato Major thought that men never committed greater folly in their lives, than in venturing to go by water, when they might have gone by land. I am none of that Sect, yet I cannot but hold with him that said, Dulcissima est ambulatio prope aquas, navigatio juxta terram.  
The chief Rivers of Europe, are Danubius, and the Rhine; of Africa, Nilus, and Niger; of Asia, Ganges, and Euphrates; of America, Orenoque, and Maragnan. Of which and others, more in its proper place.  
Thus have we gone over these particulars both of Earth and Water, which are considerable in Geography, and come within the compass of those Annexaries of each, which Ptolemy calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉: And having so done, may discover where the difference lieth between Geographie and chorography, which to some men, not rightly looking into the nature of both, seem to be the same. For howsoever a Chorographer doth describe a Country by the bounds, rivers, hills, and most notable Cities; yet it is still but the description of some place or Country, and not of the whole Earth universally, which is the proper work of a Geographer. So that Chorography differeth from Geography as a part from the whole: that being as Ptolemy doth very handsomely express it, like the painting of an eye or an ear, or some other member; this, as the picturing of the head or whole body of man. But Geography in its full latitude comprehendeth not Chorography only, but topography and hydrography also. Of these the last is the delineation of the Sea by its several names, Ports, Promontories, Creeks and other affections, as also of great Lakes and Rivers. Which is most necessary for the use of Mariners, and is best done by Petrus de Medina, Peter Nonnius in his Regulae Artis Navigandi, and Johannes Aurigarius in his Speculum Nauticum, the chief Writers in the Art of Pilotisme.  
Topography is the description of some particular place or City; of which kind was the Book of Stephanas 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or De Vrbius, among the Ancients, and the Theatrum Vrbium written by Bruinus in these later times; Stows Book of the Survey of London, the French Antiquities de Paris, and such as these. And of this kind is the description of the Vale of Tempe, in the greater Ortelius; and those of the Elysian fields, the gardens of Alcinous, and the Hesperedes in the ancient Poets.  
3. chorography (as before was said) is the exact description of some Kingdom, Country, or particular Province of the same; unless this last may fall more properly under the notion of chorography. Of this kind the description of the several estates of Greece written by Pausanias, is of most use and reputation of all the Ancients: as that of Camden Glarenteux for the I'll of Britain, of Lewis Guicciardine for the Low Countries, Leander for Italy, etc. are amongst the Moderns.  
Fourthly, Geography finally is 〈◊〉 aggregate of all these together, borrowing from 〈◊〉 the description of Seas and Waters From Topography▪ that of Towns Cities, and particular plac●▪ And from Chorography, the delineation of Regions, Provinces, and Kingdoms; which brought into a body, make up that Portraiture o● Picture of the whole Earth, and every considerable part thereof, in writing, which, according to Ptolemy's definition before mentioned, is properly and truly called Geography. In the advancement of which studies, those which have took 〈◊〉 pains, with the greatest benefit to Posterity, are the said Ptolemy, Plime, and Strabo for the elder times, Mercator, Maginus, and Ortelius for the later Ages. Of which the two first lived in the times of Antoninus Pius the Roman Emperor, Anno Chr. 141. or hereabouts; the other in the reign of Tiberius Caesar, the unworthy Successor of Augustus: the three last flourishing in the days of our Fathers, about some 80 years ago.  
Thus have I briefly summed up those general Praecognita, which I conceive are necessary to the knowledge and understanding as well of History as of Geography. Out of which two compounded and intermixed ariseth that universal Comprehension of Natural and Civil story, which by a proper and distinct name may be termed Cosmography. And this may well be reckoned amongst mixed stories; for it hath from Natural History or Geography, the Regions themselves, together with their Sites, and several Commodities; from Civil History, Habitations, Governments, and Names; and from the Mathematics, the Climates, and Configurations of the Heavens, under which the Coasts and Quarters of the World do lie. Of the Utility and excellency of which study I need say no more than what hath been already spoken of the several parts, whereof this is only the Result: desiring pardon of the Reader, that I have christened these imperfect and unworthy Papers by so noble a name; which I desire they may deserve, though I fear they will not. However I will give the venture, and make as speedy and as profitable a discovery, as the times enable me, of the whole World, and the most observable things therein, according to the best light which the reading of Histories and Geographical discourses hath supplied me with; beseeching him who made the World, and ordereth all the Governments and Affairs thereof as to him seems best, to bless me in the undertaking; and furnish me with fit Abilities both of strength and judgement to go thorough with it. Ipse enim est qui operatur in nobis & velle & perficere; as the Scripture hath it: And so on in God's name.    

cosmography. The First Book, CONTAINING THE chorography AND HISTORY OF ITALY, the ALPINE Provinces, FRANCE, SPAIN, and BRITAIN; with the ISLES thereof.  
BY PETER HEYLYN.  
Florus in Prooem. l. 1. Populus Romanus à Rege Romulo ad Caesarem Augustum ita latè per orbem terrarum arma circumtulit, ut quires ejus legunt, non unius Populi, sed generis humani facta discant.  
Velleius Patercul. Hist. Quemadmodum Urbium Imperiorumque, ita & Gentium nunc floret fortuna, nunc senscit, nunc interit.  
LONDON, Printed by W. W. for Henry Seile over against St. Dunstan's Church in Fleetstreet. 1652.   


EUROPAE Descriptio Nova Impensis HENRICI SEILE Ro: Vaugsian sculp 1652   map of Europe   

cosmography. The First Book, Containing the CHOROGRAPIE and HISTORY of ITALY, the ALPINE Provinces, FRANCE, SPAIN, and BRITAIN, with the ISLES thereof.  

OF THE WORLD, And first of EUROPE.  
OF the Creation of the World by Almighty God, and the Plantations of the same by the sons of Men, sufficient hath been spoken already. We are to look upon it now, as perfected and peopled in all parts thereof, but all those parts united into one Compositum; called therefore by the Grecians 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, & 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because the Summa totalis, and general comprehension of all things existent. In which respect called by the Latins, Universum, a name of multitude; but of a multitude united, (Universi qui in uno loco versi, say the old Grammarians.) The great body of the World, like the body of man, though it have many parts and members, is but one body only. A body of so perfect and exact a form, of so complete a Symmetry in respect of the particular parts, and all those parts so beautified and adorned by the God of Nature, that from the elegancy and beauties of it, it was called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by the Grecians, and Mundus by the Latins; both names deckiring the Composure of it to be full of Ornament; and all those Ornaments conducting mankind to the knowledge of God. For (as the Christian Advocate reasoneth very strongly,) As he which comes into an house, and seeth all things in it ordered in a beautiful and comely order, utrisque praeesse crederet Dominum, etc. Must needs conceive, both that the house had some wise Lord and Master who had so contrived it, and that such Lord and Master of it was of more worth and excellency than the house and furniture: So (saith he) whosoever doth observe the most eminent beauties of the Heaven and Earth, most needs conceive there is some great and more glorious power who did first create it, disposing of all things therein in such excellent manner..  
This contemplation, together with the notions of a Deity which naturally are engrafted in ● the soul of man; hath trained up all men in the practice of some Religion, though few (comparatively) so happy as to be practised in the true. For though the knowledge and worship of the true God, by reason of some accessions in America and the Indies, be more generally diffused than in former times, yet is the least part of the World possessed by them who make profession of that Worship. For, dividing the whole World into 30 parts, it hath been found by such as have laboured in this search, that 19 of them are inhabited by Idolaters, who either know no God at all, or worship stocks and stones for Gods, even the work of men's hands. Of the 11 parts which are remaining, fix are possessed by Jews, Turks, and Saracens; who though they have the knowledge of God that made them, yet abnegating, or not worshipping the Lord that bought them, they have no part nor portion in the true Religion. Then for the five which are behind, two are conceived to be of the Greek Communion; the other three being divided betwixt ●hose of the Church of Rome, and such as otherwise differing in some opinions, pass generally by the name of Protestant, or Reformed Churches. Which as it showeth how small a portion of the World is possessed by Christiaus, who only (though not all of them) have reason to pretend to the true Religion: So doth it show (I note this only by the way) how falsely those of Rome make Multitude of Professors to be a sign of the True Church; and then conceive themselves to be such a multitude as corresponds unto that sign. Faulty alike both in the Position and the Application. For if the multitude of Professors be a sign of the Church, the true Church should be found rather amongst the Heathens or mahometans, than amongst the Christians; or if they do restrain their meaning (as I hope they do) to those who make profession of the Christian faith, those of the Greek Communion, possessing two whole parts of five, will be found more numerous than the members of the Church of Rome, though possibly of less esteem in the eye of the World. So infinitely vain was that Brag of Bellarmine (though otherwise more modest than the rest the Jesuits) affirming positively and expressly, Romanam Ecclesiam universam plane orbed possidere; ●. e. That the Church of Rome is fully of as large a latitude as the World itself. This I have noted by the way, intending to take a more special notice● of the state of Religion in the several Provinces of the World, to which now I hasten, premising first this scheme of those several parts into which it doth now stand divided.  
THe WORLD is divided into two parts. 

Unknown, or not fully discovered; and is divided commonly into Borealis and Australis▪ the last taking up the whole Southern Continent; the other lying on the North of Europe and America; whereof we shall say somewhat at the end of this Work.  
Known either 

Anciently, as 

Europe.  
Asia.  
Africa.    
Lately, as America.      
Europe is joined to Asia by that space of earth which is between the heads of Tanais and Duina; Asia is joined to afric by the Egyptian Isthmus; America is divided (as most conjecture) from all of them. Europe is separated from Asia by a line drawn from the Bay of St. Nicolas, to the head of Tanais, from thence by that River itself all the length of his course; then by Palus Moeotis, the Euxine Sea, the Thracian Bosphorus, the Propontis, the Hellespont, and the Aegean. Asia is parted from afric by the Red-Sea, or Gulf of Arabia: And Africa from Europe by the Mediterranean. Africa is greater than Europe, Asia than afric, and America than Asia.  
They which have entertained a fancy of resembling every Country to things more obvious to the sight and understanding, have likened Europe to a Dragon; the head of which they make to be Spain; the two wings Italy and Denmark. In like manner they have been curiously impertinent, in resembling France to a Lozenge or Rhomboides; Belgium, to a Lion; Britain, to an Axe; Ireland to an Egg; Peloponnesus to a Plantain leaf; Spain, to an Ox hide spread on the ground; Italy (which indeed holdeth best proportion) to a man's Leg; with divers the like phantasms of a capricious brain: these Countries no more resembling them, than pictures made when painting was in her infancy; under which they were fain to write, this is a Lion, and this is a Whale, for fear the spectators might have taken one for a Cock, and the other for a Cat.  
EUROPE, though the least (as being in length but 2800, in breadth but 1200 miles) is yet of most renown amongst us. First, because of the temperature of the Air, and fertility of the soil. Secondly, from the study of Arts, both ingenuous and mechanical. Thirdly, because of the Roman and Greek Monarchies. Fourthly, from the purity and sincerity of the Christian Faith. Fiftly, because we dwell in it, and so first place it.  
EUROPE is generally said to be so called from Europa the daughter of Agenor King of the Phoenicians, brought thence by Jupiter (as the Poets feign) in the shape of a Bull; or as some Histories say, by a Cretan Captain named Taurus: as others, in a Ship whose Beak had the portraiture of a Bull upon it. But why the bringing of that Lady into the I'll of Crete, should give denomination to the whole Continent of Europe, whereof that Island is so inconsiderable and so small a part, I must confess I see no reason. Goropius Becanus, who holds the high Dutch to be the primitive language which was spoke in Paradise, and loves to fetch all names from thence, not thinking ic convenient, that Europe, being first inhabited by Gomerians or Cimbrians, should be beholding to the Grecians for its name; will have it called Europe, quasi Ver-hop, by the transposition of the two first letters: Ver signifying excellent, and Hop a multitude (whence we use to say, as thick as Hops) because Europe contains a multitude of excellent people. And on the other side, Bochartus a French Writer, loving as much to bring all names from the Phoenician or Punic tongue, will have it called Europe, from Ur-appa, which signifieth in that language, a beautiful countenance, because the Europaeans much excelled the Africans in whiteness of skin, and clearness of complexion. But in my mind Herodotus hath best determined of the controversy, who telleth us plainly, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. That it is utterly unknown, both whence it had the name of Europe, and who first called it so. And yet considering there is a Province in Thrace called Europe, (whereof more hereafter,) why might not the A●ratick▪ give the name of Europe to this part of the World, according to the name of that Province which lay nearest to them, as the Romans did the name of afric to the other part of the World, after the name of that particular Province or part thereof which they first brought under their obedience? Or as the Europaeans gave the name of Asia to the greatest of the three known parts of the World, which properly and originally belonged unto Asia Minor, (as it since was called;) or rather to those parts thereof which lay next to Greece; as shall be shown hereafter in convenient place.  
The first Inhabitants of Europe, as hath been shown in part already, and shall be shown more fully in its proper place, were the sons of Japhet, amongst whom, as the Scripture telleth us, the Isles of the Gentiles were divided, Gen. 10. v. 5. which includes all the Continent of Europe and the Isles adjoining. For besides that it is compassed about with the Cyelades and other Isles in the Seas of Greece, together with the Lands of Candie, Sicily, Sardinia, Corsica, the Isles of Britain and Zealand, with their young ones adjacent: Europe itself was formerly taken for an Island, as being environed round with water, saving where it is joined on the North-East to Asia the great, which very few of the Ancients were acquainted with. And what are the great Countries of Anatolia, Greece, Spain, and Italy, all which did fall to the Posterity of Japhet, but so many Peninsula's or Demy-Ilands environed almost round with one Sea or other? Nor was the name and memory of Japhet so much forgotten by the Children which descended of him; but that the Greeks who were the first of their European Plantations, retained it a long time in their japetus, whom they make to be the son of Coelum and Terra, and the father of the wise Prometheus, whom Ovid therefore calleth Satus japeto, in the first Book of his Metamorphosi●. So that we see how punctually the first part of God's blessing was fulfilled upon him; which was, that he would enlarge the borders of Japhet, Gen. 9 27. The second part thereof, that he should dwell in the tents of Sem, though it was long before it came to the accomplishment, yet it came at last, and that both in the literal and mystical sense. First in the literal, when the posterity of Japhet both Greeks and Romans, made themselves Masters of Judaea or the Land of Canaan, and the Eastern parts, promised to and possessed by the seed of Sem: Next in the mystical, when God was pleased to break down the partition-wall, and to incorporate the Gentiles of the house of Japhet into the body of the Church, which for a long time was restrained to the Line of Sem.  
Europe may be considered as it stands divided into the Continent and the Lands: the Continent lying altogether; the Lands as they are dispersed in the Greek, Aegean, Cretan and joniah Seas, the Adriatic and the Mediterranean; and in the British and Northern Ocean. But in this work we shall discover them, and discourse of them in this following order, dividing Europe into 1. Italy, 2. the Alpet, 3. France, 4. Spain, 5. Britain, 6. Belgium, 7. Germany, 8. Denmark, 9 Swethland, 10. Russia, 11. Poland, 12. Hungary, 13. Sclavonia, 14. Dacia, and 15. Greece; and speaking of the several Lands as they relate to some or other of these greater Countries.  
In all which Countries and the Lands belonging to them, besides the Latin Tongue which is the now rather Sholasticall than national; and besides the Italian, French, and Spanish, being but as so many corruptions of the Latin; and besides the English which is a Compound of Dutch, Latin and French; there are in all 14. Mother-Tongues, which owe nothing at all to the Roman; that is to say, 1. Irish, spoken in Ireland, and the West of Scotland; 2. British, or Welsh, in Wales, and some parts of Cornwall. 3. Cantabrian, or Basquish, in Biscay, about the Pyrenean hills, and near to the Cantabrian Ocean. 4. Arabic in the Mountains of Granada, called Alp●xarras. 5. Finn●ek, in Finland and Lapland, Provinces of the Crown of Sweden. 6. Dutch, (though with different Dialects) in Germany, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Swethland. 7. Cauchian, which the East Friezlanders (or Cauchi) speak amongst themselves, though to strangers they speak the Common Dutch. 8. Sclavonish, in Sclavonia, Poland, Hungary, and almost all the parts of the Turkish Empire. 9 Illyrian, on the East side of Istria, and the I'll of Veggia. 10. Greek, in most Provinces and Isles of Greece, by the Greeks themselves. 11. Hungarian; and 12. Epirotique, in the mountainous places of those Country's. 13. Jazygian, on the North side of Hungary, betwixt Danubius and Tibiscus; and 14. Tartarian, in the Taurica Chersonesus, and other European parts of that barbarous people. And this shall serve for Europe in the general notion. Descend we now to the particular Kingdoms, Regions, and Lands of it; beginning first of all with Italy, contrary to the usage of most Geographers, who commonly begin with Spain or Ireland, as being the furthest Countries Westward, and consequently nearest to the first Meridian from whence the Longitude was reckoned. Which we shall do by reason of that great influence which the Romans had in most parts of Europe, and many parts of the World besides, in matters as well Civil as Ecclesiastical, which much depended on the power of that Empire formerly, and on the usurpations of that Church in the later days.   

OF ITALY.  
ITALY, once the Empress of the greatest part of the (then known) World, is compassed with the Adriatic, Ionian, and Tyrrhenian Seas, except it be towards France and Germany, from which it is parted by the Alps; so that it is in a manner a Peninsula, or Demy-Iland. But more particularly, it hath on the East, the lower part of the Adriatic, and the Ionian Sea, by which it is divided from Greece; on the West the River Varus, and some part of the Alps, by which it is parted from France; on the North, in some parts the Alps which divide it from Germany; and on the other parts the Adriatic, which divides it from Dalmatia; and on the South the Tyrrhenian or Tuscan Seas, by which it is separated from the main land of Africa.  
It containeth in length from Augusta Praetoria (now called Aost) at the foot of the Alps, unto Otranto in the most Eastern point of the Kingdom of Naples, 1020. miles: in breadth from the River Varo which parts it from Province, to the mouth of the River Arsia in Friuly, where it is broadest, 410. miles; about Otranti where it is narrowest, not above 25. miles; and in the middle parts, from the mouth of Pescara in the Adriatic or Upper Sea, to the mouth of Tiber in the Tuscan or Lower Sea, 126. miles. The whole compass by Sea, reckoning in the windings and turnings of the shore, comes to 3038. miles; which added to the 410. miles which it hath by land, make up in all 34.48. miles. But if the Coast on each side be reckoned by a strait Line, than it falls very short of this proportion, amounting in the total as Castaldo computes it, to no more than 2550. miles. The whole Country lieth under the fifth and sixth Climates of the Northern temperate Zone, which it wholly taketh up: so that the longest day in the most Northern parts is 15. hours, and three fifth parts of an hour; the longest in the Southern parts falling short a full hour and no more of that length.  
But these dimensions must be understood of Italy in the present latitude and extent thereof, and not as it was called and counted of in the times of the Romans, neither in the growth nor flourishing fortunes of that State: The bounds of Italy on the West, and North-Western parts being then the River Rubicon which runneth into the Adriatic, not far from Ravenna, and the River Arno, which runneth into the Tyrrhenian Seas, by the Port of Ligorn. All that lay Westwards toward the Alps, as it was possessed by the Gauls, so had it also the name of Gallia, and for dictinctions sake, of Gallia Cis-Alpina, and Togata, whereof we shall speak more when we come to Lombardie. And it continued, (though a Province of the Roman Empire) distinct from Italy, until the Empire of Augustus; who dividing Italy for the better Government thereof into eleven Provinces or Regions, divided Gallia-Cisalpina into several parts, (whereof more anon) and reckoned them as Provinces or Members of the Body of Italy.  
The names hereof so bounded as before, are said to have been very many, according to the several Nations which were anciently of most power and authority in it; or to the several fancies of the Name-giver: whereof some being the names only of particular Provinces, were by a Metanimy taken for and applied to the whole. Of this last sort, to omit others of less note, were Latium and Ausonia, the Ausones being a people dwelling about Cales, a town of Campania; and Latium, that particular Province which lieth on the East of Tiber, so called as most Writers are of opinion, à latendo, from hiding, because Saturn being driven from Crete by Jupiter, hic latebat abditus, did here live concealed;— Latiumque vocari Maluit, his quoniam latuisset tutus in Oris, as the Poet hath it.  
Nor was this Virgil's fancy only, but a Tradition general, followed and allowed of by the greatest Writers, as by Europius, and Herodian, and by Minutius Felix also: though Varro● pretending to more than ordinary knowledge in Antiquity, would have it called Latium, quod lateat inter praecipitia Alpium & Apennini, as Servius in his notes on Virgil, because it lieth hidden (as it were) under the praecipices of the Alps and Apennine hills, which cannot possibly be said of Italy properly and anciently so called, no part whereof came near the Alps. The more general names of the whole Country, were, 1. Hesperia, from Hesperus the son of Atlas, as the Poets say, or rather as Macrobius is of opinion, from Hesperus the Evening Star, as being seated Westward in regard of Greece. 2. Oenotria, either from the abundance and excellency of the wines, wine being called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by the Grecians; or as most think from Oenotrus an Arcadian King, one of the first Planters of the Country; And 3. Italia, the name at first of that part of this Continent which was after called Calabria, as shall there be evidenced, and by degrees communicated to the rest of the Country: So named from Italus, a chief Commander of some Nations that settled here. Of these three thus the Poet Virgil.  
Est lo●us, Hesperiam Gr●●i cogn●●ine dicu●,  
Terra antiqua, yet 〈◊〉 armis, atque ubere gl●ba,  
Oenotrii colu●re viri; 〈◊〉 Fa●● minores  
Italiam di●cisce ducis de 〈◊〉, Gentem.  
Which may be Englished in th●se words.  
That Which the Greeks Hosperia called, a place  
Great both in Arms and Wealth, first planted was  
By the Oe●otrians; since, if Fame not lie,  
Was from their Chief-●ains name called Italy.  
Who and from whence this Italus was, we shall see ere long. Mean time we will take notice of those honorary Attributes which have been given unto this Country, so denominated from him: by Aethieus called Regina Mundi, the Queen or Empress of the World. By Mamertinus one of the old Panegyrists, Gentium Domin●●, the Mistress of N●tions; by others, Paradison Mundi, the terrestrial Paradise. But what need more be said than is spoken by Plini●, who hath adorned Italy with this following Panegyric? Italia terrarum 〈◊〉 alu●●a, ●adem & parens, 〈◊〉 Deûm electa quae Coelum ipsum clarius faceret, spersa congregaret imporia, ritus mollieret, tot popul●●um discords 〈◊〉 as sermonis commercio ad calloquia distraeheret, & humamitati hominem daret. Italy (saith he) the Parent, and withal the Foster-Child of all other Nations, was elected by the providence of the Gods, to make (if possible) the very Heavens themselves more famous; to gather the scattered Empires of the World into one body, to temper the barbarous Rites of uncivilized people, to unite the disagreeing languages of so many men by the benefit of one common tongue; and in a word, to restore man to his humanity. A very high Encon●ion doubtless, and yet not much more than the place deserver, with reference to the times when the Author lived.  
The people anciently, (and to this day they still partake somewhat of those qualities) were wary of behaviour, sparing of expense, and most greedy of glory, according unto that of Tully, Semper appetentes gloriae praeter cester●s nationes sunt Romani: by which he doth not mean those only who lived within the wall● of the City of Rome, but also their Italian neighbours and associates, Romans by privilege and freedom, though not by birth. They have twice given the Law to the fairest, and most puissant parts of the World, once by their Valour, when the greatest part of the (then known) World was brought under the obedience of the State of Rome, the standing body of whose Armies was principally compounded of Italian bands. And Secondly, by their Wit, by which they have subdued a great part of Christendens, to the obedience of the Pope and Court of Rome, the standing body of whose Counsel (though he have Ministers of all tempers and motions) do specially consist of Italian Heads. In former times here lived the renowned Captains, Camillus the Sword, and Fabius Maximus the Suckler of Rome; the two Scipios, one of which subdued afric, and the other Asia; Pompey the great, who extended the Roman Empire Eastwards to the banks of Euphrates; Caesar, the greater of the two, enlarging it Westward to the British, and the Belgic Ocean; besides infinite others of less note in respect of these, though most deserving in themselves. Here flourished also the famous Orators, Cicero, Hortensius, and Anto●i●s; the renowned Historians, Livy, Tacitus, and Sal●stius, the memorable Poets, Virgil, Ovid, Ca●ullus, Tibullus, and Properti●s; Plantus and Terence the Comedians; the Satynists, Horace, J●●vanal, and Persius. So equally were they favoured both by More and the Muses, that it is not easy to determine whether they were most eminent in A●●s or Arms. What men of special eminence it hath since produced, we shall see hereafter, when we are come to take a view of Italy as it stands at present; and to that place we shall de●er our Observations of the Rivers, Air, and disposition of the soil, with such other particulars as have received little or no alteration in the change of times.  
Italy was anciently divided, as most Countries else, into Tribes and Nations, as the Latins, Sabines, Tuscans, Samnites, Campans, Picentini, Pic●●i, Ligures, Tare●tim, Lucani, and others of inferior note, whom we shall meet with in the description of those several States into which it doth now stand divided. But all those Nations being severally vanquished by the Roman ●●issance, and made up into one body, whereof Rome was the head; it pleased Angustus to divide it into eleven Regions, us before was said, that is to say, Liguria, Hetruria, Latium, Campania ●lambria, Samni●m, Picenn●●, Gallia, Italia Transpada●●, Venetia and Histria. In the time of the Emperor Antoninus, the Provinces of Italy were increased to sixteen, the bounds of the former Region being somewhat altered; and the three Isles of Sicily, Corsica, and Sardinia, with the two Rhetias first and second added to the number. But being that this distribution received some change in the time of Constantine the Great, who altering both the names and bounds of the former Provinces, and adding one more to them, made 17 in all, that is to say, Tuscia and Umbria, a Picenunt Suburbicarium, 3 Campania, 4 Apulia and Calabria, 5 Valeria, 6 Samnium, 7 Lucania and the Brutii, 8 Sicily, 9 Corsica, and 10 Sardini●, which made up the praefecture of the City of Rome, 11 Flaminia and Picenum Annon●rium, 12 Veneti●, 13 Aentilia, 14 Liguria, 15 Alps Castiae, 16 Rhaetia prima, and 17 Rhaetia secunda, which made up the Diocese of Italy, properly and especially so called, whereof Milan was the first Metropolitan City, Aquile 〈◊〉 afterwards.  
The Language heretofore was divers, according to the several Provinces and people of it. In Apulia they used the Mesapian tongue; in that which is now called Calabria, they spoke the Greek; in Hetruria they used the Tuscan, and the Latin in Latium: which last so altered in short time, by reason of the commerce they had with the conquered Nations, that the Articles of the Peace made between the Romans and Carthaginians at the expulsion of the Tarquins, could not be understood (as Polybius saith) by the best Antiquaries of his time. And yet the time between the making of those Articles, and the time of Polybius, who was Contemporary with Scipio Africanus, there passed not above 300 years. That the Latin tongue was afterwards at any time spoke generally in all parts of the Roman Empire, or of Italy itself, as I see some hold, I can by no means be persuaded; it being by special favour granted to the Ci●●ans dwelling but an hundred miles from the walls of Rome, that they should use the Roman language; which had been a mere mockery, and no mark of favour at all, if these Italian people dwelling out of Latium, had used it formerly. And yet this happened not above 140 years before the times of the Emperors, at what time the Romans were Lords of Italy, Sicily, Sardinia, Corsica, and great part or Spain. And though the Latin tongue in succeeding times came to be understood in most parts of Italy, by reason of the Roman Colonies which were planted amongst them (being in all no fewer than 150) and their continual resort to Rome on their several businesses: it being a great point of the Roman State, not only to have their Laws written, and judgement pronounced by the Praetors for the several Provinces, in the Latin only; but to give Audience in the open Senate to none who came thither from the subject Nations, save only in the Latin tongue, their own proper language. Yet for all this, it never grew to such extent to be the Language of the whole Empire, no nor of Italy itself; no more than the English tongue is natural or national to the Welsh or Irish, though it be generally understood (for the very same reasons) by all of the better sort both in Wales and Ireland. In which regard I am not of their opinion, who think that the Italian (as the French and Spanish) are nothing but corruptions of the Latin tongues occasioned by the inundations of the barbarous Nations. But rather that the Latin words which occur therein, proceeded from that weak impression which the Latin tongue had made amongst them, whilst they were under the obedience of that puissant Empire; and that the Italian tongue as it is now spoken, could not receive so great a change from the barbarous Nations, none of which tarried long amongst them, but the Goths and Lombard's; nor they so long (the Lombard's not at all in the Eastern parts) as to be either the occasions or authors of the alteration. So that the present language of Italy is a decompound, made up especially of Latin and the old Italian; some notions of the Lombard being mixed with it in the North and West, some of the Gothish in the midst, about Rome itself; and not a little of the Greek in the East of Naples.  
And as the Language, so the Religion of the Country hath received some change. The Christian Faith was first preached in Rome itself, and in Rome first preached by Saint Peter, who came thither in or about the beginning of the Empire of Claudius. The two Apostles Peter and Paul, are generally said by the ancient Writers to be the first who preached the Gospel in that City. A duobus Apostolis Petro & Paulo Romae fundata & constituta est Ecclesia, saith the old Father Irenaeus. Lib. 4. cap. 3. To one of these the first preaching of the Gospel there is to be referred; both being Bishops of that City: That is to say, St. Peter of the Churches of the Circumcision, St. Paul of those which consisted specially of the Gentiles. Now that the Gospel was preached there before Paul's coming, is evident by his Epistle written to the Rmans at Cenchrea the Port-town of Corinth, six years at least before his being brought to Rome; in which he testifieth, that their Faith was famous over all the World, and therefore could not count him who had never been there, for the planter of it: And as St. Peter was the first preacher of the Gospel at Rome, so sent he his Disciples to promulgate it in most parts of Italy. The Roman Martyrologies reckon up eight Bishops of St. Peter's making for so many of the principal Cities of this Country; that is to say, Ephaphroditus (not he whom Saint Paul speaks of in his Epistle to the Philippians) for Terracina, of old called Auxur, Hermagoras for Aquilia, Paulinus for Luca, Apollinaris for Ravenna, Marcus for Atina, Prosdocimus for Milan, Marcianus for Syracuse, and Pancratius for Tauromemum in the Isle of Sicily: But whether St. Peter planted it, or St. Paul watered it, certain I am that GOD only gave it the increase. It could not else have prospered under such a tyranny, as many, if not most of the Roman Emperors, did earnestly endeavour to suppress it with. But sanguis Martyrum semen Ecclesiae; the watering of it by the blood of so many Martyrs made it grow the faster. And this small grain of Mustardseed waxed so great a tree, as over-shaddowed all the Provinces of that mighty Empire, and did not only stand it out against all Tempests, but in conclusion did suppress that Superstition and Idolatry, for whose sake all those Princes till the time of Constantine, did, more or less, labour to destroy it. How much it hath receded since those times from its primitive purity, and how it did degenerate into Worldly pomp, and Secular policy, by the design and arts of those who boast themselves to be Successors to that great Apostle, shall be a little touched at in the story of the Roman Papacy. Suffice it in this place to say, that all the people of this Country, partly in reverence to the Pope, partly for fear of the Inquisition, and partly by being kept in ignorance of the Protestant Doctrine (of which they are taught to believe many monstrous things) are all of the Religion of the Church of Rome.  
But though the Fountains of the waters of Eternal life, have either been stopped, or else corrupted by the Popes of Rome; the Rivers which do water this most flourishing Garden still preserve their beds, and run unmixed and uncorrupted in the same channels, as before they did. And of these Italy hath as many as any one Country, but none of any long course, by reason that all parts of it are so near some Sea, most of which rising from the Alps, or the Apennine Hills, by melting of the snows in Winter, and casualty of Land-floods at other times of the year, do often overflow the Country, and for the most part leave an ill Air behind them. Those of chief note are, 1 the River Po, or Padus (the Greeks call it the Eridanus) into which Phaeton is said to have been drenched when he fell from Heaven. It riseth in the Alps, runneth through Lombardy, which it divideth into Cispadanam and Transpadanam; and having taken in 30 lesser streams, falls with seven mouths into the Adriatic Sea not far from Venice. 2 Rubicon, anciently the North-bound of Italy; Hic fluvius quondam Italiae finis, as it is in Pliny. It runneth into the Adriatic Sea at Rimini, or Ariminum, the Port-town to Ravenni 1. 3 Arnus, on whose banks stands the City of Florence. 4 Ticinus, which gave name to the City of Pavia, called of old Ticinum; it riseth in the Alps, and emptieth itself into the Lake called Lacus Verbanus. 5 Liris, now called Gariglia, stained with the blood of French and Spaniards in their quarrels for the Realm of Naples; nor no less unfortunately memorable for the drowning of Peter de Medici's. 6 Cuique fuit rerum promissa potentia Tiber; 
And Tiber, unto which was given  
The power of all things under Heaven.  It riseth from the Apennine Hills, passeth by Rome, and falleth into the Tuscan, or lower Sea, at Ostia. Here is also the Lake of Thrasimene, near which Annibal defeated Flaminius the Consul, and his whole Army, opening thereby his passage to the gates of Rome; and the famous River of 7. Metaurus, where the Romans overcame Asdrubal the Brother of Annibel; and thereby made a way to the ruin of Carthage. Others of less note shall be mentioned in their proper places.  
As for the Mountains of this Country, those of most note are the Alps, and the Apennine, of which the residue in a manner are but spurs and branches. Of these, the Alps being also appertaining to France and Germany; or rather containing many large and entire Provinces which belong to neither; deserves a Tractate by itself. The Apennine, being proper only to this Country, but so that it relates to many and particular Provinces of it, shall be spoken of here. A ledge of Hills which take beginning near Savona, a Town of Genoa situate on the Mediterranean, and fetching a little compass Northwards, extend to the furthest parts of Italy, dividing it almost in the very midst; that part thereof which lieth towards the Tyrrhenian or Tuscan Sea being called Cisapennina; Transappennina that which lay towards the Adriatic. Passing in one entire body as far as Ascoli, in Apulia, a Province of the Realm of Naples; it is there parted into two horns or branches; whereof the one runs out to the Mount of Gargano, in the land of Otranto; the other spreadeth itself as far as Calabria; those being the most Eastern Provinces of this noble Continent. Called the Apenninc, as some say, à Penna, by which word the Latins used to signify the top or summit of an Hill, by reason of the height and sharp points thereof: as others say, quasi Alps Poeninae, because first overcome by Annibal and his Carthaginians, whom the Roman Writers call by the name of Poeni. The Inhabitants hereof, by Virgil named Apenninicolae; otherwise reducible to some of the neighbouring Provinces. Of this large Mountain most of the Hills of Italy from Savona Eastwards, are but the excursions; which being of less note, shall be spoken of as they lie before us in the way.  
To proceed now to so much of the History of Italy, as concerns the generals; we are to know that the first Inhabitants of it (not to say any thing of the siction of Friar Annius under the name of Berosus, who will needs have Noah himself come hither shortly after the Flood) were doubtless of the race of Cittim or Kittim the fourth son of Javan, one of the sons of Japhet. Who being planted by their Father in that part of Greece, which was since called Macedon; and after spreading themselves further as their numbers increased, peopled Aetolia and the Countries adjoining to it: From whence, desirous of a warmer and more fertile soil, they came in tract of time to the Coasts of Dalmatia, and thence to this Country since called Italy. That they did spring originally from the seed of Cittim (or Kittim as the Greek pronounce it) wants not very good Authors. For thus Eusebius, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; that is to say, from the Kitians, or children of Kittim, descended the Latins and the Romans. The same occurs also in the Chronicon of Alexandria. So also saith Cedrenus in his Annals, but with more punctuality. Telephus (saith he) the son of Hercules, reigned in Italy, and after him his son Latinus, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from whom the Keteans were named Latins. The same in other words saith Suidas. Nor want there some remainders of this name in approved Writers, besides these authorities; there being a Town in Latium called Ketea, mentioned in Dionysius Hallicarnasseus; and a River named Ketus not far from Cumae, whereof Aristotle speaketh in his book De Mirabilibus. And that they came immediately from the Aetolians, besides the other Arguments which Reineccius useth in this point, the nearness, or identity rather of the names doth seem to intimate. For Aetolia being written in the Greek Aitolia; and the letter O being changed into A according to the Aeolic Dialect, which was that used by the Aetolians; the alteration of the name from Ai●olia and Aitolians, to Italia and Italians, will be thought very easy, if not natural, the rather, in regard there is an Island near Italy, in the Tusoan Sea, peopled originally by these very Aetolians, which in ancient times was called Aethalia. And if by such an easy alteration of one Le●ter only, It alto may derive its first Plantation from the Aetolians, as no doubt it may▪ then may that Italus, the Chieftain of whom Virgil speaks, be no other than Aetolus, some man of principal mark, and eminency, amongst that people, who had the conduct of this Colony when they came for Italy. And this I should believe much o●ther, than that this Italus was the name of a King of Sicily; It being more probable, that Sicily should borrow its first planters out of Italy, than Ital●● should borrow either name or people from so small a Kingdom: especially considering that the name of Aitolus was famous in those parts of Greece, ever since Aitolus the son of ● King of Eli●, was founder of the Aetolian Kingdom. The way thus shown, and the passages into Italy laid open, it was not long before the Pe●asg●, another Greek Nation, found the way into it; after whom Saturn out of Crete, and Evander out of Arcadia, with their several followers, came and settled there. Not to say any thing of those several Colonies, which coming out of Peloponnesus, and the parts of Achaia, planted themselves so thick in the East of Italy, now called Calabria, that of long time it had the name of Magna Grecia. So that the Grecians made the main gross or body of the Italian people; to which the coming of some Tuscans under the conduct of Tyrrhenus, a Prince of Lydia in Asia minor, served but as an Accsesary, and altered nothing the Principal. The last that settled here, were some of the Relics of Troy, under the conduct of Aeneas, who flying from their native Country, and enraged Enemies, were first cast upon the coasts of afric; where hane stayed a while to refresh his companies (we shall hereafter take occasion to consider of the Fable of his loves with Dido) he set sail for Italy, being the place assigned him by the Gods for his feat and Empire; whither he came with fifteen Ships, which might contain, according to the rate which Thucydides alloweth to the vessels then used, to the number of 1200 men. And there he landed, as it proved, in an happy hour: For he was no sooner arrived, but he was lovingly cherished, and entertained by Latinus King of the Latins, or of Latium, whose chief City or Seat Royal was then called Laurentum; who much esteeming of this Stranger as a man whose fame had been his Harbinger, thought he could neither manifest his love sufficiently, nor bind him fast enough unto him, but by betrothing him unto Lavinia his only daughter. Hence grew the Wars betwixt Aeneas, and Turnus King of the Rutili, a former Suitor; which being ended in the death of the Rutilian Rival, confirmed Aeneas and his Trojans in a sure possession. For now growing with the Latins or Laurentini, into a more constant bond of Friendship, by many Intermariages, and mutual kindnesses, they built the Town of Lavinium, called so in honour of their Queen, intending it for the Seat Royal of the Princes of the Trojan line. But long it did not hold that state: For Ascanius the son of Aeneas by his former Wife, to avoid all occasions of contention with his Mother-in-Law left her (Aeneas being dead) in possession of Lavinium, and built Longa Alba; which being surrendered by julus the son of Ascaniut to his half-brother Silvius, became the constant habitation of the Silvian Kings till the building of Rome, and final ending of the race of the Latin Kings. The names of whom (for there occurs little of their actions) we are next to show; taking along with us those few Kings which reigned in those parts of Italy before the coming of Aeneas.  

The old Kings of Italy of the Aborigines.  

1 Janus, 
A. M. 2637.  the first King of the Aborigines, who lived in the same time with Boax and Ruth. He received Saturn flying out of Crete from Jupiter, and left him his Kingdom at his death. He is said to be the founder of the City of Gen●a, and to have given name to the Hill in Rome called Janicula, on which it was supposed that he had his dwelling.  
2 Saturn, who taught the people the use of dunging of their lands, and for that cause was honoured by them as a God, under the name of Stercutius, as St. Austin hath it. He reigned first together with Janus, and afterwards by himself alone, the whole time of both their reigns was 33 years.  
3 Picus, 
2670.  well skilled in divination by the flight and chattering of Birds, and therefore feigned by the Poets to be turned into a Pye. He entertained Evander and his Arcadians, giving them the Hill (called after Aventine) to build upon. 37.  
4 Fannus, 
2707.  the son of Picus, and the husband of Fatua, in whose time Hercules came into Italy, vanquished the Giants of Cremona, and killed the Giant C●cus who had fled out of Spain. 44.  
5 Latinus, 
2751.  the son of Faunus, who entertained Aeutas coming from the wars and destruction of Troy, and gave him his daughter Lavinia to wife, with his Kingdom, after him in Dower. 36.  
6 Lavinia, 
2787.  daughter to Latinus, and Queen of the Latins, married to Aeneas, whom she outlived, he being slain in his Wars against Mezentius the King of Tuscany, the son or successor of that Mezentius (an ungodly Tyrant) whom Aeneas had before slain in his war with Turnus and the Latins. 7.    

Kings of the Latins of the Trojan or Silvian rate.  

1 Aeneas, 
A. M. 1787.  the son of Anchises, and Husband of Lavinia, slain in his wars against Mezentius King of the Tuscans or Etrurians, as before is said. 3.  
2 Ascanius, 
2790.  the son of Aeneas by Creusa his former Wife, for fear of whom Lavinia being great with child, fled into a Wood, and was there delivered of a son called Silvius. He removed the Seat Royal from Lavinium to Longa Alba, a City of his own building. 38.  
3 Silvius Posthumus, 
2828.  the son of Aeneas by Lavinia, preferred unto the Kingdom by the love of the people before julus the son of Ascanius (the founder of the Julian family) from whom all the Kings of this Race had the name of Silvii; julus being honoured with the chief Priesthood (an office next in dignity to that of the King) which he translated afterwards unto his Posterity. 29.  
4 Aeneas Silvius. 
2857.  31.  
5 Latinus Silvius. 
2888.  50.  
6 Alba Silvius, 
2938.  so called because of his beautifying and repairing the City Alba, then in some decay. 39  
7 Capetus Silvius. 
2977.  24.  
8 Capys Silvius, 
3001.  said to be the founder of the City of Capua; which shows that he extended his dominion further than the Province of Latium. 28.  
9 Capetus Silvius. 
3029.  13.  
10 Tiberinus Silvius, 
3042.  from whom the River Tiber derives that name, being formerly called Albula. 8.  
11 Agrippa Silvius. 
3050.  40.  
12 Alladius Silvius, 
3090.  who to make himself the more terrible to his subjects, studied a way to imitate the Thunder, but was killed at last by a real Thunderclap from Heaven. 19  
13 Aventinus Silvius, 
3109.  who gave name to the Hill Aventine. 37.  
14 Procas Silvius. 
3146.  23.  
15 Amulius Silvius, 
3169.  the younger son of Procas, setting aside his Brother Numitor, obtained the Kingdom for himself; slain at last by Rom●lus, and Numitor settled in the Throne. 42.  
16 Numitor, 
3211.  the 21 King from Janus, and the last King of the Latins, restored by Romulus to the Throne; and after the short reign of one year only, deprived by him both of life and Kingdom. After whose death the Latins, or Alban, had no more Kings, but kept themselves as a Free-estate till subdued to Rome. 1.   
Concerning this it is to be understood, that Amulius having chased his elder brother Numitor out of the Country, and possessed himself of the Throne, caused his brother's daughter Rhea (for preventing any issue by her) to be shut up in the Temple of Vesta. Where she proving the mother of two sons, was according to the Law buried quick, and her children by the cruel Tyrant cast out to be devoured of wild Beasts. They were found by Faustulus the King's Shepherd, nursed by his Wife, for her infamous life called Lupa (whence came the Fable, that they were suckled by a Wolf) and being grown to man's estate, slew the Tyrant Amulius, placing their Grandfather Numitor in the Royal Throne, whom not long after they deprived both of life and kingdom. Of these, the eldest was named Romulus. and the younger Rhemus, who leaving Alba to the short possession of their Grandfather Numitor, laid the foundation of the most famous City of Rome: which Romulus first hanselled with the blood of his Brother Rhemus, who had disdainfully leapt over the walls of his new City. This City he made an Asylum, or place of Refuge for all comers, of what desperate estate soever, and having ranked them into order, made himself their King A people of so base a nature, that their neighbours refused to give them any of their daughters in marriage: So they were destitute of Wives, and consequently not like to continue a people long; till on a proclamation made of some plays and pastimes, many of the Sabine women flocked thither to behold the sports; whom the Romans seized on, and forced an unwilling consent from them to become their Wives. From such a base and low beginning did this City rise to be the Empress of the World.   

The Kings of Rome.  

1 Romulus, 
A. M. 3213.  the founder of Rome: He made peace with Tatius King of the Sabines, coming against him to revenge the ravishment of their women; incorporating him and his into his new City, and by that means adding thereto a fair and goodly Territory, 37.  
2 Numa, 
3251.  the first Author of the Roman Ceremonies. 43.  
3 Tullus Hostilius, 
3294.  who enlarged the borders of Rome by the conquest of Alba, the mother-city of the Latins, and vanquished the Fidenates. 32.  
4 Ancus Martius, 
3326.  who built Ostia on the mouth of Tiber, to be an Haven to the City.  
5 Tarqvinius Priscus, who subdued many of the Tuscan Nations, increased the number of the Tribes and Senators, and added the triumphal ornaments. 38.  
6 Servius Tullus, 
3388.  who first caused the people to be enrolled, and brought into cense. 44.  
7 Tarqvinius Superbus, 
3432.  son to the former Tarqvinius. He vanquished the Gabi●, and took the Towns of Ardea, Ocriculum, and Suessa Pometia; but for his own insolent behaviour, and a Rape committed on Lucretia the Wife of Collatine by his son Sextus, he and his whole Race were driven out of the Town, Anno Mund. 3457. V. C. 268.   
After this, the Romans loathing the name of King, caused two Officers to be chosen out of the Patricii or chief Citizens, to whom they gave the name of Consuls, à consulendo, from counselling of, and consulting the good of the Commonwealth, ut consulere se suis civibus meminerint, saith the Historian, their name being a memento of their charge or duty. And in this office they resolved to have always two, and those but only for a year, Ne vel solitudine vel morâ potestas corrumperetur. And though some had the fortune to be Consuls two or three years together; yet every new year they were anew chosen, and so their Offices reckoned as several; neither do we find any to have been elected for less than a year, unless upon the death or deposition of a former, until the Civil wars. But then cum belli civilis praemia festinari coeperunt, when the services done in the Civil wars required a quicker turn in requital, the Consulship was given only for some part of the year, and ordinarily for two Months: the first Consuls being named Ordinarii, in whose names the writings made for the whole year were dated; the other Minores, or Honorarii, which only served to make up a number. For so ambitious were the Romans of this honour, that when Maximus died in the last day of his Consulship, Caninius Rebilus petitioned Caesar for that part of the day that remained▪ whence that so memorated jest of Tully, O vigilantem Consulem, qui toto consulatùs sui tempore somn●m occulis non vidit. And when Cecina was by the Senate degraded from this honour on the day in which he was to have resigned it; one Roscius Regulus obtained the office from Vitellius for the day remaining: but as the Historian noteth, magno cum irrisu accipientis, tribuent isque. Now as the Romans did thus exceed the first number of Consuls, so sometimes fell they short of it. The first that was sole Consul was Pompey, in the beginning of the Civil Wars, viz. A. V. C. 703. The next, one Varanes, A. C. 410. This Office, from the first institution to the final period of it, continued at the least in name (for the Emperors had of long time assumed the Power and Prerogatives appertaining to it) the space of 1084. years, though not without many intermissions of the Name and Title, by the several interposings of the Decemviri, the Dictator's, and the Consular Tribunes, of which more anon. The last Consul was one Basilius, in the time of Justinian, A. Ch. 542. The two first, Collatinus the husband of Lucretia, and Junius Brutus, by whose instigation the people had took Arms against the house of the Tarquins. A man so zealous in defence of the common liberty, so resolutely bend to make good what he had begun, and so extremely opposite to the Royal Race, that he not only caused Collatine to resign his Office within the year, because he was of the blood of the Tarquins▪ but executed his own sons for holding correspondence and intelligence with them.  
But though the Government were changed, the old design was followed which the Kings had laid for the enlarging of their Empire; but followed with so slow a pace, by reason of their factions and divisions, that it was full 500: years before they could be Masters of Italy. A matter not unworthy of our consideration, that the Italians should hold out so long a time against the puissance of the Romans; when in less than half that time ensuing, they did possess themselves of almost all Europe, and many goodly Kingdoms and Provinces both in Asia and afric. So different a thing it was (as is said by Florus) dare caput Italia, to contract the many limbs of Italy into one body, and unite them under one head.  
But to proceed; after Italy was fully conquered by them, they fell upon the Carthaginians, as their nearest Neighbours; whose overthrow, in the end of the first Punic War, A. V. C. 512. gave them the full possession of Sicil (except the State of Syracuse,) and the Isle of Sardinia. After that being molested in their Trade by the Illyrian Pirates, and finding them countenanced therein by the Queen of that Nation, they made a fortunate War against her, and brought that puissant people to become their Tributalies', A. V. C. 525. The second Carthaginian war, managed by Annibal in the bowels of Italy▪ had almost put a period to the glories of their Commonwealth. But that being also ended to their advantage by the conquest of Spain, they quarrelled Philip King of Macedon, who had aided Annibal, compelled him to accept of peace on their own terms, and after outed his son Perseus of all his Dominions, making Macedon a Province of Rome, and all the rest of Greece but their Tenants at will. Nor was it long before they picked a quarrel with Anti●ch●s the great King of Syria, made him abandon his possession of the Lesser Asia; and finally prevailed so successfully in all their actions; that there was neither King nor Commonwealth that could stand in their way, until the State being burdened with its too much greatness, began to totter of itself.  
Two things there were which much conduced to the advancement of the Romans to their power and greatness, besides the providence of God which had so disposed it; which were the great encouragements which they gave their Soldiers, and the Triumphant manner of reception which they used to bestow upon their Gener●ls, when they returned home with honour and victory. For when any of their Generals did so return, he was permitted to enter sitting on a glorious Chariot, the spoils which he had got in war being carried before, the prisoners he had taken following bound at the heels of his Chariot; his Soldiers compassing him about with their several Crowns, according to the quality of their well-deserving; and all the Fathers of the City, attended by the Priests and principal Ladies, going out to meet him. The first beginning of which custom is ascribed to Romulus, who in the war which Acron King of the Ceninenses made against him in revenge of the rape committed by the Romans on the Sabine women, seeing his people give ground, called for help to Jupiter, and vowed if he overcame King Acron, to offer up his Armour to him. Acron being vanquished, the Conqueror cutteth down a fair young Oak, and hangeth on it all the Armour of the vanquished King; then girding his Gown close unto him, and putting on his head a Garland of Laurel, he laid the Oak upon his shoulders, and marched towards the City; his Army following him, and singing an Epinition or song of victory. To this we must refer the original and beginning of Triumphs. But nihil est inventum & perfectum eodem tempore, as the saying is. Tarqvinius Priscus long after Romulus, added hereunto the Purple Robe, and the Triumphant Chariot drawn with four Horses. The other pomps came afterwards as they grew both in power and pride. Now of these Triumphs there were two sorts, the Greater, which was properly called a Triumph; and the Lesser, vulgarly called the Ovation, which differed from one another in many Circumstances. For, 1. The Triumpher made his entrance in a Royal Chariot, and was met by the Senators in their Robes; but the Overture made his entrance on foot, and was met only by the Knights and Gentlemen of Rome. 2. The Triumpher had a Laurel Crown, and entered with the noise of Drums and Trumpets; but the Overture had only a Garland of Fir, with Flutes and Haultbo●es playing before him. 3. The Triumpher was attired in a Garment of State, which they called Vestis trabeata; but the Overture in a plain Purple Gown only. 4. In a Triumph the Soldiers cried out, Io Triumph; but in an Ovation they ingeminated only O, O, O, from the often doubling of which word, it had (as some think) the name of an Ovation, 5 lie. and lastly, the Triumpher used to sacrifice a certain number of Oxen; but the Overture a Sheep only; from whence the name is properly to be derived.  
Now there were three Cases in which the Conqueror was to be content with this lesser Triumph. 1. If the number of the enemies whom he slew in battle exceeded not 5000. men; or that he had not so much overcome them by force, as persuasion or subtlety: 2. If the War had been slight, cursory, or not lawfully managed; And 3 lie. If it were against an ignoble Enemy. And of this last we have a fair instance in P. Rupilius, who having got the victory in the Servile War, (a victory of great importance to the State of Rome) was yet content with an Ovation; nè Trimmphi dignitatem Servili inscriptione violaret, as it is in Florus. As for the greater Triumphs they were indeed very full of magnificence; the pomp whereof, who list to see, may find it in the Triumph of Paulus Aemilius described by Plutarch; though by that which hath before been said, we may conjecture somewhat at the glories of it. And yet this honour was not always vouchsafed to those who had best deserved it, there being many ways whereby it might be forfeited or denied in a factious State, and jealous of the over-greatness of the Men of War. For, 1. Sometimes it was denied a victorious General, by the strength of a contrary Faction: and so Pompey denied Metellus the honour of a Triumph for the conquest of Crete. 2. Sometimes the Conqueror himself was willing to decline it for fear of envy: And so Marcellus in Plutarch, after his conquest of Sicily, having triumphed twice before, refused that honour, his reason was, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, for fear his third Triumph might become a matter of envy. 3. Sometimes the Soldiers having been ill paid, or otherwise not well treated by their Commanders, opposed them in their suit for it: and this was the case of Paulus Aemilius, who questionless had miss this honour, for not dividing amongst them the spoils of Greece, as he once had promised, if Servilius and others of the Senate, making it their own case, had not stickled hard for him with the Soldiers. 4. It was sometimes denied, because the General had borne no public Office in the Commonwealth. For so in Lavie, when Lentulus coming Proconsul out of Spain required a Triumph, the Fathers answered, that he had indeed done things worthy of that honour, but that they had no precedent for it, ut qui neque Consul, neque Dictator, neque Praetor res gessisset, Triumpharet. 5. Sometimes the Generals themselves omitted it, for the furtherance of some of their other purposes. And so Caesar coming towards Rome, a Victor, at the same time the Consuls were to be chosen, laid aside his demand of the Triumph, to sue for the Consulship; it being the custom that such as demanded the Triumph should abide without the City, and such as sued for the Consulship must of necessity be within. 6. Sometimes it was denied, when the War had been undertaken without the Command of the Senate; in which respect the Triumph was denied unto Manlius on the conquest of Galatia by him, to the great enlargement of their Empire; quia causam Belli Senatus non approbavit, because he had no Commission from the Senate for it. 7. Ther● was no Triumph granted if the War had been Civil, because in all such Wars whosoever was Conqueror, the Commonwealth was a loser by it. And therefore Pompey and Metellus having vanquished Sertorius, and his party in Spain, would have it called a Foreign, not a Civil War, because they would not lose their Triumph. Externum magis id bellum quam▪ civil videri voluerunt, ut Triumpharent. 8. If the victory had not been obtained without great loss on the Romans side; in which regard Valerius after his conquest of the Galls was denied this honour; quia magis dolor civibus amissis, quam gaudium fusis hostibus praevaluit, saith Alexander ab Alexandro. 9 lie. and lastly, The Triumph was denied a General, if the service had not been performed in his own Province: And so we find that when Livius and Nero being Consuls had vanquished Asdrubal, Livius only had the Triumph, though Nero was the man that had won the day, because the field was fought in the Province of Livius, to which Nero came but as an Accessary, or Assistant.  
And these are all, or at the least the principal causes of hindering or omitting this great honour, indeed the greatest that the Free-State could be capable of. But after when the Commonwealth was changed into a Monarchy, it began to be laid aside for altogether, as too great for Subjects; and was first purposely neglected by Vipsanius Agrippa, the Establisher of Augustus in the Roman Empire, who when he had a Triumph decreed unto him, for quenching certain Rebellions in Asia, and his quiet settling of that Country, to give Posterity an example, refused to accept it. And this example being (as it were a rule) to others, occasioned that this custom was in short time quite laid aside, and that no man under the degree of an Emperor Triumphed solemnly; all others from thence forth, content with the triumphal Ornaments, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, in the words of Dion. And though Belisarius having subdued the Kingdom of the Vandals in afric, is said (600 years after the death of Agrippa) to have had the honour of a Triumph, yet in propriety of speech, it was nothing but an honourable presenting of himself and his prisoners before the Emperor; and was so far from the magnificence of a Roman Triumph, that it wanted many of the solemnities used in an Ovation. Nor did the Emperors themselves much affect this honour, either because too popular, or too chargeable, or that they thought it was beneath the Imperial Majesty; the last (as I remember) that made use thereof to set forth his glories, being Valerius Probus, after his victories over the Germans, and the Blemyae, a people of afric, in or about the year 284 of our Saviour's birth.  
In the next place look we on the encouragements and rewards of the common Soldiers: besides the setting out of Lands and dwellings for the poorer sort, in which they might rest themselves when they were past service; and besides the large donatives which the General in his Triumph did bestow upon them; they had their mural Crown, for him that first scaled the Walls; a naval Crown, for him that first boarded the Enemy's Ships; a Camp Crown, or C●ro●a Castrensis, for him that had forced a way into the Tents or Camp of the Enemy; a City Crown, or Corona Civica, for him that had preserved the life of a Roman Citizen. Not to say any thing of those Chains and Bracelets which soldiers of inferior merit were adorned withal. By which encouragements, and the good conduct of their Counsels in the Senate, the Roman affairs succeeded so prosperously, and their Dominions were enlarged so immensly, that never any Commonwealth had so large a growth.  
And yet the greatness of this state is neither totally nor only to be attributed to the Consular Government. For though the walls of this great building were raised by the Consuls, yet the foundation of the same was laid by the Kings, and the roof thereof laid on by the Emperors. Nay, be it spoken to the honour of Monarchical Government, whensoever any great and imminent danger did seem to threaten them, they were fain to lay a●ide their confidence in the rule of their Consuls, and betake themselves to the command of one Sovereign Officer, whom they called Dictator. Of which, and the other changes happening in the state of Rome, take this short abstract from Corn. Tacitus. Urbem Roman à principi● Reges habuere, etc. The City of Rome was in the beginning governed by Kings. Liberty and the Consulship L. Brutus brought in. The Dictator's were chose but for a time; The Decemviri passed not two years, neither had the Consular authority of the Tribunes of the Soldiers any long continuance, nor Cinna's nor Sulla's dominion. Pompey and Crassus quickly yielded to Caesar's forces; Lepidus' and Antony to Augustus. So Tacitus in brief of these public changes: Of which, as to the Decemviri, which were instituted only on a particular occasion for the reforming of the Laws by those of Athens, and the Military Tribunes of Consular Authority ordained to divert common people from seeking after the Consulship; I shall here say nothing. But as for the Dictator's, being Officers of a Supreme power, and such as made way for the Emperors in the close of all, I shall enlarge a little further. They were called Dictator's à Dictando, because they prescribed what they pleased unto the people, which they were bound to execute and not dispute. Hence that memorable jest of Julius Caesar, who being told that Sylla had resigned his Dictatorship, though by decree of Senate made perpetual to him, returned this Answer, that Sylla was an unlearned man, dictare nesciit, and therefore knew not how to dictate, or to play the Dictator. They were also called Populi Magistri, or the people's Masters, because from them lay no Appeal unto the people (as did from all the rest of the Roman Magistrates) during the whole time of their command▪ which ordinarily continued for fix months; yet so, that if they did in the mean time settle the affairs of the Commonwealth, they resigned it sooner; if the necessities of the State required a longer continuance in it, they were chosen again. The names of as many of them as I have met withal, I have here subjoined, together with the services they did the public in the time of their Office.   

The Dictator's of Rome.  

1 Titus Largius, 
A. V. C. 253.  chosen upon occasion of a general War, made by the Latins upon Rome; the first that ever had this Office.  
2 Aulus Posthumus, 
257.  chosen to pursue that war, which he ended with the slaughter of 30000 of the Latins.  
3 L. Quinctius Cincinnatus, 
295.  chosen to this office from the Plough, overcame the Volsci; chosen again An. V. C. 314, to suppress the sedition raised by Sp. Melius.  
4 Aemilius Mamercus, 
316.  overcame the Veientes and the Fidenates, and was thrice in eleven years called unto this Office.  
5 Pub. Servilius, 
338.  who finally vanquished the Fidenates, and the Lavicani.  
6 Furïus Camillus, 
354.  who finally destroyed the City of the Veii, and being chosen a second time, A. V. C. 362. preserved his Country from the Galls: thrice chosen after this upon new occasions.  
7 Tit. 
375.  Quinctius Cincinnatus, chosen in the War against the Latins.  
8 L. Manlius, 
385.  elected in the time of a grievous Pestilence to find a way for the appeasing of the Gods.  
9 C. Sulpitius. 
396.   
10 Martius Rutilius the first Dictator chosen out of the Commons. 
418.   
11 L. Papyrius subdued the Samnites.  
12 Cossus; 
438.  by whom the Samnites were again vanquished.  
13 Aemilius, who also overcame the Samnites.  
14 Lentulus, who triumphed also over the Samnites.  
15 I. Bubulcus, 
451.  who finally subdued the Aequi and the Volsci.  
16 Corn. Rufinus.  
17 Q. Hortensius, 
467.  chosen for appeafing a difference betwixt the Senate and the Common▪ who had fortified themselves in Janiculus, one of the Hills whereon 〈◊〉 stood.  
18 Cl. Glizias, 
505.  forced to resign his office to 19 Atilius Colatinus, the first that exercised his office out of Italy; he was chosen in the first Punick War.  
20 Fabius Maximus, 
536.  chosen in the war against Annibal.  
21 M. Junius, 
537.  chosen upon the great defeat which the Roman Forces had at the battle of Cannae.  
23 L. Manlius Torquatus, 
545.  chosen upon the death of Marcellus the Consul slain by Annibal.  
24 L. Sylla (descended from that Corn. Rufinas, 
672.  who had been formerly in this office) having by force of Arms suppressed the faction of Marius and Cinna, made himself master of the City, and caused himself to be chosen Perpetual Dictator, which office having exercised with a great deal of cruelty, he resigned with as great a confidence.  
25 C. julius Caesar, 
707.  descended from julus the son of Ascanius, who was the second King of the Trojan Race, having conquered Britain, and added all ●ause Transalpine to th● Roman Empire, and finding himself unworthily requited by the faction of Pompey, passed with his Army after him into Greece; and having vanquished him in the fields of Pharsalia, and made himself absolutely master of the Roman Empire, took to himself the supreme Government thereof under the title of Dictator, which having managed for the space of five years, he was murdered in the Senate house by Brutus and Caessius.   
Before the time of these Perpetual Dictatory, the Romans having some enemies or other that opposed the progress of their fortunes, had not the leisure to contend with one another in a public way, or if they did, their differences and seditions were soon composed. But being grown so great as to fear no Enemy; and the Estate so vast, that it was grown too nighty for a popular Government; then they began to practise on the people's patience, and to project the shaing of the Empire amongst the great ones. Concerning which, take here this short Epitaph, which I find in Tacitus. Rebus modicis aqualica● facile habebatus, etc. While (saith he) our Dominions were but small, Equality was easily maintained among us. But after we had subdued the World, and destroyed all Kings and Cities that stood in our way, or might world our annoyance; when we had leisure to seek after Wealth without peril, there arose hot contentions betwixt the Nobility and the Commons. Sometimes the factious Tribunes carried it away; sometimes the Consuls had the better; and in the City and common Forum, some little skirmishes (the beginning of our Civil Wars) were sometimes seen. Afterwards C. Marius one of the meanest of the Commonally, and L. Syll● the most cruel of all the Nobility, by force of Arms overthrowing the Free-State, reduced all to an absolute Government. To them succeeded ●n. Pompe●us, a little closer in his projects, but nothing better minded to the Commonwealth: Et nunquam postea nisi de Principatu quaesitum, and never after that was any other point debated, than who should get the Sovereignty unto himself. So Tacitus, and he stateth it rightly. For after Pompey had revived the controversy, and had found Caesar a better disputant than himself; Augustus, Antony, and Lepidus (on the death of Caesar) made good the Argument; attracting all power unto themselves by the name of Triumvirs; till Augustus having out-witted Lepidus, and vanquished M. Antony at the battle of Actium, became sole Sovereign of the State, by the name of Prince; Et cuncta bellis civilibus fessa, nomine Principis sub imperium accepit, as that Author hath it.  
But touching those great alterations in the State of Rome, the contentions for the chief command, and the Reduction of it to a Monarchy by Augustus Caesar; I published a Discourse in the year 1631 (but written many years before) under the title of AUGUSTUS, or an Essay of those Means and Counsels whereby the Commonwealth of Rome was altered, and reduced to a Monarchy. Which being but short, so pertinent to the present business, and so well entertained when it came abroad; I hope it will not be improper or unprofitable to subjoin it here. The Reader may either peruse it, or praetermit it, as his fancy guides him. And here it followeth in these words.  
THey which have heretofore written of Commonwealths, have divided them into three Species. The Government of the King; secondly, of the Nobles; and thirdly, of the People. Either of these is again subdivided into good and evil: The evil form being only the good corrupted; the bad nothing else but the good refined. So is the Government of a King divided into a Monarchy, and a Tyranny; Of the Nobles, into an Aristocracy, and an Oligarchy; Of the People, into a Republic, and a Democra●y. All these, as well in general, as in the several couplets, have a secret Inclination to change the one into the other; and to make a Pythagorical transmigration (as it were) into each other being. I need not stand on many instances. The Commonwealth of Rome (into whose stories whosoever looketh, will judge them rather to contain the acts of the whole World, than a particular Nation) will serve for all. Romulus at the foundation of his City, reserved unto himself the chief Sovereignty, leaving it entire to his Successors. Numa, Ancus, Tullus, Tarquin the Elder, and Servius, governed themselves so moderately, and the people so justly, that they affected not Tyranny; nor the Commons Liberty. They appeared more desirous to fill the Coffers of their Subjects; than their own Treasuries: And when necessity compelled them to a Tax, they rather seemed to sheer their sheep than fleece them. But Tarquin the second, commonly called Superbus, a man of insupportable Vices, having by violence enthronised himself in that Chair of State, which (had not his ambitious spirit been impatient of delay) would have been his rightful Inheritance; made his Government answerable to his entrance, cruel and bloody. How many men, eminent as well by their own virtue, as their Parent's Nobility, did he cut off? How many did he for no cause promote, to make their fall the more remarkable? What part of the Senate was free from slaughter? What corner of the City from lamentations? Yet this was not all. The miserable Romans were visited with three Plagues at once; Pride in the Father, Cruelty in the Mother, and Lust exorbitant in their son Sextus, a true Copy of the old Originals. Either of these had been more than enough to exercise the people's patience: But meeting all at one time, it seemed that nothing could now be added to the wretchedness of the one; and the wickedness of the other. Brutus (a name fatal to Tyrants) did easily persuade the Commons to shake off this yoke. For they, as well desirous of Novelties, as sensible of Oppressions, had long since murmured at the present State; and wanted nothing but a head to break out into actual Rebellion. So the People got the Freedom, and the Kings lost the Sovereignty of the City. 
A. V. C. 244.   
2 Brutus, although he wanted no fair title to the Crown, yet either perceiving how odious the name of King was grown; or perhaps willing to be rather the first Consul, than the last Prince; instituted a new form of Government: Wherein the sway of all was referred to the Fathers of the City; out of whom two were annually chosen as chief of the rest. And here in certainly he dealt very advisedly. For had he sought to confirm himself in the Kingdom, what could men judge, but that, not love to his Country was the cause that stirred him to take Arms, but desire of Rule. Again, besides that secure Privacy is to be preferred before hazardous Royalty; what hope had he to keep the seat long, having by his own example taught the people both the Theory and Practice of Rebellion. Under this new Aristocraty the Roman affairs succeeded so prosperously, their dominions were enlarged so immensly, that it may well be questioned, whether the Roman fortune caused their greatness, or their valour commanded their fortune. For the Governors not seeking wealth but honour, or not their own wealth but the public, did so demean themselves both in Peace and War, that there was between all, a virtuous emulation, who should most benefit his Country. An happiness which was too great to continue long. The people had as yet no written Laws: Custom bearing most sway; and the rest of the Law locked up in the breast of the Judges. To avoid such inconveniencies as might hence ensue, there were some men, conceived to be as sound in judgement, as honest in their actions, deputed by a general Commission to take an abstract of the Grecian Laws; according to the tenor whereof, 
A. V. C. 3●●  the people were to frame their lives, the Judges their sentences. Here followed the Oligarchy or Decemvirate State of Rome, but long it lasted not. For these new Lords joining forces together, made themselves rich with the spoil of the people, not caring by what unlawful means they could purchase either profit or pleasure. Appius Claudius, one of the Decemviri, was the break-neck of this Government. He unmindful of Lucretia and the Tarquius, lusted after Virginia, a woman though of low condition, yet such a woman in whom beauty and virtue strove for the pre-eminence. The issue was, that she (to save her honour) was slain by her own Father in an open Assembly of the people; Appius forced to make away himself in prison; and the rest of that Magistracy abdicating their Offices, the Consuls were for a time restored.  
3. The people fleshed with this victory, and calling to mind how their Ancestors had in like manner banished the Kings, began to know their own strength, and stomached it exceedingly, that they on whose shoulders the frame of the State was supported, should be so much under the Command of others; that they who were Lords abroad, should be below the condition of Slaves at home. Hereupon they raise a tumult under the Conduct of their Tribune Canuleius. Nor could they by any persuasions be induced to lay down Arms, till they had obtained a Decree, 
A. V. C. 308.  That from thenceforth, the Nobles and the Commons might promiscuously be married. And this was the first step to the Republic. The gaining this new Privilege, put them in possibility of obtaining greater. They now sue to be capable of the Consulship. The Father's consulting of this demand, wisely foresaw, that to grant their Petition, or to deny it, was alike dangerous. For were it utterly dashed, it was to be feared the People would again forsake the City; and yet make their stay more insolent and insupportable, if it were granted. C. Claudius, one who by his honourable behaviour, was by both parties had in an equal degree of reverence, quickly proposed a middle course, whereby the fury of the multitude might be appeased, without blemish to the Consular dignity. He constituted six Annual Officers, equally chosen out of the People and the Nobles, 
A. V. C. 310.  call them Tribuni Militum Consularis potestatis. This Office continued, but not without many Interstitiums, the space of 78. years. Which time expired, and some experience being had of the people's Government; the Lords of the Senate did decree, That one of the Consuls should from thenceforth be chosen by, and out of the Commons; that they should be capable of all Magistracies; 
A. V. C. 388.  yea, even of the Dictatorship. So that now Virtue was as speedy a Ladder to climb unto Honours, as Nobility of Birth; and a Good man as much respected as a Great. A rare felicity of the times.  
4. The People being thus mixed with the Nobles, as well in Marriages, as Honours; one would have thought that this Commonwealth, being thus equally poised, had been immortal. But as in the Natural Body, there can be no exact and Arithmetical proportion of the humours and elements, without some predominancy: So in the Body Politic, can there be no equal mixture of Plebeians and Patritians, without the supremacy of the one or the other. The people had presently after the institution of the Consuls, raised a Commotion, and withdrew themselves into Mount Aventine. Nor could they be entreated to return into the City, till there were granted unto them peculiar Officers called Tribuni Plebis, or Protectors of the Commons. These being not long after by the Common Council▪ pronounced to be Sacrosancti, 
A. V. C. 26.  and inviolable, began to heave the Popular State too high, and thrust the Aristoeraticall too low, not regarding to lose the love of the one, so they might get the applause of the other. Insomuch, that matters of judgement were devolved from the Fathers to the Commons; and the authority of the Senate trod under foot by the people. Nay, they proceeded so far, that Marius being Tribune, threatened to send Cotta the Consul unto Prison. And Sulpitius in the same Office, made the Consuls forsake the Senate-house, and slew one of their sons, whose heels were now nimble enough to fly away. And now were the Romans governed by that form of rule, than which there is no lower. So that as well by an inevitable necessity in Nature, as the ordinary course of Policies, there must be a reverting to the first, and Monarchical Authority. For questionless it fareth many times with a Commonwealth, as with the Sun, which runneth through all the signs of the Zodiac till it return to the place where its motion first began. And the Platonic year of reducing all things to the same beginning, continuance, and period; how false soever in the Books of Nature, is in some sort true in the change of Government.  
5. The way downhill is easy and ordinary, but to ascend unto the top requireth both wit to frame the steps, and courage to give the attempt: So was it here also with the Romans. They had naturally, and almost insensibly fallen from a Monarchy to a Populacy, or Democracy: But to ascend from a Populacy to a Monarchy, required many steps and degrees in many, much industry in all. Mari●s and Sylla, well skilled in feeding the humours of the people, were the first that attempted, and severally mounted to such a height of command, as never durst any promise to them, nor they hope for themselves. Marius was of an harsh and stern nature, equally cruel to the Enemies in war, and the people in peace; one whose birth the Romans might have had just cause to curse, had he not saved them from the Cimbri. Sylla was one whose carriage none could enough commend before, or sufficiently condemn after his prosperity. A man whose Peace was far more bloody than his Wars, a better Subject than a Prince. These two gave way each to other, and both to death. Next these, as well in faction and designs, as blood and alliance, succeeded Caesar and Pompey: Two men never truly paralleled since their own times. Caesar had a wit to invent so pregnant, a heart to execute so stout, and to both a Fortune so favourable, that he durst undertake what no man dared; and his performances commonly were answerable to his undertake. Pompey, a man greater than his own or his friends wishes, had triumphed over all the parts of the known World; and could he but have brooked an Equal, he had never met Superior. Had these two lived in divers Ages, or exercised their valour on the common Enemy, the World had been too little to yield them employments. But turning their forces one against the other, Pompey overthrown in the Field, was basely murdered in Egypt: and Caesar victoriously Conqueror in Thessaly, was barbarously massacred in the Capitol. And though none of these four Worthies could settle the Monarchy in himself; yet this shall be to their eternal memory recorded, that they first opened the passage to others, and first moved the stone, which rolling along tumbled the People out of the Government.  
6 After the overthrow of Pompey, and death of Caesar, the Commonwealth might have recovered Liberty, if either Caesar had left no heir, and Pompey no children; or rather, if Antonius, a man of an unquiet and turbulent spirit, had not begun new troubles. For he, knowing the affection of the Common people unto young Octavius, Caesar's heir; and hearing the continual report of his approach to Rome for his Inheritance; did by Decree of the Senate restore Sextus the son of Pompey to his blood and honours; Hoping that they two, inheriting their Father's hatreds, would like Pellets in a Boys Potgun, drive out each other; and so he might remain Lord of the whole. But young Octavius was too old to be so fetched over; and had moreover more desire to revenge his Father's death on Brutus and Cassius, than turn himself upon an enemy, that neither had done, nor could do him any hurt. At his first entrance into Rome, he declared himself Caesar's heir; though some regarding more his welfare than honour, dissuaded him from it. His retinue at his entrance was but small, his behaviour gentle and courteous: So that all had cause to love him, none to fear him. His first business was to Antonius, then possessed of all Caesar's estate. His words as modest, as his Petition just. Antony's answer somewhat churlish, forbidding him to meddle in matters of State, adding that he was too young to take upon him the Name of Caesar; and so dismissed him unsatisfied, and with discontentments. AUGUSTUS (for by that name we mean to call him, though he was not yet so cal●ed) perceiving that Antony's answer, though in show but a delay, was in effect a denial; insinuated into the acquaiutance of Cicero, then potent among the Senators, and a capital Enemy of Antony; by whose means the Lords of the Senate began to cast great affection towards him. Next in a solemn Oration to the People, he let them know, how he intended to have distributed his Father's wealth among them; and how Antonius did unjustly detain it from them both. Certainly there is not any thing prevaileth sooner with the ignoble many than hope of gain. No sooner had he finished his speech, and given away that to them which he thought impossible to get for himself; but all was in a tumult. None was so sparing of his words, but he had some curse in store for Antonius: Every one vowing the destruction of that man, whom they supposed to deprive them of AUGUSTUS Donative.  
7 In this hurly burly Antony quits the Town, and is by the general voice of both houses, declared an Enemy to the State. An Army is given to Hircius and Pansa then Consuls. AUGUSTUS, aged but 18 years, being proclaimed Imperator, and made head of the League against the common Foe. AUGUSTUS, as he loved not to be absent from a necessary war; so he always used to reserve himself from the dangers of it; and therefore he committed the whole enterprise unto the Consuls: Well knowing, that though the Officers and Soldiers took most pains to get the Victory; yet would the honour of it be referred to him, as Imperator; Whereas, if any thing fell out to the Army, not well; his being a Non-agent in the business, would bring his honour off without stain. The Consuls therefore proceeded in the War against Antony: who seeing little possibility of prevailing, resolved to sell the loss of his own liberty, and his Soldier's lives, at a dear rate. And indeed the fortune of the day was so equally shared, that as the Consuls might boast of the vanquishment of Antony, so Antony might triumph in the death of the Consuls.  
AUGUSTUS had now as much as he could desire, more than he expected; a victorious Army at his service. He therefore applies himself so to them, that giving that among them which he had in present; and promising them greater favours, according as his fortune and their valour, should advance him, he bound them unto him in an eternal bond of allegiance; and made them the first step by which he ascended the Royalty. The Lords of the Senate hearing of the young man's fortune, thought it best to strangle these hopes even in their Cradles; and to that end, Decree the honour of overcoming Antony, not to belong to AUGUSTUS, but to Decius Brutus; for whose defence (being besieged by Antony in Mutina) their Army had been levied. Nor did they think this frost of unexpected unkindness, sufficient to nip the blossom of his hopes; but they denied him the Consulship. These harsh proceedings compelled AUGUSTUS (his honour now lying at stake) to enter Rome as Conqueror; and force the Fathers to grant him his desires. Having thus gotten what for the time he aimed at; he generally showed himself grateful to all, and particularly to some of the Soldiers; paying them what was behind by promise; and openly protesting that without their aid he durst not have adventured into the Capitol. So by keeping his day with the Military men, and showing his noble and generous nature in a thankful commemoration of their service, he added stronger bonds to such as were already his own; and won many daily to his side, which before were either neutral, or adversaries.  
8. Antony in the mean time was not idle, but knowing that L●pidus was beyond the Mountains with a puissant Army, he posted thither; and so far prevailed with the Soldiers, that he was admitted into the Camp▪ where the General entertained him with all expressions of love and welcome Antony perceiving the facile, nature of Lepidus, soon persuaded him to lead his forces into Italy, promising him no less than the Lordship of the world, if he durst but show his face to the Romans AUGUSTUS having continual news of this combination and fearing much the prowess of Antony, now strengthened; conceived no course so fitting and convenient to his ends, as to join friendship, and to enter into confederacy with them. And this he did, not for any good will to either, but because being destitute of means to resist-them▪ and also to revenge the death of his Father Julius, which he much laboured; he might with their forces oppress Cassius and M. Brutus, and after as occasion fell out, deal with them being severed. This League was solemnly confirmed by a bloody Proscription immediately following. Wherein to be revenged on their enemies, they betrayed their friends. A lamentable and ruthful time, good and bad, rich and poor, being alike subject to the slaughter. Now was the time of Julius Caesar's Government thought to be the Golden Age; and every one began to curse Brautus and Cassius as the Autors of these present miseries, whom they but lately honoured as the Restorers of the Common liberty. Nay the very Kings were deemed tolerable, and such as lived in their days, happy. The poor Romans had not changed the Tyranny, but the Tyrants: Yea, they had three for one into the bargain. Such is the condition of us men, that we know not our own happiness in the fruition, but the want. Two of these Triumvirs glutted themselves with blood, taking pride in hearing the lamentable cries and groans of the people. Augustus on the contrary, showed himself much grieved at this barbarous cruelty; so that his consent seemed rather forced than voluntary. But this Proscription, though in itself cruel and tyrannically produced some good and profitable effects in the Republic. For when by this Proscription, and the ensuing Civil war, the stoutest of the Nobles and Commons were made away, few being left which durst endeavour to recover the old Liberty; Augustus did the more easily establish his Monarchy, and restore peace to the City. Moreover the prosecution of this cruelty so incensed the people against Antony and Lepidus; that Augustus, whom most held excusable, found them always his fast friends; if not for love to him, yet in spite to them.  
9 But to proceed; Antony and AUGUSTUS leaving the guard of the City to Lepidus, with joynt-forces march against Brutus and Cassius, both overthrown by Antony; whom AUGUSTUS did therefore put upon that service, as well to diminish Antony's forces, as to keep his own entire. As for himself, either he in policy suffered himself to be driven out of the field by Brutus, to make Antony more work; or else indeed durst not abide the battle. Such end had Brutus and Cassius, two men whom Fortune seemed to be in love with on the sudden, and did as suddenly forsake them. Brutus the more accomplished man; Cassius the more expert soldier. 
A▪ V. C. 711.  I pass over AUGUSTUS wars in Italy, Antony's in Asia; the discontents between them, and their reconciliation by the means of Octavia, sister to the one, and wife to the other Emperor. As also how joining forces together to oppress Sextus, than Lording it over the Sea, and proud with the conquest of Sicilia; they received him into the Confederacy, and joined the Island of Sardinia to his other Conquests. To recompense which kindness, Sextus invited the two Generals aboard his Admiral Galley: and after a bountiful entertainment, returned them safe to their Camps. I scarce have ever heard of so great an oversight, among so many able Politicians. And much I marvel with myself, upon what confidence AUGUSTUS and Antony durst so far trust their persons to a reconciled Enemy: or on what reason Sextus having both of them in his power, would let slip so slightly that advantage; greater than which was never offered to a discontented and ambitious person. This I am sure of, that he afterward repented it, and could have wished that he had harkened to the voice of Men●s his old servant, who had persuaded him to make his best of that opportunity. The Kings of France and Arragon, of old enemies made new friends, had the like interview at Savona: which that notable Historiographer and Statesman Guic●iardin●, describeth with much wonder and commendation. Yet in the like case, have many, and as I think, worthily condemned Lewis th● 11. of France, and Charles' of Burgudy, the Arch-politicians of those days; in that Lewis at Peronne put himself into the hands of Charles his Enemy, who also after a short restraint, dismissed him.  
10. These solemn expressions of amity between the three Generals, being thus ended, and Antony gone for Egypt; AUGUSTUS then began to contrive his establishment in the State, though with the ruin of his Colleagues. He beginneth first with Sextus, having by gifts and promises drawn Menas unto his side; who by reason of his inwardness with his Master, knew most of his designs. By the directions of this Menas, and the assistance of Lepidus, he quickly overthrew Sextus; who flying death in Europe, by the hand of AUGUSTUS, found it in Asia, by the command of Antony. After this victory, AUGUSTUS, either having or pretending a quarrel against Lepidus, entereth into his Camp, seizeth his person, and depriving him of all honours, confineth him to Rome. A man that half against his will, stumbling upon the Government, had beyond any desert of his, enjoyed ten year's continuance of Empire and prosperity. An action of a very high nature, and such as AUGUSTUS durst not have ventured on, if Antony had been in Italy. He therefore advisedly removed him out of his way, before he would attempt the same. It hath been ever a chief Maxim in Court-policy, to remove that man out of the way, under pretence of some honourable charge, whom we intent either to cast from his present honours; or else to make less potent with Prince and People. For which cause also AUGUSTUS persuaded Antony's absence from the City, to bring him at the last into discredit and contempt. For well he knew that his dotage on Cleopatra, could not but draw him into many inconveniencies: neither could his neglecting the State, to riot with his Leman, be other than distasteful to the Lords and People. Next, he commanded his Sister Octavia to leave her husband Antony's house; yet privately he persuaded her to live there still, and bring up his children; that so the Romans seeing her noble demeanour and love to her husband, might the more heartily detest him, who so ignobly and unkindly had rejected her. To add more fuel to this flame of hatred, he readeth Antony's will unto the people; in which many of the Roman Provinces were bequeathed to Cleopatra's children, and other things ordained to the common prejudice. Antony likewise preferred many Bills against AUGUSTUS, as that he had deposed Lepidus from the Triumvirate; that he had divided Italy amongst his own Soldiers only; that he had not restored the ships borrowed to make war against Sextus.  
11. These discontents seconded with an ambitious hope of prevailing, made them both resolute to refer all to the decision of a Battle. Antony had a Fleet consisting of 500 ships, high-built, and trimmed up rather for a Triumph, than a fight. His Land Forces consisted of 100000. Foot, and 12000. Horse; AUGUSTUS had the like number of Horsemen, 80000. Foot, and 250. good Men of War, snug and close, built more for use than ostentation. The Rendezvouz is Actium, a place seeming to be marked out for notable designs: here being fsought also in our Father's days that famous battle, wherein the Venetians gave the world to understand, that the Turks Forces by Sea were not invincible. Antony was on the Offensive side, therefore much doubted whether it were better to give the Onset by Sea or by Land. Cleopatra, whose words were Oracles, persuaded him to the Sea-fight; not that she thought it more safe, but that if Antony lost the day, she might with more facility escape. To this resolution, when most of the Captains had for fear agreed; one of the old Soldiers thus bluntly gainsaid it. What a miserable security art thou possessed with, most noble Emperor? Where is that ancient foresight wherewith thou hast formerly prevented all disasters, and turned the Enemy's devises on their own heads? Consider with thyself, most noble General, what uncertain friends the Wind and Sea are? To how fickle an Element thou dost trust thy fortunes? Let the Egyptians, and Phoenicians, old Mermaids born and nursed up in the Sea, follow this kind of warfare: But let us thy true Roman spirits, try our valour on the firm Land, and there fight for thy Empire and our own lives. Perhaps thou dost mistrust our faith, look here Antony (with that he opened his bosom) and thou shalt see many an honourable scar got in thy service. We are now too old to learn new Treasons: Alter therefore thy resolution, and to please a woman cast not away so many of thy faithful Followers. Certainly the unresistable powers of heaven when they decree a man's destruction overthrow those counsels by which he should escape it. Antony turneth a deaf ear to this Soldiers wholesome advice; and borrowing from Cleopatra two or three kisses (as if from the fountain of her lips he had derived all his courage) without any more ceremony prepareth himself unto the battle.  
12. AUGUSTUS on the other side, seeing a necessity of a Sea-fight, was yet in this comforted, that his Vessels were more useful and better manned, though fewer than his Enemies. that his men to him were faithful, and by reason of their many Victories, in good heart; From Antony there daily revolted some Kings and Captains of note, to the great encouragement of the one side, and disheartening of the other. The whole charge of the war he committed to M. Vipsanius Agrippa, who failing in no duty of a good Captain, took from his Galleys whatsoever might be impediments to the valiant, or shelter to the Cowardly; all that was cumbersome to his own men, or advantageous to the Enemy. Things thus ordered, and the battles ready to join, Augustus Caesar standing where he might see and be seen of all, is said to make this or the like Oration. Fellows and Companions in Arms, I suppose it needless to hearten you, which never were acquainted with fear; or bid you overcome, which never yet knew what it was not to vanquish. Conquest hath always sat upon the edges of your swords, and victory been written in your foreheads. Be not now backward to add this one to your other Triumphs. When after the death of my father Julius, of famous memory, I first dealt in matters of War, I rather found, than made you good soldiers. And during this twelve years' service under me, neither have you been wanting in the duty of faithful followers; nor (I hope) of a vigilant and grateful Leader. Sure I am, I expressed myself as far as I could, and more I would, had I been able. Let not the number, nor the greatness of the adverse Galleys any ways affright you. The hugeness of their Bulks maketh them unapt for employment; and the multitude one clogging and hindering the others, may as much further our Victory as theirs. They exceed us in multitudes of Men, we them in number of Soldiers. The meaning of the word Pilot is unknown among them. And for their Mariners, the best of them are but Carters, Reapers, and Harvestmen, raked out of the field; the rest the excrement of common prisons, wherewith their Vessels are loaded, not manned. The General is indeed a sit Captain for such a selected company. It is the same Antony whom you once drove out of the Field before Mutina. I persuade myself, that neither he dares think of recovering, or you of losing, your former glories. It is the same Antony who being shamefully chased out of Parthia, only in that he was not vanquished, proclaimed himself Victor. It is the same Antony who intendeth to make Rome subject to the Egyptians, and to distribute the Provinces, purchased with the blood and virtue of our Ancestors, amongst Iras and her fellow Chambermaids. Nay indeed, it is not Antony at all, but the shadow only of that substance which now is hid in Cleopatra's cabin. Courage then brave men of Arms; be, as you have still been, Conquerors. To speak more, were to detain you from Victory. Only this, call to mind your ancient valour. Remember that I am Caesar, you Romans.  
13 This speech animated the new Soldiers, and confirmed the old: So that with a general acclamation they give the assault. Death, wounds, and blows dished in divers fashions, and served in by several men, were the best delicates prepared for these vuwelcome visitants. Cleopatra beholding the Battle, and doubting the success, through the thickest of Antony's Fleet, made away with the 60 Galleys appointed for her Guard. This disorder made the breach at which the Victory entered. Antony seeing her flight, left his Squadron also; and being taken into her Galley, hoist sail for Egypt: Herein playing the part of a cowardly Soldier; whilst each of his Soldiers executed the office of a courageous General: For they so obstinately persisted in the Fight, 
A. V. C. 713.  that AUGUTUS was fain to offer them mercy sooner than they would demand it; and divers times before they would accept it. At last they all swore Allegiance unto him. The Victory being thus gotten, AUGUSTUS (no loser of advantages) speedeth into Egypt, which he reduceth into the form of a Province; making the people pay for fine twenty Millions of Gold. By receiving this money he so weakened them, that they had no ability to raise an after-war; and by distributing part of it among his Soldiers, he confirmed them in obedience. As for Antony, he seeing his fortunes desperate, redeemed the honour lost in his life, by a noble and heroic death. And Cleopatra ended her life also not long after; a Woman more well-favoured than fair; well-spoken, rather than either. Antony's Courtiers had seen many Ladies more lovely, none more prevailing; men being chained to her by the ears, rather than the eyes.  
14 I willingly omit AUGUSTSUS entry into Rome; as also the state and magnificence of his Triumph. His Victory he used so justly, that none felt the fury of the War but such as were slain in the Battle To assure himself of Antony's adherents, was his first care: to which end he burnt in the Common Forum, the Coffers of Antony, unopened; wherein all his Letters from his friends in Rome had been enclosed; well knowing, that as long as any thought themselves suspected adversaries, they would never show themselves true friends. To the Senators and Magistrates he made sumptuous Feasts; to the Common people he exhibited magnificent and pleasing stageplays; and with all variety of pleasure, banished from both, as well sorrow for the old Proscription, as fear of a new. But this was only as a preparation to his many designs. There were two men most dear unto him, and privy to his Counsels, Maecenas and Agrippa: which in the object of their love differed only in this, Maecenas was a lover of AUGUSTUS; Agrippa of the Emperor. Maecenas was of the rank of Knights, a man of good and bad parts equally compounded. When his business required care, vigilant and circumspect; at leisure time, excessively vicious. Agrippa was the first of his house: a man alike fit for Camp and Counsel; one neither careless of a good name, nor covetous of a great. For although he on●y was the man which vanquished Sextus and Antony; yet well skilled in the humours of Princes, he gave Augustus the honour of all his Conquests; making the virtue, not the reward, the end of his actions. So by doing nobly, and speaking modestly of it, he was without envy, but not without glory. With these two AUGUSTUS withdrew into a private Closet, and then broke unto them in this sort. He made first unto them a long discourse of the Civil Wars, Then added, That having by his own fortune, and the valour of his Soldiers, put an end to the troubles; he was unresolved what to do; Whether to resign the Empire to the People, or retain it still in his own hands. That in a business of such importance, he durst not rely altogether on his own wisdom; That he had made them his Judges, as men that could speak sound, and durst speak freely: That he knew them to have more care of his honour, than profit; but of the Commonwealth, more than both; That his Counsels, which course soever he took, would not be by them eliminated: He therefore entreated them to consider what was to be done, and to give up their verdicts.  
15 Agrippa after a short silence thus began. I know, thou canst not but marvel, O Caesar, ●that I, who under thine Empire, am sure to be beyond precedent exalted; should persuade thee to live private. But I esteem more thy honour, than my profit; the public good, than my particular preferment. And yet perhaps my Counsel shall be as profitable, if not as plausible as the contrary. I know thee to be no way delighted with lies and flattery; and will therefore deal with thee freely and plainly. Thou hast indeed put a period to the Civil Wars; but to what end, unless thou dost restore unto the Commonwealth the Liberty for which the Wars were raised? What benefit can the people reap from thy Victory, if thou dost use it only as an instrument for their greater bondage? Dost thou think that the Romans having so many hundred years maintained their liberty; will now be willing to forego it? No, Caesar, no: Flatter not thyself with these hopes. Marius the younger, and Sertorius, were quickly cut off, when their ends were once known; and Julius thy Father of happy memory, did not long live, after his actions seemed to bring the Common liberty in hazard. And shall we think that there is no true Roman spirit surviving; No Brutus living to attempt the like against thee? Believe me Caesar, believe me, it is far better not to meddle with the Empire at all, than to be forced to abandon it. But say Divine Providence will so protect thee, that thou mayst outlive such practices; and shalt thou also not outlive thy glories? This present age perchance will not censure thine actions, because it dares not: But Posterity, free from all respects of love or hatred, cannot but call them into question, and brand thy enterprise with Ambition, and perhaps Tyranny. If thy designs prosper, they will judge thee to have risen unjustly; if otherwise, to have fallen deservedly. How much better than were it, now when thine honour is without blemish, and thy reputation unstained, to resign thy authority? Indeed when Sextus lorded it over the Sea, and Antony over Egypt, it might have been thought want of spirit, to have deposed thyself from the Government▪ But now to do it, when thou art without Rival in the Empire; now, when thou art sole Commander of the World's Forces; now when the People and Senate lie prostrate at the feet of thy mercy; were to strike dumb detraction, and to make the World admire thy Temper. Thou art at this present the joy and comfort of the World; there is wanting to thee neither Wealth nor Fame. Here then fix thy foot: For go but one step beyond this Non ultra, and thou wilt run into a boundless Ocean of perils, which have no end, but the end of thy life and reputation.  
16 Not so, excellent Agrippa, replied Maecenas. I never heard good Pilot find fault with Sea-room; or of more vessels cast away in the Ocean, than in the straits, and narrow passages. Our Republic is a Ship fraught with divers Nations. She hath been long tossed on the waves of Civil dissensions, long driven up and down with the Wind of ambition; and there is now no place so fit for her safety, as the unlimited Ocean of one man's power. This Empire at first rising seemed not to require a Monarch; but it is now grown too unwieldy to be without one. Take then upon thee, O Caesar, this Empire; or to say better, do not forsake it. I should never thus advise thee, did I conceive any possible inconveniences. The Senate doth allow thee a competent guard of valiant and faithful Soldiers; whom than shouldest thou fear? Nay, ill may I prosper if I see any cause of fear, were thy Guard cashiered. Enemies thou hast none: For such as were, are either already slain by thy valour, or made thy fast friends by thy bounty and clemency. To omit Marius and Sertorius, I will a little touch at thy Father Julius. He too good a Soldier to be a Statist, was too heady and violent in establishing his Government. Nor could he cunningly temporize, and suffer the people insensibly, and by degrees, to drop into bondage; but oppress them all at once. Again, he committed a great Soloecism in State, when discharging his Guard, he sought to retain that Empire by fair means, which he had gotten by violence. I know thee, O Caesar, to be of a more wary and cunning behaviour. Learn also to work out thine own safety, by Pompey's misfortunes. He after the finishing of the Pontic War, at Brundisium, disbanded his Army; and thereby merited to be accounted an honest and moderate man. Certainly, he showed himself in the course of this action, rather virtuous than fortunate or politic: For presently he began to be contemned, and by this improvident weakening of himself, made an open passage to his own ruin. I commend his modesty more than his brain; neither did he himself, on better considerations, approve his own doings; and therefore he resolved, had he been Victor in Pharsal●a, never to have committed the like Oversight. So it is, and so it will fall out with thee, O Caesar, if in this action thou propose him to be thy pattern. It is not safe, Agrippa saith, to take the Empire: less safe it is to refuse it. A settled and innative vice it is in man, never to endure that any man above our own rank should overtop us. Rome's second founder Camillus, Scipio, that scourge of Carthage, were disgraced; and M. Coriolanus banished by our Ancestors; only because their worth had lifted them above the ordinary pitch of Subjects. Do not thou hope to far better than thy Predecessors. Heretofore, perchance, thou mightest have sought the Empire, to satisfy thy ambition. The Empire must now be thy refuge and Asylum. Credit me, the Lords of the Senate, after so many years' Obedience, know not how to Govern; neither canst thou having so long been a Governor, learn Obedience. True it is, that in matters of domestical business, a man may stop and desist where he will: But in the getting of an Empire, there is no mean between the death of an Enemy, and the life of a Prince. Thou hast already gone too far to retire. Now thou must resolve to be Caesar or nothing. To say more were superfluous. Thine own discretion will suggest unto thee better Arguments. Only this, I know that thou hast in thee too much Julius, not to be an Emperor.  
17 AUGUSTUS seemed to incline to this latter opinion; whether moved with Maecenas Oration, especially his instance in Pompey; or that he was before resolved to follow that course, is uncertain. Howsoever, seeming with great attention to observe their speeches, and gathering their several reasons and motives together, he made this reply. A most hard thing it is, for a divided mind, to make a well-joyned Answer. Divided I am, and troubled between your two opinions; loath to follow either, sithence in so doing I must offend one. Yet sithence there is a necessity of Resolution; I intent, though I likewell of thy advice, Agrippa, to follow thine Maecenas. In doing which, I am but an instrument of the Destinies, to put their will in execution. Often have I heard my Father Octavius report, how Nigidius, famous for his skill in judiciary Astrology, told him once in open Senate, That he had gotten an Emperor for the Romans. As also, how M. C●cero, so renowned for Wit and Eloquence, dreamt that he s●w Jupiter place me on the top of the Capitol, with a Whip in mine hand. Certainly, if the powers of Heaven promise me so great an Empire; I will not be wanting to myself▪ but will add by my industry to their influence. To further my designs, I do desire you, nay I conjure you both, that as you have been ever ready in your Counsels, so you would not now be backward in any necessary assistance. This said, they presently enter into a new conference, how to manage a business of this weight; what Senators to acquaint with their intent; how to dispose of the Army, not yet cashiered; with what Plummet were best to sound the minds of the common people, and to oblige all sorts unto him. This Consultation ended, AUGUSTUS continued his affability to the People, and respect to the Nobles. An opportunity he had to express himself to both. There was at that time a Famine, which shrewdly raged among the Commons. To the poorer sort, he distributed Corn, gratis; too others, at a mean price. Riches and honours he communicated to both sorts; the better to wipe out of their memories, the ancient freedom. Such parts of the City as were destroyed by casualty of fire, ruined by length of time, or defaced during the Civil Wars; he re-edified. Houses of Common-assemblies he repaired; Temples, consecrated to the Gods, he spared no cost to adorn and beautify. And finally, so freely diffused his bounty, that there was no part or member of the City, which had not some taste of it. Next, he dismissed his Soldiers, assigning them Lands and habitations in divers parts of Italy: That so the People might conceive his Resignation to be real; and yet, if need were, his forces might be quickly reassembled. Nor were Agrippa and Mocenas wanting for their parts, to promote the cause; but carefully acquainted some of the Senate with it, who stood well affected to them; and cunningly prepared others, who had stood indifferent.  
18 The foundation thus laid, and the Senate sat, AUGUSTUS rose from his seat, and spoke to this, or the like effect. When I consider with myself the infinite extent of the Roman Empire; I protest I stand at a maze: Marvailing how such, as heretofore have raised combustions in State, durst undertake the sole administration of it. What Nation in the World, hath not either begged their Peace at our Gates; or felt the fury of our Wars at their own▪ What Countries have we not harried with Fire and Sword, making the rising and setting of the Sun the bounds of our Dominions? It must questionless proceed from an overweening conceit in them, of their own abilities; who thought themselves so fit to undergo that burden, which none but the immortal Gods can carry. Of myself I will not say much; Only, I hope I may say with modesty, that I am not inferior to Cinna, nor it may be to Sylla; Yet have I found in myself, by late experience, how unable I was to manage the affairs of State, even then when I had two Coad●utators. There is no Atlas of strength sufficient to bear up this Heaven; No Star of influence sufficient to animate this Sphere; No one form of virtue sufficient to actuate this matter. Neither indeed is it fit, that the Republic which ought to be immortal, should depend only on the life and welfare of one man. There never was, since the beginning of time, a City replenished with greater store of worthy and able men, either to consult or exercise. Never was there seen so grave and discreet a Consistory; Never so many of both sorts so fit to govern. I have by your Directions, and the Valour of your Soldiers, put an end to all homebred quarrels. I have been your instrument to reduce Peace internal and external, to your City, and desire now no other Guerdon or recompense for any former services, than a quiet and a private life; free from all such dangers and inconveniences, as are inseparably annexed to the Sovereignty. Now therefore, and may my action be auspicious and fortunate to my Country, do I resign my authority; committing myself, and the Commonwealth, into the hands of the Senate and People of Rome.  
19 This Oration ended, there followed a soft and silent buzzing in the house. Some supposed this speech not to have so much truth, as art and cunning, yet smothered their conceits for fear of after-claps. Others were Creatures of his own making, and they hoping to rise in the fall of their Country, would not hear of a Resignation. Some few of the wiser sort, thought it not expedient to put the Reigns again into the hands of the Multitude. The rest out of a sluggish and phlegmatic Constitution, chose rather the present estate with security; than to strive to recover the old, with danger. All therefore with a joint-consent proclaim him sole Emperor; and solemnly entreat him to save the Commonwealth, otherwise running to inevitable ruin. He for a while, as vainly denied to accept the Government, as they vainly persisted to desire him. At last, wearied with the clamours of all in general; and importunity of some in particular; he by little and little yielded to their requests, taking upon him the Empire for ten years, with this Proviso, that if before that time expired, he could fully settle and order the present State, 
A. V. C. 725  he would give up his charge. This he gave out, not with a purpose of performance; (For at the end of every Decennium he renewed his Lease of the Government;) But that the people seeing so nigh a possibility of regaining their Liberties, might not practise against him. Whereas, had he for term of life received the supreme Authority, he had no doubt hastened his own overthrow. For well he knew, that not the Title of Dictator, but the Epithet Perpetual, was the destruction of CAESAR: And yet a great respect was to be had also in the choice of the Title; The name of King he refused, as being odious unto the Citizens. Neither would he be called Romulus, though he much desired it, lest they should suppose that he did affect the Tyranny. When the people called him Dictator, he rend his Garments, desiring them to discharge him of a name so hated; and being once called Lord, (Dominus) he forbade also that Title by public Edict. Princeps Senatus was the only Title he admitted, well knowing, that the like glorious attributes were heaped on his Father julius by them which least loved him, only to this end, that growing more and more into hatred, he might the sooner be dispatched. Nor was he ignorant that the Common people led more by appearances, than truth, discerned names more plainly than executions; and that the only course to make greatness stand firmly, was to receive extraordinary power under a Title not offensive. The name also of AUGUSTUS conferred upon him by the Senate, (as if there had been something in him more than mortal) he refused not, as a Title expressing more dignity and reverence than authority. And having pleased himself in the choice of his Title, he next proceeded to the establishment of his power, which he thus pursued.  
20. When first at the hands of the Lords of the Senate, he had for ten years received the Government; there was appointed unto him two Cohorts of Praetorian soldiers for the guard of his person; to whom the Senate allowed the double wages of a Legionary soldier, to make them the more vigilant and needful in their charge. Over these he appointed two Prefects or Governors, (Captains of the Guard we may best term them.) To commit the charge to one only, might breed danger; to more, confusion. Agrippina to settle Nero in the Empire, prevailed with Claudius, to make Burrus, whom she had at her devotion, the sole Captain, and Nimphidius, fallen from his hopes of setting Galba besides the quishon, desired the command of the Guard as the next step to the Sovereignty. In choice of these Captains, he observed two Rules. First, he ever chose them, Ex ordine Equestri, not Senatorio; lest that so high a dignity, joined to so high a birth, might startle their resolutions to some designs against his quiet. Secondly, he made choice of two such, which were of contrary humours, and somewhat at odds, that so the ill intents of the one (if they should harbour any) might be thwarted and revealed by the other; and both in a noble emulation should contend to be most forward in his service. The next course which he took for his own security, was a law he made to curb the wills and attempts of the great ones. For whereas it had been formerly unlawful to question a Bondman in matters concerning the life and death of his Lord; AUGUSTUS passed an Act, that all such Bondmen should be first sold to him, or the Commonwealth. By means whereof he kept the Lords, before presuming on the secrecy of their slaves, from all close and private Conspiracies against him. Having thus strengthened his person, he assumed to himself the Imperial, Censoriall, and Tribunitian authority, together with the Sacerdotal dignity. As Emperor and General of the Men of War, he could press Soldiers, raise Taxes, proclaim Wars; make Peace, yea, and put to death the very best and stoutest of the Senators; as Censor, it was in his power, to reform corrupt manners, inquire after men's carriage, to take in and put out of the Senate whom he listed, to place & displace the people from an honourable Tribe, to a less honourable. Yet would he not be called Censor, as a name too inferior; but accepted the Prerogatives of it, after the surrendry of Manutius, and his associate, two men so unfit for that Magistracy, that they could object no crime to old or young, of which themselves were not guilty. The Tribunitian authority enabled him to hinder any thing attempted against his liking: It preserved his person from all contumely and injury; giving him power to punish, as an exerable person, (yea, and without any formality of the Law,) whosoever had offended him either in word or deed. As for the Pontifical Dignity, it made him a little more reverenced, not more potent. Only it added to his title the stile of Pontifex Maximus, or Chief Bishop; and made him of authority amongst the Priests, and in sacred matters, things that concerned Religion. The light of Reason taught him, that it was convenient for him, being a Prince, to have command on all his people; He had been else but half a Monarch, such as some Princes are with us, who quit their Clergy to be governed by a Foreign Head.  
21. These several Prerogatives annexed together, seemed not yet sufficient: and therefore he so cunningly dealt with the Senators, that they gave him a general Exemption from the Coactive power of the Law. Which once obtained, he seriously bends his thoughts to settle the Commonwealth; and so to settle it, that by uniting all parties, and giving satisfaction to all Interesses, it might not be obnoxious to such frequent and tumultuous alterations, as it had been formerly. But herein, when he had consulted the ancient Platforms, he found no small difficulty. The Form described by Plato, showed rather how a City ought to be governed, than how it may be. Aristotle, though bred in the Free States of Greece, was a friend to Monarchy; but his discourses dark, and speculative, and not easily reduced to practice. Solon afforded the People too much Authority, the Nobles too little, the King none. The old Cartl●●ginian Legislator attributed too much to Riches, too little to Virtue. The Persian Lawmakers indulged the King too much, to the Subject nothing: And on the other side, Lycurgus in his modelling of the State of Sparta, ascribed too little to the King, and too much to the Senate. Zaleucus was rather the Author of some particular Laws, than the Framer of a Commonwealth. Phaleas and Hippodamus as unimitable altogether as Plato. Seeing therefore that none of the old Patterns did come home to his purpose; and withal considering with himself, that the ●●nixt Forms of Rule were not equally balanced, and by consequence subject unto change, he resolved to frame his Commonwealth out of the perfections of the three good Forms, their imperfection being rejected, reserving to himself the Supreme Majesty, to the Senate eminent Authority, to the People convenient Liberty, all in a just and fit proportion. And to say truth, he did so mix the Sovereignty of one with the Liberty of all, that both the Lords and People, without fear of bondage or sedition, enjoyed their accustomed Freedoms. The Consuls and Nobles of the City assembled as formerly they used; matters of State they handled by themselves; Ambassadors of Foreign Nations they heard, and dispatched. The Commons assembled in the Comitia, to enact Laws and elect Magistrates, as in the free Commonwealth. Yet so that nothing was done without the consent and privity of the Prince, who for the most part, nominated the successive Magistrate, leaving the confirmation of him to that people. So that the change, as he contrived it, was not violent and at once, but by degrees, and by the silent approbation of both Estates, as seeming to consist more in the alteration of the Magistrate, than of the Laws.  
22. But (to proceed more particularly) the first care he took, was to confirm Religion in the same state in which he found it. I mean Religion as the Romans used the word, for those particular though idolatrous Forms of Worship, which to their several Gods had been used among them. This, though he might have changed, as the Pontifex Maximus, or chief Bishop of the City; yet very wisely he forbore it. It is not safe for Princes that are settled in a long descent of Government, to be too active in such changes: But it is dangerous to attempt it in a Green State, and in an Empire not well quieted, and enured to bondage. Men are more sensible of the smallest alterations in the Church, than greater changes in the State, and raise more frequent broils about it. The Romans specially were exceeding tender in this point. The ancient Aediles formerly received it into their charge, that they permitted no external, either Gods or Ceremonies, to be introduced into the City. And by Aemilius it was enacted for a Law, That none should offer sacrifice in any public place, after a new and Foreign fashion. Excellent therefore was the counsel which Maecenas gave him, when he first undertook the Empire; viz. That he should follow constantly the Religion which he found established, and compel others also to do the like: For Foreign and strange Rites (saith he) will offend the people, work many inconvenient alterations in the Civil State; yea and most likely will occasion many both seditions and conspiracies. Words which he spoke not to the air, but to a Prince exceeding apprehensive of the best advice: Nor did AUGUSTUS ever show himself more careful in any one Art of Empire, than he did in this. That which Maecenas noted, we find true in these later Ages; in times more skilful of obedienee, than the most quiet hour of AUGUSTUS Government. No one thing more hath caused so frequent and so general Rebellions in the States of Christendom, than alterations of this nature. I cannot therefore but commend it, as a pious resolntion in a late mighty Monarch: Better some few corruptions should be suffered in a Church, than still a change.  
23. Religion thus established, in the next place the welfare of the whole Empire consisted chiefly in reforming of the City; from which, as from the heart, life was conveyed to all the Provinces abroad. And in the City the corruption was most apparent in the Senate itself. With them therefore he beginneth, well knowing that crimes in men of eminent place end not in themselves; but by degrees become diffused among their Clients and Followers. Now in the Senate were many and desertless men, who had been taken into it during the Civil Wars; as they could court the People, and humour such as were most potent. Of these he expelled none by his own power; but making a speech to them in the Senate, of the ancient order and present confusion of the house, he first exhorted them to look back on their former lives, and to judge of their own abilities and merits, for so honourable a room. Then he desired some of them to pick out such among them, as were in disposition factious, and in life faulty, but loath to conceive so ill of their own actions; which they did accordingly. Yet as it often happeneth, that the great Thief leadeth the less to the Gallows; and as Commines observeth, that after the Battle of Monliherry Offices were taken from many for flying away, and conferred on such as ran ten miles beyond them: So remained many in the Senate neither less vicious, nor less violent; only more potent to maintain their doings, than some others whom they had removed. AUGUSTUS therefore joining to him Agrippa, proceedeth to a new review: And certainly it much concerned him in the settling of his affairs, that none should have a voice in that famous Council, but such as were of able judgements, honest repute, and well-affected to his Service and the Commonwealth. And enterprise which he esteemed so dangerous, that he permitted entrance to no Senator till he were searched; himself wearing a Brigandine under his Gown; and being environed with ten of the most courageous and best beloved of the whole company. Such as he found in either kind inexcusable, he discharged from their attendance, electing such in their places, which were either ennobled for their wisdom, of noted moderation, or otherwise strong in their dependants. Yet so that greatness of Revenue was esteemed neither a fit Patronage for any if they were offensive; nor a just cause to challenge interest in the house. Such of them as were rich rather in the gifts of the mind, than those of fortune, he relieved with honourable Pensions; and finally he bestirred himself so resolutely, that all confessed that they had need of such a wise Physician, to cure that dull Consumption, whereinto the Commonwealth was fallen.  
24 In other things he seldom did proceed against them as of himself: But when that any of them had conspired his Ruin, he referred them to the judgement of their fellows. And this he did partly to reserve unto the Court the ancient Prerogative; partly, not to be Judge and party in his own cause: but principally following the example of his Father Julius, who counterfeiting a wretchless contempt of his adversaries, used when he was least suspected, underhand, and by public Officers to work their destruction. Many also of them whom the Senate had condemned, he would freely pardon. Conceiving truly, that the questioning of men of high calling, would produce as much terror; though it argued not so much rigour as the punishment. Yet if extremity of Law was used towards some few, it was to settle quietness in the whole; and as it were a particular blood-letting for the general health. Those who had followed the factions of Brutus and Antony, he forgave freely. And not so only, but by manifesting his words by his deeds, and adding trust and honours to his pardons: he made his Chair of State more settled, and immovable. So Caesar by erecting the fal● and broken Images of Pompey, made his own statues stand more firmly. But the chief Act by which he bridled the Nobles, was an Edict by him promulgated, forbidding any of the ●, his leave not granted, to travel out of Italy. For well he knew that in an Empire unsettled, and Proulaces not quieted, the presence and authority of men of that rank, might raise greater troubles, than could be easily suppressed. Examples he wanted not; that especially of Cato, who after the overthrow of Pompey, stirred such a War against Caesar in afric: that he never bought Victory a● a dearer rate. Yet not altogether to imprison them, he licenced them at their pleasure to visit Sicilia, and Gaul Narbonoyse; Provinces close to the continent of Italy, altogether unfurnished for Wars; and indeed such, as by reason of the variety of pleasures in them used, were more likely to weaken their minds, than to arm their bodies. Now to give the Senate some sweet meat to their sour sauce; he as much honoured and reverenced that Order, as ever it was in the Free-state: submitting himself to their Judgements, and appearing of his own accord, at most of their days of Session. Out of those he chose 15 alterable every half year, to be of his privy Counsel; but then changing them for others, that so all of them might participate that honour; and yet none of them be acquainted with too many of his secrets. At his entrance into the Senate, he used courteously to salute the Lords; and so likewise at his departure. He knew full well that it was noted for great pride in his Father julius; so much to slight the Lords of that House, as he always did: never making to them any obeisance, no not then, when they came to tell him what honours were decreed unto him.  
25. This Reformation of the great Ones, soon made the lower sort more careful; both to observe good order, and to learn obedience. Yet did not AUGUSTUS refer all to Precedent, but somewhat to Precept. The Roman Knights he enforced to yield an account of their lives; an Ordinance full of health and wisdom: Idleness being the root of all private vices, and public disorders. To the Commons in their Comitia and other meetings, he prescribeth Laws and Orders as himself listed. The old authority of the Tribunes, dashed in the Dictatorship of Sylla, he would not restore. He suffered them to intercede for the People, but not to prefer or hinder any Bill to the advancement or the prejudice of their Estate. Without this Curb, the Common sort would never have suffered him to sit fast in the Saddle. For had the people had their Tribunes, and had the Tribunes had their ancient dignity and power, which they had usurped: there had been little or no hope of altering the form of Government. So different are the ends of the Common-people, especially if nuzzled in a factious Liberty; from the designs of Sovereign Princes.  
26 The City thus reform in the principal errors and defects of it; he again exhibiteth unto them divers pleasures: As Shows of Fencers, stageplays, Combats of wild beasts, public Dance, with variety of other delightful spectacles. And this as well to breed in them a good conceit of the change, as fearing left their cogitations, for want of other objects, would fix themselves upon his actions, and the old freedom. Horse-races, Tilts, and Tornaments, he gladly cherished; but he permitted them only to the Inhabitants of Rome: That so that City being the Seat-Town of his Empire, might be stored with good Horses, and expert Riders. Such of the Commons as were behind hand, he relieved: and when that any of them had made him Heir to their goods; he well knowing that no good Father did appoint to his Heir any Prince but a Tyrant, presently restored to the Children of the deceased the whole Patrimony. An action truly worthy of AUGUSTUS; as true a Guardian of Orphan's, as a Father of his Country. Such Princes as gape covetously after other men's possessions, seldom enjoy the benefit of their own. The Treasures of Kings are then greatest, not when their own Coffers are full only, but their Subjects rich. Yet one thing more he seemed to leave unto the people, which they thought most pleasing; Liberty of speech: Wherein sometimes they were so licentious, that they spared not Agrippa himself, so potent with the Emperor. But he, good man, never using the Prince's favour to the prejudice of any, seemed not to mark their taunts and slanders: whether with greater moderation or wisdom, I cannot tell. Neither did AUGUSTUS scape their foolish Pasquil's and infamous Libels. All which he winked at, knowing, that Contumelles of that nature slighted and contemned, soon vanish of themselves; but if repined and stormed at, seem to be acknowledged. A temper which he learned of his Father Julius, who was perfect at it. And certainly it was a notable point of wisdom in both of them. It is the misery of the best Princes, even when they do well, to be ill spoken of. And therefore many times such follies, are with more policy dissembled than observed, by the greatest Kings.  
27 As for this Lavishness of the tongue, it is a humour that springeth for the most part, rather from a delight in prattling, than any malice of the heart: and they which use it are more troublesome than dangerous. Julius feared not the fat men, but the lean and spare. And so AUGUSTUS' thought, that not men liberal of speech, but silent, close, and sparing of their words, were most likely to raise tumults. Moreover, as long as the Common People retained Liberty of speech, they were the less sensible of the loss of Liberty in State. Whereas in the days of Domitian, when not only they were prohibited to commune together, but even their secret sighs and tears were registered; then began they to look back with a serious eye on the old and Common Liberty. Neglect is the best remedy for this Talking vein. When the humour is spent, the People will cease on their own accords: till then, no forces can compel them. Tacitus taxeth Vitellius of great folly, for hoping by force to hinder the continual reports of Vespasian's revolt; that being the only way to increase, not diminish the rumour. And as much he extolleth (I will not say how fitly) the Reign of Prince Nerva, wherein it was lawful for the Subject to think what he would, and speak what he thought.  
28 These courses though he took to rectify the Senate, and content the people, yet he stayed not here. There were too many of both sorts, dangerous and unquiet spirits, who stomached his proceedings; and under pretence of the ancient Liberty, were apt to any bold attempt, and sudden alteration. These as he winked at for the present, so he employed them (as occasion served) in his foreign Wars. Wherein he followed the example of his Father Julius, who when his Soldiers had displeased him, in their Mutinies and Tumults, would lead them presently unto some desperate and dangerous service. So weakening both his Foes which lay next unto him, and punishing those Soldiers which had disobeyed him. For though AUGUSTUS had thrice shut the Temple of Janus, and cherished Peace, no Emperor more, of so large a Territory: Yet when he saw his times, and that men's minds were active, and their thoughts disquieted; he could find presently occasion for some new employment. In this a Body Politic may be compared most fitly to the Body natural. When we are full of blood, and our spirits boiling, there is not any Physic better than Phlebotomy. But if a vein be broken in us, and we bleed inwardly, our estate commonly is dangerous, and almost incurable. So Princes, when their people are tumultuous and apt to mischief; or that their thoughts are working, and harkening after action: do commonly employ them in some service far from home; that there they may both vent their Anger, and employ their Courage. For let them stay at home to confirm their practices, and grow at last into a Faction: the State will suffer in it; if it be not ruined. We cannot have a fairer instance of this truth than the proceeding of our fifth Henry, and of the times next following: Whose, foreign Wars kept us all quiet here at home; wasted those humours; and consumed those fiery spirits: which afterwards, the wars being ended, inflamed the Kingdom.  
29 But his main work was to content the Soldiers, and to make them sure. Some of which he dispersed as before I said, all about Italy, in 〈◊〉 Colonies: as well for the defence of the Country, as for their more speedy reassembly, if need should require. Abroad amongst the Provinces, were maintained upon the common charge 23 Legions with their aids, besides 10000 of his Guard, and those which were appointed for the bridling and safety of the City. As to all of them he showed an excellent thankfulness, for their faithful services. So in particular to Agrippa, and to one other, whose name the Histories of that Age have not remembered. This latter had valiantly behaved himself at the battle of Actium: and being summoned to appear before the Lords of the Senate in a matter which concerned his life, cried to AUGUSTUS for succour; who assigned him an Advocate. The poor fellow not contented with this favour, bearing his breast, and showing him the marks of many wounds; These (quoth he) have I received AUGUSTUS, in thy service, never supplying my place by a Deputy. Which said, the Emperor descending to the Bar, pleaded the Soldier's cause, and won it. Never did Sovereign Prince, or any that command in Chief, lose any thing by being bountiful of favours to their men of War. For this act quickly spreading itself over all the Provinces, did so indeer him to the Military men, that they all thought their services well recompensed, in that his graciousness to that one man. And now were they so far given over to him, that the honours conferred on Agrippa, could not increase their love; well it might their admiration. Agrippa was of a mean and common Parentage, but supplying the defects of his Birth with the perfections of his Mind; he became very potent with AUGUSTUS; who not only made him Consul, but his companion in the Tribunition authority, and Provest of the City. So many titles were now heaped on him, that M●●nus persuaded the Prince, to give him his Daughter Julia to Wife; affirming it impossible for Agrippa to live safe, considering how open new Creatures lie to the attempts of Malicious men; unless he were ingrassed into the Royal stem of the Caesars. On which cause questionless, for the stronger establishment of his new honours; Sesame afterward attempted, but not with the like success, the like matth with Livia, Tiberius' Daughter-in-Law.  
30 The Senate, People, and Men of War, thus severally reduced to a Mediocrity of power and content: The next labour is to alter the old, and establish a new Government of the City itself. To effect which, he dashed all former Laws, by which the Allies and Confederates of the State were made free Denizens of the Town. That he conceived to be a way to draw i whole Empire into one City; and by the monstrous growth and increase of that, to make poor the rest. Therefore this Privilege he communicated unto a few only: partly that in the times of dearth, the City might not so much feel the want of sustenance; and partly that so ancient an honour might not be disesteemed; but principally left Rome replenished with so huge a multitude of stirring and unruly spirits, should grow too headstrong to be governed in due order. The greatest and most populous Cities, as they are pronest unto faction and sedition; so is the danger greatest, both in itself, and the example, if they should revolt. This provident course notwithstanding, there were in Rome men more than enough; and among them not a few malcontents and murmurers at the present state, such as contemned the Consuls, and hated the Prince. To keep these in compass, AUGUSTUS (it being impossible for him to be still resident at Rome, and dangerous to be absent) constituted a Provost of the City, for the most part chosen out of the Senators: assigning him a strength of 6000 men, called Milites Urbani, or the City-souldiers. To him he gave absolute and Royal authority, both in the Town and Territory near adjoining, during his own absence, To him were appeals brought from the other Magistrates: and finally to his Tribunal were referred all causes of importance, not in Rome only, but the greatest part of Italy. Mesalla was the first Provost, but proof being had of his insufficiency, the charge was committed to Agrippa, who did not only settle and confirm the City, but did the best he could to free the adjoining parts of Italy from Thiefs and Robbers, and stopped the courses of many other troublers of the present State. And yet he could not with that power either so speedily, or so thoroughly reform all those mischiefs which in the late unsettled times were become predominant, as he did desire.  
31 It is recorded that in the Civil wars of Marius and Sylla, one Pontius Telesinus of the Marian Faction, told his General, that he did well to scour the Country, but Italy would never want Wolves, as long as Rome was so sit a Forest, and so near to retire unto. The like might have been spoken to Agrippa; That he did well to clear the common Rhodes and Passages, but Italy would never want Thiefs, whilst Rome was so good a place of Refuge. For though he did, as far as humane industry could extend, endeavour a general Reformation both within the City and without: yet neither could he remedy, nor foresee all mischiefs. Still were there many, and those great disorders, committed in the night season; when as no eye, but that to which no darkness is an obstacle, could discern the Malefactors. For in the first Proscription, many men used to walk the streets well weaponed; pretending only their own safety; but indeed it was to make their best advantage of such men as they met either in unfrequented lanes and Passages, or travelling as their occasions did direct them in the Night. To repress therefore the foul insolences of these Swordmen, AUGUSTUS did ordain a Watch, consisting of 7000 Freemen: their Captain being a Gentleman of Rome. In the day time, the Guard of the Town was committed to the Provost and his City soldiers: These Vigils resting in their standing Camps. In the night season, one part took their stations in the most suspicious places of the City: another, in perpetual motion traversed the streets; the rest lying in the Corpse du Guard, to relieve their companions. By which means, he not only remedied the present disorders; but preserved the City from danger of Fire also. Yea and secured himself from all Night-tumults, which carried with them (though but small) more terror and affrightment, than greater Commotions in the day. Never till now were the common people Masters of their own, both lives and substance. And now was travel in the Night, as safe, though not so pleasant, as at Noon.  
32 The People and City thus settled, his next study is to keep the Provinces in a liking of the Change. But little Rhetoric needed to win their liking, who had long desired the present form of Government: mistrusting the People's Regiment, by reason of Nobleman's factions, Covetousness of Magistrates, the Laws affording no security, being swayed hither and thither by ambition and corruption. These Provinces when he first took the Government, he thus divided. Asia, Africa, Numidia, Betica, Narbonensis, Sicilia, Corsica, Sardinia, all Greece, Crete, Cyprus, Pontus, and Bythinia, being quiet and peaceable Provinces, of known, and faithful obedience, he assigned unto the Senate. But the new conquered Regions, such as had not digested their loss of liberty, with whom any Rebellion or War was to be feared, he retained under his own command. Such were Tarraconensis, Lusitanica, Lugdunensis, Germany, Belgica, Aquitanica, Syria, Silicae, Egypt, Dalmatia, Mysia, Pannonia, etc. And this he did, as he gave out, to sustain the danger himself alone, leaving unto the Senate all the sweets of ease: but the truth was, to keep them without Arms, himself always strong and in a readiness. The notable effects of which Counsel did not discover themselves only by the establishment of the Empire in his own person during life, and the continuance of it in the house of the Caesars (though men of most prodigious Vices) after his decease: but in some of the Ages following also. For when the Family of the Caesars was extinct in Nero, the Imperial Provinces being so strong, and perceiving the Consular so weak, assumed to themselves the creating, and establishing of the following Princes. Thus Galba was made Emperor by the Spanish and French Legions, Vitellius by the Germane, Vespasian by the Syrian and Panonnian: The Consular Provinces never stirring, either to prevent their attempts, or to revenge them. And when they adventured once to advance Gordian to the Throne, all they could do, was but to betray the poor old man and all his Family to a tragic end. And yet he did not so impropriate those Provinces to the Senate, but that they also (as well as those which he reserved unto himself) were specified particularly in his private Register. In which (the better to manage the affairs of the Empire) he had set down what Tributes every of them paid, what Presents they sent in, what Customs in the● were levied. That book also comprehended the wealth of the public Treasury, and necessary charge issuing out of it: What number of Citizens and Allies there were in Arms; What strength there was by Sea, with all other circumstances concerning the extent, strength, riches, and particulars of his estate. William of Normandy did the like at his first entrance into England, when he composed that censual Roll of all this Kingdom, which we call Doomsday Book, or the Roll of Winton; according unto which, Taxations were imposed, and aids exacted. The greatest Princes have not thought it a disparagement to be good Husbands, to know the riches of their Crowns, and have an eye to their Intrado.  
32. Britain was left out of this Bead-Roll, either because from hence there neither was much hope of profit, nor much fear of hurt; or else because being more desirous to keep than enlarge the Monarchy, he thought it most expedient to confine it within the bounds appointed by Nature. Danubius' on the North, Mount Atlas on the South, Euphrates on the East, and the main Ocean on the West, did both bound his Empire and defend it. Some Kingdoms have their limits laid out by Nature, and those which have adventured to extend them further, have found it fatal. The Persians seldom did attempt to stretch their Territory beyond Oxus, but they miscarried in the action. And what was that poor River, if compared unto the Ocean? Many who loved action, or expected preferment by the Wars, incited him unto the conquest and plantation of these Country's. Affirming, That the barbarous people were naturally bad Neighbours, and though for the present not very strong nor well skilled in Arms, yet might a weak Enemy in time gather great strength. That he ought to pursue the War for his Father Julius sake, who first showed that Island to the Romans; that it yielded both refuge and supply to the Malcontents of Gaul, and Enemies in Germany. That he would lose the benefit of a wealthy Country, stored with all manner of provision, and the command of a valiant Nation, born (as it were) unto the Wars. That it was an Apostasy from honour, to lie still and add nothing to the conquest of his Ancestors. That he was in all equity bound as far as in him was, to reduce to Civility from Barbraism so many proper and able men. But to these motives he replied, That he had already refused to wage war with the Parthian, a more dangerous neighbour, and far whose enemy than the Britain's. That he had waste and desert ground enough in his own Dominions for many a large Plantation, when he saw it needful. That he had constantly refused, though with great facility he might, to conquer any more of the barbarous Nations. That as in the Nat●rall body a surfeit is more dangerous than fasting; so in the Body Politic too much is more troublesome than a little. That the Roman Monarchy had already exceeded the Persian and Macedonian, and to extend it further was the next way to make it totter and fall by its own weight. That he had learned in the Fable not to lose the substance, by catching at the shadow. And finally, that many puissant Nations lay in and about Brittany, against whom Garrisons must be kept; and he feared the Revenue would not quit the Cost. And so the enterprise of Britain was quite laid aside.  
33. For the assurance of the Provinces already conquered, he dispersed into them 23. Legions, with their Aids, whose pay only, besides provision of Corn, and Officers wages, amounting to five Millions and an half of our English pounds, and somewhat more, were so suddenly paid unto the Armies, that we read seldom in the Histories of that Empire, of any Mutiny among the soldiers for want of pay. An happiness whereof these ages have been little guilty. For the amassing of this treasure, and defraying of this charge, AUGUSTUS made not use only of his own revenue. Wars which are undertaken, and Soldiers that are levied for the Common safety, aught in all reason to be maintained on the Common purse. The Grandour and security of an Empire, concerns in all respects, as much the People as the Prince. For which cause he erected an Exchequer in the City, which was called Aerarium militare, or the Soldier's Treasury, whereto the twentieth part of every man's estate was brought, according to the true and perfect valuation. This was esteemed an heavy burden at the first, and indeed it was, but that the people felt the sweetness and effects of it in the Common safety. In that respect, the interest was greater than the principal. Subjects that have a care either of the common peace or honour, will not repine at payments and taxations, though more than ordinary. It is a poor conceit to think that Princes either are able or obliged, to maintain the wars without assistance from their people: or that the treasures which in these respects they give the King, they do not give unto themselves. I may perhaps repute him for a cunning Sophister, but never for a faithful Subject, which coins distinctions betwixt the welfare of the King, and the weal of the Kingdom. These Legions he employed as occasion was, either to curb the Natives, or secure the Borders. The Roman Empire seldom had such perfect peace, but that there were employment, always for the Soldiers. If that they had in any place a short Cessation from the wars, yet they were not idle. Idleness doubtless is the greatest enemy to Martial Discipline. Therefore he kept them at such times perpetually busied, either in paving Bogs, or in dreaning Marshes. By means whereof, he made not only many of the barbarous Countries, both fruitful in themselves, and profitable to the Chequer: but thereby also he secured his own affairs, and disarmed his enemies. For many times the barbarous people trusting to such advantages, were apt too often to rebel; and having got themselves within those Mires and Fastnesses, stood on their Guard, as in some fashionable or defensible Fortress. The surest means to keep a conquered people from all occasion of revolting, is to lay waste their Wood-lands, and make all parts passable. The opportunity of a safe retreat, makes not more Thiefs than Rebels.  
35. Those whom he placed over his Provinces and Armies, he neither would remove under three years' Government, nor yet continue after five. A longer stay might teach them too much cunning in practising on the dispositions of the people, and perhaps prompt them to work into the favour of the Natives, and the Men of War; and so at last to establish in themselves a Sovereignty. Caesar's long stay in Gaul, (a second five years being added unto that which was first allowed him) made him so potent with the People, and gracious with the Soldiers, that in the end he brought the Roman Empire under his subjection. And on the other side, to take them from their charges under three years' continuance, were to have called them home, before they were well learned in the Customs and the nature of the Provinces; so makiug them unable to instruct their Successors. As for the men whom he employed in those Commands, he culled them always out of the most valiant and upright in Camp and Senate. A Prince more willing and desirous not to employ men likely to offend, than after the offence to punish and chastise them.  
36. Besides his forces by Land, he also maintained at Sea two invincible Armadas: The one lay at Anchor near Ravenna, in the upper Sea, to awe and defend Dalmatia, Crete, Greece, Cyprus, Asia, etc. The other at Misenum in the lower Sea, to protect and keep under Gaul, Spain, Africa, Egypt, Syria, etc. Neither was this the only use of two such puissant Fleets, but in all probability they were to cleanse the Sea of Pirates; to have a care to the conducting of the Tributes and Customs into the Exchequer; and served also for transporting Corn, and other necessary provisions, for the sustenance and relief of the City. In the ensuing Civil Wars, these two Navies proved to be of great importance: The revolt of them giving as great a blow to the one side, as a comfort to the other. The principal assurance of Otho in these Wars, was the immovable fidelity of the Misenian Fleet; and the siding of the other with Vespasian, broke the hearts of Vitellius best followers.  
37. Now as he thus strengthened the Provinces in general, so did he cast an especial eye on three particulars, viz. Italy, Gaul, and Egypt; Italy rounded Rome the Metropolis of the Empire; and therefore he ought to be well assured of its good faith and allegiance to him. Nor was he ignorant that the Bellum Sociale raised by the people of that Country in the Free State, more shaken and endangered the Empire, than the Invasions of Pyrrhus or Annibal. Therefore as formerly he planted in it two and thirty Colonies of old and trusty Soldiers to keep it sure unto himself; so now he did divide it into eleven Regions, each having peculiar Magistrates and Under-Officers. This not so much to ease the City Praetor, although he had employment enough at Rome, but because it was thick set, and as it were overlaid with People, whose rising might endanger the Commonwealth. So by his Colonies he kept a Garrison upon them, as it were, that they could not revolt: and by his Officers and Justiciers (as I may call them) he set so straight a Watch about them, that they durst not practise.  
38. Gaul, now called France, was both a large and fertile Country, stored with a people, valiant in all attempts, and in many desperate. A people with which the old Romans fought rather to maintain their own liberty, than to increase their Dominions, a Tribe or Colony of which had sacked the City of Rome, and endangered the Capitol. A people finally with whom the Romans durst not make war, till they had almost all the residue of the world in subjection. Remembrance of their ancient Reputation, and store of money might occasion many desperate practices against the quiet of the Empire. The readiest way to keep them in obedience, was to keep them poor; for without wealth high stomaches may well feed on the hope of Liberty, but digest it never. Licinius his freedman, was the fittest fellow for such an Office, who is presently made the Taskmaster of the Province. The Galls used to pay a Monthly Tribute, which he much enhanced (besides private and petty means of prevailing) by making fourteen Months in a year. The Solicitors of that people at Rome make complaint to AUGUSTUS. He sometimes yielded unto them, sometimes excused his Freedman; some things he would not know, many he would not believe, others he dissembled. Licinius to make up his peace, sent to the Emperor all his treasure, and that huge Mass of Gold and Silver by those unlawful means heaped up together; which he not only willingly received, but his turn being served, and the French not a little impoverished, he recalled Licinius, and sent Tiberius to settle the Province. So old and common a thing it is with great Princes, to suffer their Vice-Roys, and Under-Officers, to suck like Sponges, the Wealth of the Subject, till they are quite full, and then to squeeze them into their own Coffers.  
39 But the Province whose tuition and defence he principally regarded, was Egypt; not so much for the valour and courage of the Inhabitants, as the natural strength and situation of the place. Alexander of Macedon having annexed it to his Empire, never committed the entire Government and Jurisdiction thereof to one man, fearing lest he presuming on the wealth of the People, and site of the Country, would settle the possession in himself. And so AUGUSTUS calling to mind as well the multitude, as the levity and inconstancy or 〈…〉 that it was very rich in coin, and the Roman Granary (as serving the City four 〈◊〉 yearly with Corn) not only trusted not the rule thereof into the hands of any of the 〈◊〉 but expressly forbade any of that Order (without his special permission) to sojourn there. 〈◊〉 is a principle in State, never to licence men of great houses, and credit among the people, to have free access into that Country, whose revolt may endanger the whole Empire. Wherefore it was a weakness doubtless in the Counsel of King Henry the sixth, to suffer Richard Duke of York, to pass at pleasure into Ireland, where he had harbour and relief, and whence he brought supply both of Men and Money. But to return to Egypt, Germanicus entering once into Alexandria, only to see the Antiquities of it, and return, stirred such suspicions and distractions in the jealous head of Tiberius, that he spared not sharply to rebuke him for it. Vespasian also being by the Syrian Legions chosen Emperor, first assured himself of Egypt, as the Key of the Sea and Land, with a small power against a strong host easily defended. This place he resolved to make his Sanctuary, if his designs succeeded not luckily. And to this place he hastened, after the defeat of the Vitellian Army; that so detaining the ordinary provision of Victuals, he might by Famine compel the City of Rome to stand at his devotion The Government of this Province was by AUGUSTUS always committed to some one of the Roman Gentry, as less able, by reason of his low Condition, to work against the Prince's safety. Neither would he allow his Deputy the glorious attributes of Lieutenant, Legatus, Proconsul, or Praetor: Captain or Precedent of Egypt was their highest Title; there being even in Titles no small motives to Ambition.  
40 AUGUSTUS having by these means reduced both the City and Provinces under his absolute command, and being now declining in strength, by reason of a sudden and violent sickness, began to call his wits to Counsel, how to dispose of the Estate after his decease. Male-child he never had any. His Daughter Julia, a woman of immodest carriage, never made further use of her Father's greatness, than that she satisfied her Lusts with the greater insolence. Marcellus his Sister's son and Julias husband, was a young man of an ingenious disposition, and seemingly capable of the fortunes which attended for him. Him, being yet young, AUGUSTUS preferred to the Pontifical dignity, and Aedileship; yet once upon his sickness, he privately determined to choose a Successor in the Commonwealth, rather than his own Family; and nor to leave the Empire to Marcellus, whom he held unable to undergo it, but to his companion in Arms, Agrippa, a man daunted neither with adverse, nor altered with prosperous fortunes. This Marcellus afterwards so stomached, that he began to grudge at Agrippa's greatness, and to bear a vigilant eye on his plots and actions. Contrarily, Agrippa unwilling to offend him, under whose future Government he was in all likelihood to end the rest of his days, with much ado obtained leave to retire unto Lesbos, that so his absence either might allay, or remove the displeasure conceived against him by the young Prince. An action full of wisdom, and magnamity. For though AUGUSTUS chief end was, to discountenance the popular dependencies of his son, by the favours heaped on his servant: Yet did Agrippa know, that a Favourite ought to have so much in him of the Persian Religion, as to worship the Rising Sun also; and that he should resemble old Janus with the two faces, with th'one looking on the King regnant, with th'other on the Prince successive.  
41 Marcellus being dead, Agrippa returning, married his Widow, and on her begat two Sons, Caius and Lucius; whose actions afterward afforded such variety for censure, that there was wanting neither much reason to commend, nor little to condemn them. On these two, or at the least one of them, AUGUSTUS now grown aged, resolves to settle the Estate, and if they failed, upon such others, as by the liberty of the Laws, he might Adopt: Adoption, in the estimation of the Roman Laws, being indeed another Nature. Posterity, whether it be natural, or only legal, is the best supporter of the Arms Imperial. Such as both fortifies the Prince, and assures the Subject. Yet this he did not without much reluctancy, and a great conflict in his mind. Sometimes his thoughts suggested to him, that the designed Successors draw to them all the attendance and respect, from the Prince in possession; That they have always a lingering desire to be actually seated in the Throne; That they suppose the life of the present Prince, too tedious; not caring by what means it were shortened: That sometime it is pernicious, yea even to the appointed Successor himself also. On the other side, his better thoughts prompted him to consider in what a miserable distraction he should leave the Empire, if sudden death should take from him an ability to nominate his heir; The fear conceived in the whole City, at his last sickness; That Pyrrhus of Epirus, was of all hands condemned, for leaving his Kingdom to the sharpest sword; That the Commonwealth fallen into dissensions, could not be settled again without a lamentable War, and a bloody Victory; That the people seeing him childless, would not only contemn him, but perhaps endeavour to recover the old liberty, though with the ruin of the State; That it was the custom of Tyrants, to desire the eternising of their deaths, by the downfall of their Countries. His mind thus distracted and perplexed, at last he broke in this manner. Thou hast Octavian a Wolf by the ears; which to hold still, or to let go, is alike dangerous. Many inconveniences may ensue, if thou dost not declare thy Successor; More, if thou dost. The good of the Republic consisteth in knowing the future Prince; Thine own welfare dependeth on the concealment. The Common good is to be preferred before any private: Yet ought Charity to begin at home. No, Octavian, no; As thou hast received, so show thyself worthy of the title of Pater Patriae. Yea, and perhaps this designation may secure thine own Estate. For what will it profit the people to consult against thee when they shall see a successor at hand, either of thine own body, or thine own appointment, ready to take thy place, and revenge thy wrongs.  
40 Thus resolved, he adopteth Caius and Lucius; desiring, though he made show to the contrary, they should be Consuls Elect, and called Princes of the Youth. Yet wisely forecasting the dangers incident to himself if they should make their abode in Rome; he sendeth them with honourable charge into the Provinces abroad; as well to exercise them in feats of War, as to take away all cause of faction in the Court, and sedition in the City. Which mystery of State as it was anciently practised by most Princes, so at this day by the Grand Seigneur; who always sendeth his eldest son unto Amasia, as Governor thereof; from whence till the death of his Father, he never returneth. In these journeys died the two young Princes, a misfortune which AUGUSTUS bore nobly; neither banishing grief with a Stoical Apathy; nor spending the time in womanish lamentations. Having performed due rights to the dead, he adopted his Wife's son Tiberius: A man for the conveniency and ripeness of his age, not unfit, in feats of Arms not unexpert, in humane learning not ignorant; but withal suspected to be cruelly given, and possessed with the hereditary pride of the Claudian Family. A strange medley of virtuous and vicious qualities. Tiberius, such was the will of his Father, to establish the succession, with more stays than one, adopted Germanicus, his Brother Drusus son; then commanding over eight Legions in Germany; which done, he speedeth to his charge in Illyricum. This man AUGUSTUS appointed to be his Heir, as it was afterwards (and not improbably) conjectured, neither in care to the State, nor in love to the party; but to win honour to himself, and to make the Roman people again wish for him; when they should see that infinite disproportion in all royal and Kingly qualities, between the old and new Emperors. A fetch after imitated by Tiberius, in the adoption of Caius Caligula.  
43 The last (though not the least) help of the Empire's establishment, was the long life and reign of our AUGUSTUS: as having ruled the State 16 years before, and 34 years after his confirmation in the Sovereignty, by the Senate and People. All the young men in the City were born after the first Decennium of the Monarchy. Most of the old men during the Civil Wars. Few had seen what was the ancient form of Government in the Commonwealth: Many did not desire it. For at the present, enjoying Peace both at home and abroad; and hearing what sad and tragical reports their Fathers made of the former troubles and proscriptions, they contented themselves with the new Government; as more esteeming a secure and happy subjection, than a dangerous and factious liberty. By which long time of Empire, and the policies already recited, besides many others, which I can neither learn by relations, nor gather by presumptions; did AUGUSTUS so firmly settle the Roman Monarchy, that it continued some hundred of years without alteration; though all his immediate Successors were in a manner Monsters, incarnate devils, and indeed any thing rather than men. Tiberius, cain's, Claudius, Nero, Galba, Otho, and Vitellius, both by their own Tyrannies, and their bondmen's Extortions, would have ruined any Monarchy not founded by AUGUSTUS.  
44 To speak concerning the domestical affairs of this Emperor, is beyond my Theme. As either how far he suffered himself to be ordered by his Wife Livia; or whether he used variety of women, not so much to satisfy a disordinate appetite, as by so many women to fish out the secret designs of many men. He was too exact a Statesman to be perfect in Soldiery; and in all his Wars was prosperous by Fortune rather than by Valour, or his Captain's Valour than his own. The Commonwealth which he found weak and in Rubbish, he left Adamantine, and invincible. In behaviour he was affable and gracious; in his discourse sententious; to the good, of a most sweet disposition; to the lewd and dishonest, harsh and unpleasant. Friendship he contracted with few, and that slowly; but to them, whom he once loved, constant and bountiful to the last. Finally, such a one he was, of whom I will only say what I find spoken of Severus; It had been an ineffable benefit to the Commonwealth of Rome, if either he had never died, or never been born.  
Thus having drawn the Picture of this puissant and prudent Prince (though I confess with too much shadow) I now proceed unto the Catalogue of the Roman Emperors: in which I shall take notice of such of their Actions only as had relation to the Public, either in the improvement or decrease of their Power and Empire; or point to any signal matter which concerns the Church.   

The Roman Emperors.  

1 Julius Caesar, 
A. M. 3918.  the last of the Dictator's, and the first of the Emperors, in memory of whom the following Emperors were called Caesar's, till the time of Adrian, when it became the title of the heir apparent, or designed Successor; the first who had it in that sense being Aelius Verus, though he lived not to enjoy the Empire.  
2 C. Octavianus Caesar, 
3923.  to whom the Senate gave the name of Augustus, who added unto the Roman Empire the Provinces of Noricum, Pannonia, Rhoetia, a great part of Spain, and the whole Kingdom of Egypt. In his time the Lord CHRIST was born. 56.  
3 Tiberius Nero, 
A. C. 17  the son-in-law of Augustus, subdued many of the Germane Nations, and added Galatia and Cappadocia to the Empire. In his time CHRIST suffered. 23.  
4 Ca●us Caligula, 
39  son of Germanicus (son of Drusus, the brother of Tiberius) and of Agrippina Niece to Augustus Caesar by his daughter Julia. 3.  
5 Claudius Caesar, 
43.  Uncle to Caligula, brother of Germanicus, and son of Drusus by Antonia Niece to Augustus by his Sister Octavia, added Britain and Mauritania to the Roman Empire. 13.  
6 Domitius Nero, 
57  son of Aenobarbus, and Agrippina daughter to Germanicus the last of the Caesars; he made the Celtian Alps a Province of the Empire; and brought the Armeniáns to receive their Kings from the Roman Emperors; and was the first that raised any public persecution against the Christians. An. 67. 13.  
7 Sergius Galba, 
70.  chosen by the French and Spanish Legions.  
8 Salvius Otho, made Emperor by the Praetorian Soldiers.  
9 Aul. Vitellius, elected by the Germane Legions.  
10 Flavius Vespasianus, 
71.  chosen by the Syrian and judaean Armies, subverted utterly the Commonwealth of the Jews, by the valour and prowess of his son Titus; and brought Achaia, Lycia, Rhodes, Samos, Thrace, and Syria Comagene, under the form of Roman Provinces. 9  
11 Titus Vespasianus, 
80.  the fortunate Conqueror of the Jews.  
12 Fl. Domitianus, 
82.  who raised the second persecution against the Christians. An. 96. 15.  
13 Nerva Cocceius, 
97.  a noble Senator, but no Roman born, as all the rest had been before him, but not many after him.  
14 Ulpius Trajanus, 
99  by birth a Spaniard, adopted by Nerva, he made Dacia a Province of the Empire, carried the Roman Armies over Euphrates, subduing Armenia, Mesopotamia, and Assyria; and raised the third Persecution against the Christians. An. 110. 19  
15 Aelius Adrianus, 
118.  who utterly exterminated the Jewish Nation, and continued the Persecution begun by Trajan. 20.  
16 Antoninus Pius, 
138.  whose friendship was sought by the very Indians. 24.  
17 Marcus Antoninus, 
162.  surnamed the Philosopher, associated L. Verus in the Government, by whose valour he subdued the Parthians; he raised the fourth Persecution against the Church. An. 167. 19  
18 L. Antoninus Commodus, 
181.  son to Marcus, the first Emperor that had been hitherto born in the time of his Father's Empire. 13.  
19 Aelius Pertinax, 
194.  made Emperor against his will.  
20 Didius julianus, who bought the Empire of the Soldiers.  
21 Septimius Severus, 
195.  took Ctesiphon from the Parthians, subdued the Province of O●roene; and raised the fifth Persecution. An. 195. 18.  
22 Bassianus Caracalla, 
213.  son to Severus.  
23 Opilius Macrinus, 
220.  made Emperor by the men of War.  
24 Varius Heliogabalus, 
221.  the supposed son of Caracalla.  
25 Alexander Severus, 
225.  Cousin of Varius.  
26 Maximinus, 
238.  a fellow of obscure birth, who being advanced to the Empire, raised the sixth Persecution. An. 237.  
27 Gordian, 
241.  elected by the Senate against Maximinus. 6.  
28 Philip, 
247.  an Arabian, supposed by some to be a Christian. 5.  
29 Decius, 
252.  slain in war against the Goths; the Author of the seventh Persecution raised against the Church. An. 250. 2.  
30 Gall●s Hostilianus. 2. 
254.   
31 Aemilianus the Moor. 
256.   
32 Valerianus, 
256.  the Author of the eighth Persecution. An. 259. He was taken prisoner by Sapores King of Persia, and made to serve him for a footstool.  
33 Gallienus, son to Valerianus, in whose time the 30 Tyrants engrossed unto themselves several parts of the Empire.  
34 Claudius II. 
271.  who after a short and troublesome time, left it to  
35 Quintillus his Brother, 
272.  who enjoyed the same but 17 days.  
36 Valer. Aurelianus, 
273.  restored again the ancient discipline, suppressed all the Invaders of the Empire, and vanquished the Goths, but was a great persecutor of the Church An. 278. 6.  
37 Annius Tacitus, 
279.  descended from Tacitus the Historian.  
38 Florianus, an Emperor of two month, only.  
39 Valerius Probus. 
280.  6.  
40 Aurelius Carus, 
286.  together with his two sons Carinus and Numerianus.  
41 Dioclesian, 
288.  first associated Maximianus by the name of Emperor, or Augustus, and afterwards Galerius of Dacia, and Constantinus Chlorus by the name of Caesar's. He had continual Wars against the Persians, and raised the tenth Persecution against the Church, An. 295. Which held so long, and was so vehement withal, that as St. Hierom writes, there were 5000 slain for every day in the year save the first of January. He afterwards resigned the Empire, and lived in private at Salona. 20.  
41 Constantinus Chlorus, 
308.  a friend to Christians. 2.  
42 Constantine son of Chlorus, 
310.  surnamed Magnus, or the great; the first Emperor that countenanced the Gospel, and embraced it publicly, which he is said to have done on this occasion. At the same time that he was saluted Emperor in Britain, Maxentius was chosen at Rome by the Praetorian Soldiers, and Licinius named Successor by Maiminus, the associate of his Father Chlorus: Being pensive and solicitons upon these distractions, he cast his eyes up towards Heaven, where he saw in the Air a lightsome Pillar in the form of a Cross, wherein he read these words, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, in hoc vince; and the next night our Saviour appearing to him in a Vision, commanded him to bear that figure in his Standard, and he should overcome all his Enemies. This he performed, and was accordingly victorious; from which time he not only favoured the Christians, but became a very zealous professor of the Faith and Gospel. I know Zosimus an Heathen Historian, partly out of malice to the Christians in general, and partly a particular grudge to the Emperor Constantine, reporteth otherwise of the causes of his Conversion: But the authority and consent of all Christian Writers, who deliver it as before is told, is far to be preferred before the testimony of one single Heathen had he not been biased (as he was) by his disaffections.   
Before this time it is observed, that few (if at all any) of the Roman Emperor's died a natural death, as after they generally did. From Julius Caesar unto Constantine there were 40. in all: Of which, Julius was openly murdered in the Senate; Augustus made away in his wife Lavia, as Tiberius afterwards by Macro; Caligula was slain by Cassius Chaereas; Claudius poisoned by his wife Agrippina; Nero and Otho laid violent hands upon themselves; Galba and Vitellius massacred by the Soldiers; Domitian by Stephanus, Commodus by Laetus and Electus, Pertinax and Julianus by the Soldiers of their Guard; Caracalla by the command of Macriws; Macrinus, Heliogabalus, Alexander, Maximinus, Maximus, and Balbinus, successively by the men of War; Gordiaws by Philip, Philip by the Soldiers; Hostilianus by Gallus and Aemilianns, and they by the Soldiers; Valerianus died a prisoner in Parthia; Florianus was the author of his own end; Aurelianus murdered by his household servants; Gallienus, Quintillus, Tacitus, and Probus, by the fury of the military men. And yet I have omitted out of this Account such of the Emperors as were tumultuously made by the Army, without the approbation of the Senate; as also the Caesars, or designed Successors of the Empire; most of which got nothing by their designation and adoption, but ut citius interficerentur. Some of these were cut off for their misdemeanours; some for seeking to revive again the ancient Discipline; and some, that others might enjoy their places. The chief cause of these continual massacres, proceeded originally from the Senate and Emperors themselves. For when the Senators had once permitted the Soldiers to elect Galba, and had confirmed that election; Euulgato (saith Tacitus) imperii arcano, principem alibi quam Romae fieri posse; more Emperors were made abroad in the field by the Legions, than at home by the Senators. Secondly, from the Emperors, who by an unseasonable love to their Guard-souldiers, so strengthened them with privileges, and nuzzled them in their licentious courses, that on the smallest rebuke, they which were appointed for the safety of the Princes, proved the Authors of their ruin: so truly was it said by Augustus in Dion, Metuendum est esse sine custode, sed multò magis à custode metuendum est. The last cause (be it causa per accidens, or per se) was the largess which the new Emperors used to give unto the men of service; a custom begun by Claudius Caesar, and continued by all his Successors: insomuch that the Empire became saleable, and many times he which bade most had it. As we see in ●●on, when Sulpitianus offering twenty Sestertiums to each soldier, was (as if they had been buying of a stock at Gleek) out-bidden by Julianus, who promised them five and twenty Sestertiums a man. So that Herodian justly complaineth of this Donative. Id initium causaque militibus fuit, ut etiam in posterum turpissimi contumacissimique evaderent, sic ut avarit●a indies, ac principum contemptus, etiam ad sanguinem usque proveherent. That is to say; From this occasion and beginning the soldiers every day grew more shameless, and less regardful of their Prince; so that their covetuousness increasing, and the contempt they had of their Emperors waxing more and more, ended at last in the frequent shedding of their bloods, in hope to have a better Market of the next Successor: So as the Emperor Constantine wanted not good reason, besides their siding against him for Maxentius, to cashier these Guards, as grown more dangerous than useful to Imperial Majesty. And so accordingly he did levelling their standing Camp to the very ground, disbanding the whole company, or putting them under other Officers and to other Services; by means whereof they were not able to create the like disturbances, or dispose of the Empire as before. And for the Captains of these Guards which before were two (Praefecti Praetorio in the Latin) he increased their number unto four, (one for each quarter of the Empire) giving them a Civil Jurisdiction in exchange for the Military Command which they had before; and casting them behind in place after the Patric●● an Order of his own devising.  
As for the extent and latitude of the Roman Empire, whilst it remained one entire Body (as it was before the time of Constantine, who at his death divided it among his sons) it was in length about three thousand miles: namely, from the Irish Ocean West, to the River Euphrates on the East; and in breadth it reached from the Danubius Northward, to Mount Atlas on the South, about two thousand miles. And though the Romans had extended their Dominions sometimes farther East and North, yet could they never quietly settle themselves in those conquests. Nature (it seemeth) had appointed them these bounds, not so much to limit their Empire, as to defend it. For the enemies found those Rivers, by reason of the depth of the Channel, and violent current of the stream, as a couple of impregnable Fortresses, purposely as it were erected to hinder them from harrasing the Roman Countries.  
The Revenues of it Lipsius in his Tract de Magnitudine Romanâ, esteemeth to be about one hundred and fifty millions of Crowns; and that they were no less, may be made more than probable by these reasons. 1. It is affirmed by divers, and among others, by Boterus, that the yearly Revenues of the King of China amount unto one hundred and twenty millions of Crowns, and if this be true (as few question it) we cannot in proportion guests the whole Empire of the Romans to yield less than one hundred and fifty millions, especially considering what Arts-Masters the Romans were in levying and raising their Taxes and customary Tributes. 2. The Legionary Soldiers which were dispersed over the Provinces, received in ordinary pay (besides provision of corn, apparel, and Officers wages) five millions, 516062. pound, and ten pound of our money, which amounteth unto sixteen millions of Crowns or thereabout. In the City itself there were kept in continual pay seven thousand soldiers of the Watch, four thousand or six thousand for the defence of the City, and ten thousand for the Guard of the Emperor's person. The two first had the same wages, the last the double wages of a Legionary Soldier. Add hereto the expenses of the Palace, and other means of disbursalls, and I think nothing of the sum can be abated. 3. We read that C. Caligula spent in one year two millions, and seven hundred thousand of Sestertiums; how Ner● most lavishly gave away two millions and one hundred thousand of Sestertiums; and how Vitellis in few months was nine hundred thousand of Sestertiums in Arrearages, every Sestertium being valued at seven pound sixteen shillings three pence: all of them huge and infinite sums. 4. When Vespasian came to the Empire, the Exchequer was so impoverished, that he professed in open Senate, that he wanted to settle the Commonwealth forty millions of Sestertiums, amounting to three hundred and twelve millions of our English money; which Protestation (saith Sueton) seemed probable, quia & malè partis optimè usus est. Now unless the ordinary Revenues came to as much, or more than we have spoken, by what means could this extraordinary sum be raised? 5. We may guests at the general Revenue by the moneys issuing out of particular Provinces; and it is certain that Egypt afforded to the Ptolemy's twelve thousand talents yearly: neither had the Romans less, they being more perfect in inhancing, than in abating their Intrado. France was by Caesar sessed at the yearly tribute of twenty millions of Crowns. And no doubt the rest of the Provinces were rated accordingly. 6 lie. and lastly, the infinite sums of money given by the Emperors in way of largess, are proofs sufficient for the greatness of the income. I will instance in Augustus only, and in him, omitting his Donatives at the victory of Actium, and the rest, I will specify his Legacy at his death: He bequeathed (by his Testament, as we read in Tacitus) to the common sort, and the rest of the people, three pound eight shillings a man, to every soldier of the Praetorian bands, seven pounds sixteen shillings three pence, and to every Legionary soldier of the Roman Citizens, four pound ten shillings six pence, which amounted to a mighty mass of money.  
The Arms or Ensign of this Empire when it was up and in the flourish, was the Eagle, not born, as now, in colours, and a banner, but in an Image or Portraiture on the top of a Spear, or other long piece of Wood, to be fixed in the earth at pleasure. This Ensign, Spear and Eagle together, they called the Labarum: Quae signa, quòd quasi labantia hortis appenderentur, labara dixerunt, saith Lipsius, Epist. Quaest. Ep. 5. The use, as of this, so of other standards, Lyra giveth us in his Notes on the second of Numb. namely, ut ad eorum aspectum, bellatores dividantur & uniantur, to call together, and distribute the soldiers according to occasions. And certainly for this end and purpose were those Ensigns first invented: Afterwards they were applied to the distinguishing of Tribes and Families, and at last bestowed by Kings and Princes as the honorary marks of well-deserving: those which had been the Ensigns of War, so becoming the Ornaments of Peace. At what time the form of this Labarum was altered, and began to be born in colours, I have not yet read. It is now an Eagle Saturn, in a Field Sol, which kind of bearing the Heralds call most rich. It was first born by Ca Marius in his second Consulship, and in his Wars against the Cimbri, from him conveyed to J. Caesar who was allied to him in design and person, and so derived unto the Emperors, his Successors.  
But to proceed, Constantine having settled his affairs in peace, and cashiered the Praetorian Guards, fell to new modelling of the Empire, which he conceived to be too cumbersome and unwieldy to be governed by the former Polity, as indeed it was. And first of all he augmented the Roman Provinces to the number of one hundred and twenty, or thereabouts, over every one of which he ordained a particular Precedent, that had his residence in the chief City of that Province. Then he reduced these Provinces under fourteen Dioceses, (for so he called the greater distributions of his Empire) seven of which were in the East parts thereof, that is to say, the Diocese of Egypt, of the East, of Asia, of Pontus, Thrace, Dacia, and Macedon; and as many also in the West, viz. the Praefecture of the City of Rome, (which I count for one) the Diocese of Italy, afric, and Illyricum, of France, Spain, and Britain. Finally instead of the Praefecti Praetorio which had the command of the Praetorians, he ordained four for the four quarters of the Empire, that is to say, the Praefectus Praetorio Italiae, under whom were the Dioceses of Italy, afric, and Illyricum; 2. Praefectus Praetorto Galliarum, who had under him the Dioceses of France, Spain, and Britain; 3. The Praefectus Praetorio Orientis, who had command over the Dioceses of Egypt, the Orient, and the Asian, the Pontic and Thracian Dioceses; And 4 lie. The Praefectus Praetorio Illyrici, under whose super-intendence were the Dioceses of Macedon, and Dacia only; each of these Praefects having a Vicarius, or Lieutenant in the several Dioceses under his authority, who fixed their residence in the head City of the Diocese. And this I have the rather noted, because of the Relation which the Politi● of the Christian Church had to this Division: it being so ordered in the best and purest times thereof, that in every City where the Emperors had an Officer, whom they called Defensor Civitatis, the Christians should have a Bishop; in every chief City of the Province a Metropolitan; and over every Diocese an Archbishop, or Primate, from whom lay no Appeal unto any other. And so far Constantine did well: But he committed divers errors which did more prejudice the Empire, than any thing that had been done by his Predecessors. First in translating the Imperial Seat from Rome to Byzantium; by which transplantation the Empire lost much of its natural vigour: as we see by the experience of Plants and Flowers, which being removed from the place of their natural growth, lose much of their virtue which was formerly in them. On which reason Camillus would not suffer the Romans to remove their Seat unto the City of the Veii, newly conquered by him: but to prevent them in it set fire on the Town, and so consumed it, ut nunc Veios fuisse laboret Annalium fides, as my Author hath it. A second fault of this Constantine, was the dividing of the Empire amongst others, which only concerned himself. For though it was quickly reunited in the person of Constantius (his brethren dying without issue) yet his example being followed by others, the Empire was after torn into many pieces, to the destruction of the whole. 'Tis true, the former Emperors used sometimes to associate some partner with them; but so that they did manage it as one sole Estate: Constantine (if I remember rightly) being the first, which parceled it into several Sovereignty's, each independent of the other. The third fault of this Emperor was his removing the Legions and Colonies which lay before on the Northern Marches, into the Eastern parts of his Dominions, pretending to use them as a Bulwark against the Persians, laying thereby those passages open, at which not long after the barbarous Nations entered and subdued the West. For though instead of these Colonies he planted Garrisons and Forts in convenient places; yet these being filled with Soldiers, for the most part out of other Countries, fought not as in defence of their native Soil, (as the Colonies would and must have done) but on the first onset of those Barbarians abandoned them to the will of the enemy. So that Zosimus (though in other of his reports about this Prince he bewrayeth much malice) doth call him, not untruly, the first Subverter of that flourishing Monarchy. To these three we may add a fourth, which concerns the Emperors in general; namely, their stupid negligence and degenerate spirits which showed itself most visibly in the last of   

The Western Emperors.  

1. Constans the son of Constantinus Magnus, 
341.  his brother Constantine being dead, remainned sole Emperor of the West.  
2. Constantius the other of Constantine's sons, succeeded Constans in his part, after his decease.  
3. Valentinian Emperor of the West, his brother Valens ruling in Constantinople, and the Eastern parts.  
4. Valentinian II. youngest son of the former Valentinian.  
5 Honorius the second son of Theodosius the Emperor, 
399.  in whose time Alarick the Gothe invaded Italy, sacked Rome, and made themselves Masters of the Country, which afterwards they left in exchange for Spain. 26.  
6 Valentinian III. 
425.  during whose time the Vandals seized upon afric, as they did on Italy and Rome also after his decease: Murdered by Maximus a Roman (whose wife he had trained unto the Court, and ravished) as shall be shown hereafter on another occasion.  
7 Maximus having slain Valentinian the third, 
455  succeeded in the Empire; but on the coming of the Vandals, whom Eudoxia the wife of Valentinian (who had some inkling of the manner of her husband's death) had drawn into Italy, he was stoned to death by his own soldiers. 1.  
8 Avitus, 
456.  chosen Emperor in a military tumult.  
9 Majoranus. 
457.  4.  
10 Severus. 
461.  6.  
11 Anthemius, 
467  who at the end of five years was slain (as were the three before him) by Ricimer (a Suevian born) the chief Commander of the Armies; who had an aim to get the Empire for himself, but died as soon as he had vanquished and slain Anthomius.  
12 Olybrius, 
471.  an Emperor of four months only.  
13 Glycerius, 
472.  another of as little note: As also was  
14 Julius Nipos, deposed by Orietes a noble Roman, who gave the Empire to his son, called at first Momillus, but after his assuming the Imperial title, he was called, as in contempt, Augustulus.  
15 Augustulus, 
473.  the last of the Emperors who resided in Italy, vanquished by Odoacer King of the Heruli and Turingians. An omnious thing, that as Augustus raised this Empire, so an Augustulus should ruin it.   
But though Augustulus lost the Empire, yet Odoacer was not suffered to enjoy it long: Zeno the Emperor of the East sending Theodorick King of the Goths to expel him thence; and to possess himself of Italy, the reward of his valour. And this the Emperor did the rather, partly because the Goths were Christians, and in good terms of correspondency with him: but principally to remove that active Nation somewhat further off, who lay before too near the borders of his own Dominions. And that he might dismiss them with the greater content and honour, he made Theodorick a Patrician of the Roman Empire, an honour first devised by the Emperor Constantine, and of so high esteem from the first Institution, that they who were dignified therewith were to have precedency of the Praetorio Praefecti, who before took place next to the Emperor himself. Nor did the famous Charlemagne set upon it any lower estimate, in case he did not add much unto it; when to the Title of Emperor of the Romans, he added that of a Patrician in the stile Imperiall. Theodorick thus authorized and encouraged, marches toward Italy, and having vanquished Odoacer, secures himself in his new Conquests by divers politic proceedings; first by Alliances abroad, and then by Fortresses at home. To fortify himself abroad, he took to Wife Adelheida, daughter to Clodovaeus (or Clovis) King of the French; marrying his sister Hemmelfride to Thorismund King of the Vandals in afric; Amalasunta, a second daughter to Eutharicus a Prince of the Goths in Spain; and Ammelberge his Niece, to Hermanfridus King of the Turingians. Being thus backed with these Alliances with his neighbour Princes (all equally concerned in the subverting of the Roman Empire) he built Towns and Forts along the Alps, and the shores of the Adriatic, to impeach the passage of the Barbarous Nations into Italy. His Soldiers and Commanders he dispersed into most parts of the Country; partly to keep under the Italians, of whose wavering and unconstant nature he was somewhat doubtful; partly to unite both people in a mixture of Language, Marriages and Customs; and partly that he might more easily in War command them, and in Peace correct them. Italy, which before was made a thoroughfare to the Barbarous Nations, and quite disordered by the frequent inundations of Lust and Rapine, he teduced to such a peaceable and settled Government, that before his death they had quite lost the memory of their former miseries, instead whereof a general felicity had diffused itself over all the Country. Such Cities as had been formerly defaced, he repaired, strengthened, and beautified. In his Wars he was victorious, temperate in his times of Peace, and in his private carriage discreet and affable. Finally (as Velleius saith of Mor oboduus) he was Natione magis quam ratione Barbarus: And went the most judicious way to establish his dominion in Italy, of any of the Barbarous Princes that ever had invaded the Roman Provinces; which he left thus confirmed and settled unto his Successors.   

The Kings of the Goths in Italy.  

1 Theodorick, 
A. C. 495.  of whom before; who to his conquest of Italy added that of Illyricum, as also the appendent Lands to both those Countries; and wrested Provence in France, from the Goths in Spain.  
2 Athanaricus, 
527.  Nephew to Theodorick by his daughter Amalasunta, who in the minority of her son managed the affairs of the Goths in Italy. Fearing some danger out of Greeee, she restored Provence to the French, and by their aid drove the Burgundians out of Liguria. A Lady skilful in the Languages of all those Nations which had any commerce with the Roman Empire, insomuch, that pro miraculo fuerit ipsam audire loquentem, saith Procopius of her.  
3 Theodatus, 
534.  the son of Hammelfride the Sister of Theodorick, succeeded on the untimely death of Athanaricus. Who being in War with the Romans, and desiring beforehand to know his success, was willed by a Jew to shut up a certain number of Swine, and to give to some of them the names of Goths, and unto others the names of Romans. Which done, and going to the sties not long after, they found the Hogs of the Gothish faction all slain, and those of the Roman half unbristelled, and thereupon the Jew foretold, that the Goths should be discomfited, and the Romans lose a great part of their strength; and it proved accordingly. Which kind of Divination is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and hath been prohibited by a General Council. 3.  
4 Vitiges. 
537.  3.  
5 Idobaldus. 
540.  1.  
6 Ardaricus. 
541.  1.  
7 Totilus. 
542.  11.  
8 Teyus, 
553.  the last King of the Goths in Italy, who being vanquished by Narses in the fourth year of his Reign, An. 567. submitted himself to the Eastern Emperors; after which time the Goths and the Italians mingled in blood and language became one Nation.   
But the miseries of Italy, and those Western parts were not so 〈…〉. No sooner had God freed them from the rod of his visitations which he had laid upo●●hem in the times of Persecutions formerly remembered, and given them peace within their dwellings, but they became divided into schisms and factions; and after wallowed in those sins which a continual surfeit of prosperity hath commonly attending on it. Insomuch that devout Salvian, who lived much about these times, complains of that high hand of wickedness, wherewith they did provoke the patience of Almighty God; the lives of Christians being grown so deplorably wicked, that they became a scandal to the Faith and Gospel. In nobis patitur Christus opprobrium, in nobis patitur lex Christiana maledictum, saith that godly Bishop. So that their sins being ripe for vengeance, God sent the barbarous Nations as his Executioners, to execute his divine justice on impenitent men; and made them sensible, though Heathens, that it was Gods work they did, and not their own, in laying such afflictions on these Western parts. Ipsi fatebantur non suum esse quod facerent, agi enim se & perurgeri divino jussu, as the said godly Bishop doth inform us of them. On this impulsion the Vandals did acknowledge that they first wasted Spain, and then harried afric: And on the same did Attila the Hun insert into his Royal Titles the stile of Malleus Orbis, and Flagellum Dei, acknowledging thereby his own apprehension of some special and extraordinary calling to this public service. Nay as Jornandes doth report, some of these barbarous people did not stick to say, that they were put on this employment by some Heavenly visions, which did direct them to the work which they were to do. In prosecution of the which, in less time than the compass of 80 years, this very Ita●ie (though anciently the strength and seat of that Empire) was seven times brought almost unto desolation, by the Fire and Sword of the Barbarians, viz. First by Alarick King of the Goths, who sacked Rome, Naples, etc. 2 By Attila King of the Huns, who razed Florence, wasted Lombardy, and not without much difficulty was diverted from the spoil of Rome, by the intercession of Pope Leo. 3 By Gensericus King of the Vandals, who also had the sackage of Rome itself. 4 By B●orgus King of the Alani, in the time of the Emperor Maioranus. 5 By Odoacer King of the Heruli, who drove Augustus the last Western Emperor out of his estate, and twice in thirteen years laid the Country desolate. 6 By Theodorick King of the Goths, called in by Zeno Emperor of Constantinople to expel Odoacer and the Heruli: And 7 by Gundebald King of the Burgundians, who having ransacked all Lombardy, returned home again leaving possession to the Goths. As for these Goths, being the first and last of those barbarous Nations who had any thing to do in the spoil of Italy, after they had reigned here under eight of their Kings, for the space of 72 years, they were at last subdued by Belisarius and Narses, two of the bravest Soldiers that had ever served the Eastern Emperors; and Italy united once more to the Empire in the time of Justinian. But Narses having governed Italy about 17 years, and being after such good service most despitefully used by Sophia (never the wiser for her name) the wife of the Emperor Justinus, abandoned the Country to the Lombard's: For the Empress envying his glories, not only did procure to have him recalled from his Government, but sent him word, That she would make the Eunuch (for such he was) come home and spin among her maids. To which the discontented man returned this Answer, That he would spin her such a Web, as neither she nor any of her maids should ever be able to unweave; and thereupon he opened the passages of the Country to Alboinus King of the Lombard's, then possessed of Pannonia, who coming into Italy with their Wives and Children, possessed themselves of all that Country which anciently was inhabited by the Cisalpine Galls, calling it by their own names Longobardia, now corruptly Lombardy. Nor stayed he there, but made himself master of the Countries lying on the Adriatic, as far as to the borders of Apulia; and for the better Government of his new Dominions, erected the four famous Dukedoms, 1 of Friuli at the entrance of Italy, for the admission of more aids if occasion were, or the keeping out of new Invaders 2 of Turlu, at th' foot of the Alps against the French, 3 of Benevent, in Abruzzo, a Province of the Realm of Naples, against the incursions of the Greeks, then possessed of Apulia, and the other Eastern parts of that Kingdom: and 4 of Spoleto in the midst of Italy to suppress the Natives; leaving the whole, and hopes of more unto his Successors.   

The Lombardian Kings of Italy.  

1 Albo●us. 
A. C. 568.  6.  
2 Clephes. 
574.  1  
Interregnum annorum. 11.  
3 Antharis. 
586.  7.  
4 Agilulfus. 
593.  25.  
5 Adoaldus. 
618.  10.  
6 Arioaldus. 
628.  11.  
7 Richaris, 
639.  or Rotharis.  
8 Radoaldus. 
635.  5.  
9 Aribertns. 
660.  9  
10 Gundibertus. 
669.  1.  
11 Grimoaldus. 
670.  9  
12 Garibaldus mens. 
679.  3.  
13 Partarithus. 
679.  18.  
14 Cunibertus. 
698.  12.  
15 Luithertus. 
710.  1.  
16 Rainbertus. 
711.  1.  
17 Aribertus. 
712.  II. 12.  
18 Asprandus mens. 
723.  3.  
19 Luit prandus. 
723.  21.  
20 Hildebrandus m. 6. 
744.   
21 Rachisi●s. 
744.  6.  
22 Astulphus. 
750.  6.  
23 Desiderius, 
756.  the last King of the Lombard's, of whom more anon. In the mean time we will look into the story of some of the former Kings, in which we find some things deserving our confidetation. And first beginning with Alboinus, the first of this Catalogue, before his coming into Italy he had waged war with C●nimundus, a King of the Gepida, whom he overthrew, and made a drinking cup of his Skull. Rosumund daughter of this King he took to Wife; and being one day merry at Verona, forced her to drink out of that detested Cup; which she so stomached, that she promised one Helmichild, if he would aid her in killing the King, to give him both herself and the Kingdom of Lombardy. This when he had consented to, and performed accordingly, they were both so extremely hated for it, that they were fain to fly to Ravenna, and put themselves into the protection of Longinas the Exarch. Who partly out of a desire to enjoy the Lady; partly to be possessed of that mass of Treasure which she was said to bring with her; but principally hoping by her power and party there to raise a beneficial War against the Lombard's, persuaded her to dispatch Helmichilde out of the way, and take him for her husband; to which she willingly agreed. Helmichilde coming out of a Bath called for Beer, and she gives him a strong poison; half of which when he had drunk, and found by the strange operation of it how the matter went, he compelled her to drink the rest: so both died together. 2 Clephes the 2d King extended the Kingdom of the Lombard's to the Gates of Rome: but was so tyrannical withal, that after his death, they resolved to admit of no more Kings, distributing the Government among 30 Dukes. Which division, though it held not above 12 years, was the chief cause that the Lombard's failed of being the absolute Lords of all Italy. For the people having once cast off the yoke of obedience, and tasted somewhat of the sweetness of licentious Freedom, were never after so reduced to their former duty, as to be aiding to their Kings in such Achievements as tended more unto the greatness of the King than the gain of the subject. 3 Cunibert the 14 King, was a great lover of the Clergy, and by them as lovingly requited: For being to encounter with Alachis the Duke of Trent who rebelled against him, one of the Clergy knowing that the King's life was chiefly aimed at by the Rebels, put on the Royal Robe and thrust himself into the head of the Enemy. where he lost his own life, but saved the Kings. 4 Aripert the 17. King, gave the Celtian & lpes containing Piedmont, and some part of the Duchy of Milan to the Church of Rome; which is observed to be the first Temporal Estate that ever was conferred upon the Popes, and the foundation of that greatness which they after came to. 5 The 19 King was Luitprandus, who added to the Church the Cities of Ancona, Narnia, and Humana, belonging to the Exarchate, having first won Ravenna, and the whole exarchy thereof. An. 741. the last Exarch being called Eutychus. But the Lombard's long enjoyed not his Conquests: For Pepin King of France, being by Pope Stephen the third solicited to come into Italy, overthrew Astulphus, and gave Ravenna to the Church. The last King was Desiderius, who falling at odds with Adrian the first, and besieging him in Rome, was by Charles the great, successor to Pepin, besieged in Pavia, and himself with all his children taken prisoners, An. 774. and so ended the Kingdom of the Lombard's, having endured in Italy 206 years. Lombardy was then made a Province of the French, and after of the Germane Empire: many of whose Emperors used to be crowned Kings of Lombardy, by the Bishops of Milan, with an iron Crown, which was kept at Modoecum, now called Monza, a small Village. This Charles confirmed his Father's former donations to the Church; and added of his own accord, Marca Anconitana, and the Dukedom of Spoleto. For these and other kindnesses, Charles was by Pope Leo the fourth, on Christmas day crowned Emperor of the West, An. 801, whose Successors shall be reckoned when we come to the story of Germany. At this division of the Empire, Irene was Empress of the East; to whom and her Successors was no more allotted than the Provinces of Apulia, and Calabria, and the East parts of the Realm of Naples, being then in possession of the Greeks. To the Popes were confirmed or given by this Emperor and his father, almost all the Lands which they possess at this day, though afterwards extorted from them by the following Emperors, or under colour of their Title; by many several ways and means brought again unto them, as shall be shown hereafter in convenient place. The Venetians, in that little they then had, remained sui juris. The rest of Italy, containing all the other Provinces of the Kingdom of Naples, together with Tuscanie, Friuli, Treviginna, and whatsoever is at this day in the possession of the Dukes of Milan, Mantua, Modena, Parma, Montferrat, and the Duke of Savoy as Prince of Piedmont, together with Liguria, or the State of Genoa, was reserved by Charles unto himself, and in his life-time given by him to Pepin his second son, with the stile or title of King of Italy. But long it did not rest in the house of France, the Princes of the Lombard's wresting it from the line of Charles, and after weakening and dividing it by their several factions; till in the end, instead of an united Kingdom, there rose up many scattered Principalities, as shall hereafter be declared But first we must proceed to the Kings of Italy, of which we shall endeavour as exact a Catalogue as the confusions of that State can be capable of.    

The Kings of Italy, of the French, Italian, and Germane Lines.  

1 Pepyn, son of Carolus Magnus, died before his Father.  
2 Barnard, son of Pepyn.  
3 Ludovicus Pius, Emperor, and King of France.  
4 Lotharius, 
841.  Emperor, eldest son of Ludovicus 15.  
5 Ludovicus II. 
856.  Emperor, eldest son to Lotharius 20.  
6 Carolus Calvus, 
876.  Emperor, the youngest son of Ludovicus Pius. 2.  
7 Caroloman, nephew to Ludovicus Pius by Ludovicus his second son surnamed the Ancient.  
8 Carolus Crassus, or the Fat, Emperor, brother of Coroloman, the last King of Italy of the house of Charles, he died Ao. 888.  
9 Guy, 
888.  Duke of Spoleto, contends with Berengarius Duke of Friuly, both of the Longob●rdian Race, for the Kingdom of Italy, and in fine carrieth it against him.  
10 Lambert, 
894.  the son of Guy, crowned by Pope Formosus.  
11 Ludovick, son of Boson of Ardennes, King of Arles and Burgundy, by some Writers called only Earl of Provence, upon the death of Lambert invadeth Italy, and is made King.  
12 Berengarius, 
917.  Duke of Friuly, vanquisheth Ludovicus, is made King of Italy, and at last overcome by the Hungarians, who having wasted the Country returned back again.  
13 Rodolph Duke of Burgundy Trans-urane, called into Italy against Berengarius, resigned it in exchange for the Kingdom of Arles and Burgundy to his Cousin.  
14 Hugh D'Arles, 
926.  King of Arles and Burgundy, who held the Kingdom of Italy upon this resignation; but after many troubles was at last outed of it by Berengarius, and returned into France.  
15 Berengarius II. 
946.  son of the former Berengarius, on the retreat of Hugh, received by the Italians as Protector to Lotharius the son of Hugh; besieging Adelhais the next heir of Italy (on the death of Lotharius) was taken prisoner by the Emperor Otho.  
16 Otho, called into Italy by Adelhais, daughter to Rodolph King of Burgundy and Italy, marrieth the Lady, and in her right is King of Italy.  
17 Otho II. 
974.  son of the former Otho, marrieth Theophania niece to Nicephorus Phocus, Emperor of Constantinople, and hath Calabria for her Dower. 20.  
18 Otho III. 
984.  Emperor, and King of Italy, in whose minority the Kingdom was usurped by  
19 Harduicus, a man of great power in Italy, who kept it all the time of Otho, till being broken with long wars by Henry the succeeding Emperor, he was forced to quit it.  
20 Henry, the second Emperor of that name, having thrice vanquished Harduicus, got the Kingdom of Italy, and left the same unto the Emperors his Successors; the Title of Italy after this time being drowned in that of the Empire, and the Country governed as a part and Member of the Empire, by such Commanders and other Officers as the Emperors from time to time sent thither. But long it stayed not in that state: For the Popes of Rome knowing how much it did concern them in point of Polity to weaken the Imperial Power in Italy, without which their own Grandour could not be maintained, stirred up continual factions and wars against them; and by that means, and by the Censures of the Church which they denounced according as they saw occasion, did so astonish and distract them, that in the end the Emperors began to lay aside the affairs of Italy, by which they reaped more trouble than the profit came to. Insomuch that Rodolfus Habspurgensis, a valiant and a politic Prince, finding the ill success which Henry the fourth and fifth, and Frederick the first and second, Emperors of more puissance than himself, had found in their Italian actions and pretensions, resolved to rid his hands of that troublesome and fruitless Province, and to that end made as much money as he could of that commodity, which he saw he was not like to keep. And yet he sold good pennyworths too, to them that bought them; the Florentines paying for their Liberties but six thousand Crowns, the Citizens of Luca ten thousand, others as they could make their Markets. And being once required the reason why he went not into Italy to look to the affairs thereof, as his Predecessors had done before him, he is said to have returned for answer that conceit of the Fox for his not going to attend (as the other beasts did) at the Lions Den.   
— Quia me vestigia terrent  
Omnia me advorsum spectantia, nulla retrorsum.  
That is to say,  
I dare not go, because no tract I see  
Of any beast returning towards me.  
Which faulty and improvident resolution being followed by too many of his Successors, not only gave the Pope's the opportunity they looked for, of making themselves the great disposers of the affairs of Italy, but many petit Princes thereby took occasion of getting all they could lay hold on for themselves and others. For by this means the Scaligers made themselves Masters of Vero●a, the Pastimes of Mantua, the Carrarians of Milan, the Baillons of Bononia, and by the same the Florentines got Pistoia, and Ferrara was possessed by the Venetians. And although He●ry the 7th. provoked by these indignities, made a journey thither, reduced many of the revolted Cities to their former obedience, and was crowned King at Milla●● with the Iron Crown, as were also Ludovicus Bavarus, and Charles the 4th. two of his Successors; yet found they in conclusion such small benefit by the enterprise, as did not quit the charge▪ and trouble which it put them to. So in the end Italy was left wholly in a manner to the Pope's disposing, who gave away to others what they could not manage, or otherwise confirmed those men in their usurpations, whom they found already possessed of the Emperor's Countries, and bound them by that means the faster to the See of Rome, of which they were to hold their estates in fee: the Emperors having nothing left them but the empty Title, nor exercising the Imperial Power there any other way, than by changing Earldoms into Marquisates, Marquisates to Dukedoms, which they often did either for ready money, or reward of Service, or to preserve some shadow of their ancient Interest.  
And now we are to look on Italy as under a new face of things, not only in regard of several Principalities and forms of Government, but as replenished with new Colonies or sets of people, differing from the old in manners as well as language. And though the Soil be now as it was before, yet hath that also found some change in the different production of the natural fruits, as well as in the Manufactures and works of Art. For now besides their Corn and Wine which anciently were the staple Commodities of this Country, they supply the rest of Christendom with Rice, Silks, Velvets, Taffetas, Satan's, Grograins, Rash, Fustians, Goldwire, Allom, Armour, Glasses, and such like commodities, which make their Merchants very wealthy, who being for the most part Gentlemen of noble houses, not only lose not the esteem of their Nobility by following the Trade of Merchandise (as in other places;) but by reason that they are possessed of estates in land, which they manage by their Bailiffs and other Servants, they are become the wealthiest Merchants in all Christendom.  
Nor do the Gentry come behind them in all manner of affluence, which can be possibly enjoyed in so rich a Soyl. Their Lands they set not at a rent, but at thirds or halfs, according as the Soil is more or less fruitful, seldom abiding in the Country, but only for a month or two in the Summer times; but then they entertain themselves with their Music and Mistresses under the fragrant hedges and shady bowers, in as much solace and delight as may be desired. The residue of the year they spend in Cities, and places of the most resort, for change of company. But on the other side, the Country Farmer lives a drudging and laborious life, liable to all the Taxes and Impositions which are laid on the Land; the Landlords part coming in clearly without any disbursements or defalcation; insomuch that it is proverbially, but most truly said, that the rich men in Italy are the richest, and the poor men the poorest in all the world.  
The people generally are grave, respective, and ingenious. Excellent men (said once an Hispaniolized Italian) but for these three things; that is to say, in their lusts they are unnatural, in their malice unappeasable, in their actions deceitful. To which might be added, that they will blaspheme rather than swear, and murder a man sooner than slander him. But this perhaps may be the fault but of some particulars, it being observed by moderate and impartial men, that they are obedient to their Superiors, to Inferiors courteous, to their Equals full of all Civilities, to Strangers affable, and most desirous by all fair and friendly offices to win their loves. In apparel they are said to be very modest, in the furniture of their houses sumptuous, at their Tables neat, sober of speech, enemies of all ill reports of others, and of their own reputation so exceeding tender, that whosoever slandereth any one of them, if it come unto the party's ear, he is sure to die for it. Of money and expense he is very thrifty, and loves to be at no more cost, than he is sure to save by, or receive great thanks for: but otherwise for civil carriage and behaviour, surpassing all the Gentry of the World besides. Only in strictness to their wives they exceed all reason, of whom they are so extremely jealous, that they shut them up all day from the common view, and permit them liberty of discourse with few or none. The lock used by a Gentleman of Venice to be assured of his wife's chastity in the time of his absence, is so known a story, that it needs no report. But touching the predominancy of this jealous humour in most Southern Nations, we shall speak more hereafter when we come to Spain. And yet if that be true, which is proverbially spoken by the women of Italy, the husbands have more reason for this strict restraint, than other Nations are aware of. For though they be for the most part witty in speech, and modest in the outward appearance as much as any; yet it is said of them in the way of Proverb, that they are Magpies at the door, Saints in the Church, Goats in the Garden, Devils in the house, Angels in the streets, and Sirens in the windows.  
The language of both Sexes is very Courtly and fluent, all of them speaking the Courtesan, or Court language, notwithstanding the diversity of Dialects which is amongst them. For though there be a remarkable difference betwixt the Florentine and Venetian, the milanese and the Roman, the Neapolitan and the Genoese; yet it is hard to be discerned by the tone or pronunciation, what language any Gentleman is of. But generally it is best spoken in the great Duke's Country, in the Cities of Florence and Sienna, but in Florence especially, in which City Guicciardine the Historian, Boccace the Author of the Decameron, and other great Masters of the Italian language, did live and flourish in their times.  
For other men of note both for Arts and Arms, Italy hath afforded many since the fall of the Empire, viz. Aeneas Silvins, afterwards Pope, by the name of Pius the second. 2. Marsilius Patavinus, a stout defender of the Imperial Rights. 3. Petrarch, a Roman born. 4. Angelus Politianus, the Restorer of polite Literature in Italy. 5. Rodolphus Volaterranus; and 6 lie. Picus Mirandula, two great Humanitians. 7. Guido Bonatus a famous ginger. 8. Ariosto, and 9 lie. Tasso, the most renowned Poets of their times, and the later never followed since. 10. Sixtus Senensis, one of the best Antiquaries of the Nation, and a great Divine. 11. Bellarmine, and 12. ●aronius, the Buttresses and pillars of the Church of Rome. And then for Arms, 1. Ludovicus Conius, the first Restorer of the honour of the Italian Soldiery. 2. Forti-Bracchio, and 3. Nicolao Picinino, two of his training up in the feats of Chivalry. 4. 5. Sforza the father and the son, of which the son attained by his valour to the Dukedom of Milan. 6. Christopher Columbus, a Genoese. 7. Americus Vesputius, a Florentine, and 8. Sebastian Cabot, a Venetian, the fortunate Discoverers of America. 9 Andrea D'Oria, Admiral of the Navy to Charles the fifth, and 10. Ambrose Spinola (both Genoese) Commander of the Armies of Philip the second, King of Spain: Which last being once upbraided by Maurice, Prince of Orange, as issued from a Race of Merchants (though otherwise of a very ancient and noble Family) returned this tart and sudden Answer, that he thought it a greater honour to him, being a Merchant, to have the command of so many Princes, than it could be unto the other, though a Prince by birth, to be under the command of so many Merchants.  
The usual Division of Italy is into six parts, 1. Lombardie, 2. Tuscany, 3. the Land of the Church, 4. Naples, 5. Riviere de Genoa, and 6. the Land of Venice: and of them there is passed this C●n●ure according to the principal Cities; i e. Rome for Religion, Naples for Nobility, Milla●n for beauty, Genoa for stateliness, Florence for Policy, and Venice for riches. But take it as it stands at the present time, and 

Italy is best divided into 

The Kingdoms of 

Naples.  
Sicily,  
Sardinia.    
The Land or Patrimony of the Church.  
The Dukedoms of 

Urbino.  
Florence.    
The Commonwealths of 

Venice.  
Genoa.  
Luca.    
The Estates of Lombardie. i.e. 

The Dukedom of 

Milan.  
Mantua.  
Modena.  
Parma.  
Montferrat.    
The Principality of Piedmont.         

The Kingdom of NAPLES. 
Naples.   
THe Kingdom of NAPLES is environed on all sides with the Adriatic, Ionian, and Tuscan Seas, excepting where it joineth on the West to the Lands of the Church: from which separated by a line drawn from the mouth of the River Tronto (or Druentus) falling into the Adriatic, to the Springhead of Axofenus. By which account it taketh up all the East of Italy, the compass of it being reckoned at 1468. miles.  
It hath been called sometimes the Realm of Poville, but most commonly the Realm of Sicil, on this side of the Phare, to difference it from the Kingdom of the Isle of Sicil, lying on the other side of the Phare or Streit of Messana. The reason of which improper appellation proceeded from Roger the first King hereof, who being also Earl of Sicil, and keeping there his fixed and ordinary residence, when he obtained the favour to be made a King, desired (in honour of the place where he most resided) to be created by the name of King of both the Sicily's. And that indeed is the true and ancient name of the Kingdom, the name or Title of King of Naples not coming into use till the French were dispossessed of Sicil by the Arragonians, and nothing left them but this part of the Kingdom, of which the City of Naples was the Regal● Seat, called therefore in the following times the Kingdom of Naples, and by some of the Italian Writers, the Kingdom only.  
This is esteemed to be the most fertile place in all Italy, abounding in all things necessary for the life of man, and in such also as conduce to delight and Physic; viz. Many Springs, and Medicinal waters, Baths of divers virtues, sundry Physical herbs. It hath also an excellent breed of Horses, which may not be transported but by the leave of the King, or at least the Viceroy; great store of Allom, Mines of divers Metals, and the choicest Wines, called anciently Vina Massica, and Falerna, frequently mentioned by the Poets. And as for Merchandise, to Alexandria they send Saffron, to Genoa Silks, to Rome Wine, and to Venice Oil.  
The Noblemen or Gentry hereof, live of all men the most careless and contended lives; and like the Tyrant Polycrates in the elder stories, have nothing to trouble them, but that they are troubled with nothing. And there is a great number of them too, there being reckoned in this Realm in the time of Ortelius, 13 Princes, 24 Dukes, 25 Marquesses, 90 Earls, and 800 Barons, and those not only Titular, as in other places, but men of great power and revenue in their several Countries; insomuch that the yearly income of the Prince of Bisignan is said to be an hundred thousand Crowns, one year with the other; the Princes of Salern, and St. Severine being near as great. They are all bound by their Tenure to serve the King in his Wars, which gives them many privileges, and great command over the common subject; whereby as they were made the abler to assist the King upon any foreign invasion, so are they in condition also of raising and countenancing such defections as have been made from King to King, and from one Family to another, as sorted best with their ambitious and particular interesses. For not alone the Nobles, but in general as many of the common people as can be spared from Husbandry, are more addicted to the Wars than they are to Merchandise: The Nobles in pursuit of honour, and the Peasant out of desire of being in action; so that the greatest part of the Forces which serve the Spaniard in the Low Countries, are sent from hence. To which, the humour which they have from the highest to the lowest, of going bravely in Apparel, serves exceeding fitly: An humour which is so predominant, in both sexes, that though the Peasant lives all the rest of the week in as great servility and drudgery, as his Lord doth in pride and jollity, yet on the Sundays and Saints-days, he will be sure to have a good Suit to his back, though perhaps he hath no meat for his belly. And for the women, she that works hard both day and night for an hungry living, will be so pranked up on the Sundays and other Festivals, or when she is to show herself in some public place, that one who did not know the humour, might easily mistake her for some noble Lady.  
The principal Rivers of this Kingdom are, 1 Sibaris, 2 Basentus, 3 Pescara, 4 Trontus, 5 Salinellus, 6 Vomanus, 7 Salinus, and 8 Gariglian. On the banks of this last River, many battles have been fought between the French and the Spaniards for the Kingdom of Naples; especially that famous Battle between the Marquis of Saluzzes, General of the French, and Gonsalvo, Leader of the Spaniards; the loss of which Victory by the French, was the absolute confirmation of the Realm of Naples to the Spaniards. More famous is this River for the death of Peter de Medici's, who being banished his Country at the coming of King Charles the 8. into Italy, and having at divers times in vain attempted to be reimpatriate, followed the French Army hither; and after the loss of the day, took ship with others, to fly to Ca●eta, but overcharging the vessel, she sunk and drowned them all. But most famous is it, in that Marius, that excellent, though unfortunate Captain, being by Sylla's faction driven out of Rome, hid himself stark naked in the dirt and weeds of this river, where he had not lain long, but Sylla's Soldiers found him, and carried him to the City of the Minturnians, being not far off. These men, to please Sylla, hired a Cimber to kill him, which the fellow attempting (such is the virtue of Majesty even in a miserable fortune) run out again, crying, he could not kill C. Marius. This river was of old called Liris, and towards its influx into the Sea expatiated into Lakes and Fens, called the Lakes of Minturni, from a City of that name adjoining.  
It is divided into the Provinces of 1 Terra di Lavoro, 2 Abruzzo, 3 Calabria inferior, 4 Calabria superior, 5 Terra di Otranto, 6 Puglia, and 7 the Isles of Naples. Some of which have some smaller Territories adjoining to them, which we shall meet withal as they come in our way.  
1 TERRA DILAVORO is bounded on the North and East, with the Apennine Hills; on the South, with the Sea; and on the West, with St Peter's Patrimony; called anciently Campania Felix, in regard of the wonderful fertility of it, and that it was the seat or dwelling of the Campans; by some modern Latinists named Campania Antiq●a, to difference it from Latium, which they now call Campagna di Roma, or Campania Nova. And for the other name of Terra di Lavoro, or Terra Laboratoris, it was given to it, from the continual labour of the Husbandman in cultivating the ground, and carrying in the fruits thereof: but neither the reason, nor the name so new, as some men suppose. But I am sure, as old as Pliny, who calleth these parts sometimes by the name of Laboria, sometimes of Campus Laborinus, and gives this reason of the name, quod ingens in eo colendo sit labour, because of the great pains it requires to till it, and the great profit reaped by them who did till and manure it.  
The Country so exceeding fruitful in Wines and Wheat, that by Florus the Historian, it is called Cereris & Bacchi certamen, and deservedly too. For in this noble▪ Region one may see large and beautiful fields overshaded with rich Vines, thick and delightful Woods, sweet Fountains, and most wholesome Springs of running water, useful as well for the restoring of man's health, 
Campania  as delight and pleasure; and in a word, whatsoever a covetous mind can possibly aim at, or a carnal covet.  
Towns of note here were many in the elder times. The principal whereof, 1 Cajeta, seated on a fair and capacious Bay, from the crookedness whereof it is thought by Strabo to have took the name: the word in the Laconian language signifying crooked. Others will have it so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Uro, with reference to the burning of the Fleet of Aeneas by the Trojan Ladies; for fear of being forced again to go to Sea, where they had been so extremely tossed in their former voyages. But why that Fact committed on the furthest coasts of Sicil, should be so solemnly commemorated here on the shores of Italy, I can see no reason. And therefore we may far more probably derive it from Ca●eta, the Nurse of Aeneas, in memory of whom, being buried here, or hereabouts, Aeneas is affirmed to have built this Town. Of which thus the Poet, Aeneid. lib. 7.  
Tu quoque Littoribus nostris Aeneia nutrix  
Aeternam moriens famam, Cajeta, dedisti.  
That is to say,  
Aeneas Nurse, Ca●eta, by her death,  
Did to these shores an endless fame bequeath.  
But on what ground soever it first had this name, it is assuredly a place of great strength and consequence; and of so special importance for the estate of this Kingdom, that (as Cominaeus hath observed) if King Charles the 8. had but only fortified it, and the Castle of Naples, the Realm had never been lost. 2 Naples, the Metroplis of the Kingdom, a beautiful City, containing seven miles in compass. It was once called Parthenope, and falling to ruin, was new built, and called Neapolis. Among other things, here is an Hospital, the revenues whereof is 60000 Crowns, wherewith, besides other good deeds, they nourish in divers parts of the Kingdom 2000 poor Infants. In this City the disease called Morbus Gallicus, or Neapolitanus, was first known in Christendom. This City is seated on the Seashore, and fortified with 4 strong Castles, viz. 1 Castle Capodna, where the King's Palace was. 2 Ermo. 3 Castle del Ovo, or the Castle of the Egg; and 4 Castle Novo, or the new Castle. But nature hath not done much less to her Fortifications than the hand of Art; the Town being for the most part environed by Sea, or Mountains not to be ascended without great difficulty and disadvantages. Which Mountains, as they seem on that side as a bank to the City, so do they furnish the Citizens with most generous Wines; and being once ascended yield a gallant prospect both for Sea and Land. A City honoured by the seat of the Viceroy, and the continual resort, if not constant residence of most of the great men of the Realm: which makes the private buildings to be very graceful, and the public stately. And yet it had increased much more in buildings than it is at present, if the King had not forbidden it by special Edict. And this he did, partly at the persuasion of his Noblemen, who feared that if such a restraint were not laid upon them, their vassals would forsake the Country to inhabit here, so to enjoy the privileges and exemptions o● the Regal City: but principally upon jealousy and point of State, the better to prevent all revolts and mutinies, which in most populous Cities are of greatest danger. 3 Capua, once the head of the Campans, seated in a delicious and luxurious soil, and one of the three Cities which the old Romans judged capable of the seat of the Empire; the other two being Carthage and Corinth. Being distressed by the Samnites, they were fain to cast themselves into the Arms of the Romans, who did not only take them into their protection, but suffered them to live according to their own Laws, as a Free Commonwealth; rather like a Confederate than a Subject-State. Which Freedom they enjoyed, till after their revolt to the Carthaginians; when being reduced to their obedience by force of arms, they lost all their Liberties, and hardly scaped its fatal and final ruin. The pleasures of this place was it which enervated the victorious Army of Annibal, who wintered here after the great defeat given to Terentius Varro at the battle of Cannae; whence came the saying, Capuam esse Cannae Annibali. 4 Cuma, a City once of great power and beauty, till Campania was subdued by the Romans, after which it decayed in both. Near hereunto was the Cave or Grot of one of the Sibyls, called from hence Cumaea; and not far off the Lake called Lacus Avernus, the stink whereof is said to have poisoned Birds as they flew over it; supposed by ignorant Antiquity for the entrance of Hell. And finally, from this place it was, that Aeneas is fabled by the Poets to have gone down to the infernal Ghosts to talk with his Father. 5 Nola, where Marcellus discomfited the forces of Annibal, and thereby gave the Romans to understand, that he was not invincible. 6 Puteolis, a small Town standing on a Creek of the Sea, just opposite to Bawl, on the other side of it; from which distant about three miles and an half. Both Towns remarkable for the Bridge built betwixt them by Caligula, composed of sundry vessels joined together in such sort, that there was not only a fair and large passage over it, but victualling houses on both sides of it: Over which Bridge thus made, he marched and re-marched in triumphal Robes, as not only the Earth, but the very Seas were made subject to him. And he did (as himself afterwards affirmed to some of his friends) to awe the Ocean, and imitate (if not exceed) the like acts of Xerxes and Darius, mentioned in the ancient Writers; as also to terrify the Britan's and the Germane Nations, with the report of such a notable exploit; or (as some thought) to fulfil the prophecy of one Thrasibulus a Fortune-teller of those times, who had been often heard to say in the life time of Tiberius (his next immediate Predecessor) that it was as impossible for Caius to succeed in the Empire, 
Abruzzo.  as it was for him to ride on horseback from Bawl to Puteolis. 7 Not far hence, on a Semicircular Bay, stnads the City of Baiae (whereof Bawl before mentioned is a part) so called, as the Poets say, from Baius one of the companions of Ulysses in his Navigations. A City in the flourish of the Roman Empire of five miles in length, and two in breadth; so wonderfully endued by nature, and adorned by Art, that no place in the World was thought comrable to it: 
Nullus in Orb locus Baiis praelucet amoenis.  
Few places in the World there are  
With pleasant Baiae to compare. As it is in Horace.  A City beautified with magnificent Temples, multitudes of Baths, or Bannias, Imperial Palaces, stately buildings, and the adjoining Manor-houses of the principal Romans, whom the pleasures of the place invited hither; and was indeed too great and sensible a monument of the lasciviousness and luxury of that prosperous people (of which the Ambubaiae mentioned in the Satirist is sufficient proof;) now so demolished by War, and devoured by water, that there is nothing of it to be seen but some scattered ruins. 8 Misenus, seated near a great hiil or Promontory of the same name, at the foot whereof there is a large and capacious harbour, where Augustus keeping one Navy, and another at Ravenna in the upper Sea, awed the whole Roman Empire. But these were places of renown in the former times, all which, excepting Naples, are now only known by what they have been, not by what they are. The principal Cities at this time, are (next to Naples itself) Sessa, the Sinuessa or Suissa of the ancients, an● now the title of a Dukedom, 2 Ceano, 3 Salvi, 4 Aversa, 5 Venafre, and 6 Caserte, with others, to the number of 22, besides 166 Castles or defensible places. Here is also in this Tract the Hills called Gallicanum, where Annibal that great Master in the Art of War, frighted that wary Captain Fabius Maximu●, by the stratagem of two thousand Oxen, carrying fire in their horns, by which device he freed himself out of those difficult straits in which he was at that present. And in this Country there is also the Hill Vesuvius, that casteth out flames of fire, the smoke of which stifled Pliny signior, coveting to search the cause of it. The flame hereof broke forth cruelly also during the reign of Titus, casting out not only such store of smoke, that the very Sun seemed to be in the Eclipse, but also huge stones, and of as●es such plenty, that Rome, afric, and Syria, were even covered, and Herculanum and Pompeti, two Cities in Italy, were overwhelmed with them. There were heard dismal noises all about the Province; and Giants of incredible bigness see● to stalk up and down about the top and edges of the mountain; which extraordinary accident, either was a cause, or presage of the future Pestilence which raged in Rome and Italy long after.  
On the East side of this Campania, and properly (as anciently it was esteemed) a part thereof, lieth that little Territory, which Alfonso King of Naples caused to be called the Principate, extending in length 33 miles, and 16 in breadth, and was of old the seat of the Picentini, a Colony of the Piceni dewelling on the Adriatic. Principal places of it, 1 Massa, by the Italians called Marso, of more note for the Hills adjoining, than any great beauty or antiquity it hath in itself. Those hills now called Monte Marso, but known to the Romans by the name of Montes Massici, of special estimation for the rich Wines, called Vinae Massica. 2 Nuceria, nine miles from the Sea, in a very plentiful and delicious soil. 3 Rivelli, a City not long since built, which for the elegancy of the buildings hardly yields to Naples. 4 Malfi, or Amalphi, an Arch-Bishops See, in which it is supposed that the Mariner's Compass was first found out. It is situate on the Sea side, and giveth name to the coast of Amalfe, fenced with Hills or Mountains of so great an height, that to look down into the Vallles or the Sea adjoining, makes men sick and giddy. A Town of great note (were there nothing else to commend it to our observation) for the finding out of the Mariner's Compass, devised and contrived here about the year 1300, by one john Flavio, a native or inhabitant of it. 5 Salern, about a mile from the Sea, the title of the Prince of Salern, and an University, but chiefly for the study of Physic, the Doctors of which wrote the Book called Schola Salerni, dedicated to a King of England: not to K. Henry the 8. as it is conceived, for then the Commentary on it written by Arnoldus Villanovanus, who lived about the year 1313, must needs have been before the Text. And therefore I conceive it dedicated either to King Richard the first, or King Edward the first, who in their journeys towards the Holy Land, might bestow a visit on this place, and give some honorary encouragement to the Students of it. Through this Principate, or this part of Campania, runs the River of Silarus, crossing in a manner the very midst of it. There are said to be in this small Territory, fifteen good Towns, and two hundred and thirteen Castles or walled places.  
2 North of Campania, lieth the Province now called ABRUZZO, bounded on the East, with Puglia or Apulia; on the West, with Marca Ancon●tana; on the North, with the Adriatic Sea; and on the South, with the Apennine. It is called Aprutium by the Latins, the Country heretofore of the ancient Samnites; a people which held longer wars with the state of Rome, than almost all Italy besides, as keeping them in continual action for the space of 70 years together, besides many after-claps. In which long course of Wars, the Romans were so hardly put to their shifts, that they were four times fain to have recourse to the last refuge, which was the choosing of D●ctat●●●; and yet came off so often with success and victory, that it afforded them the honour of thirty Triumphs. But these Samnites, as they were a potent, so they were also a compound Nation; consisting of the Ferentani, Caraceni, Peligni, Praecatini, Vestini, Hirpini, and Samnites properly so called; into which name the rest of the inferior Tribes were after swallowed. The chief City of the whole was called Samnium, whence they had their name; which in the conclusion of the War was so defaced by Papyrius the Roman Consul, ut hodie Samnium in ipso Samnio requiratur; that not improperly (saith Florus) a man might ask where Samnium stood, even in the middle of the City. How it came by this new name of Aprutium, I am yet to learn.  
The River of Pescara runneth thorough the midst of it, and divideth it into two parts, whereof the one containeth 5 Cities, and 150 Castles, or walled places; the other, 184 Castles, and 4 Cities. The principal Cities of the whole, 1 Beneventum, heretofore called Maleventum, as we find in Pliny, because the Winds hereabouts were so fierce and violent, that men could not sit upon their horses; but had at last that name of Beneventum from the pleasant Plains and spacious Valleys which ●y round about it; in like manner as the Country of the old Allobroges exchanged the name of Malvoy into that of Salvoy. It was one of the four Dukedoms which the Lombard's erected when they first came into Italy, for the better assuring of their Conquest; and was given to the Church of Rome by the Emperor Henry the fourth, in exchange of a certain Tribute remitted by Pope Leo the ninth to the Church of Bamberg, where the said Emperor was born, and is still under the command of the Popes of Rome. 2 Aquila, built by the Emperor Frederick the second, King of Naples, to assure the Realm upon that Quarter. 3 Lanliano, four miles from the Adriatic, a Town of great Trade, and much resorted to by Merchants at her Annual Marts. 4 Ortona, the Port-town unto Lanciano. 5 Teranum, or Teran (Ptolemy calls it Inter-a●na) anciently the Metropolis of the Praecatini. 6 Citta di Chieti, situate on a Hill some seven miles from the Sea, heretofore known by the name of Theate. Here is in this Tract 7 Aquino, the Birth-place of Thomas Aquinas the great School-man, who first brought the scattered limbs of Popery into a body. And 8 Sulmo, honoured with the birth of Ovid, that renowned Poet, as himself testifieth.  
Sulmo mihi Patria est, gelidis uberrimus undis,  
Millia qui novies distat ab Urbe decem.  
Full of cool streams Sulmo, my native land,  
From the great City ninety miles doth stand.  
There belongeth also to Abruzzo the Country of Molisi, in which are 104 walled places or Castles, and four considerable Towns; the principal of which is Bovianum, or Boiano, now a Bishops See. In this Country also (I mean Abruzzo) are the straits called Furcae Candinae, in which when the Samnites and their confederates had so enclosed the Romans, that there was no possibility to escape, they sent to Herennius, a man for his Age much honoured, and for his Wisdom much followed by them, to know what they should do with the captive Enemy. Word was returned, that they should send them home safe, and without dishonour. Thinking the old man had not been well informed of the state of the business, they sent to him again, and he advised, that they should put them all to the sword. These contrary Answers made them judge amiss of the old man's brain; and therefore following their own fancies, they spoiled the Romans, and disarmed them, and despitefully used them, and so sent them home. Which when Herennius came to know, he much lamented the imprudence of so rash an action; but much more the destruction of his Country, as a consequent of it. Telling them, after their return, that had they given the Romans a safe and honourable deliverance from the present danger, they had made them their friends for many Ages; or had they put unto the sword so many of their Soldiers and chief Commanders, they had disabled them for long time from pursuing the War: The middle way which they had taken, would be their undoing; and so accordingly it proved: For the Romans not being made their Friends by so odious a benefit, but hatching Revenge for the disgrace, soon renewed the War; and under the conduct of Papyrius subdued the Country, and handled the poor conquered people with the like despite. An excellent precedent unto Princes and those in power, how to proceed towards men of Quality and Rank, when they have them under, which must be, either not to strike at all, or to strike home and to the prurpose. Nic. Machiavil in his Florentine History taxeth Rinaldo of Albizi for committing a great Solecism in point of State, in that hating Cosmo de Medici's, and desiring to remove him from the public managery of affairs, he thought it was sufficient to procure his Banishment: which Cosmo, afterwards returning, paid in better coin. Whereupon he inferreth this notable Aphorism, that Great Persons must not at all be touched, or if they be, must be made sure from taking Revenge. Yet do I not interdict a Prince, or any supreme Governors, the use of Mercy. I know it is the richest Jewel which adorns the Crown. Nor dare I take upon me to direct the use of that excellent virtue. Only I shall observe what usage hath been commonly afforded towards such persons after their Delinquencies; whose liberty or life may create danger to the public. The first is present Execution; for Mortui non mordent, as the saying is: a course more to be allowed of where it cannot, than commended where it may be spared. The second is either close imprisonment under trusty Guards, or else confinement to the house and custody of some trusty Statesman: in which great caution also is to be observed: For besides that nothing is more ordinary than the escape of great Prisoners, 
Naples.  either by corrupting or deceiving their Keepers. We find in our own Histories, how Dr. Morton Bishop of Ely, being committed to the Duke of Buckingham by King Richard the 3. not only procured his own liberty, but brought about that Duke to the contrary faction. The last, which is in all times the gentlest, and in some cases the safest, is not only an absolute pardon of life, and a grant of liberty, but an endearing of the party delinquent, by giving him some place of honour, or committing unto his fidelity some office of trust; it being the nature of most men, that where they are not trusted, they are never true; and that as long as they lie under suspect and jealousies, they will be apt to entertain some thoughts of their lost condition. And of this kind of dealing with a person Delinquent, we have a pregnant instance in the Emperor Otho, who not only pardoned Marius Celsus one of Galba's faction, and a chief one too, but put him in place nearest to him, and made him one of his principal Leaders in the following War against Vitellius. His reason was, Ne hostis metum Reconciliationis adhiberet, lest lying aloof as a pardoned Enemy, he might conceive the breach were but badly made up. And on the other side, Marius Celsus proved so sensible of the obligation, that he continued faithful to him to the very last, and lost his life in the pursuance of his quarrel; showing thereby, that persons of a generous and noble disposition, are more obliged by favours, than restrained by terror. But it is now time I should free myself of these Furcae Caudinae, and sport myself a while in the Plains of Calabria.  
But I must note, before I take my leave hereof, that these two Provinces of Campania and Abruzzo, make up the greatest, richest, and best peopled part of the Realm of Naples. And therefore when the Kingdom was divided between the French and the Spaniards, it was allotted to the French, as having the priority both of claim and power. The Provinces remaining, although more in number, yet are not comparable to these two for Wealth and Greatness; and were assigned over to the Spaniard, as lying most conveniently for the Realm of Sicily.  
Of these, the first are the CALABRIA'S, so called from the Calabri an ancient people of this tract, which take up totally that Peninsula, or Demi-Iland, which lieth at the Southeast end of Italy, near the Fare of Messana. Amongst some of the Ancient Writers, the name Italy did extend no further than this Peninsula, bounded by the two Bays called Sinus Scilleticus, and Sinus Lameticus; because first peopled out of Greece, or otherwise first known unto the old Writers of that Country. For so saith Aristotle in his seventh Book of Politics, cap. 10. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. That part of Europe which is comprehended betwixt the Bay Scilleticus, and Lameticus, took the name of Italy; and this Tradition he received (as he there affirmeth) from the best Antiquaries of that Country. The like occurs in Dionysius Hallicarnasseus out of Antiochus Syracusanus a more ancient Author; the like in Strabo, Lib. 6. But by what name soever it was called at first, that of Calabria hath held longest and most constantly to it, as being known by that name in the times of the Romans, and so continuing to this day; Ennius the old Poet being a native of this Country, and so called by Ovid in his 3d d de Arte.  
Ennius' emeruit Calabris in montibus hortos.  
Old Ennias his Garden tills  
Among the steep Portuguese hills.  
But leaving these matters of remote Antiquity, let us behold the Country as it stands at the present; and was the title of the eldest sons of the Kings of Naples, who heretofore were called Dukes of Calabria, divided of late times into inferior, and superior; in which distinct capacities we shall look upon it. Premising only by the way, that this Country was the Title of the eldest sons of the Kings of Naples, who were from hence called the Dukes of Calabria; and that before it was subjected to those Kings, it had a King of its own; Holofernes whose daughter Flora was married unto Godfrey of Bovillon, being King hereof, An. 1098. 3 CALABRIA INFERIOR, the habitation of the Brutii, whom the Greek Writers generally call Bretti, and their Country Brettania: upon which ground some of our modern Critics (envying so great an honour to the I'll of Great Britain) have transferred to this Province the birth of Constantine, the first Christian Emperor. These Brutii being first conquered by the Romans, with the rest of Italy, after the great defeat of Cannae took part with Carthage, and was for a long time the retreat of Annibal, whom the Romans had shut up in this corner. It hath on the East a branch of the Adriatic Sea, on the West, that part of Campania which is called the Principate; on the North, Calabria superior; and on the South, the Tyrrhenian Seas, and the straight of Messana. A Country not much short in fruitfulness of the rest of the Kingdom; and having the advantage of so much Sea, is the better situate for Traffic. At one extremity hereof is the Promontory called by Ptolemy Leuco-Petra, now Cabo di Spartimento; all along which, especially in the month of May, are taken yearly great store of Tunnies (a fish which much resembleth man's flesh) which being barrelled up are sold to Mariners. Here are two Rivers also of a very strange nature: of which the one called Crathis, makes a man's hair yellow, and dies silk white; the other named Busentus, causeth both hair and silk to be black and swarthy.  
The principal Cities of it are, 1. Consensia an ancient Town, comprehending seven little hills, 
Calabria.  and a Castle on the top of one of them, which commandeth both the Town and the Country adjoining. It is built betwixt the said two Rivers, and is still reasonably rich, though not so wealthy now as in former times. 2. Rhegium, or Rhezo, on the Sea shore, opposite to Messana in the Isle of Sicily, which is supposed to have been broken off from the rest of Italy, and that this Town had the name of Rhegium from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifieth to break off, or to tear asunder. A Town in former times very well traded, but left desolate in a manner since the year 1594. when it was fired by the Turks. 3. Castrovillare, seated upon the top of a very high Mountain. 4. Belmont, and 5. Altomont, two very fair Towns, whose names sufficiently express their pleasant and lofty situations. 6. S. euphemy, from whence the Bay which anciently was called Sinus Lametinus, or Lametirius, is now called Golves de S. euphemy. 7. Nicastro, three miles from the Sea, the same with Newcastle in Euglish.  
On the West side of this Calabria, and properly a part thereof standeth that mountainous Country, which in the Subdivision of these Provinces by King Alfonsus, was called the BASILICATE, anciently the Seat of the Lucani: A Country heretofore very unsafe for Travellers, by reason of the difficult ways, and assured company of Thiefs, but now reduced to better order. It containeth in it ninety three walled places, and nine Towns or Cities, the chief whereof are Possidonia, or Pest, a City situate in so clement and benign a Soil, that Roses grow there thrice a year. 2. Poly Castrie on the Sea shore, (as the former is) honoured with the Title of a Dukedom. And 3. Diana, or Dianum, a more midland City, near which there is a valley twenty miles in length, and four miles in breadth, which for all manner of delights and fruitfulness yields to none in Naples.  
4. CALABRIA SUPERIOR, called formerly Magna Graecia, from many great and famous Cities founded there by the Grecians, hath on the East the Adriatic; on the West, Campania; from which it is divided by the Apennine and the River ●rathis; on the North, Sinus Tarentinus, or the Gulf of Tarento; and on the South and Southeast, Calabria inferior, and Golfo de Chilaci, of old called Sinus Scilleticus. The principal Cities at this time are, 1. Belcastro, eight miles from the Sea, where once stood Petilia. 2. Bisignan, the title of a Prince, fortified with a very strong Castle, and endowed with the best Revenues of any principality or other Nobleman of Title in all the Kingdom. 3. Matera an Arch-Bishops See, a rich Town and well peopled. 4. Rosanum, three miles from the Sea, a well fortified City, and situate in a very fruitful and pleasant Soyl. 5. Altavilla, which gives title also to a Prince. 6. Terra Nova.  
As for the chief Cities of the Greeks in the former times, they were Locris founded by the Locriaus, a people of Achaia. Here lived the Lawmaker Zal●ucus, who ordering Adultery to be punished with the loss of both eyes, was compelled to execute the Law on his own Son, as the first offendor. Therefore to show the love of a Father, and the sincerity of a Judge, he put out one of his Son's eyes, and one of his own. He also provided in his Laws, that no woman should be attended in the street with more than one Maid, but when she was drunk; that she should not go abroad at night, but when she went to play the Harlot; that she should not wear gold or embrordered apparel, but when she meant to set herself to open sale; and that men should not wear rings and tissues, but when they went about the prostituting of some woman; and many others of this mould. By means whereof both men and women were restrained from all extraordinary trains of Attendants, and excess of Apparel; the common consequents of a long and prosperous tranquillity. It was also famous in old times for the victory which Ennomus an excellent Musician, obtained against Aristonus of Rhegium, another of the same profession. For though Aristonus had made his prayers unto Apollo the God of Music for his good success; yet Eunomus plainly told him, that Nature was against him in that contention, which had made all the Grasshoppers mute on that side of the water. And so accordingly it happened. For when the day appointed came, Eunomus had the ill hap to break one of his Harpstrings, even in the middle of his Music, when presently a Grasshopper leapt upon his Harp, and supplied most melodiously the place of the broken string; and by that means obtained the victory to Ennomus. An accident not unworthy of the Muse of Strada, in his personating of the Poet Claudian. And though I bind not any man to believe this Tale (though of Strabo's telling) yet there are very good Authors for thus much thereof, that on the one side of the River Alax, which parteth Locris from Rhegium, the Grasshoppers do merrily sing; but on the other side, which is that towards Rhegium, they are always silent. 2. Tarentum, a Town of no less note, situate on the Bay called Sinus Tarentinus, first built by the Spartans': the people whereof having a great command on the Country adjoining, were one of the last Italian Nations taken in by the Romans. Nam quis post Tarentinos anderet. For who durst stir when once the Tarentines were vanquished? saith the Historian. In defence of this people did Pyrrhus' war against the Romans; the hopes of getting this place by Annibal, was the loss of Capua; and finally here lived Architas so famous for his flying Dove. 3. Crotona, the Inhabitants whereof were once so active, that at one Olympic meeting the Victors were all of this one Town. Their glory much decayed in a battle against the Locrians, in which one hundred and twenty thousand of them and their Confederates were vanquished by fifteen thousand of the enemy. 4. Amycle, a Town inhabited formerly by Pythagoreans, who having been often terrified with a false report of the approach of their enemies, 
Terra di Otranto.  published a Law prohibiting all such reports: by which means their enemies coming unawares, possessed themselves of it. Hence grew the Proverb, Amyclas silentium perdidit; and hence that notable saying of 〈◊〉, who being commanded to be silent, returned this answer, Mihi necesse est loqu●, Scio 〈◊〉 Amyclas silentio periisse. 5. Sibaris, a City built by the Grecians after the destruction of Tray, the people whereof were Lords of five and twenty good Towns, and could arm thirty thousand men. A people so effeminate, that they permitted no Smith nor Brazier, no nor so much as a Cock, to live amongst them, because they would not have their sleeps disturbed; but the ridlers, and Musicians were in high request: which advantage the Crotonians taking (with whom then in hostility) they entered the Town in the habit of Musicians, and so mastered it. Before which accident there had been a Prophecy, that the Town should never be taken, till men were more esteemed than the Gods themselves. It happened that a Slave being grievously beaten by his Master, and obtaining no pardon for the God's sake, upon whom he called, fled to the monument of some of his Master's Ancestors, and was pardoned by him; which coming to the ears of Amyris the Philosopher, he forsook the Town, most men holding him mad, in a time of no danger to leave so delicate a Seat: Whence came the Proverb, Amyris insa●●t, applied to such as under the pretence of madness or folly do provide for their safety.  
5. TERRA DI OTRANTO, as it is now called, was once the Eastern part of Ap●●lia Daunia, the seat and habitation in these times of the Salenti●●, the Japyges, and the Me●●●pians, and is accordingly entitled in ancient Authors by the several names of Ja●●gia, Me●●pia, and Salentina. They were the last people of Italy which held out against Rome, and 〈◊〉 immediately after the Tarentini, upon whose fate they did depend. Of these three Nations the Japyges were of greatest fame, or of greatest infamy. Cretans originally, sent in quest of Gla●cus the son of Minos, whom when they could not find, and durst not return without him, they fixed here their dwelling; Japyx the son of Daedalus being their Captain and Conductor, and from him denominated. Growing into estate and power, they became not only so luxurious in their course of life, and effeminate in their dress and habit, that they were a scorn and scandal to their Neighbour-Nations; but so regardless of their Gods, that in the end they threw down all their Images, and destroyed their Temples. Punished at last for these high insolences by balls of fire falling on them from the heavens, with which the whole stock of them were almost extirpated. The Promontory called Japygium did take name from this people, and from thence the North-West wind (or the West-North-West) which the Latins generally call Caurus, frequently blowing from this Coast, had the name of Japyx, occurring by that name in the 8th. of the Aeneids, and in Horace, Carm. l. 1. Ode 4.  
But to proceed; This Country is environed on all parts with the Adriatic, saving where it joineth with Apulia by an Isthmus of about thirty miles in breadth, reaching from Brundisium to Tarentum, and is from land to land as you go by water about two hundred miles in compass. It hath the name of Terra di Otranto, in Latin Terra Hydruntina from the Town of Hydruntum; the soil thereof is very fruitful if well manured, abounding in Corn, Oil, Melons, Citrons, Saffron, and other Commodities of good price, for which they never want the company of the Merchants of Genoa. They are many times much endangered by Grasshoppers▪ which commonly devour all wheresoever they come, and would in one night consume whole fields of standing Corn, if Divine Providence by sending the birds called Gaives amongst them, did not provide a remedy for so great a mischief. The greatest defect hereof is the want of water, which notwithstanding, they have very rich pastures; the people are conceived to be the simplest, or most void of craft of any in Italy, perhaps because they have so little commerce with their own Countrymen, and so much with Strangers.  
The chief Towns are, 1. Lecci, Aletium in Latin, a rich Town, well built, and very well peopled. 2. Castro, a Sea Town, but not well fenced by art or nature, which hath made it very often a prey to the Turks. 3. Gallipolis, a Town built on so craggy a Rock, that it is conceived to be unconquerable. 4. Brundisium, the head Town of the Salentini, once glorying in the most capacious Haven in all the World; from whence there was continual passage into Dalmat●a, Epyrus, Macedon, and the rest of Greece. Here was it that Pompey took ship to fly from Caesar, and Caesar took shipping also to pursue after him, when to encourage the Pilot who was afraid of the storm, he cried out, Caesarum vehis & fortunam ejus. It was first built by the 〈◊〉 under the conduct of one Diomedes, and called Brontesion, which in the Mesapian Tongue siynifieth the horn or head of a Stag, which it much resembleth, from whence the Latins gave it the name of Brundisium. At this day it is but a mean Town, the Haven of it being so choked, that a Galley can very hardly enter. 5. Hydruntum, a very ancient Town, and yet still reasonably well peopled, having a strong Castle upon a Rock for its defence, and a capacious po●● for Traffic. It is now called Otranto, and is still a place of such importance, that the taking of it by Mahomet the great, An. 14●1. put all Italy into such a fear, that Rome was quite abandoned; not well inhabited again till the expulsion of the Turk●, in the next year following.  
6 PUGLIA is bounded on the East with Terra di Otranto; on the West, with Abruzzo; on the North, with the Adriatic Sea; on the South, with Calabria. It contains the whole Country called of old Apulia, from whence the Puglia of the Italians, and the Pon●lle of the French 〈◊〉 to be derived.  
It is divided by Leander, 
Apulia.  into Apulia Peucetia, and Apulia Daunia, the reason of which names I am unresolved of. That of Peucetia some derive from Peucetius the Brother of Oenotrus, which may be probable enough; this being the first Country at which Oenotrus touched, when he brought his people into Italy. Bochartus, a great Enemy to all Traditions, will have it called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from that great plenty of Pitch which these Countries yield (as that word signifies in the Greek.) But as for that of Daun●a, I have yet found no more probable conjecture of it, than that it should be called thus of Daunus, the son of Danae by Pilumnus, once the King of this Country; it being reported in the Legends of those elder times, that Danae being delivered of Perseus whom she had by Jupiter, was by her Father the King Acrisius, exposed to the mercy of the Seas; by which she was wafted with her young son to the coasts of this Province, here taken up by a poor Fisher, and by him carried to the Court, where the King became so enamoured of her, that he took her to Wife, and by her was Father to this Daunus. But Daunus had not long enjoyed it, on the death of his Father, when either by force or composition he was fain to leave it to Diomedes King of Aetolia, who at the end of the Tro●an War, wherein he was a principal Actor, hearing of the libidinous courses of his Wife Aeg●ale abhorred the thought of living with her, and so came with his people to this Country, where he fixed his dwelling, and built the City of Argyripa, whereof more anon. But as for Daunus, though he was not able to keep the possession of this Country, yet he bequeathed his name unto it; and afterwards withdrawing into Latium with such of his subjects as were willing to follow his Adventures, he became there the chief or head of the Rutuli, and built among them the Town of Ardea, his chief seat at the coming of Aeneas into Italy; betwixt whom, and Turnus the son of this Daunus, grew that deadly feud, so celebrated in the Works of Virgil.  
To proceed now in the description of this Province, in the full latitude thereof it comprehended also the Salentini, and other the inhabitants of the land of Otranto; for by no other names than those of Apulia and Calabria, was all the East part of Italy held by the Constantinopolitans; and by those names was it transferred on Otho the third of Germany, on his Marriage with Theophania, as before is said. But take it in the present bounds and acception of it, and it containeth the three Provinces of Bari, the Capitanate, and Poville the plain, according to the subdivision made by King Alsonsus: Poville comprehending the greatest part of Apulia Daunia, the rest thereof, which is only the command of the Hill Garganus, or the Mount St. Angelo, being called the Capitanate; and Bari comprehending all Peucetia. The people both of this Province and the land of Otranto, though in other things agreeing with the rest of this Kingdom, have a disease peculiar only to themselves, occasioned by the biting of a little Serpent, whiah they call a Tarantula, not curable. There are in the whole, besides the Villages and Towns unfortified, 126 Castles or walled places, and 13 Cities. The principal of which are, 1 Manfredonia, built and fortified by Manfred the bastard King of Naples and Cicilie, the better to assure these parts of his Kingdom; a stately and magnificent City, and the seat of the Archbishop of Sipont; having a very safe harbour for Ships, and an impregnable Citadel for defence thereof. 2 Barlette, reckoned one of the 4 most noted Cities of Italy; the other three being Crema in Lombardy, Prato in Tuscany, and Fabrianum, now called Fabiano, in Marca Anconitana. 3 Bitontum, an Arch-Bishops See; one of which was a famous stickler in the Council of Trent. 4 Asculum, or Ascoli, the Title of a Duke, called by the Ancients Asculum Satrianum, to difference it from another of the same name in Anconitana. 5. Tranum an ancient City, better built than peopled, for want of a commodious Haven. 6. Bari, a fair City, well inhabited, and seated in a very fruitful soil, which gives name to one part of the Country, as it is now divided. Here stood in former times the poor Village of Cannae, ignobilis Apuliae vicus, as it is in Florus; sed quae magnitudine cladis emersit, but such a one as afterwards grew famous for the great victory which Annibal there got against Paulus Aemilius, and Terentius Varro the Romon Consuls, of whose Army he slew 42700. men upon the place. Which Victory had he husbanded as he should have done, he had utterly subverted the Estate of Rome; so that it was most truly (as most tartly) said by Maherbal, General of his Horse, Vincere scis Annibal, victoria ●ti nescis. In this Country also stood Venusia, whence Horace who was there born, is called Venusinus; And 2. Arpinum, the birthplace of M. Tullius that famous Orator.  
Here also is Mount Garganus, (known by that name in the times of Virgil, now called Mount S. Angelo) one hundred and twenty miles in compass, defensible both by Art and Nature, insomuch as it is commonly the last place in the Realm of Naples, which is given up to the Invader. This evident by the keeping of it by the Greeks and Saracens for many years after the Normans had possessed themselves of the rest of the Country. Within the Captainship or command of this Fastness, besides many inferior Towns and Villages, are, 1. The City of Tro●a, the Title of a Duke, and the See of a Bishop. 2. Luceria, a rich old City; and 3. Ascoli before remembered.  
But of most note in this part of Apulia was the Town of Argyripa, or Argyroppa, as some would have it, founded by Diomedes in the skirts of this Mountain towards the See, and in that part of it then possessed by the Japyges near the land of Otranto, as now called. The site thereof so set down by Virgil in the 11 of the Aeneid.  
Ille urbem Argyripam patriae de nomine gentis 
Isles of Naples.   
Victor Gargani condebat japygis arvis.  
And being Victor, he a City builds  
Near Garganus in th' Japygian Fields;  
And called it Agyrippa, by the name  
Of some known place, in th' land from whence he came.  
By which we also may conclude, that it took this name with reference to some Town of Aetolia, which was the native Country of Diomedes. For though I know that many of the ancient Writers suppose it to have been first called Argos Hippium, with relation unto a famous City of that name in Peloponnesus, and after by contraction or corruption to be named Argyrippam, yet these words of Patriae de nomine Gentis, do persuade me otherwise: Diomedes having nothing to do in the Country of Argolis where that City stood, nor in the whole Demy-Iland of Peloponnesus, whereof Argolis was a part or Province. It was called also Diomedia, and Urbs Diomedis, because of his foundation, and his Royal seat, after his fixing in this Country; but at the last it came to be called Arpi, and by that name was known in the time of the Roman greatness; now no where to be found but in the ruins of time, and the Records of Antiquity.  
But not to tarry longer on these matters of decayed Antiquity, that which is most observable in this Province for these latter times, is that the greatest riches of it doth consist in the Tribute of cattle, worth 80000 Ducats yearly in the time of Guicciardine, and by him reckoned one of the fairest Revenues of the Realm of Naples. Of which when the French could have no part, this Province, after the division which they made with Ferdinand the Catholic (whereof more anon) being fallen to the Spaniard, they broke out into open War, and seeking thereby to improve their Patrimony, lost their whole interess in this Kingdom.  
The ISLES of NAPLES are either in the Adriatic and Tuscan Seas, or in the Bay of Puteolis. In the Adriatic Sea, are the Lands of Diomedes, right against Apulia, where it encountereth with Abruzzo, so called from Diomedes King of Aetolia, who after the end of the Trojan War (in which he was so great a stickler) settled himself in some part of Apulia; the principal whereof are St. mary's, St. Dominico, and Tremitana. 2 The Island of Acates over against the Town of Gallipolis. 3 St. Andrews in the Bay of Tarentum; 4 and finally the two Lands of Dioscoros and Galypso, over against the Cape of Lacinia now called Colonnes in the upper Calabria; of all which there is little famous. In the Tuscan or Tyrrhenian Seas, are the Lands of Pontia and Panditaria (now called Palmarde) as little famous as the other; save that the last is memorable in the Roman Stories for the confinement of Agrippina the wife of Germanicus, and mother of Caligula, by the appointment of the Emperor Tiberius Nero.  
Those in the Gulf or Bay of Puteoli are of better note. The principal whereof are 1 Ischia, heretofore called Oenotris from its plenty of Wine wherewith it aboundeth to this day, as also with Allom, Sulphur, and most excellent Fruits. It is in compass 18 miles, and so begirt with Rocks and dangerous Cliffs, that it is accessible at one entrance only, and that too fortified with a strong and impregnable Citadel; and therefore chosen by King Ferdinand for his place of refuge, when he was outed of his Kingdom by Charles the 8. Here is also good plenty of Hares and Coneys. 2 Prochita, now called Procita, about six miles in circuit, wherein are very wholesome Baths, good store of Coneys, Hares, and Pheasants; the shore replenished with Fish, and the land with Fountains. John de Prochita, who plotted the Cicilian Vespers, was once Lord of this place; but afterwards, for a reward of that service, made Viceroy of Valentia, a Kingdom of Spain. 3 Capri, a small rocky Island, having no Haven, nor convenient station for Ships, but of a mild and temperate Air; much beautified by Augustus Caesar, in regard that an old sapless tree upon his casual landing here, did bud forth afresh; and after that it was much honoured by his retirement from affairs of State; and as much dishonoured by Tiberius his next Successor, who withdrawing hither many times from his Court at Rome, made it the Theatre of his Cruelties and most filthy Lusts. It hath a little City of the same name, having a strong Fortress, and a Bishops See; and another Town called Anacaprae, inhabited by Fishermen, and Shipwrights belonging to the Navy of Naples. Into this Island they used to confine offenders in former times, and sometimes also at this day. 4 Aenaria, a small Island, given by Augustus to the Neapolitans, in exchange for Capri, whose before it was.  
There are few Nations under the Sun, who have suffered under more changes and alterations of State than the inhabitants of this Kingdom. For being at the first a mixture of several Nations, some of them preyed upon the others, till they were all subdued by the power of Rome. In the declining of her fortunes, they followed for the most part the Carthaginians, and took part with Annibal; and he being called home, they returned again to their old obedience. When Italy was subdued by the Goths, it became subject to that people, as Sicil, and the rest of those Lands did; and when the Lombard's Lorded it in the Roman Provinces, all Naples fell into their hands except Apulia and Calabria, which the Greek Emperors having conquered from the Goths with the rest of Italy, kept (but with much difficulty) to themselves. In the division of the Empire betwixt Carolus Magnus and Irene, these two last Provinces only were assigned to the Constant inopolitans, the rest to Charles and his Successors: both outed of their several parts by the prevailing Saracens, under the conduct of Sabba, and other successive 〈◊〉 These partly dispossessed by the Emperor Otho the first and his Almain forces; and they again expelled by the Greeks and Saracens, joining together against them as a common Enemy, who afterwards held bitter wars against one another for the sole command. During these w●rs it happened that one Drangot a Gentleman of Normandy, having in the presence of Duke Robert (the Father of William the Conqueror) slain one Repostel a Gentleman of like quality, to avoid the justice of the Prince, and the practices of Repostels' kindred, fled into this Country, attended by such of his followers, as either did depend upon his fortunes, or had been meddlers in the Fray. Where being come, the Duke of Benevent, Vicegerent to the Eastern Emperor, took them into pay. Their entertainment being bruited in Normandy, and a report raised withal that the Greeks harkened after men of valour and action, caused many private Gentlemen to pass over the Alps, and there to hew themselves out a more prosperous fortune than formerly they had enjoyed. The fortunate success of which last Adventurers drew thither also Tancred, the Lord of Hauteville, who with his twelve sons came into Apulia. Ao. 1008. and in short time not only drove the Saracens thence, but the Grecians also, as men that had broke Covenant with them in the division of the Booty. For William the son of Tancred combining with Melorco, Governor of Apul●a for the Greek Emperor, and with the Princes of Capua and Saler●, men of power and honour, for the conquest of Sicil (which the Saracens then wholly held) agreed amongst themselves to divide the places conquered by them into four equal parts, one for each Adventurer. But when the Saracens were driven out, Melorco having new supplies sent him out of Greece, seized on the possession of the whole Island in the Emperor's name. Which injury William cunningly dissembled till Melorco's Forces were dispersed, and then he suddenly set upon him; first took the City of Melsi, and after by degrees most of the other Towns and places which the Greeks held in Italy: of which both he and his Successors kept possession, by the Title of Dukes of Calabria only. Of these (though all of eminent virtue) there were two besides this William, of special fame, 1. Robert Gu●scard the third son of Tancred, the most valiant Captain of his time, and chief establisher of the Normans power in Italy, to which he added in conclusion the Isle of Sicil, together with the city of Naples itself, and all the Lands which lie betwixt it and Rome. 2. Bohemund the eldest son of this Robert, who going with Godfrey of Bovillon and others of the Western Christians to the Holy Land, was for his signal merits invested with the Kingdom of Antioch, inherited by his children after his decease.  
But to proceed, this Guiscard at his death, (but not without some wrong to the children of his Brother William, whom he had dispossessed of all by the Pope's Authority) gave Sicil, with the title of Earl to his son Rogero; and his estates in Italy to his other son William: who going to Constantinople to marry with the Emperor's daughter, was outed of his part by his brother Roger; made not long after, by the Pope, the first King of this Family.  

The Kings of Naples of the Norman Line.  
1125. 1 Roger, Earl of Sicil, created by Pope Anacletus 2d. King of both the Sicily's at the Town of Benevent; which City, in requital of so great a favour, he restored again unto the Church, from which it had been taken (after the first Donation of it) by the Germane Emperors. 24.  
1149. 2 William, the son of Roger, who to assure himself of his Kingdoms, was content to take them as a gift from the hands of Pope Adrian the 4th. to be holden for ever in Fee of the Church of Rome. 21.  
1170. 3 William II. son of the former William, who left a daughter called Constance, who became a Nun. 26.  
1196. 4 Tancred, the base son of William the 2d. excluded his Sister from the Crown, but was sententially deposed by Pope Celestine the 3d. who had an aim to get the Kingdom for himself. But when he saw that Tancred was too strong for him, out of mere spite to be defeated of his purpose, he called in the Germans, the ancient Enemies of his See, and gave the Lady Constance, than almost fifty years of age, in marriage unto Henry the 6th. 2.   

The Germane Line.  
1198. 5 Henry, the sixth of that name, Emperor, and Duke of Schwaben, succeeded on his marriage with the Lady Constance. 4.  
1202. 6 Frederick, son of the Emperor Henry and Queen Constance, crowned at the age of three years, afterwards Emperor by the name of Frederick the 2d. He had to wife the daughter of John di Brenn, the titulary King of Jerusalem, of which the Kings of Naples have ever since had the title of Kings, and in the rights of this Kingdom, the Kings of Spain.  
125●. 7 Conrade, the son of Frederick, King of Naples and Sicil, as also Emperor and Duke of Snevia, or Schwaben, poisoned (as it was conceived) by his base brother Manfred. 4.  
1254. 8 Munfroy, or Manfred, base son of Frederick, and Duke of Benevent, first governed the Kingdom as Protector unto Conradine the son of Conrade, but after took it to himself against the will of Pope Urban the 4th. who being weary of the Germans called in Charles Duke of Anjou, and Earl of Provence, brother to Lewis the 10th. of France: it being usual with the Popes (as Machiavelli very well observeth) to call new men into Italy, and stir up new wars for their own ambition; not suffering any to possess that long which themselves (through their weakness) could not hold, and practising the overthrow of those very men, whom themselves had raised to power and greatness.   

The French Line.  
1261. 9 Charles, Earl of Anjou and Provence, overcame King Manfred, and was after crowned by Pope Urban the 4th. who conditioned with him, that neither he nor his Successors should assume the Empire; and that they should pay fifty thousand Crowns per annum as a Rent to the Church. This Charles did also vanquish Conradine the son of Conrade, the last of the royal house of Suevia, whom he caused to be beheaded at Naples. After which bloody Act, neither he nor any of his posterity did either quietly or long enjoy these Kingdoms: For in his own time Peter King of Arragon, claimed the Kingdom of Naples in right of Constance his wife, the daughter of Manfred, betwixt whom and Charles a single combat was appointed to be fought in Bourdeaux, before King Edward the first of England, to decide the Controversy. But whilst Charles there expected him, he seized on Sicil, Ao. 1281. This Charles reigned three and twenty years.  
1284. 10 Charles II. son of Charles the first, formerly prisoner in Sicil to Peter of Arragon, was ransommed by the procurement of King Edward abovenamed for 30000. Marks. By Marie, daughter of Stephen, King of Hungary, he had fourteen children: the most pertinent of which (to our purpose) were Charles surnamed Martel, King of Hungary in right of his Mother; Robert King of Naples, John of Durazzo, and a daughter (whose name I find not) married to Charles, Earl of Valois, who in her right obtained the Earldom of Anjou. 26.  
1310. 11 Robert, the second son of Charles the 2d. 32.  
1342. 12 Joan, the Niece of Robert by his son Charles, first married Andrew, the second son of Charles King of Hungary, whom she hanged at her window for insufficiency; and for her second husband had Lewis, Prince of Tarentum, who over-straining himself to satisfy her carnal appetite, died. Her third husband was James, Prince of Majorca, a gallant young Gentleman, whom she beheaded for lying with another woman. Her fourth, Otho of Brunswick, a tough Soldier, who had the good fortune to outlive her. She was twice driven out of her Kingdom by Lewis King of Hungary, brother of Andrew her first husband: restored the first time by the power of Pope Clement the sixth; but at the second time taken and hanged at the same window where she had hanged her first husband. But first, out of an hatred to her next heirs of the House of Hungary, she adopted Lewis Duke of Anion (descended from Charles Earl of Valois spoken off before) for her heir and successor.   

The Hungarian Line.  
1371. 13 Charles III. son to Lewis, and nephew of Prince John of Durazzo before mentioned, by the power of Lewis, King of Hungary, and the favour of Pope Urban the fifth, was made King of Naples. He overthrew and killed in battle Duke Lewis of Anjou, his competitor, and after the death of King Lewis of Hungary, succeeded in that Kingdom also; but long he had not reigned therein, when poisoned (as it was supposed) by the old Queen Mother. 15.  
1386. 14 Ladislaus, son of Charles the 3d. having a quarrel with the Pope, made a voyage Royal unto Rome, where he forced his entry, and was there triumphantly received: on which displeasure the Pope called in Lewis the 2d. Duke of Anjou, who gave Ladislaus a great overthrow. Insomuch, as Ladislaus used to say, that if Lewis had followed his victory the first day, he had been Master of his Kingdom and Person too; if the second, of his Kingdom, but not of his Person: but not pursuing it till the third day, he failed of both. So in the end he was compelled to fly to Rome, and give over the Enterprise. 29.  
1415. 15 Joan II. Sister of Ladislaus, of as much levity, but not altogether of so ill a fame as the former Joan, observing the unprosperous successes of the house of Anjou, she ●dopted for her heir Alphonso the fifth of Arragon, who had some claim unto the Kingdom as the direct heir of Pedro, or Peter the 3d. and Constance the daughter of King Manfred spoken of before. But finding him to stand too much on his own right, and to be too forwards in taking a possession of it before her death, she revoked that Adoption, and made a new Grant of the Estate to Lewis the fourth, 
Calabria.  Duke of Anion, and after his decease to his Brother Rene, or Renatus; both vanquished by the Arragonians.   

The Aragonian line.  
1434. 16 Alfonso King of Arragon, partly by Conquest, and partly by Adoption, having got the Kingdom, left it well settled unto Ferdinand his Natural son. 24.  
17 Ferdinand the Base son of Alfonso (the lawful sons inheriting the Realm of Arragon, Sicil, etc.) succeeded in the Realm of Naples. 36.  
1494. 18 Alfonso II. son of Ferdinand, in whose time th● French began to aim at the Realm of Naples. This King and his Predecessors were of the Order of the Garter.  
1494. 19 Ferdinand II. Son of Alfonso the second, outed of his Estate and Kingdom by Charles the eighth, son of King Lewis the eleventh of France, whom Rene the last Duke of Anjou had made the sole Heir of all his Titles and Possession. And though Charles upon this Conquest was solemnly crowned, yet posting back again into France before he had settled his affairs in this Kingdom, and having much discontented the chief men of Anjouvin Faction, he lost it suddenly to the same Ferdinand from whom he had so suddenly won it.  
1497. 20 Frederick II. brother of Alphonso the second, and Uncle of this last Ferdinand, succeeded him in his Estates; and was the sixth King that had reigned in Naples within the compass of three years, that is to say, Ferdinand the first, Alfonso the second, Ferdinand the second, Charles' of France, the second Ferdinand again, and then this Frederick. Finding himself betrayed by the Spaniards, submitted himself to Lewis XII, King of France, and yielded up his kingdom to him. And indeed what else could the poor Prince do, when he saw his own blood, and such as had taken his Realm into their protection, conspiring against him.   
For when Charles made his passage towards Naples, Ferdinand the Catholic, sent Gonsalv●, (who was afterwards for his valour surnamed the Great Captain) with some Forces to resist the French Invaders: But when the French were expelled, Gonsalvo would not leave the Country, because his Master had not as yet sent for him. In the mean time it was agreed between Lewis of France, and this Ferdinand, that they should jointly set upon the Kingdom of Naples: and having won it, the French should possess Abruzzo and Lavoro; the Spaniards, Puglia, and both Calabria's: That the first should be entitled King of Naples; the other, Duke of Apulia. This Confederacy was kept secret till the French Forces were come to Rome, and Gonsalvo possessed (under pretence of defending it) of all Calabria. So that it was no marvel that they made themselves Masters of the Country. An Action in which the French dealt very unadvisedly, in bringing into Italy where he was before the sole Moderator, another King as great as himself, to whom as to his Rival, his Enemies might have recourse on all occasions; and the Spaniard as unnaturally, in betraying for the moiety of a Kingdom, a Prince of his own blood, under pretence and promise of succours. But the two Kings did not continue long in good terms of Partnership. For the Spaniards being more intent upon their advantages, soon picked a quarrel with the French, within two or three years drove them out of all, and to this day keep it; though both this Lewis, and his successors Francis the first, and Henry the second, have divers times, and with great effusion of blood, attempted the recovery of it.  

The Spanish or Castilian Line.  
1503. 22 Ferdinand III. surnamed the Catholic, King of Castille, Arragon, etc. and Naples. 13.  
1516. 23 Charles' V. Emperor, King of Spain, and the IV of that name in Naples. 43.  
1558. 24 Philip the 2d of Spain, and th' first of Naples. 40.  
1598. 25 Philip the 2d of Naples, 3d d of Spain. 22.  
1621. 26 Philip the 3d d of Naples, 4. of Spain.   
The Arms of this Kingdom are Azure, Seem of Flower de Lyces, Or, a File of three Labels, Gules.  
The Revenues of it are two Millions and a half of Crowns; whereof 20000 are due to the Pope for Chief-rent; and the rest so exhausted in maintaining Garrisons upon the Natives, and a strong Navy against the Turks, that the King of Spain receiveth not a fourth part declare.  
Here are in this Kingdom.  
Arch-Bishops 20. Bishops 127.   

The Kingdom of SICILIA.  
BEfore we can come into the I'll of Sicily, 
Sicil.  we must first cross that branch of the MEDITERRANEAN Sea, which is called the Fare, or Straight of Messana, where the passage is so straight and narrow, that it exceedeth not in breadth a mile and an half. In other parts, as the Sea grows wider, it is distant from the main land of Italy near 300. miles, that is to say, from the Town of Drepa●●m in Sicily, to the City of Naples. As for the Mediterranean Sea, it is so called because it interlaceth the midst of the earth, extending from the straits of Gibraltar on the West, to the Coast of Palestine on the East, and so dividing afric both from Europe and Asia Minor. In the Scriptures, Joshna 1. 4. it is called by the name of Mare magnum, or the great Sea; great in comparison of the dead Sea, and the Sea of Galilee, lying on the other side of the land of Palestine, but small enough if compared to the Ocean, with which in probability the Writer of that Book might have no acquaintance. Besides which general name of the Med●erranean, it hath also many particular names, as the Adriatic, Aegean, Ionian, and Carp●thian Sea, where it bordereth upon Greece, and Anatolia; Mare Lybicum, where it runneth by the shores of afric: with reference to Italy called in some places, Mare Tyrrhenum, in others Mare Ligusticum; in some parts Mare Sicislum, and in others Mare Sardoum, Lybicum, etc. And as the Chameleon is said to apply itself to the colour of the nearest adjacent body; so this Sea takes its particular denominations from the nearest shores. These Seas are also called by some modern Writers, in imitation of the French, by the name of the Levant, or the Seas of the Levant; because in respect of France, Spain, Britain, Germany, etc. they lie towards the East; the word Levant signifying in the French, a rising up after sleep, and more especially the Sunrising. The principal Lands of this Sea which relate to Italy (for of others we shall speak in their proper places) are those of Sicil, Sardinia, Corsica, and some Isles adjoining unto these.  
SICILY, environed round with the lower, or Tyrrhenian Sea, contains seven hundred miles in compass, and is supposed to have been joined to Italy in former times, being then a Peninsula, or Demy-Iland, such as Peloponnesus, and joined unto the Continent by as narrow an Isthmus.  
The separating of it from the main Land of Italy, is by the Poets ascribed to Neptune, who with his three-forked Mace or Trident broke it off from the land in favour of Jocastus the son of Aeolus, that so he might inhabit there with the greater safety, being environed round with waters. Which though it be a Fable or Poetical fiction, yet with some help from the Mythologists may be made a story. For if by Aeolus and Neptune we understand Winds and Seas, it intimates that it was divided from the rest of Italy, either by the fury of the Waves, or by the violence of some Earthquakes, to which this Island is still subject; which might in time consume and wear away the Earth. Nor want there very good reasons for this supposition; as, 1. The narrowness of the Straight, exceeding not a mile and a half; insomuch as at the taking of Messana by the Carthaginians, many of the people saved themselves by swimming over this straight into the opposite parts of Italy; ●dly. the shallowness of it, being found upon a diligent sounding, not to be above eight fathom deep. Then 'tis observed, that the land on both sides is very brittle, full of caves and chinks made in it by the working of the Sea, on this separation; and that on the Italian coast where the straight is narrowest, there stands a City of old called Rhegium, which signifieth a breach or a cutting off, from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifies to break off, or violently to pull asunder, and is supposed to be so called upon this occasion. And indeed the violence of the Sea is so great and dangerous in this narrow channel, so subject unto blustering winds issuing out of the hollow caverns of the earth, that the breaking off of this Island from the rest of Italy is a thing most credible. Which dangerous nature of the passage, being also full of Rocks, and unsafe by reason of the Whirlpools, occasioned it to be called by Florus the Historian, Fabulosis infa●●e monstris fretum, chiefly so called with reference to Scylla and Charybdis, of which so many fabulous things are reported by the ancient Poets. Charybdis is a Gulf or Whirl-pool on Sicily side, which violently attracting all vessels that come too nigh it, devoureth them, and casteth up their wrecks at the shore of Tauromeni, not far from Catina. Opposite to this in Italy, standeth the dangerous Rock Scylla, at the foot of which many little Rocks shoot out, on which the water strongly beating, make that noise which the Poets feign to be the barking of dogs. The passage between these two being to unskilful Mariners exceeding perilous, gave beginning to the Proverb; 
Incidit in Scyllam cupiens vitare Charybdim.  
Who seeks Charybdis for to shun,  
Doth oftentimes on Scylla run.   
But there are other things which made Sicily famous in old times, besides these two, 〈◊〉 the punishment of the Giant Enceladus, for his attempt against the Gods: the frequent burnings of Aetna (under which he is fabled to be shut up) being supposed to proceed from his sulphurous breath. Secondly, the birth of Ceres in this Isle; and Thirdly, the Rape of Proserpina. To these two last the Isle was consecrated in those days; to Ceres, in regard she first taught the people to sow Corn, whence the word Ceres is often used in the Poets to signify Breal, and other necessary provisions for life, as Sine Cerere & Baccho friget Venus: To Proserpina, because bestowed upon her by Pluto, to please her after the Ravishment committed on her.  
It is situate under the fourth Climate, the longest day being 13 hours and an half. And was once called Trinacria, because it shoots forth into the Sea with three Capes or Promontories: viz. 1 Pelorus, now Capo de Foro, to the North; 2 Pachinus, now Cape Passaro, to the West; and 3 L●lybaeum, now Capo Boii, or Cabo Coro, to the South. This last looketh towards Carthage, and the shores of afric, from which distant 180 miles. And of this Strabo doth affirm, that a man of a quick and strong fight, getting up into a Watchtower that stood in this Cape, descried a Fleet setting sail out of the Haven of Carthage; and told the Lilybitanians their bigness and number. That this is true, I dare not say: for besides the unlikelihood of kenning at so great a distance, we are taught by Philosophy, that the Sea being of an orbicular form, swelleth itself into the fashion of a round Turret or Hill, till it put bound to the eyesight. From these three corners, this Country was (as we have said) called Trinacris or Trinacria, according to that of Ovid. Terra tribus scopulis vastum procurrit in aequor; 
Trinacris à positu, nomen adepta, loci.  
An Island with three corners braves the main,  
And thence the name of Trinacris doth gain.   
The first Inhabitants that we find to have dwelled in this Country, are the huge Giants so often mentioned in the Odysseys of the divine Poet Homer, called Laestrygones and Cyclops; of which last rank was the so much famoused Polyphemus, who with so much humanity entertained Ulysses and his companions. These were afterward rooted out by the Sicani, a people of Spain, who called it Sicania. As for the name of Sicilia, some derive it from Sicileus, a supposed King of Spain, who is fabled to have conquered this Country; but the truth is, it came from the Siculi, who being by Evander and his Arcadians driven out of Latium, came into this Island: to which, having mastered the Sicani, and driven them from the West and the Northern part, to the East and South, they left their name. At their first landing they built the City of Zancle, called afterwards Messana, together with Neae, Hybla, Catana, and Leontium. After them came another Italian people named the Morgetes, being driven thence by the Oenotrians; and sat down in that part of the Island where stood the City of Morgentum, built by them at their first arrival. The first of all the Greeks who set footing in it (not to say any thing of the coming of Minos hither in the pursuit of Daedalus, having more in it of the Fiction than Historical truth) were the Chalcidians, a people of the I'll Euboea, now called Negropont, who built the City of Naxos; and after them Archias of Corinth with his fellow Adventurers, by whom Syracuse was either first built, or very much beautified and repaired. Next them the Rhodians and Cretans sent some Colonies hither, the first founders of Gela, and after of the renowned City of Agrigentum: And not long after a new Plantation sent from Sparta built Heraclea. The Citizens of Megaris, another state of Greece, sent a Colony also, who built Selinus. And so did those of Messene also, who taking the Town of Zanele from the Siculi, new built or beautified it, and gave unto it so repaired the name of Messana. Nor is it to be thought, that the Tyrians and Phoenicians, being so great undertakers of public businesses, and very powerful in shipping, would sit still when so fair a booty did invite their industry; who seizing on the Promontories of Pachinus and Lilybaeum, and some of the adjoining Lands, did fortify them for the better securing of the Trade which they had in Sicily. But all these several Adventurers having several interesses, joined not together in the work of an absolute Conquest; but planting themselves only on the Seashores, altered not the name by which they found it called at their coming thither.  
The people are ingenious, eloquent, and pleasant, but withal very unconstant, and so full of talk, that from thence came the Proverb, Gerrae Siculae. They are also said to be of a very envious, suspicious, and distrustful nature, uncapable of injuries, and vehement in pursuit of revenge, as appears by that great slaughter which they made of the French; yet withal courteous enough to strangers, and Parasyticall enough to their superiors. They have been famous heretofore for many notable inventions, Aristotle ascribing to them the Art of Oratory, and first making of Pastoral Eclogues; Pliny of Clocks (or rather of Hour-glasses; for Clocks were but a late invention, and that of the Flemings) and Plutarch of Military Engines; which last were brought by Archimedes unto great perfection.  
The Christian Faith was first preached here by some of the Disciples of St. Peter, whom he sent hither at his first coming to Rome; of which Pancratius (whom we call commonly St. Paucrace) is said to have been the first Bishop of Tauromenium, and Marcianus of Syracuse. They are now generally of the Religion authorised by the Popes of Rome; that of the Greek Church being rather connived at than allowed of, in the Communion whereof here are thought to be ten thousand souls, but looked on by the rest as schismatical people. For the most part they use the Italian Language, but very much altered, the Greek, Arabian, Norman, French, and Spanish tongues, to which Nations they have been severally subject since the time of the Romaus. The total number of the people is thought to be about a Million and a half.  
The soil is incredibly fruitful in Wine, Oil, Honey, Minerals of Gold, Silver, and Allom, together with plenty of Salt and Sugar; which last commodity the Natives sell in the Canes unto the Venetians, and buy it again of them when it is refined, and thereby letting strangers go away with the best part of their gains; as generally they do in all other Merchandise, which they permit to be exported, rather than put themselves to the trouble of Trafficking abroad in Foren Nations; there are also Gems of Agates, and Emeralds. It yieldeth also great store of the richest Silks, which grow plentifully about Messana; variety of most excellent and delicious fruits, both for taste and colour, with such abundance of all sorts of Grain, that it was called in old times Horreum Romani populi, or the Granary of the Roman Empire; and doth now furnish some parts of Italy, Spain, and Barbary, besides Malta, and the adjacent Isles, with that which she can spare of her superfluities. Nay Tully doth not only call it the Granary and store-house of the City of Rome, in regard of Corn, but adds, that it was accounted for a well-furnished Treasury, as being able of itself without charge of the State, to clothe, maintain, and furnish the greatest Army, with Leather, Corn, and Apparel. And if Dirdorus Siculus may be credited in it, he telleth us, that about Leontium and some other places, Wheat did grow of itself, without any labour of the Husbandman. At this day in some parts of the Isle, the soil is so exceeding Fruitful, that it yields unto the Husbandman an hundred measures of Corn for one. And certainly the Corn of this Country must needs yield a wonderful increase, the King of Spain receiving an hundred thousand Crowns yearly for the Custom of Wheat. In this Country is the Hill Hybla, so famous for Bees and Honey, near which there was a City of this same name also, which afterwards was called Megara. And here is also the Hill Aetna, now called Montgibael, which continually seedeth forth flames of Fire, to the astonishment of all beholders. The most famous conflagrations in the former times were presently before the breaking out of the War in Sicil, which the Romin Writers call Bellum servile; not pacisied but by the slaughter of 70000 of the Slaves which had taken Arms against Rome; and shortly after the death of Julius Caesar, portending those proscriptions and bloody Wars which did after follow. And to this day such extraordinary eruptions of it are accounted ominous. The Hill itself is of that height, that it is ten miles from the top to the bottom, and may be easily discerned by Sailors at an hundred miles' distance; the lower parts thereof being very fruitful, the middle shaded with Woods, and the top covered with Snow a great part of the year, notwithstanding the frequent vomiting of flames and cinders. But these eruptions of sire are not now so ordinary as they have been fonmerly; the matter which gave fuel to it being wasted by continual burnings; so that the flames which issue hence are hardly visible but by night, though the smoke show itself the most part of the day. And when it doth break out, which is commonly once in three or four years, it falleth in great flakes on the vales adjoining to the destruction of the Vintage, and great loss of the Country. But that, they say is recompensed by the plenty of the following years; the ashes thereof so batling and enriching the soil, that both the Vines and Cornfields are much bettered by it. And this report I am the apt to believe, in regard we find by late experience here amongst ourselves, that the Turf taken from the ground and burnt to ashes, and so spread on land and ploughed into it, doth yield a very great improvement, even to barren soils. Which kind of Husbandry is called the Devonshiring of land, because there first used; but in Hampshire it was called, as I remember (having been unfortunately too long a stranger there) by the name of burning and beaking. But to return again to Aetna. Into this fiery Furnace the Philosopher Empedocles cast himself, that he might be reputed a God.  
— Deus immortalis haberi  
Dum cupit Empedocles, ardentem fervidus Aetnam  
Insiluit— as Horace in his Book de Arte Poetica.  
Empedocles to be a God desires,  
And cast himself if into th' Aetnean fires.  
The reason of these fires is the abundance of Sulphur and Brimstone, contained in the bosom of the hill, which is blown by the wind, driving in at the chaps of the Earth, as by a pair of bellows. Through these chinks also there is continually more fuel added to the fire, the very water adding to the force of it: as we see that water cast on coals in the Smith's Forge, doth make them burn more ardently. The reason of this flame is thus set down by Ovid:  
Ista bituminea rapiunt incendia vires,  
Luteaque exiguis ardescunt sulphura flammis.  
Atque ubi terra cibos alimentaque debita flammae  
Non dabit, absumpt is per longum viribus aevum;  
Naturaeque suum untrimen deerit edaci;  
Non feret Aetna famem, desertaque deseret ignes.  
A resin mould these fiery flames begin,  
And clayie brimstone aids that fire within:  
Yet when the slimy soil consumed, shall  
Yield no more food to feed the fire withal:  
And Nature shall restrain her nourishment,  
The flame shall cease, hating all famishment.  
Under this Hill some Poets feign the Giant Enceladus to have been buried, as before is said, whose hot breath fired the mountain lying on his face. Others suppose it to be the shop of Vulcan and the Cyclops; and the gross Papists take it for the place of Purgatory; all alike infallible.  
The principal Rivers here of, 1. Taretta, anciently. called Terius. 2. Himara, neighboured by Mount Hybla, much famed for honey. 3. Isaurus. 4. Hypsa. 5. Acasius, of great note for its precious stones, none of them much observable for length or breadth, but that defect supplied by the commodiousness of Bays and Creeks, which are very frequent in this Island, and by the benefit of Fountains and freshwater Lakes. Most memorable amongst these, 1. The Lake called Palicoro, (now Napthia) which for three months doth cast forth water very hot, but of very ill smell; of which there is mention made in Pliny by the name of Ephintia. 2. A Fountain near the foot of Aetna, the water whereof is sharp like Vinegar, and sometimes boileth; into which a piece of cloth cast, being before steeped in water mixed with gall, becomes suddenly black. 3. Another Fountain near Drepanum, the water of which assoon as drunk, provoketh looseness. All which effects proceed from that sulphureous and bituminous matter, of which the whole Island is exceeding full. 4. Arethusa, of greater fame among the Ancients than all the rest, especially in that the River Alpheus (a River of Greece) having swallowed up one hundred and forty lesser streams, and losing itself under the ground, is thought to empty itself into it. The thing affirmed by Seneca and Strabo both, and seems to be sufficiently proved by the several instances of a wooden dish or cup lost in the River Alpheus, and found rising up in this River, and by the leaves of certain trees growing on the banks of that Greek River, and swimming on this in great abundance, there being none of these trees in all Sicil. Dicitur Alpheus (saith Mela) se non consociare pelago, sed subter maria, terrasque depressus, huc agere alveum, atque bîc se rursus extollere.  
This Island is famous for the worthy Scholars she once produced, viz. Aeschylus, the first Tragedian of fame, who being bald through age, once walked in the fields, where by chance an Eagle taking his bald pate for a white Rock, let a shellfish fall on it, of that bigness, that it beat out his brains. 2. Diodorus Siculus, that famous Historian. 3. Empedocles, the first Inventor of Rhetoric, and his Fellow Gorgias. 4. Euclid, the textuary Geometrician, who taught in Megaris. 5. Archimedes, a most worthy Mathematician, the first Author of the Sphere, of which instrument he made one of that art and bigness, that one standing within, might easily perceive the several motions of the every celestial orb. He made also divers military engines, which in the siege of Syracuse sorely vexed the Romans, and was at last slain in his study by a common soldier in the sack of the town, to the great grief of the General Marcellus. 6. Epicha●mus, the first Inventor of Comedies; and ●. Theocritus, the first Author of Pastoral Eclogues. In the later times Nicolas, Abbot of Palermo, a learned Canonist, and Cardinal of the Church of Rome, commonly called Panormitanus, was of greatest fame.  
In Pliny's time there were reckoned in this Island seventy two Cities, of which only twelve are now remaining. The whole divided at this time into three small Provinces, that is to say, 1. Vall de Noto, 2. Mazara, and 3. Mona; to which the Isles adjoining may add a fourth.  
1. VALLIS DE NOTO taketh up the Eastern parts of the Island. The chief Cities of which are, 1. Syracuse, once the Metropolis of the whole Island, and a most flourishing Commonwealth; It was (as Tully reports) the greatest and goodliest City of all that ween possessed by the Greeks, for situation very strong, and of an excellent prospect, from every entrance both by Sea and Land. The Port thereof which had the Sea on both sides of it, was for the most part environed with beautiful buildings, and that part of it which was without the City, was on both sides banked up, and sustained with very fair 〈◊〉 of Marble. Nor was it only the goodliest City of the Greeks, as Tully tells us, but the greatest also of the world, as is said by Strabo, by whom it is affirmed, that without the outmost wall thereof (for it was environed with three walls) it contained one hundred and eighty Furlongs in compass, which of our measure cometh to eighteen miles, it being compounded of four Towns made up into one, that is to say, Insula (or the Isle) Acradine, Neapolis, and Tyche, besides the Fort called Hexapla, which commanded the rest; the greatness of all which, the ruins and foundations of it do still demonstrate. It standeth North of the Promontory called Pachi●us, and was built by Archias of Corinth, about the time of Jotham King of Juda●, who being for an unnatural rape committed on a young Gentleman, banished his Country, together with his Friend and Companion Miscellus, consulted with the Oracle at Delph●s, ●ow and in what place they should dispose of themselves. The Oracle demanding whether they most affected wealth or health, Miscellus answered health, and Archias wealth; and thereupon the former was directed to settle himself at Cortona in Italy, and the other here. Nor did the Oracle deceive him in his expectation, this Town by reason of its beautiful and commodious Port, proving of greatest trade and wealth next to Carthage itself in those times of the world. It was the custom of this Town when any of the Citizens grew too potent, to write his name 〈…〉 Olive leaf, which being put into his hand, did without more 〈◊〉 condemn him to banishment for five years, and was called Petalisme, from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifying 〈◊〉 leaf● yet could not this device so much secure them in the possession of their so much-defined Freedom, but that this City fell oftener into the power of Tyrants, than any one City in the world. That which is now remaining of it, is the work of Augustus, who after a second destruction of it in the time of Pompey, sent a Colony hither, and built upon the Isle and the parts near to it. But now the whole Isle (Ortygia the Ancients called it) is taken up with a very strong Castle, the whole City also being very well walled, and held by a Garrison of Spaniards. 2. Noto, which give● name to this whole Division. A City which heretofore contended with Syracuse in point of greatness; situate on a very high Rock, unaccessible on all sides but by one narrow passage, and having under the Cape of Passari a very fair and capacious Harbour, the Key of Sicil on that side. 3. Augusta, fituate on the shore also, and of so large a Haven that it could never be fortified. 4. Castro Giovanni, a Town of about four thousand Families, situate in a wholesome air, and a fruitful soil, which they hold to be the very Navel and exact middle of the Island. It is also much prized for mines of most excellent Salt. 5. Lentini, famous for its Lake, whose fishing is farmed for eighteen thousand Crowns yearly. It was anciently called Leontium, and stood somewhat North of Syracuse, with which continually in war, either to preserve their own Liberties, or get the Sovereignty of the other. 6. Enna, a midland Town, whence Pluto is said to have ravished Proserpina: In after times the dwelling of that Syrus Ennus, who stirred up the Roman Slaves against their Lords, and having broke open the common prisons, and received all such as came unto him, patched up an Army of forty thousand. This war the Roman Writers call Bellum Servile, ended at last, but with no small difficulty, by the valour and good fortune of P. Ruptlius.  
2. MAZARA containeth all the West part of the Island. The chief Cities whereof, 1. Agrigentum, now called Gergenti, famous for Phalaris the Tyrant, and his torturing Perillus in a Brazen Bull, which he had made for the destruction and torture of others. Of which aptly Ovid.  
— Nec enim lex justior ulla est  
Quam necis Artifices arte perire sua.  
Most just it is, a man should be tormented  
With that which first his cruel wit invented.  
It was said anciently of the people of this City, that they built as if they should never die, and eat as if they were sure to live no longer. 2. Palermo, anciently called Panormus, and then a Colony of the Phoenicians, now the chief City of Sicil, and the seat of the Spanish Viceroy. Situate on the West Cape of the Island looking towards Sardinia, beautified with large streets, delicate buildings, strong walls, and magnificent Temples. It hath no natural Port appertaining to it, (Drepanum serving anciently as the Port thereof:) but of late there is an Haven forced out by a mighty Pierre; a work of vast expense, and worthy of the greatness of Rome. It is also an Archbishops See, and an University. 3. Monreal, commonly called Morreal, famous for the Church, the Archbishops See. It is called in Latin Mons Regalis. 4. Drepanum, now called Trapani, situate on a Promontory thrusting into the Sea, not far from that of Lilybaeum, a Town well fortified, in regard of the ill neighbourhood of the Moors, who do often pillage on these coasts, and having the command of a very fair Port. The Inhabitants of this place are said to be the best Seamen of Sicil. 5. Mazara, which gives name unto all this Vale, situate South of Lilybaeum, and not far from Selinus. 6. Eryx, situate on a mountain overlooking the Sea, said by the Ancients to have took this name from Eryx the son of Venus, slain here by Hercules: memorable in those elder times for being the Seat of K. Acestes, who so kindly entertained Aeneas and his wand'ring Trojans; and a magnificent Temple in which Venus was worshipped, who from hence was called Erycina; as sive tu mavis Erycina ridens, in the Poet Horace. This was the last Town which the Carthaginians held in Sicil, on the surrendry whereof by Amilcar the Father of Annibal, at the end of the first Punic War, it was conditioned by the Romans, amongst other things, that the Carthagintans should relinquish all the claim or title which they had to any part of this Island: which thereby fell unto the Romans (the State of Syracuse excepted only.) Who, whatsoever colour they were pleased to put upon that action, were principally tempted to it by ambition and covertousness. And therefore in my mind Florus states it rightly, who saith, that it was undertaken Specie quidem juvandi Socios, re autem sollicitante praedae; i. e. under pretence of aiding the Mamertines, who had put themselves into their protection, but in plain terms to get possession of the Island which lay fit for Italy. Now and long since a ruin only, the place on which it stood being called Mount S. Julian. 7. Segesta, on the Seaside, not far from Eryx, near unto which the Trojan Ladies weary of their many long and dangerous voyages, and fearing to go again to Sea, burned the Fleet of Aeneas, on which occasion it was built. Peopled at first by such of the more old and feeble Trojans, (Longaevosque senes, & fessas aequore matres, as the Poet hath it) who chose rather to fix their dwelling here, than to follow the fortunes of Aeneas in his quest of Italy. Called then Acesta, in honour of King Acestes spoken of before, part of whose Kingdom it was made; afterwards Egesta, from Aegestas one of Trojan race, born here, by whom it was repaired and beautified; and at last Segesta.  
3. MONA lieth on the North-East of the Island, opposite unto Vallis de Noto. The chief Towns of it, 1. Nicosia, in the midland. 2. Milase, on the Northern Promontory. 3. Messina, a City of great strength and beauty, just opposite to Rhezo in Italy. It was the first Town which the Romans had in this Island, being put into their hands by the Mamertines, a Troop of Soldiers brought thither out of Campania for defence of the City, who finding themselves too strong for the Citizens, made themselves Masters of the place; but being withal too weak to hold it, chose rather to surrender it to the Romans, than to its true and prope● Owners. Hence the beginning of the first war betwixt Rome and Carthage. A City it is at this time of the most beautiful building of any in Sicil, and peopled by the wealthiest sort both of Merchants and Gentlemen, who live here in great pleasure (if not volupevousness) as having plenty of all necessary provisions, fruits of all kinds, delicious wines, and snow to moderate and qualify the heats thereof, at cheaper rates than any elsewhere in the Country. On the West side there stands a strong Citadel highly mounted and well Garrisoned, which commands the Town, and not far off a very high Lauthorn, where lights are kept burning all night long for the direction of such Mariners as are to pass those dangerous straits, which from this Phare or Watch-Tower, is called commonly the Phare of Messana. The Haven of this Town is the fairest of Sicil, whose entrances are so strongly sconced and bulwarked, that the people let their Gates (in derision of the Turks) stand always open. It is also an Anchbishops See. 4. Catina, so often vexed by Dionysius the Tyrant of Syracuse: more ancient than beautiful: seated on the North side of a great (but hollow) Bay, not easily approached by ships, and therefore neither held by any Garrison, nor much Traded by Merchants; the riches of the place consisting principally in the fruitfulness of the Soil, the habitation of many of the Gentry, and by being a small University. It was once a Colony of the Naxians. And so was also T●●romen: 'em, the fifth Town of note in this part of the Island, called sometimes from its Founders Naxos, but now Thermino, a ruin only of what was in the former days, a place by nature of great strength, but overtopped by Syracuse and Messana, betwixt which it standeth. It was in this part of the Country that the Cyclops dwelled, there being three little rocky Lands (now not inhabited) not far from this Town, which for a long time were called Syclopum Scopuli.  
IV. On the West part of Sicil lie the AEOLIAN or Vulcanian Lands, heretofore only seven, and all almost of equal bigness, now eleven in number. The first name derived from Aeolus, once Lord of them, who being well skilled in divining from what coast the winds would blow, (which he conjectured by the smoke ascending from them) occasioned the Poets to make him the God of the Winds. The other is derived from Vulcan, the God of Fire, by reason of the continual flames of fire from thence evapourating in those elder days. But now the matter of those flames being wasted in long tract of time, there is only one of them which burneth, now called STROMBOLO, by some Writers Strongyle, from the roundness of it. An Island of about ten miles' compass, but such as seems ●o be no other than a large round Mountain. Out of the top whereof issueth continually a flame like a burning Beacon, easily discernible far off, but at nights especially: a place so full of horror to the neighbouring Islanders, that they and many others of the Romish Catholics conceive it to be Hell itself; and yet in those parts where the rage of the fire offendeth not, it is of a very fruitful soil, and apt for tillage.  
2. But the fairest and best peopled of those Lands, is that of LIPARA, some ten miles in circuit, (from whence the rest are called the Liparean Isles) so named from L●para the chief Town, said to be built in the time of Josiab King of Judah; the See of a Bishop, under the Archbishop of Messina. The Island generally fruitful, well furnished with Allon, Sulphur, and Bitumen, and some hot medicinal Baths, which are much frequented; and from thence called Thermessa by the ancient Writers. It was formerly of so great wealth, that falling into the displeasure of Agathocles (than the Tyrant of Syracuse) they were able to buy their peace of him at the sum of one hundred Talents of Gold; which sum they had no sooner paid, but the Tyrant for a farewell robbed their very Temples. Unprosperous in his Actions always after that adventure. Nor sped it better with the Turks, who in the year 1544. laid the Country desolate; in which condition it remained till Charles the fifth replenished it again with Spaniards, and fortified it very strongly against all invasions.  
3. Not far off lieth another of these Lands, now called FAVOGNANA, or Fanciana, but anciently Aegusa, conceived to be the same which Livy; and Florus call Aegates; in which there is a fair and capacious Bay able to receive the greatest Navies, and near to which Luctatius Catulus the Consul gave the Carthaginians their last blow at Sea, which drew along with it the surrendry of Eryx, and the loss of Sicil. Dedyme, Ericosu, Eunymos, and Phoe●ieusae, four other of these Lands, but of lesser note, I pass over willingly, and make haste to  
4. HIERO, the 7th. and last of these Lands of any consideration, and the eight in tale, called also Vulcania, in which Vulcan was worshipped; said to have first appeared above the water at such time as Scipio African died. A barren, stony, and uninhabited place, by reason of the fires which formerly have flamed so hideously (especially in the year 1444.) that it made not only the rest of these Lands but all Sicily tremble. Near unto this Isle was fought the first Naval fight betwixt Rome and Carthage. Before which time the Romans had never used the Seas, as being totally employed in the conquest of Italy; insomuch that when they had built their Galleys they were fain to exercise their men in rowing, by placing them on two Seats near the water with Oars in their hands. Which notwithstanding, having devised an Engine like a Grapling-hook, they so fastened the Adverse Fleet unto them, that the whole ●ight seemed a Land-battell fought upon the Sea. The victory fell unto the Romans, C. Duilins the Consul then commanding in Chief, and was honoured with the first Naval Triumph that was ever solemnised at Rome.  
After this Island was once known to the Greeks, they sent from all their chief City's 〈◊〉 rall Colonies, who planted in the Seacoasts of the Country, as before we noted. But so as they never united themselves in a body together, but had their several estates and particular ends, whereby they came to be divided into many factions, and at last made themselves a prey to as many Tyrants. Phalaris lording it at Agrigentum, Panaetius at Leontium, Gelon at S●racuse, Cleander at Gelae; and when one Faction grew too weak to resist the other, they called in several Foreign Nations to abet their quarrel. For on this ground the Carthaginians were first called into Sicily by the Messenians against the Agrigentines, and on the same was managed here a great part of the Peloponnesian wars; the Athenians siding with the Leontines, and the Spartans' with he Syracusans: in which the whole power of Athens was broken by Sea and Land, and their two Generals Nicias and Demosthenes murdered in prison. But because Syracuse was a City of the greatest authority, and of greatest influence over the rest of Sicily, we shall more punctually insist on the State and affairs thereof; the government of which at first was popular, as it was in most of the Greek Colonies, according to the platforms which they brought from home; and was but newly altered to the Aristocratical, when Gelon made himself King of it, about 26 years after the expulsion of the Tarquins at Rome, whom with as many as succeeded in the Royal dignity, take along as followeth.  

The Tyrants or Kings of Syracuse.  
A. M.  
3465. 1 Gelon, the Prince or Lord of Gela, taking advantage of the quarrels in Syracuse betwixt the Magistrates and people, made himself Master of the City, and was chosen King. A valiant and prudent Prince, by whom 150000 Carthaginians were slain in battle for their welcome into Sicil. 7.  
3472 2 Hiero, the brother of Gelon, a valiant King also, but a rude and covetous man, whereby he lost the love of his people. 11  
3484 3 Thrasibulus, brother of Hiero, whose Government proved so cruel and unsupportable, that he held it not above 10 months; who being forced into Exile by the Syracusans, the people did a while enjoy their liberty; but withal fell into those Factions, which after 60 years made them lose it again.  
3544 4 Dionysius, that so famous Tyrant, from being General of the Forces of the Syracusans, made himself their King; A man of great vices, but great virtues withal. He brought almost all Sicily under his obedience, and the Town of Rhegium in Italy, reigning in all 38 years.  
3582 2 Dionysius II. succeeding his Father in his Kingdom and vices, but not in valour or wisdom, was first outed by Dion a noble Gentleman of Syracuse, and afterward taken Prisoner by Timoleon of Corinth, to which City he was sent, and there died in exile.  
3635 6 Agathocles, by trade a Potter, after that a Soldier, 20 years after the death of Timoleon, made himself King of Syracuse. To draw the Carthaginans out of Sicil, he passed over into afric and besieged Carthage, which example Scipio after followed, but with better fortune. 29.  
3681 7 Hieron II. of a Commander of their Armies chosen King of Syracuse by a party which he had made amongst them. In his time broke out the first Punic War, the Romans being called in by the Mamertones, who held Messana against the Carthaginians, the Lords at that time of the greatest part of the Island. 56.  
3737 8 Hieronymus, the son of Hiero, after whose death Syracuse and all Sicil became subject to Rome, by the fortunate conduct of Marcellus.   
Of these eight Kings, the six first commonly pass under the name of Tyrants, from whence, and from some others of like disposition, who Lorded it over the rest of the Free Cities of Sicil, the name of Siculi Tyranni grew into a Proverb. But of all, none more hated than the two Dionisii, who were so odious, that there were continual execrations poured on them; only one old woman praying for the life of the later. Who being asked the cause, made answer, that she knew his Father to have been a monstrous and wicked Tyrant, on whom when the curses of the people had prevailed, and obtained his death, this his son succeeded, worse by far than he, for whose life she was resolved to pray, lest after his death the devil himself should come amongst them. But to proceed, after these Tyrants, as they called them, were rooted out, and the Island was conquered by Marcellus, it always followed the fortune of the Roman Empire, till in the partition of that Empire it fell together with Apulia and Calabria into the power of the Greeks. In the declining of whose greatness, this Island having been miserably peeled and spoilt by the Emperor Constans, An. 669. became a prey to the Saracens; from then recovered again by the help of the Normans, who held both this and the Realm of Naples, in Fee of the Church, under the title of Kings of both Sicils. From that time forwards it ran the fortune of that Kingdom, subject unto the Princes of the Norman and Germane lines, till the death of Conrade, no interruption intervening. After whose death when Munfroy, or manfred, the base son of the Emperor Frederick, and Brother of Conrade, had forcibly made himself King of these Countries, it was offered to Richard Earl of Cornwall, Brother to Henry the third of England; a Prince of such riches, that he was able to dispend an hundred Marks perdiem, for ten years together; which according to the Standard of those times was no small sum. But the conditions which the Pope ptoposed were so impossible for the Earl to perform, 
Sicil  that his Agent told him, he might as well say to his Master, I will give thee the Moon, climb up, catch, and take it. The Earl refusing it, it was offered the King for his second son Edmund, who was invested by the gift of a Ring, and money coined in his name by the Pope's appointment, with the inscription of Almundus Rex Siciliae. But the King not being able to pursue the business, because than overburdened by his Baron's Wars, and the Pope having sucked no small store of Treasure from him; it was in the year 1261, given unto Charles Earl of Provence and Anjou, brother to Lowis the 10th. Under him those Countries jointly continued subject till the year 1281, in which time his Competitor Peter of Arragon promising him to fight a single combat before our K. Edward the first at Bordeaux; failed of his word; and in the mean time so contrived it, that at the found of a Bell tolling to prayers, all the Frenchmen in Sicily were cruelly Massacred. This exploit is known now under the name of Vesperi Siculi, and was managed by John de Prochyta, a Gentleman of the Reaim of Naples, whom Charles had dispossessed of the I'll of Prochyta, whereof he had been formerly Lord; and not content to do him such a piece of injustice, added a further insolency to it, in the forcing of his Wife. Provoked with these two injuries, the abused Gentleman plots with King Pedro of Arragon, to make him Master of the I'll of Sicily, where he had very good intelligences; and where the French by reason of their Lusts and Insolences had so exasperated the Natives, that they were capable enough of any such impressions, as a man sharing with them in their sufferings could imprint upon them. According to the compact made, Don Pedro riggeth out his Navy, under pretence of some exploit against the Moors, and anchoreth in the port of Sardinia, there to expect how well the Tragedy would be acted; which fell out so agreeably to his expectation, that in one instant as it were, on the signal given, the French were universally murdered in all parts of the Island; the people being so enraged, that they would not spare women great with child, if supposed to have been got by any of that hated nation: And Pedro coming in with his Navy as the deed was done, was by the general consent of all sorts of people, crowned King of Sicily. A bloody policy, I confess, which as the Actors learned of the English Saxons, who had made like riddance of the Danes, so did they teach it to the French, who practised it on the Hugonots of France in that horrid Massacre of Paris, An. 1572. An Act which so provoked the Pope, that he solemnly accursed the King, and caused many of the neighbouring Princes to arm against him: But the Fox fared never the worse for that; who did so order his affairs, that he did both clear his own Country of those Enemies which on the Pope's curse had come in against him, and settled Sicily more firmly in obedience to him. Since which time this Island hath belonged to the House of Arragon, but not always in possession of the Kings thereof, being a while governed as a State apart by its own Kings, whose succession followeth.  

Kings of Sicily of the House of Arragon.  
1 Pedro, or Peter the 3d. King of Arragon by birth, of Sicily in the right of his Wife, the choice of the people, and the Legacy of Corradinc, the last of the Royal line of Suevia, but principally by the power of the sword.  
2 James, the second son of Pedro, King of Sicily, after the death of his brother Alfonsus, succeeded in Arragon, to which Crown he added the I'll of Sardinia.  
3 Frederick, the brother of James, on his Brothers taking the Crown of Arragon, got possession of Sicily.  
4 Peter, or Pedro II. Son of Frederick.  
5 Frederick II.  
6 Peter, or Pedro III.  
7 Lewis, son to Peter III.  
8 Frederick III. in the life of Lewis, Duke of Athens, after his death succeeded in the Kingdom of Sicily.  
9 Martin, son to Martin the first, King of Arragon, succeeded in the right of his wife Blanch, daughter of Frederick the third, and dying without issue gave the Kingdom unto Martin his Father.  
10 Martin II. of Sicily, and the first of Arragon, of which last he was King by birth, and of the former by the gift of his son. After which time the I'll of Sicily being again united to the Crown of Arragon, was never separated from it, except it were when John King of Arragon gave it to Ferdinand his son, the better to fit him for the bed of Isabel Princess of Casbile, with whom the match was then in treaty; and when the Emperor Charles the fifth gave it, with Naples, unto Philip his eldest son, on his Marriage with Mary Qu. of England, who thereupon was styled King of Naples, Sicily, and Jerusalem. But this held only for a year; his Father dying shortly after, and resigning to him all his Kingdoms, whereby it became joined to Spain again.   
The Revenues of this Kingdom are by some said to be but 800000, but as others say, a Million of Ducats; most of which is again disbursed on the entertainment of the Viceroy, and the defence of the Island. The Arms are Arragon, 2 Flanches Argent, charged with as many Eagles Sable, beaked Gules.  
This Island for the number of its Nobility compares with Naples, as having in the time of Ortelius, 80 years ago, 
Sardinia.  7 Princes, 4 Dukes, 13 Marquesses, 14 Earls, 1 Viscount, 48 Barons; men of authority and power in their several Territories, and therefore not permitted to live much in the Island, the greatest part of their time being spent in the Court of Spain; but more to satisfy that King upon reason of State, than any affection of their own to so long an exile. And for the Government of the Church, Here are Arch-Bishops 3. Bishops 9   

The Kingdom of SARDINIA.  
THe Island and Kingdom of SARDINIA lieth West from Sicily, from the nearest point whereof called Cape Boii, or Cape Coro, it is distant about 200 miles. It is in length 180 miles, 90 in breadth, 560 in the circuit; and is situate under the 4th Climate, the longest day being 14 hours.  
In the time of Aristotle it was called Ichnusa, next Sandaliotis, from the resemblance which it hath to a man's shoe or Sandals; and finally Sardinia from Sardus the son of Hercules, who coming out of afric possessed the same. For this there is sufficient authority amongst the Ancients. Of the first names saith Pliny in as plain terms as may be, that Timaeus called Sardima Sandaliotis, and Myrsilus, Ichnusa, from the similitude which it hath to the Shoe-sole, or impression of a man's Foot on the ground; Sardiniam Timaeus, Sandaliotin appellavit, ab effigie soleae; Myrsilus Ichnusam à similitudine vestig●i. And for the last nothing can be more plain than that of Pausanias, who tells us that the first who came by shipping into Sardinia, were certain Africans under the conduct of Sardus the son of Maceris, whom the Egyptians called by the name of Hercules; who coming into this Island then called Ichnusa, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, caused it after his own name to be called Sardinia. For further evidence whereof, the people in the Latin tongue are called Sardi; the adjoining Sea, Mare Sardoum. And to this name it was so constant, that no following Plantations from other Cowtries, were ever able to alter it. Some Companies of Attica, led by jolaus, came and settled here, where they built Olbion and Agryllis, leaving a memory of jolaus their Captain in some places, which remained in the time of Pausanias, called jolaia; and taking to themselves for his sake, the name of jolatonses. And after the destruction of Troy, some of that scattered Nation came and planted in some void parts of the Island, kept to themselves the name of Ilienses, and by that name are mentioned both by Pliny and Livy. But neither of these Nations did attempt the change of the name, because not of ability to suppress or out-power the Natives. Nor could the Carthaginians do it, though a more puissant Nation than the former were, and such as by the nearness of their habitation (Sardinia being distant but 160 miles from afric) had all advantags to make (as at last they did) a full Conquest of it; building therein the Cities of Charmis, Chalaris, and ●ulchi; and holding it until it was unjustly extorted from them by the Romans, at the end of the first Punic War; at what time Carthage was in danger to be ruined by the revolt of her own Mercenaries, and so not able to resist.  
But of the name and first Plantations of this Island we have said enough. Let us now look upon the place; in which it is reported that there is neither Wolf nor Serpent, neither venomous nor hurtful Beast, but the Fox only, and a little Creature like a Spider, which will by no means endure the light of the Sun, except held by violence. Some Pools it hath, and those very plentiful of Fish, but generally so destitute of Riverwater, that they are fain to keep the rain which falls in Winter for their use in Summer. By means whereof, and for that there is no passage for the Northern Winds, being obstructed by the high Mountains near Cape Lugudoni, the Air is generally unhealthy, if not pestilential: Insomuch that Tally writing to his Brother Quintus being then in this Island, adviseth him to remember, as in point of health, that he was in Sardinia; and speaking of Tigellius, a Sardinian born, saith of him, that he was more pestllent than the Country which bred him.  
The soil is very fertile in respect of Corsica, but barren if compared with Sicil; which yet may rather be imputed to the want of good manuring in the Husbandman, than any natural defect in the soil itself. Well stored with all sorts of cattle, as appears plainly by that plenty of Chief and Hides which are sent hence yearly into Italy and other places. The Horses hereof, hot, headstrong, and hard to be broken, but will last long: The Bullocks naturally amble, so that the Countryman rideth them as familiarly as they do in Spain on Mules and Asses. Here is also the B●ast called Muf●ones, or Muscriones, found in Corsica also, but in no other part of Europe, somewhat resembling a Stag, but of so strong an hide, that it is used by the Italians in stead of Armour: Of the skins of which carried to Cordova in Spain, and there dressed, is made the right Cordovan Leather. Finally, here is an Herb, of which if one eat, it is said that he will die with laughter: Whence came the Proverb, Risus Sardonicus. The truth of which report I shall not dispute, though it be by others more prebably conjectured, that the Herb being of a poisonous nature, causeth men to die with such a Convulsion or attraction of Sinews, that they seem to grin, or laugh at the time of their death.  
The people are small of stature, of complexion inclining unto swarthiness, and that either by reason of the heat of the Sun, or more probably from their African extraction, their behaviour much participating of that people also. So slothful in the times of the Romans, that they were grown into a Proverb, and a Law made to compel them to work; but now esteemed a very painful and laborious Nation. Much given to hunting, and so prone to Rebellion, that the Spaniard permitteth no Cutler to live among them; yet peaceable amongst themselves, and in some measure courteous unto Strangers also. Their language a corrupt Catalonian; their diet on meats common and gross; their apparel in the Towns (especially that of the women) gorgeous, in the Villages sordid.  
In matters of Religion they are little curious. That which they make most show of, is according to the Rites and Doctrines of the Church of Rome; which both their neighbourhood to the Pope, and their subjection to the Spaniard, have imposed upon them. But in their practice of it they are loose enough, going to Mass on Sundays and Saints days, which done, they fall to dancing in the midst of the Church, singing in the mean times songs too immodest for an Alehouse. Nay, it is thought that their Clergy itself is the most rude, ignorant, and illiterate of any people in Christendom, saying their Masses rather by rote, than reason, and utterly unable to give any account of their Religion.  
It is divided commonly into two parts, viz. Cape Lugudore, towards Corsica, and Cape Cagliari, towards afric: the first the least, and withal mountainous and barren; the last the larger, level, and by much more frutifull. Chief Cities of the whole, 1. Calaris, first built by the Carthaginians, and situate in that point of the Island which lieth nearest to afric; which from hence took the name of Cape Cagliari, by which it is at this day called. A City of such fame when it was first taken by Gracchus for the use of the Romans, that it is called by Florus, Urbs Urbium, and was destroyed by the said Gracchus, the better to disable the Natives from rebelling against the Conquerors. Being new built again in more settled times, it was a second time destroyed by the Saracens; and finally rebuilt and beautified by the Pisans, at such time as they were Masters of this part of the Island. Very well fortified by Nature, as seated on the top of an hill, and hath under it a spacious and goodly Haven much frequented by Merchants. The Town if self adorned with a beautiful Temple, being the See of an Archbishop, many fair Turrets, and the constant residence of the Viceroy, from whose authority it is exempt by especial privilege, as to the legal Government of it, and ordered by a Common Council of its own Citizens. 2. Bossa, on the West side of the Island, another Arch-episcopall See. 3. S. Reparata on the North, looking towards Corsica. 4. Aquilastro, on the Western shores. 5. Sassari, a Town of consequence, where they have an Aqueduct twelve miles long, reaching from thence unto S. Gaivius. 6. Alghes-Bosa, a good Town, situate in a wholesome air, and a fertile soil, and having a fair Haven of six miles in length, in which the ships of Genoa and Catalonia do most commonly ride. 7. Orestagne, a large Town, but very ill peopled, by reason of a bad air which proceeds from the Fens, the Country about which gives title to the Marquis of Orestagne. 8. Turrita, once a Roman Colony, now little better than a ruin; yet giving title to the third Archbishop of this Island, who is called in Latin Turritanus. Here are also in divers parts of this Island the remainders of sundry Towers and Forts, which the people call Noracks, from Nora, one of the sons of Gerton, who (as they think) came into this Country, and built the first dwelling or mansion in it. And this Tradition of the Vulgar hath so much in it of Historical and undoubted truth, that certain Colonies from Spain came and planted here, under the conduct of one Nora; somewhat before the expedition of the Atticks under jolaus, as Pausanias testifieth.  
This Island taken by the Romans from the Carthaginians, as before is said, was first under the immediate Jurisdiction of the Praefect of the City of Rome: but after by Justinian was made a Province of his new Diocese of afric; and as a part thereof, or rather an Appendix to it, was challenged, invaded, and finally conquered by the Saracens, Ano. 807. From them recovered by the joynt-forces of the Pisans and Genoese, who divided it betwixt them: the Southern part, called Cape Cagliari, being allotted to the Pisans, and the Northern towards Corsica, to those of Genoa. But the Genoese not content with the partage, their portion of the Island being less in quantity, and worse in quality, began to quarrel with the Pisans, and at the last to break into open wars. To part the Fray, Pope Boniface the 8th. bestowed it on James King of Arragon, who driving thence the Genoese, Ano. 1324. became Master of it. The Aragonian before that did pretend some Title to it, in right of the Kingdom of Sicil then in his possession, to some preceding Kings whereof it had once been subject: and having backed that Claim by the Pope's Donation, who challenged it as a part of S. Peter's Patrimony, incorporated it for ever to the Crown of Arragon. Once indeed it was offered unto Anthony of Bourbon, in exchange for his Title to Navarre, but without any purpose of performance; that being only a device to fetch him off from the party of the Reformed in France, to which he formerly adhered; and was as suddenly laid by, as it had done the feat intended in the Proposition.  
The Government hereof is by a Viceroy, who resides at Calaris, and must of necessity be a Spaniard, under whom are two Deputy Governors Spaniards also; the one for Cape Caliari, the other for Cape Lugudori. Inferior Officers of command may be of the Natives. What profits arise hence to the Crown of Spain, 
LAND of the Church.  I have no where found. The Arms hereof are said to be Or, a Cross G●●●s, betwixt four Saracens heads Sable, curled Argent. Which Arms were given upon the taking of it from the power of the Moors: but first taken (as some say) for the Arms of Arragon, on occasion of the heads of four chief Princes of the Moors which were found severed from their Bodies in the battle of Alcoraz, Ano. 1094. won by Don Pedro King of Navarre and Arragon.  
There are divers small Lands about Sardinia, as, 1. Isola Rossa, herebefore called Phintunis. 2. The Isle of Hercules, now called Asinaria. 3. S. Peter, anciently Hiernoum, or Accipitrum, with others of as little note: all which, as the Appendants of Sardinia, do belong to the Spaniard.  
There are in this Island,  
Archbishops 3. Bishops 15.   

The Land of the CHURCH.  
WEst of the Realm of Naples lieth the LAND OF THE CHURCH, extended North and South from the Adriatic to the Tuscan Seas: bounded on the North-East with the River Trontus, on the Southeast with the Axofenus, by which two parted from that Kingdom; as on the North-West by the river Po, and Fiore, by which separated from the State of Venice; and on the South-West with the river Piseo, by which it is divided from the Modern Tuscany, or the State of the Florentine. By this Account the Pope's dominion taketh up the whole middle of Italy, having in breadth from the one Sea unto the other above one hundred miles, and in the length above three hundred. By which advantages it lieth most fi●ly for the command of all the rest, it being very easy for the Popes to convey their forces by Sea or Land into what part thereof they please. And were it not, that the Popes commonly are of several factions, and that the Successor pursueth not the designs of his Predecessors, but hath his own ends to himself, which for the most part are driven on without consideration of increasing the public Patrimony, it is not possible but that the Pope long before this time had been Lord of all. And this may be conceived the rather, considering the extraordinary fertility of the soil, able to spare provisions for the greatest Armies; the multitudes of people which it may afford, in regard they are so seldom consumed by wars; and that the men of this Dominion (but chiefly those of Rome, and the parts adjoining) are conceived to be the best Soldiers of Italy, as retaining some sparks of their Ancestors valour, together with their gravity, magnificence, and a certain greatness of courage, which seems to be particular to them of this Nation. And they preserve also to this day so much of the ancient Roman, as to prefer any kind of life before Trades or Merchandise. For though their Lands be very well tilled, and their Vines well dressed, and all things done exactly in the way of Husbandry: yet for their Manufactures they are brought from other places, as Venice, Naples, Florence, Genoa. And though they have the Sea on both sides, and the advantage of many fair and commodious Rivers and Havens, which with little cost might he made very useful: yet do they no way improve their fortunes, or the public Patrimony in the way of Traffic; which is the main defect of the Papal Polity, and filleth a rich Country full of poor and indigent persons. But to proceed to the description of the Pope's estate, it containeth the Provinces of 1. Romandiola, 2. Marca Anconit●na, 3. the Territory of Ferrara, 4. Ducato Spoletano, 5. S. Peter's Patrimony, and 6. Compagna di Roma.  
1. ROMANDIOLA extendeth from the Rubicon East, to the Venetians on the West; and from the Apennine on the South, to Padus and the Adriatic on the North. It was called anciently Flaminia, from Flaminius the Roman Consul, who having won it from the Galls, planted Colonies in it, and had the honour (though he pursued this war against the will of the Senate) to have it called by his own name: and for the better passage betwixt Rome and this, made a very large Causey, which for a long time was called Via Flaminia.  
The chief Cities of it are, 1. Bononia, (or Boulogne) seated in a spacious plain near the Apennine hills, a very populous City, of a round form, and a great circuit: the building antic, seeming for the most part to be the work of the Lombard's; the foundation of the houses of Freestone, the rest of Bricks; built with Arched Cloisters towards the street, under which one may walk dry in the greatest rain. A City honoured with many Palaces of the neighbouring Nobles, the chief University of Italy, and the retiring place of the Popes. The Civil Law is much studied here, insomuch that from hence proceeded the famous Clvilians, Johannes Andreas, Az●, Bartolus, and Socin●s. I believe they have built Castles in the air, which ascribe the founding of this University to Theodosius the 2d. The Charter of this foundation dated Ano. 423. is an idle and foolish thing. For there it is said, that at the institution there were present Gualther Earl of Poitiers, Ambassador for the King of England; and Baldwin Earl of Flanders, for the King of France: when at that time, neither those Earldoms, or those Kingdoms were in rerum natura. It is fituate on the river Aposa, and was by former Writers called Felsina. Near unto this Town in a Demy-Iland called Forcelli, was that meeting between Augustus, 
Romandiola.  Antony, and Lepidus, wherein they agreed on the Triumvirate, dividing the Empire and City of Rome, among themselves: Which combination was confirmed by the ensuing Proscription; wherein, that they might be revenged on Cicero, Lepidus proscribed his Brother; Antonius, his Uncle. 2. Rimini, anciently called Ariminum, seated on the mouth of the River Rubicon, which in those times divided Italy from Gaul: upon the bank whereof near unto this Town, there was an old Marble Pillar having on it a Latin Inscription to this purpose, viz. Leave here thy Colours, and lay down thine Arms, and pass not with thy Forces beyond the Rubicon; whosoever goeth against this command, let him be held an Enemy to the people of ROME: Which Rule when Caesar had transgressed, and surprised this City, he so frighted Pompey and his faction, that they abandoned Italy and Rome itself, and withdrew themselves into Epirus. It is said that Caesar dreamt the night before, that he carnally knew his own Mother: whereby the Soothsayers gathered, that he should be Lord of Rome, which was the common Mother of them all. Which dream, and several prodigies happening at the same time with it, did so encourage him in his enterprise, that he is said, at the passing over Rubicon, to have said these words, Eamus, quo nos Div●m monita, etc. Let us go, whether the sins of our Enemies, and the prodigies of the Gods do call us. In memory of which venturous, but fortunate action, he caused a monument to be erected in this City, with his name and Titles. It was anciently a Roman Colony, and in the bustles happening betwixt the Pope and the Emperor, was seized on by the Malatesti, as Bononia was by the Bentivoli, two potent Families of these parts; who held them in defiance of the Powers of Rome, till they were reduced again unto the Church by Pope Julio the second. 3. Cervia, on the Adriatic Sea, where there is made so much Salt, that they furnish therewith all their neighbours of Marca Anconitana, and a great part of Lombardie: the Pope receiving for his Customs of this one commodity, no less than 60000. Crowns per annum. 4. Furliis, (called of old Forum Livii) one of the Towns belonging properly to the Exarchate of Ravenna, seated in a very pleasant air, and a fruitful soil, betwixt two fresh streams; of which the one is called Ronchus, and the other Montonus. 5. Faventia, now called Faenza, on the banks of Anemus, a calm gentle River; an ancient City, but well peopled; much benesited by the Flax which groweth in the adjoining fields, and the Earthen Vessels which they vend to most parts of Italy. It was first given unto the Popes by Desiderius the last King of the Lombard's, whom they but sorrily requited for so great a courtesy. 6. Sarsina, an old City, seated at the foot of the Apennine, the birth place of Plautus the Comedian. 7. Imola, anciently called Forum Cornelii; and 8. Cesena, Cities both of them of no small Antiquity; but this last the fairer built, the better peopled, and the more strongly fortified. 9 Ravenna, once beautified with one of the fairest Havens in the world, and for that cause made the Road of one of the two Navies, which Augustus kept always manned to command the whole Empire of Rome: the other riding at Misenus in Campania. This of Ravenna, being in the upper Sea, awed and defended Dalmatia, Greece, Crete, Cyprus, Asia, etc. the other at Misenus, in the lower Sea, protected and kept under France, Spain, afric, Egypt, Syria, etc. The walls of this City are said to have been built or repaired by Tiberius Caesar; the whole City to have been much beautified by Theodoricus King of the Goths, who built here a most stately and magnificent Palace, the ruins whereof are still easily discernible. The private buildings are but mean, the public ones are of a grave, but stately structure. Of which the principal heretofore was the Church of S. Mary's the Round, whose roof was of one entire stone, and honoured with the rich Sepulchre of the said King Theodorick: which the soldiers (in the sack of this City by the French) pulled down, together with the Church itself, only to get the Jewels and Medals of it. The principal at the present, is the Church of S. Vitalis, the pavement whereof is all of Marble, and the walls all covered with precious stones of many sorts, but unpolished as they were taken out of Mines, which showeth as well the magnificence as Antiquity of it. The Patriarches of this City, in regard it was so long the Regal and Imperial Seat, have heretofore contended for precedency with the Popes themselves: this City having been anciently the Metropolis of the Province called Flaminia, afterwards honoured with the Seat of the Emperor Honorius, and his successors; next of the Gothish Kings; then of the Exarches; and last of its Patriarches. And it was chosen for this purpose, because of the plentiful Territory, since covered with water, and the conveniency of the Haven, at this day choked: though lately by expense of a great deal of treasure, the Fens about the City have been very much drained, and the Bogs in some places turned to fruitful Fields, to the great benefit hereof both for health and pleasure.  
As for the Exarches, who had their residence in this City, they were no other than the Vice-Roys or Lieutenants of the Eastern Emperors. Concerning which we are to know, that the Kingdom of the Goths in Italy was no sooner destroyed by Narses, but the Lombard's entered. To give a stop to whose successes, and preserve so much unto the Empire as was not already conquered by them, it was thought good by Justine the second, to send thither an Imperial Officer of principal command and note, whom he honoured with the title of Exarch. His residence settled at Ravenna, as standing most commodiously to hinder the incursions of the barbarous Nations; and withal to receive such aids from the Eastern parts, as his occasions did require. These Exarches having divided Italy into many Governments, appointed over each some supreme Commander, dignified with the name of Dukes. And even the City of Rome it self (so far then was it from being subject to the Pope in Temporal matters) had a chief Officer of this kind (accountable to the Exaro●, 
Romandiola.  and subordinate to him) whose Government was called the Roman Dukedom. They which they kept unto themselves, as their own peculiar, contained the Cities of Ravenna, Rbegium, Mutina, Bononia, Classi, Forli, F●●limpoli, Sarcino, Parma, and Placentia: which ten Cities with the Territories belonging to them, made up that District, which properly was called the Exarchate of Ravenna, much mentioned in the Histories of the middle times, by reason of the continual wars which they had with the Lombard's; but newly entered when this Magistracy had its first beginning. The names of these Exarches are as followeth.  

The Exarches of Ravenna.  
A. C.  
570. 1 Longinus. 21.  
591. 2 Smaragdus. 4.  
595. 3 Romanus Patricius.  
596. 4 Callinicus. 13.  
609. 5 Smaragdus. 3.  
612. 6 Joh. Lamigius. 4.  
616. 7 Elentherius. 5.  
621. 8 Isaacus Patricius. 24.  
645. 9 Theod. Calliopa. 10.  
655. 10 Olympius. 2.  
657. 11 Theod. Calliopa. II. 30.  
687. 12 Joh. Plotina. 15.  
702. 13 Theophilactus. 25.  
727. 14 Paulus.  
728. 15 Eutipenus. 12. In the days of this Exarch, Ravenna was taken from the Empire, by Luitprandus King of the Lombard's, Ano. 740. but regained by Charles the Great, and by him given to the Bishops of Run, together with Anconitana and Spoleto: as a requital for the Kingdom of France, confirmed unto King Pepin his Father by the consent and authority of the Popes. The donation of this Exarchate to the Popes, partly to blot out the memory of the Exarches, and partly to make the people obedient to those Prelates, changed the name of the Country from Flaminia (by which name it was formerly known) to Romad●diola, and now to Romagna. Notwithstanding which Donation, or Original Grant, the Popes enjoyed not long the possession of it; the Emperors of Germany, and their Vice-gerents in Italia, wresting it by strong hand out of the possession of the Church, and giving it to such as deserved well of them, and were most likely, or most able to uphold their Faction. And so it stood, till the last Pope's conspiring with the French Kings, Lewis the twelfth and Francis the first, brought them into Italy: and by their aids, and by the censures of the Church, so prevailed in fine, that they extorted Ravenna, and some other places out of the hands of the Venetians, erected many petit Princes out of other Cities, which they pretended to belong to S. Peter's Patrimony▪ and thereby got possession of all those Territories which lie betwixt the State of Venice, and the Marches of Ancona.   
2. The Territory of FERRAARA lieth in the very skirts of Romandiola towards the Venetian, extending one hundred and sixty miles in length, and about fifty in breadth; the soil thereof exceeding rich, but subject to the overflowings of the River Po, which makes the air in many places to be somewhat unwholesome. And though as well the former Dukes as the Popes who are now Lords hereof, have been at great charge in raising high Banks and Ramparts to keep in the waters; yet could not this resist the violence of the River, falling from so high a Springs, and seconded with so great Land-floods (as sometimes it is) but that it makes many breaches in them, do they what they can. The places of most note herein, are 1. Graffignan in the borders of Tuscany near the Apennine. 2. Carpi, a place of great importance, sea●ed in the midst of this Dukedom; belonging heretofore to the House of the Pic●, but partly by exchange made with Marcus Pieus, partly for one hundred thousand Crowns in ready money, given unto Lionel Pico, once the Lords hereof, it was by Charles the 5th. incorporated into this estate. 3. Commachia, seated in the Marshes of the Adriatic, from which the Princes of this Family of Este, were at first called only Lords of Commachia; a place which yielded great profit to the former Dukes by the fishing of Eels. 4. Saxole, given by Duke Alphonso in exchange for Carpi. Here is also the Territory and Lordship of the Polesine, the cause of so many quarrels and contentions between the ancient Dukes of Ferrara, and the State of Vonice. But the chief honour of this Dukedom, it in the Capital City, that which denominates the whole, Ferrara; a City of five miles in compass, so called from the Iron Mines which are about it, commodiously seated on the River ●o, which by reason of its breadth, depth, and violent swiftness of the current, is a sufficient rampart to it on that side; the other fides being fortified with a strong wall, and a spacious mote. In the middle of the City is a fair and spacious Marketplace, into which do open on all fides about twenty streets, all of them half a mile in length, and all so straight and evenly built, that the furthest end of each of them may be easily seen. Near to this Marketplace is a little Island, in which the former Dukes had a stately Palace, called Belvedere, from the fair prospect which it had or gave to the whole City; and on the North side of the City a large Park for pleasure. The other houses are for the most part built of fair Freestone, not joining unto one another as in other Cities, but at a pretty distance with neat Gardens between. Ariosto, the Author of that ingenious Poem called Orlando Furios●, and Hierome Savaniarolo the Prophetical F●ier, were both of them Natives of this place: of which the first lieth here entombed, the last for preaching against the Pope was burnt at Florence.  
In the declining of the power and Empire of the Lombard's, 
Ferrara.  this City, together with Favenza, was given by Desiderius, their last King, to the Church of Rome, the better to oblige the Popes by so great a benefit. But being taken from them by the Emperors of the House of Schwaben, it was again recovered by the prowess of the Countess Mathildis, Ano. 1107. who took it, with many other Towns in Italy, from the Emperor Henry the 4th. and at her death conferred the same upon the Church. The Popes once more possessed hereof, and not able to hold it, gave it in Fee for ever unto Azo of the House of Este, a man of great sway in the affairs of Italy, who valiantly had defended it against Ezelinus' Vicegerent of Frederick the 2d. This was the first of this Family who had Ferrara in propriety: His Ancestors being called before the Marquesses of Este, and sometimes Marquesses of Ferrara, (but in title only) as Governors hereof in behalf of the Popes of Rome. Obizo the Grandchild of this first Azo, obtained of Rodolfus the first (who was willing to make what money he could of his lands in Italy) the Cities of Regium and Modena, that Grant confirmed by Guido Legate of Pope Benedict the ninth, with the Pope's consent, Ano. 1304. Other improvements there were made by the following Princes, according to the chance of war, but none of the●●ontinued constant in their possession, but these three Cities and the Territories adjoining to them. As for this Family de Esto, (Familia Atestina it is called in Latin) it took this name from Esto, or Atesto, a small Town in the Signory of Venice, conferred upon the Ancestors of this Azo, by Charles the Great. And for the chiefs or Princes of it, they have been men of great authority and power in their several times, commanding sometimes the Venetian Armies, and sometimes the Popes; great favourers of learned men, and advancers of learning, insomuch that the Renaldo's and Rogero's of Este, make up a great part of the Poems of Ariosto and Tasso, two of the greatest wits of Italy; and finally allied to many of the best Houses of Christendom. The Catalogue of whom since they were made the hereditary Lords and Princes of this noble City, I have here subjoined.  

The Dukes and Marquesses of Ferrara.  
1236. 1 Actius, or Azo de Este, the ninth of that name, but first hereditary Marquis of Ferrara, by the Grant of the Pope.  
1264. 2 Obizo, the sixth of that name, Grandsonne to Azo by his son Rinaldo, second Marquis of Ferrara.  
1293. 3 Azo the tenth of Este, and II. of Ferrara, son to Obizo.  
1308. 4 Francisco, brother to Azo the 2d. after whose death, Ano. 1312. Ferrara for a time was under the command of the Popes.  
1312. 5 Alobrandinus, brother of Franciscus, who had the Title to, but not the possession of Ferrara.  
1315. 6 Reinoldo the 3d. of Este, and the first of Ferrara, recovered Ferrara from the Pope, and cast out his Garrisons. 1317.  
1335. 7 Obizo II. brother of Reinaldo.  
1352. 8 Alabrandino II. son of Obizo.  
1361. 9 Nicolao the 2d. of Este, and first of Ferrara, brother of Alabrandino, whose children being young, he dispossessed of the Estate.  
1388. 10 Albertus, brother of Nicolas, the Founder of the University of Ferrara, Ano. 1392.  
1393. 11 Nicolas II. base son of Albertus.  
1441. 12 Leonellus the base son of Nicolas, in the minority of his brother Hercules, begot in lawful Wedlock, invaded the Estate, and held it.  
1450. 13 Borsius, another of the base sons of Nicolas 2d. succeeded Leonel in the Estate; who being made Duke of Mutina by Frederick the 3d. was by Pope Paul created Duke of Ferrara also, Ano. 1470.  
1471. 14 Hercules, the lawful son of Nicolas the 2d. made Knight of the Garter by King Edward 4th.  
1505. 15 Alphonso, the son of Hercules.  
1534. 16 Hercules' II. son of Alphonso.  
1559. 17 Alphonso II. who dying without lawful issue, Ano. 1595. Pope Clement the 8th. challenged this Estate in the right of the Church; and partly by force, partly by composition (whereof we shall say more when we come to Modena) united it for ever to the See of Rome.   
The yearly Revenues of this Dukedom were heretofore two hundred and fifty thousand Crowns; now not so much worth unto the Pope, by reason of the Alienation of Modena and Regio; of which more hereafter.  
The Arms of these Dukes (which for the honour of this noble and illustrious Family, and for the strangeness of the Coat, I shall here put down) were Palewise of three pieces, 1. Party per Fez, in the chief Or, an Eagle displayed Sable, membered, languid, and crowned Gules; and in Base Azure, three Flowers de Lys Or, within a Border indented Or and Gules. 2. Gules, two keys in Saltier, the one Or, the other Argent, charged in Fez with an Eschocheon of pretence Azure, supporting an Eagle of the third, membered and crowned of the second; over all in chief a Papal Crown Or, 
Anconitana, & Spoletano  garnished with sundry G●ms Azure and Purple. 3 The third as the first, counter-placed Which Coat upon the failing of the house of Ferrara, doth now belong to that of Modena and Reggio.  
2 MARCA ANCONITANA is bounded on the East with the River of Trontus or D●uentus, by which it is parted from Abruzzo; on the West, with the River Isaurus (now Foglio) which divides it from Rom●a●iola; on the South, with the Apennine Hills; on the North, with the Adriatic. It was formerly the dwelling of the Picentes, who possessed all these parts on the coast of the Adriatic, from the River Bubicon on the East, to that of Aufidus on the West. For aiding the Tarentines their Allies, in their war against Romo, they were invaded and subdued by the Romans, about five years before the first Punic war, under the conduct of Sempronius; at which time they were so great and multitudinous a nation, that they were numbered to amount to 360000, which were then brought under the command and vassilage of the Roman Empire. When Italy was divided into no more than eight Regions, these P●centes only made up one; so did they also when divided into eleven. Afterwards, in the time of the Antonini, they made up one of the sixteen Provinces into which Italy was divided by those Emperors; and the same repute it held in the time of Constantine; Picenum being always one: Asculum caput gentis, as Florus calls it, which was the head of their Nation, being the Metropolis of the Province. In the declining of the Empire it was first called Marcha F●rmians, from Firnio, once a Roman Colony, and at that time of most importance in the Country; but by transferring the chief seat from Firmo to Ancona in the time of the Lombard's, it came to have the name of Anconitana. The chief Rivers, besides those named already, which are only borderers, are, 1 Chientus, 2 Sentinus, and 3 Potentia; all rising in the Apennine, and passing with a swift course to the Adriatic.  
The chief Towns, 1 Ancona, seated on the Hill Cimmerius, shooting into the sea, glorying in giving name to the Province, and in her Haven built by Tra●an the Emperor, one of the fairest in the world, not so much for capacity, as the pleasantness and beauty of it; the descents down unto the water being made of Marble, and very delectable walking on all sides of it. The City itself is begirt with hills, on one of which Pope Clement the seventh built a very strong Castle, An. 1532. under pretence of defending the Town against the Turks, but indeed to keep the people in more full subjection, who till that time did yearly choose their own Magistrates, and lived according to their own Laws like a Commonwealth. 2 Recanatis (heretofore Aelia Recina) seated upon the banks of the River Mulsio, renowned for the great concourse of Merchants from all parts of Europe at her Annual Marts, and a vein of the most excellent Wines. 3 F●●mo, surnamed the Strong, in former times of most esteem in all the Province, which was hence called Marca Firmiana, and to this day a place of great strength, and consequence. 4 Macerata, now of most credit, by reason that the Pope's Legate keeps his residence there, and with him the Chancery for this Marquisate. 5 Loretto, called in Latin, Lauretana, a little City betwixt Recanati and the Sea; well fortified against the Turks and other Pirates who once spoilt the same, and might be easily tempted thither on the like occasions: The Church here being admirably rich, and frequented by Pilgrims from all parts, to pay their devotions unto our Lady of Loretto, and behold her Miracles. Concerning the removal of whose Chamber hither, in our description of Palestine, you shall meet with a very proper Legend. 6 Ascoli, surnamed the Fair, seated at the influx of the River Druentus, and on the furthest side of it towards Abruzzo, and so the furthest City Eastwards, of old called Asculum, conquered by the Romans, under the conduct of Sempronius, A. V. C. 685. Nigh unto this City, as Florus relateth, was fought the second battle between C. Fabricius and the Romans on the one side, and Pyrchus with the Epirots on the other; wherein the Victory fell to the King, having slain 6000 of his Enemies, yet with such apparency of valour and virtue in the Romans, that he could not but break forth into this acclamation; O quam facile esset orbem vincere, aut mihi, Romanis militibus; ant me rege, Romanis. This Town also was the seat of the War called Bellum sociale, raised by the people of Italy against the Romans; Popeidius being both Author of the Rebellion, and Captain. They, for a while, sorely shaked the state of Rome; but at last were vanquished, and this Town by Strabo Pompeius forced and spoilt. 7 Adria, now not otherwise famous, than that it gave denomination to the adjoining Sea, and the Emperor Adrian. 8 Humana, which last Town, together with Ancona, was given to Pope Zachary, by Luit prandus King of the Lombard's, about the year 741. The succeeding Popes after the giving of this Inch, took the whole Ell.  
Having surveyed the Provinces of the Church along the Adriatic, we must next cross the Apennine, which parts the Marches of Ancona from the Dukedom of SPOLETO (DUCATO SPOLETANO the Italians call it.) A Territory taking up the Western part of the Province of Umbria, so called, because being situate under the shade of the Apemine Hills, it was Regio umbrosa. Some give another reason of it, and think that the Inhabitants were called Umbri, quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as men that had escaped the Deluge; because so ancient a people, that no body could tell the original of them. But whatsoever was the reason of the name, they were a stout and valiant people, and gave the first check to Annibals' career, after his great Victory at Thrasimene, repalsing him with loss and shame from the walls of Spoleto. And for their Country, 
S. Peter's Patrimony.  which was this Region of Umbria (being one of the eleven into which Italy was divided by Augustus Caesar,) It hath on the East the River of Anio, or Aniene, dividing it from the East parts of Latium; on the West the Tiber; on the North, the Apennine; on the South, a reach or winding of the Tiber, and the main body of Latium. A Country it is of a mixed nature, equally composed of very rough hills, and yet most delectable valleys; exceeding plentiful of all necessaries, and much commended heretofore for the extraordinary foecunditie of the women. The Wine hereof is much commended by Martial, as the best of Italy.  
De Spoletanis quae sunt cariosa lagenis  
Malueris, quam si musta Falerna bibas.  
That is to say.  
If with Spoleto bottles once you meet,  
Say that Falerno Must is no so sweet.  
Here are said to have been once three hundred good Towns and Cities, all destroyed by the Tuscans. The principal of those now extant, are 1 Spoletum, built partly on the hill, and partly on the lower ground, the residence heretofore of one of the four Dukes of the Longobardians, who governed as Vice-Roys or Lord Precedents of the remoter parts of that Kingdom, from whence the Country round about it was called Ducato Spoletano. It is still a Town of good esteem, populous, and of handsome building, and hath a strong Fortress for defence thereof, built upon the ruins of an old Amphitheatre, to which men pass over a great bridge of stone, upheld by 24 great pillars, which joins two Mountains together, having between them a deep valley, but narrow and without any water. Theodorick the Goth built a fair Palace in this City, rebuilt by Narses, but since ruined. 2 Eugubium (now called Augubio) seated on the foot of the Apennine, in or near that place where anciently stood that City which Pliny calls juginium, Ptolemy, Isunium, utterly subverted by the Goths. A Town well seated in a fruitful and wealthy soil, and blessed with an industrious people. 3 Nuceria, in Pliny's time called Alfatenia, at the foot also of the Apennine; the people of which in former times much traded in their wooden vessel. 4 Assisium, or Assize, destroyed almost to nothing in the Civil Wars of Italy, and only famous at this time, in being the birthplace of S. Francis, the founder of the Franciscans, or Cordeliers, as the French call them; but we in England the Grey Friars. 5 Citta de Castello, anciently Tiphernum, on the banks of Tiber. 6 Tudertum, now called Todi, seated near the Tiber on the declivitie of a rich and fruitful hill.  
The rest of Umbria towards the East, not being within the compass of the Spoletane Dukedom, but under the command of the Popes of Rome, is by late Writers called SABINIA, because the dwelling in times passed of the ancient Sabines; but in the division of Italy made by Antoninus, it was called Nursia; and in that made by Constantine, it was contained within the new Province of Valeria, Reate being the Metropolis, or head City of both. A Territory of no great circuit, but abundantly Fruitful in Oil or Olives, Vines, and Figtrees; watered with the River Farfarus, which cutteth through the very midst of it, and with the Lake called anciently Lacus Velinus (now Lago di Pedeluco) esteemed to be the Centre or Navel of Italy by some ancient Writers; the waters of which are of such a nature, that in short time they will clothe a piece of wood with a coat of stone, and yet yieldeth excellent Trout, and other good Fish. The Towns and Cities of most note, are, 1 Reate (now called Riete) an ancient City, and the Metropolis heretofore of all this Tract, as well when it was called Nursia, as when it passed under the name of Valeria. 2 Nursia, a City no less ancient, seated amongst the Hills, which for the most part are covered with snow; from which Town, being heretofore of more reputation, the Province of Nursia, spoken of in the itinerary of Antoninus, took denomination. 3 Magliano, a pleasant and well-peopled Town, at this time the principal of this Territory. 4 Ocriculum, built amongst many Fruitful hills, a mile from Tiber. 5 Narnia, the Country and Birth-place of the Emperor Nerva, the first of all the Emperors not born in Rome, as after him there were few born in it. The soil about it is of so different and strange a nature, that it is said to be made dirty by the Sun and Winds, and dusty by Rain; the City is well-peopled, and a Bishops See, seated upon a very steep and craggy Hill, not far from the River Nar (now Negro) from which perhaps it took the name. A City given unto the Church of Rome by Luitprandus King of the Lombard's; of which the Popes of Rome having got possession, never left practising till they had got into their power all the rest of the Country. Little is famous else in the whole Region of Umbria, but that in the Western part thereof, is the Lake called Lacus Vademodius, near to Ameria, now called Amelia, a town of the Dukedom, where Dolabella overthrew such of the Galls as had escaped the sword of Camillus; Ne quis extaret in ea gente (saith the Historian) qui incensam à se Roman gloriaretur; a former slaughter being made by Camillus on the banks of Aniene, the Eastern limits of these Umbri.  
5 S. PETER'S PATRIMONY, properly and specially so called, is that part of Tuscanie, which appertains unto the Church; bounded upon the East with Tiber, which divides it from Latiuns, or Compagna di Roma; on the West, with the River Piseo, which falleth into the Sea near the Mountain of Argentario, and parteth it from the estate of the Duke of Florence; on the North, with the Apennine; on the South, with the Tuscan or Tyrrhenian Sea. It took this new name presently on the donation of the Countess Mathildis, who gave it for ever unto the Church, An. 110. Paschal the second sitting in the Chair of Rome, to be the Patrimony of S. Peter, 
Compagna di Roma.  and his successors in that See. A Country not inferior unto any in It tlie, for the fertility of the soil; but for the most part of an unhealthy Air, by reason of the frequent overflowings of Tiber, and the thick woods which hinder that the winds cannot purge and cleanse it.  
The principal Cities, and places of most observation, are 1 Periglias, formerly called Perusia; a famous Town, in which Augustus besieged L. Antonius the brother, and Fulvia the wife of M. Antony the Triunivir, who when they had in vain attempted to seduce Rome from his party, repaired to this City, which also at the last yielded to the more fortunate Emperor, who afterwards, having much adorned and beautified it, caused it to be called Augusta; but it returned not long after to its ancient name. It is seated very pleasantly on the banks of Tiber, not far from the Apennine, in a very rich and fruitful soil, well built both for the public and private structures; a Bishops See, and made an University An. 1090. In the distractions of Italy betwixt the Emperors and the Popes, this City was seized on by the Baillons, who held it as Vicars of the Church. The Oddies, an opposite Faction to them, having got together a strong party of Malcontents, so suddenly entered one night into the City, that the Baillons began to fly, nor was there any thing to hinder them from being masters of the Palace, but the chain which was drawn cross the gate. One of the soldiers going about to cut this chain, and wanting room to wield his arm, cried a loud, Give back; which words being heard, but not well understood by those furthest off, put them to their heels, and the foremost, which thought they fled not for nothing, ran-way too. So the City was saved. 2 Orvieto, seated on so high a Rock, that it is no small terror to look down from the top of it into the valleys beneath; in which there is a Church of a wondrous lightness, and yet the windows of the same (if we may credit Adrianus who reports it) are made of Albaster in stead of Glass. 3 Vite●bo, famous for the long residence of the Popes, at such time as they were affronted by the Roman Senators. 4 Civita Vecchia (called anciently Centumcellae) the only useful Haven that belongeth to Rome; which being ruined by the Saracens, was rebuilt by the Popes, new named, and ●ortified with a very strong Castle for the defence of their Shipping. 5 Porto, seated on the mouth of Tiber, over against Ostia; but cannot make one good Haven betwixt them both; a Bishops See, and one of the seven Cardinals which is always assistant to the Pope. 6 Farnese, the ancient seat and Patrimony of the Farnesis, now Dukes of Parma. 7 Bracciano, which gives the title of a Duke to a branch of the Ursins, a well-known Family of those parts. 8 Baechano, near the last in sound, although not in site: compassed round about with Hills, in the form of a Theatre, having a fair Lake in the midst, out of which runneth the River Cremera, near which the Fabii were slain.  
Here was in this Country also the City of the Veii, of great wealth and power, in a War against which, managed for the most part by the aforesaid Fabii, 306 of them were slain in a day; only one little child of them being left at home, who restored the House, and was the Ancestor of that Fabius Maximus who preserved Italy in the Wars with Annibal. Of which great slaughter, thus faith Ovid:— Veientibus Arvis 
Ter centum Fabii, ter cecidere duo.  
On the Veientine plain  
Three hundred and six Fabii were slain.  This City of the Veii was at last, after a ten years' siege, taken by Furius Camillus, and by him leveled with the earth, because he found that the common people of Rome had a mind to leave their own City, and inhabit here. Here is also that fatal River of Allia, nigh unto which Brennus and his Galls, being drawn into Italy by the sweet taste of the Italian wines, slaughtered the Romans. The Roman Army consisted of 40000 Soldiers, most of them being raw and unexperienced. The Galls were not more in number, but were naturally of a fierce and ha●dy courage, and withal so big-boned, that it seemeth they were born to be the terror of mankind, and the ruin of Cities. Having won the day, the Barbarians march towards Rome, forsaken of its chiefest strength; the Capitol only being manned by Manlius; which also they had mastered if the geese had not been more vigilant than the Watch. When they had failed of this enterprise, they began a treaty with the Fathers of the Town, agreeing with them for a thousand pound weight of Gold to forsake the City: But before the delivery of this money, they were assaulted and vanquished by Camillus; who for this is called Rome's second Founder. The overthrow at Allia, and the vanquishment of the Fabii, happened in one day, though in diver, years, which was therefore by the old Romans put among the unfortunate days; they never on that day attempting any business of importance. The like custom, whether on superstition, or fear of ill luck, is used by many Christians; and especially on Childermas day; wherein Philip de Comines telleth us, that Lewis the 11. used not to debate any matter; but accounted it a sign of some great misfortune towards him, if any man communed with him of his affairs; and would be marvailously displeased with those that were near him, if they troubled him with any matter whatsoever.  
And finally, here is the famous Lake called Thrasimene (now Lago di Peruga, from the nearness of it to that City) where Annibal slew Flaminius the Consul, and 15000 of his Romans; which sight continued three hours, with so great an eagerness, that the Soldiers perceived not a terrible Earthquake which at that time happened.  
6 COMPAGNA DI ROMA, 
Compagna di Roma.  containeth that part of Italy which anciently was called Latium, the habitation of the Latins, and seat of Rome; so called for that it is adjoining to that Famous City, as the more proper Territory, and precinct thereof. It is sometimes also called Campania nova, to difference it from Campania properly so called, the seat and dwelling of the Campans. It is bounded on the East with the said Campania, from which it is parted by the River Axofenus; on the West, with Tiber; on the North, with Umbria, or the new Ducato Spoletano, and Sabinta; and on the South with the Tyrrhenian or Tuscan sea: and came unto the Popes by no other Title than as they had the sovereignty and possession of the City of Rome, to which it always did belong.  
The chief place of it in old times was the City of Alba, than the seat-royal of the Latin, or Silvian Kings, ruined by Tullus Hostilius the third King of Rome; in which war Rome and Alba being laid at the stake, the whole action was committed by the Romans to the Horatij, to the Curatii by the Alban, being three Brethren of each side; in which it happened that two of the Horatij were first slain, and the third counterfeiting a flight severed his Enemies, and so slew them; whereby the Alban ever after became subject to Rome. 2 Lavinium, built by Aeneas in honour of his wife Lavinia. 3 Antium, honoured many times with the seat and retirement of the Emperors; the Country round about affording variety of Recreations. The people once very strong in shipping, till the taking of the Town by Maevius a Roman Consul, who having broke their Forces at sea, brought with him into Rome the Beaks of their ships and other vessels, with which he decked and beautified the Pulpit for Orations (in the common Forum) which have generally ever since been called Rostra. This was the chief City of the ancient Volsci, a people very strong in shipping, though without an Haven; afterwards much frequented by the principal Romans in their retirements from the City; so that for pompous and stately buildings it might compare with any other. Out of the ruins of this Town long ago destroyed, sprang the new City called Neptunum, situate on a rock near unto the sea, the steepness of which gives it natural strength enough, and yet it is Fortified besides with two strong Castles, surveying the sea, and commanding the shore. 4 Ardea, the chief Town of the Lentuli, and seat of Turnus the Rival and Competitor of Aeneas; afterwards taken by Superbus the last King of the Romans; to which when the Galls had taken Rome, the miserable Citizens were compelled to fly. 5 Gabii, taken also by the same Superbus, whose son Sextus counterfeiting some dislike or his Father's cruelties, fled to the Gabii, by whom improvidently entrusted with the command of their City, which he betrayed unto the Romans. 6 Ostia, anciently the Port-Town to Rome, built at the mouth of Tiber, by Ancus Martius, the 4th King of Rome; but the Haven hath been long since dammed up, to stop the passage of the Enemy's ships unto the City. The Bishop of this Town useth to consecrate the Pope. 7 Praeneste, first conquered by the Romans under Qu. Cincinnatus the Dictator. Nothing so much endamaged this City as its natural and artificial Fortifications; for when the Romans in the times of sedition abandoned the Town, they used to make this place their refuge. Among others, Marius the younger made it the seat of war against L. Sylla, but perceiving the unsuccessfulness of his affairs, here killed himself; and Sylla entering it as Conqueror, put 12000 of the Citizens to the sword. It hath since been so often sacked, that it is very short now of its former lustre; but still it holds the reputation of a Bishops See. 8 Tibur, an ancient City also, and seated in an healthy Air. It is now called Trivolis, where there is a Fountain, which with Artificial Engines moved with water, representeth the notes of divers Birds. A device very rare (it seemeth) in the time of Adrianus, who reporteth it; but now grown ordinary. In the perfection of which Art, as almost all Civil Nations may pretend a share, so I conceive that the priority herein doth belong of right unto the French, whose Masterpieces in this kind do far exceed the rest of Europe: For in the King's house at St. Germains, seven miles from Paris (if it be lawful for me to digress a little on this Argument) one may behold the Statue of a Nymph, sitting before a pair of Organs, whose fingers by the help of water, are taught to manage the Keys in so due an order, and the instrument to yield such a Music to it, as comes exceeding near the Organ, if it be not the same; her head in the mean time jolting from one shoulder to another, like an old Fiddlers at a Wake; there being also not far off the counterfeits of divers Mills, who very busily plied their work till the Music sounded, and then stood still as if enchanted with the noise. In another place, upon the drawing of a Curtain, one may see two Tritons riding on their Dolphins in a Sea of water, each of them with a shell in his hand, which enterchangably and in turns served in stead of Trumpets: In a third, the story of Perseus and Andromeda most lively acted; and in a fourth, Orpheus in sylvis positus, Orpheus playing on a Viol, the Trees moving, and the wild Beasts dancing in two rings about him, by the artificial guidance of the waters only; the pretty Birds in every place so chirping out their several and respective notes, that the hearer would conceive himself to be in some pleasant Grove. But it is time to go from Trivoli to 9 Velitri (called anciently Velitrae, and then a City of the Volsci) famous for the birth of the Emperor Augustus, and the dwelling of the Octavian Family; a place most delectably seatedamongst the Vines, which yield as rich Wines as most in Italy. 10 Anxur, so called of the Temple which was here dedicated to Jupiter, surnamed Anxurus, that is, Beardless; first built by the Spartans', who flying from the severity of Lycurgus his Laws, did here seat themselves; after, a Colony of the Volsci, and after of the Romans. But this town being destroyed by the tyranny of time, there started up Taracina in the place thereof, seated upon a M●●ntain, but near the Sea, which it 〈◊〉 like a Half Moon (it is now called the Bay of Mola) this City lying on the one horn thereof, 〈◊〉 the very extremity of the Pope's Dominions; and that of Caseta on the other, which is the first Port-Town of the Realm of Naples. The Country hereabouts hath most pleasant Orchards, of Citrons, Oranges, and Lemons; the Oranges having at the same time both ripe and green Fruits, and represents a kind of Summer in the dead of Winter. Such other things as are remarkable in this Campagna (heretofore called Latium) but more by what they have been, than they are at the present, are 1 Tusculum, a village which belonged to Tully, who here composed his excellent Book called the Tusculan Questions. 2 Formiae, built by the Laconians, heretofore the delight and solace of the ancient Romans, now visible only in its ruins. 3 Pr●vernum, once the chief City of the Volsci, and the seat of Camilla, a noble Amazonian Lady, who aided Turnus the Rutilian in his sharp war against Aeneas and the Trojans, where she lost her life. 4 Circe, an old City (in the place whereof now stands S. Felix) the habitation of Circe, that so much celebrated Sorceress, of whom, and her chanting of Ulysses and his companions, there is so much upon record in the ancient Poets. Near to which is the head-land called the Circaean Promontory, the repercussion of the Waves by whose Southern Basit, makes a dreadful noise, and gave occasion to the fabulous inventions of the roaring of Lions, ho●ling of Dogs, etc. which were heard about that Witches dwelling.  
But the great glory of Latium, and indeed of Italy, was that the famous City of Rome was seated in it, being built on the East side of Tiber, now much enlarged by the increase of 42 le●●er streams or Rivers. It is distant from the sea about 15 miles, first built, as Friar Leander a great Italian Antiquary is of opinion, by Roma, Daughter or Wife to one of the Latin Kings. But being forsaken and forlorn, by reason of the unwholesome air coming from the Fens, was rebuilt by Romulus, much pleased with the natural strength of the situation, and therefore like to make a good town of war. And this tradition I should rather subscribe unto, than that it was called Rome from Romulus; who had he pleased to challenge the honour to himself, might better have caused it to be called Romulea (of which name there was a Town among the Samnites) than to call it Roma. But whatsoever greatness it did after come to, it was small enough (God knows) at first; the City comprehending the Mount Palatine only, and therefore not a m●le in compass; the Territory not extending, as Strabo witnesseth, above six miles from the City; and the Inhabitants thereof at the first general Muster amounting at the most to 3300 men. So inconsiderable they were as well in quality as numbers, that their neighbours thought it a disparagement to bestow their daughters on them; and therefore they were fain to get themselves wives by a slight of wit; proclaiming solemn Plays and Pastimes to be held in Rome, and ravishing the women which came thither to behold the sports. The Kings succeeding much enlarged it. Mount Aventine, and the hill Janiculum on the other side of the water being walled and added to it by Ancus Martius; as Quirinalis, Esquilinus, and Viminalis, were by Servius Tullus; Capitolinus and Mount Coelius came not in till afterwards. But at the last it was improved to such an height, that in the flourishing times of that Commonwealth, the men increased to the number of 463000, and the compass of the Town unto 50 miles; there being on and about the walls 740 Turrets. And in this number of 463000 men, I reckon neither servants, women, nor children, but men able to bear Arms, Free Denizens, and such as were enrolled into Cense, or the Subsidy Books. To which if we should add their wives, children, and servants, we cannot probably conjecture them to have been fewer than three or four Millions: and so Lipsi●s is of opinion his Tract de Magnitudine Romana. The most memorable buildings of it, were 1 the Capitol, founded by Tarqvinius Superbus, and beautified with the spoils of their conquered Neighbours; saved from the fury of the Galls by the cackling of Geese. Tacitus calleth this house, Sedem Jovis optimi maximi, asupicatò à majoribus pignus imperii conditum. It was twice burnt, once in the Civil Wars of Sylla and Marius; and again in the wars of Vespasian and V●tellius. In the third building of it, Vespasian carried the first basket of earth, after him the Nobility did the like, to make the people more forward in the service: and perhaps the custom of laying the first stone in a building, or driving the first nail in a timber-work, by him whose edifice it is, hath from hence, if not beginning, yet growth. 2 Here was the Temple of Janus, open in the time of wars, and shut in the time of peace; which, during all their Monarchy, happened but thrice: namely, during the reign of Augustus, after the Punic war, and in the time of Numa. 3 Here was the Bridge called Pons Sublicius, on which Horatius Cocles resisted the whole Army of King Porsena, Tarquin, and the Tuscans, till the Citizens behind had broken down the bridge, received him swimming to the bank with joyful acclamations, and saved their City from present ruin. Here lived the famous Warriors, so much renowned in the stories of elder times; here flourished the exact Martial discipline so memorised by ancient Historiographers; and finally here were laid up the spoils and Trophies of all Europe.  
ROME, as now it standeth lower on the bank of Tiber, upon Campus Martius, where it was built after the inundation of the Goths and Vandals, is in compass about eleven miles, within which compass is not a little waist ground. The Inhabitants of all sorts reckoned to amount to 200000, two parts whereof are Clergymen and Courtiers, that is to say, such as have their dependence on the Court of Rome, either by holding offices and places of employment under the Popes, or by attending on his person, or waiting on the Cardinals and eminent Prelates who are there abiding; 
ROME  or otherwise being of the retinue of such Foreign Ambassador's a● are always commorant in the City to follow the Negotiations of their several Masters; all which must needs amount to a very great number. It was first built on the East side of the River, in the Territory of Latium, but now there is little lest of the old City but the goodly ruins, and here and there some Churches and scattered houses (except it be a little on the North-East of the River from the Gate called Del Populo to the Island of Tiber) the rest, especially towards the South, being taken up with Pastures and sields of Corn. The main body of the City, as now it stands, is on the West side of the water, and the Holy Island, consisting of three distinct parts or members. Of these the least is that which they call La Isola, but anciently the Holy Island; first made an Island by the Corn, Straw, and other Goods of the Tarquins, which the Senate not vouchsafing to convert to any public or private use, commanded to be flung into the River, where it sunk and settled to an Island; and after called the Holy Island, from a Temple herein built unto Esculapius, brought hither from Epidaurus in the shape of a Serpent. This Island is not above a quarter of a mile in length, and hardly half so much in breadth, but full of stately Churches and beautiful houses. Next to this is that which they call Trastevere, or Trans-Tiberina, but of old Janiculo, from the mountain of that name included in it; called also Civitas Ravennatium, or the City of the men of Ravenna, of the Soldiers which Augustus kept at Ravenna against Antonius, and after placed in this out-part of the City, which by reason of the unwholsomeness of the air, is inhabited only by Artisans and poor people, yet compassed about with walls, except on that side next the water, and adorned with many goodly Churches, and some handsome buildings. But the chief glory of the City con●isteth in that part of it which is called Il Borgo, lying on the North side of the other, but disjoined from it, compassed about with walls by Pope Leo the 4. and from thence called Civitas L●onina. For in this part there are, 1 the Churcb of S. Peter, which were it once finished, would be one of the rarest buildings in all the World. 2 The Castle of S. Angelo, impregnable unless by Famin. 3 The Pope's Palace, called Belvidere, which with the Gardens thereof was compassed about with a very high wall by Pope Nicolas the fifth, and had this name from the fair prospect which it hath; in the same sense as Belvoir Castle here in England, the Barony and Mansion of the Earls of Rutland. A Palace of magnificence and receipt enough. 4 The Library of the hill Vatican, properly called the Palatine, but more commonly the Vatican Library: a Library was founded by Sixtus the 4th. who not only stored it with the choicest books he could pick out of Europe; but allowed also a large revenue for the perpetual augmentation of it, Bibliothecam Palatinam in Vaticano, toto terrarum orbe celebrem, advectis ex omni Europa libris construxit; proventusque certos, etc. So Onuphrius. When the Duke of Bourbon sacked Rome, An. 1527, it was much defaced and ransacked; but by the succeeding Popes it hath been again recovered to its former fame and beauty. Rome is now an University, which was founded by Urban the fourth, at whose request Thomas Aquinas professed here. Pope Nicholas the fifth was a special Benefactor to the same; and after him, Leo the tenth, who revived the Greek learning and language, which were in these parts almost forgotten. And finally to this place are brought all the treasures of those parts of Christendom subject to the Pope's authority, partly for the expense of strangers, which do there remain on their several pleasures or occasions, and partly for the expeditions which are there obtained for the Investitures of Bishoprics, and Bulls of Benefices, Indulgences, and other matters of Court-holy-water, and partly in the Pensions which are paid there to the Cardinals and other Ministers of those Kings and Princes which know best how to make their ends of the Pope's Ambitions. So that it may be truly said, there came not more Tributes into Old Rome from the conquered Provinces, than hath been bronght into the New from the subject Churches, which have submitted to the power of the Roman Prelates; and that they have as great command now under the pretence of Religion, as ever they had formerly by force of Arms. So truly was it said by Prosper of Aquitane (if my memory fail not.)  
Roma caput mundi, quicquid non possidit Armis,  
Religione tenet.—  
This is to say.  
What Rome subdued not with the Sword,  
She holds by colour of the Word.  
But yet there wants the Genius of the ancient City, the power and natural courage of the old Inhabitants, which held the same against the bravery and assaults of all Foreign Enemies: this City during the time of the ancient Romans, being never took but by the Galls; but since Pontifical, it hath been made a Prey to all Barbarous Nations, and never was besieged by any that did not take it. In a word, the city of Rome as now it standeth, is but the carcase of the old, of which it retains nothing but the ruins; and the cause of them, her sins.  
The Pope's much brag of the foundation of their Church, and the authority of S. Peter; whose being there is indeed constantly attested by most ancient Writers, insomuch that Calvin, though no friend to the Popes of Rome, yet propter Scriptorum consensum, in regard of the unanimous consent of the primitive times, did not think fit to controvert it. The silence of the Scriptures is a Negative Argument, and concludes nothing to the contrary, against so great a Cloud of unquestioned Witnesses, as soberly and positively have affirmed the same. And yet I would not have it thought by the captious Remanists, 
The Papacy.  that I conceive that it makes any thing at all for the Pope's Supremacy, because he si●s in Peter's seat; no more than it did make for Vibius Rufus (as Dion doth relate the Story) to attain Tully's eloquence, or Caesar's power, because he married Tully's widow, and bought Caesar's chair, though the poor Gentleman did befool himself with this opinion, that he should be Master of them both. Of which see Lib. LVII. And yet the Popes rely so much upon this fancy of being the direct heirs of S. Peter, and all his preeminences, that all things which they say or do, must be entitled to S. Peter. Their Throne must be S. Peter's Chair, their Church S. Peter's Ship, their Lands S. Peter Patrimony, their Tributes and exactions must be called Peter-pences, their Excommunications ●ulminated in S. Peter's name; and all their Bulls and Faculties sealed Annulo Piscatoris, with S. Peter's Signet. Nay they went so far at the last, that Pope Steven not being contented to be Peter's Successor, did take upon him in plain terms to be Peter himself. For being distressed by Astulphus King of the Lombard's, he sends for aid unto King Pepin in this following stile. Petrus Apostolus JESUS CHRISTI, etc. i.e. Peter the Apostle of JESUS CHRIST to you the most illustrious King Pepin, and to all Bishops, Abbots, etc. I the Apostle Peter, whose adopted sons you are, admonish you that you presently come and defend this City, etc. And doubt you not, but trust assuredly, that I myself, as if I stood before you, do thus exhort you, etc. and that I Peter the Apostle of God, will at the last day yield you mutual kindnesses, and prepare you Tabernacles in the heaven. Baronius who records this Letter, Anᵒ 755. numb. 17. was it seems, pretty well persuaded by it, that the Pope and Peter were all one. For in his Exhortation or Paraeneses to the State of Venice, being then upon differences with Pope Paul the fifth, he styleth him in plain terms thus, Paulus idemque Petrus vicem Christi agens in terris, i.e. Paul, who is also Peter, and Christ's Vicegerent. But leaving these imaginary claims and challenges of S. Peter's privileges, though they did really advance the reputation of that See in the darker times, two things there were which did exceedingly conduce to the improvement of their power in the more knowing and discerning times of Christianity. Of which the principal was the Orthodoxy of the Bishops or Popes of Rome; their eminent and sincere profession of the Faith of Christ, when almost all the other Churches were either torn in pieces by the fury of Schism, or wasted and subverted by the fraud of Heresy. In which regard, Appeals were frequently made to the Church of Rome, as a more competent Judge of the truth of Doctrine; the communion of it much desired by all true Christians; and a repair thither for relief and shelter in the times of trouble, made by the Orthodox Professors under persecution. And of these times, and this condition of that Church, we are to understand such passages of the Ancient Writers, as magnify the Faith of the Church of Rome, and set it above all the batteries and assaults of Heresy. Such is that passage of S. cyprian, Romanos esse ad quos perfidia non potest habere accessum, lib. 1. ep. 3. and that of Hierome, Romanam fidem (i. e. Romanorum fidem) Apostolica voce Laudatam, ejusmodi praestigias non recipere; in Apol. cont. Ruffin. and many others of that kind. Which passages, it were as foolish and ridiculous to apply to all following times, the condition of that Church being different from what then it was, as to accommodate all those Eulogies and commendations to the present City of Rome, which the Orators and Panegyrists of the elder times have hyperbolically ascribed to old Rome in her greatest glories. The next was the fixation of the Popes in the Metropolis, or Imperial City, which drawing to it such a multitude of suitors and attendants from all parts the world, could not but add much to the power and reputation of those Prelates, who had the happiness and honour to be resident there: and thereby opportunity to gain more Disciples, to solve more doubts of conscience, and decide more controversies, than any other could expect. And so we are to understand that passage in S. Irenaeus, in which he saith, Ad han● Ecclesiam propter potentiorem Principalitatem necesse est omnem convenire Ecclesiam. i.e. eos qui sunt undique Ecclesias. And so they did as long as Rome enjoyed the honour of a more potent Principality than other Cities: But when that more potent Principality failed to be at Rome by the removal of the Imperial See, first to Constantinople, and afterwards unto Ravenna, then did the Bishops of Constantinople and Ravenna dispute with those of Rome for Superiority: the S. at of Religion most commonly following the seat of the Empire. And in this claim the Patriarch or Bishop of Constantinople prevailed so far, that with the permission of Mauritius the Emperor, he took upon him the title of Universal Patriarch. Gregory the Great (of whom it is said that he was the worst Bishop of all that went before him, and the best of all that came after him) was at that time Bishop of Rome: Who sharply inveighed as well against the Emperor, as th● Patriarch of Constantinople, for this Title; and plainly maintained, that whosoever called himself Universal Bishop, was the forerunner of Antichrist. As for himself, it is probable that he took the title of Servus servorum Dei, more in opposition to him of Constantinople, than with an intent to be so truly. To which though those of Rome reply, that Gregory did not absolutely condemn this Title, but only blamed John the Constantinoplitan Patriarch, for assuming to himself that attribute, which properly belonged to the See of Rome; yet this cannot be. For than we should either in the old Bulls of the former Popes find mention of this Title; or else Pope Gregory would have assumed it to himself, that the world might take notice whereto of right it did belong. But Boniface, who next but one succeeded Gregory, having further aims, applied himself to Phocas that bloody Tyrant: who having murdered the Emperor Mauritius, his wife and children, and thereby got the general hatred of all the good Subjects of the Empire, the better to assure himself of Italy, 
The Papacy.  which he feared was ready to revolt, declared this Boniface to be the Ecumenical Bishop, and Head of the Church. To such a good beginning, such a gracious Patron, do the Popes stand indebted for that power and Empire, which now they challenge to themselves over all the Church.  
Now as the Bishop of Constantinople and Ravenna did challenge a priority or precedency of the Popes of Rome, by reason that they were respectively honoured with the Seat Imperial: so were there divers other Bishops, as Antioch, Alexandria, Carthage, Milan, which claimed an equality with them, and would by no means yield them any superiority. For trial of whose claim, we must look back on somewhat which hath been said before; where it was shown, that the Roman Empire was divided into fourteen Dioceses, each Diocese being subdivided into several Provinces, each Province comprehending many several Cities: then that in every of those City's, where the Romans had their Defensores, the Christians also had a Bishop; in the Metropolis of each Province, which commonly was the seat of the Roman Precedent, the Christians had their Metropolitan; and that in each principal City of each several Diocese, wherein the Vicar of that Diocese had fixed his dwelling, there did the Christians place a Primate. And this was done according to that famous Maxim of Optatus, Respublica non est in E●clesia, sed Ecclesia est in Republica, that the Church is in the Commonwealth, and not the Commonwealth in the Church. Upon which foundation the Fathers in the Council of Chalcedon raised this superstructure, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. that the honours of the Church should be accommodated unto those in the State. So that according to this Platform the Primates of the Church were of equal power, each of them limited and restrained to his proper Sphere, out of the which if he presumed once to act, he moved irregularly, and in his Excentrics. And for those Primates, I shall give you once for all this general Muster, that is to say, the Patriarch or Pope of Rome, for the Diocese or Prefecture of that City, the Primate or Archbishop of Milan for the Diocese of Italy, of Sirmium for that of Illyricum, of Lions for that of France, of York for Britain, of Toledo for Spain, and of Carthage for afric. Then for the East parts of the Empire, there was the Patriach of Alexandria for the Diocese of Egypt; of Antioch for that of the Orient; the Primate or Archbishop of Ephesus for the Diocese of Asia; of Nicomedia for that of Pontus, of Byzantium or Constantinople for that of Thrace, of Thessalonica for the Diocese of Greece, and of Justiniana prima for that of Dacia. Amongst all which was a mutual correspondence and Co-ordination for the general Government of the Church, maintained by Letters of intercourse, which they called Literas Format as, and Communicatorias; but no subordination, and much less subjection, unto one another, as doth appear most evidently by the Canons of the Council of Nice, assigning to the three great Patriarches their peculiar bounds, according to the custom of the former times. As for the Diocese or Patriarchate of the Popes of Rome, it contained in it those ten Provinces which were immediately subject to the Perfect or Provost of that City (an Officer instituted first by Augustus Caesar) that is to say the Provinces of Tuscia and Umbria, Picenum Suburbicarium, Campania, Apulia and Calabria, Valeria, Samnium, Lucania and the Brutii, in the main land of Italy; and the three Lands of Sicily, Corsica, and Sardinia. In which regard, I mean as to the immediate Government of those Provinces by the Praefect of the City of Rome, as they are called Regiones Suburbicariae by Ruffinus an Italian Writer; so anciently the Pope himself was called Urbicus or the City-Bishop, as appears plainly by Optatus, who calleth Pope Zepherinus, Zepherinus Urbicus. But the Popes were not long content with that allotment, growing up daily by a steady and constant watchfulness upon all occasions, to increase the Grandour of that See, and taking to themselves the honour to be Vindices Canonum, the strict and punctual preservers of the ancient Discipline, which took extremely well with all sorts of people. Till in the end from being Vindices Canonum, they came to be Interpreters, and at last the Rulers, or rather the Over-rulers of the Canons; and from chief Labourers in the Vineyard, they became the Landlords; which was the honour aimed at, and at last obtained by the foresaid Boniface, whom that cruel and butcherly Tyrant Phocas made the Head of the Church, the sixty sixth Bishop and first Pope of Rome: the Latin word Papa coming from the old Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying a Father. A Title at the first common unto other Bishops; as is evident to any one who hath read the Fathers; but after this appropriated unto those of Rome. Of these Popes, their Succession, and times of Government, our Chronologers are very uncertain: not one of them that ever I had the luck to see, agreeing exactly with another. The reasons whereof, as I conceive, are 1. The frequent Vacancies, and 2. the many Schisms which have happened in it, and 3. the Anti-popes' in them created: the Writers of those times accounting him only among the Popes, to whose faction they were most devoted. This Catalogue ensuing I have collected principally out of the Tables of Helvicus, Freigius, Bellarmine, and Onuphrius, whose differences I have reconciled as well as possibly I could: premonishing the Reader, that where the number of years which every Pope is found to sit in the Papal Chair, make not up the full number from his first admission, to the coming in of his Successor, it must be understood of some Schism or Vacancy happening in the Interval, by which the tale is to be made up. And for the difficulties which occur amongst the Ancients, in the first Succession, some placing of them thus, Linus, Cletus, Clemens; some Linus, Clemens, Cletus; and finally some others putting the Clemens first: I know no better way to compose the same, than to affirm (as many of the Fathers do) that S. Peter and S. Paul were Co-Founders of the Church in Rome; 
The Papacy.  S. Peter of the Church of the Circumcision, and S. Paul of the Gentiles; each of them being Bishop of the Church of his own foundation: and then to draw down the Succession in this manner following.  

The Bishops of Rome.  
A. Ch.  
44 1 S. Peter, Bishop of the Churches of the Circumcision.  
70 2 Cletus, or Anacletus, Successor to S. Peter in the Churches of the Circumcision 23  
59 1 S. Paul, Bishop of the Churches of the Gentiles.  
70 2 Linus, Successor to S. Paul in the Church of the Gentiles 11.  
81 3 Clemens, having succeeded Linus first in the Church of the Gentiles, did after, An. 93. succeed Cletus also in the Church of the Jews; reckoned by some the next Successor to S Peter, because the next who after him had the charge of the whole; the Church of the Gentiles not being founded, or not distinguished from the other, till some years after Peter's coming.  
103 4 Anacletus 9  
112 5 Evaristus 9  
121 6 Alexander 10 m. 5 d.  
131 7 Sixtus 10  
142 8 Telesphorus 12  
154 9 Hyginus 4  
158 10 Pius 9  
167 11 Ancetus 8 m. 9  
175 12 Soter 4  
179 13 Eleutherius 15  
194 14 Victor 9  
203 15 Zepherinus 18  
221 16 Calistus 5  
226 17 Urbanus 6 m. 7 d.  
233 18 Pontianus 5  
238 19 Antherus 1  
239 20 Fabianus 14  
253 21 Cornelius 2  
255 22 Lucius 1 m. 8  
256 23 Stephanus 3 m. 3.  
260 24 Sixtus, or Xistus II. 2  
262 25 Dionysius 10  
272 26 Felix 2 m. 5 d.  
775 27 Eutychanus 8  
283 28 Caius 13  
296 29 Marcellinus 8  
304 30 Marcellus 5  
309 31 Eusebius 2  
311 32 Miltiades 3  
314 33 Silvester 22  
336 34 Marcus m. 8  
337 35 Julius 15 m. 5  
352 36 Liberius 15, cui vivo Felix suffectus.  
367 37 Damasus 18  
385 38 Syricius 13  
398 39 Anastasius 4  
402 40 Innocentius 15  
417 41 Zosimus 1 m. 4  
419 42 Bonifacius 5  
424 43 Celestinus 8 m. 5  
432 44 Sixtus III. 8  
440 45 Levo magn. 21  
461 46 Hilarius 6 m. 10  
468 47 Simplicius 15 m. 5  
483 48 Felix III. 9  
492 49 Gelasius 4  
497 50 Anastasius II. 2  
499 51 Symmachus 15  
514 52 Hormisda 9  
523 53 Jannes 2 m 9 d.  
526 54 Felix IV. 4  
530 55 Bonifa●ius II. 1.  
532 56 Joannes II. 3  
535 57 Agapetus 1  
536 58 Silverius 1  
537 59 Vigilius 18  
555 60 Pelagius 5  
560 61 Joannes III. 13  
573 62 Benedictus 4  
578 63 Pelagius II. 12  
590 64 Gregorius Mag. 14  
609 65 Sabinianus 1, the last of the Roman Bishops, not having that arrogant Title or Universal Bishop, or head of the Church.   

The Popes of Rome challenging a Supremacy over all the Church.  
606 1 Bonifacius III. 3  
607 2 Bonifacius IV. 8  
615 3 Deus-dedit 3  
618 4 Bonifacius V. 5 m. 10  
624 5 Honorius 13  
637 6 Severinus 2  
639 7 Joannes IV. 2  
641 8 Theodorus 7 m. 5  
649 9 Martinus 6  
654 10 Eugenius 2. m. 9  
657 11 Vitalianus 14  
671 12 Adeodatus 5  
677 13 Domnus 1 m. 5 d.  
679 14 Agatho 4  
683 15 Leo II. m. 10  
684 16 Benedictus II. 1  
685 17 Joannes V. 1  
686 18 Canon m. TWO  
688 19 Sergius 13  
701 20 Joannes VI 3  
704 21 Joannes VII. 3  
707 22 Sisinnius d. 20  
707 23 Constantinus 7  
714 24 Gregorius II. 17  
731 25 Greg. III. 10 m. 9  
742 26 Zacharias 10  
752 27 Stephanus II. d. 4  
752 28 Stephanus III. 5  
757 29 Paulus I 10  
767 30 Constans II. 1  
768 31 Stephanus IV. 4  
772 32 Adriaws I 23  
796 33 Leo III. 20  
816 34 Stephanus V. m. 7  
817 35 Paschalis 7  
824 36 Eugenius II. 3  
827 37 Valentinus d. 4  
827 38 Gregorius IV. 16  
843 39 Sergius II. 3  
846 40 Leo IV. 8  
854 41 Joannes VIII. vn'gò POPE JOAN 2  
856 42 Benedictus III. 2  
858 43 Nicolas 10  
868 44 Adrianus II. 5  
873 45 Joannes IX. 10  
883 46 Martinus II. 1  
884 47 Adrianus III. 1  
885 48 Stephanus VI 6  
891 49 Formosus 4  
895 50 Bonifacius VI d. 15  
896 51 Stephanus VII. 1  
897 52 Romanus m. 4  
897 53 Theodorus II. d. 10  
897 54 Joannes X. 2  
899 55 Benedictus IV. 2  
903 56 Leo V. d. 40  
903 57 Christophorus m. 7  
903 58 Sergius III. 7  
910 59 Anastasius. III. 2  
912 60 Lando m. 6.  
912 61 Joannes XI. 15  
928 62 Leo VI m. 6  
929 63 Stephanets VIII. 2  
931 64 Joannes XII. 5  
936 65 Leo VII. 4  
940 66 Stephanus IX. 3  
943 67 Martinus III. 3  
946 68 Agapeius II. 9  
956 69 Joannes XIII. 8  
964 70 Leo VIII. 1  
965 71 Benedicta V. 1  
966 72 Joannes XIV.  
973 73 Benedictu. VI m ●  
974 74 Domnus li. 1 m. 3  
975 75 Bonifa●ius VII. 1  
976 76 Benedictus VII. 8  
984 77 Joannes XV. 1  
985 78 Joannes XVI. 10 
The Papacy.   
995 79 Joannes XVII. m. 4  
996 80 Gregorius V. 3  
999 81 Silvester II. dictus Necroma●ticus 4  
1003 82 Joannes XVIII. m. 5  
1003 83 Joannes XIX. 6  
1009 84 Sergius IV. 3  
1012 85 Benedictus VIII. 12  
1024 86 Joannes XX. 8 m. 9  
1033 87 Benedictus IX. 12  
1045 88 Silvester III. m. 1  
1045 89 Benodictus X. m. 1  
1045 90 Gregorius VI 1 m. 7  
1047 91 Clemens II. m. 9  
1047 92 Damasus II. d. 23  
1049 93 Leo IX. 5  
1055 94 Victor II. 2  
1057 95 Stephanus X. 1. m. 6  
1059 96 Nicolaus II. 2. m. 6  
1062 97 Alexander II. 11  
1073 98 Gregorius VII. dictus  
Hildebrandus 12  
1088 99 Victor III. 1  
1087 100 Urbanus II. 12  
1099 101 Paschalis II. 18  
1118 102 Gelasius II. 1  
1119 103 Calistus II. 6  
1125 104 Honorius II. 5  
1130 105 Innocens II. 13  
1143 106 Celestin II. m. 5  
1144 107 Lucius II. m. 11  
1145 108 Eugenius III. 8  
1153 109 Anastasius IV. 1  
1154 110 Adrian IV. 4  
1159 111 Alexand. III. 22  
1181 112 Lucius III. 4  
1185 113 Urban III. 2  
1187 114 Gregorius VIII. m. 2  
1188 115 Clemens III. 3  
1191 116 Celestine III. 6  
1198 117 Innocent III. 17  
1216 118 Honorius III. 10  
1227 119 Gregorius IX. 14  
1241 120 Celestin IV. d. 17  
1243 121 Innocent IV. 11  
1254 122 Alexander IV. 6  
1261 123 Urbanus IV. 3  
1265 124 Clemens IV. 3  
1271 125 Gregorius X. 14  
1275 126 Innocent V●m. 5  
1276 127 Adrian V. d. 19  
1276 128 Joannes XXI. d. 8  
1277 129 Nicolaus III. 4  
1281 130 Martinus IV. 4  
1285 131 Honorius IV. 4  
1288 132 Nicolaus IV. 4  
1294 133 Celestin. V. m. 6  
1295 134 Bonifacius VIII. 8  
1303 135 Benedictus IX. m. 8  
1305 136 Clemens V. 9  
1316 137 Joannes XXII. 18  
1334 138 Benedict. X. 7  
1342 139 Clemens VI 10  
1352 140 Innocent VI 10  
1362 141 Urban V. 8  
1371 142 Gregorius XI. 7  
1378 143 Urban. VI 11  
1389 144 Boniface IX. 14  
1404 145 Innocent VII. 2  
1406 146 Gregorius XII. 2  
1409 147 Alex. V. m. 10  
1410 148 Joannes XIII. 5  
1417 149 Martin V. 13  
1431 150 Eugenius IV. 16  
1447 151 Nicolaus V. 8  
1455 152 Callistus III. 3  
1458 153 Pius II. antè dictus Aeneas Silvius 6  
1464 154 Paulus II. 7  
1471 155 Sixtus IV. 12  
1484 156 Innocent VIII. 7  
1492 157 Alexander VI 11  
1053 158 Pius III. d. 26  
1503 159 Julius II. 10  
1513 160 Leo X. 9  
1522 161 Adrian VI 2  
1524 162 Clemens VII. 10  
1534 163 Paulus III. 15  
1550 164 Julius III. 5  
1555 165 Marcellus II. d. 22  
1555 166 Paulus IV. 5  
1560 167 Pius IV. 6  
1567. 168 Pius V. 5  
1572 169 Gregorius XIII. 13  
1585. 170 Sixtus V. 5  
1590. 171 Urbán VII. d. 12  
1590. 172 Gregorius XIV. m. 9  
1591. 173 Innocent IX m. 1.  
1592. 174 Clement VIII. 13  
1605 175 Leo XI. d. 26  
1605 176 Paulus V. 16  
1621. 177 Greg. XV. 2  
1623. 178 Urban VIII. 21  
1644 179 Innocent X. now   
living. To these 179 Popes, add the 65 Bishops which preceded that arrogant title of Universal, and they make up the full number of 244. How many are to come, he must be a cunning man that can determine: And yet such cunning men there have been, who have determined positively, but withal Prophetically of the number of Popes; by name S. Malachi, one of the first Apostles of the Irish Nation, very much honoured by that people to this very day. Of whom there is remaining in Massinghams' collection of the Irish Saints, a certain number of Mottos, in the Latin tongue, agreeable to the nature or chief accidents of as many Popes successively to one another, according to the order of those several Mottos; and thereunto this Prophecy annexed, that when so many Popes had sat in S. Peter's Chair, either the World should end, or th● Popedom sail. The Book was showed to me by the Author when I was at Paris, and the Pope's names in order joined to every Motto, as far as to the time of Urban, who last deceased; which I compared, as well as my memory would serve me, and found the Mottos and the Popes to be very answerable. The Motto for Pope Urban, which I took most notice of, was Lilium & Rosa: a Motto very suitable to the principal Action which was like to happen in his time, being the conjunction of the English Rose, and the French Lily, in the Marriage of Charles K. of England, and Madam Henrietta Maria the Princess of France, which that Pope earnestly promoted in his speedy and cheerful granting of the Dispensation. And to take from me all suspicion of Imposture, this Massingham showed me an old Book written by one Wion a Fleming, and printed near 200 years before his Collection; in which the Mottos stood as in his they did; and comparing the Mettos with a printed Catalogue of the Popes, I found the name of Urban, and that Motto to jump even together. From Urban downwards there remained (as I now remember) 36 Mottos more to come; by consequence if this Malachi were as true a Prophet as one Malachi was, just so many Popes, and then the Popedom to be ruined, or the World to end. But I hope God for his Elects sake will abridge those days, and not permit the superstitions and corruptions of that Church to endure so long; nor so many Assertors and Defenders of those Roman Hetrodoxiet to be added to the former number: Out of the stories of all which (pretermitting many things of less consideration) I will only select some particular passages, for the better understanding of their state and story.  
1 Pelagius the first, ordained that Heretics and Schismatics should be punished with temporal death (which severity continueth still;) and that none should be preferred to Ecclesiastical dignities by Gifts and B●ibes, which pious order is long since antiquated.  
2 Vital●aruts, first brought Organs into the divine service of the Church of Rome, to be used with the singing or vocal Music formerly in use; which afterwards was brought unto more perfection by the Pope's succeeding.  
3 Constantine, was so generally beloved of all men, that going to Constantinople, Justinian the second kissed his feet in sign of honour; which some of the ambitious Popes in times succeeding drew into example, and at last brought into a custom, as it still continueth.  
4 Pascal the first, caused the Priests of certain parishes in Rome, by reason of their nearness to his person, their presence at his Election, and to honour them with a more venerable Title, to be called Cardinals. Now mates for Kings, and numbered about 70, but more or fewer at the sole pleasure of the Popes.  
5 Eugenius the second took to himself within the Territories of the Church, the Authority of creating Dukes, Earls, and Knights, as the Exarch of Ravenna had used to do.  
6 Sergius the second, was the first that changed his name. For, thinking his own name Bocca di Porco, or Swines-mouth, not consonant to his dignity, he caused himself to be called Sergius, which precedent his Successors following, do also vary their names. So that if one be a Coward, he is called Leo; if a Tyrant, Clemens; if an Atheist, Pius or Innocent; if a Rustic, Urbanus; and so of the rest.  
7 John the eighth, is by most men confessed to be a woman, and is usually called Pope Joan. To avoid the like disgrace, the Porphirie chair was ordained; Ubi ab ultimo diacono, etc. so that both in a literal and mystical sense, this woman may be called, The Whore of Babylon. The name of this Female Pope, the Romish Chronologers have not inserted into the Catalogue; the reason, as Marianus Scotus giveth it, propter turpitudinem rei, & sexum muliebrem. And from hence it is, that in the common Catalogues these Popes that have called themselves john's, are so ill ordered, some making that John which succeeded Adrian the second, Anᵒ 872, to be the 8, and others the 9 Platina only of all the Pontificians reckoneth Pope Joan as the 8 of the Johns, and so forward: in which particular I have followed his authority. And it is probable enough that God might suffer that proud See to fall into such an infamy, the better to humble the ensuing Popes in the times of their greatest ruff and flourish; or to prevent the brag of that continued Succession, they so much pretend to. More of this Argument, (as to the truth of the story in matter of Fact) he that lists to see, may satisfy himself in M. Cook's Book of Pope Joan, who most industriously hath answered all objections which hath been made against it by those of Rome.  
8 Nicolas the first, the better to fasten the Clergy to the See of Rome, and make them the less obnoxious to their natural Princes; was the first who did by Law restrain them from marriage, saying, that it was the more honest to have to do with many women privately, than openly to keep a wife; and some of his Successors followed it so close, that a Priest of Placent: a being accused to have wife and children, was deprived of his Benefice; but upon proof made, that she was the wife of another man, and his Strumpet only, he was again restored unto it.  
9 Adrian the third ordained, that the Emperor from thenceforth should have no more to do with the Election or Confirmation of the Pope, but that it should be left wholly to the Roman Clergy.  
10 Formosus was so ill beloved, and of such a general disesteem, that Pope Steven the seventh caused his body to be unbnried, all his Acts reversed, two of his fingers to be cut off, and then the mangled carcase to be again interred among the Luty. And though these Acts of Steven were adjudged illegal both by John the tenth, and Pope Romanus, two of his Successors, and the doings of Formosus justified, yet Sergius the third caused his corrupt and putrified body to be taken once more out of the grave, and his head to be cut off as if still alive. So little did the infallibility of St. Peter's Chair preserve these Popes from falling into gross and irreconcilable contradictions.  
11 John the 12th, was the next after Sergius the second that changed his name, a very wicked, cruel, and libidinous man; who coming to that place by his Father's greatness, cut off the Nose of one Cardinal, and the hand of another, for that they had signified to the Emperor Otho the first, what a scandal all the Church did suffer by his detestable life; and finally being taken in Adultery was slain by the husband of the woman.  
12 Gregory the fifth, finding the power of the Emperor, as long as it continued in a way of succession, not likely to be overborn by that of the Church; and being withal incensed against the Romans, who till that time retained some shadow of an Empire; projected the election of the future Emperors by the Princes of Germany, by which the Germans were distracted into Factions, and the Romans weakened, and so a door left open to the Popes of Rome to make their ends upon them both.  
13 Steven the tenth brought the Church of Milan to be under the obedience of the Popes of Rome, which till that time had challenged an equality with them; as before Pope Dom nus had done the Church of Ravenna, which for some time had challenged the precedency of them.  
14 Gregory the seventh, commonly called Hildebrand, a turbulent and unquiet man, who first adventured to draw the premises laid down by some of his Predecessors into a conclusion, Excommunicating the Emperor Henry the fourth, for meddling with the Investitures of Bishops, and causing Rodulph Duke of Suevia to rebel against him. A man much favoured against the 〈◊〉 of her own House by the Countess Mathildis, who is said to be so much his friend, that 〈◊〉 his sake she left the company of her husband, and disherited her right heirs, settling 〈◊〉 whole estates in Italy on the See of Rome. And though the Emperor had the better of this Pope, and made him fly out of Rome, and die in exile, yet he was fain at last to submit himself to Pope Pascal the second, (who had armed his own son against him) to attend barefoot at his door, and cry peccavi.  
15 Sergius the third ordained the bearing of Candles in the Feast of the Purification of the Virgin Mary, thence called Candlemass day.  
16 Sergius the fourth was the first that on Christmas night with divers Ceremonies did consecrate Swords, Roses, or the like, to be sent as tokens of love and honour to such Princes as deserved best of them, or whom they desired to oblige. Thus Leo the tenth sent a consecrated Rose to Frederick Duke of Saxony, requesting him to banish Luther: and Paul the third an hallowed Sword to James the fifth of Scotland, to engage him in a war against Henry the 8. who had then withdrawn himself and his Kingdom from the Pope's commands.  
17 Nicolas the second took from the Roman Clergy the election of Popes, and gave it to the College of Cardinals.  
18 Celestine the second, was the Inventor of that mad manner of cursing, or Anathematising by Bell, Book, and Candle.  
19 Alexander the third, pursuing the desperate course of Gregory the seventh, Excommunicated the Emperor Frederick the first; and by raising war against him in every place, brought him to that exigent, that he was fain to prostrate himself at his feet: when the Pope treading on his neck, said aloud, super Aspidem & Basiliscum, etc. profanely applying those words to the present occasion. And when the Emperor to put the better colour on his disgrace, meekly replied, Nontibi sed Petro; the Pope not willing to lose his part of so great a glory, subjoined as angrily, Et mihi & Petro.  
20 Innocent the third held a Council in Rome, in which it was decreed that the Pope should have the correction of all Christian Princes; and that no Emperor should be acknowledged till he had sworn obedience to him. Which bringeth into my mind that jolly humour of the great Cham of Tartary, who when he hath dined, commands his Trumpeters to sound, and make Proclamation, that now all other Kings and Princes may sit down to dinner. He brought in the Doctrine of Transubstantiation, and ordained that there should be a Pix made to cover the consecrated (but now transubstantiated) Bread, and a Bell to be rung before it. He is also said to have first imposed Auricular Confession upon the people.  
21 Nicolas the third was the first Pope who practised to enrich his kindred, intending to make one of them King of Lombardy, another King of Tuscany, and to raise the rest to great Advancements out of the Lands of the Church. Before which time (as Machiavil very well observeth) as there was no mention of the advancement of any of the Pope's kinsfolks or posterity; so afterwards they studied no one thing more than to prefer their own blood; insomuch that they have not only laboured to make them Princes, but if it were possible would procure the Popedom to be made hereditary. So he, with probability enough: For so dearly do they love their Nephews (by which name they use to call their Bastards) that it was very justly said by Pope Alexander the third, The Laws forbid us to get Children, and the Devil hath grven us Nephews in their stead.  
22 Boniface the eighth, of whom it is said, that he entered like a Fox, reigned like a Lion, and died like a Dog, by his general Bull exempted the Clergy from being chargeable with Ta●es and payments unto Temporal Princes. Which being complied with by the Clergy of England, King Edward the first put them out of his protection; and so the Pope's Bull left roaring here. He caused the Book of the Canon Law called the Decretals to be first set out; and instituted the Feast of Jubilee to be held in Rome every hundredth year; but by Clement the sixth it was brought unto the fiftieth year, and since reduced to the five and twentieth. This is that Boniface, who in that great concourse of people which repaired to Rome to observe his new Feast of Jubilee (to which every one that did repair was to have a plenary remission of all his sins) showed himself one day in the habit of a Pope, and the next day in that of an Emperor; and caused two Swords to be born before him every day, in sign that all power Ecclesiastical and Temporal did belong unto him.  
23 Clement the fifth was the first that made Indulgences and Pardons saleable. For seeing (said he) that one drop of our Saviour's blood had been enough to have saved all Mankind, and yet that all his blood was shed, the overplus was left to the Church as a standing Treasure, to be disposed of by S. Peter and his Successors. And hereunto, to make his Treasure the more inexhausted, he added the Merits of the Virgin Mary, and all other Saints. Being wearied with the insolences of the people of Rome, he removed the Papal See to Avignon in France, where it continued for the space of 70 years.  
24 Clemens the sixth had an ill time of it: For in his Papacy the Emperor gave freely all Lands b●●●ng to the Church to such as formerly had usurped them, to be holden by them 〈◊〉 Empire. Upon which title the Maltesti became Lords of Rimini, the Ordelaffis of For●, 〈◊〉 of Camerine, the Bentivolies of Bononia, the Manfredi of Faenza, etc. Which Estates 〈◊〉 recoered to the Church till the time of Pope Julio the second; though conquered from the present owners in the time of Alexander the sixth, by Caesar Borgia his son, who had an aim of settling them, and perhaps the Papacy itself, on the Borgian Family.  
25 Gregory the eleventh returned the Papal Chair again to the City of Rome, whither he conveyed himself by Sea, in private, for fear of being withheld by the French; and being come thither found the chief parts of the City so overgrown with briers and bushes, and the principal buildings of it so decayed and ruinous, that a little longer absence would have made it desolate.  
26 Paul the second endeavoure to increase the Majesty of the Popedom by Arms and Avarice, and exceeded all his Predecessors in pomp and show, causing his Mitre to be enriched with Diamonds, Sapphires, Emeralds, and other stones of great price; and augmencing the splendour of the Cardinals with a scarlet Gown, whom Innocent the 4. had graced with red Hats before. He brought the Jubilee from 50 to 25.  
27 Sixtus the fourth ordained a constant guard to attend his person. He very much beautified and repaired the City of Rome, and was the first founder of the Vatican Library. But on the other side, he is said by some, to have set all offices and preferments to sale, and to have builded in Rome Stews of both sexes, and to bring in Beads, and to authorise our Lady's Psalter.  
28 Alexander the sixth, setting aside all modesty, was the first that openly acknowledged his Nephews (as they call their Bastards) to be his sons. By one of which, the Caesar Borgia before named, he recovered Forli, Imola, and many other estates from the present owners, on a design of settling them in his own family, as before is said; and to that end called in the French, who after made such fowl work in Italy.  
29 Julio the second had more in him of the Soldier than the Prelate, recovering many Towns unto the Church which had been formerly usurped, being taken from the Occupants by Caesar Borgia; and keeping Italy in his time in continual wars. This is the Pope, who passing over the bridge of Tiber, brandished his Sword, and threw his Keys into the River, saying, that if Peter's Keys would not serve his turn, than Paul's Sword should do it.  
30 Leo the tenth was indeed a great Favourer of Learning, but of great prodigality and vast expense. For maintenance whereof he sent his saleable Indulgences into France, and Germany; which business being indiscreetly handled by his Ministers, occasioned Luther in Germany, and Zuinglius amongst the Swissers, first to write against them, and afterwards to question many points of Popish Doctrine. In pursuance of which quarrel, the Pope of Rome burned Luther's Books, whom he declared for an Heretic; and Luther did the like at Wittenberg with the Pope's Canon Law, whom he declared to be a Persecutor, a Tyrant, and the very Antichrist. Which flame increased so fast, and enlarged so far, that it burned down a great part of the Papal Monarchy.  
31 Pius the fourth continued the Council formery called at Trent by Pope Paul the third, but interrupted and laid aside from on Pope to another, and having brought it to an end, and thereby settled and confirmed the Interess of the Church of Rome, caused it to be received as Ecumenical, though the Italian Bishops being most of them the Pope's creatures, did more than double the number of all the rest, and yet some of the rest also were but merely Titulars. He added also a new Creed consisting of twelve Articles to be added to that of the Apostles, by all who lived in the Communion of the Church of Rome. But of the words and actions of these Ghostly Fathers we have said enough, if not too much. I will therefore end with that of the Painter, who being blamed by a Cardinal, for giving to S. Peter's picture too much of the red, replied, that he had made him so, as blushing at the lives of those who were called his Successors.  
As for the Temporal power and greatness of the Popes of Rome, there is a pretended Donation of the Emperor Constantine, by which the City of Rome itself, most part of Italy, and afric, and all the Lands of those Seas are conferred upon them; the forgery whereof is very learnedly shown by our learned Cracanthorp in his discourse upon that subject. But that Donation might most justly be suspected of Fraud and Forgery, though no body had took the pains to detect the same; considering how fearful the Popes are grown to have the truth thereof disputed; insomuch that many leaves are razed out of Guicciardine by the Inquisition, where it had been questioned. For in that place the Historian not only denieth the said feigned Donation, but affirms, that divers learned men reported, that Constantine and Silvester (to whom it is said to have been made) lived in divers Ages. Then showeth, how base and obscure the Authority of the Pope was in Rome itself, during the time that the barbarous Nations made havoc of Italy. 2 That in the institution of the Exarchate, the Popes had nothing to do with the Temporal Sword, but lived as subject to the Emperors. 3 They were not very much obeyed in matters Spiritual, by reason of the corruption of their manners. 4 That after the overthrow of the Exarchate, the Emperors now neglecting Italy, the Romans began to be governed by the advice and power of the Popes. 5 That Popin of France, and his son Charles, having overthrown the Kingdom of the Lombard's, gave unto the Popes, the Exarchate, Urbine, Ancona, Spoteto, and many other Towns and Territories about Rome. 6 That the Popes in all their Bulls and Charters, expressed the date of them in these formal words; Such a one, the Lord our Emperor reigning. 7 That long after the translation of the Empire from France to Germany, the Popes began to make open protestation, that the Pontificial dignity was rather to give Laws to the Emperors, than receive any from them. 
The Papacy.  8. That being thus raised to an earthly power, they forgot the salvation of souls, sanctity of life, and the Commandments of God, propagation of Religion, and Charity towards men: And that to raise arms, to make war against Christians, to invent new devices for getting of money, to profane sacred things for their own ends, and to enrich their kindred and children, was their only study. And this is the substance of Guicciardine in that place: an Author above all exception. He was a man whom the Popes employed in many businesses of principal importance; so that no hate to them, but love to the truth, made him write thus much. As for the City of Rome, so unlikely is it to have been given by Constantine, that neither Pepin nor Charles his son (though more beholding to the Popes than that Emperor was) could be induced to part with it. Lewis surnamed Pius, is said to have been the first Donor of it, and a Copy of his Donation is found in the third Book of Volaterran, subscribed by the Emperor, his three sons, ten Bishops, eight Abbots, fifteen Earls, and the Pope's Library-Keeper; yet notwithstanding, it is thought by many very learned and judicious men, that really there was no such matter; but that all this was forged by Anastasius the Pope's Bibliothecarian, or Library-Keeper, who is cited as a witness to the Donation. And yet to put the matter further out of question, let us next hear what that great Politician and Statesman, the Recorder of Florence, Nic. Machiavelli hath observed in this case. Rome (saith he) was always subject to the Lords of Italy, till Theodorick King of the Goths removed his Seat to Ravenna; for thereby the Romans were enforced to submit themselves to the Bishops, An. 430. or thereabouts. And talking of the estate of the Popedom, An. 931. he states it thus. In Rome were elected yearly out of the Nobility two Consuls, who according to the ancient Custom ruled that City. Under them was appointed a Judge to minister justice to the people. There was also a Counsel of twelve men, which gave Governors unto the Towns subject to Rome. And for the Pope, he had in Rome more or less Authority, according to the favour which he found with the Emperors, or others than most mighty; but the leaving of Italy by the Germane Emperors, settled the Pope in a more absolute Sovereignty over the City. And yet it seems they were not of such absolute power, but that the Romans tugged hard with them for their Liberties. Concerning which he tells us in another place, That the ambition of the people of Rome did at that time (viz. An. 1010.) make much war with the Popes, and that having helped the Pope to drive out the Emperor, and altered the Government of the City as to them seemed good, suddenly they became Enemies to him, and the Popes received more injuries at their hands than at any other Christian Princes; and that even in those days when the Censures of the Popes made all the West of the would to tremble, yet even then did the people of Rome rebel, and both the Popes and the People studied for nothing so much, as how one of them might overthrow the Authority and Estimation of the other.  
But for the method and degrees by which the Popes ascended to their temporal greatness, take here an extract of the Story collected out of the best Authors, by the most reverend Father in God the late Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, in his learned and laborious work against Fisher the Jesuit. The Pope (saith he) being chosen anciently by the Clergy and people of Rome, used always to receive from the Emperor's hands a ratification of that choice: insomuch that about the year 579. when all Italy was on fire with the Lombard's, and Pelagius the second constrained through the necessity of the times, to enter upon the Popedom without 〈◊〉 Emperors leave; S. Gregory then a Deacon, was shortly after sent in an Embassy to excuse it. But when the Lombard's grew so great in Italic, and the Empire was so infested with the Saracens, and such changes happened in all parts of the world, as that neither for the present the Homage of the Pope was useful to the Emperor, nor the Protection of the Emperor available for the Pope: by this means was the Bishop of Rome left to play his own game by himself. A thing which as it pleased him well enough, so both he and his Successors made great advantage by it. For being grown to that eminence by the favour of the Emperors, and the greatness of that City and place of his abode; he then found himself the more free, the greater the Tempest was that beat upon the other. And then first he set himself to alienate the hearts of the Italians from the Emperor; in which he did prevail so far, that Theophylact the Exarch coming into Italy, was opposed by the Soldiers, who wished better to the Pope than to the Emperor; and the Emperors own Governor was fain to be defended from his own Soldiers by the power of the Pope, who had gotten interest in them against their own Master. Next he opposed himself against him; and about the year 710. Pope Constantine the first did openly affrone Philippicus the Emperor, in defence of Images, as Onuphrius telleth us. After him Gregory the 2d. and 3d. took up his example, and did the like by Leo Isaurus. By this time the Lombard's began to pinch very close, and to vex on all sides not only Italy, but Rome too. This drives the Pope to seek a new Patron, and very fitly he meets with Charles Martel in France, that famous Warrior against the Saracens. Him he employeth in defence of the Church against the Lombard's, and the Address seems very advisedly taken, it proved so fortunate to them both. For in short time it dissolved the Kingdom of the Lombard's, having then stood two hundred and four years, which was the Pope's security: and it brought the Crown of France into the House of Charles, and shortly after the Western Empire. And now began the Popes to be great indeed. For by the bounty of Pepyn, the son of Charles, that which was taken by him from the Lombard's, was given to the Pope; that is to say, the Exarchate, and all that lay betwixt the Apennine and the River of Po. So that now he became a Temporal Prince. But when Charles the great had set up the Western Empire, than he resumed the Ancient and Original power, to govern the Church, to call Councils, and to order Papal Elections. And this power continued for a time in his posterity; for Gregory the seventh was confirmed in the Popedom by the sanre Henry the fourth, whom he afterwards deposed. And it might have continued longer, if the succeeding Emperors had had Abilities enough to secure, or vindicate their own Rights. But the Pope keeping a strong Counsel about him, and meeting with some weak Princes, and those ofttimes distracted with great and dangerous wars, grew stronger till he got the better; yet was it carried in succeeding times with great changes of fortune, and different success; the Emperor sometimes plucking from the Pope, and the Pope from the Emperor; winning and losing ground, as their spirits, abilities, aids and opportunities were; till at last the Pope settled himself on the grounds laid by Gregory the seventh, in that great power which he now useth in and over these parts of the Christian World. A power first exercised (saith he in another place) by this Pope Gregory the seventh, and made too good upon the Emperor Henry the fourth, as by Pope Adrian the fourth, Alexander the third, with some others, upon Frederick Barbarossa. And others of the Emperors were alike served when they did not submit. And for this I hope his Holiness was not to be blamed. For if the Emperor kept the Pope under for divers years together; against all reason, the Popes as Bellarmine affirms, being never subject to the Emperor, and wanting force to stand on his own Prerogative: I hope the Pope having now got power enough, may keep the Emperor's underfoot, and not suffer them any more to start before him.  
Having thus a little glanced at the means, by which the great power of the Church of Rome was first obtained, let us next consider of those Policies by which this Papal Monarchy hath been so long upheld in esteem and credit. We may divide them into three heads. 1. Those by which they have insinuated and screwed themselves into the affections and affairs of the greatest Princes. 2. Those by which already they have, and by which they will hereafter be able to secure their estate. And 3ly. those by which they keep the people in obedeence and ignorance.  
1. Concerning the first. First the Donation of several Kingdoms to them which have no right nor title, but by these Grants of the Pope, cannot but bind them fast to uphold that power, without which they could lay no claim to that which they are possessed of. Of which sort was the Confirmation of the Kingdom of France to the House of Pepin; of Naples to the House of Schwaben, and Anjou; of Navarre to the Spaniards. 2. The readiness of their Ministers to kill such as resist them, cannot but necessitate Princes to seek their friendship, and hold fair with them: especially since by a Writ of Excommunication they can arm the Subjects against their Sovereign; and without the charge of levying one soldier either destroy him utterly, or bring him to conformity. The frequent wars raised by them against the Emperors of Germany, and that against King John in England, by these Papal fulminations only; the poisoning of the said King John by a Monk of Swinestead; and of King Henry the third of France by Jaques Clement, are full proofs of this. 3. Then followeth their allowance of Marriages prohibited both by God and Nature; the issue of which cannot but uphold the Pope's Authority, without which their birth would be illegitimate, and consequently themselves uncapable of the estates they are born unto: And by this means they do more strengthen themselves by the unlawful Marriages of others, than ever Prince could do by the lawful Marriage of his own. Nothing more fastened Queen Mary of England to the See of Rome, than the question that was raised about the Marriage of her Mother to King Henry the eight; the lawfulness of which depended chiefly on the dispensation of Pope Julio the second. 4. Then cometh in their dispensing with the Oaths of Princes, when they conceive themselves induced upon reason of State, to fly off from those Leagues, and break off those Treaties, which have been solemnly made and sworn betwixt them and their Neighbours. By means whereof, such Princes think themselves not perjured, because dispensed with by the Pope; and commonly get something in advantage, or point of profit, for which they cannot be unthankful unto the Papacy. Examples of this kind are obvious in all times and stories. 5. Next comes the choosing of the younger sons of great Princes into the rank of Cardinals, which obligeth the whole Stock on Family to the Papal Throne: that being a means whereby young Princes are preferred without charge to their Fathers, or any diminution of the Regal Patrimony. 6. And as by these courses he holds in with all Christian Princes generally, which are of the Religion of the Church of Rome: so hath he fastened more particularly on the King of Spain; whereof we shall speak further when we come to that Country.  
2. Concerning the second. So it is that their Estate hath the firmest foundation of any, as being built on the consciences of men possessed with an opinion of their Infallibility, and that undoubted power they pretend unto, not only in Heaven and upon Earth, but also over Hell and Purgatory. 2. Then comes the innumerable Preferments at their disposing, for men of all humours, and affections: as having in their power the disposing of almost all the Benefices and Bishoprics in Italy, half of those in Spain, divers in Germany and France, which keepeth the Clergy, and all such as are that way studied, in a perpetual dependence upon that See; especially enjoying by it many notable Privileges, which those of the Temporalty are not capable of. 3. Consider next the multitude of Monks and Friars, whose very being depends wholly upon his Authority; every Monastery and Convent being a Garrison (as it were) to defend the Papacy, and train up a Militia of Spiritual Janissaries; men most affectionately devoted to his See and Service. Of these it is conceived that there are no fewer than a Million, one half whereof at least may be fit for action; and all maintained at other men's cost, themselves not disbursing a penny towards it. 4. Their Pardons and Indulgences are a great increase to their Revenue: some of them as unlimited as that of Pope Boniface the eighth, which was for 82000. years to all that could say such a Prayer of S. Augustine's; and that for every day, Toties, quoties. 5. Their practising on Penitents, whom they persuade in the very agony of their souls, that there is no salvation for them but by giving part of their estates unto the Church. 6. Nor have they found any small advantage to their Power and Patrimony, by the invention of Spiritual Fraternities, which are Appurtenances (as it were) to the Orders of Friars, and may in number perhaps equal them. Into these the Lay-people of all sorts, men and women, married and single, desire to be enrolled, as hereby enjoying the spiritual prerogatives of Indulgences, and a more speedy dispatch out of Purgatory.  
3. Concerning the third. 1. They deter the people from reading the Scripture, alleging unto them the perils they may incur by misinterpretation. 2. They breed an Antipathy between the Papists and the Protestants: insomuch that a Papist may not say Amen unto a Protestants Deo Gratias. 3. They debar them from all sound of the Religion, in prohibiting the Books of the Reformed Writers; and hiding their own Treatises, in which the Tenent of the Protestants is recited, only to be confuted; insomuch that in all Italy you shall seldom meet with Bellarmine's works, or any of the like nature to be sold. 4. They have under pain of Excommunication, prohibited the Italians from Travel and Traffic with Heretical Countries, or such places, where those contagious sounds and sights (as they term them) might make them return infected. 5. The Severity, or Tyranny rather, of the Inquisition, (of which we shall speak more at large when we come to Spain) crusheth not only the beginnings, but the smallest suspicions of being this way addicted. And 6ly. The people thus restrained from Travel, are taught to believe that the Pritestants are Blasphemers of God and all his Saints; that in Englard Churches are turned to Stables; the people are grown barbarous, and eat young children; that Geneva is a professed Sanctuary of Roguery, and the like. We have yet two later examples of their dealing in this kind. First, the gross slander of the Apostasy (or as they call it, the Reconciliation) unto their Church, of the Right Reverend Father in God Dr. King, not long since the Lord Bishop of London, a Prelate of too known a faith and zeal, to give occasion for such a calumny. The second, a book by them published, and commonly sold in Italy and France, containing a relation of God's Judgements, shown on a sort of Protestant Heretics, by the fall of an house in St. Andrews Parish in London, in which they were assembled to hear a Geneva Lecture, Octob. 26. A. D. 1623. By which dealing the simple people are made to believe that to be a judgement on us of the Protestant party, which the Authors of that Pamphlet well know to be a calumny in regard of us; and a sad chance (I will not say a judgement) which befell their own, by a fall of a Chamber in Blackfriars, where they were met to hear the Sermon of one Druris, a Popish Priest, and that too on the fifth of November in their own account, being the 26. of October before mentioned.  
The Popedom being thus cunningly and strongly founded, it cannot be, if the Popes had been chosen young, or of the same Family, (so that the Successor had not often crossed the designs of his Predecessor) but that this new Monarchy had been greater and better established, than ever the old Roman Empire was in her greatest glory. And to say truth, I have oft wondered with myself that some of the more active Popes, especially such as were chosen young, and had the happiness to descend of noble Families, did never seek the settling of this Estate in their own Posterity; especially considering the good Precedents which they had before them, both in sacred and in civil stories. The high Priesthood in the Church of Jewry went from Father to Son, and why should any man think it inconvenient to follow the example of Almighty God in making the high Priesthood in the Church of Christ to be also herediiary, not elective? The Saracens, who were as great Masters for wit and policy, as any those Ages did produce, pursued that precedent, governed by Hereditary Caliphs' many years together, until the Sultan's their Vicegerents (ambitiously affecting the Supreme Command) rooted out their races. And if the same Obligation lie on the Masters of Religions or mixed Orders, for preserving the Rules and Statutes of their foundations, as is upon the Pope by the fundamental Ordinances of the Conclave, as it seems to do, why might not the Popes as well dispense with those Constitutions, and turn the Popedom into an Hereditary Estate, as Albert of Brandenbourg, and Gotardus of Denmark, Masters of the Dutch Knights in Prussia and Livonia, in their times have done? Nor can I see, but that such an alteration as I speak of, might be altogether as contenting to the Princes of Christendom, as the like change from an unsettled popular Government to an hereditary Monarchy, was formerly unto the Provinces and People of the State of Rome. Of which it is affirmed by that notable Historian and Statesman Tacitus, Neque Provinciae illum rerum statum abnuebant, suspecto Senatus Populique imperio ob certamina potentium, & avaritiam Magistratuum; invalido Legum auxilio, quae vi, ambitu, postremo pecunia turbabantur. The Provinces (saith he) disliked not the alteration, to whom the Government of the Senate and People had been long distasted, by reason of the factions of the great ones, and covetousness of their Officers: the Laws affording no security at all, as being swayed up and down by force, ambition and corruption. The Popedom settled in one house, would prove more constant in the preservation of all Leagues and Treaties; more careful to preserve the interest of their Estate, more useful to the Confederates and Allies thereof upon all occasions, than it is at present: where the Popes so often change their sides, and shift their factions; the Successor many times esteeming it his greatest glory to rescind all the acts of his Predecessor. And possible enough it is, that Caesar Borgia, the son of Alexander the sixth, might have some such ends, when it was convenanted betwixt him and Lewis the twelfth of France, that being declared General of the Church's Forces, and giving his helping-hand to that King in the Conquest of Milan, he should be aided by him in recovering all the Lands of the Church, which the Dukes of Urbine and Camerine, the Families of the Malatesti, Baillons, and Bentivogli, with divers others of less note, did possess in Italy. Which having got into his hands, had not his Father's sudden death, and his own dangerous sicness happening at the same time, cut off his design, it had been a matter of no great difficulty (if of any at all) to have made himself absolute Master of Rome, and of all the Lands of the Church, and to have left the same established in the Borgian Family. 'Tis true, that such an alteration would be very distasteful to the ambition of the Cardinals, who by the deaths (natural or violent, it matters not) of the present Pope, aspire by all means both of love and money to that high dignity. But for my part, I cannot see how all the wit in the Conclave had been able to hinder it, if Alexander, on a purpose to poison some of that number whom he had invited to a Supper, by a mere mistake of his Cupbearer, had not poisoned himself, (even in the very heat of the business then almost effected) and so made frustrate the device.  
But passing by this imagination of an Hereditary Popedom, let us behold it as Elective, and look upon the form and order observed in it. Now the Election of the Pope is made most commonly in this place and manner. In the Pope's Palace on the hill Vatican, are among other buildings, sive Halls, two Chappells, and a Gallery seventy foot long. The Gallery is appointed for conference, one Chapel for the Mass, and for the Election; the other with the Halls, are for the Cardinal's lodgings. Every Hall hath two rows of Chambers, which are purposely for the time, made of green or violet cloth. To each Cardinal is allowed four servants, to lie in his chamber. They that are once within, are compelled, unless they be sick, still to continue there; and such as are once out, are no more permitted to go in: lest by that means, the Cardinals should maintain intelligence with any foreign Princes. To this Conclave (for by this name the place of the Election is called) is but one door, to which belongeth four locks, and as many keys. One key is in the keeping of the Cardinals; one, of the City-Bishops; one, of the Roman Nobility; and one, of the Master of the Ceremonies: There is in this door a Wicket or Hatch, which is opened only at dinners and suppers, whereof the Master of the Ceremonies keepeth a key. At this hole the Cardinal's servants receive their meat; every dish being first diligently searched, lest any Letters should be conveyed in them. As for the lodgings, they have neither holes nor windows to give light; so that there they make day of wax-candles: And lest the Pope should be made by force, both the City and Conclave are strongly guarded. When the Cardinals are going to Election, the privileges of the Cardinals are recited, which every one sweareth to observe, in case he be chosen Pope. Then the Master of the Ceremonies ringing a Bell, calleth them all to Mass: which ended, there is brought to every Cardinal a Chair, and therens a Scroll of all the Cardinal's names. Before the Altar is set a Table, covered with a purple cloth, whereupon is set a Chalice, and a Silver Bell, and about it six stools, on which sit two Cardinal-Bishops, two Cardinal-Priests, and two Cardinal-Deacons. Every Cardinal writeth his voice in a piece of paper, goeth to the Altar, prayeth God to guide him in the Election, putteth his voice into the Chalice, and departeth to his seat. The first Bishop taketh out all the papers, and delivereth them to the first Deacon; who unfoldeth each of them, readeth (without mentioning the name of the Elector) the name of the elelected: and every Cardinal in his particular Scroll, noteth how many voices every one hath. The account being made, the First Priest having the like Scroll, pronounceth who hath most voices: which done, the Priest ringeth a Silver Bell; at which call the Master of the Ceremonies bringeth in a pan of coals, and burneth all the little papers, wherein the names of the elected were written. He that hath the most voices (so that his voices exceed the proportion of two parts of three) is acknowledged Pope, and adored by the rest of the Cardinals: but if they exceed not this number, they must begin all anew. If any space of thirty days the Election be not fully ended, then must the Cardinals be kept from fire, light, and victuals, till they are fully agreed. The wicket which we before mentioned, is called the Golden Gate; at which stand an infinite number of poor people; on whom the new Pope, having opened that gate, bestoweth his Fatherly benediction; and remitteth to them all their sins. Then striketh he continually on the same door with a golden Mallet; which whilst he is doing, workmen without break it open. The chips, stones, dust, and dirt which falleth from the Gate, while it is opening, are gathered and preserved as choicest Relics; and the Golden Mallet is usually given to that Cardinal who is in most grace with the new Pope.  
This is the ordinary way of the Pope's Election; but subject to much Faction and Division amongst the Cardinals, and that in times of less deceit than, the present are. Insomuch as after the death of Pope Clement the fourth, the differences amongst them held for two years and more. Which gave occasion to one of them to say in scorn, that they must uncover the roof of the house, to make way for the Holy Ghost to come upon them. And there is now much more corruption and abuse in it than ever formerly; as buying of Voices, setting up some for stales, and tearing scrutinies; every Cardinal desiring to have a Pope of his own, or his Prince's Faction. So that we find it written of an old Sicilian Cardinal, who after long absence came to the Election of a Pope, where he expected that incessant prayers, as in times of old, should have procured some fit man to be pointed out to them for the Vicar of Christ; that finding nothing but canvasing, promising rewards, and threatening for Voices in the choice; ad hunc modum (saith he) fiunt Pontifices Romanis, and so returned into his Country, and saw Rome no more▪  
The ordinary Temporal Revenue of the Papacy arising out of Land-rents, Imposts vopn Commodities, and sale of Offices, Boterus maketh to be better than two Milliont of Crowns; but the extraordinary and Spiritual to be far beyond. For it is said of Pius Quintus, who sat Po●e six years only, that he got from the Spanish Clergy 14 Millions. And though he was a very great builder, which spent him a great deal of money, yet he so managed his Estate, that he laid up four millions of Crowns in the Castle of S. Angelo Sixtus the fifth took from the Jesuits at one clap 20000 Crowns of yearly rent (because they were too rich for men professing poverty) and having sat but five years, had costered up five Millions of Gold; four of which his successor Gregory the fourteenth spent in less than a year. Out of France they receive no less than a Million of Crowns yearly. Out of England when it was the Pope's Puteus inexhaustus, they and their followers extracted no less than 60000 Marks per an. which amounteth to 120000 pounds of our present money; and was more than the Kings standing Revenue did attain unto; Yet was this in the time of K. Henry 3. before their avarice and rapine was at the height. And of late days, no longer since than the reign of K. Henry the 8. besides their Peter-pences, which was an Annual rent upon every chimney in the Realm, first granted to the Pope by Offa King of the Merchant's, Anᵒ 730, or thereabouts, and afterwards confirmed by Ethelwolf the second Monarch of England; besides their first Fruits, Tenths, and all other exactions; it was made evident that in some few years than last passed, the Popes had received out of England no less than 160000 ˡ sterling, for the Confirmation of Episcopal Elections only. By which we may conjecture what vast sums they drew hence on all other occasions. Let other Country's subject to the Pope's authority be accordingly rated, and the total will amount to a sum incredible. Next add to this the sums of money they receive from particular persons, for pardons, for dispensations with unlawful Marriages, the profits arising from Pilgrimages, from the death and funerals of great persons, from the Indulgencies granted to Abbeys and Convents, in all which the Popes have a share; and it would puzzle a good Arithmetician to state his Intrad●. So truly was it said by Pope Sixtus the fourth, that a Pope could never want money as long as he was able to hold a pen in his hand. Yet notwithstanding, their Treasury for the most part is but low or empty. For 1. the State they keep, because of that great honour which they have above other Princes, which is to be maintained at a great expense (for the more worship the more cost, as the saying is) is very chargeable unto them; their ordinary Guards standing them in no less than 30000 Crowns per annum. 2. the large allowances which they are fain to give unto their Legates, Nuncios, and other Ministers, keep their coffers low; the entertainment of their Ordinary Nuncios in the Courts of Christian Princes, amounting to no less than 1200 Crowns a month to each. And 3. their greedy desire to enrich their Sons or Kinsmen with the treasures of the Church (with which humour Pope Sixtus the fifth, being of poor and obscure birth, was never touched) keeps them always bare. Add unto these the excessive gorgeousness of the Papal vestments (in which vanity every one seeketh to excel the other) especially that of their Triple Crown; which must needs put them to great charge, and continual issues of their treasure. And for an evidence of this last, we find that Clement the fifth, who first transferred his See to Avignon, to show his gallantry to the Fr●uch (probably unacquainted with the like fine sights) had his Crown thick set with Carbuncles and precious stones, one of which being lost by a fall from his horse, was valued at 6000 Ducats.  
As for the Forces of the Church, the Pope is able to impres● as great a number of Land-souldiers out of his estate, as any Prince or Commonwealth within the limits of Italy. Paul the 3. sent to the aid of Charles the fifth in the Wars of Germany twelve thousand Foot, and sive hundred horse, and yet raised his own Family to the Dukedom of Parma. Pius the fifth sent to the aid of Charles the ninth against the Hugonots 4000 Foot, and 1000 Horse; which Forces they maintained at their own charges. And when Pope Clement undertook the War of Ferrara, he raised out of his estate 20000 Foot, and 2000 Horse in less than a month, which was more than most Princes in Europe could possibly have done. And for the valour of his Soldiers, and ability of his Commanders, they retain so much (as before was said) of their Ancestors virtues, that there are thought to be many Families in the estate of the Church, able to furnish all the Commonwealths and Princes of Christendom with sufficient Captains. What, 〈◊〉 how little he is able to do by Sea, may be best seen out of the aid which he sent to the Venetians at the famous Battle of Lepanto; wherein he furnished them with no more than twelve Galleys; and those too hired of the Duke of Florence: The Venetians in the Adriatic, and the Florentines in the Tuscan Seas, having all the Trade, and consequently all the power in the seas of Italy. 'Tis true the Pope was bound by the capitulation to bear the fifth part of the charge of the war, and with the help of the rest of the Princes of Italy (who were to march under his colours) to set forth 50000 Foot, and 4500 Horse; which is as great an Argument of his riches and power by land, as the other is of his weakness at sea.  
Having a purpose in the prosecution of this Work to mention such particular Orders of Knighthood, as most Countries have given beginning to, I will here set down the Orders of such Popish Spiritual Knights or Friars, which his holy benediction hath erected, and ●at allowance doth maintain. And for our better proceeding, we will begin with the original of a Monastical life; and then we will make special mention of some of the Romish Votaries of both sexes. Know then that under the seventh Persecution raised against the Church by Decius, one Paulus, born at Thebes in Egypt, retired to a private cave under the foot of a Rock, Anᵒ 260. Here he is said to have lived one hundred years, and to have been seen of no man but one Anthony, who was at his death. This Anthony was the first that followed the example of Paulus; a man of a noble house, and one that sold all his estate, that he might the more privately enjoy himself. He lived an hundred and fifty years, and is called the Father of the Monks. To these beginnings, doth Polydore Virgil refer the original of the Monks, and religious orders; the name Monk▪ coming from the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because of their lonely and solitary lives. Those of the religious orders are called Fratres, and in English Friars, from the French word Frere, which signifieth a Brother; and that, either because of their brotherly cohabitation; or else because they are Fratres in malo, brethren in mischief and design.  
The foundation of Monastical life thus laid by Paulus, and Anthony, the world increased so fast in Monks and Eremites, that it seemed necessary to prescribe them orders. Hereupon Saint Basil gathered them together, living formerly dispersed; and is said to be the first that built them Monasteries. He is also said to have ordained the three Vows of Poverty, Chastity, and Obedience; to have instructed them in good Arts, true Religion, and in the service of God, with Hymns, Prayers, and Watching. Of this order there are not many in the Latin Church, but good plenty of them in the Greek. They are bound to abstain from all kind of flesh, and are called Monks of S. Basil, by the name of that Father; amongst the Writings of which Father, the Rules for these Monastic are set down at large.  
2 The next who prescribed Orders was S. Augustine, born in the year 350, who being thirty years of age, is said to have obtained a Garden without the walls of Hippo for private contemplations. Twelve only he assumed into his society, living with them in all integrity, and wearing a leathern Girdle to distinguish them from Monks. Hence came the present Austin Friars, or the Eremites of S. Austin, as others call them. Of such esteem formerly in the University of Oxford, that all who took the degree of a Master of Arts, were to submit themselves to their Oppositions in the public Schools, and receive approbation from them; from whence the form, in Augustinensibus responderit vel opposuerit, still retained among them. There house in London stood in Broadstreat, of which a part of the Church still standeth, converted to a Church for the use of the Dutch; the rest demolished, and in the place thereof a stately Mansion erected by Sir William Pawlet the first Marquis of Winchester, and Lord Treasurer of England. These make the first order of the Friar's Mendicants. The first Monastery of them was erected at Paris by William Duke of Guien, Anᵒ 1155: and Anᵒ 1200, they began to flourish in Italy, by the favour of John Lord of Mantua▪ The other branches of this Tree, are 1 the Monks of S. Hierom, 2 the Carmelites, 3 the Crouched Friars, and 4 the Dominicans.  
1 The Monks of Saint Hierom challenge their original from the worthy Father of the Church so called. They flourish especially in Spain; where there are thirty two Monasteries of them; their chief House being Saint bartholomew's of Lupiena; and have taken unto themselves the Rule of Saint Austin. Their Robe is a white Cassock, under a tawny Cloak.  
2 The Carmelites, so called from Mount Carmel in Syria, pretend their original from Elias, and John the Baptist. They only allowed at first the rule of S. Basil; and were confirmed in Europe by Honorius the third. They are by some called Jacobines, from a Church dedicated to Saint james, where they had their first Convent; and by us, the White Friars, from the colour of their habit. Their house in London stood in Fleetstreet, converted since into a dwelling of the Earls of Kent, besides other Tenements. Their Rule was afterwards corrected according to the Rule of Saint Austin; by Donna Eresba (or Teresa) a Spanish woman, who made them also certain Constitutions, confirmed by Pius the fourth, Anᵒ 1565.  
3 The Friars of S. Cross, Crossed, or Crouched Friars, were first ordained by ●●riacus Bishop of Jerusalem, who showed to Helena the place where the Cross was hidden: hence this Order, which being almost decayed, was restored first by Urban the second, and afterwards by Innocent the third, under the rule of Saint Austin. Their Robe is Watchat, and in their hands they carry the figure of the Cross. Their house in London near the Tower, still retains its name.  
4 The Dominioans, or Friar's Preachers, were instituted by Saint Dominik a Spaniard. He puts himself in this Order with sixteen of his Disciples under the Rule of Saint Austin, Anᵒ 1206, and had his device confirmed by Honorius the third. Their duty is to preach the Gospel in all places unto the farthest parts of the world; which both they did, and their successors since have done, not at home only, but in India and America, with great zeal and diligence. They are called by us Black Friars, from the colour of their habits, and are the 3. Order of Friars Mendicans. Their house in London stood near Ludgate, and took up the whole Precinct which is still called Blackfriars, though nothing be remaining of it but the very name.  
3 The third that prescribed Orders was S. Benedict, born at Nursia, in the Duchy of Spoleto, Anᵒ 472. He gathered the Monks of Italy together, gave them a Rule in writing, caused them to be called Benedictines, or Monks of Saint Benedict; and lived till he had seen twelve Monasteries ●illed with them. After his death this Order grew so populous, that there have been of it 29 Popes, 200 ardinals, 1603 Arch-Bishops, 4000 Bishops, and 50000 Canonised Saints. Their habit is a loose Gown of black, reaching down to the ground, with a Hood of the same; anunder-garment of white woollen, and boots on their legs. The other principal streams of this Fountain are, first, the Monks of Clugnia, secondly of Carthusia, thirdly of Cisteaux, fourthly the Celestines.  
1 The Monks of Clugnie, are so called from the Abbey of Clugnie in the County of Burgundy; the Abbot whereof, by name Odo, was the first that reform the Benedictines then fallen from their former integrity, Anᵒ 913. He obtained of the Popes and Emperors, that all such Abbeys as would come under the compass of his Reformations (which were in all about two hundred) should be called the Congregation of Clugni, and that they might call their Chapiters', &c.  
2 The Carthusians were first instituted by one Bruno a Germane Doctor of Divinity at the Town of Carthusia in Dauphin, Anᵒ 1080: His followers, which were at the first but six, have at this day 93 Monasteries. They eat no flesh, live by couples, labour with their hands, watch, pray, and never meet together but on Sundays. Their house in London by corruption and long tract of time, got the name of the Charter-house (the Monks themselves being corruptly called the Charter-house Monks) now better known by the name of Suttons Hospital; from the Hospital of the Foundation of Richard Sutton, a wealthy Citizen of London.  
3 The Monks of Cisteaux were first instituted by one Robert, Abbot of Molesme, Anᵒ 1090 or thereabouts; who together with 21 of the most religious of his Covent, retired to Cisteaux in Burgundy Duchy; hence the name. About five years after, one Bernard, a great Lord, became of their Order, who built and repaired for them 160 Abbeys. Their Robe is a white Cassock, girt with a Girdle of wool, the rest black. They were by us called White Monks; and the common Benedictines, Black Monks; both from the colour of their habits.  
4 The Celestines owe their original to Peter de Moron, a Samnite, born Anᵒ 1250; who being afterwards for his sanctity chose Pope, was called Celestine the fifth. He reform the Benedictines, then much degenerated; and had his Order confirmed by Gregory the 11. There are at this present 124 Monasteries of them.  
The 4 and last that prescribed new Orders to the monastics, was Saint Francis of Assis in the Duchy of Spoleto. He fell from Merchandise, which was his first profession, unto the study of Religion, going barefoot, and behaving himself very penitently; whereupon, great store of Disciples following him, he gave them a Rule in writing; by which they are bound to profess absolute beggary, and are not permitted to carry any money about them, or more victuals than will for the present serve themselves and their Brethren. This they observe punctually in their own persons, but give themselves to have a Boy with them, to do both without scruple. S. Francis desired they should be called Minors, to show their humility; but they are generally called Franciscans by the name of their Founder: By the French called Cordeliers, because of the knotty Cord which they wear about them instead of a Girdle; by us, the Grey Friars, from the colour of their upper Garment. Their house in London stood near Newgate, of which the Church, the Cloisters, and some other the public Offices do still stand entire; the whole converted to an Hospital for poor Children by King Edward the sixth, in the latter end of his reign, now best known by the name of Christ Church. Their Rule and Order was confirmed by Innocent the 3d d, a oh 1212, and is the fourth and last of the Friar's mendicants, or begging Friars. The other principal Children of this Father, be 1 the Minimies; and 2 the Capouchins.  
1 The Friar's Minims, were first founded by Franciscus de Pola, a Neapolitan, Anᵒ 1450 according to a corrected copy of the rule of S. Francis of Assis. His followers keep always a true Lenten fast, unless in case of sickness. Their Robe is a dark tawny, an hood of the same hanging to their girdles.  
2 The Capouchins, (so called from their cowl or capouch) were ordained by one Matthew Basci of Ancona. Friar Lewis, his companion, obtained for them of the Pope, the habit and rule of S. Francis, An. 1526. In the space 42 years they increased to 2240 associates, had 222 Monasteries, and were divided into 15 Provinces. They are bound by their Rule to spend their time in prayer; and are generally thought to be the devoutest of all the Orders Monastical.  
I should now speak of the Jesuits, but that I cannot bring them under any rule, as being a people neither simply Lay nor Priests, nor merely secular, nor regular, but all together. They were founded by Ignatius Loyola, born in Navarre, who being in his youth addicted to the wars, was lamed in one of his legs: after which maim betaking himself to the study of Religion, he framed this order, consisting at the first of ten only. Paul the third did confirm it, An. 1540 confining the number within sixty; which he after enlarged ad infinitum. They are now the greatest Politicians, soundest Scholars, and chiefest upholders of the Romish See: so that the only way to re-establish the Romish Religion in any Land, is to plant a College of Jesuits in it. To the three vows of Poverty, Obedience, and Chastity, common to all other orders, Ignatius at the institution of this, added the Vow of Mission: whereby his followers are bound to obey their General, or the Pope, without demanding any reason, in all dangerous and hazardous attempts whatsoever, whether it be undertaking some tedious voyage, for the propagation of the Romish Religion, or the massacring of any Prince whose life is a hindrance to their proceedings. It is reported, that a Jesuit being in the midst of his Mass, which they call the sacrifice of the Altar, was sent for by Ignatius; to whom leaving off his Mass he went immediately. Ignatius having no business wherein to employ him, told him, he only sent for him to try his obedience; and withal profanely added, that Obedience is better than sacrifice: and this is called the blind obedience of the Jesuits. To leave them then as they are, the greatest disturbers of the quiet of Europe, I have heard a worthy Gentleman, now with God, say many times, that till the Jesuits were taken from the Church of Rome, and the peevish Puritan (or Presbyterian) Preachers out of the Churches of Great Britain, he thought there would never be any peace in Christendom; with what a true presaging spirit, the event hath showed.  
Corrivals with the Jes●ites in power and learning, and almost conaetaneous in point of time, are the Oratorians, founded by Philip Nerio a Florentine, An. 1564, who marking the great sway which the Jesuits began to have, and the danger which the Church might run if that Order were not equally balanced by some other of as much ability, first established this, consisting altogether of Priests; that by their diligence in preaching of the lives of the Saints, and other heads of practical and moral duties, they might divert the torrent of the people's affection from the brood of Ignatius. The renowned Cardinal Caesar Baronius, Francis Bourdino, afterwards Bishop of Avignon in France, and one Alexander Fidelis, were the three first whom he admitted to his Rule: initiated in S. Hieroms Church at Rome by Pope Pius the fourth with great zeal and cheerfulness; to whom, as to some of his Predecessors, the power and practices of the Jesuits were become suspicious. They increased speedily (being countenanced on so good grounds) to great numbers, and a proportionable Revenue: as much esteemed of for their knowledge in Ecclesiastical History, and Practical Divinity, as the others for Philosophy, Tongues, and the study of Controversies; and more accepted of in most places, because not usually intermeddling in affairs of State. So evenly looked on by the Popes, that the Jesuits could not obtain the Canonization of their Ignatius, till the Oratorians were grown rich enough to celebrate that of their Nerius also, which happened in the short Popedom of Gregory the 15. An. 1622.  
To conclude this discourse of Monks and Friars, I will say somewhat of the severest kind of Recluse, which is the Anachoret, or Anchoret, so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because they use to live retired from company. They are kept in a close place, where they must dig their graves with their nails; badly clad, and worse dieted, not to be pitied, because their restraint of liberty is voluntary; yet to be sorrowed for in this, that after such an earthly Purgatory, they shall find instead of an Euge bone serve, a Quis quaesivit de manibus vestris.  
But concerning these Orders of Monks and Friars, certain it is, that at their first institution they were a People much reverenced for their holy life; as men that for Christ's sake had abandoned all the Pomps and Vanities of the world. And questionless they were then a People altogether mortified, and who by their very aspects would gain upon the affection of the hardest heart; insomuch that not only mean men, but great personages also did desire to be buried in Friar's weeds, as Francis the 2d, Marquess of Mantua, Albertus Pius another Prince of Italy, and in late times the great Scholar Christopher Longolius. But as Florus saith of the Civil Wars between Caesar and Pompey, Causa hujus Belli, eadem quae omnium, nimia felicitas; we may say also of these Friars, The greatness of their wealth, which many on a superstitious devotion had bequeathed unto them, brought them first to a neglect of their former devout and religious carriage; next to a wretchlesness of their credits, and consequently into contempt: so that there was not a people under heaven that was more infamous in themselves, or more scornfully abused by others. Hence the vulgar sayings of the people, that Friars wear crosses on their breasts, because they have none in their hearts; and that when a Friar receiveth the Razor, the Devil entereth into him, and the like. Nay, Sir Thomas Moor, who lost his head in the Pope's quarrel, sticks not in his Utopia, to call them Errones Maximos; and would have them comprehended within the Statutes of Vagabonds and sturdy Beggars. Now to show both the humours of Respect and Contempt used severally to these Monks and Friars, as men stood affected; there goeth a Tale, how the Lady Moor, Sir Thomas his wife, finding by chance a Friar's Girdle, showed it to her husband with great joy, saying, Behold, Sir Thomas, a step towards Heaven: whereunto with a scornful laugh he returned this answer, that he feared that step would not bring her a step higher. And as for their retiredness and solitary course of life, so it is that many Kings, especially of the Saxons in the time of their Heptarchy, have abandoned their Sceptres to enjoy it: And Barclay in his Argenis, under the person of Anaroestus, hath defended this in such Princes as have cloistered themselves to enjoy the solitude of a Covent. Which notwithstanding, Philosophers have defined a man to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, a Creature principally made for civil conversation; the Poets say, Nascitur indignè per quem non nascitur alter, that he dyeth indebted to the world who leaves no posterity behind him: and the Jews, which live in great numbers even in Rome itself, abhor this unsociable kind of living, and prefer a civil sociableness much before it; as to Nature more agreeable, to Man more profitable, and consequently to God more acceptable. And having spoken thus much of the Monks and Friars, descend we now unto the Nuns.  
And indeed I should much wrong the Friars, if I should deprive them of the company of their dearest Votaries; and therefore take somewhat of them also. Called anciently Moniales from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from their living alone; whence we also had the names of Monks and Monasteries: in the middle times called Nuns, from Nonna an Egyptian word, (for Egypt in old times was not meanly furnished with such Eremites) which also signifieth a solitary and lonely life. A word in some of the barbarous Latins very much in use. Scholastica the Sister of S. Benedict, was the first who collected them into companies, and prescribed them Rules. They are shaved, as Monks are, and vow (as they do) perpetual poverty and Virginity. Which last how well they keep, let Clemangis testify; who telleth us, that Puellam velare eadem est ac publicè eam ad scortandum exponere: to veil a Nun, and prostitute her for a common Harlot were terms equivalent. And one Robinson, who lived for a time in the English Nunnery at Lisbon, hath told us that he found an hole in their Garden-wall covered over with Mortar, in which were hidden the bones of many newborn children, which their unnatural Mothers had murdered and thrown in there. But of these I will instance only in two Orders, viz. that of S. Clare, as being the strictest; and that of S. Brigit, which enjoyeth most liberty.  
1. S. Clare was a Knight's daughter of Assis, where S. Francis was born, with whom she was co-temporary, and with whose austere life she was so affected, that she forsook her Father's house, and followed him. Having learned her Lirrie of that Frier-monger, she devised an Order of Religious women; and had it confirmed by Pope Honorius the third, Ano. 1225. Her followers vow Poverty and Virginity, as before was said, go barefoot, feed meanly, and are more straightened in their course of life, than those of any other Order. By their Foundress, out of a desire to conform the better to the Rule and Order of S. Francis, they were called Minorites, or Minores, and gave name to the place near the Tower-hill in London, where they had their house, called from them the Minories.  
2. S. Brigit was a Queen of Swethland, and coming to Rome on devotion, obtained of Pope Urban the third, Ano. 1370. or thereabouts, that Friars and Nuns might in some places live together. For being a Woman and a Widow she knew best (as it seemeth) what was good for both Sexes, and so devised such a Rule as contented both. But little needed this cohabitation or living together under the shelter of the same roof. For they had formerly been joined in carnal affections, though parted by walls; neither were the visitations of the Friars so fruitless, but that the Nuns did fructify by them. These Friars and Nuns though they lived under the same roof, are prohibited from coming to one another, but on special occasions: the Foundress so ordering it, that the Nuns should lie in the upper rooms, and the Friars in the lower. The Confessor also is denied access into their chambers, but shriveth them though an Iron-Grate, by which his lodging is parted from the Lady Abesse's. And herein lieth the Mystery of Iniquity. For Robinson, whom before I named, tells us, that at the time of his service in the English Nunnery at Lisbon, he was showed a way by which this uncharitable Grate, which seemed to keep the Friars from the company of their female friends, might be, and was on such occasions usually removed, and the access made free and open to each others beds. Which if it be truly said of these, may be suspected also in all the rest of this Order, and in most also of the others.  
And now I return unto my Friars, which besides the maintenance which by their Founders is allotted for their present subsistence, are kept in a continual hope and possibility of attaining to the highest honours which that Church can give, if they continue constant in their due obedience. For there is not one of them which hopeth not to be the Prior of his Convent; 2. Provincial of his Order in that Country where he liveth; 3. and then the General of his Order. Next, none more likely than the Generals to be chosen Cardinals, and out of the Cardinals one of necessity must be chosen, and why not he, as well as any of the pack, to be Pope of Rome? So firm and sweet a Companion of man is Hope, that being the last thing which leaves him, it makes all toils supportable, all difficulties conquerable.  
The Popedom containeth Archbishops 3. Bishops 54.   

The Dukedom of URBINE.  
ENvironed on all sides with the Lands of the Church, 
Urbine  save where it coasteth on the Adriatic, lies the Dukedom of URBINE, having on the East Marca Anconitana; on the West, Romagna, or Romandiola; on the North, the Adriatic Sea; on the South, the Apennine. It is in length about sixty miles, and some thirty five miles in the breadth: within which round lie intermixed some Estates of the Church, of which the Duke is a Fendatary, and to which he payeth 2240. Crowns for a quitrent yearly.  
The soil is very fruitful of Corn, Wine, and Oil, plentiful of Figs and other fruits of most pleasant taste; and in a word, affording all things necessary for the life of man. But the air is generally unwholesome, especially about Pesaro and Fossombrune, by reason of the low flats and overflows of the water. The principal commodities which they vend abroad, are the wines of Pesaro, sold in great abundance to the Venetians; and dried figs which they vend unto Bologue and other places.  
The most famous River is Metaurus, (now called Metremo) and a famous one it is indeed, by reason of that great battle fought on the banks thereof, betwixt Asdrubal the brother of Annibal, and his Carthaginians; and the two Consuls Livius and Cl. Nero, in which after a long and hot dispute, the victory fell unto the Romans; there being 56000. of the Carthaginians slain, (as Livy writeth) and 5400. taken prisoners. Polybius speaks of a less number both slain and taken; and like enough it is, that Livy, to advance the honour of that Family, might enlarge a little. But whatsoever was the truth in this particular, certain it is, that this victory turned the tide of the Roman Fortune, which from this time began to flow amain upon them: the Citizens of Rome beginning at this time to trade and traffic, to follow their affairs, and make contracts and bargains with one another, which they had long forborn to do; and that with as secure a confidence as if Annibal were already beaten out of Italy. This famous River riseth in the Apennine hills, and passing by Fossombrune, a Town of this Dukedom, falls into the Adriatic.  
There are reckoned in this Dukedom seven Towns or Cities, and three hundred Castles: The principal of which are, 1. Urbine, one of the most ancient Cities of Italy, which both Tacitus and Pliny mention; a fair Town, well built, and the Duke's ordinary seat in Summer. It is seated at the foot of the Apennine hills, in a very rich and pleasant soil, built in the fashion of a Mitre, and therefore called Urbinas, quod urbes binas continere videbatur. Francisco Ubaldi the first Duke built here a very sumptuous Palace, and therein founded a most excellent Library, replenished with a great number of rare Books, covered and garnished with gold, silk, and silver, all scattered and dispersed in the time that Caesar Borgia seized on the Estate. Polydore Virgil, the Author of the History of England which passeth under his name, was a Native here: an History of worth enough as the times than were, except only in such passages as concernthe Pope (the Collector of whose Peter-pences he then was in England) whose credit and authority he preferreth sometimes before truth itself. 2. Pisaurum, now called Pesara, the strongest town of all the Dukedom, two miles in compass, and fortified according to the modern art of war: the fortifications of it being first begun by Francisco Maria, and perfected by Guido Ubaldi his son and successor; the ordinary seat of the Duke in winter, well garrisoned, and therefore trusted with the public Armoury. It is seated near the shore of the Adriatic, at the mouth or influx of the River Isaurus, which parts it from Romagna: populous, of handsome buildings, and a very strong wall; the soil exceeding rich, but the air so bad, that partly in regard of that, and partly by their eating of too much fruits, nothing is more frequent here than Funerals, especially in the month of August; few of the Inhabitants living to be fifty years old. 3. Senogaille, called anciently Sena Gallica, a strong and well-fenced City near the River Metaurus, over which there is a Bridge consisting of eighty Arches, made of that length, not so much in regard of the breadth of the Channel, as the frequent overflowings of that turbulent water. 4. Fossombrune, called in old Author's Forum Sempronii, for air and soil of the same nature with Pisaurum, bought by D. Frederick of Galeazzo Malateste, for thirteen hundred Florins of gold. 5. Cabo, or Cagli, on the Sea. 6. S. Leon, a good Town, and the chief of the Country of Montfeltre, which is a limb of this Dukedom. 7. Eugubium, or Augubio, of which nothing famous or remarkable. Of the Castles the principal are, Marivola, and the Rock of S. Leon, which were the last that held good for Duke Guidos Baldo against Caesar Borgia, Duke of Valentinoy, son to Pope Alexander the sixth, and the first which did return again under his obedience. For which cause when he fled the second time from the said Borgia, he dismantled all his other Castles, as being more likely to admit than resist the Invader, and these two last being very well fortified, he left to keep possession of the Country for him.  
Here is also within the limits of this Estate the Dukedom of CAMERINE, an ancient and well peopled Town, of a strong natural situation amongst the hills: an Estate holden of the Church by the noble Family of di Varena, till the time of Pope Paul the third, when Julia di Varena the heir hereof, conveyed it by Marriage unto Guido Ubaldi Duke of Urbino. But the Pope pretending an Escheat for want of heirs males, 
Venice.  made himself Master of it by force of Arms, and gave it to his son Piero Farnesi, whom afterwards with the consent of the College of Cardinals he made Duke of Parma, and settled Camerine on the Church, as it still continues.  
In the time of Conradin the last Duke of Schwaben, Urbine was first subdued by the Earls of Montfeltre, whose Successors increasing in power, added the Town and Territory of Eugubio to it. And in the bustles betwixt Lewis of Bavaria the Emperor, and Pope Clement the sixth, Ano. 1345. Gelosso di Montfeltre held it by no other Title but as the Emperor's Vicegerent. This Family enjoyed it till the year 1444. by the Title only of Earls of Montfeltre, and Lords of Urbine; when Frederick Ubaldi, for his singular and surpassing valour, was by Pope Eugenius the fourth, created the first Duke hereof. A man of such repute for all gallant qualities, that he was by King Henry the sixth made Knight of the Garter; in recompense of which high honour, the English to this day enjoy many privileges in these Dominions. Guido Ubaldi this Duke's son lost his Estate to Caesar Borgia; after whose death he did recover it again by the power and favour of Pope Julio the second; to whom succeeded Francisco Maria di Rovero, his sister's son, in whose Family it still continues, as will appear by this ensuing Catalogue of  

The Dukes of Urbine.  
1 Frederick Ubaldi, of the ancient Family de Monte feltro, 
1444.  the first Duke of Urbine, and one of the Knights of the honourable Order of the Garter.  
2 Ghido Ubaldi, son of Frederick, for a while outed of this Dukedom by Caesar Borgia. He was Knight also of the Garter.  
3 Francisco Maria de la Rovero, sister's son and next heir to Guido Ubaldi, was in his own right Lord of Senogallia, and had Pisa●ro from the Pope in reward of his many services done unto the Church, disseized for a while by Pope Leo the tenth.  
4 Lawrence de Medici's, Father of Catharine di Medici's the French Queen, and of Alexander, the first Duke of Florence, was for a while made Duke of Urbine by Pope Leo the tenth, (being of that Family) but lost it shortly after to Duke Francisco; who after the death of Pope Leo, recovered his Estates again, and died possessed of the Dukedom.  
Guido Ubaldi II. 
1538.  son of Duke Francisco.  
6 Francisco Maria II. son of Guido the second.   
The Revenues of this Dukedom are said to be 100000, Crowns per annum, but might be raised to a greater sirm, did not the Duke prefer the love and ease of his Subjects before the filling of his own coffers. He is able to raise 1200. good Soldiers out of his Estate; and more his people would supply if he had occasion. The Arms hereof Azure, a Tower Argent, environed with Flower de Lyces Or.  
Here are in this Dukedom Archbishops 10. Bishops 3.   

The signory of VENICE.  
WEst of the Lands of the Church, from Romandiola to the Alps, lie the Italian Provinces of the State of VENICE; that is to say, Marca Trevigiana, Friuli, Histria, and some Lands in the Golf near the City itself. Besides which it containeth a great part of Dalmatia, together with the Island Candie, Corfu, Cephalonia, Zant, Ithaca, Cythera, and certain others of less note. The length of their Dominions both by Sea and Land, extending above a thousand miles, but the breadth not answerable.  
The nature of the soil, and the principal Rivers which refresh it, we shall see anon in the description of the Provinces before mentioned; according to which Provinces, and the chief Cities of them, the Character of the people is best taken: it being said proverbially by the Italians, that the Venetians themselves are stately, crafty and greedy; the Veronians studious and faithful; the Paduans fierce, the Vincentians eager on Revenge, those of Friul● grateful and inconstant; those of Histria neither long-livers, nor of very great courage. That in the conduct of a war, those of Venice bring silver, those of Treviso swords; that the Brescians are fit to dig in trenches, those of Bergomo to lay Ambushes, those of Milan to manage Horses. And of the women it is said, that those of Crema are deceitful, those of Venice insolent, those of Venice insolent, those of Vincentia constant, those of Verona gracious, those of Treviso jealous, those of Brescia diligent, and the Bergomasques crafty.  
But not to dally longer in these Proverbial Characters, certain it is that the Venetians themselves do affect a great deal of gravity in their actions, speak very little at the Table; very severe where they have authority, and many times in the excess. And yet such is the constant temper of their Government, and their impartiality in doing Justice, 
Trevigiana.  that they are very well obeyed, and generally well beloved of all their subjects (notwithstanding the heavy pressures which are laid upon them) is well in Italy as without. Esteemed in former times good soldiers both by Sea and Land, maintaining wars continually with the Turks in Palestine; the Emperors of Constantinople in Greece itself; the Genoese by sea; and their neighbours of Italy in this Continent. But of late times they have more studied to preserve than enlarge their Dominions; and that too by rather expense of money, than the loss of blood; and by wit rather than by valour. So fortunate in this last kind of practice, that Machiavelli observed of them in his time, that whatsoever they lost by War, they recovered by Treaty. A pregnant evidence whereof we shall see anon.  
To proceed now to the description of such of the Provinces and Estates of this Commonwealth, as pass under the account of Italy, they are as before was said, 1. Marca Trevigiana, 2. Friuli, 3. Histria, 4. the Italian Isles of the Adriatic; of which now in order, leaving the rest to be considered in their proper places.  
1. MARCA TREVIGIANA is bounded on the South, with the Rivers Athesis, and Po, by which parted from the Territory of Ferrara, and the rest of Romagna; on the West, with the Rivers Mineius and Sarca, and the Lake of Benacus, (now called Lago de Garda from a little Town of that name adjoining) by which parted from the Duchy of Milan; on the East, with Friuli, and the Golf of Venice; and on the North, with the Alps, which divide it from Tirolis, a Province of Germany.  
The principal rivers of this tract are, 1. Brenta, called anciently Meduacus Major, which rising in the Alps not far from Trent, and watering the fields of Milan, passeth into the Sea near the City of Venice, making up the famous Haven of Malamocco. 2. Bachil●o, called anciently Meduacui Minor, which riseth also in the Alps, and passing by Vincenza, emptieth itself into the Brenta; And 3. Athesis, now called Adige, which springeth also out of the Alps not far from Trent, and having taken many lesser streams into its channel, passeth by Verona, and after is divided into two great branches; whereof the one falls into the Sea, the other loseth itself in the midst of the Marshes.  
The chief Cities of it are, 1. Vincentia, one of the twelve Cities built by the Tuscans or Etrurians on this side of the Apennine; pleasantly seated on the banks of the River Bachilio, and another navigable water called Retone (Erotenus formerly.) The Territory of the City not more large than fruitful, abounding with all store of fruits, and yielding an excellent kind of wine, which from thence is vended unto Venice. The buildings of it for the most part of polished stone, whereof the fields adjoining afford special Quarries; and the Inhabitants generally an industrious people, making great quantity of Silks, with which they do adorn themselves, and supply their Neighbours. 2. Treviso, seated on the banks of the River Silus, which runneth through the midst of it, in the middle of a large and spacious plain, abounding even to admiration, with most excellent wheat, and all other necessaries. A City of no ancient name, not mentioned by Ptolemy, or others of the old Geographers: but of sufficient note in the later times for being the residence or seat of those Provincial Governors (Marquesses they are sometimes called) which the Lombardian Kings sent hither to defend their borders. Hence it gave name to all the Country, in Latin called Marca Trevisiana, or Tarvisana as some call it: taken by the Venetians, and lost again divers times; but was finally conquered Ao. 1380. or thereabout, Antoni● Venieri being Duke of Venice. 3. Milan, formerly called Patavium, built by Antenor, whose Tomb is still here to be shown. The University was established Ano. 1220. famous for Physicians, who have here a Garden of Simples; and for the birth of Livy the Historian, Julius Paulus a Civil Lawyer his Co-temporary, L. Aruntius Stella, and C. Valerius Flaccus two famous Poets celebrated by Martial: and in the later times of Marsilius Patavinus a Minorite Friar, who wrote so learnedly in behalf of the Emperor against the Pope, Fr. Zabarella the Civilian, Mic. Savanorola the Physician, Maginus the Geographer, and divers others. It was much renowned in former times for the humanity of the men, and chastity of the women; which last so eminent and famous, that as chaste as one of Milan, grew into a Proverb. Hereunto alludeth Martial, speaking of his lascivious writings.  
Tu quoque nequitias nostri lususque libelli,  
Uda puella leges, sis Patavina licet.  
Young maids my wanton lines will long to see,  
And read them o'er, though Patavines they be.  
The City, after much vicissitude of fortune, fell into the power of the Venetians, with all her Territories, being in compass one hundred and eighty miles, Ano. 1400. Michael Steno then Duke; Vicenza being won about the same time also. 4. Brescia, the second City for bigness and beauty in all Lombardy. It is also the seat of an Archbishop, who is an Earl, a Marquis, and a Duke. Her Territories are in length one hundred, in breadth fifty miles, which the Citizens, together with their freedom, bought of Otho the Germane Emperor, but lost it to Philip Maria Visconti, Duke of Milan, Ano. 1421. to whom they yielded upon certain conditions; which being broken by the Duke, they yielded themselves unto the signory of Venice, Ano. 1434. Francis Foscari being then Duke; under whom it continueth to this day. The City is very populous, the air sound and good, the soil exceeding plentiful of corn, wine and fruits; 
Fruili.  and having in it Mines both of Iron and Copper, to the great enriching of the people. It was anciently the chief of the Cenomani, who coming out of Gaul, drove the Tuscans hence, and seated themselves in their habitations, till finally conquered by the Romans. It is situate on a little River called Garcia, which runneth through the middle of it; and is said to contain at this time 50000. Inhabitants. 5. Verona, so called (as some conceit it) quasi vere una; or as others, quasi Brenona, because built by Brennus; both false and frivolous alike. It is situate on the banks of the River Athesis, and is counted the first City of the second rank of the Cities of Italy; proud in the birth of Catullus, a well-known Poet, and in an Amphitheatre (a remainder of the Roman greatness) able to contain 80000. persons. The Territories hereof are sixty five miles in length, forty miles in breadth; enriched with many medicinal herbs, (espocially on Mount Baldus, an hill therein) where the Physicians go a Simpling. 6. Bebriacum, or Bedriacum, as some Writers call it, two days march from Verona, now a small Burrough named Labinia, and never of any great note when it was at the best. Remarkable in the Roman stories for the defeat here given by the Vitellians unto Otho's Army; and after by Vesbasians forces unto those of Vitellius. By Tacitus called in that regard duabus Romanis cl●dibus notus & infanstus Vicus. 7. Crema, a Town of no great Antiquity, but situate in a wealthy soil, well peopled, and as well built for the private Edifices: so strongly fortified, that it is reckoned the chief Bulwark of the Signory of Venice, against the milanese, on the borders of which State it standeth. First built about the year 970. by some remnants of the Anthropomorphites, who on the destruction of Pornassus (a Town of Lombardy) where before they lived, abjured their heresy, and were permitted to build here. Honoured in succeeding times with a See Episcopal, either the birthplace or preferment of John Cremensis, a Roman Cardinal, who being by Pope Honorius sent into England, Ano. 1225. to dissuade the Clergymen from Marriage, and having in a Convocation of the Clergy called for that purpose, highly advanced the honour of the single life, and showed the inconvenience and unfitness of Marriage in men preferred unto Holy Orders, was the night following (to the great discredit both of his cause and person) taken in Adultery. B. Bergom●, a right ancient Town, but very well built, seated upon the side of an hill, and having a very large and beautiful Suburb, the Territory whereof hath many rough and craggy Mountains, the Spurs and excursions of the Alps, but withal many rich and delightful valleys intermingled with them. The people of this City and Country are said to speak the coursest language of any in Italy, but to have as fine wits as the best. Places of more inferior note are, 1. Este, (Ateste in most Latin Writers) whence came the Family D'Este, late Dukes of Ferrara. 2. Liniacum, a strong Garrison on the borders of Mantua; as 3. Castel-France is towards Ferrara; and 4. Seravall, of most remarkableness for the great quantity of Armour which is therein made. 5. Feltrie, which still preserves its old name of Feltria.  
This Province being anciently a part of the Cisalpine Gaul, fell to the power of the Romans at the end of the second Punic war: and being conquered by the Romans did continue theirs, till first the Goths, and afterwards the Lombard's became Masters of it. Afterwards, in the fall of the Kingdom of Lombardie, it fell first unto the French, and after to the Germane Empire; from which by many mean conveyances, it came at last to Othocarus, King of Bohemia and Duke of Austria, who bought the same of Ulricus the last Duke of Carinthia. Upon a reconciliation made betwixt this Ottocarus and Rodolfus of Habspurg (than Emperor of Germany) it was added (together with Austria itself) unto the Patrimony of that Family, sold by Duke Leopold the ninth, to the Carraras', than Lords of Milan; in the ruin of whose Estate and Family it fell (together with that City) into the power of the Venetians, who still hold the same.  
2. FRIULI hath on the East the River Formio, which parteth it from Histria; on the West, Marca Trevisana, and a branch of the Alps; on the North, the main body of the Alps, which divide it from Germany; and on the South, the Adriatic Sea, or Golf of Venice.  
It is called Forum Julii in the Latin, (of which that of Friuli is derived) from Julius Caesar, who conducting his Armies this way, built the Town so named; and from that march of his, the Alps adjoining, as ' eye thought, had the name of Juliae. By some Writers of the middle times it is called Regio Aquilegiensis, as appertaining for the most part, by the gift of the Emperors Otho and Conradus, to the Church, or Patriarchate of Aquileia; and by the common people of Venice for the most part Patria, or the Country, because from these parts they derive their first Original.  
The Country is in a manner square, each side fifty miles, watered with Rivers of 1. Hydra, heretofore of no small fame for the silver Mines. 2. Tiliaventum, rising from the Alps, and navigable towards the later end of its course. 3. Natisco, neighboured by the famous City of Aquileia. 4. Tiniavus, mentioned in the first of the Aeneids; which rising out of the Alps, and running under ground for the space of 330. furlongs, breaketh out again; and being branched into nine Channels, falleth into the Gulf or Bay of Trieste. By Niger it is now called Lareina; but by Leender named Timavo. The Soil sufficiently fruitful, except towards the Alps, and yielding a very pleasant Wine, which Pliny did prefer before any in Italy.  
Towns herein of most note and consequence, 1 Aquileia, or Aquilegia, as some call it, made the Metropolis first of the Province of Histria and Venetia, 
Histria.  by the Emperor Antoninus; as afterwards of the whole Diocese of Italy by the Western Emperors. Honoured in that regard with the seat of the Praefectus Praetorio, and of his Vicarius or Lieutenant; translated from Milan to this City, as the Gate of Italy, by which the Barbarous Nations used to make their entrance: never so like to be shut out as by the power aod presence of so great an Officer. After his time, and on this occasion, the Bishop here of had the title of Patriarch: And here the Patriachall See continued till the City was destroyed by Attila that furious Hun, and then removed to Venice, as the safer place, and settled in the Isle of Grada; yet so, that the succeeding Bishops of Aquileia (for they stayed at Venice only till the times were quiet, etc.) do still retain the dignity, and name of Patriarches, as well as those of Venice do, and with better reason. For besides the honour which it had in being made the seat of the Praefectus Praetorio, it had been formerly more honoured with the residence of Augustus Caesar, who here kept his Court, whence it had the name of Roma altera, or a second Rome; and of Tiberius, who here lived with Julia the daughter of the said Augustus, before his coming to the Empire. As for the City itself, it is situate on the River Natisco, but not well inhabited at the present; partly because of the ill Air, but principally by the ill neighbourhood of Venice, attracting all Trade unto itself. Most memorable in old story for enduring that famous siege against Maximinus for the safety of the Empire of Rome, and her Emperors Maximus and Balbinus. In whose cause the Citizens hereof were so resolutely faithful, that they bereft the women (willing to lose that invaluable ornament of their sex for the common good) of the hair of their heads, to make Bowstrings withal. Nor did this pious constancy of theirs want an happy issue. For they beheld the Tyrant headless under their walls (slain by the hands of his own Soldiers) and saw the Metropolis of the World preserved by their loyalty. And yet the matter was not ended with the death of the Tyrant; the Soldiers and people laying hands on his children also, and putting all unto the sword. Of which cruelty being asked the reason, they returned this Answer, that not a whelp was to be spared of so ill a litter; none of the brood of such a Cur; or in the language of the Author, Pessimi Canis, Catulus non est relinquendus. 2 Trieste, of old called Tergestum, from whence a spacious Bay adjoining had anciently the name of Sinus Tergestinus, and is now called Golfo di Trieste. The Bay replenished principally with the water of the River Timans, which with many streams doth fall into it, and is therefore by the inhabitants of that Golf or Bayliff, called Fons maris, as Polybius in Strabo telleth us. The town of no greater Antiquity than observation, mentioned by Pliny and some others of the Ancient Writers, but not else considerable. 3 Montfalcon, famous for its medicinal Herbs. 4 Porto Gruate, an Haven-town, as the name importeth. 5 Concordia, in former times of no small esteem; but so demolished by Attila the Hunn, that it is now nothing but a ruin. 6 Utina, or Uden, the fairest and largest at this time of all the Province, containing about five miles in compass, and about 15000 Inhabitants. Honoured for a time with the patriarchal See, removed hither from Aquilegia, at some siege thereof: of which though long ago deprived, yet it is still the ordinary seat of the Procurator or Provincial Governor, sent from Venice hither. 7 Palma, a new Town, as being built by the Venetians no longer since than the year 1583, but held to be the best fortified of any in Italy. 8 Cividad de Austria, first built by Julius Caesar, in some of his marches towards Gaul, by whom it was called Julium, after Forum Julii, whence the name of Friul● (Districtus Forojuliensis, as the Latins call it) came unto the Province. But being taken and repaired by some Princes of the Austrian Family (on the borders of whose Estate it standeth) it got this new name of Cividad de Austria.  
This Province anciently was one of the four Dukedoms founded by the Lombard's when they conquered Italy; the other three being Turin, Benevent, and Spoleto. The Family of the Berengarii were once Dukes hereof; three of which were of special fame, and two of them Competitors for the Kingdom of Italy. But this Family being suppressed by the Emperor Otho, he have a great part of the Country to the Church of Aquileia, to which almost all the rest was added by the Emperor Conrade; yet so that there were divers petit Lords who had good estates in it; the name of Duke remaining unto some of the ancient race. One of which named Luitprandus, envying to the Venetians their increase of Dominion, made war against them; which ended in the loss of his Country, Anᵒ 1020, or thereabouts, ever since subject to that State: the Patriarch of Aquileia (whose authority in this Country began to decline, in the rising of the States of Venice) surrendering all his interess also to that powerful signory, as better able to defend it against all Pretenders.  
HISTRIA is environed on the East, West, and South, with the Adriatic, in the manner of a Demy-Iland, or Peninsula, save where it toucheth on Friuli; and on the North is parted from Carinthia with the Alps of Germany. The Country very woody, and full of Quarries, affording materials to Venice both for ships and houses; not comparable for fertility to the rest of Italy; and of air so sickly and unwholesome, that the Venetians were compelled to hire people to dwell there, and afterwards to grant them many large immunities. It is two hundred miles in compass, watered with the Rivers of Formio, which they now call Risano; 2 Nanportus, called at this day Quietus; and 3 Arsia, which runneth into the Gulf of Quevero, called anciently Sinus Flanaticus.  
The chief Towns of it are, 
The Adriatic Isles of Venice.  1 Cape de Istria, called in Pliny's time Aegide, and being afterwards repaired by the Emperor Justine, was called Justinoplis. But being taken and destroyed by the Genoese, and rebuilt again, it took the name of Caput Histriae, or Cape d' Istria, because the principal of the Province, and a Bishops See. Of this See was Vergerius Bishop, about the time of Luther's first preaching in Germany; who with Antonio de Dominis Archbishop of Sp●lato, were of most note of any of these parts of the world that fell off from the Church of Rome to the Protestant party; and therefore shall be spoken of in more particulars; Spalleto in his proper place, and Vergerius hero. Being a man of great industry and eminent parts, he was by many of the Popes employed in Germany against Luther. In which negotiation he behaved himself with such dexterity, and gave such content unto the Pope, that Paul the third, An. 1541 intended to have made him Cardinal, had not some who envied him that honour, accused him of Lutheranism; to purge himself he began to write a Book, entitled, Against the Apostata's o● Germany; in the pursuit whereof, pondering Luther's reasons, he became of his opinion; which being known, he was driven from Justinople. He submitted himself and his cause to the Father● at Trent, but could not get a hearing. Thence he went to the D. of Man●ua, from him to the State of Venice; but nowhere finding protection, he retired unto the Grisons, and there preached, till Christopher Duke of Wittenberg, An. 1548, placed him in his University of Tubing, and there allowed him a sufficiency of maintenance. It was built by Justinus (as before) the Nephew of Just●man the Emperor, as a fortress against the incursions of the barbarous people. 2 Pola, built by the Colchians at the first coming hither; the name in their language importing as much as the place of banishment. It was after made a Roman Colony, and called Pictas Julia; but being first destroyed by Attila, after by the Genoese, it recovered the old name again, and still continueth with the title of a See Episcopal. It abutteth upon Sinus Flanaticus, or the Golf of Quevero. 3 Pazenze. 4 Pliun, 5 Cita Nova, all of them seated in the Midlands, and not much observable. 7 Rovigno, in a little Island, and mounted on an high hill, not unfruitful in Olives; beautified with a convenient Port, and that defended also by a very strong Castle. The Town but poor, by reason of the ill neighbourhood of Venice, from which distant not above twenty miles, inhabited for the most part by Mariners, and skilful Pilots, hired by such ships as are bound for Venice to conduct them safely over the Bars of Malamocco. The adjoining mountainous and somewhat wild; but those mountains covered on the outside with Physical Simples, and yielding many Quarries of most excellent Marble, which so adorn the Venetian Palaces.  
It is recorded that the Histrians were a people of Colchis, who being sent by King Aetas to pursue Jason and the Argonauts, were driven up this Gulf; and either for fear of the King's anger, or not daring to venture their weak vessel to so long a voyage, as from hence to Colchis whence they came, stayed in this Country. It was after that time called Japidia, from Japis an Aet●lian who first planted here; and took the name of Istria from the Istri, a people on the banks of Ister, or Danubius, who made up a considerable part of this plantation. Siding with the Aetolians in their War against the Romans, and making many inroads and excursions on them, they were invaded first by Manlius, without leave of the Senate; and him they charged with such a fury, that they beat him out of his Camp. Where finding plenty of Wine, and all store of Provisions, they fell rowdly to it; till Manlius having rallied his men again, charged them in their Cups, and killed 8000 in the place; their miserable King being so hotly pursued by the Victors, that he was fain to kill himself for fear of Captivity. This was in Anᵒ V. C. ●75 Cl. Pulcher the next Consul perfected the conquest. Sempronius long time after that, Anᵒ sc. V. C. 625. reduced it to the form of a Province. So it continued till the time of Augustus Caesar, who joining it to that of Venice (or Venetia) made out of both the eleventh and last Region of Italy. Under the Romans they continued whilst that Empire stood, and after the decay thereof regained their liberties, which they enjoyed till by piracy molesting the Venetians, they lost many of their Towns to Duke Petro Candiano, An. 938; and the whole Country was made Tributary by the valour of the Duke Henry Dondol●, about the year 1190. After which many times rebelling, they were still reconquered.  
4 The fourth member of this estate with respect to Italy, are some LANDS in the Adriatic, which being principally under the command of this Commonwealth, is commonly called the Gulf of Venice; a Golf extending in length 700 miles, in breadth 140 miles, in some places less; so called of Adria once a famous Haven-town (as before was said) at the mouth of Fridanus or Po. Concerning which we are to know, that though this Gold or Bay or the Adriatic, extended no farther than the Eastern parts of Dalmatia, where the sea beginneth to take the name of the Ionian; yet Mare Adriaticum, or the Adriatic sea was of greater length. Extended by the Ancients over the Ionian, and thence South-West-ward till it meeteth with the Tuscan Seas, and Southwards till it come to the coast of afric; insomuch as Mare Lybicum, or the sea of afric, is by Orosius made a part of the Adriatic. For speaking of the Province of Tripoli a Province of afric, properly and especially so called, he boundeth it on the North with the Adriatic, as he doth the Isle of Crete on the South side of it, with the Libyan Sea, quod & Adriaticum vocant, which they also call the Adriatic, as his own words are. The like might also be made evident out of other Authors both Greek and Latin: Which I note here, because Saint ●auls being tossed up and down in the Sea of Adria, as is said Acts 27. 27. and being after cast on shore in the Isle of Malta; occasioned some to think this Melote or Malta, to be that Island of Dalmatia which is now called Melidar; because seated in the Bay or Golf of Adria: whereas the Text speaks plainly of that Isle of Malta which lieth in the furthest parts of the Adriatic Sea, on the coasts of afric. But to return to this Golf, it was accounted heretofore to be very tempestuous and unsafe, as appeareth by Improbo iracundior Adria, in Horace; the Manix Adriaticum in Catullus, and the Ventosi tumour Adriae, in Seneca's Thyestes. But when the Empress Helena had found the Cross on which CHRIST suffered, she caused one of the three Nails with which his body was fastened to it, to be thrown of purpose into this Sea; since which time, as Platina hath told us in the life of Pope Silvester (and citys Saint Ambrose for his Author) it hath been very calm and quiet; the second nail being made into a Bridle for her son Constantine's horse, and a Crest for his Helmet of the third. But not to trust too much to the truth of this miracle, certain it is that the Venetianes are Lords of it, by reason of their Naval power, and that it is every year espoused to the Duke of Venice, by the solemn casting in of a Wedding-Ring; and every year Baptised on Ep●phany day, by the Bishop of Zant. When this last ceremony took beginning, I am yet to seek. But for the first, which is performed with a great deal of state, every Holy-Thursday, the Duke, and all the Magnificos being rowed in the Bucentaure (which is a rich and stately Galley made for such solemnities, and capable of 200 persons, whence it had the name) it took beginning from Pope Alexander the third, who being hardly put to it by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, fled unto Venice in the habit of a Cook, Sebastian Cyani being then Duke: in prosecution of whose quarrel, the Venetians encountered Otho the Emperor's son, vanquished him, and restored the Pope▪ The Duke returning back in triumph with his Royal prisoner, was thus saluted by the Pope. Cyani, take here this Ring of Gold, and by giving it unto the Sea oblige it unto thee: a Ceremony which on this day (the Ascension day) shall be yearly observed, both by thee and thy successors, that so posterity may know that you have purchased the dominion thereof by your valour, and made it subject to you, as a Wife to her Husband.  
The pcincipall Lands of this Sea, lie on the other side thereof, on the coast of Dalmatia. Some few there are upon this side (but those, as well as these under the command of this signory) neither great nor famous. Of these the chief are, 1 MALAMOCCO, in Latin Methaucum, now only considerable for the Haven which is large and deep; made by the inslux of Meduacus before mentioned; in which the greater ships do ride till they hire Pilots from Rovigno to cross the Bars. It was ennobled heretofore with the Duke's Palace, and an Episeopall See; but the Duke's Palace being removed to Rialto, and the Episcopal See to the Island of Chioggia, it is now inhabited for the most part by none but Seamen. 2 TORCELLAN, in which there is a little City of the same name, honoured with a Bishops See; but by reason of the ill air not very well peopled. 3 MURIANUM, or MURIANO, three miles in compass, and but one from Venice, of a sound air, and very well inhabited, the people whereof make the best Venice Glasses, so much used in all parts. 4 CHIOGGIA, called in Latin Fossa Clodia, distant from Venice 25 miles; to which it serveth instead of a Bulwark. There is a town in it of the same name, to which the Bishops See was removed from Malamocco, An. 1103, and near to which are many Salt-pits which yield great gain unto the people, and as much unto the Commonwealth. Near to this Island the Genoese so discomfited the Venetians in a fight at sea, that they were offered a blank Charter to write what they would. But the Genoese being grown too insolent on their good success, made the City desperate; who putting all to hazard fell again upon them, beat them, pursued them home, and there utterly crushed them, as we shall tell you more at large, when we come to Genoa.  
Betwixt these Lands and the main land of Friuli, lieth a shoal of little Islets, in and amongst which standeth the renowned City of Venice, the head City of this Commonwealth, and the glory of Italic. these Islets 72 in number, but joined together by many Bridges; of which here are said to be 4000 at least, besides 10000 boats for passage from one Isle to the other. The compass of the whole aggregate body said to be eight miles, the buildings fair, and generally adorned with glass windows; an Ornament not common in Italy, where the windows for the most part are made with paper to let in the light, and that paper oiled all over to keep out the wet. The number of the Inhabitants estimated at 300000 thousand. By the situation one would think that it was denominated from Venetia, which in the old Latin signifieth the seething or frothing of the sea. VENETIA A maris exaestuatio est quae ad Littus veniat, saith the old glossary upon Isidore, out of Marcus Varro. But the truth is, that it was so called from the Veneti, the old Inhabitants of the neighbouring Province of Friuli, who to avoid the fury of the barbarous Huns than threatening Italy, abandoned the main land, and built this City in the bogs and marshes of the sea adjoining. And that it might afford them the greater afetie; they not only built in the most inward part of the Adriatic sea, commonly called the Gulf of Venice, but in the midst of many Lakes of salt-water, extending thirty miles in compass, and having on the East the said Adriatic sea for the length of 550 miles; betwixt which and the said Lakes, there is a bank or causey which they call Il Lido, made as it were by nature to defend the Lands which lie in this Lake, from the violent fury of the sea. A Causey of 35 miles in length, bending like a Bow, and opening in seven places only, which serve as well to keep the lakes always full of water, as for the passage of Ships and Barks of smaller burden; 
Venice.  the bigger being compelled to lie at Anchor on the South side of the City, near to a place called Malamocco, and the Castles of Lio, which are very well fortified; and there must remain till they are brought in by skilful Pilots, who know the passages, which, by reason of the shifting of the sands, change very often. On the West and North sides it is compassed with very deep Marshes, about five miles distant from the land; and on the South with many Lands, in which are several Churches and Monasteries, like so many Forts which lie between it and those parts of Italy which are not under the obedience of the Commonwealth. So that it is impossible to be taken but by an Army which can stretch 150 miles in compass. It is built, as before is said, on 72 Lands, the principal of which are, 1 Heraclea, the first seat of the Duke of Venice, from thence removed to Malamocco, and the last to Rialto; more famous at this time for being a Bishops See, than the number of Citizens. 2 Grado, to which the patriarchal See of Aquileia was removed by Pelagius the second, about the year 580, making it thereby the Metropolitan of Friuli, or the Country of Venice; but from thence it hath been since removed to another of these Lands called Castello Olindo. 3 Rialto, which is of most esteem and reputation, so called quasi Rivo alto, because the Marshes are there deeper than in other places; or quasi Ripa alta, because it lay higher above the waters, than the other Lands. For which reasons that Island getting reputation above the rest, most of the Gentlemen settled their dwellings in the same, and drew thither in the end the Duke's Palace also; insomuch that in some ancient writings the whole City hath been called Rialto; many of the old Records being dated in such and such a year of the Rialto. But as they did increase in numbers, so were they fain to spread themselves from one Isle to another, till in the end they built on all the Lands which lay near together, and might conveniently be joined by Boats or Bridges. By this Rialto runs the passage called the Grand Canale, being in length about 1300 paces, and some forty in breadth; adorned on both sides with stately and magnificent Palaces; and covered with an incredible number of Boats called Gondolos, very neatly built, and veiled over with cloth, so that the Passengers may go unseen and unknown, without the molestation of sun, wind, or rain. For public buildings it hath in it 70 Parish Churches, to each of which belongeth a Marketplace and a Well; 31 Cloisters of Monks, 28 of Nuns, besides Chapels and Almshouses.  
The principal Church of this City is that of S. Mark, the Patron of their Commonwealth, whose body they report to have been brought hither from Alexandria in Egypt, and entombed herein. Affirmed by some to be the richest and goodliest Church in all the World. The building of Mosaic work, of which work they boast themselves to have been the Authors. A kind of work by the Grecians called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and by the Latin Writers Musiva, Musica, and Musaica; wrought out of stones or metals of divers colours, unto the shape of Flowers, Knots, Birds, Beast's, and other fancies of the Workman, yet done with such exactness of skill and judgement, that it seemeth to be all one stone, the work rather of Nature than Art. A Church of admirable work both within and without, compacted of most rare pieces of Marble, Porphyry, and a rich stone which the Lapidaries called Ophitis, because it is speckled like a snake; adorned on the outside with 148 Pillars of Marble, and eight of Porphyry near the door; besides 600 Marble pillars of a lesser size, which carry up an open Gallery round about the Church; from whence the Magistrates and others of the principal Citizens, behold such Shows as are presented in the Market place adjoining to it. The Church in length not above 200 foot of Venice measure, nor above 50 in breadth; the roof thereof being of an Orbicular form, lieth open at the very top, where the light comes in, there being no windows in all the Church; as commonly the Churches in Italy are exceeding dark, either to strike in the spectators a religious reverence, or to make their Candles show the better. And for the inside of the Church, the riches of it are so great, the Images so glorious, the furniture of the Altars so above comparison, that all the treasures of the State may seem to be amassed in the decking of it. And yet as goodly and as glorious as the Fabric is, it is still unfinished, and as some think, is kept unfinished on purpose, partly to draw on other Benefactors to advance the work, the benefit of whose liberality may be employed unto the use of the public Treasury; and partly lest the Revenues which are given already should be resumed by the Heirs of the deceased, if the work were ended. So infinitely doth the furniture of the Church exceed the sumptuousness and beauty of the Church itself.  
Of other of the public buildings, the Counsel-house, the ducal Palace, Monasteries, Churches, and the like, though stately and magnificent structures, I forbear to speak. Nor shall I here say any thing of their private houses, so large and beautified, that here are said to be no fewer than 200 (most of them on the Grand Canale) able to entertain and lodge the best King in Christendom. All I shall add, and so leave this City, will be a word or two of their Arsenal, and public Magazine. In the first of which they have in readiness 200 Galleys, with rooms for Cables, Masts, Sails, Victuals, and Ammunition of all sortt; able thereby to set out an Navy to the Sea on the shortest warning. And in the other it is said, that they have Arms sufficient for 100000 Soldiers of all sorts; amongst which are affirmed to be a thousand Coats of plate, garnished with gold, and covered with velvet, fit for the use and wearing of the greatest Princes. But of their power and forces both by Sea and Land, we shall speak more shortly.  
Proceed we now unto their story. And if we look upon them in their first original, we shall find them to have been a people of Paphlagonia (a Province of Asia the lesser) called the Heneti; who aiding Priamus' King of Troy in his ten years' wars against the Greeks, where they lost their King called Philamenes (or Pterilamenes, as some call him) choose rather to seek out new dwellings than return with shame unto their old. Upon this resolution they join themselves to Antenor, who with some remnant of the Trojans had the same design; and sailing as the wind and sea conducted them, arrived at last in those parts of Italy now called Friuli. So witnesseth the Poet, saying, 
Antenor potuit, mediis illapsus Achivis  
Illyricos penetrare Sinus, atque intima tutus  
Regna Liburnorum, & fontes superare Timavi.  
Antenor through the Greeks could force his way,  
And safely piercing the Illyrian Bay,  
Cross the Liburnian Realms, and conquer all  
From fierce Timavoes Fountain to his fall.   
Here landing they subdued the Euganei (who before inhabited this tract) and possessed their dwellings: the name of Heneti being changed into that of Veneti. But this perhaps not done till subdued by the Galls, and made part of Gallia Cisalpina; agreeably to the name of the Veneti, an old gallic Nation, opposite to the Isle of Britain. When those Galls were vanquished by the Romans, the name and nation of these Veneti was so considerable, that their Territory had the name of Venetia; and together with Histria, made one Province of the Roman Empire. And here they lived in peace and safety under the protection of the Empire, till the terrible noise of the coming of Attila and the Huns, occasioned many of the principal men, with their several Retinues, to betake themselves to the Lands, and inaccessible Marshes of the Adriatic; where they built this City, and called it Venetia, by the name of their Nation, Anᵒ 454. Not much increased in power or greatness at the fall of the Lombardian Kingdom; though so considerable at that time, that in the division of Italy made by Charles the Great, betwixt himself, the Popes, and the Eastern Emperors; the Venetians were left at liberty as a Free-Estate. After which, making use of their situation, they grew not only rich in trade, but strong in shipping; and thereby did good service to the Western Princes, in their wars against the Turks in the Holy Land. And they served themselves well by it too: getting in one Expedition only (that namely in which the Empire of Constantinople was made a prey unto the Latins, Ano. 1200.) all the Lands which they have at the present, in the Aegean and Ionian Seas, many in those Seas which they have lost, and not a few good Towns in Pelopennesus, since conquered from them by the Turks. Contending with the Genoese for the Sovereignty of the Mediterranean, they received so great a blow at the naval battle near Chioggia, (spoken of before) that they had utterly lost all, if the Enemy could have used his fortune with moderation. But being recovered of that blow, after many various successes and events of War, they got the better of them, and made them quiet; by means whereof, being Lords Paramont at Sea, they next cast their eyes on the main land of Italy, which now they were at more leisure to look after, than they had been formerly. The Histrians had before infested them with Piracy, and were punished for it in the time of Duke Pietro Candiano, by the loss of many of their Towns; but in the year 1390, the whole Country is brought under the command of this Commonwealth. Milan with a great part of Trevigiana then appendent on it, they extorted from the noble family of the Carrari, An. 1400. The City of Vincentia they possessed themselves of in the same year also; and not long after fully perfected their Conquest of Histria, with the revolts whereof they had before been often troubled.  
But that whereby they most improved their estate was by a constant watching of their opportunities, taking advantage of the factions and fractions amongst their neighbours, and working their own greatness out of others ruins. By means whereof they came possessed of many places of right belonging to the Empire and Church of Rome, as also of some Towns pertaining to the Duchy of Milan, and four of the best Havens in the Adriatic, which properly belonged to the Realm of Naples: not giving aid to any of their distressed neighbours without the mortgage or direct sale of some piece or other. Which sordid kind of merchandizing drew all the Princes of those parts to make war upon them; every one to recover by strong hand what the Venetian had extorted from them in their necessity. And the confederates thrived so well, that Maximilian the Emperor recovered to the Empire the Towns and Territories of Milan, Vincentia, Verona, Triest, Friuli, and whatsoever else he laid claim unto; the Popes in right of the Church regained Ravenna, Rimini (or Arminum) and Faventia; Lewis the 12 of France, in right of the Duchy of Milan, Bergamum, Crema, Cremona, Brixia; the King of Spain in right of the Realm of Naples, Trano, Barlette, and Monopoli, all upon the Adriatic; the Duke of Ferrara gained Rovigo, and the Duke of Mantua the town of Asula. So that the Venetians being (like the Jay) stripped of all their feathers, were fain to quit the firm land, and betake themselves unto the Isles and Marshes of their City; having not one foot of all their whole Dominion left them but their Seas and Lands. And yet in very little time, partly by working on the Pope, to whom they quitted all their interest in the Towns aforesaid, and partly by dividing the rest of the confederates from one another, they recovered all that they had lost in a little time, except the Towns of Naples only, for which they were not willing to contend with the Crown of Spain.  
The Government is Aristocratical, managed only by the principal men of all the City, both for birth and breeding: the common-people having no authority in affairs of State. Their chief Officers at the first were many, whom they called Tribunes: but experience being had of that confusion which a multitude of Governors carrieth for the most part with it, in the year 709. they made choice of one chief Officer, whom they called their Duke. Under these Dukes they have gotten that great Dominion which they now enjoy: The authority of which Dukes was at first more absolute, but by degrees restrained and limited within narrower bounds. He that beholdeth him in his Robes, his gravity and outward parts, and the respect given him by the people, would think no Prince could be more absolute and supreme. But look upon him in the exercise and powers of Government, and he is nothing in the wood but an empty Title. For notwithstanding that he enjoyeth so great a dignity, yet hath he a full power in nothing, not being able to determine in any point, without the presence of his Counsellors (being six in number) who always sit with him, and dispatch affairs both public and private; as namely, giving audience to Ambassadors from Foreign States, receiving Letters from their own Ministers, granting of Privileges, and the like; in which the Duke can do just nothing, if four (at least) of these Counsellors be not present with him. And yet these Counsellors without him may conclude of any thing. Nay he is so restrained in all things to the power of the Senate, and to three Officers called the Capi, that he may not go out of the Town without their consent; and by them is prescribed an Order in his own Apparel. So that he is but little better than a Prisoner, when within the City, and a Traitor if he stir abroad: at the best 〈◊〉 honourable Servant. And his Revenue is as little as his Authority; as being allowed out of the common Treasury, no more than 40000. Ducats a year towards his expense and entertainment. As for the Sovereignty of the State, that resides wholly in the Senate; but representatively in the Duke, the six Counsellors, and the three Heads or Precedents of the Forty; which are those Officers (as I take it) whom they call the Capi. The Senate or Great Counsel, consist of all the Gentlemen of Venice above five and twenty years of age, which may amount unto the number of 2500. though seldom half that number do assemble at once, by reason of their several employments in affairs of the Commonwealth in other places: who usually do meet together every Sunday morning, and on the mornings of other Festivals, where they choose Magistrates, and distribute Governments, and order matters of the State. But because such great Bodies move but slowly, and are not very capable of trust and secrecy, they parcel th●● gre●● Counsel into lesser Members, whereof the principal are the Pregadi, and the Counsel of ●en. That of the Pregadi consisteth of 120. in which they treat of, and determine matters of the greatest importance, and therein conclude commonly of such principal points as formerly have been proposed and treated of in the great Assembly: And in this Counsel, besides the 120. before mentioned, the Duke, the six Counsellors, and the Counsel of Ten, and all such as have born any public Office, have their voice or suffrage. This is that Counsel which properly and more specially is called the Senate; in which nothing is to be concluded or passed into Acts, except four of the six Counsellors be present at them, and that sixty at the least of the whole number give their suffrage to it. Then for the Counsel of Ten, their power is universal, over all affairs, such as the other Counsels may not meddle with, as to conclude of war, or peace, to put in execution what they think most necessary for the benefit of the Commonwealth, and other things of like weight and moment: which if they were first treated of in the General Counsel or Assembly, and after in that of the Pregadi, as they ought to be in common course, could not be possibly managed with such speed and secrecy, as the exigencies of the State require. And in this Counsel, with the Prince, and his six Assistants, the Supreme Majesty of the State doth reside especially. Some other Officers there are, and those of great authority and reputation, as the Procurators of S. Mark, which have the charge of the public Treasures; and the A●ogadori, or Tribunes (as one might call them) of the people, being three in all, one of which must be always present in all consultations, lest any thing should pass to the prejudice and infringement of the Privileges of the common-people.  
For the whole body of the City consisteth either of the Gentlemen, or of Artificers and Commons. These last are the descendants and progeny of such as came to settle here when the State was fised, invited to dwell here, and to follow their occupations, by several Privileges and Immunities which were offered to them, and these they neither admit into any of their Counsels, nor into any of the Offices of Trust and Power, except it be two; that namely of the Chancellor, and the principal Secretaries, which pertain only to the people. The other are the issue or descendants of those who first laid the foundation of their City and Commonwealth: and these they have in such respect, and so high esteem, that to make any Stranger (how great and eminent soever) a Gentleman of the City, is the greatest honour they can bestow, and not bestowed but upon the best deserver. Henry the 3d. of France taking this City in his way out of Poland, thought himself graced with this attribute, which they are very dainty and sparing of, it being the highest honour which they vouchsafe to impart to such Commanders of their own, and Ambassadors of other Princes, as have well deserved it. And that this honour may be kept up to the very height, and their Nobility not grow too cheap, by being too numerous, neither the younger sons of these Gentlemen within the City, or of the Noblemen in the Country, are permitted to marry. But otherwise they suffer them to satisfy their lusts with too much impunity, and for their sakes allow of Stews, as an evil not to be voided on the former grounds.  
Now as Otho in Tacitus said to the Praetorian Soldiers, Princeps è Senatu oritur, Senatus è vobis: so out of these Gentlemen are chosen the Senators, out of them the Duke. His election by Contarenus is described in this manner. In the vacancy of the place, all the Gentry above thirty years of age are assembled. So many as meet, cast their names into a pot; and in another, are just so many balls; of which thirty only are gilt. Then a child draweth for each, till the thirty gilt ones be drawn; for which thirty the child draweth again the second time out of another pot that hath only nine gilt balls. The nine so drawn, nominate forty, out of which forty are twelve again selected by the same kind of lot. These twelve nominate five and twenty, out of which five and twenty are nine again by lot set apart. These nine nominate five and forty, who are by lot again reduced unto eleven. These eleven choose forty one of the best and chiefest of the Senators, who after an oath taken severally, to choose whom they judge worthiest, write in a scroll every one whom he best liketh. The scrolls are mingled together, and then drawn; the fitness of the persons then drawn is discussed, and he that hath most voices above five and twenty, is the man whom they pronounce to be elected, and adjudge with due solemnities to be created their Duke. By the like kind of Lottery do they choose Gentlemen into the Senate, and make public Officers, insomuch that Contarenus, who hath committed unto writing these public Forms, conceiveth (I will not say how rightly) that the Venetian Commonwealth was modelled by Plato's Platform.  
But whether this be so or not, certain it is, that this Commonwealth thus constituted, and modelled, as before is said, hath lasted longer under one form of Government, than any Republic in the World either Greek or Roman. Nor hath it only preserved itself in the same condition, but may most justly be accounted one of the strongest Bulwarks of Christendom against the encroachments of the Turks: the wars whereof hath procured peace, and the peace thereof procured plenty, to the rest of Europe. Insomuch, that it may well be said, that as Europe is the Head of the World, and Italy the Face of Europe; so Venice is the Eye of Italy; the fairest, strongest, and most active part in that powerful Body. As if the Genius of old Rome by some Pythagorical transmigration had passed into the body of this powerful State, and animated it with all the virtues of that City, but knit with a more permanent and constant temper. From so base and abject a beginning is this City grown to be one of the best Supporter of the Arms of Europe.  
As for the Religion of this State, they tolerate that of the Greek Church, but they themselves profess no other than that of the Church of Rome, yet with such caution and respect to their own authority, that they suffer not the Clergy to enjoy those privileges, which they possess in other Countries to the public prejudice. Hence grew the quarrel betwixt them and Pope Paul the fifth, in which the Signory stood stiffly to their ancient Rights, and caused Mass to be duly said, notwithstanding all their Churches were under the Interdict; banished the Jesuits for ever out of their Dominions, for stickling too busily in behalf of the Pope; and in the end prevailed so far by their constant courage, that the Pope was fain to give over the cause, and reconcile them to the Church without any submission. A notable example to all Christian Princes, how to behave themselves towards those of Rome, who are not to be gained upon, but by such resistances. So easy a thing it is for men of constancy and courage to shake off that yoke, which Papal Tyranny and Superstition hath imposed upon them.  
In managing their wars they anciently observed two Rules, which much conduced to the enlargement and security of their Commonwealth. The first was the exempting of their own Citizens from the wars (not out of jealousy, but care of their preservation) unless compelled to the contrary by extreme necessity: the body of their Armies being compounded out of the Provincial Subject, intermixed with Mercenaries. By means whereof, they did not only keep their City in the same condition, able at any time, and at all times, to give Law to the rest of their Dominions: but wasted the hot and boiling spirit of their Subjects in the Wars abroad, which otherwise might have made too much work at home. The other was, the entertaining of some neighbouring Prince to be the General of their forces, whom in the conclusion of the service they dismissed with honour and reward: And by this course they avoided faction, and prevented servitude: Either, or both of which might have happened by employing any of their own great ones in the chief command; who (after the example of Julius Caesar in the state of Rome) having a strong party within the City, and an Army without, might perhaps have made himself their Prince. But this was only in the Conduct of their wars in Italy, and in such times when the State was not so well balanced, as it hath been since.  
As for the Forces of the State, we may behold them in relation to Sea or Land. Their Land-forces which they have in continual pay for defence of their Dominion consist of 28000. Foot, with Captains, and all other Officers enrolled and paid; and besides those they have a choice band of 4000 Musquetiers: for exercising of which they keep yearly Musters, as well to improve them in experience, as to proportion them some gratuities, according to their well-deserving. And as for Horse, they maintain constantly 6000. men at Arms, well appointed and paid, the like whereof is not to be found in all Italy. And yet besides this constant and ordinary establishment, they are able to bring great Forces into the field, as appeareth by their Army against Lewis the twelfth, in which, without disfurnishing any of their Forts and Garrisons, they had 2000 men of Arms, 3000. light Horse, 30000. Foot, most of their own natural Subjects, saving that they were interlined with some bands of Swissers, to which people they give yearly pensions, to be assured of their aid upon all occasions. Then for the Sea-forces, besides that they keep fifty Galleys in continual action, for defence of the Adriatic, and that they have no less than 200. more laid up in the Arsevall, with all manner of tackling and ammunition appertaining to them, they have 10000 men enrolled to serve at the Oar, and may raise as many as they please for those kind of services, out of those parts of Sclavonia, which are subject to them. But the great evidence of the power they can make at Sea, was the great Fleet set out against the Grand Signior for the War of Cyprus, An. 1570. in which they manned out one great Galleon, eleven great Galleys, five and twenty tall Ships, and one hundred and fifty Galleys of lesser burden, being in all one hundred and eighty seven sail, fit for present service. To give the total sum in brief, they held a war by Sea and Land for seven years together against all the Princes of Christendom (excepting England) in all which time they neither wanted men nor money; and in the end were the least losers by the bargain.  
By this we may conjecture also at the greatness of the public Treasury, and of the yearly income which supplies the same. For though it be conceived that their ordinary standing Revenue be but four millions of Ducats yearly (which yet is more than any Christian Prince can boast of, except France and Spain) yet they have many other ways to advance their Treasury, by laying new Imposts on Commodities, as they see occasion; Which needs must rise to vast and most considerable sums in a City of the greatest Traffic of any in Europe, and perhaps in all the world besides. And yet besides such Customs and Imposts as they lay on Merchandise, there is nothing which the people do eat or drink, for which they pay not something to the public Treasury: over and above which, the poorest Labourer in the whole Signory payeth his Poll-money also. Insomuch, that it is credibly affirmed, that the Christians generally do live in a better condition under the Turk, than under the Venetians. Without such helps, (though heavy and burdensome to the Subject) they could not possibly have spent twelve millions in the war against Selimus the second, and as many a little before that, in the enterprise of Ferrara, and the war raised against them by the League of Cambray, which was that formerly remembered.  
As for the Dukes of Venice, though no Sovereign Princes, nor such as do succeed each other in the right of inheritance: yet being they are always men of most eminent note, and that in their names all the business of State is acted, and all writings dated; I will subjoin a Catalogue of them to this present time; to the end that meeting with their names in the course of History, we may the better know in what times they lived.  

The Dukes of Venice.  
697 1 Paulus Anafestus 20  
718 2 Marcel Tegalian 10  
727 3 Hippateus Ursus 11  
An Interregnum of six years.  
742 4 Theodatus Hippateus.  
755 5 Galla of Malamocco.  
756 6 Dominico Monegarta.  
760 7 Maurice Galbata.  
783 8 John Galbata.  
799 9 Obelerius.  
804 10 Angelus Partitiatius  
822 11 Justinian Partitiati●s  
824 12 John Partitiarius  
832 13 Petro Tradonico  
859 14 Ursus Partitiarius  
876 15 John Partitiarius  
881 16 Petro Candiano  
17 Dominico Tribuno  
18 Petro Tribuno  
905 19 Ursus Badoarius  
925 20 Petro Candiano II.  
932 21 Petro Badoario.  
935 22 Petro Candiano III.  
950 23 Petro Candiano IU.  
970 24 Petro Urscola  
972 35 Vital. Candiano  
973 26 Tribuno Meme.  
985 27 Petro Urscola II.  
1003 28 Otho Urscola  
1020 29 Petro Barbolani  
1021 30 Dominico Flabenico  
1031 31 Dominico Contareni  
1059 32 Dominico Silvie.  
1072 33 Vitalis Falerius  
1084 34 Vitalis Michaeli  
1090 35 Ordelasius Falerius  
1105 36 Dominico Michaeli  
1118 37 Petrus Polanus  
1136 38 Dominico Morosini  
1143 39 Vitalis Michaeli II.  
1160 40 Sebastian Ziani  
1165 41 Auria Maripiere  
1179 42 Henrico Dondolo  
1193 43 Petro Ziani  
1216 44 Jacobo Tepuli  
1236 45 Marino Morosini  
1240 46 Renieri Zeno  
1256 47 Lorenzo Tepuli  
1263 48 Jacobo Contareni  
1267 49 Dondolo  
1276 50 Petro Gradenico.  
1298 51 Marino Georgio  
1299 52 John Sourance  
1315 53 Francisco Dandolo  
1326 54 Barthol. Gradonico  
1330 55 Andrea Dandolo  
1342 56 Marinus Falerius  
57 John Gradonico  
1343 58 John Dauphin  
1348 59 Lorenzo Celso  
1352 60 Marco Cornaro  
1355 61 Andrea Contarene  
1371 62 Michael Morosini  
63 Antonio Venieri  
1389 64 Michael Steno  
1402 65 Thomazo Mocenico  
1412 66 Francisco Foscari  
1447 67 Paschal Malipiere  
1452 68 Christophoro Moro  
1461 69 Nicolao Troni  
1463 70 Nicolao Marcelli  
1464 71 Petro Mocenico  
1465 72 Andrea Vendramine  
1467 73 John Moconico  
1474 74 Marco Barbadico  
75 Augustino Barbadico  
1489 76 Leonardo Loredani  
1509 77 Antonio Grimani  
1511 78 Andrea Gritti  
1527 79 Petro Land  
1533 80 Francisco Donati  
1540 81 Antonio Trevisani  
1541 82 Francisco Vivieri  
1543 83 Lorenzo Prioli  
1547 84 Hierome Prioli  
1555 85 Petro Lor●dani  
1560 86 Lewis Mocenico  
1567. 87 Sebastian Venieri  
1578 88 Nicola di Pont  
1586 89 Paschal Cicogne  
1596 90 Marino Grimani  
1606 91 Leonardo Donati  
1612 92 Antonio Memmo  
1615 93 Giovanni Bembo  
1618. 94 Nicolas Donate 
Tuscany.   
1618. 95 Antonio Privily  
1623. 96 Francisco Contarem  
97 Giovanni Correlio  
98 Francisco Erizzo now living An. 1648.   
The principal Orders of Knighthood in this Republic are, 1. Of S. Mark, who is the Patron of this City, instituted in the year 1330. and renewed again (being grown somewhat out of use) An. 1562. The honour is commonly bestowed on the person present, sometimes by Letters Patents on a party absent, as lately upon Daniel Heinsius, one of great eminence for learning in the Netherlands. The person chosen is to be of noble blood, at the least a Gentleman, the Wrod or Motto of the Order, is Pax tibi Marce.  
2. Of the glorious Virgin, first instituted by Bartholomew of Vincentia, Ano. 1222. Their charge is to defend Widows and Orphans, and to procure (as much as in them is) the peace of Italy. It was allowed of by Pope Urban the fourth, Ano. 1262. The Arms of this Order, are a purple Cross between ceratain Stars. The habit a white Surcote over a Russet Cloak, and seems to be as well a Religious, as a Military Institution, like to the Spanish Orders, and that of Malta.  
The Arms of the Republic are Gules, two Keys in Saltire Or, stringed Azure: which seem to have been given them for some notable service done unto the Church.  
There are in the Provinces of this Commonwealth, before described,  
Patriarches 2. Bishops 16.   

The Dukedom of FLORENCE, OR OF TUSCANIE.  
HAving thus run along the Coast of the Adriatic, or upper Sea, from the Lands of the Church unto the Alps, which divide Italy from Germany; let us next keep along the tract of the Tuscan or Lower Sea, from the said Lands of the Church, to that part of the Alps which divide Italy from France. And in the first place we meet with the Dukedom of Florence, or the Estate of the great Duke of Tuscany; divided on the East from S. Peter's Patrimony, by the River Pisco; on the West, from the Commonwealth of Genoa, by the River Macra, and the strong Fort of Sarezana; on the North, from Romandiola and Marca Anconitana, by the Apennine hills; and on the South side it is bounded with the Tuscan or Tyrrhenian Seas.  
It taketh up the greatest and goodliest part of all that which anciently was called Tuscany, from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifieth to sacrifice; of which act of Religious Worship, or rather of some superstitious Ceremonies appertaining to it, they are conceived to be the Authors. And to say truth, they were much given to Sooth-saying, and Divinations, and such like vanities of Gentilism: Tages, that Merlin of the old World first appearing here, from whom they learned the greatest part of their Superstitions. So that this name was adventitious and accidental. For properly and originally it was called Tyrrheni●, from Tyrrhenus the son of Atys King of Lydia, who came and planted in those parts about the time that Gedeon judged the Tribes of Israel. But these names signified the same both Country and people, though in divers Langues, and with respect to different Originations; the name of Tyrrheni and Tyrrhenia, being most used by the Greeks, as that of Tusci and Tuscia, by their neighbours of Rome, who also called the people Hetrusci, and the Country Hetruria, from a particular Province of it which was so entitled. Anciently it extended as far Eastward as the banks of Tiber, the other bounds being then as they are at the present; and in that tract gave dwelling to a potent Nation, who not content to be restrained within the 〈◊〉 and the Tiber, wasted three hundred Towns of the Umbri, the next bordering Nation; and bui●● twelve Cities on the other side of the Mountains; that is to say, Adria, Verona, Vi●centia, Tre●, Berga●●, Mant●a, Como, Vercellae, Novara, Parma, Bonoma, and Rh●gium; all of esteem and reputation to this very day. They were the first Nation that carried an Offensive War to the gates of Rome, when they gave aid to the Tarquins under King Personna; and held it out on the Defensive as long as any: No people in all Italy standing more stiffly in defence of their common Liberties, than the Falisci, and Veientes, two Hetruriau Tribes. But nothing could withstand the fortune of that growing Empire. Twelve Nations of them were brought under by Tarqvinius ●riscus, who from hence brought to Rome the Fasces and Triumphal Ornaments, 
Tuscanie.  and other embellishments of State: the Veii and Falisci, by the Sword of Camillus; the Conquest perfected by the conduct of Valerius Corvinus, and Fulu. Contumalus A. V. C. 455. So the Tuscans were subdued at last, after they had been governed by their own Kings 1132 years; that is to say, from Tarchon Priscus their first King, An. M 2550. to Turenus Ceso their last King, A M. 3668.  
The chief Towns of it in those times were 1 Veii, and 2 Perusia, spoken of before. 3 Fesulae, then of very great same, now a poor village hard by Florence. 4 Agyllina, situate not far from the Lake of Thr●symene, which from hence was called Vadum Agyllinum. The chief Town of the Tuscans at the coming of Aeneas into Italy, and the Seat Royal of Mezentius that noted Tyrant, so often mentioned by Virgil. First built by the Pelasgi, a Greek people, and by them thus named; afterwards by mistake called Caere: by like mistake as Peru, Jucatan, and others of the American Provinces got their present names, as shall there be shown. For the Tuscans, or the Romans as others say, demanding in their language of a Country fellow, the name of the place, was answered in his language, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is to say, God save you, or God speed you: which word they taking for the name of the Town, did ever after call it Care. Memorable in old time for the Baths adjoining, from hence called Balnea Caeretana; more for the preservation of the Vestal Fire, and the other holy things of Rome, when that Town was taken by Galls. Rewarded hereupon with all the privileges of Rome, except right of Suffrage: from whence the Tables in which the Roman Censors used to enrol the names of those whom they deprived of their Votes in Senate, or any other public Council, were called Caerites Tabulae. 5 Phaleria, on the seaside, the principal town of the Falisci, of which there is some remainder extant in the village called Falaris. 6 Clusium, the seat-royal of King Porsena, for aiding which against the Galls, the Romans drew upon themselves the fury of that turbulent people. Pisa, Aretium, and such others as are still in being, we shall speak of afterwards.  
The Rivers and the soil do remain as formerly, though the first altered in their names; the principal of which are, 1 Arnus, spoken of before in the general survey of Italy. 2 Sercius, by Ptolemy called Boactus, a River which by the excellency of its Carp and Trout, makes some amends unto the people for its violent Land-floods. 3 Palia, as violent and dangerous as the other, but not so profitable, which falleth into Tiber near Orviette. 4 Martha, by Ptolemy called Osa. Here is also the Lake Volsinius, which is twenty four miles in compass; and that called anciently Sabatinns, but now Laco Braciani, from which water was conveyed to Rome. By reason of these and other Lakes, and the frequent overflowings of the Rivers, the Country in former times was full of bogs, which made the air unhealthy, and the ways unpassable, it being in the Flats and Marshes of Hetruria, that Annibal was so turmoiled, losing herein the greatest part of his Elephants, and one of his eyes. But since those times, partly by the industry of the people, and the great providence of the Princes, the Fens in most places are well drained, and the Bogs converted to firm land, whereby the air is rectified, and the ways made pleasant: care being also taken by great banks and ramparts to keep the Rivers for the most part within their channels. So that the Country is now full of very spacious fields, and fruitful valleys, swollen here and there with pleasant mountains, little inferior in fertility to the richest vales; abundantly well stored with delicious wines, and plentiful in a word of all the blessings of nature, save that the parts about Florence are defective in Wheat, the want of which is supplied from the fields of Sienna, where there is plenty enough of it for themselves and their neighbours, though no such superfluity as to spare any of it unto other Provinces.  
But to return unto the story, Tuscanie being thus brought under the command of Rome, was made the second of those eleven Regions into which Italy was divided by Augustus Caesar. In the division of it made by Antonius, and in that of Constantine, it made with Umbria one of the ten Provinces which was immediately subject to the Praefect of the City of Rome. Afterwards in the declination of the Roman Empire it became a member of the Kingdom of Lombardy, then of the French, and finally of the Germane Empire: during which times it was governed by an Officer of trust and power, whom I find sometimes called the Marquis, sometimes Duke of Tuscanie, who had here more or less authority, as they could work on the necessities of their several Princes. Desiderius the last King of the Lombard's had been Duke of Tuscanie, and so was Albericus in the time of the Berengarii, and Guido is called Marquis of it, under the reign of Henricus Auceps the Germane Emperor. Afterwards, as the Popes grew in power and greatness, so they made bold to intermeddle in the affairs of this Province; giving it one while to the Kings of Naples, another while to the Dukes of Anjou, making some challenge to that Kingdom. In which distractions the Florentines first bought their own liberty, of the Emperor Rodolfus Habspurgensis; and after purchased the Town and Territory of Cortona, of Ladislaus King of Naples; that of Arezzo for 40000 Florins of Duke Lewis of Anjou. After this time they husbanded their affairs so well, that they became one of the most considerable Estates in Italy; and at the last by taking in Pisa and Sienna, they got the absolute dominion of the best and largest part of Tuscanie, which now is under the command of the great Duke, and may be branched most fitly into these four parts, that is to say, the Cities and Territories of 1 Florence, 2 Pisa, 3 Sienna, and 4 the Lands situate in the Tuscan or Tyrrhenian seas.  
1. And first the Territory or Estate of Florence, taketh up the North part of this great Dukedom, having the Apennine on the North, 
Florence.  and the Estates of Pisa and Sienna on the South. So called from the City of FLORENCE, situate ●igh unto the conflux of the Rivers Arnus and Chianus, the former passing through the midst of the City, which is joined together with four Bridges of stone; environed with mountains, which do serve as a Fortress against Invasions, and for defence against the Winds; first built by L. Sylla that bloody Dictator; afterwards made a Colony by the Triumvirs, Augustus, Antony, and Lepidus; from the flourishing situation of it being called Florentia. The Lombard's upon some displeasure razed it to the ground; but it was rebuilt by Charlemain, to whom and whose Successors they continued faithful, as long as they had any thing to do with the state of Italy; but after, they betook themselves to the Papal faction, and were as rigid Guelfes as any. On this foundation it now stands, and is indeed a very fair and flourishing City, agreeable unto the name; the streets being very straight and large, paved with square stone, and always kept exceeding clean: the ordinary buildings beautiful above any in Italy, besides many fair and stately Palaces adorned with statuas. The principal of the Palaces is that of the Great Duke, taking up the room of 50 houses which were wont to stand there; capable of a great retinue; and for the largeness of the building, the Architecture and Ornaments of it, as also for the Gardens, Fountains, Statues, and other Accessaries, equalling, if not surpassing the goodliest Palaces in all Europe. The like may also be affirmed of the Cathedral, highly commended for the excellency of the Workmanship, but that especially of the Steeple, which both for stuff and structure is beyond compare. This Church is called commonly the Annunciata, and worthily accounted one of the chief Ornaments of Florence; in which City there are besides, so many excellent pieces and curious rarities, that the Archduke Charles was wont to say, that it was a City not to be seen but on Holidays. As for the inhabitants of this City and the parts adjoining, they are a very industrious people, and generally said to be of a very great wit, subtle heads, and of much insight into business: and yet Count Imbalt, a French Gentleman, was used to say, Non sapeve dove consistesse l'ingegne tanto celebrate di Fiorentini, that he could never find where that great Wit of the Florentines lay. Guicciardine the Historian, was without doubt a notable Statesman; and Machiavelli, once the Recorder of this City, a man of as shrewd a brain as any; and so were the two Cosmo's of the house of the Medici's; but whether all the Florentines, or the major part of them, be of such extraordinary wits as they say they are, I am not very well resolved of; nor is it much material to inquire into it.  
The other Cities and chief places of this first division, are 1 Fesulae, once a Roman Colony, now a small village called Fiesoli, situate in the straits of the Apennine, not far from Florence, which is thought to have risen chiefly from the ruins of it: most memorable for the great defeat here given by Stilico to the great Army of the Goths conducted into Italy under Rhadagusius. 2 Pizoria, or Pistoia, seated on the foot of the Apennine, but ruinated with its own dis●entions; of which the greatest and most lasting, were those betwixt the Neri and Bianchi (or the black men and the white) which divided Florence; and that between the Guelves and Gibellines which here took begiuning, and for a long time exercised the peace of Christendom. This last began (as some say) upon the quarrel of two Brothers, of which the one named Guelfo stood for the Pope, the other named Gibellino declared for the Emperor. The quarrel spreading into parties, called the Guelves and the Gibellines, became at last the wonder and amazement of all good people: insomuch as some are of opinion, that the fiction of the Elves and Goblins, wherewith we use to fright young children, was derived from hence. As for the City itself, it is seated in a fair and goodly plain, compassed with mountains; and the streets paved with freestone, and the Church (which is Cathedral) with Marble; it was first walled by Desiderius the last King of the Lombard's, when he was Governor of this Province; but for all that was forced to submit itself to the power of the Florentive, by whom it was subdued Anᵒ 1150. when as yet themselves were not the absolute masters of their own City. 3 Volterra built among the mountains, the Birth-place of Lînus, successor to St. Peter in the See of Rome. It standeth on the top of an hill, the walls thereof made of square stone about six foot long, which are very neatly joined together without any Mortar: and in those Walls five Gates for entrance, each Gate having near unto it a very fair Fountain. The Marble Statues, and some Epitaphs in Tuscan Letters, do evidently declare it to be very ancient. In this Town was born Rodolphus Volterranus, one of the greatest Restorers of Learning in the West parts of the World. 4 Monte Pulciano, in Latin called Mons Politianus, a well-fortified City, and the birthplace of Angelus Politianus, the Reviver of the Latin or Roman Elegancies 5 Crato, another strong piece of this part also, neighboured by a retiring-place of the Great Dukes, called Pratoline, a right pleasant Village, beautified with a magnificent Palace, in which besides many other singularities are most curious Water-works, equal, if not superior unto those of Tivoli. 6 Cortona, an ancient City of the Tuscans, situate at the foot of the Apennine, sold to the Florentines by Ladislaus King of Naples. 7 Aretium or Arezzo, one of the ancient Cities of the Tuscans also, and sold to the Florentines as the other was; this being bought for 40000 Florint of Lewis of Anjou, than the Pope's Vicegerent in this Country. 8 Borgo San Sepulcro, seated on the Tiber, near, or within the Spoletan Dukedom, added to this signory by Cosmo de Medic●s the first of that name, by whom bought of Pope Eugenius the fourth for the sum of 25000 Florins, and laid unto the Patrimony of this Commonwealth, 
Pisa, and Sienna.  to which it serveth for a Bulwark on that side of this Country.  
To this Division also we may best refer the small, but rich signory of Massa, situate on the borders of the state of Genoa. Chief Towns whereof, 1 Massa itself, which gives the title of a Marquis to the Lord hereof, of the family of the Malespines'. 2 Carara, three miles off from Massa, and more near the Sea, and of great fame for its Quarries of whitest Marble (much used in the time of the Roman greatness) and a breed of the fairest Women in Italy. The Prince hereof a Feudatary to the Duke of Florence, but amongst his own vassals absolute enough.  
2 The second member of this estate is the City and Territory of PISA, lying towards the Sea, betwixt the Genoese on the West, and the Territory of Sienna on the East. The City first built by the Pisae, a people of Elis in Greece, who following old Nestor from Troy, were by the violence of the Wind driven upon this coast; and here upon the River Arno, where it meeteth with S●rchius, did erect this Town. In the distractions of the Empire it stood up for itself, and grew so potent, that at one time they waged war both with the Venetians and Genoese. They were once Masters of Sardinia, Corsica, and the Baleares; but finally being discomfited by the Genoese near the Isle of Giglio, by whom it was made free, Anᵒ 1369, they submitted themselves to the protection of Charles the fourth. Not long after, it was taken by John Galeaze the first Duke of Milan, Anᵒ 1404, by John Maria his son and successor sold unto the Florentines; from whose command they freed themselves by a popular violence. The Florentines upon this besieged them, and brought them to such extremity of hunger, that they were ready to be starved. Yet such was the humanity of the Besiegers, that when they entered the Town every man carried victuals in his hand instead of weapous, to beget, as it were, new life in that rebellious people. This victory the florentines got by the valour and conduct of Sir John Hawkwood, whom the Italians call Giovanni di▪ Aguto; who being first a Tailor in Essex, afterwards served Edward the third in his French Wars, where he was knighted. And when upon the peace concluded after the battle of Poitiers, he wanted employment, he entered with his Regiment into Italy, and put himself into the pay of the Florentines, then in war with this City: who for his valour have honoured him with a fair Tomb and Monument. When Charles the 8th went into Italy, the Pisans again revolted, and were, not without much labour and great charges, reduced to their former obedience. As for the City itself, it is almost as big as Florence, this being five miles in compass, and that but six; but very short of it in the numbers of people, Florence being said to contain 90000 souls, Pisa not a third part of that proportion; yet it hath very good advantages to make it populous, that is to say, the public Arsenal for Shipping, an University for Students, and the See of an Archbishop: the Cathedral Church of which is a very beautiful piece of work, the Gates thereof are brass, and the Steepl of it of such artificial and exquisite building, that it showeth as if it were always falling. But the unwholsomness of the Air over-ballanceth all these fair advantages.  
The next place of importance within the Territory of this City is the Town and Haven of Ligorn (Livornum it is called in Latin) seated upon the influx of the River Arno; well fortified against the Genoese, by whom the Works were once slighted, Anᵒ 1297. Upon a reconciliation made between those States, it returned again to its old Masters. And when the Pisans were sold over to the Florentines by the Duke of Milan, Thomas Fregosa Duke of Genoa, seized upon this place, and sold it also to the same Chapmen for 120000 Ducats. By the care of Duke Cosmo and his two sons it is much improved in strength and beauty, and so well fortified, that it is thought to be one of the strongest Cities in Christendom; Cities I say, and not Castles, the Castles of Stockholm in Sweden, and that of Milan being held to be the strongest Forts in the World. After this comes in 3 Peira Sancta, on the West side of the Arnus, a place of great consequence and strength; one of the best pieces of the Pisans when a Free-estate, against their old enemies the Genoese, towards whom it standeth. 4 Terraciola, Eastward of Ligorn, neighboured with a capacious Bay on the Mediterranean. 5 Castellona, an Episcopal See, and 6 Porto Berrato, bordering on the Signory of Sienna, now nothing but a station for ships (nor much used for that) but heretofore beautified with one of the best Cities of the Tuscans, called Populonia.  
3 The third Member of this Dukedom is the City and Territory of SIENNA, lying betwixt the Estate of Pisa, and the land of the Church. The City said to be built by Brennus, who did there put his old sickly men to sojourn, and called it Sena: the Birth-place of Aeneas Silvius, called afterwards Pope Pius the second; of Francis Picolominy, after Pope Pius the third; and of Sixtus (hence surnamed) Senensis, the greatest Scholar of the three, if not of all the age he lived in. By Antonine in his Itinerarium called Senae Juliae, to difference it perhaps from another of that name near the Adriatic, called Sena Gallica. Built near the Spring or Fountain of the River Arbia, now better known by the name of Treissa; but built (which makes the situation of it exceeding pleasant) upon an high hill, on which there is a Castle that commands the Town: the streets thereof even and very plain, centring in a large and spacious Marketplace; near to which is a very fair Palace used for a Senate-house in the Free-Commonwealth: and on the South side near the walls, the Cathedral Church, reputed to be one of the fairest in Italy, having only one door into it, to which there is an ascent by fair Marble stairs, of which the Pavement is made also: 
The Tuscan Lands.  Having long held the Gibelline or Imperial faction, it bought its liberty at an easy rate of the Emperor Rodolphus the first. After it fell into the hands of the Spaniards, then of the French, and finally was made over to Cosmo de Medici's Duke of Florence, by the King of Spain, Anᵒ 1558, in consideration of the great charge he had been at to beat out ●he French, and other services expected for the time to come. Cosmo being thus invested in it, deprived the people of their Arms, altered the Government, and was the first Prince who had the absolute command of it, after the constitution of their Commonwealth: neither the French nor Spaniards ruling here as Lords, but only as called in by their several factions, and suffered to have Garrisons in it of their own people, by the agreement of their party. And to say truth, it stood with good reason of State, that the Florentine should use all his wit to get this City; and having got it, use all means to assure it to him. For besides that great accession which it made unto his Estate; by adding thereunto the yearly income of a hundred and fifty thousand Ducats, above all expenses; it was also to be carefully looked on as a Rival which had long time stood in competition with it, for the sovereign command of Tuscanie. Besides, there had been mighty animofities between the Cities, the Florentine being always of the Guelphs, and the Siennoys of the Gibelline faction. A faction at last so generally distated in all Italy, and so abominable to the Popes, that on an Ash-wednesday when the Pope being to cast Ashes on the heads of the Cardinals, was to have said, Memento O homo quod cinis es, & in cinerem converteris; according to the usage of the Church of Rome; seeing a Gibelline amongst them, he forgot himself, and said thus unto him, Memento O homo quod Gibellinus es, & cum Gibellinis morieris. Of chief note next unto Sienna, are 1 Montalcino (Mons Alcinus in Latin) a place of great strength both by industry and situation. 2 Castro Cartaldo, seated upon a lofty Hill, most memorable for the Birth and Sepulchre of John Boccace, one of the best wits of his time, as his Decameron declareth: buried here with a sorry and unworthy Epitaph, not worth the labour of transcribing. 3 Soana, an Episcopal City; as also are 4 Pienza. 5 Crossetto, and 6 Chiusi; this last the Clusium of the ancient Tuscans, spoken of befoee. Besides these there are 26 walled Towns within this Signory, but of no great observation in the course of business.  
There belonged also unto this Commonwealth when a State distinct, some Ports and Pieces on the Sea, which when it was consigned over to the Duke of Florence, were retained by the Spaniard; partly thereby to keep those Princes at his devotion; but principally that by holding so many places of importance in his own hands, he might carry at his Girdle the Keys of Italy, and become Lord Paramont of those Seas. Of those the principal, if not all, 1 Piombino, in Latin called Plumbinum from some Mines of Lead, adorned with a strong Castle, and a plentiful Territory: the Castle in the hands of the Spaniard, but the Town and Territory in possession of a Lord of its own, who receives the whole rents of the Estate. 2 Port Telamonius, Eastward of Piombino, so called of old from Telamonius an adjoining Promontory, and known by this name in Plutarch in the life of Marius. 3 Orbitello, drawing more towards the East, the Cossa of the ancient Writers. 4 Monte Argentorati, a Promontory or ●eninsula, thrusting itself into the Sea, over against Orbitello; by the Latines called Mons Argentarius; and thought by some, who have observed the situation, strength, and extent thereof, to be the fittest place for a Royal City to be built in, to command those Seas. 5 Port Hercule, which still retains its ancient name, imparted to it from some Temple of Hercules which was founded in it; situate near the Eastern Isthmus of the said Peninsula. 6 Portolongone, a piece of special consequence for command of the Mediterranean; and for that cause of late times gotten by the French (then aiming at the conquest of Naples) but again recovered by the Spaniard, who doth now possess it.  
The fourth and last member of this Estate are the Lands in the Tuscan or Tyrrhenian Seas. The principal whereof is 1 Ilva, not above ten miles from Plombino; called anciently Aethalia, by the vulgar Elba. Pliny affirmed it to contain in compass a hundred miles, but it proves upon a just ameasurement to be but fifty, not very well furnished with Corn, and less with fruits; but plentiful in Mines of Iron, as formerly for Steel and Copper; for which, especially for Steel, of great esteem in the time of Virgil, as appeareth by that passage in the 10th of the Aeneids, where it is called 
Insula inexhaustis Chalybum genero sa metallis.  
A noble Isle, and known full well  
For unexhausted Mines of Steel.   
But for all that, the Steel now failing, the want thereof is supplied by Iron, which Iron is of so strange a nature, that every 25 years it reneweth again upon the Mines, and will by no means melt whilst it is in the Island, but must be carried somewhere else. It affordeth also Sulphur, Allom, Tin, Led, Marble good plenty, and in some parts Loadstone also. Formerly it belonged to the Lords of Polmbino, who not being able to defend it against the Turks, if they should at any time invade it, resigned it, by the Counsel of Charles the fifth, unto Cosmo di Medici's the Duke of Florence; reserving to themselves the Revenues of it, and the Government of all the Towns and Villages therein, except those that were thought fit for Fortification. It hath a very fair haven called Porto Ferrario, 
Tuscan Lands.  capable to receive any great Fleet that should come thither; and therefore if the Turks or Moors had been Masters of it, they might easily have commanded all the coasts adjoyving, as well in Provence, as Italy. For the defence hereof there are two strong Castles, situate on two little Mountains, on each side one; so fortified by Art and Nature, that they are held to be impregnable; having also good store of Cannon, and all sorts of Warlike Ammunition. And not far off stands a strong Town built by the same Duke Cosmo, and by him called Cosmopolis; well fortified, and made the seat of his new Order of St. Stephen, of which more hereafter.  
The second Island of note is Giglio, called Iglium anciently, just oppofite to Monte Argentorato, and having some 25 miles in compass; near unto which the Genoese so discomfited the Pisans in a Fight at sea, that they were never able to recover their former puissance. 3 Capraria, not far from Ligorn, so called from its abundance of Goats; and for the same reason Aegilora, by the Greek Geographers; as 4 Gallinaria not far off took name from abundance of Hens. Of the rest nothing memorable, but that some of them do occur in the ancient Writers: of which sort are Meloria, heretofore Lanellum, not far from Capraria. 2 Lanusi, formerly Artemisia, in which there is a very good Haven. 3 Gorgona. 4 Troia, and 5 the small Lands which are called Formicae. 6 To these we may add also the Isle of Planasia, more memorable than the rest, for the banishment and death of Agrippa Posthumus, the Nephew of Augustus Caesar by his daughter Julia, here murdered by the command of Tiberius to prevent all future competition to the State Imperial; situate somewhat nearer unto Corsica than the rest of these Lands.  
As for the MEDICI'S, whose Posterity are now Dukes hereof, they were in the Free-state (as Machiavil informs us in his Florentine History) accounted in the chief rank of the Popular Nobility: those being such of the ancient Nobles, as to be capabie of the Magistracy, and public Offices (than wholly shared among the Commons) had as it were degraded themselves, and became part of the Commonalty. About the year 1410, John de Medici's (the first great raiser of this house) stoutly maintaining the Liberties of the people against the great ones, was by them so honoured and enriched, that he not only got a great party, but almost a Sovereignty in the City. To him succeeded his son Cosmo, one of the greatest Statesmen of those times, who did not only much reform the civil Government, but enlarged the Territory of the State by the addition of Casentino, Burgo St. Sepulckro, and some other pieces. Dying in the year 1464, he left the managery of the State to Peter de Medici's his son, whose whole time was consumed in suppressing such Factions as had at home been raised against him; and at his death left all his power, and the great wealth which he had gotten (but with a greater measure of his Father's virtues) to Laurence and Julian his two sons. The people after his decease, either desirous of Novelties, as most people are, or fearing to be made hereditary to this powerful Family, seemed to incline to one of the Soderini, a man of plausible deportment, and well beloved. But he judiciously considering, that new houses as they are easily honoured, so are they as soon abandoned by the fickle multitude, conferred all the dependences which were cast upon him, on these two young men of the Medici's: as being descended from a Family which had long governed the City. Against these two, the Pazzi, a potent house in Florence, conspired, and at Mass they slew Julian; but Lorenzo escaped: the blows which were struck at him, being received by one of his servants, whom two days before he had delivered out of prison. For this fact the Pazzi were hanged at the Palace window, together with the Archbishop of Pisa, who had been of the conspiracy. To revenge the death of this Bishop, Pope Paul the 2d Excommunicated the Florentines; and Ferdinand King of Naples warred upon them. Loronzo to divert this mischief, went in person to Naples; where he grew so much into the good liking of the King, that there was a perpetual League made between them. After his death, An. 1492, his son Peter having very improvidently delivered Pisa and Ligorn, with other pieces, to the French King; was, together with his whole Family, banished. John di Medici's the son of Laurence, and Brother of Peter, being made Pope, by the name of Leo the 10th, restored again his Family; who not long after his death, were again exiled. This disgrace Julio di Medici's, son to the abovenamed Julian, and Pope of Rome, by the name of Clement the 7th, not enduring, procured Charles the fifth to besiege it: which request was granted, and the City, after two years' resistance, yielded. The Emperor than gave it to Alexander Medici's (Grandchild to Peter, by his son Laurence) An. 1531: And he to restrain the insolences of the people, built a strong Citadel in the Town. This Alexander was a Prince of good parts enough, had he not been too much addicted to Lust and Wantonness; which being observed by Laurence de Medicis his own Cousin, he trained him to a secret place, under colour of bringing him to the bed of a beautiful Lady; and there basely murdered him. Which done, instead of calling the people to take Arms for recovery of their lost Liberty, as he first intended, he fearfully left the City, and fled towards Venice. So that before the people had notice of the Accident, the heads of the Medici's consulted together, and sent for Cosmo di Medici's dwelling in the Country with his Mother (and then about 18 years of age) to be their Prince: as being the next Heir-male which was left of the Family, according to the Entail (as our Lawyers call it) made by Charles the Emperor. This Cosmo proving an excellent Statesman, and a fortunate Commander, so swayed the affairs of Italy, that Philip the second of Spain to be assured of his friendship gave him the signory of Sienna out of which he had lately driven the French; 
Florence  and Pius the 4th had an intent to have crowned him King of Tuscany. But Philip of Spain (though otherwise his special friend) thwarted that intent, as loath to have in Italy any more Kings than himself. After in the year 1570, Pius the fifth crowned the said Cosmo in the Court of Rome, with the title of Great Duke of Tuscany, for him and his Heirs for ever. In the new Duke's Coronet he caused to be engraven these words, Pius quintus Pont. max. ob eximiam dilectionem, & religionis catholicae zelum, pracipuumqne justitiae studium donavit. Thus forward were these Pope's 〈◊〉 honour this family; but their successors have been otherwise affected to it: For when one of Duke Cosmo's successors did since entreat a succeeding Pope, that he might be created King of Tuscany; the Pope not liking so Lordly a title, answered; that he was content, He should be a King in Tuscany, but not King of Tuscany: A Scholarlike distinction, but not so satisfactory to the point proposed.  

The Princes of the house of Medici's in the Free-estate.  
1410 1 John di Medici's, the first advancer of the Family to public greatness.  
1433 2 Cosmo di Medici's, the son of John; called the Father of the Commonwealth.  
1646 3 Peter, the son of Cosmo.  
1472 4 Laurence di Medici's, son of Peter, the great Advancer of Learning in Italy.  
1492 5 Peter di Medici's II. exiled upon the coming in of Charles the 8.  
6 Lawrence di Medici's II. son of Peter, exiled together with his Father, made Duke of Urbino by Pope Leo the 10.   

The Dukes of Florence, and Great Dukes of Tuscanie.  
1531 1 Alexander di Medici's, the son of Laurence, the first Duke of Florence.  
1537 2 Cosmo II. the next heir of Alexander, descended from Laurence, a brother of the first Cosmo, the wisest Statesman of his time.  
1574 3 Francis di Medici's, son of Cosmo the II. Father of Mary the French Queen.  
1587. 4 Ferdinand di Medici's, the brother of Francis.  
1609 5 Cosmo the III. son of Ferdinand.  
1621. 6 Ferdinand II. son of Cosmo di Medici's, the eight of this family, the sixth Duke of Florence, and the first of Tuscany.   
The length of this Estate is 260 miles, the breadth in some places not much inferior, but growing narrower where it bordereth upon that of Genoa. In all which tract, the Great Duke hath but one considerable Port on the main land, which is that of Ligorn; so that his strength in shipping is not very great; and yet might be greater than it is, if the Subjects did delight in Traffic, and not suffer their Commodities to be bought by Strangers (as generally they do in all this Country) and carried thence in foreign vessels. For otherwise being an industrious people, and well trained in Manufactures; their power at Sea must needs be greater than it is; the Great Duke's Fleet consisting ordinarily of no more than twelve Galleys, two Galleons, and five Galliass. And for his power by Land, he hath in readiness sixteen thousand Foot of his own subjects, well trained and mustered under experienced Commanders, to serve him upon all occasions; and a hundred men at Arms, and 400 Light-horsemen, well paid, as well in times of Peace, as in time of War. And besides these, he keeps so many Forts and Towns in continual Garrison, that his Estate is said to be made of Iron.  
The only Order of Knighthood in this Estate, is that of S. Stephen, instituted by Cosmo di Medici's An. 1561. and dedicated to S. Stephen, because upon the Festival of Stephen, Pope and Martyr, being the 6. of August, he won the famous battle of Marciano. Pope Pius the fourth confirmed it the same year, and granted them all the privileges which they of Malta enjoy: conditioned that those of this Order should make a vow of Charity, and conjugal Chastity and Obedience. They are to be nobly born, and in lawful Wedlock of the Romish Church, and without note of infamy. Their Robe is of white Chamlet, with a red Cross on their left side, as well upon their Military Garments, as their wearing Cloaks: intended principally against the Turks and Moors, for which cause settled first at Pisa, being near the Sea; but after at Cosmopolis in the Isle of Ilva. The number of them is uncertain, the great Duke the Supreme Master of it. Other Orders are commonly simple, but this mixed, being partly religious, partly honorary.  
What the Revenues of it were in the Free Estates, I am not able to determine. That they were very great is manifest, in that having in those five years wherein they waged war against the Duke of Milan, spent three millions and an half of florence, their Treasury was so far from being exhausted, that the next year they besieged and endangered the City of Luca. Since the altering of the Commonwealth into a Dukedom, and the addition of the Territory and City of Sienna, the Revenues of the Duke are conceived to be a million and an half of Ducats yearly. Of which 600000. Crowns are raised yearly out of the Dominion of the City of Florence; 150000. 
Luca.  more out of that of Sienna; the customs arising out of the Port of Ligorn, amount yearly to 130000. Ducats, the toll of Millstones only unto 160000. that of Salt, Mines, and Iron, falls not short of that: in all, a million and 200000. Ducats. Then hath the Duke his stock going amongst the Bankers, and trades as much as any in the way of Merchandizing; whereas in other Countries he loseth the privileges of a Nobleman, that betakes himself to Trade and Merchandise. He useth also to buy up almost all the Corn which is brought into the Country out of other parts, and sell it again at his own price; forbidding any to be sold till all his be vended. The rest is made up by Excize upon all Commodities, even unto very herbs and Salads, which lies very heavy on the Subject, the poor especially: insomuch, that it was tartly said, and perhaps not untruly, Qui sub Medicis vivit, miserè vivit; applying an old Rule in a new sense.  
The Arms are Or, five Torteaux Gules, two, two, and one, and one in chief Azure, charged with three Flower de Lyces of the first.  
Here are in this Estate Archbishops 3.  
Bishops 26.   

The State of LUCA.  
IN the West part of Tuscany, betwixt the Estate of the Great Duke, and the Commonwealth of Genoa, lieth the City of LUCA, so called from Luca a King of the Tuscans, who is said to have built it: situate on the River Serchius, not far from the mountains of Luna, whence the Country is at this day called Lunagiana. It is about three miles in compass, and contains about 24000. Inhabitants, who generally are a courteous and modest people, men of good judgement, and discreet, and by their wisdoms have preserved themselves a free Commonwealth, notwithstanding the attempts of more powerful Neighbours: and they are very industrious also, and well seen in Manufactures, especially in weaving silks and cloth of gold, which they taught the Florentines. The City seated in a plain, compassed with Mountains on all sides, except towards Pistoia: so strongly fortified by the help of Art and Nature, that this City, Zara in Dalmatia, Canea in the Isle of Candie, and the Town of Ligorn, were thought in former times (when the Art of Fortification was less known) to be the four strongest Towns in the Christian World. The streets thereof are narrow, but paved with broad freestone, and most easy to walk on: the buildings very fair, built of freestone also, and beautified with pleasant gardens. On the North-West stands a very strong Castle, near which lieth the Cathedral, stately paved with Marble, but very dark, as most of the Popish Churches, to give the better colour to the burning of Tapers in the day.  
In this Town was the meeting of the three great Captains, Caesar, Pompey, and Crassus, so pernicious to the Roman Republic. For Pompey desirous to maintain his authority, Caesar to get honour, and Crassus to increase his wealth, here united their Counsels: Pompey's authority to be upheld by Caesar's Arms, and Crassus his riches; Caesar's continuance in his Province to be maintained by Pompey's power, and Crassus his money; and Crassus his estate to be secured by Pompey's greatness, and Caesar's military reputation. This done, they made a partition of the Roman Provinces among themselves, assigning Gaul to Caesar, Spain to Pompey, aod to Crassus Syria: which strong confederacy was the cause of that alteration which after followed in that State. For Crassus being slain not long after, Pompey and Caesar wanting a third man to poise the balance, fell first to discontents, then to Civil wars, which at last made Caesar Lord of Rome. Upon which meeting, and the breach which succeeded afterwards, was grounded that so memorated speech of Cicero, that is to say, Utinam Pompeius cum Caesare societatem aut nunquam iniisset, aut nunquam dirimisset.  
But to return again to the Affairs of Luca, in the declining of the Empire, it became possessed by the Goths, from them recovered by Narses with the rest of Italy. After this, it again followed the fortune of the Empire, till taken by Count Boniface, the Father of that notable Virago, the Countess Mathildis: who being deceased without issue, and the Emperors pretending to it as to an Escheat, the Citizens made a common purse, and bought their Liberty of the Emperor Rodolphus for 10000 Crowns. Some say the money was disbursed for them by a Cardinal. But notwithstanding is purchase, and their title by it, the Emperor Lewis of Bavaria seized upon it again, under pretence of freeing it from the faction of Castruccio, who had made himself absolute Master of it. By a Germane Garrison there left, it was sold to the Genoese; and having passed through many hands, the Emperor Charles the fourth got it once again, of whom they once more purchased their desired Liberties for 25000 Florins of Gold, and to secure themselves thereof demolished the Castle built by Castruccio. But being not able to maintain it by their proper strength, they have put themselves under the protection of their potent Neighbours, changing their Patrons as conduced most to their preservation: and finding no security from Genoa, and as little from Florence, both which they severally tried, they put themselves at last into the protection of the Dukes of Milan, 
Genoa.  and in that right are patronised by the Kings of Spain.  
The Territories of this City extend in compass eighty miles, the chief Town next to Luca itself, being that of Luna, a Bishops See; all the rest ordinary Farms and Villages, but of a good air, and very well peopled: which yield a Revenue to the public Treasury of 80000. Crowns per annum, and out of which the State is able to raise (if there be occasion) about 15000 Foot, and 3000 Horse. A great strength for so small a Signory, but all too weak to save them from the Great Duke's clutches, if he did seriously attempt to forc● it, and would venture on the displeasure of the Catholic King: besides that it is thought, that he receives more profit thence in gifts and presents, by letting it stand as it is, than it would yield (considering the charge of keeping it) if it were his own. As for the Government thereof, the principal Magistrate is called the Gonfalonere, changeable every second month, assisted by a certain and determinate number of Citizens, whom they change every sixth month also; during which time they live together in the Palace, or Common-hall. Other inferior Officers I insist not on. And for the Government of the Church, they have two Bishops only, which acknowledge the Archbishop of Florence for their Metropolitan.   

The Commonwealth of GENOA.  
DIrectly West of Tuscany, from which it is divided by the River Macra, lieth the Country anciently called Liguria, now Riviere di Genoa, the coast of Genoa, because it lieth all along the Sea of Genoa, and by some Il Genovosate, from Genoa, the Metropolis of this Country and Commonwealth. A Commonwealth once of a larger reputation and authority, than it is at the present; commanding heretofore the Lands of Corsica, Sardinia, and the Baleares in the Mediterranean, Lesbos and Chio, with some others in the Greekish Seas; the Town of Capha or Theodosia in the Taurican Chersoness, and Pera, on the other side of Constantinople, and a good part of Tuscany.  
It was also then so strong both in men and shipping, that they sent seven several Armies to the wars of the Holy Land: and in the space of three days only armed once upon occasion of present service, eight and fifty Galleys, and eight Pamphyli (being vessels of one hundred and forty, or one hundred and sixty Oars apiece;) and at another time one hundred and sixty five Galleys at a sudden pinch. By the advantage of this strength they beat the Pisans out of Sardinia, Corsica, and the Baleares, compelling them to pay 135000. Crowns for their peace; they got a good share in the division of the Empire of Constantinople, when that City was taken by the Latins; and held a very strong hand over the Venetians. These last they had once in so great an exigence, having vanquished their Fleet at Sea, and taken the Island of Chioggia, not far from Venice, that the Senate sent them a blank Charter, bidding them write down what conditions they pleased, which should be readily condescended to. But Peter Doria, Admiral of the Genoan Fleet, unseasonably proud of his advantage, would have the City of Venice wholly at his own disposal. Whereupon the Venetians now made desperate, assault the secure Genoese, and took an hundred of their Boats and Galleys. After which they always had the worst, losing their Lands in the Mediterranean to the Kings of Arragon; Capha and Pera, with their Lands in the Greek Seas to the great Turk; most of their holds in Tuscany to the Florentines: their power at the last being so broke by the Venetians, that in the end they were not able to set out a Navy fit for any enterprise. But these misfortunes were occasioned principally by their own divisions, the City being miserably torn in pieces by continual factions: first betwixt the Dorii and Spinoli, on the one side, the Flisci and Grimaldi on the other, An. 1174. Secondly, of the Negri, and Mollani, against the Salvatici and Embriaci, An. 1289. Thirdly, between the Spinol● and Dorii themselves, An. 1336. And fourthly, between the Nobility and the Commons, An. 1339. Which Factions did so weaken them both at home and abroad, that having lost the greatest part of their Estate, they were fain to put themselves on the protection of their Neighbours to defend the rest; having now nothing left them but Liguria, and the Isle of Corsica.  
1 LIGURIA hath on the East the River Varus, rising about the edge of Provence; on the West, the River Magra, by which parted from Tuscany; on the North, the Apennine hills; and on the South, the Ligurian or Tyrrhenian Seas. It is in length a hundred and forty miles, that is to say from the Port of Luna in the East, to that of Monaco in the West, which lieth near to Provence; but the breadth not answerable to the length: and is divided generally into two parts or Provinces, the East and the West, both centring upon Genoa the principal City.  
The old Ligurians were a stout and warlike Nation, light, and swift of body, well practised in laying Ambushes, and not discouraged by any overthrow, but forthwith ready to fight again: to which the nature of their Country served them very well, being rough, mountainous, and woody, and full of straight and dangerous passages; and in this tract few open Towns, but many wel-fortified Castles, so that without much labour they could not be taken neither besieged. And if at any time they were vanquished in the open field, 
Liguria.  they had recourse unto these Castles, and other Fastnesses hemmed round about with Woods and Mountains, in which they played their aftergame, and tired out their Enemies and Invaders. The principal of their Tribes were the Decentis, Oxilii, Eubariades and Inganni; all at last vanquished by the Romans, after the second Punic war; but not without much labour and pains, by reason of the Woods, Marshes, and Mountains within and behind which they retired and saved themselves: Insomuch that it was held a matter of more difficulty to find than to conquer them; Aliquanto major erat labor invenire quam vincere, are the words of my Author. They did divers times after this, much molest the Romans, till at last Posthumius so disweaponed them, that he scarce left them instruments to plough the Earth. So in the end they grew obedient to their Masters. In the division of whose large Territories by Augustus Caesar, Liguria was made one of the eleven Regions of Italy; as it was also one of the seventeen Provinces into which Italy was divided by the Emperor Constantine: Milan at that time the Metropolis or Head-City of it. What kind of men they were in the breaking of the Western Empire, may be known by their actions both by Sea and Land, spoken of before: now more addicted to Merchandise than war, but most of all to usury. A vice which the Christians learned of the Jews, and are now thought to equal, if not exceed their Teachers. It was the saying of a merry fellow, that in Christendom there were neither Scholars enough, Gentlemen enough, nor Jews enough: And when answer was made, that of all these there was rather too great a plenty, than any scarcity; he replied, that if there were Scholars enough, so many would not be double or treble beneficed; it Gentlemen enough, so many Peasants would not be ranked among the Gentry; and if Jews enough, so many Christians would not profess Usury. The women are very fair and comely, wearing for the most part their hair in tresses, which they cast over their backs: they wear no upper garments but of cloth, as being only allowed by the Laws; but their under-garments of the purest stuf. The women here are privileged above all in Italy, having free leave to talk with whom they will, and be courted by any that will, both privately and publicly. Which liberty it is likely they gained at such time as the French were Masters of this Estate, who do allow their wives such excess of liberty, as no Italian would allow of in a common Courtesan. And though it cannot be affirmed that the women of the Country or the City itself do abuse this Liberty; yet the Italians being generally of a different humour, reckon them to be past all shame; as they esteem the Germane Merchants, (who make little reckoning of their promises, if not bound by writing) to be men without faith. Of which, and other things concerning this Estate, they have made this Proverb, Montagne senza legni, etc. that is to say Mountains without wood, Seas without fish, men without faith, and women without shame.  
The Country, as before is said, is very mountainous in the in-lands, and full of craggy rocks towards the Sea: so that by Sea and Land it is very ill travelling. But amidst those hills are valleys of as rich a vein as most others in Italy, abounding in Citrons, Lemons, Olives, Oranges, and the like fruits; with such variety of Flowers at all times of the year, that the Markets are seldom unfurnished of them in the month of December. It yieldeth also great plenty of most pleasant wines, which the Inhabitants call La Vermozza, and another which they call Le lagrime di Christo, or Lacrymae Christi: this last so pleasing to the taste, that it is said, a Dutchman tasting of it as he traveled in these parts, fetch't a great sigh, and broke out into this expression, How happy had it been with us, si Christus lachrymatus esset in nostris Regionibus, if CHRIST had shed some of his tears in their Country of Germany. Their greatest want is that of Corn, and therewith do supply themselves out of other places.  
The principal Towns and Cities of it in the Eastern part, are 1. Sarezana, a strong Fortress against the Florentines, and one of the best pieces of this Republic. 2. Pontremuli (Pons Remuli, as the Latins call it) of as great consequence as that, but possessed by the Spaniard. 3. Lerigi, an Haven in the Tuscan or Tyrrhenian Sea. 4. Sestri, a reasonable good place, remarkable for as white bread, and as pleasant wine, as any in Italy. 5. Fin●, an Haven or Port Town, not far from Genoa, anciently called Portus Delfinus. Few of the Towns in this part are of any greatness; but they are set so thick, and intermingled with so many goodly houses both on the hills and the valleys, that for the space of twenty miles, the whole Country seems to be one continual building.  
In the West part the Towns of most importance are, 1. Monaco, of old called Monoecus, and Portus Herculis, beautified with a commodious Haven: belonging not long since to the Spaniard, who bought it for 100000. Crowns of its proper Owner; but of late gotten by the French under colour of a later Contract. 2. Ventamiglio, a good Town, and sweetly seated. 3. Sav●na, taken by the Genoese, An. 1250. before which time it had a Prince of its own. Remarkable for the Interview betwixt Ferdinand the Catholic, and Lewis the 12th. of France, An. 1507. Who having been deadly enemies, upon the taking of the Realm of Naples from the French by the Spaniard, met at this town, and here most strangely relied upon one another. Lewis first boarding Ferdinand's Galley; and Ferdinand for divers days feasting with Lewis in this Town then in his possession, as Protector of the Estate of Genoa. Which kind of Interviews (I note this only by the way) as they chance but seldom; so when they do, they prove for the most part dangerous unto one of the parties: great enmities not being easily forgot by persons of a public Interess. Nay, that notable Statesman Philip de Comines utterly disliketh all such meetings of Princes, though in Amity and good correspondence with one another; 
Genoa.  as many times producing effects quite contrary to their expectations. And this he proveth by the example of Lewis the 11. of France, and Henry of Castille; who meeting purposely Anᵒ 1463, to change some friendly words together, took such dislike at each others person and behaviour, that they never loved one another after it. The like example he bringeth of an interview betwixt Edward the fourth of England, and the same King Lewis; and betwixt Frederick the Emperor, and Charles' Duke of Burgundy; with divers others. His reasons I purposely omit, as not pertinent to my present undertaking, and make hast again unto the Town, which is about a mile and an half in circuit, and hath many stately buildings in it. It was called anciently Sabate or Sabatia, and hath been under the command of divers Lords, being taken from the Genoese by the Visconti, and the Sforza's, Dukes of Milan, from them by the French, and at last recovered again by those of Genoa. Further note, that this one Town hath yielded to the Church of Rome three Popes, viz. Gregory the 7th, Julio the 2d. and Sixtus the 4th, which is as much as Genoa itself can brag of. 4 Nola, upon the Seaside, a commodius Haven. 5 Finali, a goodly Port-Town also, and very well fortified, honoured of a long time with the title of a Marquisate, one of the seven founded by the Emperor Otho (of which more hereafter) but taken from the last Marquis by the Count of Fuentes, than Governor of Milan for the King of Spain, and garrisoved immediately with 200 Spaniards; the poor Marquis being put off with an Annual pension, Anᵒ 1602. 6 Milesimo, a small Town adjoining, possessed upon the same right by the Spaniard also; who by these pieces hath a strong command on the Trade of Genoa. 7 But the great Ornament of those parts of Italy is the City of Genoa, first built, say some, by Janus the son of Saturn; as others say, by Janus, Genius Priscus, an Italian or Tuscan King. But by whomsoever it was built, certain it is, that it was miserably destroyed by Mago the Brother of Annibal, repaired by Lucretius Surius at the command of the Senate of Rome, for whose cause and quarrel it was ruined: once again spoilt and wasted by Rotaris a great Prince of the Lombard's, Anᵒ 660 or thereabouts, but built more beautiful than before by Charles the Great. On his foundation it now stands, situate on the shore of the Ligustick or Ligurian Seas, to which, being partly built on the declivity of an hill full of stately Palaces, it giveth a most pleasant and magnificent prospect. It is in compass six miles, of an Orbicular form, fortified towards the Sea by Art, towards the Land by Art and Nature, there being but one way to come to it by land, and that over steep and craggy Rocks. The streets are narrow, paved with Flint, and most of them on the sides of the hill; which is the reason that they use Horse-litters here instead of Coaches, and most of the better sort are carried on men's shoulders in Sedans or Chairs; which from hence came hither into England. But that which they call La Strada Nueva, or the New street, reaching from the West to North-East, is of a very fair breadth: each house thereof is built with such Kingly magnificence, that it is thought to be the fairest street in the World. In all the rest, the buildings for the height of two stories are made of Marble, curiously wrought; but the Laws forbid Marble to be used any higher. The Haven of it is very fair and capacious, safe from the violence of Tempests, and well fortified: so that the Spaniards use to say, that were the Catholic King absolute Lord of Marseilles in Provence, and Genoa in Italy, he might command the whole World. After the re-edifying of it by Charles the Great, the people here continued subject to his successors, till the Berengarii, as Kings of Italic, made them free, An. 899. in which condition they remained till the year 1318, when being shrewdly weakened in their Estate they were fain to give themselves to Pope John the 22; after the Robert King of Naples. But being soon weary of a foreign Government, the people in a popular tumult made choice of one Simon Boccanegra, to be their Duke, An. 1339. which Government continued till the French were called in by the Guelfian Faction, in the reign of Charles the 7●; under whom they continued thirteen years; and then expelling thence the French for their many insolences, they put themselves under the protection of the Dukes of Milan, An. 1403. Long time they li●ed under the protection of those Princes in great tranquillity, who never carried towards them any rigorous hand, save that once. D. Lodowick Sforzae exacted of them a great mass of money. But, as the tale goeth, his Agent being invited to the house of a Genoesa, and walking in a Garden with him, was showed an herb growing there, called Basil; which stroking gently, he smelled thence a most pleasing savour, but asunsavory a smell when he strained it hard. The Genoese hereupon inferred, Sir, if our Lord Duke Lodowick will gentle stroke the hand of his puissance over this City, it will prove pliant to him by obedience; but may chance to prove rebellious if he do oppress it. But Lodowick being taken prisoner by King Lewis the 12, they first came under the command of the French, and then of the Spaniard, according as those Nations had possession of the State of Milan: and after many changes and alterations, obtained again their freedom of King Francis the first; which being not able to preserve by their proper strength, they finally put themselves under the shelter of the Spa●●ard, who is now their Protector, and that not for nought; he being indebted to them, An. 1600, a Million and a half of Gold; that being the remainder of 18 Millions, cut off by the Pope's authority; that so the King might be indebted to that See: for most of his Lands were formerly engaged to the Mony-masters of this City. The same course of nonpayment, the King took with the rest of his Creditors in Florence, Ausburg, and the rest; insomuch that it was commonly said in Italy, that the King of Spain had made more ill faces upon the Exchange change in one day, 
Corsica.  than Michael Angelo the famous Painter, had ever made good in all his life. And thus you see this great City which commanded the Ocean, the Lady of so many Lands, and a great Moderator of the Affairs of Italy, fain to put herself into the protection of a foreign Prince; and that too at the charge of a great deal of Treasure; which he continually raiseth from them in the way of Loan, of which he often proves but a sorry Paymaster. And if the Wars he had with England did so drain their Purses (for it was that War, and the War which he had in the Netherlands, that made him so indebted to the Banks of Genoa) no question but the revolt of Catalogne, and the lasting Wars made against him by the French, in so many places, have plunged him in as deep as ever. Which notwithstanding, this people do so thrive under his protection, and draw so great commodity from their Trade with Spain, that it is thought their private men were never richer, the public Treasury never fuller, than it is at the present.  
CORSICA is an Island in the Ligustick or Ligurian Sea, opposite to the City of Genoa, from whence it is distant about sixty miles, and lying just North of the Isle of Sardinia, from which it is distant seven miles. It comprehends in length an hundred and twenty miles, seventy in breadth, and three hundred twenty five in circuit; and lieth under the fifth Climate, the longest day being almost fifteen hours.  
The people are stubborn, poor, unlearned; supposed to be more cruel than other Nations, and so affirmed to be by Caesar in his Book of Commentaries; the Progeny, as some say, of the 52 daughters of Thespius, who being all got with child in one night by Hercules, were by their Father put to the mercy of the Sea, by which they were brought unto this Island, after peopled by them. From one of these sons named Cyrnus, the Island had the name of Cyrnos, by which it oftentimes occurreth in some old Greek Writers. This is the conceit of Fabius Pictor, one of Annius his Authors. And that of Eustathius, a far more credible Writer is not much unlike, who will have it called Corsica from a woman so named dwelling in the coast of Liguria, who following her Bull hither was the first that discovered it. But these Orignalls I look on, the first especially, as the worst kind of Romances: the name of Cyrnos being more like to be derived from the Punic Keranoth, which signifies a horn or corner, by reason of the many Promontories with which it shoots into the Sea. Corsica insula multis Promontoriis angulosa est, as it is in Isidore, Lib. 14. cap. 6. And for the name of Corsica, I should derive it rather from the Corsi (by which name the inhabitants hereof are called in most Latin Writers) one of the two Nations of most note in the neighbouring Island of Sardinia. Celeberrimi in ea populorum Balari & Corsi, as we find in Pline. Which Corsi, or some of them, being overborne by some new Invaders (which the Island of Sardinia was seldom free of) were fain to shift their seat, and came over hither.  
This Country yieldeth excellent Dogs for game, good Horses, fierce Mastiffs; and a beast called Mufoli, not found in Europe, excepting in this Island, and Sardinia only, but there called Mufrones, or Musriones (for I conceive they are the same under divers names) said to be horned like Rams, and skinned like Stags; which skin is of such an incredible hardness, that the Beast being cast headlong against a Rock receives no hurt, but nimbly flies from his Enemy to his den.  
The soil by reason of the mountains (which every where are too thick and barren in it) is not very fruitful, producing Corn in less plenty, but the best Wines, and such as the old Romans well relished in good measure. It produceth also Oil, Figs, Raisins, and Honey: the first three in a mediocrity of goodness, the last somewhat bitter, and by many deemed unwholesome. It aboundeth also with Allom, Box-tree, Iron-mines; and the tree called Taxus, whose poisonous Berries though in taste pleasing, are much fed on by Bees; and therefore thought to be the cause of the bitterness of the Honey. In some few places where the Rivers have their currents, especially towards Liguria, it recompenseth, by its fertility in bearing all manner of grain, the barrenness of the mountains. Which mountains cutting through the midst of it, divide the whole Island into Cismontanum, being that towards Genoa; and Transmontanam, lying towards Sardinia; yet so that the people on each side call themselves the Cismontanes, and the other the Tramontane●. Both of them speak a corrupt Italian, in which there is not a little mixture of French and Spanish.  
For Rivers there are none of note, the principal of those which the Island yields, being called Gelo and Travignano. And as for Cities, some of the Ancients reckoned 33, which Strabo doth conceive to be Castles only; there being but four Towns or Cities in it in his time: of which four, two were Roman Colonies, the one planted by Marius, called Mariana; the other by L. Sylla, in the Town called Alleria; a place of some Antiquity before that time, and at this day a Bishops See. But now the place of most importance, is the Town of Bastia, seated in the North-East part of the Island, opposite almost unto Aleria, with a commodious Haven to it, and a strong Garrison to defend it, as being the ordinary seat of the Governor sent hither from Genoa, and of the Bishop of Aleria, who makes there his residence. 2 Aiazze, a reasonable strong Town, and a Bishops See; and so is also. 3 Nebbio, called Chersunum by Ptolemy. Then there is. 4 Porto Urechio, built not long since in the place of an old decayed Haven, and peopled by a Colony sent from Genoa. 5 S. Florence, a Port-town in the Northern part, in the midst betwixt Nebbio and Mariana; and 6 S. Boniface, called by Ptolemy Portus Syracusanus, just opposite unto it in the South corner of the Isle; both of them places of good safety, 
Genoa.  and capable of the greatest vessels that frequent those Seas.  
Who were the first Inhabitants is not easily known. That the Phoenicians or Tyrians had some footing here, is manifest by that of Calimachus an old Greek Poet, who calleth it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the Phoenician Cyrnus; and by that of Diodorus Siculus, affirming that the Carthaginians and Tyrrheni (which questionless he mistook for Tyrii) cast the Phocenses out of this Island. But whether these Phocenses did first inhabit it, or only had a Colony in some part thereof, is not demonstrable from those Authors. The Carthaginians after this made a conquest of it, and held it till the time of the first Punic War, when they were driven thence by the valour of Cornelius Scipio. Yet was it not totally subdued, nor brought into the form of a Roman Province till some time after, when it was fully conquered by C. Papyrius, A. V. C. 541. This Island and Sardinia at the first being joined together, and governed by one Praetor only, but afterwards made two distinct Provinces, immediately subject to the Praefect of the City of Rome, and consequently members of the Roman Patriarchate. In the falling of the Roman Empire it became a prey unto the Vandals, who used to send their condemned persons out of afric hither, to fell Timber for shipping; the Country even till then being very much overgrown with Woods. Afterwards with the rest of the Lands of the Mediterranean, it was under the power of the Saracens, against whom Ademar the Count or Governor of Genoa armed a Fleet of Galleys, and vanquished them in a fight at Sea, but lost his life in the action; which notwithstanding the Genoese followed their good fortune, seized on the Island, and carried thence 13 of the Enemy's Ships. The Pisans after this got possession of it, but being vanquished by the Genoese in the fight near Giglio (before mentioned) they were fain to leave it to the Conquerors. Since that it hath always followed the fortune of Genoa, save that it remained somewhat longer than that City did in the hand of the French, who in the year 1554, seized on it by the aid of the Turk●, whom (to the great dishonour of Christianity) they entertained in their Wars against Charles the fifth, but in the end restored it to the Commonwealth, upon the peace made betwixt France and Spain, Anᵒ 1559. And for securing of this Island to the State of Genoa, they fell upon this handsome project; employing none but natural Genoese to serve in the Garrisons of the Island, the better to keep under this untractable people; and filling all their Garrisons upon the Continent with natural Corsicans, whereby the Island is unfurnished of its ablest men, who also serve for hostages of the public Faith.  
Having thus took a brief view of the several parts and members of this Commonwealth, let us next look upon the whole, as to the Government, Forces, and Revenue of it. First for the Government, the principal of their Magistrates hath the name of Duke; as titular as the Duke of Venice, but of less esteem: that Duke continuing in his Office for term of life, but this being alterable and removed at the two years' end. So that he may be called most properly the Mayore of Genoa. For those two years he dwells in the public Palace, an hath 500 Germans for the guard of his person; in nothing like a Prince but that: and for that time, he alone hath the power of propounding any thing to the Senate, which carrieth some resemblance of a Negative voice. His time expired, he returns unto his house as a private person, but so that during life he hath the office of a Procurator in the Commonwealth. To him there are assistant eight principal Officers, who sit upon the same form with him, and continue in their office for two years also; which eight, together with the Duke, are called the signory: but he and they, in matters of most weight and moment subordinate to the General Counsel, consisting of 400 persons, all of them Gentlemen of the City, who with the nine before remembered do constitute the body of the Commonwealth. Under this form they have continued, ever since by the power and goodness of Andreas Doria (who might have made himself their Prince) they were discharged of their subjection to the French, An. 1528, never in danger of relapsing to their former servitude, but in the treasonable practice of the Flischi, a remarkable Family of the City, who hoping to possess themselves of the Principality under protection of the French, had so laid their plot, that Augustine di Flischi, who was designed to be their Duke, had in the night time seized on the Navy, and slain John Doria who had the command thereof: but leaping from one Galley to another to make sure of all, stumbled and fell into the sea; where he and his ambitious treasons were both drowned together.  
As for their Forces, there are within the Signeuri● 10000 men ready to arm at any time, as they see occasion; 25 Galleys always ready in the public Arsenal, and four continually at Sea for defence of their Trading. Sufficient strength to save them from a petit force, though not to guard them from the power of a strong Invader. But the chief strength which they rely on is the King of Spain; whose protection though it costs them dear, is worth their money; and they have prospered so well by it, that notwithstanding all the losses which they have sustained, it is supposed that the Revenue of the Commonwealth (besides the Treasury of S. George, which is very rich, and managed as a distinct body from the public, by its own Officers) amounteth to no less than 430000 Crowns per An.  
As for the Treasury of S. George, though it contain no part of the public Patrimony, but be governed by its own Officers, as a State distinct: yet is it of such ready use, so able at all times to furnish the Republic with vast sums of money, that the security and preservation of this Commonwealth depends much upon it. The Institution and Administration whereof, together with the benefit which from hence redoundeth unto this Estate, 
Lombardy.  I cannot better represent to the Readers view, than in the words of Machiavelli the greatest Politic of his times; who in his History of Florence hath expressed it thus. Post diuturnum illud bellum quod Genoenses multis ab hinc annis cum Venetis gessere, etc. After that tedious war between the Genoese and Venetians was ended in the year 1381. and that the Genoese found themselves unable to repay those moneys which they had taken up of their private Citizens in pursuit thereof, they thought it best to assign their ordinary Taxes over to them, that so in tract of time the whole debt might be satisfied; and for that end allotted them a Common-hall, there to deliberate and determine of their affairs. These men thus made the Masters of the public Taxes, elect among themselves a Common-counsel of an Hundred; and over them eight Officers of especial power to order and direct the rest, and to dispose of the Intrado: which Corporation so established, they entitled S. George's Bank. It happened afterwards, that the Republic wanting more moneys was glad to have recourse unto S. George; who growing wealthy by the orderly managing of his stock, was best able to relieve them in their necessities: and as before they assigned their Taxes over to him, so now, ditionem suam oppignorabant, they Mortgaged also their Demain. So that S. George continually waxing richer, and the State poorer, this Corporation became possessed at last of almost all the Towns and Territories of the Commonwealth: all which they govern by their own Magistrates, chosen by common suffrage from among themselves. It followed hereupon, that the common people bearing less respect unto the public applied themselves unto S. George: this being always orderly and prudently governed, that many times inclining to Tyranny; this never changing Officers, or form of Government, that subject to the proud and ambitious lusts of each Usurper, whether Domestical or Foreign. Insomuch that when the two potent Families of the Fregosis and Adorni, contended for the Sovereignty in this Estate, most of the People look upon it as a Quarrel which concerned them not: S. George not meddling more in it than to take an Oath of the prevailing Faction to preserve his Liberties. Rarissim● sane exemplo, etc. A most excellent and rare thing (saith he) never found out by any of the old Philosophers in their Imaginary Forms of a Commonwealth: that in the same State, and the same People, one may see at the same time, both Tyranny and Liberty, Justice and Oppression, Civility and Misgovernments: This only Corporation preserving in the Commonwealth its ancient lustre. So that in case S. George should in the end become possessed of the remainder of the Patrimony and Estate thereof, as it is possible it may, the State of Genoa might not alone be equalled with that of Venice, but preferred before it. So far, and to this purpose, that great Master of State-craft; a man of less impiety, and more regular life, than some of those who have traduced him for an Atheist.  
Here are within this Commonwealth, Archbishops 1. Bishops 14.   

THE ESTATES OF LOMBARDY.  
LOMBARDY is bounded on the East●with Romandiola, and the Estate or Territory of Ferrara; on the West, with that part of the Alps which divide Italy from France; on the North (reckoning Marca Trevigiana within the bounds hereof) with that part of the Alps which lieth towards Germany; and on the South, with the Apennine, which parteth it from Liguria, or the State of Genoa.  
It was called anciently Gallia Cisalpina, whereof we shall speak more anon, and took this new name from the Lombard's, or Longobardi, a people of Germany (of whom we have already spoken, but shall speak more at large when we come to Hungary;) who coming out of Pannonia possessed themselves of a great part of Italy, but left their name to this Tract only. A tract of ground of which it may be truly said, that as Italy is the garden of Europe, so Lombardie is the garden of Italy, or the fairest flower in all that garden. A country of so rich a mixture, that such another piece of ground for beautiful Cities, goodly Rivers, for fields and pastures shaded with such excellent fruits, for plenty of fowl, fish, corn, wine, cannot be found again in our Western World. So that it is no wonder that the two great Kings of France and Spain, have strived so eagerly and with such effusion of Christian blood for the Duchy of Milan, a part only (though the richest part) of this goodly Country, and but a spot of earth, compared to their own Dominions.  
Anciently it was of more extent than now it is, containing besides the principalities hereafter mentioned, the Provinces of Romandiola, and Trevigiana; even all, which in the infancy and growth of the Roman Empire, 
Milan.  had the name of Gallia Cisalpina. It was called Gallia from the Galls, who being drawn into Italy by the sweet taste of their wines, subdued the Natives, and possessed themselves of all the Country from the Apennine to the Adriatic; and from the Alps to the River of Rubicon, on the North-East, and the River of Arnus on the Southeast. This happened in the Reign of Bellov●sus King of the Celtaes, and of Tarqvinius Priscus, King of Rome. Cisalpina it was called because it lay on that side of the Alps which was next to Rom●, to difference it from Gallia on the further side, which had the name of Transalpina. It had the name also of Gallia togata, because when civilised they applied themselves to the Roman habit; the other being called Braccata, because they kept themselves to their former Trouzes, which by the Latins were termed Braccae. These Cisalpines were they who sacked Rome under the conduct of Brennus: from whence being beaten by Camillus, they were so slaughtered by the said Camillus near the River Aniene, and by Dolabella at the Lake of Vademonias, that not one of them escaped to brag of the burning of Rome. Yet durst not the Romans set upon them in their own Country, till a little before the coming of Pyrrhus into Italy, when the Senones, who had before sacked Rome, besieging Ar●tium, a Town of Tuscany, were not only forced to raise their siege, but were beaten home by Many's Curius the Consul: who followed his blow so well, that he drove them quite out of their Country. After this the Romans suffered the rest of them to remain in quiet, till the end of the first Punic war, when being grown of more strength, and at very good leisure, they took the rest of their Country from them, under the conduct of Flaminius the Roman Consul, A. V. C. 530. who presently caused Roman Colonies to be planted in it, as the best way to assure his Conquest: their total subjugation following in the year next after, under the Consulship of Marcellus and Corn. Scipio And yet it was accounted as a Province distinct from Italy until the settling of the Empire in Augustus Caesar, who dividing Italy into eleven Regions, made three of them out of this Cisalpina, that is to say, Gallia, Venetia, and Italia Transpadana: as afterwards it made up four of the seven Provinces of the Diocese of Italy, according to the distribution of it which was made by Constantine. How it came with the rest of Italy into the power of the Lombard's, and how from them taken by the French, with the rest of that Kingdom, hath been shown already. Won by the French, and from the French transferred with the Empire to the Kings of Germany, it did so far preserve the reputation of a Kingdom, that the Emperors were sometimes crowned at Milan with an Iron Crown for the Kingdom of Lombardy, as at Ak● (a Town of Cleveland) with a silver Crown for the Realm of Germany, and with a golden Crown at Rome for the sacred Empire. But the Empire being weakened by the Artifices of the Popes of Rome, this goodly Country was torn from it, and parceled in the conclusion amongst many Princes, as it still continueth.  
The Lombard's being masters of it, and having given it their own name, divided it by the River Po, into Longobardia Cispadana, lying betwixt the Po, and the Apennine Mountains; and Transpadana, lying betwixt the Po and the Alps: the first of which the old Romans called Aemilia, from Aemilius Lepidus, the founder of the City of Reggio (then called Regium Lepidi) once Proconsul of it. In the division of Italy by Aug. Caesar it had the name of Gallia. The other was by him honoured with the name of Italia Transpadana, by which name it was known in the times of Tacitus, and by him called, Florentissimum Italiae latus, the most flourishing part of all Italy. But this division being long since worn out of use, and the whole Country being cantonned into many Estates, as before was said, we will consider it at the present as it stands divided into the Dukedoms of Milan and Mantua, which with Trevigiana, described already, make up Transpadana: and those of Modena, Parma, and Montferrat, which with the Principate of Piedmont, make up Cispadana.   

The Dukedom of MILAN.  
THe Dukedom of MILAN hath on the East; the Estates of Mantua and Parma on the West, Piedmont, and some part of Switzerland one of the Provinces of the Alps; on the North, Marca Trevigiana; and on the South, the Apennine, which parteth it from Lingria or the State of Genoa. In elder times the Country of the Insubres, one of the greatest Tribes of the Cisalpine Galls, from whence it hath the name of Insubrium Ducatiu in some of the neater Modern Writers, but commonly called Ducatus Mediolanensis, from Mediolanum, or Milan, the chief City of it.  
Principal Rivers of it, 1 Padus, 2 Addua, 3 Ollius, and 4 Ticinus; of which somewhat hath been said already; and besides those it hath also in it the Lake called anciently Lacus Larius, but now Lago di Come (from the City of Com● which it neighboureth) 60 miles in length.  
The chief Cities and places of note are, 1 Modoecum, not far from Milan, of more fame than greatness, the fame thereof arising from the Iron Crown (kept in a Monastery here) wherewith some of the Emperors have been crowned by the Archbishops of Milan. A custom taken up from the Kings of the Ostrogothes, who are said to have first used the same, in testimony that they had won their Estates by Iron. 2 Pavia, or Papia, seated on the Flood Ticinus, united to Milan by john Galeaze, the first Duke thereof; made an University by Charles the fourth, An. 1361. and famous for the Battle in which Francis the first of France was taken prisoner by Charles the fifth, An. 1525. It is seated, as before was said, on the Flood Ti●inus, about four miles from the Po or Padus, the River carrying at this City so great a breadth, that the bridge over it is no less than 200 walking Paces long, built of Freestone, and covered over head with a roof supported all along with pillars. From this River the City itself was anciently called Ticinum, and took the name of Papia from its great affection to the Popes; or, as some say, quasi Patria pioruum (the two first syllables of those words being joined together) by reason of the many godly men it did produce. It lieth in length from East to West, a new fair street dividing it in the very midst, on the West side whereof are two handsome Market-places, and a strong Castle built by Galeaze the first Duke of Milan; whose Tomb together with that of Luitprandus King of the Lombard's, are here still remaining; the Kings of Lombardy being so pleased with the situation of the place, that they made it the seat-royal of their Kingdom. The Cathedral here is one of the best endowed in Italy, if not in Europe, the Revenues of it amounting to 300000 Crowns per annum. 2 Como, the Birth-place of both the Pliny's; a rich and handsome Town, situate on the Southside of the Lacus Larius, which from this Town hath now the name of Lago di Como; into which Lake, and through it, runs the Addua, and yet the waters do not mingle, that of the River passing over those of the Lake. About this Lake are many fair houses, and handsome villages, which do much beautify the place; and in the midst thereof an Island called Comacina, in which there was a strong Fortress in former times, wherein the Longobardian Kings did preserve their treasury. 3 Lodi, or Landa in the Latin, seated in a prosperous soil, and blessed with a painful and industrious people. 4 Novara, situate upon an high hill, in which live many ancient and noble Families: of right belonging to the Spaniard, as Dukes of Milan; but at the time when Maginus wrote, consigned over upon some conditions to the Dukes of Parma. But this Town, though it appertained to the Dukes of Milan, is situate within the Dukedom of Montferrat; and so is 5 Alexandria also, once a poor small village, known by the name of Roboretum, from a Grove of Oakes adjoining to it: afterwards being raised to its present greatness by the joint purses of the Citizens of Cremona, Milan, and Placentia, in honour of the Emperor it was called Caesarea. But in short time these people siding with the Popes, drew on themselves the anger of the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, who having in a manner desolated the City of Milan, the people thereof at the destruction of the City retired to this Town, call it in honour of Pope Alexander the third, whose part they then took against the Emperor, by the name of Alexandria, which it still retaineth. It is now the strongest Out-work of the whole Duchy, well fortified against all assaults and batteries which may come from France. 6 Marignan, situate South from Milan, remarkable for the great defeat here given the Swissers by King Franci● the first; and now the title of a Marquis. 7 Cremona, situate on the Banks of the River Po, in a very rich and healthy soil; an ancient Colony of the Romans, but a beautiful City to this day; and of such fidelity to its Prince, that it hath got the name of Cremona the faithful. It was built in the first year of the second Punic War, and burnt to the ground by Vespasians soldiers, after the defeat of Vitellius his forces; which defeat was given under the walls of this Town. For when Antonius, Vespasians General, first after his victory entered into it, he went into a Bath to wash away the sweat and blood from his body, where finding the water somewhat too cold, he said by chance, that it should anon be made hotter. Which words the soldiers applying to their greedy desires, set fire on the Town, and spent four days in the Pillage of it. By the encouragement of Vespasian it was again re-edified, and is now famous for the high Tower, from which grew the byword, Una turris in Cremona, unus Petrus in Roma, 〈◊〉 Portus in Ancona. 8 Milan, a fair Town, once the Metropolis of the Province of Liguria, and afterwards of the whole Diocese of Italy (called therefore 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, by S. Athanasius) At this time the fairest and the biggest of all Lombardy, having a Castle so strongly fortified, with natural and artificial Ramparts, that it is deemed impregnable. A City very populous, containing 200000 persons: and of great Trade, here being private shops equalling the public storehouses of other places; and the people are so rich, that the wise of every Mechanic will flaunt it in her silks and taffatyes. This City is said to have been built by the Galls, 359 years before Christ. It is seven miles in circuit, and honoured with an University, wherein flourished Hermolaus Barbarus, Caelius Rhodiginus, and Cardanus: seated it is in as commodious a soil as any in Italy, environed with water by two great channels, the one drawn from the River of Addua, the other from the Tesis or Athesis, which run hard by it, and convey all things to the City in so great abundance, that things there are at very cheap rates; and add much also to the industry of the inhabitants in the vending and dispersing of their Manufactures, which are of great esteem in most parts of the World. The buildings of the City generally are fair and stately, but three especially commended for their magnificence, that is to say, the Castle, the Hospital, and the Cathedral. For matter of Religion it doth use to glory that Barnabas the Apostle was its first Bishop, and St. Ambrose one of his Successors; that formerly their Bishop stood on even terms with the Popes of Rome, and their Church as much privileged as that; and that since those times they have given unto the world four Popes, that is to say, Alexander the 2, Urban the 3, Celestine the 5, and of late, Gregory the 14.  
As for the fortunes of it, it continued in the power of the French, and the Kings of Italy of that Nation, from the destruction of the Lombard's till the Kingdom of Italy fell from the house of Charles the Great, and came at last into the hands of the Germane Emperors. Under them it continued till the time of Frederick Barbarossa, from whose obedience it revolted Anᵒ 1161, in behalf of Pope Alexander the third, the Emperor divers times defacing the City, and the people still ministering fresh occasions of dislike and quarrel. Beatrix the wife of Frederick coming to see the City, without any ill intentions to it, was by the irreverent people first imprisoned, and then most barbarously used. For setting her upon a Mule, they turned her face towards the tail, which they made her hold instead of a bridle; and having thus showed her up and down the City, they brought her unto one of the gates, and there kicked her out. To revenge this horrible affront, the Emperor besieged and forced the Town; adjudging all the people to die without mercy, but such as would undergo this ransom. Between the buttocks of a skittish and kicking Mule there was fastened a bunch of figs, one or more of which, such as desired to live must snatch out with their teeth, their hands bound behind them, as the Mule was pacing thorough the streets. A condition which most of them accepted: and thereupon gave occasion to the custom used among the Italians, who when they intent to scof or disgrace a man, are wont to put their thumb betwixt two of their fingers, saying Echo la Fico; a disgrace answerable to that of making horns (in England) to him that is suspected to be a Cuckold. The City after this rebelling, and again taken by the Emperor, he leveled it unto the ground, pulled down the walls, and caused the whole ground on which it stood to be ploughed up, and sowed with salt; seeming to threaten by that Emblem, that it should never be re-edified. Which notwithstanding, the City was not only new built again, but the Pope with the help of these milanese, and the Venetians, had at last the better of the Emperor, whom he enjoined, after a vile submission, to undertake a journey to the Holy-land. Freed from the Emperor, they began to live after the form of Republic, in which condition they continued about 56 years, when Otho, surnamed Visconti (quasi bis Comes) because he was Lord of Milan and Angerona, assumed the title to himself, and settled it upon that Family after his decease; but so, that for the most part they were under the command of the Germane Emperors, and to them accountable. Galeaz the first, so called (as some write) because the Cocks crowed more than ordinarily at the time of his birth, added to the Estate hereof the Cities of Crema and Cremona. In the person of John Galeazo it was advanced unto a Dukedom by the Emperor Wenceslaus, for 100000 Crowns in ready money; which John increased so mightily in wealth and power, that he had 29 Cities under his command; and died as he was going to Florence to be crowned King of Tuscany. To him succeeded John Maria, and after him his brother Philip; who in his life had married his only daughter (but illegitimate) to Francisco Sforza, the best Commander of his times, and at his death appointed Alfonso of Arragon King of Naples for his heir and successor. Before Alfonso could take any benefit of this designation, Sforza was quietly possessed both of the City and the loves of the people. This Francis Sforze (I must needs crave leave to tell this story) was the son of James Altenduto, a plain Country man, who going to his labour with his Axe in his hand, whilst a great Army was passing by him, compared the misery and unpleasingness of his present condition, with those fair possibilities which a martial life did present unto him. And being in a great dispute with in himself what were best to do, he presently fell upon a resolution of putting the question to the determination of the Heavenly Providence; by casting his Axe unto the top of the tree next to him: conditioning with himself, that if the Axe came down again, he would contentedly apply himself to his wont labour; but if it hung upon the boughs, he would betake himself unto higher hopes, and follow the Army then in passage. He did so, the Axe hung upon the boughs, he went after the Army, and thrived so well in that employment, that he became one of the best Captains of his time, surnamed the Cotoniogla from the place of his dwelling, and Sforza from the greatness of his noble courage. By Antonia the daughter of Francis di Casalis the Lord of Cortona, he was the father of this Francis Sforze whom now we speak of; who was so fortunate a Commander in the wars of Italy, that to oblige him to his party, Philip the Duke of Milan bestowed his daughter upon him, and thereby a fair title to this great Estate, which he successively obtained against all pretenders. In his line it continued till the coming of Lewis the 12 of France, the son of Charles, and nephew of Lewis, Dukes of Orleans, by Valentine the sole daughter of John Galeaze the first Duke: who getting Duke Lodowick Sforze, betrayed by the Swissers into his hands, carried him prisoner into France, and possessed himself of the estate. Outed not long after by the confederate Princes of Italy, who were jealous of so great a neighbour; he left the cause and quarrel unto Francis the first, his next successor in that Kingdom: in pursuance whereof it is said by Bellay a French Writer, that the use of Muskets was first known. But Francis being in conclusion taken at the battle of Pavia, and carried prisoner into Spain; for his release was forced to release all claim unto this estate. A release long before endeavouced by some French Politicians, because the pretensions hereunto had brought such damage to that Crown: and no less eagerly opposed by Chancellor Prat (on the same reason that Scipio Nasica did oppose the destruction of Carthage, that is to say) because it did not only keep the French Nation in continual discipline of War, but served for a purgation of idle and superfluous people: yet notwithstanding this release, Francis renewed the War again, and laid siege to Milan, then under the command of Antonio di Leva, and a Spanish Garrison: during which war, the wretched Millanese endured the worst of miseries. For first the Governor, under colour of providing pay for his soldiers, got all the victuals of the town into the Castle, to be sold again at his own price: which many of the poorer sort not able to pay, perished of famine in the streets. And on the other side, his soldiers which were quartered in most parts of the City used when they wanted money, 
Mantua.  to chain up their Hosts, and then to put them to a ransom. Such as upon this barbarous usuage fled out of the City, had their Goods confiscate: on which there followed such a disconsolate desolation, that the chief streets were overgrown with nettles and brambles. In this miserable estate it continued till Charles the Emperor having totally driven out the French, restored it to Francis Sforze, brother to the last Duke Maximilian, and son of that Ludowick, who to advance himself unto this Estate, had most improvidently taught the French the way into Italy. But this Francis dying without issue, and the house of the Sforze failing in him, the Emperor entered on the Dukedom as right Lord thereof, and left the same to his successors in the Realm of Spain. This said, we will sum up the whole story of this Estate, in the ensuing Catalogue of   

The Lords and Dukes of Milan.  

1277 1 Otho, Archbishop of Milan.  
1295 2 Matthew, Brother's son to Otho, confirmed in his command of Milan, by Albertus the Emperor.  
1322 3 Galeaze Visconti, son of Matthew, disseized of his command by Lewis of Bavaria Emperor.  
1329 4 Actio Visconti, son of Galeazo, confirmed in his Father's power by the same Lewis the Emperor.  
1339 5 Luchino Visconti, brother to Galeaze.  
1349 6 John Visconti, the brother of Luchino.  
1354 7 Galeaze II. son of Stephen the brother of John.  
1378 8 John Galeaze, son of the first Galeaze, created by the Emperor Wenceslaus, the first Duke of Milan, An. 1395.  
1402 9 John Maria, son of John Galeaze, slain by the people for his horrible tyrannies.  
1412 10 Philip Maria, the last of the Visconti, which commanded in Milan; a Prince of great power in swaying the affairs of Italy. He died Anᵒ 1446; the milanese for some years resuming their former liberty.  
1446 11 Francis Sforze, in right of his wife Blanch the base daughter of Philip, seconded by the power of the sword, admitted Duke by the general consent of the people of Milan; one of the Knights of the noble Order of the Garter.  
1461 12 Galeaze Sforze, a valiant, but libidinous Prince, cruelly murdered by his own Subjects.  
1477 13 John Galeaze Sforze, privately made away (as it was supposed) by his Uncle Lodowick.  
1494 14 Lodowick Sforze, who to secure himself of his illgot Dukedom, drew the French into Italic.  
1501 15 Lewis the 12 of France, son unto Lewis Duke of Orleans, and Valentina daughter to the first Duke of Milan, vanquished Ludowick, carried him prisoner into France, and took the Dukedom to himself.  
1513 16 Maximilian Sforze, the son of Ludowick, restored to the Dukedom by the power of the Swissers and Venetians; but again outed of it by Francis the first, Son-in-law, and Successor to King Lewis the 12 in the Kingdom of France.  
1529 17 Francis Sforze, brother of Maximilian, restored to the Estate, and the French expelled by the puissance of Charles the 5th, who after the death of this Duke Francis (the last of the Sforzes) Anᵒ 1535, united it for ever to the Crown of Spain.   
This Dukedom is not now of such great extent and power as in former times: there being but nine Cities remaining of those 29, which were once under the command of the Dukes hereof; the rest being gotten in by the State of Venice, the Florentines, the Dukes of Mantua and Parma. And yet is this accounted the prime Dukedom of Christendom (as Flanders was accounted the prime Earldom of it) affording the Annual Revenue of 800000 Ducats to the King of Spain. A good Revenue might it come clear unto his Coffers. But what with the discharge of his Garrison-Souldiers, the defraying of his Viceroy, the Salaries of Judges and inferior Ministers; it is conceived that he spends more on it than he getteth.  
The Arms hereof are Argent, a Serpent Azure, Crowned Or; in his Gorge an Infant Gules. Which was the Coat-Armour of a Saracen, vanquished by Otho the first of the Visconti, in the Holy-land.  
There are in this Dukedom Archbishop 1. Bishops 6.   

The Dukedom of MANTUA.  
THe Dukedom of MANTUA, is bounded on the West, with Milan; on the East, with Romandiola; on the North, with Marca Trevigiana; and on the South, with the Dukedom of Parma.  
The Country about Mantua is reasonably good, and yieldeth all sorts of Fruits being well manured; plentiful in Corn and Pastures; the very Highways by the fields being planted with Elms, to train up the Vines which grow intermingled in every place, as generally it is in all parts of Lombardy. But the Inhabitants are conceived not to be so civil and well-bred as the rest of Italy, childish in their apparel, without manly gravity, poor in the entertainment of their friends, and exacting all they can from strangers.  
The places in it of most note are, 1 Mercaria, bordering next to Milan. 2 Bozilia, a small, but pleasant habitation, belonging to some Princes of the ducal family; built with fair Cloisters towards the street, in which passengers may walk dry in the greatest rain. 3 Petula, a small Village, but as famous as any, in regard it was the place wherein Virgil was born; generally said to be born in Mantua (Mantua Virgilio gaudet, as the old Verse is) because this Village is so near the City of Mantua (being but two miles distant) that his birth might very well be ascribed unto it. 4 Mantua, seated on the River Mincius, now called Sarca, which coming out of Lago di Garda falleth not far off into the Po, from whence there is a passage unto Venice. By nature strong, environed on three sides with a running water, half a mile in breadth, and on the fourth side with a Wall. The Dukes to take their pleasure on the Lakes and Rivers, have a Barge called the Bucentaure, five stories high, and capable of two hundred persons (whence it had the name) furnished very richly both for state and pleasure. Ocnus the son of Manto the Prophetess, the daughter of Tiresias, is said to have been the founder of it, and to have given unto it his Mother's name; but I more than doubt it, though Virgil a Native of those parts do report it so; this City being one of those which the Tuscans built beyond the Apennine, as the soundest Antiquaries do affirm. Made memorable (by whomsoever built at first) in the declining times of Christian purity, for a Council holden in it, An. 1061, wherein it was decreed, that the choosing of the Pope should from thenceforth belong unto the Cardinals. A Prerogative which of old belonging to the Emperors, was first by Constantine the third surnamed Pogonatus, given to the Clergy and people of Rome in the time of Pope Benedict the second, An. 684. resumed by Charles the Great when he came to the Empire; and now appropriated only to the College of Cardinals. But to return unto the Town; on the East-side of a bridge of about 500 paces long, covered over head, and borne up with Arches, stands the Duke's Palace for the City, and not far thence the Domo, or Cathedral Church of S. Peter. The Palace very fair and stately, but far short for the pleasures and delights thereof of his Palace at Mirmirollo, five miles from the City, which though it be of a low roof (after the manner of ancient buildings) yet it is very richly furnished, and adorned with very beautiful Gardens, able to lodge and give content to the best Prince in Christendom. Here are also many other Towns, as 5 Capraena, and 6 Lucera, of which nothing memorable.  
As for the fortunes of this Dukedom, it is to be observed that Mantua followed for long time the fortunes of the Western Empire, till given by Otho the second to Theobald Earl of Canosse for the many good services he had done him. Boniface who succeeded him had to Wife Beatrix the sistet of Henry the second, and by her was Father of Mathildis that famous Warriouress, who carried so great a stroke in the state of Italy. Being dispossessed of her Estate by Henry the third, she joined in faction with the Popes, recovered all her own again, and dismembered from the Empire many goodly Territories; which at her death (having had three husbands but no issue) she gave it in fee for ever to the See of Rome, An. 1115. After her death Mantua continued under the protection of the Empire. But that protection failing, then by little and little it was brought under by the family of the Bonncelsi, who Lording it over a Free-people with too great severity, contracted such a general hatred, that Passavin● the last of them was slain in the Marketplace by the people, under the command and conduct of Lewis de Gonzaga, a noble Gentleman, who presently with great applause took to himself the Government of the Estate, An. 1328, which hath continued in his house to this very day with a great deal of lustre, whose successors take here as followeth, under the several titles of  

A. Ch. The Lords, Marquesses, and Dukes of Mantua.  
1328 1 Lewis Gonzaga, the first of this Line, Lord of Mantua.  
1366 2 Guido, son of L●wis.  
1369 3 Ludowick, or Lewis II. son of Guido.  
1●82 4 Franois Gonzaga, son of Lewis 2d highly extolled by Poggy the Florentine for his Wisdom and Learning, who valiantly repulsed the attempts made against his Estate by John Galeaze then first Duke of Milan.  
1407 5 John Francisco Gonzaga, created the first Marquis of Mantua, by the Emperor Sigismond.  
1444 6 Lodowick, or Lewis III. son of John Francisco, who entertained the Emperor Frederick and the King of Danemark with great magnificence.  
1478 7 Frederick, son of Lewis the third.  
1484 8 Francis II. son of Frederick.  
1519 9 Frederick II. Commander of the Armies of the Pope and Florentines, entertained Charles the fifth with great solemnity, by whom he was made Duke of Mantua, 1530, and declared Marquis of Montferrat in right of his wife.  
1540 10 Francis III. 
Modena.  son of Frederick the second, Duke of Mantua, and Marquis of Montferrat.  
1550 11 William, the brother of Francis the third, created the first Duke of Montferrat.  
1587. 12 Vincent, son of William, Duke of Mantua and Montferrat.  
13 Francis IV. son of Vincent, had to wife Margaret the daughter of Charles Emanuel Duke of Savoy, and by her a daughter named Mary; in whose behalf the Duke of Savoy undertook the war against her Uncle for Montferrat.  
1613 14 Ferdinand, the brother of Francis the fourth, succeeded him in bo●h Estates, notwithstanding the opposition of the Duke of Savoy.  
15 Vincent the II. the brother of Ferdinand and Francis the 4th.  
1628. 16 Charles Gonzaga, Duke of Nevers in France, by his Mother's line, and of Mantua and Moutferrat by his Father Lewis Gonzaga, the third Son of Frederick the first Duke of Mantua, succeeded not without great opposition of the Spanish Faction, who sacked Mantua, distressed Casal, and much impoverished both Estates. But the business was at last composed by the power of the French, and the investiture conferred upon him by the hands of the Emperor.   
The chief order of Knighthood in these Dukedoms, is, of the The blood of our Lord JESUS Christ, instituted An. 1608. The Author of it was Duke Vincent Gonzaga, when the Marriage was solemnised between his son Francis and the Lady Margaret daughter to the Duke of Savoy. It consisteth of twenty Knights, whereof the Mantuan Dukes are sovereigns, and was allowed by Pope Paul the fifth. The Collar hath threads of Gold laid on fire, and inter-woven with these words, Domine probasti. To the Collar are pendent two Angels, supporting three drops of blood, and circumscribed with, Nihil isto triste recepto. It took this name, because in Saint Andrews Church in Mantua, are said to be kept as a most precious Relic, certain drops of our Saviour's blood (thou canst not, O Reader, but believe it) with a piece of the sponge.  
The Territories of this Duke (reckoning in that of Montferrat also) are in circuit nigh unto those of Florence, but his Revenues fall short; which amount to about 500000 Ducats only, but might be greater, if either the Duke would be burdensome to his subjects, as Florence is; or if he were not on all sides land-locked from navigation and traffic.  
The Arms of Mantua are Argent, a Cross Patee Gules, between four Eagles Sable, membered of the second: under an Escocheon in Fez charged Quarterly with Gules a Lion Or, and Or three Bars Sable.  
There are in this Dukedom Arch-Bishops 1. Bishops 4.   

The Dukedom of MODENA.  
THe Dukedom of MODENA containeth the Cities of Modena and Reggio, with the Ter●ritories adjoining to them: both of them situate in that part of Lombardy which is called Cispadana; and consequently partake of the pleasures and commodities of it.  
The people of this Dukedom are said to be better-natured than most of Italy: those of Modena being quick in their resolutions; easy to be pacified when wronged; and friendly in their entertainment of Strangers; the Reggians being affable, of present wits, and fit for any thing they can be employed in: the women in both Towns of a mild disposition, neither too courtly, nor too froward, as in other places.  
The first and principal City is that of Modena, anciently better known by the name of Mutina, and famous in those times for the first battle betwixt Autonie and Augustus Caesar; this latter being than not above eighteen years of age, and yet made head of a new League against Antonius, whom the Senate and people looked upon as a common Enemy. The managing of the war was left to Hirtius and Pansa then Consuls; the fortune of the day so equal, that Antony left the field, and the Consuls their lives; leaving Augustus the absolute command of a powerful Army, into whose favours he so cunningly did work himself, that he made them the foundation of his future greatness. It was at that time a Roman Colony, but being ruined by the fury of the Goths and Lombard's, was afterwards new built at the charge of the Citizens, situate near the Aponnine in a very good soil, and of indifferent fair buildings. In the distractions of Italy betwixt the Emperors and the Popes, Guido the Pope's Legate, and then Bishop thereof, consigned it over to Azo of the house of Este, Lord of Ferrara, An. 1304, the Pope himself consenting to it, upon the payment of a yearly tribute of 10000 Crowns: since which time it hath been for the most part in the power of that house. Borsius the Marquis of Ferrera being by Frederick the third made Duke of Mutina. 2 Reggi●, the second Town of note, hath tasted much of the same fortune; at first a Roman Colony called Regious Lepid●, afterwards ruined by the Goths when they came first into Italy; repaired and compassed with a Wall by its own inhabitants, and for a time under the command of the Earls of Canosse. But being weary of that yoke, they recovered their liberty; which being unable to maintain in those buftling times, they gave themselves unto Obizo the Father of Azo, Anᵒ 1292, and after that in the year 1326 to the See of Rome. 
Parma.  Passing through many other hands, it was at last sold for 60000 Ducats to the Visconti, Lords of Milan, An. 1370, and in the end recovered by the house of Este, Anᵒ 1409, and gave the title of a Duke to the aforesaid Borsius, whom Frederick the third made Duke of Modena and Reggio 1452  
The successors of this Borsius are before laid down in the succession of Ferrara, who held the whole estate together till the death of Alphonso the first Duke. He dying without lawful issue, Anᵒ 1595, left his estate to Caesar de Este, his Nephew by a base son, called Alphonso also; betwixt whom and Pope Clement the 8. a war was threatened for the whole, but at last compremised upon these conditions, that the Church of Rome should have Ferrara, with all the lands and territories appertaining to it, as an Estate anciently holden of that See; and that Modena and Reggio being Imperial Feifes should remain to Caesar, but to be held in fee of the Papal Throne. Duke Caesar to have leave to carry away all his movable goods, to sell such of his lands as were not of the ancient domain of the Dukedom; and to have one half of the Ordnance and Artillery. By which agreement the Cities of Modena and Reggio, became a new erected State, distinct, and independent of any other: each City being well fortified and garrisoned, and furnished with Ordnance for defence thereof. But what they yield unto the Prince in the way of Revenue, and what Forces he is able to raise out of his Estates, I cannot positively determine: But by the Tribute formerly paid unto the Popes for the City of Mutina, and the rich territory of both Towns, and the great Revenues of the Dukes of Ferrara, I conceive they cannot yield less than 100000 Crowns of yearly income. The Arms of this Duke the same with those of Ferrara before blazoned.   

The Dukedom of PARMA.  
THe Dukedom of PARMA hath on the North the Dukedoms of Milan and Mantua; from which it is parted by the Po; on the South, the Apennine, which divideth it from Liguria; on the East, the Country of Modena; on the West, Montferrat: situate, as Modena is in Lombardia Cispadana, and much of the same nature both for soil, and air, and other the commodities of those parts of Italy.  
The principal Cities of it are, 1 Parma, an ancient City, and made a Colony of the Romans at the end of the second Punic War, as Mutina and Aquileia at the same time were. It is seated on a small River of the same name, which runneth almost through the midst of it; beautified with very handsome buildings, and peopled by a race of ingenious men, whether they do be take themselves unto Arts or Arms. The grounds about this City are of excellent pasturage, and yield great plenty of the Cheese which is called Parmesan. 2 Placentia, seated on the Po, one of the first Colonies which the Romans planted amongst the Cisalpine Galls, and famous for the resistance which it made both to Annibal and Asdrubal, who severally in vain besieged it: made afterwards the Metropolis of the Province of Aemilia; yet nothing the less beautiful for so great an age. The fields adjoining have the same commendation with those of Parma, for most excellent Cheese; but go beyond for Salt-pits and Mines of Iron, which the other wanteth. 3 Mirandula, a proper Town, built in the time of Constans the son of Constantine the Great: the Patrimony of the noble Family of the Pici (of which was Picus de Mirandula that renowned Scholar) but held by them as Feudataries to the Dukes of Parma. 4 Briscello, called anciently Brixellum, not far from the chief City Parma; of no great note at the present time, but memorable in the Roman story for the death of the Emperor Otho, who here killed himself. For hearing here that his Forces were overthrown by Valens and Cecina Commanders of the Forces of Vitellius, than his Competitor for the Empire, he rather chose to fall by his own sword, than that the Romans should be forced for his sake to renew the war. And this he did with so much honour to himself, that many of his soldiers slew themselves at his Funeral Pile, not out of consciousness of crime, on for fear of punishment, but to testify their affections to him, and to follow such a brave example as was laid before them. So as we may truly say of him, as he is said by Tacitus to have said of himself, viz. Alii diutius imperium tenuerunt, nemo tam fortiter resiquit. 5 Monticella, in the middle way almost between Parma and Plancentia, and opponte unto Cremona, a chief. Town of the Duchy of Milan, from which parted by the River Po.  
These Towns (as others in these parts) have been partakers of the diversities of fortune, as being (after the declining of the Western Empire) some times under the Venetians, most times under the Milanese, and at last couquered by the Popes in the confusions and distractions of the Dukedom of Milan, under the two last Princes of the house of Sforza. By Paul the 3d, being of the house of the Farnesis, the Cities of Parma and Placentia with their Appendices, were given unto his son Petro Aluigi (or Petrus Aloysius, as the Latins call him) with the title of Duke, Anᵒ 1549. The signory of Camerine, which he had lately taken from the Dukes of Urbino, being given in recompense to the Church. This Petro being a man of most vicious life, had amongst other villainies committed an unspeakable violence on the person of Cos●●us Chirius the Bishop of Janum; and soon after poisoned him. For which most detestable fact he received no other chastisement of his Father than this, Haec vitia me non commonstratore didicit, that he was sure he had not learned those vices by his example But going on in these wicked courses, 
Montferrat.  he was slain at last by Count John Aguzzola, and Placentia, after a short siege, yielded to Ferdinand Gonzaga (Viceroy in Milan for the Emperor Charles the fifth) conceived to be privy to the murder. Octavian the son of Petro Luigi, hearing what had happened, fortified himself in Parma as well as he could; but being hated by the new Pope, and distrustful, not without good cause, of the Emperor's purposes, he had quite lost it if Henry the second of France had not taken him into his protection. For the Emperor Charles fully determined (notwithstanding that Octavian had married his base daughter) to have made himself Lord of the Town: and the French King was loath to see so great a strength added to the Emperor's possessions in Italy. When the war had now lasted four years, Philip the second which succeeded Charles, considering how necessary it was for his affairs in Italy, to have this Octavian his friend, restored unto him again this Plaisance or Placentia; and so withdrew him from the French faction, An. 1557. Yet because he would be sure to keep his house in a perpetual dependence on Spain, he restored it not absolutely at the present, but held the Citadel thereof with a Spanish Garrison till the year 1583; when in regard of the good services which Alexander Prince of Parma had done him in his Wars against the Hollanders, and others of the revolted Provinces, he caused it to be surrendered into the hands of his Father Octavian. By which, and by his settling upon this house the Town and Territory of Novara in the Dukedom of Millam, and other personal favours which they have conferred on the Princes of it, the Kings of Spain seem to have given some satisfaction to this house for stepping betwixt them and the Kingdom of Portugal, to which they might have made such a probable title as would have troubled his Estate, had they stood upon it  

The Dukes of Parma.  
1549 1 Petro Luigi Farnesis, son to Paul the third, made by the Pope his Father the first Duke of Parma.  
1550 2 Octavian Farnesis, son to Petro Lewis, married Margaret base daughter to Charles the fifth; afterwards Governess of the Netherlands.  
3 Alexander, son of Octavian and Margaret of Austria, one of the most renowned Soldiers of his time, Governor of the Netherlands for King Philip the 2d.  
1592. 4 Rainutio Farnesis, son of Alexander and Mary of Portugal, eldest daughter of Edward son to King Emanuel; one of the competitors for that Crown.  
5 Edoardo Farnesis, son of Rannutio.   
Of the Revennes and Forces of these Princes I have little to say, but think them to be of good consideration in both respects: their Territories lying in the best and richest part of Italy, and their Estates, environed by more puissant neighbours; which both necessitate and enable them to defend their own.   

The Duke of MONTFERRAT.  
THe Dukedom of MONTFERRAT, is situate betwixt Lombardy and piedmont, or the Rivers of Tenarus and Po, on the East and West; extended North and South in a line or branch from the Alps to the borders of Liguria, of which last it was sometimes counted part, and called Liguria Cisapennina for distinction sake.  
It took this name either à Monte ferrato, from some mountain of it stored with Iron; or else à monte feraci, as some rather think, from the fertility of the Mountains. And to say truth, though the whole Country seem to be nothing else than a continual heap of Mountains, yet are they Mountains of such wonderful fruitfulness, that they will hardly give place to any Valley in Europe.  
The principal River of it is the Tenarus, above mentioned, which springing out of the hills about Barceis, a Town of the Marquisate of Saluzzes, falleth into the Po not far from Pavia. The principal Cities of it are, 1 Alba, called by Pliny Alba Pomera, situate on the banks of the said River, in a rich and fertile soil, but a very bad air: near to which in a poor village called Zobia, the Emperor Pertinax was born. Who being of mean and obscure Parents, after the death of Commodus, was called by the Conspirators to the Roman Empire. But being overzealous to reform the corruptions of the soldiers, he was by the Praetorian Guards (hating their Princes for their virtues as much as formerly for their vices) most cruelly murdered; and the Imperial dignity sold to Julianus for 25 Sestertiums a man. 2 Casal, vulgarly called Saint Vas, from the Church there dedicated to St. Evasius (or Saint Vas, as they speak it commonly) the strongest Town in all this Country; well built, and peopled with many ancient and noble Families, of which the family of St. George is one of the principal, and made a Bishops See by Pope Sixtus the fourth, Anᵒ 1474. 't was in former times the chief seat of the house of Montferrat, and for that cause compassed with a strong wall, and a fair Castle: but of late fortified after the modern manner of Fortifications, and strengthened with an impregnable Citadel by Duke Vincent Gonzaga, as the surest Key of his estate; in which new Citadel the Governor of the Province holds his usual residence. 3 Aique, in Latin Aquensis, famous for its Baths or Fountains of hot and medicinal waters. 4 Saint Saviour's, where there is a very strong Fortress, as there is also in 5 Ponsture, or Pont di Stura, so called of the River Stura. 6 Osoniano, anciently Occimianum, the old seat of the first Marquesses of this Montferrat. 7 Villa nova. 8 Balzale. 9 Liburn, and many others of less note.  
Here are also with in the limits of this Dukedom, the Towns of Ast, Cherian, and Chivasco, belonging to the Dukes of Savoy, in the description of whose Country we may speak more of them; together with Novara and Alexandria, appertaing to the Dukedom of Milan, which we have spoken of already. And hereunto also I refer the strong (and in those times) impregnable Fortress, by the Latin Historians called Fraexinetum, from some Grove of Ashes near unto it; situate in the advantages of the Mountains, and not far from the sea; by consequence better able to defend itself and admit relief; and therefore made the receptacle or retreat of the Saracens, at such time as they had footing in these parts of Italy. First took and fortified by them in the year 891, recovered afterwards by the prowess and good fortune of Otho the Emperor, deservedly surnamed the Great, about 60 years after. Of great note in the stories of those middle times. By Luitprandus placed near the borders of Provence; by Blondus and Leander near the River Po, and the Town of Valenza, once called Forum Fulvii; and finally by Sigonius in the Coltian Alps: and so most fit to be referred unto this Country, though now so desolated that there is no remainder of the ruins of it.  
This Country was made a Marquisate by Otho the 2d, An. 985. one of the seven by him erected and given to the 7 sons of Waleran of Saxony, who had married his daughter Adelheide. A Military Family, conspicuously eminent in the Wars of Greece and the Holy-land; where they did many acts of singular merit: insomuch as Baldwin and Conrade, issuing from a second branch hereof, were made Kings of Jerusalem; and Boniface one of the Marquesses got the Kingdom of Thessaly, and many fair Estates in Greece. But the Male-issue failing in Marquis John, the Estate fell to Theodorus Palaeologus, of the Imperial family of Constantinople, who had married the Heir-generall of the house; continuing in his name till the year 1534, when it fell into the hands of the Dukes of Mantua. In the person of Duke William Gonzaga raised to the honour of a Dukedom, as it still continueth: the best and richest part of that Duke's Estate, and the fairest flower in all his Garden. The residue of the story may be best collected out of the following Catalogue of  

The Marquesses of Montferrat.  
A. C.  
●985 1 William, one of the sons of Waleran and Adelheide, made the first Marquis of Montferrat.  
2 Boniface, the son of William.  
3 William II. who accompanied the Emperor Conrade the 3. and 5 Lewis of France to the Holy-land.  
●183 4 Boniface II. son of William the second, his younger brother William being designed King of Jerusalem, and Reyner another of them made Prince of Thessaly, succeeded his Father in Montferrat. Aiding his Nephew Baldwin the son of William in recovering the Kingdom of Jerusalem, he was took prisoner by Guy of Lusignan, Competitor with him for that title.  
5 William III. son of Boniface, poisoned in the Holy-land, where he endeavoured the restoring of his Brother Conrade to that languishing Kingdom.  
6 Boniface III. son of William the third, for his valour in taking of Constantinople, made King of Thessaly.  
1254 7 Boniface IV. son of Boniface the third, added Vercelli and Eporedium unto his Estate.  
8 John, surnamed the Just, the last of this house.  
9 Theodore Palaeologus, son of the Emperor Andronicus Palaeologus the elder, and Yoland his wife, daughter of Boniface the fourth.  
10 John Palaeologus, son of Theodore.  
11 Theodorus II. son of John, a great builder and endower of Religious houses.  
12 Jacobus Johannes, son of Theodore the second.  
13 John III. eldest son of Jacobus Johannes.  
1464 14 William IV. brother of John the third, founder of the City and Monastery of Casal  
1487 15 Boniface V. brother of John and William, the two last Marquesses, invested by Fredederick the fourth, Blanea Maria the daughter of William surrendering her Estate unto him.  
16 William V. son of Boniface the fifth.  
1518 17 Boniface VI son of William the fifth.  
1530 18 John George, brother of William the fifth, succeeded his Nephew in the Estate; which he held but four years. After whose death, Anᵒ 1534, this Marquisate was adjudged to Frederick the first Duke of Mantua, who had married Margaret daughter of William the fifth, and next heir to George. Whose successors may be seen in the former Catalogue of the Dukes of Mantua.   
The Arms hereof are Gules, a Chief Argent.  
Here are in this Estate. Arch-Bishops o Bishops 4.  
And now according to my method, I should proceed to the description and story of the Principality of P●emont, the last and most Western part of Italy. But being it lieth partly in, and partly at the foot of the Alps, was anciently a part of the Province called Alps Coltiae, and is now part of the Estate of the Duke of Savoy: we will defer it till we come to those Alpine Provinces which are next to follow. And so much shall suffice for Italy, in which there are, besides those of Premont, 

Pope's 1.  
Archb. 35.  
Patriarches 3.  
Bishops 292.  
Universities 17.  
viz.   

In the Land of the Church. 

Rome.  
Bononia.  
Ferrara.  
Perusia.    
In Sicil. 

Palermo.  
Catana.    
In the Signory of Venice. 

Venice.  
Milan.  
Verona.    
In the Dukedom of Tuscanie. 

Florence.  
Pisa.  
Sienna.    
In Naples. 

Naples.  
Salera.    
In Lombardie. 

Milan.  
Pavia.  
Mantua.       
And so much for Italy.   

OF THE ALPS.  
BEfore we can come out of Italy into France we must cross the Alps, a ridge of hills wherewith (as with a strong and defensible Rampart) Italy is assured against France and Germany. They are said to be five days journey high, covered continually with snow, from the whiteness whereof they took this name: that in the Sabine Dialect being called Alpum, which in the Lative was called Album.  
They begin about the Mediterranean or Ligustick Seas, and crossing all along the borders of France and Germany extend as far as to the Gulf of Cornero, in the Province of Istria; and are in several parts, which we will muster up as they lie in order from the Mediterranean to the Adriatic. And first those which lie nearest to the Mediterranean, are for that cause called Maritimae; from their nearness to Liguria, called by some Ligusticae. 2. Then follow those called Coctiae, from Coctius, a King of the Allobroges; and 3. those named Graiae, from the passage of Hercules, and his Grecian followers; of which both amongst the Poets and Historians there is very good evidence. 4. After we come to the Poeninae, so named from the march of Annibal and his Carthaginiant, whom the Latin Writers call by the name of Paeni, or from the Mountain-God Poeninus, worshipped by the Veragri, the Inhabitants of it. 5. Next come we to the Lepontiae, so named from the Lepontii, who did there inhabit; as 6. the Rhaetica, which lie next to them, from the Rhaeti once a powerful people of that mountainous tract. 7. Then follow those called Juliae, from the passage of Julius Caesar over them, in his march towards Gaul: and so at last we come unto those called Carnica, extending to the shores of the Adriatic, denominated from the Carni who did here inhabit, and who gave name also to Carniola, an adjoining Province.  
The ancient Inhabitants of these mountainous Countries, besides the Allobroges, Veragri, Lepontii, Rhaets, and Carni, spoken of before, were the Sedani, Salii, Valenses, Vacontii, and divers others of less note and estimation: all vanquished by the indefatigable industry of the Romans. After whose subjugation, and the settlement of the Roman Empire, these mountains, and some part of the vales adjoining, made five several Provinces, viz. the Province of the Coctian Alps, containing Wallisland and Piedmont. Secondly, of Rhaetia Prima, comprehending the Grisons, and part of the Dukedom of Milan, now in possession of the Swissers; both which were members of the Diocese of Italy. Thirdly, of the Alps Maritima, now part of Dauphin and Provence. Fourthly, of the Graiae and Poeninae Alps, and the greatest part of Maxima Sequanorum, including some part of Savoy, and most part of Switzerland; both which were members of the Diocese of Gaul: and fifthly, of Noric●m Mediterraneum; comprehending Carniola, Carinthia, and the parts near hand, which were members of the Diocese of Illyricum Occidentale. The people anciently, as now, by reason of their drinking snow-water, dissolving from the tops of the hills, and sometimes falling thence with as great a violence as the Cataracts of Nilus are said to do, were generally troubled with a swelling in the throat, which the Latins call Struma, being the same with that which we call the King's Evil, because by special privilege curable by the Kings of France and England. Quis tumidum guttur miratur in Alpibus? as the Poet hath it.  
Of these vast hills, the lowest are the Carnicae and Maritimae, lying nearest to the several Seas before remembered. The Coctia and the Graiae not so high, but that the passages lie open for the most part of the year. The rest, by reason of their deep and dreadful praecipices, their tedious and steep ascents, narrow ways, dangerous craggy Rocks, fierce whirlwinds, and huge balls of snow tumbling with an incredible violence from the tops of the mountains, are hardly passable by horse, not at all by waggon. And yet amongst these dreadful hills there are observed to be some valleys of great fertility, not giving ground for fruitfulness to the best in Europe: and for the sweetness of the temperature going much beyond them. With such an equal hand doth the heavenly Providence dispense the benefits of Nature to his whole Creation, that plenty bordereth upon want, and pain on pleasure.  
And yet for all the difficulty and danger of these Alpine passages, covetousness, or curiosity, or desire of conquest, have found a way to make them passable in many places, and that not only for private and particular passengers, but for vast multitudes and numerous Armies, such as those led by Annibal and Julius Caesar. But specially the barbarous people found out five ways to break into Italy, which have been since much traveled by divers Nations; of which three be out of France, and two out of Germany. The first from France is through Provence, and so close to the Ligustick Seas; easiest for private Passengers, but too straight and narrow for great Armies; there being many passages in the Country of Nizzes, so narrow, that ten men may make head against ten thousand, as in that called the Pace of the Virgin, for one. The second is over the hills called Geneure, into the Marquisate of Saluzzes, and so to the other parts of Lombardie: which was the way that Charles the eighth marched towards Naples; and by the Italians is called commonly Strada Romana, because the ordinary passage betwixt France and Rome. The third way is over the greater Cenis (which some call the lesser S. Bernard, so to Aost, or Turin; which (if we may believe Antiquity) was first opened by Hercules, and after followed by Annibal, who found the passages so closed up, that he was forced to break his way (as Plutarch telleth us) with fire and vinegar: whence that so memorable saying, Viam Annibal aut inven●ct aut faciet; and from the passage of those Worthies, this tract, and that adjoining, were called Alps, Craiae, and Poeninae. Or if (as others think) Annibal took the former way, and came directly upon Turin, which Town it is most certain that he took in his march; then these Poeninae must take name from the passage of Asdrubal, or of some part of Annibals' Army, which probably was too great to go all one way, or else from the Mountain-God Poeninus, as before was said.  
The first way out of Germany into Italy, is through the Country of the Grisons, by the Valtolin, which the Spaniard seized into his hands. So that by the keeping of the Veltlyn, or Valtolin, and manning of the Fort Fuentes, which he also erected; he was in a manner the Lord of this passage: not only to the discontent of the Natives, but to the distaste of his neighbours the Savoyards and Venetians. The other way out of Germany into Italy, is through the Country of Torolis, by the Towns of Inspruch and Trent. This passage is commanded by the Castle and Fort of Eresberg, seated on the confines of this Country towards Suevia, and from Instruch, is two days journey distant. Which Fort, in the War which the Protestant Princes made against Charles the fifth, was surprised by Captain Scherteline, so to hinder the coming of the Pope's Forces into Germany: for which the Emperor so hated him, that when all the rest of that faction were pardoned, he only continued a Proscript, his head being valued at 4000 Crowns. The taking also foe this Fort, and the Castle adjoining, by D. Maurice of Saxony, made the said Charles then being in Inspruch, to fly out of Germany, and shortly after to resign his Empire to his brother Ferdinand.  
Out of these Mountains rise the springs of many of the most renowned Rivers in these West parts of the world; as, 1. The Rhine, which springeth from two several Fountains, the one which they call the Nearer Rhine, out of the Lepontiae; and the other which they term the Vorder, or further Rhine, out of the Rheticae; which meet together about a Dutch mile from Chur, the chief Town of the Grisons, and so go on by Constance to Germany. 2. Rhosue, which riseth in that part of the Lepontiae, which is called Die Furchen, about two Dutch miles from the head of the Nearer or Hinder Rhyne, and so through Wallistand into France. 3. Padus, or Po, which hath his head in a branch of the Coltian or Coctian Alps, heretofore called Mons Vesulus, and so through Piedmont into Italy. Out of them also spring the Rivers of Russee, Durance, and Athesis, the first a Dutch, the second a French, and the third an Italian River also; not to say any thing of others of inferior note. The great Lakes which are found in this monntainous tract, we shall hereafter meet with in their proper places.  
Let us next look upon the Country's and Estates here situate, which bordering upon Italy, France, and Germany, and partaking somewhat of them all, do belong to neither; but reckon themselves to be free and absolute Estates, Supreme, and independent upon any others, as indeed they are. Such other of these Alpine Countries, which are under the command of the Germane Princes, as some parts of Schwaben and Bavaria, together with Tirol, Carniola, and the rest which belong to Austria, shall be considered in the History of those States and Princes, to which of right they do belong. But for the rest, which as they lie entire together without intermixture, so they are absolute in themselves, and owe nor suit nor service unto any other; we will consider them in this place, under the name of the Alps, or the Alpine Provinces.  
The ALPS then, or the Alpine Provinces, call them which you will, are bounded on the East with Tirol in Germany, and the Dukedoms of Milan and Montferrat in Italy; on the West, with Provence, Dauphin, and La Bresse, parts of the Continent of France; on the North, with the County of Burgundy in France, and Suevid or Schwaben in High Germany; and on the South, with Lombardy, and a branch of the Mediterranean Sea. Called in the middle times by the name of Burgundia Trans●urana, because it contained that part of the Kingdom of Burgundy, which ●ay beyond the Mountain Jour: A Mountain which beginning near the City of Basil, and not far from the Rhine, passeth Southwestward by the Lakes of Bieler-Zee, Nuwenburger-Zee, and that called Lemane, till it come almost unto the Rhosue: dividing by that means the Provinces of Switzerland and Savoy from the County of Burgundy.  
It lieth under the sixth Climate, and some part of the seventh: so that the longest day in Summer is fifteen hours, and three quarters. Of different nature in regard both of Soil and People; which will best show itself in the Survey of the several Provinces into which divided; that is to say, 1. the Dukedom of Savoy, 2. the Signory of Geneva, 3. the Resorts of Wallisland, 4 the Cantons of the Swissers, and 5 the Leagues or the Grisons. Which several States, though they be reckoned to belong to the Germane Empire, and that the Bishops of Chu●, S●on, and Basil, are generally accounted for Princes of it: yet they neither come unto the Diets, nor are subject to the public Taxes, nor comprehended within any of those ten Circles into which the Empire is divided.  
The Language herein spoken, partakes somewhat of all three, as before was said: the French being wholly spoke in Savoy, the lower Wallisland, and generally by the Swissers bordering on the Lake Lemane; the Dutch being common to the greatest part of the Swissers, the Grisons about Chur, and the upper Wallisland; and finally the Italian, used by the generality of the Grisons, the Praefectures appertaining unto them and the Swissers both, in Piedmont, and those parts of Savoy which lie next unto it.  
The principal Soldiers of these mountainous Provinces, 1 Rodolph Earl of Habspurg, the Founder of the present Austrian Family 2 Thomas, and 3 Peter, Earls of Savoy, this last surnamed Charlemagne the second. 4 Emanuel Philibert, one of the later Dukes hereof, Commander of the Armies of the King of Spain. 5 John Tzerclas, commonly called Count Tilly, General of the Imperial Armies in the War of Germany. For Scholars of more special note for which we are beholding to these Countries, we have 1 Philip Theophrastus Bombastus à Boenham, commonly called Paracelsus, the Author, or Instanrator of Chemical Physic; born in the Mountains of Helvetia, as he saith himself: a man of most prodigious parts, and of no mean vices. 2 Zuinglius, one of the chief Agents in the Reformation. 3 Musculus, and 4 Oecolampadius, two Divines, his seconds. 5 Henry Bullinger, one of the same profession also. 6 Sebastian Castalio, of as much Learning as the best of them, though of different judgement. 7 Dan. Tossanus the Hebrician. To which we may add 8 Calvin also, who though he had his birth in France, had his being here; and never grew to any eminency in Fame or Learning, till he was settled in Geneva.  
For matter of Religion, it is of a very mixed condition also in all these Countries: that of the Romish only have public countenance in the Dukedom of Savoy, and Piedmont; but so that the Reformed is tolerated in some parts thereof, especially in the parts next Dauphine; to which the neighbourhood of Geneva gives a great increase. In Switzerland there are four Cantons which are wholly for the Reformation, viz. Zurich, Bern, Basil, and Schaffhausen: Seven that stand wholly for the Doctrine of the Church of Rome, i. e. Uren, Switz, Underwalden, Lucern, Zug, Friburg, and Solothurn: in Apenzel and Glaris, they allow of both. The Grisons are confusedly divided betwixt both Religions; but the Italian Praefectures admit no other but the Romish. The cause of which division came upon the preaching of Zuinglius, a Canon of the Church of Zurich, who being animated with Luther's good success in Germany, began about the year 1519 to preach against the Mass, and Images, and other the corruptions of the Church of Rome. In which his party so increased, that on a public Disputation which was held at Zurich, the Mass was abrogated in that Canton by the authority of the Senate, Anno 1526, and Images destroyed at Bern, 1528. After which prosperous beginnings, the Reformation began to spread itself amongst the Confederates; and had prevailed further both in France and Germany, but for a difference which arose betwixt him and Luther about the Sacrament of the Supper: in which Luther did not only maintain a Real presence, but a Consubstantiation also in the sacred Elements; which Zuinglius maintained to be only a bare sign and representation of Christ's blessed body. For reconciling of this difference, wherein the enemies of both did extremely triumph, a conference was held between them at Marpurg a town of Hassiae, by the procurement of that Landgrave, but without success: Luther professing that he durst not agree in that point with Zuingulius, ne Principes suos interpretatione tantopere Pontificiis exosa, magis invisos redderet, for fear of drawing too great hatred on the Princes of his own profession. From this time forwards all brake out into open flames, the names of Ubiquitarians, and Sacramentarians, being reciprocally cast upon one another; to the great hindrance of the cause which they had in hand: yet so that the Lutheran opinions got ground in Germany, the Zwinglians amongst these Mountains and in France itself, and finally prevailed by the means of Calvin in many parts of Germany also. But hereof more hereafter in convenient place.  
As for the story of those Countries, before they were divided into so many hands, we are to know that the old Inhabitants hereof (mentioned before) were conquered severally by the Romans: as shall be shown in the description of the several Provinces. Won from the Romans by the Burgundians, in the time of Honorius the Western Emperor, they became'a member of their Kingdom, except the Country of the Grisons, and some parts of Switzerland, which fell under the Almans: united afterwards in the new Kingdom of Burgundy of the French erection, when subdued by that Nation. But Charles the Bald, the last of the French Kings of Burgundy, having united it to the Kingdom of France, divided it into three Estates; that is to say, the Dukedom of Burgundy on this side of the Soasne, the Dukedom of Burgundy beyond the Soasne, and the Dukedom of Burgundy beyond the Jour. This last containing the greatest part of all these Alpine Provinces (except Piedmont only) was by the said Charles given to Conrade a Saxon Prince, the son of Witikind the third, and younger brother of Robert, the first Earl of Anion, 
Savoy.  by the name of Earl of Burgundy Transjurane, or Burgundy beyond the Jour. Rodolph his son and successor, by Eudes the King of France, his Coming German, was honoured with the title of King: to make him equal at the least with Bos●n Earl of Burgundy beyond the Soasne, whom Charles the Grose, Tabour the same time had made King of Arles. But Rodolph finding it offensive to the Germane Emperors, abandoned it on the death of Ends, and took to himself the title of Duke. The residue of the story we shall have in the following Catalogue of 

The Earls, Dukes, and Kings of Burgundy Trnnsjurane.  
1 Conrade, the first Earl of Burgundy Transjurane.  
890 2 Rodolph, Earl, King, and Duke of Burgundy Transjurane.  
912 3 Rodolph II. elected King of Italy against Berengarius; which title he exchanged with Hugh de Arles, who was chosen by another Faction, for the possession of the Kingdom of Arles and Burgundy, on the assuming of which Crown he resigned this Dukedom to his Brother.  
4 Boson, the brother of Rodolph the second, succeeded his brother in the Dukedom of Burgundy beyond the Jour; as afterwards he succeeded Rodolph his Brother's son in the kingdom of Arles and Bnrgundie.  
965 5 Conrade, son of Boson, King of Arles and Burgundy, and Duke of Burgundy Transjurane.  
990 6 Rodolph III. son of Conrade, who dying without issue lest his estates to Henry surnamed the Black, the son of his sister Gisela, by Conrade the second, Emperor and King of Germany: united so unto the Empire, till by the bounty and improvidence of some following Emperors, it was cantonned into many parts; of which more anon. It is now time to lay aside this discourse as to the general condition and affairs of these Alpine Provinces; and to look over the particulars: beginning first with the estate of the Duke of Savoy, situate wholly in these Mountains, and lying next to Italy, where before we left.    

THE DUKEDOM OF SAVOY.  
THe Dukedom of SAVOY is bounded on the East, with Milan and Montferrat in Italy; on the West, with Dauphine in France; on the North, with Switzerland, and the Lake of Geneva; and on the South, with Provence, and the Mediterranean. The Country of so different nature, that it cannot be reduced under any one character: and therefore we must look upon it in the several parts into which divided; that is to say, 1 the Principality of Piedmont, and 2 Savoy, specially so called.  
1 PIEDMONT, in Latin called Regio Pedemontana, because situate at the foot of the Mountains (as the name in both languages imports) is bounded on the East, with Milan and Montferrat; on the West, with Savoy; on the North, with the Swissers; and on the South, it runneth in a narrow valley to the Mediterranean, having Montferrat on the one side, Provence and a part of the Alps upon the other. The Country wonderfully fertile compared with Switzerland and Savoy, which lie next unto it; but thought to be inferior to the rest of Italy. It containeth, besides Baronies and Lordships, 15 Marquisates, 52 Earldoms, 160 Castles or walled places: and is so populous withal, that once a Piemontese being demanded the extent of his Country, made answer, that it was a City of 300 miles' compass.  
The principal Cities of it are, 1 Turin, called of old Augusta Taurinorum, because the head City of the Taurini, once the inhabitants of this Tract: from which Taurini it deriveth the name of Turin, and not as some conceive from the River Duria, on whose banks it standeth. In this City is the Court and Palace of the Duke of Savoy (who is the Lord of this Country) the See of an Archbishop, and an University, in which the renowned Scholar Erasmus to ok his degrees in Divinity. It is situate on the River Po, in a place very important for the guard of Italy, for which cause the Romans sent a Colony hither, and the Lombard's made it one of the● four Dukedoms. Adjoining to it is a Park of the Dukes of Savoy, watered with the Duria, Stir, and Po, six miles in circuit, full of Woods, Lakes, and pleasant Fountains, which make it one of the sweetest situations in Europe. 2 Mondent, seated on the swelling of a little hill, with very fair Suburbs round about it, in one of which the Dukes of Savoy built a Church and Chapel to the blessed Virgin: intended for the buriall-place of the ducal Family. It is the best peopled Town, for the bigness of it, of any in Italy. 3 Augusta Iraetoria, now called Aost, situate in the furthest corner of Italy to the North and West. 
Piemtont.  4 Vercelli, a strong Town bordering upon Milan, to which it formerly belonged, and was given first in Dower with Blanch the daughter of Philip Maria Duke of Milan, to Amadee the third, Duke of Savoy, anciently the chief Town of the Libyci, who together with the Salassi and Taurini, were the old Inhabitants of this Country. 5 Inurea, called by Ptolemy Eporedia, situate at the very jaws of the Alps, an Episcopal City. 6 Nicaea, or Nizze, an Haven on the Mediterranean, at the influx of the River Varus, which divides it from Provence, beautified with a Cathedral Church, the Bishop's Palace, a Monastery of Nuns, and an impregnable Citadel. A place so naturally strong, that when as yet the Fortifications were imperfect, it resisted the whole Forces of Barbarossa the Turkish Admiral, An. 1543, lying before it with a Navy of two hundred sail, and battering it continually with incredible fury. First fortified by Duke Charles, upon occasion of some words of the Duke of Bourbon, who passing this way with his Army, Behold, saith he, a situation of which they know not the importance: the Citadel being after added by Emanuel Philibert, and garrisoned for the most part with 400 soldiers. 7 Suse, seated in the ordinary through fare betwixt France and Italy, called of old Segovio, and honoused in those times with a stately Sepulchre of K. Coctius King of the Allobroges: one of the seven Marquisates in the middle times erected by the Emperor Otho. 8 Pignarolle, fortified with a Castle of great importance, which commandeth all the adjoining valleys. 9 Quires, adorned with many goodly Churches, fair Convents, and noble Families. 10 Ville Franche, a place of great strength, more towards the sea. 11 Savillan, seated in so pleasant a Country, that Duke Emanuel Philibert had once a purpose to settle his abode in it, and make it the chief of his Estate. 12 Busque, a Marquisate, another of the seven erected for the sons of Waleran. 13 Hereunto we may add the City of Ast (though properly within the limits of Montferrat) anciently a Colony of the Romans, and now to be compared, for the greatness and beauty of her Palaces, to the most stately Cities of Lombardy, situate betwixt the two Rivers of Po and Tenarus, very rich, and populous.  
Here is also in this Country the Marquisate of Saluzzes (of the same erection as the former, but a greater Estate) the cause of so many differences betwixt France and Savoy. The principal Town whereof is called also Saluzze (from the Salassi questionless who dwelled hereabouts,) seated about the spring of the River Po, reasonably big, and fortified with a very large Castle, fitted with rooms for all uses, and for every season. 2 Carmanlogla, which gave name to that famous Captain who carried so great a sway in the Wars of Italy. A Town so fortified and stored with all sorts of Ammunition, that it is thought impregnable. 3 Ravelle, a well-fortified place. 4 Doglian, the thoroughfare for the greatest part of the trade which is driven betwixt Piedmont and the River of Genoa. The Arms hereof Argent, a Chief Gules.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this Country were the Salassi, Libyci, and Taurini, as before is said, all vanquished by the Romans, and their Country made a Province of that Empire, by the name of the Province of Alps Coltiae, in the time of Nero, of which Genoa was the Metropolis or principal City. The present are descended for the most part of the Heruls, who under the conduct of Odoacer conquered Italy, whereof he was proclaimed King by the Romans themselves: but Odoacer being vanquished near Verona, by Theodorick King of the Goths, the Heruli had this Country allotted to them by the Conqueror, for their habitation. They had not held it long, when subdued by the Lombard's, of whose Kingdom it remained a part, till given by Aripert the seventeenth King of the Lombard's, to the Church of Rome: affirmed by some to be the first temporal estate that ever the Popes of Rome had possession of. But lying far off, and the donation not confirmed by the Kings succeeding, the Popes got little by the gift: so that in the subverting of the kingdom of the Lombard's, it was at the devotion of the Kings of Italy, of the house of Charles the Great, and afterwards of his successors in the Empire, by whom distracted into several Estates and Principalities. Thomas and Peter Earls of Savoy made themselves Masters of the greatest part of it by force of Arms: the former in the year 1210, the later in the year 1256. Since that time the first son of Savoy is styled Prince of Piedmont. The Marquisate of Saluzzes, containing almost all the rest, was added by the marriage of a daughter of this Marquisate with Charles Duke of Savoy, An. 1481. Of which marriage though there was no issue, vet the Savoyard always held it as their own; till the French upon as good a title possessed themselves of it: Recovered by the Savoyard An. 1588., the Civil Wars then hot in France. But finding that he was not able to hold it against Henry the fourth (who looked upon it as a door to let his forces into Italy) he compounded with him, An. 1600. the Country of Bresse being given in exchange for this Marquisate: Of which, together with the residue of Piedmont, and some pieces of importance in the Dukedom of Montferrat, that noble Family of Savoy doth now stand possessed.  
The Arms of this Principality are Gules, a Cross Argent, charged with a Label of three points Azure.  
2 SAVOY, strictly and specially so called, is bowded on the East, with Wallisland, and part of Piedmont; on the West, with Dauphin and La Bresse; on the South, with some parts of Dauphin only; and on the North, with Switzerland, and the Lake of Geneva.  
The Country is for the most part hilly and mountainous, overspread with the branches of the Alps; healthy enough, as commonly all Hill-countries are, but not very fruitful, except some of the valleys which lie nearest to the Western Sun, 
Savoy.  and the plain tract about the Lemanian Lake, lying towards Geneva. By reason of the difficult and narrow ways, and those full of thiefs, it was once called Malvoy: but the passages being opened by the cost and industry of the people, and purged of thiefs by good Laws and exemplary justice, it gained the name of Savoy or Salvoy, quasi salva via; as Maleventum, a town of the Realm of Naples, on the like considerations got the name of Benevent. By the Latins of these later times it is called Sabaudia, a name not known to any of the ancient writers, who knew it by no other name than that of the Allobroges, or Allobrogum Regio.  
The Common people are naturally very dull and simple, so gross of understanding for all their continual converse with other Nations, who take this Country in their way to Italy, that they believe the Duke of Savoy to be the greatest Prince in the World: and so unwarlike, that a few men of another Nation well trained and disciplined, will make a great number of them fly. But on the other side, the Gentry are of a very pleasing conversation, civil, ingenious, and affecting all good exercise: so as there may be daily seen in Chamberie as much good company, and as well-appointed and behaved, as in many of the best Towns of France or Italy. The number of both sorts, taking in Piedmont (who are not interessed in the first part of this character) are thought to be 800000.  
The chief Cities are, 1 Chamberie, situate on the banks of the River L' Arch in a very pleasant valley, compassed round with Mountains, the principal of the Dukedom on that side of the Alps, honoured with the Duke's Court when he resideth in this Country, the ordinary seat of Justice, and many neat houses which belong to the Gentry: fortified of late with a strong Castle and sufficient Outworks, but not recovered of the damage it received Anᵒ 1600, when it was forced by King Henry the fourth of France, in his Wars with Savoy. 2 Tarentuise, an Archbishops See, situate in the midst of the Mountains; heretofore the Metropolis of the Province of the Alps Graiae, and Poeninae, and called by Antoninus, Civitas Centronum, from the Centrones who inhabited about this tract. 3 Lunebourg, in the Country of the old Medulli, betwixt which and Suse, a town of Piedmont, lieth the most ordinary road betwixt France and Italy. 4 Aque belle, situate at the foot of a craggy Rock. 5 Ripaille, in a sweet and fruitful situation, on the Southside of the Lake Lemanus, the chief Town of the Signory of Fossigme: where Amadee the first Duke of Savoy having given over his Estate, lived a Monastic life, and was thence chosen Pope by the Fathers of Basil, Anᵒ 1440. 6 Nun or Nevidum (by some of the old Latins called Noviodunum) an ancient City, laid desolate, in, or before the time of Julius Caesar, repaired again in the Empire of Vespasian; the seat of late times of the Bishops of Geneva, since their expulsion out of that City. 7 Bele, on the Rhodanus, or Rhosne. 8 Albon, founded about the year 456. 9 Conflans, fortified by the late Dukes of Savoy, but otherwise of small importance. 10 Annunciada, not much observable, but for being the seat or place of Solemnities, for an order of Knights called by that name. 11 Maurienne, or St. John de Maurienne, an Archbishops See, situate in a valley of the Alps so called; the chief City of the old Medulli, who dwelled hereabouts; from whence the Princes of this house were first entitled Earls of Maurienne only. 12 Charboneers, a well-fortified place. Here is also the strong Town and Fort of Montmelian, which held out four months against Henry the fourth, and many thousand shot of French Cannon, Anᵒ 1600: and the impregnable Fortress of St. Catharines', which yet submitted to that King; the Government whereof being denied to the Duke of Byron, plunged him in discontent and treason to the loss of his head.  
The many Tribes in and about this mountainous Country, of which we have mentioned some before, pass generally in most ancient Writers by the name of the Allobroges, because the most powerful of them all. Of whom the first mention which we find in story, is the Atonement made by Annibal in his passage this way, between Bruncus and his brother, about the succession of the Kingdom. Afterwards siding with the Salii a gallic Nation in a War against Marseilles, than a confederate of the Romans, they drew that people on their backs, by whom they were in fine subdued, with the loss of no less than 120000 Galls, under the several conducts of Cn. Domitius Aenobarbus, and Qu. Fabius Maximus: by which last, Bituitus, or Bitultus King of the Auverni, one of the confederates, was led in triumph unto Rome. The Country and people at that time were much alike, Coelum atrox, pervicaci ingenio, a sharp air, and stubborn people, as it is in Florus: not without commendation in the following Ages for discovering Catiline's conspiracy, by which the whole Roman state was in danger of ruin. After which we find Coctius one of the Kings of these Allobroges, to have been in special favour with Augustus Caesar, affirmed to be the founder of 12 Cities in this mountainous tract, whence it had the name of Alps Coctiae; and by that name reduced into the form of a Province by the Emperor Nero. In the declining of that Empire, this Province became a part of the Kingdom of Burgundy; and passed with other rights of that falling Kingdom to the Emperors of Germany, by the gift of Rodolph the last King. To them it did continue subject till the year 999, in which Berald of Saxony, brother to Otho the third, for killing Mary the lascivious Wife of his Uncle, fled from Germany, and settled himself here in France. His son Humbert (surnamed Blanchmanis, that is White-hand) was by the special favour of the Emperor Conradus Salicus, made Earl of Maurienne, which is a town of this Country, Anᵒ 1027. And by this marriage with Adela the daughter and heir of the Marquis of Suse, added that noble Marquisate (one of the seven erected by Otho the second, and given amongst the sons of Waleran) unto his estate. Humbert the second gained by conquest the Town and Territory of Tarentaise; as Am, or Amadee the third did the Counties of Vaulx and Chablais, Anᵒ 1240, or thereabouts. Am, or Amadee the fourth, by the Marriage of Sibille daughter and sole heir of Wric Earl of Bresse, added that Earldom to his house: as Am, or Amadee the ninth, did the Town and Territory of Vercelli, upon the contract betwixt Philibert his son and successor with Blanch the base daughter of Philip Maria Duke of Milan, who afterwards was married unto Francis Sforza. Am, or Amadee the second Earl of Maurienne was by the Emperor Henry the fifth, invested with the title of Earl of Savoy; and Amadee the eighth created the first Duke by the Emperor Sigismond, Anᵒ 1397. But the main improvement of the power and patrimony of this House, came by the valour and good success of the two Earls, Thomas, who in the year 1210, and Peter one of his sons and successors (for his manifold Conquests, surnamed Charlemagne the Junior) Anᵒ 1256, by conquest got a great part of Peidmont, to which the Marquisate of Saluzzes containing almost all the rest, was united by a Marriage of the daughter of the Marquisate, to Charles Duke of Savoy; and though he died without issue by her, Anᵒ 1489, yet his successors still kept the possession of it, till Francis the first, pretending some title to it in the right of his Mother (a daughter of the house of Savoy) laid it unto the Crown of France: from which it was again recovered by the Savoyard, during the French Civil Wars, Anᵒ 1588., and now is peaceably possessed: The Country of Bresse being given to the French for their pretention to the Marquisate, Anᵒ 1600. These Dukes of Savoy have a long time been devoted to the faction of Spain, especially since the French Kings took in the lesser states bordering on them, as Burgundy, Bretagne, etc. Charles the third sided so constantly with the Emperor Charles the fifth, that denying Francis the first a passage for his Army through the Country into Italy, he was by the said King despoiled of his Estates, Anᵒ 1536. The Emperor to recover it left nothing undone; but in vain: for the French encountering his force in the open field, vanquished them, with the slaughter of fifteen thousand of his men. In the year 1558, peace being made between Henry and Philip, successors to those great Princes, Emanuel philibert, son to Duke Charles, was restored to all his Rights. His son and successor, having married Catharine the daughter of King Philip the second, depended wholly upon Spain, notwithstanding many quarrels which did grow betwixt them, his sons receiving thence many great pensions and preferments: For at the same time Prince Amadee Victorio the second son, during the life of Philip his elder brother, was chief Commander of that King's Galleys, and had in pension a hundred thousand Crowns per annum; Philibert the third son was Viceroy of Sicil; Maurice the fourth, a Cardinal, had a moiety of the Revenues of the Archbishopric of Toledo; and Don Thomazo, though then young, had his pensions also. But Amadee Victorio, who succeeded him, marrying Madam Christian, a daughter of King Henry the fourth of France, changed his dependences, and held more close to France than any of his predecessors; but whether to the hurt or benefit of his Estates future times will show. For leaving his heir a Minor, in the hands of his mother, the French upon pretence of preserving the Country for him against the encroachments of the Spaniard, have made themselves masters of the greatest parts of it, which when they will restore to the proper owner, is beyond my cunning to determine. But now behold the Catalogue of the 

Earls and Dukes of Savoy.  
999 1 Beral of Saxony.  
1027 2 Humbert, the first Earl of Maurienne.  
1048 3 Am, or Amadee I.  
1076 4 Humbert II.  
1109 5 Am, or Amadee II. the first Earl of Savoy.  
1154 6 Humbert III.  
1201 7 Thomas, son of Humbert.  
1234 8 Am, or Amadee III.  
1246 9 Boniface, son of Am III.  
1256 10 Peter, a younger son of Earl Thomas, called Charlemain the less, won Turin, Vaulx, etc.  
1268 11 Philip, brother of Peter.  
1285 12 Am, or Amadee IV. Nephew of Thomas the 7th Earl, by a son named Thomas.  
1323 13 Edward, son of Am IV.  
1329 14 Am, or Amadee V. the brother of Edward.  
1342 15 Am, or Amadee VI.  
1385 16 Am, or Amadee VII.  
1397 17 Am, or Amadee VIII, the first Duke of Savoy.  
1434 18 Lewis, son of Am VIII.  
1461 19 Am, or Amadee IX.  
1475 20 Philibert, son of Am 9th.  
1481 21 Charles, brother of Philibert.  
1489 22 Charles II.  
1495 23 Philip II. son of Lewis, the second Duke.  
1496 24 Philibert II.  
1504 25 Charles III. the brother of Philibert, outed of his Estate by King Francis the first.  
1559 26 Emanuel Philibert, restored upon his Marriage with Margaret the daughter of King Francis the first, made Knight of the Garter by Qu. Mary.  
1580 27 Charles Emanuel. 28 Am X. called also Amadee Victorio, son of Charles Emanuel, married Christiane the daughter of King Henry the fourth.  
1637 29 Charles Emanuel II. son of Amadee Victor, or Am the 10. at the age of three years succeeded his Father.    
The Forces of this Duke consist especially in his Forts and Garrisons, whereof he hath good store in France, Savoy, and Piedmont, well fortified, and plentifully furnished with all manner of Ammunition. And it concerneth him so to have, considering what dangerous neighbours he hath near him, and that his Country is a continnal thoroughfare for the Armies both of France and Spain upon all occasions. Nor doth it less conduce to his preservation, that he hath so many retreats of natural strength, as are not easily accessible by a conquering Army; of this last sort is, amongst many others, the valley of ●ost (which some reckon for a part of Savoy, and some of Piedmont) so strong by reason of the narrow entries, the uneasy passages, and the great multitudes of the people which inhabit in it, that those who have made themselves masters of the rest of the Country, durst never attempt it. And of the first, besides those formerly described, is the Town of Nizzes, so fortified and flanked upon all accesses, that it seems rather to be an assembly of Forts, than a single Fortress. Out of which Garrisons the Duke is able to draw great Forces for present service; besides the readiness of the Piedmont ease upon all occasions, which are for the most part given to Arms.  
The ordinary Revenue of this Dukedom (taking Piedmont in) are said to be above a Million of Crowns per Annum. But his extraordinary is so great, that Duke Charles Emanuel, during his Wars with Henry the fourth, in a very few years drew out of Piedmont only eleven Millions of Crowns, besides the charge which they were put to in quartering of Soldiers. By which it may appear that the Dukes are not like to want money to serve their turns, when they shall desire it of the Subject, and yet not charge them more than they are able to bear.  
The only Order of Knighthood in this Duke's Estate is that of the Annunciada, which ordained by Amade the first Duke, at what time he defended Rhodes from the Turks, An. 1409. Their Collar is of fifteen links, to show the fifteen mysteries of the Virgin: at the end, is the portraiture of our Lady, with the history of the Annunciation. Instead of a Motto, these letters, F. E. R. T. id est, Fortitudo Ejus Rhodum Tenuit, are engraven in every plate or link of the Collar: each link being inter-woven one within the other, in form of a True-lovers knot. The number of the Knights is fourteen, besides the Duke, who is the Sovereign of the Order: the solemnity is held annually on our Lady-day, in the Castle of Saint Peter in Turin. So from this victory (for every repulse of the besieger, is a victory to the besieged) there arose a double effect: first, the institution of this order; secondly, the assumption of the present Arms of this Duchy, which are G. a Cross A. This being the cross of Saint John of Jerusalem, whose Knights at that time were owners of the Rhodes. Whereas before, the Arms were Or, an Eagle displayed with two heads, Sable, armed Gules, supporting in fez, an escotchion of Saxony, that is Barrewise six pieces Sable and Or, a Bend flowered Vert. A coat belonging to the Emperors of the house of Saxony, from whom the first Earls of Savoy did derive themselves.   

3. THE signory OF GENEVA.  
GENEVA is a City in the Dukedom of Savoy, 
Geneva.  formerly subject to its own Bishops, acknowledging the Dukes of Savoy for the Lord in chief: now reckoned as a Free-Estate, bordering close upon the Swissers, and with them confederate; and so more properly within the course and compass of these Alpine Provinces. It is situate on the Southside of the Lake Lemane, opposite to the City of Lozanne in the Canton of Bern, from which it is distant six Dutch miles: the River Rhosne (having passed thorough the Lake with so clear a colour, that it seemeth not at all to mingle with the waters of it) running thorough the lower part thereof, over which there is a passage by two fair bridges. This lower part is seated on a flat or level, the rest on the ascent of an hill: the buildings fair, and of freestone; well fortified on both sides both by Art and Nature, in regard of the pretensions of the Duke of Savoy (whom they suffer not to arm any Galleys upon the Lake) and other jealousies of State. The compass of the whole City is about two miles, in which there are supposed to be about sixteen or seventeen thousand souls. One of their bridges is more ancient and better fortified than the other, belonging anciently to the Swissers (or Helvetians the old inhabitants of that tract) but broken down by Julius Caesar to hinder them from passing that way into France.  
The people of the town are generally of good wits in the managery of public business, but not very courteous towards strangers, of whom they exact as much as may be; modest and thrifty in apparel, and speak for the most part the Savoyard, or worst kind of French. So that the great resort of young Gentlemen thither, is not so much to learn that Language (which is no where worse taught) as out of an opinion which their parents have, that the Reformed Religion is no where so purely practised and professed as there. By means whereof the fry or seminary of our Gentry being seasoned in their youth with Genevan principles, have many times proved disaffected to the forms of Government (as well Monarchical as Episcopal) which they found established here at home: to the great imbroilment of the state in matters of most near concernment. The women are said to be more chaste (or at least more reserved) than in any other place in the World: which possibly may be ascribed to that severity with which they punish all offenders in that kind: Dancing by no means tolerated in public or private; Adultery expiated by no less than death; Fornication, for the first offence with nine days fasting upon bread and water in prison, for the second with whipping, for the third with banishment. But notwithstanding this severity, they make love in secret, and are as amorous in their dalliances as in other places.  
The Territories of it are very small, extending not above two Leagues and an half from any part of the Town: but the soil, if well manured, bringeth Grain of all sorts, and great store of Wine. There is likewise plenty of pasture and feeding grounds, which furnish the City with flesh-meats, butter and cheese at very reasonable rates; the nearness of the Lake affording them both Fish and Wildfowl in good measure; and amongst others (as some say) the best Carp in Europe.  
But the main improvement of this State is by the industry of the people, and the convenient situation of the City itself; the City being situated very well for the trade of Merchandise, in regard it is the ordinary passage for transporting Commodities out of Germany to the Marts at Lions, and from thence back again to Germany, Switzerland, and some parts of Italy. And for the industry of the people, it is discernible in that great store of Armour and Apparel, and other necessaries, brought from hence yearly by those of Bern; and their Mannfactures in Satin, Velvet, Taffeta, and some quantities of Cloth (fine, but not durable) transported hence yearly into other places.  
The Sovereignty of this City was anciently in the Earls hereof, at first Imperial Officers only, but at last the hereditary Princes of it. Betwixt these and the Bishops (Suffragans to the Metropolitan of Vienna in Dauphin) grew many quarrels for the absolute command hereof. In fine, the Bishops did obtain of the Emperor Frederick the first, that they and their successors should be the sole Princes of Geneva, free from all Taxes, and not accountable to any but the Emperor. Which notwithstanding, the Earls continuing still to molest the Bishops, they were fain to call unto their aid the Earl of Savoy; who took upon him first as Protector only, but after by degrees as the Lord in chief. For when the rights of the Earls of Geneva, by the Marriage of Thomas Earl of Savoy with Beatrix a daughter of these Earls, fell into that house; then Am, or Amadee the sixth of that name, obtained of the Emperor Charles the fourth, to be Vicar-general of the Empire in his own Country, and in that right superior to the Bishop in all Temporal matters: and Am, or Amadee the first Duke, got from Pope Martin (to the great prejudice of the Bishops) a grant of all the Temporal jurisdiction of it. After which time the Bishops were constrained to do homage to the Dukes of Savoy, and acknowledge them for their Sovereign Lords; the Authority of the Duke's being grown so great (notwithstanding that the people were immediately subject to their Bishop only) that the Money in Geneva was stamped with the Duke's name and figure; Capital offenders were pardoned by him; no sentence of Law executed till his Officers were first made acquainted; nor League contracted by the people of any validity, without his privity and allowance; and finally the Keys of the Town presented to him as often as he pleased to lodge there, as once (for instance) to Duke Charles the third, coming thither with Beatrix his Wife, a daughter of Portugal. And in this state it stood, till the year 1528, the Bishop being all this while their immediate Lord, and having jus gladii & alias civilis jurisdictionis parts, as Calvin himself confesseth in an Epistle to Cardinal Sadolet. But in that year, Religion being then altered in the Canton of Bern, near adjoining to them, Viret and Farellus did endeavour it in Geneva also. But finding that the Bishop and his Clergy did not like their doings, they screwed themselves into the people, and by their aid in a popular tumult, compelled the Bishop and his Clergy to abandon the Town. And though the Bishop made them many fair overtures, out of an hope to be restored to his Estate; yet would they never hearken to him, nor admit of him any more, being once thrust out. Nor did they only in that tumult alter the Doctrine and Orders of the Church before established, but changed the Government of the State also: disclaiming all allegiance both to Duke and Bishop, and standing on their own Liberty as a Free-Commonwealth. And though all this was done by Viret and Farellus before calvin's coming to that City, which was not till the year 1536, yet being come, suffragio meo comprobavi, as he saith himself, no man was forwarder than he to approve the Action.  
But Calvin being come amongst them, made their Divinity Reader, and one of the ordinary Preachers, he first negotiated with them to abjure the Papacy, and never more admit their Bishop; to which he found a cheerful and unanimous consent in all the people. Then finding that no Ecclesiastical discipline was in use amongst them, he dealt with them to admit of one of his own composing; which at last he obtained also, but with very great difficulty, and got it ratified by the Senate July the 20th. 1537. The next year after, the people weary of this new yoke, and he and his Colleagues (Farellut and Coraldus) as resolute to hold them to it; they were all three banished the Town in a popular humour; and with like levity sued to, to return again: to which he would by no means yield, except they would oblige themselves by a solemn Oath to admit of such a form of Discipline as he, with the advice of the other Ministers, should prescribe unto them. This being condescended to by that fickle multitude, he returns in triumph to Geneva, September the thirteenth, 1541: and got his new Discipline established on the twentieth of November following. The sum of the device was this: All Ministers to be equal amongst themselves; two Laymen to be superadded unto every Minister; the Minister to continue for term of life, the Lay-Elders to be annually chosen; these being met together to be called the Presbytery; and to have power of Ordination, Censures, Absolution, and whatsoever else was acted by the Bishop formerly. Hitherto it related to Geneva only, which being but one City, and a small one too, was not capable of more than one Presbytery. The names and notions of Classical, Provincial, and national Assemblies came not in till afterwards; as it got ground in Kingdoms and larger Provinces. This Platform though of purpose framed to content the people; yet since the Lay-officers were to be but annual, and after subject to the lash like other Mortals, it gave but sorry satisfaction unto wiser men. And being built withal on a false foundation, was for a long time hardly able to stand alone, and fain at twelve years' end to borrow a support from Zurich, and others of the Protestant Cantons, whom Calvin earnestly solicited to allow his project, against which one Perinus, and some principal Citizens had begun to spurn. And so we have the true beginning of the Genevian Discipline, begotten in Rebellion, born in Sedition, and nursed up by Faction.  
Being born into the World by the means aforesaid, some other helps it had to make it acceptable and approved of in other Churches. As first, the great content it gave to the common people, to see themselves entrusted with the weightiest matters of Religion, and thereby an equality with, if not (by reason of their number, being two for one) a superiority above their Ministers: Next, the great reputation which Calvin for his diligence in Writing and Preaching had attained unto, made all his Dictates as authentic amongst some Divines, as ever the Pope's Ipse dixit in the Church of Rome. Whereby it came to pass, in a little time, that only those Churches which embraced the Doctrines and Discipline authorised by Calvin, were called the Reformed Churches: those in high Germany and elsewhere which adhered to Luther, being generally called by no other name than the Lutherans, or the Lutheran Churches, as not reform enough from the dregs of Rome. Then comes in his endeavours to promote that Platform in all other Churches, which he had calculated for the Meridian of Geneva only: commending it to Gasper Olevianus Minister of the Church of Triers, as appearby his Letters dated April the eight 1560, congratulating the reception of it in the Churches of Poland, as appeareth by others of his Letters. And for the last help, comes in Beza, who not content to recommend it as convenient for the use of the Church (beyond which Calvin did not go) imposed it as a matter necessary upon all the Churches: so necessary, ut ab ea recedere non magis liceat, quam ab ipsius Religionis placit is; that it was utterly as unlawful to recede from this, as from the most material points of the Christian Faith. So he Epist. 83. By means whereof their followers in most of the Reformed Churches drove on so furiously, that rather than their Discipline should not be admitted, and the Episcopal Government destroyed in all the Churches of CHRIST, they were resolved to depose Kings, ruin Kingdoms, and to subvert the fundamental constitutions of all civil States. And hereunto their own Ambition gave them spur enough, affecting the supremacy in their several Parishes, that they themselves might Lord it over God's inheritance, under pretence of setting CHRIST upon his Throne. Upon which love to the pre-eminence, they did not only prate against the Bishops, with malicious words (as Diotrephes for the same reason did against the Apostles) but not therewith content, neither would they themselves receive them, nor permit them that would, casting them out of the Church, with reproach and infamy. Which proud ambition in the ordinary Parochial Minister, was cunningly fomented by some great persons, and many Lay-Patrons in all places, who underhand aimed at a further end: the one to raise themselves great fortunes out of Bishop's Lands; the other to keep those Tithes themselves, to which by the Law they only were to nominate some deserving Person. Such were the helps by which this new device of Calvin was dispersed and propagated.  
But to return unto Geneva, though Calvin for his time did hold the Chair as a perpetual Moderator, and Beza too, until Danaeus set him besides the Cushion: yet after that the power of the Presbytery was shrewdly lessened in Geneva, and the good Members so restrained in the exercise of it, that they have no power to convent any man before them, but by the authority of a Syndick or Civil Magistrate. And as for maintaince, they hold their Ministers so strictly to a sorry pittance, as would be sure to keep them from presuming too much on their power in Consistory. Tithes of all sorts, were to be taken up for the use of the State, and laid up in the public Treasury; and stipends issued out to maintain the Ministry: but those so mean, that Bezaes' stipend whilst he lived, hardly amounted to eighty pound per annum, the refidue of the City-Ministers not to sixty pound, those of the Villages adjoining, having hardly forty pound, enough to keep them always poor, and miserably obnoxious to the wealthier Citizen. And that they may not steal the Goose, and not stick up a feather, the Staee doth use to make some poor allowance to the wives and daughters of their deceased Ministers, if they die poor, or leave their children unprovided; or otherwise have deserved well in the time of their lives. In respect hereof though the Ministers are very strict in forbidding Dancing, and have writ many Tracts against it; yet to give some content to the common people (who have not leisure to attend it at other times) they allow all Manlike Exercises on the Lordsday, as shooting in pieces, long-bows, crossbows, and the like, and that too in the morning both before and after the Sermon; so it be no impediment to them from coming to the Church at the times appointed.  
As for the Government of the State, it is directed principally by the Civil or Imperial Laws; the Judge whereof is called the Leiutenant-criminall, before whom all causes are tried, and from whom there lieth no Appeal, unless it be unto the Counsel of two hundred, whom they call the Great Counsel, in which the supreme power of the State resideth. Out of this Counsel of two hundred, there is chosen another lesser Counsel of five and twenty, and out of them four principal Officers whom they call the Syndiques, who have the sole managing of the Commonwealth, except it be in some great matter, as making Peace or War, offensive or defensive Leagues, hearing Appeals, and such like general concernments; which the great Counsel of two hundred must determine of. They have a custom superadded to the Civil Law, that if any Malefactor from another place fly to them for refuge, they punish him after the custom of the place in which the crime was committed. Otherwise, their Town being on the borders of divers Provinces, would never be free from Vagabonds. Examples hereof I will assign two: the first of certain Monks, who robbing their Convents of certain plate, and hoping for their wicked pranks at home to be the welcomer hither, were at their first acquaintance advanced to the Gallows. The second is of a Spanish Gentleman, who having fled his Country for clipping and counterfeiting the King's Gold, came to this town, and had the like reward. And when for defence he alleged, that he understood their City being free, gave admission to all Offenders; true (said they) but with an intent to punish them that offended: a distinction which the Spaniard never till then learned, but than it was too late.  
As for their ordinary Revenue, it is proportionable to their Territory, if not above it, conceived to amount to sixty thousand pound per annum, which they raise upon the demain of the Bishop, and the Tithes of the Church, and on such impositions as are laid upon flesh and Merchandise. But they are able to raise greater sums if there be occasion, as appears plainly by the sending of 45000 Crowns to King Henry the third, before they had been long settled in their own estates.  
And as for Military forces, they are able to impress two thousand men, and have Arms of all sorts for so many in the public Arsenal: as also twelve or fourteen pieces of Ordnance, with all manner of Ammunition appertaining to them; and on the Lake some Galleys in continual readiness against the dangers threatened them from the Dukes of Savoy. And for the greater safety of their Estate, 
Wallisland.  and the preservation of their Religion, they joined themselves in a constant and perpetual League with the Canton of Bern, An. 1528, communicating to each other the Freedom of their several Cities; and by that means, are reckoned for a member of the Commonwealth of the Swissers, which is no small security to their affairs. But their chief strength, as I conceive, is that the neighbour Princes are not willing to have it fall into the hands of that Duke, or any other Potentate of more strength than he. Insomuch that when that Duke besieged it, An. 1589, they were aided from Venice with four and twenty thousand, and from England with thirteen thousand Crowns, from Florence with Intelligence of the Enemy's purposes. Another time, when the Pope, the French King, the Spaniard, and Savoyard had designs upon it; the Emperor offered them assistance both of Men and Money: yea and sometimes the Dukes of Savoy have assisted them against the others, as being more desirous that the Town should remain as it doth, than fall into any other hands than his own. So ordinary a thing it is for such petit States, to be more safe by the interess of their jealous neighbours, than any forces of their own.  
The Arms of Geneva, when under the command of the Earls thereof, were Or, a Cros● Azure.   

4. WALLISLAND.  
EAstward from Savoy in a long and deep bottom of the Alps Poeninae, lieth the Country of WALLISLAND, so called either quasi Wallensland, or the land of the Valenses, once the Inhabitants of the Country about Martinacht, a chief Town hereof; or quasi Vallis-land, or the Land of Valleys, of which it totally consists. It reacheth from the Mountain de Furcken to the Town of Saint Maurice, where again the hills do close, and shut up the valley; which is so narrow in that place, that a bridge laid from one hill to another (under which the River Rhosne doth pass) is capable of no more than one Arch only, and that defended with a Castle and two strong Gates. On other parts it is environed with a continual wall of steep and horrid Mountains, covered all the year long with a crust of Ice, not passable at all by Armies, and not without much difficulty by single passengers; so that having but that one entrance to it, which before we spoke of, no Citadel can be made so strong by Art, as this whole Country is by Nature. But in the bottom of those craggy and impassable Rocks lies a pleasant Valley, fruitful in Saffron, Corn, Wine, and most delicate fruits, and happily enriched with Meadows, and most excellent Pastures, which yield a notable increase of Cheese and Butter: And in the Country about Zion they discovered in the year 1544 a Fountain of Salt; and have also many hot Baths and medicinal waters very wholesome. Of Springs and Riverwater they are very destitute, having scarce any but what they fetch from the Rhosne with a great deal both of charge and trouble (the common people using snow-water for the most part for domestic uses) which made one pleasantly observe, that they pay there dearer for their water than they do for their Wine. cattle they have sufficient to serve their turn, and amongst others, a wild Buck, equal to a Stag in bigness, footed like a Goat, and horned like a fallow Deer, leaping with wonderful agility from one precipice to another, and so not easily caught but in Summer time; for then the heat of that season makes him blind.  
It is divided into the Upper and the Lower Wallisland; the Upper lying towards the Mountain de Furcken, in the very bottom of the Valley; and the Lower stretching out to the Town of Saint Maurice, which is at the opening of the same: the length of both said to be five ordinary days journey, but the breadth not answerable. The Upper Wallisland containeth the seven Resorts of 1 Zion, or Sedune, 2 Leuck, 3 Brig, 4 Nies, 5 Rawrens, 6 Cider, 7 Gombes; in which are reckoned thirty Parishes: the Lower comprehending the six Resorts of 1 Gurdis, 2 Ardoa, 3 Sallien, 4 Martinacht, 5 Jutremont, and 6 Saint Maurice; in which are 24 Parishes. The people in both parts said to be courteous towards strangers, but very rough and churlish towards one another.  
The several Resorts before mentioned are named according to the names of their principal Towns; which according to their reckoning are thirteen in number. The chief of which are 1 Sedunum, Sittim or Zion, a Bishops See, suffragan to the Metropolitan of Tarentuise; the chief of all this little Country: of no great beauty in itself, but neat and gallant in respect of the Towns about it. Situate in a Plain on the River of Rhosne, under a Mountain of two tops; on the one of which, being the lower, is seated the Cathedral Church, and the Canon's houses; and on the other, looking downwards with a dreadful precipice, a very strong Castle, the dwelling place of the Bishop in the heats of Summer: which being built upon an hill of so great an height, and of so hazardous an ascent, is impossible almost to be took by force; the sharpness of the Rocks keeping it from the danger of assaults, and the highness of the hill from the reach of Gun-shot. 2 Marchinacht, by Caesar called Octodurus, and Civitas Valensium by Antoninus, remarkable for its antiquity only. 3 Saint Maurice, or Saint Morits, anciently Augaunum, the Key of the whole Country, but in Winter especially, when all the other passages are so frozen up, 
Switzerland.  that there is no other entrance but by the Bridge at this Town: which for that cause is very well manned and fortified to avoid surprisal; and therefore also chosen for the seat of the Governor of the Lower Wallisland.  
This Country now called Wallisland, is in most Latin Writers called by the name of Valesia, but corruptly, as I think, for Valensia, as the Dutch or English name for Wallinsland: which name I should conceive it took from the Valenses, the old inhabitants of this valley, of whom Octodusus (now called Marchinacht) is by Antoninus made to be the Metropolis or principal City. It was made subject to the Romans by Julius Caesar, at such time as the Helvetians were conquered by him: and falling with the Western parts of the Roman Empire unto Charles the great, was by him given to Theodulus Bishop of Zion, An. 805. Under his successors they continue to this very day; but so, as that the Deputies of the seven Resorts have not only voices with the Canons in his Election, but being chosen and invested into the place, they join with him also in the Diets for choosing Magistrates, redressing grievances, and determining matters of the State. The Lower Wallisland obeyeth the upper, made subject by long War, and the chance of Victory, and hath no sway at all in the public Government, but takes for Law that which their Governors agree of. The same Religion is in both, being that of Rome. For maintenance whereof they combined themselves with the seven Popish Cantons of Switzerland, An. 1572, or thereabouts: as also for their mutual defence and preservation against Foreign Enemies, and keeping amity and concord amongst one another.   

5. SWITZERLAND  
NExt unto Wallisland lieth the Country of the SWISSERS, having on the East, the Grisons, and some part of Tirol, in Germany; on the West, the Mountain Jour, and the Lake of Geneve, which parts it from Savoy and Burgundy; on the North, Suevia or Scwaben, another Province also of the upper Germany; and on the South, Wallisland and the Alps, which border on the Dukedom of Milan.  
The whole Country heretofore divided into three parts only, that is to say, 1 Azgow, so called from the River Aaz, whose chief Town was Lucern. 2 Wislispurgergow, so called from Wiflispurg an old Town thereof, the chief City whereof is Bern. And 3 Zurichgow, so named from Zurich, both formerly and at this present the Town of most note in all this Tract; but since the falling off of these Countries from the house of Austria, divided into many Cantons and other members; of which more anon.  
It is wholly in a manner overgrown with craggy Mountains, but such as for the most part have grassy tops, and in their bottoms afford rich Meadows, and nourishing pastures, which breed them a great stock of cattle, their greatest wealth. And in some places yields plenty of very good Wines, and a fair increase of Corn also, if care and industry be not wanting on the Husbandman's part, but neither in so great abundance as to serve all necessary uses, which want they do supply from their neighbouring Countries. And though it stand upon as high ground as any in Christendom, yet is no place more stored with Rivers, and capacious Lakes, which do not only yield them great abundance of Fish, but serve the people very well in the way of Traffic to disperse their several Commodities from one Canton to another. Of which the principal are, Bodensee, and the Lake of Cell, made by the Rhine; Genser see, or the Lake of Geneve, by the Rhosne; Walldstet see, and the Lake of Lucern, made by the Ruff; Namonburger and Bieter sees, by the Orb; and Zurich see, by the River of Limat, or Limachus.  
It is in length two hundred and forty miles, an hundred and eighty in breadth: conceived to be the highest Country in Europe (as before is said) the Rivers which do issue from it running thorough all quarters of the same, as Rhine through France and Belgium, North; Po, through Italy to the South; Rhodanus, through part of France to the Western Ocean; and the Inn, which falllng into the Danubius passeth thorough Germany and Hungary into Pontus Euxinus.  
And as the Country is, such are the Inhabitants, of rude and rugged dispositions, more fit for Arms than any civil occupations, capable of toil and labour, which the necessities of their Country doth inure them to, not able otherwise to afford them an hungry livelihood: the poverty whereof makes them seek for service, which they shift and change according as they like the conditions of their entertainment; and having no way to vent their superfluous numbers by Navigation, are able to spare greater multitudes to a Foreign War, than a man would easily imagine. In a word, the people are naturally honest, frugal, and industrious, impartial in the administration of Justice, and great lovers of Liberty.  
In matters of War, they were once of such a reputation, on the defeats given by them to Charles of Burgundy, that no Prince thought himself able to take the field, or stand his own ground in defence of his Dominions; if he had not Swissers in his Army: And to advance their reputation, the Wars which followed in Italy about the Duchy of Milan, served exceeding fitly. For being borderers on that Country, they could be hired better cheap by the French or Spaniard than any Army could be brought out of France of Spain. And having had some good successes to increase their fame, they grew so terrible at last, that the Spaniards in the War of Guienne were more afraid of one band of Suisse, than of all the rest of the French Army. But being found withal to be false and treacherous, and easily bought off by the better purse (which they most evidently discovered in betraying Duke Lodowick Sforze, who had put himself and his estate into their hands) and those Italian Wars growing unto an end, they did decay so fast in their reputation, that first the neighbouring Princes could do well without them, and at last used them not at all, or at least very sparingly. And now it is their honour that they are chosen of the Guard to the French King, and the Popes of Rome, and the Dukes of Genoa; and that the greatest Princes of Europe give them yearly pensions. Which pen●●ons were given heretofore to be assured of their aid upon all occasions, but now to keep them from engaging on the other side.  
For matter of Religion, it is proportionably mixed, some of the Cantons being wholly Popish, some wholly Protestant; in others both Religions used promiscuously. At first the differences were so eagerly pursued on both sides, that notwithstanding the mediation of some potent neighbours, it broke out into a Civil War; the Cantons of Switz, Uren, Underwald, Lueern, and Zug (which the Latin Writers of this story call the Quinquepagici) arming against Urich, Bern, and others which adhered to Zuinglius. In the beginning of which War, the Protestant party was discomfited, Zuinglius himself slain in the head of the battle, and his body burnt: his heart remaining in the midst of the fire, whole and untouched (as Archbishop Cranmers also did) when all the rest of his body was consumed to ashes. But those of the Reformed party would not so give over: Another field they fought for it, and therein had the better of the adverse party. Wearied at last with these reciprocal defeats, they agreed the business, indulging each to other the free exercise of their own Religions. So it continueth at this day, diversity of opinions not drawing them from a due care of the public interest, nor giving any interruption to that bond of peace which was so firmly knit amongst them in their first confederacies.  
Now for the body of their State, it consists of three distinct parts, or members, which are to be considered in this discourse; viz. the Swiss themselves, the Praefectures which are subject to them, and the States that are confederate with them. The Swiss are subdivided into thirteen Cantons, that is to say Swits, Uren, Underwald, Lucern, Zug, Bern, Zurich, Basil, Friburg, Soloturn, Apenzel, Glaris, and Schaffhausen. These properly make the body of that Commonwealth; enjoying many rights privileges and preeminences which the others do not, as power to determine of war and peace, to dispose of the Prafectures, and divide amongst themselves the spoil of the Enemy. The first confederacy was made betwixt the Cantons of Switz, and Underwald, An. 1315. Of which the Switz being the most potent, the most exasperated, and that which did most hotly prosecute the combination, gave to the rest the name of Swissers. Lu●ern was added to the three, An. 1332. Zug, Zurich, and Glaris, came not into the confederacy till the year 1351; nor Bern until the year next after. Friburg and Soloturn came in An. 1481. Basil and Schaffhausen united with them in the year 1501. So that there passed within little of two hundred years from the first beginning of these Leagues to the finishing of them.  
The second Member of this body are the Towns and States Confederates with them for the preservation of their common Liberties, viz. the Town and Abbot of Saint Gall, the Towns of Rotwell, Mulhasen, Nuwenberg, and Biel, situate on the Lake thence named; of which the first belonged heretofore to the Earls of Longeville in France, the latter to the Bishops of 〈◊〉; with the City and Signory of Geneva: And of these, Rotwell and Mulhasen are confederate with all the Cantons, the rest with some particulars only. The Abbot of Saint God first entered into League with Zurich, Lucern, Switz, and Glaris, for the preservation of his ●and● and Towns than revolting from him: and the Town following his example, confederated with Zurich, Bern, Switz, Lucern, Zug, and Glaris, the better to preserve themselves from the power of their Abbot, who was before their natural and immediate Lord. This was in Anno 1452. Rotwell and Mulhausen two Imperial Towns in the Province of Schawben confederated in a perpetual League withal the Cantons, the first An. 1515. the other An. 1519, N●venberg, B●el, and Geneva, with Bern only.  
As for the Praefectures of the Swissers, they are such lesser parcels and addiments as have accrued to their Estate, and are subject unto their authority, either by gift, purchase, or the chance of war: some lying in Switzerland itself, some amongst other parts of the Alps, and some in Italy. These are the Towns and Countries of Baden, Brengarten, Millingen, Rappensw●ll, Wagenthail, interposed here and there amongst the Swissers: the Town and Country of Sargans, lying amongst the Rhaetian Alps, not far from the Grisons; and Rhineck, lying in a valley of the Alps on the left shore of the Rhine, near the Lake of Constans; and finally the valleys of Locarno, Magia, and Lugano, Mendrisio, and Belinzano, situate in and amongst the Alps, near the Dukedom of Milan, to which they formerly belonged. Of which the Praefectures of Baden and Mellingen appertain to the eight first Cantons: Wagenthall, the Sargans, and Rheineck to the seven first Cantons: Rappenswill to Uren., Swits, Underwald, Glaris, and Turgow, unto the ten first Cantons; Belinzano to the three first only, and all the rest of the Italian Praefectures to the Cantons generally, excepting Apenzell, which was entered into the confederacy when these Praefectures were given unto the Swissers by Maximilian Sforza Duke of Milan, which was in An. 1513, some months before the taking in of Apenzel to the rest of the Cantons.  
Such is the number of the Cantons, Praefectures, and States confederate, amongst all which there are few Towns or Cities of any note: there being no City nor walled Town in the Cantons of Swits, Uren, Underwalden, Glaris, Apenzel, nor in any of the States confederate situate amongst the Swissers, but Saint Gall only; nor in any of the Praefectures but that of Baden. So that the places worthy of consideration are not like to be many. Of those that are, the principal are, 1 Zurich, a large City, and a renowned University, situate on both sides of the River Limat, where it issueth out of the Lake called Zurich-See. It had anciently two Monasteries in it, in one of which Huldericus Zuinglius was a Canon, slain near this Town in the battle spoken of before, An. 1531. now giving name to the most honourable of the Cantons, to which belongeth the authority of summoning the general Diets, as of those also of the Protestants, the Legates thereof presiding in both Assemblies. 2 Friburg, situate on the River Sana, on the declivity of an uneven and rocky hill, founded by Bertold the fourth Duke of Zuringen. 3 Solothurn, (the Solothurum of Antoninus) on the River of Aar, famous for the Martyrdom of S. Ursus, and his 66 Theban Soldiers, in the time of the Emperor Dioclesian. A Town of great Antiquity, but not so old by far as the people make it; who would have it to be built in the time of Abraham. 4 Basil, so called either of a Basilisk slain at the building of the City, or of the Germane word Pasel, signifying a path; or of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifying Kingly. It was built An. 382, and is famous for an University founded by Pins the second, Anno 1459. It was made a Canton An. 1501; and is honoured with the Sepulchers of Oecolampadius, Erasmus, Pontanus, Glarienus, and Hottoman, the famous Civilian. In this City, An. 1431. was hold that notable Council, wherein though the Papal authority was then at the height, it was decreed that a general Council was above the Pope. What was then enacted was immediately put in practice; the Council deposing Pope Eugenius the fourth, and placing in his room Amadeus Duke of Savoy, afterward called Felix the fourth, who having held the See nine years in a time of Schism, did willingly, in order to the peace of Christendom, resign the Popedom to Nicolas to fifth, who had before been chosen by the opposite Faction. The City is great, rich, and populous, sometimes a Town Imperial, still a Bishops See, the Bishop being subject to the Archbishop of Besanson, in the County of Burgundy: seated upon the River Rhine (where it receiveth Weis and Byrsa, two lesser brooks) by which it is divided into the greater Basil lying towards France, and the lesser lying towards Germany. 5 Lucern, situate on both sides of the Ruff, where it issueth out of the Lake of Lucern, so called from Lucerna, i. e. the Lantern, which was placed here on an high Tower, to give light to Watermens in the night. A City well traded, and frequented by strangers, because the ordinary road from Germany into Italy, passing from hence thorough the Country of the Grisons; and in regard that the Diets for the Popish Cantons, which heretofore were held at Uren, are removed hither. Not far from this Town is the Mountain called pilate's hill, of Pontius Pilate, whose ghost (as the common people are made to believe) doth walk once a year on the banks of this Lake, in his Judge's Robes. And to be sure the fiction shall not be confuted, they add, that whosoever seeth him shall die that year. 6 Bern, compassed almost round with the River Aar, and taking up the whole extent of a little mountain: the houses of freestone, neatly and uniformly built. A Town which gives name to the largest and most potent of all the Cantons, and one of the first which did embrace the Reformation, and the first of all which purged itself of Images, those excellent Instruments of Superstition and Idolatry, defaced here in a popular tumult, An. 1548. 7 Lausanna in the Canton of Bern, a Bishops See, Suffragan to the Archbishop of Besanson, seated on the banks of the Lake of Lemane, and compassed with mountains always covered with snow, which open themselves on the East side only, which is towards Italy. 8 Schaffhausen, the only Town of all the Cantons, which lieth on the other side of the Rhine, of right belonging unto Suevia, or Scawben, a Province of Germany, and reckoned as a part thereof, before it was incorporated into this Confederacy.  
Next for the Praefectures, and confederate States, they have not many Towns of note (excepting Rotwell, and Mulhusen two Imperial Cities, which properly belong to another place.) Of those which be the principal amongst the Confederates, lying within the bounds of this Country, is the Town of Saint Gall (Sengall as they corruptly call it) an Imperial City, situate amongst the Mountains near the Boden-Zee: A rich, populous, and well-governed Town, taking name from the Monastery of S. Gall, a famous Scot, and the Apostle of those parts, An. 630, or thereabouts; the Abbot of which having great possessions in this tract (before Apenzell, and this Town revolted from him) was a Prince of the Empire. The Anabaptists were once very prevalent here, insomuch that one of them cut off his brother's head in the presence of his Father and Mother, 
Switzerland.  and said (according to the humour of that sect, who boast much of dreams, visions, and Enthusiasms) that God commanded him so to do. The principal amongst the Praefectures is the Town of Baden, or (to difference it from Baden a Marquisate in Germany) the Upper Baden, seated on a little Mountain near the River Limat, almost in the middle of the Country; and for that cause the place of meeting for the Council of Estate of all the Confederates. It taketh name from the Baths here being, two of which only are public, the rest in private houses: conscious, as it is thought, to much lasciviousness. For whereas it is said of Adrian, that Lavacra pro sexibus separavit; here men and women promiscuously Bathe together; and which is worst, in private: where, as Munster telleth us, Cernunt viri uxores tractari, cernunt cum alienis loqui, & quidem solam cum solo; and yet are not any of them disturbed with jealousy. These Baths are much frequented, yet not so much for health as pleasure. Their chiefest virtue is the quickening power they have upon barren women. But as the Friar; use to send men whose wives are fruitless, in pilgrimage to Saint Joyce, the Patroness of fruitfulness, and in the mean time to lie with their wives: so it may be with good reason thought, that in a place of such Liberty as this is, the lusty and young gallants that haunt this place, produce greater operation on barren women, than the waters of the Bath itself. No other Town of eminent note amongst the Praefectures of the Swisses, except Rheineck itself, the seat of the Governor for the Swissers, situate near the Lake of Constance: and none of any note at all amongst the Italian Praefectures, except Belinzana, and Locarno, neither of them containing 400 Houses, and those none of the handsomest.  
Within the limits of this Country, and in that part thereof which was called Argow, containing the now Cantons of Uren, Swits, Underwald, Glarona, and Lucern; with some of the adjoining parts of Germany, and some part of the Dukedom of Savoy; did sometimes stand the famous and renowned Castle of Habspurg, from the Lords whereof the house of Austria, and most of the Kings and Princes of the Christian World do derive themselves. First founded, as some say, by Ottopert the third Prince of this line, at or before the year 700, as others say by Rapato the son of Betzeline, about the year 1020. Situate on the River Aar (by the Latins called Arula) near a Town called Bruck; now so decayed, that there is no tracing of the ruins. Preserved in memory by the Lords and Princes of it, descended in a direct line from Sigebert the eldest son of Theodebert King of Mets or Austrasia; first settled in these parts by Clotaire the second King of the French, with the title, as some say, of Duke of Upper Almain (the Lower Almain being that which is now called Suevia or Schawben, an adjoining Province of German●) Being soon weary of that empty, but invidious title, they were sometimes called Earls of Habspurg, by the name of this Castle; sometimes Earls of Altemburg, another Castle not far oft, of their own foundation. And after closing in with the Kings of Burgundy Transjurane, and the Germane Emperors, they received of them a great part of the Country of Argow, from which some of them were called Earls of Argow. Not known distinctly by the title of Earls of Habspurg, till the time of Rapato abovementioned, when those of Altemburg and Argow became discontinued. Howsoever, we will here lay down the whole succession of this famous Family, either Earls, or the Progenitors of.  

The Earls of Habspurg.  
635 1 Sigibert, son of Theodebert King of Mets, by Clotaire the second of that name, French King, dispossessed of the kingdom of his Father, and afterwards by him endowed with a great part of those Countries which are now called Switzerland, with the title of Duke of Upper Almain.  
2 Sigibert II. son of Sigibert the first, Duke of Upper Almain.  
3 Ottopert, or Otbert, the son of Sigibert the second, the founder, as some say, of the Castles of Altemburg, and Habspurg, of which promiscuously called Earl.  
4 Bebo, the son of Ottopert, the last Duke of Upper Almain, which title he exchanged for that of Earl of Altemburg, and Habspurg.  
5 Robert, or Rother, as some call him, the son of Bebo, Earl of Altemburg.  
766 6 Hertopert, the son of Robert, who added unto his Estate that part of Scwaben, or Suevia, which is called Brisgow.  
7 Rampert, the son of Hertopert, who flourished An. 814, at what time he procured the Canonization of S. Trutpertus.  
8 Guntram, the son of Rumpert, Earl of Altemburg.  
9 Luithard, the son of Guntram.  
999 10 Lunfride, the son of Luithard.  
929 11 Hunifride, the son of Luitfride, who added unto his Estates the Territory now called Sungow, bordering on Alsatia, a Province of Germany; recovered after his decease by the Dukes of Scawben.  
950 12 Guntram II. son of Humfride, the first who took unto himself the title of Earl of Argow: from whose second son named Berthilo, descended the Dukes or Earls of Zeringen, possessed of almost all Brisgow, and good part of Switzerland.  
13 Betzo, or Betzeline, son of Guntram the second, Earl of Argow.  
14 Rapato, son of Betzeline, the founder or repairer of the Castle of Habspurg, from whence both he and his successors were constantly called Earls of Habspurg. Great Grandfather, by Theodorick his youngest son, of Rodolph Earl of Rhinefelden, and Duke of Schawben, elected Emperor (at the instigation of the Pope) agains Henry the fourth.  
15 Warner, by some called Berengar, or Berengarius, the son of Rapato.  
1096 16 Otho, the son of Warner or Berengar.  
1108 17 Warner II. son of Otho, enriched by the Emperor Henry the fourth, with some fair Estates belonging to the Dukes of Schawben.  
18 Albert, the son of Warner the second, surnamed the Rich.  
19 Albert II. surnamed the Wise, son of Albert the first, added to his Estates all the Upper Alsatia, which he had by the right of Heduigis his wife, daughter and heir of Simon, the last Earl thereof.  
1238 20 Rodolph, the fortunate son of Albert the second, elected Emperor of the Romans, An. 1273. Of which he made so good advantage, that he added unto his Estates the great Dukedom of Austria, with all the incorporate Provinces thereunto belonging, and laid the first foundation of the Austrian greatness; of which more in Germany.   
Having on the occasion of these Earls of Habspurg, beheld so much of the affairs of this Country, as related to that puissant and illustrious Family, let us go forward to the rest: first taking in our way the ancient Estate hereof in the time of the Romans. At what time this whole mountainous tract, containing many several Nations (some of them spoken of before) was comprehended under the general name and notion of the Helvetii; the greatest and most populous of all the rest: so called, as Verstegan will have it, quasi Hil-Vites, or the Vites of the Mountains, to difference them from the Vites of the lower parts, inhabiting in that part of the Cimbrick Chersonnese, which is now called Juitland. Grown by long peace, and want of opportunity by traffic into foreign parts, to so great a multitude, that the Country, barren of itself, was no longer able to maintain them, they set fire on their Towns and Houses, and with a general resolution went to seek new dwellings. The total number of men, women and children, which went upon this desperate action, are said to have amounted to the number of 3680000, whereof 900000 were fight men. They had not long before overthrown L. Cassius a Roman Consul, slain the Consul himself, and sold his Soldiers for Bondslaves: upon the apprehension of which good success, they thought no body able to withstand them: But they found Caesar of a stronger metal than L. Cassius. Who having stopped their passage by hewing down the bridge of Geneva, till he was grown strong enough to bid them battle▪ so wasted them in several skirmishes and defeats, that they were forced to crave leave of him to go home again, and to rebuild those Towns and Villages which they had destroyed before this enterprise; which he upon delivery of Hostages did vouchsafe to grant. It is conceived, that at the least two Millions of them perished in this journey, not so much by the sword (though that spared them not) as for want of necessaries. After this they continued Members of the Roman Empire, till conquered in the times of Honorius and Valentinian the third, by the Burgundians and Almans, betwixt whom divided, the River Russ parting their dominions. From them being taken by the French, it was made a part of the Kingdom of Burgundy; some parts first taken out, and given to the Progenitors of the Earls of Habspurg, as before was noted. Given with the rest of that Kingdom to the Emperor Conrade the second, by Rodolph the last King thereof: parceled out by the Germane Emperors (as their custom was) into divers States; most of the which were drawn in by the Dukes of Schawben, the Earls of Habspurg; and the Dukes of Zezingen; as afterwards in the fall of the one, and as heirs to the other, by the Dukes of Austria. But being at last over-burdened by the tyranny of those Governors, whom the Dukes of Austria sent among them; seeing withal the Empire by the Pope's Fulminations distracted into many Factions, and the Austrian Family weakened by a sub-division of that great Estate into many parcels; they contracted an Offensive and Defensive League amongst themselves for defeuce of their Liberty, into which first entered those of Switz, Uren, and Underwalden, Anᵒ 1316. Not all united into one Confederation till the year 1511, as before was noted. At their first beginning to take Arms, Frederick, one of the many Dukes of Austria (to whose share they fell) sent his son Leopald against them with a puissant Army; which they encountered with near S●mpuch, a village of the now Canton of Lucern, and there overthrew him: but more by the convenience of those narrow passages, through which his Army was to march, than by any valour: In which it was no small help to them, that the ways were all so filled with Ice, that he was able to do no service with his Horse; and his soldiers so amazed at the present difficulties, that the Confederates only casting stones on them from the tops of the Mountains, made them leap into the Lakes adjoining.  
Having thus cleared themselves of the Houses of Austria, they continued in a Free-Estate, but never came to any reputation by their valour, till the War which Charles Duke of Burgundy made against them, whom they discomfited in three set battles. A War begun on very small occasions, and less hopes: the Country being so barren, and the people so poor, that their Ambassador to the Duke (as Comines reporteth) protested, that if all their Countrymen were taken, they would not be able to pay a ransom, to the value of the spurs and bridle-bits in his Camp. Certainly at that time they were so poor, that they knew not what riches was; for having won the first battle at Granson (the other two were those of Morat and Nancie) one of the goodliest Pavilions in the World was by them torn into pieces, and turned into breeches and side-coats: divers silver plates and dishes they sold for a French Sous (each Sous a little more than an English penny) supposing them to be but pewter; and a great Diamond of the Dukes, which was the goodliest Jewel in Christendom, was sold to a Priest for a Guilder; and by him again to some of the Lords of the Country for three Franks. After their valour shown in these battles, Lewis the 11. took them into pension, giving them yearly forty thousand Crown●, viz. twenty thousand to the Cities, and twenty thousand to particular persons; and bowed so much beneath the Majesty of the most Christian King, as to term himself one of the B●u●gesses of their Corporation; and to contend with the Duke of Savoy, which of them should be held for their first Ally. By these arts, and the nearness of their Forces for those occasions, he wrested Burgundy out of the hands of Mary the daughter of Charles; and Lewis the twelfth won Milan from Ludowick Sforze, whom they perfidiously betrayed, as was said before. Upon the merit of these services, they required an Augmentation of their pensions; which when this Lewis the twelfth denied, they withdrew themselves from the Amity of the French, and entered into the service of Pope Julio the second, who therefore styled them the Defenders of the Church, An. 1510. The fruits of which entertainment was the defeat of the whole forces of King Lewis, and the loss of Milan, into which Maximilian Sforze, the son of Ludowick was solemnly reinstated by the Confederates: who to oblige the Swissers more firmly to him, gave them those Towns and Valleys in the Alps of Italy (formerly members of that Dukedom) which now belong unto the Swissers, reckoned amongst the Praefectures of their Commonwealth. Francis the first, in pursuance of his claim to Milan, gave them a great and memorable overthrow at the battle of Marignan; yet afterwards considering what damage his Realm had sustained by the revolt of these Auxiliaries to his Enemies, he renewed the Confederation with them, on condition that he should restore the ancient pension of forty thousand Crowns; secondly, that he should pay unto them at certain terms, six hundred thousand Crowns; thirdly, that he should entertain four thousand of them in his pay continually; fourthly, that for the restoring of such places as they had taken from the Duchy of Milan, he should give unto them thirty thousand Crowns; five, that he should give them three months pay beforehand; fixtly and lastly, that Maximilian Sforze, whom they had estated in Milan, and were now going to dispossess, might by the King be created Duke of Nemours, endowed with twelve thousand Frankes of yearly revenue, and married to a daughter of the blood royal. On these conditions, as honourable to them as burdensome to the King, was the League renewed An. 1522: since which time, they have obtained, that six hundred of their Country are to be of the French Kings Guard: five hundred of which wait without at the gates of the Court; the other hundred in the great Hall. And yet the French Kings did not so engross the Market though they raised the price of the commodity, but that all other Princes might have them also for their money: the Kings of Spain and others bidding fair for them, but never going so high as the French had done. At last, upon the differences which gr●w amongst themselves in point of Religion, they grew to be divided also in point of Pension: the Popish Cantons taking pensions of the Pope and the King of Spain, the Protestants of the French, the mixed of both, and all of the Venetians. By which means, being bribed and corrupted by all, they came in very little time to be trusted of none. Which sudden sinking of that fame and reputation which they had attained to, together with the reasons of it, that notable Statesman and Historian Guicciardine doth describe, as followeth: The name (saith he) of this wild and uncivil Nation hath got great honour by their concord, and glory by Arms. For being fierce by nature, enured to War, and exact keepers of Milltary discipline, they have not only defended their own Country, but have won much praise in foreign parts, which doubtless had been greater, if they had sought to enlarge their own Empire, and not for wages to enlarge the Empire of others; and if nobly they had propounded unto themselves any other ends than he gain of money, by the love whereof being made abject, they have lost the opportunity of becoming fearful to Italy. For since they never came out of their confines but as mercenary men, they have had no public fruit of their Victories: but by their covetousness have become intolerable in their exactions where they overcame, and in their demands with other men; yea, at home froward and obstinate in their conclusions, as well as in following their commands under whose pay they serve in War. Their chief men have pensions of several Princes to favour them in their public meetings: and so private profit being preferred before the good of the public, they are apt to be corrupted, and fall at discord amongst themselves, with great lessening of the reputation which they had gotten amongst strangers. So he, relating the affairs of the year 1511, which the following issue of affairs hath fully verified.  
As for the Government of this State, it is merely popular, and that not only in the particular Cantons, but the aggregate body of their Counsel: the Gentry and Nobility being either rooted up in those long Wars which were betwixt them and their Vassals, justly provoked by those intolerable pressures and exactions which they laid upon them; or else worn out of memory and observation, for want of sway and suffrage in the Counsels of the Commonwealth. Only in Schaffehausen, Basib, and Zurich, are some Gentry left, not capable of any place or suffrage in the Senate of the said Cantons (from which they are excluded by the common people, because they joined not with them in their first revolt) unless they waive their Gentry, and be enroled amongst the number of Plebeians. The rest they have (it seemeth) in so poor esteem, that Porters and Mechanics of the meanest Trades, in all occasions of War are numbered with, and amongst these Gentlemen, making up one society only, and joining with them in electing the Master of their company, who is one of the Senate. But because that every Canton hath its proper Magistrates, but more or fewer, according as it is in greatness, or in the number of its several Resorts, or sub-divisions; it will not be amiss to show what number of Resorts are in every Canton; that is to say, in Underwalden only two, in Switz six, in Uren ten, in Zug five, in Glaris or Glarona fifteen, in Apenzel six, in Lucern seven, in Solothurn no more than one, in Fr●burg ninteen, in Basil and Schaffhausen but one a piece (the Cantons there and in Solothurn, reaching but little further than the Towns themselves) in that of Znrich thirty one, and thirty in that of Bern; in all, one hundred forty and eight. Of these consists the body of this Commonwealth. In ordering whereof, every particular Canton hath its proper Magistrate, chosen by the commonalty of that Canton (whom they call the Wuaman) together with a standing Counsel assistant to him, chosen out of the people, for the directing and disposing of their own affairs; which meet and sit in the chief Town or Village of that District. But if the cause concern the Public, than every Canton sendeth one or more Commissioners to the general Diets, where they determine of the business which they meet about, according to the major part of the Votes: the Commissioners of every Canton having one Vote only, though many may be sent from each, to add the greater weight to their consultations. The place of meeting is most commonly at the Town of Baden, in respect of the commodity of the Inns and houses, the pleasant situation, and famous Medicinal Baths; and because it is seated in the very centre of Switzerland, and subject to the eight first Cantons. And here they do determine of War, Peace, and Leagues; of making Laws; of sending, receiving, and answering Ambassadors; of Governments, and distributing the public Offices; and finally of difficult causes, and Appeals referred unto the judgement of the great Counsel. In which the City of Zurich, chief of the Cantons, hath the first place, not by antiquity, but dignity, and of old custom hath the greatest authority of calling together this Great Counsel, signifying by Letters to each Canton, the cause, time, and place of meeting; yet so, that if any Canton think it for the public good to have an extraordinary meeting of their Commissioners, they write to them of Zurich to appoint the same. That which the greater number do resolve upon, is without delay put in execution.  
The Forces of these Suisse consist altogether of Foot, Horse being found unserviceable in the●e Mountainous Countries. And of these Foot, Boterns reckoneth that they are able to raise sixscore thousand. Which possibly may be true enough, if it be understood of all that be able to bear Arms. For otherwise de facto, the greatest Army that ever they brought into the field, consisted but of one and thirty thousand men, which was that wherewith they aided the confederate States of Italy against the French, and restored Maximilian Sforze to the Dukedom of Milan. Their ordinary standing Forces are conceived to be sixteen or seventeen thousand, which they may bring into the field, leaving their Towns and Forts well furnished. And for their Revenue, it is not like to be very great, considering the poverty of their Country, and their want of traffic with other Nations. That which is ordinaery and in common, ariseth out of the Annual pensions which they receive from Foreign States, the profits arising out of their Dutch and Italian Praefectures, the Impost laid on Wines sold in Taverns, and Corn used by Bakers, and the rents of a dissolved Monastery called King's field (or Conings field) because many Kings and Queens have been cloistered there, amounting to forty thousand Guldens yearly. Which Monastery was built in the year 1380, in memory and honour of the Emperor Albertus slain by his Nephew at Santback, not far from Basil. Their extraordinary doth consist of spoils that be gotten in the War; which if it be managed in common, are divided in common; but if by two or three of the Cantons only, the rest can claim no share in the booty gotten.  
But this is only in relation to the Swissers themselves. For otherwise taking in the Confederate States, as well without, as within the bounds of that Country, they are able to raise fifty or threescore thousand men: that is to say, the Swissers themselves seventeen thousand, the Grisons ten thousand, those of Wallisland six thousand, the Abbot and Town of S. Gall four thousand, the City of Geneva two thousand, besides what Rotwel and Mulhusen, two Imperial Cities, are able to contribute towards it; the Dukes of Savoy being bound by their ancient Leagues to aid them with six hundred Horses at his own charges; besides two thousand six hundred Crowns in Annual pensions. But the Revenue of those States is ordered by itself a part, and never comes within the computation of the public; unless it be one the repulsing of a common Enemy, 
Grisons.  in which they are equally concerned. In which case, and others of a general interest, they communicate both heads and purses: the Delegates and Commissioners of all the States of this Confederacy, meeting together to consult of the common cause, which meeting they entitle the Greatest Counsel. But this is very seldom held, public affairs being generally ordered by the Commissioners of the Swissers only: though they themselves disclaim that name of Swissers as too mean and narrow, and call themselves Eidgenossen, that is to say, Partakers of the sworn Leagues. More of this Commonwealth he that lists to see, may satisfy himself in Simler, who purposely and punctually hath described the same.   

6. THE LEAGVES OF THE GRISONS.  
THe Country of the GRISONS comprehendeth all that part of the Alps, which lieth between the Springs of the Rivers Rhine, Inn, Adice or Athesis, and Adna: being bounded on the East, with the Country of Tirol; on the West, with Switzerland; on the North, with Suevia or Schwaben, and a part of the Swissers; on the South, with Lombardy. A Country far more mountainous than any of this Alpine tract, and having less natural commodities to boast itself of, more than the Fountains of those Rivers before mentioned.  
The people of it by most Latin Writers of these times are called by the name of Rhaeti, the Country Rhaetia; and so far properly enough, as that the ancient Rhaeti did inhabit all the lands possessed by the Grisons, though the Grisons do not inhabit a fourth part of those lands, which were possessed heretofore by the ancient Rhaeti: For anciently the Rhaeti did extend their dwellings as far as from the Alps of Italy to the River of Danow; comprehending besides this of the Grisons, a great part of Suevia or Schwaben, Tirol, Bavaria, and so much also of the Swissers as was not in possession of the old Helvetii. Within which tract there were not only many rich valleys and fruitful fields; but a most pleasant race of Wines called Vina Rhaetiea; much drank of by Augustus Caesar, and by him preferred before all others; which no man can conceive to grow in this barren Country. More properly Ammianus Marcellinus calleth this Tract by the name of Campi Canini, mountainous fields, which the continual snow made look of an hoary hue: and by allusion thereunto, the Dutchmen call this Nation at the present by the name of Graunpuntner, that is to say, the hoary or grey Confederates.  
As for the Rhaeti, take them in the former latitude, they were subdued by Drusus and Tiberius the sonnes-in-law, and adopted children, of Augustus Caesar, A. V. C. 739. And in the time of Antoninus made up two Provinces of the Empire, viz. Rhaetia prima, and Rhaetia secunda, both of them appertaining by Constantine's new model to the Diocese of Italy. A Nation in the first original, of Italian race, and so more properly to be assigned to that Diocese: but had inhabited this tract, from the time that Bellovesus the Gall seized on part of Tuscany, expelling thence the ancient inhabitants thereof: who under the conduct of Rhaetus, a great man amongst them, possessed themselves of these mountains, and afterwards of the vales adjoining, which they called Rhaetia, by the name of their Captain General. This happened in the time of Tarqvinius Priscus, in the first cradle as it were of the Roman Empire: in the declining age whereof, during the reign of Valentinian the third, and Anastasius, those parts which lay nearest unto Germany, and were worth the conquering, were subdved by the Almains and Boiarians, by them incorporated with the rest of their several States. The residue of this mountainous tract, as not worth the looking after, continued a member of the Empire, till given by Charles the Great to the Bishop of Chur, whose successors, being several ways molested by their potent neighbours, confederated with the Swissers for their mutual aid and preservation, An. 1497. By whose aid they so valiantly made good their ground against the Austrians, that at the last, after the loss of 20000 men on both sides, the points in difference were accorded, and a peace concluded.  
This is the substance of this story, as to former times; to which there cannot much be added in the way of History, little or no alteration happening in their affairs, but a more perfect settling of them in a form of Government. Concerning which we must observe that this whole Tract is cast into three Divisions, that is to say, the Upper League or Liga Grisa. 2 Liga Cadi Dio, or the League of the house of God. 3 The Lower League, called also Liga ditture, or the League of the ten Commonalties. The eight Italian Praefectures will make a fourth. Their buildings generally in the three first being cold and mountainous, are of freestone, but low, and for three parts of the year covered with snow; the windows thereof glazed and large, of which, for the said three parts of the year they only open a little quarry of glass, and presently shut it close again; the outside of the windows having leaves of wood, to keep the heat of their stoves from going out, or any cold from coming in. And as for travelling, the ways are for the most part unsafe and dangerous, by reason of the straight passages, dreadful precipices, and those almost continual bridges which hang over the terrible falls, and Cataracts of the River Rhine, descending with great violence from the highest mountains: huge hills of snow tumbling into the valleys, with a noise as hideous as if it were a clap of thunder.  
For the particulars, the Upper League lieth in the highest and most mountainous parts of the Alps of Italy, having therein those vast mountains of Locknannier, and Der Vogel; out of which the two streams of the Rhine have their first original. By the French it is called Liga Grise, or the Grey League (the word Grissel, or Grise, in that language, being Grace in ours) in the same sense as the Dutch call it Graunpuntner, that is, Confederati cani, which we may render properly the Confederate Grisle-pates: either because the mountains are continually covered with a periwig of hoary Icicles, or from the heads of this people, Grey before their time. It consisteth of nineteen Resorts or Commonalties, according to the number of their Vales and Villages; of which four only speak the Dutch, all the rest a corrupt Italian: and was the first which did confederate with the Swissers, from whence the name of Grisons came unto the rest, who after joined with them in the same confederacy. It hath no City nor Town of note. The principal of those that be, are 1 ●●anter, the place sometimes of the General Diets for these Leagues. 2 Diserntis, where is a very rich Monastery. 3 Saint Bernardino, situate at the foot of the Mountain Vogel. 4 Masox, sometimes an Earldom, giving name to the Valley of Masoxer-tal. 5 Galanckter, whence the vale so named, inhabited by none but Basket-makers. 6 Ruffla, situate on the River Muesa, near Belinzano, on the skirts of Italy.  
2 The second League, is Liga Cadi Dio, or the League of the house of God, so called because it was the proper Patrimony of the Bishop and Church of Chur: and may be called the middle League, as being situate between the Upper League on the West, and the Lower League upon the East. It is the greatest of the three, containing twenty one Resorts or Commonalties: of which nine lie on this side the tops of the Mountains towards Germany, the rest towards Italy, and yet two only speak the Dutch, the others a corrupt Italian. The places of most note are, 1 Tintzen, the Tinnetio of Antoninus, seated amongst high and inaccessible Mountains, betwixt Chur and the Valley of Bergel. 2 Mur (called Murus by the same Antoninus) in the valley of Bergel, a Valley extending from the head of the River Maira, towards Chiavenna, one of the. Italian Praefectures. 3 Stalla, called Bevio by the Italians, because the way doth in that place divide itself. 4 S. Jacomo (in the valley of Compoltschin) called Travasede by Antoninu●. 5 Sinnada, in the valley of Engadin. And 6 Chur, by some Coira, but more truly Curia, so called from the long stay that Constantine the great made here with his Court and Army, in a War intended against the Germans; built afterwards by some part of his forces which continued here, An. 357, about half a Dutch mile from the meeting of the two streams of the Rhine: in form triangular; the buildings indifferent in themselves, but not uniform with one another. High on a Hill, in one corner of it, standeth the Close, and therein the Cathedral Church; a stately Edifice, but more in account of the Natives who have seen no fairer, than it is with strangers; and near the Church, the Bishop's Palace, and the houses of the Canons, all well built, and handsomely adorned. The Bishop of this City, and of all the Country of these Leagues (for they received their Bishop and the Faith together, An. 489.) acknowledgeth the Archbishop of Mentz for their Metropolitan, is reckoned for a Prince of the Empire, and the rightful Lord both of this City and the whole League; but on the introduction of the Reformed Religion, which they had from the Swissers and Genevians, the Citizens withdrew themselves from their obedience to the Bishop, and govern the City in the manner of a Free-state. So far conformable to him, for their own preservation, that as the Bishop and his Canons, with the rest of this League, upon occasion of the wrongs done them by the house of Austria, Lords of the neighbouring Tirol, joined in confederacy with the seven first Cantons of the Swissers (which was in the year 1498) So did the Citizens of Chur, after they had withdrawn themselves from the command of their Bishops, concur with them at last in that mutual League.  
3 The third League of these Grisons, is the Lower League, called also Liga Ditture, or the League of the ten Jurisdictions: situate close upon Tirol, in the North-East part of the whole Country. Of all the ten, two only, which are those of Malans and Meienfeld, obey the joint commands of the three Leagues of the Grisons: the other eight being subject to the Archduke of Austria, under whom they are suffered to enjoy their ancient privileges, for fear of uniting with the Swissers; which hitherto they have not done. Only they did unite together in one common League, An. 1436: conditioning their mutual defence against all Enemies, preservation of their peace, and maintenance of their privileges; reserving notwithstanding their obedience to their natural Lords. In which respect, and by reason of the interess and society which they have with the rest of the Grisons, they are in friendship with the Swiss, but in no confederacy. City or Walled-town they have none. The chief of those they have, are 1 Castles, the seat of the Governor for the Archduke of Austria. 2 Malans, and 3 Meienseld, both bordering upon the Rhine. 4 Tanaas, giving name to the first and greatest of the ten Jurisdictions, the chief Town of this League, in which are held the General Diets for the same; and where are kept the Miniments and Records which concern their Privileges. In this League is the Mountain called Rhaetico-mons, by Pomponius Mela, but now Prettigower-berg, because it is at the end of the valley which the Dutch call Prettigow.  
4 As for the Italian Praefectures, they are eight in number, and were given unto the Grisons by Maximilian Sforze Duke of Milan, An. 1513. at such time as he gave the like present to the Cantons of Switzerland. Of these the first is called Plurs, so called from the chief Town of the same name, in Latin Plura, once seated in a plain at the foot of the Alps, near the River Maira, the chief of sundry villages lying in the same bottom; now nothing but a deep and bottomless Gulf. For on the 26 of August 1617., an huge Rock falling from the top of the Mountains, overwhelmed the Town, killed in the twinkling of an eye 1500 people, and left no sign or ruin of a Town there standing; but in the place thereof a great Lake of some two miles' length. 2 Chiarama, situate in a pleasant valley so called, near the River Maira, and ten Italian miles from the Lake of Come. Antoninus calleth it Clavenna, and the Dutch Clevener-tal, or the valley of Cleven, more near unto the ancient name. 3 The Valtoline, Vallis Telina in the Latin, a pleasant Valley, extending threescore miles in length, from the head of the River Aada, unto the fall thereof in the Lake of Come: the Wines whereof are much commended, and frequently transported on this side the Alps. It is divided into six Praefectures, according to the names of the principal Towns. The chief whereof are 1 Bormio, seated near the head of the River Aada. 2 Teio, the chief Fortress of the whole Valley. 3 Sondrio, the chief Town, and the seat of the Governor, or Lieutenant General of the whole Country. This Valley lying opportunely for the passage of the King of Spain's Forces out of Milan into Germany, by the practices and treasons of Rodolfus Planta, one of the natives of it, and of the Romish Religion, was delivered to the Duke of Feria, being then Governor of Milan, An. 1622, the whole Country brought under the obedience of that King, Chur itself forced and taken by them, and the Religion of Rome settled in all parts thereof. But two years after, by the joint Forces of the French, Venetians, and Savoyard, the whole Valley was recovered from the Spaniards, and after a long treaty between France and Spain, the Grisons re-estated in their just possessions, An. 1630, save that the Spaniard still holds the Fort of Fuentes, for the safer passage of his Forces, if occasion be.  
Such is the state of the three Leagues, considered severally and a part from one another. In reference to the whole, they make up one Government, or Commonwealth; for ordering whereof they hold a general Diet, once in every year, consisting of threescore and three Commissioners, that is to say, 28 from the Upper League, 23 from the League of the house of God, and 14 from the League of the ten Jurisdictions. These have authority to determine of Appeals from the common Praefectures, to conclude of Peace and War, Confederacies, Ambassies, and Laws, which concern the public: yet so, that in a point of Judicature, is is lawful to Appeal unto the Commonalties of every League, who have authority, if need be, to reverse the sentence: the causes being severally proposed, and passed by the major part of voices. The Government of each Lague, popular, as amongst the Swissers.  
There are in these Alpine Provinces Arch-Bishops 2. Bishops 13. Universities 4. i e. 1 Turi● 2 Geneva. 3 Basil. 4 Zurich.    

OF FRANCE.  
HAving thus crossed the Alps, we may indifferently dispose ourselves for France or Germany. But we will follow the course and fortunes of the Roman Empire, which first passed into France before it meddled with the Germans; and had brought Spain and Britain under the form of Roman Provinces, when Germany was looked on at a greater distance.  
FRANCE then according to the present dimensions of it, is bounded on the East with a branch of the Alps which divide Dauphin from Piedmont; as also with the Countries of Savoy, Switzerland, and some parts of Germany; on the West with the Aquitain Ocean, and a branch of the Pyrenean Mountains which divide it from Spain; on the North with the English Ocean and some parts of Belgium; and on the South, with the rest of the Pyrenean Mountains and the Mediterrancan.  
The Figure of it is almost square, each side of the Quadrature being reckoned 600 miles in length. But they that go more exactly to work upon it, make the length hereof to be 660 Italian miles, the breadth 570 only, the whole Circumference to amount to 2040. Seated in the Northern temperate Zone between the middle Parallel of the fifth Clime, where the longest day is 15 hours, and the middle Parallel of the eighth ●lime, where the longest day is 16 hours and an half.  
It hath this present name of France from the Franci or Frankes, a people of Germany, who seized upon those parts of it which lay nearest to the Rhine, in the time of Valentinian the third; and having afterwards subdued Paris, and made it the seat-royal of their growing Empire, they caused the Country thereabouts to be called France. Which name, as they enlarged their borders, they imposed on, or communicated rather to the rest of this Country; and to those parts of Germany also which were conquered by them. At which time, for distinction sake, they called the East parts of their whole Empire by the name of O●sten-re●ch or Austrasia, (lying now wholly out of France, in Germany, and that part of Belgium which is subject to the King of Spain:) and for the West parts thereof, they had the name of Westen-reich, or Westrasia (in the barbarous Latin of that Age) West France, or Francia Occidentalis; to which the name of France was at last appropriated, according to the limits before laid down.  
Anciently it was called Gallia, and the people Galli, and by that name occurs most commonly in the writers of the Roman story; and Gallia Transalpina, because situate on the further side of the Alps from Italy, to difference it from the Country of those Gauls, which being planted in those parts which we now call Lombardie, was called Cisalpina. Sometimes it was called Galatia also; by that name known amongst the Greeks; by Ptolemy called Celio-Galatia, or the Galatia of the Celiae, a potent nation of old Gaul; to distinguish it from Galatia, one of the Provinces of Asia minor, denominated from the Galatians or gaul's of this Country. Whence it became so named is not yet determined. Some think it was called Gallia, from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, (Gala) signifying milk, quia Lacteos, i. e. aibos homines producebat, for the milky and white complexion of the people. compared unto the Greeks and Romans who first imposed it. Others, and amongst them D●odorus Siculus, derive the name from Galata, a son of Hercules; to which that of Galatia comes as near as may be. That Hercules was sometimes in this Country is affirmed also by Amm●anus Marcellinus, who further adds, That after he had suppressed those Tyrants which oppressed the People, he begat many Children on the principal Women; Et eos, parts quibus imperitabant nominibus suis appellasse. Lib. XL. Who gave their own names to those parts over which they rules. But in another place acknowledging that the Grecians call this People Galatae (ita enim Gallos' sermo Graecus appellat) he telleth us from Timogenes an Ancient Author, one very diligent in the search of the gallic Antiquities, that the Aborigines or first Inhabitants hereof, called themselves Celtae, by the name of one of their Kings whom they highly honoured. Es matris ejus vocabulo Galatas, and Galatae from the name of his Mother Galata: who probably enough might be a daughter of Hercules, mistake by Diodorus for one of his sons.  
Of the Original of this People more anon. In the mean time we may take so much notice of the ancient Gaul, as to affirm him (out of Caesar and other Authors) to be quick-witted, of a sudden and nimble apprehension, but withal very rash and harebrained, (ut sunt subi a Gallorum ingenia, is a note set upon them by the pen of Caesar:) so full of Lawsuits and contentions, that their Lawyers never wanted work. Gallia Causidicos, etc. as the Poet hath it: of vehement affections, and precipitate in all their actions, as well Military as Civil; falling on like a Clap of Thunder, and presently going off in Smoke. Primus impetus major quam virorum, secundus minor quam foeminarum, was a part also of their Character in the time of Florus the Historian. And though the present French be generally of another Original; yet there is so much of the old Gaul still left among them, either by the Impression of the Heavenly Bodies, or by intermariages with the Gauls, as they overcame them, that all these qualities are still predominant in the French, not differing from the ancient Gaul but in Name and Habit. For further evidence whereof, take with you a Comparison, homely I must confess, but to the life expressing the nature of the French, compared with the Dutch and Spanish in matters of War. The French is said to be like a Flea, quickly skipping into a Country, and soon leaping out of it, as was the Expedition of Charles the 8th into Italy. The Dutch is said to be like a Louse. slowly mastering a place, and as slowly (yet at last) driven out of their hold, as was their taking and losing of Ostend and Gulick. The Spaniard is said to be like a Crabb or 〈◊〉 inguinalis, which being once crept into a place is so rooted there, that nothing but the extremity of violence can fetch him out again. In which I think I need not instance, it being generally observed, that the Spaniards will endure all possible hardship before they will part with any thing that they are possessed of. It is used also for a Byword, that the Italian is wise beforehand, the Dutch in the time of action, and the French after it is done; a wisdom much like that of the ancient Gaul. Nor are they less Litigous than the old Gauls were: Insomuch as it is thought that there are more Lawsuits tried among them in seven years, than have been in England from the Conquest till the time of King james. They are great Scoffers, yea even in matters of Religion, as appeareth by the story of a Gentleman lying sick on his death-bed; who when the Priest had persuaded him, that the Sacrament of the Altar was the very Body and Blood of CHRIST, refused to eat thereof because it was Friday. Nor can I forget another in the same extremity, who seeing the Host (for so they call the Consecrated Elements) brought unto him by a lubberly Priest, said that CHRIST came to him, as he entered into Jerusalem, riding upon an Ass. As for the Women, they are said to be witty, but Apish, Wanton, and Incontient: where a man at his first entrance may find acquaintance, and at his first acquaintance may find an entrance. So Dallington in his View of France describeth them. But I have since heard this Censure condemned of some uncharitableness, and the French Gentlewomen highly magnified for all those graces which may beautify and adorn that Sex. And it is possible enough that it may be so in some particulars, though it be more than any man would guests at that cometh amongst them. For generally at the first sight you shall have them as familiar with you, as if they had known you from your Cradle; and are so full of Chat and Tattle, even with those they know not, as if they were resolved sooner to want breath than words; and never to be silent but in the Grave.  
As to the persons of this People, they are commonly of a middle stature, and for the most part of a slight making; their complexion being generally hot and moist, which makes them very subject to the heats of lust, and easily inclinable unto those diseases which are concomitants thereof: their Constitution somewhat tender, if not delicate, which rendereth them impatient of Toil and labour, and is in part the cause of those ill successes which have happened to them in the Wars, in which they have lost as much for want of constancy, and perseverance in their enterprises, as they have gained by their Courage in the undertaking. And for the Women, they are for the most part very personable, of strait bodies, slender wastes, and a fit Symmetry of proportion in all the rest; their hands white, long, and slender, and easily discernible to be so; for either they wear no Gl●ves at all, or else so short, as if they were cut off at the hand-wrist. To these the Complexion of their faces, and the colour of their hair, too much inclining to the black, holds no true Devorum. 'tis true the Poets commend Leda for her black hair, and not unworthily, Leda fuit nigris con●●icienda comis, as it is in Ovid. But this was specially, because it set off with the greater lustre the amiable sweetness of her Complexion: For in that case the Hair doth set forth the Face, as shadows commonly do a Picture; and the Face so becometh the Hair, as a Field Argent doth a Sa●le b●aring, which kind of Coat our Critical Heralds call the most fair. But when a Black hair meets with a Brown or swarth Complexion, it falls much short of that attractiveness of beauty, which Ovid being so great a Crafts-Master in the Art of Love did commend in Leda.  
The chief exercises they use, are, 1. ●enxis; every Village having a Tennis-Court, Orleans 60. Pa●s many hundreds. 2. Dancing, a sport to which they are so generally affected, that were it not so much enveighed against by their straitlaced Ministers, it is thought that many more of the Frenth Catholics had been of the Reformed Religion. For so extremely are they bend upon this disport, that neither Age nor Sickness, no nor poverty itself, can make them keep their heels still, when they hear the Music. Such as can hardly walk abroad without their Crutches, or go as if they were troubled all day with a Sciatica, and perchance have their rags hang so loose about them, that one would think a swift Galliard might shake them into their nakedness, will to the Dancing Green howsoever, and be there as eager at the sport, as if they had left their several infirmities and wants behind them. What makes their Ministers (and indeed all that follow the Genevian Discipline) inveigh so bitterly against Dancing, and punish it with such severity where they find it used, I am not able to determine, nor doth it any way belong unto this discourse. But being it is a Recreation which this people are so given unto, and such a one as cannot be followed but in a great deal of Company, and before many witnesses and spectators of their carriage in it; I must needs think the Ministers of the French Church more nice than wise, if they choose rather to deter men from their Congregations by so strict a Stoicism, than indulge any thing unto the jollity and natural Gaiety of this people, in matters not offensive, but by accident only.  
The Language of this People is very voluble and pleasant, but rather Elegant than Copious, and therefore much troubled for want of words to find out Periphrases; besides that very much of it is expressed in the action; the head and shoulders move as significantly toward it, as the lips and tongue; and he that hopeth to speak with any good grace, must have somewhat in him of the Mimic. A Language enriched with great plenty of Proverbs, consequently a great help to the French humour of Scoffing: and so naturally disposed for Courtship, as makes all the people complemental; the poorest Cobbler in the Parish hath his Court-Cringes, and his Eaubeniste de Cour, his Court-holy-water (as they call it) as perfectly as the best Gentleman-Huisher in Paris. Compared with that of other Nations, the Language of the Spaniards is said to be Manly, the Italian Courtly, and the French Amorous. A sweet language it is without question, the People leaving out in their pronunciation many of their Consonants, and thereby giving occasion to this Byword, that the Frenchm●npronounceth not as he writes, singeth not as he pricketh, nor speaks as he thinketh. In the Original thereof it is a Compound of the old gallic, German, and Latin Tongues: the old Gall●ck being questionless the same with the Welsh or British, as appeareth clearly by these reasons. 1. The L●t●n words are known to have been received from the Romans, and the Germans, at the coming in of the Frankes and Burgundians; but of the Welsh words which they have, we can give no reason, but that they are the remainder of the ancient Language; of which Welsh words which still continue in that Language Camden in his Britannia reckoneth not a few. 2. It is said by Tacitus, that the Britan's were the Descendants of the Gauls, and this he proveth as by other Arguments, so from the identity or near resemblance of the Language which both Nations speak. Vtriusque sermo haud multum diversus, as his own words are. And 3. It is said by Caesar, That the Gauls used to pass into Britain to be instructed in the Rites and learning of the Druids; which showeth that both People spoke but own common tongue, there being in those times no one learned Language, which other nations studied besides their own.  
The Soil is extraordinary fruitful, and hath three Lodestones to draw riches out of other Countries, Corn, Wine, and Salt, in exchange for which there is yearly brought into France 1200000 li. Sterling, the custom of Salt only to the King being estimated at 700000 Crowns per Annum. And indeed the benefit arising on this ●ne commodity is almost incredible, it being constituted by the King's Edict (which is all in all) that no man shall have any Salt for Domestic uses (except by special privilege, and that dearly paid for) but what he must buy of the King's Officers, and that upon such prices too as they please to sell it. Nor can it but be very well stored with Fish; for besides the benefit of the Seas, their Lakes and Ponds belonging to the Clergy only are said to be 135000. Their other Merchandizes are Beefs, Hogs, Nuts, Woad, Skins, vast quantities of all sorts of Linen. And to say truth, there are not many Countries in the Christian World to which Nature hath been so prodigal of her choicest blessings as she hath to this, the fields thereof being large and open, and those so intermingled with Corn and Vines, and every hedge-row so beset with choice of fruits, that never any covetous or curious eye had a fairer object. And yet so miserable is the condition of the common Peasant, partly by reason of the intolerable Taxes laid upon him by the King, and partly by those great, but uncertain Rents which are set upon him by his Landlord (for the poor husbandman is Tenant only at the will of his Lord) that there is many one amongst them, who farmeth yearly thirty or forty Acres of Wheat and Vines, that never drinks Wine, or eats good Bread, from one end of the year unto the other.  
The Christian Faith was planted first amongst the Gauls, by some of St. Peter's Disciples, sent hither by him at his first coming to Rome: Xystus, Fronto, and julianus, the first Bishops of Rheims, Perigori and Mants (Cenom inensium in the Latin) being said to be of his ordaining in the Martyrologies. The like may be affirmed (but on surer grounds) of Trophimus the first Bishop of Arles. For on a Controversy betwixt the Arch-Bishops of Vienna and Arles for the dignity of Metropolitan, in the time of Pope Leo the first, it was thus pleaded in behalf of the Bishop of Arles, quod prima inter Gallias, etc. That Arles of all the Cities of Gaul, did first obtain the happiness of having Trophimus ordained Bishop thereof by the hands of St. Peter. Nor is St. Paul to be denied the honour of sending some of his Disciples thither also to preach the Gospel: Crescens sent by him as he telleth us 2 Tim. 4. into Galatia, being the first Bishop of Vienna, spoken of before, as not the Martyrologies only, but Ado Viennensis, an ancient Writer of that Church, doth expressly say. And that it was into this Country, that he sent that Crescens at that time, and not unto Galatia in Asia minor, the testimonies of Epiphanius and Theodoret which affirm the same, and that which hath been said before of this name of Galatia, may confirm sufficiently. But Christianity being destroyed by the French at their first coming hither, was again planted by the industry of S. Remigius the first Bishop of Rheims; Clovis or Clodivaeus the fifth King of the French giving way unto it for his Wife's sake who was zealous in it, and after taking on himself that holy calling, on a great victory which he won against the Almains; By whom being over-laid in the day of batbell, he made his prayers to CHRIST whom his Wife Crotilda worshipped, vowing to be of that Religion if he got the victory; which vow he had no sooner made (as the story telleth us) but Alemannos invasit timor, a sudden fear fell upon the Almains, and the French were conquerors.  
At this time they are divided in Religion, as in other places; some following the Doctrine of the Church of Rome, and others that of those Reformed Churches which adhere to Calvin. But this division is more ancient than calvin's days, the same opinions (as they relate unto the Errors in the Romish Church) being maintained formerly by the Albigenses, the Waldenses, or Pauperes de Lugduno (the Vaudoys as the French Writers call them) of whom we shall speak more when we come to Lions. Suffice it in this place to note, that the doctrine of the Reformed Churches was not new in France, when Zuinglius first preached against the superstitions of the Mass, and the worship of Images, and Calvin traveled in advancing the Reformation; though much suppressed as to the outward profession of it. But being revived by their Endeavours it sprung out again, and spread itself so speedily in this Kingdom, that there were reckoned in the year 1560. above 2150. Churches of them, which cannot in such a long time but be wonderfully augmented, though scarce any of them have scaped some massacre or other. Of these massacres, two are most memorable, viz. that of Merind. ll and Chabriers, as being the first, and the massacre at Paris, as being the greatest. That of Merindall happened in the year 1545. The instrument of it, being Minier, the Precedent of the Council of Aix. For having condemned this poor people of heresy, he mustered a small Army, and set fire on the Villages. They of Merindoll, seeing the flame, with their wives and children fled into the woods; but were there butchered, or sent to the Galleys. One boy they took, placed him against a tree, and shot him with Calivers; 25 which had hid themselves in a Cave, were in part 〈◊〉, in part burned. In Chabriers they so inhumanely dealt with the young wives and maids, that most of then died immediately after. The men and women were put to the sword; the children were 〈◊〉: 800 men were murdered in a Cave, and 40 women put together in an old Barn, and ●u●ned. Yea such was the cruelty of these Soldiers to these poor women, that when some of them had clambered to the top of the house, with an intent to leap down; the Soldiers beat them book again with their pikes. The Massacre of Paris was more cunningly plotted. A Peace was made with the protestants; for the assurance whereof, a marriage was solemnised, between Henry of 〈◊〉, chief of the Protestant party; and the Lady Marguerite the King's sister: At this Wedding there assembled the Prince of Conde, the Admiral Coligni, and divers others of chief note: but there was not so much Wine drank as Blood shed at it. At Midnight the Watch-bell rung, the King of Nazarre, and the Prince of Conde are taken Prisoners, the Admiral murdered in his Bed; and 30000 at the least of the greatest and most potent Men of the Religion, sent by the way of this R●d Se● to find the nearest passage to the 〈◊〉 of ●anan. Anno 1572. Yet notwithstanding these Massacres, and the long and frequent Wars which were made against them by their Kings, they grew so numerons, and got unto so great a power, that partly by Capitulations with the French Kings at the End of every 〈◊〉 War, but principally by the connivance of K. Henry the fourth, who was sometimes the Head of their party, they had gotten above an hundred walled Towns and Garrisons: and were absolute Masters in effect of all those Provinces which lie along the Aquitain shore and the Pyrerees, from the Mediterranean Sea to the River of Loire. But being grown too insolent by reason of so great a strength, and standing upon terms with the King as a Free Estate (the Commonwealth of Roch●ll, as King Henry the fourth was used to call it) they drew upon themselves the jealousy and fury of King L●●●s the thirteenth. Who seeing that he could not otherwise dissolve the knot of their combination than by the sword, drew it out at last: And was so fortunate in the success of his Undertake, that in two years, (viz. Anno 1621. 1622.) he stripped them of all their walled Towns, except Mentalban and Rochel only; and those too he reduced not long after by the power of his Arms: Leaving them nothing to rely on for their future security, but the grace and cle●e of their King, promerited by their obedience and integrity. And it hath sped so well with them since that time, that they never had the exercise of their Religion with so much freedom, as they have hitherto enjoyed since the reducing of their Forts and Garrisons to the King's obedience.  
The other Party in Religion, having the Countenance of the State, and the prescription and possession of so many years to confirm the same, is in as prosperous a condition both for power and p●trimoni, as any that acknowledgeth the Authority of the Popes of Rome. In point of Patrimony, the Author of the Cabinet computes the Tithes and Temporal Revenues of the Clergy, besides provisions of all sorts, to 80 millions of Crowns; but this Account is disallowed by all knowing men. Bod●● reporteth from the mouth of Monsieur Alemant, one of the Precedents of Accounts in Paris. that they amount to 12 millions, and 300000 of their Livres, which is 1200000 l. of our English money; and he himself conceiveth that they possess seven parts of twelve of the whole Revenues of that Kingdom. The Book entitled Comment ●'Est: gives a lower estimate: and reckoning that there are in France 200 millions of Arpens (which is a Measure somewhat bigger than our Acre) assigneth 47 millions, which is near a fourth part of the whole, to the Gallicane Clergy. And then it is resolved by all. That the Baisonam (as they call it) which consists of Offerings, Church, Bu●●ls Derives, and such like Casualties, amounteth to as much per annum, as their standing Rents: Upon which ground Sir Edw●n Sandys computeth their R●venne at 6 millions yearly. And to say truth, there needs a very great Revenue to maintain their numbers; there being reckoned in this Kingdom, 13 Arch-Bishops, 104 Bishops, 1450 Abbeys, 540 Arch-Priories, 1232▪ Priories, 5●● Nunneries, 100L Convents of Friars, 259 Commanderies of Malta; besides the Colleges of the 〈◊〉, which being of a late foundation are not here accounted. And for the Parish-Priests, they are reckoned at 130000 of all sorts, taking in Deacons, Subdeacons', and all those of inferior Orders, which have some Ministry in their Churches: the number of which was reckoned in the time of King Lewis the 11th, to be little less than 100000. But then 'tis like that Charteries and 〈◊〉 happe● went in that Account; or else the Huguenots in the Wars have destroyed more Churches, than they are like to build in haste; there being found in France on a just Account, no more than 2●400 Parish Churches, besides Oratories and Chapels of Ease appertaining to them. In which, there are supposed to live 15 millions of people, whereof the Clergy and the Ministers depending on them do make up 3 millions, which is a fifth part of the whole And for their power, the Gall●an Clergy stands more stoutly to their natural rights against the usurpations and encroachments of the See of Rome, than any other that live under the Pope's Authority: which they acknowledge so far only as is consistent with their own privileges, and the rights of their Sovereign. For neither did they in long time submit to the Decrees of the Council of Trent; nor have they yet admitted of the Inqui●●ion; nor yield such store of Grist to the Pope's Mill, as probably might redound to him from so rich a Clergy. And for his Temporal power over Kings and Princes, it is a doctrine to averle from the Positions and Principles of the Gallican Church, that in the year 1610. the Divines of Paris published a Declaration, in which it was affirmed, That the doctrine of the Pope's Supremacy was an Erroneous doctrine, and the ground of that hellish position of deposing and killing Kings. And this indeed hath constantly been the doctrine of the Gallican Church since the time of Gerson, maintaining the Authority of a Council above that of the Pope.  
But to proceed. The men most eminent for learning of either side have been (besides those mentioned in the Alpine Provinces) Peter du Mouliu, highly commended for his Eloquence by the pen of Balsac; Fr. Junius a moderate and grave Divine, Chamiet the Controverser, and Philip de Morney Lord of Plessis. Of the other party ●laudius Espencaeus a Sorbon Doctor, the famous Cardinal of Peron, Genebrard the Historian, Petavius a learned jesuit, etc. In the middle times S. Bernard Abbot of Clarevalle, Pet. Lambard Bishop of Paris, john Gerson Chancellor of that University. More anciently Prosper of Aquitain, Cassianus the Hermit, Irenaeus the renowned Bishop of Lions (though not here a Native.) And as to Men of other Studies, Ausonius the Poet, Hottoman and Gotfredus the Civilians, Duarenus the Canonist, Barn. Brissonius the great Antiquary, Isaac Casaubon that ren●wned Philologer, Budaeus that great Master of the Greek Language, ●huanus the Historian Latrentius the Anatomist, etc. And as for Military men, it hath been famous for the valour of Clovis the first Christian King of the French, Charles Martell that stout Champion of the Church against the Saracens; and Charles the great, the Founder of the Western Empire: In the middle times for Godfrey of Bovillon, one of the Nine Worthies (as they call them, the son of Eustace Earl of Boulogn in Picardy; and in these later days for King Henry the 4th. Francis and Henry Dukes of Guise, Charles Duke of Mayenne, Char●es Duke of Byron, etc.  
The Laws of this Kingdom are either Temporary, and alterable at pleasure; or Fundamental, which neither King nor Parliament (as they say) can alter. Of this last sort the principal are the Salic Law and the Law of Apennages. By that of the Apennage the younger Sons of the King are not to have partage in the Kingdom with their Elder-Brother; which Law was made by Charles the Great, before whose time we find the Children of the Kings estated in their several Thrones, and the Realm parceled out among them into many Kingdoms. But by this Law they are to be entitled to some Duchy or County (though they are content sometimes with Annual pensions) with all the rights and profits thereunto belonging, all matters of Regality (as Levying Taxes, Coinage, and the like) excepted only; which upon the failing of the masculine line do return again unto the Crown. The name thereof derived from Abannage a Germane word, signifying a portion.  
But the main Law they stand on is the Salic Law, by which the Crown of France may not descend unto the Females, or fall from the Lance to the Distaff, as their saying is: Which Law one undertaking to make good out of holy Writ, urged that Text of St. Matthew, where it is said. Mark the Lilies (which are the Arms of France) and see how they neither Labour nor Spin. This they pretend to have been made by Pharamont the first King of the French, and that the words Sialiqua so often used in it, gave it the Name of the Salic Law. But Haillan one of their best Writers affirms, That it was never heard of in France till the time of Philip the Long, Anno 1315. and that it could not possibly be made by Pharamont, who though he was the first King of the French, had not one foot of Land in France, their third King Merovei being the first of those Kings which passed over the Rhine. Others say it was made by Charles the Great, after the Conquest of Germany: where the incontient lives of the Women living about the River Sala (in the modern Misnia) gave both the occasion and the name. De terra verò Salica, nulla portio haereditatis muli●ri veniat, sed ad virilem Sexum tota terrae haereditas perveniat; are the words thereof. This Terra Salica, the learned Selden in his Vitles of Honour, Englisheth Knight's Fee, or Land that is holden by Knight's Service, as our Lawyers call it; and proveth his Interpretation by a Record of the Parliament of Bourdeaux cited by Bodinus; where an old Will or Testament being once produced, in which the Testator had bequeathed unto his Son all his Salic Land, it was resolved by the Court, that thereby was meant his Land holden in Knight's Service. And then the sense thereof must be, that in Lands holden of the King by Knight's Service, or the like military tenure, the Male Children should inherit only: because the Females could not perform those services for which those Lands were given, and by which they were holden. And for this there may be good reason; though in England we deal not so unkindly with the Female Sex, but permit them, after the Age of 15 years to enjoy such Lands; because they may then take such Husbands as are able to do the King those services which the Law requireth. But this Interpretation (how good and genuine soever indeed it be) cannot stand with the French Gloss. For then the Crown being held of none but God, and so not properly to be called a Fee or Feife, could not be brought within the Compass of the Salic Law, because not to be counted for Salic Land. Give them therefore their own Gloss, their own Etymology, and Original; and let us see by what right their King's Daughters are excluded from their succession to the Diadem. For first, supposing that to be the Salic Land which lieth about the River Sala, in the modern Misnia: I would fain know how it could reach unto the King's Daughters in France, so far distant from it; or with what honesty they can lay on them the like brand of incontinency, as was supposed to have been found in those Women of Germany. And next, supposing that the Law had been made by Pharamont, I would fain learn how it can be applied to the Crown of France, to which Pharamont had then no title, nor so much as one foot of Land on that side of the Rhine. And finally, supposing that the Law was made in such general terms, as to extend to all the Countries which the French in time to come should conquer, and consequently unto France when once conquered by them: I would then ask, Whether it did extend to the Crown alone, or to all subordinate Estates which were holden of it. If unto all Estates holden of that Crown, I would fain know with what pretence they could give sentence in behalf of Charles of Blais, against John de Montfo●t, in the succession to the Dukedom of Bretague: Charles of Blais claiming by his Mother, the Niece of Arthur the second, by his second Son Guy; Whereas John de Montsort was the third Son (and the next Heir-male) of the said Duke Arthur. If only to the Crown of France, it would be known by what right they detain that Dukedom from the true Heirs of Anne the Duchess: whose Daughter and Heir the Lady Clande, being married unto Francis the first, had issue Henry the second, and other Children. Which Henry, besides Francis the second, Charles' the ninth, Henry the third, and Francis Duke of Anjou, all dying without issue, had a Daughter named Isabel or Elizabeth married to Philip the second King of Spain, by whom she was made the Mother of Isabel, the late Archdutchess, and of Katherine the Wife of Charles Emanuel the late Duke of Savoy. Not to say any thing of the pretensions of the house of Lorrein, descending from the Lady Clande, the second Daughter of King Henry the second, and Sister of Isabel or Elizabeth Queen of Spain. Nor do we find that the French so stand upon this Law, as not to think that a Succession by and from the Females, is in some cases their best Title. For thus we read, That Pepin having thrust his Master Childerick into a Monastery, to make good his Title to the Crown (or some colour for it) derived his Pedigree from Plythylda, one of the Daughters of Clotaire the first, married to Anspert the Grandfather of that Arnulphus, who was the first Mayer of the Palace of Pippins Family. As also how Hugh Capet, putting aside Charles of Lorrein the right Heir of this Pepin, to make his Lawless Action the more seemingly Lawful, drew his descent from some of the heirs General of Charles the Great; his Mother Adeltheid, being the Daughter of the Emperor Henry the first, surnamed the Fowler; who was the Son of Otho Duke of Saxony by Luitgardu the Daughter of the Emperor Arnulph, the last Emperor of the Romans (or Germane) of the house of Charles. And it is said of Lewis the ninth, so renowned for Sanctity amongst them, that he never enjoyed the Crown with a quiet Conscience, till it was proved unto him that by his Grandmother, the Lady Isabel of Hainall, he was descended from Hermingrade the Daughter of Charles of Lorrein. Add here, that this supposed Salic Law not only crosseth the received Laws of all Nations else, which admit of Women to the succession in their Kingdoms, where the Crown descends in a Succession; and have a great respect both unto their persons and posterities in such Kingdoms also, where the Kings are said to be Elective, as in Poland, Hungaria, and Bohemia; but that even France itself hath submitted to the imperious command of two Women of the Medici's, and at the present to the Government of a Spanish Princess. So that it is evident, that this Law, by whomsoever made, and how far soever it extended, is of no such force, but that the Labels of it may be easily cut in pecces by an English sword well whetted; if there were no other bar to the title of England, than the authority and antiquity of the Salic Law.  
But for my part (if it be lawful for me to dispute this point) I am not satisfied in the right of the English title; supposing the Salic Law to be of no such force as the French pretended, and measuring the succession in the Crown of France, to be according to successions in the Realm of England, on which King Edward the third seemed to ground his claim. For if there were no Salic Law to exclude succession by the Females, as the English did pretend there was not: yet could not Edward coming from a Sister of the 3 last Kings, which reigned successively before Philip of Valois, against whom he claimed, be served in course, before the Daughters of those Kings (or the Males at least descending of them) had had their turns in the succession of that Kingdom. Of the three Brethren, two left issue, viz. Lewis and Philip. Lewis surnamed Hutin Son of Philip the fair, and Joan Queen of Navarre, had a Daughter named Joan, married to Philip Earl of Eureux, who was King of Navarre in right of his Wife; from which marriage issued all the succeeding Kings of that Realm, the rights whereof are now in the house of Bourbon. Philip, the second Brother, surnamed the Long, by joan the Daughter of Othelin Earl of Burgundy, had a Daughter named Marguerite, married to Lewis Earl of Flanders, from whom descended those great Princes of the race of Burgundi●, the rights whereof are now in the house of Spain. If then there were no Salic Law to exclude the Women and their Sons, Charles King of Navarre the Son of Queen Joan and of Philip de Eureux, descended from Lewis Hutin the Elder Brother: and Lewis de Malaine Earl of Flanders and Burgundy, the Son of Lewis Earl of Flanders, and of Marguerite the Daughter of Philip the Long the Second Brother; must have precedency of title before King Edward the third of England, descended from a Sister of the said two Kings; their issue, severally and respectively, before any claiming or descending from the said King Edward. So that K. Edward the third had some other claim than what is commonly alleged for him in our English Histories; or else he had no claim to that Crown at all: and I conceive so wise a King, would not have ventured on a business of so great consequence, without some colourable Title; though what this title was is not declared for aught I know, by any Writers of our Nation. I believe therefore that he went upon some other grounds, than that of ordinary succession by the Law of England, and claimed that Crown, as the Eldest heir-male and nearest Kinsman to the last King. For being Sister's son to the King deceased, he was a degree nearer to him than either the King of Navarre, or the Earl of Flanders, who were the grandchildren of his Brethren: and having priority of either in respect of age, had a fair Title before either, to the Crown of that Kingdom. And on these grounds King Edward might the rather go, because he found it a ruled Case in the dispute about the succession in the Kingdom of Scotland. For though King Edward the first measuring the order of succession by the Laws of England, and perhaps willing to adjudge the Crown to one who should hold it of him, gave sentence in behalf of john Raliol, the Grandchild of the Eldest Daughter of the Earl of Huntingdon: yet was this Sentence disavowed, and protested against by the other Competitors. Robert Bruce Son of the Second Daughter of the said Earl of Huntingdon, as a degree nearer to the last King, though descended from the Younger Sister, not only though himself wronged in it, but had the whole Scotish Nation for him to assert his right: by whose unanimous consent his Son was called to the Government of the Realm of Scotland, during the life of Balliol and his Patron both. Proximity in blood to the King deceased, was measured by nearness of degrees, not descent of Birth; and on this Plea, though different from the Laws of England, as Bruce had formerly possessed himself of the Crown of Scotland; so on the same, though different from the Laws of Castille, did Philip the second ground his claim to the Crown of Portugal. For being Eldest Son of Mary, the Sister of Henry the last King (and this was just King Edward's Case to the Crown of France) he thought himself to be preferred before the Prince of Parma, and the Duke of Bragance descended from the Daughters of Edward the said King's Brother; because the Eldest Male of the Royal blood, and nearer to the said King Henry by one degree. In the pursuance of which title, as Philip onenly avowed, that the Laws of Portugal were more favourable to him than the Laws of Castille: so in like case, the Laws of France might be more favourable to King Edward than the Laws of England. In claims to Crowns, the Rules if Regal Succession differ in many Countries; and in few Countries are the same with that of the Succession into mean Estates: as may be proved by many particulars in the Realm of England, in which the Law of the Crown differeth very much from the Law of the Land, as in the Case of Parceners, the whole blood (as our Lawyers call it) the Tenure by courtesy and some others; were this a time and place fit for it. But to return again to France; whether the Salic Law were in force or not, it made not much unto the prejudice of King Edward the third; though it served Philip the Long to exclude the Daughter of King Lewis Hutin; and Charles the fair to do the Like with the Daughter of Philip; as it did Philip of Valois, to dispossess the whole Lineage of King Philip Le Belgiosa  
Machiavelli accounteth this Salic Law to be a great happiness to the French Nation, not so much in relation to the unfitness of Women to Govern (for therein some of them have gone beyond most men) but because thereby the Crown of France is not endangered to fall into the hands of strangers. Such men consider not how great Dominions may by this means be incorporate to the Crown. They remember not how Maud the Empress being married to Geofrie Earl of Anjou, Tourain, and Mayenne, conveyed those Countries to the Diadem of England; nor what rich and fertile Provinces were added to Spain, by the match of the Lady joan, to Archduke Philip: Neither do they see those great advantages of power and strength, which England now enjoyeth by the conjunction of Scotland, proceeding from a like marriage. Yet there is a saying in Spain, that as a man should desire to live in Italy, because of the civility and ingenious natures of the People; and to die in Spain, because there the Catholic Religion is so sincerely professed: so he should wish to be born in France, because of the Nobleness of that Nation, which never had any King but of their own Country.  
The chief enemies to the French have been the English, and Spaniards. The former had here great possessions, divers times plagued them, and took from them their Kingdom; but being called home by civil dissensions, lost all. At their departure, the French scoffingly asked an English Captain, When they would return? Who feelingly answered, When your sins be greater than ours. The Spaniards began but of late with them, yet have they taken from them Navarre, Naples, and Milan: they displanted them in Florida; poisoned the Dolphin of Viennois (as it was generally conceived;) murdered their Soldiers in cold blood, being taken Prisoners in the Isles of Tercera, and by their Faction, raised even in France itself, drove Henry the third out of Paris, and most of his other Cities, and at last caused him to be murdered by laque Clement a Dominican Friar. The like they intended to his Successor King Henry the fourth, whose coming to the Crown they opposed to their utmost power, and held a tedious War against him. Concerning which last War, when they sided with the Duke of Mayenne, and the rest of those Rebels, which called themselves the Holy League (of which the Duke of Guise was the Author) against the two Kings Henry the third and fourth, a French Gentleman made this excellent allusion. For being asked the cause of these civil broils, he replied they were Spania and Mania, seeming by this answer to signify 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, penury, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, fury, which are indeed the causes of all intestine tumults: but covertly therein implying the King of Spain, and the Duke of Mayenae. In former times, as we read in Cominaeus, there were no Nations more friendly than these two, the Kings of Castille and France being the nearest confederated Princes in Christendom. For their league was between King and King, Realm and Realm, Subject and subject; which they were all bound under great curses to keep inviolable. But of late times, especially since the beginning of the wars between Charles the fifth, and Francis the first, for the Dukedom of Milan, there have not been greater animosities, nor more implacable enmities betwixt any Nations, than betwixt France and Stain; which seconded by the mutual jealousies they have of each other, and the diversity of Constellations under which they live, hath produced such dissimilitude betwixt them in all their ways, that there is not greater contrariety of temper, carriage and affections, betwixt any two Nations in the world, than is between these Neighbours, parted no otherwise from one another than by passable Hills. First in the Actions of the Soul; the one Active and Mercurial, the other Speculative and Saturaine; the one sociable and discursive, the other reserved and full of thought; the one so open, that you cannot hire him to keep a secret, the other so close, that all the Rhetoric in the world cannot get it out of him. Next in their Fashion and Apparel, the French wears his hair long, the Spaniard short; the French goes thin and open to the very shirt, as if there were continual Summer, the Spaniard so wrapped up and close, as if all were Winter; the French begins to button downward, and the Spaniard upwards; the last always constant to his Fashion, the first intent so much on nothing as on new Fancies of Apparel. Then for their Gate, the French walk fast, as if pursued on an Arrest, the Spaniard slowly, as if newly come out of a Quartane Ague; the French go up and dowu in clusters, the Spaniards but by two and two at the most; the French Lackeys march in the Rear, and the 〈◊〉 always in the Van; the French sings and danceth as he walks the streets, the Spaniards in a grave and solemn posture, as if he were going a Procession. The like might be observed of their tune, their speech, and almost every passage in the life of Man: For which I rather choose to refer the Reader to the ingenious James Howels book of Instructious for Travel, than insist longer on it here. Only I add, that of the two so different humours, that of the Spaniard seems to be the more approvable. Insomuch as the Neapolitans, Milanese, and Sicilians, who have had trial of both Nations, choose rather to submit themselves to the proud and severe yoke of the Spaniards, than the lusts and insolences of the French, not sufferable by men of even and wel-balanced spirits. And possible enough it is, that such of the Netherlands as have of late been won to the Crown of France, will find so little comfort in the change of their Masters, as may confirm the residue to the Crown of S●ain, to which they naturally belong.  
The chief Mountains of this Country, next to the Pyrenees which part France from Spain; the Jour or Jura which separates it from Savoy and Switzerland; and the Vauge or Vogesus which divides it from Lorrein; are those which Caesar calleth Gebenna, Ptolemy Cimmeni; being the same which separate Auvergae from Langucdoc, called therefore the Mountains of Auvergn; the only ones of note which are peculiar to this Continent of France, which for the most part is plain and champain the others before mentioned being common unto this with the bordering Provinces.  
This Country is wonderfully stored with rivers, the chief whereof, 1 Sequana or Seine, which arising in Burgundy, watering the Cities of Paris and Roan, and receiving into it nine navigable streams, disburdeneth itself into the British Ocean. 2 Some, upon which standeth Amiens. It hath its head about S. Quintin's, divideth Picardy from Artoys, and having received eight lesser streams, loseth itself into the same Sea. 3 Ligeris, or Loire, on which are seated Nantes and Orleans. It riseth about the mountains of Auvergne, (being the greatest in France:) and having run 600 miles, and augmented his channel with the entertainment of 72 lesser rivulets, mingleth his sweet waters with the brackish Aquitane Ocean. 4. Rh danus, or the Rhosne, which springing from the Alps, three Dutch miles from the head of the Rhine, passeth by Lions and Avignon; and having taken in thirteen lesser Brooks, falleth into the Mediterranean Sea, not far from Arles. 5 The S●asne, by the old Latins called Araxis, which rising out of the Mountain Vogesus or Vauge, in the borders of Lorrein and Alsatia, divideth the two Burgundy's from each other; and falleth into the Rhosne at the City of ●ions. 6 Garumna, or the Garond, which issuing out of the Pyrenean Mountains, passing by Tholouse and Bordeaux, and having swallowed up sixteen lesser Rivers (of which the Dordonne is the chief) disburdeneth itself into the Aquitane Ocean, near the Town of Blay: that part hereof which is betwixt the main Ocean and the influx of the river Dordonne, being called the Garonne. Of these it is said Proverbially, that the Seine is the richest, the Rhosne the swiftest, the Garond the greatest, and the Loire the sweetest. And by these and many other Rivers this Kingdom is enriched with 34 excellent Havens, having all the Properties of a good Harbour, that is to say, 1 Room, 2 Safety, 3 Easiness of Defence, 4 Resort of Merchants.  
As for so much of the story hereof as concerneth the whole, it was first peopled, if we may give credit to Annins, (as I think we may not in this point) by Samothes the sixth Son of japhet (affirmed by them, and such as adhere unto them, to be that Son of his, who in the Scripture is called Mesech) in the year of the world, 1806. But those which are better conversant in the course of History, have utterly laid aside this devise of Anniu●. Even Functius, though a great Berosian, doth confess ingenuously, Quis hic Samothes fuerit incertum est, that it is unresolved who this Samothes was. And Vigni●r a French Antiquary doth confess with Functius, Mais un ne scayt qui il estoit, that no body can tell us who he was. They who have better studied this point than Annius, derive the Gauls from Gomer, I wheat Elder Son, whose offspring were first called Gemerians, afterwards Cimmerians, at last C●mbri; first planted (as before was said) in the Mountainous places of Albania, where the Mountains called Cimmerini long preserved his memory, and after changing that unfruitful and unpleasant dwelling for the plains of Phrygia, wherein the City Cimmeris did retain somewhat of his name in the times of Pliny. Afterwards his posterity proceeded further in the lesser Asia, and in long tract of time filled Germany, and Gaul, and Britain with his numerous issues: the Gauls and imbri being clearly of the same Original, though known amongst the Romans by two different names. From whence they had the names of Gauls, and Celtes, and Galatiae, hath been shown before. It shall suffice us now to add, that being originally of the 〈◊〉, and having somewhat in them of the blood of Hercules, they proved a very valiant and warlike Nation, without whose love no King could secure himself from imminent dangers. They were very sparing in their diet, and used to fine any one that outgrew his girdle. With these men the Somans at the first fought, rather for their own preservation, than in any hope by a conquest of them, to enlarge their dominions. For these were they, who under the conduct of Belloresus, passing over the Alps, conquered the nearest parts of Italy, called afterwards Gallia Cis-alpina; and under that of Segovesus, overrun all Germa●ie; and following their successes as far as Scy●nia, founded the potent Nation of the Celto-Scythia. These were the men, whose issue under the command of Brennus, discomfited the Romans, at the river Allia; sacked the City, and besieged the Capitol. Ann. M. 3577. V. C. 365. In which action they so terrified the Romans, that after their expulsion from Rome by Camillus, there was a law made, that the priest's, though at all other times exempted, from military employments should be compelled to the War, if ever the Gauls came again. And Finally these were the men, who under the command of Belgius and another Brennus, ransacked Illyricum, Pannonia, Thrace, and Greece, in which they spoiled and ransacked the Temple of Delph●s, for which sacrilege they were visited with the Pestilence. Such as survived this plague, went into Asia, and there gave name to that Country now called Galatia; of whom thus Du Bartas: 
The ancient Gaul in roving every way  
As far as Phoebus darts his golden ray;  
Seized Italy; the world's proud Mistress sacked,  
Which rather Mars than Romulus compact.  
Then spoils Pisidia, Mysia doth enthral;  
And midst of Asia plants another Gaul.   
Yet at the last the Romans undertook the War, but not till they had conquered almost all the residue of the (then known) World. And though the War was managed then by the ablest Captain that ever the State of Rome gave life to; yet was it not more easily vanquished, by the valour and fortune of the Romans, than by want of good intelligence and correspondence among themselves. Nor did they fell their liberty so good cheap, as those other Nations, with whom the Romans had to deal; Caesar himself affirming, that he had slain 1192000 of them, before they would submit to the Roman yoke. But at the last they were brought under the power of Rome, by whom the whole Country was divided into these four parts, v●z. 1. Narbonensis called so from the City of Narbon, than a Roman Colony, containing La●guedoc, Provence, Dauphin, and some part of Savoy; and it was also called Comata, from the long hair of the people, subdued by Fabius Maximus, and Cn. Domitius Aenobarbus, in their War against the Allobroges and their confederates before mentioned, about 70 years before the coming of julius Caesar. 2. Aquitanica, so called, from the City of Aquae Augustae (now D' Acqsin Guienne) lying upon the Pyrences, and the wide Ocean; which comprehended the Provinces of Gascoyn, Guienne, Xaintoig●e, Limosin, Quercu, Perigort, Berry, Bourbonoys, and Auvergne; extending from the Pyrenees, to the River of Loire, and consequently stretching over all the middle of Gaul. 3. Celtica, so named from the valiant Nation of the Celtaes, called also Lugdunensis, from the City of Lions, and Braccat, from the Tronzes worn amongst this people: extending from the Loire to the Bruish Ocean, and comprehending the Provinces of Bretagne, Normandy, Anjou, Tourain, Main, La Beausse, the Isle of France, part of Champagne, the Dukedom of Burgundy, and the County of Lyonnoys. 4. Belgica, from the Belg●, a potent Nation of that tract, taking up all the East parts of Gaul, viz. Picardy, the rest of Champagne, the County of Burgundy, together with so much of Germany and the Netherlands, as lieth on this side of the Rhine, belonging now unto the Empire and the Kings of Spain. In the new modelling of the Empire by Constantine the great, Gaul was appointed for the seat of one of the four Praefecti Praetorio, appointed for the four quarters of it. His title Praefectus Praetorio Galliarum; his Government extending over the Dioceses of Gaul, Spain and Britain: this Diocese of Gaul being cast into seventeen Provinces, that is to say, Lugdunensis Prima, 2 Secunda, 3 Tertia, 4 Quarta, 5 Belg●ca Prima, 6 Secunda, 7 Germania Prima, 8 ecunda, 9 Narbonensis Prima, 10 Secunda, 11 Aquitania Prima, 12 Secunda, 13 Novempopulonia, 14 Viennensis, 15 Maxima Sequanorum, 16 Alps Graiae & Poeninae, 17 Alps Maritimae. Of these seventeen Germania Prima & Secunda, all Belgica Prima, and a great part of Secunda, all that of the Alps Graiae & Poeninae, and so much of Maxima Sequanorum, as lieth in Switzerland, are now dismembered from the name and account of France. What principal Nations of the Gaul●, and what Provinces of the present France, the rest contained, shall be declared in our Survey of the particulars.  
But long it stood not in this state. For within sixty years after the death of Constantine, during the reigns of Honorius and Theodosius, the Bu●gu●●ians, a great and populous Nation, were called in by S●ilico Lieutenant to Honorius the Western Emperor, to keep the borders of the Empire against the French, then ready with some other of the barbarous Nations to invade the same. The Goths not long after by agreement with the same Honorius, leaving their hold in Italy, were vested in Gaul Narbonoys, by the gift of that Emperor, with a good part of Tarraconensis▪ one of the Provinces of Spain: Aquitain being after added in regard of some services they had done the Empire. And in the reign of Valentinian the third, the French who had long hovered on the banks of the Rhine, taking advantage of the distractions of the Empire, ventured over the River; first made themselves Masters of Gaul-Belgick; and after spread themselves over all the rest of the Provinces which had not been subdued by the Goths and Burgundians: excepting a small corner of Armorica then possessed by the Britons. So that the Romans being outed of all the Country, it was divided (though not equally) betwixt the Nation's abovementioned: 
The Isle of France.  the Britons holding their own, now Bretagne; the Goths possessing Aquitain, and Gaul-Narbonoys; the Burgundians all the Alpine Provinces, with those of Dauphin, Bresse, Lionoys, and both the Burgundy's, from them so denominated. The rest was planted by the French, who in short time dispossessed the Goths (then busy in the conquest of Spain) of all their hold in Gaul, except Languedoc only, by the valour of Clovis the great, the fifth King of the Frenchmen, before they could challenge a proscription of 60 years. In which regard, and in respect that we have spoke already of them in another place, and shall say more of them hereafter, the Gothish Provinces in Gaul, shall pass in the Account of the French part of this Country; and the Purgundians by themselves, when we come to that Kingdom, subverted finally by the conquering and prevailing French: Of whom, and the succession of their Kings, we will speak hereafter, when we have brought all the chief parts and Provinces of this flourishing Country into their possession. The principal Provinces are 1 France▪ properly so called, 2 Champagne, 3 Picardy, 4 Normandy, 5 Bretagne, 6 The Dukedom of Anjou, with its members, 7 La Beausse, 8 Berry, 9 The Dukedom of bourbon, with the Provinces dependant on it, being all (excepting Bretagne) the first acquests of the French. Then follow the chief Provinces of the Gothish Kingdom, that is to say, 10 Poictou, 11 Limosin, Perigort, and Quercu, 12 Aquitain, with the members of it, 13 Linguedoc, 14 Provence: and last of all the Burgundian Kingdom, of which there now remain in France, the Counties of 15 Dauphin, 16 La Bresse, 17 Lionnois, 18 the Duchy, and 19 the County of Burgundy, 20 The Lands in the Aquitain and gallic Ocean, in the close of all. Of some of which La Nove a French Author hath passed this censure; The men of Berry are Lechers, they of Leurein Thiefs, they of Languedoc Traitors, they of Provence Atheists, they of Rheims (or Champagne) superstitious, they of Normandy insolent, they of Picardy proud, & sic de 〈◊〉. But here we are to understand, that all these Provinces (though passing by the Name and Account of France) are not under the command of the French King; the Isles of Larsey and Guernzey being possessed by the English; the Counties of Burgundy, and Charolois by the King of Spain; the Duchy of Bar, belonging to the Dukes of Lorrein; the Principality of Orange to the house of Nass●w, and Avignon to the Popes of Rome. And on the other side, the French Kings are possessed of some Towns and Cities, not lying within the bounds of France, as the Imperial Cities of Mats, Toul, and Ver●u●; and the Port of Monaco in Liguria; Base Navarre in Spain: not to say any thing of their late acquests in Spain and Flanders, which I look not on as parts of the French Dominions.  

1 FRANCE, Properly so called.  
THe first place which the Franks or French had for their fixed habitation, was by that people honoured with the name of FRANCE; the first green turf of gallic ground, by which they took liv●ry and s●isin of all the rest A Province now bounded on the East with Champagne, on the North with N●rmanaie, on the West and South with La Beausse. To difference it from the main Continent of France, it is called the Isl● of France; as being circled almost round with several Rivers, that is to say the Oise on the North, the Ewer on the West, the Velle on the East, and a vein-Riveret of the Seine towards the South. A Country not so large as many of the French Provinces, but such as hath given name unto all the rest, it being the fate of many small, but puissant Provinces, to give their name to others which are greater than they, if conquered and brought under by them. For thus we see the little Province of Poland to have mastered and given name to the Mazovijs, Prut●ni, and other Nations of Sarmatit Euro●ae●, as that of Moscow to the Provinces of Asiatica. And thus have those of Sweden conquered and denominated almost all the great Peninsula of Scandia, whereof it is one of the smallest Provinces. And thus this Island, being the seat Royal of the French in Gall●a, gave name to all the residue of it, as they made it theirs. A Country generally so fruitful and delectable, (except in Gastinois) that the very hills thereof are equal to the valleys in most places of Europe; but the Vale of Mon●mor●ncie (wherein Paris standeth) scarce to be followed in the Word. An Argument whereof may be, that when the Dukes of Berry, Burgundy, and their Confederates, besieged that City with an Army of 100000 men; neither the Assailants without, nor the Citizens within, found any scarcity of victuals; and yet the Citizens, besides Soldiers, were reckoned at ●●0000.  
It was formerly part of the Province of Belgica secunda, and Lugdunensis quarta, the chief Inhabitants thereof being the 〈◊〉, the Bellovaci, and the Silvanectes: and is now divided into four parts, that is to say, the Dukedom of Valois, 2 Gastinois, 3 Heurepoix, and that which is properly called the Is●e of France, by some the Prevoste, or County of Paris.  
1 The Dukedom or County of VALOIS, 
VALOIS.  lieth towards Picardy, the principal Cities of it called Senlis, (in Latin Silvanectum) a Bishops See, 2 Compeigne (Compendium) seated on the River Oise, a retting pl●ce of the French Kings, for hunting, and other Country pleasures. 3 Beauvois, the chief City of the B●ll●vaci, by ` Ptolomic called Caesaromagus, a fair, large, well-traded Town, and a See Episcopal; the Bishop whereof is one of the twelve Peers of France. Philip one of the Bishops here in times foregoing, a military man, and one that had much damnified the English Borders, was fortunately taken by King Richard the first; The Pope being made acquainted with his Imprisonment, but not the cause of it, wrote in his behalf unto the King, as for an Ecclesiastical person, and one of his beloved Sons; The King returned unto the Pope the Armour which the Bishop was taken in, and these words engraven on the same, Vide an haec sit tunica filii tui, vel non, being the words which jacob's children spoke unto him when they presented him with the Coat of their brother Joseph; Which the Pope viewing, swore, That it was rather the Coat of a Son of Mars, than a Son of the Church, and so left him wholly to the King's pleasure. 4 Clermont, a Town of good note in the County Beauvoisia, memorable for giving the title of Earl of Clermont to R●bert the fifth Son of the King St. Lewis, before his marriage with the Daughter and Heir of Bourbon; and afterwards to the Eldest Sons of that Princely Family. 5 Luzarch, a Town belonging to the Count of Soissons. 6 Brenonville. 7. St. Loup, on the Confines of Pirardie, so called from a Monastery dedicated to S. Luviu, Bishop of Troy's in Champagne, sent into Britain with Germanus to suppress the Pelagian Heresies, which then were beginning. But of this part of France nothing more observable, than that it gave denomination to the Royal Family of the French Kings (13 in number) from hence entitled the Valois: beginning in Philip de Valois, Anno 1328. and ending in Henry the third, Anno 1589. As for the Earls hereof (from whom that Adjunct or denomination had its first Original) the first who had the title of Earl of Valois, was Charles, the second Son of Philip the third, in right of his Wife Earl of Anjou also; After whose death it descended upon Philip de Valois his Eldest Son, who carried the Crown of France from our Edward the third: On whose assuming of the Crown, it fell to Lewis his second Brother; and he deceasing without issue, Anno 1391. to Lewis Duke of Orleans Son of Charles the fifth; amongst the titles of which house it lay dormant, till the expiring of that Line in King Lewis the twelfth, and lately given unto a Son of the now Duke of Orleans, Uncle to King Lewis the fourteenth, at this present reigning. I only add, that Charles the first Earl of this Family, as he was the Son of Philip the third, Brother of Philip the fourth, surnamed the Fair; and Father of Philip de Valois: So was he Uncle to Lewis Hutin, Philip the Long, and Charles the Fair, all in their order Kings of France. In which regard it was said of him, that he was Son, Brother, Father, and Uncle of Kings, yet no King himself.  
2 The second part of this Province is called HEUREPOIX, 
HEUREPOIX.  beginning at the little bridge of Paris on the River of Sein, and going up along the River, as far as the River of Verine, which divides it from Gastinois. The chief Towns of it are 1. Charenton, three miles from Paris, where the French Protestants of that City have their Church for Religious exercises; it being not permitted them to hold their Assemblies in any walled Cities or Garrison Towns, for fear of any sudden surprise, which so great a multitude might easily make. Which Church (or Temple as they call it) being burnt down by the hotheaded Parisians, on the news of the Duke of Mayennes death, slain at the siege of Montalban Anno 1622. was presently re-edified by the Command of the Duke of Mom-bazon, than Governor of the Isle of France, at the charge of the State: to let those of the Reformed party understand, that it was their disobedience, and not their Religion which caused the King to arm against them. 2 Corbeil, seated on the Confluence of Sein, and Essons, 3. Moret, which gives the Title of an Earl to one of the natural Sons of Henry the fourth, begotten on the Daughter and Heir of the former Earl. 4. Melun, by Caesar called Melodunum, the principal of this Heurepoix, and the seat of the Baylif for this Tract. Here is also in this part the Royal Palace of Fountain-bel-eau, so called from the many fair Springs and Fountains amongst which it standeth; but otherwise seated in a solitary and woody Country, fit for hunting only, and for that cause much visited by the French Kings in their times of leisure; and beautified with so much cost by King Henry the fourth, that it is absolutely the stateliest and most magnificent pile of building in all France.  
3 GASTINOYS, 
GASTINOYS.  the most dry and barren part of this Province, but rich enough if compared with other places; lieth between Paris and the Country of Orleanoys The chief places of it are, 1. Estampes, in the middle way betwixt Paris and Orleans, on the very edge of it towards La Beausse, a fair large Town, having in it five Churches, and one of them a College of Chanoins, with the ruins of an ancient Castle: which together with the Walls and demolished Fortifications of it, show it to have been of great importance in the former times: Given with the title of an Earl by Charles Duke of Orleans, than Lord hereof, to Richard, the third Son of john of Montfort, Duke of Bretagne, in marriage with his Sister the Lady Margusrite; from which marriage issued Francis Earl of Estampes, the last Duke of Bretagne. 2. Montleherry, Famous for the battle betwixt King Lewis the eleventh and Charles Earl of Charolots (after Duke of Burgundy) in which both sides ran out of the field, and each proclaimed itself the Victor. It standeth in the road betwixt Paris and Estamp●s. And so doth 3 Castres', of the bigness of an ordinary Market Town, not to be mentioned in this place, but for a Chamber or Branch of the Court of Parliament▪ here settled by King Henry the 4th for the use and benefit of his Subjects of the Reformed Religion; in Latin called Camera-Castrensis. 4. Nemours upon the River of Loing, the chief of Gastionies in name, but not in beauty (wherein inferior to Pstampes) a Town which hath given the title of Duke to many eminent persons of France. Here is also in this part the County of Rochfort, and the Towns of Milly, 2 Montargiss, etc. More there occurreth not worth the noting, in this part of the Country, but that being part of the possessions of Hugh the Great Constable of France, and Earl of Paris, it was given by him, together with the Earidome of Anjou, to Geofric surnamed Chrysogonelle, a right Noble Warrior, and a great stickler in behalf of the house of A●jou, then aiming at the Crown itself, which at last they carried: Continued in his line till the time of Fulk the second (the fifth Earl of Anjou of this Family) who gave it back again to King Philip the first, that by his help he might possess himself of the Earldom of Anjou, from his part wherein he was excluded by his Elder Brother. Never since that dismembered from the Crown of France in Fact or Title.  
4 But the great glory of this Province, is, that which is more properly called the ISLE OF FRANCE, and sometimes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the Isle, caused by the Circlings and embracements of the Rivers of Sein and Marn, the abstract of the whole beauties, and glories of France, which in this rich and pleasant valley are summed up together. Chief places in it, St. Germane, seated on the ascent of an hill, seven miles from Paris down the water, a pretty neat and handsome Town: honoured with one of the fairest Palaces of the French Kings; which being built (like Windsor) on the top of a fine mountainet on the River's side, affordeth an excellent prospect over all the Country. The excellent water-works herein have been described on occasion of those of Tivoli, so much extolled by the Italians. It was first built by Charles the fifth, surnamed the Wise; beautified by the English when they were possessed of this Country; but finally re-edified and enlarged by King Henry the fourth, who brought it into that magnificence in which now we see it. It took name from S. Germane Bishop of Auxerre, companion with S. Lupus before mentioned, in the British journey against Pel●gi●s. 2. Po●ssie upon the same River, not far from S. Germans, a Bayliwick belonging to the Provost of Paris, and one of his seven daughters, as they use to call them. 3. Chantilly, the chief seat of the Dukes of Moutmorencie, the ancientest and most noble family of Christendom: whose Ancestors were the first fruits of the Gospel in this part of Gaul, and used to style themselves Les primiers Christ●ens et plus Veilles Barons de la France, i. e. The first Christians and most ancient Barons of France. A Family that hath yielded unto France more Admirals, Constables, Marshals, and other like Officers of power, than any three in all the Kingdom: now most unhappily extinct in the person of Henry the last Duke, executed by the command of the late Cardinal of Richelieu, for sicing with the Mounseiur (now Duke of Orleans) against King Lewis the thirteenth, his Brother. The Arms of which illustrious and most noble Family (for I cannot let it pass without this honour) were Or, a Cross Gules, cantonned with sixteen Allerions Azure, four in every Canton. What these Allerion● are we shall see in Lorrein; take we notice now, that from the great possessions which this noble Family had in all this tract, it was, and is still called the Vale of Montmorencie. 4. S. Denis, some three miles from Paris, so called of a Monastery built here by Dagobert King of France, about the year 640. in memory of S. Denis or Dionyse, the first Bishop of Paris, martyred (on Mont-martyr an hill adjoining) in the time of Domitian. Some of the French Kings, because it lay so near to Paris, bestowed a wall upon the Town, now not defensible: nor otherwise of any consideration, but for a very fair Abbey of Benedictines, and therein the Sepulchers of many of the French Kings and Princes; neither for workmanship nor cost able to hold comparison with those at Westminster. 5. St. Cloud (or the Town of St. Claudus) unfortunately memorable for the murder of King Henry the third: who lying here at the siege of Paris, from whence he was compelled to fly by the Guisian Faction, was wretchedly assassinated by Jaques Clement a Monk, employed in that service by the heads of the Holy League. 6. PARISH the chief City not of this Isle alone, but of all the Kingdom. By Caesar, and Ammianus Marcellinus called Civitas Parisiorum, from the Parisians, a Nation of Gaul-Celtick, whose chief City it was: by Strabo called Lutetia, Lucotetia by Ptolemy, quasi in Luto sita, as some conjecture, from the dirtiness of the soil in which it standeth: A Soil so dirty (as commonly all rich Countries are) that though the streets hereof are paved (which they affirm to be the work of King Philip Augustus) yet every little dash of rain makes them very slippery: and worse than so, yields an ill favour to the nose. The Proverb is, I'll destaint comme la fauge de Paris, it staineth like the dirt of Paris: but the Author of the Proverb might have changed the word, and turned it to Il peut, etc. It stinks like the dirt of Paris; no stink being more offensive than those streets in Summer. It is in compass about eight miles, of an Orbicular form, pleasantly seated on the divisions of the Sein: a fair, large, and capacious City, but far short of the brags which the French make of it. It was thought in the time of King Lewis the eleventh to contain 500000 people of all sorts and Ages; which must be the least: the same King at the entertainment of the Spanish Ambassadors, showing 14000 of this City in Arms, all in a Livery of ●ed Cassocks with white Crosses: A gallant sight, though possibly the one half of them were not fit for service. These multitudes, which since the time of that King must needs be very much increased, are the chief strength of the Town, the fortifications being weak and of ill assurance: Insomuch, that when once a Parisian bragged that their Town was never took by force; an English man returned this Answer, That it was, because on the least distress it did use to capitulate. It is seated (as before was said) on the River Sein, which serveth it with Boats and Barges (as the Thames Westward doth London) the River ebbing and flowing no nigher than Pont del' Arch 75 miles distant from the City.  
We may divide it into four parts, the Town, the City, the University, and the Suburbs. La Ville, or that part of it which is called The Town, is situate on the North side of the River, the biggest, but poorest part of the four, inhabited by Artisans and Tradesmen of the meaner sort. In this part are the Hostell de Ville, or the Guild-hall for the use of the Citizens; the Arserall or Armoury for the use of the King, and that magnificent building called the Place Royal, new built and beautified at the charges of King Henry the fourth for Tilts and Turraments, and such solemnities of State. And in this also, near the banks of the River, stands the King's Palace of the Bovure, a place of more fame than beauty, and nothing answerable to the report which goes commonly of it. A building of no elegance or uniformity, nor otherwise remarkable but for the vast Gallery begun by King Henry the fourth, and the fine Gardens of the Tuilleries adjoining to it. The City is that part of it which takes up the circumference of a little Island, 
Champagne  made by the embracements of the Seine; joined to the other parts on both sides, by several Bridges. The Paris or Lutetia of the old Gauls was no more than this: the Town on the one side, and the University on the other, being added since. This is the richest part, and best built of the whole Compositum. And herein stand the Palace, or Courts of Parliament; the Chapel of the Holy Ghost, and the Church of Notre dame, being the Cathedral, of ancient times a Bishops See, but of late raised unto the dignity of a Metropolitan. On the South side of the River lieth that part which is called the University, from an University here sounded by Charles the Great, Anno 792. at the persuasion of Alcuinus an Englishman, the Scholar of Venerable Bede, and the first Professor of Divinity here. It consisteth of 52 Colleges or places for study, whereof 40. are of little use; and in the rest the Students live at their own charges, as in the Halls at Oxon, or Inns of Court or Chancery at London; there being no endowment laid unto any of them, except the Sorbonne, and the College of Navarre. Which possibly may be the reason why the Scholars here are generally so debauched and insolent: a ruder rabble than the which are hardly to be found in the Christian World. Sensible of this mischief, and the cause thereof, Francis the first, whom the French call the Father of the Muses, at the persuasion of Reuchline and Budaeus, those great restorers of the Greek and Hebrew Languages, intended to have built a College for 600 Students, and therein to have placed Professors for all Arts and Sciences, endowing it with 50000 Crowns of yearly Revenue, for their constant maintenance. But it went no further than the purpose; prevented by the inevitable stroke of death from pursuance of it. In bigness this is little inferior to the Town or Ville, and not superior to it for wealth or beauty; few men of any wealth and credit affecting to inhabit in a place of so little Government. The 4th and last part is the Suburbs, (or the Fauxbourgs as the French call them) the principal whereof is that of S. Germane (so called from an ancient Abbey of that name:) the best part of the whole body of Paris, for large Streets, sweet Air, choice of the best Company, magnificent Houses, pleasant Gardens, and finally all those contentments which are wanting commonly in the throngs of most populous Cities.  
Here are also in this Isle the Royal house of Madrit, a retiring place of the Kings, built by King Francis the first at his return from his imprisonment in Spain. 2 Ruall, a sweet Country house of the late Queen Mothers: and 3 Boys de Vincennes, remarkable for the untimely death of our Henry the fifth. I add this only and so end, That this Isle hath always followed the fortune of the Crown of France; never dismembered from the Sovereignty of the same, though sometimes out of the possession of the French Kings; as when the English kept it against Charles the 7th, and the Leagners against Henry the 4th. A thing which hardly can be said of any other of the Provinces of this flourishing Country: the French Kings of the race of Merovee and Charles the great, alienating from the Crown many goodly Territories, contented only with a bare and titulary Homage from them. By means whereof more than three parts of the whole Kingdom was shared first amongst the great Princes of the French: which afterwards by intermariages and other Titles fell into the hands of strangers, most of them enemies of this Crown, and jealous of the Grandour and power thereof. Which kept the French Kings generally very low and poor, till by Arms, Confiscations, Marriages, and such other means, they reduced all these Riverets to their first and original Channel; as shall be shown in the pursuance of this work.   

CHAMPAGNE.  
CHAMPAGNE is bounded on the North with Picardy; on the South with the Dukedom of Burgundy, and some part of the County; on the East with Lorrein; on the West with France specially so called.  
The Country for the most part very plain and pleasant (whence it had the name) adorned with shady Woods, and delectable Meadows, fruitful in Corn, and not deficient in Wines. The Seat in elder times of the Trieasses, Catelauni, Rhemi, the Lingones, and Senones, (of which last Tribe or Nation were those Cisalpine Gauls who sacked Rome under the conduct of Brennus:) part of them Celts, and part Belgians, and so accordingly disposed of: the Belgians into the Province of Belgica Secunda, the Metropolis whereof was Rheims; the Celts into Lugdunensis quarta, of which the Metropolis was Sens; both Cities seated in this Country. The chief Rivers of it Bloise, Marne, and Yonne  
Chief places of the whole are, 1 Chalon on the River Marne, an Episcopal See, Suffragan to the Archbishop of Rheims; called anciently Civitas Catala●norum. 2 Join Ville situate on the same River, belonging to the house of Guise: the eldest Son of which Family is called Prince of Joinville, in the Castle whereof, seated upon an high and inaccessible Hill, is to be seen the Tomb of Clande the first Duke of Guise, the richest Monument of that kind, in all France. A Barony which hath belonged to the house of Lorrein, ever since the year 1119. when Thierry the Son of William Baron of Joinville, succeeded his two Uncles Godfrey and Baldwin in that Dukedom. 3 Pierre-Fort, defended with a Cast of so great strength, that in the civil Wars of France A. 1614 it endured 1100 shot of Cannon, and yet was not taken, 4 Vassey, upon the River Bloise, a Town of as sweet a situation as most in France. These three last situate in that part of Champagne which is called Vallage: so named as I conceive, from the River Vasle. 5 Vitrey, upon the confluence of the Sault and Marne, the chief Town and Balliage of that part which is named Parthois (Ager Pertensis in the Latin, so called of 6 Perte another Town thereof, but now not so eminent. 7 Chaumont upon the Marre, the chief Town of Bassigni; and strengthened with a Castle mounted on a craggy Rock▪ 1544. 9 Rbemes (Durocortorum Rhemorum) an Arch-Bishops See, who is one of the Twelve Peers of France, situate on the River of Vasle. At this City the Kings of France are most commonly crowned, that so they may enjoy the Unction of a sacred Oil, kept in the Cathedral Church hereof, which, as they say, came down from Heaven, & never decreaseth. How true this is may be easily seen, in that Gregory of Tours, who is so prodigal of his Miracles, makes no mention of it: but specially (for Argumentum ab autoritate negatiuè parum valet) since the Legend informeth us that this holy Oil was sent from Heaven at the anointing of Clovis the first Christian King of the French. Whereas Du. Haillan, one of their most judicious Writers, affirmeth Pepin, the Father of Charles the great, to have been their first anointed King; and that there was none de la primiere lignee oinct, ny Sacre à Rheims, ny alleiurs, none of the first or Merovignian line of Kings, had been anointed at Rheims or elsewhere. But sure it is (let it be true or false no matter) that the French do wonderfully reverence this (their sacred) Oil, and fetch it with great solemnity from the Church in which it is kept. For it is brought by the Prior, sitting on a white ambling Palfrey, and attended by his whole Convent: the Archbishop hereof (who by his place is to perform the Ceremonies of the Coronation) and such Bishops as are present, going to the Church-dores, to meet it, and leaving for it with the Prior, some competent pawn: and on the other side, the King when it is brought unto the Altar, bowing himself before it with great humility. But to return unto the Town; it took this name from the Rhemi, once a potent Nation of these parts, whose chief City it was; and now an University of no small esteem: in which among other Colleges there is one appointed for the education of young English Fugitives. The first Seminary for which purpose (I note this only by the way) was erected at Douai. An. 1568 A second at Rome by Pope Gregory the 13. A third at Valladolid in Spain, by K. Phylip the second. A fourth in Louvain a Town of Brabant; and a fifth, here (so much do they affect the gaining of the English to the Romish Church) by the Dukes of Guise. 10 Ligni, upon the River Sault. All these in Belgica Secunda or the Province of Rheims.  
In that part of it which belonged to Lugdunensis quarta, the places of chief note are, 1 Sens, Civitas Senonum in Antoninus, anciently the Metropolis of that Province, by consequence the See of an Archbishop also. 2 Langres, or Civitas Lingonum, (by Ptolemy, called Audomaturum) situate in the Confines of Burgundy, not far from the Fountain or Spring-head of the Seine: the See of a Bishop who is one of the Twelve Peers of France. 3 Troy's, Civitas Tricassium, seated on the Seine, a fair, strong, and well traded-City, honoured with the title of the Daughter of Paris; a See Episcopal, and counted the chief of Champagne next Rheims. A City of great note in our French and English Histories, for the meeting of Charles the sixth, and Henry the fifth, Kings of France and England, in which it was agreed, That the said King Henry espousing Catharine Daughter of that King, should be proclaimed Heir apparent of the Kingdom of France, into which he should succeed on the said King's death, and be the Regent of the Realm for the time of his life: with divers other Articles best suiting with the will and honour of the Conqueror. 4 Provins (by Caesar called Agendicum) seated upon the Seine, in a pleasant Country, abounding in all fragrant flowers; but specially with the sweetest Roses; which being transplanted into other Countries are called Provins Roses. 5 Meaux, seated on the River Marne, anciently the chief City of the Meldi, whom Pl●nie and others of the old Writers mention in this tract: now honoured with a Bishops See, and neighboured by 6 Monceaux, beautified with a magnificent Palace built by Catharine de Medici's, Queen Mother of the three last Kings of the house of Valois. 7 Montereau, a strong Town on the confluence of the Seine and the Yonne. 8 Chastean-Thierri, (Castrum Theodorisi, as the Latins call it) situate on the River Marn. These five last situate in that part of Champagne which lieth next to France specially so called, known of long time by the name of Brie: which being the first or chief possession of the Earls of Champagne, occasioned them to be sometimes called Earls of Brie, and sometimes Earls of Brie and Champagne. Add here, 9 Auxerre, in former time a City of the Dukedom of Burgundy, but now part of Champagne, of which more hereafter. And 10 Fontenay, a small Town in Auxerrois in the very Borders of this Province, but memorable for the great Battle fought near unto it, An. 841. between the Sons & Nephews of Ludovicus Pius for their Father's Kingdoms: in which so many thousands were slain on both sides, that the forces of the French Empire were extremely weakened; and had been utterly destroyed in pursuit of this unnatural War, if the Princes of the Empire had not mediated a peace between them; alloting unto each some part of that vast estate, dismembered by that means into the Kingdoms of Italy, France, Germany, Lorrein, & Burgundy; never since brought into one hand, as they were before.  
Within the bounds of Champagne also where it looks towards Lorrein, is situate the Country and Duchy of BAR, belonging to the Dukes of Lorrein, but held by them in chief of the Kings of France. The Country commonly called BARROIS, environed with the two streams of the River Ma●n; of which the one rising in the edge of Burgundy, and the other in the Borders of Lorrein, do meet together at Chaloas a City of Champagne. Places of most importance in it. 1 Bar le Duc, so called to distinguish it from Bar, on the River Seine, and Bar, upon the River Alb●; a well fortified Town. 2 Lafoy Motte. 3 Ligni. 4 Arqu, of which nothing memorable, but that they are the chief of this little Dukedom. A Dukedom which came first to the house of Lorrein●, by the gui●t of Rene Duke of Anjou, and titulary King of Naples, Sicil, etc. who succeeded in it in the right of Yoland or Violant his Mother, Daughter of Don Pedro King of Arragon, and of Yoland or Violant the Heir of Bar: and dying gave the same, together with the Towns of Lambesque and Orgon, 
Pieardie.  to Rene Duke of Lorrein his Nephew, by the Lady Violant his Daughter: From this Seine, it was taken by Lewis the 11th. who having put a Garrison into Bar, repaired the Walls, and caused the Arms of France to be set on the Gates thereof. Restored again by Charles the 8th, at his going to the Conquest of Naples: since which time quietly enjoyed by the Dukes of Lorrein, till the year 1633. when seized on by Lewis the 13th, upon a judgement and Arrest of the Court of Parliament in Paris, in regard the present Duke had not done his Homage to the King, as he ought to have done.  
The Arms hereof are Azure, two Barbels back to back, Or; Seem of Cross Crossets Fitche, of the second.  
But to return again to Champagne, it pleased Hugh Capet at his coming to the Crown of France, to give the same to Euys or Odon, Earl of Blais, whose Daughter he had married in his private fortunes, before he had attained the Kingdom, with all the rights and privileges of a County Palatine. Which Eudes or Odon was the Son of Theobald Earl of Blais, and Nephew of that Gerlon a Noble Dine, to whom Charles the simple gave the Town and Earldom of Blais, about the year 940. and not long after the time that he conferred the Country of Neustria upon Ro●●o the Norman. In the person of Theobald the 3d, the Earls hereof became Kings of Navarre, descended on him in right of the Lady Blanch his Mother, Sister and Heir of King Sancho the 8th. Anno 1234. By the Marriage of Joan Queen of Navarre and Countess of Champagne to Philip the 4th of France, surnamed the Fair, both these Estates were added to the Crown of France: enjoyed by him and his three Sons one after another, though not without some prejudice to the Lady Joan, Daughter and Heir of Lewis Hutin. But the three Brethren being dead, and Philip of Valois succeeding in the Crown of France, he restored the Kingdom of Navarre to the said Lady Joan: and for the County of Champagne which lay too near the City of Paris to be trusted in a foreign hand, he gave unto her and her posterity, as in the way of exchange, some certain Towns and Lands in other places, though not of equal value to so rich a Patrimony.  

Count Palatines of Champagne.  
999. 1 Odo, Earl of Champagne, Brie, Blais, and Toureine, Son of Theebald the elder, Earl of Blais.  
1032. 2 Stephen, Earl of Campagne and Blais, Father of Stephen Earl of Blais, and King of England.  
1101. 3 Theobald eldest Son of Stephen.  
1151. 4 Henry, Son of Theobald, a great Adventurer in the Wars of the Holy Land.  
1181. 5 Henry II. an Associate of the Kings of France and England in the Holy Wars; King of Jerusalem in right of Isabel his Wife.  
1196. 6 Theobald II. Brother of Henry, added unto his house the hopes of the kingdom of Navarre by his Marriage with the Lady Blanch, Sister and Heir of Sancho the 8th.  
1201. 7 Theobald III. Earl of Campagn●, Son of Theobald the 2d, and the Lady Blanch, succeeded in the Realm of Navarre, Anno 1234.  
1269. 8 Theobald IU. Son of Theobald the 3d, King of Navarre, and Earl of Champagne and Brie.  
1271. 9 Henry, Son of Theobald the 4th, King of Navarre, and Earl of Champagne, etc.  
1284. 10 Philip IU. King of France, in right of joan his Wife King of Navarre, and Earl of Campagne.  
1313. 11 Lewis Hutin, Son of Philip, King of France and Navarre, and Earl of Champagne.  
1315. 12 Philip the Long, Brother of Lewis Hutin, King of France and Navarre, and Earl of Champagne.  
1320. 13 Charles the Fair, Brother of Philip King of France and Navarre, and the last Earl of Champagne, united after his decease by Philip de Valois to the Crown of France: the Earldom of March near Angolesme being given for it in exchange to the Lady joan, Daughter of King Lewis Hutin, and Queen of Navarre, married to Philip Earl of Eureux, in her right honoured with that Crown, from whom descend the Kings of France and Navarre of the House of Bourbon.   
The Arms of these Palatines of Champagne, were Azure, two Bends cotized, potencee and counterpotencee of three pieces.   

3. PICARDY.  
PICARDY hath on the East the Dukedoms of Luxembourg and Lorrein; on the West, some part of Normandy, and the English Ocean; on the North, the Counties of Artois and Hai●●●; and on the South, Champagne, and France strictly and specially so called. A Country so well stored with Corn, that it is accounted the Granary or Store house of Paris; but the few Wines which it produceth are but harsh, and of no good relish, especially in the Northern and colder parts of it.  
The ancient Inhabitants of it were the Snessiones, Ambiani, and Veromandui, considerable Nations of the Belgae; and therefore reckoned into the Province of Belgica Secunda: but why they had the name of Picards I am yet to seek. Omitting therefore the conjectures of other men, some of the which are groundless, and the rest ridiculous; I only say, as Robert Bishop of Auranches hath affirmed before me, Quos itaque aetas nostra Picardos appellat, verè Belgae di●endi su●t, qui postmodum in Picardorun nomen transmigrarunt.  
The whole Country as it lieth from Calais to the Borders of Lorrein, is divided into the Higher and the Lower: the Lower subdivided into Sainterre, Ponthein, Boulognois, and Guisnes; the Higher into the Vidamate of Amieus, Veromandois, Rethelois, and Tierasche, in every of which there are some places of importance and consideration.  
In LOWER PICARDY and the County of GVISNES, the chief Towns, 1. Calais, by Caesar called Portus Iccius (as the adjoining Promontory, Promontorium Itium, by Ptolemy) a strong Town close upon Artois, at the entrance of the English Channel: taken by Edward the 3d after the siege of 11 months, An. 1347. and lost again by Queen Mary in less than a fortnight, An. 1●57. So that had Monsieur de Cordes then lived, he had had his wish; who used to say, that he would be content to lie seven years in Hell, on condition that Calais were taken from the English. The loss of which Town was a great blow to our Estate, for till that time we had the Keys of Fr●nce at our Girdles: and as great a grief unto Q. Mary, who sickening presently upon it, said to those which attended her, that if she were opened, they should find Calais next her heart. 2. Hamme, a strong piece, one of the best Outworks of Calais. 3. Ardres, more towards the Borders of Boulognois, memorable for the interview of Henry the 8th, and Francis the first; and many meetings of the English & French Commissioners. 4 Guisaes', which gives name to this Division called the County of Guisnes, of which the Land of Oye whereon Calais stood (by the French called commonly Pais de Calais) was esteemed a part.  
2. In BOULOGNOIS, neighbouring on the County of Guisnes the places of most note, 1 Blackness, a strong Fort on the Sea side, betwixt Calais and Boulogne. 2 Chastillon, opposite to Boulogne on the other side of the water. 3 Beullenberg, more within the Land, an Out-work to Boulogne. 4 Boulogne, by Pliny called Portus Gessoriacus, part of the Country of the Morini, spoken of by Caesar, divided into the Base or Low Town lying on the shore side, well built, and much frequented by Passengers, going to, or coming out of England; and the High Town, standing on the rise of an Hill, well garrisoned for defence of the Port beneath it, and honoured with a Bishops See, translated hither from ●curney when that City was taken by the English. The Town and Country purchased of Bernard de la Tour, the true Proprietary of it, by King Lewis the 13. who as the new Lord did homage for it to the Virgin Ma●y in the chief Church thereof called Nostre Dame, bore headed, and upon his knees, without Girdle or Spurs, and offered to her Image a massy Heart of gold, of 2000 Ounces: capitulating, that from thenceforth he and his successors should hold that Earldom of her only in perpetual Homage, and at the change of every Vassal, present her with a golden Heart of the same weight. After this it was taken by King Henry the 8th, An. 1544. but yielded not long after by King Edward the 6th.  
I a●d, before I leave this Town, that at such time as it was an absolute Estate, it gave one King unto Jerusalem, and another of England: the King of Jerusalem being that famous Godfrey surnamed of B●uillon, Earl of this Boulog●e, as Son of Eustace Earl hereof, and Duke of Lorrein and Bovillon, as the Son of the said Eustace and the Lady Ida, the true Inheretrix of those Duchies. The second King which had the Title and Estate of Earl of Boulogne, was Stephen King of England, who held it in right of Maud his Wife, the Daughter and Heir of Eustace Earl of Boulogne, the Brother of that famous Godsrey. But his issue failing not long after, and the Estate being fallen amongst his Heirs general, it came at last to the De la Tours of Auvergne (the Ancestors of the now Dukes of B●uillon) and so unto the Crown, as before is said. The Arms of which Family are a Tower embattled Sables; but the colour of the Field I find not.  
3. PONTHEIU, so called from the Bridges, built for conveniency of passage over the moorish flats thereof, belonged formerly to the English; To whom it came by the Marriage of Eleanor, Daughter of Ferdinand of Castille, by Joan the Daughter and Heir of Simon the last Earl hereof, to King Edward the first. Towns of most note in it. 1 Abbeville, seated on the Some, well fortified, and as strongly garrisoned, as a Frontier Town upon Artois: on one side unassaultable by reason of a deep moorish Fen which comes up close to it; beautified with a fair Abbey, whence it had the name (Abbatis Villa, in the Latin) and the See of a Bishop. 2 Monstreville, a well fortified Town in the way betwixt Abbeville and Amiens; and a strong out-work unto Paris. 3 Crecie, where King Edward the 3d defeated the great Army of Philip de Valois, in the first onsets for that Kingdom. And 4. ●report, a small Haven on the East of St. Valeries. Some place the Earldom of St. Paul in this Country of Pontheiu; others more rightly in Artoys, where we mean to meet with it. The Arms hereof were Or, 3 Bends Azure. 4 And as for SA●NTERRE, which is the fourth part of the Lower ●●eardie, the chief Tows of it are 1 Peronne, upon the River Some, where Lewis the 11th, the greatest Master of State-craft for the times he lived in, put himself most improvidently into the hands of Charles of Burgundy, who as improvidenly dismissed him. 2. Roy, and 3. Montdidier, (〈…〉 in Latin) both of them strong Towns upon the Frontier; but otherwise of little same in former Stories.  
In Higher Picardy and the Vidamate of AMIENS, the places of most note are, 1 Corbis, a Garrison on the Frontier, towards the Netherlands. 2 Piquigni, on the River Some, more famous for the interview of Edward the 4th of England, and Lewis the 13th, than for giving the name of Picardy to all the Province, which Mercator only of all Writers doth ascribe unto it. And 3dly Amiens itself, seated upon the Some above Piquigni, the River being there divided into many Streams for the use and service of the Town; well built, with very strong walls, and deep ditches: the loss whereof, when taken by Archduke Albert, much hazarded the affairs and reputation of King Henry the 4th; and therefore when he had regained it, he added to the former Works an impregnable Citadel. But the chief glory of this City is in the Cathedral, the fairest and most lovely structure in the West of Europe: so beautified within, and adorned without, that all the excellencies of Cost and Architecture seem to be met together in the composition. The Fronts of our Cathedrals of Wells and Peterburgh, the rich Glass in the Choir at Canterbury, the costly Imagery, and arched Buttresses in the Chapel at Westminster (before the late defacements of those cathedrals) might serve as helps to set forth the full beauties of it.  
II. But not to dwell on this place too long, pass we on next to VEROMANDOIS, the ancient habitation of the Veromand●●: the fairest and largest part of both Picardies; and not a whit inferior to the best of France, in the number of neat and populous Cities. The principal whereof are, 1 Soissons, called anciently Augusta Suessionum, the chief City of the Suessones or Suessiones: and the last Hold which the Romans had in all Gaul, lost by Siagrius governor for the Western Emperor, to Clovis the fifth King of the French. In the division of his Kingdom, made the Seat Royal of Clotair the son of this Clovis, and of Aripert, and Chilperick, the sons of Clotair, from hence entitled Kings of Scissons; their Kingdom containing the whole Province of Belgica Secunda, or the Provinces of Artois, Picardy, and Champagne, as we call them now. But Soissons having long since lost the honour of a Regal Seat; hath of late times been made the honourarie Title of the Counts of Soissons, a branch of the Royal stock of Bourbon; and a Bishops See, situate on the River of Aisne. 2 Laon, a Bishops See also, the Bishop whereof is one of the Twelve Peers of France, and Earl of Laon; the Town in Latin, Laodunum. 3 Noyon, in Latin, Noviodunum, an Episcopal See also. 4 Chapelle, a strong piece, one of the best outworks of Paris against the Netherlands. 5 D'Ourlans, and 6 La Fere, places of great strength also, but more near the Frontiers. And 7 S. Quintin, anciently the chief City of the Veromandui, then called Augusta Veromanduorum: called afterwards S. Quintin from that Saint, here worshipped, as the Patron and Deus tutelaris of it. A place of great importance for the Realm of France; and so esteemed in the opinion of the Earl of Charolois, after Duke of Burgundy, and King Lewis the 11th; the first of which never digested the restoring of it to that King, being pawned unto his Father (together with Corbie, Amiens, and Abbeville) for no less than 400000 Crowns; the later never would forgive the Earl of S. Paul for detaining it from him, though under colour of his service. A Town of greater note in succeeding times for the famous battle of St. Quintin's, Anno 1557. wherein King Philip the second of Spain, with the help of the English under command of the Earl of Pembroke, overthrew the whole Forces of the French, made themselves Masters of the Town, and thereby grew so formidable to the French King, that the Duke of Guise was in Post hast sent for out of Italic, (where his affairs began to prosper) to look unto the safety of France itself.  
III. More towards Hainalt and Lorrein lieth the Country of RETHELOIS, so called of Rethel the chief Town: well fortified as the rest of the Frontier places; but of most note amongst the French, in that the eldest sons of the Dukes of Nevers, have usually been entitled Earls and Dukes of Rethel; united to that Family by the marriage of Lewis of Flanders, Earl of Nevers, with the Daughter and Heir of James Earl of Rethel, Anno 1312, or thereabouts. 2 St. Monhaud, a Town of consequence and strength. 3 Sygni, a strong piece belonging to the Marquis of Vieu-Ville. 4 Chasteau-Portian, of more beauty, but of like importance.  
IU. Finally in the Duchy of TIERASCHE, the last part of the higher Picardy, we have the Town of Guise, of some note for the Castle, but of more for the Lords thereof, of the ducal Family of Lorrein, from hence entitled Dukes of Guise. A Family which within a little compass of time produced two Cardinals, the one entitled of Guise, the other of Lorrein; six Dukes, that is to say, the Duke of Guise, Mayenne, Aumal, Elbeuf, Aguillon, and Cheureuse; the Earl of Samarive; and besides many Daughters married into the best houses in France, one married to lam●s the 5th King of the Scots. The first, and he that gave the rise unto all the rest of this potent Family, was Claud, ●onne to Rene the second, Duke of Lorrein, and husband to Antomette Daughter to the Duke of Vendosme; in respect of which alliance, he was honoured with this title. The second was Francis, who endangered the Realm of Naples, resisted the siege of the Emperor Charles at Mets, drove him out of Provence, took Calais from Q. Mary, and was at last treacherously slain at the siege of Orleans, Anno 1563. The third was Henry that great enemy of the Protestants, who contrived the great Massacre at Paris, and almost dispossessed Henry the third, of all France. He began the holy league, and was finally slain at Bloys, by the command of King Henry the 3d. But we must know that this Town did anciently belong to the Dukes of Lorrein; and had given the title of Guise to Frederick the second son of john, and Charles the third son of R●ne, both the first of those names, before Claud of Lorrein was advanced to the title of Duke. Of most note next to Guise itself, is 2 Ripemont on the South of Guise. 3 Chastelet upon the border towards Luxembourg, a strong Town▪ and one of the best outworks of France. 4 Maz●ers, upon the Maes or M●use, a place of great strength and like importance.  
As for the state of this whole Province I do not find that it was ever passed over by the French Kings unto any one hand; as almost all the rest of France had been, at some time or other, but distracted into divers Lordships. Some of which fell to the Crown of France by confiscations, and others by conquest: 
Normandy.  Some held of England; some, of the Earls of Artois; and others of Flanders, and lastly of the Dukes of Burgundy, as Lords of those Provinces: those which depended upon England being seized on by Charles the 7th, on the loss of Normandy by the English; as those which held of Burgundy, were by Lewis his son, immediately on the death of Duke Charles at the battle of Nancie, Anno 1476.   

NORMANDY.  
NORMANDY is bounded on the East with the River Some which parteth it from Picardy; on the West with Bretagne, and some part of the Ocean; on the North with the English Channel, by which divided from England; and on the South with France specially so called, and the County of Maine. It made up the whole Province of Lugdunensis Secunda, in the time of the Romans; the Metropolis whereof was Roven: and in the greatness of the French Empire had the name of Neustria, corruptly so called for Westria; the name of Westria or Westonrich, being given by some to this part of the Realm of West-France, as that of Austria or Ostenrich to a part of East-France. Afterwards being bestowed upon the Normans by Charles the Simple, it was called Normandy.  
In this Country is the little signory of IVIDOT, heretofore said to be a free and absolute Kingdom; advanced to that high dignity by Clotaire, the seventh King of the French: who having abused the wife of one Gautier de Ividot (so called because of his dwelling here) and afterward (to prevent revenge) killed the man himself; to make some satisfaction to his Family for so great an injury, erected the Lordship of Ividot to the estate of a Kingdom, and gave unto the heirs of this G●utier (or Walter) all the prerogative of a free and absolute Monarch, as to make Laws, coin money, and the like. From hence the French call a man that hath but small domains to maintain a great title, a Roy d' Ividot. At last, but at what time I know not, it fell again to a Lordship, and belongeth now to the house of Bellay in Bretagne.  
But to proceed from the poor Kingdom of Ividot, to the rich Dukedom of Normandy, for largeness of Extent, multitudes of People, number and stateliness of Cities, fertility of Soil, and the commodiousness of the Seas, it may worthily be accounted the chief Province of France. Well watered with the River Seine which runneth quite through it; as do also 2 the Orne, and 3 the Av●n: not to say any thing of 4 Robee, 5 Ant, and 6 Reinelle, and many others of less note. In length it reacheth 170 miles, and about 60 in breadth where it is narrowest: containing in that round the largest and fairest Cornfields that are to be seen in all France. Of all other natural commodities it is extreme plentiful, excepting Wines, which the Northern coldness of the Climate admits not of; or sparingly at the best, and of no perfection. The people of it formerly renowned for feats of Arms, the Conquerors of England, Naples, Sicil, and the Kingdom of A●tioch in the East: at this time thought to be of a more sharp and subtle wit than the rest of the French, Scavans au possible en proceces & plaideries (saith Ortelius of them) especially in the quillets and quirks of Law.  
It is divided into the Higher and the Lower, the Lower containing the Sea coasts, and the Higher the more Inland parts. Principal Cities of the whole, 1 Constance, a Bishops See, the Spire or Steeple of whose Cathedral, is easily discernible afar off, both by Sea and Land, and serveth Sailors for a Landmark. From hence the Country hereabouts hath the name of Constantin. 2 Auranches, situate on a rock with a fair prospect over the English Channel, but more near to Bretagn than the other, the chief City of the Abrincantes, called Ingena by Ptolemy, now a Bishops See. 3 Caen, (Cadomum in Latin) an Episcopal See, as the other; Strong, populous, and well built, seated upon the River Orne, second in Reputation of the whole Province: but more especially famous, for the Sepulchre of William the Conqueror, the University founded here by King Henry the 5th, and for the long resistance which it made against him, in his Conquest of Normanite. 4. Baieux (the ●ivitas Baiocassium of Antoninus) from whence the Country round about hath the name of B●ssin. Memorable of a long time for a See Episcopal. One of the Bishops whereof, called Odo, Brother unto William the Conqueror, by the Mother's side, was by him created Earl of Kent; and afterwards on some just displeasure committed Prisoner. For which, when quarrelled by the Pope, (the Clergy being then exempted from the Secular Powers,) ●he returned this answer, that he had committed the Earl of Kent, not the Bishop of Bayeux: By which distinction he avoided the Pope's displeasure. 5. Roven, of old R●thomar●m, pleasantly seated on the Seine, and watered with the two little Riverets of Robe● and R●in●lie, which keep it very sweet and clean. The City for the most part well built, of large circuit, and great trading, the second for bigness, wealth, and beauty in all France: anciently the Metropolis of this Province, and an Arch-Bishops See; and honoured of late times with a Court of Parliament, erected here by Lewis the twelfth, Anno 1501. In the Cathedral Church hereof (a Reverend but no beautiful fabric) is to be seen the Sepulchre of J●h● Duke of Bedford, and Regent of France for King Henry the sixth: which when an envious Courtier persuaded Charles the eighth to deface; God forbid (saith he) that I should wrong him being dead, whom living all the power of France was not able to withstand; adding withal, that he deserved a better Monument than the English had bestowed upon him. And to say truth, the Tomb is but mean and poor, short of the merits of the man, and carrying no proportion to so great a virtue. 6 Falaise, upon the River Ant, once of strength and note; the dwelling place of Arlette, a Skinner's Daughter, and the Mother of William the Conqueror: whom Duke Robert, passing through the Town took such notice of (as he beheld her in a dance amongst other Damosels) that he sent for her to accompany him that night in bed, and begot on her William the Bastard, Duke of Normandy, and King of England. Her immodesty that night said to be so great, that either in regard thereof, or in spite to her Son, the English called all Strumpets by the name of Harlots, the word continuing to this day. 7 Vernaville (Vernol●um in Latin) in former times accounted one of the Bulwarks of Normandy against the French. Of which it is reported, that when news was brought to Richard the first, that Philip surnamed Augustu●, the French King, had laid siege unto it, he should say these words; I will never turn my back till I have confronted those cowardly French men. For performance of which Princely word, he caused a passage to be broken through the Palace of Westminster, and came so unexpected upon his Enemies, that they raised their siege, and hastened homewards. 8 Alanson, of most note for giving the title of Earl and Duke to many Princes of the Royal Family of Valois, beginning in Charles de Valois, the Father of Philip de Valois, French King, and continuing for eight successions till the death of Charles the fourth Duke of this line, conferred occasionally after that, on many of the younger Princes of the Royal Family. 9 Lysieux, on the North-East of Alencon, a Bishops See, the chief Town of the Lexobii; as 10 Caux, of the Caletes, both placed by Caesar in these parts. 11. Eureux, an Episcopal See also, by Ptolemy called Mediolanium, the chief City anciently of the Eburones, and still a rich and flourishing Town; the third in estimation of all this Province. 12. guysor's, a strong frontier Town towards France, whilst Normandy was in the hands of the English, or under its own Dukes and Princes; notable for the many repulses given unto the French; And 13. Pontoyse, another frontier upon France, so called of the Bridge on the River of Oyse, which divides France from Normandy, on which the Town is situate, and by which well fortified on that side, but taken at the second coming of Charles the 7th, after an ignominious flight hence, upon the noise only of the coming of the Duke of York, commander at that time of the Province, and the English Forces. 14. Albemarl, contractedly Aumerl, most memorable for giving the title of Earl to the Noble Family De Fortibus, Lords of Holderness in England; and of Duke to Edward Earl of Rutland, after Duke of York. More towards the Sea 15. S. Valenies, seated on a small but secure Bay, betwixt Dieppe and New. Haven. 16. Dieppe, at the mouth of a little River so named, opening into a large and capacious Bay; a Town of Trade, especially for the Newfoundland: remarkable for its fidelity to Henry the 4th in the midst of his troubles; When the Confederates of the Guisian faction called the Holy League, had outed him of almost all the rest of his Cities, compelled him to betake himself hither, (from whence he might more easily hoist Sail for England) and called him in derision the King of Dieppe. 17. New-Haven, the Port Town to Roven and Paris, situate at the mouth of the River Seine, from hence by great Ships navigable as far as Roven; by lesser unto Pont de l' Arch, 70 miles from Paris: the Bridge of Roven formerly broken down by the English, to secure the Town, lying unrepaired to this day by means of the Parisians, for the better trading of their City. By the French it is called Haure de Grace, and Franciscopolis by the Latins; repaired and fortified (the better to confront the English) by King Francis the first, and from thence so named. Delivered by the Prince of Conde and his faction into the hands of Q. Elizabeth of England, as a Town of caution, for the landing of such forces as she was to send to their relief, in the first civil War of France about Religion: and by the help of the same faction taken from her again, as soon as their differences were compounded. By means whereof, the Hugonots were not only weakened for the present, but made uncapable of any succours out of England for the time to come: and the next year were again warred on by their King, with more heat than formerly. 18. Harslew (or Honslew as some call it) of little notice at the present, because not capable of any great shipping, nor useful in the way of Trade: but famous notwithstanding in our English Stories, as the first Town which that victorious Prince K. Henry the 5. attempted and took in in France. 19 Cherburg (the Latins call it Caesaris Burgum, on the Sea side also, the last Town which the English held in the Dukedom of Normandy: belonging properly and naturally to the Earls of Eureux, advanced unto the Crown of Navarre; but being garrisoned by the English for King Henry the 6th, it held out a siege of seven months against the forces of France. Here are also in this Dukedom, the Towns of 20 Tankerville, and ●1 Ewe, which have given the title of Earls to the Noble Families of the Greyes and Bourchiers in England: as also those of 22 Harcourt, 23 L●ngueville, and 24 Aumal, which have given the title of Duke and Earl, to some of the best Houses in France.  
There belonged also to this Dukedom, but rather as subject to the Dukes of Normandy, than part of Normandy itself, the County of PERCH; situate betwixt it and the Province of La Beausse, of which now reckoned for a part. It gave the title of Countess to Eufemia, the base Daughter of King Henry the first: and was divided into the higher and the lower. The chief Towns of it, 1. Negent le Rotrou, of which little memorable, but that it is the principal of Perch Govet, or the lower Perch. 2. Mortaigne, or Moriton, of most note in the higher Perch, especially for giving the title of an Earl; to john, the youngest Son of King Henry the 2d, after King of England; as in the times succeeding to the Lord Edmund Beaufort, after Duke of Somerset.  
But to return again to the Country of Normandy, the ancient Inhabitants thereof were the Caletes, Eburones, Lexobii, Abrincantes, spoken of before; the Bello cassi, or Venelo cassi about Rover; the Salares and Baiocenses about Sees and Bayeux: all conquered by the Romans, afterwards by the French, and the French by the Normans. These last a people of the North, inhabiting those Countries which now make up the Kingdoms of Denmark, Swethland, and Norwey: united in the name of Normans, in regard of their Northernly situation; as in our History and description of those Kingdoms we shall show more fully. Out of those parts they made their first eruptions about the year 700. when they so ransacked and plagued the maritime Towns of France, that it was inserted in the Litany, From Plague, Pestilence, and the fury of the Normans, good Lord, 〈◊〉. To quiet these people, and to secure himself, Charles the Simple, gave them, together with the Sovereignty of the Earldom of Bretagne, a part of Neustria (by them since called Normannia.) Their first Duke was Rollo, An. 900. from whom in a direct line, the 6th was William the Bastard, Conqueror, and King of England, An. 1067. After this, Normandy continued English till the days of King John: when Philip Augustus seized on all his Estates in France, as forfeitures, An. 1202. The English then possessing the Dukedoms of Normandy and Aquitaine; the Earldoms of Anjou, Toureine, Maine, Poictou, and Limosin; being in all a far greater and better portion of the Country, than the Kings of France themselves possessed. The English after this recovered this Dukedom by the valour of King Henry the 5th, and having held it 30. years, lost it again in the unfortunate Reign of King Henry the sixth: the English then distracted with domestic factions. After which double Conquest of it from the Crown of England, the French distrusting the affections of the Normans, and finding them withal a stubborn and untractable people, have miserably oppressed them with tolls and taxes, keeping them always poor and in low condition: insomuch, as it may be said of the generality of them, that they are the most beggarly people that ever had the luck to live in so rich a Country. But it is time to look on 

The Dukes of Normandy.  
912. 1 Rollo of Norway, made the first Duke of Normandy by Charles the Simple; by whose persuasion baptised, and called Robert.  
917. 2 William surnamed Longespee, from the length of his Sword.  
942. 3 Richard the Son of Longespee.  
980. 4 Richard the II. Son of the former.  
1026. 5 Richard the III. Son of Richard the 2d.  
1028. 6 Robert the Brother of Richard the 3d.  
1035. 7 William the base Son of Robert, subdued the Realm of England; from thence called the Conqueror.  
1093. 8 Robert II. eldest Son of William the Conqueror, put by the Kingdom of England by his two Brothers, William and Henry, in hope whereof he had refused the Crown of Jerusalem, then newly conquered by the forces of the Christian Princes of the West. Outed at last, imprisoned and deprived of sight by his Brother Henry, he lived a miserable life in the Castle of Cardiff, and lieth buried in the Cathedral Church of Gloucester.  
1102. 9 Henry the first King of England.  
1135. 10 Stephen King of England, and D. of Normandy.  
11 Hen: Plantagenet D. of Normandy, and after King of England, of that name the second.  
1161. 12 Hen: the III. surnamed Court-mantle, Son of Hen: the 2d. made D. of Normandy by his Father.  
1189. 13 Rich: IV. surnamed Cure de Lion, King of England, and D. of Normandy, Son of Henry the second.  
1199. 14 John the Brother of Richard, King of England, and D. of Normandy, outed of his estates in France by King Philip Augustus, An. 1202. before whom he was accused of the murder of his Nephew Arthur, found dead in the ditches of the Castle of Rowen, where he was imprisoned; but sentenced causa inaudita, for his not appearing. After this, Normandy still remained united to the Crown of France (the title only being borne by john de Valois, afterwards King, and Charles' the 5th (during the life time of his Father) till the conquest of it by the valour of K. Hen: the 5th, A. 1420. which was 218 years after it had been seized on by King Philip Augustus, and having been holden by the English but 30 years, was lost again An. 1450 in the unfortunat Reign of King Henry the sixth. Never since that dismembered from the Crown of France, saving that Lewis the 11th, the better to content the confederate Princes, conferred it in Appennage on his Brother Charles Duke of Berry, An. 1465. but within two Months after took it from him again, and gave him in exchange for it the Dukedom of Guy●nne, which lay further off from his Associates.    
What the Revenues of this Dukedom were in former times, I can hardly say. That they were very fair and great appears by that which is affirmed by Philip de Comines; who saith, that he had seen raised in Normandy 95000 li. Sterling money, which was a vast sum of money in those times. As also by this testimony of the D. of Burgundy, who held King Lewis the 11th to be weakened a whole third part in his estate, by giving Normandy in portion to the D. of Berry. Now they amount unto as much as the King's Treasurers and Toll-masters are pleased to draw out of it,  
The Arms of Normandy were Gules, two Leopards Or, which with the single Leopard, or Lion, being added for the Duchy of Aquitaine, make the Arms of England.   

BRETAGNE.  
BRETAGNE is bounded on the East with Normandy and the County of Maine; 
Bretagne,  on the South with Anjou and Poictou; on all other parts with the English or gallic Ocean. Warered upon the South side with the Loir, which divides it from Anjou; but so as part of this Dukedom, called the County of Raiz, lieth on the South side of that River, betwixt it and Poictou.  
It was first called Armorica from its situation on the Sea, as the word importeth in the old Language of that People. But how it came by this new name, is not well agreed on. The general opinion is, that it took this name from the neighbouring Britan's brought over hither by the Tyrant Maximus, rebelling against the Emperor Gratian, Anno 385. by whom this Province was subdued, and from them named Britannia Minor, Little Britain: An Argument whereof may be, that the Language of this People hath still no small affinity with the Welsh or British; there being a tradition also, that the Britan's who first came over hither and married the Women of this Country, cut out their tongues for fear they should corrupt the Language of their posterity. And to this Conquest by the Britan's these old Verses give some further Countenance, 
Vicit Aremoricas animosa Britannia Gentes,  
Et dedit imposito nomina prisca jugo.  
That is to say,  
Gaul-Armorick, the Britan's overcame,  
And to the conquered Province gave their name.   
Which notwithstanding, the most probable opinion seemeth to be that it took this name from the Britanni, an old gallic People, mentioned by Pliny in Gaul-Belgick, retiring hither on the invasions and incursions of the barbarous Nations: though possibly those Britanni of Gallia-Belgica might be aswell some Colony of the Iland-britans', as the Belgae a great Nation in the Isle of Britain, are said to have been a People of Gallia-Belgica. The reason is, because there was no Author before Geofric of Monmouth who takes notice of this transporting of the Insular-britans' by the Tyrant Maximus: no ancient Author Greek or Latin making mention of it. And for the Welsh or British words which are still remaining in the language, they are conceived to be no other than a remainder of the old gallic tongue; which was originally the same with the ancient British, as is elsewhere proved.  
The Province is in compass 200 French Leagues: Pleasant and fruitful, beautified with many shady woods, and spacious Downs; sufficiently well stored with all manner of grain, but destitute of Wine and the choicer fruits by reason of the Northerly situation of it. Divided commonly into Hault or High Bretagne, and Basse or Low Bretagne: the first containing the more Eastern, and the last the Western parts hereof. Neither of the two much furnished with navigable or notable Rivers, the defect of which the neighbourhood of the Sea supplieth, affording more capacious Havens, and convenient Ports, than any one Province in this Kingdom.  
To begin therefore with the Havens, those of most note in the Higher Bretagne, are 1 S. Malo, built on a Rock within the Sea, wherewith at every high water it is encompassed. A Bishops See, and a Port very much frequented by the French and Spanish, who use here to barter their Commodities; oftentimes spoilt by the English in their Wars with ●rance, especially since the time of King Henry the seventh. 2 Blavet, a safe but little Haven, on the mouth of a little River of the same name also. 3 S. Briene, (by the Litines called Fanum Sancti Brioci) a Bishops See, and a well-traded Port, seated upon the English Channel. 4 Vanne●, a Bishops See also, situate on a capacious Bay, at the mouth of the Villain; the chief Town of the Veneti, whom Caesar placeth in this tract, and makes them to be the mightiest People of all the Armoricans, strongest in Shipping, and best seen in Affairs at Sea. 5 Croissie, a little Haven at the mouth of the Loir, and the only Haven of this Part on the gallic Ocean. Then in Low B●●tagne, or the more Western parts hereof, there is 6 B●est, seated upon a spacious Bay of the Western Ocean, the Key and Bulwark of this Country, and the goodliest Harbour of all France. 7 Morlais, a convenient Port, and well frequented. 8 S. Pol de Leon, and 9 Treguer, both Bishops Sees, both situate on the Seashore, and both the chief Towns of the Ossismi, whom Ptolemy and Strabo place upon this Coast: the first of them neighboured by the Promontory which they call L● Four, the Govaeum of Ptolemy. 10 K●mper Corentin, a Bishops See also, the chief Town of that part hereof which is called Cournovaille, situate not far from the Foreland which they call Penmarch, opposite to Le Four spoken of before. A Sea Town this, but not much talked of for the Haven, for aught I can find. 11 Conquer, a well-frequented Road, not far from Be'st.  
Chief places in the Midlands, 1 Nantes, the principal City of the Nann●tes, (by Ptolemy called Condivincinum) a large, fair, strong, and populous City, seated upon the Loir, a Bishops See, and the Metropolis of Bretagne. 2 Re●e●, anciently the chief Town of the Rhedones (called Conda●e by Ptolemy) now a Bishops See, and the Parliament City for this County, established here Anno 1553, which maketh it very populous, and of great Resort, though not fully two miles in compass. 3 D●l, an Episcopal City also, but unwholesomely seated amongst Marshes. 4 Dinan, a rich and pleasant Town on the River Rance. 5 L'Amballe, the chief Town of the L'Ambiliates, spoken of by Caesar. 6 Rohar, the title and inheritance of the Dukes of Ro●an, descended from a branch of the ducal family of B●e●agne, by Mary the second Daughter of Duke Francis the first, and Wife of john then Viscount of Rohan. 7 Ansenis, the chief Seat of the now Duke of Vend●sme, and the head of his Estates in Bretagne. Of which possessed in the right of his Wife, the Daughter of the Duke of Me●cocur by the Heir of Martignes, another of the branches of this ducal Family. 8 Chast●au-Briant, a strong Piece on the borders of Normandy. 9 Clisson, the chief Town of the Duchy of Raiz, being that part of Bretagne which lieth on the Southside of the Loir, a strong ●own, and fortified with a very good Castle.  
The Britan's, whosoever they were in their first Original, were questionless one of the first Nations that possessed any part of Gaul, after the Conquest of the Romans. Governed at first by their own Kings, the most considerable of which was that Aldroenus or Auldran, the Son of Solomon, who at the 〈◊〉 of the Insular-britans', then distressed by the Scots and Picts, (as Geofrie or● Mon 〈◊〉 telleth the story) sent over Constantine his Brother with a complete Army to their aid; who having valiantly repulsed the Enemy, was made King of Britain, Anno 433. Of whose posterity more there. Those of Armorica being broken by the puissance of Charles the Great, abandoned the name of Kings, and satisfied themselves with the title of Earls, assumed first by Alain le Rebre, Anno 874. but as some say, Anno 859. which was somewhat sooner. By Peter of Dre●x the 16th Earl, challenging his Estate in right of Alice his Wife, the half Sister of Arthur, and Daughter of Constance, by Guy of Thovars' her 3d Husband, the better to secure his title, this Earldom was made subject to the Vassalage of the Crown of France, in the time of Lewis the 9th, by whom john called the R●d, the Son of this Peter, was created the first Duke of Bretagne. Yet notwithstanding this subjection to the Kings of France, the Dukes hereof reserved unto themselves the Sovereign powers, as to write themselves By the Grace of God, the privilege of coining Gold, etc. and stood so high upon their terms, that Francis the last Duke, denied to do his Homage to Charles the 7th, either upon his Knees, or without his Sword, according to the former custom. For which being quarrelled by Lewis the eleventh, the Son of Charles, who was at better leisure to pursue the business than his Father was, he joined himself with Charles Duke of Berry, and Charles Duke of Burgundy in a War against him; and thereby drew upon himself that ruin, which he endeavoured to avoid. For in Conclusion, Charles of Berry, as it was thought, was poisoned; Charles of Burgundy lost his life at the Battle of Nancie, 1476. and a great part of his Estate was conquered by the French King. And Francis this Duke having embarked himself in the same troublous Ocean, must needs suffer shipwreck with his Copartners. The French King invadeth Bretagno; The Duke overcharged with melancholy, dies, 1488. leaving Arm, his Daughter and Heir, in the power of Charles the 8th, the Son and Successor of that Lewis: who contracts a marriage with the Orphan, and uniteth Bretagne to France. There were many impediments which might have hindered this marriage, but Charles breaketh through them all. First, Charles himself had been formerly contracted to the Archduke Max milians' Daughter: but this he held void, because the young Lady was not of age at the time of the Contract. 2 Anne the Duchess was also contracted to Maximilian; and this he held unvalid also, because that being his Homager, she could not bestow herself without his consent. 3 Maximilian had by proxic married her, which marriage he consummated by a Ceremony in those days unusual. For his Ambassador attended with a great Train of Lords and Ladies, bared his Leg unto the Knee, and put the same within the Sheets of the Duchess, taking possession thereby of her Bed and Body. But Charles consulting with his Divines, was told, That this pretended Consummation was rather an invention of Court, than any way firm by the Laws of the Church, and therefore of no power to hinder his pursuit of this marriage, so advantagions to his Crown. What else remains touching the union of this Dukedom to the Realm of France, we shall see anon: having first looked over the Succession of those Princes, who under several Titles have governed the Estate thereof, according to the best light we can get from Story.   

Kings of the Britan's of Gau●-Armorick.  

385. 1 Conan placed here by Maximus.  
2 Grallon, Son of Conan.  
3 Solomon, Son of Grallon.  
4 A●l●ran, or Aldroenus, the Son of Solomon.  
5 Bodis, Son of Auldran.  
6 Hoel, Son of Bodis.  
7 Hoel II. Son of Hoel the first.  
8 Alain, Son of Hoel the second.  
9 Hoel III. Son of Alain.  
10 Solomon II. Son of Hoel the third.  
11 Alain II. Grandchild to Solomon the second, the last King of Bretagne of the race of Conan: who dying without Issue, left his Kingdom unto many Competitors, by whom distracted into many pet it Tyrannies, and at last subdudued by Charles the Great. And though they did again recover their Liberty and Kingdom in the time of Ludov●c●● Pitts, who next succeeded: yet they did not hold it long in quiet. Insomuch, as after the murder of two or three Usurpers of the Royal title, Alain, surnamed Le Rebre, laid aside that invidious name of King, and would be called only Earl of Bretagne. His Successors ●ollow.   

Earls and Dukes of Bretagne. 
Anjou.   
874 1 Alain le Rebre.  
2 Indicael & Colodock, the Sons of Alain.  
3 Mathrudon, Son in Law of Alain le Rebre.  
4 Alain II. Son of Mathrudon.  
5 Conan, descended from King Solomon the 3d.  
6 Geofrie, Son of Conan.  
7 Alain III. Son of Geofrie.  
8 Conan II. Son of Alain.  
9 Hoel, Sister's Son of Conan the 2d.  
10 Alain IV. called Fergent, Son of Hoel.  
11 Conan III. Son of Alain:  
12 Eudon, Husband of Bertha, Daughter of Conan.  
1131. 13 Conan IU. Son of Eudo●.  
1172. 14 Geofrie II. Son of Henry the 2d, King of England, Husband of Constance, Daughter and Heir of Conan the 4th.  
1186. 15 Arthur, Son of Geofry.  
1202. 16 Peter of Breux.  
1250. 17 John, the first Duke of Bretagne.  
1287. 18 John II. Son of John.  
1305. 19 Arthur II. Son of john the 2d.  
1312. 20 john III. Son of Arthur 2d.  
1341. 21 john, Earl of Montfort, Brother's Son of Arthur.  
1399. 22 john V. Son of john of Montfort.  
1442. 23 Francis, the Son of john the fifth.  
1450. 24 Peter, the Brother of Duke Francis.  
1457. 25 Arthur III. second Son of john Earl of Montfort.  
1458. 26 Francis II. Son of Richard Earl of Estampes, the Brother of Duke Arthur the 3d. the last Duke of Bretagne, of whom sufficiently before.  
1484. 27 Charles the 8th, French King, succeeded in the Dukedom of Bretagne, in right of Anne his Wife, Daughter and Heir of Francis the 2d.  
1498. 28 Lewis the 12th, French King, succeeded on the death of Charles, in the right of the said Anne, whom he took to Wise: and to make a way unto her Bed, divorced himself from the Lady joan his former Wife, Daughter of Lewis the 11th.  
1515. 29 Francis the III. of Bretagne, and the first of France, succeeded in the Dukedom in right of Claude his Wife, the eldest Daughter of Lewis the 12th, and Anne of Bretagne: by whom being made the Father of so many Children, that he had little cause to fear that the Crown would be separated from his House, in the year 1532 being the 17th of his reign and Government, caused an Act to pass, with the consent of the States of Bretagne, for the inseparable uniting of that Dukedom to the Kingdom of France, and by that means divested his Posterity of it. For his male issue failing in King Henry the 3d, the rights hereof descended on the Heirs general: that is to say, on Isabel, Daughter of Philip the 2d of Spain, and the Lady Isabel or Elizabeth his Wife, the eldest Daughter of Henry the 2d, and niece to the said Francis the first; and after her decease (dying without issue) on the Lady Catharine her Sister, married to Charles Emanuel Duke of Savoy. For whom when Philip of Spain claimed this Estate, the French pretended a Law against it of their own devising, viz. That no Estate being incorporated to that Crown, could be aliened from it. A proper Law, and cousin German to the Salic; but such as served their turn by the help of the English, who desired not to have the Spaniards so near Neighbours to them.   
Most of our former Earls of Richmond were Earls and Dukes of this House. Their Arms were Ermines.   

THE DUKEDOM OF ANIOV.  
THe DUKEDOM of ANJOV, taking it in the full latitude and extent thereof, is bounded on the East with La Beausse; on the West with Bre●agne; on the North with Normandy; and on the South with part of Berry and Poictou. In which circumference are comprehended the three small Provinces of Anjou, Tourein, and Maine; the ancient Inhabitants whereof, in the times of the Romans, were the Andes as Caesar, (or the Andegavii as Pliny) calls them, the Turones, and the Cenomani, accounted afterwards a part of the Province of Lugdunensis Tertia.  
The Country for the most part is very fruitful and pleasant, especially in Tourein; as is the whole tract upon the Loir. Anjou is somewhat the more hilly, but otherwise little inferior to Tourein, affording plenty of white wines, the best in France; and yielding from those Hills above 40 Riverets, falling into the Loire from thence, the chief whereof are Mayenne, 2 Vienne, 3 Dive, and 4 Sartre.  
1 ANJOV called Andegavia by the Latins, is situate in the midst betwixt Maine and Tourein, so called from the Andegavi, the Inhabitants of these parts. Principal Cities are, 1 Ang●ers, (by Ptolemy called juliomagus) of a large Circuit, and well built, the See of a Bishop, reckoning in it 15 Parishes besides the Cathedral. It is seated on the River Sartre in a very good air, and therefore chosen for the seat of an University founded here by Lewis the 2d Duke of Anjou, the Son of King john, Anno 1388. 2 Beaufort, a Town belonging formerly to the Dukes of Lancaster, in which john of Gaunt so much delighted, that he caused all the Children that he had by Catharine Swinford, his third Wife, to be called Beaufort's: which Beaufort's were afterward Dukes of Somerset and Exeter, and Earls of Dorset. This Town came to the house of Lancaster, by the marriage of Blaxch of Artoys, unto Edmund surnamed Crouchback, second Son to our Henry the 3d, created by his Father, the first Earl of Lancaster. Memorable in these later times for giving the Title of a Duchess to Madam Catharine, the beloved Mistress of King Henry the 4th, by whom she was mother of Caesar now Duke of Vendosme, and Alexander, not long since the Grand Prior of France. With reference to which, the second Son of the Duke of Vendosme is honoured at this present with the title of Duke of Beaufort: as the eldest with relation to his Mother was made Duke of Mercoeur. 3 Baugie, near which was fought that memorable Battle betwixt the English and the French, wherein the English lost the day, and Thomas Duke of Clarence, Brother to Henry the fifth, was there unfortunately slain. Anno 1422. 4 Saumur, pleasantly situate on the Loire, and for long time one of the Cautionary Towns in the hands of those of the Reformed Religion: of whom it is the only entire University of this Kingdom; especially famous for the learned Philip du Morney, Lord of Plessis, sometimes the Governor hereof. 5 Loches, seated on the River Indre, the Castle whereof being mounted on a steep high Rock, is thought to be one of the strongest pieces of all France. 6 Lafoy Flesche, of special name at the present for a College of Jesuits, one of the fairest in this Kingdom. The word in the French tongue signifieth an Arrow (whence those who make Bows and Arrows have the name of Fl●schers.) At Nola in the Realm of Naples, there is another College of them, called D● Arque, the Bow: On which one wittily composed this ensuing distich; 
Arcum Nola dedit, dedit illis alma Sagittam  
Gallia: quit Funem, quem meruere, dabit?   
That is to say, 
Nola the Bow, and France the Shaft did bring:  
But who shall help them to the Hempen-string.   
2 On the Southeast of Anjou, betwixt it and Berry, lieth the Country of TOUREIN, the ancient Seat of the Turones: which, for the wholesomeness of the Air, the pleasantness of the Country, and admirable plenty of all Commodities, is by some called The Garden of France. Principal Cities in it, 1 Amboise, pleasantly seated on the Loire, and beautified with one of the fairest Castles in France, both for the gallantry of the Building, and beautifulness of the Prospect. 2 Tours, by Ptolemy called Caesarodunum, and the Turonum Civit as of Antoninus; the Metropolis of Lugdunensis tertia, and an Archbishops See: a fair, rich, and well-traded Town, situate on the banks of the Loire, in a most sweet and pleasing Country. Famous in that those of the Reformed Religion, from the Gate of S. Hugo, at which they used to issue out to their Assemblies in the Fields, had the name of Hugonots. Given to them, as some others think, as the Disciples of the nightwalking Spirit (or Robin Goodfellow) which they call S. Hugo, in regard they had their first meetings, for the most part, in the nights; as had the Primitive Christians in the times of their Persecutions. Some, more improbably, (and indeed ridiculously) derive the name from the first words of an Apology which they are fabled to have made to the King; which were Huc nos venimus: fancying, that as the Protestants did derive that Appellation from the words Protestants and Protestamur, so often used by them in their Apology to Charles the fifth; so from those words Huc nos, came the name of Hugonots, or Hucnots: But more assuredly famous for the great Battle fought near it by Charles Martell, Mayre of the Palace, and Father of Pepin King of France, against an Army of 40000 M●ors, led by Abderamen, Leiutenant General in Spain, for Evelid or Iscam the great Caliph: of which 370000 lost their lives in the place, Anno 734. 3 Laudun. 4 Richelieu, pleasantly seated in a rich and flourishing Soil, as the name importeth. Of no great note till the time of the late great Cardinal of Richelieu, who took name from hence; by whom it was made one of the neatest Towns in all this Kingdom, and honoured with the titles of a Dukedom and Pairrie of France.  
As for the Fortunes of this Province (for of Anjou we shall speak more at large anon) it had a while its own Proprietary Earls of the house of Blais, conferred by Hugh Capet upon Odon Earl of Blais and Champagne, and by him given, together with the Earldom of Blais, to Theobald or Thib●uld his Eldest Son, (his second Son named Stephen succeeding in Champagne) who in the year 1043, was vanquished and slain by Charles Martell Earl of Anjou, and this Province seized on by the Victor, who afterwards made Tours his ordinary Seat and Residence. Part of which Earldom it continued, till the seizure of Anjou, and all the rest of the English Provinces in France, on the sentence passed upon King john. After which time dismembered from it, it was conferred on john, the fourth Son of King Charles the sixth, with the stile and title of Duke of Tourein: and he deceasing without Issue, it was bestowed with the same title on Charles the eldest Son of Lewis Duke of Orleans (in the life of his Father:) the same who afterwards succeeding in the Dukedom of Orleans, was taken Prisoner by the English at the Battle of Agincourt, kept Prisoner 25 years in England, and finally was the Father of King Lewis the 12th.  
3 On the North side of Anjou, betwixt it and Normandy, lieth the Province of MAINE. The chief Towns whereof are, 1 Man's, Cenomanensium Civitas in Antoninus, by Ptolemy called Vindinum; seated on the meeting of Huine, and Sartre; the principal of the Province, and a Bishops See: most memorable in the elder times for giving the title of an Earl to that famous Rowland, the Sister's Son of Charlema●gne, one of the Twelve Peers of France; (the Subject of many notable Poems under the name of Orlando Inamorato, Orlando Furioso, besides many of the old Romances) who was Earl of Mans. 2 Mayenne, on the banks of a river of the same name, (Meduana in Latin) the title of the second branch of the House of Guise 1 famous for Charles Duke of Mayenne, who held out for the L●ague against Henry the 4th; A Prince not to be equalled in the Art of War, only unfortunate in employing it in so ill a cause. 3 Vitrun, upon the edge of Breagne, of which little memorable. 4 Lafoy Val, not far from the head of the River Mayenne: of note for giving both name and title to the Earls of Laval, an ancient Family, allied unto the houses of Vendosme, Bretagne, Anjou, and others of the best of France. Few else of any note in this County, which once subsisting of its self under its own natural Lords and Princes, was at last united to the Earldom of Anjou, by the marriage of the Lady Guiburge, Daughter and Heir of Helie the last Earl hereof, to Eoulk Earl of Anjou, Anno 1083. or thereabouts: the Fortunes of which great Estate it hath always followed.  
But as for Anjou itself, the principal part of this goodly Patrimony, it was by Charles the Bald conferred on Robert a Sat●n Prince, for his valour shown against the Normans, Anno 870. Which Robert was Father of Eudes' King of France, Richard Duke of Burgundy, and Robert who succeeded in the Earldom of Anjou: Competitor with Charles the Simple for the Crown itself, as the next Heir to his Brother Eudes, who died King thereof. Slain in the pursuit of this great quarrel, he left this Earldom, with the title of Earl of Paris, and his pretensions to the Crown, unto Hugh his Son, surnamed the Great: who to make good his claim to the Crown, against Lewis the 4th, Son of Charles the Simple, conferred the Earldom of Anjou, and the Country of Gastinois, on Geofrie surnamed Ghrysogonelle, a renowned Warrior, and a great stickler in his cause, in whose race it continued near 300 years. How the two Counties of Main and Tourein were joined to it, hath been shown before. Geofrie the Son of Foulk the 3d, married Maude, Daughter to Henry the first of England, and Widow of Henry the 4th Emperor: from whom proceeded Henry the second, King of England, and Earl of Anjou. But john his Son, forfeiting his Estates in France (as the French pretended) Anjou returned unto the Crown: and afterwards was conferred by King Lewis the 9th, on his Brother Charles; who in right of Beatrix his Wife was Earl of Provence, and by Pope Urban the 4th was made King of Naples and Sicily. Afterwards it was made a Dukedom by King Charles the fifth, in the person of Lewis of France his second Brother, to whom this fair Estate was given, as second Son of King john of France, the Son of Ph●lip de Valois, and consequently the next Heir to Charles de Valois the last Earl hereof (the King his Brother yielding up all his right unto him.) Finally it returned again unto the Crown in the time of Lewis the 11th. The Earls and Dukes hereof having been vested with the Diadems of several Countries, follow in this Order.  

The Earls of Anjou of the Line of Saxony.  
870. 1 Robert of Saxony, the first Earl of Anjou.  
875. 2 Robert II. Competitour for the Crown of France with Charles the Simple, as Brother of Eudes the last King.  
922. 3 Hugh the great, Lord of Gasti●ois, Earl of Paris, Constable of France, and Father of Hugh Capet.  
926. 4 Geofrie ●hrysogonelle, by the Donation of Hugh the great, whose party he had followed in the War of France, with great fidelity and courage.  
938. 5 Foulk, Earl of Anjou, the Son of Geofrie.  
987. 6 Geofrie II. surnamed Martell, for his great valour.  
1047. 7 Geofrie III. Nephew of Geofrie 2. by one of his Sisters.  
1075. 8 Foulk II. Brother of Geofrie 3. gave Gastinois, (which was his proper inheritance) to King Philip the first; that by his help he might recover the Earldom of Anjou, from his part wherein he was excluded by his Brother Geofrie.  
1080. 9 Geofrie IV. Son of Foulk 2.  
1083. 10 Foulk III. Brother of Geofrie; King of Jerusalem in the right of Melisend his Wife.  
1143. 11 Geofrie● V. surnamed Plantagenet.  
1150. 12 Henry the II. King of England, Son of Earl Geofrie and Maud his Wife, Daughter of King Henry the first.  
1162 13 Geofrie VI third Son of King Henry the 2d, made Earl of Anjou on his marriage with Constance the Heir of Bretagne.  
1186. 14 Arthur Son of Geofrie and Constance.  
1202. 15 john King of England, succeeded on the death of Arthur, dispossed of his Estates in France by Philip Augustus, immediately on the death of Arthur.   

Earls and Dukes of Anjou, 
La Beausse.  of the Line of France.  
1262. 1 Charles, Brother of King Lewis the 9th. Earl of Anjou and Provence, King of Naples and Sicilia, etc.  
1315. 2 Charles of Valois, Son of Philip the 3d, Earl of Anjou in right of his Wife, Niece of the former Charles, by his Son and Heir of the same name; the Father of Philip de Valois, French King.  
1318. 3 Lewis of Valois, the second Son of Charles, died without Issue, Anno 1325.  
1376. 4 Lewis of France, the 2d Son of King john, the Son of Philip de Valois, created the first Duke of Anjou by King Charles his Brother; and adopted by Queen joan of Naples, King of Naples, Sicil, and Jerusalem, and Earl of Provence.  
1385. 5 Lewis III. Duke of Anjou, and Earl of Provence, and Maine, titulary King of Sicil, Naples, and Hier●salem.  
1416. 6 Lewis IU. successor to his Father in Estate and Titles.  
1430 7 Ro●è, the Brother of Lewis, by the adoption of Qu. joan the 2d, was for a while possessed of Naples, but presently outed by Alfonso of Arragon, and died the titulary K. of Naples, Sicil, and Jerusalem; the Father of Queen Margarite, Wife of Henry the sixth, Duke of Bar in right of Violant his Mother.  
1480. 8 Charles Earl of Maine, Nephew to Renè by his 3d Brother Charles, at his decease left Anjou, and all the rest of his Estates, to King Lewis the 11th. Anno 1481. Since which never otherwise aliened, than as an honourarie title of the third Son of France.   
It is to be observed here (according to our method in other places) that Renè King of Sicil, etc. and Duke of Anjou, instituted an Order of Knighthood, called of the Croissant; the Knights whereof carried a Crescent, or Half-Moon, on their right Arms, with this motto, L'Os en Croissant, encouraging them thereby to seek the increase of valour and reputation.  
The Arms of this Dukedom were France, a Border Gules.   

7 LA BEAUSSE.  
LA BEAUSSE is bounded on the East with France specially and primarily so called, and part of Champagne; on the West, with Anjou, Maine, Tourein, and some part of Berry; on the North, with Normandy; and on the South, with Bourbonois, and the rest of Berry. It is called Belsia in Latin Writers; both names derived from the pleasantness and beauties of it.  
The Principal Nations of the whole in the time of the Romans▪ were the Carnutes, which inhabited the greatest part, and the Samnitae near the Loire; part of Gallia Celtica, and cast into the Province of Lugdunensis quarta by the Emperor Constantine. Divided by the French into the Higher, the Lower, and the Intermediate.  
1 The HIGHER BEAUSSE is that part which lieth next to Normandy, of which the principal Towns are, 1 Dreux, seated upon the River Eureux, supposed to be the Seat of the ancient Druids, who held here their Parliaments or Sessions for administration of Justice. The title and inheritance of that Peter of Dreux, who succeeded Arthur, the Son of Geofrie Plantagenet, in the Earldom of Bretagne. 2 Montfort, an Earldom, the title and estate of john Earl of Montfort, surnamed the Valiant, who succeeded in the Dukedom of Bretagne, by the Aid of the English, Anno 1341. 3 Chartres, called anciently Carnutum Civit as, (but by Ptolemy, Antecum) seated upon the Eureux also, from whence the Country hereabouts was called Le Pais Chartrain; A Bishops See, and one of the Videmates of France. Which honour as it is peculiar to the French only; so Milles in his Edition of Glover's Catalogue of Honour, will have but four at all in France, viz: those of Amiens, Chalons, Gerberoy, and this of Chartres. But certainly in France there are many more of them, as at Rheims, Man's, &c. and formerly as many as it had Bishops: the Vicedominus or Vidame being to the Bishop in his Temporals, as the Chancellor in his Spirituals; or as the Vice Comites (Viscounts) were anciently to the Provincial Earls in their Courts of Judicature.  
2 The LOWER BEAUSSE is that which lieth towards Bourbonois; and is subdivided into Selogne, and Orleanois. In SOLOGNE, which lieth close to Bourbon, the chief places of note, are, 1 Romorantin, seated on the Soilure, the chief Town of this Tract. 2 Mallenzay. 3 La Ferte, or La Ferte S. Bernard, of which nothing memorable. In ORLEANOYS, which lieth more Northwards upon the River of Loire, are, 1 largean, a Town once of very great strength, and one of the outworks of Orleans. 2 Cleri, called also Cleri of Notre dame, from the Church there built unto our Lady. 3 Tury; and 4 Angerville, both in the ordinary Road betwixt Par●s and 5 Orleans, the principal City of all Beausse, called Genabum in the time of Caesar; repaired, or rather new built by the Emperor Aurelius, Anno 276; from thence named Aurelia, the Country round about it Aurelianensis, now Orleans, and Orleanoys. The Country generally very fruitful, and yielding a most excellent and delicious Wine; Which, for the strength, and intoxicating power thereof, 
Berry.  is banished the French Kings Cellar by especial Edict. The City very pleasantly seated on the River Loire, well built, situate in a sweet Air, and planted with a civil and ingenious People, who are said to speak the best language of any in France. For a time it was the chief Seat of a distinct Kingdom, (according to the unprovident humour of the Mero●iguians) the lot of 〈◊〉 Son of Clovis the Great, and Guntram Son of Clotaire, both Kings of Orlea●s, as also was Theodorick, the second Son of C●ildebert King of Mets, on the death of Gunthram. But Sigibert his Son being vanquished by Clotaire the second, this Kingdom extending to the shores of the Aquitaine Ocean, was added unto that of France. Orleans since that time content with a lower title, hath of late often times with greater prudence, been made the honorary title of the second Sons of France called Dukes hereof. It is a See Episcopal, a Bailly-wick, or Siege Praesidial, and an University. The See Episcopal founded in the Church of St. Cross, miserably ruined by the Hugonots in the civil Wars, out of mere hatred to the name. The 〈◊〉 Praesidical settled here by King Henry the 2d, 1551. for the ease of his Subjects of these parts, in suits not worth the troubling of the Courts of Paris. The University erected by King Philip le Bel, An. 1312 though to speak properly it be an Hall only for the reading of the Civil Laws, the only learning there professed, and for that considerable. A Town now not of so great strength as in former times, when for some months it held out against the whole power of the English, rescued from them at last by the valour of joan the Virgin, whose Statue, (like a man of Arms) is still preserved on the Bridge-gate of this City; near which great Montacute E. of Salisbury had his fatal blow.  
The MIDDLE or intermediate BEAUSSE lieth betwixt the former, in which the places of chief note are, 1 Blois, seated also on the Loire, in a sound air, and fruitful Country; the Nursery for the most part of the King's Children, for that cause much resorted to by the Nobility, and honoured sometimes with the residence of the Kings themselves: it being in the Councel-Chamber of the King's house here, that Henry of Lorrein, Duke of Guise, the chief contriver of the terrible Massacre at Paris, and Author of the holy League, was slain by the command of King Henry the 3d, Anno 1589. 2 Chastean-Dun, the chief Town of the Earldom of Dunois, (the honour and estate of john Earl of Dunois, commonly called the Bastard of Orleans, one of the best Soldiers of his time, and so approved by his exploits against the English) mounted upon the top of an high hill, at the confluence of the Loire, and Aigre, 3 Vendosme (Vindocinum in Latin) the chief Town of the Dukedom of Vendosme; not otherwise of note than for the Earls and Dukes which have born this Title: of which as being the Progenitors of the Kings now regnant, I have thought fit to add the ensuing Catalogue:  

Earls and Dukes of Vendosme.  
1386. 1 john of Bourbon, Grandchild of Lewis the first Duke of Bourbon, the first Earl of Vendosme of this Family.  
1432. 2 Lewis of Bourbon, a Confederate with joan the Virgin in her actions against the English.  
1446. 3 john of Bourbon the II. from whom descended the Princes of Roch-sur-you, and the Dukes of Montpensier.  
1472. 4 Francis of Bourbon.  
1495. 5 Charles of Bourbon, the first Duke of Vendosme, from whose youngest Son called Lodowick, or Lewis, descend the now Princes of Conde, and Earls of Soissons.  
1537. 6 Antony of Bourbon, Duke of Vendosme, and King of Navarre.  
1562. 7 Henry of Bourbon, Duke of Vendosme, and King of Navar●e, afterwards King of France also by the name of Henry the 4th:  
8 Caesar de Vendosme, one of the Sons of Henry the 4th, by the Duchess of Beaufort, created by his Father Duke of Vendosme, and once designed his Successor in the Crown of France: Afterwards by the procurement of the King his Father, married to the Daughter and Heir of Philibert Emanuel, D. of Mercoeur, a younger branch of the house of Lorrein) possessed of a fair and goodly estate in the Dukedom of Bretagne in the right of his Wife, a Daughter and Heir of the house of Martignes (a branch of the Family of those Dukes.) By means whereo● the Duke of Vendosme hath not only a large inheritance, but great authority in that Country.   
The Arms of the Earls and Dukes of Vendosme, were and are, Azure, six Flower de Lyces Or. 3. 2. 1.   

8 BERRY.  
BERRY is bounded on the North, with La Beausse; on the South, with Limosin; on the East, with Heurepoix, (part of France specially so called) and some part of Bourbonnois; on the West, with Poictou, and Toureine in the Dukedom of Anjou. In Latin called Biturigam Regi●, from the Bituriges, the old Inhabitants of this tract; by Pliny, Strabo▪ and some others, called the Bituriges Cubi, to difference them from the Bituriges Vbisci dwelling about Beurdeaux.  
The Country watered in the East with the River Say; in the South with the Coure; in the North with the Cher, and in the inland parts with Indre, Arnon, Theo, Eure: and others which we shall meet withal anon, of no great note, but such as much conduce to the fruitfulness of it; affording it the benefit of fat pastures, and flourishing Meadows; which breed great multitudes of cattle, and such stocks of Sheep, that when they tax a man for lying in excess of numbers, they use to say. Fie Sir, th●re are not so many Sheep in Berry.  
It containeth in it 3●● walled Towns, the chief whereof are, 1 B●urges, a Town of great strength by nature, and as well fortified by Art; situate in a low Flat, amongst deep impassable Bogs and Marshes, caused by the overflowings of the Auron, Yeure, Molon, and Aurette; small Riverets, but of great waters when they meet together. By means whereof it may be easily drowned at the approach of an enemy: for that cause made the fastness and retreat of Charles the 7th, in his long Wars against the English, possessed at that time of Paris and the greatest part of the Kingdom. The poor Prince in the mean time fain to feast it here with a Rump of Mutton and a Chick, and that but upon high days neither: from his constant abode here, and that withal he had been Duke of this Country, in the life of his three elder Brethren, by the English in derision called King of Berry. A large, fair, and rich Town it is, the Seat of an Archbishop, a Siege Presidial, and one of the best Universities in France, especially for the study of the Civil Laws; first founded by K. Lewis the 9th, and afterwards restored or perfected by Charles Duke of Berry, the Brother of King Lewis the 11th. Some fabulous founders, and as ridiculous originations have been thought of for it; as that it was built by Ogyges, a Grandchild of Noah, by whom called Bytogyges, which in the corruption of the following times, came (forsooth) unto Bituriges: which Etymology were it as dear bought, as it is farre-fetched, might be good for Ladies, and then it would be good for somewhat. Others no less absurdly, will have it called Bituris, quasi Bi-Turris, from two fair Towers which formerly (as they pretend) were erected here; one of the two, in part still standing: and unto this, they say, alludeth an old Grammarian, thus, 
Turribus à binis inde vocor Bituris.  
From two Towers which were builded here  
The name of Bituris I bear.   
But the truth is, it was thus called from the Bituriges (the Biturigum Civitas of Antoninus) and by that name in the division of old Gaul by the Emperor Constantine, made the Metropolis of the Province of Aquitania Prima, of which this Country was a part. 2 Viarron, or Viarzon, pleasantly seated amongst Woods, Vines and Rivers; the Rivers Arnon, Thee, Cherseoli, and Yeure, meeting hereabouts. Built in or near the place of the old Avaricum, a town of great note and strength in the time of Caesar: the Revolt whereof gave such a check to his proceedings, that he was fain to stretch his wits and valour on the very tenterhooks, before it was again recovered. 3 Concressant on the River Souldre, beautified with a strong and magnificent Castle. 4 Chasteau Roux on the River Indre; of which little memorable. 5 Issaudun, on the River Theo, the Bailliage for that part of the Country. 6 Montfalcon, an ancient Barony. 7 Argenton, on the River Creusa, the title and estate of Philip de Comines, hence called Seigneur de Argenton, who writ the History of France under Lewis the 11th, in which he dived so far into, and writ so plainly of the greatest affairs of State, that Queen Catharine de Medici's used to say, that he had made as many Heretics in state-policy, as Luther had done in Religion. 8 Sancerre, seated on an high hill near the River Loire, by some Latin Writers called Xantodorum, but most generally said to be so called, quasi Sacrum Cereris, from the Goddess Ceres herein worshipped. A Town of great consequence and strength, and as such assigned over to the Hugonots Anno 1579. as a Town of Caution for their security, and the better keeping of the Articles of Peace then agreed upon: famous not long after for enduring a most desperate and tedious Siege under Charles the 9th, by whom those Articles were almost no sooner made than broken.  
Here is also in this Province the Town and signory of Aubignie, adorned with many privileges, an ample territory, and a beautiful Castle. Bestowed by Charles the sixth on Robert, the second Son of Alan Stewart, Earl of Lennox in Scotland, for his many Signal Services against the English; and is still the hnourarie title and possession of the second Branch of that noble and illustrious Family.  
But as for Berry itself, and the fortunes of it we may please to know, that in the time of Hugh Capet one Godfrey was Governor of this Province, whose Posterity enjoyed that Office under the Kings of France, till the days of King Henry the first; of whom the Inheritance and Estate was bought by Harpi●, one of the Descendants of that Godfrey. But long he had not held it as Proprietary, in his own right, when desirous to make one in the Holy Wars, he sold it back again to King Philip the first (the better to furnish himself for that expedition) Anno 1096. to be united to the Crown after his decease. Since which time the Sovereignty of it hath been always in the Crown of France, but the possession and Revenue sometimes given with the title of Duke, for a portion to some of the King's younger Sons, to be holden of them in Appennage, under the Sovereignty and command of the Donor and his Successors: the last which so enjoyed it being Charles the Brother of Lewis the 11th; after whose death it was united to the Crown, never since separated from it, save that it gave the title of Duchess to the Lady Margaret, sister of Francis the first, married after to the Duke of Savoy.   

9 The Dukedom of BOURBON.  
THE Dukedom of BOURBON, 
〈…〉  in the full power and extent thereof, comprehended 〈◊〉, F●rrest, Beau●jolois, and auvergne, all now reverted to the Crown.  
1 BOURBONOIS hath on the East the Dukedom of Burgunay; on the West, 〈◊〉 on the North, La Beausse, and a corner of Gastin●is; on the South, Auvergne. The Country very well wooded, and of excellent pasturage, which makes the people more intent to grazing and seeding cattle, than they are to tillage; and is watered with the Rivers of Loire, Yonne, and 〈◊〉, which are counted navigable; besides Aron, Acolin, Lixentes, Lanbois, and some lesser streams.  
The ancient Inhabitants were the Hed●i, who being wasted in their Wars against the Romans, a great part of their Country was by Julius Caesar conferred on the Bou, a Germane Nation; who coming with the Helvetians into Gaul, and unwilling upon their defeat to go home again, were by him planted in this tract.  
It is divided into the Higher and the Lower. In the Higher which is more mountainous and hilly, there is no other Town of note than that of Montaigne, situate in the County of Combraille, the Signencie as I take it of that Mich●el de Montaigne, the Author of the Book of Essays. But in the Lower Bourbono●s are, 1 Molins, esteemed the Centre of all France, situate on the All●er, Bailliage, and the chief Town of this Country: the River yielding great plenty of Fish, but of Salmon specially: the Town adorned with a fair Castle, and that beautified with one of the finest Gardens in France, in which are many Trees of Limmons and Oranges. 2 Bourbon Archenband, and 3 Bourbon Ancie; the former of the two seated upon the Lo●re, and giving name to the whole Province, of great resort by reason of its medicinal waters. 4 S. Porcin, and 5 Varennes Ganat, upon the frontiers of Auvergn, 6 Chancelle, 7 Charroux, 8 ●alisse, 9 Souvigni, 10 St. Amand, etc.  
In the North part of Bourbonois, but not accounted any part or member of it, lieth the Town of Nevers, (in Latin Nivernium) from whence the Country round about is called NIVERNOIS. A Town of good esteem, but not very great; the reputation which it hath proceeding partly from some mines of Iron, interspersed with silver which are found therein; and partly for the Earls and Dukes from hence denominated. The first whereof was Landri of the house of Bourgogne, Anno 1001. Passing through many Families, it came at last again to the house of Bourgogne, and from that unto the Earls of Flanders, by the marriage of Yoland of Bourgogne to Robert of Bethune, Earl of Flanders, Anno 1312 whose Son named Lewis married the Heir of Rethel. Together with the rest of the rights of Flanders, it came again by marriage to the Dukes of Burgundy; conveied by Elizabeth Daughter and Heir of john of Bourgogne Earl of Nevers, second Son of Philip the good Duke of Burgundy, to Ad●lph Duke of Cleves her Husband, Anno 1484, and by Henrietta, Sister and Heir of Francis de Cleves, the second Duke of Never, and the last of that Family, to her Husband Lewis de Gonzaga, third Son of Frederick Duke of Mantua, Anno 1563. whose Son Charles, succeeded his Father and Mother in the Dukedom of Nevers, and Vincent of Genzaga his Cousin german, in the Dukedom of Mantua.  
The Arms of these Dukes, Azure, within a Border Compone Gules and Argent, 3 Flower de Lyces, Or.  
2 FOREST, is bounded on the East with Beaujolois; on the West with Auvergne; on the North with Bourbonois; and on the South with a part of Languedock. The Country populous and large, but not very fruitful; hilly and mountainous, much of the nature of the Wood-Lands. The Air a little of the coldest to afford good Wines, but that sufficiently recompensed by abundance of pitcoal, by which they have good fires at a very cheap rate. The people are conceived to be none of the wisest, but withal very greedy and covetous of gain.  
The chief Towns in it are, 1 Mont-Brison, seated on the Loire. 2 Feurs, seated on the same River, called anciently Forum Segusianorum, the chief City of the Segusiani, or Scrusiani, whom Caesar and others mention in this part of Gaul. 3 St. Stephen (or Estienne) in Feurian, near the head of that River. 4 St. Germane. 5 St. Rombert. 6 St. B●nnet le Chastean. 7 St. Guermier, etc. of which little memorable.  
This Country of Forrest was anciently a part of the Earldom of Lions, dismembered from it at or about the same time with Beaujolois, and was held by a long succession of Earls Proprietaries of it, as a state distinct: till Reg●aud Lord of Forest, the Son of Earl Guy, by the marriage of Isabel Daughter and heir of Humbert Earl of Beau-jeu, joined them both together, which was about the year 1265, parted again after his decease Anno 1●80. Guy being his eldest Son succeeding in Forest; and Lewis his second in Beau-jeu. How they became united in the house of Bourbon, we shall see anon.  
3 BEAUJOLOIS, so called from Beau-jeu, the chief Town hereof, taketh up the tract of ground betwixt the Loire and the Soasne, and betwixt Lionois and Forrest. A Country of no great extent, but very remarkable for the Lords and Princes of it: who have been men of great eminence in their several times. The chief Town of it is Beau-jeu, beautified with a goodly Ca●tle, pleasantly seated on the brow of a rising Mountain, from whence perhaps it took the name, as the great Keep in Farnham Castle, was in the same sense, and for the same pleasant situation, called loy●ux Guard, in the time of Lancelot du Lake whose that Castle was. Which appears further by a Tower built at Constantinople by 〈◊〉 the third of that name Lord hereof (being then 〈◊〉 to the Emperor from King Philip ●ugustus) with this inscription, 
〈◊〉  Turris 〈◊〉, which there continued to be seen a long time after. 2 Belle-ville, where is an Abbey founded by Hum●ert the second, Anno 1158. 3 Ville Franche, environed with Walls by Humbert the fourth, whose Son Gu●sche●d the third above mentioned, founded here a Convent of Franciscans, called to this day Min●rette. 4 Noironde. 5 St. Ma●rice. 6 V●fie. 7 Ob●hes, concerning which there have been long and many Wars betwixt the Earls of Forrest and these Lords of Beau-jeu.  
This Country, as that other of Forest, was once part of the Earldom of Lions; in the parta●e of which ●state it fell to Omphroy one of the Brothers of Earl A●tand, Anno 989. whose Successor▪ had no other title than Lords of Beau-jeu. They were most of them men of great piety, founders of many Collegiate and conventual Churches; some of them of action also: Humbert the second and the fifth, Adventurers in the Wars of the Holy Land; Vichard the second, in those against the English; Guischard the fourth, made Constable of France, by King Lewis the ninth. But the house failing in this Guisch●rd, it was united unto that of the Earls of Forest as before is said, in the person of Reg●and Earl thereof: whose Son and Successor called Lewis, was also Constable of France, as Edward the Grandchild of this Lewis a Marshal of it. But at the last it fell into the hands of a lewd and wicked Prince, Edward the second: who being imprisoned at 〈◊〉 for his great offences, and overlaid with Wars by the Dukes of Savoy, made a donation or free gift of all his ●●gneuries to Lewis Duke of Bourbon, surnamed the good, and direct Heir of Guy Earl of Forrest, the eldest Son of Regnand Earl of Forrest and Lord of Beau-jeu above mentioned, and consequently of next kin to him, Anno 1400.  
4 AUVERGNE hath on the East Forrest, and Lyonis; on the West Limosin, Perigort, and Qu●reu; on the South part of 〈◊〉; and on the North Berry, and Bourbonnois. It is divided into the Higher and Lower. The Lower being called Limaigne, is fruitful in a very eminent degree; the Higher mountainous and barren. In this last the Towns of chief note are, 1 St. Flour, a Bishops See, of an impregnable situation. 2 Ovillac, on the River jourdain, defended with a strong Castle on the top of a Rock. 3 Beouregard, on the River Guerdon. 4 Carlat. 5 Murat. 6 Pillon, of which little observable in ancient stories. In the Lower called Limaigne, from a River of that name, which falls into the Ailier; there is, 1 Clermont, a Bishops See, fair and pleasing for the situation, and Fountains descending from the hills of the higher Auver●n, the chief City of the whole Province. Most memorable in these later Ages for the Council here called by Pope Vrban the second, Anno 1067. in which, by the artifice of the Pope, the Christian Princes of the West, engaged themselves in the Wars of the Holy Land, giving thereby the better opportunity to the Popes to enlarge both their Territories and their power. It was first raised out of the ruins of Gergovia, the head City of the Auverni, in the time of Saesar, and the seat Royal of Vercingetorex King of that Nation, who so long put him to his trumps with an Army of 138000 men; now a small Village Called Gergeau. 2 Rion, in which resides the Seneschal or chief Governor of the Lower Auvergn. 3 Montpensier, of great note for the Princes of the house of Bourbon, once Dukes hereof: beginning in Lewis the first Earl, Son of John Duke of Bourbon, Anno 1415 and ending in Henry the last Duke, whose Daughter and Heir was married to the Duke of Orleans, Brother of Lewis the thirteenth. 4 Montferant. 5 Yssoire. 6 B●ionde. 7 Aigueperse. 8 Turenne, the ancient Seat and Patrimony of the De L● Tours, now Sovereigns of Sedan, and Dukes of Bovillon, to whom it hath for some ages since given the title of Viscount. A family descended from the Heirs general of Eustace Earl of Bou●o●ne in Picardy, Father to G●dfrey of Bovillon Duke of Lorreine.  
The Country first inhabited in the times of the Romans by the potent Nation of the Auverni, whose King 〈◊〉 was taken prisoner, and led in triumph unto Rome, in the War against the Salii, the Atlobroges, and others of their Confederates: Not fully conquered till Caesar had subdued their King V●rcingetorix. They were afterwards part of the Province of Aquitania prima, retaining in the often changes of the Empire, its old name of Auvergn; heretofore part of the great Duchy of Aquitaine, remaining subject to those Dukes till William the eighth Duke, and the fourth of that name, gave it in Portion with one of his Daughters: in whose line it continued under the title of the D●uchins of Auvergn, till Berault the last Earl or Dauphin of it. Who having married the Heir of Guy Earl of Forrest, the Son of Regnaud above mentioned, had by her a Daughter named Anne, Heir of both Estates, married to Lewis the good, the third Duke of Bourb●n: to whom Edward the last Lord of Beau-jeu made a Donation or surrendry of that signory also: uniting in his person the distinct Estates of Bourbon, Beau-jea, Forest, and Auvergne.  
And as for Barbonnois itself, in the distractions of the French Empire by the posterity of Charles the Great, who most improvidently cantoned it into many great Estates, and petit Signeuries: it sell unto the share of the potent Family of the Dam●ierre, descended from the ancient house of Bourgogne, who held it till the year 1308. At what time Lewis the ninth for the advancement of Robert Earl of Clermont (in Beauv●isin) his fifth Son: married him to Beatrix Daughter and Heir of Archenbald Dampierre the last of that house. Lewis the Son of this Robert was the first Duke of this Line; whose successors and their achievements follow in this Catalogue of  

The Lords and Dukes of Bourbon.  
1308. 1 Robert, Son of King Lewis the 9th. Earl of Clermont, the first Lord of Bourbon of the house of France.  
1317. 2 Lewis, the first Duke of Bourbon, Peer, and Chamberlain of France.  
1341. 3 Peter, Peer, and Chamberlain, slain in the Battle of Poitiers. Anno 1356.  
1356. 4 Lewis II. called the Good, in whose person all these Estates were first united; Peer, and Chamberlain of France; and Governor of King Charles the sixth.  
1410. 5 John, Peer, and Chamberlain, taken Prisoner at the Battle of Agincourt, and died in 〈◊〉; the root of the Family of Montpensier.  
1434. 6 Charles, Peer, and Chamberlain, General of the Army against the English in the life of France.  
1456. 7 john TWO Peer, Chamberlain, and Constable of France.  
1487. 8 Peter II. Brother of john, Peer, Chamberlain, and Regent of France, in the absence of Charles the 8th.  
1503. 9 Charles Earl of Montpensier, Duke of B●urbon in the right of Susan his Wife, Daughter and Heir of Peter the second, Duke of Bourbon. After whose death, being slain at the sack of Rome, Anno 1527. without Issue, his Estate fell unto the Crown, and so continued, till by the Sentence or Arrest of the Court of Parliament in Paris, Auvergne, Forrest, and Beaujeau were adjudged to Madam Lovise, Mother of Lewis the first Duke of Montpensier, and Daughter and Heir of Gilbert de Bourbon Earl of Montpensier, the Nephew of john Duke of Bourbon (the first of that name) of which house she was the only surviving Heir: from whence descended Henry the last Duke of that Family spoken of before. And for the title of Auvergne, it was used customarily by the eldest Sons of the Earls and Dukes of Montpensier; till given to Charles, natural Son of King Charles the ninth, called from hence the Count or Earl of Auvergne: who being a Confederate of Charles Duke of B●ron, was in the year 1604. made Prisoner by King Henry the fourth, released by King Lewis the thirteenth, Anno 1616. and within two years after made Duke of A●golesme, in whose posterity it remaineth.   
The Arms of these Dukes were 1 France, a Baston Gules, for the Dukedom of Bourbon. 2 Or, a Dauphin Palm, Azure, for the County of Auvergne. 3 Or, a Lion Sable, armed Gules under a Label of fine pieces of the same, for the signory of Beau-jeu,. The Arms of the Earldom of Forest I am yet to seek.   

POICTOU.  
HAving thus taken a survey of those several Provinces, which, (except Bretagne) were the first purchases of the French in the modern France; let us next look on those which were possessed by the Goths. And first we will begin with POICTOU, their most Northern Province, bounded on the North with Beetagne and Anjou, on the South with Xanto●gne, a member of the Dukedom of Aquitain; on the East with Tourein, Limosin, and B●rry; and on the West with the Aquitain Seas.  
It is called in Latin, Pictavia, from the Pictones, as Ptolemy, Caesar, and some others, or the Pictav●, as Antoninus calleth them, the old Inhabitants hereof; and is a country so great and plentiful, that there are numbered in it 1200 Parishes, and three Bishoprics. A strong Argument of the populousness and largeness of it. Besides the goodness of the Soil, it hath many other great helps to enrich it; that is to say, a large Sea coast, some capacious Harbours, not a few navigable Rivers, emptying themselves into the Sea; besides the benefit which redounds to it from the Clin, or Clavius, the Crevise, and Vienne, three Rivers falling into the Loire; which also glides along on the North hereof.  
The principal Towns and Cities of it are, 1 Poitiers, in Latin, Pictavis, seated upon the Clin, or Clavinus, by P●olomie called A●gustoruum: the largest City for compass of ground within the Walls, next to Paris itself; but containing in that circuit Meadows, Cornfields, and other waste grounds. It is an University, especially for the study of the Civil Laws, and a See Episcopal: one of the Bishops hereof being S. Hilary, surnamed Pictavensis, that renowned Father of the Church, and a stout Champion of the Catholic Faith against the A●tans, though countenanced in their Heresy by the Emperor. Constantius. 2 Souri, upon the River Charente, near the edge of Xantoigne. 3 ●almont, upon the shores of the Ocean. 4 Beaumoir, a Sea Town also, and a reasonable good Port, near the confines of Bretagne. 5 Roch-sur-you, which gave the title of Prince to one of the branches of the Royal race of Bourbon. 6 Lusignan, on the River jon, denominating the Noble Family of Lusignan, sometimes Kings of Jerusalem, and afterwards of cyprus', which last they had in exchange for the first, by the donation of King Rich. the first of England. 7 Lucon, or Lusson, seated upon a navigable arm of the Sea: sufficiently famous in being the Episcopal See of the renowned Cardinal of R●cheleiu, who so long managed the affairs of France for King Lewis the thirteenth. 8 Maillesais a Bishops See also. 9 Thovars, which gives the title of Duke to the ancient Family of Iremovile, 
Limosin.  from which the Dukes of Bretagne did derive themselves, from the time that Constance the Daughter and Heir of Conan, after the death of 〈◊〉 Plantagenet her first Husband, had Guy of Thovars for her second. 10 Chastell-Heraula (or ●●sirum Heraldi,) on the River Vienne, of which James Hamilton, Earl of Arran in Scotland, by the gift of King Henry the second of France, the better to assure him to the French Faction there, against the English, had the title of Duke.  
In the Vine-Fields of this Country, within two Leagues of Poitiers, was fought that memorable Battle, between John of France, and Edward the Son of King Edward the third, surnamed the Black Prince. Who being distressed by the number of the French, would willingly have departed on honourable terms; which the French not accepting, instead of conquest, found a fatal overthrow. For they presumingon their own strength, to their own disadvantage, bereft the enemy of all opportunity of retiring: whereas ordinary policy would instruct the Leader of an Army, to make his enemy, if he would fly, a bridge of gold; as Count Petillan used to say. Hereupon Themistocles would not permit the Grecians to break the bridge made over the Hellespont by Xerxes; lest the Persians should be compelled to fight, and so happen to recover their former losses; and Charles the sixth lost his Army, by intercepting of our Henry the fifth in his march to Calais. For where all way of flight or retreat is stopped, the basest Soldier will rather die with glory in the front of his battle, than fly and be killed with ignominy. So true a Mistress of hardy resolutions is Despair: and no less true this Proverb of ours, Make a Coward fight, and he will kill the Devil. On the contrary, it hath been the use of divers politic Captains, to make their own Soldiers fight more resolutely, by taking from them all hope of safety, but by battle. So did William the Conqueror; who at his arrival into England, burned the ships which transported his Army: thereby giving his Soldiers to wit, that their lives lay in the strength of their arms, and courage of their hearts, not in the nimbleness of their heels. Tariff, the leader of the Moors into Spain, burnt likewise all his Navy, one only Pinnace excepted; which he reserved to carry tidings of his success.  
When Charles Martell encountered that infinite host of the Saracens, (of which you have already heard) he commanded the people of Tours to open the gates only to the Victors. Then he led his Army over the Loire, placing on the banks thereof certain troops of horsemen, to kill all such as fled out of the field; Hereby informing his men, that there was to them no more France than what they fought on: unless they were Conquerors. In like manner, the same Themistocles, cunningly working the Persians to enclose the Greek Navy on every side: inflamed the Grecians with such courage, by a necessity of fight, that they gave their enemies the most memorable defeat that ever happened on those seas.  
But to proceed, the People of this Province have more in them of the old Gall, than any in France, as lying so betwixt the borders of the Goths, and French, that it was never throughly planted or possessed by either. An Arguwent whereof may be, that they are naturally more rude, subtle, crafty, and contentious than the rest of their Country men: and have a Dialect by themselves much differing from the common French, having many words mixed with it (questionless some remainders of the ancient gallic) which the natural French man understands not. In the division of Gaul by the Emperor Constantine, they were reckoned for a part of Aquitania secunda: and as a part thereof, won from the Romans, with Limosin, Perigort, and Quercu, by Euricus King of the Goths in Spain. Of whose Kingdom it continued part, till those Goths were dispossessed of their hold in France, by Clovis the fifth King of the French, surnamed the Great. After which it belonged to the Kings of that People; by the Posterity of Charles the Great, assigned to some Provincial Governors with the title of Earls. One of which being named Ebles (of the old Gothish race, if I guess aright) by the last Will and Testament of William the Debonair Duke of Aquitain and Earl of Auvergne, succeeded in that fair Estate. Poictou by this means made a part of the Dukedom of Aquitain, came with it at the last to the Kings of England; as shall there be shown: and being theirs, was given with the title of Earl by King Henry the second, to Richard surnamed Cuer de Lion, who was after King: seized upon by the French in the unfortunate reign of King John, with the rest of the English Provinces, Anno 1202. Alphonso, brother to Lewis the 9th is made Earl of Poictou: and being again recovered by King Henry the third, it was by him conferred on his Brother Richard Earl of Cornwall. But Henry being entangled in the Baron's Wars, and Richard wholly taken up with the affairs of Germany, of which by some of the Electors he was chosen Emperor▪ it was fully conquered by the French, and never since dismembered from that Crown, for aught I can find. For though in the more active times of King Edward the third, some of the best Towns and pieces of it were possessed by the English: yet were they lost again soon after, according to the various successes and events of War.   

11 LIMOSIN, 12 PERIGORT, 13 QUERCU.  
THese Provinces I have joined together, because for the most part they have followed the same fortune; being sometimes French, and sometimes English, according to the successes of either Nation.  
1 LIMOSIN, the largest of the three, hath on the East, Bourbonnois; on the West Perigart; and on the North, and Northwest, Poictou and Berry; on the South, Auverg●e. It is divided into the Higher, properly called Limosin; and the Lower, commonly called La March: both parts, but specially Lafoy March, 
Perigort, & Quereu,  which lieth towards Auvergne, being mountainous, and not very fruitful; but of a free and open Air, inhabited by a people of a more stayed and sober nature than the rest of the French; frugal in expense, and moderate in diet; only so great devourers of bread, that they are grown into a Byword.  
The chief Towns in La March, or the Lower Limosin, are, 1 Tulles, seated in a rough and hilly Country, a Bishops See. 2 Uzarche, seated amongst the mountains, on the River Vezere, a very fierce and violent current: with which so sortified on all sides, that it is thought to be a very strong and secure dwelling. 3 Treinac. 4 Dous●nac. 5 Belmont. 6 Meissac. 7 Bri●e la Gaillard, etc. In the Higher Limosin the chief Towns are 1 Lymoges, a Bishops See, the principal of the Lemovices, from whom denominated; by Ptolemy called Ratiastum. A neat, but no large City, rich, populous, and inhabited by a people of so great an industry, that they compel every one to work, and is therefore by the French called the Prison of Beggars. Seated on the Vienne. At the taking of it, when revolted, Edward the Black Prince could by no means be alured to pity the distressed Citizens, till pursuing his enemies, he saw three French Gentlemen make head against his Army; the consideration of whose magnanimity drew him to pity, where before he had vowed revenge. 2 Chaluz, at the besieging of which, our Richard the first was slain by a shot from an Arbalist; the use of which warlike engine, he first showed unto the French. Whereupon a French Poet made these verses, in the person of Atropos.  

Hoc volo, non aliâ Richardum morte perire,  
Ut qui Francigenis Baelistae primitùs usum  
Tradidit, ipse sui rem primitùs experiatur:  
Quamque aliis docuit, in se vim sentiat artis.   

It is decreed, thus must great Richard die,  
As he that first did teach the French to dart  
An Arbalist; 'tis just he first should try  
The strength, and taste the fruits of his own Art.   
The man that shot him was called Bertram de Gurdon, who being brought before the King (for the King neglecting his wounds, never gave over the Assault till he gained the place) boldly justified his Action, as done in the service of his Country, and for revenge of the death of his Father and Brother, whom the King had caused to be slain. Which heard, the King not only caused him to be set at liberty, but gave him an hundred shillings sterling in reward of his gallantry. 3 Soubsterre●n, on the confines of Berry. 4 Confaulat. 5 Dorat, on the River Vienne. 6 Bo●sson. 7 B●rat, of which nothing memorable.  
2 PERIGORT, hath on the East Auvergn and Quercu; on the West Xantoigne; on the North Limosin; and on the South some part of Gascoine. The Country and people are much of the same condition with that of Limosin, saving that Perigort is the more woody; and those woods plentiful of Chestnuts. The chief Towns of it are, 1 Perigeux, the principal City of the Petrogorii, by Ptolomi● called Vessina, now a Bishops See, some footsteps of which name remain in a part of Perigeux, (for the Town is divided into two parts) which to this day is called Vesune, in which standeth the Cathedral Church, and the Bishop's Palace. The whole City seated in a very pleasant valley, environed with Downes affording a most excellent Wine; and having in it, as a mark of the Roman greatness, the ruins of a large and spacious Amphitheatre. 2 Bergerac, seated on the great River of Dordonne. 3 Sarlat, a Bishops See. 4 Nontron, defended with a very strong Castle. 5 Miramont. 6 Lafoy Roche. 7 Marsae, where is a Well which ebbeth and floweth according to the pulse of the River of Bourdeaux. And 8 Ang●lesme, in the Northwest, towards Xantoigne, the seat of the Eugolismenses in the time of the Romans, now a Bishops See: seated upon the River of Charente, with which it is almost encompassed; the other side being defended by a steep and rocky mountain. A Town of great importance, when possessed by the English, being one of their best outworks for defence of Bourdeaux: one of the Gates hereof being to this day called Chande, seems to have been the work of Sir john Chando●s Banneret, one of the first Founders of the most noble Order of the Garter, than Governor hereof for King Edward the third. Being recovered from the English by Charles the fifth, it was bestowed on john, the third Son of Lewis Duke of Orleans, Grandfather of King Francis the first, with the title of an Earldom only, Anno 1408. Afterwards made a Dukedom in the person of the said King Francis, before his coming to the Crown. And for the greater honour of it, as much of the adjoining Country was laid unto it, as maketh up a Territory of about 24 French Leagues in length, and 15 in breadth: Within which circuit are the Towns of Chasteau-net●f, and Coignac, on the River of Charente. 3 Roche Falcon, 4 Chabannes. 5 Meriville. 6 Villebois, etc. Since that united to the Crown, it hath of late times given the title of Duke to Charles Earl of Auvergne, Anno 1618. The Base Son of Charles the ninth, consequently extracted from the house of Angolesme.  
3 QUERCU, is encompassed about with Limosin, Perigort, Languedoc, and Auvergne. A populous Country for the bigness (being one of the least in all France) and very fruitful withal, though somewhat mountainous. The principal places in it, 1 Cahors, the chief City of the Cadurc● in the times of the Romans; still a great, strong, and well traded Town, and the See of a Bishop, 
Aquitain.  who is also the Temporal Lord of it; seated upon the River Loch. From hence descended and took name the noble Family of Chaworth, De Cadurcis in Latin: out of which, by a Daughter of Patrick de Cadurcis, Lord of Ogmore and Kidwelly in the Marches of Wales, married to Henry the third Earl of Lancaster, come the Kings of England, and most of the Royal houses in Europe. 2 Montalban, a Bishops See also, built on the top of an high mountain, and so well fortified by all advantages of Art, that it is thought to be the most defensible of any in France: of which it gave sufficient proof in that notable resistance which it made to King Lewis the thirteenth, in his Wars against those of the Religion, Anno 1622. 3 Soulac, upon the River Dordonne. 4 Nigrepellisse, another of the Towns possessed by the Protestant party, reduced to the obedience of King Lewis the thirteenth, Anno 1621. but in Novemb. following, they murdered the King's Garrison, and the next year denied admission to the King. Taken at last, Anno 1622. by the King in person; the punishment did exceed the Crime. For the men were not only killed and hanged, as they had deserved; but many of the women also: some of them having their secret parts rammed with Gunpowder, and so torn in pieces by the unpatterned Barbarism of the merciless and revengeful Soldiers. 5 Chasteau-Sarasin, a strong Town on the Garond. 6 Nazaret. 7 Burette, etc.  
The ancient Inhabitants of these 3 Provinces, were the Lemovices, the Petrocorii, and the Cadurci beforementioned: of which the Lemovices and Cadurci, were cast into the Province of Aquitania Prima, the Petrocorii and Engolismenses into Aquitania Secunda. In the declining of that Empire, seized on by the Goths, but from them speedily extorted by the conquering French. Afterwards when King Henry the third of England released his right in the Provinces of Normandy, Poictou, Anjou, Tourein and Maine; Lewis the ninth, to whom this release was made, gave him in satisfaction of all former interesses, 300000 l. of Anjovin money, the Dukedom of Guienne, the County of Xaintoigne, as far as to the River of Charent, with the Province of Limosin. And on the Capitulations made betwixt Edward the third of England, and John of France, than Prisoner to him, Perigort and Quenou (amongst other conditions) were consigned over to the English, discharged of all Resort and Homage to the Crown of France, After which times respectively they remained all three in the possession of the English, until their final expulsion by King Charles the seventh, never since that dismembered from the Crown thereof.   

14 AQUITAIN.  
THe Dukedom of AQUITAIN, the greatest and goodliest of all France, contained the Provinces of Xaintogne, 2 Guienne, 3 Gascoigne; with the Isles of Oleron and Rees, and other Islands in the Aquitainick or Western Ocean.  
1 XAINTOIGNE is bounded on the East with Limosin and Perigort; on the West, with the Aquita●ick Ocean; on the North, with Poictou; and on the South, with Guienne: So called from Saints one of the Principal Cities of it: as that from the Santones, a Nation here inhabiting in the time of the Romans, whose chief City it was. The River of Charente running thorough the middle of it, and so on the North border of it emptieth itself into the Ocean, just opposite to the Isle of Oleron; having first taken in the Seugne and the Boutonne, two lesser Rivers.  
The chief Towns of it are, 1 Saints, by Ptolemy called Mediolanum, by Antonine, Civitas Santonum, seated upon the Charente, a Bishops See, and the Seneschalsie for the Country. 2 S. John d' Angelie, situate on the Boutonne, a Town impregnably fortified; whereof it hath given sufficient testimony in the Civil Wars of France about Religion. 3 Marans, a little port, but in a marishy and inconvenient situation. 4 Bourg sur la mer, upon the Dordonne, which for the wideness of it is here called a Sea. 5 Retraicte, seated near the confluence of the two great Rivers, the Garond, and the Dordonne. 6 Blaye, the most Southern Town of all this Country, defended with a strong Castle, and a good Garrison for securing the passage unto Bourdeaux; this Town being seated on the very mouth of the River which goeth up to it. 7 Rochel, Rupella in the present Latin, but anciently called Santonum Portus, as the chief Haven of the Santones, a well noted Port, in the most northern part of Xaintoigne; from whence the Country hereabouts is called RO●HELOIS. The Town seated in the inner part of a fair and capacious Bay; the entrance of which is well assured by two very strong Forts, betwixt which there is no more space, than for the passage of a good ship; every night closed up with a massy Chain: and the whole Town either environed with deep marshes, or fortified with such Bulwarks, trenches, and other works of modern Fortification, that it was held to be, as indeed it was, the safest retreat for those of the Reformed Religion in the time of their troubles; as may be seen by the story of it, which in brief is thus. At the end of the second Civil Wars, Anno 1568. Many Towns considering how ill the former Peace had been observed, refused to take in any of the King's Garrisons, or permit any of the Papists to bear Arms amongst them; of which Rochel was one: which also, contrary to the King's command, maintained a Navy for their safety by Sea, and continued their Fortifications for their defence by Land. So that hither the Queen of Navarre and her Son retired, as to a place of safety. Anno 1570. Rochel alone, of all the French Towns held good for the Protestants, and is by Monsieur Jo●nville on all sides blocked up: but the siege soon raised, and Rochel, Montalban, Sancerre, with others, made cautionary for the peace ensuing. Anno 1575. besieged by Byron the elder, with an Army of 50000 men, and 60 pieces of Artillery; Charles the ninth, Henry Duke of A●jou, the D. of Aumal, etc. being also present at the service. It held out from the beginning of March, till the 7th of June, 
Guienne▪  and was then freed: the City having in one month endured 13000 shot; and the King lost 20000 men, amongst them the Duke of Aumal for one, Anno 75, & 78. it was attempted by Lin●erean, the Isle of Ree taken, but soon recovered: the King of Navarre, and Prince of Conde, after that defeat, being received in, in triumph. Anno 1577. besieged to Seaward by L●nsac: who being also beaten back, a Peace was made, and eight cautionary Towns more added to their former strength. In the troubles of 85, and 88 the Princes abovenamed made it their Retreat; and from thence issued to divert the purposes of the Duke of Mercoeur. The next year, Henry the third being slain, and the King of Navarre seated in the Throne, the Protestant party increased exceedingly in power and number; and taking advantage of the minority of Lewis the thirteenth, governed themselves apart as a ●rea Estate, Rochel being made the head of their Commonwealth; fortified to that end with 12 Royal Bastions of Free stone, with double ditches, deep and broad in the bottom; abundantly furnished with Powder and Ammunition, 150 pieces of Cannon, besides Culverins and smaller pieces, with victuals, and all other necessaries to endure a Siege: and grown unto so great wealth, that there were thought to be an hundred or sixscore Merchants, worth 100000 Crowns a piece. This drew upon them the great War, in the years 1621., and 1622. Which ended in the loss of all their Garrisons, except Rochel, and Montalban: those to remain in pledge with the Protestant Party, but for 3 years only. Which time expired, the Rochellers were again besieged both by Sea and Land, the Isle of Ree took from them, their Fleet broke at Sea, & the mouth of their Haven so barred up with Ships chained together, and sunk into it, and other works of stupendious greatness in the very Ocean, that no foreign succours out of England, (however really intended, and bravely followed) had been able to come to their relief. In the end, having endured all the extremities of a tedious Siege, they yielded themselves to the King's mercy, Anno 1628. Montalban, Nismas, and other places newly fortified, submitting at the same time also.  
II. GVIENNE, the second Province of the Dukedom of Aquitaine, is bounded on the North with Xaintoigne, from which parted by the River of Dordonne; on the South, with Gascoigne; on the East, with Perigort; and on the West with the Aquitanick Ocean, from the Pyrenean hills to the River of Bourdeaux. The reason of the name I could never learn. Some think it a corruption of the old name, Aquitaine; but not very probably. The Country generally plentiful of Corn and Wine; the one being vented into Spain, and the other into England. The people, as those of Xaintoigne also, tall of stature, of able bodies, haters of servitude and baseness, and well practised in arms: which qualities of the mind, and constitution of body, (being therein so different from the rest of France) it is possible enough they might have from the English, who for 300 years were possessed of the Country, and have left many tracts of their language in it.  
The principal Rivers of this Province, are, the Garond, and the Dordonne, meeting together at Retraicte, a Town of Xaintoigne; and thence in one Channel falling into the Ocean: the Country betwixt these two Rivers being called Le Pais entre les deux mers, or, The Country betwixt the two Seas; the Rivers hereabouts resembling a small Sea in wideness. Of lesser note are, 1 Jearne, 2 Baize, 3 Lo●, and 4 Lisle, falling into the Garond in their several places.  
Chief Towns hereof are, 1 Bonrdeaux, seated on the South bank of the Garond, not far from the Sea, amongst the marshes. The chief City of the Bituriges, who possessed this tract; and for distinctions fake, were called Bituriges Vhisci, those of Bourges being called Bituriges Cubi. It was after called Burdegala, and Civitas Burdegalensium; the Metropolis at that time of Aquitania Secunda; consequently an Archbishops See, as it still continueth. A fair▪ rich, and populous City, beautified with many goodly buildings, an University founded here by King Lewis the 11h, and a large Cathedral. It was made Parliamentary for Aquitain, and the parts adjoining, by King Charlos the 7th. Anno 1453. not long after the expulsion of the English thence: and is one of the most noted Empories in all the Kingdom; frequented very much by the Dutch and English for Gascoigne wines: over which last, the French are so jealous, that they permit them not to come up the River, till they have unladen all their Ordnance at the Port of Blaye. The Country hereabouts is, from this Town, called Bourdelois. 2 Fronsac, lying in the Country betwixt the two Seas (as they call it,) which gives the title of a Duke to the noble Family of the Earls of S. Paul, now Dukes of Fronsac, and to the Country round about, the name of Fronsadaze. 3 Libourn, at the confluence of the two great Rivers, opposite to Retraicte in Xaintoigne. 4 Soulac, at the influx of the Garond, in the Peninsula, or demi-Island, called the Country of Medoc. 5 Baionne, a Sea Town, and Episcopal See, frontiring on the coast of Spain. 6 St. John de Luz, at the foot of the Pyrenaean mountains, all about which, the people speak the Basquish, or old Gascoigne language, being the same with that of Biscay. 7 D' Acqs, an Episcopal See, by Ptolemy called Aquae Augustae, (Civitas Aquensium, by Antoninus) from whence this part of Gaul had the name of Aquitaine. These three last being all of them Frontier Towns, are strongly fortified. 8 Bazas, (called Cossium by Ptolemy) the chief City of the Vasates, whom Antoninus placeth in this tract, now a Bishops See, situate on the borders of Gascoigne, in the Country from hence called Bazadas. Towns of less note, 1 Esparrez. 2 St. Basil. 3 Reule. 4 Chasteau-Moron. 5 Monseguer. 6 Saincterre, etc. Here is also in this Province the Country of Buche, lying along the Sea-coast from Baionne to Medoc: a barren, poor, and wretched Country, the worst piece of France; only remarkable for the Lords or owners of it, formerly of the house of Foix: one of which, was that john de Foix, created Earl of Kendal, and Knight of the Garter, by King Henry the sixth; but better known in English stories by the name of Capital, 
Gascoigne,  or Capdau de Buche, the Lords hereof having no higher title than that of Captain.  
III. GASCOIGNE, the third and largest part of the Dukedom of Aquitain, hath on the East, Languedoc, from which parted by the River Garond; on the West, the Pyrenean mountains, which divide it from Spain; on the North, Perigort, Quercu, and some part of Guienne; and on the South, a main tract of the Pyrenees, running on to Languedoc. The Country generally fruitful, but of Wines especially, brought hence to Bourdeaux as the Staple for that commodity, and thence transported into England in great abundance.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Auscii, Lastoraces', Convenares, Conserani, etc. making up a great part of the Province of Novempopulonia: united in this name of Gascoigne on the conquest of it by the V●scones, a Spani● Nation, who fell in here, during the reign of Dagobert the 11th King of the French. And though subdued by Clovis the second, Son of Dagobert, yet they left their name unto the Country; divided afterwards according to the chief Signeuries and Estates thereof, into 1 the Principality of Bearn, 2 the Earldoms of Foix, 3 Comminges, 4 Bigorre, 5 Armaignac, 6 Albret, and 7 the Country of Agenois,  
1 The Principality of BEARN, is situate at the foot of the Pyrenees, where they join to Langnedoc; so called from Benearnum, a principal City of this tract, mentioned by Antoninus, and others of the ancient Writers. The Country of good pasturage, though amongst the mountains, affording plenty of cattle, butter and cheese; and in some places wines also, little inferior in taste and colour to the best of France; and many medicinal springs issuing from the hills adjoining.  
The Religion here, as generally in all Gascoigne, is that of the Reformed Churches; introduced about the year 1560; or rather then confirmed by public authority of the King and Queen of Navarre: at what time the Mass, Tithes, Church-lands, and the Prelate's Votes in Parliament (according to the Genevian way of Reformation) were condemned together. And so it stood until the year 1620, when by the power and authority of Lewis the 13th. King of France and Navarre, the Prelates were restored to their Votes and Lands, the Clergy to their Tithes, and Mass caused also to be said in some of their Churches: yet so that those of the Reformed were left unto the free exercise of their own Religion, as in former times.  
The principal Towns hereof are, 1 Orthes, the same which anciently was called Benearnum. 2 Lescar, a Bishops See, the ancient seat and habitation of the Princes of Bearn. 3 Oleron, a Bishops See also, mounted upon a high hill, in the more mountainous parts of the Country. 4 Saineterrae▪ well garrisoned since the reduction of this Country to the King's obedience. 5 Pau, the principal of all the Province, honoured with a Parliament or Court of judicature for all the Country; and a fair Palace of the Prince, built by Henry of Albret, King of Navarre, and Lord of Bearn; and the Seat of him and his Successors, till the coming of King Henry the 4th to the Crown of France. 6 Grenade, upon the Frontier towards Begorre.  
This Country for a long time followed the fortune of Aquitain; and in the general dismembering of the French Empire, had its own Proprietaries, who were the absolute Lords of it, acknowledging no Superior for aught I can find. Increased with the Earldom of Begorre, by the marriage of Gaston, Prince of Bearn, with the Heir of that House: united to the Earldom of Foix, by the marriage of Roger Bernard Earl of Foix, with Margaret, Daughter of that Gaston, and Heir of Bearn, Anno 1263: afterwards added to the Crown of Navarre, by the marriage of Gaston Earl of Foix, and Sovereign of Bearn, with Eleanor the Heir of that Kingdom, Anno 1481. descending with that Crown upon Henry of Bonrbon, King of Navarre, and afterwards of France, by the name of Henry the fourth: but governed by him always as a State distinct, without relation or resort to the Crown of France. But Lewis the 13 his Son, finding some inconvenience in that distinction, incorporated it for ever to the rest of his Dominions, An. 1620, though not without some opposition from the Subjects of Bearn, which he was fain to over-bear by his personal presence, and the advantage of such Forces as he carried with him. Since reckoned as a part of that Kingdom; awed, as the rest of France, by Forts and Garrisons; and governed in Civil matters by the Parliament established at Pau; the Judges and Counsellors thereof at the Kings appointing.  
2 The Earldom of FOIX, is situate on the West of Languedoc, Commingeois interposing betwixt it and Bearn. Chief Towns hereof are, 1 Maseros, on the Garond, a Bishops See. 2 Pamieres, a Bishops See also, seated on the River Lagiere. 3 Foix, on the same River, called in Latin, Fuxium, and the Earls hereof Comites Fuxiensos', the chief seat of the Flussates in the times of the Romans, now giving name to all the Country. 4 Mirande in the County of Esterac, and the chief thereof; but otherwise of no great Account. 5 Savardun, and 6 Monthault, two strong pieces. 7 Mirepoix (a●piduus Mirapens●) a Bishops See also, but of no note otherwise. The olf Inhabitants of this tract, besides the Flussates abovementioned, were called Vaccaei, perhaps of the abundance of Kine bred in the pastures hereof: upon which ground, the Earls of Foix have for their Arms. 3 Cows passant Gules, horned and hoofed Azure, in a Field Or.  
The first of these Earls was Bernard of Carcassone, advanced to this honour by Raimond Earl of Th●louse, who had then the Sovereignty hereof, Anno 1062. Roger Bernard, the ninth Earl, united Bearn to his Estate, as before is said, whose Grandchild Isabe● (the male issue failing) conveyed the whole Estate to Archembald, Lord or Captain of Buche, in the Province of Guienne. Gaston, the Nephew of this Archembald by his Eldest Son john, was for his many good services to Charles the 7th, made a Peer of France: and by his marriage with Eleanor or Leanora Daughter and Heir of John King of 〈◊〉, united that Kingdom to his house, though he enjoyed it not in his own person. By means or which Alliances, and other improvements of Estate, this Family grew to so great power an reputation, that there were four Queens at one time descended from it: viz. Catharine Queen of 〈…〉 Queen of Castil●, Anne Queen of France, and Anne Queen of Hungary and 〈◊〉. Before which time (I mean the addition of Navarre to their other Estates) the Earls of 〈◊〉 were in so high esteem in the Court of France, that in all public Ceremonies they took place of the Earls of 〈◊〉, though extracted from the Royal blood, and lived in a condition equal to most Kings in Christendom.  
3 The Earldom of BEGORRE is situate North of Bearn, at the foot of the Pyren●an mountains: so called from the B●gerrones, the old inhabitants hereof in the time of Caesar. Scattered in which, and the adjoining Principality of Bearn, live a leprous and infectious people, of noisome breaths, deformed bodies, and ghastly visages: in which regard, not suffered to have any commerce with other people, nor to inherit any lands; but only to apply themselves to drudgery, and the basest of mechanic trades. From their great misshapen heads called ●ape●s or Gabets.  
Chief Towns hereof are, 1 Baigneres, famous for medicinal Baths. 2 Lou de, of which nothing memorable. 3 Tarbe, (by Antonine called ●ursaubica) seated upon the River Ad●●, honoured with a strong Castle, an Episcopal See, and the Seneschalsie for all the Country of Begorre. Which Country having for long time it's own Proprietary Earls, was at the last, by the marriage of Petronilla, Daughter and Heir of Esquibal the last Earl, to Boson Viscount of Marsan and Gabardan, added to that house. Whose Daughter Matthee, marrying to Ga●●● Prince of Bearn increased that Principality with those goodly pieces of Marsan, Gabardan and Begorre, all brought unto the house of Foix, by Margaret, Daughter of this Gaston, married to Roger Bernard, as before is said.  
The Arms hereof were Azure, a Cross Argent. By Inigo Arista the Son of Simon, Earl of this Country, called to the Crown of Navarre, made the Arms of that Kingdom; whereas before that time, the Arms thereof had been Argent, on a Tree Vert, a Cross in chief, Gules. Which Arms are said to have been took by Garciâ Nimines the first King of Navarre, from such a sign appearing to him in the Sky, before his first battle with the Moors.  
4 The Earldom of COMMINGES lieth betwixt Bearn and Foix, running betwixt both as far Northward, as to border Eastward on Begorre. Divided into the Higher, and more mountainous part, situate at the foot of the Pyrences; and the Lower, which hath somewhat more of the valley in it. The old inhabitants of both, the Convenae, and Conserant. The principal places at present in the Lower Comminges are, 1 Lombes, a Bishops See, but of late erection. 2 Moret, upon the River Garonne. 3 Samathan. 4 Lisle en Dodon. And in the Higher, there is, 1 Conserans, once the chief Town of the Conserani, now a Bishops See, situate at the foot of the Pyrenean hills. 2 S. Bernaud, of old called Civitas Convenarum, a Bishops See also, and the chief City of this Earldom. 3. St. Beat, 4 St. F●egou, 5 Monregeau, or Mons Regius, 6 Silliers, etc.  
Of the estate of this Earldom I have little to say, but that it was allied to the house of Foix, by the marriage of Eleanor, the Daughter of an Earl hereof, to Gaston the second of that name, and 11th Earl: and afterwards unto that of Armaignac; John of Lescon, a Bastard of the Earl of Armaignac being Earl of Comminges, and one of the Marshals of France in the time of King Lewis the 11th. The Arms of which Earls were Gules, four orels in Saltier, Argent.  
5 The Earldom of ARMAIGNAC, the greatest of all these Estates considered severally and apart, lieth on the North of Comminges, and so extendeth itself to the banks of the River Garond. Principal Towns are, 1 Aux, upon the River Gez, anciently called Augusta Ausciorum; the Metropolis or head City of the Novempopulonia; by consequence an Archbishops See: The Revenues whereof are said to be the greatest of any Prelates in France, computed at no less than 40000 l. per Annum. 2 Lectoure, a Bishops See, called of old Lestoracium, in our modern Latin, Lectodurum. A Town so well fortified, when in the power of the Earls of Armaignac, that it held out a siege of 3 months against the forces of France: but since it came into the hands of the French Kings, so strengthened and embattelled according to the modern Art of Fortifications, that it is held the strongest Bulwark of the Kingdom on this side, and their surest Fortress against Spain. 3 Lisle de jourdain, which hath the title of an Earldom, bought at the price of 38000 Crowns, of john Duke of Bourbon, by john the 4th Earl of Armaignac, Anno 1421. 4 Auvillar. 5 Auzan. 6 Chastel-neau. 7 Malbourquer, 8 Nests, etc.  
The Earls of Armaignac fetch their Original from the Kings of Navarre; Sancho the great, having subdued some Lands in Gascoigne, which he conferred on Garsias a younger Son of his, with the title of Earl of Armaignac, Anno 1014. On which foundation it increased so fast, both in power and honour, that Barnard the fourth Earl hereof, came to be Constable of France. And so did john the 4th of that name, by the favour of King Charles the 7th: who also writ himself, By the Grace of G●d Earl of Armaignac; according to the stile of Sovereign Princes. A man of so considerable power in these parts of France; that the marriage of a Daughter of his to our Henry the sixth, was thought the best means for establishing his Estate in Guienne. And I remember it was charged on the Duke of Suffolk, That by breaking off this alliance for that of Anjou, he had been the cause of the loss of the King's pieces in France. This greatness, made him subject to the jealousy of King Lewis the 11th, who worried him out of his Estate and his life together. Charles, Brother of this john, 
Aquitaine.  succeeded by the favour of King Charles the 8th. After whose death this fair Estate was seized on to the use of the Crown; till given again by Francis the first to Charles Duke of Alencon, (whose grandfather had married with a Sister of the said Earl john) and to the Lady Margaret his Wife, the said King's Sister: who, after the decease of the Duke of Alencon, brought it to Henry of Albret, and King of Navarre, her second Husband; returning so to the Original from whence first it came.  
The Arms of these great Princes, were Quarterly 1 Argent, a Lion Azure; 2 Gules, a Leopard Lion Or. The 3d, etc.  
6 The Earldom of ALBRET is situate on the Northwest of Armaignac, bordering upon Guienne. The chief Town whereof is, 1 Nerac, seated on the River of Baize; the only place of strength and moment in all this estate. 2 Chastell-Ialone, well seated to disturb the Trade betwixt Bourdeaux and Gascoigne, but not able to endure a siege. 3 Mont de Marsan, and 4 Tartas, both seated on the River Ladour: and all four formerly Towns of Caution for those of the Reformed Religion; of which this Country is so full, that the Popish Religion had hardly any footing in all this Territory. Which, though the smallest of the six, and of least Antiquity, had yet the fortune to incorporate all the rest into it. For john, the Son of Alan Earl of Albret, by his marriage with Catharine, Daughter and sole Heir of Gaston, Son of Gaston Earl of Foix, and of Leanora Princess of Navarre, added to his Estate the Signeuries of Bearn, Foix, and Begorre. And Henry of Albret his Son, by marrying the Lady Margaret, Sister of King Francis the first, united to it those of Armaignac and Comminges. By jean the Daughter of this Henry, the whole Estate was brought to Antony of Bourbon, Duke of Vendosme, and Father to King Henry the 4th, becoming so united to the Crown of France, from which it was at first dismembered.  
The Arms of these Earls, were Quarterly 1 France; 2 Gules, a Border ingrailed Arg: The 3d, etc.  
7 As for the Country of AGENOIS, the last part of Gascoigne, it never had other Lords (after it left off to be French) than the Dukes of Aquitaine. The principal Cities of it, 1 Again, a rich, populous, and well-traded Town, seated on the Garonne, in a fruitful Country: A Bishops See, a Seneschalsie, and held to be the fairest in Gascoigne. 2 Condon, a Bishops See also, from which the parts adjoining are called Condonnois. 3 Villeneufne, 4 Claerac, 5 Marmand, 6 Foy, etc.  
Thus having took a brief view of those several members which made up the great body of the Dukedom of Aquitaine; let us next look on the Estate of the whole thus brought together: which in the declination of the Roman Empire, was given unto the Goths, before possessed of all Gallia Narbonensis, by Valentinian the 3d, as a reward for their service in driving the Alani out of Spain. Long the Goths had not held it, when they were outed of it by Clovis, the fifth King of the French, continuing under his Successors, till Ludovicus Pius made it a Kingdom, and gave it unto Pepin his youngest Son. But Charles and Pepin, the Sons of this Pepin, being dispossessed by Charles the Bald; it was by him conferred on Arnulph, of the house of Burgundy, for his many good services against the Normans, Anno 844. Whose Successors take here in this order following.  

The Dukes of Aquitaine.  
844. 1 Ranulph of Burgundy, first Duke of Aquitaine.  
875 2 William, Earl of Auvergne, Nephew of Ranulph.  
902. 3 Ebles, Earl of Poictou, succeeded in Aquitaine and Auvergne, by the Will and Testament of Duke William.  
911. 4 Ebles II. Son of Ebles the first.  
935. 5 W●lliam II. the Son of Ebles the second.  
970. 6 William III. Son of William the second.  
1019. 7 Guy, the Son of William the third.  
1021. 8 William IU. Son of Guy.  
1086. 9 William V. Son of William the fourth.  
1156. 10 Lewis the seventh of France, in right of Eleanor his Wife, sole Heir of William the fifth.  
1152 11 Henry, Duke of Normandy, and Earl of Anjou, etc. in right of Elea●or his Wife, divorced from Lewis on pretence of some consanguinity; after King of England.  
1169. 12 Richard, King of England, the Son of Henry.  
1199. 13 john, King of England, the Brother of Richard; who forfeiting his estates in France, on a judicial sentence pronounced against him for the (supposed) murder of his Nephew Arthur, Duke of Bretagne; Aquitaine and the rest of the English Provinces were seized on by the French, Anno 1202. But notwithstanding this Arrest, the English still continued their pretensions to it, till at the last it was agreed betwixt King Lewis the 9th of France, and Henry the 3d of England, Anno 1259. That the English should rest satisfied with Guienne, the bounds whereof were to be the Pyrenees on the South, and the River of Charente on the North, comprehending therein also the Country of Limosin; and that on his investiture into this estate, he should relinquish all his rights in Normandy, Aujou, Tourein, Ma●●e, &c. In consideration whereof, he should have 150000 Crowns in ready money. On this accord the Kings of England became Homagers to the Crown of Fra●ce, 
Languedoc.  which sometimes they omitted, sometimes did it by Proxy, but never in person, till Philip de ●alo●s required it of K. Edw. the third: and because such duties are not personally done by Sovereign Princes, Du Serres shall describe the formality of it. The place designed for this exploit was the Church of Amiens, to which Edward came (saith he) with such a Train, as was intended rather to the honour of himself than the French King. Royally attired he was, with a long Robe of Crimson Veluot, powdered with Leopards of Gold; his Crown upon his head, his Sword by his side, and Golden spurs upon his heels. Philip, attended by the chief Officers of the Realm, sat upon his Throne, apparelled in a long robe of purple Velvet, powdered with Flower de Lyces of Gold; his Crown upon his head, and the Sceptre in his hand. Viscount Melun, the great Chamberlain of France, commanded Edward to take off his Crown, sword, and spurs, and to kneel down: which he did accordingly. Then taking both his hands, and joining them together, he said unto him; You become a Liege man to the King my Master, who is here present, as Duke of Guienne, and Peer of France, and promise to be faithful and loyal to him; say yea: and Edward said yea, and arose. But the Historian notes withal, that Philip paid dearly for this Pageant, the young King never forgetting the indignity which was put upon him, till he had made France a field of blood. And here it is to be observed, that though the Kings of England by this new investiture, were entitled Dukes of G●ienne only, yet they had all the power and privileges of Dukes of Aquitaine, excepting the homage of the great Lords and Earls of Gascoigne, which formerly belonged unto them. Insomuch as Richa●d the second, though Duke of Guienne only in stile and title, invested his Uncle John of Gaunt in that brave estate, under the stile and title of Duke of Aquitaine, summoned to Parliament by that name by the said King Richard. From this Accord betwixt the Kings, the English had possession of the Dukedom of Guienne, according to the order of their Successions, from the 40th of King Henry the third, Anno 1259, to the 29th of King Henry the sixth, Anno 1452 (the intercalation of John of Gaunt excepted only:) when outed of all their old rights in France, rather by the good fortune, than by the valour of Charles the seventh, the English then divided in Domestic Factions, and not at leisure to look after the affairs of France. Nor do I find, that Guienne being thus recovered, was ever dismembered from that Crown, but when King Lewis the 11th assigned it over to his Brother the Duke of Berry, to take him off from joining with the Dukes of Bretagne and Burgundy in a new confederacy, who held it but two years, and died the last Duke of Guienne.   
The Arms of this Dukedom were Gules, a Leopard or Lion Or; which joined to the two Lions of Normandy, make the Arms of England.   

13 LANGUEDOC.  
LANGUEDOC is bounded with the Pyrenaean hills, the Land of Ro●sillon, and the Mediterranean, on the South; on the North, with Forest, Quer●n, and Auvergn; on the East, with Provence and Dauphin; on the West, with Gascoigne. Whereas the other Frenchmen in an affirmation say Ouy, these of this Country say O●; and therefore Ortelius conjectures, it was called Langued●oc. But the truth is, it took denomination from the Goths, who reigning long in this Country, left behind them a smack of their Language, and therefore it was called Languegotia, and now, Euphoniae gratiâ, termed Languedotia, or Langnedoc, that is, the Goths Language.  
The Country on those parts which lie next to Auvergn, is like the higher parts thereof, mountainous and not very fruitful; in all the rest, as rich and pleasant as the best Provinces in France, and having the advantages of Olives, Raisins, Figs, Oranges, and other fruits not ordinary but here, and in the neighbouring Provence. In that participating the commodities both of France and Spain. The people have somewhat in them of the ancient Goths, and draw nearer to the temper of the Spaniards, than any other of the French, as being accounted very devout, great vaunters of themselves, affecting bravery above their condition and estates; not caring how they pinch it on the working days, or at home in private, so they may flaunt it in the street, and be fine on holidays. The humour also of the Women, and in them more pardonable.  
Principal Rivers of this Province, are 1 Aurance, 2 Lieran, and 3 Orb, emptying themselves into the Rhosne, and Alby, which disburdeneth itself into the Ocean. Chief Towns hereof are, 1 Nismes (in Latin Nemausus) anciently a Colony of the Romans, now a Bishops See; where there remain some marks of the Roman greatness, especially the ruins of a spacious Palace built by the Emperor Adrian. 2 Mont-pelier (in Latin Mons Pessulanus) situate on an high mountain, as the name imports, some twelve miles distant from the Sea; an University for the study of Physic, & for that very happily seated, the Country round about affording great variety of medicinal herbs. A Viscountie in former times, conveied by Marie Daughter of William the last Lord Viscount hereof, to King Peter of Arragon her husband; next, made a Member of the Kingdom of Majorca, and by James King of Majorca, sold to King Philip of Valois. Of late one of the strongest holds which those of the Reformed Religion had in this Country, and memorable for the notable resistance which it made against the whole forces of Lewis the 13th. in the last Civil Wars about Religion. 3 Aleth. and 4 Carcassonne, both Bishops Sees, both seated on the River And; the people of both speaking a corrupt French, with an intermixture of some Spanish. 5 Alby on the River so called, the Civitas Albigentium of Antoninus, the chief of this part of Languedoc, called from hence Lafoy Paix Albigeois; remarkable in church-history for those great opposites to the corruptions and errors of the Church of Rome, called the Albigenses. 6 Beziers, upon the River Orb, a Roman Colony of old, now a Bishops See. 7 Agae, called Agatha by ancient writers, remarkable for a Council held there in the year 450, and fo● a well-frequented Port, at the mouth of the River Egbaud. 8 Narbon, seated on the mouth of the River Aude, the Seat of the Ph●censes, and the first Roman Colony (next after Carthage) out of Italy. In Italy itself (to observe so much by the way) were no less than 150 Colonies; 57 in afric, 29 in Spain, 26 in France, in England 4 only, in Syria 20, and in other Countries some, but very few in respect of the largeness of the Territories. These Colonies were instituted partly to repress Rebellions in the Conquered Countries; partly to resist a foreign enemy, partly to reward the ancient Soldiers, partly to relieve the poorer sort, and partly to purge and empty the City of the superfluity and redundance of her people. Now if the question be asked, whether a Colony or a Fortress be more behooveful, I answer with Boterus in his Raggiod stato, that a Fortress is more fit for sudden use, and a Colony for Continuance: the former are quickly erected, and perhaps as soon lost; the other require some time of settling, and are after of a good sufficiency to defend themselves. As we see in our times, the Spanish Colonies of Cent● and Tanger in afric; and our own of Calais, which was the last Town we lost on the firm Land. This Narbon was in the infancy of the Roman Empire, the most populous and greatest Town of all France: insomuch, as from it all this part of France was called Gallia Narbonensis. A Province of which Pliny delivered us this censure: Narbonensis Gallia agrorum cultu, morum virorumque dignatione, opum amplitudine, nulli provinciarum postponenda; breviterque Italia potius quam provincia, It was also called Gallia Braccata, from the garments that the Inhabitants did wear, which were much like to the Trouzes, which are worn by the Irish footmen, and are called in Latin Bra●cae. 9 Lafoy Puy, the See of a Bishop, who in Latin is called Podiensis, the chief of that part of Languedoc, which is named Velay, the ancient seat of the Velauni. 10 Vivie●s, on the River Rhosne, (by Pliny named Alba Helviorum) from whence the Country adjoining hath the name of Vivaretz. 11 Rhodes or Rutena, the principal City of the Ru●eni, now a Bishops See; from whence the Country round about hath the name of Rouvergn; though some account this Rouvergn, a distinct Province, and no part of Languedoc. 12 ●holous●, seated on the Garonne, anciently the principal City of the Tectosages, and the Tolosates, placed by old Writers in this tract, now the chief of Languedoc, and one of the greatest in all France. The seat of an Archbishop, and an University: So ancient, that some report it to be built when Deborah judged Israel. Here was a Parliamentary Court erected, for the administration of justice in these parts, 1302. As for the Story of Tholouse, it was observed, that certain Soldiers having stole sacrilegiously some Gold out of the Temples of Tholouse, (when it was sacked by Cepio a Roman Consul) came all to miserable and unfortunate ends: hence grew that Adage, Aurum habet Tholosanum, applied to unhappy men.  
But that which deserves most note in the History of it, are the large and spacious Fields about it, called by the Writers of these times by the name of Campi Catalaunici, extending in length 100 in breadth 70 French Leagues. In which fields was fought that terrible Battle between Attila King of the Huns, and Aetius the Roman Lieutenant in France, Aetius was strengthened by the Goths, Franks, Burgundians, and Germans. Attila's Army consisted of Huns, Eruli, Scythe●, Sarmatians, and Suevians, to the number of 500000, of which 180000 that day lost their lives: Attil● himself being driven to that desperate plunge, that making a funeral pile of Ho●se Saddles, he would have burned himself. But his enemies weary of welldoing, or Aetius politicly fearing, that if Attila were quite destroyed, the Goths, Franks, and others of the Barbarians then confederate with him would become too insolent, gave him leave to retire home through Italy, which he harassed with Fire and Sword, murdering the People, and ruining the Towns, so that he was then, and long after, called Flagellum Dei. Aetius, notwithstanding this good service, was by Valentinian the Emperor of the West, rewarded with the loss of his head. By which act, the Emperor (as one truly told him) had cut off his right hand with his left. And indeed so it happened. For not long after, he himself was by Maximus murdered, and the Empire of Rome irrecoverably destroyed. Now that these Fields say here abouts, and not about Chalons in the Province of Champagne (as some learned and industrious men have been of opinion) I am assured by these three reasons. First the improbability that Aetius having got the victory, should suffer such a vast and numerous Army to pass through the whole length of France, from one end to the other, and having wasted all the Country, to break into Italy: and secondly the testimony of ●ornandes an ancient writer, who telleth us, first, that before this fight, Attila had besieged and distressed the City of Orleans, and therefore was not vanquished in the fields of Chalons; and then, that immediately upon the Victory, Torismund the King of the Goths, (his Father Theodori● being slain) in Campis Catalaunicis ubi & pugnav●rat, Regia Majestate subvectus, Tolo●am ingreditur; being proclaimed King in those very fields, entered with great Stat● and Triumph into Tholouse, The Regal City at that time of the Gothish Kingdom. Which plainly proves the place of battle to be near this City: though possible by the name Campi Catalaunici (the great length and breadth thereof considered) we are to understand the whole Country of Languedoc.  
The old Inhabitants of this Country besides the Helvii, the 〈◊〉, the 〈◊〉- Vages, and Albigenses, formerly remembered, were the Ag●●enses, 〈◊〉, G●b●les, Volcae, and the Ar●comici, all which, together with some others of l●sser note, made the Province of Narbonensis Prima, whereof the Metropolis was Narbon. In the falling of the R●man Empire assigned with the rest of Narbonensis, & some part of Spain, to A●●●ulfus King of the 〈◊〉, whom Ho●orius by this gift bought out of italy. The Goths having got so good footing in Gau●▪ enlarged their bounds, by taking in the most part of Aquitain, Quercu, and 〈◊〉: but forced to qu●t them to the French, who Conquered that from them, which they got from the ●omans; and shut them up within the limits of their first Donation: after this they 〈◊〉 as fast in France, as they thrived in Spain; losing Provence to Theodoric King of the 〈◊〉- Goths, or Goths of Itali: Whose successor Amal●sunta, fearing a War from Greece, resigned her interesses in Provence to Theodobert the French King of Mets. Nothing now left unto the Gales of their gallic purchases, but this Languedock only; and this they held as long as they had any thing to do in Europe; but lost it finally to the Moors, with all Spain itself. Recovered from the ●oors by Charles Martel, and added to the rest of the French Empire▪ it was by Charles the great given to one Thursin, of the race of the ancient Kings, with the title of the Earl of Thol●u●e, on condition that he would be Christened. How long it continued in his Race, it is hard to say, the story and succession of these Earls being very imperfect; not settled in a way of Lineal Descent, till the time of Raim●nd the eighth Earl, Brother to another Raimond Earl of St. Giles (a Town of Guienne) whose Grandchild Hugh, being an adventurer in the Wars of the Holy Land, and wanting money to provide himself for that expedition, sold his Estate herein to his Uncle Raimond, the Earl of St. Giles before mentioned. From this time forward we find these Earls to be as often called the Earls of St. Giles, as the Earls of Tholouse; and by that name frequently remembered in the Eastern stories, but not without some mark of infidelity, as if not sound and through-paced to the Cause on foot. A punishment whereof the short continuance of this house is supposed to be. For Raimond the Great, Earl of T●olouse, St. Giles, and Tripoli (in the Holy-Land) had three Sons all of them succeeding; the first two issueless, the third the Father of Raimond, the Father of another Raimond, who proved a great maintainer of the Albigenses, and in pursuance of that Cause murdered the Legate of the Pope sent to Excommunicate him, & strangled his own Brother Baldwin, because he found him not inclinable to his opinions. For this cause Warred upon, and Vanquished by Simon de Monfort, Father of Simon de Monfort, the great Earl of Leicester; and after many troubles, and continual Wars, left his estate and quarrel to his Son named also Raimond, the last Earl of this House; Who proving also a strong Patron of these Albigenses, was condemned for a Heretic, cursed by the Pope, and persecuted by the French Kings, Philip the second, Lewis the 8th, and St. Lewis. This last, willing to make a peaceable composition, married his Brother Alfonso, to Jane daughter and heir to Count Raimond, with this clause, That if it should happen these two to die without issue, than Languedoc should be incorporated to the Crown. Raimond agreed, the marriage was solemnised, Anno 1249. They both died without issue, 1270, and Languedoc returned to the Crown in the days of Philip the third.  
The names and Succession of these Earls, in regard they were Peers of France, great Princes, and for the most part men of action, take in order thus.  

A. Ch. The Earls of Tholouze▪  
779. 1 Tursi●, the first Earl of Tholouze.  
803. 2 William, made Earl by Charlemaigne, Peer of France at the first foundation of that Order.  
828. 3 Isauret Thursin, Son of Thursin the first Earl.  
841 4 Bertrand, Son of Isauret Thursin.  
894. 5 William II. of some other house.  
919. 6 Ponce, a great Justiciar, but of unknown race.  
963. 7 Almaric, of as obscure parentage as Ponce▪  
1003. 8 Raymond, the Brother of Raymond Earl of S. Giles, advanced by Robert King of France.  
1052. 9 William III. Duke of Aquitaine, succeeded in right of his Wi●e, the Daughter of Raymond.  
1086. 10 Hugh armon, Son of William the 3d, sold his Estate and Earldom to his Uncle Raymond.  
1096. 11 Raymond II. Earl of S. G●les, Tholouze● and Tripoli; of great note in the War of the Holy-Land.  
12 Bertrand, Son of Raymond the Great.  
13 William IV. Brother of Bertrand.  
1101. 14 Alfonso, Brother of William the fourth.  
1146. 15 Raymond III. Son of Alfonso.  
1185. 16 Raymond IU. Son of Raymond the 3d, the Great Patron of the Albigenses.  
1222. 17 Raymond V. Son of Raymond the 4th, vanquished, and compounded with, by King Lewis the Saint.  
1249. 18 Alfonso II. Brother of St. Lewis, and Husband of joan. daughter and heir of the last Raymond: after whose death, and the decease of joan the Countess, Anno 1270. this Earldom was united to the Crown of France; according to the Capitulations before mentioned.   
The Arms of this Earldom were Gules, a Cross Pommelè, of 12 points, Or.   

14 PROVENCE.  
PROVENCE is environed with Languedoc on the West; 
Provence.  Dauphin on the North; the Mediterranean on the South; and on the East with the Alps, and the River Varus; which divide it from Piedmont, the nearest of the Alpine Provinces.  
It took this name from the Romans, who being called in by the Marsilians, to revenge a private wrong, wholly possessed themselves of this country, calling it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, The Province. Under their Empire it continued, making up the whole Province of Narbonensis Secunda, and part of Alps Maritimae. How it was given unto the Visigothes, or Goths of Spain, and from them taken by the Ostrogothes, or Goths of Italy, hath been shown in Languedoc. Being resigned unto the French, it became a part of the new Kingdom of Arles and Burgundy. By Hugh de Arles upon his resignation of that Kingdom to R●dolph Duke of Burgundi● beyond the jour, given unto William his Son, with the stile and title of Earl of Provence; confirmed therein by the Emperor Conrade the second, on whom the rights of that Kingdom had been transferred, to be held of him, and his Successors in the Empire. In his posterity it continued, till conveyed to the Earls of Barcelone, by the marriage of the Lady Doulce with Earl Raymond Arnold, Anno 1082. Carried, together with that Earldom, to the Crown of Arragon; and finally, by ●eatrix, heir general of this Family, to Charles Earl of Anjou, Anno 1262, whom urban the 4th not long after crowned King of Naples. By Joan the first, the fourth from Charles, driven out of Naples by Lewis of Hungaria, and restored again by the power of Pope Clement the fifth, the City and Territory of Avignion (where the Pope resided at that time) is dismembered from the Earldom of Provence, and given in Fee for ever to the Church of Rome: partly to recompense that favour, and partly for discharge of some old Arrears of Rent or Tribute, pretended to be due to the See of Rome for the Realm of Naples. A City which had formerly been under the Protection, and by that title in the Actual possession of many of the Popes of Rome; ever since the conviction of Raymond Earl of Tholouse, to whom it formerly belonged, but held by them in Fee of the Earls of Provence. Not long after this Donation, the said joan adopted for her Heir and Successor, Lewis Duke of Anjou, Brother to Charles the fifth of France, descended lineally from Charles Earl of Anjou, and King of Naples: possessed by this Adoption of the Earldom of Provence, and a title to the Realm of Naples. Rene, the Grandchild of this Lewis, having no issue-male surviving, made Lewis of Chalons, Prince of Orange (another signory in this Country) and gave him therewithal full power to make Laws, coin money, and pardon all Crimes; to write himself Prince of Orange by the Grace of God, with all the other Prerogatives of an absolute Prince. This was in the year 1415. So that now the Country stands divided betwixt the French King, the Pope, and the Prince of Orange; each of them absolute and independent in his own Estate: as long at least as the French King is pleased to give way unto it. The whole, much of the same nature with Languedoc, before described.  
In that part of it which belongs to the King, the Towns of special note, are, 1 Aix, seated on the Rhos●e, the Metropolis of Narbonensis secunda, and at that time called Aquae Sextiae, from Sextius its founder, and the hot Baths here. Now, and of long time, an Archbishops See, and the chief City of this Province, and for that reason made the Seat of a Court of Parliament for this Country, Anno 1501. Most memorable in old story for the great discomfiture of the Cimbri, by C. Marius. Who not willing to venture on the enemy united (for they were no fewer than 300000 fight men, and lately fleshed in the overthrow of Manlius and Cepio, (two Roman Consuls) permitted them quietly to pass by his Camp: The Barbarians who imputed it to fear or cowardice, scornfully ask his Soldiers, what service they would command them to Rome. But when, for their easier passage over the Alps, they had divided themselves into 3 Companies; Marius severally setting on them all, put them all to the Sword. Ea victoria visus meruisse ne ejus nati Rempub. poenit eret, by this Victory, and this only, giving cause to the Romans (as Velleins hath it) not to be sorry for his Birth. 2 Arles, in Latin, Arelatum, by Ausonius called the Rome of France, and in those times so highly prized, that Constantinus Flavius being chosen Emperor by the British Legions, in the declining times of the Western Empire, intended to have made it the Imperial Seat. And not less memorable in church-story for a Council here held in the time of Constantine the Great, Anno 313, in which was present Resti●uius the Bishop of London, and certain other Bishops of the British Church. It was anciently a Roman Colony, and now the See of an Archbishop; situate on the River Rhosne, in a low and marshy situation: which natural strength seconded by the new works of King Henry the 4th, have made it one of the best Bulwarks of France, on that side of the Kingdom. Selected for the Seat Royal of the French Kings of Burgundy, who from hence were called Kings of Arles; as the Kings of Austrasia (or East France) were called Kings of Met●, because they had made choice of that City for the Regal Seat. Between this City and the Sea, but on the other side of the River, runneth a deep Channel, cut with infinite charge and industry by C. Marius, for conveyance of victuals into his Camp, in his War against the Cimbr● beforenamed: by Ptolemy called Fosse Marianae, by the French, Camargue, a corrupt word made of ●●aius Marius, the Country about which, called also by the same name for the space of 24 miles, is of excellent pasturage, and breedeth great abundance of horses; the chief Town of which is called 3 St. Gillis. 4 Marseilles, a known Port on the Mediterranean, first built by the Phocenses, a Greek Nation of Asia Minor, who being banished their Country, came and planted here, about the reign of Tarqvinius Superbus, 
Orange.  the last King of Rome. It was first only a Confederate City of the Romans, for whose sake, being molested by the Salii, and others of the neighbouring Nations, the Roman Legions first entered Gaul: afterwards, siding with Pompey in the Civil Wars, or at least desirous to stand neutral▪ it was forced by Caesar, and made a Colony. In the prosperity hereof it drove a great trade on the Mediterranean, and was the mother of many fair and flourishing Colonies, Emporia, Forum Jultum, Nicaea, Olbia, dispersed in the adjoining shores of France, Spain, and Itali●. 5 Glandeves, anciently called Glanum, a Bishops See, seated upon the Maritime Alps. 6 Taulon, by Ptolemy called ●auroentium, and by some Tholone, beautified with a fair and capacious Haven, well stored with Oil, great quantity of Salt brought hither from the Isle of Eres, about three Leagues off, and a kind of Almonds called Provence Almonds; made by this means one of the most requented Ports of the Med terranean. 7 Antibi (in Latin Antipolis) a Sea-coast Town near the River Varo, one of the farthest of this Country towards Italy. 8 Feriols (the Forum Julium of the ancients) on the Mediterranean, founded by the Massilians as before was said; after a Colony of the ●●oman●. 9 La Grace, a Bishops See, more within the Continent. 10 Castero●, on the Borders of Dauphin. 11 Brignols, 12 Merindol, and Chabriers, two little Towns amongst the Mountains, towards Dauphin, not otherwise of note but for the horrid Massacre of the Protestants, before described.  
II. The Principality of Orange lieth on the North-West of this Province, watered with the Rivers of 1 Durance, 2 S●ile, 3 Mien, and 4 Ecque; all helping to augment the Rhosne. The chief places of it are, 1 Aurange, seated on the Mien, an Episcopal See, famous for many rare and wonderful Antiquities, demonstrating the Roman Greatness, of whom once a Colony; but of most note in Church story for a Council held here against the Semi-Pelagians, in the year 444. called Arausicanum, the Latin name of this City being anciently Arausia, in some Writers Auriacus, and of late Aurangi●. 2 Estang. 3 Bois de St. Pol, more properly St. Paul de Vences, being the Civitas Vencie●sium of Antoninus, but not otherwise memorable.  
As for the Princes hereof, they were anciently of the Noble Family of the Baussii, but Homagers and Tributaries to the Earls of Provence. By Mary Daughter and Heir of Reynold the last of this Family, it was conveyed in marriage to john de Chalons, one of the most noble houses of burgundy, from the Earls whereof they were extracted. Lewis the Son of this john obtained of Rene Duke of Anjou and Earl of Provence, the Sovereignty hereof, as before was said. By Cla●de the Heir general of this house, bestowed in marriage by King Francis the first on Count Henry of Nassaw, Ambassador from Maximilian Emperor of Germany, Anno 1514. it was translated to that Family where it still remaineth.  

The Princes of Orange.  
1475. 1 Lewis of Chalons, first absolute Prince of Orange.  
2 William de Chalons, who submitted his Estate to the Parliament of Dauphin, to satisfy King Lewis 11th. by whom restored again to his former Sovereignty.  
3 Johnde Chalons, a bitter enemy to King Lewis, in defence of the rights of Mary Duchess of Burgundy  
1500. 4 Philibert de Chalons, slain at the siege of Florence, where he commanded the Forces for Charles the fifth.  
1530. 5 Henry of Nassaw, in right of Claude his Wife, Sister and Heir of Philibert.  
1536. 6 Rene of Nassaw, Son of Henry and Claude, slain at the siege of Landrecie in the Netherlands.  
1544. 7 William of Nassaw, Cousin German and next Heir of Rene, the great Patron and Assertor of the Belgic Liberties against the Spaniard, slain by a Partisan of Spain, 1584.  
1584. 8 Philip of Nassaw, kept, as an Hostage all his life, by the King of Spain.  
9 Maurice of Nassaw, Brother of Philip, Commander of the Forces of the United Provinces  
1625. 10 Hen. of Nassaw II. Successor to his Brother Maurice, in his Offices, Estates, and Honours.  
1648. 11 William of Nassaw II. the Son and Successor of Henry, married the Princess Mary eldest Daughter of Charles King of great Britain, etc. on May d●y. 1641.   
The Revenues of this principality are about 30000 Crowns. The Arms are Quarterly Gules, a Bend Or, 2 Or, a Hunter's Horn Azure stringed Gules; the third as, etc. Over all an Escoche●on of Pretence Chequie, Or and Azure. More briefly thus, Quarterly Chalons and Aurange, under an Escocheon of Geneva.  
Southward of Aurange lieth the County of VENAISCINE, as the French call it, Comitatus Veniessinus in the Latin, so called from Avenio now Avignon) the chief City of it. Formerly it belonged to the Earls of Tholouse, but held by them as Homagers (for this estate) of the Earls of Provence: on the conviction of Earl Raymond, condemned for Heresy, brought under the protection and patronage of the Popes of Rome: the more absolute Sovereignty hereof and of the City Avignon, being settled on them by Queen Joan, as before is said. The principal Cities of this tract, are, 1 Avignon, the Avenio of Strabo, Pliny, and Mela, a very fair and flourishing City, 
Provence.  pleasantly ●eated on both sides of the River of Rho●ne: ●amous for being the residence of the ●opes for 70 years, which time the Romans remember till this day by the name of the Babylonian captivity; administering ever since an Oath unto the Pope at his Coronation, not to remove his Seat to Avignon. The first Pope that removed hither was 〈◊〉 the 5th, Anno▪ 1303▪ when as yet, the Popes had no more right in it than that o● Patronage and Protection; and returned again to Rome by Gregory the 11th, Anno 1377. In this City are said to be 7 Palaces, 7 Parish Churches, 7 Monasteries, 7 Nunneries, 7 Inns, and 7 Gates. So that if there be any mystery in the number of seven, or any credit to be given to such Pythagorean divinity; the Archbishop of this City may as well be entitled Antichrist, as the Pope of Rome; if there be nothing but the mystery of this number of affix it to him. It was made an University at the time of the Pope's first settling here, and so still continueth; Alciate the great Emblematist being here Professor. 2 Carpentras, by Ptolemy called Carpentoracte, a Bishops See; as is also 3 Cavaillon, (of old Caballio) once a Roman Colony, on the River Durance; and 4 Tarascon, on the Rhosne, opposite to Beaucaire in Languedoc: for the Pope's dwelling here so long, could not be otherwise attended than by mitred Prelates. 5 Vason, Civitas Vasion●nsium, of Anteninus.  
The Revenues of the Pope here are not very great, and those expended all in keeping of Forts and Garrisons, by reason of the ill neighbourhood of the Protestants of Orange. So that it is supposed that it is rather a charge, than a profit to him: which maketh the people like very well to live under his Government, as bringing more money to them than he gathereth from them.  
The old Inhabitants of the whole Country, were, as appear, the Salii, Massilienses, Vasionenses, and Vencienses, before mentioned; besides the Deceits about Antibe, the Senitii, and Sigestori about Cisteron: all conquered by the Romans, in their first war in Gaul, called in to aid those of Marseilles against the Salii. The fortune of it since, hath been shown before. Nothing remains now, but the Catalogue of  

The Earls of Provence.  
1 Hugh de Ar●es, supposed to be the Son of Lotharius, King of Austrasia, and Waldrada his Concubine, made the first Earl of Provence by Boson the first, King of Burgundy. He was after King of Burgundi●, and Italy also.  
2 William d' Arles, the Son of Hugh.  
3 G●llert, ●arl of Provence, the Father o● the Lady Doulce.  
1082. 4 Raymond A●nold, Earl of Barcelone, the Husband of the Lady Da●lce of Provence.  
1131. 5 Bereng●r Raymond, the 2d Son of Raymond Arnold, and the Lady Doulce.  
6 Raymond II. Son of Berengar Raymond.  
1173. 7 Alfonso King of Arragon, and E. of Barcilone, the Son and Heir of Raymond Earl of Barcelone, eldest Son unto Raymond Arnold, and the Lady Doulce.  
1196. 8 Alforso II. second son of Alfonso the first, succeeded in the Earldom of Provence, his elder Brother Ped●o inheriting the Realm of Arragon, and the Earldom of Barcelone.  
9 Raymond III. Son of Al●onso, the last Earl of Provence of this Line.  
1261. 10 Charles of Valois, Earl of Anjou, and in right of Beatrix his Wife, one of the Daughters of Raymond the 3d, Earl of Provence. He was also King of Naples, Sicil, etc.  
1282. 11 Charles II. King of Naples, and Earl of Provence.  
1310. 12 Robert, King of Naples, and Earl of Provence.  
1342. 13 joan, Queen of Naples, and Countess of Provence.  
1371. 14 Lewis, Duke of Anjou, the adopted Son of Queen joan, Earl of Provence, and titulary King of Naples, etc. (Of whose descent from Charles de Valois, Earl of Anjou and Provence, we have spoke elsewhere.)  
1385. 15 Lewis II. Duke of Anjou, Earl of Provence, etc.  
1416. 16 Lewis III. Duke of Anjou, Earl of Provence, etc.  
1430. 17 Renè, Brother of Lewis Duke of Anjou, etc.  
1480. 18 Charles, Earl of Maine, Son of Charles Earl of Maine, the Brother of Renè, succeeded in all the estates and titles of his Uncle; and at his death gave Provence to King Lewis the 11th, his Cousin German, as being the Son of Charles the 7th, and Mary Daughter of Lewis the 2d, Duke of Anjou, Sister of Lewis the 3d and Renè, the preceding Dukes, and of Charles Father of this Charles, the last Earl of Provence: Immediately on whose decease, Decemb. 19th. Anno 1481. the King sent a Commission to Palamede de Forban, Lord of Sollie●, Chamberlain of Earl Charles, to take possession of the Country in his name, and command there▪ in as Lieutenant General. Since which time Provence never was dismembered from the Crown of France, so much as in the way of Apennage, or any honourarie title amongst the King's Children.   
What the Revenues of it were to the former Earls, I am not able to say, having no good authority to proceed upon. 
Bu●gundians.  Only I find, that besides the Lands belonging to the Earls hereof, and o●her cu●om●ry and casual Taxes, there was a Tax called the 〈…〉 being sixteen Florins levied upon every fire: which reckoning 3500 fires, (for such the estimate o● them was,) amounted yearly unto 50000 Fiore●s. Now it is subject to the rigour and uncertainty of the King's Taxations, as well as all the rest of France. And so much of those Provinces which properly made up the Kingdoms of the French and Goths; let us next look on those which at the same time were subdued by the Burgundians; whose History, Kingdom, and Estate, are to be considered, before we come to the description of their several Provinces.   

The Kingdom of BURGUNDY.  
THe Kingdom of the BURGUND●ANS at their first settlement in Gaul, contained all those Provinces of the Roman Empire, than called the 〈…〉 and Poen●nae, Maxima Sequarorum, Lugannensis Prim●, and Viennensis, now passing under the new names of the D●b●dom and County of Burgundy, Switzerland, the Grisons, 〈◊〉, Sa●oy, La B●esse, Daul●hne, Laonois, and some part of the Dukedom of Bourben. A ●air and large quantity of ground, able at once to tempt and satisfy an ambitious Nation. But the Burgundi●ns came not into G●ul● of their own accord; though of their own accord they drew somewhat near it. In their Original they were a people bordering near the Vandals, if not a Tribe or Sept of them, and dwelling in those parts in which are now the Dukedoms of Meck●nhurg and Pomerania. At the time that D●usu● and Tiberius warred in Germany, they were utterly barbarous, living in Tents only here and there clapped up. Which being in their own language called ●urg●, gave them the name of Burgundians amongst the Romans; in the same sense as the wild Arabs had ●he name of Scenitae amongst the Gre●ks, from the like kind of living. In the year 416. at the instigation of the Vandals they left their own seats, and planted themselves in the Towns and Villages belonging now to the Marquesses of ●aden, and Electors of the Rhine. About which time they received the Christian Faith, being then miserably oppressed by the Huns breaking upon them out of Pannenia. Not finding any other way to free themselves of that Enemy, they betook themselves to the God of the Christians, and were universally baptised. After which, falling on the Huns, they slew no less than 30000 of them in one battle: from that time forwards never troubled with that barbarous Nation. Christians then they were, and Orthodox in their profession, before their coming into Gaul: and for that reason called in by Stilico to oppose the French, then threatening an invasion of the Roman Provinces. Upon this invitation they passed over the River with an Army of 80000 fight men, possessing themselves of all which lay from the farthest shore of the Rhosue, to the Alps of Italy; and from the mountain Vauge, to the Mediterranean; Provence only excepted: about the same time planted by the Goths. Their Government was under Kings; Many, according to their tribes, when they lived in Germany; Monarchical, when settled in the Realm of France; where they had these five.  

Kings of the Burgundians.  
A. Ch.  
408. 1 Tibica, who first brought the Burgundians into Gaul.  
2 Gundioch.  
3 Gundebault, Uncle to Clotilda, Wife to Clovis, the fifth King of the French, by her persuasion made inclinable to the Christian Faith.  
4 Sigismond.  
5 Gundomar, the Son of Sigismond, first set upon by Clodemire, the Son of Clovis, King of Orleans, whom he slew in battle near Austun, but afterward outed of his Kingdom by Childebert and Clotair, Kings of Paris and Soissons, in revenge of the death of their Brother Clodomire. And so the Kingdom of the Burgundians fell unto the French, after it had continued about 120 years: Guntram, the Son of Clotaire, and Clovis, one of the Sons of Dagobert the first, being in their times honoured with the titles of Kings of Burgundy.   
But the first time that the Kingdom of Burgundy ●etled amongst the French in the way of succession, was in the partage of that vast Empire of Charlemaigne, amongst the Children and posterity of Ludovicus P●us. In constituting of which Kingdom, Provence was added to the reckoning, to make this answerable to the other parts of that broken monarchy. The first of these F●●●ch Kings was Charles, the youngest Son of Lotharius, Emperor, and King of Italy, eldest Son of the said Lewis the Godly. The succession in this order following.  

The French Kings of Burgundy.  
A. Ch.  
855. 1 Charles, youngest Son of the Emperor Lotharius; died without Issue.  
858. 2 Lotharius, the 2d King of emmets; and Lewis the 2d Emperor, Brethren of Charles, succeeded in Burgunaie; the mountain Jour dividing and bounding their Estates.  
876. 3 Charles the Bal●, King of France, and Emperor, Uncle to the three former Kings, all dying without issue, succeeded in the whole Estate: which he again divided into three Governments or Members: that is to say, Burgundy on this side of the ●ousne, containing the now Dukedom of Burgundy, 
Dauphin.  with the Earldoms of Lions and Mascon. 2 Burgundy beyond the jour, comprehending the Provinces of Savoy, Switzerland, Wall●sland, and the Estates of the Grisons; and 3ly Burgundy on the other side of the Soasne, lying betwixt the other two; containing the now Counties of Burgundy, Provence, La Bresse, and Dauphin. This last conferred, with the title of Earl, on Boson Earl of Ardenne, by Charles the Bald, who had married his Sister Judith; and not long after in the person of the said Earl Boson, raised unto a Kingdom by Charles the Gross, by the name of the Kingdom of Arles and Burgundy. The Kings, these that follow.  
4 Boson Earl of Ardenne, Husband of Hermingrade, the Daughter of Lewis the 2d, Empero●r, and King of Furgurdy, was first by Charles the Bald made Earl of Burgundy, beyond the Soasne; and afterwards by Charles the Gross created the first King of Arles and Burgundy, to be held by him and his Successors, of the Germane Emperors.  
5 Lewis II. Son of Boson and Hermingrade; chosen King of Italy, but outed by the Faction of Berengarius.  
917. 6 Hugh de Arles, supposed to be the Son of Lotharius the 2d, by Waldrada his Concubine; succeeded by the gift of Lewis; and was chosen by his Faction there, King of Isaly also. For the quiet enjoying of which Kingdom, he resigned this to Rodolph, Duke of Burgundy beyond the Jour, elected by another Faction to that broken Title.  
926. 7 Rodolph, Duke of Burgundy beyond the jour, succeeded on the resignation of Hugh de Arles.  
937. 8 Rodolph II. Son of Rodolph; a Prince of so short a reign, or so little note, that he is by some left out of the catalogue of these Kings.  
9 Boson II. the Brother of Rodolph the first, by whom the Dukedom of Burgundy beyond the jour, was united to the Kingdom of Arles and Burgundy.  
965. 10 Conrade, Son to Boson the second.  
990. 11 Rodolph III. Son to Conrade, who having no issue of his Body, gave his Estate to Conrade the 2d, Emperor of Germany, and his Son Henry surnamed the Black, whom he had by Gisela, the Sister of this Rodolph; by whom it was united to the Germane Empire, Anno 1032. In the distractions whereof, following not long after his deccease, the Provincial Earls or Governors for the Germae Emperonrs, made themselves Masters and Proprietaries of their several Provinces (the Dukedom of Burgundy excepted, settled long before) out of which rose the great Estates of the Dukes of Savoy, the Earls of Burgundy and Provence, the Daulphins of Viennoys, and Lords of Bresse, together with the Commonwealths of the Swissers and Grisons: every poor Bird snatching also some feather or other of this dying Eagle. Yet notwithstanding the dismembering and cantoning of this fair Estate, the succeeding Emperors of Germany, claimed not only a superintendence over, but ●disposall of all the Countries that ever were under the command of a King of Burgundy: Insomuch that the Emperor Henry the sixth, receiving no small part of the money which our Richard the first paid to the Duke of Austria for his ransom, gave unto the said Richard the Kingdom of Burgundy, the Sovereignty of Provence, Viennoys, Marseilles, Narbon, Arles, and Lions, together with the homages of the King of Arragon, and of the Earl of Digion, and S. Giles. A royal gift, it either the Emperor had had any dominion over those countries, or if they would have received any Prince or Officer of his anointing.   
●he Arms of this Kingdom under the old Burgundian Kings, are said to have been Azure, a Cat Arg, armed Gules. Which being said, we will proceed to the description of those Provinces of this broken Kingdom, which lie within the bounds of France; the rest which lie beyond the Jour, having been spoken of already in the Alpine Countries; which made up the whole continent of the Trans-jouran Burgundy.   

15 DAUPHIN.  
NOrth of the Country of Provence, where we left before, lieth that of DAUPHIN, having on the East, Savoy, and the Maritime Alps; on the West, Lionoys, and some part of 〈◊〉, from which divided by the Rhosne; and on the North, La Bresse, and those parts of Sav●y which he towards Piedmont.  
It is divided into the Higher and the Lower; that mountainous, stony, and unfruitful, of the same nature with the Alp●s, with whose branches it is overrun: the other tolerably fruitful, but nor to be compared with the rest of France. The people of the Higher, and more mountainous parts, are generally gross and rude; not capable of learning, but well enough inclined to Arms and traffic, and have a custom, that on the coming on of Winter they send abroad all those which are fit for Travel, (whom they call Bics, or Bisonards) who seldom return back till Easter: none staying at home, but old men, children and impotent persons, which cannot go abroad to get their livings. Those in the Lower, are more civil, but not more given to labour than the Mountainers are; nor very covetous of gain, so they may live at ease, without want or pennrie. In both parts generally good Soldiers, and well affected to their Prince.  
The Lower Dauphin, 
La Bress●.  together with that part of Provence which lies next the Rhosue, and the adjoining parts of Savoy, made up the Province called Viennensis, from Vienna the Metropolis of it, situate on the Rhosne, honoured with the Praesectus Praetorio Galliarum; still the chief City of this Country, an Archbishops See, and a Siege Praesidi●ill. From hence the tract about it is called Viennoys, and was the title of the first Proprietaries of this Country, entitled Daulphins of Viennoys. To this Town Archelaus, the Son of Herod, was banished by Augustus Caesar. 2 Valence, the chief City heretofore of the Valentini, than a Roman Colony; now a Bishops See, and a University for the Civil Law; a rich, strong, and well-traded Town, seated on the Rhosne. The Country hereabouts from hence called Valentinois; and hath given honourarie title to two persons of more Fame than Honour: the first of which was Caesar Borgia, the Son of Pope Alexander the sixth, who casting off his Cardinal's Cap, was made Duke of Valentinois by Charles the 8th; the other Madam Diana, the great Minion and Paramour of King Henry the 2d, under whom she much swayed the affairs of France, and honoured with the title of Duchess of it. 3 Grenoble, (in La●●re, Gratianoplis,) the chief Seat heretofore of the Accusiani, the most populous and best built of all this Province, and much resorted to by the Lords and Nobless, by reason of the Court of Parliament here erected, Anno 1453 About this lieth the Country called Gr●sinaudan, 4 Ternay, 5 Rossillon, 6 Li Roche, 7 Mantelima●, all along the Rhosne; 8 Romons, upon the confluence of the Rhosne, and the River Ifere. 9 Cremien, 10 St. Marceli●e, 11 St. Andre, 12 Beaurepaire, more within the Country.  
The Higher Dauphin, together with those parts of Provence which lie next to Italy, made up the Province of the Alps Mari●mae; the Metropolis whereof, was, 1 Ebrodunum, now called Ambrun, an Archbishops See, and Siege praesidial; seated on an high rock, in the midst of a pleasant valley surrounded with mountains, under which runs the River Durance. The hilly Country hereabouts, is the highest of France. 2 Brianson, near the head of the River Durance, called Briga●tio, by Antoninus. 3 Gap, now a Bishops See, formerly the chief City of the Apencenses; the tract of whom is still found in the name of the adjoining Territory, called Le Pais Gapençois: Memorable for a Synod or Assembly of the French Protestants here holden, Anno in which it was determined, as, and for an Article of the Faith, that the Pope was Antichrist. 4 Tricassin, so called of the Tricassini, the old Inhabitants of these parts. 5 Die, the Dia Vocontiorum of Antoninus, a Bishops See, situate on the River Drosne: from whence come those small, but good stomack-wines, which we call Vin Die. 6 Chorges, 7 Mombrun, 8 Essiles, of which little memorable.  
The chief Inhabitants hereof, in the time of the Romans, besides the Tricassini, Apencenses, Vacon●●i, and Accusian● before mentioned, and the Allobroges, spoken of in the alpine Provinces, were the Segalaun about Valence, the Decenses about Die, and the Cavari about Crenoble. First conquered by the Roman, then by the Burgundians, and at last by the French: under whom made a part of the new Kingdom of Burgundy, till the surrender of the same to the Germane Emperors. Under them it continued, till the year 1100. when Guigne, surnamed the Fat, Earl of Grisinaudan, seeing the Emperor Henry the 4th overborn by the Popes, and not able to assert their own rights, seized upon this Province, under the title of Earl of Viennoys; to which Gurgne the 2d, his Son and Successor, gave the name of Dauphin, either from his Wife so called, as some, or from the Dolphin which he took for his Arms, as others say. In this Family it continued, till the year 1349. when Humbert the last Dolphin of Viennois (for so they were called,) being surcharged with wars by Am, (or Awade.) Earl of Savoy, entered into the Order of Dominican Friars at Lions, selling his Country at a small rate to Philipde Vaious, French King, upon condition, that the eldest Son of France should be entitled always Dolphin of Viennois; and quarter the Arms of Daviphine with those of France. The conditions willingly accepted, and Charles, the Son of K. john, the Son of Philip de Valois, admitted by his Grandfather both to the title and estate in the very year of the surrendry. Since this time, the eldest Son of France is called generally the Danlphin of France, sometimes the Daulohin (or Count-Daulphin) of Auvergne, and perhaps some others. A Title so annexed unto them, that it is usually laid by on the accession of a greater or superior dignity: insomuch as Francis the eldest Son of Henry the 2d, (whom he succeeded in the Crown) being King of Scots in the right of Mary his wife, was by the French called commonly Le Roy Dauphin, or the King Dauphin. Nor have they the bare title of this Country only but the command, profits, and possession of it; sending their own Governors thereunto; who by an ancient indulgence, have the greatest privileges (conferring all Offices within the Province) of any Governors in France.  
The Arms hereof are Azure, a Dolphin hauriant, Or.   

16 LA BRESSE.  
LA BRESSE is bounded on the East, with Savoy; on the West, with Lionois; on the North, with Charolois in the Duchy or Burgundy, and some part of the Franche County; and on the South, with Dauphin; the reason of the name I find not. The Country is very fruitful and pleasant, embraced betwixt the Rivers of Soasne and Rhosne, with which very well watered. Chief Towns herein are, 1 Bellay, a Bishops See. 2 Bourg, (for distinctions sake called Bourg●en Bresse,) a Town so well fenced, 
Lionois  and fortified with so strong a Citadel for command of the Country, that it was thought little inferior to the two impregnable Fortresses of St. Katherine's and Montmelian, in Savoy. The Government of which Town and Citadel, was earnestly laboured for by the Duke of Byron, than Governor of Burgundy, after a repulse on the like suit for that of St. Ka●berine: but being suspected to hold intelligence with the Duke of Savoy, at that time on ill terms with King Henry the 4th, it was also denied him; which drew him into discontent, and thereby to his fatal ruin. Afterwards, during the minority of Lewis the 13th demolished, by especial Order of the Counsel of France, for fear of being surprised by the Duke of Savoy during those confusions. It was of old time called Forum Secusianorum, from the Secusiani, the ancient Inhabitants of this tract. 3 Castillon, 4 Mont-Reall, 5 Bugey, 6 Veromen, of which, nothing observable.  
This little Province, being anciently a part of the Kingdom of Ardes and Burgundy, had its own Earls, Proprietary Lords hereof: who held it till the year 1285; at what time Sibyl, the Daughter and Heir of Ulric. Earl of Bresse and Baugie, (or Basgee, as some Writers call it) conveyed the Estate in marriage too Am or Amadee, the 4th of that name, Earl of Savoy. In which House it continued till the year 1600, and then surrendered by Duke Charles Emanuel to King Henry the 4th, to silence the pretences which that King had made unto the Marquisate of Saluzzes, and put an end unto the war then begun about it; the politic Duke choosing rather to part with an Estate on this side of the Mountains, than to give that active King occasion to look into Italy; to which Savoy must have been a Thoroughfare, Piedmont an ordinary Pass; and where no end could be expected, but the loss of all. Surrendered then it was on good reason of State, and upon that surrender united and incorporated with the Crown of France, and put under the Government of the Parliament of Digion, as it still continueth.  
The Arms hereof are Azure, a Lion Ermines, armed and Languid, Or:   

17 LIONOIS.  
THe Country of LIONOIS is bounded on the East, with Bresse; on the West, with Beaujolois, Forrest and Auvergn; on the North, with Burgundy Duchy; and on the South, with Dauphin, and a part of Languedoc. So called from Lions the chief City, and under that title made an Earldom by Charles the Gross, in the cantoning and dismembering of the Kingdom of Burgundy: The Earldom containing at that time, not only Lionois itself, but also Forrest and Beaujolois, before described. The Earls hereof were at first only Provincial Governors, but under the distractions of the Germane Empire they shifted for themselves, and became hereditary; but long it held not in one hand. For first, the Earldom of Forest, and the Lordship or signory of Beaujeu being taken out of it, about the year 990. the rest of the Estate fell in some tract of time to the Bishops and Church of Lions, but under the Sovereignty of the French Kings, as Lords Paramount of it.  
The places in it of most note are, 1 Mascon, (Matisconum) a Bishops See, situate on the Soasne, anciently a distinct Earldom from that of Lions, one of the five (as that of Lions was another) which made up the Dukedom of Burgundy on this side of the Soasne: purchased of William the last Earl hereof, and of Elizabeth his Wife, by King Lewis the 9th; and afterwards subjected to the Jurisdiction and Court of Lions, as it still continueth. 2 Eschalas, on the Rhosne, on the South of Lions, opposite to Vienne, the chief City of the Lower Danlphine. 3 Dandilli, 4 Francheville, 5 Chaumont, and 6 Labrelle, all somewhat Westward of that River, but not much observable. 7. Lions itself, pleasantly seated on the confluence of the Soasne and the Rhos●e, anciently a Roman Colony, (testified by many old Inscriptions) and honoured with a magnificent Temple, dedicated by the Cities of France to Augustus Caesar: now the most famous Mart of France, and an University; by our Latin Writers called Lugdunum. These Marts in former times were holden at Geneva, from thence removed hither by King Lewis the 11th, for the enriching of his own Kingdom. When julio the 2d had excommunicated Lewis the 12th, he commanded by his Apostolical authority that they should be returned to Geneva again; but therein his pleasure was never obeyed: the Marts continuing still at LIONS, as a place more convenient and capacious of that great resort of French, Dutch, and Italian Merchants, which frequent the same. As for the University, questionless it is very ancient; being a seat of learning in the time of Caius Caligula. For in those times, before an Altar consecrated to Augustus Caesar in the Temple spoken of before, this Caligula did institute some exercises of the Greek and Roman Eloquence: the Victor to be honoured according to his merit; the vanquished either to be ferulaed, or with their own tongues to blot and expunge their writings, or to be drowned in the River adjoining. Hence that of juvenal, Vt Lugdunensem Rhetor dicturus ad Aram, applied to dangerous undertake. In the time of the Romans first coming into Gaul, it was the chief City of the Hedui and Secusiani; afterwards the Metropolis of Lugdunensis Prima. The Archbishop hereof is the Metropolitan of all France; and was so in the time of S. Irenaeus, one of the renowned Fathers in the Primitive Church, who was Bishop here.  
In this Town lived Peter Waldo, a wealthy Citizen, about the time of Frederick Barbarossa, Emperor of Germany, who being a devout and conscientious man, sensible of the many errors and corruptions in the Church of Rome, distributed the greatest part of his riches amongst the poor, and betook himself to meditation and studying of the holy Scriptures. In the carnal eating of CHRIST'S body, the substraction of the Cup in the blessed Sacrament, in matter of Purgaterie, the Supremacy, 
Bargundie Dukedom:  adoration of Images, Invocation of the Saints departed, and many other points of moment; he held opinions contrary unto those of Rome; and little different from those of the present Reformed Churches. And yet it may not be denied, but that amongst some good Wheat there were many Tares; which gave the juster colour to their Adversaries to exclaim against them. Being much followed, in regard of his piety and charity, he got unto himself and them the name of Pauperes de Lugduno, or the Poor men of Lions, given in derision and contempt. Afterwards, they were called Waldenses, by the name of Waldo, the beginner of this Reformation; and by that name opposed, and writ against by Friar Thomas of Walden. The French, according to their manner of Pronunciation, drowning the L. and changing the W. into V. call them commonly Vaudois; by which name they occur in the stories of that State, and Language. But Lyens proving no safe place for them, they retired into the more desert parts of Languedoc; and spreading on the banks of the River Alby, obtained the name of Albigenses, as before was said. Supported by the two last Earls of Tholouse, they became very masterfull and insolent: Insomuch, that they murdered Trincanell their Viscount in Beziers, and dashed out the teeth of their Bishop, having taken Sanctuary in S. magdalen's Church, one of the Churches of that City. Forty years after which high outrage, the divine Providence gave them over to the hand of the Cr●isadas, under the conduct of the French Kings, and many other noble Adventurers; who sacrified them in the selfsame Church, wherein they had spoilt the blood of others. About the year 1250, after a long and bloody War, they were almost rooted out of that Country also. The remnants of them being bettered by this affliction, betook themselves unto the mountains lying betwixt Dauphin, Provence, Piedmont, and Savoy; where they lived a godly and laborious life; painfully tilling the ground, re-building villages, which formerly had been destroyed by War; teaching the very Rocks to yield good pasturage to their cattle: insomuch, as places which before their coming thither scarce yielded four Crowns yearly, were made worth 350 Crowns a year, by their care and industry. Lasciviousness in speech they used not; Blasphemy they abhorred; nor was the name of the Devil (in the way of execration) ever heard amongst them; as their very enemies could not but confess, when they were afterward in troubles. The Crimes alleged against them were, That when they came into any of the neighbouring Churches, they made no address unto the Saints; nor bowed before such Crosses as were erected in the highways, and streets of Towns. Great crimes assuredly, when greater could not be produced. And so they lived, neither embracing the Pope's doctrines, nor submitting unto his Supremacy, for the space of 300 years, vutouched, unquessiooned; even till the latter end of the reign of King Francis the first. But then the Persecution raging against the Lutherans, they were accused, condemned, and barbarously murdered, in the Massacres of Merindol and Chabriers before mentioned. After which time, joining themselves with the rest of the Protestant party, they lost the name of Vaudois, by which called before: and pass in the Account of the Reformed Churches of France, enjoying the same privileges and freedom of Conscience, as others of the Reformed do. And though I look not on these men and their Congregations, as founders of the Protestant Church, or of the same Church with them, as I see some do: yet I behold them as Assertors of some doctrinal truths, and professed Enemies of the errors and corruptions of the Church of Rome, and therein as the Predecessors of the present Protestants.   

18 The Dukedom of BURGUNDY.  
THe Dukedom of BURGUNDY hath on the East, the French County, and some part of Savoy; on the West, Bourbonois; on the North, Champagne; on the South, La Bresse, ●ionois, and some part of Beau-joulois. A Province so well watered with pleasant and profitable Rivers, that as Qu. Catharine de Medici's used to say of France, That it had more fair Rivers than all Europe; so we may say of this Country, That it hath more fine Riverets than all France▪ here being the Rivers of 1 Armacan, 2 Serum, 3 Curi, 4 Torney, 5 Valence, 6 Dove, 7 Brune, 8 S●●n 9 Louche, and 10 Soasne, (the Araxis of the ancient Writers) this last dividing the two Burgundy's from one another. Yet, notwithstanding this great plenty of waters, the Country generally is less fruitful than the rest of France: hardly yielding sufficient for its own inhabitants, except wines only.  
Chief Cities in it are, 1 Dijon, the birthplace of S. Bernard, seated upon the Soasne and L'ouche, in a champain Country; the Town large, populous, and of great resort, as being the Seat of the Governor, and Parliamentary for the Province; a Parliament being here erected, Anno 147. Well fortified on all parts, but specially defended by a strong Castle called Talente, situate on an hill adjoining. It is called Divio in the Latin, the Bishop hereof Divionensis. 2 Chalons, (in Latin, Caballinum,) called for distinctions sake, Chalons upon Soasne, to difference it from Chalons upon Marn, in Champagne: a Bishops See also, as the other is; and gives name to that noble Family of Chalons, (out of which the Princes of Orange are extracted) being one of the four ancient Families of Burgundy; the other three, Vienne, Neufchatell, and Vergie. 3 Autun, by P●olomi called Augustodunum, the chief City of the Hedui, now a Bishops See; heretofore the chief of all the Country, some marks of the old splendour being still to be seen; now very ordinary and mean, beautified only with some fair Churches, which the ruins of time have not yet demolished. 4 Beaulne, seated on the Bursoize, in the best and richest soil of all Burgundy, and yielding the best Wines in France: remarkable for an Hospital of so fair a building, that it is thought equal to any Prince's Palace in Europe; and an impregnable Castle built by King Lewis the 12th. 5 Alize, now a small Village, but of great name and power in the time of Caesar, then called Alexia, the chief ●ortress of Vercingetor●, besieged herein by the said Caesar; but so besieged, that he had 70000 men in the Town for defence of the place, and an Army of 30000 Galls at the back of Caesar, to relieve their fellows. So that he was fain to fortify his Camp with two Walls, the one against them within the City, and the other against them without: which done, he kept such diligent watch and ward on both sides, that the besieged heard sooner of the discomsiture of their Friends, than they did of their coming. Which fatal news being brought unto them, the Town was yielded. And ●ercingetorix bravely mounted, road round about Caesar, then sitting in his Chair of State, disarmed himself, took off his Horse's comparisons, and laying all upon the ground, ●ate down at Caesar's feet, and became his Prisoner. 5 Tournus, encompassed with the Soasue. 7 Semur, consisting of three parts, each of them severally walled, and strongly fortified. 8 Verdun. 9 Nay●. 10 St. Ligier, famous for medicinal Baths. 11 Noyers, on the Borders towards 〈◊〉. 12 Auxerre, by Antonine called Antisiodorum; Of most note for the Council held here, Anno ●27, the Country about which is called Auxerrois, and was an Earldom of itself, till fold by John of Chal●ns, great Grandchild of Joh the 7th, Earl of Burgundy, to Charles the fifth of France, Anno 1370; by whom united to the Crown, subjected to the Parliament of Paris, and made part of Champagne. Here is also within this Country the great and famous Monastery of ●isteaux, the mother of so many Religious houses, dispersed up and down in Europe, from hence denominated, and subject to the discipline and Rules hereof.  
Within the limits of this Dukedom (on the South parts of it) stands the Earldom of CHAROLOIS, heretofore the title of the eldest Son of the Dukes of Burgundy, so called from Charolles, the chief Town hereof, situate in the borders of it, towards La Bresse: seized upon, with the rest of this Dukedom, by Lewis the 11th, immediately on the death of Duke Charles the Warlike; restored again to Philip the second, King of Spain, by Henry the second, of France, on the peace made at Cambray; and subjected to the Parliament of Dole in the County of Burgundy, as a part or member of that Estate: So that neither the Governor of the Dukedom for the French King, nor the Parliament of Digion, have any thing to do in it. The Arms hereof are Gules, a Lion passant regardant Or, armed azure.  
The ancient Inhabitants of the whole Dukedom, according to the limits before laid down, were the Hedui, one of the most potent Nations in all Gaul: who calling in the Romans to aid them in their quarrels against the Sequani and Arverni, made them all subject unto Rome. In the prosperity whereof they made up the Province of Lugdunensis Prima, of which Lions was the Metropolis or principal City. Afterwards, in the division of the French Kingdom of Burgundy by Charles the Bald, this part thereof, being called the Dukedom of Burgundy on this side of the Soasne, was cantoned into the five Earldoms of Dijon, Chalons, Autun, Lions, and Mascon, whereof the three first laid together by Odo or Eudes' King of France, during the minority of Charles the Simple, given unto his Brother Richard (both Sons of Robert, Earl of Anjou,) under the stile and title of Duke o● 〈◊〉. The issue of this Robert failing, it fell unto another Robert, Son of Hugh Capet King of 〈◊〉, (more worthily surnamed the Hardy) together with the marriage of the Heir of 〈◊〉, Artois, and the County of Burgundy. An Argument of no great wisdom, as was judiciously observed by King L●wis the 11th. For by this means, those great Estates being united in one person, and afterwards these estates improved by as prosperous marriages, this house of Burgundy, grew formidable to the Kings themselves; who never left practising against it, till they had brought 〈◊〉 to ruin, and once again united this Dukedom to their own Estate, from which at first it was dismembered.  

The Dukes of Burgundy.  
89●. 1 Richard of Saxony, the second Son of Robert Earl of Anjou, brother of Eudes, and Father of Rodol●h Kings of France.  
938. 2 Gilbert, the second Son of Richard.  
904. 3 Otho, Son of Hugh Earl of Paris, surnamed the Great, and Brother of Hugh Capet King of France, was Duke of Burgundy in right of his Wife the Daughter of Gi●bert.  
976. 4 Henry, the Brother of Otho.  
1001. 5 Robert, King of France, Son of Hugh Capet, succeeded in the Dukedom, on the death of his Uncle Henry.  
1004. 6 Robert II. Son of this Robert, and Brother of Henry King of France.  
1075. 7 Hugh, the Nephew of Robert by his Son Henry, became afterwards a Monk of Clugny.  
1097. 8 Odo, or Otho II. Brother of Hugh.  
1102. 9 Hugh II. Son of Otho the 2d.  
1124. 10 Odes, or Otho III. Son of Hugh the 2d.  
1165. 11 Hugh III. the Companion, but great Enemy of our Richard the first, in the Wars of the Holy-Land.  
1192. 12 Odes or Otho IV. Son of Hugh the 3d. 
Burgundy County.   
1218. 13 Hugh IU. an Adventurer with King Lewis the 9th. in the Holy-Land.  
1273. 14 Robert. III. Son of Hugh the 4th. which Robert was the Father of Joan, the Wife of Philip de Valois, French King, and Grandmother of Philip the Hardy, after, Duke of Burgundy.  
1308. 15 Hugh V. Son of Robert the 3d.  
1315. 16 Eudes, the Brother of Hugh, was Earl of Burgundy also in right of his Wife.  
1349. 17 Philip, the Grandchild of Eudes by his only Son Philip, Duke and Earl of Burgundy by descent, and Earl of Flanders and Artois in right of his Wife; the last Duke of this Line.  
1363. 18 Philip II. surnamed the Hardy, Son of john King of France, Son of Philip de Valois, and joan Daughter of Robert the 3d. by Charles the 5th. his Brother, (in whom the right of this Dukedom did them remain) was made Duke of Burgundy, and married to the Heir of Flanders, and the County of Burgundy.  
1404. 19 john, surnamed the Proud, Son of Philip the 2d. Duke and Earl of Burgundy, and Earl of Flanders and Artois.  
1419. 20 Philip III. surnamed the Good, who added most of the Netherlands unto his Estate.  
1467. 21 Charles the Warlike, Earl of Charolois, Son of Philip the Good. After whose death, slain by the Swissers, at the battle of Nancie, Lewis the 11th. seized upon this Dukedom, Anno 1476. pretending an Escheat thereof, for want of Heirs males; uniting it for ever to the Crown of France.   
Of the great wealth and potency of these last Dukes of Burgundy, we shall speak further when we come to the description of Belgium: the accession whereof to their Estates made them equal to most Kings in Christendom. But for their Arms, which properly belonged to them as Dukes of Burgundy, they were Bendwise of Or and Azure, a Border Gules. Which Coat is usually marshaled in the Scutcheons of the Kings of Spain; that of the Earldom being omitted, though in their possession. The reasons of which are probably (for I go but by guess) partly because this being the older and Paternal Coat, comprehends the other; and partly to keep on foot the memory of his Title to the Dukedom itself, in right of which he holdeth such a great Estate.   

19 The County of BURGUNDY.  
THe County of BURGUNDY hath on the East the Mountain jour, which parts it from Switzerland; on the West, the Dntohie of Burgundy, from which divided by the Soasne; on the North a branch of the Mountain Vauge, which runneth betwixt it and Lorreine; on the the South, La Bresse. It is reckoned to be 90 miles in length, about 60 in breadth; and with the provinces of Dauphin. La Bresse, and Provence, made up the Dukedom of Burgundy beyond the Soasne; on the Eastern side of which it is wholly situate. This part thereof, now generally called the French Comtè, or the Free County, because not under the command of the French Kings, but living in a more free Estate than any Subjects of that Kingdom.  
The Country in some parts very Mountainous, but those Mountains yielding excellent Vineyards, and having in recompense of a little barrenness an intermixture of most pleasing and fruitful valleys: swelling with plenty of all natural commodities useful unto the life of man; and for variety of fresh streams, and delightful Riverets, inferior only to the Duchy.  
The principal Towns and Cities of it, are, 1 Besanson, called by Caesar, Vesontio, than the chief City of the Sequani, as afterwards the Metropolis of the Province entitled Maxima Sequanorum; by consequence an Archbishops See. Seated betwixt two Mountains on the banks of the River Doux, by which it is almost encompassed; such artificial Fortifications being added to it, as make it very strong both by art and nature. But this is an imperial City, not subject to the Government and Command of the Earls of Burgundy; honoured with a small University founded here, Anno 1540 by Pope julio the 2d. and Charles the fifth. 2 Dole, seated on the same River Doux, for riches, strength, and beauty, to be preferred before any in all the County, of which it is the Parliament City, and consequently of most resort for dispatch of business. Anciently it was an University for the study of the Civil Laws; but now the University is devoured by a College of Jesuits: who fearing lest the Doctrine of the Reformed Churches might creep in amongst the people, not only have debarred them the use of the Protestants Books, but have expressly forbid them to talk of GOD, either in a good sort or in a bad. 3 Salins, so called from its salt fountains out of which came the greatest part of the Earls Revenue; honoured for a while with the seat of the Parliament, removed hither from Dole by King Lewis the 11th. at such time as he held this Country; beholding to him (being a wise and politic Prince) for many wholesome Ordinances still observed amongst them. 4 Poligni, the Bailliage of the Lower; as 5 Vescal is of the Higher Burgundy. 6 Arboise, noted for the best Wines; and 7. Laxoal for medicinable Baths. 8 Nazareth, on the borders of Switzerland, fortified with a very strong Castle, the ordinary seat and retreat from business of the first Princes of Orange, of the house of Chalons, who had great possessions in this Country. 9 Grace, and 10 Chastel-Chalon, 11 Quingey, 12 Orgelet. Here is also the great and famous Abbey of Clugny, near the Town of Beaum, out of which so many Monasteries in the Western Church had their first Original.  
The old Inhabitants of this County were the Sequant, a potent name, contending with the Hedui and Arverni for the Sovereignty of Gaul; till the strife was ended by the Romans, under whom it made together with Switzerland the Province of Maxima Sequanorism. In the declining of which Empire it fell to the Burgundians, and by Rodolph the last King of the French Kingdom of Burgundy was given to Conrade the 2d Emperor of Germane●e. After that reckoned as a part of the Germane Empire, governed by such Earls or Provincial Officers, as those Emperors lent hither. Oth● of Flanders, Son to a Sister of the Emperor Conrade, was the first that held it as Proprietary: the other three whom Paradine sets before him in his Catalogue of the Earls of Burgundy, being merely Official. It was first united to the Duchy by the marriage of D. Eudes with joan the Countess. But no issue coming of this bed, it fell into the house of Flanders; and with the Heir of Flanders unto Philip the Hardy, the first Duke hereof of the Royal Race of Valois, Anno 1369. Philip the Grandchild of this Philip, united most of the Belgic Provinces unto his Estate: after whose death, and the death of Charles his Son at the battle of Nancie, the Duchy was surprised by King Lewis the 11th, as holden of the Crown of France, escheated to him for want of Heirs males. But the County, holden of the Empire, though subdued also by this Lewis, was restored again to Mary the Daughter and Heir of Charles; continuing hitherto in her issue, as appears evidently by this Catalogue of  

The Earls of Burgundy.  
1001. 1 Otho Guillaume, the first Earl of Burgundy, by the power and aid of Robert King of France.  
1118. 2 Reinald, Cousin and Heir of Otho.  
1157 3 Frederick Barbar●ssa, Emperor in right of Beatrix his wife, Daughter of Earl Reynald.  
1183. 4 Otho the youngest Son of Frederick.  
1200 5 Otho II. Duke of Meranis, and Earl of Burgundy in right of Beatrix his Wife, the Daughter of Otho the first.  
1208 6 Stephen, Earl of Chalons, next Heir of Gerard of Vienne, and Joan his Wife, Daughter of Otho the first.  
1204 7 John, the Son of Stephen de Chalons.  
1269 8 Hugh, the Son of John.  
●270 9 Othelin, the Son of Hugh, Earl of Artoys in right of Maud his Wife, Daughter of Robert Earl of Artoys.  
1315 10 Philip the Long, King of France, in right of joan his Wife, Daughter and Heir of Othalin.  
1331 11 Eudes Duke of Burgundy; Husband of joan of France, the eldest Daughter of King Philip the Long, and joan the Countess.  
1349 12 Philip, Duke and Earl of Burgundy, Grandchild of Eudes, and joan his Wife, by their Son Philip.  
1361. 13 Margaret, the Widow of Lewis Earl of Flanders, and second Daughter of Philip the Long, and joan the Countels, was Countess of Burgundy and Artois, after the death of her Cousin Philip.  
14 Lewis de Malain Earl of Flanders by his Father, and of Burgundy and Artois by his Mother.  
1369. 15 Philip the Hardy, Duke of Burgundy by the gift of his Brother Charles the 5th, and Earl of Burgundy, Flanders and Artois, in right of Margaret his Wife, sole Daughter of Lewis de Malain.  
1404. 16 Antony the Proud, Duke and Earl of Burgundy.  
1419. 17 Philiy the Good, Duke and Earl of Burgundy.  
1467. 18 Charles the Warlike, Duke and Earl of Burgundy.  
1475. 19 Marry, the Daughter of Charles, married to Maximillan, of Austria, Son of Frederick the 3d, Emperor of Germany, in which honour he succeeded his Father.  
1482 20 Philip the IV. Son of Mary and Maximilian; King of Castille and Arragon in right of his Wife joan, Daughter to ferdinand and Isabel Kings of Castille, etc.  
1506 21 Charles the Son of Philip, King of Spain, and Emperor of Germany, by the name of Charles' the fi●t.  
1558. 22 Philip the II. of Spain, and V. of Burgundy.  
23 Philip the III of Spain, and VI of Burgundy.  
23 Philip the IV. of Spain, and VII. of Burgundy, in whom resteth the possession of the 〈◊〉 of Burgundy, and the Earldom of Charolois: herein not troubled by the 〈◊〉, for fe●● of giving offence to the Cantons of Switzerland upon whom it bordereth; jealous enough already of the greatness and power of France, and so not likely to admit such a porent Neighbour.   
The Arms of this Earldom are Azure, a Lion rampant Or, Seem of Billets Argent.   

20 The LANDS in the AQUITAINE and gallic OCEAN. 
French Lands.   
HAving thus took a view of the several Provinces within the Continent of France, let us next look upon the LANDS which belong unto it; dispersed in the Mediterranean Sea, and the Western Ocean. Those in the Mediterranean Sea, are of little note, as the Isles of Eres, and 2 Pomegnes, lying against Provence; 3 Maguelone, lying against Languedoc; and 4 L' Anguillade, betwixt both, at the mouth of the Rhosne; of which there is nothing to be said, but that those of Eres are thought to be the ostocchades of Ptolemy, and his Blascon, to be Anguillade. And of as little note in the Western Ocean, are Belle-Isle, against Vannes in Bretangne, the Isle de Deiu having in it two or three good Villages; Marmostier, plentiful in Salt, and beautified with a Monastery called the White Abbey. Those of most note are, 1 Olero●, and 2 Ree, on the coast of Aquitaine; and those of 3 Jarsey, 4 Gernsey, 5 Sark, and 6 Alderney, on the shores of Normandy: Of which, the four last are under the Kings of England, the rest possessed by the French.  
1 OLERON, is an Island situate over against the Province of Xaintoigne, and South unto the Isle of Ree, from which little distant. It is the biggest of the two, and makes yearly very great quantity of Salt, wherewith most of the Provinces on the Western Ocean use to be furnished. But it is easy of access, and not very defensible, which makes it of less note both in ancient and modern stories. The principal Town of it is called Oleron, by the name of the Island. One thing there is, for which indeed this Island is of special fame, and that is, that the Marine Laws, which for near 500 years have generally been received by all the States of the Christian World, which frequent the Ocean, (the Rhodian Laws being antiquated and worn out of use) for regulating of Sea affairs, and deciding of Maritime Controversies, were declared and established here, and from hence called the Laws of Oleron. And here they were declared and established by King Rich. the first of England, as Lord Paramount of the Seas, immediately on his return from the Holy Land: this Island being then in his possession, as a Member of his Dukedom of Aquitaine; Quae quidem Leges & Statutaper Dominum Richardum quondam Regem Angliae in redditu suo à Terra Sancta, correcta fuerunt, interretata, declarata, et in Insula de Oleron publicata, et nominata in Gallica Lingua La Loy d' Oleron, etc. saith an old Record, which I find cited in a M. S. Discourse of my late learned Friend Sir john Burroughs, (once Keeper of the Records in the Tower of London, but afterwards Principal King of Arms, by the name of Garter) entitled, The Sovereignty of the British Seas. So powerful were the Kings of England in the former times, as to give Laws to all that traded on the Ocean.  
2 The Isle of R E, is situate over against Rochel; to which it served for an Out-work, on that side thereof. It is in length ten English miles, and about half as much in breadth, well fortified with deep marshes at the entries of it; to which the many Salt-pits every where intermingled, add a very great strength. Chief places in it, are, 1 La Butte du Mont. 2 St. John de Mons, 3 St. Hilary, 4 St. martin's, the largest and strongest of them all, from whence the whole Island hath sometimes been called St. Martin's. After the taking of this Town by Lewis the 13th, Anno 1622. (The Duke of Soubize then commanding in it for those of Rochel) it was very well fortified; and since made unfortunately famous for the defeat of the English Forces under the command of George Duke of Buckingham, sent thither to recover the Town and Island, on the instigation of Soubize, who before had lost it. Anno 1627.  
3 JARSEY, by Antonine called Caesarea, is situate about ten miles from the Coast of Normandy, within the view and prospect of the Church of Constance, part of which Diocese it was: in length containing 11 miles, 6 in breadth, and in circuit about 33. It is generally very fruitful of Corn, whereof they have not only enough for themselves, but some overplus to barter at St. Malos with the Spanish Merchants: and of an Air not very much disposed to diseases, unless it be an Ague in the end of Harvest, which they call Les Settembers. The Country stands much upon enclosures, the hedges of the grounds well stored with Apples, and those Apples making store of Cider, which is their ordinary drink: watered with many pleasant rivulets, and good store of Fishponds, yielding a Carp for taste and largeness inferior unto none in Europe, except those of G●rnsey, which generally are somewhat bigger, but not better relished. The people for the most part more inclinable to husbandry, than to trades or merchandise, and therein differing very much from those of Gernsey, who are more for merchandise than tillage. It containeth in it 12 Parishes, or Villages, having Churches in them, besides the Mansions of the Sergneurs, and chief men of the Country. The principal is St. H●laries, where is the Cohu, or Court of justice for all the Island. It is about the bigness of an ordinary market Town in England; situate on the edge of a little Bay, fortified on the one side with a small Block-house called Mount St. Aubin; but on that side which is next the Town with a very strong Castle called Fort Elizabeth, situate upon craggy Rocks, and encompassed with two arms of the Sea; so named from Qu. Elizabeth, who built it to assure the Island against the French, and furnished it with 30 piece of Ordnance, and all other necessaries. There is also on the East side, opposite to the City of Constance, high mounted on steep and craggy Rocks, the strong Castle of Mont-Orgueil; of great Antiquity, repaired by King Henry the fifth, now furnished with 40 piece of Cannon, and made the ordinary residence of the Governors for the Kings of England.  
4 On the Northwest of jarsey, lieth the Island of GERNSEY, called Sarnia by Antoninus▪ in form Triangular, 
French Islands.  each side of nine miles in length. The Country of as rich a soil as the other of Ia●sey, but not so well cultivated and manured: the poorer people here being more given to manufactures, (especially to the knitting of Stockings and Waistcoats) and the rich to merchandise; many of which are Masters of good stout Barks, with which, they traffic into England and other places. The whole Island containing ten Villages with Churches; the Principal of which St. Peter's Port, a very neat and well-built Town, with a safe Peer for the benefit of Merchants, and the securing of the Haven, capable of handsome Barks; a Market Town, beautified with a very fair Church, and honoured with the Plaiderie or Court of justice. Opposite whereto, in a little Islet standeth the Castle of Cornet, taking up the whole circuit and dimensions of it: environed on all sides with the Sea; having one entrance only, and that very narrow: well fortified with works of Art, and furnished with no less than 80 pieces of Ordnance for defence of the Island, but chiefly to command the adjoining Harbour, capable of 500 as good ships as any sail on the Ocean. A piece of great importance to the Realm of England, and might prove utterly destructive of the trade hereof, if in the hands of any Nation that were strong in shipping. For that cause made the Ordinary Seat of the English Governors; though of late times not so much honoured with the presence of those Governors, as a place of that Consequence ought to be. Pertaining unto Gernsey are two little Islets, the one called let-how, the Governors' Park, wherein are some few Fallow Deer, and good plenty of Coneys; the other named Arm, some three miles in compass, a dwelling heretofore of Franciscan Friars, now not inhabited but by Pheasants, of which, amongst the shrubs and bushes there is very good store.  
5 ALDERNEY, by Antonine called Arica, by the French, Aurigni, and Aurney, is situate over against the Cape of the Lexobii in the Dukedom of Normandy, which the Mariners at this day call the Hag: distant from which but six miles only. Besides many dwelling houses scattered up and down, there is one pretty Town or Village of the same name with the Island, consisting of about an hundred Families; and having not far off an Harbour, made in the fashion of a Semicircle, which they call La Crabbie. The whole about 8 miles in compass, of very difficult access, by reason of the high rocks and precipices, which encompass it on every side, and with a small force easily defensible▪ if thought worth attempting.  
6 And so is also SARK, the adjoining Island, being in compass six miles; not known by any special name unto the Ancients; and to say truth not peopled till the fifth year of Queen Elizabeth; who then granted it in Fee-farm to Helier de Carteret, the signior of St. Oenone in the Isle of jarsey, who from thence planted it, and made Estates out of it to several Occupants: so that it may contain now about 50 Households: Before which time it served only for a Common, or Beasts-pasture to those of Gernsey, save that there was an Hermitage, and a little Chapel, for the use of such as the solitariness of the place invited to those retirements.  
These two last Lands, are subject to the Governor of Gernsey, all four to the Crown of England, holden in right of the Dukedom of Normandy, to which they anciently belonged, and of which now the sole remainders in the power of the English. Attempted often by the French (the two first I mean) since they seized on Normandy, but always with repulse and loss: the people being very affectionate to the English Government, under which they enjoy very ample Privileges; which from the French they could not hope for. Their Language is the Norman-French (though the better sort of them speak the English also) their Law, the Grand Customaire of Normandy, attempered and applied to the use of this people in their suits and business, by the Bailiffs, and Chief justiciers of the two chief Lands. Their Religion for the main, is that of the Reformed Churches: the Government in jarsey by the Dean thereof, Suffragan heretofore to the Bishop of Constance, now to the Bishop of Winchester; in Gernsey, by a mixed Consistory of Clergy and Lay-Elders, according to the new Model of Geneva, introduced in both Lands, Anno 1565. being the eighth year of Queen Elizabeth, and abolished again in jarsey, Anno 1619. being the 17th of King James.  
But to return again to the story of France, thorough which we have now made our Progress both by Sea and Land: It took this name from the Frankes or French, a Germane People, who in the War of the Roman Empire possessed themselves of it: not mentioned by that name by Caesar, Strabo, Ptolemy, or any of the more ancient Writers. Nor was it taken up by them, for aught appeareth, till an hundred years after the death of Ptolemy: the first express mention of them occurring in the reign of Gallienus, then ransacking the coasts of Gaul, and joining with Posthumus the Rebel, against that Emperor. Afterwards often spoken of in the course of the Roman stories, under the Empire of Claudius, Probus, Dioclesian, and the Sons of Constantine: though only in the way of pillage and depredation. Their habitation in those times, was from the meeting of the 〈◊〉 with the River Moenus, not far from Frankford, where they confined upon the Almans, to the Germane Ocean: containing the particular Nations of the Bructeri, Sicambri, Salii, Cherusci, Frisit, and Teucteri, besides some others of less note: and taking up the Countries of Westphalen, B●rgen, Marck, and so much of Cleve, as lieth on the Dutch side of the Rhine, the Lantgravedom of Hassia the Duchy of Gueldres, the Provinces of Zutphen, Utrecht, Overyssell, both Frieslands, and so much of H●lland as lieth on the same side of the Rhine. United in the name of Frankes, to show that Liberty or Freedom from the yoke of servitude which the Romans had endeavoured to impose upon them, and wherewith all the Nations on the other side of the River were supposed to suffer: Governed by Dukes, till the year 420. when Pharamont first took upon himself the name of King. Meroveus their third King having dispossessed the Sons of Cledion, the Son and Successor of Pharamont, was the first that set foot in Gaul: when seeing the Romans on the one side put to the worst by Theodorick and the Goths; and on the other side by the Burgundians; they passed over the Rhine, and possessed themselves of the Province of Germania Secunda, containing all the Belgics Provinces on the French side of that River, together with the District of Colen, Gulick, and the rest of Cleve, them passing in the account of Gaul. His victories and fortunes were inherited by Chilperick his Son & Successor, who added Picardy, Champain, and the Isle of France to the former conquest; took Paris, & made it the seat of his Kingdom Afterwards when they had fully seated themselves here, and thereby opened a free passage to the rest of the Country, they quickly made themselves Masters of all that which formerly had been possessed by the Romans; whom they outed of their last hold in Soissons, under Clovis their fifth King; who also took Aquitain and the parts adjoining from the Visi-Gothes, or Goths of Spain: for these and many signal victories against the Almains, deservedly surnamed the Great, but greater in submitting to the Faith of CHRIST, and receiving Baptism, than by all his Victories. Childebert, and Clotaire, the Sons of this Clovis, vanquished the Burgundians, adding that Kingdom to their own: as Theodebert his Grandchild, King of Mets, or Austrasia, did the Country of Provence, resigned unto him by Am●lasunta, Queen of the Ostro Goths, or Goths of Italy, by whom it had been wrested from the Goths of Spain. In the person of Clotaire the second, the Realm of France improvidently dismembered into many Kingdoms amongst the Children of Clovis the first, that is to say, the Kingdoms of France, Soissons, Orleans, and Austrasia, (of which Orleans and Austrasia were of long continuance) were again united: Whose Successor Dagobert the first, was the last considerable Prince of the Mergovignians. After this time the reputation of the French Kings of this line began to diminish, scarce doing any thing that might ennoble and commend them to succeeding Ages; or leaving any monument behind them but their empty Names: which I shall represent in the following catalogue according to their several times, first taking notice, that though the Kings of this first race did many times divide the Kingdom, as before was said, yet none of them were called Kings of France, but those that had their Royal seat in the City of Paris: the rest being called only Kings of Soissons, Mets, or Orleans, according to the Name of their Principal Cities. And therefore leaving those to their proper places, we will here only take a Survey of those, who passed in common estimate for the Kings of France.  

The Kings of France of the French or Merovignian Line.  
449 1 Meroveus, Master of the horse to Clodion the Son of Pharamont, from whom this Line of Kings were called Merovignians. 10.  
459. 2 Chilperic, the Son of Morove. 26.  
485. 3 Clovis, the first Christian King of the French. 30.  
515. 4. Childebert, eldest Son of Clovis, his other Brethren Reigning in their several places. 45.  
560. 5 Clotaire, Brother of Childebert, first King of the Soissons, afterwards sole King of the French.  
565. 6 Cherebert, Son of Clotaire.  
574. 7 Chilperic II. King of Scissons, and Brother of Cherebert, whom he succeeded in the Kingdom. 14.  
588. 8 Clotaire II. Son of Chilperic the second. 44.  
632. 9 Dagobert, Son of Clotaire the second. 14.  
645. 10 Clovis II. Son of Dagobert. 17.  
663. 11 Clotaire III. Son of Clotaire the second. 4.  
667 12 Chilperic III. Son of Clotaire the third.  
680 13 Theodorick Brother of Chilperic. 14.  
694 14 Clovis III. Son to Theodorick. 5.  
698. 15 Childebert II. Brother to Clovis. 18.  
716. 16 Dagobert II. Son of Childebert, the second.  
722. 17 Chilperic IU. opposed by Charles Martel in behalf of Clotaire the fourth. 5.  
727 17 Theodoric II. Son of Dagobert the second.  
742 19 Chilperic V. Son of Theodoric the last of the Merovignian Family, Deposed by Pepin, Son to Charles Martel; the Pope giving approbation to his proceedings.   
This Pepin and his Father Martel were Mayres of the Palace to the former Kings: which Mayres were originally Controllers of the King's House, and had nothing to do with the affairs of State. But Clotaire the third, to ease himself and his successors of a burden so weighty, made the Mayres, Vicars general of his Empire. From henceforward the Kings followed their pleasures, showing themselves only on May-day: and then being seated in a Chariot, adorned with Flowers, and drawn by four Oxen. As for the May●e, he openeth packets, heareth and di●patcheth foreign Ambassadors, giveth remedy to the complaints of the Subjects, maketh Laws & repealeth them: An authority somewhat like that of the Praefecti Praeto●io, in the declining times of the Roman Empire, or that of the Sultan's under the Mahometan Caliphs', and the Vice-Roys of the old Egyptian Pharaohs. An office which had been born by the Ancestors of this Martel, ever since the reign of Clotaire the second, in whose time the Palatine or Mayre was one Arnulphus, descended lineally from V●ilo the second Son of Adalgerio, the first King of the Boiarians, or Bavarians▪ Which Vtilo being a military Prince, and having done good service to Theodorick the first King of Austrasia, or Mets, against the Danes then grievously infesting the Coasts of the Lower-Germany; was by him made Warden of those Marches, and honoured with the marriage of his Daughter Clotilde, and liberally endowed with fair possessions in this tract. The fourth from Vtilo was this Arunlph, the first Mayor of this house; which Office having long enjoyed, he resigned it to Ansegisus his eldest Son (the first who drew unto himself the Managery of the whole Estate) and bidding farewell to the affairs of the World, became a Priest, and died a Bishop of Mets, Anno 641. Afterwards Canonised a Saint. Ansegisus dying in the year 679. left his authority and Office to his Nephew Martin, Son of Ferdulphus his younger Brother. But he being slain by Ebroinus, one of the Competitors, who a while enjoyed it, Pepin surnamed the Pat, Son of Ansegisus, revenging his Cousins death upon Ebronius, and crushing all the opposite factions which were raised against him, obtained that honour for himself. And having much advanced the affairs of France by the conquest of the Sueves and Frisons, died in the year 714. Succeeded to in this great Office after his decease (for Grimold his only lawful Son, and Theobalaus the Son of Grimold, whom he had successively substituted in the same, died not long before him) by Charles his natural Son, begotten on Albieda his Concubine; from his martial prowess called Martel. Who in his time, did to the Kings of France great service, especially in routing that vast Army of the Moors and Saracens, in the battle of ●ours before mentioned, thereby not only freeing France from the present danger, but adding Langued●c to the Crown, formerly in possession of the Goths and Moors; for which he was created Duke or Prince of the French, yet would he not usurp the Kingdom, or the title of King, though both at his disposal wholly: it being his ordinary Saying, that he had rather Rule a King, than be one.  
To him succeeded Caroloman his eldest Son, Anno 741. who held the office but a year, and then left it to his Brother Pepin: Who being of less moderation than his Father was, made such use of his power, that partly by that means, and partly under colour of an election, confirmed by Pope Zacharie the first, he took the Kingdom to himself: and the unfortunate King Chilperick had his paul shaved, and was thrust into a Monastery. For this investiture both Pepin and Charles his Son, did many good services for the Popes, destroying on their quarrel the Kingdom of the Lombaerds, and giving them most of the Lands which formerly belonged unto the Exrohs of Ravenna. And on the other side the Popes to requite these courtesies confirmed the former in this Kingdom by their Papal Power (which then began to bear some sway in the Christian World) and gave the last (besides the opportunity of attaining the Western Empire) the Title of Most Christian King, continued ever since unto his Successors: And to say truth, he well deserved those honours, and had they been far greater, by many victories obtained against the Enemies of the Gospel; the several Heathens by his means converted to the Faith of Christ; the great abilities he had of estate and judgement, enabling him to support the Majesty of the Roman Empire: For he not only was sole Monarch of the Kingdom of France, not parceled out as formerly, and in times succeeding, into several petit Kingdoms and Principalities; but had added thereunto by his own proper virtue the greatest part of Italy, the best part of Germany, all Belgium, the two Pannonia's, and a great part of Spain.  
But this vast Empire falling into weak hands which were not able enough to manage it, decayed in as little time as it was in raising: partly by the unnatural Ambition of the Sons of King Lewis the Godly, the next Successor of this Charles, who to make themselves all Kings, first deposed their Father, and then divided his Estate amongst them, into the Kingdoms of Italy, Burgundy, France, Lorraine, and Germany: four of which falling at last into the hands of strangers, ceased to be French, and passed into such Famlies as proved the greatest enemies of the Crown of France: partly by alienating the best and goodliest Provinces of France itself; never again united till these later days, which made the French Kings less considerable both at home and abroad, which we have touched upon before: and partly by the weakness and unworthiness of the Kings of this race; there being no question to be made but Lewis the Stammering, Charles the Bal●, the Gross, and the Simple, would have found better Attributes if they had deserved them. For by this means the issue of this brave Prince grew so despicable in the eyes of their Subjects, that first Eudes the Son of Robert Duke of Anjou, and after Rodolph Duke of Burgundy, the Uncle of Eudes, (both of the race of Witikindus the last Prince of the Saxons, and consequently both Aliens to the House of Charles) possessed themselves severally of the Kingdom. And though they did not hold it long, being depressed and overborne by their opposite factions, yet did they lay a fair ground for Hugh Capet to build his hopes on. Who being Son of Hugh the Great, Constable of France, and Earl of Paris, the Son of Robert Duke of Anjou, younger Brother of Eudes, and near kinsman of Rodolphe, never left practising his party in the Realm of France, till he had got possession of the Regal Diadem, wherewith two Princes of his house had been invested formerly by the like Elections. But for the Kings of this second Race, founded by two brave Princes, but on the unjust grounds of an usurpation, they are these that follow.  

The second race of the Kings of France, of the Carolovinian or Boiarian Line.  
A. Ch.  
151. 1 Pepin, the Son of Charles Martel, succeeded in the Office of Mayre, Anno 742, and having got the Regal Crown, vanquished the Lombard's, made the Boiarians tributary, and crushed the Saxons, 18.  
769. 2 Charles, surnamed the Great, the Son of Pepin, subdued the Kingdoms of the Lombard's and Saxons, conquered the Boiarians and Avares, and vanquished the Saracens of Spain; Crowned Emperor of the West upon Christmas day by Pope Leo the third, Anno 800, 46.  
815. 3 Lewis the Godly, Son of Charles King of France and Emperor, the last sole Monarch of the French, deposed by his ambitious and unnatural Sons: the Empire of the French after his decease, being divided into the Kingdoms of Italy, B●rgundie, Germany, France, and Lorrein; and France itself distracted into many Sovereign Estates and Principalities, 26.  
841. 4 Charles II. surnamed Calvus, or the Bald, youngest Son of Lewis, King of France and Emperor, vanquished by Charles the Gross, in the War of Italy, 38.  
879. 5 Lewis II. surnamed Balbus, or the Stammering, Son of Charles the Bald, King of France, and Emperor.  
881. 6 Lewis III. with Caroloman his Brother, the base Sons of Lewis the Stammering; Usurpers of the Throne in the infancy of Charles the Simple.  
886. 7 Charles III. surnamed Crassus, or the Gross, King of Germany and Emperor: called into France, and elected King, during the Minority of Charles the Simple, 5.  
891. 8 Odo or Eudes, Son of Robert Earl of Anjou, of the race of Witikindus the last King of the Saxons, elected by an opposite Faction, outed Charles the Gross, 9  
900. 9 Charles' IV. surnamed Simplex, or the Simple, the Posthumus Son of Lewis the Stammerer, restored unto the Throne of his Fathers, which, after many troubles raised against him by Robert the 2d, Earl of Anjou (whom he slew in battle) he was forced to resign, 27.  
927. 10 Rodolph of Burgundy, Son of Richard Duke of Burgundy the Brother of Eudes, succeeded on the resignation of Charles the Simple, 2.  
929. 11 Lewis IV. surnamed Transmarine, in regard that during his Father's Troubles he had lived in England; restored unto the Regal Throne on the death of Rodolph: opposed therein by Hugh Earl of Paris and Anjou, the Nephew of King Eudes by his Brother Robert before mentioned.  
958. 12 Lotharius, Son of Lewis the 4th, disturbed in his possession by Hugh Capet, the eldest Son of the said Hugh, on the pretensions of that house, by which at last he got the Kingdom.  
987. 13 Lewis V. Son of Lotharius, the last King of the House of Charles the Great. After whose death (being King only for a year) the Crown was seized on by Hugh Capet: Charles Duke of Lorreine, Brother of Lotharius, and Uncle unto Lewis the fifth, being pretermitted.   
And now we are come to the present race of the Kings of France, founded in Hugh Capet, so called from the greatness of his head, Son of Hugh the great, Earl of Paris and Anjou, and Grandchild of Robert the second Earl of Anjou: Which Robert was the Brother of E●des, and Cousin German of Rodolph Kings of France. Who partly by his own wits, but chiefly by the weakness of the mongrel Issue of Charles the Great, having got the Diadem, transmitted it unto his Posterity; the Crown descending in a direct line from Father to Son, till the death of Lewis the 10th, surnamed Hutin. But here we are to understand, that the Realm of France was at that time shut up within narrower bounds than it is at the present: the large and rich Countries of Champagne, Normandy, Bretagne, Anjou, Poictou, Languedoc, and the great Dukedom of Aquitain, besides those Provinces which constituted and made up the Kingdom of Burgundy, being aliened and dismembered from it. How they became reduced to the Crown again, will be discerned in the ensuing History and Succession of  

The third Race of the Kings of France, of the Capetine or Saxon Line.  
988. 1 Hugh Capet, of whom sufficiently before, 9  
997. 2. Robert, the Son of Hugh Capet, Duke of Burgundy also, 34.  
1031. 3 Henry, the eldest Son of Robert; his younger Brother Robert being settled in the Dukedom of Burgundy, 39  
1061. 4 Philip, the Son of Henry, who added Berry to the Crown, 49.  
1110. 5 Lewis, VI Son of Philip, surnamed the Gross, 28.  
1138. 6 Lewis VII. Son of Lewis the sixth, an Adventurer in the War of the Holy Land: as also did his Son and successor  
1181. 7 Philip II. surnamed Augustus, by whom Normandy, Aquitain, & Anjou, with their several Appendices, were taken from King john of England. 43.  
1224. 8 Lewis VIII. Son of Philip Augustus. 3.  
1227. 9 Lewis IX. surnamed the Saint, renowned for his Wars in Egypt, and the Holy-Land. He restored Guienne to the English, and added the Earldoms of Tholouse and Mascon to the Crown of France. 44.  
1271. 10 Philip III. Son of Lewis. 15.  
1286. 11 Philip IV. surnamed the Fair, King also of Navarre in the right of the Lady joan his Wife. 28.  
1314. 12 Lewis X. surnamed Hutin, King of Navarre in right of his Mother, whom he succeeded in that Kingdom, Anno 1305. After whose death the Kingdom of France was to have descended on joan his Daughter. 2.  
1315. 13 Philip V. called the Long, Brother of Lewis Hutin, partly by threats, promises, and other practices, caused a Law to pass (to which he gave the name of the Sal que Law) for disabling Women from the succession to the Crown; and thereby quite excluded his Brother's Daughter, served in the same kind himself by his Brother Charles, who following his example, excluded, on the same pretence, his Nieces Joan and Margares, the Daughters of Philip. 5.  
1320. 14 Charles IU. but in true account the fifth of that name, most commonly called Charles the Fair, Brother of Philip and Lewis the two last Kings. After whose death began the Wars of the English for the Crown of France, challenged by King Edward the 3d. as Son and Heir of Isabel, the Daughter of King Philip the Fair, and Sister to the 3 last Kings. 7.  
1328. 15 Philip VI surnamed the Valois, Son of Charles Earl of Valois, the second Son of King Philip the third, and Uncle to the three last Kings, succeeded under colour of the Salic Law: of which Charles it is said that he was Son to a King, Brother to a King, Uncle to a King, and Father to a King; yet himself was no King. In this King's days was fought the famous Battle of Crecie, Anno 1343. in which the French Army consisted of about 70000 Soldiers; the English of 11800 only; yet the victory fell unto the English: by whose valour fell that day john King of Bohemia, 11 Princes, 80 Barons, 120 Knights, and 30000 of the common Soldiers. He added unto his Estates, the County Palatine of Champagne, the Country of Dauphin, and the City and Earldom of Montpelier. 22.  
1350 16 john, the Son of Philip de Valois, in whose reign was fought the battle of Poitiers, wherein Edward the black prince, (so called for his black acts upon the French) with an handful of wearied Soldiers (but 8000 in all) overcame the French army consisting of 40000 men: of which they slew besides the Nobles, 10000 of the common Soldiers, and took prisoners King John himself and Philip his Son, 70 Earls, 50 Barons, and 12000 Gentlemen, 14.  
1364. 17 Charles' V. the Son of john, recovered all those pieces (except only Calais) which the English had before gotten from his Father and Grandfather. He is called commonly Charles the Wise, but Lewis the 11th. would by no means allow him that attribute: affirming that it was but a foolish part to give his younger Brother Philip the Dukedom of Burgundy, and withal the Heir of Flanders to wife. And so it proved in the Event.  
18 Charles VI a weak and distracted Prince, in whose reign Henry the fifth of England, called in by the faction of Burgundy against that of Orleans, married the Lady Catharine Daughter of this King, and was thereupon made Regent of France during the King's life, and Heir apparent of the Kingdom. But he had first won the great battle of Agincourt, in which the English having an Army but of 15000 vanquished an Army of the French consisting of 52000 men, of which were slain 5 Dukes, 8 Earls, 25 Lords, 8000 Knights and Gentlemen of note, and 25000 of the Commons, the English losing but one Duke, one Earl, and 600 Soldiers. This unfortunate Prince lost what his predecessor Philip the ad. had taken from King john of England, and had not been restored by King Lewis the ninth.  
1423. 19 Charles VII. Son of Charles the sixth, after a long and bloody War, recovered from the English (then divided by domestic dissensions) all their Lands and Signiories in France, except Calais only.  
1461. 20 Lewis XI. Son of Charles the seventh, added unto his Crown the Dukedom of Burgundy, the Earldom of Provence, (and therewithal a Title unto Naples and Sicil) and a great part of Picardy. A Prince of so great wants, or such sordid parsimony, that there is found a Reckoning in the Chamber of Accounts in Paris of two shillings for new sleeves to his old doublet, and three half pence for liquor to grease his Boots  
21 Charles VIII. Son of Lewis the 11th. who quickly won, and as soon lost the Kingdom of Naples; which he laid claim to in the right of the house of Anjou. By the marriage of Anne the Heir of Bretagne, he added that Dukedom to his Crown.  
1498. 22 Lewis XII. Son of Charles, and Grandsonne of Lewis Dukes of Ori●●ans, which Lewis was a younger Son of Charles the fifth; succeeded as the ne●t Heir-male of the house of Valois. He dispossessed Ludowick Sforz● of the Duchy of Milan, and divided the Realm of Naples with Ferdinand the Catholic; but held neither long. By his marriage with Anne of Bretagne, the Widow of his Predecessor, he confirmed that Dukedom to his House; and united it unto the Realm by an Act of State. After his death the English, to prevent the growing greatness of Spain, began to close in with the French, and grew into great correspondencies with them; insomuch that all the following Kings, until Lewis the 13th (except Francis the 2d, a King of one year and no more) were all Knights of the Garter.  
1515. 23 Francis, Duke of Angolesme, Grandsonne of john of Angolesme, one of the younger Sons of the said Lewis Duke of Orleans, succeeded on the death of Lewis the 12th, without i●●ue male. Took Prisoner at the battle of Pavia, by Charles the fifth, with whom he held perpetual wars; he being as unwilling to endure a superior, as the Emperor was to admit an equal. 32.  
1547. 24 Henry II. Son of Francis, recovered Cali●e from the English, and drove Charles out of Germany, and took from him Mets, ●oui, and Verdun, three Imperial Cities, ever since Members of this Kingdom. 12.  
1559. 25 Francis II. Son of Henry the 2d, King of the Scots also, in the right of Mary his Wife.  
1560. 26 Charles IX. Brother of Francis the 2d, the Author of the Massacre at Paris, 14.  
1574. 27 Henry III. elected King of Poland in the life of his Brother, whom he succeeded at his death. The last King of the House of Valois, stripped of his Life and Kingdom by the Guisian Faction, called the Holy League. 15.  
1589. 28 Henry IU. King of Navarre, and Duke of Vendosme, succeeded as the next Heir-male to Henry the 3d, in the right of the House of Bourbon, descended from Robert Earl of Clermont, a yownger Son of Lewis the 9th. He ruined the Holy League, cleared France of the Spaniards, into which they had been called by that potent and rebellious Faction; and laid La Bresse unto the Crown, together with the Estates of Bearn, and Base Navarre; and after a ten years' time of peace, was villainously murdered by Ravillac, in the streets of Paris. 21.  
1610. 29 Lewis XIII. Son of Henry the 4th, the most absolute King of France since the death of Charles the Great. For the reduction of the scattered and dismembered Provinces (the work of his many Predecessors) he added the reduction of all the Ports and Garrisons held by the Hugonots in that Kingdom; seized on the Dukedom of Bar, and surprised that of Lorreine, both which he held until his death. 32.  
1642. 30 Lewis XIV. Son of Lewis the 13th, and of the Lady Anne, eldest Daughter of Philip the third of Spain, succeeded at the age of four years under the Government of his Mother, the 30th King of the Line of Capet, the 43 from Charles the Great, and the 64 King of France (or rather of the French) now living.   
As for the Government of these Kings, it is merely Regal, or, to give it the true name, despotical; such as that of a Master over his Servants: the Kings will going for a Law, and his Edicts as valid as a Sentence of the Court of Parliament. Quod Principi placuerit Legis habet vigorem, was a Prerogative belonging to the Roman Emperors, as Justinian tells us in his Institutes: and the French Kings, descending from Charles the Great, claim it as their own. The King's Edicts always ending with these binding words, Car tel est nostre Plaisir, for such is our pleasure. And though he sometimes send his Edicts to be verified or approved in the Parliament of Paris; and his Grants and Patents to be ratified in the Chamber of Accounts there holden: yet this is nothing but a mere formality, and point of circumstance, those Courts not daring to refuse what the King proposeth. It is Car tel est nostre plaisir which there goeth for Law. And by this intimation of his Royal pleasure, doth he require such Taxes, as the necessity of his Affairs, the greediness of his Officers, or the importunity of Suitors do suggest unto him: The Patrimony of the Crown being so exhausted by the riot and improvidence of former Princes, that the King hath no other way to maintain his State, defray his Garrisons, reward such as deserve well of him, and support those that depend upon him; but only by laying what he pleaseth on the backs of his Subjects, against which there is no dispute by the common People: though many times the Great Princes have demurred upon it. And therefore to make them also instrumental to the public 〈◊〉, the Kings are willing to admit them to some part of the spoil, to give them some ex●mptions from those common burdens; and to connive at their oppressing of their Tenants, against all good conscience, that being so privileged themselves, they may not interrupt the King in his Regal ●ourses.  
The power of the French King over his Subjects being so transcendent, it cannot be, but that his Forces mnst be very great; and would be greater than they are, but that they dare not trust the common People with the use of Arms, for fear they should refuse to pay the accustomed Taxes, or forsake their Trades or turn their Farms back upon their Landlords. But for an 〈◊〉 of what a French King is able to do in this kind, It is said, that Charles the 9th, in Garrisons and several Armies in the field, had 15000 Horse, and 100000 Foot of his own Nation, besides 50000 Horse and Foot of Swisses, Germans, and others. And for his standing Forces, it is said by others, that he is able to bring into the field for a sudden service no less than 60 Companies of Men of Arms, 20 Cornets of Light-Horse, and five Companies of harquibusiers on horseback, which amount to 10000 in the total: together with 20 Ensigns of French Foot, and 40 of Swiss, and yet leave his Garrisons well manned, and his Forts and Frontiers well and sufficiently defended.  
What the Revenues are in a State so subject to the will and pleasure of the King, it is hard to say; being also more or less, as the times and their occasions vary; according unto which the Revenues of this Crown have much altered. Lewis the 11th, gathered one Million and a half of Crowns; Francis the first, brought them to 3 Millions; his successor Henry the 2d, to six; Charle● the 9th, to seven; Henry the 3d, to ten; afterward they were enhanced to fifteen. And in the time of Henry the 4th, the Treasurer of the Duke of Mayenne did not shame to say, That his Master had more improved the Revenue of France, than any King had done before him, advancing it from two, to five Millions Sterling. A fair Intrado, but far short of those infinite sums which are extorted from the People, whereof a tenth part comes not clearly to the King's Exchequer. But what need more be said than that of Lewis the 11th, who used to say, that France was a Meadow which he mowed every year, and as often as he listed: and indeed their Impositions cannot but be great, since there are no less than 30000 under-officers employed to gather them. Hence I believe sprung that wish of Maximilian the Emperor, which was, that he (if it were possible) might be a God; and that having two Sons, the eldest might be a God after him; and the second King of France. And this was also the cause, that in the Wars between Charles the fifth, and Francis the first, when the Emperor's Herald had bid defiance to the King● from Charles Emperor of Germany, King of Castille, Leon, Arragon, and Na●les, Archduke of Austria, etc. with the rest of his titles: The King commanded the Heralds to return the challenge from Francis King of France, commanding them to repeat France as many times, as the other had petty Earldoms in his stile. And to say truth, considering the compactedness thereof within itself, the admirable fertility of the soil, the incredible multitudes of People, and the conveniency of situation betwixt Spain, Italy, and Germany, the name of France might balance all the others titles.  
The chief Orders of Knighthood in this Kingdom, were first of the Jennet, founded by Charles Martel, Mayr of the French Palace; and so called, either from Jane his Wife, as Haillan would have it; or from the Gennets of Spain, over whom he triumphed at the battle of Tours, as Bellay writeth. It ended in the days of S. Lewis. The Knights of the order wore a Ring, wherein was engraven the form of a Jennet.  
2 Of the 〈◊〉, or twelve Peers, so called, quasi pares inter se, said to be instituted by Charles the Great in his Wars against the Saracens. Six of these were of the Clergy. 1 The Archbishop and Duke of Rheims, 2 the Bishop and Duke of Laon, 3 the Bishop and Duke of Langres, 4 the Bishop and Earl of Beav●●, 5 the Bishop and Earl of Nayon, and 6 the Bishop and Earl of Chaulons; and six others of the temporality. 1 The Duke of Burgundy, 2 Duke of Normandy, 3 Duke of 〈◊〉, 4 Earl of Tholouse, 5 Earl of Champagne, 6 Earl of Flanders. These are they so much memorised in the Legends of the old French Writers, but falsely, and on no good ground; it being impossible that those should be of the foundation of Charles the Great, in whose time there were none of those Dukes and Earls, except the Earl of Tholouse only. Therefore with better reason it may be thus concluded on, that the twelve Peers were instituted by Charles the Great, though that honour not by him appropriated unto any particular Estates and Titles; but left at large to be disposed of according to the personal merit of the best deservers: it being most sure, that neither Rowland, nor Oliver, nor Duke Na●mes, nor Ogier the Dane, had any of the titles abovementioned. But for the fixing of this dignity in the Dukedoms and Earldoms before named, it is said by some to have been done by Hugh Capet, other refer it to Lewis the 7th, in whose times all those Dukes and Earls were in Rerum natura. But by whomsoever first ordained, the Temporal Pa●rr●●● are extinct; and others, of no definite number, created by the Kings, as they see occasion to gratify a well deserver. Only at Coronations, and such public Triumphs, the custom is, to choose some principal persons out of the Nobility to represent those Temporal Peers; as at the Coronation of Lewis the 13th, the places of the Temporal Peers were supplied by the princes of 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉, the Earl of Soissons, the Dukes of Nevers, Elbeuf, and Espernon: the Ecclesiastical Peers remaining as at first they were. So that though Charles the Great might devise this Order, and institute the first twelve Peers, as is commonly said: yet was not that high honour fixed in any of those Temporal Princes, till the times succeeding; but given to men of several houses, according to the King's pleasure, and their well deservings.  
3 Of the 〈◊〉 begun by John King of France, Anno 1352. They wore about their necks a collar of gold, at the which hanged a Star: the word Monstrant Regibus astra v●am. This Order was d●graced by his Son Charles, in communicating it to his Guard; and so it ended.  
4 Of S. Michael, instituted by King Lewis the eleventh, Anno 1469: It consisted first of 36 Knights, which afterward were augmented to 300. The Habit of the Order was a long Cloak of white Damask down to the ground, with a border interwoven with Cockle-shells of gold, interlaced and ●urred with Ermines, with an hood of crimson Velvet, and a long tippet. About their necks they wore a collar woven with Cockleshells: the word, Immensi tremor Oceani. It took the name from the picture of Saint Michael conquering the Devil, which was annexed to the collar. Some think, that the invocation of S. Michael, was in allusion unto the tenth of Dani●● Others say, he took S. Michael, in regard of an apparition of that Saint, to his Father Charles the seventh, on Orleans Bridge, in his wars against the English. The Seat thereof was first at S. Michael's Mount in Normandy, a place which had held longest for the French Kings against the English; but it was afterwards removed to Bois de Vincennes, not far from Paris. S. Michael's day, the time of the Solemnity; and Mount S. Michael the name of the Herald which did attend upon the Order, which in most things was presidented by that of the Garter.  
5 Of the Holy-Ghost, ordained by Henry the 3d, Anno 1579: to rectify the abuses which had crept into that of S. Michael, having been of late times given to unworthy persons: to reduce which to its first esteem, he ordered, that the Collar of S. Michael should be given to none who had not first been dignified with this of the Holy-Ghost; into which none to be admitted, but such as can prove their Nobility by three descents. Their Oath is to maintain the Romish-Catholick Religion, and persecute all Opponents to it. Their Robe a black Velvet Mantle, powdered with Lilies and Flames of Gold: the Collar of Flower de Lyces and Flames of Gold, with a Cross and a Dove appendent to it. And hereunto he gave the name of the Holy-Ghost, because this Henry was on a Whit sunday chosen King of Poland.  
I omit the other petit orders, as those of the Cock and Dog, by them of Montmorencie; of the Porcupine, by them of Orleans; and of the Thistle, by them of Bourbon.  
The Arms of the French Kings in the days of Pharamont and his three first Successors, were Gules, three Crowns, Or. Clovis the Great altered them to azure, Seem of Flower de Lyces, Or; and Charles the sixth to Azure, 3 Flower de Lyces, Or. In which last changes they were followed by the Kings of England, varying the Coat of France, which they enquartered with their own, as the French Kings did: and by the Princes of the blood, who bear the Arms of France, with some difference only for the distinction of their Houses.  

There are in France, Archbishops, 17. Bishops, 107. And Universities 15. Viz.  
1 Paris,  
2 Orleans,  
3 Bourges,  
4 Poitiers,  
5 Angiers,  
6 Caen,  
7 Rheims,  
8 Bourdeaux,  
9 Tholouse,  
10 Nismes.  
11 Montpelier,  
12 Avignon,  
13 Lions,  
14 Besancon,  
15 Dole.    
And so much for France.   

THE PYRENEAN HILLS.  
BEtwixt France and Spain are the Mountains called Pyrenae, the reason of which name is very differently reported. Some fetch the Original thereof from Pyrene, a Nymph, the Daughter of one Bebrix, said by old Fablers to have been here ravished by Hercules: others conceive they were so called, because much stricken with Lightnings, those Celestial Flames. But being the name doth most undoubtedly proceed from a Greek word which signifieth Fire; the more probable opinion, is that they took this name from being fired once by Shepherds, (these Hills being then extremely overgrown with woods:) the Flame whereof raged so extremely, that the Mines of Gold & Silver being melted by the heat thereof, ran streaming down the Mountains many days together: the fame of which invited many Foreign Nation● to invade the Country. Which Accident they place 880 years before the Birth of our Saviour. Hereunto Diodorus Siculus, an old Greek Writer, adds no small authority, who speaking of this conflagration (as Aristotle, and Strabo also the,) addeth withal, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is to say, these Mountains had the name of 〈◊〉, from the fire, which many days together so extremely raged. And this tradirion backed by so good authority, I should rather credit, than fetch the derivation (as Bochar●u● doth) from Purani, a Phoenician word signifying dark or shady; though true it is, that these Mountains anciently were very much overgrown with woods, as before was noted.  
But whatsoever was the reason why they had this name, certain it is, that they have been of long time the natural bound betwixt the great and puissant Monarch of France and Spain, terminating (as it were) their desires and purposes against each other, as well as their Dominions: if any thing could put a bound to the designs of ambitious Princes. Yet not more separated by these Mountain● than by those jealousies and fears, which they have long since harboured of one another, each of them manifestly affecting the supreme command So that we may affirm of them as the Historian doth of others, on the like occasion, Aut montibus aut mutuo metu s●parantur. These mountains also make that isthmus', or neck of Land, which conjoin Spain to the rest of Europe: the C●ae●tabrian Ocean fiercely beating on the North-West, the Mediterranean Sea more gently washing the Southeast thereof. Their beginning at the Promontory now called Oiarco, (the Oc●so of Ptolemy) not far from the City of Baionne in France, bordering on the Sea Cantabrick: From thence continued South-East-wards betwixt both Kingdoms, to Cabo de Creux, (by the ancients called Templum Veneris) on the Mediteryanean, not far from the City of Rhoda, now Rosas, one of the Port Towns of Catalon●a.  
The whole length, not reckoning in the windings and turnings, affirmed to be 80 Spanish leagues, at three miles to a league. The highest part thereof, by the Spaniards called Canigo, and by the Latins named Canus: from which (as it is said by some) there is a Prospect in a clear day into both the Seas. But whether this be true or not, (for I dare not build any belief upon it) it is no doubt, the highest part of all these Mountains, and took this name from the whiteness or hoariness thereof, as having on its top or summit a Cap of snow for most part of the year, In which respect, as the Alps took their name ab albo, that in the Sabine Dialect, being termed Alpum, which by the Latins was called Album, as before we noted: so did Mount Lebanon in Syria take its name from Leban, which in the Phoenician Language signifieth white, and Lebanah whiteness. Such people as inhabit in this mountainous tract, have been and shall be mentioned in their proper places. I only add, and so go forwards towards Spain, that the barbarous people of these Mountains compelled Sertorius in his hasty passage into Spain, when he fled from the power of Sylla's Faction, to pay them tribute for his pass: at which when some of his Soldiers murmured, as thinking it dishonourable to a Proconsul of Rome to pay tribute to the barbarous nations; the prudent General replied, that he bought only time; a Commodity, which they that deal in haughty Enterprises must needs take up at any rate.   

OF SPAIN.  
HAving thus crossed the Pyrenees we are come to Spain, the most Western part of all the Continent of Europe, environed on all sides with the Sea, except towards France, from which separated by the said Mountains: but more particularly bounded upon the North, with the Cantabrian; on the West, with the Atlantic Ocean; on the South, with the Streits of Gibraltar; on the East, with the Mediterranean; and on the North-East with those Pyrenees. The Figure of it compared by Strabo to an Ox's Hide spread upon the ground; the neck thereof being that Isthmus which unites it to France.  
This Country hath in divers Ages been as diversely named. 1. Hesperia, either from Hesperus a supposed King hereof; or from Hesperus the Evening Star, under which it was supposed to be situate, as being the furthest Country Westward; to difference it from Italy, which many of the Greek Authors termed Hesperia also, named Hesperia Min●. 2. It was called Ibe●ia, either from the famous River Iberus; or from the Iberi, inhabiting that Country of Asia which we now call Georgia; as Celtiberia from the mixture of those Asian Iberi, and the Celts of Gaul; by which name it occurreth often in Appiau of Alexandria, and sometimes in Strabo. 3 Hispania, as the soundest judgements agree, from Panus the Iberian Captain. For the Grecians call it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Spania, as may be proved in many places, that especially of the 15 to the Romans verse 28. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, I will come by you into Spain. No doubt but from the Grecians the old Roman, borrowed the name of Spania, which they often used: to which the Spaniards according to their custom adding E, (as in Escola, Escuda, etc.) made it ●spania, and now Hispania. In like manner as the famous City of Sevill, called at first Spalis, according whereunto the Bishop hereof in the Council of Eliberis subscribed himself (by the name of Sabinus Spalensis) in tract of time was called Hispalis. And yet I must not pretermit the fancy of Bochartus, who fetching the names of most places from the Punic Language, will have it to be called Spa●ija, or Sphanija, by the Carthaginians or Phoenicians, at their first discovery, from Saphan, which in the Punic tongue signifies a Conie, with which that Country much abounded in the former times; the Romans being hence furnished with them. Let the Reader like it as he list.  
The greatest length hereof is reckoned at 800 miles, the breadth where it is broadest, at 560; the whole circumference 2480 Italian miles: But Mariana measuring the compass of it by the bend of the Pyrenees, and the creeks and windings of the Sea, makes the full circuit of it to be 2816 miles of Italian measure. And though according to the smallest computation, it be above 400 miles in compass more than France, yet is it far short thereof in numbers of people; France being thought to contain in it 15 millions of living souls; whereas Spain is reckoned to contain but 8 millions only, which is little more than half the number of the French. The reasons of which disproportion are, 1 The continual wars which they had for 900 years together against the Moors, in their own Country, by which they were consumed in the very growth. 2. The Expulsion of so many thousand Families of Jews and Moors, 124000 Families of the one in the time of Ferdinand the Catholic; and 110000. of the other by King Philip the 3d; which was as the lopping off of a main limb from the body Politic, though without any loss to the Ecclesiastical. 3. The unnecessary wars maintained against all the rest of Christendom, ever since the time of Charles the fifth, out of mere ambition; before they were well cured of their former wounds. 4. The infinite Plantations made by them in the East and Western Indies, and all along the Seacoasts of Africa, and those great Garrisons maintained in Milan, Naples, S●il, the Low-countries, and their Towns in afric, consisting for the most part of natural Spaniards, 5. The barrenness of the Country in many places, unable to sustain great multitudes, but made more barren than it would be, for want of men to labour and manure the Land: And 6. and last of all, the Impotency of both Sexes for Generation; the men being generally more hot upon their lusts, than able for Generation; and the women for the most part beginning to be Mothers so extremely young, that nature is decayed, and spent in them, before they have run half their course. And 'tis a most true and undoubted Maxim, that the greatness of Cities, and populousness of Kingdoms and Common wealths do much depend on the generative virtue of the men, and the nutritive virtue of the soil in which they live.  
It is situate in the more Southernly part of the Northern temperate Zone, and almost in the midst of the fourth and sixth Climates, the longest day being fifteen hours and a quarter in length, in the most Northern parts hereof; but in the extreme South near to Gibraltar, not above fourteen. Which situation of this Country rendereth the Air here very clear and calm, seldom obscured with mists and vapours, and not so much subject to diseases as more Northern Regions.  
They are a mixed People, descending from the Goths, Mo●res, Jews, and the ancient Spaniards. From the jews they borrow superstition, from the Moors, Melancholy, Pride from the Goths, and from the old Spaniards the desire of Liberty. The Jews first planted here by the Emperor Adrian, who having totally banished them their Native Country, sent them hither to dwell: the total number of which Plantation is said to amount to 500000. men, women, and children: and yet their numbers much increased in the time of Vlidor Vlet the Great Caliph of the Saracens, who having made a Conquest of S●ain, sent hither 50000 Families of Moors and jews, the better to assure it to him. And so we have the coming in of the Moors and jews; the Conquest of it by the Goths, and their settling here, shall be shown hereafter: which several Nations by long time, and intermariages together, were at last incorporated into one. For their conditions it is said that they are highly conceited of themselves, great Braggarts, and extremely proud, even in the lowest ebb of Fortune. Which last appeareth by the tale of the poor Cobbler on his deathbed, who (as Barklay in his Icon Animorum reporteth the story) commanded his eldest Son, coming to him for his last blessing, to endeavour to retain the majesty worthy so great a Family; Memineris (said he) in ma●esta●em assurgere familia ●na dignam. The same Author relateth another story to the like purpose. A woman of this Country, attended on by three of her brats, went a begging from door to door. Some French Merchants travelling that way, and pitying her case offered her to take into their service the bigger of her boys. But she, proud though poor, scorning as she said, that any of her lineage should endure a Prenticeship, returned them this answer: Quî aut tu, ●ut ego, s●iamus, in quae fata sit genitus? For aught that she or any known, her Son (simple as he stood there) might live to be King of Spain. Not much unlike to the●e is that tale of a Spanish Cavalero, who being for some faults by him committed, whipped through the principal streets of Paris, and keeping a sober pace, was advised by a friend to make more haste, that he might the sooner be out of his pain: but he half in choler replied, 〈…〉 would not los the lest step of his pace for all the whipping in Paris. For indeed their gate is Gennet-Wise, very stately and majestical.  
Of temperature they are hot and dry, which makes them very much given to women, and yet not very able for Generation. And this strong inclination unto women which they find in themselves, makes them so jealous of their Wives, that they permit them not to walk abroad, but when they go to Church; and then too veiled and so hooded, one can hardly see them; and not that neither, but attended with their Damosels, and some trusty she-friend, that is to give an Account of them at their coming back. Mendoza, an Ambassador from Spain, in Queen Elizabet●s time, used to find fault with the promiscuous sitting of men and women in the Church, used here in England, accounting it to be a great incentive unto lasciviousness: To whom Doctor Dale one of the Masters of the Requests is said to have replied, that indeed in Spain, where the people even in the time of Divine Service could not abstain from impure thoughts, and unclean gestures, that mingled kind of sitting was not so allowable; but the English were of another temper, and did not find any inconvenience in it. And it is possible, this humour of jealousy might be derived on them from the Moors, who in the strict guarding of their women, were the Spaniards Tutors; it being death in Barbary to this very day for any man to see one of the X●riffes Concubines; and for them too, if when they see a man, though but thorough a casement, they do not presently●ry out. A renzie which much rageth in most Southern people; but not predominant in the Northern; who do not only suffer their Wives to sit with other men in the Church, but even in the open and common Baths also: two things which a true Spaniard would rather die an hundred deaths, than give consent to. But though the women are not permitted to stir abroad, the men take liberty enough; and are as good smel-feasts as in any Country: it being observed of them by a very good Writer, that howsoever in their own houses they are temperate and content with little, yet when they go unto a Feast, they are as gluttonous, dainty, and desirous to make good cheer, as any people whatsoever.  
But not to conceal their virtues, and make ourselves merry at their follies, (wherein all other Nations have a share with them) they are questionless a people very grave in their carriages, in offices of Piety very devout, and to their King very obedient, whose greatness they affect more cordially than any subjects in the world; exact in doing justice upon all Offenders, which commonly they administer without partiality; indulgent unto one another, and of their duties to their betters not unmindful. But that which deserveth the greatest commendation in them, is an unwearied patience in suffering adversities, accompanied with a resolution to overcome them. A noble quality, of the which in their Indian Discoveries they showed excellent proofs, and received as glorious rewards. In reference to the French, it is said that the French are wiser than they seem▪ and the Spaniards seem wiser than they are: wherein they agree with many particular men of other Nations, who according to that of the Philosopher, Sapiente● potius cup●unt videri & non 〈◊〉, quam esse & non videri. In matters of war the Spaniards are observed to be generally too heavy, slow▪ and dull; the French too heady and precipitate; the one losing as many fair occasions by delays, as the other overthroweth by too much haste: but between them both they make one good soldier; who according to the present opportunities, is to make use of the spur of courage, of the bit of respect.  
The Women are sober, loving their husbands or friends; wonderful delicate, curious in painting or perfuming: and though they have Wine in abundance, yet are they not permitted to drink it; verifying therein the old English Proverb, that none are worse shod than the shoemaker's wif●. Herein in wor●e condition than the Women of France, who though they are restrained from Wine before their marriage; yet after that they take what liberty they list, and are no more restrained from it than the other sex. But this is the least liberty which the French Women have above the Spanish: these being so watched and overlooked, that it is hardly possible for them to hold speech with any man, in business of most importance, and much less in matters of civilities only; those having liberty to be courted at all times and places, even in the presence of their husbands, without any distrust or interruption. Heretofore they were wondrous strong, and beyond belief patient of the throws of Childbed; Strabo relating how one of these women being hired for harvest work, and finding her travel come upon her, because she would not lose her day's wages, withdrew herself into a bush: where being eased of her burden, she returned from one labour to another. And many of them at this day use not to keep their Chambers above three days after their delivery, and then apply themselves, to their household business without either danger or delay.  
The language is not the same in all places, though all called the Spanish. In Portugal, Catalogne, and some parts of Valentia, it hath a great mixture of the French, who in these parts have had much trade and negotiation. In Granada, and some parts of A●dal●zia, it partakes much of the Mo●●e, and in the mountains of Alpuxarras, the Arabic or ●●o●rish language still remains in use. The Countries bordering on the Pyr●nees and Cantabrian Ocean (but Biscay specially) have much in them of the Language of the ancient Spaniards, before made subject to the Romans. That which is common to them all is the vulgar Spanish or Castilian, and hath much affinity with the Latin; Bree●wood in his Inquiries reporting that he hath seen a letter, every word whereof was both good Latin and good Spanish. Merula Shows a Copy of the like, pag. 300. By reason of which consonancy with the Latin, the Spaniards call their language Romance. The other ingredients of this Tongue are generally the Goatish, Arabic, and old Spanish, and in some places the French also, as before is said; those people having made great conquests, and having had great negotiations in this Country. It is said to be a very lofty swelling speech, as if it were fashioned to command.  
The Soil hereof, where it is fertile and productive of the fruits of Nature, yields not to any part of Europe, for delight, pleasures, and commodities, which here appear in greater ripeness and perfection than in other places. But for the most part it is either overgrown with Woods, cumbered with wild and rocky Mountains, or of so hot a nature, and so sandy withal, that it is not very fit for tillage; and so deficient in Water, as not good for Pasturage. So that we may affirm thereof, as of the Figs in the Prophet J●r●mie, where it is good, no Country better; where bad and barren, few so inconvenient, and not any worse. ●ut this defect of outward beauty and Commodities is recompensed by those within, affording great plenty of Mines, both of Steel and Iron, and some Mines of Silver: of which last so abundant in preceding times, that it was never free from the Rovers of all Nations; and it is said of Animal, that out of one Mine only in the country of the Turdetan● (now part of Andaluzia) he received 3000 pound weight daily, for long time together. The principal Commodities which they vend in other Countries, are Wines, Oil, Sugars, Metals, Rice, Silk, Licorice, a fine sort of Whole, Cork, Rosin, Limmons, Raisins, Oranges, and fruits of the like nature. In Corn, which is the staff of life, they are so de●ective, that they receive the greatest part of what they spend, from Italy, Sicily, and France. Their Cattle neither fair nor many, the Country not being able to breed them: so that their Diet is on Salads, and fruits of the Earth; every Gentleman being limited what Flesh he shall buy for himself and his Family: which if he send for to the Butcher, or the Poulterer, by the smallest child, able to do the Errand for him, he is sure not to be defrauded in price or quality. And yet they talk as highly of their gallant fare, as if they surfeited with the plenty of all provisions: handsomely checked in that ●ond humour, by that worthy Soldier Sir Roger Williams. Of whom it is said, that hearing once a Spani●rd thus foolishly bragging of his Country salads, he gave him this answer, You have indeed good sauce in Spain, but we have dainty Beefs, Veals, and Muttons to eat with that sauce; and as God made beasts to live upon the grass of the earth, so he made men to live upon them. And it is observed, that if a Spaniard have a Capon, or the like good dish to his supper, you shall find all the ●eathers scattered before his door by the next morning.  
And as it is in private houses, so for travelling also, the Inns and Vents of this Country are very ill provided; insomuch, that most men that would not go supperless to sleep, carry their provision at their saddle bows, and men of worth their bedding also. So poor and mean is the entertainment in these places.  
Here lived in ancient times the Giants Geryon and Cacus which were quelled by Hercules: and in the flourishing of the Roman Empire. Sen●c● the Tragedian, and the Philosopher of the same name; a man of that happy memory, that he could repeat 2000 names in the same order that they were rehearsed; as also Quint●lian the Orator, Lucan, and Martial, excellent in their kinds, and Pomponius M●l the Geographer. In the middle times, Fulgentius, and Isidore Bishop of Sevi●l: and in our Father's days, A●ias Montanus, famous for his Edition of the holy Bible; Mas●● a learned Commentator; Osorius, well seen in the Latin elegancies; and be●ore all, as well in industry as time, osta us Bishop of Avila, a man so copious and industrious in his writings, that it is thought he writ more sheets than he lived days. But o● late times we find but few of their Works which have passed the Mountains, the Latin which they write being very coarse, and favouring too much of the School-man (wherein their excellency consists) and therefore they set out their Works most commonly in their own tongue only. The Chie● for Soldiery amongst them, were formerly 〈◊〉, who held out so long against the Romans; Trajan, and Th●odo●ius, both R●man Emperors; 〈◊〉 the second, King of the Goths, the victorious Conqueror of the 〈◊〉 Bernardo del Carpi●, and Cid Ruis Di●z, famous for their achievements against the Moors: and in late times, Gonsalvo the Great Captain; who subdued Naples; Ferdinand Duke of Alva, who conquered Portugal, etc.  
The Christian Faith, if we may believe the old Spanish Tradition, was first here planted by S. James the Apostle, within four years after the death of our Redeemer. To which tradition, though they held very constant a long time together, yet of late days, Baronius, and other learned men of the Church of Rome, do most deservedly reject it. That St. Paul had a purpose of coming hither, is evident in his 15th Chapter to the Romans: and that he did come hither accordingly, is positively affirmed by S. Chrysostom, Theodoret, and divers others of the Fathers; which was in Anno 61, as B●ronius thinketh. Nor did St. Peter want his part in this great service, but joined with St. Paul, though not in the journey, yet in the sending of Bishops and other Presbyters, to second the beginnings made by that Apostle. For it is said expressly in the Martyrologies, that C●●siphon, Torquatus, Secundus, Cecilius, Judaletius, Hesychius, and Euphrasius, being at Rome ordained Bishops by the two Apostles, ad praedicandum verbum Dei in Hispanias directi, were dispatched into Spain to preach the Gospel. Bishops, most likely, of those Cities where they suffered death, the names of which occur in the martyrology. Under the Empire of the Goths, the faith of CHR●ST, which at their coming hither they found right and Orthodox, was defiled with Arianism: not ejurated till the year 588. when that whole Nation did submit to more Catholic tendries. Since that, they have been punctual followers of the Church of Rome, and that too in the very errors and corruptions of it; taking up their Religion on the Pope's authority: and therein so tenacious or pertinacious, that the King doth suffer none to live in his Dominions, which profess not the Roman-Catholique Religion; of which they have been, since the times of Luther, such avowed Patrons, that one of the late Pope's being sick, and hearing divers men to moan his approaching end, uttered some words to this effect. My life (said he) can nothing benefit the Church, but pr●y for the prosperity of the King of Spain, as its chief Supporter. And though he spoke these words of King P●ilip the 2d, yet they hold good in his Successors ever since, being esteemed the greatest Patrons and Protectors of the Catholic Cause. Which is indeed the proper interess of this King. For seeing that they have framed to themselves an hope of the Western Monarchy: and finding no fitter means of enlarging their own Temporal, than by concurring with the Pope in upholding his Spiritual Empire, they have linked themselves most fast to that See. To which end they have taken upon them to be the Executioners of the Pope's Excommunications; by which Office Ferdinand the Catholic surprised Navarre: not without hope of working the like effect, in some course of time, on the rest of the interdicted Estates of Europe; as may be seen, by the eager following of the French War against Henry the 4th, till he had reconciled himself to the Church of Rome; and the like War managed for many years together against Queen Elizabeth of England. And the pursuit of this Spanish Monarchy is so hotly followed by the Jesuits, who in all their persuasions speak not more of one God, or of one Pope, than they do of one King; that they hold it forth for the only means to unite the differences of the Church, and subdue that great Enemy of Religion, the Turk. Nor is this only a Conjecture, or a project of the ●esuits only, but a design avowed and declared in Print, that all the World may take notice of it: and that too in a Book not only licenced by the Provincial of the Dominicans, and the supreme Council of the Inquisition; but by Order from the Lords of the Counsel, with the King's Privilege and Commendation prefixed before it, The Book entitled, La convenientia de los dos Monarquias Catolicas', &c. The Agreement of the two Catholic Monarchies of Rome and Spain, set out in the year 1612. by one john de P●ente. In the Frontispiece whereof are set two Scutcheons, the one bearing the Crosse-Keys of Rome, the other the Arms of Castille and Leon; in Vinculo pacis for the motto. On the one side of this there is a Portraiture representing Rome, with the Sun shining over it, and darting his Beams upon the Keys, with this Inscription. Luminare majus ut praesit Orbi et Urbi, the Greater light to govern the City and the World. On the other side another Image designing Spain, with the Moon shining over that, and darting her Rays on the Spanish Scutcheon, with this Impress, ●●minare minus ut subdatur Urbi et dominetur Orbi, i. e. The lesser light made to be subject to the City (understand of Rome,) but to govern all the World besides. Over all in the top of the 〈◊〉 or Title-page, in Capital Let●ers, Fecit Deus duo Luminaria magna, God made two great Lights. The whole Book being an indifferent large Folio, is but a Comment on this Text; which for substance is contained wholly in the Frontispiece, but more at large discoursed of in the Volume itself, and plainly shows what is intended, and by whom. And yet perhaps the Pope and the 〈◊〉 both, may fail in that which is the main of their expectation, and if the project take effect, the Spaniara will then write himself Luminare majus, and make the Pope content with Luminare minus, for his part of the spoil, and glad to borrow all his light from the Sun of Spain. For though the Kingdom of Spain, and Popedom of Rome be thus straight combined, yet herein the Popes have overshot themselves; in that leaning so much to the Spaniard, and so immoderately increasing his dominion, they do in a manner stand at his devotion; and may peradventure in the end be forced to cast themselves into his arms as their good Lord and Master. For certain it is, that the Spanish Agents have openly braved the Cardinals, and told them, That they hoped to see the day, wherein the King should offer to the Pope half a dozen to be made Cardinals, and he not dare to refuse any; and that they themselves should choose no Pope, but one of their Masters naming. So great an inconvenience it is more than possible it may be to the Po●es, in making this Prince the one and only string to their bow; and fastening the dependencies of his Roman Catholics upon him alone, excluding France and all other Kings in Christendom, of the Romish party, from the honour of it. And yet so firm they are to their Spanish principles, that no favours either granted to their persons or Religion are of value with them, or thought worthy of their acceptation, if it come from any other Fountain of Grace than the Court of Spain. Insomuch as I have heard from a great Minister of State, that when some favours were obtained for the English Papists on the treaty of the Match with Spain; they were ready with great greediness to embrace the same. But when the same favours were obtained for them on the Treaty with France, not a man of them would accept them. For which some of their Chiefs being asked the reason, returned this Answer, That by applying themselves to the French, they might lose the Spaniard, and it were great improvidence in them, to change an old and constant Friend who had never failed them for one of whose affections they had no assurance; and such a one, as by tolerating Heretics in his own Dominions, showed that he was no fit Patron for the Catholics to rely upon.  
The chief Rivers are, 1 Tagus, celebrated for his golden Sands, of which the Sceptre of the old Kings of Portugal is affirmed by some Writers to be made, but I have not faith enough to believe the same. The head of it is in the Mountain Seira Molina, near to Cuenca; from the which it runneth by the City Toledo, and then smoothly gliding by the Walls of Lisbon, doth pay his tribute to the Western Ocean. 2 Ana (now Guadiana) which arising about the same place, runneth afterward under the ground the space of 15 miles: and hence the Spaniards use to brag, that they have a bridge whereon 10000 cattle daily feed. An accident common to many other rivers, as to Mole, a small river in Surrey; Erasinus, in Greece; and Lycus, in Anatolia; of which last thus Ovid: 
Sic ubi terreno Lycus est epotus hiatu,  
Existit procul hinc, alioque renascitur ore.  
So Lycus, swallowed by the gaping ground,  
At a new mouth, far off, is rising found.   
But having gotten up again, loseth itself without recovery in the Western Ocean, on the South of Portugal, which it separateth from Extremadura. 3. Baetis, now called Guadalquioir (which in the Arabic Language signifieth a great River) ariseth out of the Mountains of Sierra Morena, and passing by Corduba and Sevil, disburdeneth itself into the Southern Ocean, at the Haven of S. Lucre's de Barameda. 4. Iberus, which having its head amongst the Mountains of Biscay, passeth on Eastwards by Saragossa and Tortosa, into the Mediterranean: the whole course thereof being 460 miles, of which it is navigable 200. A River of such note in the time of the Romans, that it divided this whole Country into Citeriorem, and Vlteriorem; of which more anon. 5. Duerus, which rising in the same Mountains passeth thorough Portugal, and so unto the Western or Atlantic Ocean. 6. M●nius, of which more in Portugal.  
Chief Mountains next unto the Pyrenees spoken of before, 1. The Cantabrian Mountains, called by Plinte Juga A●●urum, which rising out of a spurr or branch of the Pyrenees, overspread the Provinces of Biscay, Asturia, and Gallicia (coasting along the shores of the Cantabrian Ocean) where at last they end. 2. Idubeda, jubalda, or Aurantius Saltus, so called by Ptolemy, and others of the ancient Writers; which beginning not far from the head of the River Iberus, followeth the course of that River by the City of Burgos, and endeth not far from the influx of it into the Mediterranean. 3. Sierra Morena, by Caesar called Saltus Castulonensis, and Mons Marianus by Ptolemy, which beginning about the Town of Alc●raz, coasteth along the right-hand shores of the River Baetis to the Southern Seas. 4. Sierra Nevada, by Ptolemy called Mons Illipulus, and Orospeda by Strabo, but the Moors the Mountains of Alpuxaras. A chain of hills which thwart the Kingdom of Granada from East to West; and amongst which the people to this day speak the Arabic tongue.  
The Country is said to have been first inhabited by Tubal the Son of Japhet. Of whom it is affirmed in the Berosus of Friar Annius and by such Chronologers as he hath imposed on by the name of that Author, that in the eight year of Nimrod, which was 140 years after the Flood, he seated himself in the Asturias a part of Spain, and there built the Town of S. Wal. A Device so foolish and absurd, that it is not to be honoured with a confutation: For either ●ubal, must come hither by Sea or by Land: If by Land, then must he in the compass of a year or two travel not less than 4000 miles (for so far it is at least from Biscay to the valley of Sh●naar) with women and children, through most unpassible Woods and Mountains; which no understanding man can give belief to. If by Sea, besides the short time he had to provide shipping for so great a Company, and so long a voyage, nothing is more improbable to a sober man, than that he should leave Italy and afric upon either hand; or pretermit the opportunity of possessing Valentia, Andulazia, Portugal, being fruitful Countries, to fix himself in the most mountainous, woody, and barren Province of all this Continent; yet most of our Berosians are so confident in it, that they make him the first King of Spain, from whom to Gargarus, Melicola, they numbered 25 Kings more, who lasted 988 years: the chief of which are said to be, 1 Hesperus, who subduing also Italy, named both Countries Hesperia: but so, that Italy was called Hesperia the greater, and Spain, Hesperia the less. 2 Hispanus, whence they conceit the name of Hisparia to be derived. 3 Tagus, 4 Baetus, and 5 Anus, whence the three famous Rivers in Spain so called, must by all means be derived. 6 Idubeda, Godfather no doubt, to the great Mountain so named. 7 Sicileus, from whom the Isle of Sicily is said to take denomination. 8 Hispalis, who is reported to have built the City Sevill, or Hispalis. 9 Brigus, the Founder of Flavic-Briga, and other Towns ending in Briga. 10 Lusus, who gave name to Lusitania or Portugal. The Catalogue of which Kings I desire no man to believe farther, than that of our own State from B●ut●● to Cassibeline. A Catalogue so ill contrived, that whereas ●ustin speaks of Habis, and Herodotus of Argunthonius; Macrobius of Heron, and Plutarch of Indibilis; all Kings of Spa●n, none of all these are mentioned in it. So that the coming of ●ubal in person) hither, is a silly vanity, though we deny not but the Spaniards, or some nations of them, may derive their Pedigree from ●ubal, as being the descendants of the Iberi, whom josephus saith to have been anciently called Thobelos: a name in which are all the Radical Letters of Tubal, and which differeth not much from it in sound. For somewhat before the supposed time of Gargarus Melicola, the Iberians are said to come in under Panus: divided after his decease amongst many petit Kings and Princes, for the space of 900 and odd years, even till the first Attempts which the Carthaginian: made upon it; who found here no such Universal or Supreme Monarch, as the Berosian Fabler, dream of. During which time, we find nothing more observable and certain in the story of it, than the planting of Colonies on the seacoasts by divers Nations, according to the Custom of those elder times. Of which sort were the ●owns of Emporia, and Dianium, founded by the Massilians; Sa●untum, by the Zacynthi, or people of Zant; Rhodope, by the Rhodians as some think; the City and Isle of Gades planted by the Tyrians, who after spread themselves over all the Coasts of Andaluzia. The first that came in bodies hither, in the way of Conquest, were the C●ltae, a great and potent Nation of Gaul, who mixing themselves with the Iberi, caused the whole Country to be called Cel●iberia: but the time when they came into it, is very uncertain, Of the invasion o● it by the Carthaginians there is greater certainty: Who being beaten out of ●icil by the conquering Romans, Anno V. C. 512. and not daring to look any more that way, bended their Forces to the West, and passing through the straits of Gibraltur, by the Isle of Gades (their own long before) landed in Spain, under the Conduct of Amilcar, the Father of Annibal, four years after the loss of Sicily. In less than 20 years following, Amilcar, Asd●ubal his Son-in-law, and Annibal the Son of Amilcar, had made almost all 〈◊〉 subject to the Carthaginians, even from the Western Ocean to the Pyrenees; destroyed Sag●●tium, built new Carthage, and struck so great a terror into all the Country, that had not Annibals' design carried him to Italy, the State of Carthage had been absolute Masters of it without further opposition or resistance. But Annibal having taken all his old Soldiers with him; and those that came from Carthage to command in chief, not being men of parts sufficient to go thorough with it; they lost it piecemeal to the Romans, but in less time than they had been getting it from the Spaniards; the valour and good fortune of Corn. Scipio, overruling the dealing power of that mighty State. The last that here commanded for the State of Carthage was 〈◊〉 the Son of G●lgo, who being beaten by Scipio into the Island of Gades, left that al●o to the keeping of Mago, one of his Commanders; by whom being pillaged and deserted, it forthwith yielded to the Romans, the Carthaginians after this never possessing foot of ground in all this Continent.  
The Romans thus becoming Masters of a great part of it, divided it into Vlteriorem, lying from the River Iberus Westward because the furthest off from them; and Citeriorem, between the said River and the Pyr●n●es. But having totally subdued it, they divided it into three main parts, 1. 〈◊〉 so called of Tarragon the chief City of it, containing Arragon, Navarre, Biscay, Gallicia, etc. 2 Baeticam, so named of the River Baetis, which runneth thorough it, comprehending the now Countries of Granada, Andaluzia, and part of Extremadura. 3. Lusitanicam, denominated from the Lusitani, the most potent People of that part, differing in extent from the present 〈◊〉 (though this called Lusitania by our modern Latinists.) For the old 〈◊〉 comprehended part of Extrem●dura, and some part of the two Castile's; and no more of the present Portugal, than what lieth betwixt the two Rivers, Ana and Duero: that on the South of 〈◊〉 being laid to Baetica, and that on the North of Duero, unto Tarraconensis. Of these three parts, Baetica was in most esteem under the Romans; insomuch, that it contained 8 Roman 〈◊〉 8 Municipal Cities, and 29 other Towns, endued with the rights and privileges of the 〈◊〉. The reason thereof was, that the people of this Country having been formerly broken by the 〈◊〉, with more quiet endured the yoke of the Romans; whereas the rest, for a l●ng time, resisted the entry and Empire of that prevailing City. But to proceed to the assurs of Rome in Spain, Sci●io Africanus laid the first foundation of the Roman Government in 〈◊〉 Country▪ which building, though undertaken by many excellent workmen, was not 〈…〉 till the days of Augustus, being almost 200 years since the first attempt. ●e roo●ed 〈◊〉 strengthened it, and made it a principal building in his Monarchical City. For the 〈…〉 were exceeding valiant and resolute, sometimes disgracing, sometimes endangering the 〈◊〉 reputation; insomuch that there were more Commanders lost in those wars, than any ●ther. At 〈◊〉 the Romans fought not with the Spaniards, but with the Carthaginians in Spain: then perished both the 〈◊〉, viz. the Father and the Uncle of Africanus. Viriathus held war for 2● years, 〈◊〉 held out 15, the Astures remained unconquered till the time of 〈◊〉 a●d all resolutely maintained their particular liberties, ut dij●dicari non poterat (saith 〈◊〉) Hispanis an Romans plus esset 〈◊〉 R●boris, & uter populus alteri pariturus foret. Such manner of men were the ancient Spaniards under Rome and Carthage; the first people of the Continent of Europe (excepting Italy) on which the Romans did begin to enlarge their Empire; and the last that wholly were subdued and conquered by them. But being conquered at thelast, and brought under the form of a Province by Augustus' caesar, it was governed by their Proconsul's, Praetors, and other Magistrates, according to the division beforementioned. But constantine the Great in his new modelling of the Empire, laying some part of Afric● to it, made it a Diocese of the Empire, made subject to the Praefectus Praetorio for Gaul, by whose Vicari●● it was governed: the whole being then divided into these seven Provinces, viz. 1 B●tica, 2 Lusitania, bounded as before; 3 Gallicia, containing the modern Gallicia, Leou and Oviedo, the greatest part of the Old Castille, and so much of Portugal as lieth betwixt the two Rivers of Minio and Duero. 4 Carthaginensis, so called from the City of New Carthage, comprehending New Castille, Murcia, and Valentia, with part of the Old Castille, Arragon, and Andulusia. 5 ●araconensis, embracing all Biscay, Navarre, and Catalogue, with the greatest part of the Kingdom of Arragon. 6 ●ingita●a, so called from Tingis (now Tangier,) a Town of afric, on the opposite Coast, in which are now the great Kingdoms of Fez and Morocco: And 7 the Province of the Hands, containing Ma●orca, Minorca, Ebusa, and Frumentaria. Of which seven Provinces, the three first were Consularie, governed by Proconsul's; the other four from their being under Precedents were called presidiary. Being thus settled, it continued a Roman Diocese till about the year 400, when it was subdued by Gundericus, King of the Vandals: of which People, their beginning, achievements, and final Period, we will speak more when we come to Afr●ck, where they fixed themselves: invited thereunto, partly to eschew the ill neighbourhood of the Goths, who began to grow too potent for them, and partly to satisfy the desires of Boniface, Governor of that Province for the Emperor Valentinian the 3d, against whom he had then rebelled, and wanted such support to make good his action. These being gone, the Suevi and 〈◊〉, who entered with them, could not long subsist, but were finally broken by the Goths, and afterwards dispossessed of their Kingdoms also, (though suffered to remain in the Country still) as shall be shown hereafter in its proper place. As for the Goths (of whom we shall speak more in Sweden, and have already made some mention when we were in Gaul,) having sacked Rome, and wasted Italy, under the conduct of Alaric, they were bought out of that Country by the gift of Narbonensis in Gaul, and so much of Tarraconensis in Spain as now makes up the Province of Catalogne: the Composition being ratified by the marriage of Athaulfus, the Successor of Alaric, with Placid●a Sister to Honorius the Western Emperor. Vallia, or Wallia, the Successor of Athaulfus, having beaten the A●ani out of Lusitania and Carthaginensis, added those Provinces also unto his Estates, and confined the Vandals within Baetica, was the first of the Goths which entitled himself King of the Goths in Spain. By their Agreement with the Romans, they were to keep those Provinces for the use of the Empire which they did conquer and recover from the barbarous Nations: but contrary to all Faith, and the Articles of their Agreement, having once beaten the Alani out of Lusitania, by the prowess of Vallia, and the Suevi out of Baetica, under the conduct of Theodoric the Brother of Torismund; they fell upon the Romans themselves, whom ●●ri●us and his Successors, by little and little, dispossessed of all Spain on this side of the straits. Ti●gita●a held out longest, as furthest off, unfortunately attempted by Theudes the 9th King of the Goths, whose Soldiers being set upon by the Romans on the Lord's day, or Sunday, refused to fight in their own defence, and were so miserably defeated, that there was never a man of them left to carry news of the overthrow. So early did the Superstition of a Lords day Sabbath prevail upon this melancholic and devout people. But what this Theudes could not do, was performed by S●intilla, who in the short time of his reign, Anno 642. made the Conquest absolute.  
Let us next look upon the Goths as Lords of Spain, and we shall find them to have been Christians in Religion, and somewhat civilised by their long neighbourhood and conversation with the Grecians before they turned their Forces into the West. Their company more desired in this respect, than that of the Vandals, who were not only Pagans, but far more barbarous. But these Goths being for long time of the Arian Faction, did grievously afflict and persecute the Orthodox Prelates: continuing in this error till the death of Leonigild (or Leutigildis as some call him) the last Patron and Assertor of it. Their Government Monarchical, but the King's Elective, (though for the most part they kept themselves to the Regal Family:) an Excommunication being laid on such, by the fifth Council of To●edo, as went about to alter that established course. Their Rule of Government was Customs, and that not left in writing, but committed to Memory and Traditions written Laws being first made by King Eur●cus, which the ensuing Princes confirmed and perfected. What else concerneth them we shall find in the close of this Catalogue of 

The Kings of the Goths in Spain.  
A. C.  
421. 1 Vallia. 22.  
443. 2 Theodoric. 13.  
456. 3 Thorismund. 3.  
459. 4 Theodoric II. 14.  
473. 5 Henry or Euricus. 18.  
491. 6 Alaricus. 21.  
512. 7 Gensalaric. 3.  
515. 8 Amalaric. 11.  
526. 9 Theudes. 18.  
543. 10 Theodogisdus. 3.  
546. 11 Agila. 5.  
551. 12 Athanagildus. 14.  
565. 13 Luiba. 3.  
568. 14 Leonigild. 18.  
586. 15 Richared. 15.  
601. 16 Luiba II. 2.  
603. 17 Victoricus. 7.  
610. 18 Gundemaris. 20.  
630. 19 Sisebulus. 9  
639. 20 Richared II. 2.  
641. 21 Suintilla. 3.  
644. 22 Siseranda. 7.  
651. 23 Suintilla II. 4.  
655. 24 Tulgas. 2.  
657. 25 Vidisuindus. 10.  
667. 26 Recesuind. 13.  
680. 27 Bamba. 9  
689. 28 Ering. 7.  
696. 29 Egypea. 7.  
703. 30 Vitiza. 13.  
716. 31 Roderick the last King of the Goths in Spain, elected to the prejudice of the Sons of Vitiza, which after proved the ruin and overthrow of the Kingdom. For though the Kingdom went for the most part by Election, yet had they respect to the next of blood, (as at this time in Poland and Bohemia:) very few interlopers being here admitted; yet some there were who either by their merit or some opportunity got the possession of the Kingdom, though not at all relating to the Royal family. Of which kind were Theudis, an Ostro-Goth, sometimes the Governor hereof for Theodorick King of the Goths in Italy, Protector of this Kingdom in the minority of Amalaric, and Theudegisolus, Nephew to Totilas one of the successors to Theodoric. The rest of principal note were 1 Theodoric the first, slain in the battle near Tholouze against Attila the Hunn, in defence of his own Countries and the Roman Empire. 2 Theodoric the second, who beat the Nation of the Suevi out of Batica; and 3 Leonigild or Leutigilde, who deprived them of Galicia also. 4 Reccaredus the first, who first embraced the Catholic doctrine of the Church, and rejected Arianism; and for that cause first honoured with the title of the Catholic King; afterwards resumed by Alfonsus the first King of Leon, and made hereditary by Ferdinand the King of Castille, Arragon, etc. Grandfather unto Charles the fifth. 5 Euricus, or Henricus as some call him, as remarkable for Civil Polity, as Reccaredus for piety: as being the Lycurgus or Legislator of this people, not governed till his time by a written Law, but either by uncertain customs, or at the pleasure of such Officers as the Kings set over them. 5 Suintilla, Son of Reccaredus the second, who having in the short time of his reign expelled the Roman forces out of Tingitana Anno 642. was the first Monarch of all Spain, whereof Tingitana (though on the other side of the Sea) had been made a Province by the Emperor Constantine, as before was said. And of this Province was julianus Governor in the time of Rhoderick, who being of the faction of the Sons of Vitiza, stomached his advancement to the Kingdom; and thereby got the greater portion of the King's displeasure. Who sending him upon an Embassy to the Moors of Asrica, in the mean time deflowered his Daughter Cana: which the Father took in such indignation, that he procured the Moors (amongst whom he had gotten much credit) to come over into Spain. This request they performed under the conduct of Musa and Tariffe: and having made a full conquest, subjected it to the great Caliphs', or Mahometan Emperors. It is recorded in a MS. History of the Saracens, that at the first coming of Tariffe into Spain, a poor woman of the Country being willingly taken prisoner, fell down at his feet, kissed them, and told him, that she had heard her Father (who was lettered) say, that Spain should be conquered by a people, whose General should have a Mole on his right shoulder, and in whom one of his hands should be longer than the other. He, to animate his Soldiers against the next encounter, unclothed himself, and showed the mark, which so encouraged them that they now doubted not the victory. Roderick had in his Army 130000 foot, and 35000 horse. Tariff had 30000 horse, and 180000 foot. The battle continued seven days together from morning to night: at last the Moors were victorious. What became of King Roderick was never known; his Soldiers took one arrayed in their King's apparel, whom, upon examination, they found to be a Shepherd; with whom the King, after the discomfiture, had changed clothes. It is written also in Rodericus Toletanus, that before the coming of those Saracens, King Roderick, upon hope of some treasure, did open a part of the Palace of long time forbidden to be touched; but found nothing but Pictures which resembled the Moors; with a Prophecy, that whensoever the Palace was there opened, the people there resembled should overcome Spain▪ and so it happened Anno 724.    
The Moors, now Lords of Spain by the treason of julian, (who having seen the miserable death of his wife and children, was starved in prison by the Africans) permitted the free use of Religion to the old Inhabitants, lest they seeking new dwellings for the liberty of Conscience, should leave their native soil desolate. The Moors finished their conquest in five years, say some, others in two, and some again in eight Months. To keep the new conquered Country in subjection, no way was so convenient as to plant Colonies: but the Morisco women would not abandon their old seats. Hereupon Musa and Tariffe, by gifts, pardons, and persuasions, drew many Christian women to forsake their Religion, whom they married to the Soldiers. Not long after Vl●dor Vlit, the great Caliph, sent over about 50000 Families of Moors and jews; assigning them a convenient portion of lands, to be held with great immunities, & upon small rents. These Politic courses notwithstanding, the Moors long enjoyed not the sole Sovereignty herein for the Christians having now recovered breath, chose themselves Kings; and the Authority of the Caliphs' declining, gave the Moors liberty to erect divers petit royalties; so that at last Spain fell into a thirteenfold division, into the Kingdoms and proprietary estates of 1 Navarre, 2 Biscay, and 3 Guipuscoa, 4 Leon and Oviedo, 5 Gallicia, 6 Corduba, 7 Granada, 8 Murcia, 
Navarre.  9 Toledo, 10 Castille, 11 Portugal and the Members of it, 12 Valentia, 13 Catalovia, 14 the Kingdom of Majorca, and 15 that of Arragon, not to say any thing of the petit Kingdoms of jaen, Algozire, and Sevill, besides others of like nature to them, erected by the factious and divided Moors, but of short continuance all of them, and of little note; All now reduced at this day under the three governments of Castille, Portugal, and Arragon, the Kingdoms and Estates of Leon, Navarre, Corduba, Granada, Gallicia, Biscay, Murcia and Toledo, being under Castille; Portugal with Algarve, and the Isles of Azores, an entire government of itself, Valentia, Catalonia, and Majorca, under that of Arragon.  

1. NAVARRE.  
NAVARRE, the first Kingdom for antiquity in Spain, is bounded on the East with the Principality of Bearn, in the Kingdom of France; on the West, first with the River Ebro, or Iberus, and after with a little River falling into it near Calaborra, by which divided from Castille; on the North, with the Cantabrian Mountains, by which parted from Guipuscoa, and on the South, with the River Arragon (or Arga) by which divided from that Kingdom.  
It was called at first the Kingdom of Sobrarbre, from a Town of that name, situate in the most inaccessible part of the Pyrenees, and therefore chose by Garcia Ximines the first King hereof, for the seat of his Kingdom, as most defensible against the fury of the Moors: Afterwards it took the name of Navarre, either from Navois, signifying a plain and champagn Country, first used by Inigo Arista the sixth King, who having taken Pampelune, abandoned the hill Countries and betook himself unto the Plains; or from Navarriere, the chief of the three parts into which that City was divided, not only at the taking thereof, but a long time after.  
The Country though environed on all sides with mighty Mountains, yet of itself is said to be reasonably fruitful, well watered, and for the most part plain, and levelly, as before is said. It taketh up some parts of both sides of the Pyrenees: the Spanish side being fertile, and adorned with trees; the French side generally very bare and naked. That on the Spanish side, and on the summits of the Mountains, now possessed by the Spaniard, is called High Navarre; that on the French side, now called Base, or Low Navarre, estimated at a sixth part of the whole Kingdom, is enjoyed by the French; incorporated by King Lewis the 13. to the Realm of France, Anno, 1620.  
Places of most importance in Base Navarre, 1. S. Palai, formerly the place of judicature for this part of the Kingdom: but in the year 1620. removed to Pau in the Principality of Bearn: both Bearn and Base Navarre, which had before been governed as distinct Estates from the Realm of France, being then incorporate to that Crown. 2. Navarreux, a Town of great importance▪ seven Leagues from Pan; well fortified, and as well munitioned: King Lewis the 13. finding in it at his coming thither, Anno 1620. no fewer than 45 Cannons all mounted, besides 40 Culverins and smalller Pieces, with Powder, Buller, and Victuals answerable thereunto. 3. P●ed de Port, or S. john de Pied de Port, bordering on the edge of France, against which formerly a Piece of especial strength, 4. Roncevallis or Ronc●vaux, situate in the most pleasant Country of all Navarre, in the entrance of a small but delightful Valley, famous for the great battle fought near unto it, in the straits or entrances of the Mountains leading to this Valley, betwixt the French under Charlemain, and a great Army of Moors and natural Spaniards, confederate together in defence of their common Liberty. In which battle, by the treachery of Gavelon, 40000 of the French were slain, and amongst them, Rowland Earl of Man's, the Nephew of Charles, and others of the Peers of France, of whom so many Fables are reported in the old Romances, the first Author of which Fables passeth under the name of Archb. turpin, said to be one of those twelve Peers, who taking on him to record the Acts of Charles the Great, hath interlaced his Story with a number of ridiculous vanities: by means whereof the noble Acts of that puissant Emperor, and his gallant Followers, are much obscured and blemished by those very pens, which in the times succeeding did employ themselves to advance the same.  
Of special note in High Navarre, 1. Victoria, first built or rather re-edified by Sancho the 4th, King of Navarre, Anno 1180. by whom thus named in memory of some victory obtained thereabouts against the Castilians; as in like case, there had been many Towns built by the Greeks and Romans, by the name of Nicopolis, or the City of Victory, which we shall meet withal hereafter. Situate in the place of the ancient Vellica, but graced with the privileges, and name of a City by john the 2d of Castille, after it came under the command of that Crown, Anno 1432. A Town belonging properly to the little Province of Olava, and the chief thereof: which Province being wholly in and amongst the Cantabrian Mountains, was of old a member of Navarre, but being extorted from it Anno 1200, by Alphonso the 2d of Castille, it was in the year 133●▪ incorporated into that Crown as a part thereof, as were some other Towns and members of this Kingdom also, won by the Castilians. 2 Viane, the title of the eldest Son of Naevarre, who was called Prince of Viane; advanced unto this ●honout by King Charles the 3d, Anno 1421. in imitation of the like custom in Castle, were the eldest Son was called Prince of the Asturia●: but not less memorable for the death of Caesar Borgia, slain near unto it in an ambush, after all his wander, and interchangeableness of fortunes. For being son of Pope Alexander the sixth, by birth a Spaniard, he was by his Father made a Cardinal; but relinquishing that Title, by Charles the eighth of France created Duke of Valeatinois in the Province of Dauphin: during his Father's life he had reduced under his obedience divers of the Estates which anciently had belonged to the Church of Rome: but after his decease imprisoned by Pope julio the second who was jealous (not without good cause) of his plots and practices. From Rome he stole unto Gonsalvo, than Viceroy of Naples for Ferdinando the Catholic; who notwithstanding his safe conduct, sent him prisoner to Spain: but breaking prison (desperarely sliding down a window) he came at last into this kingdom, and was here slain in an Ambuscado, as before was said. So many times was Machiavels great Politician overreached by Bookmen and Soldiers. 3 Sobrarbre, in the most inaccessible parts of the Pyrenees, for that cause made the first seat of the Kings of Navarre, entitled from thence the Kings of Subrarbre. Made afterwards a distinct Kingdom from Navarre by Sa●ch● the great, who gave it to Gonsales his youngest Son: after whose death (not having issue) it was seized on by Don Raym●r the first King of Arragon, and made a Member of that Crown. 4 Sanguess●, a Town of a large territory and jurisdiction, privileged with a Suffrage in the Convention of Estates, and a strong Fortress on the borders towards Arragon: for which cause formerly aimed at by the Kings thereof, who have had it sometimes in their hands. 5 Pampelun in the Champagn Country, on the banks of the River Arga, the Metropolis of this Kingdom, and the seat Royal of its Kings since the Conquest of it from the Moors by Inigo Arista the sixth King of Navarre. Of old divided into three parts, that is to say Bourg, Peuplement, and Navarriere; each having several Officers and jurisdictions (the cause of many quarrels and much blood amongst them) till all united into one body, and reduced under the command of one chief Magistrate, by King Charles the third. An ancient Town, first built by Pompey at the end of his wars against Se●to●ius: in memory of whom called Pompeiopolis, by our modern Latinist's; but Pampeloa, more near unto the present name, by P●olomie and Anto●inus, now an Episcopal See, the seat of the Vice Roy, and one of the best fortified Towns of all Spain. 6 Moia, not far from the borders of France, where it joineth on Guipuscoa, a place of principal importance: the Castle whereof was one of the last pieces on this of side the Mountains which held out for King john of Albre● against Ferdinand the Catholic in his surprisal of this Kingdom. 7 Montreal, 8 Olite, and 9 Ta●alla; all yielded with the rest of this Kingdom, to Frederick of Toledo, Duke of Alva. Who had the happiness to subdue this Realm to the Crown of Castil●, as his Son Ferdinand had to conquer the Realm of Portugal. 10 Tude●e, on the Eastern bank of the River Ebro, honoured with a little University there founded by Ferdinand the Catholic, on his surprisal of that Kingdom. 11 Calahorra, situate on the western banks of the Iberus or Ibr●, by Ptolemy called Calagorina, by Strubo, Calaguris, now a Bishops See; taken from Raimir the 2d. King of Navarre▪ by A●●onso the 2d. of Castille, and made a Member of that Kingdom. As also was 12 Logrogno, on the same banks of the River also▪ 13 Estella bordering on Castille, to which adjudged (though on the Eastern side of the River) by Lewis the 11th. of France; made Umpire for the atonement of some differences betwixt Henry King of Castille, and John King of Navarre and Arago●.  
The old inhabitants thereof were the Vascones, possessed not only of this tract, but of B●scay and Gui●●scoa also, from them denominated: who passing over the Pyrenees, made themselves masters of that Province which is now called Gascoigne by the French, and Vascovia in Latin. Won from the Romans by the Goths, and from them by the Moors; it began to be a Kingdom under Garcia Ximines, a noble man of the Gothish blood, who with 600 men only began to make head against the Saracens, Anno 716. first under the title of the Kingdom of Sobrarbre, and after that of Navarre; for the Reasons formerly delivered. The sixth from Garcia X●mines was Inigo surnamed A●ista, (so named from his vehemency and heat in War) the Son of Simon Earl of B●gorre in G●sco●gne, elected to this Kingdom, on the death of Ximines the fifth King, Anno 840 or thereabouts, as the next Heir (but in the collateral Line) of D●n Garcia ximines the first King of Sobrarbre. To him the taking of Pampelune is ascribed most generally, though Turquet in his History refer the same to Garcia the second King. But certainly the Town was in the hands of the Moors till forced from them by the prowess of Charlemain, by them again recovered after the defeat of Roncevals, and held till the time of this King, who possessed himself of it. To this King also is ascribed the first beginning of the ceremony of Crowning and Anointing after the manner used by the Kings of France. But the old Roman Provincial cited in the titles of honour acknowledgeth no such honour to these petit Kings, communicated only, in that time, to the Emperors of the East and West, the Kings of Jerusalem, England, France, and S●●cil. And therefore probable it is, that the custom came into Navarre with the house of Champagne. Other Kings of most note in the course of Story were, 3 Fortun● the second Nephew of Inigo Arista, by his Son Garcia the third, who added unto his Estate the Earldom of Arragon, descended to him by his Mother, the Daughter and Heir of Asnarius, or Aznario, the last Earl thereof. 4 Sancho the fourth, surnamed the Great, who first assumed unto himself the title of King of Spain: his predecessors using no other title than Kings of Sobrarbre or Navarre; his Co-temperaries calling themselves Kings of Leon, Toledo, Sevil, Corduba, according to the names of their several Kingdoms; the Goths, Kings of the Goths in Spain; and so the Vandals and the Suevi. Only the Earls of Barcelone, at their first Erection by the French, entitled themselves the Dukes and Marquesses of Spain, as if all were theirs; with brag and vanity enough. But this Prince had some good ground for it, as being by inheritance possessed of Navarre and Arragon; of Castille in the right of his Wife Donna Nugn●, or Elvi●a, Sister and Heir of Sancho the last Earl thereof; and by conquest of a great part of the Realm of Leon: so that almost all Spain, not possessed by the Moors, was become his own. Had these Estates remained entire to his Successors, the Moors no doubt had sooner lost their hold in Spain: and the whole Continent been brought under the obedience of one sole Monarch. But this King either loving all his Sons alike; or else offended with the eldest, who most unnaturally had accused his own innocent mother of the crime of Adultery: divided his Estates amongst them: giving to Garcia his eldest Son, the Realm of Navarre, with that part of Leon which he held by conquest; to Ferdinand his second Son, Castille; and Arragon to his base Son Raymir; both which he erected into Kingdoms: and finally, to Gonsales his third Son▪ the Realm of Sobrarbre, than first dismembered from Navarre. By means of which impolitic course, his Sons being all of equal title and Estates, instead of opposing the common foe, quarrelled with each other, and left the quarrel as a Legacy to their several Successors: which mischief might have been avoided, if he had not dignified them all with the title of Kings; or left the rest as Homagers unto one Supreme. 5 Sancho the fifth, Nephew of Sancho the Great, by his Son Garcia de Nagera, unnaturally and traitorously slain by his Brother Raymir. After whose death, and the short interposition of his Murderer, this Kingdom was seized on by the Kings of Arragon: three of which, viz. Sancho Raymires, Pedro, & Alfonso, did severally and successively enjoy the same▪ 6 Alfonso the last of the three Kings of Arragon reigning in Navarre, surnamed the Warrior, who for a time was King of Castille also in right of ●rraca his Wife: in which respect he took unto himself the title of Emperor of Spain, though not acknowledged so by others. But finally, dying without issue, and his Brother Raymir, or Raymond called the Monk, succeeding in Arragon; the Kingdom of Navarre reverted to Garcia Raymir Lord of Monson, the direct heir of Garcia de Nagera, by Raymir Lord of Calahorra his younger Son. 7 Sancho the 8th, the Nephew of this Garcias Raymir, by his Son Sancho the 7th surnamed the Wise, the last King of the masculine and direct line of the Kings of Navarre: the Kingdom after his decease passing by the Females, or Heirs general, to the Earls of Champagne, and so unto the Kings of France, the Houses of Eur●ux, Foix, Albret, and Vendosme; but never holding above 3 descents in any one Family. By means whereof, these Kings being barred from gaining any thing on the Moors, by the interposition of the Kings of Castille and Arragon; and having no way to enlarge their Revenue or Dominions by any undertake and Adventures at Sea, as the Portugals did; incorporated to their Crown as fair and large possessions in the Realm of France, as any of the others did in the Spanish Continent. The Principality of Bearn, the Earldoms of Foix and Begorre, united in the person of Gaston of Foix; as those of Armaignac and Albret in the person of John Earl of Albret, all lying together on the other side of the Pyrenees, all added to this Crown by marriage with the Heirs hereof, made up a fairer and wealthier Estate than Navarre itself; inferior to few Provinces in the Realms of Spain. Not to say any thing of the accession of the County Palatine of Champagne; exchanged afterwards for some Lands in the Coantie of La March in Limosin; or of the Earldoms of Eureux, and the Duchy of Vendosme; as lying further off, and of less importance. Nor of the great Kingdom of France now herewith incorporate, as to the person of the K. though not in the possession of this Kingdom also. With so much judgement and success did the ensuing Kings (not otherwise able to enlarge their territories) bestow their daughters; that the Distaff proved as happy to this little Kingdom, as the Sword to others. 8 Charles, the second of that name, and the 30th King of Navarre, whom I mention not for any glorious Actions achieved in his life, (for that was full enough of ignominy,) but for the strangeness and hideousness of his death. He was a Prince much given to voluptuousness and sensual pleasures, which so wasted his spirits, that in his old age he sell into a kind of Lethargy. To comfort his benumbed joints, he was bound and sewed up naked in a sheet steeped in boiling Aquavitae. The Chirurgeon having made an end of sewing the sheet, and wanting a knife to cut off the thread, took a wax candle that stood lighted by him: but the flame running down by the thread, caught hold on the sheet; which (according to the nature of Aquavitae) burned with that vehemency, that the miserable King ended his days in the fire. 9 John of A●agon, the second Son of Ferdinand the first, in the life of his Brother Alphonso was made King of Navarre, in right of Blanch his Wife, Daughter of Charles the 3d, and on the death of his Brother, King of Aragon also. And though his Queen died long before him, in whose right he reigned, yet he kept possession of the Kingdom, till his death, (reigning 54 years in all) notwithstanding the opposition made against him by Charles Prince of Viana, his only Son by that marriage, and Heir apparent of that Crown; whom he vanquished, imprisoned, and at last poisoned. 10 John, Earl of Albret in Gascoigne, King of Navarre in right of Katherine his Wife: in whose reign the Kingdom of Navarre was seized on by Ferdinand the Catholic, Son of the said John King of Arragon, and Navarre; by a second Wife. The manner of it we shall relate with more particulars, when we have summed up the whole Succession of 

The Kings of Navarre.  
A▪ Ch.  
716. 1 Garcia Ximines. 42.  
758. 2 Garcia II. Son of Garc. Ximines.  
822. 3 Fortunio. 13.  
815. 4 Sancho Garcia. 17.  
832. 5 Ximines Garcia, the last of the direct  
Line of Garcia Ximines. 
Navarre.  An Interregnum of 4 years.  
844. 6 Inigo, surnamed Arista, Earl of Begorre, the next Heir Male of the house of Garcia Ximines. 23.  
867. 7 Garcia III. surnamed Inigo. 18.  
885. 8 Fortunio II. King of Navarre, and Earl of Arragon. 16.  
901. 9 Sancho II. called Abarca, Brother of Fortunio the 2d. 19  
920. 10 Garcia IU. 49.  
969. 11 Sancho III. 24.  
993. 12 Garcia V. surnamed the Trembler.  
1000 13 Sancho IV. surnamed the Great, of whom sufficiently before.  
1034. 14 Garcias VI called the Nagera, eldest Son of Sancho. 20.  
1054. 15 Sancho V. slain by  
1074. 16 Raymir, the Brother of Sancho the fifth, dispossessed by  
1076. 17 Sancho VI surnamed Ramires, King of Arragon. 18.  
1094. 18 Pedro, King of Arragon.  
1104. 19 Alfonso, called the Warrior, the last of the Kings of Arragon reigning in Navarre.  
1134. 20 Garcia VII. Nephew of Garcia de Nagera. 16.  
1150. 21 Sancho VII. surnamed the Wise.  
1194. 22 Sancho VIII. the last of the Male issue of Garcia Ximines. 40.  
1234. 23 Theobald, Earl of Champagne, Son of the Lady Blanch, Sister and Heir of Sancho the 8th. 19  
1253. 24 Theobald II. Earl of Campagne. 18.  
1271. 25 Henry, Son of Theobald the 2d. 3.  
1274. 26 Joan, the Daughter of Henry, married to Philip the Fair of France. 31.  
1305. 27 Lewis Hutin, King of France. 10.  
1315. 28 Philip the Long, King of France. 5.  
1320. 29 Charles the Fair, King of France. 8.  
1328. 30 Joan II. Qu. of Navarre, the Daughter of Lewis Hutin. Philip II. Earl of Eureux.  
1349. 31 Charles II. Son of joan and Philip of Eureux. 37.  
1386. 32 Charles III. Earl of Eureux. 39  
1425. 33 john, Prince of Arragon, after the death of his elder Brother, King of Aragon also; the Husband of Blanch, the Daughter of Charles the 3d. 54.  
1479. 34 Leonora, Daughter of john and Blanch, the Widow of Gaston Earl of Foix; a Queen of 15 days only.  
1479. 35 Francis Phoebus, Grandchild of Leonora and Gaston of Foix, by their Son Gaston, Prince of Viane.  
1483. 36 Catharine, Sister of Francis. john, Earl of Albret.  
1517. 37 Henry II. Earl of Albret, Son of john and Catharine.  
1556. 38 joan III. Daughter of Henry of Albret. Antony of Bourbon, Duke of Vendosme in France.  
1572. 39 Henry III. the Son of Antony and joan, after the death of Henry the 3d of France, succeeded also in that Realm, by the name of Henry the 4th.  
1610. 40 Lewis II. of Navarre, and XIII. of France.  
41 Lewis III. of Navarre, and XIV. of France, now living, with whom remain the rights, but not the possession of this Kingdom. For in the reign of Catharine and john of Albret, Ferdinand gathered an Army under the pretence of rooting out the Moors, and surprised this Kingdom, altogether unprovided, and destitute of means to make the smallest resistance, Anno 1512. The pretended reason of this surpizall, was an Excommnication laid on these Princes by the Pope, of which this King took upon him to be the Executioner: but the true cause was an ancient desire which this King had to possess this frontier kingdom; it being a strong Bulwark against France. It happened then that Lewis the 12th having incurred the displeasure of Pope ●t●lio the second, was together with all his adherents, excommunicated; and his, and their estates, given to such as could or would subdue them. The King and Queen of Navarre were at this time both French subjects: he in respect of Albret, his paternal inheritance, and she of her estates of Foix and Bearn, and therefore sided with the French King. Ferdinand having (as we said) levied an Army under colour of extirpating the Moors, turneth upon the French King; and demanded of these Princes, not only a free passage through their country, but also to have certain places of strength put into his hands, for his better assurance. These unjust demands the Na●arr●●y denied. Whereupon Ferdinand with all expedition invadeth the kingdom, the greatest part of which he took without a blow given, the French King being as backward in affording due assistance, as the other was unprovided of means for defence. The French nettled with this loss, divers times attempted the recovery of it, but in vain: for the Spaniard still keepeth those parts of it which lie on that side of the pyrenees; leaving the rest, which lieth on the French side of those Mountains (being about a sixth part of the whole) to the Descendants of those Princes whom he had disseized.    
The Arms of Navarre are Gales, a Carbuncle nowed Or. Which Carbuncle having a resemblance unto 〈◊〉 of Gold, is said to have been first taken by Sancho the 8th, in memory that he and his Forces had first broken the Fortification made with chains, about the Pavilion of Mahomet Enaser the Meramomolin of Morocco, 
Leon.  at the great fight in Sierra Morena: before which time the Arms of this Kingdom had been Azure, a Cross Argent.  
The chief order of Knighthood was of the Lily, begun by Garcia the sixth; their Blazen a pot of Lilies with the Portraiture of our Lady ingraved upon it; their duty to defend the Faith, and daily to repeat certain Ave-maries'.   

4. LEON and OVIEDO.  
THe Kingdom of LEON and OVIEDO hath on the East the Country of Biscay; on the North, the main Cantabrian Ocean; on the South, Castille; on the West, Gallicia. So called from Leon and Oviedo, the chief Cities of it, and first seat of their Kings; the ancientest Kingdom in all Spain. By a more ancient name it was called Asturia, from the Astures, who possessed it in the time of the Romans; divided into the two general names of Augustani and Transmontani, but comprehending the particular Tribes or Nations of the Pesici, Gigari, Zoclae, and Lancienses.  
The Country mountainous and woody, but formerly of some esteem for those small, though swift Horses which the Romans (from hence) called Asturcones▪ we may read it, Hobbies; which afterwards became a common name for all Nags or Geldings': Asturco Macedoni●us being used for a Macedonian Nag▪ by Petronius Arbiter.  
It is divided commonly into two parts, that is to say, Asturia de Oviedo, bordering on Gallicia, towards the West, and 2 Asturia Santillana, confining on Biscay, towards the ●ast. From which division of the Country the eldest Son of Castille is called Prince of the Asturias, in the plural number, which Title some suppose to be given unto them, because it was the first Country which held up against the Moors. But indeed the true Original hereof is referred by the best Spanish Writers, to the time of the marriage of Catharine, Daughter of john of Gaunt, and in right of her Mother Constance, the right Heir of Castille, unto Henry Son of john the first, then in possession of that Kingdom. For to this new married Couple it was granted, saith Mariana, that after the manner of England, where the Heir Apparent is called Prince of Wales, they should be called Princes of the Asturias. In times succeeding the Towns of jaen, Vbeda, Biatia, and Anduiar were added to this Principate, and so continued to this day.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Avales, on the Sea side, not far from the Promontory, called of old Promontorium Scythicum; but now Cabo de Pinas, 2. Sublanco, now a small v●llage, but once a Town of so great strength that it was destroyed by the command of the Emperor Nerva, lest it might animate these Mountainers unto a revolt. 3. LEON, situate at the foot of the Mountains, not far from the place of the old Sublancia (as it was then called:) The town but mean, were it not beautified by a fair and large Cathedral; the Bishop whereof acknowledgeth no Metropolitan but the Pope alone. Recovered from the Moors, Anno 722. Afterwards made the Regal Seat of the Kings of Leon; by some called Legio, because the 7th Legion was here lodged; by Ptolemy called Legio Germanica, and by others Gemina. 4. S. Andera, so named from a Church there built to the honour of S. Andrew; by Ptolemy called Flavionavie; now a wel-traded Port on the Cantabrian Ocean. 5. Santillana, which gives name to the Eastern part of Asturia. 6. L●anes, where the two Asturias meet together. 7. Civid id Re●l in the Western part of Asturia, called Asturia de Oviedo. 8. Villa Viciosa, the only noted Port in this part of the Country. 9 OVIEDO, called for a time the City of Bishops, because many of the Bishops of Spain, dispossessed of their Churches by the Moors, had retired thither, and there preserved the line of Episcopal Succession, till their Sees were filled again with Bishops in more happy times. Anciently it was called Lucus Asturum, and was of old a Bishops See; re-edified by King Froila the first, in the year 757. Famous enough in giving the title of a Kingdom to the first Christian Princes after the Conquest by the Moors, called from hence Kings of Oviedo. Afterwards, Anno, 896. they began to be styled Kings of Oviedo and Leon; and at last Kings of Leon only; Oviedo being quite le●t out of the Regal stile by Raymir the 2d, Anno 904. More toward the Inlands of this Kingdom now reckoned part of old Castille) are 10. Palenza, the Pallantia of Ptolemy and Antoninus, seated on the River ●●arrion; once a small University, till the translation of it unto Salamanca, by King Ferdinand the third. This Town first felt the fury of the Su●vians, when they mastered these parts of Spai●. 11. Astorga, anciently called Augusta Asturica, whence the Astures of this tract were called Augustani, a Bishops See frontiring on Gallicia; happy in this, that it felt not the fury of the lustful King Vitiza; who to secure himself in his unlawful pleasures, and to weaken his subjects, if they should attempt any thing against him, dismantelled all the Towns in his Dominions, except Leon, Toledo, and this Astorga.  
Who were the old Inhabitants of this Country hath been shown already. When conquered by ●ugustus Caesar they were under part of the Province of Tarragonensis; part afterwards of the Province of Gallicia by the Emp: Constant. Won from the Romans by the Goths, & from them by the Mo●res, though long they did not lie under their command. For as the lust of Roderick the last King of the Goths in Spain, occasioned the coming in of the Moors; so the lust of Magnu●z●, a Moor●● 〈◊〉 Roy, occasioned (though in long course of time) their expulsion thence. For Magnutz● having employed Pelagius a young Prince of the ●sturias on an Embassy to Musa, the Lieutenant General 〈◊〉 the Moors, then residing at Corduba; in his absence ravished his Sister, and at his return died by 〈◊〉 edge of his sword. Despairing of pardon for this Act, he was fain to stand upon his guard, and for 〈◊〉 self in the mountainous places of this Country: to which many of the old Inhabitants resorted, put themselves under his command, and elected him to be their King: first by the name of King of the Asturias, and after by the Title of King of Leon, when he had got that City into his hands, as being the City of most note, and the strongest hold that he was possessed of. The Kingdom at the first beginning contained only the more mountainous parts of the two Asturias enlarged a little further South on the taking of Leon by this first Pelagius. Afterwards by the ●alour of Ordogno the 2d, it extended over both Asturias, Gallicia, and the old Castille: divided from the Moors by the Mountains of Avila and Segovia, but more defended by the valour of the people, and gallantry of their Princes, than it was by those Mountains. Kings of most note, besides the two be-before remembered, were 1. Mauregate, the base Son of Alfonso the first, who having by the help of Abderamen, King of the Moors, obtained the Kingdom, came to a base agreement with them, in which he bound himself to pay them as an yearly tribute 50 Virgins of noble Families, and as many of inferior birth; for which he died hated and detested of all men. 2 Raymir the first, who so discomfited the Moors at the battle of Clavigio, Anno 826. that from that time the power and reputation of the Kings of Corduba began to languish. 3 Alfonso the 3d, who refused to pay unto the Moors the said tribute of Virgins; and for his many victories against the Moors, was surnamed the Great; who being outed of his Kingdom by his Son Garcia, not only patiently digested so great a wrong, but willingly became his Son's Lieutenant against the Moors. 4 Veramund the 2d, chosen King in the minority of Raymir the 3d, in whose time the Moors took Leon, and spoilt the Church of S. james in Gallicia; but were after beaten to their homes, with the loss of many of their own places. 5 Veramund the 3d, who `making war against Ferdinand the first King of Castille, was by him slain in battle; the Conqueror seizing on his Kingdom, in right of Sanch● his Wife, the Sister of Veramnnd; the three Kings next succeeding being Kings of both: 6 Ferdinand the 3d, Son of Alfonso the 9th, and of Ber●ngaria the younger Sister of Henry King of Castille, by the power and policy of his Mother, seized on the Castile's, of right belonging to Blanche the elder Sister, Wife of Lewis Son to Philip the 2d, King of Fra●ce, and after the death of his Father succeeded in Leon. Of whom we shall hear more when we come to Castille. After this time these Kingdoms never were divided; but incorporate into one ●state, called for long time the Kingdom of Castille and Leon: though afterwards Leon was left out of the Regal stile, and only that of Castille mentioned, except in Legal instruments, Letters Patents, and Instruments of Negotiation with foreign Frinces. The whole succession of these Kings, the Histories of Spain thus present unto us.  

The Kings of Oviedo and Leon.  
A. Ch.  
716. 1 Pelagius, of whom sufficiently be-before. 20.  
735. 2 Fasila, the Son of Pelagius. 2.  
737. 3 Alfonso, for his Piety surnamed the Catholic, the Son-in-law of Pelagius by his Daughter Ormisinde.  
756. 4 Phrovilla, the Son of Alfonso the Catholic, the Founder or Repairer rather of O●iedo.  
768. 5 Aurelius, the Brother of Phroilla. 6.  
774. 6 Sillo, the Son-in-law of Alfonso the Catholic, by his Daughter Odesinde. 9  
783. 7 Mauregate, an Usurper, the bastard Son of Alfonso. 6.  
789. 8 Veramund, Son to Froilla. 6.  
795. 9 A●fonso II. surnamed the chaste, the Brother of Veramund. 29.  
825 10 Raymir, the Son of Veramund. 6.  
831. 11 Ord●gne, Son to Raymir. 10.  
841. 12 Alfonso III. surnamed the Great, the Son of Ordogno. 46.  
886. 13 Garcia, Son to Alfonso the 3d. 3.  
889. 14 Ordogno II. King of Gallicia, the Brother of Garcia.  
897. 15 Phroilla II. Brother of Ordogno. 1  
898. 16 Alfonso IU. Son of Ordogno. 6.  
904. 17 Raymir II. Brother of Alsonso. 19  
924. 18 Ordogno III. Son of Raymir. 5.  
929. 19 Sancho, surnamed the Gross, Brother of Ordogno the 3d. 12.  
941. 20 Raymir III. Son of Sancho. 24.  
965. 21 Veramund II. Brother of Sancho. 17.  
982. 22 Alfonso V. Son of Veramund. 46.  
1028. 23 Veramund III. Son of Alfonso. 9  
1037. 24 Sanctia, Sister of Veramund, Ferdinand King of Castille. 30.  
1067. 25 Alfonso VI the youngest Son of Ferdinand and Sanctia, first King of Leon only; but after the death of Sanctius his elder Brother, he succeeded also in Castille. 41.  
1108. 26 Vrraca, the Daughter of Alphonso. Alfonso VII. King of Arag. and Navarre. 13  
1122. 27 Alfonso VIII. the Son of Vrraca, by Raymond of Burgudie, succeeded in Leon and Castille. 35.  
1157. 28 Ferdinand II. younger Son of Alfonso, King of Leon only. 31.  
1188. 29 Alfonso IX. Son of Ferdinand. 42.  
1230. 30 Ferdinand III. Son of Alfonso, by Berengaria or Berenguela, Sister of Henry of Castille, by the power and practices of his Mother succeeded in the Realm of Castille, whilst his Father lived, Anno 1217. to the prejudice of Blanch her elder Sister, married to Lewis the 8th of France, by whom she had Lewis the 9th, and other Children. The Kingdoms never since that time disjoined, 
B●scay & Guipusc●a.  as they had been once before since the first uniting.   
The Arms of this Kingdom are Argent, a Lion Passant, crowned Or, which Arms when it was joined to the Kingdom of Castille were quartered with the Coat thereof: that being the first time, (as Camden notes) that ever Arms were born Quartered. Followed herein by Edward the 3d of England, who not only took unto himself the Title of King of France, but to show his right unto that Crown) quartered the Flower de Lices, w●th his English Lions.   

3 BISCAY, and 4 GVIPUSCOA.  
OF these two we shall speak together, because of the similitude and resemblances which are between them, both in the Country and the people; the names being also forged from the same Original: Bounded upon the West with the Kingdom of Leon; on the East, with the Pyrenees, and Guienne in the Realm of France; on the North, with the Cantabrian Ocean; and on the South, with Navarre and old Castille. Thus named from the Vascones, inhabiting the neighbouring Kingdom of Navarre in the time of the Romans: part of which people in the year 640. or thereabouts, passed over unto the farther side of the Pirenees, where they took up those parts of France, since from them called Gascoigne. The rest continuing in their old seats, or spreading more into the West towards the Cantabrians, gave to those parts the name of Guipuscoa and V●scaia, (for so the Spaniarde write and speak it) now by us called Biscay: their language also (which is much different from the rest of Spain) being called the Basquish, more near in sound to that of Vascons the Original name.  
The whole Country is very Mountainous and woody, yielding but little store of Corn, and less of Wine: the defect of the first being supplied from other Countries, of the last by Cider, for which end they plant Apples here in great abundance. But from those. Woods they draw continually great store of Timber for the building of ships: and from those hills there do not only issue pleasant Rivers (some say 150. in number) of which Iberus and Duero are said to be two; but such infinite store of Iron and Steel, that no Country yieldeth better or in greater plenty, called and accounted for this cause the Armoury of Spain; and giving occasion unto Pliny to report that there was in this Country, a whole Mountain of Iron, In Maritima Cantabriae parte Mons praerupte altus (incredibile dicta) totus ex ea materia est, lib. 34. cap. 45. Nor do they only furnish all Spain with Iron, which they make into instruments of War, and others for domestic uses; but with Timber also for their shipping: with which so stored that whole Fleets may be built and armed from this Country only.  
It is divided commonly into two parts, the Eastern bordering on the Pyrene●s, and the Realm of France, which is called GVYPUSCOA, and the Western bordering on the Kingdom of Leon, which properly is called BISC AY: the Town of Montrico standing in the confines of both. Both of them heretofore of the same Original, though by several means united to the Crown of Castille; both speak the same Cantabrian language now called the Basquish, the people of both being more rude and simple than the rest of Spain, but standing much upon their Gentry, according to the custom of most Mountainous and unconquered Nations. The difference is, that those of Guipuscoa by reason of their traffic and commerce with other Countries, savour a little more of Christianity than the others do: in which the common Biscayne's are so far to seek, that though they have some general notions of God and CHRIST, yet very few of them are able to render an account of their Faith, in any tolerable measure. And review being taken of those general notions in which both Countries are concerned; let us next look upon them in their several and distinct capacities, with reference to their chief Towns and Stories.  
And first for GVIPUSCOA. The places of chiefest note in it are, 1 S. Sebastian's (Don Bastia as the Vulgar call it) a noted and well-traded Port, at the mouth of the River Garden, beautified with a fair and capacious Haven, defended at the entrances with two strong Castles founded upon the opposite Rocks, and honoured with an Episcopal See. 2 ●olosa (commonly called Volosette) at the confluence of the Rivers Oria and Duarzo. 3 Placenza, on the River Denia, inhabited by none but Blacksmiths, who do attend their Hammers with such endless diligence, that Vulcan's forge may seem to be translated hither from the Isle of Lemnos. 4. Fonterabia at the mouth of the River Vidosa, which divides this Country from Guyenne in France; for that cause very well fortified, and as strongly garrisoned. 5 Ren●eria, situate near a Brook abounding with most excellent Salmon. 6 Montrico, at the mouth of the River Den●a, the farthest Town hereof on the edge of Biscay. Most of which stands upon or near the Sea; there being but few Towns of note within the ●and (though store enough of scattered Villages, as in Biscay also) because of the roughness of the Mountains.  
As for the Fortunes and affairs of this part of the Country after the subversion of the Kingdom of the Goths in Spain for till that time they followed the same fortunes with the rest of this Country) it was at first a Member of the Crown of Navarre; afterwards wrested from King Sancho the sixth, by Alfonso the first of Castille, Anno 109. by whom committed to the Government of Lopes Diaz de Haro Lord of Biscay. Restored again to the Kings of Navarre upon some following Capitulations, it so continued till the year 1200. when having experience of the Government of both Kingdoms, and liking better that of Castille, they offered themselves to the subject on of Alphonso the third, 
Biscay.  who without so much as one blow struck, became Master of all the Country; and left it settled and confirmed unto his successors, as it hath ever since remained.  
2 For BISCAY next, the Principal Towns thereof are, 1 Larrabecua, the chief Town of this Province in elder times, in the Chief Church whereof the Kings of Spain, as Lords of Biseay, use to be solemnly inaugurated; here making Oath to maintain the liberties of the Country, and receiving the Homage and Allegiance of the people of it. 2 Berneo, an old Town also, and amply privileged, the franchises whereof the Kings are solemnly sworn to keep, in the Church dedicated to the honour of S. Euphemia. 3 Guernica, the third Town for antiquity in this part of these Countries. Then of a later date we have 4 Bilbo, or Bilbao, situate some two leagues from the Sea, but on a fair and deep Creek thereof, on the other side surrounded with Mountains; built out of the ruins of the old Flaviobriga, by Diego de Haro Lord of Biscay, Anno 1300. and situate the best of any Town in this Country for plenty of Victuals, especially for flesh and most excellent bread. Exceedingly enriched by making of Armour, and all sorts of weapons (their chiefest manufacture) the Bilbo Blades in such request being brought from hence. Besides which trade of Arms and Iron, they deal also in wool, by the vent of which commodities they are grown so wealthy, that here are many private Merchants which build yearly three or four good ships for their own trade only. 5 La●edo, a Sea Town also with a capable port. 6 Portugaletre, commodiously seated on an Arm of the Sea, which floweth up to their very houses, and serveth them exceeding fitly for the lading and unlading of their commodities.  
The old Inhabitants of this tract before the coming in of the Vascones, were the Cantabri; these subdivided into the several Nations of the Marbogi, the Caristi, the Antrigones, the Varduli, and the Cantabri properly so called. From these descend the modern Biscayne's. An Argument whereof may be their Language different from the rest of Spain, and said by some to have continued in this Country ever since the Confusion at Babel. And though they over-shoot themselves that go as far as Babel for the Pedigree and Antiquity of it: yet that it was the ancient language of Spain, is more than probable, because this people have ever continued without any mixture of foreign Nations, as being never throughly subdued either by Romans, Carthaginians, Goths, or Moors: and so they remained, as in their liberties not Mastered, so in their language not altered. In like manner the Arabic continueth uncorrupt in the hilly parts of Granada; the Tongue of the old Britan's in our Wales; and the ancient Epirotick, in the high, woody, and more Mountainous parts of that Country. And though those of Guipuscoa speak the same language also, yet is it with a greater mixture of other words (by reason of their neighbourhood with France, and commerce with strangers) than it is in Biscay: where the old natural language, whatsoever it was, is in far more purity.  
Nor do the Biscayne's differ from the rest of Spain in language only but in Customs also, four of which I will here set down as a light to the rest. First they account themselves free from taxes and contributions to the Kings of Spain, yielding them obedience with their Bodies, but not with their Purses. And when any of the Spanish Kings in their Progresses come to the Frontiers of this Country, he bareth one of his Legs, and in that manner entereth into it. There he is met by the Lords and Gentlemen there dwelling, who proffer him some few small Brass pieces (Maravidis they call them, whereof 600 go to a Crown) in a leathern bag, hanged at the end of a Lance; but withal they tell him, that he must not take them. Which Ceremony performed, they all attend the King in his journey. Secondly, They admit no Bishops to come amongst them; and when Ferdinand the Catholic came in Progress hither, accompanied, amongst others, by the Bishop of Pa●●elune, the people arose in Arms, drove back the Bishop, and gathering all the dust on which they thought he had trodden, cast it into the Sea. Which averseness unto Bishops, as they first took up in all probability, on some hard usage which they found at the hands of their Prelates; and still retain it out of a stubbornness of Nature, most peculiar to them: so possible enough it is, that the want of Bishops, and of Episcopal Visitations amongst the Biscayne's, is not the least cause of that ignorance and rudeness (spoken of before) which is found amongst them. Thirdly, they allow not any Priests to live in their Villages▪ except he bring his Concubine with him: conceiving it impossible for to keep their Wives unto themselves, if the Curate hath not a woman of his own. Fourthly, The Women at all meetings do first taste of the Cup, and so dispose of it to the men; which Custom they have had amongst them ever since Ogne, the Countess of Castille, attempted to have poisoned her Son Sancho in a Cup of Wine.  
But to return again to the old Inhabitants, they were a people of that courage, that they defended the liberty of that Country against the Romans, when the residue of Spain was subdued, and were at last, not without great effusion of blood, and manifest tokens of manly resolution, and heroic spirits on their parts, vanquished by the darling of Fortune, Augustus. Such hilly and mountainous people are always the last that are conquered, and the first that stand on their own guard: as besides these Biscayne's, the Navar●ois and Asturians here in Spain, in respect of the Moors; and our Britan's, in relation to the Saxons. Whether it be, that living in a sharp air, and being enured to labour, they prove on occasion good and able men; or that the Forts of Natures own building are not so easily won, as defended; or that the unpleasantness of the Country, and unfruitfulness of the soil, yield no occasion to strangers, to desire and adventure for, I take not on me to determine. But being overcome at last, 
Gallicia.  they were first cast into the Province of ●arrac●nensis; and so continued after the new modelling of Spain by the Emperor Constan●●. Under the Romans they continued till that Empire fell▪ and then not conquered by the 〈◊〉, but resigned over to them by the Romans, with the rest of that Province. Nor lost they any thing of their ancient and natural courage by the intermixture of the Vascons▪ continuing still good Soldiers both for Sea and Land; a stubborn, fierce, and courageous people; impatient of servitude, and not easy to be forced to any thing which they like not of, The last of all the Spaniards that submitted to the fury of the Moors (excepting those of the Asturia's never conquered by them) and one of the first Provinces which shook off that yoke, animated and conducted in that undertaking by Soria, descended of the blood Royal of Scotland, Anno 87. made upon that good service the first Lord of Biscay. After this they continued a free and distinct estate, under their own Proprietary Lords and Princes of the noble Family of Haro, till that Nero of Spain, Don Pedro the Cruel, violently took it from Donna jeanne, the right heir of it, Anno 1358. From which Donna jeanne, the eldest Daughter, married to Ferdinand the younger Son of Ferdinand de la Cerde, the right Heir of Castille, issued the Lady jeanne Manuel, the Wife of Henry the second, and Mother of john the first, both Kings of Castille: by which last this Country was united to that Crown for ever, Anno 1379. The names of the Proprietary Lords of this Estate, we have in this following Catalogue of 

The Lords of Biscay.  
870. 1 Soria, the Son of Lope of Biscay, but Nephew by the Mother's side to a King of Scotland, the first Lord of Biscay.  
2 Manso Lopes, the Son of Soria.  
3 Inigo the Deaf, Son of Manso Lopes.  
4 Lopes Diaz, the Son of Inigo.  
5 Sancho Lopes, the Son of Lopes Diaz.  
6 Inigo II. the base Son of Lopes Diaz, the two Sons of Sancho Lopes by reason of their tender years being set aside.  
7 Lopes Diaz II. Son of Inigo the 2d.  
8 Diego Lopes, surnamed the White, Son of Lopes Diaz the ad.  
9 Lopes Diaz III. Son of Diego Lopes, the first who took unto himself the surname of Haro, from a Town of that name of his Foundation.  
10 Diego Lopes Diaz de Haro, the Son of Lopes Diaz the 3d.  
11 Lopes Diaz IV. Son of Diego Lopes Diaz de Haro.  
1257. 12 Diego Lopes Diaz II. assisted Sancho the second Son of King Alfonso of Castille, in excluding the Children of Don Ferdinand his elder Brother, by which Sancho he was after slain.  
1289. 13 Diego Lopes de Haro, the Son of Diego.  
1290. 14 Diego Lopes III. the Brother of Diego Lopes Diaz the 2d, the Founder of the Town of Bilbo.  
1309. 15 john of Castille, Brother to King Sancho, and Husband of Mary Diaz de Haro, Daughter of Diego Lopes the 2d.  
1319. 16 john the Blind, so called because he had lost an eye, Son of john of Castille, and Mary Diaz of Haro, slain by King Alfonso.  
1329. 17 john Nugnes of Lara, in right of his Wife, Daughter and Heir of john the Blind (whose name I find not) succeeded after the decease of Donna Maria Diaz.  
1350. 18 Nugno de Lara, an Infant of two years old, succeeded john Nugnes of Lara his Father.  
1351. 19 jeane and Isabel, the Sisters and Heirs of Nugno de Lara, seized upon by Don Pedro and the whole signory of Biscay subjected by strong hand to the Crown of Castille, with many other fair Estates which depended on it.    
The Arms of these Lords of Biscay, were Argent, two Wolves Sable, each of them in his mouth a Lamb of the second.   

5 GALLICIA.  
GALICIA, or GALLAECIA, is bounded on the East, with the Asturias, from which parted by the River Mearo; on the South, with Portugal, from which divided by the River Min●o; on the North, with the Cantabrian; and on the West, with the Atlantic Oceans. The ancient Inhabitants of it were the Gallaici, (whence it had the name) distinguished into the several Tribes of the Bedyi, Seuri, Cilini, Capori, and Lemavi, spoken of by Ptolemy.  
The Country like that of the Asturias, mountainous, and almost inaccessible, overspread with the Cantabrian hills; and so the fitter to hold out against foreign invasions, in defence of Liberty and Religion; in that regard chosen for a retiring place by the distressed and vanquished Christians, in their first Wars against the Moors. Not well inhabited to this day, not so much for the hilliness of the Country, as for want of Water; which defect makes the people generally draw more towards the Sea, where they improve their fortunes by trade, and fishing. The barrenness of the Country r●ompenced heretofore by the rich mines of Gold and Silver; which in this Country, and the Astures, and some part of Lusitania, afforded yearly 20000 pound weight of Gold unto the Romans, amounting in our money to two millions of Crowns; but now no mines found in it of any value. Instead of which, it yieldeth the best mines for Iron, of any Province of Spain, for which their Waters are so proper, that they are said to fortify and improve the metal.  
Places of principal importance are, 1 Compostella, an University, and Archbishops See, vulgarly called St. jago, in honour of S. james, the son of Zebedee, whom they pretend to be buried here; and of whom there is denominated an Order of Knights: his Relics said to be kept in the chief Church of it, worshipped by the Romanists with great devotion, and drawing to this place a wonderful concourse of people coming thither on pilgrimage. 2 Baiona, not far from the mouth of the River Minio. 3 Corunna, by Ptolemy called Flavium Brigantium, by us English, the Groin; often mentioned in the story of our Wars with the Spaniard, in Qu. Elizabeth's time; then taken by the English, but since very well fortified to avoid the like surprisal. Divided then as now, into the High Town, and the Low: situate on the Cantabrian Sea betwixt the Promontory Trilencum, now Cabo Ortegal, lying towards the East, and that of old called Nerium, now Cabo Finis terre, as being the most Western end of the then known World. 4 Oreus, upon the Minio, a Bishops See, by Ptolemy called Aquae Calidae from the Baths here being; now much commended for the best Wines. 5 Tui, on the same River, frontiring upon Portugal; a Bishops See, in ancient Writers called ●ud●. 6 Ponte-vedre, 7 Ribadeo, both upon the sea, both fitted with convenient Harbours.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof, as before is said, were the Gallaici, one of the last Nations which submitted to the power of the Romans: by whom first made a part of Tarraconensis, after a Province of itself, by the name of Gallicia, the Asturias, and some part of the Old Castille and Portugal, being added to it. In the declining of that Empire, the Suevi, a potent Nation of Germany, accompanying the Vandals and Alani in their transmigrations, invaded Spain, and first possessed themselves of this Country. But not content with their Estate, they warred on the Silinges (a Vandal-tribe) then possessing Baetica; whom they vanquished, and took that Province from them, under the conduct of Rechila their second King. They added shortly after, Lusitania, to their former conques●s: stopped in their career, by Theodorick the 2d, King of the Goths, by whom vanquished, and confined again within Gallicia, which they enjoyed, till the final ruin of their kingdom by Leutigild the Goth, Anno 858. reduced then to a Province of the Gothish kingdom. Their habitation before their coming into Spain, was in the Eastern part of Germany beyond the Elb. Their Religion at the first under Recciarius their third King, was very Orthodox and ●ound. But vanquished by the Goths▪ and obliged unto them for the restoring of their kingdom, they fell off to Arianism: persisting in that Heresy for the space of an hundred years; and then again returning of the Catholic Faith, under Theodomire their King, therein continuing constant till their final overthrow. The Kings hereof (as many as are upon record) are these that follow.  

Kings of the Suevi in Gallicia.  
1 Hermenericus, who first brought the Suevians into Spain, and possessed Gallicia. Arcadius and Honorius then Emperors of the East and West.  
2 R●chila, who conquered the Silinges, and subdued Baetica.  
3 Recciarius, the first Christian King, who won Lufitania; afterwards vanquished and slain by Theodorick King of the Goths, the Suevians for a time becoming subject to that King.  
4 Masdras, restored unto the kingdom by Theodorick.  
5 Frumarius, the Son of Masdras.  
6 Remismu●dus, Brother of Frumarius, recovered some part of Lusitania, and fell off to Arianism.  
7 Theodomirus, the Restorer of the Catholic Faith amongst the S●evians.  
8 Ariamirus, Son to Theodomire.  
9 Eboricus, the Son of Ariamirus, deposed, and shorn Monk by Andeca.  
10 Andeca, the last King of the Suevii in Gallicia, or rather the Usurper of the Regal title, served in the same kind by Leutigildis King of the Goths, as he had served Eboricus his Lord and Master. After which time Gallicia was made a Province of the Gothish Monarchy, and the name of Suevians no more heard of in Spain. In times ensuing it became a part of the Kingdom of Leon, erected to a Kingdom by Alfonso the Great, King of Oviedo and Leon, and given unto his Son Ordogno, Anno 886. And though Ordogno came after to succeed in his Father's Throne, his elder Brother Garcias dying without issue; yet did Gallicia continue as a State distinct till wrested from the Owners of it by Alfonso the sixth of Leon, and the third of Castille; by whom incorporate with this Kingdom, never since disjoined: the Castilians being too good Statesmen to dismember Kingdoms.   
The Arms hereof were Azure, seem of Crossets Fitchee; a Chalice covered, Or.   

6. The Kingdom of CORDUBA. 
Corduba.   
HAving thus surveied those Provinces under the Government of Castille, which lie at the foot of the Pyrenees, and on the shores of the Northern or Cantabrian Ocean; we will next look on those which lie more toward the straits of Gibraltar, and the Mediterranean: And so come round at last to Castille itself. And first we will begin with the Kingdom of CORDUBA, which at the first erection of it, contained all those parts of Spain conquered by the Moors, and not again recovered by the Kings of Leon and Navarre: conrracted within narrower bounds when subdued by the King of Castille, at that time comprehending only the Provinces of Andalusia, Extemadura, Granada, and the Isle of Gades. We will consider it notwithstanding in both capacities; in the first and largest notion, as unto the story and affairs thereof, till distracted by the Moors into many Kingdoms: in the last and strictest, as to the chorography, and Description of it.  
The Kingdom of CORDUBA, as it stood when subdued by the Spaniards, was bounded on the East with Murcia and the Mediterranean; on the West, with Portugal and the Ocean; on the North, with the Mountains of Sierra Morena, and Castille; and on the South, with the Ocean, the straits of Gibraltar, and the Midland Seas; so called from Corduba the chief City of it and the Seat Royal of their Kings.  
It contained as before was said, the Provinces of 1 Andalusia. 2 Gades. 3 Extrem●dura, and 4 Granada. But because Granada had the fortune to continue a Kingdom, when the rest were conquered, we will consider it by itself: and here proceed to the description of the other three.  
1 ANDALUSIA is bounded on the East with Granada; on the West, with the Atlantic Ocean, and Algarve, in Portugal; on the North, with Sierra Morena, and Extremadura; on the South, with the Ocean, the straits, and the Mediterranean. By Pliny it is called Conventus Cordubensis, from Corduba, at that time the chief City of it; and after, Andalusia, quasi Vandalusia from the Vandals, who having won it from the Romans, had for some time, and till their expulsion into Africa, possessed themselves of it.  
This is the most rich and fertile Country of all Spain, watered with the Rivers 1 Anas, 2 Odier, 3 Baetis, and 4 Tenos, which makes it flourish with a continual greenness of Olives, Vines, and other Fruits; of which the Hills, though watered only with the dew of Heaven, do partake also in some measure. The Air hereof, by reason of its Southernly situation, is exceeding hot, in so much that their Corn there is ripe in April: but those excessive heats much moderated by those constant refresh, which the cool winds breathing from the North do bestow upon it. In which respect King Ferdinand the Catholic did use to say, that it was best liviug in the Summer at Sevill, (one of the chief Cities of this Province) by reason of these cool refresh; and in the winter times at Burgos in old Caestile, which though situate more Northernly, in a very sharp air, had yet many notable defences against the cold.  
The Principal Cities and Towns hereof are, 1 Corduba, seated at the foot of Sierra Morena, on the left shore of Guadalquivir, overlooking towards the South, a spacious and fruitful Plain; the first Colony planted in this Province by the Romans, and the chief City of Baetica. For a long time the seat of the Moorish Viceroys, Leiutenants to the Great Caliph of the Saraeens; after of its own kings of that Nation, who built here for their Palace a magnificent Castle; Reduced by Ferdinand of Castille, it was restored unto the honour of an Episcopal See, which anciently it had, and doth now enjoy; A City of great Circuit, but of very few houses, by reason of the multitude of Gardens in it. Famous in former times for the birth of Lucan, and both the Seneca's.  
Duosque Senecas, unicumque Lucanum  
Faecunda loquitur Corduba: saith Martial.  
Corduba glorying in her fruitful field,  
One Lucan, and two Seneca's did yeed.  
It is now vulgarly called Cordova; and hence cometh our true Cordovan leather, made of the skin of a Sardinian beast. Near unto this City is a Wood of 30 miles in length, having nothing but Olive trees. 2 ●aen, a Bishops See, remarkable for nothing more, than that the Kings of S●ain, ever since the first Recovery of it, have styled themselves Kings of jaeu, and use it to this day amongst the rest of their Titles, it having been before that time, the seat and title of some petit King amongst the Moors. Not far hence stood the famous Town of Illiturgis, (by ptolemy Illurgis) mentioned so often in the wars betwixt Rome and Carthage. 3 Ossuna, of most note for the Dukes hereof, and a small University founded here, Anno 1549. 4. Eccia, on the River Che●il, of more esteem formerly than at the present; by Ptolemy and Antoninus called A●ygi, by Plini●, Augusta Firma, a Roman Colony, and one of the four juridical Res●rts of B●tica. 5 Marche●o, situate on an Hill, where is said to be the best breed of Gennets (a swift race of Horses) not of this Province alone, but of all Spain; the River Baetis (as it was thought) conve●ing some secret virtue into them. Of this race was the Horse which Caesar so loved, that he erected his statue (when dead) in the Temple of Venus: and the ancient Lusita●i thought they were begotten by the wind. 6 Xeres, situate more within the Mid-lands, towards the borders of G●anada, and therefore called Xeres de la Frontera, (the Asta of Ptolemy and Anton●nus) famous for plenty of that wine, which we call Xeres Sack; but more for that great and fatal ●attel ●ought near unto it, betwixt K. Roderick and the Moors, the loss of which drew along with it the loss of Spain. 7 Medina Sidonia (so called to distinguish it from a Town of Castille, called Medina Coeli;) the Duke whereof was General of all the Forces, both by Sea and Land, intended for the Conquest of England, Anno 1588. The Town called anciently Asinda, and Asido Caesariana: the Duke whereof is of the Family of the Guzman's, and the greatest Prince for Revenue in all Spain, his Intrado being estimated at 130000 Crowns per Annum. 7 Algezire, on the Sea side, A Town of such strength and consequence, that it held out a Siege of 19 months for the Moors of afric, against Alfonso the 5 of Castille, to whom surrendered at the last upon Composition, Anno 1343. Since which the Kings of Castille have styled themselves Kings of Algezire; not yet discontinued. 8 Con●l, a Town on the sea-coast beyond the Isle of Gades, part of the Patrimony of the D. of Medina Sidonia. 9 Gibraltar, a strong Town seated at the mouth of the straits from hence denominated, lying at the foot of the mountain of Calpe, supposed to be one of Hercules Pillars; the furthest point Southwards of all Europe. 10 S. Lucar de Baram●da, the Port-Town to Sevill, situate at the mouth of the River Baetis, or Guadalquivir: where the Ships of that rich City ride, either for a Wind to put to Sea; or for a tide to carry them up the River, as they come from America. 11 Tariffa, seated at the end of the Promontory which looks toward Af●ick, and so called, because Tariff, Leader of the Moors into Spain, here landed. Not far from these last Towns in a little Island made by two branches of the Baetis where it falleth into the Sea, stood the famous 11 Tartessus, celebrated in most ancient Writers for the abundance of Silver which the mines of it did produce. Which was so great, that (as we read in Aristotle's Book de Mirabilibus) when the Tyrians or Phoenicians first came thither, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that their ships were neither able to contain it, or transport it thence: insomuch that they were fain to make their Anchors and other Utensils of Silver. The like commodity the Grecians found in their Voyages hither, of which Herodotus maketh mention Lib. IU. Hereupon some have been persuaded that the ships which Solomon built to go for Tarshish (whereof we read 1 Kings 10. v. 22.) were bound no further than this place. But we will not enter at this time upon that dispute. As for the situation of it, that it was neither Tariff, as some, or Carteia▪ as others do conjecture; (though where Carteia was be a like uncertain, if not the same with Tariff) but in a small Island at the mouth of the River B●tis, as before is said, doth appear by Strabo. Who telleth us that Baetis falls into the Sea with two mouths or channels, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. and that in the midst thereof there is a City called Tartessis, of the same name with the River (for Baetis anciently was so named) from whence the whole Country thereabouts is called Tartessis. The like Pausa●ius saith expressly in his Eliaca. Which situation of this Town in an Island, at the mouth of Baetis, occasioned Pliny and some others of the ancient Writers, to give the name of Tartessus to the Isle of Gades; whereof more anon. In the mean time go we on to 12 Sevill, (in Latin, Hispalis,) the fairest City, not only of Andaluzia, but of all Spain. It is in compass 6 miles, environed with beautiful walls, and adorned with many magnificent and stately buildings, as Palaces, Churches, and Monasteries: amongst which, that of the Gertosins is endowed with 25000 Crowns of yearly revenue. It is also the See of an Archbishop, under whose Jurisdiction are said to be 20000 Villages; & a most flourishing University, wherein studied Avicen the Moor, that excellent and learned scholar; Pope Sylvester the second, and Leander. Famous also it is for two Provincial Councils holden here, the first Anno 584, the last An. 636. and also that here are continually maintained 30000 Gennets for the service of the King. The River Baetis divideth it into two parts, both joined together by a stately and beautiful Bridge. From this Town come our Sevill Oranges; from hence the Castilians set forwards towards America, and here they do discharge the Fleets of Gold and Silver, which they bring from thence. To this Town come the Pearls of Cubag●a, and the Emeralds of St. Martha, the Cochineile of Mexico, the Corals of Hispaniola; and in a word, the whole treasure of the New-found-World. Here is the public Emporie of all Spain for her Wines and Oils; sent from hence in so great abundance into all parts of Europe, that the People use to say in the way of a Byword, That if there enter not into Sevill 4000 Pipes of Wine every day in the year, the Farmer of the Customs is sure to break: insomuch as the Revenue coming out of this City only, are worth a very good Realm to the Catholic King; Maginus reckoning it at no less than a Mil●ion of Crowns yearly. Lastly, here resteth the body of Christopher Columbus, the fortunate Discoverer of the New-World, with this Epitaph upon his Tomb; but short (God knoweth) of the great merit of the Man.  
Christophorus genuit quem Geno clara Columbus,  
(Numine perculsus quo nescio) primus in al●um  
Descende●s pelagus, solemn versusque cadentem  
〈◊〉 cursu; nostro hactenus abdita Mundo  
Littor● detexi, Hispano paritura Philippo:  
A●denda ●inc aliis plura & majora relinquens.  
I Christ●pher Columbus, whom the Land  
Of G●noa first brought forth, first took in hand  
(I know not by what Deity incited) 
Cades.   
To scull the Western waves; and was delighted,  
To find such coasts as were unknown before.  
Th' event was good, for I descried the shore  
Of the New World, that it might learn t' obey  
Philip, which o'er the Spanish should bear sway.  
And yet I greater matters left behind  
For men of more means, and a braver mind.  
The Archbishop of this City is of great both riches and authority: insomuch that his Revenues are reckoned at 100000 Crowns per Annum, as having in his whole Diocese 2000 Benefices, besides Friaries, Nunneries, and Hospitals; and that he is next in degree to him of Toledo; and is accounted the Metropolitan of Andalusia, and the Fortunate Lands. Isidore so much renowned for his profoundness in learning, was Bishop here, which is usually called Isidorus Hisp●lensis, to distinguish him from another of that name in Egypt, called Pelusiota. As for the fortunes of the Town in civil matters, in the declining of the Moors, when their Estate was broken into many Realms and Principalities, it became kingdom a of itself, continuing in that dignity till the year 1248. when taken and subdued by Ferdinand the 2d of Castille, and made a part of his Estates; but so, that it remaineth a Realm distinct in the Regal stile, in which the Kings of Spain are called Kings of Sevill. 2 South of Andalusia, at the mouth of Guadalquivir, stands the Isle of GADES, distant from the main land 700 paces, and joined unto it with a Bridge called Puento de Suaco. It is in length 13 miles, of a very fruitful soil, besides the riches which it gets by Fishing, and making of Salt: First peopled by the Tyrians 5●2 years before the Birth of CHRIST; subdued by the Carthaginians, Anno V. C. 236. being invited by the Tyrians to aid them in a defensive War against the Spaniards; and was the last hold which the Carthaginians had in Spain, out of which beaten by the valour and good fottune of Scipio Africanus. Here stood in ancient times a Temple consecrated to the honour of Hercules, in which all Seafaring men (at their being here) used to pay their vows, and offer sacrifice, as being arrived at the furthest parts of all the World.  
Places of most importance in it, are, 1 Porto Real, a fair and capacious Haven, between the Town of Cadiz, and the main Land of Andalusia. 2 Santa Maria, another Port more towards the North. 3 Cadis, or Gades, the chief Town of the Island, and giving name unto the whole. Situate in the Western part of the whole Isle, on a large Bay serving as a Road for the Indian Fleet, by the resort and trade whereof it is much enriched. First founded the Tyrians, afterwards made a Municipal City by the Romans, and one of the Juridical Resorts for the Province of Baetica: in whose times it was held to be the noblest and richest in all Spain, not yielding to any in the Empire for greatness, magnificence, or number of Inhabitants of account and quality: Insomuch that here lived at one time 500 Roman Knights, which number was not equalled in any one place, except Milan only: besides the great concourse of Merchants from all parts of the World. Which great resort, occasioned Cornelius Balbus, a Native of it, to add a new Town to the old; the whole circumference of both being 20 furlongs. By the Moors, at their conquest of Spain, it was utterly ruined, but since repaired, and well fortified, and made the Magazine for the Ammunition of the Spanish Navyes. Taken notwithstanding in one day by the English, under the conduct of Charles Lord Effingham, Robert Earl of Essex, and Sir Walter Ralegh: in which they burned the Indian Fleet, consisting of 40 ships, whose lading was worth 8 Millions of Crowns; overcame the Spanish Navy, consisting of 57 Men of War; took the St. Michael, and the St. Andrew, two great Galleons, with their luggage; spoilt and carried away more martial furniture, than could be supplied in many years; and forced the Town, in which they slew and took Prisoners 4000 Foot and 600 horse, and brought thence a very great booty in the sackage of it, Anno 1596. The fortunacie foe which enterprise gave occasion to one of the Wits then living to frame this excellent Anagram on the name of the Earl of Essex, (who was looked on as the greatest Adventurer in it) viz. Devereux, Verè dux. Which he afterwards cast into this Distich.  
Verè dux Devereux, et verior Hercule; GADES,  
Nam semel hic vidit, vicit at ille simul.  
Alcides yields to Devereux; he did see  
Thy Beauties (Cales) but Devereux conquered thee.  
Near to this Isle, is that so celebrated Straight called by some Fretum Gaditanum, from the nearness of it to this Island; by others, Fretum Herculeu●, not because Hercules did there break out a passage to let the Ocean into the Mediterranean, as the Poets Fabled; but because of the two Pillars which he caused to be erected on each side of it, with the Inscription of Nil Ultra, this being supposed to be the furthest Country Westward. But when that supposition was proved untrue by the discovery of America, Charles the fifth being in those parts, caused two new Pillars to be placed where the old ones stood, or rather where he thought they stood, and Plus 〈◊〉 to 〈◊〉 written on them. As for those Pillars so much memorised in the ancient Writers, some place them in the Temple of Hercules, within this Island; others on the Promontory of Ca●●e in S●ain, and that of Abila in afric; and some again in two little Lands near those Promontories. This therefore being a matter doubtful and not worth the looking after, let us return unto the Straight; 〈◊〉 now the Straight of Gibraltar, 
〈◊〉.  from the Town and Castle of Gibraltar, situate on the brink hereof; the Straight being in length fifteen miles, and in breadth, where it is narrowest, seven.  
EXTREMADURA hath on the East and North Castille; on the West, Portugal; and on the South, Andal●zia. It was first called Baeturia, from the River Baetis, which runneth thorough it; and for distinction sake Baeturia Celtica, from the Celtici, than the Inhabitants of this Tract, to difference it from Baeturia Turdulorum, containing those parts of Granada, and Andaluzia, which lie nearest unto Tarraconensis. And when first it had the name of Extremadura, it was of larger extent than now it is, reaching unto the banks of the River Duero, the bounds at that time of the Kingdom of the Moriscos; so called by the Christians, as lying on the extremities, or furthest side of that River.  
Principal places in it, are, 1 Alcantara, on the banks of the River Tagus, situate near the ruins of Norba Caesarea, destroyed by Petronius and Afra●ius, two of Pompey's Captains, for adhering faithfully to Caesar: now of most note for an Order of Knights here seated, and from hence denominated, whereof more hereafter. 2 Guadalcanal, famous for its Mines of Silver and Gold. 3 Merida, situate also on the Tagus, first called Augusta Emerita, founded and made a Colony by Augustus Caesar, who placed herein his old Soldiers, whom the Romans called Emeriti; hence it had the name. The chief City after that of Lusitania, and by Ansonius preferred before any in Spain; now ruinous, meanly built, and but ill inhabited: Famous for nothing but the Bridge upon the River Tagus, a Monument of the Roman greatness. Nigh to this Town was fought that memorable battle betwixt Wallia, the first King of the Goths in Spain, and Atace King of the Alani and Silinges (this last a people of the Vandals) the victory whereof falling to the Goths, caused the whole Nation of the Vandals to draw forth out of Spain. 4 Medelino, near which the River Guadiana hideth itself under the ground, for the space of 10 Leagues; but more famous for the birth of Ferdinand Cortes, the fortunate Discoverer and Conqueror of the Realm of Mexico. 5 Badaios, a Bishops See on the borders of Portugal. 6 Guadalupe, on a River of the same name, renowned amongst those of the Church of Rome, for the miracles and Image of our Lady of Guadalupe, as much resorted to in Spain, as our Lady of Loretto is in Italy. 7 Placenza, a Bishops See, near the Hills of Castille, not far from which in a retired and solitary place standeth the Monastery of S. justus, remarkable for a greater Miracle, than any the Lady of Guadalupe is able to boast of: which is, that Charles the fifth, that most puissant Monarch, having resigned his Empire to his Brother Ferdinand, and all the resis of his Dominions to his Son Philip the 2d, did here bid farewell unto the World, spending the residue of his time in prayers of devout Meditations. The greatest Monument and example of self-denial which these later Ages have afforded, far beyond any abnegation of the World by our cloistered Monks; or any quitting of their Crowns by some, Kings and Emperors in the darker Ages of the Church, who living in the time of Ignorance and Superstition, saw not so clearly what they did (or did it out of weakness, and want of spirit) as this Masculine and Heroic Emperor.  
The old Inhabitants of these Countries, were the Turduli, the Bastuli. and the Yurditani, of Andalusia, and Granada; the Celtici, and some part of the Lusitani, in Extremadura; all vanquished by the Romans, during the second Punic war, under the fortunate command of Scipio African. From them extorted by the Vandals, who passing over into afric left it to the Suevians; lost by them to Theodorik the 4th King of the Goths, who hereby added all Batica to his other Dominions. Under the Goths it remained subject till their fatal overthrow by the Moors, who having made almost an entire Conquest of all the Continent of Spain, were at first subject to the Great Caliphs' (Lords of the Saracenical Empire) governing here by their Lieutenants, from Vlidor Vbit, under whom they first made this Conquest, Anno 714, to Abdalla of the House of Alaveci, Anno 757. At what time Abderamen, of the Line of Mahomet the Impostor, and first Caliph of the Saracens, flying the fury of Abdalla, by whom the old Line of the Caliphs', of the Race of Humeia (of which Race this Abderamen was) had been dispossessed of that Empire; came into Spain, and was with great joy entertained by the Spanish Moors, cordially affected to his House; whose Government he took upon him, discharged of all subjection and subordination to the Caliphs', or Mahometum Emperors, and making it an absolute Kingdom of itself. In his Race it continued without any fractions or subdivisions, till the time of H●●●n the 2d, the tenth King of these Spanish Moors; after whose death distracted amongst many petit Tyrants, till they were all brought under by the Moors of afric; of which more anon. In the mean time take here the Catalogue of the Kings of these Moors of Spain, called commonly from Corduba their Royal Seat.  

The Kings of Corduba.  
A. C.  
757. 1 Abderamen. 30.  
787. 2 Hizen. 7.  
794. 3 Halt. Hatan. 25.  
819. 4 Abderamen. II. 20.  
839. 5 Mahomet. 35.  
874. 6 Almudix. 2.  
876. 7 Abdalla. 13.  
889. 8 Abderamen. III. 50.  
939. 9 Hali-Hatan. 17.  
956. 10 Hizen. II. 33.  
989. 11 Zulcimen. 4.  
993. 12 Mahomet. II. 8.  
1001. 13 Hali. 2. 
Granada.   
1003. 14 Cacin. 4.  
1007. 15 Hia●a.  
1007. 16 Abderamen. IV. 1.  
1008. 17 Mahomet III. 1.  
1010. 18 Hizen III. 1.  
1011. 19 joar. 3.  
1014. 20 Mahomet IU. the last King of the Moors in Corduba, before the second Conquest of these parts of Spain by the Moors of Africa. Concerning which we are to know, that after the great Victory obtained at ●l●v●gio, against Abderamen the 2d, by R●ymir King of Leon, Anno 826. the power and reputation of the Spanish Moors began to decline: brought utterly to nothing, by the sloth and negligence of H●z●n the 2d; after a long and unprofitable Reign, deposed by Zulcimen, who succeeded. But the Moor's not easily brooking the command of a new Usurper, fell into many Fractions, and Divisions amongst themselves: every great man seizing on some part of the Kingdom, which he retained unto himself with the name of King; from whence we have a King of Sevill, another of Toledo, a third of Cordova; the names of which last only do occur in the former Catalogue. And 'twas a sign the Kingdom was in the expiring, when so many Kings succeeded in so few years, after one another; there passing from the deposing of Hizen the 2d, to the beginning of Mahomet the 4th, not above 34 years in all; during which time we find no fewer than ten Kiugs. The often change of Princes, and short lives of Kings are the apparent signs of a ru●●ous state, approaching very near to its expiration; as may be seen by the short lives and Reigns of the last Western Emperors, nine of them hardly Reigning 20 years; as also of the Kings of the Goths in Italy, of which the six last held the Throne no longer, than the nine Western Emperors had done before them. But to proceed, Mahomet the last King of this first Rank, having left the stage, we find no good Constat of his Successors in the kingdom of Corduba, made inconsiderable by the withdrawing so many Provinces from the body of it: the pride and insolency of which Roytelets and petit Tyrants, forced them at last to call unto their aid the Kings or Miramomolines of Morocco; by whom themselves and all the rest of their Corrivals were in fine subdued. Under seven Princes of Morocco, the Spanish Moors continued subject about 120 years, that is to say, from the first coming in of joseph Telephin the Miramamoline, Anno 1091, unto the going out of Mahomet, surnamed the Green, Anno 12●4, during which time the affairs of the Moors in Spain were so well conducted, that they lost nothing to the Christians, but Extremadura, taken from them by Alfonso the 2d in the account of Castille, the 7th in the account of Leon, Anno 1147, and the City of Lisbon taken from them in the same year also by Alfonso, the first King of Portugal. But Nahomet the Green being vanquished in the great fight at Sierra Morena, by the joint Forces of the confederated Christians, left off all further care of the Moors in Spain; after his going thence distracted once again into many Kingdoms, all of them swallowed up in a little time by the Kings of Castille, Arragon, and Portugal. And amongst them the kingdom of Corduba, not able to stand long on this new Foundation, was ruinated and brought under the command of the Castilians, by their King Ferdinand the 2d, Anno 1236. Since that time there is no more mention of the kingdom of Corduba.   
The Arms whereof were Or, a Lion Gules, armed and crowned of the first, a Border Azure charged with 8 Towers Argent.   

7 GRANADA.  
GRANADA is bounded on the West with Andalusia; on the East, with Murcia, and the Mediterranean; on the North, with New Castille; on the South, with the Mediterranean only. So called from Granada, the chief City and Seat Royal of it.  
It is in length 200 miles, 100 miles in breadth, and about 700 miles in compass. The North part of the Country plain, the South parts overspread with the Alpuxarras, and other spurs and branches of the Orospeda. In the time of the Moors wonderfully well inhabited, and full of all sorts of commodities; the Hills planted with Vines and Fruits, the Plains and Valleys swelling with Corn and Gardens: since their expulsion, neither much peopled nor very fruitful, for want of men to dress and manure the Land. The principal Cities of it, are 1 Granada, situate on two Hills, divided by a Valley, thorough which runneth the River Darien; consisting of four several parts, called Alhamb●e, Sierre de sol, Granada, and Antequerula; the two first standing on the Hills, the two last in the Valley: the whole containing in the time of the Moorish kingdom about 200000 of fouls. Fenced with strong walls, fortified with 130 Turrets, and replenished with abundance of wholesome and pleasant Springs; the whole Circuit being about seven miles. The Merchants and Gentry of the best sort do dwell in that part which is called Granada; the houses of which are for the most part built of free stone, with delicate and artificial Masonry, showing great magnificence. Herein standeth the Cathedral Church, a work of admirable structure, of Figure round, as having sometimes been a Mahometan Mosquit. Here is also the place which they call Alcazar, representing a little Town, the which are ten Gates. In the A●hambre is the Palace of the Moorish Kings, covered with Gold, indented with Moisaical work; and which by reason of the structure, and multitude of Fountains which are about it, may be put amongst the Wonders of the World; having withal a goodly prospect over all the Town, lying under it upon the East, a spacious Champion towards the North, and the snowy tops of Sierra Nevade towards the South. This City is the ordinary Parliament, and Court of justice for all the Southern parts of Spain, as Valladolit is for the Northern; Madrid, which is the highest Court, having jurisdiction over, and receiving Appeals from both. A Town first rai●ed out of the ruins of Illiberis, situate not far off on the Hill Elvire, much mentioned in the stories of Rome and Carthage. In the two other parts of the Town, there is nothing remarkable, inhabited only by Mechanics of the poorer sort. 2 Alhama, seated amongst steep and craggy rocks, out of which issue Medicinal Waters, occasioning a great resort of the Spanish Gentry. 3 Gua●ix, an Episcopal See, about nine leagues from Granada, 4 Ve●es Malaga, (by Ptolemy called Sex, by Antoninus, Sexic●num) situate at the Foot of the Mountains called Alpuxarras, a large branch of the Orospeda, overspreading a great part of this Country, heretofore planted with incredible numbers of Moors, who chose to dwell there for the strength and safety of the situation; since their expulsion, desolate and unfrequented, nothing remaining of them now but the Arabic Language, which is still spoke by those few people which inhabit in it. The Mountains in this tract so high, that from the tops hereof a man may easily discern the whole course of the Straight of Gibraltar, together with the Towns of Seuta and Tangier in afric. 5 Ronda, at the foot of another branch of the Orospeda, called from this Town, Sierra de Ronda. Not far from which, by Munda, now a very small Village, was sought that memorable battle betwixt Caesar and the Sons of Pompey: the honour of which fell to Caesar, who then made an end of the Civil Wars, which that very day four years before were begun by Pompey the Father. In this fight was C●. Pompeius' slain, and his Forces broken: Caesar himself being so put to it, that seeing his Soldiers give back, he was fain to maintain the fight by his own great courage, bidding them remember, that at Munda they forsook their General. The shame of which reproach, and his noble example, encouraged them to a new onset, which was honoured with a signal and remarkable Victory: this being the last fight that Caesar was in, murdered not long after in the Senate-house. And of this Fight he used to say, That in all other places he fought for his Honour, but in this for his life. 6 Antiquera, heretofore a well-fortified Town, bordering close upon Castille. 7 Maxacra, on the shore of the Mediterranean, supposed to be the Margis of Ptolemy. 8 Vera, on the same shore, the furthest Town of Baetica, and of this Country towards Murcia. 9 Malaga, or Malaca, situate at the mouth of Guadalquivir, once sacked by Crassus the rich Roman; Who flying out of Spain, to avoid the fury of Marius and Cinna, who had slain his Father and Uncle, hid himself and his Companions in a Cave hereabouts for eight months together: but after hearing of their deaths, issued out, and ransacked, amongst many other Cities, this Malaga. A Town of great traffic, and much resort, especially for Raisins, Almonds, Malaga Sacks: well fortified, and of great importance, as a Town of War; and to the great prejudice of the Moors taken by Ferdinand the Catholic, Anno 1487. the conquest of the whole kingdom of Granada following not long after. It was since made a Bishops See, or restored rather to that dignity which it had of old. 10 Almeria, a noted haven on the Mediterranean, the Abdera of Mela, a Colony of the Carthaginians, and anciently a Bishops See.  
As for the fortunes of this Country, after the Conquest of it by the Moors and Saracens, it was a part or member of the kingdom of Corduba, and so continued till that kingdom was subdued by the Spaniards: But the Moors were too stout to yield all at once. Having yet ground enough both to secure themselves in, and endow their King: they are resolved, though they had lost one kingdom, to erect another. And therefore Corduba being taken, and that kingdom ruinated, the Moors, with Mahomet Aben Alhamar their unfortunate, but valiant King, removed themselves unto Granada, and there renew their strength and kingdom, which lasted 256 years, under 20 Kings, whose names here follow in this Catalogue of 

The Kings of Granada.  
1236. 1 Mahomet Alcamir, the last King of Corduba, and the first King of Granada. 36.  
1272. 2 Mahomet Mir Almir. 30.  
1302. 3 Mahomet Aben Ezar. 7.  
1309. 4 Mahomet Aben Evar. 10.  
1319. 5 Ishmael. 3.  
1322. 6 Mahomet. 12.  
1334. 7 Joseph Aben Amet. 20.  
1354. 8 Mahomet Lagus. 23.  
1377. 9 Mahomet Vermilion. 2.  
1379. 10 Mahomet Guadix. 13.  
1392. 11 joseph II. 4:  
1396. 12 Mahomet Aben Balva. 11.  
1407. 13 joseph III. 16.  
1423. 14 Mahomet Aben Azar. 4.  
1427. 15 Mahomet the little. 5.  
1432. 16 joseph Aben Almud. 13.  
1445. 17 17 Mahomet Osmen. 8.  
1453. 18 Ishmael II. 9  
1462. 19 Muley Alboacen. 16.  
1478. 20 Mahomet Boabdelin, The last King of the Moors in Spain. Of all which there is little left upon Record, their whole time being spent in defending their borders against the encroachments of Castille; or else in Civil Wars and discords amongst themselves; in which they were so freqnent, and sometimes so violent, as if they had no Enemy near them. Mahomet Aben Ezar the 4th King, deposed by Mahomet Aben Levin, and he again thrust out by Ishmael the Son of Ferrachen, before he could enjoy the fruits of his treason. Mahomet, Son of Ishmael, murdered by his Subjects; ●oseph, the Son of Mahomet slain by Mahomet Lagus; and he again deposed by Mahomet Vermilion, who in the end was miserably slain by Pedro the Cruel of Castille, to whom he had fled for help and succour. After this time they ruined and deposed one another, till the end of their kingdom, the Successor never staying for the death of his Predecessor, but violently making way for himself to enter on the Government: even Mahomet Boabd●lin the last King hereof, not having patience to expect the death of his Father; but setting him besides the Throne, and thereby opening a fair Gate for Ferdinand, King of Castil● and Arragon, to bring in his Forces, to the subduing of them both. Such was the fortune of this kingdom, that as it began under a Mahomet, a Ftrdinand being King of Cast●le: so it ended under a Mahomet, a Ferdinand being King of Castille also. In the tenth year then of this man's Reign, did the war begin, and about the year 1492, the Empire of the Moors ended in Spain; by the valour of Ferdinand the Catholic, and Isabel his Wife; after their first entrance into it, more than 760 years.    
Such of them, as after the decay of their kingdom had a desire to stay in Spain, which had for so long time been their native Country, were suffered so to do by the prudent Victors, (fearing a desolation of the Country, if they should abandon it) conditioned that they would be ●hrist●ned. And that they might be known to be as they professed, the juquisition was ordained, consisting of a certain number of Dom●nican Friars; who finding any counterfeit, or Apostate Christian●, were first gently to reprove and exhort them; and after, if no amendment followed, to inflict some punishment upon them. This custom in itself, was wondrous tolerable and laudable: but from the Moors it was after turned on the Protestants, and that with such violence and extremity of torture, that it is counted the greatest tyranny and severest kind of persecution under Heaven. Insomuch, that many Papists who would willingly die for their Religion, abhor the very name and mention of it; and to the death, withstand the bringing in of this slavery among them. This is it that made the people of Arragon, and Naples rebel, Countries where the people are all of the Papal side: and this was it which caused the irremediable revolt of the Low-countries; the greatest part of that Nation at the time of their taking Arms, being Romish Catholics. Yet is it planted and established in Spain, and all Italy, (Naples and Venice excepted) the managing thereof committed to the most zealous, fiery, and rigorous Friars in the whole pack. The least suspicion of heresy, affinity, or commerce with Heretics, reproving the lives of the Clergy, keeping any books or Editions of books prohibited, or discoursing in matters of Religion, are offences sufficient. Nay they will charge men's consciences under pain of damnation, to detect their nearest and dearest friends, if they do but suspect them to be herein culpable. Their proceedings are with great secrecy and security: for 1. the parties accused, shall never know their Accuser, but shall be constrained to reveal their own thoughts and affections. 2. If they be but convinced of any error in any of their opinions, or be gainsayed by two witnesses, they are immediately condemned. 3. If nothing can be proved against them, yet shall they with infinite tortures and miseries be kept in the house divers years, for a terror to others: and 4. If they escape the first brunt with many torments, and much anguish, yet the second questioning or suspicion brings death remediless. And as for torments and kinds of death, Phalaris and his Fellow-tyrants come far short of these-blood-hounds.  
The Administration of this Office, for the more orderly Reglement and dispatch thereof, distributed into twelve Courts, or Supreme Tribunals, for the several Provinces of S●ain; no one depending on another; in which those of the Secular Clergy sit as judges; the Friars being only used as Promoters to inform the Court, and bring more Grist unto the Mill. Of those Inquisitors every one hath the Title of Lord, and are a great terror to the neighbouring Peasants. I here goeth a Tale how one of their Lordship's desirous to eat of the Pears which grew in a poor man's Orchard not far off, sent for the man to come unto him; which put the poor soul into such a fright, that he fell sick upon it, and kept his bed. Being afterwards informed, that all his Lordship's business with him, was to request a Dish of his Pears, he pulled the tree up by the roots▪ and carried it unto him with the Fruit upon it. And when he was demanded the reason of that rash and improvident action, he returned this Answer, that he would never keep that thi●● in his house, which should give any of their Lordship's cause to send further after him. Certain it is, that by this means the people of this kingdom are so kept under, that they dare not hearken after any other Religion, than what their Priests and Friars shall be pleased to teach them, or entertain the truth if it come amongst them, or call in question any of those palpable and gross ●mpostures, which every day are put upon them.  
But to return unto the Moors, most of which by the terror of this Inquisition, pro●●ssed in show the Christian Faith. But being Christians only in the outward show, and practising on all occasions against the State, the Kings of Spain resolved long ago on their Extermination; but never had opportunity to effect it, till the year 1609. At what time Philip the third having made a peace with England, and a truce with Holland; and finding the Moors of afric 〈…〉 in wars, that they were not able to disturb him; put that extreme rigour in execution, which had before been thought of in their consultations, 1100000 of them being forced to quit this 〈◊〉, and provide new dwellings, under colour that they went about to free themselves from the 〈◊〉, and to recover their old Liberty lost so long before.  
The Forces which the Kings of Granada in the times of their greatest power were able to 〈◊〉, were far beyond the Ameasurement and extent of their kingdom, not above 700 miles in 〈◊〉, as before is said: but so exceeding populous, and well accommodated withal manner 〈◊〉 necessaries, that within two day's space, the King hereof was able to draw 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Horse, 
Murcia, & Toledo.  and 200000 Foot, for defence of the Kingdom. The Arms whereof were Or, a Pomegranate (or Apple of Granada) slipped, Vert.   

8 MURCIA.  
MURCIA is bounded on the West, with Granada; on the East, with Valentia; on the North, with Valentia; and a part of Granada; and on the South, with the Mediterranean Seas, so called from Murcia the chief City. In former times esteemed a rich and wealthy Country, stored with all sorts of fruits, and so abounding in Silver Mines, that when the Romans were Lords of it, they kept continually 400 men at work, and received 2500 Drachmas of daily profit: now for the most part barren, and but ill inhabited.  
Cities of note there are not many in so small a Country. The principal, 1 Murcia, by Ptolomi● called Men●al●a, seated upon the River Segura, a Bishops See, situate in a pleasant and delightful Plain, planted with Pomgranats, and other excellent fruits: From this the Country had the name of the Kingdom of Murcia. 2 Carthagena, or Nova Carthago, first built by Asd●ubal of Carthage, the Brother of Annibal, for the better receiving of such aids, both of men and money, as should come from Africa. Situate in a Demi-Iland, in the very jaws of the Mediterranean; by which, and by a deep Marish on the West side of it, so impregnably fortified, that if Scipi●, afterwards called Asricanus, who then lay at the siege thereof, had not been showed a way over that Marish, at a dead low▪ Water, by some poor Fishermen of Tarragon, who knew the secret, he had there lost both his time and Honour. Nothing more memorable, in the sackage and spoil thereof, (though there was found abundance of Arms and Treasure) than the virtue of Scipio, who finding there many Spanish Ladies of great birth, and beauties, left there as Hostages for the Spaniards with the Carthaginians, would not permit any of them to be brought before him; for fear it should betray him to some inconvenience. Being re-edified it was made a Roman Colony, and one of the seven juridical Resorts of Tarraconensi●: by Constantine made a chief City of the new Province of Carthaginensis, which was hence denominated: Afterwards twice sacked by the Goths and Vandals, it lay for a long time buried in its own ruins. And though again new built and peopled, it is still but small; containing at the most but 600 Households: and would be utterly abandoned, but for the safety of the place, and the strength thereof, garrisoned, and fortified very strongly by King Philip the 2d, for fear of surprisal by the Tnrks; and the security of the Haven (which is withal very large and capacious) coming from a little Island, lying at the mouth thereof; by which assured from tempestuous winds, and the violent ragings of the Sea. Hence the occasion of that Saying of Andreas Doria, Admiral unto Charles the fifth, that there were but three safe Ports in the Mediterranean; that is to say, August, july, and the Carthagena: meaning as I conceive, that those two months being commonly free from tempestuous weather, were of as great safety to the Mariners, as this famous Port. 3. Lorca, another Port Town, situate on a Creek more within the Land. 4 Almanca, 5 Sar●zal, two strong Towns bordering on Valentia; well fortified, when Murcia and Valentia were in several hands. 6 C●rvillan. 7 Alhama. 8 Rus, etc.  
This Country being part of the Province of Carthaginensis, was by the Alani taken from the Roman●, at their first entrance into Spain; from them recovered by Wallia, the first King of the Goths in this part of Europe. Together with the rest of Spain, it was subdued by the Moors of afric; in the distractions of whose Empire after the going hence of the Moors of afric, it was made a distinct Kingdom by Aben-Hut, of the race of the Kings of Saragossa, who had seized upon it▪ Anno 1228, and for a time was the most puissant King of the Moors in Spain, commanding over this Country Granada, and a great part of Andaluzia. Invited to a Feast, made drunk, and then basely murdered by Aben Arramin a false servant of his, Anno 1236, one Aben Hudiel seized on the Realm of Murcia, disturbed in his possession by Alboaquis, the last King hereof. But he not able to defend himself against his Competitor, surrendered it to Ferdinand the 2d of 〈◊〉, whom he put into possession of the Fort of Murcia, and many other places of great importance; conditioned, that Alboaquis should enjoy the title of King of Murcia, as long as he lived under the Sovereignty of Castille; and that Ferdinand should enjoy one half of the profits of it, this was in the year, 1241, after it had continued in the state of a Kingdoms, but 12. years only, united to Castille without blood or trouble, and so remains ever since.   

9 The Kingdom of TOLEDO.  
THe Kingdom of TOLEDO, so called from Toledo the chief City of it, contained once the greatest part of that Country which is now called New-Castile; of which it is now reckoned only for a part or Member. The Country lying next unto it was anciently the Seat of the Car●entani; the nature of the soil we shall find elsewhere.  
Principal Cities of this Kingdom, 1. Toledo, of great Antiquity, as being taken by Fulvius a Roman Praetor, in the time of Sci●io Africanus; and then a City of good note. Pleasantly seated on the ●a●us, beautified with many Pieces of rare and excellent Architecture; and fortified with 30 Towers standing on the walls. By reason of the situation of it in the very midst almost of Spain, it is passing well inhabited, as well by the Nobility, who reside there for pleasure, and by Scholar's, who abide in it for their studies; as by Merchants, who resort thither for the●r profit; besides, such Soldiers and their Officers, who are continually garrisoned in it for defence thereof. 
Castille.  The private buildings generally are but mean, and ordinary; though by far more handsome in the inside than the outside promiseth: most of them being furnish●ed with water from the River Tagus, conveyed into them by the admirable inventions of one james, a native of Cremona in the Dukedom of Milan. The Streets narrow, close▪ ●ly, and uneven, exceeding troublesome to walk or go upon, especially in slippery or dirty weather, by reason of its steep and uneven situation on the side of a Rocky hill: by which, and by the River which almost surrounds it, it is naturally very strong, and well helped by Art. For that cause made the seat of the Gothish Kings: by one of which called Bamba, so repaired and beautified (besides the addition of a strong Wall for defence of the place) that he is by some accounted for the sounder of it. For so we find it in these old verses.  
E●●xit (fautore Deo) Rex inclytus Vrbem  
Bamba, suae celebrem port endens Gentis honorem.  
That is to say, 
King Bamba (God assisting) raised this Town,  
Extending so the ancient Goths renown.   
When the Goths fell, it was in chief estimation amongst the Moors, and by them advanced unto the honour of a Kingdom; whereof more anon: but under both (as it continueth to this day) the See of an Archbishop, who is the Metropolitan of Spain, and Precedent for the most part of the Inquisition. His revenue answerable to his place; the greatest of any Clergyman in the Christian World, next to the Popes of Rome, as being estimated at 300000 Crowns per Annum. Finally, this City hath been honoured with no fewer than 18 national Councils, here holden in the time of the Goths, and is now a famous University for the study of the Civil and Canon Laws, and hath to this day the temporal Jurisdiction over 17 walled Towns, besides Villages. 2 Cal●trava, the next Town of note, is situate on the River Ava, of most fame in these latter times for an Order of Knights, called the Knights of Calatrava; of which more when we come to Castille. Neighboured by the ruins of the strong and Famous City Castulo, which being under the command of the Romans, was by the Gyresoeny, a people that dwelled on the other side of the River, suddenly entered, and taken. But Sertorius following after them by the same Gate, put them all to Sword: and causing his men to apparel themselves in the clothes of the Enemy, led them to the chief City of the Gyresoeni; who supposing them to be their own party, opened their Gates, and were all either slain or sold for slaves. More of this Town anon when we come to Castille; to which belonging now. 3 Talbora, commonly called Talvera de la Reyna, or the Queens Talvera: and called so occasion of an execrable murder committed there by the command of Queen Mary, the Widow of Alfonso the sixth, on the Lady Leonore de Guzman her husband's Paramour. A proper and neat Town it is, pleasantly seated on the Tagus; supposed to be the Libora of Ptolemy; and now belonging to the Archbishop of Toledo, as chief Lord thereof.  
As for Toledo itself, in the time of the Romans it was the Metropolis of the Province of Tarraconensis, after that the seat Royal of the Gothith Kings; removed hither from Tholouse in Languedo●: forced by the Moors at their first entrance into Spain Anno 716. more prudently aiming at the head, than the Goths possibly expected from such Barbarians. In the Confusions of that Kingdom betwixt the beginning of the reign of Mahomet the fourth, and the second coming in of the Moors of afric, made a distinct Kingdom of itself, continuing in that estate, till taken from Haia Alcadu●●ir the last King hereof, by Alfonso the first, King of Castille, Anno 1083. This Alfonso being the younger Son of Ferdinand, the first King of Castille and Leon, had the Kingdom of Leon for his part. Ejected out of that by his Brother Sanctio King of Castille, he lived in Exile with the Moors, kindly received and entertained by this Hya●a King of Toledo. till the death of his Brother. After which coming to the Crowns of Castille and Leon Anno 1073. he picked a quarrel with his Host, and besieged Toledo, his long abode there making him acquainted with all advantages that might facilitate his designs: which notwithstanding held him a siege of five years, before he could make himself Master of it: by him incorporated presently on the taking of it, with the rest of that Kingdom, and made the head of New Castille.  
The Arms hereof are Azure, a Crown Mitral Imperial Or, garnished with sundry precious Gems Proper.   

10 CASTILLE.  
CASTILLE is bounded on the East with Navarre, Arragon, and part of Valentia; on the West with Portugal; on the North, with Biscay, Guipuscoa, and the Astu●ias; on the South, with Extremadura, Andeluzia, and Granada. The reason of the name we shall have anon.  
This was the most prevailing Kingdom of all this Continent, to which the rest are all united either by Marriages or Conquest. Divided commonly into the New and the Old, parted from one another by the hills of Segovia: the one being called the Old Castille, because it was the ancient Patrimony of the first Earls hereof; and the other named the New, from that addition which was made to the first inheritance, by the Conquest of the Realm of Toledo and other pieces from the Moors. The Old Castille is the less fruitful of the two, more fit for Pasturage than Corn; but better stored with that, and all sorts of fruits, than the Neighbouring Countries, which lie betwixt it and the Northern or Cantabrian Ocean: the New more plain and Champain, better stored with fruits, and furnished with sufficient plenty of Corn and other provisions necessary for the life of man. The Old Castille watered with the Rivers of 1 Relaunos, rising not far from Burgos; 2 Tormes, passing by Salamanca; 3 Duero, the Receptacle of the others: The New with 4 Xaruma, honoured with the Neighbourhood of Madrid; 5 Taevina, and 6 Tagus, the most famous River of all Spain.  
The Old Castille is situate on the North of the New, and hath for the chief Cities of it 1 So●ia, of great note in the ancient Story, by the name of Numantia, which for the space of fourteen years withstood the whole forces of Rome: During which time they valiantly repulsed their Enemies, and forced them to dishonourable Compositions. But finding at the last no hope of holding longer out, they gathered together all their Armour, Money, and goods, laid them in an heap, than set fire unto them, and finally burnt themselves in the midst of the flame; leaving Scipio (who had brought them to that extremity) nothing but the bare name of Numantia to adorn his triumph. 2 Avila, situate under the great Mountains which are called from hence the Mountains of Avila. Known anciently by the name of Abule, and by that name giving the title of Abulensis to the renowned Tostatus, who was Bishop of it. A Man, who in his time was Precedent to the Counsel to john, King of Arragon, yet could find leisure enough not only to attend his Episcopal charge, but to compile those learned and painful Commentaries on a great part of the Bible. Of which, and his other abilities (besides that which hath before been noted of him) we may take that Eulogy which Casaubon hath given him, in his Book against Baronius, saying, Laudo acumen viri, si in meliora incidisset Tempora Longè maximi. 3 Valadolid, a fine neat Town, and one of the ancientest Universities of Spain; discontinued for a time by Students, and then restored again by King Philip the 2d, whose birthplace it was, and who erected here a College (among others) for the education only of young English Fugitives. Seated upon the River Pisuerga, and one of the Chanceries of the Kingdoms of Castille and Leon. By means whereof, and of the King's Court here residing in the Summer times, it became in little space, a fair, large, populous City, and of great resort; not yielding unto any in Spain, except Lisbon and Sevill. It is called in Latin, Vallis oletum, and Vallis Oletana, from the abundance of Olives growing near it; but by Ptolemy, Pintia. 3 Segovia, a Bishops See, of great trade in clothing, situate under a branch of the Mountain Idubeda, called from hence the hills of Segovia. 4 Burgos, near the head of the River R●launos, or Relanzon, at the foot of the great Mountain a● Oca part of the Idubeda: built out of certain Villages lying hereabouts by Nugno Bellides, a Germane, Son-in-law unto one of the first Earls of Castille: for long time the seat of those Kings, since of the Archbishops hereof, the Cathedral being one of the fairest in Spain, built with such Art, that Mass may be sung aloud in five several Chapels, without disturbing one another. This City doth contend from Primacy and Precedency (in Civi ' matters) with that of Toledo; of which it hath the first place or vote, in all Parliaments or Assemblies of the States of Castille. But yet to satisfy Toledo, the Controversy is still undecided, and was once finely taken up by one of the Ferdinand's, saying, that Burgos should first speak for itself, and then that he would speak for Toledo. Without the walls of this City is a famous Nunnery, called De las Huelgas, consisting of 150 Religious women, all of noble Houses. 5 Cividad R●drigo, a Bishops See, on the River Gada. 6 Zamora, a strong and well-built City, and a Bishops See, the Sentica of Ptolemy; situate on the River Duero, and now famous for the best Bagpipes. 7 Tordesillas, the Segisana of the Ancients. 8 Salamanca, the most famous University of Spain, especially for the study of the Civil and Canon Laws: first instituted by Ferdinand the 2d of Castille, Anno 1240. and by an Order of the Popes, together with Paris, Oxford, and Bon●nia in Italy, created a Generale Studium, wherein there were to be Professors of the Greek, Hebrew, Chaldee, and Arabic Tongues, besides those of the Arts. It was of old called Salmantica, is now a Bishops See, situate on the River Tormes, as before was said.  
Not far from this City, about the times of our Grandfathers, was discovered in a Valley situate amongst high and impassable Mountains, a kind of Patoecos or Savage people, never heard of in Spain before. The occasion this. An Hawk of the Duke of Alva's which he very much valued, flew over those Mountains: and his men not being able to find her at first, they were sent back by the Duke to seek her. Clambering from one hill to another, they happened at last upon a large and pleasant Valley, where they spied a company of naked Savage people, hemmed in amongst many craggy Rocks. The Savages gazing a while upon them ran into their Caves, made in the hollows of the Rocks, the best houses they had: Which being observed by the Falconers, they returned again unto their Lord, telling him, that instead of a Falcon, they had brought him news of a New World in the midst of Spain, and of a race of People which came in with Tubal. Strongly affirming what they said, they obtained belief. And the Duke shortly after went with a Company of Musketeers, and subdued them easily, they having no offensive Weapons but only Slings. They worshipped the Sun and Moon, fed upon nothing that had Life; but had good store of excellent fruits, roots, and springs of water, wherewith Nature was very well contented. And though their language was not altogether understood by any; yet many of their words were found to be purely Basquish. Reduced on this discovery unto Christianity; but easily discernible from all other 〈◊〉, by their tawny complexions, occasioned by the reverberation of the Sunbeams from those rocky Mountains, wherewith on all sides they are encompassed. The truth hereof, besides the Credit of james Howell in his Instructions for Foreign Travel, I have, upon enquiry, found to be attested by men of gravity and great place in this Realm of England, employed there in affairs of public interess. Satisfied therefore in the truth of the Relation, I am partly satisfied in the men. Whom I conceive to be some remnant of the ancient Spaniards, who h●d themselves amongst these Mountains for fear of the Romans. Their language and Idolatry speak them to be such. For had they either fled from the Goths or Moors, there had been found some Cross or other Monument of Christianity, as in other places; or some such mixture in their speech, as would have favoured somewhat of the Goths or Romans. But it is time I should proceed.  
NEW CASTILLE is situate on the South of the old. The chief Cities there, 1 Signe●ca, a City heretofore of the Celt●b●ri, now a Bishops See, beautified with a fair Cathedral; supposed to be the Condabora of Ptolemy. 2 Madrid, upon the Gu●darama, now the seat of the Kings; whose residence there, though the Country be neither rich nor pleasant, hath made it of a Village the most populous City in all Spain. It is a custom in this Town, that all the upper Rooms in their houses do belong to the King, except some Composition be made with him for them. And of this Town the Spaniards do use to brag to Strangers, that they have a City walled with Fire; and then make good the boast by saying, That it is situate in the midst of Quarries of Flint. 3 Alcala de Henares (of old called Complutum) renowned for an University of Divines, ●ounded here in the time of Ferdinand the Catholic, by Francisco de Ximines, Cardinal and Archbishop of toledo. 4 Alcaraz, amongst the mountainous tracts of Or●speda, called Sierra de Alcaraz; memorable for a great discomfiture given unto the Moors, Anno 1094. 5 Molina, in the same mountainous tract, hence called Monte de Molina; remarkable for giving the title of Lord to the Kings of Castille, who in the Regal stile are called Lords of Molina: the signory hereof accrueing to that Crown by the marriage of Sancho the 3d with Mary the Daughter of Alfonso the last Lord Proprietary. The Territory large, and the Town of strength●: well fortified in the times foregoing, both by art and nature. 6 Cuenca, seated at the spring head of the River Xucar, and not far from that of the Tagus also, amongst the Mountains of Orospeda, built by the Moors on the top of those craggy hills, whom it served for an impregnable Fortress against the Christians, till taken by Sancho the 2d of Castille, Anno 1177.  
Here also is the Escurial or Monastery of S. Laurence, built by King Philip the 2d. A place (saith Quade, who spendeth 13 pages in its description) of that magnificence, that no building in times past, or this present, is comparable to it. The front toward the West is adorned with three stately gates, the middlemost whereof leadeth into a most magnificent Temple; a Monastery in which are 150 Monks of the order of S. Jerome; and a College; that on the right hand openeth into divers offices, belonging to the Monastery; that on the le●t, unto Schools and outhouses, belonging to the College. At the four corners there are four turrets of excellent workmanship; and for height, majestical. Towards the North, is the King's Palace; on the South part, divers beautiful and sumptuous Galleries; and on the East side, sundry gardens and walks, very pleasing and delectable. It containeth in all 11 several quadrangles, every one encloistered; and is indeed so brave a structure, that a voyage into Spain were well employed, were it only to see it, and return. Here is also in this Tract the old Town of Castulo (the Casta●n of Strabo) than the chief City of the Carpentani, and the birthplace of Himilc● the Wife of Annibal, from whence this whole Tract had the name of Saltus Castul●nensis; and so called by Caesar: now a poor Village, known by the name of Castona la Veia; in which is somewhat to be found of the ancient ruins. But of this more already, when we were in the kingdom of Toledo; to which it more properly belonged.  
The old inhabitants of these Castile's were the Vaccai, Ventones, Arevacae, Oretani, Carpentani, Dittani, etc. From none of which the name of Castille can be deduced; so that we must fetch it either from the Castellani, once a People of Catalogne; or from some strong fortified Castles erected in the frontiers against the Moors. This last conjecture may seem probable, because the Arms of this Kingdom are Gules, a Castle triple-towred, Or. Neither is it any way strange for Provinces, especially smaller ones, such as at first this was, (though now much extended both in bounds and power) to take their names from a Castle. For (to go no farther) even with us, Richmondshire was so called from the Castle of Richmond, there built by Alan Earl of B●et●gne; and Flintshire took denomination from a Castle built of Flint-stones, by Henry the 2d. We may see hereby how much Celius Secund●●●urio was deceived, who writeth that Alphonso the third having overthrown Mahomet Enasirs King of Morocco, and put 60000 of his men to the sword; assumed these Arms that thus named this Kingdom, which was before called the kingdom of the Bastitanes; because that victory, like a strong Castle, had confirmed his estates unto him. Whereas, in case there were no other Error in his supposition; the Bastitanes were no Inhabitants of Castille, but of Valentia, and Murcia: Provinces far enough off from the Old Castille, at the first taking of that name. And for the former Etymology, it appeareth most evidently, in that the people are by the Latines called Castellani, the Country Castilia; the same name with those elder Castellani, which inhabited Catalogne. But not to stand upon the name, certain it is, that the Inhabitants here of having been conquered by the Romans, and made a part of their Empire, fell by degrees to the Alani, and from them to the Goths, as hath been shown already on some other occasion. From them extorted by the Moors with the rest of Spain, recovered foot after foot by the Kings of Leon: governed, under them, at first by Provincial Earls commanders of so many Castles in the Country of the Vacc●i, fortified and defended against the Moors. Ordogno the 2d harbouring some suspicions against these Earls, caused them all to be cruelly murdered. The people upon this revolted from the Crown of Leon, governed first by Judges, then by Earls again, as an absolute and free Estate. Ferdi●and G●nsales, the first that re-assumed the title of Earl of Castille, coming to the Court of Leon with a brave retinue, sold to King Sancho an Hawk, and an Horse, of excellent kinds, for a sum of money; conditioned, that if the money were not paid at the time agreed on, it should be doubled and redoubled, till the debt were satisfied. This money by the negligence of the King's Officers, who looked upon the contract as a matter of jest, became so great a sum, that the King, to satisfy Gonsales, made him the first Proprietary Earl of Castille, Anno 939. releasing that Estate from all acknowledgement to the Kings of Leon. Nugna, or Elvira, as some call her, Sister and Heir of Garcias the fourth Earl hereof, brought this Estate by marriage to Sancho, surnamed the Great, King of Navarre, Anno 1028. by whom it was erected into a kingdom, & given by him to Ferdinand his second Son. An. 1034. Kings of most note and observation in the course of their story, are, 1 Ferdinand their first King, who added Leon to his kingdom in right of Sancha his Wife, Sister and Heir of Veramund the last King thereof, of the race of Pelagius. 2 Alphonso the first, who subdued the Kingdom of Toledo, adding it by the name of New Castille, unto his Estate. 3 Alfonso the third, who conquered from the Crown of Navarre, whatsoever lay on the Castilian side of the River Ib●rus; and grew so great, that he caused himself to be solemnly Crowned Emperor of Spain, in the Cathedral Church of Leon, by the Archbishop of Toledo; and gave his Son Sancho the title of King of Castille in his own life time. 4 Alphonso the 3d, the chief of the Confederates against Mahom●t Enaser, the Miramomoline of Morocco, whom he vanquished in the famous battle of Murad●t, or S●erra Morena, Anno 1214. and added Alava and Guipuscoa to his other Estates. 5 Ferd●nand the third, who incorporated Leon and Castille into one Estate, and added the Kingdoms of Murcia, Corduba and Sevil, taken from the Moors, unto his Dominions. 6 Alfonso the fifth of Castille, and the ninth of Leon, elected Emperor of the Germans, but more famous for his eminence in Astronomy; the Author of the Alfonsine Tables. 7 Pedro the ●ruel, driven out of his Kingdom by Henry of Transtamare his Brother; restored again for a time by the valour of Edward the Black Prince, Son of Edward the third. 8 john, Son of Henry of Transtamare, who married his Son Henry to Catharine Daughter of john of Gaunt, by Constance one of the Daughters of Don Petro the Cruel, so uniting both titles into one. The times in which these Princes and the rest did reign, appeareth in these Catalogues of the Earls and Kings of Castille, which are these that follow.  

The Earls of Castille.  
A. Ch.  
910. 1 Ferdinand Gonsales, the first Proprietary Earl.  
932. 2 Garcias, Son of Ferdinand.  
980. 3 Sancho, or Sanctias, Son of Garcias.  
1018. 4 Garcias II. Son of Sancho, slain by Treason, without issue.  
1028 5 Nugna, or Elvira, the Sister of Garcias the second, married to Sancho King of Navarre, Father of Ferdinand, made by him the first King of Castille.   

The Kings of Castille.  
1036. 1 Ferdinand, King of Castille by the gift of his Father, and of Leon in right of his Wife. 33.  
1067. 2 Sancho, Son of Ferdinand, King of Castille only, his younger Brother Alfonso succeeding in Leon. 6.  
1073. 3 Alfonso, the Brother of Sancho, King of Leon, and afterwards of Castille also.  
1108. 4 Viraca, Queen of Castille and Leon. Alfonso II. King of Navarre and Arragon. 15.  
1122. 5 Alfonso III. King of Castille and Leon, the Son of Viraca, by Raymond of Burgundy her former Husband.  
1157. 6 Sancho II. the elder Son of Alfonso the third, his younger Brother Ferdinand succeeding in Leon. 2.  
1159. 7 Alfonso IU. Son of Sancho the second.  
1214. 8 Henry, Son of Alphonso the fourth.  
1217. 9 Ferdinand II. Son of Alphonso the ninth of Leon, and of Berenguela the Sister of Henry, succeeded his Father in Leon also, Anno 1230. the Kingdoms never since disjoined, though the title of Leon in short time became dis-continued.  
1252. 10 Alfonso V. Son of Ferdinand the second, King of Castille and Leon; and Emperor Elect. 32.  
1283. 11 Sancho III. the 2d Son of Alfonso the fifth, the children of Ferdinand de la Cerde, his elder Brother, being set besides. 12.  
1295. 12 Ferdinand III. of Castille, and IV. of Leon, Son of Sancho the third. 28.  
1312. 13 Alfonso VI Son of Ferdinand. 38.  
1350 14 Pedro, the Son of Alfonso, for his infinite Tyrannies surnamed the Cruel. 18.  
1368. 15 Henry II. the Bastard Son of Alfonso the sixth Earl of Transtam●re. II.  
1379. 16 John, the Son of Henry the second. II.  
1390. 17 Henry III. Son of john, and husband of Catharine the Daughter of john of Ga●nt and the Lady Constance, 
Castille.  one of the Daughters of King Pedro. 17.  
1406. 18 john II. Son of Henry and Catharine. 48.  
1454. 19 Henry IU. Son of john the second. 21.  
1475. 20 Isabel, Sister of Henry the fourth, married to Ferdinand V. Son of John King of Arragon. Of whose Acts and issue we will make more ample mention when we shall come to speak of the Monarchy of Spain, which began in them, and hath been since continued in their Posterity.   
The chief Orders of Knighthood within these Kingdoms of Castille and Leon, long since united into one, were three in all; partly Religious, partly Military; and one Order of Religious presons, not known in any Country but Spain alone.  
This of the last sort is called the Order of Mercy, or de la merced; the practice and profession of it to gather Alms amongst the People, wherewith to redeem such Christian Captives as either by Piracy, the chance of War, or by some other means are enthralled to the Turks and Moors: sending their Agents yearly to Algeers and Fez, to inform them of the state, age, and quality of each several Captive; and after on Instruction from the Brethren of this Society, to deal in the redemption of them. A business which they manage with great care and faithfulness, and are accordingly trusted with great sums of money given and collected to that end; few men here dying, who give not some legacy or other to this pious use. Nor are the Kings behind hand in so good a work, promoting it with a liberal purse, and giving as much ordinarily out of his Estate as the brethren have collected in all Spain besides. And to ●ay truth, it doth concern him more than others, because they are his Subjects chiefly for whose Redemption the whole sum is given and gathered: Religious pe●sons ransomed first, and then the Laiety; the young and serviceable men before old and impotent: if after the Redemption of the Spanish Captives they have any stock le●t, they keep it not till another year, but therewith ransom Captives of some other Nations. So that this seemeth to succeed in the place of the now antiquated and useless Orders of Knighthood, which were heretofore of great authority and power, that is to say,  
1 Of Calatrava, a Town of the kingdom of Toledo, abandoned by the Templars, to whom the defence thereof belonged, on the approach of the Moors; made good by Raymond the Abbot of Pisaria, and the Monks of Cisteaux. Anno 1157. For the future preservation and defence whereof, they ordained this Order, which in process of time grew to such estate, that besides 8 fair Priories, they enjoyed in Spain no less than 61 Towns and Castles. The Knights hereof do wear for their Habit, a White Robe with a Red Cross upon their breasts, confirmed by Pope Alexander the 3d. Anno 11●4. under the discipline of Cisteaux. Their residence is at Castle-●ovo, bound by their Order to serve in the Wars against the Infidels; upon which services they have been sometimes seen in the field with 300 great Horse.  
2 Of S. ●ago, instituted by the Canons of Eloy, and certain Gentlemen of Castille, in imitation of the Order of Calatrava, for the security and entertainment of Christian Pilgrims travelling to the Shrine of S. jago, confirmed by the said Pope Alexander the 3d, Anno 1175. under the Rule of St. Augustine. Their habit is a White Robe, with a Red Cross like a Sword: the companions of it according to the first founders being part Ecclesiastical and part Secular; whereof these last are only tied unto the vow of conjugal Chastity. They grew in little time unto such esteem, that besides two Colleges or Seminaries in Salamanca, and a College in Sevill, they had four Hermi●ages in the Mountains, and five Hospitals well endowed for the entertainment of Strangers, together with 90 Towns & Castles in several parts of the Kingdom. The whole number of Gentlemen, besides Friars serving in their Cures, and other Ministers, is above 600. Their first Residence, at the Hospital of S. Mark in the Suburbs of Leon; on a dislike with Ferdinand the second King of Leon removed to Ucles in Castille, bestowed upon them by Alfonso the 4th. Upon this occasion being divided, they have since two Masters, or Commendadors, the one called the Commendador of Leon, who resides at S. Marks, the other the Commendador of Castille, who resides at Ucles.  
3 Of Alcantara, a Town of Extremadura, defended by Ferdinand of Leon against the Moors, where he framed this Order, confirmed by Pope Lucio, Anno 1183. Others ascribe it to Alfonso, the Sucessor of that Ferdinand, Anno 1217. by whom endowed with all the Lands of the Ca●atravians in the Realm of Leon; but acknowledging the Superiority thereof, and under the same Rule of Cisteaux. Their device at first was a Pear-tree Vert, in a Field Or; to which hanged a pair of Shackles as a sign of their Subjection to them of Calatrava; Changed Anno 1411. to a White Robe, and a Green Cross on their Breasts.  
I omit the Order of the Dove and Reason, instituted by K. john of Castille, because of small esteem, and but short continuance. And so much for Castille, the first of those three greater Kingdoms of Spain, under which all the rest are now reduced, containing in this Continent all the Provinces and Estates before described, amounting to two third parts of the whole; and many large estates elsewhere, as shall be showed hereafter in its proper place. Pass we on next to Portugal, the second in repute of the said three kingdoms, 
Portugal,  not so much for the largeness of the Territories, which it had on the Continent, as for its great Appendices in all other parts of the World.   

11 The Kingdom of PORTUGAL.  
THe Kingdom of PORTUGAL containeth 1 Portugal itself; 2 Algarve, or Regnum Algarbiorum; and 3 the Terceras or Isles of Azores: these last not reckoned parts of Spain by any of our Writers either old or new; but made by us a part hereof, because situate over against Portugal, one of the first additions which was made unto it on the Ocean; and finally, because I know not under what other head to reduce them better.  
And first for PORTUGAL itself, it is bounded on the North, with the Rivers Minio and Avia, which part it from Gallïcia; on the South, with Algarve; on the West, with the Atlantic Ocean; and on the East, with the two Castile's and Extremadura; from which divided by a line drawn from Ribadania, standing on the Avia, to Badaios, on the Anas or Guadiana. Extended on the Sea-coast from North to South 400 miles; the breadth of it in the broadest place (not taking in the Lands into this Account) 100 miles, in the narrowest 80, the whole circumference 879 miles, and in that compass 1460 Parishes.  
It was first called Lusitania from the Lusitani, the chief Inhabitants thereof, and took the name of Portugal, either from the Haven or Port of Cale, now called Caia, sometimes a very rich and flourishing Emporie, or rather from the Haven Town of Porto, at the mouth of Duerus, where the Galls (or the French rather) used to land their Merchandise, which was therefore called Portus Gallorum, and which Town was given in Dower with Teresa, the Daughter of Alfonso the sixth, to Henry of Lorain, with the title of Earl of Portugal. Whose Successors coming to be Kings, extended this name to all those Countries which they got from the Moors, as it continueth at this day.  
The Air is very healthy, the Co●ntrey for the most part hilly and bare of Corn, supplied from France and other parts of the North; that which they have being as good as any in Europe, ●f not better. The soil and people in all places not rich alike. For where the soil is richest, as in the parts lying on the North of Duero, there the People are poorest, in regard of the great distance thereof from Lisbon, and so not benefited by the trading of that wealthy City. And where the soil is poorest, there the People be richest, helping themselves by trade and manufactures, especially by making of Silks, and Salt, sufficient for themselves, and for other Countries. But where there is a defect of Corn, that defect is otherwise sufficiently recompensed with abundance of Honey, Wine, Oil, Allom, Fruits, Fish, Salt, white Marble, and some Mines of Silver, etc.  
The people are of a more plain and simple behaviour than the rest of Spain; and (if we believe the old Proverb) none of the wisest: For whereas the Spaniards are said to seem wise, and yet to be Fools; the French to seem Fools, and yet to be wise; the Italians both to seem wise and to be so; the Portugals are affirmed to be neither wise indeed, nor so much as to seem so. But little different from which is the Spanish byword, which telleth us of the Portugals, that they are Pocos●y Locos, few and foolish; which others vary with the addition of another part of their Character; saying that they are Pocos, Sotos, y Devotos, few and foolish, but withal devout. They have great animosities (if it be not grown to an Antipathy) against the Castilians, for bereaving them of their Kingdom and Liberty, though both of late recovered by them: but when most Fools, were counted for good Seafaring men, and happy in the discovery of foreign Nations.  
Rivers it hath of all sorts, both great and small, almost 200. Those of most note, 1 Minius, full of red Lead, (from hence called Minium by the Latins) navigable with small Vessels 100 miles. 2 Lethes, now Lavada. 3 Muliadas, now Mondego. 4 Tagus. 5 Duerus, and 6 Anas; these three last common also to the rest of Spain: Anat, or Guadiana passing by Poriugal but for 7 Leagues only, Tagus for 18, and Duero for 80. None of them navigable for any long space by ships of burden; the Rivers of all Spain being generally swift of course, restrained within narrow Channels, banked on both sides with very steep Rocks, which make them incommodious for Navigation: Insomuch that it is reckoned for a great Prerogative of Tagus, and the Realm of Portugal, that this River is there navigable with great ships, 15 or 20 miles within the Continent. But here that want is somewhat tolerably supplied with 3 excellent Havens. 1 That of Lisbon upon ●agus, and 2 Porto on Duero, to the North of Lisbon, of which more anon; 3 of Setaval, South of Lisbon, situate on a Golf of 20 miles in length, and three in breadth; a place of principal importance to those parts of the Realm Rivers however of great fame, according to whose course the whole Country was divided by the Romans into Vlteriorem, lying beyond Duero North-wards; 2 Citeriorem, on the South of Tagus; and 3 Interamnem, betwixt both.  
Principal Cities of this part, 1 Lisbon, seated upon Tagus, a famous City for traffic, the Portugals in all their Navigations setting sail from hence. By the Latins called Olysippo, and Vlyssi●po, because as some say Ulysses built it. coming hither in the course of his ten year's travel▪ a thing merely fabulous, it being no where found, that Ulysses did ever see the Ocean. But like enough it is, that this Town being seated conveniently for Navigation, and inhabited by Seafaring me●, might at the first be consecrated to the memory of so great a Traveller; as Athens being a place of Learning was dedicated to Minerva, whom the Greeks call Athen●. It is in compass seven miles, and containeth upwards of 30 Parishes, and in them 20000 houses, 
AZORES.  all of neat and elegant building, Turrets, and Towers it numbereth upon the walls about 76. Gates towards the Seashore 22. And towards the Continent, situate upon five small Hills, betwixt which is a valley which runs down to the River: on the highest Hill an ancient Castle, not strong, but by reason of the situation, serving now only for a Prison for men of quality; the entry of the River, being defended by the Castle of Cascais, and nearer to the City by the Fort of S. Iu●ians, and the Rock of Belem munitioned with 20. Pieces of Ordinance. This City heretofore was honoured with the Seat of the Kings, since of the Vice-Roys; an Archbishops See, the Staple of commodities for all the Kingdom, and thought to be more worth than the whole Realm besides: said by some French Writers to be the best peopled City in Christendom, next unto Paris; and by B●tero an Italian, made to be the 4th Mart Town of Europe; the other three being constantinople, Paris, Moscow: in which they do great wrong to London, as populous and well-traded as the best them all. 2 Santare●, on the Tagus, so called from S. Iren●, a Nun of Tomar, (a Monastery, in which the old Kings of Portugal did use to be crowned) here martyred by the Moors; by Ptolemy called Scabaliscus, than a Roman Colony. 3 Si●tra, upon the main A●●lantick, at the end of the huge Mountains, called Montes Lunae; whither by reason of the cool refresh from the Sea, and pleasure of the Woods adjoining, the Kings of Portugal used to retire in the heats of Summer. 4 Conimbre, on both sides the River Mondego, pleasantly seated amongst Vineyards and Woods of Olives; a Bishops See, and an University; the Masters whereof made the Commentary on most part of Aristotle, called from hence Schola Conimbricensis. Then on the North of the River Duero, betwixt that and Minio, are 5. Braga, by Ptolom●e called Bracaria Augusta, reckoned by Antonine for one of the four chief Cities in Spain; the Royal Seat when time was, of the Suevian Kings, and now the See of an Archbishop, contending for the Primacy with him of Toledo. 6 Porto, the Haven of the Galls, on the mouth of Duero. 7 Miranda, a Bishops See on the same River. 8 Bragance, the Duke whereof is so great a Prince, that it is thought a third part of the people of Portugal are his Vassals, and live on his Lands; the later Dukes, since the time of King Emanuel being withal of the Royal blood: two steps of main advantage to the Regal Throne, lately ascended and obtained by john, Duke of Bragance, now called John the 4th. And finally on the South of Tagus, betwixt that and the Kingdom of Algarba, there is 9 Ebora, in the midst of a large and spacious Plain, an Archbishops See, and an University, this last of the foundation of King Henry the Cardinal. 10 Portilegre a Bishops See. 11 Olivenca on the Guadiana. 12 Be●●, by Pliny called Pax●lulia.  
2 The Kingdom of ALGARVE, lieth on the South of Portugal, from which divided by a line drawn from Ascorin on the western Sea, to Odechere a Castle on the Guadiana; on the East bounded by Andaluzia, on the West and South by the Main Atlantic. This the most wild and desert part of all this Kingdom; barren and dry; peopled with few Towns, nor those very populous; hilly and Mountainous withal, but yielding by the benefit of the Sea a great trade of fishing, of Tunny specially, whereof more caught upon this coast than in all the Kingdom.  
The name it took from the Western situation of it, for so the word Algarve signifieth in the Arabic tongue. The utmost end of it called anciently Prom●ntorium Sacrum, now the Cape of S. Vincent, because the Bones of S. Vincent religiously preserved by the Christians, were here burnt and scattered about by the Moors. Places of most importance it in, 1 Silvis an Episcopal See. seated in the inland parts. 2 Villanova, situate beyond the Cape. 3 Tavila, the Balsa, and 4 Faro, the Ossonoba of Ptolemy; both noted Ports on the Atlantic. 5 Lagos, an other Haven Town also.  
This Country conquered by the Moors with the rest of Spain, and from them again recovered by the Kings of Leon, remained a Member of that Crown: till by Alfonso the tenth of that name in Leon, and the fifth in Castille, it was given in dowry with Beatrix his Daughter, to Alfonso the third of Portugal. From which marriage issued Dionysius or Denys King of Portugal, the first that ever used the title of Rex Algarbiorum, Anno 1274.  
3 THE AZORES, are certain Islands lying in the Atlantic Ocean, oposite to the City of Lisbon, from which distant but 250 Leagues. Situate betwixt the 38 and 40 degrees of the Northern Latitude, and one of them in the first Longitude, which is commonly reckoned from these Islands; as being the most Western part of the World, before the discovery of America.  
They were thus called from the multitude of Gos-hawkes which were found there in the beginning (the word Azor in the Spanish tongue signifying a Goshawk) though at this time there are none of them to be found. Called also the Flemish Islands, because first discovered by the Flemings, and the great numbers of them in the Isle of Faial (one of the chief of all the pack) where there are yet some Fawilies which resemble the Flemings both in their complexion and habit; and not far from the place of their abode a Torrent, which the Spaniards call Riberados Flamengos, or the River of Flemings. They are also called the Terceras from Tercera the chief Isle among them.  
The Air of those Islands is generally good and subject unto few diseases, except that which the Portugals call the Blood, being an impostumation of the blood breaking out at the Eyes or other parts of the Body. Some other inconveniences they are subject to, proceeding from the humidity of the place, 
AZORES.  the great winds and storms, of such a violent and strange kind of working, that bars of Iron as big as a man's arm, have in six years been worn as little as a Straw. All of them well stored with Flesh, Fish, and other things necessary, except Salt and Oil, with which they are furnished out of Portugal. Wines they have also for their own use, but not to be transported far, because of their weakness: for which cause also, the richer men provide themselves of Canary Wines, or those of the Island of Madera. Of like nature is their Wheat, and other fruits, which hold not good above a year. All of them subject unto Earthquakes, and some to breathe out of fire; which continually sendeth forth fuming vapours. The chief commodities which they tranport unto other Countries, are Canary birds for Ladies, Oad for the Dyer's, joyners-work which they sell to the Spaniards, and Beefs for the victualling of such Ships as come there to be victualled.  
The Inhabitants are generally Laborious, excellent husbands on their grounds, insomuch as they make Vines to grow out of Rocks; much given to joy nery, by which they make many pretty fancies, much esteemed by the Spaniards; but not so expert at it as those of Nuremberg. They take great pains to teach their cattle understanding; the Oxen being taught to know when their Master calleth them. In other things they conform to the Portugals, both in their customs and apparel; but with some smattering of the Fleming, which Nation they affect above any other.  
The Islands nine in number, and distinguished by the several names of, 1 Tercera, 2 S. Michael, 3 Fayal, 4 Gratiosa, 5 S. George, 6. Pico, 7 Corvo, 8 Flores, and 9 S. mary's, of which S. michael's and St. Mary's lie next to Spain; Tercera on the North-West of those; (by consequence the third in order, whence it had the name;) S. Georges, Gratiosa, Pico, Fayal, on the West of that; and finally those of Corvo and Flores, nearest to America.  
1 TERCERA, the chief of all the rest, 18 miles in compass, well stored with Peaches, Apples, Lemons, Oranges: and for the Kitchen, with Turnips, Cabbages, plenty of Potherbs, and as good Batato-rootes (which are the best food the people have) as any be in the World, but more esteemed in Portugal than they be in this Island, by reason of their great abundance. Here is also great quantity of the best kind of Woad, (which from hence is called Iland-Woad) and a Plant about the height of a man, which bears no Fruit, but hath a Root as profitable as those that do: out of which the People draw a thin and tender film, wherewith they fill their mistresses instead of Feathers. Fowl enough for the use of man, and yet none of prey. No Port of any safety in it but that of Angra; and that made safe by Art, and not by Nature: the whole begirt with Rocks, which stick out like a pointed Diamond, able to pierce the feet of any who shall venture over them. Places of most importance in it, 1 Pray, on the Sea side, well-walled, but not very well peopled. 2 S. Barbara, 3 S. Sebastian's, 4 Gualne, and 5 Villa nova, Burroughs of good note. 6 Angra, the chief not of this Island only, but of all the nine; the Residence of the Governor, and an Archbishops See, who hath in it his Cathedral Church. Seated on a convenient Bay made in the form of a Crescent, with two Promontories on each side (like the two horns of a halfmoon) bearing into the Sea; each fortified with a strong Castle for defence of the Haven, the Town itself also well-walled about, and environed with sharp Rocks on all sides. Both Town and Castles well garrisoned, and no less diligently guarded. This in regard of its great strength, and commodious Haven, is esteemed the principal of these Lands, and communicates its name unto all the rest: though neither nearest unto Spain, nor the greatest in compass.  
2 S. mary's, so called from the Saint (as S. George's and S. Michael's are) unto which it is dedicated; is the most Southern of these Isles, and the next to Spain: twelve miles in circuit, inhabited by Spaniards only, and those much given unto the making of Earthen vessels. So naturally fenced with Rocks, that it is, and may be easily kept by the Inhabitants, without the charge of a Garrison. The chief Town of it hath the name of St. Mary's also, which it either giveth unto the Island, or borroweth from it.  
3 S. michael's, directly North of S. Mary's, from which little distant, the biggest in the whole pack, as being 20 miles in length, though the breadth not answerable: much subject unto Earthquakes and fiery vapours. Of most note amongst our modern Geographers, who have removed hither the first Meridian (by which they divide the World into East and West) from the Canaries or Fortunate Lands, were it was fixed in the time of Ptolemy, and others of the ancient Writers.  
And this remove seems countenanced even by Nature itself, it being observed that the Compass when it cometh under the Meridian drawn through this Isle, hath little or no Variation at all, but pointeth almost directly towards the North; whereas in all other places or less Meridian's, East, and West, it pointeth not so directly North, but more or less to the North-east, or the Northwest, which the Mariners call the Variation, or the North-easting and the North-westing of the Compass. And yet it is observed of late, that there is some more sensible variation of it in this Isle of S. Michael, than in that of Corvo: which therefore is conceived more fit for this first Meridian.  
The chief Town hereof, besides many Burroughs and lesser Hamlets, Punta del Gada, seated upon a dangerous Sea, and without any Port, yet more frequented by Strangers than the Port of Angra, because here they may go in and out as they please, but not so in the other.  
4 FAYALL, 17 or 18 miles in length, plentifully provided with all things necessary for the life of man, and well furnished with Woad, 
AZORES.  for which commodity much frequented by the Merchants of England▪ The chief Town of it Dorta, defended with a Castle, and that guarded by Spaniaras; both Town and Island taken by Sir Waelter Ra●e●h, Anno 1597. This Action was called the Island-voyage, undertaken as well to divert the War which the Spaniards threatened to bring to our own doors; as by seizing some of these Lands to intercept the Spanish Fleets in their return, and to hinder them in their setting out: by which means, wanting their Indian gold, they might be brought to better terms with their neighbour Nations. And though the English were not able to hold it long. yet it was said, that the booty got in this Expedition, amounted to 400000 Crowns, besides the honour of beating the Spaniard upon his own ground. It took this name from its abundance of Beech's.  
5 GRATIOSA, not above five or six Leagues in compass; but so well furnished with fruits, that they send much yearly to Tercera; inhabited by Portugal's only, but so poor, that they are not able to bear the charge of a Garrison. The chief Town of it called La Plaia.  
6 S. GEORGE'S, twelve miles long, about three in breadth, mountainous and full of Forests, but those Forests so well stored with Cedars, that they use them many times for shipping, and sometimes for Fewell. The chief Town of it called S. George's, as the Island is.  
7 PICO, lieth on the South of the Isle of S. George, and took this name from an high Hill in the form of a Pyramid, which the Portugals generally call a Pick, or Pico. Replenished with fruits, some Cedars, and a Tree called Teixo, of great bulk, and as much beauty: the wood thereof exceeding hard, red within and waved; so admirably beautiful that it is allowed only to the King's Officers, the other Subjects being interdicted the use of it (but on special licence) by a public Edict. In bigness it is second only unto that of S. Michael, if not equal to it; hardly so much in length, but of greater breadth. The chief Towns of it, 1 S. Sebastian's, 2 Callo●a de Nesquin, both upon the Sea, and in the East parts of the Island.  
8 FLORES, directly East from Fayall, so called from its abundance of Flowers, (as Gratiosa from the like flourishing Verdure of it) is in compass not above 8 miles, but plentifully furnished with cattle and good grounds to feed them. The chief Town of it, Santa Crux. The Isle (though small,) yet twice as big as the Isle of 9 CORVO, so called from its abundance of Crows, situate on the North hereof, and but little distant: both very unsafe, and both most miserably poor, by reason of the many Pirates which lie betwixt them, to intercept such ships as trade towards America. But this, though much smaller than the others, may in time be ofmore esteem than any of them: in regard it is conceived to be the most natural place for the first Meridian; as before was noted: the Needle here pointing directly to the North, without Variation. Which whether it proceed from some secret inclination of the Loadstone to the part of the World, more in this place than any other; or that being situate betwixt the two great Continents of Europe and America, it is drawn equally towards both, by the magnetical virtue of the Earth itself: I leave to be disputed by more able judgements.  
These Lands were first discovered and subdued by the Portugals, under the conduct, or by the direction of Prince Henry, Son of John the first, who first made the Portugals in love with the Seas. And they were also the last members of the Crown of Portugal which held out for Don Antonio the Bastard, against Philip the second of Castille; against whom the Island of Terce●a was for a while gallantly defended by Emanuel de Silua, with the help of the French; but taken at the last by the Marquis of Santa Cruz, and the French, after promise of life, cruelly murdered in cold blood. After which, garrisoned at the first by none but Por●ugals. But upon some commotion happening in that Kingdom, it was thought fit, on some reason of State, to make sure of the best Lands by Spanish Garrisons; which accordingly were put into the Castles of Angra, in Tercera; and the Towns of Punta del Gada, in S. Michael's; and Dorta, in Fayall. And to say truth, the Spaniards had good reason to be careful of them, these Lands being of such importance as without them the Navigation of the Indies, Aethiopia, Brasil, and New Spain, could not be continued: because the Fleets which come from those Countries to Lisbon or Sevill, must in a manner of necessity touch upon some of them, as well in following their course if they come from the West, as in recovering such winds as are useful to them, if they come from ●he East.  
But to return again to the main Land of Portug●l; know, that the ancient Inhabitants of it were the Lusitani, dwelling betwixt Tagus and Duerus, the old Lusitania being bounded within those Rivers; the Celtici and Turditani, who took up also some part of Betica, dwelling on the South of Tagus; and the Gallaici B●acarii (so called to difference them from the Galla●ci Lucenses who possessed Gallicia) on the North of Duerus. Subjected first unto the Romans, by whom accounted one of the three parts of Spain. In the declining of their Empire conquered by the Alani, and from them taken by the Suevians, who for a time made the City of Braga the Royal seat of their Kings. The Suevians lost it to the Goths, and the Goths to the Moors, as hath been shown already in their several stories. Recovered in part by the Kings of Leon; to whom that part continued subject, till given by Alphonso the sixth of Leon in dowry with his Ba●le Daughter Terasa, to Henry of Lorraine, whose virtue and good service merited no less reward, Anno 1099, who having fortunately governed it by the title of an Earl for the space of 12 years, left his Son Alfonso, Heir both to his Fortunes and Virtues, honoured with the title of King of Portugal by the Sovereigns of Leon, for his most gallant demeanour shown in the battle of Obrique, An. 1139. He had before the Assumption of the Regal Style ruled 27 years with a great deal of honour; and he reigned here 〈…〉, reverenced by his Friends, 
〈◊〉  and ●eared by his Enemies, 〈…〉 in the Chair of State was 72 years: a longer enjoying of 〈◊〉 〈…〉 the first beginning of the Roman Monarchy. His Successors we shall 〈…〉 Catalogue. But we must first tell you, as in other places of this Work, 〈…〉 in the whole succession, are, 1 Henry of Lorraine (whom some make a 〈…〉) who coming into Spa●n to the Holy Wars, and deserving nobly in the 〈◊〉, was honoured by Alfo●s● the sixth, with his Daughter Terasa and the Town of 〈◊〉 for her Dower, given to him with the title of Earl of Portugal. He extended his Estate as far 〈…〉 on the South of the River Duero; that River being before that time the utmost bound of it that way. 2. Alfonso the first King, who took Lisbon from the Moors, Anno 12.▪ 7 and made it the Seat of his Kingdom, which he extended southward as far as Algarve, 3. Alfoso the 3d, who partly by Conquest, and partly by Marriage, added Algarve to his Estate, get●●● it by the Sword, and confirming it to him by the Bed. 4 Alfonso the 4th, confederate with 〈…〉 name in Castil● against Alboacen the Mir●momolin of afric, at the fight 〈◊〉 the River ●alado, not ●ar from Ta●iff●; where they discomfited the vast Army of Moors, consi●●ing of 470●00 Horse and 〈◊〉. 5 john the first, the base Son of Pedro the first, setting aside the Lady 〈◊〉, Queen of Castille, the Daughter o● Ferdin●nd the first, and the lawful Children of his ●ather, being many in number: by force and colour of Election obtained the Kingdom. ●ortified it by 〈◊〉 marriage with the Lady ●●●lip, Daughter of john of Gaunt Duke of 〈◊〉; a strong Competitor at that time for the Crown of Castille: on which Relation, this King, the four Kings next succe●●ing, and two of this Kings younger Sons, were made Knights of the 〈◊〉. 6 Henry, Duke of V●s●o (V●sontium the Latins call it) the second Son of 〈◊〉 the first, created Knight of the Ga●ter by King Henry the sixth, Anno 1444. By whose in couragement and example the 〈◊〉 began to be affected to foreign Voyages: discovering in his 〈◊〉, (and for the most part under his Conduct also) the Lands of Azores, Mader●, Holy-P●rt, those 〈…〉 Ver●e, and a great part of the Coast of afric, as far as Guinea. He died An. 14●. ●7 Alfonso the fi●th, who warring on the Moors in afric, took from them the 〈…〉 Alcas●●, & A●zilla. 8 john the 2d, under whose reign the Portugols' fully 〈…〉 in G●nea and the Realms of Congo, discovering all the Coasts and Isles of afric, (not before discovered) as far as to the Cape of Good-hope, Anno 1487 planting, and fortifying as they 〈◊〉: the whole Discovery of afric, the East-Indies, and Brasil, being perfected in the 〈◊〉 of King Ema●uel; under whom also they discomfited great Armies of the Turks, and Sul●●● 〈…〉, bringing by Sea the riches of the East into the West. 9 Sebastian, the Grandchild 〈…〉, Son of 〈◊〉, embarking himself unadvisedly in the wars of afric, lost his 〈…〉 generally supposed) at the battle of Alcazar, in which three Kings fell in one day. 〈…〉 are of opinion that he was not killed, but that for shame and sorrow 〈…〉 home, wand'ring from one place to another, and at the last was found and avowed at 〈◊〉; thence carried to Naples, where he was kept three days in a dark Dungeon without any 〈…〉 a knife and halter, brought into Spain by the King's command, where at last he died. A man in whom so many circumstances met, to make up a truth, that the very Spaniards used to say, that either he was the true Sebastian, or else the Devil in his likeness. But whether true or not is not now material, death having put an end to that disputation; though the controversy which ensued upon his death for the Crown of Portugal, be not yet decided. For though King 〈◊〉 the 2d of Spain succeeded next after Henry the Cardinal King (who only came upon the Stage that the Competitors might have time to declare their Titles) and claimed the Crown as eldest H●ir male, and nearest Kinsman to King Henry: yet all the World was not well satisfied in the justice and Equity of his demands. In the carrying on of which affairs he seemed to deal very candidly to the eyes of men, not biased by their proper Interess; offering to 〈◊〉 his Title to a Disputation, professing that the Laws of Portugal were more favourable to him, than the Law of Cast●le; and openly acknowledging, that if he should chance to die 〈…〉 his eldest Son, as being a degree further off, would come behind some 〈◊〉 of the 〈…〉 to it, of whom himself had the precedence. But finding nothing done by Henry, and meaning to make sure work after his decease, (Antonio the Bastard having 〈…〉, and taking on himself as King, by a popular and tumultuous Election) 〈…〉 under the command of F●●di●nd de Tol●do Duke of Alva, and subdued all that stood 〈◊〉 him, 〈◊〉 the Duchess of Bragance, Daughter of Prince Edward, 〈…〉 and pretensions to him: So entering by a mixed Title of descent and 〈…〉 Thre●score year's it was peaceably enjoyed by the Kings of Spain, when 〈…〉 by a p●tent faction's appearing for john Duke of Br●g●nce, descended from 〈…〉 which brought so cunningly and successfully in his behalf, 〈…〉 disseized of Portugal, than he heard of any plot or practice set on 〈…〉. In which it is to be observed, that as King Philip the 2d, for the 〈…〉 of this Crown, had embroiled the French, engaging that King in a bloody w●r 〈…〉 of that Kingdom, to make him sure enough from troubling him in his 〈…〉: so the French Ministers had caused a Revolt in Catalogue; to the end, that 〈…〉 was busied in reducing that Province, the Portugals might have 〈…〉 themselves from the power of the Spania●ds, whom the Antipathy betwixt the Nations made less pleasing to them. Nor was it a partial defection only, or the loss of Portugal and no more; 
Portugal.  but a general falling off of the whole estate, in afric, Asia, America, in the Isles and Continents; the Accessories, (excepting only the Town of ●euta in Barbary) going the same way as the Principal did. And here methinks that grave and deliberate Nation of the Spa●iards may be justly taxed for committing a greater Soloecism in point of State, than ever people did before them: in that having got the full and peaceable possession of the Crown of Portugal, and all the outparts and Members of it, they continued all the Garrisons and strong holds of the whole Estate in the hands of the Natives. By means whereof, when Portugal itself fell off from the King of Spain, the Provinces and Plantations did the like, without any haesitancie: which, had some of the chief pieces in every Province, factory, and Plantation, been brought by little and little (if not all at once) into the power of the Castilians, might have been easily prevented. Nor hath the Spaniard hitherto attempted any thing material for the recovery of that Kingdom: having been ever since so over-laid by the French in Catalogue, Navarre, Biscay, Flanders, Artoys, and Italy, that he hath not had much leisure to attend that business. But leaving him and them to their own affairs; it is now time to represent you with a Catalogue of 

The Kings of Portugal.  
1139. 1 Alfonso, the second Earl, and first King of Portugal. 45.  
1184. 2 Sancho, the Son of Alfonso. 28.  
1212. 3 Alfonso II. Son of Sancho. 11.  
1223. 4 Sancho II. Son of Alfonso the 2d. 34.  
1257. 5 Alfonso III. Brother of Sancho the 2d. 22.  
1279. 6 Denys, the Son of Alfonso the 3d. 48.  
1325. 7 Alfonso IU. the Son of Denys. 32.  
1357. 8 Pedro, the Son of Alfonso the 4th. 10.  
1367. 9 Ferdinand, the Son of Pedro, the last King of the Lawful issue of Henry of Lorraine. 18.  
1385. 10 John, the base Son of Pedro, of whom sufficiently before. 48.  
1433. 11 Edward●, the Son of John, and of the Lady Philip of Lancaster. 5.  
1438. 12 Alfonso V. the Son of Edw. 43.  
1481. 13 John II. the Son of Alfonso the the fifth. 14.  
1495. 14 Emanuel, the Nephew of Edward, by his Son Ferdinand D. of Viseo. 26.  
1521. 15 john III. Son of Emanuel. 38.  
1557. 16 Sebastian the Nephew of john the 3d, by his Son Don john; unfortunately slain in the fields of afric. 21.  
1578. 17 Henry the Cardinal, Son of King Emanuel 2. the last of the male issue of Henry of Lorraine.  
1580. 18 Philip the second of Spain, Son of Charles King of Castille and Emperor, and of the Lady Marie his Wife, daughter of Emanuel. 18.  
1598. 19 Philip II. of Portugal, and III. of S●ain. 23.  
1621. 20 Philip III. of Portugal, and IV. of Spain. During his reign the Portugueze weary of the Spanish Government, chose for their King,  
1636. 21 john, Duke of Bragance, the IV. of that name, a Prince of great possessions, and of Royal race, who hitherto hath peaceably enjoyed it.    
Now that we may the better see by what title both the Kings of Spain and the Dukes of Bragance claim the Crown of Portugal; and what other Pretenders there were to it on the death of Sebastian: and what right as well Antonio the Bastard (but alleging a sentence of Legitimation) as the Princes of the House of Savoy did pretend unto it: we will lay down their Genealogies from King Emanuel, in this following Scheme.  

Emanuel had these Children  
1 john, King of Portugal john Prince of Portugal Sebastian, King of Portugal.  
2 Henry the Cardinal, King of Portugal.  
3 Lewis Don Antonio a Bastard. Christopher and others.  
4 Edward 1 Marry, wedded to Alexander Duke of Parma. Rainuccio Farnesis. 2 Catharine, married to john Duke of Bragance.  
5 Marry, married to Charles the fifth, King of Castille. Philip the II. King of Spain.  
6 Beatrix married to Charles Duke of Savoy.   
By this it may appear how the claims are grounded; but whether title will prevail cannot now be told. Suffice it, that as the Royal line of Portugal did begin in an Henry, so it ended in an Henry also: the male line failing in the person of the Cardinall-King, and the Crown falling (on whomsoever it shall fasten) on the Heirs of the Females.  
The principal Orders of Knighthood in this Kingdom are, 
Valentia.  1 Of Avis, so called from a Town of that name in Portugal, the seat thereof; founded by Sanctius or Sancho the first, in imitation of the Order of Alcantara, whose Green Cross they wear, but equal to it neither in power nor riches.  
2 Of CHRIST, instituted by Denys King of Portugal, who conferred on them all the Lands and Possessions of the exautorated Templars, confirmed by Pope john the 22th, Anno 1321. Their Robe is a Black Cassock under a White Surcoat, over which a Red Cross stroked in the midst with a a white line: their duty to expel the Moors out of Baetica, the next neighbour to Portugal; to which Crown they have added many gallant Countries in Asia, afric, and Brasil, and so improved their own Estates, that all the Isles in the Atlantic do belong to them; besides the rents of the Mine of S. George in Guinea, amounting to 100000 Ducats of yearly income.  
The Arms are Argent, on five Escocheons Azure, as many Bezants in Saltier of the first, pointed Sable, within a Border Gules, charged with seven Towers, Or. Which five Escocheons were given in memory of the five Kings whom Alfonso the first King slew at the battle of Obrique, An. 1139. And so proceed we on to those Provinces which are under the government of Arragon, the third great body of this State.   

12 VALENTIA.  
VALENTIA hath on the East, the Mediterranean; on the West, parts of Castille and Arragon; on the North, Catalogne; and Murcia upon the South. It is watered with the Rivers 1 Xucar, called of old Sucron and Surus. 2 Guadalander, signifying a River of pure water; and 3 Millar.  
This Country standeth in the most temperate and pleasing Air of all Spain, full of Gardens, and places of wonderful delight, where groweth abundance of Rice, Sugar, Corn, and Fruit; garnished all the year long with sweet-smelling flowers, and miraculously fruitful of Pomgranats, Lemons, and other delicacies. It hath also mines of Silver at Buriol, of Gold at Lodar, of Iron at Finistrat, of Alabaster at Piacent, and of Allom, Lime, and Plaster in many places. From thence also come the best Silks in the World, Cotton of Marcia, Crimson, Scarlet, and other precious colours, and rich perfumes. Finally, all the senses of man may be delighted and refreshed with that which comes from this happy Region; in quality and sweetness much like that of Naples. The delicacy and great pleasures whereof have made the Inhabitants of it to be thought less warlike than the other Spaniards. The Sheep of this Country also bear the finest Fleeces of any in Spain; first stocked with Cotsall sheep from England, at the request of john King of Arragon, An. 1465. by the imprudent courtesy of K. Edward the 4th.  
Places of most note in it are, 1 Alicante, a noted Port on the Mediterranean, whence come our true Alicant Wines, made of the juice of Mulberries; by Ptolemy called I●●cias, by Mela, Ilice; from whence the Bay adjoining is called Sinus Ilicitanus, now the Bay of Alicante. 2 Orivela, a Bishops See, on the River Segura, which divides this Province from Murcia. 3 Sergorvo, a Bishops See, by Ptolemy named Segobriga, the chief City in old times of the Celtiberi. 4 Xelva, supposed to be the Incibilis of Livy, where Scipio defeated Hanno and his Carthaginians. 5 Valentia, a fair, pleasant, and well-traded City, the See of an Archishop, and giveth name to the whole Province: in its first glory, one of the chief Roman Colonies in these parts of Spain; in its last, the Royal seat of the Moorish Kings of this Country. Situate three miles from the Mediterranean, not far from the mouth of the River Dureas, now called Guadalander: and is by some said to have been heretofore named Roma, which signifieth strength. But when the Romans mastered it, to distinguish it from their Rome, it was called Valentia: which in the La●●●e tongue, is of the the same signification, with the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. Here is an University in which S. Dominick, the Father of the Dominicans, studied. 6 Laurigi, now a small village, once a Town of great strength, called Lauron, which Sertorius besieged, took and burned, even then when Po●p●y, whose confederates the Lauronites were, stood with his whole Army nigh enough unto the flame to warm his hands; and yet durst not succour it. 7 Cullera, a Sea Town standing at the mouth of the River Xucar. It was formerly named Sucron, after the name of the River; and is famous in Plutarc●, for the victory which Sertorius here got of Pompey, Pompey's Army being not only overthrown, but himself with life hardly escaping. 8 Morvedre, situate in or near the place of the old Sagu●tum● the People whereof when besieged by Annibal, continued so obstinate in the expectation of aid from Rome, that they chose rather to burn themselves, than yield up the Town: the occasion of the second War betwixt Rome and Carthage. First Founded by the Zacynthians, and after this destruction of it, repaired, or re-edified by the Romans, (they could not possibly do less) by whom made a Colony. 9 Gandia, which gives the title of a Duke to the house of Borgia, and was the stile of the eldest Son of Pope Alex. the sixth (of this noble Family) called commonly in Guicc●●rdine by the name of the Duke of Gandi●: 10 Denia, seated on the brin● of the Mediterranean, over which it hath a goodly Prospect; the Marquisate of the Duke of Lerma: first Founded by the Massil●an●, by whom called Dianium. Not far from which is the Promontory Ferraria, of old called Promontorium Dianium, the Refuge of Sertorius in his Wars against Pompey and Metellus, both of great renown: the one aged, and of much experience; the other young and of high resolutions. And yet Sertorius found himself more troubled with the old man's gravity, than the young man's gallantry: 
Catal●●●●.  insomuch as he was used to s●y, That 〈…〉▪ he would have 〈…〉 Pompey home with 〈◊〉. For he had twice 〈…〉 Great Pompey, before 〈◊〉 was joined in the Action with him: the first time dangerously wounding, and the second time driving him out of the Field. But fight against both he 〈◊〉 over-matched; and yet seemed rather to retire than fly before them: the 〈…〉 very valiantly in the time of these Wars under him, to which Florus alludeth, 〈◊〉, Nec nunquam magis a paruit Hispani militis Vigour, quam Romano duc●. At the last when he had a long time upheld the 〈◊〉 faction, he was traitorously murdered by 〈◊〉 one of his Associates; for which 〈◊〉 and Pompey had a Triumph at Rome. So high an estimate did they set upon the casual death of this poor Proscript.  
The Ancient inhabitants hereof were the Bastitanis, the Ed●tani, Co●testa●i, and some part of the 〈◊〉: originally of the Province of Tarraco●ensis, afterwards (in the sub-dividing of that Province by Constan●ine) of Carth●ginensis. In the declining of the Empire first subdued by the A●ani, who were scarce warm in their new dwellings, when disseized by the Goths. From the Goths taken by the Moors, of whom reckoned as a Province, till the fatal overthrow given to 〈◊〉 Ena●● at t●e battle of Sierra 〈◊〉, and the departure of the Moors of 〈◊〉 to their own County, which followed presently upon it. By ●●it Ab●n-●eit, the Brother of this Mahomet, made a distinct Kingdom of itself, Anno 1214. but taken from him by one Z●e● a Prince of the Moors of Spain, under colour that he had a purpose of turning Christian, and making his Kingdom subject to the Crown of 〈◊〉 (as indeed he did) Anno 1228. Conquered from 〈◊〉 the new King, before he could enjoy the sweets of a new raised Kingdom, by Ismus' King of 〈◊〉, Anno 1238. Since reckoned a Member of that Kingdom, never dismembered from the body of it since the first uniting. But still so overgrown with Moors (not to be blamed for loving such an excellent seat) that at the final expulsion of that people be King P●ilip the third▪ there were reckoned no sewer than 22000 Families of them in this little Country.  
The Arms hereof were Gules, a Tower embattelled Argent, purssed (or pennond) Sable.   

12 CATALONIA.  
CATALONIA is bounded on the North-East, with the Land of Rousillon and the Pyren●●s; on the East, with the mediterranean; on the South, with Valenti●; and on the North and North-West, with 〈◊〉. The Country somewhat Mountainous and full of Woods, and not very well cultivated: beholding more in that respect for Corn, Fruits, and other necessary provisions unto the 〈◊〉 of the S●● which serves them out of other Countries, than to the Goodness of the Land. And yet it is as well watered as most parts of Spain, having in it besides the Ebr●, or Iberus, common to many other Provinces; and ●inia, which runneth betwixt it and Valentia; the Rivers of, 1 ●ardera, 2 Lobregat, 3 Segre, 4 Fra●col●no, 5 Bes●rs, and 6 O●har.  
The name of Catalonia some derive from the Castellani, who formerly inhabited some part hereof: others will have it called Catalon●a corruptly for Gothalan●a, from the mixture of the Goths and Al●ni▪ successively the Masters of it; and some more improbably from one Carthalot, a Noble Man of this Country, who lived here they know not when. More like it is, that it took this name from the Catal●uni●, an old French people of Languedoc, the adjoining Province, from whom the fields called Camp● Catalaunic● near unto Tholouse took denomination. But from what root soever they came, certain it is that they are generally a perverse and obstinate people, little observant of the pleasure or profit of their natural Princes, but on the other side so Zealous in defence of their own Privileges, that they have created more trouble to their Kings under that pretence, than all the rest of the subjects of Spain. Of which we need no other instance than their l●te revolt unto the 〈◊〉, Anno 1●38▪ which drew after it the loss of the Realm of Portugal, and many Towns of great importance in Fla●ders, and the rest of the Netherlands.  
Principal places in it are, 1 〈◊〉, situate on the 〈◊〉, near the River Lobr●●●t, accommodated with a large and commodious Port, where commonly the Spanish Soldiers do embark, which are bound for Italy. The Town adorned with large streets, handsome buildings, strong Walls, and a very pleasant situation: called Barcino by the ancient writers, in who●e time it was a Roma● Colony, now honoured with a Bishops See, and the seat of the 〈…〉 2 T●●ragone, seated also on the Mediterranean, East of the River Francolino: built, fortified, and peopled by the two S●ipi●s, the Father and Uncle of Af●ican●s, for a Counter-Fort to C●rthagena (or New Car●hage) not long before founded by the Carthaginians; afterwards made the Metropolis of Tarrd●onensis, hence denominated; stripped of that honour by Tol●de, and is now but two miles in compass, and containing not above 700 Families. Yet still it holdeth the reputation of an Archbishops See, contending with 〈◊〉▪ for the Primacy of all Spain▪ (as Braga al●o doth in the Kingdom of Portugal) the controversy being undecided to this very day. 3 Ampurias, on the same sea also, once of great esteem, founded by the Massi●ans, a Roman Colony, and a well traded Town, as the name doth signify, this being the 〈◊〉 spoken of by Strabo and Ptolemy; 
Majorca.  now not observable for any thing but a safe Road for Ships. 4 Blanos, 5 Palamos, and 6 Rosas, all Ports on the same Sea, but subject unto divers Winds, and not very spacious. More in the Land are 7 Girone, a small, but handsomely built, and a well traded Town, a Bishops See, and the title of the eldest Son of Arragon, called Prince of Girone. Which title was first given to john the eldest Son of King Pedro the fourth immediately upon his birth, Anno 1351. and hath since continued. 8 Tortosa, on the River Ebro, in the most rich and pleasant part of all the Country. A goodly Town, and of great importance; garrisoned by the French, since the late revolt of Catalonia from the King of Spain, and like to draw a great part of this Province after it, whilst it continueth in their power, or the possession of their party. 9 Vrgel, a Earls honour, and a Bishops See, situate at the foot of the Pyrences. 10 Momblane, which heretofore gave the title of Duke to the second Sons of the Kings of Arragon. Here is also on the East part where it joineth with the land of Rousillon, the Promontory called of old Templum Veneris, now Cabo de Ceux: and not far from Barcelone the Mountain called Montserrato, on the sides full of Hermitages and Anchorets cells; and having towards the summit of it a Chapel dedicated to the Virgin Mary, much famed and resorted to by Pilgrims from all parts of the World, for her miraculous Image which is there enshrined.  
The old Inhabitants of this Province were the Castellani, Auxitani, Indigites, Cosetani, with part of the Ilercones & jaccetani; all of them part of Tarraconensis. In the declining of the Empire seized on by the Alani, and they soon after vanquised if not dispossessed by the power of the Goths. Lost to the Moors in the general ruin of the whole; from them recovered by the puissance of Charles the great; who having taken the City of Barcelone, Anno 801. gave it to one Bernard a Frenchman, with the title of Earl, who Governed the Country for that Emperor; as W●fredus, or Godfredus his successor, did for Lewis the Godly. Godfredus Son to this Godfrede, by the gift of Charles the Gross, was the first Proprietary; united unto Arragon, by the marriage of Earl Raymond with the Heir of that Kingdom.  

The Earls of Barc●lone.  
A. Ch.  
884. 1 Godfredus, surnamed the Hairy, Son of Wifrede, the Provincial Governor for the Emperor Ludovicus Pius.  
914. 2 Miron, Son of Godfredus.  
933. 3 Godfredus II. Son of Miron, by some called Seniofrid.  
971. 4 Borellus, Brother of Miron, and Uncle of Godfred the second.  
993. 5 Raymond, Son of Borellus.  
1017. 6 Berengarius, surnamed Borellus, Son of Raymond.  
1035. 7 Raymond II. Son of Borengarius Borellus.  
1076. 8 Raymond III. Son of Raymond the second.  
1082. 9 Raymond IU. Son of Raymond the third, Earl of Provence also, in right of D●ulce his wife.  
1131. 10 Raymond V. Son of Raymond the fourth, and D●ulce Countess of Provence, married Petronilla Daughter of Raymir, or Raymond the second, King of Arragon, whom he succeeded in that Kingdom, Anno 1134. Uniting these Estates together, never since disjoined.   
The Arms hereof were four Pallets Gules, in a field Or; now the Arms of Arragon. Which Arms were given to Geofrie, surnamed the Hairy, the first Earl hereof, by Lewis the Stammering, Emperor and King of France, to whose aid he came against the Normans with a Troop of horse, and being bloody in the fight, desired of the Emperor to give him some Coat of Arms, which he and his Posterity might from thenceforth use. Who dipping his four fingers in the blood of the Earl, drew them thwart his Shield (which was only of Plain Gold, without any Devise) saying, This shall be your Arms hereafter.   

11 The Kingdom of MAIORCA.  
THe Kingdom of MAIORCA contained the Lands of Majorca, Minorca, Ebu●sa, and Frumentaria, in the Mediterranean, the Land of Rousillon, Sardaigne, or Cerdagne, in the Continent of Spain, and the Earldom of Montp●lier in France.  
The Land of ROUSILLON, which is the first Member of this Kingdom, is situate betwixt two Branches of the Pyren●es; bounded on the South with the Mediterranean; on the West, with Catalogne; on the North, with the said Pyrenees; on the East, with Languedoc in France. Places of most importance in it, are 1. Helna, a Bishops See on the River Techo. 2. Coll●bre, now a poor and ignoble Village, of note only for a safe and commodious Harbour; but formerly the great and famous City of Illiberis, so often mentioned in the wars betwixt Rome and Carthage. 3. Perpignan (in Latin, Perpinianum) built in the year 1068. by Guinard Earl of Rousillon, in a pleasant Plain on the River Thelis: now a rich Town, well traded, and as strongly fortified against the French, to whose fury in the time of war it is still exposed. Besieged by Henry, Son to King Francis the first, with a puissant Army, Anno 1542▪ Pertly to be revenged upon Charles the fifth, 
Major●a.  who had before attempted Mars●illes in Provence, partly to get into his hands a chief door of Spain, by which he might at all times enter into that Kingdom. But he found here such strong resistance, that he was fain to raise his siege, with as little honour, as Charles had gotten by the Expedition which he made into Provence. 4. Salsus (the Salsul●e of Strabo) a strong place on the Frontier of Languedock; fortified according to the Rules of modern Fortification, and one of the chief Bulwarks against the French. 5. Rousillon, a Castle of more honour and antiquity, than strength or beauty, by Pliny, and other Ancients, called Ruseino, the Country Comitatus Ruseino●ensis, now Rousillon, and the Land of Rousillon; accounted heretofore a part of Gaul Narbonensis, and added unto Spain in the time of the Goths. On the death of Gerard, the last Proprietary Earl, it was added to the Crown of Arragon by Alfonso the 2d; by james the first laid to the Kingdom of Majorca; united to the Crown again by King Pedro the 4th; after that sold (or rather pawned) by King john the 2d to Lewis the 11th of France for the sum of 300000 Crowns, Anno 1462. and freely returned back again to Ferdinand the second (after called the Catholic) by King Charles the 8th, Anno 1493, conditioned that he should not hinder him in the Conquest of Naples. ●oyning hereto as part of the Kingdom of Majorca, was the Country of Sardaigne, or Cerdagne, the habitation of the Corretani in former times, and afterwards accounted of as a part of Arragon. The chief Town of those Cerretani, called julia Libyca; the principal now being hath the name of Cardono (or Sardona▪ as the Spaniards commonly pronounce it) retaining some resemblance to the name of the Nation. The Country lying in the Valleys of the Pyrenees, and consequently in a corner somewhat out of the way, was thought fit to be added to the Land of Rousillon (for the better endowment of this Kingdom) the fortunes of which it hath since followed, as appendent on it; pawned when that was unto the French, and with that restored.  
2. The Earldom of MONTPELIER is situate in the Province of Languedoc, adjoining to the Land of Rousillon; so called from Montpelier, the chief City: for the description whereof, we must send the Reader back to France, having spoken of it there already. All I shall here repeat is this, that Mary the Daughter of William the last Earl thereof, brought it in marriage to her Husband Peter the 2d, King of Arragon: and that it was sold to Philip de Valois the French King, by james King of Majorca, of that name the third.  
3 The Island of MAIORCA is situate in the Mediterranean, just over against Valentia; from which distant about 60 miles, about 300 miles in circuit, the length above an hundred, the breadth somewhat under; the number of Inhabitants reckoned at 30000. The Land on all sides towards the Sea is somewhat mountainous, and barren withal: the In-lands more champain and fruitful, yielding sufficient quantity of Oil, Corn, Wines, and Fruits, for the use of its people. The whole Island is divided into 30 parts, (as so many Wapontakes) in every one of which are reckoned from 300 to 600 Families. No hurtful Creatures are here bred, except Coneys only; and those not hurtful but by accident; of which more anon.  
Places of chief note in the former times were 1. Palma, and 2. Pallentia, which had the rights of Roman Citizens. 3. Ci●ium, and 4. Cunici, which enjoyed the rights of the Latives; and 5. Bochri (or Bochorum) which was in the condition of a Town confederate; besides divers others not so privileged. Of these none left at this day but Palma only, vulgarly called Majorca, by the name of the Island, a Bishops See, the Seat of the Viceroy for these Isles, and an University, the birthplace of Raymundus Lullius, a man of great wit, and profound judgement, the Author of some Books in the Art of Chemistry; whose Works are read and studied in that University, as Aristotle's are in others. This is the greater of the two Lands called Baleares, whence it had the name. A joining hereunto two others of inferior note, called Dragonera, and Cabrera; of which nothing memorable.  
4 MINORCA, so called because it is the lesser of the Baleares, is situate Eastward of Majorca, from which distant near 100 miles; of about 60 miles in length, and 150 miles in Circuit. More fruitful than the other, though less in quantity; of a rich soil, which breedeth them great herds of cattle, and Mules of the largest size of any in Spain: accommodated also with two convenient Havens, the one called Maon, the other Farnessus. Other considerable places are, 1 Minorca, now so called, by the name of the Island, but anciently known by the name of Mago, situate in the East part thereof, first Founded by the Carthaginians as the name imports. And so was also 2 jamno, seated in the West (Duo parva Oppida quibus à Poenis indita nomina, saith Severus, Bishop of these Isles, An. 420, or thereabouts.) It is now called Citadella, or the little City. Here was also in the midland a third Town called Sanisera by Pliny, of which I find now no tract remaining.  
5 EBUSA, now called YVICA, lieth between the main Land and the Baleares, opposite to the Promontory of Ferraria in the Realm of Valentia, from which distant about 50 miles, and near an hundred miles in compass. The Country plentiful of Corn, and all manner of Fruits; breeding no hurtful Creature, except Coneys only; which many times destroy their Harvest. The chief Town here, is Yvica, (of old called Ebusus) the Inhabitants of which make yearly great store of Salt, wherewith they do not only furnish Spain, but some parts of Italy.  
6 FRUMENTERA, so called from the plenty of Corn, is distant ten miles from Yvica, and about 60 miles from the main Land of Spain; in circuit about 70 miles. Not well inhabited by reason of the multitude of Serpents, 
Majorca.  for which cause called by the Grecians 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 by the Latins. Both Lands anciently known by the name of Pityus●, and Pityod●●, from the abundance of ●ines there growing.  
About th●se Lands are three others of little worth, called 1. Ve●ra, 2 〈◊〉 and 3 D●●gorgo; 4 Another called Moncolibre, betwixt M●jore, and the influx of the River ●●us. 5 Al●aqu●s, lying in the very mouth of that River; and 6 Soomb●aria, (anciently called the Island of Hercules) over against Carthagena; so named from a kind of Tu●●ny (in 〈◊〉 named Scom●ri;) of which great shoals use to lie about it. All these, together with the 〈◊〉, make up the Province of the Lands the 7th Province of ●pa●n.  
But the chief glory of these Lands were the BALEARES, so called (as the general conceit is, from the Greek word 〈◊〉, which signifieth to throw; because the people were so expert in throw●●● their Slings or Darts; but as B●cha●tus will needs have it (to the same effect) from 〈◊〉 a Punic or Proenician word, signifying a m●ster in the Art of slinging. An Art so natural and innative to them, that Parents used to give no meat unto their Children, after some sit age, but what they could hit down with their Slings from the top of a Beam. Of their dexterity at this weapon there is much mention made in the Ancient Writers, as well Histori●ns as Poets. And from this exercise they had the name also of Insulae 〈◊〉; or else because the people of it used to go naked to the wars (and possibly enough in those first Ages of the World, and at other times also) from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the same with Nud●s in the L●tire. Nor were they good at Slinging only, but at Swimming too, an exercise not ordinarily performed but by naked People; at which the very women are at this day expert; 〈◊〉 reporting, in the relation of his travels, that being becalmed about these Lands, there came a Woman swimming from one of them with a Basket of fruit to sell. But that which made them 〈◊〉 talked o● in former times, was the harm done them by their Coneys, which here and in the neighbouring Continent increased so wonderfully, that Varro telleth us of a Town in Spain undermined by them; and Strabo, that they did not only destroy their Plants, but rooted up many of their trees. Insomuch that the Inhabitants did request the Romans to give them some new seats toinhabit in; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, being ejected by those creatures out of their possessions, whose multitudes they were not able to resist. And when that could not be obtained, they moved Augustus Caesar (as Pliny telleth us) for some aid against them; who instead of Soldiers sent them Ferrets, by which their numbers were diminished in a little time.  
These Islands were first planted by the Tyrians or Phoenicians, the founders of many of their Cities; one of which in the Isle of Ebusus had the name of Phoenissa. From them also they derived the Art of Slinging. Made subject to the Carthaginians, under the Conduct of Hanno and Him●ico, Anno M. 5500. or thereabouts, at what time the Decemvir● Governed Rome. Under that State they remained subject till the end of the second Punic war: when Carthage was no longer able to protect them, made a State of themselves, till conquered by Metellus, the Brother of him who subdued Crect. The people were much given to Piracy, and seeing the Roman Navy sailing by their Coasts, supposed them to be Merchant Men, assaulted them▪ and at first prevailed. But the Romans getting betwixt them and the shore discovered from whence they came, and forced them to an unwilling submission; for which Metellus was rewarded with the honour of a Triumph. Being once made a Province of Spain, they always after that followed the fortunes thereof. In the distraction of the Empire of the Moors in Spain, they were united into one Kingdom, by the name of the Kingdom of Majorca; won from the Moors by Raymond Earl of ●ar●elone, with the help of the Genoese, 1102. By the Genoese delivered to the Moors again, and from them reconquered by james King of Arragon, descended from that Raymond, Anno 〈◊〉  
Of these Estates consisted the Kingdom of Majorca, erected by King james the first, immediately on his recovery of these Lands from the hands of the Moors; and by him given unto 〈◊〉 his second Son: who fearing the displeasure of his Brother King Peter the 3d, submitted his new Kingdom to the Vassalage of the Crown of Arragon, yet could not this so satisfy the ambition or jealousies of those mightier Kings, as to preserve his Successors in possession of it. By 〈◊〉 the 4th extorted from King james, the fourth and last King thereof, under colour of denying his accustomed ●●mage. So ended.  

The Kings of Majorea, of the House of Arragon.  
1. james the first son to ●ames the first, King of Aragen.  
2. james I. Son of james the first.  
3. Ferdinand, Brother of James the 2d.  
4. james III. Son of Ferdinand, overcome and slain in battle by Pedro the 4th King of 〈…〉 and other Members of this little Kingdom, remaining ever since united unto that Crown, except Montpelier, sold by this james unto the Freuch.    

13 ARRAGON. 
Arragon.   
ARRAGON, hath on the East, the Land of Rousillon, and the Pyrenees; on the West, the two Castile's; on the North, Navarre; on the South, and Southeast, 〈◊〉 and some part of Valentia; so called from the River Arragon, by which it is divided from the Realm o● Navarre; where the first Princes of this house, having won certain Towns from the hands of the Infidels, commanded as Lords Marchers under the Kings of that Realm, and called themselves for that reason the Earls of Arragon, spreading the name as they enlarged their bounds by ensuing conquests.  
The Country lieth on both sides of the River Iberus, and hath also several Riverets, as Gall●go, Senga, Xalon, and Cagedo, running like so many veins through the body of it, yet it is generally so destitute of waters, and so ill-inhabited, especially towards the Mountains of the Pyrenees; that one may travel many days, and find neither Town, nor house, nor people. But where the Rivers have their course the Case is different; the Valleys yielding plenty both of Corn and Fruits, especially about Calataiub, where the air is good, and the soil fruitful.  
The ancient Inhabitants were the Celtiberi, who took up a great part of Tarraconensis; divided into lesser Tribes, not here considerable. These sprung originally from the Cel●ae, (as before is said) the greatest and most potent Nation of all Gallia: who being too populous for their Country, or willing to employ themselves upon new Adventures, passed the Pyrenees, and mingled themselves with the Iber●. From thence the name of Cel●iberi, and Celtiberia, according unto this of Lucan. 
— profugique à gente vetusta  
Gallorum, Celtae miscentes nomen Iberi.  
Who being chased from Gaul, their home, did frame,  
Of Celtae and Iberi mixed, one name.  Others of less consideration were the Jaccetani, and Lacetani, with parts of the Edetani and Illergetes.  
Places of most importance in it, are, 1 Jacca, the chief City heretofore of the jaccetani, seated amongst the Pyrenees, and for that cause chosen for the chief seat and residence of the first Kings of Arragon, continued there till the taking of Sarag●ssa by Alfonso the first. 2 Calata●●b, seated on Xalon in the best Country of Arragon; so called from Aiub a Moorish Prince, the first Founder of it. Not far from which upon an hill, stood the old Town Bilbilis, a Muaicipium of the Romans, and the birthplace of Marshal. 3 Venasque, amongst the Pyrenees. 4 Balbastro, on the S●nga, formerly called Burtina, now a Bishops See. 5 L●rida, on the River Segre, as some say, but others place it on the Songa; which rising in the Pyrenees, divideth Cat●lonia from Arragon, and so passeth into Iberus. Now an University, called formerly Ilerda, and famous for the Encounter happening nigh unto it betwixt Hercul●ius Treasurer or Questor to Sertorius, and M●●ilius Proconsul of Gallia: wherein Manilius was so discomfited, and his Army consisting of 3 Legions of Foot, and 1500 Horse so routed, that he almost alone was scarce able to recover this City, few of his soldiers surviving the overthrow. 6 Moson, famous for entertaining the King of Spain every third year: At which time the people of Arragon, Valence, and Catalogne, present the King 600000 crowns, viz. 300000 for Catalogne, 200000 for Arragon, and 100000 for Val●ntia: And well may they thus do, for at other times they sit Rent-Free as it were: only they acknowledge the King of Spain to be the head of their Commonwealth. This revenue is proportionably 200000 Crowns a year, all which, if not more, the King again expends, in maintaining his Viceroys in their several Provinces. 7 Huesca, (called of old Osca) somewhat South of jaca, an University, a place long since dedicated to learning. For hither Sertorius caused all the Nobleman's Sons of Spain to be brought, and provided them of Schoolmasters for the Greek and Latin tongues, bearing their Parents in hand, that he did it only to make them fit to undergo charge in the Commonwealth; but indeed to have them as hostages for their Father's Faith and Loyalty towards him. 8 Saragossa, on the River Iberus, called at first Salduba, by reason of the Saltpits there: but being afterwards re-edified by Caesar Augustus, it had the name of Caesarea Augusta (whence that of Saragossa bathe its origination) by whom first made a Colony of the Romans, and afterwards a Municipium or Free-Burrough; suffered to live according to the Laws of the Country. Under the Romans it was one of the seven juridical Resorts of 〈◊〉 under the Moors a peculiar Kingdom of itself; and now a Bishops See, and an University. Amongst the Kings of it, when it was a kingdom, two are chiefly famous; viz. 1 Marsilius, who joined with the confederate Moors and Christians, against Charles the Great, in the battle of R●ncevaux. 2ly Aigoland, of whom there goeth a tale in Archbishop Tur●ine, that being by the said Charles persuaded to become a Christian, he came unto the Emperor's Court very well accompanied, according to the time appointed. Where finding many Lazars and poor People before the Gates, attending for their usual Alms from the Emperor's Table; he asked what and who they were, and was answered, that they were the poor Servants of God: upon which words he speedily returned again, Protesting that he would never serve that God, who could keep his Servants no better. Took from the Moors by Alfonso King of Arragon and Navarre, An. 1118. it was made the seat Royal of the Kings of Arragon, 
Arragon.  removed hither from jacca: and of late times hath been the Seat of the Viceroy for the Kings of Spain, which together with the being an Archbishops See, and an University, have so enriched it, that it is one of the fairest Cities in all Spain, for handsomeness of Streets, and sumptuousness of Palaces, and public Buildings, containing 17 Parish Churches, and fourteen Monasteries, besides divers Chapels, erected in most parts of it to the Virgin Mary.  
Who were the old Inhabitants of this Tract, hath been shown before; tossed from the Carthaginians unto the Romans; from them to the Goths; and finally unto the Moors. Recovered from the Moors about the first beginning of the Kingdom of Leon and Sobrarbre; at which time one Aznar, a man of great puissance and action, possessed himself of some Lands on the Banks of the River Arragon, to be holden by him and his Successors of the Kings of Sobrarbre or Navarre, Anno 775, the Title of Earl being given unto him and them for their greater honour. The sixth of which from Aznar was Fortunio Ximines, whose Daughter Vrraca being married to Don Garcia Inigo King of Navarre, Anno 867, conveied this Earldom to that Crown: of which it continued a Member till Sancho the Great, King of Navarre, and Earl of Arragon, erected it into a Kingdom, and gave it unto Raymir his natural Son, Anno 1034. The whole succession I shall borrow from the Spanish Histories; first taking (as in other places) some short notes of the Princes most observable in the course of the Story. Of which the principal were, 1 Aznarius the first Earl, his Estate then containing some few Towns on the River of Arragon: not much enlarged when made a Kingdom by Sancho King of Navarre, surnamed the Great, descended from Fortune the 2d of Navarre, and Vrraca the Sister and Heir of Fortunius Ximenes, the last Earl of Arragon. 2 Raymir the first King, base Son to Sancho the Great, advanced to this honour to the prejudice of Garcia, eldest Son of Sancho, for standing so generously in defence of Donna Elvira, the Wife of his Father, wrongfully and unnaturally accused of Adultery, by the said Garcia her own Son, against whom he undertook to maintain her honour in a single Combat. 3 Raymund, Earl of Barcelona, who by marriage with Petronilla the Heir of Arragon, united Catalonia unto that kingdom. 4 Peter the 2d, who on a superstitious zeal first made his kingdom tributary to the See of Rome, Anno 1214. But presently repenting of it, sided against the Pope with the Albigenses, slain in their cause by Simon de Montfort, and the rest of his Associates in that war. 5 james the first, who conquered the kingdoms of Valentia, and Majorca; and was the first that enlarged his Dominions upon the Seas; being shut up from making any further impression on the Moors, by the interjection of Castille betwixc him and them. 6 Peter the 3d, pretending a Title unto Sicil, in right of Constantia his Wife, the Daughter of Manfred King thereof, and by the last Will of Corradine, rightful King both of that and Naples, extorted that Island from the French, massacred by him at the fatal Sicilian Vespers. 7 james the 2d, by whom the Isle of Sardinia was added to the Crown of Arragon, 8 Martin the last of the masculine race of the House of Barcelone; to whom succeeded, 9 Ferdinand of Castille, Son of john King of Castille, and Leonora the Daughter of Peter the 4th of Arragon. 10 Alfonso Son of Ferdinand, adopted by Queen joan the 2d, got the kingdom of Naples. Of Ferdinand the second, surnamed the Catholic, we shall speak more anon in the close of all.  

The Farls of Arragon.  
1 Aznarius, the first Earl, cotemporarie with Garcia the 2d King of Navarre, under whom he held.  
775. 2 Aznarius II. Son of Aznario the first.  
3 Galindo, Son of Aznario the 2d.  
4 Ximines Aznario, Son of Galindo, slain in the battle of Roncevall against Charles the Great.  
803. 5 Ximines Garcia, Brother to Galindo.  
6 Fortuni● Ximines, Son of Ximines Garcias, the last of the male issue of Aznarius.  
7 Fortunia II. King of Navarre, and Earl of Arragon in right from his Mother Vrraca, the Sister and Heir of Fortunio Ximines, the last Earl of the House of Aznarius.  
901. 8 Sancho, surnamed Abarca, K. of Navarre, and Earl of Arragon.  
920. 9 Garcia, Son of Sancho King of Navarre, etc.  
969. 10 Sancho II. of Arragon, and III. of Navarre.  
993. 11 Garcias, surnamed the Trembler, King of Navarre, and Earl of Arragon, Son to Sancho the 3d.  
1000 12 Sancho the Great, King of Navarre, and Earl of Arragon in his own right, and of Castille in the right of Elvira his Wife, Monarch of all Spain, then in the hands of the Christians, (except the Kingdom of Leon only) erected the Earldom of Arragon into a Kingdom, and gave it for the reason before specified to his Son Raymir.   

The Kings of Arragon.  
1034. 1 Raymir. 42.  
1076. 2 Sancho, Son of Raymir. 18.  
1094. 3 Pedro. 14.  
1108. 4 Alfonso, Brother of Pedro. 26.  
1134. 5 Raymir II. the Brother of Alfonso. Petronilla, Daughter of Raym●r the 2d.  
1137. 6 Raymund, Earl of Barcelon●.  
1162. 7 Alfonso II. Son of Raymund and Petronill. 34.  
1196. 8 Pedro II. Son of Alfonso.  
1213. 9 james, Son of Pedro the 2d. 43.  
127●. 10 Pedro III. Son of james. 9  
1285. 11 Alfons● III. Son of Pedro the the 3d. 6.  
1291. 12 james II. Brother of Alfons● the 3d. 36.  
1328. 13 Alfons● IU. Son of james the 2d 8.  
1336. 14 Pedro IU. Son of Alfo●so the 4th 51.  
1387. 15 john, Son of Pedro the 4th. 8.  
1395. 16 Martin, the Brother of 〈◊〉 17.  
1412. 17 Ferdinand of Castille, the Nephew of Pedro the ●th. 4.  
1416. 18 〈◊〉 V. 42.  
1458. 19 john II. Son of Ferdinand, and Brother of Alfonso, King of Navarre also in right of Blanch his Wise. 20.  
1478. 20 Ferdinand II. of that name of Arragon, Son of john the 2d, King of Arragon and Navarre by a second Wife; and the V. of that name of Castille and Leon, which kingdoms he obtained by the marriage of Isabel or Elizabeth, Sister and Heir of Henry the 4th, uniting thereby the great Estates of Castille and Arragon, and all Appendices of either. In which regard he may well challenge the first place in the Catalogue of the Monarch's of Spain, to be presented in due season.   
In the mean time to draw to a conclusion of the Affairs and Estate of Arragon, we are to understand, that of all the kingdoms which belong to the Spaniard, it is the most privileged, and free from the absolute command of the Kings of Spain, having in it such a temper or mixture of Government, as makes the Kings hereof to be well-nigh titular, of little more authority than a Duke of Venice. For at the first erecting of this Estate, the better to encourage the people to defend themselves against the Moors, they had many Privileges indulged them, and amongst others the creating of a justitiar of popular Magistrate, which like the Ephori of Sparta, had in some cases superiority over their Kings, reversing their judgements, cancelling their Grants, and sometimes censuring their Proceedings. And though King Philip the 2d in the business of Antonio de Perez had made a Conquest of that kingdom, and annulled their Privileges; yet after of his own mere goodness he restored them (in part) again, as they continue at this day.  
Chief Orders of Knighthood in this kingdom are, 1 Of S. Saviour, instituted by Alfonso the first, Anno ●118. to animate the Members of it against the Moors. Of the habit and customs of this Order I have met with nothing.  
2 Of Montesa, instituted by james the first King of Arragon, Anno 1270, or thereabouts; endowed with all the Lands of the Templars, (before dissolved) lying in Valentia, together with the Town and Castle of Montesa, made the Seat of their Order, whence it took the name. Subject at first unto the Master of the Order of Calatrava, out of which extracted; and under the same Rule of Cisteaux. But after, by the leave of Pope Benedict the 13th, they quitted themselves of that subjection, and in sign thereof changed the Habit of Calatrava which before they used, to a Red Cross upon their Breasts; now the badge of the Order.  
The Arms of Arragon since possessed by the Earls of Barcelone, are Or, four Pallets Gules: before which they were Azure, a Cross Argent.   

THE MONARCHY OF SPAIN.  
THus having spoke of Spain, and the Estate thereof, when broken and divided into many kingdoms; let us next look upon it as united into one main body: effected for the most part by Ferdinand the last King of Arragon, before mentioned. Before which time Spain being parceled into many kingdoms was little famous, and less feared, the Kings thereof as the Author of the Politic Dispute, &c hath well observed, being only Kings of Figs and Oranges. Their whole puissance was then turned against one another; and small Achievements had they out of that Continent, except those of the House of Arragon upon Sicily, Sarai●●a, and the Baleares. ●huanus, a diligent Writer of the History of his own times, (if in some things he savour not more of the Party. than the Historian (telleth us, that before this King's Reign, the name and glory of the Spaniards was like their Country, hemmed in by the Seas on some sides, and the 〈◊〉 on the other: Potius; patuisse exteris invadentibus, qu●m quicquam mem●rab le extra suos sins 〈◊〉 'tis true, that 〈◊〉 the Great, King of Navarre, assumed unto himself the 〈◊〉 King of Spain, and that Alfonso the first of Castille, and the sixth of Leon, caused himself to be crowned Emperor of Spain, in the Cathedral Church of Leon; Titles ambitiously affected upon no good ground, and such as ended with their Persons. But this Prince worthily named the Great, seized on the Kingdom of Navarre, conquered Granada from the Moors, subdued the Kingdom of Naples, united Arragon to Castille, banished 124000 Families of the Jews, began by the Conduct of Columbus, the discovery of the Western Indies: and finally, by marrying his Daughter joan to Philip, Son of the Emperor Maximilian, Duke of Burgundy, and Lord of the greatest part of the Netherlands, laid the Foundation of the present Austrian greatness. Continued since by so many intermariages betwixt the Spanish and Imperial Branches of that potent Family, that Philip the second might have called the Archduke Albertus, Brother, Cousin, Nephew, and Son. A strange Medley of Relations. Thus by the puissance of this Prince, the Spaniards became first considerable in the eye of the World, and grew to be a terror to the neighbouring Nations. Nomen Hispanicum obscurum antea et Vicinis pene incognitum, (saith the same Thuanus) tum primùm emersit, tractuque temporis in tantam magnitudinem excrevit, ut formidolosum ex eo, & terribile toti terrarium Orbi esse coeperit. And he saith true, with reference to the French and Italian Nations, to whom the Spaniards have administered no small matter of fear and terror: though unto others they appear no such dreadful Bugg-Bears. But sure it is, and we may warrantably speak it without any such impressions of fear and terror, that this Kingdom since that time is wonderfully both enlarged and strengthened: strongly compacted in itself with all the Ligaments both of Power and State, and infinitely extended over all the parts of the World; his Dominions beholding (as it were) both the rising and setting of the Sun; which before the Spaniard no Monarch could ever say. A greater change than any man can possibly imagine to have been effected in so short a time, as was between the first year of Ferdinand the Catholic, to the last year of Charles the fifth.  
Concerning the title of the most Catholic King, re-attributed to this Ferdinand, I find that Alfonso the first of Ovi●do was so named for his sanctity: with whom it died, and was revived in Alfonso the Great, the twelfth King of Leon and Oviedo, by the grant of Pope john the 8th. After it lay dead till the days of this Prince, who re-obtained this title from Pope Alexander the sixth: either because he compelled the Moors to be baptised, banished the jews, and in part converted the Americans unto Christianity; or because, having united Castille to his Dominions, surprised the Kingdom of Navarre, and subdued that of Granada; he was in a manner the Catholic, or general King of all Spain. The last reason seemeth to sway most in the restauration of this attribute; in that when it was granted or confirmed on Ferdinand by Pope Alexander the sixth; the King of Portugal exceedingly stomached at it; quando Ferdinandus imperio universam Hispaniam (saith Mariana) non obtineret, ejus tum non exigua parte penes Reges alios. It seems Emanuel could not think himself a King of Portugal, if the title of the Catholic King did belong to Ferdinand. Wherein he was of the same mind as was Gregory the Great, who when john of Constantinople had assumed to himself the title of the Occumenicall or Catholic Bishop, advised all Bishops of the World to oppose that arrogancy: and that upon the selfsame reason, Nam si ille est Catholicus, vos non esti● Episcopi, for it john were the Catholic Bishop, they were none at all. But upon what consideration soever it was first regranted, it hath been ever since assumed by his Posterity: to whose Crown as hereditary and in common use, as the most Christian King to France, the Defender of the Faith to England.  
And yet there was some further reason why the Spaniard might affect the title of Catholic King, his Empire being Catholic in regard of extent (though not of Orthodoxy of doctrines) as reaching not over all Spain only, but over a very great part of the World besides. For in right of the Crown of Castille he possesseth the Towns of Mellila and Oran, the Haven of Masalquivir, the Rock of Velez, and the Canary Lands in afric; the Continent and Lands of all America except Brasil, and some plantations in the North, of the English▪ Hollanders, and a few poor French. In the rights of the Kingdom of Arragon, he enjoyeth the Realms of Naples, Sicil, and Sardinia, with many Lands interspersed in the Mediterranean; and in right of the house of Burgundy, the Counties of Burgundy and Charolois, the greatest part of Belgium, with a title unto all the rest: besides the great Dukedom of Milan, the Havens of Telamonius and Plombino, and many other pieces of importance in Italy, held by investiture from the Empire. To which if those Estates be added which accrued to Philip the second by the Crown of Portugal, we have the Towns of Ceuta, Targier, and Maragon in Barbary, the Fortresses of Arguen and S. George in Guinea, the Lands of Azores, Madera, Cape Verd, S. Thomas, Del Principle on this side of the Cape, and of Mosambique on the other: in Asia all the Sea-coast almost from the Gulf of Persia unto China and many strong holds in the Moluccoes, Bantan, Zeilan, and other Lands; and finally in America the large Country of Brasil, extending in length 1500 miles. An Empire of extent enough to appropriate to these Monarches the stile of Catholic.  

The Monarches of Spain.  
A. Ch.  
1478. 1 

Ferdinand, K. of Arragon, Sicily, Sardinia, Majorca, Valentia, Earl of Catalogue, surprised Navarre, and conquered the Realm of Naples.  
Isabel, Q. of Castille, Leon, Gallicia, Toledo, Murcia, Lady of Biscay, conquered Granada, and discovered America.    
1504 2 

Joan, Princess of Castille, Granada, Leon, etc. and of Arragon, Navarre, Sicily, etc.  
Philip, Archduke of Austria, Lord of Belgium.    
1516. 3 Charles, King of Castille, Arragon, Naples, etc. Archduke of Austria, Duke of Milan, Burgundy, Brabant, etc. Earl of Catalogue, Flanders, Holland, &c, Lord of Biscay, Fri●zland, Iltreict, etc. and Emperor of the Germans. He added the Realms of Mexico and Peru, the Dukedoms of Gelde●land and Milan, the Earldom of sutphen, and the Signeuries of Utrecht, Overyssell, and Growing, unto his Estates. A Prince of that magnanimity and puissance, that had not Francis the first in time opposed him, he had even swallowed all Europe. He was also for a time of great strength and reputation in ●unis and other parts of Africa, disposing Kingdoms at his pleasure: but the Turk broke his power there, and being hunted also out of overmany, he resigned all his kingdoms, and died private. 42.  
1558. 4 Philip II. of more ambition, but less prosperity than his Father; fortunate only in his attempt on the kingdom of Portugal, but that sufficiently balanced by his ill successes in the Netherlands, and against the English. For the Hollanders and their Confederates drove him out of eight of his Belgic Provinces: the English overthrew his Invincible Armada, intercepted his Plate-Fleets, and by awing the Ocean had almost impoverished him. And though he held for a time an hard hand upon France, in hope to have gotten that Crown by the help of the Leaguers: yet upon casting up his Accounts, he found that himself was the greatest Loser by that undertaking. So zealous in the cause of the Romish Church, that it was thought that his eldest Son Charles was put to death with his consent in the Inquisition-house, for seeming savourably inclined to the Low-Country- 〈◊〉, as the 〈◊〉 called them. These four great Kings were all of the Order of the ●arrer; but neither of the two that followed.  
1598. 5 Philip III Finding his Estate almost destroyed by his Father's long and chargeable Wars, first made peace with England, and then concluded a Truce for twelve years with the States of the Netherlands: which done, he totally banished all the Moors out of Spain, and was a great stickler in the Wars of Germany.  
1621. 6 Philip IU. Son of Philip the 3d, got into his power all the Lower ●aluinate; but lost the whole Realm of Portugal, and the Province of Catalonia, with many of his best Towns in Flanders, Artots, and Brabant, and some Ports in Italy, not yet recovered to that Crown from the power of the French.   
This Empire consisting of so many several Kingdoms united into one Body, may seem to be invincible. Yet had Queen Elizabeth followed the counsel of her men of War, she might have broken it in pieces. With 4000 men, she might have taken away his 〈◊〉 from him: without whose gold, the Low-Country Army (which is his very best,) could not be paid, and by consequence must needs have been dissolved. Nay Sir Walter Ralegh, in the Epilogue of his most excellent History of the World, plainly affirmeth, that with the charge of 200000 l, continued but for two years, or three at the most, the S●aniard● might not only have been persuaded to live in peace, but that all their swelling and overflowing streams, might be brought back to their natural channels, and old banks. Their own proverb saith, the Lion is not so fierce as he is painted: yet the Americans tremble at his name, it's true: and it is well observed by that great Politi●ian 〈◊〉 that things wcich seem 〈◊〉, and are not, are more feared far●e off, than 〈◊〉 at hand. Nor is this judgement built upon weak conjectures but such as show the power of Spain not to be so formidable as it's commonly supposed: which I find marshaled to my hand in this manner following. 1 The 〈…〉 his Realms and other Estates, severed by infinite distances both of Sea and Land, which makes one part unable to relieve or defend the other. 2 The 〈…〉 Wars, his Forces of necessity being long a gathering in places so remote from the ●oyall Seat; and being gathered, no less subject to the dangers both 〈…〉 and Land, before un●ted into a body, and made fit for action. 3 The danger and uncertainty which the most part of his 〈◊〉 Revenues are subject to, many times intercepted 〈◊〉 Pirates and open Enemies; sometimes so long delayed by cross Winds and Seas, that they come too late to serve the turn. 4 The different tem●ers and affections of a great part o● his Subjects not easily concurring in the same ends, or travelling the same way un●o them. 5 The 〈…〉 Portugueze, and Italian Provinces, not well affected, for their private and particular reasons, unto the Castilians; apt to be wrought on by the Ministers of neighbouring Princes; whom 〈◊〉 of State keep watchful upon all advantages, for the depressing of his power. 6 〈◊〉 last of all, the want of people of his own natural Subjects, whom he may best rely on for the increase and grandour of his Estates; exhausted and diminished by those ways and means which have been touched upon before; without any politic or provident course to remedy that defect for the time to come. And this I look on as the greatest and most sensible Error in the Spanish Government: therein directly contrary to the ancient Romans. Who finding that nothing was more necessary for great and important erterprises than multitudes of Men, employed all their studies to increase their numbers by Marriages, Colonies, and such helps, making their Conquered Enemies free Denizens of their Commonwealth; by which means the number of the Roman Citizens became so great (all being equally interressed in the preservation of it) that Rome could not be ruined (in Annibals' judgement) by any forces but her own. But on the other side the Spaniards employ none in their Plantations but their own native Subjects, and so many of them also in all their erterprises both by Sea and Land, that so many thousands going forth every year, in the flower of their age, not one of ten returning home, and those few which return, either lame or old, the country is not only deprived of the Men themselves, but also of the Children which might be born. An evidence whereof may be, that john the first of Portugal, who reigned before the several Voyages and Plantations of that people, was able to raise 40000 Men for the War of afric; whereas Emanuel, who lived after those undertake, had much a do to raise 20000 foot and 3000 horse on the same occasion, and Sebastian after that found as great a difficulty to raise an Army of 12000.  
As for the forces which the King of Spain is able to make out of all his Estates, they may be best seen by his preparations for the Conquest of England, France, and Flanders. In his design for England, Anno 1588. he had a Fleet consisting of 150 sail of Ships, whereof 66 were great Galleons, 4 Galleasses of Naples, 4 Galleys, the rest smaller Vessels: fraughted with 20000 Soldiers for land service, 9000 Sailors, 800 Gunners, 400 Pioners, 2650 pieces of Ordinance, not Reckoning into this account the Commanders and Voluntaries, of which last there were very great numbers, who went upon that service for Spoil, Merit, or Honour. In the design of Charles the fifth for the Conquest of Provence, he had no less than 50000 in the field; and in that of Philip the second for the reducing of Flanders, the Duke of Alva had an Army, at his first setting forward out of Italy, consisting of 8800 Spanish foot, and 1200 horse, all of them old experienced Soldiers, drawn out of Naples, Sicil, and the Duchy of Milan, 3600 Germane foot, 300 Lances, and 100 Harcubusiers on horseback of the County of Burgundy, all old Soldiers also, besides many Volunteers of great rank and quality, very well attended, and his old standing Army in the Belgic Provinces, a strength sufficient to have Conquered a far greater Country.  
Of standing forces in this Country he maintaineth in these Realms of Spain, but three thousand horse, and in his Forts and Garrisons no more than 8000 Foot, his Garrisons being very few, and those upon the Frontiers only, and in Maritime Towns; his Galies being served with Slaves out of Turkey and Barbary. And yet he is able on occasion to raise very great forces, partly because the ordinary Subjects are so well affected to their Prince, whom they never mention without reverence: and partly in regard there is so great a number of Fendataries and Noblemen, who are by Tenure to serve personally at their own charges for defence of the Realm. And certainly it must be a considerable force which the Noblemen of Spain are able to raise, considering the greatness of their Revenue, and the number of Vassals which live under them: it being supposed that the Dukes of Spain (of which there were 23 when my author lived) were able one with another to dispend yearly from 50000 Ducats to a 100000, some going very much above that proportion; and that of 36 Marquesses and 50 Earls, the poorest had 10000 Ducats of yearly Rent, and so ascending unto 50 and 60000. The Archbishops, Bishops, and others of the greater Clergy, being all endowed with fairer Temporal estates, than in most places of Europe, are also bound to serve (though not personally) on the like occasions. And to these services the Noblemen are for two reasons more forwards than the other Fendataries. 1 Because their honours descend not the jure from the Father to the Son, unless confirmed to the Son by the King's acknowledgement and compellation: which makes them more observant of him than in France or England, where it is challenged as a Birthright. 2 Because out of the gross body of these Noblemen, the King doth use to honour some with the title of Grandees, privileged to stand covered before the King, and to treat with him as their Brother: which being the highest honour which that State can yield, keeps those great persons in a readiness to obey his pleasure, in hope to come unto an honour of so high esteem.  
For the Revenues of this King, which ordinarily arise out of his Estates (taking Portugal into the account) they are computed at 11 millions of Crowns yearly, that is to say 4 from his Dominions in Italy, 2 from Portugal and the Appertinents thereof, 3 from the West-Indies, and the other 2 remaining from his Kingdoms in Spain. Besides this he receiveth yearly the Revenues of the Mastership's of all the great Orders in his Kingdom, incorporated to the Crown by Ferdinand the Catholic, not without good Policy and reason of State: the Masters (or Commendadors as they call them) of those several Orders drawing after them such troops of the Nobility, Gentry, and other dependants, that their power began to be suspected by the Kings themselves. By which addition there accrueth to the Crown (besides the opportunity of preferring servants of the greatest merit) above 150000 l. of yearly Rents. As for his Casualties and extraordinary ways of raising money, they are very great: reckoned by the Author of the General History of Spain to amount (according to divers opinions) to 14. 18. and 23 millions of Crowns. For making up which sum he puts in the First Fruits, and some, part of the tenths of Rectories, and other Church preferments, amounting to 3 millions yearly. And the Author of the Politic Dispute, etc. affirmeth the Pardons sent to the Indies, given him by the Pope, to be worth half a million of pounds yearly. Add hereunto the fall and disposal of all Offices, which make up a good round sum; and the free Gifts and Contributions of his Subjects, which amount unto a good Revenue. For the Kingdom of Naples presents him every third year with a million & 20000 Crowns; and Castille only at one time granted a Contribution of four millions to be paid in four years: his Subjects generally being so well affected unto the Crown, that he can demand nothing in reason of them which they are not ready to grant: the King of Spain being called in that regard by the Emperor Maximilian, the King of Men. And yet this great King is not counted to be rich in treasure, his expenses being very great. First, In keeping Forts and Garrisons in many parts of his Estates against the revolt of the Natives; Secondly, Maintaining so many Frontier places, against sorein Invasions; Thirdly, In the continual pay of an Armada for Conducting his Plate-Fleets from America; And last of all the many and unprofitable Wars of King Philip the second, so plunged the Crown in the Gulfs of Bankers and Money-Changers, that much of the Revenues of it stand engaged for payment to this very day.  

There are in Spain Arch-Bishops 11. Bishops 52. Universities 18. i e.  
1 Sevill,  
2 Granad●,  
3 S. jago,  
4 Toledo,  
5 Valladolit,  
6 Majorca,  
7 Salamanca,  
8 Alcala de Henares,  
9 Signenca,  
10 Ebora,  
11 Lisbon,  
12 Conimbre,  
13 Valentia,  
14 Lerida,  
15 Huesca,  
16 Saragossa,  
17 Tudela,  
18 Ossuna.    
And so much for Spain.   

OF THE OCEAN AND ISLES OF BRITAIN:  
BEfore we can arrive in Britain, the jast Western Diocese, we must cross the OCEAN, that ingens and infinitum pelagus, as Mela calleth it; in comparison of which, the Sea's beforementioned are but as Ponds or Gullets: a Sea in former times known more by fame than trial, and rather wondered at on the shore side, than any more remote place of it. The Romans ventured not on it with their Vessels, unless in the passage from France to Britain: and much famed is Alexander for his hazardous voyage on this unruly Sea, he having sailed in all but 400 Furlongs from the shore. The name and pedigree take here both from the Poets an Etymologists. The Poets make Oceanus to be the Son of Coelum and Vesta, or of Heaven and Earth. They termed him the father of all things, as, Oceanumque patrem rerum, in Virgil, because moisture was necessarily required to the constitution of all bodies: and usually painted him with a Bull's head on his shoulders, (whence Euripides called him 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Oceanus Tauriceps) from the bellowing and fury of the Winds; which from it come to the shore, and to which it is subject. As for the Children attributed unto him, they are doubtless nothing but the clouds and vapours hence arising. The name of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Oceanus, some derive from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, celer, because of its swiftness; some from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, findo, divido, because it cleaveth and interlaceth the earth: and others make it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, à celeriter fluendo, which agreeth in meaning with the first. Particular names it hath divers, according to the name of the shore by which it passeth, as Cantabricus, Gallicus, Britannicus, etc. The chief Isles of it, appertaining to Europe, besides those called the Azores or Isles of Tercera, which we have spoken of when we were in Portugal; those of the Aquitain Ocean, described in our History of France; those of the Netherlands and the Northern Seas, which are to be described hereafter in their proper places, are the British Lands, by many of the most ancient and approved Writers called simply BRITAIN, because united all in that common notion; though afterwards distinguished into the particular Appellations of Great Britain, Ireland, and the rest. Of which, as lying in my way betwixt Spain and Germany; or rather, as the next Diocese of the Empire to France and Spain, under the Praetorio Praefectus of Italy, I am next to speak.  

OF BRITAIN:  
BRITAIN, according to the largest latitude of that name and notion, comprehendeth all those Lands, both great and less, which lie in compass about Albion, or Britain properly so called: by Ptolemy called Britanniae, in the plural number. For speaking of France he thus subjoineth, Ex adverso hujus Britannia Insula, Albion ipsi nomen fuit, cum Britanniae omnes vocarentur. i e. Opposite hereunto lieth the Island of Britain, which formerly by a more proper name was called Albion, the name of Britain comprehending all the Isles adjoining. And in this Latitude and extent we now take the word, the whole dominion of these Lands, distinguished into several names, being united in the person and under the command of the King of Great Britain, that name including all the rest, as appendants of it, with reference to this called the Isles of Britain, or the 〈◊〉 Lands. Thus Aristotle in his Book De Mundo (if the Book be his) Quo in mari duae Insulae Britannicae si●ae sunt, quarum maximae Albion & jerna; i.e. In which Sea there are situate two British Lands of great note and compass, Albion (or Britain properly so called) and Ireland. Ptolemy goeth to work more punctually, and he states it thus. Complectitur prima haec Europae tabula duas Britannicas insulas, quas Dionysius Bretanides vocat, Hiberniam nempe & Albionem, cum minoribus al●quot adjacentibus i●sulis, ut sunt Orcades, Ebudae, Thyle, Mona, et reliquae suis nominibus expressae: that is to say, This first Table of Europe comprehendeth the two Lands of Britain, which Dionysius calls the Bretanides, namely Ireland and Albion, with some lesser Lands joining to it, as the O cades, the Hebrides, Thule, Anglesey, (or Man) and others called by distinct names. By which we see, first that the general name of Britain or the British Lands, comprehendeth all those which are situate in the Briti● Ocean: and secondly, that the greatest and most famous of them, more specially called Britain by the following Writers, was anciently called Albion, by its proper name. And it was called Albion, as my Authors tell me, either from Albion the Brother of Berg●on, the Son of Neptune, mentioned by Aeschilus, Dionysius, Strabo, Mela, Solinus, 〈◊〉 and others; it being not improper that the greatest Island of the Ocean should be deno●●luated from a Son of the greatest Sea-god: or from the old word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying White amongst the Greeks, (from whence the Latins had their Album,) by reason of the white chalky cliffs, seen by the Mariners a far off as they sailed those Seas.  
But to return again to Britain in the general notion, and to the several Lands which that name includeth, we may distinguish them into the Greater and the Lesser; the Greater subdivided into 1 Great B●itain, or Britain specially so called, and 2 Ireland; the Less●r into 1 the Orcadeses, 2 the H●brides, 3 Man, 4 Anglesey, 5 The Lands of the Severn Sea, 6 the Sorlinges, or Isles of Silly, 7 Wight, 8 Thanet, 9 Sunderland, and 10 Holy Island.   

GREAT BRITAIN.  
TO speak much of GREAT BRITAIN, or BRITAIN specially and properly so called, I hold somewhat superfluous, it being our home, and we therefore no Strangers to it. Yet as Mela once said of Italy, De Italia, magis quia ordo exigit, quam quia monstrari egeat, pauca dicentur, not a sunt omnia, so say I of Britain. It is so obvious to the eye of every Reader, that he needs not the spectacles of Letters. Yet something must be said, though for methods sake, rather than necessity. First then, we will begin with laying out the bounds thereof (as in other places) which are, on the East, the Germane Ocean, dividing it from Belgium, Germany, and Danemark: on the West, S. George's Channel, which divides it from Ireland; and to the North of that, with the main Vergivian or Western Ocean, of which the Ancients knew no shore; on the North, with the Hyperb●rcan or Deucaledonian Ocean, as Ptolemy calls it, extending out to Iseland, Freezeland, and the ends of the then known World; and on the South, the English Channel, which divides it from France.  
The length hereof from North to South, is reckoned at 620 Italian mlles; the greatest breadth from East to West, measured in a right line no more than 250 of the same miles, but by the crooks and bend of the Sea-coast, comes to 320 miles: the whole circumference accounted 1836 miles. The greatest Island in the World, except Java, Borneo, Sumatra, and Madagascar; and therefore by Solinus and some other Ancients (to whom those Lands were not known) called the other World: by others of late times the Lady and Mistress of the Seas. Situate under the 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, and 12th Climes: so that the longest day at the Lizard point in Cornwall (being the most Southernly part hereof) containeth 16 hours and a quarter; at Barwick, which is the Border of England and Scotland, 17 hours 3 quarters, and one hour more at Straithby head, in the North of Scotland: where some observe that there is scarce any night at all, in the summer Solstice, but a darker Twilight. To which alludes the Poet, saying, Et minima contentos nocte Britannos: and the Panegyrist in the time of Constantine, amongst other commendations which he gives to Britain, saith, that therein is neither extreme cold in Winter, nor any scorching heats in Summer; and that which is most comfortable, long days, and very lightsome nights. Nor doth the Panegyrist tell us only of the temperateness of the Air, or the length of the days; but of the fruitfulness of the soil: affirming Britain to be blessed with all the commodities of Heaven and Earth; such an abundant plenty of Corn, as might suffice both for Bread and Wine; the woods thereof without wild Beasts, the Fields without noisome Serpents, infinite numbers of milch-Beasts, and Sheep weighed down with their own Fleeces. Whereto add that of Alfred of Beverley, a Poet of the middle times, saying thus of Britain.  
Insula praedives quae toto vix eget orbe,  
Et cujus totus indiget orbis open.  
Insula praedives, cujus miretur et op●et  
Delicias SOLOMON, Octavianus opes.  
A wealthy Island, which no help desires,  
Yet all the World supply from her requires:  
Able to glut King SOLOMON with pleasures,  
And surfeit great Augustus with her treasures.  
Proceed we next to the name of Britain, of which I find many Etymologies, some forced, some fabulous and foolish, and but few of weight. That which hath passed for currant in former times (when almost all Nations did pretend to be of Trojan race) was that it took this name from Brutus, affirmed to be the Son of Silvius, who was the Grandchild of Aeneas, and the 3d King of the Latins of the Trojan Blood. Which B●utus having unfortunately killed his Father, and thereupon abandoning Italy with his friends and followers, after a long voyage, and many wander, is said to have fallen upon this Island, to have conquered here a race of Giants; and having given unto it the name of Britain, to leave the Sovereignty thereof unto his posterity, who quietly enjoyed the same till subdued by the Romans. This is the sum of the Tradition concerning ●rute: Which though received in the darker times of ignorance, and too much credulity; in these more learned days hath been laid aside, as false and fabulous. And it is proved that there was no such man as Brutus, 1 From the newness of his Birth, Geofry of Monmouth, who lived in the reign of K. Henry the second, being the first Author which makes mention of him: for which immediately questioned by Newbrigensis, another Writer of that Age. 2ly, By the silence of all Roman Historians, in whom it had been an unpardonable negligence to have omitted an Accident so remarkable, as the kill of a Father by his own Son (especially when they wanted matter to fill up the times) and the erecting of a new Trojan Empire in so great an Island. 
England.  3ly. By the Arguments which Caesar useth to prove the Britain's to be derived from the Galls, as Speech, Laws, Customs, Disposition, Making, and the like. 4ly. And lest it might be said, that though the Britan's in Caesar's time were of gallic race, yet there had been a former and more ancient people, who had their Original from the Trojans: Tacitus putteth off that dispute with an Ignoramus, Qui mortales initio coluerint parum & compertum est, saith that knowing writer. And 5ly. By the Testimony of all Roman Histories, who tell us that Caesar found the Britain's under many Kings, and never under the command of one sole Prince, but in times of danger. Summa Belli administrandi communi consensu commissa est Cassivellauno, as it is in Caesar: Dum singuli pugnabant, universi vincebantur, as we read in Tacitus. To omit therefore that of Brutus, and other Etymons as unlikely, but of less authority: the name of Britain is most probably derived from Brit, which in the ancient British signifieth Painted; and the word Tain, signifying a Nation: agreeable unto the custom of the ancient Britain's, who used to discolour and paint their bodies, that they might seem more terrible in the Eyes of their enemies. Britain is then a Nation of painted men; such as the Romans called Picts in the times ensuing. Which I prefer before the Etymology of Bocartus, a right learned man, but one that wresteth all originations to the Punic or Phoenician language: by whom this Island is called Britain or Bretannica, from Baret-anac, signifying in that language a Land of Tin, wherewith the Western parts of it do indeed abound. Other particulars concerning the Isle of Britain, shall be observed in the description of those parts into which it now doth stand divided, that is to say, 1 England, 2 Wales, and 3 Scotland.   

ENGLAND.  
ENGLAND is bounded on the East, with the Germane; on the West, with the Irish; on the South, with the British Oceans; and on the North, with the Rivers of Tweed and Solway; by which parted from Scotland: Environed with turbulent Seas, guarded by inaccessible Rocks: and where those want, preserved against all foreign invasions by strong Forts, and a puissant Navy.  
In former time the Northern limits did extend as far as Edinburgh Fryth on the East, and the Fryth of Dunbriton on the West, (for so far not only the Roman Empire, but the Kingdom of Northumberland did once extend:) the intervenient space being shut up with a Wall of Turfs by Lollius Vrbicus, in the time of Antoninus Pius. But afterwards, the Romans being beaten back by the Barbarous people, the Province was contracted within narrower bounds; and fortified with a Wall by the Emperor Severus, extending from Carlisle to the River Tine, the tract whereof may easily be discerned to this very day. A Wall so made, that at every miles end there is said to have been a Castle, between every Castle many Watch-Towers, and betwixt every Watch-Tower a Pipe of Brass, conveying the least noise unto one another without interruption: so that the news of any approaching enemy was quickly over all the Borders, and resistance accordingly provided. In following times the strong Towns of Barwick and Carlisle have been the chief Bars by which we kept the backdoor shut: and as for other Forts we had scarce any on the Frontiers, or Sea Coasts of the Kingdom, though in the midland parts too many. Which being in the hands of potent and factious Subjects, occasioned many to Rebel, and did create great trouble to the Norman Kings: till in the latter end of the reign of King Stephen 1100 of them were leveled to the very ground, and those few which remained dismantled and made unserviceable. The Maritime parts were thought sufficiently assured by those Rocks and Cliffs, which compass the Island in most parts: and hardly any Castle all along the shore except that of Dover; which was therefore counted by the French as the Key of England. But in the year 1538. King Henry the eighth, considering how he had offended the Emperor Charles the fifth, by his divorce from Queen Catharine, and incurred the displeasure of the Pope by his falling off from that See; as also that the French King had not only married his Son to a Niece of the Pope, but a Daughter to the King of Scots, thought fit to provide for his own safety, by building in all places where the shore was most plain and open, Castles, Platforms, and Blockhouses, many of which in the long time of peace ensuing were much neglected, and in part ruined.  
His Daughter Queen Elizabeth of happy memory, provided yet better for the Kingdom. For she not only fortified Portsmouth, and placed in it a strong Garrison, but walled the Kingdom round with a most stately, royal, and invincible Navy: with which she always commanded the Seas, and vanquished the mightiest Monarch of Europe; whereas her predecessors in their Se● service, for the most part, hired their men of War, from the Han●smen, and Genoese. Yet did neither of these erect any Castles in the inward part of the Realm: herein imitating Nature, who fortifieth the head and the feet only; not the middle of Beasts; or some Captain of a Fort, who plants all his Ordnances on the Walls, Bulwarks, and Outworks, leaving the rest as by these sufficiently guarded.  
The whole Island was first called Albion, as before is said, either from the Giant Albion, or ab al●us rupibus, the white Rocks towards France. Afterwards it was called Britain, which name being first found in Athen●us, amongst the Grecians, and in Lucretius and Caes●● amongst the Latins; followed herein by S●rabo, Pliny, and all other ancient writers, except Piolomie only, by whom called Albion as at first; 
England.  continued till the time of Egbert the first Saxon Monarch, who called the Southern parts of the Island England, from the Angles, who with the Juites and Saxons conquered it.  
It is in length 320 miles, enjoying a soil equally participating of ground fit for tillage and pasture: yet to pasture more than tillage are our people addicted, as a course of life not requiring so many helpers, which must be all fed and paid; and yet yielding more certain profits. Hence in former times Husbandry began to be neglected, villages depopulated, and Hinds for want of ●●tertainment to turn way-beaters: whereof Sir Thomas Moor in his●●topia complaineth, saying, that our Flocks of Sheep had devoured not only men, but whole houses and Towns. Oves (saith he) quae tam mites esse, tamque exiguo solent all; nunc tam edaces, et indomitae esse coep●rant, ut homines devorent ipsos, agros, domos, ●ppida vastent, as depopulentur. To prevent this mischief, there was a Statute made in the 4th year of Henry the 7th, against the converting of Arable Land into Pasture ground: by which course Husbandry was again revived, and the soil made so abounding in Corn, that a dear year is seldom heard of. Our Vines are nipped with the cold, and seldom come to maturity; and are more used for the pleasantness of the shade, than for the hopes of wine. Most of her other plenties and Ornaments, are expressed in this old verse following. Anglia, 1 Mons, 2 Pons, 3 Fons, 4 Ecclesia, 5 Foemina, 6 Lan●. That is to say, 
For 1 Mountains, 2 Bridges, 3 Rivers, 4 Churches fair,  
5 Women, and 6 Wool, England is past compare.   
1 First for the Mountains lifting up here and there their lofty heads, and giving a gallant prospect to the Lower Grounds; the principal are those of Mendip in Somerset, Malveru hills in Worcestershire, the Chiltern of Buckingham shire, Cotsall in Glocestershire, the Peak of Darbyshire, York Wolds, etc. All of them either bowelled with Mines, or clothed with Sheep, or adorned with Woods. The exact description of which, would require more time than I can spend upon that Subject. Proceed we therefore to  
2 The Bridges, which are in number 857. The chief of which are, the Bridge of Rochester, over Medway, the Bridge of Bristol, over Avon, and the Bridge of London, over Thames. This last standing upon 19 Arches of wonderful strength and largeness; supporteth continual ranges of buildings, seeming rather a street than a Bridge; and is not to be parallelld with any Bridge of Europe, though of late by some defacements made by fire, Anno 1632. the buildings are not so contiguous as they were before.  
The Rivers of this Country are in number 325. The chief is Thamisis, compounded of the two Rivers, Thame and Isis; whereof the former rising somewhat beyond Thame in Buckinghamshire, and the latter beyond Cyrencester in Glocestershire, meet together about Dorcester in Oxfordshire: the issue of which happy conjunction is the Thamisis or Thames. Hence it flieth betwixt Berks, Buckinghamshire, Middlesex, Surrey, Kent, and Essex; and so weddeth himself to the Kentish Medway, in the very jaws of the Ocean. This glorious River feeleth the violence of the Sea more than any River in Europe, ebbing and flowing twice a day more than 60 miles: about whose banks are so many fair Towns, and Princely Palaces, that a Germane Poet thus truly spoke.  
Tot campos, sylvas, tot regia tecta, tot hortos,  
Artifici exculios dextra, tot vidimus arces;  
Ut nunc Ausonio, Thamisis, cum Tibride certet.  
We saw so many Woods and Princely Bowers,  
Sweet Fields, brave Palaces, and stately Towers:  
So many gardens, dressed with curious care,  
That Thames with Royal Tiber may compare.  
The second River of note, is, Sabrina or Seavern. It hath its beginning in Plinlimmon hill in Montgomeryshire, and his end about seven miles from Bristol: washing in the mean space the walls of Shrewshury, Worcester, and Gloucester. 3 Trent, so called, for that 30 kind of Fishes are found in it, or that it receiveth 30 lesser Rivers: who having his Fountain in Staffordshire, and gliding through the Countries of Nottingham, Lincoln, Leicester, and York, augmenteth the turbulent current of Humber, the most violent stream of all the Isle. This Humber is not, to say truth, a distinct River, having a spring head of his own, but rather the mouth or Aestuarium of divers Rivers here confluent and meeting together, namely, Your, Darwent, and especially Ouse and Trent. And as the Dano●, having received into its Channel the Rivers Dravus, Savus, Tibiscus, and divers others, changeth his name into Ister: So also the Trent, receiving and meeting the waters above named, changeth his name into this of Humber; Abus, the old Geographers call it. 4 Medway, a Kentish River, famous for harbouring the Royal Navy. 5 Tweed, the North-East Bound of England, on whose Northern bank is seated the strong and impregnable Town of Barwick. 6 Tine, famous for Newcastle and her inexhaustible Coal-pits. These, and the rest of Principal note are thus comprehended in one of M. Draytons' Sonnets.  
Our Floods Queen Thames for Ships and Swans is crowned, 
England.   
And stately Severn for her shore is praised,  
The Crystal Trent for Fords and Fish renowned,  
The Avons fame to Albion's cliffs is raised,  
Carlegion Chester vaunts her holy Dee,  
York many Wonders of her Ouse can tell,  
The Peak her Dove, whose banks so fertile be,  
And Kent will say her Medway doth excel.  
Cotswoll commends her Isis to the Tame,  
Our Northern borders boast of Tweeds fair flood;  
Our Western parts extol their Willies Fame,  
And the old Lea brags of the Danish blood.  
4 The Churches, before the general suppression of Abbeys, and spoiling the Church ornaments, were most exquisite, the chief remaining, are 1 the Church of S. Paul founded by Ethelbert K. of Kent, in the place where once was a Temple consecrated to Diana: A Fabric of the largest dimensions of that kind of any in the Christian World; For whereas the so much celebrated Temple of S. Sophia in Constantinople hath but 260 foot in length, and 75 in breadth; this of S. Paul is 690 foot long, and 130 foot broad, the main body being 102 foot high, over which the Steeple of the Church was mounted 482 foot more: Which Steeple being made with Timber, and covered with Lead was by the carelesseness of the Sexton in the 5th year of the reign of Q. Elizabeth consumed with fire; which happening in a thundering and tempestuous day, was by him confidently affirmed to be done by lightning, and was so generally believed till honest Death: but not many years since to dis-abuse the world, he confessed the truth of it; on which discovery the burning of St. Paul's Steeple by lightning was left out of our common Almanacs, where formerly it stood amongst the ordinary Epoches, or accounts of time. A Church of such a gallant prospect, and so large dimensions, that had not the late reparation of it been discontinued, it would have been the stateliest and most majestical. Fabric in the Christian World. 2ly, the Collegiate Church of S. Peter in Westminster, (wherein I have the honour to be a Praebendary) famous for the Inauguration and the Sepulture of the Kings of England, the Tombs whereof are the most sumptuous, and the Chapel the most accurate piece of building in Europe. 3ly, the Cathedral Church at Lincoln. 4ly, For a private Parish Church, that of Radcliffe in Bristol. 5ly, For a private Chapel, that of King's College in Cambridge. 6ly, For the curious workmanship of the glass, that of Christ-Church in Canterbury. 7ly, For the exquisite beauty of those Fronts, those of Wells and Peterborough. 8ly, For a pleasant lightsome Church, the Abbey Church at Bath. 9ly, For an ancient and reverend Fabric, the Minster of York. And 10ly, to comprehend the rest in one, our Lady-Church in Salisbury, of which take these Verses.  
Mira canam, soles quot continet annus in unâ,  
Tam numerosa, feruut, aede, fenestra micat.  
Marmoreasque tenet fusas tot ab arte columnas,  
Comprensas horas quot vagus annus habet.  
Totque patent portae, quot mensibus annus abundat:  
Res mi●a, at verâ res celebrata fide.  
How many days in one whole year there be,  
So many Windows in one Church we see.  
So many marble Pillars there appear,  
As there are hours throughout the fleeting year.  
So many gates as Moons one year do view,  
Strange tale to tell, yet not so strange as true.  
5 The Women generally are more handsome than in other places, sufficiently endowed with natural beauties, without the addition of adulterate Sophistications. In an absolute Woman, say the Italians, are required the parts of a Dutch-Woman, from the girdle downwards; of a French-Woman, from the girdle to the shoulders; over which must be placed an English face. As their beauties, so also are their Prerogatives the greatest of any Nation: neither so servilely submissive as the French, nor so jealously guarded as the Italian: but keeping so true a decorum, that as England is termed the Purgatory of Servants, and the Hell of Horses; so it is acknowledged the Paradise of Women. And it is a common byword among the Italians, that if there were a Bridge built over the Narrow Seas, all the Women of Europe would run into ENGLAND. For here they have the upper hand in the streets, the upper place at the Table, the thirds of their Husband's Estates, and there equal share in all Lands, yea even such as are holden in Knight's service: privileges wherewith other Women are not acquainted. Of high esteem in former times amongst foreign Nations, for the modesty and gravity of their conversation; but of late times so much addicted to the light garb of the French, that they have lost much of their ancient honour and reputation amongst knowing and more sober men of foreign Countries, who before admired them.  
6 The Wool of En●land, is of exceeding fineness, especially that of Cotsall, in Glocestershire; that of Lemster, in Herefordshire; and of the Isle of Wight. Of this Wool are made excellent broad-cloths, dispersed all over the world, especially High Germany, Muscovy, Turkey, and Persia, to the great benefit of the Realm: as well in return of so much money which is made of them, as in setting to work so many poor people, who from it receive sustenance. Before the time of King Edward the 3d, English men had not the art, or neglected the use of making cloth: till whose time our Wool was transported unwrought. And as his Successors have laid Impositions on every cloth sold out of the Realm; so his Predecessors had, as their occasions required, some certain Customs granted on every sack of Wool. In the beginning of this Edward's Wars with France, the Cities and Towns of Flanders being then even to admiration rich, combined with him, and aided him in his Wars against that King. And he for his part by the composition then made, was to give them 140000 l. ready money, to aid them by Sea and Land, if need required, and to make B●uges, than one of the great Mart Towns of Christendom, the Staple for his Wools. Here the Staple continued 15 years, at which time the Flemings having broke off from the King; and he having by experience seen what the benefit of these Staples were; removed them from Bruges into England. And for the ease as well of his Subjects in bringing their Wools unto the Ports, as of such Foreign Merchants as came to buy; he placed his Staples at Excester, Bristol, Winchester, Westminster, Chichester, Canterbury, Norwich, Lincoln, York, and Newcastle, for England; at Caermarden for Wales; and at Dublin, Waterford, Cork, and Tredah, for Ireland. He further Enacted, that no English, Irish, or Welsh men should transport this Stapled commodity, no not by Licence (if any such should be granted) on pain of Confiscation, and Imprisonment during the King's pleasure. Lastly, he alured over hither divers Flemings, which taught our men the making of clothes, (who are now grown the best Clothworkers in the World:) and to encourage men in that Art, it was by a Statute of the 27th of Edward the 3d, enacted to be Felony, to carry any Wools unwrought. When England had some short time enjoyed the benefit of these Staples, the King removed them to Calais, which he had Conquered, and desired to make wealthy. From hence they were at several times and occasions translated, now to one, now to another Town in Belgium: and still happy was that Town, in what Country soever, where the English kept a house for this Traffic; the confluence of all people thither to buy, infinitely enriching it. Antwerp in Brabant long enjoyed the English Merchants, till upon some discontents between King Henry the 7th, and Maximilian, Archduke, and Lord of Belgium, they removed: but at their return again, were received by the Antwerpians, with solemn Procession, Princely Triumph, sumptuous Feasts, rare Banquet, and expressions of much Love, but more joy.. And the giving of some Cotsall Sheep by Edward the 4th, to Henry of Castille, and John of Arragon, Anno 1465. is counted one of the greatest prejudices that ever happened to this Kingdom,  
The Wool transported bringeth into the Kingdom no less than 1500000 l. and the Led half the sum, so that Lewis Guicciardine reporteth, that before the Wars of the Low-Countries, the Flemings and the English bartered wares yearly for 12 Millions of Crowns.  
The next commodity to the Wool, though not mentioned in the verse foregoing, are the rich and inexhaustible Mines of Cole, Led, and Tin: to say nothing of the Mines of Iron, as bringing more damage to the public by the spoil of Woods, than profit to particular persons in the increase of their Estates. The mines of Cole chiefly enrich Newcastle in Northumberland, and by that the great City of London, and many other good Towns besides: which could not possibly subsist in this general decay of Woods, and neglect of planting, but by this commodity. The Mines of Lead are most considerable in the Peak of Darbishire; those of Tin in Cornwall, where they dig Tin not much inferior to Silver in fineness. A commodity which brought great wealth to England in former times, the art of making it not being elsewhere known in Europe: till one of the Tinne-workers, flying out of England for a murder, passed into Germany, Anno 1240. and there discovered some Tin Mines in Misnia, not known before, and set on Foot that trade amongst them, to the great prejudice (saith my Author) of the Earls of Cornwall, who had before the sole Monopoly of that useful metal.  
To these particulars being matters of profit and necessity, If I would add such things as are for delight and pleasure; I might subjoin the Bells, and Parks; for which this Kingdom is as eminent among foreign Nations, as for any of those mentioned in the said old Verse. The Bells so many, tuneable, and of such excellent Melody to a Musical ear (brought more to the command of the skilful ringer than in former times) that it is thought there are more good Rings of Bells in this part of the Island than in half Christendom besides. Parks more in England than in all Europe. The first of which kind for the enclosing of Venison, being that of Woodstock, made by King Henry the first; whose example being followed by his Successors, and the Lords and great men of the Realm; the number so increased in a little time, that at the last, besides 55 Forests, and 300 Chases, there were reckoned 745 Parks in England, all well replenished either with Red or Fallow Deer.  
And that the Deer might graze with pleasure, and the Sheep with safety, great care was taken by our progenitors for the destruction of Wolves. I know it hath been a tradition of old Writers, that England never had any Wolves at all, and that they would not live here brought from other places; but it is not so: here being store of them, till Edgar King of England commuted the 20 l. of Gold, 300 l. of Silver, and 300 head of cattle imposed as an yearly tribute by King Athelstane upon Idwallo Prince of Wales, for the like yearly tribute of 300 Wolves, by which means they were quite rooted out in time, the Welsh protesting at the last they could find no more.  
The Air of this Country is very temperate, neither so hot as France and Spain in the Summer, because of its northerly situation, nor so cold in the Winter, because the air of this Kingdom being gross, cannot so soon penetrate as the thin air of France and Spain. For to say truth, the air in the Winter time is thick and foggy, cloudy, and much disposed to mists, especially near the Sea, and the greater Rivers: insomuch that many times the Sun is not seen to shine out clearly for some weeks together. And thereupon there goeth a Tale, that the great Constable of Castille being Ambassador to King james in the first Winter of his reign, and tarrying here about a month, is said not to have seen the Sun all the time of his stay: which occasioned him at his going on ship board, to desire such Lords and Gentlemen as attended him thither, to present his humble service to the King their Master, and to the blessed Sun of Heaven when they chanced to see him. And something also touching the temperature of the Air, may be ascribed unto the Winds, which participating of the Seas, over which they pass unto us, do carry with them a temperate warmth.  
But if warmth were all the benefit we received from the Seas, it might indeed be said, that we were come from God's blessing, into the warm Sun: but it is not so. For there are no Seas in Europe that yield more plenty of fish than ours. Our Oysters were famous in the times of the old Romans, and our Herrings are now very beneficial unto the Netherlands, to whom, the Englishmen, reserving to themselves a kind of Royalty, (for the Dutch by custom demand liberty to fish of Scarborough Castle in Yorkshire) have yielded up the commodity by which those States are exceedingly enriched, and our Nation much impoverished, and condemned for laziness and sloth. Besides the loss of employment for many men, who using this trade might be a seminary of good and able Mariners, as well for the Wars, as for further Navigations and discoveries; cannot but be very prejudicial to the strength and flourishing of the Commonwealth and Empire.  
But to make this appear more fully in all particulars, I shall extract some passages out of a M. S. discourse of the late learned Knight Sir john Burroughs, principal King of Arms by the name of Garter, entitled, The Sovereignty of the British Seas. By which it doth appear, that there is fishing in those Seas for Herrings, Pilchards, Cod, Ling, or other Fish, at all times of the year: and that too in so plentiful a manner, that not long since near Minnegal on the Coasts of Devonshire, 500 Ton of Fish were taken in one day, and 3000. pound-sworth in another near S. Ives in Cornwall; the Hollanders taking at one draught 20. lasts of Herrings. 2ly. That almost all Nations hereabouts, as French, Spaniards, Netherlanders, and those of the Hanse, do mightily improve themselves both in power and wealth, by the benefit of the English Fishing; insomuch as 10000 Sail of foreign Vessels (of which 1400. from the Town of Emden in East-Priseland only) are thought to be maintained by this trade alone. 3ly. That the Hollanders in particular employ yearly 8000 Vessels of all sorts for this trade of Fishing on our Coasts, whereby they have a Seminary of 150000 Sailors and Mariners, ready for any public service: all which maintain treble that number of Men, Women and Children, of several trades upon the Land. 4ly. That for the holding up of this trade, the said Hollanders, inhabiting a Tract of Land not so big as many of our Shires, do build 1000 sail of Ships yearly; and thereby furnish all the parts of the World (even as far as Brasil,) with our commodities, returning home those of other Countries in exchange thereof, which they sell to us many times at their own prices. 5ly. That the said Hollanders (as appeared upon computation) made in one year of the Herrings only, caught upon these Coasts, the sum of 5 Millions of our pounds, (the Customs, and tenth Fish, advancing to the public Treasury no less than 800000 l. Sterling: it being thought, that the Herrings caught by those of the Hanse Towns, and other Nations, amount to as great a sum as that. 6ly. And finally, that by erecting only 250 Busses, (Vessels of great Bulk and Stowage, but not swift of sail) for the Herring-Fishing, (which is not a sixth part of those which are employed yearly by the Hollanders) either at the public charge of the State of England, or by private Adventurers thereto authorized and regulated; there would be found employment yearly for 1000 ships, and at least 20000 Mariners and Fishers at Sea, and consequently for as many Tradesmen and Labourers at Land: by means whereof, besides the vindication of our credit now at such a loss, there would arise in Customs, Tonnage, Poundage, and other Imposts, no less than 300000 l. per Annum to the public Treasury. The prosecution of which Project (if not in greater proportion than that before) as it was once designed by Mr. Attorney Noy, my much honoured Friend: so do I heartily commend it to the care of the State, and to his Successors in that Office, as the fittest Remembrancers to advance it; there being no readier way than this to make the people wealthy, and the Nation formidable.  
For notwithstanding these advantages of Fish, the Diet of England is, for the most part, Flesh, In London only there are no fewer than 67500 Beefs, and 675000 Sheep slain, and uttered in a year, besides Calves, Lambs, Hogs-flesh, and Poulterer's ware. To prove this, Suppose there be in London 60 Butchers Free of the City, whereof every one, and one with another, killeth an Ox a day, for so at least they do. Then reckon (as the London Butchers do affirm) that the Foreiners in the Suburbs and Villages sell four for their one. Lastly, count for every Ox ten sheep, (for this is also certainly known) to be killed and sold, and you have both the numbers abovementioned. The Earl of Gondamor, once the Spanish Leaguer here, having in some several Market days seen the several Shambles of this great City, said to them who made the discovery with him, That there was more Flesh eaten in a month in that Town, than in all Spain in a year. Now had I his skill who by the length of Hercules Foot, found out the proportion of his whole body, I might by this Provision of Flesh consumed in the head, guess at the Quantity of that which is spent in the body of the Realm. But this I leave to be determined by an abler hand. The usual and natural drink of the Country is Beer, so called from the French word Boire, (for Wines they have none of their own growing, as before is said) Which, without controversy, is a most wholesome and nourshing beverage; and being transported into France, Belgium, and Germany, by the working of the Sea is so purged, that it is amongst them in highest estimation; celebrated by the name of ●a bonne Beere d' Angle Terre. And as for the old drink of England, Ale, which cometh from the Danish word O●la, it is questionless in itself, (and without that commixture which some are accused to use with it) a very wholesome drink; howsoever it pleased a Poet in the time of Henry the 3d, thus to descant on it: 
Nescio quid monstrum Stygiae conforme paludi,  
Cervisiam pleriq, vocant, nil sp●ssius illa  
Dum bibitur, nil clarius est dum mingitur, ergo  
Constat quod multas faeces in ventre relinquit.  In English thus, 
Of this strange drink so like the Stygia● lake,  
Men call it Ale, I know not what to make.  
Folk drink it thick, and piss it very thin;  
Therefore much Dregs must needs remain within.   
Now to conclude this general discourse concerning England, there goes a tale, that Henry the 7th, (whose breeding had been low and private) being once pressed by some of his Counsel, to pursue his title unto France; returned this Answer: that France indeed was a flourishing and gallane Kingdom; but England in his mind was as fine a Seat for a Country Gentleman, as any could be found in Europe.  
Having stayed thus long in taking a Survey of the Country itself, together with the chief commodities and pleasures of it; and amongst them, of the Women also, (as the method of the old Verse led me on:) it is now time that we should look upon the men. And they are commonly of a comely feature, gracious countenance, for the most part gray-eyed, pleasant, beautiful, bountiful, courteous, and much resembling the Italians in habit, and pronunciation. In matters of war, (as we have already proved) they are both able to endure, and resolute to undertake the hardest enterprises: in peace quiet, and not quarrelsome; in advice or counsel, sound and speedy. Finally, they are active, hearty, and cheerful. And yet I have met with some Gentlemen, who upon the strength of a little travel in France, have grown so un. Englished, and so affected or besotted rather on the French Nation, that they affirm the English, in respect of the French, to be an heavy, dull, and Phlegmatic People, of no dispatch, no mettle, no conceit, no audacity, and I know not what not. A vanity, meriting rather my pity, than my anger: Perhaps in vi●ifying their own Nation they had consulted with julius Scaliger, who in the 16 chap. of his 3d Book De re Poetica, giveth of the two most noble Nations, English, and Scotish, this base and unmanly Character, Goshi belluae; Scoti non minùs; Angli perfidi, inflati, feri, contemptores, stolidi, amentes, inertes, i●hospitales, immanes. His bolt (you see) is soon shot, and so you may happily guests at the Quality of the Archer. A man indeed of an able learning, but of his own worth so highly conceited, that if his too much learning made him not mad, yet it made him to be too peremptory and arrogant. To revenge a national disgrace on a Personal, is an ignoble victory. Besides Socrates' resolution in the like kind, in my opinion was very judicious, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, If an Ass kick us, we must not put him in the Court. To confute his censure in every point, would be to him too great an honour and for me too a great labour; it being a task, which of itself would require a Volume. The best is, many shoulders make the burden light; and other Nations are as deeply engaged in this quarrel against that proud Man, as ours: for so maliciously hath he there taxed all other people, that that Chapter might more properly have been placed among his Hypercriticks.  
How the English, and Germans, which of all Nations are thought most given to their bellies, do agree and differ in this point, the same Scaliger hath thus showed in one of his Epigrams.  
Tres sunt Convivae, Germanus, Flander, et Anglus,  
Dic quis edat m●lius, quis meliusve bibat.  
Non comedis German, b bis; tu non bib●s Angle,  
Sed comedis; comedis Flandre, bibisque benè.  
Dutch, Flemings, English, are your only guests,  
Say which of all doth eat, or drink it best,  
Th' English love most to eat, the Dutch to swill,  
Only the Fleming eats and drinks his fill.  
Thus was it in his time with the English Nation; though since, I fear, we have borrowed too much of the Dutch, and learned a great deal more than needs of the Fleming also.  
The Nobility of this Country is not of so much unlimited Power, as they are to the prejudice of the State) in other Countries; the name of D●kes, Earl●, and Marquestes, being mee●ly 〈◊〉; whereas in other places they have some, absolute, some, mixed government; so that upon any 〈◊〉 distaste, they will stand on their own gnard, and slight the Power of their 〈◊〉 And on the other side, the Commonalty enjoy a multitude of Privileges above all other Nations 〈◊〉 being most free from Taxes, and burdenous Impositions, but what they take upon themselves by their own consent. They have twice in a year a laudable custom (no where else to be seen) justice administered even at their own doors, by the Itinerary judges of the Kingdom: an Order first instituted by King Henry the 2d. They dwell together with Gentlemen, in Villages and Towns, which makes them favour of civility and good manners; and live in far greater reputation, than the 〈◊〉 in Italy, Spain, France, or Germany; being able to entertain a stranger honestly; diet him plentifully, and lodge him neatly.  
The Clergy was once of very great riches, as appeareth by that Bill preferred to King 〈◊〉 the 5th, against the temporal revenues of the Church, in which it was suggested, that they were able to main am 15 Earls, 1500 Knights, 6000 men of Arms, more than 1000 Almshouses, and yet the King might clearly put up 20000 l. per An●um into his Exchequer. How true this was, I cannot say. But a●ter this King Henry the 8th took his Opportunities to pair away the excr●seencies of it, demolishing the Monasteries, and Religious Houses, and paring off the superstuities of Bishoprics and Cathedral Churches: in which he found not a few followers amongst the Ministers and great Officers of State and Court in the time of King Edward the 6th, and Queen Elizabeth. Yet left they not the Clergy so poor and naked, or destitute of the encouragements and rewards of learning, but that they have been still the objects of a covetous envy (that which the former Harpies left them being thought too much) though for abilities of learning (I dare boldly say it) not to be parallelled in the word. For besides 5439 Paro-Benefices, being no Impropriations; and besides the Vicarages, most of which exceed the competency beyond Seas, there were left in England at the time of the Reformation under Queen Elizabeth, 21 Bishoprics, (taking those of Wal●s into the reckoning) 26 Deaneries, ●0 Archdeaconries, and 544 Dignities and prebend's; most of which, places of fair revenue. And as for the maintenance of Priests, Monks, and Friars, before the Reformation there were reckoned 90 Colleges, besides those in the Universities, 110 Hospitals 3374 Chanteries and free Chapels, and 645 Abbeys and Monasteries: more than half of which had above the yearly income of 200 l. in old rents, many above ●0●0, and some 4000 almost. So studious were our Ancestors both in those times of blindness, and these of a clearer sight, to encourage men to learning, and then reward it.  
The soldiery of England is either for the Land, or for the Sea. Our Victories by Land are most apparent, over the Irish, Scots, Cypri●ts, Turks▪ and especially French, whose kingdom hath been sore shaken by the English many times, especially twice by King Edward the 3d, and Henry the 5th: this latter making so absolute a conquest, that Charles the 7th like a poor Royed ' Ividot, confined himself to Bo●rges, where (having cashiered his retinue) he was found in a little Chamber at Supper with a napkin laid before him, a rump of mutton, and two chickens. And so redoubted even after our expulsion from France, (our civil dissensions rather causing that expulsion, than the French valour) was the English name in that Country, that in the Wars between K. Charles the 8th, and the Duke of Bretagne, the Duke, to strike a terror into his Enemies, apparelled 1500 of his own Subjects, in the arms and Cross of England. But as the Ass, when he had on the Lion's skin, was for all that but an Ass and no Lion: so these Britons, by the weak resistance they made against their Enemies, showed that they were indeed Britons, and no English men. Spa●n also tasted the valour of our Land-Soldiers, when John of Gaunt pursued his title to 〈◊〉, was sent home with 8 Wagons laden with gold, and an annual pension of 10000 marks; as also when the Black Prince reestablished K. Peter in his Throne. And then also did they acknowledge, though they felt not the puissance of the English, when Ferdinand the Catholic surprised the Kingdom of Navarre. For there were then in 〈◊〉, a Town of Guipuse, English Foot, 〈…〉 there to join with this Ferdinand, in an expedition against France. Concerning which 〈…〉 giveth this 〈◊〉. That the Kingdom of Navarre was yielded rather for the fear and re 〈◊〉 〈…〉 English Forces that were at hand, than by an● puissance of the King of Arragon. Since those 〈◊〉 the Spaniard much esteemed us, as appeareth by this Speech of theirs to our Soldiers at 〈…〉. You are all tall Soldiers, and therefore when you come down to the Trenches, 〈…〉, and look for blows; but as for these base and cowardly French, when they come, 〈…〉 nothing to do, but play, or 〈◊〉 our Ramparts The like the Netherlan●● 〈…〉 only this is the grief of it, The English are like Pyrrhus' King of E●yrus, fortunate to conquer kingdoms, but unfortunate in keeping them. Not to say any thing of the late but great experience, which the English Soldiery hath gotten by the Civil broils among them 〈◊〉. At which my heart so ●keth, and my hand so trembleth, that I shall only add in the words of 〈◊〉, 
Heu quantum pot● it coeli pelagique 
England.  parari  
Hoc, quem Civiles fuserunt sanguine dextrae.  That is to say, 
How much both Sea and Land might have been gained  
By that dear blood, which Civil Wars have drained.   
As for their valour at Sea, it may most evidently be perceived in the battle of Scluse, wherein King Edward the 3 d, with 200 Ships, overcame the French Fleet consisting of 500 Sail of which be sunk 200, and slew 30000. Soldiers. Secondly, at the battle in 88 wherein a few of the Queen's Ships vanquished the invincible Armado of the King of Spain, consisting of 134. great Galleons, and Ships of extraordinary bigness. Sir Francis Drake with 4 Ships, took from the Spaniard one million, and 189200 ducats in one Voyage, Anno 1587. And again with 25 Ships, he awed the Ocean, sacked S. jago, S. Dominieo, and Cartag●na; carrying away with him, besides Treasure, 240 Pieces of Ordnance. I omit the Circumnavigation of the whole World, by this Drake and Candish; the voyage to Cales, as also how one of the Queen's Ships named the Revenge, in which Sir Richard Greenvile was Captain, with 180 Soldiers (whereof 90 were sick on the ballast) maintained a Sea-fight for 24 hours against above 50 of the Spanish Galleons. And though at last, after her Powder was spent to the last barrel, she yielded upon honourable terms: yet she was never brought into Spain, having killed in that sight more than 1000 of their Soldiers, and sunk 4 of their greatest Vessels. I omit also the Discovery of the Northern passages, by Hugh W●lloughby, Davis, and Frobisber; concluding with that of Kekerman, Hoc certum est, omnibus hodie gentibus navigandi industria & peri●●ay superiores esse Anglos; & post Anglos, Hollandos: Though now I acknowledge not by what neglect and discontinuance of those honourable employments, the Hollanders begin to bereave us of our ancient Glories, and would fain account themselves Lords of the Seas, and probably had been so indeed, had not His Majesty by the timely reinforcing of his Naval Power, Anno 1636. recovered again the Dominion of it.  
The English Language is a De-compound of Dutch, French and Latin, which I conceive rather to add to its perfection, than to detract any thing from the worth thereof; since out of every Language we have culled the most significant words, and equally participate of that which is excellent in them; their imperfections being rejected: For it is neither so boisterous as the Dutch, nor so effeminate as the French▪ yet as significant as the Latin, and in the happy conjunction of two words into one, little inferior to the Greek.  
The Christian Faith was first here planted as some say, by S. Peter and Paul, more probably (as others say) by joseph of Arimathea, whose body they find to have been interred in the Isle of Avalo, where the Abbey of Glastenbury after stood. But that of his plantation being almost rooted out by long Persecutions, and no supply of Preachers sent from other places, Lucius, a King of Britain (and the first Christian King of Europe, Anno 180. or thereabouts, sent his Ambassadors to Eleutherius the then Pope of Rome to be furnished with a new supply of Pastors, if not to plant, yet at the least to water, and confirm the Gospel planted here before but almost rooted out again by prevailing Gentilism. At which time Lucius did not only receive the Faith himself, but by the piety of his example, and the diligence of the first Preachers sent from Rome (being both of them natural Britan's) it spread by little and little over all his Dominions; and in some tract of time over all the Island. Which being thus recovered to the Faith of Christ, was forthwith furnished with Bishops and Metropolitans, according to the number of the Provinces and principal Cities (twenty eight in all) continuing here as long as Christianity itself. For not to trust herein to the authority of the British History, we find three Bishops of this Isle subscribing to the Council of Arles, Anno 314. Eborius Bishop of York, Restitutns' Bishop of London, and Adelsius Bishop of Colchester, there called Colonia Londinensium; and some of them also present in the Council of Sardira, Anno 358. concurring with the rest in voting to the condemnation of the Arian Heresies; and the same or others the next year in the Synod of Ariman. And when the Britan's were expulsed their native Country, or shut up in the mountainous parts of the Ordovices, and Silures, which we now call Wales, they carried Christianity and Bishops along with them: Augustine the Monk, finding no fewer than seven Bishops in the British Church, when he was sent by Gregory the Great to convert the English. And yet it is no fabulous vanity, (as some men suppose) to say that Augustine the Monk first preached the Gospel in this Country, because it must be understood in that saying, not with Relation to the B●itans, but the English Saxons; from whom these parts of the Isle had the name of England; and from whom both the Britan's and the Faith itself were driven into the Mountains of Wales and Cornwall, and Heathenism introduced again over all the Kingdom. Long after which it pleased God, that Gregory the Great (but at that time a Deacon only in the Church of Rome) seeing some handsome youths to be sold in the open Market, demanded what and whence they were; to whom it was answered they were Angli: and well may they be so called (saith he) for they seem as Angels. Ask again of what Province they were amongst the Angli; and answer being made of the Province of Deira (part of the Kingdom of the Northumbrians) therefore (said he) de ira Dei sunt liberandi. And lastly, understanding that the King of their Nation was named Awl; how fitly (said he) may he sing Allelujahs to the most High God. After which time he seriously endeavoured the Conversion of the English Nation; which being Pope he happily effected, by the travel and diligence of Augustine the Monk, the first Archbishop of Canterbury. And so well did the work prosper after this beginning, that not only all the Saxons did receive the Gospel, but communicated the Light of it to other Nations; the Hassians, Franconians, and Turingians being converted by Winifred; the Frisons or Hollanders by Wittikind the first Bishop of Vtrecht; the Saxons of Westphalen, by Willdrode, the first Bishop of Br●me; all of them being English Saxons, as we find in Beda and some others.  
Now as these parts of Britain were the first which generally entertained the Gospel; so were they the first also in these later times which universally submitted to the Reformation of such corruptions as had been brought upon them by the power and tyranny of the Church of Rome. Endeavoured first in France, by the Albigenses, and Waldenses, as was said before: Who being suppressed and ruinated by the sword of the Kings of France, sheltered themselves in the mountainous parts of Gascoigne and Guienne, then in possession of the English; who by that means became acquainted with their Tenets, maintained here publicly by Wiclef, and spreading underhand amongst the people of this Kingdom, till the times of Luther, and the Reformation by him aimed at. Which being in most other Countries received tumultuously by the power of the People, was here admitted upon mature deliberation by the authority and consent of the Prince and Prelates the Architects in this great work, without respect unto the Dictates of Luther or Calvin, but looking only on God's Word, and the Primitive Patterns; abolishing such things as were repugnant unto either, but still retaining such Ceremonies in Gods public worship▪ as were agreeable to both, and had been countenanced by the practice of the Primitive times. A point wherein they did observe a greater measure of Christian prudence and moderation, than their neighbour Churches, which in a mere detestation of the See of Rome, allowed of nothing which had formerly been in use amongst them, because defiled with Popish Errors and abuses: and thereby utterly averting those of the Papal party from joining with them in the work, or coming over to them when the work was done. Whereas had they continued an allowable correspondency in these extrinsecals of Religion with the Church of Rome, their party in the World had been far greater, and not so much stomached as it is. And so it was conceived by the marquis de Rhosne, after Duke of Sally, and Lord High-Treasurer of France, and one of the chief men of that party there: when being sent Ambassador to King james, from King Henry 4ds. he had observed the Majesty and Decency of God's public Service, in some Cathedrals of this Kingdom; he said, Religion would be soon defaced, and trod under foot; if not preserved and fenced about with the hedge of Ceremonies.  
As for the Government of the Church since the last Conversion, as by the piety and example of Lucius there were founded three Archbishoprics, and 25. Bishoprics, according to the number of the Archi Flamines and Flamines (whose great Revenues were converted to more sacred uses) in the times of Idolatry: So by the like pious care of Pope Gregory the Great, by whose means this last Conversion happened; Archbishoprics, and Bishoprics were designed to convenient places. The number 26 in all, to each Province twelve, besides the two Archbishops and Metropolitans: wherein he had the happiness to have his desires fulfilled, though the number was not made complete till these later days, nor with such equal distribution as he did intend. For in the Province of York laid waste and desolate by the Danes, and not so soon converted as the other was, the number of the Suffragan Bishops came not up to his purpose, but did as much exceed in the Province of Canterbury: especially when King Henry the 8th had incorporated Wales with England, and founded five Episcopal Sees out of the ruins and Revenues of some principal Monasteries, of which none but the Bishopric of Chester (and that of the Isle of Man, which maketh up the 27th) were laid unto the Province of York. And so it stood, notwithstanding the alterations of Religion, without any dispute, till Calvin having hammered out his new Presbrterie, and recommended it to the use of all the Christian Churches (the History whereof we had succinctly in the Alpine Provinces) found many apt Scholars in most places to decry this Order, though consonant to the word of God, and most pure Antiquity.  
But the truth is, it was not so much the Authority of Calvin, or the malignant zeal of Beza, or the impetuous clamours of their Disciples, which caused the Episcopal Order to grow out of credit; as the Avarice of some great persons in Court and State, who greedily gaped after the poor remnant of their Possessions. It had been else a miracle that Calvin's Platform, made only for the use of a private City, and not proportioned, no nor intended at the first, to the estate of other Churches, especially where the Bishops had been instrumental in the Reformation, should be so headily received in some Kingdoms, and so importunately and clamorously desired in others.  
The most valorous Soldiers of this Country, when possessed by the Britain's, were 1 Cassib●lane, who twice repulsed the Roman Legions, though conducted by Caesar; and had not a party here at home been form against him; he had for ever done the like. 2 Pratusagus, King of the Iceni. 3 Constantine the Great. 4 Arthur, one of the World's nine Worthies. In the times of the Saxons, 5 Guy Earl of Warwick, and 6 King Edmund Ironside; and 7 Canutus the Dane. Under the Normans, of most note have been, 1 William, surnamed the Conqueror, 2 Richard, and 3 Edward, both the first of those names, so renowned in the wars of the Holy-Land; 4 Edward the 3d, and 5 Edward the Black Prince, his Son, Duo fulmina belli, as famous in the wars of France; 6 Henry the fifth, and 7 john Duke of 〈◊〉 his Brother, of equal gallantry with the other. 8 Montacute Earl of Salisbury, 9 S. 〈◊〉 Fastolf, and 10 S. I●hn Hawkwood, of great esteem for valour in France and Italy: not to descend to later times. And for Sea Captains, those of most note, have been H●wkins, 〈◊〉, Burrought, Jenki●s●r, Drake, Frobisher, Cavendish and Greenvile; of some of which we have spoke already, and of the rest may have an opportunity to say more hereafter.  
Scholars of most renown amongst us. 1 Alcuinus, one of the Founders of the University of 〈◊〉. 2 B●d●, who for his Piety and Learning obtained the Attribute or Adjunct of Venerabilis. Concerning which the Legends tells us, that being blind, his Boy had knavishly conducted him to preach to an head of stones: and that when he had ended his Sermon with the Gloria Patri, the very Stones concluded, saying Amen, Amen Venerabilis Bed●. But other of the Monkish writers do assign this reason, and both true alike, that at his death some unlearned Priest intending to honour him with an epitaph, had thus far blundered on a verse, viz. Hic sunt in fossa Bedae ossa: but because the verse was yet imperfect, he went to bed to consider of it, leaving a space betwixt the two last words thereof, which in the morning he found filled up in a strange Character, with the word Venerabilis; and so he made his Verse, and Beda (pardon this diversion) obtained that Attribute. 3 Anselm, and 4 Bradwardin, Archbishops of Canterbury, men famous for the times they lived in. 5 Alexander of Hales, Tutor to Thomas Aquinas, and Bonaventure. 6 Thomas of Walden, the professed enemy of W●●lef, against whom he writ. 7 john Wiclef parson of L●●terworth, in the County of Leicester, who so valiantly opposed the power and Errors of the Church of Rome, though he vented many of his own. Then since the times of the Reformation, 1 john jewel, Bishop of Salisbury, to whose learned and industrious labours, in defence of the Religion here by law established, we are still beholding. 2 Dr. john Reynolds, and 3 Mr. Richard Hooker, both of Corpus Christi College in Oxon; the first, a man of infinite reading, the second of as strong a judgement. 4 Dr. Whitakers of Cambridge, the Autagonist of the famous Bellarmine. 5 Dr. Thomas Bilson, and 6 Dr. Lancelot Andrews, both Bishops of Winchester▪ the Ornaments of their several times. 7 Bishop Montagne of Norwich, a great Philologer and Divine. 8 Dr. john W●itgu●ft, and 9 Dr. William Laud, Arch-Bishops of Canterbury. Of which last, and his discourse against Fisher the jesuit, Sir Edward Dering, his professed enemy, hath given this Character, that in that Book of his he had muzzled the jesuits, and should strike the Papists under the fifth rib, when he was dead and gone: and that being dead, wheresoever his grave should be, PAUL'S (whose reparation he endeavoured, and had almost finished) would be his perpetual Monument, and his own Book his lasting Epitaph. And as for those who have stood up in maintenance of the Church of Rome, those of most note were, 1 Dr. Harding, the Antagonist of Bishop jewel. 2 Nic. Sanders, and 3 Dr. Tho. Stapleton, to whose writings the great Cardinal Bellarmine doth stand much indebted. 4 Champion, and 5 Parsons, both Iesu●es, 6 and William Rainolds a Seminary Priest, and the Brother of Dr. john Rainolds spoken of before. Of which two Brothers (by the way) it is very observable, that William was at first a Protestant of the Church of England, and john trained up in Popery beyond the Seas. William out of an honest zeal to reduce his Brother to this Church, made a journey to him: where on a conference betwixt them it so fell out, that john being overcome by his brother's Arguments returned into England, where he became one of the more strict or rigid sort of the English Protestants; and William being convinced by the reasons of his Brother john, stayed beyond the Seas, where he proved a very violent and virulent Papist. Of which strange accident Dr. Alabaster, who had made trial of both Religions, and amongst many notable whimsies had some fine abilities, made this following Epigram; which for the excellency thereof, and the rareness of the argument, I shall here subjoin.  
Bella inter geminos plusquam Civilia Fratres,  
Traxerat ambiguus Religionis apex.  
Ille Reformatae Fidei pro partibus instat;  
Iste reformandum denegat esse fidem.  
Propositis causae rationibus, alterutrinque;  
Concurrere pares, & cecidere pares.  
Quod fuit in votis▪ Fatrem capit alteruterque;  
Quod fuit in fatis, perdit uterque fidem.  
Captivi gemini sine captivante fuerant,  
Et Victor victi transuga castra petit.  
Quod genus hoc pugnae est, ubi victus gaudet uterque;  
Et tamen alter-uter se superasse dolet.  
Which excellent Epigram, though not without great disadvantage to the Latin Original, I have thus translated.  
In points of Faith some undetermined jars,  
Betwixt two Brothers kindled Civil wars.  
One for the Church's Reformation stood;  
The other thought no Reformation good.  
The points proposed, they traversed the field  
With equal skill, and both together yield.  
As they desired, his Brother each subdue's;  
Yet such their Fate, that each his Faith did loose,  
Both Captive's, none the prisoners thence to guide;  
The Victor flying to the Vanquished side.  
Both joyed in being Conquered (strange to say)  
And yet both mourned because both won the day.  
And then for men of other Studies, 1 Lindwood the Canonist, 2 Cousins, and 3 Cowel, eminent in the studies of the Civil Laws; 4 Bracton, and 5 Briton, of old times; 6 Dier, and 7 ●ook of late days, as eminent for their knowledge in the Laws of England. 8 johannes de Sacro Bosco, the Author of the Book of the Spher, and 9 Roger Bacon, a noted Mathematician in the darker times. 10 Sir Francis Bacon the learned Viscount of S. Alban, of whom more hereafter. 11 Sr. Tho. More, Lord Chancellor, one of the Restorers of Learning to the Isle of great Britain. 12 Sr. Henry Savil of Eton, the reviver of Chrysostom, 13 Sir Henry Spelm●n, a right learned antiquary, and a religious assertor of the Church's rights. 14 Camden, Clarentieux, the Pausanias of the British Lands. 15 Matthew Paris, 16 Roger Hoveden, 17 Henry of Huntingdon, 18 William of Malmesbury, 19 Matthew of Westminster, and 20 Thomas of Walsingham; all known Historians. And finally for Poetry, 1 Gower, 2 Lidgate, a Monk of Bury, 3 the famous Geofrie Chawcer, Brother in Law to john of Gaunt the great Duke of Lancaster; of which last Sir Philip Sidney used to say, that he marvelled how in those misty times he could see so clearly, and others in so clear times go so blindly after him. 4 Sir Philip Sidney himself, of whom and his Arcadia, more when we come to Greece. 5 The renowned Spencer, of whom and his Fairy Queen in another place. 6 Sam. Daniel, the Lucan, 7 with Michael Draiton, the Ovid of the English Nation. 8 Beaumond, and 9 Fle●cher, not inferior unto Terence and Plautus; with 10 My friend Ben. johnson, equal to any of the ancients for the exactness of his Pen, and the decorum which he kept in Dramatic Poems, never before observed on the English Theatre. Others there are as eminent both for Arts and Arms, as those here specified: of whom as being still alive I forbear to speak: according to that caution of the Historian, saying, Vivorum ut magna admiratio, ●ta Censura est diffic●lis.  
But from the men to return again unto the Country, we find it to be subject (according to the several respects of Church and State) to a treble division: viz. 1 into 6 Circuits destinated to the cinerary judges. Secondly, into 22 Episcopal Dioceses. Thirdly, into 40 Shires. The Realm was first divided into Circuits by King Henry the second, who appointed twice in the year, two of the most grave and learned judges of the Land, should in each Circuit administer justice in the chief or head Towns of every Country. Of these judges one sitteth on matters Criminal, concerning the life and death of Malefactors; the other in actions Personal, concerning title of Land, Debts, or the like, between party and party. The first Circuit (for we will begin at the West) comprehendeth the Counties of Wilts, Somerset, Devon, Cornwall, Dorset, and Southampton; The second containeth the Counties of Oxford, Berks, Gloucester, Monmouth, Hereford, Worcester, Salop, and Stafford; The third hath in it the Counties of Surrey, Sussex, Kent, Essex, and Hartford; The fourth consisteth of the Shires of Buckingham, Bedford, Hu●tingdon, Cambridge, Norfolk, and Suffolk; The fifth of the shires of Northampton, Rutland, Lincoln, Nottingham, Derby, Leicester, and Warwick; And the sixth and last, of the Shires of York, Durham, Northumberland, Cumberland, Westmoreland, and Lancaster. So that in these six Circuits are numbered 38 Shires. The two remaining are Middlesex and cheshire: whereof the first is exempted, because of its vincinity to London, and the second, as being a County Palatine, and having peculiar judges and Counselors to itself.  
The second division, but more ancient far in point of time, is that of Dioceses, 22 in all, proportioned according to the number of Episcopal Sees: each Diocese having in it one or more Archdeaconries, for dispatch of Ecclesiastical business, and every Archdeaconry subdivided into Rural Deaneries, fewer or more, according to the bigness and extent thereof. Of these there are but four in the Province of York, that is to say, the Dioceses of York, Chester, Du●ham, and Carlisle: the other 18 (together with the 4 of Wales) being reckoned into that of Canterbury. In respect of which great authority and jurisdiction, the Arch-Bishops of Canterbury had anciently the titles of Primates and Metropolitans of all England; for some ages before the Reformation, used to take place in all General Councils at the Pope's right foot. Which custom took beginning at the Council of Lateran, when Vrban the second called Anselm the Archbishop of Ca●terbury from amongst the other Prelates then assembled, and placed him at his right foot, saying, includamus hunc in Orb nostr● tanquam alterius Orbis Papam, this happened Anno 10●9. They were anciently also Legatina●i; which honourable title was first given to Archbishop theobald by Innocent the second, and continued unto his successors. And both to honour their calling in the course of their Government, and to have the benefit of their Council being men of learning, both the Arch-Bishops and the Bishops, were anciently privileged to have their place and suffrage in the High Court of Parliament (ever since any Parliaments were first held in England) as Peers of the Realm; and that too in a double respect: first in relation had to their sacred Office, and secondly to those temporal estates and Baronies which they held of the King, yet did they not enjoy in the times of their greatest power and flourish all the Prerogatives and Privileges of the Temporal Barons: as neither being tried by their Peers in Criminal causes, but left to an Ordinary jury; nor suffered in examinations to make a Protestation upon their honour, to the truth of a fact, it put unto-their Oaths like others of the lower Clergy. As for their Ecclesiastical Courts, bt was ancient Ordered also, that besides such as appertained to the Arch-Bishops themselves, besides those holden by the Chancellors and Arch-Diacons of every Bishop in their several Dioceses, and some in many private parishes which they called Peculiars; and finally besides the Court of Visitation, held every third year by the Bishop himself in person, or his lawful Deputy; there should be also Synods or Convocations, which are the Parliaments of the Clergy, assembled primarily for the Reforming of the Church in Doctrine and Discipline, and secundarily for granting tenths and Subsidies to the King, and naturally consisting of all the Right Reverend Fathers, the Archbishops, Bishops, the Deans, Arch-deacons, and one Prebend out of each Cathedral, and a certain number of the Clergy, (two for every Diocese) elected by the rest to serve for them in that great Assembly; the Clergy not being bound anciently by any Act, to which they had not given consent by those their Proxies.  
The third and last Division, though the second in course of time, is that of Shires, made by King Alfride, both for the easier Administration of justice, and to prevent such Outrages and Robberies, as after the example of the Danes, the natural Inhabitants of the Realm began in all places to commit. For over every one of these Shires or Counties, he appointed an High-Sheriff and divers Officers, to see into the behaviour of private men, and to punish such as were delinquent: and in times of war either already begun, or intended, he instituted a Perfect or Lieutenant; to whom he gave authority to see their musters, their provision of arms, and if occasion served, to punish such as rebelled or mutinied. This wise King ordained also, that his Subjects should be divided into ten or tithings, every of which severally should give bond for the good abearing of each other; and he who was of that dissolute behaviour, that he could not be admitted to these tithings, was forthwith conveyed to the house of correction. By this course every man was not careful only of his own actions, but had an eye to all the nine for whom he stood bound; as the nine had over him: insomuch that a poor girl might travel safely with a bag of gold in her hand, and none durst meddle with her. The ancientest of these ten men, were called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the Tithingmen. Ten of the nighest or neighbouring tithings, made the lesser Division which we call hundreds; which name cannot be derived from the like number of villages, for none of our hundreds are so large; and one of them there is in Berk-shire, which containeth five hamlets only. We have then a division of the Realm, into 40 Shires; of the Shires into divers hundreds; and of the hundreds into ten tithings. And this division made by Alfride still remains in force●: as also doth the High Sheriff, and the rest of the subordinate Officers: the office of the High Sheriff consisting especially at this time, in executing Arrests, assisting the Itinerary Judges, gathering the King's Fines and Amerciaments, and raising the Posse Comitatus, if occasion be. But for the Civil part of government in the several Counties, it is most in the hands of such as we call justices of the Peace's, authorised by Commission under the Great Seal of England: appointed first by that prudent Prince King Edward the first, by the name of Custodes Pacis, Guardians of the Peace, and first called justices of the Peace in the 36 of King Edward the 3d, Cap. 11. A form of Government so much conducing to the prosperity of the Country, and the security of the People, that King james, the first Monarch of Great Britain, established it by Law in the Kingdom of Scotland. Then for the Courts, which are still kept in every Shire, they are either the County Court holden every month, wherein the Sheriff or his sufficient Deputy commonly presideth; or the Assizes and Court of Gaol-delivery held twice a year by the judges Itinerant, assisted by the justices of the Peace, and others in Commission with them. There are also two Officers in every hundred chosen out of the yeomanry, whom we call the Constables of the hundred: who receiving the Precepts or Warrants of the Sheriff, or justices dispatcheth them to the Tithingman or Petit Constable of each town and village in their several Divisions. And in each hundred, a Court kept once in three Weeks, by the Steward of the hundred, or his Deputy, capable of Pleas or Actions under the value of 40 s. though in some few of these Courts also (as in that of Slaughter-hundred in Gloucester) the value of the Action by some special Charter be left unlimited. The like Courts also holden in some ancient Burroughs. And besides these in every Village are two several Courts, and these two holden twice a year, if occasion be, held by the Steward of the Manor: in the one of which called the Court Lee●, there is Enquirie made into Treasons, Felonies, Murders, and other Cases falling between the King and the Subject; and in the other, which we call by the name of Court Baron, such only as concern the Lord and Tenants, and these last summened for the most part at the will of the Lord: So that Comines had (we see) good reason for this Affirmation, that of all the Signeuries in the World that ever he knew, the Realm of England was the Country in which the Commonwealth was best governed.  
To return again unto the Shires, some of them take their names from the old Inhabitants, as Cumberland from the Cymr● or ancient Britain's; Essex, and Sussex, from the East and South Saxons: some from the situation of them, as Northumberland, Norfolk, Suthfolk, Devonshire; this last so called from Devinam, a Welsh or British word, signifying Low Valleys, of which it very much consisteth: Some from the form or figure of them, as Cornwall, from the resemblance which it hath to an horn; and Kent, (in Latin, Cantium) because it lieth in a Canton or Corner of the Island: Some from Accidents therein, as Berkshire or Berockshire from the abundance of Box, which the Saxons call by the name of Beroc: the most part from the principal Town of all the County, as Gloucester, Oxford, and the like. Of these Shires the biggest beyond all compare is the County of York, out of which 70000 men may be raised for present service, if need so require. And in them all comprehended 8709 Parishes (besides those of Wales) not reckoning in such Chapels as we call Chapels of Ease, in greatness not inferour to many Parishes; 22 Cities, and 585 Market Towns which are no Cities: and in the Towns and Villages to the number of 145 Castles, or ruins of Castles; few of them places of importance, and such as are, belonging generally to the King, who suffer not any of their Subjects to nest themselves in Strong Holds and Castles.  
Cities of most observation in it, 1 London, seated on the Thames, by which divided into two parts, conjoined together by a stately and magnificent Bridge, spoken of before. The River capable in this place of the greatest Ships, by means whereof it hath been reckoned a long time for one of the most famous Mart-Towns in Christendom: and not long since had so much got precedency of all the rest, that the greatest part of the wealth of Europe was driven up that River. A City of great note in the time of the Roman conquest: to whom it was first known by the name of Londinum, a Town at that time of great trade and riches; and by them honoured with the title of Augustae. Increased of late very much in buildings, contiguous to some Towns & Villages, from which in former times disjoined by some distant intervals. So that the Circuit may contain 8 miles at least; in which space are 122 Parish Churches; the Palace of the King, the houses of the Nobility, Colleges for the study of the Laws, I mean not the Civil Law, which is Ius Gentium, but (as we call it) the Common Law, appropriate only to this Kingdom. It is wondrous populous, containing well nigh 600000 people, which number is much angmented in the Term time. Some compare London with Paris thus: London is the richer the more populous, and more ancient; Paris the greater, more uniform, and better fortified. But for my part, as I do not think that London is the more populous; so neither can I grant that Paris is the greater City, except we measure them by the Walls. For taking in the Suburbs of both, and all that passeth in Account by the name of London: and I conceive, that if London were cast into the same orbicular figure, the circumference of it would be larger than that of Paris. For uniformity of building Paris indeed doth go beyond it; but may in that be equalled also in some tract of time, if the design begun in King james his reign, tending to the advancement of such uniformity, be not interrupted. For other things, certain it is that London is the ancienter City, as being an Archbishops See in the time of the Britan's, when the name of Paris was scarce heard of; a Bishops See at the first conversion of the Saxons: increased so much in wealth and honour from one Age to another, that it is grown at last too big for the Kingdom: which whether it may be profitable for the State, or not, may be made a question. And great Towns in the body of a State, are like the Spleen or Melt in the body natural: the monstrous growth of which impoverisheth all the rest of the Members, by drawing to it all the animal and vitai spirits, which should give nourishment unto them; And in the end cracked or surcharged by its own fullness, not only sends unwholesome fumes and vapours unto the head, and heavy pangs unto the heart, but draws a consumption on itself. And certainly the over-growth of great Cities is of dangerous consequence, not only in regard of Famine, such multitudes of mouths not being easy to be fed; but in respect of the irreparable danger of Insurrections, if once those multitudes, sensible of their own strength, oppressed with want, or otherwise distempered with faction or discontent, should gather to an head and break out into action. Yet thus much may be said to the honour of London, though grown by much too big now for the kingdom, that it is generally so well governed, and in so good peace, that those Murders, Robberies, and outrages so frequent in great and populous Cities beyond the Seas, are here seldom heard of. 2 York, in the West-riding of that County, the second City of England, as the old Verse hath it. 
Londinum caput est & Regni urbs prima Britanni,  
Eboracum à primâ jure secunda venit.  That is to say, 
In England, London is the chiefest Town;  
The second place York claimeth as its own.   
And so it may, being indeed the second City of the Kingdom, both for same and greatness. A pleasant, large, and stately City, well fortified and beautifully adorned, as well with private as public Edifices; and rich, and populous withal. Seated upon the River Ouse, or Vre, which divides it in twain, both parts being joined together with a fair stone Bridge, consisting of high and mighty Arches. A City of great estimation in the time of the Romans, the Metropolis of the whole Province or Di●cese of Britain; remarkable for the death and burial of the Emperor Seve●us, and the birth of Constantine the Great: by consequence the Seat of the Primate of the British, Church, as long as Christianity did remain amongst them. Nor stooped it lower when the Saxons had received the Faith: and notwithstanding those mutations which befell this Kingdom, under the Saxons, Dancs, and Normans, it still preserved its ancient lustre; and increased it too. Adorned with a stately and magnificent Cathedral, inferior to few in Europe; and with a Palace o● the Kings, (called the Manor-house) the dwelling in these later days of the Lord Precedent of the Court or Council here established by King Henry 8th, for the benefit of his Northern Subjects, after the manner of the French Parliaments, or pressed all Seiges. 3 Bristol, the third in rank of the Cities of England, situate on the meeting of the from and Avon, not far from the influx of the Severn into the Ocean: in that regard commodiously seated for trade and traffic: the Ships with full sail coming into the City, and the Citizens with as full purses trading into most parts of the World with good Faith and Fortune. A Town exceeding populous, and exceeding cleanly, there being Sewers made under ground, for the conveyance of all filth and nastiness, into the Rivers. Churches it hath to the number 18 or 20, reckoning in the Cathedral, and that of Ratcliff. The Cathedral first built by Rob. Fitz. Harding, Son to a King of Danemark, once a Burger here, and by him stored with Canons Regular, Anno 1248. but made a Bishops See by King Henry 8th, Anno 1542. The principal building next the Church, an ancient Castle, a piece of such strength, that Maud the Empress having took King Steven Prisoner, thought it the safest place to secure him in. 4 Norwich, the 4th City of the first rank, of which more hereafter. 5 Oxford, the first of the second rank of English Cities, seated upon the Ouse or Isis: but whether so called as Vadum Isides, Ouseford, or the Ford of Ouse, or Vada boum (as the Greeks had their Bosphori in former times) I determine not. An ancient Town, and anciently made a seat of Learning, coevall unto that of Paris, if not before it; the University hereof being restored rather than first founded by King Alured, Anno 806. after it had been overborne awhile by the Danish Furies; but hereof as an University, more anon. This only now, that for the stateliness of the Schools and public Library, the bravery and beauty of particular Colleges, all built of fair and polished stone, the liberal endowment of those houses, and notable encouragements of Industry and Learning in the salary of the Professors in most Arts and Sciences, it is not to be parallelled in the Christian World. The City of itself well built, and as pleasantly seated, form in the Figure of a Cross, two long Streets thwarting one another, each of them near a mile in length; containing in that compass 13 Parish Churches, and a See Episcopal founded here by King Henry 8th, Anno 1541. The honorary Title of 20 of the noble Family of the Veres now Earls of Oxon. 6 Salisbury, first seated on the Hill, where now stands old Salisbury, the Sorbiodunum of the Ancients. But the Cathedral being removed down into the Vale, the Town quickly followed, and grew up very suddenly into great Renown, pleasantly seated on the Avon (a name common to many English Rivers) which watereth every street thereof; and for the populousness of the place, plenty of Provisions, number of Churches, a spacious Marketplace, and a fair Town-Hall, esteemed the second City of all the West. 7 Gloucester, by Antonine called Glevum, by the Britain's, Caer Glowy, whence the present name; the Saxons adding Cester, as in other places. A fine neat City, pleasantly seated on the Severn, with a large Key or Wharf on the banks thereof, very commodious to the Merchandise and trade of the place; well built, consisting of fair large Streets, beautified with a magnificent Cathedral, and situate in so rich Vale, that there is nothing wanting to the use of man, except only Wine, which life or luxury may require. 8 Chester, upon the River Dee, built in the manner of a quadrate, enclosed with a wall, which takes up more than two miles in compass, containing in that compass 12 Parish Churches, and an old Cathedral dedicated anciently to S. Wereburg, Daughter of Wolfere K. the Mercians, and Visitress of all the Monasteries of England, but a Bishops See by King Henry the 8th. The buildings generally fair, the Streets wide and open, with Galleries before every door, under which a man may walk dry from one end to the other. The rest of chief note shall be specified on another occasion, with this advertisement, that the ordinary Cities of England are not to be compared with those of France and Italy: First because the Nobles and Gentry of those Countries live for the most part in the Cities, ours in Country-Villages: And secondly, because the Londoners so engross all trading, that they draw thither all the Wealth and treasure of the Kingdom. By means whereof, that every day increaseth in wealth and beauty; the rest (except Bristol only) do decay as sensibly: that City being like the Spleen in the body natural, the monstrous growth whereof starveth all the rest of the Members. Liene excrescence, reliquum corpus contabescit, as the Doctors have it.  
There are in England but two Universities, which may equal six, nay ten of all other Countries, (so that Paris be not in the number) most of them being no better than our Colleges of Westminster, Eton, or Winchester, and none so liberally endowed, as some one of these in the Universities: Of which there are 16 in Cambridge, some of them called only by the name of Halls, but these endowed with Lands and Fellowships as the others are. In Oxford there 18 Colleges endowed with Lands, besides six Halls, where Students live at their own charges in both of them. Professors of the Arts and Sciences, as also of Divinity, Law, Physic, and the Learned Languages, with liberal Salaries: and in each to the number of 3000 Students, so regular in their lives and conversations, as are not to be found in the World besides. The fairer and more ancient, Oxford, which of long time, together with Paris in France, Bononia in Italy, and Salamanca in Spain, hath been honoured with the Title of Generale studium For that the University of Cambridge, (though giving upper hand to her Sister of Oxford, she may take place of all the Universities in the World besides) is not of so long standing, as that of Oxford, is evident by the testimony of Robertus de Remington, cited by Master Camden, viz. Regnante Edwardo primo, (It should rather be read secundo) de study Grantbridge facta est Academia, sicut Oxonium: where the word sicut doth not import an idenity of the time; but a relation to Oxford, as to the pattern. We see this truth yet clearer in the Bull of Pope john the 21, the contemporary of our Edward 2d, as I find in the work of that great Searcher of Academicell Antiquities, Mr. Brian Twine A●ostolica authoritate statuimus (saith the Bull) quod Collegium magistrorum & scholarism ejusdem studij (speaking of Cambridge) Vniversitas siz censenda, etc. But what need more than Resolution of the Commons of the first Parliament, holden under King james. For when he Clerk of that House had put the name of Cambridge before Oxford; they taking disdainfully that Hysteron Proteron, commanded the Antiquities of both Universities to be searched, and after search made gave the place to Oxford. But to proceed, the University of Cambridge as it was much of a later Foundation, so was it long before it grew into esteem: insomuch that when William of Wa●nslate Bishop of Winchester, and Founder of Magdalen College in Oxon (whereof I was once an unworthy Member) persuaded King Henry the sixth to erect a College in Oxford, as some of the Kings his Predecessors had done before him: immo potius Cantabrigiae (replied the King) Vt duas si fieri possit in Anglia Academias habeam. No said the King, in Cambridge rather, that so if possible I may have two Universities in my Realm of England.  
As for the Story of this Country, that it was first peopled out of Gaul is affirmed by Caesar, & proved by many strong and concluding Arguments, as their Religion, Manners, Languages, Customs, and the nearness of the one to the other. To omit therefore the Fable of Brute, and the Catalogue of 68 Kings, which are said to have reigned here successively before the coming of the Romans; Certain it is, that Caesar found the Country cantoned into many Kingdoms (four in Kent alone) and the people to be very rude and illiterate. Such Learning as they had was locked up in the breasts of the Druids, who committed nothing unto writing, and by that means kept the People in continual ignorance; communicating what they knew to none but those of their own Order, and therein being sought to by the Druids or Priests of Gaul, who came over into this Island to them, and did from them receive the knowledge of their sacred Mysteries. Being conquered or discovered rather by julius Caesar, it was not so much as looked after by the two next Emperors: Augustus and Tiberius counting it an high point of Wisdom, not to extend the Empire beyond the Ocean. Caligula had once a mind to the Adventure, but he durst not follow it. But Claudius, his Successor, undertook the Enterprise, solicited thereunto by Bericus a noble Briton, who for sedition and some practices against the public, was expelled the Country. Hereupon Aulus Plautius is sent over with some Roman Forces, by whom and P● Ostorius Scapula his Successor, Togodumnus and Caractacus, two Kings of the Britain's were severally overcome in battle, a Roman Colony planted at Camalodunum, and the Southern parts thereof reduced to the form of a Province. After this time by little and little the whole was conquered, as far as to the Firths of Dunbarten and Edinburgh: Agricola in the time of Domitian, having the happiness and good fortune to go beyond the furthest of his Predecessors; and so much moderation not to venture further, where there was nothing to be got but blows, cold, and hunger.  
At the first entrance of the Romans, the Island was divided into several Nations, each governed by its own Kings and particular Princes, different in their ends and counsels, and so more easily subdued by united Forces. The principal of which (for it is needless to make mention of inferior Cla●s) were 1 the Danmonij, containing Devonshire and Cornwall, whose chief Cities were Isca, now Exeter, and Volcha near the Town of Falmouth in Cornwall. 2 the Durotriges, inhabiting only in the County of Dorset; whose chief City was Danium or Durnovaria, which we now call Vorchester. 3 the Belgae, planted in the Counties of Somerset, Southampton, and Wilts, whose chief Cities were Aquae calidae, now Bath, Ventu Belgarum, now Winchester, and Sorbio●unum, the seat of old Salisbury. 4 the Attrebatij, confined within Berkshire only, the chief City of whom was Guallena, where now is Wallingf●rd. 5 the Regni, possessed of Sussex and Surrey, whose chief Cities were Vindeli●, now Winchelsey, and Neomagus, situate some ten miles from London. 6 the Cantian●, or the Kentish, having Durovernum now Canterbury, Dubris, now Dover, and Rhutupiae, now called Richborough for their principal Cities. 7 the ●rinobantes of Midlesex and Essex, where London called afterwards Augusta Trinobantum, and Camal●dunum the first Roman Colony, now called Maldon; the Seat Royal of Cunabelinus, King of the Trinobantes in the time of the Romans. 8 The Catieuchlani, dwelling in the Counties of Buckingham, Bedford and Hartford, whose Towns of most importance were Magivintum, now called Dunstable, and Verulamium, (near S. Alban) the strongest Hold the Britain's had in their wars with Caesar. 9 The Iceni, living in the Counties of Suffolk, Norfolk, Huntingdon, and Cambridge; their principal Cities being Villa Fastini, now S. Edmundsbur●, ●ito magus, now Thetford, Durolis, now Godmanchester, and Camboritum, or Cambridge. 10 C●ritani, who took up the whole Counties of Lincoln, Leicester, Rutland, Nottingham, Northampton, and Derby; principal Towns of which were L●ndum, now Lincoln, R●ugo, where now is Leicester, Guusenxae not far from Stamford, now called Bridge-Castert●n; Agel●cis, now Litleborough, a small Village near Newark upon Trent, Tri●ontium now T●rcester, not far from Northampton, 11 the brigants, the greatest Nation of the Island, filling all Yorkshire, the Bishopric of Durham, Cumberland, Westmoreland, and the County Palatine of Laneacter, in a word all the North of England (except Northumberland, the dwelling of the 12 Oltadi●●, whose chief Town was Bremenium, thought now to be Ri●chester in Ruadisda●e.) Principal places of which large and potent Nation, were Isaurium, now Al●borrow in the North Riding, Eboracum, or York in the West Riding, and P●tuari● thought to be Beverley in the East Riding of Yorkshire; Vinovium, where now is Binch●ster, in the Bishopric; Ep●acum now Pap-Castle in Cumberland; Caelatum, now 〈◊〉- Castle in Westmoreland; and Rhtgodunum, now Rible-Chester in the County Palatine of Lancaster. 13 The Cornavii, seated in the Counties of Chester, Salo●, Worcester, Stafford, and Warwick, whose principal Towns were, Denvania, or Legiovicesima Vict●ix, now West-Chester; Uriconium, now Wrox●●er, an ignoble village; Pennocrucium, now Penkridge, not far from Stafford; Brannogenium, now Worcester; Manduessedum, now Manchester, on the River Anchor. 14 And last of all, the Dobuni of Oxford and Glocestershires; principal places of the which were, Dorcinia, now Dorchester, seven miles from Oxford, and Corinium, or Cyrencester, near the head of the Thames. Such Nations as are comprehended under the name of Wales, and Scotland, shall be remembered when we come to speak of those Countries.  
These, and the rest of Wales and Scotland (as far as the Romans did proceed) being once subdued; Britain became a Member of the Roman Empire, yet so that many of the Tribes had their own Kings, and were suffered to govern by their own Laws: it being a known custom amongst the Romans, as we find in Tacitus, habere servitutis instrumenta & Reges, to permit Kings sometimes in the conquered Countries, making them instrumental to the people's bondage. And it is said of Lucius Verus the Roman Emperor, that having put an end to the Parthian war, Regna Regibus, Provincias Comitibus suis regendas dedisse: he gave those Kingdoms he had conquered to be ruled by Kings; the Provinces to be governed by Proviniciall Earls. Kings of which kind were Codigunus and Pratusagus, spoken of by Tacitus; Lucius, beforementioned, the first Christian King, and Coilus the Father of Helena, Mother of Constantine the great. But as afterward in the Heptarchy of the Saxons that King who overruled the rest and was of most power and estimation, was called the Monarch of the English: so probable enough it is, that he amongst the British Kings, who was in most credit with the Romans, or of most power amongst his neighbours, might be permitted to assume the Title of King of Britain. The Catalogue of whom from Cassibelane to Constantine, I have here subjoined, according to the tenor of the British History,  

The Kings of Britain after the coming in of the Romans.  
A. Ch.  
1 Cassibelane, King of the Trinobantes, Commander of the Britan's in the war against Julius Caesar.  
2 Theomantius.  
3 Cymbeline.  
4 Guiderius.  
45. 5 Arviragus, by Hector Boetius called Pratusagus, in whose times Britain was subdued by Aulus Plautius, sent hither from the Emperor Claudius.  
73. 6 Marius.  
125. 7 Coilus, the supposed Founder of Colchester.  
180. 8 LUCIUS', the first Christian King of Britain, and of all the World; who dying without issue, left the Roman Emperor his Heir.  
207. 9 Severus, Emperor of Rome, and King of Britain.  
211. 10 Bassianus Caracalla, Son of Severus, Emperor of Rome after his Father; who lost the Kingdom of Britain to  
218. 11 Carausius, a Native of the Island, who rebelling against Caracalla, obtained the Kingdom for himself.  
225. 12 Alectus.  
232. 13 Aesclepiodorus.  
260. 14 Cotlus II. the Father of Helena.  
289. 15 Constantius, Emperor of Rome, in right of Helena his Wife, succeeded on the death of Co●lus the 2d.  
16 Constantine the great, the Son of Helena and Constantius, who added his Estates in Britain to the Roman Monarchy.   
But to proceed, Britain being thus made a Member of the Roman Empire, it was at first divided into three Provinces only, that is to say, Britannia prima, (so called because first subdued) containing all the Countries on the South side of the Thames, and those inhabited by the Trin●bantes, Iceni, Cattieuchlani, whose Metropolis or chief City was London. 2 Britannia Secunda, comprising all the Nations on the further side of the Severn, whose chief City was Caer-Leon upon Usk, in the County of Monmouth; and 3 Maxima Caesariensis, including all the rest to the Northern border, whereof the Metropolis was York: each Province having several Cities, 28 in all. Accordingly, the Church conforming to the Platform of the Civil State, there were appointed for the Government hereof eight and twenty Bishops, residing in those several Cities; three of the which residing in the principal Cities, were honoured with the Title of Metropolitans, and a superiority over all the Bishops of their several and respective Provinces. And in this state it stood till the time of Constantine, who in his new moulding of the Empire, altered the bounds, and enlarged the number of the Provinces; adding two more unto and out of the former, viz. Valentia, containing all the Country from the Frith of Solway, and the Picts wall on the South, to the Friths of Edinburgh and Dunbritton North; and Flavia Caesariensis, comprehending all between Thames and Humber: the rest betwixt the Humber and the bounds of Valentia, continuing under the old name of Maxima Caesariensis, though now made less than any of the other four: The number of the Provinces being thus enlarged, he making the whole a full and complete Diocese of the Roman Empire, (whereas Spain had Tingitana added to it, as before was shown) subordinate, as Spain was also, to the Praefectus Praetorio Galliarum, and governed by his Vicarius or Lieutenant General. By which division or rather subdivision of the Roman Provinces, there was no other alteration made in the Ecclesiastical government, but that the British Church became more absolute and independent than it was before, and had a Primate of its own (as each Diocese had) residing in the same City with the Vicar or Lieutenant General (which was then at York) of as great power and jurisdiction in the Isle of Britain, as any Patriarch of Alexandria, Rome, or Antioch, in their several Patriarchates. The Metropolitans were no more than before they were: It being ordered by a Canon of the Council of Chalcedon, that their number should not be augmented by any alteration made of the Roman Provinces. As for the Forces which the Romans kept here in continual pay, as well to keep their Coasts and Frontiers against the Enemy, as for retaining of the Natives in their due obedience, they came in all (if pancirol be not mistaken in his reckoning) to 23000 Foot, and 2000 Horse: three Legions keeping here their constant and continual Residence, that is to say, the sixth Legion, surnamed Victrix, at York; the 20th Legion surnamed also Victrix, at West-Chester; and the second Legion sometimes at Isca Danmoniorum, which we now call Exeter, sometimes at Isca Sylvan, which is now Caer-Leon upon Usk. Which Legions with their Aides and Cohorts, may well make up the number spoken of before. Of so high estimaton was this Island in the State of Rome.  
Yet could not all these Forces so preserve the Country from foreign Enemies, but that in the declining of the Roman Empire, the Saxons made great spoils on the coasts thereof; as did the Scots and Picts on the Northern borders: against all which the Romans held out well enough, and made good their ground, till the recalling of the Legions out of Britain for defence of Italy itself, then wasted and destroyed by the barbarous nations. Which happened in or about the year of Christ 407, and some 470 years from the first invasion; Honorius being at that time the Roman Emperor, and Victorinu● the last Governor for the Empire, in the Isle of Britain. For though the noble Aetiu●, on the Petition and complaint of the slaughtered people, unmercifully butchered by the Scots and Picts, sent some small forces to assist them against those Enemies: yet were they presently called back for defence of Gaul, against the Huns breaking in upon it out of Italy. And then the wretched Britain's hopeless of all help from Rome, and being unable, by their own strength to repel the Enemy, by reason of their long ease and disuse of Arms; applied themselves to Aldroenus, King of Armorica in France, (called Little Britain) a Prince extracted from the same stock, for relief and succour: whose Brother Constantine (according to the British story) passing over with a competent Army, and having valiantly repulsed the barbarous people, was crowned King of Britain: the first of a new race of Kings, which swayed the Sceptre, with much trouble and continual conflicts, either against the Scots or Saxons, till they were finally subdued and shut up in Wales. Those of most observation in the course of story, were, 1 Constantine the first King, and the restorer of the Country to Peace and quiet, traitorously murdered by a Pict. 2 Vortiger, E. of the Gevilles, (now Cornwall) Protector of Constantius, the Son of Constantine, taken out of a Monastery; after whose death, (wherein he was conceived to have had an hand) he got the Kingdom to himself: but being unable to defend it against the Enemy, and make his title also good against the other children of Constantine, first called in the Saxons. 3 Vortimer, eldest Son of V●rtiger, who overthrew the Sa●ons in many battles; but in the midst of his successes was poisoned by Rowena a Saxon Lady, second Wife of Vortiger. 4 Arthur, one of the World's nine Worthies, of whom the Mo●kish writers and other L●gendaries report so many idle and impossible actions. Doubtless he was a Prince of most perfect virtue, a great Preserver of his Country from approaching ruin, and worthy of the pen of an able Panegyrist: by whom his brave achievements might have come entire unto us, without the intermixture of those feats of Chivalry, affabulated to him and his Kuights of the Round-table. For by the overstraining of some Monkish Writers, Geofry of Monmouth and the rest, they have given too just occasion to posterity to suspect that virtue, which they intended to advance; and filled us with as much ignorance of the story, as admiration of the persons. But this hath not been the ill hap of King Arthur and his Nobles only; Charlemain and the Twelve Peers of France, men of great virtue and renown, suffering as deeply in the same kind, by the folly of the French Romances. It is affirmed of this Arthur, (but how true I know not) that he began the custom of celebrating the Nativity of our Lord and Saviour for the twelve days following, with such pastimes and sports as are (or have been used of late) by the Lords of Misrule in some gentlemen's houses: an Institution which the Scotish Writers of those times much blame, perhaps not unjustly; it being a time more sit for our devotions than such rude disports. But to proceed, King Arthur dying, left the Crown to 5 Constantine, the Son of Cador Duke of Cornwall, his nearest kinsman, slain by A●relius Conanu●, his own Nephew, who succeeded after him: which fraction did so weaken the distressed Britan's, that they were forced to withdraw themselves beyond the Severn: as 6 Careticus, or Caradoc, by the joint forces of the Saxons, to charge the plain Countries beyond the Severn, for the safer, but more fruitless Mountains. Of the rest, till Cadwa●lader, there is little left of any certainty but their names only; which are thus ranked in the second race of 

The Kings of Britain after the withdrawing of the Romans. 
SAXONS.   
A. C.  
433. 1 Constantine. 10.  
443. 2 Constantius. 3.  
446. 3 Vortiger. 18.  
464. 4 Vortimer, his Son. 7.  
471. 5 Vortiger (again) 10.  
481. 6 Aurelius Ambrose. 19  
500 7 Uter Pendragon. 6.  
506. 8 Arthur, 36.  
542. 9 Constantine II. 4.  
546. 10 Aurel. Conanus. 30.  
576. 11 Vortipor. 4.  
580. 12 Malgo. 6.  
586. 13 Caneticus, or Caradoc. 27.  
613. 14 Cadwan. 22.  
635. 15 Cadwallan. 43.  
687. 16 Cadwallader, the last King of the Bri●ans, who on a superstitious zeal traveled in pilgrimage to Rome, there to receive the habit of a Religious Order from the hands of Pope Sergius, where he died not long after, Anno 689. After whose death, his Successors were no longer called Kings of Britain, but Kings or Princes of Wales. And there we shall be sure to find them.    
And so the Britan's leave the Stage, and the Saxons enter; a great and potent Nation amongst the Germans, but greater by the aggregation of many people, under their name and service, than in themselves: the Jutes and Angles joining with them, and passing in Account as the same one Nation. Their Country's different as their names, until this Conjunction; but neighbouring near enough to unite together: the Angles dwelling at the first in that part of the Cimbrian Chersonese, which we now call Sleswick, where still the Town called Angole● doth preserve their memory; the Juites upon the North of them, where there is still a Province called by the name of Juiteland; the Saxons South of both in the Dukedom of Holstein, situate in the very neck of that Chersonese where it joineth with Germavy. Joining their powers they spread themselves with good success to the South and West; of which more hereafter. And growing Masters of the Seas infested with continual Piracies the Coasts of Britain; occasioning herein an Officer of great trust and power, appointed to defend and scour those Seas, in the Notitia called Comes Littoris Saxonici. Known by this means amongst the Britan's, they were called in by Vortige● to aid him against the Scots and Picts, whom they overcame in a pitched field near Stamford, in the County of Lincoln: for so far had the barbarous people marched without any resistance. Rewarded for this victory with the Isle of Thanet, and after with the whole County of Kent, they began to quarrel with their hosts: whom by degrees they dispossessed of all the Country on this side of Severn; parcelling it into seven Kingdoms, called the Saxon Hoptarchie, that is to say, 1 Of Kent, 2 of the South-Saxons, 3 of the Westsaxons, 4 of the East-Saxons, 5 of the East-Angles, 6 of the North-humbers', and 7 of the Mercians. The beginning, period, and Kings of which several Kingdoms, and the uniting of them into one Monarchy, we are next to show.  
1 The Kingdom of KENT, confined within that County only, was begun by Hengist, who with his Brother Horsus had the leading of the Saxon forces, at their first entry into Britain, Anno 455. being the sixth year after their first coming in, who restoring Paganism to this Country, when the rest of the Isle was Christian, occasioned the distinction of Kent and Christendom. The Kentish, afterwards the first of the Saxons who received the Gospel by the preaching of Augustine the Monk, the Apostle of the English Saxons. Principal Cities of this Kingdom, were 1 Canterbury, once the Regal seat of the Kings of Kent, till given by Ethelbert, on his conversion, to Augustine the first Archbishop thereof, and his Successors: afterwards the See of those Archbishops, who had here their Palace and Cathedral, the Kings removing to Reculver. Seated in the East part of the Country, about seven or eight miles from the Sea, a little Brook serving it thence with some commodities. A City of more Antiquity and fame, than beauty; being now ruinous and decayed, and having nothing in it worth observation, but the Cathedral Church, first founded by Ethelbert beforementioned; but afterwards new-built upon his foundations, in the form it now stands by Archbishop Lanfrank, Will: Corboyle, and some other of their Successors in the said See. The archiepiscopal Palace is a goodly building, and the ruins of S. Augustine's Monastery show what once it was. 2 Dover, anciently called Dubris, seated on the Seashore, where the passage is shortest into France; for that cause fortified with a strong and (in those days accounted an) impregnable Castle, esteemed one of the keys of England, and the chief of the Cinque-Ports, now giving the title of an Earl to the house of Hunsdon, chief of the Family of the Caries, nearly allied to Queen Elizabeth of famous memory. 3 Rochester, seated on the Medway, not far from Chattham (the station of the Royal Navy) an ancient City, but of no greatness; in former times called Durobrivis, after that Roffa, thence the name of Roff-chester, a Bishops See, the second for Antiquity in all the Island. 4 Ma●dston, upon the Medway also near the head thereof, the largest and most beautiful in all this Country, and most commodiously seated for public business.  

The Kings of Kent.  
A. Ch.  
455. 1 Hengist, the first King.  
488. 2 Esk, or Osca.  
512. 3 Octa.  
532. 4 Immerick.  
561. 5 Ethelbert, the first Christian King of this Country.  
617. 6 Edbald,  
641. 7 Ercombert.  
665. 8 Egbert.  
673. 9 Lotharius.  
686. 10 Edrick.  
693. 11 Wightred.  
72+. 12 Egbert II.  
749. 13 Ethelbert II.  
759. 14 Alricus.  
794. 15 Ethelbert III.  
797. 16 Cuthred.  
805. 17 Barldred, the last King of Kent, who lost both life and Kingdom to Egbert, King of West-Sex, or the Westsaxons, An. 824. The progeny of Hengist having been before extinguished in the person of Alricus, overthrown and slain by Offa, the great King of the Mercians:   
II. The Kingdom of SOUTH-SEX, or of the SOU-SAXONS, was begun by Ella, a noble Captain of that people, An. 488. It contained only the two Counties of Sussex and Surrey, which were thence denominated: the first so called quasi South Sex, the Country of the South-Saxons, the second quasi South-Rey, as lying on the Southside of the River Thames, in the same sense as S. Mary's Church on the other side of that River (in respect of London) is called S. Marie Over-Rey. The Christian Faith suppressed here▪ as in other places, was restored again in the time of King Eddwalch, by the preaching of S. Wilfride, Archbishop of York, living here in Exile. Places of most importance in it, were, 1 Chichester, built by Cissa the 2d King hereof, and called ●issan-cester, encompassed almost round with the River Lavant, falling not far off into the Sea: the chief Town of Sussex, and a Bishops See, removed hither from Sealsey, a Demy-Iland, in the time of the Norman Conqueror, where it was first planted by Archbishop Wilfride. 2 Hastings, one of the Cinque-ports, in Sussex also; the landing-place of the Normans, and famous for the overthrow of King Harold in the fields adjoining. 3 Guildford, upon the River Wey, the chief Town of Surrey, well-built, and having in it two Parish Churches. 4 Arundel, in a Dale or Valley on the River Arun, and from thence so named: belonging to the Crown in the time of the Saxons, when given by the Testament of King Alfride unto Anthelm, his Brother's Son. Of great note for a beautiful and capacious Castle; but more for giving the title of Earl to the noble Families of the Albeneys, the Fitz-Alans, and the Howards: this last of such a large and diffused Nobility, that in the year 1641. there were no fewer than eight Howards in the house of Peers. 5 Kingston upon the Thames, so called to distinguish it from Kingston upon Hull in Yorkshire: heretofore famous for the Coronation of the Monarches of the English Saxons, whence it had the name of Kingston, or the King's Town. This Kingdom had only 3 Kings, crushed in the infancy thereof by more potent neighbours.  

The Kings of the South-Saxons.  
A. Ch.  
488. 1 Ella, the first King.  
514. 2 Cissa, the Son of Ella, who lost his life and Kingdom to Cerdic King of the Westsaxons.  
590. 3 Cheulin, King of West-Sex, called himself King of the South-Saxons.  
4 Edelwach, or Ethelwolf, the first Christian King, overcome and slain in battle by Ceadwill, King of the Westsaxons, An. 687. After whose death Berthan and Authun, two Brethren, took on themselves the Government, with the title of Dukes or Captains; and held it for a little while. But not being able to withstand the puissance of the Westsaxons, this Kingdom was subdued by Ina, the Successor of Ceadwall, by whom united to that Crown.   
III. The Kingdom of WEST-SEX, or of the WESTSAXONS, the third in order, and that which did in fine prevail over all the rest, contained the Counties of Cornwall, Devon, Somerset, Dorset, Wilts, Southampton and Berks: begun by Cerdic, a noble Commander of the Saxons arriving with new Forces out of Germany, Anno 495. who having overcome the Britan's of this Western tract, conducted by Natanland their Chieftain, entitled himself King of the Westsaxons, Anno 522. The Christian Faith suppressed here, as elsewhere, was restored again in the time of King●ls, their first Christian King, by the preaching of S. Birinus, Bishop of Dorchester near Oxford, than a great City of no fewer than ten Parishes, now reduced to one. Chief Cities of this Kingdom, were 1 Exeter, a fair and goodly City, and a Bishops See, removed hither from Cridington or Kirton, by Le●fricus, Anno 1049. Seated upon the bank of the River Ex, whence the name of Ex-ceaster; environed with deep ditches, and very strong walls, in compass about a mile and half besides the Suburbs, in which are contained in all 15 Parish Churches, besides the Minster, a beautiful and stately Fabric. 2 Bath, so called from the Baths there being, the chief City of Somerset; by the Latives called Aquae Solis, by the Greeks 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, for the self same reason. Situate in a low valley, environed about with Hills very steep and high, from whence come many Rivulets and fresh Springs, to the great commodity of the people. A fine neat Town, and beautified with as neat a Church, heretofore a Monastery, partner with Wells, the Bishops See, in the stile Episcopal; and gives the Title of an Earl to the noble Family of the Bou●ch●●rs. 3 Falemo●th, in Cornwall, seated upon a large and capacious Bay, so ●ull of Creeks and Roads, capable of the best Ships, that it is said an hundred sail of Ships may be lodged therein with such convenience, that from the top of the one, the Mast of another is not to be seen; the mouth or entrance of it defended for the greater safety with two very strong Castles built by Henry the 8th, that of S. Mandits on the Fast, and that of Pendinas (commonly called Pendennis) upon the West. 4 Dorchester, the chief Town of Dorsetshire, which is thence denominated, by Antoninus called Durnovaria, the principal at that time of the Durotriges: an Inland Town, and consequently of no great trading: not so much famous for aught else as giving the Title of a Marquis to Henry Earl of Kingston, of the noble Family of the Pierrepoints. 5 Wilton, the head Town, in those times, of Wiltshire, and a Bishops See, honoured with the residence of nine several Bishops. But by translating of the See to Sarum, (or Sarisbury,) as the fitter place, and carrying thither therewithal the thoroughfare which before was here, it fell by little and little into decay, and is now hardly worth the reputation of a Market-Town. 6 Winchester, called Venta in the times of the Romans, by the Saxons Vent-ceaster, situate on the banks of a pleasant River, the seat Royal of the West Saxon Kings, who had here their Palace called Wolves-eye, so named from the Kings of the Wolphian Family, and the situation of it in the circlings of the foresaid River, which the old Saxons called an Eye: not from the Woel-Staple here kept, as some, much less from Cardinal Wolsey, as others most absurdly think. The house given after to the Bishops, and made their Palace. The Town in compass two miles, besides the Suburbs, commodiously seated in a low place, between very steep Hills, by which it is defended both from cold and wind: afflicted very much since those times both by war and fire, half of the ground within the Town being fields and gardens; but still adorned with a magnificent Cathedral, and a gallant (but no great) Castle, bravely mounted upon an hill for defence and prospect; besides a College, and an Hospital added since those days. 7 Southampton, conveniently seated on an Arm of the Sea, capable of Ships of burden to the very Key; which maketh it one of the richest Towns in those parts of England. Well built of fair large streets, beautified with 5 Parish Churches, and fortified with high walls, a double ditch, and a right strong Castle: but the Castle now decayed and ruined. 8 Reading, on the Banks of the River Kennet, where it falleth into the Thames, by which means it hath the convenience of both Rivers: A Town of great trade for clothing, well-built, and of three Parish Churches; heretofore beautified with a strong Castle and a goodly Monastery, but both now decayed. 9 Wondsor, called Windleshores in the old Saxon, situate near the Banks of the Thames on a rising ground, which gives it a fair prospect over all the Country, adorned in succeeding times with a Palace Royal of the Kings of England, and the seat of the Order of the Garter. 10 Wallingford, the Guallena of the Ancients, and then the chief Town of the Attrebatii, as it was afterwards (in the time of the Saxons) of the County of Berks: a mile in compass at that time, within the walls, fortified with an impregnable Castle, and adorned with twelve Parish Churches. So desolated by a Plague, Anno 1348. that there is now but one Church left, hardly Inhabitants enough to keep that in repair; and nothing of the walls left (as not much of the Castle) but the tract and ruins.  

The Kings of the West Saxons.  
A. Ch.  
522. 1 Cerdic, the first King. 17.  
539. 2 Kenric. 29.  
565. 3 Celingus, or Ch●uline. 10.  
595. 4 Celric. 5.  
600. 5 Ceolwolf. 14  
614. 6 Kingil, the first Christian King.  
646. 7 Kenewalchin 31.  
677. 8 Sigebert. 1.  
678. 9 Es●win. 2.  
680. 10 Cent win. 7.  
687. 11 Ceadwall.  
690. 12 Ina, who first gave the Peterpence to the Church of Rome;  
725. 13 Ethelard. 14.  
739. 14 Cuthbert. 16.  
755. 15 Sigebert II. 1.  
756. 16 Kinulph. 31.  
787. 17 Bithric. 13.  
800 18 Egbert, the most puissant King of the West Saxons, who united all the Heptarchy into one Estate, of whom see more amongst the Monarches of the Saxons, and the Kings of England   
IU. The Kingdom of EAST-SEX, or the EAST-SAXONS, was begun about the year 527, by E●●n●nwin, descended from Weden, the common Progenitor of the Saxons, from whom we have the name of Wednesday, or W●dnesday, as they called it formerly. It contained only the Counties of Midlesex, Essex, and so much of Hartfordshire as is in the Diocese of London. The Christian Faith expulled here as in other places, was restored again in the time of Sebert, the Founder of the Abbey Church of S. Peter in Westminster, by the preaching of Mellitus the first Bishop of London after the entrance of the Saxons; suppressed again by Seward and Sigebert the Sons of Sebert; but settled stronger than before by Cedda, the next Bishop there. Principal Cities of this Kingdom, besides London, spoken of already, were 1 Westminster, situate in those times, a mile from London, now adjoining to it. The See of the Archbishop of London in the time of the Britain's: afterwards by the Saxons called Thorn-eye, or the Thorny Island, till the new Minster built by Sebert as before is said, and the western situation of it in regard of S. Paul's, built at the same time by Ethelbert the King of Kent, gained it this new name. A City honoured with the seat of the Kings of East-Sex, and since those times with that of the Kings of England; the names of the old Palace of the one, and the new Palace of the other, still remaining there: beautified upon that occasion with more stately and magnificent houses, belonging to the King, Bishops, and Nobility, than all the other in the Kingdom, having of late a new Town added to it in the Convent Garden (a place belonging formerly to the Monks of Westminster) for uniformity of building, and handsome streets, inferior to no City of France or Italy. 2 Colchester, the chief Town of Est-sex, situate near the Sea, on the River Coln, a Colony of the Londoners in former times thence called Colonia Londinensium, and Colonia only, than a Bishops See, from which, or from the River, with the Addition of Ceaster, after the manner of the Saxons, came the name of Colchester. A fair and well built Town, and of good resort, fortified with an old Roman wall, and having in it to the number of 14 Churches. 3 Ithancester in Dengey Hundred, where S. Ceaddae the second Bishop of London baptised the relapsed East-Saxons. 4 Hartford, the chief Town of the County so called; by Beda named Herudford, and of great note in his time for a Synod there held in the dawning of the day of Christianity among the Saxons, in which S. Augustine the Monk, the first Apostle of that People, had a conference or consultation with the British Bishops; more memorable in the following times, for giving the title of an Earl to the illustrious Family, surnamed De Clare, the addition of an Honour, and a goodly Patrimony to Io●u of Gaunt, D. of Lancaster; and at this time the title of Earl and Marquis to the noble Family of the Seymours.  

The Kings of the East-Saxons.  
A. Ch.  
527. 1 Erchenwin, the first King.  
587. 2 Sledda.  
596. 3 S. Sebert, the first Christian King.  
4 S●ward and Sigebert.  
623. 5 Sigebert II. or the Little.  
6 Sigebert III.  
661. 7 Swi●helme.  
664. 8 Sighere.  
664. 9 S. Sebba.  
694. 10 Sigbeard.  
11 Seofride.  
701 12 Offa.  
709. 13 Selred.  
774. 14 Suthred, the last King of the East-Saxons, subdued by Egbert the great and potent King of West-Sex, Anno 828. and his Kingdom made a Member of that rising Monarchy.   
V. The Kingdom of the EAST-ANGLES, so called from the Angli or English, which possessed these parts, and the Eastern situation of it; begun by Vffa, a great Commander of the Saxons, Anno 575. contained the Counties of Norfolk, Suffolk, Cambridge-shire, and the Isle of Fly. The Christian Faith first planted here in the Reign of Redwall the third King, by the Ministry of Felix a Burgundian, the first Bishop of the East-Angles, the See whereof was afterwards removed to Norwich. Places of most importance in it, were 1 Dunwich, on the Seashore, the first Bishops See of the East-Angles, for the County of Suffolk, than a Town capable of that Dignity, now ruinous, decayed, and for the greatest part worn into the Sea. 2 Ipswich in the same County of Suffolk, and the chief of the Country, a rich, populous, and well traded Emporie, consisting of no fewer than 5 Parish Churches. 3 Norwich, the head City of Norfolk, situate on the River You're, which runs thence to Yaremouth; lying out in length a mile and an half, half as much in breadth, and in that Circuit comprehending about 30 Parishes; well walled about with many a Turret, and 12 Gates for entrance; but hath within it much waste ground, the City suffering great loss both in wealth and buildings by Kets Rebellion, in the time of K. Edward the sixth; recovered of the first blow by the Dutch Manufactures, of the last still languishing; yet still it glorieth in the beauties of a fair Cathedral, the three Palaces of the Bishops, the Dukes of Norfolk, and the Earls of Surrey; and the ruins of an ancient Castle of the Saxons building. 4 North Elmham, the Bishops See of the East-Angles for those parts which we now call Norfolk: both this, and that of Dunwich ruinated in the Danish Wars, but this reviving at the end of 100 years, and here continuing (both Sees united) unto one, till removed to 5 Thetford, another Town of this County, situate on the confluence of the Thet, and the lesser Ouse, a larger Town than either of the other two, from whence at last removed to Norwich. 6 Cambridge, the chief Town of that County, by Antonine called Camboritum, whence the modern name: unless we rather fetch it from a Bridge over the River Cam or Grant (for some call it Grantbridge) as perhaps we may. A Town well built by reason of the University, said to be founded by Sigebert, King of the East-Angles, of whom it is affirmed by Beda that he Founded a School for the education of Children in the ways of good Learning; but he speaketh neither of University, nor nameth Cambridge for the place. 7 Ely, situate in the Isle so named, occasioned by the divided streams of Nor and Ouse, with the over-flotes of other Rivers turning a great part of this tract into Fens and Marshes the Inhabitants whereof were called Girvii. A place of no great beauty or reputation, as situate in a foggy and unhealthful air, but only for a Fair Monastery, built by S. Ethelreda, Wife of Egfride, King of the Northumber's, by her made a Nunnery; afterwards rebuilt and replenished with Monks by Ethelwold B. of Winchester, Anno 970. or thereabouts; finally made a Bishops See in the time of King Henry the first, Anno 1109.  

The Kings of the East-Angles.  
A. Ch.  
575. 1 Vffa, the first King.  
582. 2 Titullus.  
593. 3 Redwall, the first Christian King.  
624. 4 Erpenwald.  
636. 5 S. Sigebert,  
638. 6 Egric.  
642. 7 Anna.  
654. 8 Ethelbert.  
656. 9 Edelwald.  
664. 10 Alauffe.  
683. 11 Elswolph.  
714. 12 Beorn.  
714. 13 S. Ethelred.  
749. 14 Ethelbert II. treacherously murdered by Offa, the great King of the Mercians, to whose Court he came an invited Guest, Anno 793. after whose death this Kingdom became subject to the 〈◊〉 and then to Egbert the West-Saxon, governed by Tributary Kings of their own Nation, of whom we have no constat till the time of  
870. 15 S. Edmund, descended from Anna, the 7th King hereof, Martyred by the Danes for his stout and constant perseverance in the Faith of CHRIST; from whence the fair Town of S. Edmund's bury, in the County of Suffolk took denomination. After whose death the Kingdom was possessed by the Danes, till vanquished by King Edward the Elder, by whom it was united unto the rest of England.   
VI The Kingdom of NORTHUMBERLAND, so called from the situation on the North of Humber, contained the Counties of York, Lancaster, Durham, Westmoreland, Cumberland, and Northumberland properly so called, and all the Southern parts of Scotland, as far as to the Firths of Edinburgh and Dunbritton, formerly reckoned of as Members of the Roman Empire. Extorted from the Britan's by Occa, the Son, and Ebusa, the Brother of Hongist, Conductors of new Forces hither, (all of the nation of the Angli) by the leave of Vortiger, under pretence of guarding these Countries from the inroads of the Scots and Picts. By them divided into two Provinces, the one called Deira, extending from the Humber to the River of tweed; the other called Bernicia, reaching from tweed to the two Firths beforementioned: both Governed a long while by Dukes, under the Sovereignty and homage of the Kings of Kent. In the year 547. Duke Ida takes unto himself the title of King of Bernicia, and Anno 559 Duke Elle doth the like in Deira. Towns of most notice in this last (for the former is now reckoned as a part of Scotland) besides York, spoken of before, were 1 Loncaster, the chief Town of that County, situate on the River Lon, which with the addition of Ceaster much used by the Saxons, made the name thereof; called for the same reason Longovicus by the Emperor Antonine. The Town not very well peopled, nor much frequented, but of sufficient fame in our English Annals for those noble persons, which have successively born the titles of Earls and Dukes of it; the greatest Princes for revenue, of any Subjects in Christendom. 2 Kendal, or Candale, situate in a dale on the River Can, whence it had the name; the chief Town of Westmoreland: buit in the manner of a Cross, two long and broad streets thwarting one another. A rich, populous, and well-traded Town, especially for the making of fine woollen cloth; but of more fame for giving the title of an Earl to john Duke of Bedford▪ Regent of France, and john de Foix, created Earl hereof by Henry the sixth. 3 Cartile upon the River Eden, a frontier Town betwixt the Romans and the Scots, as now between the Scots and English: consumed to Ashes in the time of the Danish Furies, afterwards rebuilt by William Rufus, made an Episcopal See in the reign of King Henry the first, and beautified with a Cathedral founded at the persuasion of Athelwolsus, the first Bishop thereof. 4 Monk-chester, on the Northern banks of the River Tine, which maketh there a safe and capacious Haven. Of no great note, till the Norman conquest, when from a Castle built by Robert Son of William the Conqueror, it was called Newcastle: growing from that time forwards to such wealth and trading by the neighbourhood of the Cole-mines there, that it is now the goodliest Town in all the North; fortified with strong walls, beautified with five fair Churches, and giving to the L. Will. Cavendish Viscount Mansfield, the honourarie titles of Earl and Marquis. 5 Haguestade, or Hextold, by the Romans called Axelodunum, by the Normans, Hexham, a Bishops See, in the first times of Christianity amongst these Northumber's, specially so called, converted to the faith in the time of Oswald their tenth King, by the Ministry of Aidan the first Bishop of Lindisfarn. Eata the fifth Bishop, erecting here an Episcopal See, for the better propagation of the Gospel amongst this people; after a succession of ten Bishop ruinated and suppressed by the Danish Furies. 6 Dunholm, now Durham, situate on an hill as the name importeth, a Bishops See, translated hither with the body of S. Cuthbert, Anno 990, or thereabouts, from Lindisfarn a small Island on the coast of Northumberland, where it was first erected by S. Aidanus, the first Bishop thereof: planted in L●ndisfarn, because of the solitude of the place; translated hither to avoid the Fury of the Danes, who then raged extremely in these Quarters. And being settled here, was fortified with such ample Privileges and possessions by the Saxon Kings, that the Bishops were reputed for County Palatines at and before the Norman Conquest. 7 Halofax, in the West-riding of York shire, of great wealth by making of cloth. 8 Rippon, in the same, adorned with a fair Cathedral or Collegiate Church, subordinate to that at York. 9 Godmanham, (by Beda called Gotmandin Gaham) famous in those days for a Temple of the Saxon-Idol●, burnt down and utterly destroyed by Coif, the chief Priest thereof, converted to Christianity by Paulinus the first Archbishop of York, and the Apostle of the Northumber's in these parts. The Catalogue of the Kings of which mighty Nation, by reason of the division of it into two Kingdoms, as before is said, is very intricate and confused; the Kingdoms being sometimes united, and sometimes disjoined But in regard that the most prevalent King of either was called King of Northumberland, the other of Bernicia or Deira only, I shall accordingly subjoin them in this order following.  

The Kings of Northumberland.  
A. Ch.  
547. 1 Ida, the first King.  
560. 2 Ella, King of Deira.  
589. 3 Ethelrick, Son of Ida King of Bernicia.  
593. 4 Ethelfride.  
617. 5 Edwin, Son of Ella, the first Christian King.  
633. 6 Osrick.  
634. 7 S. Oswald.  
645. 8 Oswy, who having subdued and slain Oswin King of Deira, was the first absolute King of all Northumberland, no more divided after that.  
671. 9 Egfride.  
686. 10 S. Alfride.  
705. 11 Osred.  
716. 12 Kenred.  
718. 13 Osrick II.  
729. 14 Ceolnulph.  
738. 15 Ogbert.  
758. 16 Eswulph.  
759. 17 Edilwald.  
765. 18 Alured.  
774. 19 Ethelred.  
778. 20 Alswald.  
789. 21 Osred II.  
794. 22 Ethelred II. After whose death, slain by his treacherous and rebellious Subjects (as many of his Predecessors had been before) the Kingdom became distracted into parts and factions; invaded by the Danes on the one side, the Scots and Picts on the other, who during these distractions had possessed themselves of all the Countries on the other side of the tweed. At the last Anno 827. they yielded themselves to Egbert the most potent King of the Westsaxons, ruled by his Deputies for a while, then subdued by the Danes, and finally recovered to the Crown of England by Athelstan and Edred, Anno 950, or thereabouts. Content since that to give the Title of an Earl to some eminent persons, both of English and Normans races: as it hath done since the first year of King Richard the 2d to the noble Family of the Percies, descended by josceline of Brabant, Brother of Adelize the second Wife of King Henry the first, from Charles' the Great, Emperor, and King of France.   
VII. The Kingdom of MERCIA, was begun by Cridda, or Creodda, a great Commander of the Angli, or English Nation; who settling in the heart of Britain, where the people were least used to Arms, made themselves masters of the Counties of Gloucester, Worcester, Hereford, Salop, Chester, Stafford, Derby, Nottingham, Leicester, Rutland, Lincoln, Huntingdon, Northampton, Warwick, Oxen, Buckingham, Bedford, and the rest of Hartfordshire: which bounded in a manner by all the rest of the Saxon Kingdoms, had the name of Mercia, from the word Mearc, which signifieth a bound or limit. The Christian Faith suppressed here, as in other Kingdoms of the Saxons, was restored again in the reigns of Penda, Peada, and Wolfhere, by the Preaching of S. Chad, the first Bishop of Lichfield. Places of mostobservation in it, 1 Hereford, seated on the banks of the River W●e, in the middle of most flourishing meadows, and no less plentiful Cornfields; raised out of the ruins of Ariconium here placed by Antonine, the tract of which name it doth still retain. A Bishops See in the time of the Britan's, restored to that dignity by the Saxons, Anno 680. the honorary title of the Bohuns, once Earls hereof; and afterwards of Henry of Bullingbrook, Duke of Hereford. 2 Worcester. pleasantly seated on the Severn, over which it hath a very fair Bridge with a Tower upon it. A Bishops See, Anno 679. beautified with a fair Cathedral, and every way considerable for situation, number of Churches, neat buildings, the industry of the Inhabitants, and giving the title of an Earl to the noble family of the Somersets, extracted by the Beaufort's from John of Gaunt. 3 Lichfield, the first Bishops See amongst the Mercians, founded there Anno 6 6. by Oswy King of the Northumber's, but fixed and settled by S. Chad in the reign of Walshere, King of the Mercians; endowed in the very infancy with such fair possessions, that in the year 793 A●u●●us, the Bishop hereof, was made Archbishop of the Mercians. But it proved only a personal honour, and died with him. 4 Coventry, so called from an old Covent or Religious house, which gave name unto it. Situate in Warwickshire, and now the principal of that County, though esteemed a County of itself. Beautified with a goodly wall two fair Parish Churches, large streets, and very handsome houses. A City of great trade and riches though destitute of all advantages which a navigable River might afford it; heretofore of great fame for a stately monastery, to which the See Episcopal was for a while removed from Lichfield; now a ruin only. 5 Leicest●r, once a Bishops See, the Diocese taken out of Lichfield, Anno 733, removed to Dorc●●ster near Oxon, and thence to Lincoln. Beautified in those days with a fair Collegiate Church, a magnificent Abbey, and a strong Castle; all decayed and ruined by the iniquity and injury of these later times: the Town remaining in as good plight both for trade and buildings, as most Towns do which want a Navigable River. Of most fame for the Earls thereof, Algar and Edwin, noble Saxons, Simon●de Montfort the Catiline and great Incendiary of this Kingdom; the Princes of the house of Lancaster, who bore this title; with some others since. 6 Derby, upon the River Derwent, a well-traded Town, and of good resort; adorned with the five 〈◊〉 a goodly stone-bridge, and a large Marketplace; the honourarie title of the noble 〈…〉 created Earls hereof by King Henry the 7th. 7 〈◊〉, seated on the 〈◊〉, but very high upon an hill which overlooks it: For buildings, fair streets, and a spaciou, Marketplace, not giving way to many Cities; but of most fame for a Royal and magnificent Castle, which for strength, stateliness and prospect, may justly challenge the precedency of most in England. 8 Lincoln, a Town in those days of great strength and note, one of the best peopled Cities in all the Heptarchy, and of great merchandise and traffic both by Sea and Land● insomuch that 〈◊〉, than Bishop of D●rchester, thought fit to translate hither the Episcopal See. Now much decayed, and thence the Proverb, that Lincoln was, London is. etc. The chief fame which it now hath is for the Minster, one of the stateliest Piles in England, and perhaps in Christ 〈…〉; high seated on an hill, and from thence discerned over all the Country. 9 Huntingdon, or the Hunter's Town, from the great sport the Hunter's sound in the neighbouring Forest, commodiously seated on the Northern bank of the River Ouse, rising unto the North with a soft ascent, consisting of four parish Churches, and shows the ruins of a Castle built by Edward the Elder, Anno 917. 10 Peterburgh, seated in a Nook or Angle of Northamptonshire, where formerly had been a gul●or whirl●pool of exceeding depth: but made firm ground by Wolfere King of the Mercians, when be laid the foundations of the Monastery, Anno 633. dedicated to S. Peter, whence it had this name, before then called Medanshed●. A ●own, but for the Church, of no great esteem, as standing out of the way for trade, and in no plausible place for health or pleasure: yet showing two handsome streets, a large Marketplace, and a fair Parish Church (besides the Abbey) made an Episcopal See by King Henry the 8th. 11 Northampton, built on the Northern bank of the River Antona, (now N●n) whence it had the name. A Town which for the beauty and circuit of it need not give way to many Cities; fortified heretofore with a very strong Castle, and seated in so good an Air, that once the Students of Cambridge had a purpose to remove their University hither. The noble Family of the Comptans are now Earls hereof. 12 Bedford, so called from Beds and Lodgings on the Ford, built on both sides thereof, for the use of Travellers; growing in time to so great bigness as to contain in it five Parish Churches: famous in former times for the great battle sought in the adjoining fields, Anno 572, in which Cuthwolf the Saxon vanquished the Britan's, and became Master of the Country. But more famous for giving the title of Duke to John of Lancaster, Regent of France for King Henry the sixth, and Jaspher of Hatfield, Uncle to King Henry the 7th. 13 S. Alban, so called from a famous Monastery here founded by Offa the great King of the Mercians, in honour of S. Alban, the Proto-Martyr of Britain, a Citizen of Verulamium, near adjoining to it; out of the ruins whereof, decayed by Age, and destroyed by War, arose the present greatness of S. Alban, the fairest and best-traded Town in the County of Hartford. 14 Buckingham, the chief Town of the County so called, situate on the River Ouse: fortified by King Edward the Elder against the Danes, Anno 915. otherwise not much observable, but for those many noble personages which have had the title of Dukes hereof.  

The Kings of Mercia.  
A. Ch.  
582. 1 Criedda, the first King.  
593. 2 Webba.  
614. 3 Cheorl.  
626. 4 Penda.  
656. 5 Peada, the first Christian King.  
659. 6 Wulfhere.  
675. 7 Etheldred.  
704. 8 Kenred.  
709. 9 Chelred.  
716. 10 Ethelbald, overcome by Cuthbert, K. of the Westsaxons, at a fight near Bu●ford in the County of Oxon, the place still called Battelage hill.  
758. 11 Offa the great.  
796. 12 Egfride.  
797. 13 Kenwolf.  
819. 14 Kenelm.  
820. 15 Cheolwolf.  
821. 16 Bernulf.  
824. 17 Ludecan.  
826. 18 Withlas, overcome in fight (as were his two Predecessors) by Egbert King of West-Sex, became his tributary.  
839. 19 Berthulf.  
852. 20 Burdred, a Substituted King of the Westsaxons, and the last King of the Mercians (the short reign of his six Predecessors portending that fatal period to be near at hand.) After whose death, Anno 886, this Kingdom for some few years tyrannised over by the Danes, was united by King Alured, to the English Monarchy.   
Such was the Order and Succession of the Saxon Kings during the Hettarchie, or division of it into seven Kingdoms, continuing separate & distinct till the prevailing fortune of the Westsaxons, brought them all together into one, by the name of England. But so, that they were subject for the most part unto one alone, who was entitled Rex Gentis Anglorum: those which were stronger than the rest giving the Law unto them in their several turns; and are these that follow.  

The Monarches of the English-Saxons in the time of the Heptarchy. 
England.   
A. Ch.  
455. 1 Hengist, King of Kent, who first brought the Saxons into Britain.  
481. 2 Ella, the first King of the South-Saxons.  
495. 3 Cerdie, the first King of the Westsaxons.  
534. 4 Kenrick, King of the Westsaxons.  
561. 5 Cheuline, or Celingus, King of the Westsaxons.  
562. 6 Ethelbert, King of Kent, the first Christian King of the Saxons.  
616. 7 Redwald, King of the East-Angles.  
617. 8 Edwin, King of Northumberland.  
634. 9 Oswald, King of Northumberland.  
643. 10 Oswy, King of Northumberland.  
659. 11 Wulfhere, King of Mercia.  
675. 12 Etheldred, King of Mercia.  
704. 13 Kenred, K. of Mercia.  
709. 14 Chelred, K. of Mercia.  
716. 15 Ethelbald, K. of Mercia.  
758. 16 Offa the Great K. of the Mercians.  
794. 17 Egfride, K. of Mercia.  
796. 18 Kenwolf, K. of Mercia.  
800. 19 Egbert, the Son of Alomond, K. of the West Saxons, who having vanquished all the rest of the Saxon Kings, and added most of their Estates unto his own, caused the whole united Body to be called Engel-lond, or England, in a Parliament or Counsel held at Winchester, Anno 8●9, being the 19th year of his Reign over the Westsaxons; and by that name was then crowned in the presence of his Nobles, and the rest of his Subjects, leaving it unto the rest of his Successors.   
But before we come to the recital of their names, we are to take notice of the Danes, the next considerable Actors on the Stage of England, who in the time of this Egbert first invaded the Country, and after exercised the patience of his Posterity, till in fine they got the kingdom to themselves. Of the Original and first Succcesses of this people, we shall speak more at large when we come to Denmark. Suffice it here to know, that having taken up the void Rooms of the juites and English in the Cimbrick Chersonese, they thought it not amiss to follow them into Britain also, making a Discovery of some part of the Coasts thereof with three Ships only, Anno, 787, being the first year of Bithric (the Father of Egbert) King of the Westsaxons. Which having done, and prepared themselves for the undertaking, in the time of Egbert they invaded Northumberland, the Isle of Shepey in Kent, and the Coasts of Wales; not without much difficulty driven out by him. In the Reign of the three Kings succeeding, having vanquished the Northumbrians, East-Angles, and a part of the Mercians, they erected in those kingdoms many petit Tyrannies: By Alfred first stopped in their Career; by Edward the Elder outed of the East-Angles, and by Athelstan of Northumberland also; the Danes for some time after being subject to the English Government, mixing in marriages and alliance, and incorporate with them. By the valour and good Fortune of Swain their King, they recovered their power again in England; and in the person of Canutus obtained the kingdom: who having impolitickly sent back his Danes into their Countries (as if a kingdom got by force could be held by favour) opened a way to their execlusion from the Crown, which happened within seven years after his decease. Which said, we come to the Successious of  

The Kings of England of the Saxon Race.  
819. 1 Egbert, the last King of the Westsaxons, and the first of England. 18.  
837. 2 Thelwolf, the Eldest Son of Egbert. 20.  
857. 3 Ethelbald, the Eldest Son of Ethelwolf. 1.  
858. 4 Ethelbert, the Brother of Ethelbald. 5.  
863. 5 Ethefred, the Brother of the two former Kings, the third Son of Ethelwolf, and as much molested by the Danes, as his Brethren were. 10.  
873. 6 Alfriae, the fourth Son of Ethelwolf, who totally united the Saxon Heptarchy into one Estate; vanquished the Danes, whom he made subject to his commands though he could not expel them; he divided England into shires, and restored the University of Oxon.  
900. 7 Edward, surnamed the Elder, the Son of Alfride, who recovered the East-Angles from the power of the Danes, whom he shut up in Northumberland. 24.  
924. 8 Athelstan, the Son of Edward, who subdued the Britan's of Cumberland, and Cornwall; and compelled the Danes to submit themselves to the English Government. In his time lived S. Guy of Warwick. 16.  
940. 9 Edmund, the Brother of Athelstan, by whom the Danes of Northumberland were brought under obedience; and the kingdom of the britains in Cumberland utterly subverted.  
946. 10 Edred, the Brother of Edmund and Athelstan, so fortunate against the Danes, that he compelled them to be christened. 9  
955. 11 Edwy, the Son of Edmund.  
959. 12 Edgar, the Brother of Edwy, surnamed the Peaceable, the most absolute Monarch of England since the time of the Saxons; by whom the tribute of money imposed by Athelstan on the W●lch was exchanged into a tribute of Wolves. 16.  
975. 13 Edward II. Son of Edgar, treacherously murdered by his Stepdame, to make way for Ethelred her Son, hence surnamed the Martyr. 3.  
978. 14 Ethelred, the younger Son of Edgar, and half Brother of Edward, enjoyed the Crown unquietly which he got unjustly. Oppressed and broken by the Danes, he was fain to buy his peace of them at the yearly tribute of 10000 pounds, enhanced to 48000 pounds within short time after; which moneys were raised upon the subjects, by the name of Danegelt. Weary of these exactions, he plotted warily with his Subjects to kill all the Danes, as they slept in their beds; which accordingly was put in execution on S. Braces night, Novemb. 12. Anno 1012. To revenge this outrage and dishonour, Swain King of Denmark, with a sail of 350 ships, came into England; the fear whereof compelled Ethelred, a weak and impuissant Prince, to fly into Normandy, leaving his poor Subjects to the mercy of the Danish Tyrant; who miserably plagued them till his death. To whom succeeded his Son Cnute (Canutus) a more temperate Prince, who maugre Ethelred now returned, or his Son Edmund Ironside, a most valiant King, did in the end possess himself of the whole Kingdom.  
1016 15 Edmund II. surnamed Ironside, having in vain attempted to recover his Kingdom; at last divided it with Canutus: not long after which he was treacherously and basely murdered by Edward, surnamed the Outlaw, his Eldest Son; he was Grandfather of Edgar Atheling●, and of Margaret, Wife of Malcolm the third King of the Scots.   

The Danish Kings.  
1017. 1 Canutus, King of Denmark and Norwey, after the death of Edmund the 2d, sole King of England. 20.  
1037. 2 Harald, the base Son of Canutus.  
3 Hardy-Cnute, the lawful Son of Canutus, by Emma the Widow of Ethelred the 2d, and Mother of Edward, surnamed the Confessor; the last King of the Danes in England. After whose death, that People having tyrannised in England for the space of 255 years (of whichthey had Reigned only 26) were utterly expelled the Country, or passed in the Account of English; Edward the Confessor, the youngest Son of Ethelred, being advanced unto the Throne, by the power and practices of his Mother Emma, and the absence of the Children of Edmund Ironside his Elder Brother.   
Now concerning the Danes abiding here, and going hence, as they did, I observe three customs yet in use amongst us. First, each English house maintained one Dane, who living idly like the Drone among the Bees, had the benefit of all their labour, and was by them called Lord Dane; and even now when we see an idle Fellow, we call him a Lordane. 2 The Danes used when the English drank, to stab them, or cut their throats: to avoid which villainy, the party then drinking, requested some of the next unto him, to be his surety or pledge, whilst he paid nature her due: and hence have we our usual Custom of pledging one another. 3 The old Romans at the expulsion of their Kings annually solemnised the Fugalia: according to which pattern the joyful English having cleared the Country of the Danes, instituted the annual sports of Hock●●ide; the word in their old tongue, the Saxon, importing the time of scorning or triumphing. This solemnity consisteth in the merry meetings of the Neighbours in those days, during which the Festival lasted, and was celebrated by the younger sort of both sexes, with all manner of exercises, and pastimes in the streets, even as Shrovetide yet is. But now time hath so corrupted it, that the name excepted, there remaineth no sign of the first Institution.  

The Saxons reinthroned.  
A. Ch.  
1046. 16 Edward III. surnamed the Confessor, half Brother both to Edmund Ironside, and Hardy-Cnute the Dane, succeeded in the Realm of England. This King collected out of the Danish, Saxon, and Mercian Laws, one universal and general Law; whence our Common Law is thought to have had its Original: which may be true of the written Laws, not of the customary and unwritten Laws; these being certainly more ancient. He was in his life of that Holiness, that he received power from above to cure many Diseases; amongst others the swelling of the throat, called by us the Kings Evil: a Prerogative that continueth Hereditary to his Successors of England. Finally, after his death, he was Canonised for a Saint; and died having Reigned 24 years.  
1066 17 Harald, a Son to Earl Godwin, was chosen King in the nonage of Eagar Atheling, Grandchild to Edmund Ironside, the true Heir of the kingdom. But William Duke of Normandy, (of which people we have spoke already when we were in France, and shall speak more at large when we come to Denmark, as the last Actors on the Theat●● 〈◊〉 of England: This William I say) pretending a Donation from Edward the 〈◊〉 invaded England, slew Harald, and with him 66654 of his English Soldiers; possessed himself of the kingdom; using such Policy in his new Conquest, that he utterly disheartened the English from hopes of better Fortune. From him beginneth the new Account of the Kings of England, those of the former Line being no longer reckoned in the computation of the first, second, or third, etc.   

The Norman Kings.  
1067. 1 William, surnamed the Conqueror, after the vanquishment and death of Harald, acknowledged and Crowned King, altered the ancient Laws of England, and established those of Normandy in place thereof; governing the people absolutely by the power of the Sword, and giving a great part of their Lands to his former Followers, and such as were engaged in the Action with him, from whom most of our ancient Families do derive themselves; those Lands to be holden in Knights-service, which drawn along with it the Wardship of the Heir in Minority, as a charge laid upon the Land.  
1089. 2 William II. surnamed Rufus, second Son to the Conqueror, succeeded by the appointment of his Father, and was crowned King; slain afterwards in the New Forest, by an Arrow leveled at a Deer.  
1102. 3 Henry, for his learning surnamed Beau-clerk, in the absence of his Brother Robert (in the Holy-Land Wars) entered on the Kingdom, and afterwards took from him also the Dukedom of Normandy, and put out his eyes. Deprived of all his male-issue, he lest one only Daughter whose name was Maud, first married to the Emperor Henry the fifth, and after to Geofrie Plantagenet Earl of Anjou, Tourein, and Maine. 34.  
1136. 4 Stephen, second Son of Stephen Earl of Champagne and Blais, and of Alice Daughter to the Conqueror, succeeded; who to purchase the people's love, released the tribute called Dane-gelt: he spent most of his reign in War against Maud the Empress. 19   

The Saxon blood restored.  
1155. 5 Henry II. Son to Maud the Empress, Daughter to Henry the first, and to Maud Daughter to Malcolm King of Scotland, and Margaret, Sister to Edgar Atheling; restored the Saxon blood to the Crown of England. His Father was Geofrie Earl of Anjou, Tourein, and Maine; which Provinces he added to the English Empire, as also the Duchy of Aquitain, and the Earldom of Poictou, by Eleanor his Wife; and a great part of Ireland by conquest. Happy in all things, the unnatural rebellions of his Sons excepted. 34.  
1189. 6 Richard, the Son of Henry, surnamed Ceur de Lion, warred in the Holy-Land, overcame the Turks, whom he had almost driven out of Syria; took the Isle of Cyprus; and after many worthy achievements, returning homewards to defend Normandy and Agnitain against the French, was by Tempest cast upon Dalmatia, and travelling through the Dominions of the Duke of Austria was taken Prisoner, put to a grievous ransom, and after his return slain at the siege of Chaluz in the Province of Limosin. 12.  
1201. 7 john, Brother of Richard, an unhappy Prince, and one that could expect no better, as being an unnatural Son to his Father, and an undutiful Subject to his Brother. Distressed for a great part of his reign by Wars with his Barons, outed of all Normandy, Aquitain, and Anjou, by the power of the French; to whom also he was likely to have lost the Realm of England. Finally, after a base submission of himself and his kingdom to the Pope's Legate, he is said to have been poisoned at Swinstede Abbey. 17.  
1218. 8 Henry III. Son of john, expelled the invading French out of England, and by a Composition with King Lewis the 9th, was restored unto the Dukedom of ●●yenne, held by his Successors till the reign of K. Henry the sixth. Exhausted by the Pope, and oppressed a long time by his factious and unruly Barons: but at last victorious. 56.  
1274. 9 Edward, the Son of Henry, awed France, subdued Wales, brought Scotland into subjection; of whose King and Nobility he received homage. 34.  
1308. 10 Edward II. Son of Edward the first, a dissolute Prince, hated of the Nobles, and contemned by the vulgar for his immeasurable love to Pierce Gaveston, and the S●eucers, was twice shamefully beaten by the Scots; and being deposed by a strong Faction raised against him by his Queen, and Roger Lord Mortimer, was barbarously murdered in Barkley Castle. 19  
1327. 11 Edward III. Son of Edward the 2d, a most virtuous and valorous Prince, brought the Scots to obedience, overthrew the French in two great Battles, took the Town of Calais, and many fair Possessions in that Kingdom. 50.  
1377. 12 Richard II. another of our unfortunate Kings, lost many of his Pieces in France, and at last being overawed by his two great Uncles of L●ncaster and Glecester, and taken Prisoner by his Cousin, the Duke of Hereford, he was forced to resign his Crown, and afterwards was murdered at Pomfret Castle.   

The Lancastrian Line.  
1399. 13 Henry IU. Son to john of Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster, the fourth Son to Edward the 3d, was by the power of the Sword, but with the consent of the people, settled in the Throne, and spent his whole Reign in suppressing homebred Rebellions. 15.  
1414. 14. Henry V. the mirror of Magnificence, and Pattern of true virtue, pursued the Title of France, and won it, being ordained Heir apparent to the French Crown, but lived not to possess it. 9  
1423. 15 Henry VI a pious, but unfortunate Prince, was crowned K. of France in Paris; which he held during the life of his Uncle john of Bedford, and Humphrey of Gloucester, after whose deaths, he not only lost France to the French, but England and his life, to the Yorkish Faction. 38.   

The Yorkish Line.  
1461. 16 Edward IU. Son of Richard Duke of York. the Son of Richard Earl of Cambridge, and Grandsonne of Edmund of Langley Duke of York, the fifth Son of King Edward the third, challenged the Crown in right of the Lady Anne his Grandmother, Daughter of Roger Mortimer Earl of March, the Son of Edmund Mortimer Earl of March▪ and of Philippe his Wife, sole Daughter of Lionel Duke of Clarence, the third Son of the said King Edward, and Elder Brother of john of Gaun●. The claim first set on foot by his Father, the Duke of York, who lost his life in pursuance of it at the Battle of Wakefeild; with better fortune and success pursued by King Edward himself, who finally after 9 bloody Battles fought between the Houses (especially that of Towton, in which were slain 36000 English) was quickly seated in the possession of England and Ireland. 23.  
1484. 17 Edward V. his Son, was before his Coronation murdered by his Uncle Richard, in the Tower of London.  
1484. 18 Richard III. Brother of Edward the 4th, a most wicked and tyrannical Prince, to make way unto the Diadem, murdered King Henry the 6th, and Prince Edward his Son, 3. George Duke of Clarence, his Brother, 4 Hastings, a saithful servant to King Edward, 5 Rivers, Vaughan, and Grey, the Queen's kindred, 6 Edward the 5th his Sovereign, with his young Cousin Richard, 7 Henry Duke of Buckingham his dear Friend, and greatest Coadjutor in these his ungodly Practices, and his Wife Anne; so to make way to an incestuous marriage with his Niece Elizabeth, the Eldest Daughter of Edward the 4th, but before the solemnity he was slain at Bosworth. 3.   

The Union of the Families.  
1487 19 Henry VII. Earl of Richmund, Heir to the House of Lancaster, (as Son of Margaret, Daughter of john Duke of Somerset, Son of john Earl of Somerset, Son of john of Gaunt Duke of Lancaster) after the overthrow of Richard, married Elizabeth, Daughter and Heir to Edward 4th, uniting by that marriage the divided Families. He was also extracted from the British and French Royal blood, as being Son to Edmund ●ndor Earl of Richmund, Son to Owen Tudor (descended from Cadwalladar, the last of the Britan's) and Katherine of France, Widow of Henry the 5th. His whole wars was against homebred Rebels; the chief being Lambert, and the Followers and Fautors of Perken Warbeck. 23.  
1509. 20 Henry VIII. Heir to both Families, between which were fought for the Diadem, 17 pitched Feids; in which perished 8 Kings and Princes 40 Dukes, Marquesses, and Earls, 200000 of the common people, besides Barons, and Gentlemen. This King banished the usurped Supremacy of the Popes, and began the Reformation of Religion; though formerly he had writ a Book against Luther, for which the Pope gave him the honourable Title o● The Defender of the Faith, afterwards made Hereditary by Act of Parliament to his Heirs, and Successors. A Prince of great vices, but or greater virtues. 38.  
1547. 21 Edward VI the Son of Henry the 8th by jane Seymour his 3d Wife; out of whose womb he was fain to be cut, to come into the World, as Caesar was: but he had neither Caesar's Fortune, nor length of life; dying very young, and his affairs conducted by divided Counsels; though otherwise of great hopes, and of a pregnancy of judgement above his years. 6.  
1553. 22 Marry the Daughter of King Henry the 8th by Katherine of Spain, the Widow of his Brother Arthur, restored the Pope's Supremacy banished by her Father, with the whole mass of Popery abolished in her Brother's Reign. To which Religion so addicted that in the short time of her Reign there was more blood shed, than in the whole 44 years of her Sister Elizabeth. In the last year of her Reign she lost Calais to the French, which proved the loss of her life also, as it was supposed. 5.  
1558. 23 Elizabeth, the Daughter of King Henry the 8th by the Lady Anne Bullein his second Wife, a most gracious and Heroic Princess, was by the divine providence of God preserved from the practices of her Enemies in her Sister's reign, to sway the Sceptre of the kingdom. She pursued the Reformation of Religion begun in the times of her Father and Brother; refined the corrupt coin brought in by her Father; furnished the Royal Navy with all kind of warlike Ammunitions; increased the Revenue of the Universities by the Statute of Provisions; succoured the Scots against the French, the French Protestants against the Papists, and both against the Spaniard: defended the Netherlands against the attempts of Spain; commanded the whole Ocean; entered League with the Moscovite; and was famous for her prudence and government amongst the ●urks, Persians and Tartars, yea her very Enemies. Finally she died in the 45 year of her reign, and the 70th of her life, on the 24th of March, Anno 1602. according to the computation of the Church of England, which beginneth the new year with the Feast of the Annunciation. To whom succeeded JAMES the sixth, ●ing of the Scots, with the joy of all men, as the next undoubted heir of the Crown. Of whom we shall say more when we come to speak of the Monarches of Britain; of which he was the first since the fall of the Roman Empire, and such more properly than the greatest of all those Emperors had been before; None of them having all the North parts of Britain itself, or any part of Ireland at all, nor many of the Isles adjoining, under their Dominion.   
In the mean time to look on England as a State distinct, we will consider it and the Kings thereof with reference to Reputation abroad, and power at home; with the Revenues, Arms, and Military Orders of it, as in other places. And first for Reputation, when all Christendom in the Council of Constance, was divided into Nations, Anglicana Natio was one of the Principal, and not Subaltern; and had its vote of equal balance with the Nations of France or Italy, in all affairs concerning the doctrine, discipline, and peace of the Church, which were there debated. And for the place due to the Kings hereof in those General Councils, and the rank they held among other Christian Princes; I find that the Emperor of Germany was accounted Major filius Ecclesiae; the King of France, Minor filius; and the King of England, Filius tertius, & adoptivus. The King of France in General Councils, had place next the Emperor, on his right hand; the King of England on his left hand; and the King of Scotland, next before Castille. Now indeed the King of Spain being so much improved, is the dearly beloved Son of the Church; and arrogateth to himself the place above all other Princes: but in the time of Pope julius, the controversy arising between the Ambassadors of the two Princes for precedency; the Pope adjudged it to belong of right unto England. And Pope Pius the fourth, upon the like controversy, arising between the Ambassadors of France and Spain, adjudged the precedency to the French.  
Touching the soldiery of England, and their most notable achievements, both by Sea and Land, sufficient hath been said already. What Forces the Kings hereof have been able to raise, and may command for present service, will best be seen by the action of King Henry the 8th at 〈◊〉, the Armies of Queen Elizabeth in 88 and the numbers of the trained Bands of the several Counties. First, for the Action of King Henry the 8th, he had in his Avantguard 12000. ●oot, and 500 Light Horse in bew lackets with red Guards; in the Rearward a like number both of Hore and Foot; and in the main Battle 20000 Foot and 2000 Horse, all in Red lackets and yellow Guards: the whole number 44000 Foot, and ●000 Horse. They drew after them 100 great Pieces, besides small ones; and for conveyance of their Ordinance, Baggage, and other necessaries, no fewer than 25000 Draught-horses, besides other carriages. In the next place, for 88 the Queen dispersed in several places on the Southern Coasts of the Kingdom, to hinder the landing of the Enemy 25000 Soldiers of both sorts; at Tilbury for the defence of the City of 〈◊〉, under the command of the Earl of Leicester, 22000 Foot, and 1000 Horse; and for the Guard of her own person under the Lord Hunsdon 34000 Foot, & 2000 Horse: in all, the number of 84000 men, besides those goodly Troops which the Nobility and Gentry did present her with at their own proper charges. And as for the trained Bands▪ the number of both sorts disciplined and mustered to be ready upon all occasions, in the 8th year of King James, (for I have since seen no Muster-Roll of them) amounted, to 196150 able men, 144300 Armed men, 935 Demilances, 〈◊〉 Light-Horse, and 16545 Pioners; besides what was required of Peers and Prelates, supposed to amount to 20000 Armed men, and 4000 Light Horse. And for their strength at Sea, besides the Navy Royal consisting of about 30 gallant Ships, besides the lesser Vessels; the best and bravest that any Prince in Christendom can boast of, as his own propriety: there are such store of Collier's and Merchant's ships, fit for any service, that in the year 88 aforesaid, the Queen had 100 Sail of good Ships to oppose the Spaniard, and 20 more to wait upon the motions of the Duke of Parma: And in the year 1597 she set out for the Island Voyage no sewer than 100L Say●●● all sorts, of which 60 were men of war.  
As for the Revenues of this Kingdom, Bo●erus reckoned them in the time of King Henry the 7th, to be no more than 400000 Crowns per Annum; but grants, that afterward they were improved to a million more by King Henry the 8th, the dissolution of Monasteries, and the benefit redounding from the Court of Wards, making that improvement. And to say truth, the Universal dissolution of Religious Houses of all sorts, did for the time so mightily increase his annual Income, that he was fain to erect two new Courts (the Court of Augmentation, and the Court of Surveyors) for the better managing of the same. But these Additions being wasted by his own exorbitant expenses, and the several Alienations made by King Edward the sixth; those Courts of new Erection were dissolved again; and the Revenue fell so short of its former height, that in the 12 year of Queen Elizabeth, the profits of the Crown (besides the Court of Wards, and the Duchy of Lancaster) came to no more than to 188●97. l. 4s. Of which 110612. l. 13. s. went out that year upon the Navy charge of Household, and other necessary Assignments: Since which time the great increase of trading both at home and abroad, and the great glut of money in all parts of the World, hath added very much to the Intrado: The certainty whereof as I do not know, so neither will I aim at it by uncertain Hear-say.  
The Arms of the Realm of England, are Mars, 3 Lions passant Gardant, Sol. The reason why these Arms quartered with the French, took the second place, be 1 because that France at the time of the first quartering of them, was the larger and more famous kingdom. 2 That the French seeing the honour done to their Arms, might more easily be induced to have acknowledged the Enhlish Title. 3 Because the English Arms were compounded of the Lion of Aquitaine, and the two Lions of Normandy, being both French Dutchies.  
The principal Orders of Knighthood are, and were, 1 of the Round Table, instituted by Arthur King of the Britan's, and one of the World's nine Worthies. It consisted of 150 Knights, whose names are recorded in the History of King Arthur, there where Sir Vre, a wounded Knight, came to be cured of his hurts: it being his Fate, that only the best Knight of the Order should be his Chirirgion. The Arms of most of these, with their several Blazons (I know not on how good authority) we find in Bara the French Herald: The principal of them were Sir Lancelot, Sir Tristram, Sir Lamorock, Sir Gavin, etc. all placed at one Round Table, to avoid quarrels about priority and place. The Round Table hanging in the great Hall at Winchester, is falsely called Arthur's Round-Table, it being not of sufficient Antiquity, and containing but 24 Seats. Of these Knights there are reported many fabulous Stories. They ended with their Founder, and are feigned by that Lucian of France, Rablates▪ to be the Ferry-men of Hell; and that their pay is a piece of mouldy bread, and a phillop on the nose.  
2 Of S. George, called commonly the Garter, instituted by King Edward the third, to increase virtue and valour in the hearts of his Nobility; or, as some will, in honour of the Countess of Salisburies' Garter, of which Lady, the King formerly had been enamoured. But this I take to be a vain and idle Romance, derogatory both to the Founder and the Order; first published by Polidore Virgil a stranger to the Affairs of England, and by him taken up on no better ground than fama vulgi, the tradition of the common people, too trifling a Foundation for so great a building, Common bruit, being so infamous an Historian, that wise men neither report after it, nor give credit to any thing they receive from it: But for this fame or common bruit, the vanity and improbabilities thereof have been elsewhere canvassed. Suffice it to observe in this time and place, that the Garter was given unto this Order, in testimony of that Bond of Love and Affection wherewith the Knights or Fellows of it were to be bound severally unto one another, and all of them jointly to the King as the Sovereign of it. So saith the Register of the Order, (in which occurreth not one word of the Lady's Garter) affirming that King Edward did so fit the habit into that design, Vt omnia ad amcitiam & concordiam tendere nemo non intelligat: But to return unto the Order, there are of it 26. Knights, of which the Kings of England are Sovereign's: and is so much desired for its excellency, that 8 Emperors, 21 foreign Kings, 22 foreign Dukes and Princes, besides divers Noblemen of other Countries have been Fellows of it. The Ensign is a blue Garter, buckled on the left leg, on which these words are embroidered, viz. Honi soit qui mal y pense. About their necks they wear a blue Ribbon, at the end of which hangeth the Image of S. George; upon whose day the Installations of the new Knights are commonly celebrated.  
3 Of the Bath, brought first into England 1399, by Henry the fourth. They are created at the Coronation of Kings and Queens, and the Installation of the Princes of Wales: their duty to defend true Religion. Widows, Maids, Orphans, and to maintain the King's Rights. The Knights hereof distinguished by a Red Ribbon, which they wear ordinarily about their necks, to difference them from Knight's Bachelors, of whom they have in all places the Precedency; unless they be also the Sons of Noblemen, to whom their birth gives it before all Orders.  
4 Of Baronet's, an Order instituted by King james in the 9th year of his Reign, for the furtherance of the Plantation of Vister. They have Precedency of the Knights of the Ba●h, but not of those of the Garter, nor of the younger Sons of the Nobility. But this being Hereditary not personal, and rather civil than military, is not so properly to be ranked amongst Orders of Knighthood.  
There were in England, at, and since the time of the Reformation,  
Arch-Bishops 2. Bishops 20.   

WALES.  
WALES is bounded on all sides with the Sea, 
Wales.  except towards England, on the East; from which separated by the River Dee, and a Line drawn to the River Wie. Anciently it extended Eastwards to the River Severn, till by the puissance of Off●, the great King of the Mercians, the Welsh or Britan's were driven out the plain Countries beyond that River, and forced to betake themselves to the Mountains: where he caused them to be shut up and divided from England by an huge Dich, called in Welsh, Claudh Offa, i. e. Offa's D●ke: which beginning at the influx of the Wie into the Severn, not far from Ch●pstow, extendeth 84 miles in length, even as far as Chester, where the Dee is mingled with the Sea. Concerning which Ditch, there was a Law made by Harald, That if any Welshman was sound with a Weapon on this side of it, he should have his right hand cut off by the King's Officers.  
The name of Wales some derive from Idwallo, the Son of Cadwallader, who with the small remainder of his British Subjects, made good the fastnesses of this Country, and was the first who had the title of King of Wales. Others conceive that the name of Welch and Wales was given them by the Saxons: who having possessed themselves of all the rest of the Country, called the Britan's who lived here by the name of Walsh, which in their Language signifieth as much as Aliens, because they differed from them both in Laws and Language; which is the general Opinion. Most probable it is, that as the Britan's derive their Pedigree from the Galls, (as before was proved) so they might still retain the name, and were called Wallish by the Saxons, instead of Gallish: the Saxons using in most words W. for G. as War for Guerre, Warden for Guardian, and the like. And this to be believed the rather, because the Frenchmen to this day, call the Country Galls; and the Eldest Son of England, Le Prince de Galls: as also that the Dutch or Germans (of whom the Saxons are a part) do call such Nations as inhabit on the skirts of France by the name of Walloons.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof in the time of the Romans, before it had the name of Wales, were the Silu●es, possessing the Counties of Hereford, Brecknock, Radnor, Monmouth and Glamorgan, all Glocestershire beyond the Severn, and the South parts of Worcestershire on the same side also; their chief Towns Ariconium, now Hereford (not reckoned since the time of Offa as a part of Wales;) Balleum, now Buelih in Brecknock; Gobannium, now Abargevenny in Monmouth; Magni, now New Radnor in the County so named; and Bovium, now Boverton in Glamorgan. 2 The Dimet●, possessing Cardigan, Caermarthen, and Pembrokeshires, whose chief Towns were, Loventium, now New Castle in Caermarthen; Maridunum, or Caermarthen itself, and Octopitae, where now stands S. david's, by the Welsh called Menew, whence that Bishop hath the name of Menevensis in Latin. 3 The Ordovices, inhabiting the Counties of Merioneth, Carnarvan, Anglesey, Denbigh, Flint, and Montgomery; with the North part of Worcestershire beyond the Severn, and all Shropshire, on the same side of the River. Their chief Towns were, Segontium, now Caer Seont in Carnarvonshire; Cononium, now Conwey in the same County; Bonium, where after stood the famous Monastery of Banchor in Flintshire; and Mediolanium, now Llanvillin in the County of Montgomerie. By these three Nations was all that tract possessed which lieth on the other side of the Severn, a very stout and hardy people, and so impatient of the yoke, that two of the three Legions which the Romans kept constantly in Britain, as before is said, were planted in and near these people, the better to contain them in due obedience: that is to say, the second Legion at Caer Leon upon Usk, of which more anon; and the twentieth at Deuvana, where now stands West-Chester. So difficult a thing it was to make this Nation subject to the power of Rome; and no less difficult to bring them under the command of the Saxons: whom they withstood, when all the rest of Britain had been conquered by them; and lived to see their Victors overcome by the Normans, before themselves had yielded to a foreign yoke.  
The Christian Faith planted amongst the Britan's in the time of Lucius, they still retained, when all the residue of the Island had replapsed to Paganism: and they retained it not in secret, as afraid to own it, but in a well-constituted Church. Insomuch that Angustine the Monk, when he first preached the Gospel to the English Saxons, found here no fewer than seven Bishops, that is to say, Herefordensis, Tavensis, Paternensis, Banchorensis, Elwiensis, Wicciensis, and Morganensis (or rather Menevensis:) all which, excepting only Paternensis, do still remain amongst us, though in other names, Hereford and Worcester (Wicciensis) reckoned now in England; S. david's or Menevensis, Tavensis or Landaff, Bangor, and Elwyensis or S. Asaph, in Wales, according to the present boundaries and limits of it. And as they did retain the Faith, so they retained it after the tradition of their Predecessors, neither submitting unto Augustine, as Archbishop of Canterbury, nor to the Pope from whom he came, as Occumenicall, or chief Pastor of the Church of Christ; nor receiving any new doctrines or traditions from them; but standing on those principles of Liberty and Religion which they were possessed of, till all the world almost had yielded to that powerful See. Not manumitted from the vassalage and thraldom to it, till they embraced the Reformation of the Church of England, in Doctrine, Discipline, and Worship: the Liturgy whereof was by the command of Queen Elizabeth translated into the Welsh or 〈◊〉; as the Bible also was by virtue of an Act of Parliament in the fifth of that Queen; the care thereof committed to the Bishop of Hereford, and the four Bishops of Wales. But because the Bible then set forth was only in the large Church volume; it was in the beginning of the Reign of King Charles reduced to a more portable Bulk, at the cost and charge of my Cousin Mr. Rowland 〈◊〉, one o● the Aldermen of London, who also caused the book called The Practice of Pierie to be printed in that Language for the instruction of the People; and a Welsh or British Dictionary to be made and published for the understanding of the Language.  
But to return unto the Church, and affairs thereof, for the better ordering of the same, it hath been long ago divided into four Dioceses (besides that of Herefora) for the exercise of ●ccle●acall Discipline, those Dioceses subdivided into 9 Archdcaconries, as before in England: all subject heretofore to their own P●●mate or Archbishop, residing in the City of Isca Silurum, the ●e●repolis of the Province of Britannia Secunda; called by the ●●elch or Britan's, Ca●-●eon, or the City of the Legion, from the second Legion fixed there for defence of the Province; and Ca●-Leon upon ●sk, because situate on the River so named. But this City being too much exposed to the fury of the Saxons, the archiepiscopal See was translated to Menew, standing on a Promontory in the extreme Angle of Pembrokeshire, by David then Archbishop thereof, and near of ●in to Arthur that renowned King of the Britan's: from whom, in tract of time, the name of Menew being left off, the See and City came to be called S. David's. From David unto Samson, the 26 Archbishop of the Welsh, (being above 400 years) did they hold this dignity: but then the Pestilence extremely raging in these parts, Archbish. Samson carried with him the Episcopal Pall, and therewith the dignity itself, to Dole in Bretagne. After which time we hear of no Archbishops in Wales in name and title, though the power proper thereunto still remained amongst them: the Welsh Bishops acknowledging no other Primate, nor receiving consecration from any other hands than their own Bishop of S. David's, till Bishop Bernard was compelled to submit himself to the power and jurisdiction of the Archbishop of Canterbury, in the time of King Henry the first.  
But its time to look upon the face of the Country as it stands at the present, which we find mountainous and barren; not able to maintain its people but by helps elsewhere. To make amends for which defect there were some Silver mine's discovered in it not long since, by Sir Hugh Middl●ton, Knight and Baronet, not only to the great honour of his own Country, but to the profit and renown of the whole Island of Great Britain. Their chief commodities are course Clothes, entitled commonly by the name of Welsh Frieze, and Cottons, which Merchandise was heretofore brought to Oswest●e (the furthest Town of Shropshire) as the common Emporie; and there bought by the Merchants of Shrewsbury: But the Welsh coveting to draw the Staple more into their own Country, occasioned the Merchant to hold off from buying their commodities: till in the end the Merchant got the better of them, and enforced them to settle the whole trade at Shrewshury, where it still continueth.  
To speak of Mountains in a Country which is wholly mountainous, were a thing unnecessary: yet of most note are those of 1 Snowdon, 2 Brech●n, 3 Rarduvaure, and 4 Plinlimmon. Not much observable but for their vast height, and those many notable Rivers which issue from them. The principal whereof are, 1 Dee, in Latin called Deva, arising out of Rarduvaure hills in Merionethshire, and running into the Sea not far from Chester. Over this River Edgar King of England was rowed triumphantly in his Barge, by eight inferior Kings, Vassals and Tributaries to him, that is to say, Kenneth King of the Scots, Malcolm King of Cumberland, Mac-cu●s King of the Isles, Dufwall, Gryffith, Howel, lago, and Indethel, Princes or Kings of Wales: using these words to such as attended on him, that then his Successors might call themselves Kings of England, when they did the like. This was in the year 973, and the last of his reign. 2 Wie, in Latin called Vaga, arising from Plinlimmon hills, and emptying itself into the Severn at Chepstow. More in the heart of the Country (for these are but borderers for the greatest part of their course) 3 C●nwy, which rising in Merionethshire, and dividing the Counties of Denbigh and Ca●narvon, mingleth with the Sea at Abur Conwey. 4 Tyvie, which rising in Montgomeryshire, and passing between the Counties of Cardigan, Pembroke, and Carmarthen, runneth into the Sea a little below Cardigan. 5 Chedlaydy, which running quite thorough Pembrokeshire, emptieth itself into Milford Haven, one of the most capacious and safest havens, not of England only, but of all the world.  
The men are of a faithful carriage towards all men, especially towards one another in a strange Country, and towards strangers in their own. Of a temper questionless much inclining to choler, as being subject to the passion by Aristotle called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, by which men are quickly moved to anger, and as soon appeased: of all angers the best and noblest. Their Language (the old British) hath the least commixture of foreign words of any in Europe, and by reason of its many Consonants and guttural Letters, is not so pleasing as some others in the Pronunciation. A Language not much studied by those of other Nations, in regard that such of the Inhabitants who have addicted themselves to learning, have rather chose to express themselves in the Latin or English tongues, than that of their own Native Country: The principal of which (not to say any thing of Merlin (the Tages of the Welsh or British) were 1 Gildas, for his great knowledge surnamed Sapiens; 2 Geofry of Monmouth, and 3 Giraldus Cambrensis the Historians; and of later times. 4 William Morgan, the Translator of the Bible into Welch, for which performance most deservedly made Bishop of Land●ff. 5 Sir john Price the Antiquary. 6 Owen the Epigrammatist, etc.  
The whole Country (not taking the Counties of Shropshire and Monmouth into the reckoning) containing in it 12 Shires only: of which, seven were set out by King Edward the first, that is to Pembroke, Carmarden, Cardigan, Merioneth, Angleser, and Carnarvan. The other five, viz the Counties of Denbigh, Flint. Montgomery, Radn●r and B●cc●nock, were after added out of the Marchlands' by King Henry the 8th. These 12 Shires are again contracted or subdivided into 4 Circuits, for the administration of justice. Of which the first containeth the Count●● of Montgomery, Flint, and Denbigh; the second those of Carnarvan, Anglesey, and Merie●●●●; the third those of Carwarden, Cardigan, and Pembroke; and the fourth those of Glamorgan, Br●c●nock, and 〈◊〉.  
In these 12 Shires are reckoned one Chase, 13 Forests, 36 Parks, 230 Rivers, and an hundred Bridges. They contain also 1016 Parishes, amongst which, four Cities, 55 Market-Towns, and ●● Castles on the old erection. The City's small, poor, and inconsiderable. The Market Towns, the especially on the Marches and outparts of the Country, very fair and strong: as being not only built for commerce and trade, but fortified with Walls and Castles to keep in the Welsh: and so employed, till the incorporating Wales with England took away all occasion of the old hostilities. And for the Castles in the In-lands, partly by the iniquity of time, which is Edax rerum, but chiefly by the policy of the Kings of England, who would not suffer any places of strength to remain in a Country almost inaccessible, and amongst men apt to take the advantage offered; the very ruins of them are now brought to ruin.  
But to proceed more particularly, the four Cities (or Episcopal Sees) are 1 S. david's, formerly the 〈◊〉 of Wales, situate on the Promontory in Pembrokeshire, by the Ancients called Octopitae; in a safe place and far enough from the Saxons, whom the Welch most feared; but incommodious enough for all the rest of the Clergy to repair unto it: and not so safe neither unto the Inhabitants of it, in respect of sundry other nations who have often spoilt and defaced it. For standing near the Sea, it hath been frequently visited and spoilt, by the Danes, Norwegians, and other Boats, insomuch that the Bishops were enforced to remove their dwelling to Caermarthen; which brought the City, (small enough before, when it was at the biggest) to the condition of a Village. 2 LL●●nd●●●●, upon the River Taffe, whence it took the name, LLan in the Welsh or British signifying a Church; LLandaffe the Church upon the Taffe the Bishops whereof derive their Lineal succession from those of Caer-Leon upon Vsk, though the Primacy or Archbishops See were removed to Menew: A small Town now it is God wot, nothing to rank it for a City, but the Cathedral Church and the prebend's houses. 3 St: Asaph, a small Town in Flintshire, so called from St. Asoph, the second Bishop hereof, left here by Kentigern a Scot, by whom the Cathedral Church was founded about the year 560. Situate on the banks of the River Elwy, thence called LLan-Elwe by the Welsh, the Bishop Elwyensis in some Latin Writers. 4 Bangor, upon the Menai, a branch of the Irish Sea, of no more beauty and renown than the other three, but only for the Cathedral founded here by the first Bishops, defaced by Owen Glendower, and afterwards re-edified by Henry Dean, Bishop hereof, An. 1496.  
Towns of chief note, (for these Cities have not much in them which is worth the nothing) are, 1 Slrewsbury, counted now in England, but heretofore the seat of the Princes of Ponysland, who had here their Palace: which being burnt in some of their broils with England, is now converted into Gardens for the use of the Townsmen. The Town well traded and frequented by the Welsh and English, the common Emporie of both; well built, and strongly situate on a rising ground, almost encompassed with the Severn, that part thereof which is not sensed with the River, being fortified with a very strong Castle, the work of Roger de Montgomery the first Earl hereof, An. 1067. Over the River for convenience of passage, it hath two Bridges, and but two, the one towards England, and the other called the Welch-bridge, which is towards Wales, built by Leoline, or LLewellen the first, one of the Princes of North-wales: whose they conceive to be that Statue which is there standing on the Gate. Remarkable since the times of King Henry the sixth, for giving the title of Earl to the Noble Family of the Talbots: a Family of great honour, and as great an Estate, till the parcelling 〈◊〉 the Lands betwixt the Daughters and Coheirs of Gilbert Talbot, late Earl hereof; according to the ill custom of England, where many times the Estate goes to the Females, and the Honour (with nothing to mainiain it) to the next Heir Male. 2 Banchor, by Beda called 〈◊〉, a famous Monastery of the Britan's; containing above 2000 Monks, attending their devotions at the times appointed, at other times labouring for their livelihood; most cruelly and unmercifully slaughtered by the Saxons, at the instigation of Austin the first Archbishop of Canterbury, offended that they would not yield unto his authority. 3 Carnarvan, on the Mena● beforementioned, not far from Bangor (the Monastery of Banchor being in Flintshire,) well walled, and fortified with a strong Castle, by King Edward the first, after his conquest of the Country; formerly much resorted to for the Chancery and Exchequer of the Princes of North-Wales. 4 Den●●●h, well seated on the banks of the River Istrad, which from thence runs into the Cluyd, the fairest River of all those parts. A Town well traded and frequented, especially since it was made by King Henry the 8th the head-Town of a County: before which time of great resort, as being the head-Town of the Barony of Denbigh, conceived to be one of the goodliest territories in England, having more Gentlemen holding of it than any other. 5 Mathravall, not far from Montgomery, heretofore a fair and capacious Town, honoured with the Palace, and made the chief Seat of the Princes of Powysland, thence called Kings of Matra●as●; now a poor village. 6 Cacrmar then, Maridunum anciently, whence the modern name, the Britan's adding Caer unto it: not called so from Caer-Merlin, or the City of Me●lin, enchanted by the Lady of the Lake, in a deep Cave hereabouts, as old Fablers and Romances tells ns. A fair large Town, beautified with a Collegiate Church, to which there was a purpose in the time of King Edward the ●th, of removing the Episcopal See from S. David's. Not far off, on the top of an Hill, stands Din●vour Castle, the chief Seat of the Princes of South-Wales, thence called Kings of Dinevour; who had their Chancery and Exchequer in the Town of Caermarthen. 7 Haverford W●st, situate in the Chersonese or Demy-Iland of Pembr●ke-shire, by the Welsh called Ross, by the English, Little England beyond Wales, by reason of the English tongue there spoken; a Town the best traded and frequented of all South Wales. 8 Milford, in the same County of Pembroke, famous for giving name to the most safe and capacious Haven in all the Island, consisting of sundry ' Creeks, Baus, and Roads for Ships, which makes it capable of entertaining the greatest Navy; the landing place of Henry the 7th when he came for England. 9 Monm●●th, situate at the mouth or influx of the River Munow (where it falleth into the Wie) whence it had the name. A Town belonging anciently to the House of Lancaster, the birth place of King Henry the ●ift, called Henry of Monmouth. That one particular enough to renown the place, and therefore we shall add no more. 10 Ludlow, a Town of great resort by reason of the Court and Council of the Marches, kept here for the most part ever since the incorporating of Wales with England, for the ease of the Welsh, and bordering Subjects, in their suits at Law. Situate on the confluence of the ●emd, and Corve, and beautified with a very strong Castle, the Palace heretofore of some of the Princes of Wales of the blood Royal of England, at such times as they resided in this Country (of which more anon;) and of late times the ordinary Seat of the Lord Precedent of Wales: now reckoned, as all Shrop-shire on that side the Severn, as a part of England. Of Anglesey and the Towns thereof, we shall speak hereafter, now taking notice only of Aberf●aw, the Royal Seat sometimes of the Princes of North-wales, called thence Kings of Aberf●aw.  
The Story of the Britan's till the time of Cadwallader their last King we have had before. After whose retirement unto Rome, the whole name and Nation became divided into three bodies; that is to say, the Cornish-britans', the Britan's of Cumberland, and the Britan's of Wal●s. The Cornish-britans' governed by their own Dukes, till the time of Egbert the first Monarch of England, by whom subdued, Anno 809, and made a Province of that kingdom. The Britan's of Cumberland had their own Kings also (some of whose names occur in Story) till the year 946. when conquered by Edmund K. of England, the Son of Athelsta●. But the main body of them getting into the mountainous parts beyond the Severn, did there preserve the name and reputation of their Country; although their Princes were no longer called Kings of Britain, but of the Wallish-men or Welsh; and much ado they had to make good that Title: all the plain Country beyond Severn being taken from them by Offa King of the Merc●●an●, and themselves made Tributaries for the rest by Egbert before mentioned, by Athelstan afterwards. Which last imposed a tribute on them of 20 pounds of Gold, 300 pounds of Silver, and 200 head of cattle yearly, exchanged in following times for a tribute of Wolves. But howsoever they continued for a time the Title of Kings, whose names are thus set down by Glover in his Catalogue of Honour published by Milles.  

The Kings of Wales.  
A. Ch.  
690. 1 Idwallo, Son of Cadwallader.  
720. 2 Rodorick. 25.  
755. 3 Conan. 63.  
818. 4 Mervin. 25.  
843. 5 Rodorick II. surnamed the Great, who divided his Kingdom small enough before amongst his Sons: giving Guined●h, or North-Wales, to Amarawdh his eldest Son; to Cadel his second Son Deheubarth or Souh-Wales. and Powis-land to his youngest Son Mervin, conditioned that the two younger Sons and their Successors should hold their Estates in Fee of the Kings of North-Wales, and acknowledge the Sovereignty thereof, as Liegemen and Hom●gers. According unto which appointment it was ordained in the Constitutions of Howell Dha, the Legislator of Wales, that as the Kings to Abersraw were bound to pay 63 pounds in way of tribute to the Kings of London; ●o the Kings of Dynevour and Matravall should pay in way of tribute the like sum to the Kings of Abersraw. But notwithstanding the Reservation of the Sovereignty to the Kings of North-Wales, Roderick committed a great Soloecism in point of State by this dismembering of his Kingdom; especially at a time when all the kingdoms of the Saxons were brought into one, and that one apt enough upon all occasions to work upon the weakness of the neighbouring Welsh: which had they been continued under one sole Prince, might have preserved their Liberty, and themselves a Kingdom, as well as those of Scotland, for so long a time against the power and puissance of the Kings of England: Yet was not this the worst of the mischier neither; his Successors subdividing (by his example) their small Estates into many, insomuch that of the eight tributary Kings which rowed King Edgar on the Dee, five of them were the Kings or Princes of Wales. But Roderick did not think of that which was to come, whom we must follow in our Story according to the Division of the Country made by him into three Estates, of North-Wales, South-Wules, and Powysland.   
1. NORTH-WALES, or Guinedth, contained the Counties of Merioneth and Carnarvan, the Isle of Aaglesey, and the greatest parts of Denbigh and Flint-shires. The chief Towns whereof are Bangor, Denbigh, Carnarvan, Abersraw, spoken of before, and some in Anglesey whereof we shall speak more hereafter. The Country (Anglesey excepted) the most barren and unfruitful part of all Wales; but withal the safest, and furthest from the danger of the encroaching English; which possibly might be the reason why it was set out for the portion of the Eldest Son, in whom the Sovereignty of the Welsh was to be preserved, by the Kings or  

Princes of North-wales.  
A. Ch.  
877. 1 Amarawd. 36.  
913. 2 Idwallo.  
3 Merick.  
4 james or jago.  
1067. 5 Conan, Son of james.  
1099. 6 Gryssith ap Conan.  
1120. 7 Owen Guinedth.  
1178. 8 David ap Owen.  
1194. 9 LLewellen ap jarweth.  
1240. 10 David ap Llewellen.  
1246. 11 LLewellen II. Son of Gryffith, the Brother of David ap LLwellen, the last Prince of Wales of the British Race. Of whom it is said, that once consulting with a W●tch, he was told by her that it was his destiny to be carried in triumph thorough London with a Crown on his head. Hereupon making some excursions on the English Borders, he drew upon himself the whole power of King Edward the first, which not being able to withstand, and the King as willing on the other side not to sight with Mountains; Commissioners were appointed to conclude the differences: Robert Lord Tiptoff, and some others for the King of England; and for the Welsh Prince, Grono ap Heylyn, a great man of that Country, descended from Brockwell Skythrac, one of the Princes of Powysland (from whom, if Camd●a●●renti●ux be of any credit, the Author of these Papers doth derive his Pedigree under whom that Family had the Office of Hereditary Cupbearer, and from thence their name; (Heylyn, Promus, 〈◊〉 à poculis, quae vox ●a proprium ●omen abiit, saith the Welsh Dictionary) By those Commissioners it was concluded and agreed on that LLewellen should enjoy a part of the Country with the Title of Prince during his life: the rest in present, and the whole after his decease, to be surrendered over to the King of England. But David the Brother of LLewellen finding himself excluded by this Agreement, from the hope of succession, incensed his Brother and the Welsh to a new Revolt: the issue whereof was the taking of David, executed by the hand of justice; and the death of LLewellen, slain in Battle, near the Buelth in Brecknocks●ire. Whose head being pitched upon a stake and adorned with a Paper-Crown, was by a Horseman carried triumphantly thorough London, Anno 1282. And so the Prophecy was fulfilled. In him ended the Line of the Princes of North-Wales, after they had for the space of 405 years resisted not only the private undertakers and Adventurers of England, but the Forces of many puissant Monarches: whose attempts they always made frustrate by retiring into the heart of their Country, and leaving nothing for the English to encounter with but their Woods and Mountains. But now the fatal period of the british Liberty being come, they were constrained to yield to the stronger. What followed after this we shall see anon.   
The Arms of these Princes was quarterly Gules and Or, four Lions Passant gardant, counterchanged.  
2 POWISLAND contained the whole Counties of Montgomery and Radnor, all Shropshire beyond the Severn, with the Town of Shrewsbury, and the rest of Denbigh and Flin●shires; comprehending by the estimate of those times, 15 canters or hundreds of Villages, the word Cant signifying an hundred, and Tret a Village. The principal Cities or Towns of it, were S. Asaph, Shrewsbury, Matravall, spoken of before. A Country more partaking of the nature and fertility of England, than the parts belonging unto Guinedth, or North-Wales, but always lying in harms way, by reason of the Neighbourhood of the more potent English; and therefore given by Roderick, to Mer●yn, his youngest Son, partly because he was the youngest, but chiefly because he was a man of approved valour, and so more fit to have his portion upon the Borders. In his Line it continued a long time together, but much afflicted and dismembered by the ●arks of Chester and Shrewsbury, who took from them a good part of Flint and Denbigh, and 〈◊〉; and by the Princes of North-Wales, who cast many a greedy eye upon it. Of the Successors of Prince Mervyn, I find no good Ca●ta●, more than of Brockwell Skythrac before remembered. The last that held it all entire was Meredyth ap Blethyn, who following the ill example of Roderick Mawr, divided it betwixt Madoc and Gryffith, his two Sons. Of which Ma●e● died at Wi●chest●r, Anno 1160, in the time of King Henry the 2d, his part hereof depending after his decease on the Fortunes of Guined●h: and Gryffith was by Henry the first made Lord of 〈◊〉 the stile of Prince left off as too high and lofty.) In his Race it continued till the time of King Edward the first, to whom at a Parliament holden in Sh●ewsbury, Owen ap G●yffi●●h the fifth from Gry●●ith ap Meredith before mentioned surrendered his place and Title, and received them of the King again to be holden in Capite and free Baronage, according to the Custom of England. Avis, or Hawis, Daughter and Heir of this Owen ap Gryffith, was married unto john Charl●ton Valect (or Gentleman of the Privy Chamber) to King Edward the 2d, by whom, in right of his Wife, he was made Lord Powis, Edward, the fifth also of this Line of the Charletons, was the last of that House; his Daughter J●ne conveying the Estate and Title to the House of the Greyes: and of them also five enjoyed it, the last Lord Powis of the Line or Race of Mervyn, being Edward Grey, who died in the days of our Grand Fathers. And so the title lay extinct, until revived again in the person of Sir William Herbert of Red-castle, descend from the Epirotes, Earls of Pembroke, created Lord Powys by K. Charles the first, Anno 1629.  
The Arms of the Princes of Powysland, were Or, a Lion Rampant Gules.  
2 SOUTH-WALES, or Deheubar●h, contained the Counties of Monmouth, Glamorgan, Caermarden, Cardigan, and Brecknock; the greatest and most fruitful part of all Wales, but more exposed to the invasion of foreign Nations, English, Danes, Flemings, and Norwegians, by whom the Seacoasts were from time to time most grievously plagued; Insomuch that the Kings and Princes hereof were enforced to remove their seat from Caermarthen, where it was fixed at first, unto Dynevour Castle, as a place of greater strength and safety; where it continued till the Princes of it were quite extinct, called from hence Kings of Dynevour, as before is said. The chief Towns of it, Caermarthen, Monmouth, Landaffe, S. david's, spoken of already. The Kings and Princes, as far I can find upon any certainty, are these that follow.  

The Princes of South-Wales.  
A. Ch.  
877. 1 Cadel.  
2 Howel.  
907. 3 Howel Dha.  
948. 4 Owen.  
5 Aeneas.  
6 Theodore the great.  
1077. 7 Rhese ap Theodore.  
1093. 8 Gryffith ap Rhese.  
9 Rhese II. ap Gryffith.  
10 Gryffith ap Rhese, the last Prince of South-Wales of the Line of Cadel, after they had with great struggling maintained their liberty for the space of 300 years and upwards: but so, that though they still preserved the title of Princes, they lost a great part of their Country to the Norman-English. For in the reign of William Rusus, Bernard de Newmark a noble Norman, seized upon those parts which now make the County of Brecknock, being then a fair and goodly Lordship; and Robert Fitz-Haymon, with some other noble adventures, made themselves masters of Glamorgan; in which the posterity of some of them are still remaining. Encouraged by their good success, Arnulp of Montgomery, in the time of King Henry the first, won from the Welsh a great part of Dyvet, which we now call Pembro●●shire; as the Earls of Warren, and Lord Mortimer, about the same times, did prevail exceedingly in the conquest of Cardigan and Monmouth. So that the poor Princes had no one Country left entire but Caermarthen only; too little to maintain them in so high a title. And though this last Gryffith, in the time of the Wars in England, betwixt Maud the Empress and King Stephen, had recovered a great part of this lost Estate: yet neither he nor his did enjoy it long; himself deceasing shortly after, and his two Sons, Cymmerick and Meredith being taken by King Henry the second, who most cruelly put out their eyes: yet did the Welsh, as well as possibly they co●ld, endeavour to preserve the liberty which their Fathers left them, till the felicity and wisdom of King Edward the first put an end unto the war of Wales, and settled them in some degree of peace and quiet.   
But before we come to speak of this, we are to show another Catalogue of the Kings and Princes of Wales, different from the succession of them before laid down; and made according to the History of Wales writ by Humphrey LLoyd: this Catalogue containing the Succession of the greater and predominant Princes, whether of Guynedh, Deheuharth, or Powysland; such as gave law unto the rest, and had the honour to be called Kings of Wales, though Princes only of their own proper and particular Countries; as formerly we had a Catalogue of the Monarches of the English Saxons, made out of the Predominant Princes of the Saxon Heptarchic. Only we shall find some in the following Catalogue, who were not naturally and lineally Princes of any of the three, and therefore not expressed in the former Tables; but such as by strong hand had intruded into those Estates, to the prejudice of the right heirs, overpowered by them.  

The Kings and Princes of Wales, according to the Welsh History.  
A. Ch.  
688. 1 Ivor.  
690. 2 Idwallo, or Edwall, Son of Cadwallader,  
720. 3 Roderick Molwinnoe.  
755. 4 Conan ●eudaethwy.  
820. 5 Mervin Vrich.  
843. 6 Roderick Mawre, who divided Wales into 3 Estates.  
877. 7 Amarawdh, Prince of Guynedth.  
913. 8 Edwall Voel, Prince of Guynedh.  
940. 9 Howel Dha (or the Good) Prince of Dehenbarth.  
948. 10. jevaf, and jago, Sons of Edwall Voel, to whom King Edgar did release the tribute paid in money for a tribute of Wolves.  
982. 11. Howel, the Son of jevaf, succeeded in the Kingdom of Wales, his Father being still alive, and of right Prince of Guinedh.  
984. 12 Cadwallan, the brother of Howell.  
986. 13 Meredith ap Owen, Prince of Debe●barth.  
992. 14 Edwall, Son of Merick, the Eldest Son of Edwall Voel, which Merick had been pretermitted, as unfit for Government.  
1003. 15 Aedan ap Blethored, an Usurper.  
1015. 16 LLewellen ap Sitsylht, descended from the house of Dehenbarth.  
1021. 17 jago ap Edwall, Prince of Guinedh.  
1037. 18 Gryffith ap LLewellen.  
1061. 19 Blethyn and Rhywallon, Sons of Angharad the Daughten of Meredith ap Owen Prince of Debenbarth, by a second Husband.  
1073. 20 Trahaern ap Caradoc, Cousin to Blethyn.  
1078. 21 Gryffith Prince of Guinedh, Son of Conan, the Son of jago ap Edwall, one of the Princes of the same, did Homage to William the Conqueror, and was the last that had the title of King of Wales.  
1137. 22 Owen Guinedh, Prince of Guinedh, and Sovereign Prince of Wales.  
1169. 23 David ap Owen Prince of Guinedh.  
1194. 24 LLewellen, Son of jorweth, Eldest Son of Owen Guinedh, excluded by David his younger Brother.  
1240. 25 David ap LLewellen, Prince of Guinedh.  
1246. 26 LLewellen, Son of Gryffith, the Brother of David, the last Sovereign Prince of Wales, of the race of Cadwallader, overcome and slain in battle by King Edward the first, An. 1282. as before is said: by means whereof the Principality of Wales was added to the Crown of England.   
When King Edward had thus fortunately effected this great business, he gave unto his English Barons and other Gentlemen of note, many fair Signeuries and Estates; as well to reward them for their service in the conquest, as to engage so many able men, both in purse and power, for the perpetual defence and subjugation of it. As for the Lordship of Flint, and the Towns and Estates lying on the seacoasts, he held them into own hands, both to keep himself strong, and to curb the Welsh: and (wherein he dealt like the politic Emperor Emperor Augustus) pretending the ease of such as he had there placed; but indeed to have all the Arms, and men of employment under himself only.  
This done, he divided Wales into seven Shires, viz. 1 Glamorgan, 2 Carmarden, 3 Pembroke, 4 Cardigan, 5 Merioneth, 6 Carnarvan, and 7 Anglesey, after the manner of England. Over each of these, as he placed a particular English Lieutenant, so he was very desirous to have one general English Vicegerent, over the whole body of the Welsh. But this when they mainly withstood, he sent for his wife, then great with child, to Carnarvan: where she was delivered of a Son. Upon the news whereof, the King assembled the British Lords, and offered to name them a Governor born in Wales, which could speak not one word of English, and whose life no man could tax. Such a one when they had all sworn to obey, he named his young Son Edward; since which time our King's Eldest Sons are called Princes of Wales. Their Investiture is performed by the imposition of a cap of estate, and a Coronet on his head that is invested, as a to●en of his Principality; by delivering into his hand a verge, being the Emblem of government; by putting a ring of gold on his finger, to show him how now he is a Husband to the Country, and a Father to her Children; and by giving him a patent, to hold the said Principality, to him and his heirs Kings of England. By which words, the separation of it from the Crown is prohibited; and the Kings keep in themselves so excellent an occasion of obliging unto them their eldest Son, when they please. In imitation of this custom, more ex Anglia translato (saith Mariana) john the first of Castille and Leon, made his Son Henry Prince of the Asturia's; which is a country so craggy and and mountainous, that it may not improperly be called the Wales of Spain. And all the S●anish Princes even to these times are honoured with this title of Prince of the Asturia's.  
Notwithstanding this provident care of Edward the first, in establishing his Empire here, and the extreme rigour of Law here used by Henry the 4th, in reducing them to obedience, after the rebellion of Owen Gl●ndower: yet till the time of Henry the 8th, and his Father, (both being extract from the Welsh blood) they seldom or never contained themselves within the bounds of true Allegiance. For whereas before they were reputed as Aliens, this Henry made them (by Act of Parliament) one Nation with the English, subject to the same Laws, capable of the same preferments, and privileged with the same immunities: He added 6 Shires to the former number, out of those Countries which were before reputed, as the Borders and Marches of Wales; and enabled them to send Knights and Burgesses unto the English Parliaments; so that the name and language only excepted, there is now no difference between the English and Welsh; an happy Union.  
The same King Henry established for the ease of his Welsh Subjects, a Court at Ludlow, like unto the ordinary Parliaments in France: wherein the Laws are ministered according to the fashion of the King's Courts of Westm●nster. The Court consisteth of one Precedent, who is, for the most part, of the Nobility, and is generally called, the Lord Precedent of Wales; of as many Counsellors as it shall please the King to appoint; one Attorney, one Solicitor, one Secretary, 
Tre Borders.  and the justices of the Counties of W●les: The Town itself (for this must not be omitted) adorned with a very fair Castle which hath been the Palace of such Princes of Wales, of the English blood, as have come into this Country, to solace themselves among their people. Here was young ●dward the 5th, at the death of his Father, and here died Prince Arthur, Eldest Son to Henry the 7th, both being sent hither by their Fathers to the same end; viz, by their presence to satisfy and keep in Order the unquiet Welshmen. And certainly, as the presence of the Prince was then a terror to the rebellious, so would it now be as great a comfort to this peaceable people.  
What the Revenues of this Principality are, I cannot say: yet we may boldly affirm that they are not very small, by these reasons following, viz. 1 By the Composition which LLewellen, the last Prince of Wales, made with Edward the first: who being Prince of North-Wales only, and dispossessed of most of that, was fain to redeem the rest, of the said King Edward, at the price of 50000 Marks (which comes to 100000 pounds of our present money) to be paid down in ready Coin, and for the residue to pay 1000 l. per Annum. And 2dly, by those two circumstances, in the marriage of the Lady Katherine of Spain, to the above named Prince Arthur. For first, her Father Ferdinando being one of the wariest Princes that ever were in Europe, giving with her in Dowry 200000 Ducats, required for her loynture, the third part only of this Principality, and of the Earldom of Chester. And secondly, After the death of Prince Arthur, the Nobles of the Realm persuaded Prince Henry to take her to Wise; that so great a Treasure as the yearly Revenne of her lonyture, might not be carried out of the Kingdom.  
The Arms of the Princes of Wales differ from those of England, only by the addition of a Label of three points. But the proper and peculiar device, and which we commonly, though corruptly, call the Prince's Arms, is a Coronet beautified with thee Ostrich Feathers, and inseimbed round with ICH DIEN, that is, I serve: alluding to that of the Apostle, The Heir while he is a Child differeth not from a Servant. This Coronet was won by that valiant Prince, Edward the black Prince, at the battle of Cressie, from john King of Bohemia; who there wore it, and whom he there slew. Since which time it hath been the Cognizance of all our Princes.  
I will now shut up my discourse of Wales with that testimony of the people, which Henry the 2d used in a Letter to Emanuel Emperor of Constantinople: The Welsh Nation is so adventurous, that they dare encounter naked with armea men; ready to spend their blood for their Country, and pawn their life for praise: and adding only this, that since their incorporating with the English, they have showed themselves most loyal, hearty, and affectionate Subjects of the State: cordially devoted to their King; and zealous in defence of their Laws, Liberties, and Religion, as well as any of the best of their fellow-subjects, whereof they have given good proof in these later times.  
There are in Wales Arch-Bishops 0. Bishops 4.   

THE BORDERS.  
BEfore we come into Scotland, we must of necessity pass through that Battable ground, lying betwixt both Kingdoms, called THE BORDERS, the Inhabitants whereof are a kind of military men, subtle, nimble, and by reason of their often skirmishes, well experienced, and adventurous. Once the English Border extended as far as unto the Fryth, or Straight of Edinburgh on the East, and that of Dunbritton on the West (the first Fryth, by the Latines called Bodotria, and the later Glotta:) betwixt which where now standeth the Town of Sterling, was an atient Bridge built over the River which falleth into the Fryth of Edinburgh, on a Cross standing whereupon, was writ this Passport.  
I am Free march as passengers may ken,  
To Scots, to Britan's, and to Englsh-men.  
But when England groaned under the burden of the Danish oppression, the Scots well husbanded that advantage, and not only enlarged their Borders to the Tweed, but also took into their hands Cumberland, Northumberland, and Westmorland. The Norman Kings again recovered these Provinces, making the Borders of both Kingdoms to be Tweed, East; the Solway, West; and the Cheviot hills in the midst. Of any great wars made on these Borders, or any particular Officers appointed for the defence of them, I find no mention till the time of Edward the first, who taking advantage of the Scots disagreements, about the successor of Alexander the 3d, hoped to bring the Country under the obedience of England. This Quarrel betwixt the two Nations he began, 
Scotland  but could not end; the Wars surviving the Author; so that what Vellcius saith of the Romans, and Carthaginians, I may as well say of the Scots and English: for almost 300 years together, aut bellum inter eos populos, aut b●lli praeparatio, aut infid● pax fuit. In most of these conflicts the Scots had the worst. So that Daniel in his History seemeth to marvel how this Corner of the Isle could breed so many, had it bred nothing but men, as were slain in these wars. Yet in the Reign of Edward the 2d, the Scots (having twice defeated that unhappy Prince) became so terrible to the English Borderers, that an hundred of them would fly from three Scots. It is a custom among the Turks not to believe a Christian or a jew complaining against a Turk, except their accusation be confirmed by the Testimony of some Turk also; which seldom happening, is not the least cause why so little justice is there done the Christians. In like manner it is the Law of these Borderers, never to believe any Scots complaining against an Englishman, unless some other Englishman will witness for him; and so on the other side; Ex jure quodam inter limitaneos rato (saith Camden in his Elizab.) nullus nisi Scotus in Scotum, nullus nisi Anglus in Anglum, testis admittitur. This Custom making void in this Fashion all kinds of accusations, was one of the greatest causes of the Insolences of both sides committed. Besides, there were divers here living, which acknowledged neither King; but sometimes were Scots, sometimes English, as their present crimes and necessities required protection or pardon. To keep in this people, and secure the Borders, there were in each Kingdom three Officers appointed, called the Lords Wardens of the Marches: one being placed over the East, the other over the West, the third over the middle Borders. In England, the Warden of the East Marches had his Seat at Barwick (a Town of great strength, and which for the conveniency of its situation, was the first thing which the English took care to defend, and the Scots to suprise) of which he was also Governor. The Warden of the West Marches, had his Seat in Carli●e, which Henry the 8th for that cause well fortified. The Warden of the middle Marches had no set place of residence, but was sometimes in one place, sometimes in another, according as occasion required; the Office being executed for the most part, by the Wardens of the Eastern or Western Marches. But Imperii medium est, terminus ante fuit, by the blessed marriage of the Kingdoms, that being now the middle of one, which was then the bounds of two Empires; these Officers, and the cause of them, the wars, are quite extinguished.   

SCOTLAND.  
SCOTLAND is the Northern part of Britain, separated from England by the River Tweed and Solway, and the Cheviot Hills, extending from the one to the other. It is in length (according to Polydore Virgil) 480 miles, but of no great breadth; there being no place distant from the Sea above 60 miles, and the Country ending like the sharp point of a Wedge. And for the length assigned unto it by Polydore, it must be made up by measuring the crooks and windings of the shores, every where thrusting out with very large Promontories, and cutting deep Indentures into the Land. For measuring in a straight Line from North to South, the length thereof from Solway F●●th to the S●ra●tby-head, amounteth but unto three hundred and ten Italian miles; and from Barwick unto S●ra●tby-head is a great deal shorter. So that there is no such oversight in the Maps of Britain, nor such necessity to correct them, as was sometimes thought.  
It was once called Caledonia, from the Cal●d●ni● a chief People of it: sometimes Albania, from Albany or Braid Albin, a principal Province in the North. But the most usual name is Scotia, or Scotland; though the reason of the name be not agreed on. Some fabulous Writers of their own fetch it from Scota, the Daughter of an Egyptian Pharaoh; of whom more when we come to Ireland. Others with better reason (though that none of the best) from the Scoti, Scitti, or Scythi, a Germane, or Sarmatian people of noted fame; whom they will have to seize first on some parts of Spain, from thence to transplant themselves into Ireland, and out of Ireland into the H●brides or Western Lands, now parts and members of this Kingdom. The more probable opinion is, that they were no other than mere Irish, (whose language, habit, and the most barbarous of their customs, the Highlanders or natural Scots do still retain) united in the name of Scot, about the declination of the Roman Empire: the word Scot signifying in their Language, a body aggregated into one, out of many particulars; as the word Alman in the Dutch. Scot illud dicitur, (saith Camden out of Matthew of Westminster) quod ex diversis rebus in unum acervum aggregatur. First mentioned by this name in some fragments of Porphyry (who lived about the time of the Emperor Aurelian) as they are cited by S. Hierome: after the death of Constantine much spoken of in approved Authors, as the confederates of the Picts in harassing the Roman Province.  
The whole divided commonly into the Highlands and the Lowlands. The Highlanders or Irish Scots, inhabiting the Hebrides, and the West parts of the Continent adjoining to them, more barbarous than the Wild Irish at this day not to be civilised (as King JAMES observed in his most excellent Basilicon Doron) but by planting Colonies of the more ●nland, orderly Scots among them. The Lowlanders, or English Scots (as I well may call them) inhabiting on this side the two Firths of Dunbritton and Edinburgh, and the plainer Countries all along the Germane Ocean, are the more civil of the two, as being of the same Saxon race with the English. This is evident, first, by their Language, being only a broad Northern English, a Dialect only of that tongue; 2ly, by the testimony of the Highlanders themselves who are the true Scots, and speak the old Iri●● language, by whom the Low ●anders and the English are called by the same name of Saxons: 3ly, by the general consent of all Historians, affirming that the Kingdom of the North●mbers or En●l●sh Saxons beyond Himber extended as far Northwards as the two Fri●nes beforementioned; and there continued for the space of 300 years: and 4ly, by the confession of some ingenuous Gentlemen of that Nation, who grant it for a probable Tenet, that the Saxons and the Scots invading 〈◊〉 much about the same time; the Saxou● might extort the Eastern shore, lying next their Country, from the old Inhabitants; as well as the Scots did all the Western parts which lay next to Ireland, and the H●brides or Western Lands, from whence they first passed into Britai●.  
The Country, for the most part, especially beyond the limits of the Roman Province, is very barren and unfruitful, not able to afford sustenance for the Natives of it, were they not a people patient of want and hunger, temperate in diet, and not accustomed unto that riot and excess, used commonly in richer and more plentiful Countries. Fruit they have very little, and not many trees either for building or for fuel: the people holding, as in France, at the Will of the Lord, and therefore not industrious to build, or plant. Their chief Commodities are course cloth, Fish in great abundance, Hides, Led, and Coal; of which two last their mountains do afford some rich undecaying Mines.  
The People have been noted by their best Writers, for some barbarous customs entertained amongst them. One of which was, if any two were displeased, they expected no law; but banged it out bravely, one and his kindred, against the other and his: and thought the King much in their common, if they granted him at a certain day to keep the peace. This fight they call their F●ides, a word so barbarous, that were it to be expressed in Latin, or French, it must be by circumlocution. These deadly Feddes, King james in his most excellent Basilicon Doron adviseth his Son to redress with all care possible; but it pleased God to give him so long a life as to see it in his own days remedied: wherein he got a greater victory over that stubborn people, than ever did any foreign Prince, or any of his Predecessors could do before him; an act indeed truly royal, and worthy himself. Another custom they had of that nature, that the like was hardly ever heard of amongst the Heathen, and much less in Christendom, which took beginning as the Sco●ish Historians affirm, in the reign of Ewen the 3d, who is the fifteenth King in the Catalogue, after the first Fergus. This Ewen being a Prince much addicted, or wholly rather given over unto lasciviousness, made a Law, that himself and his successors should have the maidenhead, or first nights lo●ging with every woman, whose husband held land immediately from the Crown: and the Lords and Gentlemen of all those, whose husbands were their tenants or homagers. This was, it seems, the Knight's service which men held their states by; and continued till the days of M●lc●lm Comnor, who at the request of his wife Margaret, (she was the sister of Edgar A●heling) abolished this Law; and ordained, that the tenants by way of commutation, should pay unto their Lords a mark in money; which tribute the Historians say is still in force. It was called Marches mulieris: but whether from Mark, a horse in the old Galliqne, (implying the obscene signification of ●quitare) as Mr. Selden thinks; or from Marca, the sum of money by which it was afterward redeemed, I cannot determine. Certain I am that this last custom was of such a barbarous and brutish nature, that the custom of the Indians in giving to the Brahmins the first night's lodging with their Brides, and that of many Savage unconverted Nations in prostituting their Wives and Daughters to the Lusts and pleasure of their Guests, have not more unchristianity in them, than this of those Scotish Christians, if I may so call them.  
These Customs show the ancient Scots to be rude and barbarous, partaking little of the civility of the Neighbouring Nations, nor are they so broken of the former, but that they are observed by a modern Writer to be still greedy of revenge where they find means to take it; as also to be a subtle and politic people, inclined to Factions and Seditions amongst themselves, which he that reads their Stories cannot choose but see. A people as King james observeth in his Bafil●con Doron, ever weary of the present state, and desirous of novelties; accustomed to judge and speak rashly of their Kings and Princes, towards whom they have always carried themselves with such untractableness, that more Kings have been betrayed, murdered, and deposed by the Scots, than by all the Nations in the World. But take them in themselves without these relations, and they are said to be an industrious people, capable of all Sciences which they give their minds to, and generally well versed in Grammatical Learning, of which most of their Gentry have a smattering. And of most note in point of Learning, have been 1 Marianus (surnamed) Scotus, and 2 Hector Boctius, the Historians, 3 john Major, a well known School-man, for the times before the Reformation. And for the times that followed, 4 George Buchanan, an ingenious Poet, but an unsound Statesman, whose History, and Dialogue de jure Regni, have wrought more mischief in the World, than all Marchiavels Works. Not to have been remembered here, but because he was Praedagogue to 5 Xing james, of most famous memory; whose printed Works declare his large abilities in all kinds of Learning. 6 Napier, the Laird of Marchiston. 7 8 Barclay, the Father and the Son. 9 john 〈◊〉, the best Antiquary of this Nation. 10 Doctor john Maxwel, the late learned Bishop of Ross, and my very good Friend, besides some others of less note.  
The Christian Religion was here planted by divers men, according to the several Nations who did here inhabit; amongst the Low-Landers, or Saxon-Scots, by A●●an, the first Bishop of Lindi●farn, or Holy Island; amongst the Picts inhabiting the South-Eastern parts, by Nin●as, Bishop of Candida Casa, or Whit-herne, in Galloway, amongst the Northern-Picts, Anno 555. and finally amongst the Scots, by Pall●dius a Deacon of Rome, sent to them hither for that purpose by Pope Celestine, Anno 435, or thereabouts. And for the Reformation of Religion over grown with the rust and rubbish of the Romish Church (degenerated from itself in the later days) it was here made by a strong hand, according to judgement of Knox and others: not ta●ing counsel with the Prelates, nor staying the leisure of the Prince as they did in England, but turning Prince and Prelates out of all authority; made by that means more naturally subject unto alterations than it had been otherwise; or only to be made good by the same violence, which first introduced it. 'tis true, that for a while, being in danger of the French, and of necessity to support themselves by the power and favour of the English, they bound themselves by a solemn Subscription to adhere only to the Rites and Ceremonies of the Church of England, and to observe that form of Worship, which was there established. Religionis cultu●, & Ritibus cum Anglis communibus subscripserunt; as is affirmed by Buchanan their own State-Historian. But no sooner was that danger over, but they ●ound opportunity and leisure to effect their end; and have endeavoured ever since by practices, and correspondencies with that party here, and finally by Force of Arms, to thrust their Constitution and Form of Worship on the Church of England.  
As for the Government of the Church, it was originally by Bishops, (as in all parts else) but so as they exercised their Functions and jurisdictions in all places, equally, wheresoever they came; The Kingdom not being divided into Dioceses, till the time of Malcolm the 3d, Anno 1070, or thereabouts. Nor had they any Arch-Bishops till the year 1478. The Archbishop of York being accounted and obeyed before that time, as the Metropolitan of Scotland. But being once settled in an orderly & constant Hierarchy, they held the same until the Reformation began by Knox, when he and his Associates approving the Genevian platform, took the advantage of the Minority of K. James the sixth to introduce Presbyterian Discipline, and suppress the Bishops, forbidding them by their own sole authority to intermeddle any more in matters which concerned the Church, cantoning the Kingdom into Presbyteries of their own assigning, and that the King might not be able to oppose their doings they kept him under by strong hand, imprisoned him at Sterlin, made him fly from Edinburgh, removed from him all his faithful servants, and seized upon his principal Fortresses; and in a word so baffled and affronted him upon all occasions, that he was minded many times to have left the kingdom, and retire to Venice. Which doubtless he had done, (as I have heard affirmed by some of great place and power) had not the hopes of coming at the last to the Crown of England, made him stay it out: So that his Maxim of no Bishops no King, was not made at Random, but founded on the sad experience of his own condition. And though upon the sense of those inconveniences which that alteration brought upon him, he did afterwards with great both Policy and Prudence restore again the Episcopal Order, and settled it both by Synodical Acts, and by Acts of Parliament; yet the same restless spirit breaking out again in the Reign of his Sons, Anno 1638. did violently eject the Bishops, and suppress the calling, and set up their Presbyteries throughout the Kingdom, as in former times.  
The famous or miraculous things rather of this Country, are, 1 the Lake of Mirton, part o● whose waters do congeal in Winter, and part of them not. 2 That in the Lake of Lennox, being 24 miles in compass, the Fish are generally without Fins, and yet there is great abundance of them. 3 That when there is no wind stirring, the waters of the said Lake are so tempestuous, that no Mariner dares venture on it. 4 That there is a stone called the Deaf-stone, a foot high and 33 Cubits thick, of this rare quality, that a Musket shot off on the one side, cannot be heard by a man standing on the other. If it be otherwise (as he must have a strong Faith who believes these wonders) let Hector Boetius bear the blame, out of whom I had it.  
Chief Mountains of this Kingdom are the Cheviot Hills upon the Borders, and Mount Grampius spoken of by Taci●us, the safest shelter of the Picts, or Northern Britan's against the Romans, and of the Scots against the English; now called the hills of Albany, or the mountainous Regions of Braid-Albin. Out of these springeth the 1 Tay or Taus, the fairest River of Scotland, falling into the Sea about D●ndec, in the East side; and 2 the Cluyd, emptying itself into Dunbritton Frith, on the West side of the Kingdom. Other Rivers of most note, are, the 3 Banoc, emptying itself into the Frith of Edinburgh; on the banks whereof was sought that fatal battle of Banocksbourn, of which more anon. 4 Spey, 5 Dee, the Ocasa of Ptolemy: none of them of any long course, by reason that the Country Northward is but very narrow.  
In reference to Ecclesiastical affairs, this Kingdom hath been long divided into 13 Dioceses, to which the Diocese of Edinburgh (taken out of that of S. Andrews,) hath been lately added: and in relation to the Civil, into divers Seneschalsies and Sheriffdoms, which being for the most part hereditary, are no small hindrance to the due execution of Justice. So that the readiest way to redress the mischief (as King james advised) is to dispose of them as they fall or Escheat to the Crown, according to the laudable custom (in that case) in England.  
The greatest Friends of the Scots, were the French, to whom the Scots showed themselves so faithful, that the French King committed the defence of his Person to a selected number of Scotish Gentlemen: and so valiant, that they have much hindered the English Victories in France. And certainly the French, feeling the smart of the English puissance alone, have continually heartened the Scots in their attempts against England, and hindered all means of making union betwixt them: as appeared, when they broke the match agreed on, between our Edward the sixth, and Mary the young Queen of Scots. 
Scotland  Their greatest enemy was the English, who overcame them in many battles, seized once upon the Kingdom, and had longer kept it, if the mountainous and unaccessible woods had not been more advantageous to the 〈◊〉, than their power: for so much King james seemeth to intimate in his Speech at 〈◊〉, 1607. And though (saith he) the Scots 〈…〉 nour and good fortune never to be conquered, yet were they never but on the defensible side; and may in pa●t thank their hills and inaccessible passages, that saved them from an utter overthrow at the hands of all them that ever pretended to conquer th●m. But 
Jam cunctigens una sumus, si●●●mus in aevum:  
One only Nation now are we,  
And let us so for ever be.   
The chief Cities are, Edinburgh, of old called Castrum Alatum in Lothien, where is the King's Palace, and the Court of Justice. It consisteth chiefly of one street, extending in length one mile, into which run many pretty lanes; so that the whole compass may be nigh three miles: extending from East to West on a rising ground: at the Summit or West end whereof standeth a strong and magnificent Castle, mounted upon a steep and precipitious Rock, which commandeth the Town; supposed to be the Castrum Al●tum, spoken of by Ptolomi●. Under the command or rather the protection of which Castle, and through the neighbourhood of L●ith, standing on the Fryth, and serving as a Port unto it; and finally by the advantage of the Courts of Justice, and the Court Royal called Holy-Rood-House, it soon became rich, populous, well-traded, and the chief of the Kingdom: but withal factious and seditious, contesting with their Kings, or siding against them upon all occasions. No way to humble them, and keep them in obedience to their Sovereign Lords, but by incorporating Leith, indulging it the privileges of a City, and removing thither the Seat Royal and the Courts of Judicature; which they more fear than all the Plagnes that can befall them. It belonged in former times to the English-S●xons, (as all the rest of the Country from the Fryth to Barwick) from whom, oppressed by the tyranny of the Danes, it was taken by the Scots and Picts, Anno 800. or thereabouts. 2 Sterling, situate on the Southside of the Forth or Fryth, in the Sheriffdom so called, a strong Town, and beautified withal with a very fair Castle, the birthplace of King james the sixth, the first Monarch of Great Britain. Near to which Town, on the banks of the River B●nnock, happened the most memorable discomfiture that the Scots ever gave the English: who besides many Lords and 700 Knights and men of note, lost in this Fight (as the Scotish Writers do report) 50000 of the common Soldiers (our English Histories confess 10000, and too many of that) the King himself (Edward the 2d) being compelled to sly for his life and safety. Some of the Scotish Writers tell us, that the purer sort of Silver, w●ich we call Sterling money, did take name from hence; they might as well have told us, that all our Silver Bullion comes from Bovillon in Luxembourgh, or from the Port of Boul●gne in France: the truth being, that it took that name from the Easterlings, or Merchants of East Germany, drawn into England by King john to refine our Coin. 3 Glasco, in Cluydsd●le, honoured with an Archbishops See, and a public School (to which some give the name of an University) founded here by Archbishop Turnbal, Anno 1554. 4 S. Andrews, the chief Town of Fife, an archiepiscopal See, ●nd an University; by the Latines called Fanum Reguli, which, and the English name, it took from the bones of S. Andrew the Apostle, translated first from Patras in Peloponnesus where he suffered death, unto Constantinople; and thence brought hither by a Monk called Albatus Regulus, in the year 378, (if they be not mistaken in the time who made the story.) Over which R●lic●s he is said to have built a Monastery, which after grew to be a City: called from the Founder Fanum Reguli; in honour of the Saint, S. Andrews. The Bishop hereof is the Metropolitan of all Sc●tland; the City seated on the Ocean, near the fall of the Ethan, overlooked with a strong and goodly Castle the Archbishop's seat. 5 Falkland, in the same Province of Fife, beautified with a retiring house of the Kings, resorting often thither on recess from business, or for the commodity and pleasure of hunting which the place affords. 6 Dundee, in Latin, Taodunum, a rich and noted port at the mouth of the Tay, the chief Town of Anguis. 7 Aber-don, at the mouth of the River Done, whence it hath the name, (the word Aber in the British signifying the mouth or influx of a River) an University and Bishops See. 8 Pe●th, or S. john's Town, seated on the Tay, but in the middle of the kingdom; walled, and replenished with an industrious people; the chief Town of the Sheriffdom of Perth. 9 Scone, on the further side of the Tay, adorned heretofore with a famous Monastery, the usual place for the Inauguration of the Scotish Kings: the fatal stone, on which they did receive their Crown, (the Palladium of the Scotish Kingdom,) here kept, till the removal of it unto Westminster, by King Edward the first. Upon which stone there were of old engraven these Verses. 
Ni fallat fatum, Scoti quocunque locatum  
Invenient lapidem regnare tenentur ibidem.  Translated in old Meeter thus, 
The Scots shall brook that Realm as natif ground,  
If Weirds fail not, where ere this Stane is found.   
Most happily accomplished in the Succession of King James the sixth to the Crown of England. 10. Dunbritton (B●itannodunum in the Latin) seated in a grassy Plain, at the fall or influx of the River Levin into the Cluyd, upon two steep and precipicious Rocks, flanked on the West with the said two Rivers, and on the East with a miry Flat, drowned at every full Sea: the strongest Hold of all the Kingdom, and thought to be impregnable but by Famine or Treason; and the chief Town of the West side of Scotland; the name hereof communicated to the Fryth adjoining.  
The Ancient Inhabitants of this Country dwelling within the limits of the Roman Province, were the Gadeni, possessing Tevidale, Twedale, Merch, and Lothien, whose chief City was Castra Alala, now Edinburgh. 2 the Damnii, dwelling in Cluydsdale, Lennox, S●erling, and Menteith, whose chief City was Vanduara, now Renfraw; Lindum, now Linlithquo. 3 the S●lgovae, inhabiting in jadd sdale, Eus●dale, Eskdale, Annandale, and Niddisdale, whose chief place was Carbantorigum, now Caer-Laveroc●: and 4 the Novantes, containing Galloway, Carack, Kyle and Cunningham; principal places of the which were, Leucopibia, now Whit-herne, and Re●igo●um, now Bargenic. Without the Province, amongst the Picts or barbarous Britan's, divided generally into Caleaonii and Meatae, the Nations of most note were, 5 the Caledonii properly so called, taking up all Strathern, Argile, Cantire, Albany, Lorn, Perth, Angus, and Fife. 6 the Vermins of Mernis and Mar. 7 the Talzali of Buquhan. 8 the Vacomagi of Loqbuabre and Murray. 9 the Cantae of Ross and Sutherland. 10 the Cantini of Cathness; and 11 the Cornubii of S●rathnavern, the furthest Country Northward of all the Island. Chief Towns of which were, Tamia, Banatia, Orea, Devana, and Tuesis; which we know not where to find upon any certainty.  
The fortunes of this people, as they related to the Romans hath been shown before: On the withdrawing of whose Forces, so much hereof as formerly had belonged to that Empire, was possessed by the Saxons, the residue thereof, as formerly, by the Scots and Picts: save that the Saxons not content with that which the Romans held, made themselves masters also of the plain Countries, lying on the Germane Ocean, to which the passage out of Germany was both short and easy. By which account, besides those places in the East, they were possessed of the Counties or Sheriffdoms of Teifidile, weedale, March, Lothien, Liddisdale, Eusedale, Eskdale, Annandale, N●disdale, Cluydsdale▪ Galloway, Carick, Kyle, Cunningham, Lennox, and Sterling, being the richest, and most flourishing part of the modern Scotland. The Scots, for their part, had the Counties of Cantire, Argile, Braid Albin, (or Alba●ie) Lor●, L●quhabre, and Strathnavern, lying on the West and North: the other Northern moyite (excepting some parts near the coast of the Germane Ocean possessed by the Saxons) containing the now Counties of Catness, Sutherland, Ross, Murray, Buq●h●n, Marre, Mern, Anguis, Athol, Perth, Fife, Strathern and Mente●th, being only left unto the Picts. From whence the Saxons and Scots came into these parts, hath been shown already. And for the Picts, (to omit here the refutation of those who will have them to descend from the Agathyrsi, a People of Scythia) they were no other than such of the natural Britan's as never were brought under the R●man Empire, but still preserved their Country in its former Liberty; called therefore by T●rtulli●n, inaccessa Romanis loca, as indeed they were: and using still their ancient custom of painting their bodies, after the rest of their Countrymen had conformed themselves to more civil courses, were by the Romans called Picti, and by that name first mentioned in the Panegyric of Eunomius, in the time of Constantine the Great. They long possessed these parts without any Inmate, even till the year 424. when the Irish-Scots wanting room at home, and having formerly possessed themselves of the Western Isles first set foot in Britain: with whom they had continual War, till in the end the Scots prevailing, compelled the Picts to abandon to them the Western parts, and withdraw themselves into the Eastern. Afterwards growing into better terms with one another, and willing to enlarge their borders towards the more flourishing South, they contracted an Offensive and Defensive League against the Britaus: whom on all sides they most miserably tortured, till vanquished and beat back by the conquering Saxons, against whom they contracted a new Confederacy. Taking the advantage of the death of Etheldred, King of the Northumber's, and the invasion of the Danes on the rest of England; they got into their hands all Bernicu●a, or so much of the Kingdom of the Northumbrians, as lay on the North of tweed, and Solway; reckoned from that time forwards as a part of their Dominions. But this good neighbourhood held not long betwixt these two Nations. It happened at the last, that Achaius King of the Scots, married Fergusia, Sister unto Hungust King of the Picts, and had by her a Son called Alpine, who after the death of Hungust, dying without issue, and having none of a nearer kindred, was in the judgement of the Scots to succeed in that Kingdom. But the Picts, alleging a Law o● not admitting Aliens to the Crown, chose one Ferreth of their own Nation to be their King: with whom Alpine contended in a long War, victorious for the most part, in conclusion slain. The quarrel notwithstanding did remain betwixt the unfriendly Nations, till at the last, after many bloody battles, and mutual overthrows (the Scotr being for the most part on the losing side) Kenneth, the second of that name, vanquished Donsk●n, the last King of the Picts, with so great a slaughter of his People, that he extinguished not their Kingdom only, but their very name; passing from that time forwards under that of Scots. No mention after this of the Pictish Nation▪ unless perhaps we will believe that some of them passed into France▪ and there, forsooth, subdued that Country which we now call Picardy.  
As for the Catalogue of the Kings of the Scots in Britain, I shall begin the same with Fergu●, the second of that name in the Account of their Historians: leaving out that rabble of 38 Kings (half of them at the least before Christ's Nativity) mentioned by Hector Boe●ius, 
Scotland.  Buchanan▪ and others of their Classic Authors. Neither shall I offend herein, as I conjecture, the more judicious and understanding men of the Scotish Nation, (and for others I take little care) since I deal no more unkindly with their first Fergin, and his Successors, than I have done already with our own Brutus, and his. The first Scotish King that settled himself in the North of Britain, is, according to the abovenamed Hector Boetius, one Fergus, which in the time that coile governed the Britan's, came (forsooth) into these parts out of Ireland. From him, unto Eugenius, we have the names of 39 Kings in a continued succession: which Eugenius, together with his whole Nation, is said to have been expelled the Island, by a joint confederacy of the Romans, B●itans, and Picts. Twenty and seven years after the death of this Eugenius, they were reduced again into their possession here, by the valour and conduct of another Fergus, the second of that name. To this Fergus I refer the beginning of this Scotish Kingdom in B●itain, holding the stories of the former 39 Kings, to be vain and fabulous. Neither want I probable conjecture for this assertion, this expedition of Fergus into Britain, being placed in the 424 year of CHRIST, at what time the best Writers of the Roman story for those times, report the Scots to have first seated themselves in this Island.  
The Kings of chief note in the course of the whole Succession are, 1 Achaius, who died in the year 809 and in his life contracted the offensive & defensive league with Charles the Great, between the Kngdoms of France and Scotland. The conditions whereof were, ● Let this league between the two Kingdoms endure for ever; 2 Let the enemies unto one, be reputed and handled as the enemies of the other; 3 If the Saxons or Englishmen invade France, the Scots shall send thither such numbers of Soldiers as shall be desired, the French King defraying the charges; 4 If the English invade Scotland, the King of France shall at his own charges send competent assistance unto the King of Scots. Never was there any league, which was either more faithfully observed, or longer continued, than this between these two Kingdoms: the Scots on all occasions so readily assisting the French, that it grew to a proverb, or by word, He that will France win, must with Scotland first begin. 2 Kenneth the second, who having utterly subdued and destroyed the Picts, extended his Dominions over all the present Scotland, deservedly to be accounted the first Monarch of it: the Picts (being either rooted out, or so few in number, that they passed afterwards in the name and account of Scots) from that time forwards never mentioned in any Author. 3 Malcolm the first, who added Westmoreland and Cumberland unto his Dominions, given to him by King Edmund of England, the Son of Athelstane, to have his aid against the Danes, or to keep him neutral. After which time, those Counties were sometimes Scotish, and sometimes English, till finally recovered by King Henry the 2d, and united to the Crown of England; never since disjoined. 4 Kenneth the 3d. who by consent of the Estates of his Realm, made the Kingdom hereditary, to descend from the Father to his Eldest Son; before which time (keeping within the compass of the Royal Family) the Uncle was sometimes preferred before the Nephew, the eldest in years, though further off before the younger Kinsman, though the nearer in blood. After which time (the opposition and interruption made by Constantine the 3d, and Donald the 4th, excepted only) the Eldest Sons of the Kings, or the next in birth, have succeeded ordinarily in that Kingdom. This Kenneth was one of those Tributary and Vassal-Kings, which rowed K. Edgar over the Dee, near Chester, in such pomp and majesty. 5 Machbeth, of whom there goeth a famous story, which shall be told at large anon. 6 Malcolm the 3d, the Son of Duncane, who lived in England during the whole time of Machbeths' tyranny, and thence brought into Scotland at his return not only some civilities of the English garb, but the honourarie titles of Earls and Barons, not here before used. At the persuasion of the Lady Margaret his wife, (Sister of Edgar, surnamed Atbeling, and after his decease the right Heir of the Crown of England,) he abolished the barbarous custom spoken of before. He did homage to William the Conqerour for the Crown of Scotland, but afterwards siding against him with the English, was slain at Alnwick. 7 David, the youngest Son of Malcolm the third, succeeded his two Brothers, Edgar and Alexander (dying without issue) in the Throne of his Father; and in right of his Mother the Lady Margaret, Sister and Heir of Edgar Atheling, and Daughter of Edward the Eldest Son of Edmund the 2d, surnamed Ironside, K. of England, had the best Title to that Kingdom also: but dispossessed thereof by the Norman Conqueror's; with whom, by reason of the great puissance of those Kings, and the little love which the English bare unto the Scots, not able to dispute their Title by force of Arms; ●rom Maud the Sister of this David, married to Henry the first of England, descended all the Kings of England (King Stephen excepted) to Queen Elizab●ths death: from David all the Kings of Scotland, till King james the sixth, who on the death of Queen Elizabeth succeeded in the Crown of England, in right of his Descent from another Margaret, the Eldest Daughter of King Henry the 7th. So that in his person there was not an union of the Kingdoms only, under the Title of Great Britain, but a restoring of the old Line of the Saxon Kings (of which he was the direct and indubitate Heir) to the Crown of England; the possession whereof had for so long time continued in the Posterity of the Norman Conqueror. And upon this descent it followeth most undeniably, that though the Norman Conqueror got the Crown of England by the power of the Sword, from the true Heirs of Edmund the 2d, surnamed Ironside; and that his Successors had enjoyed it by no other Title till Queen Elizab●ths death: yet james, the first Monarch of Great Britain, succeeded by a right descent from the Saxon Line, without relation to the Conquest of the Norman Bastard. 8 William, the Brother of Malcolm the 4th, and Nephew of David before mentioned by his Son Prince Henry (who died in the life of his Father) being taken Prisoner at the Battle of Alnwick, did Homage to King Henry the 2d for the Crown of Scotland, and was thereupon restored to his Liberty, and his Realm to peace. What doth occur concerning the succeeding Kings, when their Affairs with England and the World abroad became more considerable, we shall see anon.  
In the mean time proceed we to the Story of Machb●th, than which for variety of Action, and strangeness of events, I never met with any more pleasing. The Story in brief is thus. Duncan King of the Scots had two principal men, whom he employed in all matters of importance; Machbeth, and Banquho. These two travelling together through a Forest, were met by three Fairy's, Witches (Weirds the Scots call them) whereof the first making obeisance unto Machbeth, saluted him Thane (a Title unto which that of Earl afterward succeeded) of Glammis; the second, Thane of Cawder; and the third, King of Scotland. This is unequal dealing, saith Banquho, to give my Friend all the Honours, and none unto me; to whom one of the Weirds made answer, That he indeed should not be King, but out of his loins should come a Race of Kings, that should for ever rule the Scots. And having thus said, they all suddenly vanished. Upon their arrival to the Court, Machbeth was immediately created Thane of Glammis: & not long after, some new service of his requiring new recompense, he was honoured with the title of Thane of Cawder. Seeing then how happily the prediction of the three Weirds fell out in the two former; he resolved not to be wanting to himself in fulfilling the third: and therefore first he killed the King, and after, by reason of his command among the Soldiers and common people, he succeeded in his Throne. Being scarce warm in his seat, he called to mind the prediction given to his Companion Banqubo: whom hereupon suspecting as his supplanter, he caused him to be killed, together with his whole Posterity, Fleance one of his Sons, escaping only with no small difficulty into Wales. Freed, as he thought, from all fear of Banquho and his issue, he built Dunsinan Castle, and made it his ordinary seat: and afterwards on some new fears, consulting with certain of his Wizards about his future Estate, was told by one of them, that he should never be overcome till Bernane Wood (being some miles distant) came to Dunsinan Castle; and by another, that he should never be slain by any man which was born of a woman. Secure then, as he thought, from all future dangers, he omitted no kind of libidinous cruelty, for the space of 18 years, for so long he tyrannised over Scotland. But having then made up the measure of his Iniquities, Mac-duffe, the Governor of Fife, associating to himself some few Patriots, equally hated by the Tyrant, and abhorring the Tyranny, privily met one Evening at Bernane Wood, and taking every one of them a Bough in his hand (the better to keep them from Discovery) marched early in the morning towards Dunsinan Castle, which they took by Scalado. Macbeth escaping was pursued by Mac-duffe, who having overtaken him urged him to the combat: to whom the Tyrant, half in scorn, returned this Answer; That he did in vain attempt to kill him, it being his destiny never to be slain by any that was born of a Woman. Now then said Mac-duffe is thy fatal end drawing fast upon thee, for I was never born of Woman, but violently cut out of my Mother's belly: which words so daunted the cruel Tyrant, though otherwise a valiant man and of great performances, that he was very easily slain; and Malcolm Conmor, the true Heir of the Crown, seated in the Throne. In the mean time Fleance so prospered in Wales, that he gained the affection of the Prince's Daughter of that Country; and on her begat a Son called Walter; who flying out of Wales returned into Scotland, and his descent once known, he was not only restored to the Honours, and Estates of his Ancestors, but preferred to be Steward of the House of Edgar, the Son of Malcolm the third, surnamed Conmor, the name of Stewart growing hence hereditary unto his Posterity. From this Walter descended that Robert Stewart, who succeeded David Bruce in the kingdom of Scotland, the Progenitor of nine Kings of the name of Stewart, which have Reigned successively in that kingdom. But it is now time to leave off particulars, and look into the general Succession of  

The Kings of the Scots before the Conquest of the Picts,  
424. 1 Fergus.  
2 Eugenius.  
449. 3 Dongal.  
4 Constantine.  
5 Congall.  
6 Goran.  
7 Eugenius II.  
8 Congall II.  
9 Kinnatel.  
10 Aidan.  
604 11 Kenneth.  
12 Eugenius III.  
622 13 Ferchard.  
14 Donald.  
15 Ferchard II.  
16 Malduine.  
17 Eugenius IU.  
18 Eugenius V.  
19 Amberkeleth.  
20 Eugenius VI.  
21 Mordac.  
730 22 Etfinus.  
23 Eugenius VII.  
24 Fergus II.  
25 Solvathius.  
26 Achaius.  
809 27 Congall III.  
28 Dongall II.  
29 Alpine, slain in a Battle by the Picts, in pursuit of his quarrel for that kingdom, pretended to belong unto him in Right of his Mother, Sister and Heir of Hungius the last King thereof.  
30 Kenneth II. Son of Alpine; who utterly subdued and destroyed the Picts, extending extending thereby the Scotish Kingdom, from one Sea to the other, over all the bounds of modern Scotland; of which deservedly accounted the first Monarch; the Founder of the new Succession of   

The Kings of the Scots after the Conquest of the Picts.  
A. Ch.  
839. 1 Kenneth II. the first sole King of all Scotland. 17.  
856. 2 Donald II. Brother of Kenneth the 2d.  
862. 3 Constantin II. Son of Kenneth the 2d.  
875. 4 Ethus, Brother of Constantin the 2d.  
890. 5 Donald III. Son of Constantin the 2d.  
903. 6 Constantin III. 30.  
933. 7 Malcolm, Son of Donald the 3d.  
949. 8 I●gulph, an Intrnder. 12.  
961. 9 Duffe, Son of Malcolm. 1.  
961. 10 Kenneth III. Brother of duff.  
994. 11 Constantin IU. an Intruder, against the Law, and Line of Kenneth the 3d.  
1004. 12 Malcolm II. Son of Kenneth the 3d. opposed by G●ime, the Nephew of duff.  
1035. 13 Duncan, Son of Grime, succeeded Malcolm the 2d, dying without issue.  
1040. 14 Macbeth, the Tyrant and Usurper.  
1057. 15 Malcolm III. Son of Duncan.  
2096. 16 Donald IV. surnamed Ban, Brother of Malcolm the 3d.  
1098. 17 Edgar, Son of Malcolm the 3d.  
1107. 18 Alexander, Brother of Edgar.  
1124. 19 David, Brother of Alexander.  
1133. 20 Malcolm Son of David.  
1166. 21 William, Brother of Malcolm the 4th.  
1213. 22 Alexander II. Son of William.  
1250. 23 Alexander III, Son of Alexander the 2d. after whose death, dying without any issue, An. 1285. began that tedious and bloody. Quarrel about the succession of this Kingdom, occasioned by sundry Titles and Pretendants to it: the principal whereof were Bruc● and Balliol descended from the Daughters of David, Earl of Huntingdon, younger Son of William, and Great Uncle of Alexander the 3d, the last of the Male issue of Kenneth the 3d, those of nearer Kindred being quite extinct. And when the Scots could not compose the difference among themselves, it was taken into consideration by King Edward the first of England, as the Lord Paramount of that Kingdom; who selecting 12 English, and as many of the Scots to advise about it, with the consent of all adjudged it to john Balliol Lord of Galloway, Son of john Balliol and Dervorguilla his Wife, Daughter of Alan Lord of Galloway, and of the Lady Margaret, the Eldest Daughter of the said David; who having done his homage to the said King Edward, was admitted King.  
1300. 24 john Balliol, an Englishman, but forgetful both of English birth, and English Favours, invaded the Realm of England in Hostile manner, and was taken Prisoner by King Edward. Who following his blow, made himself Master of all Scotland, which he held during the rest of his life, and had here his Chancery and other Courts. 6.  
1306. 25 Robert Bruce, Son of Robert Bruce Lord of Annandale (Competitor with Balliol for the Crown of Scotland in Right of Isabel his Mother, the second Daughter of David Earl of Hun●ingd●n, and consequently a degree nearer to the King deceased than Balliol was, though descended from the Elder Sister) was crowned King in the life-time of King Edward the first, but not fully possessed thereof until after his death: confirmed therein by the great defeat given to Edward the 2d, at the fight of Banocksbourn not far from Sterling, spoken of before. But he being dead, Anno 1332. Edward the 3d confirmed the Kingdom on●  
1332. 26 Edward Balliol, Son of john Balliol, rejected by the Scots for adhering so firmly to the English; who thereupon harried Scotland with fire and Sword. 10.  
27 David Bruce, the Son of Robert, restored unto his Father's throne by the power of the Scots, and a great enemy to the English. Invading England when King Edward was at the siege of Calais, he was taken Prisoner by Qu. Philip, the Wife of that King, and brought to Windsor; where he was Prisoner, for a while, with King john of France. Released at last on such conditions as best pleased the Conqueror. 29.  
1371. 28 Robert II. surnamed Stewart, King of the Scots by descent from the eldest Sister of David B●uce, was extracted also from the ancient Princes of Wales (as was said before, restoring thereby the British blood to the throne of Scotland.  
1390. 29 R●bert III Son of Robert the 2d, called john before he came to the Crown; in which much overawed by his own brother the Duke of Albany, who had an aim at it for himself. 16.  
1406. 30 james, Son of R●bert the 3d taken prisoner by King Henry the 4th of England, as he was crossing the Seas for France, to avoid the practices of his uncle. Restored unto his Country by King henry the 5th, after 18 years' absence, he was at last most miserably murdered by the Earl of Athol, claiming a right unto that Crown. 42.  
1448. 31 james II. 
Ireland.  slain by the English at the Siege of Rexborough Castle. 24.  
1462. 32 james III. slain by his own rebellious Subjects. 29.  
1491. 33 james IV. married Margaret, the eldest Daughter of King Henry the 7th, but at the soliciting of the French, (against the Peace between the Nations) he invaded England (in the absence of King Henry the 8th) with 100000 men: but was met with by the Earl of Su●rey (having 26000 men in his Army) nigh unto Flodden; where he was slain, together with two Bishops, twelve Earls, fourteen Lords, and his whole Army routed. 23.  
1514. 34 James V. Son of james the 4th, and the Lady Margaret, kept for a time so good correspondency with the English, that in the year 1536. he was created Knight of the Order of the Garter. But afterwards inheriting his Father's hatred against them, he invaded their Borders in the year 1542: and was met by the Lord Wharton, than Warden of the West Marches. The battles being ready to join, one S. Oliver Sincleer the King's favourite, though otherwise of no great parentage, was by the King's directions proclaimed General: which the Scotish Nobility took with such indignation, that they threw down their weapons, and suffered themselves to be taken prisoners, there being not one man slain one either side. The principal prisoners were the Earls of Glencarn, and Cassiles; the Barons Maxwell, Oli haunt, Somerwell, Fleming, with divers others: besides many of the principal Gentry. 28.  
1542. 35 Marry, the Daughter and only Lawfully-begotten Child of James the fifth, succeeded in her Cradle unto the Throne; promised in marriage to King Edward the sixth of England; but by the power of the hamilton's carried into France, where married to Francis, than Dolphin, afterwards King of the French, of that name the 2d. After whose death, she married Henry Lord Darnly, eldest Son of Matth●w Earl of Lennox. Outed of her Dominions by a potent Faction, she was compelled to fly into England; where after a tedious imprisonment she was put to death in Foth●ringhay Castle in Northam●tonshire, and interred at Peterburg, Anno 1586.  
1567. 36 JAMES VI the Son of Mary Queen of Scots, and of Henry Lord Darnly, was crowned King in his Cradle also. He married 〈◊〉, the Daughter of Christian the 3d, King of De●mark; was chose of the Order of the Garter, Anno 1590. and succeeded Queen Elizabeth in the Realm of England, March 24, Anno 1602. And here I cannot omit the prudent foresight of King Henry the 7th, who having two Daughters, bestowed the Eldest. (contrary to the mind of his Counsel) on the King of Scots, and the Younger on the King of the French: that so, if his own Issue m●le should fail, and that a Prince of another Nation must inherit England; then Scotland as the lesser Kingdom would depend upon England, and not England wait on France, as upon the greater. In which succession of the Scots to the Crown of England, the Prophecy of the fatal 〈◊〉, spoken o● before, did receive accomplishment. And so perhaps might that ascribed in the 〈…〉 to an holy Anchoret living in King Egelreds' time, which is this Englishmen, fo● that they 〈◊〉 them to drunkenness, to treason, and to rechlessness of God's house, fi●st by Danes, and the● by Normans, and the third time by Scots, whom they holden least worth of all, they shall be overcome. Then the World shall be unstable, and so divers and variable, that the unstableness of thoughts shall be betokned by many manner diversity of Clothing. For on this union of the kingdoms, this prediction seems to have been accomplished; the Circumstances mentioned in the same so patly agreeing, and the Scots never subduing England, but by this blessed Victory: unless perhaps the Accomplishment thereof be still to come; or that it was indeed more literally fulfilled in the great defeat at Banocksbourn, in which were slain 50000 English, as the Scotish Writers do report, and the name of Scot growing so terrible for a time, that an hundred of the English would fly from three Scots, as before was noted.   
The Revenues of this Crown Boterus estimateth at 100000 Crowns, or 30000 sterling: and it is not like that they were much more, if they came to that: here being no commodity in this Kingdom to allure strangers to traffic; the Domain or Patrimony of the Crown but mean; the country in most places barren; and many of the Subjects, those specially of the Out-Isles, and the Western parts, so extremely barbarous, that they add very small improvement to the public Treasury.  
And answerable to the shortness of their standing Revenue, were their Forces also. For though the Country be very populous, and the men generally patient both of cold and hunger, and enured to hardship; yet in regard the Kings hereof were not able to maintain an Army under pay, their 〈◊〉 seldom held together above 40 days, and then, if not a great deal sooner, did disband themselves. For the Nobility and Gentry being bound by the Tenure of their Lands to serve the King in his Wars, and to bring with them such and so many of their Vassals as the present service did require; used to provide for themselves and their followers, Tents, money, victuals, provision of all sorts and all other necessaries; the King supplying them with nothing. Which being spent, they 〈◊〉 disbanded, and went home again, without attending long on the Expedition. Which I conceive to be the reason, why the Scots in the time of hostility betwixt th● Nations, made only sudden and tumultuary incursions into England; without performing any th●ng of special moment: and that 〈◊〉 have not acted any thing elsewhere in the way of conquest; but only as Mercin●ries to the ●rench and other Nations that have hired them. And though it be affirmed that the Army of King james the 4th when he invaded England in the time of King Henry the 8th (being then in France) consisted of 100000 fight men; yet this I look on only as an Argument of their populositie: few of those men being armed, or trained up to service; and therefore easily discomfited by a far less Army. 'Tis true, that in the year 1643 the Sco●ish Covenanters raised an Army consisting of 18000 Foot, 2000 Horse, and 1000 Dragoons; with Arms, Artillery and Ammunion correspondent to it: which was the gallantest Army, and the best appointed, that ever that Nation did set out in the times foregoing. But than it is as true withal, that this Army was maintained and paid by the two Houses of the Parliament of England, at the rate of 30000 per mens●m, and an advance of 100000 l. before hand, the better to invite them to embrace the action, and prepare necessaries for it; without any charge unto themselves. And though the Army which they sent into England about five years after, under james Duke Hamilton of Arran, was little inferior unto this in number, but far superior to it both in Horse and Arms, and other necessary appointments: yet it is well known, that the Scots brought nothing but their own bodies to compound that Army; the Horse and Arms being such as they had gotten out of England in the former war.  
In point of reputation amongst foreign Princes, the Kings of the Scots, and their Ambassadors and Agents, had place in all General Councils, and Ecclesiastical Assemblies, before those of Castille: and by the Statists of late times, have been reckoned (with the Kings of England, France, and Spain) for absolute Monarches. But I conceive this was only since the first years of King Edward the 3d, when they had quitted their subjection and vassalage to the Crown of England. For that anciently the Scots were Homagers to the Kings of England, may be apparently demonstrated by these following Arguments. 1 By the Homages, and other services and duties done by the Kings of the Sco●s unto those of England: Malcolm the 3d doing Homage unto William the Conqueror; as William one of his Successors, did to King Henry the 2d, and that not only for the three Northern Counties, or the Earldom of Huntingdon, (as by some pretended) but for the very Crown itself; Kenneth the 3d being one of those eight Tributary or Vassal Kings, which rowed King Edgar over the Dee, as before was noted. 2ly, By the interposing of King Edw. the first, and the submission of the Scots to that interposing, in determining the controversy of succession betwixt Bruce and Balliol: as in like case, Philip the Fair adjudged the title of Ar●oys, which was holden of the Crown of France, and then in question betwixt the Lady Maud and her Nephew Robert; or as King Edward the 3d, in the right of the said Crown of France, determined of the controversy betwixt john Earl of Montford, and Charles of Blais, for the Dukedom of Bretagne, 3ly, By the confession and acknowledgement of the Prelates, Peers, and other the Estates of Scotland, subscribed by all their hands and seals in the Roll of Ragman; wherein they did acknowledge the superiority of the Kings of England, not only in regard of such advantages as the Sword had given him, but as of his original and undoubted right. Which Roll was treacherously delivered into the hands of the Scots by Roger Mortimer, Earl of March, in the beginning of the reign of King Edward the 3d. 4ly, By the tacit Concession of the Kings themselves, who in their Coins, Commissions, and public Instruments, assume not to themselves the title of Kings of Scotland, but of Reges Scotorum, or the Kings of the Scots; and thereby intimating that though they are the Kings of the Nation, yet there is some superior Lord (King Paramount as we may call him) who hath the Royalty of the Land. 5ly, By the judgements and Arrests of the Courts of England, not only in the times of King Edward the first, but in some times since. For when William Wallis a Scotishman by Birth, and the best Soldier of that Country, was taken Prisoner and brought to London, he was adjudged to suffer death as a Traitor: which had been an illegal and unrighteous judgement, had he been a Prisoner of War, and not looked on by the judges as a Subject to the Crown of England. The like done in the Case of Simon Frezill, another of that Kingdom, in the same King's reign. In like manner, in the time of King Edward the 3d it was resolved by the Court in the Lord Beaumont's Case, when it was objected against one of the Witnesses that he was a scot, and therefore as an Alien not to give his evidence; that his testimony was to be allowed of, because the Scots in the Law of England did not go for Aliens. And when one indicted for a Rape in the 13th of Queen Elizabeth's reign, desired a Medietatem lingue, because he was a Scot●shman, and so an Alien; it was denied him by the Court, because the Scots were not reputed here as Aliens, but as Subjects rather. So also, when Robert Umf●amville, Lord of Kyme, was summoned to the Parliament of England in the reign of King Edward the 3d, by the name of Robert Earl of A●gus, (which is a dignity in Scotland) and after in a Writ against him was called only by his own name of Umframville, without the addition of that honour; the Writ was judged to abate: which I conceive the learned judges had not done, if Scotland had not been reputed to be under the Vassalage of the Kings of England. 6ly, and lastly, By a Charter of Lands and Arms, (which I have in my custody) granted by King Edward the first in the last year of his reign, to 〈…〉 ●●worth in the County of Chester, one of the Ancestors of my Mother: in which it is expressed, that the said Lands & Arms were conferred upon him by that King, for his eminent services, 〈…〉 grand Enemy et Rebel, Balliol, Roya ' Escosse et Vassald: Angleterre, that is to say, against his great Enemy and Rebel Balliol K: of Scotland, and Vassal of England. A thing so clear, that if King ●ames had not been extremely tender of the honour of his native Country, he needed not to have put his Lawyers to the trouble of a New Invention, in hammering the Case of the Post- 〈◊〉 for h●m, to make the Scots inheritable unto Lands in England. The acknowledgement and Reviver of their old Subjection would have served his turn. 
Ireland.  But of this Argument enough, and perhaps too much: I only add, that upon conference which I once had with an honourable person of that Kingdom of scotland, employed unto the Court in a business of no mean consequence to the peace and quiet o● his Country. I found him so sensible of the inconveniences of their present Government, by reason of the King's absence, and the frequent divisions and partialities of his Counsel there: that he confessed that Nation could be never rich or happy, till they were made a Province of the English Emp●re, and governed by a Viceroy, as Ireland was.  
The principal Order of Knighthood in this Kingdom, was that of S. Andrew, instituted by Hungus, King o● the Picts, to encourage his Subjects in the war against King Athelstane of England. The Knights did wear about their necks a Collar, interlaced with Thistles, with the Picture of S. Andrew appendent to it: The Motto, Nemo me impunè lacessit. It took this name because after the battle, Hungus and his Soldiers went all barefoot to S. Andrews, and there vowed that they and their Posterity would thenceforth use his Cross as their Ensign (which is a Saltire Argent in a 〈◊〉 Azure) whensoever they took in hand any warlike enterprise.  
2 But this Order being expired many Ages since, there is now no Order of Knighthood in it, (except Knights Bachelors) but that of N●va Scotia; ordained by King Iam●▪ Anno 1622. for the planting of that Country by Scotish Colonies; in imitation of the order of Baronet's in England, or the plantation of Ulster. Hereditary, as that also is, but the Knights hereof distinguished by a Ribbon of Orange-Tawnie.  
The Arms are ●ol, a Lion Rampant Mars, within a double Tressure counter-flowred: Which Tressure counter-stowred was added to the Lion by Achaius King of the Scots, at what time he contracted the League with France: signifying saith Hector Boetius one of their Historians) Francorum ●●ibus Leonem ex●nde muniendum; that the Scotch Lion should be guarded by the riches of France.  
Reckoned in Scotland, with the Isles of it.  
Arch-Bishops 2. Bishops 12. Universities two S. Andrews. Aberdeen.   

IRELAND.  
IRELAND is environed on all sides with the Ocean: parted from Britain by a violent and unruly Sea called S. George's Channel. Situate on the West of Britain, next unto which it is the biggest Island of Europe, containing in length 300, and in breadth 120 miles: and is seated under the 8th and 10th Climates; the longest day being 16 hours and an half in the Southern, and 1● hours 3 quarters in the Northern parts.  
It was once called Scotia, from the Scots who did there inhabit: and Scotia Minor, to difference it from scotland in the Isle of Britain. But the general name hereof is Ireland; by the Latines called Hiberni●, by the Greeks, jernia. And though some frame a wrested Etymology from Iber●●, a Spanish Captain; and some from Irnaulph, once a supposed Duke hereof; as others ab Hyberno 〈◊〉, the Winter like and inclement Air: yet probably the name proceeded from Erinland, which signifieth in their own language a Western land. And yet I must not pretermit the Etymon given us by B●chartus, (more near the name than most of his other Fancies) who will have it called Hib●r●a, from 〈◊〉, a Phoe●ician word, signifying the furthest Habitation: there being no Country known amongst the Ancients which lay West of Ireland.  
Their own Chronicles, or F●bles rather, tell us, how Caesarea, Noah's Niece, inhabited here before the Flood; and how 300 years after the Flood, it was subdued by Bartholanus, a Scythian, who overcame here I know not what Giants. Afterward Nemethus another Scythian Prince, and sword, a 〈◊〉, came hither: and last of all Gaothel, with his Wife Scota, one of Pharaobs' daughters, who must needs name this Island Scotia. But not to honour such fopperies with a confutation, 〈…〉 the first inhabitants of this Island came our of Britain. For Britain is the nighest Country unto it, and so had a more speedy waftage hither; Secondly, the ancient Writers call this Island a 〈…〉 Island; and Thirdly, Tacitus giveth us of this Country this verdict: Solum, 〈…〉 ingenia hominum, hand multum à Britannia differunt, the habits and disposition of the people were not much unlike the Britan's. For further evidence whereof it was observed at the reduction of Wales to the Crown of England by King Edward the first, that many of their Laws and Customs were like those of the Irish: which shows that they did both descend from the same original. But then we must observe withal, that they were counted far more barbarous and savage by most ancient Writers, than those of Britain are deciphered at the first discovery: said by Strabo to be man-eaters; accustomed, as Solinus telleth us) to drink the blood of those whom they slew in fight. Nor were the Women, though the softer and more tender Sex, free from such wild and savage customs; it being a constant course amongst them, when they were delivered of a man-child, to put some meat into the mouth of it, on the point of a sword; wishing therewith it might not die but in the midst of Arms, and the heat of battle. Both Sexes used to trim themselves with the Teeth of Fishes, white as the driven Snow, or the polished Ivory; and therein placed the greatest part of their pride and bravery.  
Nor are the modern Irish much abhorrent from such barbarous customs, as plainly show from what Original they descend; altered but little by converse with more civil Nations. O● natural constitution generally strong and nimble of body, haughty of heart, careless of their lives, patient in cold and hunger, implacable in enmity, constant in love, light of belief, greedy of glory; and in a word, if they be bad, you shall nowhere find worse; if they be good, you shall 〈◊〉 meet with better. The Diet, especially of the mere Irish, is for the most part, on herbs, roots, butter mingled with oat-flower, milk, and beef-broth: eating flesh many times without bread, which they digest with ●●quebaugh; and give their breadcorn to their horses instead of Provender. But more particularly those of the richer sort in all parts, and of all sorts those which inhabit within the Pale (as they themselves call it) and in such places where the English Discipline hath been entertained, conformable to civility, both in behaviour and apparel: The Kerns (for by that name they call the wild Irish of the poorer and inferior sort) most extremely barbarous; not behaving themselves like Christians, scarcely like men. All of them so tenacious of their ancient customs, that neither power, nor reason, nor the sense of the inconveniencies which they suffer by it, can wean them to desert or change them. A pregnant evidence whereof, is their use o● Ploughing, not with such gears or harness, as in other places, but by tying the hindmost, horse's head to the tail of the former: which makes the poor Jades draw in a great deal of pain; makes them unserviceable by the soon losing of their tails; and withal is a course of so slow a dispatch, that they cannot break up as much ground in a week, as a good Teem well harnessed would perform in a day; yet no persuasion hath been able to prevail upon them for the changing of this hurtful and ridiculous custom. And when the Earl of Strafford, the late Lord Deputy, had damned it by Act of Parliament, and laid a penalty on such as should after use it: the people thought it such a grievance, and so injurious to the Nation, that among other things demanded towards a Pacification of the present troubles, their Agents and Commissioners insisted eagerly on the abrogation of this Law. An humour like to this in the point of Husbandry, we shall hereafter meet with in another place. Near of kin to which, is a lazy custom that they have of burning their straw (rather than put themselves to the pains to thresh it) by that means to part it from the corn. From which no reason can dissuade them, nor persuasions win them. They have among them other customs as absurd, though less inconvenient, as placing a green bush, on May-day, before their doors, to make their kine yield the more milk; kneeling down to the New Moon as soon as they see it, desiring her to leave them in as good health as she found them, and many others of like nature.  
They use a Language of their own, but spoken also in the West of Scotland, and the H●br●des or Western Lands: which though originally British, or a Dialect of it, by reason of their intermixture with 〈◊〉, Danes, Easterlings or Oost-mans', and English-Saxons, hath no Affinity with the W●lch, for aught I can learn.  
The Christian Faith was first preached among them by S. Patrick, affirmed to be the Nephew of S. Ma●tin of ●ou●s, Anno 435. Reformed in the more civil parts, and the English Colonies, according to the platform of the Church of England: but the Kerns, or natural wild Irish, (and many of the better sort of the Nation also) either adhere unto the Pope, or to their own superstitious fancies, as in former times. And to say truth, it is no wonder that they should; there being no care taken to instruct them in the Protestant Religion: either by translating the Bible, or the English Liturgy, into their own Language, as was done in Wales; but forcing them to come to Church to the English Service, which the people understand no more than they do the Mass. By mean● whereof, the Irish are not only kept in continual ignorance, as to the doctrine and devotions of the Church of England, and others of the Protestant Churches: but those of Rome are furnished with an excellent Argument for having the Service of the Church in a Language which the common Hearers do not understand. And therefore I do heartily commend it to the care of the State (when these distempers are composed) to provide, that they may have the Bible, and all other public means of Christian Instruction, in their natural tongue.  
The Soil of itself is abundantly fruitful, but naturally fitter for grass and pasturage, than it is for tillage: as may be seen in such places where the industry of man is aiding to the natural good●ess of the Soil. But where that wanteth, the Country is either overgrown with Woods, or encumbered with vast Bogs and unwholesome Marshes, yielding neither profit nor pleasure unto the Inhabitants. In some places, as in the County of Armagh, so rank and fertile, that the laying of any soil or compost on it, doth abate its fruitfulness, and proves the worst Husbandry that can be.  
It hath been anciently very famous for the Piety and Religious lives of the Monks. Amongst whom I cannot but remember Columbus, and of him this memorable Apothegm: when offered many fair preferments to leave his Country, he returned this Answer, It becomes not them to embrace other men's goods, who for Christ's sake had forfaken their own. Of no less piety, but more eminent in point of Learning, was Richard Fitz-Rafe, Archbishop of Armagh, commonly called Armacanus, who flourished about the year 1350. A declared Enemy of the Errors and corruptions of the Church of Rome.  
It is affirmed of this Island, that (amongst other Privileges which it hath above other Lands) it fostereth no venomous Serpent, and that no such will live here, brought from other places. Hence of herself we find her speaking in the Poet.  
Illa ego sum Graiis, Glacialis Hibernia dicta;  
Cui Deus, & melior rerum nascentium Origo,  
Ius common dedit cum Creta altrice Tonantis,  
Angues ne nostris diffundant sibila in oris.  
I am that Island which in times of old  
The Greeks did call Hibernia, ycie-cold:  
Secured by God and Nature from this fear,  
Which gift was given to Crete, Ioves Mother dear;  
That poisonous Snake should never here be bred,  
Or dare to hiss, or hurtful venom spread.  
The other miracles of this Island, are, 1 That there is a Lake in the County of Armagh, into which if one thrust a piece of Wood, he shall find that part of it which remaineth in the Mud to be turned into Iron; and that which is in the Water, to be turned into a Whetstone: richly deserved by him, if the tale be false, who did first report it. 2ly, That the Kine will yield no Milk, if their Calves be not by them; or at least their Calf's skins stuffed with straw or Hay. It is said also, that all the breed of this Country are of less size than they be in England, except womans and Greybounds, and those much bigger than with us.  
As for the Clergy of this Country, they have been little beholding to their Lay-Patrons in former times: some of their Bishops being so poor, that they had no other Revenues than the Pasture of two Milch-Beasts. And so far had the Monasteries and Religious houses invaded by Appropriations, the Church's rights, that of late times in the whole Province of Connaught the whole Stipend of the Incumbent was not above 40 shillings, in some places not above 16. So that the poor Irish must needs be better fed than taught: for ad tenuitatem Beneficiorum necessario sequitur ignorantia Sacerdotum; Poor Benefices will be fitted with ignorant Priests, said Panormitan rightly. But this was remedied in part by his Sacred Majesty King CHARLES, the second Monarch of Great Britain, who liberally (at the suit of the late Lord Archb. of Canterbury) restored unto this Church all the Impropriations and Portions of Tithes, which had been vested in the Crown. An action of most singular piety, and Princely bounty.  
Principal Rivers of this Country, are, 1 the Shannon (the Senas of Ptolemy) which arising in the Mountains of Letrim in the County of Connaught, and making many fair Lakes as it passeth forwards; loseth itself, after a course of 200 miles (of which 60 navigable) in the Western Ocean. 2 The Liff, by Ptolemy called Libnius, neighboured by the City of Dublin. 3 Awiduffe, or Blackwater, as the English call it. 4 Sione, supposed to be the Medona of the ancient Writers. 5 The Shower. 6 The Slanie, etc. Of which, and others of like note, take this following Catalogue, out of the Canto of the marriage of the Thames and Medway in the Fairy Queen.  
There was the Liffie rowing down the lee,  
The sandy Slain, the stony Aubrian,  
The spacious Shenin spreading like a sea,  
The pleasant Boyne, the fishie-fruitfull Banne,  
Swift Awiduffe, which of the Englishman  
Is called Blackwater; and the Liffar deep,  
Sad Trowis that once his people overran,  
Strong Allo tumbling from Slewlogheer steep,  
And Mallo mine, whose waves I wilom taught to weep.  
There also was the wide-embayed Mayre,  
The pleasant Bandon crowned with many wood;  
The spreading Lee, that like an Island fair  
Encloseth Cork with his divided flood;  
And baleful Our, late stained with English blood,  
With many more, etc. So the renowned Spencer in his Canto of the marriage of Thames and Medway.  
But besides these Rivers, this Island is in most places well-stored with Lakes, yielding great plenty of Fish to the parts adjoining. The principal of which, 1 Lough-Enne, containing 15 miles in breadth, and 30 miles in sength; shaded with woods, and so replenished with fish, that the Fishermen complain of too much abundance, and the often breaking of their nets. It hath also in it many Lands, one most remarkable for the strange and horrid noises which are therein heard; called therefore by the Vulgar S. Patrick's Purgatory. Almost as big as this is 2 the Lake of Co●bes, which loseth itself in the Sea not far from Galloway. A Lake of 26 miles in length, and four in breadth; said to have in it 30 Ilets, abounding with Pinetrees. 3 Lough-Foyle, supposed to be the Logia of Ptolomic. 4 Lough-Eaugh, out of which the River Banne, abundantly well-stored with Salmon, hath its first Original. And besides these and many others of less note, there are said to be three Lakes in the Province of Meth, not far asunder, and having an intercourse of waters: but of so different a temper, that the Fish which are proper to the one (for each of them hath its proper and peculiar sorts) will not live in the other: but either dieth, or by some secret conveyances find a way to their own Lake out of which they were brought.  
It was divided anciently into five Provinces, each one a Kingdom of itself; that is to say, 1 Leinster, 2 Meth, 3 Ulster, 4 Connaught, and 5 Monster: but of late time the Province of Meth is reckoned for a Member or part of Leinster.  
1 LEINSTER, by the Latines called Lagenia, hath on the East, the Irish Channel, (commonly called S. George's Channel) by which parted from the Isle of Great Britain; on the West, the River Newrie, (Neorus as the Latins call it) which divides it from Monster; on the North, the Province of Meth; and the main Ocean on the South. The Soil more fruitful generally than the rest of Ireland, because better cultivated and manured, as having been longest in the possession of the English: from whom a great part of the Inhabitants do derive themselves, and for that reason more conformable to the civilities and habit of the English Nation. Well watered, besides a large Sea-coast, with many fair and pleasant Rivers; the principal whereof, 1 the Barrow, called in Latin Birgus; 2 the Newrie, 3 the Shower, and 4 the Liffie, (the Libmus of Ptolemy) neighbouring Dublin the chief City.  
It containeth the Counties of 1 Dublin, 2 Kilkenny, 3 Caterlough, 4 Kildare, 5 Lease, or Queen's County, 6 Ophalie, or King's County and 7 W●ishford: in which are comprehended 34 Towns of note, and 88 Castles, well-fortified, and able to make good resistance against an Enemy; the English being forced to fortify themselves in their Plantations with strong holds and fortresses, against the incursions of the Natives.  
Place of most observation in it, 1 Dublin, supposed to be the Eblana of Ptolemy; by the Irish called Bala●leigh, because being seated in a fennie and moorish Soil, it was built on piles, as the word doth signify in that language. Situate at or near the mouth of the Rive Liffie, which affordeth it a commodious Haven, but that the entrances thereof are many times encumbered with heaps of Sand. The City very rich and populous, as being the Metropolis of all the Island, the Seat of the Lord Deputy, an Archbishops See, and an University, besides the benefit redounding from the Courts of justice. In those respects well-fortified against all emergencies; and adorned with many goodly buildings, both private and public. The principal of which, are the Castle, wherein the Lord Deputy resideth, built by Henry Loandres once Archbishop here; a College founded by Queen Elizabeth, to the honour, and by the name of the blessed Trinity▪ the Cathedral Church dedicated to S. Patrick, the Apostle of the Irish Nation; a fair Collegiate Church called Christ-Church, besides thirteen others destinated to Parochial meetings. Being destroyed almost to nothing in the Danish Wars, it was re-edified by Harald▪ surnamed Harfager, King of the Norwegians, than Masters of most parts of the Island; and after the subjection of it to the Crown of England, was peopled with a Colony of Bristol men. 2 Weishford or Wexford, the Menapia of Ptolemie, situate on the mouth of the River Slain, supposed to be the Modona of the same Author: the first of all the Towns in Ireland which received a Colony of English. 3 Kilkenny, on the River Newre, the chief Seat of the Bishop of Osserie, and the fairest Town of all the In-lands: so called, quasi Cella Canic●, the Cell or Monastery of Canicus, a man of great renown for piety in these parts of the Country. 4 Kildare, an Inland Town also, and a Bishops See; but of more note for giving the Title of an Earl to the ancient Family of the Fitz-Geralds, of long time honoured with this title. One of which being much complained of to King Henry the 8th, as a man of so unquiet and turbulent a nature, that his Adversaries closed their charge against him with this expression; Finally, all Ireland cannot rule this Earl; the King replied, that then this Earl should rule all Ireland: and so for his lests sake made him Lord Deputy of the Kingdom. 5 Rosse, once populous, well-traded, and of large Circumference, now a ruin only; nothing remaining but the Walls, which were built by Isabella, the Daughter of Richard Strongbow Earl of Pembroke, the fortunate Conqueror of this Island for King Henry the 2d. 6 Philip's Town, the principal of the County of Ophalie, or King's County; so called in honour of King Philip; as 7 Marieburg, the chief of Lease, or the Queen's County, was in honour of Queen Mary. 8 Leighlin, a place of great importance, well walled and fortified against the incursion of the Irish, by the Lord Deputy Bellingham. 9 Caterl●gh, commonly, but corruptly Carlough, a Town of great strength, and the chief of that County. 10 Rheban, not otherwise of note, but that it is conceived to be the Rheba of Ptolemy.  
2 METH, by the Latines called Media, by Giraldus, Midia; because situate in the midst of the land, hath on the South, Leinster; on the West, Connaught; on the North, Ulster; on the East, the Irish Sea, or S. George's Channel. A small, but rich and pleasant Province: well stocked with people, and stored with all things necessary for their sustentation; and for a sweet and wholesome Air, not inferior to any. Divided into three Counties only, that is to say, 1 〈◊〉- Meth, 2 West-Met●, and 3 Long ford; containing 13 Towns of note, and ●4 Castles of good esteem. By reason of which strength it is called by some writers the Chamber of Ireland.  
Towns of most consequence herein, 1 Trim, the chief Town of the County of East-Meth, the ancient Barony of the Lacies, possessed in former times of a fair Revenue in this County, and Lords of the greatest parts of Ulster. 2 Tredah, more properly Droghedah, situate on the River B●ine on the edge of Ulster, to which Province belongs so much of the Town as heath on the North side of that River: a very fair and populous City, as well by art as Nature very strongly fortified, and furnished with a large and commodious Haven. It took the name of Drogheda from the Bridge there built upon the River, for the Conveniency of passage (as the word signifieth in that Language) and therefore called Pontana by some Latin writers. 3 Mulinga, the chief Town of West-Meth. 4 Delvin, in the same County also, the Barony of the Nagents, an ancient Family in this tract. 5 Longford, of most note in the Countty so named, but not else observable.  
As for the fortunes of this Province (for L●inster sin●e the first Conquest of it, hath been inseparably a●nexed to the Crown of England) it was first granted in Fee Farm by King Henry the 2d, to Hugh Lacie, a Man of great merit and employment in the Conquest of Ireland; who left it unto Wa●ter his younger Son. By Margaret, and Matild●, the Nieces of this Wal●er by his Sorne Gilbert, one moiety hereof came to the Mor●imers Earls of March, and in their right unto the Crown in King Edward the fourth: and the other moiety to the Verduns, by whom dispersed and scattered into divers Families. Accounted for one County only till the time of King Henry the 8th. in whose reign it was divided into East-Meth and West-Meth, to which the County of Longford was after added, as it continueth to this day.  
3 ULSTER, by the Latines called Vltonia, is the largest Province of all Ireland; bounded on the South, with Meth and Connaught; on the West, with the vast Irish Ocean; on the North, with that part of the Northern Ocean to which Ptolemy gives the name of Hiperborean; and on the East, with S. George's Channel. A Country fruitful of itself, but in most places formerly overgrown with Woods, and drowned in Marshes and great bogs, by the natural slothfulness of the people: made more responsal to the husbandman both for corn and pasturage since the late Plantation of the British, than in times foregoing.  
It is divided into the Counties of, 1 Louth, 2 Cavan, 3 Fermanath, 4 Down, 5 Monaghan, 6 Armagh, 7 Colrane, 8 Tirconnel, 9 Ti●-O●n, and 10 Antrim. In which are comprehended 14 Towns of note for Commerce and Traffic, and 30 Castles for defence of the Country, and keeping under the wild Irish, wilder and more untractable in these Northern parts, than the rest of Ireland. The whole well watered with a large and spacious Sea on three sides thereof; many great Lakes in the body of it, besides the Rivers of 1 Boyne, called in Latin B●anda, which divides it from Meth, 2 the Bann, 3 Moandus, and 4 the Eyn, belonging to this Province wholly.  
Places of most importance in it, 1 Armagh, on or near the River Kalin, the chief Town of the County so called, and the See of an Archbishop, who is the Primate of all Ireland. An ancient City, but so miserably defaced by fire in Tir-Oens Rebellion, that it can scarce preserve the reputation of a Market Town. 2 Carlingford, and 3 Dundalk, both situate on the Sea side, and both within the County of Louth. 4 Knock-Fergus, the chief of Antrim, more properly Rock-F●rgus (and in that sense called Carig-Fergus by the Irish) so called from Fergus one of the Kings of the Irish Scots who there suffered Shipwreck. Seated upon a large and capacious Bay (the Vinder●us of Ptolemy) which giveth it both a safe and commodious Port; as well by natural situation, as the works of Art very strongly fortified; by reason of the neighbourhood of the Scots in Cantire, from which little distant. 5 London-Derry, a Colony of the Londoners, best built of any Town in the North of Ireland. 6 Dungannon, the principal seat and residence in former times of the great Oneales'. 7 Dungall, the principal of Tir-Connell. 8 Robogh, a small Village at present, but anciently a Bishops See, fit to be mentioned in this place in regard it still preserveth some footsteps of the old R●bogdii, an Irish Tribe, and placed by Ptolemy in this tract, where they gave name unto the promontory by him called Robogd●um, now the Faire-Fore-land; as is probably conceived by the learned Camden.  
This, as it is the largest Province of all this Kingdom, so was it with most difficulty subjected to the Crown of England, and reduced to good order and civility. First conquered by john Cur●● a valiant 〈…〉, in the reign of King Henry the 2d. by whom created Earl of Ulster. But being maligned for his eminent virtues, and after proscribed by King john, this Title and Estate were both conferred upon Hugh Licie, the Lord and Conqueror of Meth, whom before we spoke of▪ By an Heir General of the Lacies, it came unto the burgh's then Lords of Connaught; and by the marriage of El●zabeth Daughter and Heir of Richard de Burgh, the last Earl of that family, it came to Leonel Duke of Clarence, the second Son (then living) of King Edward the 3d: as by his Daughter Philip to the Earls of March, from them by the like marriage to the house of York, and in the person of King Edward the 4th. to the Crown again. But being neglected by the English, in the whole cour●e of their Government, especially in the Wars betwixt York and Lancaster, it was cantonned into many estates and Principalities by the great Lords of the natural Irish, (who had born too great sway here in the former times) and so estranged from the civilities of England, and their Allegiance to that Crown, as if it had never been in subjection to it. 
〈◊〉.  In which estate it did continue (the Kings of England having here no more power or profit, than the great ones of the Country were pleased to give them) till the Rebellion 〈◊〉, and afterwards the Vanquishment of Hugh Oneal, the then Earl of 〈◊〉- Oenone, brought it in full subjection to the English-Government, of which more hereafter.  
4 CONNAUGHT, in Latin called Connacia, by the Irish, Connaght, is bounded on the North, with Ulster; on the West, with the Main Ocean; on the South, with Monster, from which parted by the River Shanon; and on the East, with Meth and some part of L●inster. So called from the Nagnatae, an old Irish Nation, or from Nagnata a Port-Town, both placed by Ptolemy in this tract. The Soil of the same t●mper with that of 〈◊〉, as woody and as full of bogs till these later times, in which indifferently well cleared of both inconveniences.  
It hath been also called by our English Writers, the County of Clare, from Thomas de Clare, one of the younger Sons of Gilbert de Clare Earl of Gloucester, on whom it was conferred by King Edward the first: and is divided at the present into these five Shires, that is to say, 1 Letri●, 2 ●oscommon, 3 Maio, 4 Slego, and 5 Galloway and Twomond. In which are comprehended but six Towns of any consequence for commerce and traffic, (an Argument of the imperfect plantation of it by the English Conquerors) and about 24 Castles, for defence of the Country, of old erection, besides such Fortresses as have been raised occasionally in these later troubles.  
Places of most note and observation, 1 Toam, an Archbishops See. 2 Athenry, an ancient Town, but decayed and ruinous; of most renown for being the Barony of John de Bermingham, a noble Englishman, who had great possessions in this tract. 3 Letrim, the chief Town of the County so named, neighboured by the Curlew-Mountains, unfortunately memorable for the great defeat there given the English, in Tir-Oens rebellion; and by the Spring or Fountain of the River henin or Shanon, whose course we have before described. 4 Slego, and 5 Roscommon, the chief Towns of their several Counties. 6 Athlone, a Piece of great strength, and the Key of 〈◊〉. 7 Twomond, not otherwise much observable, but for giving the title of an ●arl to the noble Family of O-Brian, (descended from the Kings of Connaught) advanced unto that honour by King Henry the 8th. 8 Galloway, the principal of this Province, a Bishops See, and the 〈◊〉 City of the Kingdom for beauty and bigness. Situate near the fall of the great Lake or River 〈◊〉 orbs, in the Western Ocean; A noted Emporie, and lately of so great fame with foreign Merchants, that an outlandish Merchant meeting with an Irishman, demanded in what part of Galloway, Ireland stood; as if Galloway had been the name of the Island, and Ireland only the name of some Town.  
This once a Kingdom of itself, as the rest of those Provinces; the last King whereof was Rodorick, surnamed the Great, who having a great hand over the rest of the Roytelets, entitled himself sole Monarch or King of Ireland. But being forced to submit himself to king Henry the 2d, his Country at the last was brought into subjection to the Crown of England, by the valour and good fortune of W●lliam de Burgh, Gilbert de Clare, Earl of Gloucester, Willi●m de Bermingham, and other noble Adventurers of the English Nation. And though all of them did p●rtake of the fruit of their labours; yet the greatest part of the spoil, together with the title of Lords of Co●naught, fell to the Family of the burgh's; from them to Lionel D. of Clarence, and by degrees unto the Crown, as before was shown. Cantonned again amongst the Irish and degenerate English, as Ulster was, by the supine neglect of the Kings of England: till the Rebellion of Ti●-O●n, involving all the Chiefs of the Irish Nation in the same cause with him, involved them also consequently in the same destruction.  
5 MONSTER, by the Latines called Momonia, is bounded on the North▪ with Connaught; on the East, with Leinster; on the West, with the Atlantic or Western Ocean; and on the South, with the Vergivian. By the natural Irish it is called Mown, whence the English had the name of Monster. A Province, which for rich Towns, commodious Havens, fair Rivers, and the fertility of the Soil, yields not to any in the Kingdom.  
It is divided into six Counties, viz. 1 Limerick, 2 Waterford, 3 Cork, 4 Desmond, 5 K●rry, and 6 tipperary; which two last anciently enjoyed all the rights of a County Palatine: And in these Shires are comprehended (besides many safe Stations and Rhodes for Shipping) 24 owns of note and trading, and 66 Castles of old erection.  
Places of most observation, 1 Cassiles, in the County of Limerick, an Archbishops See advanced unto that honour by Pope Eugenius the third, about the year 1150. 2 〈◊〉, the principal of that County, and the fourth in estimation of all the Kingdom: Situate in an Island compassed round about with the River Shanon, by which means well fortified: a well-frequented Emporie, and a Bishops See; Distant from the main Ocean about 60 miles, but ●o accomo●●ed by the River, that ships of burden come up close to the very walls. The Castle and the Bridge, pieces of great both strength and beauty, were of the foundation o● King ●ohn exceedingly delighted with the situation. 3 Clonmel, in the County of tipperary, of great strength and consequence. 4 Holy Cross, in the same County also, once flourishing, by reason of the great resort of Pilgrims to see & worship there a piece of the holy Cross as it was supposed: which supposition as it drew much wealth unto the Town, so it obtained the rights of a County Pala●●e for the County also. 5 Thurles, in the same County, which gives the title of a Viscount to the Earls of ●rmona, but not else observable. 6 Waterford, on the River Shower, a well-traded Port, a Bishops See, and the second City of the Kingdom: Of great fidelity to the English since the conquest of Ireland, and for that cause endowed with many ample privileges. 
Ireland.  First built by some Norwegian Pirates, who though they fixed it in one of the most barren parts and most foggy air of all the Country, yet they made choice of such a safe and commodious site for the use of shipping, that of a nest of Pirates it was eftsoons made a Receipt for Merchants, and suddenly grew up to great wealth and power. 6 Cork, (by the Latines called Corcagia) the principal of that County, and a Bishops See: well walled, and fitted with a very commodious Haven; consisting chiefly of one Street reaching out in length; inhabited by a civil, wealthy, and industrious people. 7 Dunk-Eran, an old Episcopal See, supposed by some to be the Ivernis of Ptolemy, but not else observable. 8 Kinsale, upon the mouth of the River Rany, a commodious Port, opposite to the Coasts of Spain, and fortified in Tir-Oens Rebellion by a Spanish Garrison, under the command of Don john de Aquilar ', but soon recovered (after the defeat of that Grand Rebel near the Walls hereof) by the valour and indefatigable industry of Charles Lord Mountjoy, the then Lord Deputy of this Kingdom. 9 Baltimore, 10 Youghall, and 11 Bere-havi●●, all upon the Sea, and all provided of safe Roads or convenient Havens. 12 L●smore, of old a Bishops See, now annexed to Waterford, in which shire it standeth. Nothing in point of story singular which concerns this Province; but that it was so carefully looked to by the Kings of England, that there was appointed over it a peculiar Officer (in the reign of Queen Elizabeth, in power and place next to the Deputy himself) called the Lord Precedent of Monster: by whose vigilancy there have happened fewer Rebellions here than in any Province of this Island.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this Island, being originally Britan's (as before is said) were in the time of Ptolomic distinguished into the Nations of the Rhobognii, Darmi, Volnntii, Ven●cni●, and Erdini, possessing the Northern parts, now Ulster: the Anteri, Gangani, and Nagnatae, inhabiting Connaught: the Velibori, Vterni, Vodii, and Coriondi, in the South, now Monster; and the Menapii, Cauci, Blanii, brigants, taking up the Provinces of Meth and Leinster. Principal Cities of the which, were, Eblana, now Dublin; Menapia, now Waterford; Nagnata, which Ptolemy honoureth with the title of Vrbs insignis; Rhigia, Rheba, Macolicum, Laberus, Ivernis, etc. not easily discernible by what names we may call them now: this Country never being so happy as to come under the power of the Romans, the great Masters of Civility and good Letters in the West of Europe; and by that means the Actions and affairs thereof buried in ignorance and silence. Towards the falling of which Empire we find the Nation of the Scots to be seated here, and from hence first to take possession of the Hebrides or Western Isles, next of the Western part of Britain on the the NOrth of Solway. Afterwards some of the Saxon Monarches cast their eyes upon it and made themselves masters of Dublin, and some other places; but being encumbered with the Danes could not hold them long; being hardly able to defend their own against that people. The next that undertook the conquest were the Northern Nations, Danes, Swedes, and Normans, all passing in the Chronicles of that time under the name of Norwegians: who first only scoured along the Coasts in the way of piracy. But after finding the weakness of the Island, divided amongst many petit and inconsiderable Princes, they made an absolute conquest of it under the conduct of Turgesius, whom they elected for their King: soon rooted out by the Policy of the King of Meth, the only Irish Prince who was in favour with the Tyrant. This petit King, by name Omo-Caghlen, had a Daughter of renowned beauty, whom Turgesius demanded of her Father to serve his lusts: and he seeming willing to condescend to the motion, as if honoured by it, made answer, That besides his Daughter, he had at his disposing many others of more exquisite beauties, which should all be ready at command. Turgesius' swallowing this bait, desired him with all speed to effect this meeting. But the King of Meth attiring in the habits of Women, a company of young Gentlemen, who durst for the common liberty adventure their several lives, conducted them to the Tyrant's Bedchamber. And they according to the directions given them, (when for that little modesty sake he had in him, he had commanded all his attendants to avoid the room) assaulted him, now ready for, and expecting more kind embraces, and left him dead in the place. The Methian King had by this time acquainted divers of the better sort with his plot; all which upon a sign given, rush into the Palace, and put to death all the Norwegians, and other attendants of the Tyrant. After this, the Roytelets enjoyed their former Dominions till the year 1172, in which Dermot Mac Morogh King of Leinster, having forced the Wife of Maurice O Rork King of Meth, and being by him driven out of his Kingdom, came to the Court of England for succour. To this Petition, Henry the second than King, condescended; sending him aid under the leading of Richard de Clare, surnamed S●rongbow, Earl of Pembroke; who restored King Dermot, and brought a great part of the Island under the English subjection. John, King of England, was the first who was entitled Lord of Ireland; which stile was granted him by Pope Urban the 3d; who for the ornament of his royalty, sent him a plume of Pcacock Feathers: and when Tir-Oen styled himself Defender of the Irish Liberty, he was by Clement the 8 honoured with a like plume. But here we are to understand, that though the Kings of England used no other title than Lords of Ireland; yet were they Kings thereof in effect and power, Lords Paramount, as we use to say. And though themselves retained only the name of Lords, yet one of them gave to one of his English Subjects, the honourable, but invidious title of Duke of Ireland. And they retained this title of Lords, till the year 1542; in which Henry the 8th, in an Irish Parliament, was declared K. of Ireland, as a name more sacred, and replete with Majesty, than that of Lord: at which time also he was declared to be the Supreme Head under God, of the Church of Ireland; and the pretended jurisdiction of all foreign Powers, especially the usurped Authority of the Pope of 〈◊〉 renownced by Law, though still acknowledged by too many of this it perstitious and untractable People.  
The Government of this Country, since the first Conquest by the English, hath been most commonly by one Supreme Officer, who is sometimes called the 〈…〉, most generally the Lord Deputy of Ireland; than whom no Viceroy in all 〈◊〉 hath greater power, or 〈◊〉 nearer the Majesty of a King in his Train and State. For his assistance ●e hath a Privy Council attending on him, though resident for the most part at Du●lin: and in emergencies, or cases of more difficult nature proceedeth many times in an arbitrary way, without formalities of Law. And for their Laws, which are the standing Rule of all civil Government, they owe their being and original to the English Parliaments. For in the reign of ●ing Henry the 7th. Sir ●●award P●yn●ngs then, Lord Deputy caused an Act to pass in the Irish Parliament, whereby all laws 〈◊〉 Statutes, which were made in England before that time, were to be entertained and 〈◊〉 in force as the Laws of Ireland. On which foundation they have raised many Superstructures both of Law and Government, enacted in their own Parliaments, summoned by the Lord Deputy at the King's appointment: in which, by an other Statute made in the time of the said Poynings, the people are enabled to make Laws for their own good Governance, conditioned they were first transmitted to the Court of England to be considered o● by the King, before they were Voted to in either of the houses of the Irish Parliaments. Which Laws commonly called P●ynings Laws, have hitherto continued in force amongst them; though the last much stomached and repined at; not only as a badge of their Subjection to the Crown of England, but as a Curb or Martingall to hold them in.  
Yet notwithstabding these good Laws, and the ample power of their Commission, the Lord Deputies could never absolutely subdue the Island, or bring the People to any civil course of life, the Father's inflicting a heavy curse on all their posterity, if ever they should sow Corn, build houses, or Learn the English tongue. To this indisposition of the Irish themselves, let us add the defects of the Kings of England, and Irish Deputies, in matters of civil policy, as I find them particularised by Sir John Davies, in his worthy and pithy discourse of this Subject. I will only glean a few of them. First then saith he, a barbarous Country is like a field overgrown with wees, which must first be well broken with the Plough, and then immediately Sown with good and profitable seed: so must a wild and uncivil people, be first broken and Ploughed up by War, and then presently Sown with the seed of good Laws and discipline; lest the weeds revive in the one, and ill manners in the other. Here then was the first defect in our English Kings, not to tame and take down the Stomaches and pride of this people, though either civil or foreign wars perhaps occasioned this neglect: and also the Irish Deputies, who at such times as the people upon a small discomfiture, were crest-faln, neglected the so keeping of them by severity of discipline. The second oversight concerneth particularly our Kings, who gave such large possessions and regalities unto the first conquerors, that the people knew no Authority in a manner, above their own immediate Lords. Thirdly, the Laws of England were not indifferently communicated to all the Irishrie, but to some particular Families and Provinces only: insomuch as there were but five great Lords of the Natural Irish, who had the benefit and protection of the Laws of England, that is to say O Neale in Ulster, O Connob●r in Connaught, Mac Morrough in Lemster, O Malaghlia in Meth, O Brian in Twom●nd; known by the name of Qu●nque Sanguines in some old Records. By means whereof the rest of the people being in the condition of Outlaws, or at the best of Aliens, had no encouragement either to build, or plant, or manure their Land, or to behave themselves as Subjects. A fourth defect was more particularly in the Deputies or Lords Lieutenant's, who having made good and wholesome Laws against the barbarous customs of the Common people, and the merciless oppressions of the Lords, never put any of them in execution; as if they had been made for terror▪ not for reformation. Fiftly, Add unto these (which Sir John D●vies hath omitted) the little care which was too often taken by the Kings of England in the choice of their Deputies: sometimes conferring that high Office as a Court-preferment, without Relation unto the merits of the person; and sometimes sending men of weak or broken fortunes, who attended more their own profit than their Master's service, and were more bend to fleece than to feed this Flock. Sixthly. And yet besides there Errors of the Kings and Deputies in point of Government, there was another, and as great in the 〈◊〉 themselves: who building all their Forts and Castles in the open Countries, abandoned the Woods and Bogs, and other Fastnesses to the natural Irish; the strength whereof not only animated them to Rebel upon all occasions; but served too fitly to continue them in their ancient 〈◊〉.  
In these terms of wildness and non-subjection stood Ireland, till the latter end of Queen Elizabeth's reign; at what time the Rebellion of Hugh O Neal Earl of Virro Oenone had engaged almost all the Irishrie in that desperate Action: which ending in the overthrow of that ingrateful Rebel, and all his partisans, not only crushed the overmuch powerablenesse of the Irish Nobility; but made the final and full conquest of the whole Nation. So true it is, that Every Pebellion when it is suppressed, doth make the Prince stronger, and the Subjects weaker. Ireland thus broken and ploughed up, that glorious Queen died a victor over all her enemies▪ and left the Sowing of it unto her successor King james, who omitted no part of a skilful Seedsman. 1 Then there was an 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Act of Oblivion made, whereby all the offences against the Crown were remitted, if by such a limited day the people would sue out their Pardons, and by the same Act, all the Irishrie were manumitted from the servitude of their Lords, and received into the King's immediate protection. 2ly, The whole kingdom was divided into Shires, and Judges it inerant appointed to circuit them: whereby it hath followed, that the exactions of the Lords are said aside, the behaviour of the people is narrowly looked into, the passages before unknown unto our Soldiers, are laid open by our Vnder-Sheriffes and Bailiffs; and the common people seeing the benefit and security they enjoy by the English Laws, and loath to plead always by an Interpreter, begin to set their children to School, for the learning of the English tongue. 3ly, The Irish were not rooted out, as in the first plantation in Lemster, and the English only estated in their rooms; but were only removed from the woods, bogs, and mountains, into the plain and open country; that being like wild trees transplanted, they might grow the milder, and bear the better fruit. And 4ly, whereas there was before but one Freeholder in a whole Country, which was the Lord himself, the rest holding in villainage, and being subject to the Lords immeasurable taxations; whereby they had no encouragement to build or plant: Now the Lords estate was divided into two parts, that which he held in demain to himself, which was still left unto him; and that which was in the hands of his Tenant, who had estates made in their possessions, according to the Common-Law of England paying in stead of uncertain Irish taxations, certain English rents: whereby the people have since set their minds upon repairing their houses, and manuring their lands, to the great increase of the private and public revenue.  
But that which most advanced the reduction of Ireland to a settled and civil Government, and rooted it in a subjection to the Crown of England, was the voluntary flight of the Earls of Tyrone, & Tirconnel, Sir john Odaughertic, and other great men of the North, possessed of large territories and great jurisdictions. Who being both uncapable of Loyalty, and impatient of seeing the King's judges, justices, and other Ministers of State, to hold their Sessions, and execute their Commissions of Oyer and Terminer, within the parts where they commanded: without more provocation, or the fear of any danger but a guilty Conscience, forsook the Country, and left their whole Estates to the King's disposing. By whose directions, their Lands were seized upon and sold to several Purchasers, the City of London enfeoffed in a great part of them, a great plantation made in Ulster of English, Welsh, and Scots, by the united name of a British Plantation; and a new Order of Knights Baronet's erected in the Kingdom of England for raising money to advance and endear the Work. Which had it been as cordially affected by the English, as it was by the Scots; if more of this Nation had gone thither, and not abandoned so great a part of it to the power of the other, it had been better for both Kingdoms, in the conformity of each to one form of Government (which the Scots, being factious for another did not easily brook) and the uniting of both people in the bonds of Amity: the Irish looking on the Scot as a mere Intruder, but on the English as his old Master, or his Follow-Subject. Howsoever, so great a part of the Country (and that which heretofore was the nest of the Rebels) being thus disposed of, it came to pass, that Ireland, which before served only as a grave to bury our best men, and a gulf to swallow our greatest treasures; being governed neither as a country Free, nor conquered: was brought in some hope, by the prudence and policy of her last Kings, and late Lord Deputies, to prove an Orderly Commonwealth; civil in itself, profitable to the Prince, and a good strength to the British Empire. For to such Order it was redaced, in a little time, that the wayfaring men might travel without danger, the ploughman walk without fear, the laws administered in every place alike, the men drawn unto villages, the woods and fastnesses left to beasts; and all reduced to that civility, as our fathers never saw, nor could we well sample out of ancient histories.  
The revenues of this kingdom are said by Walsingham, in the time of Edward the third, to have been yearly 40000 pounds; but his successors, till of late, have scarce got so much as the keeping of it cost them: King Richard the 2d being by the same Walsingham reported to have spent 30000 marks out of his own purse, over and above the money which he received thence. Whether this Country were so profitable to Edward the third, or no, I determine not, though I find good reasons to persuade me, that Walsingham was not well acquainted with the state of that exchequer. ●ut sure I am that the Revenues of the Crown are more than double what they were in the said King's reign, and more duly paid into the Exchequer of that Kingdom than ever formerly; the profits of the Customehouse amounting to 30000 per Annum, in the last year of King james his reign. Not to say any thing of the great Improvements which were made by the Earl of Strafford, in the time of his Government, because they fell together with him.  
The strength of this Kingdom consisteth partly in the situation of it, begirt about with difficult and dangerous Seas; partly in the many Castles first built and fortified by the English Planters; and partly in a standing Army continually kept up by the Kings of England for defence of their hold and interess against the Rebellions of the Natives. What Forces it is able to raise both of Horse and Foot, could never be conjectured at till now of late. For formerly the Kings of England being actually possessed only of those four Counties which they called the Pale, that is to say, the Counties of Dublin, Louth, Kildare, and Meth (which last hath since the time of King Henry the 8th been subdived into three:) were not able to raise any great power out of that Estate, but were forced to send Soldiers out of England (as occasion was) to preserve their Sovereignty in Ireland. 
〈◊〉, & S●h●tland.  The greatest Levy which I read of, was that of 1500 Irish, led by the Prior of Kilmamham to King Henry the fifth, then being at the siege of Harflew in Normandy. And on the other side, the great Lords of the natural Irish, and degenerate English, being divided into factions amongst themselves, and never joined in any one principle of common interesses, were more inconsiderable than the weak but united forces of the Kings of England. And though most of them at the last were drawn into a confederacy with the Earl of Tir-Oen, to make good his rebellion: yet find I not that their Army did exceed at any time the number of 8000 men; and those not well-appointed neither. So that the best estimate which can be made of the forces of Ireland, must be measured by the Armies raised in the late Rebellion: when the Irishrie had both time and leisure to get themselves some reputation in the world, and make provision for a War. In prosecution of which, he who considers the many Armies they have raised since their first mustering under the command of Sir Phelim O Neal, the many defeats which have been given them, and those as many new recruits after each defeat, all of them raised out of the bodies of their own People, without supply from other Countries; (besides such as have served against them for the King,) must needs conclude that they want not men enough for service; nor skill nor courage to attempt the most difficult enterprises.  
The Arms of Ireland are Azure, an Harp Or, stringed Argent. Which Coat, King James, (to show himself the first absolute King of Ireland) first caused to be marshaled with the Royal Arms of Great Britain.  
Reckoned in Ireland at, and since the Reformation,  
Arch-Bishops 4. Bishops 19  
One University, Viz. Dublin.   

THE LESSER LANDS.  
ANd now we come at last to the LESSER LANDS, dispersed in several parts of the British Ocean. The chief whereof are, 1 The Orcadeses, 2 Schetland, 3 The Hebrides, 4 Man, 5 Auglesey, 6 The Lands of the Severn Sea, 7 The Sorlinges or Isles of Silly, 8 Wight, 9 Thanet, 10 Sunderland, 11 Holy Island.  
I. The ORCADESES or Isles of Orkney are in number 32, situate over against Cathness, the most Northern Country of all Scotland, and separate from one another by some narrow straits. The Soil indifferently fruitful, exceedingly well stored with Barley, and great Herds of cattle; plentiful in Hares and Coneys, as of Cranes and Swans; but destitute of wheat, and unfurnished both of woods and trees. But their chief commodity is their Fish, which the inhabitants catch upon the coasts in great abundance. Those of most note in all the cluster, are, 1 He●h, conceived to be the Ocetis of Ptolemy: as 2 Fair Isle, on good reason thought to be the Dumna of Pliny; the chief Town of it being still called by the name of Dumo. 3 hay, taken or mistaken for the Dumna of Plivie, but not else observable. 4 Pomonia, the chief of all, in length about 26 miles, in breadth, where it is broadest, six. The chief Town of it, Ki●kwall, honoured with a Bishops See, and strengthened with two Castles. This Island is well stored with Tin and Lead, and is at this day by the inhabitants called Mainland.  
The people of these Isles (according to Maginus) are great drinkers, but no drunkards; bibacissimi sunt incolae, nunquam tamen inebriantur: they use the Gothish Language, which they derive from the Norwegians, in whose possession they once were; and of whose qualities they still retain some smack. The Isles themselves in the time of Solinus were not inhabited, being then overgrown with rushes; (now in a measure, populous and fertile, as before was said) and were first discovered by Julius Agricola, the first that ever sailed about Britain. In later times they were possessed by the Normans or Norwegians, who held them till the year 1266; when Magnus K. of Norwey surrendered them up to Alexander King of Scotland, which surrendry some of the succeeding Kings did afterwards ratify: the claim hereto being finally relinquished by Christiern the first King of Danemark and Norwey, on the marriage of his Daughter Margaret with King James the third, An. 1474. some money being added to make good the contract, without which the Danes would not forgo their pretensions to them.  
II. Two days sailing North of these Orcadeses, lieth SCHETLAND, an Island belonging to the Crown of Scotland: 
Hebrides, & Man.  and is by many learned men, upon very good reasons, supposed to be the Thule of the Ancients. For first, it standeth in the 63 degree of latitude, in which Ptolemy placed Th●l●. 2ly, It lieth opposite to Bergen in Norwey; against which Pomporius Mela hath seated it: & 3ly, C●sper Peucerus hath observed, that this Schetland is by Mariners called Thylensell; a name in which that of Thule is apparently couched. That Ise-land was not Thule (as most say) we shall show you when we come to Norwey, & the Northern Lands. Here we add only, that the Ancients did report many strange things of it, and some of them beyond all belief. Pli●ie affirming that they had no day here for all the winter (nulli per brumam dies, as his own words are) with whom agree Solinus and many others, as to that particular. Isidore adds (Origin. lib. 14. c. 6.) nullum ultra eam diem●sse, that beyond this Isle there was no day in any place; as if here had been the end of the world and nature. But Pytheas in Polybius goes beyond them all, reporting that in this Isle there was no distinction of Earth, Air, and Water: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, but a confused mixture of all together, like the primitive Chaos of the Poets. The reason of which strange reports was the audaciousness of those who had seen the Island and thought that whatsoever they said of it would not be disproved, because of the remoteness of it from more civil Countries. So truly and judiciously spoken was that of Synesius, a right learned Prelate, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Thule (saith he) gave those who had sailed unto it, the opportunity of lying without control. An opportunity which many of our Mariners and vulgar Travellers have made too much use of in these last times also.  
III. The HEBRIDES, HEBUDAE, or Western Lands, situate on the West of Scotland, are in number about 44. The chief whereof, 1 Ila, 24 miles long, and 16 in breadth, plentiful in Wheat, Cattle, and herds of Deer. 2 jona, famous for the Sepulchers of the old Scotish Kings; whose chief Town is Sodore, once a Bishops See, called hence Sodorenfis; his jurisdiction comprehending these Lands with the Isle of Man; his See erected by Pope Gr●gory the 4th, Anno 840, or thereabouts. His dwelling for the most part in the Isle of Man, as the wealthier and more pleasant part of his Diocese; till the conquest of it by the English: at what time those of the Western Lands, withdrew themselves from his obedience, and had a Bishop of their own: both of them for a long time called Sodorenses, but at last this took the name of Insulanus, Bishop of the Isles, which he still retains. 3 Mala, by Prolomie called Maleos (that of Ila beforementioned being his Epidia) mountainous and hilly, but affording good mines of Lead and Copper; 25 miles more in compass than that of Ila. 4 Leunes, or Levissa, the largest of all the Hebrides, said to be 60 miles in length, and 30 in breadth, the more Western of the two Ebudaes spoken of by Ptolemy: the other being now called 5 Sky, famous for multitude of Sea-Calves in the Creeks thereof. 6 Racline, the Recina of Ptolemy, the smallest of the Hebrides, and most near to Ireland. The rest of less note, not known, or not inhabited in the time of the Romans, and not very well peopled at the present, I forbear to name: some of them rather Rocks than Lands, others scarce having grass enough to hide their bareness. The people of them all as well in language as behaviour resemble the wild-Irish, and are called Redshanks: a people, as King james affirmeth in his Basilicon Doron, utterly rude, and without all show of Civility; such as endure not to be governed by Laws, or kept under by Discipline. Legum severitate, & judiciorum metu, se allegari non patiuntur, saith judicious Camden. Such as they are, they came unto the Crown of Scotland by a contract betwixt Magnus' King of Norwey, and King Alexander the third: the Orcadeses being bargained for at the same time also.  
South of the Hebrides, in the Bay of Dunbritton Frith, lieth the Isle of Rothsay (now called Buthe) which gives the title of a Duke to the Prince of Scotland; and the Isle of Arran, which gives the title of an Earl to the chief of the hamilton's.  
IV. MAN is situate just over against the Southern part of Cumberland, and from which it is distant 25 miles; and was judged to belong to Britain rather than to Ireland, because it fostered venomous Serpents brought hither out of Britain. By Ptolemy it is called Monoeda, or the further Mona, to difference it from that which we now call Anglesey; by Pliny, Monabia; Menavia, by Orosius and Beda; Eubonia, by Gildas an old British Writer. The Welsh at this day call it Menaw, the Inhabitants Maning, and the English, Man. It is in length 30 miles, in breadth 15, and 8 in some places. The people hate theft, and begging; and use a Language mixed of the Norwegian and Irish tongues. The soil is abundant in Flax, Hemp, Oats, Barley, and Wheat, with which they use to supply the defects of Scotland, if not the Continent itself, yet questionless the Western Isles, which are a Member of it. For thus writeth the Reverend Father in God, john Moricke late Bishop of this Island, in a letter to Mr. Camden, at such time as he was composing his most excellent Britannia. Our Island (saith he) for cattle, for fish, and for corn, hath not only sufficient for itself, but sendeth also good store into other Countries: now what Countries should need this supply (England and Ireland being aforehand with such provision) except Scotland, or some members thereof, I see not. Venerable Bede numbered in it 300 Families, and now it is furnished with 17 Parish Churches. The chief Towns are. 1 Bal●curi, and 2 Russin, or Castle-Town, the seat of a Bishop, who though he be under the Archbishop of York, yet never had any voice in the English Parliament. In this Island is the hill Sceafull, where on a clear day one may see England, Scotland, and Ireland, here also are bred the Soland Geese, of rotten wood falling into the water. This Island was taken from the Britan's by the Scots, and from them regained by Edwin King of Northumberland: Afterwards the Norwegians seized on it, and made it a Kingdom; the Kings hereof ruling over the Hebrides, and some part of Ireland. 
Man, & Anglesey.  From them taken by Alexander the 3d of Scotland, by a mixed title of Arms and purchase: after which time it was sometimes English, sometimes Scotish, as their fortunes varied, till in the end, and about the year 1340. William Montacute, Earl of Salisbury, descended from the Norwegian Kings of Man, won it from the Scots, and sold it to the Lord Scrope: who being condemned of Treason, Henry the fourth gave it to Henry Piercy Earl of Northumberland; but he also proving false to his Sovereign, it was given to the Stanleys', now Earls of Derby.  

The Kings of Man of the Danish or Norwegian Race.  
1065. 1 Godred, the Son of Syrric.  
1066. 2 Fingall, Son of Godred.  
1066. 3 Godred II. Son of Harald.  
1082. 4 Lagnan, Eldest Son of Godred the 2d.  
1089. 5 Donnald, Son of Tado.  
1098. 6 Magnus, King of Norwey.  
1102. 7 Olave, the 3d Son of Godred.  
1144. 8 Godred III. Son of Olave.  
1187. 9 Reginald, base Son of Godred the 3d.  
1226. 10 Olive, the lawful Son of Godred the 3d.  
1237. 11 Harald, Son of Olave.  
1243. 12 Reginald II. Brother of Harald.  
1252. 13 Magnus II. Brother of Reginald.  
1266. 14 Magnus III. King of Norway; the last King of Man of the Danish or Norwegian Race.   

The Kings and Lords of Man of the English Blood.  
1340. 1 William Montacute, Earl of Salisbury, King of Man.  
1395. 2 William Lord Scrope, King of Man.  
1399. 3 Henry, Earl of Northumberland, King of Man.  
1403. 4 William Lord Stanley, Lord of the Isle of Man.  
5 john Lord Stanley.  
6 Thomas Lord Stanley.  
7 Thomas Lord Stanley, Earl of Derby.  
1503. 8 Thomas Lord Stanley, Early of Derby.  
1521. 9 Edward Lord Stanley, Earl of Derby.  
1572. 10 Henry Lord Stanley, Earl of Derby.  
1593. 11 Ferdmando Lord Stanley, Earl of Derby.  
12 William Lord Stanley, Early of Derby.  
13 james Lord Stanley, Earl of Derby, Lord of the Isle of Man, now living Anno 1648. King in effect, though but Lord in title, as having here all kind of Civil power and jurisdiction over the Inhabitants, under the Feife and Sovereignty of the Crown of England; together with the nomination of the B●shop, whom he presents unto the King for his Royal assent, then to the Archbishop of York for his consecration, And this I take to be the reason why the Bishop of Man was no Lord of Parliament, none being admitted to that honour, but such as held immediately of the King himself; nor was it reason that they should.   
V. ANGLESEY, is an Island situate in the Irish Sea, over against Carnarvonshire in North-Wales, from which it is divided by a narrow straight, which they call the Menai. By the Britan's themselves, as by the Welsh at this day, it was called Mon, from whence the Romans had their Mona: but being Conquered by the English it obtained the name of Anglesey, as one would say, the Island of the English Men, (eye in the Saxon language signifying an Island) A place of such a fair Revenue to the Princes of it, that LLewellen the last Prince of Wales being stripped of almost all the rest of his Estates by King Edward the first, paid to that King a tribute of 1000 per An. for this Island only.  
And to say truth, the Island is exceeding fruitful both in Corn and Cattle; from whence the Welsh are liberally stored with both: and therefore it is said proverbially Mon Mam Cymri, that Angl●sey is the Mother of Wales. In length from East to West about 20 miles, and 17 in breadth. Containing in that Compass 74 Parishes, divided into six hundreds, and hath in it only two Market Towns: that is to say, 1 Beanmaris, seated on a flat or marish ground, near the Menai, built by King Edward the first to secure his Conquest: by whom well walled and fortified as the times than were. 2 Newburg, a Town of no great antiquity, as the name doth intimate, by the Welsh called Rossur: in former times it had an Haven of some good receipt, but now choked with sand. 
Isles:  The other places of most note are 3 Aberfraw, a small village now, but heretofore the Royal seat of the Kings of Wales: and 4ly. Holy-head, seated on an head-land or Promontory thrusting into the Sea, made holy (or thought so at least) by the religious retirement of Saint Kuby, or Kibius, one of the Disciples of St. Hilary of Poitiers; from whence by the Welshmen called Caer-Cuby: of most note for the ordinary passage betwixt Wules and Ireland. Anciently this Island was the seat of the Druids, and brought with no small difficulty under the power of the Romans by Suctonius Paulinus: the People fight in other parts of Britain for their liberty only; but here pro Arts & focis too, for their Religion, Liberty, and their Gods to boot. Being deserted by the Romans with the rest of Britain, it remained in the possession of its own natural Princes, till the fatal period of that State; when added to the Crown of England by the puissance of King Edward the first, by whom made one of the shires of Wales, as it still continues.  
Not far from Anglesey, some what inclining to the South, is the Isle of Bardsey, by Ptolemy called Edri, by Pliny Adros, by the Welsh Eulby, extending towards the East with a rocky Promontory, but rich and fruitful towards the West: the retiring place of many godly and devout Hermits in the former times. Southwards from hence, and over against St. David's, are two other Lands, the one called Selame, plentiful of wild honey; the other named by the Welsh Lymen; by the English, Ramsey; thought to be the Limni of Ptolemy, the Silimnum of Pliny, but not else remarkable.  
VI THE LANDS OF THE SEVERN SEA are four in number; of no great note, but I must take them in my passage to the Isles of Silly. Of those the first is Flat-Holm: from the flat and level: the 2d Stepholm, from the steep and craggy disposition of it: both by the Welsh called Echni, and both situate over against the County of Somerset. More towards the opening of the Channel, lieth the Isle of 3 Chaldey, called by the Welshmen Iniss P●r, of as small note as the other: and at the very mouth thereof the Isle of 4 Lundey, over against Devonshire, the principal Island of this Sea: extending two miles every way; of excellent pasturage, well stored with Coneys, and great plenty of pigeons. Situate a good distance from any part of the land, in the midst of the Salt and Brackish Ocean, and yet yieldeth many Springs of Freshwater for the use of the people, inhabiting for the most part in a Town of the same name with the Island. A place of very great strength and safety; begird about with dangerous unapproachable Rocks; and having but one way of access into it, and that so narrow that two men cannot go a breast.  
VII The Isles of SILLY, in number 145, are situate over against the most Western Promontory of Cornwall, from which distant 24 miles; and lie round together in the manner of a ring or Circle. Discovered first by the Silureses, a Phoenician Colony in Spain, opposite against which they lie; thence called Silures by Solinus; much traded and resorted to by the said Phoenicians from the Isle of Gades; invited thereunto by the unexhaustible Mines of Tin which they found amongst them. A Trade so great and gainful to them, that they held it a great point of State, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, to keep it as a secret from all the World, as we find in Strabo, who adds the story of a Carthaginian or Phoenician Merchant, encountered in his voyage hither by some Roman Vessels; and splitting his ship on the next shore (where he knew the Romans would not follow him) rather than let them know to what place he was bound; Rewarded for his honest care, and recompensed for the loss of his ship and goods, out of the public Treasury. From this abundance of Tin, the Grecians when they came to know them called them, Cassit●ride●. (Cassiteres in that language signifying Tin) accordingly Herodotus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, affirming that he knew not those Lands called Cassiterides, from whence Tin was brought. The richness of this Commodity, the pleasures of the place, and the Western Situation of them, make many of the Grecians call them the Hesperides; mistaking them for the Fortunate Lands. By Solinus they are called Silures▪ as before is said, Sigdeles in the corrupt Copies of Antoninus; insulae Sillinae, by Severus Sulpitius, from whence we have the name of the Isles of Silly. The Flemings, I know not why, call them the Sorlings. All of them very fruitful in Corn and Herbage▪ besides the treasures hid within: well stored with Coneys, Cranes, Swans, and most sorts of Wild Fowl. Ten of them more esteemed than the rest are called by the names of 1 A●math, 2 Agnes, 3 Samson, 4 Silly, 5 Bresar, 6 Rusco, 7 S. Helen's, 8 Arthur, 9 S. Maurice, and 10 St. mary's: Of which the most famous in the account of former times was that of Silly, as giving name unto the rest; but in the present estimate St. mary's is accounted the chief of all: 8 miles in compass, fruitful of all necessaries, and fortified with a very strong Castle built by Queen Elizabeth, well manned and Garrisoned for defence of a large and goodly Harbour made amongst these Lands, capable of the greatest Navies.  
These Lands first discovered by Himilco a Carthaginian, sent by that State to search into the West Coasts of Europe, became of great same afterwards both in Greece and Italy; by reason of the Mines of Tin spoken of before. So beneficial to the Romans, that they used to send hither their condemned Prisoners to work in the Mines; as the best service to be done by their forfeited lives. And hither, amongst others, justantius, a fierce Priscillianist, for his factious and seditious carriage, 
Wight, & Thanet.  was ●ent by Max●mus; ad Sulliman 〈◊〉 ultra Britanniam deportatus, as Sulpitius hath it. After the Romans had forsaken their hold in Britain they returned again into the power and possession of the Natives; from whom subdued, and added unto the English Crown by Athe●stan the eighth King of England; now ordered for Civil matters as a part of Cornwall; for military▪ by their own Captain, subordinate to the Lord Lieutenant of that County; and for the T●●-trade, by the Lord Warden and Court of Stanneries. An Officer and Court erected for the benefit and regulating of the Tinners of Cornwall, who by reason of their employment in there Mines have many privileges and exemptions more than other Subjects, but of late limited and restrained by Act of Parliament.  
VII. The Isle of WIGHT lieth over against Hampshire, from which it seemeth to have been divided; the passage betwixt it and Hu●st-Castle on the opposite shore being very narrow; and the name of it intimating some such division. For by the B●itans it was anciently called Guith, which signifieth a breach or separation, from whence the English have their Wight, the turning of Gu. to W. being familiar with the Saxons, and all other Dutch people: and from the same Root probably the Romans had the name of Vectis; Vecht, Wight, and Guith, being words of such near resemblance▪ that we need not travel further for an Etymology. The Island of an Oval form, 20 miles in length, and 12 miles broad about the midst, from thence growing narrower towards each end, to the North and South. Naturally fenced about on all sides, on the South especially, where it looks towards France, on which side inaccessible by reason of the steep and craggy Rocks, the whole length thereof; and not much less safe on the Northwest, where the remainder of the Rocks (which they call the Shingles, and the Needles) not worn away either at or since the first separation from the other shore, make the passage dangerous, except to single ships, and those not unacquainted with the course of the Channel. Towards the North-East more flat and level, and therefore fortified with the two Castles of the Cows and Sandham. There is also the Castle of Yarmouth in the West parts of the Island, and that of Garesbrook in the midst (but more towards the North) in which last there is said to be Armour for 5000 men; and in each Village (of which here are 33, besides many Market Towns) a piece of Ordnance. Yet do not all these Arms and Castles add so much to the strength of it, as the natural courage of the People, warlike and stout, and trained unto the postures of War from their very Childhood.  
The Soil hereof abundantly answereth the pains of the Husbandman, so plentiful of Corn, and all the fruits of a good pasturage, that they have not only enough for themselves, but furnish the markets of Southampton and Portsmouth, (but the last especially) with the greatest part of the Wheat, Flesh, Cheese, and Butter which is spent amongst them. Insomuch as the Soldiers of Portsmouth presuming on the strength of the Town have been used to say, That if they had the Isle of WIGHT to their friend, and the Seat open, they cared not for all the World besides. Their Sheep here of so fine a fleece, that the Wool hereof hath the second place of esteem next to that of Lemster (in the County of Hereford) and precedency of that of Cotswald.  
Their chief Towns, 1 Yarmouth, on the Northwest of the Island, seated on a convenient Haven, which is said to have some resemblance to that of Rochel, and that Haven defended with a Castle. 2 Brading, another Market-Town. 3 Newton, an ancient Burrough, and privileged with sending Burgesses to the English Parliament. 4 Gaersbrook, a large Town, and neighboured with an Ancient Castle. 5 Newport, now the chief of all the Isle, called in times past Medena, afterwards Novus Burgus de Medena, at last Newport; Seated upon an Arm of the Sea, capable of Ships of lesser burden to the very key; and by that means populous, well traded, and inhabited by a civil and wealthy People.  
The Island first subdued to the Romans by the valour of Vespasian, (afterwards Emperor of Rome) in the time of Claudius. Extorted from the Britan's by Cerdick, King of the Westsaxons, and by him given to Stuffa and Whitgar, two of that Nation, who had almost rooted out the old Inhabitants. It was the last Country of the Saxons which received the Gospel, and then upon compulsion too; forced to it by the power as well as the persuasion of Cedwalla, the West-Saxon King. Took from the English in the time of the Norman Conqueror, by William Fitz-Osborn Earl of Hereford, who thereupon was made the first Lord thereof. From whose Family, by the gift of Henry the second, it passed to that of Redvars, or Rivers, (de Ripariis) than Earls of Devonshire: and on the failing of that House returned to the Crown in the reign of Edward the first. Never so much ennobled as by Henry the sixth, who bearing a great affection to Henry Beauchamp Earl of Warwick, in the 23 of his reign crowned him King of Wight, Anno 1445. Which title ended with his life about two years after.  
IX. THANET, is a little Island in the North-East of Kent, not far from Sandwich, environed on three parts with the Sea; into which it shooteth with a large Promontory called the North-Fore-land; the Cantium of the ancient Writers: & towards the West severed from the Main-land of Kent by the River Stoure, 
Sunderland & Holy●land  which is here called Ye●●●de. Called by Solinus, Athanatos, in some Copies Thanatos, from whence the Saxons had their Thanet. Famous, as in other things, so in these particulars, that it was the place which the Saxons landed at when they first came into Britain; the first Livery and Seizing, which they had of the whole Kingdom, conferred upon them by the improvident bounty of Vo●tger, to whose aid called in; and the landing place of Augustine the Monk, when he brought the Gospel to the Saxons. The whole about 8 miles in length, and four in breadth, was reckoned to contain in those times 600 Families; now very populous for the bigness, and plentiful of all commodities necessary, but of corn especially. The People gnerally are a kind of 〈◊〉 able to get their livings both by Sea and Land; well skilled, as well in steering of a ship at Sea, as in holding the Plough upon Land; and in both industrious. Of most note in it, 1 Stonar, a Port-Town, the usual landing place of the Saxons; more memorable for the Sepulchre of Vor●●mer, King of the Britan's, who having vanquished the S●xons in many battles, and finally driven them out of the Island, desired to be here interred: on a concert that his dead Corpse would fright them from Landing any more upon these Coasts: And this perhaps he did in imitation of Scipio African, who having had a fortunate hand against those of Carthage, gave order to have his Tomb placed towards afric, to fright the Carthaginians from the Coasts of Itali●.  
M. SUNDERLAND is an Island only at an high-water, when environed on all sides with the Sea; at other times joined unto the Land, or of an easy passage from the one to the other: pulled by some tempest, or by the working of the Sea from the rest of the Land; whence the name of Sunderland. Situate in the North-East part of the Bishopric of Durcham, over against the influx of the River Were. Rich in its inexhaustible mines of Coal, and for that cause seldom without the company of foreign Merchants: yet not to have been here remembered, but that it hath been thought worthy by our Sovereign Lord King Charles, the second Monarch of Great Britain, to confer the title of Earl to the two Noble Families of the Scropes' and Spencers: the first in the 3d year of his reign, Anno 1627., the second in the 18th, Anno 1642.  
XI. THE HOLY ISLAND lieth upon the Coast of Northumberland, not far from Barwick; stretched out in length from East to West, with a narrow point unto the Land, from thence growing broader like a wedge: fortified with a strong Castle, and of great safety, but more famous for what it hath been, than for what it is. In the dawning of Christianity amongst the Northumber's made a Bishops See, by S. Aidanius, one of the first Apostles of that potent Nation. Selected for this dignity by that Godly man, for the Solitude and privacy of it, which made it thought more fit and proper for Devotion. The name than Lin●isfar●; but the Religious lives of so many pious Bishops, Monks, and others of the Clergy as did there inhabit, gained it the name of Holy Island. The See continued there 353 years, that is to say, from the year 637, to 990, under 22 Bishops, hence called Bishops of Lindisfarn; then removed to Durham: the insolences of the Danes (who then raged terribly on those coasts) compelling them to abandon that religious solitude.  
Thus have we taken a survey of the British Lands, and shown by what means Ireland and all the less●r Lands became united either to the Crowns of England or Scotland; and those two Kingdoms to each other joined in the person of the same King, and the participation of his favours, though different still in Laws, and some forms of Government; as most of the Estates of Spain, at the present time. United also in one name, the different Appellations of England and Scotland being swallowed up, or incorporated rather in that of GREAT BRITAIN, which of pleased King James to own for his Style Imperial. And for a memory thereof, to cause a piece of Gold to be coined of 20 s. (since raised to 22 s.) which he called the V●it●●, stamped on the one side with his picture, and this Inscription, JA●OBVS D. GR. MAG●AE BRITANNIAE, FR. ET HIBERNIAE REX, and on the other side with his Arms, crowned with this Motto, FACIAM EOS IN GENIEM VNAM. All we have now to do is to lay down the names of those puissant Princes whom God hath ra●sed to be  

The Monarches of Britain.  
1602. 1 James, the sixth of that name, King of the Scots, Son of Mary Qu. of Scots, Daughter of James the 5th. the Son of James the 4th, and of the Lady Margaret, eldest Daughter of Henry the 7th of England: which Margaret being after married to Archembald Douglass Earl of A●gus, had a Daughter named Margaret also (the only Child of her Parents) married to Matthew Stewart Earl of Lennox, by whom she was made the mother of Henry Lord Darnley, the Father of King ●ames the sixth, by the said Mary Queen of Scots. So that King james descending from the eldest Daughter of Henry the 7th, both by Father and Mother, on the expiring of the Line of Henry the 8th, in the person of Q. Elizabeth of famous memory, was the next heir to the Crown of England, and was accordingly with all joyful acclamations proclaimed and acknowledged King in the City of London, March 24. Anno 1602. (according to the Account of the Church of England) A learned and Religious Prince, a true Defender of the Faith, a Nursing Father of the Church, and a lover of learning. He died at Theobalds', March 27. 1625. having reigned 23 years, and four days over.  
1625. 2 Charles, second Son of King james, and Anne of Denmark, (his elder Brother Henry dying long before,) the 63d King in descent from Cerdick King of the Westsaxons, the 45th King of England in descent from Egb●rs, the 24th from the Norman Conqueror; the 64th Monarch of the English, and the second Monarch of Britain. In the beginning of his reign, he married the Princess Henrietta Maria, Daughter to Henry the 4th, and Sister to Lewis the 13th, French Kings; by whom blest with a Royal Issue of Sons and Daughters.   
As for the Forces and Revenues of these British Monarches, we cannot put the estimate of them in a better way, than by laying together that which hath been delivered of each several part, out of which Items, the summa totalis of the whole both in power and treasure, will be easily gathered. For though these Monarches never had any occasion to muster and unite the Forces of their several Kingdoms upon any one Action: yet by considering what they have been able to do divided; we may conclude of what they may do, if need be, being now united. And so we are to do in marshalling the Arms of the British Monarchy, which are 1 Quarterly France and England, 2 Scotland, 3 Ireland, the fourth as the first. I shut up this discourse of the British Empire with those words of Scripture, (the Motto of another of King james his Coins) QVAE DEUS CONJUNXIT NEMO SEPARET.   
And so much for Britain.    

A TABLE Of the Longitude and Latitude of the chief Cities mentioned in this first Book.  

A.   Lon. Lat. Aberdene, 22. 20. 57 20. Alcala de Henares, 23. 0. 40. 30. Alicante, 28. 40. 39 0. Almodine, 34. 0. 33. 40. Ancona, 43. 10. 43. 50. S. Andrew's. 22. 10. 56. 20. Angolesme, 27. 0. 46. 0. Angi●rs, 18. 10. 47. 25. Aquilegia, 42. 50. 46. 40. Armagh, 14. 50. 54. 9 Avero, 17. 30. 41. 10. Avignon, 23. 40. 43. 50. Aux, 22. 40. 43. 40. St. Anderes, 22. 20. 43. Aix, 22. 20. 42. 10. Arles, 22. 45. 43. 20.. Amboise. 20. 35. 47. 35. 
B.  Badaies, 19 40. 38. 30. Baione, 24. 20. 42. 10. Basil, 28. 10. 48. 30. Besanson, 26. 30. 47. 30. Bilbao, 23. 30. 43. 10. Baden in Switzerl. 31.  48. 44. Blavet, 21. 15. 47. 50. Bononia, 35. 50. 43. 33. Breast, 20.  48. 50. Bath, 20. 56. 51. 20. Bragance, 6.  45.  Barwick, 22. 43. 55. 48. Barcelone, 17. 15. 41. 36. Bordeaux, 18.  45. 10. Burges. 24. 10. 48. 20. 
C.  Cambridge, 23. 25. 52. 11. Calais, 26. 2. 52.  Canterbury, 24. 50. 51. 16. Cartagena, 28. 20. 38. 20. Cane, 21.  50.  Carlisle, 21. 31. 5●. 57 Chester, 20. 23. 53. 11. Chichester, 26. 10. 51.  Clermont, 30. 15. 45. 50. Chur, 32.  42.  Corck, 15. 40. 41. 40. Corduba, 9 4. 37. 50. Conimbre, 5. 45. 40. 19 Compostella, 17. 15. 44. 18. Coventrie. 25. 52. 52. 23. 
D.  Dieppe, 28. 40. 49. 30. Digio●; 25. 45. 47. Dole, 28. 3. 49. 5. D●ver, 26. 10. 51.  Dublin, 16. 40. 54. 27. Dun-Britton, 19 24. 57 10. Durham. 22.  54. 55. 
E.  Edinburgh, 22.  55. 50. Embrun, 28.  44.  Elie, 25. 20. 52. 40. Exeter. 22. 10. 51.  
F.  Florence, 41: 10. 43. 40. Ferrara. 44.  36.  Fayall.   48. 40. 
G.  Geneva, 33. 40. 46. 20. Gelway, 13. 17. 54. 6. Gloucester, 19  53.  Gades, 15. 10. 37.  Granada, 11.  37. 50. Groin, 16. 50. 43. 20. Genoa, 37. 50. 45. 0. Grenoble. 27.  45. 30. 
H.  S. Hilary in Guernzey, 22. 20. 49. 40. Hull. 25. 20. 53. 40. 
L.  Leon, 21. 10. 42. 15. Lisbon, 9 10. 38. 38. Lions, 23. 15. 45. 10. Lincoln, 22. 52. 53. 12. London, 23. 25. 5. 34. Luca, 42. 10. 40.  Ligorn. 40. 20. 43: 30. 
M.  Majorca, 39 50. 33.  Malaga, 23. 50. 37. 22. Merseilles, 24. 30. 43. 10. S. Malo, 19  49.  Medina Caeli, 23. 30. 41. 10. Milan, 38. 30. 46. 10. Modena, 41. 50. 35. 40. Montpelier, 25. 30. 44. 10. Montalban, 23.  45.  Messana, 45. 50. 37. 50. Minorca. 34. 30. 40. 0. 
N.  Naples, 46.  39 30. Nantes, 24. 10. 47. 10. Narbon. 30. 20. 43. 20. Nevers, 25.  47.  Newcastle, 22. 30. 54. 57 Nismes, 26.  44. 2. Norwich. 24. 55. 52. 40. 
O.  Oleron, 24. 30. 45. 30. Orleans, 28. 30. ●8. 0. Orange, 26. 20. 43. 20. Oxford, 22.  51. 50. Otranto. 49. 30. 40. 20. 
P.  Pampelun, 24. 30. 43. 3. Paris, 23. 30. 48. 40. Pavia, 44. 1. 33. 5. Milan, 44. 45. 36. 20. Parma, 39 20. 45. 10. Pescara, 43. 0. 30. 10. Palerme,     Peragia, 42. 20. 43. 10. Peter-port in jarsey, 23. 0. 49. 20. Pisa, 40. 30. 43. 40. Placentia, 20. 40. 40. 0. Poitiers. 26. 30. 47.  
R.  Ravenna, 41. 20. 44. 20. Rheims, 25. 25. 48. 30. Renes, 19  48.  Rochel, 18. 15. 45. 50. Rome, 42. 30. 42.  Reven, 23. 40. 48. 50. Rhezo▪ 47. 0. 38. 20.  
S.  Salisbury, 18. 3. 51. 10. Salamanca, 8. 5. 40. 15. Saragossa, 24. 15. 41. 45. Sevill, 7. 15. 37.  Zion, or Sitti● 29.  45.  Sterling, 20. 10. 56. 20. Sienna, 42. 20. 36. 16. Siguenca, 18. 2.   Syracuse. 40. 30. 37. 30. 
T.  Tarantaise, 29.  45.  Tarragon, 78. 30. 38. 20: Tholouse, 28. 40. 43. 10. Toledo, 16. 20. 39 40. Trieste, 44. 10. 46. 10. Tredagh, 16. 34. 54. 10. Turin, 31. 30. 43. 45. Tarentum. 48. 0. 40. 30. 
V.  Valladolid; 16. 10. 42. 5. Valentia, 19 20. 39 4. Venice, 41. 40. 45. 50. Verona, 40. 40. 45. 50. Viterbo, 41. 50. 42. 4. Weymouth, 23. 50. 51. 0. Winchester, 22.  52.  Wexford. 16. 44. 53.  
Y.  Yarmouth, 27. 30. 53. 0. York. 22. 25. 54. 10. 
Z.  Zurick. 30. 20. 47.   
The End of the first BOOK.   

An Advertisement to the Reader touching the Errata of this part, Containing Italy, and the Alps, with the Preface.  
THe Reader is to be advertised, that the Work being committed to five several Printers for the more speedy dispatch thereof, it is thought fit that every house shall bear the burden of its own Errata. But I must first cry pardon for an Erratum of mine own, in making the Dukedom of Urbine a distinct Estate from that of the Papacy: whereas I have been informed from Signior Almerico the Florentine Agent, that it was not long since swallowed up in the Popedom, as the Dukedom of Ferrara had been before. Howsoever, being the discourse thereof doth follow so immediately upon that of the Popedom, the Reader may consider it as an Appendent on it, though not among the Provinces or Men be●s incorporate with it. But for the Errors of the Press, together with their several Corrections, they are those that follow.  
Fol. 5. lin. 7. for Microsm, r. Microcosm, lin. 32. for there, r. then, 8. 33. for Ellan, r. Elom. 13. 55. for or, read a, 14, 23. for those, r. the, fol. 16. 61. for 18, r. 8, fol. 17. 24. for Thracia, r. Thresia, 18. 46. for communicably, r. incommunicably, 19 12 for Causidorum, r. Causidicorum, 22. 6. for 3357. r. 3368 fol 23. 64. for Choregrophte, r. Topegraphie, ibid. 65. for Glarenteux, r. Clarentieux, 35. 67. for the first, r. first the, 40. for different, r. difficult, In August. num. 14. l. 9 for many r. main, 14. for vicious, r. ri●●ous, num. 16. 49. for any mon r. any not, num. 33. 13, for suddenly, r. so duly, num 38. for. prevailing, r. prowling, Fol. 45. 13. and so in many places else, which I note in this place once for all, for Col●●an, r. Cortian, 47. 19 for ten pounds, r. ten shillings, ibid. 50. for ho●tis, r. bastis, 48. 10. to superintendency, add besides Illyricum itself, ib. 28. for amongst others, r. amongst his Sons, then add, 〈◊〉 to Constantius, Greece, Thrace, and all the Provinces of the East; to Constant, Italy, afric, and Il●yri●um, to Constantine, all beyond the Alps: and this is that. 49. 6. for Orietes, r. Orestes, 50. 54 for Augustius, 1. Augustulus, 51. 22. for Beer, r. Drink, 56. 31. for seem, r. serve, 58. 21. for Lanliano, r. Lanciano, 63. 31. for not curable, r. not curable but by Music only, 59 44. deal and was the Title of the eldest Sons of the Kings of Naples, who were hence c●lled Dukes of Calabria, 67. 16. deal Libycum, 68 62. for the, r. by the, 79. 3. for they, r. that, ib. 17. for ●u●iponus, r. Eutychus, 80. 12. for no, r. not, ib. l. ult. for 110, r. 1001, fol. 83. 5. for P●riglia, r. Perugia, 84. 27. for Lentuli. r. Rutuli. ib. 43. for Trivolis, r. Tivoli, 87. 51. for Seat, r. chief Seat, 95. 59 for Guidus Baldo, r. Gurdo 〈◊〉 99 for Arch B. 10. r. Arch B. 1. fol. 98. 6. for Timianus, r. Timaus, 99 9 deal & c. ●b. 31. deal no, 101. 55. deal thousan●, r 4. 8 for party, 1. part, 109. 56. for C●ato, 1. 〈◊〉 110. 17. deal by whom it was made f●ee, and add the same words lin. 18. after 〈◊〉 the 4th, 113, 29. for first, r. fis, 114. l. 18. for Luca, r. Lucumo. 116. 31. for German, r. Genean, 12●. 23. for Liug●is, r. L●gur●a, 123. 9 for Attenduto, r. Attendulo, 127. 6, for first, 1. last, 128. 56. for 〈◊〉 Pomera, r. Al●a Pompeia, 129. 38. for 5. r. Saint, 131. 10. to several parts, add, called by several names, 136. 65. for 〈◊〉 r. near, 138. 17. deal France, 141. 27. for A●gow, r. Argow. Besides th●se, there are some Mis-●om●rs, as our Lawyer's phrase it, as B●thy●nia, for Bythinia; Lybia, for Libya; Rutili, and R●tilia●, for Ratuli, and Ratutian; Thyras, for 〈…〉 for Cilicia; Cicil●a, for Sicilia; Syclopum, for Cyclopam, and divers others of this kind in the course of this work, which I hope the charitable Reader will not put upon my Account. The rest which do not alter, or perplex the s●ns●, may be easily amended by the Reader, and as easily pardoned.   

An Advertisement to the Reader touching the Errata of this Part, Containing France, Spain, and Britain.  
IN the former part of the Errata, I charged myself with a Sin of Ignorance, and in this I am to charge myself with a Sin of Omission: which is, the leaving out of the Catalogue of the Daulphius of Vienna, before the incorporating of that Province with the Realm of France. For being absolute Princes, they deserve place here, as well as the Dukes of Anjou, or the Earls of Champagne, or any of the rest, under the degree and rank of Kings, whose successions are herein 〈◊〉 down: and here they follow in this Catalogue of 

The Daulphins of Vien●ois.  
A. Ch.  
110. 1 Guigne, surnamed the Fat, Earl of Albon and G●isi●auman, at the time of the dissolution of the Kingdom of Bu●gundie.  
1135. 2 Gurgne II. the first Proprietary and absolute P●inca hereof, by the name of the Dauphin of V●en●ois.  
1146. 3 Guigne III. S●nne of Guigne the 2d.  
1151. 4 Beatriae, Daughter of Gaigne the 3d, first married to Raymond the 3d, Earl of Tholouse; next, to Hugh the 3d, D. of Burgundy, and finally, to G●●gne of S. Albon, of the Collateral li●● of the former Earls: all in her right entitled Daulphins of Viennoi●.  
1208. 5. Andrew, the Son of Beatrix, and of Guigne the 4th.  
1242. 6 Guigne V. Son of Andrew.  
1283. 7 Humbert, the first of that name, in the right of Anne his Wife, Daughter and Heir of Guigne the fifth.  
1305. 8 John, the Son of Anne and Hombert, exercised in continual wars, as his Father was, with the Earls of Savoy.  
1322. 9 Guigne VI Son of John, taken Prisoner by Edward Earl of Savoy, Anno 1329. and at last slain, Anno 1324.  
1341. 10 Humbert II. the second Son of john, and the Brother of Guigne the sixth, the last Dauphin of this Line: Of whose surrendrie, and the reasons which induced him to it, we have spoke at large, fol. 191. and thither I remit the Reader.    
Then for the Errors of the Press, with their emendations, and corrections, Fol. 147. l. 5. for Germans, r. German words, 148. 46. for Bosomon, r. Baisemain, 151. 32. for Mayenne, r. Maine, 152. 60. for Galatia, r. Galatia, 153. for Celto-Scy●bia, r. Celta-Scythia, 155. 63. for Chrysogonelle, r. Grisogonelle, 156. 49. for 14000, r. 140000. Fol. 159. 54. for Azure, r. Argent, 16●. 66. for 13th, r. 11th. 165. 47. for Brien, r. Brieux, 170. 46. for Antecum, r. Autricum, 173. 33. for Philip the Good, r. Philip, the third Son of Philip the Hardy, 174. 27. for Ovillac, r. Aurillac, 181● 28. for Nimines, r. Ximines. 191. 3. for the Praesectus, r. the Seat of the Praefectus. ib. 52. for usually, r. not usually, 193. 51. for A●axis, r. Araxis, 194 for given, r. were given, 198. 12. for war, r. wave, 199. ult. for first, r. last, 201. 67. for did, r. was, 211. 10. for first, r. second, 221. for Review, r. thus a View, ib. 46. for Garvine, r. Gurvinea, ib. 63. for Country, r. Continent, 244. 37. for Sorgorve, r. Segorve, 248. 4. for three, r. six, 252. 48. to the North, add and some few of the neglected Lands, 260. 22; for honest death, r. the hour of his death, ib. 33. for those Fronts, r. the Fronts, 264. 26. for Pero-Benefices, r. Parochial Benefices. ib. 48. for pursued, r. pursuing, ib. 52, for Guipuse, r. Guip●scoa 6000, Fol. 265. 22. for acknowledge, r. know, ib. 34. for Avala, r. Avalonia, 266. 32. deal he said, 269. 4. for it. r. but, ib. ● for ancient, r. anciently, 274. 4. for making, r. made, ib. 32. deal out of Italy, 278. 40. for 5. r. 15 fol. 263. 15. for as we have already proved, r. as we are ready to prove, 265. 57 deal in that saying, 250. l. 4. for containing, r. containeth, 292. 63. for Place, r. State, 298. 43. for a Foot, r. twelve Foot, 303. 66. for Henry 5. r. Henry 6. 312. 40. for Oma Caghlon, r. Oma Maghlin, 319, 19 for North & South, r. East and West. ibid. 63. for 13, r. 23.   

cosmography: THE SECOND BOOK: CONTAINING THE chorography AND HISTORY OF BELGIUM, GERMANY, DENMARK, SWETHLAND, RUSSIA, POLAND, HUNGARY, SCLAVONIA, DACIA, and GREECE, With the ISLES thereof.  
By PETER HEYLYN.  
TACIT. HIST. l. 4. Humanarum rerum possessionem Transalpinis gentibus portendi, Druidae canebant.  
SENEC. de Consolat. ad ALBINUM. Quotidie aliquid in hoc magno Orbe mutatur; Nova Urbium fundamenta jaciuntur, nova Gentium nomina, extinctis nominibus prioribus, oriuntur.  
LONDON, Printed for HENRY SEILE. M.DC.LII.   

cosmography: THE SECOND BOOK, CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHY and HISTORY OF Belgium, Germany, Denmark, Swethland, Muscovie, Poland, Hungary, Dalmatia, Dacia, Greece; with the Isles thereof.  

Of BELGIUM.  
HAving pursued the fortunes of the Roman Empire through the 4 Western Dioceses or Divisions of it, wholly subdued to the command of that conquering State; let us next look on those Countries which lay further North, and either never felt the force of the Roman Armies, or were but conquered in part; o● else were reckoned as the members of some great Province. Of this last sort was all that tract which is now called Belgium, or the Netherlands, bounded on the East with Westphalen, Gulick, Cleve, and the land of Triers, Provinces of the Higher Germany; on the West with the main Ocean, which divides it from Britain; on the North with the River Ems, which parts it from East-Frizeland; on the South, with Picardy and Champagne, two French Provinces; upon the Southeast with the Dukedom of Lorraine.  
By the Latins (especially of these last times) it is called Belgium from the Belgae the most potent people of all these parts; and sometimes also Germania inferior, or the Lower Germany, (in the same sense as by the English it is called the Low Countries and the Netherlands) from their low situation, and the conformity which they have with the other Germans in Laws, Language, Customs and Manners. The more peculiar name is Flanders, which though but one of the 17 Provinces, hath yet given denomination to all the Netherlands, the people of which were once generally called by the name of Flemings; and that either for the power of that Province, in regard of the others, or by reason of the great trade and traffic formerly driven at the Fairs or Marts of Bruges (a Town thereof) by the Merchants of all parts of Europe, or in respect that lying nearer than the rest to France, Spain, Italy and England, that name was better known and took notice of. But this was when the whole Country was under the command of many Princes, of which the Earls of Flanders w●re esteemed most potent. And though this name continued also after the incorporating of most of these Provinces in the house of Burgundy, at which time they were called the Estates of Flanders: yet since the falling off of Holland, and the rest of the United Provinces from the Kings of Spain, it hath lost this honour; the name of Flanders being now restrained within narrower bounds.  
And for the name of Belgium, though I find that name most currant amongst the Latins of this age, yet I see little reason for it. For first, the Provinces of Flanders, Hainault, Namurce, Luxembourg, Limbourg, Brabant, Holland, Zealand, Vtrecht and Gelderland with their Appendices were never reckoned of as parts of old Belgium, or Gallia Belgica: And secondly, old Belgium, or Gallia Belgica, 
Flanders.  contained many large estates which are not now within the reckoning of these 17. Provinces, that is to say, Als●tia, and a great part of the lower Palatinate, the Dukedoms of Lorraine, Cleve, and Juliers; the Bishoprics of Colen, Mentz, and Triers; and so much of France as containeth the Privince of Picardy, and part of Champagne.  
As for the Belgae from whence we have the names of Belgium, and Gallia Belgica, they were originally Germane who driving out the Gauls, planted themselves within the Rhine: esteemed by Caesar to be the valiantest of the gallic nations for those three reasons; First, they were the farthest from Provence where the Roman civilities, and more affable course of life, was embraced. Secondly, they dwelled on a Sea not then frequented by Merchants; and so wanted those assurements to effeminate which are in Countries of traffic. And thirdly, they bordered on the Germans, a warlike nation, with whom they were continually in arms. This people seeing the prosperous success of Caesar's victories in Gaul joined together in a common League, and mustered an army of 269000. fight men against him. But seeing they could not draw him out of his Fortresses they retired again, and that in such disorder, that three Legions, (for no more was Caesar's Army) put them to an infinite slaughter. After this Caesar fight against them severally, overcame them all, and made their Country, and the Country of the bordering Germans, whom he also vanquished, subject unto the Roman Empire. By Constantine the Great made part of the Diocese of Gaul, and by him cast into four Provinces, that is to say, 1. Belgica Prima, containing the Dukedom of Lorraine and the land of Triers, the Metropolis whereof was Triers; 2. Belgica Secunda, comprehending Artois, Picardy, and the Country of Chambray, with parts of Campagne and France Special; of which the Metropolis was Rheims; 3. Germania Prima, comprehending Alsatia, part of the Palatinate and the Bishopric of Mentz, the Metropolitan City of that Province; and 4. Germania Secunda, containing Cleveland, Brabant, Guelderland, Vtrecht, Holland, Zealand, Flanders, Hainalt, Namurce, Luxembourg, Limbourg, and the land of Colen; which last was honoured with the title of the Metropolitan. In the declining of the Empire, they were invaded and possessed by the French; under whom they made the Kingdom of Metz or Ostenrick united to the rest of France by Childerick the third, and made a Member of that Kingdom, of which they continued an especial part, till the time of Lewis the godly, Son of Charles the Great. By whom, and Charles the Bald, and others of that line both in France and Germany, they were parceled into many petite estates, and principalities; so many of them became united in the house of Burgundy, passing under the account of Belgium; under which name and notion we do now consider it.  
And taking it according to this name and notion, it is in compass 1000 Italian, or 250. German miles: and is situated in the northern Temperate Zone, under the 7. 8. & 9 Climates, the longest day in the midst of the 7. Climate where it doth begin, being 16. hours; and the beginning of the 9 Climate increased to 16. hours three quarters, or near 17. hours. The Air in these later days grown more wholesome then formerly; partly by the wonderful increase of the Inhabitants, and partly by the incredible industry of the people, who by draining the Marshes, and converting the standing waters into running streams, have purged the air of many gross and unhealthy Vapours, which did thence usually arise in times foregoing.  
The Country is very populous, containing well-nigh three millions of souls, the men being for the most part well proportioned, great lovers of our English Beer, unmindful both of good turns and injuries: of good wit for inventing, and of a most indefatigable industry for perfecting the rarest Manufactures. For unto them we are indebted for the making of Cloth, which we learned of the Flemings; as also for Arras-hanging, Dornix, Clocks, Watches, and the perfection of the Mariner's Compass. They restored Music, and found out divers Musical Instruments, being naturally good Musicians, and generally so given unto it, and so perfect in it, that heretofore (till the Art of Music grew more common) there were not many great men's houses, which had them not to teach their Children. To them belongeth also the invention of Chariots, the laying on of colours with oil, the working of Pictures in glass, and the making of Worsteds, Says, and Tapestries: the making of which and other Stuffs, being driven out of their Country by the Duke of Alva, they first taught the English. The women generally are of a good complexion, well proportioned, especially in the leg and foot; honourers of virtue, active, and familiar. Both within doors and without, they govern all; which considering the natural desire of women to bear rule, maketh them too imperious and burdensome.  
They use for the most part the German or Dutch Language, with a little difference in the Dialect. But in the Provinces adjoining to France, that is to say, Luxembourg, Mamurce, Artois, Hainalt, and some parts of Flanders, and Brabant they use the French; but speak the same very corruptly and imperfectly by reason of that mixture which it hath of the Dutch or Germane, yet so, that one may easily discern those people to be French originally; or some remainder of the old Gauls mastered by the French, but not rooted out: from their language or first original called to this day by the name of Walloons, the Germans usually changing G into W, as War for Guerre, Warden for Guardian, and in the like case Wales for Galls. I know there is another Etymology of the name of Walloons, some making them to be of the Burgundian race, who at their first passing over the Rhine enquired their way of the Country people in these words, Ou allons, i.e. Whither go we; which being oft repeated by them, occasioned them to be called Walloons: A trim invention doubtless, but of no solidity, nor to be further honoured with a confutation.  
The Country in those parts which lie towards Germany, especially on the Southeast bordering upon Cleveland and Lorraine, is somewhat swelled with hills, and overshaded with woods; the relics of the great Forest of Ardenne, which once took up a great part thereof. But towards the West and North, where it joins to the Sea, it is plain and level, ●ull of flats and marshes, affording very little corn, but abounding in pasturage, which yield a great increase of butter and cheese, good store of beefs and horses of more than ordinary bigness. By reason of which low and level situation, and the ill neighbourhood of a troublesome and unruly sea, it hath been formerly much subject to inundations, insomuch as in the time of King Henry 2. Flanders was so overflown, that many thousands of people, whose dwellings the sea had devoured, came into England to beg new seats; and were by that King first placed in Yorkshire, and then removed to Pembrookeshire. Since that, it hath in Zealand swallowed eight of the Islands, and in them 300. Towns and Villages: many of whose Churches and strong buildings are at a dead low water to be seen. And as once Ovid said of Helice, and Buris, cities of Achaia, so may we of these, 
Invenies sub aquis, & adhuc ostendere nautae,  
Inclinata solent cum moenibus oppida versis.  That is to say, 
The waters hide them, and the Sailors show  
The ruined walls and steeples as they row.   
The chief Commodities which they vent into other Countries, are Linen, Scarlets, Worsted, Says, Silks, Velvets, and the like rich Stuffs; together with great quantities of Armour, Ropes, Cables, Butter, Cheese, etc. Of which, excepting Cheese and Butter, there is nothing of the natural growth of the Country: the rest being Manufactures, which they make out of such materials as they fetch out of foreign Regions. But the Commodity which yieldeth them most benefit is that of Fish, not caught upon their own coast neither, but either in the northern seas, or the coast of England: the very Herrings which they catch on the shores of England (to the no small dishonour of the English nation) bringing them a revenue (besides what is pursed up by the Adventurers) of 440000. pounds per annum; and that of Codfish which they catch on the coasts of Frizeland, amounting to 150000 l. sterling yearly.  
Captains of note and eminence it hath bred but few, the People living till of late in perpetual peace. The chief of those whose names have been transmitted to us, 1. Civilis, a Prince of the Batavians, for subtlety of wit compared to Hannibal and Sertorius, of which in his long war against the Romans in the time of Vespasian, he gave very good proof. In the middle times, 2. William Earl of Holland, elected Emperor of Germany, 3. Baldwin Earl of Flanders, Emperor of Constantinople. 4. Philip the good, and 5. Charles the Warlike, Dukes of Burgundy, 6. Charles the fifth, Emperor and King of Spain: and of late times the Princes of the house of Nassaw and Orange, transplanted hither in the Regency of Maximilian, out of higher Germany. And to say truth, their Genius doth not lie so much, for land service, as it doth for the seas; in which they have been very famous, and not less fortunate. For of this nation was Oliver de Noort, the fourth that compassed the world; Jacob le More, the first discoverer of the Strait, or Fretum, which now beareth his name; besides divers others. And generally the people are so expert in Navigation, (especially those bordering on or near the coasts) that they ●eem born for and to the seas: many of which being born on shipboard and bred up at sea, know no other Country; and brook the land as ill as a fish doth the dry ground. Which natural inclination to it, and the necessity they have of employing themselves that way, (the Country not being otherwise able to provide sustenance for those multitudes of men which it doth abound with) hath so exceedingly increased their shipping, that it is thought that they are masters of more vessels of all sorts, taking one with another, than almost all the rest of Europe.  
Scholars of note it hath bred many. 1. Erasmus, the great Restorer of learning in these parts of the World. 2. Justus Lipsius, as eminent a reviver of the Latin Elegancies. 3. Joseph Scaliger, the son of Julius, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, a man not to be followed in all parts of learning; but of equal arrogance. 4. Rodolphus Agricola. 5. Levinus Lemnius. 6. 7. Janus Douza, the Father and the Son. 8. Abraham Ortelius, and 9 Gerard Mereator, the Geographers. 10. Geo. Cassander, 11. Dr. James Harmin, 12. Gerard Vossius, eminent Divines, and 13. Hugo Grotius, of as great parts (but seasoned with more modesty and moderation) as the famous Scaliger. 14. Jansenius, and 15. Pamelius two right learned men, but of the Pontifician party.  
The Christian Religion was planted in several Provinces, by several men: in Holland, Zealand, and Friesland, by Willibrode an Englishman, the first Bishop of Vtrecht; whence by degrees it gained on the rest of the Country: these being the first people of the Frankes or Germans converted totally to the Gospel. In tract of time it fell from the primitive purity, participating of the Errors and Corruptions of the Church of Rome; from which when they desired to reclaim themselves, they were therein opposed by the King of Spain and his Ministers. Hence the beginning of the troubles; enlarged afterwards on pretence of civil rights, invaded and infringed by the Spaniard, affecting a more absolute Dominion over them, than their Laws admitted. At this time as the country doth stand divided betwixt the States & the Spaniard; so stands it with Religion also: the Spaniard permitting only the Religion of the Church of Rome, within the Provinces & Estates under his command; and the State's General indulging the free use of all Religions (even the very Jews) but countenancing only that of the Reformed Churches, according to the Platform laid down by Calvin.  
Chief Forests of this 〈◊〉 are 1. that of Ardenne, which in the time of Caesar extended from the banks of the Rhine as 〈…〉 ●●urney one way, and Champagne another way; and was in compass 500 miles, in the least account. At this time, though the greatest of all Gaul Belgic it reacheth but from ●ie●ge to Theonville, 20. leagues in length: and yet not all that Woodlands neither, though within the Verge of the Forest; there being much tillage and many Villages in that tract of ground; the principal of which is the town of S. Hu●ert, situate almost in the midst of it. 2. Niepe, and 3. Numen, in the Earldom of Flanders: the first extending to the banks of the River Lis, the other coming up close to ●pris. 4. Pondsberg in the Confines of Hainalt and Flanders, near unto Mount Gerrard: all of them parts of this great Forest of Ardenne, which once overshadowed all this Country. 5. Normault in Hainalt, in which is much Char-coal made; supposed for that reason to be a part of that Forest, which the old French called La Charbonniere. 6. Echterwald in Guelderland near Arn●em, etc.  
The chief Rivers are 1. Rhine, which ariseth out of two springs in the Lepontian Alps amongst the 〈◊〉, united into one stream near C●ur: thence passing by the Cities of Constance, Basil, Spire, Worms, Mentz, and Colen, is again divided about the confines of Guelderland into four branches or channels. Of which the first is called the Wael, which running through Guelderland by Nimmegen, and Bomel, loseth it sel● in the Maes: the second, which keeps the name of the Rhine, passeth by Arnhem, from thence in a contracted channel to Vtrecht, and so through Holland unto Leiden: the third called the Lecle, taketh his course through the Provinces of Vtrecht and Holland, and so into the sea betwixt Dort and Rotterdam; and the fourth called the Ysel which passing by the towns of Zutphen and Deventer, betwixt ●ueblerland, and Ouor-ys●l, emptieth itself into the Ocean near Amsterdam. And of these branches I have given the exacter reckoning, partly because the course of that famous River is otherwise not easy to be observed; and partly because the knowledge of a great part of these Provinces dependeth on the knowledge of the course of this River. A River of such reputation in the ancient times, that into it the old Belgae used to cast the children which they suspected to be Illegitimate: for were they born of lawful bed, they floated on the waters; if of an unlawful, they sank immediately. Whereunto Claudian alluding saith, nascentes explorat gurgite Rhenus. But the great searcher of Antiquities, Versiegan is of opinion, that they thereby only enured their children to hardness, and made trial of their strength, adultery being rarely found among them, and so these kinds of experiments needless. 2. Mosa, or the Maes, or the Meuse, which rising in France not far from the springs of the Seine and the Marne passeth through Lorraine, Luxemburg, Namur; from thence by Ruremond, and Ven●: where turning toward the West, it taketh in a part of the Rhine, and falleth into the sea not far from Bril, with so great a violence, that the waters of it for a long space do continue fresh. 3. Ems, in Latin called Amisus, dividing the two Friselands. 4. Scaldis, which arising in Picardy, and running through Artois and between Hainalt and Brabant, meeteth with the sea a little above Antwerp: and 5. Lis or Ley, which runneth quite through Flanders. Besides which Rivers and others of inferior note (which we shall meet withal in their proper places) here are great store of lakes, pools, and marshes, which do both fortify the Country, and provide it of fish: besides many navigable channels, made by the hand of man from one River to another for the convenience of passage, and the more easy transport of their commodities.  
The shore of this country hath been much worn out by the Sea, especially that of the Islands of Z●land, and such as lie scattered about Holland, where they are defended with banks and ramparts, painfully made, and chargeably maintained. These banks are about ten els in height and twenty five in breadth at the bottom: They are made of the hardest clay that may be gotten; in the inside stuffed with wood and stone, on the outside, covered with mats strong and thick made.  
The former inhabitants were divers, as shall be showed particularly in their proper dwellings. They are at this present divided into seventeen Provinces; besides the two great Bishoprics of Liege and Cambray, which being always under the protection of the Belgic Princes, partakers of their fortunes either good or ill, and lying intermixed among their estates, shall have their turn in the description of these Countries, divided generally 

into  
2 Bishoprics 

1 Liege or Luick.  
2 Cambray.    
4 Dukedoms 

1 Limburg.  
2 Luxenburg.  
3 Gelderland.  
4 Brabant.    
1 Marquisate; viz. of the holy Empire.  
7 Earldoms 

1 Flanders.  
2 Artoys.  
3 Hainault.  
4 Namur.  
5 Zutphen.  
6 Holland.  
7 Zealand.    
5 Baronies 

1 West-Friseland.  
2 Vtretcht. 3 Overyssell.  
4 Machlin.  
5 Groining.      
Of these nineteen, two only did acknowledge the Sovereignty of the Kings of France, viz. Flanders and Artoys: the Earls whereof were Homagers unto that Crown; but seldom did descend so low as to do their Homage, quitted at last to Philip the second King of Spain and his Successors, by K. Henry the second of France, in the treaty at Cambray, Anno 1558. The rest were held originally of the Germane Empire, and by Maximilian Emperor of German, and Regent of those Countries for his son Philip, (who had a purpose to subject them to the Empire again) were made the tenth Circle of the Empire, called the Circle of Burgundy. But neither since, nor before that time, would the Princes of the house of Burgundy acknowledge any such subjection, but governed these Estates as absolute Princes, without relation to the Empire, or subordination to the Emperor, or Imperial Officers: never appearing at the Diets, nor contributing to any Taxes there imposed, nor holding themselves bound by any Constitutions which were made therein. So that these several Relations being out of use, we must behold it at this time as it stands divided betwixt the Spaniard and the States: beginning first with those Provinces which belong to the Spaniard; the true Proprietary of the whole; and therein first with Flanders as of most esteem.  

1. FLANDERS, and 2. ARTOIS.  
THese two I have thought fit to join together, because at first but one Estate; and though divided for a time, yet after five or six descents were again united, and have so continued ever since.  
1. FLANDERS so called (as some say) a Flando, because it lieth open to the winds, is bound on the East with Hainalt and Brabant; on the West with the English or Germane Ocean, on the North with the Seas of Zealand, and a branch of the Scheld; and on the South with part of Picardy in France, interposing betwixt Calais and Gravelling.  
The Soil indifferently fruitful in corn and pastures; the air healthful, temperate and pleasant. The whole Country not in length above 90. miles, and in breadth but sixty: and yet containing in that compass above thirty Cities, (for they reckon all Cities which be walled) 1154. Villages; which stand so thick, (as needs they must in so narrow a compass) that the Spaniards a● their first coming in with King Philip the second, took the whole Province for one Town. Divided commonly into Imperialem, 2. Gallicam, and 3. Teutonicam: or Flanders Imperial, 2. Flanders Gallicant, and 3. Flanders Flammengant.  
1. FLANDERS FLAMMENGANT, which is the greatest of the three, is bounded on the East with Imperial Flanders, and the River Scheld; on the west with the English Ocean; on the North with the seas of Zealand; and on the South with Artois and Flanders Gallicant: The chief Towns of it, 1. Gaunt, in Latin called Gandavum, seven miles in compass; but taking in the Suburbs which are great and large, the whole circuit is ten miles at least. One of the greatest Cities of Europe for extent of ground: but not so populous as many of a less capacity; there being made waste ground even within the walls. Commodiously seated on the banks of the Scheld and the Ley, both which run thorough it, and make in it 26. Lands, joined together with 98. Bridges: and had not her many seditions ruinated her beauties, she might have been the Queen of Europe. In this Town were born John Duke of Lancaster, commonly called John of Gaunt, and Charles' the fifth Emperor and King of Spain: which last to restrain the People from their old seditions, which had been very troublesome to his predecessors (the Gauntois taking on them many times to rule and overrule their Princes.) built a strong Citadel in the place where stood the Abbey of S. Bavons. For Churches, Monasteries, and other places of devotion there were numbered in it 55, all of them answerable to the grandeur and renown of the City, the private buildings being also very stately, if not majestical. But now it is much fallen from its former glories, the often seditions of this people drawing upon themselves the vengeance of their angered Prince; and their wealth much impaired by the long wars and the diversion of their trading by the Hollanders, who command the seas. 2. Bruges or Brug, more within the land; a town that hath neither Port nor River, yet formerly of such wealth, and the people in those times so willing to show it, that Queen Joan the wife of Philip the fair, having been there and marked the pomp of the women, complained, that She was not Queen alone. The town of four miles' circuit within the walls, wonderfully well peopled, the buildings fair and sumptuous, (amongst which 60. Churches and Religious houses) the streets large and straight, and a spacious marketplace, from which the six principal streets of the City do pass directly on to as many ●ates, which is very pleasant to behold. And though the Town hath neither Port nor River as before was said, yet was it anciently of so great trading, that it was accounted one of the four Mart-towns of Christendom, flourishing chiefly by the benefit of the English Cloth, and sensibly decaying when the English traffic was removed hence to Antwerp. It was walled by Earl Baldwin, Anno 890. is distant three leagues from the sea: and seated on a fair and deep channel made by art, and filled with the waters of all the adjoining Fountains and Rivulets: which artificial channels are in these Countries very frequent, to the great enriching of the whole State. 3. Ypres a town seated very strongly, and almost impregnable, on a small river so named, a reasonable rich Town, and well built, though most of the houses be of timber: very well served with water, conveyed into every house almost in leaden pipes; of which there is so great a number, that the foundations of it seem to be laid in lead. 4. Bourbourg, a fine strong town, but little; pertaining to the French King in the rights of the House of Bourbon. 5. Comines, on the River Lis or Ley, beautified with a strong castle and an excellent Library, but more in being the birthplace of Philip de Comines that notable Statesman and Historian. 6. Courtray on the same River of Ley, one of the ancientest towns in Flanders, yet still continueth well built; and of very great strength both by art and nature, famous for a great overthrow given the French, Anno 1301. for which the town was called of long time the Sepulchre of the Frenchmen. 7. W●nocksberg so called of a goodly Abbey built upon an hill in the honour of S Winock an English man of an holy life: sacked by the French, Anno 1538. but since re-edified and made more beautiful than it was before. 8. Gravelling on the sea side, which since the taking of Calais by the French, hath been made the strongest town in the Low-countries. 9 Oudenard seated on the Scheld, a fair strong town, and of very great traffic, especially for Tapestry, and the finest Linens, which are herein made: the birthplace of Margaret, Dutehesse of Parma, and Mother to Alexander, Prince of ●arma that renowned soldier.  
The principal Ports of Flanders being four in number, are all of them seated in this part, viz. 1. Dunkirk, a small but safe Port belonging to the French King (as doth Gravelling also) in the right of the house of Vend●s●e, both taken lately by the French, and so returned ex post liminio to the proper owner. Most memorable in these days, in that the people of it in the times of war, so infested the seas. 2. Scluse, seated at the mouth of the Channel of Bruges; beautified with a very fair Haven, able to contain 500 good Ships, and is now subject to the States; with whose safety it could not well stand to le● the Span●ards enjoy any safe and large harbour so near unto them. Over against it lieth the Isle of Cassandt, (famous for the birth of George Cassander, a moderate and learned Papist:) Formerly as big again as it is at the present, having then a fair town in it, and many rich villages; of which there is but one remaining, (of the same name with the Island) the rest all swallowed by the sea. 3. Newport, a pretty Town, with a very strong Castle, built on a well frequented Haven, but not very safe, and therefore not much used by the men of war, nor made rich by Piracies, as Dunkirk. Near to this town, Anno 1603. was fought the field-battell betwixt Archduke Albert, and the States; the victory next under God, being gotten for the States by the valour of the English, and the excellent conduct of the Veres. 4. Ostend, not walled till the Low-countries wars, and then but with a mudwall only, and that not finished till the Archduke sat down before it; insomuch as the Arch-dutchesse Isabella is said to have sworn that she would not shift her smock till the town were taken: who had she kept that rash oath, had been very lousy, the town (then garrisoned with English) holding out against the said Archduke a siege of three years and as many months.  
2. IMPERIAL FLANDERS, so called, because it was long under the obedience of the Emper●s, is severed from Brabant by the River Dender, and from the gallic Flanders, by the River Scheld about Oudenard. It was sometimes called Bracant, of a Castle of that name destroyed by Baldwin le Debonair Earl of Flanders: and is now called the County of Alost, from the chief town thereof so named; the jurisdiction whereof containing 170 Villages, extendeth as far as to the walls of Gaunt, and the Gates of Oudenard. The town strong and indifferently fair, situate on the River Dender, most famous in these times for a Fair of Hops which is kept there yearly. 2. Hulst, a walled town, and the chief of the four towns in the County of Waes'; the other three being 3. Axele, 4. Mouchont, 5. Asseneds, of which little memorable; but that they were all taken from the Empire by the said Baldwin le Debonair in the time of the Emperor Henry the fourth. 6. Dendremond, situate at the mouth of the Dender where it entereth into the Scheld; a strong town both by Art and Nature, and much enriched by making Fustians, and a weekly market of Flax. A distinct Signeure of itself, with many rich villages belonging to it, incorporated into the Earldom of Flanders by the marriage of Earl Lewis de Malaine with the Lady Margaret of Brabant, to which house it formerly appertained. 7. Rupelmond, on the mouth of the River Rupel, where it falleth into the Scheld, famous in former times for an ancient Castle in which were kept the Muniments and Records of the Earls of Flanders: more in late times, for being the birthplace of Mercator, that renowned Cosmographer. 8. Mont Gerhard, called by the French Grandmont, a fine and pleasant town seated on the Dender. Which three last towns, together with Bornhen a fair large village, having some jurisdiction on the parts adjoining, made up that estate, which was called the Propro, or Donaire of Flanders, because not holden of the Empire; or the Kings of France, but in the sovereignty alone of the Earls hereof.  
3. FLANDERS GALLICANT, so called from the French language there spoken, lieth on the south of Flanders Flammengant, having Hainault on the East, Artois on the West, and the Country of Cambray on the South. The chief towns of it, are 1. Listle, in Latin, Insula, so called from its Iland-like situation, amongst ponds, pools, and marshes, dried up and made firm land by Earl Baldwin le Barbum, who built the town Anno 1007. which afterwards was walled by Baldwin de Lisle, his son, (born in this town, and hence so named) Anno 1066. The town made rich by manufactures, and resort of Merchants; accounted the best town of traffic next Amsterdam, and Antwerp, in all the Netherlands. Not far from which are to be seen the ruins of an ancient Castle called Brug, the Seat or Manor house of the ancient Foresters, who had the government of this Country for the Kings of France. 2. Douai (Duacum in Latin) a fair and strong town seated on the Scharpe, having many fountains, good buildings, and a great number of Churches; made an University by King Philip the second of Spain, who built therein a Seminary or College for English Fugitives. 3. Orchies, a pleasant town and well traded for the making of Serges, which with the other two make up the three Estates of this part of Flanders. 4. Armentiers, an unwalled town, but of very great trading; here being yearly 25000. pieces of Cloth sent hence to Italy, and thence to Constantinople. 5. Tournay, (or Dornick, as the Dutch call it) a great, rich, mighty, and strong town, seated on the Scheld, well built and full of stately and magnificent Churches and religious Houses; and anciently honoured with a See Episcopal. A town of great importance and much contended for betwixt the Flemings and the French; but finally fell unto the French, as the more puissant Prince: taken from them by Henry the eighth of England, Anno 1513. to whom the Citizens paid 100000 Ducats for their present ransom; restored by him unto the French, Anno 1518. 
Artois.  for the sum of 600000. Crowns; and finally from them recovered by Charles the fifth, who restored it to the body of Flanders from which it had been long dismembered, but so that it is governed as a State apart, and is called the Signory of Tournesis, having a goodly jurisdiction over the Country round about it. 6. S. Amand, in the Country of Tournesis, pleasantly seated on the Scharpe; in which is one of the richest Abbeys in all Flanders; the Abbot thereof having the temporal and spiritual jurisdiction over it, and the parts about it. And so much for the chorography of the Earldom of Flanders; inhabited by the Nervi, and Morini, in the time of Caesar.  
11. ARTOIS, is bounded on the East with Flanders Gallivant, and the Country of Cambray; on the South and West with Picardy; on the North with Flanders Flammegant and the River Lis. The air exceeding temperate, and the soil so fruitful that it serveth as a Granary to a great part both of Flanders and Brabant.  
On the West part hereof towards France, lieth the Earldom of S. Paul, so called from the chief town thereof, a goodly signory, and of great jurisdiction and revenue: containing besides many Villages, the good town of Berne, a walled town, and of great importance. The Earls hereof were of the noble family of the Earls of Luxembourg, the last of which was Lewis of Luxembourg, made Constable of France by K. Lewis the 11. With whom, as also with Edward the 4. of England, and Charles' Duke of Burgundy, he played so many cross tricks, that having long deluded them all and kept them in a continual jealousy of one another he was at last by Duke Charles taken and beheaded. After whose death, this goodly signory fell to the house of Vendosme in France, by the marriage of Francis Earl of Vendosme with Mary the daughter of this Lewis: to whom it was adjudged by the power and favour of the French-Kings; the Heirs Males being made uncapable of succession in it by the Attaindure and Confiscation of the said last Earl. By means whereof the house of Vendosme were entitled to many fair Estates in Artois and Flanders, and much good lands in France which they were possessed of.  
The Arms of these Earls were Argent, a Lion Gules armed and Crowned Or, his tail forked of the second.  
As for the residue of Artois, the towns of most importance in it, are Arras, in Latin Attrebatum Civitas, the chief City of the Attrebates, the old inhabitants hereof in the time of Caesar; and still the chief City of this Province, a large, populous, and well fortified City, anciently honoured with a See Episcopal, and stocked with an industrious people; the first makers of the Cloth of Arras, which took name from hence. Divided into two distinct towns, both of them walled, and called by two several names: the lesser called La Cite, subject to the Bishop, beautified with a fair and stately Cathedral Church, and a Library containing many excellent Manuscripts, the lesser called La Ville, subject to the Prince, having large streets, and a rich Monastery of the yearly revenue of 20000. crowns. By Ptolemy it is called Regiacum, seated within a bow-shoot of the River Scharp: and heretofore the Metropolitan town of Flanders, till Artois was dismembered from it; since which time the chief City of this Province, as before is said. 2. S. Omer a fair town, and well peopled, seated upon the River Aa, some 8. Dutch miles from the Ocean, so called from S. Omer, or Audomarus, Bishop of the Morini, who built a Monastery in this place, from which grew the town, the second of esteem and rank in all the country. Near to it is a goodly lake of fresh water, in which are many little Lands affording good pasturage for cattle: of which Lewis Guicciardine reporteth, that by fastening a cord unto the bushes which grow in them, a man may draw them which way he will; and that under them there are found great numbers of fishes, who bed themselves there for shelter against the Wether. 3. Betune, a strong town, and seated amongst excellent pastures, of which the people make great plenty of the best Cheese: which, with the territory hereof, fell to Guy of Dampierre Earl of Flanders in right of Maud his wife, daughter and heir of Daniel the Lord of this town. 4. Aire, on the Lys, a strong town with a Castle of great antiquity. 5. Bapaulme, a little, but well fortified town; and yet more strong because it cannot be besieged for want of fresh water, which is not to be had within three leagues of it. 6. Renty, an unwalled town, but fenced with a very strong Castle, besieged by the French Anno 1554. but being overcome in a set-field by Charles the fifth, they were fain to raise the siege and go home again. 7. Hedinfert, on the confluence of two little Riverets, Blangis and Canche, a frontier town on the edge of France, one of the strongest and most defensible places of all the Netherlands, built by Charles the fifth out of the ruins of old Hesdin, which having taken from the French, he commanded it to be razed as no longer serviceable, and raised this town instead thereof, somewhat near France. 8. Ter●in, or Theroven, the Tervanna of Ptolemy, and Civitas Morinum of Antoninus, a frontier town, held for a long time by the French, by whom thought impregnable, till taken by King Henry the 8. Anno 1513. they changed their opinion. A siege not only memorable for the issue of it, but for two other matters of great moment: the one that the Emp. Maximilian came and served in person under the colours of S. George, with the English cross upon his breast; the other, that the French intending to victual the town had so great an overthrow, that had the English followed their fortune, they had opened a fair way to have made themselves masters of all France; the French King being so astonished on the news hereof, that he prepared to fly into Britain. But the English more minded the spoils and riches of Terwyn then the sequel of an absolute victory; Et fru● malue●unt victoria, quam uti, as the Historian said of Hannibal. It is now after many changes of fortunes in the hands of the French; and by some reckoned and accounted of as a part of Pieardie. There are besides these four walled towns more, that is to say, Lilliers, Pern, Lens, and La Bassei, of which little memorable; and to the number of 854. Villages.  
These Countries of Flanders and Artois, 
Flanders and Artois.  were anciently part of the great Forest of Ardenne, nothing but a continual waste of Woods and Deserts, till the Conquest of it by the French: the Sea coasts being then unpeopled for fear of the Danes, who by their frequent Piracies did much vex those shores, and the inland countries meanly planted, for want of corn and other necessaries for the life of man. By Dagobert K. of France, anno 621. this wild country extending then as far as the River Some, and comprehending besides Artois and Flanders, a good part of Picardy, was given unto one Lideric le bucq, with the title of Forester, to be holden under the Sovereignty of that Crown. In whose posterity it continued with the title of Foresters till the time of Baldwin the first, the son of Odoacer, the seventh of the Foresters, whose names occur upon record, there being a long intermission of their names and memories, during the ravagements and depredations of the Danes and Normans. This Baldwin having first ravished, and afterwards married Judith, sister to Charles the Bald King of France and Emperor, was by him created Earl of Flanders, the Sovereignty thereof reserved as before it was; in whose issue i● remained entire, till Philip the first Earl of that name, gave unto Philip Augustus K. of France, the country of Artois, with Boulognois, and Verumanduois, now parts of Picardy, in marriage with Isabel his N●ece, daughter of Baldwin Earl of Hainalt. By Lewis the 8. son and successor of Philip Augustus, Artois was given in portion to his youngest son Robert, made the first Earl of Artois by K. Lewis the 9 anno 1234. And by the marriage of Lewis the first of Flanders, with Margaret the heir of Artois, and the Earldom of Burgundy, both those Estates were added unto this of Flanders, now made far mightier than before. And yet before this great accession of estate, it was accounted the prime Earldom, as Milan was the prime Dukedom of Europe: these Earls being privileged to write themselves Dei gratia, all others Dei clementia only; and Flanders being grown abroad to so great esteem that it was generally used for all the Netherlands. Finally, by the marriage of Margare● daughter of Lewis de Malain Earl of Flanders, to Philip the Hardy Duke of Burgundy, this great estate became united to that house, and afterwards was conveyed unto that of Austria, as shall be shown hereafter in due time and place. In the mean season let us take a brief survey of 

The Earls of FLANDERS and ARTOIS.  
864 1 Baldwin the first Earl of Flanders.  
879 2 Baldwin II.  
918 3 Arnulph, son of Baldwin the 2.  
960 4 Baldwin III. son of Arnulph.  
964 5 Arnulph II. son of Baldwin 3.  
988 6 Baldwin IV. son of Arnulph.  
1029 7 Baldwin V.  
1067 8 Baldwin VI Earl of Hainalt.  
1070 9 Arnulph III. Earl of Hainalt.  
1071 10 Robert son of Baldwin the 5. and brother of Baldwin the 6.  
1093 11 Robert II. son of Robert the 1.  
1111 12 Baldwin VII.  
1118 13 Charles son of Canutus K. of Denmark, and Adelize the daughter of Robert the 1.  
1127 14 William, son of Robert the son of William the bastard Duke of Normandy, and Maude his wife, daughter of Baldwin the 5.  
1132 15 Theodorick of Elsas, Nephew of Robert the first, by his daughter Heltrude.  
1169 16 Philip of Elsas.  
1191 17 Baldwin VIII. Earl of Hainalt in right of Margaret his wife, daughter of Theodorick, and sister of Philip.  
1199 18 Baldwin IX. Earl of Flanders and Hainalt, and Emperor of Constantinople.  
1205 19 Ferdinand, son of Sancho K. of Portugal, in right of Joan his wife, daughter of the Emperor Baldwin.  
1244 20 William II. of Dampiere, son of Margaret the sister of Joan.  
1255 21 Guy, brother of William the 2.  
1304 22 Robert III. surnamed of Betune the son of Guy.    

The Earls of ARTOIS.  
1234 1 Robert of France, grandson of Philip Augustu●, and Isabel the daughter of Baldwin the 8. made the first Earl by Lewis the 9  
1245 2 Robert II. son of Robert.  
1302 3 Otheline, Earl of Burgundy, succeeded i● right of Maud his wife, the daughter of Robert the 2.  
1315 4 Philip the Long K. of France, Earl of Burgundy and Artois in right of Joan his wife, the daughter and heir of Maud, and Otho, or Otholine.  
1323 23 Lewis, grandson of Robert the 3. in right of his mother Earl of Rethel, and in the right of his Grandmother Earl of Nevers, and of Artois in right of his wife.  
1361 5 Margaret daughter of Philip of France, 
Hainalt.  and Joan, Countess of Artois and Burgundy, married to Lewis Earl of Flanders, etc.  
1347 24 Lewis de Malain, Earl of Flanders, Nevers, and Rethel, in right of his father, and of Artois and Burgundy in right of his mother; whose daughter Margaret conveyed this great estate to Philip the Hardy Duke of Burgundy: Of whom and his Successors in a place more proper.   
The Arms of Flanders were Or, a Lion sable, languid and armed Gules. Those of Artois being Seem of Flower de Lyces Or, in a field Azure; a file of three Labels Gules, charged with as many Castles of the first.   

HAINALT.  
HAINALT is bounded on the East with Namur, on the West with Flanders, on the North with Brabant, on the South with Picardy, and Champagne in France. It was anciently called Saltu● Garbonatius: by some writers of the middle times, the lower Picardy: and is supposed to have taken this new name from the River Hain, or Hania which passeth through it.  
The length thereof is 60 miles, 48 the breadth, comprehending in that compass 950 Villages, and 24 towns; in and amongst which there is reckoned one principate, 10 Earldoms, 12 Peerdoms, or Pairries, 22 Baronies, 26 Abbeys, one Lord Martial, besides other Officers of the Prince, descending by inheritance to the Lords of this Province.  
The air hereof is very good, and the soil fruitful by reason the country is watered with so many Rivers, as the Scheld, the Sambre, the Dender, and several lesser streams, besides divers lakes, marshes, ponds, and pools, which do much enrich it: the country abounding in most places with fresh Meadows and sweet Pastures, good fruits and profitable trees, but especially with great plenty of corn. Here are also in some parts of it notable Mines of iron and lead; and excellent quarries of the best stone, fit for all kind of buildings.  
The principal of the Towns are 1. Monts, situate at the confluence of the Haine, and a little River called Trulle, which gives a good natural strength unto it, fortified besides with a very strong wall, three large deep ditches, and an ancient Castle. The Town, great, beautiful, and rich, adorned with sumptuous buildings both private and public, and replenished with wealthy Merchants, and men of trade: the principal of all the Province erected into an Earldom by Charles the Great, and sometimes used for the stile of the Earls of Hainalt. In this town is the noble Nunnery of S. Valdrude, once a Duchess of Lorraine, the Nuns whereof are to be Ladies and Gentlewomen of noble families, in the morning apparelled in white, like Nuns; in the afternoons according to their birth and qualities, who when they please may leave the Cloister and be married. The Abbess hath both jurisdictions in the town and country about it; and anciently did put the Earls of Hainalt into possession of the state. Another Nunnery like this (but not of such large Revenues) there is at 2 Ma●buige on the Sambre, a good town of Merchandise. 3. Valenciennes seated on the Scheld, and a little River called Rovelle, which make not only in it many pleasant Isles, but pass almost under every man's house, to the great benefit and delight of the place and people. The fire hereof so strong by nature, (besides the fortifications of Art) that on the one side it may be easily made unapproachable by water; and on the other sides so defended by hills, that it can hardly be besieged but by three Armies at once. A goodly, large and beautiful town, especially for public buildings, the chief whereof are the Church of our Lady, built after the ancient manner of Architecture, with sumptuous arches 〈◊〉 goodly Pillars of Marble and Porphyry; the Earls Palace and the Town-hal, buildings of great magnificence, and excellent workmanship: the birthplace of Henry the 7. Emperor of Germdnie, of Mary daughter of Charles the Warlike, and Froissart the great French Historian. Finally a town, which for the eminence thereof, is governed as a State apart by itself, having under the jurisdiction of it, 3 Towns and 132 Villages, which on occasions of appeal resort not to the Provincial Council at Montz, but the great Council at Machlyn. 4. Chimay upon the River Blanch near a pleasant Forest, which gives the title of a Prince to the eldest son of the Duke of Arschot, one of the principal Lords of Brabant, who have here a very goodly Palace. 5. Halle, seated on the Seine, which runs through it, a place of great credit amongst the Papists, by reason of an Image of the blessed Virgin, famed for many miracles. Of which, see Lipsius on that Subject. 6. Beauvais an old town, at a pillar whereof begin all the ways leading into France, made of paved stones by Brunhault the wife of Sigebert King of Mets, or Austrasia, who with Fridegond the wife of Chilperick, and Katherine Medici's the wife of Henry the 2. are said to be the three Furies of France. 7. Landrecie on the River Sambre, famous for the notable resistance which it made to Charles the 5, 1543. 8. Mariemburg, built by Marie Queen of Hungary, Governess here for the said Charles, anno 1524. to serve as a Bulwark against France, on which it frontireth. 9 Philippe Ville, built and well fortified for the same reason by King Philip the 2. 10. Bouchant, upon the Scheld, in the county of Ostrinand, which county is the title of the first son of Hainalt, and by that name William the eldest son of Albert Earl of Hainalt and Holland, was admitted Knight of the Garter by King Richard the 2. 
Hainelt.  11. Conde a good little town seated on the Scheld, the moiety whereof belonged heretofore to the house of Montpens●er in France; as 12. Anghien a town of great trade for tapestry to the house of Vendosme: from whence the Princes of Conde, and Dukes of ●nghien do derive their ticles. 13. Beaumond upon the knap of a goodly hill, whence it hath the name, belonging at the present to the Dukes of Arschot, but anciently the partage of the second son of the Earls of Hainalt. 14. Bins, or ●inche, on a branch of the River Hain, one of the jointuretowns of the Countesses of Hainalt, much beautified and made a place of pleasures by Marie Queen of Hun●arie, to whom it was given by Charles the 5. (commonly called the Queen's Paradise) but burnt and utterly destroyed by the French, anno 1554. 15. Ath, seated on both sides of the Dender, a little, but a pleasant and wealthy town; here being held the staple of Linen for all this country, the cloth here sold amounting to 200000 crowns per annum.  
As for the History of Hainalt, the ancient Inhabitants thereof were the Nervii, the most valiant people of the Gauls, dwelling within this part of the Forest of Ardenne; which in the beginning of the Kingdom of the French, gave the title of Earl to many great and puissant Princes. Growing too great, and trusting too much to that greatness, they drew▪ upon themselves the jealousies of those mightier Princes, by whom at last Brunulph Earl of Ardenne was slain in battle, and his estate parceled out amongst his children: Alberic, surnamed the Orphelin, one of his younger sons, being by Sigeber● King of Mets or Austrasia, enfeoffed of this country, by the name and title of Earl of Hainalt, (H●nnevia the Latins call it.) Twice this Estate was added or united to that of Flanders. 1 In the person of Baldwin the 5. Earl of Flanders, succeeding hereunto in right of Richild his wife, daughter of Regnier the 3. 2 By the marriage of Baldwin the 6. of Hainalt, with Margaret Countess of Flanders, sister and heir of Philip of Elsas, Earl of Flanders. But being divided the first time by the usurpation of Flanders, wrested from Arnulph the 3. by his Uncle Robert, and the second time by the intrusion of John de Avesnes, natural son of Margaret the second daughter of the Emperor Baldwin, into the Estate and Earldom of Hainalt; it was finally annexed to Holland by the marriage of John de Avesnes to Adelize, or Aleide, daughter, (and at the last) heir of Florence the 4. Earl of Holland, Zealand, etc. from which it never was divided, till they were both incorporated into that of Burgundy. 

The EARLS of HAINALT.  
1 Alberic, one of the younger sons of Brunulph, Earl of Ardenne.  
2 Waultier, son of Alberic.  
3 Waultier II. son of Waultier the first.  
4 Wau●tier III. son of Waltier the second.  
5 Albon, in right of his wife, eldest daughter of Walter the third.  
6 Albon II. son of the said Albon by that wife.  
7 Manassier son of Albon the second.  
8 Regnier, son of Manassier.  
9 Regnier II. son of Regnier the first.  
10 Regnier III. son of Regnier the second.  
11 Baldwin V. of Flanders, in right of Richild his wife, the sole daughter to Regnier the third, was Earl of Hainalt.  
1070 12 Arnulph, son of Baldwin and Richild, despoiled of his estate and life by his Uncle Robert, who seized on the Earldom of Flanders.  
1071 13 Baldwin II. brother of Arnulph, succeeded in Hainalt.  
14 Baldwin III. son of Baldwin the second.  
15 Baldwin IV. son of Baldwin the third.  
16 Baldwin V. son of Baldwin the fourth.  
17 Baldwin VI of Hainalt, and VIII. of Flanders, in right of Margaret his wife, sister and he●r of Philip of Elsas, Earl of Flanders.  
1199 18 Baldwin VIII. of Hainalt and IX of Flanders, Emperor of Constantinople.  
1295 19 Joan Countess of Hainalt and Flanders, first married to Ferdinand of Portugal, and then to Thomas Earl of Savoy.  
1244 20 Margaret the younger sister of Joan, married to William of Bourbon Lord of Dampierre, by whom she had William and Guy both Earls of Flanders.  
21 John de Avesnes, base son of Margaret, begot before her marriage by Buschart her Guardian, the Porter of S. Peter's in L'Isle, by force and fraud extorted Hainalt from his Brethren born in lawful wedlock; and married Aleide daughter and heir of Florence the 4. Earl of Holland: whose successors in both Estates we shall meet with there, and amongst them, with William the 2. father of Queen Philippe, wife of Edward the 3. one of the most considerable of all the number.    
The Arms hereof are quarterly Flanders and Holland.   

4. The Bishopric of CAMBRAY. 
Cambray: & Namur.   
Southward with Hainalt lieth the Bishopric of CAMBRAY, containing a goodly Town and territory, reckoned of anciently as a part of Hainalt, now a state distinct; rather confederate with the Princes of the Netherlands, then subject to them.  
The Principal City hereof is Cambray (called in Latin, Cameracum) seated on both sides of the River Scheld; a fair, goodly and mighty City, full of people, many of which are rich Merchants, but all of them industrious, especially in making that fine linen Cloth, from hence called Camerac, or Cambric. The private buildings very fair, but the public much fairer, especially the Monasteries and other Churches, of which the most remarkable is that of our Lady, an ancient and sumptuous fabric, and the See Episcopal. From whence the country and territory hereunto adjoining, is called Cambresis, in which are divers Villages and places of importance; the chief of which is Chasteau Cambresis, six leagues from the City, remarkable for the treaty held there betwixt France and Spain anno 1559. in which a peace was happily settled amongst all the chief Princes of Christendom. 2. Avesnes le sec (so called to distinguish it from Avesnes in Hainalt) near which are digged excellent white stones for building, little inferior unto Marble.  
This Bishopric was founded in the person of S. Diogenes, a Grecian born, Anno 390. or thereabouts. Whose Successors in tract of time became so potent, that at the last the Bishop hereof became both the Lord spiritual and temporal of the Town and territory, honoured with the title of a Duke, and Prince of the Empire, and in the end made an Archbishop by Pope Paul the 4. anno 1562.  
The City of Cambray made Imperial by the German Emperors, was first by Henry the fifth given in protection to Robert of Jerusalem Earl of Flanders; afterwards settled and confirmed on all his Successors by the Emperor Frederick, anno 1164. Which notwithstanding, the French finding it convenient for them, divers times possessed it: but governing with too great insolence, they were driven out by the people, in the time of Lewis the 11. and the town yielded voluntarily unto Maximilian, governor of these countries for his son Philip. Charles the 5. in the year 1543. built a strong Citadel in it, pretending that he did it for defence of the Town against the French; but indeed to keep it for himself. After this it was taken by the Duke of Alenson, (brother of Henry the 3. of France) than Governor of the Netherlands, anno 1582. but regained not long after by the Spaniards, the Inhabitants giving up the Town for want of victuals. Since that continually possessed by the Spaniards; but so, that the people still enjoy their ancient privileges, and are governed by their own laws and Bishops.   

5. NAMUR.  
The Earldom of NAMUR hath on the East Hainalt, on the West the Bishopric of Liege, on the North Brabant●, and on the South Luxenbourg. The country very small, containing only 182. Villages and four walled Towns; but plentiful of all commodities, and replenished with a loyal and industrious people. Particularly the air hereof is very wholesome; the country watered with many rivers and pleasant brooks, (amongst which the Sambre, and the Maes) which besides the benefit of portage, yield great plenty of fish. The hills, whereof it hath not many, clothed with woods, abounding with all kind of fowl and venison; the valleys eminently fruitful of all sorts of grain, rich mines of Lead, quarries of Marble of all colours, as also of Porphyry or Jasper, and great plenty of Coal; but in mines of Iron so abounding and that continually hammered by a painful people, that Vulcan's forge may seem to be restored to the world again, and seated here; which as it makes the people wealthy, so it keeps them from idleness. And as for the Nobility, they are generally valiant, given to all military exercises fit for their degrees, and very affectionate to their Prince; the greatest virtue of a subject.  
Walled Towns it hath but four, as before was said, that is to say, 1. Namur, the chief of all the Province, where resideth the Council for the country, from which lieth no appeal but to Machlyn only. Seated between two hills on both sides of the Sambre, which doth there fall into the Meuse. The City rich, inhabited for the most part by the Nobility, defended with a strong Castle, and beautified with a fair Cathedral, founded here in the Church of S. Albin anno 1559. Not far off in the Villages of Ardenne and Monstier, are two Nunneries of Ladies, like those of Montz and Maubuige, spoken of in Hainalt. 2. Bovines upon the Meuse, sacked by the French anno 1554. since repaired, and fortified. 3. Charlemont, a small Town, but of most exact fortifications, built by Charles the 5. anno 1555. to oppose the French, who had then possessed themselves of Mariemburg, a Town of Halnalt. 4. Valencourt, a little Town, but standing in a goodly and fruitful country. Of the Villages the chief is Dove, seated on the Meuse or Maes, fortified with a strong Castle, and honoured with the title of a Viscountie; 2. Floren, 3. Vascie, and 4. Sausin, of much beauty and greatness.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this country were a part of the Nervii; first made an Earldone by some of the descendants of the sons of Clodius the second King of the French, who being dispossessed of their Father's kingdom by Meroveus, the Master of his horse (to whom he had committed the guardianship or tuition of them,) were forced to betake themselves to the most defensible parts of the great forest of Ardenne, 
Luxenbourg.  and the parts adjoining: where they founded the great Earldom of Ardenne: divided in succeeding times into many parcels, of which this was one. By what and by how many Earls possessed, I am yet to learn: but sold it was by John the last Earl unto Philip the Good; continuing ever since in the house of Burgundy, or in their right in those of Austria and Spain.  
The Arms hereofate Or, a Lion Sable, debruised with a Bend Gules.   

6. LUXENBOURG.  
LUXENBOURG is bounded on the East with the Mosette, and the land of Triers; on the West with the Meuse or Maes, and a branch of the forest of Ardenne; on the North with Luyckland, Namur, and a part of Hainalt; and on the South with the Duchy of Lorraine. Divided into two parts, the Eastern part being called Fanenne, fruitful of corn, and yielding withal some wines, some mines, and many excellent quarries of goodly stone; the Western called the Ardenne, a remainder of that spacious Forest which sometimes overshadowed all this country, barren of corn, but very plentiful of Venison, and of Fowl good store. The people of this country are not all of one language, those nearer Germany, as in Luxenbourg, Arlune, Rodemark, Theonville, and the rest on that side, speaking the Dutch; as those of Ivois, Mommedi, Morvill, and Damvilliers, with the rest bordering on France, do a corrupt or broken French. In which regard the plead held before the Council residing in Luxenbourg, are made in both Languages, that so they may be understood by all that have business there. But the Nobility and Gentry (of which there is more in this Province then in any other of the seventeen) speak both Tongues perfectly. A breed of men full of virtue, courtesy, and hospitality towards one another, and of great truth and faith to their Prince: but reckoned for the worst Landlords in all these countries, governing their Subjects and Tenants like the Peasants of France, contrary to the use and liberties of the rest of the Netherlands. Both sorts, as well the Nobility as the Commons, hate both Law and Lawyers; and for the most part end their controversies amongst themselves, without any process.  
The whole country containeth in compass about 70. leagues, or 200. Italian miles, in which are comprehended 23. walled Towns, and 1168. Burroughs and Villages. The principal of which are 1. Lucembourg, built in the place where anciently stood the Augusta Veromanduorum of Ptolemie; and took this new name quasi Lucis burgum, from the image of the Sun there worshipped, seated on the Alsnutius, or Alze, which runneth through it; large and of a strong situation, but not very well built; nor yet recovered of the spoils which the long wars betwixt the French and the Spaniard brought upon it, before the treaty of Cambray. However it is the chief Town of the Province, honoured with the residence of the Council hereof, and the Sepulchre of John K. of Bohemia, slain in the battle of Crecie against the English, anno 1348. 2. Arlune, on the top of an high hill, so called quasi Aralunae, from an Altar consecrated to the Moon in the times of Paganism. 3. Theonville, on the Moselle, over which it hath a goodly bridge; a frontier Town near Metz, and the border of Lorraine; and for that cause made marvellous strong, but taken by the French anno 1558. and restored the next year by the peace of Cambray. 4. Bostoack, a fair Town, and very well traded; commonly called the Paris of Ardenne, in which part it standeth. 5. Mommedi, on an high hill at the foot of which runneth the River Chiers. 6. Danvilliers, once a very strong place also; both taken and ransacked by the French anno 1552. 7. Morville upon the Chiers, the one half whereof belongeth to the Duke of Lorraine, the other to the King of Spain, as Duke of Luxenbourg for which cause called Laville commune. 8. Rock di March, fortified with a strong Castle. 9 Ivoys, a place once of great importance, sacked by the French anno 1552. and restored by the treaty of Cambray, on condition it should never more be walled. 10. La Ferte on the Chiers, a Town of the same condition.  
In the skirts of this country towards France standeth the Dukedom of Bovillon, and the principality of Sedan; distinct Estates, and in the hands of several Owners; yet so that the Sovereign of Sedan is styled Duke of Bovillon. Towns of most note, 1. Bovillon the chief Town, built on the side of an hill near the River Senoy; a fair large City, and beautified with a goodly Castle on the top of an hill; so strong as well by Art as Nature, that before the use of great Ordnance it was held impregnable; but since it hath been often taken, sometimes by the Emperors, and finally anno 1552. by the French King. It hath command over a fair and goodly Territory, honoured with the title of a Duchy, and is now in the hands of the Bishops of Liege; to one of whose Predecessors named Obert, it was sold by Godfrey of Bovillon Duke of Lorraine, at his going to the Holy-land. 2. Sedan or Esdain, situate on the banks of the Maes or Mosa, the usual residence of the Prince, a fine neat Town, well fortified, and planted with 80. brass Pieces of Ordnance: honoured also with a seat of Learning, which being of a middle nature betwixt a Grammar School and an University, is in the Criticism of these times, called a Scholaillustris, to which men may send their children to learn good letters, though they can take in them no Degrees, that being a privilege reserved only to the Universities. So that these Schools may be somewhat like our Collegiate Churches of Westminster, Winchester, and Eton but that the younger Students in these last named, are more restrained to Rhetoric and Grammar, then in the other; though these more liberally endowed for the encouragement and reward of learning, than all the Scholae illus●res of either Germany. 3. Loni. 4. Mouson, (Musonium it is called in Latin) a Town of great strength and consequence on the River Maes, upon some jealousies of State, garrisoned by the French (as some other good Peers of this Dukedom are.) 
Bovillon.  5. Sausi, and 6. Florenge, which two last came unto the Princes of Sedan by the Lady Joan the wife of Robert Earl of Mark, and mother of that Robert Earl of Mark who first of all this house was honoured with the title of Duke of Bovillon. All taken and leveled with the ground by Charles the 5. in his war against Robert Earl of Mark, and Duke of Bovillon; but afterwards repaired on the peace ensuing. 7. Jamais, a Town of great importance on the edge of Lorraine; by the Duke whereof in the year 1589▪ it was taken after a long siege from the Lady Charlotte, the last Heir: General of this House; and laid unto that Dukedom as a part thereof.  
As for the Dukedom of Bovillon it was anciently a part of the great Earldom of A●denne: by Geoffrey of Ardenne Duke of Bovillon, united to the Dukedom of Lorraine, at his investiture in that estate, anno 1004. By Geoffrey the 2. of that name, and fifth Duke of Lorraine, it was given in Dower to his Sister Ida, at her marriage with Eusta● Earl of Boulogne in Picardy; to whom he brought the famous Godfrey (surnamed of Bovillon, because Duke thereof, before he did succeed into that of Lorraine) renowned for the conquest of Jerusalem, and the Holy-land. Who afterwards succeeding in the Dukedom of Lorraine, sold his Estates of Bovillon unto Obert Bishop of Liege, as before was said: by whom and his Successors both the Estate and Title of Duke of Bovillon, was peaceably enjoyed, till the yea● 1530, or thereabouts: when Eberha●d of Mark, Bishop and Cardinal of Liege, sold it to Robert Earl of Mark his brother, descended from Engelbert Earl of Mark, and a daughter of the house of Aremberg, who brought with her Sedan, Jamais, and others of the Towns spoken of before. But Robert being worsted by Charles the 5. (for whom he was too weak an enemy) the Town of Bovillon being taken by the conquering Emperor, was afterwards restored to the Bishops, and nothing but the title of Dukes of Bovillon left to the Princes of Sedan. And that he might be able to hold Sedan, this Robert was fain to return again to the protection of the French (as his Ancestors had done before) and died anno 1535. leaving h●s titles and estate unto Robert his son, one of the Marshals of France: whose grandson, called also Robert, being a dear friend and companion of Henry of Bourbon K. of Navarre, and afterwards of France also, dying without issue at Geneva, anno 1588., committed to him the disposal of his estates and of the Lady Charlotte his only Sister. And he so well discharged his trust, that (having settled his own affairs) he gave the Lady in marriage to Henry de la Tour, Viscount of Turene in France, one who had done him very good service in the course of his long war against the Leaguers, and with her the possession of Sedan, and the title of Bovillon; whose posterity do still enjoy it. As for the Town of Bovillon itself, being taken from Duke Robert by Charles the 5. and from the Imperialists by the French, anno 1552. as before was said, it was at last restored unto the Bishop of Liege by the treaty of Cambray, anno 1559. but without prejudice to the title of the Prince of Sedan. So that at this time there are no fewer than three which write themselves Dukes of Bovillon, viz. the Bishop of Liege who hath possession of the Town; the house of de la Tour, who is invested in Sedan and some other pieces; and finally the Heirs Males of the collatorall line of the house of Mark, who hold some other parts and places of this estate.  
But to return again to the Duchy of Luxembourg, it was at first a part of the great Earldom of Ardenne; dismembered from it in the time of the Emperor Otho the first, by Sigefride the son of Ricuinus Prince thereof; who in the division of that estate amongst his Brethren had this for his portion, with the title of Earl, denominated from the Castle (now the town) of Luxembourg, selected by him for the seat of his principality. Of his Successors there is little to be found upon good record, until the time of Henry the 1. father of Henry the 7. Emperor of Germany, and of a Royal progeny of Kings and Princes, two of the which are most considerable, though all of them of eminent quality in their several times, viz. 1. Henry elected and crowned Emperor, by the name of Henry the 7. said to be poisoned by a Friar in the Holy Chalice, to prevent some designs he had against the Pope, in asserting the Imperial power in Italy: 2. John the son of this Henry, chosen King of Bohemia, in regard of his marriage with Elizabeth daughter of Wenceslaus, King thereof; the possession of which Realm he left unto his Posterity advanced unto a Dukedom by Charles the 4. the eldest son of this John, in the person of Wenceslaus his younger brother. What else concerns it, we shall find in this following Catalogue of 

EARLS and DUKES of LUXEMBOURG.  
1 Sigif●ide, the son of Ricuine, Prince of Ardenne.  
2 Henry Earl of Luxembourg, slain in the quarrel of Rainold Earl of Gueldres, contending with John Duke of Brabant for the Duchy of Limbourg.  
3 Henry II. by means of his brother Baldwin Elector of Triers, chosen Emperor of the Germans, the 7. of that name, anno 1308. first crowned at Aken, and afterwards at Rome; one of the last Emperors that meddled in the affairs of Italy.  
1313 4 John, son of Henry II. Earl of Luxembourg, married Elizabeth daughter of Winceslaus the elder, King of Bohemia; of which he was upon that marriage elected and crowned King, anno 1311. in the life of his father, slain by the English in the battle of Crecie, anno 1346.  
1346 5 Wenceslaus the younger son of John, created Duke of Luxembourg by his elder brother Charles the 4. Emperor and King of Bohemia.  
1383 6 Wenceslaus II. 
●imbourg.  eldest son of the said Charles the 4. Emperor and King of Bohemia also, succeeded his Uncle in the Dukedom.  
1419 7 Sigismond, brother of Wenceslaus, succeeded Wenceslaus in all his estates; to which he added the Crown of Hungary by the marriage of Mary daughter of King Lewis the first.  
8 Elizabeth, daughter of John Duke of Garlitz, (a Town of Lusatia) the brother of Sigismond, by the gi●t of Sigismond her Uncle, being then alive; the better to fit her for the bed of 〈◊〉 of Bourgogn Duke of Brabant; after whose decease she married John the 3. Earl of Hamalt, Holland, etc. But having no issue by either of them, she sold her interest in this Dukedom to Philip the Good in pursuance of the contract and agreement made at her first marriage, for settling this estate in the house of Burgundy.    
The Arms are B. six Barrulets A, supporting a Lion, G, crowned and armed, Or.   

7. LIMBOURG.  
The greatest of the Estates of Belgium for extent of territory at the time of their incorporating in the house of Burgundy, was that of Brabant, comprehending 5. of the 17. Provinces, that is to say, the Dukedom of Limbourg and Brabant, the Marquisate of the holy Empire, the Earldom of Namurce, and the signory of Macklyn.  
1. LIMBOURG, hath on the East the Dukedom of Gulick in High Germany; on the West the Bishopric of Liege: on the North, Brabant; and on the South, the Dukedom of Luxembourg. The Soil fruitful of all necessary commodities, excepting wines, the want whereof is recompensed with most excellent wheat, great store of sewell, and plenty of the best iron mines in all these countries: all which commodities it hath of so great excellency in their several kinds, that it is said of them proverbially, that their Bread is better than bread, their Fire hotter than fire, and their Iron harder than iron. It is also well stored with medicinable simples, and enriched with a mine of Copperas, (by Pliny called Lapis ●rosus, lib. 34. c. 10.) which being incorporated with brass makes Latin, and increaseth the brass by one third part. Lapis aerosus multum aeris habet, & ex eo fuso fit aes, as that Author hath it.  
It is one of the least of the Belgic Provinces, containing in it but 125. Villages, and no more than five walled Towns or Cities, viz. 1. Limbourg, which gives name to the whole Estate, pleasantly seated on an hill amongst shady woods, under which runneth the River Wesdo, which having watered the whole country emptieth itself into the Maes; well built, and fortified with a very strong Castle, mounted upon a steep Precipice, of no easy access. 2. Walkenbourg, called by the French Fauquemont, a reasonable fair Town, with a large territory, two Dutch miles from Maestricht; conquered from Reynold Lord hereof by John the 3. Duke of Brabant. 3. Dalem a little Town with a Castle, the territory thereof extending beyond the Maes; conquered by Henry Duke of Brabant, of that name the second. 4. Rhode le Duck, a little old Town with as old a Castle, half a league from Walkenbourg. 5. Carpen, situate between Gulick and Colen, beautified with a Collegiate Church, and a strong Castle, in which there is a Governor with a good Garrison for defence of the place. Each of these Towns hath jurisdiction on the parts adjoining; but with appeal unto the Chancery of Brabant.  
The ancient inhabitants of this ●act, and the Bishopric of Liege adjoining, were the Eburones. When it was first made an Earldom, I am yet to seek: but of an Earldom it was made a Dukedom by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1172. Henry one of the Dukes hereof, married his daughter Margaret to Godfrey the 3. Duke of Brabant, which gave that house some colour to pretend unto it▪ backed with a better title on the death of an other Henry, the last Duke of Limbourg, whose next heir Adelph sold it to John Duke of Braba●t, pretending to it in the right of the former marriage, anno 1293. But Reynold Earl of Gueldres, thinking himself to have a better title than Adolph, in right of Ermingrade his wife the daughter of Herman, a late Duke hereof, put in his plea, and challenged it by force of Arms: but being vanquished and taken prisoner by the said Duke John in the battle of Woranem, was fain for his release, to release all his claim and title to the Dukedom of Limbourg; after that quietly enjoyed by the Dukes of Brabant, till they fell both together to the house of Burgundy.  
The Arms hereof are Argent, a Lion Barrie of ten pieces, Or, and Gules.   

8. LVICK-LAND, OR The Bishopric of LIEGE.  
Westward of Limbourg, but a far mightier estate than it, lieth LVICK-LAND, as the Dutch, or the Bishopric of LIEGE, (Le●diensis) as the Latin and French writers call it: anciently under the protection of the Dukes of Brabant, and afterwards of the Princes of the house of Burgundy, as Lords of that country. By some accounted of, and described as a part of Germany; but for the reasons before mentioned I shall place it here: 
Liege.  environed on all sides with the Belgic Provinces that is to say, with the Dukedom of Limbourg on the East, with Brabant on the North and West; on the South with Luxembourg.  
The Air hereof is very wholesome, and the Earth as fruitful, abounding with all kind of grain and fruits, some store of wine; and as for flesh, fish, fowl, and venison, it hath very great plenty, and that too of an excellent taste. But the chief riches of this Country is under ground, consisting in mines of Lead, and Iron, and some few of Gold; quarries of Albasier mingled with all sorts of Marble; rich veins of Brimstone, and unexhaustible pits of Coal, which last it hath in such abundance, that there is digged within the compass of one league of the City of Liege, not only sufficient for that great City, but so much overplus as being sold at mean prices about the country amounts unto 100000. ducats of yearly value. The Coal much sweeter than elsewhere, and of a nature contrary to all other Coal, in that it is kindled with water, and quenched with oil: and the strong fervour of it taken off by casting salt on it.  
The whole country containeth 24 walled Towns, and 1800. Villages, the principal of which are 1 Liege or Luick, (in Latin Leodium) situate in a pleasant valley environed with hills, the Meuse entering it in two branches, accompanied with four lesser Riverets, which make in it many delightful Lands. The compass of it about four miles, the ordinary buildings very fair, all built of stone; the Bishop's palace a magnificent and sumptuous piece: the Churches in number forty, of which eight are Collegiate, 32. Parochial; all of them for their riches and bounty excelling all in any City of France or Germany. Besides these, there are so many Convents, Monasteries, and religious houses about the Town, that taking all together they amount to an hundred: all of them of such fair revenues, so well endowed, and the Religious persons there of so great authority, that it is cailed the Paradise of Priests, and that deservedly. It is also an University of good Antiquity, wherein were Students at one time, 9 King's sons, 24. Duke's sons, 29. Earls sons, besides Barons and Gentlemen: the greatest part of which were Canons of the Church of S. Lambert, which is the Cathedral of the City. Yet notwithstanding it hath tasted of the malice of fortune as well as others, being first destroyed by the Danes, then by the Normans, twice taken and once destroyed by Charles of Burgundy, anno 1468. Subject it is unto the Bishop as Lord temporal of it; from whom (being long since made an Imperial Ctiy) there lieth an Appeal to the Chamber of Spires. 2. Dinand upon the Meuse, near Namur, of very great traffic till destroyed by Charles of Burgundy, in the same year with Liege: hardly recovered of which wounds, it was again sacked by K. Henry the 2. of France, anno 1854. 3. Maeseck, upon the Meuse or Maes also, a league from whence is the fair Nunnery of Thuren, of the same nature with that of Mentz, and others spoken of before: the like to which there is near 4. Bilsen, another Town of this Bishopric; the Abbesses of each having the privilege of coining both gold and silver. 5. Lootz, by the Dutch called Borclom, in the county of Diostein; made a county in the time of Charles the Great, the title and possession of Vgier the Dane, so famous in the History of Galen of France, and others of the old Romances. 6. Franchimont, which gives the title to a marquis of the Bishop of Liege. 7. Centron or S. Truden, a fair Town, so called of the Abbey, dedicated to that Saint. 8. Hue or Hoey, so called of a violent River, which there runs into the Meuse. 9 Tungres, the chief City of the Tongri, (which together with the Eburones were) once the Inhabitants of this tract in which are still the ruins of a Temple consecrated to Hercules. Anciently an Episcopal See, translated hence to Maestreicht, and at last to Liege: and in those times so great, and of such renown, that Attila the Hun destroyed in it 100 Churches: now but a very small Town, and not worth the mentioning but for these Antiquities. Eight leagues from hence, amongst the shady thickets of the Forest of Ardenne, is that so celebrated 10. Villages, and those famous hot Baths, frequented from all the places of Europe, called the Spa: not so pleasant, as wholesome; not so wholesome, as famous. Yet are they good for sundry diseases, as the Tertian Ague, and Dropsy, the Stone, the exulceration of the Lungs, the Sciatique, etc. They are of most virtue in July, because they are then hottest, and to such as taste them. they relish much of iron, from some iron mines, it seemeth, through which the waters run, which feed them. These Baths of great fame in the time of Pliny, who doth thus describe them. Tungri Civitas fontem habet insignem, plurimis bullis stillantem, ferruginei saporis, quod ipsum non nisi in fine potus intelligitur. Purgat hic corpora, febres tertianas discutit, calculorumque vitia. So he, lib. 31. cap. 2. agreeably to the nature of them at this present time.  
As for the Bishopric of Liege, it was first founded at Tungres, as before was said; after the sackage of which City by Attila, removed anno 498. by S. Servatius unto Maestricht. But the people of Maestricht having Martyred S. Lambert, than Bishop, anno 710. by Hubert his designed Successor, with the leave of Pope Constantine, it was translated to this place, and a Cathedral Church here founded by the name of S. Lambert. His Successors did so well husband their advantages, that they did not only buy the Dukedom of Bovillon, but the City and territory of Liege, sold unto Speutus and Obertus successively Bishops of it, by Godfrey of Bovillon, Duke of Lorraine (of which Dukedom it was formerly a part or member) at his departure hence to the Holy-land: not much increased since that in lands, though he be in titles, the Bishop being styled a Prince of the Empire, Duke of Bovillon, marquis of Franchimont, Earl of Lootz, and Hasbain. Yet are not his ordinary Revenues above 30000. ducats yearly, his subjects living very well under him, at easy rents, and growing for the most part unto good estates: An argument whereof may be, that when the Leigeois had rebelled against Philip the Good, Duke of Burgundy, (under whose Cleintele they were, as Duke of Brabant) they bought their peace of him at the price of 600000 Florins of the Rhine, to be paid in six years. After which time again rebelling against Charles the warlike (as they have been observed to be the most rebellious City in Europe excepting Gaunt) they were able to wage 30000 men, 
Brabant.  but not being able to withstand the forces of their Lord Protector, they fell into that miserable destruction spoken of before. Since that time they have lived with more moderation under the protection of the Princes of the house of Austria: but counted neutral in the quarrels betwixt the King of Spain, and the States confederate, as formerly between the Spaniard and the French, though many times they suffer in the contestations.   

9 BRABANT. 10. The MARQUISATE, And 11. MACHLIN.  
THese I have joined together, though distinct estates, because they have a long time followed the same fortune, and that the two last do no otherwise differ from the first, than the parts from the whole: the Marquisate, and Machlin, being reckoned as parts of Brabant, and included in it.  
9 BRABANT is bounded on the East, with Luickland, or the Bishopric of Liege; on the West, with the River Scheld, and a part of Flanders; on the North, with the Maes, which severeth it from Holland, and Guelderland; and on the South, with Hainalt, Namur, and part of Luickland.  
The Air hereof is generally very wholesome, and good, and the Soil naturally fruitful, excepting Kempenland, (being the parts hereof lying towards the North, which being barren of itself, is made indifferently fertile by keeping cattle, Soiling the ground, and other arts of good Husbandry. The people live in most freedom, and are the best privileged of any in Belgium; A thing for which they are more beholding to the Prince's goodness, than their own great wits; being noted to be none of the wisest, especially as they grow in age, when most men learn wisdom. Brabanti quo magis seneseunt, eo magis stultescunt, as Erasmus telleth us.  
The length hereof, from S. Gertrudenberg to Genblaurs, North and South, is 22 Dutch, or Germane miles; from Helmont to Berghen ap Some, East and West, 20 of the same miles; the whole compass 80. Within which circuit are contained 26 walled Towns; and Villages with Parish Churches 718. of which, the odd 18 called Franks, or Market-towns, enjoy the privileges of walled Towns, or Cities, though unwalled themselves.  
Places of most importance in it, are 1. Shertogen Bosch, or the Bosch, as the Dutch; Bois le Duc, or Bolduc, as the French; and Silva Ducis, or Boscum Ducis, as the Latins call it: each name derived according to the several languages, from a pleasant wood belonging to the Dukes of Brabant, where the Town now stands, situate on a little River called Deese, some two leagues from the Maes, near the borders of Guelderland: a large and well built Town, very strongly fortified, and of great trade for Clothing, here being made yearly, in the time of Lewis Guicciardine 20000 Clothes, worth 200000 Crowns to the Clother or Draper; made an Episcopal See anno 1559. the Cathedral, which is fixed in the Church of S. John, being fair and large, and beautified with one of the goodliest Dial's in the Christian world. This is the principal town of Brabant (properly and distinctly so called) comprehending under it the four Countries of Kempenland, Maesland, Peeland, and Osterwick; and was taken by the Confederate Estates from the King of Spain, after a long and chargeable siege, Anno 1628. 2. Tilmont, on the little River Geet, once the chief of Brabant, but long since decayed. Arschot on the little River Dennere, which gives the title of a Duke to them of the Noble house of Croy; the Dukes hereof (advanced unto that honour by Charles the fifth) being men of greatest Revenue and Authority of any in Belgium. 4. Bergen ap Zome, so called from the River Zome, upon which it is situate, about half a league from the influx of it into the Scheld, and not far from the Sea, which gives it a reasonable good Haven. A town of great strength by nature, but more strongly fortified: Famous for being made a Marquisate by Charles the fifth, anno 1553. more for the notable resistance which it made to the Marquis Spinola, anno 1622. 5. Breda, upon the river Merck, a Town pleasantly seated, well fortified, and of great Revenue, having under it the Town and Territorie of Steenberg, the franchise of Rosindale, and the signory of Osterhout: the residence, Barony, and chief town of the Princes of Orange, from whom being taken by the Spaniard in the beginning of those wars, it was again recovered by some venturous Gentlemen, who hiding themselves in a Boat covered over with Turf, were conveyed into the Castle, which they easily mastered, and made the Prince Lord of it again. After retaken by the Spaniard, anno 1625. but now in the possession of its natural owners. 6. Diest, on the River Dennere, a good town, and of a large territory and jurisdiction, belonging to the Prince of Orange, who had it in exchange for some other lands of the Duke of Cleve; and in right hereof is Burgrave of the City of Antwerp. 7. Grinbergen, an ancient Barony, with a large jurisdiction, descendible on the youngest son only, after the manner of Burgh English, as our Lawyers call it. 8. Gertrudenberg, standing on the Douge, not far from the influx of it into the Maes, the furthest town in the North of Brabant, where it joins to Holland: which makes it a matter of dispute betwixt those Provinces, to which of them it doth belong. A town of great trade for fishing, plenty of Salmon, and Sturgeons being taken here; but of Shads especially, whereof 18000 are sometimes caught in a day, salted, and sent abroad into foreign parts: It acknowledgeth the Prince of Orange for the Lord thereof; as doth also 9 Grave, a good town upon the Maes, 
The Marquisate.  bought by these Princes of the King of Spain with consent of the States; without whose approbation, no part of the Domain is to be dismembered. 10. Maestreicht (in Latin, Trajectum ad Mosam) so called of a ferry over the Maes in former times, supplied now with a goodly Stone bridge in the place thereof. A fair and goodly town, beautified with two Collegiate Churches, in one of which the Dukes of Brabant were always Canons, subject in part to the Bishop of Liege, and partly to the Duke of Brabant: The children are subject to that Prince to whom the Mother was subject at the tim● 〈◊〉 the Birth, without relation to the Father, according to that Maxim of the Civil Law, 〈◊〉 sequitur ventrem: And if a stranger come to live there, he must declare to which of the two he will be subject, yet is the Duke of Brabant the chief Sovereign of it, he only having the power of Coinage, and of granting pardon to Offenders: and as a town of this Dukedom, besieged and taken by the confederate States, Anno 1632.  
Here is also within the limits of this Dukedom, the town and signory of Ravesiem, situate on the banks of the Maes, held by the Dukes of Cleve, of the Duke of Brabant; but no otherwise subject; and on the same River, the Town and County of Horn, a Fief Imperial, beautified with a strong Castle, and a goodly Territory, in which is Wiert; the residence of the Earls of Horn descended of the ancient house of Montmorencie in France.  
2. THE MARQVISATE OF THE EMPIRE, so called, because the farthest bounds and Marches of the Germane Empire frontizing on Flanders, which appertained unto the Sovereignty of the Crown of France, comprehendeth four of the best Towns in Brabant, with very large and spacious Territories adjoining to them, viz. 1. Louvain, on the River Dyle, about four English miles in compass, but in that compass much of the ground is taken up with Vineyards, Gardens, Meadows, and pleasant Fields, which make the situation far more delightful, then if all built, and peopled. It was the Mother town of Brabant, and sometimes gave the title of an Earl to the Dukes hereof: afterwards made an University by Duke John the 4. anno 1426, wherein are contained about 20 Colleges, such as they be; much privileged, and enriched with pensions for public Readers, by King Philip the 2. 2. Brussels (Bruxella) the seat of the ancient Dukes of Brabant, and of the Dukes of Burgundy also, after they came to be Lords of these Countries, seated upon the Sin, and other sweet springs and Riverets, which make it one of the sweetest situations in all Europe: having withal, a goodly channel made by Art from Brussels, to the River Deal, and from thence to the Scheld; the charge whereof amounted to ●00000 Crowns. It is of the same compass with Louvain, the buildings sumptuous, and the town very rich; not only in regard that it is the ordinary seat of the Prince, or his Regent, and of the Chancery for all Brabant, and the Duchy of Limbourg; but in regard of the rich Manufactures of Armour and Cloth of Arras, of Silk, Gold, and Silver, which are there industriously pursued. 3. Nivello, on the borders of Hainalt, in a very rich and fruitful soil, remarkable for the abundance of fine Linen, which is therein made, but most of all for a very rich Nunnery (or rather Nursery) of noble Ladies; of the same nature with those of Mentz, and others before described. 4. Antwerp, situate in a goodly plain on the River Scheld, above 17 leagues from the Sea, but furnished with eight Channels cut out of the River for the transport of Commodities, one of the which is capable of 100 great Ships, the private buildings very handsome, but the public sumptuous; the chief whereof were weckoned the Church of Nostre Dame, the Bourse, the Townhouse, and the house of the Easterlings, or Eastern Merchants, well peopled, and of so great Trade in the former times, that it was held to be the richest Empory of the Christian world: the commodities here bought and sold, amounting to more in time month, then that of Venice in two years. The causes of which sudden growth and increase of Trading, are said to be these, 1. The two Marts holden here every year, either of them during six weeks, in which time no man's person could be arrested, or his goods distrained. 2. The King of Portugal having in the year 1503. diverted the course of Merchandise from Alexandria and Venice to the City of Lisbon, kept here his Factories, and sent hither his Spices, and other Indian Commodities; for which cause the Merchants, in the year 1516. forsook Bruges in Flanders, and settled here. And 3. many of the Nobility and Gentry during the long and bloody wars betwixt France and Spain, forsook their Country houses, and repaired hither; by means whereof Antwerp, in a very little time grew bigger by 3000 houses, than it had been formerly. But as the growth hereof was sudden, so the fall was sensibler occasioned through the yoking of it with a Citadel by the Duke of Alva, which made Merchants afraid to resort any longer thither, as a place of little freedom, and less security: but chiefly by blocking up the Haven, and intercepting the trade at Sea, by the more powerful Hollanders, which hath removed this great traffic to Amsterdam, and other towns of their Country. So that now the chief support of it is the reputation which it hath of being an Imperial City, the place of receipt for the King's Revenues, and a Bishops See founded here in the year 1559. which draweth hither some resort of Lawyers and Churchmen.  
3. The signory of MACHLIN, consisteth only of that City, and a small Territory of nine Villages adjoining to it. The City seated on both sides of the River Deal, which ebbeth and floweth to the town and a league above it: and running through the very midst, maketh in it a number of small Islands, to the great ornament and commodity of it. A goodly town, containing seven Parish Churches besides the Cathedral, being the See of an Archbishop founded here in the year 1559. strong in regard it may be easily drowned on all sides: and of great wealth by reason of the many manufactures of linen, great Artillery of Brass and Iron, Bells, painted works and others of like use and ornament. And being situate in a manner in the Centre of Brabant, distant four Leagues from Antwerp, Louvain, 
Machlyn.  and Brussels, was made by Charles the Warlike (who loved the place) the ordinary seat of the great Council of State, to which appeals are made from the other Provinces. But yet more beautiful in former times than it is at the present, the City being much defaced by firing 200 barrels of powder, anno 1546. and by the ●ackage of of the Spaniard, by whom it was taken by force, anno 1572. most memorable at this time for a famous Nunnery like to that of Nivelle, wherein are sometimes 1600 Nuns, who when they please may leave their Cloister and be married. A town though in Brabant, yet not of it, but a State distinct: for which cause many 〈◊〉 men at the time of their childbirth, use to lay down their b●llies in some Village of Brabant, 〈◊〉 their children may be capable of the privileges and immunities of that country. The principal of the Villages is named Leest, or Heyst, pleasantly seated on an hill, the residue of the Burroughs lying at the foot thereof. Both Town and Villages the patrimony heretofore of the noble family of the Bertholds: which failing in the person of Gualther, slain in the battle of Worancan by John Duke of Brabant; it sell the one half to the Bishop of Liege, who sold his moiety to John the second Duke of Brabant, the other to the Earl of Gueldres, who in the year 1333. sold his part unto Lewis of Malain, Earl of Flanders. But he sold nothing but the title, John the third Duke of Brabant having seized upon it, and added it to his estate: the occasion of some quarrels between those Princes, composed by the marriage of that Lewis with the heir of Brabant.  
But to return again unto Brabant itself, the ancient inhabitants hereof, were the Aduatici, and some part of the Tungri: accounted by the Romans a part of the Province of Germania secunda; and by the French a Province of the Kingdom of East-France, or Austrasia, when it was a Kingdom; as after of the great Dukedom of Lorraine, containing then the modern Dukedoms of Lorraine, Gulick, and Brabant, with the lands of Luick. Brabant at that time had the name of Basse (or Low) Lorraine, and as a memory thereof, there is a Court for criminal and civil causes held at Genappe (one of the Franks or Market towns of Brabant) called Lafoy Court de Lorraine to this day. A Dukedom first erected by the Emperor Otho the 2. who gave it to Charles of France son of Gerburg his Aunt, by Lewis surnamed Transmarine, King of France; reserving out of it as a Dower for his said Aunt Gerburg, the towns and territories of Louvain, Brussels, Nivelle, and Antwerp, lying in the Marches of his Dominions towards France, which he honoured with the title of the Marquisat of the holy Empire, anno 981. Gerburg the sister, and after the death of her brother Otho, the heir of Charles, disseised of Lorraine and the right of that fair inheritance by the Emperor Henry (who gave it to Geoffrey of Ardenne) succeeded her Grandmother the first Gerburg in the towns and territories of Louvain, Nivelle, and Brussels, which she conveyed in marriage to Lambert, one of the sons of Reyner of Hainalt, with the title of Earl of Louvain. Henry his son having made himself Master of Antwerp also, was by that means possessed of the whole Marquisate, but still retained the title of Earl of Louvain. Godfrey the 6. Earl, having enlarged the bounds of his Dominions, was by the Emperor Henry the 5. anno 1108. created the first Duke of Brabant: whether so named from the old Bratuspantium, which Caesar placeth in this tract, or that it was so called quasi Brachland, that is to say, a barren soil, is not yet determined. John the first Duke of that name, added hereunto the Duchy of Limburg, and John the third, the signory of Malines or Machlin. How it became united to the house of Burgundy, is to be seen by the ensuing Catalogue of the 

The EARLS of LOUVAIN, and DUKES of BRABANT.  
104 1 Lambert, one of the sons of Regnier Earl of Hainalt, made the first Earl of Louvain in right of Gerburg his wife.  
1015 2 Henry the son of Lambert, who took Antwerp, making it the head City of the Marquisate of the holy Empire.  
1046 3 Lambert II. son of Henry.  
1054 4 Henry II. son of Lambert the second.  
1068 5 Henry III. son of Henry the second.  
6 Henry IV. son of Henry the third.  
1096 7 Godfrey surnamed Barbatus, brother of Henry the fourth, created the first Duke of Brabant by the Emperor Henry the fifth, anno 1108. father of Adelize, the second wife of our Henry the first.  
1140 8 Godfrey or Geoffrey II. son of Godfrey.  
1143 9 Godfrey or Geoffrey III. son of Godfrey the second.  
1183 10 Henry V. son of Godfrey the third.  
1230 11 Henry VI surnamed the Good, son of Henry the fifth.  
1247 12 Henry VII. surnamed the Magnanimous, by whose marriage with Sophia daughter of Lewis the sixth, Landgrave of Turingia, the Lantgravedome of Hassia came into this house, invested on it in the person of Henry his son, by the said Sophia.  
1260 13 John, son of Henry the seventh, took in the Dukedom of Limbourg, and destroyed the potent Family of the Bertholds: his younger brother Henry, by another venture, succeeding in Hassia.  
14 John II. son of John the first, bought of the Bishop of Liege the moitle, or one half of Machlyn.  
1312 15 John III. son of John the second, 
Holland.  added the whole estate of Machlyn to the Dukedom of Brabant.  
1355 16 Joan, eldest daughter of John the third, married to Wenceslau● the first Duke of Luxembourg, but died without issue.  
1406 17 Anthony of Burgogne, son of Philip the Hardy, and the Lady Margaret his wife, daughter of Lewis de Malain Earl of Flanders, and of Margaret the sister and heir of Joan; after the death of the said Wenceslaus and Joan his wife, succeeded in the Dukedom of Brabant, his elder brother John giving way unto it.  
1415 18 John IV. son of Anthony by his first wise Joan daughter of Waleran Earl of Saint Paul.  
1426 19 Philip, the second son of Anthony, and brother of John the fourth.  
1430 20 Philip II. called the Good, Duke of Burgundy, son and heir of John Duke of Burgundy, elder brother of Anthony; on the death of his two Cousin Germane John and Philip, succeeded In the Dukedom of Brabant, as the direct heir of the Lady Margaret, wife of Lewis de Malain, and daughter of John the third, the last Duke of Brabant of the house of Louvain.    
The Arms hereof are Sable, a Lion Or.   

12. HOLLAND, 13. ZEALAND, 14. WESTFRISELAND.  
Having thus spoken of those Provinces which still continue in subjection to the King of Spain (except some few towns in Flanders and Brabant before mentioned;) let us next look on those which have withdrawn their obedience from him, beginning first with Holland, and its Appendices, as of more power and consideration than all the rest. Which though distinct Provinces and acting in their several capacities at the present time: yet having been always under the command of the same Princes, they must be joined together in the Story of them, but shall, be severally handled as to the chorography.  
HOLLAND, so called quasi Holt-land, that is to say, a woody country, as Ortelius hath it, but rather quast Hollow-land, from the bogs and marshes, and unsound footing on the same: hath on the East the Zuider See, Vtrecht, and some part of Guelderland, on the West and North the Germane Ocean, on the South, the Islands of Zealand, and some part of Brabant.  
The country for the most part lieth very low, in so much that they are fain to fence it with Banks and Ramparts to keep out the Sea, and to restrain the Rivers within their bounds, so that in many places one may see the Sea far above the Land, and yet repulsed with those Banks: and is withal so fenny and full of marshes, that they are forced to trench it with innumerable dikes and channels to make it firm land, and fit for dwelling: yet not so firm as to bear either trees or much grain. But such is the industry of the people and the trade they drive, that having little or no corn of their own growth, they do provide themselves elsewhere notonly sufficient for their own spending, but wherewith to supply their neighbours: having no timber of their own, they spend more timber in building ships, and fencing their watercourses, than any country in the world; having no wine, they drink more than the people of the country where it groweth naturally; and finally having neither Flax nor Wool, they make more cloth of both sorts, than all the countries in the world, except France and England.  
The present inhabitants are generally given to Seafaring lives, so that it is thought that in Holland, Zealand, and West-Friseland, there are 2500. ships of war and burden. The women for the most part laborious in making stufles. Nay you shall hardly see a child of four years of age, that is not kept to work, and made to earn its own living, to the great commendation of their government. The greatest of their natural Commodities is Butter and Cheese, of which, besides that infinite plenty which they spend in their own houses, and amongst their Garrisons, they sell as much unto other Countries, as comes to 100000 Crowns per annum. By which means, and by the greatness of their fish-trade spoken of before, they are grown so wealthy on the land, and so powerful at Sea, that as Flanders heretofore was taken for all the Netherlands, so now Holland is taken generally for all the Provinces confederated in a league against the Spaniard.  
The whole compass of it is no more than 180 miles, no part thereof being distant from the Sea, above three hours' journey: and yet within that narrow circuit, there are contained no fewer than 23 walled Towns, and 400 Villages: some situate in the North, and others in South-Holland, as it stands divided. In South-Holland (being that part hereof which lieth next to Zealand and the middle channel of the Rhine passing from Vtrecht unto Leiden,) the principal Towns are, 1. Dort (in Latin Dordrectum) formerly the Staple for Rhenish wines, a large, rich, and well-peopled town: anciently joined to the firm land, but in the year 142, rend from it by the violence of the Sea, and made an Island of great command upon the traffic of the Maes and the Wael, upon whose confluence it stands; but of most note for an Assembly of Divines out of divers Countries following calvin's doctrine, for condemnation of the Lutheran or Arminian Tenets, concerning Universal Grace and Predestination, de●●●nation, 
Holland.  anno 1618. 2. ●eterdam, seated on a dike or channel called the Rotter, not far from which at a 〈◊〉 named 〈◊〉 the Leck, one or the three main branches of the Rhine, falleth into the Ma●s: among, ●air, and well traded Port, the birthplace of the learned Erasmus. 3. Schoon-heven, situate on the 〈◊〉 a fair town having a commodious haven. 4. Gorichom upon the Wael, where it 〈◊〉 with the 〈◊〉 from the Church whereof one may discern 22 walled towns. 5. 〈◊〉 one of the six principal towns of Holland, rich and well fortified; seated on a Dike called Yssei, drawn from the middle channel of Rh●ne; as is also, 6. Over-water, and 7. Ysselstein, this last belonging properly to the Prince of Orange; the first of great trade for making cables and cords for shipping. 8. 〈◊〉 or Lugdunum Batavorum, an University founded anno 1564. The town consisteth of 41 Islands, to which they pass partly by boats, partly by bridges, whereof there are 144; and of them 104 builded with stone. Here is in this town a castle said to have been built by Hengist the Saxon, at his return out of England. And not far off stood the famous Nunnery of Rainsburg of the same nature with those of Mentz and Nivelle before described; so liberally endowed, that 2000 persons did there daily receive relief. 9 Vianen on the Leck, a signory distinct from Holland, pertaining anciently to the Lords of Brederode. 10. Delse, a town of great trade for clothing, large and well built, beautified with spacious streets, and goodly Churches; the birthplace of that monstrous Heretic David George, who called himself King and Christ Immortal. He fled with his wife and children, anno 1544, to Basil; there he set up his Doctrine: the points whereof were, 1. That the Law and the Gospel were unprofitable for the attaining of Heaven; but his Doctrine able to save such as receive it. 2. That he was the true Christ and Messas'. 3. That he had been till that present, kept in a place unknown to all the Saints: and 4. that he was not to restore the house of Israel by death or tribulation, but by love and grave of the Spirit. He died in the year 1556. and three days after his Doctrine was by them of Basil condemned, his goods confiscate, and his bones taken up and burned. He bound his Disciples to three things: 1. to conceal his name: 2. not to reveal of what condition he had been: and 3. not to discover the articles of his Doctrine to any man in Basil.  
In that part thereof which is called North-Holland, lying betwixt the middle channel of the Rhine, and the Zuider-See, the towns or Cities of most importance are 1. Alamar, encompassed with deep sens and marshes, a rich town in regard of the great plenty of butter and cheese, which is made about it more than in any place in Holland, and famous for the defeat which the Duke of Alva received before it. For he in the beginning of the Low-countries troubles, having with the loss of 20000 of his own men forced Harlem, laid his siege round about this town. Had he left any way for the soldiers to have fled thence, the town had been abandoned: but having environed them round, he put them to such a resolution or desperation, (choose you whether) that manfully they resisted three of his assaults; and in the end made him depart with great loss as well of his soldiers, as his reputation. 2. Amsterdam, a very fair Haven Town, where divers times at one tide 1000 ships of all sorts have been seen to go out and in: So truly said a modern Poet, 
Quod Tagus, atque Hermus vehit, & Pactolus, in unum  
Vere hunc congestum dixeris esse locum.  
What Tagus, Hormus, and Pactolus bear;  
One would conjecture to be heaped up here.  The people thereby made so rich, that if a fleet of 300 sail should come into the Port fraught with all kind of commodities, in five or six days they would be ready to buy all the lading. Situate it is on the Gulf called the Tie, and the dike or channel called Amstell, whence it hath the name of Amsteldam, in Latin Amstelodunum: built von piles like Venice, and resembling it in so many points, that it may be justly called the Northern Venice. First fortified with Towers and ramparts by Giselbert of Amstell about 300 years agone. But being burnt through the envy of its neighbours, it began to be walled anno 1482. Grown to this wealth since the diverting of the trade from Antwerp hither, and for that cause inhabited by men of all Nations, and of all Religions, and those not only tolerated and connived at in private, but openly and freely exercised without any dislike. A greater Confusion (in my mind) then that of Babel; this being of Religions, that of Languages only. 3. Harlem on the Lake called Harlem-meere, the greatest Town of all Holland, and the second for dignity; well built, and very pleasantly situated amongst many goodly meadows, near a delightful forest, and round about environed with wealthy Villages: famous for the invention of printing; invented here, but perfected at Mentz in higher Germany; the first book which was ever printed being Tully's Offices. 4. Naerden on the Zuider-See, fortified with a strong Castle, held of the Earls of Holland by the Dukes of Brunswick, to whom it anciently belonged. 5. Enchuisen, on the very point of the Gulf of Zuider-See opposed to Friesland, from which not distant above two leagues. A town of great consequence to the prince of Orange in the first revolting of these Countries from the King of Spain. For siding with him in that war, and standing conveniently to obstruct the passages by Sea unto Amsterdam: it compelled that City in short time, by stopping all supply of victuals and other necessaries, to yield itself unto the Prince. 6. Hoorn on the same Gulf also, a rich town with a very good Haven, and of so great strength by reason of the multitude of Dikes and channels which are round about it, that it seems impregnable. 7. Edam upon the same Gulf (or Zuider-See) remarkable for the great number of ships which are built yearly in it; 
Zealand.  and an incredible number of the best Holland Cheeses made in the Country round about it. 8. Medemblick on the Ocean, seated in the best Country of Holland for the feeding of cattle; unwalled, but enjoying all the privileges which a walled town hath; and fortified with a right strong Castle.  
The chief of the Holland Villages is the Hague or Graven Hague, in Latin Haga Comitis, because formerly the Court and residence of the Earls of Holland, who had here a very large and beautiful Palace, founded by Earl William King of the Romans, and therein a chief and excellent Library gathered together by John Harry a Canon Regular of this place, and by him given to Charles the fifth. In former time the residence of the Council for the Province of Holland; as it is now of the Commissioners or Delegates of the confederate Provinces, called by the name of the states-general. Now much increased in buildings, of what it was; and yet so great in the time of Lewis Guicciardin that it than contained 2000 households. The Inhabitants will not wall it, as desiring to have it rather accounted the chief Village in Europe, than the second City. The other Villages of note, 2. Egmond, 3. Brederode, 4. Wassenar, which anciently gave name to three Noble families: of which none but that of Brederode now left for aught I can learn. Near to the last stood the famous Fortress called Arx Britannica, built by Caligula in memory of his great battle upon this Shore. For making show of a voyage into Britain to subdue that Island, he boarded his Galley, embattelled his soldiers, caused his Trumpets to sound, gave them them the Signal, and then commanded them to gather Cockles. Which Tower or Fortress was at the fall of the Roman Empire overwhelmed by the Sea, the ruins whereof at a dead low water are still to be seen.  
Besides these places on the firm land or Continent, there are some Islands which pertain to the State of Holland, called by the general name of Voorn, because situate directly against Holland, Voorn signifying as much as before, or in old English Bevorne: but known by their distinct and more proper names of Somersdike, 2. Gaurode, 3. Rierschille, so called of their principal towns: and 4. Voorn, specially so named, the chief of them all, being of a fat and fruitful soil, plentiful of most sorts of grain. The principal towns whereof are 1. Briel (which we call the Brill) a strong town, and the first which revolted against the Spaniard, An. 1572. Cautionary to the English with the town of Flushing; chosen by them in regard of the great command it hath upon the passage to Gertrudenberg and the rest of Brabant, 2. Gerulit, a small town, but having a jurisdiction over many villages. There are also on the North side of Holland the Isles Wyerengeh and Texel; of which little memorable.  
One special accident concerning Holland, I cannot over pass in silence, namely how Margaret Countess of Hennenberg, and sister to William King of the Romans, being of the age of 42 years, was delivered at one birth of 365 children, the one half males, the other females, the odd one an hermaphrodite, christened at the Church of Losdune not far from the Hague, by the names of John and Elizabeth, in two Basins, still to be seen the said Church, by Guido the Suffragan of Vtrecht: all which immediately after died, and with them the mother.  
The Arms of Holland of itself, as a State distinct, are Or, a Lion Gules.  
ZEALAND, so called as some think quasi Sea and Land, consisteth of seven Islands, the remainder of 18 which the Sea hath swallowed; and in them 300 inhabited Towns. Severed from Flanders with the left branch or arm of the Schelde, which they called Honte, and on the East from Brabant with the right branch of the said River, which still keeps his name on the North from Holland, with the Gulf called the Flack; and on the West with the main Ocean from the Kingdom of England.  
The Country generally more fruitful than the neighbouring Brabant, producing great quantity of excellent corn, plenty of Coriander, and abundance of Mader, used in dying: the soil also very rich in pasture, but low and marishy, which makes the air to be very unhealthy, and the whole destitute both of fresh water and wood; the want of which last is supplied with coal out of England and Scotland, or by Turf digged amongst themselves, but very sparingly for fear of weakening the Sea banks.  
The whole containeth 8 Towns and 100 Villages. The Islands which remain, being divided into the Western and the Eastern, are 1. Walcheren, (Valachria in Latin) lying to the South-west of Slags in Flanders, the richest and most populous of all this Province, in compass 10 Dutch or 40 Italian miles. The principal towns of which are 1. Middleburg, seated upon a Creek of the Sea, well walled and fortified, the streets spacious, the houses and Churches well built; inhabited by wealthy Merchants and industrious tradesmen, and of late times (since the removing of the English trade from Antwerp) a most flourishing Emporie. So called, because built in the midst of the Island; or because built (as saith Ortelius) by Prince Zelandus, of whom this Province was thus named, in honour of his Grandfather Metellus, and by him called Metelli Burgum. 2. Flushing, of great note for its good Port and invincible strength. One of the first Towns which the Low-Countreymen took from the Spaniards, by the diligence of Voorst a Seaman and Monsieur de Berland, than the Bailiff thereof, and not long after put into the hands of the English, as a Town of Caution: the first Governor of it being the renowned Philip Sidney. A poor Town than it was, God wot, now the Key of the Netherlands, without whose licence no ship can pass either to or from the City of Antwerp, insomuch that if the Duke of Alva in the beginning of his Government had bestowed that pains in fortifying this and others of the Maritime Towns, as he did in the strengthening Antwerp, 
Zealand.  and some midland Cities; he had in all probability hindered the remediless revolt of these flourishing Countries. Not far off standeth the Fort called the Rammikins, once cautionary to the English also, together with the Brill, the chief Town in the Isle of Voorn, (an Isle of Holland) all three being taken from the Spaniard, An. 1572. made Cautionary to Queen Elizabeth An. 1585. and finally surrendered by King James, to the States united An. 1616. Robert Lord Lisle (afterwards created Earl of Leicester) the brother of Sir Philip Sidney being then Governor of Flushing. 3. Ram, or Armyden, an unwalled Town, but beautified with one of the goodliest and most frequented Havens in all the World: out of which one may sometimes see 500 sail of ships, of great burden, set forwards on their voyages to several parts. 4. Vere or Camfere, seated in the North part of the Island; which once gave title to a marquis, and from the which the noble Families of the Veres (now and of long time Earls of Oxford) took demomination. So as it is no marvel that so many of that family have ventured their Estates and lives in the wars of this Country being their Grandmother in a manner, or their Primitive Parent, from whence transplanted into England.  
2. SOUTH-BEVERLAD, situate betwixt Walcheren and Brrbant, the greatest of the Isles of Zealand, heretofore 20 Dutch miles in compass, but now much diminished by the rage and fury of the Sea; by which the Town and Signory of Borsule, with all the Countries round about it, was swallowed up, An. 1532. That which remains hath in it many goodly Woods and pleasant Thickets, full of Fowl and wild Beasts for hawking and hunting. Chief Towns here are 1. Romerswall seated on the East towards Bergen ap Some, severed at the same time from the rest of the Island, and made an Island of itself; defended with continual charge from following the sad fate of the Town of Borsule. 2. Goes, or Tergoes on the Northern Coast, a strong Town, well privileged, and the only walled Town in all the Island.  
3. NORTH-BEVERLAND, lying betwixt South-Beverland and the Isle of Shown, in former times esteemed the Paradise of Zealand, and having in it a proper Town called Chort-Cheen; but so destroyed by the great Sea-breach spoken of before, that there is nothing now remaining but a few poor Villages.  
4. WALFERSDIKE, lying between the two Beverlands, the smallest of the Western Islands, as having in it no more than two Villages, but replenished with good store of Pasture.  
And these are all which fall in the division of the Western Islands, so called because they lie Westward of the River Scheld; as those which they call the Eastern Islands, on the East thereof. Of which last there are three in number.  
1. SCHOWEN, lying on the Northwest of Holland, so near unto North-Beverland in former times, that the Inhabitans could talk together from one shore to the other: but now the Sea hath set them at a greater distance. It containeth in compass six Dutch miles; chief Towns wherein are 1. Siriczed, the ancientest Town of all Zealand, once beautified with a fair and commodious Haven, now choked up with beach; yet still reputed for the second Town of all the Province; the whole trade thereof consisting in Salt and Mader, of which it yields good plenty: most famous for the birth of Levinus Lemnius that renowned Philosopher and Physician. 2. Brewers-Haven, inhabited only by Fishermen, not else remarkable.  
2. DWELAND, so named from the multitudes of Doves or Pigeons, situate between Schouwen and Tolen, in compass about 4 Dutch miles; hath no good Town in it, but only Country Villages and gentlemen's Farms. Surrounded by the Sea An. 1530. but by the industry and diligence of Adolph of Bugundy and Lord of Soferes in Flanders, recovered again; and at the excessive charge of the people hitherto preserved.  
3. TOLEN, so called from the chief Town of the Island, where the Earls toll was wont to be paid, whence it had the name; is situate over against the Northwest of Brabant, from which disjoined by a narrow Creek or Arm of the Sea: the second Town of note being called S. martin's Dike, walled, but not otherwise considerable.  
Agreeable to the quality of this Country of Zealand, are the Arms thereof; being Or, a Lion Gules, rising out of a Sea, wavie, Argent, & Azure.  
WESTFRISELAND hath on the East, Groyning-land, and a part of Westphalen in High-Germany; on the South Overyssell and the Zuider-See; on the North and West, the main Ocean. The Country generally moorish and full of fens, unapt for corn, but yielding great store of pasturage: which moorishnesse of the ground makes the air very foggy and unhealthy, nor have they any fuel wherewith to rectify it (except in that part of it which they call Seven-wolden) but turf and Cowdung, which adds but little to the sweetness of an unsound air. Nor are they better stored with Rivers, here being none proper to this Country but that of Leuwars, the want of which is supplied by great channels in most places, which do not only drain the Marshes, but supply them with water. Which notwithstanding, their pastures do afford them a good breed of horses fit for service; plenty of Beefs both great and sweet, the best in Europe next these of England: and those in such a large increase, that their Kine commonly bring two Calves, and their Ewes three lambs at a time.  
The Country divided into three parts. In the first part called WESTERGOE, lying towards Holland, the principal towns are 1. Harlingen, an Haven town upon the Ocean, defended with a very strong Castle. 2. Hindeloppen on the same Coast also; 3. Staveren an Hanse Town, opposite to Enchuisen in Holland; 
Holland.  the town decayed, but fortified with a strong Castle which secures the Haven. 4. Francker, a new University, or Schola illustris, as they call it. 5. Sneck in a low and inconvenient situation, but both for largeness and beauty the best in this part of the Province, and the second in esteem of all the country. In O●ffergo●, or the East parts lying towards Groiningland, the towns of most note are 6. Leuwarden, situate on the hinder Leuwars, the prime town of West-Fri●eland, and honoured with the supreme Court and Chancery hereof, from which there lieth no appeal: a rich town, well built, and strongly fortified. 7. Doccum, bordering upon Groining, the birth place of Gemma Frisii●. In SEVEN-WOLDEN, or the Country of the Seven Forests, so called from so many small Forests joining near together, is no town of note; being long time a Woodland Country, and not well inhabited till of late. The number of the walled Towns is 11 in all; o● the Villages 〈◊〉 Burroughs 345.  
To this Province belongeth the Isle of Schelinke, the shores whereof are plentifully stored with Dogfish, took by the Inhabitants in this manner. The men of the Island attire themselves with beasts skins, and then fall to dancing; with which sport the fish being much delighted, make out of the waters towards them; nets being pitched presently betwixt them and the water. Which done, the men put off their disguises, and the frighted fish hastening towards the sea, are caught in the toils.  
Touching the Frisons, heretofore possessed of this country, we shall speak more at large when we come to East-Friseland, possessed also by them, and still continuing in the quality of a free Estate, governed by its own Laws and Princes: here only taking notice that the Arms of this Friesland are Azure, semi of Billets Argent, two Lions Or.  
The ancient Inhabitants of these three Provinces, were the Batavi, and Caninefates, inhabiting the Island of the Rhine situate betwixt the middle branch thereof and the Wae●, which now containeth South-Holland, Vtrecht, and some part of Gueldres; the Frisii dwelling in West-Friseland and the North of Holland; and the Mattiaci, inhabiting in the Isles of Zealand. By Charles the Bald, these countries being almost unpeopled by the Norman Piracies, were given to Thierrie, son of Sigebert a Prince of Aquitain, with the title of Earl: his Successors acknowledging the Sovereignty of the Crown of France, till the time of Arnulph the 4. Earl, who atturned Homager to the Empire. In John the 2. they became united to the house of Hainalt; and in William the 3. to that of Bavaria: added to the estates of the Dukes of Burgundy in the person of Duke Philip the Good, as appeareth by this succession of 

The EARLS of HOLLAND, ZEALAND, and LORDS of WESTFRISELAND.  
863 1 Thierrie or Theodorick of Aquitain, the first Earl, etc.  
903 2 Thierrie II. son of Thierrie the 1.  
3 Thierrie the III. the son of Theodorick the 2.  
988 4 Arnulph, who first made this Estate to be held of the Empire; shin in a war against the Frisons.  
993 5 Thierrie IV. son of Arnulph.  
1039 6 Thierrie V. son of Theodorick the 4.  
1048 7 Florence, brother of Thierrie the 5.  
1062 8 Thierrie VI son of Florence, in whose minority the Estate of Holland was usurped by Godfrey le Bossu Duke of Lorrein, by some accounted of as an Earl hereof.  
1092 9 Florence II. surnamed the Fat, son of Thierrie the 6.  
1123 10 Thierrie VII. who tamed the stomaches of the Frisons.  
1163 11 Florence III. a companion of Frederick Barbarossa, in the wars of the Holy-Land.  
1190 12 Thierrie VIII. son to Florence the 3.  
1203 13 William, the brother of Thierrie, and Earl of East-Friseland, which country he had before subdued, supplanted his Niece Ada his Brother's daughter; but after her decease, dying without issue, succeeded in his own right unto the Estate.  
1223 14 Florence IV. son of William.  
1235 15 William II. son of Florence the 4. elected and crowned King of the Romans; slain in a war against the Frisons.  
1255 16 Florence the V. the first, as some write, who called himself Earl of Zealand: the title to those Lands formerly questioned by the Flemings, being relinquished to him on his marriage with Beatrix the daughter of Guy of Dampierre Earl of Flanders.  
1296 17 John, the son of Florence the 5. subdued the rebellious Frisons; the last of the male-issue of Thierrie of Aquitaine.    

EARLS of HAINALT, 
Vtrecht and Overyssel.  HOLLAND, etc.  
1300 18 John of Avesnes Earl of Hainalt, son of John of Avesnes Earl of Hainalt and of the Lady Aleide, sister of William the 2. and daughter of Florence the 4. succeeded as next heir in the Earldom of Holland, etc.  
1305 19 William III. surnamed the Good, Father of the Lady Philippe wife of one Edward the 3.  
1337 20 William IV. of Holland, and the II. of Hainalt, slain in a war against the Frisons.  
1346 21 Margaret, sister and heir of William the 4. and eldest daughter of William the 3. married to Lewis of Bavaria, Emperor of the Germans: forced to relinquish Holland unto William her second son, and to content herself with Hainalt.  
1351 22 William V. second son of Lewis and Margaret, (his elder Brother Steven succeeding in Ba●aria) in right of Maud his wife, daughter and coheir of Henry Duke of Lancaster, succeeded in the Earldom of Leicester.  
1377 23 Albert the younger Brother of William the fifth, fortunate in his wars against the Frisons.  
1404 24 William VI Earl of Osternant, and by that name admitted Knight of the Garter by King Richard the 2. eldest son of Albert.  
1417 25 Jaquelme only daughter of Earl William the sixth, first married to John the 4. Duke of Brabant, the son of Anthony of Burgogne, from whom divorced under colour of Consanguinity, she was married after to Humphrey Duke of Gloucester, and then to Frank of Borjelles, a private Gentleman; being unworthily handled by Duke John of Burgundy, surrendered her estates to Duke Philip the Good.  
26 Philip the Good, Duke of Burgundy, son of John Duke of Burgundy, and of the Lady Margaret sister of Earl William the sixth, and daughter of Albert, Earls of Hainalt, Holland, etc. succeeded on the resignation of the Lady Jaqueline, his Cousin german; transporting these Estates to the house of Burgundy.    

15. VTRECHT. 16. OVERYSSELL.  
The Bishopric of utrect, I mean the temporal jurisdiction and estate thereof, contained once all that tract of ground which now makes up the Provinces of Vtrecht, Overyssell, and Groining. But Groining was long since dismembered. Vtrecht and Overyssell remaining parts thereof till the yea● 1528. when added to the rest of the Belgic Provinces, by Charles the fifth.  
VTRECHT hath on the East Guelderland; on the West, North, and South environed with Holland. The Country very fruitful, much drier than Holland, and so fitter for all sorts of grain. It containeth 70. villages and five walled Towns, that is to say, 1. Wick at Duersteed, situate on the middle Channel of the Rhine where it diverteth into the Leck; well built, and fortified anciently with a good Castle; supposed to be the Batavoducun spoken of by Tacitus, the mansion at that time of the second Legion. 2. Rhenen, upon the same branch or Channel, whence it hath the name, about which is digged abundance of turf for fuel. 3. Amesfort on the River Ems, (called in Latin Amisus) a fair Town and well peopled. 4. Montfort, upon the yssel, pleasantly seated and of great strength, as being anciently a frontier Town against the Hollanders. 5. Vtrecht, situate on the middle Channel of the Rhine, first called Antonina, from one of the Antonines of Rome; but Dagobert King of France gave it the name of Trajectum (or Vltrajectum) we now call it Vtrecht, because there was at that time the common Ferry over the River. The town large, beautiful, and very sumptuously built, having in it many goodly Churches, of which five were anciently Collegiate, besides two famous Monasteries of noble women, such as those spoken of elsewhere: the private houses well contrived, most of them having goodly cellars, vaulted with wonderful art and skill, to which the people may resort in all times of danger. Sometimes the seat-royal of Radbold King of the Frisons, then of the Bishops; honoured of old with a Juridical resort for the parts adjoining, and now the principal of this Province. A city so miraculously seated amongst walled Towns, that a man may go from hence in one day to any one of 50. walled Towns or Cities, thence equally distant; or to any one of 26. Towns to dinner, and come home to bed.  
OVERYSSELL, in Latin, Transisulana, so named from its situation beyond the yssel, is bounded on the East with Westphalen; on the West with the Zuider-Zee; on the North with West-Friseland, on the South with Guelderland. The country very plain, and without hills, but wet, and moorish; affording excellent good pasturage, and not defective in corn. Divided into three parts, that is to say, Tuent, confining upon Wesiphalen; Ysselland on the River Yssell, and Drent beyond the River Vecht; in all which are contained 11. Towns and 100 Villages. The principal of which are▪ 1. Deventer, on the River Yssell, strong and well fortified, and withal beautiful and well peopled▪ an Hanse town, and the chief of all this Province: first taken for the States by the Earl of 〈◊〉 than Governor of those countries for Queen Elizabeth, 
Guelderland.  anno 1586. treacherously reyeelded to the Spaniard by Sir William Stanley; but in the year 1590. again recovered by the States. 2. Swoll, standing on a little River which runs into the Vidre, anciently fortified with a double ditch and very strong ramparts; an Hanse town, as is also 3. Campen, situate on the left shore and fall of the yssel into the Zuider-zee; a fair and large town, and of very great strength by reason of those in accessible marshes amongst which it is situate. These three are in that part hereof which is called Ysselland, and by some Saland, by whom (erroneously) supposed to be the country of the ancient Salii. In that part hereof which is called Tuent, we have the Towns of 4. Oldensel, 5 Enschede, 6. Delden, 7. Almeloo; of which little memorable. And in that of Drent, the Town and Castle of Vallenhoven, standing upon the Zuider-zee, well served with all sorts of victuals: for which cause made the ordinary residence of the Governor and supreme Council for the whole Province.  
The ancient inhabitants of these two Provinces, were some parts of the Batavi and Frisii minores for that of Vtrecht; the Bructeri, and (as some say) the Salii, in Overyssell: both Provinces belonging anciently to the Episcopal See of Vtrecht, founded by Dagobert King of France, who endowed it with great lands and territories; the first Bishop being Willibald an Englishman, who converted these parts to Christianity. His Successors grew to so great power, that they were able to bring 40000. men into the field: and with great courage did maintain their estate and patrimony against the encroaching Earls of Holland. But at the last, having continued for the space of 900. years, Henry of Bavaria Bishop hereof, being extremely distressed with war by the Duke of Gueldres; and driven out of the City of Vtrecht by his own subjects (perhaps upon some humour of Reformation) alienated all the temporalties of his Bishopric to Charles the fifth, anno 1527. And the next year, the Imperialists by one of the factions were let into Vtrecht; at what time both the Estates of the Country, and Pope Clement the 7. confirmed the Alienation made by the Bishop. After which solemn Acts of theirs, the Emperor caused himself to be invested in this estate by the States of the Empire (for Vtrecht was of old an Imperial Fief;) and for the better Government and administration of it, divided it into two Provinces, as it still coutinueth. But what this Bishop lost in power, his Successors not long after gained in title: the Bishop of Vtrecht being made an Archbishop or Metropolitan, anno 1561. but by reason of the change of Religion which was then working, and the falling off of these Countries which soon afther followed, he had but little joy in his new preferment.   

17. GVELDERLAND. 18. ZUTPHEN, and 19 GROINING.  
The Dukedom of Guelderland, at such time as it was first taken in by Charles the fifth contained under it, the Duchy of Gelder's properly and specially so called, the Earldom of Zutphen, and the Town and signory of Groining: held by distinct titles, and governed ever since their union with the Belgic Provinces, as distinct Estates.  
GVELDERLAND I bounded on the East with Cleveland, and the Earldom of Zutphen; on the West with Holland and Vtrecht; on the North with Overyssell, and the Zuider-Zee; and on the South with Brabant and the land of Gulick. The country flat, having few hills in it, but many pleasant and commodious woods, especially that called Echterwalt; of corn and cattle very fruitful.  
The whole Country is generally divided into two parts. 1. The Veluwe, contained within the Zuider-Zee, the Rhine, and the yssel, the barrener of the two and the worse inhabited, the people hereof preferring wealth before health as in other places; but affording a more pure air and a pleasanter dwelling than the other, the woods and forests well replenished with most kinds of game. 2. The Betuwe (so called of the Batavi who possessed these parts) intercepted betwixt the middle Rhine and the Wael, exceedingly fruitful in corn, and of so excellent a pasturage for the feeding of cattle, that in the year 1570. there was a Guelderland Bull sold in Antwerp which weighed 3200. pounds.  
In both divisions (not reckoning in the county of Zutphen) are contained 300. villages, and 16. walled Towns, besides some fortified of late since the wars began. The chief whereof are 1. Nimmegent (in Latin, Noviomagus) an Imperial City, ordained by Charles the great to be one of the three Seiges of the Empire for these outer parts, the other two being Theonville in Luxembourg, & Aix or Aken in the land of Gulick. And as a Town Imperial it had anciently the privilege of coining money: for which and other freedoms of immunities indulged unto it, the people did no other service to the Emperors, than once a year to send a man to Aix or Aquisgrane, with a Glove full of Pepper. But the town being sold to the Gueldrois by William Earl of Holland and King of the Romans for 21000. marks of silver, anno 1248. the power of coinage fell to those Princes; and yet the Town was brought to do better service, then formerly it had done at Aken. The Town high mounted on the top of an hill, the Wael which is there large and deep running at the foot of it: rich, great, and populous, having besides the modern fortifications an ancient Castle with so goodly a prospect, that from thence one may behold the best part of the country; built, as some say, by Julius Caesar to command those parts. Under the jurisdiction of it are 2. Tiel, and 3. Bomel, two walled Towns, both situated on the Wael, both strong, and having many rich villages under their command; and 4. Gheut, on the Wael also, 
Zutphen.  an unwalled Town, but having all the privileges which the walled Towns have. Not for off, at 〈…〉 meeting of the Wael and the Maes, stands the strong Fort of S. Andrews, raised by the Archduke 〈◊〉 to command the passage of those Rivers; but in the year 1600. taken in by 〈◊〉 Count of 〈◊〉 (after Prince of Orange) and ever since garrisoned by the States to secure that passage. 5. Rivermond, seated on the mouth of the Ruer, where it falleth into the Maes; a beautiful and well peopled City, strong by Art and Nature, and seated in a fruitful country: heretofore of the Diocese of Liege (as Nimmegen anciently of Colen) but made a See Episcopal by King Philip the 〈…〉 1559. This is the second Capital City of Guelderland, and hath under the jurisdiction of it, 6. Venlo, a strong Town on the Maes, on which the Duke of Cleve yielded himself to Charles the fifth, anno 1543. 7. Gueldres, heretofore of such reputation that it gave name to all the country; and well it doth deserve to do so still, being the only Town in all this Dukedom which neither first nor last hath been won by the Hollanders: but still preserved themselves in their obedience to their natural Princes. 8. St●ael, or Straelen, a well fortified piece, but which, according to the chances of War, hath oft changed its masters. 9 Arnhem, the Arenacum of Taeitus, and in those times the mansion of the 10 Legion, situate on the Rhine, not above a mile from the great Channel, which Drusut to keeps his soldiers from idleness caused them to dig, to let the waters of the Rhine into those of the yssel; called therefore by the Ancients Fossa Drusiana, by the moderns Yssell-Dort. The Town large and well-built; the ordinary residence heretofore of the Dukes of Guelderland, who had here their Chancery, and other supreme Cowrts of justice. This is the third Capital City of Gueldres (anciently of the Diocese of Vtrecht) and hath under the jurisdiction of it, besides divers Villages, 10. Wagbeninghen on the Rhine, the same which Tacitus calls Vada. 11. Harderwick on the Zuider-See, burnt to the ground anno 1503. but since re-edified, and now more strong and beautfull then ever formerly. 12. Hattem upon the yssel, a good town of war, but not else observable.  
Within the limits of this Dukedom stands the Town and County of Culemberg, erected into a County by King Philip the second, by reason of the fair territory which belonged unto it, formerly held in Fee of the Dukes of Guelderland, but otherwise not reckoned as a Member of ●it. 2. The Town and Earldom of Buren, situate on the River Liughe, having a strong Castle anciently, and a goodly territory; holden immediately of the Empire as a Fief Imperial. The patrimony of the valiant Maximilian of Egmond, Earl of Buren, who died anno 1549. after whose death it fell to Philip of N●ssaw eldest son of William Prince of Orange, and Anne the daughter of the said Maximilian.  
ZUTPHEN accounted formerly for the 4. Capital City of Guelderland, now a distinct Province of itself, is bounded on the East with Westphalen; on the West with that part of Guelderland which is called the Velluwe; on the North with Overyssell; on the South with Cleveland. It containeth 8. walled Towns besides many Villages; that is to say, 1. Doetecum, standing on the old yssel, rising out of Westphalen. 2. Doesburg, where the old yssel falleth into the new yssel, or the trench called Fossa Drusiana, communicating thereunto its name. 3. Brookhurst, a County of itself, which anciently had its particular Governor. 4. Lochen upon the River Berkell. 5. Tsheerenbergue, a Town and County. 6. Groll taken by the Prince of Orange for the States Confederate, anno 1627. 7. Bredervord, a town of war, and subject to the change of Masters, as such places are. 8. Zutphen, or Zuidfen, so called of the Southern situation of it amongst the Fens, on the right shore of the yssel, whereit receiveth in it the River Berkel, which runs through the Town. A Town indifferently well built, as well for private as public edifices; a distinct state in Civil matters, but in spiritual subject (in former times) to the Bishop-of Munster: a thing observable, and not to be paralleled elsewhere, that the four chief Towns and quarters of one Province only, should appertain (as here in Guelderland) to four several Dioceses. Of which there may some reason be assigned for Zutphen, in regard it is a State more ancient than that of Guelderland itself; and not depending anciently on the fortunes of it: united to it by the marriage of Oath of Nassaw, the first Earl of Guelderland, with Sophia daughter and heir of Wickman the last Earl of Nutphen. So as this Earldom ended when that first began. After this it continued subject to the Earls and Dukes of Gueldres, till the revolt of Holland and the other Provinces from the King of Spain, at what time it was besieged for the States by the Earl of Leicester; at the siege whereof fell that gallant Gentleman Sir Philip Sidney, of whom our British Epigrammatist thus verfifieth.  
Digna legi scribis, facis & dignissima scribi;  
Scripta probant doctum te tua, facta probum.  
Thou writ'st things worthy reading, and didst do  
Things worthy writing too.  
Thy Acts thy valour show  
And by thy works we do thy learning know.  
And though upon the loss of that gallant man (nephew and heir unto that Earl) the siege was raised at the present; yet was it reinforced again anno 1190. and the Town then taken; continuing ever since in the confederacy of the States united.  
GROININGLAND, 
Groiningland.  hath on the east East-Friseland, on the west West-Friseland, on the North the main Ocean, on the South Overyssell; so wedged in as it were betwixt both Friselands, that some hold it to be but a part of the West. It containeth under it the Country called the Ommel●nds, (corruptly for the Emmelands, as I conjecture, because lying along the River Ems) and therein 145 Burroughs and Villages: the chief whereof are 1. Dam, near the Ems, bordering on East-Friseland: 2 Keykirk: 3. Old-Haven, standing on the Sea. As for the town of Groining itself, it is rich, great, and very well built, situate-amongst divers small streams which run through it; and having also divers Channels for conveyance of waters, which adds much to the safety and strength thereof. A town of great jurisdiction, both within, and without, judging absolutely without appeals in causes, both Civil, and Criminal; in Spiritual, subject heretofore to the Bishop of Munster, till made one of the new Bishoprics by King Philip the second, anno 1559. And though the Prince in Civil causes had his officer or Lieutenant there; yet in Criminal the town was Sovereign, and granted pardons as Sovereign of the whole estate, paying to the Prince for all duties yearly, but 6000 Crowns. Both Town and Country anciently belonged to the Bishops of Vtrecht, by whose negligence in defending them, they submitted their estate to the Dukes of Guelderland. But the Dukes of Saxony laying some claim to it, disturbed this agreement for a time; during which Ezardus the Earl of East-Friseland possessed himself of it: but not able to make good his unjust possession, sold his estate therein to Gueldres, anno 1514. to whom of right it did belong. Afterwards in the year 1536. they put themselves under the command of Charles the fifth, but with the reservation of all their privileges, and ancient Liberties: for preservation of the which, in danger to be overborn by the power of the Spaniard, they consederated with the rest of the united States, anno 1594. and so still continue.  
The ancient inhabitants of these Countries were the Menapii and Sicambri, very valiant people possessing Guelderland, and the Majores Frisii, which were planted in Groining, and the rest of Friesland. Of these the Sicambri were accounted the most valiant people, uniting with other nations in the name of French, and by that name, possessing, with the rest of those Nations, the mighty Empire of the West. In the division whereof, by the posterity of Charles the Great, these Countries were first part of the Kingdom of Austrasia, or East-France, afterwards of the German Empire: governed at the first by Guardians, or Protectors, created by the people in the reign of Charles the Bald: the two first being Wickard, and Lupold (or Leopold) two Brethren; who fixing their chief Seat in the Castle of Gueldres, occasioned the whole Country to be called Guelderland. But they, and their successors, by what name or title soever called, were in effect but Provincial Officers, accountable to the Emperors for their administration; the first free Prince hereof being Otho of Nassaw, who having to his first wife, the Lady Aleide, daughter of Wickard, the last Guardian; was by the Emperor Henry the third made first Earl of Guelderland: adding thereto the State of Zutphen, by a second marriage, as is said before. In Reinold the ninth Earl it was made a Dukedom by the Emperor Lewis of Bavaria, anno 1339. sold by Duke Arnold (justly incensed at his ungracious son Adolp) to Charles Duke of Burgundy, for 92000 Florins of ready money, and an Annual pension, anno 1472. But notwithstanding this Agreement, Adolph (upon the death of Charles) possessed himself of it, and left it unto Charles his son; who finally surrendered it unto Charles the fifth, anno 1547.  

EARLS and DUKES of GVELDERLAND.  
1079 1 Otho of Nassaw the first Earl.  
2 Gerard, the son of Oath, by his first wife Aleide.  
1131 3 Henry, the son of Gerard.  
1162 4 Gerard II. son of Henry.  
1180 5 Otho II. brother of Gerard.  
1202 6 Gerard III. son of Otho the second.  
1229 7 Otho III. son of Gerard, who walled the towes of Ruermond, Aruhem, Bomel, Goch, Wageni●gen, and Harderwick.  
1271 8 Reinold, son of Otho the third, taken and imprisoned till his death, by  
1326 9 Rainold II. his own son, created the first Duke of Gueldres, by the Emperor Lewis of Bavavaria, at Francfort, Anno 1339. liberal to the poof, and a great Patron of the Muses.  
1343 10 Rainold III. son of Rainold the 2d, molested with continual wars with his brother Edward, by whom taken, and imprisoned till his dying day.  
1371 11 Edward, the son of Rainold the second, by Eleanor the daughter of Edward the third of England, his second wife, died the same year with his brother; the last of the male issue of Otho of Nassaw.  
1371 12 Mary, (by some called Joan) Sister of Edward, by the same venture, and wife of William Earl of Gulick.  
13 William, son of William Duke of Gulick, and Mary of Gueldres, admitted Knight of the Garter by King Richard the second.  
14 Rainold IV. the brother of William.  
15 Arnold of Egmond, son of John Lord of Egmond, and Mary his wife, daughter of Joan, the sister of Rainold, and William, the two last Dukes, succeeded in the estate of Gueldres; taken, imprisoned, and most barbarously handled by his own son Adolph, 
Guelderland.  and delivered by Charles the Warlike, Duke of Barg●ndie he sold to him his estates of Gueldres, and Zutphen to be enjoyed by him after his decease, anno 1472.  
1473 16 Adolp●, the wicked son of Arnold, dispossessed of his estate by the said agreement which Duke Charles enjoyed for his life; after the death of the said Charles was restored to liberty by the Gauntois, anno 1467. and made the General of their forces against Lewis the eleventh.  
1477 17 Charles, son of Arnold, after long wars with the Princes of the houses of Burgundy and Austria, p●●tending the sale and legacy of Duke Arnold, to Charles the Warlike; surrendered his estates unto Charles 〈…〉, to be enjoyed by him after his decease, if he left no issue. According to which 〈◊〉 the Emperor Charles succeeded him in Gueldres and Zutphen, anno 1538. being the year of his 〈◊〉: after that time accounted in the number of the Belgic Provinces.   
The Arms hereof were Quarterly, 1. Azure, a Lion Or, crowned Gules; for the Dukedom of Guelderland; 2. Azure, a Lion Gules, for the Earldom of Zutphen.  
Thus have we seen a Country, which at the first erecting of these Estates, was nothing in a manner but bogs and marshes; and at the best, but a continual Wilderness of woods and forests: by the great providence of the Princes, and extreme industry of the People, made the most populous, best planted, and the wealthiest Estate (for the bigness of it) in the whole habitable world. And we have seen those several Estates and Principalities, by Marriages, and other Contracts, reduced into the hands of the house of Burgundy: under the Princes of which great and illustrious Family, inferior to no Kings of Christendom for Power and Riches, especially Duke Philip the Good; the subjects hereof did so abound in wealth and plenty, that Philip de Comines who then lived, affirmeth that this Country seemed like the land of Promise. Some thought there was a purpose in this Duke Philip, of erecting these estates into a Kingdom; diverted from it by the difference and variety of Laws and Privileges, which those people severally lived under; not to be brought without great difficulty and distaste, to one form of Government: yet might have done it, if he would, as himself openly affirmed to the Ambassadors of King Lewis the 11. But Charles his son being more bend on the design, negotiated to that end with the Emperor Frederick, whom he met at Triers, anno 1473, and doubtless had obtained his purpose, upon the marriage of his daughter with Maximilian, frederick's son (which was then propounded) had not his rash engagement against the Swissers, and his untimely death therein, broke the course of his projects; which projects had they took effect, as in all probability they had but for that engagement, he had extended his dominions all along the Rhine, and on both sides of it, from the Alps unto the Germane Ocean; and been the most considerable Prince at that time in Christendom: all Elsats in high Germany, being sold, or mortgaged to him by the Duke of Austria, the Dukedom of Lorraine at his mercy; besides, the hopes he had of the Earldom of Provence, intended to him by King Reny, which would have opened him a way to the Mediterranean: he being dead, the Government continued, as before it was; each Province having its distinct Laws and living according to their ancient Privileges, till the attempt of Philip the second, King of Spain; most resolutely (but unfortunately) bent to bring them under the command of that Crown, to cancel all their privileges, and new mould the Estate, according to his own will and pleasure: occasioning thereby the Revolt of a great part of the Country; and the setting up of a new Estate, opposite unto him▪ and destructive of his interest in it. But before we come unto this change, we will first look upon the Prince's Power, Revenue, and other things considerable touching this Estate whilst it stood entire under the Princes of the house of Burgundy, and 

LORDS of BELGIUM.  
1369 1 Philip the Hardy, Duke and Earl of Burgundy, Earl of Flanders and Artois, the first great raiser of this House.  
1404 2 John the Proud, Duke of Burgundy, etc.  
1419 3 Philip the Good, added to his estate the Dukedoms of Brabant and Limbourg, the Marquisa●, and Machlin, by the death of his cousin Philip; the Earldoms of Hainalt, Holland, Zealand, and the Lordship of West-Friseland, by the resignation and death of the Countess Jaquiline, whose next Heir he was; the Dukedom of Luxemburg, and the Earldom of Namur, which he bought for money.  
1467 4 Charles the Warlike, who bought the Estates of Gueldres and Zutphen; and held them peaceably all his life.  
1476 5 Marry, the daughter and Heir of Charles, married to Maximillan, son of the Emperor Frederick; from whom King Lewis the eleventh of France took the Dukedom of Burgundy, and the greatest parts of the Counties of Burgundy, and Artois; unfortunately killed with a fall from her horse, and an unseasonable modesty in not suffering the Surgeons to dress her wound; the hurt which she had taken being in her thigh.  
1482 6 Philip III. son of Mary and Maximilian, to whom Charles the eight of France restored all the places in Artois, and the County of Burgundy taken by his Father: married Joan daughter of Ferdinand and Isabel, Kings of Spain.  
1506 7 Charles II. Archduke of Austria, King of Spain, and Emperor of that name the fifth; added to his Estate in these Countries, the Dukedom of Guelderland, the Earldom of Zutphen, the Lordships of Vtrecht, Overyssell, and Groining.  
1558 8 Philip IV. of Belgium, and the TWO of Spain, invading these Countries against their privileges, was by a great part of them rejected from being their Prince, anno 1581. which made him after a long and a bloody war, to surrender all his interest in them to  
1599 9 Isabel Clara Eugenia his daughter, and Albert Archduke of Austria, whom he married to her: during whose Government, a truce for 12 years was made, and in the preface to that Truce the Confederate Estates declared to be treated with as a Free Estate, to whom the Kings of Spain could pretend no title.  
16 10 Philip V. of Belgium, and the IV. of Spain on the decease of the Arch-Duchesse Isabel his Aunt, succeeded in the possession of some, and the title unto all the Belgic Provinces.    
The ordinary Revenue of these Countries to the Dukes of Burgundy, and after to the Kings of Spain, before the breach, were estimated at three millions of Crowns yearly, which was more than any King in Christendom at those times received; the French only excepted: the very measuring of corn in the City of Antwerp, being farmed yearly for 100000 Crowns in ready money; But the extraordinary was far greater: the Estates of these Countries in the year 1550 granting to Charles the fifth an Aid, which they call the Noventale, amounting to 150000 crowns a month; and yet the Provinces of Luxenbourg, Limbourg, Gueldres, and Groining, were not rated to it: And it is said, that Philip the second at his first coming to the Estate, was presented with a grant of 40 millions of Florins, to be paid in few years. So that these Countries were the true Correlative of both his Indies: the loss of which, before the making of the truce, anno 1609. cost him above 100 millions of Crowns, and the loss of 400000 men.  
The Forces of these Princes by Land, may best be seen in the expedition of Charles (than Earl of Charolois) against Lewis the eleventh, whom Duke Philip the Good his father furnished to that enterprise with 9000 Archers, and 1400 men of Arms, every one of which had five or six great horses attending on him: and at his setting forward, was told by his Father, (never accounted for a Braggart) that if he fell into any danger, he should not be abandoned for the want of 100000 fight men. The said Duke having thus sent away his son, and being provoked by the indignities of those of Liege, and Dinand, who revolted from him: suddenly raised an Army to 28000 horse, and aproportionable number of foot, for the chastisement of that proud and rebellious people. And Charles himself, succeeding on the death of his Father in his unprosperous attempt upon the Swissers, had no less than 8000 men at the siege of Morat. As for their power at Sea, I find not that they kept any standing Navy, nor needed they so to do, as the case stood with them, considering that when they had occasion of any such service, they used to take up all the Ships which they found in their harbours (of which there never wanted good store) employing as many as they pleased, and dismissing the rest.  
The principal order of Knighthood ordained by these Princes, was that of the Golden Fleece, first instituted by Duke Philip the Good (in imitation of the Order of S. George in England) anno 1430. The name and fancy borrowed, as some conceive, from gedeon's Fleece; from Jason's Fleece, as others think; but more probably from the Golden Fleeces of England, which brought him in so much gold and treasure in the way of custom. Their Habit is a Collar of Gold interlaced with irons seeming to strike fire out of a Flint, (ex ferro flammam being the word:) at the end whereof hung the To●sond ' Or, or Fleece of Gold. Their number at the first was but 25. (which is the number of Knights of the English Garter) increased afterwards by the same Duke Philip unto thirty one. Charles the first raised them to fifty one: And now the King of Spain hath assumed a liberty of making as many as he pleaseth: this being the only Military, or Civil Order of which those Kings have the bestowing; the orders of Alcantata, Calatrava, and the rest of Spanish institution, being rather Religious, and Monastical, at the best but mixed. Saint Andrew's day, the day of the Installation.  
In this great Pomp and Glory did these Princes live, as long as they continued in good terms with the subject Provinces being masters of more goodly Jewels, magnificent furniture for their houses, & costly moveables than any 3 of the greatest Princes in all Europe. And on the other side, the subjects whilst they lived in duty under so great Princes, attained unto the height of all worldly happiness: in their Apparel excessively gorgeous, in their Feasts and Banquets over-sumptuous, in their Manners dissolute, vices which usually accompany that kind of felicity. An happiness too great to continue long. By the ambition and violence of Charles the Warlike, they were first plunged into a war against Lewis the eleventh, of which they did not only feel the present miseries, but lost all the Towns and Holds which they had in Picardy, with the whole Duchy of Burgundy. And by a like, but better grounded Ambition of Charles the fifth, they were exercised in continual wars against the French, who miserably harrowed, and ransacked the Countries of Luxemburg, Hain●lt, and Artois, bordering next unto them. Charles at his death commended them to the especial care of Philip his son, advising him to use them kindly, as those that were the chief supporters of his State and Glory: adding, that if he should deal otherwise with them, it would prove the ruin of his Fortunes. And on the other side, the People, to obtain his favour, presented him at his first entrance on the Government, with a grant of 40 millions of Florins, as before was said. But he transported with ambition, and a Catholic, zeal, not only forgot their love, but his father's counsel; and had no sooner concluded on a peace with France, effected by the treaty of Cambray, anno 1559. but presently he cast his thoughts on the subjection of this people to his will and pleasure. For they were so fortified with Privileges, which their former Princes had granted, and the latter had been sworn to observe, that he wanted much of that absolute and uncontrollable command, which he strongly aimed at. Some of which Privileges were, that the Prince could place no stranger amongst them, with jurisdiction over their Estates and persons, in Offices of war or justice. 2. The Prince could give nothing to the Clergy: nor 3 levy any subsidies, without the States of the Country. But the main Prerogative was, that if the Prince by violence or wrong, did infringe any of the said Charters and Franchises the people after the declaration thereof made might go to election of a new Prince. This not a little grieved the Spaniards, that such base and unworthy people (for so they esteemed them) should in such liberty possess so brave and rich a Country; their King bearing no title of Majesty, or absolute command over them. Besides, the Reformation of Religion, which then began to grow to some strength, moved the King to reduce them back to the Church of Rome, by the power and terror of the Inquisition; and by the erecting of some new Episcopal Sees amongst them (for before there were but three in all) to settle some more constant course of Ecclesiastical Discipline: Against both which, when the people violently opposed, he then resolved of bringing them by Spanish Rhetoric (that is, by the Sword and the Cannon) to their old obedience. To these ends he sent the Duke of Alva, an old and expert Captain (as having 60 years been a Soldier) with a puissant Army to be his Viceroy among them. He also gave him a Commission of that large extent, that he might place and displace whom he would, and execute all such as he could find opposite to his designs. At that time the two chief men among them were the Prince of Orange, and Count Egmont: the first more potent with the people, the latter, with the Soldiers. Had these two joined together, they might easily have prevented D. Alva's entrance; but Egmont was so soothed up with Letters from Spain, that he believed not the Intelligence which the Prince had concerning the Duke's Commission. The Earl exhorted the Prince to submit himself to the pleasure of the King, and so to prevent the ruin of his house: The Prince desired the Earl to maintain the Liberty of the Country; as for himself, He had rather be a Prince without an House, than a Count without an Head. Being thus resolved, the Prince retires to his friends of Nassaw, in high Germany; the Earl stayeth to congratulate the entrance of the new Governor: who had no sooner settled himself, but he entrapped the Counts of Horn and Egmond, and beheaded them, anno 1567. Being thus rid of these two, with divers others of good quality, who living would have much hindered his proceedings; he quartered his Spaniards in the Towns and Provinces, spoiled the people, not of their Privileges only, but their Liberty. Among the Reformed he brought in the bloody Inquisition; and indeed so tyrannically did he behave himself, that the people were forced to a defensive war, as well for their lives, as substance. This was a war of State, not Religion; the most part of the Hollanders being Papists, at the time of their taking Arms. During these troubles, the Prince of Orange was not idle, but he in one place, and Count Lodewick his brother, in another, kept Duke Alva employed; though divers times not with such fortunate success as they did expect. In the year 1572, Flushing was surprised by Voorst, and Berland, as we have before said. So also was the Brill in Voorne, an Island of Holland, by the Count de la March, and not long after, all Holland, except Amsierdam, followed the fortune and side of the Prince, together with all the towns of Zealand, Midleburg excepted, Anno 1573. Duke Alva being recalled, Don Lewis de Requisens' was appointed Governor; during whose rule many of the Belgians abandoned their Country: some flying into Germany, others into France, most into England. After his death, and before the arrival of Don John, the Priuce and his party recovered strength and courage again, till the coming of the Prince of Parma, who brought them into worse case than ever. Yet anno 1581. they declare by their writings directed to all people, that Philip of Spain was fallen from the Government: and take a new oath of the People, which bound them never to return to the Spanish obedience. This done, they elect Francis Duke of Anjou, heir apparent to the French King, and then in no small hopes of marrying Queen Elizabeth of England, to be their Lord. But he intending rather to settle a Tyranny in himself, then to drive it from the Spaniard, attempted Antwerp, put his men into the town, but was by the valour of the Burghers shamefully repulsed. Shame of this ignoble enterprise, especially grief for its ill suctesse, took him out of the world. About which time, the estate of these Countries was thus by this Hieroglyphic expressed. A Cow represented the body of Belgium: there stood the King of Spain spurring her, the Queen of England feeding her, the Prince of Orange milking her, and Duke Francis plucking her back by the tail, but she fouled his fingers. During his unfortunate Government, Parma prevailed in all places, especially after the death of William Prince of Orange, treacherously slain with a Pistol, anno 1584. Now were the poor Hollanders truly miserable; desperate of pardon from their Prince, and having none to lead them, none to protect them, but such as were likely to regard their own profit more than theirs. England was the only sanctuary they had now left: to which they sue, offering the Queen thereof the sovereignty of their Provinces, who had, if not a true, yet a plausible title to them: As being generally descended from Edward the third, and Philip his Wife, who was sister, and (as some say) Heir to William Earl of Hainalt, Holland, etc. If Margaret, from whom the right of Spain is derived, were daughter to Earl William, then was our Queen to succeed after Philip, who was rejected: if that Margaret were (as many write) his younger sister, than was our Queen the undoubted Heir: her predecessor Philippe being Earl William's eldest sister. But that Heroic Queen not disputing the right of the title, nor intending to herself any thing, save the honour of relieving her distressed neighbours; and providing for her own estate, by this diversion; took them into her protection. Under which the Belgian affairs succeeded so prosperously (I will not now stand upon the particulars) that before they would hearken to any treaty of peace, they forced the King of Spain to this conclusion, that he treated with them as with a free Estate, abstracted from all right and title, which he might pretend unto the places which they were possessed of. This peace was concluded anno 1609. since which time, they have kept Garrisons well disciplined, and as well paid: so that these Countries have in these late days been the Campus Martius, or School of defence for all Christendom, to which the youth of all Nations repair to see the manner of Fortifications, and learn the art of war. Thus did they for 40 years hold the staff against a most puissant Monarch, and in the end capitulated with great advantage; that it is observed, that whereas all other Nations grow poor by war, these only grow rich. Whereupon it is remarkable to consider into what follies and extremities Princes run, by using their people to the war. The Kings of France place most of their hopes in their Cavalry, because in policy they would not that the Vulgar should be exercised in arms. Lycurgus gave a Law to the Lacedæmonians, that they should never fight often with one enemy: the breaking whereof, made the Thebans a small Commonwealth, to be their equals in power. The Turks won the vast Empire they now possess, by making many and speedy wars. But now that policy being worn out of fashion, we see that (to omit Persia) the little and distracted Kingdom of Hungary, hath for 200 years resisted their Forces. So was it between the Dukes of Austria and the Swissers; and so it is betwixt the Spaniard and Low-countrieses men, who formerly being accounted a dull and heavy people, altogether unfit for the wars; by their continual combating with the Spaniard, are become ingenious, full of action, and great managers of causes appertaining to sights either by Sea or Land. We may hereby also perceive what advantage a small State gaineth by fortifying places and passages; there being nothing which sooner breaketh a great Army, and undoeth a great Prince, then to beleaguer a well fortified town: for that herein he consumeth his time, and commonly loseth his men, credit, and money, as the Romans before Numantia; the great Tu●k in Malta, and Charles of Burgundy before Nancie. For where war is drawn out of the field unto the walls, the Mattock and Spade being more necessary than the Sword and Spear, there the valour of the assailant is little available, because it wanteth its proper object.  
Thus as before we brought these several Estates and Provinces into one hand; so now we have broke them into two, the one part continuing in obedience to the Crown of Spain, the other governing themselves as a State apart. Under the King remain the Dukedoms of Luxembourg, Limbourg, and Brabant, (some few towns excepted) the Marquisate of the Empire, the Earldoms of Hainalt, Namur, Artois and Flanders (except only S. Ivys) and the Lordship or signory of Machlyn; with many places of importance in the Duchy of Gueldres, to countervail the towns withheld from them in Flanders and Brabant. This is by far the greater part of the Country, and more fruitful in regard of the Commodities there naturally growing; but as much inferior to the other in power and riches by reason of their strength in shipping, by which they have the command at Sea, and thereby draw the whole trade of Christendom, driven before at Antwerp, to Amsterdam, and other towns of their confederacy.  
For the government of these Provinces, there is a Regent sent from the Court of Spain, whose authority is generally as great as that of the Kings, save that all matters of moment pass under the King's name, and that all Officers of any great trust and moment are appointed by him: and that all laws, decrees, sentences and negotiations are dispatched in his name. For the assistance of the Regens there is a Privy Council, a Council of State, and a Council of Finances, by whom all things are ordered which conern the public, the Regent's authority cooperating and concurring with them: without which, though they may consult, they can execute nothing. And for the governance and well ordering of the several Provinces, there is in every one of them a Lieutenant, or Provincial Governor, subordinate to the Regent and accountable to him: and in each Province a particular Council held in the King's name, consisting of more or less Counsellors (as the bigness of the Province is) for the most part Doctors or Licentiates of the Civill-Laws, with a Precedent as the head thereof: which in some places they call the Parliament after the manner of the French, and in some the Chancery. To these Courts all the Subjects do resort for justice in causes both Criminal and Civil: to these are brought appeals from inferior Judicatures, such as the Courts of great Towns, and particular Franchises: and from these lieth an appeal to the great Council at Machlyn, supreme and superintendent unto all the rest.  
When any thing is to be done which concerns the profit of the Prince, or otherwise is of public moment, the Regent sendeth out letters in the King's name to command the Estates, that is to say, the Clergy, the Nobility, and the principal Towns of every Province (except those of Luxembourg, Gelder's, West-Friseland and Overyssel, who by special privilege cannot be called out of their own countries) to come before him. The place of their Assembly is for the most part at Brussels, the Court and residence of the Regent, because the Brabanters are also privileged not to be summoned out of the Precincts of their own Province. Where being come, the States assemble not all together, but those of one Province at a time, so one after another: to whom the Precedent or some one of the Council of State proposeth in the Prince's name, that which he demandeth: to which if any town oppose, than all which the rest have done is of no effect; nothing being granted by the Deputies or States of any Province, but with this condition, that all the rest of the Estates do agree unto it. Without this punctual content of all parties interessed, the Prince can impose nothing, by their Laws, upon the Subject, nor alter any thing at all in the public government.  
And as the people are thus privileged in regard of the Prince, so are the Princes and Prelates privileged in regard of the Pope: it being agreed upon between them, 

1. That the Prince is to give Clergie-Benefices, and the Pope to confirm them.  
2. That neither Prelate nor Lay-person may be cited to Rome, but the Pope to send his Delegates or Commissioners into the Country.  
3. The Pope not to give a Benefice nor grant a Pardon, nor send a Bull into the Country without the leave of the Prince.  
4. That no Clergy man can buy lands or other immovables without the Prince's consent. And  
5. That the Prince hath power to visit the Clergy, to see if they be well governed or not, and if they be not, to reform the abuses.    
Great privileges, if considered rightly, greater then which few Protestant Princes do pretend to in their own Dominions.  
As for the Revenue raised by the Spaniard out of his part of this Estate, it is not easy to be guessed at: and of that which is, there comes but little to his Coffers. The expenses of his Court there, is as great as ever under any of the former Regent's, and his charge of entertaining Soldiers for his towns and garrisons, greater than before. Nor doth it now stand with reason of State to lay any arbitrary taxes upon the people, lest he exasperated them to a second Rebellion, or startle them to some new Confederacies against his quiet.  
Under the government of the Confederate Estates, are the Dukedom of Guelderland, excepting some few Towns in the hands of the Spaniard, the entire Earldoms of Holland, Zealand, and Zutphen, the Seigneuries of West-Friseland, Vtrecht, Overyssell, Groining, the town of Sluyes, with the Isle of Cassandt in Flanders, and many pieces of importance in the Duchy of Brabant. This is the lesser part by far, and far inferior to the other in regard of the soil, but the more populous of the two, and by the industry and great trading of the people, the more rich and powerful. Governed after their own old Laws, by the particular Estates of every Province not yet united into one entire body of a Commonwealth: saving that for the better preservation of their confederacy, the Commissioners of the several Provinces do consult together, whom they have honoured with the name of the State's General.  
The Estates of the particular Provinces, elected out of the principal towns and places of most importance, do order the affairs thereof according to their ancient privileges, rights, and customs, as well by themselves as by their Colleagues and Officers whom they do appoint, and that as well for matters of State, as in point of Justice. For administration of the which, the Governor, President, and Counsellors of the Provincial Courts, have the cognizance of all cases both civil and criminal; and in all causes of appeal from inferior Courts, in each of which they do proceed without appeal, making their Acts and Commissions in the name of the said Governor, President, and Council; but pronouncing sentence and executing judgement in the right of the Sovereignty of the said Province. And these Provincial States are chosen generally out of the Plebeians or common people, and the Burghers (at the best) of the greater Townships: the Nobility and Gentry being so worn out, that in all Holland, and Zealand, there are not left above 3 families of Gentlemen; and those compelled to live after the Plebeian fashion for fear of envy, and to avoid the insolency of the saucy Clowns, who out of rudeness and the desire of equality, hate nothing more among them then the name of a Gentleman.  
Out of these Provincial States which hold not for any certain and determinate time, but only during the pleasure of the community for which they serve, are chosen one or more for each several Province, according to the condition and capacity of those which are chosen, to reside at the Hague, there to consult of the affairs which concern the public: but so, that be they more or less out of every Province, they make amongst them but one suffrage when any thing is to be put unto the Vote. And these they call the State's General, first because a collected body out of all the Provinces, and secondly, because they are not properly to deal in any matters of particular concernment, which are determinable absolutely by the State's Provincial, but only in such things as concern the general good of the whole Estate; as treating with Ambassadors, making war and peace, etc. For their assistance in the which, there is a Council of State made up of the Governors and some eminent men of every Province (in which the Ambassador of England, as long as we held Flushing and the other Cautionary Towns, had his voice or suffrage:) by whose advice they dispose of all things which concern the public. But so, that if any difficulty do appear in the business they conclude nothing till they have the approbation and consent of the particular Cities and Provinces for which they are chosen, to whom they are accountable for their administration, and by whom revocable whensoever they please.  
The Revenue of this Estate doubtless is exceeding great, the Army which they keep in continual entertainment, consisting of no less than 30000 men, which they can draw into the field, leaving the Forts and Towns very well provided: yet so well paid, that we never read of any mutiny amongst them for want thereof. The whole charge, with the entertainment of Captains and superior Officers, is said to amount to 500000 l. per annum, raised on the people by Excise laid upon all commodities, and many taxes of like nature so insupportable in themselves and amongst men which would be thought to live in a free State, that should the Spaniard, or any Prince in Christendom lay but half so much upon their Subjects, it would occasion a Revolt. So that whereas one of the first causes of their falling off from the King of Spain, was to free themselves from taxes and impositions, illegally (as they said) enforced upon them, they have drawn upon themselves more arbitrary and illegal payments than any Nation in the World. So little have they got by the change of government. Touching their power at Sea, we have spoke already. All I shall now add to it, is by way of instance, which is, that in the year 1587. the King of Denmark on pretence of some displeasure, arrested 608 ships of theirs, of all sorts at one time, in the Sound; and that the next year after they set out upon very short warning, an hundred good men of war to join with England against the invincible Armada which then threatened both. To conclude, there is nothing wanting to these Countries, wherewith the God of all blessings doth enrich a Nation, but a gracious Prince, unity of Religion, and a quiet Government: which if it pleased the Almighty to confer upon them, they would surpass all neighbouring States in treasure, potency, content, and all worldly happiness.  
There are in these Countries, 

Archbishops 3.  
Bishops 15.  
Universities 7. Viz. 

Louvain,  
Douai,  
Liege,  
Leyden,  
Harderwick,  
Franeker.  
Groining,       
And thus much of Belgium.   

OF GERMANY.  
GERMANY is bounded on the East with Prussia, Poland, and Hungary; on the West with France, Switzerland, and Belgium; on the North with the Baltic Seas, and some part of Denmark; on the South with the Alps, which part it from Italy. By which account the modern Germany much differeth from that described by Tacitus, and others of the Roman writers: that comprehending the three Kingdoms of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden, with so much of the Kingdom of Poland as lieth on this side of the River Vistula; but bounded on the East with the Rhine, and on the South with the Danow: the modern Germany containing on the further banks of those Rivers, 5 whole Roman Provinces, that is to say, Noricum, Ripense, and Mediterraneum, Rhoetia secunda, Belgica, and Germania prima, with some parts of Rhoetia prima, and Germania secunda, but terminated with the Danes, and the Baltic Sea.  
It was first called thus by the Romans (as some conceive) who seeing the people both in customs, speech, and course of life, so like those of Gallia, called them the Germans to the Gauls: the word Germanus in the Latin, signifying a Brother of the whole blood, (as our Lawyer's phrase it) that is to say, a brother both by father and mother: those which have the same mother but divers fathers, being called Fratres uterini. And of this mind is Strabo, who speaking of the great resemblance which was betwixt these Nations, in manners, speech, customs, and way of life, concludes it thus, that the Romans did with very good reason call them Germans, cum fratres eos Gallorum hoc nomine vellent ostendere; intending to signify by that name that they were the brethren of the Gauls. But this is to be understood of those people only which dwelled next to Gaul, and not of all the Nations which inhabited in this vast Continent, according to the ancient extent thereof: it being very well observed by Tacitus, that Germany was at first Nationis non Gentis nomen, the name of some of the Nations only, not of all the Country: the name in process of time spreading over all that large tract of ground, and those scattered Nations which were either conquered by them, or incorporate with them. Others will have the name to be merely Dutch, deriving it from Gerard, which signifieth all, and the word man, signifying in that language as in ours; whence also they derive the name of Almans; by which they would imply that the Almans or Germans are a very warlike Nation, a people that have in them nihil nisi virile, nothing not worthy of a man. Bocartus somewhat near to this, telling us that Gerard in the ancient gallic did signify as much as Guerre in the modern French, would have them at their first coming over the Rhine to be called Germans by the Gauls, that is to say, men of war, (or Gens d' Arms in the present French) by reason of the great and many victories obtained by them.  
The like diversity I find for the name of Almans: For though some gave them the name of Almans from the same original from whence they fetch the name of Germans, as was said before: yet others as probably conjecture, that they had that name because they consisted of so many several Nations coming out of the North and North-east hither, that they seemed to be an Hotch-poth of all sorts of men, kneaded into one name and Nation, which is the conceit of Asinius Quadratus. But for my part I do conceive (supposing the name of Almans to be Dutch originally) that the whole Country was not called Almain, till such time as the Princes of the Dukedom of Almai● (since called Suevia or Schweben) did possess the Empire: which continuing in that potent family near 100 years, might very well occasion them to be called the Emperors of Almain, or the Almain race, and so impart that name to the Empire also. And for the Almains naturally and properly so called, (of whom we shall speak more when we come to Suevia) I see no Etymology more agreeable to true Antiquity, then to derive the name from Mannus the son of Tuisco, one of their Gods and a principal Founder of this Nation, (Tuisconem Deum & Filium Mannum, originem gentis conditoresque,) as is said by Tacitus, the people being called Ale manni (with a double n) in all ancient writers, as men that did derive themselves from this Mannus the son of Tuisco. In like sort as I think the Marco-manni inhabiting the countries of Moravia, were so called, as the Manni of the Marches or out-borders of Germany, and not the Mark-mans', as if they were men of mark, the only men of fame and honour of all those Nations: which might as well be pressed from the Dutch original, as that of All-man, in the meaning by them pretended. And unto this opinion I am swayed the rather, because I find the Dutch Nation generally so much inclined to derive their Original from Tuisco, (from whom the Teutones inhabiting about Brandenbourg may well fetch their Pedigree) the name of Dutch-land, or Dutchmen, coming near in sound to Tuisc-land, and Tuisc-men: In which I shall subscribe to Verstegans opinion, though for the most part I look upon him but as the second part of Goropius B●canus.  
But being the Etymologies of the names of most ancient Nations are very uncertain, and for the most part founded on conjectures only, let us leave the name a while, and survey the Country: the length whereof (according to the truest and exactest measurement) from East to West, that is to say, from the Vistula, or Wixell to the Rhine, is estimated at 840 Italian miles; the breadth from North to South, that is to say, from the Ocean to the Town of Brixen in Tyrol, 740 of the same miles. So that the figure of it being near a square it may take up 3160 miles in compass, or there abouts. Situate in the northern temperate Zone, betwixt the middle Parallels of the sixth and tenth Climates, the longest day in the most Southern parts, being 15 hours and an half, and in the most Northern, 17 hours and a quarter.  
In this compass and extent of ground are supposed to live 10 millions of people. The men of the poorer sort laborious, painful, and of a sincere and honest carriage; the Nobles for the most part either Scholars or Soldiers, and true lovers of honour, though Tacitus hath otherwise resolved it, affirming that the Gauls fight for liberty, the Belgians for honour, and the Germans for gain. Which yet is true enough of the common soldiers, who if they fail of pay, fail in courage presently. Of both sorts they are generally tall and big, of great bones, much flesh, and large sinews: but commonly of such a phlegmatic constitution, that they have not spirit enough to manage such a mass of flesh as they bear about them. Which want of natural heat to concoct that humour, makes them for the most part to be men of a bright, or light-brown hair, and fair complexions. They are little addicted to Venus, and very much to Bacchus; whence the Proverb, Vivere Germanorum est bibere; and the old Verses, 
Germani possunt cunctos tolerare labores,  
O utinam possent tam bene ferre sitim.  
The Dutch themselves to labour well inure;  
O would they thirst could half so well endure.  This love unto their liquor, together with their natural temper, maketh them fat and corpulent. Whereupon Pope Julio the second, styling the Spaniards birds of the air, because of their ambition; the Venetians and Genoeses, fishes of the sea, because so much accustomed to Navigation: called the Germans by the name of the Beasts of the field. And when Augustus was resolved to take unto himself the Supreme government of Rome, he was advised by Agrippa to choose a guard of Germans to attend upon him. The reason was (as Dion giveth it) because in those great bodies there was little malice hidden, and less subtlety; and that they were a people that took more pleasure to be commanded, then to command. In matters of war this people have been formerly in a measure famous; yet not so much by the valour or conduct of their Captains (for they have had but few such) as by their own hardiness. They withstood the Romans 210 years, afflicting and troubling them more in that space, than either the Carthaginians, Spaniards, Gauls, or Parthians; and even at the last (saith Tacitus) Triumphati magis sunt quamvicti. In our times the Rutters and Lance-knights of Germany, (for so they call their horse and foot) have been much employed: but more by reason of their numbers, easily raised out of so large a Country, than any opinion of their valour; being slow of motion, dull of apprehension, fearful of putting any thing to the chance of war. By reason of which fearfulness as they are very cruel upon all advantages, not sparing either age or sex when they get the victory: so are they apt to run upon any Alarm, not to be rallied, if once routed, upon any persuasions. Insomuch as Charles Count of Mansfield, General of an Army of 50000 sighting men, but most of this Nation, was forced to suffer a small Army of 10000 Turks to pass by his trenches, being the● strongly encamped before Strigonium, (now Gran) a Town of Hungary, and to victual the town before his face: not daring to set upon them or disturb their purpose, for fear lest being lustily charged, his Germane would give back and endanger all. And yet besides these weaknesses they have some great faults. One of which is a custom, if their wages be not duly paid, (though it be in the very midst of a battle) to cry Guelt, Guelt, throw down their weapons, and suffer themselves to be cut in perces by the Enemy. And so they served Frederick the elector Palatine at the battle of Prague. The other is an extreme humour of spoil and plunder: on which they are so bend wheresoever they come, that such as entertain them have just cause to say that they receive more damage by them then they do by their enemies. Two undeceiveable notes of mercenary valour.  
The women are of a good complexion, but by reason of their intemperance in eating and drinking much given to corpulency: women of a good carriage (as the saying is) good Bearers, and as fruitful breeders. Scrvilely obsequious to their husbands, whom many of good rank serve at the table with trenchers and other necessaries, and take away when he hath done, eating the residue apart with and amongst their maids: scarce sitting down with him once a week, and then too at the lower end, or at some such distance. And though the women by their laws have a property in the goods which they bring with them at their marriage, or are given them after, (so as the husband hath but the use of them only) and may dispose of them by their last will at the time of their death; yet is their condition thereby little better: the husband being no less churlish and imperious than he would be otherwise. Which made Caracalla to say often, that only that Nation knew how to rule their Wives, which added the feminine article to the Sun, and the masculine to the Moon, as the Germans do. Most of them as well Wives as Virgins (except persons of honour) use to go bare sooted within doors, and seldom put on shoes or stockings but when they are to go abroad upon their occasions. A thing that seems the more strange in regard of the extreme coldness of the Country, which is so fierce, that generally they lodge between two Feather beds both in summer and winter: and in most houses have their stoves, of which the doors and windows are kept very close, as well to retain the heat as to keep out the cold. Which though they may be useful and inoffensive in gentlemen's houses; yet in the common Inns where all sorts of people are necessitated to throng together, the ill smells, never purged by admitting any fresh air, are ready to stifle and choke up the spirits of raw Travellers not accustomed to them.  
The diet of Germany France and Italy, is by a Traveller thus censured: the Germans have much meat, but fluttishly dressed; the French little, but neatly cooked; the Italians neither the one nor the other. And to say truth, the Germans have meat enough: the people being generally of good stomaches, and either by nature or ill custom, excessive both in eating and drinking, seldom rising from the table till they have consumed all which was set before them. Insomuch as in some places it is provided by Law, that in their feasts they shall not sit above five hours at the table. During which time if by intemperance either in eating or drinking, a man disgorge his foul stomach in his fellows lap, or piss under the table, it is no disgrace to him, nor at any time taken notice of to his reproach. Which humour of gormandizing and excessive drinking, is not only cherished among the Vulgar, but even amongst their greatest Princes, who besides what they do in this kind themselves, have their drinking champions, as well to answer all challenges, as to challenge all comers: contending with each other, as a point of State, whose cellar shall afford the greatest and most capable Vessels.  
The title of the Fathers descend to all the children; every son of a Duke being a Duke; and every daughter, a Duchess: a thing which the Italians hold so ridiculous, that they put it in the forefront of this facetious Satire. The Dukes and Earls of Germany, the Dons of Spain, the Monsieurs of France, the Bishops of Italy, the Nobility of Hungary, the Lairds of Scotland, the Knights of Naples, and the younger brethren of England, make a poor company. For by this common assuming of the Father's honour, and parting his lands among all the brethren; the Nobility is beyond reason multiplied, and no loss impoverished: there being not long since 17 Princes of Anhalt, and 27 Counts of mansfield's; to most of which, their Arms have been the best part of their riches; & nihil nisi arma & manus, & in his ●mnia; as Tacitus once said of the ancient Britain's. And yet there is not one of this poor Nobility that will vouchsafe to marry with the daughter of the wealthiest Merchant; or suffer any of their sisters to be married to any under the degree of a Nobleman: nor any juster cause of disheriting their children, then ignoble marriages, never permitting the issue of such a Bed to succeed in any of their ●ees, Estates, or titles, by means whereof though they debar themselves of such accessions of wealth as matches of that kind might bring them: yet to the great honour of their generosity in this particular, they preserve the pure ●●ream of their blood from running into muddy channels, and keep the spirits of brave men though they want the fortunes.  
The Languages here spoken are the French in Lorraine, and some towns of the Bishop of Triers; the Italian in the highest parts of Turol, which lie next to the Commonwealth of Ve●ice; the Sclavonian spoken in Bohemia, Moravia, and some parts of Lusatia: and the high Dutch, the general Language of the Country. A language very ancient doubtless (though I am not so much a Goropian as to think it sp●ke in Paradise, or before the Flood) and such as by reason of the little or no impression which the Roman Armies made upon this contrary hath less commixture with the Latin, than any which is used in these Western parts, (the Welsh excepted) and is very harsh by reason of its many Consonants.  
This Country was esteemed by Tacitus to be rude and barren, containing nothing but unpeopled Forests, unprofitable Heaths, and unhealthy Pools Germaniam informem terris, asperam coelo, tristem cultu a pectuque, as he further addeth. And such no doubt it was in those times wherein Tacitus lived: the people not being civilised, nor the Country cultivated, nor any means found out to rectify the sharpness of that Northern air. But he who doth observe it now cannot but confess that there is no Country in the World either better planted, or replenished with more goodly and gallant Cl●ies: being also in most parts both pleasant, healthy and profitable, abounding with mines of silver, and interior metals plentiful in corn and wines, with which they supply the defect of other Nations; as also with Flesh, Fish, Linen, Quicksilver, Allom, Saffron, Armour and other iron-workes. The AraSble lands so spacious in the Eastern parts, that the husband man going forward with his Plough in the morning, turned not back again till noon; so making but two furrows for his whole days work. For this Verstegan is my Author, and if it be not credible let him bear the blame.  
Soldiers of most eminency in the Elder times, were 1. Arminius the Prince of the Cherusci, who overthrew Quintilius Varus and the Roman Legions, 2. Witikind the last King of the Saxons: for the middle ages, 3. Otho the first, 4. Frederick Barbarossa, 5. Rodulph of Habsburg, Emperors and Kings of Germany, 6. Henry surnamed the Lion, Duke of Saxony. 5. And in the last Centurie of years, 6. Frederick the second Electo●r Palatine, who made good Vienna against the Turks; 7. Albert of Brandenburg, of whom more hereafter. 8. Earnest Earl of Mansfeild, 9 John George of Jagerndorf, 10. Albert Wallenstein Duke of Fridland, and divers other of late days.  
Scholars of note the elder times afforded none, nor the middle many; learning being here so rare in the middle of the eighth Centurie, that Vigilius Bishop of Saltzburg was condemned of heresy, for holding that there were some Antipodes. In the next age there flourished Rhubanus Maurus, Haimo of Halberstade, Walusrians Strabus, men learned for the times they lived in. And in the following times, Ockam a stout defender of the rights of the Empire against the encroachments of the Pope; Otho Frisingensis the Historian, Albertus Magnus, the Philosopher, of which last it is said that he made the Statue of a man, which with the help of artificial Engines could speak articulately; and was the work of 50 years. Then in the days of our Grandfathers, we have 1. Martin Luther, that great instrument of the reformation; 2. Philip Melanchthon his Coadjutor in that work, but of more excellent parts, and far better temper: thence called the Phoenix of that Age. 3. Joachim Camerarius, a great friend of Philip; 4. Martin Chemnitius, a solid and laborious writer; 5. Flacius Iflyricus the chief Author of the Magdeburgian Centuries and Father of the Rigid Lutherans; 6. Sebastian Munster, an industrious Cosmographer, and a learned Linguist; 7. Silburgius, and 8. Buxdorfius, as great Linguists as he: not to descend to further instances in those, who have so filled the Marts of Francfort in these later times.  
But the greatest excellency of this people lieth in the Mechanical part of learning, as being eminent for many Mathematical experiments, strange water-works, medicinal extractions, Chemistry, and the Art of Printing, and inventions of like noble nature, to the no less benefit than Admiration of the World. Amongst which I cannot choose but instance in that work of Regiomantanus, an excellent Mathematician and a cunning Artisan, spoken of by Keckerman, who at the coming of the Emperor Maximilian to the City of Nuremberg, made a wooden Eagle, which flew a quarter of a mile out of the Town to meet him, and being come to the place where he was, returned back of its own accord, and so accompanied him to his lodging. A thing if true (as the Relator was a man of too much gravity to abuse the World with an untruth) exceedingly beyond that Miracle of a flying Dove, for which Archytas is so famed amongst the Ancients exceeded oenly by himself in a like invention, which was that of an Iron fly, (the greater Miracle of Art, because less in quantity) which at a Feast, to which he had invited some of his especial friends, flew from his hand about the room, and returned again, as is affirmed by Peter Ramus. Expressed thus by Divine Du Bartas, 
Once as this Artist more with mirth than meat  
Feasted some friends, whom he esteemed great,  
From his learned hand an Iron fly flew out,  
And having flown a perfect Round, about,  
With wearied wings returned unto her Master,  
And as judicious on his arm he placed her.  
O divine wit that in the narrow Womb  
Of a small fly could find sufficient room  
For all those Springs, Wheels, Counterpoise, and chains,  
Which stood in stead of life, and spur, and reins.   
And amongst these I reckon Bertholdus Swart a Franciscan Friar, the inventor (though by accident) of the fatal instrument, the Gun. Studious in Chemistry, he made mingled dried earth, sulphur, and some other ingredients, which he had put into a Mortar, covered with a stone: and striking fire to light a candle, as the night came on, a spark by chance fell into the mortar, and catching hold of the Sulphur and other minerals with great violence blew up the stone wherewith it was covered. Amazed at which he made trial severally of these ingredients to find out which of them it was which produced that effect, which having discovered he caused an iron pipe to be made, crammed it with Sulphur, Saltpetre and stones; and putting fire to it, saw with what violent noise and fury it discharged itself. This invention he is said to have first communicated to the Venetians, anno 1330, or thereabouts: who having been often vanquished by the Genoys, and driven almost to a necessity of yielding to them, by the help of their Guns, (Bombards they were then called) gave unto their enemies a notable discomfiture. And this was the first battle that ever those warlike pieces had a part in: which not long after, put to silence all the engines and devices, wherewith the Ancients were wont to make their batteries. The next that made use of this instrument, were the inhabitants of the Baltic Sea; and not long after them, the English, at the siege of Calais, anno 1347. about which time, they began also to be used in Spain. The French, it seemeth, learned the use of them from the English: and the first benefit received by them, was the death of that famous Leader, Thomas Montacute, Earl of Salisbury; who at the siege of Orleans was slain with a great shot, anno 1425. The Turks are beholding for them, to the wars they had with the Venetians; beholding I say, for notwithstanding the harm received by them at first, yet afterwards growing expert in managing of them, they gave unto Vssan Cassanes, and Hysmael, two of the most mighty Emperors of Persia, two memorable overthrows, by the help of their great Ordnance only. The Portugals were in this Art the Tutors to the Persians: for as Solyman the Turkish Emperor objected against them, they not only aided Tamas the Sophi, with certain Harcubuciers, but also sent him workmen to show him the use and making of Artillery. These great pieces at the first invention were rude, unwieldy, and charged with stone bullets only: but by degrees they came to that perfection, both for the wall and the hand, which they now have. Whether now Archery or Gunning be to be preferred, I stand not here to determine; only this I am sure of, that victories have been of late purchased with less expense of blood, and life, than ever formerly. But of this Theme more perhaps hereafter, when we shall come to take the Parthian Archery into consideration.  
The Religion of this Country it is not easy to name, considering so many are here allowed; Jew's being intermixed with Christians; and these divided into Papists and Protestants; the latter also subdivided into Lutherans, Calvinists, etc. The Christian faith first planted here, if Dorotheus Bishop of Tyre be of any credit, by S. Thomas surnamed Didymus one of the twelve. But being there is little trust unto his Relations, the best way were to say with the Magdeburgians and the Martyrologies, that the Germans had not all the same Apostle: that the Gospel was first preached amongst the Rhoetians and Vindeici, by S. Lucius of Cyrene; amongst those of Noricum by S. Mark; by S. Crescens at Mentz, S. Clemens at Mets in Lorraine; all of them Apostolical men, and of the number of the 70. after that by S. Maternus at Colen, and by S. Eucherius at Triers. That the faith was planted very early in these countries, Irenaeus the renowned Bishop of Lions, anno 170. is sufficient evidence; who takes notice of it: and that it prospered very well and took very good root, appeareth by the Bishop of Ments, Triers, Worms, Spires, Basil, and Strasbourg, subscribing to the Council of Colen in the reign of Constantius the son of Constantine the Great, anno 347. But the light hereof being extinguished for a time by those barbarous nations who fell upon these outparts of the Roman Empire; began to shine again, on the conversion of the French, in all parts of this country: the Conquests and example of this puissant Nation giving great encouragement thereunto. In which as those of other Countries do not want their honour, so the greatest part thereof belongs to the English Saxons: Willibrod the first Bishop of Vtrecht, Willibald of Aichstat, Swibert of Virden, Willibald of Breme, and specially Boniface the Archbishop of Mentz, being most gloriously fortunate in that sacred service. The Moravians, Bohemians, and others farther off, came not in till afterwards. Not fully converted to the faith, they began to suck in the corruptions of the Church of Rome; discerned and opposed by John hus, and Hierome of Prague, Bohemian Divines: who by reason of the marriage of King Richard the second of England, with the daughter of Wenceslaus Emperor and King of Bohemia, had opportunity to be acquainted with the preachings of Wiclef, the points of whose Doctrine they approved and propagated. But these two being burnt at Constance by the decree of that Council, their followers in Bohemia would not so give over: but after many sufferings and much bloodshed obtained at last a toleration of the Emperor Sigismond their King: more able to make good his word in his own dominions, than he had been to save the two Martyrs from the fire at Constance, to whom he had granted his safe conduct for their coming and going. In this condition they remained, under the name of those of the Sub utraque or Calistini, because of their Administering the Sacrament in both kinds, till the rising of Luther: who justly offended at the impious and unwarrantable Assertions of Friar Tekel, and others of the Pope's Pardon-mungers; first opposed their doings, and after questioned that authority by which they acted: falling from one point to another, till he had shaken the foundations of the Roman Fabric. Of the success of his undertaking we shall speak more punctually in the Dukedom of Saxony, the place of his birth, the Scene of this great Action, and the proper Sphere of his Activity. Suffice it now to say, that his doctrine was so well approved of, that the Dukes of Saxony, Brunswick, Lunenbourg, Wirtenberg, Mecklenberg, and Pomerania; the marquis of Branderbourg, the Lantgraves of Hassia, and most of the Free and Imperial Cities did adhere unto it, who from their Protestation made at Spires (the Imperial Chamber) to that effect, anno 1529. had the name of Protestants. The next year following they delivered in the Confession of their faith at Auspurg, a City of Suevia, thence called Confessio Augustana; authorized, or tolerated at the least, after a long war with variable success on both sides, by the Emperor Charles the fifth at the Pacification made at Passaw, anno 1552. and afterwards more fully at Ausbourg, (where their Confession had first been tendered) anno 1555.  
In the mean time arose up Zuinglius amongst the Swissers, of whose both Doctrine and success we have spoken there. These not communicating Counsels went two several ways, especially in the points of Consulstantiation and the Real presence, not reconciled in their times, nor like to be agreed upon amongst their followers. For Calvin, rising into the esteem and place of Zuinglius added, some Tenets of his own to the former doctrines, touching Predestination, freewill, Universal Grace, Final perservance (points fitter for the Schools than a popular Auditory) by which the differences were widened, and the breach made irreparable: the cause being followed on both sides with great impatience, as if they did not strive so much for truth, as victory. And of the two those of the Lutheran party seemed more violent (though the other was altogether as irreconcilable) who could not choose but stomach it to see themselves undermined and blown by a new form of doctrine, not tolerated in the Empire but under colour of conformity to the Confession of Ausburg. For Zuinglianisme being entertained amongst the French, a busy and active people, spread itself further in few years than it was propagated by the Swissers (men of the same temper with the Dutch) in all times before. Insomuch as it did not only prevail in France, but by the reputation of Calvin, and the diligence of his followers, was wholly entertained in the Kingdom of Scotland, the Netherlands, and even in Germany itself; in which it got footing in all the territories of the Counts Palatines of the Rhine, in some of the Lantgraves of Hassia, in the Imperial City of Strasburg, many of the Hanse-towns, and amongst other Princes and Free Cities of inferior note. The rest of Germany containing the Patrimonial Estates of the house of Austria, the Dukedoms of Bavaria and Lorraine, the territories of the three Spiritual Electours, and of all the other Bishoprics in the hands of the Clergy, some of the Marquesses of Baden, part of the subjects of Cleve, and but three of the Imperial Cities (and those small ones too) that is to say, Gmund, Vberlinque, and Dinekell-Spuell (unless some more be added by the late great successes of the house of Austria) remain in their obedience to the See of Rome: yet so that there be many Protestants in Bohemia, Austria, and in other the Estates of the Popish Princes; as there be Papists in the Free Cities of Frankford, Nurenberg, Vlm, Aken, and some other places, besides the late increase of them in both Palatinates.  
As for the Government of their Churches those that continue in obedience of the See of Rome, are under the old form of Archbishops and Bishops: co-aevall in all Germany (as in most places else) with the faith itself. The Calvinists (by which name the Zuinglian●st now also passeth, if not eaten out) submit themselves for doctrine, discipline, and forms of worship, to calvin's Model, whereof we have spoke more at large when we were in Geneva. And for the Lutherans, they have divided the Episcopal function from the Revenues; giving those last to some of their younger Princes, with the title of Administrators of such a Bishopric; the function or jurisdiction to some of the more eminent Clergy, with the title of a Superintendent, assigning to them a priority both of place and power before other Ministers; which they enjoy for term of life, together with some liberal maintenance in proportion to it. In other things, as habit and title of dignity, they differ not at all from the other Ministers: and over them in place of Archbishops they have their general Superintendents; all of them of each sort accountable to the supreme Ecclesiastical Consistory (as formerly to the Provincial or national Synod) made up of Counsellors of State, and the heads of the Clergy: so that the form is much the same as in elder times, the greatest Alteration being in the names; and that no other in a manner then by changing the old Greek word Episcopus, into the new Latin word Superintendens: both signifying an Overseer though in different languages. And so ex Graecis bonis, Latinas fecere non bonas, in the Poet's words: which is in brief the total of the Innovation. And as they do conform thus far to the elder times in form of government, so do they also come up to them in their forms of worship, retaining still a settled and prescribed Liturgy for all their Churches, most of the holy days observed in the former Ages, the Cross in Baptism kneeling at the Communion, and many other innocent and significant Ceremonies, commended to the Church by most pure Antiquity. In point of maintenance as defective as the Cal●inists are, few of their Ministers having Tithes, most of them pensions or stipends, and those small ones also, seldom exceeding two or 300. Guldens, besides wood for fuel, corn and some other necessaries.  
Now because mention hath been made of the H●●se-towns and Imperial Cities, we are to understand that the Cities of this Country are of three sorts. 1. Such as are holden in possession by some of the Princes in way of inheritance, part of their patrimony and estates, as Heidelberg, Vienna, Munchen, Wittenberg, etc. 2. Such as are held originally of the Empire itself, which are called Free Cities for their great Prerogatives of coining money, and governing themselves by their local Ordinances; Imperial in regard they know no Lord or protector but the Emperor only, to whom they pay two third parts of such contributions as are assessed in the Assemblies or general Diets, and 1500. Florins yearly for themselves and their territories. They are in number about 60. many of which are of a fair and large estate, such as are Nurenberg, Ausburg, Ingolstade, Spires, Worms, etc. Of which thus Guicciardine. Those (saith he) are called Free Cities, which acknowledging by a certain determinate tribute the authority of the Empire, do notwithstanding in all other things govern themselves after their own laws, not seeking to amplify their territories, but defend their Liberties. 3. The third sort is of those which are called Hanse-towns, or Hansteden, that is, (say some) An zee steden, Towns upon the Sea; such as those were who first entered into this confederacy, but at this time the name extends to many inland Cities, and of no great trading, joined with them in a league for their common defence and preservation. A league made first against the Danes, and the Earls of Holst by some of the Maritime Towns bordering next unto them, that is to say, Lubeck, Hambourg, Rostock, Wismar, Stralesund, and Luneburg: but afterwards many other of the Imperial Cities and Towns of trade, associated with them in an offensive and defensive league against all enemies whatsoever. In number about 72. those of Livonia and Prussi● being taken into the reckoning, many of which are able to put to sea 150. good sail of ships: such as lie more within the land contributing in money or otherwise to the common charge. First hanselled by Waldomar the 3. of Denmark, whom they vanquished in a naval battle. After that growing into credit, and driving a great trade in most parts of Christendom, they enjoyed many large and ample privileges, wheresoever they came: called amongst us sometime by the name of Easterlings from their Easternly dwellings; and Merchants of the Steel-yard from the place where they stowed their commodities; and Guilda Teutonicorum in regard of their nation, for the most part Dutch. But the English learning so much wit at the last as to make use of their own shipping, they began here by little and little to decay; and are now almost worn out of memory with us, though still of good esteem and credit in other Countries.  
The principal Rivers hereof are 1. Danubius, or the Danow, which rising out of Nigra Sylva, or Schwartzen Walled as the Germans call it, at a little Village of Schwaben called Don Eschingen, about two Dutch miles from the shores of the Rhone, passeth through Schwaben, Bavaria, Austria, etc. by the Cities of ulm, Regensberg, Passaw, Vienna, Rab, Buda, and Belgrade, beyond which it beginneth to be called Ister, by which name most generally known amongst the Grecians: and receiving into its channel, from the long tracts of the Alps, the Sarmatian and Carpathian mountains, about 60. navigable Rivers, besides lesser Brooks, disgorgeth his full stomach by seven several mouths (the names whereof we shall find in Dacia) into the lap of the Euxine sea; the whole length of his course 1500 miles. Insomuch as we may say with a modern Poet, Cedere Danubius se tibi Nile negat. 
O seven-mouthed Nile, I plainly see,  
Danow will scarce give way to thee.   
2. Rhine, of whose original and course we have spoke more fully when we were in Belgium: which running from Switzerland through Germany and Belgium, after a course of 800. miles, emptieth itself into the Germane Ocean. The like doth also the 4. Elb (Albis) after a journey of more than 400 miles; arising about the lower skirts of Bohemia, and passing by Magdeburg and Brunswick, and so betwixt the Dukedom of Holstein (now part of Denmark) and the rest of Germany. 4. Odera, which hath its fountain in the hithermost parts of Moravia, and after it hath run its course through Brandenburg and Pomerania, of some 300. miles in length falleth at last into the Baltic sea. 5 Visurgis or the Weser, which issuing out of the hills of Turingia runneth through Hassia and Westphalen, to the City of Breme, not far from which it falls into the Germane Ocean. 6. Vistula, or the Wixel, which rising out of the Carpathian mountains betwixt Poland and Hungary, first passeth by Cracovia the chief City of Pole, then betwixt Pomeren and Prussia, and so into the Baltic sea: the ancient boundary of this Country dividing it from Sarmatia Europaea. 7. Maenus, or the Main, which hath its spring in the mountains of Bohemia, and passing by the Cities of Bamberg, and Weirtzberg, is received into the Rhine beneath Francford. 8. Amasus or the Ems, which hath its fountain near Paderborn in Westphalia, and passing between the two Friselands falleth into the Germane Ocean not far from Emden.  
Chief mountains of this mighty Country, besides the Alps spoken of before, which run in a long tract betwixt it and Italy, are 1. Abnoba, now called Schwartze walled, (the present name both of this Mountain and the Forest of Martiana which doth overshadow it) out of which rise the springs of Danow, and the Neccar, two principal Rivers of this Country. 2. The Sudetae, encircling Bohemia, covered with the woods called anciently Gab●eta and Luna, now called the Wolds of Passaw and Behaimer from the places adjoining. 3. Gretius in Austria, now called Culemberg, the ancient bounds betwixt Pannonia and Noricum, two Roman Provinces. 4. Vogesus, commonly called Vauge, and by some French writers Le Mont de Faucities, which encircling Lorraine divideth it on the East and South from Elsats and the County of Burgundy. As for the Forests of this Country, besides those spoken of already, that of most note was the Forest of Hercinia (of which all the rest were but limbs or branches) the beginning whereof was about the borders of Switzerland and Alsatia, from thence running Eastward along the course of the Danow unto Transilvania, and thence declining on the left hand through the vast Countries of the Lituanians, Moscovites, and Russes, in which last there are still many vast deserts of it; the greatest part thereof in Germany being long since consumed; in place whereof are many goodly cornfields and wel-built Cities. A wood so formidable to the Romans that they durst never venture to search the end of it: the length thereof after the end of sixty day's journey being undiscoverable, and the further search into it quite laid aside.  
These Boundaries and Landmarks being thus described, we shall the better follow the chorography of this great continent, according to the several Principalities and Estates therein: having first taken a survey of the ancient condition of it, with so much of the story as concerns the whole, before it came to be divided into so many hands. The Country first planted by the posterity of Gomer, who descending from the Mountains of Albania, their first seat, in memory thereof first called Gomerini, after Cimmerini, by which name known to Pliny, Ptolemy and others of the ancient writers: removed into the more fruitful plains of Phrygia, and there built the City Cimmeris which Pliny speaks of. But that small Province proving of too narrow a compass to contain his Offspring, and the adjoining Countries being taken up in the former Plantations, they removed unto the Northwest of the Euxine sea, where we find a City of their building called Cimmerium, mentioned both by Pliny and Strabo; and the adjoining strait or Fretum, called by the name of Bosphorus Cimmerius, by the Greeks and Latins. Driven from these dwellings by the more powerful Scythians, they spread themselves into the West, where they began to be called Cimbri: and by that name, and under those of the Ambrones, and Teutones, several branches of them, intended an invasion and conquest both of Gaul and Italy: wherein they had prevailed in all probability, nisi isti seculo Marius contigisset, had not Marius happened to have lived in that Age; by whom discomfitted and destroyed. That these Gomerians or Cimbre, were the first inhabitants of Gaul, Germany, and all the nations of the North and West of Europe, is generally agreed upon by all the learned; divided into several nations, and those also subdivided into lesser tribes, and more obscure families: amongst which those of Teutones, or Tuiscones, from which the Dutch do so affect to derive themselves, might be some of the principal there settled, and not well pleased with that desert dwelling, such of them as dwelled nearest to the Rhine passed over that River; and beating the Gauls further up into the Country, possessed themselves of their dwellings: enjoying them (till conquered by Julius Caesar) without any Rival. But Caesar, moved with the complaints of the Gauls, and the insolences of Ariovistus a king of the Germans (for by that name for the Reason's aforesaid the Romans called them) marched into their Quarters: the Roman Legionaries being so afraid of this dreadful Enemy, ut testamenta passim in principiis scriberntur, (saith the Historian) that many of them made their testaments at the Gates of their Camp, before they fell upon the Enemy. Vanquished by Caesar, and Ariovistus being fled over the Rhine, the Romans by command of their General made a bridge over the River, and rather terrified then conquered the neighbouring Germans; more fully brought into subjection by Drusus the adopted son of Augustus Caesar, from thence called Germanicus; by whom the Rhoeti and Norici, then lying out of the bounds of Germany, (now included in it) were subdued also. So that the whole conquests of the Romans upon this Country, as it is now bound, contained no more than the Provinces of Germania and Belgica prima, with part of Germania Secunda, belonging unto the Diocese of Gaul, the greatest part of the two Rhoetia's, being under the Diocese of Italy; Noricum Mediterraneum and Ripense, with some part of Pennonia, parts of the Diocese of Illyricum: none of them lying within the bounds of the ancient Germany. For the Germans did not endure the yoke so long, as to be brought within the number of the Roman Provinces. Provoked with the lust and insolences of Quintilius Varus, who succeeded Drusus in that charge, they set upon him under the conduct of Arminius, a chief Prince amongst them; kill him and utterly cut off three Legions. After which defeat Augustus laid aside the affairs of Germany, confining his Empire within the Rhine, which Drusus had extended to the banks of the Ocean. Hac claede factum, ut imperium quod in littore Oceani non steterat, in ripa Rheni fluminis staret, saith the Historian. Nor did the Romans only forbear to revenge this loss, by making a new war upon them; but seemed more careful to defend themselves against their invasions, then to incur the hazard of a new defeat: quartering eight Legions with their several wings and Aides on the shores of the Rhine, and four upon the Banks of the Danow; to keep these people from encroaching on the Romans Provinces. But the fatal period of that Empire, drawing on apace, the French, Burgundians, Almans and other Dutch nations break through those Guards, dispossess the Romans of all Gaul, Rhoetia, and Noricum, which they share amongst them: till in the end, the French prevailing over the rest, extend their Empire over all the modern Germany; chiefly performed by the valour of Charles the Great, created Emperor of the West by the people of Rome, and crowned with the Imperial Crown by Pope Leo the 4. on Christmasse-day, anno 801. So that now the old Prophacie of the Druids, concerning the removing of the Empire into the West, came to be accomplished; though Tacitus in his time accounted it for a vain and idle prediction. For when Civilis raised a Rebellion amongst the Batavi (the Hollanders and parts adjoining) against Vespasian, then newly made Emperor: possessionem rerum humanarum, Transalpinis gentibus portendi, Druidae canebant; the Druids prophecled of the translation of the Empire to the Transalpine nations. Accomplished, as before is said, in the person of Charles the Great, King of France and Germany, by whom divided, (for the better ordering or Governance of it, into West-France, or West-reicts, in the barbarous Latin of those times called Westrasia; containing the modern France, and so much of the Netherlands as lieth on the French side of the River Maes, and Ostenrich (i. e. the Eastern Kingdom) in the Latin of those times Austrasia, containing so much of the modern Germany and Pannonia, as was possessed by the French, with the rest of the Netherlands: this after subdivided into the Kingdoms of Lorraine and Germany, whereof the first contained all Germany within the Rhine, together with the Belgic Provinces before described, the Counties of Flanders and Artois excepted only; the Kingdom of Germany taking up the rest. For by Ludovicus Pius the son of Charles the great Empire of his Father was parceled out into many members, as Italy, France, Burgundy, Lorraine, and Germany; distributed amongst his sons and nephews with the title of Kings: By means whereof the Kingdoms of Germany and Lorraine united in the person of Lewis the Ancient, in little time were aliened from the house of Charles, and left off to be French; possessed by the great Princes of Lorraine, Saxony, Schwaben, and Bavaria; by whom dismembered into many principalities and inferior states, all passing under the account and name of the Dutch or Germans. The Kings and Emperors of which here follow.  

The KINGS and EMPERORS of GERMANY.  
Anno Chr.  
801 1 Charles the Great Emp. K. of France and Germany.  
815 2 Ludovicus Pius, King of France, Germany, and Emperor of the Romans.  
841 3 Lewis surnamed the Ancient, second son of Ludovious Pius, King of Germany, to which anno 876. he united that of Lorraine also.  
4 Charles the Gross, son of Lewis the Ancient, reigned jointly with Caroloman and Lewis his elder Brethren, after their deaths sole King of Germany. Anno 880. he succeeded Ludovicus  
vitus Ba●bus in the title of Emperor, continued unto his Successors; and during the minority of Charles the Simple, by a faction of the French Nobility, was chosen King of France: the whole estate of Charles the Great becoming once again united in the person of one Sovereign Prince.  
891 5 Arnulph, the natural son of Caroloman, the brother of Charles, King of Germany, and Emp.  
903 6 Lewis, or Ludovicus IV. (Lewis the brother of Charles and Caroloman being reckoned for one) King of Germany and Emperor.  
913 7 Conrade the son of Conrade, the brother of Lewis the 4. the last Prince of the issue of Charles the Great. After whose death the Francones and Saxons, seeing Charles the Simple, King of France, overlaid by the Normans, took that advantage to transfer the Empire to themselves, and they made choice of Henry Duke of Saxony to be their Emperor. A worthy Prince, by whom some Nations of the Sclaves, the Hungarians, and part of Lorraine were subdued, or added to the Empire.  
920 6 Henricus, surnamed Auceps, or the Fowler, Duke of Saxony. 12.  
938 9 Otho, surnamed the Great, the son of Henry Emperor and King of Italy. 36.  
974 10 Otho, II. son of Otho the first Emperor and King of Italy. 10.  

984 11 Otho III. son of Otho the 2. Duke of Saxony (and the last of that house which had the title of Emperor and King of Italy.) After whose death, all right of succession being disclaimed, the Emperors became Elective, but for the most part wholly engrossed or Monopolised (since the Failer of the house of Saxony) by the Dukes of Franconia, Suevia, Bavaria, and Austria, notwithstanding the liberty or freedom of Election pretended to by the Electors. The business first projected in the Court of Rome, to make the Emperor's less powerful, and distract the Germans, whom they feared, into sides and factions: confirmed by a decree of Pope Gregory the fifth, being a Native of that Country. The Electors only six in number, that is to say, 

1. The Archbishop of Mentz, Chancellor of the Empire.  
2. The Archbishop of Colen, Chancellor of Italy.  
3. The Archbishop of Triers, Chancellor of France.  
4. The Count Palatine of the Rhine, Arch-Sewer.  
5. The Duke of Saxony, Lord Martial; And  
6. The marquis of Brand●nburg, Lord Chamberlain.   Upon equality of voices, the Duke (but now King) of Bohemia, was to come in for the 7. who by Office was to be Cupbearer at the Coronation. For upon Coronation days, or days of like solemnity, these Offices are performed only, and then performed in this manner. Before the Palace gate standeth an heap of Oats so high that it reacheth to the breast of the horse on which the Duke of Saxony rideth, bearing in his hand a silver wand and a silver measure, both which together weigh 200 marks: then sitting still upon his horse he filleth up the measure with oats, sticketh his wand in the Remainder, delivereth the measure of Oats to some of his servants which stand next him, and so attendeth the Emperor into the Court. The Emperor being entered and sat down at the Table, the three spiritual Electors standing orderly together, say Grace before him. Then cometh the marquis of Brandenburg on horseback also, with a silver basin in his hand, full of water (the basin of the weight of 12 marks of silver) and a fine clean towel on his arm, which alighting down he holdeth forth unto the Emperor. Then comes the Count Palatine of the Rhine, mounted on his horse, with four silver Platters full of meat) every one of the weight of three marks) which alighting also, he carrieth and setteth down upon the table. And finally the Duke (or King) of Bohemia, on horseback (as the others were) with a Napkin on his Arm, and a covered cup of the weight of 12 marks, entereth the Great-hall, alighteth from his horse, and giveth the cup unto the Emperor to drink. But we must know that these services are seldom or never (especially of late times) performed by the Electours in person. It is enough if they send their Ambassadors to do it, or substitute some one or other of the Emperor's Court to perform it for them.  
The election is usually holden at Francfort on Maenus, whither the Electours or their deputies come, upon the day appointed by the Bishop of Ments, whose office it is to assemble the Princes. In their passage into Francfort, they are guarded by every Prince, through whose territories they pass. Their attendants must not exceed the number of 200 horsemen, whereof 50 only must be armed. When they are all met, they go to 8. bartholomew's Church; where after Mass said, the spiritual Electors laying their hands on their breast, and the temporal on the book, shall swear to choose a fit temporal head for the people of Christendom. If in the space of 30 days they have not agreed, then must they eat nothing but bread and water, nor by any means go out of the city, till the greater part have agreed on a man, who shall forthwith be acknowledged King of the Romans. The Election being finished, & the party chosen, the inauguration was anciently holden, 1. at Aken in Gulick, where the new elected Emperor received the silver crown for Germany, 2. at Milan, where he received his iron crown for Lombardie; 3. at Rome, where he received the golden crown for the Empire. But those journeys unto Rome and Milan have been long laid by, the Emperor's holding their Election to be strong enough to make good their Title to that honour, being merely titular. The form of which Election, the privileges of the Prince's Electours, and other fundamental constitutions of the Germane Empire; we find summed up in the golden Bul of Charles the 4. by whom first promulgated anno 1359.   
1002 10 Henry II. surnamed the Saint, Duke of Bavaria, the first Emperor elected according to the constitution of Gregory the fifth.  
1025 13 Conrade II. Duke of Franconia, surnamed Salicus.  
1040 14 Henry III. surnamed Niger, the son of Conrade.  
1056 15 Henry IV. son of Henry the third, in whose days the Popes began to usurp authority over the Emperors: insomuch as Leo the ninth having received the Popedom at the Emperor's hands, repented himself of it, put off his Papal vestments, went to Rome as a private person, and was there new chosen by the Clergy. This done by the persuasion of a Monk called Heldebrand, who being afterwards made Pope by the name of Gregory the 7. excommunicated this Henry, the first Prince that was ever excommunicated by a Pope of Rome: from which time till the year 1254. there were continual wars and thunders betwixt them and the nine following Emperors; some of them being excommunicated, some forced to put their necks under the feet of the Pope; others to quit the care of the Commonwealth, and betake themselves unto the wars of the Holy-Land, leaving the Pope to do what he list in Germany.  
1106 16 Henry V. son of Henry the 4. armed by the Pope against his father, whom he had no sooner succeeded in the Empire, but the Pope excommunicated him, for being too stiff in the business of investitures, and raised up the Saxons against him: by whom vanquished, and otherwise afflicted by the Pope's practices, he was forced to submit unto his commands; and was the last Emperor of the house of Franconia.  
1125 17 Lotharius Duke of Saxony, seized on the Empire without any election, reconciled unto the Germane Princes by the means of S. Bernard. He settled the affairs of Italy in two journeys thither, 13.  
1136 18 Conrade III. son of Frederick, the first hereditary Duke of Sweve, or Schwaben, and fifters son unto Henry the fifth, vanquished Henry surnamed the Proud, Duke of Saxony and Bavaria; and going to the holy wars with Lewis King of France discomfited the Turks near the Banks of Meander. 15.  
1153 19 Frederick, surnamed Barbarossa, Duke of Sueve, crowned at Rome by Adrian the 4. and not long after excommunicated by Pope Alexander the 3. to whom he was fain at last to submit himself, the Pope insolently treading on his neck. He went after to the Holy Land, (where he died) having difcomfited the Turks in three great battles, 39  
1190 20 Henry VI son of Frederick King of Sicil, in right of Constance his wife, crowned by Pope Celestine, who employed him in the wars of the Holy Land; in his journey towards which, he died at Messina. 8.  
1198 21 Philip Duke of Sueve, brother of Henry the 6. excommunicated by the Pope (who loved not this Family) by whose means Otho the son of Henry the Lion, Duke of Saxony, was set up against him. The occasion of great wars among the Germans, reconciled by marriage of Otho with a daughter of Philip. 9  
1207 22 Otho IV. son of Henry surnamed the Lion, Duke of Saxony and Bavaria, crowned at Rome by Pope Innocent the 3. by whom not long after excommunicated, for taking into his hands some towns of Italy which belonged to the Empire: vanquished in Brabant by the faction raised up against him, he relinquished the Empire to his Competitor.  
1212 23 Frederick II. King of Sicil and Naples, son of Henry the 6. having settled Germany disposed himself for the wars of the Holy Land, where he recovered the possession of the Realm of Jerusalem; excommunicated by the Pope at his return into Italy; not long after poisoned.  
1250 24 Conrade IV. son of Frederick, the last Emperor of the house of Schwab●n. After whose death, the Empire being distracted by the Pope's practices into many factions, each faction chose an Emperor or King of the Romans: so that at one time there were elected, Henry Earl of Turingia, William Earl of Holland, Alfonso King of Castille, the renowned author of the Alfonsive Tables, and  
1254 25 Richard Earl of Cornwall, brother of Henry the 3. of England, the best-monyed man of all his time, supposed therewith to buy the suffrages of the Archbishop of Colen, and elector Pulatine, by whom he was elected and crowned King of the Romans, anno 1254. and after he had dealt in the affairs of the Empire 6 years, he returned into England, where he died. During these battles, and the times since Henry the fourth, the Popes had in a manner forced the Emperors to abandon Italy, so that Rodolphus who succeeded, sold all his rights in Italy to the fairest chapman. Nor did the craft of the Pope's rest there, but extended into Germany also: where by arming the Princes against the Emperors, and raising the Prelates to the dignity and estate of Princes, he made the Empire of small power and consideration. Made smaller yet by the unworthiness and weakness of some of the Emperors, who to get that honour for themselves, or to leave it after them to their sons, dismembered from the same many towns and fair possessions, given by them to the Electors for their votes and suffrages: by means whereof the Princes grew in time so strong, that there were few of them who durst not undertake a war against their Emperors. And this appeareth by the Example of Charles the fifth, who though the most mighty and most puissant Emperor which had been in Germany since the death of Charles the Great, yet found himself so over-matched by these ruffling Princes, that he was willing to resign the Empire to his brother Ferdinand. But to proceed; after an interregnum of 12 years from the Exit of Richard Earl of Cornwall, the title was at last accepted by  
1273 26 Rodolph Earl of Habsburg, a petite Prince, (others of greater Estates and Fortunes not daring to take up the honour) the Raiser of the present Austrian Family.  
1292 27 Adolph Earl of Nassaw, who served in person under King Edward the first of England against the French; for which disrelished by the Germans, he was encountered and slain near the City of Spires.  
1298 28 Albert Duke of Austria, son of Rodolphus the Emperor, to whom Pope Boniface the 8. gave the Realm of France, of which he had deprived King Philip the Fair. But Albert would not meddle out of Germany, and did nothing in it.  
1308 29 Henry Earl of Luxembourg made a journey into Italy to recover the rights of the Empire (where an Emperor had not been seen in 60 years) supposed to be poisoned in the Chalice by a Friar at Benevent a town of the Popes. 6.  
1314 30 Lewis Duke of Bavaria, crowned at Aix in the wont manner, opposed by Frederick Duke of Austria, chose by another Faction, and crowned at Bonna, a town of the Archbishop of Coleno, but being defeated, Lewis remained sole Emperor, ex communicated by Pope John 22. 33.  
1346 31 Charles IV. son of John King of Bohemia, and grandson of Henry the 7. crowned with the iron Crown at Milan, 1354. the framer of the Golden Bull. 32.  
1378 32 Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, and Earl of Luxembourg, deformed and vicious, deposed by the Germane Princes. 22.  
1400 33 Rupertus Elector Palatine passed into Italy for the recovery of the Dukedom of Milan, sold by Wenceslaus; but was well beat by John Galeazes, and so returned. 10.  
1410 34 Jodocus Barbatus, marquis of Moravia, uncle to Wenceslaus.  
1411 35 Sigismond, brother of Wenceslaus, King of Hungary and Bohemia, and Earl of Luxembourg, crowned at Rome on Whitsunday, 1432. traveled exceedingly for establishing the peace of Christendom, distracted at that time with three Popes at once, a great promoter of the Council of Constance.  
1439 36 Albert II. Duke of Austria, son in law of Sigismond, whom he succeeded in all his estates and titles excepting Luxembourg. 1.  
1440 37 Frederick III. Duke of Austria, the son of Ernest of Austria, and next heir of Albert the 2. procured the calling of the Council of Basil for the peace of Christendom; travelling for that cause to Rome, where declared Emperor, anno 1442. 54.  
1494 38 Maximilian, son of Frederick, Duke of Austria, who first united the Estates of Burgundy to the house of Austria. A Prince that undertook many great Actions, but went thorough with none. 25.  
1519 39 Charles V. King of Spain, son of Philip King of Spain, and Archduke of Austria, son of Maximilian by the Lady Mary of Burgundy. A puissant Prince who had prisoners at the same time the French King, and the Pope of Rome. He ruined the League made by the Protestants at Smalcade, took prisoners the elector of Saxony, and the Landgrave of Hassia, drove the great Turk from Vienna, won the Kingdom of Tunis, and in the end resigned all his Estates and died in a Monastery. 39  
1558 40 Ferdinand, Archduke of Austria, the brother of Charles, King of Hungary and Bohemia, elected King of the Romans by the procurement of Charles, anno 1531. Upon whose resignation he was chosen Emperor, anno 1558. 7.  
1565 41 Maximilian the son of Ferdinand, elected King of the Romans in the life of his Father, anno 1562. succeeding in the Empire after his decease.  
1577 42 Rodolphus, the eldest son of Maximilian, had great wars against the Turk, with whom in the year 1600 he concluded a peace; but being undermined by his brother Mathias, was forced to surrender to him the Kingdoms of Hungary and Bohemia, and to content himself with Austria and the Empire only. These eight last Emperors were all of the order of the Garter. 36.  
1612 43 Mathias brother of Rodolphus K. of Hungary, Bohemia, and Archduke of Austria; in whose time were sown the seeds of that terrible war, which had almost destroyed the Empire. Having no children of his own, he procured Ferdinand of Gratz, to be declared Successor into his Estates.  
1619 44 Ferdinand of Gratz, Archduke of Austria, son of Charles of Gratz, one of the younger sons of Maximilian the 2. succeeded Mathias in all his Estates and titles. A Prince more zealously affected to the See of Rome then any of his Predecessors, and a great enemy of the Protestant Religion; occasioning thereby that long and bloody war in the Empire of Germany, not yet fully ended.  
1637 45 Ferdinand III. son of Ferdinand the 2. broke the great power of the Swedes, (called in for the support of the Germane liberty, & against the violent resolutions of his Father) at the battle of Norlingen, the 12. Emperor of the house of Habsburg, and the 9 of the house of Austria without intermission. The cause of which is to be attributed to Charles the fifth, who procured in his life time that his brother might be chosen Rex Romanorum, as his successor. Now Rex Romanorum is defined to be one, who is already so far estated in the Empire, that on the death, deposition, or resignation of the present Emperor, he is immediately to succeed. This definition may pass, though there be no necessity of the succeeding of the Rex Romanorum into the Empire. For Charles the fifth, though he made his brother King of the Romans, had no small hopes to have left his son Philip his successor in the Empire: for fear of which, it was thought by many that his brother lent D. Maurice a helping hand to drive him out of Germany. The reason why Charles did institute this Rex Romanorum, was questionless a desire to perpetuate the Sovereignty in his own house: but his pretences were, 1. Because he having the command of many Nations, he could not always be present in Germany. 2. The troubled State of Christendom, by reason of Luther's preaching, especially there. 3. The violent power of the Turks, who now began to be nigh neighbours unto them. 4. The late Rural war raised by the Boors, and scarce yet thoroughly extinct. And 5. The imminent disobedience in every part of the Empire, seemed to require a Prince both of power and title to assist him in the Government of it. By these suggestions he effected his design therein; but hereby changed in a manner, the Imperial stile. For whereas the first Emperors of the house of Charles the Great, were Emperors of the Romans and Kings of Germany: the later Emperors of the house of Charles the fifth, may not improperly be called Emperors of Germany and Kings of the Romans. 'tis true indeed, that the understanding and wise D. of Saxony through all these fair pretences truly saw the main plot; which was to take Germany (as Galba, in his excellent Oration to Piso, said of the Roman Empire) unius quasi familiae haereditatem, and therefore he first flatly denied to yield to any such election. Then he motioned that there might be an act made to prohibit the continuance of the Imperial authority, longer in one family, then for 3 successions. But prevailing in neither, he left the Electors, by whom Ferdinand was chosen, and not long after crowned at Aken or Aqui●grane in Cleveland, the 16 of January, anno 1531. This policy hath been ever since continued by his successors; and the Germans are the more willing to hearken to it, because the Austrian Princes are Natives of this Country, and able to back out the Empire in its complete Majesty.   
And to say truth, it is but need that some great Prince or other be elected to it, who by the power and reputation of his own estate may preserve the honour of the Empire; confined in a manner within Germany, and there so weakened by the alienating of whole Countries from it (some titulary acknowledgement excepted only, that it is nothing in effect, but magni nominis umbra, the shadow of a mighty body, a mere empty title. For if we look upon the present state and condition of it, we shall find it otherwise too weak to support the great and swelling title of the Roman Empire. For as for the Empire itself it hath some Country's repu●●das parts of it, which yet acknowledge no subjection, as Belgium, Switzerland, and Denmark: Some do acknowledge a kind of subjection, but the Princes of them come not to the Imperial Diets, as the Dukes of Savoy and Lorraine, and some of the Italian Potentates. Finally, some both confess the Emperor to be their Sovereign, and that they owe service to his Courts, which are the Princes and Cities of Germany only; but those so privileged, so exempted from his commands, so absolute and incontrollable in their own estates, that they care little for his power, and not much (if any thing) for his person: of which we shall speak more hereafter, when we come unto the form of the public Government. In the mean time if we would know by what occasions the Empire became so enfeebled; it may be said, that the reasons and occasions of it have been very many. As the first, the weakness and improvidence of the Caroline race, dismembering from it many powerful and wealthy Provinces, reserving only a bare Homage, and some slight acknowledgement. 2ly, The cunning of the Popes, who knowing that they could not wax strong in Italy, if they did not weaken the Emperor's estate in Germany, first wrested out of their hands the Investitre of the Bishops, Abbots, and other Ecclesiastical preferments: who being now made their own creatures, were so increased both in revenue and power by little and little, and fortified with so many immunities, that some of them grew in time to be Free Estates, all of them Princes of the Empire. 3ly, But fearing that this might not bring the Emperor's low enough, they baited them with continual factions and perpetual broils; which put them to a necessity of making what friends they could, though they paid very dearly for them▪ and taking up what moneys they could of the wealthier Cities; paying them in exemptions and Royal privileges, when they could not otherwise cancel or discharge the debt. 4ly, And unto this, the making the Empire Elective gave no little help, few of them looking on the Empire but as Tenants of it for term of life; and therefore were more likely to discharge such debts by impairing the Public Patrimony, which they had no hold in, then to diminish any thing of their own estates. 
Cleveland.  5 lie, But being the title of Emperor was the greatest honour, which any of that Nation could be capable of, and such as by good husbandry might be made beneficial unto their posterity, (as we see what good uses have been made of it by the Austrian family ever since the time of Rodolph of Habspurg): who would not part with some of the Imperial rights to advance his own house to an equal greatness. 6ly, A thing which the Electours understood sufficiently, and therefore were resolved to make the best of the market, knowing that the commodity could be bought of none but themselves: as in the Election of Wenceslaus son of Charles the 4th, of whom it was but ask and have, what they had a mind to.  
By these and every of these means the Body of the Empire came to be divided into many Estates, and those Estates to be made absolute and independent as before is said. The principal whereof, which being described will make up the chorography of this great Continent, are those of 1. Cleveland, 2. of the Estates of the three spiritual Electors, 3. the Palatinate of the Rhine, 4. Alsatia, 5. Lorraine, 6. Suevia or Schwallen, 7. Bavaria, 8. Austria and its appendices, 9 The confederation of Wederaw, 10. Farnconia, 11. Wittenberg, and 12. Baden, 13. the Palatinate of Northgoia, or the Upper Palatinate, 14. Bohemia, and the incorporate Provinces, 15. Pomerania, 16. M●cklenberg, 17. the Marquisate of Brandenburg, 18. Saxony and the Members of it, 19 the Dukedoms of Brunswick and Lunenburg, 20. the Lantgravedom of Hassia, 21. Westphalen, 22. Eastfriseland. Such lesser States as being absolute and free, are of lesser moment, shall be reduced (together with the Imperial Cities) to those several Provinces, in which they are included, or out of which they were taken. As for the Province of Holstein or Holsatia, though it be Imperial, and in which respect by some accounted as a Province of Germany: yet being under the command of the King of Denmark, and by all Writers reckoned as a part of that Kingdom; I shall there speak of it. Some of these are thus censured by Aubanus a late writer. They of Suevia (saith he) are whores; they of Franconia Ravishers and Buggers; they of Bohemia Heretics; those of Bavaria Thiefs, they of Saxony Drunkards; they of Friesland and Westphalia Swearers; and they of the Palatinate, Gluttons. But I hope more charitably of them all then so. I know there is another division of this Country, made by the Emperor Maximilian at the Diet of Colen, anno 1522. who for the better raising both of men and money for all Public services, caused it to be divided into the ten Circles of 1. Lower Saxony, 2. Upper Saxony, 3. Westphalia, 4. of the Rhine, 5. of the four Electours of that part, 6. Franconia, 7. Suevia, 8. Bavaria, 9 Austria, and 10. Burgundy. But that before proposed being the more particular I shall follow that, according to the order before laid down, beginning first with those which together with the Belgic Provinces and the Dukedom of Lorraine, contained anciently the Provinces of Belgica and Germania prima; and some part of Germania secunda; and made up the Kingdom of Austrasia strictly and specially so called.  

CLEVELAND.  
CLEVELAND, or the Estates of the Duke of Cleve, before dismembered and divided betwixt the Competitors for the Dukedom on the death of the last Duke hereof, anno 1609. contained the Dukedoms of Cl●ve, Gulick, and Berg, and the Earldom of Mark or March, all lying in a ring together. And though these two last lie on the other side of the Rhine, and so not properly within the old prccincts of the Kingdom of Lorraine, or any of the Roman Provinces before named: yet being they belonged all to the same Prince, not parted by the interposition of other Countries, they shall be handled here together as the same Estate.  
1. The Dukedom of CLEUF, properly and distinctly so called, hath on the East the Countries of Mark and Berg, with some part of Westphalen; on the West Guelderland, and some part of Limbourg: on the North the Earldom of Zutphen, and the land of Overyssell; and on the South Gulick and the land of Colen. So called from Cleve the chief town of it.  
The Country very fruitful both for Corn and pasturage, well stocked with cattle of all sorts, for necessary use and pleasure; good store of Fowl, both tame and wild: blessed also with an healthy air, and in a word, with all things needful for the life of man: well watered with the Rhener, the Roer, the Dussell, the Ezfat, and the Nirsi, common to this and the rest of the incorporate Provinces.  
Places of most importance in it are first Cleve (in Latin Clivia) so called because built on the sides of three little hills (which the Latins call Clivi), gently descending towards the Banks of the Rhine, which not far off divides itself into several channels. An ancient town, and of great note in former times, as appears by many old foundations, and other monuments of Antiquity, continually digged up in the fields adjoining, but chiefly by an old foresquare Tower, built on the highest of the three hills, of great height and state; founded by Julius Caesar as a bulwark against the Germans inhabiting the further side of the River. For proof of which besides the old tradition constantly maintained, there is an Inscription on the Gates of the Duke's Palace, near adjoining to it, which saith anno ab Vrbe DCXCIIX. C. Julius Dictator, his partibus subactis, hanc Arcem sundavit. i e. that in the year 698 from the building of Rome, Julius Caesar the Dictator, having subdued those parts of the Country, caused this Tower to be built. 2. Santen, on the banks of the Rhine, a town of great antiquity, as the ruins of it do declare; supposed by Pighius to be the Trajan a Colonia of the Ancients. 3. Wesel (in Latin Vesalia) a fair and rich town, seated on the confluence of the Rhine with the river of Lip, which rising in Westphalia doth here lose itself: of great note for a College of secular Canons, 
Gulick.  built here by Eberard the ninth Earl, anno 840 or thereabouts, and an hospital liberally endowed for old impotent persons, founded by Henry de Baers the Duke's Chancellor. A town not subject to these Dukes though within the Dukedom, being reckoned an Imperial City and one of the Hanse Towns; now neither so Imperial nor so Free, as formerly: possessed first by the Spaniard with a Garrison of 3000 men, (at the beginning of the war of Cleve) by D. Lewis Velasco; and from them taken by the States of the United Provinces, anno 1628. 4. Burich, on the French side of the Rhine, over against Wesel, amongst goodly corn fields and pleasant pastures. 5 Duisberg, or Tuitchberg, in Latin called Tento-burgum, a town of the ancient Germans, (as the name importeth) situate on the Rhine, betwixt the Angra and the Ruer, two noted Rivers. A town formerly of great trading, and notably well built, Imperial, and one of the Han●e, but ceased to be Imperial when sold by Rodulph of Habspurg to Thecdorick the ninth of that name Earl of Cleve, and together with 6 Cravenburg, another town of this Dukedom, but of lesser nose. 7 Emmerick on the Rhone, a well frequented town, remarkable for a very fair School. 8 Rees, 9 Griet, and 10 Griethusen, all upon the Rhine. 11 Calcar, a town more within the land, but not far from the River, grown wealthy by the trade of clothing, and the best beer or ale in all these parts, sold thence abundantly into the Country round about. Not far from whence, at a place called Aufde Baern, it is supposed that Caesar Germanicus built his bridge over the Rhine, when he went from Vetera Castra against the Marsi, a nation of Germany. 12 Gennep upon the Niers or Nirsi, not far from its influx into the Maes, which together with Duiffele and Riexwald were bought of Sigismond the Emperor by Adolph the first Duke of Cleve for a great sum of money.  
South of the land of Cleve, betwixt it and Colen, lieth the County of MVERS, extended all along on the banks of the RHINE, a distinct State, the Earl of which is subject to no other Prince, but the Emperor only: so called from Muers the chief town of it, situate on the French side of the Rhine over against Duysburgh. Next Towns to which are 2. Orsey, 3. Augur; of which little memorable. A small territory, but in a very fruitful soil. The neighbourhood whereof to the land of Colen (to which it serveth as an Outwork upon that side) preserving it in former times from the Dukes of Cleve; who otherwise, no doubt, either by Arms or marriage had been masters of it; as they were of the adjoining Provinces on both sides of the River.  
2. GULICK-LAND, or the Dukedom of Gulick, hath on the East the County of Muens, and the land of Colen; on the West Guelderland and Limbourg; on the North Cleve, and on the South the rest of the land of Colen. The Air and Soil much of the same nature as in Cleve; save that here is a greater plenty of Woad for dying, and a better breed of Horses then in the other.  
Places of most importance in it, are 1 Gulick, in Latin Juliacum, (whence the French call it Juliers) known by that name in the Itinerary of Antoninu●; sufficient proof for the Antiquity thereof, but not otherwise famous. Seated upon the River Roer; the chief seat heretofore of the Dukes of Gulick, before the uniting hereof with Cleve: and since the dissolution of that Estate possessed sometimes by the States of the United Provinces, and sometimes by the Spaniards; called in by the Competitors to assert their Titles. 2 Duerin, on the same River, the Marcodurum of the old writers; and of late memorable for the long siege which it held against Charles the fifth, in his wars against William Duke of Cleve and Gulick for the Dukedom of Guildes. 3. Munster Eyphel● (in Latin, Monasterium Eyphalie) so called to distinguish it from Munster of Westpbalen, pleasantly seated in a valley begi●t with mountains not far from the spring or fountain of the river Erfat. 4 Caster so called of a stately and magnificent Castle built for defence of this part of the Country. 5 Berken on the river Erp. 6 Merodon beautified with a strong Castle, which gives name to an honourable and ancient family. 7 Enskereh. 8 Berklen, etc.  
There is also within the limits of this Dukedom, the famous town of Aix, as the French, or Aken, as the Germans call it: famous of old times for the hot Baths both within and without the town; whence it had the name of Aix or Aquen, (in Latin, Aquisgranum) situate on the edge of Limbourg, in a fruitful foil; but the buildings nothing answerable to the fame of the place, inhabited for the most part by Smiths and Braziers, who drive the greatest trade herein: working continually on iron and other metals, with which they are supplied abundantly out of L●●ge and Limbourg. The town Imperiall, but under the protection of the Dukes of Gleve: at the expiration of which family, under colour of some quarrels about Religion, it was seis●d on, and garrisoned by Marquis Spinola, for the King of Spain. Of great fame formerly for the death and sepulture of Charles the great, by whom made one of the three Seats of the Western Empire, and designed by him to be the place in which the King of the Romans should receive his Crown for the Kingdom of Germany, at the hands of the Archbishop of Colen. The town supposed to be formerly that wintring Camp of the Romans, called in Tacitus Vetera, which was taken by Civilis in the beginning of his rebellion against Vespasion; during which wars it is often mentioned by the Writers of those times. They were built and strengthened by Augustus, the better to keep under the Germans: quip illis bybernis obsideri premique Germanias' Augustus crediderat; as Tacitus. At this day this Town and Triers are reputed famous for holy relics: here being said to be among others the bearing cloth wherein our Saviour was wrapped, when he was in his swaddling clouts; which the Emperor solemnly worshippeth at his inauguration. Concerning the ambition which the Papists have to be thought possessors of these reilques: See I beseech you how pitifully they have mangled the head of S. John Baptist. 
Berg.  They of Amiens brag that they have his face, and so do they of S. John D' Angeli●. The rest of his head is at Malta, yet is the hinder part of his scull at Namur, and his brain at Novum Rostoviense. Another part of it is at Maurienna, another piece at Paris, his jaw at Wesel, his ear at S. Flowers, his forehead and hair at S. Salvadores in Venice, another piece of his head is at Noyon, and another at Luca, yet is his whole head entire and unmaimed in S. Sylvesters Church at Rome: and so no doubt is this bearing-cloth at more places than one.  
But to return again to Gulick; first made an Earldom in the person of Eustace brother of Godfrey of Bovillon Duke of Lorraine, who seized upon it, as his part of the Estate, on the death of Godfrey, his elder brother being absent in the Holy-Land. In the person of William the 4. of that name, it was made a Marquisate, advanced unto that honour by the Emperor Lewis of Bavaria, anno 1329. created not long after Duke of Gulick, by Charles the 4. anno 1356. His two sons, William and Raynold, both Dukes successively, dying without issue: the Estate fell to Adolphus Duke of Berg, or Mont, as the next heir male, anno 1423. and finally together with that of Berg, was added to the Dukedom of Cleve by the marriage of Mary heir hereof, with John the 3. Duke of Cleve, with which conjoined till the expiration of that noble family; whereof more anon.  
As for the Estates of Berg and March, they had one original, begun by two Brothers, the sons of Theodorick Lord of Teisterbant, of the house of Cleve; out of which house as they descended, so into that they finally were again resolved as their first materials. Of these two brothers Adolphus being the Elder, was by the Emperor Henry surnamed the Fowler, made Earl of Altena, anno 930. or thereabouts: and Eberard the younger by the same Emperor made Earl of Berg. But Eberard entering a Monastery of his own Foundation, left his estate and Earldom of Berg to the elder brother. United thus into one estate, they became again divided betwixt the sons of Adolph the 3. of that name, and fourth Earl of Altena and Berg. Engelbert the younger son enjoying the estate of Berg, and Eberard the elder succeeding his father in that of Altena. How they became united to the house of Cleve, we shall see hereafter, having first looked over the chorography or Description of them.  
3. The Dukedom of BERG, bounded on the East with Westphalen, and the Country of March; on the West with the Rhine from Wesel up as high as Colen, by which parted from the Dukedom of Cleve; on the North with the River Lip, which separates it from the rest of Cleve; and on the South with the Land of Colen. So called from the hillinesse of the Country, Berg in Dutch signifying an hill, (as Bourg doth a Town or Burrough) from whence the Earls and Dukes hereof are called Montenses in Latin, and Les Contes, and Dues de Mont in French. The Country for the most part, in the Vales especially, yields a great store of the best wheat, and consequently of the purest bread; and in the hill Countries rich mines of Coal, wherewith they do supply their neighbours.  
Chief places in it are, 1 Dusseldorp, so called of the River Dussel, upon which it is situate, the River not far off falling into the Rhine. 2 Adenbourg built by Eberard the first Earl of Berg, the seat of him and his successors, till removed to Dusseldorp. 3 Keiserswerd, situate on the Rhine, belonging anciently to the Empire, but bought for a great sum of money of Charles the 4. by John Earl of Cleve. 4 Mulheim, on the Rhine also, just against Colen on the other side of the water, fortified in the year 1614 and made the Receptacle of the Protestants of that Bishopric, prohibited the free exercise of Religion in their own dwellings; but razed not long after by Marquis Spinola on complaint made by those of Colen to the Emperor Mathias. 5. Stelt, or Steltium, on the Roer, amongst the Coal mines. 6. Angermond, on the mouth of the River Angra, as the name imports. 7. Essen or Essendia, on the borders of the County of March, once an Imperial, but under the protection of the Earls of Berg. Of most note for a Monastery here built by Alfride the 4. Bishop of Hildesheim for 52 Nuns and 20 Canons, liberally endowed, and having great command on the Dorps adjoining.  
How Berg at first was made an Earldom, how joined unto Altena, and disjoined again, hath been showed before. No sooner made a State distinct, but it was added to the patrimony of the Earls of Gulick by the marriage of Earl William with the daughter and heir of Berg. Parted again betwixt William and Adolphus sons of Gerrard the 2. anno 1247. the first succeeding in the Earldom of Gulick, and the last in Berg. During this partage made a Dukedom in the person of William the first of that name, by Wenc●slaus the Emperor, anno 1389. whose son Adolphus as next heir succeeded in the Dukedom of Gulick, anno 1423. How both were added unto Cleve, hath been said already.  

The DUKES and EARLS of BERG. 
Gulick and Berg.   
A. Ch.  
1 Engelbert the first Earl of Berg, distinct from March.  
2 Adolphus son of Engelbert.  
3 N. the sister of Adolphus   

GULICK.  
A. Ch.  
1129 1 Eustace the first Earl of Gulick distinct from Lorraine.  
2 son of Eustac●.  
3 William Earl of Gulick.  
4 Gerrard Earl of Gulick and Berg.  
5 William II. son of Gerrard.  
6 Gerrard I● son of William the 2.  
1247 7 Adolphus II. younger son of Gerrard the 2.  
1296 8 William III. son of Adolphus.  
1337 9 Gerrard III.  
10 William IV. created the first Duke of Berg, anno 1389. outed of the greatest part of his Estate by his son Adolphus.   

1247 7 William III. eldest son of Gerrard the 2.  
8 Gerrard III. son of William.  
9 Gerrard IV. son of Gerrard the 2.  
1325 10 William IV. created first marquis, after Duke of Gulick.  
11 William V. Duke of Gulick and Gueldres.  
12 Rainold Duke of Gulick and Gueldres.   

A. Ch.  
11 Adolphus III. the son of William the first Duke of Berg, succeeded also unto Rainold the last Duke of Gulick, dying without issue, 1423.  
1434 12 Gerrard IV of Berg, and V. of Gulick, son of William, and brother of Adolphus.  
1475 13 William V. of Berg, and VI of Gulick, son of Gerrard.  
1511 14 Marry daughter and heir of William Duchess of Gulick and Berg, conveyed the whole Estate in marriage to John the 3. Duke of Cleve, and Earl of March, continuing in that Family till the expiration of it in the person of John Williliam the last Prince hereof, anno 1610.   
4 The Earldom of MARCH or MARK, hath on the East and North Westphalia, on the West the Dukedom of Cleve, on the South that of Berg or Mont. So called as being seated in the Marches of Westphalen, out of which it was taken. The Country for the most part like the rest of Westphalen, more fit for pasturage then corn; woody and yielding store of pawnage to those herds of swine, with which it plentifully abounds.  
Chief places in it are, 1 Werden upon the River Ruer, on the edge of Westphalia, the people whereof get great wealth by grazing of Cattle. 2 Soest (in Latin, Susatum) for wealth and greatness not inferior to any in Westphalen, (except Munster only) consisting of ten parishes, and lording it over many rich and pleasant Villages. Anciently it belonged to the Bishops of Colen, but in the year 1444. did voluntarily yield itself to the Duke of Cleve, (being then Earl of March also) and by Duke John the 4. courageously defended against those Prelates. 3 Arusberg, a fine and pleasant site, used for a retiring place by the Electours of Colen, unto whom it belongs. 4 Dortmond, (in Latin, Tremonia) a County anciently of itself, and held immediately of the Empire, possessed by the Tro●manni, a tribe of the Suevians, from whence first called Tretmania, and at last Tremonia. 5 blancostein, built commodiously by Adolphus the fifth of that name, and first Earl of March, as was also 6 H●m or Hammone. 7 Vnna, of which nothing memorable. 8 Altena, the first title of the Earls of this house, before they assumed that of the Earls of March, assumed first by Adolphus the 4. on the Conquest of some Lands in the Marches of Westphalen, continuing in that Family till united with Cleve.  
As for the Earldom or Dukedom of CLEVE, out of which it was taken, and to which the rest of those estates did in time accrue; it was one of the most ancient Estates or Principalities in these parts of the world: continuing in a direct line for the space of 900 years held by them of the Kings of France, and afterwards of the Kings of Lorraine, till the incorporating of that Kingdom with the Germane Empire. Begun first by Elias Grullius, companion to Charles Martel, in his wars against the Frisons, Saxons, and Bavarians, whose son Theodorick added hereto by marriage the County of Teisterbant, containing the Towns and Seigneuries of Aliena, 
Cleve, & Mark.  in Wesiphalen, as also of Bomel, Heusden, Buren, Culemberg, in the Belgic Provinces. By Baldwin the sixth Earl was added the territory of Twentzen, (in Latin, Regio Tuentana) given him by Ludovicus Pius; by Theodorick the fifth, the town and signory of Duislake, settled upon him on his marriage with Mathilda, the heir thereof: by Theodorick the 9 the County of Hulkenrade, near Nuys, in the land of Colen: together with the towns of Duysburg, and Culembourg, bought of Rodolphus Habspurgensis: by John his son the town and territory of Keisarswerd, bought of Charles the 4. By Adolph the 29. Earl, the Earldom of March, formerly taken out of it, was again united: by Adolph his successor, (made the first Duke hereof by the Emperor Sigismond, anno 1417.) the Lordships of Gennep. Duiffels, and Reixwald, bought of the said Emperor; together with the County of Ravenstein, the Towns of Leoburg, Limers, and Hatterens, for the ransom of William Duke of Berg, and other noble persons taken prisoners by him anno 1397. by John the first Duke of that name, the Town and territory of Soest; and finally by John the 3. the Dukedoms of Berg and Gulick, as heir thereof by his mother Mary, sole daughter and heir of William the fifth and sixth, the last Duke thereof. To which great height this ancient and noble family had not long attained, and thereby made themselves and their sons and daughters fit matches for the greatest Princes: but it pleased God to bring it to its fatal end, and by that means to dissipate● his brave estate in the hands of strangers: as shall be showed in the Conclusion of this Catalogue of 

The EARLS and DUKES of CLEVE.  
A. Ch.  
717 1 Elias Grallius companion in the wars of Charles Martell.  
732 2 Theodorick Earl of Cleve, and Lord of Teisterbant.  
755 3 Rainold son of Theodorick Earl of Cleve and Teisterbant.  
767 4 Conon, of great fame in Arms, under Charles the great.  
778 5 John, son of Conon, married the daughter of Michael Curopalates Emperor of Constantinople.  
790 6 Robert, the eldest son of John.  
798 7 Baldwin, the brother of Earl Robert. After whose death anno 830. the Earldone of Teisterbant was taken out of it, and made the portion of Robert a younger son; from whom descended the two houses of March and Berg.  
830 8 Ludowick, son of Baldwin.  
834 9 Eberard, brother of Ludovick; who gave Teisterbant to his brother Robert.  
843 10 Luithardus, Earl of Cleve.  
878 11 Baldwin II.  
928 12 Arnold.  
968 13 Wignan, son of Arnold.  
1004 14 Conrade made an Earl of the Empire, in the life of his father.  
1045 15 Theodorick II.  
1088 16 Theodorick III. companion of Godfrey of Bovillon in the holy Land.  
1114 17 Arnold II. brother of Theodorick the 3.  
1161 18 Theodorick IU.  
19 Arnold III.  
1205 20 Arnold IU.  
1218 21 Theodorick V.  
1229 22 Theodorick VI.  
1247 23 Theodorick VII.  
1255 24 Theodorick VIII.  
1271 25 Theodorick IX.  
26 Otho son of Theodorick.  
1309 27 Theodorick X. brother of Otho II.  
2325 28 John brother of Theodorick, and Canon of Colen; the last of the masculine issue of Elias Grallius.  
29 Adolphus, the VII. of March, son of Adolph the 6. of March, and Mary of Cleve, first Archbishop of Colen (as six of this house of March had been (almost) successively before him succeeded on the death of his Uncle John to the Earldom of Cleve; 
Cleve.  inaugurated thereunto by Charles the 4.  
1389 30 Adolph II. of Cleve, and VIII. of March, created the first Duke of Cleve by the Emperor Sigismond at the Council of Constance, anno 1417.  
1443 31 John III. son of Adolph, Duke of Cleve, Earl of March, and Lord of Ravenstein.  
1481 32 John II. of the rank of Dukes, and the IV of the Earls.  
1521 33 John III. Duke of Cleve and Earl of March, etc. by descent from his Father; and Duke of Gulick and Berg in right of his wife, daughter and heir of William the last Duke thereof.  
1539 34 William son of John the 3. and Mary his wife, daughter and sole heir of William the last Duke of Gulick and Berg: father of the Lady Anne of Cleve, one of the wives, of Henry the 8. of England. He contended very strongly against Charles the fifth for the Dukedom's of Gueldres, but being too weak for so great an Adversary, made his submission to him at Venlo, and so saved his estates.  
1584. 35 John William, son of the former William, during the life of Charles Frederick his elder brother, was Bishop of Munster; on whose death, anno 1575. he resigned that dignity, and in the end succeeded his Father in his whole estates; which he managed with great piety and prudence till the year 1610. and then died issueless. The last of that ancient and noble family of the Dukes of Cleve. After whose death, much quarrel and contention grew about the succession, betwixt the several competitors and pretenders to it: of which the principal were 1. Leopold Archduke of Austria, pretending an investiture from the Emperor Rodolphus, to whom for want of heirs males, the estate was said to be escheated. 2. John George, Duke of Saxony, descended from Sibyl, daughter of Duke John the third: at whose marriage with John Frederick the elector of Saxony an. 1535, it was said to have been solemnly agreed upon, that on the failing of the heirs males of Cleve, the issue of that marriage should succeed therein. 3. John Sigismond the elector of Brandenburg, in behalf of his son, George William, Duke of Prussia, by the Lady Anne his wife, eldest daughter of Albert of Brandenburg Duke of Prussia, and of Maria Leonora, the eldest sister and next heir of the Duke deceased. 4. Wolfgangus Gulielmus Palatine of Newburg, son of Magdalen the younger sister of that Mary, who claimed the estate as nearest kinsman one degree to the said last Duke. And though the right seemed most apparently on the side of Brandenbourg; the Estate in tail pretended by the Duke of Saxony, being formerly cut off by Imperial authority: and that pretended to by the Duke of Newburg, not of force in Germany; yet being that Leopold was in Arms, and had already forced a possession of most part of the Country; the two Princes of Brandenbourg and Newburg soon agreed the controversy, and by the help of the Protestant Princes their Confederates, recovered the greatest part of it from the hands of Leopold. But the Palatine of Newburg not content with his partage, first married with a daughter of the Duke of Bavaria, then reconciled himself to the Church of Rome; called in the Spanish Arms under the command of Marquis Spinola, to abet his quarrel: which made George William, son of the Elector of Brandenbourg, and the Lady Anne, to call in the Forces of the States, under the command of Maurice Earl of Nassaw after Prince of Orange. The issue of which war was this, that Spinola possessed himself of Wesel, Aken, Mullheim, Pusseldorp, and most other places of importance in Berg, and Gulick; and the States got into their power the Towns of Gulick, with Rees and Emmerick, in the Dukedom of Cleve; and almost the whole County of Mark. And though they both pretend to keep them for the use of those Princes in whose cause they stand: yet when such strong parties keep the Stakes, it is most easy to determine who will win the game: such alterations as have happened in the chance of war, by the reciprocal winning and losing of some Towns on both sides, not much conducing to the benefit of the rightful Princes.    

EARLS of ALTENA and MARCH.  
A. Ch.  
834 1 Robert, son of Baldwin, to whom the County of Teisterbant was given by Eberard.  
2 Theodorick son of Robert, the first Lord of Altena.  
3 Adolphus I. Earl of Altena.  
4 Adolphus II. Earl of Altena and Berg.  
5 Conrade Earl of Altena and Berg.  
4 Adolph III. Earl of Altena and Berg.  
5 Eberhard Earl of Altena; his younger brother Engelbert succeeding in Berg.  
6 Frederick, Earl of Altena.  
7 Adolphus IV. created the first Earl of March.  
1249 7 Engelbert, Earl of March and Altena.  
8 Adolphus V. son of Engelbert.  
9 Engelbert II. from whom by a second wife the daughter and heir of Aremberg, descended that branch of the house of March, which till of late, were Sovereigns of Sedan, and Dukes of Bovillon.  
10 Adolph VI husband of Mary (or Margaret) daughter and heir of Theodorick the 9 Earl of Cleve.    

2. The Estates of the three ELECTOR-BISHOPS.  
Adjoining to the Estates of Cleve are those of the Spiritual Electors of the Empire of Germany, Colen, Ments, and Triers; not so contiguous and conterminous as those of Cleveland, and therefore to be laid out severally by their meats and boundaries: And first for  
1. COLEN-LAND, or the Estate of the Archbishop and Elector of Colen, is bounded on the East with the Dukedom of Berg, from which divided by the Rhine; on the West with Gulick; on the North with Cleve itself and the County of Muers; and on the South extending to the land of Triers. The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Vbii, in former times possessed of the Countries of Berg, and March; but being warred on by the Germane bordering next upon them, they were by the Clemency of Agrippa, than Lieutenant of Gaul, received into protection, and by him placed along the French side of the Rhine, as well for defence of the borders of the Roman Empire, as for their own security against that Enemy. Won from the Romans by the French in the reign and under the conduct of Childerick, anno 412. or thereabouts; and from the French by the Emperor Otho the first, anno 949. Since that time, 
Colen. Mentz.  the City of Colen hath remained Imperial, and of late times incorporated amongst the Hanse-towns: but the territory near unto it, and a great part of Westphalen, subject immediately to the Bishop, much of the lands which formerly belonged to the Kingdom of Lorraine, being conferred upon this See by the Emperor Otho the second at such time as the Dukedom of Lorraine was erected by him. The Bishops See first founded here by S. Maternus, one of the Disciples of S. Peter; as hath been constantly affirmed by old tradition: but howsoever an Episcopal See without all question in the time of Constantine: Maternus, Bishop hereof, subscribing amongst others to the Council of Arles anno 326. And being Colen was in those times the Metropolis of the Province of Germania Secunda the Bishop had the power of a Metropolitan, according to the rule and observation so often mentioned. Afterwards when the Empire was made Elective, these Bishops, with their brethren of Mentz and Triers, were made three of the seven, which were to nominate and elect the succeeding Emperor: after which time it is no wonder that they grew both in power and Patrimony.  
Places of most importance within this Electorate, are 1. Bonner, situate on the banks of the Rhine, in the most pleasant and fruitful place of all the Country; the ordinary refidence of the Archbishop, whose house or Palace here, is said to be one of the fairest in all Germany. By Tacitus called Benna, and sometimes Castra Bonnensia, the wintering Camp in his times, of the sixth Legion. 2. Nuys, by the same writer called Novesium, (Nivesia by Antoninus) seated on the Erp, not far from its fall into the Rhine; the break-neck of the glories of Charles Duke of Burgundy: who being resolved to get this town into his hands, as a convenient pass into Germany, lay so long before it, that he lost the opportunity of joining with King Edward the 4. of England, whom he had purposely invited to the war of France; and yet was fain to go without it. By means whereof he grew so low in reputation, that he was undermined by the French, defied by the Lorrainer, forsaken by the English, baffled by the Swissers, and at last overthrown and slain by that beggarly nation. 3. Ernace, or Andernach, by Marcellinus called Antenacum, one of the ten Garrisons erected by the Romans on the banks of the Rhine, to secure their Province from the Germans: the other nine, being Confluenz, Bopport, Worms, B'ing, Zabern, Altrip, Selts, Strasburg, and Wassenberg. 4. Lintz, seated on the same River also. 5. Sontina, a town of good repute. 6. Zulp, now a village of no esteem but for the Antiquities of it, by Tacitus and Antoninus called Tolbiacum; most memorable for the great victory which Clovis the first Christian King of the French (upon a vow made in the heat of the fight to embrace the Gospel) obtained against the whole power of the Almans, never presuming after that to invade his territories. 7. Rhineburg, commonly called Berck, the most northern town of all the Bishopric, situate on the Rhine (as the name imports) there where the lands of this Bishop, as also of the Dukes of Cleve, and the Earls of Muers, meet upon a point. A Town which for these 60. years hath been of little use or profit to the right owner, possessed sometimes by the Spaniards, sometimes by the confederate States; for each commodiously seated, as opening a passage up the River, and receiving great customs on all kind of Merchandise passing to and fro. But having finally been possessed by the Spaniard from the year 1606, till 1633, it was then regained for the States by Henry of Nassaw Prince of Orange; with the loss of no more than 60. men: there being found in the Town 30. Brass pieces of Ordnance, 70. barrels of powder, with victuals and ammunition of all sorts thereunto proportionable. 8. Colen, situate on the Rhine, first built by the Vbii before mentioned, and by them called Oppidum Vbiorum: afterwards in honour of Agrippina (daughter of Germanicus, and wife of Claudius) who was here born, made a Roman Colony, and called Colonia Agrippina; and sometimes by way of eminency Colonia only; thence the name of Colen. A rich, large, populous, and magnificent City, containing about five miles in compass; in which are numbered 19 Hospitals, 37 Monasteries of both Sexes, 30 Chapels of our Lady, 9 parishes, and 10 Collegiate Churches, besides the Cathedral, being a Church of vast greatness, but of little beauty, and not yet finished: the Metropolitan whereof is Chancellor of Italy, the second of the three Electors; and writes himself Duke of W●stphalen and Angrivaria. Nigh to this Town did Caesar with incredible expedition make a bridge over the Rhine, which more terrified the barbarous enemy, than the reports of his valour: so powerful is laborious industry, that it overcometh all dysasters, and maketh the mostunpassable waters yield to Heroic resolutions.  
In this Town also are said to lie the bodies of the three wisemen, which came from the East to worship our Saviour; vulgarly called the three Kings of Colen. The whole story is at large written in tables, which are fastened unto their Tombs. The pith whereof is this. The first of them called Melchior, an old man with a large beard; offered Gold as unto a King; the second called Gasper, a beardless young man, offered Frankineense as unto God: The third called Balthasar, a Blackmoor with a spreading beard, offered Myrrh as unto a Man ready for his Sepulchre. That they were of Arabia, the tale saith, is probable; sirs, because they came from the East, and so is Arabia in respect of Jerusalem: and 2. because it is said in the 72 Psalm, The Kings of Arabia shall bring gifts. As for their bodies, they are there said to have been translated by Helena, the mother of Constantine, unto Constantinople; from thence by Eustorfius, Bishop of Milan, removed unto Milan; and finally brought hither by Rainoldus, Bishop hereof, anno 1164. This is the substance of the history; which for my part I reckon among the Apocrypha, (except it be their coming from some part of Arabia) but have not leisure in this place to refel the Fable.  
2 Next to the Bishopric of Colen lieth the land of TRIERS, extended all along the course of the Moselle, from the Dukedom of Lorraine on the South, to the influx of that River into the Rhine at the City of Confluentz, where it bordereth on the Land of Colen: and being bounded on the East with Luxembourg, as on the West with some part of Franconia. The Country towards Lorraine, 
Triers.  and Luxembourg, somewhat wild and barren; more fruitful about Triers itself, and the bank of the Rhine; in all parts generally more pleasant than profitable, the greatest riches of it lying in woods and Minerals. The Bishops See here first erected by Eucherius, a Disciple and follower of S. Peter. The reality whereof, not only testified by the Martyrologies, but by Methodius a writer of approved credit; who adds Valerius and Maternus for his next successors; the line Episcopal continuing till the Council of Arles anno 326, Agritius Bishop of Triers subscribing to the Acts thereof. From this time forwards and before the Bishop had the reputation and authority of a Metropolitan, the City of Triers being anciently the Metropolis of Belgica prima, within which it stands: increased exceedingly by being made one of the three Electors of the Spiritualty, though the last in order, and Chancellor to the Emperor for the Realm of France; the fortunes of which Realm it followed, till wrested from it, with the rest of the Kingdom of Lorraine, by the Germane Emperors.  
Places of most importance in it, are 1. Confluents, now Cobolentz, the Confluentes of Antoninus, so called because seated on the confluence or meeting of the Rhine and the Moselle; the station anciently of the first Legion. A populous and well-built town; and seated in a pleasant and fertile Country. 2. Embretstein, over against Cobolentz, on the other side of the Rhine, beautified with a strong Castle of the Bishops, mounted upon a lofty hill, which not only gives a gallant prospect to the eye, but commands both the Town and River. 3. Boppart, seated on the Rhine, and called so quasi Bonport, from the commodiousness of the Creek (upon which it standeth) for the use of shipping: one of the forts (as Confluents before mentioned was) erected by the Romans on the Rhine for defence of Gaul against the Germans; occasioning in time both Towns. It was once miserably wasted by Richard Earl of Cornwall and King of the Romans, because the Bishop of Triers agreed not unto his Election; but soon recovered of those hurts. The ancient name hereof in the itinerary of Antoninus, is supposed to be Bodobriea: pawned to the Bishops of Triers by Henry the 7. and not yet redeemed. 4. Sarbrucken, on the edge of Lorraine (by Antoninus called Pons Sarvix) seated on the River or Brook called Sar, (whence it had the name) at the fall thereof into the Moselle, possessed at the present by a branch of the house of Nassaw (but Homagers of this elector) entitled hence according to the Dutch fashion, Counts of Nassaw in Sarbruck. 5. Veldents, and 6. Belstern on the Moselle; of which nothing memorable. 7. Treves, or Triers, in Latin Treveris, the principal City of the Treveri, who possessed this tract: seated upon the Moselle also; the Metropolis of the Province of Belgica Prima, and honoured with the residence of the Vicar or Lieutenant General, for the whole Diocese of Gaul: by consequence the seat of a Metropolitan when it submitted to the Gospel. Of such antiquity, that it is said to have been founded 150. years before the City of Rome: of no great beauty of itself, and as little trading: the River not being capable of ships of burden; and the air generally so cloudy and inclined to rain, that it is by some called merrily Cloaca Planetarum. It passed sometimes among the number of Imperial cities, but now acknowledgeth the Elector for the Lord thereof; by whom made an University, one of the ancientest in all Germany, and of as much resort for the study of good Arts and Sciences, as the best amongst them. 8. Obert-Wesel, or Vesalia Superior, so called to distinguish it from Wesel in the Dukedom of Cleve, which is Vesalia inferior, or the Vnder-wesel: the furthest place of this district, seated on the Rhine, not far from Bacebarach, a Town of the Palatinate, of no great note, but that it is accounted for a Town Imperial.  
3. The Bishopric of MENTZ, is not laid out by bounds and limits as the other; because the Patrimony and estate thereof doth not lie together: dispersed for the most part about Franconia, intermixed with the Lands and Towns of the Prince's Palatine, the Bishops of Worms, Spires, and others. So that the temporal Estate of this elector is every way inferior unto those of Triers and Colen; superior unto both in place and dignity: he being the first in rank of the whole Electoral College, Chancellor for the Empire, and in all meetings sitteth at the right hand of the Emperor. The Bishops See first placed here, as some report, by S. Crescens, one of the Disciples of S. Paul, of whose being sent by him into Gallia (for so the Ancient writers understand Galatia) the Apostle speaketh 2 Tim. 4. Though others with more probability seat him at Vienna in Dauphin. But whether it were here or there, certain it is that anciently this City was a See Episcopal, Martin the Bishop hereof subscribing to the Acts of the Council of Colen anno 347. And if a Bishop, certainly a Metropolitan Bishop, this City being in those times the Metropolis of the Province of Germania Prima. But Christianity being worn out of these parts of Germany, by the conquests of the French, Almans, and other infidels; was again restored in this tract by Boniface, an Englishman, the first Archbishop of Mentz of this new plantation, (in and about the time of Pepin, surnamed the Gross, More of the Palace to the French Kings, and father of Martell) who for the Orthodoxy of his doctrine, and the number of Churches planted by him, hath been deservedly honoured with the title of the Apostle of Germany.  
Towns of most note belonging to the Bishops hereof are 1. Mentz itself, the Moguntiacum of the Ancients, so called from the River of Maine formerly Mogus and Moganus in the Latin; now better known by the name of Moenus) opposite to the fall whereof into the Rhine it was built of old, so having the command of both Rivers: for that cause made the seat of a Roman officer, commonly called the Duke of Mentz, who had a charge of the Frontiers, and especially of those ten Garrisons planted on the banks of the Rhine, spoken of before. Stretched out in great length on the River side, but not of answerable breadth: well built and populous towards the water, in other parts not so well inhabited. The public buildings generally very large and beautiful, the houses built according to the old Roman model; 
Palatinate of Rhine.  the most magnificent whereof is the Bishop's Palace, who is the immediate Lord both of the Town and Territory, extended on both sides of the Rhine, fruitful in all natural commodities, and abounding with most excellent wines. Of good note also for an University here founded by Theodorick, one of the Electours: but especially for the Art of Printing which was here invented, or perfected at the least, and made fit for use. 2. B'ing seated on the Rhine, another of the Garrison towns erected by the Romans on the banks of that River. In a small Island of which, not far from this town, is a Tower, or Castlelet, called the Mouseturn, i. e. the tower of Mice: built by one Halto, (or Hanno) Archbishop of Mentz, anno 900, or thereabouts. Who in a year of great scarcity pretending to relieve the poor people oppressed with Famine, caused them to be gathered together into an old barn, where he burned them all; saying they were the Rats and Mice which devoured the Corn. After which barbarous act he was so persecuted by those Vermin, that to avoid them, he was fain to build a Palace in the midst of the Rhine; whither the Rats and Mice followed him, and at last devoured him. 3. Lausteine. 4. Hasford. 5. Oxenford. 6. Alderburg. 7. Middleburg. 8. Ca●lostadt, the birthplace of Carolostadius, of great note in the time of Luther. 9 Bischoffstein. 10. Koningsberg, (mons Regius in Latin) the birthplace of Johannes de Monte Regio, a famous Mathematician, as appeareth by his Comment upon Ptolemies Almagest, most of these in Frankenland, but of this Electorate.   

3. The PALATINATE of the RHINE.  
The PALATINATE of the RHINE is situate wholly in Franconia; bounded upon the East with the Dukedom of Wirtenberg, and some part of Franconie; with the residue thereof, and the River Main upon the North; on the South with Elsats, or Alsatia; and on the West, with the land of Triers: extended in length from Coub to Gemersheime, north and south 72 miles; and in breadth from Sweibrucken to Lauden, east and west 90 miles.  
It is called also the Lower Palatinate, to difference it from the Palatinate of Bavaria, which is called the Upper: the Palatinate of the Rhine, because lying on the banks of that famous River. The whole Country is said to be the most pleasant part of all Germany, stored with all sorts of fruits and metals, abounding with those cool wines, which growing on the banks of the Rhine, have the name of Rhenish, adorned with many goodly Towns both for strength, populousness, and beauty; and finally, watered with the famous Rivers of the Rhine, and the Neccar. Chief Towns hereof, 1. M●spach, a pretty neat town on the banks of the Neccar, and a Prefecture, not far from the borders of Wirtenberg; 2. Ladenberg, near the influx of the same River into the Rhine; the moiety whereof was bought by Rupertus Emperor and Palatine, of the Earls of Hohenloe, anno 1371. the other moiety belonging to the Bishop of Worms. 3. Winh●ime, a small town not far from Ladeberg, belonging once to the Archbishop of Mentz, but on some controversy arising about the title, adjudged unto the said Rupertus, and his heirs for ever. 4. Scriessen in the same tract, well seated, but not very large, sold with the Castle of Straluberg to the said Rupertus, by Sifride (or Sigifride) of Straluberg, the right heir thereof, anno 1347. 5. Heidelberg, on the right shore of the Neccar (going down the water) compassed on three sides with Mountains, and lying open only towards the West, which makes the air hereof to be very unhealthy. The chief beauty of it lieth in one long street, extended in length from East to West: on the Southeast side whereof is a fair and pleasant Marketplace; and not far off a very high mountain called Koningstall (that is to say, the Kingly Seat) upon the middle ascent whereof is the Castle, where the Prince's Electours use to keep their Courts; and on the very summit or top thereof, the ruins of an old Tower blown up with gunpowder. A town of no great bigness, nor very populous, there being but one Church in it, which was used in the time of my Author for Prayer and Preaching: the rest being either ruined, or employed unto other uses, if not repaired again since the Spaniards became masters of it, for more frequent Masses. Howsoever it hath the reputation of being the chief City of this Palatinate: not long since furnished with a great and gallant Library, which for choice, and number of Books (especially Manuscripts) was thought not to be followed in all Europe, (till matched, if not over-matched by the famous Bodleian Library of Oxford:) most of them to the great prejudice of the Protestant cause, being carried to Rome, and other places of that party, when the town was taken by the Spaniards, anno 1620. Finally for the town itself, it was once part of the possessions of the Bishop of Worms; from whom it was taken by the Palatines; it is now famous, for being the seat of the Palsgraves', the sepulchre of Rodolphus Agricola, and for an University founded by the Emperor, and Palatine Rupertus, anno 1346. 6. Baccharach, on the banks of Rhine, so called quasi Bacchi ara, for the excellent wines. 7. Coub on the other side of the water; near unto which is the old and fair Castle called Psalts, from whence the name Psalts-grave, or Palsgrave, seemeth to some to have been derived. 8. Openheim, a strong town, which together with Keisers, Lauterne and Ingelheim, were given to the Palatines by Wenceslaus: and after settled on them, by Rupertus the Emperor and Palatine, for 100000 Florins, anno 1402. 9 Cruintznacke, called anciently Stauronesus. 10. Frankendale; lately a Monastery only, but being peopled by such of the Netherlands, which to avoid the fury of Duke Alva, fled hither; is now a town of principal strength. 11. Germersheim, and 12. Manheim, a well fortified town, seated on the confluence of Rhine and Neccar.  
On the Eastern part of the Country standeth 13 Laden, situate on the little River Tiberus, the furthest bound of the Palatinate towards the North-east, there adjoining to the rest of Frankenland. And on the west side the Towns of 14 Newstat, 15 Kaiser's Lautern, in Latin called Caesarea Lutra, once a town Imperial, from which, and from its situation on the River Luter, it received this name. 16. Sweibrueken, the title of a younger house of the ●saltsgraves, whom the Latin writers call Prin●lpes Bipontani: the French, the Princes of Deuxpon●s. 17. Sin●neren on the northwest point of it, where it meets with the District of Triers; the title of another Branch of the Palatine Family, called the Dukes of Sin●neren. In all there are contained within this Palatinate 24 walled Towns, and 12 fair Palaces of the Prince: most of which they have added to their estate within little more than 400 years. Such excellent managers have they been of their own estates, so potent in ordering the affairs of the Empire both in war and peace; and so ingrafled themselves into the most noble Families of Germany, that I may well say with Irenicus, Non est alia Germaniae familia, cui plus debeat nobilitas.  
Within the limits of this Country, and intermingled with the lands of the Prince's Palatine, are the Bishoprics of Spires and Worms; both ancient, and of great Revenue, but feudataries for a great part of their estates to these Electors. Of these more towards the head of the Rhine, stands the City of Spires, by Ptolemy called Ne●magus, from the newness of the building when that name was given; by Antoninus, Civitas Nemetum, from the Nemetes, who possessed this tract; and sometimes Spira, by which name it doth still continue. A town Imperial, and anciently a Bishops See; Tessis the Bishop hereof subscribing to the Acts of the Council of Colen, anno 347. A neat Town, and very delectably seated. Of great resort by reason of the Imperial Chamber, the sovereign Court of Judicature of all the Empire; capable of Appeals from the Tribunals of all the Princes, and free States thereof. A Court which first followed the Emperor in all his Removes (as anciently the King's Bench in England) by Maximilian the Emperor first made Sedentary, and fixed at Frankfort; removed after to Worms, and finally to this City by Charles the fifth. Sufficiently famous in that the name of Protestants was here taken up, given to the Princes, and free Cities following the Reformed Religion, upon their legal Protestation here exhibited. More down the water in the same shore thereof, stands the City of Worms, one of those built upon the Rhine, for defence of Gaul against the Germans; by Ptolemy called Borbegomagus; by Antonine, Civitas Wormensis, whence the modern name; but generally Civitas Vangionum, from the Vangiones the old inhabitants of those parts, whose chief City it was. A town Imperial as the former, and a See Episcopal as that is, and as ancient too; Victor the Bishop hereof subscribing to the Acts of the Council of Colen before mentioned. A town to be observed for the first appearance which Luther made before Charles the fifth, (the Imperial Chamber then being holden in this City) who being dissuaded from that journey by some of his friends, returned this resolute answer to them, That go he would, though there were as many devils in the town, as there were tiles on the houses. Chief towns belonging to these Bishops, are 1 Vdenheim, a town belonging to the Bishop of Spires, whose residence it sometimes is: conveniently seated for the command of the Country, and therefore upon some design which was then in hand, fortified strongly by the Bishop. But this new Fortification being begun in a time of peace, gave great occasion of distrust to the neighbouring Princes; who interposed with Frederick the fifth, than Prince Elector (of whom held in chief) to cause the Bishop to desist from the finishing of it. Which when he refused to do, pleading a Placard from the Emperor Mathias to complete the work; the Prince elector, with the rest of the Confederates, beat it down by force: for this contempt, cited to Spires the Imperial Chamber, in which it was also resolved to proceed suddenly, and severely to their condemnation. One of the chief motives which occasioned that unfortunate Prince, to entertain the offer of the Crown of Bohemia; and consequently a chief cause of the Germane wars. In managing whereof this town was thought so commodious, that Marquis Spinola caused the works to be raised again, made it the strongest hold in all those Countries, and caused it to be called by the name of Philipsberg. 3. Rotenberg originally belonging to the Bishops of Spires, but of late times possessed by the Prince's Palatine. Others of lesser slote I forbear to mention.  
The first Inhabitants of this Country on the French side of the Rhine, were the Nemetes, and Vangiones spoken of before; on the other side, the Intuergi. First conquered by the Romans, and from them conquered by the French; of whose Empire it remained a part, till dismembered from it at the erection of the Kingdom of Lorraine, in the fall whereof it was annexed to the Empire of Germany. By little and little got into the hands of the Prince's Palatine, who being originally Officers of the Emperor's household (such as the Maires of the Palace to the French Kings at the first institution) had first the honour of Counts Palatine bestowed upon them; and afterwards the place of an elector in the choice of the Emperor. But where their Estate then lay, where they fixed their dwelling, and what provinces or people they had subject to them, a nullo inveni scriptum, I could never find any good Record to build on, saith the learned Munster: their habitation and possession in and of these parts, (acquired for the most part by Arms and Money) not being above 450 years standing at the utmost. Likely it is, they had their residence for the most part in the Emperor's Palace, living upon their rents, (as other great officers of Court in these later times) the dignity and authority of so great a place seeming sufficient to content them: but called Count Palatines of the Rhine, because their Jurisdiction and Authority lay most especially in those parts of the Empire which were towards that River: Afterwards on the marriage of Otho, the second of that name Duke of Bavaria, with Gertrude, the daughter of Henry the Elector Palatine; this office with the Electoral dignity fell into that house, possessed at that time of those parts of 〈◊〉 which not long after on the dividing of that estate betwixt Rodolphus and Ludo●●ous, the son of ●udovick the 2. elector Palatine, and Duke of Bavaria, made up this Palatinate. A State which suddenly received a great augmentation, partly by the care and good husbandry of Rupertus, Emperor and elector Palatine; partly by the weakness and ambition of Wenceslaus Emperor and King of Bohemia; and partly by the valour of Frederick, the Prince elector. Of these the first bought in the towns of Winheim, Ladeberg, and Scriessen, with the Castle of Stralnberg, with their lands and territories. The second gave unto the Palatines for their voices in his election, three strong towns of the Empire, viz. Kaiser's Lauterne, Ingelheim, and Openkeim: and the last took in battle, anno 1452. the Earl of Wirtenberg, the marquis of Baden, the Bishop of Spires, and the Archbishop of Mentz, and ransomed them on what condition he pleased. More particularly the Earl of Wirtenberg (for it was not yet erected into a Dukedom) paid for his ransom 100000 Florins; the Bishop of Mentz redeemed himself for 450000 Florins. The Bishop of Spires gave for his liberty, the towns of Rottenberg and Wersaw: and the marquis of Baden yielded up in lieu of his freedom, the Country of Spanheim, of which Cruitznack is a part; the towns of Besiken, and Binheim; the right which he pretended to Eppingen, a town over against Gemersheim; and his royalties between this Gemersheim and Selts a town of Alsatia, in fishing and hunting. So having brought these Princes unto their Estate; let us next take a view of those who have successively enjoyed both the State and Title, as far as we can go by the light of Story.  

ELECTORS Palatine of the RHINE.  
A. Ch.  
1. Henry Count of Palatine in the time of Otho the third, by whom ordained to be one of the six Electors.  
2 Sigefride, the son of Adelheild, wife of this Henry the elector, by a former husband.  
3 Ezeline and Conrade, sons of Sigefride.  
4 Ludoifus, son to Ezeline.  
5 Conrade, Elector Palatine in the time of Henry the fifth.  
6 Frederick, son to Frederick Duke of Schawben, Nephew to the Emperor Conrade the third.  
7 Henry II. surnamed the Lion, Duke of Saxony and Bavaria.  
1195 8 Henry III. son of Henry the Lion, and husband of Clementia, daughter of Conrade Duke of Schawben, and Elector Palatine.  
9 Henry IV. son of Henry the third, in the life of his Father; the last Elector Palatine of the nomination and appointment of the Emperor, the dignity from hence forwards becoming hereditary.  
10 Otho, Duke of Bavaria of that name the second, elector Palatine of the Rhine, in right of Gertrude his wife, sister and next heir of Henry the fourth, whom he succeeded in the Electoral dignity, confirmed therein by the Emperor Frederick the second.  
1269 11 Ludovicus elector Palatine, and Duke of Bavaria, the son of Otho.  
1294 12 Rodolphus the eldest son of Lewis or Ludovicus, succeeded his Father in the Palatinate and Electoral dignity: Northgoia, or the Palatinate of Bavaria, being added to his part, to make even the scale; his younger brother Ludovicus succeeding in Bavaria.  
1315 13 Adolphus, surnamed the Simple, resigned the Electoral dignity to his brother Rodolphus, as the fitter man to undertake it.  
1327 14 Rodolphus II. on the resignation of Adolphus.  
1337 15 Rupertus, the brother of Rodolphus the second, founder of the University of Heidelberg, anno 1346.  
1385 16 Rupertus II. son of Adolfus the Simple.  
1398 17 Rupertus III. elected Emperor in the place of Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, anno 1406, made Knight of the Garter by King Henry the fourth.  
1410 18 Ludovious II. surnamed Caecus, and Barbatus, married Blanch, daughter to King Henry the fourth of England.  
1439 19 Lud●vicus III. son of Lewis the second.  
1451 20 Frederick, brother of Ludovicus, during the minority of Philip his said brother's son, succeeded in the Electoral dignity; and added much to that Estate by his personal virtue.  
1478 21 Philip, the son of Lewis the third, pretended to the Dukedom of Bavaria in right of Margaret his wife; but after a long, and bloody war forced to go without it.  
1508 22 Ludovicus IV. son of Philip.  
1544 23 Frederick II. brother of Lewis the fifth, who first introduced the Reformed Religion into the Palatinate.  
1556 24 Otho-Henry, 
Palatinate.  son of Rupertus the Brother of Frederick, and Lewis the last of the direct line of this house of Bavaria.  
1559 25 Frederick III. Duke of Simmeren, descended from Stephen Palatine of Zweybruck or Bipont, younger son of the Emperor Rupert, succeeded on the decease of Otho-Henry without issue.  
1576 26 Ludovicus V. son of Frederick the third, a munificent benefactor to the University of Heidelberg.  
1483 27 Frederick IV. son of Lewis the fifth, married Ludoriea, or Loise, daughter of William, and sister of Maurice, Princes of Orange.  
1610 28 Frederick V. married the Princess Elizabeth daughter of James, King of Great Britain. In danger of being proscribed for demolishing the works of Vdenheim he accepted the Crown of Bohemia, but worsted at the battle of Prague, and warred upon by the Bavarian and the Spaniard, he lost both that, and his own native Estates and Dignities; of which deprived by Ferdinand the prevailing Emperor: the Lower Palatinate being assigned over to the King of Spain, the Upper Palatinate with the Electoral dignity to the Duke of Bavaria. Restored to the possession of the most part of his Country, by the power of the Swedes, he died at Mentz, November 19 1632.  
1632 29 Charles Ludovick, the heir both of his Father's Estates, and misfortunes too, not yet admitted to his honours (contrary to the fundamental constitutions of the Empire, by which the sons of the Electours and other Princes are not involved in the guilt of their Father's offences) but in fair hopes to be restored thereto in part, by the Pacifications made at Munster this present year, 1648. which I pray God to prosper for the peace of afflicted Christendom.   
The Religion of this Country hath much varied since the first Reformation, established by Frederick the second, according to the form and doctrine of the Confession of Auspurg: the doctrine and discipline of Calvin being introduced by Frederick the third; the Lutherans forms restored again by Lewis, or Ludovick the fifth; after his death exchanged by Frederick the fourth for that of Calvin; as more conducing to the ends of some needy Statists, who could not otherwise raise their fortunes then by invading the Tithes and Glebe, and other poor remainders of the Church's Patrimony. Of which the Clergy being universally deprived throughout this Country, and reduced to miserable short stipends by the name of a Competency, became so contemptible, and neglected by all sorts of men, that at the last the Church of the Palatinate was in the same condition with the Church of Israel under the reign of jeroboam; when Priests were made out of the meanest of the people. And for the Government of their Churches, though moulded to the Genevian platform, as near as might be; yet were those Princes loath to leave too much power in the hands of the Elderships; and therefore did appoint some superior officers to have an eye on them, whom they called Inspectores & Praepositos, their power being much the same with that of the particular Superintendent amongst the Lutherans; and over them a standing Consistory consisting of three Ministers, and as many Counsellors of State, of the Princes nominating, who in his name were to take care of all things which concerned the Church. A temperament for which they were beholding to Erastus, a Doctor of Physic in the University of Heidelberg, who made this Pill to purge Presbytery of some Popish humours, which secretly lay hid in the body of it. But this whole model is now changed, and the Religion of the Church of Rome restored in most parts of the Country, since the conquest of it by the Spaniard, none being publicly authorized and allowed but that.  
But to return again to the Civil State, and the Concernments of these Princes, The Palsgrave hath many prerogatives above the Electours of either sort. He taketh place of the Duke of Saxony, and marquis of Brandenburg; because Henry the Palatine, was descended of Charles the great: for which cause he is also in the vacancy of the Empire, Governor of the Western parts of Germany; in which office he had power to alienate, or give offices, to take fealty and homage of the subjects; and which is most, to fit in the Imperial Courts, and give judgement of the Emperor himself. And look whatsoever shall in the vacancy of the Empire, be by the Palatines enacted, that the new Emperors are bound by Oath to confirm, and ratify.  
The Revenues of these Princes were conceived to be about 100000 l. per annum: nor could they be supposed at less; the silver Mines about Amberg only in the upper Palatinate, yielding 60000 Crowns a year, and the passage of one Bridge over the Rhine about 20000 Crowns more; besides the demean Lands, and the Lands of the Church incorporated (since the Reformation) into their Estate.  
The Arms hereof are Diamond, a Lion Topas, Armed and Crowned Ruby.   

4. ALSATIA. 
Elsats.   
ALSATIA or ELSATS, as the Dutch call it, is bounded on the East with the Rhine, which parteth it from the Marquisate of Baden, and some part of Schwaben; on the West with the Mountain Vauge, or Vogesus, which separateth it from Lorraine; on the North with the Palatinate; on the South (where it groweth very narrow) with a point of Switzerland. A Country for the pleasantness and fertility of it, inferior to none in Germany; called therefore Elsats, (as some think) quast Edelsats; that is to say, a noble Seat: derived more probably by others from the river Ill, the only River of note in all this tract, and called so, quasi Ill-sats, the seat or situation on the River iii.  
It is divided generally into the Lower and higher, to which the Country called Sungow may come in for a third. The LOWER ALSATIA is that which bordereth on the Palatinate, so called because further off from the Mountains, and down the water in respect of the course of the Rhine. A Country so abundantly fruitful in wine and corn, (with which it furnisheth some parts of Germa●y, and not a few of the neighbour Countries) that it is generally called Germaniae nutrix, or the 〈◊〉 of Germany; by Winphelegius the Epitome or Abstract of it. Chief towns therein are 1 Strasburg, so called from the multitude of Streets (the Dutch call them Strats) anciently Argentoratum, and then Argentina, from the Roman Exchequer, or Receipt here kept in the time of their greatness; or from some Mines of silver which were found about it. A stately, rich, and populous City, well stored with public garners and cellars of wine, against times of dearth: Situate on the two Rivers Ill and Brusch, where they both fall into the Rhine; by which and by the helps of Art very strongly fortified: designed from the first foundation for a Town of war, this being another of the towns which the Romans built to defend the Rhine against the Germans. Now an Imperial City, and a See Episcopal, the Bishop whereof is Lord of the Lower Alsatia; the Church Cathedral, one of the fairest in all Germany: much famed for a Clock of most admirable workmanship, and a Steeple of as curious a frame as that, mounted 574 foot in height, the highest of any in Christendom, higher by 40 foot then the Steeple of S. Paul's in London, before the firing of it. Of this thus saith the Poet in Adr●anus.  
Vrbs praetlara situ, ripis contermina Rheni,  
Maxima cui celsae metiuntur moenia turris.  
Strasburg on Rhein's inamelled banks doth lie,  
Whose Tower even bids defiance to the sky.  
2 Zabern, or Elsatz Savern, the Tabernae of Antonine and Marcellinus, another of the old Roman Garrisons, destroyed by the Almans, and repaired again by Julian the Apostata then Emperor. Now the chief place of Residence for the Bishops of Strasburg, and well frequented in regard of the Courts of Justice kept by his Officers in this City for the Lower Alsatia. 3 Altrip, so called from Alta ripa, from the high banks of the river on which it is seated; another of the Towns or Forts which the ●omans like politic conquerors built on the West side of the Rhine, to prohibit the incursions of the barbarous Nations, as was also 4 Selts, seated on the Rhine betwixt Strasburg and Zabern; and 5 Weissenberg, more towards the Palatinate, now a town Imperial, but seated on the river Lutra not far ●●om its fall into the Rhine; encompassed with little hills and delightful groves, the River gently washing the walks thereof, and adding much to it both of strength and beauty. 6 Hagenaw, between Selis and Strasburg, but not so near unto the Rhine as either of them, first walled by Frederick Barbaressa anno 1164. and since that time of great importance for command of the Country: but seated in a ●tandie and unfruitful soil, frequented chiefly heretofore by the old Lantgraves of Elsars' for the commodities of hunting. More from the Rhine, 7 Stechfield, corruptly so called for Steffansfield, from the Monastery of S. Stephen there founded. 8 Hast on the Brusch, etc.  
Places of most importance in the HIGHER ALSATIA, are 1 Rufach on the river Ombach, belonging to the Bishops of Strasburg, of old called Rubeacum, from the red colour of the earth, well ●uilt, environed with a double Suburb; in ancient times of great resort by the Roman Nobility, much taken with the fruitfulness and pleasures of it: and well inhabited at this day, as is all the Country round about it, by reason of their vigorous proceedings against Thiefs; from whence 〈◊〉 Germane have a Proverb, that the old gallows at Ruffach is made of oak. 2 Ensheim or Ensisheim, on the river Ill, anciently the station of the tenth Legion, and then called Aruncis; now of most note for the ●●preme Court of justice there held for Brisgow, Sungow, and this part of Alsatia, by the Archdukes of Austria, the chief Lords thereof. 3 Colmar, an Imperial City, raised out of the ruins of old Argenta●ia, destroyed by Attila and the Huns: well built and situate almost in the very Navel of Alsatia, not above an hours journey from the foot of the Mountains, but in a fruitful and rich soil both for corn and pasturage, the Country hereabouts being very well watered with the Louch, Duro, Fetched, and iii. 4 Sch●estad, in the modern Latin, Selestadium, but by the ancients called Elcebas, the station at that time of the 19 Legion, afterwards of great fame for a Church here built by Hildegardis Duchess of Schwaben, anno 1044. according to the pattern of the Temple of Jerusalem: which in tract of time became the richest Monastery in all these parts. Situate in a very fertile and delightful soil, having the Rhine on the one side, and some spurs of the Mountain Vauge shadowed with Groves of Chestnuts upon the other: walled in the time of Frederick the 2. about the year 1216. and on the East defended with impassable fens. 5 Gebwiser, and 6 Watwell, both seated near the aforesaid Mountains, and both subject to the Abbot of Murbach. 7 Keisersberg, 8 Turchein, two Imperial towns, but not otherwise memorable; as neither are many of the rest, but for name and number; there being reckoned within this small Province of Elsats, (not including Sungow) 46 Cities and Towns begirt with walls, besides Castles, Forts and Villages, almost innumerable; and amongst them more Free and Imperial Cities, then in any one Province of the Empire.  
The Southern part of Elsats bordering on the Canton of Basil, is commonly called by the name of Sungow, in Latin, Sungovia, and Sungoia: but in former times the Dukedom of Pfirts, from Pfirt the chief town of it, and the Duke's seat: the Country very ploutifull in corn and wine (as the rest of Elsats) affording good store of each to the neighbouring Swissers. Chief Towns hereof, are 1 Mulhansen on the river Ill, heretofore under the command of the Bishops of Strasburg, as were also Keisersb●rg, and Colmar, but being taken in by Rodolph of Habspurgh, after his advancement to the Empire it was made Imperial, and is now confederate with the Swissers. 2 befor'rt, remarkable for a Collegiate Church there founded by the Earls of Pfirt, in which lie buried 13 Earls, and as many Countesses. 3 Malz-munster, so called from a Monastery of Nuns there founded by Maso a Prince of the old Almans. 4 Thann, a neat Town beautified with the fair Castle of Engleberg, mounted upon the top of a lofty hill. 5 Mors-munster, so named of an ancient Monastery there founded by the Earls of Pfirt, most of them great builders of Religious houses. 6 Altkirk, not far from the head of the river iii. 7 Pfirt itself, seated on the Ill not far from Altkirk, in a country heretofore overgrown with Woods and Forests, whence it had the name; called by the French le Pais de Ferrette (corruptly for le Pais de Forrest) by the Dutch moulded into Pfirt: by which name (of the County of Ferrette) it is called by Philip de Comines, and other French writers, and by that name was pawned by Sigismond the Archduke, to Charles Duke of Burgundy, made by that means too near a neighbour to the Swissers, as it proved in fine.  
Westward hereof, betwixt it and the County of Burgundy, lieth the Town and Earldom of Montb●lgard (Montis belligardium in the Latin) united by the marriage of Henrica, daughter and heir of Henry the first Earl hereof anno 1396. to the house of Wirtenberg. Chief Towns whereof, are 1 Clarewang, 2 Passewang, 3 Grans, all anciently beautified with Castles; and 4 Montbelgard, a Town of great strength, proud of a Castle Royal on the top of a fair and lofty Mountain, whence it took that name; once the seat of its proper Earls, as after of the Princes of the house of Wirtenberg: but now both town and Castle in the power of the French, who after their good luck in the Dukedom of Lorraine, caused a good Garrison of their own to be put into them, anno 1633. under pretence of keeping them for the Children of a Brother of the Duke of Wirtenbergs, to whom the inheritance belonged.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this tract were the Tribochi, with parts of the Nemetes and Rauraci; first conquered by the Romans, then subdued by the Almains, after by the French, and by them made a part of the Kingdom of Lorraine: in the full of which Kingdom it was reckoned for a Province of the Germane Empire. Governed for the Emperors by Provincial Earls, in the Dutch language called Landgraves, at first officiary only, and accountable to the Emperors under whom they served; in the end made hereditary and successional unto their posterities. The first hereditary Landgrave said to be Theodorick, in the reign of Otho the third; after whose death the Empire being made elective, gave the Provincial Governors some opportunities to provide for themselves. In his male-issue it continued till the reign of Frederick the 2. who began his Empire anno 1212, and died anno 1250. during which interval this Estate was conveyed by daughters to Albert the 2. Earl of Habspurg, Albert Earl of Hobenburg, and Lewis Earl of Ottingen. Rodolph of Habspurg son of this Albert, afterwards Emperor of the Germans, marrying with Anne the daughter of the Earl of Hohenlbe, became possessed also of his part of the Country: which added to his own, made up the whole Upper Elsats, continued since that time in possession of the house of Austria descended from him. The third part comprehending all the Lower Alsatia, was not long after sold by the Earl of Ottingen to the Bishop of Strasburg, whose Successors hold it to this day, assuming to themselves the title of the Landgraves of Elsats. But as for Sungow or the County of Pfirt, that belonged anciently to the Princes of the house of Schwaben: in the expiring of which potent and illustrious Family, by the death of Conradine the last Duke, anno 1268. that great estate being scattered into many hands, it was made a distinct Earldom of itself. And so continued till the year 1324. when Vlrich the last Earl dying without issue male, left his estate betwixt two daughters, whereof the one named Anne, conveyed her part in marriage to Albert Duke of Austria, surnamed the Short, Grandchild of Rodolphus the Emperor before mentioned; the other named Ursula, sold her moiety to the said Albert for 8000 Crowns. Since that it hath been always in the possession of the Dukes of Austria, (save only for the time in which it was pawned or mortgaged, together with Alsatia, to the Duke of Burgundy) governed in Civil matters and points of Judicature, by the Parliament, or Court of Ensbeim in the Upper Elsats.   

5. LORRAINE. 
Lorraine.   
The Dukedom of LORRAINE, is bounded on the East with Elsats; on the West with the Country of Barrois in France, (belonging to the Dukes hereof, and the rest of Champagne; on the North with Luxembourg, and the land of Triers; and on the South with the County of Burgundy: from which and from the Province of Elsats parted by the Vogesus or Vauge, wherewith encompassed on those sides. Assigned unto Lotharius, eldest son of Lewis the Godly, with the stile of a Kingdom: from thence called Lot-reich by the Dutch, Lot-regne by the French, from which the modern name of Lorraine, and the Latin, Lotharingia, are to fetch their Pedigree.  
The Country is in length about four day's journey, almost three in breadth: much overgrown with Forests, and swelled with Mountains; the spurs and branches of Vogesus, and the once vast Wilderness of Ardenne; yet so sufficiently stored with all manner of necessaries, that it needeth no supply out of other places. Some lakes it hath which yield great quantity of fish; one more especially 14 miles in compass, the fish whereof yields to the Duke's coffers 20000 l. yearly, it affordeth also divers metals, as Silver, Copper, Tin, Iron, Led, in some places Pearls: Calcidonians also of such bigness that whole drinking cups are made of them; and a matter of which they make the purest glasses not to be paralleled in Europe. They have also a goodly breed of Horses, equal to those of Barbary, or the courser of Naples.  
The people by reason of their neighbourhood to, and commerce with France, strive much to imitate the French in garb and fashion; but one may easily see that it is not natural; and have much in them also of the Dutch humour of drinking, but far more moderately than the Dutch themselves: Generally they are a politic and an hardy Nation; not otherwise able to have held their estate so long against the French Kings and the Princes of the house of Burgundy. They lived very happily in former times under their own Dukes, not being at all oppressed with taxes; which made them very affectionate towards the Prince; and useful unto one another. Their language for the most part French, as in Artois, Luxembourg, Triers, and other of the bordering Provinces, members of the French Monarchy in former times: not so refined and elegant as is spoke in France, nor so corrupt and course as that of Montbelgard, and the the County of Burgundy.  
The rivers of chief note, are 1. Marta, or the Meurte, which receiving into it many Rivers, and passing with a swift stream by the walls of Nancie, glides along fairly for a good space within sight of the Moselle, into which at last it falls near Conde. 2 Mosa, the Meuse or Maes, whose spring and course hath been already described in Belgium. 3 Moselle, famous for the design which Lucius Verus Governor for the Emperor Nero, had once upon it. For whereas it ariseth in the mountain Vauge, not far from the head of the river Soasne, and disburdeneth itself into the Rhine at Confluence: he intended to have cut a deep channel from the head of this unto the other; so to have made a passage from the Ocean to the Mediterranean: the Soasne emptying itself into the Rhosne (a chief River of France) as the Moselle doth into the Rhine. 4 Selle, which mingleth waters with the Moselle not far from Mets. 5 Sora. 6 Martane. 7 Voloy, others of less note; all of them plentiful of Salmon, Perches, Tenches, and the best sorts of fish: as in their Lakes great store of Carp, some of them three foot long and of excellene taste.  
Principal Cities are in it are 1 Mets, by Ptolemie called Divodurum; Metis, & Civitas Mediomatricum by Antoninus, the chief City of the Mediomatrices who possessed this tract. Seated in the pleasant plain at the confluence of the Sore and Moselle: the Royal Sea, in former times, of the French Kings of Austrasia, hence called Kings of Mets; long before that a Bishops See, as it still continueth. 2 Toul, the Tullum of Ptolemie, the Civitas Leucorum of Antoninus, so called from the Leuci, the Inhabitants of it, and the tract about it: pleasantly seated on the Moselle, and anciently honoured with a See Episcopal. 3 Verdun, an ancient Episcopal See also, the Civitas Verodonensiam of Antoninus, seated on the Meuse or Maes: the Bishop whereof, as also those of Mets and Toul (being the only ones of this Country of Lorraine) acknowledge the Archbishops of Triers for their Metropolitan. All of them in the number (heretofore) of Imperial Cities, possessed of large and goodly territories, and of great revenue: but taken by the French King Henry the second, anno 1552. during the wars between Charles the fifth and the Protestant Princes of Germany, under colour of aiding them against the Emperor. And though Charles tried all ways to recover them to the Empire again, and to that end maintained a long and desperate siege against the City of Mets: yet was the Town so gallantly defended by the Duke of Guise, that he was fain to raise his siege, and go off with dishonour. Since that, they have been always under the subjection of France; a Parliament being erected at Mets for the ease of the people, as in other Provinces of that Kingdom.  
Of such Towns as immediately belonged to the Duke of Lorraine, the principal are Nancey, not great, but of a pleasant and commodious site: well watered by the river Meurte or Marta; and fortified better than before, in the year 1587. on occasion of a great Army of the Germans passing into France to aid the Protestants: most commonly the Duke's seat, and famous for the discomfiture which Charles Duke of Burgundy here suffered with the loss of his life. 2. St N●c●las, a town so populous, well seated, and neatly built; that were it walled, it would hardly yield preceedency to Nancie. It took name from the body of Saint Nicolas, here buried, whose relics have purchased no small reputation and riches to this town. 3 Vaucoleur, the birthplace of Joan the Virgin, to whose miracles and valour, the French attribute the delivery of their country from the power of the English: but being at last taken prisoner, she was by the Duke of Bedford than Regent of France, condemned and burned for a Witch. Of which crime I for my part do conceive her free. Nor can I otherwise conceive of her and her brave exploits, then of a lusty lass of Lorraine, tutored and trained up by the practice of the Earl of Dunois commonly called the Bastard of Orleans; and so presented to Charles the seventh, French King, as if sent immediately from Heaven. A project carried on of purpose (as the most intelligent of the French writers say) Pour fair revenir la courage aux Francois, to revive the drooping spirits of the beaten French, not to be raised again but by help of a miracle. Upon the sight of her Statue on the bridge of Orleans, a friend of mine did adventure on a copy of verses in her commendation, too long to be inserted here▪ but they ended thus.  
She died a Virgin; 'Twas because the earth  
Bred not a man whose valour and whose birth  
Might merit such a blessing. But above  
The Gods provided her an equal Love,  
And gave her to Saint Denys. She with him  
Protects the Lilies, and their Diadem.  
You then about whose Armies she doth watch,  
Give her the honour due unto her match.  
And when in field your standards you advance,  
Cry loud, Saint Denys and Saint Joan for France.  
Towns of less note are 4 P●nt a Moson, so called from a bridge on the River Moson with a small University. 5 Vandemont which gave a title of an Earl to a younger branch of the house of Lorraine. 6 Neauf-Chatteau, on the edge of the Country towards Barrois. 7 Amance, seven leagues on the South of Mets, sometimes the Chancery of Lorraine. 8 rich Court, near the Lake called Garde-lake, out of which floweth a River which runs into the Meurte. 9 Lafoy moth, seated on a River which falls presently into the Moselle. 10 Churmes, the place of treaty between the Duke of Lorraine and the Cardinal of Richelieu, the result whereof was the surrender of the town of Nancie, and by consequence of all the Dukedom into the hands of the French, Septemb. 1633. Of less note there are 1 Saint Die, 2 Saint Hippolit, 3 Bouquenon, and 4 Saverden; the first towns of this Dukedom taken by the Swedes, anno 1633. in the war against Lorraine. 5 Saint Miel, 6 Oden-Chasteau, 7, Mirecour; all taken the same year by the French, in the prosecution of that war, before the treaty at Charms. 8 Romberville, 9 Espinul, 10 Gerbrevillier, etc.  
The old Inhabitants of this Country were the Mediomatrices, and the Leuci spoken of before, together with the Vindonenses, all of them conquered by the Romans, under whom this Country and the District of Triers made up the whole Province of Belgica Prima. From them being taken by the French with the rest of Gaul, it was made a Kingdom, the Provinces of Germania Prima & Secunda, (containing all the parts of Germany before described, and so much of the Netherlands, as lie on the Westside of the Rhine) being added to it, called first from the Eastern situation by the name of Austenreic or Austrasia the portion of Theodorick the fourth son of Clovis the first Christian King of the French, from the chief City of his Kingdom called the King of Mets, whose successors follow in this order.  

The KINGS of AUSTRASIA or METS.  
514 1 Theodorick the base son of Clovis the Great vanquished the Turingians, and extended his Kingdom as far as Hassia and Turingia, as we call them now,  
537 2 Theodebert the son of Theodorick, repulsed the Danes infesting the coasts of the Lower Germany; and added Provence (taken from the Goths of Italy) unto his Estates.  
548 3 Theobaldus the son of Theodebert, subdued the Almans, and added much of their Country to his own Dominions.  
555 4 Clotaire King of Soissons the youngest son of Clovis the Great, succeeded Theobald in this Kingdom, as afterwards his brother Childebert in the Realm of France, anno 560. uniting in his person the whole French Dominion.  
565 5 Sigebert the son of Clotaire, vanquished the Huns, then falling into his Estates: killed in his Tent by the practices of Fredegond, the wife of Chilperick King of France.  
577 6 Childebert the son of Sigebert, successor to his Uncle Guntrum in the Realm of Orleans.  
598 7 Theodebert the II. the son of Childebert, vanquished and outed of his Kingdom by Clotaire the second of France: from whose eldest son Sigebert descended the illustrious family of the Earls of Habsburg.  
617 8 Clotaire the II. King of France, on the death of Theodebert King of Austrasia, and his brother Theodorick King of Orleans, the sole King of the French.  
9 Dagobert, in the life of his Father King of Mets or Austrasia, whom he succeeded, at his death, in the Realm of France.  
645 10 Sigebert II. the eldest son of Dagobert, made choice of this kingdom, for his part of the whole French Empire; therein preferring it to West-France, or France itself, which he left to Clovis the 2. his younger Brother. He brought the Suevians to obedience and subdued the Sclaves.  
656 11 Childebert II. son of Grimoaldus, Mayre of the Palace to Sigebert, was by the power of his Father made King of Mets; Dagobert the son of Sigebert being shorn a Monk, and sent into Scotland.  
12 Clovis the 2. King of the French, having vanquished and beheaded Grimoald, dispossessed Childebert of the Kingdom, which he took himself.  
662 13 Childerick the 2. son of Clovis, after the death of Clotaire his elder Brother, succeeding in the Kingdom of France united all the French Dominions into one Estate. In which condition it remained (but with some enlargement of the bounds) till the partition made by and amongst the Children of Lewis the Godly; the name of Austrasia or East-France, being extended by Charles the Great, over all Pannonia, and so much of Germany as was under the command of the French. In which division, Lewis the 2. son, surnamed the Ancient, being invested in the Kingdom of Germany, or so much of East-France or Austrasia as lay on the East side of the Rhine: Lotharius the eldest son had for his share the title of Emperor, and therewith Italy, Provence, Burgundy, and so much of Austrasia or East-France, as lay on the French side of the River. Afterwards subd●vided into three Estates; Italy with the title of Roman Emperor, being given to Lewis the eldest son, to Charles' the youngest Provence, with the Kingdom of Burgundy; and to Lothaire the second son Austrasia on this side of the Rhine, from hence called Lot-reich, Lot-regne, and Lotharingia, as before was said. But Lothaire dying without issue, the Kingdom of Lorraine containing all the Netherlands (except Flanders and Artois) and all the parts of Germany before described, became divided betwixt the Kings of France, and the Germane Emperors: each taking to themselves the title of Kings of Lorraine, the River Meuse or Mosa parting their possessions. But in the end, after much vicissitude and interchangeablenesse of affairs; both Princes laid aside the title of Kings; incorporating so much as they held hereof into the rest of their Estates: Otho the third of Germany, and Lewis the fifth of France, being the last that pleased themselves with that broken title. In the mean time, this Country of Lorraine itself, together with some part of the Land of Triers, Bovillon, Gulick, Luickland, and Brabant, being taken out of the rest, were by Otho the second made a Dukedom, anno 981. and by him given with the title of Duke of Lorraine, to Charles of France, son of Gerberge his Aunt by Lewis the 4. surnamed Transinarine, son of Charles the Simple. Charles thus advanced by his Uncle, and finding himself wholly neglected by Lothair● the French King, his brother, showed himself so alienated from the French, and wedded to the Germans, that the French after the death of his Nephew Lewis the fifth (whose next Heir he was) rejected him, and chose Hugh Capet for their King. Otho the son of this Charles, dying without issue, left his estate to Geoffrey Earl of Ardenne, Bovillon, and Verdun, (his near kinsman by the mother's side) from whom the Dukes of Lorraine do derive themselves. From Hermingrade the daughter of Charles descended the Lady Isabel of Hainalt, wife of Philip the 2. King of France, thereby uniting the blood of Pepin and Hugh Capet, to the great content of Lewis the 9 her Nephew: of whom it is said that being a man of a tender conscience he never joyed in the Crown of France, till it was proved that he was descended by his Grandmother, from Charles of Lorraine, whom Hugh Capet had unjustly dispossessed. But to return again to the Dukes of Lorraine, I find not any great improvement made of the Estate by any of them, more than the adding of the Duchy of Bar in France by Rene Duke of Anjou, and titulary King of Naples; but on the contrary a great weakening and distraction of it by the Dukes hereof: Luickland and the Dukedom of Bovillon being sold unto the Bishop of Liege, by Godfrey, furnamed of Bovillon, after King of Jerusalem: Brabant torn from it by Geoffrey Earl of Louvain in the time of Baldwin brother of Godfrey, and Gulick-land, by Eustace the brother of Baldwin; the Bishops of Triers not being negligent all this while, of the opportunity: so that we have no more to do, but to present the Reader with the Catalogue of   

The DUKES of LORRAINE.  
A. Ch.  
851 1 Charleses of France, took prisoner by Hugh Capet, in which state he died.  
1001 2 Otho, son of Charles.  
1004 3 Godfrey Earl of Ardenne, cousin of Otho by his mother, a daughter of the house of Ardenne: confirmed herein by the power of the Emperor Henry the first.  
1119 4 Gozelo of Bovillon, the brother of Godfrey.  
1044 5 Godfrey II. son of Gozelo.  
1070 6 Godfrey III.  
1078 7 Godfrey IV. of Bovillon, son of Eustace Earl of Boulogne in Picardy, and of Ida the daughter of Godfrey the 2. created King of Jerusalem, anno 1099.  
1180 8 Baldwin brother of Godfrey, Duke of Lorraine, and King of Jerusalem.  
1119 9 Thierrie son of William the brother of Baldwin.  
1128 10 Simon son of Thierrie.  
1141 11 Matthew son of Simon.  
1176 12 Simon II. son of Matthew.  
1207 13 Frederick brother of Simon.  
1213 14 Theobald, son of Frederick.  
1219 15 Matthew II. son of Theobald, no great friend of the Popes.  
1259 16 Frederick II. son of Matthew.  
1303 17 Theobald II. son of Frederick.  
1311 18 Frederick III. son of Theobald.  
1329 19 Rodolph son of Frederick.  
1346 20 John son of Rodolph.  
1382 21 Charles son of John.  
1430 22 Rene Duke of Anjou, and King of Naples, etc. in right of Isabel his wife the daughter of Charles.  
1452 23 John II. son of Rene and Isabel, succeeded on the death of his mother.  
1470 24 Nicolas son of John.  
1473 25 Rene II. son of Frederick Earl of Vandemont, and of Violant or Yoland daughter of Isabel and Rene the first; the Vanquisher of Charles of Burgundy at the battle of Nancy.  
1508 26 Anthony son of Rene the 2.  
1544 27 Francis son of Anthony.  
1545 28 Charles the II. son of Francis.  
29 Henry son of Charles married Katherine, sister to Henry the 4. of France.  
1624. 30 Francis brother of Henry.  
1630 31 Charles Nephew to Francis by his brother the Earl of Vandemont, and son-in-law to him by the marriage of his daughter and heir succeeded by a mixed title of descent and marriage. Being resolved to hold it in his own right, he put away his wife and daughter of Francis, and took another to his bed which he better fancied: punished not long after by the loss of his whole estate, for immediately he engaged himself in the wars of Germany, in behalf of Ferdinand the 2. But being beaten by the Swedes at the battle of Psaffenbofen in the County of Hanaw, he lost a great part of his Country to the Victors, who pursued him home. And on the other side Lewis the 13. of France, picking a quarrel with him for receiving the Monsieur his brother, and the marriage of the Monsieur with the Lady Margaret the Duke's sister, deprived him of the Duchy of Bar: and falling into Lorraine with a puissant Army, at such time as the Swedes were there, compelled him to put into his hands the City of Nancie, and by consequence all the rest of his Estates, Septemb. 1633. since which time the Duke hath never been restored thereto (for aught I can hear) nor hath any thing left him in it but the Town of La Mothe (if that) together with a good cause, many hearts, and an invincible courage.   
The Arms of Lorraine are Or, a Bend Gules, charged with 3 Larks Argent. But herein I find Bara an old Herald, to differ from Paradine the most exact Genealogist of the French nation. For Bara chargeth the Bend not with 3 Allovettes Larks, as Paradine doth, but with 3 Allerions: which are in Blazon small Birds wanting beaks, feet and legs. Of this last opinion, is the most worthy Antiquary Camden Clarencieux: who withal telleth us, that when Godfrey of Boulogne was at the siege of Hierusalom, shooting at S. David's tower there; he broached three feetlesse birds, called Allerions upon his arrow, and thereupon assumed this arms.  
The revenues of the Prince are 700000 Crowns: whereof 200000 arise from the customs of the salt made in his Country; and the other 500000, from his Coronet lands. He is an absolute Prince, and giveth for his device, an armed hand coming as it were from Heaven, and grasping a naked sword: to show that he holdeth his estate by no other tenure, than God and his sword: the only hope, at this time, of the present Duke. For though he be accounted a Prince of the Empire, and his Dukedom reckoned for a part of the fifth Circle thereof, which is called the Circle of the Rhine; yet he neither comes unto the Diets, nor holds himself bound by any of the orders and decrees which are made therein, as the rest of the great Princes of Germany: his neighbourhood to the French formerly securing his estate against any force the Empire durst bring against him for those neglects.   

6. SVEVIA or SCHWABEN.  
The Dukedom of SVEVIA or SCHWABEN, 
Suevia.  according to the ancient limits and extent thereof, was bounded on the North with Frankenland, and the Lower Palatinate; on the South with the Switzerland, and the Alps of Tirol; on the East with the River Lech, parting it from Bavaria; and on the West with the Rhine, dividing it from Sungow and both Alsatia's. But now the Dukedom of Wirtenberg, the Marquisate of Baden, and other lesser estates being taken out of it; it is contracted and restrained within narrower bounds: having on the East Bava●ia, on the West the Dukedom of Wirtenberg, and so much of the Rhine, as serveth to divide it from Sungow and the Upper Elsats; on the North Franconia or Frankenland; and on the South a little of the Rhine, with some part of the Swissers.  
The Country for the most part mountainous and hilly, overspred with some spurs of the Alps, and the Woods of Nigra Sylva, or Swartzenwald; recompensed notwithstanding with great plenty of springs and Rivers, (and amongst them the Neccar and the renowned Danubius) which do issue from them: which makes the Vales hereof to be very fruitful, sufficiently stored with all necessary provisions. Nor are the woods and mountains so unprofitable, but that besides the great plenty of fuel, and the pleasures of hunting, they do afford some Mines of iron, and other metals.  
The people in regard of their mountainous situation, more fierce and warlike than the rest of the Germans; and so accounted of by Plutarch in former times: industrious in several Trades and Manufactures, especially in the weaving of linen Cloth, which is made here in great abundance: and who, by reason they have so much in them of the South, are supra modum in Venerem proni, as Aubanus tells me, at least more given to Venus then the other of the Germans are; the women also being said to be very forwards in this kind; as tractable and easy as the men could wish them.  
The whole is generally divided into the Hegow lying next to the lake of Constance; the Algow extending to Bavaria; Brisgow upon the West of the River Rhine; and North-Schwaben on the northern side of Danubius. Principal Cities in the HEGOW, are 1. Lindaw, situate like an Island in the Lake of Constance, encompassed almost with the waters thereof, but joined to it with a Causey of 290 paces long: one of the Free or Imperial Cities; made so for money, by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1166. 2. Buchorn, and 3. Vberlingen, on the same lake, both Imperial also: 4. Scaff-haussen, seated on both sides of the Rhine, not far from the efflux thereof out of the lake Cell, (so called from a town of that name belonging to the Archdukes of Ausiria: but anciently by the name of Lacus Venetus:) and near those dreadful falls or Cataracts of that River no less than 50 cubits downwards with great noise and violence. For which cause all vessels that go down the Rhine, are fain to unlade themselves, and by Carts to carry their goods to this Town, where they embark them again. Which as it yieldeth great benefit unto the Town by tols, and imposts, so doth it always keep it stored with abundance of Barks and other vessels; whence it hath the name of Scaff-haussen, that is to say, the house of skiffs, or the Town of Ship-boats. The Town conveniently seated amongst rich pastures, and sweet groves on both sides of the River, not without some pleasant hills, and those well planted with vines, near adjoining to it: Imperial, but now a Canton of the Swissers, as hath there been shown. 5. Arbon, upon the lake itself (the Arbour F●lix of Strabo) belonging to the Bishop of Constance. 6. Merspurg, the ordinary seat and residence of the Bishop of Constance, Lord of the most part of this Tract, on the same lake also. 7. Constance itself, situate on both sides of the Rhine, where it issueth out of the lake, called from hence the Lake of Constance; but by the Dutch, Boden-zee, from the Castle of Bodmin; by Pliny and other Ancients Lacus Acronius, and Brigantinus, made by the confluence of the Rhine and some other Rivers falling out of Switzerland. The Town Imperiall, an Episcopal See, and a flourishing Emporie. Famous for the Council here holden anno 1414. of great renown as well for the multitude and quality of the people which were there assembled, as for the importance of the matters which were therein handled: The people of most note there assembled were Sigismond the Emperor, 4 Patriarches, 29 Cardinals, 346 Archbishops and Bishops, 564 Abbats and Doctors, 10000 secular Princes and noble men, 450 Common Harlots, 1600 Barbers, and 320 Minstrels and Jesters. The business there handled was first the pacifying of a Schism in the Church, there being at that time three Popes, (or rather Anti-popes') Gregory the 12. resident at Rome, John the 23. at Bononia, and Bennet the 13. in Spain; all three deposed by the Council, and Martin the 5. made sole Pope, by the unanimous consent of the Council declaring both by matter of fact, and by a public Constitution here made and ratified, that a Council is above the Pope. The other main business was the proceeding against John Hus, and Hierome of Prague, (spoken of before) both which notwithstanding the Emperor's safe conduct, were here condemned of Heresy, degraded, and burnt. Now the manner of degrading a priest is this. (I hope to be excused for this digression.) The party to be degraded is attired in his priestly Vestments; holding in the one hand a Chalice full of wine and water, and in the other a guilt plate (or Paten as they call it) with a Wafer. Then kneeling down, the Bishops Deputy first taking from him all those things, commands him to say no more Masses for the quick and dead. 2 Scraping his finger's ends with a piece of glass, he commandeth him from that time forth not to baton any thing: and 3 stipping him of his priestly habit, he is clothed in a lay attire, and so delivered over to the Secular Magistrate. But to return again to the City of Constance, being proscribed by Charles the fifth for refusing the Interim, and not able to withstand such forces as were raised against them, they put themselves under the Protection of Ferdinand, than King of the Romans, and brother of Chalres. But herein they fell out of the Frying-pan into the fire, as the saying is. For Ferdinand being possessed of the Town, seized on the common Treasury, and upon all Records and writings which belonged unto them; set out an Edict that all the Ministers within eight days should depart the City, and that no Citizen from thenceforth should wear any weapon. And so instead of a Protector he became their Master.  
Chief Cities in the part hereof lying towards Bavaria, which is called the ALGOW, are 1. Buchaw, on the lake called Feder-zee, a Town Imperial. 2. Ravenspurg, a Free City seated amongst mountains, whereof one hangeth over it, the River Ache running by it in a bed so narrow, that not able to receive the waters which fall down from the hills, it much endamageth all the Country by frequent Land-flouds. 3. Woongen (the Nemavia of Antoninus) Imperial also. 4. Kempten, the Campodunum of Strabo; and 5. Mimmegen, the Drusomagus of Ptolemy, both Imperial Cities, the last about three miles in circuit, populous, rich and very well traded. 6. Psullendorf, 7. Zeukirk, 8. Bibrach; all three Imperial; the last supposed to be the Bragodurum of the Ancients. 9 Ausburg, on the River Lech, looking into Bavaria, first made a Roman Colony by Augustus Caesar, and by him called Augusta Vindelicorum. The principal City in those times of the Vindelici, a potent people of this tract. A City of great wealth and state, containing about nine miles in circuit; and very strongly fortified, by nature on the East and North where the ground lies low, and under water, and on the West and South by Art. The buildings for three parts of it are of clay and timber, but on the West part seated on an hill built of Freestone six or seven stories high; in which are many fair houses of the principal Citizens, and many stately Palaces which belong to the Fuggars a family of very great (almost Princely) Revenues, possessed of many goodly dwellings both in the City and the Suburbs, and adjoining territories: who though they have of late obtained the honour of Barons in regard of their wealth, still keep themselves (contrary to the custom of Germany, where traffic is counted a disgrace to a Noble man) to the trade of Merchandise. The public Edifices of it very decent, especially the Cathedral Church, a majestic building; the other Churches, ten in number, and the Religious houses correspondent to it. Of old time Ceres was here worshipped, from whence (or from the fruitfulness of the soil) the City gives a sheaf of corn for the Arms thereof: since their conversion unto Christianity made a Bishops See. Destroyed by Attila and his Huns, it was after built more beatifully than it had been formerly▪ at last made Imperial, and the Mistress of as large a territory as most Cities of Germany. Famous for the confession of faith, exhibited in this place to Charles the 5, by the Protestant▪ Princes, hence called Confessio Augustanae, anno 1530. 2 For the Interim or mixed form of Doctrine, containing some points of Brotestantis●e, but most of Popery, here tendered to both parties by the said Emperor (but received by neither) to be subscribed to and observed till the differences could be settled by a General Council; And 3 for the public allowance here given by Decree of all the States of the Empire to the Protestant party, to profess openly their Religion without any impeachment; anno 1555. a Limitationly laid on the ecclesiastics, that if they changed their Religion they should lose their preferments, which were to be bestowed on others more addicted to the See of Rome.  
In the third part hereof called BRISGOW, lying on the East of the River Rhine, and the West of Wirtenberg, places of most importance are 1 Friburg, upon the Triesse and other streams descending from the mountains of Swartzenwald under which it lieth: founded by Berchthold Earl or Duke of Zeringen (the Castle of Zeringen once the chief seat of those Princes, being then near adjoining to it) in the reign of Henry the 5 Emperor anno 1112 or thereabouts: Famous in those days for silver-mines, now for an University here established, anno 1459. and being in present estimation the chief of the Country. 2 Offenbach, 3 Gengenbach, both upon the Kintrich, and both Towns Imperial; the first so named from Offa an English Saxon, the Apostle of these parts of Germany. 4 Hochberg, which gives the title of a marquis to the Marquesses of Baden, who are Lords thereof. 5 Zel, once Imperial, but of late times belonging, as doth also 6 Badenwille, to the marquis of Baden. 7 Waldshut upon the Rhine, in a barren, cold, and mountainous Country, but well stored with woods. 8. Brisach, by Antonine called Mons Brisiacus, a garrison in his time against the encroaching Almains; and situate at that time on the French side of the Rhine; the course of the River being since turned on the other side, where now it runneth. Built Castle-wise on the top of a round hill, in which there is also a strong Tower or Fortress, raised by Berchthold the third, for defence of the place, otherwise strong enough by its own natural situation, and might be made impregnable but for want of water, which is all drawn from one deep well in the heart of the Town, or brought with great charge and trouble from the Rhine, which runs underneath it. The Town fair, populous, and well built; once of most note in all the Country, from hence called Brisac-gow, or Brise-gow; but after the building of Friburg by Berchthold the 4, it grew by little and little to be less frequented, the other being seated more conveniently for trade and business.  
Finally in the fourth and last part hereof called NORTH-SCHWABEN, because on the North side of the Danow, the places most observable are 1 Gmand, on the Rheems; 2 Dinkel-Spuell on the Warnitz, two Imperial Towns; which with Vberlinque or Werlingen, (all three but mean in building, territory or estimation) spoken of before, are the only three Imperial Cities in all Germany, which totally adhered unto the doctrines of the Church of Rome. 3 Boptingen on the Egra, an Imperial City; 4 Norlingen on the same River but in a low and moorish ground, yet of great resort, populous, and well traded. Most memorable for the great defeat here given the Swedes by Ferdinand the third, now Emperor, at his first entrance on the Government: in which Bannier, one of the principal commanders of that nation, was slain on the place, Gustavus Horn, another of as great eminence, taken Prisoner, their whole forces routed: and thereupon so strange an alteration of the affairs of Germany which they had almost wholly conquered (though not for themselves) that the Palatinate, not long before restored to its proper owner, was again possessed by the Spaniards, Frankenland by the Imperialists; and the remainder of the Swedes forced to withdraw into their holds on the Baltic seas, anno 1637. 6 Rotweil, not far from the head of the Neccar, an Imperial City, and a Confederate of the Swissers. 7 Donawerdt, seated on the confluence of the Donaw and the Werdt, whence it had the name; most commonly called only Werdt, an Imperial Town: the habitation of John de Werdt, once a B●●wer herein, but afterward a chief Commander of the forces of the Duke of Bavaria in the late Germane wars. 8 Villengen, on the Bregen a small river falling into the Danow; a Town belonging to the Princes of the house of Austria. Not far from which stands 9 Furstenberg, an ancient Castle, the Earls hereof are Princes of the Empire, and Lords of a great part of the Country; in a Village of whose called Don-Eschingen is the head of Danubius. 10 ulme, an Imperial City, situate on the meeting of the Blave, the Iler, and the Danow: the principal City of North-Schwaben, about 6 miles in compass, rich, populous, well fortified, and stored with an Armoury, for Ordnance and all manner of Ammunition not inferior to any in Germany. The Town but new, taking its first rise from a Monastery here founded by Charles the Great, which after grew to be a great City; and took the name of ulme from the Elms about it. At first it belonged unto the Monks, of whom having bought their freedom in the time of Frederick the third it became Imperial. The Danow hereabouts begins to be navigable, having so violent a stream that the Boats which go down the water use to be sold at the place where they land; it being both difficult and chargeable to bring them back again. Not far hence on the banks of the Danow lie the Suevian Alps, and amongst them the old Castle of Hohenberg, the Lord whereof, on the ruin of the house of Schwaben, became possessed of a great estate here, and in upper Elsats, sold afterwards to Rodolph of Habspurg, the founder of the now Austrian Family.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Brixantes, Suanetes, Rugusci, and Calucones, who together with the Vindelici (of whom more hereafter) and other tribes of the Rhaeti, (of whom somewhat hath been said before in the Alpine Provinces) possessed themselves of that Country which lieth betwixt the River Inn and the head of the Rhine East and West, Danubius and the Alps of Italy North and South. Within which compass are the greatest part of the Grisons, the Dukedoms of Schwaben and Bavaria, on this side the Danow; and part of the County of Tirol; and not a few of the Cantons of Switzerland. Subdued by Drusus and Tiberius Nero, sons-in-law of Augustus, it was made a province of the Romans; divided into Rhaetia Prima, taking in all the Countries from the Rhine to the Leck, or Lycus; and Rhaetia Secunda, lying betwixt the Leck and the River Inn, which by another name was called Vindelicia. By which account all Schwaben on the South side of the Danow was part of the Province of Rhaetia Prima, continuing so till vanquished and subdued by the Almans, in the time of Valentinian the third, Emperor of the Western parts. As for the Almans who succeeded in possession hereof, they were originally some tribes and families of the Suevi, the most warlike nation of the Germans, inhabiting upon the banks of the River of Albis: who jealous of Caesar's great successes, brought against him 430000 fight men, of which 8000 were slain, and many drowned. They used to stay at home, and go to the war by turns, they which stayed at home, tilling the land; to whom the rest returning, brought the spoil of the Enemies. But after which blow, we hear little of them till the time of Caracalla, the son of Severus; during whose reign, descending towards the banks of the Rhine and the Danow, and mingling with other nations as they passed along; they assumed first the name of Almans, either from that promiscuous mixture of all sorts of men; or (as I rather think) from Mannus, the son of Tuisco one of the great and National Gods of the Germans. And though well beaten by him at their first coming down, near the River Moenus; and afterwards more broken by Diocletian, who slew at least 60000 of them at one time, in Gaul: yet never left they to infest the Provinces of the Empire which lay nearest t them; till in the end following the tract of the Hunns who had gone before them, and beaten down many of the Forts and Garrisons which were in their way, they made themselves Masters of Rhaetia Prima, Germania Prima, and part of Maxima Sequanorum, containing besides the Countries spoken of before, Alsatia, and so much of the Lower Palatinate as lies on the French side of the Rhine. But quarrelling with the French their next neighbours (of whose growth and greatness they began to be very sensible) they were first vanquished by Clovis the first Christian King of the French, in that great and memorable fight at Zulph, near Colen: and afterwards made wholly subject to the Conqueror; by whom oppressed with an heavy and lasting servitude. About this same they returned again to their old name of Suevians: their estate being erected into a Dukedom, called many times the Dukedom of Almain; and when so called, divided into the upper Almain, comprehending the Country of the Grisons, with some parts of Switzerland, and Tirol; and the Lower or the Proper Almain, which contained the rest of the Estates of the ancient Almans, called for the most part by the name of the Dukedom of Suevia or Schwaben, and finally transmitting that name to this Province only, the best part thereof. These Dukes at first officiary only, removable at the will of the Emperor, and accountable to him: not seldom many at one time, especially whilst under the command of the French: some of them being Dukes of the Upper, and others of the Lower Almain. So that there is no great certainty of their succession, nor much care to be taken in searching after it; though otherwise men of great Authority and Command in their several times. The most remarkable amongst them was Rudolph, Earl of Reinfelden, and Duke of Schwaben, (descended from the Earls of Habsburg) in the reign of Henry the fourth, against whom he was chosen Emperor by the practice and procurement of Pope Hildebrand: but overcome and wounded at the battle of E●ster, he died not long after of his wounds, with great repentance for rebelling against his Sovereign. After his death, some Provinces being dismembered from it, and other lesser estates first erected out of it: it was made Hereditary in the person of Frederick, Baron of Hohenstaussen surnamed the Ancient, by the munificence and bounty of the said Henry the fourth, whose daughter Agnes he had married. His successors follow in this order.  

The DUKES of SCHWABEN.  
1 Frederick the ancient, the first Hereditary Duke of Schwaben.  
2 Frederick with the one eye, son of Frederick the Ancient.  
3 Frederick III. surnamed Barbarossa, son of Frederick with the one eye, Duke of Schwaben, and Emperor, he succeeded the Emperor Henry the fifth, in the Dukedom of Franconia; and left the same unto his successors.  
1190 4 Frederick IV. second son of Barbarossa, his elder brother Henry succeeding in the Empire, by the name of Henry the sixth.  
5 Conrade, brother of Frederick the fourth.  
6 Philip, brother of Conrade, after the death of Henry the sixth, elected Emperor.  
1207 7 Frederick V. son of Henry the sixth, elected Emperor by the name of Frederick the second, King of Naples and Sicil also in right of his mother.  
1250 8 Conrade II. son of Frederick the fifth, King of both Sicils, and Emperor of Germany, after the death of his Father, poisoned as was supposed by his base brother Manfred, who succeeded in his Kingdom of Sicil.  
1254 9 Conradine, the son of Conrade, pursuing his right unto the Kingdoms of Naples and Sicil, was overcome and taken prisoner by Charles of Anjou successor unto manfred in those estates; and by his command beheaded at Naples, anno 1268. After whose death (being the last of that powerful and imperial Family) this vast Estate was brought unto a second dismembering, and divided amongst the Bishops, Princes, and Free Cities hereof: of which last there are more within the old Precincts of this Dukedom, then in all Germany besides. So that beholding it in the first and second dilapidation, we find many goodly Patrimonies and fair Estates (besides what belongeth to the Cities and Episcopal Sees) to have been raised out of the ruins of this great Dukedom: that is to say, the Dukedoms of Zeringen and Wirtemberg, with the Marquisate of Baden, dismembered from it, when conferred on Frederick of Hohenstauffen; the Earldoms of Pfirt, Hohenberg, and Friburg, (besides a great improvement of the Earldom of Haspurge) advanced out of the second ruin. How Pfirt and Hohenberg were unitted to the house of Austria, hath been shown already: and what becomes of Wirtenberg, and Baden, shall be shown hereafter. Here it is only to be noted, that the Family of Zeriugen possessed of almost all Brisgow, and great part of Switzerland, owe their Original to Berthilo, or Berthold, a younger son of Guntrom the first Earl of Haspurge. Which being extinguished in the person of Berthold the fifth, (who died the same day in which the Emperor Rodolph of Haspurge was born) anno 1218. the rights hereof descended on the Earls of Friburg, the principal City of that Country. Eggow, the last Earl of which house being overlaid by his undutiful and rebellious Subjects, sold his estate therein ●o 12000 Ducats to Albert and Leopold, Dukes of Austria, sons of Albert the Short, whose successors enjoy all Brisgow to this very day.   
The Arms of Schawben were Argent, 3 Leopards Sable.   

7. BAVARIA.  
BAVARIA is bounded on the East with Austria, on the West with the river Leck, or Lycus, which parts it from Schawben; on the North with Northgoia, or the Upper Palatinate, and on the South, with the Earldom of Tirol, and Carinthia. It containeth the whole Province of Rhaetia Secunda, and so much of Noricum Mediterranean, as now makes up the Bishopric of Saltsburg: and by a distinct name was called Vindelicia, as being the ancient habitation of the Vindelici, so named from the two Rivers of Vindis and Lycus (now the Werd and the Leck) upon which they lived. 
Bavaria.  According whereunto it is thus versified by a Germane Poet. 
Respicit & late fluvios Vindimque, Lycumque,  
Miscentes undas, & nomina Littoris; unde  
Antiquam Gentem, populumque, Urbemque vocarunt  
Vindelicam.—  In English thus: 
Vindis and Lycus, floods of noted Fame,  
He next beholds, mingling their streams and name,  
To which the old Vindelici do own,  
The name both of their Nation, and their Town.  Meaning by their Town, as I conceive, Augusta Vindelycorum, their Metropolis or Capital City. But after such time as the Boii or Boiarians had driven out the Romans, and got possession of this Country, the name of Vindelicia, and Rhaetia secunda, grew into disuse: that of Boiaria succeeding in the place thereof, mollified or corrupted into Bavaria the present name of the Country amongst the Latins; but by the Dutch called Bayeren, by the French Bavier.  
The whole divided into three parts; the Higher, lying towards the Alps of Tyrol; the Lower, extending all along the banks of the Danow and the District of Saltzburg, situate betwixt the Inn and the Dukedom of Austria: all three much overspread with woods and forests, remainders of the Hercinian forest described before. But more particularly the Higher lying towards the Alps is cold and barren, affording no wines, and but little corn: the Lower being more fruitful, and better planted, for some parts (especially about Regensberg, and Landshut, inferior unto none in Germany, for the richness and pleasantness of the situation. Of the District of Saltzburg we shall speak by itself; because by some not reckoned as a part hereof. In all, great quantity of fennel for the fire, and of Timber for building; no less of Swine fatted in the woods, and sent away by numerous herds into other Countries.  
The Christian Faith first preached here amongst the Boiarians, by Rupertus Bishop of Worms, driven from his See by Childebert, King of the French, anno 540. or thereabout, and here made the first Bishop of Saltzburg: corrupted at this time with the Leaven of the Church of Rome, to which this Country (setting aside the Imperial Cities) is more entirely devoted, than any other in Germany.  
Principal Cities in the Higher, are 1 Munchen, (in Latin Monachium) the Duke's seat; seated on the Isee, or Isarus, in a very sweet and delightly soil, among ponds and groves, daintily interlaced with pretty Riverets, and enriched with many excellent Gardens: that of the Duke being hardly to be paralleled in all this Continent. First founded by Henry Duke hereof in the time of Otho the first, anno 972. now grown a large and populous City: the public buildings, as Churches, Turrets, Libraries, the Senate-house or Guildhall, and common Marketplace, of such excellent Structure, that they serve not only for use and Ornament, but for Admiration. Amongst them none more eminent than the Library in the Ducal Palace, wherein is conceived to be 11000 Volumes, the most part of them Manuscripts. A town made choice of by Maximilian the now Duke of Bavaria to be the receptacle of the spoils got by him in the wars of Germany: here being found (at such time as the town was taken by the King of Sweden) 140 brass Pieces (besides other great Guns) hid under the ground; one of the which was charged, instead of Powder and Shot, with 30000 Crowns in Gold. 2 Landsberg, upon the Leck, or Lycus, near the Alps of Tirol, once of great strength, because a Frontier towards Schwaben; but proving a dangerous neighbour to the Swedish Garrison planted in these parts during that was against the Duke of Bavaria, was by them taken and dismantled; and is now an open Village only. 3 Martenwald, now a place of note or beauty, heretofore the Inutrium of Ptolemy seated near the Alps. 4 Fridberg, well fortified by Duke Ludovick, or Lewis the second, for a bulwark against those of Ausburg.  
In the LOWER Bavaria, there first offers itself to consideration, the town of 1 Rain, seated on the Leck, not far from the fall thereof into the Danow: memorable for the skirmish near to it betwixt the Swedes and Bavarians, at the first passing of the Swedish forces over that River: in which John Earl of Tilly, so famous for his long and fortunate conduct, received his death's wound, of which he died at Ingolsiad within few weeks after. 2. Newburg upon the Danow, not far from Rain; the first town of Bavaria taken in by the Swedes, after the said defeat of Tilly. 3. Ingolstad, said to be built by a Tribe, or Nation of the Sueves, called Angeli, and thence called Angelostadium, or Anglesiade: first made a City by Ludovick of Bavaria, Duke and Emperor; and in the year 1410 made an University, much privileged by Duke Lewis, or Ludovick the fifth, and Pope Pius the second. A town so strongly fortified both by Art and Nature, that it seems impregnable: and indeed proved so to Gusiavus the late King of Sweden: who here found the first check to his prosperous fortunes, being forced to raise his siege without endangering it, and find work elsewhere. 4 Regensberg (in Latin Ratisbona) on the Danow also, where it receives the River Regen, when it hath its name: built in the place of Tiberina or Augusta Tiberii, so called of a Colony brought hither by Tiberius Caesar, about the time of our Saviour's passion: afterwards called Rhaetopolis, or the City of the Rhaetians, the chief of Rhaetia secunda. At this time a fair, rich, and populous City, beautified with an infinite number of Churches and Religious Houses; anciently an Episcopal See: and of late made the ordinary place for the general diets of the Empire. In former times the seat of the Kings and first Dukes of Bavaria, then made Imperial; and now mixed, or both. For being still Imperial, at the least in name, it was seized on unexpectedly by the now Duke of Bavaria, when the Swedes first got footing within his Dominions, held by him with a very strong Garrison, after the loss of Mun●hen his chief place of residence, till at last won from him by the Swedes, anno 1633. 5 Passow, by the modern Latinists, Patavia; but by some thought to be the Boiodurum of Ptolemy, than a Roman Garrison. Seated on the Danow, where it meeteth with the Inn, and the Ills: by which divided into three towns, Passaw, Innstade, and Ilstade: the whole Compositum being a rich Fair, and well-traded City. A See Episcopal and subject immediately to the Bishop, as chief Lord hereof, who hath his dwelling in the Castle of Oberhusen, adjoining to that part hereof which is called Ilstade. A place remarkable for many meetings and consultations of the Germane Princes: especially for that of the year 1552, in which all former quarrels being laid aside, the Protestants were first permitted the free Exercise of their Religion, by the consent and edict of Charles the fifth, who had most laboured to suppress it. More in the land is 6 Frising, on the swelling of a fine round hill near the River Ambra which runs beneath it; called anciently Fraxinum: conceived to be built by some of the Precedents or Lieutenants for the Roman Emperors: honoured with an Episcopal See about the year 710. one of the Bishops whereof commonly called Otho Frisengensis, was the best Historian of his time. 7 Landshut, upon the river of I●ar, in the richest and most pleasant country of all Bavaria; a beautiful and well-built City, the work of Lewis Duke hereof in the year 1208. adorned with a Church of most curious building for the service of God, and a magnificent Palace for the use of the Duke. 8 Freistet, the only Imperial town, (except Regensburg) in all this Dukedom. The whole number of Cities and great towns in both Bavaria's is supposed to be 80; that is to say, 34 Cities, 46 great towns: of which these the principal.  
The Bishopric or District of Saltsburg being the third part of Bayerens or Bavaria (according to our former division of it) extendeth from the Inn, or Oenus, towards the confines of Austria. The soil hereof rocky, dry, and barren, excepting some few valleys only, as seated in the midstst of the Julian Alps: the habitation heretofore of the Norici Mediterranei, of whom more hereafter. The principal town hereof is Saltzburg, seated upon the river Saltzach, whence it had the name: raised out of the ruins of Juvania placed hereabouts by Antoninus, the station of a cohort of Roman Soldiers belonging to the first Legion. An Alpine city strongly situate amongst the Mountains, but no less beautiful than many of the lower grounds. The Royal seat of some of the Bavarian Kings, after of the Archbishops hereof, the most powerful Prelates for Revenue and jurisdiction of any in Germany: the See first fixed here by Rupertus or Rutbertus the first Apostle of these parts spoken of before; whose image or impress is stamped to this day on the coins of this Bishopric. At the time when Luther first endeavoured a Reformation, Cardinal Matthaeus Langius was Bishop here, who did ingenuously confess that the Mass did not want its faults, that the Court of Rome were much corrupted, and the lives of Priests and Friars fit to be reform: Sed quod misellus Monachus omnia reformet, id non esse tolerabile: but that such a sorry fellow as Luther should attempt the work, that by no means to be endured. 2 Newkirch, on the same River, near the head thereof. 3 Rotenbourg, on the East side of the Inn bordering on Bavaria. 4 Traunshaim, upon the river Traun, rising out of the Lakes. 5 Wildesmet, one of the farthest Northwards; and 6 Bishops-stoffe, one of the most Southern in all this tract.  
The first Inhabitants of Bavaria (excluding the District of Saltsburg) were the Vindelici, as aforesaid: a people so resolvedly bend to maintain their freedom against the encroachments of the Romans, that when Drusus the son-in-law of Augustus, and father of Germanicus Caesar, made war upon them, the very women thereof took the alarm, & deficientibus telis, infants in ora militum adversa miserunt; and when their darts were spent, threw their young infants (saith the Historian) at the heads of the Romans. After them in the declining of the Empire, succeeded the Bojarians, some of the many tribes of the Boji, the most diffused and the multitudinous nation of Gaul and Germany. Originally of Gaul, inhabiting in the Dukedom of Bourbon, from whence some of them passed with the Senones and others of the Gauls, to the further side of the Alps, (in respect of them) where they took up the Country near the head of the Po. Wearied with long wars against the Romans, and by them deprived of half their Country; some of them passed into Germany, and mingled themselves with the Taurisci, then dwelling in those parts which we now call Stiermark: others advancing further, thrust themselves into the Norici, (of whom more anon) and some retired themselves into the shelters and fast places of the Hircinian Forrest. Driven from this last by the Marcomanni, they fell into the countries of the Herma●duri and Norisci, (now the Upper Palatinate) who mingling into one Nation with them, took the name of Bojarians; and by that name first known in the time of Clovis, the fifth King of the French: by whose persuasion, in the 17 year of Anastasius Emperor of the East, they passed over the Danow, and possessed themselves of Vindelicia, or the second Rhaetia, with some part of Noricum, to which they gave the name of Bojaria, as before was signified. Governed first by Kings (as all Nations were) of whom we meet with none but Aldigerius (and he the last of that race) slain, fight on the side of the Almans against the French, at the great battle of Zulp, near Colen: after which made subject to the Conquerors, as their neighbours and confederates the Almans were; but suffered to live under the command and government of their own Princes by the name of Dukes. Of these from Theudo the son of Aldigerius, to Tassilo the last Duke, outed of his estate and honours by Charles the Great, for conspiring with the Lombard's against him, are reckoned fifteen Dukes in all: whose names (for there remaineth little of them but the empty names) we shall subjoine in the ensuing Catalogue of the 

DUKES of the BOJARIANS.  
493 1 Theodo son of Adalgerius the last King; from whose younger brother Vtilo, descended P●pin the Father of Charles the Great.  
511 2 Theodo II. surnamed the Great.  
537 3 Theodebert.  
4 Theodo III. the first Christian Prince of the Bojarians.  
565 5 Tassilo, son of Theodebert.  
598 6 Garibaldus.  
612 7 Theodo IU.  
630 8 Tassilo II.  
650 9 Theodo V.  
10 Theodebert II.  
11 Theodo VI son of Grimoldus the brother of Theodebert the second.  
708 12 Grimold.  
13 Hugobert, brother of Grimold.  
735 14 Vtilo.  
765 15 Tassilo III. the last Duke of the Bojarians. Of whom more anon.    
Amongst these few of any note, but 1 Theodo the first, son of Adalgerius, who abandoning the name of King, because less pleasing to the French who had newly conquered them, assumed that of Duke: and passing over the Danow, extorted the whole Province of Rhaetia secunda, with part of Noricum, from the Romans, anno 508. or thereabouts. 2 Theodo the second, named the Great, for his great and many victories against the Romans, whom he outed of all Noricum and Vindelicia; and whatsoever they held on the Dutch side of the Alps. 3 Theodo the 3. of that name, and the 4. in number of the Dukes, converted with his people to the Christian Faith, by the preaching of Rupertus before mentioned, anno 580. 4 Tassilo the 3. of that name, and the last of their Dukes of the race of Adalgerius, or of the old Bojarian blood: who being deposed by Charles the Great, the whole country became immediately subject to the French, governed at first by their Lieutenants. Dismembered from the French Empire by Lewis the Godly, it was made a Kingdom (Pannonia being added and united to it) by whom conferred on Lotharius his eldest son, who was afterwards Emperor of the Romans: after his death possessed by the Kings of Germany, but as a distinct Kingdom both in name and title, till the decease of Lewis the son of Arnulph the last, of the direct line of Charles the Great. He being dead and the Bavarians loath to be made a subject Province to the Kingdom of Germany, one Arnulph of the issue of the said Charles, with the general liking of the Bojarians, took upon himself the title of King: but being opposed therein by Conrade the brother of Lewis, Emperor and King of Germany, as also by Henry the first who succeeded: he changed the title of King into that of Duke; the Founder of the present house of 

The DUKES of BAVARIA.  
1 Arnulph of the house of Charles the Great, first Duke of Bavaria.  
2 Eberhard son of Arnulph, deposed by Otho the 1.  
3 Berchthold, the brother of Arnulph, confirmed in the estate by the said Emperor Otho. After his death this Dukedom was transferred for 17 successions from one great Family to another, according to the power and pleasure of the present Emperor; in manner following.  
4 Henry brother of Otho the 1.  
5 Henry II. son of the former Henry.  
6 Henry III. surnamed the Saint, son of Henry the 2. the first Emperor who came in by election, according to the Order made by Pope Gregory the 5.  
7 Henry IV. surnamed Hezzel, brother to Cunegund the renowned wife of Henry the Saint; by whom preferred to this Dukedom, and by him deposed.  
8 Henry Guelph son of Robert Earl of Altorfe in Schwaben (of the strange Original of which Family we shall speak in Saxony) made Duke by the Emperor Conrade the 2.  
9 Guelpho, son of Henry Guelph, or Henry the 5.  
10 Ernest, created Duke hereof by the same Conrade the 2. by whom deposed again for conspiring against him.  
11 Henry VI.  
12 Cuno, accused of conspiracy, and displaced by Henry the 3. to make room for  
13 Henry VII. son of the said Emperor Henry the 3. whom he succeeded in the Empire by the name of Henry the 4.  
14 Agnes, the mother of the said Henry the 4. by the gift of her son.  
15 Otho by the gift of the Empress Agnes, deposed not long after by Henry the 4.  
16 Welpho III. son of Coniza the daughter of Guelph the 2 by Azon an Italian marquis, mad● Duke hereof by the said Emperor Henry the 4.  
17 Welpho IV. son to Welpho the 3.  
18 Henry VIII. surnamed the Proud, brother of Guelpho the 4. by the marriage of Gertrude daughter of Lotharius the 2. Duke of Saxony also. Deprived of both by the Emperor Conrade the 3.  
19 Leopold, son to Le●pold the 4. marquis of Austria, made Duke by the said Conrade the 3.  
20 Henry IX. brother of Leopold, after marquis, and at last Duke of Austria.  
21 Henry X. surnamed the Lion, son of Henry the Proud, restored by the Arbitrement of Frederick Barbarossa (the Duke of Austria being otherwise satisfied) by whom not long after proscribed and deprived of both his Dukedoms. After which this estate became fixed and settled, in the person and posterity of  
1180 22 Otho of Wittlesbach, lineally descended from Arnulph the first Duke, advanced unto this honour by Frederick Barbarossa, sensible of the too great power of the former Dukes: the whole extent of this estate being reduced by this time to the limits of the modern Bavaria, and the Palatinate of Northgoia.  
1183 23 Ludovick, or Lewis son of Otho.  
1231 24 Otho II. son of Lewis, who by marrying Gertrude the sole daughter of Henry Count Palatine of the Rhine, brought the Electoral dignity into the house of Bavaria.  
1290 25 Henry Duke of Bavaria and Count Palatine of the Rhine, the son of Otho the 2.  
1312 26 Ludovick or Lewis II. brother of Henry, Duke of Bavaria, and Elector Palatine of the Rhine.  
1294 27 Ludovick, or Lewis III. second son of Lewis the 2. succeeded in the Kingdom of Bavaria; Rodolph the eldest son, succeeding in both Palatinates, and the Electoral dignity. He was afterwards elected and crowned Emperor, known commonly by the name of Ludovicus Bavarus.  
1347 28 Stephen the eldest son of Ludovick the Emperor; William and Albert his two brethren successively enjoying the Earldoms of Hainalt, Holland, etc. in right of their mother.  
1375 29 Stephen II. son of Stephen the 1. his brother's Frederick and John sharing with him parts the estate.  
1413 30 Ludovick II. surnamed Barbatus, deposed and imprisoned by his own son Ludowick, who yet died before him without issue.  
1147 31 Henry TWO, son of Frederick the second brother of Stephen the 2. succeeded on the death of Ludovicus Barbatus.  
1450 32 Ludovick V. surnamed the Rich, who banished the Jews out of his estates, and seized their goods; the son of Henry the 2.  
1479 33 George surnamed the Rich also, the Founder of the University of Ingolstade! whose sole daughter and heir was married to Rupertus Prince elector Palatine: with the Dukedom of Bavaria for her Dower. But Maximilian the Emperor not liking so much greatness in the Germane Princes, confirmed the same on  
1503 34 Albert III. son of a former Albert, Nephew of John of Munchen, by his son Ernestus: which John was youngest brother to Stephen the 2. who by the power and favour of Maximilian the Emperor, succeeded unto George the Rich: the cause of a long and unhappy war betwixt the Electors of the Rhine and Dukes of Bavaria: the worst whereof, besides the loss of this Estate, fell upon the Palatines, proscribed and outed of their Country upon this quarrel; but upon their submission restored again.  
1508 35 William the son of Albert the 3.  
1577 36 Albert IV. a great Champion of the Doctrines and Traditions of the Church of Rome, and so extremely affected unto the Jesuits, that he built Colleges for them at Landsberg, Ingolstade, and Munchen, his three principal towns.  
1579 37 William II. son of Albert the 4. as zealous as his Father in the cause of the Church of Rome: in which exceeded very much by  
38 Maximilian, eldest son of William the 2. who chiefly out of the same zeal sided with Ferdinand the 2. in the wars of Germany, anno 1620. and took upon him the conduct of the Armies of the said Emperor against Frederick Count and elector Palat●ne, chosen King of Bohemia. 
Austria.  In which having done great service to the Imperial and Romish interest, he was by the said Ferdinand invested in the Upper Palatinate, called anciently (but not more properly then now) the Palatinate of Bavaria: together with the Electoral dignity: this last conferred at first upon him but for term of life in the Diet at Regensberg, 1623. the Electors of Mentz, Saxony, and Brandenbourg, protesting against it; but afterwards in the Diet at Prague anno 1628. conferred upon him and his heirs for ever, to the great prejudice of the Princes of the Palatine Family, who by reason of their simultaneous investiture with the first of their house, are not to be deprived of their estates and dignities for the offence of their Fathers: the punishment not being to extend beyond the person of the offender. But notwithstanding their pretensions and allegations, the Duke is still possessed of the title and dignity, confirmed therein by the conclusions of the Treaty of Munster: a new Electorate being to be erected for the Palatine Princes.    
The Arms of this Duke are Lozenges of 21 pieces in Bend, Argent, and Azure.   

The ARCHDUKEDOME of AUSTRIA.  
The Archdukedome of AUSTRIA reckoning in the incorporate Provinces and Members of it, is bounded on the East with Hungary and a part of Sclavonia; on the West with Bavaria, and some parts of the Swissers and the Grisons; on the North with Bohemia and Moravia; and on the South with Histria, and some part of Friuly in Italy. Within which circuit are contained the feveral Provinces of Austria, properly so called, Stiria, Carinthia, Carniola, and Tirol: the quality of the whole will be best discerned by the Survey of particulars.  
The ancient Inhabitants of the whole were the Norici, of the Romans, parted into the lesser Tribes of Sevates, Alauni, Ambisontii, Ambilici, and Ambidrauni: subdued by Drusus, son in law to Augustus Caesar, and made a Province of the Empire. After by Constantine the Great, divided into Noricum Mediterraneum, comprehending the Countries of Carinthia, Carniola, Stiria, and some parts of Tirol, with the Bishopric or District of Saltsburg; of which Solyun was the Metropolis or Capital City: and Noricum Ripense containing only Austria and those parts of Bavaria which lie Eastward of the River Inn, extended all along on the banks of the Danow. Known by no other names while possessed by the Romans; from whom being conquered by the Avares and other Nations; it gained those several names and appellations specified before.  
1 AUSTRIA, properly so called, hath on the East the Kingdom of Hungary, from which parted by the River Rab; on the West, Bavaria; on the North the Bohemian Mountains towards the West, and on the other side the Teya, which separates it from Moravia; on the South, Stiria, or Stiermarck, called by the Dutch, Ostenreich, and contractedly Oostrich, that is to say, the Eastern Kingdom (a part assuming to itself the name of the whole) this being the extreme Province of East-France, or the Eastern Kingdom of the French: in the barbarous Latin of those times called by the name of Austrasia, whence the modern Austria.  
The air is generally very healthy, and the earth as fruitful; yielding a plentiful increase without help of compost, or other soiling; and of so easy a tillage to the husbandman, that on the North side of the Danow it is ploughed and managed by one horse only. Exceeding plentiful of grain, and abundant in wine, with which last it supplieth the defects of Bavaria: great store of Saffron, some provision of salt: and at the foot of the Mountains not far from Haimbourg, some Ginger also. Nor wants it Mines of silver, in a large proportion. Divided by the River Danow into the Lower and the Higher: that lying on the North side of the River, towards Bohemia and Moravia, this on the South side towards Stiermark.  
Places of most importance in the HIGHER AUSTRIA, are 1 Gmund, seated on a Lake called Gemunder See, bordering on Bavaria at the efflux of the river Draun, which ariseth out of it. 2 Lints, seated on the confluence of the said Draun, with the famous Danow, the Aredate of Ptolemie: A town before the late wars almost, wholly Protestant, but then being put into the hands of the Duke of Bavaria, began to warp a little to the other side. 3 Walkenstein on the Ens or Anisus, near the borders of Stiermark. 4 Ens, on the fall of that river into the Danow; raised out of the ruins of Laureacum, sometimes the Metropolis of the Noricum Ripense, the Station at that time of the second Legion: afterwards an Archbishops See, made such in the first planting of Christianity amongst this people by S. Severine, anno 464. On the reviver whereof, suppressed by the Huns, Bojarians, and others of the barbarous Nations, by the diligence and preaching of S. Rupertus, the Metropolitan dignity was fixed at Saltzburg. 5 Waidhoven, near the head of the river Ips. 6 Ips, seated at the influx of that river, and from thence denominated, the Gesodunum of Ptolemie and other ancients. 7 Newfull, on a great Lake so named. 8 Wells, on the main stream of the Danubius. 9 Haimburg, on the confluence thereof, and the river Marckh: Near to which at the foot of the Mountains now called Haimburgerberg (from the town adjoining) but anciently named Mons Cognamus, is some store of Ginger: a wonderful great rarity for these colder Countries. 
Austria.  10 Newstat, first called so from the newness of it, being built of late. 11 Vienna, by the Dutch Wien, the principal of all these parts by Ptolemie called Juliobona, Vindebona by Antonine; the station in their times of the tenth Roman Legion, of whose being settled here there are many Monuments both within the City and without. Seated it is on the banks of Danubius, well built both in regard of private and public edifices: each private house having such store of cellarage for all occasions, that as much of the City seems to be under the ground, as is above it. The streets for the most part spacious, and all paved with stone, which makes them very clean and sweet in the midst of winter: fenced with a mighty wall, deep and precipitious ditches on all parts of it; and many Bulwarks, Towers, and Ramparts, in all needful places: the walls hereof first raised with some part of the money paid unto Leopold Duke of Austria, for the ransom of King Richard the first of England, taken prisoner by him as he passed homewards through this Country from the Holy Land. Esteemed at this day the strongest hold of Christendom against the Turks, and proved experimentally so to be in that most notable and famous repulse here given them, an. 1526. At what time 200000 of them under the conduct of Solyman the Magnificent besieged this City; but by the valour of Frederick the second, elector Palatine of the Rhine, and other Germane Princes gallantly resisted and compelled to retire, with the loss of 80000 soldiers. Nor doth the strength hereof so diminish the beauties of it, but that it is one of the goodliest towns in all the Empire, the residence for these last ages of the Emperors: made an University by the Emperor Frederick the second, revived, and much advanced by Albert Duke of Austria, anno 1356. Adorned with an Episcopal See, many magnificent Temples and stately Monasteries; but above all with a most sumptuous and Princely Palace, wherein the Archdukes and Emperors use to keep their Courts; built by Ottacar, King of Bohemia, during the little time he was Duke of Austria. In the middle ages, as appears by Otho Frisingensis, it was called Fabiana: but being ruined by the Huns, and again re-edified, was first called Biana, (the first syllable omitted by mistake or negligence) from whence the Dutch Wien, and the Latin Vienna.  
We should now take a view of the towns and Cities in the LOWER AUSTRIA, if there were any in it which were worth the looking after. The Country having never been in the hands of the Romans, hath no town of any great antiquity, nor many new ones built or beautified by the Austrian Princes, since it came into their possession: the only one of note being Crems or Cremia, on the left hand shore of Danubius, going down the water. 2. Rets, on the River ●ega bordering on Moravia;; and 3. Freistat, at the foot of the Mountains on the skirts of Bohemia. The old Inhabitants of this tract are supposed to be the Quadi, in that part which lieth next to Bohemia; the Marcomanni in those parts which are next Moravia: who intermingled with the Bo●i, and united with them into the name of Bojarians, won from the Romans the whole Province of the Second Rhaetia, and so much of Noricum, as lieth betwixt the Inn and the Ens: leaving the rest to the Avares, who possessed that and the two Pannonia's, extorted also from the Romans in the fall of that great and mighty Empire.  
But these Bojarians being conquered by Clovis the Great, and the Avares driven out of Pannonia by Char le magne; both Provinces became members of the French Empire, till the subduing of Pannonia by the Hungarians. To oppose whom, and keep in peace and safety these remoter parts, some Guardians or Lords Marchers were appointed by the Kings and Emperors of Germany, with the title of Marquesses of Ostreich. At first Officiary only, but at last hereditary, made so by the Emperor Henry the first, who gave this Province to one Leopold, surnamed the Illustrious, the son of Henry Earl of Bamberg, of the house of Schwaben; and there withal the title of marquis, anno 980. This Marquisate was by Frederick Barbarossa raised to a Dukedom, 1158. Henry being the first Duke, whose brother Leopold took Richard the first of England, prisoner, in his return from Palestine: for whose ransom he had so much money, that with it he bought Stiermark together with the Counties of N●obourgh, and Liutz; and walled Vienna. His son Fredericus Leopoldus, was made King of Austria, by the Emperor Frederick the second, anno 1225. Eleven years he continued in this dignity, at the end of which he was spoiled of his royal ornaments by the same hand, for denying his appearance at the Emperor's summons, unto whom for some outrages, he had been complained of. Finally he died in the year 1246. leaving two daughters. His sister named Margaret was married unto Ottocar, son to Primislaus King of Bohemia: his eldest daughter, Gertrude, to the marquis of Baden; and Agnes, the second unto Henry Duke of Carinthia. Ottocar pretending the right of his wife, took to him the Dukedom of Austria, which he kept after the death of his wi●e, till the year 1228. in which he was vanquished and slain by Rodolphus the Emperor. Rodolphus then gave it to Albertus his son, whose wife Elizabeth, was daughter to Meinhard Earl of T●●ol son of Duke Henry of Carinthia, and of Agnes daughter of Frederick Leopold: Margaret, the sister; and Gertrude, the other daughter of this Frederick, dying issueless. By this marriage Allert had the Dukedom of Austria, Stiria, and Carinthia, with the Earldoms of Tirol and Carniola. By whom it was first raised to the title of Archduke, is not yet agreed. Some attribute it to Rodolphus of Habspurg, at the investiture of his son Albert into these Estates, anno 1298. Others to Charles' the fourth, advancing to that honour Rodolph the Ingenious; anno 1360. Some make it to be first given to Albert Duke hereof in the year 1430. and others post it lower to the marriage of Philip son of Maximilian of Austria and the Lady Mary of Burgundy, with Joan Princess of Spain. But by whom soever given at first, it is now the constant and hereditary title of all this Family: the successive Princes whereof, from the first investiture, follow in the ensuing Catalogue of 

The MARQESSES, 
Austria.  DUKES, KINGS, and ARCHDUKES of AUSTRIA.  
928 1 Leopold of Bamberg the first marquis.  
988 2 Henry son of Leopold.  
1014 3 Albert son of Henry, surnamed the Victorious.  
1056 4 Ernestus son of Albert.  
1075 5 Leopold II. son of Ernest, a companion of Godfrey of Bovillon.  
1096 6 Leopold III. son of the second founder of the Abbey of Neubourg.  
1136 7 Leopold IV. son of the third, by his half brother Conrade the third, the Emperor of the Germans made Duke of Bavaria.  
1141 8 Henry II. brother of Leopold, marquis of Austria, and Duke of Bavaria; made the first Duke of Austria by Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1158. the whole country betwixt the Inn and the Ens, being added by the said Emperor unto his estate, on his relinquishing of Bavaria to the Duke of Saxony.  
1177 9 Ludovick son of Henry, built Ens and Newstat; of great note in the wars of the Holy land.  
1193 10 Leopold V. son of Ludovick, the irreconcilable enemy of our Richard the third, taken prisoner by him, in his passage homewards, and put unto a grievous ransom.  
1230 11 Frederick the warlike, son of Leopold the fifth, made King of Austria by the Emperor Frederick the second, the last of the male issue of the house of Bamberg.  
1246 12 Ottocar son to Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, pretending the right of Margaret his wife, sister of Frederick, possessed himself of this Estate: adding thereto the Countries of Carinthia and Carniola, which he bought of Vlrick the last Princes thereof, but dispossessed of all by Rodolph of Habspurg.  
1283 13 Albert II. son of Rodolph of Habspurg by his father made Duke of Austria, in right of Elizabeth his wife the lineal and direct heir of Agnes, daughter and heir of Frederick King and Duke of Austria, after his father's death chosen Emperor also.  
1308 14 Rodolph the Ingenuous, his other brothers sharing with him in the estate.  
1135 15 Albert surnamed the Short, the youngest and surviving brother of Rodolph, succeeded in the whole Estate; a great advancer of his house.  
1358 16 Albert IV. son of Albert the Short.  
1395 17 Albert V. son of Albert the fourth.  
1404 18 Albert VI son of Albert the fifth, King of Hungary and Bohemia in right of Elizabeth his wife, daughter and heir of Sigismond the King thereof.  
1439 19 Lad●slaus son of Albert and Elizabeth, King of Hungary and Bohemia, and Duke of Austria.  
1457 20 Frederick II. on the death of Ladislaus without issue succeeded into the Dukedom of Austria, as the direct heir of Leopold the ninth, one of the younger sons of Albert the Short: chosen also Emperor.  
1493 21 Maximilian son of Frederick enriched his house with the marriage of the heir of Burgundy.  
1519 22 Ferdinand Grandchild to Maximilian by his son Philip King of Spain, and Archduke of Austria; succeeded his Grandfather in this Dukedom; King of Hungary, Bohemia, and Emperor of Germany.  
1565 23 Maximilian II. son of Ferdinand.  
1577 24 Rodolphus III. son of Maximilian the second.  
1●12 25 Mathias brother of Rodolphus.  
1619 26 Ferdinand II. surnamed of Gratz, son of Charles Duke of Austria and Carinthia, the youngest son of Ferdinand the first the numerous Offspring of Maximilian the second being all dead without issue; succeeded in the Estates of Austria, chosen Emperor also, King of Hungaria and Bohemia, etc.  
27 Ferdinand III. son of Ferdinand the second, now living anno 1648. Archduke of Austria, King of Hungaria and Bohemia, and Emperor of the Germans: Of whose estate and the Concomitants thereof, we shall say more, when we have took a view of the rest of the Provinces.    
2. STIRIA, or STIERMARK, is bounded on the North with Austria, on the South with Carinthia; on the East with Hungary, and on the West with Carniola. Extended in length 110 miles, but in breadth not above 60, or thereabouts. The reason of the name we shall have anon.  
Towns of most consequence, 1 Gratz, seated upon the River Mur, and the chief of the Province, from which the third branch of the house of Austria (since the time of Ferdinand the first) was called De Gratz, and had the Government of the Country for their part of that Patrimony. A town once full of Protestants, and those so strong, that they could neither be forced out, nor hindered from the free exercise of their Religion, 
Stiria.  till the year 1598., in which Margaret the late Queen of Spain, sister to the Archduke Ferdinand du Gratz, was by the Citizens solemnly entertained; with whom entered so many soldiers that the City was taken, and 14 Ministers of the Reformed Religion presently banished. 2 Rachelspurg, and 3 Pruck, both situate also on the Mur. 4 Stechaw, an Episcopal See seated on the Dra, or Dravus, a well known River, not far from the fall of the Mur into it. 5 Petaw, the Paetovio of Antoninus, seated somewhat higher upon the Dravus. 6 Lamboch the Ovilabis of Antoninus, on the Dravus also. 7 Voitesperg, upon the River Kainach. 8 Cely, the Celeia of Pliny, not else observable. 9 Canisia, a well fortified place, and the strongest Bulwark of these parts against the Turk.  
The whole Country mountainous and hilly, generally overspread with the spurs and branches of the neighbouring Alps, and rich only in minerals; was anciently the habitation of the Taurisci (part of the Norici) from whom it took the name of Steirmark: the Germans calling that a Steir, which the Latins call Tauriscus, or a little Bullock. By which account Steirmark, is nothing but the borders or Marches of the Taurisci, the utmost bounds of their possessions, as indeed it was: laid to Pannonia in the distribution of the Roman Provinces, it was called Valeria, in honour of Valeria the daughter of Diocletian. But once dismembered from the Empire, it fell upon the name of Steirmark, with reference to the Taurisci, spoken of before. First made an Earldom in the person of one Ottocarus advanced unto that honour by the Emperor Conrade the second. Leopold the fourth from this Ottocarus, (two other Ottocars' intervening) was made marquis of Stiermark, and his son Ottocar the fourth was made Duke, by the Emperor Frederick Earbarossa.. But being without hope of issue, and infected with the uncurable disease of the Leprosy, he sold this Country to Leopold the fifth of Austria; bought with some part of that vast sum of money which he extorted for the ransom of King Richard the first, continued ever since in the possession of this potent Family: but so that it hath many times been assigned over for the portion of the younger brethren's: as namely to Leopold the ninth of that name, one of the younger sons of Albert the short; Ernest the youngest son of that Leopold; and lastly to Charles the youngest son of Maximilian the second, called Charles of Gratz, father of Ferdinand the second, successor to Mathias in Austria itself, and all the rest of the Estates incorporate with it: not like to be so impolitickly dismembered from the chief of the house, as in former times.  
2 CARINTHIA, by the Dutch called Karnten, is bounded on the East with Steirmark and the River Levandt; on the West with the District of Saltzburg and the River Saltzach; on the North with Austria itself; and on the South with Carniola, and the River Dravus, which having its original in the skirrs hereof passeth through these Austrian Provinces into Hungary, and falls at last into the Danow. The Country being situate in in the worst part of the Alps, is generally poor and barren, except only in minerals: extending all along the Dravus, for the length of 100 English miles, and 47 in breadth betwixt that River and the Mur by the which it is bounded.  
Places of principal note in it are 1. St. Veit, or Sancti Viti, the chief town of the Country, situate at the meeting of the Glan and the Wunics, two small Rivers, adorned with a spacious market place, and a beautiful Conduit. 2 Vittach, seated on the Dravus in a pleasant valley, encompassed about with rocks; the houses hereof adorned on the outside with painted stories, very delightful to behold. 3 Gurch, a small Town, but an Episcopal See. 4 Clagnfoot, on the Lake called Werd-Zee; a well fenced place, called anciently by the name of Claudia. 5. Wolsperg upon the Lavandt, so near to Steirmark that it is by some reckoned for a Town thereof. 6 Lavamundt on the same border, an Episcopal See; situate at the influx of that River into the Dravus. 7 Freisach, a town of much antiquity, seated on the Oleza. 8 Spittall, etc.  
The strange and observable ceremonies, with which the Archdukes of Austria are acknowledged Dukes of Carinthia; take here out of Munster. In the meadows adjoining to the Town of S. Veit, a certain countryman to whom that office of inheritance belongeth, sitteth on a Marble stone there being, holding in his right hand, a cow with a black calf; and in his left hand, a mare as lean as a rake. Then cometh the new Duke, attired in a plain rustic habit, his Courtiers attending him in their richest apparel: at whose approach, the Countryman above mentioned, demandeth, What he is that so majestically cometh thitherward: and the people answer, that it is the future Duke. He again asketh, whether he● be a just Judge, and one that will maintain the liberty of the country, and sincerity of the Religion: the people answer, he will: then he asketh, by what right he will displace him of his marble seat: to whom the Steward of the new Duke's house replieth, he shall give thee 60 pence in silver, the cattle now standing by thee, the clothes which he hath at this time on, and thy house shall ever be free from tax and tribute. This fellow upon this, taking the Duke by the hand, and bidding him to be a good Prince, giveth him a gentle cuff on the ear, setting him on the marble stone, and taking away the cattle, departeth. This done, the new Duke goeth to Saint Vites Church; and having done his devotions, putteth off his rustic weeds, and dresseth himself in clothes befitting a Prince: for such after their ceremonies he is acknowledged.  
4. CARNIOLA, by the Dutch called Krain, is environed with Sclavonia, East: Friulo, West; Carinthia, North; and Ist●ia, South. The chief Towns are, 1 Newmarckt, 2 Esling, 3 Marsperg, Pogonocke, and 5 Saxenfelt, all upon the Savus; which arising in this Country, runneth through the very middle of it, and after falleth into the Danow. 6 Laibach, seated on a small River of the same name, by Ptolemie called Pamportum, but by Pliny Nauportus: famous in old Mythology for the transport of the ship called Argo, 
Carniola.  wherein Jason and his Comrades brought the Golden Fleece; who coming out of Pontus on the Euxine Sea, took their course up the Danow, so into the Savus, then into this town, hence carried over land into the Adriatic, from thence sailing into Greece, where they first began the undertaking. 7 Goritz called anciently Noreja, or seated in the place where Noreja stood, is situate on the River Lisontio, an Italian water, which not far off falleth into the Adriatic. A town of so much note, that anciently it was an Earldom, and in the division of the Estate of Meinard Earl of Tirol (to whom it formerly belonged) it was given to Albert his second son, with the style and title of Earl of Goritz continuing in his house till the year 1500, when on the death of Leonard the last Earl hereof, it descended upon Maximilian the first, as next heir unto it.  
The first Inhabitants of both these Provinces of Kruin, and Karnten, were the Carni, of Pliny and other Ancients, who make them part of Venetia, the tenth Region of Italy: but afterwards in the distribution of the Roman Provinces cast into Noricum, and made a member of the Diocese of the Western Illyricum, but subject or subordinate rather to the Praefectus Praetorio of Italy. From them not only the Alps adjoining had the name of Carnicae; but these two Countries had the names by which now they go. United of long time in the persons of the Dukes of Karnten, of whom the first mentioned upon good record was Henry son to Berchthold a Noble man of Bavaria, in the time of the Emperor Otho the third; by whom advanced unto this honour and estate; disposed of in succeeding times at the will of the Emperors, and given from one family unto another as their fancies served them. Not fixed in any house, till it came to Henry the son of Engelbert, Precedent or Perfect of Histria: in which family it continued under this Henry and his brother Englebert, Vlric the first, Henry the second, Herman and Vlrick the second, the last Prince hereof: who being old and without children sold his estate herein to Ostocar King of Bohemia and Duke of Austria: by whom these Countries were surrendered unto Rodolphus of Habspurg, on the conclusion of the peace which was made between them. And though Rodolphus gave Carinthia to Mainard Earl of Tirol, (in right of whose daughter Elizabeth, Albert the son of Rodolph was possessed of Austria) on the death of Henry the son of Mainard without issue male, it fell (according to the contract) unto Albert the Short eldest son of Albert and Grandchild of Rodolphus: continuing ever since in that family, though not always in the chief house of the Dukes of Austria.  
TIROLIS is bounded on the East with Friuly and Marca Trevigiana; on the West with the Grisons, and some part of Switzerland; on the North with Bavaria; and the South with Lombardie. Extended over the greatest part of the Alps Rhaeticae, and some part of the Juliae: yet intermixed with many rich and fruitful valleys, those specially which lie on the banks of the Inn and the River of Adise. Nor are the hills so void of profit unto the Inhabitants, but that they afford good store of metals digged out of them; especially of Brass and Silver, which last have yielded to the Archduke 230000 Crowns yearly.  
Towns of most note 1 Oenipus, or Inspruch, seated on the Inn or Oenus, which gave denomination to the second branch of the house of Austria, descended from Ferdinand, the second son of the Emperor Ferdinand: the house of Gratz issuing from Charles the third son of that Emperor. Most memorable for the hasty flight of Charles the fifth, upon the news that Duke Maurice whom he had lately made elector of Saxony, was coming against him with his Forces: which so terrified him, that he fled away by torchlight, with some few of his followers, the residue of his Court (most of which were persons of great eminency) trudging in the dark on foot, with the Black Guard and the scullery: the Town being many times the Residence of the Dukes of Austria, who have here a very Royal and magnificent Palace. And to say truth, the town deserveth to be so honoured; amongst pleasant Meadows, spacious cornfields, and shady mountains sweetly seated: the houses fairly built of stone, enriched by the Courts of Judicature here settled for all the Country, and provided of a gallant Armoury. 2 Trent (Tridentum it is called in Latin) situate in the confines of Germany and Italy; for which cause the Inhabitants speak both languages. Built on the banks of the River Athesis or Adice; honoured with an Episcopal See, but made more famous by the Council which was there begun by Pope Paul the third, anno 1545. against the Lutherans: For 22 years together before their meeting, dashed by one Pope and intimated by another, advanced by Charles the fifth upon worldly Policies, and for as worldly policies retarded by the Court of Rome for 18 years after this first Convention of it, at sundry times, assembled, suspended, and dissolved. And finally when fixed here seriously by Pope Pius the fourth, anno 1562. managed with so much art and cunning by the Papal party, that nothing was determined among the Prelates, but what had formerly been resolved on, in the Roman Conclave, and certified accordingly by especial Posts: occasioning that most bitter jest of one of the Hungarians Bishops who was present at it, that the Holy Ghost was sent unto them in a Cloak-bag from Rome. The effects of which Council, so artificially carried on by the strength of wit, I cannot better describe then in the words of the History of it, which are as followeth. This Council, desired and procured by godly men to reunite the Church which began to be divided, hath so established the Schism, and made the parties so obstinate, that the discords are irreconcilable. And being managed by Princes for Reformation of Ecclesiastical Discipline, hath caused the greatest deformation that ever was since Christianity did begin: and hoped for by the Bishops themselves to regain the Episcopal Authority, for the most part usurped by the Pope, hath made them lose it altogether, bringing them into greater servitude. On the contrary, feared and avoided by the See of Rome, as a potent means to moderate the exorbitant power thereof, mounted from small beginnings by divers degrees, to an unlimited excess; it hath so established and confirmed the same over that part which remained subject unto it, 
Tirol.  that it was never so great, nor sound rooted. So far the words of the History. The next of note is, 3 Falkenstein, remarkable for mines of Brass; as 4 Hall upon the Inn for Salt-witches; and 5 Schwas for the richer mines of Silver. 6. Malk, near the head of the River At●esis. 7 Pollen, upon the borders of Italy, by the people whereof called Folgiano, and Bolsano. 8 Tirol, an ancient Castle, the first seat of the Earls or Governors hereof, and giving name for that reason, to the Country adjoining.  
The Earls hereof, were at the first no other then Provincial Officers; when made Proprietaries, I am yet to seek. The first of whom we have any certainty was Mainard, Earl of Tirol and Goritz, who died in the year 1258, leaving his Earldoms to that Mainard, who by Rodolfus Habspurgensis was enfeoffed with the Dukedom of Karnten. But Henry the son of this last Mainard, dying without issue male, his daughter Margaret, by the consent of all her people, settled her estate therein on the sons of Albert, called the Short: continuing ever since in the house of Austria, though sometimes made the portion and inheritance of the younger Princes. By Ferdinand the first, it was given in Apennage to his 2d son Ferdinand surnamed of Inspruch for that reason: who by marrying with Philippina a Burgher's daughter of Augsburg, so displeased his Brethren, that to buy his peace of them, and enjoy his own content with her, it was finally agreed upon amongst them all, that Tirol should not descend upon his Children of that venture. In pursuance whereof, after his decease, Tirol fell to the house of Gratz: his eldest son Charles being made marquis of Burgh, and Andrew his youngest Cardinal of Brixia.  
The Arms of these Earls when distinct from the house of Austria, were Argent, an Eagle Sable, membered Or. Those of Carinthia, united for a time unto them (as before was noted) being Argent, three Lions Leopards Sable.  
Thus have we seen by what means all these Provinces belonging unto several Lords, became united and incorporated into one estate. Besides which, there was added to it by Rodolph of Habspurg, all the Upper Elsats, the Castle and Territory of Hapspurg itself, with many fair Estates amongst the Swissers, by Albert the Short, the Country of Sungow, and by his sons the Advocateship of Friberg, or the Country of Brisgow. So that these Princes are undoubtedly the greatest for power and patrimony of any in Germany; and would be of a great revenue, if the ill neighbourhood of the Turks did not put them to continual charges, and make the borders of the Country to be thinly planted, and not very thoroughly manured. Howsoever, it is thought that they may yield yearly two millions of Crowns and upwards to the Archduke's Coffers.  
The Arms of these Princes are Gules, a Fez Argent, assumed by marquis Leopold at the siege of Acon, or Ptolemais in the Holy land; because his holy Armour being covered with blood, his Belt only remained white. The Arms thereof in former times having been six larks Or, in a field Azure, supposed to have been taken by the first Marquesses, because they possessed those six Provinces, for defence of which the tenth Legion called Alauda, had been fixed at Vienna.  
And now we are to take our leave of the Roman Empire, which we shall meet withal no more till we come to Hungary; the Countries on the north side of Danubius, and the East side of the Rhine, being almost assoon abandoned, as conquered by them. So that in our survey of these northern Countries, we are not like to find such matter of Antiquity as we had before, but must content ourselves both with Towns and Villages of a later date, and a less continuance. In which we shall begin with those Countries which lie on the other side of Rhine, bordering on the Estates of Cleveland and the Bishop-electors; and ●o proceed on Eastward till we come to the furthest parts of Germany, and the confines of Hungary; afterwards turning to the North till we meet with Denmark, which is the next of all to be considered.   

9 VETERAVIA.  
VETERAVIA, or WETERAW, is bounded on the West with the Bishopric of Colen, on the East with Frankenland; on the North with Hassia, and Westphalen, and on the South with the Lower Palatinate. It containeth a combination of many small Estates, which being joined in a common league for defence of each other, for the preservation of their Laws, Liberties, and Religion, are called the Confederation of Weteraw. The Principal of the States which are thus confederated, are the Earls of 1 Nassaw; 2 Hanaw; and 3 Stolms; 4 the Lord of Licht●berg; and the Imperiali Cities of 5 Friberg; and 6 Wetzelaer.  
The County of Nassaw lieth at the foot of the Mountains which divide Hassia from Engern and Westphalen, anciently called Melibocus, a branch of the long ridge of Mountains which were called Abnobi. Chief Towns hereof, are 1 Nassaw, situate on the south side of the River Lou, not far from the fall of it into the Rhine; the first seat, and honorary Title of this famous family, and still in the possession of the Princes of Orange, the first branch hereof. 2 Dillingbourg, the usual seat of the Earls of Nassaw, before their settling in the Low Countries; hence named the Earls of Nassaw of the house of Dillingberg, to difference them from others of the same Family. 2 Catrezelbogen, in Latin, Catti Meliboci, which shows the name to be compounded of the Cattis, anciently possessed of these parts of Germany, and the mountainous parts of Melibocus, then inhabited by them. The possession of this town much controverted between the Earls of Nassaw, and the Lantgraves of Hessen. 
Wederaw.  But finally, surrendered by Count William of Nassaw (father of Wili●●● Prince of Orange) unto Philip the Landgrave, in the time of Charles the fifth, for the sum 600000 Crowns: the house of Nassaw notwithstanding retaining it amongst their Titles. 3. Herborn, a small University or Schola Illustris, founded of late by the Earls of Nassaw: in which Piscator was Divinity Reader, and Alstedius (both famous in their times) professor for the Arts and Sciences. 4 Idstein, lying south to Catzenelbogen; and 5. Wisbad, directly south of Idstein, betwixt that and the Mien; these have the title and possessions of the second branch of this Family. 6. Weilborough on the Lou, not far from Wetzelver, which gives Title to the third branch of this house, called the Earls of Nassaw in Sarbruck and Weilborough.  
As for the Princes of the house of Nassaw, they are very ancient: Otho of Nassaw being made Earl of Guelderland in the year 1079. Another Otho of this house, but proceeding from a different branch of it, dying anno 1190. the founder of the present Family of the Princes of Orange; and of the house of Wisbad and Idstein, out of which descended Adolphus Earl of Nassaw chosen Emperor, in the year 1292. By the marriage of Engelbert the sixth Earl of this house of Dillingberg, with Mary daughter of Philip, Lord of Breda in Brabant; they came first to be possessed of Estates in the Netherlands: and by the marriage of Henry, great Grandchild of this Engelbert, with Claude of Chalons, they got the Principality of Orange in France. A family as much honoured for the personal merit of the Princes of it, as any other in Europe: of whom we have already given a Catalogue, in the description and story of Provence.  
Bordering on Franconia, or Frankenland, lieth the County of HANAW, so called from the Chief town of it: in which the places of most note, are 1 Hanaw itself, in Latin called Hanovia, honoured with a Schola illustris also; and much enriched by the trade of Printing, with which they use to furnish annually the Marts of Frankefort, distant from hence about ten Dutch miles. 2. Pfaffenhofen, of no note formerly, but like to be remembered in the stories of succeeding times for the great defeat there given to the Duke of Lorraine, July 31. 1633. who lost his whole Forces, all his Ordinance, Ammunition, and baggage; and which was worst of all, his Country, taken in part from him by the Conquering Swedes, who followed him close into his home; but wholly by the French King upon that advantage. 3 Lichteberg, which gives title to a second branch of the house of Hanaw, called the Lord of Lichteberg. A family of good esteem, since the time that Otho of Hanaw was ennobled with the title of Earl thereof, which was about the year 1392. before that Princes of the Empire; and after that advanced unto greater fortunes, by the addition of the Barony of Minzeberg, in the person of Philip the first Earl of the County of Rheineck, in the person of another Philip the third of that name, great Grandchild of the former Philip; and finally, of the Lordship and estate of Lichteberg, accrueing to this house by the marriage of a third Philip, the youngest son of Reynard the third Earl hereof, with Anne the daughter and heir of Ludovick, Lord of Lichteberg; the title and possession of the second branch of the house of Hanaw, called Lords of Lichteberg, and Hocsenstein, and Earls of Bitsch; this last being an estate in Lorraine, accrueing to them by the marriage of a fourth Philip, (the fifth in name and order of the house of Lichteberg) with Margaret, sole daughter and heir of Ludovick the last Earl thereof.  
Betwixt the Counties of Nassaw, and Hanaw, on both sides of the River Lou, lies the Earldom of SOLMS, the first Earl whereof (of whom there is any good Constat) was Henry, honoured with this title, anno 1220. But being I find them in the Catalogue of the Counts Imperial made before that time, I must conclude them to be ancienter than the date aforesaid; though that sufficient to ennoble a far greater Family. By the marriage of Conrade the ninth from Henry first with Elizabeth one of the daughters of William of Nassaw Prince of Orange, and after with the widow of the Earl of Egmond, they came to be of such Authority amongst the Netherlands, as to be privileged with a place and suffrage in the Council of the State's General: there settled at the present in their greatest honour, especially since the marriage of Henry of Nassaw Prince of Orange with a daughter of Earl Conrade by his second wife; the mother of William of Nassaw, now Prince of Orange, and husband to the Princess Mary, the eldest daughter of Great Britain. But besides their Estates there, they are possessed in this tract of 1 Branufels, which gives title to the first branch of the house of Solms. 2 Croneberg, the possession of the second branch of this Family; and 3 Solms, on the north side of the Lou, the root of both.  
Of the Imperial Cities in this Confederation, the first is Friberg, called for distinction sake, Friberg in Wederaw, to difference it from another Town of that name in Brisgow: situate in the middle of delicious and most fruitful elds: and memorable for the stout resistance which it made to Adolphus of Nassaw, at that time Emperor: who when he could not get it by force, or famine, obtained it by fraud; and put to death no less than 40 of chief Nobility, whom he found in the Castle. So hated for that bloody fact, that he was shortly after deprived of the Empire, and slain in fight by Albert of Austria his Competitor. The second of the two is Wetzelaer, seated on the Lou, where it meets with the Dille, which rising near Dillengberg, a town of the Earl of Nassawes, doth here lose its name into the greater. A town Imperial, confederate with Frideberg, and the Princes before mentioned, for maintaining their common liberties, and the Religion publicly professed amongst them, being that of the Reformed Churches of calvin's Platform.   

10. FRANCONIA. 
Franconi●▪   
FRANCONIA or FRANKENLAND, is bounded on the East with the Upper Palatinate, and part of Voitland; on the West with the Confederates of Wederaw, and part of the Rhine; on the north with Hassia, and Thuringia, and on the south with the Palatinate of the Rhine, and some part of Schwaben, so called from the French, Franci, or Francones, in whose possession it was, when they were first known unto the Romans; the Residence of their Dukes or Princes in this noble Province, appropriating the name unto it. Called also Francia Orientalis, to difference it from the Realm of France, which lay more towards the West.  
The Country on the outparts overgrown wholly in a manner with woods and forests, and environed almost with Mountains, parts of the old Hercinian Wolds; is within, pleasant, plain, and fruitful; sufficiently plentiful both of corn and wines, but abundantly well stored with Rape, and Liquorice, and yielding good pasture for cattle: so that we may compare it to a fine piece of Cloth, wrought about with a course list; or an excellent fine piece of Lawn, with a canvasse Selvage.  
Chief Rivers of it, be 1 The Main, or Moenus, which running thorough the midst of it, is received into the Rhine below Frankfort: 2 The Sala, whence the adjoining French had the name of Salii; and Conrade, Emperor of the Germans, the surname of Salicus. 3 Radiantis; 4 Sinna; 5 Tubero; 6 Aestus, etc.  
The People of it are ingenious, patient of labour, strong of body, and very industrious, not suffering any to be idle that can earn his living of what sort soever. The offspring of the ancient French, who having overmastered Gaul, and the parts adjoining, left here the seminary of their strength, and a stock of their ancient Princes: Marcomir, brother of Pharamont the first King of the French, governing in these parts as Duke, and leaving the estate and title unto his posterity. The catalogue of which Princes, take in order thus: 

The PRINCES of the FRANKES, and DUKES of FRANCONIA, of the old FRENCH Race.  
A. Ch.  
326 1 Genebaldus, the son of Dagobert, descended from the old Regal stock of the Sicambri, united with other Dutch nations about 60 or 70 years before in the name of Frankes, having subdued those parts which lay towards the River Moenus: became the first Prince of the Eastern Frankes, or Lord of Francia Orientalis.  
356 2 Dagobert, the son of Genebaldus, who added the District of Triers unto his Estates.  
377 3 Clodovaeus, or Ludovicus, the son of Dagobert.  
398 4 Marcomir, the son of Clodovaeus, who extended his Dominion Eastwards towards Bavaria and Bohemia.  
402 5 Pharamund, or Waramund, the son of Marcomir, the first of this line which took unto himself the title of King of the French: on the assuming whereof, (aiming at matters of more importance) he left Franconia or East-France, with the Title of Duke to his brother Marcomir.  
419 6 Marcomir, the brother of Pharamund.  
423 7 Prunmesser, by some called Priamus, the son of Marcomir.  
435 8 Genebaldus II. the son of Prunmesser.  
455 9 Sunno, the son of Genebald the second.  
478 10 Clodomirus, or Luitomarus, the son of Sunno.  
515 11 Hygobaldus, the son of Clodomir, who became a Christian, and added Worms and Mentz unto his Estates.  
541 12 Helenus, by some called Hermericus, a Christian also, who passing over the Rhine, subdued that tract bordering betwixt Triers and Lorraine, which the Dutch call Westerich.  
571 13 Gotofridus, the son of Helenus, a Christian also, but not able to persuade his people to the same belief.  
595 14 Genebaldus III. the son of Gotofrede.  
615 15 Clodomir II. the son of Genebald the third.  
638 16 Heribert, the Nephew of Clodomir the second.  
668 17 Clodovaeus, or Clovis II. the Cousin-german of Heribert.  
680 18 Gosbertus, the son of Clovis the second.  
706 19 Gosbertus II. the son of Gosbert the first.  
720 20 Hetavus, the son of Gosbert the second, the last Duke of Franconia of this line. Who dying without issue male, anno 740. bequeathed it at his death to Pepin, who afterwards was King of France, Father of Charles the great; according to a former contract made between those Princes: and Charles no sooner had it in his possession, but he bestowed the greatest part of it on Burchard the first Bishop of Wurtzburg, anno 752. made Bishop of that City by Boniface, Archbishop of Mentz. (the first Apostle of this People) but a year before. The Bishops of Wurtzburg by this grant were possessed hereof, as long as any of the house of Charles the Great did possess the Empire. But his posterity failing in the person of Conrade, anno 910. Otho the first (who next but one succeeded Conrade) invested Conrade, husband to Luitgardis his daughter, with this Country, giving him withal the title of Duke of Francony. Four Princes of this house possessed it: that is to say, this Conrade surnamed Salicus, and after him three Henry's, father, son and nephew, successively enjoying the Imperial dignity, by the name of Henry the third, fourth, and fifth. This Henry, the last Prince of the male line of Conrade, dying without issue, Franconia fell to Frederick Barbarossa, Duke of Schwaben, as next heir to Henry by the Lady Agnes his Sister, married to Frederick the Ancient Duke of Schwaben, the grandfather of Barbarossa: But that house being also extinct in the person of Conradine, anno 1268. and no one heir pretending to the rights thereof; the Bishops of Wurtzburg challenged it on the former grant: content to let some great ones have a part of the spoil, that he and his successors might enjoy the rest. By means whereof it came to be divided betwixt the Bishops of Wurtzburg, Bamberg, Mentz, the elector Palatine of the Rhine, (for anciently the Palatinate and the Bishopric of Mentz were but parts of Frankenland) the marquis of Onolsbach, the Earls of Swartzenberg, Henneberg, and Hohenloe, and as many of the Free or Imperial Cities, as are seated in it. Thus every one did gather sticks when the great Oak fell: the title of Duke of Francony remaining notwithstanding to the Bishops of Wurtzburg.    
1. WURTZBURB, the Metropolis of Franconia, the seat and residence of the Bishop who is Titulary Duke hereof, is situate on the Mein, or Moenus, in a pleasant plain environed with Meadows, gardens, and fruitful mountains; and very well fenced with walls, trenches, bulwarks, and other Arts of modern fortification: well peopled, and for the most part handsomely and neatly built. Passing over the Bridge built of free stone on many large and spacious Arches, you come unto a fair and pompous (though ancient) Castle; the ordinary dwelling of the Bishop: and yet so strong that the many vain attempts of the Boors and Citizens, apt to pick quarrels with their Prince, made it thought impregnable; to which the situation of it on the top of an hill, added some advantage, but it proved ●erwise when besieged by the King of Sweden, anno 1631. who after a short, but stout resistance, took it by assault. Other towns of most note which belong to the Bishops of Wurtzburg, are 2 Forchein, where it is said that Pontius Pilate was born. 3 Gemand, at the meeting of the Mien, and the Sal, or Sala; 4 Chronac; 5 Staphelstein; 6 Hockstad, of which little memorable.  
But to return unto the Bishop as chief Lord of all; he is called in the refined Latin of these times, Herbipolitanus, but commonly Wurtziburgensis; differing in sound, but not in sense: For Wurtzburg is no other than a town of Words, situate amongst plants and gardens, as before is said; and Herbipolis, made up out of several languages, doth signify no more than a City of Herbs. By whom the Episcopal See was here first erected, and how the Bishops hereof came to be entitled unto their Estates, hath been shown already. The manner how the new Bishop is admitted, and the old interred, may be worth our knowledge. On the decease of the former Bishop, the Lord Elect attended with a great train of horse is to make his entrance. Assoon as coming within the Gates, he alights off his horse, and putteth off his robes, and being attired in a poor and despicable habit, begirt about with a rope, bareheaded also, & barefooted, he is conducted by the Earls of Henneberg, Custel, Wortheim, and Reineck, to S. Saviour's Church, being his Cathedral. The Dean and Canons there meeting him, ask him what he would have: to which he modestly replieth, that though unworthy, he is come to discharge the office unto which he is called. Then the Dean thus, I admit thee in the name of this whole Chapter, committing to thy care this Church of Saint Saviour's, and the Dukedom thereunto belonging, in the name of the Father, Son, and holy Ghost. Which done, he putteth on his Episcopal habi. byeth Mass, and from thence passeth to his Castle, where he gives entertainment to all the Company. The living Bishop thus invested, proceed we next unto the burial of the dead, whose body being emboweled, is kept in the Chapel of the Castle, his heart preserved in a vessel of glass. The next day he is carried to the Monastery of Saint James, holding a Crozier Staff in his right hand, and a sword in his left; buried with which the next day after, in the Church of S. Saviour. As for the Revenues of the Bishop, they must needs be great; the Bishop hereof, in the time of Charles the fifth, compounding for his peace with Albert, marquis of Brandenbourg, at the price of 220000 Crowns in ready money, and entering into bond to pay all his debts, which amounted to 350000 Crowns in ready money, and entering into bond to pay all his debts, which amounted to 350000 Crowns more: by which we may partly guests at the richness of his Exchequer, and partly at the greatness of his Intrado.  
2. The second great Lord of Franconie is the Bishop of BAMBERG, a City seated on the Mein, not far from Wurtzburg: the little River Regnite falling there into it; supposed by Mercator to be the Granionarium of Ptolemy, and to have took this new name from the hill Baba (so called from Baba, daughter of Otho Duke of Saxon, and w●●e of A●bert 〈◊〉 Earl hereof) upon which it is situate: the right name being Babemberg (remember that B●g in Dutch signifieth an Hill) and contractedly Bamberg. A City delectably seated amongst mountains and pleasant gardens, and in a soil exceeding fruitful of all necessaries, and yielding Liquorice in great plenty: the birthplace of Joachimus Camerarius, one of the great lights of Germany, and a See Episcopal, the Bishop of which is exempt from the power of his Metropolitan, subject immediately to the Pope, and Lord of many fair towns and territories in this Country; but much diminished since the time of Charles the fifth; the Bishop thereof then being, giving to marquis Albert above mentioned for a cessation from arms, anno 1530. no less than 60 of his Lordships (most of which fall unto the share of the marquis of Onaldsbach) besides the tutelage or Guardianship of his Wards and Clients. Of those which are remaining in the hands of the Bishops, the principal are 1 Gragingliac, 2 Schleistat.  
3. The third great Lord to be considered is the marquis of Onaldsbach or Ansbach, who is Master of no small part of this Country; but his Estate (as those of the other Germane Princes) confused and intermixed with his neighbours. His chief Towns, 1 Onaldsbach or Ansbach, the usual residence of these Marquesses, and the birthplace of most of their children. 2 Hailbrun, on the edge of Wirtenberg; walled in about in the year 1085. and honoured with some public Schools there founded by marquis George Frederick, anno 1582. 3 Pleinfelt, not far from Nuremberg. Such places as they hold in Voiteland, we shall meet with them there.  
These Marquesses are of the puissant family of Brandenbourg, by whom this fair estate was wrested from the Female heirs of Wolframius, the last Lord hereof: the first who did enjoy this Estate and Title being marquis George Frederick the son of Albert marquis and Elector of Brandenbourg called the Achilles of Germany; the Father of Albert the first Duke of Prussia, and of George, the first marquis of Jagendorf; and Grandfather of that marquis Albert, who in the days of Charles the fifth so harassed this Country. But his male-issue by Casimir his eldest son failing in that Albert, anno 1557. it returned to the Electoral house, and by Sigismond, a late elector was given to Joachim Ernestus, one of his younger brethren; who by the Princes of the Union for defence of the Palatinate was made chief Commander of their Forces, anno 1620. A charge in which it was supposed that he carried himself neither so faithfully nor so valiantly, as he should have done, being much condemned for suffering Spinola with his Army to pass by unfought with, when he had all advantages that could be wished for, to impede his march: the greatest part of the Palatinate being lost immediately upon that neglect: and by degrees the rest of the United Provinces, either taken off from their engagement, or ruined for adhering to it with too great a constancy. To him succeeded his son Christian now possessed hereof.  
As for the other secular Princes which have any considerable estates in this Country, they are the Earls of Henneberg, Hohenloe, Rheineck, Castell, Wortheim, Horpach, and Swartzenbourg, together with the Lords of Lemburg, and Rheichisberg; all of them named so from the chief town of their Estates, and all those towns enriched with some suitable territory. Of these the Earls of Henneberg, Rheineck, Castell, and Wortheim, are Homagers to the Bishop of Wurtzburg, and are to do him service at his Inthronization: the Earldom of Rheineck being now united to that of Hanow, as was shown before; and that of Henneberg most famous in that one of the Earls hereof was Father of that incredible increase of children (as many as there be days in the years) produced at one birth by the Lady Margaret his wife, sister of William Earl of Holland and King of the Romans. A Family of as great Antiquity as most in Germany, fetching their Pedigree as high as to Charles the Great, without help of the Heralds. But they of greatest power and parentage amongst them, are the Earls of SCHWARTZENBURG, deriving themselves from one Witikindus, of the house of Saxony: who fight for his Country against the French, anno 779. was taken prisoner, carried into France, and there baptised at the persuasion of Lewis the Godly, son of Charles the Great, Witikindus his son and successor, being baptised at the same time also by the name of Charles, was the first Earl of Swartzenburg, a Castle of his own building on the edge of Turingia, anno 796. whose posterity do still hold the same, but much improved in their Estates by marriages and other accrewments. A race of Princes which have yielded many of great influence in the affairs of Germany: amongst them Gunther Earl of Schwartzenburg, elected Emperor of the Romans against Charles the fourth, by Rodolph elector Palatine, Ericus Duke of Saxony, Ludovick marquis of Brandenburg, and Henry Archbishop of Mentz. By which last solemnly inaugurated at Aken (or Aquisgrane) anno 1349. But being unworthily poisoned by his Competitour, though he died not of it, yet he was made so weak and unfit for action, that he was forced to surrender his pretensions to his mortal enemy, receiving in compensation for his charges 22000 marks in silver, and some towns in Turingia.  
Of the Imperial Cities, which share amongst them the remainders of Frankenlandt, the principal are 1 Frankford on the Mien, so called from its situation on the River Mien, to difference it from Frankford in the Country of Brandenburg; Divided by the River into two parts, joined together by a bridge of stone, the lesser part, situate on the right hand shore of the River, being called Saxen-hausen, the greater part, properly called Frank-ford, seated on the other; both under one Magistrate, and both together making up a fair, rich, populous, and well traded town; of great both riches and repute, by reason of the famous Marts here held in the midst of Lent and September yearly; and the Election of the Emperor or King of the Romans as occasion is. The City of a round form, compassed with a double wall, beautified with some walks without the town on the banks of the River amongst Vineyards, meadows and sweet groves: called thus, as some say, from Francus the son of Marcomie, supposed to be the founder of it; or a Francorum vado, as the Ford of the Francs, before the building of the bridge. 2 Schweinfort, on the Mien also, in a fruitful soil. 3 Rotenburg on the River Tuber. 4 Winsheim. Here is also the town of 5 Koburg, which belongeth to the house of Saxony, and gives title unto some of the younger Princes of it, called from hence Dukes of Saxen-koburg. And hereto may be added 6 the fair City of Nurenburg, conceived by most to be within the Upper Palatinate: but by the Emperor Maximilian made a member of the Circle of Franconie, in regard most of the Estates and possessions of it lie within this Country. Of which indeed they have so plentiful a share, that when Maurice elector of Saxony, and his confederates had driven Charles the fifth out of Germany, marquis Albert before mentioned (whose sword was his best Revenue) picking a quarrel with this City, burned no less than an hundred Villages belonging to it, 70 Manors and Farmhouses appertaining to the wealthier Citizens, 3000 Acres of their Woods: and after all this havoc made of their estate, compelled them to compound with him for 200000 Crowns in Money, and six pieces of Ordinance. But being the City itself seems rather to belong to the other Palatinate, we shall there meet with it.  
Amongst these Prelates, Princes and Imperial Cities is the great Dukedom of Franconia, at this time divided; the title still remaining in the Bishop of Wurtzburg, and some part of the Country: but both the Country and the title of Duke of Francony, not long since otherwise disposed of. For the Swedes having taken Wurtzburg anno 1631. as before is said, together with the City of Bamberg, and all the Towns and Territories appertaining to them, conferred them upon Bernard Duke of Saxon-Weymer, with the style and title of Duke of Franconia. Inaugurated therein in the Cathedral Church of Wurtzburg, July 19 1633. the Nobility and Gentry of the Country doing homage to him, and all the Magistrates and Officers of the several Cities taking the oaths of Allegiance: the new Duke also making Oath, that he would carefully maintain them in their rights and Privileges. In the solemnities of which day, the first great Gun discharged in the way of triumph, broke in the going off without any hurt done but the wounding of one soldier only. An omen that all this solemn Act would prove but a Pageant, and break in pieces at the first giving fire unto it. And so accordingly it did: the victory at Norlingen, which followed not long after this, putting the Bishops once more into their possessions, and leaving nothing to the new Duke but an hungry title. And therefore leaving both the old and new Titular Dukes, we will here add the Catalogue of those who were Dukes indeed, and had together with the title the full possession of the Country.  

DUKE'S of FRANCONIA of the DUCHESS or GERMANE RACE.  
974 1 Conradus surnamed Salicus, created Duke of Franconia by Otho the first, whose daughter Luitgardis he had married: after the death of Henry the second, elected Emperor by the name of Conrade the second, anno 1025.  
1040 2 Henry the son of Conrade, Duke of Franconia, and Emperor by the name of Henry the third.  
1056 3 Henry II. of Franconia, and IV. of the Empire.  
1106 4 Henry III. of Franconia, and the V. of the Empire.  
1125 5 Frederick (surnamed) Barbarossa Duke of Schwaben, Nephew of Frederick the Ancient, Duke of Swevia, and of Agnes his wife, the sister and next heir of Henry; succeeded in the Empire after the death of Conrade the third his Uncle, anno 1153.  
1190 6 Frederick the second son of Barbarossa II. Duke of Franconia and Schwaben.  
7 Conrade II. brother of Frederick the second, succeeded in both Estates.  
8 Philip the younger brother of Conrade, succeeded in both Dukedoms after his decease; and on the death of Henry the sixth his eldest brother, was elected Emperor, anno 1198.  
1207 9 Frederick III. of Franconia, and the V. of Suevia, son of the Emperor Henry the sixth, whom he succeeded in the Kingdom of Naples, and Sicil, anno 1202. and on the death of Otho the fourth, anno 1212. was elected Emperor, of that name the second.  
1250 10 Conrade III. of Franconie, the II. of Schwaben, and the IV. of the Empire, the son of Frederick the third, whom he succeeded in all his Titles and Estates.  
1254 11 Conradine son of Conrade the third, Duke of Franconia and Schwaben; dispossessed of his Kingdoms of Naples and Sicil by Manfred, the Base Brother of his Father; and finally beheaded by Charles of Anjou, who succeeded Manfred in those Kingdoms, anno 1268. After whose death this royal house being quite extinguished; the Bishops of Wurtzburg did again resume the title of Dukes of Franconia; content to let some of the greater Lords and Prelates which lived near unto him, to share in the possession of it, as before was noted.    

11. WIRTENBERG, 
Wirtenberg  and 12. BADEN.  
These I have joined together though distinct Estates, because both of them taken out of the great Dukedom of Schwaben, erected both aabout one time, and lying very close in a round together: bounded upon the East and South with the Schwaben properly so called; on the North with the lower Palatinate; on the West with the Rhine, and that part of Schawben which is called brisgow parted asunder by the Mountainous ridge of hills called Schwartzwald; Wirtenberg lying on the East side thereof, and Baden betwixt it and the Rhine.  
And first for WIRTENBERG, the air thereof is very healthy, neither too hot in Summer, nor too cold in Winter: the soil thereof near Swartzenwald lying on the West, and the Alps of Swevia, on the South, of itself barren and unprofitable; but in some places by the industry of the Ploughman, made to yield good corn. But in the middle parts thereof which lie towards the Neccar, little inferior for fruitfulness both of corn and wine, unto any in Germany; besides some silver mines near Wiltberg, and about Puellach, a small Town, such abundance of brass, that the Foundation of the houses seem to be laid upon it.  
It took this name from the Castle of Wirtenberg, the first seat of the Princes of it, as that did from the Intuergi, inhabiting the Dutch side of the Rhine; or the Virthungi, as Beatus Rhenanus thinketh mentioned by Trebellius Gellio in the life of Aurelianus, to which the word Berg being added for a termination, made it first Tuergin-berg, or Virthung-berg, and after Wirtenberg.  
Places of most importance in it, are 1 Stutgard, the Duke's seat, a fair, rich, and populous town, and the chief of the Dukedom; seated in a pleasant and fruitful Plain not far from the Neccar, yielding a quantity of wine almost incredible. 2 Tubingen, on both sides of the Neccar, united into one with a fair stone Bridge. A Town well built, situate in a very rich soil, and finally adorned with an University here founded by Eberhard the first Duke of Wirtenberg, anno 1477. in which Leonardu● Fuchsius that great Herbarist and Restaurator of Physic, was once a Professor of that Faculty. 3 Constat, upon the Neccar also, not far from which on the top of an hill, stands the old Castle of Wirtenberg before mentioned. 4 Wietberg, of great esteem for its Mines of silver. 5 Archingen, inhabited chiefly by Jews. 6 Schorndorf upon the Reems, much resorted to by reason of the hot baths there; as is also 7 Nownburg, on the Entz. 8 Heidenhein, 9 Grieningen, 10 Marbach, of which little memorable. There are also within the limits of this Dukedom many Towns Imperial, as 1 Wimpsen, and 2 Haibrum, on the Neccar. 3 Gepping, upon the river Vils. 4 Weil, 5 Reutling, on the Neccar also, made Imperial by Frederick the 2. anno 1240. otherwise of no great note but for the Paper mills. 6 Esling.  
The first Inhabitants hereof, were the Charitni of Ptolemie, and part of the Intuergi spoken of before, made subject with the rest of these parts to the Almains, after to the French, and finally a member of the great Dukedom of Schwaben. From which dismembered in the time of Henry 4. after the dangerous war raised against him by Duke Rodolphus, advanced by the practice of Pope Hildebrand to the Throne Imperial; it came to have Princes of its own: the first Earl being Conrade in the year 1100, by the grace and favour of the said Emp. Henry. Increased by the addition of the Earldom of Montbelguard and many other accrewments it was made a Dukedom in the person of Eberhard the 6. by Maximilian the 1. anno 1495. The Earls and Dukes whereof follow thus in order: 

The EARLS and DUKES of WIRTENBERG.  
1 Conrade the first Earl  
2 Vlrick, son of Conrade.  
3 John son of Vlrick.  
4 Lewis son of John.  
5 Henry son of Lewis.  
6 Eberhard son of Henry.  
7 Vlrick II. son of Eberhard.  
8 Eberhard II. son of Vlrick.  
1325 9 Vlrick III. son of Eberhard.  
1344 10 Eberhard III. son of Vlric.  
1392 11 Vlric IV. son of Eberhard.  
12 Eberhard IV. son of Vlric.  
1417 13 Eberhard V. son of Eberhard the 4. by his marriage with Henrica, or Henriette, daughter of Henry Earl of Montbelguard, added that Earldom to his house.  
1419 14 Lewis or Ludovick II. son of Eberhard the 5.  
1456 15 Eberhard VI son of Lewis, Founder of the University of Tubingen, created by Maximilian the 1. the first Duke of Wirtenberg, anno 1495. He deceased without issue, anno 1496.  
1496 16 Eberhard VII. son of Vlric, the younger brother of Lewis the 2. succeeded on the death of Eberhard his Cousin German.  
1504 17 Henry the brother of Eberhard the 7.  
1519 18 Vlric V. son of Henry the 2. expulsed out of his Dukedom by Charles the 5. for the sack of Reutling an Imperial City; and his Estate conferred on Ferdinand of Austria, the brother of Charles; but after 15 years' exile, restored to his Dukedom by Philip Landgrave of Hassia. He reform Religion, and liberally endowed the University of Tubingen.  
1550 19 Christopher the son of Vlric the 5. a follower of his Father's steps in Reformation of the Church, and Advancement of Learning.  
1568 20 Ludevick or Lewis III. son of Christopher.  
21 Frederick son of George Earl of Montbelgard the brother of Vlric the 5. made Knight of the Garter by Queen Elizabeth, anno 1597.  
22 John-Frederick son of Frederick the 1.  
23 John-Eberard, eldest son of the former Duke, anno 1649.    
The Revenues of this Duke are supposed to be equal unto those of the Electors Palatine, spoken of before; and were it not for the silver mines in Saxonle, little inferior to those of that Duke. But for provisions of war, (excepting Powder only) he is meanly furnished. A main defect considering the ill terms he stands in with the Imperial Cities, betwixt whom and the house of Wirtenberg, there have been always open wars, or secret jealousies.  
His Arms are Or, 3 Attires of a Stag born Palie-barrie, Sable.  
As for the Marquisate of BADEN, lying on the West side of Schwartzenwald, betwixt it & the Rhine, it is for the most part, except towards those Wolds, a very pleasant and fruitful Country; and much of the same nature, with the rest of Wirtenberg, so called from Baden, a neat Town, where the marquis keeps his seat in Winter: so named from the hot Baths there, as is also Baden (called for distinction sake, the Upper Baden) amongst the Swissers: in which respect the City of Bath in Somersetshire, had anciently the name of Caer-Baden also. Of these Baths it is supposed that there are in this City at the least 300. profitable for many diseases and exulcerate sores, drawing a great resort of people from the neighbouring Countries. This is the chief Town of this Marquisate, from whence the Princes have the Title of Marquesses of Baden. The next to this is 2 Durlach, or Turlach, which gives title to a second branch of this house, called sometimes Marquesses of Durlach only, but commonly the Marquesses of Baden-Durlach. 3 Liebenzel, amongst the hills of Schwartzenwald, famous for hot medicinal Springs. 4 Lichtall, remarkable for a Monastery, the burial place of the first Marquesses. 5 Gerspach, in the very heart of that Mountainous tract. 6 Pfortheim, adjoining to the Wood Hagenscheis, a branch of Schwartzenwald. 7 Rotelen, 8 Badenwile, and 9 Sufenburg, all seated in the Vpper-Baden, being that part hereof which lies next to Brisgow. 10 Milberg, beautified with a fair Castle, the usual retiring place of these Princes in the heats of Summer.  
This Marquisate being also taken out of the great Dukedom of Schwaben was founded in the person of Herman, of Veronae in Italy, who deserving well of the Emperor Henry the 5. was by him settled in some Lands about these parts, anno 1120. and after marrying with the daughter of an Earl of Baden was by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa created the first marquis of Baden, anno 1155. The Estate was after much increased by the addition of the Earldom of Hochberg, and the Appendices thereof, in Schwaben; into which Christopher the 13. marquis hereof, succeeded on the death of his Cousin Philip the last Earl of Hochberg; both Princes descending originally from two brothers: of which the eldest in right of the Lady Judith his wife, was Earl of Hochberg; the second by the favour of the said Frederick Barbarossa, was made marquis of Baden. They were Masters also of many fair Estates in the Lower Palatinate, which the Palatines of the Rhine (as was there said) are since possessed of. Other particulars shall be shown (if occasion be) in the ensuing Catalogue of 

The MARQUESSES of BADEN.  
1253 1 Herman the first marquis.  
2 Herman II.  
3 Herman III.  
4 Herman IU.  
1281 5 Rodulph, son of Herman 4.  
1295 6 Herman V. son of Rodolph.  
7 Rodolph II. son of Herman the 5.  
1356 8 Frederick, son of Rodolph the 2.  
9 Rodolph III. son of Frederick.  
1372 10 Barnard, son of Rodolph.  
1431 11 James son of Barnard.  
1453 12 Charles son of James; the first of these Marquesses which was possessed of the County of Spanheim in the Lower Palatinate, descending on this house by Matild wife of Rodolp the 2.  
1475 13 Christopher son of Charles, who after the death of Philip the last marquis of Hochberg, succeeded also in that estate.  
1515 14 Barnard son of Christ●ph. his brother Ernest succeeding in that of Hochberg.  
15 Christopher II. 
Northgoia.  son of Barnard, his elder brother Philibert, and Philip son of Philebert dying in the life of Barnard.  
16 Edward son of Christopher, intending the sale of his Estates to pay his debts, was forcibly deprived of all by  
17 Ernest marquis of Hochberg, nephew of Ernest above mentioned; who by that means not only preserved the Marquisate of Baden, but united that of Hochberg again unto it; and removed his ordinary seat to Durlach.  
18 George, brother of Ernest, marquis of Baden and Hochberg.  
19 Frederick, the son of George born in the year 1594. succeeded his Father in both Estates; and (if living) hath a son called also Frederick, to enjoy them after him.     

NORTHGOIA, OR The UPPER PALATINATE.  
The Country of NORTHGOIA, so called from the Northern situation of it in regard of Bavaria, is sometimes also called the Palatinate of Bavaria, because anciently belonging to that Estate; but generally Ober Psalts, or the Upper Palatinate, to difference it from the Lower. It is bounded on the East with Bohemia, on the West with Franconia, and part of Schwaben; on the North with Voiteland; and on the South with Bavaria. The Country for the most part somewhat rough and mountainous, rich principally in mines of iron, which it yieldeth in most places, and some of silver about Amberg, extended from Haimbourg to the edge of Bohemia 80 miles, and from the hill Felchtelberg in the edge of Voiteland to Weisenberg near the banks of the Danow 68 miles.  
Observable things touching this Province, are chiefly two. First that out of the Mountain Felchtelberg before mentioned, arise 4 Rivers running to the four quarters of the world; that is to say, the Eager towards the East, the Mein or Moenus towards the West, the Sala or Saltza to the North, and the Nab Nabus to the South, so that it may be probably thought to be the highest hill in all Germany. 2 That in the South-west corner of it are two little Rivers, the one called Abnul which falleth into the Danow, and the other Rednitz which runs into the Mein, and finally into the Rhine: between the heads whereof, being not much distant, Charles the Great once began to dig a Channel for making a passage out of the Rhine into the Danow. In which work he employed many thousand men: but partly by excess of rain, and partly by some strange affrightments (all which they did in the day being undone in the night) he was fain to desist. Some parts of the intended watercourse are to be seen near Wassenburg, spoken of before, which standeth in the middle way betwixt both Rivers.  
Chief places of this Country which belong to the Electoral Family, are 1 Amberg, on the River Vils, enriched chiefly by the commodity of iron digged out of the neighbouring hills, and here fashioned into all sorts of Utensils, and thence conveyed in great abundance to the parts adjoining: but prouder of its mines of silver than those veins of iron, affording to the Prince's Coffers 60000 Crowns yearly. 2 Monheim, in the midst of a fruitful valley, near a wood of Juniper. 3 Newburg, upon the River Swartzach, which gives title to the second branch of the Palatine house, called the Count Palatines of Newburg; competitors with the marquis of Brandenbourg for the Dukedom of Cleveland. 4 Kelhaim, at thee meeting of the Danow, with the river Almul. 5 Cham, on the edge of Bohemia, near the river Regen, which passing thence falleth into the Danow near the City of Regensberg. 6 Castle, where the Electors for the most part hold their Residence, when they are in this Country. 7 Awerbach, 8 Saltsbach, 9 Weiden, 10 Newmarcki.  
There are also in this Country some towns belonging to the Lantgraves of Luchtenberg, one of the four old Lantgraves of the Empire: the other three being Duringen, Hassia, and Alsatia: so called from Luchtenberg an old Castle, situate on a lofty hill not far from Pfriemd, the chief town and ordinary seat of these Lantgraves, seated on the river Nab, 2 Gronsfelden, 3 Schonhuffen, an ordinary pass and baiting-place in the way from Prague to Nurenberg.  
But the chief City of this Country, and perhaps of Germany, is Nurenberg itself, Norimbega in the modern, but Noricum in the ancient Latin. So called from an ancient Castle called Castrum Noricum, the ruins of which are still remaining encompassed with a deep but dry ditch, now of no use nor ornament to the City at all; but reverenced for its antiquity as the mother of Nurenberg. The Castle said by some to be built in the time of Claudius Caesar; more probably by some of the Norici, who terrified with the Invasion of Attila, in the decline and wain of the Roman Empire, relinquished Bavaria, where before they dwelled, and passed over the Danow, there to provide themselves of a safer dwelling. Conquered by the Bavarians, it became together with their Conquerors, subject to the French: in the time of Lewis the 3. it became Imperial, and was walled and fortified during the reign of Charles the 4. From that time it increased so fast both in wealth and beauty, that it is counted the greatest and wealthiest City in all this Continent, there being reckoned in it 11 stone bridges for passage over the river Pegnits, which runneth through it; 12 Conduits of fresh water, 13 common Baths, 116 public Wells, and 128 Streets. Of figure square, environed with a triple wall of 8 miles in circuit, 
Bohemia.  and plentifully stored with all sorts of Ammunition. The Marquesses of Brandenburg in former times were the Burgraves of it, an office of great power and jurisdiction; but sold for a good sum of money by Frederick the 3. anno 1414. Albert, his son attempting to recover the old office again, besieged the town, having no less than 17 Princes on his side, and yet could not force it. That for an Argument of its strength. A proof and evidence of the wealth of it we have seen before, in that great havoc made of their Towns and Villages, and the great ransom they were put to by another Albert, spoken of in Franconia. And it adds much unto the commendation of the people, that this great wealth is gotten by their indefatigable industry: the town being situate on a barren and sandy soil, and destitute of those helps which commonly a navigable. River brings into a City: those great possessions which belong to the State hereof, being gotten out of the fire, as the saying is, by their continual working of iron and other manufactures; occasioning a resort hither of Merchants from all parts of Germany. Other Towns of chief note within this Palatinate, are 1 Altorf, where the Nurenbergers Founded an University for the study of all Arts and Sciences, anno 1575. 2 Erspruck, a great Town and well seated, belonging to the State of Nurenberg also. 3 Eisted (Aichstadium in the Latin) an Episcopal See, situate on the River Almul. 4 Wassenburg, an Imperial City on the borders of Schwaben. Here was also in this Province (if not still remaining) the town of Winsberg, memorable for the piety and gallantry of the women of it. For the Town being besieged and distressed by the Emperor Conrade the 3. for siding against him with the Guelves than Dukes of Bavaria, no other conditions could be gotten at the surrendry of it, but that the women might have leave to depart in safety, and carry all their Jewels with them. Which being obtained they took their husbands on their backs, and so left the Town: and by that noble act so moved the affections and compassion of the angry Prince, that he spared the Town, and gave them all a general pardon. It is said by some, that the odious names of Guelves and Gibelines (with which the peace of Christendom was so long distracted) took their beginning at this siege: the first so called from Guelfo, brother of Henry the Proud, Duke of Bavaria, in whose cause they fought; the other from Veibling, (the French and Italians speak it Gueibling) a Town of Frankenland, in which that Emperor was born. Another original hereof we had in our description of the State of Florence: but I take this to be the more probable of the two, though neither certain.  
The ancient inhabitants here were the Narisci of Tacitus. Afterwards some of the Norici fearful or grown impatient of the Roman yoke, came over the Danubius to them, and built that famous Castle called Castrum Noricum, where now stands Nurenberg. Overpowered by the Boji, and uniting with them in the name of Bojarians they followed the fortunes of Bavaria, till the year 1339. when Ludovick the Emperor and Duke of Bavaria, on the partition of the estate betwixt him and Rodolphus his elder brother, relinquished it for ever to the house of the Palatines. Returned for the present to the Dukes of Bavaria, on whom conferred together with the Electoral dignity by the Emperor Ferdinand the 2. in recompense of the great service done him by Maximilian the now Duke thereof, in the war of Bohemia, and the great charge he had been at in the reduction of that Kingdom to the house of Austria. How long it will continue thus is known only to God the disposer of all things. Yet neither the Bavarians formerly, nor the Palatines since have been so fully Masters of it, but that the Landgrave of Luchetenberg and the City of Nurenberg have put in for a share.  
The Arms of which great and puissant City are Azure, an Harpy displayed, crowned, crined, and armed, Or.   

13. The KINGDOM of BOHEMIA.  
The Kingdom of BOHEMIA, containing Bohemia itself with the incorporate Provinces, is bounded on the East with Poland and Hungary; on the West with the Upper Palatinate, Voiteland, and Misnia; on the North with the Marquisate of Brandenburg, and some part of Misnia; and on the South with Austria and Bavaria. It comprehends in it besides Bohemia itself, the Marquisate of Moravia, with the Dukedoms of Silesia and Lusatia.  
1 BOHEMIA, encompassed about with woody Mountains, part of the Hercynian, is bounded on the East with Moravia, on the West with the Upper Palatinate, and Voiteland; on the North with Misnia, Lusatia, and some part of Silesia; on the South with parts of Bavaria and Austria. It took this name from the Bemi, or Boiemi, the old Inhabitants hereof, of whom more anon: and containing in compass about 550 English miles.  
The soil is indifferently fruitful, and enriched with mines of all sorts, except of gold. Tin they have here in good plenty, the mines whereof were first found out by a Cornish man, banished out of England, anno 1240. which discovery of Tin in these parts, was, as saith my Author, in magnam jacturam Richardi Comitis Cornubiae, (he meaneth that Richard which was afterwards King of the Romans:) and no marvel, for in those times there was no Tin in all Europe, but in England. Wood they have here good store; and in some of their Forests a Beast called Lomie, which hath hanging under its neck a bladder full of scalding water; with which, when she is hunted, she so tortureth the Dogs, that she easily escapeth them. Of corn they have sufficient for their own use, and sometimes also an increase above their spending, wherewith they do supply their neighbours of the Upper Palatinate: but they want wine, the Air here being too sharp and piercing to produce a good Vintage. And it yields also store of Saffron no where to be bettered; with plenty of medicinable drugs.  
The principal Rivers hereof, are 1 the Elb, or Albis, having here its spring; of whose course we have spoken elsewhere, 2 Egra, 3 the Muldaw or Muldavius, and 4 the Warts; all three exonerating themselves into the Elb, which runneth through the midst of the Country.  
The Kingdom is not (as others) divided into Counties and Provinces; but into the Territories and possessions of several Lords; who have great authority and command over their Vassals. The figure of the whole in a manner, Circular, the Diameter whereof reacheth every way some 200 miles: containing in that compass 700 Cities, walled Towns and Castles; and (as some say) 30000 Villages. Inhabited by a people given to drink and gluttony; and yet valiant, and with sense of honour: this last belonging to the Nobility and Gentry; the former to the common people; but more moderately than most others of the Germane Nations. All of them, Princes or Plebeians, rich, poor, noble and base, use the Sclavonian language, as their mother tongue.  
The chief Bohemian Captain that ever I read of, was Zisca; who in eleven battles fought in the defence of the Hussites, against the Pope and his confederates; prevailed and went away victorious: insomuch, that at his death he willed the Bohemians to flay him, and make a drum of his skin; persuading himself, if they so did, they could never be overcome. A fancy like to that of Scipio African, and Vortimer, King of Britain, spoken of before. Scholars of most note, John of Hus, and Hierome of Prague, two eminent Divines, of whom more anon.  
The Christian faith was first here preached by one Borsinous, anno 900, or thereabouts: Borzivoius, the 8 Duke from Crocus was the first Christian Prince; and next to him Wenceslaus the second. This last most cruelly murdered by Boleslaus, his brother, at the instigation of Drahomira, an obstinate Heathen, mother to them both: who having caused the Ministers of the Lord to be butchered, and their bodies to lie unburied for two years together, was swallowed, coach and all, in that very place where their bodies lay. Confirmed by this prodigy, they continued constant in the Faith to this very day; though not without the intermixture of some notable vanity. For one Picardus coming out of the Low-countries, drew a great sort of men and women unto him, pretending to bring them to the same state of perfection, that Adam was in before his fall; from whence they were called Picards, and Adamites. They had no respect unto marriage; yet could they not accompany any woman, until the man coming to Adam, said unto him; Father Adam, I am inflamed towards this woman: and Adam made answer, Increase and multiply. They lived in an Island which they called Paradise, and went stark naked; but they continued not long: for Zisca hearing of them, entered their fool's Paradise, and put them all to the sword, anno 1416. But to make amends for this folly, they were exceeding zealous of the Reformation. For much about the same time the works of Wickliff were brought into Bohemia, by a certain scholar who had been Student in the University of Oxford; which happening into the hands of John Husse, and Hierome of Prague, two men whereof the Country may worthily boast, wrought in their hearts a desire to reform the Church: A business which they prosecuted so earnestly, that being summoned to the Council of Constance, they were there condemned for Heretics, and burned, anno 1414. yet had their doctrine such deep root in the hearts of the people, that it could never be destroyed by the Tyrannies of war or persecutions (though both were used) to this very day, (multitudes of the Professors of it living in this Kingdom under the names of Calistini, and Sub utraque, as before is said) though perfected by the writings of Luther, Melanchthon, Calvin, and such other of the Protestant Doctors as traveled in the work of Reformation.  
The first Inhabitants hereof, of whom there is any good record, were the Benni, whom Pomponius Mela placeth in this tract, with the addition of Gens Magna: By Tacitus they are called Boiemi, who makes them the descendants of those Boii (a gallic nation) who, to avoid the servitude which they feared from Rome, put themselves into these Hercynian deserts; which from them was called Bolohemum, and by which name it occurs in Velleius Paterculus. And though the Marcomanni first, and the Sclaves and Croatians afterwards became masters of it; these last continuing their possession to this very day: yet it retaineth still the name of Bohemia, amongst the Latins; as that of Bohemerland amongst the Dutch.  
Places of most importance in it, are 1 Budweis, (conceived to be the Marobodurum of Ptolemy) a town towards Austria. 2 Augst, near the head of the Elb. 3 Tabor, a strong Town built by Zisca, to be a retreat for the Hussites. 4 Jaromir; and 5 Molmuck, both upon the Elb. 6. Littomissell, an Episcopal See, bordering on Moravia. 7 Pilsen, the last town of this Kingdom which yielded to the prevailing Imperialists, in the late long war about that Crown: and then also betrayed to Count Tilly for a some of money, by some of the Soldiers of Count Mansfield, who was then absent, and had so long defended it against the Enemy. 8 Elbogen, much esteemed for the hot medicinable Baths, situate on the River Egra. 9 Egra, so called of the same River, off which (near to the borders of the Upper Palatinate) it is strongly situate: a large fair City, containing three miles in compass; Imperial once, but sold by the Emperor Ludovicus Baudrus to John, King of Bohemia for 400000 marks of Silver: in compass less, for sweetness of the place, elegancy of the buildings, pleasantness of site, and richness of soil, superior far to Prague itself. 10 Prague, the Metropolis of the Kingdom, situate in the midst thereof, on the River Muldaw: consisting of four several Towns, each of which hath its several Customs, Laws, and Magistrates. The principal is called the Old Town, adorned with many goodly buildings; a spacious Marketplace, and a starely Counsel-house: the second called the New Town, separated from the Old, by a Ditch of great depth, and wideness. The third, called the Little Town, is divided from the Old, by the River Muldaw, joined to it by a beautiful Bridge consisting of 24 Arches: and in this part thereof is the hill Rachine; on the sides of which are many fair and stately houses belonging to the Nobility, over-looked by the strong Castle of S. Wenceslaus (situate on the top thereof) a magnificent Palace, wherein the Bohemian Kings, and the later Emperors have kept their Residence. The fourth town is that of the Jews, who have here five Synagogues, and live according to their own Law. The whole City rather large then fair, the streets being in winter very dirty, of ill smell in the summer; the buildings for the most part of clay and timber, clap up together without Art, and of little beauty. And though encompassed with walls and Ditches, it is conceived to be but an open town (so poor and weak are the defences) insomuch that whosoever is master of the Field, will be master of the City also. And yet besides the honour of being the Royal Seat; it hath also of long time been an Archbishops See, and by Charles the fourth Emperor, and King of Bohemia made an University. Near unto this town was fought that memorable battle, between the Duke of Bavaria, and Count Bucquoy, Lieutenant for the Emperor Ferdinand the second, with 50000 men on the one side; and Frederick newly elected King of Bohemia, with the Prince of Anhalt, the Count of Thurne, and 30000 men on the other side. It was fought on the eight of November, stylo novo, wherein (such was the unsearchable will of God) the victory fell unto the Imperials: the young Prince of Anhalt, Thurne, and Saxon Weimar, with divers others, being taken prisoner; the Bohemian Ordinance all surprised, Prague forced to yield unto the enemy, and King Frederick with the Queen, compelled to fly unto Silesia: a most lamentable and unfortunate loss, not to this people only, but to the whole cause of Reformed Religion: yet is it not unworthy of our observation that this great battle was fought upon a Sunday, the 8 of November, about the time of the morning Prayer: in the Gospel appointed for which day (being the 23 after Trinity Sunday) is that famous passage, Reddite CAESARI, quae sunt CAESARIS, i. e. Render unto Caesar, the things which are Caesar's; which seemed to judge the quarrel on the Emperor's side.  
But whether of the two Pretendents had the juster Cause, may best be seen by convassing the Records of that State and Nation (for the success of War is no standing Rule for measuring the equity, and justice of the causes of it: by which it will be clearly seen, that since the erecting of this Kingdom by the Sclaves or Croatians, it hath been evermore disposed at the will of the Emperor, or by election of the States and People. But I intent not at the present to dispute that point, but only to lay down the story of the Kings and People, as in other places; since the first coming of the Sclavi. A Nation not known by that name till the time of Justinian; at what time they inhabited on the banks of the Ister, but on the further side thereof, opposite to Illyricum and Thrace, imperial Provinces. Grown famous by their good successes against that Empire, their name was taken up by the rest of the Sarmatians of Europe; who either wanting room, or not liking of their colder Countries, passed on more Westwards: and by degrees possessed themselves of those parts of Germany, which formerly had been inhabited by the Almans, Burgundians, and Boiarians; but were then either quite forsaken, or but ill inhabited by the drawing down of those people to the Roman Provinces, which they better liked. Divided at, or after their coming thus far west, into four main bodies; that is to say, the Winithi, possessed of the (now) Marquisates of Brandenbourg, Misnia, and Lusatia, as also of the Durkedomes of Mecklenburg and Pomerania; the Moravians, inhabiting in Moravia, the Lower Austria, and the Upper Hungary; the Poles, possessed of Poland, and the Dukedom of Silesia; and finally the Bohemian Sclaves, confined within the limits of that Kingdom only. Under what form of Government they lived at their first coming hither, is not certainly known: but being settled in these Countries of Poland and Bohemia: it was not long before they were erected into several Kingdoms, occasioned by the coming of a new body of Sclaves, Croatians, and others of those scattered Nations, under the conduct of Zechius, a great Prince amongst them, who about the year 640. together with his brother Leches was banished Croatia for a murder. And being very acceptable to the Sclaves of Bohemia, who looked upon him as a Prince of their own Original extraction, one of the same Language, Laws or Customs that themselves were of, they admitted him to be their Chief, or supreme Governor, by what soever name he was called at first: in honour and memory of whom, the Bohemians in their own language do call themselves Zechians. After his death, the State relapsed again into a confused Anarchy, till the year 670. at what time not respecting the Progeny of Zechius, the founder of their Commonwealth and first estate, they fastened upon Crocus, a man of good esteem amongst them, and elected him to be their Duke. Crocus vir justus, & magnae apud Bohemos opinionis Princeps electus est, as Bertholdus telleth us. Crocus being dead, the Bohemians elected Libussa, his youngest daughter; and of her government soon wearied, they made choice of Primislaus for their Prince, and made him husband to Libussa. A man taken from the Plough (as their stories tell us) to espouse the Princess: it being ordered and agre●● on by her many Suitors, that he (whosoever he was) before whom an horse purposely let loose did first make a stand, should be the Husband of the Lady, and have the government of the State. The Horse first makes a stand before Primislaus, being then at plough (having perhaps some Mare in his Teeme▪) and he accordingly is received and admitted their Prince. These with the other Dukes from the time of Crocus the first Legislator of the Bohemians, take in order thus.  

The DUKES of BOHEMIA.  
1 Crocus, the Lawgiver or Lycurgus of Bohemia.  
2 Libussa, youngest daughter to Crocus, with Primislaus her husband (a second Quinctius) Founder of Prague.  
3 Neramislaus, son of Primislaus and Libussa.  
4 Mnoatha, one of the sons of Neramislaus, Cotemporary with Charles the Great.  
5 Voricius, son of Mnatha.  
6 Wenceslaus.  
7 Bela.  
8 Nastricius son of Bela.  
9 Bozzivoius, the first Christian Prince of the Bohemians: Contemporarie with the Emperor Arnulph.  
10 Sbitignaeus, son to Bozzivoius.  
11 Vladislaus, brother to Sbitignaeus.  
12 Wenceslaus II. surnamed the Saint, slain by his brother Boleslaus.  
13 Boleslaus, a wicked and ungodly Prince.  
14 Boleslaus II. son of the former, a great advancer of Christianty amongst hi● people.  
15 Boleslaus III. one of the sons of Boleslaus the second.  
16 Jaromir, son to Boleslaus the third.  
17 Vdalricus, brother of Boleslaus the third, and Uncle of Jaromir.  
18 Predislaus, son to Vdalricus.  
19 Sbitignaeus II. son to Predislaus.  
1061 20 Vratislaus, brother of Sbitignaeus, whom for his manifold deferts, the Emperor Henry the 4. created the first King of Bohemia, anno 1608. whose Successors take thus out of Bertholdus and Dubravius.   

The KINGS and DUKES of BOHEMIA.  
A. Ch.  
1086 1 Vratislaus, the brother of Spitignaeus, Duke of Bohemia, was by Henry the 4. at Metz created King.  
2 Conrade, brother to Vratislaus, notwithstanding that his brother had 3 sons, was elected Duke of Bohemia.  
3 Brecislaus, son to Vratislaus, the two sons of Conrade being rejected, is by the Bohemians chosen Duke.  
1100 4 Borivorius the 4. son of Brecislaus, is chosen by the Bohemians, his eldest brothers than all living.  
1109 5 Sutopulcus, Cousin german to Borivorius, by the consent and favour of the people, deposed Borivorius, and caused himself to be elected in his place.  
6 Vladislaus II. brother to Borivorius, preferred by the people to the throne, before Otho the brother, and Henry the son of Sutopulcus, the last Prince.  
7 Sobeslaus, brother to Vladislaus, promoted to the State before the son of Vladislaus.  
1159 8 Vladislaus III. son of Vladislaus the 2. (the four sons of Sobeslaus omitted) is chosen and crowned the second King of Bohemia by Frederick the Emperor, but deposed by the States, because he was not by them formerly elected, according to their privileges and customs.  
9 Vldericus the third son of Sobeslaus, his elder brethren yet living, was by the people elected in the room of Vladislaus and his son Frederick: whom the Emperor Frederick had by force established in the throne.  
10 Sobeslaus II. second son to Sobeslaus, was by Frederick above named expelled; and he also by the Bohemians.  
11 Conrade, Grandchild to Otho the brother of Sutopulcus, elected by the Bohemiam in place of Frederick: between which two Princes there was continual war.  
12 Wenceslaus, Uncle unto Conrade, and son of Otho aforesaid, was preferred before many nearer the succession. Him Primislaus expelled; but fearing his return, quitted Prague.  
13 Henry Bishop of Prague, a stranger to the blood, was by a general consent elected Duke.  
14 Vladislaus IV. brother to Primislaus the son of Wenceslaus, being put by, succeeded Henry, and soon after resigned.  
1199 15 Primislaus, elected by the Bohemians, and by the Emperor Philip, crowned the 3. King of Bohemia at Mentz, was brother to Vladi●laus the 4.  
1248 16 Ottocarus, notwithstanding that Winceslaus his elder brother had been crowned in his Father's life time, was acknowledged King. He was slain in battle by Rodolphus the Emperor.  
1278 17 Wences●aus II. son to Ottocarus.  
1284 18 Wenceslaus III. son to Wenceslaus the last of the Bohemian Princes of the masculine race.  
1304 19 Rodolphus, son to the Emperor Albertus, is by the potency of his Father, and the election of the States seated on the Throne, being otherwise a stranger to the blood-royal of Bohemia.  
1305 20 Henry Duke of Carinthia, husband to Anne the second daughter of Wenceslaus the 2. is chosen by the Bohemians: but being weary of his Government, they elect John Earl of Luxenbourg. Finally, Henry was murdered by one of his Nephews.  
1311 21 John Earl of Luxenbourg, son to Henry the 7. Emperor and husband to Elizabeth youngest daughter to Wenceslaus the 2. is elected, the Lady Anne yet living.  
1346 22 Charles son to John, and Emperor of that name the 4. the Author of the Golden Bull.  
1362 23 Wenceslaus IV. Emperor, also in whose time the troubles of the Hussites, and the valour of Zisca was famous.  
1418 24 Sigismond, brother to Wenceslaus, maketh himself King by force, and at his death commendeth Albertus' Duke of Austria, the huband of his daughter Elizabeth, unto the States of the Kingdom.  
1437 25 Albertus' Duke of Austria elected upon the commendation of Sigismond by the Bohemian Lords.  
1440 26 Ladislaus, son to Albert, who being the brother of two sisters, commended yet one George Pogibrachius unto the States as fittest to succeed him.  
1458 27 George Pogibrachius, neither by affinity or consanguinity of the blood, succeeded. And he though he had three sons, yet for the benefit of his Country, he advised the Nobles after his death to elect their King from Poland.  
1471 28 Ladislaus II. son to Casimire King of Polund, and to Elizabeth, the younger daughter of Albert Duke of Austria, the issue of Anne the elder sister still living; elected King of Bohemia.  
1516 29 Ludovicus son to Ladislaus, elected and crowned by the means of his Father, then living, King of Hungary also.  
1526 30 Ferdinand, Archduke of Austria, brother to Charles the 5. and husband to Anne sister to Ludovicus, by his letters reversal, acknowledged that he was chosen King of Bohemia not of any right, but of mere freewill, according to the liberties of that Kingdom.  
1565 31 Maximilian eldest son of Ferdinand, was in his Father's life time, and at his suit, elected King, anno 1540 into which he actually succeeded on his Father's death.  
1575. 32 Rodolphus Emperor of Germany, and eldest son to Maximilian, elected King.  
1608 33 Mathias brother to Rodolphus, was at the joint suit of them both, nominated and appointed King of Bohemia by the general consent of the States, during his brother's life time, anno viz. 1608. which denomination they both protest in their letters reversal, should not be to the prejudice of the liberties and ancient customs of that kingdom.  
1618. 34 Ferdinand II. Archduke of Austria, of the house of Grats, was by Mathias adopted for his son, and declared Successor to the Crown of Bohemia, but never formally and legally elected: for which cause amongst others, he was by the States rejected in like case as Vladislaus the 3. had formerly been.  
1619 35 Frederick elector Palatine, the strongest Germane Prince of the Calvinists, and most potent by his great alliances; was elected King of Bohemia, and crowned at Prague, together with his wife, on the 5 day of November. This Prince derived his descent from the Lady Sophia, sister to Ladislaus the 2. King of Poland and Bohemia; and married Elizabeth, daughter to James King of Great Britain, and Anne of Denmark, which Anne descended from the Lady Anno daughter of Albertus of Austria, and elder sister to Elizabeth, mother to Ladislaus the 2. above named; from whom the claim of Austria is derived.  
1621. 35 Ferdinand III. son of Ferdinand the 2. elected King of Bohemia during the life both of his Father and of Frederick, the Prince Elect●ur also; after whose death he succeeded in this kingdom both in right and fact; King of Hungary also, Archduke of Austria, and Emperor of Germany, now living, anno 1648. more moderate in his Counsels then his Father Ferdinand, and more inclinable to peace; (though honoured with a more signal victory against the Swedes in the battle of Norlingen, than his Father was in all his life;) 
Moravia.  which the Conclusions made at Munster are sufficient proof of.   
Of the Revenues, Arms, and other things which concern this Kingdom, we shall speak hereafter, when we have took a view of the rest of the Provinces which are incorporated into it.  
2 MORAVIA is bounded on the East with Hungary, on the West with Bohemia, on the North with Silesia, and on the South with the lower Austria, and the river Teia: fenced on the West by the Woods and Mountains of Bohemia, parts of the Hireynian Forest; on the North by some spurs or branches of it called Ascibu●gius by Ptolemie, on the two other sides open like an half moon, or semicircle. The most fruitful place of corn in all Germany, and hath no small store of Frankincense, which contrary to the nature of it, groweth not on a tree, but out of the earth: and that too (which adds much to the miracle, if Dubravius do report it rightly) in the shape and figure of those parts which men and women do most endeavour to conceal.  
The former inhabitants of this Province were the Marcomanni, and part of the Quadi, against whom, when M. Antonius the Emperor made war, he had unawares run himself into such a strait that his army was environed with Mountains one way, and enemies the other. To this (as calamities seldom go alone) was added the extraordinary heat and drought then being. To the Emperor thus put to his plunges, came the Captain of his Guard, telling him that he had in his army a legion of Christians (Melitens he calleth them) which by prayer to their own God could obtain any thing. The Emperor sendeth for them, desiring them to make supplication for the Army; which they did, and God almighty that never turneth a deaf ear to the prayers of his servants, when they are either for his glory, the Churches, or their own good, scattered and vanquished the Quadi with thundershot and artillery from heaven, and refreshed the faint and dying Romans with many a gentle and pleasing shower. This miracle purchased to that legion the surname of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. the thunderer; and induced the Emperor to honour men of that holy profession, and to make an end of the fourth persecution, A. Ch. 174. Thus Xiphilinus hath it in his Dion; which coming from the pen of an Heathen, as his Author was, is of more credit in a matter of such concernment un to Christianity then if it had proceeded from Socrates, Sozomen, or any other Ecclesiastical Writer.  
Places of most note herein, are 1 Olmunts, on the River Marck (or Mora) the chief town of the Country, and a small University, near which out of the hill Odenberg bordering on Silesia, springeth the great river of Odera, whose course we have before described. 2 Brinn, on the river Schwats, the seat of the ancient Marquesses. 3 Radisch, and 4 Cremser, both upon the Marck or Mora. 5 Zwaim on the Teia; 6 Niclasberg (Mons Nicolai in the Latin) bordering on the Lower Austria. 7 Iglaw, 8 Newberg, 9 Weiskorchem, 10 Boserlitz, of which little memorable. 11 Gradisco, near to which (and to this place only) the Frankincense is found to grow in the shape and form before mentioned.  
The old Inhabitants hereof (as before is said) were the Marcomanni and the Quadi; after them that Tribe or Nation of the Sclaves, who from their habitation on the river Mora, called themselves Moravians, and the Country which they dwelled in by the name of Moravia (the Dutch call it Merherens.) Extended at that time over all the Lower Austria, to the banks of the Danow on the South, and as far as to the river Tibiscus● (over spreading a great part of the Vppet Hungary) towards the East. Governed at the first by their own Kings, the first, whose name occurs, being Raslai, in the time of the Emperor Lewis the Godly, by whom taken Prisoner, and his Realm made Tributary to the Empire. After him succeeded Harmodurus, and then Suantopulcus, in whose time the Moravians and other Nations of the Sclaves, received the Gospel, by the preaching of Cyril and Methodius two Grecian Doctors: officiating all divine services in the Sclavonian or vulgar Language. For which being after called in question by one of the Popes, they returned no other answer then this (and enough in that) Omnis Spiritus laudet Dominum. It is written that every thing which hath breath should praise the Lord. Suantobegius son to Suantopuleus, succeeded next, deposed or rather beaten out of his Country by the Emperor Arnulph, for denying the accustomed tribute. A Prince of great spirit, and of as great command, having at one time under him, not Moravia only, according to the largest limits, but Silesia, Bohemia, and Polonia also. Arnulph not able otherwise to effect his purpose, called in the Hungarians (though at that time Pagans) by whose help the Moravian was subdued, and his Kingdom shattered into pieces; seized on by the Hungarians, Poles, and other Nations: and finally reduced to the present limits. Afterwards it was made a Marquisate, (but by whom we find not) one of the Marquesses hereof being Jodocus Barbatus, elected Emperor anno 1410. After whose death Sigismond his next heir, Emperor and King of Bohemia, gave it to his son-in-law Albert Duke of Austria, anno 1417. who in the end succeeded him in all his Estates, since which time it hath always gone along with the Crown of Bohemia.  
The Arms of the old Dukes or Princes of it, were Azure, an Eagle checkered Or and Gules, membered and languid of the same.  
2 SILESIA, (or SCHLESI, as the Dutch call it, is bounded on the East with Poland, on the West with Lusati●a, on the North with Brandenburg, and on the South with Moravia. Wholly encompassed with Mountains, except towards the North; which lets in a sharp air upon them: 
Lusatia.  the midland parts being full of Woods, but withal of Minerals.  
Chief Cities are Jagendorse, or Jegerndorse, of late the Patrimony of John Georgius of the family of Brandenbourg, commonly called the marquis of Jagendorse. The lands and Estates in his possession, first given by Ladislaus King of Bohemia, to George surnamed Pius, one of the sons of Frederick of Brandenbourg, the first marquis of Auspach of this house, for the many good services he had done him. But his posterity being extinct, they fell to the said John Georgius, brother to Sigismond the elector: proscribed by Ferdinand the second, for adhering to the party of Frederick Prince Elector Palatine: A Prince of great note and activeness, in the beginning of the late Germane & Bohemian wars. 2 Munsterberg, which gives the title of Duke to the posterity of George Pogebraccio, once King of Bohemia advanced by him unto this honour and a fair Estate. 3 Glatz or Gletz, the last Town of Bohemia, which held out for Frederick the elector against that Emperor. 4 Glogaw, a strong Town on the River Odera. 5 Niess, on a River so named, an Episcopal See. 6 Breslaw, in Latin Vratislavia, so called from Vratislaus, the founder of it, once one of the Dukes of this Province, by whose procurement it was made an Episcopal See, anno 970, or thereabouts. It is situate on the River Odera, all the water wherein could not save it from being burnt down to the ground, anno 1341. but it was presently re-edified with fair Free strone, and is now one of the prettiest Cities (for the bigness of it) in all Germany: fair, populous, and well contrived with open and even streets; the chief of the Country. 7 Oppolen, on the Odera also, well fortified both by Art and nature, barricadoed by the River on the West, and on the East with good outworks, strong walls, and a fair Castle. 8 Straten, 9 Reichenbach, both made Towns of war, since the beginning of the Bohemian troubles.  
There are also within this Province the two Seigneuries of Priguitz, and Crossen, so called from the chief Towns thereof, belonging to the elector of Brandenbourg: the two Dukedoms of Oswitz and Zator, appertaining to the Crown of Poland: as also the Dukedom of Lignitz, and Sue inits, all of them bearing the names of their principal Towns; of which two last, Sueinits is in the immediate possession of the Kings of Bohemia, and Lignitz hath a Duke of its own, but an Homager and Tributary of that King.  
The first two Inhabitants hereof were the Marsigni, Burii, Gothini, and some part of the Quadi. In the partition of the Eastern parts of Germany amongst the Sclaves, laid unto the Dukedom or Kingdom of Poland; continuing part thereof till the time of Vladislaus the second, who being driven out of his Kingdom by his brethren, was by the mediation of Frederick Barbarossa, estated in this Country, to be held under the Sovereignty of the Kings of Poland. Divided betwixt his three sons, and afterwards subdivided amongst their posterities according to the ill custom of Germany, it became broke at last into fourteen Dukedoms, of 1 Breslaw, 2 Oppolen, 3 Ratibor, 4 Cessin, 5 Bethom, 6 Glogaw, 7 Segan, 8 Olents, 9 Steinaw, 10 Falkenbourg, 11 Sweinits, 12 Lignitz, 13 Oswits●, and 14 Zator. Of all which only the two last do remain to Poland; the five first being made subject to the Kings of Bohemia, by Wenceslaus the second, the five next by King John of Luxenbourg; Lignitz remaining in the possession of a Proprietary Duke (as before was said) and Sweinits given to Charles the fourth Emperor and King of Bohemia, by the will and Testament of Boleslaus the last Duke: all Schlesi by this means, (except the two Dukedoms of Oswitz and Zator) being added to the Crown of Bohemia: of which it is rather an incorporate then a subject Province.  
4. LUSATIA, by the Dutch called Lausnitz is bounded on the East with Silesia, on the West with Misnia, on the North with Brandenbourg, and on the South with Bohemia. The country rough and full of Woods, yet plentiful enough of corn, and of such fruits as naturally arise out of the earth: So populous and thick set with people, that though it be but a little Province, it is able to arm 20000 Foot, as good as any in Germany. Most commonly it is divided into the Higher and the Lower; the first confining on Bohemia, the last on Brandenburg.  
Places of most note in the higher Lausnitz, are 1 Bautsen, (Badissinum the Latins call it) the first Town attempted and taken in by the Duke of Saxony, when he took upon him the execution of the Emperors Bann, against Frederick Elector Palatine, then newly chosen King of Bohemia: The poor Prince in the mean time in an ill condition, the Saxon being the head of the Lutheran; and the Bavarian chief of the Popish party, arming both against him: So jealous are both sides of the active and restless Calvinian spirit; as to leave no means unassaied for the suppressing of it. Seated it is upon the Spre, and for the most part is the seat of the Governor for the King of Bohemia. 2 Gorlitz, upon the River Nisse, which gave the title of Duke to John brother of Sigismond Emperor and King of Bohemia, and Father of Elizabeth the last Duchess of Luxembourg, before it fell into the hands of the Duke's o● Burgundy. A fine neat Town, well frequented, and strongly fortified: founded about the year 1231. and not long after so consumed by a merciless fire, anno 1301. ut ne unica domus remanserit, as my Author hath it, that there was not one house left of the old foundation. But it was presently rebuilt in a more beautiful form, and more strong materials, then before it was: both public and private buildings very neat and elegant. 3 Zittaw, on the same River bordering on Bohemia. 4 Lauben, 5 Lubben, 6 Camitz, of which little memorable, but that together with the former they make up those six towns which are confederate together in a stricter league, for their mutual defence and preservation, but under the protection, and with the approbation of the Kings of Bohemia. Then in the LOWER Lusatia there is 7 Sprenberg, so named from its situation on the River Spre, which runneth through the whole Country, and in ancient times was called Suevus, supposed by some (and not improbably) either to give name to the Suevians, or to take it from them; 
Brandenbourg.  that potent Nation, inhabiting originally betwixt this and the Elb. 6 Trabeli upon the Nisse. Cotthuse upon the Spre, or Suevus, which together with some part of the Lower Lusatia belongs unto the Marquesses of Brandenbourg.  
The first Inhabitants hereof are by some supposed (and but supposed) to be the Sonones of Tacitus; in the partition of these parts of Germany amongst the Selaves, made subject to the Winithi, or Venedi, the greatest and most spreading Nation of all these People. When, and by whom first made a Marquisate, I am not able to say for certain; but sure I am it hath been very much given to the change of Masters. It had first a marquis of its own. Conrade the marquis hereof, who died in the year 1156. being by the Emperor Henry the fifth made marquis of Misnia, added it unto that Estate: remaining for some time united to it. After, being seized on by the Poles, it was sold by Frederick the second, marquis and elector of Brandenbourg: who keeping Co●thouse and some other Towns bordering next upon him, in his own possession, surrendered the rest on composition to George King of Bohemia: claiming it from a Grant made by Henry the fourth to Vratislaus the first Bohemian King, anno 1087. A grant on which no possession followed, unless it were the Homage and acknowledgement of the Princes of it, holding it afterwards of that Crown, as the Lord in chief.  
Thus have we brought these four Provinces into the power and Possession of the Kings of Bohemia: remaining still distinct in their Laws and Governments (as several limbs of the great body of the Sclaves, made up into one Estate) though joined together in the person of one supreme Governor: who is severally admitted and acknowledged by each Province distinctly, for itself; and not by any one of them in the name of the rest. Out of all which so laid together, there may be raised the sum of three millions of Crowns yearly, for the King's Revenues, towards the defrayment of all charges.  
The Arms of this Kingdom are Mars, a Lion with a forked tail, Luna, crowned Sol. Which Arms were first given by Frederick Barbarossa to Vladislaus the third, made by him King of Bohemia, in regard of the good service he had done him at the siege of Milan. And though Vladislaus was deposed by the States of that Kingdom, because never formally and legally elected by them: yet his successors keep those Arms to this very day.   

14. BRANDENBOUR.  
The Marquisate of BRANDENBOURG, is bounded on the East with the Kingdom of Poland; on the West with Mecklenbourg and the Dukedom of Lunebourg on the North with Pomerania, and on the South with Misnia, Lusatia, and Silesia; so called from Brandenbourg the chief Town of it, and because once the Marches of the Empire against the Sclaves, divided afterwards into the Old, the New, and the Middle Marches, according as they were extended further towards Poland by little and little, as the Emperors were able to get ground of those potent people.  
The Country containeth in length from East to West 60 Dutch or 240 Italian miles, and is of correspondent breadth; the whole compass making up 540 miles of the last account. Within which tract are comprehended 55 Cities or walled Towns, 80 Towns of trade, Mark-stecken, or Market Towns, as they commonly call them; 38 Castles or Mansion-houses of Noblemen, 17 Monasteries, and 10 Parks well stored with beasts of game: the Country otherwise (considering the extent thereof) but thinly inhabited, nor well provided of necessaries, excepting corn, of which these North-East Countries afford very great plenty.  
1 ALTEMARK, or the OLD MARCK, so called because the ancient Marches of the Empire against the Sclaves, lieth betwixt Lawenbourg and the Elb, with which it is bounded on the East. Chief Towns thereof, 1 Tangermond, on the Elb, where it receives the River Tonagra, or Augra, honoured sometimes with the Residence of Charles the fourth. 2 Stendall, the chief of these Old Marches. 3 Soltwedel, divided into two Towns, the old and the new. 4 Gurdeleben, fortified with the strong Castle of Eishimpe. 5 Osterberg. 6 Senhun●en, said by some but falsely to be so called from the Senones, whom they would make the old Inhabitants of this Country (by all good Writers made to be originally a gallic Nation.) 7 Werb, of which little memorable.  
In the MIDDLE-MARCHES or UPPER MARCH, lying betwixt the Elb and the River Odera; the Towns of most note are 1 Butzaw, a Commendatarie of the Templars in former times. 2 Spandaw upon the Spre, a well fortified piece. 3 Oderburg, called so from that River, on which it is situate: remarkable for a strong Castle built by marquis Albert the second, at which all passengers by water, are to pay their Toll. 4 Brandenbourg on the River Havel, a Bishops See, the Seat of the Lords Marchers in former times, taking name from hence. By some said to be built by Brennus' Captain of the Gauls; more truly by one Brando a Prince of the Franconians, anno Ch. 140. 5 Frankefort (for distinction sake named) ad Oderam, on which River situate; the soil about it being so plentifully stored with Corn and Wines, that it is not easy to affirm whether Bacchus or Ceres be most enamoured of it. It was made an University by marquis Joachim, anno 1506. and is also a flourishing and famous Emporie, though not comparable to that of the other Franckefort seated on the Mien. 6 Berlin, the ordinary Residence of the marquis situate on the River Spre, (or Suevus) which rising in Lusatia falleth into the Albis. 7 Havelbourg on the River Havel, a Bishops See, who acknowledgeth the Archbishop of Magdebourg for his Metropolitan.  
3. In the NEWMARCK, extending from Odera to the borders of Poland; and called so, because last conquered, and added to the account of the Germane Empire, there is Custrine, a very strong and defensible town, seated on the two Rivers Warts and Odera; fortified with great charge by John, son of marquis Joachim, and by him intended for his seat. 2 Sunnerberg; and 3 Landsberg, both upon the Wa●t. 4 Soldin, in former times the chief of this Marck. 5 Berlinch, or New Berlin: and 6 Falkenberg, a strong town, and fortified with as strong a Castle towards Pomerania.  
The first inhabitants of this Country, were the Varini and Naithones, part of the great nation of the Suevians: and after them, the Helvoldi, Wilini, Beirani, and other Tribes of the Winithi, the greatest nation of the Sclaves, who possessed themselves of it. But Brandenbourg being won from them by the Emperor Henry the first, anno 920. (at what time the Gospel was first preached amongst them) the Country hereabouts was given by him to Sigifride, Earl of Ringelheim, (eldest son of Theodorick the second Earl of Oldenburg) a valiant Gentleman, with the title of marquis, or Lord Marcher, anno 927. conditioned that he should defend those Marches (the old Marck, as they now call it) against the Sclaves. These Marquesses at the first Officiary, and at the appointment of the Emperor, and to him accountable. Sigard the fourth from Sigefride, governing here for Otho the third, was the first elector of these Marquesses; and Eudo the second of that name, and third from Sigard, the last that held this honour at the Emperor's pleasure: that dignity after his decease being made Hereditary in the person of Albert of Anhalt, surnamed Vrsus, by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, which Albert having very much enlarged his border by the conquest and extermination of the Sclaves, caused their unpeopled Country to be planted with new Dutch Colonies out of Holland, Zealand, Flanders, and those parts of the Netherlands. The house of this Albert being extinct in John the fourth, it was given by the Emperor Lewis of Bavaria, to Lewis his son; by Otho, the brother of that Lewis, sold for 200000 Ducats unto Charles the fourth, by Sigismond, the son of Charles to jodocus, marquis of Moravia: but afterwards being redeemed again, it was by the said Sigismond conferred on Frederick Burgrave of Nurenberg, in recompense of his faithful service in the wars of Hungary and Bohemia. In his posterity it remaineth, but much increased in power and patrimony, by the additions of the Dukedom of Prussia, Cleve, Gulick, and Berg, the Marquisates of Auspach and jagendorfe; the Earldom of Marck in Wesiphalen, now a part of Cleveland; the Lordships of Prignits and Crossen in Silesia, the towns of Hoff, and Colmebach in Voiteland, with the County of Rapine, and the town and territory of Cothus in the Lower Lusatia. Insomuch that this is now the most powerful Family in all Germany. The Marquesses hereof from Albert, the son of Vrse, follow in this order.  

The MARQUESSES of BRANDENBURG.  
A. Ch.  
927 1 Sigifride, Earl of Ringelheim, made the first marquis of this border, by the Emperor Henry the first.  
2 Gero, by the appointment of Otho the first.  
3 Bruno, Earl of Within, created marquis hereof by the same Emperor.  
4 Hugh, the son of Bruno, by the favour of Otho the third.  
5 Sigard, the brother of Hugh, made by the same Emperor, the first marquis Elector.  
6 Theodorick, the son of Sigard, outed of his command by Mistivoius, one of the Princes of the Sclaves, named Obotriti.  
7 Vdo, Earl of Soltwedel (the Sclaves being beaten and expulsed) created marquis and Elector by Conrade the second.  
8 Vdo II. son of Vdo the first, proscribed by Henry the fourth for joining with Rodulph Duke of Schwaben in the war against him.  
9 Primislaus, King of the Obotriti (the Ancestor of the Dukes of Mecklinbourg) advanced unto these honours by the said Henry the fourth, and by him held unto his death. After which, made hereditary by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, in the person of Albert of Anhalt, the son of Vrsus.  
1152 10 Albert of Anhalt, the first Hereditary marquis; father of Barnard, who was created Elector and Duke of Saxony, in the place of Henry surnamed the Lion, by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa.  
11 Otho, son of Albert.  
12 Otho II. son of Otho the first.  
13 Albert II. brother of Otho the second.  
14 John, son of Albert the second.  
15 John II. son of John the first.  
16 Conrade, brother of John the second.  
17 John III. son of Conrade.  
18 Waldemar, brother of John the third.  
19 Waldemar II. Nephew of Waldemar the first by his brother Henry.  
20 John IV. brother of Waldemar the second, the last marquis of the house of Anhalt; the Marquisate escheating to the Empire for want of heirs.  
21 Lewis of Bavaria created marquis and Elector of Brandenbourg by his 〈◊〉 the Emperor Lewis of Bavaria, on the said escheat.  
22 Lewis II. surnamed the Roman, on the resignation of his brother succeeds in the Marquisate and Electoral dignity.  
23 Otho, brother to Lewis the first and second, who sold the Marquisate, and Electoral dignity to Charles the fourth.  
24 Wenceslaus, son of Charles the fourth, afterwards King of Bohemia, and Emperor of the Romans.  
25 Sigismond, brother of Wenceslaus, Emperor of the Romans, King of Hungary and Bohemia, Earl of Luxenbourg; who sold this Marquisate to jodocus, marquis of Moravia; and having afterwards redeemed it, conferred the same on  
1417 26 Frederick Burgrave of Nurenberg, solemnly invested herein at the Council of Constance, anno 1414. for which investiture he paid unto the Emperor the sum of 400000 Crowns.  
1440 27 Frederick II. son of Frederick the first, to whom the Emperor Frederick the third gave the Dukedom of Pomeren.  
1470 28 Albert, brother of Frederick the second, called the Achilles of Germany, relinquished to Bugeslaus the 10th. the possession of Pomeren, but his successors ever since have retained the Title, and kept on foot their pretensions to it. From Frederick his second son, descended Albert, the first Duke of Prussia, Frederick the first marquis of Auspach, George the first marquis of Jagendorfe, and Albert called the Alcibiades of Germany, who so harassed Franconia in the days of Charles the fifth.  
1486 29 John, son of Albert.  
1499 30 Joachim, son of John, who founded the University of Frankford, anno 1506. and authorized the Reformation of Religion in his time begun.  
1535 31 Joachim TWO son of Joachim the first.  
1571 32 John-George, son of Jocahim the second.  
33 Joachim-Frederick, son of John-George.  
34 John Sigismond, son of Joachim Frederick, who had to wife the Lady Anne, daughter of Albert-Frederick, the second Duke of Prussia, and of Mary Eleanor his wife, eldest daughter of William the first, Duke of Cleve, Gulick, etc.  
1620 35 George-William, son of John Sigismond, and the Lady Anne, claiming in her right, the Dukedoms of Cleve, Gulick, and Berg, the Earldoms of Marck, and Ravenspurg, and the signory of Ravenstein; which he possessed a while, divided with his cousin Volfgangus Palatine of Newberg, son of Magdalen the younger sister of Mary Eleanor. But falling out about their partage, the Palatine of Newberg called in the Spaniard; and this marquis the Confederate States of the Netherlands; who have hitherto shared the most part betwixt them. After the death of Bugeslaus the last Duke of Pomerania, he was to have succeeded also in that estate, then possessed by the Swedes. Of the agreement made between them, and the great accrewment thereby following to the house of Brandenburg, we shall speak more there.  
36 Frederick-William, son of George-William, now Elector of Brandenbourg.   
The Religion of this Country, is for the most part according to the form and doctrine of Luther: first introduced and authorised by marquis Joachim the first. In which estate it continued till the breach betwixt the present Elector, and the Palatine of Newberg. At which time the Palatine having married a daughter of Bavaria, the most potent Prince of the Popish party, reconciled himself to the Church of Rome, the better to assure himself of the aid of Spain: and this Elector having married a sister of Frederick the fifth, Elector Palatine, the most potent Prince of the Calvinians, declared himself to be of that party and opinion, the better to assure himself of the aids of Holland, anno 1614 But when, on the persuasions of his wife, he set out an edict for suppressing the Lutheran forms, and authorising the Calvinian only throughout his dominions, (which was the year 1615) the people of this Marquisate rose in Arms against him: the difference being thus composed, that the Lutheran forms only should be used in the Churches of Brandenburg, for the contentation of the people: and the marquis have the exercise of his new Religion, for himself, his Lady, and those of their opinion, in his private Chappells.  
The Territories of this Family, are the greatest as before is said, of any in Germany; but a great part of it is very barren, and his subjects in those parts as poor as the Country: much of his new accessions yielding little but the titles only. So that neither in Revenue or Power he is able to keep rank with the Duke of Saxony: his ordinary Revenue hardly amounting at the utmost to 200000l. per annum, which is but half of the receipts of the Duke of Saxony.  
The Arms hereof are Argent, an Eagle Gules, membered and beaked Or.   

15 POMERANIA. 
Pomerania.   
POMERANIA is bounded on the East with Prussia, from which parted by the River Wesel or Vistula; on the west with Mecklenburg, divided from it by the River Bartze; on the North with the Baltic Sea, extended on the Coast hereof for the space of 200 English miles, and on the South with the Marquisate of Brandenbourg, so named from the Pomortzi, or Pomerani, a nation of the Sclaves, to whose share it fell; or from the situation of it on the Sea shore, as the word in the Sclavonian doth seem to import.  
The Country is for the most part plain, abundantly fruitful in Corn, carried hence to Dantzig, and transported thence to all parts of Christendom, in their times of scarcity, yielding also good store of pasturage, and great herds of cattle; with plenty of butter, cheese, honey, and some reasonable quantities of flax. Populous, and those people of strong constitution, as living under a sharp, and piercing air. The whole divided into the Continent, and the Lands; the Continent into the Upper Pomerens, bordering upon Mecklenburg, extended from the Bartze, to the River Odera; the Lower reaching from the Odera, to the borders of Prussia.  
Chief places in the UPPER, are 1 Barth, at the mouth of the River Bartze, taking name from thence, a well traded town, and many times the seat of the Dukes of this hithermost Pomerens. 2 Wolgast, upon the Baltic sea, over against the Isle of usedom, the chief of this part of Pomeren, from whence the Dukes hereof are called the Dukes of Pomeren-Wolgast: the first town taken in by Gustavus Adolphus King of Sweden, in his famous war for relief of Germany, anno 1630. 3 Straelsund, a town of great trading, and much resort, seated upon the same sea also, opposite to the Isle of Rugen; a town of great name in the course of the Germane Wars. 4 Grispswald, on the same sea, betwixt Wolgast and Straelsund, made an University, anno 1456. 5 Anclaw, upon the River Pone. 6 Tribsca, situate on a lake out of which the said River hath its course.  
Then in the LOWER Pomeren, there is Camin, an Episcopal See, situate on the Baltic shore, over against the Isle of Wollin. 8 Colberg, a strong town on the same shore also, at the fall of the Perceant into the Sea. 9 Costin, the last Sea-town of this tract, lying towards Prussia. 10 Stargard, on the Ina, more within the land; as is also 11 Griffenberg upon the Rega; and 12 Stetin, on the Odera, once a poor fisher-town, now the Metropolis of this part of the Country, rising to this greatness (after the embracing of Christianity) by the fall of Wineta, formerly the chief Mart-town of all these parts. The ordinary seat of the Dukes of the Lower Pomerania, the Dukes of Pomerens of Stetin, as for distinction sake they are used to call them.  
The Lands hereunto pertaining, are those of Rugen, Wallin, Vsidom, touched upon before; but now more punctually to be handled. That of most note is RUGEN, over against Straelsund, from which divided only by a narrow street. In length seven Dutch miles, and as much in breadth; so that the compass of it, if it were exactly round, would amount to 20 German, or an hundred Italian miles: and yet once bigger than it is, but in the year 1309, by the force of an outrageous tempest, a great part of it lying towards the Southeast, as far as to the I'll of Buden (then conjunct hereto) was torn away, and sunk so deep into the bottom of the Sea, that now the greatest ships that be sail over it. The Island plentiful of Corn, the Granary of Straelsund, as they call it commonly; and reasonably well stored with cattle: full of Bays, Creeks, and winding shores, with many and vast Promentories thrusting into the Sea; which gives them great increase of fishing. Anciently it belonged to the Crown of Denmark, till given by Waldemar the third to Bugislaus and Barnimus, Dukes of Pomerens; continuing ever since part of that estate. The chief town of it is called Berga, situate in the midst of the Island, but not containing above 400 Families; others of less note and estimation, being 2 Sugart, 3 Vick, 4 Bingst, etc. small towns compared with Villages upon the Continent, but the best they have. And yet so populous is the Island, that they are able to arm 7000 good fight men, if there be occasion.  
The second of the three, in repute and bigness is that of Wollin, situate over against Camin, so called from Wollin the chief town (Julinum it is called in Latin) made an Episcopal See by Wartislaus, the first Christian Prince of this nation, upon the sackage of this City he removed to Camin. A town which once so flourished in Traffic, that it gave place to none but Constantinople; the Russians, Danes, Saxons, Vandals, etc. having here their particular streets. But being miserably sacked by Waldemar, King of Danemark, anno 1170. most of the trade hereof was removed to Lubeck, since which time it never could come near its former glories. The last in reputation is that of usedom, seated betwixt both, not far from Wolgaft; so called from usedom, the chief town in it, of which little observable. All three the habitation of the ancient Rugii, who under Odoacer, King of the Heruli, subverted the Western Empire, conquered Italy, and made themselves masters of it, till subdued by the Goths. Those which remained in these Lands became after subject to the Sclaves, and had once Kings of their own: the first whose name occurs in story, being Crito, the son of Ratze, a puissant Prince, extending his Dominions into Holst, Ditmarsh, and the City of Lubeck, which he built; about the year 1100, afterwards beautified and enlarged by Adolph the second Earl of Holst; by some esteemed the Founder of it. But his issue male failing in the year 1326, it fell by compact made between them, to the Dukes of Pomeren, to whom these Islands ever since have continued subject.  
And as for Pomerens itself the old Inhabitants thereof were part of the Rugii before mentioned, the Reudigni, Longi-nani, and Longi-Diduni, with parts of the Heruli and Burgundians: into whose void rooms the Pomortzi and other Tribes of the Winithi, (the most potent Nation of the Sclaves) did in fine succeed; extending their Dominion to the banks of the Vistula, which to difference it from Pomerens, was called Pomerella. But that part of it being given by Mestovinus the last Prince thereof dying without issue, anno 1295. to Primislaus Duke of Poland: the name and power of the Princes or Dukes of Pomerania, became confined within the bounds before laid down. The first Prince of it whom we meet with on good record, was one Barnimus, of the noble Gryphonian family, anno 933. whose Grandson Suantiboru●, commanded over all this tract. But his Dominions being parted betwixt his sons, Bugislaus who had Pomerella, retained the language and old customs of the Sclavonians, Wartislaus, who possessed the residue, conformed himself to the Laws and Language of the Saxons; the Country by that means accounted for a part of Germany: added unto the Empire and account thereof in the time of Frederick Barbarossa, by whom Bugislaus and Casimir, sons of Wartislaus were made Princes of the Empire, and Dukes of Pomeren. The Estate being afterwards divided betwixt Bugislaus and Otho, sons of Barnimus the first, and the house of Otho failing in the person of Otho the third; that part hereof was given by the Emperor Frederick the third, to Frederick the second, marquis and elector of Brandenburg: the cause of much contention amongst these Marquesses and the other house of the Dukes of Pomerens; but thus agreed upon at last, that both Princes should continue the Arms and title, the possession of it to be yielded to the Duke of Pomeren, on the failing of whose issue male, it should descend upon the heirs of the house of Brandenburg. The succession of these Princes followeth in this order.  

The DUKE'S of POMERANIA.  
1 Wartislaus the first Christian Prince of the Pomeranians, baptised by Otho Bishop of Bamberg, anno 1124.  
11●8 2 Bugislaus son of Wartislaus created by Frederick Barbarossa, the first Duke of Pomeren.  
1188 3 Bugislaus II. son of Bugislaus, planted the void parts of Pomerens with Saxon Colonies.  
1282 4 Barnimus son of Bogeslaus the second, after whose death Pomeren was divided into two Principalities.   

DUKES of Wolgast.  
1277 5 Bugislaus II. son of Barnimus.  
1319 6 Wartislaus son to Bugislaus.  
1326 7 Barnimus II.  
1365 8 Wartislaus II.  
1394 9 Barnimus III.  
1405 10 Wartislaus III.  
1456 11 Ericus son of Wartislaus.   

DUKES of Stetin.  
1277 1 Otho Duke of Pomeren Stetin.  
1345 2 Casimir son of Otho.  
1368 3 Casimir II. son of Casimir.  
1374 4 Suartiborus brother of Casimir.  
1413 5 Casimir III. son of Suantiborus.  
1433 6 Joachim son of Casimir.  
1451 7 Otho III. son of Joachim, died without issue, anno 1464.  
12 Bugislaus III. commonly called the tenth, the younger Princes of both houses making up the tale, succeeded Otho the third in that part of Pomeren, uniting so the whole into one estate.  
1523 13 George son of Bugislaus the tenth.  
1531 14 Philip son of George, in whose time the Reformation made by Luther was admitted into Pomerania.  
1583 15 Bugislaus IV. but the 13. in the Dutch account, son of Philip his younger brother, Ernestus Ludovicus having that of Stetin for his share.  
16 Bugislaus V. and 14 son of Bugislaus the fourth born in the year 1580. succeeded in Pomerens of Wolgast; as Philip Julius son of Ernestus Ludovicus did in that of Stetin. After whose death Bogislaus became Lord of all Pomerania, in a fair way to have lost all to the prevailing Imperialists, had not the timely coming in of the King of Sweden stopped their violent Progress. But Bogislaus dying without issue in the time of the war, and in him the male issue of the house of Bugislaus the tenth being quite extinguished George William marquis and elector of Brandenbourg put in his claim for the Estate, according to the compact and agreement spoken of before. Betwixt whom and the Swedes (who under colour of aiding the last Duke had possessed themselves of all the strong places in the Country) it was accorded and concluded at the Treaty of Munster that all the Higher Pomerania, with the Isles of Rugen and Wollin, and the town of Stetin; should from thencefourth belong to the Crown of Sweden▪ the Lower Pomerens to be enjoyed by the house of Brandenbourg, 
Mecklenb.  so long as the male issue lasteth; on default whereof that also to be added unto that Crown; the Arms and Titles to be used by both promiscuously. And in regard the marquis of Brandenbourg was to part with the Upper Pomerens for the contentation of the Swedes, (without which no firm peace could be made in Germany) it was also there agreed upon, that the temporal estates of the Bishoprics of Halberstade, Minden, and Camine, together with that of Magdeburg (after the decease of the present Bishop) should be for ever added to the possessions of that house; the Marquesses and Electors of it to be thenceforth entitled Dukes of Magdeburg, Princes of Halberstad and Minden. But what will be the issue of these conclusions future's time must show.   
The Arms of Pomeran, are A Gryphon.   

16. MECKLENBOURG.  
The Dukedom of MECKLENBURG, is bounded on the East with Pomerania, on the West with Holstein, a Province of the Kingdom of Danemark; on the North with the Baltic Sea, and on the South with Brandenbourg, and Saxen-lawenburg. So called from Mecklenburg, or Megalopolis, (both names in several languages of the Dutch and Greeks signifying a great City) a great town of that name here being in the time of the Heruli and the Vandals (the old Inhabitants of these parts) whose chief City it was, but on their leaving of this Country, decayed to nothing. The Country of the same nature as Pomerania, and was rich in corn.  
Places of most importance in it are 1 Wismar, a noted Port on a Creek or Bay of the Baltic Sea; raised out of the ruins of old Mecklenburg before mentioned, about the year 1240. the Haven hereof capable of the greatest vessels, to which it gives a safe and assured Station, whence the name of Wismar; the word signifying in the Sclavonian language idem ac certum mare (as my Author hath it) as much as a quiet or safe Sea. Now one of the Hanse Towns, and being it lies conveniently for the use of the Swedes, allotted to that Crown by the treaty of Munster, the Duke of Mecklenburg being in recompense thereof to have the temporaries of the Bishoprics of Swerin, and Ratzenburg. 2 Swerin, seated upon the South side of the Lake so named, an Episcopal See, and honoured with giving the title of a Barony to the Dukes of Mecklenburg. 3 Malcaw, first walled by Niclot, Prince of the Vandals, anno 1270. 4 Ratzenburg, an Episcopal See, spoken of before. 5 Rostoch, the next in reputation of all the H●●se towns, to Lubeck and Dantsick. Large, rich, and much frequented by all sorts of Merchants, in compass almost six English miles, situate on the River Warn near the fall thereof into the Baltic. Honoured with an University here founded by John Duke of Mecklenburg, an. 1419. the first Professors in it being brought from Erdford in Saxony. 6 Stargard, which once gave the title of Duke to the younger Princes of this house. 7 Sarentine, memorable for a Nunnery there founded by Duke Magnus the second. 8 La●, built and fortified by Duke Henry the second, as an out-work to Rostock, which he had lately bought of Christopher then King of Denmark. 9 Sternberg, of which little memorable. 10 Fridland, on the edge of Pomerens not far from Stargard, which gave the title of Duke to Albert of Wallenstein, after that called Duke of Fridland, that eminent and prosperous Commander of the Imperial Forces, in the late war of Germany: but miserably murdered after all his services by command of the Emperor. 11 Fitchtell, both pleasantly and strongly seated on the edge of a Lake. 12 Dammin, a strong Town on the Marches of Brandenburg.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this Country were the Vandals, with the rest of the Heruli, and Burgundians. But the Burgundians being reckoned as a part of the Vandals were not much took notice of (till their eruptions on the borders of the Roman Empire made them more considerable) the Princes of these Nations using no other title than Kings of the Heruli and Vandals. Of these the first is said to be one Anthyrius son of an Amazonian Lady, who learned his first rudiments of warfare under Alexander the Great. Out of his loins descended a long race of Kings, amongst whom Rhadaguis●, who together with Alarick the Goth, invaded Italy, (I know not by what warrant) is accounted one. Gunderick the seventeenth of these Kings, weary of so cold a dwelling, passed towards the South, and having harassed Gaul and Spain, shipped himself over the Straits of Gibraltar, and erected the Kingdom of the Vandals in afric; whose successors we shall meet with there. By Vitalaus the youngest son of Gensericus the son of Gunderick, the line of these Princes is continued, who after mingling with the Obotriti, and other of the Sclaves, succeeding into the void places of the Vandals, left off the title of Kings of the Vandals, and called themselves Kings of the Heruli and Obotriti: continuing it to Pribislaus or Primislaus the second, who wrote himself Pribislaus Dei gratia Herulorum, Wagriorum, Circipanorum, Palumborum, Obotritorum, Kissinorum, Vandalorumque Rex. Making herein a general muster of those tribes of the Sclaves and Heruli, which remained under his command. But he being vanquished by Henry surnamed the Lion, Duke of Saxony and Bavaria, the title of King was laid aside; his successors contenting themselves with that of Princes. Divided betwixt Henry and Niclot, the Nephews of Pribislaus by his son Henry into two Estates, Henry assuming to himself the title of Prince of the Obotriti, and Niclot, that of Prince of the Vandals. But the posterity of Niclot failing in William the last of that line, anno 1430. his title with the lands thereunto belonging, fell to Henry the fat, the fourth Duke of Mecklenbourg, to which honour Albert and John the sons of Henry the fourth, descended from the elder house, had been advanced by the Emperor Charles the fourth at Prague, Anno 1348. The succession of which family from Pribislaus take in order thus.  

The PRINCES of the HERULI, and DUKES of MECKLENBURG.  
1158 1 Pribislaus the last King, and first Prince of the Heruli, after their subjection to the Saxons; restored to this title and his former estate by the bountiful conquerrers, to be held under the right and homage of the house of Saxony.  
1179 2 Henry son of Pribislaus, baptised with all his people in his father's life time, by the persuasion of Henry Duke of Saxony and Bavaria; by whom restored to their Estates.  
3 Henry II. son of the former Henry; dividing the estate with his brother Niclot.  
1228 4 John surnamed the Divine, so called because created Doctor of Divinity in the University of Paris, whither he was sent by his Father to learn good Arts.  
1260 5 Henry III. surnamed of Jerusalem, because of his expedition thither against the Saracens.  
1302 6 Henry IV. surnamed the Lion, for his valour and undaunted constancy.  
1319 7 Albert and John the sons of Henry going to Prague with a Princely train, to attend on the Emperor Charles the fourth, were by him created Princes of the Empire, and Dukes of Mecklenberg, anno 1348.  
1380 8 Magnus' son of Albert.  
1384 9 John son of Magnus, the founder of the University of Rostock, anno 1419.  
1423 10 Henry V. surnamed the Fat, who on the death of William the last Prince of the Vandals, succeeded into his Estate.  
1447 11 Magnus II. son of Henry, founder of the Cathedral Church of Rostock.  
1503 12 Albert II. son of Magnus the second.  
1547 13 John-Albert son of Albert the second, endowed the University of Rostock with the lands of some dissolved Monasteries and authorised in his Estates, the Reformamation of Religion begun by Luther.  
1578 14 John III. son of John-Albert.  
1592. 15 Adolph-Frederick, and John-Albert, sons of John the third, dispossessed hereof by the Emour Fernand the second, anno 1528. their Estates with the title of Duke of Mecklenberg, being conferred on Albert of Wallenstein Duke of Fridland. Who had not long enjoyed the Title, when Gustavus Adolphus King of Sweden, the Assertor of the liberties of Germany, restored it to the proper owners. The heirs to whose Estates is Gustavus Adolphus, the only son and heir of John-Albert, the other of those two being without issue.    

17. The DUKEDOM of SAXONY.  
The Dukedom of SAXONY reckoning in the Estates and Provinces united to it, and now in possession of those Dukes, is bounded on the East with a part of Bohemia, Lusatia, and some part of Brandenbourg, on the West with Hassia, on the North with the Dukedom of Brunswick, and on the South with Franconia, and some parts of Bohemia. So called because the Patrimony and possession of the Dukes of Saxony, who since the proscription and deprivation of Duke Henry surnamed the Lion, anno 1180. in some or other of these Countries have had their fixed seat and habitation. It containeth the distinct Provinces of 1 Turingia, 2 Misnia, 3 Voiteland, and 4 Saxony properly and specially so called.  
1 TURINGIA, is bounded on the East with Misnia, and a part of the River Saltza; on the West with Hassia; on the North with the Wood Hartz, and Saxony specially so called; on the South with the mountainous Forest of Duringer-Wald, by which parted from Frankenland. So called from the Turingians, the ancient Inhabitants hereof, communicating their name to the place they dwelled in.  
The Country environed round about with woody mountains, but within those mountains plain and pleasant, fruitful in Corn, and very plentiful of Woods, which yields great profit to the people; not without some Mines of Gold and Silver, and rich pits of Salt: able to furnish out a feast, but for wine only, which is the greatest want hereof. The whole length of it is not above 120 miles, and the breadth not more. Yet is so populous and well planted, that there are said to be in it 12 Earldoms, and as many Abbeys, 144 Cities, and as many market Towns, 150 Castles, and 2000 Villages.  
The principal of these are 1. Jene, on the River Saltza, bordering upon Misnia, an University chiefly of Physicians, founded in the year 1555. by the sons of John-Frederick the elector, taken prisoner and deprived by Charles the fifth. 2 Erdford on the River Gers, out of which are cut so many Channels, 
Misnia.  that every street hath almost the benefit of it. A rich, populous, and well built City, accounted amongst the best of Germany; and made an University in the time of the Emperor Wenceslaus, anno 1392. Many times burnt, but still reviving like the Phoenix out of the ashes into greater glory. At first immediately subject to the Archbishop and elector of Mentz, but having freed themselves from him, they have since governed themselves as a free Estate, and one of the Hansetowns; not subject to the Duke of Saxony as their Lord, but their Patron and good neighbour only. 3. Mulhuisen, and 4 Noorthuisen, two Imperial Cities, but not else observable. 5 Smalcald, famous for the league here made, anno 1530. between all the Princes and Cities, which maintained the doctrine of Luther: into which first entered John Frederick the Duke of Saxon, and his son; Ernest, and Francis, Dukes of Luneburg; Philip the Landgrave, George marquis of Brandenbourg, the Cities of Strasburg, Nurenberg, Heilbrune, Ruteling, Vlmes, Lindaw, Constance, Meaning, and Campedune. Afterward anno 1535. there entered into it Barnimus, and Philip, Princes of Pomerens, ulrick Duke of Wirtenberg, Robert Prince of Bipont, William Earl of Nassaw, George, and Joachim, Earls of Anhalt; the Cities of Frankford, Hamborough, Auspurg, Hannolder; and not long after the Palsgrave, and the King of Danemark. By which famous confederacy, Luther not only kept his head on his shoulders; but the Religion by him reform, grew to that strength, that no force or policy could ever root it up. 2 Kale or Hale, where Philip the Landgrave was treacherously taken prisoner, as you shall hear anon. 5 Wiemar, a town which together with the Castle of Gotha, were assigned for the estate and maintenance of that religious, though unfortunate Prince, john Frederick Duke of Saxony, after this discomfiture and imprisonment by Charles the fifth: The ordinary seat of the Dukes of Saxon Weimar, who live here in a stately and magnificent Castle made of polished stone: most artificially contrived, and beautified with Orchards, Gardens, and other pleasures, but made more pleasant by the watering of the River Ilma, upon which it standeth. 6 Gotha, upon the River Lonn, said by Rithaimerus to be built by the Goths, and by them thus named. A place not long since of great importance, and fortified with a very strong Castle called Grimmensten, which being made the retiring place of one Grunbachius, and other seditious persons under the protection of John Frederick one of the sons of the deprived Elector; was taken after a long siege by Augustus the Elector of Saxony, (to whom the strength of this piece being in the hands of the injured family, was a very great eyesore) and by command of the ●●states of the Empire in the Diet at Regensberg, anno 1567. demolished and leveled with the ground.  
The old Inhabitants hereof were the Chasnari of Tacitus, and after them the Turingi, who with the Heruli, under the conduct of Odoacer conquered Italy; called by some Turcilingi, by others supposed to be the Tyrangetae of Ptolemie. Not heard of in this Country till the reign of Childerick the fourth King of the French; then taking up the whole Provinces of Hassia and Turingia under one Bissinus their King. Their Arms at that time, and long after, Azure, a Lion Barrie Argent and Gules, armed and Crowned Or. Being overcome at the great battle of Zulph near Colen, where they joined with the Almans they became subject to the French; afterwards added to the Empire by Henry the first. William the son of the Emperor Otho the first, being Archbishop of Mentz, by the permission of his Father held the City of Erdford and all the rest of Turingia, which he lef● unto his successors in that See: governed by their Vidames, and Provincial Officers till the time of Conradus Salicus, when Ludovicus Barbatus one of these Vidames, (or Vicedomini) made himself the Proprietary of it, and left the same unto his children after his decease. But in the time of Conrade the second, the issue of this Ludovicus either failing or dispossessed, it was by that Emperor conferred upon Lewis of Orleans, son to a sister of his Empress: the title of Landgrave being given to them of this family, for their greater honour. Under eight Princes of this line, whereof five successively had the name of Lewis, this Estate continued next, falling to Herman a brother of the fifth Lewis, then to a sixth Lewis, and last of all to Henry the brother of that Lewis, whom the male issue failed: having continued for the space of 252 years. To please all parties interessed in the succession, the Estate before entire was divided into two parts or Provinces. Of which this now called Duringen or Turingia was allotted to Henry marquis of Misnia, son of Judith the daughter of Herman: the Western part hereof, with the title of the Lantgravedome of Hessen, adjudged to Henry Duke of Brabant in right, of Sophia his wife daughter of Lewis the sixth. In the description of which Countries we shall hear more of them.  
2 MISNIA or Meisen is bounded on the East with Lusatia, on the West with Duringen, on the North with Saxony, specially so called, and some part of Brandenburg; on the South with Voiteland and some part of Bohemia. The Country once overspread with woods and full of bogs, rendering the air unwholesome, and the soil unprofitable: both rectified by the care and industry of the people; now yielding some mines of silver, and great plenty both of corn and pasturage: well watered with the Rivers Sala, Plisses, Elster, and Musda.  
Places of most observation in it, are 1 Dresden, seated on the Albis, having continually on her walls and Bulwarks, 150 Pieces of Ordinance; a stable of the Dukes, in which are 128 horses of service; and a Magazine, out of which 30000 Horse and Foot, may be armed at a day's warning.  
The Town itself situate on both sides of the River, by which divided into the old Town and the new, joined into one by a bridge of 800 paces in length: the Country round about it very rich and pleasant; able to sustain great multitudes, for that cause made the ordinary seat of the Dukes of Saxony, who have here a strong and stately Castle. 2 Naumburg, 3 Mersburg, two Episcopal Sees. 4 Lipsique, 
Saxony.  as famous an University for Thilosophers, as Jene is for Physicians. It seemeth the Scholars and Citizens will not suffer their Beer to perish, of which here is so much drunk and exported, that the very custom of it due unto the Duke, amounts to 20000 pounds yearly; yet is this town of no more than two Churches; but wealthy, populous, and built for the most part of fair free stone; honoured with the Courts of Justice for all the Country. Though seated on the meeting of Pleiss, Pard, Elster, three Rivers, which lie almost on all sides of it; yet it is not strong: having been thrice taken by the Imperialists in less than two years, during the late Germane wars. Sufficiently famous (if for nothing else) for the great battle fought near it betwixt the late King of Sweden and the Count of Tilly: the honour whereof falling to the Swedes and Saxons (with the death of 15000 of both sides, and all the loss of all the baggage, Arms and Ammunition of the imperials) treed all these parts of Germany from that civil and spiritual bondage, which was intended by the Emperor to be put upon them. 5 Mulsberg on the Elb, where John Frederick the elector, was discomfited by Charles the fifth. 6 Meisen, on the west side of the same River in a hilly and uneven ground, built by the Emperor Henry the first for defence of the Empire against the Sclaves: a Bishops See, and the first seat of the Marquesses of the Country; both which together with the Burgrave of the Town had their Palaces or Mansion-houses standing close together on the top of an hill, overlooking both the Town and Country. From this Town the whole Province had the name of Meisen. 7 Friberg, near the Mountains of Bohemia, rich in mines of Silver. 8 Roclite, not far from which are rich Mines of tin, discovered first in these parts by a Cornish-man spoken of before.  
The first Inhabitants hereof were the Hermanduri and Suardones, subdued or outed by the Sorabi, a great Tribe of the Sclaves surnamed Winithi: first conquered by the Emperor Henry the first, who built the strong Town of Meisen to keep them under, and to impede the neighbouring Sclaves from any encroachments on the Empire. Being thus added to the Empire and account of Germany, it was a while governed by such Officers as by the Emperors were appointed to guard these Marches: the first Proprietary marquis being one Echard, son of the Earl of Oostland, (descended from a younger son of Witikind, the last King of the Saxons) by the munificence of Otho the third, not made hereditary till the time of Henry the fifth, who gave it in Fee to Conrade, marquis of Landsberg and Lusatia: whose Nephew Theodorick, by his son Otho surnamed the Rich, married Judith daughter of Herman Landgrave of Duringen, by which match Duringen accrued to the house of Meisen, Henry their son succeeding in both Estates. To this Henry succeeded Albert his son, and after him successively four frederick's, the last whereof by the Emperor Sigismond was created elector and Duke of Saxony, in whose posterity these honours and Estates do as yet continue.  
VOITELAND is bounded on the East with Bohemia, on the West with Frankenland; on the North with Misnia or Meisen, on the South with the Upper Palatinate. So called, as some, from the juites or Vites (some of that people who together with the Saxons and Angles, conquered Britain) of whom it had the name of Viteland, that is to say, the land or Country of the Vites. But being I find not that the Saxons did spread so far Eastward, I rather think that this name was given it by the Sclaves, who finding it deserted, or but thinly peopled at their coming thither, might call it by the name of Voidland; from which the Alteration unto Voitland is both plain and obvious. It is the smallest Province of all Germany, and never of such repute as to have any particular Prince as most others had, but always reckoned as an accessary to some greater Estate. Nor hath it any Town or Cities, of great estimation: the chief of those which are, being 1 Olnits, 2 Worda, 3 Cornah, 4 Schneberg, near the mountains called Studetae by Ptolemie, famed for silver mines. 5 Gotzberg, 6 Culmbach, 7 Hoffe● not much remarkable but only for the Princes of it of the house of Brandenburg, called formerly Curia Pegniana.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were parts of the Nertereates and Danduti, succeeded to by the French and Sclaves, as they severally descended southwards into warmer Countries. Possessed and planted by the Sclaves it obtained this name. But being a small Nation, and a small Estate, it never had the honour of a particular Prince; but did most probably belong to the Lords of Meisen, upon which it bordereth, and now in their right to the Dukes of Saxony. But so that the Duke of Saxony is not the sole Lord hereof: the Marquesses of Ansbach of the house of Brandenbourg, possessing the towns of Hoffe and Colmbach, and some other parts of it; the Patrimony at the present of Christian, son of Joachim Ernest the late marquis of Ansbach, who now enjoyeth them with the title of the marquis of Colmbach.  
SAXONY specially so called, and sometime for distinction sake OBER SACHSEN, or the Upper Saxony, is bounded on the East with the Marquisate of Brandenbourg; on the West with Hassia; on the North with the Dukedom of Brunswick; on the South with Misnia. The air hereof somewhat sharp, but healthy: the soil in the South-west parts hilly and uneven, chiefly rich in Minerals; elsewhere sufficiently fruitful. Divided into four Estates, that is to say, the Earldom of 1 Mansfield, 2 the Principate of Anbalt, 3 Bishopric of Magdeburg, and 4 Saxony itself: this last only subject immediately to the Duke; the rest acknowledging his superiority, have their proper Lords.  
1 Most Westwards towards Duringen and Hassia, lieth the Earldom of MANSFEILD, so called from Mansfeild, once the the chief Town of it on the River Wieper. The other towns of note in it are 2 Isleben, betwixt the Rivers Sala and Wieper, supposed to be so called from the Goddess Isis, who after the death of her husband (as is said by Tacitus) visited these parts: now the Metropolis of the Earldom, and the seat of Justice for the whole, settled here by Earl Voldradus, anno 1448. famous to all posterity for the birth and death of Martin Luther, born here in the year 1483. and here deceasing in the house of the Earl of Mansfield, anno 1546. Of whom, and the success of his Reformation, as we have spoken much already, so we shall speak more, as occasion is, in the course of this work. 3 Wieper, (or Wypra) so called of the River on which it standeth. 4 Quernfurt, 5 Rotenburg, 6 Alstad, 7 Helderung, bought of the Earls of Houstein. Some who delineate the Pedigree of these Earls of Mansfield, fetch it as high as from one of King Arthur's Knights of the Round Table, born at Mansfield in Nottinghamshire; who settling himself in Germany, gave that name to his house: a Military Original, and very suitable to such an active and warlike Family. But those which do not soar so high fetch them no further then from Burchard the fifth, Earl of Quernfort, and Burgrave of Magdeburg, who following Frederick Barbarossa into the Holy Land deceased at Antioch, anno 1189. His Nephew Burchard, by a son of the same name, was the first of this Family that had the title of Earl of Mansfield, about the year 1250. continued ever since unto his Posterity (but under some acknowledgements to the Electors of Saxony.) Of these the most eminent, were Voldradus, one of the Council of Estate to the Emperor Sigismond, anno 1411. a great improver of the Patrimony of the Earls hereof; 2 John-George, Lord Deputy or Lieutenant of Saxony under Duke Augustus. 3 Peter-Ernest, Governor of Luxembourg under Charles the fifth, and Philip the second, by whom much exercised and employed in their wars with France. 4 Albert, a constant friend of Luther's, and a faithful follower of John-Frederick the deprived elector, in whose quarrel being outed of his estate, he retired to Magdeberg, which he most gallantly defended against the Emperor. And 5 Ernestus, Nephew of that Albert by his son John, so famous for the war which he maintained in most parts of Germany against Ferdinand the second, in behalf of Frederick Prince Elector Palatine, and the States of Bohemia, with so great constancy and courage.  
East of the Earldom of Mansfield lieth the Principate of ANHALT, much shaded, if not too much overgrown with woods; parts of the old Hercinian forest, whence it had the name; Haul in Dutch, signifying a wood or forest; and the Princes of this house created to this dignity by the stile of Principes Harciniae in Anhalt: Chief towns of it are, 1 Bernberg, the dynasty and usual title of this house, before they were created Princes of Anhalt. 2 Ballenstede, part of the ancient Patrimony of the first Princes hereof. 3 Dessaw, the birthplace of some, and the buriall-place of others of this Family, beautified with a strong Castle built by Prince Albert the second, anno 1341. 4 Servest, the usual place of the Prince's residence. 5 Coeten, a well fortified place, in vain besieged by the joint forces of the Archbishop of Magdeburg, and the Earl of Schwartzenwold.  
We went as high as the Round Table for the Earls of Mansfield, but we must go as high as the Ark for the Princes of Anhalt; some fetching them from Askenaz, the son of Gomer, and nephew of Japhet, from whom, and no other this Aseanian Family (for by that name it is called) are to fetch their Pedigree. But to content ourselves with more sober thoughts, certain it is, that this Family is of the old Saxon race, settled in these parts by Theodorik, King of Mets, or Austrasia, who gave the Towns of Ascandt and Ballenstede, with the lands adjoining, to one Bernwald, or Bernthobald, a noble Saxon, anno 524. From which town and Castle of Ascandt, afterwards razed to the ground by Pepin, King of the French, anno 747. most probable it is that they took their name. From this Bernwald, or Bernthobald, by a long line of Princes, descended Albert the seventh of Anhalt, surnamed Vrsus, created marquis of Brandenburg by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1152. the Father of that Barnard, who by the Munificence and bounty of the same Emperor was created Duke of Saxony, in the room of Duke Henry, surnamed the Lion, anno 1180. becoming so the Stem of the two greatest Princes in all the Empire. Henry the second, son of this Barnard, was by the same Emperor, not long after, made Prince of Anhalt, the first of all this ancient and illustrious Family which had been honoured with that title, continuing in his race to this very day; the two Electorates of Saxony and Brandenbourg, being mean while translated unto other Families. The most considerable of which Princes, though all men of Eminence, were 1 Rodolph, General of the forces of the Emperor Maximilian the first against the Venetians, whom he twice overcame in battle. 2 George the Divine, a great Reformer of the Church by his diligent preaching; whose Sermons and other Tractates (learned for the times he lived in) are still extant. 3 Christian, born in the year 1568. Commander of the Forces of Frederick, Prince Elector Palatine, in the wars of Bohemia.  
North of the Principality of Anhalt, lieth the Bishopric of MAGDEBURG, so called of Magdeburg the chief City; by some called Meydburg, and Meydenburg; whence by a Greek name Parthenopolis, and Virginopolis, by a mongrel word made of Greek and Latin. A City seated on the Elb, divided into three parts, but all strongly fortified; begirt with high walls, deep ditches, and almost unconquerable Bulwarks: yet very beautiful withal (before the last desolation of it) of elegant buildings, fair streets, and magnificent Temples: Built in the form of a Crescent, by the Emperor Otho the first, the founder of it, who having translated hither the archiepiscopal See, for the greater honour of the place, built the Cathedral of Saint Maurice, where his wife lies buried, anno 948. testified by the inscription to be daughter of Edmund, King of England. A town which hath long flourished in a great deal of glory, and tasted of as much affliction as any other in Germany. For refusing to receive the Interim, it was outlawed by the Emperor Charles the fifth, and given to him that could first take it. It was first hereupon attempted by the Duke of Meglenberg; but he was in a Camisado taken Prisoner, 
Saxony.  his Army routed, his Nobles made captive, and 260 horse brought into the City. Next, it was besieged by Duke Maurice of Saxony, who, on honourable terms, was after a long siege received into it, anno 1550. when it had stood on his own guard the space of three years. Which long opposition of one town, taught the Germane Princes what constancy could do; it held up the coals of Rebellion in Germany, and indeed proved to be the fire which burned the Emperor's Trophies. For here Duke Maurice coming acquainted with Baron Hedeck, hatched that confederacy, by which not long after this great Emperor was driven out of Germany. At last it yielded to Duke Maurice, under the protection of whose successors it hath since enjoyed a long course of felicity, till the year 1631 in which most miserably burnt and sacked by the Earl of Tilly: of whom it is observed, that after that fact he never prospered, being shortly after totally routed at the battle of Leipsick, and wounded to the death not long after that, near the River Leck. Other places of note in this Bishopric, are, 2 Wormsted, beautified with a fair Castle, not far from Magdeburg, the ordinary seat, or retiring place of the Bishop. 3. Grabatz, upon the River Struma, 4 Mockerns, on the same River. 5 Barleben, beneath Meydberg on the Elb. 6 Lunburg, betwixt the Elb and the Struma; not much observable.  
The archiepiscopal See being translated hither from Valersleve and Vrese, (places too obscure for so great a dignity) by Otho the first; and by him endowed with great Revenues, and a goodly territory round about it: the Archbishop hereof was also by his procurement made the Primate of Germany; acknowledged so by all but the Bishop of Saltzburg, and the three Spiritual Electors. For the Administration of Justice in matters Criminal and Civil, the said Otho did ordain an Officer whom they called the Burgrave, conferring that office first on Gero, marquis of Lusatia. Through many hands it came at last to Burchard, Lord of Quernfort, and the Earls of Mansfield; many of which enjoyed this honour: settled at last by the Emperor Rodolphus of Habspurg, on the Dukes of Saxony, who by this means came to have great command and influence on the whole Estate. The Archbishops notwithstanding continued Lords of it, and the whole territory or district adjoining to it, till the Reformation of Religion: when the Revenues separated from the jurisdiction were given to Lay Princes (for the most part of the house of Brandenbourg) with the title of Administrator. Finally, by the Pacification made at Munster, this fair estate is to be settled for ever on the Electors of that house to be possessed by them, and their Heirs and Successors, by the title of the Dukes of Magdeburg; the better to content them for the concession which they made to the Crown of Sweden, of a great part of their right and title to the Dukedom of Pomeren.  
SAXONY most specially so called, the fourth and last part of this Division, stretcheth itself along the Elb betwixt Magdeburg and Meisson; of the same nature, in regard both of soil and air, as is said before. Places of most importance in it, are 1 Torge, or Torgow, by some placed in Misnia, but by Mercator in this Province. Built on the west side of the Elb, in form Orbicular, and falling every way from the sides of a mountain, beautified with a stately and pleasant Castle, belonging to the Elector of Saxony, who is Lord hereof, built by John-Frederick the Elector, anno 1535. Near to the City, is a Lake of a mile in compass; for which the Citizens pay yearly to the Duke 500 gulden's. 2 Warlitz upon the Elb, once a Commandery of the Templars. 3 Weisenberck, lying towards Brunswick. 4 Kemberg, on the west side of the Elb. 5 Bitterfelt, betwixt the Elb and the Mulda; and 6 Wittenberg, on the Elb, in an open plain, but strongly fenced with walls, ramparts, and deep ditches. The chief beauty of it lieth in one fair street, extending the whole length of the City; in the midst whereof is the Cathedral Church, a large Marketplace, and the common Council-house. In former times the seats of the Duke's Electors, till the Electoral dignity was conferred on the house of Meisen, who liking better their own Country, kept their Courts at Dresden: But so, that Wittenberg is still acknowledged for the head City of the Electorate; and was made an University for Divines by Duke Frederick, anno 1508. It was called Wittenberg, as some conjecture, from Wittikindus, once Lord of Saxony, when the extent thereof was greatest: famous for the sepulchers of Luther and Melanchthon, but chiefly for that here were the walls of Popery broken down, and the reformation of the Church begun, by the zeal and diligence of Martin Luther; the story of which reformation so by him begun, I shall here subjoin: This Luther, as before is said, was born at Isleben, in the Country of Mansfield, and student first at Magdeburg, but at the establishing of the University of Wittenberg, chosen to be one of the Professors of Divinity there. It happened in the year 1516, that Pope Leo having need of money, sent about his Jubilees and Pardons, against the abuses of which, Luther inveighed both privately and publicly, by word and writing. This spark grew at last to so great a coal, that it fired the Papal Monarchy. Of the success of his endeavours we have spoke already. We shall look here upon the difficulties which the Cause passed through, before it could be blessed with a public settlement. Concerning which, we are to know, that the Princes of Germany, and many of the Free Cities had embraced his doctrine, and in the Imperial Chamber at Spires, solemnly professed they would defend it to the death: hence were they first called Protestants. Nor stayed they there, but made a solemn League and Combination at Smalcald, spoken of before, for defence thereof, and of each other in the exercise and profession of it. Yet was not this Reformation so easily established. Christ had foretold, that Fathers should be against their Sons, and Brothers against Brothers for the truth's sake; neither do we ever find in any story, that the true Religion was introduced, or Religion corrupted about to be amended, without war and bloodshed. Charles the Emperor whetted on by the Popes of Rome had long born a grudge against the Reformation; but especially against the confederacy of Smalcald. After long heart burning on either side, they broke out into open war●e, which at first succeeded luckily with the Princes. But there being an equality of command between John Frederick the Elector of Saxony, and Philip the Landgrave of Hassia, one sometimes not approving; other whiles thwarting the others projects; the end proved not answerable. Besides, the politic Emperor always eschewed all occasions of battle, and by this delay wearied out this Army of the Princes; which without performing any notable exploit, disbanded itself: every man hastening home to defend his own. The Duke of Saxony had most cause to hasten homeward. For in his absence, his cousin Maurice forgetting the education he had under him, and how formerly the Duke had conquered for him, and estated him in the Province of Misnia; combined himself with the Emperor, and invaded his uncle's County. But the Duke elector, not only recovered his own, but subdued all the Estates, in which he had formerly placed his ungrateful and ambitious kinsman. The Emperor all this while was not idle, but waited advantage to encounter the Duke, which at last he found nigh unto Mulberg, where the Duke was hearing a Sermon. The Emperor giveth the Alarm; the Duke startling from his religious exercise, seeketh to order his men but in vain. For they supposing the Emperor to be nearer with all his forces, than indeed he was, add the wings of fear to the feet of cowardice, and fly away: yet did the Duke with a few resolute Gentlemen, as well as they could, make head against the enemy, till most of them were slain, and the Duke himself taken Prisoner. The morrow after this overthrow, he was condemned to lose his Head; but pardoned at last on condition that he should ransomless set free marquis Albert of Brandenbourg, renounce his dignity of the Electorship, resign up all his inheritance, with the like harsh Articles. It was also urged, that he should alter his Religion: but that he so constantly denied, that it was omitted. For his after maintenance, there were rendered back unto him, the towns of Weymar, and Goth, from the former of which, his Posterity are now called Dukes of Saxon-Weymar: After this Victory the Emperor fraudulently entrapped the Landgrave: then marched he against the Cities, in all which he prevailed, restored the Mass, and drove them to hard composition for their liberties. It was thought, that in this war the Emperor got 1600000 Crowns, and 500 pieces of Ordinance. The Imprisonment of the Landgrave, contrary to the Emperor's promise, was the chief thing which overthrew his good fortune. For Duke Maurice having pawned his word, and given unto the Lantgraves' children his Bond, for the safe return of their Father; found himself much wronged and grieved: therefore consulting with Baron Hedeck, he entered league with the French King, associated himself with marquis Albert of Brandenbourg, suddenly surprised Auspurg; and by the terror which his haste brought with it, forced the Emperor to fly from Inspruch; and the Fathers to break up the Council of Trent. The Emperor now brought low, easily harkened to an honourable Composition, which not long after was concluded: the Cities recovering their Privileges, free passage being given to the Reformation, and all things else reduced to the same state they were in before the wars; the restoring of John-Frederick to his Dukedom and Electorship excepted only. So did this Duke Maurice both overthrow the liberty of his Country, and restore it: so was the work of Reformation by his means depressed, by the same again revived and established stronger than ever. Thus we see that of the Poet verified: 
— Vel nemo, vel qui mihi vulnera fecit,  
Solus Achillaeo tollere more potest.  
None but the man which did his Country wound,  
Achilles-like, could heal and make it sound.   
It is observed by some, that the deprivation of John Frederick, and the advancement of Maurice fell out very happily for the confirming of the Reformation then contended for. First, in regard of John Frederick, whose Christian patience and Magnanimity during the whole time of his imprisonment, added great reputation to the cause for which he he suffered: 2 In respect of Duke Maurice, who was a man of far greater parts to advance the work, and every way as zealous in pursuance of it as the other was: And 3 In relation to the children of the deprived Duke, men not to be relied on in a matter of such weight and moment: insomuch, as it was said of him after his decease, Quod filios reliquerit sui dissimillimos. But to return unto my story. The doctrine of Luther thus settled in Germany, and being so agreeable to the Word of God, was quickly propagated over all Christendom: the reasons of which, next unto the Almighty power of the most High, may be principally six: 1 The diligence and assiduity of preaching in City, and Village; 2 The publishing of books of Piety, and Christian Religian; 3 The translations of the Scriptures, into the vulgar languages, whereby the simple might discern good from bad, the muddy doctrine of Rome, from the clear water of life, 4 The education of youth, especially in Catechisms, which contained the whole body of Christian religion; which once well planted in their minds, was irradicable; 5 The continual offers of disputations with the adverse party, in a public audience; which being denied, gave assurance of the truth, and soundness of the one side, as of the falsehood and weakness of the other; 6 Their compiling of Martyrologies, and Histories of the Church; which cannot but work an admirable confirmation of Faith, and constancy in the hearers and readers. There is one only policy wanting, namely, the calling of a general Synod, to compose the differences of the reformed Church, about the Sacrament, and Predestination; which would certainly strengthen their own cause, and weaken the enemies, whose chief hopes are, 
Saxony.  that the present disagreements will arm party against party, to their own destruction. But God grant that their hopes may be frustrated, and we will say with the Poet, 
— Haemanus Trojam erigent?  
Parvas habet spes Troja, si tales habet.  
Shall these small jars restore the ruin'd Pope?  
Small hope he hath, if this be all his hope.   
But it is time we should proceed to the story of Saxony; the ancient inhabitants of which tract were the Longobardi, or Lombard's of Magdeburg; and part of the Cherusci about Mansteld, and Wirtenberg. Overcome by the prevailing Saxons, they became part of their name and Country, which in the full extent thereof was once far greater than now it is: containing all the Countries betwixt the Rhine and the River Eydore, in the Cimbrick chersonese; and from the River Saltza to the Germane and Baltic Oceans. These, said by some to be a People of Asia, and there called the Sacae; who finding that small territory (now a part of Persia) too narrow for them, forsook their Country, and at last fixed themselves in the Cimbrick chersonese; where they first took the names of Pasaeasons (or Sac-sons) that is to say, the ●ons of the Sacae. The improbality of this we have there disputed. Omitting therefore that and the like Originations of them, I conceive them (for my part) to be natural Germans; some tribe of that most populous and potent people of the Suevi; but for the reason of the name, let every man enjoy the pleasure of his own opinion. Certain I am that in Ptolemies time they were possessed of those parts beyond the Elb, & thence extended to the Eydore, part of which tract is now known by the name of Holstein; and were accounted in that time to be no newcomers. Afterwards as they grew in number, they enlarged their quarters, and passing over the Elb in the time of the latter Roman Emperors, possessed themselves of the void places which were left by the French, then busied in the conquest of more fruitful Countries; communicating their name to all the Nations which they overcame, as the French had formerly done before them. So that in fine, they took up the now Dukedoms of Holstein, Lunenbourg, and Brunswick, the Bishoprics of Bremen, Verda, Hildersheim, Halberstad, and Magdeburg; the old Marches of Brandenbourg, the Earldom of Mansfield, Wesiphalen, both Friselands, Overyssell, with as much of Guelderland and Holland, as lay on that side of the Rhine. By which account the present Electoral Family hath not one foot of the old Saxony in their possession: the seat and Patrimony of the Electors being removed into other Countries, upon the alterations and changes which have happened in that estate: the name and title of Saxony being given to the Country about Wittenberg for no other reason, but because it was the chief seat of the Duke Electors. But to proceed, a stout and valiant Nation questionless they were, the Conquerors of the Isle of Britain, & the last people of the Germans, which yielded up their Country unto Charles the great; by whose means gained unto the Gospel, anno 785. Their last King was called Wittichindus, from whom descend the Kings of France, since the time of Hugh Capet; the regent Kings of Denmark, of the house of Old●nberg; the Dukes of Burgundy and Savoy; the Marquesses of Montferrat; besides many other noble and illustrious Families, though of lesser note: The male issue of Wittikinde (whom Charles the great created, taking the first Duke of Saxony) determining in the person of Otho the third, Emperor of Germany, it was by him conferred on Barnard Lord of Lunenburg (but the precise time thereof I find not:) and on the forfeiture incurred by his posterity, in the person of Duke Henry the Proud, bestowed by Frederick Barbarossa upon Barnard of Anhalt, anno 1180. whose issue in the right line failing, it was finally estated by the Emperor Sigismond on Frederick Landgrave of Turingia, and Marquess of Misnia, anno 1423. In his Family it hath since continued, but not without a manifest breach in the course of the succession: which happened when John-Frederick being deprived of the Electoral dignity and estate; his cousin Duke Maurice was invested in them by Charles the fifth. And because these translations of States be not ordinary, I will briefly relate the Ceremonies thereat used, as I have collected them out of Sleiden. There were at Wittenberg scaffolds erected, on which sat the Emperor, and the Prince's Electors in their Robes. On the back side of the State were placed the Trumpeters; right against it stands Duke Maurice with two bands of horsemen. The first in a full career run their horses up to the pavilion: out of the second issued Henry Duke of Brunswick, Wolfang Prince of Bipont, and Albert Duke of Bavier. These when they had in like manner coursed their horses about, alighted, ascended to the Throne, and humbly requested the Emperor, that for the common good he would advance Duke Maurice to the Electorship. He consulted with the Electors, made answer by the Bishop of Mentz, that he was content; so Duke Maurice would in person come and desire it. Then came forth Duke Maurice, with the whole troup; before him were born ten ensigns bearing the Arms of as many Regions, wherein he desired to be invested. When he came before the throne, he kneeled down on his knees, and humbly desired the Emperor to bestow on him the Electorship of Saxony, and all the lands of John-Frederick, late Elector. His Petition was granted. Then the Bishop of Mentz read unto him the Oath by which the Electors are bound unto the Empire: which Oath, when Duke Maurice had taken, the Emperor delivered unto him a Sword, which was a sign of his perfect investiture. Duke Maurice, now the Elector of Saxony, arose, gave the Emperor thanks, promised his fidelity, made obeisance, and took his place amongst the Electors. This solemnity was on the 24 day of Feb. anno 1548. This said, it is high time that we should proceed unto the Catalogue of  

The DUKE'S of SAXONY. 
Saxony.   
785 1 Witikind the last King of the Saxons vanquished and created the first Duke by Charles the Great.  
825 2 Bruno the brother of Witikind.  
843 3 Luitulphus son of Bruno.  
855 4 Bruno II. son of Luitulphus.  
8●6 5 Otho brother of Bruno the second.  
916 6 Henry surnamed the Fowler, son of Otho; Emperor of the Romans and King of Germany.  
938 7 Otho II. Duke of Saxony and Emperor called Otho I.  
974 8 Otho III. Duke of Saxony and Emperor called Otho II.  
984 9 Otho IV. Duke of Saxony and Emperor called Otho III.  
10 Barnard Lord of Lunenburg created Duke of Saxony, and the first elector by Otho the third, who was the last Duke of the race of Witikind.  
1021 11 Barnard TWO son of Barnard the first.  
1063 12 Ordulphus son of Barnard the second.  
1073 13 Magnus' son of Ordulphus, who taking part with Rodulphus of Schwaben against Henry the fourth, was taken prisoner and deprived.  
14 Lotharius Earl of Querdfort, created Duke of Saxony by Henry the fourth. He was also Emperor of the Romans.  
1125 15 Henry Guelph, surnamed the Proud, Duke of Bavaria, the husband of Gertrude daughter of Lotharius, by whom created Duke elector.  
1139 16 Henry II. surnamed the Lion, Duke of Saxony and Bavaria, son of Henry the Proud by his first wife Walfildis the daughter of Magnus, proscribed and outed of his Estates by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa. After which this great Estate being parceled and divided into many parts, the title of the Duke elector of Saxony, was given by the said Emperor to  
1180 17 Barnard of Anhalt son of Albert marquis of Brandenbourg, and grandchild of Elica, the daughter of Duke Magnus, to whom for his seat and habitation the Emperor Courade the third gave the City of Wittenberg; the head, since that time, of this Electorate.  
1212 18 Albert son of Barnard; from whom the Dukes of Lawenburg do derive their Pedigree.  
1273 19 Albert II. son of Albert the first.  
1327 20 Rodolph son of Albert the second.  
1356 21 Rodolph II. son of Rodolph the first.  
1373 22 Wenceslaus son of Rodolph the second.  
1389 23 Rodolph III. son of Wenceslaus.  
1419 24 Albert III. brother of Rodolph the third, the last elector of Saxony of the house of Anhalt.  
1423 25 Frederick Landgrave of Duringen, and marquis of Misnia, (on the failing of the house of Anhalt, anno 1422) created Duke of Saxony by the Emperor Sigismond, the house of Lawenburg pretermitted, for want of putting in their claim.  
1428 26 Frederick II. son of Frederick the first.  
1464 27 Ernest son of Frederick the second.  
1486 28 Frederick III. son of Ernest.  
1525 29 John brother to Frederick the third.  
1532 30 John-Frederick son of John the first; a great advancer of the Reformation of Religion, imprisoned, and deprived of his Electorship by Charles the fifth.  
1547 31 Maurice descended from Albert the brother of Ernest, created Duke Elector by Charles the fifth, whom after wards he drove out of Germany; and was slain in the battle of Siffridhuse, against marquis Albert of Brandenbourg.  
1553 32 Augustus' brother of Maurice.  
1586 33 Christian son of Augustus.  
34 Christian II. son of Christian the first.  
35 John-George brother of Christian the second, who first sided with the Emperor Ferdinand the second against the Elector Palatine, and after with the King of Sweden against the Emperor.   
The Revenues of this Duke are thought to be the greatest of any one Prince of Germany (the Imperial family excepted) amounting at the least to 400000 l. per annum, though in multitude of Vassals, and greatness of territory, he come short of some of them. And to make up this sum (or perhaps a greater) it is conceived that the profit which ariseth to him out of silver mines, is no less than 130000 yearly; the 〈◊〉 laid on Beer in Leipsich only, a City but of two Parish Churches (by which conjecture at the rest) being farmed at 20000 l per annum. 
Brunswick▪  Then hath he the tenths of all sorts of increase, as of corn, wine, etc. the Salt-houses at Hall, and some other places, very fair lands belonging unto his domain; and besides a standing and perpetual tax laid upon the Subject, towards the maintenance of the war against the Turk: granted at first in times of danger and hostility; but gathered ever since in the time of peace (as to that Enemy) under colour of being ready and prepared against him. According to the quantity of his Intrado so he keeps his State, well served and better attended, than any other of the Electors: there being at one time in the Court of Christian, the Father of the present Duke, three Dukes, three Earls, and five Barons of other Nations (besides the Nobility of his own) all Pensioners and Servants to him: one of the Princes of Anhalt, and one of the Earls of Mansfeild, both Homagers unto the Saxon, being two of the number.  
The Arms of Saxony are Barrewise of six pieces Sable and Or, a Bend flowered Vert. Which Bend was added to the Coat by the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, when he confirmed Barnard of A●halt in his Dukedom. For Barnard desiring of the Emperor to have some difference added to the Ducal coat (being before only Barry Sable and Or) to distinguish him and his successors from those of the former house: the Emperor took a Chaplet of Rue, which he had then upon his head, and threw it cross his Buckler or Eschocheon of Arms, which was presently painted on the same.   

18 BRUNSWICK, and 19 LUNENBURG.  
The Dukedom of BRUNSWICK and LUNENBOURG, being both originally taken out of the great Dukedom of Saxony, extracted both from the same root, and many times united in the person of the same one Prince, shall be joined together in the story, though severed in the chorography or Description of them: bounded on the East with Magdeburg and Brandenburg; on the West with Westphalia; on the North with Denmark, on the South with Duringen and Hassia. The Air in all parts hereof very cold and comfortless, but sound and healthful: the soil towards the old Marches of Brandenburg but meanly fertile, towards Duringen and Hassia mountainous and woody; in other parts very plentiful of corn, and well provided also of such other commodities, as usually do grow in those colder climates.  
But to take the chorography of them severally, BRUNSWICK is bounded on the East with the Diocese of Magdeburg and the Earldom of Mansfeild, on the West with Westphalen; on the North with Lunenburg, on the South with Hassia and Turingia. So called from Brunswick the chief City, and the head of this Dukedom.  
Places of most importance in it, are 1 Goslar, upon the River Goose, whence it had the name; Of a poor Village made a City by Henry the first, much beautified and enlarged by Henry the third, who founded here two Churches and a stately Palace. Now one of the Imperial Cities. 2 Helmstat in the middle way betwixt Brunswick and Magdeburg, first fortified by Charles, son of Charles the Great, for a bridle to the neighbouring Sclaves: and being after given to the Abbats of Werda, was by them sold to William the Duke of Brunswick. Quedelnberg built also by Henry the first, much increased since by the neighbourhood of a very rich Nunnery, the Abbess whereof had formerly the privileges of a Prince of the Empire. 4 Hildesheim, an ancient City, honoured with an Episcopal See by Charles the Great, at the first conversion of the Saxons. 5 Grubenhagen, which gave title to a younger branch of the house of Brunswick; a principality and a member of the Empire. 6 Hannover, on the River Leine, well built, very strongly fortified, and not meanly traded. 7 Brunswick upon the River Onacter which passeth through it, passed over by many handsome bridges, the Metropolis of the ancient Saxonic, and at this time the chief of this Dukedom; though of itself Imperial, and one of the Hanse. The City of a Quadrangular form, seated in the midst of a plain very fruitful of corn; in compass about two Dutch, or eight English miles; somewhat larger than Nurenberg, and less than Erdford; containing in that compass not above twelve Churches, whereof two have steeples covered with lead, a third with brass, all the rest with tile. Rich, populous, and strongly fortified, on some sides with a double, on others with a treble wall; within which walls are five Cities, distinguished by privileges, but united by Laws. The whole first built by Bruno son to Ludolphus Duke of Saxony, and Uncle to the Emperor Henry the first, about the year 861. from whence it had the name of Brunswick, or Brunonis Vicus, by the more elegant Latinists, Brunopolis. 8 Hamelen, on the East side of the Weser or Visurgis, encompassed with a deep moat, (occasioned by a stream cut out of the River) round about which are divers fortifications and placed with Ordinance. Nigh unto this town is the mountain called also Hamelen, unto which the Peed-piper (as they call him) led the children of Halberstade, where they all sunk, and were never more seen; but of this story more hereafter, when we come to Transylvania. 2 Wolfehaiten, or Wolfenbuttell, where the Duke doth keep his Court: For though Brunswick giveth him his title, yet will it not yield him any obedience, but reputeth herself among the Hansetownes; for which cause there have been great wars between the Dukes, and the Citizens. 3 Halber●iade, a Bishops See; the late Bishop (or administrator of the Bishopric) being Christian Duke of Brunsaick, that noble young soldier, who had vowed his life and fortune to the service of Elizabeth Queen of Bohemia; created by King James one of the Knights of the Garter. A Bishopric of great revenue, and a very large territory, since the alteration of Religion, given with the title of Administrator to the sons of Brunswick, but now by the conclusions at Munster assigned over to the elector of Brandenburg, with the title of Prince of Halberstade, 
Lunenbourg  the family of Brunswick being to be recompensed with an alternate succession in the Bishopric of Osnaburg, and some other additionals.  
The Dukedom of LUNENBOURG hath on the East the Old Marches of Brandenbourg, on the West the Diocese of Bremen, a part of Westphalia; on the North the Elb, and on the South the Dukedom of Brunswick. So called from Lunenbourg the chief City, once the seat of the Dukes.  
Places of most observation in it are 1 Lunenbourg itself, situate on the River Elvenaw, an Imperial City and one of the principal of the Hanse; so called from the Moon here worshipped in the times of Idolatry. Of a round form, and seated in a pleasant valley; but with mountains near it; on one of which called Calberg is a very strong Castle, of right belonging to the Duke, but in the power of the Citizens, who without this Fort could not be master of their Liberties. The walls about it are of earth, high and broad, and the Ditches deep; the buildings generally fair (for the most part of brick) the chief whereof is the Common-council house; the streets broad and long with two spacious Market-places, but of no very pleasing smell: the whole about a mile and an half in length, half a mile in breadth; containing six Parish Churches. But the thing most considerable in it is the Fountain of Salt, (the greatest riches of this City) and the house in which the Salt is boiled, containing 52 rooms, and in each room 8 leaden pans in which are boiled daily 8 tuns of salt, every tun being sold for 8 Flemish shillings bought by the Hamburgers, Lubeckers, and other Merchants, some part of the profits of it belonging to the Duke, some to the City, the rest to the Adventurers who employ their stocks on it. 2 Cella the seat of the Duke of Lunenburg. 3 Getherns of no great bigness or estimation, but for a strong Castle of the Dukes. 4 Oldendorp, situate betwixt the Venaw and the River Esca, memorable for the great battle fought near it, anno 1633. betwixt the Imperialists and the Swedes; the honour and benefit whereof fell unto the Swedes, who killed upon the place 5000 of the Enemy, besides such as were found dead in the fields and high ways, all covered over with dead bodies; took 1500 of them prisoners, and got into their hands 13 pieces of Ordinance, good store of Ammunition, and three mules laden with silver for the pay of the Army: the reputation of this victory drawing in Hammelen, and other places of importance which stood out before. 5 Verda, an Episcopal See, but made a Lay-fee as most other Bishoprics amongst the Lutherans; the profits thereof being received commonly by a son of Danemark with the title of Administrator, and lastly by the treaty of Munster, appropriated for ever to the Crown of Sweden; the Kings whereof to be entitled Dukes of Verden. 7 Rotenburg, the chief seat of the Bishops of Verda.  
Northwest of Lunenburg, on both sides of the Elb, lieth the Country and signory of LAWENBURG; so called from Lawenburg, (Lawburgum) a Town and Castle built on the further side of the Albis, by Barnard of Anhalt, the first Duke of Saxony of that family: which being razed by Duke Henry the Lion, was again re-edified and given by Albert the son of Barnard to his second son John, from whom the Dukes of Saxony commonly called Dukes of Saxen-Lawenburg do derive themselves: Who being pretermitted by the Emperor Sigismond at the death of Albert the third, the last of the direct line of Barnard, have since contented themselves with their ancient Patrimony. Other towns observable in this signory, next unto Lawenburg itself, are 2 Erdenburg, a well fortified piece, opposite to Lawenburg, on the hither side of the Elb. 3 Raceburg, the sepulture of this noble family. 4 Moeln, the cause of much contention betwixt the Lords hereof and the town of Hamburg, who pretend a title thereunto.  
But to return again to Brunswick and Lunenbourg; the ancient Inhabitants of these Dukedoms were the Duglubini of Ta●itus, with some parts of the Chauci and Cherusci: these last of most fame for the blow they gave to Quintilius Varus, Lieutenant in G●rmanie after Drusus for Augustus Caesar, who behaving himself with great insolency towards the Natives, was set upon by these Cherusci and their confederates, under the conduct of Arminius a great Prince amongst them; himself slain, and his whole Army consisting of three Legions, miserably cut off, and despitefully used: which loss, and the shame thereof so distracted the Emperor (not formerly accustomed to the like misfortunes) that he was many times observed to tear his beard, knock his head against the posts, and cry out in the bitterness of his passion, Red mihi legiones Quintili Varo. Having long time after this maintained their liberty (for the Romans kept themselves from that time forwards on the French side of the Rhine) they were at last subdued by the Saxons, continuing part of that great Dukedom till the proscription of Henry surnamed the Lion, spoken of before; whose reconciliation being made, by means of Henry the second of England, whose daughter Maud he had formerly married, the Emperor Barbarossa restored to him again the Cities of Brunswick and Lunenburg with their several Territories: of which his two sons Henry and William were first created Earls, than Dukes, the one of Brunswick, and the other of Lunenbourg, by the Emperor Frederick the second. Which honours and Estates do still remain unto their Posterities. Before I come to the successions of which Princes, I shall crave leave to speak of the Original of the Guelfian Family, Dukes at the same time of Bavaria and Saxony; of which they are at this time the sole remainder. A Family derived from one Guelphus (whence it had the name) the son of Isenberdus Earl of Altorf in Schwaben: whose wife called Jermintrudis, having accused a poor woman of Adultery, and caused her to be grievously punished, for having 12 children at a birth; was afterwards delivered of the like number, & all of them sons. Her husband being absent at the time of her delivery, she commanded the Nurse to kill 11 of them; fearing (it seems) the like shame and punishment, as by her instigation was inflicted on the other woman. The Nurse going to perform this ungodly command, was met by the old Earl then returning homewards: who asked her what she had in her Apron, she made answer Whelps; he desired to see them, she denied him. 
Hassia.  Angry at this refusal he opened her Apron, and there found eleven of his own sons, pretty sweet babes, and of most promising countenances. Examining the matter he found out the truth, and enjoining the old Trot to be secret in it, he put the children out to Nurse; six years expired, the Earl invited to a Feast most of his own and his Lady's kindred, and attiring the young boys all alike, presented them unto their Mother. Who suspecting by the number of them, what the matter was, confessed her offence, is pardoned by the good old Earl, and carefully educates her children: Whom the Father commanded to be called by the name of Guelpes, alluding to the Whelps or Puppies, which the Nurse told him she had in her Apron. From the eldest of these Guelphs or Guelpes succeeded that Henry Guelph son of Robert Earl of Altorf, whom Conrade the second made Duke of Bavaria; many of whose posterity enjoyed that Dukedom: increased at last by the addition of the Dukedom of Saxony in the person of Duke Henry surnamed the Proud, Father of Henry called the Lion, and Grandfather of Henry and William the first Dukes of Brunswick and Lunenburg, whose succession followeth in this Order.  

The DUKE'S of BRUNSWICK and LUNENBURG.  
1 Henry surnamed the Lion, the last Duke of Saxony, and the first of this Title.  
Brunswick Lunenburg.  
1195 2 Henry first Earl after Duke of Brunswick.  
1213 3 Otho son of William Duke of Lunenburg; after the death of Henry Duke of Brunswick also.  
1252 4 Albert son of Otho.  
1279 5 Albert II. son of Albert.  
1318 6 Otho II. son of Albert the second.  
1334 7 Magnus' son of Albert II. on the failing of the other house, enjoyed both Estates.  
1368 8 Magnus II. son of Magnus the first.  
1373 9 Henry II. son of Magnus the second.  
1416 10 William son of Henry.  
1482 11 William II. son of William.  
1503 12 Henry II. son of Will. the second.  
1514 13 Henry III. son of Henry the second.  
1568 14 Julius son of Henry the third.  
1589 15 Henry IV. son of Julius, who married the Lady Elizabeth, sister to Anne Queen of England.  
16 Frederick Vlric son of Flizabeth of Danemark and Henry Julius.  
1634 17 Augustus, son of Henry Duke of Lunenbourg, succeeded on the death of Fredenick Vlrick, and the failer of the house of Brunswick in him, in this Dukedom.  
1195 2 William first Earl, after Duke of Lunenburg.  
1252 4 John son of Otho.  
1261 5 Otho II. son of John.  
1330 6 Otho III. son of Otho the second.  
10 Barnard brother of Magnus the second.  
1434 11 Frederick II. son of Barnard  
1478 12 Otho III. son of Frederick.  
1514 13 Henry III. son of Otho the third.  
1532 14 Otho IV. son of Henry the third.  
15 Ernest the brother of Otho succeeded in his brother's life time; surrendering his Estate for an Annual pension.  
1546 16 Henry IV. son of Ernest.  
1590. 17 Ernest II. son of Henry the fourth.  
18 Wolf●angus, the brother of Henry the fourth, and Uncle of 〈◊〉 the second, now Duke of Lunenbourg, anno 1648.   
The Arms of these Dukedoms were first the same, that is to say, Gules, two Lions Or, Armed Azure, which Arms they took by reason of their extraction from the Kings of England, than Dukes of Normandy; retained to this day by the Dukes of Brun●wick without any Addition. But those of Lunenbourg have added three Coats more unto it: the whole bearing being quarterly 1 Gules, two Lions Or, Armed Azure; 2 Azure, Seem of Hearts Gules, a Lion Azure, Armed, and Crowned Or, 3 Azure, a Lion Argent, Crowned Gules, and 4 Gules, within a Border Componie Or, and Azure; a Lion of the second, Armed of the third.   

HASSIA.  
HASSIA, is bounded on the North with Brunswick, on the South with Veteravia, or the State of Wideraw; on the East with Saxony; on the West with Westphalia. So called from the Hessi, who having vanquished the Chatti, the old Inhabitants of this Country, possessed themselves of it.  
The Christian faith was first preached here by Boniface or Winifred, an English Saxon, (afterwards Archbishop of Mentz) anno 730 or thereabouts. Of whom I find this memorable Apophthegm, that in old times there were Golden Prelates and wooden Chalices, but in his time wooden Prelates and Golden Chalices. Not much unlike to which I have read another, but of later date, viz. that once the Christians had blind Churches and lightsome hearts, but now they have lightsome Churches and blind hearts.  
The Country is very fruitful of corn, and affordeth good 〈◊〉 for the feeding of cattle, of which they have great droves and herds in many places; with great abundance of Stags, and other Deer for the pleasures of hunting harboured in the woods hereof, with which in many parts of it it is very much shaded. It breedeth also on the Downs good store of sheep, enriched with the finest fleece of any in Germany; the Staple commodity of this Country: and in the mountainous parts hereof there want not rich Mines of brass, lead, and other metals, which yield great profit to the people.  
Chief towns herein, are 1 Allendorf on the Weser, (or Visnegis) of much esteem for the springs or fountains of Salt which are thereabouts. 2 Frislar, upon the Eder, well walled, and situate in a fruitful and pleasant soil; belonging to the Archbishop and Elector of Mentz, but in regard of the convenient situation of it, much aimed at, many times attempted, and sometimes forcibly possessed, both by the Lantgraves of Hassia, and Dukes of Saxony. 3 Fuld, on a River of that name, remarkable for the Monastery there founded by Boniface, Archbishop of Mentz, by the name of Saint Saviour's, the Abbot, which is a Prince of the Empire, Chancellor of the Empress, and Lord of a goodly territory in this Country, called from hence Stift Fuld. 4 Frankenberg, on the Eder also, so called from the French, who encamped there in their wars against the Saxons; first founded by Theodorick the French King, anno 520. but much enlarged by Charles the Great, about the year 804. 5 Eschewege, on the brow of an hill near the River Wert, of great trading for the woad, of which the fields adjoining yield a rich increase. Being destroyed by the Hungarians, it was re-edified and enlarged by the Emperor Henry the second: and having suffered much misery in the long war between Adolph, Archbishop of Mentz, and the Lantgraves of Hassia, it fell at last into the possession of the Landgrave, anno 1387. 6 Melsingen, on the River Fuld. 7 Darmsiad, lately, if not at the present, the seat and inheritance of Count Ludovick of the younger house of the Lantgraves, taken Prisoner by Count Mansfield, anno 1622. and his whole Country exposed unto spoil and rapine; because (besides many other ill offices) he was the chief persuader of the Princes of the Union to disband their forces, provided for defence of themselves and the Palatinate, and to reconcile themselves to the Emperor. 8 Marpurg, the seat of the second house of the Lantgraves, descending from that Philip, who was Landgrave in the time of Charles the fifth, whom he so valiantly withstood: pleasantly seated on the Lon, amongst Viny downs, and shady Mountains; honoured with an University founded here by Lewis, Bishop of Munster, anno 1426. and beautified with a magnificent Castle (the ordinary dwelling of those Princes) situate on an high hill somewhat out of the Town: which gives it a very gallant prospect over the Town and Country. 9 Geisen, a Town belonging to the Lantgraves of Cassels, and a small University also. 10 Dietz, upon the River Lon, belonging also to the house of Cassels. 11 Cassels, the chief town and ordinary residence of the Lantgraves of the elder house, who are hence sometimes called the Lantgraves of Cassels: commodiously seated in a pleasant and fruitful soil, and well fortified with strong earthen walls, and deep ditches; but the houses in it of no great beauty, being composed for the most part of wood, thatch and clay.  
Within the limits of this Province is the County of WALDECK, not subject to the Lantgraves of Hassia, though included within the limits of it before laid down, taking up the Western parts thereof where it meets with Westphalia; in figure very near a square, each side of which is of the length of six ordinary Dutch, or 24 English miles. The soil much of the same nature with the rest of Hassia, save that it hath some veins of Quicksilver, and inexhaustible mines of Coal, which the other wanteth; these last in greatest plenty about Veldung, and the strong Castle of Eisenburg, two of the best towns and places of it. Others of chief note, 3 Waldeck itself on the River Eder, the first seat of the Earls hereof, who have here an ancient Castle, from whence the whole Country takes its name. 4 Mengerhuse, in a fair Castle whereof live the present Earls. 5 Witterberg, in a pleasant and fruitful Soil, betwixt the Rivers Twist and Abra. 6 Corbach, famous in the times of Albertus Magnus for its golden Mines, yielding great profit to these Earls. The Pedigree of whom is fetched from one Witichinde Earl of Snalenberg, whom Charles the Great made Advocate or Patron of the Church of Paderborn in Westphalia, being an Office in these times of great jurisdiction. By Witichind the second one of his Successors, this office was surrendered into the hands of the Chapter, for the sum of 300 marks in silver; and to cut off all further claims, Henry, the nephew of this Witichind, by his son Otho, was by the Chapter gratified with the town of Waldeck, of which he was the first Earl: whose nephew Henry surnamed Ferreus, subdued Corbach, anno 1366. and added it to his Estate. By a third Henry, grandchild of this Ferreus, or man of Iron, this Earldom formerly held in fee of the Church of Paderborn, was first put under the patronage and protection of the Lantgraves of Hassia, anno 1428. as it continueth to this day; the Earls hereof content with their own estates, and more addicted to the Book, then unto the Sword, have acted little in the wars to improve their fortunes.  
The ancient inhabitants of the whole, both Waldeck and the rest of Hassia, and also of the County of Nassaw in Veteravia, near unto adjoining, were the Cattis, or Chatti mentioned by the Ancients: first conquered (after the withdrawing of the Roman forces) by the Hessi; and both subdued not long after by the Thuringians. Subject unto the Lantgraves of Duringen till the death of Henry, the last of the male issue of Lewis of O●leans. In the division of whose estate the Western moiety of Duringen fell to the share of Henry, Duke of Brabant, one of the Competitors, who leaving the title of Landgrave of Duringen to the marquis of Misnia; took to himself the title of the Landgrave of Hessen, in memory of the Hessi, spoken of before. Of his successors the most puissant was that Philip, who in the time of Charles the fifth much swayed the affairs of Germany, anno 1520. he discomfited King Ferdinand, and restored Vlrick to the Dukedom of Wirtenberg, anno 1530. he united all the Protestant Princes, and Cities of Germany in a common league at Smalcald; for the defence of the Protestant Religion, anno 1545. he undertook the cause of Goslaria against the Duke of Brunswick, whom in a set battle he took prisoner, together with his son, and possessed his Country, anno 1548. he united all the Princes and Cities of Germany, in an offensive and a defensive league against Charles the fifth, but that war succeeded not prosperously. For the Duke of Saxony his perpetual Confederate, being taken prisoner, he submitted himself to the Emperor at Kale or Hale in Duringen: his sons-in-law, Duke Maurice, the marquis of Brandenbourg, and Wolfang Prince of Deuxponts, having given their bonds for his return. The conditions of his pardon were, first, that he should dismantle all his towns, except cassel; 2 That he should yield up unto the Emperor all his munition; 3 That he should pay unto the Emperor 150000 Crowns. The same night he was by the Duke of Alva invited to supper, his sons-in-law of Saxony and Brandenbourg accompanying him. After supper he was contrary to the Laws of Hospitality, and the Emperor's exact promise, detained prisoner. The fallacy stood thus. In the Emperor's compact with the three Princes, the words were, that the Landgrave should be kept, Night in einig gefengknes, that is, Not in anyprison: which the Emperor's Secretary by a small dash of his pen, turned into, Night in ewig gefengknes, that is, Not in everlasting prison. Well, in prison he stayed five years, which being expired, he was again set at large by Duke Maurice, the overthrower and restorer of the Germane liberty. The residue of these Lantgraves in their several times, occur in the ensuing Catalogue of 

The LANTGRAVES of HASSIA.  
1263 1 Henry of Brabant, son of Henry, Duke of Brabant, and Sophia his wife, daughter of Lewis the sixth, Landgrave of Thuringia, after a nine years' war betwixt him and the marquis of Misnia divided the estate, and took unto himself the title of Landgrave of Hessen.  
1308 2 Otho and John, sons of Henry.  
1323 3 Henry II. and Lewis, sons of Otho.  
1376 4 Herman, the son of Lewis.  
1414 5 Lewis II. son of Herman, surnamed the Mild.  
1458 6 Lewis III. son of Lewis the Mild.  
7 William, the eldest son of Lewis the third, dispossessed of his Estate by  
8 William II. his youngest brother.  
1509 9 Philip, the famous Landgrave spoken of before, son of William the second.  
1567. 10 William III. eldest son of Philip, succeeded in one moiety of the estate and resided at Cassiles: the other moiety being divided betwixt his brethren Ludowick of Marpurg, and George of Darmstad, father of Ludowick of Darmstad before mentioned.  
1590. 11 Maurice, eldest son of William the third.  
12 William IV. son of Maurice, now living, 1648.    
The Arms of these Lantgraves are Azure, a Lion Barry of eight pieces, Arg. and Gules, Crowned Or.   

WESTPHALIA.  
WESTPHALIA is bounded on the East with Hassia, Brunswick, and part of Lunenberg: on the West with the Bishopric of Coleu, Cleveland, Overyssell, West and East-Friseland, and the Germane Ocean; on the North with the Elb, and the Dukedom of Holstein; and on the South with Weteravia, and some part of Hassia.  
It was thus called of the Westphali, a tribe or division of the Saxons, distinguished heretofore into the Transalbinos, inhabiting in the County of Holstein, now a part of Danemark; the Jostphali, betwixt the Elb, the Ocean, with the River of Saltza, and the Weser; taking up the Bishoprics of Breme, Verden, Hildesheim, Halberstat and Meydburg, with the Dukedoms of Lunenburg and Brunswick; the Angrivarians, taking up the northwest part of the modern Westphalen, betwixt the Bishopric of Breme, and the Earldom of Colen: and finally, the Westphali, or Western-Saxons, inhabiting the rest of the modern Westphalen with the Earldoms of Mark, Berg, Zulphen, the signory of Overyssell, and some parts of Guelderland and Holland: But the Saxons being subjugated by the power of the French, and several new estates erected out of that old stock: the remnant of the Westphali and Angrivarians, the Bishopric of Breme being added unto the account, were comprehended and united in the name of WESTPHALEN.  
The soil, according to the several parts of it, is of different natures, the parts adjoining to the Weser being desert, and barren, those towards the Earldoms of Mark and Bergen, mountainous and full of woods; the Bishopric of Bremen, except towards the Elb, full of dry sands, heaths, and unfruitful thickets, like the wild parts of Windsor Forrest betwixt Stanes and Fernham. In other parts exceeding plentiful of corn, and of excellent pasturage, stored with great plenty of wild fruits, and (by reason of the many woods) abundance of Acorns: 
Westphalen  with infinite herds of swine (which they breed up with those natural helps) of so good a relish, that a Gammon of Wesiphalian Bacon, is reckoned for a principal dish at a great man's Table.  
The old inhabitants hereof were the Chauci Majores about Bremen, the Chananis, Angrivarii, and Bructeri inhabiting about Munster, Osuaburg, and so towards the land of Colen; and part of the Cherusci (before spoken of) taking up those parts which lie nearest unto Brunswick and Lunenbourg. All of them vanquished by Drusus, the son-in-law of Augusius, but soon restored to their former liberty, by the great overthrow given by the Cherusci and their associates to Quintilius Varus. Afterwards uniting into one name with the French, they expulsed the Romans out of Gaul: leaving their forsaken, and ill-inhabited seats to be taken up by the Saxons; with whom the remainders of them did incorporate themselves both in name and nation. Of that great body it continued a considerable Member (both when a Kingdom and a Dukedom) till the proscription and deprivation of Duke Henry the Lion, at what time the parts beyond the Weser were usurped by Barnard, Bishop of Paderborn; those betwixt the Weser, and the Rhine by Philip, Archbishop of Colen, whose successors still hold the title of Dukes of Westphalen: the Bishoprics of Breme, Munster, Paderborn, and Mindaw, having been formerly endowed with goodly territories, had some accrewments also out of this Estate: every one catching hold of that which lay nearest to him. But not to make too many subdivisions of it, we will divide it only into these. two parts, Westphalen specially so called, and 2 the Bishopric of Bremen.  
In WESTPHALEN specially so called, which is that part hereof which lieth next to Cleveland, the places of most observation are, 1 Geseke, a town of good repute; 2 Brala, a village of great beauty; 3 Arusberg; and 4 Fredeborch, honoured with the title of Prefectures; 5 Wadenborch; 6 Homberg, lording it over fair and spacious territories. All which, with two Lordships, and eight Prefectures more, dispersed in the Dukedom of Engern, and County of Surland, belong unto the Bishop of Colen, the titulary Duke of Westphalen, and Angrivaria, (Engern) as he styles himself. 7 Mountabour, (perhaps Mont-Tabor) seated in that part hereof, which is called Westerwald; a town of consequence belonging to the Elector of Triers. 8 Rhenen; 9 Schamlat; and 10 Beekem, reasonable good towns, all of the Bishopric of Munster. 11 Munster itself, famous for the Treaty, and conclusions made upon that treaty, for the peace of Germany, seated upon the River Ems, and so called from a Monastery, here founded by Charles the great, which gave beginning to the Town; supposed to be that Mediolanium, which Ptolemy placeth in this tract, a beautiful, and well fortified City, and the See of a Bishop, who is also the Temporal Lord of it. Famous for the woeful Tragedies here acted by a lawless crew of Anabaptists, who chose themselves a King (that famous Tailor, John of Leiden) whom they called King of Zion, as they named the City New Jerusalem; proclaimed a community both of goods and women, cut off the heads of all that opposed their doings: and after many fanatic and desperate actions by the care and industry of the Bishop and his confederates brought to condign punishment. The Story is to be seen at large in Sleidan, and some modern pamphlets, wherein as in a Mirror, we may plainly see the face of the present times. 12 Osnaburg, first built, as some say, by Julius Caesar; as others by the Earls of Engern; but neither so ancient as the one, nor of so late a standing as the others make it; here being an Episcopal See founded by Charles the Great, who gave it all the privileges of an University. Liberally endowed at the first erection of the same, and since so well improved, both in Power, and Patrimony, that an alternate succession in it by the Dukes of Brunswick hath been concluded on in the Treaty of Munster, as a fit compensation for the Bishopric of Halberstad (otherwise disposed of by that Treaty) of late enjoyed wholly by that Family. 13 Quakenberg, on the River Hase, 14 Warendorp; and 15 Wildshusen, towns of that Bishopric. 16 Paderborn, an Episcopal See also, founded by Charles the Great, at the first conversion of the Saxons; more ancient than strong, yet more strong than beautiful. 17 Ringelenstein; and 18 Ossendorf, belonging to the Bishop of Paderborn. 19 Minden, upon the Weser, another of the Episcopal Sees founded by Charles the Great, and by him liberally endowed with a goodly Patrimony: converted to lay-uses since the Reformation, under colour of Administration of the goods of the Bishopric; and now by the conclusions at Munster settled for ever on the Electors of Brandenbourg, with the title of Prince of Minden. 20 Rintelin, a strong town, conveniently seated on the Weser, not far from Minden, to the Bishop whereof it doth belong.  
Hitherto one would think that Westphalen had formerly been a part of Saint Peter's Patrimony belonging wholly to the Clergy; but there are some Free Cities, and secular Princes which have shares therein, as 1 Warburg, a neat town, but seated on an uneven piece of ground near the River Dimula, a town which tradeth much in good Ale, brewed here, and sold in all parts of the Country: heretofore a County of itself under the Earls hereof, now governed in the nature of a Free Estate, and reckoned an Imperial City. 2 Brakel, accounted of as Imperial also. 3 Herv●rden, a town of good strength and note, governed by its own Laws and Magistrates, under the protection of Colen. 4 Lemgow, belonging heretofore to the Earls of Lip, but by them so well privileged and enfranchised, that now it governeth itself as a Free Estate. Here is also 5 The town and County of Ravensburg, belonging anciently to the Dukes of Cleve, and now in the rights of that house to the Elector of Brandenbourg: As also 6 the Town and County of Lip, lying on the west side of the Weser; the Pedigree of the Earls whereof some fetch from that Sp. Manlius, who defended the Roman Capitol against the Gau●s, 
Bremen.  (they might as well derive it from the Geese which preserved that Capitol:) others with greater modesty look no higher for it then to the times of Charles the Great, one of the noble Families of the ancient Saxons. Some other Lords and Earls here are; but these most considerable: all of them Homagers of the Empire, but their acknowledgements hereof little more than titular; though not long since in danger of performing more real services: the Emperor Ferdinand the 2. after the surprise of H●lstein, and some part of Danemark, anno 1627. gaining so far upon this Country, that had not the King of Sweden come in so seasonably he had made himself absolute master of it; and by the opportunity of the situation of it on the back of the Netherlands forced the United States to some great extremities. As for the title of Duke of Westphalen and Engern, it hath been long used (as before was said) by the Bishops of Colen: as also (but with better right) by the house of Lawenburg, descended from the ancient Electoral Family, writing themselves in that regard Dukes of Saxony, Wes●phalen, and Angravaria or Engern.  
2 The Bishopric of BREME lieth on the other side of the Weser, extending as far as to the Elb, and the Germane Ocean. So called of 1 Breme the principal City ●eated on the Weser, there broad and navigable; the City by that means well traded, populous, and rich, beautified with fair and even streets, and very strongly fortified against all Invasions both by Art and Nature; the town being so seated amongst Fens, occasioned by the overflowings of the River, that it may be easily drowned on all sides to keep off an Enemy: adorned with a spacious Marketplace, a fair Counsel-house, and a large Cathedral, the See of the Archbishop, who is the temporal Lord of the town and territory. Other Towns of especial note are 2 Osenbridge, not far from Breme, from whence great quantity of linen is brought yearly to England and other places. 3 Arusten on the Weser also. 4 Oterenberg, on the river Bolla, not far from the fall thereof into the Ocean. 5 Buxtertrude, on the Elb, not far from Hamburg, but on the hither side of the water. 6 Stood, Stadt, or Stadium, seated on the River Zuinghe, near the fall thereof into the Elb, accounted the ancientest town in all Saxony, and one of the first which was enroled amongst the Hanse, and by especial privilege had the pre-emption of all the Rhenish wine that passed by them, and the right also of coining money. But being overtopped by the power and trade of Hamburg, (5 Dutch miles from it) it grew at length so poor, and in such decay, that their yearly Revenues came but to 90 l. per annum, so that they were fain to sell their privileges to the Town of Hamburg, and put themselves under the protection of the Bishops of Breme: Revived again upon the coming thither of the English Merchants, who finding some hard measure from the Hamburgers fixed their Staple here: by means whereof the Citizens in short time grew exceeding wealthy: the buildings fair and beautiful, the town strongly fortified. Situate in a place so easily overwhelmed with water, that the people in ostentation of their strength and security used to have Ordinance of stone planted over their Gates. But the late Germane wars have made them sensible of their folly: when notwithstanding their new works and an English Garrison under Sir Charles Morgan, they were compelled to submit themselves to the Earl of Tilly, anno 1627. recovered after by the Swedes in the course of their victories.  
As for the Bishopric of Bremen it was first founded by Charles the Great in the person of Willibode an English Saxon, one of the first Preachers of the Gospel in these parts of this Country. The town before that time a poor Village only, being made an archiepiscopal See, and the Metropolitan of all the Churches of the North, quickly grew up into esteem, as the Bishops did in power and Patrimony, till they became Lords of all this tract. Governed since the Reformation of Religion, by Lay-Bishops or Adminisirators of the Rents of the Bishopric, which under that title they inverted to their proper use. And now of late by the Conclusions made at Munster settled as an inheritance on the Crown of Sweden to be enjoyed together with the Bishopric of Verda, by the Kings thereof with the title of Dukes of Breme and Verden: the ancient liberties of those Cities formerly granted by their Bishops, being still preserved.   

EASTFRISELAND.  
EASTFRISELAND is bounded on the East with the River Weser, by which parted from Westphalen; on the West with the River Ems which parteth it from Groyningen and the rest of West-Friseland; on the North with the Germane Ocean, and on the South with the Earldom of Mark, a part of Cleveland. So called from the Frisu, who casting out the old inhabitants possessed themselves of it, and called it by their own name Friesland: divided by the Ems or Amisus, into the Western spoken of amongst the Netherlands, and the Eastern or East-Friseland in which now we are.  
The nature of the soil we shall see anon when we come to the subdivisions of it. Chief Rivers, besides those of Ems, and 2 Weser, spoken of elsewhere, 3 Juda, which falleth into a great Bay o● Arm of the Ocean, called from hence Die Jadie. 4 Dalliart, on which standeth the City of Emdeu; 5 Delm, and 6 Honta, neighboured by Delmenhorst and Oldenborch, towns of this Country. The whole divided into 1 the County of Emden, or East-Friseland properly so called, and 2 the Earldom of Oldenburg.  
1 EASTFRISELAND specially so called, hath on the West the River Ems, on the North the Ocean, on the East and South the Earldom of Oldenbourg; called also the County of EMDEN, 
East Friesland.  from the fair Town of Emden, the chief City of it. The soil hereof is very fruitful both in corn and pasturage, sending great store of Oxen, Horses, Wool, Swine, Butter, Cheese, and all sorts of Grain into other Countries; all of them excellent in their kind, not easily to be bettered (if equalled) in any place whatsoever. Chief towns herein are 1 Emden, so called from the Ems, on which it is situate: D●llaert a small River falling here into it: a noted and well traded town, beautified with a Haven so deep & large, that the greatest ships with full sail are admitted into it. The people rich, affirmed to have 60 ships of 100 tuns apiece, and 600 lesser Barks of their own, besides 700 Busses and Fisher boats, maintained for the most part, by their Herring-fishing on the Coast of England. The buildings generally fair, both private and public, especially the Church, the Town-Hall, and Earls Palace. This last a strong and stately Castle, situate at the mouth of the Haven, and on all sides compassed by the Sea, and yet not strong enough to preserve the Townsmen in their due obedience: who about 50 years ago, taking advantage of the absence of their Earl, kept him out of their Town, because he seemed not to approve the Calvinian humour; and have since governed in the nature of a Commonwealth confederate with the States of the United Provinces, for their better establishment and support. So easily is Religion made a mask to disguise Rebellion. 2 Auricts, by some called Anseling, seated in the Inlands, rich, and well walled, of great resort by reason of the pleasure of Hunting, afforded very liberally in the Forests and Woods adjoining; drawing hither the Nobility and Gentry in great abundance. 3 Esen, on the Sea shore, which gives the title of an Earl to the Lord thereof, as doth also 4 Jevere, situate on the West of the River Jada, but both Earls subject to the Earl of East-Friseland. 5 Vredeburg (that is to say, the Free Village) so called from some Immunities granted by the Earls, possessed a while by those of Brunswick, who fenced and garrisoned it for themselves, but in the end recovered by Ezard the 2. Earl. 6 Broick, the seat and proper Government of the Ancestors of these Earls: from whence the parts adjoining are called Broickmerland. 7 Norden, another Praefecture or Captainship of the said Ancestors. 8 Dunort, a strong Castle and retiring place of the Earls. 9 Linghen, upon the Ems, a strong town well fortified and as well garrisoned, belonging to the King of Spain as Vicar to the Empire over all Friesland, even to Ditmersh and the confines of Danemark. A dignity procured by Maximilian, Grandfather to Charles the 5. of the Emperor Frederick the 3. in right whereof, the King of Spain as heir of the House of Burgundy, hath some pre-eminence over Emden, of little use to him since the falling off of the Belgic Provinces. More towns of note I find not in it, but of Castles, stately dwelling houses, and well built Villages, an incredible number, standing so thick that in many places they join together: some of them being withal so large, so well peopled, and of streets so spacious that they may compare with many Cities in Germany, of the which the most City-like is named Leer.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Chauci Minores, described by Pliny to be so barbarous a people, and so destitute of all necessary provision for the life of man, that they had no drink but rain water, preserved in great troughs before the doors of their Cottages. These outed or subdued by the Frisons, a neighbouring people possessing North-Holland, the District of Vtrecht, with the Countries of Groining and West-Friseland: who having once passed over the Ems, extended their Dominions as far as Danemark. Governed by Kings, but intermingled with and overpowered by the Saxons, till the time of Charles the Great, by whom the last King Roboald overcome in fight was persuaded to receive the Sacrament of holy Baptism. But being told that his friends and kinsfolks were in hell, because no Christians: Neither will I (said he) be of that profession, for I love to be amongst my kindred. After this Friesland was a Member of the French kingdom, till the erecting of the Earldom of Holland by Charles the Bald, anno 893. at which time all Friesland on the West side of the Ems was conferred upon him: possessed, but not with out much war and bloodshed, by his Successors; the Frisons ever and anon rebelling against them, and killing divers of them in the open field. Those parts of it on the other side of the Ems, remained unto the Germane Empire, governed by Deputies, Lieutenants, and Provincial Earls, accountable to the Emperors for their Administration, till the year 1453 in which ulrick Governor hereof for the Emperor Frederick, having got the Town of Emden out of the hands of the Hamburgers, was made Earl of East-Friseland, transmitting the Estate and title unto his posterity.  

EARLS of EASTFRISELAND.  
1453 1 Vlrieus son of Enno, the son of Ezardus, Captains or Governors for the Empire in Broick and Norden, made the first Earl of East-Friseland by the Emperor Frederick.  
1466 2 Ezard the son of Vlrick, who got Vreburg from the Citizens of Brunswick.  
1528 3 Enno the son of Ezard, who regained Greetzil, formerly usurped by the Dukes of Gelder's.  
1540 4 Ezard II. son of Enno, who married Katherine daughter to Gustavus the first of Sweden.  
5 Enno II. son of Ezard the 2. and the Lady Katherine.  
1586 6 Rudolphus Christianus son of Enno the 2. who being well affected to the Lutheran forms, (first introduced in the time of Enno the 1.) was by a Calvinian party grown up in Emden, dispossessed of that City, anno 1592.  
1608 7 Enno Ludovicus, son of Rudolphus Christianus, succeeded in this Earldom on the death of his Father, and is still living for aught I can hear unto the contrary.   
The Arms of the Earls of East-Friseland, are Azure, Semi of Billets Argent, 2 Lions Or.  
2. The Earldom of OLDENBOURG, 
Oldenburg.  containeth that part of this Country which lieth on the West side of the Weser, betwixt the Bishopric of Munster and East-Friseland, specially so called; and so extending Northwards to the Germane Ocean. So called from Oldenbourg the chief City of it, and the head of this Earldom.  
The soil hereof exceeding rich but in pastures specially, which breed them in time Herds of cattle; and furnish not this Country only, but some of their Germane neighbours, and many of the more Northern Nations with Horses, Beefs, Sheep, Swine, Butter, Cheese. Here is also good store of Pulse, Barley, and Oats, plenty of fruits and trees of all sorts. Large woods, and those well stored with Venison, which yield unto the Gentry the delights of hunting. But the air cold and foggy in some extremity, especially in Winter, and near the Sea.  
Chief towns hereof are, 1 Oldenborch on the River Honta, repaired if not built by Otho the Great, who founded the Church of S. John Baptist: A town of no great state or beauty, the houses generally of clay, but the Castle (the dwelling place of the Earls) of well hewn stones; of an Orbicular form with deep ditches of water, the Town and Castle both being strongly fortified. 2 Delmenhorst, on the river Dehm, a strong place and of great importance, built in the year 1247. by Otho brother of Earl Christian the 2. and having been 65 years in possession of the Bishops of Munster, was suddenly surprised on Palm Sunday morning by Anthony Earl of Oldenburg, anno 1547. continuing ever since part of this estate. 3 Beck-husen, on a River which falleth not far off into the great Bay or Arm of the Sea, which is called Die Jade. 4 E●uarten, 5 Ovelgard, both seated in a long Languet or Demy-Iland, betwixt the said Die Jade, and the River Weser, called Butiada, both taken, and the last well fortified by John Earl of Oldenborch, anno 1520. belonging formerly to the Prefecture of East Friesland, but never brought under the command of the Earls thereof. 6 Westerberg, the chief town, of a spacious territory. 7 Vrieiade, a strong piece, on the river Jade, built by Earl Christiern, one of the younger branches of the house of Oldenburg, about the year 1400. 8 Mellum, 9 Jadele, places of principal importance, the one on the river Jade, the other near the Ocean. Here is also within this Earldom the Province of Amerlander, supposed by some to have been the seat of the Ambrones, who accompanied the Cimbri and Teutones in their expedition towards the Roman Provinces, and were slain by Marius.  
As for the Earls of Oldenburg, they derive themselves from Walpert one of the Nephews of Witikindus, the last King and first Duke of the Saxons, who having built a strong Castle on the borders of Bremen in honour of his wife Alteburg, (whom hedearly loved) called it Alteburgum, so called by the Latinists to this day, by the Germans Oldenborch, about the year 850. But his male issue failing in Frederick the 7. Earl, it came to one Elimar, the son of Haio, a Noble man of the Frisian blood, who had married Richsa, the daughter of John, the fifth Earl of this Family. From him in a direct line descended Christian or Christiern, eldest son of Theodorick, who being fortunately advanced to the Crown of Danemark, anno 1448. lest his estate in this Earldom (but reserving the title, according to the fashion of Germany) to his brother Gerrard; the better to take him off from his pretensions to the Dukedom of Sleswick, and the Earldom of Holst, in which he did pretend a share. The Patrimony of it much improved by the addition of the Countries of Rustingen, Oystingen, and Wanger land, all lying on the Germane Sea, bequeathed by the last will and testament of the Lady Marie Countess of Jevere in East Friesland, to John Earl of Oldenburg, the third from Gerrard. The Succession of these Earls, in regard the Royal line of Danemark, and by consequence of Great Britain is descended from them, I have here subjoined, in this ensuing Catalogue of 

The EARLS of OLDENBOURG.  
850 1 Walpert, of the race of Witikind, the first Earl of Oldenburg.  
856 2 Theodorick, the son of Walpert.  
3 Theodorick II. son of Theodorick the 1.  
4 Otho son of Theodorick the 2.  
5 John, the son of Otho, accompanied the Emperor Henry the 2. in his wars against the Greeks and Saracens, anno 1007.  
6 Huno surnamed the Glorious, son of John.  
7 Frederick, son of Huno, fortunate in his wars against the Frisians, the last of the male line of this house.  
8 Elimarus, the son of Haio, a Noble man of the Frisian blood, and of Richsa his wife, the daughter of John the fifth Earl.  
1120 9 Elimarus II. the son of Elimar the 1.  
10 Christianus, son of Elimar the 2. surnamed the Courageous, or the Warlike, a professed enemy of Henry the Lion Duke of Saxony, from whom he took the City of Breme.  
11 Maurice, the son of Christian, an associate of Arnulph Earl of Holstein, in his wars with Danemark.  
12 Christian II. son of Maurice.  
13 John II. son of Christian the 2.  
14 John III. son of John the 2.  
15 Courade, 
Oldenbourg  the son of John the 3.  
16 Christian III. son of Conrade, a student in Colen, where initiated into holy Orders, which he relinquished much against the will of his brother Maurice, on the death of his Father.  
17 Theodorick, son of Christian the 3. the first Farl of Delmenhorst of this line, which fell to him by the death of Nicholas Archbishop of Breme, descended from a younger son of John the 2.  
1440 18 Christian IV. son of Theodorick, and of Heduigis sister and heir of Gerrard and Adolphus Dukes of Sleswick and Earls of Holstein, elected on the commendation of his Uncle Adolphus to the Crown of Danemark, anno 1448.  
1448 19 Gerrard the brother of Christian the 4. a Prince of an unquiet spirit, always in wars, and always worsted; he lost the Town of Delmenhorst to the Bishop of Munster.  
1500 20 John IV. son of Gerrard, repaired the ruins of his Estate, and settled the distractions of it in the time of his Father, being then in exile; and after very much enlarged it by the reduction of Butiada.  
1526 21 Antony, the son of John the 4. by a sudden surprise recovered D●lmenhorst from the Bishop of Munster, anno 1547. which he strongly fortified.  
1573 22 John V. son of Antony, enlarged this Earldom with the Provinces of Fustingen, Oystingen, and Wangerland, bequeathed to him by the last will of the Countene of Jevere in East Friesland.  
23 Anthome II. brother of John the 5. in whose life time he was Earl of Delmenhorst, and after his death of Oldenburg also: still living, anno 1649. for aught I can learn unto the contrary.    
And thus we see the present estate of Germany, distracted and divided amongst many Princes, Prelates and Incorporate Towns, the chief of which are herein mentioned and described. But besides these there are many others of less note, and smaller Territories, which yet are absolute and free: insomuch, that in one days riding, a Traveller may twice or thrice meet with divers laws, and divers coins; every free Prince and free City (whose laws the Emperors are sworn to keep inviolable) having power to make what laws, and coin what money they will. And hence in the censure of Kingdoms, the King of Spain is said to be Rex hominum, because of his Subjects reasonable obedience; the King of France, Rex Asinorum, because of their infinite taxes and impositions; the King of England, Rex Diabolorum, because of his Subjects often insurrections against, and depositions of their Princes: but the Emperor of Germany, is called Rex Regum, because there is such a number of Reguli, or Free Princes which live under his command; or rather at their own command, (for they do even what they list) as the Emperor Maximilian the first, well noted.  
And to say truth, the public Government hereof is nothing less than Monarchical: the Emperor being accounted amongst the Princes but as the chief Officer of the Empire, not reckoned of by Bodin and others of our great Statists and Civilians, as an absolute Monarch; such as the Kings of England, France, and Spain, are confessed to be. For the privileges of the Free Cities being made perpetual, the great Estates hereditary, and the Empire eligible: the Emperors were brought at last to such low condition, as to be made accountable to the States of the Empire: who if they be persuaded in their consciences, or but think they be so, that he is likely by his maladministration to destroy the Empire, or that he will not harken unto good advice, ab Electorum Collegio Caesarea majes●a●● privari potest (as my Author hath it) he may be deprived by the Electors, and a more sit and able man chosen into the place: and that too as the Emperor Jodocus Barbatus hath declared in one of his Constitutions, anno 1410, sine infidelitatis vel Rebelli●nis crimine, without incurring the crimes of treason or disloyalty. So that the supreme power and majesty of the Empire seems to reside especially and contractedly in the Electoral College; diffusedly in the Imperial Diets, by way of execution in the Chamber of Spires, and other the supreme Courts of the several Circles. But that which makes that 〈◊〉 which they call the Empire, is the Assembly of the Prelates, Princes and Commissioners of the Free Cities in their Diets or Parliaments, the Emperor presiding in them: whom he that saw adorned in his royal R●bes with the Imperial Crown and Sceptre, with the titles of Caesar and Augustus given at every word, would think that the whole action did take life from him. Whereas indeed he hath not so much privilege as a negative voice, but is to put in execution such Decrees and Sanctions as these estates assembled have thought fit to make; not able to do any Act by his own authority, which may speak him Emperor. But on the other side the Princes take power unto themselves, of making laws for, and imposing taxes on their subjects: of raising war upon one another or against a third, and doing many other Acts of supreme authority which in the Emperor would be counted matters of maladministration. Such points as these, together with the appointing of Judges and the like chief Magistrates (as they relate unto the Empire) are not to be concluded of but in general Diets, which may be summoned by or without the Emperor, as occasion serveth. And to this weakening of the majesty and power Imperial, the neighbouring Princes have afforded their best assistance; jealous of their own interest and decrease of power, if that vast body so well limbed 〈◊〉 be strongly jointed, and all the several Members of it united under the command of one Supre●● head. Clear proof whereof we have in those solemn leagues and confederations made in their several times against Charles the 5. and the late Emperor Ferdinand the 2. as soon as they began to be in some possibility of settling the Imperial majesty in its proper splendour, and bringing down the Princes to a lower pitch.  
As for the Forces of the Empire, for by that name we are to measure the abilities and power of Germany, we may discern them by those Levies which have been raised upon particular occasions, or by the joint consent of the Free Estates assembled in the Imperial Diets. First for particular Levies made by private persons, we find 12000 Foot and 8000 Horse raised by the Prince Palatine of Zweybruck for aid of the French Hugonots against their King; and on the other side no fewer than 7000 Horse under the conduct of the Duke of Aumal, and the Earl of Mansfield for the service of that King against the Hugonots. And as for Levies made by consent of the States, we find that Charles the 5. had under his Ensigns at Vienna, 90000 Foot and 35000 Horse; Maximilian the 2. at Javerin in Hungary, 34000 Horse, and full 100000 Foot; and finally that in the war betwixt Charles the 5. and the Protestant Princes there were no less than 150000 men on both sides; which numbers no one Country in Europe is able to equal. In a word, it is generally conceived that the Empire is able to raise 200000 Horse and Foot, with Arms, Canon and Ammunition of all sorts, proportionable; which the instances before brought do most plainly evidence.  
Touching the Revenue of the Empire, I find them estimated by Boterus, and some others since at seven millions of Crowns yearly. Which may be true enough, taking the Kingdoms of Hungary and Bohemia, with the hereditary Estates of Austria into the account. But since they are not so united unto the Empire, but they may at some time or other be disjoined again, no reason they should come into the reckoning, unless it be as the Revenue of the Emperor, though not of the Empire. But as for the Revenue of the Empire itself, taken abstractedly from the personal and patrimonial Estate of the Emperor, whosoever he be; it can amount to no such sum: the tribute paid by the Free or Imperial Cities (at least 60 in number) amounting to no more per annum then 15000 Florent or 1500 l. English; and what is that but like a Pepper corn for a quitrent in that mighty Continent. By this we may conjecture what the rest may come to. And though in the way of saving charges (which may be reckoned as a part of his income also) the Princes and Free Cities be bound to aid him in the time of war against the Turk with 3842 Horse and 16200 Foot, which he may challenge without troubling the Diets for it: yet war is such a great devourer, that if the Diets do not grant him greater helps, he is like to be but a sorry gainer by the undertaking; besides the smallness of those forces considered with the numbers they are able to raise, and the puissance of the enemy whom they are to encounter.  
Finally for the Arms of the Empire, they are Sol, an Eagle displayed with two heads, Saturn, armed and crowned Mars: the two heads signifying (as some think) the Eastern and the Western Empires. Cuspinian a learned Germane conceives rather that these Arms are two Eagles conjoined, and not one Eagle with two heads: and that they were taken up by the Germane Nation in memory of the three Legions of Quintilius Varus discomfited by them; at what time they seized on two of the Roman Eagles (the Military Ensign of that people) the third being cast into the Fens by the Standard bearer. But whether it be one or two, certain it is that the one head is quite pulled off; and the whole body quite stripped of all its Feathers, the Imperial dignity being little more than titular, despoiled and stripped of all Authority appertaining to it.  
There are in Germany Archbishops 6. Bishops 34. Universities 21. Viz. 

1 Colen.  
2 Triers.  
3 Ments.  
4 Heidelberg.  
5 Tubingen.  
6 Ingolstade.  
7 Viennae.  
8 Herborn.  
9 Hanaw.  
10 Wirtenberg.  
11 Friberg.  
12 Altorf.  
13 Prague.  
14 Olmunts.  
15 Frankford.  
16 Rostock.  
17 Gripswald.  
18 Jene.  
19 Lipsique.  
20 Wittenberg.  
21 Marpurg.     
And so much for GERMANY.   

OF DENMARK.  
THE Kingdom of DENMARK or DENEMARK, reckoning in the additions of the Dukedom of Holstein and the great continent of Norway with the Isles thereof, now all united and incorporated into one Estate; is bounded on the East with the Baltic Sea, and some part of Sweden; on the West with the main Western Ocean; on the North-east with a part of Sweden; full North with the main Frozen Seas; and on the South with Germany, from which divided on the South-west by the River Albis; and on the Southeast by the Trave; a little Isthmus or neck of Land uniting it to that Continent.  
It took this name from the Danes, of long times the Inhabitants and Possessors of it; so called quasi Danorum tractus sive Regio, (as Mercator hath it,) because the Country of that people: but rather quasi Danorum limbs, the bounds or marches of the Danes, bordering close upon the Dutch, from whom it had the name of Danemarch.  
As for the situation of it in regard of the Heavens, it lieth partly in the Northern temperate Zone, and partly within the Arctic Circle, extending from the middle Parallel of the tenth Clime, or 55. degree of Latitude, where it joineth with Germany, as far as the 71 degree, where it hath no other bound but the Frozen Ocean. By which account the longest day in the most Southern parts hereof is 17 hours and a quarter, but in the parts extremely North, they have no night for two whole months, three weeks, one day, and some seven hours over, as on the other side no day for the like quantity of time, when the Sun is most remote from them in the other Tropic. The air hereof by consequence must be sharp and bitter, even in the very warmest places: Of which and of the nature of the soil we shall speak more punctually in the Description and Survey of the several parts.  
The Inhabitants generally are of good stature, clear of complexion, well coloured, for the most part healthful and long-lived: for though they eat and drink beyond measure, they have good digestions. In manners very severe, crafty and provident in the managing of their Affairs; but proud withal, and (as the Historian said of another person) omnium quae dixerant fecerantve ostentatores, great Vaunters of whatsoever they do or say, highly opinionated of their own actions, and peremptory in maintaining their own opinions: Religious observers of their words and contracts, and strict in executing justice, especially in punishing of Thiefs and Pirates: Such of them as do follow the wars prove reasonable good Soldiers both by Sea and I and; but fitter for the Sea than field-service: the Magistrate wise rather by experience then study: though they love learning, and easily attain all languages which they give their minds to: the old men covetous, the young men thrifty, and the Merchant ambitious: the Nobility and Gentry are generally of as ancient families as most in Christendom, here being some of those houses still remaining, which were present at the pacification made betwixt Charles the Cr●at and Hemingus King of the Danes: and which adds much unto their honour, they keep their blaud unmixed from marriages with the Vulgar sort, and reckon it for an high disgrace to change their Arms, or make any addition thereunto. The women are fair, discreet and comteous, and know well how to govern their households; 
The Cimbrick Chersonese.  exceeding fruitful in bearing Children, but delivered of them with great difficulty. Both Sex's speak the Dutch or Germane, common (but with some difference in the pronunciation) to all the Northern Nations in Norwey and Swethland.  
The Christian faith was first preached to those of Holstein (the next neighbouring Country unto Germany) by S. A●garius Bishop of Bremen, the general Apostle of those Northern parts, in the year 826. Lewis the Godly then being Emperor of the West. In whose time Harald King of Denmark being expulsed his Kingdoms by the sons of Godfrey or Gottri●●s, was baptised at Mentz with a great number of that people which attended on him, by the hands of Ebbo Archbishop of Rheims, employed by the Emperor in that service: the conversion of the whole Nation following not long after, by the power and diligence of the Emperor Otho the first, assisted by the Ministry of one Poppo the first Bishop of Arthusen, Sueno, or Swain, then reigning amongst the Danes. The Norwegians came not in till after, converted in the reign of Olaus the third, anno 1055 or thereabouts: the English assisting in the work, and the good King so zealous in it, that he was canonised a Saint, after his decease. Relapsing for the most part to their ancient Gentilism, they were finally regained unto Christianity, by the means of Pope Adrian the fourth, an English man, about the year 1156. before his assuming of the Popedom called Nicolaus Breakspeare. But by whomsoever first converted, the Popes of Rome would needs pretend some power and jurisdiction over them, which when they began to exercise with too much authority, Waldemar the third is said to have returned this answer, Naturam habemus a deo, Regnum a subditis, Divitias a Parentibus, Religionem a Romana Ecclesia, quam si nobis invides renunciamus per praesentes, that is to say, We hold our life from God, our Crown from our subjects, our Riches from our Ancestors, our Religion from the Church of Rome; which if we envy us, we do here remit it by these presents. But this renunciation though then threatened, was not made till afterwards: when the whole mass of Popery was abolished by King Frederick the first, using therein the Ministry of John Bugenhage a Divine of Pomeren; by whom reform according to the doctrine of the Luthoran Churches.  
As for the Government of the Church since that Reformation, it continueth as before it was, by Archbishops and Bishops in number as before, but much abridged of their Revenues, and a great part of their power. For Frederick, though he found it necessary to remove the old Bishops, (not one of which would be persuaded to the change of Religion) yet he substituted others in their places: allowing them a convenient maintenance, with a power of Presidence in all Church-Assemblies, where they are to take the advice of other Presbyters along with them; and out of such Assemblies to receive complaints, to provide remedy against scandals, and to order all matters, as peculiar Inspectors, which concern the Church. So that in all the King's Dominions there are two Archbishops, and thirteen Bishops: that is to say, the Archbishop of Londen, the Bishops of Roschilt, Odensee, Ripen, Wiborch, Arth●son, Sleswick, and Hadersleve, for the Kingdom of Denmark; the Archbishop of Nidrosi●, the Bishops of Bergen, Anslo, Stuffanger, and Hammer, for the Realm of Norwey; and the Bishops of Holor and Schulhel, for the Isle of Iseland: the Churches of Holstein, (formerly under the Bishops of Hamburg and Lubeck) being governed by Superintendents as the rest of the Lutherans.  
The whole body of the estate (as appears by this) confifteth chiefly of three members; viz. 1 the Dukedom of Holstein, containing Wagerland, Ditmarsh, Stormaria and Holstein specially so called: 2 the Kingdom of Denmark comprehending both Juitlands, part of Scandio, and the Hemodes or Baltic Islands: and 3 the Kingdom of Norwey, consisting of Norwey itself, and the Islands of the Northern Ocean. Which parts we shall survey in order, as before laid down, premising first a word or two of the Cimbrick Chersonese, in which the Dukedom of Holstein, and the two I●●●lands are contained.  

The CIMBRICK CHERSONESE.  
The CIMBRICK CHERSONESE, hath on the East the Baltic Sea; on the West the main Germane Ocean; on the North the narrow Straight of Fretum which they call the Sunde; on the South-west the great river of Albis; on the Southeast the small River of Trave; betwixt which is the neck or I●thmus which unites it to Germante. I know that some contract it into narrower bounds, and limit it upon the South with the river Eydore: but I have drawn it down to the E●ve and the Trave, which give it more resemblance to the Chersonese or Demy-Island then the other doth▪ diffenting in this point from the common opinion. It had the name of Chersonesus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, a terra & insula, it being the same with a Peninsula in the Latin: of which name there were five most famous, that is to say, 1 〈◊〉 in Greece, which is now called Morea; 2 Thracia Chersonesus in Thra●●, near the Sea Propontis; 3 ●aurica Ghersonesus in the ●uxine Sea, now a part of T●rtarie; 4 Aure● Chersonesus in India, which we now call Ma●●ca; of all which we shall speak in their proper places) and 5 Cimbric● Chersonesus, where now we are. This ●ast so called from the Cimbri, the first inhabitants hereof, originally descended from Gomer the son of Japhet, thence called Gomerii, and Cimmeri●, by contraction Cimbric Leaving the plains of Phrygia, as too narrow for them, they sought out new dwellings, and are said to have first dwelled in the banks of Palus 〈◊〉, where they gave name to Bosphorus Cimmerius, there being. Being overcome by the Scythians, they removed their seats more Northward into a Country bounded, according to Plutarch, by the great Ocean, on the one side; and the forest of Her●●in, on the other; within in which bounds is the Peninsula or country where we now are. 
Wagerland.  They were a people of extraordinary big stature, having blue and red eyes, and lived most upon theft: so that for their sakes, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the Germans called all thiefs Cimbers. It happened that the Ocean overflowing a great part of their Country, compelled them to seek new seats: whereupon in great multitudes abandoning their dwellings, they petitioned the Romans, then lording over a great part of the World, for some place to settle in. This request being denied, they proceeded in another manner, winning with their swords, what their Petitions could not obtain. Manlius, Sillanus, and Cepio, all Roman Consuls perished by them; so that now (saith Florus) Actum esset de Imperio Romano nisi ille seculo Marius contigisset: for he, as we have elsewhere told you, utterly overthrew them. The next Inhabitans hereof were the Saxons, juites, and Angles, upon whose removal into Britain the greatest part of it was peopled by the Danes, who still possess it.  
It containeth in length about 100 Italian miles, and 80 of the same miles in the breadth; and comprehendeth in that tract or extent of ground, 30 walled towns, 6 Episcopal Sees, (besides those of Hamburg and Lubeck, which are under the Archbishop of Bremen) and 20 Royal Castles and Palaces, as well for the reception of the Nobles and great men of the Country, as the private retirements of the King. The soil naturally more fit for pasturage then tillage; feeding such multitudes of Oxen, that from hence no fewer than 50000 are sent yearly to Germany. Divided at the present into the Dukedom of Holstein, and the Province of juitland.   

1. HOLSTEIN.  
The Dukedom of HOLSTEIN taketh up the Southern part of the Cimbrick Chersonese where it joins to Germany, extending as far North, as the River Eydore, which divides it from Juitland. So called from the Dutch word Holt, which signifies a Wood or Forrest, according to the nature of it; the Country being low, marshy and full of Woods, as it continueth to this day. It contains in it these four Provinces, 1 Wagerland, 2 Stormarsh, 3 Ditmarsh, and 4 Holst, or Holstein specially so called.  
1. WAGERLAND is that part of Holstein which lies on the South East of this Chersonese, bounded on the East with Mecklenbourg and the Baltic sea; on the West with Holstein specially so called; on the North with the Sea Baltic also; on the South withsome part of Mecklenbourg. So called from the Wagrii, a Tribe or Nation of the Sclaves who possessed this tract; from whence the name of Wagria in our Latin writers.  
Chief towns hereof are 1 Lubeck, pleasantly seated on the confluence of the Trave and the Billow, near the fall thereof into the Baltic from which distant five Italian miles. The River capable of ships of a thousand Tun, which commonly they unlade at Tremuren, the Port Town to the City, seated upon the very brink of the Sea, where the united Rivers have their fall into it, it was first built by Adolph the second Earl of Holstein, anno 1143. but so well privileged by him and his next successors, that in short time it bid defiance to its founders, (the cause of many differences betwixt it and those Princes) and was made a Dukedom of itself. By Frederick the first it was united to the Empire, after whose death they chose themselves another Duke, who having governed them five years was subdued by the Danes, and the City made subject to that Kingdom; remaining so till delivered by the Emperor Frederick the second. By whom being once again enfranchised, it became Imperial: afterwards listed amongst the Hansetownes, and the first in estimation of all the company, having above 600 ships of all sorts (some of a thousand Tun and and upwards) which belong unto it. But being their Trade is for the most part on the Baltic Seas, which are generally free from Pirates, they are most of them built for burden, and are slow of sail, and little serviceable, if at all, for a fight at Sea. But to return unto the City, it is built upon all the sides of a rising hill, on the top whereof standeth the Church of Saint Marie, (once the Cathedral of the City, for it was Episcopal) whence is a descent to all the gates of the City, affording to the Eye a most pleasing prospect. The buildings very beautiful, and all of brick, the streets straight and even; the Churches (ten in number) in good repair, adorned with excellent imagery, and much admired even by skilful workmen: and unto every private house a pipe of water is conveyed from the public Conduit; according to the pattern whereof it hath been observed that the Condu●ts were first made in London, and other places. In a word, there is not any City of Germany, or the more Northern Countries, which can equalise it either for the beauty and uniformity of the houses, the pleasant gardens, fair streets, delightful walks without the walls, or for the Citizens themselves, who are much commended for their civility to strangers, and strict execution of justice without partiality. The whole in compass about six miles, fortified with a double wall, deep ditches, and unfordable Rivers. 2 Segeberg on the River Trave, four Dutch miles from Lubeck, and near the head of that River. 3 Oldeslo on the same River, in the midst betwixt both. 4 Gronneb●rg, and 5 Newkirk on the Baltic shore: and 6 Stendorp more within the land, near the edge of a lake out of which runs the River Suentin.  
Southwest of Wagerland lieth STORMARSH, betwixt the Elb and two less Rivers called the Billen and the Store; from which last and the marishnesse of the situation, or from that River and the Marfis, once the Inhabitants hereof, comes the name of Storemarsh. Places of most importance are 1 Crempe, 
Stormarsh.  on a little River so named, which falls not far off into the Store, and both together not much further into the Elb. A town well fortified by Christian the fourth, and reckoned one of the Keys of the Kingdom; as well appears by the resistance which it made to the Duke of Fri●land, against whom it held out 13 months, and yielded at the last upon good conditions, anno 1628. 2 Tychenberg, (Tychopolis my Author calls it) a Dutch mile from Crempe, but on the very bank of the river Elb, where it receives the Rhin, a small River upon which it is seated: first built and after very well fortified by Christiern the fourth, of purpose to command the Elb, and put a stronger bridle in the mouths of the Hamburgers, anno 1603. now held to be the strongest piece of all his Dominions; the only Town of all this Dukedom, which yielded not to the prevailing Imperialists in their late wars against the Danes, anno 1628. 3 Bredenberg a strong town, belonging to the Rantzoves, one of the best pieces of the Kingdom; remarkable for the stout resistance which it made to Wallenstein, (Duke of Fridland) in the war aforesaid: who at last taking it by assault put all the soldiers to the sword. 4 Pippenberg, another strong place, and of very great consequence. 5 Jetzebo, on the River Store. 6 Gluck-Stude, upon a Creek or Bay of the Germane Ocean, repaired and fortified by the said Christiern the fourth (who much delighted in the place) to command the passage up the Elb. 7 Store. 8 Hamburg upon the Billen, where it falls into the Elb; an ancient City built in the time of the Saxons, repaired by Charles the Great, and walled by the Emperor Henry the fourth. Accounted since that time an Imperial City, and made one of the Hanse on the first incorporating of those Towns. Which notwithstanding on a controversy arising about that time, betwixt the Earl of Holstein and the people hereof, it was adjudged to belong to the Earls of Holst, and that determination ratified by Charles the fourth, anno 1374. In pursuance whereof the Hamburgers took the Oath of Allegiance to Christiern Earl of Oldenburg, the first King of Denmark of that house, as Earl of Holst; acknowledging him and his successors for their lawful Lords: though since they have endeavoured to shake off that yoke, presuming very much on their power at Sea, and the assistance which they are assured of upon all occasions from the rest of the Hansetownes. As for the Town itself it is seated in a large plain, with fat and rich pastures round about it: well fortified by art and nature: the Haven being shut up with a strong iron chain. The buildings for the most part of brick, but more beautiful than well contrived, and the streets somewhat of the narrowest. The public str●ctures very fair, especially the Counsel house adorned with the statuas of the nine Worthies carved with very great Art; the Exchange or meeting place for Merchants, and nine large Churches. The Citizens generally rich, masters of many as great ships as sail on the Ocean, some of them 1200 tun in burden; which bring in great profit besides the great resort of Merchants and their Factors from most places else: sometimes the Staple town for the Cloth of England, removed on some discontents to Stood, and from thence to Holland. It is observed that there was in this town at one time 177 Brewers, and but 40 Bakers, nor more than one Lawyer and one Physician. The reason of which disproportion was, that a Cup of Nimis was their only Physic; their differences sooner ended over a Can then by order of Law; and Bread being accounted but a binder, and so not to be used but in case of necessity.  
Betwixt the River's Store and Eydore, coasting along the Germane Ocean lies the Province of DITMARSH, most properly called Tuitschmarsh, from the marishnesse of the ground and the Dutch Inhabitants, or from a mixture of those people with the Marsi spoken of before. The people being naturally of the Saxon race, retain much of the stomach and animosity of the Ancient Saxons: never brought under the command of the Earls of Holst (as Wagerland and Storemarsh were) till Holst itself was joined to the Crown of Denmark. And though it was aliened from the Empire by Frederick the third, and given in Fee to Christiern Earl of Oldenburg, the first King of that house, anno 1474. yet would they not submit unto his authority; but held it out against him and some of his successors, whom in the year 1500 they vanquished in the open field; till broken and made subject by the valour and good fortune of King Frederick the second, anno 1559. Chief places in it are 1 Meldorp upon the Ocean, the chief Town of the Province; the Inhabitants of which are so wealthy, that many of them cover their houses with copper. 2 Lond●n, opposite to a Peninsula or Demi-Island called Elderstede, on the West side whereof it standeth. 3 Heininckste, and 4 Tellinckste; of which nothing memorable.  
And as for HOLSTEIN itself, the fourth and last member of this Estate, though the first in power and reputation, it taketh up the Inland parts betwixt Storemarsh and Juitland, save that it hath an outlet into the Baltic, on the Northwest of Wagerland. Chief places in the which are 1 Kyel (Chilonium in Latin) seated upon a navigable Arm of the Baltic Sea, parting Wagerland from the Dukedom of Sleswick: a Town well traded, and having a capacious haven, seldom without good store of shipping from Germany, Lifeland, Sweden, and the rest of Denmark. 2 Rendesberg, the best fortified piece in all this Province. 3 Niemunster, on the Northwest of the Sore, not far from the head of it. 4 Wilstre, on a small River so called. 5 Bramstede, 6 Borsholm, not much observable: but for a Monastery in which Henry one of the Earls hereof (of a younger house) turned Monk and died, anno 1241.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this and the other three, were the Saxons, Sigalones, and Subalingii, placed here by Ptolemie; whom I conceive to be no other than some Tribes of the Cimbri, of whom this Chersonese took name. The two last passing into the name of the first, and in the declination of the Roman Empire marching over the Elb, and spreading all along the Coasts of the Germane Ocean, molested with their piracies and depredations, the shores of Britain. Known by that means unto the Britain's, 
Holstein.  they were invited to assist them against the Scots: which action with the aid of the Juites and Angli, (Inhabitants together with them of the Cimbrick Chersonese) they performed so honestly, as to make themselves masters of the best part of the Island. Such as remained behind not being able to defend their own against the Sclaves, were fain to quit the parts lying next to Mecklenburg: which being peopled by the Wagrii, took the name of Wagerland. But the Saxons being vanquished by Charles the Great, these on the North side of the Elb, became a part of the great Dukedom of Saxony; and so continued till dismembered by Lotharius both Duke and Emperor: who gave the proper Holst (or Holstein specially so called) with the Province of Storemarsh to Adolph Earl of Schaumburg, who had deserved well of him in his wars, with the title of Earl of Holstein, anno 1114. By Adolph the second his successor, who having made a full conquest of it, caused it to be planted with Colonies of Dutch or Germans, from Holland, Wes●phalen, and Friesland; by which means the name of Sclaves was at last worn out. By G●rrard the fifth the Dukedom of Sleswick, was also conferred upon him by the bounty of Margaret Queen of Denmark, in whose wars he served. Adolph the last Earl of this house dying without issue, the whole Estate fell on Christiern, son of Theodorick Earl of Olderburg and Heduigis his wife, sister and heir to Adolph before mentioned: who being called to the Crown of Denmark, compounded with his brother Gerrard for the sum of 50000 Marks; and having gotten Ditmarsh also of the Emperor Frederick the third, prevailed so far as to have the whole Estate erected into a Dukedom, Anno 1474. to be held by him and his successors of the sacred Empire. Which said, we will next add the Catalogue of 

The EARLS and DUKES of HOLSTEIN.  
1114 1 Adolph of Schomberg, by Lotharius Emperor and Duke of Saxony made the first Earl of Holstein.  
1137 2 Adolph II. son of Adolph the first.  
1164 3 Adolph III. son of Adolph the second, vanquished by Canutus' King of the Danes, lost himself and his Country.  
1232 4 Adolph IV. in his father's life time recovered his estate from Waldemar the successor of Canutus, overcome by him in a well-fought field, anno 1226. his father then prisoner to the Danes.  
1261 5 Gerrard the second son of Adolph the fourth, his elder brother John making choice of Wagerland, succeeded in Holstein.  
1281 6 Henry the son of Gerrard, the first that set up a customhouse at Hamburg, for receipt of his tols and taxes.  
1310 7 Gerrard II. son of Henry, slain treacherously by the Danes.  
1339 8 Henry II. son of Gerrard the second.  
1381 9 Gerrard III. son of Henry the second created the first Duke of Sleswick by Queen Margaret of Denmark.  
1404 10 Henry III. son of Gerrard the third.  
1427 11 Adolphus V. commonly called the XII. (those of the younger houses being reckoned in) the last Earl of this house.  
1459 12 Christiern of Oldenburg, King of Denmark, Sweden, and Norwey, son of Theodorick Earl of Oldenburg and his wife Heduigis, sister of Henry, and Adolphus the two last Earls, succeeded in the Earldom of Holstein, enlarged with the addition of Ditmarsh, and erected into a Dukedom by the Emperor Frederick the third, anno 1474. But seeing that Otho Earl of Schemberg, pretended a right unto the whole as the next heir male, according to the constitutions of the Empire of which it was holden; and Gerrard the brother of Christiern put in for his share, according to the ill custom of Germany, of which it was then counted part, he was fain to buy his peace of both: giving to Otho 43000 Florins in ready money, with the Towns of Pinnenberg, Haltzburg, and Bramstede, the ancient possessions of the Earls of Schomberg, and 50000 marks to his brother Gerrard, besides his whole interest in the Earldom of Oldenbourg, as before was said. By this means Holstein was united to the Crown of Denmark, the Kings whereof as Dukes of Holst, being counted Princes of the Empire; but neither send unto the ●i●ts, nor contribute any thing at all to the public taxes, nor acknowledge any kind of subjection to it, more than merely titularie. Only it was ordained at the request of the subjects, when first they were incorporated into that Kingdom, that in case of any grievance or unjust sentence in the ordinary courts of justice, wherein they found no remedy in the supreme council of the Province, it might be lawful for them to appeal to the Imperial Chamber, as they had done formerly. Which as it was granted to content them at the present time, on sufficient caution, so hath it seldom or never been put in practice: the very grant or privilege (if such it were) being in a manner worn out of memory. But since this uniting of the two Estates, the title of Duke of Holstein, and a good part of the Country, was given unto A●●lphus, brother of Christiern the third (created by Queen Elizabeth one of the Knights of the Garter anno 1560) who governed it interchangeably with the King in their several turns: after whose death, and the death of all his children dying without issue male, the title of it was conferred on Vlrick son of Frederick the second, and brother of Christiern the fourth, created Knight of the Ga●●er by King James, anno 16●5.     

JVITLAND. 
Juitland.   
IVITLAND, containeth all the rest of the Cimbrick Chersonese, divided from the Dukedom of Holst by the River Eydore, the ancient boundary betwixt the Saxons and the Danes: but principally by a long trench and wall from one Sea to the other, of such breadth that a chariot or two horsemen a breast might ride upon it. First built in imitation of the Picts wall in England, by Godfrey King of Danemark in the time of Charles the Great: either to hinder the daily incursions of the Saxons, as some; or to stop the current of the victories of the said Charles, as others think. The tract whereof, still very easy to be seen, is called Dennewerck, (or the Danes work) to this very day.  
It was so called from the Juites, who together with the Angli, and neighbouring Saxons, made a conquest of the best part of Britain. The Country so abounding in cattle, that it sendeth yearly into Germany 50000 Oxen, besides great store of Butter, Cheese, Tallow, Hides and Horses; divided commonly into North-Juitland, dnd South-Juitland, or Juitland specially so called, and the Dukedom of Sleswick.  
SOUTH-IVITLAND, or the Dukedom of SLESWICK, is that part of the Cimbrian Chersonese which lies next to Holstein: called South-Juitland from the Southern situation of it, and Sleswick from the chief Town of it, and the head of this Dukedom. The Country for the most part plain, little swelled with mountains: the fields whereof do interchangeably yield both fish and corn. For during one three years they sow it constantly, and reap the fruits of it: and for the next three, let the Pools overflow the land, to the end the fish may eat up the grass (whom they catch as often as they please) and the mud which is left behind inricheth the soil. But besides their Pools, they have also on the Baltic shores many goodly Bays not only commodious for Merchants, but well stored with fish, and with Salmon specially.  
Chief Towns herein are 1 Flensburg, seated amongst very high Mountains on the shore of the Baltic Sea, where there is a Port so deep, so safe, and so commodious, that all the Inhabitants thereof in a manner may lad and unlade their ships close to their houses. 2 Husem, upon the Germane Ocean, nor far from the mouth of the River Edore. 3 Hadersleve, a Bishop See, if not rather some town or manor of the Bishops of Sleswick, situate on a Navigable inlet of the Baltic Sea, wherewith it it is almost encompassed; beautified with the fair Castle of Hansburg, begun by John the eldest son of king Christiern the first, than Duke of Holst; but finished by Frederick the second King of Denmark. 4 Londenberg in the Peninsula called Eldersted●, over against De Sorants, an Island of the Germane Ocean. 5 Sternberg, the ordinary residence of the Governor for the King of Denmark. 6 Gottorp a strong Fort or Castle of the Duke of Sleswicks, at the end of a large Bay or Inlet of the Baltic also: remarkable for the Toll-booth, or customhouse there erected, at which there is Toll paid one year with another for 50000 Oxen, sent out of North-Juitland into Germ●nie. 7 Sleswick originally by the Danes called Heydebui, built as they say by Hethe a Queen of that Nation; but by the Saxons called Sleswick, as the town upon the River Slea, there running into the Baltic, and giving to the Town a fair and commodious Haven. This of long time hath been accounted the chief Town of this Province, honoured with an Episcopal See, and being made the head of the Dukedom, so giving name unto the whole. A Dukedom first erected by King Henry of Denmark, who gave it to Waldemar great Grandchild of Abel a former King, an. 1280. to be held by him under the right & sovereignty of the Kings thereof. But the male-issue failing it returned to the Crown, and was by Margaret Queen of Denmark, conferrred on Gerrard Earl of Holstein, as before was said, anno 1386. Repenting afterwards of that Act, she extorted it out of the hands of the Widow of Gerrard; again recovered by the valour and good fortune of his son Adolphus. After whose death, it fell together with Holstein upon Christiern of Oldenburg, King of Danemark, as before related: by whom incorporated with that Crown: never since aliened, but assigned sometimes in portion for the younger Princes; the Patrimony at this time of the sons of Alexander, surnamed of Sunderburg, (the place of his Nativity) son of John, one of the younger sons of King Christiern the third.  
NORTH-IVITLAND, the most Northern part of all the Chersonese, hath on the South the Dukedom of Sleswick, but on all other parts the Sea. Divided commonly according to the number of the Bishoprics into four Dioceses, or Districts, that is to say,  
1 The Diocese of RIP or Ripen, bordering next to Sleswick, and containeth 30 Praefectures or Herets (as they use to call them) seven Cities or walled Towns, and ten Castles. The Chief of which are 1 Ripen the Episcopal See, situate near the Germane Ocean. 2 Koldins on a Creek of the Baltic Sea, where Dorothy the Dowager of Christiern the third, built a public School, (one of my Authors calls it an University).  
2 The Diocese of ARTHUSEN lying on the North of Ripen, but more towards the Baltic, containeth 31 Herets or Prefectures, seven Cities or walled Towns, and five Castles. The chief whereof are 1 Arthusen the Episcopal See, seated on the Baltic, enjoying a commodious Port, and well frequented, the first Bishop hereof being that Coppo, who converted this nation; Christianity and Episcoparie going for the most part hand in hand together. Schunderburg, on the South of Arthusen. 3 Kalloe, a strong Castle of the Kings seated in the inmost part of a large Bay occasioned by the Promontory, or Cape of Hillenis, extending hence two Dutch miles to the high hill of Ellemanberg. Opposite whereunto, and pertaining to this Jurisdiction, lie the Lands of 1 Samsoe, 2 Hiolm, 3 Tuen, 4 Hia●nce (perhaps Gern●) 5 Hilgenes, and others.  
3 The Diocese of WIBORCH, on the north of Arthusen, containeth sixteen Herets, the Lands of 1 Jegen, 2 Hansholm, 3 Ostholm, 4 Cifland, 5 Egholm, and 6 Bodum: three Cities, or walled Towns, and as many Castles: the principal of which are 1. Wiborch, the Episcopal See, an Inland City, but situate on a water which runneth into the Bay of Limford. The ordinary seat of Judicature, for both the Juitlands; for all Causes as well Criminal, or Civil: the Court continually sitting from one day to another, unless perhaps the Judges do sometimes adjourn it for their own refreshments.  
4. The Diocese of BURGLAVE, or Vandalia, lying furthest north, is commonly subdivided into four parts or members; that is to say, 1. Thyland, lying south of the Bay of Limford, on the Baltic side, whose chief town is 1 ●lborch, the ordinary seat and residence of the Bishop of Vandalia, from hence many times styled Alburgensis, situate on the Bay aforesaid, which opening into the Baltic Sea extendeth thorough the ma●n land Westwards, almost as far as the Germane Ocean. 2 Morsee, lying on the Ocean, and containing three Prefectures, or Herets, the town of Nicopen, the Castle of Lunstod, and the Isle o● Agerce. 3 Hanheret, on the northwest of the Bay of Limford, containing four Herets, the town of Thysiad, where Christiern the third founded a public School, or such another University as that of Kolding; the Castle of Orumne, and the Lands of Oland and Oxcholm. There is in this part also, the high Rock called Skaringelint, a noted seamark; fitly serving to give notice to the Sailor of the Quicksands which lie underneath it, and about this Coast. 4 Vensyssell, Venfilia, or Wenslie, that is (as Mercator doth expound it) Vandalorum sedes, the seat of the Vandals, taketh up all the rest of the north of Juitland, containing six Prefectures, the Lands of Groysholm, 2 Hartzholm, and 3 Tydsholm; three towns, and one Castle, the most remarkable of which is Schagen, with the most northerly point of all this Chersonese. In this part is a very high mountain called Mount Alberg, in which are found some marks and remainders of the ancient Giants, as the inhabitants believe, and report accordingly.  
The Inhabitants of both Juitlands in the time of Ptolemy, and before, were the Cobandi, Chali, Phundusii, Charudes, and in the most northern tracts the Cimbri, of whom the four first were but Tribes or Nations. These moving towards the South in that great expedition against Spain made by the neighbouring Vandals on the Roman Empire, occasioned the Juites and Angli to enlarge or shift their dwellings: each taking up the parts which lay nearest to them, The Juites, or Gutae, being a people of Scandia, and there placed by Ptolemy, took up the northern parts hereof from them, named Juitland: the other being a people of the Suevi, dwelling on the south of the Elb, possessed them of those parts which lay next the Saxons their old friends and confederates, (their chief town being Sleswick) where Angelen, now an obscure village, once of greater note, doth preserve their memory. But these uniting with the Saxons, in the conquest of Britain, and leaving none behind which were fit for action, or not enough to keep possession of the Country against new Invaders, gave opportunity to the Danes to come in upon them. By whom these Countries being conquered, as far as to the River Eydore, were planted by Colonies of Danes, and made a part of that Kingdom: of whom we shall say more in the close of all: first, taking a survey of the Baltic Lands, and such Provinces on the main land of Scandia, as properly make up the Kingdom of Denmark.   

2 The BALTIC LANDS.  
The BALTIC LANDS are in number 35. and are so called, because they lie dispersed in the Baltic Ocean. At this day it is called by the Germans▪ De host see; anciently by some, Mare Suevicum; by Pomponius Mela, Sinus Codanus; by Strabo, Sinus Venedicus; but generally, Mare Balticum: because the great Peninsula of Scandia, within which it is, was by some Writers of the middle and darker times, called Balthia. It beginneth at the narrow passage called the Sound; and interlacing the Countries of Denmark, Sweden, Germany, and Poland, extendeth even to Livonia, and Lituania. The reasons why this sea being so large, doth not ebb and flow, are 1 the narrowness of the straight, by which the Ocean is let into it; and 2 the Northern situation of it, whereby the Celestial Influences have less power upon it. The principal of this great shoal of Lands, are 1 Seland, 2 Fuinen, or Fionia. 3 Langeland, 4 Lawland, 5 Falstre, 6 Azze, 7 allen, 8 Tosinge, 9 Wheen, 10 Fimera, and 11 Bornholim. Some others of less note we shall only name, and so pass them over.  
1 SELAND, the greatest Island of the Baltic Seas, is situate near the main land of Scandia, from which parted by a narrow Strait or Fretum, not above a Dutch mile in breadth, commonly called by the name of the Sundt, or Sound. A Strait thorough which all ships that have any trading to, or from the Baltic, must of necessity take their course; all other passages being barred up with impassable Rocks; or otherwise prohibited by the Kings of Denmark, upon forfeiture of all their goods. So that being the only safe passage which these Seas afford, one may sometimes see two or three hundred Ships in a day pass thorough it: all which pay a toll, or imposition to the King, according to their bills of lading. And to secure this passage, and command all Passengers, there are two strong Castles: the one in Scandia called Helsinbourg, whereof more anon; the other in this Island which is called Croneberg. But before we come unto this Castle, we must view the other parts of the Island, being in length two day's journey, and almost as much in breadth: the soil so fertile, that without any manuring or charge at all, it yieldeth plenty of all necessaries for the life of man. It was anciently called Codonania, and containeth in it 15 Cities or walled Towns, and 12 Royal Castles. The principal whereof, are 1 Hassen, or Hafnia, the Metropolis of the Lands; by the Dutch called Copenhagen, or the Haven of Merchants, situate near the Sea, with an handsome Port: the Isle of Amager which lieth on the East-side of the Town, making a very safe road for all kinds of shipping. The town of an orbicular form, and reasonably well fortified; but the buildings mean, for the most part of clay and timber, only to be commended for a spacious Marketplace. Yet herein as the chief town of all the Kingdom, and situate in the heart of these dominions, is the Palace Royal, built of Free stone, in form of a Quadrangle, but of no great beauty or magnificence. Most memorable for the University here founded by Henry or Ericus the ninth, but perfected by King Christiern the first, by whom, and the succeeding Princes liberally endowed. 2 Fredericksburg, amongst woods of Beech, built for a place of pleasure by Frederick the second, where the King hath a fine House, and a little Park, in which (amongst other foreign Beasts are) some fallow Deer transported hither out of England in the 24 year of Queen Elizabeth. 3 Roschild, not walled, but counted for a City, as a See Episcopal, the Bishops whereof have anciently had the honour of Crowning, and inaugurating the Kings of Danemark. In the Cathedral Church whereof are to be seen the Tombs of many of the Danish Kings; some of them very fair and sumptuous, the most mean, and ordinary. 4 Sore, of old times beautified with a goodly Monastery, the Revenues whereof at the alteration of Religion, were converted to the maintenance of a Free-school, built here by Frederick the first. But in the year 1623. Christiern the fourth, adding hereunto the Revenues of two other dissolved Monasteries, the one in the I'll of Lawland, and the other in Juitland, founded here a new University, for the greater supply of learned Ministers for the Churches of Denmark and Norway (which before could not be provided for out of Copenhagen) and furnished it with men of eminence in all Arts and Sciences, for its first Professors. 5 Elsinure, or Helsingore, a village only, but much frequented by Seafaring men, as their ships pass by the Sound, upon which it is. Near unto which is 6, the strong and magnificent Castle of Croneberg, built with incredible charge and paine● by King Frederick the second, the foundation of it being laid on huge stones sunk into the Sea, and so fastened together, that no storm or tempest, how violent soever, is able to shake it. Well fortified as well as founded, and mixed of a Palace, and a Fort, being since the first building of it the most constant residence of the Kings of Danemark: who from hence may easily discern each ship which sails thorough the Sundt, each of which addeth more or less unto his Revenues. A profitable and pleasing prospect. By the Commodity of this, and the opposite Castle, the King doth not only secure his Customs, but very much strengthen his Estate: the Castles being so near, and the Str●it so narrow, that by the addition of some few Ships, he may keep the greatest Navy that is from passing by him.  
Unto the Government and Jurisdiction of this Island belong many others, the principal whereof are 1 Amigria, or Amagger, which helps to make up the Port, or Road of Copenhagen, spoken of before, planted with Hollanders brought hither by the procurement of Christiern the second. 2 Mund, or Moem-land, the chief town whereof is called Stegoe. 3 Huene, or WHEEN, a little South of Croneberg Castle; a Dutch mile in length, but not quite so broad: remarkable only for the studies of that famous Astronomer Tycho Brahe, to whom Frederick the second gave this Island, that living in a private and solitary place, removed from all company but his own Family only, he might with more convenience attend his Books. At this day most observable for the Castle of Vranopolis, or Vrenbourg, in which the greatest part of his Mathematical instruments are preserved in safety.  
III. FIONIA, or FVINEN, the second Island of account in all the Baltic, is situate betwixt Seland, and Juitland; from which last parted by a Straight called Middelfar Sundt, so narrow, and of so small a Sea, that the Island and the Chersonese seemed joined together. A Country of a pleasant and delightful situation, and as fruitful withal; containing twelve Dutch miles in length, and four in breadth, and therein 24 Herets or Prefectures, 16 Towns, and six Royal Castles, besides many goodly Villages, and gentlemen's houses. The chief whereof are 1 Odensee, or Othensche (called in Latin Othonia) an Episcopal See founded here at the first conversion of this people, by Otho the great, whence it had the name. The town not large, but beautified with two fair Churches, the one dedicated to Saint Canut, the other to Saint Francis, situate in the midst of the Island, from which the residue of the Towns are almost equally distant, and so commodiously seated for trade and Merchandise, as they do not only traffic in the Baltic Sea, but in Sweden, Norway, Russia, Flanders, and Germany. 2 Nibourch, 3 Faborch, 4 Suiborck, 5 Middelfar, whence the street so named: 6 Bogens, and 7 Kertominde; all seated on some Haven, or convenient Greek: the principal of the Castles being 1 Newbourg, 2 Hagenschow, 3 Eschebourg, 4 Hinsgagell; 5 the Court of Rugard. In this Island not far from the Castle of Hagenschow is the mountain Ochenberg, where John Ranzovius, anno 1530. discomfited the great Army of Christopher, the Brother of Anthony, Earl of Oldenburg, 
Baltick-Ilands.  coming in those unsettled times to invade the Kingdom, under colour of restoring Christiern the second, formerly deposed: in which fight the Earls of Hoye and Tecklebourg were both slain in the place, and the Kingdom after that in quiet from the like pretenders.  
South of Fionia, and under the Government hereof, are about 90 lesser Lands, most of them inhabited; the chief of which are  
IV. LANGELAND, seven Dutch miles in length, in which, besides many Villages and gentlemen's houses, we have the town of Raidkeping, and the Castle of Franeker.  
V. LALAND disjoined from Selandt, by a little narrow straight called Gronesundt; so plentiful of corn and Chestnuts, that ships full freighted with them, are sent yearly hence. An Island, which besides many Castles, Villages, and Mansion houses of the Gentry, hath five good Towns, viz. 1 Nystadt, 2 Nasco, 3 Togrop, 4 Richus, and 5 Mariboane, in which last anciently was a very rich Monastery, the Revenues whereof are now employed for the endowment of the new University of Sora, founded by Christiern the fourth, as before was noted.  
VI FALSTRE, four Germane miles in length, affording plenty of corn yearly to some neighbouring Lands; chief towns wherein are, 1 Nicopen, which for the elegancy of the place, and pleasantness of the situation, is called the Naples of Danemark. 2 Stabecopon, from whence there is the ordinary passage into Germany, seven Dutch miles hence.  
VII. TUSINGE, not far from Suiborch, or Swineburg a town of Fionia, a Dutch mile in length, situate in a dangerous and troublesome sea; from whence is no safe passage either to Selandt, Fuinen, or Juitland, though much distant from neither. Chief places in it are, 1 Ascens, towards Juitland, 2 Niburg, towards Selandt, and 3 the Court of Keltorp, belonging to the noble Family of Resencrantz.  
VIII. FIMERA, or FEMERENS, a fruitful and well-peopled Island, having in it the towns of 1 Derborch, 2 Stabul, and 3 Piettersborn: A place of great importance to the Crown of Denmark, not so much in danger of being made subject to the Imperialists by the taking of Holstein, and both Juitlands; as by planting a strong Garrison in this small Island: and therefore with all diligence recovered by the King again, and better fortified then before against all invasions, anno 1628. Of the remaining Lands which pertain unto Fionia, we find the names of 1 Aroe, 2 Romso, 3 Endelo, 4 Ebelo, 5 Boko, 6 Brando, 7 Zoroe, 8 Agernis, 9 Hellenis, 10 Jerdo, 11 Birkolm; of which nothing memorable.  
Amongst these Lands, but not subordinate to Fionia, are  
IX. ARIA, belonging to the Dukedom of Sleswick, consisting of three parishes, some gentlemen's houses, and the Town and Castle of Koping, supposed to be the habitation of the Arii, spoken of by Tacitus, but a Colony rather of them, as I suppose. And not far off,  
X. ALSEN, another little Island, but of more repute, called in Latin, Elysia; opposite to the Gulf, or Bay of Flensburg, in the Dukedom of Sleswick, to which it also appertaineth. Well stored with Beasts for profit, and Game for pleasure; so populous, that some thousands of men may be easily and suddenly raised in it, consisting of 13 Parishes, and four Towns, that is to say, 1 Gammelgard, 2 Osterholm, 3 Norborch, and 4 the good town and Castle of Sunderburg, one of the ordinary residences of the Dukes of Sleswick, and honoured with the birth of many of the Princes of the Royal Family. Some think it was the habitation anciently of the Elysii, spoken of by Tacitus, and by him placed next unto the Angli. But being the Angli in those times dwelled about the Elb, I rather think, that when some Colonies of the Angli seated themselves in the Cimbrick Chersonese, as before was said; some of the Arii and Elysii might go along for company, and plant themselves near them in these Lands.  
XI. BORNHOLM, the last of all the Baltic which belong to Denmark, is situate more Eastward, opposite to that part of Scandia, which is called Blecking, betwixt it and Pomerens. An Isle of excellent pasturage, breeding plenty of cattle, wherewith as also with butter, cheese, wool, hides, and some store of fruits, they supply the want of some of their neighbours; besides good quantities of powdered Beef, and Mutton, which they barrel up, and sell to Mariners. It containeth many good Town, and wealthy Villages; the chief whereof is Bornholm, which gives name to the Island. Both Town and Island pawned by some former Kings unto those of Lubeck; from whom redeemed by King Frederick the second, for a great sum of money, after it had been in their possession about 50 years.  
These Lands in the time of Pomponius Mela, were by one general name called the Hemodes, in number reckoned to be seven; the residue either not inhabited, or not taken notice of, are no where mentioned in the Ancients. Of these seven, the greatest and best peopled, was called Codonania (supposed to be Selandt) in which the said Author placeth the Teutoni. By Ptolemy it is called Scandia Minor, with reference to the great Peninsula of Scandia, supposed by him to be an Island. From this, or from the sea adjoining, 
Scandia.  called Sinus Codanus, the people of these Lands, and the next Eastern Continent took the name of Danes: spreading their name afterwards, as they did their Conquests, of which more anon. In the mean time we must cross over the Sound, and take notice of such other parts of this Kingdom, as lie on the other side thereof in the vast Continent, or Demi-Iland (which you will) of Scandia: of which somewhat must be first premised, in regard, not only some parts of Denmark, but the whole Kingdom of Norway (the northern Lands excepted) are contained in it.   

SCANDIA.  
SCANDIA, by Pliny and Solinus called Scandivania, by Jornandos' Scanzia, hath on the East that Bay or branch of the Baltic, which is called the Finnisch and Bodner Seas, on the North and West the main Ocean, on the South, where it points towards Germany, the Baltic, or Oost-Zee, as the Dutch call it: joined to the main Continent of Sarmatia by an Jsthmus, or neck of land, at the bottom of the Bodner See, not far from Wardhuys. In regard of so great Seas on all parts thereof, it was generally by the Ancients thought to be an Island, but incompertae magnitudinis, of an unknown greatness, as both Pytheas, and Xen phon Lampsacenus do affirm it in Pliny: by one of which it is called Basilia, by the other Baltia, from whence the name of Baltic to the Sea adjoining. But later Navigations, and experience have confuted that opinion, by which it is found to be no Island, but a part of the Continent, and a great one too, containing the whole Kingdom of Norway, the greatest part of the Kingdom of Sweden, and some part of Denmark: that part hereof which belongs to Denmark, situate in the Southeast of this great Peninsula, and divided into the three Provinces, of Hallandia, Scania, and Blescida; and in them 23 Herets or Prefectures, and fifteen Cities.  
1. HALLANDIA or HALLANDT, hath on the East the wild woods which part it from Gothland, in the West the intervening Sea betwixt it and Juitland, on the North Sweden properly and specially so called, on the South Scania, or Schonen. A Country which for the healthfulness of the Air, pliantness of the soil, commodiousness of Havens, plenty of fish, pleasure of hunting, for inexhaustible mines of Brass and Lead, (with some veins of Silver) frequency of well-peopled Towns and Villages, and civility of the Inhabitants, not inferior to any. Places of most importance in it, are 1 Laholm, 2 Halmstad, 3 Falkendorch, all of them on the Sea, at the mouth of navigable streams, whose names I find not: 4 Warburg, upon the Sea side also, but fortified with a very strong Castle on the top of an hill. Taken and garrisoned by the Swedes, anno 1569, and not without great difficulty recovered by the Danes again, anno 1569.  
II. SCANIA, or SCHONEN, hath on the East, Blescida, or Blecking; on the West, the Sound, running along the shore hereof for the space of twenty Germane miles; on the North, Hallandt; on the South, the Baltic, or host Zee. The Country of the same nature with Hallandt, as before described; the Character of that pertaining to all the three: this having over and above, as peculiar to it, that the Sea shores are stored with such shoals of Herrings, that sometimes Ships are scarce able with wind and oar to break through them, and row off the Harbour. It is in length 72 miles, 48 in breadth. Chief towns, in which are 1 Lunden, an Archbishops See, the Metropolitan of Denmark & Norway, advanced unto that honour by the means and mediation of Ericus the first, who purposely made a journey to Rome to effect that business: the Church of Denmark being before that time subject to the Archbishops of Breme. This was about the year 1100. It is situate somewhat within the land; but the Cathedral easily discernible by Mariners as they sail along. The City mean, and were it not for the Cathedral of no beauty at all. But that indeed affirmed to be a work of much magnificence and Art, especially for the Clock, the Dial, and some outward adjuncts. For in the Dial couriously set out with divers colours, are to be seen distinctly, the year, month, weekday, and hour of every day throughout the year; with the Feasts, both movable and fixed, together with the motion of the Sun and Moon, and their passage through each degree of the Zodiac Then for the Clock, it is so framed by Artificial Engines, that whensoever it is to strike, two horsemen encounter one another, giving as many blows apiece, as the Bell sounds hours: and on the opening of a door, there appears a Theatre, the Virgin Mary on a Throne with Christ in her arms, and the three Kings or Magis (with their several trains) marching in order, doing humble reverence, and presenting severally their gifts; two Trumpeters sounding all the while to adorn the Pomp of that procession. 2 Malmoge, or Elbogen, (called by both names) at the very Southern point hereof, just opposite to Coppenhagen in Seland, a well traded Port: the birthplace of Gaspar bartholinus', otherwise called Malmogius Danus, that great Mathematician; supposed to the be Author of the Clock and Dial, before described. 3 Trelleberg, on the north of Elbogen. 4 Landiscron, on the Seaside, of great strength and consequence. 5 Helsemburg, a mean town, but fortified with an impregnable Castle, just opposite to Helsinare, and Croneberg in Selandt, the other of the two keys which openeth into the Sound. 6 Radneby, a frontier town bordering on Verendia, a Province of Swethland. 7 Christiania, or Christendorp, a strong piece built by Christiern the fourth, anno 1604. compassed by the Sea, and fortified by Fens and Marshes, thought to be impregnable.  
III. BLESCIA or BLECKING, is bounded on the East and South with the Baltic Sea, on the North with Verendia a Province of Swethland; on the West with Scania or Sconen: more mountainous and barren then either, but yet partaking somewhat of the former character, which we had of Hallandt. Chief Towns hereof are 1 Vsted, on the mouth of a River falling into the Baltic. 2 Christenberg, in Latin Christianopolis, on the borders of Swethland, raised out of the ground by Christiern the fourth, to defend his kingdom on that side, anno 1604. not long after by a warlike stratagem surprised by the Swedes, in the late war betwixt those kingdoms, in the year 1611. destroyed and dispeopled by that Nation, who looked upon it as a dangerous and unpleasing object, but since repaired and replenished. 3 Abuys, upon the River which divides the Kingdoms, not far from Christenberg.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Gutae and Dauciones, taking up the South parts of this great Peninsula. Meridionalia tenent Gutae & Dauciones, as we find in Ptolemie Geogr. l. 2. c. 11. which in all probability must be meant of these three Provinces. Of these the Gutes passing over into the Cimbrick Chersonese, possessed themselves of the North parts of it, since from them called Juitland. The rest uniting with the people of those many Islands which lie together in the Bay or Gulf Codanus (now the Baltic Sea) took the name of Danes: and not from Dan, I know not what King thereof above a thousand years before the birth of our Saviour. First taken notice of by that name in Jornandes de Rebus Geti●is, who lived about the time of Justinian the first, about which time, or not long after it is conceived that they made themselves masters of so much of the Cimbrick Chersonese, as had been formerly possessed by the Juites and Angli, whose forsaken or ill-peopled seats they possessed themselves of. After this we hear little of them till the time of Charles the Great, living in a confused estate, sometimes made subject to the Norwegians, sometimes to the Swedes, but always without Law and order, till by their King Godfrey or Gotricu● they were regulated by Laws, and reduced to an orderly kind of life, anno 797. About this time they first began to infest the Coasts of England, invaded Friesland with a Fleet of 200 sail, and had much weakened and endangered the great Empire of France, if the unseasonable death of Godfrey, and the quarrels which arose about the succession after his decease, had not kept them off. Their affairs at home being again well settled, they employed their whole Forces against England, as the weaker Enemy, over which they tyrannised 250 years, and reigned 28, under three Kings of that Nation. Outed of that, and the terror of their name being over, they have been most busied with their neighbours of Sweden and Germany: improving their estate, but rather by marriages and civil contracts then by force of Arms, with the addition of the kingdom of Norwey, and the Dukedom of Holstein; their pretensions to, and for a time the possession of the Crown of Sweden, getting them nothing in conclusion but blows and losses. So that we have no more to do then to sum up a catalogue of the kings hereof, till the uniting of the two Crowns of Denmark and Norwey; leaving the rest that follow to another place.  

The KINGS of DENMARK.  
A. Ch.  
797 1 Gotricus the first Legislator of the Danes, and the establisher of their Kingdom, a prudent and valiant Prince.  
2 Olaus son of Gotricus or Godfrey.  
3 Henningus son of Olaus.  
873 4 Siward son to a daughter of Godfrey by the King of Norwey.  
5 Regnier son of Siward.  
6 Siward II.  
7 Ericus or Henricus baptised at Mentz, at the same time with his brother Harald, recovered the kingdom to his house (of which they had been outed by the race of Godfrey.)  
8 Canutus the son of Ericus the heathenish son of a Christian and pious Father.  
880 9 Froto the son of Canutus, a professed Christian.  
886 10 Gormo (our English writers call him Gormund) son of Froto.  
889 11 Harald the son of Gormo, or Gormond.  
900 12 Gormo II. son of Harald, an enemy of the Christian Faith.  
927 13 Harald II. son of Gormo the second, a good Christian.  
975 14 Sueno or Swain, son of Harald, at first a great Enemy of the Gospel, an Usurper of the throne in his Father's life time, and a great scourge unto the English. Outed of his Estate by Ericus of Swethland, he received the Gospel, regained his Kingdom, and established Christianity in this kingdom, his war on England still continuing.  
1010 15 Olaus the eldest son of Swain, King of Denmark and Norwey.  
1020 16 Canutus brother of Olaus, the first King of England of the Danes, succeeded his brother in the kingdoms of Denmark and Norwey, to which he added also the Crown of Sweden.  
1037 17 Canutus III. son of Canutus the second, the last king of England, of the race of the Danes.  
18 Magnus son of Olaus King of Norwey.  
1051 19 Sueno II. 
Norwey.  sisters son of Canutus the second, by Vlfo an English Duke.  
1074 20 Harald III. base son of Sueno the second.  
21 Canutus IV. another of the base sons of Sueno, murdered at the Altar in the Church of Ottensee in the Isle of Fionia; afterwards canonised a Saint.  
1088 22 Olaus II. another of the base sons of Swain.  
1096 23 Ericus II. another of the base sons of Swain, the founder of the archiepiscopal See of Lunden.  
1102 24 Harald IV. base son of Henry or Ericus the second.  
1133 25 Nicolas another of the base sons of Swain.  
1135 26 Ericus III. another of the base sons of Ericus the second.  
1140 27 Ericus IV. commonly called the fifth (some of the younger houses being reckoned in) nephew of Ericus the second.  
1150 28 Sueno III. son of Ericus the third, and Canutus the fifth, Grandchild of Nicolas, both kings: the first reigning in Scandia, the other in Juitland: both dead without issue, Canutus being slain by Sueno, and he by Waldemar.  
1157 29 Waldemar son of Canutus, the lawful son of Ericus the second, after the interposition of so many Bastards, succeeded at the last in the throne of his Fathers. By his means the Rugians and Vandals embraced the Gospel.  
1185 30 Canutus V. son of Waldemar.  
1203 31 Waldemar II. brother of Canutus and Duke of Sleswick.  
1243 32 Ericus V. called the VII. son of Waldemar the second, slain by the practices and treason of his brother Abel.  
1251 33 Abel brother of Ericus, slain by the Paisants of Friesland.  
1252 34 Christopher brother of Abel and Ericus.  
1260 35 Ericus VI (VIII) son of Christopher.  
1287 36 Ericus VII. (IX) younger son of Ericus, supplanted his elder brother Christopher.  
1327 37 Christopher II. eldest son of Ericuss, first dispossessed of his birthright by his brother Ericus; after whose death, he succeeded in the Crown, by the help of his half Brother the Earl of Holst.  
1334 38 Waldemar III. son of Christopher the second, against whom and his eucrochments, the Sea towns, commonly called the Hanse, did first confederate, and vanquished him in many battles.  
1376 39 Margaret daughter and heir of Waldemar the third, married with Aquin king of Norway, so uniting the Kingdoms: of whom and their successors we shall speak hereafter; when we have taken a view also of the kingdom of Norwey and the Appendices thereof.    

NORWEY.  
NORWEY is bounded on the East with Swethland, from which parted by a perpetual ridge of rough and wild mountains, called the Dofrine hills; on all other parts by the Sea▪ that is to say, by that frozen Sea upon the North, the Germane Norwegian Ocean upon the West; and on the South with the Danish Sea, interposing betwixt it and the Cimbrick Chersonese; in breadth from Schagen the most northern point of Juitland to congel, the most Southerly town of Norwey, no less than 250 miles.  
It is called Norwey, quasi tractus seu via Septentrionalis, from the Northern situation of it; containing in length 1300 miles, in breadth not above half so much: inhabited by a people given to hospitality, plain dealing, and abhorring theft. Anciently they were great warriors, and became terrible to all the more Southern Nations; by whom called Normans, (that is to say Homines Boreales or Northmen, as Willielmus Gemiticensis rightly hath it): being at that time a mixture of all the Northern, Nations together, or of the Norwegians and Swethlanders a part from the Danes whose steps they followed in their frequent or rather continual Piracies, on the Coasts of England, France, and Ireland. By Helmoldus in the same sense they are called Nordluidi, a name made into Latin, out of the Dutch word Nord, and the French word leiu, signifying men of a Northern place or Nation.  
Of the position of it in regard of the Heavens we have spoke already; but more particularly it reacheth from the first Parallel of the twelfth Clime, where the Pole is elevated 58 degrees 26 minutes, as far as to the 71 degree of latitude. By which account the longest day in the Southern point is but 18 hours; whereas at Wardbuys, being situate furthest North of all this Country, they have no night for almost three whole months together.  
The Country for the most part rocky, mountainous and barren, full of vast woods, extreme cold, and but ill inhabited. In the best parts thereof if affords little corn; and in the most northern none at all: in so much that the common sort of people are fain to use dried fish (that which we commonly call stockfish in stead of bread. But the better (that is, the richer sort) buy corn of such Merchants as come to traffic with them. Their chief commodities are stock fish, rich furs, train-oyle, pitch, and tackling for ships, as masts, cables, deal-bords and the like; which the inhabitants exchange for corn, wine, fruits, beer, and other necessaries for man's life. The Country is exceedingly troubled with certain little beasts, which they call ●●mmers. They are about the bigness of a field mouse, and are by the inhabitants said to drop out of the clouds in tempestuous weather. They devour like the Locusts, every green thing on the earth; and at a certain time die all in heaps (as it were) together: and with their stench so poison the air, that the poor people are long after troubled with the Jaundice, and with a giddiness in the head. But these beasts come not so often to infect the land, as the Whales do to terrify and molest the shores, the Western Seas being very deep, and therefore a fit habitation for those great Leviathans: against whose violence and furie, the Mariners and peopel of the Seacoast have found a Remedy, which is by casting out some water intermixed with the oil of Castor, the smell whereof doth force them to retire immediately. Without this help there were no fishing on these Coasts, which is the greatest Staple commodity (besides materials for shipping) which the Country yieldeth.  
The Towns here, are exceeding thin, and in them the houses for the most part very poor and miserable, commonly pa●ched up of dirt and hurdles, not much unlike our ordinary Cottage houses in the Fen-countreys'. Distributed into five Prefectures or Governments, according to the number of the Castles which command the same. Of these,  
1 The first most towards the South is the Castle of BOHUS, to which are subject the towns of 1 Marstrand, seated in a Demi Island begirt with Rocks, of most note for the infinite quantity of berings caught hereabouts. 2 Congel, upon the Sea, a town of Merchandise, opposite to Schagen in Denmark. 3 Oddewald.  
2 AGGERHVIS, the second of the five Royal Castles, hath under its command the towns of 1 Anslo, or Asloia, on a Bay or Gullet opposite to Juitland, an Episcopal See, and of most esteem of all the Country, by reason of the Courts of Judicature which are therein held. 2 Tonsberg or Koning●berg, that is to say, the Kings or the Kingly Mountain, formerly a retiring place of the Kings of Norwey. 3 Fredrichstrad, built by one of the frederick's, Kings of Danemark. 4 Schin or Schon, remarkable for its Mines of iron and copper. 5 Saltzburg, 6 Hammer the greater, and 7 Hammer the less, divided by the interposing of the Bay called Sinus Moesianus, in former times the See of a Bishop, since removed to Astoia, or rather thereunto united in these later times, as many poor Bishoprics be in Ireland.  
3 BEGGER-HUSE is the third Castle of command herein. Subordinate whereunto are 1 Bergen, the principal Town of the country, an Episcopal See, and the ordinary residence of the Governor for the Kings of Denmark; situate amongst high mountains at the bottom of a deep Creek or ar● of the Ocean called Carmesunt; a noted Port, and much resorted to by Merchants of most foreign Nations; bringing in corn, meat, bread, beer, wine, and Aqua vitae, to supply the natural wants and defects hereof; and in exchange transporting hence fish, furs, cordage, and other materials for shipping. In which regard accounted formerly one of the four chief staple Towns of the Dutch Merchants of the Hanse: the other three being London in England, Novagrod in Muscovie, and Bruges in Flanders. But of late time this Bergen hath lost most of its trade, removed hence to Wardhuis, nearer unto Muscovie: as the great town of Novogrod, by reason of the change of navigation through the Baltic into the Northern passage, hath given way to S. Nicolas; and Bruges was deprived of her traffic by Antwerp, from whence it is removed to Amsterdam. For the Hollanders, by blocking up the haven, but especially by keeping Bergen ap Zome, have such a command over the river, that no vessel can pass or repass without their licence. 2 Staffanger; an Episcopal See also, but not else observable.  
4 The Castle of TRUNDHEIM, is the fourth, situate in the Town of Trondheim, formerly called Tronden, and in Latin, Ni●rosia, the See of an Archbishop who is the Metropolitan of Norwey. A beautiful City heretofore, but since the subjection of this Country unto the Danes, reduced to a Burrow: so called of the River Nider, upon which it is seated, and Rosa the name then of the principal Church; which in time gave place to the Cathedral, for greatness and neatness of the fabric all of polished stone, not giving place to any in Europe; about the year 1530 much defaced with fire, which began at the Altar, the damage done by it being estimated at 7000 Crowns. A great sum of money in those times, and so poor a country. So that by casting up our reckoning, we find in Norwey one Archbishop and four Bishops, that is to say, the Archbishop of Trundheim or Nidrosia, the Bishops of Bergen, Anslo, Staffanger and Hammer: Of the same power, jurisdiction, and revenue, since the Reformation, as those of Denmark: whereof, and of the first conversion of this people to the Christian Faith, we have spoke already.  
5 The fifth and last Castle which commands this country is that of WARDHVYS, so called of the town of Wardhuys, as that is from the Isle Ward, in which it is seated. A small Castle, and the town in former times but mean and poor, situate in the extreme North point of all this Kingdom: but in those times accounted (as it easily might) for the chief of this Prefecture, and honoured in the summer time with the seat and residence of the Governor, retiring more Southwards in the winter, at what time by reason of the extremity of the cold, and long absence of the Sun for months together (the Town lying within the Arctic Circle) it is hardly habitable. 
Iceland.  But of late times it is much improved both in wealth and building; by reason of the removal of the English trading from Novogrod, near the Baltic Sea, to the Town of St. Nicolas not far hence, drawing by that means the trade of Muscovie and Norwey more near together. So that now it is not only useful unto the Danes, in regard that it somewhat aweth the neighbouring Lappians, and commandeth the Natives; for that cause fortified very strongly by King Frederick the second, but made very profitable to him also by the resort of Dutch and English, who must of necessity touch at it (if they make no stay here) in their way to Muscovie. Other Towns in these two last Prefectures are not worth looking after.  
And so much for the Continent or mainland of Norwey; let us next look upon the Islands in the Northern Ocean, which belong unto it.   

The ISLANDS in the NORTHERN OCEAN.  
The NORTHERN SEA so named from its northern situation, is by some called Mare Scythicum, because it coasted along the shores of Scythia; by Juvenal; called Oceanus glacialis, because often frozen: by Pliny in the same sense Mare Amalchium, the word in the Scythick Language signifying frozen, or congealed; by the Russes or Moscovites, Myrmanskoy More; by the Cimbrians in their tongue, Mari morusa, that is to say, the dead Sea, because of the slowness of its motion, often clogged with ice; and in the same sense, mare pigrum by Tacitus. This sacitus doth best describe it, from whom take it thus. Trans Suenes Mare aliud pigrum & prope immotum, etc. Beyond the Swedes, there is another Sea, so slow and almost immovable, that many think it to be the bounds which compass the whole world. Some are persuaded that the sound of the Sun is heard, as he ariseth out of this sea; and that many shapes of gods are seen, and the beams of his head, Illuc usque (& fama vera) tantum natura, At this sea (the report is credible) is the end of nature and the world. The English were the first of all civil people, who adventured to open and discover the passages of it, under the conduct of Richard Chancellor, arriving by this way in Russia, anno 1553. and tracing out the way with others of that Nation, together with the Flemings, Hollanders, and some towns of the Hanse have since followed. Of which more in Muscovie. The principal Islands dispersedin it are Groenland, 2 Iseland, 3 Freezland, belonging to the Crown of Norwey, to be surveyed at the present; Nova Zemla, and Sir Hugh Willoughbies' Island, appertaining (if to any) to the Knez, or great Duke of Muscovie: of which more hereafter.  
1. ISELAND, is situate under the Arctic Circle, in length 144 Germane miles, 65 in breadth▪ 80 called from the abundance of ice in it and about it, frozen continually for the space of 8 months, and so vehemently chilled with Northern winds, that it yieldeth neither corn nor trees except Juniper only: yet there is grass in such abundance, that the people are of opinion, that if they do not sometimes keep their cattle from feeding, they are in danger to surfeit and die with fullness. Beasts for labour here are both Horses and Oxen; the Oxen and Kine without horns, but the sheep not so: and they have also here a fine breed of little dogs, known amongst us by the name of Iseland dogs, the delight of Ladies; as also white Falcons, and white Ravens, Eagles with white tails, with Hares and Bears of the same colour. By reason of their want of corn the people eat stockfish (as in Norwey) in stead of bread, yet notwithstanding by reason of the benefit of the sea and access of strangers, they have all things necessary brought unto them, (even to wood and timber) of which the richer sort make use: giving the Merchant in return, sometimes the flesh of Beefs and Mutton, but ordinarily butter, skins, horses, hawks, brimstone, but fish especially, the staple commodity of the country. Of which they have such plenty and of so good condition, that a piece of Iseland Ling is counted with us as a fit dish for a Nobleman's table.  
The people for the most part are of a plain and simple nature, living (as in the Golden Age) on that which nature gives them without help of Art; more than that of making cheese and butter: the mountains serving them for Towns, and the Rivers for drink, and lodging all under one roof with their horses and oxen. They use neither Physic nor Physicians, yet live so long (and probably the longer for it) that many of them attain to the age of 150 years and more. The women are exceeding fair, but they know not how to attire themselves; nor is there any difference in apparel betwixt the Sexes, so that it is not easy to know one from another. Few of them but have some familiar Spirit to do them service: and notwithstanding the endeavour of their Ministers to purge them from this impiety, yet it is so graffed in them that they cannot leave it.  
It is observable that notwithstanding the cold condition of this Island, yet in many places it is full of heats and fire under the ground: which by the Antiperistasis of the cold air, stopping the pores of the earth, and taking from it the liberty of evaporation, doth burn more vehemently: insomuch that here are three high mountains, whose tops are always covered with snow, and yet continually burning. The names of them are Hecle, Helge, and La-Croix, but the first the principal; by some called Heclefort, which sometimes casts out fire, sometimes flaming water, then black ashes, and pumice stones in so great abundance; that it darkeneth the Sun, and makes the country for six miles round about to be uninhabited. Stranger things are not spoken of Aetna, then of these three mountains: and here the superstitious people have the same opinion which they have in Sicil: that underneath must needs be hell, 
Freezland.  and the habitations of the damned. But to judicious men the natural reason of these flames is plain and obvious, occasioned by those veins of ●rimstone (great quantity whereof they send into ●oraine parts) on which the foundation of the hills is laid: here being many Baths and fountains of hot water, which have Sulphur swimming at the top.  
At the first planting of this Island, the people did not trouble themselves with building Towns, but every one seated himself where he thought convenient; dwelling in cells and caverns digged in the bottom of the rocks. By means whereof the inland parts have not many houses: but the sea coasts since the coming of so many strangers to them, begin to be built in many places; the buildings for the most part being of timber roofed with flags, with an hole on the sides of the roof to let in the light. So that we are not to expect many fine towns or Cities: the principal of them which are, being 1 Hal● in the North, and 2 Schalholt in the southern part; both Bishops Sees, having petty Schools, consisting of 24 scholars a piece, to whom the Latin tongue is taught at the charge of the Bishops. 3 Haffenfordt, an Haven town, where under Tents the Dutch Merchants barter their commodities: and 4 Bed●●ede, a Castle, the ordinary residence of the Governor for the Kings of Denmark.  
It hath been generally conceived that this Island is that Thule, which the Poets so often speak of; as, Tibi serviat ultima Thule, in Virgil; Nec sit terris ultima Thule, in Seneca the Tragedian: nor did there want some reason to persuade them to this opinion; this being indeed the furthest part of the old known world. But greater reasons are against it. For when Solinus saith, multae sunt circa Britannicum insulae, equibus Thule ultima; I hope Thule must be one of the British Isles. And when▪ Tacitus saith of Agricola, in●ulas quas Orcadas vocant domuit, despecta est & Thule; I am sure that Iseland is so far from being kenned at any one of the Orcadeses, that it is at least eight degrees distant. So that Thule must be sought for in another place, and where that is hath been showed already. And as for Iseland it was so far from being known unto the Ancients, that it was hardly known unto those of Norwey, till the year 874. when some of the Norwegians driven out of their country by Harald the first, who first suppressing the many Petite Kings of the Norwegians, made many of them seek new dwellings, of which some few arrived here: where finding room enough to plant in, and no great loss (if any) by the change of their dwelling, they invited many of their friends and countrymen to come unto them. Anno 1070 they were converted to the Gospel, by some Preachers sent hither from Adelbert the Archbishop of Breme. By whose persuasion and procurement they founded two Episcopal Sees; adding thereto in tract of time eight Religious houses: that is to say, the Monasteries of Pingore, Remest●de, Modur, and Monkeni●re, under the Government and jurisdiction of the Bishop of Hallar; and those of Vedey, Pernebar, Kirc●ebar, and Skirde, under the Bishop of Scha●holt. In the year 1260. it was first brought under the Crown of Norwey, following since that the fortunes of it in all changes both of Church and State: made subject with it to the Kings of Denmark: together with it reform in matters of Religion, according to the confession of Ausbourg: retaining still their Bishops with a limited power, and turning the Revenues of their Monasteries unto other uses, as there they did, according to the will and pleasure of their Lords of Denmark.  
II. South-west of Iseland lies another, and as cold an Isle, commonly called by the name of FREEZELAND, from the continual Frosts unto which it is subject. By the Latines it is called Frizlandia, to distinguish it from Frisia or Friesland in Germany. Situate under the North frigid zone, but not so much within the Arctic as Iseland is: the longest day here in the height of summer not exceeding 20 hours: and yet the soil so cold and barren, that it beareth neither corn, nor srunit; the Inhabitants living most on fish, which as it is their only food, so is it also their chief commodity wherewith to entertain or invite the Merchant. And hereof there is such abundance caught upon their coasts, that they are never without the company of Hansemen, Scots, Hollanders, Danes, and English; by which last so frequented in these later times, that it hath been called by some the Western England. For quantity it is somewhat bigger than Iseland, but by reason of the bitter air, and the defects above mentioned, very thinly inhabited. The chief Town of it is called Freezeland, by the name of the Island; situate on the Eastern shore of it. Besides which there are some others set down in the maps, as 2 Samescot, 3 Andefort, 4 Sorund; but not much observable. Westward hereof, as Zieglerus (and out of him Maginus) telleth us, is a less Island called Icaria, giving the name of Marc Icarium to the Sea adjoining: so called (by his mistake or translation of the Fable) from 〈◊〉 the son of Daedal●s a King of Scotland, who did once (but no body knows when) Lord it over these Islands.  
III. GROENLAND, so called, as some say, from the greenness of it in the Summer; as others say, by Antiphrasis, because never green by reason of the sharpness of winter. But the former Etymology is more agreeable to the state of the Country. For though it be continually covered with snow, except in June, July, and August, (insomuch that though the people be always clad with Furs and skins, yet they feel no heat) yet in those months it is exceeding fresh and green, and afford's good pasturage. It is situate for the greatest part within the Arctic, between the 65 and 77 degrees of Northern Latitude: so that the longest day in the southern part is 21 hours and an half; and in the most northern they have no night for three months and two weeks. The known length of it is affirmed to be 600 miles, and may be much longer than so for aught that any body knows there being no perfect discovery made of it hitherto, 
Gr●enland.  though much frequented by the English, and Hollanders (two great Seafaring Nations) for the benefit of Whale-fishing, much there in use. Their chief commodities are Fish, white Bears, wild Deer, and some store of cattle there bred upon their pastures, but housed for the most part all the Winter: the greatest part of the people dwelling in Caves, and delighting in Negromancy, to which more wilfully addicted then those in Iseland, because less acquainted with the Gospel.  
Places of most importance in it are 1 Saint Thomas, (in which there is a Monastery of Dominion Friars) seated in the north-east part of the Island; concerning which Mereator speaks of one thing which is very observable: relating, that it is not far from a flaming, or burning mountain, seated upon hot scalding springs, conveyed by pipes of stone into the Monastery, and serving both as a stove to warm them, and for a fire to boil their Victuals. The walls of the Monastery built of Pumice stones cast out of that Mountain, which being tempered with the water of those burning springs, doth make a glutinous substance serving in stead of Lime, and as long durable. The Gardens of the Convent, in regard of this heat, flourish all the year with herbs, and sweet-smelling flowers: and the adjoining Sea for the same reason being never frozen, affords good plenty of Fish and Fowl the whole year about, not only for the Monks, but the neighbouring Islanders: so far, and to this purpose he. The second Town of note, is Ilva, not far from this Monastery: And 3 Munderpre, on the Southeast point. Others, as in a Country not well discovered, we have little notice of; though it be near 300 years since Nicolas Zeni, a Venetian, cast by tempest on the coast of Freezeland, and by the King thereof employed upon new discoveries, anno 1380. first made it known to us of Europe; immediately on that discovery possessed by the NORWEGIANS, and made a Member of that Crown.  
As for the NORWEGIANS themselves, now their fellow-subjects, they were first known in the time of Ptolemy, by the name of Chedini, possessing then the western parts of Scandia. Uniting with their neighbours, both Danes and Swethlanders, they became better known in the flourishing times of the French Empire, by the name of Normans, first called 10 by Egi●●hatus in his History of the life of Charles the Great, infesting then the Seacoasts of France, and Belgium. Under this name they fell so heavily on the French, especially in the times of Charles the Simple; that they extorted from him that goodly Country, since of them called Normandy; conferred on Rollo, first Duke thereof, anno 912. whose successors much increased their glory by the conquest of England, as some private adventurers of them did by the conquest of the Kingdoms of Naples, Sicil, and Antioch. Afterwards settling on their own bottom, every one of these northern nations acting by itself, they were called Norwegians: sometimes, as formerly commanding over all three Kingdoms, subject successively to each; but most an end governed by their own Kings, till their final subjugation by the Danes. And as a Nation acting solely, and by itself, they subdued Ireland, under the conduct of Turgesius, who tyrannised there for a time; as also all the Orcadeses, and the I'll of Man, sold, or surrendered by them, upon good conditions to the English and Scots, who by those titles still possess them. The Catalogue of their Kings, leaving out all those of the darker times (parallel to our Brute, and the first Scottish Fergus) as merely fabulous, we will begin with King Suibdagerus, who was King of all the three Kingdoms; and at his death divided them again amongst his three sons; whose successors Munster thus reckoned.  

The KINGS of NORWAY.  
1 Suibdagerus.  
2 Haddingus.  
3 Hetharius.  
4 Collerus.  
5 Frogerus.  
6 Gotarus.  
7 Rotherus.  
8 Helga.  
9 Hasmunus.  
10 Reginaldus.  
11 Gumaraus.  
12 Osmundus.  
13 Olaus.  
14 Osmundus II. not long after whose time, anno scil. 800. the Normans began their eruptions.  
15 Aquinus.  
16 Haraldus.  
17 Olaus II.  
18 Sueno, King of Danemark by Birth, and of Norway by Conquest.  
19 Olaus III. son of Swain, or Sueno, succeeded in the Realms of Denmark and Norway; Canutus his younger brother being King of England. In this King's time the Norwegians first received the Gospel.  
20 Canutus, King of England, succeeded his brother Olaus in the Kingdoms of Denmark and Norway, to which he also added the Crown of Sweden.  
21 Sueno II. by whom the Kingdom was restored to the Norwegians.  
22 Canutus II.  
23 Magnus.  
24 Harald II.  
25 Magnus II. King of Sweden, and Norway.  
1326 26 Magnus III. King of Sweden, and Norway, intending the Crown of Sweden for Ericus his eldest son, conferred that of Norway on Haquin, or Aquinus his second son.  
1359 27 Aquinus, King of Norway, younger son of Magnus the third, married with Margaret, eldest daughter of Waldemar the third, King of Denmark; so uniting the Kingdoms. And though Olaus the only son of this bed died young, without any issue; yet the Danes having once got footing in Norway, so assured themselves of it, that they have ever since possessed it as a subject Kingome: keeping the Natives so poor and low, that they are not able to assert their former liberties; and not permitting them to use any shipping, so much as for transporting their own commodities, for fear they should grow wealthy and strong at Sea. Besides, the strong Garrisons maintained in most parts of the Country, keep it in such an absolute awe, that they dare not stir against the Danes, if their stomaches served them. So that now Norway being made subject to the Crown of Denmark, or both made fellow-subjects to the same King: we must next look upon these Kings, not as Kings of each, distinct and separate from the other; but as they are in fact and title.   

The KINGS of DENMARK, and NORWAY.  
1376 1 Haquin, or Aquinus, King of Denmark, and Norway; of this last by descent, of the other by marriage.  
1380 2 Olaus, son of Aquinus and Margaret.  
1383 3 Margaret, wife of Aquinus, mother of Olaus, and daughter of Waldemar the third, after the death of her son, (in whose time she governed as his Guardian) took upon her the Kingdom in her own right; not only keeping Norway in the state she found it, but adding unto Denmark the Crown of Sweden, won by the vanquishment of Albert, Duke of Mecklenburg, than King thereof. A gallant and magnanimous Lady, the Semiramis of Germany.  
1411 4 Ericus, Duke of Pomeren, and Knight of the Garter, son of the Lady Mary, Duchess of Pomeren, daughter of Ingelburgis, the sister of Margaret; by whom adopted for her Heir; succeeded after her decease in all the three Kingdoms; outed of all before his death, by a strong Faction made against him, and his estates conferred on  
1439 5 Christopher, Count Palatine of the Rhine, and Duke of Bavaria, (but in title only) the son of Margaret, sister of Ericus, chosen by the joint consent of all the States of these Kingdoms. After whose death, (without issue) the Danes considering the great advantage they had gotten by the addition of Norway; pitched upon Adolphus, Duke of Sleswick, and Earl of Holst, for the next successor; that they might get in those Estates to their Kingdom also. Who excusing himself, by reason of his Age, and want of Children, commended to them Christiern, Earl of Oldenburg, his kinsman, and next heir, who was chose according.  
1448 6 Christiern, Earl of Oldenburg, upon the commendation of his Uncle Adolfus, chosen King of Danemark, and Norway, succeeded his said Uncle in the Estates of Holst, and Sleswick, continuing since united unto that Crown; and added also thereunto by conquest, the Kingdom of Sweden.  
1482 7 John, son of Christiern, succeeded in all three Kingdoms; Knight of the Order of the Garter.  
1514 8 Christiern II. son of John, King of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden, which last he held under with great cruelty; hated, by reason of his Tyranny towards all sorts of people, and outed of his Kingdoms by his Uncle Frederick, anno 1522. by whom at last taken, and kept in prison till he died, anno 1559.  
1523 9 Frederick, brother of John, and Uncle of Christiern the second, chosen King of Denmark, and Norway, on the abdication of his Nephew, reformed Religion in both Kingdoms, according to the Confession of Ausbourg.  
1535 10 Christiern III. suppressed with great trouble the party form against him in behalf of Christiern the second, perfected the Reformation begun in the time of his Father, and was a great Benefactor to the University of Copenhagen.  
1559 11 Frederick II. son of Christiern the third, subdued Ditmarsh, before unconquered by the Danes, or the Earls of Holst, and added it unto that Dukedom, both being united to that Crown, though held of the Empire; Knight of the Garter.  
1588. 12 Christien IV. son of Frederick the second, brother of Anne Queen of Great Britain, and Knight of the Garter; engaging in a war against the Emperor Ferdinand the second for the liberty of Germany, was suddenly beat out of all the Cimbrick Chersonese by the prevailing Imperialists; but compounded the business upon very good terms, and was restored to all his own; Knight of the Gatter.  
1648 13 Frederick, son of Christiern the fourth, his elder brethren being all dead without issue, succeeded in the Crowns of Denmark, and Norway.   
Having thus mustered up the Kings of these several Kingdoms, taken distinctly, and conjunct, we must next look upon the way of their coming to their Regal throne, their form of Government, together with the powerablenesse and revenues incident unto it. As for the manner of their coming to the Regal Throne, the Danes pretend the Kingdom to be Elective, and not Hereditary: yet so as they have always set the eldest son on the throne of his Father; unless some extraordinary occasion have disposed it otherwise. But they that look upon their Stories in the former times can see no such matter: the Kingdom going generally in the way of Succession, unless by Faction, or some popular and powerful Pretender hath interloped, as oftentimes hath happened in such other Estates, as are hereditary, merely without claim, or colour of Election. 'Tis true, that the male issue ●ailing in Olaus, the son of Margaret, and the Princes which pretended by the Females after her decease, not being of sufficient power to assert their titles: the Kingdom was transferred to the house of Oldenburg, who held it on no other ground then by that of election. Which being an extraordinary case, is to make no Precedent, though seconded by the outing of King Christiern the second, and the advancement of Frederick unto that Estate: being acts of violence and force, and justified only by the false Topick of success. But whosoever lost by the hand, the Danes got well by it; King Frederick taking up the Crown upon such conditions as have made him and his successors little more than Titulary. For he was fain to swear at his Coronation, that he would put none of the Nobility to death, or banishment, but by the judgement of the Senate; that the great men should have power of Life and Death over their Tenants, or Vassals; that no Appeal should lie from them to the King's Tribunal, nor the King be partaker of the Confiscations; nor finally, advance any to Commands and Honours, but by consent of his Great Council. Which Oath being also taken by his Successors, made Bodinus say, Non tam re ipsa quam appellatione Reges esse; that they were only Kings in Title, but not Kings indeed. Yet in regard that the Nobility (so they call their Gentry) have but small Estates, none of them above the degree of Knights, (except only the Princes of the Blood) and that degree conferred by the King alone, it is not often found that they have dared to cross, or oppose their King, but when some of the Royal Family (out of private ends) have concurred with them in it: as in the case of Christiern the second deposed by the people, but those people headed, and set on by his Uncle Frederick, who had an eye upon the Crown.  
As for the Senate, or Great Council spoken of before, it consists wholly of men chosen out of the Nobility, (who are to prove their Gentry by a long descent) seldom exceeding the number of 28. to each of which, there is allowed a convenient Salary, with some fair Castle in the Country for his retirements during his being of that body: his whole estate being freed also for that time from all public payments. Without their counsel and advice, the King is neither to determine of Peace or War, or to enter into any new Leagues, or Confederacies, nor impose any Tax upon the Subject: and unto them, and the King jointly, is the last Appeal: such being the constitution of this Estate, that all Causes and Controversies are first decided in the Prefecture or Heret (184 in number) where they first arise; from whence it is Iswfull to appeal to the Judge of the Province, from him to the Chancellor of the Kingdom, and finally to the King and Council. By the Laws of Waldemar the first who first reduced the Laws into set form, and writing, the Bishops were to sit with this Council in all causes of moment: discharged from that employment by King Christiern the third, by whom it also was ordained, that the Clergy should not sell any of the Church-lands without leave of the King.  
The Forces which this King or Kingdom are to raise, may best be seen by some of their particular undertake: those specially of Christiern the second, who at the request of Henry the second of France, sent a Navy of an hundred sail into Scotland against the English, and therein no fewer than 10000 Soldiers; and of Frederick then Duke of Holst, who in hi● war against this Christiern, (whose removal from the Crown he had then projected) brought 80000 men into the field, to make good his quarrel. And questionless, considering the many Po●ts and Lands that this Crown is Master of both within the Baltic, and without, it cannot be but he may suddenly raise a strong power at Sea: And then considering that each of the Nobility which are here numerous enough, is bound to find● a certain number of Horse upon all occasions; as are those also who hold lands of the Kings which the Danes call Verle●ninge; it will accordingly be concluded that they are able to make good Levies for a sudden service, especially in defence of their own dominions.  
The Revenue of this King consisteth principally in the great impost, laid upon all ships which pass through the Sound: the greatness whereof may easily be conjectured at by the multitude of ships which of necessity must pass by it in the trade of the Baltic, though of late somewhat lessened of what it was, since the English found ●ut, and frequented the Northern passage into Muscovia. There are also some Crown-lands; and a great yearly Tell made of the Cattles, which pass into Germany; as also of the fish transported into other Countries. And yet it is conceived that the Treasures of this King are not very great, partly because there is no other important commodity, but fish, to draw Merchants thither: and partly that there is not any one Town of any great Traffic in all his Realms for the entertaining of commerce.  
The chief Order of Knighthood in it, is that of the Elephant, instituted by Frederick the second, Their bad●e, a Collar powdered with Elephants towered, supporting the King's Arms, and having at the end the picture of the Virgin Mary.  
The Arms hereof are Quarterly, 1 Or, three Lions passant Vert, crowned of the first, for the Kingdom of Denmark: and secondly Gules, a Lion Rampant Or, Crowned and Armed of the first, in his paws a Dansk hatchet Argent, for the Kingdom of Norway. What Arms belong to him as Duke of Holst, and Sleswick, I am yet to seek.  
There are in Denmark Archbishops 2. Bishops 13. Universities 2. Viz. Copenhagen. Sore.   
And so much for the Kingdom of DENMARK.   

OF SWETHLAND.  
SWETHLAND is bounded on the East with Muscovie, on the West with the Dofrine hills which divide it from Norway; on the North with the great Frozen Ocean, spoken of before; on the South with Denmark, Liefland, and the Baltic Sea. So called from the Sueci, Suethans, or Su●thidi, and the word Land added for a termination; of which more hereafter.  
It is in length from Stockholm unto the borders of Lapland, above a 1000 Italian miles; and in breadth from Stockholm, lying on the Bodner Sea, to the borders of Denmark, about twenty good days journey on horseback: insomuch as they which have traveled the length and breadth of it on this side of Lapland and the Gulf, account it little less than all Italy and France together: but taking in Lapland, and the Provinces on the other side of the Gulf, bigger than both by the quantity of 900 miles.  
The situation of it in regard of the heavenly bodies, is the same with Norway, under the same Parallels and Degrees; but of so different a temper, both for soil and air, as if disposed of under several and long distant Climes. For the Air here is very pure, but not so sharp, and insupportable, as it is in Norway: though in some places where the Moors and Waters settle for want of care to open and cleanse the watercourses, they have great fogs and mists which do somewhat putrefy it: And for the soil; it is more fertile than any of the other Northern Provinces: so that besides those necessaries which they keep for themselves, they usually transport into other Country's store of Malt and Barley; together with great quantities of Brass, Led, Steel, Copper, Iron, the hides of Goats, Bucks, Oxen, and costly surres. They have also some Mines of Silver not mixed with any other metal▪ plenty of fish in their Lakes and Rivers; abundance of Pinetrees, Fir, Oaks, both for ships and houses; yielding besides, among the woods, good store of Ta●re, and Honey, and some other necessaries. But hereof we shall speak more punctually in the several Provinces.  
The principal mountains of this Country are the Dofrine hills, a vast and continual ridge of mountains which divide it from Norway. And though they want not Rivers fit for common uses; yet partly by reason of their great frosts and flakes of Ice, partly by reason of the falling of trees which lie cross their Channels; they have not many Navigable, or of any great fame. The principal of such as be, are 1 Meler, at the mouth whereof stands the City of Stockholm: 2 Lusen, 3 Dalecarlie, giving name to the Province so called, or as denominated from it. And of the Lakes, whereof here are exceeding many, that of most note is the lake of Werett which receiving it into 24 Rivers disburdneth itself at one mouth into the Baltic, with such noise and fury, that they call it commonly the Devil's head.  
The people are naturally strong and active, provident, patient, and industrious; hospitable towards strangers, whom they entertain with great humanity: so healthy, that if they do not shorten their days by excess and riot, they live commonly to 140 years of age; and so laborious, that a Beggar is not seen amongst them: exceeding apt to learn as well Tongues and Sciences, as the Arts Mechanical: every man in a manner being his own Artificer, 
Gothland.  without employing Smith, Mason, Carpenter, or any of other manual trades: very valiant both on foot and horse back, which their long wars against the Danes, and their late wars in Germany, have given good proof of. Their women are discreet and modest, free from that intemperance which these Northern parts are subject to. Both sexes use a corrupt ●utch, common to all three Northern kingdoms: except in Finland, and the Provinces on the other side of the Bodner sea, where they partake somewhat of the Muscovite or Russian language.  
The Christian Religion was first planted amongst them by the care and diligence of Ansgarius Archbishop of Br●me, the Apostle general of the North; corrupt with Popish superstitions, it was reform, according to the Augustane Confession, in the time of Gustavus Ericus, the first of the present Royal family; solicited thereunto by one Petre Ne●icius a Lutheran Divine, and Laurence the Archdeacon of Strengnes; but chiefly moved (as others say) by a desire to appropriate to himself the goods of the Church. And this appears to have had some strong influence upon him in it, in that he presently seized upon what he pleased; and made a Law that Bishops should enjoy no more than the King thought fit: yet having pretty well lessened their revenues, he was content they should remain as formerly both in power and number, reserving to himself and his successors the nomination of the persons; but so as the approbation of the Clergy (in a kind of election) doth usually go along with the King's appointment.  
The Bishops are in number seven, that is to say, 1 of Lin●open, containing in his Diocese 226 Parishes; 2 of Vexime, under whom are 210. 3 of Scara, ruling over the same number of Churches; 4 of Strengnes, under whom are an hundred only; 5 of Aboe, the greatest for extent of all, as comprehending under it 500 Parishes; 6 of Wiburg, and 7 of Habsey, whose Dioceses for the most part lie out of the bounds of Sweden, in Muscovie, Livonia, and some other of the out parts of Poland: all of them under the Archbishop of Vpsal, as their Metropolitan, whose Diocese extending into Lapland and Finmarch, containeth 171 Parish Churches. By which account there are in all the kingdom of Swethland, but 1417 Parishes; but many of them of a thousand or eight hundred families: the people being dispersed in Forests and other places, where they have store of timber to build them houses, and store of pasturage for their cattle; which is the reason why they have not so many great towns, nor so well inhabited, as is usual in far lesser Countries: As for the Authority of these Bishops, they still retain their voice in Parliament, and with them so many of the inferior Clergy, as are from every Socken, (a certain number of Parishes like our Rural Deaneries) deputed to appear there in the name of the Church: the affairs whereof the Bishops do direct and order aswell in as out of public meetings, according to the Ecclesiastical Constitutions formerly established; and if any great occasion be, they may either advise with their Consistorials, or call a Diocesan Synod, (as they think most fit) and therein make such Laws and Canons, as they conceive to be most proper for their own edification.  
The whole kingdom is divided into two parts, the one lying on the East, the other on the West side of the Bay or Gulf or Bodner, called Sinus Bodicus in Latin, being a large and spacious branch of the Baltic Sea extending from the most southernly point of Gothland as far as to Lapland on the north. According to which division we have the Provinces of 1 Gothland and 2 Sweden, lying on the West side of the Gulf; 3 Lapland, shutting it up upon the North, 4 Bodia or Bodden, and 5 Finland, on the East side thereof; and 6 the Swedish Islands, where it mingleth with the rest of the Baltic.  

1. GOTHLAND.  
GOTHLAND, is bounded on the East with the Bodner Sea, on the West with the Mountains which divide it from Norwey, and so much of Denmark as lies in the same continent with it; on the North with Sweden; on the south with the sea Baltic. So called either from the Goths, whose original Country it is commonly affirmed to be; or quasi good landt, from the goodness and fertility of the soil (G●ot landia, quae Germanice Terra bona sonat (as Maginus out of Munster hath it) the soil being very fruitful for corn and cattle, affording plenty of Mines, with great store of fish, and generally a better conditioned Country then any of the rest of these Northern Regions.  
It is divided commonly into Ostrogoth, or East Gothland; Westergoth, divided from the former by the great lake of Wer●t spoken of before; and South Gothland, subdivided into Smalandia, Tuiscia, and Verendia. Chief towns whereof in Ostrogoth, are 1 Lincopen, a Bishops See; 2 Lodus●, adorned with a very fair Haven: in Westergoth, 3 Scara on the lake Weret, a Bishops See also; 4 Elseburg on the Western sea, betwixt Denmark and Norwey; a place of consequence; and flankerd with two very strong Castles in the parts adjoining, the one called Croneberg, and the other Goldberg. 5 Tragualle, remarkable for iron works, occasioned by the mines adjoining. And finally in South Gothland, there is 6 Vexim, or V●xio, another of the Episcopal Sees: 7 Walburg, a reasonable fair Town, with a strong Castle. 8 Rottenby, and 9 Elch●lm in Verendia, near the confines of Denmark, 10 Colmar, a noted and well traded Port on the Baltic Sea, beautified with a Castle not inferior to that of Milan; and so well fortified throughout, that at the taking of it by Christiern the fourth of Denmark, anno 1611▪ there were found mounted on the Works 108 brass pieces of Ordinance, six men of war to guard the Haven, 
Goths.  with all manner of Ammunition in proportion to them.  
The first Inhabitants of these south parts of Scandia, are commonly affirmed to have been the GOTHS, whom Jornandes in his Book de Rebus G●ticis, makes to have issued out of this country, and to plant themselves on the north banks of the Ister, near the Euxine sea, some time before the Trojan war: ascribing to them whatsoever is reported in old writers of the ancient Scythians, as their encounter with Vexoris or Sesostris the King of Egypt, the Act and achievements of the Amazons, their congress with Alexander the Great in his Persian war, and the like to these. In which Jornandes being himself a Goth, is no more to be credited, than Geofrie of Monmouth a Welshman, in the story of Brute and his successors, to whom he doth ascribe the taking and sack of Rome under the conduct of Brennus, whom he makes to be the brother of Belinus a King of Britain. Most probable it is that they were originally a Dutch or Germane people, part of the great Nation of the Suevi, called by Tacitus the Gothones, inhabiting in his time (as it is conceived) in the land of Prussia. Who finding their own country too narrow for them might pass over the Baltic into the next adjoining Regions: and not well liking that cold clime might afterwards in some good numbers go to seek new dwellings, and at left seat themselves on the banks of Ister, where Jornandes found them. That they were Dutch originally, besides the general name of the Gothones or Goths, and those of Ostrogothes, and Wisigothes, into which they were afterwards divided; the particular names of Alaric, Theodorick, Riccared, (the names of their Kings and Captains) seem to me to evidence. That they were once seated in this Country doth appear as plainly 1 by the name of Gothland here still remaining; 2 by the title of Rex Gothorum, which the Kings of Swethland keep in the Royal style; and 3 by some inscriptions in ancient unknown Characters engraven on the rocks near Scara in the Continent, and Wisby in the Isle of Gothland, supposed by learned men to be some monument of that people. And finally that their fixed dwellings, when first known by this name amongst the Romans, was on the north side of the Ister; is evident by the testimony of all ancient Writers, from the time of Antonius Caracalla, with whom they had some tumultuary skirmishes in his way towards Persia; till their violent irruption into Italy and the Western Provinces: most famous in this interval for a great fight with Decius the Roman Emperor, whom they overcame and slew in battle, anno 253. In the time of Valens and Volentinian the Roman Emperors a quarrel being grown amongst them, managed by Phritigernes and Athanaricus the leaders of the opposite factions, Phritigernes over thrown in fight 〈◊〉 recourse to Valens, from whom he received such succours, that giving his adversary another day it, he obtained the victory. Whereupon Phritige●nes and his party received the Gospel, but intermixed and corrupt with the leaven of Arianism, by the practice of Valens, who sent them none but Arian teachers, to whom and their faction in the Church, he was wholly addicted. Afterwards the whole Nation being driven over the Ister by the barbarous Huns, they obtained of Valens the out parts of Thrace for an habitation, on condition they should serve under the pay of the Emperor, and become Christians: the cause that Arianism overspread the whole Nation generally, which had before infected but one party only. ulphilas a devout and learned man, was their first Bishop; who for their better edification in the way of godliness, invented the Gothick Characters, and translated the Scriptures into that language: in the study whereof they so well profited, that many of them in the time of their first conversion, suffered death for it at the hands of Athanaricus, and were counted Martyrs. Burdened by Valens, and denied their accustomed pay, they harasse and depopulate the rest of Thrace, marching towards Constantinople: en countred in the way by Valens, whom they overcame, and killed, after all his favours. Vanquished by Theodosius the succeeding Emperor in many battles, they became good neighbours, enlarging their bounds with his leave and licence as far as Pannonia, and grown into such estimation with him that Ricimir and Franita, two of that Nation, did obtain the Consulship: not to say any thing of that exorbitant power and favour which Gainas had attained unto in the Court itself. Made insolent by so great honours, and apt to pick quarrels with their Patrons, they invaded Italy in two great bodies, consisting of no fewer than 200000 fight men: the first whereof under the conduct of Rhadaguisus, was discomfited and cut in pieces by Stilico Lieutenant to Honorius the Western Emperor, at Fesulae in the straits of the Appennone: the other by his treachery permitted to pass, sacked Rome, and subdued the most part of Italy, under the leading of Alaricus. He dying immediately after this great victory, left the fruits of it to his son Athaulfus, who marrying with Golla Placidia, the Emperor's sister, relinquished Italy, and had all Gaul Narbonnoise, and a great part of Hispania Tarraconensis assigned unto him: where he erected the kingdom of the Wisigothes, or Western Goths, possessed of Spain and Tingitana, for the space of 300 years, and upward, when they lost that kingdom to the Moors, as hath there been said. In the mean time the Goths which were left in their own countries, distinguished from these by the name of Ostrogothes by reason of their more Eastern situation, kept themselves in quiet, first subdued by the Huns, and when by Wilamer, freed from that subjection, not intermeddling or attempting any thing against the Empire, till called by Zeno Emperor of Constantinople into Italy, against Odoacer and the Heruli, who had then subdued it. Which action they managed with so much prudence and good fortune by their King Theodorick, that they vanquished Odoacer, possessed Italy, and held it above 60 years, when broken in many set battles by Belisarius and Narses, Lieutenants for the Emperor Justinian, their Kingdom and name there came unto an end.  
As for the Kings of the Goths, we have a succession of them in Jornandes, from Berig, who first conducted them out of Scandia towards the East, till the going of Theodorick into Italy: but made up with so little probalitie, 
Goths.  that I dare give no more credit to it then to the stories of Brute, Dan, ●ergus, or the Lady Scota Ph●raohs daughter. Such of whom there is any certain knowledge and succession are these few that follow.  

The KINGS of the GOTHS.  
344 1 Athanaricus king of the Goths, in the time of Constantius and Constans the sons of Constantine the Great.  
357 2 Alaricus, the first of that name in the time of Constantius.  
3 Phritigernes King of the Goths in the time of Valens, the first Christian Prince among the Goths.  
370 4 Athanaricus II. in the time of the Emperor's Valens, Gratian and Valentinian the second, under whom the Goths were first settled on this side of the Ister.  
379 5 Rhadaguisus, who in the time of Honorius, first led the Goths into Italy, slain at the battle of Fesulae.  
410 6 Alaricus II. who pursuing the war of Italy, sacked Rome, subdued Naples, and the most of Italy.  
412 7 Athaulfus the son of Alarick the second, who first erected the Kingdom of the Wisigothes in Gaul and Spain, continuing there for the space of 300 years and upwards: the present Kings of Spain coming from this stock.  
417 8 Athalaricus King of the Goths remaining in the East, at the departure of Rhadaguise and Alaricus distinguished from their plantations by the name of Ostrogothes: vanquished by Attila, they became subject to the Huns, in the time of Theodosius the second, and Valentinian the third, Emperor of the East and West.  
9 Wilamir, one of the blood Royal of the Goths, taking advantage of some quarrels amongst the sons of Attila, shook off that yoke, and recovered the kingdom of the Goths; in the time of the Emperor Marcianus.  
10 Theodomir son of Winithar, and brother of Wilamir in the time of Leo Emperor of Constantinople.  
11 Theodorick son of Theodomir, kept at Constantinople in his youth as a Pledge or Hostage 〈◊〉 for his Father, where he was instructed in all the Greek and Roman learning, are made the adopted son (as is said by Sealiger) of the Emperor Zeno: by whom he was sent into Italy against Odoacer and the Heruli erecting there the kingdom of the Ostrogothes, which continued till the reign of Justinian, when destroyed by Belisarius and Narses as before is said● the name of Goths in Italy being thus extinct, but their blood intermixed with the best Italian. The sum of their whole story, for variety's sake take thus out of Du Bartas.   
The warlike Goth which whilom issued forth  
From the cold frozen Islands of the North,  
Encamped by Vistula, but th' Air almost  
Being there as cold as in the Baltic coast,  
He with victorious Arms Sclavonia gains,  
The Transylvanian and Valachian plains.  
Then flies to Thracia, and then leaving Greeks,  
Greedy of spoil, four times he bravely seeks  
To pluck from Rome, than Mars his Minion,  
The plumes which she from all the world had won:  
Guided by Rhadaguise, and Alarick,  
Bold Vindimarus and Theodorick.  
Thence flies to France; from whence expulsed, his Legions  
Rest ever since upon the Spanish Regions.  
The Arms of these Kings are said to have been Or, three Ravens with displayed wings Purple, membered Gules. And let this suffice for the Original, successes, and final period of the Goths; reserved by me unto this place, because most commonly conceived to be their original country; at least the place out of which they issued, when they first moved towards the East to seek new dwellings.   

SWEDEN.  
SWEDEN is bounded on the East with the Bodner Sea, on the West with the Dofrine hills, which part it from Norwey; on the North with Lapland, on the South with Gotland. So called from the Suethaus or Su●thidi, the old Inhabitants hereof, of whom more anon. A country sufficiently fruitful, but for the goodness of the soil inferior to Gothland, and not so well planted or inhabited as that is, by reason of the vast Woods which they will not suffer to be destroyed, and the greatness of some mar●●hes hitherto undrained: 
Lapland▪  but might be made as rich and fertile, it the people would, as appeareth by that plenty of corn growing amongst the Woods, though much hindered by their shade and thickness both from Sun and rain. But for the character of this Country we had it formerly, when we spoke of Swethland in the general; relating specially to this as the principal part.  
And as the largest and principal part of this great body it contains in it many Provinces, and subdivisions, as namely 1 Upland, 2 Snderman, 3 Noricia, 4 Westman, 5 Dalecarle, 6 Wermelund, 7 Copperdale, 8 Gestricia, 9 Helsingen, 10 Middelphat, 11 Angerman, bordering on Lapland, the furthest of these Provinces towards the North. Many of which have no Towns or Cities of any greatness or beauty, the people living thin, and scattered, where they have wood for building, pasturage for their Beasts, and elbow room enough for themselves and their cattle. Of these the principal are 1 Vpsal, an Archbishops See, and an University, situate not far from the Bay of Bodner: beautified with a large Cathedral, wherein many of the ancient Kings of Swethland are interred. From this City the Country hereabouts is styled Archiepiscopatus Vpsalensis. 2 Holm, by the Inhabitants called Stockholm, by the Russians Stecolne, the Royal seat of the Kings, a noted and well traded Port, and the chief of the kingdom: exceeding strong both by Art and Nature, as being situate in the Marshes like Venice, at the mouth of the Lake, or River of Meler, the passage to it out of the Bay, being very narrow and by consequence easily defended, and yet so deep withal, that the greatest ships of burden may sail up to the City: the Port within the Straight being so safe and capacious, that it is able to receive at one time 300 sail, which usually ride there without any Anchor. The Castle of this City is conceived to be one of the strongest holds in the world, fortified for the more assurance of it with 400 brass pieces, many of which are double Canons. 3 Nicopen, a Sea town on the same Bay also. These three are in that part hereof which is called Upland. Then there is 4 Strengnes, an Episcopal See; and 5 Telge, on the lake of Meler, in the Province of Suderman; the title and estate of Charles father of Gustavus Adolphus late King of Sweden, before his getting of the Crown called Duke of Suderman. Next in the Province of Westman, there are 6 Arbogen, on the West side of the said Lake of Meler; and 7 Arose, rich in silver mines; out of which are made the best Dollars of Sweden: the mines here being so rich and profitable, that out of every fifteen pound weight of silver, the workmen draw a pound weight of gold. 8 Helsinge, upon the Bay of Bodner in the Province of Helsingen, taking name from hence. 9 Ozebo, or Ourbou, a strong piece in Nerisia; and 10 Lesinger, on the Bay of Bodner, one of the furthest North of Sweden, distinctly and specially so called.   

LAPLAND.  
LAPLAND, the most Northern part of all Scandia, hath on the East Russia, on the West the Province or Prefecture of Wardhuys, in the kingdom of Norwey; on the North the main frozen Ocean, and on the South Bodia or Bodden on both sides of the Bay so called.  
It is named thus originally from the Lappi or Lappones, the Inhabitants of it; as they are from their blockish behaviour; the word Lappon signifying the same with ineptus or insulsus in Latin, for such they are: rude, barbarous, and without the knowledge of Arts or Letters, as also without corn and houses, or any certain habitations, (except only in Finmarch) feeding for the most part on fish, and the flesh of wild beasts, with the skins whereof sowed together they hide their nakedness. Generally they are mere Idolaters, giving divine honour all day following to that living creature whatsoever it be, which they see at their first setting out in the morning: great Sorcerers, and abhorring the sight of strangers, whom till of late they used to flee from, at their first approach; but within few years past beginning to be more sociable and familiar. In a word, they are the true descendants of the Ancient Finni (possessed in old times of all that tract which lieth between the Bay of Finland and the Frozen Ocean) whose natural rudeness and barbarity, unmixed with the conditions of more civil people, they do still retain.  
It is divided into the Eastern and the Western Lapland. The former appertaining to the Knez or Great Duke of Muscovie, by which people the Inhabitants are called Dikiloppi, or the wild Lappians; is subdivided into Biarmia and Corelia, of which if there be any thing in them worth taking notice of, we shall there speak more. The latter doth belong to the Crown of Sweden, subdivided into 2 parts also, that is to say, Finmarch, and 2 Scricfinnia.  
1 FINMARCH, being that part hereof which lieth next to Norwey, is the more populous of the two, the people for the most part idolatrous, but by the neighbourhood of the Norwegians, and resort of strangers unto Wardhuys, and the parts adjoining, somewhat civilised; and in the borders of both kingdoms savouring of Religion, possessed of sheds or sorry houses, & those houses reduced to parishes, under the jurisdiction of the Archbishop of Vpsal, the chief of which, (if there be any chief amongst them) are named 1 Samman, and 2 Hielso. Called Finmarch, as the ancient bounds and Marches of the Finni (of whom more anon) and therefore erroneously by Maginus made a part of the kingdom of Norwey.  
2 SCRICFINNIA lieth between Finmarch and Russia, the name derived from the Finni, a great people of Scandia, and Scriken a Dutch word signifying leaping, sliding or bounding, for such is their gate. An etymology not much inprobable, in that the wooden-soled shoes with sharp bottoms, which they used for their more speedy sliding over the ye, 
Finland.  of which this country is full, are by the Germans (who also use them) called Scri●eshoe●ne or sliding-shoes. The ancient Writers call this people Scrictofinni.  
These are indeed the natural and proper Laplanders; and unto these the former character doth of right belong. Of stature very low, little more than Pygmies, but strong and active, well skilled in Archery, and patient of cold and labour. Much given to hunting of wild beasts whom they kill with their bows, devour the flesh, and clothe themselves with their skins, which they tie at the top of their heads, and leave no place open but for the sight, giving thereby occasion unto some to write, that they are hairy all over like kine or horses. Such Deer (whereof they have great plenty) as they take unkilled, they make to draw in little carts, as they shift their Quarters. But having served them for a while they are killed at last, though perhaps for nothing but their skins; a certain number of which they pay yearly to the King of Sweden in the way of tribute. Three companies of these Laplanders, so clad and armed as aforesaid, came into Germany in the year 1630 to serve Gustavus in those wars; looked on with admiration by all spectators.  
Towns we must look for none here, where no houses be: and yet there are some sheds and cabins on the Sea shore; which Mariners having made for their refreshment when they came on land, have bestowed some names on, and possibly in time may become good towns, now not worth the naming.   

BODIA.  
BODIA, BODEN, or BODNER, is situate on the South of Scricfinnia, betwixt it and the Bay or Gulf hence named; extending southwards on the West side of it till it joins to Sweden, and on the East side till it meet with the Province of Finland. Hence the division of this country, into the Eastern, Northern, and Western Bodden; with reference to the situation of it on the Bay aforesaid. The country not very plentiful of grain or fruits, but full of great variety of wild beasts, whose rich skins yield great profit unto the Inhabitants; and by reason of the commodious situation on all sides of the Bay, well stored with Fish. Anciently it was part of the possessions of the Finni, but how or whence it had the name of Bodia, or Bodden, or Bodner, I am yet to learn. But whence soever it had the name, certain I am, that from hence the Gulf adjoining, is called Sinus Bodicus, Bodner Zee, by the Dutch or Germans.  
Chief Towns here in are 1 Barkara, in West Bodden betwixt the Bay and a great navigable lake; 2 Gernia, a well traded Emporie at the very bottom of the Bay in North Bodden; 3 Helsingeliac, more North than that, towards the borders of Lapland, and 4 Kerldby, in East Bodden, on the bank of the Gulf, conveniently seated for a town of Trade.   

3. FINLAND.  
FINLAND hath on the North, Bodia; on the South, the Baltic Sea, or Mare Suevicum: on the East, Sinus Finnicus; on the West, Sinus Bodicus. It is by Munster thought to be called Finland, quasi fine land; quod pulchrior & amaenior sit Suecia, because it is a more fine and pleasing country than Sweden itself. But indeed it is so called from the Finni, or Fenni; a potent Nation who have here dwelled; whose character is thus framed by Tacitus: Finnis mira feritas, foeda paupertas, non arma, non equi, non penates, victui herbae, vestitui pelles, cubile humus, sola in sagittis spes. The Fins, saith he, are wonderfully barbarous, miserably poor, without Arms, Horse, or Household Goods: Herbs their food, the ground their bed, and the skins of beasts their best apparel, armed only with their Arrows, and in them their hopes. A Character which agreeth every way with our present Finlanders, especially those of Scricfinnia, and some parts of Finmarchia, who are not so well reclaimed to civility, as the other are; but very different from that which Jornandes gives them, who living within 400 years after Tacitus, before they had much (if any) intercourse with foreign Nations, telleth us of them that they were Scanziae Cultoribus omnibus mitiores, more tractable and civil than any of the Inhabitants of Scandia, not excepting the Suethidi themselves. If so, they did deserve to live in so good a Country, more plentiful and plain than Sweden, and neither so hilly nor so moorish.  
The principal place in it are 1. Abo, an Archbishops See, situate on the most Southern point of it, shooting into the Baltic. 2 Wiburg, a Bishops See also, whose jurisdiction for the most part is without this Province, on some part of Russia; all Finland being in the Diocese of the Bishop of Abo. A town conveniently seated at the bottom of the Bay or Gulf of Finland (called Sinus Finnicus in Latin) which divides this Country from Livonia: well fortified as the chief Bulwark of this Kingdom against the Moscovite; and so well garrisoned withal, that the keeping of this town, and Rivallia in the borders of Liefland, do cost the king of Sweden 100000 Dollars yearly. 3. Vdden, on a point or Promontory of the same Gulf opposite to Narve, another Garrison of this king, in Liefland. 4 Verma upon the Bodner Zee, 5 Cronaburg, more within the land, at the efflux of a River out of the Lake called Puente, 6 Deckala, on the banks of the great Lake called Ho●ela. 7 Varta, more northwards towards Lapland: of which last four I find not any thing observable in the way of story.   

6 The SWEDISH ISLANDS.  
And now at last I come to the Swedish Islands, here and there interspersed in the Baltic Seas, betwixt the Isle of Bornholm which belongs to Denmark, and Liefland or Livonia, appertaining to the King of Poland; the principal of which are 1 Gothia, or the Isle of Gothland; and 2 Insulae Vlandae, or the Isles of Oelandt.  
1. GOTHIA, or the Isle of GOTHLAND, is situate over against Colmar, a strong town in the Continent of Gothland; in length 18 Dutch miles, and five in breadth. Of a rich soil, but more fit for past●rage then till age, yielding great herds of cattle, store of game for hunting, plenty of fish, excellent marble, and abundance of pitch, which it sends forth to other Country's. There are in it 18 large and wealthy Villages; besides the Haven town of Wisbich, heretofore rich, and of very geeat trading, as much frequented by the Merchant as most in Europe, but now much decayed, and neither so well peopled, nor so rich as formerly. The trade removed hither from Wollin of Pome●ania (destroyed by Waldemar the first of Denmark, anno 1170) made it flourish mightily: the greatest traffic of the Baltic being managed here: but after that by reason of the long and continual wars betwixt Denmark and Swethland for the possession of this Isle, it became unsafe; the factory was transferred unto other places. For being conveniently seated to annoy the Swedes, the Danes have much contended for it, and sometimes possessed it; but at the present is in the hand of the Swethlander. By some conceived to be the Eningia spoken of by Pliny.  
2 OELAND, or the Isles of Vlande, so called in the plural number because there are many of them, of which this the principal, is situate over against Ab●, the chief City of Finland. Of no great note, but that it is commodiously seated to invade or annoy this kingdom; and therefore very well fortified, and as strongly garrisoned: here being the good towns of 1 Viburg, 2 Vames, and 3 the strong Castle of Castrolm.  
Besides which Countries here described, the King of Sweden is possessed of the strong towns of Narve and Rivallia, and Pernow in Liefland; of Kexholm or Hexholm in Corelia, a Province of Russia; with very fair and ample territories appertaining to them: subdued and added to this Crown by John the second, anno 1581. except Rivallia, which voluntarily submitted to Ericus the second King of this present Race, anno 1561. But being these Towns and Territories are not within the bounds of Swethland; we shall defer all further discourse thereof, to a place more proper.  
The first Inhabitants of this kingdom, besides the Goths and Finni, spoken of already, were the Sitones, and Suiones, mentioned in Tacitus; together with the Phavonae, the Phiraesi, and the Levoni, whom we find in Ptolemie, placed by him in the East and middle of this great Peninsula. Which being the general names of some mighty Nations, are by Jornandes branched into lesser tribes, of the Suethans, 〈◊〉, Vagoth, Bergio, Hallin, Liothida, Athelni●, Gaurigoth, Raumaricae, Rauragnicii, Grannii, Aganziae, 〈◊〉, Arochitamii, Enagerae, Othingi, and divers others by him named. But from what root the name of Sweden, Swedes, or Swethland, by which the chief Province of it, the people generally, and the whole kingdom is now called, is not yet agreed on, nor spoken of at all by Munster or Crantzius, which two, (but specially the last) have written purposely of this people. Gaspar Peucerus deriveth them from the Sucvi, who anciently inhabited in the North parts of Germany beyond the Albis; from whom the Baltic sea was called Mare Suevicum: which people he conceiveth to have been driven by the Goths and Daci into this country, and by the change of one letter only to be called Sueci. But this hath no good ground to stand on, though I meet with many others which are more improbable. For when they left those colder countries, they fell into these parts which are still called Suevia (the Schwaben of the modern Dutch) where we find them in the time of Caesar. And after, in fatali illa gentium commigratione, when almost all the Northern Nations did shift their seats, we find such of them as had stayed behind, to have accompanied the Vandals in their on-fals into Gaul and Spain. Of any expedition of theirs cross the Baltic seas, ne●gry quidem, nothing to be found in more ancient Authors. We must therefore reserve the original of this people either to the Suiones, or the Suethidi, or perhaps to both: both being anciently settled in these Northern Regions. Of the Suiones we read in the book of Tacitus inscribed De Moribus Germanorum; by whom reported to be strong in men, armour, and shipping: and that they were inhabitants of Scandia, appears by two circumstances in that Author. 1 That the people were not permitted to wear weapons, quia subitos hostium incursus prohibet Oceanus, because the Ocean was to them a sufficient Rampart; which could not be affirmed of the ancient Suevians, but agreeth very well with the situation of this present Country, defended by the baltic, and vast Northern Ocean, from the sudden assaults of any enemy. 2. Because the Sea which hemmed in that people was conceived to be the utmost bound of the World; trans Suiones 〈◊〉, quo cingi claudique terrarum orbis fines, as his words there are: which we know to hold good of this Country. Add unto these this passage of the old Annals of the Emperor Lewis the second, where it is told us of the Danes, 〈◊〉 patria apud Suiones exulabant, that they were banished into the country of the Su●ones, which cannot so well be understood of any place as of this Sweden; being next neighbour unto Denmark. And 4 that this people both by Munster and Crantzius, are as well called Suiones as Su●●i or Sue●i: which showeth what they conceived of their true Original. Then for the Suethans or the 〈◊〉, whom Jornandes speaks of in his book De●ebus G●tici●, they are by him placed in the Isle of Scandia (for such this great 〈◊〉 was estee●ed to be by most ancient writers.) Now that these Suethidi are no other than the present Suethlanders appeareth 1. by the propinquity of the names; 2 In that he maketh the Finni and Finnaithae, the next neighbours to them; and 3 in that they are affirmed by the same Author, to have furnished the Romans with rich Furs, and the skins o● wild Beasts, with which commodities this country is abundantly well stored. Now to which of these two Nations, either the Suiones or the Suethidi, those of Sweden are most indebted for their original, will (I conceive) be no great controversy: the Suethans, and Suethidi of Jornandes, being no other than a tribe of the Suiones, though the greatest and most powerful of all those triles: placed therefore in the front to command the rest, and so most like to give the name unto the whole.  
Their government was anciently under Kings, affirmed so to be by Tacitus, who telleth us also that they were absolute and free, nullis exceptionibus, non precario jure regnandi, not bound in Covenant with their people, nor holding their Estates at the will of the Subject. But their Historians have gone for Antiquity hereof beyond the story of Brute or the Trojan war, (beyond which very few of that strain have dared to pretend) as high as unto Magog the son of Japhet; reigning here within 90 years after the flood. But letting pass these dreams and dotages of the Monkish times, certain it is, that sometimes they were under the Danes, sometimes under the Norwegians, sometimes had distinct Kings of their own, and finally sometimes were comprehended with the Danes and Norwegians, under the general name of Normans, conducted by one King or Captain upon foreign actions. Omitting therefore the succession of their former kings, of whose very being there is cause to make great question; we will begin our Catalogue of them with Jermanicus, who entertained Harald King of Denmark, and his brother Regenfride, driven out of that kingdom by Gottricus or Godfrey, the Contemporary of Charlemain, of whose successors Munster giveth us more certainty.  

The KINGS of SWEDEN.  
1 Jermanicus.  
2 Frotho.  
3 Herotus.  
4 Sorlus.  
5 Biornus.  
6 Wichsertus.  
7 Ericus.  
8 Ostenus.  
9 Sturbiornus.  
10 Ericus II.  
11 Olaus.  
12 Edmundus.  
13 Stinkalis.  
14 Halsienus.  
15 Animander.  
16 Aquinus.  
17 Magnus.  
1150 18 Sherco 13.  
1160 19 Carolus 8.  
1168 20 Canutus 54.  
1222 21 Ericus III. 27.  
1249 22 Bingerius 2.  
1251 23 Waldemarus 26.  
1277 24 Mognus II. 13.  
1290 25 Birgerius II. 23.  
1313 26 Magnus III. son to Ericus the brother of Byrgerius was also chosen King of Norwey.  
1326 27 Magnus IV. King of Sweden and Norwey, which last he gave in his life time to Hayvin or Aquinus his second son, and after the death of Ericus his eldest son (his designed successor in this Crown) was outed of this kingdom by the practice of  
1463 28 Albert Duke of Mecklenburg, son of Euphemia the sister of Magnus the fourth; to the prejudice of Aquinus king of Denmark and Norwey, made King of Sweden, on that quarrel vanquished by Margaret Queen of Denmark and Norwey, widow of Aquinus, anno 1387. to whom desirous of liberty he resigned his Kingdom, and died in his own country, anno 1407.  
1387 29 Margaret Queen of Denmark, Sweden, and Norwey, the Semiramis of Germany, having united the three Kingdoms under her command, caused an Act of State to be passed in Colmar, a chief town of Swethland, for the perpetuation of this union unto her successors; the Laws and Privileges of each Kingdom continuing as before they were.  
1411 30 Ericus IV. Duke of Pomeren, adopted by Margaret, of whose sister Ingelburgis he was descended, was in her life time chosen King of the three Kingdoms, into which he succeeds actually after her decease; but outed of them all by a strong faction raised against him, anno 1439. he died in a private estate in Pomeren, anno 1559.  
1439 31 Christopher Count Palatine and Duke of Bavier (in title only) son of the Lady Margaret sister of Ericus succeeded in all three Kingdoms. After whose death the Swethlanders being weary of the Danish Government, broke the agreement made at Colmar for the uniting of the three Kingdoms under one Prince, and chose one Carolus Ca●utus to be their King, anno 1448.  
1448 32 Carolus Canutus, one of the meanest of the Nobility, and not long pleasing to the great ones: whose displeasure when he had incurred and feared the consequents thereof, he gathereth together all the treasure he could, fled unto Dantzick, and there ended his days.  
1455 33 Christiern King of Denmark and Norwey, called in by a party of the Swedes, and crowned King of Swethland; but outed again under colour that he had not kept conditions with them: the kingdom governed after that (for a time) by Marshals.  
1458 34 John King of Denmark and Norwey, the son of Christiern, received king by the Swedes, then overpowered by the Muscovite: but their turn being served they expelled him again; returning to their former government under Marshals. Of which Marshals (descended from Steno Stur, the Uncle of Carolus Canutus by his Mother's side) there were three in number; viz. Steno, 2 Suanto, and 3 Steno Stur the second, of which the two first died natural deaths, and the last being by Christiern the second slain in battle, this kingdom was again possessed by the Danes.  
1519 35 Christiern II. King of all three kingdom, used his victory so cruelly here, and his subjects so insolently at home; that here he was outed by Gustavus Ericus, and driven out of Denmark by his Uncle Frederick.  
1523 36 Gustavus Ericus descended from the ancient race of the kings of Sweden, having vanquished and expelled the Danes, was on the merit of that action chosen king of Swethland; which still continueth in his house.  
1561 37 Ericus V. son to Gustavus 8.  
1569 38 John II. brother of Ericus, married Catharine the sister of Sigismond the second, king of Poland.  
1593. 39 Sigismond the son of John the second, in the life time of his Father chosen king of Poland, anno 1586. but was dispossessed of the Crown of Sweden, (after a long war) by his Uncle Charles.  
1607 40 Charles II. Duke of Suderman, the youngest son of Gustavus Ericus, and brother of John and Eric, the two former Kings, first governed here as Viceroy for his Nephew Sigismond; but having an aim upon the Crown (to which he found the Lutherans not very favourable) he raised up a Calvinian party within that Realm, according to whose principles he began first to with draw his obedience from his natural Prince, and afterwards to assume the Government to himself: speeding so well in his design, that after a long war he forced his Nephew to desist from all further enterprises, and made himself king, anno 1607.  
1611 41 Gustavus Adolphus son of Charles having settled his affairs in Sweden, and made peace with the king of Denmark, with whom his father was in war at the time of his death; fell first upon his Cousin Sigismond the King of ●oland, from whom he took many places of importance in Prussia and Livonia, and in pursuance of that war was made Knight of the Garter. Afterwards having settled a truce with him, he passed into Germany, then in great danger of being absolutely enthralled to the house of Ausiria. In which he prospered so beyond all expectation, that in one year he passed over the ●lb, the Rh●ne, and the Danow (which no Conqueror ever did before): and having twice vanquished the Imperialists led by Ti●y, and restored many of the Germane Princes unto their estates; was in the current of his victories slain in the battle of Lutzen, Novemb. 1632. his body royally conveyed to Swethland and there interred.  
1632 42 Christina sole daughter of Gustavus, of the age of seven years, acknowledged Queen of Sweden; the estate governed by the Counsels of the Nobility. After a long war with variable success in Germany, they came at last to this Accord in the treaty of Munster, that she and her successor's Kings and Queens of Swethland, should peaceably enjoy all the Higher Pomerens, with the Isles of Rugia, Wollm, and the Town of Stetin in Lower Pomerland; the Town and Port of Wismar in the Dukedom of Mecklenburg; and the whole Bishopric of Bremen and Verden, and the Prefecture of the Town of Wilchusen; with the title of Dukes of Brem●n, Pomeren, and Verden, Princes of Rugia, and Lord of Wismar; and by those titles have a place, as Princes of the Empire, in all Diets and Assemblies which concern the public. By which agreement (if it hold) the Swedes have not only got a good footing in Germany, a strong influence upon all the Counsels of the Empire, a door open for more forces (if occasion be) and a free passage into the Western Ocean, which before they wanted: but may in time prove absolute Masters of the Baltic sea, and make the Hamburgers, those of Lubeck, and possibly the Kings of Denmark and the Empire itself, be at their devotion.   
But leaving these things to the doubtful issue of contingency, let us next look upon the forces and Revenues of the Crown of Sweden, before the time of Gustavus Adolphus, or as he found it at his succession to that Crown. For though the Swedes pretend their Kingdom to be elective, especially since the failing of the Royal line in Magnus the fourth and Alb●rt of Mecklenbourg; yet still the eldest son, or next heir succeedeth, unless put by, by faction and strong hand, as in the case of Sigismond, and his Uncle Charles. Which Charles so ordered his affairs that having engaged the kingdom in a war agains his Nephew, he was solicited at the last to accept of the Crown: to which he would by no means yield till a Law was made for the entailing of the same for ever unto his posterity, whether male or female, as an Hereditary Crown, But whether Hereditary or Elective, the King once settled in the Throne is an absolute Monarch: having not only power to levy taxes on his subjects, as he seeth occasion, as five, six, seven, eight dollars, or more yearly, upon every householder, according to the Proportion of his estate; but also to grant a certain number of Paisants unto such as he means to favour, to be as 〈◊〉 and vassals to him, according to his well deserving. And whereas in the constitution of this Government every Parish hath a Landsman or Consul to decide the controversies of the same; as every Territory hath its Viscount, and each Province his Lamen: there lieth an Appeal from the Land●man unto the Viscount, and from the Viscount to the Lamen; who if they be supposed not to judge uprightly, than the Appeal lies unto the Counsel, and from the Counsel of Estate to the King himself, (in whom is fixed the Sovereignty and DERNIER RESORT) and not unto the King and Counsel, as before in Denmark.  
The Forces of this King are either by Sea, or Land. By Sea, he is Commander wholly of Bodner, and hath a great power in all the rest of the Baltic: being able to set out 70 good Men of War; as John the second did in the year 1578. seven of which were good Galleons; and all the rest did carry above 50 cast pieces of all sorts; besides many other good Vessels fit for service. And if a Navy of this size will not serve the turn, he is not only furnished with timber, cordage, and all other necessaries for the building of Ships, and with good store of Ordinance and Ammunition for present use; but is able to raise upon a sudden 6000 Mariners, and upon little warning as many more: all which he entertaineth at no other charges in a manner then to find them victuals, insomuch as John the second before mentioned did use to say, that that which cost the King of Spain a Million of Crowns, cost not him 10000 Dollars.  
For his Land-forces, they may best be estimated by the Trained Bands, (as we may call them) in every Province: there being in all 3● Vexill●s (or Ensigns) of Foot constantly trained and mustered in the several Provinces; each Vexille comprehending 600 or 700 men, amounting in the total to 20000 Foot, all in a manner Musketeers, ready to march whensoever the King's occasion shall so require. And then for Horse there are eleven Cornets in continual readiness, for Sweden, and Gothland, and two for Finland, maintained at the charges of those Countries, to whi●h the King may add at his own charges, as many more as he pleaseth. And for an instance of what this King is able to do, without putting his estates in hazard by draining them too dry of men to make good his kingdom; we find that John the second in his Navy of 70 Ships spoken of before, had above 18000 Land-souldiers, besides Mariners: And in the Army which Gustavus Adolphus the late King brought into Germany, there were mustered no ●ewer at one time then 12000 Horse, and 34000 Foot, all Fins, and Swethlanders. For the accommodating of which Armies with Artillery, and the like Engines of war, it is thought that the kings hereof are masters of 8000 great pieces, for the most part brass, with Mortar pieces and Granades in proportion to them.  
But that which makes his Land forces most considerable is their hardness in enduring the extremities of wind and weather, insomuch that it is usual with th●m to stand Sentinel a whole Winter's night of 18 hours long without being relieved: their exact Discipline, and obedience to their Commanders, and finally their indefatigable industry in making their own shoes, Apparrels, stocks for Muskets, and all other necessaries. Which doth not only make them fit to endure any labour which is put upon them in the wars; but keeps them from idleness, and the pride of Mutinies, the ordinary effect in great Armies of sloth and ease. Nor do they want encouragement on the King's part neither; who first, giveth to every soldier victuals, which he accounts not in their pay, and that according to his obedience and desert; 2. If a soldier be taken Prisoner, him the King doth usually redeem at his own charges: and 3 if a soldier's horse be slain under him, the King supplieth him with another: which makes the soldiers (very sensible of such obligations) exceedingly conformable unto his commands, how dangerous soever they may seem to be.  
Finally as for his Revenues they must needs be great, there being four ways allowed him to amass his treasures. First the Revenues of the Church, consisting before the Reformation of seven Bishoprics and sixty Monasteries, which enjoyed very great possessions; all seized on by Gustavus Ericus, and by him incorporate to the Crown; excepting only what is given back to maintain the Bishops. 2 Mines, which are here of all metals in very great plenty, except of Gold and Silver, which they have more sparingly; the tenth whereof in all places belongs to the King, and yields him such a fair Intrado, that in the year 1578. the Kings part out of two or three Mixes of Copper only amounted to 30000 Dollars. 3 Tenths, out of all increase, as Rye, Wheat, Barley, Fish, Oxen, Skins, and the like commodities; the sum whereof though not certainly known (because the increase is so uncertain) yet it was once computed that the tenth of the Oxen only came in one year to 18000 Dollars, besides provision for his household. 4 And lastly, Customs imposed on Merchandise, and paid in all his Haven Towns for all commodities imported, or exported of what sort soever. Be●d●s all which he hath his Contributions in all times of war, power of imposing taxes (though moderately used) as his necessities require: and on the marriage of a daughter, the kingdom is to provide her portion, which of late times hath been fixed at the certain sum of 100000 Dollars, besides Plate and Movables. Out of which several Items to sum up the total, it was observed that in the year 1578. King John the second, (all charges ordinary and extraordinary being first deducted) did lay up in his Treasury no less than 700000 Dollars: which was a vast sum for those times, considering especially the great charge which the King had been at that year, in furnishing a Navy of 70 sail, and raising 18000 Land-souldiers, (besides Horse) for defence of his Realm against the Danes. And yet it is conceived by some knowing men that his Revenues would be much greater than they are, if he did employ strangers to work the mines, which the Natives do not husband to the best advantage; and yet are fearful to discover them to other Nations, upon some jealousies which they are naturally addicted to: or if he would turn Merchant, and in his own ships send out Corn and Cordage with Masts and Timber fit for building, and in them bring back salt and other necessaries, which his kingdom wants, setting them at a far less price than now they go at, and yet gaining very greatly by it too.  
The Arms of this Kingdom are Azure, three Crowns, Or.  
There are in Swethland Archbishops 2. Bishops 8. Universities but one, viz. Vpsal.   
And thus much for SWETHLAND.   

OF RUSSIA.  
RUSSIA is bounded on the East by Tartary, on the West with Livonia, and Finland, from which divided by great Mountains, and the River Poln; on the North by the Frozen Ocean, and some part of Lapland; and on the South by Lituania, a Province of the Kingdom of Poland, and the Grim Tartars inhabiting on the Banks of Palus Maeotis and the Euxine Sea. It standeth partly in Europe and partly in Asia, the River Tanais or Don running through it: the common boundary of those great and noted parts of the world.  
It was thus called from the Rossi or Russi, a people of Mount Taurus or Taurica Chersonesus (if not both) who in the declining times of the Greek Empire, possessed themselves of some parts of it, and being the prevailing people imposed their name on all the rest. Called also Russia Alba, to distinguish it from Russia Nigra a Province of Poland, quod incolae omnium gentium ipsius imperio subjectarum (as one observes discoursing of the affairs hereof) vestibus albis & Pileis plerunque utantur: because the Inhabitants use to wear white caps and vestments. And why not thus; sithence the people of Margiana and Sogdiana in Asia have the name of Jeselbasse, only because they wear green turbans, as the word importeth? Finally it is called Moscovie, from Moscovie the chief Province of it, as that denominated from the Moschi, of whom more anon.  
In reference to the heavenly bodies it is said by some to be situate betwixt the 8. and 20. Climates, the longest day in the Southern parts being but 16 hours and an half, and almost 22 hours and an half in the Northern parts. But this is to be understood only of the Province of Moscovie, properly and specially so called, and not of the whole Empire of the Moscovite, according to the bounds before laid down. For taking in the Northern Provinces belonging to it, as East Lapland, Candora, and Petzora, lying within the Arctic Circle, the longest day in Summer will be full 6 months (for so long do those Countries see no night at all:) which is a mighty disproportion from the length of the longest day in the most Southern parts, being but 16 hours and an half, as before is said. And by this rule we are to take the dimensions also. For though some make the length hereof from North to South, that is to say, from Cala in the North to Astrachan near the Caspian Sea, to be no more than 2260 Versts, or 3690 Italian miles: yet they confess that reckoning forwards from Tromschua the furthest point of Petzora, the full length thereof will be nigh so much more. And for the breadth, reckoning from Narve on the Bay of Finland (now in possession of the Swedes) to the Province of Severia in the East, it amounteth to 4400 Versis, or 3300 Italian miles; each Versed being estimated at three quarters of an English mile. Which mighty Territory, if it were peopled answerably to some other parts of the world, would either make it too great for one Prince to hold, or make that Prince too great and puissant for all his neighbours.  
The people, as is commonly reported of them, are very perfidious, crafty and deceitful in all their bargains, false-dealers with all they have to do with, making no reckoning of their promises, and studying nothing more than ways to evade their Contracts. Vices so generally known and noted in them, that when they are to deal with strangers, they dissemble their Country, and pretend to be of other Nations: for fear lest no body should trust them. Destitute of humane affections, and so unnatural that the father insults on the son, and he again over his father and mother: So malicious one towards another, that you shall have a man hide some of his own goods in the house of some man whom he hateth, and then accuse him for the stealth of them. They are exceedingly given to drink, insomuch that all heady and intoxicating drinks are by Law prohibited: and two or three days only in a year allowed them to be drunk in. For the most part they are strong of body, swift of foot, of a square proportion, broad, short, and thick; grey-eyed, broad-bearded, and generally furnished with prominent paunches. The Commons live in miserable subjection to the Nobles; and they again in as great slavery to the Duke or Emperor; to whom no man of all the vulgar dares immediately exhibit a Petition, or make known his grievances: nay the mean Lords and Officers are squeamish in this kind, and but on great submission, will not commend unto the Duke a poor man's cause. They are altogether unlearned, even the Priests meanly indoctrinated; it being cautionated by the great Duke that there be no Schools, lest there should be any Scholar's but himself: so that the people use to work commonly on the Lord's day, holding it fit only to be kept by Gentlemen; and to say in a difficult question, God and our Great Duke know all this: and in other talk, All we enjoy health and life, all from our Great Duke. According to whose pleasure every man is prescribed what habit he shall wear, both for matter and fashion suitable unto their condition. In the time of my Author, their habit was a long Garment without plaits, which hung down to their heels, commonly of white or blue, with very straight sleeves: on their legs wearing buskins up as high as the calf, for the most part red, high at the heels, and beset with nails of iron. The stuff and trimming of this dress is the only difference betwixt the Noble and the Peasant. The women are attired also much after this manner, but if great and Noble, suffered to set forth themselves with store of pearls and precious stones, which hang so thick about their ears, that they do almost pull their ears from their heads. A second marriage is conceived no blemish in point of chastity, but the third condemns them of incontinence: naturally subject enough to the lusts of the flesh, but private and fearful to offend; if once lascivious, then most intolerably wanton. It is the fashion of these women to love that husband best which beareth them most; and to think themselves neither loved nor regarded, unless they be two or three times a day well favouredly swaddled. The Author of the Treasury of times, telleth a story of a Germane Shoemaker, who travelling into this Country, and here marrying a widow, used her with all kindness that a woman could (as he thought) desire; yet did not she seem contented. At last learning where the fault was, and that his not beating her, was the cause of her pensiveness; he took such a vein in cudgelling her sides, that in the end, the Hangman was fain to break his neck for his labour.  
They use the Sclavonian language, but so corrupt and mixed with other languages that they and the Sclavonians understand not one another's meaning, but by circumstance only: yet in Jugaria (out of which the Hungarians are thought to have issued) they speak a corrupt Hungarian; and in Petzora and the Country of the Cz●remissians, they have a language to themselves distinct from others.  
They first received the Christian Faith in the year 987. or as some say, anno 942. by the preaching and ministry of the Greeks, sent hither by the Patriarch of Constantinople: of which Church they are constant followers both for rites and doctrine, but not without some superstitions of their own superadded to them, viz. not coming near a Cross, Church, or Monastery, but they kneel down, and make the sign of the Cross, saying, Mil●y Hispodi, i. e. Lord have mercy upon us; not entering into any Church until washed and bathe. They bear a deadly hatred to the Jews, whom they suffer not to live amongst them; and so great friendship unto a Calf, that they hold it a great offence to kill one, or to eat his flesh. Their Church is governed by 18 Bishops, and 2 Metropolitans, all of them subordinate to their Archbishop or Patriarch, as he in former times to the Constantinopolitan; by whom he used to be confirmed. But about an hundred years ago they withdrew themselves from that subjection; the Patriarch being nominated by the Great Duke, and consecrated by two or three of his own Suffragans. Without the counsel and advice of this Patriarch, the Emperor or Great Duke doth nothing of any moment. The Bishops are all chosen out of the Monastic or Regular Clergy; which makes the Monks, (being all of the Order of S. Basil) to live very religiously in hope to be advanced to the Episcopal dignity. And for the Secular Clergy, or Parochial Priests, there is not much required of them but to say their Masses (which being in their own language they may easily do,) and to read now and then one of S. Chrysostoms' Homilies, translated heretofore for the use of those Churches: after the death of their first ●lves not permitted to marry, in other things little differing from the rest of the people. Once in the year it is lawful and usual with them to hold a Synod, at which the Patriarch hath his Crozier or Pastoral staff carried before him, as the Pope's Legate hath the Cross; where they make Constitutions for the public government, and the regulating of Divine matters, most punctually and carefully observed by the Prince himself.  
As followers of the Greek Church (but so as to be counted a Church distinct) they differ much both from the Romish and Reform: 1 Denying the Holy Ghost to proceed from the Father and the Son. 2 Denying Purgatory, but praying for the dead. 3 Believing that holy men enjoy not the presence of God before the resurrection. 4 Communicating in both kinds; but using leavened bread, and mingling warm water with wine, which both together they distribute with a spoon. 5 Receiving children of 7 years old to the Sacrament of the Eucharist, because than they begin to sin. 6 Forbidding extreme unction, confirmation, and fourth marriages. 7 Admitting none to Orders but such as are married, and yet prohibiting marriage to them that are actually in Orders. 8 Rejecting carved Images, but admitting the painted. 9 Observing 4 Lents in the year. 10 Reputing it unlawful to fast on Saturday; or to eat blood or any thing that hath been strangled according to the first Council holden at Jerusalem. 11 And finally dissolving marriage by divorcement, upon every slight occasion or conceived pleasure. Which diversity betwixt the Romanists and this people in point of Religion, hath bred such a difference betwixt them in point of Affection, and made them so ill conceited of one another: that it a M●scovite be known or but suspected to have conversed with any of the Church of Rome, he is accounted to be a polluted person, and must be solemnly purged and purified before he be admitted to partake of the blessed Sacrament.  
In matters of war the people are indifferent able, as being almost in continual broils with their Neighbours: and have a custom that when they go to the Wars every Soldier giveth to the Emperor or Great Duke a piece of money, which at the end of the war he receiveth again; and by that means the number of the slain is exactly known. At their funerals they use to put a penny into the mouth of the party deceased, a pair of shoes on his feet, and a Letter in his hand, directed (such is their superstition) to S. Nicholas, whom they deem to be the Porter of Heaven: an opinion doubtless very prejudicial to the Popes and S. Peter's prerogatives.  
This Country is not so populous as spacious. The Eastern parts are vexed with the Tartars; who like Esop's dog, will neither dwell there themselves, nor suffer the Muscovites to plant Colonies in them: the Western parts are almost as much molested by the Sweden and Polonian Kings; the Southern by the Turks and Precopenses; and the Northern by the coldness of the air, which is of such vehemency, that water thrown up into the air, will turn to ice before it fall to the ground. The better to resist the extremity of this cold, not only the clothes of this people, but their very houses are lined with thick Furs. Every Gentleman or man of note hath in his dwellinghouse a stove or hothouse, in which they keep, as it were, to thaw themselves. Such as travel on the way, use often to rub their nose or ears with snow or ice, to settle and recall the motive spirits into those parts, which otherwise they would be in danger to lose: the ignorance of which preventing Chirurgery, was not the least cause▪ that in the year 1598., of 70000 Turks, which made an inroad into Muscovie, 40000 were frozen to death. By reason of these extremities of frosts and cold, it is the custom of this people, to lay the bodies of their dead all the winter long on heaps in the Belfrees of their Churches; where they lie without putrefying or any ill favour, till the end of March; at what time the air beginning to wax warm and the earth to be fit for digging, each family looks out their dead bodies, and taketh care to bury them. This excess of cold in the air, gave occasion to Castilian in his Aulicus, wittily and not incongruously to feign, that if two men being somewhat distant, talk together in the winter, their words will be so frozen that they cannot be heard: but if the parties in the spring return to the same place, their words will melt in the same order that they were frozen and spoken, and be plainly understood. Such is their winter, neither is their summer less miraculous. For the huge Seas of ice, which in a manner covered the whole surface of the Country, are at the first approach of the Sun suddenly dissolved, the waters quickly dried up, and the earth dressed in her holiday apparel: such a mature growth of fruits, such flourishing of herbs, such chirping of birds, as if here were a perpetual spring. The reason of which strange and sudden alteration is conceived to be the long lying of the snow on the face of the earth, keeping it from the rigour of the winter frosts: which being dissolved by the Sun in the beginning of the spring, doth so throughly drench and soak the ground (being of a light and sandy mould) and consequently make it the more penetrable by the beams of the Sun, shining hotly on it; that it forceth in a manner the Herbs and Plants to shoot forth in great plenty, and that too in a shorter time than can be imagined.  
The whole Country generally is very much overspread with Woods, parts of the great Hercynian Forest, heretofore overrunning all the North, and still more visible here then in other places: either by reason of the idleness of the people, naturally given to sloth and ease; or for that the Country is not populous enough to overcome them; or that there is already ground enough for tillage to supply their necessary uses. For here do grow the goodliest and tallest trees of the world, through which by reason of their thickness, the brightness of the Sunbeams can hardly pierce: affording shelter to great multitudes of Cattle, but of wild beasts especially, whose skins are better than their bodies; as Bears, Marterns, Zibellines, Wolves, black Foxes, whose skins are of very great estimation. Of the timber of these trees are squared all necessaries both for Forts and Houses; the Fortifications in this Country being made of huge Beams fastened together, (the chinks filled with earth) not easily shaken by battery, though much subject to fire. And out of them issueth an unspeakable quantity of Pitch and Rozin, which are hence distilled: besides an everlasting fountain of wax and honey; the Fees, without the Midwifrie of the Art of men, building their Hives or houses in the hollow trees. Concerning this there goeth a story (reported and believed for a certain truth) of a Countryman, who accidentally had slipped down into a great hollow tree, where he stood up to the breast in honey, continuing there two days without other sustenance: at the end whereof a Bear coming to partake of the booty, he laid hold of his legs and so terrified him with his cries, that he made him leap out with the man at his heels. The Country yieldeth also great store of Flax and Hemp, which is transported yearly into other Countries; and would make them very excellent cordage, if the people had any skill in manufactures or Mechanical Arts: and in some places rich pastures, and such store of Corn, that therewith they do furnish Lapland, and the North parts of Sweden. Fish they have also in good plenty, which they salt and dry, and either vent it to the Merchant, or lay it up in store for their Forts and Families. By which account it will appear that the principal commodities which they send abroad, are rich Furs, Flax, Hemp, Whale's grease, Honey, Wax, Pitch, Rozin, 〈◊〉, filberts, and the like: which either the Dutch and English buy of them at the Port of S. 〈◊〉, or the Armenians at Astrachan near the Caspian Sea: giving them in return, Cloth, Silks, Tapestry, and some other Merchandise, transported to the value of 500000 Rubbles yearly. Particularly of Wax 50000 poad (every poad containing 40 English pounds) of tallow 100000 poad, 100000 〈◊〉, 100 ships laden with Flax and Hemp; the rest of their Commodities proportionably in the 〈◊〉 of my Author: since whose time the trade hereof hath been much increased.  
This Country not improperly may be called (as by some it is) the Mother of Rivers. The chief of which are 1 the Don, called Tanais by the old Geographers, and by them thought to be the only boundary betwixt Europe and Asia; the Northern parts of this Country being then unknown. It disburtheneth itself into Falus Maeotis, and hath its fountain not out of the Riphean Mountains, as was thought of old, but out of a great Lake called Iwanowesero in the Forest of Okonitzkilies, or Jephapinolies, some 20 English miles from the City of Tulla, and having run a great way Eastward turneth back again, and then proceedeth Southwards towards the Maeotis, as was said before. 2 Borysthenes, now called Nieper, whose spring was unknown unto Herodotus, but now discovered to be near Dnieperk, a Village of Moscovie (specially so called) in the Forest of Wolkonskie. Whence passing South, and running by the Town of Smolensko, it receiveth many other Rivers, and amongst them that of Dosna, (by the ancient Writers called Hipani) notwithstanding whose muddy waters, it still retains its natural clearness, and so falls into the Euxine Sea. 3 Taruntus (so called by Ptolemie) or Duina the less (to difference it from Duina the greater) which rising not far from the head of Borysthenes, out of the Lake of Duina, and washing the walls of Riga the chief Town of Livonia, loseth itself in the Baltic Sea. 4 Dfina, or Dwine (commonly called Duina the greater) so called from the meeting of two rivers, the Juch and the Sachan (whereof more hereafter) of which that of the longest course, not known unto the ancients, hath its head in the Province of Permia, and its fall into the Frozen or Northern Ocean, at the Port of S. Nicholas. 5 Occa, or Ocyne, rising in the Territory of Misceneck, and making all the Country fruitful through which it passeth, emptieth itself into the Volga. 6 Volga, by Ptoloenie called Rha, by the Tartars, Edill; which riseth 25 Dutch miles from Moscow towards Lituania, and fetching a great compass in and out, after it hath swallowed up many lesser Rivers, dischargeth itself with 70 mouths into the Caspian Sea, now called Mer di Bachu: Here are besides these Rivers many notable Lakes, as those of Duina and Volga, out of which the said two Rivers issue; that called Ilmen, not far from Novogrod the Great, 80 Italian miles in compass; that of Ladoga 100 Dutch miles in length and 60 in breadth, in which are many pleasant Islands; and that called Bideloyesero (Lacus Albus in Latin) about 12 Germane miles long, and as many broad, into which 360 Rivers are said to discharge their streams; in the midst whereof is a very strong Castle, said to be impregnable: in which the Great Duke keeps the most part of his treasure, and into which he doth withdraw in the times of danger and sedition.  
As for the Mountains of this Country, here are the Montes Amadoci, Riphaei, and Hyperborei, so much talked of, and so little known among the Ancients. A continual and craggy chain of hills running cross Sarmatia Europaea? South and North, and thence Eastwards into Asiatica. Beginning not far from the fall of Borysthenes into the Euxine, they extend directly towards the North, and are there called Montes Amadoci. Afterwards bending for a long space towards the North-east, they are called Riphaei; and then passing on directly East, by reason of their Northernly situation, called Hyperborei. And though Sir Walter Raleigh say, I know not on what authority, that there are no Riphean Mountains in Rerum natura: yet Mercator placeth them in this tract, and telleth us that in regard of their being always covered with ice and snow, they are hardly passable, calling these and the said Hyperborei (in his Europa) by the name of Gingulum terrae, or the Girdle of the Earth, a great part whereof (though known in divers places by different names) they do seem to compass.  
It is divided for the better Government hereof into four parts (by them termed Chetfords) and those governed by four Lieutenants not resident upon their charges, but attending on the Emperor's person wheresoever he goeth, and there holding their Courts, but specially at Moscow, the prime seat of the Empire: where from their Vnder-Deputies they receive the complaints of their Provinces, and inform the Emperor's Counsel of the business, and from them again receive instructions for Reformation. But as to the chorography of it, it is divided into the Provinces of Moscovie specially so called, 2 Novogrod the Great, 3 Smolensko, 4 Mosaiskie, 5 Plescow, 6 Corelia, 7 Biarmia, 8 Petzora, 9 Condora, 10 Obdora, 11 Jugra, 12 Severia, 13 Permia, 14 Rhezan, 15 Wiathka, 16 Casan, 17 Astrachan, 18 Novogordia inferior, 19 the Mordwits, 20 Worotine, 21 Tuvir, 22 Wolodomir, 23 Dwina, and 24 the Russian Islands. Others of less note (of which there is no want) are reduced to these. In my Descriptions whereof I shall not be so exact and punctual as I have been hitherto: the Country not being much traveled by Strangers, nor any of the Natives suffered to go into foreign Nations, or permitted (out of jealousies of State) to hold discourse with the Ambassadors of neighbouring Princes, but only in the Emperor's hearing. By means whereof the chorography of this vast Empire is come but lamely to our hands, though the Power, Polity, and Revenues of it, being points discernible by the Ministers of other Princes, and by the course and conduct of their affairs, are as well known as those of less distance. Which said, we will first begin with Moscovie, the prevailing Province, that which gives name to this whole Empire; with reference to which the situation and position of the rest of the Provinces is set forth unto us in our Authors.  

1. MUSCOVIE. 
M●scovie.   
1 MUSCOVIE, specially so called, is seated in the very centre of this Estate, and so more fit to 〈◊〉 the affairs thereof: the largest Province of the whole, extending from East to West 600 Dutch or 2400 English miles: so populous with all, that besides 30000 Boiares, or Gentlemen bound to serve on Horseback at their own charges (like the Turks Timariot) the Great Duke is able to raise 70000 Foot (which is a great matter for a Country so little cultivated).  
The s●yle hereof is stiff and clammy, but might be made more profitable than it is, were it well manured; or ploughed and ordered as it is in all other Countries. For here, and in most parts else of this large Dominion, the people are accustomed to sow no more of their land then what they dig with the spade, or can break up with a stick very sharply pointed, whereof they carry great numbers into the field, that when one breaks they may use another.  
Chief places in this Province are 1 Moscow, the Imperial seat and the See of the Patriarch, so called of the River Moscow upon which it is situate. Exceedingly improved both in state and beauty, since the time that Daniel the fourth Lord of Moscovie, removed the seat Royal hither, from Valodomire, where before it was: insomuch that it was once grown to nine miles in compass; containing then 41500 families; but being fired by the Tartar, anno 1571. (at what time there were burnt 800000 persons) it is reduced to five miles only, the houses for the most part of wood and d●rt, the streets very miry; without either Ditch, Wall, or Rampart to defend it against an Enemy. In steed whereof there are two Castles, in the out parts of it, the one called Kitagorod, the other Bolsigerod, environed with the River M●●co, and another water called Neglinna, which here falls into it. It contains 16 Churches, most of them of the same materials as the houses are: and the Palace of the great. Duke situate in the midst hereof, (which for the greatness of it may be thought a little City) fortified with 17 Towns, 3 Bulwarks, and a continual Garrison (if the great Duke be there) of 25000 men ●or the guard of his person. 2 Sloboda, a Bishops See, North-east to Moscow, on the banks of one of the greatest Rivers which fall into the Volga. 3 Ruschow, the title of a Dukedom, fortified with a Castle of wood (of which stuff most of the fortresses of this country are made) situate 23 leagues from Moscow towards the west, on the banks of the Volga; which hath its fountain in the territory and precincts hereof. 4 Jackslave, on the Volga also, a town and Castle; distant about 46 Dutch miles from Moscow; formerly the Estate and patrimony of the second sons of the Great Duke, but united to the Royal Domain, by John Wasuiwick, and by him added also to the style Imperiall. It is also one of the Sees Episcopal. 5 Rustow, the See of one of the two Metropolitans situate in a fruitfullsoyl, well stored with fish, and yielding good plenty of salt. One of the ancientest Principalities of all this Empire, and held accustomably by the second son of the Great Duke, as a state distinct: but conquered by John Vasilwick, anno 1565. and added to the style and Patrimony of the Great Duke himself, the younger sons being from thence forth put off with pensions. 6 Vologda, a Bishops See, situate in a fenny and woody Country, very strong by nature, and beautified with one of the strongest Castles of all this Estate, where the Great Duke cloth sometimes lay a part of his treasure: that part especially which is raised of the English and Dutch Merchandise, which being landed at the Port of St. Nicolas, is first brought hither, where having paid a new toll or custom, it goeth on to Moscow. Betwixt this City and that of Yaroslave before mentioned, for the space of an hundred English miles, where stood in former times 50 goodly Villages, (some of them of a mile in length) the Country in a manner is left wholly desolate, and without Inhabitants; abandoned by the people by reason of the insupportable pressures which were laid upon them.   

2 SMOLENSKO. 3 MOSAISKI. 4 PLESCOW.  
The Dukedom of SMOLENSKO, is situate on the course of the River Nieper, or Borysthenes, full of many thick Forests, from whence they carry a great number of rich skins yearly. Places of most observation in it, are 1 Smolensko situate on the Nieper, a Bishops See, about 80 Polonian miles from Mo●co, begirt on every side with mountains and spacious Woods. A large town and of great esteem in these parts of the Empire; and giving name unto this Province; which heretofore was governed in a free condition under the patronage and protection of the Kings of Poland in the time of Alexander a late king thereof by Basilius the Great Duke conquered, and added unto this Estate. Taken by the ●olarders, in the year 1610. after a long siege of two years, with the slaughter of 200000 Muscovites, and the loss of many of the besiegers; but restored again to Michael Fedrovitius the Great Duke, on the making of the peace between them. 2 Biela, a principality of itself, having the honour of a Castle, and reckoned in the usual style of the Knez or Emperor.  
3 MOSAISKIS, hath in length 350 Italian miles, and as much in breadth so called from Mosaith●●, the chief town hereof, and a Bishops See, taken together with the territory or Province appertaining to it, from Alexander King of Poland, by John the Great Duke, father of Basilius before mentioned.  
4 P●●SCOW or PSKOW, contains in length 350 Italian miles, in breadth 230 or thereabouts, 〈…〉 from Plescow or Pskow, the chief City of it, and a Bishops See; great, powerful, and well walled about, 
Novogrod.  the only walled City of all this Empire. So large within the walls, that when it was besieged by Stephen king of POLAND, there were in it for defence thereof 70000 Foot, and 7000 Horse, besides the natural Inhabitants of it; which in all ordinary computation must be many more. It belonged formerly to the Poles, in right of the Dukedom of Lituania; taken from them by Basiaus the Great Duke of Muscovie, anno 1509; by whom and his successors used in the Royal style.   

5 NOVOGORD.  
5 NOVOGORD or NOVOGROD is one of the largest Provinces or Dukedoms in all Russia; bordering on Livonia, towards Sinus Finnicus, or the Gulf of Finland: a colder Country and less fruitful than that of Mascovie, because situate somewhat further North: the longest summer day in Moscow not being above 18 hours, whereas in Novogrod the chief City hereof, it is very near 20. By consequence the winter nights being of that length, must make the air exceeding cold, and the soil as comfortless. Here is in this Province the great lake Ilinen, spoken of before, 80 Italian miles in compass; as also that called Ladoga, before also mentioned.  
Towns of most estimation in it are 1 Novogred itself, the wealthiest and goodliest City of all the North, affirmed to be in greatness not inferior to Rome, called therefore Novogrod the great (to difference it from another of the same name near unto Valodomir:) an Archbishops See, and one of the four Mart-townes of the Haense-Merchants, resorted to from all parts for the trade of Muscovie, brought thither by land, and thence transported through the Baltic to most parts of Christendom. So confident in those times of their power and strength, that they used to say, that men could do nothing against God and them: but found the contrary when taken from the Crown of Poland by the Great Duke of Muscovie. The trade thereof since much decayed, by the finding out of the North-East passage to the Port of St. Nicolas, where the English and Dutch Merchants barter with the Muscovite. Yet still it keeps the reputation of the principal City, situate on the River Naf, which the Dutch call Nigh; the buildings for the most part of wood and clay: distant from Moscow 120 Dutch miles, and about 200 from the main body of the Baltic, betwixt which and this City lieth the whole Bay of Finland, the entrances whereof upon the Dwina, which leads toward Novogrod are fortified with the strong towns and Garrisons of Narve, and Rivallia, both in the hands of the king of Sweden, which is another great hindrance to the trade of this town. 2 Narve, on the North bank of Dwina, where it falls into the Bay of Finland, or Sinus Finnicus, in the Province or Territorie of Wichidaw, heretofore reckoned of as a part of Livonia, but being taken by Basilius the Great Duke, with the rest of this Country, and the town of Novogrod itself, anno 1477. it was impregnably fortified by the care of his son Vasaliwich, who for a reward unto the Architect being a Polonian, put out both his e●es, to disable him from building the like again. But having left all the natives in their own habitations, without abating either their strength or number, the Town and Castle not long after was betrayed to the king of Sweden, who still holds it. 3 Pozow or Pozovia, and 4 Volocoluc, two strong pieces, situate in the borders against the Polanders. 5 Vo●sco, besieged by Stephen king of Poland, with an Army of 100000 men, forced to retire without taking it, with the loss of many of his best Captains and common soldiers. It is distant from Novogrod 28 Dutch miles, the country about it called Volsk, where they say for certain that all cattle which are brought thither of what hair or colour soever they be, upon a little stay there become all white. The people of this tract have a language (or some Dialect rather) peculiar only to themselves. 6 Juvanogrod, a strong Castle not far from Vobsco, 40 miles from Novogrod; a frontier Castle against the Swedes garrisoned in Narve, to repulse whose inroads it was built.  
In this Country and not far from the Town of Novogrod, was fought that memorable battle betwixt the Sarmatians, and their Slaves. For when the Asiatic Scythians went to plant themselves in Media, and the parts adjoining; some of the Sarmatians, than Inhabitants of this tract, went along for company. Their long stay, caused their wives, despairing of their return, to comfort themselves with their slaves, both at bed and board, to whom they brought a lusty increase of youths: who being well grown, and hearing that the Sarmatians were upon their coming back, joined together against them: the slaves to retain that wealth and freedom which they were possessed of; the women for fear of the displeasure of their husbands, and the young men for defence of their Fathers and Mothers. With joint forces they go out to meet them, before their entry into the Country; neither are the Master's slow in their advance, hoping to take them unprovided. At Novogrod they have the first sight of each other. The Masters scorning to defile their swords on so ignoble an Enemy, assault them with whips, and by the terror thereof got a signal victory. In memory of which battle the people of that City have ever since stamped their money with the figure of an Horseman shaking a whip in his hands: And it is the custom over all Muscovie, that the maids in the time of wooing, send such a whip, curiously wrought by her own hands, to that Suitor whom she resolves on for her husband, in token of her future subjection to him. But of this more hereafter in another place.   

6 CORELIA. 
Corelia.  7 BIARMIA.  
6. Sixty Dutch miles from Novogrod lieth the Province called Corelia, extending Northwards as far as to a branch of the Frozen Sea, where the longest day is 20 hours and an half: the night's proportionable in the winter make it cold and barren. It bordereth on the East of Finland from which parted by a long and rough ridge of Mountains. By reason of which situation betwixt two great Princes, the people are enforced to pay tribute to both; though properly the subjects of the Great Duke of Moscovie. Chief towns whereof are Kexholm, or Hexolm, in the hands of the Swedes; and 2 Corelnberg, the chief town of the Province, belonging with the rest of the Country unto the Moscovite. By some this Province is made a part of the Eastern Lapland; but I think erroneously: the people having some good Towns; and savouring of some humanity, neither of which are known or heard of amongst the Laplanders. 3 Nordenberg on the mouth of a lake, which by the River called Warfuga, emptyeth itself into the Bay of S. Nicolas.  
On the North side of that branch or Arm of the Frozen Ocean, which bounds Corelia, lieth the Western part of Lapland, which by a proper name is called BIARMIA, the country of the Dikiloppi or wild Lappians, as the Moscovites call them, to whose Duke or Emperor they are subject. We had their Character before when we were in Swethland; nor shall we need to repeat it here: as barbarous and rude as the worst sort of those mentioned in Scricfinnia, and as idolatrous as they: but more (if more may be) inclined to lustfulness then the others. In the winter Solstice, when the Sun entereth into Capricorn, they have night for three whole months together: during which time lurking in their Caves, they have leisure to consult with the Prince of Darkness, being very great Sorcerers, able (as some affirm) to raise Winds, Clouds, Tempests, and do many strange things. Towns here are none. Some sheds and Cabins on the Sea costs; patched up by Sailors, for their reception and refreshment as they came on land, and named according to their fancies; but not here considerable.   

8 PETZORA. 9 JUGRIA. 10 OBDORA. 11 CONDORA.  
Opposite to Biarmia, or East-Lapland, on the other side of the Bay leading towards the Port of S. Nicolas, lieth a large Promontory or Headland stretching out far into the North, beyond the Arctic; comprehending in it four Provinces of the Russian Empire: that is to say, Petzora, Jugria, Obdora, and Condora; belonging formerly to the Tartars, but won from them of late years by the Russian Emperors, extending by that means their territories to the River Ob, but not a whit improving them in power or patrimony. Howsoever somewhat must be said of them, because parts of this great body which we are to dissect.  
1 PETZORA, so called from a River of that name, is fenced on every side by mountains and unpassable rocks; extending Northwards to the Sea, and crossed with a vast chain of hills, part of the Hyperborei spoken of before: so high, that a certain man having traveled in the ascent of them 17 days together, is said to have returned back again, despairing to attain the top of them, covered in the winter time with perpetual snows, in the summer with as scorching heats, by the continual lying of the Sun on all parts thereof. The people are of a plain and simple nature, and received the Russian faith and Empire at one time together, anno 1518. The chief town of it 1 Petzora, or Pechora, at the fall of that River into the Sea; a small town, but having three Churches in it: the people whereof though otherwise sufficiently simple, as before is said, do in the summer time catch Partridge, Ducks, Swans, Geese, and other fowl, which they salt and lay by till the winter, and then live upon them. So good a Tutor is the Belly, that the Poet did not unfitly give it the titles of Artis Magister, and Ingenit largitor venture; whereof this may serve for one example.  
7 CONDORA lieth on the North of Petzora, more near the Pole, by consequence a colder Country, and of worse condition, in one half of the Country being continual day, and the other half as long a night. The people universally Idolaters, worshipping some Images (or Idols) in the shape of a man, others in that of Bears, Wolves, etc. which they adorn with the richest furs they can get, and hide them in their Caves for fear of the Russes: who if they chance to light upon them, as they hunt those parts for Sables, Fexes, and Bevers, take away their furs, and bestow greater heat upon them in fires. The chief Town hereof is Pustozrea over against Nova Zemla, on or near the great lake called Ozera, whence it hath the name; situate in the 68 Degree of Northern Latitude, 50 minutes over.  
10 Obdora, so called from the River Ob, on both sides of whose banks it lieth, is the most North-Eastern Province of all these Dominions: won to the obedience of the Russes in the reign of Theoa●re the son of John Great Duke of Mo●covie. At what time the people had no Cities, lived in Hoards or C●●pantes, eat the Beasts they took, knew no corn nor bread. They were then very good Archers, sharpening their Arrows with fish Bones; 
Severia, etc.  with which bones and the sinews of the Beasts they sowed Furs together for their Clothing, which they wear inward in the winter, outward in the summer, covering their houses with Elke-skinnes. By this Theodore were some Castles built on the River's side, to which he sent condemned persons, and brought it into the form of a petit kingdom. But his son Boris built Tooma the chief Town hereof, with divers other Towns on both sides of the water, not worth naming here. But notwithstanding this subjection to the Moscovite they continue still in their Idolatry, worshipping an ancient Idol, in form of an old woman, holding in each Arm a Child, and a third at her feet, called by them Zlatu Babu, or the Golden old wife, to which they offer precious Furs, sacrifice Harts, and therewith do consult touching things to come. But some account this for a Fable, or a mere mistake.  
11 JUGRIA or JUHAR, lieth also on the Northern Seas, but more south then either of the other; betwixt Petzore or Pechora, and the Province of Dwina: the longest day in summer being not above 21 hours, or not fully that. The people for the most part Idolaters, and worship the same Images as do those of Obdora: affirmed by some to be the Progenitors of the present Hungarians, who coming out of this Country overran all Pannonia, and there fixed their dwellings. For proof of which it is affirmed that they speak the old Hungarian languages; not used but in this country, and the North parts of Hungary betwixt Danubius, and Tibiscus. Which more learned men affirm to be the jazygian, the language of the jazyges who anciently possessed that country in the times of the Romans. But leaving this dispute to another place, certain it is that they are subject to the Moscovite, but so poor and miserable a people, that they have few towns and not many houses; and so bare of money, that in stead thereof they pay Furs for tribute to their Emperor.   

12 SEVERIA. 13 PERMIA. 14 RHEZAN.  
12 SEVERIA, or SIBIOR as the Moscovites called it, lieth in a long tract on the banks of the River Ob or Oby, south of Obdoza, and the rest of the four last Provinces. The Country very fruitful, and abounding with all things necessary, notwithstanding that there be great Deserts, and some Forests also; but those Forests well stored with black Foxes, Ermines, Sables, and the like wild beasts, which yield more profit by their rich Furs, than any more fertile Country doth by its Corn and fruits. In somuch that in the year 1589. there were collected out of this Province only in the way of tribute for the Emperor, 466 timber of Sables, (every Timber containing 40 skins) five Timber of Martrons, 180 Cases of Black Foxes, (every Case containing 40 skins) besides other commodities. The woods also do afford good plenty of Honey, and the plains of Herbage; well watered with the River Sem, which falleth into the Desna, and both together into that of the Nieper or Borysthenes. There are in it many Towns and Castles, the principal whereof are 1 Sibier, on the West side of the River Ob, which gives name to the Province; 2 Branki; not far from the great Forest from hence named. 3 Starodus, 4 Potuvolo, and 5 Czeznigo.  
The people hereof by reason of their continual skirmishes with the neighbouring Tartars, are the most warlike Nation of all the Russes: heretofore governed by a Duke or Prince of their own, who at the first acknowledged no Superior; but afterwards was severally and successively Tributary to the Lituanians, the Polanders, and the Moscovite, and finally the last Duke being falsely accused of treason, was outed of his estate by Basilius the Great Duke, who added it to the rest of his Dominions, as it hath continued ever since.  
13 PERMIA is situate on the South-west of Sibior or Severia, a large Province, distant 250 ●utch miles from Moscow, so called from Perm, or Permia, the chief town hereof, situate on the River Vi●chore or Vistorna: the second Town of note is called Sicwiarskey. The people (as also those of Si●ior) are of the Moscovite Religion, and live most by hunting wild beasts, whose flesh they eat, and make good merchandise of their skins, many of which they pay yearly to the great Duke in way of tribute, who makes a good commodity of them, selling them to the Merchant at excessive rates. They have no corn of their own growth, nor will they buy any elsewhere; but in stead of bread eat the flesh of Stags dried and prepared in the Sun: speaking a language of their own, different from the rest of the Russes; and in stead of Horses and Oxen make use of great dogs and stags, whom they train up to draw their sleds from one place to another. There is good store of woods amongst them; but they want Cedar's; and they have paid dearly for that want. For John Vasiliwich meaning to pick a quarrel with them, sent to them for certain loads of Cedar wood, whereof he knew there grew none in their Country; and upon word returned that they had no such wood, he fined them at 12060 Rubbles.  
14 RHEZAN, a great and goodly Province, is situate betwixt the River Tanais, and that of 〈◊〉: the most fruitful Country of all Russia, and (if report be true) of the whole world also: it being credibly affirmed that one grain of corn doth bring forth six ears; the stalks hereof growing so thick, that an horse can hardly pass through them, or a Quail fly out of them, but with very much difficulty. Here is also great plenty of fruits, better than are to be found elsewhere in Russia, together with good store of Honey, fish, fowl, and other commodities; besides Ermines, Bevers and the like, 
Wiathka, etc.  common in these Countries. Chief Towns hereof are 1 Tulla, famous for the fountain or spring head of the River Tanais, which ariseth near it. 2 Colluga, well garrisoned for fear of the Crim ●a●ar 3 Corsna, a Bishops See, as is also 4 Rhezan, the principal of the Province which it giveth name to, seated upon the banks of the River O●que. A Country populous and well-planted, affording to the Great Duke 15000 Boyares, or Gentlemen which serve on horseback, and betwixt 30 and 40000 foot.   

15 WIATHKA, 16 CASAN, 17 ASTRACHAN.  
15 Southeast of Rhezan beyond the banks of the River Kamme, and about 150 Dutch miles from Moscow, lieth the Province called WIATHKA, fennie and barren, but well stored with fish and honey, and wild beasts good plenty. Heretofore subject to the Tartars, and then the receptacle or retreat of all fugitive servants, here very gladly entertained: but the Tartarians being expulsed, it was made subject by Basilius to the Dukes of Moscovie I do not read of any Towns which should be here, which makes me think that they do still retain so much of the Tartar with them, as to live in Hoards and Companies without any fixed dwellings: or at the best, in scattered houses, not hitherto united into Towns and Villages: except it be the Town of Wiathka itself, built since the subjection of it to the Moscovite, and made a Garrison to defend these outparts of this Empire against the incursions of the Tartars.  
16 CASAN, a kingdom formerly of Tartary Deserta, lieth on the Southeast of Wiathka; the most Civil people of the Tartars, but owing much of that civility to their conversation with the Moscovites, (though none of the civilest themselves) tilling their lands and building houses where they may with safety. For although the soil hereof be tolerably fruitful, and fit for habitation, yet the Country for the most part is desolate and ill inhabited, partly by reason of some vast deserts lying betwixt the Cities of Casan and Astrachan; but principally in regard of the Crim Tartar, who will not suffer the Moscovite to plant it with Colonies of his own people, nor the Natives to live there in quiet, except only in the Western parts, where protected by Garrisons. Chief Towns hereof are 1 Casan upon the River Volga, which gives name to the Kingdom; since the subjection of this people to the great Duke, and their conversion to the faith, made a Bishops See. 2 Surick upon the River Sure, in the middle of the vast deserts betwixt Casan and Astrachan; built by Basilius the Great Duke for a stage or resting place for Merchants and Travellers, that there they might repose themselves without fear of the Tartars. The people hereof had once a King of their own, as before was said, the last of which named Chelealcesk, submitted himself unto Basilius the Great Duke and became tributary: but afterwards revolting, he was vanquished by John Vasiliwich, anno 1553. and this kingdom thereupon united to the Empire of Russia; the Emperors since that time writing themselves Czar Kasanski, or King of Casan: And possible enough it is that Basilius who first made it tributary, might from hence take the name of Basilius Casan, according to the custom of the ancient Romans.  
Under the Government hereof are the Czeremissi, a people that live in great Forests without any houses, living for the most part of honey and the flesh of wild beasts, with the skins of which they are apparelled. Their language different from the rest, swift of foot, and very good Archers, carrying their Bows in their hands continually, and practising their children so timely in it, that they give them nothing to eat (after such an age) until they can hit a white which is set before them.  
17 ASTRACHAN lieth also Southeast of Casan, more near unto the Caspian Seas; parted from Casan by those deserts spoken of before, but situate on the same branch of the River Volga: which having run a course of 2000 Italian miles, dischargeth itself into this Sea with no less than 70 mouths or channels. It took this name from Astrachan the chief town hereof, situate about 20 Italian miles from the fall of one of those 70 mouths or channels into the Caspian: by the commodiousness whereof it is one of the best towns of trade in all these dominions, the Armenian Merchants coming hither, and bartering their silks and manufactures for the furs and other natural commodities of the Russes or Moscovites. A Kingdom formerly, but a kingdom of less esteem than that of Casan; conquered (together with it) by Basilius the Great Duke, anno 1494, and by him made Christian. But afterwards revolting they were more absolutely subdued by John Vasiliwich, who brought into the field against them no sewer than 120000 horse, and 20000 foot, (enough to overrun a far greater Country) and yet had hardly got the better but for the terror of his great Ordnance, which the others wanted. Upon that victory it was made a Member of the Empire of Russia; the Emperor whereof hath since flyled himself the King of Astrachan.   

18 NOVOGORDIA INFERIOR, 
Novogrod Inferior.  19 The MORDWITS.  
But it is now time we return towards Europe, out of which we have wandered up and down in the skirts of Asia, in tracing out the several Provinces of this Empire, since our first crossing over the Bay of Grandvie, or Saint Nicolas, into the Country of Petzora. But in our way we must first take a view of the Dukedom of Novogrod the Lower, so called to difference it from Novogrod (surnamed the Great) spoken of before: situate almost in the midst betwixt Casan and Moscow, distant from the last 100 Polonian miles, and 60 miles from the borders of the other; every Polonian mile being reckoned at four Italian. The Country generally very rich both for tillage and pasturage; inferior unto none in all this estate but Rhezan and Wolodomir only. So called from Novogrod the chief town, situate at the confluence of the Ock and Volga; besides which it hath the neighbourhood of a very great Lake, which storeth it plentifully with fish. A City of great esteem in all this Empire, partly for the great number of houses in which not easily equalled by any other, partly for an impregnable Castle, cut out of the main Rock with incredible charges in the time of Basilius the Great Duke; but principally for a stately and magnificent Temple, built above 1600 years ago, in imitation (or emulation, as some say) of the famous Church of S. Sophia in Constantinople. To this Town the story of the Scythian or Sarmatian slaves ought in my mind● to be ascribed, though commonly reported of the other Novogrod in the West parts of this Empire. My reason is, because it is not likely that the Sarmatians dwelling on the borders of the Baltic Sea, should cross all this Country to join with the Asiatic Scythians so remote from them in a needless war: which those of this tract might well do, as near neighbours to them, if not of the same Nation or extraction with them.  
Subject to the Estate hereof are the Mordwit Tartars, lying on the South, betwixt the Volga and the Don or Tanais where it beginneth to return Westwards towards the Euxine. A people much of the same nature with the Czeremissois, but that they have some Villages, & scattered houses, which the others either want or else care not for. Idolaters for the most part (and the rest Mahometans) carrying their Idols in their Carts wheresoever they go: worshipping that beast all day, which they first see in the morning, and swearing by it for that day, as their chiefest deity.   

20 WOROTINE, 21 TUVER, 22 WOLODOMIR.  
And now again we are in Europe, where the Great Duke hath almost as many Titles as Towns with Territorie: four of them (besides some before) either situate in the Province of Moscovie, or else so intermingled with the Towns thereof, that they may easily be taken (or mistaken) for members of it. The principal are,  
20 WOROTIN, seated on the West side of the River Ocque, a distinct Dukedom of itself, so called from Worotin the chief City of it, built upon that River, about 3 Dutch miles from Colluga in the Province of Rhezan, lying on the further bank thereof; beautified with a strong Castle, and a pleasant soil. The 2 Misceneck, the next Town of note, remarkable for the head of the River Ocque, which ariseth in the fields thereof.  
21 'TWERE or OTWER, as some call it, is a large and goodly Country lying along the banks of the River Volga: so populous that it is said to contain 40000 Boidres, or Gentlemen sit to serve on horseback, and double that number of the common or inferior sort. It gives the title of a Duke to the Russian Emperor, and is so called from Twerde the chief Town thereof, and a Bishops See; affirmed to be a fairer and more stately City than Moscow itself, from which distant 36 Dutch miles.  
22 WOLODOMIR is one of the most fruitful Countries in all Russia, not paralleled by many Countries in the world; the soil here (if all be true, which is said of it) yielding such an increase that many times the husbandman hath twenty and sometimes twenty five for one. It gives the title of a Duke to the Russian Emperor, and hath precedency before Moscovie in the style Imperiall. So called from Wolodomir the chief City of it, and a Bishops See, and that so named from the Founder, who probably was the same Valadomir (one of the first Kings of the Russes) who married Helena the daughter of Nicephorus Phocas, Emperor of Constantinople. The City situate 36 Polonian miles on the East of Moscow, anciently the chief seat and residence of the Oreat Duke; and so continued till the time of John the son of Daniel, who first translated it to Moscow, that from thence he might more easily confront and oppose the Tartars, with whose eruptions and invasions both he and his predecessors had long been troubled. Under the government hereof is the City of Susdali, of great esteem and very well peopled as long as the Royal seat remained at Wolodomir, betwixt which and Rostow it is seated. After it tell into decay, and being once destroyed by the Tartars, could never since recover 〈…〉 lustre; having now little to uphold its reputation, but a Bishops See.   

23 DWINA.  
2● DWINA, so called from the chief Town, situate on the confluence of two Rivers Juch, and 〈◊〉, whence it hath the name: Dwine in the language of that Country signifying two, (as twan doth with us amongst Countrie-people.) A Country of a great extent, but exceeding barren, which ●akes the Village● hereof to stand very thin; the Towns (considering the great compass of it) to be very ●ew; and the Inhabitants for the most part to live upon dried fish and the flesh of wild beast's; which they have no want of. The chief commodity is in salt, with which they use to furnish the neighbouring Provinces, and provide such necessaries for themselves as they stand in need of. Chief Towns hereof are 1 Dwine, spoken of before, situate in the midst of the Province, on the meeting of the said two Rivers, which here united into one stream, take the name of Dwine, or Duina the greater, known by that name until its fall into the Northern Ocean, in the Bay of Grandeur. 2 Sagan, so called of the River (one of the two which makes the Dwine) upon which it is seated. 3 Colnagro, 4 Pinnegue, two strong Castles.  
Unto this Province (because I know not else how to dispose of them) I must reduce these four Towns following; that is to say, 1 Vstiug, a Bishops See, situate on the western side of the River, over against the Town of Dwine, and in a Country so ill furnished with necessaries, that the people eat dried fish in stead of bread; but have salt enough to season it from those of Dwine. 2 Gargapoll, a Bishops See also, on the same side of the River that Dwina is of. 3 S. Nicolas, a well known Port, and a Bishops See; situate at the influexe of Duina, into the Gulf of Granvicus, or the Bay of S. Nicolas, from hence denominated. A Town much traded since the discovery of the North-east passage by the English, and the removal of theirs and the Dutch traffic from Novogrod hither; from hence dispersed with more case and speed into all the parts of this vast Empire. 4 S. Michael, on the Sea side, commonly called Archangel, a Town of great trade, by the English specially, who have of late here fixed their Staple, to the great enriching of the Place: by reason whereof the English Merchants have not only great privileges and immunities (as the Authors of so great a benefit unto this Estate) not granted to others: but the whole Nation have found better and more noble entertainment from them then any others have received. The cause of which was primarily the great opinion which their Emperors had of Queen Elizabeth, who held very good correspondence with them; continued ever since by mutual Ambassies on both sides; and secondly the conformable behaviour of the English themselves, so acceptable to those Barbarians (both Prince and People) that when John Vas●li●ich nailed the hat of another foreign Ambassador to his head for his too much perverseness, he used our Sir Thomas Smith with all kindness imaginable. Another time when the Jesuit Possevine began to persuade with him to approve of the Religion of the Church of Rome: upon the information of the English Ambassador that the Pope was a proud Prelate, and would make Princes kiss his feet; he grew into such a rage that the Jesuit was afraid he would have beat out his brains. But to return again to the Port of S. Nicolas, it is so called from an Abbey there built unto that Saint, the tutelary Saint and local Patron of the Nation. Which said, I will set sail from this Port to the Russian Islands; and see what may be said of them to our present purpose.   

24 The RUSSIAN Islands.  
The RUSSIAN ISLANDS are but two; both of them in the Northern or Frozen Ocean, on the Coasts of this Country; that is to say, 1 Sir Hugh Willoughbies' Island, and Nova Zemla; both subject (if to any) to the Knez or great Duke of Moscovie.  
1 WILLOUGHBIES' ISLAND was so called from Sir Hugh Willoughby, because he first discovered it, anno 1553 and was hereabouts found frozen to death the next year following. For being employed by the Merchants of London in the time of King Edward the 6. to find out a new way to Moscovie, Cathaie, and China; he proceeded so far as to this Island (situate almost opposite to the Bay of S. Nicolas:) where the weather proved so extreme, and the Frosts so vehement; that his ship was set last in the ice, and all his people, with himself, frozen to death; in which condition they were found the next year after, with an exact description of their voyage and fortunes. Notwithstanding which disastrous beginning, the enterprise was pursued by some noble Adventurers, as Jenkinson, Burroughs, Pet. Jackman, and others of the English Nation: who opened the way as far as to the River Ob, (the East boundar of Russia) but by reason of the length of the way, the vast floating Islands of Ice, and perpetual nights, for many months together in winter, could advance no further.  
2 NOVA ZEMLA, situate on the East of Willoughbies' Island opposite to Pustozera in Condora beformentioned, was first discovered by such Adventurers as followed Willoughbies' design. Famous for nothing but a race of short-statured men, not above four foot high, a degree above the height of Pigmies: not yet so far discovered as to know any thing thereof, but by the relation of the Russes, who affirm the Inhabitants to have neither Religion nor Civility, nor the prescripts of any Law; but that they worshipped the Sun, Moon, and Northern Star, to which they offer an yearly Sacrifice of their Deer: that the Island is woody, desert, and not easy for travel, having in it neither green bough nor grass; yet harbouring great store of Bears and such ravenous and dangerous beasts. Found experimentally true by William Barrentson and his Associates, employed by the Hollanders for this discovery, anno 1594. and 1596. in which last year, after many dreadful combats with huge flakes of ice, they were forced to winter in this Island, where they built an house as well to preserve themselves from being buried in snow, as from being devoured by the Bears (some of them 13 foot in length:) which with the loss of two of their company devoured by those Savage creatures, they at last effected; some of them coming home in safety the October following. And though they seemed to give some hope that a way might be found unto cathay on the North of this Island, (themselves having gone as far North as the 81 degree of Latitude, within 9 of the Pole:) yet it is generally conceived that the undertaking is unprofitable, the success impossible.  
And so I leave it to return to the story of Russia, called anciently by the name of Sarmatia Europaea, but known no further Northwards than the head of Tanais. And for Sarmatia Europaea, it was bounded in the time of Ptolemie, by the Baltic Sea, and some Terra Incognita, on the North; the Jazyges Metanastae (now Transilvania and the Upper Hungary) upon the South: the River Vistula or Wexel (which divided it from Germany) upon the West; and the Tanais upon the East. Beyond that all along the banks of the Euxine Sea, to the Mare Caspium, and as far North as any Conqueror had gone; it was called Sarmatia Asiatica: the Countries further Eastward being then called Scythia. By which account as Russia containeth not all Sarmatia Europaea, of which Prussia, and the rest of the incorporate Provinces of Poland, passeth for a part; so neither is it totally comprehended in it, extending beyond Tanais into Asiatica. The ancient Inhabitants called by a general name Sarmatae, by the Greeks, Saur●matae; were subdivided (for so much of this part of it as was then made known) into the Agathyrsi, Butheni, Pagiritae, dwelling in the North; the Osdi, Alauni, Roxolani, etc. dwelling in the South. Amongst many other barbarous Nations, these were some of the principal. And from these Roxolani, as the principal of all the rest, Mathias a Michou, a learned Polander, doth derive the original of the Rosses (which we now call Russians:) seconded herein by the more learned Bochartus, who proveth out of ancient Authors that the Inhabitants of Taurica Chersonesus, (from which the passage into this Country is both short and easy) have been formerly called Rhos. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Tauros vocari gentes Rhos, as he saith from Tsetzes. Which Rhos, or Rhossi first mingling with the Alani, a Sarmatian people, might get the name of Roxolani; and afterwards possessing the more Northern Countries, or mingling with the Rossi of Mount Taurus (from whom those of Taurica descended) in their enterprises on Constantinople and the parts adjoining; return to their old name of Rossi. The Rhossi, or Russians, were then the first Lords of this Country generally; the Moscovites possessors of a Province only: so called from the Moschi spoken of by Lucan in his Pharsalia; and placed by Pliny near the head of the River Phasis, which rising from the Armenian Mountains, falls into the Euxine. Derived no doubt from Mesech (or Mosoch as the Ancients called him) the son of Japhet planted originally in the North and North-east of Syria, on the Confines of Cholcis and Armenia, where Pliny as before is said, hath fixed the Moschi, and where there is a long chain of hills, which most of the old Writers call Montes Moschici. But to return unto the Rossi, we hear not of them by this name till the time of Michael the third Emperor of Constantinople, in whose reign they infested the Euxine Sea, and had the boldness to attempt the Imperial City, anno 864. said by Cedrenus and some others of the Eastern Writers to be a people of Mount Taurus, (next neighbours to Mesoch or the Moschi.) Failing in their attempt upon Constantinople, and not willing to go home again, they spread themselves with their confederates and associates in this expedition, upon the Northwest banks of the Euxine Seas, enlarging their bounds Northwards with less opposition, than they were likely to have done on the Southern parts: Constantinople being once again in vain attempted in the reigns of Constantine the 7. and Henricus Auceps. Converted to the Christian Faith, or growing into better terms with the Eastern Emperors, Helena daughter of Nicephorus Phoeas, is married to Valadomirus one of their Kings; from that time forwards turning their forces on the Polanders and their weak neighbours; save that, provoked by the death of one of their Country, slain accidently at Constantinople in a private quarrel, they made another fruitless journey against that City, in the time of Michael Calaphates. Enlarging their estate to the West and South, they became masters of a great part of Sarmatia Europaea, Lituania, Podolia, Nigra Russia, and other Provinces now subject to the Crown of Poland; being then parts of their Estate. Anno 1240. the Tartars, under the conduct of Bathu, or Baydo, son of Occata Chan, broke in upon them and subdued them: the Country before this entire, under one sole King, being broken afterwards into divers per it and inferior Governments, according to the will and pleasure of the insolent Victors. The principal of these (descended from the former Kings) were Lords of Volodomir, Moscow, and some other Cities; held by them with no other Title than Lords of Moscovie; and for that Tributary to the Tartars, as were all the rest. Under this thraldom they long groaned, till the Tartarian● being divided amongst themselves, and grown less terrible to their neighbours, were outed of their power and command here, by the valour of John, son of Basilius the 2. who thereupon changed the Title of Lord into that of Duke, and after into that of Great Duke, as his fortunes thrived. Yet not so great, but that he was contented to be an Homager of the Tartars: it being finally agreed on at the end of their wars, that the Tartars should relinquish all their Holds in the Country; and on the other side, that once every year within the Castle of Moscow, the Great Duke standing on foot should feed the horse of the Crim Tartar with oats out of his own cap. This Homage was by Basilius changed to a Tribute of Furs, which being also denied by his Successors (as they grew in power) occasioned the long wars betwixt the Nations: the Tartars always pressing on them by sudden inroads, sometimes by Armies of no less than 200000 fight men. But notwithstanding all their power, and the friendship of the Turk to boot, the Moscovite is not only able to assert his Sovereignty, but hath also wrested from them many goodly Provinces.  
As for the Princes of this Country I shall not trouble myself (as I see some do) in tracing a Succession of them as far as from the times of Augustus Caesar: when neither the Rossi, nor the Moschi had here any footing. We will therefore go no higher than the time of George, whose daughter Anne I find to have been married to Henry the first of France. From whom in a direct line descended another George, with whom we do intend to begin our Catalogue, as being the last King of the Russes before the coming of the Tartars: Who wisely yielding to the storm, waved the title of King, contented only with the title of Lord of Mascovie, the first seat of that power and Sovereignty, which he transmitted afterwards to his posterity: affecting for that cause the title of Dukes of Moscovie, (though all the conquered Towns and Territories have their place also in his style) as much as that of Emperor of Russia. Which some of them have assumed also, since the time of Basilius, who styled himself Basilius by the Grace of God Emperor and Lord of Russia, Great Duke of Volodomir, Moscovie, Novogrod the great, Plescow, Smolensko, Tuver, Jugar, Wiathka, Bulgar, etc. Lord and great Prince of the Lower Novogrod, Czernigow, Rhezan, Wologda, Rsow, Biele, Rostow, Yarossane, Poloskie, Bielloziere, Vdore, Obdora, Condora, etc. King of Casan and Astrachan. But leaving them unto their swelling and Voluminous title, (little inferior unto that of the Kings of Spain) let us next look on the succession from the time aforesaid, of 

The LORDS of MOSCOVIE.  
A. Ch.  
1 George, the last King of the Russes and first Lord of Moscow.  
2 jaceslaus.  
3 Alexander.  
4 Daniel.  
5 John  
6 John II.  
7 Basilius.  
8 Demetrius.  
9 Georgius II.  
10 Basilius II.    

The Great DUKES.  
1 John the first Great Duke, who struck off the Tartarian bondage.  
2 Basilius Gasan won the Provinces of Severia, Roseovia, and Smolensko.  
3 John Basilius conquered Livonia, and Lituania; both which his successor  
1548 4 Johannes Basiliades, or Wasiliwich, lost in his age: though in his youth he had subdued the Noyhacensian Tartars to his Empire; and vanquished Selim, Emperor of the Turks, anno 1569. With this King the English first began to confederate.  
583 5 Theodorus Johannides, the last of the old Royal line of Moscovie.  
598 6 Boris Theodorus, brother to the wife of the last Great Duke, partly by the last will of his Predecessor, partly by practising with the people, obtained the Empire; but being an unmerciful Tyrant was dispossessed by the Polanders, coming in favour of one  
1605 7 Demetrius pretending himself to be the son of John Vasiliwich, (and generally believed to be so) preserved in a Monastery from the tyranny of Boris, in hatred of whom he was brought in by the Polander, by whose aid he overcame the Tyrant, and rooted out his Family, and was with great joy crowned Emperor in the City of Moscow. But the Russian Lords disdaining to have a Prince imposed on them from Poland, rose in arms against him, and at last vanquished and slew him in the open field, his wife a noble Polonian Lady, sent poorly home, and the Polanders beaten out of the Country.  
1606 8 Basil Juanniwich, surnamed Sniskius, the chief of the Conspirators, was by the rest of his faction chosen Cnez, or Emperor; and held the State with great trouble, till the year 1610. when  
1610 9 Demetrius II. another pretender to the State, as the son of John Vasiliwich also, in opposition unto Sniskius set up by a stronger faction, gave occasion to the Polander to work upon this distemper; by whom Sniskius was taken prisoner, Demetrius slain, Smolensko and other great Towns subdued; and Vladislaus Prince of Poland recommended to the Russians to be chosen Emperor. But the Russes loath to fall under the power of the Polander, and weary of their own Confusions, made choice at last, of  
1615 10 Michael Fedrovitz, son of Theodore the Patriarch of Moscow, who at last settled this vast Empire, and managed it in a more constant way of peace with the Turk, Tartar, Polonian, and Swethlander, than any of his Predecessors had done before him.  
1646 11 Alexius Michoilywitz (or the son of Michael) succeeded his Father in the Empire, troubled at first with some distempers in the State (as in all other Countries about that time) but now quietly settled, anno 1648.   
The Formalities with which these great Emperors are invested or settled in the Throne, are not many nor stately: such as they be, There afford you out of the history of the life of Johannes Basiliades, written in Latin by Paulus Oderbornius. On the 2. of June, anno 1583. Theodorus Johannides went towards the Temple of S. Michael, being the principal Church in all Moscow: the streets all covered with flowers, the doors of the Citizens crowned with Garlands; the air echroing with the noise of Flutes and Trumpets, and the people so crowding to behold their Prince, that had not the Guard with naked swords forced a passage through them, it had been impossible for him to have gone on. Being now come to the Church door, the Lords of the Country (Cneses they there call them) went out to meet him: and the Archbishop of Moscow clad in his pontificalibus, when he was come into the Church, embraced him. The pavement of the Church was hidden with Tapestry, and the stalls adorned with costly hangings. The Great Duke sat down in his Throne, being attired in a garment of silk, buttoned down with golden buttons: on his head he wore a purple cap, spangled with rich jewels, and on his finger's abundance of rings. Being thus seated, the Patriarch made a prayer to God, to bless him, his people and his government; which was seconded by the joyful shouts and acclamations of his Subjects: amongst whom no small store of silver money was ●lung by the Treasurer, and so they returned to the Palace.  
The Government of this Country is merely Tyrannical, the Emperor being absolute Lord of the lives, lands and goods of all his Subjects: all of them, the noble as well as the base, subscribing themselves in their Petitions to him, by the name of Keloptery, that is, Slaves. Whereupon Mahomet a Turkish Bashaw was used to say, that his Master and the Moscovite were the two most absolute Princes in all the world. First, for their goods, when any Ambassador returns home, the Great Duke takes from him all the presents which he hath received, giving him perhaps some small reward, perhaps none at all: and as for lands they pass not from father to son but as l●e confirms it. But more particularly (besides the case of Permia spoken of before) John Vasiliwich sent a command to Moscow to provide a Coal-pack of live Fleas for a medicine; and when the Citizens returned answer that it was impossible, he fined them at 700 Rubbles for their disobedience. Another time he laid a mulct of 300000 Rubbles upon his Nobility, because he had no good sport in his hunting; which they again extorted from the common people: and under colour of want, commanded from some Bishops and Monasteries the sum of 100000 Rubbles, from some 50000, more or less from others, according unto their rerenues. And it is usual with the best of them to cause the Boiares (or Gentlemen which serve on horseback) to pretend themselves robbed, that he may send unto the City to find out the Felon; and on a non est inventus, fine them at discretion, sometimes 8000, sometimes 10000, and sometimes 20000 Rubbles. Then for their lives, there is a story, that Vasiliwich having found that one of his Secretaries had received a Goose stuffed full of silver for a Bribe, caused him to be brought into the Marketplace of Moscow: where without any legal trial he commanded the Executioner first to cut off his legs about the shins, and then his arms about the elbows (still ask the miserable man how he liked Goose-flesh) and in the end to cut off his head in similitude of a Goose ready for the spit. And that they may the better preserve this power, the Great Dukes seldom show themselves unto the people, but in apparel of inestimable value, joining the ornaments of a Bishop unto the majesty of a King, by wearing a Mitre on their heads shining with Diamonds and rich stones: and when they wear it not on their heads, they place it before the chair of state, (over which are the images of Christ and the blessed Virgin) holding in his hands a most rich Crozier staff, and all their fingers full of rings. And upon solemn festivals and entertainments, the Great Chamber is beset with Cubboards of plate of infinite value, filled with men clothed with cloth of gold to the very foot; all of them seeming to be men of the chief Nobility, but many times being no other than the gravest and portliest Citizens of Moscow richly apparelled for the time out of the Emperor's Wardrobe; which to such as do not understand the fraud, look like so many Princes, and causeth no small wonder at his magnificence. So that the people seeing him in such royal state, and knowing no more than what they are taught at home, reverence him as slaves, not subjects, and look upon him rather as a God than a King.  
Having so absolute a command on their lives and goods, it will be easily supposed that he may raise what forces, and amass what treasures he hath a mind to. First, for his Forces, it is said that he is able to raise 300000 Horse, if occasion be: and that he may come near that number it is more than probable, in that John Vasiliwich in his war against those of Astrachan, had actually 120000 Horse; and that a great part of the Country is in the hands of the Boiares, bound by their Tenure to serve with horse whensoever he pleaseth. And that there are 110 men chosen by the Emperor, and by him enfeoffed with lands (during pleasure only,) which for these lands they are to find 65000 horse with all things necessary for the wars; and those in a continual readiness, fit for present action. Then for such horse as he himself doth keep in continual pay, there is not fewer than 25000 which attend him as a Guard to his person; all of them well experienced men, and fit for service: which added to the 65000 spoken of before, makes up a standing body of 90000. Had he foot answerable unto this proportion of horse, there were no dealing with him; but therein his Militia is defective: Vasiliwich to his great Army of 120000 horse having but 20000 foot; the footmen which he hath in continual pay, amounting to 12000 only, far short of such a standing body of horse, as before we spoke of. And this defect hath been the reason why the Polanders with far less armies have prevailed against them: the Great Duke not being able with all his power to hinder King Stephen of Poland from taking Villocolne or besieging Plescow (though his Army was not above 60000 both in horse and foot) for want of standing bonds of foot to make good his ground. Generally both horse and foot are very obedient to their Captains and superior Officers, patiently enduring all discommodities of cold, rain, and hunger; (in that regard fitter to keep a Fortress then serve in field;) and so regardless of their lives in the day of battle, that they will rather lose them then either yield themselves Prisoners, or demand Quarter.  
For his revenues, they may be what he will himself, considering (besides his extraordinary power of oppressing his subjects before mentioned) the many ordinary ways he hath of amassing treasure, as viz. the forestall of homebred commodities, and engrossing the foreign; selling them at what price he li●t, and hindering all men else from trade, till his own be sold; provision of rent-corn, and victual, raised in some years to 200000 Rubbles, rent-wood, and Hay to 30000; pol-money to 400000, customs on Merchandise to 800000. By which and other means of collecting moneys, and the Domain of his Crown, though he raise vast sums; yet it is thought, that his household charges being deducted, there remaineth not towards all other expenses, three millions of Rubbles, every Rubble being as much as an English Mark.  
The Arms are Sable, a Portall open of two leaves and as many Degrees, Or.  
There are in RUSSIA 

Patriarch 1.  
Archbishops 2.  
Bishops 18.     
And so much for RUSSIA.   

OF POLAND.  
POLAND is bounded on the East with Russia, and the Crim Tartar, from whom parted by the River Borysthenes; on the West with Germany; on the North with the Baltic Sea, and some part of Russia; on the South with the Carpathian Mountains, which divide it from Hungary and Walachia.  
It is an Aggregate body, consisting of many distinct Provinces united into one Estate; of which Poland being the predominant hath given name to the rest called all together the Realm of POLAND: and that so named from Pole, which in the Sclavonian language (the common language of the Country) signifieth plain, because but little swelled with hills. Of figure round, in compass 2600 miles; situate under the eight and twelfth Climates; so that the longest day in the southern parts is but 16 hours, and about 18 hours in the parts most North.  
The Country plain, but full of woods, which serve to rectify the Air, being naturally so cold that they have neither Wine nor Grapes: in stead whereof they use that kind of drink called Ale; in former times the usual Beverage of England, and this Country only. Barley they have, and Pulse in such abundant measure, that no small quantities of each are transported yearly: nor yield they any thing at all to Denmark or Hungary for their plenty of cattle. But of this more in our description of the several Provinces.  
The people are very industrious, and studious of all Languages, especially of the Latin to which they are so devoted, that there is scarce a mean man, who is notable in some measure to express himself in it. According to their abilities rather prodigal then truly liberal; and good soldiers generally. The Peasants live in miserable servitude unto their Lords; the Lords in such equality of estate amongst themselves, that none of them (excepting the greater Princes exceedeth 25000 Ducats of yearly rent. Proud in their garb, costly in their Apparel, impatient in their humours, and delicate in diet: these last conditions common to the women also, who are for the most part indifferently fair, and rather witty than well spoken. But this being the peculiar Character of the Polander properly so called, is not perhaps communicable to the people of the rest of the Provinces, whom we shall speak of several in their proper places.  
The Christian faith was first planted in this Kingdom at several times, and by several persons, according to the different parts of which it consisteth: in Poland specially so called, in the time of their Prince Miecislaus son of Nemomislus, anno 963. in Livonia, by the Preaching of one Meinardus, anno 1200. or thereabouts; in Lituania not until the year 1386. at the admission of Jagello to the Crown of Poland, and then done (as some say) by Thomas of Walden, (or Waldensis) an English Friar. In Samogitia and Volhinia, at the same time with Lituania. In the rest at other times, and on other occasions, yet so that in many places of it, Idolatry was never totally rooted out, the seeds and practise whereof in many points still remain amongst them. Corrupted by the superstitions of the Church of Rome, a Reformation was endeavoured at such time as John of Has flourished in Bohemia, the next neighbouring kingdom: but by the rigour of Ladislaus the sixth, than King thereof, assisted by his 〈◊〉 and Noblemen, at that time hindered. Afterwards in the time of Luther, some who had studied at 〈◊〉 and Wittenberg, (Universities of Saxony) brought his opinions home with them into the Province or Poland; as some Dutch Merchants (with the rest of their Commodities) did into Dantz●●k, the chief Town of Prussia, anno 1525. from whence it spread itself over most part of that Country. According as it was favoured or disliked, by the Palatines, Chastellans, and other great men of the Realm; so was its entertainment either good or bad: the Grecians in the mean time taking opportunity, to win some parts of it to their side; and confirm others in it, who being originally members of the Church of Greece, because originally converted by the Bishops thereof, did still continue in conformity and obedience to it. In the end by reason of the over great liberty of the Nobility and people, and want of power in the King to control their doings, every man took up what Religion he best liked; some following the Augustane Confession, others the Helvetian, others adhering as tenaciously to the Church of Rome; and some inclining to new Sects, or rather to old Heresies under new disguises, have brought in such a miscellany or Babel of Religions into this estate, (Jesuits, Lutherans, Calvn●sis, Socinians, Arians, Anabaptists, and indeed what not, being here all tolerated) that at last it grew into a Byword, that if any man had lost his Religion he might find it in Poland, or else 〈◊〉 it to be vanished. A Byword afterwards applied unto Amsterdam; communicable since unto other places: Libertas Prophetandi, or the Liberty of Prophesying being now as much allowed of in some parts of Christendom, as Libertas opinandi, was in Rome under Nervas Government; ubi & sent●re quaevelis, & quae sentias l●qui liceat, when as a man might think as he listed of the public, and speak what he thought. But whether this be such a Rara temporum felicitas, such a felicity of these our times, as Tacitus conceived the other to be of those; future times will show.  
But to return again to Poland, notwithstanding this mixture of Religions, yet that most publicly allowed and countenanced is the Religion authorised by the Church of Rome: asserted here by the zeal of the Kings unto that cause, and the great power of the Bishops, who seeing how those of their Orders have sp●d in Germany and other places, under colour of Reformation of some things amiss, have hitherto upheld the Ecclesiastical Estate in the same form they found it. The Government of the Church as formerly, by 3 Archbishops, and 19 Bishops: who challenge a jurisdiction over all the kingdom, ●ut exercise it upon those only who submit unto them: those who embrace the Doctrines of Luther or Calvin, following the forms of Government by them established, as others do some new ones of their own devising. And for those Provinces and people which lie towards Greece, or were parts heretofore of the Russian Empire, and still hold a Communion with those Churches; they have Archbishops and Bishops of their own Religion; that is to say, the Archbishops of Vilne and Lemburg, the Bishops of Polozko, Luzko, Pinsko, Volodomire, Presmil, and Kiovia. Yet amongst all these different Churches and forms of Government there is this conformity, that whensoever the Gospel is read openly in the Congregation, the Nobility and Gentry use to draw their swords (according to an ancient custom which they had among them) signifying their readiness to defend it against all opposers. Which reason doubtless gave beginning to the standing up at the Creed and Gospel, in the primitive times; retained still in the Church of England: whereby we do declare how prepared and resolute we are to defend the same; though some of late, holding it for a Relic of Popery, with greater nicety than wisdom, have refused to do it.  
Chief Rivers of this Kingdom are 1 Vistula or Wixel, the ancient Boundary betwixt Germany and Sarmatia Europaea, which rising in the Carpathian Mountains, passeth by Cracovia the chief City of Poland, and dividing Prussia from Pomerella falleth into the Baltic sea not far from Dantzick; and is navigable for the space of 400 miles, of old called Vandalis. 2 Warta, which runneth through the lesser Poland; 3 Duina the less, watering Livonia: and 4 Borysthenes or Nieper passing through Podolia, both spoken of before when we were in Russia. 5 Niester by Ptolemie called Tyras, which falleth into the Euxine Sea, having first parted Podolia from Moldavia. 6 Jugra, by some called the lesser Tanais, arising in Lituania, and falling into the more noted Tanais, which is now called Don. Of less note there are, 1 Reuben or Reuhon, 2 Chronu● now called Pregel, 3 Bogh, said by some to be the 〈◊〉 of the Ancients. 4 Minnael, 5 Niemen, the Maeander of these Northern parts. 9 Wind, a Livonian river falling into the Baltic. Mountains of note here are not many, the Countries for the most part being plain and Champain: and those which be are rather boundaries betwixt this and some other Kingdom, then proper unto this alone. The chief of which are those called Sarmatici, dividing G●rmany from Sarmatia Europaea, by Solinus named Sevo, by Ptolemie the Carpathian Mountains; the boundary at this time betwixt Poland and Hungary.  
The common meats and Landmarks being thus laid down, we will next take a view of those several Provinces of which this kingdom doth consist, being ten in number: that is to say, 1 Livonia, 2 Samogitia, 3 Lituania, 4 Prussia, 5 Poland, specially so called, 6 Mollovia, 7 Podlassia, 8 Russia Nigra, 9 Voltinia, and 10 Pod●lia: all of them (except the proper Poland) within Sarmatia Europaea.  

1 LIVONIA.  
1 LIVONIA or LIEFLAND is bounded on the East with the Empire of Russia, on the West with the Baltic Sea; on the North with the Gulf or Bay of Finland, on the South with Samogitia, and Lituania. Extended in length along the shore of the Baltic for the space of 125 Dutch or 500 Italian miles, & 40 Dutch or 160 Italian miles in breadth: 
Livonia.  and called thus perhaps from the Lenovi, a people of Germany, inhabiting not far from the River Vistula.  
The country for the most part plain, without any mountains, furnished with corn and fruits in so great abundance, that they send part thereof into other countries: and yet there is much ground untilled in it, by reason of the bogs and marshes which are very frequent. Here is also store of wax, honey, and pitch, but they have neither oil nor wine; the want of which last is supplied by Meth. Of tame beasts fit for man's service they are well provided; as also of such whose skins are of more value with the Merchant, than their flesh at the market; as Ermines, Sables, Castor's, others of that kind; besides good store of game for hunting, the country having in it many large woods, parts of the Hercynian. And as for Rivers there are few countries which have more, watered by the Wind, the Beck, the Dwine, the Ruho; all of them falling into the Baltic; many great Lakes, whereof the chief is that of Beybas, 45 miles long, and full of fish.  
The people are much given to gluttony and drunkenness, especially in rich men's houses where it is to be had: for the peasant lives in want enough, mere slaves to their tyrannical Landlords, who spend in riot and excess, what these get by drudgery. And when at any time the poor wretch leaves his Landlord to mend his condition with some other, the Lord if he can overtake him will cut off his foot, to make sure of him for the future. They are a mixture of many Nations, as the Fstones, which are the natural Inhabitants, (derived from the Estii, a Dutch people, spoken of by Ptolemie) of which Nation are almost all the Paisants; the Moscovites, Swedes, Danes, Dutch, and Polanders, intermingled with them, coming in upon several conquest, and planting themselves in the best parts of it, in which they still Lord it over the Native, but the Dutch especially for long time Masters of the whole.  
The Christian Faith was first here planted by Meinardus of Lubeck employed herein (in the time of Frederick the first) at the persuasion of some Dutch Merchants who traded hither, by the Archbishop of Breme, by whom made the first Bishop of the Livonians. The Church hereof at this time governed by the Archbishop of Riga, the Bishops of Derpt, As●lia, Oesel, Curland, and Rivallia, in those parts which remain subject to the Polander, where the Religion of the Church of Rome is only countenanced. Such parts of it that are under the Swedes or Danes are for the most part of the Lutheran profession; planted with colonies of that people. But the Estones, or original Inhabitants, as they have a language: so they have a Religion by themselves also; mixed of the Christian and the Pagan: extremely well affected unto their Priests, to whom they present salt, candles, and fruits, when they come to them for their blessings; great lovers of Confession, esteemers of holy water, and diligent frequenters of their Churches: but so extremely ignorant in all points of Religion, that there is hardly one in a village that can say his Paternoster. When they bury any of their dead, every one drinketh an health to him, and poureth his part upon him when his turn comes to drink, putting into the grave with him an hatchet, wine, meat, and a little money for his voyage. And in some places they are wholly idolatrous (if not converted very lately by the care of the Jesuits) some of them worshipping the Sun, other stocks and stones, and some Serpents also. The language of the Country is for the most part the High Dutch (being the language of those Nations who first lorded over them) the Estones having generally a peculiar language, which none of the others understand.  
It was divided formerly into the Provinces of Curland, Eastland, Semigall, Virland, Harland, and Lettenland; but these six, since the conquest of it by the ●●landers, are reduced to three: Harland, and Virland, being united unto Estland, and Semigallia unto Curland.  
Chief places in Estland are 1 Rivalle, a Bishops See, and well traded Port, situate on the Gulf of Finl●nd; a town belonging to the Swede, the keeping whereof and of Viburg, on the borders of Moscovie stand him yearly in 100000 Dollars. 2 Habsay, or Habses, (Asilia in Latin) a Bishops See, and 3 Pernow, a well fortified place, belonging to the Swethlander also, ever since the conquest of these parts of the country by John the second. Places of great importance to the Crown of Sweden; as all other pieces of this nature are, which standing in an Enemy's Country not only do defend our own, but offend our adversaries. For they are not only doors to open a further passage into their territories, whensoever we shall see occasion; but whilst the Enemy is besieging thereof, or otherwise busyed in recovering them into his power, our own state is preserved in quiet, and time may yield fit opportunity to relieve them, if they be distressed, without wasting any part of our proper countries Of which nature was Calais when it was in the hands of the English; the Garrisons which the Spaniards and Portugu●ze have in Afric and India: the charge of keeping them being sufficiently defrayed (if the charge prove greater than the income, as sometimes it doth) by the advantages they give unto him which hath them. 4 Velin, a strong Town, and fortified with an impregnable Castle, betrayed by the Dutch Garrison, at that time in it, together with William of Furstenberg the great Master, into the hands of John Basilius the great Duke of Moscovie: who still holds it. 5 Derpt or Derbren, (in Latin Tupatum) a Bishops See; situate on the Beck, or Einbeck betwixt two Lakes, in the midst of the Province; and taken at the same time by the Moscovite; who transporting the Livonians into other places, planted thos● parts with Colonies of his own people. 6 Tornest, a Castle of great strength, taken then also by the Russ●s: but being recovered by the Polander, was blown up with Gunpowder, that it might no more come into the hands of the Enemy. Hitherto nothing of this Country which belongs to the Polander; these that follow do, that is to say 7 Borcholm, the seat and residence of the Bishop of Rivalle, since the taking of that Town by the Swedes. 8 Weisenberg, incommodiously seated betwixt two ill neighbours, Narve, and Rivalle, but serving very well to prohibit the incursions of those Garrisons further into the Country. 9 Werneber, in that part of Fstland, which is called Odinpen, and Wittenstein in that part thereof which is named Jervia.  
In LETTENLAND, lying in the midst betwixt Estland and Curland, the places of most note are 1 Rita, (the people call it Rig) seated on the mouth of the River Dwina, falling there into the Baltic; first built, and planted at the charges of the Merchants of Breme; after that the Archbishops See, the ordinary residence of the great Master, and the chief City of the whole Province of Livonia. A town well fortified according to modern Rules of fortification, with a strong wall, large Bulwarks, double ditches, Palisadoes; and well provided of all manner of Ammunition: a famous Emporie, of great resort by foreign Merchants, who carry hence Pitch, Wax, Hemp, Flax, and such other commodities. Governed (notwithstanding their subjection to the King of Poland) by their own Laws; and such stout defenders of their liberties, that they will by no means admit of any foreiner to have command of the City; obedient in all other things to the will of that King. 2 Dunamund, an impregnable fortress, two Dutch miles from Riga, well garrisoned by Polanders, who here take toll of all foreign Merchants. 3 Blokaws, a Garrison of the Kings betwixt Riga and Dunamund, where the Merchants are tolled over again. 4 Winden, more within the land, on the River so called. 5 Wolmar, upon the River Treiden. 6 Kokenhan, a strong Town on the banks of the Dwina. This Country belongs wholly to the King of Poland, and stood firm for him in the war made by Charles Duke of Suderman, against his Nephew Sigismond King of Poland and Sweden, when almost all Eastland had submitted to him.  
CURLAND, the third and last member of this division, containing Semigallia also, lieth south of Lettenland, and north of Samogitia and Lituania: an entire Dukedom of itself, but holden under the Sovereignty and homage of the kings of Poland. Places of most importance in it, are 1 Canden, 2 Goldingen, 3 Kies, (the Dutch call it Wenden) the seat of the Great Master of the Teutonick order in times past; now most frequented as the place of Parliament or General Assembly for affairs which concern the public. 4 Dubin, 5 Grubin, on the Sea side, but of no trade at all. 6 Halenpot. And then in Semigall, 7 Mitow, the Court and residence of the Dukes of Curland, 8 Selborch, 9 Bassembourg, 10 Dobelin. No town in all this Dukedom of any trading, though lying for a great space all along the Baltic; because none of them furnished with commodious Havens. A Dukedom first begun in the person of Gothardus Ketler, (of one of the noble families of Danemark) the last Great Master of the Dutch Knights in this Country: who in the year 1562 surrendering his order and the whole possession of Livonia to Sigismond Augustus' King of Poland, received back again for him and his heirs for ever, the Dukedom of Curland and Semigall, to be held by them of that Crown: the Nobility of these Country's doing then presently their homage and allegiance to him, as their Hereditary Prince. Since which time the Princes of this house have continued Feudataries unto Poland, but not reckoned as parts or members of the body thereof; not coming to the Diets, nor liable to the public charges, nor having any thing to do in the King's Election: in a word, rather honourable Neighbours of the Kings of Poland, than subjects to them. The present Duke like to be much increased in estate and power, if the now marquis of Brandenbourg (whose sister is his mother) should depart without issue: For by that means there will be added to this house the great Dukedom of Prussia, those of Cleve and Gulick, together with such other Countries possessed now by that marquis, as he holds by descent from the Heirs General of those Dukedoms: which makes him cast an eye already upon those Estates.  
There belong also to Livonia some few Islands situate in the Baltic Sea, that is to say, 1 Osilia, 2 Dogeden, 3 Mona, 4 Wormse, 5 Wrangen, and 6 Kien. Of which the four last do belong to the King of Poland's Dacuden, Dogeden King of Swethland; and Osilia or Oesel to the Dane. This last the chief of all the six, distant from the main land of Livonia 12 Dutch miles, 14 of the same miles in length, half as much in breadth: the chief Towns thereof being Osel, a Bishops See, which gives name to the Island, 2 Sunberg. The Island made subject to the Danes by Magnus, brother of Frederick the second king of Denmark, who being chosen administrator of the Bishopric of Derpt, in Estland, made himself master of this Island, and some other pieces; which, dying without issue, he bequeathed to the King his brother, anno 1580.  
As for Livonia itself, it was first under the Levoni and Estii two Germane Nations, from whom the Country had the name of Livonia, the people of Estlanders or Fstones. Distracted into many petit principalities, it was made acquainted with the Christian Faith by the care of the Merchants of Bremen, as before was said. Meinard their first Bishop being dead, and Bertold his successor slain by such of the people as had not yet received the Gospel: the knights of the Port-glaive, and the sword were sent hither to defend the Preachers and their Doctrine by force of Arms. Finding themselves too weak to effect the business, they united with the order of Dutch Knights in Prussia, to whom from that time forwards they became subordinate; the Great Master of Livonia, acknowledging him of Prussia for his Superior. These Knights continued Masters of it, without contradiction till the year 1557. (embracing in the mean time the opinions of Luther, anno 1528) when quarrelling with the Archbishop of Riga, of the house of Brandenbourg, because he would not adhere unto their opinions; who to secure his own estate was forced to put Riga into the hands of the Polanders. Afterwards being overlaid by the Moscovite, who had taken from them almost all their Country, they were fain to put themselves under the protection of Sigismond Augustus King of Poland, 
Samogitia.  anno 1559 But William of Furstenburg the Great Master being betrayed by his own Mercenaries into the hands of the Moscovite: Gothardus his successor (following the example of Albert the Great Master of Prussia) transacted with the said Sigismond for the whole estate: which he surrendered to his use in the Castle of Riga, March 5. anno 1562. together with his Cross the seal of the Order, the Charters and Grants of many of the Popes and Emperors which concerned the same; as also the Keys of the City and Castle of Riga, the Office of great Master, the rights of coinage, and all the powers and privileges appertaining to it: receiving back again from Ratzevill the King's Commissioner, the Dukedom of Curland, to him and to his Heirs for ever as before is said. By this transaction the Kings of Pole became masters of Liefland, more absolutely settled in it after a long war betwixt Steven King of Poland, and John Vasiliwick the Great Duke of Moscovie, who in the end surrendered all his claim therein to the said Steven and his successors, anno 1582. reserving only some few Towns on the Eastern borders: the Danes and Swethlanders taking occasion by these troubles to impatronize themselves of Narve, Rivallia, Osel, and some other pieces.   

2 SAMOGITIA.  
2 SAMOGITIA is a small Province wedged in betwixt Livonia and Lituania, having Livonia on the North, Lituania on the East and South, and the Baltic Sea upon the West: in length extending 50 miles from East to West, but not of answerable breadth. It is so called from the lowness of the situation (the word Samogits in the language of the Inhabitants signifying terram inferiorem or the Lowlands) by the Moscovite in the same sense called Samotzkasemla. This lowness of the situation makes it very watery and almost continually frozen; but withal it hath many forests which yield unto the people abundance of honey, better, more pleasing to the taste, and less mixed with wax then in other places.  
The people are supposed to be of the Saxon race, of good stature, well-set, bold and apt for war; but withal, boisterous, rude and barbarous: Christians in general, but many who do still retain their old Idolatries: nourishing amongst them a kind of fourfooted Serpents, about three handfuls in length, which they worship as their Household gods, attending them with fear and reverence when they call them out to their repast; and if any mischance happen to any of the family, it is imputed presently to some want of due observation of these ugly creatures. Naturally inclined to Divinations, Charms, and Sorceries, and frequently abused (as for the most part such people are) by diabolical illusions. Nay they which profess the name of CHRIST are so ill instructed, that they use to marry many wives, without consideration of blood or parentage: it being ordinary for a man to marry with his brother's widow, & not unusual to marry the Relict of their fathers, (a fornication not so much as heard of in St. Paul's time, amongst the Gentiles). They have some customs also, as unprofitable, as these are heathenish; breaking up their land, as they do in Moscovie, with spades or sticks. And when one of their Governors observing the husbandry of other Nations, had brought them to the use of the plough, it fortuned that for two or three years, either by the indisposition of the weather or some other accident, they had not so much corn as they used to have. Which want the people attribating to the use of the plough, nec quicquam aliud in causa esse putantes, and not believing that there was any other cause of it, grew so much incensed, that the Governor fearing some sedition like to follow on it, was forced to leave them to the old way which before they went. An humour like that of the present Irish in ploughing with their Horse's tails, spoken of before. So pertinacious for the most part are ignorant and superstitious people in standing to their ancient customs, though absurd and hurtful.  
Towns they have few, their houses for the generality being poor and low, covered with straw or du●t, with an hole open in the roof to let in the light. The principal of those they have, (but rather Villages than Towns) are 1 Bigla near the head of the River Swiete, 2 Linkaw, of which nothing memorable.  
This Province hath always followed the fortunes of Lituania; subject, when that was so, to the kings of Russia; converted when that was, to the Christian Faith; and finally united with it to the Crown of Poland.   

3 LITVANIA.  
LITVANIA hath on the East the Empire of Russia, on the West Prussia, Massovia, and Poland; on the North, Livonia, and Samogitia, and on the South Volhinia and Podolia. So called from Lituus the ceremonial staff, used anciently by the Augurs in their divinations: to which the Inhabitants hereof being very much addicted before their receiving of the Gospel, were called Lituani. But this is but conjectural only. Yet rather thus then that it should be peopled by some banished Italians, first named Italia, than Litalia, and after by a most unlikely corruption come to Lituania, as Maithias a Michou would fain have it.  
The Country for the most part full of Mcores, Forests, some great Lakes, like a Sea for bigness, and many navigable Rivers: which frozen over in the Winter make the ways more travellable at that time of the year, 
Lituania.  than they are in summer. The air in most places exceeding cold, which makes their Wheat (whereof they have some abundance) to be seldom ripe; and other fruits of the Earth to come slowly forward. Their forests yield them Bugles, Ermines, Sables, Deer, wild Horses, plenty of Honey, Wax, and Pitch; but their breed of cattle is less here, and of smaller stature than it is in Germany. These Forests also are the storehouse out of which the English and Hollanders furnish themselves with timber both for ships and building; returning to them in exchange salt, wine, and other necessaries which are wanting here.  
The people anciently had Fire and Serpents for their Gods, nourishing the last in their houses, and keeping the other continually burning: the Priests and Ministers of the Temples always adding fuel, that it might not fail. The Vestal fire not kept more carefully at Rome, nor with greater ceremony. To this God whom they called Dishpan, or the Lord of the Smoke, they used to sacrifice young pullets; to the other their Cocks: the seed of this Idolatry is implanted in them, that it is said, that in a Village of the kings called Lovaniskis, not sour miles from Vilna, their chief City, they do to this day worship Serpents. Converted with their Prince Jagello to the Christian faith, an. 1386. they yet retained such customs as are inconsistent with Christianity: marrying and unmarying when and as often as they please; no bond being so soon canceled as that of Matrimony. For a married man to use the body of an harlot is accounted (as indeed it is) an opprobrious crime; but for the wife to have her Stallions and Adulterers is a thing so ordinary and unblameable, that the husbands call them their Co-adjutors, and prise them far above the rest of their Acquaintance. The common people in a miserable servitude unto their Lords, pillaged and beaten by them upon any occasion; yet must not come before them with an empty hand. And if any of them have committed a crime deserving death, he must hang himself assoon as the sentence is signified to him, or else is beaten and tormented in so cruel manner, that death at last is looked on as a better life.  
The country is divided into ten parts or Provinces, subject unto the jurisdiction of so many Palatines, that is to say, the Palatine of 1 Vilna, 2 Trock, 3 Minsko, 4 Novogrod, 5 Brestia, 6 Volhinia, 7 Kiovia, 8 Mi●slaw, 9 Vitebsco, 10 Polotzkie. But Novogrod and Polotskie being conquered by the Great Duke of Moscovie, and added unto that estate; and Volhinia reckoned (of late times) for a distinct Province of itself, not depending of it: the remaining number is but seven; most of them taking names from their principal Towns. The chief of those, and others which deserve place here, are 1 Vilna a Bishops See, equal in bigness to Cracow, the chief City of Poland; so called of the River Vil and Viln, upon which it is seated; built there in the year 1305 by one Godemin, a great Prince of these parts: well-walled, but the gates thereof open night and day; large, rich, and well frequented by foreign Merchants; especially by those that drive the trade of Moscovie, who have here their Hall; one of the chief ornaments of the City. They have in it also some Churches built of stone (but the most of wood) the principal whereof is the Monastery of S. Bernard, which is a very comely structure. The Natives call this Town Vilenski; the Dutch, Die Wild. Situate in the very heart of the country, the longest day in summer being here 16 hours and half a quarter; whereas in the most southern parts of the country it is but 16, and in the most northern not fully 18. 2 Kiovia, or Kiof, situate on the Nieper or Borysthenes, where the River Desna falls into it: heretofore a beautiful and most stately City, having in it above 300 fair Churches, of which some remain unto this day; the ruins of the rest to be traced out amongst shrubs and bushes, the receptacles of wild beasts. The seat at that time of the Metropolitan of the Russian Empire, containing also under his jurisdiction the countries of Walachia in Dacia, and Nigra Russia in Poland. But being destroyed by Bathu or Boydo the Tartarian, in the conquest of these parts by that people; it never could come near its former lustre; yet still it holds the reputation of a Bishops See, acknowledging the Patriarch of Moscow for his Metropolitan; and consequently of the Communion of the Greek Churches, not of that of Rome. 3 Grodua, on the River Chronus, the chief Town of the Palatinate of Trock, memorable for the death of Stephen King of Poland. 4 Grumwold, more memorable for the great defeat given near it by Jagello the Duke of Lituania and King of Poland to the numerous Army of the Dutch Knights invading this Province: so confident of their success in the undertaking, that they brought with them abundance of chains and torches; with the one to lead captive the Nobles of Poland, and with the other to fire their Cities. But Jagello, then newly made a Christian, putting his confidence in God, with an Army of untrained soldiers so tamed their pride, that he slew 40000 of them; never recovered of that blow whilst their Order stood. 5 Ponsko, in the Palatinate of Breast; 6 Klow, reckoned a country of itself; and 7 Strissin fortified with a Castle, both under the Palatine of Mieslaw. The rest of the chief Towns may be known by the Palatinates, which they give their names to; but not else observable.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Aorsi, Pagarini, Savari, tribes of the Sarmatae Europaei. United into this name of Lituanians, they became subject to the Kings of Russia; till the breaking of that kingdom by the Tartars. At what time Erdizvill then their Prince, (but an Homager and Tributary to the Ru●sians) with drew himself from their command: as did also many others of the conquered Provinces. Afterwards Mi●doch, one of the Dukes or Princes of it, being made a Christian, was by Pope Innocent the third honoured with the title of a King, but returning again unto his vomit, he lost that title. In the end anno 1386. J●gello Duke of Lituania, marrying with Heduigis Queen of Poland, was upon three conditions chosen King of that Realm. 1 That he should immediately receive the Christian faith. 2 That he should draw all his subjects to the same belief; and 3 that he should unite this Dukedom to the Crown of Poland. Of these the two first were performed without any delay; 
Volhinia.  though the second not without some difficulty; the people being obstinate in their old Idolatry, especially in the religious conceit they had of high trees; which to cut down was held both unsafe and impious. Not to be weaned from this conceit till by the authority of the King their lostiest trees were felled, and their Woods grubbed up: which when they saw done without any danger to the Prince; or any of those whom he employed in that service, Regis mandato & autoritati cedere caperunt, they then began to hearken unto his commands, and generally received the Gospel, and were Baptised. In the last point there was a longer time of deliberation. For the Princes of the house of Jag●llo, loath to deprive themselves of their Patrimonial estate, which was hereditary unto their posterity; and to subject it to the election of the Polanders, in which it was possible the Princes of their family might be pretermitted: deferred the accomplishment hereof from one day to another, under colour that the Lituanians would revolt, if they went about it. But Sigismond Augustus, in whose person the male issue of Jagello failed, foreseeing what divisions might ensue after his decease, and fearing that the Moscovites would renew their old pretensions; united it unto the Crown: ordaining that the Bishops, Palatines, and a certain number of the Chastellans by him established, should have their place and suffrage in the great Council of Poland: power in the choosing of the King, and all other privileges which the natural Polonians have. Since that accounted a chief Member of that Body Politic: subject to those corruptions, changes, and innovations in matters of Religion, which have been predominant in the other; excepting those parts only which relate to the Church of Greece or Moscow, adhering pertenaciously to the rites thereof.   

4 VOLHINIA.  
VOLHINIA, by some accounted one of the Palatinates of Lituania; (as once it was) but by others a distinct Province of itself, is bounded on the North and East with Lituania, on the South with Podolia, and on the West with Russia Nigra, and Podlassia. So called, as Maginus is of opinion, from the Volgari, who dwelling on the banks of the River Volga, came afterwards into this country calling it Volgaria, whence by degrees it came unto Volhonia, and at last to Volhinia. But this conjecture is improbable and of no good grounds.  
The country yields good plenty both of grain and fruits, Pools which abound with very good fish, Forests which do afford them store of game and honey; and much good pasturage for their cattle. The people of the same nature with the Lituanians, but more strong, and warlike, and better weaned from their old superstitions and heathenish customs, than the others are. Of the same language and Religion with those of Russia, to which, together with the rest of Lituania, it did once belong: It is divided commonly into three parts or Provinces, all taking name from the three principal Cities of it; that is to say, 1 Luzke, in Latin called Luceozia, a town of above 1000 families, where 127 only, in the time of my Author were of the Romish Religion; the residue being Russians, Grecians, and some Armenians; the seat & residence of two Bishops, of which one being of the Communion of the Church of Rome, is of the Province of the Archbishop of Lemburg in Russia Nigra: but they which are of the Communion of the Church of Greece, have also a Bishop of their own, who acknowledgeth the Patriarch of Moscow for his Metropolitan. 2 Valodomir, a Bishop See also, of the same condition. 3 Keromenze, which (as the rest) hath under it many fair Towns and Castles, besides large Villages. The whole once part of Lituania, as before was said; but of late dismembered from it, and united to the Crown of Poland, as a State distinct. But so, that the greatest part of it is immediately subject to the Duke of Ostrogoye, who is said to have 4000 Feudataries in this Country, the greatest Prince of those who hold Communion with the Church of Greece, in the whole Realm of Poland.   

5 PODOLIA.  
PODOLIA hath on the North Volhinia, part of Lituania, and the great Empire of Russia, on the South Moldavia, from which parted by the River Tyras, now called Niester: on the West Russia Nigra: extending Eastward through vast uninhabited countries, as far as to the Euxine Sea. The reason of the name I find no where guessed at, the people for the most part of the same nature with the Russians, to whose Empire it formerly belonged.  
The Country generally so fertile, that the husbandman is accustomed to reap an hundred for one, in regard it bears at one ploughing for three years together: the countryman being put to no further trouble, then at the end of the first and second years, to shake the corn a little, as he reaps or loads it, that which so falls serving as seed for the next year following. The meadow grounds so strangely rich, and luxuriant, and the grass so high, that a man can hardly see the heads or horns of his cattle: of so swift a growth, that in three days it will cover a rod which is thrown into it, and in few more so hide a plough, that it is not an easy work to find it. If these things seem beyond belief, let Maginus who reporteth them, bear the blame thereof: though better take it on his word then go so far to disprove him. And yet which adds much unto the miracle, the ground in most places so hard and stony, that there need six yoke of Oxen to break it up, to the great toil both of the cattle and the men. It is also said that in this country there are great flocks of sheep, many heads of Oxen, 
Russia Nigra.  abundance of wild beasts, and great store of honey. And yet for all this plenty and abundance of all things necessary, the Country for the most part, especially towards the East, is but meanly inhabited; by reason of the frequent incursions of the Tartars bordering next unto it. Who have so wasted it in times past, and thereby so discouraged the people from building, planting, and all other works of peace and husbandry, that in so large and rich a Country, there is nothing to be seen but some scattered houses, few Villages, and not above from Towns of note, viz. 1 Or●zakow, at the influx of the Borysthenes or Nieper into the Euxine sea. 2 Vaszow, at the fall of the River Bog into that of Nieper. 3 Braclaw, more high upon the Bog. 4 Camienecz, on the borders of Russia nigra, built by some divine hand as it were amongst the precipices of high and inaccessible Rocks; and so well fortified withal, that it is impregnable; as is apparent by the many and great repulses, which the Turks, Tartarians, and Null, have received before it, with much shame and loss. 2 Lemburg, remarkable for the sauces or salt-meats, which they send thence into other Countries.   

6 RUSSIA NIGRA.  
RUSSIA NIGRA hath on the East Volhinia, Podolia, and Moldavia; on the West Mazo●ia and Poland, specially so called; on the North Lituania, and Podlassia; and on the South the Sarmatian on Carpathian Mountains. It is called also Roxolania from the Roxolani, a chief people of Sarma●●a Europaea, and by some Ruthenia: but generally Russia, from the Rossi spoken of before, in the Empire of Russia, who spread themselves over all these parts. Some hold that it was first called Rosseia which signifieth in the Sclavonian language a scattered Nation, or a Nation disseminated, and dispersed into many parts; and that this was the name generally of all that spoke the Sclavonian tongue, and followed the religion and ●ites of the Church of Greece: extended from the frozen Seas to the Adriatic, and from the Euxine to the Baltic. This and a greater tract of ground I grant to have been heretofore possessed by divers Nations under the name of Sclavonians; a very considerable part of Germany and P●land being conquered by them. But for the name of Russia, given at first to all the Russian Empire, distinguished now into Russia Alba, and Russia Nigra, I adhere unto my former Vote: conceiving that it came from the Rossi, an Armenian people, inhabiting about Mount Taurus, who in the year 864 or there abouts, attempted the taking of Constantinople, and after placed themselves on the Northern banks of the Euxine, getting ground of the Sclavonians to the North and East, till they had made themselves masters of all Russia Alba, Lituania, Volhinia, Podolia, and this Russia Nigra. Distinguished from the former by the adjunct of Nigra, after the destruction of that great Empire by the coming in of the Tartars, either from the colour of their garments, or their black and more southernly complexion. In which regard called also Russia Meridionalis, or the Southern Russia.  
The Country is generally fruitful, abounding in Horses, Oxen, Sheep, Sables, and Foxes: such store of Bees that they breed not only in Hives and hollow trees, but in Rocks and Caves. Well watered both with Pools and Rivers, affording them great plenty of fish; more naturally spawning here then in other places, insomuch that if a Pond be digged, and spring accordingly, the fish will breed therein of their own accord without being brought from other waters. The greatest want hereof is wine, either supplied with Mede, or from other places. And it is said, that in the Territory of Cheline the branches of the Pine trees left upon the ground for three years together, will be converted into stone.  
The people are generally valiant, and so strong of body, that they use Bows of 12 foot long. Being formerly governed by Dukes, they do but ill brook the name of King; which much induced the Kings of Poland to send Colonies of natural Polonians into most parts of the Country, insomuch as most of the Knights and Gentry of it are of that extraction, and follow the religion of the Church of Rome: the Paisants and original inhabitants of it being more generally affected to the Rites and doctrines of the Church of Greece.  
Places of most importance in it are, 1 Chelme, in the Territory whereof it is affirmed, that the branches of Pine trees left upon the ground for three years together, are converted to stone. 2 Premisten, 3 Halitz, 4 Belzo, 5 Grodeck, and 6 Leopolis, by the Natives called Lemburg, built by one Leo a Moscovite, a Town of great traffic, and an Archbishops See, who is of the Religion of the Church of Rome. But the Patriarch of Moscow hath here also an Archbishop of his own ordaining, there being Churches both in the City itself, and all Russia generally (as before was said) which are of the communion of the Church of Greece. There are also in this City some Armenian Merchants who have a Church, a Bishop, and some Priests of their own religion.  
Of the affairs of this Province, and how it was a part once of the Russian Empire, hath been said already. Dismembered from it by the Tartars, it had a while Dukes or Provincial Governors, subject and tributary unto those Barbarians: as had also Podolia, its next neighbour. Both conquered by the Polander, were for a time kept under by strong hand, and the power of Garrisons. But being upon all occasions apt to revolt, by reason of the hard hand which the Kings held over them, (by whom treated rather like slaves than subjects) they were assured unto the State by giving them the same liberties and immunities both for the Nobility and the Commons, which the natural Polonians had; and by that means made fellow-members of that Commonwealth. The Act of Ladislaus the 6. the son of Jagello, imitating therein the ancient Romans, who much augmented their forces, and assured their Estate, by communicating the freedom of Rome, and the privileges of Latium to many of 〈…〉.   

7 MASSOVIA.  
MASSOVIA is bounded on the East with Lituania, on the West with 〈◊〉 specially so called, on the North with Prussia and 〈◊〉, on the South with Russia Nigra or 〈◊〉. So called 〈…〉 one of the Dukes hereof; who in the year 1045. being vanquished by Casitive Duke of Poland, 〈◊〉 into ●●ussia and there unfortunately died.  
The Country large, and for the most part full of woods, where they find store of Bugs and wild 〈◊〉 The people strong, valiant, and courageous in war: differing little from the 〈◊〉 in speech, manners, or apparel; save that they use a kind of whistling, which the others do not. The principal Towns of it, are 1 Marschow, the chief of the Province, and heretofore the residence of the Duke or Prince, remarkable for the best M●de or Metheglin. 2 Egr●d Czirko, 3 Poltouvoski, 4 Gadz●ck, 5 Lozara, 6 Dro●e, the seat of a Palatine, but not else observable.  
This Province was once subject to Princes of its own, not subject or subordinate unto any Superior. Of which number that Masso was one, from whom named Massovia. In the years 1246. and 1260. being strangely wasted and distressed by Mindly Duke of Lituania; they were fain to put themselves under the power of the Polander: by whom made the portion of the second son of that Kingdom. But John and Stamslaus the two last Dukes hereof, dying without issue, it returned unto the Kings of Poland, by whom incorporate to that Crown, and privileged in the election of the King, and all matters which concern the public, as all others of the Polonians are, anno 1526.   

8 PODLASSIA.  
Podlassia is bounded on the East with Volhinia, on the West with Prussia▪ on the North with Lituania, and on the South with Massovia, and Russia nigra. The reason of the name I know not. The Country not much differeing from those before, the people a mixed generation of Russes, Moscovites, and Pol●nians; partake a little of the manners and garb of those several Nations from which they lineally are descended.  
Places of most importance in it, are 1 Bielsko, 2 Brunsko, 3 Suras, all of them having fair and ample Territories. 4 Tykdiskin, strongly fortified and well garrisoned, as being the place where the King's Treasures are kept. 5 Knyssin, beautified with a royal Palace and a pleasant Park, wherein are store of wild beasts for hunting, and fishponds very well replenished. 6 Narew, 7 Vasilkow, and 8 Augustow, a very strong Town, built and well fortified by Sigismond Augustus, and by him thus named, anno 1569. at what time he dismembered this Province from Lituania, to which before it appertained; uniting it forever to the Crown of Poland.   

9 PRUSSIA.  
PRUSSIA is bounded on the East with Lituania, and Podlassia; on the west with Pomerania; on the North with the Baltic Sea; and on the South with Poland and Massovia. Called first Borussia from the Borussi, who subdued it (of whom more anon) which by an easy alteration was changed into Prussia, by which name still called.  
The Country is extended all along the Baltic Sea, from the City of Dantzick in the west, to Labian on the mouth of the Maillank East, for the space of 50 Polish miles; and from Torune bordering on Massovia, to Memel in the confines of Lituania, 58 miles of the same measure. The air thereof very mild and temperate, the soil both profitable and pleasant; full of Lakes and Rivers stored with fish, plentiful of corn and other necessaries, and well clad with Forests which yield them game for hunting, rich skins for profit, and abundance of honey. Of which last they make Mede for their own use (their ordinary drink where there is no wine) and fell the rest unto the Merchant. But the commodity wherein they do excel their neighbours, is their plenty of Amber, which is the juice of a stone which groweth like a Coral in a Mountain of these Baltic Seas, covered quite with water, and shunned by Mariners 3 leagues off for fear of Shipwreck: the Mountain reasonable large, about 50 yards high of English measure. And when any tempest riseth in these Northern Seas, especially in September and December, the liquor by violence thereof is rend from the rock, and cast into divers Havens and on divers Coasts of this Country, and sometimes upon those of Sweden and Pomerania: the people leaping into the Sea when it rageth most, whence they take up first some store of weeds, after that this Liquor; which being taken out of the water hardeneth like to Coral. Besides the beauty hereof and the quality it hath of attracting straws and iron, as the Adamant doth, burning like pitch, and others of this nature; it is excellent good for stopping blood, all kind of Agues, falling-sickness, dropsies, stone, colic, weakness of stomach, headache, and the yellow jaundice.  
The people, 
Prussia.  especially the Gentry, descend from the Germans, and retain much of their nature having more art and industry than the other Polonians, and being more tenacious of their ancient cu●omes. Idolaters for long time together, converted first unto the Faith, in the time of the Emperor Frederick the 2. by whose setting on they were subdued by the order of the Dutch Knights, anno 1215. and either won or forced to the Christian Faith. As Christians, governed since the first plantation of the Gospel by the Bishops of Culm, Warm, Samb●a, and Pomesan, suffragans to the Archbishop of Guesna: under whom those parts of it do still continue, which have not yet forsaken the Church of Rome: the Lutherans, Calvinians, and other separate Congregations distinct from them, having their own forms both of doctrine and discipline.  
Few Provinces of the North are better watered then this is, both for Lakes and Rivers: some of the Lakes 7 Dutch miles in compass, and well stored with fish; the Rivers 12 in number, that is to say, 1 The Vistula, 2 Chronus, 3 Nogat, 4 Elbing, 5 Vasera, 6 Passaria, 7 Alla, 8 Pregel, 9 Ossa, 10 Drebmez, 11 Lica, and 12 Lavia, all plentifully stored with fish; besides a large Sea coast both for trade and fishing, no small commodity to the Natives.  
The Country formerly divided into twelve Dukedoms, (so they called the parts and fractions of it) was by the industry of the Dutch Knights so adorned and beautified (after they had once brought it under their obedience) that there were no fewer than 72 Castles and 62 good Towns of their foundation. Which number being much increased in these later times, hath made it the most flourishing part of the whole kingdom of Poland. But the Order of these Knights being suppressed in this Country by an agreement betwixt Sigismond the first King of Poland, and Albert of Brandenbourg, the last great Master of the Order; both Towns and Country are divided between the successors of the said Alber● as Dukes of Prussia, and of the said Sigismond as Kings of Pole; the Dukedoms or divisions of Hogerland Warm, Galmadia, Micklow, Calmigeria, with the City of Mariemberg, the Sovereignty of Dantzick, and Melvin, with the whole Country of Pomerella lying on the West side of the Vistula, being allotted to the King; the residue containing the divisions of Schalavonia, Sambia, Natangia, Nadravia, Ba●vnia. Sudavia, and Pomesama, (except the City and Territory of Mar●emberg) to the Duke's o● Prussia.  
Chief Towns belonging to the Duke, are 1 Mimel, a well frequented Port, the Mart town for the commodities of Lituania, which are brought hither, and here bought by the foreign Merchant: part of this Province interposing betwixt Lituania and the Baltic. 2 Coningsberg, as the Dutch; Regim●m, as the Fre●ch; and Mons Regius, as the Latins call it, situate in the Province of Sambia, at the bottom of a Gul●e or Bay, where the Pregel falleth into the Baltic Sea, built by the Dutch Knights in the year 1260, and made an University by Albert the first Duke hereof, 1525. the seat and principal residence of his succeslours: as also of the Bishops of Sambia, in Latin called Sambienses, by the name of 〈◊〉 Province. 3 Mubneburg, founded by the Dutch Knights, anno 1279. 4 Brandenburg, on the South side of that bay, but more near the Sea; built, as I guest, by some of the great Masters of that family 5 Ragmtz, the furthest town of note towards Litua●ia. 6 Angersburg, in Sclavenia, as was also Ragnitz. 7 Nordenburg in Ba●tonia. 8 Ottelburg in Galmdia, of which little memorable. 9 Marienwerder, the furthest of the Duke's estate towards the Vistula, and the ordinary residence of the Bishop of Pomesan. Besides which there are reckoned in this division, 80 good towns more, and about 54 Castles, though not of much observation in the course of story.  
Chief towns pertaining to the King are 1 Braunsberg, upon a Bay of the Baltic Sea, which they call Frisch Haffe; a town of good trade by reason of the commodious Haven; and the ordinary residence of the Bishop of Warmia. 2 Frawenburg, on the same Bay, not far from Braunsburg. 3 Elbing, on the same Bay, not far from a fair and fishfull Lake, well traded, rich, and full of very wealthy Merchants. 4 Ressel, the chief town of the Diocese and Dukedom of Warmie. 5 Strasburg, in Michlow, confining on Poland specially so called; at the siege whereof by Gustavus Adolphus King of Sweden, anno 1628. Elias Tripe, one of the Engineers of that King, found out the use of Leather Ordinance, which afterwards did that King great service in his wars of Germany. 6 Culm, on the River Vistula, a Bishops See. 7 Mariemburg, on the Nogat, built by the Dutch Knights, anno 1302. and made the seat of the Great Masters of their Order, translated first from Ptolemais or Acon in Syria, to the city of Venice; from thence to Marpurg, and at last to this place by Sifride the twelfth Great Master of it: whose constant residence in this town, occasioned the Bishop of Culm to remove thither also. A very fair and well-built city, the chief of those which do belong to the King of Poland: by whom so well garrisoned and furnished with such store of victuals, ammunition, and all other necessaries, that it wa● thought able to hold out for a six years' siege. But it proved otherwise when besieged by the King of Sweden, who took it in less space than so many months; on the settling of a peace betwixt the Crowns rendered again unto the King of Poland. Beneath this town down towards the Baltic is a pleasant Island made by the Nagot and the Wixell, for the fertility of the soil, and the great numbe● of houses, villages, and people, not equalled (for the muchness of it) in all this Country. 8 Ne●burg, on the west side of the Vistula or Wixel, in the Country called Pomerella, once part of Pomerania but given by Swantibore Duke of Pomeren, anno 1107. to Bugeslaus his second son; whose posterity enjoyed it till the year 1295. when Mestevin the 2. dying without issue male, gave it to Primislaus Duke of the Polonians, whose successors have ever since enjoyed it by that donation. 9 Dirschaw or Darsaw, (in Latin, Darsovia) a well fortified Town and of great importance, on the same side of the River, and the same Country of Pomerella. 10 Dantzick, in Latin called Dantiscum, and sometimes Gedanum, situate on the same side of the River also, a fair and well-built City, the houses for the 〈◊〉 part of brick, and the rest of stone; raised with great beauty and magnificence six or seven floors high: beautified with a fair Council-house for affairs of State, and many public gardens for disport and exercise. It consisteth of three Cities governed by as many Senates; the one called Furstat or the fore-Citie, the second Altstat or the old City, and the third Reichstat or the Emperor's City: but all encompassed with one wall, and governed by one chief Senate or Common-Councel chosen out of all three. A Bishops See, and the second in esteem and rank of all the Hanse towns; of so great trade and such a noted Granary of all sorts of corn issued from hence to supply the wants of all other Countries, that 1000 measures of wheat (besides other commodities in proportion) are here daily sold. Heretofore it was reckoned as Imperial, but now esteemed a Free-Estate, acknowledging the Kings of Poland for their Protectors; to whom they allow many customs upon their merchandise, and permit his Officers to abide there for receiving of them. The first town in the Kingdom of Poland which gave entrance to the doctrines of Luther, anno 1525. but in so tumultuous a manner, that they that favoured his opinions, deposed the old Common-council men and created new ones of their own, profaned the Churches, rob them of their ornaments, and shamefully abused the Priests, and Religious persons, abolished the Mass, and altered all things at their pleasure. But by the coming of the King they grew somewhat quieter: Having one Convent of Black Friars, and two of Nuns, who still enjoy the exercise of their Religion. 11 Melvin, a noted Port Town and of great resort, especially by the English Merchants, who had here their Staple for the Baltic. A small, but fair and well-built City, and fortified with a very good wall: governed like Dan●k, after the manner of a Free Estate or Commonwealth, under the patronage and protection of the Kings of Poland.  
The ancient inhabitants hereof were the Venedi, the most potent Nation of this tract, extended all along the coast of the Baltic, from them by Ptolemie called Sinus Venedicus, containing under them the Gythones, Phinni, Sulanes, Phrungudiones, Avarini; and more within the land, the Sudini, and Galindae, whose name the Dukedom or Province of Galindia, doth still retain. But great and potent though they were, they were subdued by the Borussi, inhabiting at the foot of the Riphean Mountains; who weary of their own cold and barren dwellings, removed into the Western parts, and vanquishing the Venedi and those other Nations, possessed themselves of this Country, which they called Borussia; now by us named Prussia. By Venedus one of their Princes, having 12 sons in all, it was divided into 12 Provinces or Dukedoms, one for every son, continuing by that means distracted into divers petit principalities, till the coming of the Marian or Dutch Knights, sent hither by Frederick the 2. anno 1215. by whom the Provinces or Dukedoms of Sudavia, Michlow, and the greatest part of Nadravia, were laid waste and desolate, the rest submitted to their power and received the Gospel. After this it continued change of Masters, they revolted to the King of Poland, to whom they offered their obedience: seconded by the yielding up of Mariemberg, with many other Towns and Castles sold to King Casimir by the Garrison Soldiers, anno 1457. for 476000 Florins. But the Knights disdaining to be so dealt withal, and refusing to swear allegiance to the Kings of Poland, they broke out into open war; managed with variable success on both sides; Ludovicus the then Great Master, being so successful at the first that he once beat the King out of the field, routed his whole Army, slew 30000 of his men upon the place, and took 136 of his chief Nobility: not vanquished at last but by the treachery and rebellion of his own people. In the end wearied and worn out on both sides by continual wars, Albert of Brandenbourg then Great Master, having for 14 years together courageously maintained the honour of his Order, and for the 4 last years importuned in vain the assistance of the Emperor and Princes of Germany, began to think of some expedient to compound the business. Being inclined to Luther's doctrines, and willing to advance himself unto this Estate, he secretly practised with Sigismond the first of Poland, to end the war to the advantage of both parties. By whom at last it was agreed that Albert should relinquish his Order, and surrender all Prussia into the hands of the King; that the King possessing the Western parts with the town of Mariemberg, and the sovereignty of Dansk and Melvin, should invest Albert with the title of Duke of Prussia, estating on him and the heirs of his body, the whole Eastern Moiety, containing the Provinces or Dukedoms before specified; and finally, that Albert and his heirs should hold the said Estate as Homagers to the Crown of Poland, taking place in all Assemblies at the King's right hand. According to this agreement, anno 1525. Albert, attired in the complete Habit of Master of the Dutch Order, presents himself humbly on his knees before King Sigismond at Cracow, the King then sitting on his Throne. The King raising him from the ground, caused him to put off those robes and attire himself in a ducal Habit; which done an instrument was read and published, whereby the King conferred upon him and the heirs of his body the Dukedom of Prussia, to be held of him and his successor's Kings of Poland. An act at which the whole Order were extremely incensed, but they could not help it; and thereupon retired into Germany, where there were some good lands left to maintain such of them as had no mind to quit that military honour: leaving their old Estates in Prussia to the King, and the Duke; whose successors have hitherto enjoyed their part of it with the Title of 

DUKES of PRUSSIA. 
Poland.   
1525 1 Albert Brandenbourg, son of Frederick marquis of Onalsbach, or Ansbach, created Master of the Order by the Emperor Maximilian, anno 1511. and the first Duke of Prussia by Sigismond the first of Poland, anno 1525. founded the University of Coningsberg, anno 1544.  
1563 2 Albert Frederick, son of Albert the first Duke, married Mary Eleanor daughter of William Duke of Cleve, Gulick, Berg, etc.  
3 Anne, Eldest daughter of Duke Albert Frederick Duchess of Prussia, brought the Estate in marriage to  
4 John Sigismond, marquis and Elector of Brandenburg confirmed therein by Sigismond the 3. of Poland, pretending an Escheat thereof for want of heirs males of the body of Albert the first Duke.  
5 George William, marquis and Elector of Brandenburg, and Duke of Prussia in right of the Lady Anne his mother; and of Cleve, Gulick, Berg, etc. by descent from Mary Eleanor his Grandmother.  
6 Frederick William, son of George William, marquis and Elector of Brandenburg, Duke of Prussia, Cleve, Gulick, and Berg; of whose investiture in the Dukedom of Pomeren, and other large and goodly Signeuries, we have spoke elsewhere.    
As for the Government of this Province, standing thus divided, that of the Duke is more Monarchical than that of the King; the one being absolute and uncontrollable in his Estates, the other subject to the great Council of Poland. If any difference grow between them, Delegates appointed by the King, but taking a new Oath to do equal justice, either at Mariemberg or Elbing, do compound the business: who together with some others of the Duke's nomination, receive all Appeals, in which the Duke is interessed as one of the parties.  
The Revenues of this Dukedom are thought to be 120000 Ducats yearly.  
The Arms thereof are Argent, an Eagle Vert, Membered and Crowned Or, languid Gules.   

10 POLAND.  
POLAND properly and specially so called, is bounded on the East with Massovia, Podlassia, and Lituania; on the West with Silesia, and the Marquisate of Brandenburg; on the North with Prussia, and on the South with the Sarmatian or Carpathian Mountains, which divide it from Hungary. It is in length 480 Italian miles, 300 of the same miles in breadth; and took this name (as afore is said) from the word Pole, signifying as much as plain; the Country being plain and level, little swelled with hills.  
The Air hereof is pure and healthy, but sharp and cold; the Country plain, shaded with thick dark woods, parts of the Hercynian, full of wild beasts for hunting, and of Bees for honey, which they have here in great abundance: together with such plenty of grain, but of Rye especially, by reason of the continual breaking up of new grounds gained out of the Forests, that it may be called the Granary or Storehouse of the Western parts of Europe; sent down the Wixel unto Dantzick, and thence transported by the Merchant into other Countries, according to their several wants.  
The Character of the people we have had before; adding now only that in matters of war they are stout and resolute; so forwards in giving the charge and pursuit of the enemy, that John Vasi●wich the Great Duke of Moscovie, comparing them with the Soldiers of his own Dominions, was wont to say, that the Moscovites wanted a spur to drive them forwards; and the Polanders had need of a bridle to hold them back. Their language is the Sclavonian tongue; most generally spoken also in the rest of the Provinces, but with some difference in the dialect, or pronunciation.  
It is divided commonly into two parts, the Greater and the Lesser Poland. The Greater lying wholly on the Western side of the Wixel, and so accounted anciently as part of Germany, contains 9 divisions, under the jurisdiction of the 9 Palatines of 1 Posna, 2 Kalisch, 3 Siradia, 4 Lancitia, 5 Vratislaw, 6 Brestus, 7 Rava, 8 Ploczko, and 9 Dobrzin: each of them so called from some Town of note. The chief whereof, and of the rest contained in them, are 1 Posna, a Bishops See, and the principal of the Greater Poland, seated amongst hills on the River Warta; built of freestone, with very large Suburbs beyond the River: but much subject unto inundations, which add much strength unto the place: of great resort by reason of the Marts or Fairs holden twice a year. 2 Koscien, situate amongst Marshes and ●ortified with a double wall. 3 Ostresow, bordering on Silesia, begirt with woods. 4 Guesna, the ancientest town of Poland, founded by Lechus their first Prince, the seat of him and his successors till removed to Cracow, situate in Kalisch, and by old prescription, the first place for the inauguration of the Kings of Pole: in regard that here Prince Bo●●slaus the first King received the Regal Diadem at the hands of Otho the third. The town well-walled, and the See of the Archbishop, who is the Primate of the kingdom, by ancient privilege the Pope's Legate for all Sarmatia Europaea, and in the absence of the King or interregnums the Vicar General of the kingdom, having power to summon the Diets, to conclude and publish their Decrees. 5 Petrocow, a walled Town, in the Palatinate or division of Siradia, situate in a moorish soil; the place in former times of the General Diets, since removed to Warsaw. 6 Viadislaw on the Wixel or Vistulae, a Bishops See. 7 Bedost, a walled Town on the Bard, a navigable River, conveying the Merchandise of these parts into the Vistula. 8 Kruswick in Bresty, built of wood, standing on a great Lake named Gopla in the Castle whereof Popielus the second Duke of Poland, was after a strange manner devoured with Rats, swarming out of the Lake. 9 Ploczko, upon the Vistula, a walled Town, and a Bishops See, with a Castle to it; and 10 Mlawa, bordering on the Dukedom of Prussia.  
The LESSER Poland lying on the South of the Greater, and divided by the River Wixel, comprehendeth only three divisions, under the Government of the Palatines of Craco●, 2 Sendomir, and Lublin. Principal Cities of the which are 1 Craco●, upon the Wixel, (called in Latin Cracovia) a Bishops See, the chief of all the kingdom, and the seat of the Prince, and the Sepulture of the former Kings. By Ptolemie called Carodunum; fortified with a double wall (of the old fashion) a deep ditch, the Castle of Vanel situate on the top of an high rock; and beautified with an University● or general study of good Arts and Sciences. The buildings 〈◊〉 more fair than elsewhere in Poland, of free stone, and four stories high, but for the most part covered with Shingles, or tiles of wood: in the midst a large marketplace of form quadrangular; and in the middle of that the Common-council house, about which are many shops of Merchants. On one side of it standeth the Cathedral Church; and on the East-side of the City, the Palace Royal, high seated on an hill over looking both the Town and Country, fair and well built, of form somewhat near a Quadrangle; but lying open to the South without any buildings above the wall; affording thereby to the Gallery, being on the North side of the Castle the more excellent prospect. 2 Lelow, a walled town with a Castle, on the River Bialo. 3 Sendomir, a walled town with a Castle also, seated on a hill, under which the Vistula or Wixel. 4 Wislicza, a walled town amongst Marshes, encompassed with the River Nid. 5 Lublin, a walled town, but more strongly fortified by the marshes and wates, with which environed: remarkable for three yearly Marts, drawing hither Merchants from most parts adjoining, as also Moscovites, Armenians, Turks, and Grecians: the Jews, inhabiting the greatest part of the suburbs, have here their Synagogue; making the Town, especially at time of those Marts, a medley of all Nations and Religions. 6 Casimir, on the Wixel, so named from the founder of it, a King of Poland.  
The old Inhabitants of this country, were the Arii, Helverone, Elysii, and the Naharvali, parts of the Suevi Lygii spoken of by Tacitus; all of them lying on the Dutch side of the Wixel, by consequence, within the bounds of the ancient Germany: the people of all the rest of the Provinces before described, being of the Sarmatian race, next neighbours to the Germans, and not much unlike them in persons, customs, or conditions. But these dispersed and scattered Nations of Sarmatia Europaea, being united in the common name of Sclaves, part of them settled in that part which we now call Poland, at that time reckoned and accounted of as a part of Germany. The time of their first coming hither, and the manner of their government when first settled here, is not very well known. But for the first it is most certain, that it was some time, and that not long after the death of Mauritius the Eastern Emperor: and for the next it is as certain, that on the coming of Lechus, a Croatian, who fled his country for a murder, with his brother Zechius, they settled into a more constant form of Government, then before they did. For Lechus seeing his brother's good success in Bohemia, where the Sclaves received him for their Prince; passed into Poland, the next Province, and was as cheerfully received by the Sclaves thereof: who looked upon him as a Prince of their own extraction, and without quarrel or competition submitted themselves to his commands, anno 650. or thereabouts. Of this there is good constat amongst our Authors. But neither the names or number of his successors do occur in story, till the time of Crocus, the founder of Cracovia, the chief City of Poland, and the Legislator of this people. After this the succession of their Princes and the success of their affairs, becomes more certain: the Estate hereof being much improved, by the conquest of many Sarmatian countries, all which together constitute and make up the kingdom of Poland, so called from this predominating and prevailing Province. The sum of their affairs is this. The posterity of Cro●us failing in Popielus the second, Piastus is elected Duke, the Princes from that time forwards, becoming Elective, but always with respect to the next of blood. In the time of Mi●cislaus son of Nemomystus they received the Gospel, anno 963. Boleslaus the son of Miecislaus, was the first who had the title of King conferred upon him by the Emperor Otho the third, about the year 1001. relinquished by Vladislaus the first, and not resumed again till the time of Primislaus, Duke of Posna, anno 1300. after which perpetual. In the person of this Primislaus, Pemerella is united to the state of Poland, anno 1295. in that of Jagello, or Vladislaus the fifth, the great Dukedom of Lituania; incorporated into this body as a Member of it, in the time of Sigismond Augustus. By Vladislaus the sixth, son of Jagello, Podolia and Russia Nigra, are also added; by Sigismond the first Prussia, and Massovia; Podlassia by Sigismond Augustus, who also took Volhinia out of Lituania: by Stephen, the actual possession of the greatest part of Livonia; by Sigismond the third a title to the Crown of Sweden. The Princes follow in this Order.  

DUKES and KINGS of POLAND.  
A. Ch.  
649 1 Lechus of Croatia the first Duke; whose posterity failing, twelve Palatines were chosen to direct affairs, and the state became Aristocratical.  
2 Crocus, the Legislator of Poland.  
3 Lechus II. son of Crocus.  
4 Venda the daughter of Crocus, and sister of Lectius the second.  
5 Lescus the first.  
6 Lescus II.  
7 Lescus III. contemporary with Charles the great.  
8 Popielus son of Lescus the third.  
9 Popielus II. devoured in most horrid manner by rats and mice, together with his wife and children, the last of the posterity or house of Crocus.  
800 10 Piastus the first Duke elected.  
11 Zemovitus son of Piastus.  
12 Lescus IV. son of Zemovitus.  
13 Nemomyslus son of Lescus the fourth.  
14 Miecislaus son of Nemomyslus, the first Christian Prince of the Polonians, founded the Bishoprics of Cracow and Guesna.  
1000 15 Boleslaus son of Miecislaus the first, who had the title of King conferred on him by Otho the third.  
1025 16 Miecislaus II. son of Boleslaus.  
1041 17 Casimir son of Miecislaus.  
1059 18 Boleslaus II. son of Casmir, deposed and died an Exile in Hungary.  
1082 19 Vladislaus brother of Boleslaus, the second, abandoned the title of King only and used that of Prince or Duke.  
1003 20 Boleslaus III. son of Vladislaus.  
1140 21 Vladislaus II. son of Boleslaus the third, outed by his Brethren, and at last estated in Silesia; united formerly to Poland from the time of Lechus.  
1146 22 Boleslaus IV. brother of Vladislaus the second.  
1174 23 Miecislaus III. brother of Boleslaus and Vladislaus, deposed by his brother Casimir.  
1178 24 Casimir II. brother of the three last Princes.  
1195 25 Lescus V. son of Casimir the second deposed by Miecislaus the third.  
1203 26 Vladislaus III. son of Miecislaus the third deposed by Lescus the fifth; who again seized on the Estate.  
1243 27 Boleslaus V. surnamed Pudicus.  
1280 28 Lescus VI surnamed Niger, the adopted son of Boleslaus and his Cousin German once removed; after whose death, anno 1289. the estate being distracted into many fations, was for some time without a Prince: settled at last on  
1295 29 Primislaus surnamed Postbumus, who again assumed the name of King, continued ever since by his successors.  
1296 30 Vladislaus surnamed Locticus, brother of Lescus Niger, outed by Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, anno 1300. after whose death, anno 1306. he resumed the estate.  
1333 31 Casimir III. surnamed the Great, son of Vladislaus the fourth, the first establisher of the kingdom, after all those troublesd, y without issue.  
1371 32 Lewis king of Hungary son of Charles King of Hungary by Elizabeth the sister of Casimir.  
1383 33 Heduigis the youngest daughter of Lewis, her elder sister Mary succeeding in the Realm of Hungary, chosen Queen of Poland, married to Jagello Duke of Lituania, Christened and called Vladislaus the fifth.  
1386 34 Valdislaus V. Duke of Lituania, elected King upon his marriage with Queen Heduigis.  
1435 35 Vladislaus VI son of Jagello, or Vladislaus the fifth, by Sephia daughter of the Duke of Kiovia. He was King of Hungary also, slain at the battle of Varna by Amurath the second King of the Turks without issue.  
1447 36 Casimir IV. brother of Vladislaus, first brought the Knights of Prussia, under his command; Knight of the order of Garter.  
1493 37 John Albert the second son of Casimir, his elder Brother Vladislaus being pretermitted on his accepting of the Crowns of Hungary and Bohemia.  
1502 38 Alexander the third son of Casimir.  
1507 39 Sigismond the fourth son of Casimir his elder Brethren dying without issue; suppressed the Order of the Dutch Knights in Prussia; and added part thereof unto his estate.  
1548 40 Sigismond II. surnamed Augustus the last of the male issue of Jagello.  
1574 41 Henry Duke of Anjou, son of Henry the second French King, chosen on the death of Sigismond Augustus, the only Stranger to the blood in all this Catalogue. On the death of his brother Charles the ninth, he departed secretly into France, where he succeeded by the name of Henry the third.  
1579 42 Stephen Bathor Vaivod of Transylvania, having married Anne sister of Sigismond the second, is elected King; he united Livonia to the Crown, and had a great hand upon the Moscovite.  
1587. 43 Sigismond III. son of John King of Swethland and Catharine his wife another of the sisters of Sigismond the second King of Poland and Sweden. He valiautly opposed Osman the Great Turk invading his Dominions with an Army 300000.  
1633 44 Vladislaus VII. eldest son of Sigismond the third; after whose death the kingdom was extremely embroiled by factions, especially by the mutinous and seditious Cosaques; not fully settled by the election of  
1648 45 Casimir V. Brother of Vladislaus the seventh now king of Poland, anno 1648.   
The Government of this kingdom is nothing less than Monarchical. For though the first Duke's hereof were absolute Princes, and ruled after a despotical manner; having power not only of the estates of their subjects, but of life and death, without formalities of Law: yet when they once became elective, they lost much of that power, which decayed so by little and little, that at the last the King is counted little better than a Royal shadow: Stat magni nominis umbra, in the Poet's language. A diminution which began first in the times of Lewis of Hungary, and Jagello of Lituania, who to gain the succession to the kingdom contrary to Law, the one for his daughter, the other for his son, departed with many of their Royalties and Prerogatives to buy the voices of the Nobility. Since which time the Nobility in all their elections have so limited and restrained the King's authority, and enlarged their own: that without their consent in Counsel, he may neither make war nor treat of peace, nor impose taxes, nor alienate any of his Demeanes: nor do any thing of importance which concerns the Public: in so much as Boterus a great Statesman doth expressly say, that the Government of Poland doth rather seem an Aristoratie than a Monarchy, a Commonwealth rather than a Kingdom. Besides the King not only takes a solemn Oath at his Coronation to confirm all the rights and Privileges, which have been granted to the Subject by his Predecessors: but adds this clause, quod si Sacramentum meum violavero, incolae Regni nullam nobis obedientiam praestare tenebuntur, that if he violate this Oath, his Subjects shall not be obliged to yield him any obedience. Which as Bodinus well observeth, doth rather savour of the condition of a Prince of the Senate, then of the Majesty of a King; respected accordingly by the great ones, who look not on him as their King, but their elder Brother, (or perhaps not that) and reckon his Decrees but of three days lasting. Which notwithstanding the King once chosen and enthroned, hath sole power in many things, without consulting with the Senate, as viz. in assembling Diets, choosing the secular Counsellors, disposing absolutely of his Vassals, and the Revenues of the Crown to what use he pleaseth; being ●ole Judge of the Nobility in Criminal causes; which is a strong bridle to rain them in with. By which, and either uniting himself unto the Clergy, or the well-forming of his party amongst the Nobility, he may do many things not allowable in strictness of Law: the power and influence which he hath in the public Government, being proportionable to the strength of his wit and Brain.  
And here it is to be observed, that none but the Clergy and Nobility have any suffrage in the election of the King: that is to say, the 26 Palatines, and 60 Chastellans, with the four Marshals, and some others of the principal Officers of State, in behalf of the Nobility; and the Archbishops and Bishops in the name of the Clergy: but of the Commons none at all. Which is the reason why there is so much care taken to preserve the privileges of the two first Orders; without obtaining any immuties for relief of the third: most miserably oppressed on all sides, rather as Bondmen than Tenants in respect of their Lords, and not so much subjects, as plain slaves in regard of the King: whereof somewhat hath before been noted. Nor are the common people excluded only out of these elections, but have no place nor vote in the Counsel of State, or in any of the General Diets: the first consisting only of the Prelates, Palatines, Chastellans, and principal Officers, spoken of before, the nominating of which pertaineth to the King alone, the other aggregated of all persons of those several Orders, and the Delegates of each Province and principal City sent thither for the rest of the Nobility, whom they represent. Yet notwithstanding this exclusion of the Commons from this Common-counsel, they there concludes of all matters of public interest, not properly determinable by the great Counsel or Coun●ell of State; in which perhaps (especially in the case of taxes) the Commons may be more concerned than any other.  
The Forces of this Kingdom or Commonwealth relate unto Land-service only. For though they have a large Sea coast upon the Baltic; yet the Danes, Swedes, and Hanse-townes, having got the start of them, keep them from doing much at Sea. And for Land-forces they consist of Horse especially, whereof they are able to raise eightscore thousand, (that is to say, 100000 out of Poland, and 60 or 70000 out of Lituania: of which one half at least are thought to be fit for action. And this seems probable enough in regard of those great bodies of Horse, which Stephen and Sigismond the third had against the Mo●covite; whereof the one had 40000 and the other 30000 (besides draught horses, very well appointed. But for their Foot, they are not at so good a pass, their Infantry being for the most part Germans or Hungarians; whom they hire for money; of which two Nations king Stephen, in his enterprise upon Livonia, had no less than 16000 to convey his Ordinance. Upon confidence of this great number of Horse, and their readiness to serve upon all occasions, the Polanders bear themselves so high, that they neither fear the power of a foreign Enemy, nor regard the fortifying of their Towns, or the building of Fortresses on their Frontiers: boasting that they are able to defend their country, without such helps, against any Nation whatsoever, and trusting more to a Castle of bones, (as was courageously said by Savage an English Gentleman) then to a Castle of stones. And for the raising of these Horse, the Gentlemen of the Country are bound by their tenure, (like the Turks Timariot) not only to serve in person for defence of the Realm, but to maintain a certain number of Horse in continual readiness; especially in those parts which lie next the Tartar, where their numbers are exceeding great, and with whom many times they join to afflict and harasse their own country, though in pay against them. Of these some serve in the manner of our men of arms, some like unto our light horse, others like the Tartars. And these they call commonly by the name of Cosacques (or Adventurers): a race of men trained up to steal, waist and depopulate, wheresoever they come; having little but their swords to live by; a murderous and wicked people, chiefly in their drunkenness, and that not only towards strangers, but their natural Countrymen. The cause of that sedition which for some years past, hath more depopulated and distracted that flourishing kingdom, than all the Armies of the Turks.  
As for the Revenues of this king, they are computed at 600000 Crowns per annum, drawn chiefly out of Salt and some Mines of Silver: the profits arising from the Demesnes of the Crown, being for the most part given away in pensions and gratuities, to the Palatines, Chastellans, and other great men of the Realm, to make them the more pliant to his desires. Most of which sum is put up yearly in his Coffers, or expended in the purchase of estates for his younger sons; his daughters being married at the public charge, and the expenses of his household defrayed by the Lituanians and most part of Poland, for the time that he remains amongst them. Nor do the wars at any time exhaust his Treasure, in which case by decree of the Di●ts he is enabled to lay impositions and taxes upon the people, levied in the way of Excise, or upon their lands, which do amount to such a sum, that by means hereof king Stephen maintained war three years against the Moscovite, without expending any thing of his own Revenue.  
Chief Orders of Knighthood in this kingdom, are  
1 The Marian or Dutch Knights, instituted under the walls of Acon or Ptolemais in the Holy land; in a Church whereof dedicated to the blessed Virgin, their Order was first allowed; from thence called Equites Mariani. The institution was in the year 1190. The first great Master, Henry Walpot. The Christians being beaten out of Syria, they first removed to Venice, and from thence to Marpurg in Hassia, where and in some other parts of Germany, they were endowed with fair Revenues, from which named Equites Teutonici, or the Dutch Knights sent into Prussia by the Emperor Frederick the second, anno 1239. or called, in as some say, by the Moscovite against the Prussians; they fixed their seat at Mariemberg, under Sigefride, the second Great Master, anno 1340. or thereabouts. In the time of Ludovicus the 18 Great Master they were forced to submit to Casimir the fourth of Poland, anno 1450. the occasion of the long war betwixt them and the Polanders, continuing all the time of Albert of Brandenbourg, the 24 and last Great Master in this Country, who surrendered his order (as before said) to Sigismond the first by whom he was created the first Duke of Prussia. Such of the Knights as disrelished this action, retired into Germany, where they chose one Walter Croneberg master of the Order: the title afterwards conferred upon Maximilian one of the younger sons of Maxmilian the second; but the Order sensibly decaying, and all this time of little estimation in the world.  
2 Of the Portylaine, or Sword-bearers (Ensiferi in Latin) confirmed by Pope Innocent the third, by whom sent into Livonia to defend the Preachers of the Gospel against the Infidels, at the first conversion of that country. Being too weak to effect that business, they united themselves with the Dutch Knights by the Pope's authority; and in stead of Knights of the sword, were called Knights of the Cross. Separated from it in the time of Vnivus their Great Master, anno 1541. the Dutch Knights being then dispossessed of Prussia, and these inclining wholly to the opinions of Luther, they a while subsisted of themselves; what became of them afterwards, and how the Order was extinguished, hath been shown already in Livonia.  
The Arms of this kingdom are quarterly, 1 Gules, an Eagle Argent, crowned and Armed, Or, for the Realm of Poland; and 2 Gules, a Chevalier armed Cap a pea, advancing his sword Argent, mounted on a barbed Courser of the second for the Dukedom of Lituania.  
There are in the whole Realm of Poland. 

Of the Romish Church Archbishops 3. Bishops 19  
Of the Greek Church Archbishops 2. Bishops 6.   Universities 4. viz. 

Cracow  
Vilna  
Dantzick.  
Regimont.     
And so much for POLAND.   

THE CARPATHIAN MOUNTAINS.  
IN our way from Poland unto Hungary (whither now we go) we must of necessity pass over the CARPATHIAN MOUNTAINS, the ancient boundary of Sarmatia Europaea, from the rest of Europe. A long and craggy ledge of hills, which beginning near the City of Presburg, and the borders of Austria, pass on in a continual course till they come to the very Euxine Sea, and by that means not only divide Hungary from Poland specially so called; but parting Transylvania and Moldavia two Dacian Regions, from Russia Nigra, and Podolia, Provinces of the Polonian Kingdom. By Ptolemie in his second Book, they are called Montes Sarmatici (Sarmaticae Rupes by Solinus) because disterminating the Sarmatian Nations (who possessed the mos part of it) from Germany, and the more Southern parts of Europe: and in his third book, by one name Carpates, or Mons Carpatus, so called (as some think from) the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying Fruit, from the fruitfulness of it, compared with other Mountains in those Northern Countries. At the present known by divers names, according to the Provinces and people which it passeth by. By the Dutch generally called Wurtzgarten, (or a Garden of Herbs) which alludeth to the name of Carpatus: by the Hungars, Tarchzall. Betwixt Moravia and Hungaria where it is at the highest, it is called in the Sclavonian tongue, by the name of Tatri; in the Germane Schneberg: where it parteth Transylavania from Russia Nigra, the Rosses call it Biescid; and the Dutch men, Crapack. A chain of hills of more length than fame: not much observable in story but for the shutting up the Hungari, Sclaves, and others of those Northern Nations, which afterward invaded the Roman Provinces; nor of much notice at the present, but for giving an Original to many of the principal Rivers, which water the Countries lying on both sides of it. And therefore having nothing more to detain us here, we will pass them over, and descend into the Plains of Hungary,  

OF HUNGARY.  
HUNGARY is bounded on the East with Transylvania, and Walachia; on the West with Stiria, Austria, and Moravia; on the North with the Carpathian Mountains which divide it from Poland; and on the South with Sclavonia, and some part of Dacia. Extended in length from Presburg along the Danow, to the borders of Transylvania, for the space of 300 English miles, and 190 of the same miles in breadth. The reason of the name we shall have anon  
It lieth in the Northern temperate Zone, betwixt the middle Parallels of the 7. and 9 Climates, so that the longest Summers day in the Southern parts, is but 15 hours and an half, and not above 16 hours in the parts most North: taking up all that tract of ground on the North side of Danubius possessed by the jazyges Metanasiae, a Sarmatian people, and part also of Panonnia Superior, and Pannonia Inferior, both on the South of that River.  
But being it passeth generally under the name of Pannonia, we are to know that the Romans having made themselves Masters of all Pannonia, divided it into four Provinces, part of the Diocese of Illyri●um Occidentale: that is to say, Pannonia Superior, bordering on Noricum, and containing part of the Higher Austria, and the most Western parts of the present Hungary, on the South side of the Danow. 2 Pannonia Inferior, containing the Eastern parts of Hungary on the same side of the River. 3 Valeria, anciently part of Pannonia Superior, comprehending Stiria or Stiermark in the Archdukedome of Austria. And 4 Savia, so called of the River Savus, anciently part of Pannonia Inferior, now called Windeschland, one of the Provinces or Subdivisions of Sclavonia. But the name of Pannonia falling with the Roman Empire, and this Country being fallen into the hands of other Masters, it took a new name from the Nations who possessed themselves of it, and was called Hungaria, quasi Hunni-Avaria, by a mixed name made of the Hunni and Avares, two Scythian Nations, who either successively or conjunctly were possessed thereof; or from the Hungari, another race of Scythians, mentioned by Jornandes in his Book De Rebus Geticis, drawn into this Country by the Emperor Arnulph to aid him in his war against Suantobogius King of the Moravians. This last I look on as most probable; the first as more probable than that of Aventine and others of our later Writers; who finding a poor Province in the most North-east point of the Russian Empire called Jugra; (and by them Jugaria) would have the name of Hungary to be thence derived.  
The people are strong of body, and rude of behaviour, respecting neither the liberal Arts, nor mechanic Trades. The greatest aspersion is the name of a coward, which cannot be wiped off without the kill of a Turk; after which they are privileged to wear a feather, and by the number of their feathers to show how many Turks they have slain in battle. They desire wars, and like no trade better, being naturally slothful (like the Irish) and therefore best approve of that course of life, whereby they may rather live upon other men's labour, then take pains for their living. Extremely covetous; yet having rather desire then art to enrich themselves, permitting the Dutch to engross all their trading, and manage such commodities as the Country yieldeth: which is the cause (seconded by the oppressions of the Turk and the Austrian Princes under whom they are) that none of them rise to any considerable wealth. And for such as have estates in land they grow every day more poor than others. For though the Females be excluded from inheriting their father's possessions (to whom they give no portion but new clothes on the wedding day) yet being the sons do equally inherit the Estate (as such who hold in gavelkind do here in England) it must needs be that by so many divisions and subdivisions, the greatest patrimony that is, will be brought to nothing. Both Sexes in the way of their education are enured to hardness, not suffered to lie in beds till the night of their marriage.  
The Christian faith was first planted here in the time of Stephen, surnamed the Saint, the first King of this Country, invited thereunto by the special means and procurement of the Emperor Henry the 2. giving him upon that condition his sister Gisla in marriage; and through the preaching and industry of Albert Archbishop of Prague, anno 1016. or thereabouts. Since which time Christianity hath continued here without interruption, (defended gallantly and courageously against the Turks) but broken into fractions and subdivisions among themselves, some pertinaciously adhering to the Church of Rome, some following the doctrine of Luther, others that of Calvin; and some, new fancies and opinions disavowed by all the rest: yet all these different parties do agree in this to punish adultery and fornication with no less a punishment then death: the father forcing his daughter, the husband his wife, and the brother his sisters to the place of their Execution.  
The language generally here spoken of is a kind of Sclavonian, differing in dialect from the P●les: but in the parts adjoining to Germany, the Dutch is spoken; as the old jazygian is betwixt Danubius and Tibiscus, the ancient seat of the jazyges Metanastae.  
The soil is wonderful fruitful, yielding corn and fruits in great abundance; the grass in some places (as in the Isle of Comara) exceeding the height of a man: which doth breed such a number of cattle, that this Country alone, is thought to be able to feed all Europe with flesh. They yearly send into Germany and Sclavonia, 80000 Oxen: they have Dear, Partridge, Pheasant in such superfluity that any man that will may kill them; which in other places is utterly prohibited, these creatures being reserved as game for Gentlemen. For at that great insurrection of the Boors in Germany (before the end of which, 50000 of them were slain in fight) their chief demands were, that they might choose 〈…〉 2 That they might pay no tithes but of corn. 3 That they might be free from the power of 〈◊〉. 4 That wood, timber, and fuel might be common. 5 And especially, That they might hunt and hauk in all times and places. The other commodities of the Country are 〈◊〉 Silver, (whereof they have some very rich veins; as also of Tin, Led, Iron,) good store of Fish, Copper, Wine, this last as good as that of Candie.  
The worthiest Scholar that ever this Kingdom produced, was S. Hierome, a worthy Father of the Latin Church▪ born in Stridon. The most worthy of all their Soldiers, were Johannes Huniades, who so valia thy resisted the incursions of the Turks, and slew of them 50000 at the battle at Maxon. And 2. Mathias Corvinus, his son, afterward King of Hungary, of whom thus Adrian out of a Poet: 
— Patriae decus, unica stirpis  
Gloria, Pannonicae caedis fortissimus ult●r.  
His Country's pride, the glory of his race,  
Revenger of th' Hungarians late disgrace.   
The principal Rivers are 1 Danubius, spoken of before, when we were in Germany. 2 Savus, which rising in Carniola; 3 Dravus, which rising in Carinthia; and 4 Tibiscus, which rising in the Carpathian Mountains, pay their tribute to Danubius: of which Tibiscus the Hungarians use to say, that two parts are water and the third fish. Besides which and some others of inferior note, there is the famous Lake called Balaton (by the Dutch Platses) 40 Italian miles in length▪ but of breadth unequal: in some places being ten miles broad, and in some but three. There be also many medicinal waters, and more hot Baths then any one Country hath in Europe: some waters also of a strange Nature: whereof some falling on the ground is turned to stone; others (about the Town of Smolnice) which falling into Ditches make a kind of mud, out of which tried and melted they make very good Copper; and some again which flow in winter, and freeze in Summer; and near unto Bis●●ice or Mensol, a spring or fountain out of which cometh a green water, whereof they make Solder for their Gold.  
Principal Mountains of this Country are 1 Carpatus, the Sarmatian or Carpathian Mountains spoken of before. 2 Matzan, near the City Agria, covered with rich ulns. 3 E●dol, omnium amplissimus, the largest of the three, saith the Atlas minor. Which words if true, must needs be understood of the height of this Mountain, but neither of the length or breadth; in both which without question it comes short of Carpatus.  
The Country is commonly divided into the Upper Hungary, and the Lower; the Upper lying on the North of the River Danow, out of the bounds and territories of the Roman Empire: the Lower lying on the South of that River, and comprehending all Pannonia Inferior, and part of Superior, two Roman Provinces. The Upper again subdivided (before the coming in of the Turks) into 32 Counties or Juridical resorts, that is to say, 24 on the West side of Tibiscus (or the Tisefeu) and 8 on the East side of it: the Lower (at the same time) into 18 only: of which 10 were betwixt the Danow and the River Dravus: and the other six betwixt the Danow and the Savus. But this Division and the Subdivisions depending on it, being since the coming in of the Turks almost out of use; we will now look upon it as it stands divided at the present betwixt the Emperor as King of Hungary, by a mixed title of descent and election; and the Great Turk as Lord of the most part of it by Arms and conquest, two parts of three at least being forced into his possession.  
Chief places in the Emperor's part, are 1 Sabaria, anciently the Metropolis of Pannonia Superior; the birthplace of St. Martin Bishop of Tours; now of less account; by the Hungarians called Kimarorubath. Others conceive it to be that which the Dutch call Leibnits. 2 Stridon, the Sidron of Ptolemie, in the confines of Hungary and Dalmatia, by the common people called Strigman. A town of good repute till destroyed by the Goths, but after made of more esteem by the birth of St. Hierom, one of the four chief Fathers of the Latin Church; and for all parts of humane learning, nothing inferior to the best of the Grecian Sages. 3 Agria, a Bishops See; 4 Nitri, a Bishops See also on the River Boch; 5 Sopran (Sopronium in Latin) on the borders of Austria. 6 Komara, a strong piece in an Island of the same name, made by the Circling of the Danow: ofttimes attempted by the Turk, but in vain at all tinnes. 7 Presburg, on the edge of Austria also, but on the North side of the river, the Carnuntum of Antoninas: but by the modern Latins called Posonium: seated in a pleasant healthful country on the River Lyet, whose waters the Danow there receiveth, in the suburbs whereof on the top of an high Mountain standeth a goodly Castle, the ordinary residence of the Emperors as Kings of Hungary. For though it be a little City, and not very beautiful, yet being safe by the neighbourhood of Austria, it hath been made the Metropolis of this kingdom, since the loss of Buda. Before the walls hereof died Count Dampierri, one of the chief Commanders of Ferdinand the second, in the wars of Hungary and Bohemia. 8 Gran, by the Latines called Strigonium, took by the Turks, anno 1534. and lost again, anno 1595. at what time Sir Thomas Arundel of Wardour Castle in Wiltshire, carried himself so gallantly by forcing the Water-tower, and taking thence with his own hands the Turkish Banner, that the Emperor Rodulphus created him a Count of the Empire, and King James afterwards ma●● him Lord Arundel of Wordour. It is seated on the Danow, but opposite to the mouth of the Cranmer, which arising in the Upper Hungary doth there end its courses, hence the name of Gran: honoured also, of long time, with the See of an Archbishop, who is the Primate of the kingdom. 9 〈◊〉, on the meeting of the Danow with the River Rab, coming out of the Lower Hungary, whence the modern Dutch name; by Antonine called Arabon, by the French Jovarine, by our present Latinisis Jaurinum. Memorable heretofore for being the boundary of the two Pannonia's, Interior, and Superior, hereabouts divided: of late most principally for a strong fortress against the Turks, by whom once taken anno 1594. but not long after again recovered by the industry of Monseiur●de Vandre-Court a French Gentleman. 10. Newsol, or Newhensel, a strong town in the higher Hungary, not far from the spring head of the River Gran, which in the year 1621. proved fatal to that great Commander the Count of Bucqu●y, who at the siege hereof (the Town being then in rebellion against Ferdinand the second Emperor and King of Hungary) lost his life. For going privately to view some places of advantage for a general assault, he fell into an Ambush of Hungarians, who suddenly set upon him, discomfitted his small party, killed first his horse under him, and at last himself, having in that skirmish received sixteen wounds. Slain with him at the same time also Torquato an Italian Prince, Count Verdugo a Spanish Earl, and one of the Gouragas of the house of Mantua. 11 Altenbourg, 12 Tockay, both of them very strong by nature, as 13 Castellnovo is by the helps of Art.  
Places of most importance in the Turks possession, are 1 Buda, by the Dutch called Hoffen, supposed by some to be the Curta of Ptolemie, by others the Abrincum of Antoninus; and to have taken the name of Buda, either from Buda the brother of Attila, said to be the refounder of it; or from the Budini a Scythian people mentioned in Herodotus. Unevenly seated amongst hills, on the southern shore of the Danow, but in the most fruitful part of all the Country; exceedingly well fortified, adorned with many buildings both private and public; and furnished with some medicinal Baths, which owe much of their pomp and sumptuousness to their new Masters the Turks, who took it from the Christians August 20. anno 1526. Solyman the Magnificent then present at the taking of it. Before that time the Seat Royal of the Kings of Hungary, and the chief City of the Kingdom; as now the seat of the chief Bassa or Lord Lieutenant for the Grand Signeur. 2 Alba Regalis, by the Dutch called Stul-Weisenburg, betwixt the Danow and the Dravus, strongly but unwholesomely seated in the midst of an inaccessible marish joined to the firm land by three broad Causeys blocked up at the ends with three great Bulwarks; but for all the strong situation of it taken by the Turks, an. 1543. before that time, the usual place both for the Coronation and interment of the Kings of Hungary, 3 Volve, on the Danow, taken in the same year also. 4 Fiefe-kirken, in Latin called Quinque Ecclesiae, from five Churches in it; a Bishops See, conceived to be the Tentiburgium of Antoninus; took by the Turks, anno 1566. and giving them a great command on the River Dravus, upon which it is seated. 5 Sirmisch, betwixt the Danow and the Saw, or Savus, now noted for a vein of the best wines, but otherwise of no estimation at the present, though heretofore of most account in all this Province, the Metropolis (as I conceive) of Pannonia inferior; the seat of the Praefectus Praetorio Illyrici, before the division of the Empire, honoured with the personal residence of many of the Emperors, and made in those respects, the Stage of many great and memorable actions. For here Vetranio, or Bretanio as others call him, took on himself the Purple Robe, and was declared Emperor by the Illyrian soldiers, lying here in Garrison; here being deserted by his own soldiers, he submitted himself unto Constantius the son of Constantine the Great; here Gratian the Emperor son of Valentinian the first was born: and finally here was held a Council against Photinus, Bishop of this City, who held that CHRIST had no existence of God the Father, till he was conceived and born of the Virgin; which Tenent being contrary as well to that of the Arian as the Orthodox Prelates, was here condemned by both parties in the time of the said Constantius (who was there in person) an. 356. 6 Zigoth, a strong town, situate in a marish ground on the North side of the Dra, taken by Solyman the Magnificent, anno 1566. who there ended his days, 7 Keresture, nigh unto which anno 1596. Mahomet the third gave the Christians so great an overthrow, that if he had pursued his victory, it is thought that he had finished the conquest of Hungary. 8 Mursa, upon the confluence of the Dra and the Danow, as remarkable in the stories of elder times; as 9 Belgrade on the confluence of the Saw and the Danow, hath been in the later. This last a town of divers names, first called Taururum, or Taurunum, after Alba Graeca, by the Dutch accordingly Greichs Wessenburg, by the French and modern Latinists, Belgrade and Belgradum, from the beautiful situation of it, hemmed in upon the North with the Danow, on the East with the Saw; on the other sides defended with strong walls, deep ditches, and impregnable Ramparts; belonging anciently to the Despots of Servia, by whom consigned over to Sigismond King of Hungary, as best able to keep it, the Despots being satisfied with lands and territories of a better value. The Bulwark heretofore of Christendom against the Turks, who received before it many great and notable repulses, (of which the most memorable were those of Amurath the second and Mahomet surnamed the Great) taken at last to the great loss and shame of the Christian world, not succouring the defendants in convenient time, by Solyman the Magnificent, anno 1520. Then on the North side of the River in the upper Hungary, there is 10 Pesth, over against Buda, on the River Danow. 11 Vaccia, on the same River, a Bishops See. 12 Colocza, an Archbishops See, on the same River also. 13 Zegedin, on the West side of the River Tibiscus. 14 Temeswar, on the East of that River towards Transilvania, the ordinary residence of a Turkish Bassa. 15 Gyula, a strong Town on the borders of Transilvania, betrayed by Nicolas Keresken Governor hereof in the last year of Solyman, on promise of some great reward. But Selimus the son of Solyman caused him to be put into a barrel stuck full of nails, with the points turned inwards, and so to be tumbled up and down till he (most miserably) died: there being on the barrel this inscription written; viz. Here receive the reward of thy Avarice and treason, Gyula thou soldest for gold; if thou be not faithful to Maximilian thy natural Lord, neither wilt thou be true to me. 16 Singidon, on the South of Gyula, betwixt which and Belgrade are the fields of Maron, memorable for the slaughter of 50000 Turks slain here in battle, under the fortunate conduct of John Huniades.  
The first Inhabitants of this country on the North side of the Danow, and the West of the Tisefeu, or Tibiscus, were the jazyges Metanastae; and on the East fide of the Tisefeu, the Daci; known, but not conquered by the Romans: on the South of the Danow the Pannones (by some called the Poeones) subdivided into the Azuli, Latovici, Werciani, Jassit, Oseriates, and some others inhabiting the West parts thereof, or Pannonia Superior; and the Ercuneales', Breuci, Aravisci, and Scordisci dwelling in the Eastern parts, or Pannonia Inferior. First conquered by the Romans: anno V. C. 719. L. Cornificius, and Sext. Pompeius, being Consuls; but many times rebelling and not fully subdued, till 40 years after, the insurrection of Bato being then crushed by Augustus Caesar, and there by the whole Province settled in obedience: divided first into two parts or Provinces, Superior and Inferior; out of which Savia and Valeria were after taken, as before is noted. Under the Romans it continued till subdued by the Huns, a people not heard of in the time of the Roman greatness, unless we take them as some do for the Chuni of Ptolemie. But being those Chuni are placed by him betwixt the Bastarnae and the Roxolani, on the South-west of Borysthenes, I see not how to fit that dwelling unto the Huns: who were shut up within the Fens of Palus Maeotis: and by all the writers of those times accounted for a Nation not so much as heard of when they first set footing into Europe. Letting that pass therefore as an improbable and ill-grounded conjecture, certain it is that from the Fenn-countreys' of Asia on the other side of the Tanais, they came first into Europe: living in their own country a poor and miserable life, till God thought fit to make use of them as a scourge to chastise the Christians of the West, then grown luxurious and almost incorrigible by too much felicity; and to that end miraculously opened them a passage, never found before. For having neither mind nor meaning to invade the Roman Empire, which possibly they had not heard of; nor knowing how to clear themselves of that uncomfortable country in which they dwelled. it pleased the great disposer of all things, by following an Hart or Stag which they had in chase to show them a safe passage into Europe, through the Fens of Maeotis; which before they thought to be unpassable. The report made by those Hunters at their coming back of the rich and pleasant land which they had so fortunately discovered, invited the chief heads of their Clans, with all the several Rascalities depending on them, to flock into Europe: into which they fell so suddenly and unexpectedly, that they forced the Goths, then dwelling on the North side of the Ister, to fly over that River, and supplicate to the Emperor Valens for new habitations. This happened in the year 373. Athanaricus the second, or Ermanaricus (as Jornandes calls him) being then King of the Goths, and Balamir Captain of Huns. Fleshed with this victory Balamir or Balhember (as Sigibert calls him) takes the name of King, anno 386. or thereabouts: and following the course of the Ister towards this Pannonia, which he had an aim at; found a great Army raised on the other side of the River, of purpose to encounter with him: commanded by Detricus General for the Roman Empire, and Macrinus (or Matrinus) commander in chief of the Pannonians. Both Generals, presuming too much on the depth and wideness of the River, and knowing well that the Hunns had neither boat nor ship to pass them over, betook themselves unto their rest, with too much security. But the Hunns to the number of 100000 having crossed the River upon bladders, fell on the Quarters of the Romans, whom they slew like sheep. Macrinus after this fought two battles with them, in the first whereof he was victorious, there being lost on both sides about 30000 men, but in the second being slain, and his Army routed, the Huns possessed themselves of both Pannonias; buying this victory with the loss of 40000 men, in the year 401. Balamir being dead, Bleda and Attila his sons succeeded, anno 436▪ and Bleda dying also in the year 450. left Attila sole king of the Huns, that great scourge of the Christian world: who having first wasted Illyricum and Thrace, compelled the Emperor Theodosius the second, to buy his peace of him at the price of 6000 pound weight of gold, and an yearly tribute. Invited afterwards by Gensericus king of the Vandals in Afric to war upon the Goths of Spain, (out of which Country they had driven him) he forced his way through all the Nations betwixt him and Gaul; and beating down all the Towns and Fortresses on the River Rhine that side of the Roman Empire, entered that Province in the reign of the third Valentinian: divided at that time betwixt the Romans, French, Burgundians, and the Goths of Spain, discomfited by Aetius, and the kings of those Nations then ●n league against him, in that famous battle near Tholouse spoken of before (with the loss of 18000 of his men) he went back by the way of Italy, where he sacked Aquilcia, Milan, Vincontia, Pavia; and not without much difficulty was diverted from the spoil of Rome, by the intercession of Pope Leo: committing in all places such unspeakable cruelties, that he was always after called (as he styled himself) Malleus orbis & Flagellum dei. Returning home he picked a quarrel with Marcianus the Eastern Emperor, as if the tribute promised him by Theodosius had not been well paid. But being pacified for the present, and mindful of his former project upon the Goths, he resolved once again to try his fortune with that people, and was again defeated by them under the conduct of Thorismund, the third King of the Visigothes, or Goths of Spain, and so returned ingloriously to his country. Chaoked after with his own blood, violently breaking out at his nostrils, on his wedding night; he left Pannonia to his sons named Hernac, Aladurius, and Chaba: who disagreeing amongst themselves▪ about the kingdom, gave an advantage to the Goths, then possessed of Dacia; to make themselves masters of this also, scarce through warm in their new estates, when sent by Zeno the Emperor into Italy against Odoacer where they finally settled. After this time we hear no more of the Goths in Pannonia; or any where of the Huns at all, unless acting under the Avares, or joining with them in the name of Hunn-Avaria, as some think they did.  
The Country being thus left to the next Invader, was presently possessed by the Longoboards, said to be originally of Scandia, and there called Winnili, (and of the Winniloth in Scandia, Jornandes speaketh) afterwards ob long as barbas, Long●bardi. But concerning this last name, take along with you this old wife's tale recited, but not approved of by Paulus Diaconus. The Vandals warring upon the Winnili, went unto Goddan (he should rather have said Woden) to sue for the victory: which the Winnili hearing, wrought by countermine; and sent Gambata the mother of their King Aiou, on the like business to Frea Goddans wife. So it was, that Goddan had promised the Vandals, that they should be victorious, whom he saw first in the morning: whereupon Frea willing to please Gambata, and not loving, as it seemeth, the sight of men, gave order, that all the women of the Winnili, parting their hair, bringing one half over one cheek, the other over the other, and tying both under their chin, should appear betimes before the window the next morning. This they did, and she showing them to her husband, he demanded of her, Qui sunt isti Longobardi? Hence the occasion of the name. And like enough they might be called so from the length of their beards; though otherwise the whole tale be vain and foolish. Compelled by scarcity of victuals to seek new habitations, they seized first on the Island Rugia, and the adjacent Countries; settled about the time of Cornelius Tacitus in those parts of Germany, which now make up the Bishoprics of Meydburg and Halberstat. Afterwards finding that country too narrow f●r them, they left their dwellings there, and fell next upon some parts of Poland; next on this Pannonia: and at last having tarried in Pannonia 42 years or thereabouts, at the solicitation of Narses (provoked by many indignities from the Empress Sophia the wife of Justinus the second) anno 568. under the leading of their King Alboinus, they went into Italy, and there fixed their kingdom, at the end of 200 years overthrown by the power of Charles the Great, the most mighty Monarch of the West. Of their kings before their coming into this country, I shall only make mention of Lamissus, their third king, and of him this story. Agilmund the second King of the Lombard's, one morning went a hunting. As he was ●iding by a fishpond, he spied seven children sprawling for life, which one, as saith Pautus Diaconus, (it may be many harlots) had been delivered of, and most barbarously thrown into the water. The King amazed at this spectacle, put his boar-spear or hunting-pole among them. One of the children hand-fasted the spear, and the King softly drawing back his hand, wafted the child to the shore. This boy he named Lamissus, from Lama, which in their language signifieth a fishpond. He was in the King's Court carefully brought up, where there appeared in him such tokens of virtue and courage, that after the death of Agilmond, he was by the Lombard's chosen to succeed him. This Lamissus together with his predecessors, and successors, we find thus recorded.  

The LONGOBARDIAN KINGS.  
A. C.  
383 1 Aiou, 10  
393 2 Agilmond, 33  
426 3 Lawissus, 3  
429 4 Labe, vel, Lethe, 40  
469 5 Hildehoc, 4  
473 6 Godohoc, 12  
485 7 Dophon, vel, Claffo, 5  
490 8 Thamus, 10  
500 9 Vacon, 18  
518 10 Valcharius, 7  
525 11 Adoinus, who first brought the Langobards into Hungary, anno 1526.  
543 12 Alboinus, who in the year 568. by the solicitation of Narses went into Italy, and erected there the Longobardian Kingdom; which 206 years after was destroyed by the puissance of Charles the Great.   
The History of this people is epitomised by Du Bartas thus: 
The Lombard strong who was in Scowland nursed,  
On Rugeland and Livonia seized first.  
Then having well revenged on the Bulgarian  
The death of Agilmond; the bold Barbarian  
Surprised Poland: thence anon he presses  
In Danows streams to rinse his amber tresses.  
When he strait after had surrendered  
The double-named Ister's flowery bed,  
To scarre-faced Huns: he hunteth furiously  
The rest of Gauls from wealthy Insubrie.  
There reigns 200 years, triumphing so,  
That Royal Tesin might compare with Po:  
Which after fell in Frenchmens hands again,  
Won by the sword of worthy Charlemagne.   
The Longobards having thus left the Stage the Avares entered. Some say the Avarini of Ptolemie, a Sarmatian people, but most probably, (as Nicetas) a people of Scythia, inhabiting about Palus Maeotis. They first began to stir in the reign of Tiberius the 2. (driven by the Turks their next neighbours to pass further Westwards) and gave that Emperor's forces a great overthrow at the mouth of Danubius. Tiberius notwithstanding did somewhat quiet them: but he being dead they took heart again, and with great courage warred upon Mauritius, his next successor. Their King at that time called Caganus, we may English it Cham; as not being the proper name of any one, but the common Attribute of all their Chiefs. This Caganus made his first wars upon the Turks, which people were about that time first made known to the Inhabitants of Europe; and with the help of the remainder of the Huns, invaded and possessed Pannonia, vanquishing both the Emperor's Forces and the Goths and Gepidae, who had still kept some footing in it, and on the departure of the Lombard's were of no small power; the name of Goths being swallowed up in that of the Gepidae, though not quite extinct. After this blow, Mauritius raised a second war, but more with an intent to revenge himself on his own soldiers, which had formerly offended him, then with hope of prevailing against the enemy; Comentiolus, according to the Emperor's directions, betrayeth his Army, 12000 of them were slain, and the rest taken. Caganus an heroic and merciful Conqueror, offers to ransom them for 8 s. 6 d. a piece, (for so much was that nummus, or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which he demanded for them.) When the Emperor, as much loving his gold as hating his Soldiers, had denied that condition, he offered them all for one nummus, and after for half a one; but being also here unsatisfied, he put them all to the sword. For this cause the rest of his Soldiers not long after made Phocas one of the Centurion's Emperor; and he most barbarously stewed the Emperor in his own broth, putting him, his wife, friends, and children to the sword. After this we find mention of them in the time of Phocas and Heraclius, foraging Thrace to the very walls of Constantinople; afterwards settled in Pannonia, and part of Noricum, containing now the Upper Hungary, and some part of Austria, divided from the Boiarians by the River Ems. Possessed hereof till the time of Charles the Great, by whom after a war of eight years, they were utterly subdued and driven out of these parts, their Country being peopled with new Dutch Colonies, the remainders of them forced to betake themselves into Transylvania, or that part of Hungary which lieth beyond the river Tibiscus, where subject for a time to Suantobogius King of the Moravians, in whose overthrow by the Hungarians they were so broken, that their name was never after heard of.  
And so we come to the Hungarians, the last and principal Actors on the Stage of this Kingdom, the givers of the present name: before whose coming into this Country, it had no other name than that of Pannonia, for aught I can find, in any Authors of those times. A Scythian people, as the Huns, and Avares were, by Jornandes called the Hungari; first known in Europe by their acts in the time of the Emperor Arnulphus, when wand'ring in Sarmatia Europ●a without any certain abode, they were by him called into this Country against Suantobogius King of the Moravians before mentioned, from whom they took Transylvania, and so much of the modern Hungary as lieth on both sides of Tibisous, inhabited at that time by the Sclaves, and some scattered remnants of the Avares, whom they killed up or forced to seek new habitations, planting themselves in those places which they took from them; now the Upper Hungary. In the right of Lemis the 4. successor to Arnulphus, they passed over the Danow and subdued Pannonia, dismembering it from the Empire and name of Germany: after that ranging with unmerciful cruelty over all Germany, Italy, Greece, Sclavonia, Dacia: till broken by the ●orces of the Dutch Emperors, and mollified by the softness of the Christian Religion, they became more quiet. Their Government at the first was under Dukes; Stephen the 4. 〈◊〉 his receiving of the Gospel, being honoured with the title of King; enjoyed by his successors to this very day. In the time of Ladislaus surnamed the Saint, Dalmatia and Groatia were added to the Crown of Hungary, bequeathed to him by his sister Zelomira, the widow of the last King. In that of Bela the 4. the ●artarians to the number of 500000 fight men broke into this Country, and like a violent whirlwind carried all before them; anno 1248. tyrannising here for 3 years' space, committing merciless massacres, and making horrible spoils wheresoever they came. In that of Stephen the 4. Mysia, and Bulgaria were made tributary. By the daughters of Bela and Stephen, both the 4. of those names, the houses of Naples and Bohemia came to claim the Kingdom of Hungary; as Lewis the 1. by Elizabeth his mother, sister of Casimir the 2. did the Kingdom of Poland. The rest of their affairs shall be briefly touched at in the following Catalogue of 

The DUKES and KINGS of HUNGARY.  
A. Ch.  
1 Cusala, the first Duke (or Captain) of the Hungari, subdued Transylvania, and the Upper Hungary, and passed over the Danow, slain in his wars against the Dutch then possessed of Pannonia.  
2 Toxus, subdued Pannonia, or the Lower Hungary.  
3 Gersa, son of Toxus.  
1000 4 Stephen the fourth Duke and first King of Hungary.  
1039 5 Peter, surnamed the Alman, nephew of Stephen, deposed by Andrew and Bela, sons of Ladislaus son of Geisa the 1. and brother of Stephen the first King.  
1047 6 Andrew eldest son of that Ladislaus.  
1059 7 Bela, the brother of Andrew.  
1062 8 Solomon, the son of Andrew, expelled his Kingdom by  
1075 9 Geisa II. son of Bela.  
1078 10 Ladislaus, surnamed the Saint, brother of Geisa the 2.  
1096 11 Coloman, son of Geisa the 2.  
1114 12 Stephen II. son of Coloman.  
1132 13 Bela II. nephew of Geisa the 2. by his son Almus.  
1142 14 Geisa III. son of Bela the 2.  
1162 15 Stephen III. son of Geisa the 3.  
1172 16 Bela III. brother of Stephen the 3.  
1191 17 Emaricus son of Bela the 3.  
1201 18 Ladislaus II. son of Emaricus, reigned but 6 months, being slain by treason, very young, and without issue.  
1201 19 Andrew II. son of Bela the 3. and brother of Emarious.  
1236 20 Bela IV. son of Andrew the 2.  
1271 21 Stephen IV. son of Bela the 4.  
1273 22 Ladislaus III. son of Stephen the 4.  
1290 23 Andrew III. nephew to Bela the 4. by his brother Stephen.  
1302 24 Charles, surnamed Martel, son of Charles King of Naples by Marie daughter to Stephen the 4. against whom was chosen Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, son of King Wenceslaus the 2. and Anne his wife, daughter of Bela the 4. and after three years Otho of Bavaria, descended from Elizabeth, another of the daughters of Bela the 4. chosen also by a faction against Wenceslaus: but Wenceslaus surrendering his claim to Otho, and Otho not long after forced to renounce his title; Charles Martell remained King of the whole.  
1343 25 Ludovicus, nephew to Charles Martell by his son Carlcobert, succeeded King of Poland also, in right of Elizabeth his mother, sister of Casimir the 2.  
1383 26 Charles II. King of Naples, descended from Charles of Naples, and Marie daughter of Stephen the 4. before mentioned; by their son John of Durazzo, one of the younger brothers of Charles Martell, poisoned after a short reign by the Widow of the former King to make way for her daughter to the Crown.  
1387 27 Sigismond Emperor, King of Bohemia and Duke of Luxembourg; in right of Marie his wife, eldest daughter of Lewis or Ludovicus, her younger sister Eduigis being Queen of Poland.  
1438 28 Albert of Austria, Emperor and King of Hungary, and Bohemia, in right of Elizabeth his wife the daughter of Sigismond.  
1440 29 Ladislaus, or Vladislaus son of Jagello King of Poland in the minority of Ladislaus the son of Albert, chosen King of Hungary, unfortunately slain at the battle of Varna, with 30000 of his people: and perhaps his perjury might deserve it. For having made and sworn a truce with the Turk; the Pope's Legate upon a seeming advantage, absolved him of his oath, and drew him into the field. At the beginning the Christians had the better. But at the last Amurath the 2. against whom they fought, lifting up his eyes to heaven, and desiring Christ to look upon the perfidious dealing wherewith his followers had dishonoured him: re-encouraged his men, and so got the victory.  
1444 30 Ladislaus V. King of Bohemia, the son of Albert by Elizabeth, daughter of Sigismond and Mary.  
1458 31 Mathias Corvinus, son of the famous Huniades, after the death of Ladislaus the 5. chosen King of Hungary.  
1491 32 Vladislaus II. or Ladislaus VI son of Casimir the 4. of Poland, and of Elizabeth the daughter of Albert, succeeded in the Kingdoms of Hungary and Bohemia, his 3 younger brothers successively in that of Poland.  
1517 33 Ludovicus II. King of Hungary and Bohemia, both born and dead before the ordinary course of nature: in the 21 year of his age, and the 10. of his reign, unfortunately drawn into the field to encounter Solyman the Magnificent, one of the hardiest Captains in his time. The battle was fought at a Village called Mogac●z or Mugaee, just betwixt Belgrade and Buda: in which 19000 of the Hungarians were slain, and the young King drowned in the flight. A most lamentable discomfiture. Lewis thus dead, John Sepusio Vaivod, or Governor of Transylvama, was by the States chosen King of of Hungary. But Ferdinand Archduke of Austria, and brother unto Charles the 5. challenged the Kingdom in right of Anne his wife, daughter and sister to Vladislaus and Lewis King of Hungary and Bohemia. On this pretence he invaded the Kingdom, and drove out John his competitour, who to recover his right, called Solyman the Magnificent into the Country, who took so fast footing in it, that his successors could never since be removed.  
1527 34 John de Sepusio, Vaivod of Transylvania, chosen King upon the death of Ludovicus II. outed by Ferdinand of Austria, restored by Solyman the great Turk, died anno 1540  
1540 35 Ferdinand of Austria, elected King of Bohemia in respect to the Lady Anne his wife, sister of Ludovicus the 2. anno 1527. did in the same right lay claim to the Crown of Hungary; chosen to which by a party prepared for him: he was always in contention with John de Sepusio; each of them acknowledged King by their several factions: but by both sides received on the death of John.  
1562 36 Maximilian Emperor, King of Hungary and Bohemia, Archduke of Anstria, son of Ferdinand.  
1572 37 Rodolphus Emperor, etc. son of Maximilian.  
1608 38 Mathias, brother of Rodolphus, afterwards Emperor.  
1618. 39 Ferdinand II. of Gratz, next heir unto Mathias of the house of Austria, afterwards Emperor etc. against whom a party of Hungarians called in Bethlem Gabor, Prince of Transylvania, whom they elected for their King, intending (as they said) to crown him also. But the affairs of Bohemia going on the Emperor's side, Gabor relinquished his pretensions and harkened to a peace betwixt them.  
1625 40 Ferdinand III. son of Ferdinand the 2. chosen and crowned King in the life of his Father, and in the year 1627. King of Bohemia also, succeeding after him in the Empire and now living, anno 1648.    
This Kingdom doth pretend itself to be Elective, and to have special privileges indulged them by their former Princes; and anciently indeed it was so in both respects, the last especially: King Andrew giving authority to his Prelates, Peers, and other people, Vt sine nota alicujus infidelitatis, etc. that without any imputation of disloyalty, they might contradict, oppose, and resist their King if he did any thing in violation of their Laws and sanctions. But both their liberty of Elections, and pretence of Privileges have been so shaken and restrained by their Kings of the house of Austria, that the Elections are become a matter of formality only, their Privileges depending wholly on the Prince's pleasure: now grown too potent for them to contend withal, unless they should betray their Country into the hands of the Turk. To which some of them have expressed some strong inclinations, the oppressions laid upon them by the Austrian family, being deemed unsufferable.  
The forces of this Kingdom when it was entire, may best be seen by those great Armies which they have brought into the field against the Turk. By whom two parts of three being since subdued, that which remains must not be thought able to answer the proportion of former times; though they have done more than could reasonably be expected from it. For at the battle of Keresiure, anno 1596. there were 6000 Hungarian horse, and 10000 foot, of this Nation only; besides those of Germany and Transylvania: and the next year, notwithstanding the discomfiture of that Army, they raised no less than 20000 horse and foot, on the noise of some preparations among the Turks. 'Tis true; their 〈◊〉 are commonly but meanly armed; the defect wherein is rather to be imputed to the Prince then unto the people: who can but bring their bodies (which is all they have) for defence of their Country. And for their horse, (whom they call Heiducks) maintained in continual readiness at the charge of the Nobility and principal Gentry; they are next Coufins to the Cosacques, almost as mischievous as they, and hold as strict intelligence with the Turks as those do with the Tartars.  
The chief Revenues of this Kingdom come from the silver mines, out of which is yearly raised about a million and an half of gulden's. Maximilian the 2. made it up two millions by seizing on the lands of Cathedral and Collegiate Churches, and assigning annual pensions to the Bishops, Canons, and other Religious persons. Most of which sum comes clearly to the Emperor's Coffers, the Presidiary Soldiers being paid with Contribution money raised upon the Country: and the Lieutenant General, whose entertainment comes to 30000 Dollars yearly, defrayed upon their purses also.  
The chief Order of Knighthood in this Kingdom was that of the Dragon, instituted by Sigismond Emperor and King hereof, at such time as by the Council of Constance, against John of Hus and Hierome of Prague, and by the sharpness of his sword proved upon their followers, he had cast down (as he conceived) the Dragon of Heresy and Schism. But the device proved of no long continuance, expiring almost with the Author.  
The Arms of Attila the Hunn, once the King of this Country by the name of Pannonia, are said to have been Gules, a Falcon displayed Or, membered and crowned Argent. But the Arms of the Kingdom at this time, are Barrewise of 8 pieces Gules and Argent.  
There are in HUNGARY Archbishops 2 Bishops 13.  
And so much for HUNGARY.   

OF SCLAVONIA.  
SCLAVONIA is bounded on the East with Servia, Macedonia, and Epirus, from which parted by the River Drinus, and a line drawn from thence unto the Adriatic; on the West with Carniola in Germany and Histria, in the signory of Venice, from which last divided by the River Arsia; on the North with Hungary, on the South, with the Adriatic Sea. So called from the Sclaves or Sclavi a Darmatian people, of whom more anon.  
It contains in length from Arsia, to the River Drinus, according to Pliny's computation 800 Italian miles; the greatest breadth being 325 of the same miles. But others reckon the length of it at no more than 480 miles, who may be reconciled with Pliny, by supposing this, that these last measure in a straight and direct line from River to River; and that Pliny coasted by the Creeks and reaches of the Adriatic. Situate in the Northern temperate Zone, betwixt the middle Parallels of the sixth and seventh Climates: so that the longest day in summer is about 15 hours and an half.  
The Country is generally fruitful of all those commodities, which are found in Italy, to which little inferior: yielding not only wine and oil in very good plenty, but good store of cattle, and of wild beasts of pleasure no want at all; some rich veins also of gold and silver. The northern parts are mountainous, cold, for the most part lying under snows, not capable of wine, or any the like productions which require much heat. But even these mountainous parts afford very good pasturage, and breed a wealthy race of sheep which bring forth young twice a year and are shorn four times. Nor doth the Sea coasts come behind in advancing the profit of the people, not only yielding store of fish, but the benefit of many excellent and convenient Havens.  
The people are courageous, proud, stubborn and untractable, of strong bodies, and able constitutions, fit for works of drudgery, and so employed by the Venetians, when first brought under their command: who using them in all servile offices both at home and abroad, occasioned the neighbouring Nations to call their Villains or Bond-servants, as they of Venice did, by the name of Sclaves; that being originally as to this people, the name not of their condition, but of their Ancestors and Country.  
The Christian faith was first here planted, I mean in reference to this people, who do now inhabit it, about the time of Charles the Bald, Emperor of the West, anno 877. Sueropilus being the first of their Kings who embraced the Gospel. But lying in the mid way of Greece and Italy, the Religion of the Church of Rome, and that of the Greek Church are both allowed of: that of the Greeks being as prevalent in the East parts hereof, as that of Rome is in the Western: The Turkish and Mahometan prevailing in those Towns and Territories under their obedience. But though they be not of one Religion, they are all of one Language; which is the old Sarmatian (or Sclavonian) tongue, generally spoken in the Empire of Rulsia, Livonia, Poland, Silesia, Bohemia, Moravia, some part of Hungary, Histria, Sclavonia, where we now are, Dacia, Epirus, Georgia, Mengrelia, (both in Asia) and by all the Captains, 
Windischland.  Officers, and other soldiers of the Turkish Empire: the language generally spreading over all those Countries, which either were Sarmatian in their first original, or made theirs by conquest under the united name of Sclaves, or otherwise intermixed with them by the necessity of commerce and trade, or dispatch of their common businesses. Insomuch as taking in the subdivisions of the Provinces and Countries before specified, it is affirmed by Gesner a right learned man that there are no fewer than 60 Nations which have the Sclavonian tongue for their Vulgar language.  
Chief Mountains in this Country are those called Scardonici (from Scardona, one of the best towns of Illyris) dividing Dalmatia in the midst, and extending along the Coasts thereof; by Ptolemie called Ardium. Of Rivers those of special note amongst the Ancients, were 1 Titius, now Varietha, separating Illyris from Dalmatia; 2 Arsia, now Arsa, the utmost bound upon the West; which as 3 Drinus is upon the East: of which the first falleth into that Bay of the Adriatic, which is called Golfo di Quevero, (〈◊〉 Flanaticus by the Ancients) the other into the Saw or Savus, somewhat west of Belgrade. 4 Narso, now Narento, running not far from Epidaurus.  
The Boundaries and Landmarks being thus set out, I should proceed to the division of the country as now it standeth. But I must first look on it as it stood in the time of the Romans: in whose time that part of the whole Province which lay from the whole River Arsia to the Titius, was named Laburnia, and Illyris; that from the Titius to the Drinus was called Dalmatia. But the Illyrians being the stouter and more warlike people, and such as created greatest troubles to the Romans; it pleased the conquerors when they had fully subdued both Nations, to call the whole country by the name of Illyricum: and not so only, but to extend this name over all their Provinces (the Diccese of Thrace excepted) which lay between the Alps and the Euxine Sea; the Adriatic and the Danow: for to far the Jurisdiction of the Praefectus Praetorio of Illyricum, did at first extend. Huic Praefecto (saith Zosimus) Constantinus ejus institutor Macedones attribuit, Thessalos, Cretenses, Graeciam, & circumjacentes insults, Epirum utranque, Illyricos, Dacoes, Triballos, & Pannonios', Valeriam usque & Mysiam superiorem. And that all these did then pass by the name of Illyricum, appeareth as well by that of Pollio in the life of Claudius the second, expressly saying Illyricum, Thracus, Mysos, Dacoes, Dalmatias & Pannonias continebat; as by that of Socrates the Historian, who lib. 32. cap, 20. calleth Sirmium the chief town of Pannonia Inferior, & lib. 5. cap. 6. Thessalonica, the chief City of Macedon, urbes Illyricas, or Illyrian Cities. By which account Illyricum in the largest extent of that name contained no less than 18 Provinces of the Roman Empire; that is to say, 1 Noricum Mediterraneum, 2 Noricum Ripense, 3 Pannonia Superior, 4 Pannonia Inferior, 5 Valeria, 6 Savia, 7 Dalmatia, 8 Moesia superior, 9 Dardania, 10 Dacia Mediterranea, 11 Dacia, Ripensis, 12 Macedonia, 13 Thessaly, 14 Achaia, 15 Crete, 16 Epirus Vetus, 17 Epirus Nova, and 18 Prevelitana. These 18 Provinces being cast or made up into three Dioceses, viz. the Diocese of Illyricum, specially so called, containing the seven first; 2 the Diocese of Macedon, containing the seven last; and 3 the Diocese of Dacia, comprehending the other four: were governed by the Praefectus Praetorio for Illyricum, who had first his chief seat and residence at Sirmium before mentioned. But in the division of the Empire betwixt the sons of Theodosius the Great, into the Eastern and the Western: the Diocese of Illyricum specially so called (after that named Illyricum Occidentale) was laid unto the Western Empire, under the Governance of the Praefectus Praetorio of Italy, and thereupon the seat or residence of the Praetorto Praefectus for Illyricum, removed from Sirmium unto Thessalonica. So that now we are to look upon Illyricum in a stricter notion, as a Diocese of the Western Empirre, containing the seven Provinces before specified, whereof both Noricums, both Pannonias, and Valeria (if at least Stiermarch be that Valeria, as some say it is) have been described already in their proper places. There now remain only Savia and Dalmatia to be spoken of: the first containing all those parts of this country lying on both sides of the Savus (whence it had the names); the last, those parts hereof which lie towards the Sea, known by the ancient name of Dalmatia, the Region of Illyris properly so called, being added to it. But as new Lords give new laws, so they give new names. The country being divided by the Sclavi into two Kingdoms, viz. of Croatia and Dalmatia: of which the first contained the Province of Savia, the last took up the whole Province of Dalmatia bounded as before, but keeping the name of Sclavonia to itself alone, being indeed the only Province in which the name and memory of the Sclavi, is retained amongst us. Afterwards as it came to be divided (as at last it was) betwixt the Kings of Hungary and the State of Venice: we find it subdivided into these six parts; that is to say 1 Windischland, 2 Croatia, 3 Bosnia, 4 Dalmatia, 5 Liburnia, or Contado di Zara, and 6 the Sclavonian Islands.   

1 WINDISCHLAND.  
WINDISCHLAND is bounded on the East with part of the Lower Hungary, from which separated by a line drawn from St. Nicolas near the River Dravus to the town of Polega, standing on a little River which falls into the Savus on the West with Carniola, or Krain, a Province of the Archdukedome of Austria: on the North with the River Dravus, on the South with Croatia. It is thus called by the Dutch as the Land or Country of the Winithi, or Vendi, the greatest Nation of the Sclaves, whom generally they call by the name of Windisch: and anciently for so much of it as lieth on the North of the Savus accounted part of Pannonia Inferior, as afterwards of the Province of Savia, till conquered by the Sclaves, and laid unto their possessions; from whom named Windischland, as before.  
Places of most importance in it are 1 Windisch-greits, 
Croatia.  seated on the Dravus, the Vinundria and Vind●mana of the Ancients. 2 Sagona, near unto the Savus. 3 Gradiska on the South, and 4 Zagabria, on the North of the same River: from which last a great part of this Country is called Comitatus Zagabriensis. 5 Novigrod, on the Savus also, but more near to Germany. 6 Petrowya, situate at the foot of the mountains, which are between the Savus and the Dravus, and divide Hungary from 〈◊〉 7 Siseg, or Sissakhen, (the Sissia of Pliny and Antoninus) situate on the Saw, over against Zagabria, where it receiveth the river Zulp, famous for the notable resistance which the Turks there found, anno 1593. Who hoping by the conquest of this Province to open a free passage into Germany, entered it with a puissant Army, (having in their way taken the Castle of Ostrowits and the strong Town of Wihits in Croatia) and sat down very strongly entrenched before this Town. But the town held it out most gallantly against all their batteries and assaults, till relieved by a power of Germans who came to succour them; by whom 8000 of the Turks were slain in the place, and most of the rest drowned in the River Savus, as they fled hastily, and (through that gre●t hast) blindly from the sword of the Conqueror.  
This Province for the most part is under the Princes of the house of Austria, as Kings of Hungary, to which Crown it formerly belonged; those parts of it which lie next to Hungary, on the North and East, groaning under the tyranny and bondage of the Turkish Garrisons.   

2 CROATIA.  
CROATIA is bounded on the North with Windischland, from which parted by the River una, or Wana; on the East with Bosnia; on the South with L●bur●ia, or Contado di Zara; on the West with Carniola. The reason of the name I find not amongst my Authors; but only that it was imposed by the Sclaves at their first coming hither: who comprehended under this name all the Inland parts of Sclavonia, from the mountain Ardium to Pannonia, including Bosnia and Windischland, though distinguished afterwards.  
The Country for the most part cold, mountainous and hilly, overspread by the branches of the Mountains Baebii spoken of by Ptolemy; yet reasonably fruitful, stored with all necessary provisions for the life of man: and would yield more increase and profit both to Lord and Tenant, were it not for the ill neighbourhood of the Turk, to whose tyranny and oppressions it hath been, and is still exposed. The people for the general are held to be good soldiers, mentioned in our modern stories by the name of Crabats.  
Chief Towns in it are 1 Masch or Mosth, bordering upon Germany, the Al●ta of the Ancients. 2 Ostrowits, a strong Fort on the same Frontier; 3 Wihits, by the Dutch called Big●hen, by the Ancients Funium, the Metropolis or chief Town of the Country, encompassed like an Island by the River una, and fortified with strong works by the help of Art: but taken by the Turk anno 1592. and all the soldiers in it cruelly murdered, contrary to the Articles agreed on at the surrend●ie. 4 Zeng, 5 Wackat, 6 Tarnaw, 7 Modrisch, of which little memorable.  
This Country with the rest included anciently under this name, was one of the two kingdoms of Sclavonia, the Princes whereof were usually entitled Kings of Croatia and Delmatia. In the year 1007. the Venetians having before possessed themselves of some Towns on the Sea side, first set footing there. How the whole Country of Sclavonia came to the Crown of Hungary, shall be shown anon. Held, part of it in the right thereof, by the house of Austria; part of it by the Turks in the way of conquest: the Venetians having now no share in it, for aught I can find.   

4 BOSNIA.  
BOSNIA is bounded on the East with Servia a Province of Dacia: on the West with Croatia; on the North with the River Savus, and the East parts with the Lower Hungary; on the South with Dalmatia. So called as some think from the River Bosna, which runneth through it; as others, from the Bessi a people of Dacia, driven out of their Country by the Bulgari, and removing hither, by the change of a Vowel called Bossi, whence the Country Bosnia.  
Places of most importance are in it 1 jaitza, by the Latines called jazyga, situate on the top of an high hill, at the bottom whereof almost encompassed with two rivers, which there uniting pass from thence unto the Savus. The Town by reason of the rocky praecipices of the Hil, the unfordablenesse of the River, and an inaccessible Castle, held to be impregnable: the Metropolis in former times of this petit kingdom, and the ordinary sepulture of the kings thereof. 2 Warbosoni, at this time the chief Town of the Country, but not walled about. 3 Cazach, the usual residence or retiring place of the Bosnian Kings. 4 Schwanica, not much observable. 5 Dorobiza, the first town taken by Mahomet the great in his conquest of this Kingdom, as 6 Clyssa was the last; the unfortunate King Stephen being taken in it.  
This Country anciently accounted of as a part of Croatia, together with it was united to the Crown of Hungary; under the Patronage and Homage whereof it was erected into a Kingdom: but the precise time when, I find not. Some say, about the year 1420. If so, a Kingdom of late date, and a short continuance. For in the year 1464. Mahomet the Great, first Emperor of the Turks, having taken Constantinople, 
Dalmatia.  and almost all the rest of Greece, cast his eye upon it, suddenly surprised it: and having taken Stephen the last King hereof, most barbarously commanded him to be flayed alive. After whose death this Kingdom was converted to a Province of the Turkish Empire, and governed by one of the Bassas of it; as it still continueth.   

4 DALMATIA.  
DALMATIA is bounded on the East with Albania from which parted by the River Dris●, on the East with the Titius (now Variecha) which divides it from Liburnia, on the North with Bosnia, on the South with the Adriatic Sea. This only of all the Provinces of Sclavonia, retaineth its ancient name and bounds. So called from Dalminium the chief town hereof in the time of the Romans, from which the people were called Dalmatae, and the Country Dalmatia.  
The Country in the time of the Romans was full of woods, and those woods of Robbers, who from thence issued out to make spoil and booty. Dalmatae sub sylvis agunt, inde ad latrocinia promptissim, saith the Historian. And by the advantage of these woods, they intercepted and discomfited Gabin●●, one of Caesar's Captains, marching through their Country with 1000 horse and 15 Companies of foot towards Ma●edonia, to the aid of his General against Pompey. But their woods being destroyed they became more peaceable; and in stead of Robberies by Land, began to exercise themselves at Sea in the way of Merchandizing, to which their large Seacoasts and commodious Havens served exceeding fitly.  
Places of most consideration in it, 1 Sebenic on the Sea side, not far from the influx of Titius or Var●echa: by Ptolemie called Si●um, in whose time a Colony of Roman Soldiers, sent hither by the Emperor Claudius. 2 Salona, a Roman Colony also, one of the Juridical Resorts for these parts of the Province, and the ordinary Arsenal for their Navies. Renowned in ancient stories for the retreat of Dio●letian, a Native of this Country, who having governed the Roman Empire 20 years with much felicity, but a great deal of cruelty, deposed himself, and retired to this City, where he followed the trade of a Gardener, working with his own hands and observing with great content the productions of nature. Insomuch that when Maximianus Herculius his associate (who at his persuasion had done the like) invited him to resume the Empire, he returned this answer, utinam possitis visere olera nostris manibus plantata, etc. that if he would come unto Salona and see how well the Words which he had planted with his own hands, did thrive and prosper, he would never trouble his head with Crowns, nor his hands with Sceptres: a rare expression of a settled and contented mind. The name, and some of the ruins do still remain to preserve the memory of so remarkable a place. 3 Spalleto, East of Sebenic, a Sea town, and an Archbishops See, who writes himself Primate of Dabnatia. Of note for many learned Prelates, but for none more than for Marcus Antonius de Dominis, who seeming to loathe the Romish superstition, came for refuge in England, anno 1616. and having here both by preaching and writing laboured to overthrow the Church of Rome, upon I know not what projects, he declared himself to be of another mind, anno 1622. and returned again to Rome, where he writ as reproachfully of the Church of England. So that we may say of him, as Socrates in his Ecclesiastical History saith of Ecebolius, who under Constantius, was a Christian; under Julian a Pagan; and a Christian again under Jovinian: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 So wavering and unconstant a turncoat was Ecebolius, from his beginning to his end. But Ecebolius sped better than Antonius did, he being received into the Church upon his repentance, but this infatuated man imprisoned in the Castle of Angelo, and his dead body burnt to Ashes. A just reward for so great levity, and so gross Apostasy, as he had showed unto the world in his going hence. 4 Almissa, the Piguritium of Ptol●mie, mounted on an high rock, and defended with an impregnable Castle. 5 Stagn●, upon the point of a long and spacious Chersonese, not far from which the River Naron (or Narento) falls into the Adriatic 6 Castle Novo, a strong Fortress within the Gulf of Catharo, now in possession of the Turks. 7 Antibari, on the further or Eastern side of the Bay, an Archbishops See; but that and the Sees of his Suffragan Bishops, being 7 in number, now in possession of the Turks. 8 Cath●●, on the same side of the Bay, by Ptolemie called Ascruvium, inhabited in his time by Roman Citizens; now a strong hold for the Venetians against the Turks, and giving name unto the Gulf, which formerly called Sinus Rhizonis●us, from Rhizana (now Rhizius) situate at the bottom of it, is at this time called from this Town Golfo de Catharo. 9 Dolcigno, by Ptolemie called Vleinium, originally founded by the Colchians. 10 Scutari, more within the land, (the Scodra of Ptolemie and Antoninus) strongly seated on a steep Rock, memorable for the stout resistance which it made for a whole year, against the whole puissance of Mahomet the 2. battered for the most part of that time with 70 pieces of 〈◊〉 of wondrous bigness, especially that called the Prince's piece, which carried a stone or bullet of 1220 l. weight; and taken at the last, anno 1578. Not far from this Town is the great Lake, called by S●●●bo, Labeates; now the Lake of Scutari, 130 miles in compass, and environed on all sides with Mountains, except towards the North, out of which issueth the Drinus, now called Driana, which partina Sclav●nia from Macedon and Servia, passeth into the Savus. 11 Alesio, the Lissus of Ptolemie, the furthest town of all Dalmatta, towards Greece: memorable for the Grave of Scanderbag, who was buried her●whereof more hereafter. 12 Medon, raised out of the ruins of Dioclea, an ancient and famous City, the birthplace of the Great Emperor Diocletian, spoken of before. 13 Dalminium, once the Metropolis of this Province, situate on the River Drinus, first sacked by Marcius Figulus a Roman Consul, 〈◊〉 V. C. 689. and after, 
Liburnia.  on a new revolt by one Nasi●a, spoken of by Strabo: not able after two such ruins to revive again; nothing being now left of it, but the name and memory.  
Betwixt the Chersonese of Stagno and the Gulf of Catharo, stands the town and territory of Ragusi; not subject as all the rest are either to the Turk or to the Venetians, but governing themselves by their own Laws and Magistrates as a Free-Commonwealth; paying only to the Turk 14000 Zechi●s yearly in way of tribute, and as much in Presents: discharged in that regard of Customs and Imp●sitions, in all his Dominions. It was anciently called Epidaurus (of which name there were two other Cities in Peloponnesus) but that town being razed by the Goths, the Inhabitants (after their departure) not knowing where to retire themselves, built this in the place of it, at the foot of a steep Mountain, enjoying a pleasant situation near the Sea with a little, but commodious port, forced out of the water by the art and industry of workmen. The town well built, fortified with walls and a well furnished Castle; now an Archbishops See, and a noted Emporie, rich, and strong in shipping, commanding over a small and barren territory within the land, and some pleasant Islands in the Sea. So that the riches of it proceed not from their Rents and Revenues rising out of the Earth, but by the benefit of their traffic upon the Waters, secured therein by the protection of the Turk, without which they had fallen before this time into the hands of the Venetians; as on the other side preserved by the State of Venice, from being a prey to their Protectors. Of more wealth heretofore then they are at the present. At what time they traded to most parts of this Western world in those great Vessels which from hence were called Raguses, but corruptly Argosies: the last of which (their number lessening with their trade) they lent unto the King of Spain for the war of England, anno 1588. in which action it was lost and wracked on the Coast of Ireland.   

5 CONTADO DIZARA.  
CONTADODIZARA, or the Country of Zara, called anciently Liburnia, and Illyris specially so named, is bounded on the East with Dalmatia, on the West with Histria, on the North with Croatia, and on the South with the Adriatic Sea, or Gulf of Venice.  
It took this latter name (the former being long discontinued) from Zara the chief town thereof the Jadera of Ptolemie and the ancients, a Roman Colony at that time, now an Archbishops See, enjoying a safe and large Port, situate on a low Chersonese thrusting out like a Promontory into the Adriatic; belonging to the State of Venice, by whom well fenced and fortified against foreign invasions. For the possession and command of this town, there have been great wars betwixt the Hungarians and the Venetians; to whom it seemeth to be of such importance, that being once taken by the Hungarians, it was redeemed for 100000 Crowns, of Ladislaus King of Naples, pretending against Sigismond of Luxembourg to the Crown of Hungary. In this town is the Church of S. John de Malvatia, which was built by a company of Saylors; who being in a tempest, made a vow, that if they escaped, they would consecrate a Temple to S. John de Malvatia, whose mortar should be tempered with Malmsey; and accordingly they paid their vows. Far less did another Master of a ship intent to perform his promise, though he spoke bigger; who in a like extremity of danger, promised our Lady to offer at her Altar a Candle as great as the main mast of his ship. For when one of his mates jogging him, told him he had promised an impossibility: Tush fool (replied the Master) we must speak her fair in time of need; but if ever I come a shore, I will make her be content with a candle of eight to the pound. And in a like fit of devotion was he, who on the same occasion plainly told God, that he was no common beggar, he never troubled him with prayers before; and if he would hear him that time, he would never trouble him again.  
Other towns herein considerable, are 1 Albona, retaining still the old name (the Alvona of Ptolemie) situate near the River Arsia, the divider of this Province from Histria. 2 Flavona, or Flanona, situate against the Gulf of Quernero, of old called Sinus Flanaticus, as before was noted: of ill report amongst Sailors for frequent tempests raised on every wind. 3 Zegna, by Ptolemie and Pliny called Senia, situate on a flat or level. 4 Nona, of old called Aenona, compassed with the Sea. 5 Scrifia, now a poor Village in the place where stood the Argyrutum of Pliny. 6 Scardona, now a mean Village also, heretofore of great note, and the Juridical Resort for the whole Province: from whence the neighbouring Mountains had the name of Scardonici: the bounds of this Country and Croatia.  
The ancient name of this Country was Liburnia, as before is said, but extending more Northwards beyond the Mountains of Ardium, or Scardonici; this and Dalmatia being then the Membra dividentia of the whole Illyricum. The people hereof called by one general name Liburni, were much given to Piracies; and for their better speed therein, the Authors and Inventors of those swift vessels which were called Liburnicae, and Liburnae. Of which thus Horace: 
Ibis Liburnis inter alta navium  
Amice propugnacula.  That is to say: 
In a Liburnian shalt thou be  
Amongst the stoutest ships at Sea.   
In imitation of which Vessels being swift and light, the Romans in the time of their wealth and pride invented a kind of Chair or Litter, (such as those which we call Sedans) wherein they were carried on men's shoulders with such ease and pleasure, that they could not only sleep or read, but write in them also: the Porters or Bearers of them of this Nation commonly; from whence, or from the fashion of the Vessel which they did resemble, they were called Liburni. Of these thus Juvenal in his third Satire: 
Si vocat officium, turba cedente vehetur  
Dives, & ingenti curret super ora Liburno,  
Atque obiter leget, aut scribet, vel dormiet intus,  
Namque facit somnum clausa lectica fenestra.   
Thus Englished by my honoured friend Sir Robert Stapleton, in his excellent translation of that harsh Satirist. 
When business calls, a crowd the rich man shuns,  
And o'er men's heads in's huge Sedan he runs,  
Reads, writeth, and sleeps within it as he goes,  
For sleep will come if he the curtains close.   
Besides which office of Chair-carriers or Sedan-men, as we call them now, this people being, when once conquered, a servile Nation, furnished the Romans with those Beadels, whom they employed in calling the Citizens from the fields to their public businesses, to which the same Poet alludeth, in the next Satire, saying, Clamante Liburno, Currite, jam sedit, etc. But to proceed, the nearness of this Country to the Adriatic, occasioned the Bay of Quernero commonly called Sinus Flanaticus, to be sometimes named Sinus Liburnicus, the parts of Italy on the other side of it, to be called Regna Liburnorum in the Poet Virgil, and gave the name of Liburnades to a shoal of Islands lying on the coast hereof, 60 at least in number, as is said by Strabo. To which and other Islands of the Adriatic, we are now to hasten, leaving the story of Illyricum to the close of all.   

6 The SCLAVONIAN ISLANDS.  
Along the Coasts of Sclavonia, lie a cluster of ISLANDS to the number of a thousand as is said by Pliny: most of which (if indeed so many) are but rocks, not Islands, or not inhabited at all, or of any note. The principal whereof, and such as deserve place here, are 1 the Liburnades before mentioned. 2 The Absyrtideses. 3 The Isles of Ragusi. 4 Arbe. 5 Curzola. 6 Zara. 7 Lissa and Brazzia: the rest not worth the looking after, as to our design: the whole number of the Inhabitants reckoned in the total to no more than 40000 persons.  
1 The LIBURNADES said by Strabo to be 60 in number, lie all along the Coast of Liburnia, or Contado di Zaro: the chief whereof are 1 ISSA, now called Pago, containing 100 miles in compass, having a town of the same name; but in all that tract of ground not above 1500 inhabitants in the time of my Author, by reason of the sharp air, and great want of fuel. The Salt-pits here yield great commodity, not only to the people themselves, but also to the State of Venice, supreme Lord hereof. 2 Tragurium, now Tran and Trahu, so called from the chief town hereof, built by those of Issa: so near the Continent that it seems to be a part thereof. By Mela it is named Tagurium, with some little difference. 3 Pharus, so called from the Pharii, or Parii, of whom once a Colony, long since come to ruin. It is now called Lezina, the greatest of all the Adriatic, as being 150 miles in compass, and very fruitful for the bigness. It hath a town of the same name, which enjoying a safe and spacious Harbour; unwalled and of no great beauty, but fortified with a strong Castle which commandeth both the Harbour and the shipping in it. The birthplace of Demetrius Pharius, so often mentioned in the stories of Greece and Rome.  
2 The ABSYRTIDESES are in number many, so called from the River Absyrtus, which thereabout falls into the Adriatic, according unto that of Lucan: 
Ei cadit Adriacas spumans Absyrtus in undas.  
Absyrtus foaming with his haste  
Into the Adria falls at last.   
But whether that river were so called by the Colchians at their landing there, in memory of Absyrtas the son of Aetes' King of Colchis, whom they went to seek; or for some other reason, I determine not. Certain I am, it could not be so named from the scattering of his limbs hereabouts, by Medea his unnatural sister, as is said by Pliny: that cruel fact being done on the shores of the Euxine: the place called Tomos afterwards upon that occasion. But for these Islands being in number many, as before was said, two only are of special note, that is to say, 1 Vegia, or Viglio, not far from Zegna on the firm land, containing in compass betwixt 80 and 100 miles, and about 10000 Inhabitants, the most populous of all these Seas. It hath a town of the same name, with a very fair harbour: the Island by Pliny called Curieta, the chief towns of it in his time being Pfulfinium, and Curicum. 2 Absorus as Ptolemie, Absyrtium as Pliny calls it: in whose time it was one Island only, but now divided into two, by the Venetians, letting in the Sea betwixt them: the one of them is called Cherso, the other Osero: both joined together by a Bridge made by the Venetians, and both together making up 140 miles in compass; each of them having one town only, and that of the same name with the Island, the Inhabitants in both not exceeding 5000 persons. Stored with sufficiency of corn, plenty of wine, and abundance of wood, great quantities whereof are sent yearly to Venice. They have also goodly herds of Cattle, and great flocks of sheep, affording by their flesh, wool, cheese, and butter, a good increase of profit to the owners of them.  
3 The Islands of Ragusi, (for so I call them which belong to that Commonwealth) are but three in number: 1 Gravosa, a very pleasant place, full of Gardens of Oranges, Lemons, and Pomegranates. 2 Languste, environed about with very high Mountains, in which are the Ragusians Farms, made rich by the great charge and industry of the several Occupants, so as to yield them wine, oil, and most excellent fruits; which they receive more plentifully from a goodly Plain situate in the midst hereof, and naturally more fruitful than the other parts. Near to this last Island is good fishing for Sprats: and in both an Art of making their trees to bring forth Oysters, by bending down their boughs, and staying them under the water with stones; so as in two years there are so many Oysters fastened unto them, as is strange to see, and in the third year they are very good meat. 3 Melida, lying betwixt Ragusi and the Isle of Curzola, by Pliny called Melita, and on that ground supposed by some to be that Island on which S. Paul did suffer shipwreck, Acts 29. But the name of Barbarous which the Text joins to the Inhabitants of it, not proper to an Island betwixt Greece and Italy, in the times of S. Paul, and his landing there in Syracuse, an Haven of Sicil, so far from this, so near unto the other Melita, which is now called Malta; sufficiently refel this fancy, though otherwise not improbably grounded.  
4 Of those which are known only by one single name, the chief are ARBE, so called in the time of Pliny from the best town of it; but by Ptolemie it is named Scardona. A pleasant Island, in compass about 30 miles, and containing some 3000 Inhabitants, the only Haven-lesse Isle of all the Adriatic; but that defect abundantly recompensed by the natural sweetness of the place. Which so enticed certain dissolute Rovers of Austria, that they seized upon it, anno 1618. and had like to have occasioned an heavy war betwixt Ferdinand Archduke of the House of Gratz (not long after chosen King of the Romans) and the State of Venice, if Philip the 3. of Spain had not made up the breach.  
5 CURZOLA, by Ptolemie and Strabo called Corcyra, or Melaena, more rightly Corcyra Melaena, or Corcyra Nigra, to difference it from Corcyra, now Corfu, in the Sea jonian: the chief town of it being of the same name with the Island, was founded by the Gnidians of the Isle of Crete; sufficiently fruitful, but of wine especially, 40 miles long, in compass 90. and very populous for the bigness; notwithstanding that the people being Seafaring men, do much use the Seas and build many ships. In the year 1571. a little after the taking of Cyprus, and before the battle of Lepanto, it was invaded by Vluz Aly, General of the Turkish Fleet, with a Navy of 60 Galleys: for fear of whom Contarenus the Venetian Governor, together with the Townsmen and Garrison Soldiers, abandoned Curzola, the chief town hereof. The silly women thus forsaken, and preferring death before dishonour, defended the walls; and with fire, stones, and such other weapons as they had, they beat off the enemy: till at the last a violent tempest forced the Turkish General to remove his Galleys further off to a place of safety.  
6 ZARA, LISSA, BRAZZIA, three small Isles, not otherwise memorable but for thei● misfortunes, spoiled by the Turks at their departure from Curzola, who carried thence 1600 Christians into cruel bondage. The rest I purposely omit, rather Rocks than Islands, barren and stony for the most part, and not much inhabited.  
The ancient Inhabitants of Illyricum, 
Illyricum.  in the full extent of it, comprehending Liburnia and Dalmatia, were the Japodes bordering on Italy, the S●irtones or Scirtari confining upon Macedon; the Mazae●, in the midst about Salona; the Peirustae lying towards Pannonia, the Derrii, Ceraunii, Daursii, Vardae, Sicul●tae, Sardiotae, and others of inferior note: all making up the great and potent Nations of the Liburni and the Dalmatae; and comprehended generally in the name of Illyrians. Of these the Liburnian Illyrians, (Illyrici seu Liburni as they are indifferently called by Florus) were the first who felt the Forces of Rome: which growing State they had provoked by their frequent Piracies, but more by murdering the Ambassadors which were sent unto them to require satisfaction: Teuta their Queen, a proud and Imperious Dame, commanding execution to be done upon them. Warred upon by the Romans for so many injuries, under the conduct of Centimalus one of the Consuls, they were overthrown (as having more of the Pirate than the soldier in them) some of their chief Nobility executed in revenge of the wrong done to the Ambassadors; an yearly tribute imposed on them, and the Queen deprived of the greatest part of her Kingdom, conferred by the Romans on Demetrius Pharius, one of their Confederates. But he proving unfaithful to them in their war with Hannibal, and Gentius their last King who commanded over Illyricum, siding against them with Perseus' King of Macedonia: Anicius the Praetor is sent with a sufficient Army to make an end of that work. Who used such diligence therein, that Scordra the chief town of the Kingdom, was taken, and the King himself together with his wife and children made Prisoners; by consequence the whole war ended, antequam geri Romae nunciaretur, before they knew at Rome that it was begun. The Liburnians after this became quiet subjects, the whole Country on taking of the Gentius being made a Province of the Romans, anno V. C. 586. employed at Rome in many servile offices, as before was said: but them the Dalmatians began to cast off the yoke. But Dalminium their chief City being first sacked by Martius Figulus, and after by Nasica before mentioned; they continued quiet and obedient till the time of Augustus Caesar: when they again rebelled at the instigation of one Batto, a man very potent with the people; who having ten years together maintained the liberty of his country, at last broken and wearied by the forces of Germanicus and Tiberius he submitted himself unto the two Generals: who ask the reason of his revolt, were answered, because the Romans sent not shepherds to keep, but wolves to devour their flocks. Thus finally conquered, it continued a Roman Province till the coming of Odoacer into Italy, who brought it under his command; as the Goths also did having vanquished him, and thereby made themselves Masters of Italy, and the rest of his purchases: But the kingdom of the Goths, being brought to an end by the good fortune of Justinian, and the valour of Belisarius and Narses, two of his Commanders (but very ill requited by him) Illyricum became a part of the Eastern Empire: continuing under the power of the Grecian Emperors till the time of Phocas that bloody Tyrant: when made a prey unto the Sclaves.  
Of these though we have spoken before in several places, as their fortunes and affairs have led us: yet being this is the only country which preserves their name, we will here speak more exactly of them, than we have done hitherto; especially as to their manners, name and first Original; and finally of their successes in this country. And first for their Original, I take it for a thing past question that they were no other than natural Sarmatians, inhabiting on the North of the River Ister, uniting themselves under this name, in their undertake and attempts on the Eastern Empire; as the many Nations of Germany took the name of Frankes, and Almans, in their actions and achievements against the Western. But why they took this name rather than another, is not yet agreed on. Some fetch the original of it from Slowo, which in the Sclavonian tongue signifieth a Speech or word, because they were all of one common language: others from Slawa, signifying in that language Fame or Glory, in regard of that great fame and honour which they had achieved by their successes on the Empire. But when I find a potent Nation of the Winithi, Winuli, or Vendi, a Sarmatian people called Sclavini by Jornandes, possessed in his time of the further shores of the River Ister, opposite to Illyricum and Thrace; and by that name wasting and foraging these Provinces, and other parts of that Empire in the time of Justinian, as we read in Procopius that they did: I see no reason why we should look further for the name of Sclaves then from these Sclavini. For having in the time of Phoc● subdued this Country, and called it Sclavinia, or Sclavonia, after their own name: by that and other fortunate successes on the Eastern Empire, and the honour they had thereby gotten, they might very well induce the rest of the scattered tribes of the Sarmatians to unite together with them both in name and action, and try their fortunes in the conquest of the West of Europe, as these had done already on the East parts of it. In which design they sped so well that they became Masters of almost all those countries which lie betwixt the River Vistula, and the Euxine Sea; the Adriatic and the Baltic: communicating their language unto all the Provinces and Nations conquered by them; and to most their manners, rites, and customs. Their Government at first by Kings; but so that the succession seldom held in a Race or Family; and those that had the Throne did not long enjoy it. For having a Law amongst themselves, that he who killed a Tyrant should succeed in his place: they had few Kings whom some or other would not vote to be a Tyrant, and then dispatch him out of the way that a greater Tyrant than himself (as it commonly happeneth in such cases) might possess the Power. Insomuch that they had a new king almost every year, none of them for the space of an hundred years dying natural deaths; and all that while the People (as it needs must be) most miserably torn in pe●ces by intestine wars. Not cured of this distemper, till the several Tribes and Nations of them, (as Poles, Moravians, Bohemians, these here, and those of other Countries) had their several Princes, succeeding one another in a Regular way. Their Religion Gentilism at the first, for being originally Heathens, they worshipped such Gods as others of the Gentiles did; Jessan for Jupiter, Ladon for Pluto, Marzim for Mars, Zievane for Venus, and Nian for Diana. They had also a Goddess called Pagode, to whom they prayed for fair weather, and a temperate Air. To their children they used to give no name, till they began to grow great, and then conducted them to the Temple of their Gods, where they cut off their first hair, and offered it as a pledge of their future service: at which solemnity they called together their friends and kinsfolk to make merry, with banquets, dancing, singing, and all kind of sports: offering in sacrifice an Hog, and wine mixed with honey, somewhat like Metheglin.  
But to return unto the story, the Sclaves thus settled in this country (since called Sclavonia) continued absolute Masters of it under the Title of Kings of Croatia and Dalmatia, till the year 970. when growing unsufferable by their frequent Piracies, and having ravished or surprised a company of Venetian Ladies; they forced that State (as the Liburnians did the Romans) to make war upon them: Which ended in the loss of Lezina and Curzela, two of their best Islands, and almost all the Sea towns on the Coast of the Adriatic; possessed for the most part since that time by the State of Venice: a tribute also of 100 Barrels of Wine, and a present to the Duke of 3000 Coney-skins, being laid upon them: Petro Vrseola being then Duke of Venice, and Marcomir, king of the Sclavonians. Afterwards Zelamirus the last king dying without issue, bequeathed the kingdom to his wife: and she as freely to her brother Ladislaus king of Hungary, surnamed the Saint: the right hereof accrueing by this means to the kings of Hungary; but the possession of a great part of it remaining to the State of Venice; the cause of much war and blood she betwixt those Princes, till the Turk came to part the fray, and got the greatest part for himself, by their disagreements. Betwixt these three, Sclavonia at this time doth stand thus divided: the Venetians possessing the greatest part of the Islands and all the Sea Coasts from the River Arsia to the Bay of Catharo, (the City and Commonwealth of Ragusi, excepted only); the house of Austria in the right of the Crown of Hungary, the Inland parts of Windischland and Croatia; and the Turks (who first set footing here in the reign of Mahomet the second) the whole kingdom of Bosna, the Patronage of Ragusi, some towns in Windischland and Croatia, and all the residue of Dalmatia from the Bay of Catharo to Albania.  
The Arms of Sclavonia were Argent, a Cardinal's Hat, the strings pendant, and plaited in a true Love's knot, meeting in the Base, Gules.  
There are in Sclavonia Archbishops 4. Bishops 26.   
And thus much for SCLAVONIA.   

OF DACIA.  
DACIA is bounded on the East with the Euxine Sea, and some part of Thrace; on the West with Hungary, and Sclavonia; on the North with Podolia and some other Members of the Realm of Poland; on the South with the rest of Thrace and Macedonia. So called from the Daci, who hear first inhabited; in Strabo, better known by the name of the Davi, who proving, when first known to the Romans, an officious people, willingly putting themselves to service in hope of gain, occasioned the Romans in their Comedies and common Speech, to call a Sycophant or Servant by the name of Davus.  
It lieth on both sides of the Danow, frontiring all along the Upper and the Lower Hungary and some part of Sclavonia: extended from the 7. Climate to the 10. so that the longest Summers day in the most Northern parts thereof is near 17 hours; and in the most Southern 15 hours 3 quarters.  
By this account with reference to the other limits before laid down, it differeth much in situation and dimensions from the ancient Dacia described by Ptolemie: that lying wholly on the North side of the Danow, but taking in so much of the Upper Hungary as lieth on the East side of Tibiscus: this comprehending all the rest of the ancient Dacia, with both the Mysias, and Dardania; and in a word, the whole Dacian Diocese in the largest extent thereof, the Province of Prevalitana excepted only: which though a Member of this Diocese, was no part of Dacia, but rather of Macedon or Albania. For the clearer understanding whereof we may please to know, that Dacia properly so called was situate on the Northside of Danubius, as before was said, extending as far Westward as the River Tibise●us, where it frontired on the jazyges Metanastae, inhabited by a military and valiant people, who many times, especially when the frost did favour them, passed over the River, and infested the Roman Provinces. And though repressed and made tributary by Julius Caesar, yet they broke out again in the time of Augustus, who sending Lentulus against them with a puissant Army, compelled them to retire on the other side of the River, planting the Southern banks thereof with strong towns and garrisons to restrain them from the like incursions for the time to come. By means whereof, Si Dacia tunc non v●cta, summota atque dilata est, saith the Historian; though Dacia was not overcome, yet it was removed somewhat further off, and the Provinces thereby secured from the attempts of that people. After this from the time of Cotiso, with whom Augustus had to deal, we find little of them till the reign of Decebalus their last King, a man both ready in advice and quick in execution. Against him, Domitian made war by Julianus his Lieutenant; who gave Decebalus a great overthrow; and had then utterly vanquished him, if his wit had not better befriended him then his sword. For, fearing that the Romans making use of their victory, would enter and take possession of his Country: he pitched in the way a great number of s●akes in battle array, putting on them the old Corslets of his Soldiers; which looking like so many men of Arms, frighted the enemy from approaching the Country. Trajane was the next that made war against him, and brought him to that exigent, that having with much loss endured some few skirmishes, 
Transylvania.  he yielded himself, and is acknowledged a friend to the Senate and people of Rome. But being one of a high spirit, and born in a free air, he once again fell off from the Romans, but to his own destruction: for seeing by the valour of Trajane, his kingdom conquered and his Palace taken and destroyed, he fell upon his own sword, and Dacia was made a Province of the Roman Empire. Lost in the time of Galienus, it was again recovered by Aurelianus, who finding how difficult and chargeable the keeping of it was like to be, transplanted the Roman Colonies and the more civil sort of the Natives, on the other side of the River, placing them betwixt the two Mysias, (in some part of each) and calling the Country given to them by the name of Dacia, or New Dacia; leaving the Old unto the Goths and others of the barbarous Nations, whose thoroughfare it was in all their enterprises and designs on the Roman Empire. Divided by Aurelianus into the two Provinces of Dacia Mediterranea, and Dacia Ripensis: this lying on the banks of the Danow, the other more within the land; which with the Provinces of Moesia superior, Dardania, Praevalitana, and part of Macedonia salutaris, made up the whole Diocese of Dacia in the times succeeding. Subject with that of Macedon to the Praefectus Praetorio for Illyricum, and consequently appertaining (after the division) to the Eastern Empire. And it continued in this state till the time of Justimian, who being a Native of this Country, subdued it from the command of that Praefect, and instituted both a Praefectus Praetorio for this Diocese only in Civil matters, and a Primate for the affairs of the Church; both settled in the City of Justiniana, of his own foundation: enlarging the jurisdiction of the first by the addition of some part of Macedonia Secunda, and Pannonia Secunda; and giving to the other all those preeminences which had been anciently enjoyed by the greater Patriarches. But this new Institution was of no continuance. For first the Sclaves, and afterwards the Russians, Hungars, and Bulgarians, breaking over the Danow, dismembered it piecemeal from the Empire, and divided it under new names amongst themselves. Of which together with the nature of the soil and people, I shall speak anon: having first took a view of the Rivers, Hills, and other Landmarks, which are to be my chief guides in the chorography or description of them.  
The Rivers then of most note are 1 The Danow, which here at Axium or Axiopolis a town of Bulgaria, takes the name of Ister, continuing it from thence to its Aestuarium, where it falleth into the Euxine Sea, with 7 mouths or channels: that is to say, 1 Pence, 2 Naracustoma, 3 Calostoma, 4 Plendostoma, 5 Spireostoma, 6 Boreostoma: the name of the last I find not amongst my Authors, quia languidissimum ne● perpetuum, as it is in Ptolemie. 2 Marulius, now called Marisch, 3 Terms, 4 Alluta, keeping its old name, 5 Hierasus, all of old Dacia, and all falling into the Danow or Ister; as do also Ciabrus, now Ibar, a River of Servia; and 6 Sucoma of Bulgaria, or the Lower Mysia. Chief Mountains of it, be 1 The Carpathian, 2 Scardus, 3 Ozbelus, whereof the first parteth it from Sarmatia Europaea, the second from Dalmatia, and the third from Macedon.  
This said we will proceed to the description of the several Provinces, which we have comprehended under this name of Dacia, that is to say, 1 Transylvania, 2 Moldavia, 3 Walachia, 4 Rascia, 5 Servia, 6 Bulgaria; the first four in Old Dacia, on the North side of the Danow; the two last in New Dacia, on the South thereof.  

1 TRANSYLVANIA.  
TRANSYLVANIA is bounded on the East with Moldavia, on the West with the Upper Hungary, on the North with Russia Nigra, a Province of the Realm of Poland, from which parted by the Carpathian Mountains; on the South with Rascia, and Walachia.  
It took this name from the great Woods lying betwixt it and Hungary, the name in Latin signifying the Country beyond the woods. By the Dutch it is called Seven Burgen, from seven Castles or strong holds anciently built in it, to defend the Frontiers: Septemcastrensis in some Latin Authors, upon that occasion. But by the more elegant Latinists, it hath been named Pannodacia, as that part of Dacia, which either was inhabited by the Pannonians, or made subject to them.  
The soil doth naturally abound with wine, corn, and fruit, of which it was so plentiful in the times of the Romans that the Emperor Trajan caused a piece of money to be coined, having the figure of Ceres, holding in the one hand a Cornucopia, and in the other a plain Tablet with this inscription, Abundantia Daciae. Particularly besides great plenty of wheat and most excellent wines, it yieldeth great store of Cherries, Damascens, Malacotoons, Musk-melons, not inferior to those of Italy; as also Centaurie good store, and many other Medicinal plants; some mines of Gold and Silver, many of Iron, Brass, and Copper; and not a few veins of Salt and Sulphur. Of Cattle such abundance, that many times large Oxen, are sold for a Floren or half a Crown a piece; and a most notable breed of Horses: not to say any thing of that variety of wild beasts which they have in their Woods and Forests, and of all sorts of Fowl both for food and pleasure.  
The people are much of the same nature with the Hungarians, to whom they have been a long time subject, but somewhat more stubborn and untractable, speak the same language that they do, with some difference in the Dialect only: converted at the same time to the Christian Faith, and under the same forms of Ecclesiastical government. In former times they used to read, as the Jews do, from the right hand to the left; but of late herein conform to the Western Nations, from whom they are generally descended.  
For that the people of this Country are the progeny of the Saxons, is evident by the Saxon language yet in part retained. 
Transylvania.  2 We find that Charles the Great, like a politic Conqueror, placed man● of that Nation here; weakening so their strength at home, and fortifying the bounds of his Emp●●● And 3 by a story recited by Versiegan, which we touched in our description of Brunswick; the whole narration is this. Halberstade was beyond credit troubled with Rats, which a Musician whom they called the Peed piper, undertaking for a great mass of money to destroy; they agree: hereupon he tuned his pipes, and all the Rats in the town dancing after them, are drowned in the next River. This done he asketh his pay, but is denied; whereupon he striketh up a new fit of mirth: all the children male and female of the town follow him into the hill Hamelen, which presently closed again. The parents miss their children, and could never hear news of them; now of late some have found them in this Country, where I also leave them: only telling you this, that this marvellous accident is said to happen the 22 of July 1376. since which time it is said that the people of Halberstade permit not any Drum, Pipe, or other Instrument to be sounded in that street: and established a Decree, that in all writings of Contract or Bargain, after the date of our Saviour's Nativity, the date also of this their children's transmigration should be added in rei memoriam. But though the Dutch or Saxons make up the main body of them, yet being conquered by the Hungars, they received many of their Colonies; and in the Northern parts there remain still some of the old Scythians planted there by Attila. Out of those Members is the body of this State composed, so strong and populous that it is conceived to be able to raise an Army of 90000 men; and actually did arm 6000 horse and 12000 foot for the battle of Keresture, anno 1596. being more by 2000 then the whole Realm of Hungary sent unto that service.  
Chief Towns herein of the foundation of the Dutch or Saxons, are 1 Hermansted, in Latin, Hermanopolis (of old called Cibinium from the River Cibin on which it was situate) so named of one Herman the Founder of it; little inferior to Vienna for strength or greatness; well fortified both by Art and Nature. 2 Cronstad, in Latin called Corona, by some Brassovia, by others Stephanopolis, this last name given it by Stephen King of Hungary, who repaired and beautified it. Situate on the borders of Walachia, amongst fruitful Mountains, remarkable for a fair Library, a kind of Academy, and the most noted Emporie or Mart-town of all this Country: of great resort, especially in the time of their public Fairs, by Turks, Arabians, Greeks, Armenians, Polanders, Walachians, and other Nations. 3 B●st●icium (by the Dutch called Noren) so called from the River Bistrice, which runneth through it: so pleasant and so sweet a town, that there is no dirt or mire to be seen at any time; or if there be, the people presently swell up the River and so cleanse the streets. 4 Mediesus (by the Dutch, Meduish) so called, quasi Medius Consessus, because situate in the midst of the Country; a town almost as neat as Bistrice. 5 Segoswaria, or Schesburg, on the declivitie of an hill. 6 Zabesus or Laiz, once the chief town of the Saxons, but now much decayed; situate in a very deep valley, well fenced with waters, and those waters well stored with fish. 7 Clausenbourg, the Zeugma of Ptolemie, in Latin called Claudiopolis, from Claudius the second Emperor, by whom re-edified: at first a Colony of the Saxons or Dutch only: but of late times the Hungarians coming in as strangers, were at last privileged as Citizens, and inhabit it together with them. The town well seated in the middle of a pleasant Plain, encompassed with an handsome wall, and beautified with elegant buildings. 8 Alba Julia, now Weisenberg, the Apulum of Ptolemie, situate on a small brook then called Apnus, (but now Oratas) whence it had the name. Built on the side of an Hill near the River Maruch (or Morusus,) overlooking a large and fruitful Plain: heretofore a Bishops See, and the ordinary residence of the Prince or Vaivod of Transylvania; but now a Garrison of Hungarian Soldiers, holding it for the Emperor as King of Hungary.  
Chief towns belonging to the Hungarians, and by them inhabited, are 1 Varadin, much mentioned in the stories of these later times, since the Invasions of the Turks, situate on the borders of Hungary. 2 Thorda, built in or near the place where stood the Salinae of Ptolemie, so called from the abundance of Salt-pits which were then about it. 3 Enguedine, by the Romans called Annium, from a Causey leading to it, raised by one Anuius, and from him so named; some fragments whereof are still remaining 4 Deva, remarkable for a vein of the best Wines. 5 Fenuschium, affording very pleasant wines also, not inferior to those of V●nusium in Italy. 6 Zilahi, 7 Gela, of which little memorable. 8 Millenbach, not far from which betwixt it and the Town of Bros, is a very strong fortress, commanding a straight and narrow passage leading into this Country out of Hungary.  
In the North part hereof lieth the Province called ZACULEIA, inhabited by the Scyculi, or old brood of Seythians, brought hither by Attila, on his first conquest of this Country, and here still continuing. A people which have much in them of the ancient Hunn, and had heretofore a peculiar language to themselves: but now they speak the Hungarian generally, differing in the Dialect only. But though, by the necessity of commerce and co-habitation, they are brought into the same language; they still retain their ancient customs, governed by their own Laws, and living after the same manner as the Swissers do; each of their Cantons (seven in number) being absolute in and of itself, but all united with the Transylvanians, and with one another, for defence of the whole Country against the several pretensions of the Germane and Turkish Emperors. And though they do acknowledge some subjection to the Emperor as King of Hungary, yet it is but what they list themselves: being anciently privileged from all taxes, more than the paying of a Bull for every household at the Coronation of the new King, when and how oft soever it may chance to happen. Their Cant●ns, (Seds they call them,) are 1 Seps●, 2 Orbay, 3 Kisdy, 4 Czyk, 5 Gyrgio, or Vduarheli, 6 Marous Zeek, and 7 Aranias' Zeek; so called from the chief town in each division. In former times no Nobleman, nor any one of better means and greater eminence than other, was known amongst them: but now of late that parity (or confusion rather) is grown out of credit, and some begin to over-top the rest both in power and title, as in other places.  
The first Inhabitants of the old Dacia, whereof this Province was a part, were the Anarti, Taurisci, Rhatacensii, Cancoensii, the Burredensii, and Biephi, etc. first conquered by Lysimachus, the great and mighty King of Thrace, one of the renowned Captains of Alexander the Great, in token whereof, innumerable medals in the age of our Grandfathers were found in this Country, having his Image on the one side, and this word Victoria on the other. How they were afterwards subdued by the Emperor Trajan, and quitted by Aurelianus, hath been shown already. Being forsaken by the Romans it was won by the Goths, their constant dwelling, till forced over the Danow by the Hunnus, the next possessors of this Country, the road or thoroughfare from that time of those barbarous Nations, which out of Asia made their inroads on the Europaeans. Having been successively subdued by the Sclaves and Rosses, this part hereof was conquered by Stephen the first King of Hungary, surnamed the Saint, by whose persuasion and inducements, they received the Gospel. Governed after this time, as a member of that Kingdom, by a Deputy whom they called the Vaivod of Transylvania, (the word Vaivod signifying as much as Praefectus Militiae, or a Lord Lieutenant;) a man by reason of the greatness of his place and power of most authority in that Kingdom. The names and succession of these Vaivods till the time of John Huniades, comes imperfectly to us; but after that more clear and constant in this order following.  

The VAIVODS and PRINCES of TRANSYLVANIA.  
1 John, surnamed Huniades, made Vaivod hereof by Vladislaus the 4. A man of great valour and renown, the great Defender of his Country against the Turks, whom he overthrew in many battles, especially in that of Marous, where he slew 50000 of them. He died about the year 1458.  
2 Stephen, of the noble family of Battori, Vaivod in the time of Mathias King of Hungary, the son of Huniades.  
3 John II. surnamed the Sepusio, after the death of Lewis the 2. chosen King of Hungary, of whom before.  
1526 4 Americus, Bishop of Veradium, made Vaivod by John de Sepusio, on his taking of the Crown of Hungary: treacherously murdered for not complying with the Turks, anno 1534.  
1540 5 Stephen Maysat, a noble Hungarian but extremely ambitious, having not long after the death of Americus usurped the Vaivodship, was in the year 1540 confirmed in that dignity.  
1541 6 Stephen III. son of John de Sepusio the late King of Hungary, by Solyman the Magnificent made Vaivod of Transylvania, being then an Infant, by whom deprived of his Kingdom of Hungary not long before.  
7 Stephen IV. surnamed Battori, made Vaivod by the Turk; and afterwards on the commendation of Amurath the 3. chosen King of Poland.  
1575. 8 Christopher Battori brother of Stephen, on whose election unto Poland he succeeded here, and was the first who leaving the title of Vaivod, took that of Prince of Transylvania.  
9 Sigismond son of Christopher, shook off the Turkish bondage, defeated many of their Armies, and slew some of their Bassas (the Scanderberg of the times he lived in.) But not being able to hold out against so potent an adversary, he resigned his estate to Rodolphus the Emperor; having for it in exchange the Dukedoms of Oppelen and Ratibor in Silesia, and an annual pension of 50000 Joachims'. But finding his pension ill paid, he made a new resignation of it to  
1599 10 Andrew Battori, cousin of Sigismond, slain within the year by the Vaivod of Valachia. After whose death  
1601 11 Rodolphus Emperor and King of Hungary, is admitted Prince of Transylvania, on the second resignation of Sigismond: But his Soldiers behaving themselves with too great insolence, Sigismond was called back again, but never well settled.  
1604 12 Justine Battori, surnamed Botscay, succeeded on the death of Sigismumd, by the power of the Turks, by whose help he cleared the Country of the Germane Soldiers.  
1608 13 Gabriel Battori, of the family of the former Princes, succeeded by the favour of Achmet the Great Turk: after whose death so welcome to his neighbours and subjects.  
1613 14 Bethlem Gabour, by the same Achmet, was made Prince of Transylvania, a professed enemy of the house of Austria, but one that with a great deal of noise did them little hurt.  
1630 15 Stephen Ragotzi, 
Moldavia.  on the death of Bethlem Gabour, succeeded Prince by the power and favour of the Turks; under whose Clitentele and protection he doth still enjoy it, (as his predecessors did before him) against all pretensions of the Empire: as on the other side, defended by the Emperor and Crown of Poland from being made thrall unto the Turks.    

2 MOLDAVIA.  
MOLDAVIA is bounded on the East with the Sea, on the West with Transylvania; on the North with the River Niester, the Tyras of Ptolemie and the Ancients, by which parted from Podolia a Province of POLAND; and on the South with Walachia.  
It is so called, as some say, quast Moetavia from its nearness to the fens of Moeotis, or rather from the Huns and other people of those fens, who possessed the same. Others conceive that it was at first called Maurdavia, i. e. nigrorum Davorum Regio, the country of the black Davi, (for by the name of Davi were the Dacians called, as we find in Strabo and some others:) so named from their complexion or the colour of their Caps and other garments; as Nigra Russta, a near neighbouring Province of the Realm of Poland, on the like occasion. But the more probable opinion (as I take it) is, that it took this name from the River Moldava which runneth through it; as the Moravians had that name from the River Morava.  
The country is very fruitful in corn, wine, grass, and wood, but more used for pasturage then tillage, by reason of the great want of people to manure the land: by means whereof it affordeth great plenty of Beef and Mutton, whereby they supply some parts of Poland, and the populous City of Constantinople. And these they issue out in so great a number, that the tenth penny exacted by the Prince or Vaivod, in the way of Custom, amounteth to 150000 Crowns per annum: and yet the Clergy and the ●entry are discharged of this impost. But the main trade of this Country is not driven by the Natives, the Port-townes being ●ull of Armenians, Jews, Hungarians, and Raguzian Merchants, who forestall the Markets, and barter all their corn and wine into Russia and Poland; their skins, wax, honey, powdered beef, Pulse, and butter into Constantinople.  
The country is in a manner round, the Diameter each way being near upon 300 English miles: but so ill-inhabited by reason of the neighbourhood of the Turks, Tartars, and Polonian Cosacks, that certain English Gentlemen having in the year 1609. traveled at least 240 miles in the country, could meet in all the way but nine towns and villages; and for an hundred miles together, the grass so high that it rotten on the ground for want of cattle to eat it, and of men to order it. So that we are not to expect in it many eminent Cities, or towns of note: though it afford two Archbishops, and two Bishops Sees, followers (as all the rest of the people are) of the traditions and doctrines of the Church of Greece.  
The principal of those which be are 1 Occazoma, or Zucconia, the Vaivods' seat, 2 Fucciania, 3 Fazeling, of which little memorable: 4 Kotjim, a place of great strength on the borders of Poland: by some called Cochina, the ordinary magazeen of the country: 5 jassy commonly called Yas, the chief Town for wealth and trade in all this Province: 6 Bender, Niester; on the Euxine Sea. 7 Polada near the Danow, 8 Bialograd or Bologrove situate on or near the river Tyras, now called a strong town against the Tartars and Polonians. 9 Keel, anciently called Achi●●eia, situate on the shores of the Euxine Sea, for the most part compassed round with the waters of it; and therefore said by Ptolemie to be an Island. 10 Ac German, of old called Asprocastron, & Moncastrum, a very strong Town in the same coast also: both taken by Bajazet the second Emperor of the Turks, anno 1485. But these three Towns are not so properly in Moldavia, at least not in Moldavia properly so called, as in a little Province called Bessarabia, lying on the Euxine, formerly counted part thereof, till conquerred by the Turks in the year aforesaid, it became a member of that Empire. A tract inhabited by the Bess● in the times of Ptolemie, who being drivenout of their country by the Bulgarians, settled themselves (as some say) in that part of Sclavonia, which is now called Bosnia.  
The whole Country following the fortune of Transylvania, and the rest of Dacia till the coming of the Sclaves and Rosses, was for a while accounted part of the Russian Empire; till the dismembering of that Empire by the Tartars. After which time it was sometimes Homager to the Polanders, sometimes to the Hungarians, according as the V●ivods or Princes of it could find best conditions. By Mahomet the Great it was made Tributary to the Turks; but the Tribute at the first very light and easy, not above 2000 Crowns, per annum: that mighty Emperor, who aimed at more profitable conquests, being loath to spend his Forces on so poor a purchase, as the addition of this Province would have been unto him. But Bajazet his son, finding how fit it lay for the more absolute command of the Euxine Sea, took in that part hereof, which is called Bessarabia, reducing it into the form of a Turkish Province, anno 1485. as before was said, imposing on the rest an increase of the former tribute, and so left it unto the disposal of its natural Princes. After which time the Vaivods fearing to be made Vassals to the Turks, did many times rise in Arms against them; aided therein sometimes by the Hungarians, and sometimes by the Polander; which last pretended to the Sovereignty and chiefage of it. Bogdanus Vaivod hereof in the time of Selimus the second uniting himself more closely with the P●lo●ians; became thereby suspected by the Turkish Tyrant, who with a great power cha●ed him out of his country: and gave the same unto one John a Moldavian born, but bred up for the most part in the Turkish Court (where he renounced his faith, 
Valachia.  and was circumcised) under the yearly tribute of 60000 Crowns. But John the new made Vaivod was no sooner settled, but he returned again to his first Religion, and for that cause grew less affected by the Turkes●: Which being observed by the then Vaivod of Valachia, he practised to obtain that dignity for his brother Peter, offering to double the said tribute; and to assist in subjugation of the Country. The Turk accepting of these offers, compounds an Army of 70000 Null, 30000 Turks, and 3000 Hungarians, with which they fall into Moldavia: and were so gallantly received by the noble Vaivod, that few of them escaped the slaughter. But being afterwards betrayed by his old friend Czarnieviche; and against faith given barbarously murdered by the Turkish Bassa: Moldavia fell into the hands of the Turks, and was united to that Empire, an. 1574. the Vaivods from that time forwards, being nominated by the Turkish Emperors, and governing as substitutes and Lieutenants for and under them. And though Aaron one of the succeeding Vaivods did shake off this yoke, and confederated himself with Sigismond Prince of Transylvania, and Michael Vaivod of Valachia, for defence of themselves and their Estates against that Enemy; yet being afterwards supplanted by Roswan one of his own ambitious subjects, and that confederacy disjointed; it became subject first unto the Polonians by the power and practise of Zamoyskie, Chancellor of Poland; and then unto Rodolphus Emperor of Germany; and finally unto the Turk, as before it was. And though the Polanders have since made use of some opportunities in imposing Vaivods on this country, in despite of the Turks; yet was it commonly to their own loss, little or no benefit to the Moldavians: and in the end drew the whole power of the Turks upon themselves in the reign of Osman: never since intermeddling in the affairs of this Province, but leaving them entirely to the Turks disposing; who receive hence some yearly tribute, but have not hitherto obtained the entire possession of it, so long since aimed at by those Tyrants.   

3 VALACHIA.  
VALACHIA is bounded on the East with Moldavia and a branch of the Ister, or Danubius bending towards the North; on the West with Rascia; on the North with Transylvania, and some part of Moldavia, and on the South with the Danubius wholly, by which parted from Servia and Bulgaria. First called Flaccia, from one Flaccus, a Noble Roman, who on the conquest hereof in the time of Trajan, brought hither an Italian Colony; afterwards by corruption Vlachia, and at last Valachia.  
But the name of Flaccia or Vlachia, was at first of a more large extent, than it is at present; comprehending all Moldavia also: divided in those times by a ridge of Mountains, into Cisalpina, and Tran alpinaa; the name of Moldavia, being afterwards appropriated to the one, and that of Valachia (properly and specially so called) unto the other. The people of both in token of their first extraction, speak a corrupt Latin or Italian language: but in matters of Religion follow the dictates of the Greek Church, and obey the Patriarch of Constantinople; under whom all Ecclesiastical affairs are governed by one Archhishop and two Bishops. In other things they partake generally of the rudeness and barbarity of those Nations which have since subdued them; being a rough hewn people, hardly civilised, ignorant for the most part of letters and all liberal sciences: not weaned perfectly (in so long time of their possession of Christianity) from the superstitions of the Gentiles; swearing by Jupiter and Venus, marrying, and unmarying at their pleasures; much given to magical charms, and incantations; and burying with their dead both clothes and victuals, for their relief in that long journey to the other world.  
It is in length 500, in breadth 120 miles: the country for the most part plain, and very fertile; affording store of cattle, a breed of excellent Horses, iron-mines, salt-pits, and all provisions necessary to the life of man. Some vines they also have, and not few mines of gold and silver, more than for fear of the Turks and other ill neighbours they dare discover: begird about with woody mountains, which afford them fuel; and very well watered with the Rivers of Pruth, called anciently thrasus', 2 Stertius, 3 Fulmina, 4 Teln, 5 Alluta, all of them falling into 6 the Danow; which in this Province, at the influx of Fulmina takes the name of Ister: yet is it not (at the present) very populous, the spaciousness and fertility hereof considered; by reason of the ill neighbourhood of the Tartars, Turks, and Polonian Cossackes: their late long wars against those Nations and the Dutch, having much decreased their former numbers: with which they so abounded in the times foregoing, that the Vaivod of this country in the year 1473. was able upon little warning to bring 70000 men into the field for a present service.  
Places of most note herein are 1 Galatz on the influx of the River Pruth or Hierasus into the Danubius, the waters of which River are so unwholesome, that it causeth the body to swell. 2 Trescortum, not far from which they dig a bituminous earth, so refined and pure, that usually they make Candles of it instead of wax. 3 Prailaba, by some called Brailovia, the town of most trade in all this country; situate on the Danow, and defended with a very strong Castle fortified by Art, and Nature, and furnished with a strong garrison of Turks, as the key of this Province, opening the door unto the rest. The town most cruelly destroyed and razed to the ground, with an incredible slaughter of the Inhabitants of all sexes, ages, for the spaces of four days together: by John the Vaivod of Moldavia spoken of before, at his first revolting from the Turks: but the Castle in regard of the great strength of it, scarce attempted by him. 4 Teina, a Fortress of great strength, but in the hands of the Turks also. 5 Zorza, corruptly for San-Georgio, seated on the Danow, with an arm whereof the Castle of it is encompassed, garrisoned by the Turks, and by them held to be so strong and so safe a place, that at the taking of it by Sigismond the Prince of Transylvania, an. 1596. there were found in it 39 great pieces of Ordinance with such store of Arms and Ammunition as might well have served for a whole kingdom. 6 Tergovista, sometimes the chief City of the Province, and the ordinary residence of the Vaivod, till the taking of it by the Turks: once beautified with a fair and famous Monastery, by the Turks converted into a fortress, environed with deep trenches, strong Bulwarks upon every quarter, and great store of Ordinance: but many times lost and got again according to the changes and chance of war. 7 Bucaresta, about a day's journey from Tergovista, seated on the Danow, remarkable for two bridges built near unto it: the one of Boats, (the laying whereof took up no less than an whole month's time) for the transporting of the Army of Sinan Bassa, against Sigismond Prince of Transylvania before mentioned: and broken down by the said Bassa in his flight, having bern worsted in all places by the Transylvanian. The other work of the Emperor Trajan in his war against Decebalus King of Dacia, built all of stone, and laid on piles and Arches of a wonderful greatness; 24 piles or pillars whereof are yet remaining to the great admiration of all beholders. 8 Cebium, of old called Lycostomos, in vain besieged by the forces of Mahomet the Great, coming in person to subdue this petit Province. 9 Zarmizegethusa, the seat Royal of Decebalus king of Dacia, taken and destroyed by Trajan in his war against him: who causing it to be repaired and beautified more than formerly, gave it the privileges of Rome, and the name of Vlpia Trajana; which it retained as long as Dacia was a Province of the Roman Empire. Now a small village called Vetzel. Some stones have been digged hereabouts up with this inscription, COLONIA VLPIATRAJANA, AUG. DACIE. ZARMIS: which clearly show as well the dignity and esteem, as the antiquity of the place before Trajan's time.  
This Province, as the rest of Dacia, on that side of the Danow, after the coming in of the Sclaves and Rosses, was under Princes of their own, whom they called (as those of Transylvania and Moldavia did) by the name of Vaivods. Protected by the Hungarian Kings they lived long in peace, till sensible of the approaching danger which the conquest of most part of Servia and Bulgaria by the Turks, was like to bring them: the Vaivod of it in the time of Bajazet the first passed over the Danow with his Forces, and having done great spoil on the Turkish Territories, returned again into his country. Rather provoked then weakened with which invasion, Bajazet comes into Valachia, overcomes the Vaivod in a pitched field, compelling him to sue for peace, and to pay him tribute. But Bajazet being not long after taken Prisoner by Tamerlane, and the succession controverted amongst his sons, the imposed tribute was withheld; till Mabomet the fifth King of the Turks, having settled the affairs of that tottering State, anno 1417. enforced them to a new composition, and the payment of all former reckonings. The fortunate successes of Huniades in several battles induced them once more to change their Masters, and to put themselves under the protection of the Hungarians, as they had been formerly, but they paid dear for it: their country being made the Thoroughfare of the Turkish forces in their attempts upon that Kingdom. But the Hungarians being vanquished at the battle of, Cassova by Amurath the second, the accustomed tribute was brought in, and the Turks satisfied for the present, being then hardly put to it by the famous Scanderbag. Not long after in the year 1462. Mahomet the Great undertook the conquest of this Country, upon advertisement that Wladus the then Vaivod of it intended to join with the Hungarians in some war against him: and finding how unprofitably he had spent his Forces in fight against woods, mountains, and a wasted country, he set up Dracala the younger brother of Wladus, to claim the Government, who making a party amongst the people, and having the Turk for his assistance and support, possessed himself of the estate, to be holden of him as a Vassal to the Turkish Empire. And it continued in this state, the Vaivods being after this at the Turks appointment, and paying all exactions imposed upom them, till the revolt of Sigismond the Prince of Transylvania, anno 1595. at what time Michael the then Vaivod hereof, taking that opportunity to shake off this yoke, confederated with him and the Moldavian for their common safety. And though he held out longer against Turk and German then either of the other did; discomfited the Turks by his own proper Forces at the battle of Nicopolis, vanquished the Transylvanians, and added that Province for a while unto this Estate, yet being at last outed of his country by the Polanders, and an other put into his place, he was shamefully slain in his own Tent by the privity and consent of Basta, Lieutenant of Rodolphus Emperor, and King of Hungary. After whose death the country miserably distracted betwixt two Vaivods, the one placed by the Emperor Rodolph, and the other by Mahomet the Grand Signieur; endured all the spoil and wrack which so calamitous a competition could bring upon it: till in the end the fortune of the Turks prevailing, the Null were constrained to submit unto their disposal, and receive their Vaivods from that Court as they had done formerly; performing their accustomed duties, and paying such yearly tribute is as laid upon them. Which notwithstanding partly by their own natural unquietness, and partly by the ambition of such persons as contend for that dignity; they have since been many times embroiled in wars; never so quietly composed, but that a new hope, or the artifices of the Turkish Ministers starts them into action. By means whereof when they have tired and spent themselves in their own combustions, they may in fine be fully conquered, and made the next addition to the Turkish Monarchy.   

4 RASCIA.  
RASCIA is bounded on the East with Valachia, 
Rascia.  on the West with Hungary; on the North with Transilvania, and on the South with the River Danow: encompassed on three sides with that River, and another now called Thames, by the Latins, Samus; and on the East divided from Valachia by the River Alluta: Called Rascia from the Rasciani, a Sclavonian people, whom Ortelius placeth in this tract; and from him Maginus.  
Places of most importance in it are 1 Chrysonicum, an old town almost wholly ruinated, till fortified by the Turks, anno 1449. who marking the convenient situation of it on the Banks of Danubius, opposite to the influx of the River Morava, and how commodiously it stood to command and annoy the Country; made it their first work to possess themselves of it. 2 Bodon, upon the Danow also, a town of trade, memorable for the Marts or Fairs which are here held annually. 3 Zarnovia, 4 Covin, 5 Novebarde, 6 Severin, not far from which, betwixt it and Bucaresta a Town of Valachia, are the remainders of Trajan's bridge before mentioned. 7 Colombes, 8 Columbella.  
These Rascians, as before is said, were a tribe of Scalves, settled in this country at the time of their first spreading in the East, and here continuing ever since in possession of it. Governed at first by their own Princes, whom by a name borrowed from the Grecians, they called their Despots: that being once the title of the heir apparent or designed successor of the Eastern Empire, as Caesar had been formerly in the Empire of Rome. But as the following Emperors did affect new titles, so that of Despot fell from one step to another, till given at last unto the Governors of Provinces, as the Despot of Epirus, Pelopennesus, etc. and in the end assumed by the several Princes of Rascia, Servia, and Bulgaria. How this estate became united unto Servia, I am yet to seek: but sure I am it was united in the person of George, Despot of Servia, and as a part of his estate surprised by Amurath the second, who boasted his success therein (in a speech made unto his soldiers at the siege of Belgrade) notwithstanding that he had to strive with hunger, thirst, labour, and desperation. So that depending as it did, on the fortune of Servia, we shall there hear more of it: here adding only by the way, that at the time when Sigismond Prince of Transylzania had won so many noble victories against the Turks, 10000 of these Rascians casting off that yoke, offered themselves unto his service: the only memorable action which is told us of them since their subjection to the Turk; though that was only the attempt of some private Adventurers, the whole Nation still continuing in obedience, as before they did.  
And thus we see by whom the whole Province of old Dacia became in part possessed, and in part made tributary to the Turks: the whole being so at their disposing, that before the Revolt of the three Provinces so often mentioned, it yielded one way with another into the Treasury of the Grand Signior no less than a million of Ducats yearly. Knolles in his Turkish History doth report it so. And his Continuatour doth affirm, that Moldavia only before the said revolt, did yearly yield unto the Turk a whole tun of gold, 2000 horses for service, 10000 great measures of wheat, with as much barley, and a wonderful proportion of butter, honey, and other victuals, adding withal that the other two Provinces paid as much or more for their yearly tribute. After which rate the estimate made by Knolles may hold very good. But since the reduction of these Countries to their former obedience, the Turks have been more moderate in their exactions then they were before, for fear of startling them to some new engagement, whom they have brought to this obedience and conformity with such a vast expense both of blood and treasure, as would have purchased the best Kingdom of Christendom in the open market. In somuch that the ordinary tribute of Moldavia is now but 40000 Chequins, that for Valachia but 24000 of the same coin: besides 1000 horses yearly sent from both. Such bribes and presents as are given by the Vaivods hereof, either to get or hold their places being Merchantable ware, and wholly at the Turks disposing, not being part of this Account. Which said we will pass over the Danow, and look upon the other part of this Province, called Dacianova or New Dacia, containing after our account four Provinces of the Roman Empire, that is to say, both Mysias, Scythia, and Dardania, besides the two Dacias, Mediterranea and Ripensis, interjected betwixt the two Mysias as before is said: all now reduced only unto two of the Turkish Provinces, namely the Countries of Servia and Bulgaria.   

5 SERVIA.  
SERVIA is bounded on the East with Bulgaria, on the West with Bosnia, and some part of the Lower Hungary; on the North with the Danubius, by which parted from Rascia; on the South with Albania, and part of Macedon. It containeth all Mysia superior, and a great part of Dardania; and took this new name from the Servii, or Sorabi, a Sclavonian people, of whom more hereafter.  
The Country very rich and fruitful, 
Servia.  before the conquest of it by the Turks; well stored 〈◊〉 mines or gold, and silver, especially about Zerbenic, a strong town hereof. The people rude and 〈◊〉, and much given to wine; ralse of their promises and that upon slight occasions, ●o that there is but little trust to be laid upon them.  
Chief Rivers of this Country are Colubra, and 2 Limb, falling into the Savus, 3 Ibar falling into 4 Morava, as that into the Danow over against Chrysoni●um, or Crusoveccia, a strong town of Rascia, Principal towns hereof 1 Nissa, the Nessum as I take it of Ptolemie; by whom said to be a City of the Dardanians, now the Metropoiiss o● this country, and the key thereof; besieged and taken by Amurath the third King of the Turks, anno 1367. 2 Vidina, by the Turks called Kiratow, taken by ●eris Beg, in the beginning of Ba●azet the first; and ever since the seat of a Turkish Sanziack under the Beglerbeg or B●ssa of Temesw●● 3 Crat●va, and 4 Zerbenic, rich in silver mines; a great temptation to the Turks to invade this Country. 5 Simand●●a, or Senderovia, by some called Spenderobe; by the Hungarians Zendrem, by the Turks Semunder; situateon the Danow not far from Belgrade, and taken by Amurath the second, anno 1438. since governed by a Turkish Sanziack under the Beglerbeg of Buda. 6 Novegrad in the borders hereof, fortified with an impregnable Castle. 7 Stonibourg (in Latin Stonibrigadun) the ordinary seat of the ancient Despots. 8 Prisden, said by M●rcator to be the birthplace of the Emperor Justinian; most like to be Tauresium, a City of the Dardanians, mentioned by Procopius, who maketh it the birthplace of that Emperor, by whom repaired and fortified with four great Turrets, thence called Tetra●yrgon. But others (more probably) make him to be born at Lo●hrida, a town of Bulgaria; of which more hereafter. 9 Scopi, by Ptolemie called Scupi, and 10 Vlpianum, first built by T●rajan, whose forename was Vlpius, afterwards re-edified by the said Justinian, and called Secunda Justiniana, (Justiniana Prima being in Balgaria) now a poor Village called Pirethy as Lazius; o● Czanadre as Mar●us Niger is of opinion. 11 Rhae iaria, by Ptolemie for distinction sake, called Rhaetiaria Mysorum, than the chief City of the Moesians; of which now no ruins are remaining. 12 Raveniczen, the Vendenis of Ptolenae, but not else observable  
The old Inhabitants of this Country, such as are most considerable in the story of it, were the Basiarne, the Dardani, and the Moesi: the Tricornesii, and Picensii, spoken of by Ptolemie, being ei●her branches of the Moesi, or else an obscure people not worth the looking after. Of these the Da●●anians were most ancient, inhabiting near Mount Haemus, on the borders of Macedon; a barbarous people, and perpetual Enemies of that Crown, most mischievous in their attempts and designs against it, in the declining state thereof, making great and frequent inroads into that wealthy Country, with the spoils whereof they enriched themselves. Insomuch that Philip the Father of 〈◊〉 finding no other likely means to be rid of that trouble, negotiated with the Bastarnae a strong and hardy Nation that dwelled beyond the Danubius, to abandon their own dwellings, and come to him with their wives and children, promising to assist them in rooting out the Dardanians, and give them possession of their Country. But Philip dying as the Bastarnae were in their march through Thrace, and no care taken by his son to pursue the business, they returned all home again except 30000, which pierced into Dardania, and made their own fortunes as they could. This practi●e as it gave matter of quarrel to the Romans, against the Macedonian, so it occasioned Perseus the son o● Philip, to make use of these Bastarnae against the Romans, at whose request 10000 horse and as many foot passed over the Danow under the conduct of Claudicus, a King amongst them. But finding that Perseus was too straitlaced to part with money for their pay, they returned again; foraging the Country as they passed: but whether they passed over that River, or mingled themselves with the rest of their Nation, who upon Philip's invitation had before come over, that I do not find. How soever, coming by this means acquainted with the sweets of this Country, divers of them came over hither in the following times, incorporating with the Dardanians, or bordering near them; insomuch as Tacitus for the most part joins them both together, either as the same, or a neighbouring Nation, first vanquished and added to the Roman Empire by Cn. Curio Scribonius, immediately upon the end of the civil wars, raised by Spartacus & the Fencers, or Gladiatores: the Mysians or the Moefi being broken at the same time also, an. V. C. 681. As for the Moesi being the last and greatest of these Nations, they were most probably a Colony of the Mysians of the lesser Asia, anciently called Mysi, and the Country Mysia, as those Asians were; and as those Europeans are by the Greek writers generally, and by Florus and some others amongst the Latins: though after for distinction sake, Tacitus, Pliny, Virgil, and generally most Latin Authors give them the name of Moes●. A fierce and savage people they were held to be, Barbari barbarorum, as my Author calleth them; more barbarous then commonly the Barbar●ans were: but for all that, subdued by M. Licinius Crassus in the time of Augustus Caesar, who overcame them in two battles, and after vanquished the Bastarnae and their King Deldo who he killed in fight; the Country reckoned after that as a Roman Province. Continuing in this estate, till the fall of the Eastern Empire, it was subjected by the Sclavi or Sarmatians of Europe; and in the division of the spoil fell unto the Sorabi a Sclavonian people; contractedly called Sorbi, and at last Serbi, Servi, and the Country Servia. Reduced again to the obedience of the Eastern Emperors by Basilius Porphyrogenitus, an. Ch. 1000 or thereabouts; more absolutely conquered by John and Manuel Co●nenus, two of his successors: but so as they were suffered to live under their own Princes, whom they called Despots, Homagers to the Empire, and depending on it. First set on by the Turks in the time of Lazarus the Despot, from whom Amurath the first took the town of Nissa, being the chief of all this Country: provoked thereto by the great forces which the Servians and Bulgarians had raised against him, for the siege of Adrianople. And though Lazarus terrified with this loss, 
Bulgaria.  made his peace with Amurath: yet after he broke out again into open war, in which he was overcome and slain in the plains of Cossova, whereof more anon. To Lazaru● succeeded. Stephen who quietly enjoyed his Dominions here; the Turks being in the mean time embroiled in war amongst themselves by the sons of Bajazet. But that difference being once composed, and Mahomet absolutely settled in his Father's throne; the Turks begun again to pursue this quarrel: which George the son of Stephen compounded with Amurath the second, son of Mahomet, paying the Turk an yearly tribute, and giving him his daughter Mary for a wife or Concubine. But this alliance did not so well unite their affections, (though George did many ill Offices in regard thereof to his Christiun neighbours) nor so well settle his estate; but that Amurath in fine dispossessed him first of Rascia, and afterwards of Servia also, for letting Huniades escape whom he had in his power. And though Amurath was necessitated to restore Servia again, upon the peace made with Vladislaus the King of Hungary; yet Mahomet the Great, on the death of George, soon possessed himself of it. For Lazarus the youngest of George's sons having deprived Stephen and George his elder Brethren (whose eyes Amurath had before put out to make them uncapable of the Government) of the principality; compelled them to seek to Mahomet for aid. But dying whilst these matters were in agitation, his widow put herself and her three sons Peter, John, and Martin, under the protection of the Hungarians; and by that means, but with much trouble and many difficulties (the blind Brethren still soliciting the Turks against her) held the State a while: till the people finding no assurance in that kind of government, and weary of the daily harms they received from the Turks, yielded themselves absolutely to the power of Mahomet, about the year 1460. continuing ever since a Province of the Turkish Empire.   

6 BULGARIA.  
BULGARIA is bounded on the East with the Euxine Sea; on the West with Servia, on the North with the River Danow, which is here called Ister; on the South with Thrace. Called formerly by the name of Mysia inferior, as lying lower than the other on the course of that River; as Servia, lying up the water was called Mysia superior. Afterwards it was reckoned of as a part of Dacia, and in that notion was the Birth-place of Galerius, one of the Caesar's in the Empire of Diocletian; born in this country near the borders of Thrace; not far from the City of Sardica, who therefore in the Martyrologies of the middle times, was called by the name of Dacianus. Finally, it took this name from the Bulgars, a Seythian people, who in the year 566. possessed themselves of it.  
The Country for the most part full of sharp and rugged hills, branches of the great Mountain Haemus, which divides it from Thrace, and spread themselves over all this Province, in somuch that even the midlands of it are rough and stony; and though the lower parts have some plains and valleys, yet are they generally full of Woods and Deserts; the most unpleasant, and least peopled part of both the Dacias. The Inhabitants hereof in some conformity to the country, are patient of all toll and labour, and not easily tired; but nothing is more troublesome than their conversation: more full of courage, then of valour, their courage not proceeding by the rules of reason, but issuing only out of brutishness, or a natural fierceness.  
Places of most note in it, are 1 Axium, or Axiopolis, on the banks of Danubius, which from this town begins to take the name of Ister. It is now called Colonamich, of no great fame otherwise. 2 Dinogetia, by Antonine called Dinigutia, now Drimago, situate also on the Ister, opposite to the influx of Hierasus, and the town of Galatz. 3 Mesembria, situate on the Euxine, and still retaining the old name; in Strabo, by some error of the Transcribers called Menebria. 4 Marcianopolis, on the Ister or Danubius also, built by Trajan in honour of Marcia his sister, whence it had the name: in vain besieged by the Goths, at their first eruptions on this country; and afterwards much mentioned in the stories of that warlike people; for many bicker, and some great battles they had near it with the Emperor Claudius, in one of which overthrown by him which a mighty slaughter. 5 Nicopolis (by the Turks called Nigebol) built by the same Trajan on the Danow, at the fall of the River jatre, at his return from the conquest of Dacia, whence the occasion of the name; the word Nicopolis signifying the City of Victory: sufficiently memorable for the founder of it, more for the many great battles fought near unto it; whereof two the principal. The first, that of Sigismond the Emperor and King of Hungary, besieging it with an Army of 130000 Christians, in the time of Bajazet the first (whose Father Amurath had taken it from the King of Bulgaria) the issue of which siege was this, that Bajazet coming to raise the siege, obtained the victory with the loss of 60000 Turks: the army of the Christians being wholly routed, 20000 slain, all the rest almost taken prisoners; and the young Emperor forced to fly by Sea to Thrace, thence unto Constantinople, afterwards to Rhodes; and at last after 18 months' absence to his Realm of Hungary: the other (as it were in revenge of this) was fought betwixt Michael Vaivod of Valachia, and the forces of Mahomet the third, over whom the Vaivod got a remarkable victory, and as the fruits thereof sacked the City itself, carrying thence great spoil and booty, and infinite multitudes of people, with some whereof he made up his Army, sending the rest to inhabit and manure the void and desert places of his own Dominions. 6 Sophia, called Tibiscum in the time of Ptolemie, repaired by the Emperor Justinian, who gave it this name from a famous and magnificent Temple, founded and dedicated by him unto St. Sophia. The ordinary Residence for these late times of a Turkish Beglerbeg, who hath the chief command of Europe under the grand Signieur: once taken by Huniades, and by him at the command of Vladislaus King of Hungary, burnt unto the ground; but afterwards repaired and more strongly fortified, than it had been formerly. 7 Varna, anciently called Dionysiopolis, situate on the Euxine Sea, near the borderes of Thrace: remarkable for the great defeat there given the Christians; the first flight of Huniades from the face of the Turks, and the death of Vladislaus King of Hungary, spoken of before. 8 Sumium, 9 Pezechium, 10 Calacrium, 11 Galata, and 12 Macropolis; all taken by the Hungarians in their way to Varna, and lost again upon the issue of that battle. 13 Silistria, at this time the chief City hereof, and the ordinary abode of a Turkish Bassa: delivered to Amurath the first, by Sasmenos, Prince or King of Bulgaria, out of a vain hope to save thereby the rest of his country. 14 Parastlaba, or Perstlaba, the ancient seat of the Kings of Bulgaria; till the taking of it by John Zimisces Emperor of Constantinople, by whom caused to be called Johannopolis: but it soon lost that new name, and is now an ordinary village called P●retalaw. 15 Ternova, the usual seat or residence of the later Princes of this country, at the conquest of it by the Turks. 16 Budina, once of great importance, and the chief of this country; but being taken by Huniades in the course of his victories, it was by him burnt down to the ground, as having been the cause of much war to the Christians there: supposed to be built in or near the place, where once stood the old City of Oescus, the principal town of the Triballi, called therefore Oescus Triballorum; though some will have that City to be now called Blida. 17 Venuzina, a town of great strength, and one of the first pieces taken by the Turks. 18 Cossova, fatal to the Christians, who in the plains hereof had two main defeats: the first by Amurath the first, who here discomfited Lazarus the Despot of Servia, and the greatest Army that the Christians ever raised against the Turks: Lazarus himself being slain in the fight, and Amurath himself shortly after the battle stabbed in the belly by one Miles Cobelitz a wounded and half dead soldier, as he was taking a view of the dead bodies which lay there in heaps. The last by Amurath the second to the famous Huniades, whom he here discomfited after a cruel fight continuing three days together; in which were slain 17000 Christians, and amongst them the greatest part of the Hungarian Nobility, Huniades put again to flight, and forced to some extremities to preserve his life, the Turks buying this great victory with the l●ise of 40000 men, as themselves confessed. The place in which these fields were fought, called the Plains of Cossova, extendeth 20 miles in length, and 5 miles in breadth, encompassed round with pleasant mountains in the form of a Theatre; as if it were designed by Nature for a stage of action, 19 Dorostorum, by some of the Ancients called Rhodostolon, the seat in Ptolemies time of the first Legion called Italica; afterwards one of the chief towns which the Rosses and Russians had in this country: from whom taken by John Zimisces the Eastern Emperor, decaying after that time by little and little, and now wholly ruinate. 20 Achrida the birthplace of Justinian, by whom beautified and enlarged, and called Justiniana Prima: who raising the Diocese of Dacia into a Praefecture placed here a Primate for the affairs of the Church, (which honour it doth still retain, the Bishop hereof being the Primate of all Dacia,) and a P●aefectus Praetorio, for affairs of State. But he being dead, the town returned to its old name, now called L' Ochrida, contracted by William of Tyre to A●re; by the Turks called Giustandill; a distinct Principate of itself in the time of Amurath the first, and by him made tributary at his first war upon this country.  
And here it is to be observed that those parts of this country which lie next to the Euxine Sea, had anciently the name of Pontus; a● had some parts of Asia Minor which bordered on the same Sea also: and that the City of Tone as Ptolemie, or Tomos as Pliny calls it, to which Ovid was banished by Augustus Caesar, was a City of this European Pontus, and not of the Persian, as hath been commonly conceived. For Tomi is by Ptolemie placed amongst the Cities of Moesia inferior, and by Ovid on the West or left side of the Euxine, and not upon the South thereof, as appeareth by these lines of his. 
Cum maris Euxini positos ad laeva Tomitas  
Quaerere me laesi Principis ira jubet.  that is to say, 
My wronged Prince's wrath commands me bide  
At Tomos on the Euxines Western side.  The place at this day called Tomiswar, according to Coelius Calcagninus; but others would have it to be the same which is now named Kiovia, in the same tract also; not far from which is said to be a Lake called to this day Owidow Jezcocoor, the Lake of Ovid. For what cause hither banished is not yet agreed on. Some say it was for the unlawful pleasures which he enjoyed with Julia the Emperor's daughter, whom he celebrates in his Amorum under the borrowed name of Corinna. Others imagine that he had seen Augustus himself unnaturally using the company of the same Julia, his daughter; for which the offended Prince exiled him: and that he alludeth hereunto in his book de Tristibus, saying, Cur aliquid vidi, cur noxia lumina feci, etc. A Crime, of which I dare not think that noble Emperor to be any way guilty. But certain it is, that whatsoever was the true reason of it, that which was openly pretended was the writing of those lascivious and inflammatory Books de Arte amandi, tending to the debauchment of youth, and corruption of manners: which he in divers places of his works acknowledgeth for the cause thereof.  
But to return unto the business of this country, the ancient Inhabitants hereof were towards the East the Troglodytae dwelling near the mouth or fall of the river Peuce into the Euxine or Black, Sea; the Peucini inhabiting on the very mouth of it, and in a little Island opposite thereunto called also Pence, now Pizina, the Cribizi, Piarensii, and Dimensii: the Western parts being wholly taken up by the Triballi, the most potent Nation of them all: who only had the happiness to vanquish Philip King of the Maccdonians. For Philip having or pretending a quarrel against Mateas a King of the Sarmatians, entered his country, overthrew him in a set fight, carried with him great booties, and among other things 20000 Mares, for breed, which he took in the battle: it being the custom of the Scythians and Sarmatians, to use Mares only in the wars, because their not stopping in the midst of a race to piss, could be no impediment to them in their flight. In his return homeward, these Triballi deny him passage through their country, unless they might partake of the spoils. This being denied, they fall from words to blows, and next to a pitched field. In which fight Philip was wounded with an Arrow, which passing through his thigh nailed him to his saddle: his horse being galled with the wound falling down to the ground. Which the frighted Macedonians seeing, and supposing him dead, fled out of the field, leaving all their spoils to the Triballi, as if they had been sent out only to be their Receivers. So true an observation is it, that the very lifeblood of an Army runs chiefly in the veins of the General, or supreme Commander. Overtopped after this by the Moesi or mingled with them, they were first broken by the Romans under the conduct of Cn. Curio Scribonius, spoken of before, the absolute Conquest of them and the rest of the Moesians being reserved for the times of Augustus Caesar. By him or his successors the whole country of the Moestans being cast into two Provinces, this part of it had the name of Moesia inferior, that lying Westward up the water being called Moesia superior, for distinctions sake. By the Emperor Aurelianus the Dacians being forced from the other side of the Danow by the barbarous Natitions, or by him prudently removed to avoid their fury were planted here betwixt both the Mysias, divided afterwards into two Provinces, taken out of the other, Mediterranea, and Ripensis: which with the help of the higher Mysia, Dardania, Prevalitana, and part of Macedonia Salutaris, made up the whole Diocese of Dacia, as before was said. The residue hereof now passing under the name of Bulgaria, was afterwards divided into two Provinces also, another Province being taken out of the East parts of the Lower Moesia, lying betwixt the River Phanissus, and the most northern branch of the Ister, which they called Scythia, because the Aroteres a Scythian people did once possess it: the Romans ambitiously affecting to be thought the Conquerrours of that unconquerable Nation. Successively by the Goths and Huns was this country taken from the Romans; recovered again in or before the time of Justinian who had here his Officers, subordinate to the Vicar or Lieutenant of Thrace, to which Diocese they properly belonged. But long they held not in that State; the Sclavonians first, and after the Bulgarians being masters of them. Of the first of these enough hath been said elsewhere. These latter being a Scythian people inhabiting on the banks of the River Volga, were at first called Volgari, afterwards Bulgari: and though some conceive they had the name of Bulgarians from Bulgar the chief town of their Nation; but both uncertain. In the time of the Emperor Anastastus they made their first sally into the Provinces of the Empire, foraging Illyricum and Thrace: afterwards in the reign of Heraclius hired by Cosrhoes the Persian (with many other barbarous Nations) to besiege Constantinople. In the reign of Constantine surnamed Pogonatus, conquering or casting out the Sclaves, they planted themselves in these Countries: compelling the Emperor to compound with them for a sum of money, from making any further inroad upon his Dominions. From this time forwards we find their Princes called by the name of Kings of the Bulgarians; the first of which after their settling in these parts was Trebellius or Trebellis, as some call him: the first Christian Prince of the Bulgarians; by whom Justinian the second was first restored unto the Empire, of which he had been outed by Absimarus; and afterwards well beaten by them, and forced to fly unto Constantinople on some breach between them. Growing into good terms with the Eastern Emperors, they aided them against the Saracens then besieging the Imperial City; of whom they slew 22000 as they were foraging the country and in the time of Leo the fourth, called Porphyrogenitus, they became homagers to the Empire, by whose perswasin Telerichus King of the Bulgarians received the Sacrament of Baptism, and thereupon was honoured by him with a wife of the Imperial family, and the honourable title of a Patrician. Ater this time, the Kings hereof had many privileges indulged them by the Constantinopolitans, not usually communicated unto other Princes, Viz. their Crown of gold, their tier or cap of silk, and their red shoes for their Regal; which were also the Imperial ornaments. To these Kings also, and to these only, did the Greek Emperors allow the title of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as being merely Imperial. Other Kings they called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from the Latin word Reges. Insomuch that when Basilius Macedo had received letters from Pope Adrian the second, wherein Lewis the second the Western Emperor was called Basileus; he razed out that Imperial attribute, and dispatched an embassy to Lewis, wherein he challenged it as his own peculiar Epithet. Some quarrels after falling out, Crunus the Bulgarian King, in the time of Nicephorus successor to the Empress Irene, invadeth Thrace, taketh the City of Sardica, killeth that Emperor in his tent, and worsteth Michael (who succeeded) in the open field; Mesembira, a principal City of this Country being taken and ransacked by him. But Bogor of another temper, not only did receive the Sacrament of Baptism, which many of his Predecessors had intermitted: but brought his subjects (who rebelled on the change of Religion, and thereupon were fought with and vanquished by him) to the same faith also: gratified for that cause by Theodora the Empress, with some large accession unto his estate. After long wars betwixt the Bulgarians, and the following Emperors, the fortune of the Constantinopolitan did at last prevail: Samuel King of the Bulgarians being overthrown, 15000 of his soldiers taken and deprived of sight; and the country conquerred by Basilius the second, 
Bulgaria.  surnamed Porphyrogenitus, anno 1015. from that time tributary to the Empire: to which they did good service in the time of Conctantinus Ducas, using their help against the Vzi, a new swarm of Scythians passing over the Ister with an Army of 60000 fight men, and wasting Macedon and Greece. The like did John another of the Kings thereof, aiding the Greeks against Latins, whom they overthrew with a very great slaughter; Baldwin the Emperor of the Latins in Constantinople being taken prisoner, sent in bonds to Ternova, and there cruelly murdered, an. 1206. Nor were they wanting to assist them against the Turks, when they grew dangerous to that Empire by the taking of Adrianople: for the recovery whereof, they raised a great and puissant Army, unfortunately discomfited by the Forces of Amurath the first, an. 1366. Provoked with which invasion, Amurath having settled his affairs in Afia, with an Army of 30000 falleth into Bulgaria, takes divers places of importance, and prevailed so far, that Sasmenos the last Prince hereof, wrapping his winding sheet about him, to show that he had deserved death, prostrates himself most abjectly at the tyrant's feet, offering to put Sillistria (his strongest City) into his possession. For not performance of which offer, his country is again invaded, most of it taken from him; permitted to enjoy the rest upon hard conditions, as ●assall and tributary to the Turk. But Bajazet, Amurath's successor not content herewith picked a quarrel with him, and made an absolute conquest of Bulgaria, converting it unto a Province of the Turkish Empire, anno 1396. In which state it hath ever since continued, governed by three Turkish Sansiacks under the Beglerbeg of Greece: the Sansiacks residing at Nicopolis, Sillistria, and Sophia, in which last the Beglerbeg himself doth sometimes reside.  
There are in DACIA.  
Archbishops. Bishops.   
And so much for DACIA.   

MOUNT HAEMUS.  
BEfore we enter into Greece we must cross MOUNT HAEMUS, a ridge of hills extending from the Euxine Sea to the Adriatic; and thereby separating Greece both from Dacia and Sclavonia. So high and subject to the weather, that Stratonicus an old Grecian did use to say, that for eight months of the year it was always cold: for the other four, winter. It was affirmed by some of the ancient writers, that from one of the highest heads hereof, as well the Adriatic as the Euxine might have been discerned: the truth of which report upon very good reason hath been called in question. But out of doubt from some one top or Summit of it, there is so full a prospect into Thrace and Macedon, that from hence Perseus taking a survey of the site of these country's; positis per abrupta Cadris, etc. as the story hath it, was able to make choice of the fittest places for Forts and Castles, whereby to lock up all the passages against his enemies the Romans. In the parts bordering upon Thrace so rough and craggy, that it is not to be passed but at two places only. Whereof one was made by the Emperor Trajan where is yet to be seen a mighty strong gate built of great square stone; by which the passage that way was either opened or shut at the pleasure of them, who had the keeping of the same; with a small force exceeding easily defended against puissant Armies. The other being situate near a little River by the Bulgarians called Saltiza, not altogether so straight and narrow as the other, but rising high, and full of broken rocks and dangerous precipices, is alike impassable, defensible at ease, and without any great danger: as was experimentally found by famous Huniades, when he attempted (but in vain) to have led his forces this way, for the siege of Adrianople. Those parts hereof which border upon Macedonia, though somewhat opener, are not much easier of ascent: the passages through the broken rocks and precipices being very difficult; and not easily mastered: insomuch that when Perseus the last King of Macedon had fortified the straits hereof against the Romans; non 〈◊〉 quisse aditum nisi è coelo venientibus videbatur, it was conceived (saith Florus) that there was no passage left for any forces, unless they fell immediately from the heavens themselves.  
This great and rocky chain of hills, as they were vehemently exposed to wind and weather, so were they destitute of those commodities, which were either comfortable or indeed merely necessary to the life of man: which made the passage over them in a manner impossible unto any Armies, but what were very patient both of cold and hunger. Yet were they not left desolate and void of people, especially in those sides hereof which lay next to Greece; but most especially in those parts which bordered or confined on Thrace: where the spurs and branches of the hills spreading far and wide, and taking up a great part of the country; occasioned the Romans in the division of the Diocese of Thrace into several Provinces, to call that part or Province of it which lay next to Moesia, by the name of Haemimontum, or Haemimontana, the principal Towns whereof were Adrianople, Vscudoma, and Anchialar; the principal Governor hereof a Roman Precedent. Where, by the way we take notice of an Error in the common impressions of the Code, Lib. VII. Tit. 62. leg. 23. where we find Haemi montem, for Haemimontum: the first being the name only of the mountain; and the latter (which is there meant) of the Roman Province.  
But to return unto the Mountain, there is another of this name in Thessaly, mentioned (or mistake for this) by Servi●s in his notes on the first book of the Georgics; in the top whereof was said to be the habitation of Mars, on the bottom the most pleasant valley of Tempe: so called from Haemus, the son of Bor●as and Orithya amongst the Poets. And possibly to distinguish this from that of Thessaly, Ptolemie, and others call it Aemus, without the Aspirat, though it may well be, that there are others of this name, as that this is called in divers places, or in divers Authors, by other names: one part hereof being called Secmbrus by Aristotle, an other Se●minus by Thucydides, and by La●nicus the whole called Trasclus. The like may be observed at the present also, P●netus calling it by the name of Catena Mundi, a great part whereof it links together: Cuspinianus, Castegnazzo; jazius, Kriviezne: the Italians, Mont Argentorato; the French, Monte de Castegnao; the Sclavonians, Cumaniza; and the Turks, Balkan. Which I have therefore here observed for the Readers sake, that meeting any of these names in the stories either of the ancient or modern times, he may know what hills or mountains are intended by them. Which said I now pass on to Greece, the way being thus prepared and laid open to me.   

OF GREECE.  
GREECE in the presentlatitude and extent thereof; is bounded on the East with the Propontick, Hellespont, and Aegean Seas; on the West with the Adriatic; on the North with Mount Haemus, which parteth it from Bulgaria, Servia, and some part of Illyricum; and on the South with the Sea jonian: So that it is in a manner a Peninsula or Demy-Island, environed on three sides by the Sea; on the fourth only united to the rest of Europe.  
But this is only in relation to the present extent hereof, the name being anciently restrained within narrower bounds. Confined at first to Attica and the parts adjoining; ab Isthmi angustiis Hellas incipit, as it is in Pliny: and took the name of helas from Helen the son of Deucalion; as that of Greece or Graecia, from Graecus the son of Cecrops the first King of Athens. Communicated afterwards to Peloponnesus, then to Thessaly also: and finally when the Macedonian Empire had enlarged itself over the petit Commonwealths and Estates hereof, it came to be communicated to that Country also. The people for this cause known by divers names, by some Achivi, by others Myrmidones; sometimes Pelasgi, Danai, Argivi, etc. But the name whereby they are best known in sacred Writers, is that of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, so called from helas the more proper and genuine name of Greece, in the strictest notion and acception. A name used frequently and familiarly in the Book of God, both absolutely to denote this Nation, as where it is said, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that the Greeks seek wisdom; 1 Cor. 1. 22. and relatively as in opposition to the Jews, the Barbarians, and the Hellenists, or Graecizing Jews. First with relation to the Jews, and then it signifieth the whole body of the Gentiles generally, of which the Grecians were the most eminent and famous people; as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, to the Jew first, and also to the Gentile, Rom. 11. 9, 10. Give none offence, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, neither to the Jews nor to the Gentiles, 1 Cor. 10. 32. and elsewhere frequently. In which and all other places of that kind where the Anti●esis lieth between the Jews and other Nations, we are to understand the Gentiles, the whole body of them; though many times our Translators, I know not why, render it literally the Greeks; as Rom. 1. 16. 10. 12. etc. Secondly with reference to all other Nations not so well versed in the learning and 〈◊〉 of that Age as the Grecians were, whom by a common name of scorn they called Barbarians: according unto that of Strabo, Barbarae sunt omnes Nationes praeter Graecos; the Romans themselves though than the great Lords of the World, being included in the reckoning. And so the word is taken, Rom. 1. 14. I am a debtor saith S. Paul, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, both to the Greeks and the Barbarians, to the wise and unwise: in which as well the Romans as those of other Nations, have the name of Barbarians. Last of all for the Graecizing Jews, whom the Vulgar Latin calleth Graecos, and our English Grecians; they were such of the Jews who living dispersed amongst the Gentiles, used the translation of the Septuagint, making that the Canon both for life and doctrine. Which difference betwixt them and the Jews inhabiting in Judaea, who kept themselves unto the Scriptures in their mother-tongue, and used the Hebrew only in all sacred actions: occasioned many jars amongst them, which sometimes broke out into to open violence, insomuch as R. Eliezer broke into the Synagogue of the Alexandrians at Jerusalem, and therein committed many outrages. Of this unfriendlinesse between them, mention is made Act 6. 1. where it is said, that there arose a murmuring of the Grecians against the Hebrews, etc. In which place, though the English and Vulgar Latin use the name of Grecians, yet ought they more properly to be rendered Hellenists, or Graecizing Jews, as in all other places, viz. Acts 9 29. 11. 20. etc. where they are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, in the Greek Originals.  
But to proceed to our description of the Country, we find it situate in the Northern temperate Zone, under the fifth and sixth Climates; the longest day being 15 hours: inhabited by a people which were once brave men of war, sound Scholars, addicted to the love of virtue and civil behaviour. A Nation once so excellent that their precepts and examples do still remain, as approved rules, and Tutors to instruct and direct the man that endeavoureth to be virtuous; famous for government, affectors' o● freedom, every way noble. For which virtues in themselves, and want of them in other, all their neighbours and remote Nations were by them scornfully called Barbarians: a name now most fit for the Grecians themselves, being an unconstant people, destitute of all learning, and the means to obtain it, Vmversities; uncivil, riotous, and so lazy, that for the most part, they endeavour their profit no further than their belly compels them, and so perfidious withal in all their dealings, especially towards the Western Christians, that it is grown into a Proverb amongst the Italians, Chi fida in Grego, sara in trigo, i. e. He that trusts to a Greek is sure to be cozened. When they meet at foasts or banquets, they drink small draughts at the beginning, which by degrees they increase, till they come to the height of intemperancy: at which point when they are arrived, they keep no rule or order; whereas before to drink out of one's turn is accounted a point of incivility. Hence as I believe, sprung our by word As merry as a Greek, and the Latin word Graecari.  
The women for the most part are brown-complexioned, exceedingly well favoured, and excessively amorous. Painting they use very much to keep themselves in grace with their husbands; for when they once grow wrinkled, they are put to all the drudgeries of the house. Both sexes generally in their habit and outward garb, apply themselves to the State under which they live: such as are subject to the Turk, conforming unto the dress and fashions of the Turks, as those who live under the Venetians, do to that of Venice.  
The Christian Faith was first here planted by S. Paul, invited by the Spirit to come over into Macedonia, Acts 16. 12. passing from thence to Thessalonica, the chief City of Mygdonia, ch. 17. 1. from thence to Athens in Achaia, v. 16. then unto Corinth the Metropolis of Peloponnesus, ch. 18. 1. watering the greatest part of Greece with the dew of heaven; and planting Bishops in most Churches where he preached the Gospel, as Dionysius (the Areopagite) at Athens, Aristarchus at Thessalonica, Epaphroditus at Philippi, Silas at Corinth, and Titus in the Isle of Crete. The like he did in many other Countries also, accounted members of the Greek Church, though not of Greece: the name of the Greek Church extending over all the Provinces of the Eastern Empire, governed by the 4 Patriarches, 1 Of Alexandria, who presided over Egypt and Arabia. 2 Of Jerusalem, whose Patriarchate (erected only in regard of our Saviour's passion in that City, and the great opinion, which by that means accrued unto it) confined within the bounds of Palestine. 3 Of Antioch, whose jurisdiction contained all Syria, Armenia, Cilicia, and the Isle of Cyprus, and whatsoever else was within the Diocese of the Orient. And 4 of Constantinople, to whose charge were committed all the other Provinces of the Greek Church, as Greece, Russia, Dacia, Sclavonia, part of Poland, and all the Islands in the Adriatic, Ionian, and Aegean Seas; together with all Asia Minor, and the Isles thereof, (except only the Provinces of Cilicia and Isauria) and the Countries lying on both sides of Pontus Euxinus, and Palus Maeotis. The reasons of the large increase of whose Jurisdiction, confined at first within the Diocese of Thrace, were 1 The reputation of being seated in the Imperial City, which drew after it (by a Decree of the Council of Chalcedon) all the Provinces of Asia Minor, (Cilicia and Isauria excepted only.) 2 The voluntary submission of the Grecians upon their separation of the Church of Rome, by which all Greece, Macedon, Epirus, the Isle of Crete, and all the Islands in the Aegean and Ionian Seas, which formerly had no superior but their own Primate, the Archbishop of Thessalonica; became subject unto them. 3 The diligence of the Patriarches hereof, in converting by his Suffragan Bishops and other Ministers, the Russians, Bulgarians, and Sclavonians to the faith of Christ, which made those people to look upon Constantinople as their Mother-Church. And 4 the piety and care of the later Patriarches, in supplying with new Pastors and Ministers, those parts and Provinces of the West, which being conquered by the Turk, had been forsaken by their old Clergy, and left like sheep without a shepherd.  
And yet this Church though thus extended and enlarged in the outward members, is very much straitened and impaired at home: the Country being thinly peopled, and many of those people trained up from their infancy in the Mahometan Law. So that it is a greater wonder that there should be any remainders of Christianity left amongst them, then that the open Professors of it should be so few: the tyranny of the Turks on the one side, and the temptations of preferment upon the other, being rightly pondered. For who could look to find 20 Churches of Christians in Constantinople, the seat and ordinary residence of the Turkish Emperors; or that in Salonichi, or Thessalonica, there should be 30 Christian Churches, and but three Turkish Mosquits; that the Primate of this Salonichi should have under him 10 suffragan Bishops, whereof he of Philippi hath no fewer than 150 Churches under his Jurisdiction; or finally that under the Metropolitans of Athens or Corinth, there should be as many So merciful hath God dealt with this luxurious and perfidious people as not to take away their Candlestick, though he hath darkened and obscured the light hereof.  
As for the Fathers of this Church, anciently and at this present held in most esteem, they were no other than such as had been Bishops of the greater Sees: that is to say, 1 S. chrysostom, first a Reader of Antioch, afterwards Patriarch of Constantinople. 2 Basil, and the two Gregory's, 3 Nyssen, and 4 Nazianzen, all in Asia Minor, this last of Constantinople also. 5, 6 The two Cyrils, the one Patriarch of Alexandria, the other of Jerusalem. 7 Epiphanius, Bishop of Salamis in the Isle of Cyprus. 8 Theodoret Bishop of Cyrus, etc. men of renown and precious memory amongst them to this very day. From whose writings if they deviate in any material point of doctrine, it is in that of the Procession of the Holy Ghost, which they grant to be per Filium, but not a Filio. And though Clichthoraeus, Lombard, and other moderate men of the Church of Rome, do grant the difference to be rather, in modo explicandi, quam in ipsa re; and that the Clause a Filioque, was added by the Romanists to the ancient Creeds, the Grecians not being privy nor consenting to it: yet so uncharitable is that Church towards these poor men languishing under the tyranny of Turkish thraldom, as to persecute them with reproach and scorn, brand them for Schismatics and Apostates, and solemnly to anathematise them, in Bulla Coenae, every maundy Thursday. And it is a very hard measure to add and anathematise too, as is right well observed by the late Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, in his notable discourse against the Jesuit. Other particular Tenets in which the Greek Church differeth from the Romish and Reformed (as in some points it doth from both) have been already specified in our Description of Russia, the Churches of the Greeks and Moscovites differeing in no material points, but 1 the manner of distributing the Sacrament; 2 the exacting of marriage by the Moscovite in the party admitted unto Orders; 3 the frequent admiting of divorces upon light occasions; and 4 finally in being less strict in observing the Lent before Easter then in any of the other three. For whereas the Grecians account it a damnable sin to eat flesh or fish which hath blood in it, in any of their other Lents or times of abstinence, (they have in both Churches four in all) in that before Eas●er, which of all reason ought to be kept most punctually, the Laity eat all sorts of fish without any exception; the blood of some of which, as the Cuttle by name, is held to be a delicate food, and in great request.  
The Language they spoke was of their own, of which there were four Dialects, viz. 1 the Attic, 2 the Doric, 3 the Aeolic, 4 the jonick: besides the common phrase of speech most in use among them. A language of great fame for the liberal Arts, but more for so great a part of the holy Scripture, first delivered in it: and for the lofty sound, significant expressions, genuine suavity, and happy composition of words, so excelling all others, that even in the flourishing of the Roman Empire, it so much overtopped the Latin, that the Histories of Rome itself (as of Polybius, Appian, Dion Cassius) were written in it. It was once also the general language of Anatolia, some parts of Italy, Provence in France, and almost all the Islands of the Mediterranean. But now partly by the mutilation of some words, and contraction of others; partly by confusion of the true sound of Vowels, Diphthongs, and Consonants, and the translating of the Accents; and finally, by the admixture of foreign Nations, it is not only fallen from its natural elegancy, but from its largeness of extent. For it is now shut up within the limits of Greece, and the Seacoasts of the lesser Asia, opposite unto it; and there not only much corrupted but almost quite devoured by the Turkish and Sclavonian tongues: but specially by that which they call Franco, a Mongrel language, composed of Italian, French, and some Spanish words, used as the ordinary speech for commerce and intercourse betwixt Christians, Jews, Turks, and the Greeks themselves, who do not understand, and much less speak the true genuine Greek. So that although they still retain for ordinary days S. Chrysostoms' Liturgy, and that of S. Basil for the Festivals: yet being both written in the ancient and learned Greek, they are no more understood by the Vulgar Grecian, than the Latin Service by the common and illiterate Papist.  
The soil questionless is very fruitful, and would yield great profit to the husbandman, if they would take pains in the tilling: but they, knowing nothing certainly to be their own, but all things subject to the Grand Signieur and his soldiers; neglect the tillage of their lands on the same grounds with those who said in the Poet's Eclogues: 
Impius haec tam culta novalia miles habebit?  
Barbarus has segetes? en queis consevimus arva!  
Shall misbelieving Turks these acres spoil,  
Which I manured with so much cost and toil?  
Shall they enjoy my care? See neighbours, see,  
For whom these goodly cornfields tilled be!   
The more natural and certain commodities which they transport into other parts, are Wines, which in memory of the water which our Saviour turned into wine; and on the sixth day of January being that day whereon this miracle was wrought, they use to baptise: for which cause the Jews will drink none of them. They send also into other parts of the world, Oil, Copper, Vitriol, some Gold and Silver, Velvet, Damasks, Turk Grograms, etc.  
This Country hath formerly been famous for the brave Commanders, Miltiades, Aristides, and Themistocles of Athens, Lisander and Agesilaus of Sparta, Pelopidas and Epaminondas of Thebes, Aratus and Philopoemen of Achaia, Pyrrhus of Epirus, Philip of Macedon the subverter of the Grecian liberty, and Alexander his son (to omit infinite others) the subverter of the Persian Monarchy. For the divine Philosophers Plato, 
Peloponnesus.  Socrates, Aristotle, and Theophrastus; for the most eminent Lawgivers, Solon, and Lycurgus; for the most exquisite Poets, Hesiodus, Homer, Sophocles, and Aristophanes; for the famous Historiographers, Xenophon the condisciple of Plato, Thu●ydides, Plutarch, and Herodotus; the eloquent Orators, Aeschines, Demosthenes, and Isocrates; and lastly, for the authors and establishers of all bumane learning whatsoever, only the Mathematics excepted.  
The chief Rivers are 1 Cephisus, which arising in the Frontiers of Epirus, disburtheneth itself into the Aegean Sea. 2 Erigon, and 3 Alaicmon, which beginning their course in the more Northern parts of Macedon, end it in Thirmaicus Sinus. 4 Strymon in Mygdonia. 5 Athicus and Nisus in Thrace. 6 Stymphalus, where Hercules killed the Stymphalian birds. And 7 Ladon in Arcadia. 8 Inachus, whose daughter Io turned into a Heifer, was worshipped by the Egyptians under the name of Isis. 9 Achelous in Epirus, much celebrated by the ancient Poets, especially by Ovid in his Metamorphosis. As is also 10 Peneus, the chief River of Thessaly, and there arising from Mount Pindus, and increased with the waters of many Rivers. Daphne the Nymph, whom Apollo is fabled to have loved, and turned into a Bay tree, lived near or on the banks of this River Peneus, and is therefore said to be his daughter Of less note 
Populifer 11 Sperchius', & irrequietus 12 Enipeus  
13 Apidanusque senex, lenisque 14 Amphrysus, & 15 Aeas.  That is to say: 
Cool Sperchie, Enipeus that troubled ran,  
Smooth Amphryse, Aeas, and old Apidan.  The rest of less note, and the most eminent Mountains in each part hereof, shall be remembered in their places as we see occasion.  
Thus much of the whole Country in gross. And as for the division of it with reference to the State of the Roman Empire, it contained in a manner two whole Dioceses, viz. Thrace and Macedon: the first under the ●raefectus Praetorio Orientis, the latter (together with that of Dacia) under the Praefectus Praetorio for Illyricum. Of these the Diocese of Macedon lying wholly within the bounds of the modern Greece, contained the Provinces of Macedonia Prima. 2 Macedonia Secunda, or Salutaris, (now as in former times, called Albania.) 3 Epirus Nova, taking up the Countries of Phoeis, Locris, and so much of the Old Epirus as was on that side of the River Achelous. 4 Old Epirus, comprehending all the rest of that Country. 5 Thessaly, 6 Achaia, containing all Achaia and Peloponnesus, the Countries of Locris and Phocis excepted only. And 7 Crete or Candie, with the Isles adjoining. And for the Diocese of Thrace, it was divided into the Provinces of 1 Thrace, specially so called. 2 Europa, 3 Rhodope, 4 Haemimontum, 5 Moesia Inferior, and 6 Scythia: of which the four first make up the body of Thrace, and shall there be spoken of: the two last being comprehended in the modern Dacia, have been described already in their proper places. But not to bind myself precisely unto this division, (though I shall look on this as occasion serveth) I shall consider Greece in the several Provinces of 1 Peloponnesus, 2 Achaia, 3 Epirus, 4 Albania, 5 Macedon, 6 Thrace, 7 The Islands of the Propontick, 8 Aegean, and 9 the Ionian Seas, and 10 finally the Isle of Crete.  

1 PELOPONNESUS.  
PELOPONNESUS is bounded on the East with the Cretan, on the West the Adriatic or Ionian Seas; on the North-east with Sinus Saronicus, now Golfo di Engia; on the Northwest with Sinus Corinthiacus, now G●lfo di Patras or Lepanto; and on the South with the Mediterranean. So that it is almost an Island, properly called a Peninsula, rounded with the Sea, except where it is tied to the main land of Greece, by an Isthmus six miles in breadth, which the Grecians and Venetians fortified with a great wall and five Castles. This was called anciently Hexamilium, and was overthrown by Amurath the 2. who harassed and spoiled all the Country. It was afterwards in the year 1453. upon the rumour of a war, built up again by the Venetians (who then had the greatest part of this country) in 15 days; there being for that time 30000 men employed in the work. This wall extended from one Sea unto the other, which had it been as gallantly guarded as it was hastily made up, or as it was well fortified, had it been as well manned, might easily have resisted the Turks, until more means had been thought on to defend it. Not less observable, but more fruitless was the design of some in the elder times to cut thorough this Isthmus and make a perfect Island of it. Attempted by Demetrius King of Macedon, Julius Caesar, and Caius Caligula, by none more eagerly pursued then the Emperor Nero, who to hearten on his soldiers, loath to attempt so fruitless an enterprise, took a spade in hand, and busily began the work. Yet at last the soldiers, being frighted with the blood which abundantly broke forth; with the groans and roar which they continually heard, and with the Hebgoblins and Furies, which were always in their sight; persuaded the Emperor, now half out of the humour, to leave this and enjoin them some more profitable service: given over by the former Princes on the like discouragements. It is in compass 600 miles, and was called at the first Aegialia, from Aegialus the first King of Sicyon; next Apia from Apis the fourth King; after that Sicy●nia from Sicyon the nineteenth King thereof; 
Achaia propria.  and finally Peloponnesus from Pelops the son of Tantalus King of Phrygia, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Insula; the word signifying as much as the Isle of Pelops. But it is now of late called Morea; and that, a Maurorum incursionibus, from the incursions of the Moors, as Mercator thinketh.  
It is conceived to be the most pleasant Country of all Greece, abounding in all things necessary for the life of man, and in such also as do serve for delicacy and contentment only: adorned with many goodly Plains, swelled with fruitful Hills, well stored with Ports and Havens on all sides thereof. And though no Country in the world for the bigness of it, hath suffered in the ruin of so many brave and stately Cities, yet is it still the most populous and best inhabited of all the Continent of Greece. Near the middle of it in Laconia is the Mount Taygetus, from the top whereof there was no City of note in all this Peninsula, but what might easily be seen. A most gallant prospect. The whole divided commonly into these 7 Provinces, 1 Achaia propria, 2 Elis, 3 Messene, 4 Arcadia, Laconia, 6 Argolis, and 7 Corinthia.  
1 ACHAIA PROPRIA is bounded on the East with Argolis and Corinthia, on the West with the Ionian Sea; on the North with Sinus Corinthiacus, or the Gulf of L●panto; on the South with Elis. So called from the Achaei, the Inhabitants of it; the adjunct propria, being added to difference it from Achaia in the Continent or main land of Greece.  
Places of most consideration in it, are 1 Dyme, situate in the most Western point of it, on or near the Promontory called Araxum, the town now called Chiarenza, and the Promontory Cabo di Chiarenza. Not far from which is another Promontory or head-land, of old called Antirrhium, because opposite to another in Aetolia, that was called Rhium, divided by a very narrow strait or fretum, which openeth into the Bay of Corinth; fortified on each side with a Castle for defence thereof, commonly called Dardanelli, and sometimes Castelli di Lepanto. 2 Aegium, where Jupiter is said to have been nursed by a Goat, whence it had the name: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in Greek signifying a she Goat: once a strong town, now ruined and destroyed by the Turks, called at this day Vostiza, or Bostizan. 3 Aegira, once the chief City of all this tract, situate on a steep and inaccessible hill; now a small Village, called Xilocastro. 4 Olenus, so named from Olenus the son of Jupiter, and Anaxithea, now called Chaminisa. 5 Patrae, situate at the very mouth of the Gulf opposite to Lepanto, first called Ar●e, but being by one Patreus enlarged and walled, took the name of Patrae, which name it holdeth to this day, being still called Patras: the town of most note on the Bay of Corinth, called from hence Golfo di Patras. A town of good trade, and much frequented not long since by the English Merchants, who had here their Consul, called the Consul of Mera: but formerly more memorable for the death of S. Andrew the Apostle, who here suffered Martyrdom. 6 Pellene, distant from the Sea about 60 furlongs: the people whereof being constant to their old fashions of apparel, occasioned the Proverb of Pellenaea vestis, applied to old clothes out of fashion. Here were once also the two Cities of 7 Helice, and 8 Buris, sunk by the violence of a tempest into the bottom of the Sea, about the time of the battle of Leuctres. Not to say any thing of 9 Tritae and 10 Phera, two other towns hereof, of note, in the former times; so little now remaining of them, as if they had been sunk at the same time also.  
But the chief town of all this Province, (if not a Province of itself) is that of Sicyon, situate not far from the Isthmus, in the most Eastern parts hereof, and giving to the territory or adjoining Country (as once unto the whole Peninsula) the name of Sicyonia. The territory rich, especially in Olives and works of Iron; the City the most ancient of all Greece, built within little time of the general flood and restauration of mankind: first called Aegialia, after Sicyonia, by the names of the first and nineteenth Kings hereof: by whom and their successors much adorned and beautified with Temples, Altars, Statues, and Images of their several Gods: the ancientest Kingdom in the world, the Assyrian, and Egyptian excepted only, and perhaps not those. It took beginning in the person of Aegialeus, within 150 years after the deluge, and 200 years before the death of Noah, continuing in a race of Princes who swayed the affairs of Peloponnesus, till overtopped by the growth and good fortune of the Kings of Argos. The names of whom, by reason of the undoubted antiquity of this Kingdom, I shall here subjoin, in the ensuing Catalogue of 

The KINGS of SICYON.  
A. M.  
1860 1 Aegialeus  
1910 2 Europs,  
1950 3 Telchin,  
1980 4 Apis,  
2004 5 Telxion,  
2055 6 Aegyras,  
2089 7 Eurymachus,  
2134 8 Leucidpus,  
2187 9 Mesapus,  
2234 10 Peratus.  
2280 11 Plemnaeus,  
2328 12 Orthoulis,  
2391 13 Marathon,  
2421 14 Marathus,  
2441 15 Echyreus,  
2496 16 Corax,  
2526 17 Epopeus,  
2561 18 Lamedon,  
2601 19 Sicyon  
2646 20 Polybus,  
2686 21 janischus,  
2728 22 Phestus,  
2736 23 Adrastus,  
2740 24 Polyphides,  
2771 25 Pelasgus,  
2791 26 Xeuxippus, the last King of Sicyon; after whose death A. M. 2812. the estate hereof was governed by the Priests of Apollo, seven of them successively one after another: 
Elis.  the first five only years a piece; Amphictyon, who was the sixth, continuing 9 years in the Regency, and Charidemus the last of them, ruling 18 years. After whose death, or departure, I know not which, A. M. 2844. the Heraclidae, who about that time returned into Pel●ponnesus, made themselves Masters of this Country; there being no Kings of Sicyenia from this time forwards.    
Of these Kings the most memorable were Aegialeus, and Apis, the first and fourth, from whom this Peninsula had the names of Apia, and Aegialia. Aegirus the 6. giving name and being to the City Aegira, spoken of before: Marathon the 13. of whom perhaps the famous fields of Marathon (in the other 〈◊〉 took denomination: Epopeus the 17. who founded a Temple to Minerva, and therein placed his own Monument or Trophies: Sicyon the 19 the Founder of the City of Sicyon, or at least therepairer and enlarger of it: Pelasgus the 25. from whom perhaps the Grecians might be called Pelasgi, if not known formerly by that name. After this time, I find no man of note who bare sway in Sicyon till the time of Aratus, the special ornament of this town (of which a Native) and one of the principal establishers of the Achaean Commonwealth against the Spartans' and Macedonians; of which more hereafter in the general History of Peloponnesus.  
2 The Country of ELIS hath on the East Arcadia; on the West the Ionian Sea; on the North Acha●a prepria; on the South Messenia. The chief Cities are, 1 Elis, which gives name to the whole Province. So called from Elisha the son of Javan, and grandchild of Japhet, who fixed himself in these parts of this Country, where he built this City, calling it by his own name; as his posterity in honour of him did the Isles adjoynig; mentioned in the Prophet Ezekiel, by the name of the Isles of Elisha Ch. 27. v. 7. Nigh to this City runneth the River Alpheus, of which we have spoken in 〈◊〉 and in this City reigned the King Augeas, the cleansing of whose Stable is accounted one of the wonders or twelve labours performed by Hercules. 2 Olympia, famous for the Statue of Jupiter Olympi●as, one of the 7 wonders, being in height 60 cubits; composed by that excellent workman Phidias, of gold and ivory. In honour of this Jupiter were the Olympic games instituted by Hercules, and celebrated on the Plains of this City, A. M. 2757. The exercises in them were for the most part bodily, as running in Chariots, running on foot, wrestling, fight with the whorlbats, and the like. But so that there repaired thither also Orators, Poets, and Musicians, and all that thought themselves excellent in any laudable quality, to make trial of their several abilities: the very Criers who proclaimed the Victories, contending which should cry loudest, and best play his part. The rewards given to the V●ctor were only Garlands of Palm, or such slight remembrances; and yet the Greeks no less esteemed that small sign of conquest and honour, than the Romans did their most magnificent triumphs: those which were Conquerors herein being met by all the principal men of the City, in which, or under which they lived, and a passage broken in the main walls thereof for their reception; as if the ordinary Gates were not capable of so high an honour, or able to afford them entrance. Insomuch that when Diagoras had seen his three sons crowned for their several victories, a friend of his came to him with this gratulation, Morere Diagoras, nunquam enim in Coelum ascensuruses, that is to say, Die now Diago●as, for thou shalt never go to Heaven: as if no greater happiness could befall the man either in this life or that to come, then that which he enjoyed already. The Judges and Precedents of these Games, were some of the Citizens of Elis, deputed to it; highly commended for their justice and integrity in pronouncing who best deserved, without partiality. Of these thus Hora●e in his Odes: 
Sunt quos Curriculo pulverem Olympicum  
Collegisse juvat; metaque fervidis  
Evitata rotis, Palmaque nobilis  
Terrarum Dominos evehit ad Deos.  
Quos Elea domum reducit  
Palma coelestes.  That is to say: 
Some in Olympic dust take pride  
Their Chariots and themselves to hide;  
Whom the shunned mark, and Palm so prized,  
Like to the Gods hath eternised.  
Such as like heavenly wights do come  
With an Elean Garland home.   
But to proceed, after the death of Hercules, these games were discontinued for 430 years: at which time one Iphitus, warned so to do by the Oracle of Apollo, renewed them; causing them to be solemnly exercised every fourth year: from which custom Olympias is sometimes taken for the space of 4 years; as cuincue annorum Olympiades', for 20 years. Varro reckoneth the times before the flood to be obscure; those before the Olympiads, and after the flood to be falulous; but those that followed these Olympiads to be Historical. These Olympiads were of long time, even from the restauration of them by Iphitus until the reign of the Emperor Theodosius; 
Messenia.  the Grecian Epoch, by which they reckoned their account: the first of them being placed in the year of the world, 3174. before the building of Rome 24 years; the last in the 440 year after Christ's nativity. According to which reckoning this account continued for the space of 1214 years; the memory of which remains, though the name of Olympia be not found in Peloponnesus: the town at this day called by the name of Sconri. 3 Pisa, whose people followed Nestor to the wars of Troy, and in their return were by tempest driven to the coasts of Italy, where they built the City Pisa in Tuscanie. 4 Tornese, a new Town, or the new name of some ancient City, from whence the adjoining Promontory of old called Chilonites, is now called Cabo di Tornese.  
3 MESSENIA hath on the East Arcadia; on the North Elis; on the South and West, the Sea. It takes its name from the Metropolis Messene situate on Sinus Messeniacus, now called Golfo di Conro. 2 Pylos, where Nestor was King, now called Novarino, a desolate and poor village not worth the noting. Of which thus Ovid speaking in the name of Penelope, 
Nos Pylon, antiqui Neleia Nestoris arva,  
Misimus, incerta est reddita fama Pylo.  
To Pylon, aged Nesiors seat, we sent;  
But could not hear from thence how matters went.  3 Medon, or Methone, seated in the most southern part of this Peninsula, from whence unto the Isthmus which joineth it to the rest of Greece, are reckoned 175 Italian miles; the ordinary residence of the Turkish Zanziack, who hath the government of this whole Province of Morea under the Beglerbeg of Greece. 4 Corone or Coron, the chief town on the Bay of Messene, called from hence Golf di Coron, and the last which held out against the Turks for the State of Venice, once Lords of all the Seacoasts of Peloponnesus. 5 Cyparissi, now called Arcudia from whence the Bay adjoining hath the name of Golfo di Arcudia. Here is also the Promontory called of old Coryphusium, now Calo Zanchio.  
The people of this small Province had once a great sway in the whole Peninsula. At first confederate with the Spartans' in so strict a league, that they mutually sent young Virgins to one another for their public sacrifices: but afterwards Corrivals with them for the Supreme power. The Spartans' at the last getting the upper hand of them, oppressed them with a miserable servitude. The occasion this. In the confines of this Country stood a Temple of Diana, common alike to the Messenians, Spartans', and Doors. It happened that some Spartan Virgins were by the Messenians here ravished; which abuse the Spartans' pretended to be the ground of their war: the true reason indeed being their covetousness of the sole Empire. This war broke out three several times. The first continued 20 years, in which space the Lacedæmonians fearing their absence would hinder the supply of young children in the City, sent a company of their ablest young men home to accompany their wives. Their offspring were called, Parthenii, who coming to full growth, abandoned Sparta, sailed into Italy, and there built Taren●um. The second being of 23 years' continuance, was raised and maintained by Aristomenes, one of the chief men of the Messenians; in which they prospered ●il Aristo●rates King of Arcadia, one of their confederates, revolted, to side with Lacedaemon. Then began they to decline, and Aristomenes was thrice taken prisoner, still miraculously escaping. His last imprisonment was in a Dungeon, where by chance espying a Fox devouring a dead body, he caught hold of her tail. The Fox running away, guided Aristomenes after, till the straightness of the hole by which he went out, made him leave his hold, and fall to scraping with his nails, which exercise he never left, till he had made the hole passable, and so escaped; and having a while upheld his falling Country, died in Rhodes. The third war was like drops after a tempest. In which the Messenians being finally subdued, were forced to abandon their Country, or become slaves unto the Spartans' who put them to all drudgeries and servile works, as they did the Helots', whom they accounted as their bondmen: and to this life some of them did apply themselves with such obsequiousness, that at last it grew into a Proverb, Messena servilior, that such a one was more servile, or more slavishly used then these poor Messenians. But the greatest part of them not brooking that heavy yoke, passed into Sicil, and there built the City of Messana. Others were planted in Naupactum, by the State of Athens; the rest dispersed up and down in all parts of Greece: few of them left in their own Country, till Epaminondas having vanquished the Lacedaemonias at the battle of Leuctres, restored them to their ancient possessions.  
4 ARCADIA, hath on the East Laconia; on the West Elis and Messene; on the North Achaia propria; and on the South the Sea. This Country took its name from Arcas, the son of Jupiter and Calisto; but was formerly called Pelasgia: the people whereof thought themselves more ancient than the Moon.  
Orta prius Luna, de se si creditur ipsi,  
Amagno tellus Arcade nomen habet.  
The land of which great Areas took its name,  
Was ere the Moon, if we will credit Fame.  
The chief Cities are 1 Mantinaea, nigh unto which the Theban Army, consisting of 30000 foot, and 3000 horse, routed the Army of the Spartans', and Athenians; consisting of 25000 foot, and 2000 horse. In this battle Epaminondas that famous Leader, received his death's wounds, and not long after died. At his last gasp one of his friends bemoaning his untimely death; Alas, said he, thou diest Epaminondas, and leavest behind thee no children: Nay, replied he, two daughters will I leave behind me, the victory of Leuctra, and this other at Mantinaea. It was afterwards called Antigonia in honour of Antigonus Tutor or Protector of Philip the father of Perseus' King of Macedon; but by command of the Emperor Adrian restored to its old name again, and is now called Mantegna. 2 Megalopolis, the birthplace of Polybius that excellent Historian. The one half of it had sometimes the name of Orestia, from the lodging of Oresies in it; the whole now called Leontari, on what cause I know not. 3 Phialia, towards the Sea. 4 Psophis, so called from Psophis one of the sons of Lycaon, once King of this Country, slain by Jupiter. 5 Stymphalus, situate near a Lake and River of the same name, where Hercules slew the Stymphalian birds; so great in number and in body that they darkened the sunbeams, and terribly infested this little Province, till driven thence by Hercules. Here was also in this town a Temple dedicated to Minerva, from hence called Stymphalida. 6 Tegea, famous for the Temple of Pan, here worshipped, and from hence called Tegaeus: more for the war made upon the Tegeates, or people hereof by the Lacedæmonians: who thinking themselves assured of victory, brought with them store of chains and fetters, wherewith to lead captive their conquered Enemies, but being overcome in battle, were themselves bound with them, and forced as slaves, to till the grounds of these Tegeates. Here is also in this Country the River Styx, whose water for the poisonous taste was called the water of Hell: by which Poets fain, that the Gods used to swear, as may be every where observed: and that what God soever swore by Styx falsely, he was banished from heaven; and prohibited Nectar for a 1000 years.  
This Country for the fitness of it for pasturage and grazing hath made it the subject of many worthy and witty discourses, especially that of Sir Philip Sidney, of whom I cannot but make honourable mention: a book which besides its excellent language, rare contrivances, and delectable stories, hath in it all the strains of Poesy,, comprehendeth the universal art of speaking; and to them which can discern and will observe, affordeth notable rules for demeanour, both private and public. Which noble Gentleman, as he may worthily be called the English Heliodore, so the Ingenious Author of the History of Melintus and Ariana, may as deservedly be called the French Sidney.  
5 LACONIA is bounded on the West with Arcadia, on the East and South with the Sea, on the North with Argolis. Called first Lelegia, from the Leleges, by Strabo said to be the first Inhabitants of it, afterwards Oebalia, from Oebalus a King of Lacedaemon; and finally Laconia, of the Lacones, who succeeded the Leleges in the possession hereof on their removal into the Islands of the lesser Asia. ● is by some Writers also called Hecatompolis, from the number of an hundred Cities which it once had in it.  
The soil hereof exceeding rich, and the fields very spacious, yet for the most part not well tilled, in regard of the many hills and Mountainets which overthwart it. Well watered with the River Eurotas, and memorable for many fair Bays and Promontories: of which the principal are the Promontories of Malea, and Taenaria, now called Cabo Malio, and Cabo Matapan: and of the Bays, that called Golfo di Colochina, the Sinus Laconicus of the ancients; into which the River Eurotas, (now better known by the name of Vasilo Potamo, or the Kingly River) pours his gentle streams. The nature of the people we shall find in Sparta.  
Places of most observation in it, 1 Leuctres sitna●e on the Seaside, near the Bay of Messeni; of which name were two others in Greece, the one in Arcadia, the other in Achaia, but this last most memorable. 2 Amyclae, so called from Amyelas the third King of Sparta, by whom first founded; renowned afterwards for the birth of Castor and Pollux, the sons of Tyndarus; and of good note for being the foundress of the City of Amyclae in Calabria Superior, at first a Colony of this. 3 Thulana, nigh to which is the Lake of Lerna, where Hercules slew the Monster Hydra: and not far off Mount Taenarus near the Pr 〈◊〉 Taenaria, in which the Natives show a Cave, believed in former times to be the descent into Hell, out of which the Poets fain that Cerberus was dragged by Hercules. 4 Salassia, where Antig●nus vanquished Cleomenes, the last King of Sparta. 5 Epidaurus (seated on the Bay named Golfo di Napoh) now called Malvasia; a town well built and very well peopled; remarkable for the sweet Wines called Malvesey, or Malmsey, sent from hence into all other parts in great abundance. 6 Sparta, so called from Sparta, the son or brother of Phoroneus the 2. King of Argos, the Founder of it: but afterwards beautified and enlarged by Lacedaemon the second King of this Country, it took that name also; promiscuously known by both in the best Authors. One of the Eyes of Greece, and a most famous Commonwealth, but at first governed by Kings, as most of the Greek Cities in ancient times. Tyndarus, the father of Castor and Pollux, was once King hereof, after whose death and the death of the said famous brethren, Menelaus' was admitted King of Sparta or Lacedaemon, in right of Helena his wife, their sister. And though Nicostratus and Magapenthes, sons of Menelaus by another venture, succeeded after his decease; yet the Spartans' soon rejected them and received Orestes the son of Agamemnon to be their King, marrying him to Hermione the daughter of Menelaus and Helena, and consequently the niece of Tyndarus. Tisamenes the son of Orestes and Hermione, succeeded next, in whose time the Heraclidae or posterity of Hercules returned into Greece, under the conduct of Temenus, Ctesiphon, and Aristodemus, sons of Aristomachus: whereof the first possessed himself by force of Arms of the City of Argos, the second of Messene, and the third conquered the City and State of Sparta: which dying very shortly after●, he left unto his two sons, Eurysthenes and Procles; the roots of the two Royal families, which jointly and in common governed the affairs of Sparta: first absolutely as Sovereign princes, without any control, afterwards at the direction of the Senate, and finally under the command and check of those popular Officers whom they called the Ephori. But because these Spartan Kings in each several period, were for the most part men of action, and often mentioned in the Histories of the elder times: I will first make a Catalogue of them, and then subjoin such observations and remembrances, as I think most pertinent.  

The KINGS of SPARTA Of the first Family.  
A. M.  
1 Eurotas the first King of Sparta, who gave name to the River Eurotas.  
2 Lacedaemon brother of Eurotas, from whom the City of Sparta was called Lacedaemon.  
3 Amyclas son of Lacedaemon, the founder of Amyclae a Laconian City.  
4 Argalus son of Amyclas.  
5 Cynorta son of Argalus.  
6 Oebalus son of Cynorta, from whom a part of this Country had the name of Oebalia.  
7 Hippocoon son of Oebalus.  
2700 8 Tyndarus brother of Hippocoon, in whose life he was King of Oebalia only.  
9 Castor and Pollux, sons of Tyndarus, famous among the Argonauts.  
2740 10 Menelaus and Helena his wife the daughter of Tyndarus, whose Rape occasioned the destruction of Troy.  
2770 11 Nicostratus and Megapenthes sons of Menelaus by a former wife.  
12 Orestes and Hermione his wife, daughter of Helena and Menelaus.  
13 Tisamenes son of Orestes and Hermione, who being outed of Sparta by the Hera●lidae, reigned in Achaia, and left his Kingdom there, unto his posterity.    

The KINGS of SPARTA Of the race of HERACLIDAE.  
1 Aristodemus, the first King of the Race of Hercules; left the Kingdom jointly to his two sons, A. M.   A. M.   2848 1 Eurysthenes 2848 1 Procles 2890 2 Agis from whom this line were called Agidae.  2 Euripon, from whom this line were called Eurypontidae. 2891 3 Echestratus  3 Prytanis 2926 4 Labetas.  4 Eunomus 2963 5 Dryssus  5 Polydectes 2992 6 Agesilaus 3076 6 Charilaus 3046 7 Archelaus 3140 7 Nicandrus 3096 8 Teleclus 3176 8 Theopompus 3136 9 Alcumenes  9 Archidamus 3173 10 Polydorus  10 Zeuxidamus  11 Eurycrates  11 Anaxidamus  12 Anaxandrus  12 Archidamus II.  13 Eurycrates II.  13 Agasicles  14 Leonidas  14 Ariston  15 Anaxandrides  15 Demaratus  16 Cleomenes 3447 16 Leotychides  17 Leonidas II. 3478 17 Archidamus 3470 18 Plistarchus 3520 18 Agis 3471 19 Plisionax 3547 19 Agesilaus 3539 20 Pausanias 3588 20 Archidamus IU. 3553 21 Agesipolis 3611 21 Agis II. 3567 22 Cleombrotus  22 Eudamidas 3576 23 Agesipolis II.  23 Archidamus V. 3577 24 Cleomenes II.  24 Eudamidas II. 3611 25 Arius 3700 25 Agis III. 3655 26 Acrotatus  26 Eurydamidas the last King of the line of the Eurypoutidoe, slain by Cleomenes, the last of the other line also.  27 Arius II.     28 Leonidas III.     29 Celombrotus II.    3714 30 Cleomenes III. the last of the line of the Agidoe; who having slain Eurydamidas the son of Agis the 3. substituted his own brother Epiclides in his place. But being himself shortly alter vanquisted by Antigonus of Macedonia, and forced to fly his Country with his wife and children: the Government of the Heraelidae ended after it had continued here for the space of 900 years or thereabouts.     
Under these Kings the Government at first was 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as Plutarch termeth it, sufficiently Monarchical, if it were not more. Under Eunomus the fourth King of the second house, the people finding the reins of Government let loose, began to mutiny and grow too headstrong. To bridle whom, and to restrain the Kings withal, (should they prove exorbitant) Lycurgus the Protector of Charilaus the sixth King of that house, did ordain the Senate, committing to them the supreme power in matters civil, and leaving to the Kings the ordering of all military and sacred business. To curb the insolences of this Senate, who quickly found their own strength, Theopompus the eighth King of that house, with the consent of Polydorus the tenth King of the other, instituted a new Magistracy chosen out of the Common-People, whom they called the Ephori, which grew in fine to such an height of pride and tyranny, as not only to control the Senators, but to censure, fine, imprison, depose, and mutually to kill their Kings, as the spirit of sedition moved them. So that the State of Lacedoemon was at first a Monarchy under Kings; then an aristocraty under the command of the Senate; next a Democraty under the Ephori; and finally by those popular Officers made so plain a Tyranny, that Aristotle and Plato, two great Commonwealths-men who died before they had embrued their hands in the blood of their Kings, call it in plain terms 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 & 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, a most absolute tyranny. What think you would these men have called it, had they lived to see Leonidas the 3. deposed, and Agis the third of that name also most barbarously murdered by these popular Villains.  
But being the foundation of this Commonwealth was first laid, and the good Laws and politic Constitutions by which it did so long subsist in great power and splendour, established by the wit and power of Lycurgus, as before was said: we are to know concerning him, that he was the son of Eunomus the fourth King of the second house, slain in a popular tumult by the common people. Who finding by this Essay that the people were become too headstrong for the Kings to govern, unless reduced to extreme bondage by their Kings, which he wished not neither: took the advantage of the minority of Charilaus to new mould the Government: and what he could not do by fair means to effect by Arms; forcing this Charilaus, though his Nephew, when he came to age, to fly for sanctuary to the Temple of Juno. Having ordained what Laws he pleased, and settled such a form of government as himself best fancied: the better to decline the envy of so great a change, he got leave to travail; binding the people by an oath to observe all his laws until his return: and being gone, commanded at his death, that his ashes should be cast into the Sea, lest being carried back to Sparta, the people might conceive themselves released from their oath. By means whereof his Laws continued in force near 700 years, during which time that Commonwealth did flourish in all prosperity: the particulars of which Institutions he that lists to see may find them specified at large by Photareh in the life of Lycurgus. Suffice it that the Discipline was so sharp and strict, that many went into the wars for no other reason then on an hope to rid themselves from so hard a life: and that Diogenes returning hence to the City of Athens, gave out that he returned from men to women, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. And being asked in what part of Greece he had met with the compleatest men; made answer that he could no where meet with men, but that he had found some boys amongst the Spartans'. A Cynical and rugged answer, but such as carried a great deal of judgement in it; the Spartans' being more stout and resolute in all their actions, and less effeminate in their lives then the rest of the Grecians. But besides the strictness of the discipline under which they lived, there was another thing which made them wish for wars abroad: namely, the little or no power which either the Kings or People had in civil matters and affairs of State, entirely left to the disposing of the Senate and the power of the Ephori. So that the Kings having by the laws the command of their armies, were willing to engage in war upon all occasion; and the common people as desircus to attend them in such employments, as the Kings could wish. Upon these grounds the war is made a trade amongst them; beginning with the Helots' a neighbouring people; then with the rest of the Lacenians; afterwards quarrelling the Messenians their old Confederates: all which they severally subdued and made subject to them. In the war which Xerxes made against the City of Athens, their King Leovid as the first, of the elder house, went forth to aid them: slain at the straits of Thermopyloe, courageously fight for the liberty of Greece: and when it was thought fit to set upon the Persian Fleet, Eurybiades the Spartan Admiral did command in chief. In pursuit of the this war against the Persians, Pausanias and Agesilaus were of most renown: the first in helping the Athenians to drive them out of Greece; the other in making war upon them in their own Dominions. Freed from the Persians they grow jealous of the State of Athens, whom they looked on as their Rivals in point of Sovereignty and glory. Hence the long war betwixt these Cities called Bellam Peloponnesiacum, managed for the most part in Peloponnesus, from thence transferred into Sicil, and at last ended in the taking of Athens: the Government whereof they changed into an aristocraty, under 30 Magistrates of their own appointment, commonly called the thirty tyrants. Proud of this fortunate success their next quarrel was with the Boeotians, the conquered Athenians covertly, and the Persians openly assisting the enemy. Here their prosperity began to leave them. For besides many small defeats, Epaminondas the Theban so discomfited them, at the overthrows of Leuctres and Maxtinea; that Sparta itself was in danger of utter ruin. Not long after happened the Holy war chiefly undertook against the Phocians, wherein also they made a party: but this war being ended by King Philip, they scarce breathed more freedom, than he gave air to. But when Alexander's Captains fought for the Empire of their Master, all these flourishing Republics were either totally swallowed into, or much defaced by the Kingdom of Macedon. The Lacedoemonians held the chief strongth of a Town to consist in the valour of the people, and therefore would never suffer Sparta to be walled, till the times immediately following the death of Alexander the Great: yet could not those fortifications than defend them from Antigonus Doson King of Macedon, who having vanquished Cleomenes King of Sparta, entered the Town, and was the first man that ever was received into it as Conqueror: So much different were the present Spartans' from the valour and courage of their ancestors Cleomenes being forced to forsake his country, and the race of the Heraclidoe failing in him, they became a prey to Machanidus and Nabis, two wicked Tyrants: from whom they were no sooner freed, but they were made subject (in a manner) to the power of Rome: and in the end the Town so weak and inconsiderable, that it was not able to resist the poorest enemy; now a small Burrough called Misithra. And so I leave them to the thoughts of their former glories, having now nothing dseto boast of, but the fame and memory of their actions in former times.  
ARGOLIS, so called from the chief City Argos, is bounded on the South with Laconia, on the West with Corinthia, and Achaia Propria; on the East and North with the Sea. A territory remarkable for a most excellent breed of Horses, and from thence called Hippium.  
Places of most importance in it, 1 Argos, founded by Argus the fourth King of this country, and the chief of this Kingdom. Memorable as for other things, so 1 for the death of Pyrrhus King of Epirus, who having forced his entry into it, was here ignobly slain after all his victories, by the hands of an old woman, throwing a Tile at him from the top of an house. 2 For the long race of the Kings hereof, from Inachus the cotemporary of our Father Abraham, anno 2003. unto Acrisius their last King. Whose daughter Danae being shut up in a Tower of Brass, was deflowered by Jupiter, to whom she bore the renowned Perseus, so memorised in ancient Poets. But Perseus having by misfortune slain his Grandfather the old King Acrisius, quitted the City of Argos as unlucky to him, and transferred the Kingdom to Mycenae, a City of his own foundation, and so better fancied: by means hereof, the second City of esteem in this little Province. Growing in small time unto so great riches, that it got the name of dites Mycenoe; as appeareth by Horace, in whom the Horses of Argos, and the wealth of Mycenae are placed in one verse together; Aptum dicis equis Argos, ditesque Mycenae. 
For horses Argos is of fame,  
For wealth Mycenoe hath the name.  3 Troezen, situate on the Sinus Argolicus, now called Golfo di Engia, the Royal seat of Pytheus the father of Theseus who was born herein: from whence the Town in Ovid hath sometime the name of Pytheia Troezen, and Theseus many times is called Troezenius Heros: as Hercules had the name of Tyrinthius Heros, from 4 Tyrinthia, another City of this Province, in which he was nursed. 5 Nemea, where Hercules slew the dreadful Lion which annoyed this country. In honour of which noble Act were instituted in time following the Nemean Games, which continued of great same in Greece for many Ages. The Exercises were running with swift horses, whorlepats, running on foot, quoiting, wrestling, darting, shooting. Some have referred the original of these Games to one Opheltes a Lacedaemonian; and in whose honour they conceive them instituted: and others fetch it higher from the war of Thebes. But this I take to be the more allowable opinion. 6 Epidaurus on the Sea side famous for the Temple of Aesculapius; and the cure of all sorts of diseases there, so called from Epidaurus the son of Argus the founder of it. Of the same name, but of a different situation from that before mentioned in Laconia: this being seated on the Bay called Golfo di Napoli, this on that of Engia. Once called Melissa, and Aenera, at that time an Island; but by an Earthquake laid unto the continent: now called Pigiada. 7 Niuplia, so called of Nauplius King of Euboea, and father of Palamedes, to whom it anciently belonged. A station then, as now, for shipping, in that regard called Nauplia Navale, now Neapoli, or Neapolis, the richest and best traded in all this tract, giving name unto a large and capacious Bay now called Golso di Napoli, of old Sinus Argolicus; into which the famous River Inachus, having passed through the City of Argos doth disgorge itself; so called from Inachus, the Father of 10, and the original and Progenitor of 

The KINGS of ARGOS and MYCENAE.  
A. M.  
2093 1 Inachus the supposed father of Io, from whom the Grecians are sometimes called by the name of Inachii.  
2143 2 Phoroneus the son of Inachus and Melissa, from whom the said Io hath the name of Phoronis in the Poet.  
2223 3 Apis the son of Jupiter and Niobe, the daughter of Phoroneus, who leaving Greece went into Fgypt, where he taught the people tillage, and was there worshipped afterwards in the form of an Ox.  
2238 4 Argus the son of Apis, and the founder of Argos, in whose time Agriculture was taken up amongst the Grecians; from him called Argivi.  
2308 5 Criajus, by some Peirajus the son of Argus.  
2363 6 Phorbas the son of Criajus, in whose time Atlas and Prometheus are said to flourish.  
2397 7 Triopas the son of Phorbas, and the brother of another Pherbas, who planted himself in the Isle of Rhodes.  
2443 8 Crotopus.  
2464 9 Sthenelus outed of the Kingdom by  
2475 10 Danaus the brother of Egyptus, by whom driven out of Egypt he was made King of Argos, by consent of the people: the Father of those many daughters got with child by Hercules. From him the Grecians are called often by the name of Danai.  
2525 11 Lynceus son of Egyptus the brother of Danaus.  
2556 12 Abas the son of Lynceus and Hypermnestra the daughter of Danaus.  
2566 13 Pretus the son of Abas.  
2606 14 Acrisius the brother of Pretus and the father of Danae, foretold by Oracle that he should be slain by a son of that daughter, shut her up in a brazen tower. But Jupiter having corrupted the Guards with God, got the Lady's consent, by whom he had Perseus so renowned amongst the Poets and Historians of those elder times.  
2637 15 Perseus the son of Jupiter and Danae exposed by his Grandfather to the Seas, miraculously preserved, and grown into great fame by his brave exploits; restored Acrisius to his throne from which he had been deposed by his brother Pricus. But after having ignorantly and unfortunately slain the said Acrisius, he removed his seat unto Mycenae; where he reigned together with his son Sthenelus.  
1645 16 Euristeus the son of Sthenelus, much spoken of for the difficult tasks which at the instigation of Juno he imposed on Hercules, his foster-child, and the supposed son of Amphytryon his Cousin German.  
2688 17 Atrews and Thyestes, sons of Pelops, on the failing of the line of Perseus, succeeded in Argos and Mycenae: infamous for their murders and adultery; Thyestes abusing the bed of Atreus, and Atreus seasting him with the body of his own son; whence 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the Proverb.  
2753 18 Agamemnon the son of Atreus, Commander of the Greeks at the war of Troy, in which action there engaged 69 Kings of the Grecians, wasted over with a Navy of 1224 ships, killed at his coming home by Aegisthus, his Cousin German.  
2768 19 Aegishus the son of Thyestes, having defiled Clytaemnestra the wife of Agamemnon in the time of his absence, by her procurement murdered him at his coming home; and usurped the Kingdom.  
2775 20 Orestes son of Agamemnon revenged his father's death on Aegisthus and Clytaemnestra, his own Mother. After which falling mad, and restored again unto his wits, he married Hermione daughter of Menelaus and Helena, by whom he had the kingdom of Sparta also.  
2803 21 Penthilus the son of Orestes, and the last King of this line, outed of his estate by the Doors and Heraclide; who made themselves Masters of all Peloponnesus, which they possessed until the conquest of it by the Macodonians.    
7 CORINTHIA is a little Region, lying towards the Isthmus or neck of land, which joineth Pelopennesus to the rest of Greece; betwixt Argolis and Achaia Propria. It containeth only the territory of the City of Corinth, not large, nor very fruitful of those commodities which the rest of this Peninsula doth abound withal: as being mountainous and hilly, and by reason of the necernesse of the Sea, full of craggy rocks. The chief and indeed the only Cities of note in it, 1 Genchrea, the naval Road or station of ships for Corinth, mentioned Act. 19 18. and Rom. 16. 1. in both Texts reckoned a distinct town from Corinth, as indeed it was. 2 Corinth itself, is commodiously situate for the command of all Greece, (had not the Inhabitants been more given to Merchandise then unto the wars) as being seated on the bottom of the neck or Isthmus, the Ionian Sea upon the West, and the Aegean on the West, washing the walls thereof, and giving it on each side a capacious Haven, in which regard called by Horace bimaris Corinthus. In compass about eleven miles, for strength impregnable, for command as powerful; mastering both Seas on which it stood, and cutting off all passage from one half of Greece to the other: to which last end the Castle called Acrocorin-thus, looking into both Seas, served exceeding fitly, and was therefore called one of the Fetters of Greece. The City, rich, well traded, and neatly built, most houses beautified with handsome pillars from thence called Corinthian: more memorable for the wealth of the people, and the conveniency of the situation, then for any notable exploits performed by them, or any great influence which they had on the States of Greece. But in regard of the wealth, greatness, and situation, accounted by the Romans one of the three Cities which they held capable of the Empire; Carthage and Capua being the other two. In this City lived the famous or infamous whore, Thais, who exacted 10000 Drachmas for a single night's lodging: which made Demostbenes cry out, Non emam tanti poenitore, and occasioned the old Byword, Non cuivis homini contingit adire Corinthum, 
'Tis not for every man's avail,  
Unto Corinth for to sail.  Near hereunto stood the Acrocorinthian mountains, at the foot whereof the City, and on the top whereof the Castle called hence Acrocorinthus were seated; out of which flowed the famous fountane named Pyrene, of old consecrated to the Muses; by Persius called Fons Caballinus, because feigned by the ancient Poets to have been made by the horse Pegasus, dashing his foot against the rock. And on the other side hereof, in the very Isthmus were celebrated yearly the Isthmian games, ordained by Ineseus in the honour of Neptune, in imitation of the Olympic devised by Hercules in honour of Jupiter. The exercises much the same, and the reward no other than a Garland of Oaken bougbes; yet drawing yearly a great report of people to them: partly to exercise themselves, and behold the spcits, and partly to sacrifice to Neptune, who had hard by a famous Temple.  
As for the fortunes of this City, it was at first called Ephyra, at that time a small and obscure place; but beautified and repaired by Corinthus the son of Pelops, took the name of Corinth, Governed by him and his posterity till the coming of the Heraclidae into Peloponnesus: at what time one Aletes of the race of Hercules, possessed himself hereof, with the name of King, A. M. 2849. Twelve Princes of his line enjoyed it for the space of 220 years and upwards: when the house sailing in the person of Automanes, they were governed by temporary officers, like the Archontes of Athens. Continuing under this Government 124 years, the City was seized on by one Cypselus, A. M. 3294. who left it to his son Periander, one of the seven wisemen of Greece; counted a Tyrant in those times for no other reason, then that he had suppressed the popular government; after whose death, an. 3364. the City did recover its former liberty. In the bustles betwixt Athens and Lacedaemon, and other the estates of Greece, for the superiority, it did little meddle: the aim of this people being wealth, not honour: not interessed in any action of renown in all those times; but in the sending of Timoleon to the aid of the Syracusans, against the Tyrant Diomysius, who did lord it over them. Subdued together with the rest by the Kings of Macedon; and with the rest restored to liberty by the power of Rome. Under whom growing still more rich, and withal more insolent, they abused certain Roman Ambassadors. But irasci populo Romano nemo sapienter potest, as is said in Livy: which the Corinthians found too true; the City being besieged, sacked, and burnt unto the ground by Lucius Mummius, a Roman Consul, an. V. C. 607. In the burning whereof there were consumed so many goodly Statuas of gold, silver, brass, and other metals, that being melted into a Lump, they made up by that fatal chance, the so much estimated metal, called Aes Corinthium, more highly prized in Rome then Gold or Silver. Repaired again, it was of great esteem in the time of the Emperors, converted by S. Paul to the Christian Faith; and having flourished a long time in pride and pleasures, decayed by little and little, till it came to nothing, and is now a small Burrough called Crato.  
Having thus spoken of the several Estates of Peloponnesus, it resteth that we speak somewhat of the estate of the whole, varied according to the fortunes of those particulars, which had most influence on the same. The affairs hereof a long while swayed by the Kings of Sicyon, whence it had the name of Sicyonia, restrained afterwards to the territories of that City only. But when the Kings of Argos came in place and power, it depended much upon their pleasures; from Apis the third king whereof (if not rather from Apis the fourth King of Sicyon) in the opinion of some Writers, it was named Apia. But Pelops the son of Tantalus King of Phrygia coming into Greece, and marrying Hippodamia daughter of Oenomaus King of Elis, became the most powerful Prince of all this Peninsula, taking from him the name of Peloponnesus. The Kingdom of Mycenae growing into power and credit, had the next turn in swaying the affairs hereof for a certain season; as after that the Doors, and the Heraclide, possessed at once of Argos, Sporta, Corinth, and Messene. The Spartans' getting the prehemlnence over all the rest, were the next who governed the affairs of it, and they held it long; having first conquered Laconia, and subverted the estate of Messene; by means whereof, and by their fortunate success against the Persians, they became almost absolute in their commands, without any Competitor. But their power being broken by Pelopidas and Epaminondas in the Thehan war, the petit States hereof began to take heart again; & stand upon their own legs, as they did a while, till the Kings of Macedon succeeding Alexander the Great, brought them once more under, and made them fellow-servants with their Spartan Masters. In the confusions which ensued in Macedon, amongst the Competitors for that Kingdom, Patras and Dime, two Cities of Achaia Propria, first united themselves in a strong league of amity, at such time as Pyrrbus first went into Italy: into which confederacy the Cities of Tritaea and Pherae shortly after came, and not long after that, Aegira and the rest of Achaia Propria: their affairs first governed by two Praetors, with advice of the Senate, as afterwards by one alone with the like advice, of which Marcus Carinensis was the first, and Aratus of Sicyonia the second. The ground thus laid, and the reputation of this new Commonwealth increasing by the virtue of Aratus, the Epidaurians, Troezenians, Argives, and Megarians became members of it: maintaining gallantly the liberties of Pelotonnesus; till finally mastered by the Romans: the division of whose Empire it fell with all the rest of Greece, to the Constantinopolitans: and in the declining of their fortunes, when the Latins got possession of the Imperial City, most of the Seacoasts of it were allotted to the State of Venice: the inland parts formerly parceled out amongst many Princes whom they called Despots, continuing as before they were; till all together made a prey to the Turkish Tyrants, Mahomet the Great, and Bajazet the second, by whom wholly conquered. For howsoever Thomas and Demetrius, Brethren of that unfortunate Prince Constantinus Palaologus, had fled hither at the taking of Constantinople; and were received and obeyed by those Petit Princes: yet being unable to hold out against the Conqueror, they became his tributaries. But falling out amongst themselves, and neglecting then to send in the tribute agreed upon, gave Mahomet the Great occasion to invade the Country, and under colour of aiding one brother against the other, to destroy them both, as he did accordingly: Demetrius being carried Prisoner to Constantinople, and Thomas forced to abandon Pelopennesus, and flee to Italy, anno 3457. Such towns hereof as belonged unto the State of Venice followed the same fortune also in the time of Bajazet; by whom all taken at the last, and the whole Country brought under his obedience, anno 1500 or thereabouts. Governed ever since that time by a Turkish Zanziack, under the Beglerbeg of Greece, who hath his residence at Macedon, a Regiment of 1000 Horse to secure the Country, and 700000 Asper's (that is to say, 14000 Crowns) a year for his entertainment.   

2 ACHAIA.  
ACHAIA is bounded on the East with the Aegean Sea, on the West with Epirus; on the North with Thessaly, and on the South with Peloponnesus, and the Seas thereof. Called anciently helas from Helles the son of Deucalion: but whence it had the name of Achaia is not yet agreed on, though sure I am, that from hence the Inhabitants of it were called Achivi, (a name communicated afterwards to all the Grecians) to difference them from the Achoei of Achaia Propria.  
The country famous in the Authors of elder times more for the gallantry of the men, than any great goodness of their country: yet that sufficiently memorable for the hill Hymettus, swarming with Bees, plentiful of the sweetest honey; and rich in mines of excellent marble; as also for the River Cephisus, which runneth almost through the whole length hereof; divided into two main streams, of which the one is called Asopus, the other retaineth its first name. Upon the banks hereof stood the Temple of Themis, to which Deucalion did repair to be directed in the restauration of mankind, as the Poet's fable.  
It was divided anciently into these seven parts, viz. 1 Attica, 2 Megaris, 3 Boeotia, 4 Phocis, 5 Locris, 6 Doris, and 7 Aetolia. A division now as much disused as the name of Achaia, changed by the Turks into that of Levadia; of which more anon.  
1 ATTICA hath on the West Megaris, and some part of Boeotia; on all other parts compassed with the Sea: so called from Athens the chief City. The soil for the most part very barren and craggy, yet by the arms and industry of the people made both rich, and famous; insomuch as the yearly revenues of the State of Athens were 1200 Talents. The money currant in this country was commonly stamped with an Ox, whence came the Byword Bos in lingua, applied to such Lawyers as were bribed to say nothing in their Client's cause: Not much unlike to which was the Proverb rising from the coin of Aegina (an Isle adjoining) stamped with the figure of a Snail, viz. Virtutem & sapientiam vincunt Testudines.  
Places of most observation in it, 1 Philae, a strong Fortress on the Borders of Boeotia, surprised by Thrasibulus and others of the banished Athenians, during the Government of the 30 Tyrants: the taking whereof was the first step towards their own and their country's liberty; which soon after followed. 2 Eleusis, on the borders of Megaris; almost impregnably fortified by the 30 Tyrants when they had the command of Athens, by whom designed for their retreat in all times of danger. But having withdrawn hither on the taking of Philae and Piraeus, by the Thrasybulians, they found strong walls a weak defence for so much wickedness; being trained out as to a parley, and so deprived of the place and their power together. It was first built by one Eleusius, who entertained Ceres as she was in quest of her daughter Proserpina: who to reward him taught him the use of Agriculture; and he in honour of her built here a Temple. Hence Ceres in the Poets is called Eleusina, and her sacrifices sacra Eleusinia; and sometimes the City also, Cerealis Eleusis, so called by Ovid, in the 7 book of the Metamerphesis. 3 Rhamnus, upon the River Asous, famous for the Temple of Amphiaraus, and the Statue of the Goddess Nemesis, hence called Rhamnusia in the Poets: this Nemesis or Rhamnusia, being the Goddess of indignation, punishing those who made themselves unworthy of their present fortunes. 4 Trichoritum, of more Antiquity, than fame. 5 Marathon, on the southside of the River Asopus, opposite to Rhamnus; of great note for the discomfiture given by Miltiades the Athenian to the numerous Army of Darius, consisting of 200000 Foot, and 10000 Horse: the Emulation of which noble victory startled such brave resolves in the breast of Themistocles. As memorable in the Poets of those elder times for the Marathonian Bull there slain by Theseus. 6 Pyroeus, the Port-Town to Athens, and the ordinary Station for their shipping; the Haven hereof being capable of 400 sail: distant from the City about two miles, but joined unto it by two long walls reaching from the one to the other, for securing the conveyance of their Merchandise to and from the Sea. The Port itself impregnably fortified by the advice of Themistocles. But as these long walls were broken down by the command of the Spartans', when the City of Athens was taken by them: so were the fortifications of Pyraeus itself demolished by the command of Sylla, in his war against Mithridates' King of Pontus, the better to keep under the Athenians. 7 Panormus, a Seat-Town also, and of very good trade, but not of such importance as the other was. 8 ATHENS, one of the eyes of Greece, and the chief of Attica, situate from the Sea two miles, as before was said: the Haven of Pyroeus serving it with all commodities, which came from other parts by shipping. First built by Cecreps the first King of it, by whom called Cecropia, A. M. 2409. repaired afterwards by Theseus, and furnished with good Laws by Solon; and finally thus named from Minerva (whom the greeks call Athene) to whom then dedicated, and in whose honour there were yearly kept some solemn Games called Panathencia. A City heretofore adorned with all those excellencies of strength and beauty, which Art or cost could add unto it. Renowned, as for many things, so for three especially. 1 For the inviolable faith of the Citizens in all their Leagues, and most firm affection to their friends: so that Fides Attica grew in the end unto an Adage. 2 For the famous scholars which here taught and flourished: this being so happy a Nursery of the choicest wits, and so fitly seated for the Muses, that the very Natives being in other countries could sensibly perceive some want of that natural vigour, which at home was resiant in their spirits. It a ut corpora istius gent is separata sent in alias Regiones, ingenia vero solis A theniensium muris clausa esse existimes, as Velleius hath it. Yea and to say the truth, it was a most famous University, from whose great Cistern, the Conduit-pipes of learning were dispersed over all the World. Yet did not learning so effeminate or soften the hearts of the People, but that 3 this one City yielded more famous Captains, than any in the World besides, not excepting Rome, Miltiades, Aristides, Themistocles, Cimon, Pericles, Alcibiades, Photion, and divers others of great name. Who though they were the men that both defended and enlarged this Commonwealth: yet were the people so ungrateful to them, or they so unfortunate in the end, that they either died abroad in banishment, or by some violent death at home. Themistocles the Champion of Greece, died an exile in Persia, Photion was slain by the people; Demosthenes made himself away by poison; Pericles many times endangered; Theseus their Founder first deposed, and then despitefully imprisoned: Aristides, Alcihiades, Nicius, etc. banished for ten years by Ostracism: A form of punishment so called, because the name of the party banished was writ on an Oystershell, and only used toward such, who either began to grow too popular, or potent among the men of service. Which device, allowable in a Democraty, where the overmuch powerablenesse of one might hazard the liberty of all, was exercised in spite oftener, than desert. A Country-fellow meeting by chance with Aristides, desired him to write Aristides in his shell; and being asked, whether the man whose banishment he desired, had ever wronged him, replied, No, he was only sorry to hear folk call him a good man. We find the like unfortunate end to most of the Romans, so redoubted in war. Coriolanus was exiled, Camillus confined to Ardea, Scipio murdered, with divers others: only because their virtue had lifted them above the pitch of ordinary men. Ventidius was disgraced by Antony, Agricola poisoned, with the privity of Domitian; Corbulo, murdered by the command of Nero: all able men, yet living in an age, wherein it was not lawful to be valiant. In later times it so happened to Gonsalvo the Great Captain, who having conquered the kingdom of Naples, driven the French beyond the mountains, and brought all the Italian Potentates to stand at the Spaniards devotion; was by his Master called home, where he lived obscurely, though honoured after his decease with a solemn Funeral. Worse fared the Guise, and Byron in France; worse Essex and Dudley of Northumberland with us in England. Neither will I omit William Duke of Suffolk, who having served 34 years in our wars with France, and for 17 years together never coming home, at his return was quarrelled and basely murdered. It were almost an impiety to be silent of Joab, the bravest soldier and most fortunate Leader that ever fought the Lords battles: and yet he died at the horns of the Altar. Whether it be that such men be born under an unhappy Planet; or that Courtiers, and such as have best opportunity to endear men of war unto their Sovereigns, know not the way of commending their great deserts; or that Envy the common Foe to virtue, be an hindrance to it; I am not able to determine. And yet it may be that Princes naturally are distrustful of men of Action; and are not willing to make them greater, whose name is great enough already. And it may be the fault is in the soldiers themselves by an unseasonable overvaluing of their own performances, as if the Prince or State were not able to reward or prise them: which was the cause of the death of Silius, in the time of Tiberive, concerning which Tacitus giveth us this good note, that over-merit in great Subjects is exceeding dangerous, and begets hate in stead of favours. Eeneficia eo usque loet a sunt dum videntur exolvi posse; Vbi multum anteverterunt, pro gratia edium redditur, saith that wise Historian.  
But to look back again on Athens, it was first built by Cecrops, the first King thereof; governed by him and his posterity with no lower title, for 400 years, as is apparent by this following Catalogue of 

The KINGS of ATHENS.  
A. M.  
2394 1 Cecrops, who first made Jupiter a God, and ordained sacrifices to be offered to him, as Pausanias writeth.  
2444 2 Cranaus, outed of his Kingdom by  
2453 3 Amphictyon the son of Deucalion, and Uncle to that Amphictyon, who first instituted the supreme Court of the Amphictyones, or Common-council of all Greece.  
2463 4 Fricthonius the son of Vulcan.  
2513 5 Pandion the Father of Progne and Philomela, so famous in the old Poets, of whom more hereafter.  
2553 6 Eri●hthous whose daughter Orithya was ravished by Boreas' King of Thrace.  
2603 7 Cecrops Il. brother of Erichtheus.  
2643 8 Pandion Il. son of Erichtheus.  
2668 9 Aegeus son of Pandion the second, of whom the Aegean sea took name.  
2706 10 Theseus the son of Aegeus and Companion of Hercules, vanquished the Minotaur in Crete, collected the people of Attica into a body, and incorporated them into the City of Athens, which he had beautified and enlarged.  
2746 11 Mnestheus the son of Peteus' Grandchild of Erichtheus, served with the other Greek Princes at the war of Troy.  
2769 12 Demophoon the son of Theseus, restored unto his Father's throne on the death of Maestheus.  
2802 13 Oxyntes son or brother of Demophoon.  
2814 14 Aphydas son of Oxyntes slain by his brother.  
2815 15 Thymades the last of the line of Erichtheus.  
2823 16 Melanthius of Messene driven out of his own Kingdom by the Heraclide, obtained that of Athens.  
2860 17 Codrus the son of Melanthius, the last King of Athens; who in the wars against the Pelopennesians having Intelligence by an Oracle, that his Enemies should have the victory, if they did not kill the Athenian King; attired himself like a common Beggar, entered the Pelopenn●sian Camp, and there played such pranks, that at the last they were fain to kill him. Which when the Enemy understood, they thought themselves by this means deprived of all hopes of success, and so broke up their Army, and departed homewards. For this the people of Athens did so honour his memory, that they thought no man worthy to succeed, as King; and therefore committed the managing of the Estate to Governors for term of life, whom they called Archontes: the first Archon being Medon the son of Codrus; not differing from the former Kings in point of power, but only in the manner of their admission: the former kings claiming the government by succession in right of blood; and these Archontes holding by election only: whose names here follow in this list of    

The perpetual ARCHONTES in the STATE of ATHENS.  
A. M.  
2882 1 Medon the son of Codrus.  
2902 2 Acastus the son of Medon.  
2938 3 Archippus the son of Acasius.  
2957 4 Thersippus the son of Archippus.  
2998 5 Pherbas the son of Thersippus.  
3029 6 Megacles the son of Phorbas.  
3059 7 Diogenetus the son of Megacles.  
3087 8 Phereclus the son of Diogenetus.  
3106 9 Aritthon the son of Phereclus.  
3126 10 Thespieus, in whose time began the Kingdom of Macedon.  
3153 11 Agamestor.  
3173 12 Aeschilus the son of Agamestor.   
After whose death, an. mun. 3195. the Athenians weary of these Governous for term of life, as being less obnoxious to the check and censure of the people, chose themselves Officers or Archontes for ten years only; at the end of which time they were to yield up their places, and make room for others. But being a people greedy of Novelties, and desirous of change, they had only seven of those Decenniall Archontes: their Officers from that time forwards being chosen annually: which Officers being nine in number, we may call most properly the Provost, the Chief Bishop, the Marshal, and the six Chief Justices, all chosen out of the Nobility: And so it held for the space of 170 years, till the time of Solon: who was the first which put the Supreme authority into the hands of the People; and gave the first hint unto that Democraty: which afterwards prevailed in Athens, by the help of Pericles, who being one of the great Council of the Areopagites, took from them a great part of their power in deciding Controversies and suits in Law, putting them over to the judgement of the common people. A Government so dearly loved by the Athenians, that in all the Cities which they conquered or restored to liberty, or won to their party from the Spartans', they caused it to be admitted: as on the other side the Spartans' introduced and confirmed the aristocraty (their own loved Government) in all the places where they prospered. As for the Court of the Areepagites of much fame in Athens, it ●consisted from the first beginning 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of such as had born some of the nine chief Offices; who being once admitted, held for term of life. First instituted in the time of Demophoon, the son of Theseus, and called by the name of Areopegites, either for that they held their Court in the street of Mars, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 mentioned, Act. 17. 22. or because Mars being accused for a Murder, did first plead before them. A Court which held in estimation under all these changes, and so continued till the time of the Roman Empire.  
But to return again to the story of Athens, in or about the later end of the li●e of Solon, Pisistraas altered the Free State and made himself the absolute Master of the City: but he once dead, the People regained their liberty, driving thence Hippias the son of Pisistratus; who hereupon fled for accour to Darius the Persian Monarch, occasioning by that means the first coming of the Persians into Greece. What success the Persians had in Greece, these Histories of the times abundantly inform us: Da●tus being vanquished by Miltiades, at Marathen; and Xerxes by Themistocles, at Salamis; yet did not Athens scape ●o clear, but that it was taken by Xerxes, though indeed first abandoned, and voluntarily dismantled by the Athenians. When the Persians were retired homewards, the people of 〈◊〉 re-edified their town, and strongly fortified it with high and defensible walls: which done, they put their Fleet to Sea, and spoiled the coasts of Persia in all quarters; enriching their City with the spoils, and enlarging their power and Dominion by the addition of many Islands and Sea towns. Hereby they grew unto that wealth and potency, that they were suspected by their weaker neighbours, and envied by their stronger, the Lacedoemonians especially: who fearing to lose their ancient priority over Greece, but pretending the surprisal of Potidea a City of Thrace from the Corinthians, and some hard measure, by them showed upon the Megarenses; made war upon them. In the beginning of this war, the Athenians not only resisted the whole power of all Greece, confederate against them; but so exceedingly prospered, that the Spartans', sued for peace, and could not get it. But the scales of fortune turned. For after they had held out 28 years they were compelled to pluck down the Walls of their City, and submit themselves to the will and pleasure of the Spartans', now by the puissance and good fortune of Lysander, become their Masters: by whom the Government was changed, and an aristocraty, (or rather oligarchy) established under 30 Magistrates, known commonly by the name of the 30 Tyrants; expelled not long after by the valour of Thrasibulus, and his Associates, as hath been touched upon before. Not long after the end of this war, which the Historians call Bellum Peloponnesiacum, the Persians seeing how the Spartans', not having now the State of Athens to oppose them, began to work upon their Empire: furnished Conona Noble Athenian Gentleman with a Navy so well provided, that they overcame the Lacedæmonians in a sight at Sea; and thereby put his Countrymen into so good heart, that they once more re-edified and repaired their Walls. Which work they had no sooner ended, but they made a party in the war called Bellum Sacrum; composed at the last by Ihilip of Macedon: who brought not only the Thebans whom he came to aid, but the Athenians, Spartans', and the rest of the adverse party under his command. A servitude from which they were never freed, till as well Macedon, as the rest became fellow-servants unto Rome. But though this brave City had then lost her power in point of Arms, yet she still kept her credit, as an University in point of Arts, Origen, Chrysostom, Basil, and Gregory Nyssen, men of renown and eminence in the Primitive times, are said to have studied at Athens: the like affirmed of Pope Joan, if the Tale be true, for the middle ages. And so it held as I conjecture, though not so eminently as before, till the year 1440. when taken by Mahomet the Great, who wondered much (as my Author telleth) at the extreme beauty of the Castle, and the strength of the walls, not having lost in so long time, their former excellencies. Since that it sensibly decayed, and is now an ordinary Burrough (by the Turks called Selines) but still preserved the Reputation of an Episcopal See, the Bishop of it holding up the title of Athe●●sis.  
2 MEGARIS is bounded on the East with Attica; on the West with the Bay of Corinth, on the North with Boeotia, and on the South with the Isthmus, and the Golf of Engia. So called from Megaris, the chief City.  
This the least Province of all Greece, and not very fruitful; the Country for the most part being hard and rocky. Not beautified with many Cities; the principal of those which were 1 Pega, or Pagoei, situate on the Bay of Corinth, and spoken of both by Pliny and Ptolemie; but not otherwise memorable. 2 Megaris (now Megra) first built by Megareus the son of Apollo; and from him thus named. Remarkable in former times for a Sect of Philosophers, called from hence Secta Megarica, founded by one Euclid a Disciple of Socrates; of whom see Laertius. More memorable in the Poets for Nisus, once the King of this little Territory: on whose head there is said to have grown a Purple Hair, on which the preservation of his life and Kingdom did depend. Which Jewel his daughter Scylla is said to have delivered unto King Minos her Father's Enemy; on whom then besieging this City, upon the sight of him from an high Turret, she became enamoured. But he rejecting her, and her Present both, after the taking of the City returned into Crete: which the unhappy woman seeing, threw herself after him into the Sea, and was turned into the Bird called siris. I leave the moralising of the Fable unto the Mythologists: observing only by the way, the antiquity of that politic practice, to love the treason and hate the Traitor. But the glories of this City did not ●nd with Nisus. For shaking off the Cretan yoke it became sui juris once again; and being conveniently seated on the very Isthmus, amounted to that height of prosperity that they contended with the Athenians for the Island of Salamis▪ And in this war they so crushed the power and spirit of Athens▪ by one fatal overthrow, that the Athenians to prevent all the like dysasters, did ordain by Law, that whosoever mentioned the recovery of Salamis, was to lose his life: so that Solon was compelled to feign himself frantic, the better to propound the enterprise. In which, although the State of Athens got the Isle of Salamis: yet did the Megarenses continue a Free-people, till brought under (with the rest) by the Macedonians, and with them made subject unto Rome.  
3 BOEOTIA is bounded on the South with Megaris, and the Bay of Corinth; on the North with the River Cephisus; on the East with Attica, and a branch of the Aegean Sea; and on the West with Ph●●is. Thus named from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which in Greek signifieth an Ox: because when Cadmus weary of seeking his sister Europa (whom Jupiter had stolen out of Phoenicia) came to the Oracle at Delphos; he was commanded to follow the first Ox he saw, and where the Ox did rest itself, there to build a City.  
In the Country nothing singular but an ancient custom of burning before the door of an house in which a new-married wife was designed to dwell, the Axletree of the Coach which brought her thither: giving her by that Ceremony to understand (as Plutarch telleth us in his Morals) that she must restrain herself from gadding abroad; and that being now joined unto an husband, she must frame herself to live and abide with him, without hope of departure. In this Country also are the Straits of the Mountain Oeta, from the neighbouring Baths, called Thermopylae, not above 25 foot in breadth: which ●n the war that Xerxes made against the Greeks, were valiantly defended by Leonidas King of Sparta, with no more than 300 of his men: who having valiantly resisted that Army which in its passage out of Persia had drank Rivers dry, and slain at least 30000 of them, died every man upon the place. To hide the greatness of which loss, lest it should terrify the rest of his Army which were coming on, Xerxes commandedd all the slain men to be buried in several pits, except a thousand, as it no more than they had been lost in that passage.  
Places of most observation in it: 1 Thespias, on a River of the same name, at the fall whereof into the Bay it is pleasantly seated: shadowed on the North with a Branch of the Mountain Helicon; and consecrated as that was, unto the Muses, hence called Thespiades in the Poets. 2 Platea, nigh to which Mardonius, General to the Persians, was overcome by the Greeks, with the loss of Mardonius himself and 160000 men on the Persian side; and on the other no more than 31 Spartans', 16 Arcadians, 52 Athenians, and about 600 of the Megarenses. In memory of which brave exploit, and to preserve the names and honour of those Worthies who there laid down their lives for the liberty of Greece, there was a festival kept annually by the Plateans in the month of September, with solemn Sacrifices, and a kind of divine acknowledgement unto the deceased, continued from the time of Aristides the Athenian who first ordained them, to the days of Plutarch, who records it: but how long after I am not able to say. In this great fight the Commander in chief was a noble Spartan, called Pausanias, who afterwards having a design to make himself Sovereign of all Greece, and being discovered in the practice, fled for sanctuary to the Temple of Pallas. From whence because it was counted sacrilege to constrain him by violence, it was unanimously resolved to wall up the entrances, his own Mother laying the first stone. It is recorded that before the fight of this battle, the Athenians had been told by the Oracle that they should be Conquerors if they fought upon their own ground: whereupon the Plateans within whose territories the Persians had prepared to fight, bestowed that field on the State of Athens. In requital of which noble act, Alexander the Great re-edified and enlarged their City, having been first burnt and sacked by the Persians, and after leveled with the ground by the Lacedæmonians, because confederate with Athens in the war against them. 3 Leuctra, remarkable for the great overthrow which the Thebans under the conduct of Epaminondas, gave unto the Spartans', and their King Cleombrotus, there slain: by which victory they did not only preserve their own liberty, but brought their enemies to that fall of courage and reputation, that they could never rise again: the divine vengeance overtaking them in that very place, where some of their Nation had deflowered the daughters of Schedasus who had given them courteous entertainment. For which, when no reparation could be had from the State of Sparta, the unfortunate Damosels flew themselves to avoid the infamy of consenting to their own dishonour, and were buried in those very fields where this battle was fought. 4 Asera, the birthplace of Hesiod, a man (according to Paterculus) elegantis ingenii, & carminum dulcedine memorabilis: though it hath pleased that proud Critic Julius Scaliger, intending to deify Virgil, to prefer the worst verse in the Georgics of the one, before the whole works of the other. 5 Lebadia, near the River Cephisus, the Inhabitants whereof were counted the most superstitious of all the Grecians: memorable for the Den or Cave of Trophonia, and the Oracle there given by Jupiter, hence called Trophonius. Into which Cave none were permitted to enter and receive the Oracle but after many ointings, washings, and the like superstitious preparations: too long and many to be specified in this place and time. A town which still preserves so much of its ancient estimation, that from hence (as I conjecture) the whole Country of Achaia hath the name of Levadia, by which the Turks call it at this present. 6 Cherona, or Coronea, the birthplace of Plutarch. Near unto which was fought that memorable battle betwixt L. Sylla and the Romans, against Archelaus one of the Lieutenants of Mithridates King of Pontus, leading an army of 120000 soldiers, of which 10000 only escaped with life, the Romans losing but 14. 7 Orchomen●n, no less memorable for another victory obtained by the same L. Sylla, against Dorilaus another of that King's Commanders, having an army of 80000 men, of which 20000 lost their lives that day. After which victories, when Sylla might easily have destroyed that King, he suddenly patched a peace up with him, that he might hasten unto Rome, where Marius and Cinna had trodden his faction under foot; preferring by that act the pursuit of his own private quarrels before that of his Country; endangered more by Mithridates after his return, than it had been formerly. 8 Aulis, a Port town on the shores of the Aegean Sea, where the Grecians took shipping when they went to the war of Troy; here making Oath never to give over the enterprise until they had destroyed that City. Concerning which, thus she in Virgil: 
Non ego cum Danais Trojanam excindere Gentem  
Aulide juravi.  That is to say: 
I took no oath at Aulis to destroy,  
As did the Greeks, the Town and State of Troy.   
But the chief City of this Country, and such as had a special influence over all the rest, was the City of Thebes, situate on the banks of the River Cephisus, where built by Cadmus the Phoenician after all his wander. Famous in old times for the wars between Eteocles and Polynices, the sons of the unfortunate Prince Oedipus, and of his Mother and wife Jocasta. The history of which war is the most ancient piece of story, that we find of all Greece; the former times and writings containing nothing but fables, little favouring of humanity, and less of truth; as of men changed into Monsters, the adulteries of the Gods, and the like. In this town lived Pelopidas and Epaminondus, who so crushed the Lacedæmonians at the battle of Leuctra and Mantinaea: that they could never after re-obtain their former puissance. This Commonwealth long flourished, and at last being overburthened in the Phocian war, was glad to submit itself to the protection of the Macedonians, under the leading of King Philip: who by this means first got footing in Greece, into which afterwards he thrust his whole body. Upon the death of Philip, Thebes revolted from the Macedons; but Alexander his successor quickly recovered it: and to dishearten the Greeks in the like attempts, he razed the City, selling all the inhabitants of age and strength; only Pindarus house he commanded to be left standing, in honour of that learned Poet. At this sack of the town, one of the Macedon soldiers entered the house of a principal woman, named Timoclea, ravished her, and rifled her coffers; but still demanding more treasure she showed him a deep Well, saying, that there all her money was hidden. The credulous villain stooping down to behold his prey, she tumbled into the Well and overwhelmed with stones; for which noble act, the generous Prince not only dismissed her unhurt, but most highly commended her. It was after re-edified by Cassander, and followed for the most part, as the rest of the Boetians did, the fortunes of Macedon. Reduced at this time to the State of an ordinary Burrough, and called Scibes by the Turks.  
4 PHOCIS is bounded on the East with Boeotia, on the West with Doris and Looris, on the North with the River Cephisus, and on the South with the Bay of Corinth. A Country somewhat swelled with Mountains, but those of eminent note in the elder times. The chief whereof 1 Helicon, 2 Cithaeron; both consecrated to the Muses, and both contending with Parnassus for height and bigness. 3 Parnassus, of so great an height, that in that great deluge, in which most of these parts of Greece were overwhelmed with the waters, Deucalion and Pyrrha saved themselves, and many others, on the top hereof: for which and for its two summits reaching to the clouds, of great renown amongst the Poets; as in Ovid thus: 
Mons ibi verticibus petit arduus astra duobus,  
Nomine Parnassus; superatque cacumine nubes.  
Parnassus there with his two tops extends  
To the touched stars, and all the clouds transcends.   
Places of most observation in it, 1 Anticyra situate near the Sea, and famous for the Helleborum there growing, an herb very medicinal for the Frenzy; whence the Proverb, Naviget Anticyras, applied to mad men. 2 Pytho, or Pythia, said to be seated not only in the middle of Greece, but of all the world: Strabo relating how Jupiter desirous to know the exact middle of the earth, let loose two Eagles, one from the East and the other from the West, which flying with an equal wing (so we must conceive) and meeting at this very place, showed it apparently to be the Navel of the World. By reason of which convenient situation in the heart of Greece, it was made a Session's town for all the Grecians, and honoured with the Court and general Assembly of the Amphictiones, men chosen out of the prime Cities of Greece, who had power to decide all Controversies, and to make Laws for the common good. A Court first instituted by Acrisius, as Strabo telleth us; or as Halicarnasseus more probably, by Amphictyon the son of Helles, from whom they seem to have their name. The Commissioners from the several Cities, with reference to the places for which they served, had the name of Pylagorae; when assembled, they were called the Amphictyones: their meetings, at the beginning of the Spring and Antumn. Some instances concerning their authority will not be amiss. In the time of Cimon, the Cyrrhenians having by piracy wronged the Thessalians, were fined by this Council. And after that the Lacedæmonians for surprising Cadmea; and the Phocians for ploughing up the Land of Cyrra, which belonged to the Temple of Delphos, were by them amerced: and because they continued obstinate, and paid not their amercements, their Dominions were adjudged to be confiscate unto that Temple. But they disobeying this Decree also, spoilt the Temple itself: for which war being proclaimed against them by the rest of the Grecians, who by the assistance of Philip King of Macedon▪ brought them to obedience; the Council was again assembled. In which it was decreed that the Phocians should raze the wall of their Cities; that they should pay the yearly tribute of 60 Talents; that they should no more keep Horse and Arms, till they had satisfied the Treasury of the Temple; nor any longer have a voice in those Conventions. It was also then enacted, that the lost suffrages of the Phocians should be vested in King Philip and his successor's Kings of Macedon; on whom they also did confer the perpetual Presidentship, and made them Princes of that Senate. A Court to which the Sanhedrin of the 70 Elders among the Jews; and in our times, the Diets of the Empire, and the Assemblies of the Swissers, carry most resemblance. 3 Cyrrha, on the Sea side, the Port town to Delphos. 4 Crissa, so called from Crissaeus the son of Phoeus, and grandchild of Aeacus, situate on the edge of the Bay of Corinth, called sometimes from hence Crissaeus Sinus. 5 Scarphia, memorable for the defeat of Critolaus Captain of the Achaean Army, by Metellus one of the Roman Praetors: the loss of which battle drew after it the destruction of Corinth. It was observed in the success of this great fight, that a band of Areadians escaping out of the battle came unto 6 Elatea, another City of this Province, and were there kindly entertained on memory of some former alliances, till news came of the overthrow of Critolaus: when ordered by the State of Phocis to relinquish the town, (for adversity seldom meeteth with returns of friendship) they were set upon, and all slain by the Romans, in the selt-same place in which their Ancestors had unworthily forsaken the rest of the Grecians in their war against Philip King of Macedon, for the public Liberty. 7 Daulis, a City appertaining to Tereus' King of Thrace, who having married Progne the daughter of Pandien King of Athens, ravished her sister Philomela, and cut out her tongue the better to keep his villainy undiscovered. But Progne being made acquainted with the double injury, first made him ignorantly eat his own son I●ys, whom she had baked in a Pie; and after killed him, with the help of her ravished sister. 8 Delphos, renowned in old times for the famous Temple of Apollo, in which with that of Jupiter Hammen in Marmari●a, (now reckoned as a part of Egypt) were the most famous Oracles of the ancient Gentiles: dark Riddles of the Devil, couched and contrived with so much cunning, that the meaning of them was most hidden when it was thought most easy to be discerned. Instance of which that given to Croesus, in the war by him projected against the Persian, which was thus delivered: Croesus Halyn penetrans magnam subvertet opum vim. 
When Croesus over Halys goes  
A mighty Nation he overthrows.  Which he interpreting according to his own hopes, crossed the River; was vanquished by Cyrus' King of Persia, and his Kingdom conquered. The like we find of Pyrrbus King of Epirus, who before he made war against the Romans, consulted with the Oracle, and received this answer. Aio te Aeacide Romanos vincere posse. Which doubtful prediction he thus construed; Te posse vincere Romanos, that he should overcome the Romans; but found it unto his cost that the meaning was, Romanos posse vincere te, that the Romans should overcome him; as indeed it happened. By another kind of the same fallacy which the Logicians call Amphibolia, did this great enemy of mankind overthrow another: who demanding of the Oracle what success he should have in an expedition which he was in hand with, received his answer in these words: Ibis redibis nunquam per bella peribis. Which he thus pointing, Ibis, redibis, nunquam per etc. engaged himself in the war, and was therein slain. Whereupon his followers canvasing the Oracle found the meaning of it to be this, Ibis, redibis nunquam, per etc. The like juggling he also used in those supernatural Dreams which Philosophers call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. For Caesar dreaming that he carnally knew his own mother the night before he passed over the Rubicon, became Lord of Rome, the common mother of the Romans: and Hippias the son of Pisistratus the Tyrant of Athens, having upon the same projects the same dream, was killed and buried in the bowels of his mother the earth: so that had Caesar miscarried in his action, and Hippias thrived: yet still had the Devil been reputed his crafts-master, and the father of truths. But as the Ecclesiastical history telleth us, that Julian the Apostata consulting with the Devil, was told that he could receive no answer, because that the body of Babylas the Martyr, was entombed nigh his Altar: so neither could the Devils deceive the world as formerly they had done, after Christ the truth itself was manifested in the flesh, and tormented these unclean spirits, though as they alleged, before their time. Augustus, as Suidas telleth us, in whose time our Saviour was born, consulting with the Oracle about his successor, received this not satisfying answer: 
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉,  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  
An Hebrew child, whom the blessed Gods adore,  
Hath bid me leave these shrines and pack to hell;  
So that of Oracle I can no more:  
In silence leave our Altar, and farewell.  Whereupon Augustus coming home, in the Capitol erected an Altar, and thereon in capital Letters caused this inscription to be engraven, HAEC EST ARA PRIMOGENITI DEI. Now as the Devils had by Christ's birth lost much of their wont virtue, so after his passion they lost it almost altogether. Concerning which Plutarch in a tract of his Morals, called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Why Oracles cease to give answers, telleth us a notable story, which was this. Some company going out of Greece into Italy, were about the Echinades becalmed; when on the sudden there was heard a voice, loudly calling on one Thamus an Egyptian, then in the ship. At the two first calls he made no answer, but to the third he replied, saying, Here I am: and the voice again spoke unto him, bidding him when he came to Palodes, to make it known, that the great God Pan was dead. When they came unto the Palodes, which are certain shelves and rocks in the Ionian Sea, Thamus standing on the poop of the ship, did as the voice directed him: whereupon was heard a mighty noise of many together, who all seemed to groan and lament with terrible and hideous shrieks. News hereof coming to Tiberius he caused the learned men in his Empire, to inquire out of their Books who that Pan should be; by whom it was answered, that he was the son of Mercury and Penelope; with ignorance enough, and little satisfaction to the business propounded to them. Such therefore as more narrowly observed the circumstances of this accident, found it to happen at the time when our Saviour suffered on the Cross; who was indeed the true God Pan, the chief Shepherd and Bishop of our souls, as the Scripture calleth him: and that upon this divulging of his death and passion, the Devils who used to speak in Oracles, did with great grief and lamentation forsake that Office, which had been so gainful to them in seducing mankind. That all Oracles at that instant ceased, I dare not say; though it be certain that about that time they began to fail: it being said by Juvenal who lived in the reign of Domitian, Delphis Oracula cessant, that the Oracle of Delphos was then silent; the rest decaying sensibly in a short time after.  
But to proceed, the Temple of Apollo being spoiled by the Phocians, as before was noted, caused the war betwixt them and the Thebans called the Holy War: in which the Thebans being likely to have the worst, sent for Philip of Macedon, who made an end of the quarrel by subduing both. The treasure which the Phocians found in the Temple, was reckoned at 60 talents of Gold: but it proved Aurum Tolosanum, and brought a sudden ruin on their State and Nation: Sacrilege being so impardonable a crime, even amongst the Heathen, that the fault of some few countenanced by the rest of a people, hath brought destruction on them all. It was afterwards with the like ill fortune ransacked by Brennus and his Gauls, in the main of the Macedonian Empire; all of them miserably perishing who had any hand in it.  
5 LOCRIS is bounded on the East with Phoeis and a branch of the Aegean Sea; on the West with Aetolia; on the North with a long ridge of hills which part it from Thessaly; and on the South with parts of Achaia, Boeotia, Phocis, the Bay of Corinth, the Straits of Amirrhium, and a part of the Ionian Sea. So that for largeness of extent, and the commodiousness of the Seas, it yieldeth to no Province in Attica, though not so fruitful as some others. Divided into the three Nations of the Locri, 1. Azolae, lying towards the South, on both sides of the Straits; so called from some ill smells of the Country or people; 2 the Epi●nemidii, inhabiting the middle parts, so named from Mount Cnemis, not far from Parnassus; and 3. the Opuntii, so called from Opus their chief City, lying on the North side of the River Cephisus on the Coasts of the Aegean or Euboean Seas.  
Chief Cities of the whole, 1 Opus, the head City of the Opuntians, situate on the River Asopus, being one of the main branches of Cephisus. 2 Cynus, the Port town to Opus. 3 Thronium, the prime town of the Epi●nemidii, mentioned by Polybius, Livy, Ptolemie. 4 Cnemides, at the foot of Mount Cnemis, whence they had their name. 5 Amphissa, the chief City of the Ozolae, situate in the Inland parts of it: the people whereof refusing to yield to the sentence of the Amphictyones, against their confederates the Phocians, were the cause that Philip of Macedon returned into Greece. Against whom grievously infesting the Boeotians, and manifestly aspiring to the command of Greece, the Athenians desperately opposed, not so much with possibility of prevailing, as by the sharp and biting orations of Demosithenes, made against his proceedings: which being by him called Philippics, occasioned Tully to call his bitter invectives against M. Antonius by the same name also. But the success hereof was such as commonly attendeth a broken fortune, the Athenians being vanquished at Chaeronea, and Philip declared Captain of Greece against the Persians, obtaining under that title the command he sought. 6. Evantia, as Ptolemie; Oeantia, as Pliny and Pausanias call it; opposite to Aegira in Achaia prepria. 7 Moly●hria, by Ptolemie placed here; but by others reckoned in Aetolia. 8 Naupactus, so called from the building of ships there by the Heraclidae, situate on the Corinthian Bay near the mouth thereof. Given by the Citizens of Athens to the poor Messenians, when after the end of the third war, the Lacedæmonians unwilling to have them troublesome neighbours (and they scorning to be quiet slaves) compelled them to seek new habitations. It hath of late been called Lepanto, giving the name of the Colfe of Lepanto to the Bay of Corinth; by that name subject for a while to the Venetians, and from them taken by the Tucks, anno 1499. Of these Locrians, those of Italy were a branch or Colony, whose Lawgiver was Zaleucus spoken of elsewhere.  
6 DORIS is bounded on the East with Phocis, on the West with Aetolia, on the North with the hill Octa, and other Mountains which divide it from Thessaly; and on the South with Aetolia, and part of Loeris. The air hereof is very healthy, and the soil sufficiently fruitful if well manured, but now the greatest part lieth waste, for want of tillage. First peopled by the Doors or Dorienses, descended from Dorus the son of Helen and grandchild of Devealion; by whom placed in Thessaly, after wards spreading into this Country which they left their name to, as their proper dwelling: though many of them following the Heraclidoe into Peloponnesus, possessed themselves of the greatest part of Laconia also, imprinting on the same their Dialect or form of speech, from them called the Doric  
Chief Cities hereof are 1 Doris, so called in memory of Dorus, the first Progenitor of this people. 2 Erineus, seated at the foot of Parnassus, mentioned by Thucydides, Strabo, Mela, Ptolemie, and the rest of the ancients. 3 Bium, as Ptolemie; or Boion, as Strabo and Pliny call it. 4 Cytinum, near Parnassusalso, in the common impressions of Diodorus Siculus the Historian, falsely called Cynthinium. 5 Liloea, situate not far from the spring or fountain of the River Cephisus; which rising hereabouts passeth thorough the whole length of Achaia and falls into the Aegean or Euboean Sea.  
7 AETOLIA hath on the East Loeris, on the West Epirus, on the North Doris, on the South the Ionian Sea. Said to be so called from Aetolus the son of Mars, who being by Salomoneus cast out of Elis, fixed himself in this Country.  
Here is the Forest Calydon, where Meleager and the flower of the Greek Nobility slew the wild Boar. Here is the River Evenus, over which the Centaur Nessus having carried Deianira, wife of Hercules; and intending to have ravished her, was slain by an arrow which Hereules on the other side of the River shot at him. Here also is the river of Achelous, of whom the Poet's fable many things, as that being rival with Hercules in the love of Deianira, he encountered him in the shape of a Bull; and that when Hercules had plucked off one of his horns, the Nymphs made of it their so much celebrated cornucopia.  
The people of this Country were the most turbulent and unruly people of all Greece, never at peace with their neighbours, and seldom with themselves. The Macedonians could never tame them, by reason of the cragginess of the country: yet they brought them to such terms that they were compelled to let the Romans into Greece, who quickly made an end of all.  
Principal towns hereof, were 1 Chalcis, situate near the springhead of Achelous before mentioned. 2 Arachthus, near the river so called, which arising hereabouts passeth into Epirus, and falleth into the Bay of Ambracia, not far from Nicopolis. 3 Olenus, not far from the Forest of Calydon. 4 Pleurona, giving name to the adjoining Country, called hence Pleuronia: the people whereof had the name of Curetes: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from their shaving; it being their custom to shave the foreparts of their heads, and let the hair grow on the hinder parts only: nehos●es eos coesarie apprehenderent, because their enemies should not lay hold on them by the foretops, and so pull them down. 5 Thermus, the Parliament-Citie or place of general Assembly for all the Estates of Aetolia, which meeting was called Panetolium, chosen for those meetings, in regard of the situation and strength thereof; as situate welnear in the midst of the Country, environed with rocky Mountains, of steep and difficult ascent. For that cause made also the receptacle of their wealth and treasure in all times of danger; but taken by the last Philip of Macedon, with all the spoil in it, in his war against them. 6 Calydon, near the forest so called, giving name unto it; the royal seat of Oeneus father of Meleager; divided into two parts by the River Evenus, which runneth through it, according unto that of Ovid: 
Et Meleagream maculatus sanguine Nessi,  
Evenus, Calydona secat.  That is to say: 
Calydon, Meleager's town, the flood  
Even divides, defiled with Nessus' blood.  Adjoining hereunto were the the Athamanes, whom Plime makes a people of it, who gave name unto a little Province called Athemania; but such, (as little as it was) as gave it the title of a Kingdom to Animander: a Prince whom the Aetolians made especial use of in their wars against Philip King of Macedon the father of Perseus, suggesting to him and his children, that they were descended of the house of Alexander the great, and so engaging them in a hope of that Kingdom to hazard the quiet of their own. The places of most note is 1 Dium, 2 Atheneum, both took by Philip in that war.  
These as they were the last Actors on the stage of Achaia, so had they the most desperate part in all the tragedy of that Country. The astaires whereof, governed successively by that State which was most, powerful were for a long time managed by the Athenians: whose counsels and conclusions went for law amongst them. But that Estate being broken, it not subverted by the power of Sparta, the Thebans and Boeotians who came next in play had the chief command, uniting almost all the rest in design with them against the Spartans'; who now grow terrible to all. Becoming insolent by the course of too much prosperity, and the many great victories which they had against the Spartans'; and thereupon quarrelling with the Phocians, they were the cause of Philip's coming into Greece; who as he had learned amongst them the use of arms, so made he use thereof at last, and of their dissensions, to unite all the States of Greece under his command. Thebes itself being took and sacked by Alexander the son of Philip, as before is said. The Macedonians thus prevailing, partly by force, but specially by art and practise, there was no people in Achaia that durst oppose them till these Aetolians, a restless and impatient people took the cause in hand: Who thrived so well under Antigonus and Philip: two of the last Kings of Macedon, that they took from them many towns, invaded Thessaly, attempted Macedon itself: and when they could not otherwise obtain their purpose in the destruction of that Kingdom, opened a passage for the Romans to effect it for them. But finding no such favour at the Romans hands as they did expect, they began to murmur, and afterwards to excite Antiochus and the Greeks against them, drawing thereby those forces against themselves which they had invited into Greece: and were the first people of all the Grecians that were conquered by them: though by the mediation of the Rhodians and some other friends, their Country was restored unto them, with the loss only of Cephalenia, Zant, and some other Islands which the Romans were resolved to keep as the fruits of the war. This was about the 564 year of the building of Rome, Fulvius Nobilior being then Consul, and chief Commander in this war. After which time the several Estates hereof enjoyed so much liberty, as the Romans their new Masters thought fit to give them: till finally made absolutely subject in the time of Vespasian, by whom Achaia was reduced into the form of a Province, Peloponnesus being reckoned as a part thereof. In the division of the Empire by Constantine the Great, the West parts hereof being divided from the rest, was called New Epinus: but both of them made Provinces of the Diocese of Macedon, under the Proefecsus Froetorio for Illyricum: the principal office of this part being called the Proconsul of Achaia: continuing under him and his successors, Emperors of Constantinople, till the destruction of that Empire by the power of the Turks. But so that it remained not always under the command of one sole Officer, the polity of that State being altered, and this Country parceled out into many Governments: especially after the taking of Constantinople by the Latins or Western Christians. At what time Theodorus Angelus a noble Grecian, and one of the (then) imperial family, seized on Aetolia and Epirus, part of which last, and all the first he left to Michael his son: who held them though with some dispute betwixt him and Michael Paleologus, the first Emperor of Constantinople after the expulsion of the Latins. Charles the last Prince of that family dying without issue about the year 1430. bequeathed Aetolia to another Charles, the son of his brother: and Acarnania (being that part of Epirus, which the Princes of Aetolia held) to his base sons, Memnon, Turnus, and Hercules. But many quarrels happening upon this division, Amurath the 2. having then newly conquered Thessalonica, composed the differences by taking all unto himself, anno 1432. There were at that time other Princes of like authority, as of Athens, Phocis, and Boeotia, but the first the chiefest: as honoured not only with the title of Dukes of Athens, but the Princes of Achaia also: such being the fortune of that City, as to have the first and last great sway in the affairs of Achaia. For at the translation of the Empire upon the Latins, Godfrey of Troy's, a French man, was made Duke of Athens, and Prince of Achaia, of whom Paulus Aemilius speaketh, anno 1220. which honour afterwards was conferred on a kinsman of John di Brenne, the last King of Jerusalem, Protector of Baldwin the 2. the last Emperor of the Latins, mentioned by the said Aemilius, anno 1288. By the heir general of this house it was conveyed in marriage to Izaulus di Accio, a Noble man of the Realm of Naples: whose son Walter for a time obtained the sovereignty of the State of Florence, anno 1342. but lost it suddenly again by his too much cruelty. Francis di Acciavol, the last Prince of this house, having been brought into the Court of Mahomet the Great, as one of his Favourites, surrendered his estate herein, at the persuasion of that Tyrant, in exchange for the Country of Boeotia, and the Dukedom of Thebes: which he no sooner had received but he was sent by Mahomet to Zoganus, his Lieutenant in Morea, by whom at first courteously received, at last cruelly murdered. And so the whole Country of Achaia fell into the hands of the Turks, anno 1454. or thereabouts.   

EPIRUS. 
Epirus.   
EPIRUS is bounded on the East with Aetolia, on the West with the Adriatic; on the North with Thrssay, Maceaen, and some part of Albania; and on the South with the Ionian Seas. So called from the solidity and Ermnesse of it; the word Epeiros in the Greek tongue, signifying as much as terra firma, or the firm land. But by the Turks at this day it is called Albania, which name they give to all the lands and Countries in their possession, lying upon the Adriatic and Ionian Seas.  
In this Country was born Olympias, mother of Alexander the Great; and Pyrrhus, who conquered the Realm of Macedon, and was the first foreiner, who made trial (though to his own loss) of the power and puissance of Rome; accounted by Hannibal, next to Alexander, the second great soldier of the world. Here is also Mount Pindus' sacred to Apollo and the Mujes, dividing this country from Thessaly, and therefore common unto both: as also the Acrocerautan hills, so called, because they are much subject unto thunder and lightning; eminent for their height and much feared by Mariners: who when they see a little cloud rising on the top hereof, are sure of a tempest. Finally here are the famous Rivers Acheron, and Cocytus, which for their black waters and unsavoury taste are said to be the Rivers of Hell: from which last the sacrifices and solemnities made in honour of Proserpina whom Plato ravished and brought hither, had the name of Cocytia. Whence by a Metonyvie, these Rivers are taken sometimes, for hell itself, as in that of the Poet; Flectere si nequeo superos, Acheronta movebo. 
Since those in Heaven I cannot move,  
The powers of Hell I mean to prove.   
The soil hereof is very barren, and in many places full of Forests, and thin of people; but towards the Sea side reasonably fruitful: plentiful of Oxen, Dogs, and Sheep, of more than ordinary bigness, and yielding the best breed of Horses. The people use a distinct language from the Grecians, though of the Greek tongue not utterly ignorant: and by reason of the barrenness of their own country, become great wanderers, especially in summer time, when they travel into Thrace, Macedon, and Asia minor, hiring themselves to work in harvest under the Turks, as also to thresh, winnow, and make clean their Corn; and in the Winter time return to their wives and children. Able of body, swift of foot, apt to undergo any toil and labour; having withal good courages and high projections, which makes such of them as delight not in works of drudgery, to look for action in the wars, and otherwise to rob and spoil in the neighbouring mountains of Albania. Till their subjection to the Turks, much used both by the Kings of Hungary, and the State of Venice, in their several wars; serving on Horse, or Foot, as occasion was: as Mercenary as the Swissers in the Western parts, but not so faithless to the party by whom entertained.  
Anciently it was divided into Chaonia, (which was the proper Epirus) lying on the West, and Acarnania, bordering on Aetelia, from which parted by the river Aehelous; the middle parts hereof being Amphilochia, Thesprotia, and Almene: all very populous in old times, and so continued, till Paulus Aemilius, on the conquest of Macedon, overthrew 70 of their Cities. Few of which being since reedisied, and the Country for a long time languishing under the Turks, here are not any fair Towns or well-peopled Cities at the present to be spoken of; and therefore we must look on such as flourished in the times foregoing. The principal whereof, 1 Dodona, one of the Cities of Chaonia, memorable for the Temple and Oracle of Jupiter, hence called Dodonaeus, situate in a fair grove, the trees whereof were said to be Vocal, and to give the Oracle; though others say, it was delivered first by a pair of Pigeons; whereof the one afterwards fled to Delphos, the other to the Temple of Jupiter Hammon in Egypt. It was the ancientest Oracle of all Greece; and so perhaps was the Town also. Said to be first built by Dodone the son of Jupiter and Europa: more probably so called from Dodonim the son of Javan and Grandchild of Japhet, who first inhabited this Region; the whole Country (Greece I mean) being called Javan from the Father (by which name commonly it occurreth in the Hebrew text,) this Town Dodona from the Son. 2. Cassiope, a Port Town, with a fair Promontery of the same name adjoining to it. 3 Onchesinus, by Strabo called Orchimus, and by Pliny Echinus, a Port town also now called Santi Quaranta. 4 Panormus, on the Sea side also, retaining still the old name, and but little else. 5 Antigonia, more within the land, sounded or repaired by Antigonus a King of Macedon, now called Argiro-Castro, as Niger thinketh. 6 〈◊〉, once the chief Town hereof, which being sacked by the Illyrians under Teuta their Queen gave the Terms an occasion of quarrel with them; upon complaint made to them by the Epirots. 7 〈◊〉 a Port town, the principal in that part which was called Thesprotia; as 8 Torona, on the River Thyainus, and 9 Sybora, an ancient Haven Town (now called Syoita) was in that part hereof which was called Almence. 10 Argos, the chief Town of the Amphilochians. This part hereof was first named 〈◊〉 from Molossus the son of Pyrious and Axdremache, remarkable for the best breed of Mastiffs, hence called 〈◊〉 and afterward Chaonia, by Helenus the son of Priamus, by Pyr 〈◊〉 the son of Achilles settled in this Country, who having unfortunately slain his brother Chaon, caused it in memory of him to be called Chaonia; Chaoniamque omnem Trojano à Chaone dixit, as it is in Virgil. Of these Molossians, Pluto the third son of Saturn was sometimes King, called from the flat and hollow situation of this country, consisting much of deep valleys, the King of Hell.  
Towns of especial note in Acarnania, 1 Anactorium, on the bay of Ambracia, now called Vanizza. 2 Ambracia, the Regal Seat or Court of Pyrrhus, giving name unto a fair and capacious Bay, now called Golfo di Larta, from Larta an adjoining Town, situate in or near the place where Ambracia stood. Once subject unto Periander, King or Tyrant of Corinth, who being slain by a woman named Lionna, whom he kept as his Concubine, occasioned the Inhabitants from that time forwards, in memory of their deliverance to worship a Lion. Afterwards being taken from the children of Pyrrhus by the Macedonians, and from them won by the Aetolians in the time of their greatness, it was besieged by Fulvius a Roman Consul spoken of before. Who seeing that he could not force it, was willing at the mediation of the Athenians, Rhodians, and other friends of both parties, to conclude a peace: but so that he despoiled this City at his going hence of much excellent Imagery, carrying away with him unto Rome the Pictures of the nine Muses most admirably well done by the hand of Zeuxis, the rarest Painter of his times. 3 Euthrotum, a Roman Colony, by Pliny called Colonia, simply; now a small Village called Butrinte. 4 Leucas, situate on the point of a Promontory of the same name also, anciently memorable for the Temple of Apollo; from the top of which Promontory by leaping into the Sea, such as unfortunately loved were cured of that malady: the first trial of that kind being made by Sapph, that famous Poetess. At that time joined unto the sand, but since by the violence of the Sea, or the hand of man made into an Island; according unto that of Ovid, 
Leucada continuam veteres habuere Coloni,  
Nunc Freta circumcunt;—  That is to say: 
Leucas in former times joined to the land,  
Environed round with waters now doth stand.  It was called Leucas, from the whiteness of the Rock or Promontory, having before the separation or disjunction of it been called Neritoes; the chief Town of it varying with the name of the Isle and Promontory: both town and Island at this time called S. Maure, taken by Bajazet the second, from the State of Venice, and by him given unto the Jews, (who do still inhabit it) at their expulsion out of Spain. 5 Nicopolis, a Colony of the Romans, of great both wealth and beauty in the time of S. Paul, who from hence dated his Epistle to Titus: called in that Postscript, Nicopolis of Macedonia, because Epirus at that time was part of the Province of Macedon, though afterwards a distinct Province of itself. It was first built by Augustus Caesar, on a Promontory opposite unte Actium, on the other side of the Bay: that being the place, where his Land soldiers were encamped before the Naval battle betwixt him and Mark Anthony: and was thus called either in memory of his victory; or from a poor man and his Ass, whom he met there the day before. For ask the man's name, he told him that his name was Eutyches, i. e. Fortunate; and that the name of his Ass was Nicon, i. e. Conqueror; which happy Omen made his soldiers courageous, and hopeful of victory: and he in memory thereof erected here two brazen Images, the one of the Ass, the other of his Master. It is now a small village called Prevesa.  
6. Actium, on the Seashore, nigh unto which Augustus and Antony fought for the Empire of the world. The Navy of the later consisted of 500 Galleys; the former had 250 only, but those crowned with victory: Antonius shamefully deserting his soldiers to follow after Cleopatra; who on the very first charge fled away for Egypt. The town now ruined, the Promontory upon which it stood called Cabbo di Figulo.  
The Country was first peopled by Dodonim the son of Javan, or at least by some of his posterity, coming hither from the Isle of Rhodes, whose memory was preserved a long time in the Town of Dodona, him, or from him so denominated. Afterwards being parted into several Nations, and those Nations united in the common name of Epirots: it became a great and powerful Kingdom, governed by a race of Kings descending from Pyrrhus the son of Achilles, and continuing till the time of Pyrrhus the son of Aeacides. A man of such courage and magnanimity, that he did not only recover his own Kingdom, of which Cassander had deprived his Father; but got the Kingdom of Macedon from Cassander's children: outed of which he tried his fortunes with the Romans, Anno Mundi 3683. V. C. 471. After his death this Kingdom was shrewdly shaken by the Macedonians, and shortly after subdued by Paulus Aemilius, who as we now said, destroyed 70 Cities hereof in one day. For, desirous to satisfy his soldiers after his victory in Macedon, he sent unto the Epirots for ten of the principal men of every City. These he commanded to deliver up all the gold and silver which they had; and to that end as he gave out, he sent certain companies of soldiers along with them; unto whom he gave secret instructions, that on a day by him appointed, they should fall to fack every one the town, whereunto they were sent. A barbarous and bloody decree, 70 Cities confederate with the Romans ruined in one day, and no fewer than 150000 Epirots made and sold for slaves. But the chief motive which induced him to so great a cruelty, was by dispeopling this country, lying with a long and fair Sea-coast over against Italy, to give the Romans opportunity to land their Armies, without any resistance, for the further progress of their Forces into Macedon, Thrace, Moesia, or where else they pleased. Which ungodly policy was afterwards imitated by William the Conqueror, who laid waste all that part of Hampshire, since called New Forest, and therein 36 Parish Churches: that he might have a safe landing place for his Norman Forces, if the English should at any time endeavour to make head against him. Being made subject to the Romans, it was a while part of the Province of Macedonia; but afterwards when Macedonia, was made a Diocese, it became a distinct Province of itself, called by the name of Old Epirus, to difference it from the Province of New Fpirus, which lay Eastward of it. At the division of the Empire it belonged to the Constantinopolitans; and so continued till the taking of Constantinople by the Western Christians: at what time Throdorus Angelus, a Prince of the Imperial family, seized on Aetolia and Epirus, as before is said; and sped so well in his designs that he took the strong City of Durazzo from the State of Venice (to whom it fell in the division of that spoil) and cunningly (if not treacherously) intercepted Peter the third Emperor of the Latins, whom, as some say, he caused to be murdered at a banquet. After his death, his whole Estate being divided into two parts; Aetolia with that part hereof which is called Chaonia, continued in his house till the time of Charles Prince of Aetolia and Epirus spoken of before, after whose death it was subdued by Amurath the second, as before was said. The residue hereof, together with that part of Macedon which is called Albania, fell to the family of the Ca●triots: the last of which named John (the Father of Scanderbag) seeing himself unable to resist that Tyrant, who had already swallowed up all his neighbour Princes; submitted his estate unto him, and gave unto him all his sons for hostages. No sooner was the old Prince dead, but Amurath seized on his estate, murdered his three eldest sons; and caused George the youngest, to be trained up in the Law of Mah●met: who afterwards escaping out of his power, and recovering all his Father's countries assumed also the style or title of Prince of Epirus. After whose death his children not being able to make good their game, lost it to Mahomet the Great, as shall be shown more fully in the story and description of Albania, which is next to follow.   

4 ALBANIA.  
ALBANIA is bounded on the East with Macedonia; on the West with the Adriatic: on the North, with S●lavonia; on the South with Epirus. The country mountainous and barren; watered with few Rivers, and those of no great note amongst the Ancients, as 1 Laus, 2 Apsus, 3 Paniasus, 4 Celidnus; all of them falling into the Adriatic.  
It took this name from the Albani, once the Inhabitants of this tract; from whom the chief City hereof was called Albanopolis. Other towns of most consideration, are 1 Stetigrade, or Vestigard (called by some the Holy City) situate in the borders of Epirus on the top of an hill, where it is s●nced about like an Eagles nest: one of the last towns in all this Country which was taken by Scanderbag, at his recovery of his birthright and estate herein; but being once taken by him held good courageously against the Turk, the soldiers neither fainting in their oppositions, nor corrupted by money. There was in the town one only Well, into which a treacherous Christian cast a dead dog; at the sight of which, being the next day drawn up, the soldiers gave up the town: being so unseasonably superstitious; that no persuasion, nor the example of the Captain, or the Burgo-masters, could make them drink those (as they thought) defiled waters. 3 Durazzo, a town of great strength, first called Epidamnum, and afterwards Dyrrhachium. Under the walls of which town, was the first bickering between the soldiers of Coeser, and Pompey, not only to the present loss, but also the utter discomfiture of Caesar, as he himself confessed; if the enemy's Captain had known how to have overcome. I must not omit the valour of Scoeva at this siege, who alone so long resisted Pompey's Army that he had 220 darts sticking in his shield, and lost one of his eyes, and yet gave not over till Caesar came to his rescue.  
Parque novum fortuna videt concurrere, bellum  
Atque virum— densamque ferens in pectore sylvam.  
Fortune beholds an unaccustomed sight,  
An Army and a man together sight,  
Whose breast a wood of Arrows covered quite.  
In the division of the Eastern Empire amongst the Latins it fell into the power of Venice; taken at last after a long and tedious siege by Amurath the second, an. 1474. 4 Dibra, in the hill countries, near Epirus: the first town which submitted to the valiant Scanderbag, at his revolting from the Turks, supposed to be the Deborus of Ptolemie; 5 Croia, conceived to be Epicaria of Ptolemie, the chief Town of all this country, seated amongst inaccessible mountains, and made impregnable by Art: not got by Scanderbag, but by wile: who having got into his power the Secretary of the principal Bassa, forced him to write letters in his Master's name unto the Governor hereof to deliver it unto him; which was done accordingly; afterwards in vain besieged by Amurath the second, who under the walls here of gave up his wretched soul to the Devil, and thrice besieged by Mahomet his son and successor, before he could again possess it, but taken at the last after Scanderbegs death; as if the Genius or tutelar Deity of the place had departed with him. 6 Petrella, a town of great strength, seated on the top of an hill (as almost all the Towns of Albania are) about 25 miles from Croia; delivered unto Scanderbag at his first sitting down before it; as also was 7 Petra Alba, three miles from Petrella, near the borders of Macedon, and situate like the other on the top of a mountain; the River Emarbus running under the bottom of it. 8 Stellusa, fifty miles from Croia, built on the top of an high hill in the middle of a pleasant and fruitful valley, with great and spacious plains about it. 9 Dagna or Dayna, a place of great importance in the hill country towards Sclavonia; for the possession whereof arose a war betwixt Scanderbag, and the State of Venice: but the Venetians being worsted at the battle of Drino, relinquished their pretensions to it. 10 Aulon, a Port-town now called Vallona, situate over against Hydruntum or Otranto in Italy, from which distant about 60 miles. The town unwalled, but fortified with a very strong Castle. A town unfortunately fit for the invasion of Italy, and was accordingly made use of by Achmetes the chief Bassa under Mahemet the Great, who from hence passed his Army over into Apulta, took the Town of Otranto: and had not the death of Mahomet, and the combustions thereon following amongst the Turks, altered the design, might have opened them a very fair way for the adding of Rome unto Constantinople. 11 Apollonia, a town of great note in the time of the Romans, a Sea-town furnished with a commodious Haven, which they held as their entrance into Greece, to that purpose serving them as commodiously, as Calais did the English in their wars with France.  
This country anciently was a part of Macedon, inhabited by the Talautii, Aestrai, and Albani, from which last (but not till these later times) it had the name of Albania: but whether these Albani, were a Colony of the Albanians of Asia, (though it be very probable) I determine not. When made a Province of the Empire it contained all Prevalitana, and some part of Macedonia Salutaris; under the Diocese of Dacia, in the time of Justinian, but at first of Macedon, Dismembered from the main body of it, when the Latins had subdued Constantinople; it fell unto the Noble family of the Castriotes: who though they took unto themselves the title of Kings or Princes of Epirus, (most of which they held) as the country of more note and eminence; yet was Albania the greatest strength, and Croia the chief City thereof, the seat of their residence; called in that respect by some writers, the Kings of Albania. John Castriot, the Father of Scanderbag, seeing himself unable to resist the Turks, became their Homager, and delivered four sons for Hostages; whom Amurath the second in their Father's life time, caused to be circumcised, and turn Mahometans; and after his decease murdered the three elder, and seized upon Croia the chief City, with the rest of the country. But George the youngest of those sons, being reserved for better fortunes, was carefully brought up by Amurath (who somewhat passionately loved him) in the arts of war; though some of his Courtiers then told him that he nourished a Serpent in his bosom which would one day sting him. Amurath to make trial of his disposition, offered him on a time the Crown of Albania: to which he prudently replied, that he preferred the honour of his service before all the Kingdoms of the World, and that he held his hand fitter for a sword, than his head for a Crown. Satisfied with which answer the Tyrant preferred him to the place of a Sanziack or Provincial Governor: & gave him some Office of Command in all those Armies, which he set out against the Christians. Escaping out of the battle wherein Caramben the great Basia was overthrown and taken Prisoner by Huniades, he got the Town of Croia by a piece of wit, as before was said: and in a very short time after, made himself Master of Petrella, Petra Alba, St●llusa, and all the rest of the country by the reputation and terror of his first success. Having recovered his inheritance out of the hands of the Turks, he reconciled himself to the Church of Christ: styling himself the Soldier of CHRIST JESUS, from that time forwards. Invaded by a vast Army of Turks, he overcometh Alis Bassa, and kills 20000 of his men. With no more than 20 horse and 50 foot, he assaulteth Mustapha in his Camp; in which 5000 Turks were slain, and 300 taken: with whom encountering not long after in the open field, he slew 10000 of his men, took many prisoners, and Mustapha himself for one, whom he ransomed for 25000 Ducats. Falling upon the Host of Amurath, then besieging Croia, he killed Ferisses' Bassa, hand to hand in a single comba●●and in the time of Mahomet who succeeded Amurath, vanquished Isaac the great Bassa; routed his whole army, had the spoil of his Camp, took 20 of his fairest Ensigns, and slew 30000 of his soldiers. Not to instance in the rest of his noble actions, it is reported that in the course of his war against the Turks, he killed no fewer than 3000 of them with his own hands: using a Turkish Scymitar in all his fights, of great weight and bigness. Which when Mahomet on a peace between them had desired to see, and afterwards returned again with this censure of it, that he saw nothing in it more than ordinary: the gallant Prince sent back this answer, that the virtue of the weapon depended on the strength of his Arm, which he could not send him, for that he did reserve it for the death of his Enemies. Finally having held his Cards against Amurath and Mahomet, two most fortunate Gamesters, for the space of 24 years, he set up his rest at last a winner: dying in peace at Lyssa, then belonging to the State of Venice; Jan. 17. an. 1466. and was there honourably interred. At the taking of which Town by the Turks about nine years after, his body was digged up by them, not in spite, but honour: that man accounting himself happy who could get any of his bones to preserve as a relic; supposing that as long as he had it about him, he should be invincible. But with him died the liberty of his Country also, not long after subdued by the Turks, and made a Province of that Empire, as it still continueth: the name of Albania being by them extended over all Epirus, and so much of Dalmatia also as is under their power.  
The arms of this kingdom (or rather of the Kings thereof) were Gules an Eagle Sable.   

5 MACEDONIA. 
Thessaly.   
MACEDONIA is bounded on the East with the Aegean Sea, on the West with Albania; on the North with Moesia Superior, and part of Thrace, and on the South with Epirus, and Achaia.  
It was first called Aemonia from Mount Haemus, which shutteth up that side hereof which is towards Moesia; after Aemathia, from a King of it called Aemathus; Macedonia from Macedo, the son of Deucalion and the Father of Caranaus, the first King of the line of Alexander: and finally Kittim or the Land of Kethim, whereof see Maccab. c. 1. v. 1 & cap. 8. v. 5. from Kittim the son of Javan, and Grandchild of Japhet who was planted here. Anciently of more large extent than it is at the present; extending from the Aegean Sea unto the Adriatic, till the taking of Albania cut of it, which hath strained it upon that side, but the rest as formerly.  
The Country, taking it together is very fruitful and pleasant, though on the outward parts thereof begirt with rough mountains and thick forests: in former times much celebrated for its mines of gold and silver, but long since exhausted. It contained formerly the Provinces of Aemathia, Pierla, Pelasgia, Fstiotis, Phiniotis, Thessaly, Mygdonia, Amphaxitis, Paraxia, Edonis, and many others of less note inhabited by 152 several Nations: now principally divided (besides Albania) into Thessaly. 2 Macedon specially so called, and 3 Mygdonia, which the Turks call Jamboli.  
1 THESSALY hath on the East the Aegean Sea, on the West Albania; on the North Macedon and Mygdonia; on the South, Achaia. A sweet and delectable country, the pleasures and delights whereof inclined the people to be very effeminate and dissolute in their course of life; in love with luxury and ease, and much like the Persians in behaviour: whose entrance into Greece they did therefore favour. Yet notwithstanding this debauchedness, they were esteemed the best Horsemen of all the Grecians: by their excellent managing of which creature (as if they had been one piece with it, and either lent the Horse their minds or borrowed his body) they gave occasion unto the fiction of the Centaurs, half men, half beasts.  
It is now called Comenolitati, and of old was very famous for many things, especially for the hill Olympus, of so great height, that it seemeth to transcend the clouds; and therefore frequently by the Poets took for Heaven itself. 2 For the hill Othrys, inhabited by the Lapithoe, over whom Pirithous was King. 3 For the Mountains of Pelion and Ossa, the dwelling places of the Centaurs, who intending to ravish Hippodame the Bride of Pirithous, on her wedding day, were slain by Hercules and the Lapithoe. 4 For the delectable Valley of Tempe, situate betwixt Ossa and Olympus; extending in length six miles, and five in breadth: so beautified with Nature's gifts, that it was supposed to be the Garden of the Muses. 5 And lastly, for the Dolopes, and Myimidones, (who did here inhabit) over whom Achilles had command at the siege of Troy: these last, by reason that they were a laborious and thirsty people, being fabled by the Poets to have first been Emmets; transformed unto men at the prayers of Aeacus when he wanted soldiers.  
— Moors quos ante tenebant,  
Nune quoque babent, parcum genus est, patiensque laborum,  
Quaesitique tenax, & quod quaesita reservet.  
The custom they of Emmets still retain,  
A sparing Folk, and unto Labour set;  
Strangely addicted to all kind of gain,  
And wary Keepers of what ere they get.  
Places of most observation in it, 1 Tricea, the Episcopal See of Heliodorus, the Author of that ingenious piece called the Aethhiopic History: which he so prized, that he chose rather: to lose his Bishopric then consent to the burning of his Book, which a Provincial Synod had adjudged to the Fire. A piece indeed of rare contexture, and neat contrivances, without any touch of loose or lascivious language: honest and chaste affection being the subject of it; not such as old or modern Poets show us in their Comedies, or other Poems. For here we have no incestuous mixture of Fathers, and daughters; no Pandarism of old Nurses; no unseemly action specified where heat of blood and opportunity do meet; nor indeed any one passage unworthy of the chastest Ear. 2 Lamia, where the Athenians after the death of Alexander, hoping to recover their freedoms, besieged Antipater: which was the last honourable enterprise undertaken by that great and renowned City; known in old Histories by the name of Bellum Lamiacum. 3 Larissa, situate on the South of Demetrias, but on the same Bay; memorable for the birth of Achilles; from hence called frequently in the Poets I arissaeus Achilles. 4 Demetrias, situate on the Bay called Sinus Pelasgicus (now the Golf of Armenia) of very great strength by Art and Nature. Which being held by the Macedonians, together with Chalcis in the Isle of Euboea, and the City of Corinth; kept all Greece in awe, and were therefore commonly called the Fetters of Greece: the Grecians never thinking themselves at liberty, till those towns were dismantled by the Romans. 5 Pharsalis, nigh to which was fought the great battle betwixt Caesar and Pompey, for the Sovereignty of the Roman Empire: a battle more famous than bloody, 6000 only of 300000, which were in the field on both sides, being therein slain. A battle before which the Pompeians were in such a miserable security, that some of them contended for the Priesthood which was Caesar's Office; others disposed of the Consulship, and preferments in the City of Rome: Pompey himself being so reckless, that he neither considered into what place it were best to fly if he lost the day; or by what means he might provide for his own safety, and end the war. As if the war had been made against some ignoble Enemy, and not against that Caesar, who had taken 1000 Towns, conquered 300 Nations, took prisoners one million of men, and slain as many. 6 Philippi, so named from Philip the Macedonian, the first founder of it; situate in the further part of the same plains of Pharsalia; and famous for as memorable a Battle as that before, and of no less consequence: that namely, betwixt Augusius and M. Antonius on the one side, against Brutus and Cassius on the other; these later being rather overcome by chance then valour. For either of them thinking the other vanquished, slew himself in the field: being the two last that ever openly stood out for the common Liberty, and therefore called by Cremutius Cordus, Vltimi Romanorum, or the last of the true Roman Spirits. 7 Gomphi, an ancient City bordering on Epirus. 8 Pheroe, in which City Alexander the Tyrant reigned; against whom that noble Captain Pelopidas the Theban fight, was slain in battle: the Tyrant being not long after murdered by his wife's brother, and by that means all Thessaly recovering liberty. 9 Pagasa, situate on the Bay called Sinus Pelasgicus, which from hence is sometimes named Pegasicus; in which the ship called Argo, was said to be built, so famous for the renowned voyage of the Argonauts. The hill Pelion spoken of before, is not far from hence. 10 Pythion, or Pythoeum, of great note for the Pythian games there celebrated in the honour of Apollo, who hereabouts killed the Serpent Python: the Conqueror in which games, were crowned at the first only with an Oaken Garland, but afterwards with one of Laurel. Of which thus the Poet: 
Neve operis famam posset abolere vetustas  
Instituit sacros celebri certam ne ludos,  
Pythia de domiti Serpentis nomine dictos, etc.  Thus made to speak English by G. Sandys: 
Then lest the well-deserved memory  
Of such an act in future times should die  
He instituted the so famous Games  
Of free contention, which he Pythia names.  
Who ran, who wrestled best, or raked the ground  
With swiftest wheels, the Oaken Garland crowned.  These games, together with the Olympic, Isthmian, and Nemaean spoken of before; made the four annual meetings amongst the Grecians; renowned for the universal concourse of the noblest spirits. 11 Doliche, which together with Pythium, and 12 Azorium, another City of this tract, standing near together, are called in Livius the Historian by the name of Tripoli. 13 Hypata, the Metropolis of Thessaly, so called by Heliodorus in his Aethhiopic History before mentioned: who placeth it near the Bay called Sinus Maliacus, now Golfo di Ziton, and not far from Mount Oeta, bordering on the Province of Doris: upon which Mountain, Hercules being tortured with a poisoned shirt, sent by his innocent wife Deianira, said to have burned himself; thence called Hercules Oeteus. Of all which Towns, Lamia, Pagasa, and Demetrias, are in the Region called Phthiotis; Larissa, Doliche, Phthium, and Azorium, in that called Pelasgia; Gomphi, and Trieca, in Estiotis; the rest in Thessaly, properly and specially so named.  
This Country at first called Aemonia, afterwards Pelasgia, than Pyrrhoea from Pyrrha the wife of Deucalion, and finally Thessalia, from Thessalus one of the companions of Hercules; by Pliny is called Driopis, Estiotis by Strabo, Pelasgia by Diodorus, and by Homer, Argos; the name of some chief City or particular Province, being figuratively used for the whole. Divided commonly into four parts, 1 Thessaliotis, 2 Estiotis, 3 Pelasgiotis, and 4 Phthiotis: the name of Thessaly or Thessaliotis in the end prevailing, accordingly distributed into several governments, united finally in the person of Philip the father of Alexander; who partly by force, but specially by art and practise, made himself Master of the whole. Continuing in a mixed condition betwixt free and subject, under the Macedonian Kings of the second Race; it became subject with that Kingdom to the State of Rome: first reckoned as a part of the Province of Macedon, after a Province of itself, when Macedon was made a Diocese, part of which it was. But from a Province of that Diocese, and a member of the Eastern Empire it was made a kingdom: given with that title to Boniface marquis of Mont-ferrat in exchange for Candie, together with the City of Thessalonica, and some part of Peloponnesus, at the division of that Empire amongst the Latins. Which title he affected in regard that Reiner the brother of Boniface his Grandfather, had formerly been created Prince of Thessaly, by the Emperor Emanuel, whose daughter Cyri Maria (or the Lady Mary) he had took to wife. In him as it began, so this title ended; Thessalonica falling to the State of Venice, Thessaly reverting to the Empire when the Greeks recovered it: from whom subdued, and added to the Turkish Empire in the reign of Amurath the 2. anno 1432.  
2 MACEDON specially so called, 
Macedon  is bounded on the East with Mygdonia, on the West with Albania, on the North with Mount Haemus, on the South with Thessaly. The Country for the most part fruitful, as before was said; but not so surfeiting with delights as to make the people wanton or esteminate in their course of life; as being naturally good soldiers, exact observers of military discipline, and enured to hardness: which their many signal victories do most clearly evidence, both in Greece and Asia.  
The Greeks in the pride of their own wits reckoned them amongst the barbarous Nations; and yet by a strange kind of contradiction ascribe unto their Country the seats of the Muses. For in this Country was Mount Pimple, with a fountain of the same name at the foot thereof; both consecrated to the Muses, from hence called Pimpleides. Here also was the hill Libethris, and the Province of Pieria, from whence the Muses had the names of Libethrides, and Pierideses; by this last called more frequently then by any other name what ever, especially by the Greeks themselves. But the birth of Aristotle in this Country doth more convince the Grecians of this foolish arrogance, than all the Muses in the world. A man so admirable in the general course of learning, so universally comprehensive of all Arts and Sciences: that the best witted Grecian might have been his scholar, and thought it a great happiness, as King Philip did, that they had any children but to be tutored by him.  
The principal Rivers hereof, besides Erigon and Aliaemon, spoken of before; are 1 Axius, now called Vardari, rising out of the hill Scaraius, a branch of Mount Aemus, and passing through the whole extent of this Country into Sinus Thermaicus, or the Gulf of Thessal●niea, as it is now named: the fairest River of those parts, and of sweetest waters; but such as maketh all the cattle black which drink of it. 2 Chabris, 3 Echedorus, both rising out of the midland Countries, and both falling into the same Bay also. Besides which there are three other fair and capacious Bays ascribed to Macedon, though two of them belonging properly to Mygdonia, that is to say, Singeticus, now Gulf di Monte Sacro; and Toronicus, now the Gulf or Bay of Aiomama; and the third common unto Thrace also, which is Sinus Strimonicus, now the Bay of Contesso.  
Towns of most observation in it, according to the several Regions and parts hereof, were for the Almopes, 1 Hormia, called afterwards Seleucia. 2 Europus, of which name there were four in Macedon. 3 Apsalus. Of Syntice, 4 Tristolus, 5 Paroeaecopolis, 6 Gariscus, 7 Heraclea, for distinction called Heraclea Syntica; there being many others of that name in Greece. In Edonis bordering towards Terace, 8 Scotusa, 9 Berga, 10 Amphipolis, on the River Strymon, with which encompassed, whence it had the name; seated so close on the edge of Thrace that it is questionable to which of them it belongs of right, once garrisoned by the Athenians, and from them took by Philip the Macedonian, in the first rise of his fortunes. 11 Crenides, bordering on Thrace also, and by some Writers laid unto it, but I think erroneously: repaired and beautified by Philip before mentioned, by whom called Philippi: situate in a Country so rich in mines of gold, that the said Philip drew thence yearly 1000 talents, which make 600000 French Crowns, or 140000 l. of our English money. Afterwards made a Roman Colony and accounted the chief City of Macedonia, as appeareth Acts 16. 12. to the people of which S. Paul writ one of his Epistles. Next in Emathia, we have 12 Tyrissa in the midlands, bordering upon Thessaly, now called Ceresi. 13 Aedessa, called afterwards Aegeas, and now Vodena; the first town of all this country taken by Caranaus, the founder of the first race of the Kings of Macedon. 14 Beraea on Sinus Thermaicus, honoured with the preaching of Paul and Silas; the Citizens whereof are by S. Luke commended for their readiness in receiving the Gospel. 15 Pella, on the same Bay also, the birthplace of Alexander the Great, from hence called Juvenis Pellaeus. 16 Pydna, upon the same Bay at the influx of the River Aliacmon, in which Cassander besieged and took Olympias the mother, R●xane the wise, and Hercules the heir apparent of Alexander; all whom he barbarously murdered. This cruelty he committed, partly to revenge himself of Alexander, who had once knocked his head and the wall together; and partly to cry quit with Olympias, who had before as cruelly murdered Aridaeus the base son of Philip, and Eurydice his wife, with whom Cassander was supposed to be over-familiar. Memorable also is this Town for the great battle fought near it betwixt Perseus the last King of Macedon, and P. Aemilius the Consul, in which Perseus having shamefully deserted his Army, lost both the battle and his Kingdom, with no less than 20000 of his foot which were therein slain: the Romans having so cheap a victory, that it cost them not above an hundred or sixscore men. 17 Dium, not far from the hill Olympus, and about a mile from the Sea; of which mile the River Helicon becoming there a Lake, and called Baphyrus, taketh up one half: situate in the borders towards Thessaly, the way unto it out of the Tempe being straight and narrow, and almost impassable, by reason of the spurs of the Mountains, running overthwart it: which had it been well defended by the Macedonians, would have kept their Country from the Romans, who that way attempted it. But Perseus hearing that the Enemy had got into Tempe, only took care to get his treasure out of Dium, and so abandoned both the passage, and the town together. 18 Phylace, more within the land: as is 10 Eribaea. But these four last are in that part hereof which is called Pieria.  
3 MYGDONIA hath on the East the Aegean Sea, on the West Macedon, properly and specially so called; on the North Edonis and Sinus strimonicus, on the South Sinus Thermaicus, or the Golse of Thessa●nica. So that it is almost a Peninsula, environed on three sides with water.  
Here is in this Country the hill Athos, standing in a Peninsula (the Isthmus being once cut thorough by Xerxes, but since closed again) said to be 70 miles in circuit, 3 day's journey long, half a days in breadth, resembling the shape of a man lying with his face upwards: the highest point whereof covered perpetually with snow, is said to cast a shadow as far as Lemnos. Exceeding fruitful in grass, fruit, oil, and wine; and wondrous plentiful in hares; according to that of Ovid: Quot Lepores in Atho, quot Apes pascuntur in Hybla. 
How many Hares in Athos feed,  
What swarms of Bees on Hybla breed.  Inhabited only by Greek Monks whom they call Caloires, of the order of S. Basil, to whom the hill commonly called the Holy Mountain, hath been long since dedicated: the place being so privileged by the Grand Signior, that neither Turk nor Grecian may inhabit in it, except such Grecians only as profess this life. Of these there are about 6000, dispersed in 42 Monasieries, built after a military manner for fear of Thiefs and Pirates, wherewith much infested in times past: frequented with great concourse of people coming thither to behold and adore some Relics (for which they are of much esteem:) the tree oblations of those Pilgrims, and some benevolence from the Turks which do much respect them, being the chief means of their subsistence. The manner of their life is like that of the ancient Hermits, poorly clad, their shirts of Woollen, which they both spin and wove themselves; none of them idle at any time, doing still somewhat for their livelihood, and the advancement of the house of which they are, as dressing vines, felling timber, yea and building ships: few of them giving themselves to study, and some of them of so gross an ignorance, that they can neither write nor read: bound by their Order to lodge and entertain such strangers as have occasion to pass that way according to their rank and calling, and that of free cost, if it be desired.  
Towns of most note, according to the several Regions and parts hereof, are for Mygdonia specially and properly so called, 1 Antigonia, so called from Antigonus a King of Macedon, the first founder of it. 2 Xilopolis, 3 Terpillus, 4 Physco, 5 Assorus, all mentioned by Ptolemie, but not else observable. 6 Apollonia, for distinction sake called Apollonia Mygdoniae, to difference it from Apollonia in Albania, than a part of Macedon: famous for the studies of Augustus Caesar, who here learned the Greek tongue. For Amphaxitis, there was 7 Arethusa, 8 Stagira, now called Nicalidi, renowned for the birth of Aristotle, hence named Stagirites. 9 Thessalonica, situate on the bottom of Sinus Thermaicus, now called the Bay of Salonichi, by the name of the town. Anciently the Metropolis or head City of Macedon, the seat of the Praefectus Praetoria for Illyricum, after the removal thereof from Sirmium; as also of the Primate of the Greek Church, who resided here. To the people of this City did S. Paul write two of his Epistles continuing in great power and credit till the fall of the Consiantinopolitan Empire into the hands of the Latins: at which time it was bestowed first on Boniface marquis of Moniferrat, the new King of Thessaly: after whose death it fell unto the State of Venice, who held it till the year 1432. when forced by Amurath the 2. to become Turkish. Which notwithstanding it still preserves the reputation of a beautiful and wealthy City, inhabited by rich Merchants who drive here a great trade, especially for the commodities of the Indies; for beauty, riches, and magnificence, little inferior unto Naples: and though the Turks and Jews make the greatest number of Inhabitants, yet here are reckoned 30 Churches for the use of Christians. As for the Jews they swarm here in such great abundance, that in this City and that of Constantinople only, there are reckoned 160000 of them; but generally hated and contemned by all sorts of people. 10 Syderocaspae, of old called Chrysites, remarkable for its mines of gold and silver, so beneficial to the Turk that he receiveth hence monthly 18000 and sometimes 30000 crowns de claro. Next for Chalcidice, there was 11 Panormus, a Port town, 12 Stratonice in the Peninsula of Mount Athos. 13 Athos or Athosa, in the same Peninsula, with a Promontory of the same name, nigh which it stood. 14 Acanthus, now called Eryssa, on the Bay of the Holy Mountain. And finally in Paraxia, we have 15 Ampelus, 16 Torone, giving name to the Bay adjoining, called anciently Sinus Toronicus, now Golfo di Aiomama. 17 Cassandria, on the Sea ●ide, so called from C assander King of Macedon, who repaired and beautified it; being before named Potidea. 18 Derris, 19 Merillus, 20 Pallene, situate in the Chersonese or Demy-Island, called Petalene, and by some Petalias; formerly consecrated to the Muses: but before that infamous for the war which the Giants are sabled to have made here against the Gods; at what time it was called Phlegra, the fields adjoining Campi Phlegraei, in which this great battle is supposed to be fought. The occasion of the Fable was, (as both Theagenes and Eudoxus do expound the same) that the Inhabitants hereof in those elder times being men of a most impious and insolent life, got the name of Giants: whom when Hercules endeavoured to subdue and reduce to reason, it happened that there fell a great tempest of thunder and lightning, by which they were constrained to flee and submit themselves. Hence the report that those Giants made war against the Gods. Others have placed these Phlegraean fields in Thessaly, and perhaps more probably. Certain I am that some place nearer to the hills of Pelion, Ossa, and Olympus, doth agree best with it: if at least Ovid were not out in his narration, who makes those Mountains to be heaped upon one another for their better reaching to the skies, and fight upon even ground as the saying is. For thus that Poet: 
Affectasse ferunt regnum coeleste Gigantes,  
Altaque congestos struxisse ad sydera Montes.  
At pater omnipotens misso perfregit Olympum  
Fulmine, & excussit subjectum Pelion Ossae.  Which may be Englished in these words: 
The Giants once the Throne of heaven affected  
And hills on hills unto the Stars erected.  
Till Jove with thunder high Olympus broke,  
And Pelion did from under Ossa take.   
But from those Fables to proceed to more real stories: this Country was first peopled by Citt●m the son of Javan, passing over out of Asia Minor; in memory whereof, here was not only a town called Cuium spoken of by Liviel. 42. but the whole land of Macedon is in the book of Maccabees called the land of Keium, Maccab. 1. v. 1. and the inhabitants hereof called Citims, in the 8 chapter of the same book, v. 5. spreading in tract of time from one Sea to the other, from the Aegean to the Adriatic, some Colonies of them passed from hence to Italy, and first inhabited that Country, as hath there been said. Such as continued in these parts, divided into several tribes, as in all parts else, became in time to be united in the name of Macedons: a people not much taken notice of in the former times, living a poor and painful life, Goatherds and Shepherds for the most part, scarceable to defend their own Mountains from the next invader; much less to dream of conquering either Greece or Persia. And therefore Alexander told them, and not much unfitly, (though by him spoke in passion and to their disgrace) that his father Philip had first made them Gentlemen. For Philip having learned the Eudiments of war under Epaminondas, (being then an Hostage with the Thebans) and by that means acquainted with the temper and state of Greece: not only freed his own Kingdom from the Illyrians, Thracians, and other barbarous Nations who had gained upon it; but taking advantage of the factions raised amongst the Grecians (which he knew how to feed and cherish for his own improvement) brought them at first wholly to rely upon him, and after to be subject to him. Insomuch that never any Monarchy had a swifter growth, nor a more speedy dissolution: there passing not full 40 years from the first of Philip to the last of Alexander: in which space it was both begun, perfected, and broke to pieces. For the foundation being laid in murder, perjury and treason, as at first it was, was never likely to be blessed with a long continuance.  

The KINGS of MACEDON.  
A. M.  
3155 1 Caranaus, 28  
3183 2 Coenus, 12  
3195 3 Tirimas, 38  
32●3 4 Perdiceas, 51  
3284 5 Argaeus, 38  
3322 6 Philippus, 38  
3360 7 Europus, 26  
3386 8 Alcetas, 29  
3415 9 Amintas, 50  
3465 10 Alexander 43  
3508 11 Perdiceas II. 28  
3536 12 Archelaus 24.  
3560 13 Orestes 5  
3563 14 Archelaus II. 4  
3567 15 Pa●sanias 1  
3568 16 Amintas II. 6  
3574 17 Argaeus II.  
357d 18 Amintas III. 19  
3594 19 Alexander II. 1  
3595 20 Alorites, 4  
3599 21 Perdiccas III 6  
3605 22 Philip II. 24  
3629 23 Alexander the Great.   
Of these 23 Kings, only six are famous: viz. Caranaus the first King, originally of Argos, of the race of Hercules, and by an Oracle commanded to lead a Colony into this country, and to follow the first flock of cattle he saw before him. Being here arrived in a tempestuous stormy day, he espied a herd of Goats flying the fury of the weather. These Goats he followed unto Aedessa, into which by reason of the darkness of the air, he entered undiscovered, won the town, and in short space became Lord of all the Country. 2 Perdiccas the fourth King, who at Aega, built a burial place for all his successors; assuring the people that as long as their Kings were there buried, his race should never fail; and so it happened. For the Kingdom of Macedon, after the death of Alexander the great, who was buried at Babylon, was translated to the sons of Demetrius. 3 Europus, who in his infancy was carried in a cradle against the Illyrians his enemies, and returned victorious. This the Macedons did either because they thought, they could not be beaten their King being present: or persuaded themselves that there was none so void of honour and compassion as to abandon an infant, no way able to save himself from destruction, but by the valour and fidelity of his servants. 4 Alexander, the son of Amintas, famous for a notable exploit on the Persian Ambassadors; who being sent from Megabizus, requested a view of the Macedonian Ladies. No sooner were they entered, but petulantius eas Persis contrectantibus, as Justine relateth the story, they were called back by this Alexander, sending in their steads young springals maidenly attired; who upon the like indignities offered, slew these effeminate Asians. After which he behaved himself so discreetly, that the Persian Monarch gave him all Greece, between Haemus and Olympus. Philip father unto Alexander, who governed first as Guardian to the son of Perdi●cas his elder brother; but afterwards took unto himself both the Kingdom and title of King: which he continued in the deposition of his Nephew and natural Sovereign, the murder of the resto his brethren, and the destruction of all such as opposed his practices. But being otherwise a man of approved abilities, he cleared his own Country of the Illyrians, subdued Achaia, Thrace, and a great part of Peloponnesus: and was chosen General of the Greeks against the Persians. But as soon as he had made all things ready for this expedition, he was slain by one Pausanias a young Gentleman, whom he had for merly abused. 6 Alexander the son of Philip, who recovered such parts of Greece, as on the death of his father had befooled themselves with an hope of liberty. He subdued Darius the great King of Persia, Taxiles and Porus Kings of India; founded the Monarchy of the Grecians; and in the height of his successes was poisoned at Babylon by Cassander, one of his great Captains: his Revenue at the time of his death, amounting to 300000 talents yearly. After his death his new got Empire was much controverted in the point of succession; he himself having bequeathed it to him, who was thought most worthy by his Army: and the Soldiers, according to their several affections and relations, thought their own Leaders most deserving. At last the title of King (and in effect nothing but the title) was by consent of the Commanders cast on Aridaeus, a bastard of Philip, to whom Perdiccas was appointed to be Protector (for Aridaeus was a little crazed in his brain) and to be General of the Army. As for the Provinces they were assigned unto the Government of the chief Commanders, viz. Egypt to Ptolemie, Syria to Laomeden, Cilicia to Philotus, Media to Pytho, Cappadocia to Eumenes, Pamphylia, Lycia, and Phrygia major to Antigonus, Caria to Cassander, Lydia too Minander, Pontus and Phrygia minor to Leonatus, Assyria to Seleveus, Persis to Peucestes, Thrace to Lysimachus, and Macedon itself unto Antipater: the other parts of the Persian Empire being left to them, unto whose hands they were committed in the time of Alexander. But this division held not long. For Perdiccas being once slain by Ptolemie, and Eumenes made away by Antigonus, these two became quickly too great for the rest: Ptolemie adding Syria and Cyprus to the Kingdom of E gypt; and Antigonus bringing under his command not only all Asia minor, but Assyria, Media, and almost all the Eastern parts of the Persian Empire. Antipater in the mean time succeeding in the Protectourship, banished Olympias the mother of Alexander, out of Macedonia, as bearing but a stepdames love unto Aridaeus. But he being dead, she returned out of Epirus, (the place of her banishment) into Macedonia, where raising a strong party among the people, she put Aridaeus and his wife Eurydice to death; proclaiming Hercules the son of Alexander, King: both slain not long after by Cassander the son of Antipater; who to make sure work, murdered also with the like cruelty Roxane and her son, another Alexander, 
Thrace  the last survivor of that house. And so the royal family being rooted out, Antigonus took unto himself the title of King: as did Seleucas, who had now recovered all the Persian Provinces beyond Euphrates; the like did Ptoleme in Egypt and Cassander in Macedon.  

The second Race of the MACEDON KINGS.  
A. M.  
3648 1 Gassander, son of Antipater, supposed to have been the poisoner of Alexander, rooted out the blood royal of Macedon: his reign full of troubles and difficulties, 19  
3667 2 Alexander and Antipater, sons to Cassander, but not well agreeing, called unto their aid Lysimachus, and Demetrius; by whom they were both in short time murdered, 4.  
3671 3 Demetrius, son to Antigonus, the powerful King of Asia, after he had in one battle against Seleucus, lost both his father, and all his Asian Dominions; settled himself in Macedon: but being there outed by Pyrrhus, he fled to Seleucus, and with him died, 6.  
3677 4 Pyrrhus King of Epirus, was by the soldiers, voluntarily forsaking Demetrius, made King of Macedon; but after 7 months, the soldiers revolted to Lysimachus, as being a Macedonian born.  
3678 5 Lysimachus King of Thrace, being thus made King of Macedon, was in the end vanquished and slain by Seleucus, the last survivor of Alexander's Captains, 7.  
3685 6 Ceraunus, or Ptolemie Ceraunus, son to Ptolemie of Egypt, having traitorously slain his friend and Patron Seleucus, seized on Macedon, but lost it, together with his life, unto the Gauls; who then plagued these Countries. After whose death this Kingdom being distracted amongst many Competitors, settled at last upon  
3687 7 Antigonus Gonatas, the son of Demetrius, who for his valour shown in expulsing the Gauls, was made King of Macedon. And though for a while he gave way to Pyrihus, then returning from Italy; yet after the death of Pyrrhus he again recovered his estate; but outed once again by Alexander the son of Pyrrhus, 36.  
3723 8 Demetrius II. son of Antigonus, recovered Macedon from the power of Alexander the son of Pyrrhus, 10.  
3733 9 Antigonus II. surnamed Doson, left by Demetrius as Protector to his young son Philip, usurped the Kingdom. He divers times vanquished and crushed the Grecians, beginning then to cast off the yoke of Macedon, 12.  
3745 10 Philip, the son of Demetrius, 42.  
3787 11 Perjeus the son of Philip, the last King of Macedon; the subversion of which estate was first begun in the time of his Father, who had not only warred upon the Aetolians and others of the greeks, whom the Romans had taken into their protection; but fided with Hannibal against them. Upon which grounds they sent first Titus Qu. Flaminius, one of their Consuls, by whom Philip was vanquished at the battle of Cukos-cephalos, and his Kingdom made tributary unto Rome. After which picking a quarrel against Perseus also, managed with variable success by Licinius, Martius, and others of their Commanders; they dispatched Paulus Aemilius with an Army into Macedon, to bring him to absolute subjection: Who sped so well, that Macedon was made a Province of the Roman Empire, and Perseus led captive unto Rome, anno 3789. In which triumph, besides the pomp of leading a Captive King in bonds, Aemilius caused the ready money which he brought out of Greece to be carried in 750 Vessels, every vessel containing 3 Talents; which made so infinite a sum, that the Roman people were free for many years after from all taxes and impositions.  
3798 Macedon thus made a Province of the Roman Empire, and afterwards divided into three parts or Provinces, that is to say Macedonia Prima, Macedonia Secunda or Salutaris and Prevalitana; in the new model of Const●●●ne became a Diocese, the Diocese hereof containing the Provinces of Crete, Achaia, old and now Fpirus, Macedonia Prima, and the greatest part of Salutaris, the residue of Salutaris and Prevalitana, (which makes up the Country now called Albania) being laid to the Diocese of Dacia. It continued part of the Eastern Empire, till towards the last fatal dissolution of it, though many times harassed and depopulated by the Sclavonians, Bulgarians, Rosses, and others of the barbarous people, at their several invasions of it: finally conquered by the Turks, first under the conduct of Bajazet their fourth king taking Nicopolis, a town hereof bordering on Thrace, and lying North of Sinus Strimenius, now the Bay of Contesso; and after under Amurath the second their fixed King, making themselves masters of The ssalonica the chief City of it, and therewith of all the country. By reason of which many invasions and last desolation by the Turks, there is scarce one of all those many Cities before mentioned now of any eminence; except Thessalonica only: the rest being miserably destroyed. And for the Country itself it is governed by a Turkish Sanziack under the Beglerbeg of Greece, his annual Revenue being but 8000 Crowns: nor any thing else required of him then to maintain 100 horse in ordinary pay, for defence of his Province, and to find 400 Horse on extraordinary occasions, as the Grand Signior shall command him.    

7 THRACE.  
THRACE hath on the East, Pontus Euxinus, Propontis, and Hellespont; on the West Macedon; on the North, the hill Hoemus; on the South, the Aegoean Sea, and part of Macedon. A very large and goodly Province, extending 20 day's journey in length, 7 day's journey in breadth: and in relation to the heavens, reaching unto the 44 degree of Northern latitude, so that the longest day in summer is about 15 hours three quarters.  
By several men, according to the times they lived in, it hath been called by divers names: by Stephanus, Aria; by Suidas Odryss by Lycephron, Crestona; by some writers, Scythia; by Josephus the Hebrew, Thyras. But generally it is called Thrace or Thracia, and that as some say from Thrax, the son of Mars; as others from Thraca, an Enchantress; more probably from the serity and barbarous condition of the first Inhabitants; the name in the Original Greek bearing that construction: most likely from Thyras the son of Japbet, who first planted here, in memory of whom it did retain the name of Thyras in the time of Josephus; besides many other footsteps and remembrances of him, in the name of many of their towns, and some of their Princes; of which we have already spoken in our general Preface. Finally by the Turks it is called Romania, either from the many Roman Colonies which were planted here; or because Constantinople the chief City of it was anciently called Nova Roma: and by that name it is now called in most modern Writers.  
The Country generally is neither of a rich soil nor a pleasant air, the corn and other fruits by reason of the coldness of the Climate leisurely ripening, the Vines yielding more shade than juice, and the trees for the most part more leaves than fruit: yet in some parts there be many large and goodly plains, where they reap good store of corn, but of Pulse especially; and towards the Seaside they have plenty of wine, which Pliny much commended both for strength and goodness.  
The people anciently were very bold and valiant, and called by some 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because every man was a law to himself. So that it was truly said by Herodotus, that if they had either been all of one mind, or under one King, they had been invincible. Of manners they were rude and savage, somewhat near to brutishness; buying their wives, and selling both their sons and daughters, as in open market: in which, since imitated by the Turks, who possess their Country. The men were more courageous than comely, wearing clothes according to their conditions, ragged and unseemly. The married women were in love to their husbands so constant, that they willingly sacrificed themselves at their funerals. The Virgins were bestowed, not by their own parents, but the common Fathers of their Cities. Such as brought neither beauty nor virtue for their dowry, were put off according to their money; most times sold as other cattle, in the markets. In matters of Religion, they worshipped Mars, Bacchus, Diana, Mercury, as did other Gentiles: swearing especially by the first, from whom they bragged themselves to have been descended. But their chief national deity, was one Zamolxis, sometimes a native of this Country, who having been brought up under Pythogoras, and returning home, prescribed then good and wholesome Laws, assuring them that if they did observe the same, they should go unto a place when they left this world, in which they should enjoy all manner of pleasure and contentment. By this means having gotten some opinion of adivinity amongst them, he absented himself, after was worshipped as their God. Upon these principles, when any one was born amongst them, his Parents and other friends sitting round about him, lamented bitterly his coming into the world, ripping up all the miseries and afflictions whereto he was to be exposed in this present life, and so deplored his condition as absolutely miserable and unhappy. But on the contrary, when any one chanced to die, they buried him with all joy and alacrity highly rejoicing that by this means he was freed from the crosses and dysasters of this wretched World. Expressed thus briefly, after his wont manner by mine Author. Lugentur Puerperia, natique deflentur; funera contra festa sunt, & veluti sacra cantu lusuque celebrantur. A piece of such sound and Orthodox Divinity, that I wonder how they hit upon it in these times of darkness; and savouring very much of the Primitive piety: by which the Obits of the Saints were kept as Festivals, no notice being taken of the day of their births. According to that of the good old Writer, Non nativitatem sed mortem Sanctorum Ecclesia pretiosam & festam judicat.  
Here lived the Tyrant Polymnestor, who villaniously murdered Polydorus, a younger son of Priamus; for which fact, Hecuba the young Prince's mother, scratched him to death. Here also lived the Tyrant Tereus, of whom before in Phocis: and Diomedes, who using to feed his Horses with man's flesh, was slain by Hercules, and cast unto his horses. And finally here reigned King Corys, whom I mention not as a Tyrant, but propose as a pattern of rare temper, both in mastering and preventing passion. For when a neighbour Prince had sent him a present of Glasses, of the purest metal, and no less accurate in the workmanship or fashion of them: (having dispatched the messenger with all the due compliments of Majesty and gratitude) he broke them all to peaces; lest it by mishap any of his servants should do the like, he might be stirred to an intemperate choler.  
Chief mountains in this country, besides Haemus spoken of already, are I Rhodepe, the highest next Mount Haemus in those parts of the World, craggy, and rough, the top whereof continually white with snow: memorable for the fate and fable of Orpheus, who in a melancholy humour (having lost his wife) betook himself unto these mountains: where with his Music he affected both Woods and Beasts, who are said to have danced unto his Music: from this place of his abode called Rhodopeius, from his country Thracius; Non me Carminibus vincet nec Thracius Orpheus, etc. as the Shepherd boasteth in the Poet. The truth is, that he was a man of an heavenly Muse, and by his dictates and good Counsel laid down in verse, first of all civilised this people; and weaned them by degrees from their bestiality. Hence the occasion of the Fable. But for Mount Rhodope it self, it is in the midst of this Country, thwarting it from Mount Haemus towards the West: which with the spurs and branches of it, and the plains adjoining lying betwixt the River Nessus on the West, and Melas or Niger on the East, made up the Province of the Empire, called Rhodope, by the name of the Mountain. 2. Pangoeus, rich in Mines of Silver; 3 Melapus, shooting towards the Sea, full of rocks and cliffs; and 4 Orbelus, lying towards Macedon, where there is a little Region from hence called Orbelia.  
Principal Rivers hereof besides Strymon spoken of before, the boundary in some places betwixt this and Macedon, are 1 Nessus, by the Grecians, now called Mestro, by the Turks, Charajon, which rising out of Mount Haemus falleth into the Sea, near the Isle of Thassus. 2 Athyras, in which name the memory of Thyras the son of Japhet, seems to be preserved; which rising in Mount Hemus also, loseth itself in the Propontick; as doth 3 Bathynias; another river rising from the same Mount Hemus. 4 Hebrus, the most noted River of this country, rising out of Mount Rhodope, and falling into the Aegean near the Isle of Sanothrace, a river of so flow a course that it is not easy to discern which way it goeth: but memorable in the Poets for the fate of Orpheus, who being torn in peaces by the Thracian women, had his limbs thrown into it by those Furies. 5 Thrarus, good against the scab both in man and Beast, issuing out of 30 Fountains, some hot, some cold; with the pleasantness of whose waters Darius the King of Persia, was so delighted, that he erected a pillar in honour of it.  
The chief Towns 1 Abdera, now called Polystilo, situate not far from the fall of the River Nessus into the Aegean, the birth place of Democritus, who spent his whole life in laughing at the follies of others. 2 Potidea, of old a Colony of Athens, from whom it revolted and submitted to the State of Corinth. But the Athenians not enduring the affront, beleaguered it, and after two years' siege, and the expense of 2000 Talents, could not recover it again but on composition. 3 Adnus, on the Aegean Sea, a town of great strength and safety, and therefore used by the later Constantinopolitan Emperors for the securing of great persons. For hither Michael Palaeilogus scent Jathatines the Turkish Sultan, flying to him for aid; and hither Mahomet the Great scent Demetrius, Prince of Peloponnesus, when he yielded up his country to him; both under colour of providing for their ease and safety, but in plain terms to keep them in honourable Prisons. 4 Lyssmachia, on the Seashore, once of great importance, built by Lysimachus, who after Alexander's death laid hands on this Country: afterwards garrisoned by Philip the Father of Perseus, on the withdrawing of whose Forces for some other service, it was taken and razed to the ground by the barbarous Thracians, and all the people of it carried into captivity; but by Antiochus the Great re-edified and new peopled again, moved thereunto by the convenient situation and former glories of the place. 5 Philippolis, so called from Philip King of Macedon the father of Alexander, who built and fortified it as a bridle to hold in the Thraeians: called also Trimontium, from three hills on which it was situate: beautified in the time of the Romans with a goodly Amphitheatre, continuing entire and whole till these latter days, and might have lasted longer by many Ages; did not the Turks daily take away the stairs thereof, which are all of marble to make money of them. Here are also many other ancient Monuments, though the town be much wasted and destroyed, the Scythians at one time killing in it above 100000 persons: which notwithstanding it is populous, and well frequented, by reason of the convenient situation of it on the River Hebrus, which they now call Mariza. 6 Trajanopolis, so called from the Emperor Trajan, by whom either founded or repaired; indifferently well peopled, and still preserving its old name. 7. Selimbria, on the coast of the Propontick Sea, beautified with a commodious port for receipt of small vessels; and many Bays adjoining capable of greater: by Ptolemy called Selibria, and Olibria by Suidas. 8 Apollonia, upon Pontus Euxinus, or the Black Sea, now Sisopoli. 9 Phinopolis, on the same Sea also. 10 Nicopolis, at the foot of the Mount Haemus; there being another of that name near the River Nessus. 11 Perinthus, on the Propontick sea, near the influx of the River Arsus. A town of great note in the ancient businesses of Greece, of great strength, and peopled formerly with men of such resolutions, that they maintained their liberty against Philip of Macedon, after almost all the rest of Thrace had submitted to him. 12 Heraclea, at once a Colony of the Thebans; and afterwards of much request in the time of the Romans, as being beautified with the Palaces of Vespasian, Domitian, and Antoninus, Emperors of Rome; as also with an Amphith● atre, cut out of one entire Marble, and accounted one of the world's seven Wonders: and finally, made the Metropolitan City of the Province of Europe, one of the Provinces of the Diocese of Thrace, whereof more anon. 13 Olynthus, called by Xenophon, the greatest City of Thrace; as possibly enough it was in power and riches, though not in greatness of extent. A Colony of the Athenians, rich in Trade, and mistress of a fair and goodly territory adjoining to it: the people whereof had been malicious enemies to the Kings of Macedon, which principally induced Philip, spoken of before, to set upon them. In which attempt he sped so well, that what he could not get by force, he obtained by money; bribing some of the principal Officers to betray it to him: for the recovery whereof, Demosthenes oft moved the people of Athens in those elaborate Orations called the Olynthiacks. 14 Sestos, in the Thracian Chersonese: which being a Peninsula abutting over against Troas, on the Asian side, is now called Saint Georges Arme. Opposite whereunto, on the other side of the Water, in the town of Abydus, remarkable for the Tragical Loves of Hero, and Leander, celebrated by Musoeus, an old Greek Poet. 15 Callipolis, on the Northern Promontory of this Chersonese, the first City of note that ever the Turks possessed in Europe, taken by Solyman, the son of Orcanes, the second King of the Ottoman race, anno 1358. from whence they easily, and in little time, spread themselves all over the rest of Thrace: the ordinary passage of late times betwixt Europe, and Asia, by reason of the convenient Harbour, and safe Anchorage. 16 Cardia, seated on the Western side of it, opposite to the Isle of Lemnos, and the birthplace of Eumenes: who being a poor Carrier's son, attained to such ability in the Art of War; that after the death of Alexander the Great, under whom he served, he seized on the Provinces of Cappadocia, and Paphlagonia: and siding (though a stranger to Macedon) with Olympias, and the Blood-royal, against the Greek Captains; vanquished and slew Craterus, and divers times drove Antigonus (afterward Lord of Asia) out of the field: but being by his own soldiers betrayed, he was by them delivered to Antigonus, and by him slain. 17 Sardiea, situate towards Mount Aemus, memorable for the Council there held against the Arians, an. 351. 18 Adrianople, seated near the midst of Thrace, called anciently Vseudama, but got this name from Adrian the Emperor, who repaired, and beautified it, made subject to the Turks by Bajazet, an. 1362. from the first taking of it made the Seat of the Turkish Kings, till the taking of Consiantinople, by Mahomet the Great; by whom removed unto that City. 19 Pera, opposite to Constantinople, on the further side of the water (as the word doth signify in the Greek) by some called Galata: once peopled by a Colony of Genoese, as the Mart and Factory of that State; taken by Mahomet the Great, an. 1453. but still replenished, for the most part, with Christian Merchants, and Artificers.  
But the chief glory of this Country, and of all the East is, the renowned City of 20 Constantinople, seated in so commodious a place for Empire, that it overlooks both Europe and Asia; and commands not only the Propontis, and the Bosphorus, but the Euxine Sea. First, founded by one Byza, from whom named Byzantium: but being taken by the Persians, and from them recovered by the Spartans', (unwilling that the Persians should grow strong in Europe) it was repaired and fortified by Pausanias, one of their Commanders, 663 years before the Birth of our Saviour. In vain besieged by Philip of Macedon, and of great strength in the flourish of the Roman Empire. The walls of a just height, every stone whereof was so joined with Couplets of Brass, that the whole seemed but one entire piece; adorned besides with Turrets, Bulwarks, and other Arts of Fortification. Siding with Niger, in his war against Severus the Emperor, it endured a siege of three years against all the forces of the Romans: during which time, the people were so distressed by Famine, that men meeting in the streets, would draw, and fight; the Conqueror feeding on the Vanquished. For want of Artillery to discharge on the Assallants, they cast down upon them whole Statuas made of Brass, and the like curious Imagery. Houses they pulled down to get timber for Shipping; the women cutting off their hair to inch out their tackle: and having thus patched up a Navy of 500 Sail, lost it all by one Tempest. Compelled to yield by this misfortune, the principal of the Nobility were put to the Sword, the wealth of the Inhabitants given for a prey to the Soldiers; the walls thereof dismantled, the Town left in rubbish. Yet there appeared so much of Majesty and Beauty in the very Ruins: Vt mireris utrum corum qui primi extruxerunt, vel eerum qui deinceps sunt demel ●i, vires sint potiores, as Herodian hath it. 
Constantinople  Re-edified afterwards by the Emperor Constantine, he honoured it with his own Name, and made it the chief Seat of the Roman Empire. The City finished May 11. anno 331. And being so finished, was endowed with all the Privileges of Rome, an equal number of Senators, one of the Annual Consuls, and all other Officers of State chosen out of both; the Citizens of the one being Free of the other, and capable of all places of most trust and power. For that cause called NOVA ROMA, in some following times. This City he adorned also with magnificent Buildings, curious Statues, and such like Ornaments, transported hither from Old Rome: which City he spoilt of more costly pieces then any twenty of his Predecessors had brought unto it. At this day the chief Buildings are the Turks Seraglio, and the Temple of Saint Sophia: which as they differ not much in place and situation, so as little in magnificence and state. The Temple of Saint Sophia, was, if not built, yet re-edified by the Emperor Justinian. It is built of an oval form, surrounded with pillars of admirable workmanship, adorned with spacious and beautiful Galleries, roofed all over with Mosaique work: and vaulted underneath very strongly for the fabric, and pleasing for the eye. The doors are very curiously wrought and plated; one of which, by the superstitious people is thought to have been made of the planks of Noah's Ark: and yet this Temple is little more than the Chancel of the ancient Church, which contained in length 260 foot, and 180 in breadth: and to our Saint Paul's in London, may seem for the bigness, to have been but a Chapel of ease. But what it wants in Greatness, it hath gained in Beauty, and in the elegancy of the building, wherein it is thought to exceed all the fabrics in the whole world: the sides and floor, all flagged with excellent Marble; and before the entrance a goodly Portico, or Porch, in which, as well the Christians, who visit it out of curiosity, as the Turks, who repair thither for Devotion, are to leave their shoes. By Mahomet the Great, after the taking of the City, converted to a Turkish Mosque, as it still continueth; frequented by the Signior almost every Friday, which is the Sabbath of that people. Near hereunto standeth the Palace, or Seraglio of the Ottoman Emperors, on the north-east Angle of the City, where formerly stood the ancient Byzantium: divided from the rest of City by a wall, containing three miles in circuit, and comprehending goodly groves of Cypresses intermixed with Plains, delicate Gardens, artificial Fountains, and all variety of pleasures which luxury can affect, or treasure compass. The Palace itself enjoying a goodly prospect into the Sea, was first built by Justinus the Emperor, afterwards much enlarged by the Ottoman race; containing three great Courts one within another: the buildings yielding unto those of France, and Italy for the neat contrivance; but far surpassing them for cost, and curiousness.  
As for the City itself, it is said to be 18 miles in compass, and to contain 700000 living souls; yet would be more populous than it is, if the Plague, like a cruel Tertian Ague, did not every third year so rage amongst them. Fortified towards the Land with three strong, and high Walls, the one higher than the other, the outermost highest of them all: towards the Sea with one wall only, built after the old fashion with many Turrets, which very strongly flanker, and defend the same. But formerly both the Town and Chersonnese in which it standeth, was defended from the incursions of the barbarous people, by a strong wall built on the very Isthmus of it, some ten miles from the City, reaching from one Sea to the other. The work of Anastasius, who succeeded Zeno, anno 494. A City which a far off gives to the eye a most pleasing object; so intermixed with Gardens, and beset with Trees, that it seems a City in a Wood: but being entered, much deceiveth the expectation which it promised, the buildings of it being mean, if not contemptible. The streets for the most part exceeding narrow, but raised on each side for the greater cleanliness: the houses but of two stories high, some of rough Stone, and some of Timber; without any outward grace, or exterior garnshing: in many places nothing but low Sheds, or rows of shops, and in some places long dead walls belonging unto great men's houses. The principal beauty of the whole, next to some Monuments of Antiquity, which are still preserved, and the Tombs, or Sepulchers of some of the Ott man Kings, which are very sumptuous; are the Mosques or Temples of the Turks, about eight thousand in number; And the Port or Havent, so conveniently profound, that Ships of greatest burden may safely lay their sides to the sides thereof, for the receipt or discharge of their lading; and so commodiously seated on the Thracian Bosphorus, that there is no wind, whatsoever it be, which brings not in some shipping to it. But that which gives the greatest pleasure to the sight, from the hills adjoining, is the situation of it on seven Mountenets, most of then crowned with magnificent Mosques, built all of white Marble, round in form, and finished on the top with gilded Spires, reflecting the sun beams with a marvellous splendour. On the first whereof, standeth the ruins of Constantine's Palace, exceeding stately to behold; on the second, a fair Turkish Mosque, built on the Palace anciently belonging to the Greek Patriarch; on the third, a stately Mosque, the Sepulchre of Mahomet the second, and a very large Hospital, for entertainment of Pilgrims, and relief of the poor; the Annual rents whereof are valued at 200000 Chequinss: On the fourth and fifth, the Sepulchers of Selimus the first, and Bajazet the second. On the sixth, the Mosque, and Sepulchre of Solyman the Magnificent, numbered amongst the present wonders of the world; and on the seventh, the Temple of Saint Sophia, and the Turks Seraglio, spoken of already. In which respect it is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, by Nicetas; Vrbs septicollis, by Paulus Diaconus; and so acknowledged to be by Janus Douza, Phines' Morison, G. Sandys, and others of our modern Travellers, the eye-witnesses of it. So that if there be any Mystery in the number of Seven, or that the sitting of the Great Whore on a seven-headed beast, be an assured direction to find out the Antichrist: we may as well look for him in Constantinople, or Nova Roma, where the Great Turk, the professed enemy of Christ, and the Christian Faith, hath his seat and residence, as amongst the seven hills of Old Rome, where the Pope resideth: Or if his sitting in the Temple of God, 
Thrace.  show us where to find him, we may as well look for him in the Temple of Saint Sophia, now a Turkish Mosque, as in Saint Peter's Church at Rome, still a Christian Temple.  
But to return again unto Constantinople, as it was made by Constantine the Imperial City, and consequently the chief City of the East in all Civil matters: so it became in little time to have a great sway also in affairs of Religion. The Christian Faith said to be first preached in Byzamium, by Saint Andrew the Apostle, the first Bishop thereof: afterwards spreading over Thrace, and the Churches of it regulated by many Bishops: the chief pre-eminence in matters which concerned those Churches, was given unto the Bishop of Heraclea, Heraclea being at that time the Metropolis, or principal City of the Province. But after that Constantinople was built by Constantine, and made the Imperial City as before was said: it did not only over-top Heraclea, and draw unto itself the Metropolitan dignity, but stood in competition with the other patriarchal Churches, for the Supreme Power, insomuch as at the second General Council, holden in this City, it was unanimously decreed, that the Patriarch hereof, should in degree of honour be next unto the Bishop of Rome, and above those of Antioch, and Alexandria; the same Decree confirmed in the Council of Chalcedon also; by which not only all the Churches in the Diocese of Thrace, but also of Anatolia, or Asia Minor (except Cilicia and Isauria, which remained to the Patriarch of Antioch) were containing no less than 28 of the Roman Provinces, were made subject to him. And though Pope Leo the first pretending only the preservation of the Privileges of those two great Churches, but indeed fearing left New Rome might in the end get the precedency of the Old, did oppose this Act; and some of his Successors persisted in the same resistance: yet they were forced in the end to give way unto it, especially after the Emperor Justinian had by his Imperial Edict confirmed the same. By whom it was finally ordained, Senioris Romae Papam primum esse omnium Sacerdotum; beatissimum autem Archiepiscopum Constantinopoleos, Novae Romae, secundum habere locum: that is to say, that the Pope of Rome should have the first place, in all General Counsels, and the Bishop of Constantinople, or New Rome, should have the second. Encouraged wherewith, and with the countenance and favour of the Emperor Mauritius, John Patriarch of Constantinople, in the time of Gregory the Great, took to himself the title of Universal or Ecumenical Bishop, the Pastor General (as it were) of the Church of CHRIST. And though Pope Boniface, by the grant of that bloody Tyrant PHOCAS, got that title from him: yet the Patriarches of Constantinople made good their ground, never submitting either themselves, or their Churches to the Pope's Authority; for that cause specially, accounted by the Church of Rome for Schismatics, accordingly reviled, and persecuted with all kind of indignities. How it succeeded with these Patriarches in the times ensuing, and by what means their jurisdiction was extended over all Greece, Muscovie, part of Poland, and many other Churches in the North and East, hath been said already. Certain it is, the constant residence of the Emperors, from the time of Constantine, gave great ground unto: of whom I should here add the names, but that I must first sum up the affairs of Thrace, before the building of this mighty and predominant City; and take a brief view of the rest of those Provinces which we have comprehended under the name of Greece.  
Concerning which, we are to know, that the ancient Inhabitants of it had the names of Strimonii, Bardi, Dolo●gi, Sapaei, Saii, and some others; united by most writers in the name of Thracians. Governed at first by the Kings or Princes of their several Tribes, as most Nations else: distinguished from the common people, as in other pomps, so most especially by their Gods, which their Kings had to themselves apart, and were not to be worshipped by the best of their Subjects. These not agreeing well together for the common good, gave the Athenians, Spartans', Thebans, and other Nations of the Greeks, a good opportunity, to invade their Country, to seize on the Sea-townes thereof, and plant Colonies in them: the Country in those times being meanly peopled, and consequently giving that advantage unto the Grecians, as the Indies in these later times have to the Spaniards, Portugueze, English, Hollanders, and all other Adventurers. Such of them as lay next to Macedon, proving bad neighbours here unto upon all occasions, at last provoked Philip, the Father of Alexander, to put in for a share; who being chosen Arbitrator betwixt two competitors for that Kingdom (drawn at last into fewer hands) came not unto the Council with such poor attendants as Justice and Piety, but with a great and puissant Army; wherewith having vanquished and s●ain the two Pretenders, he pronounced sentence for himself, and made Thrace his own, compelling the Inhabitants to pay him the tenth part of their Revenue for his yearly Tribute. After the death of Alexander, this Country was seized on by Lysimachus, as his part of the spoil, who here built the City Lysimachia; from hence invading Dacia, Macedon, and the neighbouring Regions: and he being dead, the Thracians now accustomed to a foreign yoke, were either Subjects, or at least Tributaries to the Macedonians. Aiding them in their wars against the Romans, they incurred the displeasure of that people, who having settled their affairs in other places, and repulsed the Cimbri: thought it fit time to call the Thracians to account for their former Actions; but sped so ill in the attempt, that Porcius Cato lost his whole Army in the onset, cunningly intercepted in their woods and fastnesses. Didius the Praetor coming in, whilst the Thracians were busy in the chase, gave them such a stop, that he deserved a Triumph for it: and the Victory more easy to Metellus, who succeeded Cato in that charge, and triumphed also over them; as also did Lucullus on another Victory, A. U. C. 680. Broken with so many ill successes, they were finally subdued by Piso in the time of Augustus: becoming so obsequious to that fortunate Prince, that Rhitemalces, a great and puissant ●ing hereof, aided him with a strength of Horse against the Pannonians and Illyrians, who had then rebelled. Afterwards made a Province of the Roman Empire, in Constantine's new model it became a Diocese, under the Proefecius Proefetorio Orientis: Thrace itself being cast into four Provinces, that is to say, Thrace specially so called, Hamimontum, Rhodope, and Europa; Scythia, and the Lower Moesia, spoken of before, being added to it: of which the Precedents of Rhodope and Haemimontum, were not to be appealed from to the praefectus Praetorio, as the others were; but only to the Praefect of Constantinople, the Imperial City. But as Alfonsus, King of Castille, surnamed the Wise, was once heard to say (never the Wiser for so saying) That had he stood at the elbow of Almighty God, when he made the World, he would have showed him how some things might be better ordered: so give me leave to play the fool, and to say this here, that had I stood at Constantine's elbow, I would have counselled him to lay the Diocese of Thrace to the Praefecture of Illyricum, who had originally only the Dioceses of Macedon and Illyricum under his command; and not have placed it under the Praefect of the East, who had both Asias, and all Egypt under his Authority. For being that there lay Appeals from the Vicars of Lieutenants of the several Dioceses to their several and respective Prefects: how great a trouble must it be to the subjects of Thrace, on every occasion of Appeal, to post to Antioch, there to complain unto the Perfect of the Orient; when Sirmium and Thessalonica, the ordinary residences of the Praefectus Praetorio for Illyrirum, were so hard at hand. But Constantine was an absolute Prince, and might do what he listed. He had not else removed his seat so far towards the East, and left the western parts of the Empire open to the barbarous people, out of a fancy only to preserve the Eastern. For that it was a fancy only the event did show, the Persians for all this, prevailing more than ever formerly; and Thrace itself, though honoured with the Imperial City, and planted with so many Roman Colonies, so ill inhabited, that a great part thereof lay waist and desert many Ages after. Insomuch as the Goths being by the Huns driven over the Danow, where by the Emperor Valens plainted in this Country, (the Emperor having a design to use them in his following wars) where not contented with the portion allotted to them, they bid fair for all, wasting the whole Province, taking divers towns, and endangering Constantinople itself, from whence not driven, (Valens himself being killed in the war against them) but by the coming of some Saracens to the aid of the Citizens. Nor could the residence of the Emperors so protect this Country, but that it was continually harassed, and depopulated by the Sclaves, Bulgarians, Rosses, Saracens, and other barbarous people falling in upon it: nor hinder one Bryonnius in the time of Michael Ducas, and Nicephorus Botoniates from assuming to himself the title of King of Thrace; nor finally prevent the Turks of the Ottoman race from getting ground every day on the lesser Asia, encroaching upon Thrace itself, and in the end obtaining the Imperial City.  
And here perhaps it is expected, considering the Turks are now possessed of Thrace, and the rest of Greece, that we should make relation of the nature of that people, their customs, forces, policies, original, and proceedings. But the discourse thereof, we will defer till we come to Turcomania, a Province of Asia: from whence they made their first inundations, like to some unresistible torrent into Persia; and after into the other parts of the world now subject to them. And therefore letting that alone till another time, we will proceed to our Description of the rest of Greece, consisting of the Lands scattered in the Pontic, Propontick, Aegean, Cretan, and Ionian Seas: leaving out such as properly belong to Asia to our description of that Country, though otherwise Greek Lands, and so accounted both for their Language and Original.   

The ISLANDS of the PONTIC and PROPON. TICK SEAS.  
Before we come to the descriptions of these Lands, we must first look upon the Seas in which they lie: beginning with the PONTIC first, because the Greatest, and that which doth communicate and convey its waters unto all the rest. A Sea made up Originally of the confluence of those mighty Rivers, (the greatest in those parts of the World) which do fall into it: that is to say, the Danow, Borysthenes, and Tanais falling out of Europe, besides many other fair and large Rivers (though of lesser note) to the number of at least an hundred, which pay Tribute to it: the whole compass of it being 2700 miles; in form, by some resembled to a Scythian Box when it is bended. A Sea not so salt as many others, and therefore much annoyed with ice in winter; seldom remitted in the spring on the Northern shores: the Traffic of it wholly in a manner engrossed by the Turks, who is master of all the Sea-coast of it, save what belongs to the Polonian and Crim-Tartar. At first called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the inhospitablenesse of the neighbouring people; which being brought to some conformity, caused the Sea to be called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. By Florus it is called Mare Sinistrum, because in the way from Rome to Asia Minor it lay upon the left hand, as the Mediterranean did upon the right. It is commonly called at this time Mare Maggiore, for its greatness; and the Black Sea, because of the great mists thence arising. Others not unprobably affirm, that it is called the Black Sea, from the dangerous and blackshipwraks here happening. For it is a very dangerous shore full of Rocks and Sands: and for this cause there is on the top of an high tower, a lantern, in which there is a great pan full of pitch, resin, tallow, and the like, in dark nights continually burning, to give warning to Mariners how near they approach unto the shore. This Sea being the biggest of all those parts, gave occasion to them which knew no bigger, 
Propontis.  to call all seas by the name of Pontus, as Ovid, Omnia pontus erant, deerant quoque littora ponto; and in another place of the same Poet,— nil nisi pontus & aer; a better reason doubtless of the name, then that of the Etymologists: Pontus, quia ponte caret. Of this Sea the chief Isles are Thimius, and Erithinnus, little famous. From hence the Sea bending Southward, is brought into narrow bounds, not being fully a mile broad; and called Thracius Bosphorus: Thracius, for its fate nigh T hrace; and Bosphorus, for that Oxen have swom over it, and hath no Island worth naming.  
This Straight having continued 26 miles in length, openeth itself into the Propontis, 30 miles in compass; confined with Thrace on the one side, and with Bythinia on the other: so as they which sail in the middle, may descry the land on all parts. Now called Mare di Marmora, from the Island Marmora, which formerly called Proconnesus, hath for its abundance of Marble purchased this new name. The soil apt for Vines, and not destitute of Corn, yielding also good pasturage for Goats, whereof here is plenty, with an incredible number of Partridges amongst the Rocks: the Country of Aristaeus, a famous Poet, who flourished in the times of Croesus. Anciently it had in it two Cities of the same name with the Island, called the Old and New Proconensus, the former first vilt by the Milestans, an A sian people; the latter by the natives of this Island. But both these being long since decayed; it hath now only a small Village towards the North, with an Haven to it; inhabited by Greeks, as is all the rest of the Island: such Christian Slaves as are in great numbers employed here by the Turks in digging Marble for their Mosques, and other buildings, being only sojourners, not housekeepers, and therefore not accounted amongst the Inhabitants. Here is also in this Propontick Sea, the Isle of Cyzieus; but being it is on Asia side, we shall there speak of it.  
The Sea having gathered her waters into a lesser Channel, is called Hellespont, from Helle, daughter to Athamas, King of Thebes, who was here drowned. Over this famous straight did Xerxes, according to Hercdotus, make a bridge of boats to pass into Greece: which when a sudden tempest had shrewdly battered, he caused the Sea to be beaten with 300 stripes; and cast a pair of Fetters into it, to make it know to whom it was subject. Xerxes' in this expedition wasted over an Army consisting of two millions, and 164710 fight men, in no less than 2208 bottoms of all sorts. When all the Persians soothed the King in the unconquerableness of his forces; Artabanus told him, that he feared no enemies but the Sea and the Earth; the one yielding no safe harbour for such a Navy; the other, not yielding sufficient substance for so multitudinous and Army. His return over this Hellespont was as dejected, as his passage magnificent; his Fleet being so broken by the valour of the Greeks, and the fury of the sea: that for his more speedy flight, he was compelled to make use of a poor sisher-boat. Neither yet was his passage secure; For the boat being overburdened, had sunk all, if the Persians by easting away themselves, had not saved the life of their King. The loss of which noble spirits so vexed him, that having given the Steersman a golden Coronet, for preserving his own life: he commanded him to execution, as a Co-author of the death of his servants. It is now called the Castles, or the sea of the two Castles; which two Castles stand one on Europe, the other on Asia side; in the Towns of Sestos, and Abydos. These Castles are exceeding well built, and abundantly furnished with munition. They search and examine all Ships that pass that way: they receive the Grand Seignieurs customs, and are in effect the principal strength of Constantinople. At these Castles, all Ships must stay three days; to the end, that if any Slave be run away from his master, or thiefs have stolen any thing, they may be in that place pursued and apprehended. So that these Castles are as it were the outworks of Constantinople to defend it from all invasions, and from any forces which may come unto it by Sea, out of the Mediterranean. And for the safety thereof, from such as may find passage into the Euxine, there are situate at the very entrance of the Thracian Bosphorus two strong Castles also: the one above Constantinople on Europe side, anciently called Damalis, and now the Black tower, strongly fortified, and compassed with a wall twenty two foot thick, which with the opposite Castle on the A sian Shore, do command that entrance. No European Isle of note in either Straight. And therefore on unto   

The ISLANDS of the AEGEAN SEA.  
Hellespont, after a forty miles' course, expaciateth its waters in the Aegaean Seas; so called either from Aegaeus, the father of Theseus, who misdoubting his sons safe return from the Minotaur of Crete, here drowned himself: or secondly, from Aege, once a principal City, in the prime Island Euboea: or thirdly, because that the Islands lie scattered up and down like the leaps of a wanton Goat, from the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  
The chief Lands of it are 1 Samothrace, 2 Thassus, 3 Imbrus, 4 Lenmos, 5 Euboea, 6 Salamis, 7 Aegint, 8 the Cycladeses, 9 the Sporades, and 10 Cythera: all which, especially from Euboea Southwards, are called the Islands of the Arches; the Sea, being by the Mariners called the Archipelago, in regard of its greatness, compared unto the narrow Seas which lie about it.  
1 SAMOTHRACE is a small Island opposite to the Coast of Thrace, where the Hebrus falls into the Sea; so called, quasi Samos Thraciae, to difference it from the A sian Samos, bordering on jonia. Formerly it was called Dardania, 
Lemnos.  from Dardanus the Trojan, who fled hither when he carried the Palladium thence. But Aristotle writing of the Common-weal of these Samothracians, telleth us that it was first called Leucosia, and afterwards Samus from Saus, the son of Mercury and Rhine, the letter M being interposed. It is now called Samandrachi, plentiful in Honey, and Wild Deer, and better stored with commodious harbours, than any other in these Seas. It hath a town of the same name with the Island, situate on an high hill on the North part hereof, overlooking a capacious Haven; of late, by the Pirates frequent infesting of these Seas in a manner desolate.  
TWO THASSUS, another little Island on the same Coast, opposite to the influx of the River Nessa's, lying betwixt that and Athos in Macedonia, at the mouth of the Strymonian Bay: by Pliny called Aerid, and Aethria; by P tolemy Thalassia, at the present Thasse. In compass betwixt forty and fifty miles; sufficiently fruitful, well replenished with woods, and yielding good store of the best Wines: mountainous in some places, but those mountains fraught with Quarries of excellent Marble, which the Romans called Thassiam, from the Island: and in the times of Philip, and Alexander the Great, so rich in Mines of useful metals, that those Kings received yearly 80 talents for their Customs of them. It hath one town of the same name with the Island, situate on a large plain in the north part of it, bordering on a goodly Bay, which serves for an Haven to the Town: and on the South parts where the Country is more mountainous and hilly, there are two towns more, each of them situate on an hill; but the names thereof occur not amongst my Authors.  
III IMBRUS, another small Island, now named Lembro, is situate betwixt Samothrace and the T hracian Chersonese; in compass about thirty miles, but more long then broad, stretching north and south; and distant from Samothrace about ten miles. The Island mountainous for the most part except towards the West; where it hath some pleasant and well-watered Plains: in which a town of the same name, situate at the foot of the mountain, once sacred unto Mercury, but not else observable.  
IV LEMNOS, an Island of more note, lieth betwixt Thrace and Mavedon, not far from Imbrus; memorable amongst the Poets for the fabulous fall of Vulcan, who being but an homely brat, hardly worth the owning, was by Juno in great passion thrown out of Heaven; and falling on this Island, came to get his halting. Howsoever, he was anciently worshipped by the people hereof, and from hence called Lemnius. In compass about an hundred miles, but more long then broad, extended from the East to the West; on every side well furnished with convenient Greeks, and some pretty Havens; by which the want of Rivers is in some sort recompensed.  
The Country for the most part plain, if compared unto the adjacent Lands; but otherwise swelled with rising mountainets, the enterposed valleys being very fruitful of wheat, pulse, wine, flesh, cheese, wool, flax, linen, and all other necessaries: only wood is wanting. And though here be no Rivers, as before was said, yet have they good fishing on the Sea-cost, for their use and sustenance; and in some parts Hot-bathes for health and medicine. But the chief riches of this Island is in a Mineral Earth here digged, of excellent Virtue for curing wounds, stopping of fluxes, expulsing poisons, preservative against infections, and the like: called Terra Lemnia, from the place; and Terra Sigillata, from the seal or Character imprinted on it. For being made up into small pellets, and sealed with the Turks Character or Signet, it is then (not before) sold unto the Merchants; by whom dispersed over most parts of the Christian world. Upon the sixth of August yearly they go to gather it; but not without much Ceremony, and many religious preparations, brought in by the Venetians, when they were Lords of this Island; and still continued by the Greek Monks or Caloires, who are the principal in the work. There is one hill only where it groweth, the top whereof being opened, they discover the vein, resembling the casting up of worms; and having gathered as much of it that day, as the Priesis think fit, it is closed again: certain bags of it being sent to the Grand-Signeur yearly, the residue sealed up, and sold to the foreign Merchant.  
But to return to the topography of the place, the eastern parts hereof are said to be fat and fruitful, the western very dry and barren: in both containing 57 Towns and Villages, all of them inhabited by the Greeks, except only three, and those three garrisoned by the Turks; who being Lords of the whole Island, have new named it Stalimene. In former times, from two prime Cities in it, it was called Diospolis: Of which the first was called Lemnos, by the name of the Island, as large, and well-people now, as ever formerly, but of no great estimation, when it was at the best; seated upon an high hill looking over the Sea; with a handsome marketplace, on which mount Athos casts a shadow, though distant 87 miles from it. It was formerly by another name called Myrina; but that held not long, the name of Lemnos still remaining. 2 The second of the two Cities was then called Hephaestias, memorable for the temple of Vulcan, hence called Hephaestiades, since desolate and destroyed, and a new town built in the place of it, being called Chochino: This town not great, but of a reasonable strength, memorable for the stout resistance, which a notable Virago named Marulla, made against the Turks, in the time of Mahomet the Great, the Venetians then being Lords of the Island. For suddenly landing; when they were not looked for, with a purpose to surprise this town, they found more resistance at the gates than they did expect: none more commended than this Maiden, who seeing her Father stain, took up such weapons as lay by him, and manfully made good the place, until the rest of the Citizens wakened with the Alarm, 
Euboea.  came unto her rescue, and forced the enemy to retire. Near hereunto is the hill on which Vulcan is fabled to have fell; more eminent for the mineral earth here only gathered. And not far hence Pliny reports a Lebyrinth to have stood in the days of old, little inferiors unto those of Crete or Egypt: the ruins of it so decayed, that Bellonius, who took great pains in it, was not able to trace them. 3 The third place of note is Setira, though an ordinary Village, yet memorable for the Chapel in which the Greek Caloires begin their Orisons on the sixth day of August, before their gathering of the Earth, so often mentioned.  
Besides these on the Coast of Thrace, there are also some of less note on the shores of Macedon, the principal whereof are 1 Peparinthus, as Ptolemy; Euonus, as Pliny calls it, containing about 40 miles in compass: now, called Sarquius, as Castadus, or Limene, as Niger hath it; fortified on the Eastern part with a Castle built upon a Rock. Others of less note are, 2 Scyathos, now Scyati; 3 Scoyelos, 4 Allonesus, 5 Cicy●othus, now Pontico; and 6 Dromus; of which little memorable: all which, together with those tormerly described on the Coast of Thrace, being but the Accessories of the several Continents, upon which they border, following the fortune of the Principal, and were conquered in them.  
V EVEOEA known to the ancients by the names of Macris and Abantis; to the moderns, by that of Necropont; frontireth all along the Coast of Achaia, parallel to which it is in fertility: one part hereof, torn away from it by an Earthquake, and lying still so near unto it, that between the Island and the Continent is only a little Euripus, which ebbeth and floweth seven times in one day: the reason of which, when Aristotle could not find, it is said, that he threw himself in the Sea, with these words, Quia ego non capio te, tu capies me. In this Island is the Promontory Capareus, where Nauplius, the father of Palamedes, placed his false fires, to the destruction of so many Greeks. For understanding how his son Palamedes, whom he deemed to have been slain by the hand of Paris, was treacherously circumvented by the policy of Ulysses, and Diomedes: he conceived such a displeasure against the whole host of the Grecians, that he intended their general destruction. To this end he caused fires to be made on the tops of the most dangerous and unaccessible rocks in this whole Island: which the Greeks taking (according to the custom of the time) to have been the marks of some safe Haven, made thitherward; and were there miserably cast away, there perishing 200 Ships, and many thousand men. But when Nauplius understood how Diomedes and Ulysses, whose ruin he principally intended, were escaped, he drowned himself, for very vexation, in this very same place. Palamedes, this Nauplius son, is said to have invented four of the Greek letters, viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; to have first instituted Sentinels in an Army, and to be the first inventour of their Watchword.  
It is in length 150 miles, stretched out from the Northwest to the Southeast, in breadth, not above twenty, where it is broadest; the whole compass 365 Italian miles: The Queen of the Aegean Sea, not only for greatness, but for fertility and strength; plentiful in Corn, Wine, Oil, Fruit, and wood fit for Shipping; enriched with many fair Harbours, and capacious Bays, and those well fortified: watered also with the Rivers of Cireus, and Neleus; two Rivers of so strange a nature, that if a sheep drink of the former, his wool turneth white, but coalblack, if he drink of the latter: For the credit whereof I refer the Reader unto Strabo. Here is also said to be a stone called Amianthus, which is drawn into thread like hemp, and good cloth made of it: which, when it is stained, in stead of being sent unto the Fuller's, is thrown into the fire, and so cleansed. But whether this be so, or not, (for I put it only upon hear-say) certain it is, that it was once enriched with Mines both of Brass, and Iron, though those now decayed; and quarries of pure Marble, which continue still.  
The Island, before it was conquered by the Turks, was very populous: but the people most delighted to live in Villages; the Cities, or walled towns being only three. 1 Caristo, anciently Carysius, with little or no variation, but by Pliny called Aegea, and Chironia; memorable for its marble quarries, of which were made the Pillars called Columnoe Carystioe. 2 Chalcis, now Negropont, by the Turks, Eribos, seated on a plain near the waters side, there growing into a fair and goodly Bay, called the Golf of Negropont; a populous, strong, and wealthy City, so fortified with Walls and Bulwarks, that in the judgement of most men, it was held invincible, when the Turks first sat down before it. Nor was it purchased by the Turk (though Mahomet, who had took Constantinople, undertook the business) at a lower price than the loss of forty thousand men, who were spent, upon it: but taken at the last, and the people put unto the Sword, without consideration of Sex, or Age. A town in former times of so great wealth and power, that it sent Colonies abroad into Macedonia (a principal Region of the which was hence called Chalcidice, as also into Si●il, and some parts of Italy: and had a strong influence on the affairs of Achaia also, as being situate near the Continent, that it was joined to it by a bridge. When it was in the hands of the King of Macedon; this town, together with D●metrias in Thessaly, and the Castle of Aerocorinth, were called the setters of Greece: insomuch, that when the Roman Senate commanded Philip, the Father of Persius, to set the Grecians at liberty, the Grecians made answer, that in vain was their liberty restored them, unless these three towns were first dismantled. Permitted by the Romans to live according to their own Laws; in memory of that benefit, they refused to declare against them in behalf of Antio●hus, who thereupon made himself master of the Town, and consequently of the Island. But forced to leave the place upon the loss of the battle at Thermopylae, it became free again; till finally made subject unto Rome, with the rest of Greece; and with it made a part of the Easten in Empire. In the division whereof amongst the Latins, 
Salamis.  it fell to the share of the Venetians; who from hence used with their Galleys to infest the shores of Turkey, and disturb their trade. Provoked wherewith, especially with their taking of Aenus a City of Thrace, under the conduct of Nicolas Canalis, the Venetian Admiral, who in that enterprise had took 2000 Turks, which he carried with him into this Island: Mahomet the Great resolves upon the conquest of it; and with a puissant Army sets before the Town. And though it cost him dear, yet at last he got it, and therewith all the Island also, which depended on the fortunes of it, an. 1471.  
SALAMIS is nigh unto Megaris, one of the Provinces of Achaia, famous for the overthrow of the populous Navy of Xerxes, by the Athenians, and their confederates. What was the number of the soldiers and galleys of the Persian side, hath been already declared. The Grecian Fleet consisted of no more than 270 vessels, whereof 127 were rigged and set forth at the charge of the Athenians only: the rest by the associates. Yet was the admiralty committed to Eurybiades a Lacedoemonian; the Athenians preferring the main care of the common safety, before an unseasonable contention for priority. The Spartans' seeing the inequality of forces, intended not to have hazarded the battle, but with full say I to have retired to Peloponnesus, into which country the Persians had made incursions; respecting more the welfare of their own country yet defensible, than the desperate estate of Attica. This design was by Themistocles, (as careful for the estate of Athens, as they for Sparta) signified to Xerxes: who getting between them and home, compelled them to a necessity of fight; but to his own ruin. For in the conflict more than 200 of his ships were sunk, and most of the rest taken; the confederates having lost of their Navy, forty only. Between the Athenians and Megerenses, were many contentions for this Island: the fortune of the Athenians in the end prevailing. It hath in it a City of the same name, the royal seat of Telamonius the father of Aiax, so famous in the war of Troy: more memorable for giving birth to Solon the Legislator of Athens, one of the seven wise men of Greece.  
VII. AEGINA, now called Engie, an Island situate over against Sinus Saronicus, being that Bay of Corinth which openeth into the Aegean; hence called Golfo di Engia, the Realm of Aeacus, made for his justice and integrity one of the three Judges of Hell: the other two being his brother Rhadamanthus, and Minos the King of Crete. It had formerly been called Oenone, and Oenope; but took this name from Aegina the daughter of Asopus a King of Boeotia, on whom Jupiter is said to have begot both Aeacus and Rhadamanthus: The people hereof are properly called Aeginenses and Aeginetae, much spoken of in the wars of Athens, from which distant about 12 miles. Th● ground hereof is very stony, but good for barley, of which very plentiful: inhabited in former times by a laborious and thriving people, to whom they gave in those days the name of Myrmidons, (the Island being also called Myrmidonia) quod formicarum more terram foderent, because Emmet-like, they digged up and under the earth, to make it the more fit for tillage, and dwelled at first in Caves without any houses. Hence the occasion of the fable of turning Emmets into men at the prayers of Aeacus; both tale and people, after (I know not how) carried into Thessaly, where before we found them.  
VIII. The CYCLADESES, so called because they lie in a circle round about Delos, are in number 53. They are also called the Islands of the Arches, because they are in the sea called Archipelago. They stand so close together, that in a clear day a man may see 20 of them at a time, for which cause it is with good reason accounted to be a dangerous place for sailors in a storm. The chief of these Cycladeses, are 1 DELOS, quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying apparent, because when all the earth had abjured the receipt of Latona at the request of Juno; this Island then under water, was by Jupiter erected aloft, and sixth to receive her; and in it was she delivered of Apollo and Diana: of which thus Cvid: 
— Erratica Delos  
Errantem accepit, tunc cum levis insula nabat.  
Illic incumbens, sub Palladas arbore, palma:  
Edidit, invita, Geminos Latona, noverca.  
Unsettled Delos floating on the wave,  
A little Island entertainment gave  
To wand'ring Laton, spite of Juno's head,  
Under Minerva's Palmtree brought to bed.  Notable also is this Island for the Temple of Apollo, and a custom neither permitting men to die, or children to be born in it; but sending sick men, and great-bellied women to Rhine, a small Island, and not much distant. By a more ancient name it is called Ortygia; and by that name mentioned in many of the Poets both Greek and Latins. The chief town of it called also Delos, is situate on a plain environed with rocks, near the hill called Cynthus: whence Apollo had the name of Cyntbius, and Diana of Cymhia, as of Delius and Delia from the Island. In this town had Apollo both his Temple and Oracle, delivered here more plainly then in other places, and for that reason (as some say) called Delos; the word in Greek signifying manifest or apparent: made famous by the resort of people from all places hither, especially from the neighbouring Islands, who sent yearly multitudes of men and troops of Virgins, to celebrate his solemn ities with herds of Sacrifices. 
Cycladeses.  More wealthy afterwards by the removing of the trade of Corinth hither, that town being utterly destroyed by the Romans, and this made choice of by the Merchant, partly by reason of the immunities of the place, but principally in regard of the convenient situation betwixt Europe and Asia. Continuing in great wealth and power till Mithridates laid it waste; and at last on the ceasing of Oracles utterly forsaken. Both Town and Island now called Diles. By which name also Khene an adjoining Island (before mentioned) is at this day known; chained to the other by Polycrates the Tyrant of Samos, and now united to it at the least in name.  
2 TENOS by Aristotle called Hydrusa, by some Ophiussa, by the Moderns, Tyna. The chief Town of it of the same name; so called from one Tenes, the builder of it, and giving name unto the Island. Memorable for a fountain called Dipnosus, of which Aristole and Athenaeus do both affirm, that the waters will not mix with wine. The only Island of this seat, which remaineth under the power of the State of Venice; the rest being subject to the Turk, deserving therefore the first place in our description of those Islands that encompass Delos, though anciently  
3 ANDROS, (prima inter Cyclades) was reckoned chief amongst the Cycladeses, or first at least in order, because next to Delos: originally called Cauron, afterwards Antandros, and at last Andros, from Andrus the son of Eurymachus, who founded the chief town in it, of the same name also. Memorable for a pleasant fountain mentioned by Pliny, the waters whereof, on the nonce of January, yearly, had the taste of wine. It still retains the name of Andros.  
4 NAXOS, now Nicsia, one of the biggest of the pack, as being about 80 miles in compass. In ancient times called Veneris insula, or the Island of Venus, afterwards Dionysia by reason of its abundance of wine and the goodness of those Wines together, consecrated to Bacchus, whom the greeks call Dionysius: From its wonderful plenty of Wheat, called by some Sicilia Minor, or the lesser Sicil; but at last Naxos from one Naxos, who had the conduct of a Colony of Carians hither. But notwithstanding this new name Bacchus did still retain the honour to be worshipped in it, in regard of his love unto the place; marrying here Ariadne, (as the Poet's fable) whom Theseus had left upon the Rocks; whose Coronet or Chaplet being by his means made one of the heavenly Constellations is by Columella called Ardour Naxius, by the name of the Island, though commonly by Astronomers Corona Ariadne's, from the name of the Lady. The women of this Island are said by Pliny to be delivered generally in the eight month; as Bacchus was: more certainly famous in true story for the beauty and fertility of it; and for a kind of excellent Marble called Ophitis, or Serpentinus, the ground whereof is green, diapered with blue or purple spots; in much esteem amongst the Romans. When these Islands fell to the Venetians, they conferred this on one John Quirino a Patrician, or Gentleman of that City (as they did divers of the rest on other Undertakers) from whom it came to the Noble family of the Crispos, who held it till the year 1572. James the last of that house lost it to Selimus the second.  
5 GYAROS, a little Island into which the Romans used to banish delinquents: hence that of Juvenal cited by Sir G. Sandys.  
Aude aliquid brevibus Gyaris, vel carcere dignum,  
Si vis esse aliquid: probitas laudatur, & alget.  
If thou intend'st to thrive, do what deserves  
Short Gyaros, or Gives: praised virtue starves.  
6 PAROS, now Paria, by some of the Ancients called Pactia, by others Minois, but obtained this new name from Parus, a son of Jason, memorable for quarries of the whitest Marble, of which commonly the Statuas of the Gods were made, called from hence Marmor Parium by the Latins. In compass about 50 miles running in a long Plain from East to West, having once a Town of the same name seated in the North, once famous, but now utterly ruined. The Inhabitants hereof were noted to be very careless of keeping their promises and contracts: whence 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, grew into a byword applied to those who made no reckoning of their promises. There is now a town in it called Cephalo, but of no great note.  
7 SCYROS opposite to Magnesea in Asia Minor, famous for the birth of Neoptolemus or Pyrrhus, and that it was the lurking place of Achilles. For his mother Thetis being forewarned by an Oracle that he should be slain in the Trojan war, sent him to Lycomedes King of this Island, where he was brought up in woman's attire among the King's daughters, and deemed a Virgin; till by getting Pyrrhus on Deidamia the King's daughter, it was proved to be otherwise. Others relate that Ulysses discovered him by a wile, who coming thither like a Pedlar or Petit-Merchant, with arms, and other ware to avoid distrust; exposed his Merchandise to the view of the Damosels: and that the other Ladies falling on the tires and Laces, Athilles took into his hand the Spear and Shield. Which when Ulysses had observed he made him leave that company, and away for Troy. The handsomeness of the fraud take from Ovid thus, 
Conscia venturi genitrix Nereia fati  
Dissimulat cultu natum; & deceperat omnes,  
In quibus Ajacem, sumpte fallacia vestis.  
Arma ego foemineis animum motura virile m  
Mercibus inserui, etc.  Englished by G. Sandys in his Translation of the Metamorphosis. 
The whole design in Order to relate,  
Thetis foreknowing great Achilles' fate,  
Disguised her son, so like a Virgin dressed  
That all mistook, and Aiax with the rest.  
When Arms with women's trifles, which might blind  
Suspect, I brought to tempt a manly mind.  
Yet was the Heros Virginlike a●aid;  
Who taking the Shield and Spear, I said  
O Goddesse-born, for thee the fate of Troy,  
Her fall reserves; why doubtst thou to destroy  
Great Pergamus! then made him d'off those weeds,  
And sent the mighty unto mighty deeds.  There is another of this name, betwixt Negropont and Lesbos, which Ortelius conceives to be the Scene of this action: but the general opinion is for this, (though that the greater) to which the situation of it amongst the rest of those Islands, where reigned so many of the Greek Kings interessed in the war of Troy, seems to give good countenance: the name and power of Greece not reaching in those days, so much towards the North.  
8 MELOS, situate betwixt Crete, and Pelopennesus, and equally distant from them both: the Promontories of Scylleum in the one, and that of Dyctymeum in the other, shooting out against it. Inhabited in former times by a Colony of Phanicians, who coming out of Biblus, a town of that country, gave that name unto it, gave that name unto it, called Melos afterwards by the greeks, from its abundance of Honey. The birthplace of Diagorus the Philosopher, hence surnamed Melius, but more properly 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or the Atheist: the first who in those dark times of ignorance, absolutely denied that there was a God. Protageras' Deos in dubium vecavit, Diagoras exclusit, faith Lactantius of him. It is now called Milo, round in form, and containing 80 miles in compass. The soil sufficiently fruitful in corn and oil, but defective in wine. Here is great plenty of marble curiously bespotted, and no small store of millstones: as also great quantities of pitch, and brimstone, and some sulphury or hot springs, good for many diseases. The chief town of it called Milo also.  
9 SERIPHUS, 20 miles from Delos, memorable of old for the education of Perseus, the son of Danae. It is reported of this Island, that the Frogs bred there are naturally mute; but such as are brought from other places, keep their natural tone: from whence Proverbially, silent and sullen persons were called Ranoe Seriphia. It is now called Serphena, a stony and rocky Island, and hath a town of the same name.  
10 CIA by some called CEOS, and now Z●a, opposite to the Promontory of Achaia called Sunium, in compass about 50 miles, made towards the West in fashion of a Crescent or half Moon. Mountainous and hilly, except towards the North. By Pliny said to have been torn from Eubaea by a sudden violence of the Sea, many men perishing in the waters. Of old times beautified with three fair towns, 1 Julis, 2 Carthaea, and 3 Caressus; of which there is nothing now remaining.  
Others there are whose names occur amongst the Ancients, as Miconus now called Micole, 12 Cythnus, now Cauro; 14 Syphnus, now Sifino; 15 Therasia or Theusia, now Santorini. 16 Cimolis called formerly Echinusa, but now Polino; 17 Olyarus now Quiminio; 18 Sicenus, now Sicino; 19 Polyegroes, now Falconara; 20 Amurgos, now Murgo, one of the biggest of them all, but not else observable.  
The SPORADES, so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 spargo, eo quod in mari sparse sunt, & none in circulum coactoe, because they lie dispersed and scattered; not form into a Circle as the Cycladeses are. In number twelve, viz. 1 Anaphe, so called by the Argonauts, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because the Moon did suddenly, and beyond her natural course appear unto them, then grievously distressed by tempest. Apollo worshipped here, is hence called Anapheus. It is now called Namsio. 2 Astyapalea, now Stampalia, in compass 88 miles; by some of the Ancients called Thewn Trapeza, or the table of the Gods. In Astypale, the chief town of it was Apollo worshipped, from hence sometimes called Astypaleus. 3 Helen, so called from that fair Greek Dame, whom Paris is here said to have first deflowered; now called Macroniso. 4 Los, fifteen miles from Naxos, where Homer is said to have been buried: But others find his grave at Naxos, and some at Chios, the difference being almost as great about the place of his burial, 
Sporades.  as the place of his birth. There are 5 Lagusa, 6 Phocusa, 7 Phacasia, 8 Philocandros, 9 Schinusa, 10 Strybia, of little note either in Poetry or story. And finally Thera, not far from Aegina, before mentioned, formerly called Calliste, but named thus by Theras a Theban Gentleman; the son of Autesion conducting hither a Colony of Spartans' and Minyans, (these last of Thessaly) cast out of Lemnos by Pelasgus: in memory of whom, as the founder of their name and Nation, the Islanders used to celebrate an Annual Feast. A sedition after happening amongst this people, the weaker party under the conduct of one Battus, admonished so to do by the Oracle of Apolio, passed over into Asrick, and there built Cyrene, the birthplace of the Poet Callimachus, who ascribes his Original to this Island, as, himself thus witnesseth. 
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉,  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  That is to say: 
Calliste, which men Thera now do call,  
Of my dear Country the Original.   
X CYTHERA now called Cerigo, lieth in the bottom of this Sea, not above five miles distant from Capo Malo in Peloponnesus, formerly called Porphyris from the abundance of Marble, whereof the Island yields good plenty. In compass about 60 miles, enriched with a delightful soil, and many havens, but those small, and unsafe, and very difficult of entrance: environed on all sides with rocks, of themselves inaccessible, by which defended from the Turks who hitherto have suffered the Venetians to enjoy it, to whom it fell in the division of the spoil amongst the Latins, so often spoken of before. It had a Town of the same name, some two furlongs from the Haven stood the Temple of Venus, (the ancientest dedicated to that Goddess which the Grecians had) and therein her Statue in complete Armour, like another Pallas. Out of this Temple (the ruins whereof are still to be seen) was Helen the wife of Menelaus, willingly ravished by Paris the son of Priam; but not enjoyed by him till he had brought her to a small Island of the Sporades, by her name called Helen, as before is said. From the devotions of this people paid so duly to her, did Venus get the Adjunct of Cytherea, by which often called in the Poets. Thus, for one, in Virgil. 
Parce metu Cytherea, manent immota tuorum  
Fata tibi.  That is to say: 
Drive fear fair Cytherea from thy mind,  
Thou thy son's Fate immovable shall find.  And so I pass from the Aegean to the Cretan Sea, observing this only by the way, that most of the 69 Kings, which accompanied Agamemnon in the war of Tray, were Kings only of these small Islands, or else of other places as inconsiderable for wealth and potency: every small Town and territory having in those early times amongst the Grecians (when ambition had not taught the great ones to devour the less) a peculiar King.   

The ISLANDS of the CRETAN SEAS.  
The CRETAN SEA is properly that part of the Aegean or Ionian Seas, which lieth about the shores of Crete, and formerly was under the command and power thereof: as in those times, the Sea about Carpathos, another Isle of the Aegean had the name of Carpathian; and that about Icaria, the name of Icarian, though situate in the Aegean also. The Isles hereof are 1 Crete, 2 Claudi, 3 Dia, and 4 Letoa: for Melos and Cimolis, named by Prolemie amongst the Islands which adjoin on great, have been already spoken of amongst the Cycladeses, in the account whereof they pass by consent of Writers.  
1 CRETA, now Candie, hath on the East the Carpathian Sea; on the West, the Ionian; on the North the Aegean; on the South, the African or Libyck: In form extending East and West, with three points or Promontorics, whereof that towards the East, called anciently Samonium, is now called Cabo di Salamone, that on the South-west, looking towards Afric, formerly named Hermea, now Capo Grabasse; and finally that on the Northwest towards Peloponnesus, of old called Cimarus, and now Capo Chestin. This last directly opposite to Malea, a Promontory of Laconia, the Sea betwixt them being so troublesome and tempesluous, especially on Laconia side, that at last it grew into an ordinary caveat, Maleam praetervectum obliviscatur quae sunt demi, viz. that he which was to sail by the point of Malca, should lay aside the care of all other matters and attend his present safety only.  
It hath in several Ages and in several Authors obtained several names: 
Crete.  by Homer and Eustathius called Hecatompolis from the number of an hundred Cities then contained in it; by Pliny and Soanus, Macaros and Macaronesos, that is to say, the happy Island, from the goodness of the soil, and temper of the air. By Stephanus, Idea, from Ida, a famous Mountain of it; by Giraldus, Telchionia, from the Teichini, the Priests of Cybele, who was here had in great request. At the present, Candie, either a Candore from the whiteness of the rocks wherewith environed, or from Candie the Metropolis or chief town thereof. But the general name, which hath prevailed most in all sorts of writers, is that of Crete, so called cursi Cureta, by a Syncope, or abbreviation from the Curetes, the first in habitants hereof; who together with the Corybantes and Telechini were the Priests of Cybele, the principal goddess of this Island; and they so called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from their tonsure, or shaving of the head. A custom much in use amongst the Priests of some of the Pagan Deities, and possibly enough from them transmitted to the Church of Rome. And to this Etymology I do rather incline then either to derive the name from Crete the son of Jupiter and the Nymph Idea, or from great the daughter of Hesperus, though both these have their Authors also. Nor dare I to reject the conceit of Bochartus, who fetching the Etymons of most people from the Punic language or Original, will have the Cretans to be descended from the Cerehites, a Nation of the Philistines well known in Scripture: the word Cereth being abbreviated into Creth, from which into Crete, and Cretans, is no difficult passage. But in my mind his conjecture is better than his proof. For though it may begranted without inconvenience, that the chief arms of the Philisins, were their Bow and Arrows, as appears 1 Sam. 31. 3. and that the Cretans anciently were expert at those weapons also: yet this concludes no more that the Cretans are of the race of the Philistines, then that almost all Nations else had the same Original; the Bow and Arrows being the ordinary weapons of most people formerly, till custom and experience trained them up to others of a later date, as he himself acknowledgeth in many places of his excellent and elaborate tractates.  
In reference to the heavenly bodies it is situate under the beginning of the fourth Clorate, so that the longest day in Summer is no more than 14 hours and a quarter. And in relation to the earth set in the middle of the Sea, at so even a distance from Europe, Asia, and afric as if naturally designed to be what Aristotle hath pleased to call it, the Lady and Misiris of the Sea. For it is distant from Peloponnesus an hundred miles, as many from Asia the less, and not above 150 from the thores of afric: So verifying that of Virgil, Crete Jovis magni medio jacet insula Ponto. 
Jove's birthplace Crete, a fruitful land,  
In the middle of the Sea doth stand.   
It is in length 270. in breadth 50 miles, in compass about 590. The soil is very fruitful, especially of wines, which we call Muscadels, of which they transport yearly 12000 Butts: together with Sugar-Candie, Gums, Honey, Sugar, Olives, Dates, Apples, Oranges, Lemons, Raisins, Melons, Citrons, Pomegranates. Yet as other Countries of the like hot nature, it is not a little deficient in corn: the most or greatest part of which is yearly brought hither from Peloponnesus.  
The Island is very populous, insomuch that it is thought that upon any sudden occasion, the Signory of Venice can raise in it 60000 men able to bear arms. The people have formerly been good seafaring men; a virtue commaculated with many vices, which they yet retain, as envy, malice, and lying; to which last so infinitely addicted that an horrible lie was called proverbially Cretense mendacium. This fault was aimed at by the Poet Epirnemdes, a native of this Island, whose words thus cited by S. Paul in that to Titus, cap. 1. v. 2. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. 
The Cretans always liars are;  
unruly beasts, of labour spare.  To which this Proverb may be added, viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is to say, There are three Nations whose names begin with the letter K, worse than any others; viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the Cappadocians, Cretans, and Cilicians: though some I know apply this Proverb to the Cities of Corinth, Capua, and Carthage, beginning all with the same letter, and all conceived to be very dangerous to the State of Rome. At this day they are sick of their old diseases, as great Liars, and as idle as ever formerly; covetous withal and very subtle, impatient of labour, and not caring to learn any science perfectly: only well practised in shooting to which accustomed from their youth, and therein thought more expert than the Turks themselves.  
The language generally spoken is the Greek tongue, though the Gentleman and Merchant by reason of their dependence on the State of Venice, speak Italian also. Both languages used also in divine offices, the people being generally of the Communion of the Church of Greece; but the Latin service used also in many places, since the subjection of this Island to the Venetians. Converted first unto the faith by S. Paul the Apostle, who having planted the Gospel of life amongst them, left the watering of it unto Titus, whom he made Bishop of this Isle, recommending unto him the care of the Churches there, with power of Ordination and Eoclesiaticall censure, as appears clearly by the Text. Which power that it belonged to Titus as Bishop, and not their Evangelist only, is attirmed expressly, not only by the subscription of the said Epistle, where he is plainly called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the first Bishop of the Church of the Cretians: but by the concurrent testimonies of Euseb. Eccl Hist. l. 3. c 4 S. Ambr. in praefa●. Ep. ad Tit. S. Hieron. in Tit. c. 1. v. 5. and in his tract the Scriptor. Ecclesiasticis. Theodoret cited by Oecumen. in praefat. ad Ep. Tit. Oecumenius himself in Tit. 1. and finally by Theophylact, in his preface to the same Epistle. All which in plain terms call him Bishop, and the Bishop of Crete, according to that sense and meaning of the word Episcopus, as it was used in their times distinct from Presbyter. The Church hereof whilst wholly under the Greek Patriarches was governed by four Archbishops, and 21 Bishops: but since the subjection of this Island to the State of Fence, there is but one Archbishop, which is he of Candie the chief City, and eight Bishops only; besides the titular Patriarch of Constantinople, who hath here his residence: some Prelate of the Latin Church having been always honoured with that empty title ever since the recovery of that City from the Western Christians.  
Famous was this Island amongst the Ancients for many things, memorised both by the Poets and old Hastonians. For here reigned Saturn in the first ages of the World, father of Jupiter, born here and secretly nursed in the hill called Ida. For seeing that by the compact betwixt Saturn and his brother Titan, Eaturn was to enjoy the Kingdom for his own life only, but all his male children to be murdered as soon as born: Jupiter, by the care of his mother Cybele, was conveyed away, and secretly nursed in Mount Ida, as before was said: the crying of the Infant, being drowned by the noise of loud-sounding Cymbals, purposely used by his Rockers to avoid discovery. Whence afterwards the Corytantes or Pricsts of Cybele, used in her sacrifices the like musical instruments, continually sounding and withal shaking of their heads (like Fiddlers) in an antic and ridiculous manner. Alluding whereunto thus the Poet Claudian. 
Non te progenitum Cybeleius aere can●ro  
Lusiravit Corybas.  That is to say▪ 
No Cybeleian Corybas that day  
That thou wast born, did on his Cymbal play.  Here also lived Minos and Radamanthus, whose laws were after imitated in the prime Cities of Greece; and who for their equity on earth are feigned by the Poets to be (together with Aeaeus) the Judges in Hell. In this I●land also lived the lewdly-lustfull Pasiphae, wife of Minos, who is fabled by the Poets (if it be a fable) to have doted on a white Bull, who, they say, begat on her the Minotaur: Daedalus having framed for her an artificial cow into which she conveyed herself, and by that means obtained her desire. The table is thus expounded, that Pasiphae was in love with Taurus, one of Minos' Secretaries; whose company by the pandarism of Daedalus she enjoying, was delivered of two sons; one called Minos; the other, Taurus. And whereas it is said, that the Minotaur was slain by Theseus, like enough that the annual tribute of 7 children which the Athenians paid to Minos, was laid up in some prison; Minos and Taurus being the keepers or jailors. As for the action of Pasiphae, I think it not altogether impossible to be true: considering how Domitian, to verify the old relation, exhibited the like beastly spectacle in his amphitheatre at Rome: for thus saith Martial: 
Junctam Pasiphaen Dictaeo, credit, Tauro  
Vidimus: accepit fabula pris●a fidem.  
Nec se miretur (Caesar) longaeva vetustas,  
Quicquid fama canit, donat arena tibi.  
The fable's proved a truth, our eyes did see  
The Cretan Bull sport with Pasiphae.  
What cause hath then antiquity to glory?  
We saw it done, she only heard the story.   
Finally, here was the so much celebrated Labyrinth, made by Daedalus for the including and safe keeping of the Minotaurus; so full of various windings and turnings, that when any one was got to the end thereof it was impossible for him to come out but by the help of a clew of thread. By this Minotaur (half a man half-bull) the children of the Athenians paid yearly to Minos in way of tribute are said to be murdered; till killed by Theseus' son of Aegeus King of Athens, with whom Ariadne the daughter of Minos falling in love taught him a means to kill the Monster, and gave him the clew of thread before spoken of, to conduct him out again: the moral or history whereof hath been shown before. Nor must it be forgotten, that Strabo the Geographer who flourished in the time of Tiberius Caesar was of Cretan parents (though born in the City of Amasia, in the Realm of ●ontus) which adds unto this Island as much true renown, as any of the fictions or stories, (be they which they will) of the former times.  
Things most observable at the present are these that follow, I that it breeds no serpents nor venomous worm, or ravenous or hurtful creature; so that their sheep graze very securely without any Shepherd: 2 If a woman bite a man any thing hard, he will hardly be cured of it; which if true, than the last part of the privilege foregoing (of breeding no hurtful creature) must needs be false. 3 They have an herb called Alimos, which if one chew in his mouth he shall feel no hunger for that day, if Quade may be believed who speaks it. 4 Here is (besides many other medicinal herbs) that called Dictamum or Dictamnos, of especial virtue against poison, either by way of prevention or present cure; peculiar only to this Island: it affordeth great store of Laudanum, a juice or gum forced with incredible labour out of a certain tree Cisto, of which the mountains yield abundance, good to cause sleep, if moderately and carefully taken, but if not very well prepared and taken with moderation, it brings the last sleep upon a man, out of which not to be awakened, till the sound of the last Trumpet raise him.  
Chief Mountains of it, 1 Ida, now Psiloriti, situate in the midst of the Island, begirt about with many fair and pleasant villages, sheltered by it from the violence of wind and Sun, the hill being so high that from the top hereof both sides of the Island may be easily seen. Here Jupiter is said to have been secretly nursed, from hence called Idaeus. And at the bottom of it the Cretans use to show some tracts of the ancient Labyrinth, being indeed no other than the ruins of some larger Quarry: the Labyrinth made by Daedalus being so defaced in the time of Pliny, that he knew not where to find any ruins of it. 2 Dicte, now called Sethia, in some places Lasti, so high that all the winter long it is covered with snow; yet all the sides thereof garnished with Cypress trees, a mountain of such such same, that the whole Island sometimes had the name of Dictaea, the City Dictinna, the Promontory Dictynnae●●n, and the Herb Dic●amnos, all seeming to take name from hence. 3 Leuci, a long chain of hills so named from the whiteness of them, now called De Marara and by some La Spachia.  
Rivers of any eminence here are few or none. The principal of those that be are 1 Melipotamus, 2 Scasinus, 3 Epicidnus, and 4 Divotro towards the North; 5 Populiar towards the East, and 6 Limens towards the West: none of them navigable, or capable of Ships of burden, scarce of little Barks. But that defect supplied by the neighbouring Sea, which affordeth many Creeks and Bays, some capacious Havens, and great store of fish, among which a kind of bearded mullet reckoned among the delicacies of the ancient Romans. By the convenience of which Harbours, their Fish-trade, and the situation of it in the midst of the Sea; the people anciently were esteemed so good Seafaring men, that when the people of those times did tax a man with any incredible report, they used to say, Cretensis nescit pelagus, meaning thereby the matter to be as improbable as for one of Crete to be no Sailor.  
In former times there were reckoned in this Island an hundred Cities, thence called Hecatompolis, of which about 40 were remaining in the time of Ptolemie: for so many of their names he gives us. Those of most note were 1 Gnossus, the seat-royal or Court of Minos, whence Ariadne, the daughter of Minos, had the name of Gnossis; in former times called Ceratus, from a little River of that name running not far off. 2 Cydon, or Cydonia, a Midland City (as the former) memorable for an excellent kind of Apple, which the Latins called Poma Cydonia, amongst whom they were in great request, as they are at this day, (though by the name of Adam's apples) amongst the Turks, the most ancient of all the Cities of Crete, many of which were at first Colonies of this; for which reason it was called commonly mater urbium. 3 Eleuthera, as Ptolemie, Erythraea, as the printed copies of Florus, corruptly call it, one of the first Cities taken here by the Romans. 4 Miletum, mentioned by Strabo, though omitted by Ptolemie, the place in which S. Paul left Trophimus sick, as is mentioned 2 Tim. 4. 20. which happened when the Apostle hovered about that coast, as is said Act. 27. 7, 8. etc. For that it could not be that Miletum to which he congregated the Elders of Ephesus, appeareth by his being at Jerusalem, Act. 21. 19 and other circumstances of the story. 3 Cortyna, nigh to which stood the Labyrinth made by Daedalus: memorable also for a reed, growing on the River Lenaeus, (necre to which it stood) of which they made their strongest Arrows, by Virgil, Aeneid. 11. called Spicula Cortynia, as also for a light garment much used by Hunters, which Claudian calls Cortyniam vestem, apparelling Diana the great Huntress with it. 6 Dictamum, as Ptolemie, or Dictynna, as Pliny calls it, so named from the hill Dicte, near to which it is situate; one of the chief Cities of the North parts of this Island; as 7 Ampelas, so named from its plenty of vines was upon the South. 8 Minoa a Port town (now called Altomara) so named from Minos, in the East; and 9 Corytus on a Promontory of the same name in the West side of it.  
But these and almost all the rest spoken of by Ptolemie, being so destroyed by time and wars, that the ruins of them are hardly visible, we must behold it in the present condition and estate thereof: divided into four parts or Provinces, according to the names and number of the four chief Cities, that is to say, 1 Sittia, 2 Candie, 3 Rhetimum, and 4 Canea.  
In the first part called SITTIA, lying towards the East, are 74 Villages, and but 17 Parishes, of which six only are of the Church of Rome, the residue holding the Communion of the Church of Greece; the principal whereof are 1 Sittia or Cytia, conceived by some to be the Cisteum of Ptolemie, a small Town, but populous and very well fortified. 2 Gerapetra betwixt Sittia and Candie, seated on the Sea side on a lofty rock, at the bottom whereof is said to be a dangerous whirl-pit, supposed to be the Panormus of Ptolemie. 3 S. Macor, the dwelling place of one of the Bishops of the Latins.  
2 In the second part hereof called the Territory of CANDIE, lying directly West of Sittia, are reckoned 465 Towns and Villages, making up amongst them 99 Parish Churches; whereof 77 are of the Communion of the Church of Greece, the other 22 only of the Church of Rome. Of these the principal, 1 Candia, an Archbishops See, the Metropolis or head City of the Island, which takes name from hence; situate on the North-coast hereof towards the Aegean, beautified with a safe and commodious Haven, and fortified so strongly, that it seems impregnable; affirmed by some to be the Matium of the Ancients; but I find no such place in Ptolemie, or in Ortelius his Thesaurus. The City fair and large, built for the most part of free stone, with low roofs after the manner of Italy, the streets broad and spacious: from whence a fair and pleasant plain leadeth to a place called the Cave of Minos, reported by the common people to be the Sepulchre of Jupiter. 2 Malvisin, 3 Themene, Castell novo, 5 Bonifacio, 6 Belvedere, 7 Mirabello, of which little memorable.  
3 In the third part, being the territory of RHETIMO, lying Northwest of the territory of Cantie, are accounted 265 Towns and Villages, making up 44 Parishes, whereof 36 are Grecians, and but 8 of the Latins. The chief of which are 1 Rhetimo in the shore of the Northern Sea, as 〈◊〉, is, well fortified, and a Bishops See; but not else observable. 2 Milopotamo, an Episcopal See also, so called of the River M●lipotamos, on which it is seated. 3 Agistiman, 4 Mandrus, 5 Lappa, hardly worth the naming.  
4 In the fourth and last part hereof, being the territory of CANEA, taking up all the West of the Island, are contained 240 Towns and Villages, distributed into 47 Parishes: of which 33 are of the Greek Church, and the 14 remaining of the Church of Rome. Those of most note are 1 Canea, built by a Colony or Plantation of Venetian Gentlemen on the North Coast also, supposed to stand in the same place where once Cydon did; second to none but Candie for wealth and beauty, but far before it for the commodiousness of the port, commonly called Porto della Suda, capable of more than a thousand good Galleys at a time, and therefore strongly fortified with two Citadels or Castles, on each side of the Haven, one; as the door and entrance of the country. 2 Chisamo, in Latin called Cysamum, old and decayed, the walls thereof only holding good against the ruins of time, situate in a low moorish place towards the Aegean. 3 Selino, built upon an hill on the Seaside, opposite to Chisame. 4 Sfachia or Spachia, situate on the foot of the mountains, of old called Leuci, now della Spachia from this town: unwalled, but fortified with a Castle, built for a place of refuge against the incursions of such Pirates as annoyed the Coasts; in which the Governor for this part hath his chief abode. By which account it will appear that in the whole Island are no more than 1044 Towns and Villages, 207 Parish Churches: of which there be but 48 which are accounted Members of the Church of Rome, the residue, 159 in number, retaining their Communion with the Church of Greece.  
As for the story of this Island, we can ascend as high as the times of Saturn, for his Antiquity affirmed to be the son of Uranus and Vesta, or of Heaven and Earth: who better favoured by his mother, obtained the Kingdom of Crete, his elder brother Titan being quite excluded. Here-upon wars arising betwixt the Brethren it was ordered thus, that Saturn for his own life should enjoy the Kingdom, which after his decease should return to the Titans: and for performance of this contract the sons of Saturn to be strangled assoon as born. But Cybele the wife of Saturn unawares to her husband, preserved first Jupiter, and after others of her sons, which coming to the knowledge of Titan and his sons, they made war against Saturn, but in conclusion were subdued by the aid of Jupiter: whence grew the Fable of the Titans warring against the Gods, Saturn and Jupiter his son, being after reckoned in that number. The Titans being vanquished a new war arose betwixt Saturn and Jupiter, occasioned only (as many unnatural wars since these times have been) by fears and jealousies: which ended at the last in the flight of Saturn, Jupiter became sole King of Crete, reigning there in great power and honour till the time of his death; and dying was interred at Gnossus, with this inscription or Epitaph in old Greek letters 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is to say, Jupiter the son of Saturn. After his death, worshipped by the blind Gentiles, as the chief of their Gods, and honoured frequently with the title of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the father both of Gods and men, though most incongruously and absurdly, as Lactantius noteth, there being many thousands living, in and before the times of Saturn, when Jupiter was yet unborn. But to proceed, he being dead, Minos begotten by him on Europa, succeeded here: who wisely taking the advantage which the convenient situation of the Island gave him, made himself master of the Seas; and afterwards enlarged his Dominions by the conquest of the Megarenses and Athenians, upon which last he imposed amongst other hard conditions, a tribute of seven male children yearly, to be kept as hostages; determined after three years by the valour and good fortune of Theseus. But Minos being slain in Sicil, and his posterity extinct, the Cretans would no longer admit of Kings, but governed themselves after the manner of a Commonwealth or Free-estate: the Laws and Ordinances whereof first devised by Minos, were of such esteem, that they were much imitated by Lycurgus, and are at large described by Aristatle in the second Book of his Politics, ch. 8. Under this government it continued till the Romans having taken in all the rest of Greece, picked a quarrel with them. For though it was pretended that they had been aiding unto Mithridates in his war against them, yet Florus states the matter rightly, affirming that the war was undertaken on no other ground, but sola nobilem insulam vincendi cupiditate, a covetous desire only of subduing such a wealthy Island. And to this war they went with so proud a confidence, that M. Antony who commanded in it, carried more chains with him to bring home his Prisoners, than Arms to conquer them. An-insolence which he paid right dear for, his navy being vanquished by the Cretans, the bodies of his slain soldiers hanged upon the Ma●●s, and himself perishing in the action, by a fit of sickness. 〈◊〉 who succeeded him in that charge went on more successfully, first taking Gnossus, Eleuthera, (or Erythraea, as Florus calls it) and Cydonia, their principal Cities; and not long after all the Island: using the vanquished Islanders with such inhumanity, that most of them poisoned themselves to avoid his cruelty: rewarded with no other honour for so great a victory, then that he got the surname of Creticus; his Triumph being denied by the faction of Pompey, against whose will he had put himself upon that service. Thus added to the Roman Empire it was united unto Cyrenaica by Augustus Caesar, both making up one Province only, governed by a Proconsul, till the death of Nero: afterwards separated from it, but the time I find not. During the reign of Constantine, in 36 years together here fell no reign, so that this Island was in a manner wholly desolated. But Helena the mother of Constantine having obtained rain for it by her prayers to God, it was again new-peopled by several Colonies brought out of Egypt, Syria, Greece, and the parts adjoining. By Constantine made a Province of the diocese of Macedonia, it continued a member of the Eastern Empire till the time of Michael Balbus, when subdued by the Saracens: from whom recovered under the more fortunate conduct of Nicephorus Phocas, who came unto the Empire, anno 963. In the division of the spoil amongst the Latins it was first given to Boniface marquis of Montferrat, by whom surrendered willingly to the State of Venice, who had a mind to be possessed of all the Islands of that Empire: he being recompensed with the Kingdom of Thessaly, the fair and wealthy City of Thessalonica, and many towns and territories in Peloponnesus. Under that State it still continueth, in vain attempted by Selimus the second, in the year 1571. at what time he invaded and conquered Cyprus: and gallantly defended for this year last passed, against all the forces of Ibrahim the late Grand Signior. What the success of this war will be we shall see hereafter.  
For the defence hereof against the insurrections of the Inhabitants who did at first ill brook the Venetian Government, there are some standing forces kept in constant pay; besides such as are maintained in severrall Garrisons, the City of Canca having in it no fewer than six companies of soldiers; Candy 2000 soldiers, and the lesser Cities proportionably: over which there is set so strong a guard, that a natural Cretan is not permitted to enter weaponed into any of them. And for the preservation of their interest in it from a foreign power, they have furnished the Island with 70 or 80 Galleys for the defence of the shores: and have exceedingly fortified the haven of Suda, with two strong Castles: this haven being capable of more than 1000 vessels, and therefore meritoriously reputed the door and entry into the Country. It is reported that the King of Spain, Philip the second, did offer unto the Venetians for this haven, money more then enough; but it could not be accepted. For though the Spaniard seemed only to intend the retreat and relief of his own Navy, when he should undertake any expedition against the Turk: yet the wise Venetians saw, that by this haven he might at all time's awe, and when he listed, surprise the whole country.  
TWO The other Islands of this Sea, as of lesser note, will be passed over in few words. The first of which is called CLAUD, mentioned, Act. 27. 16. situate on the South west of Crete, by Mela called Gaulos; wherein in Pliny's time was a town or City named Gaudos; now called Golo, with the Island. 2 DIA, now Standia, a very small Island, and of little note. 3 LETVA on the Southeast of Crete, now called Christiana. And 4 AEGILIA, or Aegialia, by Pliny Aeglia, more in the Sea towards Peloponnesus; now called Ceterigo by Sophianus. Of which and others of less note (if less may be) there is no more to be said but that they have always followed the fortunes of Crete, on which they seen to have their principal dependence.   

The ISLANDS of the IONIAN SEA.  
The IONIAN SEA is so called either from one jonius, the son of Dyrachius, whom Hercules having ignorantly killed threw into this Sea, giving that name unto it to preserve his memory, as Didymus is of opinion: or from jona, a Region in the extremity of Calabria, as Solinus, or from I● the daughter of Inachus, as Lycophron the Poet hath it. It containeth all that part of the Mediterranean which lieth from the Aegean or Cretan Seas unto the Adriatic, from which parted about Epidamnum, (otherwise called Dyrrachium) as is said by Ptolemie: or rather at the shooting out of the Acroceraunian hills; as affirmed by Pliny and other writers; and so along the shores of the two Calabria's, to the lsle of Sicil. Chief Isles whereof which pass in the account of Greece, (for of those lying on the coast of Italy we have spoke elsewhere) are 1 the Strophades, 2 Zacynthus, 3 the Echinades, 4 Cephalenia, 5 Corcyra, and 6 Ithaca.  
1 The STROPHADES are two small Islands now called Strivali, lying against Messene in Peloponnesus; famous for nothing but the Harpies, ravenous birds affirmed to have the faces of women, but the talons of Vultures, sent by the offended Gods, (as the fable goeth) for the punishment of Phineus King of Arcadia, who had put out the eyes of his sons by a former wife, at the instigation of their Stepdame. For which so plagued by these Harpies, that he could set no meat on his table wheresoever he was, but these ravenous creatures first devoured it, and then bewrayed the dishes in which it was. Much pitied by the Argonauts, whom he had courteously entertained, they sent Zethus and Calais the winged issue of Boreas and Orythia, who drove them thence, and having pursued them to those Islands turned back again: whence the name of Strophades. Under which fable was contained the sad condition of ignorant or unhappy Princes, devoured by Flatterers, Informers, and false accusers, 
Zant.  by whom their name and Government was made distasteful: till by good counsel they had purged their Courts of such ugly monsters: concerning which Alphonsus King of Naples was used to say, that these Harpies had left the Strophades and dwelled at Rome. They are inhabited only by some few Greek Friars: and in one of them there is a spring of fresh water, which hath his fountain in Peloponnesus, and passing under the Sea ariseth here. The Greek Priests are called Caloirs, quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 boni Sacerdotes. About 30 in number: they wear long hair, never eat flesh, and but seldom fish: feeding usually on herbs, olives, oil and the like. They never go out of the Islands, neither do they, on any occasion, permit women to come amongst them. They all labour for their sustenance, some in tillage, some in vineyards, some in fishing, so that among very many of of them three or four only can read. But of these somewhat hath been said elsewhere already.  
2 ZACINTHUS, or Zant, is 60 miles in compass; and distant from Peloponnesus 20 miles, so called of Zacinthus son to Dardanus. The country is wonderfully stored with oil, wines, currants: of which last they made yearly 150000 Zechines, for their own coffers; and 48000 Dollars, which they pay for custom to the signory of Venice. They were a very poor people when the English used to traffic there first, but now they grow rich and proud. At our Merchants first frequenting the country, they much marvelled to what end they bought so many currants, and demanded whether they used to die clothes, or fat hogs with them; for so they themselves did: but now they have learned a more profitable use of them. Here are also very good salt-pits, fresh water plenty, but little or no wood, and less Corn; their ground being husbanded, as the case stands with them, to their better advantage: but so that many times they are ready to starve, if either the wind or the Sea prove cross unto them, and hinder them from fetching their provisions both of flesh and corn out of Peloponnesus. In which respect they are fain to hold fair Quarter with the Turks considering how easy it is for him to distress them for want of victuals. The Island is much troubled with earthquakes, commonly once a week; in regard whereof they build their houses very low; and when they perceive them coming, the Priests are to ring the Bells, to stir the people to prayers. They have a custom here at weddings to invite many young men whom they call Compeers; of which every one giveth the Bride a Ring. Which done it is accounted as detestable a sin as Incest, to accompany her in any carnal kind; and therefore they choose such to be their Compeers, who have formerly been suspected of too much familiarity with her.  
The Island is very populous and well inhabited, but the people of a spiteful and vindicative nature; not to be reconciled, if angered. It containeth in it 48 Towns and Villages, the chief whereof which passeth by the name of a city is called also Zant, stretched out about the length of a mile on the foot of a mountain, but in breadth not answerable: beautified with a fair and convenient Haven opening towards Greece, safe from the danger of Pirates, though not of winds, capable of great fleets of shipping both for bulk and number; and so frequented from all parts, that he who hath a mind to go out of it, need not stay for a passage: yet notwithstanding this great concourse and resort of strangers, the Town is rather rich, then well built or beautiful: the streets hereof uneven and rugged, and the buildings by reason of the often Earthquakes very low. On the East side of it, on a round steep Mountain, standeth a very strong Castle, a little City of itself, well garrisoned, impregnably fortified, and of a very difficult entrance: which commandeth not the City and Harbour only, but a great part of the Sea adjoining. Upon the wall thereof continually stands a watchman, to descry what shipping is at hand, and hangeth out as many flags as he discovereth Vessels. And over the door of the Town-hall (the better to instruct the Magistrares in their public duty) it is said these verses are inscribed. 
Hic locus 1 odit, 2 amat, 3 punit, 4 conservat, 5 honorat,  
1 Nequitiam, 2 pacem, 3 crimina, 4 jura, 5 probos.  Thus Englished by George Sandys, whence I had the Latin, 
This place doth 1 hate, 2 love, 3 punish, 4 keep, 5 requite,  
1 Voluptuous riot, 2 peace, 3 crimes, 4 Laws, 5 th' upright.   
In matter of Religion, the people being generally Greeks both in birth and language, are for the most part of that Church also; but some adhere unto the Latin; each party having their own Bishop: of which the Greek Bishop hath his Cathedral in the Church of S. Nicolas near unto the Haven (which it giveth name to) and therein a Monastery of Caloires or Monks of Basil; the Latin Bishop hath his residence and Cathedral within the Castle, and therein a Convent of Franciscans. The Jews have in this Town their Synagogue also: but there are not many of them, if not lately increased. In civil matters they are subject to the State of Venice, the Governor hereof (whom they call the Providore) having his residence in the Castle, assisted by a Chancellor, and two Counselors, (all Gentlemen of Venice) whom they change every third year. The fortunes of this Island in former times, and by what means it fell to the Venetians, we shall show anon.  
The ECHINADES are certain little Islands, or rather great rocks, now called Curzolari, famous for nothing but the great battle of Lepanto fought nigh them betwixt the Venetians and the Turks: 
Cephalenia  the Turks having in their Navy 207 sail of ships, the Venetians and their confederates but 145 of all sorts. But it pleased God to give the victory to the weakest: the issue of it being such, that the Turk●s lost 29000 men, who were killed in the fight; 39000 more which were taken prisoners, 140 of their Galleys, 400 piece of Ordinance, and 200 Christian Captives which were then redeemed: the Christians buying this great victory with the death of 7656 men or thereabouts: too great a price, could it have been purchased with a less. A victory obtained not far from the point of Actium, wherein Augustus overcame the Navy of Marcus Antonius; and thereby got the Empire to himself alone, of which before he was but Joint-tenant with his Adversary. So that this place seems to be marked out for a Stage of eminent actions; and that this later Naval fight was but the second part of the first.  
But to return unto these Islands, they stand just against the mouth of the River Achelous; of which thus the Poet, Turbidu● objectas Achelous Echinadas exit; 
Fierce Achelous with the Sea is mixed  
Where the Echinades (great rocks) are fixed.   
These Islands are in number five, feigned by the Poets to be so many Naiads, or Sea-nymphs whom Achelous the River God upon some displeasure Metamorphosed into these Rocky Islands. But the truth is, that they were caused by the dirt and mud, which this River carried with it into the Sea, where at last it settled to firm ground. Of which himself saith thus in Ovid.  
— Fluctus nostrique marisque  
Continuam deducit humum, pariterque revellit,  
In totidem, mediis (quod cernis) Echinadas, undis.  
The fury of the Sea-waves, and mine own,  
Continual heaps of mud, and Earth drew down;  
Which parted by the inter-running Seas,  
Made, as thou seest, these five Echinades.   

4 CEPHALENIA.  
CEPHALENIA, the most populous Island of this Sea, is situated over against Acarnania, part of the Province of Epirus, having on the Southeast Zant, on the Northwest Corcyra or Corsu. In length containing 80 miles, 40 in breadth, the whole compass being reckoned at 160. Once called Tetrapolis from the number of four Cities in it: but three of them were decayed in the time of Ptolemie, who takes notice of no more than one, and that of the same name with the Island. Woody and mountainous in most places; but the mountains intermixed with Valleys, and the Woods with champagne: plentiful in Wheat, Honey, Currans, Manna, Oil, incomparable though not long-lasting Muscadels; as also in Cheese, Wool, Turkeys: and Powder for the dying of Scarlets. So destitute of water, as having no River and not many Fountains, that when their cattle would drink, they gape both morning and evening to receive the dew distilling insensibly from the clouds.  
The people are for the most part Greeks, some few Italians naturals of the Signory of Venice being intermixed: the whole number of the Inhabitants computed at 6000 families; the number of the towns and villages to 200 or thereabouts. The principal whereof I Cephalenia, fortified with good works, and a very strong Castle. 2 Argastolie, an haven town, distant six miles from Cephalon; the Port thereof capable of a sufficient Navy. 3 Sydre, another Port-town also, lying towards the South.  
As for the fortunes of this Island, it was first called Melena; after Teleboas: and being known by that name, was made subject to Thebes, by the valour and good conduct of Amphitryon, the Theban General, by whom Pterelas, the King hereof, was slain inbattell. During which war, and the stay of Amphitryo in this Island it happened that Shafalus, a noble Athenian, having by misadventure killed his wife Procris with an Arrow, which he shot at a Deer, not daring to abide in his own country, fled unto Amphitryo his old friend, then newly victorious over the Teleboans: who pitying his case, made him the Governor of this Island, (since from his name) called Cephalenia. Having continued for some time in the power of the Thebans, it passed together with Zant, and some other Islands into the hands of the Macedonians; from whom in the declining of their affairs, the Acheans got the Isle of Zant, and the Aetolians, Cephalenia: But long they had not held them when the Romans began to look towards Greece, who under colour of setting the Continent at liberty, made themselves masters of both the Islands; that so they might at leisure possess the whole, as in fine they did. In the division of the Empire they fell as parts of Greece, to the Constantinopolitans: and on the taking of that City by the Western Christians, they fell with almost all the rest of the Islands, to the State of Venice: the Governors whereof retaining Corfu, and some others of most importance in the hands of the Signory, permitted these, (as many other of less note) unto private Adventurers. At the conclusion of the peace betwixt Mahomet the Great, and the State of Venice, these two with Neritoes or Leniadia, (spoken of in Episus) were seized on by that Tyrant in despite of that treaty or conclusion; 
Corcyra.  as belonging unto private persons, not to the Republic: recovered afterwards by the Venetians, in the reign of Bajazet the second, in the name of the State, and as parts thereof still governed and defended by them.   

6 CORCYRA.  
CORCYRA (now CORFV) more anciently was called Phaeacia; but took this later name from a Nymph so called, whom Neptune is reported to have here deflowered. Situate over against ●pirus, from which 12 miles distant, stretched out from East to West in the form of a Bow, the length thereof being 54 miles, 24 the breadth; and so the biggest of these Seas. Commodiously seated for the trade and estate of Venice, as the Centre of their Dominion, and command by Sea.  
The Southern parts hereof are mountainous, and defective in water, much subject to be blasted with Southernly winds, and therefore they sow little corn, and plant less Fruits. The Northern parts level and delightful, adorned with whole Groves of Lemmons, Oranges, Figtrees, Olives, and Pomegranates; enriched with plenty of grain, abundance of Wines, great store of Oil, and Olives, and most excellent Honey. Blessed with a very temperate and healthful Air, made Odoriferous by most pleasant and sweet-smelling fruits; which grow most plentifully in each part hereof. Alcinous, who so courteously entertained Ulysses after his shipwreck, was once king of this Island: whose Gardens answerable to the natural delights and sweetness of it, are so much celebrated by the Poets. One of which thus.  
Quid bifera Alcinoi referam pomaria; vosque  
Qui nunquam vacui pr●distis in aethera, Rami?  
Which may be Englished in these words, 
Why should I name Alcinous fertile ground,  
And trees which never without fruit are found?   
Towns of most note and strength herein, 1 Pagiopoli, 2 Castello S. Angelo, of good esteem in respect of many others, but far short of 3 Corfu, the chief and strongest of the Island, which the Turks have found by their frequent repulses to be impregnable. For it is situate at the foot of a Mountain, on the top of which are built two inaccessible Fortresses as being strongly sensed with a natural Rock. The one is called The old Fortress, and the other, The New: justly esteemed the chief Bulwarks of Venice, whose Trade and Power would soon decay, should these Forts be lost. For which cause the two Governors (for each Fort hath one) are sworn before the State of Venice, never to hold intelligence with one another, by word or writing: lest by the treachery of the one, the other might be wrought also from his faith and duty. Neither is their command here for more than two years; their commission then terminating, and new successors being sent them. The town inhabited for the most part by Grecians, as is all the residue of the Island; beautified with one of the most commodious havens in all the Adriatic, and the residence of an Archbishop, A town of such a public concernment, in regard of the strength and situation, that it is accounted of as the key of Venice, and one of the strongest Bulwarks of Christendom against the encroachment of the Turk. The story of it since dismembered from the Eastern Empire, at the taking of Constantinople by the Latins, we have had before.   

7 ITHACA.  
ITHACA, now called Val de Campare, lieth on the North-east of Cephalenia, being in compass 50 miles: most famous for the birth of Ulysses, the son of Laertes; of which thus the Poet, 
Effugimus scopulos Ithacae, Laertia Regna.  
Et terram altricem saevi exceramur Ulyssis.  
From th' Ithacan Rocks, Laertes Realm we fled,  
And cursed the Land which dire Ulysses bred.   
It was also called Dulichium, or else there was some other Island of that name, not far from Ithaca, whereof Ulysses was also King; who is hence called Dulichius Heros, among the Poets: and in this Taunt of Aiax to him, Dulichius vertex signifieth the head of Ulysses. 
Sed neque Dulichius, sub Achilles casside, vertex  
Pondera tanta feret;  
Achilles helm's too great a weight I trow,  
For weak Ulysses' head to undergo.  But as weak a man as Ajax thought him: he was the Master-wit of Greece, for the times he lived in, and one that did as good service in the war of Troy, as the best swordman of them all. A war to which he went somewhat unwillingly as fearing the sad consequences and events thereof: insomuch that he feigned himself mad, ploughing the shore, and sowing salt in stead of corn. But Palamedes to make trial whether this was real, or but counterfeit only, cast young Telemachus the son of Ulysses before the Plough: which he observing, either drove the Plough besides him, or lifted it over him. Discovered by this means, and engaging with the rest in the Trojan war, he found out the design of Thetis, and brought Achilles to it also; in the course whereof by his wit and courage, he did very good service: associated with Diomedes in the action against Rhesus King of Thrace; and with Palamedes in foraging the Country for provisions. By his policy was the Palladium stolen out of Troy, and consequently the City taken and destroyed; whose fate depended on the preservation of that fatal Relic. After the ending of the war which held out ten years, he was withheld from Ithaca ten years longer by winds and tempests, and the displeasure of the Gods which favoured Troy: in which he saved himself from the enchantments of the Sirens, the allurements of Circe, the cruelty of Polyphemus; and after many dangers came home in safety. A man of so complete a virtue, that Homer maketh him the pattern of a temperate and prudent man, in the Books called Odysseys, (by his name as the Greeks pronounce it) as he doth A chill, in his Iliads, of a complete and perfect soldier.  
The Country is generally very rocky, and barren, exceeding plentiful of Goats, but no Hares live in it: inhabited for the most part by Pirates and exiles, men banished out of civil society, and willingly acknowledging no Superior over them: but subject, if to any, to the State of Venice: which hitherto hath maintained these Islands against the Turks, though many times attempted by them in the most prosperous times of their arms and victories. For the Venetians being gratified at the taking of Constantinople by the Latins, with almost all the Islands of the Aegean and Ionian Seas (as being a people strong in shipping, and so most able to preserve a possession of them:) some of the greatest and most considerable either for their riches or the commodiousness of situation, were furnished with convenient garrisons in the name of the State. The rest they did bestow on the better sort of the Citizens, to be defended and made good at their own costs and charges; who accordingly possessed themselves of one, two, or more of them, as they were of ability to set out their Galleys for the keeping of them: the signory having nevertheless a care of all, and to that end keeping a Fleet at Sea continually under one of their Admirals: whereby they did not only preserve those Seas from the Genoa Pirates, but for long time defended all their Islands also as well against the Greeks, as the Turkish Emperors. But all the Isles of the Aegean being lost to the Turk, except Cythera, and Tenos on the European, and Carpathos, or Scarpanto on the Asian side: they have now only Crete with the Isles adjoining, and those of the Ionian Sea, under their command; and these (but specially the Isle of Crete) endangered at the present by the Turkish Tyrant.  
Thus having took a view of the several Provinces and Isles which belong to Greece, according to the ancient and present state of each particular: let us next take a view of the Grecian Emperors, who have had here their principal residence, and possessed the whole, though for a while their Empire was extended over all the East; as they here follow in this ensuing Catalogue of 

The Constantinopolitan Grecian, or Eastern EMPERORS.  
A. Ch.  
331 1 Constantine, surnamed the Great, having reigned 21 years in Rome, translated his Imperial Seat to Constantinople which himself had founded.  
341 2 Constantius the 3. son of Constantine, in the division of the Empire, had for his partage Thrace, Constantinople, and all the Provinces of the East. After the death of his two brethren he remained sole Emperor, but resided for the most part in the East, a great Patron of the Arians, and as great a Persecuter of the Orthodox Christians.  
366 3 Julian, surnamed the Apostata, son of Constantius, the brother of Constantine the Great; a● first a Christian, afterwards a professed enemy of the Gospel: fortunate in his wars against the Almans, Franks, and other Transalpine Nations, whilst he was a Christian: prodigiously slain in the Persian war, when become a Persecuter.  
368 4 Jovian, or Jovinian, chosen by the army, a religious Prince, made peace with the Persian, and settled the affairs of the Christian Church: who being dead, Valentinian, one of mean birth, but great abilities in war, was elected Emperor.  
368 5 Valens, the brother of Valentinian, made partner in the Empire with him, ruled in Constantinople and the East; Valentinian taking more delight in Rome and the Western parts. A great Patron of the Arian faction, and the first who brought in the Goths on this side of the Danow, whom he placed in the desert parts of Thrace, to the destruction of the Empire and himself to boot.  
382 6 Gratian, the eldest son of Valentinian, succeeded his father in the West, and his uncle Valens in the East; after whose death he left Italy and the West to Valentinian his younger brother. Distressed by the Goths, he made Theodosius partner in the Empire with him, and was treacherously murdered by Andragathius, at the appointment and command of the Tyrant Maximus.  
383 7 Theodosius, a Spaniard born, revenged the death of Gratian on the tyrant Maximus, and of Valentinian the 2. on the traitor Eugenius. He vanquished the Goths, utterly suppressed the Pagan superstitions, which till his time continued even in Rome itself; and strengthened the Church of Christ with good Laws and Ordinances.  
399 8 Arcadius, the eldest son of Theodosius, succeeded his father in the East, as his brother Honorius did in the West: the Roman Empire after this last division of it, being so distracted and torn in pieces, that it was never since united.  
412 9 Theodosius II. son of Arcadius, made peace with the Goths, whom he employed against the Huns and Persians, his more dangerous Enemies, and caused the Ephesine Council to be called against Nestorius.  
454 10 Martianus, Lieutenant to Theodosius, succeeded his Master, and married with Puleheria his Master's sister; he called the Council of Chalcedon against Dioscorus.  
461 11 Leo a Thracian born, elected by the joint consent of the Senate and Soldiery, sitting the Council of Chalcedon; the Acts whereof he approved and ratified.  
478 12 Zeno, the son-in-law and Lieutenant of Leo, sent Theodorick and the Goths into Italy against Odoacer: A tyrant and a great drinker, in one of his drunken fits, buried quick by his Empress. In his time Constantinople was almost wholly destroyed by fire; in which perished amongst other things 120000 Volumes of good Manuscripts.  
494 13 Anastasius, a mean Officer, of the Court, by the power and favour of the Empress created Emperor; a great Patron of Eutyches; yet fortunate in his wars against the Persians and Arabians. In his time Constantinople besieged by the Scythians, was likely to have fallen into great distress, i● Proclus, a famous Mathematician, like another Archimedes, had not fired their Galleys.  
521 14 Justin the son of a Thracian shepherd, and Captain of the Guard unto Anastasius, a catholic Prince, and Patron of the Orthodox Clergy, whom he called from banishment.  
528 15 Justinian, the sister's son of Justinus, with whom first consort in the Empire, recovered afric from the Vandals, by Belisarius, and Italy from the Goths by Narses: and finally reduced the laws of Rome into form and method.  
566 16 Justin II. nephew of Justinian, instituted the Exarchate of Ravenna, and lost a great part of Italy to the Lombard's. Unable of himself to oppose the Persians, he chose  
577 17 Tiberius, one of his chief Commanders to be consort with him, who afterwards succeeded in the sole command.  
584 18 Maurice, a Cappadocian born, fortunate in his wars against the Persians, from whom he recovered Mesopotamia in the time of Tiberius; by whom at his return married to Constantine his daughter, and declared his successor. Refusing to ransom some of his soldiers, taken prisoners by Caganus King of Avares, he lost the affections of his army.  
604 19 Phocas, a common soldier, in a military tumult chosen Emperor, murdered the Emperor Mauritius, with his wife and children; and made Pope Boniface supreme Bishop or head of the Church: slain in a popular tumult by the common people for his lusts and cruelties.  
611 20 Heraclius, a noble man of Constantinople, chosen by the general consent repaired the ruins of the Empire, vanquished the Persians, recovered Jerusalem out of their hands, and brought home the Cross unto Constantinople in triumphant manner, whence the feast called Exaltatio crucis, Septemb. 14. In his time Mahomet began to disperse his dotages.  
641 21 Constans or Constantine II. son of Heraclius, unfortunate in his wars against the Saracens, who prevailed in all places; picking a quarrel with the Romans he defaced Rome, robbing it of all the choicest Ornaments, which the Goths and other barbarous people had left: and ransacking the Isle of Sicil, was there slain by the women.  
670 22 Constantinus III. son of the former Constantine, from his long or early beard surnamed Pogonatus, repulsed the Saracens from Constantinople, but could not hinder the Bulgarians from passing over the Danow.  
687 23 Justinian II. son of Constantine the 3. subdued Mesapotamia, Armenia, and some part of Persia; forcing the Saracens to sue for peace, and become his tributaries. Against whom Leontius on the one side, and Absimarus on the other, severally taking arms were declared Emperors; Justinian taken by Leontius, hath his nose cut off, and his person committed to custody: but making an escape, by means of Trebellin King of the Bulgarians, recovered his Imperial dignity; and being too violent in the pursuit of his revenge, was finally murdered at the Altar by the command of  
713 24 Philippicus Bardanes, Admiral of his Navy, elected Emperor by the Soldiers, a great enemy of Images, which he caused to be cast out of the Church: whereby incurring the displeasure of  
715 25 Anastasius II. called also Artemius, his principal Secretary, who thrust himself into the Empire; forced to relinquish it by that army which he had raised against the Saracens: in which tumult the City of Constantinople was sacked and spoiled.  
717 26 Theodosius III. made Emperor in this tumult by the soldiers, hearing of the approach of Leo, Commander of the Eastern Armies, resigned the Empire, and took Orders to preserve his life.  
718 27 Leo Isauricus, in whose time Galiph Zulciman besieged Constantinople the space of three years: and when by cold and famine 300000 of the Saracens were slain, they desisted. At this siege was that fire invented, which we for the violence of it, call wild fire; and the Latins, because the Greeks were the Authors of it, Graecus ignis: by which the Saracens ships were not a little molested. He was also a great Enemy to images, for which cause hated by the Pope and Clergy of Rome, who gave him thereupon the nickname of Iconomachus.  
741 28 Constantinus IV. son of Leo, surnamed Copronymus, for that when he was baptised, he bewrayed the font; followed his father's zeal in removing images, which created him much trouble, one Artabardus being chose Emperor against him, but at last defeated.  
777 29 Leo III. son of Constantine Copronymus, commonly called Leo the 4. (Leontius the usurper (as I conjecture) being reckoned for one) an enemy of Images, and fortunate in his wars against the Saracens.  
782 30 Constantine V. the son of Leo and Irene, first governed the Empire with his Mother; by whom at last supplanted, and deprived of sight, he died of melancholy.  
798 31 Irene wife of Leo the 3. first consort with Constantine her son, and afterwards sole Empress of Constantinople: for her better support in which estate she sided with the Popes of Rome, and called the second Council of Nice for defence of Images. In her time Charles, surnamed the Great, was by the Pope and people of Rome created Emperor of the West. For the Pope's knowing their own greatness to grow out of the ruins of the temporal power, committed the Empire of the West unto the French Princes: whereby the Greek Emperors became much weakened; and the French being the Pope's creatures, were in tract of time brought to their devotion. In following times, when Frederick Barbarossa was by Pope Alexander the 3. pronounced non-Emperour; Emanuel of Constantinople sued for a re union of the Empires: but the crafty Pope returned this answer, Non licere illi conjungere, quae majores ejus de industria disjunxerunt: Let no man presume to join, what the God of Rome, the Pope, hath put asunder.  
803 32 Nicephorus a Patrician, made Emperor by the soldiers, persuaded that Irene had made choice of him to be her successor, slain in a pitched field against the Bulgarians.  
812 33 Michael, surnamed Curopalates from his office, (the Mayor of the Palace as it were) husband to Procopia the daughter of Nicephorus, assumed the Empire: which finding his own weakness, he did soon relinquish, and betook himself unto a Monastery.  
814 34 Leo V. surnamed Armenius from his Country, General of the horse to Michael, demolished the images which his predecessor had set up; slain in the Church during the time of divine service.  
821 35 Michael II. surnamed Balbus, having murdered Leo, assumed the Empire; unfortunate in his government, and died of madness.  
830 36 Theophilus, the son of Michael Balbus, an enemy of images, like his father, and as unfortunate as he; losing many battles to the Saracens, at last died of melancholy.  
842 37 Michael III. son of Theophilus, first with his mother Theodora, who took unto herself the supreme command; and after of himself sole Emperor; his mother being made a Nun.  
866 38 Basilius, surnamed Macedo, from the place of his birth, made consort in the Empire by Michael the son of Theophilus, whom he basely and treacherously murdered; killed casually by a Stag.  
886 39 Leo VI for his learning surnamed Philosophus, the son of Basilius, a vigilant and provident Prince; most of his time, with variable success spent against the Bulgarians.  
912 40 Constantine VI commonly called the VII. son of Leo Philosophus, first under his uncle Alexander, next under Zoe his mother, and after under Romanus Lacopenus, governed the Empire: by which last so miserably depressed that he was fain to get his livelihood by painting. But Lacopenus being deposed and turned into a Monastery by his own sons, Consiantine at last obtained his rights, and restored learning unto Greece.  
961 41 Romanus, the son of Constantine.  
963 42 Nicephorus, surnamed Phocas, first Governor or Protector to the young Emperor Romanus; after whose death created Emperor by the army, he recovered Antioch, Cilicia, and the greatest part of Asia minor from the power of the Saracens; slain in the night by John Zimisces, his wife Theophania being privy to it.  
971 43 John Zimisces, Emperor in the place of Nicephorus Phocas, governed the Empire better than he did obtain it; vanquishing the Bulgarians, Rosses, and others of the barbarous Nations: and left it at his death to the sons of Romanus.  
977 44 Basilius II. surnamed Porphyrogenitus, as many of the Emperors had been before him, in regard that at their births they were wrapped in purple (which the Greeks call Porphyry) the Imperial colour: subdued the Bulgarians, and made them Homagers to the Empire.  
1027 45 Constantinus, VII. or VIII. brother of Basilius, and with him partner in the Empire; after whose death he governed three years by himself, but did nothing memorable.  
1030 46 Romanus II. for his prodigality surnamed Argyropolus, husband of Zoe the daughter of Constantine the 8. drowned in a Bath by the treason of his wife and her Adulterer.  
1035 47 Michael IV. surnamed Paphlago from his Country, first the Adulterer, and afterwards the husband of Zoe: but died very penitent.  
1042 48 Michael V. surnamed Calaphates, a man of obscure birth, adopted by Zoe, whom he deposed from the Government, and turned into a Monastery. Out of which being again taken, in a popular tumult, she put out the eyes of Calaphates, and being then 60 years of age, bestowed both the Empire and herself upon  
1043 49 Constantine IX. surnamed Monomachus, formerly husband to a Niece of Romanus the 2.  
1055 50 Theodora, sister unto Zoe, after the death of Constantine, managed for two years the affairs of the Empire with great contentment to all people. But grown in age surrendered it to  
1057 51 Michael VI surnamed Stratioticus, an old but military man, deposed within the year by  
1060 52 Isaacius, of the noble family of the Gomneni; valiant, of great courage and diligent in his affairs: which having managed for two years, he left it at his death, with consent of the Senate and people, to  
1063 53 Constantine X. surnamed Ducas, a great Justicier, and very devout, but exceeding covetous, whereby he became hated of his subjects and contemned by his enemies.  
1071 54 Romanus III. surnamed Diogenes, married Eudoxia the wife of Constantinus Ducas, and with her the Empire. Took prisoner by the Turks, and sent home again, he found a faction made against him; by which Eudoxia was expelled, himself at his return deposed, and so died in exile.  
1075 55 Michael VII. the son of Constantinus Ducas, surnamed Parapinacius, by reason of the famine which in his time happened, made Emperor in the aforesaid tumult. But being found unable for so great an honour (the Turks prevailing in all places) he was deposed again and put into a Monastery.  
1081 56 Nicephorus II. surnamed Boli●nates, of the house of the Phocas, succeeded in the place of Parapinace, deposed within 3 years by the Comneni.  
1084 57 Alexius Comnenus, son of the Emperor Isaacius Comnenus, obtained the Empire: in whose time the Western Christians with great forces prepared for the recovery of the Holy Land. Of whose purposes being very jealous he denied them passage through his Country; in the end forced to find them victuals and other necessaries.  
1113 58 Calo-Johannes, the son of Alexius, had a good hand against the Turks, from whom he took Laodicea and some other places of importance. He also vanquished the Scythians or Tartars passing over the Ister, most of which he either slew in battle, or sold as captives; permitting the remainder to abide on this side that River. He also conquered the Servians and Bulgarians, transporting many of them into Bythinia.  
1142 59 Manuel, or Emanuel, the younger son of Calo-Joannes, an underhand enemy to the Western Christians, and an open enemy to the Turks: by whom entrapped in the dangerous straits of Cilicia, and his Army miserably cut off; he was on honourable terms permitted to return again.  
1180 60 Alexius II. son of Manuel, deposed and barbarously murdered by Andronicus, the Cousin Grman of his father, with his wife and mother.  
1183 61 Andronicus Comnenus, confined by Manuel to Oenum in Paphlag●nia, by reason of his dangerous and ambitious practices; after his death, pretending to reform the State came unto Constantinople: first made Protector, afterwards consort in the Empire with young Alexius. Whom having barbarously slain, and got the Empire to himself, he was not long after cruelly torn in pieces in a popular tumult.  
1185 62 Isaacius Angelus, a noble man of Constantinople, and of the same Comnenian race, designed to death by Andronicus, was in a popular election proclaimed his successor; deposed by Alexius his own brother, and his eyes put out.  
1195 63 Alexius Angelus deprived his brother, and excluded his Nephew from the Empire; but it held not long.  
64 Alexius Angelus II. son of Isaac Angelus, who being unjustly thrust out of his Empire by his uncle Alexius, had recourse to Philip the Western Emperor, whose daughter Mary he had married: who so prevailed with Pope Innocent the 3. that the army prepared for the Holy Land, was employed to restore him. On the approach whereof Alexius the Usurper fled, Alexius the young Emperor is seated in his father's throne, and not long after slain by Alexius Dueas. In revenge whereof the Latins assault and win Constantinople, make themselves Masters of the Empire, and divide it amongst them: alloting to the Venetians Candie, many good towns of P●loponnesus, and most of the Islands: to Boniface marquis of Montferrat the Kingdom of Thessaly; too others of the Adventurers other liberal shares; and finally to Baldwin Earl of Flanders, the main body of the Empire with the title of Emperor.    

EMPERORS of the LATINS in CONSTANTINOPLE.  
1200 65 Baldwin Earl of Flanders, first Emperor of the Latins reigning in Constantinople, taken in fight by John King of Bulgaria coming to aid the Greeks, and sent prisoner to Ternova, where he was cruelly put to death.  
1202 66 Henry the brother of Baldwin, repulsed the Bulgarians, out of Greece, and died a Conqueror.  
1215 67 Peter Count of Auxerre in France, son in law of Henry, cunningly entrapped by Theodorus Angelus a great Prince in Epirus, whom he had besieged in Dyrrachium. But of an Enemy being persuaded to become his guest, was there murdered by him.  
1220 68 Robert the son of Peter, having seen the miserable usage of his beautiful Empress, whom a young Burgundian formerly contracted to her, had most despitefully mangled, cutting off both her nose and ears; died of heart's grief as he was coming back from Rome, whither his melancholy had carried him to consult the Pope in his affairs.  
1227 69 Baldwin II. son of Robert by a former wife, under the protection of John de Brenne the titulary King of Jerusalem, succeeded in his father's throne: which having held for the space of 33 years; he was forced to leave it: the City of Constantinople being regained by the Greeks, and the poor Prince compelled to sue in vain for succours to the French, Venetians, and other Princes of the West.   

The EMPIRE restored unto the GREEKS.  
1260 70 Michael VIII. surnamed Palaeologus, extracted from the Comnenian Emperors, Emperor of the Greeks in the City of Nice, most fortunately recovered Constantinople; the town being taken by a party of 50 men secretly put into it by some Country labourers under the ruins of a mine. Present in person at the Council of Lions, at the persuasion of the Pope, he admitted the Latin Ceremonies into the Churches of Greece; for which greatly hated by his subjects, and denied the honour of Christian burial.  
1283 71 Andronicus II. vexed with unnatural wars by his Nephew Andronicus, who rebelled against him.  
1328 72 Andronicus III. first partner with his grandfather, afterwards sole Emperor.  
1541 73 John Palaeologus, son of Andronicus the 3. in whose minority Contacuzenus his Protector usurped the Empire, and held it sometimes from him, and sometimes with him, till the year 1357. and then retired unto a Monastery: leaving the Empire unto John, during whose reign the Turks first planted themselves in Europe.  
1484 74 Andronicus IV. the son of Johanmes Palaeologus.  
1387 75 Emanuel Palaeologus, the son of the said John, and brother of Andronicus the 4. in whose time Bajazet the sixth King of the Turks did besiege Constantinople; but found such notable resistance that he could not force it.  
1417 76 John II. son of Andronicus the 4.  
1420 77 John III. son of Emanuel Palaeologus, in person at the Council of Florence for reconciling of the Churches; in hope thereby to get some aid from the Western Christians: but it would not be.  
1444 78 Constantinus Palaeologus, the brother of John the 3.   
In whose time the famous City of Constanitinople was taken by Mahomet the Great, 1452. the miserable Emperor, who had in vain gone from door to door to beg or borrow money to pay his soldiers, (which the Turks found in great abundance when they took the City) being lamentably trod to death in the throng. Now concerning this Empire of the Greeks, we may observe some fatal contrarieties in one and the same name: as first, that Philip the father of Alexander laid the first foundation of the Macedonian Monarchy: and Philip the father of Perseus ruined it. Secondly, that Baldwin was the first, and Baldwin the last Emperor of the Latins in Consiantinople. Thirdly, that this town was built by a Constantine, the son of Helena, a Gregory being Patriarch: and was lost by a Constantine the son of a Helena, a Gregory being Patriarch also. And fourthly, the Turks have a Prophecy, that as it was won by a Mahomet, so it shall be lost by a Mahomet. So Augusius was the first established Emperor of Rome, and Augustulus the last: Darius the son of Hystaspes, the restorer; and Darius the son of Arsamis the overthrower of the Persian Monarchy. A like note I shall anon tell you of Jerusalem. In the mean time I will present you with a fatal observation of the letter H, as I find it thus versed in Albion's England. 
Not superstitiously I speak, but H this letter still,  
Hath been observed ominous to England's good or ill.  
First Hercules, Hesione, and Helen were the cause  
Of war to Troy; Aeneas seed becoming so outlaws.  
Humbor the Hunn with foreign arms did first the Brutes invade,  
Helen to Rome's imperial Throne, the British Crown conveyed.  
Hengist and Horsus, first did plant the Saxons in this Isle:  
Hunger and Hubba first brought Danes, that swayed here long while.  
At Harold had the Saxon end, at Hardie-Cnute, the Dane:  
Henries the first and second did restore the English reign.  
Fourth Henry first for Lancaster did England's Crown obtain.  
Seventh Henry, jarring Lancaster and York, unites in peace:  
Henry the eight did happily Rome's irreligion cease.  A strange and ominous letter; every mutation in our State being as it were ushered by it.  
What were the Revenues of this Empire since the division of it into the East and West, I could never yet learn. That they were exceeding great, may appear by three circumstances, 1 Zonaras reporteth that the Emperor Basilius had in his treasury 200000 talents of gold, besides infinite heaps of silver and other moneys. 2 Lipsius relateth, how Benjamin a Jew in his discourse of Europe, saith, that the custom due to the Emperors, out of the victuals and merchandise sold at Constantinople only did amount to 20000 crowns daily. 3 We find, that at the sack of Constantinople, there was found an invaluable mass of gold, silver, plate, and jewels, besides that which was hid in the earth. For so the covetous Citizens chose rather to employ their wealth, then afford any part of it to the Emperor: who with tears in his eyes, went from door to door to beg and borrow money, wherewith he might wage more soldiers for the defence of the town.  
The arms of the Empire were Mars, a cross Sol between four Greek Beta's of the second: the four Beta's signifying, (as Bodin saith) 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  
It may perchance be expected that we should here make an additional Catalogue of those Turkish Emperors, who have reigned in Constantinople, since the taking of it: and being they are possessed of Greece and do now inhabit it, that we should here also speak of the Turks themselves, their customs, forces, policies, original, and proceedings. But the discourse of those things we intent to reserve for Turcomania, a Province of Asia, from whence they made their first inundation into Persia, and afterwards into other parts of the world now subject to them, the only Province which retains any thing of their name. And though the Peninsula called anciently Taurica Chersonesus (now part of Tartary Pr●●opensis) be within the bounds of Europe also: yet we will deserre the description and story of it, till we come to the affairs of the Tartars: and will here conclude our discourse of Europe, and prepare for Asia.   
And so much for GREECE, the last of the Provinces of EUROPE.    

A TABLE OF THE LONGITUDE and LATITUDE OF THE CHIEF TOWNS and CITIES Mentioned in this BOOK.  

A   Long. Lat. AMsterdam 27.39 52.40 Antwerp 24.30 51.48 Athens 46.10 40 Ausburg 32.30 48.20 Aulona 51.20 41.30 Arras 24. 51 Anslo 36.30 59.20 
B  BAmberg 39.15 50.10 Belgrade 45 47.40 Bergen 34.16 61.25 Bern 29.45 46.25 Brandenburg 35.30 52.36 Breme 30.20 53.23 Bruges 24.36 51.30 Brunswick 32.40 52.30 Brussels 26.42 51.24 Buda 42 47.20 Boden 52.30 45.30 Bornholm 40.50 55.30 
C  CLeve 29.35 51.58 Constantinople 56 43.5 Confsluentz 27.30 50.30 Constance 28.30 47.30 Copenhagen 34.50 56 Corinth 54.20 39 Colen 27.40 51 Cracow 42.40 50.12 Cephalone 52 38.30 Casan 96.10 35.10 Corfu 42 39.30 
D  DAntzick 45 54.50 Darsaw 63 48.40 Deventer 33.25 51.50 Dort 26 52 Douai 25 51 Dresden 36 51.3 
E  EMden 28.26 53.34 Erford 34.30 51.10 Elsenore 36.30 57 
F  FLensberg 36.40 55 Franeker 27 54 Frankford ad Moen 30 50.30 Frankford ad Oderam 24 52.30 Friburg 20 48.1 
G  GLogaw 43.50 51.25 Gran 42.30 48 Gratz 34 48 Grodesk 56.30 51.30 Gaunt 30.20 50.40 Guesna 42 52.40 Groyningen 32.10 53 
H  HAdersleve 35.5 60.50 Hallar 3 67.14 Halberstat 32.40 52.10 Heidelberg 28 49.35 Hamburg 30 54.30 
I  JEne 34 52 Ingolstad 32.10 48.40 Inspruch 32.50 44.55 Juliers 27.30 52 
L  LArissa 70 33 Liege 22 50.50 Leopolis 52.50 49 Lipsich 30.30 51.20 Lubeck 31.20 54.48 Lucern 29.53 46.42 Lunemburg 32.18 53.27 Luden 26 53 Luxenburg 28 50 
M  MAgdeburg 37.50 52.18 Marpurg 30.10 51 Mentz 27.30 50.30 Metz 27.40 49.9 Madleburg 25 52 Minden 31.30 52.58 Munchen 32.50 48 Munster 29.10 52 Montz 26 51 Moscow 70.30 55.40 Melvin 48 54.50 
N  NAncie 28.45 49.20 Norlingen 33 49 Nurenberg 31.30 49.30 Nimmegen 28 52 Novogrod Magn. 62.50 60.30 Novogrod Infer. 80 55.20 Nicopolis 56.30 40 Negropont 56.10 41 S. Nicolas 69 64 
O  OLmuntz 41 40.30 Osnabrug 29.36 52.29 ●●ant 43.30 57 
P  PRague 39.15 50.10 Preslaw 46 51.10 Pasnaw 42 52.48 Presburg 40 48.26 Plescow 59.10 59 Pechora 66.50 67 Pernow 53.30 58.40 Pl●tzcow 57.30 57.40 
R  RAb 40.35 48.50 Ragusi 44.40 42.30 Rege●berg 32.15 48.59 Rostoch 34.18 54.20 Rustow 72.50 57 Rugen 40.20 55.10 R●ga 53.30 58 Regiment 49.10 55.30 
S  SAltsburg 35.40 47.40 Schalholt 3.14 65.42 Schle●stat 28.6 48.22 Sleswick 31.20 55.15 Spires 27.40 49.20 Stetin 37.40 54 Stockholm 42 60.15 Sibiore 99.20 59.30 Slowada 86.30 58.50 Strasburg 27.50 48.44 Stagira 55.30 43.30 
T  THessalonica 53.40 44.20 Triers 26 49.30 Trent 33.40 45.20 Tubing 30.30 48.40 'tTwere 68.10 57.10 
U  VAlenciennes 26.29 50.10 Ulme 32.30 48.20 Vienna 37.45 48.20 Vilna 54.30 55 Upsal 40.30 60.52 Vsting 79.30 61.30 Vtrecht 27.33 52.10 Vicegrod 61.30 51.30 Vesalia 31.30 51.30 
W  Wiburg 55.58 63.6 Witteberg 35.10 50.55 Wismar 33.30 54.14 Wologda 74.30 60 Worms 28 49.45 Woortzburg 30.10 49.57 Wardhuys 50.30 70.30 
Z  ZAra 46.25 45.40 Zemla Nova 83.30 74  
The End of the second Book.   

The Emendation of the chief Errata in this second Book.  
FOl. 9 l. 14 for Bern r. Pern, 12. 55. for Porter r. Prior, 21. 64. for 142 r. 1421, fol. 22. 7. for Over-water r. Oudewater, ib. 28. for Alemar r. Alkmar, 24. 44. for Soferes, r. Bofereres, 33. 35. for S. Lewis r. Sluys, 45. 62. for battles r. broils, 56. 8. for Halto r. Hatto, 42. 37. for Cretius r. Cetius, 61. 3. for Gebwiser r. Gebwiler, ib. 17. for Malz-munster r. Masz-Munster, 75 30. for Tega r. Teya, 76. 17. for Richard the 3. r. Richard the 1. 78. 22. for Ostaar r. Ottacar, 79. 34. for holy r. whole, 80. 7. for have r. being, 83. 31. for Provinces r. Princes, 93. 15. for Antonius r. Antoninus, 98. 34. for street r. straight, 101. 59 for Woods r. Wo●d, 107. 14. for Persia r. Tartary, ib. 16. for Pasacasons r. Sacasons, ib. 35. for regent r. present, 117. 5. for in time r. infinite, 124. 12. r. also added, 137. 7, 8. d. Knight of the Garter, 152. 3. for pleasure r. displeasure, 157. 4. for son r. successor, 154. 15. for 1600 r. 600. 161. 53. for weak r. weaker, 172. 6. for from r. five 178. 24. for only and r. and only, 179. 62. for 100000 r. 10000, 180. 39 for all the time r. till the time, ib. 44. for all r. at, 183. 59 for ulns r. vines, 187. 66. for Hungari r. Hunugari, 186. 56. for 200 r. 206, 192. 11. d. which ib. 17. d. whole, 193. 52. for East parts with, r. East parts of, ib. 56. for are in it, r. in it, are, 201. 16. for subdued, r. subducted, 206. 12. for The other work, The other was the work, ib. 20. d. up, 210. 412. for Persian r. Asian, 214. 7. for Scominus r. Scombrus, 217. 6. for Cynus r. Cyrus, 221. 11. for Conro r. Coron, 222. 3. for of which r. which of, 224. 29. for mutually r. finally, 225. 65. for this being r. that being, 228. 29. for Macedon r. Modone, 235. 54. for Attica r. Achaia, 237. 57 for into r. up in.   

cosmography. The Third Book CONTAINING THE chorography and HISTORY OF THE LESSER and GREATER ASIA, AND ALL THE PRINCIPAL Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof.  
By PETER HEYLIN.  
JUSTIN. HIST. I. 1. Imperium Asyrii qui postea Sylli dictisunt, annos MCCC tenuerunt. Imperium ab Asyriis ad Medos Arbaces transfert.  
SENECA EPIST. 17. Omnes quae usquam rerum potiuntur urbes, ubi fuerint aliquando quaeretur; & vario exitii genere tollentur.  
LONDON, Printed for Henry Seile, 1652.   


ASIAE Descriptio Nova Impensis HENRICI SEILE Johan Goddard sculp▪ 1652   map of Asia   

cosmography. The Third Book CONTAINING THE chorography and HISTORY of the Lesser and Greater ASIA, And all the principal Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof.  

OF ASIA.  
ASIA is bounded on the West with the Mediterranean, and Aegean Seas, the Hellespont, Propontis, Thracian Bosphorus, and the Euxine Sea; the Palus Maeotis, the Rivers Tanais, and Duina; a line being drown from the first of the two said Rivers unto the other; by all which parted from Europe. On the North it hath the main Scythick Ocean; on the East the Streits of Aman (if such there be) the Indian Ocean, and Mare Deal Zur, by which separated from America: on the South, the Mediterranean, or that part of it which is called the Carpathian, washing the shores of Anatolia; and the main Southern Ocean, passing along the Indian, Persian, and Arabian coasts: and finally, on the South-west the Red Sea or Bay of Arabia, by which parted from afric. Environed on all sides with the Sea, or some Sealike Rivers, except a narrow Isthmus in the South-west, which joins it to afric; and the space of ground (whatsoever it be) betwixt Duina, and Tanais, on the Northwest, which unites it to Europe.  
It took this name, as some will have it, from Asia, the daughter of Oceanus and Thetis, the wife of Japetus & (by him) mother to Prometheus: as others say from Asius the son of Atis, a King of Lydia, from whence that Country first, afterwards all Ana●olia or Asia Minor, and finally, the whole Continent had the name of Asia. Others again (but more improbably) derive the name from Asius the Philosopher, who gave the Palladium unto the Trojans; in memory whereof that Country first, and after the whole Continent did receive this name. But these Originations being very uncertain, Bochartus (out of his great affection to the Punic or Phoenician language) will have it called so from Asi●, a Phanician word, signifying M●aium, or the middle: because Anatolia or the Lesser Asia, which gives name (as he conceiveth) to the Greater also, lieth in the middle, as it were betwixt some parts of Europe and Africa. And so far the Conjecture doth find countenance from some ancient writers, that Asia is said by Pliny to be inter Africam & Europan, to be betwixt Africa and Europe; by Mela, Medium nostris oequoribus excipt, to be embraced in the middle of two Seas (he meaneth Pontus Euxinus and the Mediterranean) and finally, by Eustathius (conceive them all of Anatolia or the Lesser Asia) 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, to have a middle situation betwixt Europe and Africa. But by what name, and on what grounds soever it be called by the Greeks and Latins; it is otherwise, and with better reason called in holy Scriptures by the name of Semia; as being that portion of the world, wherein the whole posterity of Sem had their seats and dwellings: If the observation of Maginus be of any weight.  
It is situate East and West from the 52. to the 169 degree of Longitude: and North and South from the 82 degree of Latitude to the very Aequator; some only of the Islands lying on the South of that 〈◊〉 so that the longest Summers day in the Southern parts is but twelve hours only; but in the most Northern parts hereof for almost four whole months together no night at all. And for a measurement by miles, it stretches in length 5200. and in breadth 4560. miles.  
This Country hath heretofore been had in especial honour, 1. For the Creation of man, who had his first making in this part of the world 2. Because in this part of it stood the garden of Eden, which he had for the first place of his habitation. 3. Because here flourished the four first great Monarchies of the Assyrian, Babylonians, M●d●s and Persians. 4. Because it was the Scene of almost all the memorable actions which are recorded by the penmen of the holy Scriptures. 5. Because that here our Saviour CHRIST was bor●, here wrought he most divine miracles, and here accomplished the great work of our Redemption. 6. And finally because from hence all Nations of the World had their first beginning, on the dispersion which was made by the sons of Noal, after their vain attempt at Babel.  
The chief Mountains of this great Continent, not limited within the bounds of any one Province (for of those we are to speak in their several places) are 1. Mount Taurus, which having its beginning in 〈◊〉 a Province of An●iol●●, passeth directly East-wards to the Indian Ocean: and reckoning in its several wind eggs, & turnings with its spurs and branches every way, is said to be 6250. miles long, and 357 m. broad. This Mountain, or rather Ridge of hills, divideth the Greater Asia (as the Aequator doth the World into North and South: memorable for three difficult passages from the one to the other, the first out of the 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉 into Ciliciae, called Pylae Ciliciae; the second out of Scythia or Tarterie, into Turcomans, called 〈◊〉 Portae; and the third out of Scythia into Persia, called Portae Caspia. Of which and of the whole course of this Mountain, more at large hereafter. 2. Imaus, which beginning near the sheres of the Northern Ocean runneth directly towards the South; dividing the Greater Asia (as the Meridian doth the World) into East and West, and crossing Mount Taurus in right Angles, in or about the Longitude of 140. This on the North of Taurus hath no other name among the Latins, than Imaus only: and by that name divide ● Scythia into Scythia intra Imaum, and Scythia extra Imaum: but by the Tartars is called Altay, by some writer's Belgion. And on the Southside of that Mountain is known in Ptolemy by the name of B●●●go, extending from Mount Caucasus, or some other Branch of the Ta●rus to the Cape of C●mari in the Southern Ocean: supposed by some to be Mount Sephar mentioned, Gen. 10. v. 30. of which we shall say more also when we come into India.  
The estate of Christianity in this vast Continent is in ill condition, discountenanced and oppressed, though no● quite extinguished. For all the great Princes and Commanders of it being either Mahometans or Pagans; the most that can be hoped for of the Christian Faith, is a toleration or connivance: and that not found but with an intermixture of such afflictions as commonly attend discountenanced and disgraced Religions. Yet is not Christianity so overpowered either by Mahomet ●nisme or Paganism,, but that in Asia the Lesser, Syria, Palestine, and Armenia, a great part of the inhabitants do retain the Gospel, under their several Pa●●●●chs and Metropolitans: differing in some few points from one another; but in many from the Church of Rome, with which they hold neither correspondency nor Communion. Nor want there many Christian Churches in the Empire of Persia, nor in those of Tartary and the Indies, anciently planted in those Country's; besides the late increase thereof in the Eastern Islands, by the diligent preaching of the J●suites and some late Factories there settled by the English and Hollanders: of all which I shall write in place convenient.  
In reference to the Roman Empire, whose Dominion did not often extend beyond the River Euphrates, this Continent contained only three Dioceses or Juridical Circuits; that is to say, the Diocese of Pontus, Asia properly so called, and the Ortentall: which with the Dioceses of Thrace and Egypt, were under the command of the Praefec●us Praetorio Orient is; the greatest Officer of power and jurisdiction, next to the Emporours' themselves in the Roman Monarchy. And these three Dioceses contained in them to the number of thirty seven Provinces, viz. the Provinces of Bithynnia, 2. Helenopontus. 3. Pontus' Polemoniacus. 4 Galatia Prim●. 5. Galatta Salutaris. 6. Honorius. 7. Paphlagonia. 8. Cappadocia prima. 9 Cappa 〈◊〉. 10. Armema prima, and 11. Armenia secunda, contained in the Diocese of Pontu●, and governed by the Vicarius or Lieutenant thereof: II. the Provinces of Pamphylia. 2. Lycia. 3. Car●●. 4. 〈◊〉 5. Lycaon●a. 6. Lyd●a. 7. Phrygia Pacatiana. 8. Phrygia Salutaris. 9 Asia specially so called. 10. Hellespont, and 11. the Isles of Anatolia. making up the Diocese of Asia: whereof the three last were governed by a peculiar Officer called the Proconsul of Asia, the others by the ordinary Lieutenant or Vicar●us. III. The Provinces of Isauria. 2. Cilicia prima. 3. Cilicia secunda. 4. Cyprus. 5. Phanices. 6. Ph●●nices Labani. 7. Syria. 8. Syria Salutaris. 9 Palestina prima. 10. Palestina secunda. 11. Palestina Salutaris. 12. Euphratensis. 13. Osroene. 14. Mesopotamia, and 15. Arabia, constituting the Diocese of the Orient, under the Comes Orientis. The rest of Asia subject unto the Parthic or Persian Kings, besides those of India (and of many Regions and Countries not then discovered) was never conquered by the Roman●, and therefore not within the compass of this distribution.  
At this time A●ia stands divided amongst nine great Monarches, that is to say, the Turk commanding all these parts and Provinces which anciently belonged to the Roman Empire: 2. The Persian, ruling in all the Provinces beyond Euphrate●, possessed by the Persian Kings in the time of Alexander the great, or the 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 in the times of the Romans. 3. The Great Cham of Tartary, commanding eve all the North part of Asia, anciently known by the name of Seythia: 4. The King of China governing in that large and populous Country. 5. The King of Barma; whose dominion comprehends all or the greatest part of India beyond the River of Ganges; and the Great Mogor, whose Empire is extended over all India on this side of that River. And some there be who in the descriptions of this great Continent follow this division. But for our parts for the better understanding of the Greek and the Roman stories and the estate of the Assyrian, Babylonian and Persian Monarchies, to which the holy Scriptures do so much relate: we shall consider it as divided into the Regions of 1. Anatolia, or Asia Minor. 2. Cyprus. 3. Syria. 4. Pa●●●● 5. Arabia. 6. Chaldaea. 7. Assyria. 8. Mesopotamia. 9 Turconanian. 10. Media. 11. Per●●. 12. Tartary. 13. China. 14. India, and 15. the Oriental Islands.  

ANATOLIA or ASIA MINOR.  
ANATOLIA or ASIA MINOR, is bounded on the East with the River Euphrates, by which parted from the greater Asia on the West with the Thracian Bosphorus, Propontis, Hellespont, and the Aegean Sea, by which parted from Europe: on the North with Pontus Euxinus, called also the Black Sea, and Alare Maggiore, and on the South by the Rhodiar, Lydian, and Pamphylian Seas, several parts of the Mediterranean. So that this it is a demi-Island or Peninsula, environed on all sides with waters, excepting a small Isthmus or neck of land extending from the head of Euphrates to the Euxine Sea, by which joined to the rest of Asia.  
It was anciently called Asia Minor, to difference it from the residue of this great Continent; afterwards Anatoli●, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the more Eastward situation of it in respect of Greece; and now Anatolia by the Turks, with little deviation from the former name. But here it is to be observed, that as this Lesser Asia was a part of the greater, and the Diocese of Asia a part of Asia the Less: so was Asia properly & specially so called, but a part only of the Asian Diocese; the Lydian Asia a part of Asia properly so called, and the Proconsular Asia but a part of that. The limits of Asia the Less and the several Provinces contained in the Asian Diocese, have been shown already. And as for that part hereof which had the name of Asia properly and especially so called, it contained only the two Phrygia's both the Mysia's, Aeolis, jonia, Lydia, and Caria: which falling unto the Romans by the last Will and Testament of Attalus the last King of Pergamus; were by them made into one Province, and called Asia, after the name of the whole Continent, this being as it were the earnest-penny, to make sure the rest. So witnesseth Strabe, where he saith, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Lib. 13. And for the Lydian Asia, that contained only so much of the Roman or proper Asia, as anciently did belong to Lydia, that is to say, Lydia itself, together with Aeolis and jonia, and some parts of the Greater Mysia adjoining to it. Which as it had originally the name of Asia, from Asia a chief City of it near the foot of mount Tmolw, which both Suidas and the Great Etymologist have taken notice of; before that name became to be communicated to the Greater Continent: so it retained that name to itself in several, distinct both from the Greater and the Lesser Asia, as also from the Asia propria of Ptolemy, and others of the ancient writers. And of this Asia only is it, which the Scriptures speak; both in the Book of the Acts, and the Revelation: the seven Churches mentioned in the one being found in this Lydian Asia; and the passages in the other concerning Asia, not to be understood of any but of this alone. For whereas it is said Acts XVI. That when they had gone throughout Phrygia and the Region of Galatia, and were forbidden of the Holy Ghost to preach the Word in Asia, after they were come to Mysia they assayed to go into Bythinia, and came down to Troas: most clear it is, that neither Galatia nor Bythinia though Regions of the Lesser Asia, nor Phrygia, Mysia, or Troas, all Regions of the Proper Asia, were any part of that Asia which the Scripture speaks of. So also where it is affirmed that upon St. Paul's preaching and disputing for two years in Ephesi●, all they which dwelled in Asia heard the word of the Lord: Acts XIX. V. 10. It is not to be meant of any but the Lydian Asian, whereof Ephesus at that time was the principal City. So also Acts XIX. V. 22. 26. 31. and chapter XX. V. 18. Finally for the Proconsular Asia, which together with Hellespont and the Islet, made up a Government apart, exempt from the command of the Vicarus or Lieutenant of the Asian Diocese, it contained only Aeolis and jonia with the South part of Lydia, or the Country's lying about Ephesus. So witnesseth St. Hierome for the Christian writers, where he affirms that although all the whole Peninsula have the name of the Lesser Asia; Specialiter ubi Ephesus Civitas est, Asia Vocatur, yet more particularly the parts adjoining unto Ephesus have the name of Asia. And this appeareth by the distribution of the Provinces before laid down, where Lydia is reckoned for a Province of the Asian Diocese, distinct from the Proconsular Asia which we now insist on.  
So having cleared our way in regard of the name proceed we next unto the Regions or place thus named, according to the notion in the largest latitude, extending from the Hellespont to the River Euphrates, and from the Euxine Sea to the Mediterranean. By which account it reacheth from the 51. to the 72. degree of Longitude, and from the 36. to the 45. degree of Latitude: the length hereof from the Hellespont to the River Euphrates, being estimated at 630. miles; the breadth from Sinus Issicus in Cilicia to the City of Trabezond, at 210. As for the situation of it in reference to the Heavenly bodies, it lieth almost in the same position with Italy, extending from the middle Parallel of the fourth Clime to the middle Parallel of the sixth: so that the longest summer day in the Southern parts, is about fourteen hours and a half; and one hour longer in those parts which lie most towards the North.  
The temperature of the air is exceeding sound, and the soil generally exceeding fruitful; abounding in most excellent pastures, and anciently very plentiful of all fruits both for use and pleasure, as still it would be were it cultivated as in former times. Once very populous and replenished with goodly Cities, now in a manner waste and desolate, lamenting the destruction of 4000 Towns, some of them destroyed by Earthquakes, quakes, (the falling sickness of most great Cities in the East) but most by war; and have little now to boast of but the comodiousnesse of the Havens which are very many, though most of them but meanly traded, as in a Country ill manured; and of little manufactures.  
The people anciently, especially those of Greek original, and the nations bordering on the Euxine, were very warlike and industrious: the rest, especially the Lydians and those of the greater Phrygia, as idle and effeminate, wholly addicted to their pleasures. All of them at this time affected with the same disease; insomuch that the larkge; (unless compelled thereto by extreme necessities) never enrol their Children in the number of santatres. The greatest part of them generally profess the Christian faith; but overpowered by 〈◊〉 which is here most prevalent: all followers of the Church of Greece, and subject all (except those of 〈◊〉 and Ciliers,) to the Patriarch of Constantinople. And as they are of the Communion of that Church, so they retain the Greek liturgies for Sacred Offices; not so well understood amongst them in former times, when it was more generally spoken there then it is at the present; now overtopped in most places by the 〈◊〉 and Sclavons tongues. And though in former times by reason of the many Greek Colonies planted in this Country, the Conquest of it by Alexander the Great, and the subjection of it to the Syrian Kings of the Maccdon race, that language became generally understood amongst them: in somuch as three of the Greek Dialects, vix. the Doric, the jontar, and the Aeiolick, were spoken here: yet did it never so prevail as to become the Vulgar language of the People, or to extinguish any of the Vulgar tongues: For it is said of Mubridues King of Pentus, that he understood two and twenty languages without any Interpreter; which were no other than the languages of so many Nations subject to himself, whose Dominion was contained for the most part within Asia Minor.  
Principal Mountains of this Country are Hermione in Pontus, Argaeus in Capoadocia, Ida in the Lesser Phrygia, Clympus in Mysis, Tmolus in Lydic; Amamus in Cilicia, and finally Antetaurus and Scordisous in Armenia Minor. Out of which for the most part flow the chief Rivers hereof, that is to say. 1. Iris, (now Casilmach) 2. Thermodor. 3. Halis. (now Ottomangruch) 4. Parthenius (now Dilop) 5. Sangarius, now Sangre, all of them falling into the Euxine Sea. 6. Ascanius. 7. Rhyndacus. 8. Aesapus. and 9 Granicus, passing into the Propontis. 10. Simoeis. 11. Scamander called also Xanthus, ending their short course in the Hellespont. 12. Caicus. 13. Hermus. 14. Caystrus, and 15. Maeander, losing themselves in the Aegean. 16. Calbis. 17. Xanthus' called also Lycus. 18. Limyrus. 19 Cataracts, dischannelling into the Medetirranian; and 20. Melas, adding to the waters of the great River Euphraves. Of most of which we shall speak more particularly in their several places.  
In reference to the State of Rome, it contained the whole Diocese of Pontue, except Armenia the Greater; the Asian Diocese entirely without any exception; and the peculiar jurisdiction of the Proconsul of Asia; together with the Provinces of Isuria and Cilicia, parts of the Diocese of the East. But because the names of many of those Provinces were of new invention, and some of them of as short continuance; we will consider it according as it stood divided anciently, and before the Romans had made any conquests in it, into the Provinces of 1. Bythinia. 2. Pontis. 3. Paphlagonia. 4. Galatia. 5. Cappadocia. 6. Armenia Minor; which (together with Armenia Major) made up though in other names, the Pon●●●● 7. Phrygia Minor. 8. Phrygia Major. 9 Mysia the Greater and the Lesser. 10. AEelus 〈◊〉 11. Lydia. 12. Caria. 13. Lycia. 14. Lycgonia. 15. Pisidia. 16. Pamphilia. 17. the Province of the Rhodes, all comprehended under the command of the Vicarius and Proconsul of Asia. 18. Isauria. 19 Cilicia, parts of the Diocese of the East as before was said.   

1. BYTHINIA.  
BYTHINIA is bounded on the east with Pontus, and the River Sangarius; on the west with part of the Euxius, the Thracian Bosphorus, and part of the Propontis; on the North wholly with the Euxine; and on the South with Mysia and Phrygia Minor: Formerly called Bebrycia, afterwards Mygdonia, and at last Bythinia, and that as some say from Bithynius, once a King hereof; more probably from the Thrns, a people of Thrace, who passed over the Bosthorus and subdued it, called therefore by some writers Thracia Asiarica. So witnesseth the Poet Claudian saying,  
Thyni Thrace's erant, quae nunc Bythinia Fertur.  
By Justin the Historian it is called by the name of Metapontus, by reason of its neighbourhood to the Euxme, and the pontics Region.  
The Country naturally rich, and in those parts hereof which lie next the Bosphorus, opposite to Constaxtinople, so plentifully enriched with fruitful hills, and pleasant orchards, when kept by the more curious Christian, that it was thought not to be inferior to the so much celebrated Tempe: now robbed of all those former beauties by the carclessenesse of the Turks, who affect neither art not sumptuosity in their retirements and delights.  
Chiese Rivers hereof are Phillis. 2. Sang trius now called Sangri, both falling into the Euxine Sea; this last arising from Mount Dindymus, in the furthest parts of Phrygia Major; and making two long reaches in his journey hither. 3. Aseanius, which rising also in Phrygia Major, but more near the borders of this Country, falleth into the Propontis, making the Bay called Sinus Ascanius. Which with a lake in the same Country called Lacus Ascanius doth plainly manifest that the Bithynians are derived from Askenaz the Son of Gomer and grandson of Japhet.  
The principal Towns hereof are 1. Seutari over against the Haven of Constantinople, called anciently Chrysupolis for that there the Persians received their tribute from the other Cities of all these parts of Asia Minor. An ample Town, well garrisoned within, and surrounded round about with most pleasant Orchards, and honoured with the neighbourhood of a Royal Seraglio. Not far off is a Tower called the Murder-Power, serving both for a Fort and watchtower; and being furnished for defence with twenty pieces of Ordnance. 2. Caleedon on the same shore also, a Colony of the Megarenses, called blind by the Oracle, for neglecting Byzantium and choosing the less convenie it place for their habitation. And yet did Constantine the Great resolve upon the same place also for his Regal City: but changed his resolutions on a kind of miracle: it being observed that when his workmen began to draw the platform, some Eagles conveyed away their lines to the other side of the Bosphorus, and let them fall directly upon Byzemtium. Memorable after that for the fourth Gener all Council there assembled by Command of the Emperor Martianus, for repressing the heresy of Nestorius; in which were five hundred and thirty Bishops: now so decayed that it can only show some few of the ruins of it: Scutari being risen on the fall thereof. 3. Nicemedia, so called from Nicomedes King of Bythinia (the son of Zipes, and grand child to that Bithynian King, who so valiantly defended his own and his Country's liberty against Calantus, one of great Alexander's Captains,) by whom founded: Sitaute on the top of an hill, environed with a pleasant and delightful Plain: honoured with the leate and residence of many of the Roman Emperors, when their affairs called them into the East, before the building of Constantinople; on that occasion made the Throne on which many of God's Saints received the Crown of Martyrdom, especially in the persecution under Dioclesiar. In those tunes wealthy and of same, now much decayed, but notwithstanding well inhabited both by Greeks and Turks for the commodiousness of the fresh Springs which are thereabouts. 4. Libussa, betwixt Nicomedia and the River Ascanius, memorable for the death and Sepulture of the famous Anmball, who to prevent his being made Prisoner to the Romans when Prusius King of Bythinia intended unworthily to betray him, here made away himself by poison. 5. Prusa, founded by another Prusiu, whose name it beareth; a large and wealthy City as most in Asia, honoured for a long time with the residence of the Turkish Kings till the removal of their seat to Adrianople by Mahomet the first; and still ennobled with the sepulture of the Princes of the Ottanan race, except the Emperors themselves. By the Turks called Bursu. 6. Nicae or Nicaea, by the Turks called Neichia, but most commonly Isnichs, situate, caer the fens of the River Ascanius, occasioned by the frequent overslowing of that River: by some affirmed to be the Metropolis of Bythinia; but I think Nicomedia hath more right to claim that honour. First named Antigonta from Antigonius the founder of it; and afterwards Nicaea by the name of 〈◊〉 wife unto Lysimachus, both of them Captains of the Great Alexander; which last had the happiness to survive the overthrow of the former, and was the longest liver of those great Commanders. Sufficiently famous both in Ecclesiastical and Civil story for the first general Council there holden, by the appointment of Constantine the Great Anno 314. for settling the peace of the Church then miserably distracted by the Arian Heresy. The number of Bishops there assembled no more than 318. yet of such high esteem for learning and piety, that never Council hath been held in so great an Honour. Here was also held the Council by the Empress Irene, for establishing the veneration of Images; that passing by the name of the Nicene Council, the Acts thereof might be of greater reputation amongst ignorant men. In which it was decreed by such doubtful Atguments, as Let us make man after our own Image, once mainly insisted on by a Legate of the Eastern Churches, that they should be reverenced and adored in as ample and religious manner, as the blessed Trinity itself. This City was also the Imperial City of the Greek Emperors, after the taking of Constantinople by the Westem Christians; and there continued till the expulsion of the Lutines: Under these 

Emperors of the GREEKS residing at NICE.  
A. CH.  
1200. 1. Theodorus Lascaris son in law to Alexius Angelus the Usurper; upon the taking of Constantinople by the Latines passed over into Asia, and fortifying the City of Nice made it the head City of his Kingdom, containing Bithyvia, both the Phrygia's, both the Mysia's, Lydie, Aeclis and jonia.  
1223. 2 John surnamed Ducas, the husband of Irene daughter of Theodore Lasearis, succeeded his Father in law in the Empire; to which he added Pontus, most of the Isles of the Aegean, and not a few places of importance in Theace itself.  
1256. 3. Theodorus II. the son of Ducas.  
1259. 4. John II. the son of Theodore the second, an Infant of about six years old, supplanted first, and after cruelly deposed and deprived of right.  
1259. 5. Michael Palaeologus, descended from the Imperial family of the Conneni, first took upon him as Protector of the Infant-Empe our, and afterwards as his assviate in the Empire: in which confirmed by many fortunate successes as well against the Latixes as some Greek Usurpers in Tlessaly and Peliponesus, especially the taking of Constantinople; he deprived the young Emperor of his sight, made himself sole Emperor, and left it unto his posterity, who held it with a great deal of trouble and continual disquiets, till the year 1452. when Conquered by Mahomet the Great, as before was said. But this recovery of Constantinople was the loss of Nice, taken not long after the removal of the Imperial seat by Sultan Ottonar; Anno 1299. who presently thereupon took on himself the stile of King, from which before he had bstained.    
As for the fortunes of Bythinia itself, I look upon the Bithynians as a Thracian people, whom both Strabo and Herodotus speak of as the founders of the name and Nation. Of such a King of theirs as Bithynius I find some mention in my Authors; and possibly it might be he who had the leading of the Thrni, or Bithyxi, in this expedition: that being the name rather of his Nation, than his proper Family. But for the line of Kings which held out till the flourish of the Roman greatness, they begun to reign here some few geaerations before the time of Philip and Alexander the Macedonians: by whom having other employment, and lying out of the road towards Persia they were little troubled. (alantus one of Alexander's Captains, made an expedition into their Country, and was vanquished by them: and afterwards they had to do with one of the Lieutanants of Antigonus, (one of Alexander's greatest Princes) who though he humbled them for the present, yet got he neither title nor possession by it. And thus they held it out till the time of Prusias, so shuffling with the Macedonian and Syrian Kings, that betwixt both they still preserved their own estates. This Prusias, when the Romans became so considerable, as that no danger need be feared from Greece or Syria, peeced himself with them: and having aided them in their wars against Philip and Antiochus both, and most unworthily promised to deliver Hannibal (who had fled to him for succour) unto their Ambassadors, made all sure on this side. His Son and successor Nicomedes, being outed of his Kingdom by Muhridates' King of Pontus, and restored again unto it by the power of the Romans, held it as their Fenditarie, as did Nicomedes his next Successor simamed Philometor: who dying without issue in the time of Augustus, gave his whole Kingdom to the Romans. By them, with the addition of that part of Pontus which lay next unto it, it was made a Province of their Empire, by the name of Pontus and Bithynta; continuing so till the division of that Empire into the Eastern and the Western; when falling to the share of the Constantinopolitans, and with them to the power of the Turkish Tyrants who do still possess it.   

2. PONTUS.  
PONTUS is bounded on the East with Colchis, and Armenta; on the West with Bythinia and the River Sangarius; on the North with the Euxine Sea; and on the South with Phrygia Mayor; Paphlagonia; Galatia and Cappadocia. So that it taketh up the whole length of Anatolia or Asia Minor from Bythinia to the River Euphrates, which parts it from Armenia Major; but not of answerable breadth; and gives name to the Sea adjoining, a Ponto regione illi adjacente it a appellari, as Ortelius hath it; called from hence Pontus by the Latins, the adjunct of Euxinus coming on another occasion; which we have spoken of before. A Country of a large extent, and therefore divided by the Romans (when Masters of it) into these four parts, viz. Metapontus, or Pontus specially so called. 2. Pontus Galaticus. 3. Polemomacus; and 4. Pontus' Cappadocius.  
1. PONTUS' specially so called or Metapontus bordering on Bythinia and bounded on the East with the River Parthemius which divided it from Paphlagonia; had for the Chief Cities thereof 1. Claudiapolis, so called in honour of Clausdius the Roman Emperor; as 2. Flaviopolis, in honour of Flavius Vespasianus; and 3. Fulipolis, in honour of the Julian family, all midland Towns 4. Diospolis, on the Euxine Sea, so called from a Temple consecrated to Jupiter, of great resort. 5. Heraclea, a Colony of the Phocians, called for distinctionssake, (there being many of that name) Heraeclea Pontit memorable of late times for being the seat or residence of a branch of the Imperial family of the Conent; when at the taking of Constantinople by the Western Christians, David & Alexius Comnexi fled into these parts: the first fixing here his Royal residence commanded over this part of Pontus and paphligonia; the other possessing himself of Cappadocia and Galatia, made Trabezond his Regal or Imperial City. But these two Empires, though of the same date, were of different destinies: that of Heraclea and Pontus being partly conquered by the Greek Emperors residing at Nice, and partly seized on by the Turks in the beginning and first fortunes of the Ottoman family; the other keeping up the Majesty and State of an Empire, till the year 1461. when subdued by Mahomet the Great. 6. Phillium, at the mouth or influx of the River Phillis, upon which it is seated. 7. Amastris, the farthest Town of this part towards the East, on the Seaside also; once of great strength, but take by Lucullus, together with Heracles, Sinope, Amisut, and other Towns, in the war against Mithridates the great King of Pontus.  
2. Eastward of Pontus specially so called, or Metapontus, as Justin the historian calls it, lieth PONTUS GALATICUS, so named because added to Galatia in the time of the Romans. The chief Cities whereof were 1. Sinope, pleasantly seated on a long point or Promontory shooting into the main, remarkable in ancient story for the birth and sepulture of Muthridates before mentioned; and in the later times for being the chief seat of the Issendiars and noble Family of the Turks, who had taken it with the rest of this tract from the Comneni, and held it till the same year in which the Empire of Trabezond was subdued by Mahomet. First built by the Milesians, and continuing in a free estate, till taken by Pharatees a King of Pontus, and made the Metropolis of that Kingdom. 2. Castamona, the head City of the Principality of the Isfendiars before mentioned; preferred by them for strength and conveniency of situation, before Heraclea, or Synope. 3. Themiseyra, now called Favagoria, seated on a spacious plain near unto the Sea, and anciently giving name to the Province adjoining. 4. Amasia, the birthplace of Strabo the Geographer, remarkable in the Ecclesiatical Histories for the Martyrdom of St. Theodorus; and of late times for being the residence of the eldest Sons of the Grand Signeur, sent hither as soon as circumcised, never returning back again till the death of their Father. Accounted now amongst the Cities of Cappadocia, and the chief of that Province, a midland Town, as also is 5. Cabira, called afterward Dtopolis, memerable for the great defeat which Lucullus gave there unto Mithridates; more for the trick which Mithridues there put upon Lacullus. For being well acquainted with the covetousness of the Romans, he saw no better way to save himself and the rest of his forces after the defeat, then to scatter his treasures in the way which he was to take: that by that means his enemies might slacken the pursuit to collect the spoils, and he preserve himself to another day: and so accordingly it proved. 6. Coniaus, to difference it from another of that name, called Comana Pontica; to which other being of Cappadociae, or Armenia Minor, Mithridates came in safety by the trick aforesaid, and thence escaped unto Trgranes the Armenian King, with 2000 horse.  
3. Eastward of Pontus Galaticus lieth Polemoniacus, so called by the Romans either from Polemomum a chief town of this tract, or from Polemo the last King hereof, after whose death this Kingdom came unto the Romans. Places of most importance in it, 1. Polemonium on the Seaside, spoken of before. 2. Hermanassa, a Sea-town also, more in the land. 3. Neo-Coefarea, (now Nixaria) the Metropolis of Polemoniacus, when made a Province of itself. 4. Zela, enlarged by Pompey, and called Megalopolis, by Constantine laid unto the Province of Helenopontus. 5. Sebaestia, so called in honour of Augustus, whom the Greeks called Sebastos; a place of great strength, and one of the first Towns in the Lesser Asia, which held out against Tamerlane; in revenge whereof when he had took it, he caused 12000. men women and children to be most cruelly buried alive in some hollow pits, which he had dagged for that purpose. Nigh to this City is Mount Stella, where Pompey gave Mithridates his fatal overthrow: where also Tamerlane with an Army of 800000 of his Tartars, encountered with Barazet the Turk, coming to the reliese of Sebastia, with an Army of 500000 fight men. The assue of which fight was this, that Bayazet having lost 200000. of his soldiers, was himself taken prisona, and carried by the insolent Conqueror in an iron cage, against the bars whereof he beat out his brains. 6. Barbanissa. 7. Megalossus. 8. Gozalvia, & c. not much observable in Story.  
In this part of Pontus is the rise and fall of the River Thermodon, on the banks whereof the Amazons, a sort of Warlike women are said to dwell, so called, either quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because they used to cut off their right paps, that they might not be an impediment to their shooting: or from a and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 since pane, because they used not to eat bread; or from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because they used to live together. They were originally of Schythia, and accompanied their husbands to these parts, about the time of the Scythians first eruptions into Asia, in the time of Sesostris King of Egypt. The leaders of this people into Cappadocia, were Plinos and Scolpythus, two young men of a great house, whom a contrary action had banished. They held a great hand over the Themiscyrii, who inhabited this region, and the Nations round about them; At last they were by treachery all murdered. But their wives now doubly vexed, both with exile and widowhood; and extremity of grief and fear producing its usual effect, desperateresse: they set upon the Conquerors under the Conduct of Lampedo and Marpesia; and not only overthrew them, but also infinitely enlarged their Dominions.   

The Amazon Queens.  
1. Lampedo. Marpesia. First Queens of the Amazons in these parts.  
2. Ortera.  
3. Antiopa, whose sisters Hippolyte and Menalippe, challenged Hercules and Theseus to single combat: and were at last hardly vanquished, to their eternal credits.  
4. Penhesilea, who came with a troop of brave Viragoes, to the aid of Priamus King of Troy: she invented the Battle axe, and was at last slain by Pyrrhus, son to Achilles. Long after her death reigned Thalestris; who came to Alexander being in Hyrcania, and plainly told him she came to be his bedfellow; which done she returned; and at last by little and this Female Nation was extinct. They used in matters of copulation to go to their neighbouring men thrice in a year: if they brought forth males, they sent them to their fathers; if females, they kept them and trained them up in all discipline of war and courage. Of these more elsewhere.  
4. the most Eastern part of Pontus, called CAPPADOCIUS, for that it bordered on that Province, and for a time was added to it by the Romans, extended from Polemoniacus to Colchis, and the River Euphrates, the utmost boundaries of this Country. Places of most consideration in it. 1. Pharnacia, built by Pharnaces a King of Pontus. 2. Cerasu, by Constantine laid unto the Province of Polemoniacus, from whence Cherries were brought first to Rome, Anno V. C. 680 called therefore Cerasa by the Latins. 3. Ischopolis, on the Euxine Sea, as the others are. And so is also 4. Trapezus, now Trabezond, the Imperial City of the Comneny, here reigning over Cappadocia, Galatia, and these parts; of Pontus. An Empire founded first by Alexins Comnenus (Nephew of the great Tyrant Andronicus Comnenus by his Son Emanuel) who at the taking of Constant nopl: by the Western Christians fled unto these parts; which willingly submitted unto his command, Anno 1200. Here his posterity flourished in great prosperity, preserving the Majesty of the Empire in a better measure than the Constantinopilitans themselves till the time of David the last Emperor, in whose reign the City of Trabezond, and therewith all the whole dominion belonging to it, was taken by Mahomet the Great; the poor Emperor led prisoner into Greece, and there cruelly murdered. A famous Emporie and specially for the trade of fish, caught by the People on the shores of the Euxine Sea; here salted, and from hence transported in great quantities, to Constantinople, Caffa, and other places. And for their better help herein, it is said that there is a Mountain not far from this City affording a black stone, which being beaten in a Mortar serves instead of salt, wherewith they season the fish, which they send abroad. A City honoured heretofore with the residence of the Lord Deputies or Lieutenants of the Grecian Emperor, for defence of the outparts of the Euxine against the Persiant, and now the Station of such Galleys as are maintained by the Grand Siegnour, to scour the coasts of the Black Sea, and secure their trade. More in the land stand. 5. Zephiriam. 6. Aza. 7. Cocalia. 8. Cordyle, and many others named in Ptolemy, but not else observable.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this Country were called LEUCOSYRI or White Syrians, governed by a race of Kings descended from the Royal house of Achemenes King of Persia. The first of them called Mithridates, one of the seven Competitors for the Persian Kingdom, on the death of Cambyses. But that honour failing on Darius (of which more hereafter) he seated himself in these remote parts of 〈◊〉, the Ancestor of many great and purssant Princes, but none more memorable than one of his 〈◊〉, Regum Orientis post Alexandrum Aeagnum Maximus, the most potent King of all the East since the time of Alexander the great, as my Author hath it. A Prince of great abilities both in war and council, and one who longer held it out against the Romans; then Pyrrhus, Hannibal, and the great Kings of 〈◊〉 and Syria had done together. This was that famous Mithridates, who being once a friend and confederate of the Roman, took their part against Aristonious; who would not consent to the admission of the Romans unto Pergamus, according to the will of Attalus. Afterward, conceiving an ambitious hope to obtain the Monarchy of Asia; in one night he plotted and effected the death of all the Roman Soldiers dispersed in Anat●lia, being in number 150000: in like manner, as in after times the Engl●●●, taught perhaps by this example, murdered all the Danes then resident in England; and the 〈◊〉 massacred all the French inhabiting Sicilia, as we have formerly declared. He dispossessed Naomede; son to P●usias, King of Bithyma; Ar●obarzanes, King of Cappadocia; and Philomones, King of 〈◊〉 of their estates; because they persisted faithful to his enemies of Rome. He excited the Grecians to rebel, possessed himself of Athens, and divers places of importance in Greece, Thrac● and Asia; and alured all the Isles, except Rhodes, from their obedience to the Romans. And finally having disturbed their victories, and much shaken their estate, for the space of 40. years: he was with much ado vanquished by the valour and felicity of L. Sylla, Lucullus, and Pompey the Great; three of the greatest Soldiers that ever the Roman Empire knew. Yet did not the Roman puissance so much pluck down his proud heart, as the rebellion of his son Pha●na●es, against him; which he no sooner heard, but he would have poisoned himself; but having formerly so used his bedie to a kind of poison allayed (which from h●s inventing of it, we now call Mithridate) that the venom could not work upon him; he flew himself. He is said to have been an excellent Scholar, and to have spoken perfectly the languages of 22. Nations; the languages of so many nations which were subject to him. But neither his learning nor his courage could preserve him from those common miseries, which ordinarily attend a falling greatness. And so ended this long and tedious war, exceeding troublesome to the Romans, but withal very beneficial. For under colour of giving aid to Mithridates, they took in Crete, Galatia, Colchis, Iberia, and both Armenia's: insomuch as it is truly said by L. Florus, totum pene Orientem & Septen trionem involvit, that in his ruins involved both the Eastand and North. But to proceed: after his death the Kingdom continued unto his post● but 〈◊〉 to the Romans, till the time of Nero, when Polemo the last King hereof dying with 〈◊〉 issue; it was commoned and divided into many parts, and laid unto the Provinces of Bythinia, Gal●●a, and Cappadocia only that part of it which was called Polemen●●cus retaining the dignity of a Province distinct and separate. And so it remained till the reign of Consean in● the Great, who changing the names, lessening the bounds, and increasing the number of the Provinces, left only the Province of Pontus, and Bithy●ia in the state he found it. And for the rest he cast it into two new Provinces, that towards the East, retaining the name, but not the bounds of the old Polemoniacus, wherein were the Cities of Trapezus, N●c-Caesarea, Cerasus, Comana Pontica, Palemonium, and Petroeorum Civitas, called afterwads Ju- 〈◊〉; of which Ne●-Caesarea was the Metropolis. That towards the East, separated from the Province of Pontus and Bythinia by the River Parthemius, he caused to be called Hel●xopontu, by the name of his Mother; and thereunto assigned the Cities of Amasia the Metropolis of it, Ibora, Eu●haita, Zela, A●drapus, Aeg●um Chmacus, Sinope, Amisus, and Leontopolis. But this division held not long, both being united into one and called Hel●nopontus by Justintan; continuing after that a member of the Eastern Empire, till the coming of David and Alexius Comneni from Constantizopls, whereof the one reigned in Heraclea, and the other in Trabezond, as befores said. But their estates being overthrown, it remains wholly to the Turks, who do now possess it.  
The Arms of the Emperors of Trabezond the greatest Princes of these parts till the Turks subdued them, were Oz, an Eagle volant Gules.   

3. PAPHLAGONIA.  
PAPHLAGONIA is bounded on the East with the River Halys, by which parted from 〈◊〉; on the West by the Rivers Parthemius, which part it from the Province of Ponthus and 〈◊〉; on the North with that part of the Kingdom of Pontus which was named Galaticus; and on the South, with Phrygia Ma●or and Galatia. So called of Paphlago the Son of Phineus, estated in it by his Father who had newly conquered it.  
The Country was but small, and of little power, and consequently the Cities were not very many, and of no great note. The principal of such as were, were 1. Gangra, observable for a Council holden there in the 〈◊〉 times, Anno 339. commonly called Synodus Gangrensis. 2. Conica, or Cinata, of so convenient a situation that it was entrenched and fortified by Mithridate, when he was master of this Country. 3. Pompe●opolis, raised out of the foundations of some lesser town, by Pompey the great, and by him so named. 4. Germanopolis. 5. Xo●na. 6. Anarapa, called afterwards Nava Claud opo●●●, to difference it from another City of that name in Pontus.  
This Province though but small in circuit, was heretofore the seat of four different Nations, viz. 1. the sword, of whom it is said, that they never waged war on any enemy, but they faithfully certified them beforehand, of the time and place of their fight. 2. The Heptaco●etoe. 3. The Mossynoe●, both which were a people so beastly and shameless, that they used to perform the work of generation public; not knowing that Multa sunt honesta factu, qua sunt turpia visit: and 4. the Heneri, to whom the Venetians, as we have already said, do owe their first original. The Kings which ruled in this Country derived themselves from Philomores, who assisted Priamus King of Troy in his defence against the Greeks: in memory of whom this Region for a while was called Philomenia. Applying themselves unto the times, they were always favourable to the strongest, serving the Persian, and submitting to Alexander as he passed that way; and so maintained their estate without much molestation, till the time of Muthridates King of Pontus: who finding them firm unto the Romans, then growing to great power in the lesser Asia, deprived Philomenes then King hereof, and took the Kingdom to himself, fortifying the chief towns and places of it. Restored again unto his Kingdom by the power of the Romans, he gave it to them at his death. But the Country being very much wasted, and most of the Cities of it destroyed and desolated in the course of that war; it was not thought worthy a particular care, and therefore laid unto Galatia. Not reckoned a distinct Province in the time of Saint Peter, who writing to the Jews, dispersed in Pontus, Cappadocia, Galatia, Asia, and Bithynnia, takes no notice of this Paphl●gonia; nor was it otherwise esteemed then as a member of Galatia, in the time of Ptolemy. Afterwards it was joined to Pontus by the Emperor Constantine: part of it after that, with some parts of Pontus and Bithynnia, being made into a new Province by the Emperor Theodosia's, and called Henorias, in honour of his son Honorius, whereof Claudiopolis, a City of Pontus, properly so called, was made the Metropolis. But by Justinian, the name of Honorius being abolished, and that of Paphlagonia revived again; the whole Country, as before limited, was governed by an Imperial Officer, whom he called Froetor Justinianus: continuing under the command of the Constantinopolitans, till the taking of that City by the Latins. After which made a Member of the Empire of Trabe●ond till the conquest of it by the Turks, by whom called Rom.   

4. GALATIA.  
GALATIA is bounded on the East with Cappadoais; on the West with the River Sangarius, and some part of Pontus specially so called, or Metapontus; on the North with Paphlagonia; on the South with Pamphylia. So called from the Gauls, who having ranged over Greece, passed into Asia, and brought a great part of it under their command: but being broken by Attalus King of Pergamus, and drove out of Mysia, and the Lesser phrygia, were at last confined to this Country. It was also called Gallo-Groecia, from that mixture of Gauls and Grecians, who uniting into one body when they came for Asia, were commonly called Gallo-groeci. By Suidas, Groeco-Galli, and the Country suitably Graco-Gallia.  
The Country very plentiful of all manner of fruits, even unto voluptuousness; and providently provided of the Stone called the Amethyst, which is said to preserve from drunkenness the man that weareth it. The name doth signify as much, derived from A privativum, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, ebrius, which cometh from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying wine.  
The people had a custom in their public funerals, to cast letters fairly written, into that last and fatal fire wherein the dead body was to be bumed, supposing that their friends should read them in the other world. Much given to Sacrifices, in the number and frequency whereof they excelled all Nations: insomuch that Athenoeus telleth us of one Ariamnes a rich Galatian, that he feasted the whole Nation for a year together with the Sacrifices of Bulls, Sheep, Swine, and other provisions, boiled in great Caldrons made for that purpose, and distributed amongst them in Tents and Booths erected for that entertainment. A brave flash of a vainglorious hospitality.  
Rivers of note here are not any but what are common unto them with their neighbouring Nations, as Hal●s, Sangarius, and some others. The Towns of most consideration in it were 1. An●yra on the banks of tae River Sangarius, the chief City of the Teclosages a gallic Nation, and the Metropolis of the whole Country; memorable in Church-story for a Synod here held in the Primitive times, Anno 299. called Synodus Ancyrana; but of most note at the present for the making of Chamlets; now called Angauri. 2. Olenus. 3. Agrinama, Cities of the same people also. 4. Tavium, or Tanium (for I find both names) the chief City of the Trocmi or Trogmi, where was a brazen statue of Juipter, whose temple there was a privileged Sanctuary. 5. Androsia. 6. Phabarena, Cities of that nation also. 7. Thermae, a Roman Colony, so called of the hot Baths there, the chief City of the Tolibosti, as Ptolemy, or Tolistobogi, as Strabo nameth them. 8. Talachbachora, belonging also to that people.  
Besides the Nations above named, here dwelled also the Byceni and Proseliminitoe, who had also their peculiar Cities, mentioned by name in Ptolemy, but of little or no observation in the course of story. Of all which Nations, only the Tectosags, were of gallic original; who with others of their Countrymen under the conduct of Belgius and Bremius, having ransacked Pannonia and Illyricum, fell at last into Macedon; where having tyrannised a while, and laid waste the Country, they were at last vanquished and expulsed by Antigonus Gonatas. After this overthrow under the conduct of Lammorius, and Lutoriut, they ferried over the Hellespont, and subdued almost all Asia Minor on this side the Taurus; employed there, by those petty Kings and States against one another: their reputation grown so great, that no Prince thought himself secure without their alliance, or able to make war without their assistance. The very Swissers of that age; as mercenary, but more faithful unto those that hired them. But being over rigotous in compelling their neighbour Princes to become their Tributaries, and too severe in the exacting of their Tributes: they enforced Attalus King of Pergamus, by whose favour they had settled about the Hellespont, to become their enemy. Vanquished by him, they were constrained to contain themselves within the bounds of this Province, which from them in the following times was called Galatia, and Gallograecia. Here for a while they kept their ancient courage and estimation, molesting many times their neighbours, and sometimes setting themselves to hire in the wars of others: but in the end they lost both courage and esteem, and were Gauls only in name, retaining little in them of their Ancestors valour. For as most plants and trees lose much of their virtue, being transplanted into another soil, so these men lost their native courage, strength, and hardiness, being weakened by the Asian pleasures and delicacies. For as Tully saith, for a man to be good in other places, is no mastery; but in Asia to lead a temperate life, is indeed praiseworthy: So might one have said to the Gauls, that to be courageous and patient of travel amongst the mountains, was no whit to be admired; but to have continued so amidst the delights of Asia, had been indeed meritorious in them. But these men were so far from assailing the Romans in the Capitol, that they lost their own Country to Malius a Roman General. A war which Manlius undertook for no other cause, but that they had been aiding to Antiochus against the Romans: nor was there any memorable act performed herein, but that of Chiomena the King's wife, who being ravished by one of the Roman Captains, took her advantage whilst he busied himself in telling the money agreed on for her ransom, to cut off his head; which she presented to her husband. But Manlius got little honour by this success, not being welcomed with a triumph, at his coming home, according to the Roman custom; because he undertook the war of his own accord, without commission from the Senate. And yet the Senate was content to enjoy the fruits of it, keeping the Galatians as their Subjects, and the Kings their Feudataries. This happened anno V. C. 564. After which time, I find Desotarus by consent of the Romans, to reign here as King: who siding with Pompey in his war against Caesar, incurred the anger of the Victor; and had died for it, had not Tully pleaded his cause and obtained his pardon. But he being dead, his Country in the time of Augustus was made a Province of the Empire; Lollius Paulinus being the first Precedent or Governor of it: enlarged afterwards with the addition of Paphlagonia, and some part of Pontus, from whence called Galaticus. Reduced to its first bounds by the Emperor Constantine; and divided into two Provinces by Theodosius, the one called Galatia Prima; the other Salutaris, from its medicinal waters. Of both which Ancyra remained the Metropolis. In the falling of the Eastern Empire it was partly seized on by the Turks; not totally come into their hands, till the subverting of the Empire of Trabezone, upon which it depended. By the Turks at this day called Chianger.   

5. CAPPADOCIA.  
CAPPADOCIA is bounded on the East with Armenia Major, and some part of Armenia Minor; on the West with Galatia; on the North with Pontus Polemoniacus, and Cappadocius; and on the South with Lycaonia, and the rest of Armenia Minor. So called of a River, as Pliny telleth us, which runneth betwixt it and Galatia.  
The Country very plentiful of wine, and most kind of fruits, rich in mines of Silver, Brass, Iron, and Allom: affording also besides a mean sort of Alabaster, good store of Crystal, Jasper, and the Onyx stone. But the greatest wealth hereof is their breed of horses, infinite almost in numbers, and fit for any service they can be put to. And this is universal, in all parts of the Country, but not the other, there being some parts of it mountainous and very barren, especially about the spurs and branches of the Antitanrus: which is a chain of hills thrusting out of the Taurus, and bending themselves unto the North, upon the edges of this Country and the two Armenia's. Here is also in this Country the mountain Argaeus, said to be of so great an height, that from one of the summits or tops thereof, a man of perspicacious eyes may discern the Euxine on the one hand, and the Mediterranean on the other.  
The People of this Country in the time of the Romans were of ill report, so vicious and lewd of life, so monstrously addicted to all kind of wickedness, that besides the share they had in the old Greek proverb, of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, they had some proverbs to themselves: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, & 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is to say, a man of Cappadocia, and a Cappadocian Monster, being used proverbially, to signify a man most extremely wicked. The words so used by Gregory Nazianzen, speaking of Gregory or George, the Arian Patriarch of Alexandria, if either Suidas or Erasmus, two right learned Critics, understand him rightly. And they made good the Proverb in the times of the Gospel: Gregory that bloody Butcher of Alexandria, Auxentius, Asterius, Eustathius, principal Patrons of the Arian, and that Arch-Heretick Eunomius, being all of this Country. Yet such is the influence of Christianity, where once entertained, that this lewd disposition of the Cappadocians was so corrected and restrained by it; that this Country afforded as many godly Prelates, and courageous Martyrs, as any other whatsoever. Highly commended for it by Nazianzen before remembered, who with Gregory Nyssen, and St. Basil, all learned and religious Bishops, were all Cappadocians. And amongst many Martyrs of great faith and constancy, St. George, a noble Coppadocian, Colonel or Tribune of soldiers under Dioclesian, more celebrated in the Churches both East and West, than any other Saints in all the Calendar, the blessed Apostles and Evangelists excepted only, & for that reason made Patron of the Order of the Garter by K. Ed. the 3. Finally, it is reported of these Cappadocians, that they were not only morally wicked, but naturally venomous also: insomuch that if a Serpent did bite any of them, the man's blood was a poison to the snake and killed him.  
Principal Rivers of this Country, were 1. Haly●, spoken of before, which had here its fountain and Original; the end of Croesius' Empire both in site and fate, the utmost bound of his dominions on that side; which purposing to pass over in his way to Media, which he intended to invade, he was encountered with and va●iquished by Cyrus the great King of Persia. 2. Iris, which ariseth in this Country also, and passing through it and a part of Pontus, dischannelleth itself, as the other doth in the Euxine Sea.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Mazac●, beautified and enlarged by the Emperor Tiberius, after the uniting of this Province to the Roman Empire; and in honour of Augustus Caesar, by him called Caesrea: the Metropolis of Cappadocia, and the Episcopal See of renowned St. Basil. 2. Nyss●, the See of Gregory, surnamed Nyssenus, the brother of Basil. 3. Nazianzum, the Episcopal See of another Gregory, surnamed Nazianzenus: three men, which as for the piety of their conversation they were not equalled in those times; so for their admirable abilities in all kind of learning, nothing inferior to the most c●ninent of the ancient Grecians. 4. Tyana, the Metropolis of Cappadocia secunda, after the subdivision of it by the Emperor Valens. 5. Archelais, in the Praefecture of Garduacreta, so called from Arche●ous a Cappadocian King, the founder or repairer of it. 6. Comana, for distinctions sake called Comana Cappadocia, to difference it from another of that name in Pontus; by Ptolemy placed, I know not why, in Armenia Minor, as is also Nyssa before mentioned. Memorable in old times for a Temple consecrated to Bellon; whose Priests and other inferiors Officers of both sexes, amounted in the time of Sivalo to 6000 and upwards; for maintenance of whom the Priests received the Revenue of the Region next adjoining to it; in honour next unto the King, and commonly of the same kindred also. 7. Dio-Casarea; called formerly Cabira, as we find in Strabo. 8. Faustiopolis, so called in honour of Faustin, wife of the Emperor Antoninus. 9 Andraca. 10. Phiara. 11. Salambria. 12. Canipae, spoken of by Ptolemy, with many others as obscure, and not worth the naming. Of more note, though not found in the ancient Writers, is 13. Erzirum, situate on the very confines of the Greater Armenia, for that cause made the Rendez-vous, or place of meeting for the Turkish Soldiers when there is any expedition in hand against the Persian; at which place also after the ending of the war for the present year, they are disbanded and sent home to their several quarters. And 14. Pterium, not named in Prolomi●, but memorable for the great battle fought in sight thereof between Croesus' King of Lydia, and Cyrus of Persia; in which Croesus having lost the field, and with it his Kingdom, found the Oracle true, (though not in the sense which he expected) that Croesus passing over the River Halys, should overthrow a great estate, as indeed he did: but it was his own, and not the Persians.  
That the Cappadocians are derived from Togarma, the Son of Gomer, hath been so fully proved already in our General Preface, that we shall not trouble ourselves to repeat it here: Nor shall we need to say more in confuting of their opinion, who would fetch Capththorim out of Egypt from the rest of his brethren, to plant him in this Country, than hath there been said. Their fortunes in the former times I find little of: subjected by the Persian with the rest of Asia Minor, after the overthrow of Croesus, who before had given the law unto it; as to the Phrygians, Paphlagonians, Bithynians, Mysians, and others of the neighbouring Nations. By Cyrus given together with Atossa his Sister to Pharnaces a noble Persian, who had saved him from the fury of a ravenous Lion running upon him with full mouth, as he was a hunting. A noble loyalty, and no less royally rewarded. From him descended Ariarathes King hereof in the time of Alexander the Great, continuing steadfast in his duty to the Crown of Persia, when almost all the rest of the Kings of Asia yielded to the Enemy. Nor did Alexander call him to account in his march for Persia. But after his decease, Perdiccas having the command of the Army, set upon him, vanquished him, and most cruelly crucified him, together with as many of his kindred as could be found. One of his Sons, who fortunately had escaped this slaughter, spying his time, when the Maccdonians were at wars amongst themselves, recovered his estate again, and passed it over to his offspring: continuing in his line, without any subjection, till the time of that Ariobarzanes, who by Mithridates was deprived of his dominion, as was told before. Restored again unto his Kingdom by the power of the Romans, he became their Homager, holding, as did his Successors, by their courtesy only: Continuing yet in state of Kings, till the death of Archelaus the last King hereof. Who having angered Tiberius, for not attending on him when he lived at Rhodes, during the life-time of Augustus, as did others of the tributary States and Princes, was by him then possessed of the Empire, cited unto Rome under colour of projecting somewhat against the State. Where the old Prince even spent with Age, the Cout, and some other diseases, had without question been condemned by the servile Senate: but that one of the Witnesses deposed, that he had said that if ever he went back into Cappadocia, Tiberius should find, quales sibi nervi essent, what a man he was. Which moved such a laughter in the Senate, the old King being neither able to sit nor stand, that he was dismissed: Tiberius thinking that he could not punish him more effectually, than to let him live. A favour which the old King construed to the best, and in the way of gratitude, bequeathed his Kingdom at his death to the Empire of Rome. Being added to the Roman Empire, it was exceedingly enlarged by the addition of the greatest part of the Kingdom of Pontus: and so it stood in the time of Ptolemy, who reckoneth Pontus Galaticus, Cappadocius, and Polemoniacus, as parts and members of this Province. Divided besides those into these eight Praefectures, that is to say, Clamaniensis, Sarguransene, Gardaocreta, Cilicia, Tyanidis, Lycaonia, Antiochiana, and Cataonia. But Pontus, Lycaonia, and Antiochiana (he means Pisidia as I take it) being made Provinces of themselves, by the Emperor Constantine: it returned unto its natural bounds, and made one Province of the Empire, of which Caesarea, as is said before, was the Metropolitan: and so remained, till the Emperor Valens ae great Patron of the Arian faction, of purpose to despite St. Basil, who opposed that heresy, created another Province out of it, called Cappadocia secunda, whereof the Metropolis was Tyana. After this it continued part of the Eastern Empire, till the erecting of the new Empire of Trabezond; together with which it fell unto the hands of the Turks; by whom the whole Province with the addition of Pontus, is now called Amasia; after the name of that City, which the Beglerbeg of Anatolia honoureth with his residence; and is said to yield yearly to the Grand Seigneur 60000. Ducats.   

6. ARMENIA MINOR.  
ARMENIA MINOR is bounded on the East with Euphrates, which parteth is from Armenia Ma●or; on the South with Mount Taurus, which separates it from Cilicia; on the West and North with a long chain of hills called Mons Scordiscus, by some called Mons Amanus, by others Anti-●aurus, according to the change of places; by which divided from Cappadocia. Of the reason of the name hereafter.  
The Country of the same nature with Cappadocia, before described, in some parts overgrown with Mountains, by which and by the River Euphr●●es so enclosed and fenced, that it is difficult of entrance: in others pleasant and delightful; well watered with sweet streams, and some fair Rivers issuing out of the Mountains, the principal whereof is Melas, so called from the blackness of the water thereof, which falls into the Euphr●●es.  
Divided in the time of the Romans into these four Regions, that is to say, Laviana, Aravena, Me●●ene, lying on the Euphrates; Mar●●●● more within the land towards Cappadocia: each of which had their several C●●ies, whose names are to be found in Ptolemy. The principal 1. Meliten●, the chief City of the Region so called, and the Metropolis of the lesser Armenia. Called afterwards Malaxia, and now Suur: the territory thereof abounding in Oil and Wine, not inferior to the best of Greece. The City said by Onuphrius to be a Colony of the Romans: much spoken of by Eusebius and other writers of Ec● estiasticall story, for the piety of the Christians there inhabiting in the fiery times of Per 〈◊〉 2. Nicopolis, and 3. Oro●●andus in the Mountain Countries; the former built by Pompey, in memory of his victory there obtained against the forces of Tigranes, King of Syria and both Armonia's. 4. Garnace, a well ●ortified town, mentioned by Tac●tus in the twelfth book of his Annals, and by him called Gorneas. 5. Cuous●n, and 6. Arabyssus, memorable for the exile of Saint Crrsostome, Patriarch of Constantinple, confined unto these places by the power and malice of the Empress Eudoxia, by whom hated for his 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in points of faith; who dying afterwards at Comana of Cappadocia, was there interred.  
This Country was once part of Cappadocia, till the Armenians by their incursions and Colonies pessessed themselves of it, and gave unto it the name of Armenia Minor: continuing part of their estate till the war of 〈◊〉 against the Romans. Who being discomfited by Lucullus, fled with two thousand h●rse to the Court of Tigranes the Armenian, who had married his daughter. By whom at first neglected, and not suffered to come into his presence; but afterwards on the apprehension of the common danger more esteemed and set by: insomuch that his royal entertainment there, and the refusal of Tigranes to yield him up when required by the Roman●: occasioned Lucullus to bring his forces into these parts, subduing all before him to the banks of Euphrate: His victories being seconded by Pomper, and confirmed by Augustus, this Country was made a Province of the Roman Empire: the greater Arm●nia, lying on the other side of that River, though conquered also in that war, not being taken into the account of the Roman Provinces, till the time of Traian; Augustus thinking it an high point of wisdom (as no doubt it was) not to extend the Empire beyond those banks. After this it continued Roman, till the declining times of the Eastern Empire; when wasted by the Persians, and subdued by the Turks; by whom called Genech, or as some say Pegia.  
And so much of the Provinces of the Pontic Diocese lying within Anatolia, or Asia Minor; converted to the Christian faith by the two great Apostles of Jews and Gentles; as appeareth by Saint Paul's Epistle to the Galatians, and Saint Peter's to the S●rangers dispersed in Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynnta.   

7. ASIA PROPRIA.  
COme we now to the ASIAN Diocese, and first to that part thereof which Ptolemy and others (for the reasons spoken of before) call Asia Propria. Anciently the most rich and flourishing part of all this 〈◊〉 and so affirmed to be by Tully, who telleth us that the tributes which the Romans had from other places, hardly sufficed to defray the public charges for defence thereof. Asia vero tam opinia est & s●rul●s ut & ubert 〈◊〉 agrorum, & varictate fructuum, & magnitudine pastionis, & multitudine carum rerum quae exportentur, facile omnibus terris antecellit. But as for Asia (saith he) it is so fertile and so rich, that for the fruitfulness of the fields, variety of fruits, largeness of pasture-grounds, and quantity of commodities which were brought from thence; it very easily excelled all other Country's. The fortunes of the several Provinces we shall see anon. Brought under the command of the Persians, they continued subject to that Crown, for some generations: but at last taken from them by the Gretions, under the prosperous ensigns of victorious Alexander. After whose decease, the Empire being divided among his Captains, Asia, fell to the share of Antigonus; whose son Demetrius seized on the Kingdom of Macedonia: and left Asia to Seleucus Nicanor, King of Syria and the East, being also one of Alexander's heirs. The sixth from this Seleucus was Antiochus called the Great who waging war with young Prolomy Philopaters', King of Eg●●t, committed by his father to the protection of the Romans; and otherwise pract●ing against their estate; provoked the Sen ite of Rome to send Scipio (surnamed from his 〈◊〉 victories) A●●aticus against him: who compelled him to forsake Asia, which the Romans presently took into their possions. But finding it agreeable to the present estate of their Affairs (the Kingdom of Mac●denia standing in their way) to make further use of Eumene● King of Pergamus, and the people of Rhodes, who had been aiding to them in the former war; they gave unto Eumenes the Provinces of L●caonia, Phrygia, Mysia, jonia, Lydia, Lycia and Caria to the Rhodians: knowing full well, that they could easily take them back again, when they saw occasion. More hereof in the story of the Kings of Pergamus: on the decease of Artalus the last King thereof, these Provinces returning fully to the power of the Romans.  
It contained only after the account of Cicero, the Provinces of Phrygia, Mysia, Caria, Lydia, as he reck oneth them up in his Oration for Flaccus: computing the two Phrygia's for one Province only, and comprehending Aeolis and jonia, under that of Lydia. But for our more punctual and particular proceeding in it, we will consider it as divided into 1. Phrygia Minor. 2. Phrygia Mayor. 3. Mysia. 4. Aeolis and jonia,, or Asia more especially so called. 5. Lydia, and 6. Caria.   

8. PHRYGIA MINOR.  
PHRYGIA MINOR, is bounded on the East with Mysia, interposing betwixt it and the Greater Phrygia; on the West, with the Hellespont; on the North, with the Proponis; on the Sourh, with the Aegean Sea. Called Phrygia from Phryx a River in the Greater Phrygia; or as some say, from Phryxus, the son of Athamas King of Thebes; who flying from the treacherous snares of his Mother in law, did here seat himself. Minor was added to it to distinguish it from the other Phrygia, which being the bigger of the two had the name of Major. It was also called Phrygia Hellespontiaca, from its situation on that Strait: and Troas, from Troas the chief City of it; by which name it occurreth in the book of the Acts. It was called also Epictetus, but the reason of the name I find not, except it came from the Epicteti, a People dwelling on the East parts of Bithynnia, and consequently near this place.  
Chief Rivers of it, 1. Scamander, on whose Banks stood the renowned City of Troy, honoured by Hesiod with the title of Divine Scamander: in which the Virgins of this Country a little before they were to be married used to bathe themselves, and to say these words, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is to say, Take O Scamander my Virginity. Which opportunity, Cimon an Athenian taking, clapped a Coroner of Reeds upon his head, like a River-god, and so deflowered Callirhoe a noble Virgin, then betrothed to another: occasioning thereby the leaving off of this foolish custom. It was also called Xanthus by the Poets, Xanthúmque bibissent, as in Virgil; and watered a little Region called Lycia, of which more anon. 2. Aesopus, parting this little Region from the Lesser Mysia; the boundary of it on the North, as the Promontory called Lectium is the furthest point of it towards the South. 3. Simoeis, now called Simores, falling into the Hellespent not far from the Promontory called Rhateuni (memorable for the Statue and Sepulchre of A axe): but rising out of Mount Ida, an hill of this Region, on which Paris (being by his Father exposed to the fury of wild Beasts) judged the controversy of the golden ball in favour of Venus; respecting neither the great riches of Juno, nor the divine wisdom of Pallas, but transported with a sensual delight fatal in the end to the whole Country.  
Cities of most observation in it, 1. Dard●num or ‛ Dardania, the Town and Patrimony of Aeneas. 2. Assus, mentioned Acts 20. v. 13. by Pliny called, Apollonia; who telleth us that the earth about it is of such a nature that it will consume a dead body in forty days. 3. Trajanopolis, whose name declareth its founder 4. Sigaeum the Port-town to Troy, near a noted Promontory of the same name. 5. Troy, situate on the River Scamander, the beauty and glory of the East: called Ilium, and Pergamus for the reason to be shown anon. A famons Town, from the people whereof, all Nations des●e to fetch their original. The beauty of it may be (as some write) yet seen in the ruins, which with a kind of majesty entertain the beholder: the walls of large circuit, consisting of a black hard stone cut foursquare; some remnants of the Turrets which stood on the walls, and the fragments of great Marble Tombs and monuments of curious workmanship. But certainly these are not the ruins of that Ilium, which was destroyed by the Grecians, but 6. Troas or New Troy, built some four miles from the situation of the old, by Lysimachus, one of Alexander's Captains, who peopled it from the neighbouring Cities, and called it Alexandria, or Troas Alexandri, in honour of Alexander the Great who begun the work, but lived not to bring it to any perfection. In following times called Troas only, and by that name mentioned Acts 20. v. 6. then the Metropolis of this Province, now a ruin only, but every day made more ruinous than other by the Turks, who carry daily the stones and Pillars of it to Constantinople to adorn the houses of the Bassas. 7. Scamandria, a strong piece, but of later foundation, cunningly surprised by Ottoman the first King or the Turks, in the time of a funeral. Now concerning old Ilium, the buildings, glories, and fall of it, take this story with you.  

The Kings of TROY.  
A. M.  
2487. 1. Dardanus son to Corinthus King of Corinth, having killed his brother Jasius, fled into this Country, where he built this City, calling it Dardania; according to that verse of Virgil, 
Dardanus Iliacae primus pater urbis & author.  
Both of Troy Town, and Trojan race  
Dardanus the first founder was.   
2518. 2. Erichthonius, of whom little memorable. 75.  
2593. 3. Tros the son of Erichthonius, who so much beautified and enlarged the City of Dardania, that from thenceforth it was called Troja, and the people Troes. By supporting the unnatural malice of Saturn, against his son Jupiter, he lost his own son Ganymedes: who being taken prisoner by Jupiter, who carried the Eagle for his Ensign, is by the Poets said to have been snatched up to Heaven by an Eagle. 60.  
2653. 4. Ilus the son of Tros, who built the Regal Palace called Ilium; and did withal so enlarge the City, and added so much Omament and beauty to it, that it is frequently called Ilium, and the People Iliaci. The many Towers and Turrets of it, were of his erection, which being by the Greeks called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and sometimes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, occasioned the whole Cine to be called Pergamus. 54.  
2707. 5. Laomedon, who new-built Troy: which afterwards Hercules and the Grecians (justly conceiving displeasure against the treacherous King) twice took and defaced; Laomedon himself being slain the latter time. 36.  
2743. 6. Priamus, who re-edified Troy; but giving leave to his son Paris to ravish Helena, wife to Mevelaus King of Sparta, forced the greeks to renew their ancient quarrel: who aftee a ten years' siege, forced the Town, having lost of their own men 860000. and killed 666000. of the Trojans, and their Associates, A. M. 2783.   
So as that of Ovid was most true, 
jam seges estubi Troja fuit, resecandaque, falce,  
Luxuriat Phygio sanguine pinguis humus.  
Corn fit for scythes now grows where Troy once stood,  
And the soyles fatted with the Phrygian blood.   
Concerning the taking of this Town, two things are to be considered First, whether the Grecians in these ten years lay continually before it, and it seems they did not: but that rather they did beat up and down, wasting the Country. and robbing the Seas, for the first nine years; and in the tenth only said a formal siege. This is the more probable, because that in the tenth year of the war, Priam is recorded by Homer in the third of his Iliads, to have sat on a high Tower; and to have learned of Helen the names and qualities of the Greek Commanders: which he could not be thought ignorant of, if they had so long together lain in eye-reach. Secondly, by what means the Town was taken, and here we find a difference. Eor some Historians tell us, that Aeneas and Antenor, being either weary of the war, or discontented that it was not managed by their sole advice, or otherwise corrupted by the Grecians, betrayed it to the enemy: but this Virgil could not brook, as prejudicial to his Aeneas; whom he intended to make the pattern of a complete Prince. He therefore telleth us of a woodex-horse: wherein divers of the Greek Princes lay hidden, which by Sinon one of the Grecians, was brought to Troy-gates: and that the people desirous of that monument of the enemy's flight, made a breach in their walls, that gate not being high enough to receive it. And that this fiction of Virgil might be grounded on history; it is thought by some, that over the Scaean Gate where the greeks entered, was the portraiture of a large and stately horse: and by others, that the walls were battered by a wooden Engine called an Horse, as the Romans in after ages used a like Engine called a Ram. Neither of which is much improbable: but with me persuade not the integrity of Antenor or Aeneas, for whose sakes the fable of the wooden horse was first invented.  
The City being thus destroyed, the Trojans who remained in the Country, when Aeneas and Antenor had forsaken it, began to think of some other place for their habitation: which having often shifted they fixed at last by advice of an Oracle, some four miles from the former; giving it the name of Ilium. A poor and sorry village when Alexander came thither; who in the Temple of Minerva, (the only one they had, and a mean one too) offered up his own shield and took down another, which he used after in his fights against the Persians: honouring it with gifts, and promising the people to rebuild and enlarge their City. But what he lived not to make good was performed by Lysimachus, who gave it the name of Alexandria, next called the Alexandrian Troas, at last Troas simply. A free City it continued till the war of Mithridates against the Romans; in the course whereof Fimbria a Roman Quaestor having feditiously slain the Consul Valerius Flaccus in Bythinia, and made himself Master of the Army, being refused entrance here as a thief and a Rebel, besieged the City, and in the space of eleven days took it. And when he boasted that he had done as much in eleven days as Agamemnon and the Greeks could do in as many years, one of the Ilians tartly answered, That they wanted an Hector to defend them. Afterwards Julius Caesar emulous of Alexander's attempts, and descended from Julus of Trojan race, restored them to their liberty, and enlarged their territories: a Colony, and an University of the Romans of no mean esteem. But time and war, and the barbarity of the Turks, have brought it unto rubbish, as before was said.  
In the distributing of the Provinces of the Roman Empire, this little Region, with that of Mysia Hellespontiaca adjoining to it, made up the Province called by the name of Hellespontus, subject with Aeolis, jonia, and the Asian Isles, to the exempt jurisdiction of the Proconsul of Asia. Following the fortunes of Constantinople till the taking of that City by the Latins, it became then subject to the Greek Emperors residing at Nice: conquered not long after by the Turks of the Selzuccian family. In the division of whose Empire on the death of the second Atadine, the whole Province of Hellespont, with part of the greater Mysia, and Aeolis, adjoining to them, and some part of Lydia, were seized upon by Carasus a man of great power amongst the Turks; who here erected a small kingdom, called from him Carasia, or Carasi-illt: long since swallowed up by the Ottoman race, in the time of Orcanes, son of Ottoman, and the second King of that house.   

9 PHRYGIA MAJOR.  
PHRYGIA MAJOR is bounded on the East with Galitia; on the West with Mysia interposed betwixt it and the lesser Phrygia; on the North with Metapontus, or Pontus specially so called; on the South with Lyd●●. Called Phrygia for the reasons before laid down; the word Major being added for distinctions sake, because the greater of the two.  
The People of this Country were anciently more superstitious than the other Asians, as appeareth by the rites used in the Sacrifices of Cybele, and some other Goddesses said to be also the Inventors of Augury, and 〈◊〉 kids of Divination. And yet for the most part men of after-wits, and all for had I wist; whence 〈◊〉 Proverb, Sero sapiwt Phryges', applied to those who wanted forecast, and knew better to lament mis 〈◊〉 then to keep them off; and used not to bethink themselves of what would follow till it was too 〈◊〉. A people noted for effeminacy and lightness of conversation: and for fear they should not of themselves be wanton enough, their very Music was so fitted as to dispose them to laseiviousnesse. Where by the way, I find three sorts of Music spoken of amongst the Ancients: the first, that which Aristotle calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because it settled and composed the affections; and Boëtius, the Lydian Music, because much used by that people, before corrupted by long ease and ill example. It consisted principally of long notes or Spondees; such as is that supposed to be which Elisha called for, Kings 1. chap. 3. v. 15. to invite the spirit of prophecy to him, and was played by David before Saul to drive away the ill spirit from him. And of this sort was the Church-music of the Primitive times, fitted to calm men's passions, and raise their devotions; ut per oblectamenta aurium (as Saint Augustine hath it) assurgat enimus ad pietat is affectum, that by the pleasure of the ears the passions might be calmed, and the soul inflamed with pious and devout affections. The second sort is that which Aristotle calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or Active (as the other 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or meral) commending it before the other in the education of youth, because more stirring them to action; consisting of Dactyls, or one long note and two short ones, by him and Boëtius both called D●ri●n, as most peculiar to that people. The third and last by the Philosopher called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or ravishing, because it unhingeth the affections and stirreth men to lascivious gestures, and wanton thoughts; consisting of short notes or Tribrachies; Boëtius terms it Phrygian, as most in use amongst this loose and ungoverned nation; such as the French Music in our age. A sort of Music forbidden to be used by Aristotle but upon the Theatre, for contentation of the rude and unpolished people, by reason of that influence which it had upon men's behaviour. Mutatâ Musicâ (saith the Orator) mutantur & mores; Curandum itaque ut Musica quam gravissima & sedatissima retineatur, that is to say, the change of Music maketh an alteration of manners; care therefore to be taken in the Commonwealth, that the Music be composed and grave, and such only used. But see how fane this fiddling humour hath led me out of the way; I return again.  
The Country very rich and pleasant, well watered with the River Sangarius and Marsyas. Of which the former hath its spring or fountain in this Country, but his fall in the Euxine; on the banks whereof standech the City Gordium, and many others of good note. The later was so called from one Marsyas, who striving with Apollo for prcheminence in Music, was by him flayed: which fact (say the Poets) was so lamented, that from the tears of the mourners grew this River. The chief Towns are 1. Gordior, the seat of Gordius, who from a ploughman being raised and chosen King of this Kingdom; placed the furniture of his wain and Oxen in the Temple of Apollo, tied in such a knot; that the Monarchy of the world was promised to him that could untie it: which when Alexander had tried and could not undo it, he cut it with his sword 2. Midaeium, the seat of Midas, son to this Gordiu●, who being not a little covetous, entreated of Bacchus, that what ever he touched should be turned into gold; which petition granted, he was almost starved, his very victual turned into gold till he had repealed his wish; and afterward for preferring Pan's pipe before Apollo's Harp, his head was adorned with a comely pair of Ass' ears. 3. Colosse where dwelled the Colossians, to whom Saint Paul writ one of his Epistles. 4. Pesinus where the Goddess Cybele being worshipped, was called Dea Pesinuncia. The Romans were once told by an Oracle, that they should be Lords of the world, if they could get this Goddess into their possession. Hereupon they send to the Phrygians to demand it. The Phrygians willing to please a potent neighbour especially the Romans, being their Countrymen, as descended from Aeneas and his Troyans'; granted their request, and the Goddess is shipped away for Rome. But behold the unluckiness of fortune. The Ship, Goddess and all made a stand in Tiber; neither could it be advanced forward by force or art. It happened that one of the Vestal Virgins named Claudia, being suspected of unchastity, resolved to put herself upon this experiment: and fastening her girdle to the ship prayed to the Goddess, that if she were causelessely suspected, the ship might be suffered to go forward; which was no sooner heard then granted, Claudia drawing the ship up the water to Rome; where I leave the people wondering at the miracle, as well they might. But to return unto the City, it stands in the borders of Galatia, and is by some made to be the City of Gordius, and the Gordian knot placed in it also; but neither rightly. Not far off stood the mountain Dindyme, overlooking the City, in which the Priests of Cybele had their usual residence, thence called Dindymene. 5. Apamea, situate not far from the banks of Maeander, anciently a most flourishing Emporie; & the Metropolis of the whole Country, till Constantine divided it into the two Provinces of Salutaris, and Pacatiana: making 6. Synnada the Metropolis of the first. 7. Hi●rapolis, and 8. Laodicea, two noted Cities in those times, the principal of the other Province. 9 Juliopolis, and 10. Tiberiopolis, so called from the Emperors to whose honour dedicated. 11. Dorylaeum, etc. Not known unto the ancient Writers, but of more note in modem stories, are 1. Sagnta, the habitation of Etrogul, Father of Ottoman the first King of the Turks. 2. Chara-chisar, by the Grecians called Melampyrgos or the Black Tower. 3. Billezuga. 4. Eineg●oll, places of consequence and importance taken by the said Ottoman from the Christians in the first rise of his fortunes.  
As for the Phrycians, they descended (as was shown before) from Gomer the eldest son of Japhet, and Ask●naz the eldest son of Gomer: of which, Gomer first placed himself in the mountainous Countries of Albania; and afterwards in the more pleasant plains of the Greater Phrygi●, where the City of Cimmeris (the posterity of Gomer being generally called Cimmerians) did preserve his memory. And as for A●kenaz, he first took up his dwelling in the Lesser Phrygia, and the banks of the Hellespont, where was anciently a City and Territory called Ascania, some Isles adjoining called Insuloe Ascanioe, the name of Ascanius also very frequent in Troy itself. An ancient people they were doubtless, esteemed the ancientest of the world by Psamniticus King of Egypt, upon this experiment. Desitous to inform himself to what Nation the privilege of Antiquity did of right belong, he caused two Children to be kept in a fold, where they were suckled by goats; all mankind being prohibited upon very great penalties; to have recourse to them. All the language which the children learned from their speechless nurses, was no more than Bec, which in the Phrygian language signifieth Bread, and being of no signification at all in any other which was then known to the Egyptians, gave up the Verdict on their side. But other Nations of the world not yielding to this sentence, by a Writ of Error, or an Ad meliùs inquirendum impannell'd a new Jury; wherein it was pronounced on the Scythians side, Seytharum gens semper antiquissima. Where by the way, Goropius Becanus makes the like use of this experiment, to prove the High-Dutch to be the Original or Mother-tongue of the world: because Becker in that language signifieth, as with us a Baker, or a maker of Bread. In this Country reigned Niobe, who preferring herself before Latona, the mother of Phoebus and Diana, had her Children slain before her face by an unseen means, and was herself turned into a stone, as the Poet's fable. Here also reigned Tantalus, who being rich, and wanting wisdom to make use of it: is feigned to stand in hell up to the chin in water, and that too under a tree whose fruit toucheth his lips; yet both the one and the other fly from him, when he offereth at them Of which thus Ovid, 
— Tibi Tantale nullae  
Deprenduntur aquae, quaeque imminet, effugit arbour.  In English thus. 
Thou canst not, Tantalus, those waters taste,  
The tree just at thy lips, flies off as fast.  But this race of Kings being worn out by the tyranny of time or war, the Phrygians were made subject to the Kings of Lydia; continuing under their command till the conquest of Lydia by the Persians: with which they fell together to the Crown thereof, not made the stronger by the accession of effeminate Subjects. Gained from them by the sword of Alexander, they fell unto Antigonus one of his great Captains: and on his overthrow at the battle of Ipsus, to Seleucus the Conqueror, the first King of that race: following the same fortune after that with the rest of Asia, till they came to be possessed by the Romans, and made a Province of that Empire. But Constantine laying to it the Greater Mysia made two Provinces of it: the one called Salutaris, from some miraculous cures there wrought by the Arck-Angel Michael, as was then generally believed: the other called Pacatiana, from Pacatianus, who in the time of the said Constantine was Praefect for the Praetorium of the East, and divers years before had began his honours with the Lieutenantship of Britain. In the declining of the Constantinopolitans it became a prey unto the Turkts of the Selzuccian Family; possessed by them till the death of Aladine the last King of that race: when seized upon together with the Greater Mysia, and those parts of Lydia which lay next unto it, by Aidin, a great Turkish Prince, and made a peculiar Kingdom, called by his name Aidinia, or Aidin-Illi; extorted shortly from his heirs by the house of Ottoman.   

10. MYSIA.  
INterposed betwixt the two Phrygia's lieth the Country of MYSIA, bounded on the East with Phrygia Major; on the West with Phrygia Minor, and the Aegean Sea; on the North with parts of Bythinia, Propontis, and the Hellespont; and on the South with part of Lydia, Aeolis, and the Aegean. So called from the Mysians, the Inhabitants of it.  
Whether these Mysians were originally a Phrygian Nation, or some interlopers which thrust in afterwards amongst them, I find not determined. Most probable it is they were natural Phrygians; being as superstitious in the worship of their several Deities, as any Phrygian of them all: and that they had this name given them by the Lydians, from the abundance of Beech-trees which grow amongst them, by them called Mysae. A people of so base and contemptible quality that it grew into a common proverb to call a fellow of no worth Mysiorum postremus.  
The principal Mountain of this Country is that called Olympus, situate in the north-parts hereof bordering towards Bithyma: which as it is called Olympus Mysius, to difference it from Olympus in Greece; so the people of the Greater Mysia, where this Mountain is, are called Olympeni, to difference them from the Mysii or Masi of Europe. And as for Rivers, those of most note besides Aesopus, parting it from Troas, or the Lesser Phrugia. are 1. Caicus, on whose banks stands the City of Pergamus, and from thence passeth into the Aegean Sea, at the Bay of Eloea, and 2. the famous River of Granicus, which hath his fountain in Mysia Major, and passing through Mysia Minor, falleth into the Propontis. A River memorable for the Victory which Alexander obtained on the banks hereof, in his first essay against the Persians: by whom upon the first noise of his preparations he was so slighted, that Darius' King of Persia, gave command to his Leiutenants residing in Asia Minor, that they should take him alive, whip him with rods, and so convey him to his presence, A notoble example of pride and fall of the Persians. But Alexander soon taught them another lesson. For though the Persians were possessed of the higher banks of the River, with an intent to stop his passage; yet he resolved to charge them in the face of their strength: knowing full well that if he could beat them on a place of so great advantage, he should not only lessen them in point of reputation, but beget an opinion of himself that he was invincible. And so accordingly it proved, the Persians being vanquished by him, and all the Kingdoms and Provinces of this Asia submitting to him on the noise of the Victory (as an Enemy not to be resisted upon equal terms) some few Towns excepted. And therefore it was wisely advised by Machiavelli, that he who takes upon him to defend a passage, should with his ablest forces oppose the Assailant; because in all invasions where the Nations invaded have been beaten upon a great advantage of place, as defence of Rivers, Streets, and Mountains; they do not only dishearten their Soldiers from dealing afterwards on even ground with that enemy, but leave no hope unto their fellows and partakers, of being succoured and defended by such weak Protectors. Which caution if the Persians Commanders had observed either here, or at Pylae Cilicia spoken of hereafter; Alexander had not so easily subverted the Persian Monarchy. But the fatal period of it was now drawing on, and the men either naturally Cowards, or else prodigiously besotted.  
It is divided commonly into Mysia Minor, or the Lesser Mysia, which lying on the West towards Troas and the Hellespont, is called sometimes Mysia Hellespontiaca; and joined unto Troas by the Emperor Constantine, made up that Province which he called the Consular Hellespont: and Mysia Major, called from Olympus which was in it, Mysia Olympina, and the Inhabitants Olympeni; which joined by that Emperor to the western parts of Phrygia Major, made up that Province which he caused to be called Phrygia Satutaris, for the reason formerly delivered.  
Places of most observation in the Lesser Mysia, were 1. Abydus, standing on the narrowest of the Hellespont, opposite unto Sestos in Thrace; first built by the Milesians with the consent of Gyges' King of Lydia, to whom the Country than belonged. Memorable both in the ancient and modern story. In ancient story for the famous resolution of the Inhabitants, when besieged by Philip the Father of Perseus' King of Maccdm. For being brought by him into some distress, and hopeless of good conditions from him, the young men of the Town who had bound themselves by oath to die rather than fall into his hands, set fire thereof, and barbarously slew themselves with as many of the women and children as could be met with. Which news being brought to Philip, moved so little compassion, that he said he would give the Abydeni three days leisure to die; and therefore would not suffer any of his soldiers to enter the Town, then set open to him either to take the spoil thereof, or hinder this bloody execution, till the three day's end. In Modern story no less memorable for the taking of it by the Turks, in the reign of Orcanes the son of Ottoman, through the treason of the Governors' daughter: who bewitched with the person and valour of Abdevachmen, a young Turkish Gallant, whom she had beheld from the Towers of the Castle, threw a letter to him as he drew near the wall, wherein she manifested her affection, and promised to make him master of that fortress, if he would persuade his General to raise the siege, and come with a strong party in the dead time of the night to receive it from her, which was done accordingly. The Town continuing ever since in the power of the Turks, well fortified, and one of the two Castles spoken of before, which defend Constantinople on that side from all force by Sea. 2. Cyzicus, seated in the Propontis, in an Island of the same name also, but so near the Continent that it joined to it by two bridges. The Metropolis of the Consular Hellespont, by consequence an Arch-Bishops See in the prosperous times of Christianity; as were all other Cities in the Roman Empire, which were the Mother-Cities or Metropoles of their several Provinces. A town of wonderful strength and beauty, when first known to the Romans, called therefore by L. Florus, the Rome of Asia: who gives this character also of it, Cyzicum nobilis civet as, arce, moenibus, portu, turribusq, marmorets Asiatica plagoe littora illustrat, that is to say, that the noble City of Cyzicum by the excellency or the Walls, Bulworks Haven, and Towers of Marble, doth beautify and illustrate the Shores of Asia. Honoured amongst many other goodly and magnificent buildings with a glorious Temple, the pillars whereof being four Cubits thick, and fifty Cubits high, were each of one entire stone only; the whole fabric all of polished Marble, every stone joined unto the other with a line of Gold. In vain besieged by Mithridates in the time of his war, who lost before it by the sword, pestilence and famine no sewer than 300000 men; and yet could not force it. Afterwards ruined by an Earthquake, the falling Sickness of the East, as before is said, it could never be restored to its former lustre: the very ruins of it daily made more ruinous by transporting the stones and Marbles to Constantinople, for the embellishing of that City. 3. Lampsacus on the same Propontis, in which the beastly god Priapus was worshipped in as beastly a figure: quem non denudo (as wittily Lactantius scoffeth it) ne quid appareat risu dignum; supposed to be the same with the Syrian or Phanecian Baal, so often mentioned in the Scriptures. For this and on some other reasons, Alexander had conceived against it such an high displeasure when he was in Asia, that he resolved to raze it to the very ground. And seeing Anaximenes coming to him as an Ambassador from the Town to obtain his favour, commanded him to hold his peace, and swore as by way of prevention that he would deny whatsoever he requested of him: whereupon Anaximenes entreated him to destroy the City, which now for his oaths sake he could not do; and so this wicked City at that time escaped. 4. Parium, so called, as some say, from Parius, the son of Jason 2 Colony at first of the Milesians, of the Romans afterwards: Troas and this, the only two Roman Colonies in all the Province. By Homer called Adrastia: as Lampsacus in the same Author is called Pityusa. More in the Land. are 5. Scepscis. 6. Hieragerme, both mentioned by Ptolemy, but of more antiquity than fame.  
Chief Cities in MYSIA MAJOR or OLYMPENA, are 1. Dainta, in the North-parts not far from Olympus. 2. Apolloma, near a large Lake sacred to Apollo, in the same parts also. 3. Paloe Scepsis, or Scepsis Vetus, on a Bay of the Aegean Sea, joining upon Troas, or the Lesser Phrygia. 4. Adramyttium mentioned, Acts 27. where Saint Paul took ship to go to Rome. 5. Antandrus on the same Sea also, now called Saint Dimitri, named at first Cimmeris from the Gomerites or Cimmeritans here inhabiting (which showeth that Mysia anciently was a part of Phrygia) afterwards Edonis, and at last Antandeus, either because built or repaired rather by the men of Andros, an Island of the Aegean, spoken of before amongst the Cycladeses; or because the Grecians having taken Polydorus the son of Priam, from the King of Thrace, received this City for his ransom, or rather in exchange for him as the word doth intimate. 5. Protoselene, on the same coast also. More in the land. 6. Proepemissus. 7. Trosenopols'. 8. Alydda, of which little memorable. 9 Pergamus, the Regal City of this tract, situate in a goodly plain on the banks of the River Cycus, of a small Town or fortresle made a stately City by the Kings hereof, and beautified with an excellent Library containing 200000. Volumes; for the writing or transcribing whereof, Parchment was here first invented, which from hence to this day is called Pergnmenum. Here also were those costly hangings first invented which we now call Tapestry; by the Romans called first Aulaea, from Aula, signifying a Hall; the Hall of Attalus King hereof (by whom invented) being the first room furnished and adorned herewith. Here was born Galen the famous Physican, living very healthfully to the age of 140 yearsthiss health preserved to so great age, by these means specially. 1. Never eating or drinking his fill. 2. Never eating any thing that was raw; 3. Alwates carrying about him some sweet perfumes. Finally, this was one of the seven Churches to which Saint John writ his Revelation. For though it were originally a City of Mysia, yet being near unto the borders of Lydia, it was reckoned as a City of the Lydian Asia; within the limits whereof those seven Chareche were all comprehended.  
As for the Kings hereof which flourished here for some ages in such wealth and splendour, they came but from a poor and obscure original. The first of them one Sphiletaerus, an Eunuch, belonging to Antigonus one of the Great Alexander's greatest Captains; and after his death to Lysimachus King of Thrace, by whem trusted with his money and accounts. Fearing the fury of his Master then grown old and tyrannous, he seized on the Castle of Pergamus, and therein on 90000 talents, which he offered with his service unto Seleucus the first King of Syria. But both Lysimachus and Seleucus dying shortly after, he kept the money to himself, and reigned in this City as an absolute King: leaving the Kingdom at his death to his Brother Eumenes, no better man than a poor Carter, till raised by the fortunes of this Eunuch. Eumenes' furnished with money though of no great territory, was able by the Gauls and other Mercinaries; not only to preserve himself against the Syrian Kings who laid claim to his City, but also to enlarge his bounds as he saw occasion. But the main improvement of this Kingdom happened in the dales of Eumenes the second, the son of Attalus, the brother and Successor of this Eumenes: who being useful to the Romans in their wars against Philip of Macedon, and Antiochus the Great, King of Swir, was liberally rewarded by them with the Provinces of Lydia, Phrygia, Aeolis, jonia, Troas, and both the Mysia's; which they had taken from Antiochus in the end of that war. The rest of the affairs hereof till it fell in fine unto the Romans, taken here in this short Catalogue of 

The Kings of Pergamus.  
A. M.  
3668. 1. Philetaerus, the first King of Pergamus, of whom before. 20.  
3688. 2. Eumenes, Brother, or as some say, the Brother's son of Philetaerus, vanquished Antiochus surnamed Hierax, in a fight near Sardis, and awed Seleucus Callinicus, both Kings of Syria. 22.  
3710. 3. Autalus' Brother of Eumenes, restored Ariarathes the Cappadocian to his Kingdom, and discomfited the Gauls, compelling them to keep themselves within the Country since named Galatia. A Confederate of the Romans, and by them much courted.  
3754. 4. Eumenes' II. Son of Attalus gratified by the Romans with the spoils of Antiochus. He was an hereditary Enemy to the Kingdom of Macedon, which he laboured the Romans to destroy, as in fine they did; and thereby finding no more use of these Pergamon Kings, began to grow to less liking with them.  
3782. 5. Attalus II. Brother of Eumenes, to whom the Kingdom was offered by the Romans in the life of his Brother then less gracious with them; but he most gallantly refused it, to the great indignation of the Roman Senate.  
3792. 6. Fumene; III. Brother of Attalus the second, and Tutor or Protector to his Nephew Attalus, in whose minority he governed the estate as King.  
3813. 7. Attalus III. Son of Attalus the second, succeeded on the death of his Uncle Eumenes, and having held the Kingdom but five years only deceased without issue, & bequeathed it by his last Will unto the Romans. But before the Romans had possession of so great a Legacy, Aristonicus the base Son of Eumenes made himself master of Mindus, Colophon, Samos, and many other Towns and estates hereof. Against whom the Romans making war were aided by the greatest part of the Asian Kings; not seeing their own danger and destruction to draw near unto them, by letting such a potent neighbour come amongst them to undo them all. But the Romans got little by this war, though they had the better of it. For being now made masters of the riches and sweets of Asia, they took with them their vices also: growing thereby to great riot, and unparallelled luxury: which overcame the rigour and severity of their former discipline, and made them apt for faction, and those bloody quarrels, which proved the ruin of their State. So truly was it said by Justine, Sic Asia facta Romanorum, cum opibus suis vitia quoque sua Roman transmisit. This Kingdom taking it in the largest extent thereof being thus subdued and settled as a Roman Province., had the name of Asia, according to the name of the Greater Concinent; by P●o●omie and others called Asiapropria: continuing, under the subjection of the Roman Emperors till the translating of the Imperial seat unto Constantinople; as after that unto the Emperors of the East, till conquered piece-meal by the Turks of the Selznccian family. Which being ended in the person of Aladine the second, those parts hereof which lay next Troas, made up the Kingdom of Carasan, or Carasa-Illi, as those which had been laid to the Greater Phrygia; made up the Ardintant; both of them swallowed up long since by the Ottoman Kings, the Accessories running the same fortune as the Principals did.     

11. ASIA SPECIALIUS DICTA.  
BEsides the Proper Asia spoken of before, containing all the Provinces of the Pergamon Kingdom, there was one part hereof, which anciently had the name of Asia, before it was communicated to the greater Continent, or this whole Peninsula. This for distinctions sake the Romans called the PROCONSULAR ASIA; because committed to the government of one of their Proconsul's (who had his residence in Ephesus the principal City of this Province) together with the Consular Hellespont, and the Province of the Isles of Asia. This we have spoken of before, as also how the Country lying about Ephesus, had more especially the name of Asia, than any other: so specially that Erasmus thereupon inferreth that by Asia in the New Testament, (but more peculiarly in the Acts) is meant that part of Asia in which Ephesus standeth.  
This being agreed on for the name, we shall bond it on the East with Lydia, whereof it was anciently a part; on the West, with the Aegean Sea; on the North, with Mysia; and on the South, with Caria. And having so bounded it, we shall divide it into the two Regions of AEOLIS and JONIA: that of Aeolis lying on the North, towards Mysix; as jonia doth upon the South, towards Caria: possessed both of them by Greek Nations, and of them so named.  
Principal Towns in AEOLIS, are 1. Acarnea, over against the Isle of Lesbos, the Royal seat sometimes of the Tyrant Hermias, who being once a Scholar of Aristotle's but unworthy of so good a Master, seized on this City, and here committed so great cruelties, that at last he was taken by the people, sowed in an Ox's hide, and so baited to death. 2. Pitane, on a little River so named, falling into Caicus, not far from the influx or fall thereof into the Aegean: in which Town they had an Art of making bricks which would swim on the water. 3. Elaea, on the mouth of Caicus, the Port-Town to Pergamus. 4. Myrina, afterwards in honour of Augustus., called Sebastopolis. 5. Cene, by Strabo called Cane, by Mela, Cannae, not far from a Promontory of the same name. 6. Cuma, the principal and greatest of all Aeolis, the birthplace of Ephorus a learned man of elder times, and the habitation of Sibylla surnamed Cumana, to difference her from Sibylla Cumaea, so named from Cumae, a City of the Realm of Naples. 7. Phocaea, a Colony of the Athenians, so named from the multitudes of Sea-Calves (the Greeks call them Phocae) which thrust themselves a shore at the building of it. The people hereof over-bundened by the Persians, and impatient of so great servitude as was laid upon them; forsook their Country, binding themselves by a fearful oath, never more to return unto it: and after many and long wander came at last into Gaul, where they founded the famous City of Marseilles.  
The Inhabitants of this little Region are by Josephus said to be descended of Elisha the Son of Javan, who therefore calleth them by the name of Elisaei. And it is possible enough that so it was: Elisha being planted in Greece where he gave name to Elis, one of the Provinces of Peloponesus; from whence some of his race in succeeding times might pass over into Asia, and possess those coasts. For that they were a Greek people is confessed by all; the Aeolic dialect or phrase of speech, taking name from hence. Not otherwise much mentioned in the course of story, then as partakers of the same fortunes with the rest of their Asian Neighbours before related, and so not necessary to be now repeated.  
JONIA, as a larger tract, requires a more particular & punctual description. For here the River Lycus falleth into the Maeander, and here Maeander and Caystrus, two of the most famous Rivers of Asia Minor: (of which more hereafter) fall into the Aegean. Here is the renowned City of Ephesus, hotoured with one of the world's seven wonders, the long abode of Saint Paul, and the death and sepulture of Saint John; the Promontory Trogyllium, with a little Isle adjoining of the same name, mentioned Acts 20. v. 15.  
Principal Cities of this tract, are 1. Myas, on an arm of the Sea, assigned together with Lampsacw, and Magnesia, by Actaxerxes to Themistocles; when being banished his own Country he fled to his greatest Enemy for entertainment; and there met with more safety than Athens would, and more honour than it could afford him: So that he well might say (as he often did) Periissem nisi periissem. And on the other side, the King was so overjoyed at his coming to him, (as having now upon his side the man who had most hindered him in the conquest of Greece) that many times in his sleep he was heard to clap his hands and say, Habeo Themistoclem Atheniensem. In aftertimes, the water drawing further off, the soil brought forth such an innumerable multitude of fleas, that the inhabitants were fain to forsake the City, and with their bag and baggage to retire to Miletus: Nothing hereof being left but the name and memory in the time of Pausan●as. 2. Erythra, memorable for the habitation of one of the Sibyle, from hence called Sihrlla Erythroea; of which Prophetesses we shall speak more when we come to afric. 3. Lebedus, of most note in the elder-times for those public Plaics, which were here annually held in the honour of Bacchus. 4. Clazomene, situate in a small Eyelet, near unto the shore, of much esteem amongst the Romans for the wines there growing; and no less honoured by the Asianus for a beautiful Temple of Apollo seated near unto it. 5. Priene, the birthplace of Bias, one of the seven Wisemen of Greece. 6 Ipsus, renowned for the great battle betwixt Antigonus and Seleucus, two of Alexander's chief Commanders; the Victory wherein falling to Seleucus, with the death of his Adversary, estated him in all the Conquests of his Master, except Egypt only. 7. Teos the birthplace of Anacreon that lascivious and drunken Poet, hence surnamed Te●us; the Ovid of the Grecians both for wit and wantonness: of both which it may well be doubted whether the smoothness of the verse, or the wantonness of their expressions be the more predominant. 8. Smyrna, a fair and ancient City, on a Bay thence named the Bay of Smyrna: the greatest part whereof lay towards the Sea, but the fairest on the side of an hill overlooking the waters. Destroyed by the Lydians, it was re-edified by Antigonus and Lysimachus, two of Alexander's great Commanders; of good account in the time of the Romans, and one of the seven Asian Churches, to which Saint John inscribed his Revelation: Much traded and frequented to this very day especially for Chamlets, Grograines, and such stuffs; made for the most part at Ancyra the Chief Town of Galatia, and here vended to the foreign Merchant. For government of the trade whereof, and of other commodities of these parts, the English Merchants have an Officer called the Consul of Smyrna. In old time there was in it amongst others, a goodly Temple, dedicated unto Homer, said to be born in this City, and to have writ his Poems in a Cave hard by. 9 Colophon, most memorable for the Inhabitants of it, so skilled in horsemanship, that the side on which they served in war was sure of Victory; whereupon Colophonem addere, to put a good end to any business, grew into a Proverb. It was also another of those Cities, which so ambitiously contended for the birth of Homer; of which there were seven in all, as the old Verses tell us, saying 
Septem urbes certant de stirpe insignis Homeri  
Smyrna, Rhodos, Colophon, Salamis, Chios, Argos, Athenae.  Whether Homer purposely concealed his Country, that all places might challenge him for theirs, I am not able to say. But sure I am that Paterculus speaketh it in the commendation of Hesiodus (the next Greek Poet after him in course of time) that he had specified his birthplace: Qui vitavit ne in id quod Homerus inciderit, patriam & parents testatus est. 10. Ephesus, the Metropolis of the Roman Asia, and the seat of the Primate of the Asian Diocese: memorable in the purest times of Christianity, for being the Episcopal See of Timothy the Evangelist, the first Bishop hereof. 2ly In that Saint Paul directed to the people of it, one of his Epistles; and 3ly for the burial of Saint John the Apostle, who by some learned men of the elder times, is said to have gone alive into his Grave, and that he is not dead but sleeping; building that thought upon that saying which went abroad among the Brothers, that that Disciple should not die. John 21. v. 23. And no less memorable amongst the Gentiles for that snmptuous and magnificent Temple here consecrated to Diana: which for the largeness, furniture, and workmanship of it, was accounted one of the Wonders of the World. The length thereof said to be 425. foot, 220. foot in breadth, supported with 127. Pillars of Marble, seventy foot in height, of which twenty seven were most curiously engraver, and all the rest of Marble polished. The model of it contrived by one Ctesiphon, and that with so much art and curiosity of Architecture, that it took up two hundred years before it was finished. When finished it was fired seven times, the last time by Erastrotus, only to get himself a name: which happening on the same night inwhich Alexander the Great was born, gave occasion to that weighty but witty scoff, that Diana (she was counted one of the Goddesses of midwifery) could not attend the preservation of her Temple, being then busied at the birth of so great a Prince.  
As for those jones, or jonians, they were no doubt the descendants of Javan the fourth son of Japhet, as hath been shown before in our general Preface: but whether they came hither out of Graecia, or passed from hence into that Country, hath been made a question. The Athenians boasting of themselves to be Aborigines, men growing as it were out of the Soil itself, without any Ancestors, report that those jonians were a Colony of their Plantation. But Hecataeus in Strabo doth affirm the contrary, Saying that the Athenians or jones of Greece, came from those of Asia: for that Attica was anciently called jonia, Plutarch in the life of Theseus doth declare expressly. Most probable it is, that Hecataeus was in the right; these parts of Asia lying so directly in the way from the vallyef Shinaar unto Greece, that Javan may very well be thought to leave some of his company here, when he ferried the rest over to the opposite Continent. I know Pansani as ignorant of their true antiquity, deriveth them from jen the son of Xuthus and grandchild of Deucali●n: wherein he came so near the truth, though he miss the men, that it was the grandson of that man who escaped the flood, from whom both the Athenians, and those jonians had their true Original. In regard of which relations betwixt the Nations, the Athenians gave aid to those jonians against the Persians, who on the overthrow given to Croesus, pretended to the Lordship or Dominion of Asia, and conquered them in the time of Cyrus, the first Persian Monarch. Upon which ground, and the sending of fresh aid to them upon their revolt in the time of Darius, that King first undertook the invasion of Greece.  
After this yielding to the times they followed the fortune of the strongest, subject successively to the Persians, Macedonians, Romans, Constantinopolitans, and Turks; till the death of Aladine before mentioned: when both Aeolis and jonia got a new name, and are now called Sarcan, from Sarachan a Turkish Captain, who on the death of that Aladine seized upon this Country, and erected here a petit Kingdom long since subdued by those of the race of Ottoman.   

12. LYDIA.  
LYDIA is bounded on the East with Phrygia Ma●or, and some part of Pisidia, from which separated by a branch of the Mountain Taurus; on the West, with Aeolis and jonia, or Asia specially so called; on the North, with the Greater Mysia; on the South, with Caria. So called from Lud the Son of Sem, by some of whose posterity it was first inhabited. In the full Latitude and extent thereof, as anciently comprehended in Aeolis and jonia, the adjoining Provinces, it made the Lydian Asia spoken of before; within the verge whereof all the seven Churches were contained, mentioned by Saint John in the Revelation.  
The people of this Country are said to have been the first coiners of money, the first Hucksters and Pedlar's, and the first inventors of dice, ball, chess, and the like games: necessity and hunger thereunto enforcing them, according to that of Persius, Ar●is Magister, ingeniique largitor venture. For being sorely vexed with famine, in the time of Atis, one of the progenitors of Omphale; they devised these games; and every second day playing at them, beguiled their hungry bellies. Thus for 22 years, they continued playing and eating by turns: but then seeing that themselves were more fruitful in getting and bearing children, than the s●ile in bringing forth sustenance to maintain them: they sent a Colony into Italy under the conduct of jyrrhenus, the Son of A●is, who planted in that Country, called at first Tyrrhenia, and afterward Tuscany.  
This Country was also called Moeonia, and was thought to have been the native soil of Homer, in regard that Colophon and Smyrna, two of the seven contending Cities, and those which seem to have most colour for their claim, were anciently accounted as parts of Lydia, as was said before. Hence Homer hath the name of Moenides, and Moeonitus Vates: and in some Authors, Carmen Moeontum is used for Homer's Poetical abilities, as Carmine Moeonio consurgere, in Ovid. Bacchus is also called sometimes by the name of Moeonius, but for a very different reason; viz. because anciently there were no Trees in all this Country, but the Vine only.  
Principal Mountains of this Country are 1. Sipylus, and 2. Tmolus; this last of most account in regard of the great fruitfulness of it, covered over with Vines, and yielding abundance of the best Saffron. Cinefe Rivers of it are 1. Hermus, which rising out of Phrygia Major, passeth only by the skirts hereof, and so falleth into a fair Bay of the Aegean, opening towards the Isle of Clazomene. 2. Pactolus, which rising at the foot of mount Tmolus, falleth not long after into Hermus; famous amongst the Poets for its golden sands. 3. Caystrus, no less notable for the abundance of Swans, which swim thereon, whose fountain is in Phrygia Major also near the borders hereof; and his fall in the Aegean also over against the Isle of Samos. 4. Maeander, which rising out of a branch of the Taurus in the furthest parts of the said Phrygia, towards Lycaonia, passeth by Magnesia, and endeth his course in the same Sea, near the City of 〈◊〉. A River famous for its many turnings in and out, 600 at the least, as Prusaeus counteth them. Of which in general thus the Poet 
Quique recurvatis, ●lud it Maeander in undis.  
Maeander plays his watery pranks,  
In his so many winding banks.   
The Country by reason of these Rivers was exceeding fruitful, abounding in all sorts both of wealth and pleasures, well cultivated and manured above ground, and underneath enriched with prodigal veins of Gold and Silver, and some precious gems. Which made the people, after their overthrow by Cyrus, to become more sensual and voluptuous and less sit for action, than any plot of their new Masters could have brought them to; had not the natural delicacies of the Soil itself, contributed to the advancement of their design. And yet before, they were sufficiently infamous for their luxury, and excess of riot, when between in wars: so that it is a marvel they were able to prevaise on the neighbour Nations, and bring then under their command; as in the times of some of Croesus' Predecessors it is said they did. Unless perhaps they did participate of the temper of Moecenae, the great favourite of Augustus Caesar, of whom Paereulus hath left this Character: ubires vigiliam exigeret erat sane insomnis, providens, & agendi 〈◊〉 simul ●e aliquidex negotio remitti possit, otio ac mossite penè ultra foeminam fluens. No man more vigilant than he in times of business, nor woman more effeminate in his times of leisure.  
Principal Cities of this Country were 1. Sardis, on both sides of Pactolus, the seat Royal of Croesu● and the Kings of Lydia; till the conquest of Lydia by the Persian. After which time, being taken by the Grecians it so startled Xerxes, that he commanded one of his Attendants, to say aloud every day whilst to was at dinner, that the Grecians had taken Sardis; continuing that Memento till it was recovered. Which course (I note this only by the way) was commonly observed in the Parliaments of France, as long as Calais did remain in the hands of the English; and might be profitably revived till again recovered from the French. Overthrown by a most terrible Earthquake, (to which disease most of these Asian Cities have been very much subject,) it was re-edified again at the cost of Tiberius; continuing long after the Metropolis of this Province, and one of the Seven Churches of the Lydian Asia, of which the holy Spirit took such special notice. The others (besides Pergamus, already mentioned in the Greater Mysia, and Ephesus, and Smyrna, in the Proper Asia) were 20 Philadelphia near or on the banks of the River Caystrus the second City in account next to Sardis itself: and honoured with the dignity of a Metropolitan as appeareth by the Acts of the Constantinopolitan Council, where Eustathius Bishop hereof doth subscribe himself, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Bishop of the Metropolis of Philadelphia, in the Province of Lydia. 3. Thiatyra, honoured with the same privilege also, as appears by the constant Order observed as well in the Civil as Ecclesiastical Catologues of the Cities belonging to this Province. The reason whereof (for otherwise it was contrary to the practice both of Church and State, to have in one Province more than one Metropolis) was the respect had to those several Churches in regard of their primitive antiquity, and the foundation of them by Saint John the Apostle, as it was generally believed. 4. Lariaicea, by Ptolemy placed amongst the Cities of this Province, as it stood in his time, and before: but afterwards laid by Constantine to the Greater Phrygia, and made the Metropolis thereof (which honour 〈◊〉 had before enjoyed) it being well observed by Strabo, that the Romans did not dispose of their Provinces according to Nations; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, but according to those districts or Circuits, in which they kept their Courts of justice. Next unto these, there were of especial consideration, 5. Magnesia ad Maeandrum, so called because situate on that River, to difference it from 6. Magnesia penes Sipylum montem, another of the same name near the hill Sipylus. The first asigned over to Themistocles together with Myus and Lampsacus, as was said before. The other memorable for the great battle fought near unto it, betwixt Antiochus and the Romans: the loss whereof falling unto Antiochus, occasioned the loss of all his Asian Provinces on this side of Taurus and the payment of 15000 talents for the charge of the war, besides some other hard conditions then imposed upon him. 7. Alabanda, opposite to Magnesia on the other side of Maeander, the people whereof, immediately on the overthrew of Antiochus, not only sent Ambassadors to Rome to congratulate with them, as many other Nations did, but built a Temple to it, and appointed Anniversary Games to be celebrated in the honour of that new-made Goddess. A thing more to be wondered at in the Roman Senate for receiving, than in this poor people for bestowing on their City, so divine an honour. 8. Trallis, on the banks of Caystrus, to the Inhabitants whereof, Ignatius that Reverend Bishop, and godly Martyr, writ the Epistle ad Trallenses.  
That the Lydians were derived from Lud the Son of Sem, is testified by the general consent of such ancient writers, as treat of the dispersions of the Sons of Noah: to which opinion the nearness of the names of Lud, Ludin, and Lydi (or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as the Grecians call them) seems to give good countenance. Nor shall I here dispute it further, as a point unquestioned: the tale of Lydus, I know not what Nobleman that should name this Country, being taken up amongst the Greeks for want of more certain truths. Once settled here, they grew up suddenly to a Kingdom; Amongst the Ancient Kings whereof are numbered Manes as the first, Cotis, and Atis, and then Asius (from whom Lydia first, and after all the Continent, had the name of Asia) as his immediate Successors. After them I find mention of one Cambletes, said by Athenaeus to be so great a Gourmandizer, that in his sleep he eat his wife; and finding her hand in his mouth next morning, slew himself for shame: and of another named Andramytes, as infamous for his filthy lusts as Cambletes for gluttony. But the race of these Kings ending in Omphale the Mistress of Hercules, who made that valiant Champion spin amongst her Damosels; the Heraclidae or posterity of Hercules succeeded next: of whom there is no constant and continued succession till the time of Ardisius the nineteenth in order of that line, who began his reign not long before the building of the City of Rome. Under his successors the affairs hereof so exceedingly prospered, especially under Haliattes the Father of Croesus, that Phrygia, Bythinia, Paphlagonia, Mysia, Caria, Aeolis, Doris, and jonia, acknowledged themselves Vassals to this Crown: conceived both in wealth and power to be equal to the Egyptian, Babylonian, or Median Kingdoms, till the Conquest of Syria and Egypt, by Nabuchadnezzer, gave him the pre-eminence. But being come unto the height it received a fall in the person of Croesus the Successor of him who so much advanced it. The Kings hereof from the time of the said Ardisius, take in order following.  

The Kings of Lydia.  
A. M.  
3190. 1. Ardisius. 36.  
3226. 2. Haliactes. 14.  
3240. 3. Melos, who overcame the people of Sardis. 12.  
3252. 4. Candaules, who showing his wife naked to Gyges, was by him slain; who marrying his wife, succeeded him in his Kingdom. The whole story is this. Candaules had to his wife a woman of unparallelled beauty; And supposing the greatness of his happiness, not to consist so much in his own fruition, as the notice which others might take of it, intended to show her in nature's bravery to Gyges the master of his herds. Gyges' at first dissuaded him from an attempt so foolish: but seeing no persuasion could prevail, he condescended. When he had seen the naked Queen, and was ready to depart, Candanles cried to him, Esto fidelis, Gyges: which words the Queen marking, and seeing the back of Gyges as he left the chamber, the next morning sent for him. When holding a poniard in her hand, she gave him his choice, either presently to be slain, or else to kill the King and take her to wife, with the Kingdom for her Dower. Of which two evils he made choice of that which he thought the best, and so killed Candaules.  
5. Gyges' the first of this new line, added jonia to his other dominions. A Prince of so great wisdom, for the times he lived in, that all other Kings his neighbours sat as (it were) in the light to him; and he as in the dark to them: occasioning thereby the fiction of a Ring he had, by which made invisible, when and as often as he pleased.  
3305. 6. Ardis II. the Son of Gyges. 37.  
3342. 7. Sardiattes. 15.  
3357. 8. Haliactes II. of whom before. 57  
3406. 9 Croesus' the last King of Lydia, subdued Doris, and Aeolis; after which victories, he was overcome by Cyrus' King of Persia: in which battle, a Son of Croesus who had been dumb from his cradle, seeing a Soldier ready to kill his father, suddenly broke out into these words, Rex est, cave ne occîdas. After this overthrow, and the captivity of Croesus (one of the richest Kings that ever was of old) Lydia was made a Persian Province, A. M. 3420.   
The 〈◊〉 after this rebelled, but being again subdued, Cyrus bereft them of all their horses of 〈◊〉 despoiled them of all their armour, and trained them up in all manner of loose and effeminate 〈◊〉 weakening by this means a powerful Nation, which before that time had not only maintained its own liberty, but awed all the Provinces adjoining. After this they continued Persian till the Conquest of 〈◊〉 by the Macedonians, in the division of whose spoils they fell to the portion of Seleveus and the Kings of Syria: following the common fortune of the rest of this Asia, till they came under the power of the Romans. Made by them one of the Provinces of their Empire; it had the Lower Mysia, or Mysia Olympen● annexed unto it: by means whereof the limits of each became so confounded, that the Towns and Cities of the one are many times ascribed to the other. In the falling of the Eastern Empire it was made (as all the rest of Anatolia) a prey to the Turks: that part of it which lieth next to Aeolis, subject to the Carausian Family; as the other part towards the Phrygia Major were to the Aidinian; of which before.   

13. CARIA.  
CARIA is bounded on the East, with Lycia; on the North, with Lydia and jonia; on the West, with the Icarian or Aegean Sea; and on the South, with the Carpatian. So called from Cares the Son of Phoroneus King of Argos, once the Lord hereof; Who is said to have invented the Science of Divination by the flying of Birds, called Augury, though others ascribe it to the Phrygians.  
In this Country is the Hill called Latmus, the dwelling or rather retiring place of Endymion, who being much addicted to the study of Astronomy, found out the changes and courses of the Moon, and is therefore by the Poets feigned to have been her Paramour. Others add, that Jupiter hid him him in a cave under this Hill, and cast him into a dead sleep; (which notwithstanding, she descended sometimes to kiss him) whence came the old Byword, of Endymionis somnium dormit. Here is also in this Country the River Salmacis, said to inseeble all such as either drink of it, or bathe in it: from whence the Poets raise their fiction of Salmacis and Hermaphroditus described by Ovid; and the Proverb of Salmacida spolia sine sanguine & sudore, mentioned by Tully in his book of Offices, and there used for effeminate and wanton exercises.  
Places of most note in it, 1. Miletus, not far from the hill Latmus, the birthplace of Thales one of the seven wife-men of Greece, from hence called Milesius, and the Mother of no fewer than 75. (or as Pliny faith of 80.) Colonies, dispersed in several places of Greece and Asia; anciently honoured with the Oracle of Apollo surnamed Didymoeus, whose Temple being burnt by Xerxes, was again rebuilt by the ●Milisians, to so vast a greatness that it remained without roof, compassed about with a Grove, and dwelling houses, and sumptuously ser out with costly workmanship. This is that Mileties mentioned Acts XX. to which Saint Paul called together the Bishops of Ephesus, and other the adjoining Cities, ab Epheso & reliquis proximis Civitatibus, faith Saint Irenoeus the renowned Bishop of Lions, Lib. 3. cap. 14. Anciently it was called Lelegis and Anactoria. 2. Mindus, which being but a small Town, had so great Gates, that Diogenes the Cynic cried out and said, Ye men of Mindus take heed that your City run not out at your Gates. 3. Heraclea ad Latmum, so called because situate at the foot of that Mountain, to difference it from many others of that name. 4. Borgylia, or Borgylos, as Pliny calleth it, where anciently Diana had another Temple, though not to be compared to that of Ephesus. 5. Milisa, in old times famous for two Temples sacred unto Jupiter; the way to which for 60 furlongs was paved with stone for the easier travelling of Pilgrims, and the better ordering of Procession; the principal of the Citizens serving there as Priests, which office they held unto their deaths. 7. Primassus, memorable for the Stratagem by which it was taken by Philip of Macedon, the Father of Perseus. Who meaning to force it by Maine, and finding the earth so stony that it would not work, commanded the Pyoneers notwithstanding to make a noise under the ground, and caused great mounts of rubbish to be raised secretly in the night at the mouth of the Mine, as if the work went very well forwards: At last he sent word unto the Townsmen, that two parts of their wall stood only upon wooden props, to which if he gave fire, they should find no mercy; which heard, the Citizens yielded up the Town unto him. So useful in the Art of war is a piece of wit, that it prevails sometimes more than Mines or Batteries.  
In the South-west of this Province, thrusting itself into the Sea like a spacious Promontory, stands the Country of DORIS, so called of the Doors, a Greek people, who there inhabited. The principal Cities whereof were, 1. Cnidus, not far from a foreland or Promontory of the same name, famous of old times for the marble Image of Venus, called hence Dea Cnidia. 2. Cressa, a noted Haven-Town in the time Ptolemy. 3. Halicarnassus (now called Nesi) the birthplace of Herodotus, and Dtonysius named hence Halicarnasseus; two famous Historians: and the seat-royal of Artemisia Queen of the Carians, (called from hence sometimes the Queen of Harlicarnassus,) who in the honour of her husband Mausolus, built a stately monument, accounted one of the world's seven wonders; of which thus Martial, speaking of the Roman Amphitheatre erected by Domitian● 
Aere nec vacuo pendentia Mausolaea  
Laudibus immodicis Cares ad astra ferant.  That is to say, 
Mausolus' tomb filling the empty Air,  
Let not the Carians praise beyond compare.   
That the Carians were so called from Cares the son of Phoroneus, King of Argos, hath been said before. But Bochartus will rather have them so called from Car; which in the Phoenician language signifieth a Sheep or a Ram; with numerous flocks whereof they did once abound. And this may seem more probable, in regard that the jonians, next neighbours to Caria, borrowing this word from the Phoenicians, called sheep by the name of Cara; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 faith Hesrchius, the old Grammarian. But from whomsoever they had their name, certain it is they were a very warlike people, 〈◊〉 morun pugnaeque amans (saith Pomponius Mela) ut aliena etiam bella appeterent; who when they had no wars at home, would seek out for action. A little before the time of Xerxes, Mausolus reigned here, whose wife Artemisia (lately mentioned) aided that King in his undertake against Greece. Afterwards in the time of Alexander the Great, we meet with Ada Queen hereof, who aided him against the Persians, adopting him for her Son and Successor. Subject after her decease to the Macedonians, it followed the same fortune with the rest of these Provinces till the defeat of Antiochus near Magnesia; in the division of whose spoils it was given to the Rhodians: incorporated not long after to the State of Rome, and made a Province of the Empire. Wrested from the Eastern Emperors by the Turks of the Selzuccian Family; the greatest part hereof, on the death of Aladine 2d. was raised unto a petit Kingdom by the name of Mentesia, so called from Mendos (or Mindus) the chief City of it, the residue being laid to the Caraman Kingdom, both long ago subdued by the Ottoman Family: that of Mentesia by Mahome! surnamed the Great, who dispossessed Elias the last Prince thereof, Anno 1451.   

LYCIA.  
LYCIA is bounded on the East, with Pamphylia; on the West, with Caria; on the North, with parts of Lydia and Phrygia Major; on the Sauth, with the Mediterrenean Sea. Environed on three sides with the Mountain Taurus, which part it from the Countries above mentioned; by consequence naturally strong, and not very accessible: the Sea, for the space of twenty miles shutting up the fourth. And here it is to be observed, that besides this, there was a little Region of the same name, not far from Troy, not much observed by our Geographers either old or new: but mentioned sometimes by the Peets; as in Virgil Aeneid. 4. Qualis ubi hybernan Lyciam, Xanthique fluenta deserit, etc. which is meant plainly of the Phrygian or Trojan Lycia: the word hyberna being added because of its Northern situation in respect of this.  
The People hereof were sometimes called Xanthi, from Xanthus the chief River hereof, which rising in two springs from the foot of mount Cadmus, passeth by a Town called Xanthus also, and falleth into the Sea. But generally they were called Lycii, and the Councrey Lycia, from Lycius the son of Pandion King of Athens; who either conquered them, or did some memorable Act amongst them, which deserved that honour.  
The principal Mountain of this Country, and indeed of Asia, is the Mountain Taurus, which hath his beginning in this Province, extending Eastward to the great Oriental Ocean: of which somewhat hath been said already, and more is to be said hereafter, when these hills are grown unto the greatest. One of the branches of it, and the most notable in this Country, is that called Chimoera, vomiting flames of fire like Cicilian Aetna: the bottom whereof was infested with Serpents, the middle parts grazed upon by Goats, and the higher parts made dangerous by the dens of Lions. Hence by the Poets made a Monster, having the head of a Lion, the body of a Goat, and the tail of a Serpent; according unto that of Ovid in his Metamorphosis. 
Quoque Chimaera iugo mediis in partibns Hyrcum,  
Pectus & ora Leo, caudam Serpentis habebat.  In English thus, 
Chimaera from a Goat her mid-parts takes  
From Lion's head and breast, her tail from Snakes.  This dangerous Mountain was first planted and made habitable by the care of Bellerophou, a noble Grecian, who is therefore fabled by the Poets to have killed this Monster; employed upon this business by Jobares the King of Lycia, to whom he had been sent by Proetus King of Argos who was jealous of him; and sent with letters to require that King to kill him. Whence came the saying, Bellerophontis litter as portare; applied to those, who were unawares employed do carry letters tending to their own destruction: such as those carried by Vriah, to Joab the General, by command of David.  
This Country was so populous, that anciently there were reckoned threescore Cities in it, of which six and thirty remained in the time of Saint Paul; now nothing left of them but the names and ruins. Those of chief note were, 1. Myra, the Metropolis of Lycia, when a Roman Province; by consequence an Arch-Bishops See, when Christian. St. Nicholas one of the Bishops hereof in the primitive times, is said to have been a great Patron of Scholars: his festival annually holden on the sixth of December, is celebrated in the Church of Rome with several pastimes; and still in some Schools here in England (as in that of Burford in the County of Oxon (where I had my breeding and my birth) for a feast and a playday. Of this City there is mention Acts 27. v. 5. 2. Telmesus, the Inhabitants whereof were famous for Soothsaying, and accounted the first Interpreters of Dreams. 3. Patara, or Patras, (formerly called Sataros) beautified with a fair Haven and many Temples; one of them dedicated to Apollo with an Oracle in it, for wealth and credit equal unto that of Delphos. 4. Phaselis, on the Seaside also, a nest of Pirates in the times of the Reman greatness, by whom then haunted and enriched, as Algiers is now: but taken by Servilius, a Roman Captain, at such time as Powpey scoured the Seas. And unto the Pirates of this Town the former Ages were indebted, for the first invention of those swift Vessels, which the Romans called a Phaselus, by the name of the Town; we may render it a Brigantine. 5. Cragus, with a Mountain of the same name thrusting out eight points or Promontories near to the Chimoera. 6. Rhodia, or Rhodiopolis as Pliny calleth it, most probably the foundation of the neighbouring Rhodians. 7. Solyma, on the borders hereof towards Pisidia; the people of which were conquered and added unto Lycia by the sword of Bellerophon, whom Jobares, with a mind to kill him according to the request of Poetus, employed in that service. 8. Corydalla, near the Mountain called Masigrum, the Massycites of Pliny. 9 Podalea, the chief Town of Mylias; as 11. OEnoanda is of OEbalia, two little Regions in this Country.  
The Lycians were in former times a puissant people, extending their power upon the Seas, as far as Italy Subjected to the Persian not without great difficulty; the people with such obstinacy defending their liberty, that some of them being besieged by Harpagus, Licutenant unto Cyrus the first Persian Monarch, they first burned their wives, children, servants, and riches, in a common fire; and then made a furious sally upon the Enemy, by whom put all unto the sword. To Alexoender in his march this way towards Persia, they submitted without any resistance. After whose death, they fell with the rest of these parts into the hands of Seleucus. On the defeat of Antiochus at the battle of Magnesia, it was given to the Rhodians, for their assistance in that war; but governed as a free estate by a Common Council of fourteen Senators, elected out of their principal Cities: over whom was one chief Precedent or Prince of the Senate whom they called by the name of Lyciarchus. In these remained the sole power of imposing taxes, making war, and peace, appointing Justiciaries and inferior Magistrates, and all things appertaining to the public government. A shadow of which power they retained when brought under the Romans, and a shadow only: the Supreme power being no longer in the Senate of Lycia, but in that of Rome. Nor had their Lyciarchus any thing but an empty name, and the vain privilege or ordering and disposing the public games, wherein by his office he presided. When made a Province of the Empire, it had the same fortune as the others had till it fell into the power of the Turks: after the death of the second Aladine made a part of the Kingdom of Caramania; of which more anon.   

15. LYCAONIA.  
LYCAONIA is bounded on the East, with Armenia Minor, from which parted by a branch of the Mountain Taurus; on the West, with the Greater Phrygia; on the North, with Cappadocia; and on the South, with Pisidia. So called from the Lycaones a people of Lycia, or from the Lycaonians Inhabitants of Lycaonia a Town of Phrygia Major, who enlarging themselves into these parts, gave this name unto it. Either of which I should prefer before their conceit who derive it from Lycaon King of Arcadia, dispossessed by Jupiter of that Kingdom; or think that Lycaon was a King of this Country, and not of that.  
Places of most note herein, 1. Iconium (now Cogni) the Metropolis hereof when a Roman Province; a place of great strength and consequence, situated advantageously in the Mountains for defence and sarety, and therefore chosen for the seat of the Turkish Kings in Lesser Asia, at such time as they were most distressed by the Western Christians; who under the command and presence of the Emperor Conrade did in vain besiege it; forced to depart thence with great loss both of men and honour. Afterwards made the seat-royal of the Aladine Kings, the former race being extinguished by the Tartars, and finally of the Kings of the house of Caraman, whose Kingdom, called the Kingdom of Caramania, contained all the South-parts of the Lesser Asia, that is to say, part of the Province of Caria, all Lycia, Pamphylia, Isauria, Cilicia, Pisidia, and this Lycaonia. 2. Lystra●, the birth place of Timothy the Evangelist, where Paul and Barnab as having miraculously healed a Cripple were adored as Gods, and not long after on the instigation of some Jews, which came down from Antioch and Iconium, most despitefully treated; Paul being stoned into the bargain, though it pleased God, to raise him to life again, Acts 14. v. 19, 20. Such was the divine pleasure of Almighty God, that he that did consent to the stoning of Saint Stephen the Protomartyr, and took charge of the clothes of his Executioners, should suffer in the same kind wherein he had-trespassed, and feel some smart remembrance of his former Actions. 3. Derbe, honoured by the preaching of the said Apostles. 4. Laranda, so called by Ptolemy, and still preserving its old name; the second place for reputation next unto Iconium. 5. Adopissus. 6. Paralais. 7. Canna. 8. Caratha, with others named by Ptolemy, but not else observable.  
Nor indeed were the Lycaonians themselves, from whomsoever they descended, of any great note or observation in the former times: subject to Cappadocia when it was a Kingdom, and reckoned as part of it in the time of Ptolemy, when made a Province of the Empire. Dismembered from it by some of the following Emperors: either to create new Offices and preferments for some Court-favourite; or to satisfy the ambition of some Prelates, aspiring to the dignity of a Metropolitan; it was made a Province of itself. Tom from the Empire by the Turks, it was at first a member of the Selzuccian Kingdom, as afterwards of the Caramanian. Which last founded by Caraman a great Prince of the Turks, on the death of Aladine the second, the last King of the Selzuccian Family, was a great eyesore unto those of the house of Ottoman, from the time of Amurath the first, who first warred upon it, to the reign of Boejazet the second, who in fine subverted it, Anno 1486. as shall be shown hereafter when we come to Cicilia; the last of the Provinces of that Kingdom, in the course of this work.   

16. PISIDIA.  
PISIDIA, hath on the East, Armenia Minor; on the West, some parts of Lycia and Phrygia Ma●or; on the North, Lycaonia; on the South, Pamphylia, and some part of Cilicia; from which parted by the main body of Mount Taurus. So called from the Pisidoe, the Inhabirants of it; but the reason of their name I find not amongst my Authors.  
The Country small, but furnished with great plenty of all provisions, as appeareth by that passage of Livy, where speaking of the expedition of Marlius unto these parts, he telleth us that he came into the fields of Sagalassa (one of the Cities hereof) being of a rich soil, and plentiful of all manner of fruit. Indeventume est (saith he) in agrum Sagallassarum, uberem fertilemque omni genere frugum. But this to be understood only of the plains and champain; the mountainous parts hereof, being (like others of that nature) poor and barren.  
Towns of most observation in it, 1. Antioch, the Metropolis hereof, when a Province of the Roman Empire, called for distictions sake Antiochia Pisidioe, mention of which is made Acts 4. and of the Jews Synagogue therein, honoured by Saint Paul's preaching, the sum of whose divine Sermon is there repeated. Built by Seleucus the first King of Syria of the Macedon race, and by him so called in honour of his Father Antiochus. 2. Seleucia, the foundation of the same Seleucus, called also to distinguish it from others of that name, Seleucia Pisidioe. 3. Lysinnia, on the borders hereof towards Phrygia. 4. Selge a Colony of the Lacedæmonians. 5. Sagalassa, situate in the most fruitful part of all this Country, as appears by that of Livy before mentioned. 6. Cremna, which only had the honour of a Roman Colony. 7. Termessus strongly situate in the Straits of the Mounts; the hilly Country about which hath the name of Milyes. 8. Olbanassa. 9 Plutanessus', of which little memorable.  
As for these Piside, they were originally descended of the Solymi, Inhabitants of the borders of Lycia. A valiant People, and so affirmed to be by Livy, who calleth them longé optimos bello. Nor did he speak it without cause, this small Nation holding out against the Persians, and not conquered by them, when their great neighbours were subdued. Against these, Cyrus the brother of Artaxerx Mn●mon King of Persia did pretend a quarrel, as if they had trespassed on the borders of his Province. Which though perhaps they had not done, yet this gave him good occasion to levy an Army, pretending revenge on them; but intending to dispossess his brother of the Persian Monarchy: but Tisaphernes Lieutenant to the King in Asia, seeing greater preparations than were sufficient to oppose the weak Pisidians, made the King acquainted with his suspicions; who accordingly provided for resistance. The Army of Cyrus consisting of 12000 Grecians, and 100000 Persians: the King's forces were no fewer than 900000 fight men. They met at Cunaxa, not far from Babylon, where Cyrus lost both the victory and his life. The Grecians, who had made their side good, and stood in honourable terms of composition, being by Tisaphernes betrayed, lost the best of their company. The rest under the conduct of Xenophon, made safe retreat home in despite of 200000 men which followed at their heels. This Xenophon, was an agent in, and the historian of this expedition: by whose example the Spartans' first, and after them the Macedonians, were encouraged to attempt the conquest of Persia. But to return to these Pisidians, they fell with others of their neighbours, under the power of the Macedonians, and were made part of the Dominion of Seleucus. Abandoned by Antiochus to the will of the Romans, and settled in obedience by the Military progress of Manlius, spoken of before; they were in Prolomies' time annexed to Pamphylia, as a part thereof. Afterwards made a distinct Province of itself, and so continued till those parts of the Eastern Empire were subdued by the Turks: first part of the Selzuccian, and Aladinian Kingdoms, after of the Kingdom of Caramania; whereof more anon.   

17. PAMPHYLIA.  
PAMPHYLIA, is bounded on the East, with Isauria and Cilicia; and on the West, with Lycia, from which parted by a branch of the Taurus; on the North, with Pisidia, separated from it by the main body of that Mountain; and on the South, with the Mediterranean Sea, which in those parts which lie next to it is called Mare Pamphylium. The reason of the name I find not, unless we think with Metaphrastes that it was so named, quod ex omnibus gentibus conflata esset, because inhabited by a mixture of many Nations: for so Pamphylia in the Greek tongue doth expressly signify. And probable enough it is, that lying near unto the Sea with an open shore, opposite to afric, near Syria, and not far from Greece, several Nations from those parts might repair unto it; and from thence the name.  
The Country for the most part is very mountainous, overrun with the Branches of Mount Taurus; but those branches feed great store of Goats, of whose hair are made abundance of Chamlets and Grograines, not inferior unto Silks for fineness. Towards the Sea, which for the space of a hundred and fifty Miles coasts along this shore, more pleasant, populous and fruitful; well watered, and as well planted. The principal Rivers hereof, being 1. Cataractus. 2. Cestrus, and 3. Eurymed●n; Nigh to which last, Cimon the son of Hilliades, Captain General of the Athenian Army, overthrew in one day both the Sea and Land Forces of the Persians. The manner thus: Having by plain force bick their Navy, of which he took and sunk no fewer than forty Ships and three thousand Galleys, he stowed the Persian Vessels with his best men, attired in the habit, and wearing the Colours of the Persians in the tops of their Ships. In their approach the Camp was opened, and all prepared to entertain their victorious Countrymen: but the Greeks once in suddenly put them to the sword, and took twenty thousand of them Prisoners.  
Principal Cities of it, 1. A●talia, founded by Ptolemy Philadelpus King of Egypt, and for long time the greatest and most flourishing City of all this Province; well fenced, and seated very commodiously for Trade, on a very fair Bay, now called Golfo di Sattalias, by the name of the Town but little altered. And though the Romans did confer the honour of the Metropolitan City upon Aspendus; yet still Artalia had the start in point of riches; and is to this day a wealthy and well traded Empory, the wealtheir for the fair Tapestries which are herein made. Of this Town their is mention Acts 14. v. 25. 2. Perge, famous in old times for a Temple of Diana, and the yearly festivals there held in honour of her; from hence called Diana Pergaea more famous in the fullness of time for Saint Paul's preaching in it, mentio- Acts 14. v. 25. 3. Side, renowned in times of Gentilism, for a Temple of Pallas. 4. Magydis, on the Seaside, not far from Side. 5. Aspendus, an inland Town, but strongly situate; made the Metropolis of the Province in the time of the Romans; remarkable for the Fiddlers or Musicians of it, who with one hand both held their Harps and played upon them, keeping the other free for more gainful uses; whence the Proverb of Aspendus Citharista, an Aspendian Harper, by which they signified a Thief. The Town first founded by the Argines, the Colony sent thither being led by Mopsus, from whom the Country hereabouts had the name of Mopsia. 6. Olbia, not far from Attalia. 7. Caracensium, and 8. Colobrassus, two of the Towns of that part hereof, which had the name of Cilicia aspera: as 9 Cretopolis, and 10. Menedemium, of that part which was called Carbalia.  
Of these Pamphylians there is little to be said in point of story, but that they were for the most part on the suffering hand; subject from time to time to those mightier Princes, who would not let their neighburs rest in quiet by them. Being on the same side of Taurus, and of easy access, they became first Vassals to the Syrtan, and after to the Persian Kings. When Alexander passed that way in his march towards Persia, he took in all the Sea-Towns of it: the whole brought under with the rest of the Asian Provinces, by Antig●nus first, after by Seleucus the great King of Syria. In the expiration of whose line, this People and their neighburs of Cilicia, being left to themselves, and tempted by Mitthridates to his faction, began to be troublesome on the Seas, and and proved notable Pirates; and were the first Authors or inventors of those great Ga●llies of a hundred and forty or a hundred and sixty Oars a piece; which the Italians call from hence by the name of Pamphyli. But forced to leave this trade at last, being warred upon by the Romans with great forces both by Sea and Land (a fuller narrative whereof we shall have in Cilicia) in the conclusion of that war, they lost that liberty which so small a time they had enjoyed; and were made Vassals unto Rome. Afterwards made a Province of the Asian Diocese, they ran the same fortune with the rest, till subdued by the Turks: and at the death of Alidine, were seized on by Caraman, and so became a part of his Kingdom. Of which we shall hear more when we come to Cilicia. And so much for the Provinces of the Asian Diocese, (the Provinces of the Isles excepted whereof more anon) converted to the Christian faith by three great Apostles, but most especially by Saint Paul, of whose travels through most Cities and Regions of it there is such pregnant evidence in the book of the Acts. And that Saint Peter and Saint John had also their parts herein, appears by the Revelation of the one, and the first Epistle of the other: Paul planting, John and Peter watering; but God himself giving the increase. Pass we on next unto ISAURIA and CILICIA, which though Provinces of the Diocese, of the Orient, were parts of the Caramanian Kingdom: of which having taken a Survey, and so cleared our selve● of this Peninsula, we will then sail about such Islands as make up the remainder of the Asian Diocese.   

18. ISAURIA. CILCIA.  
THese two, though distinct Provinces, I have joined together, because the first was only a part of the last; Cilicia anciently comprehending both. The fourtunes of both being the same also in point of story.  
ISAURIA, a mountainous and hilly Province, seated on both sides of Taurus, hath on the East and South the rest of Cilicia, whereof anciently it was a part; on the North, Pisidia; on the West, Pamphylia. So called from Isaurus, the chief City of it, when first made known unto the Romans; which being taken by Servilius the Proconsnl, employed by Pompey in that service, reduced the conquered Country under the command of Rome, and gave unto the Conqueror the surname of Isauricus.  
The quality of the Soil, and whole estate of this small Province, take thus from Ammianus Marcellinus, who had seen these Countries. Ciliciae lateri dextro adnexa Isauria, uberi palmite viret, & frugibus multis; quam mediam flumen navigabile Calicadnus interscindit, etc. i e. On the right hand of Cilicia lieth Isauria, a Province of a wealthy soil, plentiful of Vines and much other fruits, which the River Calecadnus parteth in the very midst. Beautified besides many Towns with two principal Cities. 1. Seleucia, founded by Seleucus: and 2. Claudiopolis, into which Claudius the Emperor brought a Roman Colony. For as touching 3. Isauria, heretofore a walled City, and of most esteem, it hath been long ago destroyed, as yielding too secure a refuge to the neighburing Rebels; insomuch that now there are scarce any visible tracts of its former greatness. And not much after, Hae duae Provinciae bello quondam Piratico cateruis mixtae Praedonum, a Servilio Proconsule missae sub jugum, factae sunt vectigales; i e These Provinces (Cilicia and this) heretofore in the Piratical war joining with those Robbers, were brought under by Servilius the Proconsul, and made subject to the State of Rome. And here we have in brief, the nature of the Country, the names of the chief Rivers, and the principal Cities, with so much of the story as relates to the first subjugation of it. What further doth concern it we shall hear in Cilicia, upon the which it did depend.  
2. CILICIA is bounded on the East, with Syria, or rather that part thereof which is called Comagena, separated from which part by a branch of the Mounta in Taurus, called Amanus; on the West, with Pamphylia; on the North, with Isauria, and Armenia Minor; on the South, with the Mediterranean, and Syria specially so called. It was thus named as the old tradition was, from (〈◊〉 the brother of Cadmus the Phoenician, a near neighbour to it: but as Bochartus (of whose humour I have told you often) from Callukim, a Phoenician word signifying stones, quia lapidosa est Regio, because in some parts, especially in that which was called Cilicia Trachaea, or Cilicia Aspera, it was very stony. It is now called Caramania, as the last Province of the Caramanian Kingdom, which held out for those falling Princes, when the rest was conquered by the Turks of the Ottoman race.  
The Country said by Marcellinus, to be terra dives omnibus bonis, wealthy and fruitful of all necessaries. Which Character holdeth good chiefly in the Eastern parts, which heretofore had the name of Cilicia Campestris; the western parts lying towards Pamphylia, formerly called Cilicia aspera, being rough and stony. But generally where the lands lie in several, and are duly cultivated, it answereth to the former Character: being also very well watered, and having a fair and large Sea-coast, for the space of there hundred miles and upwards. Which notwithstanding, it is not much traded, and but meanly inhabited, a great part of the Country lying in large and common fields, to which none can lay any proper claim, and therefore planted only with Goats and Sheep: out of which the Commoners on all sides raise good profit by cheese and butter, by their fleeces chiefly. Here is also a good breed of Horses, of which six hundred yearly are culled out for the special service of the Grand Signeur. But as they have some profitable and useful creatures; so have they others as dangerous and hurtful to them, especially those which the Vulgar Grecians call Squilachi, of a mixed making betwixt a Dog and a Wolf, which go in ttoops, and are so bold and thievish withal, as they use to set upon a man as he is a sleep, and leave him neither hat, cloak, nor farthel, nor anything they can conveniently get from him.  
Chief Rivers hereof are, 1. Pyzamus, now called Malmistra, which rising on the North side of the Taurus, and forcing his passage through that Mountain, makes such a noise in falling down the precipices and rocks thereof, as resemblanceth at a great distance a clap of Thunder. 2. Orymagdus. 3. Calicadnus spoken of before. 4. Cydnus, which riseth in the Anti-Taurus, a River of a violent course, and so cold a water, that as Pliny writes, it cureth the Gout: the waters of which proved very dangerous to Alexander the Great, the coldness of them striking violently into his stomach; and deadly to Fredrick the first Emperor of the Germans, as he here bathed himself, the violence of the stream tripping up his heels, and he not able to recover was presenly drowned.  
Of their chief hills I need add nothing, having already said that the Country is parted by Amanus from Syria; and by Taurus itself from Pisidia and Armenia Minor: not easy of entrance by the first, but very difficult by the last: the Streits thereof called Pyloe Cilicioe, or the Ports of Cilicia, being indeed so straight, and almost impassable, that had they been guarded or regarded by the Persians, as they should have been, the progress of Alexander's victoties might have ended there But Arsenes, who had the charge of them, durst not stand his ground, and so left them open to the Enemy: whom by those Ports he put into the possession of the Kingdom of Persia. With better faith, though no better fourtune did the Soldiers of Pesceninus Niger make good these Streits against the Emperor Severus: the Monarchy of the World lying a second time at stake, and to be tried for in this Cockpit. For the Nigrians possessed of these Streits and entrances, courageously withstood the Severian party, till at last a sudden tempest of rain and thunder continually darting in their faces, as if the very Heavens had been armed against them, they were fain to leave the passage, and therewith the victory, to the adverse faction; having sold that at the loss of 20000. of their own lives, which Alexander had the happiness or the hap to buy for nothing.  
In the borders of this Country towards Pamphylia, lived a Tribe or Nation called the Soli, originally of Attica: but in long tract of time difused from converse and communication with their Countrymen, they spoke that language so corruptly, that from their barbarous manner of pronunciation, and as rude expression, came the word Soloecismus. Yet amongst these were born three men of eminent note, that is to say, Chrysippus the Philosopher, Philemon and Aratus the Poet; out of the writings of which last Saint Paul vouchsafed to use this passage 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. for we are also his offspring, Acts 17. v. 28. That blessed Apostle thought himself never the worse Preacher, for being brought up in humane learning at the feet of Gamaliel: nor held it any disparagement to the influences of the Holy Ghost to make use of it in his Sermons, and divine discourses. And therefore to prevent those cavils which ignorance or misprision might chance to make in times succeeding, he hath thrice vouchsafed the words and testimony of the heathen writers; viz. of Epim●nides, T●tus 1. v. 12. of Menander, 1 Cor. 15. v. 33. and that of Aratus before mentioned. So lawful is it in this kind for those of the spiritual Israel to rob the Egyptians; and to make this Hagar serviceable to their Mistress Sarah.  
Principal Cities in this Province, 1. Soloe, the habitation of the Soli before remembered; by some said to be built by Solon the Athenian; but generally affirmed to have been planted by those of Rhodes and Attica: mistakingly called Heliopolis, by Qu. Curtius, which is as much in Latin as Solis civitas, or the City of the Sun. On the site hereof then decayed and ruinous (the Town having been destroyed by Tygranes the Armenian King in his late wars against the Romans) did Pompey build his City of Pomperopolis after his victory over the Pirates, who not only lorded it over the Seas, and consequently obstructed trade and merchandise, but wasted and spoiled the Villages of Italy itself. Pompey being Victor, and having inflicted exemplary punishment on the Ringleaders, with the rest peopled this new Town, and the Country adjoining; allowing them competent possessions, lest want and necessity should again enforce them to the like courses. An action truly commendable, and worthy so great a Captain, rather to take occasion of offending from the people, than after offence done to punish them. Hythlodoeus in the Utopia, somewhat bitterly, though perhaps not unjustly, inveigheth against the laws of England, for ordaining death to be the punishment of theft, Cum multò potius providendum fuerit, uti aliquis esset proventus vitae; ne cuipiam sit tam dira furandi primùm, deinde pereundi necessitas. Where as (saith he) the laws ought to make provision for putting men in to some orderly course of life, and not let them run upon the necessity of stealing first, and then being hanged for it. 2. Tarsus, the birthplace of Saint Paul the Apostle, for that sufficiently famous, were there nothing else to commend it to consideration. But it was a Town withal of great note and consequence, the Metropolis first of all Cilicia, and after the division, of Cilicia Prima. The Inhabitants whereof had the privilege of Roman Citizens. Situate in a goodly plain on the banks of the Cydnus, and by some said to be the work of Sardanapalus the last King of Assyria; it being engraven on a Monument erected to him, that in one day he had built this Tarsus; and 3. Anchiala, another City of this Country, near the Seaside, and not far from the Promontory Zephyrium. Of the same date (if the said Monument speak truth,) but neither of the same fortune nor continuance: that being utterly decayed, but Tarsus still remaining of great wealth and strength. Much spoken of in the wars of the Holy Land, and in the Stories of the Caramanian and Ottoman Kings. And thoughthe Tarsians to ingratiate themselves with Julius Caesar, would needs have their City called Juliopolis; yet the old name survived the new, and it is to this day called Tersia or Terassa by the vulgar Grecians; but Hamsa by the Turks, as Bellonius telleth us. 4. Adena, the Adana of Ptolemy, a large Town but unwalled, instead whereof defended by a very strong Castle. Situate in a fruitful soil, both for wine and corn, wherewith the Town is always furnished for the use of those that are to travel over the Taurus, who commonly take in here three day's provision. 5. Epiphania, the birthplace of George the Arian Bishop of Alexandria; thrust on the world of late by some learned men (but of more industry than judgement) for George the Cappadocian Martyr. 6. Mopsuestia, as famous, or infamous, rather for giving title to Theodorus Mopsuestenus, Bishop hereof, and a great Patron of the Nestorian Heresies, in the time of Saint chrysostom. The City otherwise of good note, and of great consequence, in the course of the Roman wars, described at large by Ammianus Marcellinus. 7. Issus, upon a spacious Bay, called hence Sinus Issicus, near the borders of Syria: memorable for the great battle here fought betwixt Alexander and an handful (in comparison) of his Macedonians, and that vast Army of Darius (himself there in person) consisting of 600000 undisciplined Asians, whereof so many lost their lives, that the dead bodies seemed to have buried the ground. For partly by the unskilfulness of the Commanders, who chose so ill a place to sight in that they could make no use of their mighty numbers, and partly by the effeminatness of the Asian Soldiers, unable to endure the charge, there fell that day no fewer than 200000 of the Persians, 40000 of them being taken Prisoners, amongst them the wives and daughters of Darius; and not above 100 of the Alexandrians, if Qu. Curtius be not partial in relating the Story. A victory which assured Alexander of his former purchases, and opened a way unto the rest: the Persian not being able to make head again till he had pierced into the bowels of their Empire, and added Syria and Egypt to his former Conquests. Of so great consequence is one full Victory to the losing and getting of a Kingdom. This Town itself now called Aiazzo, and the great Bay on which it standeth Golfo di Aiazzo. 8. Alexandria, built by command of the Conqueror near the place of battle, commodiously for trade, as upon the Sea, but otherwise in a fenny and boggy soil, which makes the air there to be very unwholesome to men not used to it; little now remaining, but a few houses on the Seashore built of straw and mud, hardly affording it the reputation of a sorry village; and would not long continue such, but that it is the nearest Haven to the Town of Aleppo (whereof more in Syria) which draweth unto it the resort of some Christian Factors, whose houses are of clay and timber, but of them not many. The Town at first called Alexandria, as before was said; diminished first to Alexandretta, now called Scanderone. 9 Nicopolis, another of Alexander's foundations, so named in memory of his great Victory before mentioned. 10. Amavarza, a City of great Antiquity in the time of Strabo, and the Metropolis of the Province of Cilicia Secunda. 11. Heraclea, mentioned by Bellonius, and by him placed in a fruitful and well cultivated plain, at the foot of mount Taurus, a fair and large Town as he reporteth it, and distant from Adana towards the Northwest about three day's journey. But I find no such Town in Strabo, or Ptolemy, or any other of the Ancients. 12. Scandeloro, a City of Cilicia Aspera, or that part of Cilicia which lieth towards Pamphilia, heretofore with the adjoining territory governed as a State distinct, when all the rest of this Country was under the kings of Caramania: against whom the Prince hereof, being a Mahometan had preserved his liberties, by the assistance of the Knights of the Rhodes, and the King of Cyprus. And when the Caramanian Kingdom was subdued by Ba●azet; he made so good conditions for himself, that he had other lands and estates in the Lesser Asia, assigned to him in exchange for this, and so surrendered this to the will of the conqueror.  
The first Inhabitants of this Country were of the Progeny of Tarshish the Son of Javan, by whom, or some of his posterity, to preserve his memory, the City of Tarsus was first built; Increased in tract of time by some new Colonies out of the neighbouring parts of Syria, it followed for the most part the fortunes of it: successively together subject to the Assyrians, Persians, and Macedonians. In the declining fortunes of the house of Seleucus, they began to stand upon their own legs, and might have continued longer in so good a posture, had they not harkened to ill Counsels. Tempted by Mithridates to join with him against the Romans; of whose greatness all the Eastern States were grown very jealous; and being naturally good Seafaring men, they began together with the Pamphylians, to infest the Seas. At first they ventured no further than the shores adjoining. But after emboldened with success, and finding that the Romans were sufficiently embroiled in domestic troubles, and a sharp war with Mithridates, they fell upon the coasts of Greece, and in fine of Italy itself; Publius Servilius the Proconsul first employed against them, gave them an overthrow at Sea: and following his good fortune set upon them in their Harbours and retiring places. In which pursuit he not only took from them Phaselis, a strong Town in Lycia, one of their Retreats, and others of their best and strongest Receptacles: but wasting the whole Country of Cilicia, fell upon Isaurus, the most defensible Town thereof, which he took and ransacked. No sooner was Servilius departed home but they broke out more violently than before; filling all the ●reeks and ports of the Eastern Seas with their Frigates, Brigantines, and other light Piratical Vessels: insomuch that Pompey himself thought it to be an action not unbecoming his greatness to undertake the war against them. And he pursued it to such purpose, that having armed 500 sail of all sorts, and stored his ships with 130000 men, he set upon them all at once; and in the space of one sole month made an end of the war. An action not sufficiently to be wondered at, if we consider either the speediness of it, done in so little time as a month; or the cheapness of the victory, purchased without the loss of one Romen Vessel; or finally the importance and consequence of it, the Pirates from that time not daring to infest the Seas, and all Cilicia subjected to the State of Rome. How they were afterwards disposed of hath been shown already. After this they did very good service unto Pompey in his war again Caesar; of whom thus Lucan, reckoning up his Allies and Aids, 
Atque Cilix justa nunc non Pirata, carinà.  
And the reformed Cilicians now  
No Pirates, in his fleet did row.  Nor were they pliant unto him only, as unto their Conqueror, but generally so tame and tractable in the time of Cicero, one of the first Proconsul's or Lord Deputies which were sent to govern them, that he writ merrily to Rome, that he found all quiet in his Province; save that the Panthars (some of which one of his friends had prayed him to send to Rome for the adorning of his triumph) were for fear of him fled into Pamphylia. At the first conquest by the Romans it was divided only into Campestrem and Trachaeam, as was said before; of which Campestris was reduced immediately to the form of a Province. Aspera or Trachaea was a while continued under the Government of Kings, till the time of Vespasian, and then made a Province as the other. By the succeeding Emperors, on some reasons of State (if not those intimated in Lycaonia) the number of Provinces being increased (though the bounds of the Empire were no larger than they had been formerly) the whole was divided into three: that is to say, Cilicia prima, taking up all Compestris wholly; Cilicia secunda, containing the Maritime parts of Cilicia Aspera; and Isauria, taking up the mountai nous parts of this last division. Laid by the Emperor Constantine to the Diocese of the Orient; and consequently subject in spiritual matters to the Patriarch of Antioch, where the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis had his usual residence. In the falling of the Eastern Empire, it was conquered by the Saracens in the time of Muhaveas or Mnavi, the fixed Caliph. Continuing under their command till their declination, it was recovered by the Greek or Eastern Emperors, and from them conquered by the Turks in the course of their Victories. But the first race of Turkish Kings being worn out by the Tartars, and the Aladinian Kings ending in Aladine the second; it was part of the new Kingdom of the Caramanians; continuing theirs till the destruction of that line by Bajazet the second, Anno 1486. by whom incorporated with the rest of the Ottoman Empire.  
Thus having made our Progress over all the Provinces of the Lesser Asia, and shown how every one of them was made subject to the Turkish Tyranny: we must next draw down the Succession of such Turkish Kings as have reigned herein, till it was wholly conquered by the Princes of the house of Ottoman. Concerning which we are to know in the way of Preamble, that the Turks having made themselves Masters of the Kingdom of Persia, and following their successes into Syria also; fell to a breach amongst themselves. For making up whereof it was condescended unto by Axan, the than Persian Sultan, that Meloch and Ducat two of his discontented Kinsmen, should be enfeoffed in the Cities of Aleppo and Damascus and their several Territories; with whatsoever they could conquer from the Caleph of Egypt, possessed at that time of most part of Syria, and some of the adjoining Provinces. It was also then agreed upon, that a third but nearer Kinsman called Cutlu Moses, another of the Leaders of the opposite faction, should have leave to conquer for himself whatsoever he could win from the Christian Princes; And he accordingly being furnished with a competent Army, subdued the Provinces of Media and Armenia in the Greater Asia, with Cappadocia, Pontus, and Bythinia in Asia Minor. Which and the rest of their affairs take here in the ensuing Catalogue of 

The Turkish Kings in Asia Minor of the Selzuccian Family.  
1075. 1. Cutlu Moses, Nephew to Trangolipix, the first Persian Sultan of the Turks, won Media, part of Armenia Major, Cappadocia, Pontus, and Bythinia.  
2. Solyman, Son of Cutlu Moses, for a while dispossed of most of his estates by the Western Christians, in their first passage towards the Holy Land.  
3. Mahomet the Son of Solyman, recovered most of his estates in the Lesser Asia, but outed of them and subbued by  
4. Musat, Sultan or Lord Deputy of Iconium, but of the same Selzuccian family, who was thereby possessed of all the Turkish Provinces in the Lesser Asia.  
5. Calisastlan the Son of Musat, to whom his Father left Iconium with the adjacent Provinces, wrested Amasia, and Ancyra from his brother Jagupasan; Sebastia, and Caesare●, from his brother Dodune; which with their several Territories were bequeathed unto them, by the will of their Father. He overthrew the Emp. Emanuel Comnenus, and united Phrygia to his Kingdom.  
6. Reucratine, the third Son of Calisastlan, having dispossessed his three brethren Masut, Cappatine, Caicosrhoes, of the estates left them by their Father; became sole Monarch of all the Turkish Provinces in the Lesser Asia. In the later end of whose reign, Occata the Tartarian Cham having driven the Turks out of Persia, many of them under the conduct of Aladine, a Prince of the same Selzuccian Family, joined themselves to their Countrymen here, with whose help they won Cilicia, from the Grecian Emperors, who in the reign of Calo-Johannes, (the Turks being then embroiled by the Western Christians) had not long before regained it: and after the decease of Reucratine, advanced him to the whole estate.   

The Turkish Kings in Asia Minor of the race of Aladine.  
7. Aladine, descended in direct line from Cussanes, the last Turkish Sultan in Persia, having with many of his Nation seated himself in Cilicia, first made Sebastia, one of the Cities thereof, his chief Seat or residence: Which after the death of Reucratine, he removed to Iconium, as the ancient Regal City of the former Kings.  
8. Azalide, by some called Azadire, eldest Son of Aladine, wasted the most part of his reign in wars with his brother Jathatine; whom at last he forced into exile.  
9 Jathatine, on the death of his brother possesseth the Kingdom; slain afterwards in single combat by Theodorus Lascaris, Emp. of the Greeks at Nice.  
10. Jathatine II. Son of the former, driven out of his Kingdom by the Tartars, and died in exile: the Turks becoming Tributaries and Vassals unto the Tartarian.  
11. Masut and Cei-cubades of the same Selzuccian Family (but whether the Sons of the second Jathatine I am not able to say) substituted in his place, as Tributaries to the conquering Tartars.  
12. Aladine II. Son of Cei-cubades, succeeded his Father in the Kingdom, but as Vassal and Leigeman to the Tartars. After whose death leaving no issue of his body, the great Princes of his Family, divided amongst them his Dominions. To Sarachan fell Aeolis, jonia, and part of Lydia; from him named Sarchan, Sarachan, or Saracha-Illi; to Aidin the rest of Lydia, Phrygia Major, and the greatest part of the Greater Mysia, from him called Aidinia, or Aidin-Illi; to Carasus, the Lesser Phrygia, with the rest of Mysia; from him denominated Carasan, or Carasa-Illi. To the Family of the Isfendiars, the Cities of Heraclea, Sinote, and that part of Pontus, which lieth next to Bythinia. There were also lesser Toparchies or sub-divisions, from whence we find a Prince of Smyrna, a second of Amasia, a third of Amisus, a fourth of Scandcloro; besides many others. But the main body of the estate was seized by Caraman, who for his share had the whole Provinces of Lycia, Lycamia, Pisidia, Pamphylia, Isauria, Cilicia, with the Regal City of Iconium, the greatest part of Caria (the rest of it appertaining to the Prince of Men●esia) with part of Cappadocia, and Armenia Minor, and some Towns in Phrygia; continuing in his family for as many descents (as either of the formet had held before) in great power and lustre, under   

The Turkish Kings in Asia Minor of the house of Caraman.  
13. Caraman, the first raiser of this family, Contemporary with Ottoman the first King of that race.  
14. Aladine Son of Caraman, and Son-in-Law of Amurath the first, of the house of Ottoman, by whom subdued, but pardoned and restored unto his estate, on the humble entreaties of his wife.  
15. Aladine II. Son of the former, subdued by Bajazet the first, and hanged by Tertumases, one of Bajazet's great Commanders.  
16. Mahomet, Son of Aladine the second, recovered his Kingdom on the death of Bajazet, vanquished and led captive by the mighty Tamerlane. Afterwards warred upon and vanquished by Mahomet the Son of Bajazet, redeemed his peace, by yielding up unto him many of his principal Towns; and was finally slain at the siege of Attalia.  
17. Ibrahim, the Son of Mahomet, and Son-in-Law of Amurath the second, against whom unadvisedly raising war, he was forced to submit and become his Tributary: after whose death, rebelling against Mahomet the Great, he was then also vanquished? and a reconciliation made betwixt them.  
18. Ibrahim II. by some called Pyramus, the Son of Ibrahim the first, supported Zemes' brother of Bajazet the second in his war against him: for which Bajazet having settled his affairs, invaded and subdued the Kingdom of Caramanta, killed the unfortunate King in battle, and so united that Estate unto the rest of the Dominions of the house of Ottoman. The strange successes of which house, from the first rising of it to these present times, shall be deferred till we come unto Turcomania, from whence this Nation first attempted and achieved the conquest of Persia, and which only of all their large possessions doth retain any thing of their name. In the mean time we will survey the Islands of this Lesser Asia, and so proceed to their possessions in the Greater, as they lie before us.     

19 The Province of the ASIAN ISLES.  
THe Province of the ASIAN ISLES comprehendeth all the Islands in Asia Minor; from the mouth of the Hellespont to the Rhodes, reckoning that for one: united first into a Province by the Emperor Vespasian; next reckoned as a part of the Asian Diocese, and afterwards, together with the Province of the Hellespont, and that of Asia properly and specially so called, making up the peculiar or exempt jutisdiction of the Proconsul of Asia. Those of most consideration are, 1. Tenedos, 2. Lesbos. 3. Chios. 4. Samos. 5. Coos. 6. Icaria. 7. Patmos. 8. Claros. 9 Caparthos. 10. Rhodes. Others of less note, having nothing memorable but their names, are scarce worth the naming.  
1. TENEDOS, is situate at the mouth of the Hellestont, overagainst the noted Promontory called of old Sigeum (but now Cape Janizarie) a Promontory of Troas, or the Lesser Phrygia, from which distant not above five miles. The Isle itself in circuit no more than ten; swelling with a round Mountain towards the North, in other parts level; in both producing as good wines as the best of Greece. It took name, as the general tradition was, from Tenes the Son of Cycnus, King of a little City in the Lesser Phrygia, who being falsely accused by his Stepdame for soliciting her to that incestuous mixture which she had violently importuned, and he as piously refused, was by the command of his Father put into a chest, exposed to the mercy of the Sea, and here miraculously preserved. Here for a time he is said to reign with great commendation for his justice; and after wards going to the aid of the Trojans, to have been slain by the hand of Achilles; of whom therefore it was not lawful to make mention in any of the Sacrifices offered in the Temple hereof. But Bochartus casting off all this as an old wife's fable, will have it so called from Tin-edum a Phoenician word, signifying Red clay, which the Potters made use of in their earthen vessels. A town it had of the same name with the Island, in which a Temple sacred to Apollo Sminthius; and 2. another called Asterion, situate near a little River well stored with Crabfish, whose shells were made in the form of an Axot Hatcher. From which Town as the Islanders have in some Authors the name of Asterii; so from the other circumstance they are said to have had the stamp of an Hatchet on their coin or money. Memorable for an old custom observed amongst them, which was, that at the back of the Judge there always stood a man with an Axe advanced; as well to terrify the Witnesses from giving false evidence to the Judge, as the Judge from pronouncing a false sentence upon the evidence. Whence the Proverb, Tenedia Securis. More memorable for the final destruction of Troy, which was plotted here the Grecians withdrawing their forces hither, as if gone in earnest, but from hence setting sail again to surprise the Town, when they saw their plot had took effect. And so I leave it with that Character which the Poet gives it. 
Est in conspectu Tenedos, notissima famâ  
Insula, divesopum Priami dum Regna menebant.  
Nunc tantum finus, & statio male-sida carinis.  In English thus, 
In sight of Troy an Island stands, well known,  
Called Tenedos; rich, and of great renown,  
Whilst Priam's Kingdom flourished; now (they say)  
Grown a poor Road, for ships an unsafe Bay.   
2. LESBOS, the largest of these Asian Isles, is distant from the main land of Troas about seven miles; 168 in compass: reckoned the seventh in bigness of the Mediterranean; which Aristotle in his Book de Mundo, ranketh in this Order following. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. That is to say, The most considerable of these, are Sicily, Sardinia, Corsica, Crete, Euboea, Cyprus, and Lesbos. And though both Seylax in his Periplus, a nameless Poet in Eustathius, Diodorus Siculus, Strabo, and others of the Ancients, vary in ordering of the rest, according as their information or fancies led them: yet Leshos comes in the seventh place constantly, without change at all. Upon which ground Bochartus will have it called Lesbos from Esburith a Phoenician word, signifying seven: contracted first to Esbu, by leaving out the last syllable of it; and then by changing but to bos, and prefixing L to the beginning. Far enough fet, and were it but as dearly bought, would be good for Ladies: this Island being reckoned in the seventh place for no other reason, but because it lay furthest off and most North from Sicily, from whence they ordered their account; and not any mystery in the name thereof.  
It had then the name from Lesbos the Chief City of it, as that from Lesbus the Son of Lapythus, who married Methymna the Daughter of Macarius Prince hereof: from which Macarius, it had sometimes the name of Macaria; as that of Mitylene by which it is now commonly called, from Mitylene another of the daughters of the said Macarius. And that the memory of the whole family might be preserved in this Island, Methymna also had a City called by her name, one of the principal of the Country.  
The Country towards the Westand South reported to be mountainous and somewhat barren; the rest level and fruitful: plentiful of excellent corn, and abounding in delicious wines, compared by Athenaeus to Ambrosia, the liquor of the Gods, as the Poet's fable; affording also plenty of sheep, and store of horses; these last courageous and strong, though but low of Stature. More memorable for the eminent persons which it hath produced, as 1. Sapph an Heroic woman, whose invention was the Sapphick verse, and therefore called the tenth Muse. 2. Pittacus, one of the seven Wisemen of Greece. 3. Theophraitus, that notable Physician and Philosopher. 4. Alcaus, the successor of Orpheus in the excellecy of Lyrical poesy; and 5. Arion, the Musician, who was so perfect on his Harp, that being cast into the Sea playing on that instrument, a Dolphin took him on his back, and wasted him safe as far as Corinth, where he related the whole story unto Periander, attested by the Mariners who had thrown him overboard. And though this be by some rejected as a poetical fiction; yet past all doubt, the man was not only an excellent Musician, but an eminent Poet, the first inventor of Tragedies, a chief Lyric, and the Author of the verse called Dithyrambic.  
Principal Towns herein, 1. Lesbos, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from whom (saith Stephanus) the whole Island had the name of Lesbos. 2. Methymna, so named from Methymna one of the daughters of Macarius, spoken of before. 3. Mitylene, so named from the other daughter, and wife of Lesbus: now the Chief City of the Island, seated on a Peninsula looking towards the main land, strong by nature, and fortified by Art: enjoying on either side a commodious Haven, that on the South most fit for Galleys; the other capable of ships of burden. Beautified heretofore with magnificent buildings, and sweetened with variety of delights and pleasures: little now left of it since subdued by the Turks, but a strong Castle manned with an able Garrison, and a well-stored Arsenall for Galleys, kept here in readiness to preserve those Seas from Pirates; with which much infested. But the two first long since decayed and grown out of knowledge, those of most note next Mitylene, are 4. Vasilica. 5. Theodori. 6. Castel-Gera: all of late days, and therefore of no observation in point of Story.  
The Island was first inhabited by the Pelasgians, conducted hither by Xanthus the Son of Triopus; whence named Pelasgia: afterwards by some jonians and people of sundry nations planted here by Macarius, (the father of Mitylene and Methymna) who by his prudence and the reputation of his justice, obtained a kind of Sovereignty over the neighbouring Islands. Lesbus' the Son of Lapithus arriving here with his Family, married Methymna, and had the Island for her Dower; though Mitylene had the hap to have the predominant City, and the Island consequently called by her name. Made subject to the State of Athens, in the time of the Peloponnesian war (when almost all Greece banded against that City) they revolted from it, and were so straight besieged by Paches, an Athenian Captain, that they submitted unto mercy. The General sends to Athens to know what should be done with the Mitylenians; Answer was sent, that he should put them to the sword. But the Senate on the morrow after repenting of that cruel Decree, sent a countermand. These latter Messengers made no stay, but eating with one hand, and rowing with the other, came to Mitylene, just as Paches was reading the former Order; by this speed prevented. So near were these miserable people to a fatal destruction. Subdued by the Romans with the rest of Greece, they fell together with it to the Constantinopolitan Emperors: from whom taken, with Chios, Samos, Andros, and some other of these Isles, Anno 1124. by the State of Venice, upon a quarrel betwixt them and the Grecian Emperor. Confirmed unto that Signory by the Emperor Baldwin, and all the rest of the Aegean added to their portion; those abovenamed were again recovered by the valour and good fortune of John Ducas, the Greek Emperor, then residing at Nice. Afterwards in the year 1335. the Emperor Calo-Johannes gave it to Franciscus Catalusius, a Noble Gentleman of Ge●o; with one of his Sisters, for her Dower. By whose posterity enjoyed till the year 1462. when Mahomet the Great incensed against Dominicus Catalusius the then Lord hereof, for the murder of his elder Brother, a Vassal and Tributary of his Empire (those Princes paying to the Turk an annual tribute of 4000 Ducats) but more for harbouring the Pirates of Spain and Italy; besieges him in Mitylene his principal City; which in 27 days (for so long it held) he constrained to submit unto him, and therewith all the Island also. Some of the Chief families, being removed unto Constantinople, upon some reasons of State, the main body of the people were permitted to remain here to till the land; and so continue to this day, with some few Turks, inconsiderable for their strength or numhers, intermixed amongst them.  
3. CHIOS, the next to Lesbos both in site and bigness, lieth opposite to the shore of jonia, from which distant not above four leagues, is in compass about 126 miles. So called, as some say, from Chione a fair Nymph hereof, much sought after by many Suitors: as others say, from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, a Greek word signifying Snow, wherewith the mountains of it are sometimes covered. And some again will have it take name from Chios the Chief City of it, which being built in the form of the Greek letter 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, first got that name unto itself, and afterwards did communicate it to the whole Island. Isidore in his Origines gives another reason, and will have it called so from a Syriack word signifying Mastic, whereof there is plenty in this Isle. Chios insula (saith he) Syrâ linquâ appellatur, eo quod ibi Mastyx gignitur; Sylli enim Mastychen Chion vocant. And were it so, that Chios in the Syriack did signify Mastic, there could no better reason be assigned for the name: this Island being more furnished with that commodity, than any place in the world besides. A gum it is growing out of the Lentisck tree, which in the months of July and August the Inhabitants force out of those trees by making with sharp instruments a deep incision into the the barks of them; one of which the juice dropping is afterwards hardened like a gum, and in the September following gathered. A Commodity with yieldeth yearly to the Inhabitants 18000 Sultanies, every Sultany being valued at the rate of a Zochine of Venice: and therefore the felling of the Lentisck tree, at the time of the distilling of this precious juice, interdicted on the penalty of losing the right hand of him that doth it.  
Other Commodities of this Island are Corn and Oil in indifferent plenty, some quarries of most excellent Marble, a certain green earth like the rust of brass; some Silks, and Cotton-Wool, but shirt in worth to those of Smyrna, and other places: Honey as good as any the world affordeth; and a vain of most delicious wines, those specially which grow on the Mountain Arvis, now called Amisea. Of which 〈◊〉 gives this commendation, In sumoia gloria fuere Thasium, Chiumque; ex Chio, quod Arvisium vocant. Of all wines (saith he) those of Thassus, and Chios, are of best esteem; and of these of Chios, the Arvisian. Strabo extolleth them in the Superlative degree, and calleth the wine hereof, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, incomparably the best of Greece. And Plutarch, speaking of an Epicurean or voluptuous liver, affirms that he conceived it the supreme felicity 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, to lie with Thais, and drink th●se Arvisian wines. Here are also infinite store of Patriges, of a red colour, kept tame, and fed in slocks like Geese, in the Streets and Greenswarths of their villages: some little Boy or Girl driving them to field, and calling them home again with a whistle when the night comes on.  
The Island divided commonly into two parts, the Higher called Apanomera, lying towards the North and West, hilly, and rough, but intermixed with fruitful vales and pleasant Rivers: the Lower, opposite unto it, called Catamorea, swollen here and there with gentle hillocks, on which groweth the Lentisck. The whole inhabited by Greeks intennixt with Genoese, and (since their conquest by that people) some few Turks amongst them. Which mixture with the Genoese, tempereth the levity of the Greeks with it than gravity: the better sort of people both in apparel and manners coming near the Genoese, once the Lords of this Island: the common fort continuing their old Greek humour of mirth and jollity, (not sensible of the Turkish thraldom under which they suffer) with as much licentiousness as ever. And though this intermixture hath so corrupted their language, that neither the Greek nor the Italian be here rightly spoken, but a compound tongue made up of both: yet keep they their Religions still distinct and separate, as if they had never known another.  
Here are reckoned in it six and thirty Towns and villages, the principal whereof are, I. S. Elias in the North. 2. Pigrine, in the midst hereof; and 3. Chios itself, now called Sio (as is all the Island) one of the seven Cities contending for the birth of Homer, whose Sepulchre they pretend to show in an old Castle near the Mount and Town of S. Elias (which were it his, would be a better argument for his burial here, than it is for his birth.) The Town situate in the most pleasant and fruitful part of the Country, to which both industry and Art have given great advantage: here being few houses without Orchards of excellent fruits, as Oranges, Lemons, Pomegranates, Citrons, and a kind of Fig, much praised for their quickness of taste by the ancient Romans. It standeth on the East-side opposite to the Shores of Asia, stretched along the bottom of the Haven, and on the Westside backed with a rocky Mountain, upon which it formerly did stand. The Buildings ordinary, the Streets narrow, and the Haven every day decaying: though otherwise secure once entered; and for directing of the entrance a Lantern advanced by the Genoese (when Lords hereof) to give light by night, and serve for a landmark in the day. Fortified on the North-side by a large and strong Castle, environed with deep ditches, well furnished with munition, and a Turkish Garrison. And because the Island is on all parts accessible, not naturally fortified with rocks, and dangerous precipices, as many others; besides this Castle, they have all along the Coast small Watch-to●rs, which with smoke by day, and fire by night, give notice unto one another of such Vessels as they see approaching: the Guards about the Castle being so intent also about their charge, that every minute of the night there goeth a word about the walls to declare their vigilancy.  
The Chians were at first a free people, governing themselves as a Commonwealth; and by reason of their many harbours, able to furnish out a Navy of 80 Sail, which gave them the Lordship of those Seas; till eclipsed by the Rhodians. Besieged by Philip the Father of Perseus, with his utmost power, who when he could not get it by force, proclaimed freedom to the Slaves (of which here were many) and liberty to ma●y with their Master's wives, if they would rebel against their Masters. And when this policy would not do it, the Town being held out with greater heat of indignation, he gave over the siege. At last they became subject to the Romans, with the rest of Greece, and followed punctually the same change of fortunes, as did those of Les●os; which we have spoken of before: till given by Andronicus Paloeologus, one of the last Greek Emperors, to the Justinians, a noble Genoesian Family, assistant to him in his wars. Under them it continued as tribute tries to the Turks (after the Turks had made themselves masters of Constantinople) to whom they annually paid eighteen thousand Ducats; till the year 1566. When Solyman the Magnificent picking a quarrel with them for some suspected correspondency with the Knights of Malta, commanded Pial, one of his greatest Bassas, to seize the Island. And he accordingly presenting himself before the City with a strong Fleet of eighty Galleys, did so astonish and amaze the Inhabitants of it, that without any other summons than the fight of his Navy, they surrendered themselves unto his disposing, upon Easter-day, being the same day he came before it. since that it hath continued Turkish, all save their Religion, enjoyed by them with like liberty as in former times.  
4. SAMOS, is on the Southeast of Chios, distant about five miles from the shores of jonia; 〈◊〉 eighty or eighty seven in compass; environed for the most part, especially on the Northwest with in●●able but beautified with a fair and capacious Haven; of little use by reason of the Pirates 〈…〉 s. The soil sufficiently enriched with most kind of fruits, abundantly plentiful 〈◊〉 Oly, and Olives, but of Vines altogether unfurnished which is the more to be admired in regard all the Islands and shores about it, produce them in so great a plenty. It stretcheth from the East to the West: and on the South part of it stood the City Samia, near unto the Haven before spoken of. In former times populous, and well inhabited, as was the rest of the Island; now wholly desolate in a manner, because of the Pirates, and in most places very much overgrown with woods: becoming thereby very useful to those public enemies, who find here Timber enough for Shipping, and can upon the sudden put a ship to Sea, for pursuit of their Robberies. The chief commodity it affordeth besides those above, is a medicinal Earth, useful for Chirurgery and Physic: of which in former times were those Vessels made, called Vasa Samia, in great request amongst the Romans.  
Anciently it had the names of Dryusa, Anathemusa, Melamphylas, and Ciparissa: outworn by that of Samos, which it still retaineth. Memorable in old times for the birth of Juno, of one of the Sibyls, hence called Samia; and finally of the wiseman Pythagoras (a wiser than any of the seven wise Masters, so renowned amongst them) who first brought Philosophy into Greece, and from thence into Italy. Once a free Commonwealth of no small esteem, the Institutes whereof are mentioned by Heraclides. in his Books of the several Commonwealths then being: afterwards made subject to the Tyrant Polycrates, a man so fortunate that for a long time he never fell into any mischance. Fearing lest such a long calm would bring on a tempest, he let fall into the Sea a most precious Ring, by him deservedly esteemed; that so it might be said he had some misfortunes. Which after he had found again in the belly of a fish brought accidentally to his table, he was overcome by Orontes a Persian, and brought to a miserable death. Leaving a notable example that fortune is certain in nothing but uncertainties; and like a Bee with a sharp sting, hath always some misery following in the train of a long concatenation of felicity. From this time forwards it ran the same fortune with the rest of these Lands; subject successively to the great Monarchies in former times, as of late times to the Venetians, Greeks, and Turks, who do now enjoy it.  
5. ICARIA, (now called Niceria) lieth not far from Samos, to the Westward of it, narrow, but extended out in length; the whole compass seven and thirty miles: neighboured by two great Rocks, or little Lands, of old called Melanthii, now the Fernaces; formidable at all times to Mariners, in the right especially. Meanly inhabited at the present, though abounding in pasturage, and yielding sufficiency of corn: Havenless, and therefore the less frequented, yet that defect supplied by commodious Roads. In former times called Doliche, than Macris, after Ichsiaesa: which name it held till the flight of Daedalus out of Crete. Who justly fearing the anger of Minos, for being Pander to his wife in her loves with Taurus, secretly with Icarus his son, fled out of that Island. And because he would be sure to outstrip the Rower; who pursued him, he added fails unto his Boat, which it is said he first invented. But Icarus, coming after in another Bark, delighted with the new device, clapped on too much Canvas, and bearing too great a Sail, was here cast away. Hence the new name both to this Island, and the Seas adjoining to it: and the occasion of the Fable of Daedalus putting wings upon his shoulders, when he fled from Crete; and of his sons flying too high, whereby the wax melted which his wings were fastened with, and so he perished in the water. Of which thus Ovid 
Dum petít infirmis nimium sublimia pennis  
Icarus, Icariis nomina fecit aquis.  In English thus, 
Whilst Icarus weak wings too high did soar,  
He fell, and gave name to th' Icarian shore.   
6. PATMOS, now called Palmosa, is situate on the South of the other two; A little Island, not above 30. miles in compass. Mounteinous, but indifferently fruitful, especially of wheat and pulse: of other commodities and fruits not so well provided. On one of these Mounteins stands a town of the s●me name with the Island; having on the top thereof a Monastery of Greek Caloiros; and on the bottom a fair haven (I mean in reference to the Island). Forty sail of Ships are said to belong unto it; by the trading whereof they bring in those provisions which the soil affordeth not: the soil about the town being so incomparably barren, that nothing groweth on or near it, but on such earth as is brought thither from other places. Unto this Island (as to others in other parts of the world) did the Roman Emperors use to confine offenders. A punishment laid by Domitian on S. John the Divine, who in this place writ his revelation to the Churches of Asia. So much the Text affirms for certain, as to the writing of it in this Island. And the Inhabitants by tradition point unto an house on the North-side of the Town in which it was written; and nor far off, the Cave, where it was revealed. Both places equally honoured by the Greeks, and Latins. They also show a dead man's hand, which they affirm to be his, the nails whereof grow again as oft as cut. But the Turks (saith Maginus) claim it for the hand of one of their Prophets. Let them dispute the controversy, whilst we hast to  
7. CLAROS, another Island not far off, containing about forty miles in compass. Well sto●●d with commodious Harbours, but very mountainous, some of those hills of such an height, that from the tops thereof, the City of Ephesus in jonia, though distant at least eighty miles, may be easily seen. It is ●●w called Calamo. Neighboured by Lero (of old called Ileron) a little Island not above eighteen miles an circuit; but very populous, inhabited both by Greeks and Turks. and furnishing the neighbouring Counties with some store of Aloes. Sacred in formertimes was Claros to Apollo; reckoned by him amongst his honours in his brags to Daphne: where he declares, 
— Mihi Delphica tellus,  
Et Claros, et Tenedos, Pataraeaque Regia servic.  That is to say, 
The folk of Delphos, Tenedos and Clare,  
And Royal Patara, my Vassals are.   
8. COOS, COS, or COUS, for by all these names it was called of old, is situate over against Caria, in the very bottom of the Aegean, that is to say, in that part thereof which is called Mare Myrtoum, the Myrtoan Sea. A Sea so called, as some say, from one Myrtilus, the Coachman or C●ioteer of OEnomaus, who having betrayed his race with Pelops, and importunate for his reward, was by Pelops precipitated into this Sea. Pliny less probably conceiveth that it took name from Myrtos a little Island not far from Euboea: a little to far off to extend its name to the shores of Caria. And therefore considering that Lydia anciently was called Myrtus, and that in those times Aeolis and jonia lying on this Sea, were accounted but as parts thereof; I think we may resolve with more probability that it derived this name from that Lydian Myrtus.  
In this Sea stands the Isle of Coos, now called Lange, affording Sailors as they pass by a most beautiful prospect, lying for the most part flat and level, but swelling towards the East with some graceful mountains, out of which issue many sweet and pleasant springs to refresh the Island, which maketh it more than ordinary fruitful. Productive of Cypress trees, Turpentine, and sundry others, both delightful and medicinal, but most especially celebrated for those rich wines, which the Good Fellows of Rome so much loved to quaff, called Vinum Cos. It is in compass 70 miles, having a Town of the same name, in the suburbs whereof Stomalimne stood, anciently the Temple of Aesculapius, famous, and rich with the offerings of those who having by his assistance (as they supposed) recovered health, came hither to make payment of their vows, and express their gratitude. It is now fortified with a strong Castle, held by a Garrison of Turks: and besides this, two Villages only in the Island, and both inhabited by Greeks.  
In elder times it had the name of Merope, Caria and Nymphoea, and at last of Coos. Memorable in being the Country of many famous men who were herein bota; viz. of Hypocrates, the Revivor of Physic, than almost decayed, who is hence called Hypocrates Cous. 2. Sinius, a Physician also; 3. Ariston, a Peripatetic Philosopher. 4. Philetas, as good an Orator as a Poet. 5. Nicias, who for a time oppressed the liberty of this people, and 6. of Apelles the famous Painter, who to express his art in the picture of Venus, (rising naked out of the Sea) assembled together all the most beautiful woman of this Island, uniting in that piece their divided perfections. Which famous piece being afterwards hanged up in the Temple of Stomalimne, one of the principal of this Island, was thence conveyed to Rome by Augustus, and their dedicated to Caesar, as the mother of the Julian Family: the Coans in regard hereof being eased of a great part of their annual tributes. Not much less memorable for that fine thin stuff (such as now called Tiffanies) so much in use amongst the Chief Ladies of Rome: which at once showed them clothed and naked. Perlucida utuntur veste, ita ut nudoe conspici possint, as my Author hath it. These they called Vestimenta Coa, and Vestes Coas, so often mentioned by the Poets, especially in their Amatoria; as Coa puellis Vestis, in Tibullus; Endue me Cois, in Propertius; Sieve e●●t in Cois, saith the Poet Ovid. So in others also, too many, and too long to be added here. I pass to  
9 CARPATHOS, situate on the South of Caria, in the Mediterranean, from this Island, called here abouts the Carpathtan Sea. A rugged and unpleasing soil, full of difficult mountains, but those mountains stored with quarries of most excellent Marble. In circuit about 60 miles, extending more in length than breadth. Heretofore beautified with four Cities, and thence named Tetrapolis. But three of the four Cities are long since perished, that of Carpathos being still remaining, and still the principal of the Island; both now called Scarpanto. Some other Towns it hath all along the shore, and every one of them furnished with some Port or Haven, but small, and for the most part very unsafe. Situate in the middle as it were betwixt Crete and Rhodes, it hath continued hitherto in the possession of the State of V●nice (if not taken from them very lately) to whom being given with other of the Lands of these Grecian Seas, at the taking of Constantinople by the Western forces, it hath the fortune or felicity to continue theirs, when almost all the residue were subdued by the Turks. The people Greek, of the communion of that Church, notwithstanding their subjection to a State of Italy.  
10. RHODES, situate in the Rhodian or Carpathian Sea, lieth over against the coast of Lyria, in Asia Minor, from which distant about 20 miles. Formerly called Ophiusa, Asteria, Aethroea, Trinachia, Poeessa, Corymbia, Atabyria, and at last Macaria; it settled finally and fortunately in the name of Rhodes. So named by the Grecians from the abundance of Roses, which the soil produceth, Rhodos in that language signifying a Rose, the Isle of Roses, as it were: but as the Poets say, of Rhoda, a Nymph of these Seas, here deflowered by Apollo; or rather of Rhoda, one of the daughters of Apollo begat on Venus: For so one of them thus declareth; 
Insula dicta Rhodos, de Sole et Cypride nata est.  
Rhoda, from whom this Isle took name,  
Of Venus and Apollo came.   
The Island 140 miles in compass, enriched with a most temperate air, and a fertile soil, producing finuts in very great plenty, full of excellent pastures, adorned with trees which always do continue gree●● and in a word so blest with the gists' nature, that it gave occasion to the fable of those Golden Showers, which were once said to have fallen upon it. The wines hereof so excellent, and so rich of taste, that by the Romans they were used in their second courses, or reserved for the sacrifices of the Gods, as too good for mortals, as affirmed by Virgil in the Georgics. The cause of which perpetual flourishing, and continual spring, is to be ascribed to the powerful influences of the Sun, so dearly cherishing this Island, or so much in love with it, that it is constantly affirmed that no day passeth wherein he shineth not clearly on it, be the air in all other places never so much overcast with Clouds, or obscured by mists. Feigned for that cause to have been naturally a mere Marish, altogether unhabitable, if not covered with waters, till loved by Phoebus, anstcrected above the waves by his vigorous influences.  
Of the People we shall speak anon; Look we in the mean time on the places of most observation. 1. Lindun (now Lindo a petty Town, but formerly of more esteem:) of note in those times for the Temple consecrated to Minerva, by Danaus' King of Egypt, landing here when he fled out of that Kingdom. As also for the birth of Cares, the Architect of the huge Colossus, whereof more presently; but specially for the nativity of Cleobulus, one of the seven wise men of Greece: the other six, being Solon of Ath●n●, Pertander of Corinth, Chilo of Sparta, Bias of Priene, Thales of Miletum, and Pittacus of Mitylene. Seven men of whom the Grecians most immensely bragged, as if the World could neither afford them equals, or an equal number: for which derided handsomely by Lactanitius, an old Christian writer, who scoff's their paucity, and calleth it a miserable and calamitous age, in quo septom Soli fuerunt qui hominum vocabula mererentur; in which there were no more than seven who deserved to be accounted men. 2. Rhodes, anciently, as now the chief City of it, the Island from hence taking name, and formerly, as well as in later times, depending on the fortunes and strength hereof. No place in elder times held superior to it, for the convenency of the Haven, magnificent buildings, delightful Orchards, and other excellencies. Situate on the East part of the Isle, on the declining of an hill, and near the Sea, where it enjoyeth a safe and commodious Haven: treble walled, fortified with thirteen Turrets, and five strong Bulwarks, besides divers Sconces, and other outworks: this Town, and Famagusta in the Isle of Cyprus, being conceived to be the two strongest holds in the Turkish Empire. In former times, one of the principal Universities of the Roman Empire; this Rhodes, Marseiles, Tarsus, Athens, and Alexandria, being reckoned the old Academies of the Monarchy. And to this Town, as a most noted place of Study, Tiberius (afterwards Emperor) did withdraw himself, when Augustus had declared his two Nephews Lucius and Caius, for his Heirs: pretending only a desire to improve himself in the ways of literature; whereas the true cause was his envy at their preferment. Honoured in those times with that huge Colossus, one of the seven wonders of the World, made by Chares of Lindum before mentioned. Composed of Brass, in height seventy Cubits, every finger of it being as great as an ordinary man; and consecrated to the Sun, as the proper Deity of the Island. Twelve years in making, and having stood but sixty six years, was pulled down in an instant by an Earthquake, which terribly shook the whole Island. The Rhodians being forbid by an Oracle to erect it again (or possibly pretending such an Oracle to save that charge) yet held the brass and other materials of it (in a manner) sacred. Not meddled with, nor sacriligeously purloined till Mnavias' the General of Osmen, the Mahometan Caliph, finding in himself no such scruple of conscience, (after he had subdued this Island) made a prey hereof; loading nine hundred Camels with the very brass of it. From this Colossus, was the Island sometimes called Colossa, and the People Collossians: not those Colossians (as some have very vainly thought) to whom Sain Paul writ his Epistle, those being of Colosse, a Town of the Greater Phrigya, as hath there been noted. Here was also in this City anciently a Temple of Bacchus, enriched with many presents both of Greeks and Romans; of both which People the Rhodians were then held in a fair esteem, but the God and the good Wines in greater. Towns of less note, are 3. Villanova. 4. Russicare, and some others, but as little memorable.  
This Island was first Peopled by Dodanim the son of Javan, and the Grandchild of Japhet, whom the Greeks call commonly but corruptly Rhodanim; mistaking the Hebrew letter Dalesh for that of Resh, letters so like as easily it might draw them to that mistake. Finding this Island too narrow for him, he left here a Colony, and with the main body of his People passed into Greece, where he planted the Country of Epirus, as hath there been said. Those which stayed here, being mistakingly called Rhodians (or called so by the Grecians, not looking with too curious eyes into their Antiquities, from the abundant of Roses herein growing) making the best use of their Haven, and other the advantages of their situation, became so expert in maritime affairs, that by Florus they are styled Populus nauticus; and that not only in the way of Trade and Merchandise, but of power and government: holding for many years the command of these Seas, and prescribing Laws for the Regleiment of Navegation. Which being called the Rhodian Laws, became the general Rule for deciding marine causes, and ordering the Affairs of Sea, in all the parts and Provinces of the Roman Empire: and so continued till supplanted in these Westem parts by the Laws of Oleron. Fearful of falling under the Macedonians, they applied themselves unto the Romans; whom first they aided in their wars against Philip the Father of Perseus; and afterwards in that also against Antiochus. Rewarded for this last service with Lycia and Caria, two of the Asian Provinces, which Antiochus was to leave on his composition; they became so faithfully affected to the State of Rome, that when all the other Lands of the Mediterranean and Aegean Seas, revalted to Mithridates' King of Pontus: this only adhered unto the Romans. Proud either of their strength at Sea, or of those good Officers, they began to take upon them as Mediators, and thought themselves fit men to advise their Masters. Crown troublesome by their frequent interpositions, and losing much of their esteem by such impertinencies: they began to grow jealous of the Romans, and incline to Perseus' King of Macedon; whose Father they before opposed with their utmost power. A change which Perterculus expresseth with some admiration. Rhodij ipsi fidelissimi antea Romanis, dubià jam fide proniores in Regis parts visisunt, as his words there are. But yet they held for them against Mithridates, as before was said; and served their turn on all occasions; until insensibly they bretraied their liberty to the power of their friends; and of Confederates and Alleys, became their Vassals. Made by Vespasian into a Province with the rest of the Isles, the Governor or Prsident of that Province fixing here his residence, as the chief of those Lands: which gave the title of Metropolitan tropolitan to the Bishop of Rhodes. Under that Empire it continued, (or under that of Constantinople after the division) till the year 1124. when taken from the Grecians, by the State of Venice; again recovered by the Greeks, in the time of their Emperor John Ducas, then residing at Nice. Won from the Grecians by the Turks, the Knights of Saint John of Jerusalem, being utterly driven out of Asia, possessed themselves of it, by the favour of Emanuel the then Emperor, who aided them in the conquest, Anno 1308. Afterwards proving bad neighbours to the Turkish tyrants, whom they ceased not to infest upon all occasions, they were many times in vain invaded: Mahomet the Great, famous for taking Constantinople and the Empire of Trabezond, spending some time before their City with both loss and shame. At the last 1522. it was again besieged by Solyman the Magnificent, Lilladamus' Villerius being then Great Master: who did as much in defence hereof as policy and puissance could extend unto. But multitude in the end prevailed, and upon Christmas day, the Turk entered Rhodes as Conqueror; though possibly he might have said (as Pyrrhus once said of a like victory against the Romans) that such another victory would have quite undone him. Since that a Province of the Turks, by whom, and by some Jews banished out of Spain, the City of Rhodes is wholly inhabited: the Christians, which are licenced to dwell in the Country, and have leave to trade there in the day time, not suffered upon pain of death to stay there all night. And so we pass from the Lands of the Asian Diocese, to the Isle of Cyprus, a near neighbour unto Anatolia, but no member of it: the rest of that Diocese, and those Seas, as 11. Possidium. 12. Arcesine. 13 Bugialos. 14. Minyas. 15. Sirne. 16. Cesi, and the rest, yielding but little matter of observation, besides their names.    

OF CYPRUS.  
CYPRUS is situate in the Syrian and Cilician Seas, extended in length from East to West two hundred miles, in breadth, sixty, the whole cumpass reckoned five hundred and fifty: distant about sixty miles from the rocky shores of Cilicia in Asia Minor, and about an hundred from the main Land of Syria, towards which it shooteth itself out with a long sharp Promontory, extending heretofore to the main land, from which rent in former time by a Violent Earthquake, as is said by Pliny; and worn unto this narrowness by the continual working of the Sea upon it.  
No place hath oftener changed its name, or at lest had more names on the By than this. Called at first Cethin, or Cethinia, from Ketim the son of Javan, who first planted in it; 2. Cerastis, from the abundance of Promontories, thrusting like horns into the Sea, (as the word intimates in the Greek.) 3. Amathusia. 4. Paphia. 5. Salaminia; these three last from the principal Towns in those parts hereof. 6. Macaria, from the fruitfulness and felicities of it. Besides these it hath in some times had these By-names also, as 7. Asperia, from the roughness of the Soyl. 8. Collinia, from the frequency of Hills, and Mountains. 9 Aerosa, from the Mines of Brass, which abound therein. 10. And finally, all those forgotten or laid by, it settled at the last in the name of Cyprus. So called, say some, from the abundance of Cypress Trees, with which most plentifully provided; as others from Cryptos a Greek word, signifying Concealed or hidden, because sometimes concealed by the Surges from the eye of Sailors; but most improbably said by others to take name from Cyrus, who founded here the City of Aphrodisia, whereas indeed six hundred years before Cyprus his birth, we find it by this name in Homer; more rightly Stephanus, who deriveth it, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from Cyprus daughter of Cinyras, one of the Kings hereof, living before the Trojan Wars: though in my mind the first comes nearest to the truth, the Cypress Tree, not only growing here in so great abundance, but being anciently peculiar in a manner to this Island only.  
But on what ground soever it was called Cyprus, certain I am it had the name of Cerastis upon very good reason: no Island or Region that I know of (for the bigness of it) thrusting out so many sharp Promontories. For on the West, there is 1. the Promontory called Acamas, now Capo S. Pisano. 2. Drepanum, now Trapano and Melechia. 3. Zephyrum, or Caput Calidoni, now Punta Malota. On the South, 4. Phrurium, now Capo Bianco. 5. Curias, or Capo della Gat. 6. Gades, or Capo Chitt. 7. Throni, or Capo Pilae. On the East, 8. Pendaliun, now Capo di Griego. 9 Clides, now Capo S. Andrea. And on the North, 10. Cronyon, now Capo Cornochiette; besides some others of less note. Some of the Poets give another reason of this name, as that Venus offended with the People of Amathus for sacrificing their guests, should turn them into horned cattle: Find ettam nomen traxere Cerastae, as it is in Ovid. But that merely fabulous; somewhat of kind unto the Legend of Thomas Becket, and the Kentish Long-tailes. Yet so far we may join with Ovid, that the Island was not only called Cerastis; but that the People were also called Cerastae, of which there wants not proof from some other Authors; with which we need not trouble ourselves, that name being altogether worn out of use, and no other but that of Cyprus given it in common speech. Nor is it a matter of more strangeness that Cyprus should be called so by the Grecians, from its abundance of Cypress Trees, anciently and originally peculiar to this Island, as before was noted: than that the same Grecians should give unto the neighbouring Island the name of Rhodes, from its great plenty of Roses; or to the neighbouring Continent the name of Phoenicia, from its great plenty of Palmtrees; the words so signifiying in that Language.  
It is situate under the fourth Climate, so that the longest day in summer is no more than 14. hours and an half: and for that cause the air in summer time exceeding hot and swelthry: the soil moistened with some few brooks, meriting rather the name of torrents, than rivers; which being generated for the most part by rain water, are not seldom dried up by the heat of the Sun: insomuch that in the reign of Constantine the Great, this Island was for 36 years together almost utterly forsaken; no rain falling all that time. These inconveniences notwithstanding, it is stored with such plenty of all things, that without the help of any foreign Nation, it is of itself able to build a tall ship from the keel to the topsail, and so put it to Sea furnished with all things needful for a voyage, or a Sea-fight. It also aboundeth in Wine, Oil, Corn, Sugar, Cotton, Honey, Wool, Turpentine, and Alum; Verdegreece, all sorts of Metals, store of Salt, Grograms, and other commodities: whereupon this Island was once called Macaria (i.e. happy.) By reason of which wounderful affluence of all necessaries, and that variety of pleasures (even to sensuality) which the place afforded, it was antiontly consecrated unto Venus, who is hence called Venus Cypria, and Dea Cypri, Sic te diva potens Cypri, in Horace; and in Ovid,  
Festa dies Veneris, tota celeberrima Cypro,  
Venerat; ipsa suis aderat Venus aurea festis.  
Venus' feasts hallowed through all Cyprus came;  
And Venus with her presence graced the same.  
The people hereof are warlike, strong and nimble; of great civility, hospitality to their neighbours, and love to strangers of all Nations, Jews only excepted. For in the Empire of Trajan, the Jews inhabiting Egypt and the adjoining Countries, drew themselves together, and chose one A exanaer for their Captain: under whose conduct they entered into this Island, and laid it desolate, killing in it 240000 persons of all sexes and ages; not without much bloodshed vanquished and slain by Lucius the Emperor's Lieutenant. Since which time the Cypriots permit no Jew to enter into the Island: but come he hither voluntarily or by force of tempest, they lay hands on him, and lead him presently to execution. A hated Nation, that neither innocence can protect, or equity reprieve from that cruel custom.  
The women in former times much noted for their Unchastity, to which their worshipping of Venus was no small incentive; it being the custom of these women to prostitute themselves on the shores to the passers by: their very Virgins not refusing to be hanselled there, before their marriage; either to raise their portions by the sale of their bodies, or else to please their Goddess with such beastly sacrifices. And if Volaterranus may be credited (as I think he may) the Ladies which attended on Queen Carlotte, when she came to Rome to seek for aid against James the bastard, who had dispossessed her of this Kingdom, showed themselves little chaster than those ancient Cypriots. Somewhat more fortunate in the men, Aes●lepiades the Author of the verse so named. 2. Xenophon, an old Poet. 3. Zeno, and 4. Apollonius, the Philosophers. 5. Epiphanius, the learned Bishop of Salamis; and 6. above all, Saint Barnabas, the dear Associate of Saint Paul, being all natives of this Country.  
The Christian faith was first here planted by Saint Paul, and Barnabas, as the very first fruits of their Apostleship, after they had been separated to the work of the Ministry by the Imposition of hands; as appear Acts 13. v. 4. etc. The Church hereof, by reason of the Antiquity of it, and the honour of this joint foundation, so privileged in the best ages of Christianity, that the Archbishop of this Island had all prerogatives of a Primate; consecrated by his own Suffragan Bishops, and acting in all sacred and Ecclesiastical affairs, without dependence on, or relation to, the See of Antioch, whereunto all other Bishops in the Eastern Diocese were either subordinate or subject. Which privilege being questioned in the Council of Ephesus, was by the Fathers there assembled, on a full hearing of the cause, approved and ratifyed; confirmed by the Civil sanction of the Emperor Justinian, whose wife was a native of this Island; and by the name of Jus Cyprium, the privilege or exemption of the Cyprian Church, transmitted to the Prelates of succeeding times. Which notwithstanding, they continued in good correspondence with the Eastern Churches of the Greek Communion, and officiated all Divine Acts after the rites and forms thereof; till the Venetians became Lords of it, who brought in the Latin Service into some of their Churches, and appointed Bishops and other Ministers of the Papal party, for execution of the same. And for the Government of these Churches, they had at first fourteen Bishops and Arch-Bishops, to gratify Queen Alice, (who had a mind to enrich her friends with some of the spoils of them) reduced by Innocent the third to four only, that is to say, the Archbishopric of Nicosia, the Bishoprics of Famagusta, Paphos, and Amathus; but each See furnished with two Prelates, the one for the Greeks, the other for the Latins, of which the Bishops for the Latins have all the Lands and annual Revenues, which of right belong to those Cathredrals, the Greek Bishops living upon stipends, leavyed on the Priests and Deacons of their jurisdiction.  
Rivers, as formerly was said, here are very few: and of those few, the principal are called Lycus, and Lapithus; the first running towards the South, the last towards the North; both not seldom so dried up, that they leave their empty Channels without any water. Both also have their Source from the hill O'ympus (the highest Mountain of the Island) garnished with Trees and fruits of all sorts; in compass about eighteen Leagues (which make four and fifty Italian miles) and at the end of every League a Monastery of Greek Monks or Caloires, and a fountain of fresh water for the use of the house. Here are also two other little Rivers, the one called 3. Bodeus, the other 4. Tolius, but of the same nature as the former.  
By Ptolemy, or in his time, divided into four parts or Provinces, but since it fell into the hands of the Lusignan family, distributed into twelve Counties or Cantrades; most of them called by the names of their Principal Towns, viz. 1. Nicosia. 2. Famagusta. 3. Paphia. 4. Audima. 5. Limissa. 6. Masorum. 7. Salines. 8. Messoria. 9 Crusocus. 10. Pentalia. 11. Carpassus. 12. Cerines'. The whole containing, besides these Cities and great Towns, 805 Villages, or thereabouts, which they called Casales; whereof the one half anciently belonged unto the Crown; the other half divided betwixt the Lay-Nobility, and the ecclesiastics: the Patrimony of these last being computed at 80000 Crowns of annual rents, besides casualties, and the vails of the Altar. But because the tracing out of these Cantrades will be very difficult (as a way which none have gone before me) I will adhere to the division made hereof in the time of Ptolemy, into the Provinces of 1. Paphia, 2. Amathusia, 3. Lapethia, and 4. Salamine.  
1. PAPHIA, so called of Paphos the chief town thereof, taketh up the West part of the Island: in which the Towns of most importance and observation, are, 1. Pa●hos, on the Seaside, by Pliny called Pala-paphos, or old Paphus, built as some say by Cyniras', the Father of Myrrah, and so named in memory of Paphus his father: but as others say, by Paphos, the Son of Pygmalion, Kings of Phoenicia and Cyprus: to which last Ovid doth agree, who speaking of Pygmalion's statue, turned into a woman by the power of Venus (or rather of his beautiful wife, fabled, for the surpassing whiteness of her skin, to be made of Ivory) he adds this of her, 
Illa Paphum genuit de quo tenet insula nomen.  
She Paphus bare, from whom the name  
Of Paphia, to the Island came.   
Here Venus had her so much celebrated Temple; hence the name of Paphia; and here her Votaries of both sexes in their natural nakedness did perform her sacrifices. Both Town and Temple ruined by a fearful Earthquake; or as the Legends have it, by the prayers of Saint Barnabas; the ruins of it still remaining. 2. Paphos Nova, or New Paphos, Now called Basso, five miles from the old, built by Agapenor, one of the Nephews of Lycurgus the Spartan Lawgiver, after the sack of Troy forced hither by a violent tempest: consecreate to the same impure Goddess, and much frequented, but without injury to the other; those which here offered, not thinking they had done her sufficient service, unless they went in a solemn manner of procession, and paid their vows also at the other. 3. Arsinoe, situate betwixt both; built by, or called so in honour of Arsinoe daughter of Ptolemy the first King Egypt, and Lord of Cyprus, of that house. 4. Drepanun, now called Trepano, under the Promontory so named, a well-traded Port, but miserably defaced by the Turks, when they took this Island. 5. Connelia, one of the richest of the Island, by reason of the plenty of Sugar, and Cotton, and Wool, growing thereabouts. Built in the place of 6. Cythera, dedicated to Venus also, but differing from the Island of that name in the Aegean Sea, rather in pronunciation than the purity of her oblations: the last syllable save one, in the name of that Island, being short in verse, but this of Cyprus sounding long, as in this of Virgil.  
Est Amathus, est celsa mihi Paphos, atque Cythera.  
Cythera, Amathus divine,  
And lofty Paphos, are all mine.  
2. On the Southeast of Paphia lieth the Province or District of AMATHUSIA, taking up the South parts of the Island which look towards Egypt. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Amathus, giving name unto this division, then of most note, and much frequented for the annual sacrifices made unto Adonis the darling of Venus, who had here another of her Temples: the ruins of both hardly now discerned. Built as some say by Amasis' King of Egypt, when he conquered this Island; but as others say by some of the Anathites, descended from Anath one of the Sons of Canaan. 2. Cetium, or Citium, (for I find it called by both names) the birthplace of Zeno the Stoic, hence called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or Citiensis; and memorable for the death of Cimon the Athenian General, a Town wherein the memory of Cittim, the Son of Javan, is most apparently preserved. 3. Episcopio, one of the chief of all the Island, built on the place, or out of the decay, of 4. Curias, not far from the Promontory of the same name, founded by the Argives, where Apollo had both a Grove and a Temple, by the name of Apollo Hylates: his Altars in those times held so sacred, that whosoever presumed to touch them, was thrown into the Sea from the Promontory or rocks adjoining. 5. Salines, or Salinae, so called from the rich Saltpits, one of the chief Towns of this part; and giving name to one of these twelve Cantrades, into which the whole is now divided.  
3. LAPETHIA, the third part of the Island, lieth on the North thereof, opposite to Cilicia in Asia Minor. Places of most importance in it, 1. Nicosia, the Regal City of the Kings, and the See of the Archbishop, and the chief of the Island: anciently called Ledronsis, and Lenteinis; but those names long ago laid by. Situate in the midst of the Isle; and in a plain and champain Country, obundantly fertile and delightful. Environed with a fair wall, so exactly round as if it had been drawn with a pair of compasses; in circuit about five miles, and both for situation, numbers of people, and magnificent buildings of all sorts both public and private, compared by some to the most beautiful City of Florence. Fortified by the Venetians, when in their possession, with new walls, deep ditches, and eleven strong Bulwarks, with three great Outworks, all of them built according to the Art of modern fortification. But notwithstanding all these works, and the help of 250 piece of Cannon planted on the walls, and about the City, it was by the Turks taken at the second or third assault, Septemb. 9 Anno 1570. So evident a truth it is, that Fortifications are more strengthened by the gallantry and courage of the Defendants, than the Defendants are by their Fortifications. 2. Cerines', situate near the Sea, strong by art and nature, and furnished with all things necessary to endure a siege; but yielded to the Turks by Alfonsus Palacius the unwarlike Governor, terrified with the great slaughter made at the sack of Nicosia, before the enemy came near it. At first called Ceurania, and said to have been built by Cyrus the great Persian King, when he first subdued the nine Kings hereof, and united the Island to that Crown; blest with a more temperate and wholesome air, than any other in the Country. 3. Tremitus, the birthplace of Spiridion, a Bishop of the Primitive times, renowned for miracles, many of which reported by Sozomen, lib. 1. cap. 10. and other Ecclesiaaesticall writers. Wholly decayed, the ruin of it much contributing to the rise of Nicosia. 5. Lapithus (by Pliny called Lapeto) on the banks of a small Riveret of that name. Of so great note in former times, that it gave to this Division the name of Lapethia. In this part standeth the hill Olympus (now the Mountain of the holy Cross) described before.  
4. SALAMINE, the fourth and last Province of this Island, taketh up the whole East-parts hereof: So named from 1. Salamis, once the chief City of the Isle, and the Sea of the Primate, or Metropolitan hereof, in the Primitive times. Destroyed by the Jews in the reign of Trajan, and rebuilt again; but being after that taken, sacked, and razed unto the ground by the Saracens, in the time of Heraclius, it never could again recover: the Metropolitan See after that subversion, being removed to Nicosia. It was sometimes, and by some writers, called Constantia also; but that name could give it no more perpetuity than the other of Salamis. Memorable whilst it stood for the founder of it, being Teucer the son of I elamon King of Salamis, an Isle of the Aegean Sea; banished his Country by his Father, and settled in this Island by the power of Belus, King of Phoenicia: as also for a famous Temple sacred unto Jupiter, hence called Salaminius. Out of the ruins hereof arose 2. Famagusta, now the prime City of rhese parts; built as is said by Costa, the Father of Saint Catharize; but that uncertain. Situate ate at the East end of the Island, in a plain and low ground betwixt two Promontories, the one called the 〈◊〉 of Saint Andren, and the other Cap oh di Griego, or the head of Grecia. In compass not above two miles, in form four square, but that the side towards the East stretcheth out more in length than the other three. On two parts beaten on with the Sea, the other parts towards the Land defended with a Ditch not above fifteen foot in breadth, an old stone wall, and certain Bulwarks. The Haven (opposite to Tripoli a Town of Syria) openeth towards the Southeast, defended from the injury of the Sea by two great Rocks, betwixt which the Sea cometh in at a narrow passage not above forty paces broad, but after opening wider and wider, maketh a convenient Harbour, rather safe than large, assured both by the difficult entrance, and a chain crossed over it. The whole Town, when the Turks appeared before it, but meanly fortified: the works of it of the old fashion, generally decayed except one Bulwark, which was built according to the modern Arts of Fortification, with Palisadoes, Curtains, Casemates, and all other Additaments: most gallantly defended by Bragadine the noble General, to the wonder and envy of the Turks, who spent no less than 118000 great shot upon it; and at last yielded upon honourable terms, had they been as punctually performed. 3. Aphrodisium, so named of Venus, whom the Greeks called Aplrodite, who had here another of her Temples. 4. Arsinoe, built also by one of the Arsino's Queens of Egypt (there being two others of this name, and the same foundation,) now called Lescare, and anciently renowned for the Groves of Jup●ter. 5 Tamassus, of good note in the time of Strabo, for rich Mines of Brass, as afterwards for abundance of Verdegreece and Vitriol, found plentifully in the fields adjoining. 6. Idalium, near a Mount of the same name, so called by accident. For Chalcenor the founder of it being told by Oracle, that he should seat himself, and build a City where he first saw the rising Sun: one of his followers, seeing the Sun begin to rise, cried out 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is to say, behold the Sun. Which omen taken by Chalcenor, he here built this City. But whether this were so or not (as for my part I build not very much upon it) certain it is, that Venus had here another Temple, neighboured by the idalian Groves, so memorised and chanted by the ancient Poets. So strong an influence had lust and sensuality on this wretched People, that every corner of the Island was defiled with those brutish Sacrifices which day by day were offered to that impure deity: though to say truth, it was no marvel if having made their Belly their God, they made also in the next place their glory their shame.  
The first Inhabitants of this Island were the posterity of Cittim the Son of Javan, and grandsonne of Japhet: who having seen his brother Tarshish settled in Cilicia, (where his memory is still preserved in the City of Tarsus) planted himself and his retinue in this opposite Island. The City of Cetium as Ptolemy, or Cuium as Pliny calleth it, one of the ancientest of the Island; which with the authority of Josephus and others of the ancient writers, put it out of question. But being this Island was too narrow to contain his numbers, and willing to seek further off for a larger dwelling, he left here so many of his followers as might serve in time to plant the Country; and with the rest passed into Macedon, where we have already spoken of him. Made tributary first to Amasis' King of Egypt, from which distant about three or four days failing. Subjected afterwards to the Phoenicians, a near neighbour to them, who being a Seafaring people, made themselves masters of the Seacoasts and maritime places. Cinyras the Father of Myrrah (by whom both Father and Grandfather to Adonis) is said to have been King of both. The like affirmed of Belus one of his Successsors, who is said to have been the founder of the City of Citium, named so (if not rather repaired than new built by him,) with reference no doubt to ●ittim, the first Progenitor of this People. By the power and favour of this Belus, Teucer the Son of Telamonius banished his Country, accompanied with many followers from Salamis, Athens, and Arcadia, was settled in the East-parts hereof, where the City of Salamis, by him built, was his first plantation. Yet so, that the Phoenicians kept their former hold: it being evident in Story that Eluloeus one of the Successors of this Belus, (but a King of Tyre,) and a Co-temporary with Salmanassar King of Assyria, passed over into Cyprus with a puissant Navy to reduce the Citioeans to obedience, who had then rebelled. The Island at first coming of Teucer hither so infinitely overgrown with woods, that the people were not able to till the land. Insomuch that notwithstanding the great waist made of them, both in building ships, and casting metals, a law was made that every one which would should fallen them, and take as much ground in severalty for his own inheritance, as he could overcome and make fit for tillage. Encourged herewith, the natural Cypriots, together with the Colonies of Grecians, Phoenicians, and Egyptians, so bestirred themselves, that at last they brought it unto Champagn: parceled out in succeeding times amongst nine Kings, for so many Cyrus the great Persian Monarch found at his coming hither. But Cyrus, though he did subdue all those petit Princes, yet he took not from them their estates, or titles: contented with the conquest of it, and an annual tribute. For after this, in the time of Artaxerxes Mnemon, we find Evagoras, and Nicooles, to whom Isocrates inscribed two of his Orations, to be Kings hereof. And in the time of Alexander the Great, Citium itself (such was the honour born unto the Mother-City) had a King apart, not subject unto any other. The King whereof to endear himself with the Conqueror, gave him a sword, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, saith Plutarch, an admirable sword, both for colour and lightness, which he after used in all his fights. And after the death of Alexander, his great Commanders cantoning his estates amongst them, the Princes and people of this Island were in great distractions; not knowing to whom they might submit for their best advantage. But Ptolemy who had seized on Egypt for his part of the spoil, being strong in shipping, settled them by a personal visit; and fortifying some of the best pieces in it, assured the Country to himself. To him and his posterity it continued subject till the time of Ptolemy Auletes the nineth King of this line in our Account, who gave it for a portion to one of his Brethren: in whose time, the Romans, without any colour or pretence of quarrel, but only to enrich themselves with the spoil of the Island, sent Portius Cato to subdue it. And he at first assayed to get it with die King's consent, offering him, in the name of the Roman Senate, the Priesthood of the Temple of Paphos, being a rich and gainful Office, and of high esteem among that people. But when Ptolemy for fear of a worse mischief had made away himself by poison, Cato without more ceremony takes possession of it. And because Ammianus Marcellinus the Historian, hath so significantly expressed this business, and withal described so punctually the estate of this Island; we will add to this discourse from him; though somewhat be repeated which was said before. Cyprum insulam procul à Continente distantem, & protuosam, etc. The Isle of Cyprus, far distant from the Continent, and well stored with Harbours, is famous, besides many Municipal Towns, by two principal Cities, that is to say, Salamis, and Paphos, the one sacred to Jupiter, and the other to Venus. An Isle so admirably fruitful, and with all things furnished, that without the help of any foreign Nation, it is able of itself to build and rig forth a ship from the very keel unto the topsail, and trim it with all tackle necessary for a present voyage. Nor do I shame to say, that with greater avarice than justice, the Romans did invade this Island; King Ptolemy, our old Confederate and Ally, being unworthily proscribed, for no other reason but that our treasury was bare, our Exchequer empty. And he no sooner had prevented this dishonour by a quick and voluntary death, making away himself by poison, but the Island was forthwith made tributary, and the riches of it, velut hostiles exuvioe classi imposit oe & in urbem adduct oe per Catonem, as the spoils of so re conquered enemy were brought on Ship-bord, and conveyed by Cato unto Rome. So far and to this purpose he.  
I know there is another cause alleged for the sending of Cato on this Errand, viz. that Clodius who was then Tribune and sped the Edict, might have opportunity by his absence to revenge himself on Cicero and some others of the opposite faction: but the main business was the money, as before was said; the prey amounting to 7000 Talents, which comes to two Millions, and one hundred thousand Crowns, of coin now currant. Which money and moveables, amounting unto so vast a sum, he fearing to lose by Sea, divided it into many small portions, which he put into several boxes, viz. in every box two Talents and fifty Drachms. At the end of every box he fastened a long rope with a piece of Cork; by which floating above the water, the money, if by Shipwreck lost, might be espied again: which was not much unlike the buoys which Mariners fasten by long ropes to their Anchors, that they may be the sooner found. We see by this that the pretence of the Romans to this Country was very weak: Avariùs magis quam justius sumus assecuti, are the words of Sextus Rutus also. But being made a Roman Province, it was in the division of the Empire assigned to the Constantinopolitan Emperors: under whom it suffered, as all other parts of the Empire did, by the violent invasion of the Saracens, who spoiled and ransacked it in the time of Constans the second, destroying then the City of Salamis or Constantia. But that tempest being overblown, they returned again unto that Empire, governed by a Succession of Dukes, till the year 1184. At which time Androvicus Comnenus usurping the Greek Empire, compelled Isaacibus 〈◊〉 one of the blood Royal, to shift for himself: who seizing on this Island made himself King thereof, and ruling till the year 1191. when Richard the first of England, being denied the Common courtesy of taking in fresh water, and seeing his Soldiers abused by the Cypriots, not only took the King Prisoner, but subdued the whole Island. And as Paterculus telleth us, that when Marcus Antonius had captivated Aramasdes King of Armenia; Catenis, sed ne quid honori deesset, aureis vinxit; So did our Richard keep a decorum towards this Prisoner, binding him not in bonds of Iron, but silver. King Richard having thus possessed himself of this Country, sold it for ready money, (which for his managing of his intended wars against the Turk, he most needed) unto the Templars: and taking it, upon I know not what discontent, again from them, he bestowed it on Guy of Lusignam, the titulary and miserable King of Hierutalem; receiving in way of exchange, the title of that lost and shipwracked Kingdom; with which title be and some of his Successors for a time were honoured.  
In the posterity of this Guy, this Island continued free and absolute till the year one thousand four hundred twentythree when Melechella (or Melechnaser) Sultan of Egypt, invaded this Country, took John King hereof Prisoner, ransomed him for 150000 Sultanies, restored him to his Kingdom, and imposed on him and his Successors, the yearly tribute of 40000 Crowns. This John was Father to another John, whose two Children were Carlotte a legitimate daughter, and James a bastard Son. James, after the death of his Father, dispossessed his Sister Carlotte of the Crown, by the consent and help of the Sultan of Egypt. and the better to strengthen himself against all opposition, he took to wife Catharine Cornari, daughter by adoption to the Venetian Senate; whom at his death he made his heir, if the child she went withal (having then none by her) should die without issue, as it did, not long after it was born: and she seeing the factious Nobility too headstrong to be bridled by a female authority, like a good child resigned her Crown and Sceptre to the Venetian State, Anno 1473. These defended it against all claims, (paying only as tribute to the Egyptian, and after to the Turkish Sultan's, the 40000 Crowns before mentioned;) till the year 1570. when Mustapha, General of the Turks, wrested it from the Venetians, to the use of his Master Selimus the second, who pretended title to it as Lord of Egypt. The governor of the Venetian Forces at the time of this unfortunate loss, was Signior Bragadino: who as long as hope of succours, means of resistance, or possibility of prevailing continued, with incredible valour made good the Town of Famagusta, in whose defence consisted the welfare of the whole Island. At last he yielded it on honourable conditions, had they been as faithfully kept, as punctually agreed on. But Mustapha the Turkish General inviting to his Tent, the principal men of worth in the Town, caused them all to be murdered: and as for Bragadin himself, he commanded his ears to be cut off, his body to be flayed alive, and his skin stuffed with straw, to be hanged at the main yard of his Galley. The chief of the prisoners and spoils were in two tall ships, and one Gallion, sent unto Se●mus; but he never saw them. For a Noble Cyprian Lady destinated to the lust of the Grand Signeour, fired certain barrels of powder; by the violence whereof both the vessels and the booty in them, were in part burned, in part drowned. A famous and heroic act; inferior unto none of the Roman Dames, so much commended in their Stories, though more to be commended in a Roman than a Christian Lady.  
Thus having summed up the affairs of this Island from the first plantation of it, till this last sad conquest, I will lay down the succession of the Cyprian Kings of the Noble Lusignam Family, in this ensuing Catalogue of 

The Kings of Cyprus.  
1. Guy of Lusignam, the titulary King of Jerusalem, estated in the Kingdom of Cyprus by Richard the first of England.  
2. Almericus, the brother of Guy.  
3. Hugh, the Son of Almericus.  
4. Henry, the Son of Hugh.  
5. Hugh II. Son of Henry.  
6. Hugh III. Son of Hugh the second.  
7. John, Son of Hugh the third.  
8. Henry II. the Brother of John.  
9 Hugh IU. Son of Guido, the younger brother of John, and Henry the second.  
10. Peter, the Son of Hugh the fourth.  
11. Petrinus, the Son of Peter.  
12. James, younger brother of Peter, and Uncle to Petrinus.  
13. James, the Son of James, made Tributary by Melechnaser, to the Kingdom of Egypt.  
14. John II. the Son of Janus.  
15. Carlotte, sole Daughter and heir of John the second, first married to John the Prince of Portugal, and after to Lewis Prince of Savoy; outed of her estate and Kingdom, by  
16. James II. the bastard Son of John the second, who by a strong hand seized upon it; and by help of the Venetians kept it during life.  
17. James III. born after the decease of his Father, whom he survived not very long. After whose death, being the last of this Family, the Venetians possessed themselves of Cyprus: which they invaded with no better title than the Romans had done in former times; and not likely to be blest with a long fruition of that which they had so unjustly got into their hands. But of that already.    
And here it is to be observed that these Cyprian Kings retaining the title of Jerusalem (towards which they sometimes cast an eye) bestowed upon their greatest Subjects, and deserving Servitors, both titles of Honour and Offices of State, belonging anciently to that Kingdom. So that we find amongst them a Prince of Antioch, a Prince of Galilee, a Count of Tripoli, a Lord of Caesarea, and a Lord of Mount Tabor; a Seneschal of Jerusalem, a Constable, Martial, and High Chamberlain of that Kingdom also. With better reason, though no doubt with as little profit, as the Pope gives Bishoprics, and Archbishoprics in Greece or Egypt. But those titular Offices are now quite extent, though possibly some of the titles of honour which were took from thence, may be still remaining.  
But to return unto the Turks, having thus taken Famagusta, and Nicosia, on which the whole Island did depend, all other Cities of it, and the whole by consequence, were forced to submit to the Turkish Tyranny. The Noble men, and Citizens of principal quality, either most cruelly massacred in the sack of those Towns, or banished for ever their native Country, as men whose living there might possibly endanger their new conquest. But the Country people, Artificers, and persons of inferior rank, permitted to enjoy both their lives and livelyhoods; together with their several and respective religions, in the same manner as before: paying such ordinary taxes as were laid upon them. And so this goodly Island came into the hands of the Turks, who have hitherto enjoied the possession of it: For notwithstanding that the 〈◊〉 in the year next following, with the help of the Pope and King of Spain, gave the Turks that great and memorable overthrow, at the famous battle of Lepanto: yet did they nothing in pursuit of so great a victory for the recovery of this Island; and indeed they could not: the confederates returning home, and dissolving their Fleet, as soon as they had secured their own estates by the overthrow of the Tnrkish Navy. And though the Venetians, to put the best face they could on so great a loss, so highly pleased themselves with the following Victory, that they put the same in balance with the loss Cyprus: yet an ingenious Turk to let them see the folly of so vain a boasting, compared the losing of Cyprus, to the loss of an Arm, which could not without a miracle be recovered; and the loss at Lepanto to the shaving off of one's beard, which grows the thicker for the cutting, as indeed it proved: For the next year the Turks armed out another Navy, no less formidable than the other had been before, braving therewith the whole Christian Forces, not as then disbanded.  
What the Revenues of it were to the Kings hereof, I cannot certainly determine. The profits of Salt only, and that of the Customhouse yielded yearly to the Signcury of Venice, when it was in their hands, a million of Crowns. For the Customs and profits of the Salt were farmed for 500000 Crowns 〈◊〉, which being turned into the Chief Cyprian Commodities, were counted double worth that money, when unladed at Venice. To which if we should add the lands of the former Kings, and other ways of raising money on the Subject, I cannot see, but the Intrado of the Crown must needs amount constantly to a million and an half yearly, if it were not more.  
The Arms hereof were quarterly, first Argent, a Cross Potent between four Crosses Or; secondly Barrewise of eight pieces, Arg. and Azure, supporting a Lion Passant Azure, Crowned, Or; thirdly, a Lion Gules; and fourthly, Argent, a Lion Gules; as Bara a French Herald hath given the Blazon.  
On the East of Cyprus towards Syrialy four small Lands, which Ptolemy calleth by the name of Clides, not far from the Promontory of that name; both Promontory and Island now called Saint Andrews: and towards the West another little knot of Islets, which he calls Carpasiae; but nothing memorable in either. So I pass them over.  
There are in Cyprus Arch-Bishops 2. Bishops 6.  
And so much for CYPRUS.   

OF SYRIA.  
SYRIA is bonnded on the East, with the River Euphrates, by which parted from Mesopotamia; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea; on the North, with Cilicia and Armenia Minor, from the last parted by Mount Taurus; and on the South, with Palestine, and some parts of Arabia. The length hereof from Mount Taurus to the edge of Arabia, is said to be five hundred twenty and five miles; the breadth from the Meaiterranean to the River Euphrates computed at four hundred and seventy; drawing somewhat near unto a square.  
In the Scriptures it is called Aram, and the People Aramites, because first peopled and possessed by Aram the son of Sem, though Hamath, Arphad, and Sidon, the sons of Canaan, did also put in for a share: and yet not called thus by the Sctiptures only, but by some of the Heathen writers also. For Strabo doth not only acknowledge, that the Syrians in his time were called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, but citeth Possidoniu a more ancient Writer, for proof that the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which Homer speaketh of must be those Syrians: further averring, that the Syrians called themselves by the name of Aramaei, or plainly Aramites. But by the Greeks they are called Syrians, or Surians, from the City Tyre, called anciently by the name of Sur, o● Tsur, (of which more hereafter) either because the Tyrians or Tsurians, had in those times the command of the Seacoasts of this Country; or else that Tyro or Tsur being the chief Mart-Town of all those parts, was the place where they ttaded with these Aramites. Conform to which ancient Appellations, the City of Tyre is again called Sur, and this Country Soria.  
But here we are to understand, that though the Syria of the Romans, as it was a member of that Empire, was limited within the bounds before laid down; yet anciently as well the Aram of the Hebrews, as the Syria of the Greeks and Romans, was of greater Latitude: of which because it may be useful to the understanding of holy Scriptures, and of some Classic Authors also, I shall enlarge a little further. For Aram, taken in the largest exception of it, extendeth from the Coast of Cilicia, North, to Idumaea towards the South; from the River Tigris in the East, to the Mediterranean Sea, upon the West, containing besides the Syria of the Greeks and Romans (in which Palestine also was included) Arabia the Desert, and Petraea, Chaldaea, Babylonia, and all those Provinces to which the name Aram is either prefixed or subjoined in the Book of God, as Aram-Naharaijm, Aram-Sobab, Padan-Aram, Aram-Maahah, Sede-Aram, Aram-Beth-Rehob; all mentioned in the holy Scriptures. Some do extend it further yet, and do not only bring Armenia within the Latitude of this name, which they derive from Aram-minni, whose neighbourhood to Syria may give some colour to the error; but even those People of Cappadocia bordering on the Euxine Sea, the Inhabitants of which were anciently called Luco Sylli, or white Syrians. But this not having any good warrant or authority wherewithal to back it, shall not come under the compass of this consideration. But for the rest, I find it generally agreed upon amongst the learned, that Aram-Naharaum, is the same with the whole Country of Mesopotamia, so named both by the Jews and Grecians, because it is environed with the two famous Rivers of Tigris and Euphrates; which Priscian by a 〈◊〉 Latin name, would have to be called Medanna (but Inter-Amna by his leave would express it better) and as for Pad●n-Aram wherein Laban dwelled, which is called Sed●-Aram by the Prophet Hosea, chap. 12. v. 13. that is a part only of the other: the whole Country of Aram-Naharai●m or Mesopotamia being divided into two parts; whereof the more fruitful lying Northward, is called Padan-Aram, or Sede-Aram, to whose Inhabitants Xenophon gives the name of Syrians; the barren and more defart lying towards the South, which by the same Author is called Arabia. For Aram-Maachah, mentioned 1 Corin. 19 6. it is conceived to be that part of Syria, which was after named Comagena, whereof Samosata was the M●ropolis or Mother City. And as for Aram-Sobab, of which and of Adadezer the King thereof, there is so frequent mention in the Books of the Kings and Chronicles, it was the Province lying on the North-East of Damascus, and so extending to the banks of the River Euphrates, and is the ●ame with that which afferwards was called 〈◊〉 from the City Palmyra. South-west of which amongst the petty Kingdoms on the North of Gessur in the Land of Palestine, lay the Kingdom of Aram-B●●●-Rehob, confederate with Ammon in the war which they had with David, 2. Sam. 10. 6. Nor did the Greeks less extend the name of Syria, than the Hebrews did the name of Aram, if they stretched it ●ot further. Certain I am, that Strabo comprehendeth the Assyrians in the name of Syria, where he affirmeth, that the Medes overruled all Asia, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the Empire of the Syrians (he meaneth the Assyrians) being overthrown. And in Herodotus it is said, that those whom the Barbarians call Asirians, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, were called Syrians by the Greeks. And to that purpose Justin also, Imperium Assyrij, qui postea Sylli dicti sunt, Annos 1300 tenuere. But these all writ after the time that Seleucus and his race had the possession of the Eastern Empire: who living for the most part in Syria, from whence they might more easily furnish themselves with Soldiers out of Gree●●, (as they did most commonly for all their military expeditions) caused all the other parts of their large dominions to be called in tract of time by the name of Syria. But on the other side, as the Syria of the Romans extended not to the East and South, as the Aram of the Hebrews did: so it contained some other Regions, that is to say, those of Phoenicia and Palestine, which were not comprehended in the name of Aram; as being planted by a people of another race, and of different fortunes, till brought together under the command of the Babylonians. In which regard we will treat severally of the natures of the soil and people; their originals, government, and successes, till we have brought them into one hand: and then continue their affairs as one joint estate. But first we will survey the ancient and present fortunes of Christianity, and other Religions herein embraced or tolerated, wherein the whole, according to the bounds and limits before laid down, is alike concerned.  
And for Religions in this Country, here is choice enough; those namely of the Mahometan, Christian, Pagan; and one compounded out of all, which is that of the Drusians. The Mahometan embraced by the generality of the people throughout the whole, and by all that be in any office or authority, is only countenanced and approved of, though the rest be tolerated. The Pagan entertained only in the mountainous Country's bordering on Armenia; inhabited by a people whom they call Curdi, or the Curdenes, supposed to be descended from the ancient Parthians, as being very expert in Bows and Arrows, their most usual Arms. A race of people who are said to worship alike both God and the Devil; the one that they may receive benefits from him, the other that he may not hurt them. Se alios deos colere ut prosint, alios●ne noceant, as Lactantius doth affirm of the ancient Grecians. But their principal devotions are addressed to the Devil only, and that upon good reasons, as themselves conceive. For God they say is a good man, and will do no body no harm, but the Devil is a mischievous fellow, and must be pleased with sacrifices that he do not hurt them. And for the Drusians, they are conceived to be the remainder of those Frankes (by which name the Turks call all Western Christians) who driven unto the mountains, (when they lost the sovereignty and possession of the Holy Land) and defending themselves by the advantage of the place, could never be wholly rooted out by the Turks: contented at the length to afford them both peace and liberty of their religion. But they have so forgot the Principles of that Religion, that they retain nothing of it but baptism; and not that generally neither: accounting it lawful most unlawfully to many their own Daughters, Sisters, or Mothers: and yet conform unto the Turks in their habit only, wearing the white Turban, as the Turks do; but abhorring Circumcision, and indulging to themselves the liberty of wine, by law forbidden to the Turks. A people otherwise very warlike, stout and resolute: with great, both constancy and courage, resisting hitherto the Attempts of the Turkish Sultan's. The Country they possess environed with the confines of Joppa about Caesarea Palestinae, betwixt the Rivers of Jordan and Orontes, extending Eastwards as far as the plains of Damascus: so that there is no part of Syria, except Comagena, unto which their habitations reach not.  
But for the Christian Faith it was first preached here by some of the dispersed Brethren, (which fled from the rage of persecution) in Phonice, and the City of Antiochia, amongst whom Saint Peter, as he passed through all quarters, Acts 931. is by the Fathers said to have been the Chief. The Church more fully planted in it by Barnabas first, after by Paul and Barnabas jointly. Who spending there a whole year together, enlarged the borders of the Church, and gained much people, as is said Acts 11. v. 19 etc. insomuch that here the Disciples were first called Christians, v. 26. Not called so accidentally as a thing of chance, but on a serious consultation had amongst themselves, and a devout invocation on the name of God to direct them in it. The word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 used in the Original importeth somewhat of Oracular and Divine direction. And certainly it standeth with reason that it should be so. For if upon the giving of a name to John the Baptist, there was not only a consultation had of the Friends and Mother, but the dumb Father called to advise about it; and if we use not to admit the poorest child of the parish into the congregation of Christ's Church by the door of Baptism, but by the joint invocation of the name of God for his blessings on it: with how much more regard of Ceremony and Solemnity must we conceive that the whole body of Christ● people were baptised into the name of Christians? And there is some proof for it too, besides probability and conjectures. For Suidas, and before him Johannes Antiochenus an old Cosmographer, do expressly say, that in the days of Claudius Caesar, ten years after the Ascension of our Lord and Saviour, Euodius received Episcopal consecration, and was made Patriarch of Antioch the Great in Syria, succeeding immediately to St. Peter: then addeth, that at that time the Disciples were first called Christians, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. i. e. Euodius their Bishop calling them to a Solemn Assembly, and imposing this new name upon them, whereas before they were called Nazarites and Galilaeans. A people so hated by the Heathen, that they ceased not to slander them from the first beginning. For as concerning this Sect; we know that it is every where spoken against, said the Jews of Rome to the Apostle, Acts 28. 22. Tacitus, a Roman, but a Gentile, goes yet further with them, call them homines per flagitia invisos, & noviss●m meritos exempla; the calumny in his time being strong and general, that at their private meetings they devoured Infants, and had carnal company with their Mothers and Sisters. Which defamations notwithstanding they grew in few years to so great numbers that they were a terror to their Enemies, though grievously afflicted, tortured, and put to several kinds of death, under the ten Famous Persecutions, raised against them, by Nero, Anno 67. 2. Domitian, Anno 96. 3. Trajanus, Anno 110. 4. Marcus Antonius, Anno 167. 5. Severus, Anno 195. 6. Maximinus, Anno 237. 7. Decius, Anno; 250. 8. Val●rianus, Anno 259. 9 Aurelianus, Anno 278. 10. by Diocletianus, Anno 293. All, but this last especially so extremely raging, that (as Saint Hierome writech in one of his Epistles) there were martyred 5000 for each day in the year, except the first of January, on which they used not to shed blood. But jangu●s Martyrum semen Ecclesiae. This little grain of Mustardseed, sowed by Gods own hand, and watered by the blood of so many holy men, grew so great a tree, that the branches of it spread themselves over all the world: and go: such footing, even in the Roman Army itself, (mea commonly not of the strictest kind of Religion,) that when Julisn the Apostata had vomited out his foul, with Viciste tandem galilea, they elected Joviniar, though a Christian, for his Successor, with this acclamation, Christianionines sumus, We are also Christians. But see how the baptising of God's people by the name of Christians, in the City of Antioch, hath drawn me cut of my way. I return again, both to the place and to the Authoe. In whose evidence, besides what doth concern the imposition of the name of Christian upon the body of the faithful, we have a testimony for Saint Peter's being Bishop of An lock, the first Bishop thereof (of the Church of the Jews therein as lest) as is said positively by Eusebius in his (Chronologie, Saint Hierome in his Catalogue of Ecclesiastical writers, Saint Chrysostonze in his Homily de Translatione Ignatii, Theodoret, Dialog. 1. Saint Gregory Epistol. lib. 6. cap. 37. and before any of them by Origen, in his sixth Homily on Saint Luke. With reference whereunto, and in respect that Antioch was accounted always the principal City of the East parts of the Roman Empire (the Perfect of the East for the most part residing in it) the Bishop hereof in the first Ages of Christianity had jurisdiction over all the Churches in the East, as far as the bounds of that Empire did extend that way. To which by Constantine the Great the Provinces of Cilicia and Isauria, with those of Mesopotamus and Osroent were after added: Containing fifteen Roman Provinces, or the whole Diocese of the Orient. And though by the substracting of the Churches of Palestine, and the decay of Christianity in these parts by the conquests of the Turks and Saracens, the jurisdiction of this Patriarch hath been very much lessened: yet William of Tyre, who flourished in the year 1130. reciteth the names of 13 Archiepiscopal, 21 Metropolitical, and 127. Episcopal, Sees, yielding obedience in his time to the See of Antoch. Since which that number is much diminished, Mahometanism more and more increasing, and Christianity divided into Sects and factions: insomuch as of three forts of Christians living in these Country's, viz. the Maronites, Jacobites, and Melchites, only the Melchites are subordinate to the Church of Antioch, the others having Patriarels of their own Religion.  
And first for the Melchites, who are indeed the true and proper Members of the Church of Antioch, and the greatest body of Christians in all the East, they are so named in way of scorn by the Jacobite and Maronite Schismatic, separating without just cause from their communion. The name derived from Malchi, signifying in the Syriack language a King or Emperor: because adhering to their Primate, they followed the Canons and decisions of preceding Councils, ratisied by authority of the Emperor Leo, by whom subscription was required to the Acts thereof, and were in that respect, (as we use to say) of the King's Religion. Conform in points of doctrine to the Church of Greece, but that they celebrate divine service as solemnly on the Saturday as upon the Sunday: subject to their true and original Patriarch, who since the destruction of Antioch doth reside in Damaseus; and on no terms acknowledging the authority of the Popes of Rome.  
Next for the Maronites, they derive that name either from Marona; one of the principal Villages where they first inhabited; or from the Monastery of S. Maron, mentioned in the first Act of the Council of Consumople holden under Mennas, the Monks of which called Maronites, were the head of their Sect. Some points they hold, in which they differ from all Orthodox Christians; others in which they differ only from the Church of Rome. Of the first sort, 1. That the Holy Ghost proceedeth from the Father only, without relation to the Son. 2. That the Souls of men were created all together at the first beginning. 3. That male Children are not be Baptised together, but at several times by one and one. 4. That Herenques returning to the Church, are to be rebaptized. 5. That the Child is made unclean by the touch of his Mother till her purification, and therefore not Baptising Children till that time be past, which after the birth of a Male Child, must be forty days, of a Female, eighty. 6. That the Euchirist is to be given to Children presently after Baptism. 7. That the fourth Marriage is utterly unlawful. 8. That the Father may dissolve the marriage of his Son or Daughter, 9 That young men are not to be Ordeived Priests or Deacons except they be married. 10. That nothing Strangled, or of blood, may be eaten by Christians. 11. That Women in their monthly courses are not to be admitted to the Eucharist, of to comeinto the Church. 12. And finally (which was indeed their first discrimination from the Orthodox Christians) that there was but one will and action in Christ, the Fautors of which opinion had the name of Monothelies. Of the last kind, 1. That the Sacrament of the Lords Supper was to be administered in both kinds; 2. and in Leavened bread; 3. that bread to be broken to the Communicants (and not each man to have his waser to himself,) according to the first Institution. 4. Not reserving that Sacrament, 5. not carrying any part of the confecrated Elements to sick persons in danger of death. 6. That Aleriage is nothing inferior to the single life. 7. That no man entereth the Kingdom of Heaven till the General Judgement. 8. That the Saturday or old Sabbath is not to be fasted; 9 nor the Sacrament upon dates of fasting to be administered till the Evening. They withdrew themselves from the See of Antioch, and set up a Patriarch of their own, many ages since, (but the certain time thereof I find not) conferring on him for the greater credit of their Schism, the honourable title of the Patriarch of Antioch. His name perpetually to be Peter, as the undoubted Successor of that Apostle in the See thereof. Dispersed about the spurs and branches of Mount Libanus, where they have many Townships and seattered Villages, of which four are reported to retain in their common speech the true ancient Syriack; that is to say 1. Eden, a small village, but a Bishops See, by the Turks called Aechera, 2. Hatchteth 3. Sherrie, 4. Bolesa, or Blousa, little superior to the rest in bigness or beauty, but made the seat of their Patriarch, when he comes amongst them. At such time as the Western Christians were possessed of these parts, they submitted to the Church of Rome; but upon their expulsion by the Turks and Saracens, they returned again to the obedience of their own Patriarch, on whom they have ever since depended. His residence for the most part at Tripoli a chief Town of Syria; but when he came to visit his Churches, and take an account of his Suffragan Bishops (who are nine in number) then at Blousa, as is said before. Won to the Papacy again by John Baptist a Jesuit, in the time of Pope Gregory the thirteenth, who sent them a Catechism from Rome printed in the Arabian language (which is generally spoken by them) for their instruction in the Rudiments of that Religion: yet so, that their Patriarch still retains his former power, and the Priests still officiate by the old liturgies of those Churches in the Syriack tongue. So that this reconciliation upon the matter is but a matter of compliment on the one side, and ostentation on the other: without any increase of power or patrimony to the Pope at all. And for the Jacobites, though dispersed in many places of this Country, yet since they are more entirely settled in Mesopotamia, where their Patriarch alto hath his abode or residence, we shall there speak of them.  
The language vulgarly here spoken is the Arabic tongue, continued here ever since the subjugation of these Countries by the Saracens. But anciently they spoke the Syrian and Phoenician languages. Of which the first, (for of the other we shall speak when we come to Phoenicia) was the very same with the Children, (as the learned Brerewood hath observed) either originally so, or else received by them when first conquered by the Babylonians. In which respect the Jews when they returned home from their long Capcivity, gave to the language which they brought with them the name of Syriack; being a compound of the Hebrew and Chaldaean tongues: Chaldean for a great part of it, as to the substance of the words; but Hebrew as to the notation of points, Conjugations, Affixes, and other properties of their former and original speech. And of this more hereafter also, when we come to Palestine. But whatsoever their language was in former times, it is now so overtopped by the Arabic, that it is spoken in some Villages of the Maronites only in all these Country's; the Arabic being generally used in all the rest, as was said before.  
Principal Rivers of these parts, are, 1. Chorsaeus, called Chison by the Hebrews, which hath its fountain in Palestine, but his fall in Phoenicia, not far from Mount Carmel. 2. Orontes, now called Saldino, and by some writer's Jordan the less, ariseth out of the hills called Pieria, not far from Mount Libanus, and after a while running under the ground, breaketh forth again about Apamia, and passing by the great City of Antioch, falleth into the Sea not far from it. It was first called Typhoon, and took this name from one Orontes who built the first bridge over it, as we find in Strabo. 3. Eleuthorie, which riseth out of some part of Libanus, and glideth with a speedy course through a strangely-intricate Channel, into the Mediterranean Sea: guilty of the death of the Emperor Frederick Barbarossa, who falling from his horse as he pursued the Infidels, and oppressed with the weight of his Armour, was here drowned, and lieth buried at Tyre. It is now called Casmer. 4. Sing as, by some said to be called Marsoas also, which arising in the mountainous parts of Comagena, and passing by the City of Aleppo, falleth into Euphrates. 5. Euphrates, the most famoust River of the East; of which more hereafter.  
Chief Mountains of it, 1. Carmel, which being properly of Phoenicia, we shall there speak of it. 2. Pieria, out of which the River Orontes hath its first Original. 3. Casius, not far from Antioch, said to be four miles high perpendicularly. 4. Libanus, famous for its multitude of Cedars growing there upon; affording materials unto Solomon for the holy Temple. Besides which it afforded such store of Frankincense, that some derived the name from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying Frankincense in the Greek: and so replenished with Honey falling from the Heavens, and hanging on the Boughs of the Trees, that the Husbandmen used to sing (as Galen telleth us) that God reigned honey; and yearly filled their pots and vessels with the sweets thereof. This the most famous and greatest Hill of all these parts, extending in length 150 miles, that is to say, from Sidona a City of Phoenicia, to Smyrna, one of the Cities of Coele-Syria: and taking seven hundred miles in compass. Inhabited wholly in a manner by the Maronite Christians, who to keep that dwelling to themselves, without the intermixture of Mahometans, do yearly pay to the Great Turk seventeen Sultanies a man, for every one above twelve years of Age, each Sultante being reckoned at seven shillings and six pence of our money. And yet those Maronites though entire, without intermixture, are held to be the smallest Sect, for numbers, in all the East, not estimated to exceed twelve thousand households, by reason of the indisposition of this Mountain, in most places unfit for habitation. For besides the cragginess and steepiness of it, which makes many parts hereof to be inaccessible the higher Ridges of it are in a manner perpetually covered with Snow, not melted in so hot a Climate at the nearest approaches of the Sun. And thence no doubt it took this name: the word Leban, in the Hebrew and Phoenician Language signisfying White, or whiteness: even as from the like whiteness of Snow, the highest part of the Pymaan hills had the name of Canus; and that perpetnall Ridge of Mountains which part Italy from France and Germany, had the name of Alps. 5. Anti-Libanus, opposite to the former, and from that so called, a rich, but little Valley only being interposed, out of which Valley the Orontes hath its spring or Fountain; the hill Pieria there beginning to advance itself. Some make but one Mountain of them both, divided into two great Ledges or Chains of Hills. Of which the main body lying towards the North, hath the name of Libanus; that on the South being but a branch or excursion of it, called Anti-Libanus. And to this the Scripture gives some hint, in which both pass for one by the name of Lebanon.  
The whole Country was anciently divided into these six parts, viz. 1. Phoenicia. 2. Palestine. 3. Syria specially so called. 4. Comagena. 5. Palmyrene, and 6. Coele-Syria, or Syria Cava. But Palestine, coming under a more distinct consideration, we shall now speak only of the rest.  

1. PHOENICIA.  
PHOENICIA is bounded on the East and South, with Palestine; on the North, with Syria properly and specially so called; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea. So called by the Grecians, from the abundance of Palm-trees therein growing, the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in that language signifying a Palm. And for a further proof hereof (for I know there are other Etymons and Originations pretended for it) the Palm was anciently the special Cognizance or Ensign of this Country, as the Olive-branch and Conie of Spain, the Elephant of afric, the Camel of Arabia, and the Crocodile to Egypt, being peculiar to those Countries. And in an old Coin of the Emperor Vespasian's stamped for a memorial of his conquest of Judaea, the Impress is a woman sitting in a sad and melancholic posture at the back of Palm-trees, with these two words, Judaea Capta, inscribed thereon: in which no question may be made but that the desolate woman signifieth the Land of Judaea, and the Palm Phoenicia; Phoenicia being seated immediately on the North at the back of Jewrie.  
But it was thus first called by the Greciaans' only, the Latins and other People after them taking up that name. For by themselves, and the People of Israel their next Neighbours, they are called Canaanites, or the posterity of Canaan, five of whose sons, viz. Zidon, Harki, Arvadi, Senari, and Chamathi, were planted here: the other six inhabiting more towards the South and East, in the Land of Palestine. For further evidence whereof we may add these reasons: first, that the same woman which in Saint Matthews Gospel, chap. 15. v. 22. is named a Canaanite, is by Saint Mark, chap. 7. v. 26. called a Syro-Phoenician. Secondly, Where mention is made in the Book of Josuah of the Kings of Canaan, the Septagint (who very well understood the History and Language of their own Country) call them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or the Kings of Phoenicia. Thirdly, the Poeni, or Carthaginians, being beyond all dispute a Tyrian or Phoenician Colony, when they were asked any thing of their Original, would answer that they were Channaei, meaning (as Saint Augustine that Countryman doth expound their words) that they were Originally Chanaanites, of the stock of Canaan. And lastly, from the Language of it, which anciently was the old Hebrew, Canaanitish, or the Language of Canaan; spoken both here and in Palestine also, before that Country was possessed by the house of Jacob: as appeareth plainly by those names by which the places and Cities of Canaan were called, when and before the Israelites came first to dwell amongst them, which are merely Hebrew. And so much, as unto the Language is acknowledged by Bochartus also, who in the entrance of his Book inscribed Chanaan, declares what profit may ensue from that undertaking to the Hebrew tongue, cujus Phoenicia lingua dialectus fuit, of which the Phoenician language was a dialect only.  
The Counrrey of itself not great, extended in a good length, from the further side of mount Carmel where it joins with Palestine, to the River Volanus on the North, by which parted from Syria: but withal so narrow, that it is little more than a bare Sea-coast, and therefore very rightly called terrarum angustissims by a modern Writer. Rich rather by the benefit and increase of Trade (to which no Nation under Heaven hath been more addicted) than by the natural Commodities which the Land afforded: yet for the quantity there of no place could be more plentifully furnished with Oil, Wheat, and the best fort of Balm, and most excellent Honey; the lower part hereof being designed for the Seat of Asher, of whom Moses prophesied, Dent. 33. v. 24. that he should dip his foot in Oil. So that the Country generally, it was well conditioned, lovely to look upon, populous, and adorned with more beautiful Cities, than such a span of Earth could be thought to hold. Of which thus writeth Ammianus, Acclivis monti Libano Phoenicia Regio, plena gratiarum & venustatis, urbibus decorata magnis & pulchris, etc. i. e. Falling from Mount Libanus lieth the Country of Phoenicia, full of all graces and elegancies, adorned with great and beautiful Cities, of which the most renowned for the fertility of their soil, and the same of their achievements, are Tyre, Sidon, Eerytus, etc.  
The People anciently by reason of their Maritime situation, were great Adventurers at Sea, trading in almost all the Ports of the then known World, and sending more Colonies abroad upon foreign Plantations than any Nations in the Earth. An active and ingenuous People, said to have been the first Navigators, the first builders of Ships, the first inventors of Letters, (of which hereafter more on some other occasion) and the first authors of Arithmetic; the first that brought Astronomy to an Art or Method; and the first makers of Glass. Defamed in holy Scripture for their gross Idolatries, by which they laid a stumbling-block at the feet of the Israelites: Astoroth (or Asturte) the Goddess of the Sidonians (but whether Juno, Venus, or some other, I dispute not here) being so highly prized amongst them, that Solomon himself when he fell from God, made this one of his Idols. Once yearly, as Eusebius telleth us, they sacrificed some of their sons to Saturn, whom in their language they called Moloch. And in the inmost retreats of Libanus had a Temple to Venus, defiled with the practice of most filthy lusts, intemperately using the natural Sex, and most unnaturally abusing their own. Nor could the purity and piety of the Christian Faith prevail so far as to extinguish these ungodly rites, till Constantine finally destroyed both the Temples and Idols, and left not any thing remaining of them but the shame and infamy. St. Austin addeth, that they did prostitute their Daughters unto Venus, before they married them: and it is most likely to be true. For the Phoenicians and Cypriots being so near neighbours, and subject for a time to the same Princes also, could not but impart their impure Rites and Ceremonies unto one another.  
Rivers of note there can be none in so narrow a Region, but what are common unto others, and shall there be spoken of Most proper unto this is the River of Adonis (now called Canis,) so named most probably from Adonis the Darling of Venus, whose rites are here performed with as much solemnity as they be in Cyprus. His Obsequys celebrated yearly in the month of June with great howl and Lamentations, Lucian fabling that the River usually streameth blood upon that Solemnity; (as if Adonis were newly wounded in the Mountains of Libanus,) to give the better colour to their Superstitions. But the truth is, that this redness of the water ariseth only from the winds, which at that time of the year blowing very vehemently, do thereby carry down the stream a great quantity of Minium or red Earth from the sides of those hills, wherewith the waters are discoloured. Such use can Satan make of a natural Accident to blind the eyes and captivate the understandings of besotted people.  
Chief Mountains of this Country are, 1. Libanus, spoken of before, which hath here its first advance or rising. 2. Carmel, which Ptolemy placeth in this Country, of which it is the utmost part upon the South, where it joineth with Palestine. Washed on the North-side with the Brook Chison; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea: steep of ascent, and of indifferent altitude, abounding with several sorts of fruits, Olives and Vines in good plenty, and stored with herbs both medicinable and sweet of small. The retreat sometimes of Elias, when he fled from Jesabel, whose habitation here, after his decease, was converted to a Jewish Synagogue. To this place (being then in the possession of the Kings of Israel) did that Prophet assemble the Priests of Baal, and having by a miraculous experiment confuted their Idol●trons follies, caused them to be cut in pieces on the banks of the River Chison near adjoining to it. Upon this visible declaring of the power and presence of the Almighty, the Gentiles grew persuaded that Oracles were there given by God; by Suetonius called the God Carmelus. Where speaking of Vespafian, who had then newly took upon him the Imperial dignity, he addeth, Apud judaeam Carmeli Dei oracula consulentem● ta confirmavere sorts, etc. that consulting in Judaea with the Oracle of the God Carmelus, he was assured that whatsoever he undertook should succeed well with him. In aftertimes the Order of the Friars Carmelites, as successouts unto the Children of the Prophets left here by Eliah, had their name from hence: the Ruins of whose Monastery are still to be seen, with a Temple dedicated to the blessed Virgin; and under that a Cave or Chapel, said to have been the lurking place of that holy Prophet in the time of his troubles.  
Places of most importunance in it, 1. Ptolemais, now nothing but a ruin of what it hath been, but formerly of great strength and consequence. Named Ace at the first, a refuge for the Persian Kings in their wars against Egypt: enlarged, or rather new built, by Ptolemy, the first of that race, by whom called Ptolemais, which name still continued, though Claudius Caesar planting there a Roman Colony, would fain have had it called Colonia Claud●: after the conquest of it by the Saracens, in the time of Omer the great Caliph, it returned towards its first name, and was called Acon, or Acre, both names still remaining in vulgar speech, as that of Ptolemais amongst Latin writers. Situate in the flourish of it on a flat or level, in form of a triangular-Shield; on two sides neighboured by the Sea which comes up close to it; on the third looking towards the Champaign: environed with a double wall, to each wall a Ditch; fortified on the outside with Towers and Bulwarks, within the walls so strongly housed as if the whole Town had been a Conjunction of fortresses, and not ordained for private dwellings. In the midst of the City was one Tower of great strength and beauty, which had sometimes been the Temple of Bel-zebub, and was therefore called the Castle of Flies: on the top whereof was maintained a perpetual light, like the Pharos of Egypt, to give comfort and direction in the night to such Mariners as made towards this Port. Took from the Christians by the Saracens in the time of Omer, and from them wrested by the Turks with the rest of Syria, it became Christian again Anno 1004. in the Reign of Baldwin the first, brother of the famous Godfrey of Bovillon, and second King of Jerusalem, by the help of the Genoese, who for their pains had the third part of the City assigned unto them. Recovered by Salidine to the Turks, and from him taken again by the Western Christian; under the conduct of Philip of France, and Richard the first of England, Anno 1191. it continued in the possession of the Kings of Jerusalem, notably defended by the Hospitalers (now Knights of Malta) till the year 1291. When besieged by an Army of a hundred and fifty thousand Turks, it was forced to yield, though lost by inches: and the Turks fearing left the Christians would again attempt it, razed it to the ground; demolishing the large walls and arches of it, which lie like massy Rocks on their old foundations. Memorable in those times, for the brave service here done by the Christians of the Western parts; of which none more renowned than those of our Richard the first, and Edward the first. This later here treacherously wounded by an Infidel, with a poisoned knife, the venom whereof could by no means be assuaged, till his most virtuous wife (herein proposing a most rare example of conjugal affection) sucked it out with her mouth. And for the former, he became so terrible and redoubted among the Turks, that when their Children began to cry, they would say, Peace King Richard is coming: and when their horses started, they would spur them saying, What you Jades, do you think that King Richard is here. By the Mamalucks, when Lords of Syria, it was patched together, and made fit for habitation rather than defence: not Peopled by above 300 Inhabitants, nor would it have so many but for the Haven adjoining; which though a small Bay, and of very ill anchorage, is much frequented by the Merchants of our Western World, trading here for their Cotton Wools, with which the neighbouring Country is abundantly furnished. I have stayed the longer in this place by reason of the great fame and importance of it, as being the last hold which the Christians had of all their conquests; with the loss whereof they laid aside all thoughts of those holy wars.  
2. Tyre, seated in a rocky Island, about seventy paces from the main Land; well built, and circular of form, as well by Art as Nature impregnably fortified. A Colony of the Sidonians, and therefore by the Prophet Esay, Chapter 23. verse 12. called the Daughter of Sidon: but by them built upon an high hill; the ruins whereof by the name of Palatyrus, or old Tyre, are remaining still. Removed unto the Island by Agenor King of the Phaniclans, and by him named Sor, or Tzor, from the rocky situation of it, (as that word importeth.) Mollified by the Greeks to Tyrus, and from them taken by the Luines, though known to them also by the name of Sarra, (the Tyrian purple being by 〈◊〉 and some other of the ancient Poets, called Sarrarum Ostrum,) and now at last returned to its first and original name, vulgarly at this day called Snr. A City in the elder times of great trade and wealth: the Prophet Esay chap. 27. v. 8. calling the Merchants hereof Princes, and her Chapmen the Nobles of the World. Excelling all others of those times both for Learning and Manufactures, especially for the dying of Purple, first here invented, and that as Julius Pollux faith, by a very Accident: the D●g of Hercu●es (or if not his, some Dog or other) whose lips by eating of the fish called Couchilis or Purpura, had been made of that colour. Grown to great pride, by reason of the wealth and pleasures, her destruction was fore-signified by the holy Prophets: accomplished in Gods own time by Nebucadnezzar; who with great industry and toil joined it to the Continent. But his works being demolished by the fury of the Sea, and the labour of the Tyrians, it was after seventy years again re-edified; and having flourished after that for two hundred years, by Alexander the Great was again demolished; to whose indefatigable perseverance nothing was impossible. For having filled the Channel with the stones and rubbish of old Ty●●, and rammed them in with huge beams brought from Libanus, he made a passage for his Army: and having once approached the walls, so overtopped them with Towers, and frames of Timber, that at last he made himself Master of it, putting to the sword all such as resisted, and causing two thousand of them to be hanged in cold blood, all along the Shore, for a terror to others. This rendition of the Town was divined by the Soothsayers which followed the Camp of Alexander, upon a dream which he had not long before. For dreaming that he had disported himself with Satyrs; the Diviners only making of one word two, found that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 was no more than 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is, Tui Tyrus; and it happened accordingly. Recovering once again both her riches and beauties, she became a confederate of the Romans in the growth of their fortunes, endued by them with the privileges of their City, for her great fidelity. Made in the best times of Christianity, the Metropolitan See for the Province of Phoenicia, the Bishop hereof having under him fourteen Suffragan Bishops. Subjected to the Saracens in the year six hundred thirty and six, and having groaned under that yoke for the space of fourhundred eighty and eight years, was at the last regained by Guar●mund Patriarch of Jerusalem, in the Reign of the second Baldwin, the Venetians contributing their assistance in it, Anno 1124. In vain attempted afterwards by victorious Saladine; but finally brought under the Turkish thraldom, Anno 1289. as it still continueth. Now nothing but an heap of ruins, but the very ruins of it of so fair a prospect, as striketh both pity and amazement into the beholders; showing them an exemplary pattern of our humane frailty. Subject at the present to the Emir, or Prince of Sidon, and beautified with a goodly and capacious Haven, one of the best of the Levant; but of no great trading. 3. Sarepta, by the Hebrews called Sarphath, situate on the Sea-Coast betwixt Tyre and Sidon. Memorable in holy writ for the miracle here performed by the Prophet Elijah, in raising the poor Widow's Son: in Heathen writers, for the purest Wines, little inferior unto those of Falernum in Italy, or Chios in Greece. Of which thus the Poet. 
Vina mihi non sunt Gazetica, Chia, Falerna,  
Quaque Sareptano palmite missa bib as.  In English thus, 
I have no Chian, or Falernian wines,  
Nor those of Gazas or Sarept as vines.  4. Sido●, the ancientest City of all Phoenicia, and the most Northern of all those which were assigned for the portion of the sons of Aser: beyond which the Country of Phoenicia, having been hitherto nothing but a bare Sea-coast, beginneth to open towards the East in a fine rich valley, having Libanus upon the North, and the Anti-Libanus on the South: once closed up from the rest of Syria with a very strong wall, long since demolished. It was so called from Zidon, one of the sons of Canaan, who first planted here; not (as some say) from Sida the daughter of Belus, once a King hereof: this City being mentioned in the Book of Josuah, when no such Belus was in being. Situate in a fertile and delightful soil, defended with the Sea on one side, and on the other by the Mountains lying betwixt it & Libanus; from whence descended those many Springs, with which they watered and enriched their most pleasant Orchards. The Inhabitants hereof are said to be the first makers of Crystal Glass; the materials of the work brought hither from the Sands of a River running not far from Ptolomais, and only made fusible in this City. And from hence Solomon and Zorobabel had their principal workmen both for Stone and Timber, in their several buildings of the Temple. The People hereof so flourishing in Arts and Trades, that the Prophet Zechariah chap. 9 v. 2. calleth them the wise Sidonians. A City which at several times was both the Mother and Daughter of Tyre: the Mother of it in the times of Heathenism, Tyre being a Colony of this People; and the Daughter of it when instructed in the Christian faith, acknowledging the Church of Tyre for its Mother-Church. The City in those times very strong both by Art and Nature, having on the North-side a Fort or Citadel, mounted on an inaccessible Rock, and environed on all sides by the Sea: which when it was brought under the command of the Western Christians, was held by the Order of the Dutch Knights; and another on the Southside of the Port, which the Templars guarded. Won by the Turks with the rest of this Country from the Christians, and ruined by those often interchanges of fortune: it only showeth now some marks of the ancient greatness; the present Sidon standing somewhat West of the old, and having little worth a particular description.  
The Haven decayed, or serving at the best for Galleys; with a poor Block-house rather for show than service: the walls of no greater strength, and as little beauty; and the buildings ordinary, but that the Mosque, the Bannia of Baths, and the Cane for Merchants, are somewhat fairer than the rest: yet gives a title at this time to the Emir of Sidon, one of the greatest Princes of all this Country, of whom more hereafter. 5. Berytus, originally called Geris, from Gerge●hi the fifth Son of Canaan, took this new name from Berith a Phoaenician Idol herein worshipped; and now called Barutti. Destroyed by Tryphon in the wars of the Syrians against the Jews, it was re-edified by the Romans, by whom made a Colony, and honoured with the name of Julia Felix, Augustus giving it the Privileges of the City of Rome. By Herod and Agrippa Kings of the Jews, much adorned and beautified; and of no mean esteem in the time of the Christians: when made an Episcopal See under the Metropolitan of Tyre. Being a place of no great strength, nor aimed at by every new Invader, it hath sped better than the rest of these Cities (though stronger than this) retaining still her being, though not all her beauties; well stored with merchandise, and well frequented by the Merchant. Nigh to this Town is a fair and fruitful Valley, which they call Saint George's; in which there is a Castle, and in that an Oratory of the same name also. All sacred to Saint George the Martyr, who hereabouts is fabled to have killed the Dragon, and thereby delivered a King's daughter, but what Kings I know not, nor they neither. 6. Biblis, sometimes the habitation of Hevi the fourth Son of Canaan, and then called Hevaea: afterwards made the Regal Seat of Cinyras, Father and Grand father of Adonis, by his Daughter Myrrah; whereof we have already spoken when we were in Cyprus. Of such esteem in the Primitive times of Christianity, that it was made a Bishops See; desolate and of no repute since it lost that honour, and became thrall unto the Turks. 7. Orthosia, called also Antaradus, because opposite to Aradus, another old City of this tract, but in after ages called Tortosa, and by that name well known in the Histories of the Holy War, undertaken by the Western Christians. To whom it made such stout and notable resistance, that though besieged on all sides with united forces (the whole Army formerly divided, sitting down before it); yet after three mon●ths hard siege, they were fain to leave the Town behind them, and content themselves with spoiling the adjoining Country 8. Tripoli, seated in a tich and delightful plain, more fruitful than can be imagined: one of which fruits they called by the name of Amazza Franchi, i.e. Kill-Frank, because the Western Christians, whom they call by the name of French, died in great numbers by the intemperate eating of them. A Valley which is said to have yielded yearly to the Counts of Tripoli, no less than 200000 Crowns. As for the Town, it standeth about two miles from the Sea, at the foot of Mount Libanus; so called because built by the joint purses of three Cities, that is to say, Tyrus, Sidon, and Aradus. Of no great note among the Romans, for aught I can find, till made one of the Episcopal Sees, belonging to the Archbishop of Tyre, in the Primitive times. But thriving by degrees, it grew to principal Account by the time that the Western Christians warred in the Holy Land: when conquered by them, it was made one of the Tetrarchies, or Capital Cities for the four Quarters of their Empire; which were, Jerusalem for Palestins, Edessa for Comagena, or Mesopotamia; Autioch for Syria, and this for Phoenicia. Committed at the first taking of it, to the custody of Raymond Earl of Tholouse in France: whose posterity, whilst i● lasted, had from hence the title of Earls of Tripoli. A City, which I know not by what good hap, hath sped better than any of those parts, retaining still as much in strength and beauty as ever it had; if not grown greater by the ruin of all the rest. Situate two miles from the Sea, as before is said, but not above half a mile from the Haven, which lieth upon the West side of it, compassed with a wall, and fortified with seven Towers, of which the fourth is commonly called the Tower of Love, because built by an Italian Merchant, who was found in bed with a Turkish Woman, for which he had forfeited his life, if not thus redeemed it. Before the Haven is an ill-neighbouring bank of sand, which every day groweth greater and nearer to it; by which in time there is a Prophecy which faith it shall qui● be choked: On both sides of it many storehouses for the Merchant, to stow his goods in, and shops to sell them; the way from thence unto the City having on both sides very pleasant Gardens.  
The Town itself stretched out in length from South to North, is situate, as before was said, at the foot of Libanus, conveying a Brook into the Streets, and many pleasant springs into the chief of their gardens: in which, and in those towards the Haven, and on other sides of the Town, the Inhabitants keep great store of Silkworms; selling their Silks raw unto the Italians, and buying them again of them in the Stuff or Manufacture. The buildings generally low, and the Streets but narrow, except that leading towards Aleppo, which is fair and open. Over the Brook, at the East-side of the City are built two Bridges; and on the Southside a strong Castle mounted on an hill, built by the French when they had the custody hereof; now garrisoned for the Grand Signeur with 200 Janissaries. At this time it is looked on as the Metropolis or chief City of Phoenicia; honoured with the residence of the Patriarch of the Maronites, for the most part dwelling in this Town; and enriched with a great part of the Trade of Scanderone, or Alexandretta, removed hither some forty years ago by the Turks appointment; that Haven lying unfenced and more open to Pirates.  
That the Phoenicians were descended of the Sons of Canaan hath been proved already. And being descendants of that stock, they were at the first governed like them, by the Chiefs of their families, whom they honoured (as most Nations did) which the title of Kings: But most of the Canaanitish Kings being over come and slain by Josuah, Agenor, a stout and prudent man, one of those many Kings which commanded in those parts of the Country, seeing how impossible it was to resist that enemy; borrowed some and from Egypt, where he had his breeding, to make good the Seacoasts of his Country, in which the Philistims who interposed upon those coasts betwixt him and Egypt concurred also with him. By which assistance, and by the fortifying of Zidon, Tyre, and Ace (or Ptolomais) which were all the Cities of this Country that were then in being; he did not only preserve his own estate from the present danger, but lest it so assured to the Kings succeeding, that neither Solomen nor David, nor any of the Kings of Israel durst attempt upon them. To Agenor succeeded his Son Phoenix, (Cadmus his elder brother going into 〈◊〉 in search of his Sister Europa, ravished by Jupiter, where he built Thebes, and therein reigned 〈◊〉 his death) from whom, as some conceive, this Country had the name of Phoenicia. And though I have declared myself for another reason of this name, which I like much better; yet I shall rather yield to thus, or to any other, than to that of Bochartus: who will have it derived from Ben-Anak, or the Sons of 〈◊〉 (as if the old Phoenicians were such Giantly men) which much first be contracted in Beanac●, then by the Grecians turned into Pheanac, and at last into Phoenix. Such farre-fetched and extorted Originations never please my fancy, who had much rather hearken to the old received opinions touching the first Originals of names and nations, where there is not very pregnant reason to persuade me otherwise; than strain myself so far for a new invention; or harken unto those that do. But for what cause soever they were named Phoenicians, certain it is they were a very active and industrious people, trading in the most parts of the Mediterranean, and planting Colonies in many. Thebes and Sephyra in Boeotia, 〈◊〉 in Italy, Gades in Spain; Utica, Leptis, Carthage, in afric, were of their foundation. Nay if we may believe Bochartus, there was no Island, or Sea-coast in the Mediterranean, or on the Cantabrian, gallic, or British Ocean, wherein they did not keep some factory, or erect some Colony. What Kings succeeded Phoenix in a constant and continued course, I can no where find. Most like it is they were not under the command of any one Prince: and that besides the Kings of Sidon, where Agenor reigned, there were some others who called themselves Kings of Phoenicia also, as well as they. Of which sort were Cyniras', Paphus, and Pygmalion, who had their Regal Seat at Biblis, and lorded it over a good part of Cyprus; as did also Belus who gave some part of that Isle to Teucer, as is said before. There is also found mention of one Phasis, a Phoenician King, at such time as the Grecians conquered Troy. After him none till the subjugation of this Country by the Babylonians: Tetramnestus, Tennes, and Strato, mentioned in succeeding times, being Tributaries to the Persian, and no absolute Princes. Whether it were that the Phoenicians were made subject to the Kings of Tyre, or that the Kings thereof did nothing to preserve their memory; I am not able to determine. Certain it is that the Kings of Tyre came in short time to be of very great repute, and to possess themselves of the coasts of Syria, and Phoenicia, and a great part of Cyprus: whereby, and by the benefit of their trade and shipping, they grew rich, and powerful, and of great consideration in affairs of the World. The names and history of whom I shall here subjoin, in this ensuing Catalogue of 

The Kings of Tyre.  
A. M.  
1. Abibalus, as Josephus, Abemalus as Theophilus Antiochenus calleth him, Co-temporary with Samuel: supposed to be the same which the Son of Syrach mentioneth, Eccles. 46. verse 18.  
2. Saron, the Son of Abibalus, whom David, as Eusebius saith, compelled to pay tribute; complained of by that Prophet, Psal. 83. v. 7.  
2931. 3. Hiram, the Son of Saron, confederate with David, to whom he sent Cedars, with Carpenters and Masons, towards his buildings in Jerusalem, after he had beaten thence the Jebusites; as he did afterwards to Solomon when he built the Temple. Much mentioned in the Books of Kings and Chronicles. 53.  
2955. 4. Baleastartus, or Bazorus, succeeded Hiram. 7.  
2962. 5. Abdastartus, Son of Baleastartus, slain by the four Sons of his own nurse, having reigned 9 years; the eldest of which four, did for the space of 12 years usurp the Kingdom.  
2983. 6. Astartus, brother of Abdastartus, recovered the Kingdom to his house, out of the hands of the Usurpers. 12.  
2995. 7. Astorinus, or Athorinus as Theophilus calleth him, the younger Brother of A. startus. 9  
3004. 8. Phelles, the Brother of these three Kings, and youngest Son of Baleastartus, reigned eight months only.  
9 Ithobalus, called Ethbaal, 1 Kings 16. 31. Son of Astorinus, slew his Uncle Phelles, and so regained his Father's Throne; before which he was the Highpriest of the Goddess Astaroth or Astarta, (a dignity next to that of the King). He was the Father of Jezabel, the wife of Ahab, so often mentioned in the Scripture. 32.  
3037. 10. Badezar, or Bazar, Son of Ethbaal. 6.  
3043. 11. Mettimus, by some called Matginus, Son of Badezar, and Father of Elisa, whom Vagil celebrateth by the name of Dido.  
3052. 12. Pygmalion, the Son of Mettimus, who slew Sichaeus the husband of his Sister Elisa, to get his riches; but yet was cozened of his prey: his Sister Elisa, accompanied with her Brother Barca (the founder of the Noble Barcine Family, of which Annibal was) and her Sister Anna, flying into afric; where she built the renowned City of Carthage. 47. The names of his Successors we find not till we come to  
13. Elulaus, descended from a Son of Pygmalion, who overthrew the Fleet of Salmannassar the Assyrian, in the port of Tyre.  
14. E●hobales, or Ethbaal II. who vaunted himself to be as wise as Daniel, and to know all secrets, as saith the Prophet Ezekiel, chap. 28. v. 1, 2. And yet not wise enough to preserve his Kingdom from Nabuchadonosor; who after a● 13 years took the City of Tyre, and subjected it unto his Empire.  
15. Baal, the Son and Successor of Ethbaal the second, but a Tributary to the Babylonians.    
After whose death the Tyrians had no more Kings, but were governed by Judges, or by such titular Kings only as were sent from Babylon. And though Tyre and Sidon did recover breath in the fall of the Babylonian Empire, and the unsettledness of the Persian: yet being of the Persian faction, and having dependence on that Crown, they were by Alexander held unworthy to continue. Who therefore deposed Strato the King of Sidon, and overthrew the City of Tyre, in the taking whereof he had spent more time than in forcing all the Cities of Asia.  
After this time Phoenicia, being reckoned as a part of Syria, followed the fortune of the whole, subject unto the Syrian Kings of the house of Seleucus, till made a Province of the Romans; subject to the Constantinopolitans, till the fatal year 636. when subdued by the Saracens. Successively conquered by the Turks, Christians, and after their expulsion by the Turks again: then by the Mamalucks of Egypt, and finally with the rest of Syria, by Selimus the first united to the Turkish Empire. Subject at this time, or of late to the Emir of the Drusians, (commonly called the Emir of Sidon) of which people we have spoken before. A people who in the time of Amurath the third, were governed by 5 Emirs or Priuces; one of which was Man-Ogli, who so resolutely resisted Ibrahim Bassa, Anno 1585. This Man-Ogli then kept his Court or residence at Andirene, a strong place situate on a hill, and was of that wealth, that he sent to make his peace unto the abovenamed Ibrahim, 320 Harquebuses, 20 packs of Andirene Silks, and 50000 Ducats. At a second time he presented him with 50000 Ducats more, 480 Harquebuses, 1000 Goats, 150 Camels, 150 Buffs, 1000 Oxen, and 200 Wethers. By these rich gifts we may not a little conjecture of the Revenue of the present Emir of Sidon; who since the year 1600. hath reduced almost all the Country's belonging once to five Princes, under his own Empire; containing the Towns and Territories of Gaza, Barut, Sidon, Tyre, Acre, Saffet, (or Tiberias) his seat of refidence, Nazareth, Cana, Mount Tabor, Elkiffe, etc. This present Emir, by name Faccardine, was not long since driven out of his Country by the Turk, and forced to fly to Florence: but he again recovered his own, laid siege to Damascus, and caused a notable rebellion in Asia; not quenched in a long time after. And finally having possessed himself of the City and Castle of Damascus, prepared for the taking of Jerusalem also; threatening to make the Christians once more Masters of it. This was in the year 1623. How he sped afterward, and whether his Some, as stout and valiant as himself, hath since his death succeeded him in his Estates, I am not able to say: having of late heard nothing of them.   

2. SYRIA PROPRIA.  
SYRIA PROPRIA, or Syria specially so called, is bounded on the East, with Palmyrene; on the West, with the Mediterranean; on the North, with Cilicia; on the South, with Phoenicia and some part of Coele, Syria.  
This part of Syria I take to be the Land of Hamath, so often mentioned in the Scriptures; the Kingdom of Toi or Tou, next neighbour, and sworn Enemy to Adadezer King of Aram-Sobah: who hearing of the great discomfiture which David had given unto that King, sent his Son Joram or Adoram, (for the Scripture calls him by both names) with Presents unto him, as well to congratulate his success, as to be assured for times to come of his love and amity. So called from Hamath one of the Sons of Canaan, who fixed his dwelling in these parts, and left many Cities of that name in Syria and Palestine (which we shall meet withal in the course of this work) either built by him or his postetity. Now that the Land of Hamath was this part of Syria, I am persuaded to believe by these following reasons. viz. 1. From the neighbourhood hereof to Arpad or Arphad, conjoined together, as in Esay 10. 9 and Jer. 49. 23. So in other places, viz. Where are the Gods of Hamath and Arpad, 2 Kings 18. 34. The King of Hamath, and the King of Arphad, Esay 37. 13. And we know well that Arvad was the name of an Island over against the mouth of the River Eleutherus, one of the Rivers of this Country: so called from Arvad, one of the Sons of Canaan, alluded to by the Greeks and Romans in the name of Aradus, by which this Isle was known unto them. 2. By the vicinity which it hath to Palmyrene, the Aram-Sobah of the Scriptures, to which it joineth on the East, with the King whereof (as bordering Princes use to be) the Kings of Hamath for the most part were in open war. Of which fee 2 Sam. 8. 9, 10. & 1 Chr. 8. 9, 10. 3. From the authority of Saint Hierome, who finding mention in the Prophet Amos, cha. 6. v. 2. of a City named Hamath the Great, determineth it to be that City which afterwards was called Antiochia (the principal City of this part, and indeed of Syria): the title of Great being added to it, to difference it from some other Cities of this name of inferior note. And 4. from comparing the places in Scripture, with the like passage in Josephus the Historiographer. The Scripture telleth us; that Jerusalem being forced by the Babylonians, Zedekias the King was brought Prisoner to Nabuchadnezzer, being then at Riblath, 2 Kings c. 2. v. 6. to Riblath in the Land of Hamath, v. 21. where the poor Prince first saw his Children slain before his face; and then miserably deprived of fight, that he might not see his great misfortunes, was led away to Babylon. Ask of Josephus, where this sad tragedy was acted, and he will tell us that it was at Reblatha (or Riblah) a City of Syria, Antiqu. l. 10. c. 10. and if we ask Saint Hierome what he thinks of Reblatha, he will tell us that it was Urbs ea quam nun● Antiochiam. vocant, the City which in following times was called Antioch. On these grounds I conceive this part of Syria to be the land of Hamath intended in the Texts of scripture above-cited, though there were other Towns and Territories of the same name also.  
The Country is naturally fertile; the hedges on the highway sides affording very good fruits, and the adjoining fields affording to the Passenger the shade of Figtrees. Were it not naturally so, it would not be much helped by Art or Industry, as being very meanly peopled, and those few people without any encouragement either to plant fruits or manure the Land. Their Sheep are commonly fair and fat, but so overladed in the tail, both with flesh and fleece, that they hang in long wreathes unto the ground, dragged after them with no small difficulty. Pliny observes it in his time, that the tails of the Syrian Sheep were a Cubit long, and had good store of wool upon them. Natur. Hist. l. 8. c. 48. And modern Traveller's report, that the tails of these sheep do frequently weigh 25 pound weight, and sometimes 30 pounds and upwards. The like hath also been affirmed of the sheep of Palestine, comprehended in old times in the name of Syria. And that may probably be the reason why the rumps or tails of sheep (and of no beast else) were ordained to be offered up in sacrifice, of which Levit. 3. v. 9 But besides the store of Wool which they have from the sheep, they have also great plenty of Cotton Wool, which groweth there abundantly; with the seeds whereof they sow their fields, as we ours with Corn. The stalk no bigger than that of Wheat, but as tough as a Beans; the head round and bearded, in the size and shape of a Medlar, and as hard as a stone: which ripening breaketh, and is delivered of a white soft Bombast intermixed with seeds, which parted with an instrument, they keep the Seeds for another sowing, and fell the Wool unto the Merchant: a greater quantity thereof issuing from that little shell than can be imagined by those who have not seen it.  
The people heretofore were very industrious, especially about their gardens; the fruitful effects whereof they found in the increase of their herbs, and plants. Whence the Proverb, Multa Syrorum Olera. But withal they were observed to be very gluttonous, spending whole days and nights in feasting, great scoffers, and much given to laughter. Crafty and subtle in their dealings, not easily to be trusted but on good security: and so were the Phoenicians, their next neighbours also. Hence came the Greek Adage which Suidas speaketh of, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Sylli contra Phoenices, used by them when two crafty knaves endeavoured to deceive each other. They were noted also to be superstitious, great worshippers of the Goddess Fortune, but greater of their Syrian Goddess, whatsoever she was. Affirmed by Plutarch to be a womanish and effeminate nation; prone unto tears, and such as on the death of their friends would hide themselves in caves from the sight of the Sun. Herodian addeth, that they were wavering and unconstant, lovers of plays and public pastimes, and easily stirred up unto Innovations. But at this time, they are almost beaten out of all these humours, having been so often cowed and conquered, that they are now grown servilely officious to them that govern them: not without cause, defective in that part of industry which before enriched them.  
Where by the way we must observe, that this Character of the people, and that of the Country belong not to this part alone, exclusively of those which follow, but to all Syria, and every part and Province of it, except Phoenicia, which being planted by a people of another Stock, hath had its Character by itself. The whole by Ptolamy divided, besides Comagena, Palmyrene, and Coele-Syria, into many petit Regions, and subdivisions, as 1. Pieria. 2. Casiotis, from the hills adjoining. 3. Seleucis. 4. Apamene. 5. L●todicene. 6. Cyrrestica. 7. Chalcidice, and 8. Chalybanotis from their principal Cities. Of which in all he musters up the names of an hundred and upwards, then of some note, most of them now grown out of knowledge, and many of them of no mark or observation in the course of business. So that omitting his method we will follow our own, and take notice only of such places as anciently were, or at this present are, of most observation and importance in the course of Story: with reference notwithstanding to the subdivisions made by Ptolemy, as they come in my way, reckoning Cyrrestica, Chalybanotis, Casiotis, and the territories of Seleucus, Laodicea, and Apamea, into Syria Propria; and Pieria into Comagena.  
First then to begin with those Cities which lie most towards the East, we have in Cyrrestica, 1. Zeugma, on the banks of the River Euphrates, memorable for the passage of Alexander the Great, who there passed over his Army on a Bridge of Boats. 2. Berroea, supposed by some both ancient and modern writers, to be that which is now called Aleppo; but the position of the place agreeth not with that supposition, Aleppo being placed by our modern Cosmographers in the 72. degree of Longitude, and the 38. of Latitude; whereas Berroea is assigned by Ptolemy, to the 36. degree of Latitude, and the 71. of Longitude. Besides that the River Singas on which Aleppo is situate, keepeth itself almost on an even course in the Latitude of 37. between 20 and 30. minutes over: which is more by a degree and a half than the site assigned unto Berroea. 3. Cybros, as in the Latin Copies of Ptolemy, mistake for Cyrrhus, once the chief City of this part, from hence called Cyrrestica. 4. Heraclea, near which Minerva had a Temple: in which, as in that sacred to her in Laodicea, they used once yearly to offer a Virgin for a sacrifice: but afterwards on the sight of that gross impiety changed it to an Hart. 5. Regia, now Rugia, two day's journey from Antioch, took by the Christians in the beginning of the wars for the Holy Land. 6. 〈◊〉 is, of great renown in those dark times of ignorance and idolatry for the Syrian Goddess therein worshipped; from whence it had the name of Hierapolis; or the Holy City, being formerly by the Grecians called Callinice, by the Syrians, Magog, one of the first seats of Magog the Some of Japhet, and from him denominated. The Goddess so esteemed of in those wretched times, that from all parts, Assyria, Babylonia, Arabia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, and indeed what not, they brought her many rich gifts and costly offerings: Nero himself who scoffed at all Religions else, being for a while a great Votary of this Syrian Idol, though afterwards he grew weary of her and defiled her with urine. The Temple built by Stratonice the wife of Seleucus in the midst of the City, compassed with a double wall about the height of 300 Fathom: the roof thereof inlaid with gold, and made of such a fragrant and sweet-smelling wood, that the clothes of them which came thither retained the sent thereof for a long time after. Without the Temple there were places enclosed for Oxen, and beasts of Sacrifice; and not far off a lake of 200 fathom in depth, wherein they kept their sacred fishes: the Priests attending here for their several Offices, amounting in number to three hundred, besides many more subservient Ministers. The tricks and juggle of these Priests to deceive the people, he that list to see, may find them copiously described in the Metamorphosis of Apuleius: which changing but the names and times, may serve for a Relation of those gulleries and Arts of Leger-de-main, which the Friars and Pardoners have practised in the Church of Rome. 7. Chalyban, whence the parts adjoining were called ●halybanotis; conceived by Postellus and some 〈◊〉 to be Chalepium or Aleppo, but on no good ground: this City having one degree less of Northern Latitude, than Berroea had. 8. Barbarissus in the same subdivision near the banks of Euphrates. 9 Chalcus, the principal of that part of Syria Propria which is called Chalcidice, but not otherwise memorable. 10. Telmedissa, another Town of the same division, and as little famous. 11. Seleucus, so named from the founder of it, the first Eastern Monarch of that race, and the greatest Builder of the World: founding nine Cities of this name, sixteen in memory of his Father Antiochus, six by the name of Laodice his Mother, and three in honour of Apamia his first Wife, besides many others of great note in Greece and Asia, either new built, or beautified and repaired by him. From this, the Country hereabouts had the name of Scleucis. 12. Laodicea, one of the Cities founded by Scleucus, in honour of Laodice his Mother; from which the Region adjoining is called Laodicene. Built by him in the place where formerly had stood the City Rhamantus, so called from a certain Shepherd, who being struck with a flash of lightning cried out amazedly Rhamantus, that is to say, Deus ab excelso, before which time it had been named Leuca Act, from the whiteness of the Sea-cliffs near to which it is situate: the Country roundabout commended anciently for the best wines, and choice of very excellent fruits. 13. Apamia, so named in honour of Apamia, the wife of Seleucus, which together with Laodicea and Seleucus before mentioned, having the same founder, and maintaining a strict league of amity with one another, were commonly called the Three Sisters. From this the Country near is called Apimene. 14. Emesa, (now Hamse) the Episcopal See of Eusebius, hence called Emesenus, who flourished in the time of Constantius the Son of Constantine: in whose name are extant certain Homilies, justly conceived to be of a later date. The City seated in a spacious and fruitful plain of Apimene, watered with many pleasant and cheerful Riverers; once of great note, as may be easily conjectured from the walls hereof, which are still perfect and entire, built of polished stone, and of very large circuit: but the dwelling-houses so decayed, that it affordeth nothing worthy observation. 15. Epiphama, in the cantred or subdivision of Casiotis; called at first Hamath, from Hamath a Son of Canaan, the founder of it; and upon that account mistaken by Saint Hierome for another Town of the same name in the Tribe of Naphthals: so different from this place both in Longitude and Latitude (as we shall show hereafter when we come to Palestine) that they can by no means be the same. But that old Town being gone to ruin, it was repaired, if not re-edified by Antiochus Epaphanes King of Syria, who thereupon commanded it to be called Epiphania, obeyed therein as Josephus telleth us by the Macedonians, though the Syrians still called it Amatha as in former times, Antiqu. l. 1. ca 7. 16. Ltrissa, which still preserveth its old name, being now called Laris; much mentioned in the wars of the Holy Land, especially for the death of Baldwin the first Brother of Godfrey of Bovillon, and second King of Jerusalem, Anno 1118. 17. Gebal, the Gabala of Ptolemy and others of the ancient Writers, situate on the South of Laodicea, from which twelve miles distant; mentioned Psal. 83. as a confederate with Tyre and other uncircumcised Nations, in their hatred and designs against the Israelites: at this day called Gabella (with little difference from the old name of it) and by that name remembered in the Stories of the Holy Wars. 18. Aradus, one of the Co-founders of Tripoli, situate in a rocky Island of a mile in compass, directly opposite to the mouth or influx of the River Eleutherus, and distant from the Continent about twenty furlongs. So called from Arvad one of the Sons of Canaan, and mentioned by that name in the Prophet Ezrk. Chap. 27. v. 8. 11. This once a Kingdom of itself, containing not this Island only but some part of the Continent; especially about Antaradus (so called because built over against it) situate on the Northern banks of the River Eleurberus, of which we have spoken in Phoenics. 19 Daphne, about five miles from Antioch, but afterwards by the continual enlargements of that City, accounted as the Suburb to it; so named of Daphne one of the Mistresses of Apollo, who was here worshipped by the name of Apollo Daphnans, and had here his Oracle and his Groves, with other the Additaments appertaining unto those Idolatries; as much esteemed of but more sumpevous than those of Delphos. The Grove about ten miles in circuit, environed round with Cypresses and other trees, so tall and close to one another, that they suffered not the Sun to enter in his greatest heats: the ground perpetually covered with the choicest Tapestry of nature, watered with many a pleasant stream, derived from the Castalian founteins as it was given out; and yielding the most excellent fruits both for taste and tincture, to which the wind and air participating the sweetness of the place, did add a most delightful influence.  
A place devised for pleasure, but abused to lust: he being held unworthy of the name of a man, who transformed not himself unto a Beast, or trod on this unholy ground without his Courtesan: insomuch as they which had a care of their good names, did forbear to haunt it. A fuller description of it he that lists to see, may find in the first Book and 18. chapter of Sozomens Ecclesiasicall History, who is copious in it. The Temple said to have been built by Seleucus also, renowned for the Oracle there given, by which Adrian was foretold of his being Emperor; and therefore much resorted to by Julian the Apostata for that purpose also. But the body of Babylas the Martyr and Bishop of Antioch, being removed thither by the command of his Brother Galius then created Caesar by Constantius; the Devil and his Oracles were both frighted away; as the devil did himself confess to Julian. Who being desirous to learn here the success of his intended expedition into Persia, received this Answer, that no Oracle could be given as long as those divine bones were so near the Shrine. Nor was it long after, before the Idol and the Temple were consumed by a fire from Heaven; as was avowed by those who observed the fall of it: though Julian did impure it to the innocent Christians, and in revenge caused many of their Churches to be burned to ashes. 20. Anitoch, situate in that part hereof, which is called Casiotis, first built, o● began rather by Antigonus, when Lord of Asia, by whom named Antigonia; but finished and enlarged by Seleucus, after he had overthrown and slain him at the battle of Issus: by the Jews or Hebrew's once called Reblatha. Built near the place, and partly out of the ruins of an ancient City, in the second Book of Kings called R●blah in the Land of Hamath; Hamath the Great in the sixth of Amos; by Josephus and the Syrians, Reblata. Memorable in those days, for the Tragedies of Jehoahaz, and Sedechias, Kings of Judah: the first of which was here deprived of his Crown and Liberty by Pharaoh Neco King of Egypt, 2 Kings 23. 33. the other of his eyes and Children by the command of Nabuchadnezzar King of Babylon, as was said before. In following times it was by some Greek writers called Epidaphne, from the nearness of it to that Grove: as afterwards in the times of Chrictianity, by the name of Theopolis, or the City of God, either from the many miracles there done in the Primitive times; or from the great improvement which the Christian faith did here receive, where the Disciples first obtained the name of Christians. The Royal seat for many Ages of the Kings of Syria, and in the flourish and best fortune of the Roman Empire, the ordinary residence of the Praefect or Governor of the Eastern Provinces; next of the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis, who had not only the superintendency over the Diocese of the Orient, though that large enough, but also of the Dioceses of Egypt, Asia, Pontus, Thrace; extending so his Jurisdiction into all the parts of the then known World. Honoured also with the residence of many of the Roman Emperors, especially of Verus and Valens, who spent here the greatest part of their times; and from the first dawning of the Gospel, with the Seat of the Patriarch. A title of such eminency in all times of the Church, the second in Account to the See of Rome (till Constantinople being made the Imperial City, got precedence of it) that there are at this time no less than four great Prelates which pretend unto it: that is to say, the true Patriarch, governing the Christians of those parts, whom they call Syrians or Melchites; the Ps●ndo-Patriarcks of the Jacobite and Maronite Sectaries, both which, for the greater credit to their Schism do assume this title: and finally, a titular Patriarch nominated by the Pope, who since the time that the Western Christians were possessed of these Eastern Countries, hath assumed a power unto himself of nominating Patriarches for Alexandria, Jerusalem, and this City of Antioch.  
The City seated on both sides of the River Orontis, about twelve miles distant from the shores of the Mediterranean; the River Parfar passing on the Southside of it. By Art and Nature fortified even to admiration, compassed with a double wall, the outward most of which was stone, the other of brick, with four hundred and sixty Towers in the walls, and an impregnable Castle at the East-end thereof, and on the other side defended with high broken Mountains, whereunto was adjoining a deep Lake, coming cut of the River Parfar, before mentioned. Adorned in former times with many sumptuous Palaces, and magnificent Temples, answerable to the reputation of so great a City: till taken by the Saracens, and after by the Turks and Mamalucks, men careless of all State and beauty in their fairest Cities, it began to grow into decay. Recovered by the Western Christians from the power of the Turks, after a siege of seven months, June 3. Anno 1098. confirmed in their possession by a great and memorable Victory, got in the very sight hereof within few days after, (June 28.) obtained against Corbanas, Lieutenant to the Persian Sultan; in which with the loss of four thousand and two hundred of their own, they slew a hundred thousand of the Enemy. The Town and territory given by the conquerors to Bohemund a noble Norman and Prince of Tarentum: who by practising with one Pyr●hus, who had the command of one of the chief Towers thereof, afterwards called Saint George's Tower, was secretly let into the City, and so made way for all the rest. Bohemund thus made the Prince, or as some say, King of Antioch, left it to Bohemund his son about ten years after; succeeded in this principate by Tancred and Roger, Princes of great renown in those holy wars: which last unfortunately slain by the Turks, not far from Aleppo, in the year 1120. Baldwin the second having revenged his death by a signal victory, joined this estate to the Kingdom of Jerusalem. Betrayed about sixty years after this, that is to say, in the year 1188. it came into the power of Saladine, the victorious King of Egypt and Damascus; and therewithal no fewer than five and twenty Cities. which depended on the fortunes of it: the glories of this famous City so declining after this last Tragedy (but whether laid desolate of set purpose, or destroyed by the injury of time, I am not able to declare) that it is grown the sepulchre of what once it was, and lieth buried in its own sad ruins; hardly preserving the repute of a forry village. Such is the instability of all worldly glories. Some other Towns there are in this part of Syria, but not to be remembered the same day with Antioch. Of which the most observable is 21. Albaria, distant two days march from Antioch, remembered, in the Wars of the Holy Land.  
As for the story of this Province, as a State distinct, we find it had a King of its own, called the King of Hamath (the Kingdom of Toi, or Tou before remembered) who together with the King of Arphac, commanded in this part of Syria; and the Isles adjoining. Vassals in time succeeding to the Kings of Tyre, who lorded it over all the Seacoasts hereof: and consequently had great influence on the Inlands also. And it contained in this State till the Assrrian Kings began to turn their forces Westward; when added to that Empire by Tiglath Phileser, after the subversion of the Kingdom of Damascus; or by Salmanassar after the destruction of that of Israel. The proud but dreadful vaunt which Senacherih, the Successor of those mighty Monarches, made to Hezekiah, viz. Where are the Kings of Hamath and Arphad; shows clearly that those Kingdoms had been conquered not long before; and therefore needs by Salmanasser, or Tigl●●h Phil●s●r. Afterwards in the struggle betwixt the Babylonians and Egyptians for the chief command, it was a while at the devotions of the Kings of Egypt; it being at Reblatha in this Province, that Jehoahaz King of Judah was put into bonds, by the command of Pharaoh Neco, as was said before. But Neco being long after vanquished by Nebuchadnezzer King of Babylon, it returned again unto that Crown; and after the same fortunes with the rest of Syria.   

3. COMAGENA.  
COMAGENA is bounded on the East, with the River Euphrates, by which parted from Mesopotamia; on the West, with the Mounteins called Amamus, which divide it from Calicia; on the North, with Taurus, by which separated from Armenia Minor; on the South, with Palmyr●ne. Called also Euphratensis and Euphratesia, when a Roman Province, by reason of its situation bordering on that River.  
The reason of the name I find not amongst my Authors: but find that many learned men conceive it to be that part of Syria, which the Scriptures call Syria Maacha, mention whereof is made 1 Chron. cap. 19 v. 6. gainsayed by others because they find a place called Maacha in the Tribe of Manasses: but with no great reason as I take it. For being it is joined (in the 2 of Chron. 19 v. 6. above mentioned) in the same action with Mesopotamia, and Syria Sobah; and not so only, but placed between them in the method of that holy penman; I dare not think but that they were all very near neighbours, and ranked according to the natural situation of them. Which agreeth very well with the site of this Camag●na, having Mesopotamia on the East, and Aram-Sobah on the South. Nor is it any stronger proof unto the contrary that Maacha is a Town of the Tribe of Manasses; then if a man should say that there is no such Province as Mansfield in High Germany, because there is a Town of that name in England; or no such place as Savoy among the Alps, because there is an house of that name in London.  
As for the people hereof, besides what they have common with the rest of the Syrians; they were of old much given unto Divinations; and for that cause derided thus in the sixth satire of Juv●nal.  
Spondet amatorem tenerum vel divit is orbi  
Testamentum ingens, calidae pulmone columboe  
Tractato Armenius vel Comagenus Aruspex.  
Pectora pullorum rimabitur, exta Catelli  
Interdum & pueri. Faciet quod deferat ipse.  
Thus Englished by my honoured friend Sir Robert Stapylton.  
A childless rich man's Legacy, or young love  
Are found i'th'lights of a warm ttembling Dove,  
By Comagene Sooth-Sayers; they look into  
A dead Chicks breast, the same th' Armenians do.  
They view the entrails of a dog, and reach  
A child's perhaps; They do it and then peach.  
Chief places of this part, 1. Samosata, the Metropolis or head City of it, when a Roman Province situate near the banks of Euphrates, over which it had a bridge for passage into Mesopotamia. Unfortunate for being the birthplace of Lucian that profane Scoffer of Christianity, though otherwise a man of a quick wit, and great abilities: as also of Paulus Samosatenus, Patriarch of Antioch, condemned of Here sie in a Council holden in his own City, Anno 273 (by the great and most learned Bishops of that Age, there assembled together) for teaching that our Saviour was no other than a natural man, but neither God nor the Son of God, as the Scriptures testify. 2. Germanicia, (by some called Germanicopolis) on the other side of the Country near the Mountain Amamus: no less unfortunate than the former in being the birthplace of Nestorius' Patriarch of Constantinople, who troubling the peace of the Church with Heterodoxie, and impertinent niceties, about the blessed Mother of Christ, as also about the nature and person of Christ himself: was thereupon condemned of Heresy in the Council of Ephesus, Anno 435. In former times called Adata, or as some write Adapa: but took this new name from Germanicus Caesar, in honour of whom it was made a Roman Colony by Augustus: testified by this Inscription extant in Onuphrius, viz. COLONIA JULIA GERMANICIA, SACRA, AUGUSTA, FELIX. 3. Singa, so called from the River upon which it is situate. 4. Antiochia penes Taurum so called because seated at the foot of that Mountain; to difference it from the other of this name in Syria. 5. Pinara, one of the chief Cities of that part which is called Pieria. 6. Doliche, a small Town, but made an Episcopal See in the best times of the Church, as appeareth by the Acts of the Councils of Antioch, and Constantinople, in which there is some mention of the Bishops of it. 7. Aleppo, now the Principal of all the Country, supposed by some to be the Sepharvaim, mentioned 2 Kings 17. 24. It was thus called as some say from Halep, which in the language of those parts signifieth milk, afforded liberally by the rich pastures round about it: as others more improbably from Aleph, the first letter of the Greek Alphabet, because the first in estimation of the Cities of Syria, Most probably from Alepius: Leiutenant here in the time of Julian the Apostata, who did here many notable exploits, and amongst others, in or near the ruins of some old Town of these parts, not yet agreed on (in case it be not Sepharvaim before mentioned) advanced this City. Situate on the banks of the River Singas, which rising out of the hill Pi●rius, with many windings and turnings runneth through Comagena, and there falleth into Euphrates. Destroyed by Haalon King of the Tartars, at such time as the Western Christians were possessed of this Country and the Holy Land: but being repaired and repeopled became by reason of the commodious situation of it to be much frequented by Merchants from all parts of the world. Situate in the midst betwixt Tripoli, Berytus and Alexandretta, the three prime Ports of Tukie, on the one side; and the Persian territories on the other: it was made choice of for the Staple of the Eastern commodities, brought to Euphrates, and then boated to this Town by the River S●●gas. A City of great trade at present, the English Merchants (amongst others which frequent the same) having here three houses for the Stowage and disposing of their Commodities; and a chief Officer or Superintendent over the whole Factory, whom they call the Consul of Aleppo. But greater was the trade hereof in the former times, before the Portugals found out a way by Sea to those Eastern Countries, since followed by the English, Hollanders and other Nations. The building of it low, but of one Roof high, (as in most Towns of Syria) with a plain top plastered to walk upon: and with Arches before their doors, or houses, as well to pass dry under them in time of rain, as to show their wares. Pleasantly seated amongst Gardens, with the sweet smells whereof very much refreshed: the ordinary Residence of a Turkish B●ssa, safe rather in the remoteness of it from any Enemy, than the strength of the place, as being nothing less than well fortified. Near one of the Gates they show a Sepulchre, by them affirmed to be Saint George's (whom of all the Christian Saints they only worship) before which they maintain a lamp which burns continually. 8. Amin, in the way betwixt Tripoli and Aleppo, supposed by some to be that 〈◊〉, mention whereof is made 2 Kings chap. 17, 12. A City of a large circuit, pleasantly seated on two hills, which give it a fair prospect over six of the neighbouring villages: a thing not to be boasted of as the world now goeth, by many of the Syrian Cities. On a thrd hill once flood a Castle, now decayed and ruinous; beneath it a fair River which runs gently by it; environed round about with Orchards of Palm-trees and very good fruits. 9 Chalmodora, seated by Ptolemy on Euphrates, of which no ruins now remaining; unless the name be changed to 10. Byrrha, as perhaps it may be, that being made by Ptolemy the most Northern Town of Comagena; and this the utmost Town which the Egyptian Mamalucks (than Lords of Syria) had upon this River, and the boundary betwixt them and the Sultan's of Persia. Memorable for an old ceremony here used by those Mamalucks, who accounted not themselves worthy of the name of a Sultan of Egypt, till in this place in solemn pomp in the sight of their Army, they had forced their horse into the River, and made him drink of the waters of of it: testifying by that ceremony aswell the extent of their dominions, as their readiness to defend the same against all Invaders. A ceremony performed with great State by Campsin Gaurus, in the war betwixt him and Selimus the first. But for all this he lost the field, and his life to boot, in the fight near Aleppo: and therewith did not only leave him Syria, as the fruits of his Victory; but opened him a fair way to the conquest of Egypt, which soon after followed. And hereto I refer the Cities of 11. Hena, and 12. Ivah, with their several Territories; mentioned together with the City of Sepharvaim, Esay 37. v. 13. and 2 King 18. v. 34. it being probable that if Sepharvaim were the City now called Aleppe, as the Jews that dwell there say it was; that then the other two joined together with it, must be hereabouts, though we find no tract of them in the old Geographers.  
And if they were (as it seems probable to me) we have then more Kings in this Province in the elder times than the King of Maacha; unless perhaps it may be said that the Kingdom of Maacha (or of Aram-Maacha) being broke in pieces, these petit States arose from the ruins of it. Of little observation in the course of business, whether entire or subdivided into parcels: but that the King hereof (the King of Maacha) aided the Ammanites against David with 1000 men: no very great number I confess, (as one who lay more out of the danger than the rest of the Syrian confederates did) but sufficient to engage them in the quarrel with them. Nor find we any thing after this touching their affairs, but that the Kings of Henai Ivah and Sepharvaim (who shared the greatest part amongst them) being swallowed up by the Assyrrians, (as the forementioned Texts do expressly say) some Colonies of the people hereof, were sent by Salmanassar the Assyrtian Monarch, to plant the desolate dwellings of the Tribes of Israel, as appeareth plainly in the 2. of Kings chap. 17. v. 24. A course in which the Conqueror dealt exceeding wisely; weakening thereby the great Cities and mightier States of this Country, which otherwise might have been apt enough to revolt again; and strengthening therewithal their conquests in the Land of Israel, which otherwise had lain open to the next Invader, and yielding little or no profit to the public Treasury.  
After this time it followed the same fortune with the rest of Syria, till Tigranes the last King hereof was subdued by the Romans. At what time all the rest of Syria being reduced under the form of a Province, this part being then in the possession of Antiochus, Son of that Antiochus surnamed Eusebes whom Tigranes had spoiled of his estates: was left unto him by the conquerors with the title of King. Continuing in his line till the death of another Antiochus the last King hereof; when made a Province of the Empire by Tiberius Caesar, as is said by Tacitus; Qu. Servaeus being sent hither as the first Roman Praetor for the government of it: though Sueton doth refer it to the times of Vespasian.   

4. PALMYRENE.  
PALMYRENE is bounded on the East by the River Euphrates; on the West, by Syria preperly and especially so called: on the North, with Comagena; and on the South with Mount Libanus (dividing it from the Province of Coele-Syria, and part of Arabia Deserta.  
It took this name from Palmyra the Chief City of it. When conquered by the Romant, and made a distinct Province of itself, it had the name of Syria Secunda, and Salutaris. Called Syria Secunda, to distinguish it from Syria specially so called, which by them was named Syria Prima, and Salutary in regard of the medicinal waters springing in many places of it. But before it had any of these names, it was in the Scriptures called Aram-Sobah, whereof Adad-azer was King in the time of David, as we reads 2 Sam. 8. 3. and 1 Chran. 18. 3.  
The Country destitute of Rivers fit for Navigation, save that it bordereth on Euphrates; but liberally furnished with those hot springs, good for many diseases, which gave it the name of Salutaris. Of which thus writeth Marcellinus lib. 14. In his trastibus havingerum nusquam visitur flumer, at in lacis plurimis aquae suacte natura calentes emergunt, ad usum aptae multiplicium medelarum. So he. The sense whereof we had before.  
Places of most observation, are 1. Palmyra, seated in a desert and sandy plain, one of the Cities built by Solomon in the Wilderness, mention of which is made 1 Kings chap. 9 v. 17, 18. this Palmyra being supposed to be that City which is there called Tadmer, or Tamer in the Vulgar Latin. The cause for long time of much contention betwixt the Parthians and the Romans, as situate in the borders of either Empire: not fully settled in the Romans, till that they had subdued Zenobia, than the Queen hereof. By Adrian the Emperor who repaired it, it was called Hadrianople, but it held not long, the old name in short time prevailing above the new. 2. Gezer, 3. Bethboron the upper, and 4. Bethberon the nether, said to be fenced Cities with Walls, Gates, and Bars, 2 Chron. 8. 4. and 5. Baalath, four of the other Towns here built by Solomon; but either quite worn out of knowledge, or called by new names in the time of Ptolovy, who faith nothing of them. 6. Adada, built, as the name doth intimate, by some of the Adads' Kings of this Country or of Damascus, to which last made subject. 7. Sura more towards the River Euphrates, in the Notitia, called Flavia Firma Sura, which showeth that it was either repaired or made a Colony by the Emperor Vespasian, whose fore-name was Flavius: honoured with an Episcopal See also in the times next following, as appeareth by the Acts of the Council of Constantinople. 8. Alamatha, on the banks of the River Euphrates, which if it were lawful for me to criticise upon my Author, I should conceive to be that Hamath of the Scriptures, which is called Hamath Sobah, 2 Chro. 8. 3. against which Solomon prevailed: the mistake from Camatha to Alamatha being not uneasy in the Transcripts. And if it were the same as I think it was, confirmed herein by that passage in the second of Chron. chap. 18. ver. 3. where it is said, that David smote Hadadezer King of Sobah unto Hamath, as he went to establish his dominion by the River Euphraters. By which it seemeth that Hamath stood upon that River as the Camatha or Alamatha of Ptolemy is said to do. I should conceive it to be the chief feat of those Kings, and the Principal City of this Kingdom: the word Sobah, being added to it, not only for distinctions sake, but in way of eminency. 9 Resapha, a Town of note in the time of Prolomy, but of greater in the holy Scripture, where it is represented to us by the name of Reseph, Esay 3. 12. Reseph Civitas Syria as St. Hierome hath it: and a Town of Syria, then most like this. 10. Betah, and 11. Becothai, two other Cities of this Kingdom, taken by David in his war against Hadadezer, 2 Sam. 8. 8. the last supposed to be the Barathins of Ptolemy, though placed by him here some time, they are Towns of Arabia, the Desert by which it seems it was allotted in the change of time.  
This part of Syria, as the rest, was once a distict Kingdom of itself, by the name of the Kingdom of Sobah, or of Aram-Sobah. The first KING thereof, whose name occurs in holy Scripture, being Rehob, the Co-temperare of Saul King of Israel; by whom discomfited in battle, as is said 1 Sam. 14. 47. But Adad-ezor the Son of Rehob, a Prince of greater power and valour than his Father was, having brought all the neighbouring Kings under his command, (as is said 2 Sam. 10. 19 conceived himself a fit match for David, and thereupon opposed his passage, as he went to recover his border at the River Euphrates. In which action though he lost a thousand Charets, and twenty thousand Foot, and seven hundred Horse, yet would he not so end the wane, but first with the Syrians of Damaseus, and after with the Ammonites and their confederates; and finally by the aid of the Mesopotamians, renewed the quarrel. But being discomfited also in this last enterprise with the lose of forty thousand and seven hundred men, and his life to boot, the Kingdom of Zobah was brought under by the Kings of Damaicus. The Story of this war we have in the 2 of Sam. cap. 8. and 10. in the first of Chron. cap. 18. and 1 Kings 11. 23, 24. yet were not the Kings of Damascus so well settled in it, but that David had possessed himself of Betah and Berothia, and other pieces of importance: the Regal City of Hameth-Soba being won by Solomon, and many of the best Towns of it built by him to assure his conquest. But the Kingdom Solomon being rend in pieces in the next Succession, the Kingdom of Zobah fell again unto those of Damasous; and so continued till Damascus itself was conquered by the Kings of Assyria: unless perhaps that Hamath which Jeroboam the second is said to have subdued (together with Damascus itself) to the Crown of Israel, 2 Kings 14. 28. were this Hamath Soba; as perhaps it was.  
After this nothing memorable in the Affairs of this Country, till the time of Gallientus the Roman Emperor: during whose reign amongst the rest who cantonned that Empire betwixt themselves, (commonly called the Thirty Tyrants) O tenatus a man of great power and virtue assumed the Imperial habit, and took unto himself the command of these parts of Syria, together with Mesopotamia and some other Provinces, which he had conquered from Savores the King of Persia; against whom he had so good an hand, that he discomfited him in battle, seized upon his Treasures, took many of his Nobles, and most of his Concubines. For which great Acts admitted partner in the Empire by Gallienus, he was not long after slain by Maeonius his own Cousin German. Who by that murder hoped to obtain the Principality of Palmyreni (for by that name it was now called): but in that deceived. For after his death, Zembia his unfortunate Widow, a most masculine Lady, not only preserved the principality of Palmirene for the use of her Children; but took upon her both the Purple habit, and the command of his Annie: which she managed with great wisdom and gallantry, the rest of the time of Gallienus, and all the reigns of Claudius an 〈◊〉 his two next Successors. But vanquished and rook Prisoner by Aurelianus (who had the happiness to unite the broken limbs of that Empire into as strong a body as ever formerly) she was led in Triumph thorough Rome. The terror of her name, and the unusualness of the sight, so heightening the general expectation: ut ea specie nihil unquam esset pompabilius, saith Trebelliu Pollio; That never any show was esteemed so glorious. A Lady of so strong a virtue, and of such command upon herself, that she is said never to have made use of her husband's company, when she perceived herself with child. After this nothing singular in the Story of Palmirene, but that when all the rest of Syria was subdued by the Christians of the West, this Province and the next only were made good against them by the Turkish Sultars of Damasens.   

5. COELE-SYRIA.  
COELE-SYRIA is bounden on the East with part of Palmyrene, and Arabia Deserta; on the West, with Palestine; on the North, with Palmyrene, and some part of Syria Propria, from which divided by the Interposition of Mount Libanus; on the South, with Ituraea, and Arabia Deserta also.  
It was called by the Greeks Coele-Syria, i.e. Syria Cava, because partly situate in the hollow valleys interjected betwixt Libanus and Anti-Libanus: and sometimes also Syro-Phoenacia, from the intermixture of those people; as the Phoenicians which went with Dido into afric, were called Libe-Phoemces. By the Romans, when made a distinct Province of their Empire, it had the name of Phoenicia Libam, or Phanicia Libanensis, to difference it from the other Phoenicia, which they called Maritima: but before all this by the Hebrews named Aram-Damasek, Syria-Damascena in the Latin, from Damaescus the chief City of it: unless perhaps we should rather say, that Aram-Damasek contained only that which lay between the Mountains of Labanus and Anti-Libanus; the rest being added by the Romans, out of the neighbouring parts of Palestine, and Arabia-Deserta, as perhaps it was.  
Chief Rivers hereof are, 1. Abanak, and 2. Pharphar, the Rivers of Damascus, as the Scripture calleth them, 2 Kings chap. 5. The one of which is thought to be the River Adonis, spoken of already; the other that which Ptolemy calleth Chrysorrhoas, or the golden flood; which rising in the Hills of this Country, passeth by Damascus; and so together with the other into the Mediterranean Sea Chief Mountains of it, 1. Alsadamus, by the Phoenicians called Syrion, by the Amorites, Samir; a Ridge of Hills which beginning at the East point of Anti-Libanus, bend directly Southwards, shutting up on that side the land of Israel, whereof more in Palestine, 2. Hippus, a ledge of Mountains in the South parts of this Province, where it bordereth on Arabia Deserta.  
Towns of most consideration in it, 1. Heliopolis, so called from an Image of the Sun there worshipped in time of Paganism; now Ballebec, or (as some say) Balbec. 2. Chalcis, more Eastward towards Damascut, which gave the title of a King to Prolomy Mennaeus, and his son Lysanias, the Kingdom then extending over the City of Abila, and the whole Province of Iturea in Palestine. But that Family being either expired, or grown out of favour, and Abila with Ituret otherwise disposed of, the title of the King of Chalcis with the Town and territory, was given to Herod brother of Agrippa the first, King of Jeurie. Erroneously supposed by some learned men to be that Chalcis, from which the Country called Chalcidice takes denomination: that Chalcis being placed by Ptolemy a degree and an half more East than Damascus, and two degrees more towards the North; whereas this Chalcis lieth on the West of that City, in the shades of Libanus, and in the very same degree of Northern Latitude. 3. Abila, seated at the foot of Libanus, betwixt Heliopolis and Chalcis, from whence the Country round about is called Abilene: given to Lysanias, the son of the former Lysanias King of Chalcis, with the title of Tetrarch. Mentioned Luk 3. 1. with those other Princes which shared Palestine amongst them: not that he was the son of Herod, as anciently Beda and Euthymius, and of late-times some very industrious men have been of opinion; but partly because the Cities of Chalcis and Abila of right belonged to those of the Tribe of Naphthalim (though never conquered or possessed by them) and so to be a part of Palestine; and partly because the Teirarchy of Abtlene, when Saint Luke wrote that Gospel, was possessed together with the rest by King Agrippa. Restored (as it seemeth) to the former Family, after his decease; for known it was by the name of Abil-Lysaniae in the time of Prolomy. 4 Adida, memorable for the victory which Aretas King of Arabia obtained near unto it, against Alexander King of Jewrie: the Kingdom of Syria then lying open as a prey to the next Invaders. 5. Hippus, or Hippons, as Pliny calleth it, not far from the Mountain of that name. 6. Capitolias, now called Suente. 7. Gadara. 8. Scythopolis. 9 Gerasa, and 10. Philadelphia, reckoned by Ptolemy as Cities of Coele-Syria, but of right belonging unto Palestine, where we mean to take more notice of them. 11. Damascus, situate in a large plain environed with hills, and watered with the River Chrysorrboas, which with a great noise descendeth from the Mountains, and so abundantly serveth the City, that not only most of the houses have their Fountains of it, but their Orchards and gardens have some Rivulets conveyed into them. The Country round about abundantly enriched with plenty of most excellent wines (the vines hereof bearing grapes all the year long) and great store of wheat, as their Orchards with variety of most delicate fruits: our Damascens, (or Pruna Damaseena as the Latins call them) coming first from hence; as also do our Damask Roses but infinite short of their natural sweetness, by the transplantation. A place so surfeiting of delights, so girt about with odoriferous and curious gardens, that the vile Impostor Mahomet would never be persuaded to come into it: for fear (as himself was used to say) lest being ravished with the ineffable pleasures of it, he should forget the business he was sent about, and make there his Paradise. But Muhavias', one of his Successors, having no such scruple, removed the Regal Seat unto it, where it continued (for the most part) till the building of Bagdat by Bugiafer the twentieth Caliph, about an hundred years after this Removal.  
The chief buildings of it of late times, till destroyed by the Tartars, were a strong Castle, in the opinion of those times held to be impregnable; and not without great difficulty forced by Tamerlane, whom nothing was able to withstand: and as Majestical a Church, gamished with forty suumptucus porches, and no fewer than 9000 Lanterns of gold and Silver; which with 30000 people in it (who fled thither for Sanctuary) was by the said Tamerline most cruelly and unmercifully burnt and pulled down unto the ground. Repaired by the Mamalucks of Egypt, when Lords of Syria, it hath since flourished in Trade, the people being industrious, and celebrated for most excellent Artisans: the branching of Satins, and fine Linen which we call by the name of Damasks, being amongst many others, one of their inventions. Renowned in the Old Testament for the Kings hereof, and the birth of Eliezer, Abraham's Steward (so honourably ancient was this City); and in the New, for the Conversion of Saint Paul, who first preached the Gospel in this place, and here so narrowly escaped the snares of his enemies, that he was fain to be let down out of the house in which he was, by the help of Basket. 12. Eden, at the foot of Mount Libanus, now a Town of the Maronites, and anciently of such esteem, that the whole Country of Damascus was called Beth-Eden, Amos 1. 5.  
But ancient and honourable though this City was, we find nothing of the story of it, till the time of David, the Kings thereof until those days, being conceived to have been Homagers and Tributaries to the Kings of Zobah. The first exploit ascribed unto them in the Holy Scripture, is their coming to the aid of Adadezer, upon his first dereat by David: in which action having lost 22000 men, they were so broken, that they did not only suffer David to put Garrisons in the best Cities of Damascus. but patiently became his Servants, and brought presents to him, 2 Sam. 8. 5, 6. The name of this unfortunate Prince not made known in Scripture, is by Josephus affirmed out of Nicolas Damasceus, to have been Adad (a name much cherished and assumed by the Kings his Suceessours): who keeping constant to the party of Adadezer in his following wars; was at last slain with him in that great discomsiture which David gave them, mentioned in the 2 of Sam. chap. 10. v. 18. In which Text the Scripture telleth us nothing of the death of those Kings, that being supplied to us by Josephus out of their Records. Who also addeth, that Rezin one of the Chief Commanders of Adadezer, taking this advantage, not only usurped his Master's Kingdom, but made himself Master of the Kingdom of Damascus also. From this time forward the seat-royal of the Kings of Syria. Nor is this the tradition of Josephus only, but founded plainly on the Scriptures; of which see 1 Kings 11. v. 23, 24. the Scriptures after this, taking no notice of any other Kings of Syria (by the name of Kings of Syria) but of those that reigned in Damascus; who in short time had swallowed up the petit Kingdoms of Gessur, Ish-tok, Rehob, besides that of Sobah beforementioned.  

The Kings of Syria or Damascus.  
1. Adad, the Friend and Confederate of Adadezer King of Sobah; in whose quarrel he was vanquished and slain by David.  
2. Rezin, of whom the Scripture saith in the 2 of Chron. that when David slew them of Sobah, he fled from Adadezer his Lord, and gathered men unto him, and certain Captains over a Band, and went to Damascus and dwelled therein, and reigned in Damascus.  
3. Adad II. an Idumoean, supposed to be of the family of Adadezer, but rather as I think of Adad, for fear of David fled to Egypt, where he married Taphnes', the Queen's Sister: and hearing that both David and Joab were dead, returned again into his Country, and as some write, expelled Rezin out of Damascus, and reigned there as King.  
4. Hezion, Successor unto Adad.  
5. Tabrimon, the Son of Hezion, as is said 1 Kings 15. 18.  
6. Benhadad the Son of Tabrimon, hired by Asa King of Judah, to aid him in his wars against Baasha of Israel.  
7. Benhadad II. Son of the former, twice invaded Israel in the reign of Achab, but both times notably repulsed; the first time by a sally of 700 men at the siege of Samaria, the next at Aphec, where with the like number in effect he was taken prisoner, and his Army routed.  
8. Hazael, Captain of the host to Benhadad, anointed King of Syria by the Prophet Elisha, whom God appointed so to do, that by his hands he might avenge himself on Benhadad, whom Hazael slew, but he proved as ill a neighbour to the Kings of Israel, as those before him. He attempted upon Judah also in the time of Joas, but bribed with the Treasures of the Temple, he withdrew his forces.  
9 Benhadad III. Son of Hazael, discomfited in three set Battles by Joas King of Israel.  
10. Benhadad IU. Son of Benhadad the third.  
11. Benhadad V. Son of Benhadad the fourth.  
12. Benhadad VI Son of Benhadad the fifth, in the time of one of which three Kings, but which one we find not for a certain, Jeroboam the Son of Joas King of Israe!, subdued both Chamath, and Damascus: of which see 2 Kings 14. v. 18.  
13. R●zin II. Son of Benhadad the sixth, and the last King of Damascus, who joining with P●k●h King of Israel, against Ahaz of Judah, enforced him to call unto his aid ●●glal P●alasar, King of Assyria, by whom Rezin was taken, and beheaded, and the City of Damascus won: the Kingdom of Syria by that means united to the Assyrian Empire.   
After this time the Syrians continued subject to the Babylonian and Assyrian Monarches; and in the overthrow of that Empire by the Medes and Persians, became a part of their estate: remaining so till the first battle betwixt Alexander and Darius fought near Issus in Cilicia. The victory wherein falling to the Macedonia, gave him without more trouble than the siege of Tyre, the possession of Syria and Phoen●●●. He dying not long after his conquest of Persia, this Country lay as it were at stake betwixt Prolomy King of Egypt, and Antigonus the chief Lord of Asia: but the possession of it, together with the rest of the Persian. Empire in both Asias, fell in conclusion to the share of Scleucus, for his many great and signal victories surnamed Nicanor; a man strangely preferred. For being at the first, Governor of Cha●dea only, he was fotced to leave Babylon, and forsake his Province for fear of Antigonus, then dreadful to all the Macedonian Captains; and to fly into Egypt, where he became Ptolemy's Admiral. After which Ptolemy sighting a pitched field with Demetrius, son to Antigonus, took Seleucus with him; and having won the battle, gave him aid and licence to recover his former government. Seleucus' well-beloved of the people, soon made himself Master, not of Chaldea only, but of all the Persian Provinces beyond Euphrates: and not long after (being seconded by his good friend Ptolemy, Cassander, and Ly●●machus) he encountered Antigonus at Ipsus in jonia, where Antigonus himself was slain, and his whole army routed. This victory made Seleucus Lord of all Asia, from whence passing over into Europe, he vanquished and flew Lysimachus: seven months after which victory he was slain by Ptolemy Ceraunus, whose patron and protector he had formerly been; being yet the last survivor of all Alexander's Princes, and the only possessor of all the dominions which his master had, by the way of conquest, Egypt excepted. His Successors, although they were Lords of all Asia, yet since in Syria they kept their residence, to the end that they might the better furnish themselves with Soldiers out of Greece, upon all occasions, as was said before; they were commonly called the Kings of Syria. But long they held not in that greatness of estate and power which Seleucus left them: though being a full-bodied Tree, and of several Limbs, it endured the lopping off of many branches, and many a sad blow at the very root of it, before it fell For in the time of Seleucus Callinicus, the fourth of this house, A●saces a noble Parthian recovered from it all the Provinces of the Persian Empire, lying on that side of Euphrates, and erected the so much celebrated Parthian Kingdom, whereof more in Persia. And in the reign of Antiochus Magnus, so called for his victories in Egypt, Judea, and Babylonia, the Romans extorted from it all the Asian Provinces, on this side Mount Taurus; not wanting many provocations to incite them to it: for he not only had made war against Ptolemy Philopater King of Egypt, whom the Romans had taken into their protection; but stirred up the Cities and States of Greece against them; invaded Lysimachia, and some other parts of Europe in defiance of them; and had received Annibal the Carthagimar, and Thoas the Aetolian, their most mortal enemies, into his dominions, governing his Counsels by the influences which they had upon him. Nor may we think but that ambition and avarice, to add to their same and Empire by the overthrow of so great a Prince, did persuade much with them. So that the point being brought to a ready issue, they pleaded it on both sides in the battle of Magnesia, a City of Lydia, to which Antiochus brought an Army of 300000. foot, and as many armed Chariots, besides store of Elephants, if the Roman writers be not over-lavish in their reports. But rejecting the advice of Annibal, and committing his affairs wholly to Evil Counsellors, he was vanquished by no more than four Legions of enemies, and for his peace, compelle to quit all his Asian Provinces, on that side of Taurus, and to pay 15000. Talents in ready money for the charge of the war. The rest of his estates they were content he should enjoy for a longer time, Et libentius quod tam facile cessisset, (as Florus handsomely puts it on him) because he had so easily relinquished that. Afterwards in the civil broils among themselves, about the succession of the Kingdom, Alexander, King of the Jews, took from them many of their best Towns in Palestine, as Joppa, Gaza, Anthedon, Azotus, Rhinocorura, almost all Samaria, and Gaulonitis, with Sythopolis, Gadara, and many other strong Towns in Coele-Syria. Finally, when they had consumed almost all the Royal race, and changed their Kings no less than ten times in 40. years, (a sure sign of a falling and expiring Kingdom) they were fain to cast themselves upon Tigranes' King of Armenia, a puissant and successful Prince, till engaged in the quarrel of Mithridates against the Romans: by whom stripped of all his Estates on this side Euphrates, he was fain to content himself with his own Armenia, leaving Syria to the absolute disposal of Pompey, who presently reduced it to the form of a Province. This said, we have not much more to do with the house of Seleucus, but to lay down their names, and times of their several governments, till we draw towards the last end of 

The Macedonian Kings of Syria.  
A. M.  
3654. 1. Seleucus, Nicanor, the first King of this house. 31.  
3685. 2. Antiochus, surnamed Soter, or the Saviour; memorable for nothing so much, as marrying with Stratonice his Father's wife, in his Father's life-time.  
3704. 3. Antiochus' II. by his flattering Courtiers surnamed Theos, or the God: but being poisoned by his wife he proved a mortal.  
3719. 4. Seleucus' II. surnamed by the like flattery Callinicus, or fair Conqueror; because shamefully beaten by the Parthians.  
3739 5. Seleucus' III. called for the like reason Ceraunus, or the Thunderer; the eldest son of Callinicus.  
3742. 6. Antiochus' III. surnamed Magnus, the younger son of Callinicus, a Prince that embraced many great actions, and was fortunate in his successes beyond Euphrates: he plagued the Jews, but lost all Asia Minor unto the Romans.  
3778. 7. Seleucus' IV. called Philopator, the son of Antiochus, who first began to cast his eye upon the riches of the Tempse at Jerusalem.  
3790. 8. Antiochus' IV. surnamed Epiphanes, or the Illustrious, but more truly Epimanes, or the mad, the great scourge of the Jews; brother of Seleucus Philopator. With whom beginneth the story of the first Book of the Maccabees.  
3802. 9 Antiochus' V. called by the name of Eupator, the son of Epiphanes; who by Lysias his Captain tyrannised over the poor judeans, for the little time that he reigned; as did also  
3804. 10. Demetrius, surnamed Soter, son of Seleucus Philopator, by the hands of Nicanor: having possessed himself of the diadem by the death of Eupator, slain in his favour by the Soldiers who revolted from him. He was afterwards deposed for a time by Alexander Bala, pretending himself to be the Son of Eupator, supported herein by the Antiochians.  
3814. 11. Alexander Bala, discomfited in his first battle by Demetrius, whom he slew and vanquished in the second; married Cleopatra Daughter of Ptolemy Philometor, by whose aid he was victorious. But a quarrel breaking out between them, Ptolemy invaded Syria, and caused himself to be crowned King of it: Alexander being slain by some of his Soldiers.  
3819. 12. Demetrius II. surnamed Nicator, Son of Demetrius the first, recovered his Father's Kingdom, a friend of the Maccabees, but so cruel to his own people, that he was driven out of his Kingdom by Tryphon General of his Armies.  
3821. 13. Antiochus' VI surnamed Entheus, the Son of Alexander and Cleopatra, advanced unto the Throne by Tryphon, and after slain by him to make way for himself unto the Throne.  
3824. 14. Tryphon, called also Diodorus, having driven out Demetrius, and slain Antiochus, made himself King.  
3827. 15. Antiochus' VII. surnamed Sedetes, brother of Demetrius, having overcome and slain Tryphon, succeeded him in the estate; for a while victorious against the Parthians, but afterwards overcome and slain by them. After whose death Demetrius Nicator (having lived in Parthia since the loss of his Kingdom) was restored again unto the Throne; which having held about 4 years, he was again dispossessed and slain by  
3843. 16. Alexander II. surnamed Zebenna, an Egyptian of mean birth, set up by Ptolemy Euergetes, and pretending himself to be the adopted Son of Antiochus; afterwards vanquished and slain by  
3845. 17. Antiochus VIII. from the croockednesse of his nose surnamed Gryphus, Son of Demetrius, aided herein by the Egyptian, with whom reconciled: having reigned about eight years in peace, embroiled himself in war with his half-brother Antiochus surnamed Cyzicenus; which with variable successes on both sides, continued till the time of his death, having reigned 29 years in all.  
3874. 18. Seleucus' V. Son of Antiochus Gryphus, in the beginning of his reign overcame and flew his Uncle Cyzicenus; but being vanquished by Antiochus surnamed Eusebes or Pius, one of the Sons of Cyzicenus, he fled into Cilicta, and was there burnt in his palace.  
19 Antiochus' IX. surnamed Eusebes, having first vanquished Seleucus, and afterwards Antiochus, another of the Sons of Gryphus, was crowned King of Syria; but slain not long after in the Persian wars.  
20. Philip, and Demetrius III. surnamed Eucoerus, younger Sons of Gryphus, jointly Kings of Syria, but reigning in their several parts. Of which Demetrius intending to disseise his brother, was himself vanquished, and forced to fly into Parthia; leaving the whole Kingdom unto Philip. During which wars amongst themselves, Syria was invaded, and in part conquered, by Art as King of the Arabians, and Alexander King of the Jews.  
3884. 21. Tigranes' King of Armenia, during these dissensions was by the Syrians chosen King, that by his power they might be freed from the Jews and Arabians: the most puissant Prince that had reigned in Syria since the time of Antiochus the Great, as being King of Syria by election, of Armenia by succession, of Media by conquest. But engaging himself with Mithridates (whose daughter he had married) against the Romans, was vanquished by Lucullus: who with the loss of five Romans only, and the wounds of an hundred, is reported to have slain of his Enemies above a 100000 men. Finally, being again broken and vanquished by Lucullus, he yielded himself to Pompey (who being appointed Lucullus successor, deprived him of the honour of ending that war;) and retaining to himself Armenia only, he left all Syria to the Romans; having reigned eighteen years. And though Antiochus Comagenus, the Son of Eusebes, petitioned Pompey for a restitution to the Throne of his Ancestors; yet it would not be granted: Pompey replying that he would not trust the Country into such weak hands as were not able to defend it against the Arabians, Parthians, and the like Invaders; and so reduced it presently to the form of a Province. The government of this Country under these new Lords, was accounted to be one of the greatest honours of the Empire: the Perfect hereof having almost regal jurisdiction over all the regions on this side Euphrates; with a super-intendency over Egypt. Niger the concurrent of Severus, was Praefect here: and on the strength hereof presumed on that competition. So also was Cassius Syrus, who being a Native of this Country, and wellbeloved by reason of his moderate and plausible demeanour, had almost tumbled M. Antonius out of his Throne. On this occasion it was enacted by the Senate, that no man hereafter should have any militer or legale command in the Province where he was born: Left perhaps supported by the natural propension of the people, to one of their own Nation; and heartened by the powerableness of his Friends, he might appropriate that to himself which was common to the Senate and people of Rome. But this was when it was entire, and passed but for one Province only, Phoenicia being also taken into the account, which made the Antiochians so proud and insolent, that Adrian, in his time intended to subduct Phoenicia from it, netot civitatum Metropolis Antiochia diceretur, (faith Gallcanus) that Antioch might not be the chief of so many Cities. But what he lived not to accomplish, was performed by Constantine. By whom Phonicia was not only taken off, but Syria itself divided into four distinct Provinces, as was showed before; each of them having its Metropolis or Mother City: but all subordinate to the command of the Comes or Praefect of the East, as he to the command of the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis; the greatest Officer of the Empire, of whom we have often spoke already.    
For the defence hereof aswell against all Foreign invasions, as the insurrections of the Natives, (a wavering and inconstant People) the Romans kept here in continual pay four Legions, with their Aids, and other Additaments. For so many Mutianus had here in the time of Galba; and by the strength and reputation of those Forces, was able to transfer the Empire upon Vespasian. And though the Constantinopolitan Emperors to whose share it fell in the division of the Empire, rather increased than diminished any part of this strength: yet when the fat all time was come, and that Empire was in the Declination, the Saracens, under the conduct of Haumar their third Caliph, an. 636. possessed themselves of it, Heraclius then reigning in Constantinople. And it continued in their power, till Trangrolipix the Turk having conquered Persia, and the Provinces on that side of Euphrates, passed over the River into Syria, and made himself Master of a great part of that also. A quarrel falling out betwixt him and his nearest Kinsmen, and thereby a great stop made in their further progress, was thus composed, by the mediation of the Caliuh of Babylon in the time of Axan his Successor. To Cutlu Muses was assigned a convenient Army, to be by him employed against the Christians, with Regal power over the Provinces by him gained, without relation or subordination to the Persian Sultan's: of whose successes and affairs hath been spoke elsewhere. To Melech, and Ducat, two others of his discontented Kinsmen, but all of the same Selzuccian family, he gave the fair Cities of Aleppo and Damascus, and those parts of Syria, with whatsoever they could conquer from the Caliph of Egypt, who then held all Phoenicia, and the Seacoasts of Palestine, to be held in see and vassalage of the Crown of Persia. To these two brethren then we are to refer the beginning of the Turkish Kingdom in Syria: who with their Successors, by reason that here they held their residence, caused themselves to be called 

The Turkish Kings of Damascus.  
1075. 1. Melech and Ducat, the first Turkish Kings of Damascus by the gift of Axan the second Sultan of the Turks in Persia, added to their dominions all the rest of Syria, together with Cilicia and some neighbouring Provinces in the Lesser Asia.  
2.— Sultan of Damascus, at such time as the Christians of the West won the Holy Land: against whom he notably defended the City and Territories of Damascus; and in a set Battle discomfited and flew Roger the Norman, Prince of Antioch.  
1146. 3. Noradine (the Son of Sanguine) General of the Armies, and Son-in-law to the former King, succeeded him in the estate. A noble Prince, memorable amongst other things for a gallant answer made to his Commanders, when they persuaded him to take the advantage on the death of Baldwin the third, and to invade Jerusalem whilst the Christians were busy in solemnising his Funerals. Not so, faith he, Compassion and regard is to be had of the just sorrow of those Christians, who have lost such a King, as could not be equalled in the world.  
1175. 4. Melechsala, Son of Noradine, contemned by reason of his youth, by his Nobles and Soldiery, who made choice of Saladine for their King, by whom dispossessed first, and after vanquished.  
1176. 5. Saladine the Turkish Sultan of Egypt, having vanquished the Persians, or Parthians, coming under the conduct of Cacobed, Uncle to Melechsia, to restore that Prince to his Estate, remained King of Damascus: and by the puistance of his Armies recovered from the Christians all Syria, and the Holy Land, with the City of Jerusalem.  
1199. 6. Eladel, or El-Aphzal the eldest Son of Saladine, succeeded in the Realm of Damascus, which he exchanged for that of Egypt with his Brother Elaziz.  
7. Elaziz, the second Son of Saladine succeeded upon this Exchange in the Realm of Damascus, murdered not long after by his Uncle Saphradine.  
8. Saphradine the Brother of Saladine, having barbariously murdered eight of the Sons of Saladine, (the youngest called Saphradine escaping only, who was after Sultan of Aleppo) possessed himself of the Kingdom of Damascus, left at his death to Corradine his Son or Nephew.  
9 Corradine, Son or Nephew to the Tyrant Saphradine, was by him at his death left Sultan of Damascus, to which all Syria and Palestine were then made Provincials. But the treacheries and murders of Saphradine crying loud for vengeance, Haulon the Tartar in the year 1262. having taken the King of Damascus Prisoner (but whether Corradine or some other I am not able to say) brought him before the walls of the City, threatening to kill him in the sight of his people, if they did not deliver it unto him. Which the Citizens refusing to do, the wretched King was torn in pieces, and the City taken by assault: the Kingdom by the Conquerors conferred upon Agab the Son of Haalon. And so ended the Selzuccian family of the Kings of Damascus in the person of Corradine, or the Son of Corradine, most miserably murdered by the Tartars; as it had done in Egypt 17 years before in the person of Melechsela and Elmutam the Son of Meledine, as villainously disposed and murdered by the Mamalucks. So slippery is the foundation of those Kingdoms which are laid in blood.    
Nor did this Kingdom hold long in the hands of the Tartars, recovered from them in short time by the Mamalucise than Kings of Egypt; from them once more regained by the furious Tamerlane, who in the year 1400. besieged Damascius with an Army of 1200000. men (if the number be not mistaken, and one cipher added more than should): in pursuit whereof he filled up the ditches with his Prisoners, put all the people, to the sword, and with great art raised three Towers as a trophy of his victory, built with the heads of those whom he had so slaughtered. A man so strangely made up of vice and virtues, that it is hard to say which had the predominancy. But the violence of this tempest being overblown, the Mamalucks from whom he had also conquered the Kingdom of Egypt, recovered Syria by degrees, and repaired Damascus: continuing in their power till the year 1516 when Selimus the first discomfited (am●s●n Gaurus the Egyptian Sultan in the fields of Aleppo. Upon the news whereof the Citizens of Damascus, fearing the spoil of their rich City then of very great trading, set open their Gates unto the Victors; as did all the other Cities and Towns of Syria by their Example. By means whereof, without any more blows, the Turks became Lords of all this Country; as the next year of Egypt also by the vanquishment and death of Tonombeius who succeeded Campson: so rooting out the name and government of the Mamalucks, and adding those rich Kingdoms to the Turkish Empire.  
And so much for Syria   

MOUNT HERMON.  
IN our passage out of Coele-Syria into Palestine; we must cross Mount Hermon; a ledge of hills, which beginning at the East point of the Anti-Libanus, bend directly South: in different places, and by several Nations called by divers names. By Ptolemy called Alsadamus; by the Amorites, Samir; by the Phoenicians, Syrion; & by that name remembered in the book of Psadmes. But Alsadamus they are called only where they border upon Coele-Syria. Where they begin to part the Region of Traconitis from Arabis-Deserta, they are called by Moses and the Scriptures Hermon; part of the Kingdom of Og, the King of Basan, as is said, Josuah chap. 12. ver. 6. Syrion by the Sidonians, as is affirmed Deut. chap. 3. v. 9 Running farther after this unto the South, they are called Gilead or Galaad: by Strabo, Trachonitae, after the name of the Region along which they pass: and are conceived to be the highest part of all Mount Labanus, or rather of that long Ridge of Mountains which there take beginining. And so we are to understand the words of the Prophet Jeremy saying, Galaad tu mihi caput Libani, as the Vulgar readeth it. That is to say, that as the head is the highest part of a man; so these hills, or this part of them, was the highest of all the branches or spurs of Livanus. Called Galeed by Jacob from that heap of stones which was there laid by Laban and Jacob, to be a witness of the Covenant which was made betwixt them, Con. 31 ver. 27. the word signifying in the Original an heap of Witnesses. And Laban said, this heap 〈◊〉 between me and thee this day; therefore was the name of it called Galeed, ver. 28. By these hills, and the main body of the Anti-Libanus lying on the North, and the Mountains of Phoenicia and lanmaea on the West, the land of Palestine is so shut up on every side, that no Foretress can be stronger by wit or Art, than that Country by Nature, the passages in some parts so narrow as hardly to afford passage for a single person, Clauditur undig, montibus, hinc abruptis, rupibus et profundis vallibus concursu Torrentium, inde altis et implexis anfractibus sic contractis, ut per angustos colles vix pateat transitus viatori, as my Author hath it. I forgot to add, that that part of these hills, which commonly is known in Scripture by the name of Hermon, is in one place thereof called Sihon, as Deut 4 ver. 48. where it is said that the Israelites possessed the Land from Aroer on the bank of the River Arnon, even to Mount Zion, which is Hermon: as also that one of the highest tops or Summits of it, had the name of Amana, alluded to by Solomon in the fourth of the Canticles, by some mistaken for Amanus a branch of Taurus, which divides Syria from Cilicia in the Lesser Asia, with which Solomon had but small or no acquaintance. And so having cleared ourselves of so much of this Mountain as lay before us in our way, we palestine: where we shall meet with it again, (or rather with the Western parts and branches of it) under the names of Gilead and Trachonitis, as a part of that Country.    

OF PALESTINE.  
PALESTINE is bounden on the East, with the Hills last mentioned, by which parted from Coelo-Syria, and Arabia-Deserta; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea, and some part of Phoenicia; on the North, with the Anti-Libanus which divides 〈◊〉 from Syria, and the rest of Phoenicia; and on the South, with some part of Arabia Petraea.  
It was first called Palestine from the Philistims, the most potent Nation of those parts. A name first found in the History of Herodotus, but generally used in times succeeding by the Greeks & Roman●. And this I look on as the proper and adequate name of the whole Country, according to the bounds before laid down: the others, by which commonly called, being more restrained, and properly belonging to so much hereof as was in the possession of the Tribes of Israel. And of this sort are 1. Canaan, o● the Land of Canaan, so called from Canaan the Son of Cham, by whom first peopled after the flood. 2. The Land of Promise, because by God promised to Abraham and his seed for an habitation. 3. Israel, from the Israelites or Sons of Jncob, whose surname was Israel. 4. Judaea, and by us Jewry, from the Jews, or people of the Tribe of Jadah, the most prevalent of the Tribes of Israel. And 5. Terr●s Sancta or the Holy Land, because the subject of the greatest part of the Holy Scripture: and that the work of our Redemption was herein accomplished by our Lord and Saviour. Which notwithstanding we must know, that though these names do many times by a Synecdoche, express the whole Country of Palestine● yet neither the Canaanites or the Israelites were ever Masters of the whole: except only in the times of David, and of some of the Maccabean Princes, as also in some part of the reign of Herod the Great; all which had the good fortune to command it totally.  
But being the most considerable People of it were the Tribes of Israel; we will first look upon the Country People under that capacity. And for so much hereof as was held by them, it is situate between the third and fourth Climates: the longest day being fourteen hours and a quarter: the whole length but 200 miles, and not above 80 in the breadth, yet was of such a fruitful soil, that before the coming in of the Israelites, it had 30 Kings: and after the coming in of that people so extremely populous, that David numbered on Million and 300000 fight men, besides those of the Tribes of Levi and Benjami●. But of the fruitfulness hereof more shortly.  
As for the People they were by composition of a middle stature, but strong of body: in their best times a murmuring and stiffnecked genneration, never well pleased either with God or man, with their Priests or Princes; seldom conform unto the Commandments of their God, nor very much constant to themselves. So crippled in their goings betwixt superstitions and Idolatry, that they knew not how to walk uprightly. Idolatrous above measure, and incorrigible in it, till their coming back from the Captivity of Babylon: and after that as superstitious and severe in the point of their Sabbath, as they had formerly been exorbitant in the worship of Idols. No Medium on either side, but extreme in both. Divided anciently into these four ranks, that is to say, 1. Jews, 2. Hellenists, 3. Proselytes, and 4. Samaritans; all of them pretending a right unto this Country, though not all of them dwelling in it.  
Of these the first called Jews, from Judah, the predominant Tribe; and Hebrews, from Heber the Son of Sela, grandsonne of Sem, and one of the Ancestors of Abraham: were such as naturally descended of the Tribes of Israel, and lived for the most part in their own Country, adhering to the Law of Moses; and embracing the whole Canon of the Old Testament, from the book of Genesis to the book of the Prophet Malachi. Called also Israelites, because descended from the loins of their Father 〈◊〉 to whom God gave the name of Israel, for his greater honour: but after the ten Tribes were carried away by Salm●inassar to an endless captivity; and the two tribes (with the remainder of the rest) returned from that temporary one, which they found in Babylon: the name of Israelites was laid by; and that of J●●s assumed, as more proper to them. These read the Scriptures, and executed all Divine Offices in their natural Hebrew.  
2. The Hellenists, were such as were Jews by parentage, but lived dispersed in most Provinces of the Roman Empire: called by that name (we may English it the Graecizing Jews) because they read the Scriptures in the Greek or Septuagints translation; and performed all public offices in that lanquage also. In other things as superstitious in their Sabbaths, as tenacious of their Circumcision, and others of the rites and ceremonies of the law of Moses, as the Jews of Palestine; and for that reason scorned and derided by the Gentiles amongst whom they lived; Credit Indaerus' apella, saith one of their Poets; relating to their circumcising; Recu●ing, Sabbat a palles, saith another of them, with scorn enough unto their Sabbaths. Novi●illie ritus & coetets mortalibus contrary, saith Tacitus a graver Author, of the whole body of their Rituals or Acts of worship.  
3. The Proselytes were such, as not being jews by birth, or descent of parentage, conformed themselves unto their customs, and desired to be admitted into their Religion. And these were also of two sorts, the one called Proselyri Portae; and the other Proselyti foederis, The first of these, admitted by the jews to the worship of God, and instructed in the hopes of the life to come, were only tied to those precepts which the Hebrew Doctors call the Precepts of the sons of Noah; but were neither circumcised, nor otherwise conform to the Law of Moses. Which Precepts of the Sons of Noah, so called because supposed to be given by Noah unto his Sons, when he came out of the Ark, were seven in number; that is to say, 1. That they dealt uprightly with every man. 2. That they blessed and magnified the name of God. 3. That they worshipped not any false Gods, but to abstain from Idolatry. 4. To refrain from all unlawful lusts and copulations. 5. To keep themselves from theft and robbery. 6. From shedding blood. And 7. not to eat the flesh or member of any beast taken from it when it was alive, by which all cruelty was forbidden. These though they were admitted to the worship of God, and might repair unto the Temple, yet because of their Uncircumcision they were not suffered to converse with the jews, nor to come into the same Court of the Temple with them: but were accounted as unclean, and had their Court apart assigned them in the worship of God, which was called Atriam Gentium, or Immundoru●, and was the outermost of all. The other Proselytes which were called Proselyti foederis, conformed in all things to the jews; as in Circumcision, Sabbath-keeping, and all other Ceremonies: and were accounted of as adopted jews, privileged as they were to worship in the Inner Court; bound as they were, from eating or drinking with a Gentile; and in a word, partakers with them in all things both divine and humane, and different in nothing from them but their race or parentage. These last in the New Testament called simply Proselytes, without any addition: the former by the name of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or the worshipping Gentiles, of which see Acts 16. v. 14. & chap. 17. v. 4. 17. & chap. 18. v. 4. etc.  
4. As for the Samaritans, they possessed a great part of this Country which the Proselytes did not, yet were not so much jews as they. But of these more anon when we come to Samaria, the proper place of their abode.  
As for the natural Jews themselves they are divided also into several Sects, as viz. 1. Esseni, 2. the Sadduces, 3. the Scribes, 4. the Pharisees, 5. the Herodians, and 6. the Gaulonites or 〈◊〉 The Essenes' or Esseni derive their name as some conceive from Asca, which signifieth facere, to do, because they laboured with their hands; as others say from Asa, which signifieth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or to cure diseases, because they were much given to the study and practice of Physic. Their beginning is not yet agreed on. The first time they were heard of was in the time of Jonathan the brother of Judas Maccabaen●, about 150 years before Christ's nativity, then mentioned by Josephus, Antiqu. Judaic. l. 13. cap. 9 A P●hagorean kind of Jew, and not much differing in opinion from those old Philosophers, professing as they did. 1. Community of goods. 2. Abstaining even from lawful pleasures. 3. Forbidding of Oaths. 4 Forbearing Wine, and drinking Water. 5. Ascribing the conduct of affairs to fate or destiny. 6. Using only inanimate or un bloody Sacrifices. Some other Dogmata they had, but these the principal: forbidding marriage not being common to the Sect, but only to some few amongst them. And though we find no mention of them in the New Testament, the Sect in those times being small and inconsiderable; yet it is thought that Saint Paul alludeth to their Tenets: as where he adviseth Timothy to make use of Wine, and glanceth upon those who prohibited marriage, 1 Tim. 4. 3. or condemned others in the use of meat and arnk, 2. Collos. 16. As for the manner of their life, they lived together as it were in Manasteries or Colleges, and in every one had their 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or Oratory: admitting none into their fellowship or society, unless he brought all he had into their common Treasury; and not then neither under a three years' Probationership. More of them he that listeth to see, may satisfy himself in that tract of Philo, entitled De vita contemplativa, where he most copiously describeth their Institutes and course of life: mistakingly applied by Eusebius to the Primitive Christians, as if that Tract had purposely been composed of them by that learned Jew.  
2. The Sadduces either derive their name from Sadoc, who lived about the time of Alexander the Great, and is thought to be the first founder of them; or from Sadok an Hebrew word, signifying Justice; the men pretending to be so exact and strict justiciaries, as if they would justify themselves before God's Tribunal. The occasion of the Sect or heresy (for both it was) said to arise from a mistake of Antigonus a right learned man, who teaching that we ought not to serve God, as Servants do their Masters, for the hope of reward; occasioned Sadoc and Baitus, two of his Auditors, to conceive that there was no reward nor recompense for a godly life, and consequently no Resurreection nor World to come, neither Angels nor Spirits. These were the most capital of their Errors, as appeareth Act. 23. 6. 8. Mat. 22. 3. Luke 20. 20. 27. etc. But other Dogmata they had not mentioned in the holy Scripture, ascribing nothing unto Fate, or Predestination, but all things altogether to a man's freewill. 2. Teaching the soul to be annihilated at the hour of death. 3. Rejecting all Traditions; and 4. Allowing no more Scripture than the five Books of Moses. In most of their opinions contrary to the Scribes and Pharisees, but joining with them both in opposing Christ, and though like Sampsons' foxes they looked divers ways and were tied together by their tails only; yet in those tails they carried firebrands to destroy God's harvest; and had done it if they had been able.  
3. But indeed the Pharisees were the men who were the Master-wits in the Arts of mischief. Homines robustioris impietatis in the Father's words. Fellows of such a perfect and concocted malice, that they were almost able to possess the devil. Their name they derive from Pharez, which is to separate. Separist● we may rightly call them. For they were first 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, separated to the study of the Law of God, as Saul was brought up to that purpose at the feet of Gamaliel: and 2ly 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, separated from the rest of mankind, by a more strict profession of sanctity; as the Phar●see boasted of himself that he was not as other men, or as that Publican. And that they might so seem unto simple men, they did thirdly separate themselves from the society and conversation of others not to pure as themselves, whom they called populum terrae, or the Sons of the earth: upbraiding Christ that he kept company with Publicans and Sinners: and more than so, used a particular kind of habit, and had a garb unto themselves which no others had; using it for a byword amongst themselves, that 〈◊〉 populi terrae sunt conculcatio Pharisaeorum. To which end, as their Countenances were more clouded and severe than others; so did they wear their Phylacteries of a brother size than others did; which by the way, were scrols of Parchment bound about their heads and upon their hands, wherein were writ the Ten Commandments of God: foolishly so interpreting those words of Deut. And they shall be as front●●● between thine eyes, etc. chap. 6. ver. 8. They began at the same time with the Sadduces; which was about 300 years before Christ's nativity. As for their Dogmata, besides those specified above, which were also practicable, they mentioned 1. a Pythagorean Metempsuchosis, affirming that the soul of a righteous man passed from one man into another, at the time of his death: from whence the divers opinions touching Christ our Saviour, Mat. 16. v. 14. are supposed to spring, as if his body had been animated with the soul of Elias, John the Baptist, Jeremy, or some other Prophet. 2. They adhered so tenaciously to unwritten traditions, that in comparison of them, they neglected the written Law as either insufficient or impertinent. And 3. ascribed so much sanctity unto frequent washings, especially when they came from Market, Mark 7. v. 4. where possibly they might meet with some unclean person; and before their sitting down to meat, Mat. 15. 2. that if they came unto a place where there was not water enough both to drink and wash, the ‛ Pharisee would rather choose to wash than drink, thought died for thirst. More of them he that list to see, may find it copiously set down in the four and twentyeth chapter of Saint Matthew; and thither I refer the Reader. By means of which pretensions to so great a sanctity, and some other arts they had to abuse the people, they grew so strong, and had such store of followers, and dependants on them, that they became formidable in short time to their Kings and Princes. Insomuch that Alexandra durst not enter on the government in her children's nonage as Josephus telleth us Antiqu. lib. 13. cap 23. until she had permitted all things unto their disposing, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. and promised to do nothing without their advice. And this she did by the direction of King Alexander her dying Husband, whose Government as he found by too sad experience, had in many things proved unsuccessful, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because he had put some scor●cs upon them, and otherwise offended that prevailing faction. A faction so predominant amongst the People. saith the same Josephus, Antiqu. lib. 19 cap. 18. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. that whatsoever they pleased to spread abroad either of the High Priest. or the King himself, how false and scandalous soever; it was received for truth without more dispute, or any inquire made into it.  
4. But of the Pharisees enough, of the Scribes anon. Proceed we now to the Herodians and the Gaulonites, whom I look not on as either the Authors or Promoters of any Sect of Religion in the Jewish Church; but as the names of two opposite factions in the Civil State. The first were such who depending upon Herod's fortune, as he did on the pleasure of the Roman Emperors; solicited the paying of tribute to the Romans; and earnestly pressed upon that point, that Herod might be thereby the more endeared to his Masters of Rome, and they to him. Upon this ground, nicknamed Herodians by the people, as men that more endeavoured the greatness and estate of Herod, than the prosperity and liberty of their native Country. And possible enough it is, that some amongst them seeing the magnificence of Herod's palace, and experimentally knowing his prowess; might fancy him to be the Messiah, so long looked for and thereby own this name with a better title than the others did. Opposite unto these were those called the Gaulonites (we may call the one the Court-faction, the other the faction of the Country or Common-people): so named from one Judas, a Gaulonite as Josephus calleth him from the place of his birth; a Galilaean, as Gamaliel calleth him, Acts 5. 37. from the place of his abode or habitation. By him the Jews were practised with to deny this tribute, telling them that it was a manifest token of their fervitude and that they ought to know no Lord, but the Lord of Heaven: drawing them finally on this ground into open arms, in which action he and his adherents perished, and were brought to nothing. Most of his followers were of Galilee, though he had some disciples in Jerusalem and Samaria also: and of these Galilaeans were those poor men, whose blood Pilate is said to mingle with their Sacrifices, Luke 13. 1.  
The language of this people by them called the Hebrew, was naturally and originally the same which Abraham found in the land of Can●●an, at his coming thither: as hath been shown before when we were in Pham●ia. Used by them constantly till their subjugation by the Babylonians, when being led captive to that Country, and conforming themselves to the speech and dialect of it: they came at last to speak a kind of broken language, neither true Chaldaean, nor good Hebrew, but one made of both. Chaldee, as to the main body of it, but Hebrew, as to the Affixes, points, and Conjugations; being the same with that which we now call the Syriack. And at their coming home, after seventy years, had so far lost the knowledge of their Mother-tongue: that they were not able to understand the words of the Holy Scripture, when Ezra read it in their hearing; insomuch that he was forced to employ some learned in that tongue, to expound it to them. To this the Scribes so often mentioned in the New Testament, must refer their original: there being no such Office heard of till the time of Ezra, though long before that time the Law had ordinarily been read unto them in the feast of Tabernacles. For this cause they were called Scribes of the Law, Ezra 7. 6. Doctors of the Law, Luke 5. 17. and simply by the name of Lawyers, Luke 7. 30. as men whose office was to expound the Law, and make it intelligible to the people. These people we may resemble to the Canonists in the Church of Rome, or the Divinity Reader in some School or College: and grew to so great estimation in the Jewish State, that it was hard to say at last whether the Pharisees or they were the better men. For what the Pharisees gained on the common people by pretence of sanctity, these got more justifiably by their zeal to the written word, which they endeavoured to preserve from the common dangers both of corruption and contempt. And though I look on those men especially, as the name of a function, not a Sect: yet being they held so close to the Pharisees, and concurred with them in most of their superstitions, as appeareth Mat. 23. I consider them as a strong and potent faction, of great authority and influence in affairs of moment.  
For matters of Religion, the people of this land were privileged above all others, had they had the grace to make good use of it: the Law being given to them by God the Father, the Gospel preached amongst them by God the Son, and that Gospel countenanced and confirmed before their eyes, by the miraculous operations of the Holy Ghost. The Government of that Church in the time of the Law by a subordination of Priests and Levites to their several heads; the Priests divided by King David into 24. ranks or Classes, each Classis serving in their turns at the holy Temple: the chiefs or Heads of which several Classes made but that body of men which are called Principes Sacerdotum, or chief Priests, so often mentioned in the writings of the holy Evangelists. Over all which there was one supreme, whom they called Summum Sacerdotem, or the Highpriest, descended lineally from Aaron, till the Romans out of averice and reason of State made the office saleable. And because possibly the Highpriest might be under some pollution, and so uncapable by law to perform his Office, he had his Suffragan (or Sagan) to discharge it for him. Of which sort was Zephaniah, the Sagan or second Priest to Semiah, mentioned jerem. 52. 24. And of this sort is Anna's thought by some to have been to Caiaphas; and for that cause the title of Highpriest to be given to both, Luke 3. 2. though others think that Annas was Highpriest in right, and the other in fact: the one being disposed by the Romans, and the other super-induced into the place. In time of Christianity they were governed as in other Churches, by a subordination of Priests to Bishops, the first said to be Saint james, the Son of Alphaeus, commonly called the Lords Brother: affirmed by Ignatius, Scholar to the Apostles, in his Epistle ad Trallianos; by Egesippus who lived in the Apostles times, as Saint Hierome and Eusebius cite him; as also by Clem●ns of Alexandria cited by Eusebius, hist. 1. 7. c. 14. by cyril of Jerusalem, Catechism. 4. and 14. Epiphanius, Haeres. 78. n. 7. Saint Ambrose in Gal. 1. Saint Chrysost. on the last of Saint johus Gospel; Saint Hierome in his Catalogue of Ecelesiastical writers; Saint Augustine cont. Crescon. 1. 2. cap. 37. to whom there may be added the joint consent of 289. Prelates, assembled in the sixth General Council holden at Constantinople, affirming james the Lord's Brother to be the first Bishop of Jerusalem: all of them, with the Fathers before mentioned, taking the word Bishop in that sense in which it generally passed for the times they lived in. His Successors subject at the first to the Bishop of Caesarea, as their Metropolitan; though privileged in their own Diocese with the rights of Patriarches, as appears evidently by the Acts of the Nicene Council. But afterwards for the greater honour of the Holy City, wherein our Saviour wrought the work of our Redemption, it was ordained at Chalcedor, that the Bishop of Hieru●alem should have as well the jurisdiction as the name of a Patriarch; the three Palestines, (for Constantine had before divided it into so many Provinces) being subducted from the power of the See of Antioch, to make up this Patriarchate. So stood it in the elder times, but now by the encroachment of Mahometanism the Christian faith is so obscured, and the beauties of it so Eclipsed: that were it not for some Sects of Christians dwelling in Mount Sinai, and about Jerusalem, it might be said without any manifest untruth to be quite exstinguished.  
But to look back upon the Country, it cannot be described more fully and significantly than Moses hath done it to our hands in the 8. of Deut. Where it is said to be a land of Brooks and Waters, of Fountains and depths that spring out of the Valleys and Hills; a Land of Wheat and Barley, and Vines, and Figtrees, and Pomgranatis; of oil-olive, and Honey; a Land wherein was bread without scarceness; a Land whose stones were as Iron, and out of whose Hills one might dig brass. An ample commendation, and yet in some sort short of the fertility of this flourishing Country, which did not only consist in the choice and plenty, but the perpetuity of its fruits: it being on record in the Epistles of the Emperor Julian, (surnamed the Apostate) that the Figtrees, and other fruit-trees herein, were seldom or never without fruits: the old not fully falling off, till the new come on, which his report if true, (as certainly he did not love our Saviour so well as to flatter the Country for his sake) we have then an answer to the difficulty which hath so much perplexed all Commentators of former times, and that is, why our Saviour should curse the Figtree for not bearing fruit, when the Text saith, that the time of fruits was not yet come, Mar. 14. 13. For though the time for new fruits was not come as yet (it being then but early Spring) yet our Saviour being hungry might expect to find some of the old, and failing of his expectation lay that curse upon it. Nor is this solution of the doubt discountenanced, (rather much confirmed) by the Character and condition of the Country as it stands at present, naturally adorned with beautiful mountains and luxurious valleys, the rocks affording excellent waters, and the Air never pinched with colds, nor scorched with heats: though either by the negligence of the Inhabitants, or some curse laid upon the land, far short of that fertility with which once it flourished. Yet still Figs, Olives, Pomegranates, Palm-trees, are here very frequently to be seen; somestore of Wine, with Oranges, and the Apple of Paradise, which they preserve upon the trees all the year long, (which agrees very well with that of Julian spoken of before) well furnished with Honey and Sugarcanes; as also with Goats, Swine, Hares, Quails, and Partridges: but pestered so in many places with rats and mice, that if it were not for certain Birds which feed upon them, it were not possible for the people to have any Harvest. Balm they had anciently, not now. Nor any Nuts, Pears, Plums, or Cherries, but what are brought hither from Damascus.  
Principal Rivers of this Country, are, 1. Chison, the Chorsaeus of Ptolemy, which riseth out of Mount Tabor in Galilee, and falleth into the Mediterranean Sea, not far from Mount Carmel in Phoenicia. 2. Cedron, a Torrent rather than a River, passing betwixt Jerusalem and the Mount of Olives; but more remarkable for many notable actions, than many others of a greater both name and course For over this Brook did David pass when he fled from Absolom; and over this our Saviour the Sense of David passed, when he went to his passion. On the banks hereof did Asa the King of Judah burn his mother's Idols, 1 Kings 15. as Josiah did the vessels which were made for Baal, 2 Kings 23. 3. Zared, and 4. Napthea, which arising out of the hills of the tribe of judah, have their fall into the Mediterranean. 5. Arnon, which hath its spring in the hills so called, and endeth its course in the Mare Mortuum. 6. lab●●, oft mentioned in the Scriptures; which issuing out of the Mountains of Galaad, and 7. Hermon which springing from the hills so named, lose themselves in Jordan. 8. jordan, so called from for and Dan, two neighbouring fountains, out of which he seems to take his source: though they do also fetch their spring from Phiala, a round deep well at the foot of Anti-Libanus, about twenti-four miles from these fountains, into which he maketh his way like a Mole, under ground. A River of more same than length, breadth or depth, running from North to South, almost in a straight line to the Dead Se● only, where he endeth his course; not navigably deep, nor above ten yards in breadth, where broadest; shadowed on both sides with Poplars, Tamari●k-trees, and reeds of many several sorts, of some of which the Arabians make darts and lavel● nes, of others arrows, and some again they fashion into pens to write with. Passing along it maketh two Lakes, the one in the Upper Galilce, by the ancients called Samachonitis; dry for the most part in the Summer, and then covered with shrubs and sedge; not mentioned in the Holy Scriptures: the other in the Lower Galiles, about a hundred furlongs in length, and about forty in breadth, called the Sea of Galilee from the Country, the Lake of Tiberias from a City of that name on the banks thereof, and for the like cause called also the Lake of Genezareth. And it is to be observed, that the River passeth thorough this Lake with so swift a course, that it preserves itself distinct from the waters of it both in taste and colour, as is affirmed of Nilus for a long space in the Mediterranean, and other great Rivers in their falls. Finally, having run thorough the plains of Hiericho, it finisheth its course at last in the Mare Mortuum, or Dead Sea. Honoured with the name of a Sea, because salt, and large: seventy miles long, and sixteen broad, furnishing with salt the whole land of jewrie: but called the Dead Sea, either because it hath no visible enflux into the Ocean, nor is at all increased with the waters of this River and many other Torrents which fall into it; or because no living creature is nourished it it, suffocated with the bituminous savour which it sendeth forth, from the abundance of which matter it is also called Lacus Alphaltites. Nigh hereunto stood the once-famous Cities of Sodom and Gomorrah, with three others more, whence the valley had the name of Pentapolis, destroyed for their abominations by a fire from heaven: now fruitful in show only, but not in substance; the fruits here growing, being very fair unto the eye, sed levi tactu pressa in vagum f●tiscunt pulverem, but if touched, moulder into ashes, as Solinus hath it.  
Chief Hills and Mountains of it besides Anti-Libanns and Mount Hermon spoken of already, which be only borderers, are, 1. Mount Zion, memorable for the Tower of David, which was built upon it, called frequently the Holy Hill of Zion. 2. Mount Moriah, famous for the intended sacrifice of Isaac, and the Temple of Solomon. 3. Mount Calvarie, on which CHRIST suffered, supposed to be the burial place of our Father Adam. 4. Mount Tabor, on which our Saviour was transfigured. 5. Mount Oliver, from which he ascended into Heaven. 6. Mount Garizim, whereon stood the Samaritans Temple, their ordinary place of worship, mentioned john 4. 20. 8. The Mountains of Saron, stretching with intermixed valleys from the Sea of Galilee to the Mediterranean, notfar from Tyre; there ending in a white cliff, and for that cause called Capo Bianco by the Sailor. The whole Mountain pleasantly enriched with the fragrant smells of Rosemary, Sweet Marjoram, Hyssop, Bayss, and other odoriferous plants which do grow their naturally but for all that destitute of any other Inhabitants than Leopards, Boars, Jaccalls, and such savage Creatures. 9 the Mountains of Gilboa, the highest on the West of jordan; as 10. those of Basan, celebrated for their height in the book of Psalms; and 11. those of Abarim, on the East side of it: from one of the Summits of which last called Nebo, by some writers Pasgah, the Lord gave Moses a Survey of the Land of Promise.  
As for this whole Country comprehended in the name of Palestine, it hath had divers divisions, according to the quality of the People, or the will of those who have been formerly Masters of it. Divided first betwizt the Philistims, Perezites, Hittites, Jebusites, and others of the sons of Canaan, on this side Jordan; the Moabites, Ammonites, Midianites, and Amorites, dwelling on the other. When conquered by the sons of Jacob, it/ was divided into the twelve Tribes, of 1. judah, 2. Benjamin, 3. Simeon, 4. Dan, 5. Aser, 6. Nephthali, 7. Zabuton, 8. Issachar, 9 Gad, 10. Reuben, 11. Epbraim, and 12. Manasseth. When that great breach was made by jereboam in the Kingdom of David, it was broken into the two Kingdoms of judah and Israel; of which the first contained only the two Tribes of judah and Benjamin, the latter comprehending the other ten. When the Israelites were led captive into Assyria, and a new set of People planted in their rooms, those newcomers, from Samaria their capital City, had the name of Samaritans: And when the men of judah were released of their long captivity, and came back from Babylon, they took to themselves the name of jews: after which time the whole Country of Palestine anciently possessed or subdued by the seed of Abraham, was divided into 1. Peraea, 2. Ituraea, 3. Galilee, 4. Samarin, 5. judaea, and 6. Idumaea. When conquered by the Romans, all these were joined into one Province, which for a time was reckoned as a part of Syria, or at least subordinate. But Constantine not liking of the one or the other, went a way by himself, and cast it into three Provinces, viz. 1. Palestina Prima, 2. Palestina Secunda, and 3. Palestina Salutaris; the Metropolis of the first being Caesarea Palestinae; of the second, Samaria; of the third, Jerusalem. But this division of Constantine's growing out of use, we will adhere unto to the former, beginning first with those parts hereof which lay on the other side of jordan, because first conquered and possessed by the house of Israel; who at that gate found entrance into the rest; and coming round to Idumaea; which last of all these Provinces was added to the State of jewry. In the Chorographis whereof, 1 must confess myself a Debtor to Sir Walter Raleigh, whose industry herein hath saved me a great deal of search, though sometimes I make bold to differ from him, & add to him as I see occasion.  

PERAEA.  
PERAEA, is that part of Palestine which lieth betwixt the River jordan and the mountains of Arnon, which divide Palestine from Syria and Arabia, East and West; and reacheth from Pellis in the North, to Petra the chief Town of Arabia Petraea in the South. By Pliny it is made to bend more towards Egypt, who describes it thus. Peraea Judeae pars est ulterior; Arabiae & Egypto proxima, asperis dispersa montibus & á coeteris Indaeis Jordane amne discreta. Peraea (saith he) is the furtherst part of judaea, neighbouring Arabia and Egypt, interspersed with rough and craggy mountains, and parted from the rest of the jews by the River jordan. So called from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, in regard of the situation of it on the other side of that River, and not improperly might be rendered by Trans-Iordana. Blessed with a rich soil, and large fields beset with divers trees, especially of Olive, Vines, and Palms. The habitation in times passed of the Midianites, Amorites, and Ammonites; as also of the two Tribes of Gad and Reuben. Of all which I shall speak in order, beginning with the Midianites, and the Children of Lot, as the first occupants hereof; upon the knowledge of whose affairs, the state and story of the Israelites hath so much dependence.  
And first the MADIANITES inhabited on the Southeast of the Dead Sea, at the very entrance of the Country; descended from one or more of the five Sons of Madian, the Son of Abraham by Keturah, mentioned Gen. 25. v. 4. Who leaving the rest of their brethren to seek themselves new habitations more towards the banks of the Red Sea, and the deserts of Arabia Petraea, continued near unto the place of Abraham's dwelling; and mingling with the Moabites and Canaanites in blood and Marriages, came in short time to lose all the knowledge of the true God; and to worship Idols as the rest of their neighbours did.  
Their chief Cities were 1. Recon, built by one of the five Kings of the Midianites, which was slain by josuah: afterwards called Selah, 2 Kings 14. 7. accounted at that time a City of the Edomites: next of the Ismaelites or Arabians, and by them called Hagar. Best known unto the Greeks and Romans, by the name of Petra, and by that name we shall take further notice of it when we come to Arabia. 2. Midian, on the banks of the Dead Sea, the ordinary residence of their Princes, absolute of themselves at first, as in other places; but at the time when Moses and josuah led the people into their possessions, subjected unto Sehon King of the Amorites; whose Dukes their five Kings or Princes are said to be, josuah 13. 21. A people whom the Israelites had neither commission or intent to make war upon, if they had not causelessly provoked them at the request of the Moabites, by sending amongst them (as Balaam the false prophet had advised) the most beautiful of all their women, not only to entice them to prohibited mixtures, but to allure them to the worship of their Idols also. A mischievous and successful plot, but alike dangerous to both parties: God sending a sierce plague amongst the Israelites, which cost them the lives of 24000 persons, besides such as perished by the sword; and giving a command to Moses to avenge him of the Midianites who had so provoked him. On which commission Moses culled out 12000 men, and sent them under Phineas against the Midianites; by whom all their Princes were slain, their Cities and goodly Castles burnt with fire, their men, women, and male-childrens put unto the sword; as is related in the one and thireieth Chapter of the Book of Numbers Yet notwithstanding this great slaughter they recovered their former power, if not a greater; and after the death of Barac the Judge of Israel, did for the space of four years so afflict that people, that they were fain to. hide themselves in the Caves and strongholds of the Mountains, as is said judg. 6. 2. their enemies having left them neither sheep, ox, nor ass, or any sustenance at all, v. 4. But Gideon being raised up by God for their deliverance, encountered with their tour Kings and put them to flight: of which four, Oreb and Zeb were taken and slain by the Ephraimites at the passage of jordan; Zebah and Salmanah, taken by Gideon himself, and executed by his own hand, as the story telleth us. In this war there are said to have perished of this people and their Confederates, no fewer than 120000 persons: by which so weakened that we hear no more of them from this time forwards, in any action of importance: their name and Country being first incorporated into that of the Edomites; and after into that of the Ismaelites and other the Inhabitants of Arabia Petraea.  
2. The MOABITES, possessed all the Country from the Midianites in the South as far as to Esebon in the North, on both sides of the River Arnon: having jordan on the West, and the hills of Abarin on the East. Possessed at the first by the Emmims, a race of Giants, whole chief City was Sheneth Kiriathaim. But these being vanquished and broken by Cherdorlaomer and his Associates, of which see Gen. 14. 5. their forlom seats were taken up by the Moabites, descended from Moab one of the Sons of Lot, who lived herein great prosperity till the time of Vaheb. Grandfather unto Baalac the Son of Zippor, from whom Sehon King of the Amorites had taken all the parts of Moab on the North of the River Arnom, and made that River, which before was the middle of Moab, to be the North bound or border of it. In which estate it stood in the time of Moses.  
Chief Cities of it at that time were 1. Rabbar, the Regal seat of Baalac the King of Moab, the Rhalmathum of P●olomy. 2. Diblatham, destroyed with the rest of Moab by Nabuchadnezzer, as is said jer. 48. 22. 3. Gallim, the principality of Phalti the Son of Laish, to whom Saul gave his Daughter Michael, formerly married unto David, 1. Sam. 25. 44. 4. Muthana, and 5. Nashaliel, thorough which the Israelites passed, after they had left the well called Beer. 6. Bamath, where Moses was encamped when he sent to Sehon to demand a passage thorough his Country, Numbers 21. 19 etc. 7. Mizpah, the City of Refuge to the Father and Mother of David, in the time of his troubles under Saul. 8. Hor, the chief City of Moab, not meddled with by Moses in his march this way, the Lord himself forbidding him to touch upon it, or distress it; because it had been given by him for an inheritance to the Children of Lot, Deut. 2. 9 Which prohibition was not only for this place particularly (though this particularly their mentioned) but for all the lands and terretories then in their possession. 9 Kir-hasareth, of chief note for the barbarous and inhuman fact of Mesha the Moabitish King, who being besieged herein by the Kings of Judah, Israel, and Edom, without hope of escape, sacrificed his own eldest Son on the wall hereof, which so moved the Kings of Judah, and Edom, that they forsook the King of Israel whose the quarrel was. So the siege was raised, 2 Kings 3. 27.  
Now as Moses did not at the present disobey God's Order in leaving the Moabites in quiet; so neither did the Moabites on their parts provoke him to it; giving him a free and open passage in his march for Ca●aan out of an hope that when the Amorites were subdued, they should be put into possession of their lost estates. And though they were deceived of that expectation, the Israelites looking on the Country which they had conquered, as the spoils of the Amorites; and given it for a possession to the Tribe of Reuben: yet durst they not do any thing in the way of Annes, but sent for Baalam the false Prophet, to cast them by his curses and incantations into some diseases, whereby their strength and courage might be taken from them. Balaac the Son of Zippor was at this time King. After whom we find not the name of any other till we come to Eglon, who with the help of Ammon, and Amalek, overmastered Israel, and for the space of eighteen years tyrannised amongst them: when slain in his own house, and afterwards 10000 of his people by the hand of Ehad. But this indignity was in the times succeeding revenged by Saul in some part, who made war upon them; but more by David who subdued them, and made them Tributaries. And not so only but subjected them to the vilest offices, as is intimated in that form of Speech, Moab is my wash-pot, Psal. 60. 8. Taking their opportunity they withdrew themselves from the house of David, and put themselves under the command of the Kings of Israel, to whom they paid for tribute in the time of Ahab, 100000 Lambs, and 200000 Rams, with their fleeces on: but quickly weary of those payments, and revolting from the house of Ahab also, they were invaded by Jehoram, aided herein by the Kings of Judah and Idumaea; by whom being vanquished, Mesha their King was fain to shut himself up in Kir-hasareth, as was said before. After this joining with the Ammonites, and the Idumaeans, or Sons of Edom, they invaded Jehosophat King of Judah, to whom God gave a memorable and signal victory, without blow or battle: the Ammonites first setting upon the Edomites, and after upon one another, till they were almost all destroyed, 2 Chron. 20. 23. From this time we hear nothing of them; but that probably they recovered some parts of their former dwellings, when the two Tribes and a half, on the East of jordan were carried away captive by Tiglath Pileser. Possessed hereof and of other their habitations, till the reign of Zedekias' King of judah; when vanquished, with the rest of these Nations by the Babylonians and Assyrians under Nabuchadnezzar. Nor find we any mention of them in the ages following; the name of Moab being forgotten, or grown out of use: the South parts of their Country laid to Arabia Petraea, as the East parts were to that also of Arabia Deserta; and all the rest, as well as that which had been conquered by the Jews, swallowed up in the general name of Palestinians.  
3. The AMMONITES, inhabited on the North-East of the River Arnon, and possessed all that tract from Arocr on the head of that River to the City of Rabbah; and on both sides of the River jaboc, as well within the mountains of Galaaed as without the same. The seat in elder times of the Rapharms, and Zamzummins, a Giantlike race of men, as the Emmins were; but vanquished also, as the others, by Cherdorlaomor; Athtaroth, and Heth, being then the principal of their habitations. Succeeded to, in their desolate and forsaken dwellings by the children of Ammon, the other Son of Lot, and the brother of Moab: both houses running the same fortune, these Ammonites being conquered and deprived of the best part of their Country on the Southside of jaboc, by Og King of Basan; as the Moabites, at the same time of theirs by Sehon. A monument of which subjection was the bed of Og, found in the City of Rabbah, the chief City of Ammon; there to be seen when Moses had subdued the Kings of the Amorites, as appeareth Deut. 3.  
Chief Cities at such times as the Israelites first conquered the Land of Canaan, were 1. Rabbah, the Regal City of their Kings; taken by Og of Basan, as is said before; but again quitted as it seemeth on the coming of Moses, that he might be the better able to keep the field. Memorabble in succeeding times for the death of Vriah, slain here by a design of david's, when besieged by Joab. Who haing brought it to terms of yielding sent for the King to come before it, that he might have the honour of taking a place to defensible, environed in a manner with the River jaboc, and therefore called the City of wa●ers, 2. Sam. 12. 27. Afterwards repaired and beautified by Ptolemy Philadelphus' King of Egypt, who having made himself master of those parts of Arabia, which lie near unto it, and liking the conveniency of the situation, honoured it with the name of Philadelphia. 2. Dathema, supposed to be Rithma by the learned junius, mentioned Num. 33. 18. (the Hebrew letters D. and R. being much alike) a place of great strength amongst the Ammonites. 3. Minneth, in the South border, and 4. Abel vinearum in the East border of Ammon; both mentioned in the pursuit of that people when subdued by jephte. 4. Mitspa; sometimes one of the Cities of the half Tribe of Manasses, and at that time honoured with the residence of jephte; but afterwards recovered by the children of Ammon: in whose hands it was when utterly destroyed and burnt by judas Maccabeaus. 1 Macc. 5. 35. 6 Magod, and 7. Bosor, two other strong places of the Ammonites, there also mentioned; but said to be in the Region of Galaad, by which name, or by that of Gileadites, all the Country of the Ammonites lying on this side of the Mountains was at that time called.  
As for those Ammonites; they had nothing at all to do with Israel as they passed towards Canaan; neither provoking them nor provoked by them to any acts of hostility. Afterwards not well pleased, that they were no restored to the possession of those lands which had been taken from them by Og of Basan, (conferred by the decree of Moses on the tribe of Gad;) they joined with the Midianites in their expedition. But worsted by the puissance and good fortune of Gedeon, they lay still a while, till stirred up by some secret motions from, Almighty God, to avenge him on that sinful and idolatrous people, who by worshipping the Gods of the Heathen, had provoked him to anger. Prosperous in it for a time, till his wrath was pacified, who having made use of them to chastise his people, delivered up his rod to be burnt by Jepthe, vanquished, and driven home by him with a very great saughter. Not so much chrushed by the unsuccessefulness of this attempt, but that in the time of Saul they break out again, and besieged Jabesh Gilead, Nabas, a cruel Tyrant, being then their King: who having brought the City into great extremity, would give them no other conditions than the loss of every man's right eye; to the end that they using to carry a great Target on their left Arms, wherewith the eye on that side was wholly shadowed, they might by this means be disabled from all future service. But Saul came time enough to save them from that shame and loss: for that cause so offensive to Nabas, that to despite him, he showed friendship to David in the time of his trouble. A courtesy which David was so mindful of, that he sent Ambassadors to Hanan the Son of Nabas to make acknowledgement of it, and to confirm the, amity which he had with his Father: but found so ill requital from him, that instead of thanks and kind accepance, his messengers were despitefully handled, their beards half shaved, and their garments cut off by the knee. Incensed wherewith he sent Joab against them: by whom the Country was laid waist, and Rabbah their chief City taken; their King's Crown, weighing a talon of Gold, set on David's head, and all the Prisoners executed with great severity, some of them being cast into lime-kills, and the rest torn in pieces with saws and harrows. Quiet a long while after this we hear no great news of them till the reign of Jehosophat, against whom confederated with the Edomites and Moabites; they made open war; but fell by one another's swords, as was said before. Not well recovered of this blow, they were subdued and made Tributaries by Ozias King of Judah, and so continued in the time of Joatham his Son; who so increased the ribute laid upon them by his Father, that it amounted to a hundred Talents of Silver, ten thousand measures of Wheat, and as many of Barley. Taught by this lesson how to value the Kings of judah, they continued either quiet neighbours or obedient subjects, though much improved in power and reputation by regaining the greatest part of their ancient dwellings on the removal of the two Tribes and an half, on the East of jordan, to the land of Assyria, by Tiglath Phul-Assur. For after this, (with reference to the common danger) Baulis their King, was so strict a confederate with Zedechias, that when Nabuchadnezzar had taken Zedechias with him unto Babylon, and left Gedaliah as his Deputy to command the Country; Ishmael, one of the blood of the Kings of judah, was sent by Baulis to slay him. But he paid dear for his attempt; his Country being shortly conquered by the Babylonians, and the name of Ammonite forgotten: changed by the Grecians when they came to Lord it over them, to those of Gileaditis, and Philadelphia; according to the new name of their principal City, and the old one of the Mountains and hills adjoining.  
4. The REUBENITES took name from Reuben the eldest of jacob's sons by Leah, of whom in the first muster which was made of them at Mount Sinai, there were found 46000. fight men, and 43700. at the second muster, when they passed over jordan. Their dwelling was on the East of that famous River; having the Gadites on the North, the Desert Arabia on the East, and the Land of Moab on the South, from which parted by the River Arnon.  
Places of most observation here, 1. Abel-Sittim, seated in that part of the Country which was called the Plains of Moab: the last encamping place of Moses; afterwards by the jews called simply Sittim; memorable for the wood so often mention in the Scriptures, of which the ark of the Lord was made; In after times by the Greeks and Romans it was called Abila, mistake by some for that Abila or Abilene whereof Lysanias was Tetrarch: that Town and territory as josephus doth affirm expressly being situate amongst the spurs and branches of Libanus, far enough from hence, 2. Bethabora, or Bethbara; where john baptised, and Moses made his last and most divine exhortations to the Tribes of Israel, contained in Deuteronomy. 3. Machaerus, the strongest inland City and Castle in those parts of the world, standing aloft upon a Mountain every way unaccessible; first fortified by Alexander Jannaeus King of the jews, as a frontier Town against the Arabians; and afterwards demolished by Gabinius one of Pompey's Lieutenants in the war against Aristobulus. Unfortunately remarkable for the death of john Baptist, where murdered by the command of Herod the Tetrarch of Galilee, and Lord of this Country of Peraea. 4. Lasa, or Leshah, of which Gen. 10. 19 by the Greeks called Challirh●e, by reason of the fair fountains rising from the Hills adjoining, out of which issue springs both of hot and cold waters, as also bitter and sweet: all which soon after joined into one stream make a wholesome Bath, especially for convulsions, and contraction of sinews. 5. Medeba, famous for the defeat given to the Syrians and Ammonites by the conduct of joab, 1 Chron. 19 7. 6. Bosor, or Bozra, a City of Refuge, and one of those that were assigned unto the Levites on that side of the water. 7. Levias', a Town new built by Herod in honour of Livia, the mother of Tiberius Caesar: different from that which the Geographers call 8. Libias, (though by some confounded) the same with Laban, mentioned Deut. 1. 1. 9 Kedemoth, another City of the Levites, giving name unto the adjoining Desert, from whence Moses sent his Ambassage to Sehon King of the Ammorites. 10. Bamath-Baal, the chief City of the worshippers of Baal, to which Balaam was brought by Balaac to curse the Israelites. 11. Hesbon, the Regal City of Sehon King of the Ammorites. 11. Adam, or the City Adam (Ios. 3. 17.) where the Tribes passed drie-foot over jordan, opposite unto Gilgal in the Tribe of Benjamin. Within this Tribe is the Mountain Nobo, from which Moses took a view of the land of Canaan: an hill as it seemeth, of two tops, whereof that which looketh towards jericho is called Pisgah, that which looketh toward Moth being called Hnir. Here is also an high hill named Peor, where the filthy Idol Baal was worshipped also, who hath hence the addition of Baal-Peor.  
5. The GADITES, were so called from Gad the seventh son of Jacob, begot on Zilphah the handmaid of Lea; of whom were found at the first muster when they came out of Egypt forty five thousand five hundred and fifty fight men; and at the second when they entered the land of Canaan, forty five thousand bearing arms. Their situation was betwixt the Rubenites on the South, and the balfe Tribe of Manasses upon the North, the River jordan on the West, and the Mountains of Arnon on the East; by which last parted from the dwellings of the Children of Ammon.  
Cities of most observation, 1. Aroer, on the banks of the River Arnon, the principal City of the Gadites. 2. Dihon, more towards Jordan, of great note in the time of Josuah, and of no small account in the time of Saint Hieroeme. 3. Beth-nimah, of which Esay prophesied that the waters thereof should be dried up; seated upon the Arnon also. 4. Nattoroth, more in the body of the Tribe. 5. Beth-haram, mentioned by Josuah, chap. 13. v. 27. by Josephus called Betaramptha; new built by Herod Antipas, and called Livias', in honour of Livia the wife of Augustus Caesar, translated into the Julian family; who also laid unto it fourteen villages to make it of the greater power and jurisdiction. 6. Beth-ezob, by Josephus called Vetezabra, the habitation of Miriam, who in the siege of Jerusalem when destroyed by Titus, was compelled by famine to eat her own son. 7. Succoth, not far from the River Jordan, so called from the Tents or Booths which Jacob fet up there in his passage from Mesopetamis to the land of Canaan: the People of which Town having denied relief to Gedeon as he followed the chase of Zeba and Zalmanah, were by him miserably tortured at his return, under a tribulum or threshing car, wherewith he tore their flesh, and bruised their bodies. 8. Jahzoz, another of the Regal Seats of Sehon King of the Amorites; first taken by Moses, after recovered by the Moabites (as appearech Esay 6. 8.) then possessed by the Ammonites; and finally from them regained by Judas Maccabeus, 1 Macc. 5. 8. 9 Mahanaijm, so called from the Army of Angels which appeared to jacob (Ger. 32. 2.) as ready to defend him against all his Enemies, the word in the original importing a double Army. A place of very great strength and safety, and therefore made by Abner the feat Royal of Ishbose●h, the Son of Saul, during the war he had with David; as afterwards the retiring place of David during the rebellion of his Son Absolom. 10. Rogelim, the City of Barzillai the Gileadite, so faithful to David in that war. 11. Ramoth, or Ramoth Gilead, so called from the situation of it near the Mountains of Gilead; a Town of specialll note in the Book of God; particularly for the pacification here made betwixt jacob and Laban; for the death of Ahab King of Israel, who lost his life in the recovery of it from the hands of the Syrians; and finally for the Election of jehu to the Crown of Israel, Anointed at the Siege hereof by a Son of the Prophets. 12. Penuel, so called from the interview which the Lord pleased to bestow there on his servant jacob at his return out of Mesopotamia, mentioned Gen. 32. 32. the word signifying the place of the face or vision of God: defaced by Gedeon, for their churlish usage of him, when he craved relief of them against the Midianites; to whom together with the Moabites, and Ammonites, the whole territory appertaining to these two Tribes did once belong. But being from them taken by Og King of Basan, and Sehon King of the Amorites, it came by the overthrow of those Kings to the hands of Moses: by whom assigned unto the Tribes of Gad and Reuben for their habitation; Continuing theirs till the fatal period of this Kingdom of Israel began to approach: at what time these two Tribes with the half Tribe of Manasses, lying on the East of jordan, being carried captive into Assyria by Tiglath Philaser, the Moabites and Ammonites recovered a great part of their, ancient dwellings. Of which possessed till their subversion by the Babylonians. Afterwards this whole Country coming into the hands of the Kings of Syria, had the name of Pereaa, for the reason formerly delivered. And being won piecemeal by the Maccabaeans, came with the rest of the Kingdom of judah to the possession of Herod the Great: by whom bequeathed at his death unto Herod Antipas, one of his Sons, who held it together with both Galilees, under the name of Tetrarch of Galilee and Pereaa, as josephus, or of Galilee only as Saint Luke: who being dead, it was bestowed on Agrippa King of the jews, of whom more hereafter.   

ITURAEA.  
ITURAEA, hath on the East and North Cale-Syria; on the West, the River jordan; and on the South Peraea. So called from jetur one of the Sons of Ishmael, seated in this tract; though lost by his posterity to the Amorites, one of the most powerful tribes amongst the Chanaanites; and by them made the patrimony of the Kings of Basan. The race of which Kings ending in Og, the wealthiest and best parts hereof, were given by Moses to the half Tribe of Manasses; such parts of it as lay towards Damascus being seized on by the neighbouring Aramites, and made a Kingdom of itself, called the Kingdom of Gessur; and the more mountainous and unpleasant left to the first inhabitants, as not worth the conquering. But both the Kingdom of Gessur, and those of the half tribe of Manasses, shifting from one Lord to another, till they came into the hands of the Grecians, the name of Ituraea revived again and grew into very good esteem, the Ituraeans being reputed for good Soldiers, especially at the Bow and Arrows; of which thus the Poet in his Georgics lib. 2.  
— Ituraeas' taxi torquentur in arcus.  
Of the best Yew that can be had  
The Ituraean Bows are made.  
The whole Country in the times of the Greeks and Romans, divided into Trachomitis and Ituraea specially so called: this last again being subdivided into Batanea, Ganlonitis, Auranitis, and Paneas. For whereas it is said in Saint Luke's Gospel, that Philip the brother of Herod, was Tetrarch of Ituraea and the Region of Trachonitis; and by josephus that for his Tetrachy he had the Provinces of Trachonitis, Batanea, Gaulonitis, Auranitis, and Paneas: it must needs be that the four last mentioned Provinces make up that one which by Saint Luke is comprehended in the name of Ituraea; distinct from that of Trachonitis though a part hereof. Inhabited in the time of josephus, as in those of josuah and David, both by jews and Syrians: the Syrians dwelling in the mountainous, and more barren parts, the jews in that which was assigned them in the time of Moses: the whole not yielding unto Galilee for extent of ground; but far inferior to it for wealth and fruitfulness; not well inhabited where best, and in some places which are desert and very barren hardly inhabited at all, or bearing any thing but wild-fruits. Such was it in the time of josephus, and not bettered since.  
1. TRACHONITIS is that mountainous and hilly Country, which beginning at the borders of the Ammonites, where the hills are called the Mountains of Gilead, extendeth itself Northwards as far as Libanus: the hills in those parts being by the jews called Galeed, Syrion, and He●mon; but by the Grecians, for the craggedness and roughness of them, by the name of Trachones. The people mischievously bend and much given to witchcraft, as we find in Strabo. Montanam regionem incolunt Ituraei & Arabes, malefici omnes. So he, or his Translator rather, for I have not the Original by me. Where by Arabians he meaneth those of Trachonitis, which every where he maketh to be the fame with Ituraea, though differing from it as the Cots-wold Country's do from the rest of Gloucestershire, or as a pared th' from the whole; because united by that name into one estate at the time he lived in. Solet & Trachonitis Itureae nomine appellari, saith the learned Grottus, according to the general consent of the ancient Writers. A people generally addicted to spoil and robbery, living especially on the spoil of those Merchants which traded to and from Damascus: till with some difficulty restrained to a more orderly life by Herod, on whom Augustus Caesar had bestowed the Country, to the end that by strong hand he might hold them in.  
The People and the Country by josephus are thus described. The Trachonites (saith he) have neither Towns nor lands, nor heritage or any other possessions, but only certain retreats and caves under the ground, where they lived like beasts: and having made abundant provision of water and victuals, were able to hold out along time against any assailant. For the doors of their Caves were made so narrow that they could be entered but by one at once; and the way to them not direct, but full of turnings and windings, not possibly to be found out but by the help of a Guide, the whole Country naturally consisting of craggy Rocks. The passages of the Caves once entered they were found to be very large and spacious: sufficient to contain great multitudes of these thievish people, who when they had not opportunity to spoil their neighbours, would rob one another, and omitted no kind of wickedness; being so accustomed to thest that they could not live otherwise. But I conceive that this is not meant generally of all the people, but only of some body of thiefs or outlaws, which possessed themselves of the streits of the Mountains; and from thence issued to assault and spoil the Passengers. For it is afterwards expressed, that revolting upon the news of Herod's death, and committing new outrages, they no sooner heard of his recovery but they fled the Country, and betook themselves unto a strong Castle in Arabia, where they increased to the number of a thousand persons. So that there is no question to be made at all but they had villages and towns, and lands and heritage's, in the more civil parts hereof; though not amongst those Mountainers which josephus speaks of. And amongst those, I reckon, 1. Gerra, 2. Elere, 3. Nelaxa, 4. Adrama; all named by Ptolemy, and all placed by him in the Longitude of 70 degrees or upwards: more towards the East than well agreeth with the position of this Country, or any part of Belying more towards the West than Trachonitis, though to that part of Ituraea, by him ascribed. Hither also I refer the City of 5. Tishbe, the Country of old Tobit, and the Prophet Elias. 6. Tob, where Jophes lived in exile, when oppreffed by his Brethren, till the necessities of his Country called him to the public government; and 7. Hippus, at the foot of those Mountains, reckoned amongst the Cities of Coele-Syria.  
2. BATANEA is that part of Ituraea, which anciently made up the best and greatest part of the Kingdom of Basan, whence it had this name: the changing of S to T, as Assyria into Attyria, and the like, being usual among the Greeks. But that Kingdom being brought to an end by Moses, it was given to the half tribe of Manasses; so called of Manasses the Son of Joseph, of whom there were found at the first muster near Mount Sinai 32200 men able to bear arms: which though consumed in the Deserts, yet were they of such a swift increase, that there were found 52700 fight men of them when rhey passed over Jordan. Their Territory on that side of the River, stretching from Jaboc on the South, to the Realm of Gessur on the North, and from the mountains unto Jordan East and West, was exceeding fertile: repenished withal sorts of cattle, and adorned with the goodliest Woods in that part of the World; the Oaks of Basan being celebrated in the Holy Scriptures.  
It had in it 60. fenced Cities when first conquered by those of this Tribe. The principal of which 1. Pella, formerly called Butis, but being rebuilt by Seleucus the Great King of Syria, was by him called Pella, with reference to a City of that name in Macedon, the birthplace of Alexander, to whom Seleucus owed his greatness and whole estate. Destroyed by Alexander Jannaeus King of the Jews, because not willing to admit of the Law of Moses; it was afterwards restored by Pompey to its former lustre. Memorable in Church-story for the Admonition or premonishment given by a voice from Heaven to the Christians dwelling at Jerusalem, to remove thence and dwell at Pella: that so they might escape that destruction which the Roman Army under Titus was to bring upon it. 2. Edrey, the seat-royal of the Kings of Basan. 3. Carnaim, on the banks of Jaboc, taken by Judas Maccabaeus, who set fire on the Temple of the Idols there; and burned therein all such as fled thither for sanctuary. 4. Ephror, a strong City upon Jordan, taken and burnt by the same Judas Maccabaeus, for refusing to give a passage to his Army. 5. Jabesh Gilead, more near unto the Mountains, whence it had that Adjunct; memorable in the Scriptures for the siege of Nabas King of the Ammonites, the raising of that siege by Saul, and the gratitude of the People towards him again, in taking down, embalming and intombing the bodies of him and his Sons, which the Philistims had most delpitefully hanged on the walls of Bethsan. 6. Astaroth, a City of great note in the Elder times; the seat of the Rephaims, a Giantlike race of men, of whom descended Og of Basan; from whence the Country adjoining had the name of the Land of giant's Astaroth the Goddess of the Sidonians had here her worshippers. 7. Gaulon, sometimes possessed by Og of Basan, and afterwards made one of the Cities of Refuge; of such esteem in the times of the Greeks and Romans, that the North part of Basanitis or Batanea was called Gaulonitis, divided into Superior and Inferior, so often mentioned by Josephus. And of this City or Country was that Judas of Gal●lee spoken of in the sift of the Acts, the Founder of the Gaulonites, or Anti-Herodians. 8. Gamala, in the Lower Gaulonitis, so called because the Hill upon which it stood was fashioned like the back of a Camel: invincibly situate, strengthened both by Art and Nature: and at the last with so great difficulty, and hazard of Vespasians person, stormed by Titus, that the Romans in the heat of the execution, spared neither Women nor Children; insomuch that all the Inhabitants perished, except some few Women which had hid themselves. 9 Gadara after ten month's siege taken and destroyed by Alexander Jannaeus King of the Iews; repaired by Pompey, and by Gabinius made one of the five feats of Justice for the whole Country of Palestine: the other four being Jerusalem, jericho, Hamath, and Sephorah. 10. Gerasa, or Gergesa, the Chief City of the Gergesites, the people whereof on the loss of their Swine, entreated our Saviour to depart out of their costs, as Saint Matthew hath it. Saint Luke. and Saint Mark ascribe it to the People of Gadara, not that the Cities were both one, or the Evangelists at odds in the Relation, but because they were two neighbouring Cities, and their fields lay in Common pour cause de vicinage, as our Lawyer's phrase it; and so the story might be common to both alike. 11. Hippus, not far from the River jordan, so called from a Garrison of Horse there placed by Herod: not from the Mountain Hippus, as some suppose; which is too far off to have any influence upon it. 12. julias', built by Philip the Tetrarch of Ituraea, in the Southern border of his estate, in imitation of the like work of Herod the Tetrarch of Galilee and Peraea; to ingratiate himself with julia, the wife of Tiberius Caesar. 13. Abel, by josephus called Abel Maacha, for distinctions sake: where Sheba that Grand Rebel being besieged by joab, and the City brought into some danger; had his head cut off and thrown over the wall, at the persuasion of a wife woman of the Town. So the rebellion ended, and the City was saved.  
North of Basanitis or Batanea lieth the Kingdom of GESSUR by a latter name called AURANITIS, from Hauran, a chief City of it mentioned by the Prophet Ezekiel chap. 16. 18. A Kingdom spoken of by Moses as the Northern bound of the Half Tribe of Manasses on that side of jordan. Deut. 4. 14. by josuah as the Northern border of the Kingdom of Basar, chap 12. 5 but reckoned as a part of Syria, because held by the Aramites, 2 Sam. 15. 8. A Kingdom though of no great territory, yet of some consideration in the eye of the World; David esteeming the alliance of the Kings hereof of some use unto him; and therefore marrying Maacha, the daughter of Tolmui, King of Gessur, by whom he had Absolom and Tamar. And to this King it was that Absolom fled on the kill of Amnon, abiding here three years as the story telleth us.  
Conterminus to this, or at least not very much distant from it, was the petit Kingdom of Isk-●ob, which sent 12000. men to the aid of the Ammonites against David: and not far off, but more towards Palmyrens, or Aram-Zobah, that of Beth-Rehob, confederate in the same war also with the other Syrians; mention whereof is made in the second book of Sam. chap. 10. ver. 6. Which whether they belonged to Syria, or to those North-parts of Ituraea, is of no great certainty, and as little consequence. For after their greatest and last exploit we hear no more news of them; swallowed up not long after (as it seems) by the Kings of Damascus.  
To return therefore into Gessur, as more certainly within the limits of Palestine, the places of most observation in it were, 1. Gessur, than the chief City of it, and giving name unto the whole. 2. Mahaeath or Macuti as some call it: conceived to be that Maacha mentioned 1 Chron. 19 6. But of this we have already spoken in Comagena. 3. Chauran or Hauran, mentioned by the Prophet Ezekul chap. 47. whence these Northern parts of Palestine were called Auranitis. 4. Chaisar-Hevan, there mentioned by that Prophet also. 5. Us, near the borders of Damascus, the first habitation of Us the Son of Aram and Grandchild of Sem, by whose name so called: supposed to be the founder of Damascus also, and that more probably than that the Country thereabouts should be the Land of Hus, enabled by the dwelling and story of job. 6. Sueta, mentioned by Brochardus, and by some conceived to be the habitation 〈◊〉 surnamed the Shuchite, one of jobs three friends mentioned in that story: but both of him, and job himself and the Land of Hus, we shall speak more at large when we come to Arabia. More certainly remarkable for a Fort of great strength and use for the commanding of the Country; recovered from the 〈◊〉 in the time of Baldwin the second, by digging with incredible labour thorough the very rock upon which it was seated.  
As for the fortunes of this part, the Tribes on that side of jordan were led captive into Assyria, and the Kingdom of Damascus subverted by Tiglah-Phalassar; it followed the fortune of the Babylonian and Per●ian Empires, together with which it came to the Macedonian Kings of the race of Seleucus. In the declining of that house (but the time I find not) it made up the greatest part of the Kingdom of Chalcis; possessed by Ptolemy the Son of Mennaeus, in the beginning of Herod's greatness, who dying, left unto Lysanias his eldest Son, murdered about seven years after by Marc. Antony, on the suggestions of Cleopatra, who presently seized on his estates. But Antony and Cleopatra having left the Stage, Lysanias, a Son of the murdered Prince entereth next upon it, by the permission of Augustus. During whose time Zenodorus Lord of the Town and territory of Paneas, farming his demesnes, and paying a very great Rent for them: not only suffered the Trachonites to play the Robbers, and infest the Merchants of Damascus: but received part of the booty with them. Augustus, on complaint hereof, giveth the whole Country of Trachonites, Batanea, Gaulonitis, and Auranitis, to Herod the Ascalonite, before created King of jewrie: that by his puissance and power, he might quell those Robbers, and reduce the Country into order: Leaving unto Lysanias nothing but the City of Abila (of which he was the natural Lord) whereof and of the adjoining territory, he was afterwards created Tetrarch, by the name of the Tetrarch of Abilene, mentioned Luke 3. Nor did Herod's good fortune end in this. For presently on the death of Zenodorus, not long after following, Augustus gave him also the district of Paneas (of which we shall speak more when we come to Galilee): which with the Countries formerly taken from Lysanias, made up the tetrarchy of Philip his youngest Son, affording him the yearly Revenue of 100 Talents, which make 37500 l. of English money. On Philip's death, his Tetrarchy was by cain's Cal●gula, conferred on Agrippa the Nephew of Herod by his Son Aristobulus, whom he had also dignified with the title of King; after whose death, and the death of Agrippa Minor, who next succeeded, his estates escheated to the Romans, and have since had the same fortune with the rest of Palestine.   

3. GALILEE.  
GALILEE is bounden on the East, with Batanea, and part of the half Tribe of Manasses on that side of jordan; on the West, with the Sea-coast of Phoenicia, on the Mediterranean; on the North, with Anti-Libanus; on the South, with Sam●ria. So called, as some say, from Geliloth, a Phoenician word, signifying as much as borders, because the bordering Country betwixt them and the jews.  
The Country not so large as that on the other side of the River, but far more fertile; naturally fruitful of itself, every where producing excellent fruits without much pains to the Husbandman; and so well cultivated in old times that there was hardly any waste ground to be found in it. Thick set with Cities, Towns, and Villages in the time of josephus, and those so populous and rich that the smallest Village in it is affirmed by that Author, to comprehend no fewer than 15000 Inhabitants. A number beyond all parallel if reported rightly; and not mistaken in the transcripts. The people from their childhood very stout and warlike, not daunted for fear of want or deard of penury: which seconded by their vast and almost incredible numbers, made them experimentally known for a tough piece of employment, when subdued by Titus. And this, together with their zeal to the jewish Religion, makes it more than probable, that there was something in them of the ancient Israelite; and that they were not merely of an Assyrian either stock or spirit, but intermixed with such remainders of the Tribes as had saved themselves either by flying to the Mountains, or hiding themselves in Caves and Defarts, or otherwise were inconsiderable for strength and numbers; in the great transplantation of them made by Salmanassar. And in this I am the more confirmed by their speech or language, which was the same with that of the natural jews, differing no otherwise from it than in tone, and dialect; as our Northern English doth from that which is spoke in London: as appeareth by the communication which the Damosel had with Saint Peter in the High-Priests Hall; in which she plainly understood him, but so that she pronounced him for a Galilean, For had the Transplantation been so universal as some think it was, and that both sick and sound, old and young had been carried away; and none but Colonies of the Assyrians to fill up their places: it must needs be that those Newcomers would have planted their own language there; as the Saxons did on the extirpation of the Bri●●● on this side of the Severn. The like may be affirmed of the other Tribes on this side of jordan (especially Simeon and Dan) which either bordering upon judah, or having their lands and Cities intermingled with it, continued in great numbers in their former dwellings, under the Patronage or subjection or the Kings thereof.  
Divided it was anciently into the Higher, and the Lower. The Higher so called from its situation more amongst the Mountains, had also the name of Galilea Gentium, or Galilee of the Gentiles. And that either because it lay betwixt the Gentiles and the rest of the jews, or because a great part of it had been given by Solomon to the Kings of Tyre. But for what cause soever it was called so first, certain it is, it had this name unto the last; known by it in the time of the Apostles, as appeareth by Saint Matthews Gospel, chap. 4. ver. 15. The Lower Galilee is situate on the South of the other, memorable for the birth and Education of our blessed Saviour, whom julian the Apostata, called, for this cause, in scorn, the Galilean: as for the same, the Disciples Generally had the name of Galileans imposed upon them, till that of Christian, (being a name of their own choosing) did in fine prevail. Both, or the greater part of both, known in the New Testament by the name of Decapolis, or Regio Decapolitant, mentioned Mat. 4. 25. Mark 7. 31. So called from the ten principal Cities of it, that is to say, 1. Caesarea Philippi, 2. Aser, 3. Cedes-Nepthalim, 4. Sephet, 5. Chorazim, 6. Capernaum, 7. Bethsai●●, 8. Jotopata, 9 Tiberias, and 10. Scythopolis. By which account it stretched from the Mediterranean to the head of Jordan, East and West, and from Libanus to the hills of Gilboa, North and South; which might make up a square of forty miles. With reference to the Tribes of Israel, the whole Galilee was so disposed of, that Aser, Nepthalim, and a part of the tribe of Dan, had their habitation in the Higher; Zabulom, and Issachar in the Lower: according to which distribution we will now describe them.  
1. The Tribe of NAPHTHALI, was so called from NAPHTHALI the sixth Son of Jacob, begotten on Bilhah the handmaid of Rachel; of whom at their first muster were found 53400 fight men, and at the second 44540 able to bear arms. The land allotted to them lay on the Westside of the River Jordan, opposite to the Northern parts of Ituraea, where before we left; having on the East, the Tribe of Aser, and that of Zabulun on the South. Within which tract were certain Cities which they never conquered; and one which appertained to the Tribe of Dan: the chief of those which were withheld by the Gentiles, being Chalcis, Abila, Heliopolis, Cities accounted of as belonging to Coele-Syria, where they have been spoken of already.  
That which did appertain to the Tribe of DAN, lay on the North-east part hereof, confronting the most Northern parts of Ituraea, as before was said, where the Danites held one Town of moment, besides many others of less note. And it seemed destined to this Tribe by some old presage, the Eastern fountain of Jordan (which hath its original in this tract) being called Dan, at the time of the defeat which Abraham gave to Cherdor laomer and his Associates, hundreds of years before this Tribe had ever a possession in it. Of which see Gen. 14. v. 14. The Town of moment first called Leshem, by some Writers, Laish: afterwards subject or allied to the Kings of Sidon, and upon strength thereof made good against those of Naphthali; but taken by some Adventurers of the Tribe of Dan. Of whom it is said Josuah 19 47. that finding their own Country too little for them, they went up and fought against Leshem, which they took and called D A N. Accounted after this exploit, the utmost bound Northward of the land of Cantan, the length thereof being measured from Dan in the North, unto Beersheba in the South: remarkable for one of the Golden Calves which was placed here by jeroboam; and for the two spring-heads of jordan, rising near unto it. When conquered by the Romans, it was called Paneas, from a fountain adjoining of that name: which, with the territory about it, after the death of Zenodorus, who held it of the Roman Empire, as before is said, was given by Augustus Caesar unto Herod the Great, and by him at his decease to Philip his youngest Son, with the Tetrarchy of Ituraea and Trachonitis. By him repaired and beautified, it was called Caesarea Philippi, partly to curry favour with Tiberius Caesar, partly to preserve the memory of his own name, and partly to distinguish it from another Caesarea situate on the shores of the Mediterranean, and called Caesarea Palestinae, and being so repaired by him, it was made the Metropolis of that Tetrarchy. Mentioned by that name Mat. 16. 13. when Saint Peter made that confession or acknowledgement of his Lord and Master, That he was CHRIST the Son of the living God. By King Agrippa, who succeeded him in his estates, in honour of the Emperor Ner●, it was called Neronia. But that, and the Adjunct of Philippi, were of no continuance; the Town being called Caesarea Paneaa in the time of Ptolemy, and simply Paneas, as before, in the time of Saint Hierome. Of this Caesarea was tha woman whom our Saviour cured of a bloody Flux, by touching but the hem of his garment: who in a pious gratitude of so great a mercy, erected two Statues in this place, representing CHRIST, and herself kneeling at his feet; remaining here entire till the time of julian the Apostata, by whose command it was cast down, and a Statue of his own set up in the place thereof, miraculously destroyed by a fire from heaven, the City being at that time and long time before, an Episcopal See. Of less note there were, 1. Haleb, and 2. Reccath, both situate in the confines of it. And not far off the strong Town and Castle of 3. Magdala, (the habitation as some say of Mary Magdalen) where the Pharisees desired a sign of our Saviour CHRIST, as is said Mat. 15. 39 and 16. 1. the same, or some place near unto it, being by Saint Mark reporting the same part of the Story, called Dalmanutha. chap. 8. 10. 11. But whether this Castle did anciently belong to these Danites, or to those of Naphthali, or to the Half Tribe of Manasses beyond the River, I am not able to determine.  
Of those which were in the possession of the Tribe of NAPHTHALI, the Cities of most eminent observation were, 1. Hazor, or Azor, by Junius and Tremelius called Chatz●●● the Regal City and Metropolis of all the Canaanites: memorable for the Rendez-vous of 24. Canaam●● Kings in the war with Jo●uah; by whom it was taken notwithstanding, and burnt to ashes. But being afterwards rebuilt it became the Regal Seat of Jabin the King of the Canaanites, who so grievously for the space of 20. years afflicted Israel, till vanquished by Deborah and Barak. Destroyed in that war, and repaired by Solomon, it continued in so good estate in our Saviour's time, that it was then one of the ten Cities of Decapolis: in being still, but known by the name of Antiopta. 2. Capernaum, seated on the River Jordan, where it falleth into the Sea of Galilee, of which Country it was accounted the Metropolis, in the time of our Saviour, with whose presence and preaching often honoured, and one of the principal of the Decapolitans. Some marks of its former greatness it retained when Saint Hierome lived, who confesseth it to be a Town of some good capacity; but so decayed in the time of Bre●denbeck and brochardus, that it consisted but of six poor fisher-men's houses. 3. Hamath, so called from Hama●●● the Son of Canaan, planted in these parts; a Town of such esteem in the elder times, that it was reckoned one of the Gates of the Land of Canaan, and therefore called in Scripture, introitum Hamath, or the entrance of Hamath; as Num. 34. 8. Jos. 13. 5. Judg. 3. 3. etc. Mistaken by Saint Hierome for another of the same name in Syria, by the Greeks, and Romans after them, called Epiphania. And in this I say he is mistaken; Epiphania being placed by Ptolemy two degrees more Eastward than Caesarea Philippi, the most Eastern City of all Galilee; and two degrees more North than that, though the most Northern City of all Palestine. The ground of this mistake we have seen before. Won by the Syrians of Damascus, it was again recovered to the Crown of Israel, by Jeroboam the second the Son of Joas: and after added by the Romans (as were Scythopolis, Pella, Gadara, and some other of the Cities of this tract unto Coele-Syria. 4 Kadesh, to difference it from others of the same name, called Ka●●● Naphthalim, high-seated on the top of an hill, as is said Jos. 20. 7. the King whereof being taken and slain by josuah, it was made one of the Cities of Refuge, and given to the Levites. Most memorable for the birth of Barac, who discomfited Sisera, Lieutenant of the host of Jabin before mentioned, in the infancy of the Jewish State; one of the ten Cities of Decapolis in the time of the Romans; and an Episcopal See in the first ages of Christianity. 5. Riblah, watered with the Fountain of Daphnis, a little Riveret, which hereabouts falleth into Jordan: to which City, as some say, (but I think erroneously) Zedechias the unfortunate King of the jews was brought Prisoner unto Nabuchadnezzar, who caused his Children to be slain before his face, and then put out his eyes. But this I look on as an Error in them that say it, the scene of this sad Tragedy being by josephus laid in Reblatha (or Riblah) a City of Syria, the same which in succeeding times had the name of Antioch. And certainly josephus who for so long was Governor of both the Galilees, cannot be conceived to be so ignorant of the State of this Province, as to transfer that bloody execution to a City of Syria, if it had been acted in this Country. Nor can I think that this Riblah, none of the greatest Towns in the Tribe of Naphthali, should be capable of the Court and train of that mighty Monarch; especially for so long a time, as he is said to have attended in that place the success of his forces then before Jerusalem, and the disposal of the State when the Town was taken. 6. Saphet, another of the Decapolitan Cities, strongly if not impregnably seated; one of the strongest Fortresses of the Western Christians, as it was after their expulsion, of the Turks and Saracens, who from hence wasted and subdued all the neighbouring Country, as far as to the very Sea. The only place, not of this Country only, but of all the East, in which the jews (who possessed a third part of this Town) have any show or shadow of a Commonwealth. 7. Bethsemes, mentioned Ios. 15. 38. made tributary unto those of this Tribe; though otherwise possessed by the Canaanites who held out against them. 8. Carthan, or Kiriaitham situate near the mountain which in following times was called Moas Christi, because much freqvented by our Saviour; who here made choice of his Apostles, as is said Mark. 3. 13 and where he also made that Divine Sermon, recited in the 5, 6, & 7. Chapters of Saint Matthews Gospel. 9 Masoloth, a place of great strength, but forced by Baccludes General of the Armies of the Kings of Syria, in the time of the Maccabees. 10. Cinnereth, a strong City, after called Gennesareth; whence the Lake or Sea of Tiberias, neighbouring near unto it, is sometimes called the Lake of Gennesareth, as Luke 5. 1. etc.  
2. The Tribe of A SER was so called from Aser, the 8. Son of jacob, begotten on Zilphah the handmaid of Leah; of whom at their first muster when they came out of Egypt were found 41500 persons, able to bear Arms, all above 20. years of Age; and at the second muster when they entered the Land of Canaan, 53400 fight men of the new increase. The portion of the land allotted for their habitation was plentiful in wine, oil, and wheat, with great store of Balsam: extending from the coast of Sidon to Ptolemais, 30 miles in length; and from the Mediterranean Eastward to the Tribe of Napththali some twelve miles in breadth. And though they never were of power to reduce the maritime Cities of Ptolemais, Tyre, Sarepta, and Sidon, under their command: yet had they in this narrow compass many beautiful Cities, and Towns of note, which they were quietly possessed of till their subjugation by the Kings of Assyria.  
The principal of those, and others which have since been founded, 1. Aphek, memorable for the great slaughter there made of the Syrians, when besieged by Benhadad: of whom 100000. were slain by the Israe it's under the leading of Ahab, and 27000 killed by the fall of the wall. 2. Gabal●, mentioned by Ptolemy amongst the midland Cities of Phoenicia; but belonging properly to this Tribe; one of those twenty which were offered by S●lomon unto Hiram, and upon his refusal peopled by the Israelites, Fallen to decay, it was afterwards rebuilt and strongly fortified by Herod the Great. 3. Gi●●ala, a Town of great strength and consequence, the birthplace of john or jehochaman, one of the three seditious ●● Jerusalem when besieged by Titus, where he did more mischief than the enemy. Attempting to betray this City to the power of the Romans, he gave the Tyrians an opportunity to be Masters of it, by whom it was burnt unto the ground. But being rebuilt by the Authority of josephus, than Governor of Galilee for the jews, it was afterwards yielded to Titus upon composition. 4. Cana, for distinction sake called Cana-Ma or, to difference it from another of that name in the Lower Galilee, assumed for the dwelling of that woman, whose daughter Christ delivered of an evil Spirit: called by Saint Matthew, a woman of Canaan, cap. 15. a Syro-Phoenician by Saint Mark chap. 7. the Syro-Phoenicians of this Tract, being originally of the race of Canaan, as was said before. 5. Het●lan, or Ch●●●lan, the furthest City of the North; as 6. Messal, or Masheal, to the South, of the Tribe of Aser. Of later date there are. 7. Thoron, a strong piece built by the Christians on the hills near Tyre, to ●●●der the excursions of the Turks, when they held that City. Situate in a pleasant and fruitful Soil, of great importance in the wars of the Holy Land, and giving name to the noble family of the Lords of Thor●●: one of which being Constable to King Baldwin the third, lieth buried in the Chapel adjoining to it, a curious piece of workmanship, and Dedicated by the name of the blessed Virgin. 8. Belfort, so named from the strength and beauty of it; seated on the high grounds near the River Naar; and memorable for the great repulse which Saladine the Victorious King of the Turks received before it; being forced to raise his siege with dishonour and loss, on the coming of the Christian Armies. Some other Forts here are of the same erection, as 9 Montfort, and 10. Mount-Royall (or Castrum Regium) belonging to the Dutch Knights (of whom more hereafter) and by them valiantly defended against the Infidels.  
3. The Tribe of ZABULON, was so called from Zabulon the tenth son of Jacob by his wife Leah: of whom there mustered near Mount Sinai, 57400 able men; and 65000. at their second muster when they came into Canaan. Their territory lay on the South of Aser and Nephthalim, and the North of Zabulon, extending from the Lake of Tiberias to the Mediterranean.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Jokneham, the King whereof was slain by Josuah, and the City given unto the Levites. 2. Zabulon, or the City of men, a Sately and magnificent City, till burnt to the ground by Cestius, a Roman Precedent. 3. Cana-Minor, so called to difference it from the other in the Tribe of Aser, the birthplace of Nathaneel, and as some say of Simon Zelotes: memorable for the marriage at which our Saviour wrought his first miracle, of turning water into wine. Called in Saint John's Gospel Cana of Galilee. 4. Bersabe, standing in the border betwixt both Galilees, and therefore strongly fortified by Josephus against the Romans. 5. Dothan, where joseph found his brethren as they fed their flocks; and where the Prophet Elisha struck blind the Syrians, who besieged him in it. 6. Bethsaida, situate on the Sea of Galilee, one of the ten Cities of Decapolis, the birthplace of Peter, Andrew, and Philip, but most renowned for the miracles and preaching of our Lord and Saviour. 7. Nazareth, now a small village, seated in a vale betwixt two hills, not far from Ptolema●● or Acon; upon one of which two hills it was formerly built, where still are to be seen the ruins of many Churches, here founded by the Christians: it being in the flourishing times of Christianity an Arch-Bishops See. Of great esteem, for being, if not the birthplace, yet the habitation of the Virgin Mary, who was here saluted with those joyful tidings, by an Angnl, as she sat in her chamber. Of which chamber it is said in the Popish legends, that it was after the Virgin's death had in great reverence by the Christians, and remained in this Town, till the Holy Land was subdued by the Turks and Saracens, Anno 1291. Then most miraculously transported into Scalvonia; but that place being unworthy of the Virgins Divine presence, it was by the Angels carried over into the Sea-coast of Italy, Anno 1294. That place also being infested with thiefs and pirates, the Angels removed it to the little village of Loretto, where her miracles were quickly divulged: insomuch that Paul the 2. built a most stately Church over this Chamber, and Xistus the fifth made the Village a City. And thus we have the beginning of our famous Lady of Leretto. Here did our blessed Saviour spend a great part of his life before his Baptism; from whence both he and his Disciples had for many years the name of Nazarites. 8. jotopata, strongly seated on the top of a Mountain, near the Lake of Gtnnesareth, fortified by josephus in the war with the Romans, but after a long siege taken by Vespasian, and in it josephus the Historian, chief Governor of the City, and of both the Galilees. 9 Tiberias, raised out of the ground by Herod the Tetrarch, and named thus in honour of Tiberius Caesar. Situate in a fruitful soil, on the edge of the Lake, which afterwards took the name of the Lake or Sea of Tiberias: this City being held to be the greatest of the Lower Galilee, and the Metropolis of the Decapolitan Region. In this City it was that our Saviour CHRIST called Saint Matthew from the receipts of the Customhouse; and near unto it that he raised the daughter of Jairus. 10. Bethulia, more within the land, seated on an high hill, and of very great strength, as appears by the story of Judith and Holofernes. 11. japha, a place of like strength, but forced by Titus, who in the fury of the storm slew in it above 15000. persons, and carried away with him 2000 Prisoners. 12. Sephoris or Sipphora, the habitation of joachim and Anna, the Parents of the blessed Virgin: fortified with strong walls by Herod the Tetrarch, who made it his Regal seat for the Lower Galilee. Before that time, it had been made by Gabinius, one of the five juridical Resorts for the Palestinians; after that, notwithout great difficulty forced by Vespasian; and is now nothing but a Castle known by The name of Zaphet, or Saffet; the ordinary Residence for the most part of the Turkish Sanziack who hath the Government of this Province, and lately, if not still, of the Emirs of Sidon, Faccardine the late Emir having been made the Sanziack of it, before his falling off from the Turks. Not far off is Mount Tabor, famous for the transfiguration of our Saviour; for a sumptuous Chapel built on the top of the hill in memory of it, by the Empress Helen, mother of Constantine the Great, and for the Fountain of the brook Cheson, which presently divided into two streams, runneth Eastward with the one to the Sea of Tiberias, and Westward with the other to the Mediterranean.  
4. The Tribe of ISSACHAR is so called from Issachar the ninth son of Jacob, by his wife Le●●, of whom were found at the first muster 54400 fight men, and 64300 at the second muster. Their l●t, in the partition of the land amongst the Tribes, fell betwixt Zabulon, and the half Tribe of Manlessly on this side Jordan, North and South; extending from that River to the Midland Sea. A territory not so well replenished with strong and eminent Cities, as was that before; nor yielding so much matter of observation in the course of business.  
Those of most note in it, 1. Tarichaea, on the side of the Lake, about eight miles from Tiberias, or great strength both by Art and Nature, as witnessed the notable resistance which Vespasion found when he besieged it: by whom taken with great difficulty and incredible slaughter. 2. C●shion, a City of the Levites. 3. Remeth, called also farmuth, another City of the Levites, where the hills of Gilboa take beginning, and thence range as far as the Mediterranean Westward, and the City of J●zre●l towards the East. 4. En-hadda, near which Saul being discomfited by the Philistims, slew himself for grief, or else for fear of falling into the hands of those merciless Enemies, against whom he had so often returned victorious. 5. Naim, on the banks of the River Chison, where CHRIST raised to life the Widow's Son. 6. Hapharaim, or Aphraim, on the banks of the same River also. 7. Endor, of chief note for the Witch with whom Saul consulted; and the discomfiture of the Midianites by Gede●m, who perished at Endor, and became as the Dung of the Earth, saith the Royal Psalmist. 8. Dabarath, one of the Cities of refuge. 9 Arbela, not far from the Cave of the two thiefs which so greatly infested Galilee in the time of Herod. And 10. of a later date the Castle of Pilgrims (Castrum Peregrinorum in Latin Writers) built by Raymond Earl of Tholouse, and after fortified by the Templars, for the security of such as travelled to the Holy Land: and for long time the Magazine or Storehouse of the Western Christians; now called Tortora. Situate on the shores of the Mediterranean near a spacious bay; on the North-side whereof Mount Carmel, described already.  
As for those Galileans which succeeded in the place of these Tribes, they were for the most part originally such as were sent hither by Salmanassar to inhabit there, when the Israelites were led away into endless thraldom; but intermixed with some Remainders of the ten Tribes, as was said before. And yet as if they had been wholly of the same extraction with the rest of the Samaritan Nations, they were as much despised by the Jews (as witnesseth that scornful byword, Can there any good come out of Galilee?) as the others were: though these as Orthedox in Religion as the Jews themselves. In which so zealously affected, that neither threats nor force could make them offer sacrifice for the health of the Roman Emperors, whom they looked on as the Enemies of their Law and liberty. Brought under the command of the Kings of jewry by the Maccabaeans, and with the rest of that Kingdom bestowed on Herod by the Romans. Left by him at his death to Herod, surnamed Antipas, the second of his Sons then living, with the title of Tetrarch, which he enjoyed till the death of our Saviour, and on his deprivation (being banished to Lions in France by the Emperor Caligula) bestowed upon Agrippa his brother's Son, the first King of the jews so named. Under him and his Son Agrippa the second, it continued till the general revolt of the Jewish Nation: Subjected by the sword of Titus to the power of the Romans, it hath since followed the same fortune with the rest of Palestine.   

4. SAMARIA.  
SAMARIA is bounded on the East with the River Jordan; on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea; on the North, with Galilee; and on the South, with judaea. So called from Samaria, the chief City of it, of which more hereafter.  
The Country interchangeably composed of fields and mountains, excellent good for tillage, and full of trees, yielding variety of fruits; watered both with the dew of heaven, and many fresh springs which the Earth affordeth it, occasioning thereby abundance of grass, and consequently of Milch-beasts exceeding plenty. Heretofore very wealthy, and no less populous, but now famed for neither.  
The people for the most part were originally the descendants of those Assyrians whom Salmanassar sent hither to possess the dwellings of the captive Israelites. Gentiles at first, till better instructed by the Lions whom God sent amongst them, and after by the Priests sent hither by the Kings of Assyria, they entertained the five Books of Moses, and out of them learned the manner of the God of the Land, 2 Kin. 17 Further than this they would not go, rejecting all the rest of the sacred Canon; and no strict observers of this neither. And though at first they so embraced the worship of God, as that they still adhered to the gods of the Nations, where before they dwelled, as Nergal, Ashimah, Nibbar, Tartak, and the rest of that rabble, mentioned 2 Kings 17. yet they were soon taken off from those impieties, and became zealous in the worship of one only God, erroneous chiefly in the place which was destined to it. The wicked policy of jeroboam the Son of Nebat, was as natural to them, as if they could not have possessed his estates without it: and therefore would not suffer their people to go up to H●rusalem to worship, as the Law required. More pious yet in this than their Predecessors, that they erected no Golden Calves in Dan, and Bethel, or any other parts of their Dominions: though to divert the people from the Temple of God, they would have a Temple of their own. Mount Garizim, and the Temple there (of which more anon) as sacred unto them, as that of Solomon to the jews: Schismaticat enough in this, but not idolatrous and Schismatical, as the others were; yet so conceited of themselves, and their own perfections, that they imagined themselves defiled by any company but their own. If therefore they had visited any of their neighbour nations, at their return they used to sprinkle themselves with urine: but if by negligence, or the necessity of business, they had touched any not of their own Sect, they drenched themselves, clothes and all, in the next fountain. But in this the jews cried quittance with them, not so much as eating or drinking with them, nor having with them any kind of commerce or dealing, as appeareth john 4. 9 but loading them, on the other side, with all the bitterness. of reproach and hatred. There are two manner of people (saith the Son of Sirach) which mine heart abhorreth, 〈◊〉 the third is no people: they that sit on the Mountains of Samaria; the Philistims, and the foolish people that dwell as Sichem Ec●ius. 50. And this continued to the times of our blessed Saviour; whom when the Jews endeavoured to reproach with their heaviest calumnies, they could find out none so great as to say he was a Samaritan, (which they thought came all to one) a man that had converse with Devils and familiar spirits.  
Of these there were some Sects also as amongst the Jews, 1. the Dositheans, so called from D●su●eus or Dosth●●, supposed to be the first Priest who was sent thither by the Kings of Assyria: agreeing with the Jews in Circumcision, and the Sabbath, and the doctrine of the Resurrection (in which last they differed from the common Samaritan who was a Saducee in that point) but differing from them in some points of as signal consequence. For they rejected the writings of all the Prophets, as not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, inspired by the Holy Ghost; they eat of nothing that had life, like the Pythagoreans; abstained from marriage, like the Essenes'; and in the point of Sabbath-keeping out went the Pharisees: it being resolved upon amongst them, that in what posture soever a man was found on the Sabbath-day-morning, in the same he was to continue without alteration the whole day after. 2. The Sebvians, so called from Sebva or Sebviah one of the Companions of that Dosthai: who though they kept all the public festivals, as the Jews and the other Samaritans did, yet they kept them not at the same time; transferring the P●sseover to August, the Pentecost to Autumn, and the feast of Tabernacles to the time of the Passeov●r; not suffered for that cause to worship in the Temple of Garizim. 3. The Gortheni, who kept the same Festivals, and observed the same times of those Solemnities, as the Law required; but kept only one of the seven days of those great Festivals, and laid by the rest, as days of ordinary labour. In other points not differing from the other Samaritans, who though at first possessed of all the land belonging to the ten Tribes of Israel, were yet reduced at last to a narrower compass: shut up betwixt Galilee and Judaea, within the ancient territories of the Tribe of Ephraim, and the other half Tribe of Manasses on this side of the water.  
1. The half Tribe of MANASSES on this side of Jordan was situate betwixt Issachar on the North, and the Tribe of Ephraim on the South, extending from the Mediterranean to the banks of that River. In which the places of most consequence and consideration, 1. Beth-san, environed almost with the land of Issachar, situate near the banks of Jordan, where it beginneth again to straighten and be like itself, having been almost lost in the Sea of Galilee: first called Nysa, and so called by Bacchus or Liber Pater the founder of it, in memory of his Nurse there buried: but the children of Manasses not being able to expel the natives out of it, as in other places, gave it the name of Beth-san, or the house of an Enemy. Afterwards when the Scythians invaded those parts of Asia, and compelled some of the Jews to serve them against the rest (whom notwithstanding their good service they put all to the sword) they new-built this City: called therefore by the Grecians, Scythopol●s, or the City of Scythians; and by them reckoned as a City of ●oele-Syria. Memorable in the old Testament for the hanging of the dead bodies of Saul and his sons on the walls hereof, by the barbarous Philistims; in the time of our Saviour for being the greatest of all the Decapolitan Region; as afterwards in the flourishing times of Christianity, for being the See of an Archbishop: now nothing but a desolate village, or an heap of rubbish, out of which many goodly Pillars, and other pieces of excellent Marble are often digged. 2. Terzah, used by the Kings of Israel for their Regal Seat; till the building of Samaria, and the removal of it thither. 3. A●rabata, the territory whereof called Acrabatena, was after made one of the ten Toparchies of Jude●. 4. Thebes, not far from Samaria, where the Bastard Abimelech was wounded with a stone which a woman threw at him from the wall; and perceiving his death to be drawing on, commanded his Page to slay him, that it might not be said he perished by the hands of a woman. 5. Ephra, or Hophr●, in which Gideon dwelled: near whereunto there stood an Altar, consecrated to Baal, defaced by Gideon; and not far off the fatal stone on which Abimelech slew 70 of his Brethren. An heathenish cruelty, and at this day practised by the Turks. 6. Asophon, an ignoble village, made famous only for the great and notable defeat which Ptolemy Lathurus here gave to Alexander the King of the Jews: which victory he used with so great barbarity, that he slew all the Women as he passed along, and caused young children to be sod in Cauldrons. 7, Bezek, the City of the bloody Tyrant Adon●Bezek, whose story (touched upon before) see at large in Judges chap. 1. By Josephus it is called Bala, and seemeth to be the place in which Saul assembled the chief strength of Israel and Judah, to the number of 330000. men, for the relief of jabesh Gilead then distressed by the Ammonites. 8. jezreel, the Royal City of Ahab and the Kings of his race, situate at the foot of the Mountains of Gilboa; So near unto the Borders of Issachar, that some have placed it in that Tribe. Memorable in sacred story for the stoning of Naboth by the procurement of jezabel; and the breaking of jezabels' neck by command of jehu. A City which gave name to the plains adjoining, called the valley or Plain● of jezreel, (but by the name of Campus Magnus in the book of Maccabees; lib. 1. cap. 12.) extending from S●●thopolis to the Mediterranean: famous for the great and many battles which have been fought in it, as namely of Gideon against the M●dianites, of Sa●l against the Philistims, of Ahah against the Sy●●●n, of Jehu against jehoram, and finally of the Christians against the Saracens. 9 Megiddo, unfortunately observable for the death of the good King josiah, slain hereabouts in a battle against Phar●oh Ne●●, King of Egypt; and before that of Ahaziah King of judah, who received his death-wound at Gaber, a Town adjoining, when pursued by jehu. 11. Dora, or Dor, as the Scriptures call it, on the Moditerranian, not far from the Castle of Pilgrims in the tribe of Issachar; a very strong and powerful City, and therefore chose by Try hon for his City of Refuge, who having first treacher●sly taken, and barbarously murdered jonathan the Maccabaean, after he had received 200 talents for his ransom, and no less villanously slain Antiochus the sixth of Syria, his Lord and Master, whom he succeeded in his throne; was by Antiochus the seventh, with an Army of 120000 foot, and 8000 horse, besieged in this City, and most deservedly put to death. 12. Caesarea, anciently called the Tower of Siraton, from Stra●●● a King of the Zidonians, new built by Herod, and by him not only beautified with a large Theatre and Amphitheatre, both of polished Marble, but with a fair and capacious haven, which with incredible charge and pains he forced out of the Sea. And having in twelve years brought it to perfection, in honour of Drusus Caesar, Son-in-law of Augustus, he caused one of the chief Towers thereof to be called D●●sus, the City itself to be called Caesarea Palestinae. In this City was Cornelius baptised by St. Peter; here did St. Paul plead in defence of Christianity, before Festus then the Roman Precedent; and finally, here Herod Agrippa was smitten by an Angel, and devoured by worms, after his Rhetorical Oration, which his Parasites called the voice of God and not of man. The Metropolis of all Palestine, when one Province only; as afterwards of Palestina Prima, when by Constantine, or some of his Successors, cantoned into three: the first Bishop hereof being said to be that Cornelius whom Saint Peter here initiated in the faith of CHRIST. 13. Antipatris, another City of Herod's building, in the place where Kapharsalama, mentioned 1 Maccab. 7. 31. had sometimes stood; who in honour of his Father Antipater gave it this new name. Near hereunto did judas Maccabaeus overthrew a part of Nicanors Army; and not far off the Mountain where Abdia, the Steward of Ahab, hid the hundred Prophets, whom he preserved against the fury of jezabel: finally to this City it was that S. Paul was conveyed by the command of Lysias, to save him from the jews who lay in wait to destroy him.  
2. The Tribe of EPHRAIM was so called from Ephraim the second and youngest son of Joseph; of whom were mustered in the Deserts 45000 fight men, and 32500 in the Land of Canaan: where their lot fell betwixt this half Tribe of Manasses, on the North; and the Tribes of Dan and Benjamin, upon the South; extending from the River Jordan to the Mediterranean.  
Places of most consideration, 1. S●r●n, on the Mediterranean, to the South of Antipuris, mentioned Acts 9 35. and giving name unto that fruitful valley, which reacheth from Caesarea Palestinae, as far as Joppa. 2. Lydda, upon the same shores, where Saint Peter (virtute Christi non sua) cured Aeneas of the Palsy. By the Gentiles it was called D●ospolis, or the City of Jupiter; but by the Christians in the time of the holy wars, it had the name of the St. George's: partly from a Magnificent Temple which the Emperor Justinian there errected to the honour of that blessed Martyr; but principally from an opinion which they had amongst them, that he suffered martyrdom in that place. An opinion founded on mistakes, first of a Ceno●aphium, or an empty Monument, errected in this City to preserve his memory, for the grave in which he was interred; the other, in taking the word Passio, used in the Mar●●yrologies, for the place of his suffering, which is meant only of the story or celebration. But howsoever they entitled it by the name of Saint Georges, as was said before, and made it on that account also an Episcopal See. 3. Ramatha, or A●amathea, a City of the Levites, supposed to be the dwelling of Joseph, who begged of Pilate the body of CHRIST. 4. Helon or A●alon, a City of the Levites also. 5. Themnath-Chares, given by the Israelites to josuah, who enlarged the same, and made it a strong and goodly City; honoured with the sepulchre of that brave Commander, one of the nine Worthies of the World; and afterwards made one of the Prefectures of Judaea, by the name of Thamnitica. 6. Adasa, or Adars●, where judas Maccabaeus with 3000 jews overthrew the Army of Nicanor. 7. Ie●eti called otherwise Pelethi, which gave name and birth unto the P●lethites, part of David's guard, under the governance of Benaiah. 8. Silo, situate on the top of a lofty mountain; the receptacle of the Ark, till taken and carried thence by the Philistims. 9 Michmas, the habitation of Jonathan one of the Maccabaean Brethren, situate in the middle way from Samaria to Jerusalem, now called Byra. 10. N●●oth, where Saul prophesied. 11. Bethoron, a City of the Levites, beautified by Solomon, but made more famous by the great and notable overthrow which Judas Maccabaeus here gave to Lysias. 12. Pirhatlon, on the Mountain Amale●, the City of Abdon the Judge of Israel. 13. Si●he●. called also Sichor, the habitation in the old times of Sichem the father of that Hamor who deflowered D●na the daughter of Jacob; the City for that cause destroyed by Simeon and Levi, repaired again, and afterward by Abimelech leveled with the ground; a third time re-edified by jeroboam the Son of N●ba●, and a third time ruined by the Kings of Damascus; yet notwithstanding these blows it was of good esteem in the time of our Saviour, who abode in it two days, and converted many. Memorable for Jacob's Well which was very near it, more for its neighbourhood to Mount Garizam, where the blessings were to be read to the people (of which see Deut. 11. 27. and Ios. 8. 23.) and where afterwards was built a magnificent Temple for the use of the Samaritan Nation; at the cost and charge of S●●b●●● a great Prince amongst them. Who having married his Daughter to Manasses, brother of jaddus the Priest of the jews; and fearing he would put her away, to avoid the sentence of excommunication, which he was involved in for that match, promised him, that if he would retain her, he would build a Tample answerable unto that of Jerusalem, and make him the Hi●●h Priest thereof, which was do●e accordingly. But this Temple had not stood above 200 hundred years, when destroyed by Hyro●●●● the M●cabae●n: the place remaining notwithstanding a place of worship, as appeareth joh. 4. 20 As for the City of Sichem or Sichor, it was by the Grecians called Ne●●olis, afterwards made a Colony by the Emperor Vespasian, who caused it to be called Fl●●●● Caesarea; of which Colony was that renowned justin Martyr. 14. Samaria, the Metropolis of the Kingdom of Israel, founded by Omri one of the Kings thereof, on the top of the Mountain Samrom, (which overlooketh all the bottom as far as the Se-coast) whence it had the name. A stately and magnificent City, conjectured by Brochardus, who had traced the ancient ruins of it, to be bigger than Jerusalem. Destroyed by the Assyrians when they carried away the Ten Tribes, but afterwards repaired again, and again, beaten to the ground by the Sons of Hyranus abovementioned. But Herod the Great, who was pleased with the situation of it, did a-again re-edify it, in more stately manner than before, as appeareth by the great store of goodly Marble pillars, and other carved stones, in great abundance found amongst the rubbish: and having rebuilt it to has mind, enclosed it with a strong wall, and beautified it with a goodly Temple; in honour of Augustus Caesar, whom the Greeks call Sebastos, he caused it to be called Sebaste. Memorable after this new erection for the Sepulchre of john Baptist, and being made the Metropolis of Palestin; Secund●, (by consequence an Arch-Bihops See), now nothing but a few Cottages filled with Grecian Monks.  
Nor were the Samaritans themselves (so called from this their principal City) less subject to the vicissitudes and change of fortune, than the City was. Descended for the most part from the Assyians, and such other Nations, as were sent thither to fill up the empty places of the Captive Tribes: but called Cu●●●ans by the Jews, either because most of them were of Cuth, a Region of Persia, as Josephus telleth us, which is now called Chuzestan: or else by way of scorn, for Chusites, as being of the posterity of the accursed Cham, by Chus his son. Having embraced the Law of Moses, they began to think better of the Jews than the other Nations, but fitted their affections to the change of times: it being the observation of the said josephus, that as often as the jews were in any prosperity, than they called them Cousins, and would be of the same Nation with them; but when their fortunes were on the declining hand, than they were strangers which came thither out of foreign Nations, and no kin at all. Nor doth he wrong them in that Character. For when Alexander the Great had granted the jews a release of the seventh years tribute, and the Samaritans desiring the like exemption, pleaded for themselves 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. that they indeed were very Hebrews, though it pleased the Sidonians to call them Sichemites. But when Antiochus raged against them with fire and sword, the Samaritans sent letters to him disclaiming all relation to those of judah, and challenging their descent from the Medes and Persians. Nor were they content only to disclaim all kindred with the jews in the times of trouble, when any persecution. rose against them for the Law of God; but did them also all ill offices, and joined with their Enemies to their destruction: especially after the jews had refused to admit of their assistance, in the re-building of the Temple; which after that they hindered with great malice, and no less perverseness. But the fortune of the jews did at last prevail, the whole Nation being subdued by Hyrcanus the Maccabaean, who destroyed their Schismatical temple also, and leveled Samaria itself to the very ground. After this subject to the jews, who possessed themselves of most of their Cities, and contracted them into a narrower compass than they were in formerly: but still so hated and contemned, that nothing was able to appease that inveterate malice, which they had conceived, till both Nations were extirpated in the time of Adrian, and made to seek their dwellings in other Countries. Made afterwards a Province of the Roman Empire, by the name of Palestina Secunda: successively subject with the rest to the Persians, Saracens, and Turks, who do now possess it.   

JUDAEA.  
JUDAEA is bounded on the East, with the Dead Sea, and the River jordan; on the West, with the Mediterranean; on the North, with Samaria; and on the South, with Idumaea. So called from the jews, or People of the Tribe of judah, who after their return from the Captivity of Babylon, communicated the name of jew unto all the Nation; as they did that of judaea to this part of the Country.  
The Soil of the same nature with that of Samaria, before described; but that it is more swelled with hills, and more stored with Rivers, though of no great fame. And therefore we shall say no more as to the general character and description of it; but look on the particular parts as it stood divided betwixt the Philistims, the Tribes of Dan, Simeon, Judah, and Benjamin.  
And first, the PHILISTIMS commanded all the Seacoasts from the South of Phoenicia, to the North of Idumaea, or from the Castle of Pilgrims, to the City of Gaza, taking both into the account. But Joppa, and all the Towns on the North of that being taken in by the Israelites, they held no more than six Towns of any importance, with the Countries and territories adjoining to them: but those so populous and strong, that by their own power, and the assistance of the Edomites and the rest of their neighbours, not well affected to the Tribes, they kept them unto harder terms, and lay more heavy on them than all the Canaanites together; as will appear when we sum up the story and successes of their affairs.  
In the mean time let us survey the Country which was holden by them, notwithstanding all that could be done against them by the Kings of Israel: and therein we shall find worth our observation, 1. Geth, or Gath, the birthplace of the huge Giant Goliath, slain by David; as also of many others of the like Gigantine proportion, slain by David's worthies. Destroyed by David, or rather slighted and dismantled, it was rebuilt by Reboam the son of Solomon; but again razed by Ozias King of Judah, who found the Philistims there garisoned but ill neighbours to him; and finally laid waist by Hazael the King of Syria. Not much regarded after that, though it kept the name of Gath in Saint Hieromes time; till in these last Ages Fulk the King of Jerusalem created there a new Castle from the ancient ruins. From hence as I conceive, the Idol Dagon, so much worshipped by these Philistims, was by the Syrians and Phanician called Ater-Gatis; and not from Gatis a Syrian Queen, as is said by many. 2. A●caror, on the South of Gath, of great wealth and power, and one that held out notably against the Danites and Judaeans: much spoke of in the holy Scriptures, but for nothing more than their Idolatrous worship of bel-zebub, that is to say the Lord of Flies: so called by the Iew●, either in contempt of the Idolatries committed to him, or because of that great multitude of flies which attended his sacrifices, whereof some say, the Temple of Jerusalem was wholly free. But whatsoever he was, or for what cause so named, certain it is that he was here had in especial honour, and therefore called in Scripture the God of Accaron: and hither Azahtah the King of Israel sent his messenger to inquire of this Idol concerning his health. 3. Ashdod (by the Grecians called Azotus) memorable in holy writ for the Temple of D●gon, into which the Ark of the Lord was brought; that Idol falling down before it, as not able to stand upright when the Ark so near. Near to this Town was judas Maccabeus overcome and slain by Bacchides, Lieutenant to Demetrius the King of Syria; and not long after the Town itself was taken by joniathan the brother of judas, who put the Citizens to the sword, and burned all such as fled into the Temple of Dagon, together with the very Idol, consumed in the same fire with the Idolaters. Rebuilt by Gabinius, a Roman General, in the times of Christianity it was made an Episcopal See; and continued a fair village till the days of Saint Hierom. 4. Ascalon, on the Seaside also, said to be built by Ascalus a noble Lydian, employed by his King in a war against the Syrians; but this very uncertain. One of the chief and strongest Cities of the Philistims, of great note amongst the Gentiles for a Temple dedicated to Dirceto the mother of Semiramis, here worshipped in the form of a Mermaid: and for another of Apollo, wherein Herod the father of Antipater, and Grandfather of Herod the Great (from his birth in this City called Herod the Ascalonite) is said to have served as the Priest. It had in the first times of Christianity an Episcopal See; and in the course of the holy wars was beautified with a new wall and many fair buildings by King Richard the first. 5. Gaza, more within the land, on the River Besor; a fair and strong Town, formerly called Assa, from whence perhaps the name of Gaza was derived by the Heathens; or else it was so called by the Persians, in regard that Cambyses here laid up the treasure which he had provided for the war of Egypt; the word Gaza in the Persian language signifying treasures. Of which Cambyses it is said by Pomponius Mel●, cum armis Aegyptum peteret huc belli opes et pecuniam in vehi curavi●. After which it was made the Receipt or Treasury in which the Persians laid the tributes of the Western Provinces; whence all Riches had in time the name of Gazae. Once Caleb took it, but not able to hold it against the Philistines, he again deserted it. Destroyed by Alexander the Great, and rebuilt again it made notable resistance against the Maccabees, till at last forced by Simon the brother of Judas, who liked the place so well that he intended to have made it his place of residence; not so decayed in length of time, but that it was a goodly City in the days of Brochardus. And is still the best of all this coast, built on an hill encompassed with rich and pleasant valleys; the building low and mean as in other places; but some of them adorned with pillars of fair Parian marble, digged out of the remaining ruins. 6. Maioma, the Port Town of Gaza, but made a City of itself by Constantine, by whom called Constantia: but restored again by Julian unto those of Gaza, and by him commanded to be called Gaza Mari●ma.  
These were the chief places holden by the Philistims, a strong and Giantlike race of men, such as the Scripture call by the name of Anak, or the Sons of Anak. Originally descended from Casluhim, and Copthorim, of the race of Mizraim the sons of Cham: as appeareth both by the common consent of ancient Writers, and plain Texts of Scripture, Jerem. 47. 4. and Amos 9 7. These being settled first in the borders of Egypt and Idumaea, where the Casluhim gave name unto the Province of Casiotis, and the Mountain Casius; proceeded North-wards and subdued the Avim, a Canaanish people, planting themselves in their habitations, as is said expressly Deut. 2. 23. Here Abraham found them in his time, and here they were when Israea went down to Gezar. Governed at first by one King, whom they called always by the name of Abimelech, as the Egyptians theirs by the name of Pharaoh; sometimes by five, according to the number of their principal Cities; but still united in the times of approaching dangers. Too strong to be subdued by the Tribes of Israel, they made head against them, and mastered them at several times for above 150. years, Tyrannising over them, till broken by Samson, and for a time kept off by Samuel. Recovering again, they vanquished the Israelites in the time of Saul, whom they discomfited, and hanged his dead body barbarously on the walls of Bethsan. But David, a more fortunate Prince, overthew them in many set battles, and at length took the Town of Gath, one of the strongest Towns they had: and by that means so weakened them that they durst not stir all the time of David, nor a long while after. Beginning to be troublesome in the days of Ozias King of Judah, they were warred on by him, their army overthrown, Ita and Amnia, two of their strong Forts, took and razed; and the Town of Gath again dismantled. In the time of the Idolatrous Achaz, associating with the Edomites, (who evermore attended the destruction of Judah) they broke out again, took Bethsemes, Aialon, Timnah, and some other Towns, carried away many Prisoners, and flew much people. But the good King Eze●●ah made them pay dear for it, taking from them the greatest part of their Country, betwixt Gath and Gaza Which notwithstanding, they recovered to so great esteem that the whole Country had from them the name of Palestine. But broken by degrees by the Maccabaeans, they lost both their power and reputation, passing in common estimate as a part of ●ewry; the fortunes of which it followed for thetimes succeeding.  
2. The Tribe of DAN, so called from Dan the fifth son of jacob, by Bilhah the handmaid of Rache, of whom were mustered at Mount Sinai 62700. fight men; and 66400. at the second muster in the Land of Canaan; where their lot fell betwixt Ephraim on the North, Simeon on the South, the Tribe of BENIAMEN on the East, and the Mediterranean on the West.  
Places of most note in it, 1. joppa (now called jaffa) once a famous Mart-Town, and the only Haven to judaea in foregoing times: the Town, where jonah took ship to fly unto Tarshiesh; where Peter raised Dorcas from death to life, and where he lying in the house of one Simon a Tanner, was in a vision taught the conversion of the Gentiles. This City they report to have been built before the floudn: here they say reigned Cepheus, whose daughter Andromeda was by Perseus delivered from a Sea-monster, some of whose bones the people use to show to strangers; even till the flourishing of the Romans. Just as our Citizens of Coventry and Warwick, show the bones of the Dun-Cow of Dunsmear heath, and the bones of I know not what Giant, slain by Guy Earl of Warwick. In the time of the Maccabees it was garrisoned by the Syrians, who having in the Port a Fleet of good power and strength, invited 200 of the chief Citizens to go aboard with them, and there drowned them all: for which their fleet was fired by judas, and such as did escape the fire fell upon his sword. Twice taken by the Romans, and the second time burnt unto the ground: new walled, and fortified with Towers, by King Lewis of France, in the year 1250, the Holy Wars then drawing to their final end. Now nothing standing of it but two little Turrets where are certain Harquebuses for defence of the Haven; none of the best, defended from the South and West winds with eminent Rocks, but exposed to the fury of the North, which makes it more unsafe than the open Seas, when enraged by Tempests. Not much frequented by the Merchant, who trade here but for Cottons only; and hold their Factory not far off in a Town called 2. Rama, by the Moors called Ramula, situate in a sandy plain on the rising of a little hill; built of freestone, but the streets thereof narrow, and the houses contemptible. More beautiful in the ruins of some Christian Churches, and a Monastery built by Philip the Good of Burgundy, where the house of Nicod muss stood, than in any of the remaining edifices. 3. jamnia, near joppa, where judas burned the rest of the Syrian Fleet, the flame whereof was seen to Jerusalem, 240 furlongs off; mentioned by Ptolemy, and in the times of Christianity an Episcopal S●e; now not discernible in the ruins. 4. Cedar, or Cedron, fortified against the jews by Cendebaeus one of the Lieutenants of Antiochus, who hereabouts was overthrown by the Maccabees. 5. Modin, a small Town, but honoured with the birth and sepulchre of those Maccabaeans; the Sepulchre being seven Marble Pillars of so great an height, that they served as a mark for Seamen. 6. Gibbethon, in the Country called Makats, a City of the Levites, but afterwards possessed by the Philistims; at the sieige whereof Nadab, the Son of jeroboam King of Israel, was slain by Baasha, who succeeded; and Omri chosen King on the death of Zimri. 7. Cariathi rim, where the Ark of the Lord was kept for 20 years in the house of Aminadab; that is to say, from the sending it home by the Philistims, till brought to Jerusalem by David. 8. Bethsemes, to which the A●● was brought by a yoke of Kine, turned loose by the Philistims: for irreverent looking into which there were slain by the immediate hand of God, no fewer than 50070 persons of this City. 9 Tsarah, near which is a fountain, called the Fountain of Ethiopia, because Philip there baptised the Ethiopian Eunuch. 10. Caspin, taken with great slaughter by judas Maccabaeus. 11. Lachis, remarkable for the death of Amaziah King of judah. 12. Aialon, a City of the Levites also, in the valley whereof the Moon is said to have stood still at the prayers of josuah, as the Sun did over the City of Gibeon: the motion of the Heavens being said, that he might have the more time for execution on the Kings of the Canaanites. To this Tribe also belonged the Town and Territory of Dan, or Leshem, afterwards called Caesarea Philippi, in the Tribe of NEPHTHALIM; whereof we have there spoke already.  
3. The Tribe of SIMEON was so called from Simeon the second Son of I●cob by his first wife Leah: of whom were found at the first muster 59300 able men; and but 22200 at the second muster, when they came into Canaan. Where they enjoyed but a small Territory to themselves, their lot falling amongst the Philistims, whom they were not able to expel: and therefore they were taken into the Tribe of judah, where they were permitted to enjoy some Towns and Villages, intermixed with that more potent Tribe. Afterwards in the reign of King Hezekiah, some of them possessed themselves of Gedar, belonging to the Children of Ham; and others passing Southwards into Idumaea, smote the Amale●ites which inhabited in the Mountains thereof, and dwelled in the places by them conquered. But for all this, wanting room for themselves and their Children, many of them undertook the Office of Scribes or Scriveners, and dispersed themselves amongst the rest of the Tribes, teaching their Children to write, and giving themselves to the employment of Public Notaries: God herein verifying the curse which jacob had denounced on Simeon, that he should be divided and scattered in Israel. But for their fixed habitation which fell to them by lot, it lay betwixt Dan upon the North, and Idumaea on the South; the Tribe of judah on the East, and the Philistims upon the West.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Gerar, the Royal seat of the two Abimeleches, Kings of the Philistims, with whom Abraham and Isaac had to do; and probably of some other of their Kings and Princes, till subdued by the Israelites. Situate in the South border of Canaan, not far from the Wilderness of Beersheba, but in a very healthful air; called therefore Regio Salutaris in the times succeeding. 2. Siceleg, or Ziglag, belonging to the Philistims till the time of David, to whom given by Achish King of Gath, for his place of retreat, when persecuted by Saul, from whom flying he lodged here all his goods and carriages: sacked by the Amalekites, but the booty recovered from them speedily by the diligence and good fortune of David. 3. Haiin, a City of the Levites. 4. Cariath- 〈◊〉, that is to say the City of Books, seated within the bounds of Simeon, but belonging to judah, which some hold to be the University or Academy of old Palestine. A City of the Levites also, and at first possessed by the Sons of Anak, or men of a Gigantine stature, but taken by Othomel, the Son of Ken●, on the promise and encouragement which was given by Caleb, that whosoever took it should have his Daughter Achsah to wife. Afterwards it was called Debir, judg. 1. 11. known in the time of Saint Hierome, by the name of Daema. 5. Chorma, conceived by some to be that place mentioned 〈◊〉 14. 45 to which the Canaanites and Amalekites pursued those of Israel. 6. Beershab, or 〈◊〉 ●uramenti, so called of the Well of waters, and the oath which was there sworn betwixt Abraham and Abimelech, Gen. 21. 31. Memorable in the Scripture for the Grove which Abraham there planted, the wand'ring of Hagar thereabouts, when she was cast out of Abraham's house with her young son ●●mad, and the dwelling of Isaac, for which cause called the City of Isaac. Situate in the extreme South border of the Land of Canaan, the length whereof is often measured in the Scripture from this Town to Da●: and for that cause well fortified by the Western Christians, when they were possessed of this Country, as standing on the borders of Idumaea, and the Deserts of Arabia, in the way from Egypt.  
4. The Tribe of JUDAH was so called from judah the fourth son of jacob, by his wife Leah; of whom there were numbered at the first general muster taken near Mount Sinai, 76600 fight men; and no fewer than 76500, at their entrance into the Land of Canaan. The greatest Tribe, and therefore answerably fitted with the largest territory; bordering on the Dead Sea, East; upon Simeon, West; and the Tribe of Benjamin on the North; and the Idumaeans on the South. Comparatively large, with reference to the other Tribes: but otherwise unable to contain or feed those infinite multitudes, without the extraordinary providence of Almighty God, which are recorded to be in it: King David mustering 470000 fight men of this Tribe alone; which was more than half the number found in the rest of the Tribes. A Tribe which had a native Sovereignty over all the others, the Sceptre, the Legislative power, and the world's Messiah, being all promised unto this.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Arad, situate in the entrance of judaea, in the way from the Wilderness of Edom. 2. Hebron, one of the ancientest Cities of Canaan: the seat of Giants, called Anakim, or the sons of Anak. This word Anak signifieth a chain worn for ornament: and it seemeth that this Anak enriched with the spoils of his enemies, wore a chain of Gold, leaving both the custom and name to his posterity. We read the like of Manlius Torquatus in the Roman Histories. This Town did Abraham buy for a burial place for his dead, and in it his wife Sarah was first buried; and after her four of the Patriarches. Adjoining to this town is the plain of Mamre, where Abraham the Father of the faithful, sitting in his Tent, was visited from Heaven by God in the shape of man. Here David kept his Court before the winning of Jerusalem; to this place came the Tribes to anoint him King over Israel; and hither came Absalon, under the pretence of paying his vows, to usurp the Kingdom of his Father. 3. Tecoa, the City of Amos the Prophet; and also of that woman, who by the words which joab put into her mouth, persuaded the King to call Absalon from exile. In the Wilderness of this Tecoa, there assembled the Inhabitants of Moab, Ammon, and Mount Seir, to overthrow juda. But the Lord being appeased by the public Fast, proclaimed and kept by jehosaphat and the people, sowed dissensions amongst them: So that the children of Ammon and Moab stood up against the inhabitants of Mount-Seir, utterly to slay and destroy them; and when they had made an end of the inhabitants of Mount Seir, every one helped to destroy one another. 4. Cerioth, or Carioth, the birthplace of judas, hence sumamed Iscariot (or the man of Carioth) who betrayed our Saviour. 5. Jether, or Jatter, nigh unto which was fought that memorable battle, wherein Asa, King of judah, by the help of God, discomfited Zerah, King of the Arabians; whose Army consisted of a Million of fight men. 6. Marsia, the native Soil of the Prophet Michah, near whereunto first Asa King of judah discomfitted the vast Army of Terah the Arabian or Ethiopian, consisting of above a Million of men; and afterwards Gorgias was overthrown by judas Maccabaeus. 7. Emaus, (after called Nicopolis) memorable for the third overthrow which judas gave to the said Gorgias; for our Redeemers showing himself after his Resurrection to Cleophas and another of his Disciples; & for the hot Baths hereabouts, which gave the name of Salntaris to this part of Palestine. The sovereign virtue of which waters Sozomen, a Christian, attributes to the washing of Christ's feet in them, as he passed by at that time; but josephus, a jew, ascribes (as it is most likely) unto natural causes. 8. Hasor, or Chatsor, one of the forntiere Towns towards Idumaea. 9 Odalla, or Hadullan, an ancient and magnificent City, taken and destroyed by Josuah; and long after much enlarged and beautified by jonathan, one of the Maccabees. 10. Ceila, or Keila, where David sometimes hid himself when he fled from Saul; by him delivered afterwards from the assaults of the Philistims. 11. Eleutheropolis, or the Free City, not far from Hebron, a City of later date than any of judah, mentioned by Ptolemy, and much remembered by Saint Hierome. 12. Azecha, not far from Emaus, to which josuah followed Dabir the King of Eglon and his four Associates, whom he discomfited in the cause and quarrel of the Gibeonites, molested by them for submitting to their common Enemy. Seated in the valley of Terebinth, and of very great strength; presuming upon which, it revolted from joram King of Judah, at the same time that Libn●, and the Edomites had revolted from him. 13. Beth-Sur (or Seth-Sora) that is to say, the house on the Rock, so called from the situation on a rocky hill, one of the strongest places of Sudah: Fortified first by Roboam. the son of Solomon, after by judas Maccabaeus, and finally made impregnable by his brother Simeon. 14. Adoram, bordering on the Dead-Sea, beautified also by Roboam. 15. Zoar, in former times called Bela, but took his name from the words of Lot, alleging that it was but a little one, Gen. 19 20. as the word Tsohor doth import; in whose escape it was preserved; being otherwise one of the five Cities of the Region called Pentapolis, doomed unto destruction; the other four, Sodom, Gomorrals, Ad●ma, and Seboim, being at the same time destroyed by fire and brimstone, 16. Massada, situate on an high Mountain called Collis Achilloe, an impregnable fortress, built by Herod the Great, in the place where jonathan the Maccabee had sometime raised a very strong Castle; Which he fortified with 27. Turrets, and left therein, as in a place impregnable, and inaccessible, a Magazine of Arms and all warlike furniture for an Army of 100000 men. 17. Libna, a strong City seated in a corner of judah, running between the Tribes of Dan and Benjamin. This City revolted from joram King of judah, at the same time the Edomites did: and continued a free State, even as long as judab continued a Kingdom. 18. Ziph, in the wilderness, wherein David hid himself from the fury of Saul. Hither, when Saul pursued him, David came into his Camp (the watch being all asleep) and took thence his spear, and a Cruse of oil, and departed. Abishai indeed would fain have killed him: but David, though he knew that Samuel had by Gods command abdicated Saul from the Kingdom, and that himself was appointed in his stead, would not touch him, but left him to the judgement of the Lord, whose anointed he was. 19 Bethlem, or (to distinguish it from another of this name in Zabulon so called) Bethlem-Iudah, where Christ was born; and the Innocents' suffered for him, before he had suffered for them. In this general Massacre of young children, a son of Herod's, which was at nurse, was also slain: Which being told unto Augustus, he replied, he had rather be Herod's swine than his son. His swine being safe in regard the jews were forbidden hog-meat; but his sons frequently made away upon fears and jealousies. A Town for this cause had in great respect by the Primitive Christians, beautified by Helen with a Stately Temple, which yet standeth entire; by the Lady Paula (much extolled by Saint Hierome) with some goodly Monasteries, in one of which the body of that Father lieth; and by the Western Christian● with a See Episcopal. 20. On the frontier of this Country towards the Philistians, was that strong Castle, which Herod repairing, called Herodium, seated on a hill, the ascent unto which was made with 200 steps of Marble exceeding fair and large. In this Country also are the hills of Engaddi, in a Cave of which David cut off the lap of Saul's garment, and all along the bottoms whereof were the gardens of Balsamum, or Opobalsamum, the trees of which, were by Cleopatra (at such time as she governed M. Antony, and the East,) sent for to be replanted in Heliopolis of Egypt; and Herod, who durst not deny them, plucked them up by the roots and sent them to her.  
5. The Tribe of BENJAMIN took name from the eight and youngest son of jacob, by Rachel his best beloved wife, who died in that Childbirth: of which at the first muster near unto Mount Sinai, were numbered 35000 able men; and at the second muster when they entered the Promised Land, there were found of them fit for Arms, 45600. persons. A Tribe in great danger to have been utterly cut off, by the folly of the men of Gibeah: all Israel arming against it, as one man. For besides those that perished in the former battles, there fell in one day 25000 men that drew the sword: the fury of the Conquerors after that great victory sparing neither man nor beast, nor any thing that came to hand, and burning down all their Cities also which they came unto. So great an havoc was there made even of innocent maidens, that when the edge of this displeasure was taken off, there were not wives enough found for those few young men which had escaped; the other Tribes having bound themselves by a solemn oath, not to bestow their daughters on them: insomuch, that they were fain to provide themselves of wives of the daughters of jabesh-gilead, a Town of the Manissites beyond jordan, which they took by assault, and of the daughters of Shilo, whom they took by Stratagem. The whole story see at large in the Book of the Judges, chap. 19, 20, 21.  
The territories of this Tribe lay betwixt those of Ephraim on the North, and judah on the South, having the Dead-Sea to the East, and Tribe of Dan to the Westward of them. The chief of their Towns and Cities, were, 1. Micmas, the encamping place of Saul, 1 Sam. 13. 2. and the abiding place of jonathan, one of the Maccaboean brethren. 1 Macc. 9 73. 2. Mispah, famous in being the ordinary place of assembly, for the whole body of the people, in matters of war or peace: as also in that standing in the midst of Canaan, it was (together with Gilgal) made the seat of justice to which Samuel went yearly, to give judgement to the people. 3. Gebah, the North border of the Kingdom of judah toward Israel. 4. Gibeah, the Country of Saul, the first King: where the a busing of the Levites wife by the young men of this Town, had almost rooted the Tribe of Renjamin out of the garden of Israel. 5. At, a great and strong City, in the siege of which, the Israel's were first discomfited: but when by the death of Achan, who had stolen the accursed thing, the Camp was purged; Josuah by a warlike stratagem surprised it. 6. Gibeon, the mother City of the Gibeonites, who presaging the unresistable victories of the Israelites, came to the Camp of Josuah, and by a wile obtained peace of Josuah and the People. Employed by them in hewing wood and drawing water for the use of the Tabernacle, after the fraud was made known unto them; called Nethinims, Ezr. 43. from Nathan, which signifies to give, because they were given to the service of the Tabernacle first; of the Temple after. Saul about four hundred years after, slew some of them, for which fact the Lord caused a famine on the land: which could not be taken away till seven of Saul's sons were by David delivered unto the Gibeonites, and by them hanged. This famine did God send, because in killing those poor Gibeonites, the Oath was broken, which Josuah and the Princes swore concerning them. In defence of those Gibeonites it was, that Josuah waged war against the Kings of the Canaanites; and stayed the motion of the Sun by his fervent prayers. 7. Jericho, destroyed by the sound of Rams-horns, was not only leveled by Josuah to the ground, but a curse inflicted on him that should attempt the re-building of it. This curse notwithstanding, at the time when Ahab reigned in Israel (which was about five hundred years after the ruin of it) Hiel a Bethelite, delighted with the pleasantness of the place, re-edified it. But (as it was foretold by josuah) as he laid the foundation of the walls, he lost his eldest Son; and when he had finished it, and was setting up the gates thereof, he lost also the younger. It may be Hiel, when he began his work minded not the prophecy; it may be he believed it not: peradventure he thought the words of josuah, not so much to proceed from the spirit of prophecy, as from an angry and vexed heart; they being spoken in way of wish, or execration. And it is possible, it may be, he chose rather to build the eternity of his name on so pleasant and beautiful a City, than on the lines and issues of two young men. 8. Anathoth, the birthplace of the Prophet jeremy, and the patrimony of Abiathar the high Priest, sent hither by the command of Solomon, as to a place of his own when deposed from his Office by that King. 9 Nob, called 1 Sam. 22. 19 the Cit. of the Priests, destroyed by Saul, for the relief which Abimelech the high Priest had given to David; the A●k of the Lord then residing there. 10. Gilga●, upon the banks of jordan, where josuah did first eat of the fruits of the Land, and kept his first Passeover; where he circumcised such of the People as were born during their wand'ring in the Wilderness; and nigh to which he set up twelve stones for a Memorial to posterity that the waters of Jordan did there divide themselves to give passage to the twelve Tribes of Israel; where Agag, King of the Amalekites, was hewn in pieces by Samuel, and where Samuel once every year administered Justice to the People. For being seated in the midst of the land of Israel betwixt North and South, and on the Eastside of the Country near the banks of jordan, it served very fitly for that purpose: as Mispah also did, which stood in the same distance in regard of the length of the land of Canaan, but situate towards the West Sea, near the land of the Philistinis: used therefore interchangeably for the ease of the people, 11. Bthel, at first called Luz, but took this new name in remembrance of the vision which jacob saw here at his going towards Mesopotamia, as is said Gen. 28. 19 It signifieth the house of God, and was therefore chosen by Jeroboam, for the setting up of one of his Golden Calves; though thereby, (as the Prophet saith) he made it to be Beth-aver, the house of vanity, Osee 4. 15. and 10. 5. For than it was a part of the Kingdom of the Ten Tribe, and the Southern border of that Kingdom on the coasts of Ephraim: but taken from it by Abijah the King of Judah, and after that accounted as a member of his Kingdom till the destruction of it by the Chaldoeans. Called with the rest of those parts, in the time of the Maccabees by the of Aphoerema, which signifieth a thing taken away, because taken from the Ten Tribes, to which once it belonged, 1. Maccab. 11. 34. where it is said, to have been taken from the Country of Samaria, and added unto the borders of judoea. 12. Ramath, another place there mentioned, and said to have been added to the Realm of judah, having been formerly the South border of the Kingdom of Israel, and therefore strongly fortified by Baoesha, in the time of Asa King of judah. 13. Chadid, or Hadid, one of the three Cities (the other two being 14. Lod, and 15. Ono) which were inhabited by the Fenjamites after the Captivity. Destroyed in the wars with the Kings of Syria, and afterwards rebuilt by Sim●n the Maccaboean.  
But he chief glory of this Tribe, and of all the rest, and not so only, but of all the whole world besides, was the famous City of Hurusalem: seated upon a rocky Mountain, every way to be ascended with steep and difficult ascents, (except towards the North;) environed on all other sides also with some neighbouring mountainets, as if placed in the midst of an Amphitheatre. It consisted in the time of its greatest flourish of four parts, separated by their several Walls, as if several Cities; we may call them the Upper City, the Lower City, the New City, and the City of Herod: all of them but the Lower City seated upon their several hills. Of these, that which we call the City of Herod, had formerly been beautified with the houses of many of the Prophets, as in our Saviour's time with that of Mary the mother of John Mark, mentioned acts 15. 37. converted to a Church by the Primitive Christians: the Western part whereof was wholly taken up by the Palace of Herod (a wicked but magnificent Prince) for cost excessive, and for strength invincible; containing gardens, groves, fishponds, places devised for pleasure, besides those for exercise. Fortified with three Towers at the Corners of it, that on the Southeast of the wall, 50 Cubi●s high, of excellent workmanship, called Mariamnes Tower, in memory of his beloved but insolent wife, rashly murdered by him. Opposite to which on the South-West corner, stood the Tower of Phaseolus, so called by the name of his brother, 70 Cubits high, and in form resembling that so much celebrated Egyptian Phtros; and on the North Wall on an high hill the Tower of Hippick, exceeding both the rest in height by 14 Cubits, and having on the top two Spires, in memory of the two Hipp●er, his very dear friends, slain in his service by the wars.  
2. On the Southside stood that part which was called the Old City, possessed if not built by the jebu 〈◊〉, and therein both the Mountain and Fort of Zion; but after called the City of David, because taken by him, who thereon built a strong and magnificent Castle, the Royal Court and Mansion of the Kings succeeding. In the West part hereof stood the Tower of David; a double Palace built by Herod, the one part whereof he named Agrippa, and the other Caesar, composed of Marble, and every where enterlaid with gold; and not far off the house of Annas and Caiaphas, to which the Conspirators led our Saviour to receive his trial.  
3. That which was called the Lower City, because it had more in it of the Valley, was also called the Daughter of Zion, because built after it, in majesty and greatness did exceed the Mother. For therein upon Mount Moriah stood the Temple of Solomon (whereof more anon,) and betwixt it and Mount Zion, on another hill, the Palace which he built for his Wife the Daughter of Egypt, and that which he founded for himself, from which by an high Bridge he had a way unto the Temple. West hereof on a losty rock overlooking the City, stood the Royal Palace of the Princes of the Maccaboeans, re-edified and dwelled in by King Agripoa (though of Herod race,) and not far off the Theatre of Herod's building; adorned with admiral pictures, expressing the many victories and triumphs of Augustus Caesar. In this part also stood Mount A●ra, and on that once a Citadel built by Antiochus King of Syria, but razed by Simon, one of the Maccaboean Brothers, because it overtopped the Temple; the house of Helena Queen of Adiab●ne, who converted from Paganism to Indaism, had here her dwelling, and here died; and finally Herod's Amphitheatre, capacious enough to contain 80000 people, whom he entertained sometime with such shows and spectacles as were in use amongst the Romans. And in this part also on an high and craggy rock, not far from the Temple, stood the Tower of Baris, whereon the same Herod built a strong and impregnable Citadel, in honour of Marc. Antony, whose Creature he first was, called by the name of Antonius, having a fair and large Tower at every corner, two of them 50. Cubits high, and the other 70. afterwards garrisoned by the Romans, for fear the Jews presuming on the strengen of the Temple, might take occasion to rebel.  
4. As for the New City, which lay North to the City of Herod, it was once a Suburb only unto all the rest; inhabited by none but mechanical persons, and the meanest tradesmen; but after encompassed by Agrippa with a wall of 25 Cubits high, and fortified with ninety Turrets. The whole City fenced with a wonderful circumvallation, on all parts thereof, having a Ditch cut out of the main Rock, as josephus an eye-witness writeth, sixty foot deep, and no less than two hundred and fifty foot in breadth. First built, say some, by Melghisedech the King of Salem; by the Jebusites themselves, say others: by whomsoever built, called at first Jebusalem, afterwards Jerusalem, with the change of one letter only; enlarged in time, when made the Royal seat of the house of David, to the Magnificence and greatness before described, ●● it attained unto the compass of sixty furlongs, or seven miles and an half. Unconquered for the first four hundred years after the entrance of the Children of Israel: and when David attempted it, the people presumed so much on the strength of the place, that they told him in the way of scorn, that the bl●nd and the lame which they had amongst them (as the Text is generally expounded) should defend it against him. But as I think, the late learned Mr. Gregory of Christ-church in Oxon, hath found out a more likely meaning of the Text than this, who telleth us, that the Jubesites by the blind and lame (as they knew well the Israelites called blind and lame) did understand those Tutelar Idols, on whose protection they relied (as the 〈◊〉 did on their Palladium) for defence thereof: and then the meaning must be this, those Gods whom you of Israel call blind and lame, shall defend our Walls. Why else should David say (had they meant it literally) that his soul hated the lame and the blind? 2. Sam. 5. 8. or why should the People of Israel be so uncharitable, as to say that the blind and lame should not come into the House (or Temple of God) were it meant no otherwise? But notwithstanding these vain hopes, the Town was carried under the conduct of Joab, that fortunate and courageous leader, and made the Royal seat of the Kings of Judah.  
Proceed we now unto the Temple built by Solomon, in providing the materials whereof there were in Lebanon 30000 workmen, which wrought by the ten thousand every month; 70000 Labourers which carried burdens; 80000 Quarry-men that hewed stones in the Mountains; and of Officers and Overseers of the work, no less than 3300 men. The description of this Stately Fabric we have in the first of Kings, cap. 6. 7. In the year of the world 2350 it was destroyed by Nabuchadzezzar at the taking of Jerusalem: rebuilt again after the return from the Captivity; but with such opposition of the Samaritans, that the Workmen were fain to hold their Tools in one hand, and their swords in the other, to repulse, if need were, those malicious enemies. But yet this Temple was not answerable to the magnificence of the former; so that the Prophet Haggi had good occasion to say to the People, cap. 2. ver. 3. Who is l●ft among you that saw this house in her first glory? is it not in your eyes as nothing, in comparison of it? Nor fell it short thereof only in the outward structure, but some inward Additaments. For it wanted, 1. The Pot of Mannah, which the Lord commanded Moses to lay up before the Testimony for a Memorial, Exod. 16. 32. etc. 2. The Rod of Aaron, which only budded of all the Rods of the Princes of Israel, and was commanded to be kept before the (Ark of the) Testimony, for a token against Corah, Dathan, and Abiram, Num. 17. 10. 3. The Ark of the Covenant: the making whereof we have Exod. 25. 10. and the placing of it in the Oracle, or Sanctum Sanctorum, 1 King 6. 19 4. The Two Tables of the Law, writ by Gods own finger, and by Moses laid up in the Ark of the Covenant, Exod. 40. 30. and Deut. 10. 5. And 5. The fire of Sacrifice, which came down from Heaven, mentioned Levit. 9 24. 2 Chron. 17. 1. which by the Priest was to be kept continually burning, never to go out. This second Temple, partly because it was grown ruinous, partly because it seemed not magnificent enough, but principally to curry favour with the Jews, Herod the Asealonate pulled down, and set up another in the place; making it not much inferior (if at all) unto that of Solomon, but far superior to the other: immensoe opulentioe Templum, as Tacitus most truly called it. And this was it to which our Saviour did sometimes vouchsafe his presence. But here we are to understand, that by the Temple is not meant the Fabric only, or the house itself, but also all those several Courts with which encompassed, being four in number: That is to say, Atrium Sacerdotum, or the Priest's Court, which was next unto the Temple, wherein stood the brazen Altar for the daily sacrifice, and the Laver for the washing of the Priests and the Sacrifice also: into which Court might none enter but the Priest alone. 2. Then there was Atrium populi, or the People's Court, separated from the other by a wall of three Cubits height; to which the people did repair to perform their Sacrifices, to say their prayers, and to make payment of their vows. In the middle of this Court, did Solomon maken a brazen Scaffold for the Kings his Successors, 2 Chron. 6. 13. and afterwards in imitation of his Porol built before the Temple, were many Porches built about it, for the people to repair into in rainy weather, which gave to this whole Court the name of Solomon's porch; whereof see John 10. 23. A ●● 3. 11. Without that stood 3. Atrium Foeminarum, or the women's Court, divided from the other, as is collected out of 2 Chron. 20. 5. in the time of jehosophat King of judah; in which stood their Treasury, or poor-mans' Box, mentioned in the one and twentieth Chapter of Saint Luke's Gospel, from whence this whole Court had sometimes the name of Treasury, as appear John 8. 20. where it is said, that these words spoke JESUS in the Treasury, that is to say in the women's Court, where the Treafury or Alm-Box stood. Betwixt these last was an Ascent of fifteen steps, on which the Levites used to sing those 15. Psalms which do immediately follow the hundred nineteenth Psalm, upon each step one; from whence they had the name of Psalmi Graduales, or Cantica graduum, i.e. the Psalms or Songs of degrees. And so far all was counted holy Ground, upon which none might tread but either natural Jews, or circumcised Proselytes, whom they called Proselytifoederis, as before was said; or such of the other Sex, (not natural Jewesses) who having received all outward initiations, had bound themselves unto the observation of the law of Moses. 4. So was it not with the fourth and last Court, called Atrium Gentium, or the Court of the Gentiles, designed for the use of those Gentiles whom they called Proselyti portoe, bound only unto the keeping of the Precepts given the Sons of Noah. For in that, as unsanctified ground, (though counted part of the Temple also) did they permit a market of sheep and oxen, the sale of Doves and Pigeons, and the Tables of money-changets, for the oblations of the people: stabling the poor Gentiles amongst their cattle, and ranking them with the worst of men. And out of this Temple, or Court of the Temple, did CHRIST our Saviour cast the buyers and eller●, and overthrew the Tables of the money-changers, asserting it to its primitive and original use, which was to be an house of prayer for all the Nations. This last Court separated from the other by a wall of three Cubits height, adorned with certain Pillars of equal distance, bearing this inscription, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i.e. Let no Alien (or one that is no Iew) enter into the holy place, And to this wall it is that the Apostle alludeth, saying, He hath broken down the middle wall of partition between us (i.e. between the jews and Gentiles) making one of twain, Ephes. 2. 14, 15. inferring hereupon that the Gentiles are no more strangers and foreigners, but fellow Citizens with the Saints, and of the household of God, v. 19  
But to go forwards with the Temple, having continued in the glories to which Herod brought it, not above 85 years, it was finally destroyed by Titus the son of Vespasian, in the 69. year after Christ's nativity. At what time the Temple of Delphos was utterly overthrown by Earthquakes and thunderbolts from Heaven, neither of them ever-since repaired, though much endeavoured. The concurrence of which two miracles evidently showeth that the time was then come in which God would put an end both to the jewish Ceremonies, and Heathen Idolatries, that so the Kingdom of his son might be all in all. For this destruction of the Temple of Jerusalem I may call a miracle, in regard it was done against the command of Titus, who was not only careful to preserve it, before his Soldiers had put fire to it, but did all that possibly might be to quench it. His reason was 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; as josephus hath it, because the loss thereof would redound so highly to the prejudice of the Roman Empire, in being deprived of such a glorious and magnificent structure. But do he what he could with his utmost industry, there was no quenching of it till it was consumed. And it adds somewhat to the marvel, that this should happen on the tenth day of August, on which day, the first Temple had been burnt by Nabu●hadnozzar. And certainly it is worth the noting (I hope I shall not be accounted superstitious for this observation) to see how happy or unfortunate one and the same day hath been found unto divers persons. In the wars betwixt the French and the Spaniards for the Realm of Naples, Friday was observed to be very lucky to that great Captain Consalvo; he having on that day given the French many notable overthrows. Wednesday is said to have been fortunate to Pope Sixtus the fifth; for on that day was he born, on the same made a Monk; on that day created General of his Order; on the same made Cardinal, then chosen to be Pope, and finally on the same inaugurated. To Henry the seventh of England Saturday was observed to be very fortunate in all his actions, as was the 24. of February unto Charles the fifth, on what day soever: for on that he came into the world, & in that he took K. Francis Prisoner at the battle of Pav●e, and on the same received the Imperial Crown. But to return unto the Temple, we find that on the Sabbath or Saturday it was taken by Pampey, on the same by Herod, and on that also by Titus.  
But go we forwards to Jerusalem as now it standeth, it lay in rubbish and unbuilt (after the destruction of it by Titus) till repaired by Adrian: and then the Temple not so much as thought of, till out of an ungodly policy, in the Reign of Julian that Politic Enemy of the Church; who to diminish the infinite number of Christians by the increase of the Jews: began again to build this Temple. But no sooner were the foundations laid, but a terrible Earthquake cast them up again, and fire from Heaven consumed the Tools of the Workmen, together with the Stones, Timber, and other materials. As for the City itself, after the desolation in it which was made by Titus, it was re-edified by the Emperor Aelius Adrianus, who named it Aelia, drove thence the Jews, and gave it to the Christians. But this new City was not built in the place of the old. For within this Mount Calvary is comprehended, which was not in the Old before: As on the other side a great part of Mount Zion, part of the City of Herod, and the Soil where the New City stood, are left out of this: the ruins of the other still remaining visible, to show the ancient greatness and magnificence of it. To look upon it then as it stands at present, it is now only famous for the Temple of the Sepulchre, built by Helena (whom most report to have been daughter to Corlus a British King) Mother to Constantine the great. Much a do had the good Lady to find the place where the LORDS body had been laid: for the Jews and Heathens had raised great hillocks on the place; and built there a Temple of Venus. This Temple being plucked down, and the earth d●gged away, she found the three Crosses, whereon our blessed Saviour, and the two Thiefs had suffered. To know which of these was the right Cross, they were all carried to a woman, who had been long visited with sickness, and now lay at the point of death. The Crosses of the two Thiefs did the weak woman no good: but as soon as they laid on her the Cross on which the Lord died, she leapt up and was restored to her former health. This Temple of the Sepulchre, even at the first building, was highly reverenced and esteemed by the Christians of these parts: and even until our days, it is much resorted to, both by Pilgrims from all the parts of the Romish Church, who fond and superstitiously hope to merit by their journey: and also by divers Gentlemen of the reformed Churches, who travel hitherward; partly for curiosity, partly for love to the antiquity of the place, and partly because their generous spirits imitate the heaven and delight in motion. Whosoever is admitted to the sight of this Sepulchre, payeth nine crowns to the Turkish Officers: so that this tribute only is worth to the Grand Signeur, eighty thousand ducats yearly. The other building generally very mean and poor, if not contemptible. Built of flint stones, Low, and but one rock high; flat on the tops for men to walk on, and fenced with battlements of a yard in height to preserve them from falling; the under-rooms no better than vaults, where they repose themselves in the heat of the day.  
Some houses near the Temple of Solomon, and the Palace of Herod, adorned with Arches toward the Street, where the passenger may walk dry in a shower of rain; but not many such: nor any thing but the ruins left of the ancient buildings. The whole circuit of it reduced to two or three miles: and yet to those which take a survey thereof from some hills adjoining, where the ruins are not well discerned from the standing edifices, it affordeth to the eye no unpleasing prospect. And as the place is, such is the people, inhabited for the most part by Artisans of the meanest quality, gathered together of the scum of divers Nations: the greatest part consisting of Moores, and Arabians; a few poor Christians, of all the Oriental Sects, which dwell there for devotion, and some Turks, who for the profit which they make of Christians, are content to stay in it. Insomuch that when Robert Duke of Normandy, being than not cured of his wounds, and was carried into this City on the backs of some of this rascal people, he called to a Gentleman of his, who was going for England, and bade him say, that he saw Duke Robert carried into Heaven on the backs of devils.  
Come we now to the Tribe of LEVI, though indeed not reckoned for a Tribe, because not planted close together as the other were, nor had whole Provinces to themselves, but mingled and dispersed amongst the rest of the people, having forty eight Cities assigned them for their habitation, proportionably taken out of the other Tribes. So was it ordered by the Lord, partly that they being set apart for his Service, might be at hand in every place to instruct the People; and partly to fulfil the Prophecy which he had spoken by Jacob, who had fore-signified to Levi at the time of his death, that he should be divided in Jacob, and scattered in Israel. The like fortune he had prophesied of Simeon also; of the accomplishment whereof, so far as it refered to him, and the dispersion of his Tribe, we have spoken before. Now to make up the number of the twelve Tribes, Joseph was divided into Ephraim, and Manasses; and the Levites were reckoned to belong unto that Tribe, within whose territory, that City which they dwelled in, stood. Their maintenance was from the tenths or tithes, the first fruits, offerings, and Sacrifices of the People: and as it is in the eighteenth of Joshua, v. the seventeenth, The Priesthood of the Lord was their inheritance. There were of them four kinds. 1. Punies or Tirones, which from their childhood, till the five and twentieth year of their age, learned the duty of their offices. 2. Graduates, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which having spent four years in the study of the Law, were able to answer and oppose in it. 3. Licenciates, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which did actually exercise the Priestly function. And 4. Doctors (Rabbins they use to call them) who were the highest in degree. For maintenance of whom they had (as before is said) the Tithes, first fruits, and offerings of all the rest of the People; besides the 48 Cities assigned for their habitation: which last, with the several territories appertaining to them, extending every way for the space of two thousand Cubits, seems to have been a greater proportion of itself, than any of the other Tribes (with reference to the small number of the Levites) had in their possessions. Then for the Tithes, there was not only a full tenth set out of all kinds of increase, but such an imposition laid upon all sorts of grain, as came to more than a sixth part of the Crop itself. For first, out of six thousand bushels (and so accordingly in all after that proportion) a sixtieth part at least, (and that they termed the Therumah of the evil eye, or the niggards first fruits) was to be set forth as the first fruits of the threshing floor, which was an hundred in the total. Out of the residue, being five thousand and nine hundred Bushels, the first tithe paid unto the Levites came to five hundred and ninety Bushels: and of the residue, being five thousand three hundred and thirty Bushels, five hundred thirty and one were paid for the second Tithe unto the Priest which ministered in the holy Temple: yet so, that such as would decline the trouble of carrying it in hand unto Jerusalem, must pay the price thereof at the Priest's own estimate. Laying which several sums together, it appears demonstrably, that of six thousand Bushels (& sic de cateris) there will accrue one thousand two hundred seventy and one Bushels to the Priests and Levites; and but four thousand seven hundred seventy and nine to the Lord or Tenant; which is not fully a sixth part, as was said before. Then had they the first born of mankind and all unclean Beasts, redeemed at a certain rate; the first fruits of Wine, Oil, and wool; the first fruits of the dough, and of the firstlings of clean Beasts (their blood being sprinkled on the Altar, and the fat offered for a burnt offering) the flesh remained unto the Priest. They had also the meat-offerings, the sinne-offerings, the trespass-offerings, the shake-offerings, the heave-offerings, and the Shewbread: as also of all Eucharistical Sacrifices the breast and the shoulder; of others the shoulder, the two cheeks, and the maw; and of the whole burnt-offering they received the skin; besides the free-gifts of the people appearing thrice yearly before the Lord; and all this brought in unto them without charge or trouble. Which makes it evident that they were far moor liberally provided for than the rest of the Tribes; though they had no whole Country allotted to them, as the others had. And so much for such parts of the Land of Palestine as were possessed in part or wholly, by the Sons of Jacob: proceed we now to the Inheritance of the Sons of Esau.   

IDUMAEA.  
IDUMAEA, or the Land of EDOM, is bounded on the East and South, with Arabia Petraea; on the North, with Judaea; and on the West, with the Mediterranean Sea. So called from the Edomites, or Children of Esau, whose name is Edom, Gen. 36. 1. the Father of the Edomites, v. 43. by whom it was planted and possessed: or as others say from the Idumai, a people of Arabia, who in a mutiny being forced to forsake their Country, came and settled here. The first the more certain of the two, and therefore I adhere to that.  
The Country towards the Seaside very fat and fruitful; but where it bendeth towards Arabia, exceeding mountainous and barren. Heretofore it afforded Balm, not now: but still it hath some store of Palm-trees, for which much celebrated by some writers of ancient times, as Arbusto Palmarum dives Idu●●e, in the Poet Lucan. Sandy and full of vast deserts, for which, and for the want of water, it is thought unconquerable. For though they have many wells there for the use of the natives, yet to them only are they known, not obvious at all to the eyes of strangers, no not upon the strictest search that can be imagined. But all places are not so well furnished, as appeareth by the sad condition which the Kings of judah, Israel, and Edom were fallen into, when they led their Armies through the deserts of this Country against the Moabite, finding herein no water for man or beast: insomuch that the King of Israel said, Alas that the Lord hath called these three Kings together to deliver them into the hand of Moab, 2 Kings 3. 10. Not otherwise delivered out of this perplexity, but by a miracle from Heaven: God sending them the next day an abundance of water, without wind or rain, or any other visible means, ver. 17, 20.  
The people anciently rude and barbarous, greedy of change in government, easily stirred to insurrections, and in love with tumults. Professed enemies to the Iews, till conquered by them: and when compelled by Hyrcanus to the lewish Religion, they were at the best but false friends, and in the siege of Jerusalem by Titus, did them more mischief than the Romans. At this time subject to the Turk, and differ not much in life and custom from the wild Arabians.  
Rivers of note there can be none, where so little waters. One Lake it hath, though possibly it had been better had they been without it, now small, and every day growing less; the passage being long since bared which it had to the Sea. Anciently, though then narrow, it was two hundred surlongs, or five and twenty miles long; bordered on each side by hills of Sand, which born by the winds into the water did so thicken the same, that it was not easy to be discerned from the dry land; insomuch as whole Armies have been swallowed up in it. Thence called Barathrum by the Latins; The true name of it formerly was the lake of Sirbon. By the Italians it is now called Lago di Teveso, by the Natives Bayrema, the utmost bound of Palestine where it joineth on Egypt.  
The Chief mountains of it, are, 1. Mount Seir, the first habitation of Esau, after he left his dwelling in the Land of Canaan to make room for jacob, as is said Gen. 36. 7, 8. Not called so unless by Anticipation (a thing not unusual in the Scriptures) till the coming of Esau thither; the word Seir signifying barry or bristled, such as Esau is described to be, Gen. 27. 11. To this St. Hierome doth accord, deriving the name of Seir from Esau, Sumpto ab autore nomine. His reason is, Seir quip interpretatur Hispidus & pilosus qua'is Esau fuit. So he in his Comment on Esaiah, cap. 21. For the same cause, is the whole Country of Edom, sometimes called Mount Seir, in Scripture, by the name of this Mountain, as 2 Chron. 20. 10, 23. The 2. hill of note is that called Cassius, not far from the Lake of Sirbon, now nothing but an huge heap of sand, formerly famous for a Temple of jupiter, and the Sepulchre of Pompey the Great. Who being basely murdered here (after his defeat near Pharsalia by julius Caesar) by the command of Ptolemy the younger, King of Egypt, unto whom he fled (or rather by the command of Achillus who then governed his Counsels) by the piety of a private Soldier was here interred in an obscure and homely, but honest Sepulchre. The Sepulchre afterwards re-edified and made more suitable to the man, by the Emperor Adrian. The piety of the Soldier not a whit the less for the cost of the Emperor; in whose name Lucan had bestowed this Epitaph on that first Monument.  
Hic situs est Magnus, placet hoc Fortuna Sepulchrum  
Dicere Pompeii, quo condi malluit illum,  
Quam terra carnisse Socer.  
Which may be Englished to this purpose.  
Here Magnus lies, Such, Fortune, is thy doom  
That this vile earth should be great Pompey's Tomb.  
In which even Caesar's self would rather have  
His Son-in-Law interred, than want a grave.  
Places of most consideration in it, 1. Dinhahah, the City of Bela, the first King of Edom. 2. Anith, the City of Had●d, and 3. Pan, the City of Hadar, two others of the Kings hereof: which three are mentioned Gen. 36. 32. 35. 39 4. Berzamna, placed here by Ptolemy, supposed to be the same with Bershabee in the Tribe of Simeon, the utmost border Southwards of the Land of Canaan: of which more there. 5. Caparorsa. 6. Gammararis, and 7. Elasa, all of them mentioned by Ptolemy, which showeth them to be of some consideration in those times; though now forgotten with the former. 8. Anthedon, on the Southside of the River Besor, opposite to Gaza in the Tribe of Simeon, which is situate on the Northern bank. A port Town, once of good repute, till defaced by Alexander King of the Iewes: re-edified afterwards by Herod the Great, and named Agr●ppias, in honour of Agrippa the favourite and Son-in-law of Augustus Caesar. 9 Raphia, memorable for the great defeat which Ptolemy Philopater there gave unto Antiochus surnamed Magnus. 10. Rhinocurura, so called from a mishap which befell the Inhabitants hereof, by mangling and defacing their noses. By Pliny and S●rab● called Rhinocurula; and at this day Pharamica. Memorable for an old but ill-grounded tradition, that here the world was divided by lots, betwixt the posterity of Noah: and so considerable in the wars of the holy land, that it was strongly fortified by Baldwin the first, to obstruct the passage of such forces as usually came out on Egypt to aid the Turks. 11. Ostracine, now Stragion●; on the Seaside beneath Anthedon, and in that part of the Country which from Mount Casius hath the name of Casiotus: ascribed by Ptolemy to Egypt; but being they are both on the North of the Lake of Sirbon, more properly belonging to Palestina. But most of these being now buried in their ruins, there are left none but a few Castles and scattered villages: the villages inhabited for the most part by Arabians, the Castles garrisoned by Turks. The chief of which lying on the Sea in the road to Egypt, are 12. Hamones, a small Castle not far from Gaza, used chiefly for a Toll-booth, to receive custom of such Merchants as pass that way. 13. Harissa, a small Castle also, serving specially for the same use, but stronger and of more importance because near the Sea; from which not above two miles distant; and for that cause garrisoned with a hundred Soldiers: environed with a few houses, by reason of the commodity of the water, which is sweet and wholesome; else little better than a Desert. 14. Catio, an other Castle, or rather Toll-booth, with a garrison of about 60 Soldiers in it: seated in a place so desert and unfruitful, that nothing vegetable groweth in it, but a few starved Palm-trees; The water which they have there so bad and brackish, though esteemed good enough for the common Soldiers, that all which the Captain drinketh is brought from 15. Tina, a Town upon the Seashore, about twelve miles distant, and the last upon this coast towards Egypt.  
The first Inhabitants of this Country were the Horites, the Horites which dwelled in Mount Seir, as we read in Gen. cap. 14, v. 6. that is to say, which dwelled in that hilly Country which afterwards was called Mount Seir. But whether it were so called from Esau's dwelling here, as is said before, or from Seir the Horite, mentioned Gen. 36. 20. as perhaps may probably be supposed, need not now come into dispute. Broken by Cherdolaomer and his Associates, they were the more easily subdued by Esau. Who leaving the land of Canaan to his brother jacob, Gen. 36. 7, 8. because those parts in which they dwelled did not afford them room enough for their several cattle, came into this Country, and having destroyed the Horites from before them, succeeded in their habitations, and dwelled there in their stead ●venunto this day, Deut. 2. 22. 'tis true, we find Esau in Mount Seir, before this remove: for it is said, that jacob at his first coming out of Mesopotamia, sent messengers before him to Esau his brother, unto the Land of Seir, the Country of Edom, Gen. 32. 3. And hence a question hath been moved, how Esau dwelling there before jacob's coming, can be said to remove thither to make room for him. To this Sir Walter Ramires egh and some others answer, that at the time when Jacob came out of Padan-Aram, Esau dwelled in those parts of the Mountains which lie on the East of Jordan, called afterwards Galaad and Mount Hermon, by which Jacob must needs pass in his way to Canaan; which Mountains then were called by the name of Seir, and from thence Syrion by the Zidonians or Phoenicians in the ages following: from whence driven by the Amorites at such time as they vanquished those of Moab and Ammon, they were forced to seat themselves on the South of Canaan, where Moses found them. But with this I am by no means satisfied. For besides that it maketh Esau to carry a Mount Sire with him, wheresoever he went; it doth expressly differ from the plain words of Scripture, both in the occasion and the time of his settling there: the victories which the Amorites had over the Ammonites and Moabites, being then fresh and newly gotten when Moses with the children of Israel came into these parts, which was at the least 200. years after Esau did withdraw himself to the land of Edom. And therefore I should rather think, that Esau finding himself distasted by his Father and Mother, in regard of his Canaanitish marriages, and the hatred which he bore to Jacob, departed from them, and so journed in the South parts amongst the Horites of Moun Seir; that thither Jacob sent his messengers to make peace between them; that the reconciliation being made, Esau returned unto the place where before he sojourned; and having brought thence his children, cattle, and the rest of his substance, fixed himself again near the house of his Fathers; and finally, that on Isaac's death, finding his family increased, his herds of flocks augmented, and the rest of his substance also doubled by the death of his father; he thought it fit also to enlarge his dwelling, and so removed back once more to Edom. A thing not needful to be done had he dwelled in Galaad, H●rmon, or any other part of that Mountainous Tract: considering the great distance betwixt those Mountains and the City of Hebron in which Isaac dwelled, nigh to which jacob also had set up his dwelling.  
But on what ground soever Esau left the possession of the land of Canaan to his brother jacob, certain it is, he did it not without some strong impulsions from the spirit of God, by whom the possession of that Land was desigued for jacob; to whom the blessing & the birthright had been both preferred. And though Esau overruled by Almighty God, seemed to have forgotten all displeasure against his brother: yet the quarrel began by them in the womb of Rebecca, broke out more violently in the times of their posterity. Insomuch that Moses could by no means obtain a passage thorough Edom into the Promised Land, though he sought it by a fair address, and pressed it by all those motives and inducements which a wise and understanding man could have set before them. For though the King of Edom then being, seemed to pretend nothing but the safety of himself and his people, both which he might have hazarded (in all humane Reason) by opening the closures of his Mountains, and letting in a Nation mightier than his own: yet it is possible there might be as much of stomach as worldly policy, and that aswell the buying of the birthright for so slight a trifle, as the getting of the blessing by such fraudulent means, might not be forgotten. Forhe not only denied them passage and sent back word expressly they should not go thorough, but came against them with much people and a strong band, as is said Numbers 20. 20. But the Edomites could not for all this prevent their destiny ' or make the word of God to be ineffectual, by which it had been signified, when they were yet in their mother's womb, that the elder should serve the younger. Not verified in Esau's person, for jacob called him his Lord Esau, professed himself to be his Servant, and willingly submitted to his superierity; but in the issues of them both: then specially when David had subdued the Edomites, and made them Homagers and Vassals to the Crown of Judah, 2 Sam. 8. 14. Nor is less intimated in those words of the 60 Psalms, where it is said, Over Edom will I cast my shoe; it being a custom of old times to fling their shoes upon a Country conquered or designed for conquest. Pro ectio calceamenti super Regionem aliquam denotat subiicere, as my Author hath it. And in allusion unto this, there is a story in the Chronicles of the Kings of Man, how Magnus' King of the Isles sent his Ambassadors to Murchard a King in Ireland, commanding him on the next Christmas day to carry openly the shoes of King Magnus upon his shoulders, in testimony, saith the story, that he was his Vassal. The casting of the Shoe on a conquered Country, or the treading of it under feet, another ceremony of this nature mentioned Deut. 33. 29. do come both to one, and signify that vassalage or bondage, which such a captivated Country was reduced unto.  
But on the other side, there was another part of the heavenly Oracle, which made for Edom: Isaac had signified to Esau, that though the blessing given to Jacob could not be revoked, and that he must content himself with being a servant to his brother for a certain in season: yet there should one day come a time in which he should not only break that yoke from off his neck, but obtain the dominion over him, Gen. 27. 40. The first part verified, when the Edomites revolted from the Kings of Judah in the time of Joram, or Jehoram the Son of Jehosophat: and instead of a Viceroy sent unto them from the Court of Jerusalem, set up a King of their own Nation; never returning after that to the house of David. For though foram made war presently upon them, and got the victory, yet he did not prosecute it unto any effect, nor beat them out of any of their strong holds, nor reduce any of their Cities unto his obedience: as if he had got honour enough in the eye of the world by being master of the Field; or showing his abilities in command of a greater Army than the Edomites could bring against him. The like error was committed also by Amaziah, who by a vast Army of 300000 fight men, did no greater wonders, than the kill of 10000, and the taking of as many Edomites; but neither left garrisons in any of their defensible places, nor reduced any part of their Country under his obedience. And for the later part thereof, it was as punctually fulfilled in the time of Antipater an Idumaean, Herod the Ascalonite his Son, and their Successors, who in the decrepit age of the house of jacob, became Kings of the jews, and lorded over them with insolence and contempt enough.  
Mean time to look upon the intermediate passages of their State and story, it seemeth that at the first they were governed by Dukes, each having the command of those several families of which they were the heads or Princes. But as ambition and power did prevail among them, the most potent having vanquished or awed the rest, took to himself the name of King: which by the names of their Fathers, and their several Cities in which they reigned, seem to have been chosen by election, or otherwise to come in by strong hand, as the sword could carry it. The names of which are thus set down in the book of Genesis.  

The Kings of Edom.  
1. Bela, the Son of Beor.  
2. jobab, the Son of Zerah.  
3. Hasham, of the Land of Temani.  
4. Hadad, the Son of Bedad, who warred against the Midianites, and vanquished them in the fields of Moab, Gen. 36. 35.  
5. Samlah, of Masrekah.  
6. Saul, of Rehoboth by the River Euphrates.  
7. Baal-Hanan, the Son of Achbor.  
8. Hadar, the Son perhaps of Baal-Hanan, for I find no mention of his Father. After whose death, the heads of the several Families resumed the Government again, ruling over their own Tribes, without any one Sovereign or Supreme. And all these Kings they had before there reigned any King in Israel, Gen. 36. 31. that is to say, before any form of Supreme Government was established amongst them in the person of Moses, called by the name of a King in the book of Deut. chap. 35. v. 5. But this distracted Government did not long continue, the Edomites being under a King again, at such time as the Children of Israel came out of Egypt: for it was unto the King of Edom that Moses sent Messengers from Kadesh to desire a passage thorough his Country. Which being denied, and the Edomites in Arms to defend their passes, Moses forbore to force his way, though the nearest for him, partly because he had no mind to spend those forces in fight with hills and deserts, which were designed for the conquest of another Country; but principally because God commanded him not to meddle with them, or to take so much as a foot of their Country from them, Deut. 2. 5. But David, upon whom lay no such obligation, having vanquished the Syrians and other Nations round about him, followed his fortunes unto Edom, whom he overcame, and put Garrisons into all their Cities, and the Edomites became his servants. Governed from thenceforth by a Deputy or Viceroy (as is said before) till the time of Joram the Son of Jehosophat King of Judah; in whose Reign they revolted as before was said. Never regained to that Crown, and but twice endeavoured, that so the word of God might be all in all. Only the Simeonites in the reign of Hezekiah, wanting pasture for their cattle, and room for themselves, seized on the parts which lay nearest to them, destroyed the inhabitants thereof, and dwelled in their habitations, because there was pasture for their flocks, 1. Chron. 4. 39 Provoked wherewith, and with the natural Antipathy which was between them. No people were more mischievously bend against Judah, than these Edomites were: no men so forward of themselves to assist Nabuchadonosor against Jerusalem; none that so vehemently cried Down with it down unto the ground; none half so ready to set fire to the holy Temple. But they got little by this service to the Babylonians, their own thraldom following close upon that of Judah: with whom made fellow-subjects to the Chaldaeans, as afterwards to the Persians, and Kings of Syria of the race of Seleucus. In the declining of that house, subdued by Hyrcanus the Son of Simon, the fourth of the Maccabaean Princes; by whom they were compelled to be Circumcised, and to receive the Law of Moses: not only reckoned after that, as a Province of the Jewish Kingdom, but as natural Jews. Which notwithstanding, and that the setting of that Crown on the head of Herod and his house, being originally Idumaenus, might in all reason have extinguished their inveterate malice: yet was their hatred of that Nation as great as ever. Forgetting therefore how they had been rewatded by the Babylonians, they would needs aid the Romans against them also: putting themselves into Jerusalem, when besieged by Titus, only of purpose to betray it; joining with the seditious there, doing more mischief in the City than the enemy had done without; and finally, setting fire to the second Temple, as they had done unto the first. Subjected afterwards by the Romans, they followed the same fortune with the rest of Palestine.   
Having thus gone through with the story of those neighbouring Nations which encompassed Canaan: it will be seasonable to look on the affairs of the Canaanites first, and after of the house of Jacob who possessed their Country. First for the Canaanites, they descended from Canaan the son of Cham, who with his eleven sons were here settled immediately after the confusion at Babel. Of those twelve (taking in the Father) five planted in Phoenicia, and the coasts of Syria, that is to say, Sidon, Harki, Arvadi, Semari, and Hamathi: the other seven in those parts which we now call Palestine, though not all of that, the Edomites, Moabites, Midianites, Ammonites, and Ituraeans, being Occupants or Tenants with them. And of those seven came those seven Nations, which by God's appointment were totally to be rooted out, viz. the Canaanites, the Amorites, the Hittites, the jebusites, the Hivites, the Gergeshites, and the Perizites. But from which of the sons of Canaan these last descended, is not yet agreed on, unless perhaps they were descended of the Sinites (not otherwise reckoned in this muster) and got the name of Perizites, on some new occasion. Governed at first by the Chiefest of their several Families, with the names of Kings; the number of which increased as their Families were subdivided into smaller branches: insomuch as josuah found 31 Kings of the Cannanites only, besides what might descend from those who were settled in Phoenicia and the borders of Syria. The most potent of those Nations were the Amorites, the jebusites, and the Chanaanites properly so called. Of which the Amorites had not only enlarged their borders beyond jordan, but in the reigns of Og and Sihon, ruling at the same time in their several parts, had thrust the Ituraeans, Ammonites and Moabites, out of most of their Countries: and so restored the same again to the race of the Emmims and Zanzummims (of which they were) who had been dispossessed thereof by the Sons of Lot. These vanquished in the time of Moses, and their habitations assigned over to the Tribes of Reuben, Gad, and the one half-tribe of Manasses. The Canaanites properly so called, as they were the first which fought with the house of jacob; so they were the last of all these people that contended with them. They first fought with them under the conduct of Arad their King, who thinking it more safe and prudent to encounter the Enemy in an other man's Country, than to expect them in his own; gave battle unto Moses in the Deserts of Moab: and having cut off some of the outparts of his Army, and taken a few Prisoners, he went home again. But jabin, under whom they made their second onset, went to work more resolutely; and taking a time when the iniquities of that People cried loud for vengeance, so prevailed against them, that he tyrannised over them for the space of 20 years. After which time, his Army being discomfited by Bara●, in the time of Deborah; Sisera, his great Captain, slain by jael the wife of Heber the Kenite; and most of his Cities taken and possessed by the Israelites; he perished himself in the close of that war; for it is said that they prevailed against jabin the King of Canaan, till they had destroyed him, Judg. 4. 24. As for the jebusites, they were grown so formidable (at the time of the coming of the Hebrews) to the rest of their neighbours, that their King Adonibezek bragged that he had cut off the thumbs and great toes of 70 Kings, and made them eat the crumbs which fell under his table. But being vanquished by judah, he was served in the same kind himself by judah and Simeon, and carried to Hicrusalem, where he died: the whole Country of the jebusites, and the City of Jerusalem itself, the fortress of Mount Zion excepted only, being made a prey unto the Victor. And though the jebusites held that fortess till the time of David, yet being they were only on the defensive side, and made no open war against those of Israel, I reckon the Canaanites as the last which did contend with them for the chief command.  
The Canaanites thus conquered, and for the most part worn out of the Country, the Israelites succeeded in their possessions; according to the promise of God made to Abraham, renewed to Isaac, and confirmed to jacob. Governed, after the death of Moses and Josuah, by the Congregation of the Elders, as appears by many passages in the book of judg. the judges (as the Scripture calleth them) not being the ordinary Magistrates, but raised up occasionally by God for some special purpose, according to the exigence of their affairs. Carrying in this a likeness unto the Dictator's in the State of Rome. So that the Government at the first was an aristocraty; though to say truth, it rather was a theocraty, as the Fathers call it, that is to say, a government wherein GOD presided more immediately than in other Nations. And thereupon when the People cried out to Samuel to have a King, God said unto him, Harken unto the voice of the people, for they have not rejected thee, but they have rejected me that I should not reign over them, 1 Samuel 8. 7. God was their King, and he had mightily reigned over them since they came out of Egypt; but they desired to have a King like to other Nations, to go in and out before them, and to fight their battles: a King whom they might see with their bodily eyes, and converse with him in such manner as the people did, which dwelled round about them. And so came in the Monarchy or Kingly Government, begun in Saul, but confirmed in David; the first a Benjamite, the second of the Tribe of Judah; of which Jacob had foretell at the time of his death, that the Kingdom of his People should be vested in it. But there were only three in all, reckoning Saul for one, who had Dominion over the whole house of Israel; the Kingdom after Solomon's death being rend in twain; ten of the twelve Tribes revolting unto Jeroboam the Son of Nebat; and only Benjamin and Judah, and so much of the Tribes of Dan and Sime●n, as lay intermingled with and in the Tribe of Judah, remaining firm to Reholoam the Son of Solomon, who misguided by some evil Counsellors which were about him, had given occasion to the breach. A breach that never could be soldered or made up again; notwithstanding the fair opportunities which were after offered, of uniting Judah unto Israel (for so the two Kingdoms were distinguished) in the time of Joas; and rejoining Israel to Judah, in the time of Asa. The opportunity offered to Asa King of judah for regaining the revolted Tribes, was the confusions which in his time had fallen out amongst them by several factions, each challenging the privilege of making a King unto itself: Nadab the Son of 〈◊〉 being slain by Baasha, Ela the son of Baasha murdered by Zimri, Zimri deposed by O●● the Father of Ahab, and Tobni a competitor against Omri also. During which time, as the people must needs suffer many great oppressions, which might make them think of their allegiance to the house of David: so could not Asa have wanted many fair advantages (had he made his best use of them) of working on the divided Kingdom, and reducing it back unto his house. But there were two reasons which prevailed more against this reunion, than any that could be presented to invite them to it. First the imperiousness and arbitrary government of the Kings of judah, putting to death without formality of law, those that had displeased them; as in the case of Shimei, joab, and Adonijah, in the days of Solomon: and raising on the Subject what sums they pleased, though more for ostentation of their own magnificence, than the necessities of the State. Of which exactions Rehoboam the Son of Solomon was so far from promising a release, or some mitigation at the least, that he threatened to make them more than double what they had been formerly: and how knew they, but that Asa, and all such as descended from him, might be of the same temper also, and act according to those Principles which their Fathers left them. Whereas the Kings of Israel holding by no other title than the love of their people, and the moderate and regular form of their government over them, had put their mouths in such a taste of the sweets of liberty, and made them so much masters of their own both lives and fortunes; that Naboth durst deny his vine-yard to Ahab, though offering full compensation for it; and Ahab durst not question the life of Naboth, but by suborning witnesses to accuse him of blasphemy. So that the present confusions under which they suffered by the change and violent death of so many Kings one after another, being only temporary, and not likely to continue long; were no persuasions unto them to accept of Asa, and much less to offer themselves unto him; who conceived all adversity to be far more tolerable than the weighty Sceptre of that house. And there was something also of present profit which swayed the business. The people were obliged by the Law of Moses to make three chargeable journeys yearly to Jerusalem, to worship there in the Holy Temple; and to pay a double tenth yearly out of their estates (besides offerings and other casualties) to the Priests and Levites. Jeroboam out of an ungodly policy, fearing these frequent journeys unto Jerusalem might be an occasion of reducing them to the house of David, released them of that charge and trouble, by setting up a new form of worship, erecting golden Calves for them in Dan and Bethel, and leaving every man unto the liberty of his own opinion, so it tended not to the establishment of the old Religion. And on the other side the Levites which dwelled amongst them, and received their Tithes, not willing to conform to these new impieties, and finding that their Ministry was no longer useful, withdrew themselves into the Kingdom of Judah, and left the ancient places of their habitations: by means whereof, the people were released of those payments also. If they returned again to their old obedience, and accepted Asa for their King, they must return again also to their old Religion; the golden Calves of their own imaginations and inventions must no more be worshipped: and (which no doubt prevailed most on the common people, who like that Religion best which costs them nothing) the ancient payments to the Priests and Levites must come up again. Rather than so, they were resolved to suffer yet a little longer, to please themselves in expectation of more settled times: and so no falling off to Asa, though as moderate and religious a Prince as they could have wished for, had they had power of fashioning a King to their own desires. Now as this opportunity of rejoining Israel unto Judah, proved unsuccesful unto Asa, so did the like of uniting Jud●th unto Israel prove as unprofitable unto Joas the Son of Jehoahaz and grandchild of jehu King of Israel, who being provoked by Amaziah King of judah made war upon him; and not only discomfited him without battle, and took him prisoner without blows, but led him captive to the very walls of Jerusalem, and by his authority got the gates thereof to be opened to him. But not contented with this honour, (greater than ever had befallen to the Kings of Israel) he caused 400 Cubits of the wall to be broken down, thorough which breach he entered triumphantly in his chariot, carrying the unhappy Prince before him: and being entered, sacked both the Royal palace, and the holy Temple. This was the opportunity which was given to joas of uniting judah unto Israel; and this the loss of it. For the people, otherwise like enough to have accepted him for their King, as a Prince of whose noble Acts they had heard much speech; were so exasperated by these rash and unseasonable outrages, that they looked upon him as a Sacrilegious Church-Robber, whom the Holy Altars were not safe from; and as a covetous and ungoverned Tyrant, not able to concoct the fullness of his own prosperities. If he were thus insatiable in his covetousness, and insupportable in his pride, when he was a Candidate for their Kingdom: when in all common prudence he should have sought their loves, and insinuated into their good opinions, by easing them of former taxes, and showing them fair hopes of his moderate government: what must they look for when their towns were filled with garrisons, Jerusalem stuffed with armed troops; & all the Princes of the house of David, from whom they might Redemption from cruel bondage, destroyed or banished, or otherwise made unable to afford them suecours? Rather than so, they were resolved to rise as one man against him, and let him see, that neither their Army was so scattered, nor themselves so cowed, but that they durst adventure it to a farther trial. The fear of which made 〈◊〉 sensible of the loss of his opportunity: and so content with hostages for his safe retreat, he returned home again without other benefit of his victory, than the spoil and honour. And that this possibly might be the motive of his going back, without putting the success of the affair to a further hazard; may be made probable by the like occurrence in the story of Guicciardine, which in brief is this. 〈◊〉 Medic●s had very weakly opened the gates of Florence to Charles the eighth, then in his passage towards Naples. Charles entereth it triumphantly as a conquered City, armed in complete manner, and his lance on his thing; his whole army with him. Many insolences being committed by the 〈◊〉, the Citizens prepare to fight in defence of their liberties. Charles willing to go forwards on his m●reh towards Naples, propounds conditions in writing: but so intolerable, that Peter Cappori one of the chief Citizens catching the papers out of the King's Secretary's hands, and tearing them before his face; do you, saith he, sound your trumpets, we will ring our bells, and see what will follow. Which stout and peremptory dealing did so daunt the French, that they condescended upon very easy terms to abandon the City, and restore all the places appertaining unto their estate, which were then in his power. The like consideration probably might prevail with joas, as did then with Charles; and prompt him not to fight with an enraged viultitude in the streets of a City where he could make no use of his horse; and where he might be more galled with women and children, throwing stones or darts out of their windows, and from the tops of their houses, than with an armed enemy in the open field. Nor wanted loas an example of this kind in the times before him, even that of Abimelech in the book of judges, who having taken the Town of Thebet, and forced all the men and women into the Castle, was slain there by a pecce of a Millstone, thrown at his head from one of the Turrets of it by the hands of a woman.  
To proceed further in the story of these several Kings, or recapitulate the sum of their principal actions (as in other places we have done) may be thought unnecessary: the Scripture being in the hands of all fears of persons, in which their actions, and successions, are at large contained. So that I only shall subjoin their names, with the time of their reigns, and the year of the world in which they did begin their Empire: leaving the rest unto the industry and search of the Christian Reader, of whose acquaintance with the Scriptures I dare make no question. This only I premise as concerning the judges, that the time of their continuance in that authority is not to be measured from the time of their coming to it, till the entrance of the next Successor, as in that of the Kings; these being occasionally raised by Almighty God, for some present service, and no standing or established Magistrates; except Moses and josuah only, who held the government during life, and managed it as absolute Princes.  

The Judges and Captains of the Hebrews.  
A. M.  
2454. 1. Moses, a Levite, the Lawgiver of the Hebrews, brought by him out of the Land of Egypt. 40.  
2494. 2. Josuath, an Ephramite, who settled them in the land of Canaan. 33.  
2526. 3. Othoniel, of Judah, by whom they were delivered from the Mesopotamiaens.  
1530. 4. Ehud, a Beniamite, who rescued them from the hand of Eglon King of Moab.  
2610. 5. Deborah the Prophetess, and Barack the Nephtalite, who discomfited the host of Jabin King of the Canaanites.  
2650. 6. Gideon, a Manassite, who ransomed them from the power of the Midianites. 40.  
2690. 7. Abimelech, the Base Son of Gideon. 3.  
2693. 8. Tola, of the Tribe of Issachar. 23.  
2716. 9 jair, a Gileadite. 22.  
2760. 10. jephtah, a Gileadite, by whom the People were redeemed from the hand of the Ammonites,  
2766. 11. Ibsan, of Bethlehem. 7.  
2773. 12. Elon, a Zebulonite. 10.  
2783. 13. Abdon, an Ephramite. 8.  
2790. 14. Samson, a Danite, the Avenger of the People upon the Philistiws.  
2809. 15. Eli, the High Priest, in whose time the Ark was taken by the Philistims.  
2849. 16. Samuel, the Prophet, of the Tribe of Ephraim, in the later end of whose government, the People being weary of the command of their former Rulers, desired to have a King, to go in and out before them like other Nations.   

The Kings of the Hebrews.  
A. M.  
2878. 1. Saul, of the Tribe of Benjamin, the first King of the Hebrews, an unlucky one to begin withal. 17.  
2890. 2. David, the Son of Jesse, of the Tribe of Judah, the most victorious King of the Hebrew Nation. 40.  
2930. 3. Solomon, the Son of David, renowned for building of the Temple. The Kingdom afterward divided into Judah, and Israel.   

The Kings of Judah.  
A. M.  
2971. 1. Rehoboam, the Son of Solomon, the first King of judth. 17.  
2988. 2. Abisah, the Son of Rehoboam. 3.  
2991. 3. Asa, the Son of Abijah; discemfired the numerous Army of Zerah, the Ethiopian or Arabian King.  
3031. 4. jehosaphat, the Son of Asa, a great Reformer of the State, both Ecclesiastical and Civil. 35.  
3056. 5. jehoram, the Son of jehosophat. 8.  
3064. 6. Ahaziah, the Son of Iehoram by Athaliah his wife, the Sister of Ahab King of Israel. 1.  
3065. 7. Athaliah, the Daughter of Omri, and Sister of Ahab, having destroyed the Regal race of the house of David, usurped the Kingdom for 7. years.  
3072. 8. joash, the only surviving Heir of the house of David, restored by jehojada the Priest, to the Throne of his Ancestors. 40.  
3112. 9 Amaziah, the Son of joash, vanquished by joash King of Israel, and a breach forced thorough the walls of Jerusalem. 29.  
3141. 10. Azariah, the Son of Amaziah, called also Vzziah; smote with a Leprosy by the Lord. 52.  
3192. 11. jotham, the Son of Vzziah or Azariah. 16.  
3208. 12. Achaz, the Son of jotham, in whose time, and on whose occasion, the Kingdom of Damascus was ruined by Tiglath-Pileser King of Assyria; and the Tribes on the farther side of jordan led into captivity. 16.  
3224. 13. Hezekiah, the Son of Ahaz, a religious Prince; in whose time the Kingdom of the ten Tribes was destroyed by the Assyrians; and that of Assyria, by the Babylonians.  
3253. 14. Manasses, the wicked son of the good King Hezekiah, restored Idolatry, and put to death the Prophet Esaiah for opposing his irreligous courses. 55.  
3308. 15. Amon the son of Manasses, and as bad as he; slain by a conspiracy of his Servants, when he had reigned but two years only.  
3310. 16. josiah, the son of Amon, a right godly King, unfortunately slain by Pharaoh Necoh King of Egypt, at the battle of Megiddo. 31.  
3341. 17. jehoahaz, the son of josiah, a King of 3. months only, deposed and sent Prisoner by Pharaoh Necoh, to Riblah in the land of Hamath, since called Antiochia.  
18. jehoiakim the son of josiah, and half Brother of jehoahaz, advanced unto the Throne by Necoh, who changed his name from Eliakim, by which he formerly was called, into that of jehoiakim. 11.  
3351. 19 jehoiachin or jechoniah, the son of jehoiakim, at the end of three months led captive unto Babylon, with his wives and Mother, and the great Officers of the Realm, by Nabuchadnezzar.  
20. Zedekiah, an other of the sons of josiah, and brother by the whole blood of jehoahaz, made King by Nabuchadnezzar in the place of jehoiachin or jechoniah; his name being changed from Mattaniah, by which called before. But rebelling against his Benefactor, contrary to the Counsel of the Prophet jerem, he was taken Prisoner in the 11. year of his reign, Jerusalem destroyed, the Temple ruinated, and the People carried Captive to the land of Babylon. A. M. 3362. where they lived in exile 70 years: which time being expired, Cyrus the King of the Persians, gave them leave to return to their Country, and to re-edify their City and Temple; which work being finished, by the encouragement of Ezra, Nehemiah, and Zorobabel, and the Nation again settled in some part of their old possessions, they were after governed by their High-Priests, and the Counsel of the Elders, which they called the Sanhedrim: the Highpriest bearing the chief stroke, and being looked on as the man of the greatest power. And therefore I will here subjoin the Catalogue of so many of them, as governed the affairs of this Country from the Return of the People from the Captivity of Babylon, till the time of the Maccabces; who managed the estate hereof both as Priests and Princes, till their subjection by the Romans.   

The Kings of Ispael.  
A. M.  
2971. 1. jeroboam, the Son of Nebat, of the Tribe of Ephraim, the first King of Israel. 22  
2993. 2. Nadab, the Son of jeroboam. 2.  
2995. 3. Baasha, of the Tribe of Issachar, having slain Nadab, reigned in his steed. 24.  
3019. 4. Ela, the Son of Baasha. 2.  
3021. 5. Zimri, a King of seven days only, the murderer of Ela, and his own Executioner.  
6. Omri, the Captain of the host, who removed the Regal seat from Tirzah to Samaria. 8.  
3029. 7. Ahab, the Son of Omri, and husband of jezebel.  
3051. 8. Ahaziah, the Son of Ahab. 2.  
3053. 9 jehoram, the Brother of Ahaziah. 12.  
3065. 10. jehu, the Captain of the host, vanquished and slew jeboram, reigning in his steed. 28.  
3093. 11. jehoahaz, the Son of Iehu. 17.  
3110. 12. joash, the Son of jehoahaz. 16.  
3126. 13. jeroboam II. the Son of joash. 41.  
3178. 14. Zachariah, the Son of jeroboam the second, after an Interregnum of 11 years, succeeded in the Throne of his Father: slain at the end of six months, by  
3178. 16. Menahem, the Son of Gadi. 10.  
3188. 17. Pekahiah, the Son of Menahem; slain by  
3190. 18. Pekah, the Son of Remaliah; served in the same kind after a reign of 20 years, by  
3210. 19 Hoseah, the Son of Ela, in the fifth year of whose reign, and the 18th year from the death of Pekah, Salmanassar King of Assyria, having by a siege of three years carried the City of Samaria, destroyed the Kingdom of Israel, and led the greatest part of the People into Captivity.   

The High-Priests of the Iews.  
A. M.  
3427. 1. josuah, the Highpriest at the time of the Return, assistant to Zorobabel in rebuilding the Temple, which he lived not to finish; though continuing (as some say) in the Government 100 years. But I believe rather, that the names of his Successors being lost, the whole time is ascribed to him.  
3530. 2. joiakim, said to be the son of josuah; in whose time, by the diligence of Ezra and Nehemiah, the Temple was finished, and the Worship of God restored.  
3580. 3. jonathan, or johanan. 30.  
3610. 4. jaddus, who entertained Alexander the Great coming to Hier●salem (of whom more anon) the brother of that Manasses, for whose sake, and on whose occasion, the Temple on Mount Garazim was built by Sanballat, with the leave of Alexander. 20.  
3630. 5. Ontas succeeded jaddus, as jaddus had done jonathan, not by birth (as formerly) but by the Election of the People.  
3651. 6. Simon, surnamed justus. 9  
3660. 7. Eleazar, the brother of Simon. 32.  
3692. 8. Menelaus, the brother of Eleazar and Simon.  
3718. 9 Onias II. 14.  
3732. 10. Simon II. 10.  
3742. 11. Ontas III. the son of Simon the 2.  
3787. 12. jason, the brother of Omas the 3.  
3789. 13. Menelaus' II. the brother of jason; in whose time the Temple was profaned by the Syrians, at the command of Antiochus Epiphanes.  
3794. 14. Aletmus, under whose Government the Maccabees began to appear in defence of their Country and Religion, by whom succeeded in the office of Highpriest, after his decease. Among these none of greater note than jaddus, Highpriest at such time as Alexander the Great having conquered Syria marched towards Jerusalem, and was encountered by this jaddus in his Priestly vestments; assuring him in the name of the most high God, and making it demonstrable from the Prophecy of Daniel, that he should prosper in his enterprise against the Persians. An hope which Alexander did embrace with the greater confidence, because (as he affirmed to Parmenio his chief commander) he had once at Diu, a City of Macedon, seen in a dream or Vision such a person as jaddus was, so habited, and professing the same one God, by whom he was encouraged to pursue the action which he had in hand, with assurance of Victory. And upon this, the Iews were so much favoured by him, that he gave them leave to live according to their own laws, and to enjoy with freedom their own Religion. But it held only for his own time. For shortly after his decease, they were on both sides plagued by the Kings of Egypt and Syria, who ransacked their Cities, slaughtered their People, made havoc of their goods, and compelled many of them both to eat of forbidden meats, and offer sacrifice unto Idols. At the last God raised up Mattathias and his five sons to resist these insolences, who in the reign of Antiochus Epiphanes King of Syria, undertook the protection of the People, and gave unto the Syrians many notable overthrows, insomuch that the jews made choice of judus surnamed Maccaboeus (the eldest of the five brethem) for their Prince or Governor.   

The Maccabaean Princes of Jewry.  
A. M.  
3799. 1. Judas Maceaboeus, one of the nine Worthies, vanquished three great and puissant Armies of the Syrians, conducted by Apollonius, Gorgias, and Lysias, men of great renown, being Commanders of the forces of Antiochus Epiphanes before mentioned.  
1805. 2. Jonathan, the brother of Judas, vanquished the forces of Bacchides and Alcimus, Captains of Demetrius King of Syria; and after many notable exploits and deeds of Arms, was treacherously murdered by Tryphon, aspiring at that time to the Syrian Diadem.  
3823. 3. Simon, the brother of Judas and Jonathan, subdued the Cities of Gaza, Joppe, and Jamnia, and cleared Judaea of the Syrians: perfidiously slain in the course of his fortunes by his son-in-law Ptolemy. 8.  
3831. 4. Johannes Hyrcanus, the third son of Simon, (his two other Brethren being in the power of Ptolemy) succeeded in the Government. He destroyed the Temple on Mount Garazim, subdued the Idumoeans, compelling them to be Circumcised; transferred the war into Syria, and dying left the Sovereignty to his eldestsonne Aristobulus.   

The Maccabaean Kings of Judah.  
3862. 1. Aristobulus, the first King of Judah after the Babylonian captivity; starved his mother, and slew Antigonus his brother.  
3863. 2. Alexander, the brother of Aristobulus, exceedingly enlarged the Kingdom of Jewrie, but was withal so great a Tyrant, that he slew of his subjects 50000 in battle; and commanded 800 of his principal enemies to be hanged before his face. 27  
3890. 3. Alexandra or Solome, wife to Alexander. 9  
3899. 4. Hyrcanus, elder son to Alexander, was disturbed in his succession by his younger brother Aristobulus; but was at length firmly established in his Throne, by Pompey: who carried Aristobulus with his sons, Alexander and Antigonus, captives to Rome. Alexander escaping out of prison, troubled the quiet of his Country, till he was surprised by Gabinius, and slain by Scipio, two of Pompey's Captains: after whose death Antigonus set free by julius Caesar, deprived Hyrcanus of his Kingdom, and cut off his ears. Revenge suddenly followed this villainy: for he was slain by Marcus Antonius, and his Kingdom given to a stranger.   

The stranger Kings of jewry.  
A. M.  
3920. 1. Herod the Ascalonite, surnamed the Great, son of Antipater an Idnmaean, was by Mar. Antony created, and by Augustus confirmed King of Jewrie, under whom that Kingdom was more enlarged, and in greater splendour, than ever it had been in the time of David. A Prince of great magnificence, but of great vices. During his reign, the Sceptre being now departed from judah, the Lord CHRIST was born.  
A. C.  
6. 2. Archelaus, eldest son of Herod at the time of his death, succeeded with the title of King, but in truth and realty possessed only a tetrarchy or fourth part of the Kingdom, though the best and largest of the four, containing judaea, Samaria, and Idumaea. The rest of Herod's Kingdom was divided into three other Tetrarchies, i.e. the tetrarchy of Galilee and Perae●, given to Herod Antipas; 2. That of Ituraea given to Philip, another of the sons of Herod; And 3. That of Abilene conferred on Lysanias. Banished into France, his tetrarchy was made a Province of the Roman Empire; governed by Pontus Pilate, at our Saviour's Passion.  
16. 3. Herod II. surnamed Antipas, Tetrarch of Galilee and Peraea, on the banishment of Archelius, succeeded him, as chief of the Herodian family, but not in his tetrarchy; and at last followed him in his banishment also. This is he who murdered john Baptist, and in whose time CHRIST suffered.  
40. 4. Herod III. surnamed Agrippa, Nephew to Herod the Great, by his son Aristobulus begotten on Mariam of the race of the Maccabees; was by Caligula first invested in the Tetrarchy of his Uncle Philip with the title of King, and next in that of Antipas also, and finally by Claudius in that of Lysanias also; some part of the tetrarchy of Archelaus being added unto his dominions. This was the man that murdered james, and imprisoned Peter, and in the end was stricken by an Angel, and devoured by worms. 7.  
47. 5. Agrippa Minor, son of Herod Agrippa, was he before whom Saint Paul pleaded in defence of the Gospel; and the last which had the title of King of the jews: for in his time the City of Jerusalem was destroyed by Titus, and the whole Kingdom made a Province of the Roman Empire. Anno 73.   
And here it is to be observed, that when Salmanassar had subdued and captivated the ten Tribes of Israel, he sent new Colonies of his own to plant this Country; that so fruitful and well-situate a part of his Empire might yield its just tribute, and not lie open to the fury of the next Invader. But the Romans not having (it seemeth) so much policy or providence, as those whom they accounted barbatous; having laid the Country desolate, left it unfurnished of new Colonies; whereby the Persians, next the Saracens, and after them the Turks, entering the Roman Empire at this door, have successively driven the Romans out of the whole house. Now that we may the better perceive how the Romans had weakened and almost utterly rooted out the jewish Nation, we will relate some of their particular massacres: which were not more cruelly inflicted on them by the enemy, then justly deserved by themselves; they wishing, though (I suppose) not desiring, that the innocent Blood of our Saviour should be on them and their children. First then the inhabitants of Caesarea slew of the jews in one day, about 20000, and such as fled were took and imprisoned by Florus the Roman Lieutenant of judaea. To revenge this slaughter, the jews set upon the Syrians; in which skirmish 13000 of them were slain. The people of Alexandria put 50000 of them to the sword; they of Damascus, 10000; Antonius a Roman Captain, slew in Ascalon 10000 of them; and Cestius another Captain, 8040 persons. Now to come to the wars here managed by Vespasian. This Vespasian in the siege of Aphaca, slew and took prisoners, 17130. persons. In Samaria, 11600. persons; in jotopata, 42200 persons. In joppa, so many killed and drowned themselves, that the Sea threw up again 4200 dead bodies: and the rest so totally perished, that there remained none to carry tidings unto Jerusalem, of the loss of the Town. In the City of Tarichea, were slain, and made captives, 45000 persons, besides those which were given to the King Agrippa. In Gamala there perished 90000. and none left alive but only two women: In Gascala 5000. men died by the sword; in the City of Gadera there were slain 32200, besides an infinite number of such as had drowned themselves. In Jerusalem itself, there died 1100000 of them, partly by the sword, and parley by the famine; the worse enemy of the two: there were found 2000 in privies and sinks; and 97000 taken prisoners, insomuch that 30 Iews were sold for a penny. So punctual was the Divine justice in retaliating to this wretched people according to the measure of their iniquities; that they who bought their Saviour for 30 pence, should be sold at 30 for a penny in the open market.  
Now that Jerusalem was able to contain such a number of people, is evident in that when Cestius was Lieutenant of jewry, the Highpriest did at his request number the people which came thither to eat the Pas●hall Lamb, and found them to be two millions and seven hundred thousand living souls, all found and purified: For to lepers, or men having a flux of seed, or women in their monthly terms, or to strangers, it was not lawful to eat of it. And when Titus laid siege to the City it was in the feast of the Passeover, when most of the people were there assembled; God (as it were) having thus imprisoned them. All these massacres, besides divers others which I have omitted, and infinite numbers which were slain in the fields and villages, which drowned themselves, and which were privately made away, amounting all to almost 2000000 of people, happened in the compass of 4 years, beginning at the 12 of Nero, and ending at the 2d. of Ve●p●sian: yet was not the whole Nation rooted out, till the year 136. For then this miserabic people, having stirred two not able rebellions; the one under Trajan, and the last under Adrian the Emperors; were generally banished their native Country, and never again permitted to inhabit it, otherwise than as strangers. After this dissolution the jews were dispersed all over the world, and especially in Spain, where Adrian commanded many of them to dwell: yet they found every where so little favour, that having divers times been put to grievous mulcts and ransoms, they were at last thrust cut of most of the Kingdoms of Europe also. They were ban shed out of England by Edward the first, Anno 1290. Out of France, by Philip the fair, 1307. Out of Spain, by Ferdinand the Catholic, 1492. Out of Portugal, by Emmanuel, 1497. Out of Naples and Sicily, by Charles the fist, 1539. Yet are they found in great numbers in the Romish parts of Germany and Poland; in most Cities of Italy; especially Room itself, where there are no less than 15000 or 20000 of them; and also in the Pope's Country of Avignton. The reason why they are permitted to live thus under the Pope's nose, is pretended to be an expectation of their conversion, which is a mere pretence; indeed the true reason being the benefit hence arising to his Holiness coffers: the hopes of their conversion being very small, and the means less. For besides the scandal, datum & acceptum, by the Papists fond worshipping of Images, so peremptorily contrary to the first table of the Law: they are not permitted to see any book of the Christian Religion, no not so much as the new Testament. And (which worketh much upon men of their metal) because at their conversion they must quit all their goods unto the Church, as being ill gotten, and by consequence the works of the devil; which in their baptism they promise to renounce. They have also a Synagogue at Amsterdam, and are pretty thick spread over the Dominions of the Turks: who notwithstanding so hate them for crucifying of CHRIST, that they used to say in derestation of a thing, I would I might die a jew. Neither will they permit a jew to turn Turk, unless he be first baptised. And though their multitudes be so great both in Thessalonica and Constantinople, that it is conceived they do amount to the number of 160000 persons: yet are they not only contemned and hated, but there and in all other places of their habitation, upon every tumultuous assembly of the Common people, and constantly every Easter, wheresoever they be, in danger of death. Insomuch that if a jew do but stir out of doors betwixt Maundie Thursday at noon, and Easter Eve at night, the Christians of the East amongst whom they dwell, (though far fewer in number) will be sure to stone them, because at that time, they buffeted, derided, and in fine crucified their Saviour. Hated in all the parts of the Turks dominions, because employed as Publioans in gathering and enhancing the public tributes, which they exact with all severity that may be, and improve unto the most. And no less hated in all parts of the Christian world, as enemies to the Cross of CHRIST, so unreclaimably addicted to their ancient Judaisme, and so abhorring from the conversation of other men, that it is not possible that they should reap any other harvest than contempt and scorn from those amongst whom they dwell.  
To give you their Character in brief. They are a people which know how to comply with the times, and the condition which they live in; especially if their profit be concerned in it: reviled like dogs, and used like slaves, yet never show so much as an angry Countenance. A Nation which will thrive wheresoever they come, but most by usury and hrocage; not lending any thing but on pawns; and those once forfeited never more redeemable. The best of both Sexes said to have an unsavoury rankness, not incident (if not caused by sluttishness) to other people: from whom as different in their habit as in their Religion. And as for that, they retain still Circumcision as the badge and cognizance of their Nation, but mingled with many ceremonies not prescribed by the law, nor observed by the Ancients: placing a void chair for the Prophet Elias, whom they believe to be present, though unseen, at the solemnity. And upon this they are so besotted, that they conceive the female sex uncapable of eternal life, because not capable of Circumcision: and therefore use to name them with no other Ceremony, than at the six week's end to have some young wenches lift up the Cradle with the child in it, which she that standeth at the head, giveth the name unto, Of their Sabbath so extremely doting, that they have added to the superstitions left them by the Phtrisees: and herein they are so precise, that if a jew travel on the Friday, and in the Evening fall so short of his journey's end, that it amounts to more than 2000 Cubits, or six Furlongs, which they account a Sabbathdties' journey, there must he sit him down and keep his Sabbath, though in a wood, or field, or the highway side, without fear of wind or weather, of Thiefs or Robbers, and without taking order for meat or drink: periculo latronum praedonumgque omni, penuria item omni cibi potusque●neglect is, as Buxdorfius hath it. And so far have they gone in despite of Christ, as to declare it unlawful to lift the Ox or Ascanio out of a ditch, permitted in the strictest times of Pharisaical rigour. So pertinacious in retaining the difference of meats and drinks, that thy will by no means sit at the same table with other men: and so precise in the dressing of it, that they will eat of no flesh but of their own killing only; and that too with such cautions and reservations, that if any of the entrails be corrupt or dislocated, they will sell the whole beast to the Christians for a very trifle. Beneficial in that only to the neighbouring Christian. Wine they forbear except it be of their own planting, not so much out of dislike of that liquor, for they are generally good fellows, and love their bellies; as for fear the wine should be baptised; a Cetemeny much used in the Eastern parts. Of the coming of their Messiah so full of hopes, that there is no great Warrior stirring, but they look upon him as the man, till some sad tragedy or other, which they suffer under that persuasion, makes them see there error: promising to themselves whensoever he cometh, a restitution of their Kingdom; and such felicities there in in the literal sense of some Texts of Scripture, which carry in them a more mystical and sacred meaning. That in good time (but Gods not theirs) they shall be made partakers of the several blessings which those Texts do speak of, is both the hope and wish of all pious men, who cannot choose but grieve to behold the natural branches so long dismembered and cut off from the tree of life. And this they neither hope nor wish for but on some fair grounds presented to them by Saint Paul: who saith expressly, that when the fullness of the Gentiles is once come in, that then all Israel shall be saved; Rom. 11. 25, 26. The words so plainly positive that they need no commentary; or if they did, we have the general consent of the ancients, besides the constant current of most modern writers, which cherish the glad hopes of their conversion to the Gospel, which the Apostle doth there aim at. Origen, Athanasius, Hierome, Augustixe, chrysostom, for the primitive times; Bedoe and Hugo Cardinalis in the times succeeding, Gorram and Thomas Aquinas for those of Rome, Calvin, Beza, Bullinger and Peter Martyr for the Reformed Churches, besides divers others of great note, so expound that Text. Nor want there other Texts of Scripture to affirm as much; which he that doth desire to see, may find them with the expositions of most Christian Writers, in a Book writ by Doctor Willet, entitled De generali et novissima Judaeorum vocatione; and thither I refer the more curious Reader. Out of all I shall take these words of Peter Martyr, written on that passage of Saint Paul to the Romans, viz. Non ita Judaei perierunt, ut nulla de illorum salute spes super sit; The Jews (saith he) are not so wholly fallen from the favour of God, but that there still remain some hopes of their salvation. Of their Salvation then by the Gospel of Christ, when the fullness of the Gentiles is once come in, we conceive good hopes: but whether there be any of their restitution to their temporal Kingdom, is a further question, and not so clearly evidenced in the Book of God, though there be somewhat in that Book which may seem to intimate it. That the opinion of being restored by the Messiah to that temporal power which was taken from them by the Romans, was prevalent as well amongst Christ's Disciples, as the rest of the jews, is, as I take it, clear enough in the holy Gospel. In such a Kingdom and no other did the two sons of Zebedee desire to sit on both hands of their Master: and the same was it and no other, which all of them expected, appeareth by the words of Cleophas, Luke 24. 21. that Christ should have restored them. We though said he, that this would have proved the man that should have redeemed Israel, Redeemed Israel? from what? from sin and Satan, or the curse and bondage of the Law? Not so, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; but from the yoke of vassalage which the Romans had so lately imposed on them, say the Father's right. Touching the same it was that they moved him saying, Lord wilt thou at this time restore again the Kingdom of Israel? Acts 1. 6. In answer whereunto, our Saviour makes them no denial, as unto the thing, nor tells them that they never must expect such a restauration; but only puts them off as unto the time, and bids them rest themselves on the pleasure of God the Father, in whose hands the disposing of all Kingdoms was. It is not for you (saith he) to know the times and seasons, which the Father hath in his own power, ver. 7. By which answer (as it seems to me) there is a possibility of restoring them to their Kingdom also, though not in the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, at that very instant when they were most desirous to have it done, or at any other time fit for them to know, that being a secret which the Father hath reserved to himself alone.  
But leaving these speculations of a restitution of the Throne of Israel, and the great power and privileges it may then enjoy; let us look back on the estate in which it flourished in the former times, when the forces and Revenue of it were at the highest. And first for the Revenues, they amounted in the time of Solomon (as is said 2 Chron. 9 13.) to 666 Talents of Gold, besides the benefits of his Customs and Impositions, which cometh to two Millions, and nine hundred ninety and seven thousand pounds of yearly income. A vast sum for such a little Kingdom. Nor can we reckon them at less, if they were not greater, in the time of David: of whom it is affirmed, 1 Chron. 22. 14. that he left to Solomon an hundred thousand Talents of Gold, and ten hundred thousand Talents of Silver, towards the building of the Temple: besides three thousand Talents of Gold, and seven thousand Talents of Silver, formerly deposited for that purpose, as is and 1 Chron. 29. 4. Which if it be computed at the ordinary rate of a Jewish Talon, reckoning a Talon of Gold at four thousand and five hundred pound, and a Talon of Silver, at three hundred seventy five pound, will amount in our money to eight hundred and forty millions and one hundred twenty and five thousand pounds. So vast a sum, that it had been sufficient to have built a Temple of pure Gold and Silver, far greater than the Temple of Solomon, without other materials. I conceive therefore with our learned and industrious Brerewood, that by the Talon in those places we are to understand a far lesser sum than the ordinary Hebrew Talents: which whether it doth there signify a Sickle only, which is half a Crown of English money, as Eupolemus, cited by Eusebius, was of opinion; or that every Talon of Gold, came to three golden Crowns of Athens, which maketh forty five shillings of English money, as Julius Pollux hath it in his Onomasticon; I am not able to determine. But measuring it by the last estimate, which I more approve of, it will amount to two millions and two hundred ninety and five thousand pounds: a vast sum for a King to leave in ready money, which was always exercised in war. And though I do not find expressly what the Revenues of Judah might amount unto after the division: yet by one circumstance I find them to be very great. For it is written 2 Kings 18. 14. that the yearly tribute imposed upon Hezekiah by the King of Assyria, was three hundred Talents of Silver, and thirty Talents of Gold, amounting (according to the ordinary Hebrew Talon, which questionless is there intended) to two hundred forty seven thousand and five hundred pounds of English money: and therefore probably his ordinary Revenue must be thrice as much, above that ttribue; Else the Assyrian had not left him a subsistence for a King to live on. Nor can I think that the Revenues of this Crown were less to Herod, than formerly to Solomon or David; considering his vast expenses, the many and magnificent Structures which he brought to perfection, and the large Legacies he gave at the time of his death; not paralleled by any King before or since, though of a larger and more ample territory than he stood possessed of.  
What forces the Kings of the Hebrews were able to bring into the field, may best be estimated by the muster which David made when he numbered the People: the inrolment of such as were able to bear arms, and fit for service, coming in all to five hundred thousand fight men, in Judab only, and eight hundred thousand men in the Tribes of Israel. 'tis true, that David never brought into the field so vast a multitude; but when the Kingdoms weet divided, and war denounced betwixt Jeroboam and Abijah, we find almost the whole number brought into the field: that is to say, eight hundred thousand on the side of Jerobsam the King of Israel, and four hundred thousand by Abijah the King of judah. After this, out of that small Kingdom, Asa the Son of Abijah, being invaded by Zerah the Arabian or Ethiopian, advanced an Army of five hundred and eighty thousand men; which was more than the inrolment made in the time of David. An infinite proportion for so small a Kingdom; and were it not a vouched in the holy Scriptures, far above belief: had not that God who said to Abraham, that his seed should be as the stars of Heaven for multitude, been able to have made it good.  
As for the story and affairs of this Country since the time of Adrian, the jews being all expelled their native Soil, and Christianity in fine prevailing over all those parts, it was inhahited as the rest of the Empire was, by men of that Religion only: in this Country so advanced and countenanced, that Helena the Mother of Constantine, is reported to have built in it no less than two hundred Temples and Monasteries in places of most note for the miracles of Christ our Savio ur, or the dwelling of some of his Disciples. In the year 615. the Persians, under the conduct of Chosroes their King, became Masters of it; and possessed themselves of Jerusalem also: expelled thence by the valour and good fortune of the Emperor Heraclius, who recovering the Cross on which Christ suffered, out of the hands of the Pagans, carried it with as great a triumph into Constantinople, as David once did the Ark into Jerusalem. But this glory and rejoicing did not long continue: For within twenty years after the recovery of this City from the power of the Persians, it was again conquered and subdued by Homar or Aumar Caliph of the Saracens, Anno 637. Under this yoke the captivated Christians had long suffered, when they changed the Tyrant but not the tyranny: the Turks about the year 1079. overcoming the Saracens, and domineering in their steed. Twenty years did the Christians langnish under this oppression, when one Peter an Hermit, travelling for devotion to the holy Lnd, and being an eye-witness of the miseries under which they groaned, at his return, made his addresses to Pope Vrban the second, acquainting him with the sad condition of the poor Christians in those Countries. A Council thereupon is called at Clermont in France, where the Pope (willing to employ the Christian Princes farther off, that he might the better play his game at home) did so effectually advance and indeer the business, that no fewer than three hundred thousand fight men, under several Leaders, undertook the service. And it prospered so well with them in the first beginning, that having beaten the Turks out of Asia Minor, taken the great City of Antioch, and most of the strong Towns of Syria, they encamped before Jerusalem, and in short time took it, Anno 1099. after it had been four hundred years and upwards in the power of the Infidels. The City being thus gained, was offered with the title of King, to Robert Duke of Normandy, Son of William the Conqueror: but he upon the hopes of the Kingdom of England, refused that honour, never prospering, as it was observed, after that refusal. Godfrey of Bovillon, Duke of Lorreine, had the next offer of it, which with a religious joy he accepted of; though on the day of his Inanguration he refused the Crown: affirming that it was not fit for a Christian Prince to wear in that City a Crown of Gold, where the Redeemer of the World beware a Crown of Thornes.  

The Kings of Jerusalem.  
1099. 1. Godfrey of Bovillon, Duke of Lorreine.  
1100. 2. Baldwin of Lorreine, brother of Godsrey, won Ptolemais, and many other Cities of Syria.  
1118. 3. Baldwin II. surnamed of Bruges, Cousin of Godfrey and Baldwin, the Former Kings, overcame the Sultan of Damascus, and enlarged his Kingdom by the addition of Tyre.  
1131. 4. Fulk, Earl of Anjon, having married Millicent the daughter of Baldwin the 2d. succeeded after his decease; unfortunately killed with a fall from his horse.  
1142. 5. Baldwin III. Son of Fulk and Millicent, fortified Gaza against the Caliph of Egypt, and recovered Paneade from the King of Damascus.  
1164. 6. Almericus, the Brother of Baldwin the 3d. so distressed the great Caliph of Egypt, that he was forced to call in the Turks to aid him; by whom slain, and his Kingdom transferred on Sarracon, the Turkish General.  
1173. 7. Baldwin IU. Son of Almericus, overthrew Saladine the victorious King of the Turks in a fight near Ascalon, and valiantly defended his Dominions.  
1185. 8. Baldwin V. Son of Sibyl the Sister of Baldwin the 4th. by William Marquis of Montferrat, unnaturally poisoned by his own mother, having reigned only five months, to make way for her second husband, called  
1185. 9 Guy of Lusignan, the last King of Jerusalem, that had the possession of the City, during whose time Saladine the Sultan of Egypt won that Kingdom, Anno 1187. which his Successors defended against all invasions, till the year 1517. in which Selimus the first, Emperor of the Turks, added the Holy Land, together with Egypt, to his Empire. When Jerusalem was taken by the Christians, the Germane Emperor's name was Fredericus, the Popes, Vrbanus, the Hierosolymitan Patriarch, Heraclius; and so also were they called, when the Christians again lost it. This is the conceit of Roger Hoveden in the life of Henry the second; but how it can agree with Chronology, I do not see.   
After the taking of Jerusalem by Sultan Saladine, the Christians retired their forces into some of the other Towns of the Holy land; which they made good against the enemy: and defended them under the government of these three Kings following, viz. 

10. Conrade Marq. of Montferrat, husband of Isabel the daughter of Almericus King of Jerusalem.  
11. Henry Earl of Campagne, second husband of Isabel.  
12. John di Brenne, husband of Mary, or Yoland as some call her, daughter of Conrade and Isabel, the last Christian King that ever had possession in Syria or Palestine: inhabited ever-since by Moors and Arabians, few Christians, and not many Turks but such as be in garrisons only. Yoland the daughter of this John di Brenne, was wife to Frederick King of Naples, who in her right entitled himself King of Jerusalem: and so now do the Kings of Spain, as heirs unto, and possessors of the Kingdom of Naples. Concerning which title it would not be amiss to insert this story. When the wars, in Queen Elizabeth's time, were hot between England and Spain, there were Commissioners of both sides appointed to treat of peace. They met at a Town of the French Kings, and first it was debated in what tongue the negotiation should be handled. A Spaniard thinking to give the English Commissioners a shrewd gird, proposed the French tongue as most fit: it being a language which the Spaniards were well skilled in; and for these gentlemen of England, I suppose (saith he) that they cannot be ignorant of the language of their fellow-subjects: their Queen is Queen of France as well as of England. Nay in faith my masters, replied Doctor Dale, (the master of the Requests) the French tongue is too vulgar for a business of this secrecy and importance, especially in a French Town. We will rather treat in Hebrew, the language of Jerusalem, whereof your master is King: and I suppose you are therein as well skilled, as we in the French. And thus much for this title.    
The Arms of the Christian Kings in Jerusalem was Luna, a cross crosser crossed, Sol, which was commonly called the Jerusalem Cross. But for their forces and Revenues, I cannot see how any estimate may be made hereof, in regard they subsisted not by their own proper strength, but by the Purses and the Forces of the Western Christians; more or less active in that service, as zeal, or emulation, or desire of glory were predominant in them.  
Chief Orders of Kinght-hood in this Kingdom after the recovery thereof from the power of the Turks, Were  
1. Of the Sepulchre, said to be instituted originally by Queen Helena, the Mother of Constantine the Great, by whom the Temple of the Sepulchre was indeed first built: but more truly by Philip King of France, Anno 1099. at such time as that Temple was regained from the Turks. Their Arms the same with that of the Kings before blazoned, representing the five wounds of our Saviour CHRIST. At the first conferred on none but Gentlemen of blood and fortunes; now saleable to any that will buy it of the Pater-Guardian, who with a Convent of Franciscans doth reside near that Temple.  
2. Of Saint John of Jerusalem, begun by one Gerrard, Anno 1114. and confirmed by Pope Paschalis the second. Their badge or Cognizance, is a White Cross of eight points. Their duty to defend the Holy land, relieve Pilgrims, and succour Christian Princes against the Insidels. They were to be of noble parentage and extraction: and grew in time to such infinite riches, especially after the suppression of the Templars (most of whose lands were after given unto this Order) that they had at one time in the several parts of Christendom no fewer than 20000. Manors; and of such reputation in all Christian Kingdoms, that in En●land the Lord Prior of this Order, was accounted the Prime Baron in the Realm. But now their Revenue is not a little diminished, by the withdrawing of the Kings of England and other Protestant Princes from the Church of Rome: who on that change, seized on all the Lands of this Order in their several Countries, and either kept them to themselves, or disposed them to others as they pleased. Of these we shall speak more when we are in Malta, where they now reside: advertising only at the present, that their first Great Master was that Gerrard by whom they were founded; the last that had his residence in the Holy land one John de Villiers, in whose time being driven out of Palestine, they removed unto Cyprus, and in the time of Fulk de Villaret Anno 1309. to the Isle of Rhodes. Outed of which by Solomon the Magnificent Anno 1522. they removed from one place ro another, till at last by the magnificence of Charles the fifth Anno 1530. they were settled in Malta: and there we shall speak farther of them.  
3. Of the Templars, instituted by Hugh of Payennes, Anno 1113, and confirmed by Pope Eugenius. Their ensign was a Red Cross, in token that they should shed their blood to defend Christ's Temple. They were buried Cross-legged, and wore on their backs the figure of the Cross; for which they were by the common people called Cross-back, or Crouch-back, and by corruption, Crook-back. Edmund Earl of Lancaster, second son to our Henry the third, being of this Order, was vulgarly called Edmund Crook-back; which gave Henry the fourth a foolish occasion to feign, that this Edmund (from whom he was descended) was indeed the eldest son of King Henry the third, but for his crookedness and deformity, his younger brother was preferred to the Crown before him. These Knights had in all Provinces of Europe their subordinate governor's, in which they possessed on less than 16000 Lordships; the greatness of which Revenue was not the least cause of dissolving the Order. For Philip the fair, king of France, had a plot to invest one of his sons with the title of King of Jerusalem, and hoped to procure of the Pope the revenue of this order to be laid unto that Kingdom for support of the Title: which he might the better do, because Cl●ment the fifth then Pope, for the love he bore to France, had transferred his feat from Rome to Avignion. But herein his hopes deceived him; for this Order being dissolved, the lands thereto belonging were given to the Knights Hospitallers, or of Saint John. The crimes objected against this Order was, first, their revolt from their professed obedience unto the Patriarch of Jerusalem, who was their visitor; Secondly, their unspeakable pride; and thirdly their sins against nature. The house of our Law-students in London, called the Temple, was the chief house of the Knights of this order in England: and was by the Knights of Saint John, whose principal mansion was in Smithfield, sold unto the students of the Laws, for the yearly rent of 10 l. about the middle of the reign of Edward the third.  
These three orders M. Salden (and deservedly) putteth not in his Titles of honour, in that they were prohibited to kiss a woman: honorary Knighthood, and the love of Ladies, going together like virtue and reward.   
Thus much for Palestine.   

OF ARABIA.  
ARABIA hath on the East, Chaldaea, and the Bay or Gulf of Persia; on the West, Palestine, some part of Egypt, and the whole course of the Red-Sea; on the North, the River Euphraes', with some parts of Syria and Palestine; and on the South, the main Southern Ocean. But at some times the name extended somewhat further: Pliny enlargeth it as far as to Comagena, the North part of Syria, in regard that many Arabian Colonies had been their planted by Tigranes; and Xenophon comprehending in it the greatest part also of Mesopotamia, because situate on the West of the River Tigris, and consequently the Western part of the Assyrian Empire, as the word Ereb doth import; from whence some derive the Erymon and name hereof. Which notwithstanding, in the general esteem of Authors it is bounded only as before.  
As for the name, there be some that derive it from Arabus a supposed Son of Apollo and Babylonia; others from three supposititious Sons of Janus Pater, one of the pretended Grandsonnes of Cham. Who is fabled to have sent his Son Arabus into Arabia Deserta; Petreius, into Arabia Petraea; and Sabus, into Arabia Felix the dwelling place of the Sabaeans. And for this trim conceit we are beholding to the Berosus of Friar Annius. More probable is their conjecture who derive the name from the Hebrew, Arab, signifying black, by reason of the swarth or tawny complexion of the inhabitants, who are inter ni● rum & fulvum, as Vertomannus an eye-witness hath informed us of them: on the same reason as one of the Provinces of Africa, is commonly entitled the Land of Negroes. But the most likely origination of it, as I conceive, is from Harabi, which signifieth in the Hebrew a Thief or Robber, such as the Arabians, in all ages, have been known to be. According unto that of the Prophet Jeremy, In the ways thou hast sat for them as an Arabian in the Wilderness, as our English reads it, tanquam Latro insidians in solitudine, saith the Vulgar Latin, Jerem. 32. St. Hierome, though he render it, quasi Latro, as the Vulgar doth, yet in his Commentary he informs us, that the word doth also signify an Arabian, quae gens latrociniis deditausque hodie incursat Palestinae fines, etc. which people being addicted to thest and robbery, do to this day (faith he) infest the coasts of Palestine which border near them, and lay in wait for those which had any occasion to travel thither. Agreeable hereunto is the observation of Martin del Rio; Adeo latrociniis infames sunt, ut Hebraeis Arabs, latronem denotat, sicut Chananaeus Mercatorem, Chaldaeus Mathematicum: i.e. So infamous were they for their theft and frequent Robberies, that it was as familiar with the Jews to call a thief by the name of Arabian, as by Chanaanite to signify a Merchant, or to use the word Chaldaean for a Mathematician. In the same sense they came in the succeeding times to be called Saracens, from Sarak or Saraka, an Arabian word, which signifieth to steal; whereof more anon: no otherwise than one of the American Islands had the name of Ladrones, or Insula latronum, given by Magellanus, from the theevishness of the Inhabitants, who had stolen his cockboat.  
I have stayed the longer on the name, because it doth express so much of the Character of the people also: living for the most part upon spoil and robbery, as all that travel that way know by sad experience. Of mean statures, raw-boned, tawny or swart-complexioned, having feminine voices; of swift but noiseless gate, and upon you ere you are aware. Of no set dwellings (except only in Arabia Felix) living in tents which they remove like walking Cities, for the benefit of pasturage, and hope of booty: for this last cause hanging about the skirts of more habitable Countries; and having robbed retire with a marvellous speed. Mounted on Dromedaries for that purpose, a beast of most incredible swiftness, satisfied with little food, though without water to it, and will easy carry a man a hundred miles a day without any refreshing. Nor are such horses as they have, though but poor and lean, of less speed, or less patient of travel: whom they feed twice a day with the milk of Camels, and think them not worth keeping, if not able to outgo an Ostrich. As now, formerly all horsemen, and but ill appointed; fitter to rob and spoil than to deal with Soldiers, as riding stark naked, and trusting rather to the swiftness of their horses than any other way of resistance where they were opposed.  
There language is the Arabic, so called from this Country, but not proper to this Country only, Spoken in all places where Mahometanism hath got any footing; The Alcoran being written in it, the public offices of their Religion performed in it, and the tongue taught in Schools as generally as with us the Latin: but made the natural language in Mesopotamia, Syria, Palestine, the three Arabia's, Egypt, and all Barbary, except the Kingdom of Morocco. A great extent, but short of that which some give to it, who will have it spoken in two parts of the whole habitable world.  
The Christian faith was first here planted by Saint Paul, of whose being in Arabia, after his conversion, he telleth us, Gal. 1. 17. to which the coming in of the Saracens gave a great increase in the time of Mav●● their Queen, during the Empire of Valentinian the first; Moses a man of exemplary piety, and famed for many miracles, being created their first Bishop: after more generally propagated over all the Country by their King Alamandarus, Anastasius then reigning in the East. But long it had not been received, when supplanted by Mahometanism, which had its first beginning here, and hath so universally overspred the whole face hereof, that now there are no Christians left in all the Country, except only in Elior a Port Town in the Bay of Arabia Felix, in Petra the chief City of Arabia Petraea, and two small Monasteries about Mount Sinai.  
It is in circuit about 4000 miles, but of so unequal and heterogeneous composition, that no general Character can be given of it: and therefore we must look upon it, as it stands divided into Arabia Deserta, 2. Arabia Petraea, 3. Arabia Felix, and 4. the Arabic Lands.  

1. ARABIA DESERTA.  
ARABIA DESERTA, (called Beriara by the Turks) is bounded on the East, with Babylonia; on the West, with parts of Palestine, and Arabia Petraea; on the North, with Palmyren● and Mesopotamia, from which last parted by Euphrates; and on the South, by some parts of Petraea, and Arabia Felix.  
It hath the name of Deserta, from the vast deserts which are in it, and the un-inhabitedness thereof; called also by Aristides, Aspera, from the roughness; by Servius, Inferior, or the Lower, in regard of the situation of it more towards the River; by Lucian, from the frequent bottoms and valleys in it, Arabia Cava; and finally by the jews it was called Kedar, from the blackness or swarthiness of the People; the word in Hebrew signifying as much as Sun-bnrnt; whence the people are by some writers called Kedareni, and by Pliny Cedraei.  
But the common and most usual name of it is Arabia Deserta, agreeable to the nature of it, being generally a sandy Country full of vast deserts, in which all such as travel use to carry their Provisions with them, and to guide themselves in their journey by the course of the Stars: though in some parts which lie near Euphrates and the Mountains of Arabia Felix, it have some few towns, and those resorted to by Merchants. But this is only in those parts, the residue of the Country being so desolate and waste, that one who had traveled in it, doth describe it to be so wild a place, ut nec homines nec bestia videantur, nec Aves; imo nec arbores nec germen aliquod, sed non nisi montes saxosi, altissimi, asperrimi. A Country faith Guilandinus Melchior, where are found neither men nor beasts, no not so much as birds or trees, nor grass nor pasture, but only stones, high, and most craggy mountains.  
The people for the most part used to dwell in Tents, alluded to by David Psalm 120. v. 5, which they removed from place to place as the pasture for their cattle failed them: taking no other care for houses than the boughs of Palm-trees to keep them from the heats of the Sun, and other extremities of weather. Hence by the Ancients called Scenitae, or men dwelling in Tents (in which respect the Jews call the Tartarians Kedarim, from the like course of life which these Kedareni or Arabians lived) but the name reaching into the other parts of Arabia also, where they use the same king of living; of whom more anon.  
Yet notwithstanding most memorable is this Country in sacred story, both for the dwelling place of Job, and the habitation of those Wisemen who came out of the East unto Jerusalem to worship Christ, the newborn King of the Jews. That Job was an inhabitant here, appeareth by the situation of his dwelling, being in the East, as is said in the Story of him, chap. 1. v. 3. that is to say, in the Country lying East to the Land of Canaan, as this part of it doth, and therefore called simply by the name of the East, as Judg. 6. 3. where by the Children of the East, are meant expressly the Inhabitants of Arabia the Desert, who together with the Midianites, and Amalekites, oppressed those of Israel. Secondly, by the ill neighbourhood which he found from the Sabaeans, who inhabited in this part also; and of the Chaldeans mentioned v. 17. the next borderers to it: and Thirdly, by the inconsequences which needs must follow if we place him as some do, in the land of Us, near unto Damascus. For how improbable must it be for the Sabaeans of the Red-Sea or the Persian gulf; or the Caldaeans, dwelling on the banks of the River Euphrates, to fall upon Jobs cattle grazing near Damascus: the Countries being disjoined by such vast Deserts, and huge Mountains, that it is impossible for any Strangers to pass them, especially with any numbers of cattle, in respect of those large Mountains, deep Sands, and the extreme want of water in all that passage? And how impossible must we think it, that the penman of the story of job, who certainly was guided in it by the Holy Ghost, should be so mistaken, as to place jobs dwelling in the East, if the Land of Us wherein he dwelled bordered on Damascus; which lay not on the East, but the North of Canaan? A City called Us, or Uz, there was situate near Damascus, so called from Uz, the Son of Aram, Gen. 10. 23. A Land of Uz also amongst the Edomites, spoken of in the Lamentations of the Prophet jeremy, chap. 4. v. 21. so called from Uz, one of the posterity of Esau, mentioned Gen. 36. 28 and finally, a Land of Us, or Uz, so called from Huz the son of Nachor the Brother of Abraham, mentioned Gen. 22. 21. which is that situate in this Tract, the habitation and possession of that righteous man: the Counttey hereabouts being called Ausit is, and the people Ausita, though by mistaking in the transcripts, we find them named 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or Aesita, in the fifth of Ptolemy. The like I say also of the Wisemen, or Magis, who came to Jerusalem from the East, that they dwelled in this Country, where the said Ptolemy placeth the City Sab●; according unto that fore-signified by the Royal Psalmist, that the Kings of Arabia and Saba should bring their gifts, Psalms 72. 10. Confirmed herein by the situation of the Country lying East of Canaan; the authority of those Fathers who lived nearest to the time of our Saviour's birth, justin Martyr, Tertullian, Cyprian; and by the testimony of Guillandinus Melthior abovementioned, affirming on the credible report of the people hereof, that they came neither out of Mesopotamia, or Arabia Feliz, as many wisemen do believe, but out of Saba in Arabia the Desert, which City (saith he) when myself was there, was, as I judged, called Semiscasach.  
Cities of note in a Country so desert and uninhabited we must look for few; yet some there are, inhabited by a more Civil sort of people, whom they call by the name of Moors, giving that of Arabian to those only, who live roaming and robbing up and down. Ptolemy gives the names of forty Cities and villages in it (civitates & vicos saith the Latin) the memory of most of which is now utterly perished. Those of most observation, 1. Sabe, or Saba, the habitation of those Sabeans who pillaged job; so called from Sheba, the grandsonne of Abraham by Keturah, mentioned Gen. 25. 3. Of whom, and of the rest of that line, it is said, in the sixth verse of that chapter, that Abraham gave them gifts, and sent them away from Isaac Eastward, unto the East Country: now called Semiscasac, as it thought by Melehtor. 2. Theman, which possibly may be the Country of Eliphaz the Themanite, one of the visitan●s of job; As 3. Shuah, on the North hereof, was probably of Bildad, another of them, hence surnamed the Shuhite. 4. Tharsacus, by Pline called Aphipolis. 5. Zagmais, near the Persian Gulf, in the Country of the Raubeni, supposed to be descended from Mishma the fourth son of Ishmael. 6. Phunion the 36th. 7. Oboth the 37th. mansion of the Children of Israel. 8. Rheganna, another of those named by Ptolemy, in the Greek Copies called Eeganna. Of any Town of note now being more than this, and Scmiseasac, before named, I find nothing certain.  
The first Inhabitants of this Country, of whom there is any certain Constat, were the posterity of Huz, the Son of Nachor, and the Sons of Abraham by Keturah, of whose being settled in these parts, we had before good testimony from the Book of God: and intermixed with them lived some of the descendants of Ishmael also. For if the Adubeni, whom Ptolemy calleth the Agubeni, fetch their original from Adheel the third, and the Raubeni, from Mishma the fifth son of Ishmael, as some say they do; I see no reason but the whole Country might be called Kedar, from Kedar the second Son, as well as from the tawny complexions of the people of it. From them descended the Tribes or Nations spoken of by Ptolemy, that is to say, the Orcheni, Chaucabeni, Ausitae, Masoni, Materni, and Agrai, besides the Adubeni, and Raubeni, already specified. But being a disjointed people not under any settled form of Covernment, nor possessed of any thing worth looking after, they were either held not worth the conquering, in regard of their penury; or else unconquerable in respect of their Country, impassable for great Armies, by reason of the rolling Sands, and want of all things. Yet I coneeive that lying so near to the Chaldeans, they followed the fortunes of that mighty Monarchy, subjects unto it whilst it stood, and after Tributaries unto those who successively possessed themselves of the Supreme power. Not looked at by the Romans, or regarded by them, who aimed at wealth as well as honour, in their expeditions: nor otherwise subject to the Turk at this present time, than as they can make use of him and his protection in their frequent robberies. Though counted of as a part of the Turkish Empire, because the more civil Arabians are indeed his subjects.   

2. ARABIA PETRAEA.  
ARABIA PETRAEA, (now called Barra, Baraab, and Barthalaba) hath on the East, Arabia Deserta, and part of Sinus Persicus, or the Bay of Persia; on the West, the Isthmus which joineth Africa to Asia, and part of the Red Sea, or Gulf of Arabia; on the North, Palestine; and on the South, a long ridge of Mountains, which divide it from Arabia Felix.  
It had this name either from the rockiness of the soil hereof, or more properly from Petra the chief City of it, called also by Aethicus, Sicaria, but I know not why; by the Hebrews, Chus, generally translated Ethiopia; by William of Tyre, Arabia Secunda, Felix being reckoned for the first. By Strabo, Ptolemy, and Pl●ny it is called Nabathaea, which name it had from Nabaioth, the eldest of the twelve Sons of Ishmael, though properly that name belonged only to those parts which lay next Judaea: fruitful though joining to the Deserts; and thus remembered by the Poet, as an Eastern Country.  
Eurus ad Auroram, Nabathaeaque regna recessit.  
Eurus unto the East did fly,  
Where fruitful Nabathe doth lie.  
The Country much of the same nature with the other, but in some parts thereof more fertile if well manured: and in the time of Marcellinus, affirmed to be a rich land, flourishing with variety of trade and traffic. But for the most part full of untravellable Deserts, except to those which carry their provisions with them for fear of starving, and go in great companies or Carvans for fear of robbing, and yet much traveled by Merchants who traffic into Egypt and Babylonia, the commodities whereof they lay of Camels, which are the ships of Arabia, as their Seas, the Deserts. For upon one of these Camels, they will lay ordinarily 600. and sometimes 1000 pound weight: yet not afford him water above once in four days, not oftener in fourteen, if there be occasion. So that the Camel carrying so great a burden, and seldom fewer than 500 going in one voyage; the Merchant, if he scapeth robbing, makes a rich return. Of these Deserts the most memorable are those of Sin, and Pharan, in which the Israelites so long wandered: not beautified with grass, nor adorned with trees, the Palm only excepted; nor furnished with water but by rain or miracle.  
The people of it for the most part descended of the sons of Chus and Ishmael, intermixed with the Madianites descending from Abraham by Keturah, and the Amalekites, descended probably from Amalek, the Grandsonne of Esau, mentioned Gen. 36. but all united at the last in the name of Saracens. This name derived, as some think, from Sarra, signifying a desert, and saken which signifieth to inhabit, because they live for the most part in these desert places; as others say, from Sarak, signifying a Thief or Robber, agreeable to that of Arabia before delivered. This last most suitable to their nature, and best liked by Scaliger. Saraceni à vicinis dicuntur ab Elsarak, i.e. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, quod rapinis victitent. So he, in his second book de Emend. Temp. A people not reckoned of in the former times, till made remarkable by their conquest of a great part of the world; but always counted warlike and martial men. Of whom take this Character out of Marcellinus. The Saracens (saith he) whom we are neither to wish for our friends or enemies, are a martial people, half-naked, clad as far as the groin with painted Cassocks, ranging up and down on Camels, and swift horses, as well in peace as troublesome times. Not used unto the Plough, to plant trees, or get their livings by tillage, they wander from one place to another, without house or home, or any constant dwelling place, or the use of laws: nor can they long endure the same either Air or Soil, the manner of their lives being always flitting; like ravenous kites, which if they chance to spy a prey, snatch it up in their flight, or if they chance to fasten on it as it leith on the ground they make no long stay. Their food is chiefly upon Venison, and store of milk, herbs which they gather from the ground, and birds which they get by fowling; but altogether ignorant of corn and wine. Their wives they hire only for a time, though for a show of Matrimony they present their husbands with a spear and a tent, as in way of dowry; but they part with them when they please. Both Sexts most extremely given to carnal lusts; the women as rambling as the men, married in one place, and brought to bed in another; leaving their children where they fall, without more care of them. So far, and to this purpose he.  
Rivers of note here are not many. The principal are, 1. That called Trananus amnis, or the River of Tranan, which passing thorough this Country endeth his course in the Red Sea. 2. Rhtnocorura, called in Scripture the torrent of Egypt, which rising in this Country, and passing by the borders of Idumaea, hath its fall in the lake of Sirbon, and together with the waters thereof, loseth itself at last in the Mediterranean.  
With Mountains it is better stored, and those of eminent observation, as 1 Mount Sinai, famous in all ages, for the promulgation of the Law, and of late times for a Monastery of Maronites on the top thereof. The hill so high, that both shores of the Red Sea may be thence seen: but easy of ascent by reason of steps cut out of the rock: which notwithstanding, he that beginneth to go up it at the break of day, will hardly overcome the top of it till the afternoon. The Monastery made an Episcopal See, and formerly very well endowed, as appeareth by the letters of Eugenius Bishop hereof to the Archduke Charles, Anno 1569. complaining that the Turk had sold all their lands, and that himself and the Monks were fain to pawn their holy Vessels, and take up money on Usury. Here is also a Mesque or Mesquit of Turks, who resort in pilgrimage to this hill, as well as the Christians. 2. Mount Horeb, where the Israelites worshipped the Molten Calf, about a mile and an half distant from Mount Sinai, but not so high, on the top of which is a Church also; and a Monastery of Coloires, or Greek Monks, at the bottom; exceeding hospitable to strangers, whom they entertain of free cost, and cheerfully show them all the places worth observation, which the Scripture mentioneth in that tract. Both hills by Ptolemy, called Melani, or the Black Mountains; the last now called Orel. 3. Mount Hor, bordering on Idumaea, and memorable for the death of Aaron.  
Places of most observation, 1. Petra, the name-given to this part, at first called Recem, and at that time belonging to Midian: afterwards called Serah when pertaining to the Idumaeans. But falling under the power of the Arabians, it is now called Crat. Best known in holy Scripture by the name of Selah, before mentioned, which signifies the same with the Latin Petra. A City of great note and strength in all times foregoing, taken by Amaziah the King of Judah, 2 Kings 14. 7. and by him called Jock-beel, but in vain besieged by Scaurus, a Roman General, who finding the place to be impregnable, was content by the persuasion of Antipater, to take a sum of money and raise his siege. Not did the Emperor Traian speed much better at it, his Soldiers being still beat off in all their assaults, the very next man to him slain with a dart, and himself forced to cast away his Imperial habit, and fly for his life: the heavens themselves, if Dion (who is never sparing of the like prodigies) may be believed, fight against the Romans with thunder, lighting, whirlwinds, and tempests, as often as they made any approaches to it. But in the end subdued with the rest of the Country. In such esteem, by reason of the strength of it, by the Sultan's of Egypt, that they kept here their choicest treasures: and in the course of the Holy Wars, much aimed at by the Turks and Christians, as the key that opened the Gates of Palestine, on the South border whereof, not far from Mount Hor, beforementioned, the Town is situate. The Metropolis of the Province when first under the Romans; and made the Seat of a Latin Bishop, when the Christians of the West were the Lords thereof. 2. Bosra, said to have been built by Augustus Caesar, because by him repaired, when decayed and ruined; afterwards by Alexander Severus made a Colony of the Romans. This last most certain, and for such testified by this ancient inscription, in an ancient coin, COL. BOSTRAN. T. R. ALEXANDRIAN A Memorable also for the birth of Philip the Emperor, one of that Alexander's next Successors; by whom it was caused for a time to be called Philippus; for the Metropolitan dignity removed hither from Petra, somewhat before the time of Justiman, but by whom I find not; and for being the Episcopal See of Titus (hence sumarned) Bostrenus, a Reverend Father of the Church in the time of Julian the Apostate. A City of as great antiquity as the most that be, mentioned Gen. 36. 33. though there accounted of as a City of Edom, to which at that time it did belong; and is still remaining, and well known by the name of Buffereth. 3. Elama, on a bay of the Red Sea, called hence Sinus Elaniticus, 4. Phara, reckoned by Ptolemy for a chief Town of this Tract, from whence the Wilderness of Paran seems to take its name. 5. Berenice, so called from some of the Queens of Egypt, but better known by the name of Esion-geber, one of the Stations or encamp of the Children of Israel; and made by Solomon the ordinary harbour for his Ships which sailed to Ophir in the East-Indies. 6. Sur, the chief City of the Amalekites, giving name to the Wilderness or Desert of Sur, coming close up to it; remarkable for the first encamping of the Tribes of Israel after their miraculons passage over the Red Sea; and the defeat which Saul gave to the Amaleknes, whom he smote from Havilah to this place. 7. Havilah, so called from Havilah the Son of Chus, being the furthest border of these Amalekites and Ismachtes on the Gulf of Persia, as Sur was on the Red Sea, or Gulf of Arabia. 8. Madian, so called of Madian, the Son of Abraham by Keturah, situate towards the Red Sea also; the City of Jethro, whose daughter Zipporah was the wife of Moses: who flying from the Court of Pharaoh King of Egypt, was by God's secret providence directed hither; that keeping the flocks of Jethro in the Deserts adjoining, he might acquaint himself with the ways and passages, thorough which he after was to lead the house of Israel. 9 Rephaim, the encamping place of Moses, where he discomfited the Amalekites; and to which the said Jethro came to him with his wife and Children; advising him to ease himself of some part of that burden, which the government of so great a people would else bring upon him. 10. Kadesh-barnes, the station of the Tribes, when the spies which were sent to discover the Land of Canaan, returned back unto them; memorable for the death of Miriam the Prophetess; and 11, Thara, no less memorable for the mutiny and punishment of Corah, Dathan, and Abirom, the place remembered Numb. 33. 27. but others will have 12. Makheloth, mentioned v. 25. of that Chapter, to be the Stage of that action; the Scriptures being silent in this particular. The rest of their encamping places, being most of them in this part of Arabus, I omit of purpose, as obvious in the Scripture unto every Reader: as I do also some of the Cities of Moab and Ammon; accounted of by Ptolemy as Cities of this Province; but spoken of already in our Description of Palestine, to which more properly belonging.  
The old Inhabitants of this Country, were the Madianites, the Ismaelites, the Amalekites, and the Children of Chus; who dwelling promiscuously together, are sometimes used for one another: the Merchants which bought Joseph of his Brethren being indifferently called Midianites, and Ismaelites, Gen. 37. 28. and Zipporah the wife of Moses, who questionless was a daughter of Madian, being by Miriam, and Aaron, called an Ethopian or Chusite, as in way of reproach, Num. 12. 1. But being they were different Nations, and such as had some special engagement with or against the Children of Israel; we will consider them by themselves, till we have brought them into one body, by the name of Chusites, Hethiopians, or Arabians, which are all the same.  
And first, the MADIANITES were such of the posterity of Madian, the son of Abraham by Keturah, who preserving the knowledge of the true God, withdrew themselves from all communion with the idolatrous Canaanites, at such time as the rest of their brethren did associate with them; and settled themselves more towards the banks of the Red Sea; where they did all good offices to the children of Israel, as they passed thorough their Country. Of these the Kenites were a branch, as appeareth Judges 1. 16. where Jethro the Prince or Priest of Madian is called a Kenite: some of which turned Proselytes, and dwelled with the Israelites in Canaan, of which race Heber the Kenite, the husband of Jael who slew Sisera, was undoubtedly one. The rest, continuning mingled with the Amalekites, till the time of Saul, were by him warned (in memory of former courtesies) to withdraw themselves from them; lest they should perish with them in the same destruction. Afterwards we hear little of either People, losing their name in the greater Nation of the Ismaelites, with whom intermingled; or passing with them into the same common notion of Arabians, Chusites, or Ethopians.  
2. Nor were the AMALEKITES, though a greater and more powerful Nation, of much more continuance: descended, as it is conceived, from Amalek, the Grandsonne of Esau, (though I deny not but there are some reasons to be urged against that opinion,) and planted on the back of the Edomites, as their Guard or outwork. A people mischeivously bend against those of Israel, as if they had inherited the hatred which Esau their forefather did bear to Jacob, whom they violently set on at Rephidim, when they supposed them spend and wearied with their flight from Egypt. And though discomfited in that battle, yet they continued in their malice against the Tribes: and joining first with the Canaanites against them when they were in their March; and after with the Midianites when not well settled in their new possessions. A provocation so ill-taken by the Lord of hosts, because unnatural, and ill-grounded, that he declared his resolution from the time of the battle of Rephidim, to put out the remembrance of Amalek from under Heaven, Exodus 17. 14. Accordingly, when the Children of Israel were provided for it, he commanded Saul to set upon them, and to slay both man and woman, Infant and suckling, yea their sheep and cattle. But some of them escaped this slaughter, and fell not long after upon Ziglag, the retiring place of David, which they took and ransacked; but being by him followed on the first intelligence, they were easily overthrown, and the prey recovered. Their malice yet survived their power; and what they could not do by their proper forces, they endeavoured to affect by joying with the Ammonites, Moabites, and other enemies of David, in their wars against him. And this was ultimum conamen, one of the last flashes of their dying light: nothing done by them worth remembrance of the times succeeding, most of the Nation being worn out, and those few which were left, retiring to the Mountains of Edom, but thereof also dispossessed by the Simeonites, during the reign of Hezekiah.  
3. The ISMAELITES, descending from Ishmael, the son of Abraham by Hagar, branched into twelve great Nations, and grown wondrous populous; spread themselves over a great part of these three Arabia's: all of them either Thiefs or Merchants; trading to Egypt, in spicery, and balm, and myrrh, or robbing those which traded in the like commodities. Called also Hagarens in the Scripture, as 1 Chron. 5. 10. Psalm 83. 6. etc. and by that name well known to many of the ancient writers. A people for the most part of a vagabond and roguish life, more given to spoil, than any honest course of living, which made every Traveller and Merchant to be armed against them: so verifying the prediction which was given of Ishmael, that he should be a wild man, having his hand against every mar, and every man's hand against him. Saint Hierome so conceives that Prophecy to have been accomplished. More fitly verified perhaps, when in and under the name of Saracens, (by which, and by the name of Scenites, they were most generally known to the Greeks and Romans) they made such foul havoc in the world, and were esteemed the common enemies of all Civil Nations. Never so governable in their best and most orderly times, as to acknowledge King or Law, till made one body with the Chusites, and the rest of these Nations: and then no further than it stood with their lust or liking.  
4. As for the Chusites, though they permitted the Nations above specified to inhabit in those Deserts and waste places which themselves either could not people or cared not for: yet were they always of most power, and gave name to that whole tract of ground containing now all Petroea, the South part of Deserta, and the Mountains which divide Petroea from Arabia Felix; which from them was called. Chus, or the land of Chus. Rendered in all places of the old Testament by the name of Ethiopia, first by the Septuagint, and afterwards by all the Father's Greeks and Latin, the Vulgar translation of the Bible, and almost all the other translations at this day extant. And rendered right enough at first, as in all times since, though by some mistaken: who having never heard of any other Aethopia than that in afric, have transferred thither all those actions and Texts of Scripture, which are meant of this. The Septuagint, no doubt, were not so ignorant of the affairs of their next neighbouring Nation, as not to know by what name they were called by the Greeks, their then Lords and Masters. And he that looks into the History of Herodotus, who lived 150 years before that translation; will find, that by the Grecians they were called Aethiopians: and called so questionless from the self same reason, that is to say, the swarthyness, or Sun-burnt-ness, of their complexion, as the A thiops of afric were; that name being framed of the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifying to burn, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a countenance, by reason of their tawny and Sunburnt Countenances. For speaking of the huge Army of Xerxes against the Greeks, he doth thus proceed, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 etc. Arsames (saith he) was Captain of the Arabians (he meaneth the Troglodytes) and Aethiopians which are beyond Egypt: but the Eastern Aethiopians were ranked with the Indians, nothing differing from the other in the structure of their bodies, but their hair and voice only: the Eastern Aethiopians wearing their hair smooth, those of Libya curled. The Aethiops of Asia were armed like the Indians, but the Aethiops of Africa were arrayed with the skins of beasts. Here than we have an Asian Aethiopia in the time of Herodotus: the same acknowledged by Pausanias an old Greek writer, and by Philostratus after him, though they look for it in the wrong place; the first amongst the Seres in the North of Asia, the other on the River Ganges, too much in the East. Nor doth Aethicus one of the old Cosmographers; published by Simlerus, shoot more noor the mark, who speaking of the River Tigris, faith that it buryeth itself, and runneth under the ground in Aethiopia: Which though Simler doth interpret of these parts of Arabia; yet questionless that Author meaneth it of the Countries about Mount Taurus, where that River doth indeed run under ground, and having passed under those vast mountains, riseth up again.  
But what need further search be made to find out the situation of this Aethiopia, when it is bounded out so plainly in the holy Scriptures. For when it is said of Zipporah the wife of Moses, that she was an Aethiopian woman, Num. 12. 1. who is well known to have been a native of this Country; and when it is said in the 2 Chron. 21. 16. that the Lord stirred up against Jehoram the spirit of the Philistims, and of the Arabians that were near the Aethiopians: it must needs be that the Aethiopia there spoken of must be conterminous to the rest of Arabia, and be intended of that Country wherein Madian was. So where God threateneth by the mouth of the Prophet Exekiel, that he would lay waste the land of Egypt from the Tower of Syene even unto the borders of Aethiopia, chap. 29. 10. that is to say, from one end thereof unto the other: it followeth necessarily, that Aethiopia there meant, must be this part of Arabia, or the Land of Chus, as the bound of Egypt most remote from the tower of Syene, which all Geographers acknowledge to be in the extreme South parts thereof towards the Cataracts of Nilus. For to expound it as some do, of Aethiopia in afric, on the borders whereof Syene stood, and stood so indifferently betwixt it and Egypt, that Stephanus an ancient Writer makes it very doubtful to which of the two it did belong; were to make the Scripture speak plain nonsense, as plain as if a man should say, that the French comquered all the Netherlands from Gravelling to Flanders; or that the sword hath ranged over all England, from Barwick to Scotland. As than we have found this Aethiopia of the old Testament to be near the Philistims on the one side, and the Land of Egypt on the other; so may we find it to be bounded also on the East, with Babylonia, or Chaldoea: the River Gihen, which is said to compass the whole Land of Aethiopia (or the land of Chus) Gen. 2. 13. being no other than a branch of the River Euphrates, which falleth into the Lakes of Chaldoea. So that the translation of the Septuagint in reading Chusit is, or the land of Chus, by Ethiopia, needs no such alteration or emendation as some men suppose. The mistakes (whereof there have been many) which arise from hence, not being to be charged on them or on their translation, but on the ignorance of the Reader, or error of such Expositors, who dreaming of no other AEthiopia than of that in afric, have made the Scriptures speak such things as it never meant, and carried these Chusites into the African Ethiopia, where they never were. And yet perhaps it may be said, that this posterity of Chus, being straightened in their own possessions, or willing to seek new adventures, might have crossed over the Red-Sea or Gulf of Arabia (being but seven miles broad where narrowest); and mingling with the Sons of Ludim on the other side, might either give the name of Aethiopians to them, or receive it from them.  
Now to go forwards with the story, the first great action attributed to these Cbusites, or Arabian Aethops, incorporated with the rest of those mingled Nations, is the expedition of Zerah, the King hereof, against Asa King of Judah, drawing after him an Army of a million, and three hundred Chariots of war (the greatest Army ever read of in unquestioned story) but for all that, discomfited by the Lord of hosts on the prayers of Asa, and all the spoil of that huge Army carried to Jerusalem. After this Tirrakth, another of these Aethiopian Kings, finding how dangerous the great growth of the Assyrian Kingdom might prove unto him, prepared a puissant Army against Senacherib, then besieging Libna, threatening the conquest of all Judah, and invading Egypt: upon the news of whose approach Senacherib's forces which were even upon the gaining of Pelusium, the Gate of Egypt, were fain to dislodge and provide for their safety. For though Herodotus call Senacherib King of Arabia and Assyria, yet was he Master only of those parts of Arabia, which had been formerly possessed by the Kings of Israel, being no more than some few Cities of Petraea, bordering next unto them: or perhaps called so only in respect of those parts of Syria and Mesopotamia, which were sometimes comprehended under the name of Arabia, as before is said. What part they after took in the great war betwixt Nabuchadnezzar and Pharaoh Necho King of Egypt, is not hard to say. For that besides the same reasons of state obliging them to side with the Egyptian were still in force their giving Necho leave to pass thorough their Country with his Army, to invade the Babylonian on the banks of Euphrates, make that plain enough. Now that both Tirr akah and Zerah, were Kings of this Asian, and not of the African Aethiopia, is most clear and evident: partly in regard the King's 〈◊〉 Egypt would never suffer such huge Armies to pass thprow the whole length of their Dominions; but principally because it is said in the holy Scriptures, that Asa having overthrown that vast Army of Zerah, smote all the Cities about Gezar, which formerly had belonged unto the Philistims, but were then possessed by these Chusites and their Associates. After this, either as Confederates or subjects, we find them aiding unto Xe●xes in his war on Greece: and like enough it was that in Alexander's march from Egypt towards Persia, they submitted to him, as did all the other Countries thorough which he passed. He being dead, Antigonus, one of his great Commanders, sent Athenaeus with an Army to bring them in, who being trained into an ambush was discomfited by them; Demetrius the Son of Antigonus thinking that he had done enough in revenge of that overthrow, by compelling them to sue for peace. In the time of the Seleucian race in Syria, we find them governed by Kings of their own, most of them called by the name of Aretas; of which one was of special note in the declining forrunes of the Seleucidans, for bidding very fair for the Crown of that Country; another mentioned by Saint Paul, 2 Cor. 11. 32. as Lord of Damascus. In the flourishing of the Roman fortunes, the Kings hereof having first aided Mithridates and Tygranes in the war against them, submitted themselves unto Lucullus, being then no nearer to them than Armenia Major. The like they did to Pompey also, being then in Judaea. First vanquished by Aelius Gallus in the time of Augustus; but the Victory not improved to an absolute conquest, till the time of Trajan: when partly by his personal presence, and partly by the valour and good fortune of Palma, his Lieutenant, they were fully vanquished, and brought into the form of a Roman Province; but so that they had Kings of their own, (Vassals and Feudataries of the Empire) as in former times; continuing in that condition till the rise of Mahomet; of which more hereafter.   

3. ARABIA FELIX  
ARABIA FELIX is bounded on the East, with the Persian; on the West, with the Arabian Gulf; on the North, with a long ridge of mountains, which part it from Deserta, and Petraea; and on the South, with the boundless Ocean. Environed on three parts with the Sea, on the fourth with rough, impassable mountains, in situation and figure much resembling Italy.  
It had the name of Arabia Felix from the fertility and happy condition of it, being esteemed the most fruitful and pleasant and Country in all Asia, abounding with Myrrh, Balsamum, Frankincense, Gold, and precious stones: by Curtius called Odorum fertilitate nobilis Regio, from the abundance of Frankincense wherewith enriched beyond all others. Concerning which there goeth a story, that when Alexander in his Adolescency or boyage was sacrificing to the Gods, and cast into the fire with both hands great store of Frankincense and Myrrh; Leonidas, his Governor, bid him be more sparing of those precious and dear Commodities, till he was Master of the Country in which they grew. Which Alexander remembering, when he brought almost all the East under his obedience, he sent unto Leonidas a ship laden with Frankincense, biding him from thenceforth serve the Gods more liberally. But aswel for the reason of this adjunct, as a more perfect Character, and description of it, take along this of Ammianus Marcellinus who describes it thus. On the East, and South hereof (saith he) are the Happy Arabians, so called because so rich in corn, aswel as plenteous in cattle, vines, and odoriferous spices of all kinds; shut up betwixt the Red Sea, and the Persian Gulf, and so acquainted with all blessings, which either Element can afford: well furnished with Roades, and quiet harbours for shipping, the Towns of Trade and merchandise standing very thick, the retiring houses of the Kings, passing neat and sumptuous. Besides most wholesome fountains of medicinal waters, they enjoy divers Brooks and Rivers very clear and pure, and a temperature of Air exceeding healthy, so that whosoever considereth all things aright, may well conclude, that there is nothing wanting to the accomplishment of its felicity in the highest degree. So Ammianus Marcellinus. To which we need add nothing more to set forth its happiness, than that Danoeus in his comment on Saint Augustine's Echiridion ad Laurentium, is persuaded that it was the local place of Paradise Dicuur (saith he) Paradisi terrestris Regio pars quoedam esse Arabiae, quoe nunc dicitur Felix. But it hath other names besides this of Felix, by the Arabians themselves called Jeman, and Al-yeman (Ayaman corruptly by the Turks) which in that tongue signifieth the South, or Southern Region, By Virgil it is named Panchaia, quafis tota dehiscens, because of the many chaps and chinks which the ardour of the Sun makes in the sands thereof, though by him much extolled also for its plenty of Frankincense, 
Totaq thuriferis Panchaia pinguis arenis,  
Famed are the whole Panchaian lands  
For rich and incense-bearing sands.   
The People anciently, though more civil than the rest of the Arabians, had yet many strange and barbarous customs. Adultery amongst them was punished with death, as in other places, but he only was held an Adulterer, which enjoyed any that was not his own kinswoman, be she his Sister or his mother, and so they kept themselves in their own families, community of wives or women was esteemed no crime. And of this there is a tale in Strabo, that a King of this Country had 15. sons, and but one daughter, who according to the customs hereof, was the common wife of all the Brethren: every of which had a staff of like making, which when he went in unto his Sister he did leave at the door, and by so doing did forbid entrance to the rest till it were removed. The young Lady wearied with a continual excess of dalliance, secretly procured a staff like unto the rest, which when she was desirous to prohibit their accesses to her, she left at her chamber door; and by that means did many times enjoy her desired privacy. At last it happened that all the Brothers being together, one of them departed towards his Sister's lodging; Where finding a staff before the door, and knowing that he had left his brethren in one place together, accused her of Adultery: but the truth being made known, the Lady was quitted, and her visits afterwards restrained. Of dead bodies, they took no care, not so much as of their Chiefs, or Princes, but left them to the custody of the next dunghill. They bragged much of their descent from Jupiter; and neglected all sciences and arts, as disparagements to so great nobility. Commendable only in the keeping of their faith and promises, and in that most punctual. Much of the same condition are the present Inhabitants, save that less faithful in their contracts, and by their law restrained from the meddling with the wives of others, permitted many of their own. Some there are of them which apply themselves to the grazing of cattle, and the rest to Merchandise, wherein very cautious, and cunning: but hating to this day all Mechanical Arts. A Nation from the beginning unmixed with others till the coming of the Turks amongst them, of which but few, and those disposed of in garrisons: boasting of their nobility, and glorying in nothing more than their greatest shame, namely that the false Prophet Mahomet was their Countryman, whose impieties are here generally embraced and followed.  
Amongst the rarities of this Country, some account the Phoenix, which growing old burneth itself in a nest of spices, and from thence a young one is engendered; one of them only at a time, which after a life of five or six hundred years, thus reneweth her kind. But this tradition, questioned in former times by Pliny and some others, is now proved a fiction; contrary both unto divinity and natural reason, though some of the Fathers made use of it as an argument to prove the Resurrection against the Gentiles, by whom the tradition was believed. More common, but of no less observation, is the Ostrige, a Bird which swalloweth all it findeth, be it stones or Iron, They delight chiefly in the Deserts, in the sands whereof they lay their eggs, and then forgetting where they left them sit on those they meet next. In that respect accounted for a simple fowl, though otherwise of wit enough to preserve themselves, keeping in flocks, and oftentimes with their fearful shreeches affrighting Passengers, to whom they do appear a far off like a Troop of horsemen. Their wings too little for their bodies, serve them not for flight, but to run more speedily; and by that means not easily caught, though much laid in wait for, for their skins, which the people sell unto the Merchant with the feathers on them. Nor of less note is the Frankincense, though of common use; almost peculiar to this Country, and here but to those parts thereof which were formerly possessed by the Sabi, the wood out of which this gum proceedeth being about 100 miles long, and 500 broad; gathered only in Spring and Autumn, More of this anon.  
The Country is much commended by Ammianus for plenty of Rivers, the principal whereof are said by Ptolemy, to be 1. Betus. 2. Prion. 3. Harman. 4. Lar; but the modern names thereof I find not. Many fair Lakes, and store of large capacious Bayss on each coast of the Sea, as 1. Sinus Eliniticus. 2. Sachalites. 3. Leanites. 4. Sinus Magoram. 5. Sinus jehthy-phagorum. 6. Messanites. 7. Sacer Sinus, or the holy Bay, and 8 the Road or Naval station called Neogilla. Mountains of most note, 1. Those which are called Melanes, at the entrance of the Persian Gulf. 2. Cabubuthra, at the entrance of the Red Sea or Gulf of Arabia. 3. Hippus. 4. Prionotus, not far from the River Pyton, from whence so denominated. 5. Climax. 6. The Mountains called Dedymi, etc.  
Towns of good note in ancient times it had very many, no Region affording unto Ptolemy the names of more; and amongst those, many commodious Ports for traffic, the Sea begirting it for the space of three thousand miles and upwards. Of most importance and observation in those times were, 1. Zabrum, 2. Baden, 3. Rhabana, 4. Carman, 5. Manambis, 6. Sabe, 7. Are; the Royal seats of so many several Kingdoms, and therefore honoured by Ptolemy with the title of Regioe. Then there are 1. Maco●mos, 2. Meara, 3. Nagara, 4 Sabbatha, 5. Mapha, and 6. Saphar, which he called Metropolet; as being the head Cities of some several Nations. Amongst the Ports, he reckoneth, 1. So●ippus, 2. Trulla, 3. Tretoes, 4. Cryptus, 5. Itamos, and 6. Moscha: amongst the most noted Empories or Towns of Traffic, 1. Musa, 2. Ocelis, 3. Arabia, 4. Cane. Besides which there are some which do preserve the memory of their first Plantations, as, 1. Saphta, upon the Persian Gulf, to called from Sabta, the third Son of Chus. 2. Rhegama, or Regma (as the Greek copies of Ptolemy have it) so named from Regmoe or Raama his sixth Son; On the same Gulf also. 3. Sabe, on the shores of the Red Sea, and 4. Sabe Regia, more within the Land, so named from Seba the eldest Some of the same Chus, from whom the rich and potent nation of the Saboeans are to be derived. Out of all which, and many others by him named, we shall take more particular notice of some that follow. 1. Musa, a noted Port on the entrance of the Red-Sea, frequented anciently by the Ethiopian and Egyptian Merchants, who there laded their ships, with Frankincekse, Myrrh, Spices, and other commodities of this Country, bringing in, in exchange thereof, Saffron, corn, wine, ointments, purple dies, etc. 2. Sabe, the Regal Seat of the Kings of the Sabaans', particularly of that Queen so memorised in holy Scripture: called in the old Testament the Queen of Sheba, from her Country and place of dwelling, in the New Testament, the Queen of the South, because of the Southern situation of it in respect of Judea: said there to come from the furthest parts of the world, because there was no part of the world which lay south to the Country of the Saboeans over which she reigned. Situate on a little Mountain, assumed by Agatharcides to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the most beautiful by far in all Arabia, and the Metropolis of the rich and potent Nation of the Saboeans; rich in all the excellencies of Nature, espeecially in Frankincense, a gum peculiar to them only, and growing here in a wood of about 100 miles long, and 50 broad, not gathered but in the Spring and Autumn, nor then without great care, and many ceremonies. The Country hereabouts from hence called Thurifera, and this sweet gum appropriated solely to it. Sabaei Arabum propter thura clarissimi, as we find in Pliny, Solis est thurea virga Sabaeis, as it is in Virgil; and finally— Thuriferos, felicia Regna, Sabaeos, in the Argonauticks of Valerius Flaccus. It was called also Mariaba, and by that name occurreth in some ancient Writers. 3. Saphar, more towards the Persian Gulf, on the Southside of the mountain Climax, the chief City of the Homerita; adorned in times of Christianity with a beautiful Temple. 4. Sabbatha, or Sabota, as Pliny calleth it, seated about the midst of the Country, on the top of an high and lofty hill, from whence it had a gallant prospect on the fields adjoining; anciently large and populous, and strongly fortified, having no fewer than 60 Temples within the walls, the principal that consecrated unto Sabis, the God of their Nation, to whom they offered the tith of their Frankincense, ubi decimas Deo quem Sabin vocant, mensura non pondere capiunt Sacerdotes, as we read in Pliny.  
But these and almost all the rest being grown out of knowledge, there have risen in their rooms, 1. Egra, on the shore of the Red Sea, near the Bay called Sinus Elaniticus, by Prolomy called Arga, by the Arabians themselves, Algiar, the Port Town to medina, from which about three day's journey distant. 2. Jatrib, or Jathrib, in the way betwixt Aygiar, and Medina, the birthplace of Mahomet; by whom fortified with a mudwall as his place of retreat in the first beginnings of his fortunes. 3. Medina, or commonly called Medina Talmabi, corrupty for Medinatho-luabi, that is to say, the City of the Prophet, so called from the Sepulchre of Mahomet, that vile Imposture, which is there to be seen; although not in such an iron coffin, or drawn up to the roof of the Temple by virtue of an Amant there placed, as some deliver. The Town situate in a desolate and barren place, bordering on Arabia Petroea; but of great trade, rich, and well inhabited: the Sepulchre of that false Prophet drawing thither a continual resort of Pilgrims. The Temple gorgeous, having 3000 lamps in it, which burn continually. The Sepulchre or Tomb enclosed within an Iron grate, but of no magnificence or beauty: covered with a carpet of Green Velvet, which is sent hither yearly by the Grand Signior, the old one being taken off, and cut into innumerable shreds or pieces, and sold for Relics by the Priests, (to such as come in Pilgrimage thither) to their great enriching. 4. Cufa, the ordinary residence of the first Caliphs', till the removing of the Imperial Seat to Damascus in Syria; and after that, the usual place of meeting for consultation in affairs of State, relating to the peace of this Country, and the common interest of this People: as memorable for the Sepulchre of Mortis Hali, the Progenitor of the Persian Sophies, as Medina is for that of Mahomet. 5. Meccha, supposed to be the Mechara of Ptolemy, situate in the like barren soil, not far from Medina, but of far greater resort and traffic: the whole wealth in a manner of this Country, together with the commodities of Persia, and India, being first brought hither, and from hence on Camels backs transported into Egypt, Syria, Palestine, and other parts of the Turkish Empire. Unwalled, and either for that cause or for concealment of their fopperies from the eyes of Christians, it is made death for any Christian for to come within five miles of it. Utterly destitute of water, but what they keep in cisterns from one shower of rain to another, or else brought thither with great charge; otherwise pleasantly seated, rich, and containing about 6000 families: every year visited with three Caravans or troops of Merchants and Pilgrims, from India, Damascus, and Grand Cairo: who having done their business and devotions there, go afterwards in Pilgrimage to Medina also, to the great enriching of both places. 6. Ziden, the Haven Town to Mecca, from which distant about 40. miles, situate on the Red Sea, in a sandy soil, unwalled and much exposed both to wind and weather, but wealthy, well-built, and of great resort. 7. Zebit, now the Metropolis of the Country, situate about half a day's journey from the Red Sea, in a large plain between two mountains; a Riveret of the smae name passing by it, well-traded for Sugars, spice, and fruits; the ordinary residence of the Turkish Begler●e, by whom taken not longer after Aden. 8. Eltor, a Port Town of this Country, where the Christians are suffered to inhabit. 9 Aden, on the very entrance of the Red Sea, near the straits called 〈◊〉 M●ndell, supposed by some to be the Madoce of Ptolemy, but more agreeing in situation, with the 〈◊〉 Emporie by him called Arabia. The fairest Town of the whole Peninsula, of great strength, both by Art and Nature, well-traded, and well-fortified, having a large capacious Haven, seldom without good store of shipping, and containing to the number of six thousand persons. Once a distinct Kingdom of itself, but treacherously surprised by the Turks, Anno 1538. and therewith all the rest of the Country made afterwards the seat of a Turkish Beglerbeg, under whom, and him of Zebit, are supposed to be no fewer than thirty thousand Timariot. 10. Oran, the Lock and Key of the Southern Ocean. 11. Thema, or Theman, the same I take it, which our later travellers call Zeman, situate more within the land, affirmed by Benjamin the Jew, surnamed Tuledensis, to be a Town of 15 miles square, but to have within the walls thereof great quantity of ground for tillage. 12. Zarval, a retiring place of the Caliphs', when they lived in this Country. 13. Hor, on the point or Promontory called Chorodemus, a Garrison not long since of the Kings of Ormus. 14. Muskahat, on the Persian Gulf, near the point of Land called Cape Rozelgate; opposite to Surat, in the East India, and possessed by the Portugals, who have fortified it with a well-built Castle, for defence of their ships and Frigates which frequent those Seas. Of no great note till the taking of Ormus by the Persians, many of the Inhabitants whereof were since settled here. Of the affairs of this Country we shall speak anon; having first took a brief view of the Lands which belong unto it.   

4. THE ARABIC LANDS.  
The LANDS which lie round about the shores of Arabia Felix, and have been anciently accounted as parts thereof, are dispersed either in the 1. Red-Sea, 2. Southern Ocean, or 3. the Gulf of Persia.  
1. The RED-SEA, (called also by the Ancients Sinus Arabicus, and now Golso di Mecca) is that part or branch of the Southern Ocean which interposeth itself betwixt Egypt on the East; Arabia Felix and some part of Petraa on the West; the North-East bound of it touching upon Idumaea, or the Cost of Edom. Extended in length from the Town of Sues, anciently called Arsinoe, in the bottom of it, to the straits of Babe!-Mandel, where it openeth into the Southern Ocean, for the space of one thousand and four thousand miles, in breadth for the most part but one hundred, but in some places almost two: the straits themselves not being above a mile and an half; anciently chained by the Kings of Egypt, as is said by Strabo, but now left open by the Turk, who is Lord hereof. A violent and unquiet Sea, full of sands and shelves; insomuch as they who pass in and out, are fain to make use of Pilots which dwell thereabouts, and are experienced in the channel. Sufficiently famous in all times and stories for the miraculous passage of the Children of Israel.  
It took the name of the Red-Sea, as some conceived, from the redness of the sands; as others have delivered, from the redness of the waters: but later observations have discovered the weakness and absurdity of these Etymologies; the Sea and Sands being coloured here as in other places. By the Grecians it was called Erythraum, which in that tongue signifieth Red also, not from the colour either of the sands or waters, but from one Erythras supposed to be the Son of Perseus and Andromeda, who commanded the Eastem shores hereof. And these come nearer to the mark than the others did. For the truth is, it was originally called the Sea of Edom, because it took beginning on the coasts of that Country: which word in the Hebrew, signifying Red, as appeareth Gen. 25. 30. first given as a nickname to Esau, and from him afterwards to Mount Seir, or the Land of Edom, Gen. 36. 31. was by the Greeks rendered Erthraum, and Mare Rubrum by the Latins. Whence the name of the Red Sea became known to all, but the reason of the name to few.  
Of the great traffic which was anciently driven up this Sea, we shall speak hereafter, when we are in Egypt, on the other side of it. Look we now on the Lands which belong to Arabia, as they all generally do. Known in the times of Ptolemy by the names of 1. Adani, 2. Aeni, 3. Are, 4. Cardamine, 5. Combusta, 6. Damanum, 7. Hieracum, or the Isle of Hawks, 8. Maliaci, 9 Polbii, 10. Socratis, 11. Timagenis, and 12. Zygana. But by what names now called, and of what note then, is a thing so doubtful, that I dare not offer a conjecture. Late Travellers report almost all of them to be small, desolate, or but meanly inhabited, described by them under other names. One there is of indifferent largeness, said to be an hundred twenty and five miles long, though but twelve broad, called Dalaqua, with a City in it of that name, where they gather Pearls. 2. Then there is Camaran, most extremely hot, of most note for the many spoils there made by the Portugals. 3. Xamoa, the earth whereof is said to be Red, (perhaps to countenance the vulgar tradition of calling this the Red Sea from the colour of the sands of shores) and the King a Moor. 4. The Samaritan Island, spoken of by Scaliger, inhabited by a remainder of that people; who assoon as they saw any stranger land upon their coasts, would most religiously desite him not to touch them.  
II. The SOUTHERN OCEAN comprehendeth that vast body of waters, which from the Eastern banks of both Aethiopia's, coast along on the South of Arabia Felix, and so directly Eastward to the furthest India: in this regard called by some Writers Oceanus Indicus, by others Mare Australe, from the situation; and by some also Mare Rubrum or the Red Sea, from Erythras a great King (as they suppose) reigning hereabouts, and giving name not only to the Red Sea (or Gulf of Arabia) strictly and specially so called, but to all the Seacoasts also from the opening of the Bay of Arabia to the coasts of India, by them called Mare Erythraum.  
In this vast Ocean Ptolemy placeth many Lands which belong to Arabia, but of little note, viz. two Lands by the name of Insula Agathoclis. 2. Three more by the name of Cocconati. 3. Dioscoris, by Pliny called Dioscurias, with a City of the same name in it. 4. Seven others in the Bay called Sinus Sachalites, by the name of Zenobii. 5. Organa, by Strabo called Tyrrina, memorable for the Sepulchre of Erythras before mentioned, being a great Hill planted with trees. 6. Sarapias, by Ammianus Marcevinus called Turgana, famed for a Temple of Serapis, the Egyptian Idol. None of them now of any Credit, nor formerly of any great note, the two last excepted.  
III. On the East-side of Arabia Felix, betwixt it and Persia, lieth another large Arm of the Southern Ocean, anciently called Sinus Persicus, or the Bay of Persia, now Golfo di Elkadiffe. A turbulent and unruly Sea, the Southern Ocean breaking in at the one end, and the River Euphrates at the other: the continual combatting or clashing of which two great waters, makes it so unquiet. Ptolemy placeth in this Bay (but as parts or members of Arabia,) 1. Tylus, which Arianus sets at the mouth of Euphrates, Samus in the Indian Seas, affirming it to be well stored with vines, and olives: another of this name being placed by Theophrastus in the Bay of Arabia (but probably the place mistaken) affording good materials for shipping. 2. Apphana. 3. Tharo. 4. Ichara; of which nothing memorable. To these somelate Travellers have adjoined two others, if not some of the former under those new names, that is to say, 5. Bayrea, and 6. Gonfiar, where they take the best Pearls in the World, in beds of Oysters. Other Lands of this Bay (if any) do belong to Persia; where, if occasion so require, we shall speak more of them.  
To return therefore to the main-land of Arabia-Felix, the first Inhabitants thereof were the sons of Chus, and the families which they brought with them. Their memories preserved in the names of some of the chief Towns and Nations, till the days of Plinte, Ptolemy, and some others of the ancient writers. Divided afterwards into the several Tribes or Septs of the Cassanitae, Cinadocolpitae, Homeritae, Adramitae, Elesari, Salchalita, Anaritae, Gerrai, Aegai, Sabai, Minai, Leanitae, Cattabani, Abuceni, and divers others: each governed separately and apart by their several Chiefs; whom they honoured, as in other places, with the name of Kings. One of which spoken of by Justine, named Hierotimus, is said to have been the Father of 500 Children. Easy to have been overcome, because so divided, if any potent neighbour had attempted the conquest of them: as it is wondrous strange they did not, considering the richness of the Country, and the many temptations which it had to invite them to it. More worthily deserving the name of Felix in that never conquered, than in all the other rarities and delights thereof. By Alexander once designed for the seat of his Empire, who probably had endeavoured the conquest of it, having finished his war against the Persians, had he not died in Babylon at his coming back. Nor did the Romans ever extend their Empire beyond Petrea, though once Augustus did attempt it, employing in that action, Largus, his Lieutenant in Egypt, one Sames being then King of those parts which lay nearest to him. The Romans at their first entry found no resistance. But when by the extraordinary heat of the air, and drinking salt waters, they began to grow diseased and sickly; the Arabians fell lustily upon them, and made them return back both with loss and shame. After this nothing done by the Romans to disturb their quiet; nor much done by the Christians to advance their glories: the whole divided into almost as many Religion; as Principalities and Estates. Most of them Gentiles, but Circumcised, as the Ismaelites and other Arabians had been of old; many Jews intermingled with them, and some store of Christians, but those divided also into Sects and factions. And in this state it stood, when Mahomet first began to broach his blasphemous dotages. By birth of Jathripp, an obscure village then, not far from Medina; his Father called Abdilla, an Idolatrous Pagan; his mother named Hemina, as perverse a Jewess. Deprived of both his Parents when but two years old, he was left unto the care of an Uncle: who not able to give him education, not willing to be at the change to keep him longer, sold him at sixteen years of age to the Ismaelites, by whom exposed to sale in the opea markets, he was bought by one Abdalmutalif, a wealthy Merchant. By him employed at first in daudgory, and servile offices, till noting his great wit, and fitness for better services, he at last used him as his factor, sending him with his Camels and loads of Merchandise, into Syria, Persia, Egypt, and other places: wherein he did behave himself with such dexterity, that he much increased his Master's wealth, and his own estimation. Of person he is said to be low, and withal scaldheaded; but otherwise comely to the eye, and of good aspect. Much troubled with the falling sickness, which infirmity he made good use of afterwards, affirming that those fits were nothing but he evenly raptures, in which he did converse with the Angel Gabriel. He is said to have been also well skilled in Magic, by which he taught a white Pigeon to feed at his ear, which he gave out to be the Holy Ghost, by whom instructed in the law which he was to publish: but this not till afterwards. By Sorceries, comeliness of person, and the great knowledge which he had in his master's business, he gained so far on the affections of his Mistress, that on the death of Abdalmutalif, she made him her husband. Possessed of all his master's wealth, he affected ease; and being till then of no Religion, or at best a Pagan, he began to hearken unto Sergius, a Nestorian Monk, who flying out of Syria for fear of punishment (the heresies of Nestorius being newly both revived and censured) came into Arabia, where he found entertainment in the house of Abdalmu●alif, the Master of Mahomet. By his persuasions, who found him a fit Instrument for the devil to work on, he began to entertain the thoughts of hammering out a new Religion, which might unite all parties in some common principles, and bring the Christians, Jews, and Gentiles, into which the world was then divided, under one Professior. Resolved on this, he retired himself unto a Cave not far from Mecca, as if he there attended nothing but meditations: Sergius in the mean time founding in the ears of the people, both his parts and piety. The people being thus prepared to behold the Pageant, outcomes the principal Aetor with some parts of his Alcor in (pleasing enough to sensual minds) which he next professed to have received from the Angel Gabriel. And finding that this edified to his expectation, he next proclaimed liberty to all staves and servants as a thing commanded him by God, by whom the natural liberty of mankind was most dearly tendered: which drew unto him such a rabble of unruly people, that without out fear of opposition, he dispersed his doctrines, reducing them at last to a book or method.  
The Book of this religion he calleth the Alcoran, that is to say, the Collection of Precepts: the Original whereof they feign to be written on a Table which is kept in Heaven, and the Copy of it brought to Mahomet by the Angel Gabriel. A Book so highly reverenced by the Mahometans, that they write upon the cover of it, let none touch this but he that is clean. The body of it (as it now standeth) was composed by Osmen the fourth Caliph; who seeing the Saracens daily inclining to divers heresies, by reason of some false copies of Mahomet's Laws; and that the Empire by the same means was likely to fall into civil dissension; by the help of his wife, who was Mahomet's daughter, he got a sight of all Mahomet's papers, which he reduced into four Volumes, and divided into one hundred twenty and four Chapters; commanding expressly upon pain of death, that that book, and that only, should be received as Canonical, through his Dominions. The whole body of it is but an exposition and gloss on these eight Commandments.  
1. Every one ought to believe that God is a great God; and one only God, and Mahomet is his Prophet. They hold Abraham, to be the friend of God; Moses the messenger of God; and Christ the breath of God: whom they deny to be conceived by the Holy Ghost, affirming that the Virgin Mary grew with child of him by smelling to a Rose; and was delivered of him at her breasts. They deny the mystery of the Trinity; but punish such as speak against Christ, whose Religion was not (they say) taken away, but mended by Mahomet. And he who in his pilgrimage to Mecca, doth not, coming or going, visit the Sepulchre of Christ, is reputed not to have merited, or bettered himself anything by his journey.  
2. Every man must marry to increase the Sectaries of Mahomet. Four wives he alloweth to every man, and as many Concubines as he will: between whom the Husband setteth no difference either in affection or apparel; but that his wives only can enjoy his Sabbaths benevolence. The women are not admitted in the time of their lives to come into their Churches; nor after death to Paradise: and whereas in most or all other Countries, Fathers give some portions with their daughters, the Mahometans give money for their wives; which being once paid, the contract is registered in the Cadies' book, and this is all their formality of Marriage. More of this theme we shall speak when we are in TRECOMANIA.  
3. Every one must give of his wealth to the poor. Hence you shall have some buy slaves, and then manumit them; buy birds, and then let them fly. They use commonly to free Prisoners, release bondslaves, build caves or lodgings in the ways for the relief of Passengers, repair bridges, and mend highways. But their most ordinary alms consist in sacrifices of Sheep or Oxen, which when the solemnity is performed, they distribute among the poor; to whom also, on the first day of every year, they are bound to give the tith or tenth part of their gettings in the year foregoing: insomuch that you shall hardly find any beggars amongst them.  
4. Every one must make his prayers five times a day. When they pray they turn their bodies towards Mecca, but there faces sometimes one way, sometimes another way, believing that Mahomet shall come behind them, being at their devotions. The first time is an hour before Sunrising; the second at noonday; the third at three of the clock after noon; the fourth at Sunsetting; the first and last, before they go to sleep. At all these times the Criers keep a bawling in the steeples (for the Turks and Saracens have no bells) for the people to come to Church. And such as cannot come must when they hear the voice of the Criers, fall down in the place where they are, do their devotions, and kiss the ground thrice.  
5. Every one must keep a Lent one month in a year. This Lent is called Ramazan, in which they suppose the Alcoran was given unto Mahomet by the Angel Gabriel. This fast is only intended in the day time, the law giving leave to frolic it in the night as they best please, so they abstained from Wine, and Swine's flesh, prohibited by their Law at all times, but never so punctually abstained from, as in the time of their Lent.  
6. Be obedient to thy Parents; which law is the most neglected of any; never any children being so unnatural as the Turkish.  
7. Thou shalt not kill; and this they keep unviolated among themselves; but the poor Christians are sure to feel the smart of their fury. And as if by this law, the actual shedding of blood only were prohibited, they have invented punishments for their offenders, worse than death itself. As first the Strappade, which is hanging of them by the arms drawn backwards: when they are so bound, they are drawn up on high, and let down again with a violent swing, which unjoynteth all their back and arms. Secondly, they use to horse up their heels, and with a great cudgel to give them three or four hundred blows on the soles of their feet. Thirdly, it is ordinary to draw them naked up to the top of a Gibbit or Tower, full of hooks; and cutting the rope to let them fall down again. But by the way they are caught by some of the hooks, where they commonly hang till they die for hunger.  
8. Do unto others as thou wouldst be done unto thyself. To those that keep these Laws he promiseth Paradise, and a place of all delights, adomed with flowery Fields, watered with Crystalline. Rivers, beautified with Trees of gold, under whose cool shade, they shall spend their time with amorous Virgins, whose mansion shall not be far distant. The men shall never exceed the age of thirty; nor the women of fifteen; and both shall have their virginities renewed as fast as lost.  
Friday he ordained to be the Sabbath-day, partly to distinguish his followers from the Jews and Christians, who sole unize the days ensuing; but principally because he was on that day proclaimed King or Emperor, and solemnly so created. Wine and Swines-flesh are the principal things forbidden by the Alcoran, the last whereof they unanimously refrain; but on the first they are so sotted, that when they come at it, they seldom go home again unled; insomuch that all the wines in Constantinople have been thown about the streets, and death made the penalty for any that will presume to bring any more into the City. Manomet taught them that every one should be saved by his own Religion; him only excepted that revolted from the Alcoran, unto another law; but so that under the notion of Religion, he means only such as worship the one and only God; excluding by that means the old Idolaters of the Gentiles from the hopes of salvation. And he taught too, that at the end of the world all men that professed any such Religion, should go into Paradise, the Jews under the banner of Moses, the Christians under the banner of Christ, and the Saracens under the banner of Mahomet. They compel no man therefore to abjure the faith in which he was born, but commend and approve secretly such as they find zealous and constant in their own Religion, yet holding it an especial honour to have daily new proselytes, they incite them by hope of freedom and preferment, which with many are motives too much prevailing. Hence I have heard many say, that it is better for a man that would enjoy liberty of conscience, to live in the Country's professing Mahometanism, than Papistry: for in the one he shall never be free from the bloody inquistion; in the other he is never molested, if he meddle not with the Law, their women, or their slaves.  
The opinions which they hold concerning the end of the World are very ridiculous: as that at the winding of a horn, not all flesh only, but the Angels themselves shall die; that the Earth with an Earthquake shall be kneaded together like a lump of dough; that a second blast of the same horn, shall after forty days restore all again; that Cain shall be the Captain or ringleader of the damned, who shall have the countenance of dogs and swine; that they shall pass over the bridge of Justice, laden with their sins in satchels; that the great sinners shall fall into hell, the letter into purgatory only; with a thousand of the like fopperies; which it is needless to add here, considering that the Alcoran itself is now extant in the English, and every one that lists may read it. A thing so full of tautologies, inchohaerencies, and such gross absurdities, of so impure and camal mixture, that he must lay aside the use of his natural reason, who is taken by it, if force, ambition, or the want of Christian education do not lead him on. For if we seriously look into the causes of the deplorable increase and long continuance of this Religion, we shall find them to be chiefly these, 1. The Greatness of the Victories gotten by the Saracens; who easily compelled the conquered Nations to receive their Law. 2. The great zeal and diligence of the Arabians themselves, who being a numerous People, and much given to Merchandise, have possessed themselves of all the Seacoasts of afric, from the straits of Babelmandel, almost as far as to the Cape of good hope; of all the Lands in those Seas, and many Factories and good Towns on the coasts of India: in all which they have settled their Religion also, as a thing inseparable from their Nation. 3. A peremptory restraint of all disputation in any point of Religion whatsoever it be. 4. The suppressing of Philosophy, and the study of Humane Sciences; the light whereof might easily detect the grosseness of their Superstitions. 5. The sensual liberty allowed of having variety of wives, and as many Concubines as they are able to keep. 6. The promise of the like sensual pleasures in the other world, with which a sense not illuminated with the Spirit of God, doth for the most part use to be more affected, than with the speculative hope of spiritual happiness. 7. The forbidding of Printing and printed Books, by which the People might come to see the verity and purity of the Christian faith; the falsehood and impurity of the Law of Mahomet. These last not useful, or at least not able to induce belief, if the first had not opened and prepared the way.  
For indeed force of Arms was the strongest Argument by which Mahomet himself confirmed, and his Successors in their times have since propagated and dispersed his doctrines. Strengthened by the resort of that rascal Rabble which repaired to him, he assaults Medina, pretending a quarrel to the Jews, who had there a Synagogue. Repulsed at first with loss of men, and a wound in his face, by which some of his foreteeth were beaten out, there likely to have made an end of his new Religion, if not recovered by his Soldiers for a further mischief. At the next onset he prevailed, the battle being fought near a place called Bedez, situate betwixt Mecca and Medina, frequently mentioned in the Alcoran. After which fight he took the City, converting the Synagogue to a Temple for his own impieties: the news whereof so starded the Phylarchy, or nobility of Mecca, that they armed all their powers against him, and sped so well in the beginning of the war, that they drove him forcibly from their territories, which not long after he subdued, and set his chief seat at Mecca. From that his flight, the Saracens began their computation of years (as we from CHRIST'S Nativity) which they call the Hegira; which beginneth about the year of our Redemption 617. concerning which time, I cannot but observe, that Mahomet compiled his devilish doctrine, beginning his Empire; and Boniface the third assumed his Antichristian title, beginning his unlimited Supremacy, nigh about the same year. It was called the Hegira, from the Arabic Hegirathi, which by the learned in that tongue, is rendered by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i.e. the persecution raised ab ut Religion. Joseph Scaliger in the first edition of his most laborious work de emendatione temporum, casteth off this Etymology with purum putum mendacium. He will not have it called Aera fugae or persecutioris, but Aera Hagarene: because for soothe the Arabians were by some called Hagarons. I believe it would have puzzled Joseph, with all his reading, to show unto us any Epoch or Aera, which is taken from the name of a Nation. And therefore other reason he giveth us none but this. Nos autem scimus vocem illam primogenia significations ab Hagarenis, non à fuga duci. But time, and opposition, at the last reclaimed him from this error: and in the second edition of his work, he is content to follow the common opinion of those men, whom in the first he whistled off with the infamous appellation of mendaces.  
But to proceed, It happened much about this time, that the Saracens revolting from Heraclius the Eastern Emperor, joined themselves unto him. They had long been displeased with their condition: and now hoped to mend it. Exasperated by Julian the Apostate, when they served in his wars against the Persian, for telling them when they demanded their pay, that he had more store of steel than Gold: but then they wanted a fit head to resort unto. Now serving Heraclius in the same war, they were used by his Officers in the same ill manner. Ask their pay, the Treasurer of the Army made them this churlish answer, that there was scarce money enough to pay the Roman and Grecian Soldiers; and must those dogs be so importunate for their wages? Provoked herewith, and hearing the fame of Mahomet, they betook themselves to him: who strengthened by their forces, and the coming in of the rest of their Countrymen, soon brought the three Arabia's under his subjection. To which, having defeated the Emperor's forces sent against him, he added some parts of Syria and Egypt; and returning to Mecca, there died frantic and distempered, in the 70th, year of his Age, and three and twentieth of his impostures: of which he had spent thirteen at Medina, and the rest at Mecca; from his first serling in which City the years of his Empire were computed. His dead body being kept four days in expectation of a resurrection, which he promised to perform at the end of three; grown full of stench and putrefaction, was carried to Medina, and there interred: his Successors out of wicked and worldly policy, keeping up the reputation of that Religion after his decease, which they derided in his life; and calling themselves Caliphs', or Vicar's General, to him, their Prophet, to the Catalogue of which we hasten; made intricate, not more by their own confusions, than by the difference of those names by which they are presented to us by several Writers, according to the times and Languages in which they writ.  

The Caliphs' or Emperors of the Saracens.  
A. C. A. H.  
622 5 1. Mahomet the Impostor, of whom before.  
632 15 2. Ebubezer, or Vquebar, Mahomet's Father-in-Law, and one of his Great Captains, supplanted Ali, to whom the Empire was designed by the will of Mahomet; and took unto himself the name of Caliph. 2.  
634 17 3. Haumar, the second of Mahomet's Great Captains, having the command of the Army under Ebubezer, succeeded him in the estate; and added to it Persia, Egypt, Palestine, with great part of Syria and Mesopotamia. 12.  
647 30 4. Osmen, the third of Mahomet's great Captains, Husband of Zetneh, his second daughter; succeeded under that pretence, and added all Barbary to his Empire. Distressed by the faction of Halt, and besieged in his own house, he flew himself, in the eighty seventh year of his Age, and the tenth of his Reign.  
657 40 5. Hali, the Kinsman and next heir of Mahomet, and the husband of Fatime his eldest daughter, succeeded on the death of Osmen: murdered by the procurement of Mxavias' near Cafa in Arabia Felix.  
660 43 6. Muhavias', having murdered Hali, his Son Hasem or Ossan, and eleven of the Sons of that Hasem, the twelfth only escaping with life (from whom descended the Family of the Alaveci, and the Persian Sophies) assumed the Government as rightful Successor to Osmen, whose widow, the daughter of Mahomet, he had took to wife. He conquered Rhodes, Cyprus, and a great part of Asia Minor, and was the Founder of the Family of Aben Humeya.  
681 64 7. Gizid, the Son of Muhavias', more skilled in Poetry than in Arms.  
8. Habdalla and Marvan, Competitors for the Supreme dignity; but carried at last by Marvan.  
685 68 9 Abdimelech, the Son of Marvan, established the begun conquests of Armenia and Mesopotamia 22.  
707 90 10. Vlidor Ulit, under whom the Saracens or Moor first conquered Spain. 9  
716 99 11. Zulcimin, Brother to Ulit, whose Captain Mulsamas besieged Constantinople, till his Ships were burnt, and his men consumed with the Plague. 3.  
719 102 12. Homar or Haumar II. Son of Vildor Vlit 2.  
721 104 13. Izit, or Gizid II. the brother of Haumar, with whom during his life he was joint Caliph, and after his decease enjoyed it wholly to himself.  
725 107 14. Evelid, by some called Ischam, in whose time Charles Martel made such havoc of the Moors in France Anno 734 their General then named Abderamen. 18.  
743 125 15. Gizid III. the Son of Gizid the second.  
744 126 16. Hyces, by some called Ibrahim, the brother of Gizid the third, slain by Marvan.  
745 127 17. Marvan II. the last of the house of Ben-Humeya, slain by Abdalla, of the house of Fatime and Hali. 7.  
752 134 18. Abdalla, of the house of Alaveci, or Alabeci, descended from Hali, and Fatime, the eldest daughter of Mahomet: called also the Family of Abas, because of their descent from Abas the Uncle of Mahomet, and perhaps Father unto Hali.  
756 138 19 Abdallas' II.  
20. Mahomet II. surnamed Bugiafer, or Abugefer, who built the City of Bagdat, made from that time the constant seat of his Successors till their fatal period.  
777 156 21. Mahadi. 9  
786 168 22. Musa, or Moses. 1.  
787. 169. 23. Aron, or Arachid, who compelled Irene Empress of Constantinople to pay him tribute. 23.  
810. 193. 24. Mahamad, or Mahomet III.  
825. 198. 25. Abdalla III. who took and spoilt Crete, and overthrew the Greeks; be spoiled Sicilia, Sardinia, and Corsica. 17.  
832. 215. 26. Mahomet IV. wasted Italy, burned the suburbs of Rome, and harassed the forenamed Lands. 40.  
Others reckon these Caliphs' to have succeeded Mahomet II.  
815. 198. 25. Mammon 12.  
827. 210. 26. Mutetzam 8.  
835. 218. 27. Wacek 4.  
839. 222. 28. Methucall 12.  
851. 234. 29. Montacer 1.  
852. 235. 30. Abul Hamet 6.  
858. 241. 31. Almatez 4.  
863. 245. 32. Motadi Bila 7. 7. After whose death the Egyptians withdrew themselves from their obedience due to the Babylonian Caliph, and chose one of their own, to whom all the Arabians, or those of the Mahometan religion, in Africa and Europe, submitted themselves. Of the Aegyptain Caliphs', when we come into that Country: take now with you the names only of the Syrian and Babylonian Caliphs'; for story of them I find little or none; the power being totally in the hands of the Sultan's of the several Provinces, and nothing left unto the Caliphs' but an airy title; the shadow of that mighty Tree, which formerly had spread itself over most parts of the World.   

The Babylonian Caliphs' after the division.  
A. C. A. H.  
870 252 1. Mutemad 21.  
891 273 2. Mutezad 8.  
897 281 3. Muchtaphi 8.  
907 389 4. Muchtedtr 24.  
931 313 5. Elhaker 1.  
932 314 6. Ratze 7.  
939 321 7. Muctade 4.  
943 325 8. Musteraphs 2.  
947 325 9 Macia, and Taia 44.  
989 361 10. Kadar 41.  
1030 412 11. Kaim 5.  
1035 417 12. Muctadi. 60.  
1095 477 13. Mustetaher 22.  
1117 499 14. Musteraschad 18.  
1135 517 15. Raschid 25.  
1160 542 16. Musteneged 9  
1169 551 17. Mustazi 10.  
1179 561 18. Narzi 39  
1225 597 19 Taher.  
20. Mustenatzer.  
1255 638 21. Mustatzem, the last Caliph or Highpriest of the Saracens of Bagdet, or Babylon, living in the account of a Prince or an Emperor, or looked on as the Supreme Lord of the Saracen Empire: starved in his Castle of Bagdet, and his whole posterity rooted out, by Allan, or Halon the Tartar, in the first year of his reign. Yet there is still remaining a carcase of the old body, one whom they call Caliph, at whose hands the neighbour Princes use to receive their Diadems and regalities: so we find Solyman the Magnificent, after his conquest of Chaldaea, Mesopotamia, and Assyria, to have been by one of these poor titulary Caliphs', Crowned King of Babylon, Anno 1513.   
This unwieldy body of the Saracen Empire, having thus two heads, began apparently to decline: losing to the Kings of Leon and Oviede, the greatest part of Spain; to the Genoese, Sardinia, and Corsica; to the Normans, Naples, and Sicily; and finally most of their Empire, with their very names, to the Turks and Tartars. For Allan, or Haallon, a Tartarian Captain, starved Mustatzem the Babylomon Caliph, in his Tower of Bagdet, and rooted out all his posterity: and Sarracon the first Turkish King of Egypt, brained the last Egyptian Caliph with his horsemans' Mace; leaving not one of his issue or kindred surviving. The office of the Caliphs' is now executed in the Turks Dominion, by the Mufti or chief Priest of the Turkish Mahometans.  
As Mars showed himself a friend unto those Moors in their wars and triumphs; so also did Phoebus pour down no less ceiestial influence, on such as addicted themselves to Scholarship. Bagdet in Chaldaea, Cairo in, Fess, Morocco, in Barbary, and Corduba in Spain, were their Universities: out of which came the Philosophers, Avicen, and Averro; the Physicians, Rhasis, and Mosue; the Geographers, Leo, and Abilfada; & almost all the Textuarie; & profound Writers (as Halt, Algazel, Albumazar, etc.) in Astrology; from whom a great part of our Astrommicall and Astrological terms are borrowed.  
There is now no Kingdom, Island or Province, which acknowledgeth the Empire of the Saracons, but the Kingdom of Fess and Morocco ovely: Arabia itself, the very first seat of their power, acknowledging a subjection to the Turkish Empire. For first Petraes' and Deserta being subdued by the Turks, when they conquered Persia, or otherwise following the fortunes of the present Victor, were afterwards accounted of as subject unto the Mamalucks of Egypt, who out of that Country and all Syria, had by degrees diffeized the Selzucci in Family. And as the vassals of that Crown, though but Subjects at will, they more molested Selimus in his march towards Egypt, by falling on his Rear, and terrifying him with their night-Alarms, than all the forces of the Mamalucks in the field against him. But Egypt being subdued, and the Mamaluths utterly destroyed, some of their Chiefs being gained by money, and the rest by promise of preferment, the whole Nation of these wild Arabs swore allegiance to him; continuing in account as Subjects unto his Successors, but in effect doing what they list: governed as formerly by the Chieses of their several Clannes, and in their Robberies taking no more notice of the Turk than they do of the Christians. And as for Felix, it continued also in a free condition, in respect of any foreign power, till of late times the Turks and Portugals entrenched upon them. For in the year 1538. Solyman Bassa, Admiral of the Turkish Fleet against the Pontugals, who had diverted the trade of the Red Sea, and otherwise given offence to Solyman the Magnificent by aiding the Persians, went with a strong Army to take Din, a Town and Island of East-India, then in their possession. But being unable to effect it, at his coming back he called in at Aden, one of the best traded Ports of Arabia Felix, invited the King thereof aboard, most treacherously hanged him, and surprised the City. The like he also did to the King of Zibit, the Port Town to Mecca: and by that means got possession of all the Coasts of this Country, bordering on the Red Sea, or Gulf of Arabia; of which the Turks still continue Masters. But in the inland parts, and towards the Persian Gulf, of no power at all; not suffered to travel up and down without a Pass from some of the Arabian Chiefs, or if they do, in danger to be set upon by the Natives, who brook them not. Some parts hereof which lie next unto the Isle of Ormus, made one Kingdom with it; but the Kings originally of this Country, by whom the City of Ormus was first builded; and so continued till the taking of Ormus by the Portugals, Anno 1622. who since the taking of that Isle by the King of Persia, hold Muskahat, and some other pieces upon this Continent. The residue of the Country cantonned amongst a company of petit Princes, as in former times; before ambition taught them to devour one another.  
And so much for Arabia.   

6 CHALDAEA, 7 ASSYRIA, 8 MESOPOTAMIA.  
THese Provinces, which properly and originally constituted the Assyrian Empire, I have joined together in the Title, because united in the story, and affairs thereof; though severally to be considered in the description, and chorography of them.  
CHALDAEA is bounded on the East, with Susiana, a Province of Persia; on the West, with Arabia Deserta; on the North, with Mesopotamia; and on the South, with the Persian Bay, and the rest of Deserta. Originally called Chasdam, from Chesed the fourth Son of Nachor the brother of Abraham. Chesed quoque, quartus est, à quo Chasdim, idest Chaldaei postea vocati sunt, as Saint Hierome hath it. But why the Chaldeans should derive their name from Chesed, being a People long before Cheseds birth, I am not able to determine: unless he taught them the first Principles of the Art of Astronomy; or was the Author of some signal benefit unto them, which we know not of. It was called afterwards Babylonia, from Babylon the chief City of it; and at this day by Bellonius, Azamia; by the Arabians, Keldan; by the Turks, Curdistan.  
But the name of Chaldaea sometimes went beyond these bounds, taking in somepart also of Mesopotania, as appeareth by that passage of Saint Stephen, saying, Acts 7. v. 2, 3, 4. That the God of glory appeared to our Father Abraham, when he was in Mesopotamia, before he dwelled in Charran; And said unto him, Get thee out of this Country, and from thy Kindred, and come into the Land which I said show thee. Then came be out of the Land of the Chaldees, and dwelled in Charran, & c. Where clearly that part of Mesopotamia which lay next unto Assyria, where then Abraham was, is included under the name of Chaldaea, or the land of the Chaldees. Which I desire the Reader to take notice of, because I must make use of this observation in another place.  
The Country by Herodotus said to be so fruitful that it yielded ordinarily two hundred, and in some places three hundred fold; the blades of wheat and barley being (as he affirmeth) four fingers broad. By plamy it is said of the Babylonians, that they mowed their corn twice, and seeded it a third time, or else it would be nothing but blades: and yet so, that the worst of their land yielded firsty, and their best an hundred fold increase. Nor is the nature of the soil so altered in long tract of time, but that (as late Travellers have observed) it would in all likelihood attain to its first fertility, if it were ordered with like care and diligence, as in former times. But what need more be said as to the natural fruitfulness and delights of this Country, than that it pleased Almighty God to make choice of some part hereof for the terrestrial Paradise or Garden of Eden, in which he placed our Father Adam, at his first creation. For here that Paradise, by men both skilled in Divinity, and Geography, is assumed to have stood. Yet amongst all sorts of Writers we find different opinions. Some make Paradise to be a place of pleasure, and the four Rivers to be the four Cardinal Virtues: but these allegories on the Scripture are not warrantable. Others place it in the air, under the circle of the Moon; and tell us that the four Rivers in the Scriptures mentioned, fall down from thence, and running all under the Ocean, rise up again in those places, where they are now found: but this is so vain a foppery, that I will not honour it with a confutation. Such as make Paradise local, are divided also into three ranks, (for I omit the rest) whereof some place it under the Aequator; but this agreeth not with the bounds prescribed by the Holy Ghost. Some conceive the four Rivers to be Tigris, Euphrates, Nilus, and Ganges; and that Paradise was the whole world: but this cannot be, for then when Adam was driven our of Paradise, it must also follow that he was driven out of the world, which were absurd. Those of the soundest judgements place it here, in an Island which is made by the Rivers Tigris and Euphrates, and some branches running from them both: the uppermost of which is called Pison (falsely rendered Ganges) which watereth the land of Havilah, or that part of the land of Havilth which is now called Chusestan or Susiana, a Province of Persia containing Susiana; and the lowermost is named Gihen, (improperly by some translated Nilus, which compasseth the East parts of Arabia Petraea, by the Septuagin for the reason's abovementioned, rendered Ethiopia, And this agreeth both with the position of this Country, and the course of those Rivers. For that Tigris, and Euphrates (which the Hebrew text called Hiddekel, and Perah) do here join their streams, is confessed on all sides. Then as for Pison, it is no other than that River by Ptolemy called Basilius, or Regius; by Curtius more nearly Piso-Tigris, or Pasi-Tigris, Pervenit ad fluvium, Pasitigrin incolae vocant, as his own words are A little stream, which watering the Land of Havilah, or the Country of the Chaveloi, or Cheulases, or Chaulaterei (for by these several names they are called amongst the ancients, who place them betwixt the Babylonians, and the Nabathaeans, an Arabian People) poureth itself into the Tigris, and falls together with it in the Gulf of Persia. And finally for Gihen, by Ptolemy called Maarsares, and by others Marsyus, it is no other than a branch of Euphrates, which watering the Land of Chus, or Ethiophia Asatica, take which name you will, loseth itself at last in the Lakes of Chaldaea.  
But though in general the Country was extremely fruitful; yet in some places was it covered with a slimy matter, which the overflowings of the waters, and the nature of the soil together, did bring forth abundantly. Used by them in their buildings instead of mortar, than which more durable and binding; and therefore chosen for the cement of the Tower of Babel, Gen. 11. 3. Some also tell of a clyff which opening sendeth out such a stink that it killeth birds as they fly over it: and others of a like open place near a Town called Ait, which continually throweth out boiling pitch (named therefore H●●●-mouth by the Mo●res) filling therewith the adjoining fields; and that herewith the people use to pitch their boats. But this is in some places only, the Country generally being both healthy and delightful, as before was said.  
The people anciently were much addicted unto Sooth-saying and Divinations; and no less noted for being Authors of the first Idolatry that was ever practised in the world. Induced unto the last perhaps by the power of their Kings, who would needs confer divine honours upon some of their Ancestors. But to the first inclined by their own disposition, and the situation of their Country, yielding a fair sensible Horizon, (for the Rational is alike in all places both in hills and valleys) and consequently profitable to the observation of the rising and setting of the Stars, whether Heliacal, Acronical, Matutine, or Vesperline, as the Artists phrase it. Whereunto may be added the length of life in those elder times, furnishing them with the greater measure of experience concerning the distinct motions of each several Orb, and the full period of the courses of each several Planet. Certain it is, that they grew so noted in this Art, that at the last every Astrologaster, or figure-flinger, was called a Chaldaean: Gentis nomine ad eos homines translato, qu●●ese illius sapientiae specie venditabant, as Beza hath observed in his Annotations. For giving too much credit to them, the people thus flouted by the Satycist.  
Chaldaeis sed major erit fiducia, quicquid  
Dixerit Astrologus, credent à fonte relatum  
Ammonis, etc.  
That is to say, 
Jove's Oracles no greater credit have,  
Than Sooth-saying of a Chaldee cozening knave.   
The language which was spoken here had the name of the Chaldee or Chaldaean tongue: of great antiquity, and sanctified by the Holy Ghost, some Chapters of the prophecy of Daniel being written in it. So different from the Hebrew in its primitive purity, that the Jews did not understand it, as appear by the words of the Officers of Hezekiah, 2 Kings, chap. 18. ver. 26. desiring Rabsaketh to speak to them in the Chalder tongue, that the common People of the Jews might not hear his blasphemies. A further proof whereof may be, that a man may have some knowledge in the Hebrew, and yet be ignorant of the Chaldee, as many are, no doubt, at this present day. But whatsoever it was in its primitive purity, it altered afterwards, when the Jews came to live amongst them during the Captivity: out of whose long commerce with them, both nations lost their proper languanes, and fell upon a third, made out of both, which was called the Syriack. Of this we spoke before when we were in Syria, and Palestine. And this is now the natural language of this Country, and its neighbour Assyria, but with a little mixture of the Greek and Arabic, not vulgarly spoken elsewhere, for aught I can find; but used by many others, in their sacred offices, by whom not commonly understood. For in this language all the Sects of the Eastern Christians do officiate their public Liturgies, that is to say, the Nstorians, Jacobites, Mar●nites, (for I reckon not the Melchites, who use the Greek Liturgy, amongst the Sectaries.) The like do also the Indians, or Christians of Saint Thomas; the Cophties or Christians of Egypt, and the poor remainder of Christians in the Isle of Zocatara, an Island on the coast of Asrick. Used to those Liturges when that language was more understood amongst them; though now worn out of Vulgar knowledge by the overspreading of the Arabic, Tartarian, and Turkish Conquests. In which the Prelates of these Churches have fallen into the great error of the Church of Rome: and without taking notice of the alterations happening in the Vulgar tongues of those several nations, which are united under them into one opinion, keep up a language in their Liturgies which they understand not: as if the capacities of the people could be sooner raised to the understanding of an unknown language; than the public Liturgies be fitted unto their capacities. The ancient piety of the Church and the modern languages of God's people are not inconsistent; though out of private ends some have taught us otherwise. But I fear this error (as some others) will not be so easily remedied, as reprehended. From the tongue in which they celebrate the Divine Offices of their Religion, pass we to the Religion itself, whose Sacred Offices are so celebrated.  
The Christian faith was first preached in this Country by Saint Peter, of whose being in Babylon, (the chief City hereof) himself assureth us in the last words almost of his First Epistle: and other business he had none here but to preach the Gospel. Much persecuted by the Persians, (who were then possessed of all these parts) it prevailed at last, Christianity growing up the faster for the cutting down. The patriarchal See, originally planted in Salencia, successor unto Babylon in repute and greatness, if not also in name, the Bishop whereof, by order of the Nicene Council, had the Ecclesiastical jurisdiction of these parts with the name of Catholic, and the next place in S●ssiom at all public assemblies of the Church, next after the Patriarch of Jerusalem. And besides this the Indians or Christians of Saint Thomas, acknowledge him for their Primate or Metropolitan; as they did afterwards in his right, the Patriarch of Muzal. At this present here are some remainders of Christianity, part of them Jacobites; but the most Nestorians; of whom more anon.  
Of the chief Rivers hereof we have spoke already, and Mountains there are none to hinder us in our passage forwards. So that without more delay we may take a view of their principal places. And in the first place we meet with Babel, (in the Hebrew signifying confusion) famous for the confusion of languages which here happened. For immediately after the Universal deluge, Nimrod the son of Chus, the son of Cham, persuaded the people to secure themselves from the like after-claps, by building some stupendious Edifice, which might resist the fury of a second deluge. This Counsel was generally imbracod, Heber only and his Family, (as tradition goeth) contradicting such an unlawful attempt. The major part prevailing, the Tower began to rear a head of Majesty▪ 5146 paces from the ground: having its basis and circumference equal to the height. The passage to go up, went winding about the outside, and was of an exceeding great breadth, there being not only room for horses, carts, and the like means of carriage, to meet and turn; but lodging also for man and beast, and (as Verstegan reporteth) grass and cornfields for their nourishment. But God beholding from an high this fond attempt, sent amongst them (who before were of one Language) a confusion of tongues: which hindered the proceeding of this building, one being not able to understand what his fellow called for.  
2. Babylon, on the Bank of Euphrates, the ancientest City in the World, on this side of the flood, first built by Nimrod, in the place destinated to the raising of the Tower of Babel, and by him made the Seat of his Kingdom; afterwards beautified and enlarged by Semiramis, the wife of Ninus, one of his Successors; and finally much increased both in bulk and beauty by Nabuchadnezzar, who therefore arrogated to himself the whole glory of it, saying in his pride, is not this the great Babel that I have builded? Dan. 4. 30. A City of great fame and state, accounted one of the world's nine wonders, and deservedly too.  
The compass of the walls 365 furlongs, (or 46. miles) according to the number of the days in the year; in height 50. Cubits, and of so great breadth, that carts and carriages might meet on the top of them: finished in one year by the hands of 200000 workmen, employed daily in it. Situate on both sides of Euphrates, over which there was a sumptuous bridge, and at each end of that bridge a magnificent Palace: and beautified also with the Temple of the Idol Bel, and famous for the Pensile Gardens, made with great charge, and born up with most stately Arches. In a word, so great and vast it was, that Aristotle saith, that it ought rather to be called a Country, than a City: adding withal, that when the Town was taken, it was three days before the furthest parts of the Town could take notice of it. Which taking of the Town must be understood of the surprise thereof by the Medes and Persians; and not of the taking of it by the Macedanians, as Pet. Ramus (as great a Clerk as he was) in his marginal notes upon the Politics of that Author, hath most vainly told us. Which whether it were that there were Gates at the end of every street, which made it be so long in taking; or that the Babylonians were not wakened from their drunken feast, in the time whereof it was surprised, I determine not. Revolting in the time of Semiramis, the news came to her as she was ordering her hair: whereupon, leaving her head half-drest she went and besieged it; never ordering the rest of her hair, till she had recovered it. How it fell into the hands of Cyrus, we learn out of Xenophons' Cyri-paideia, which was in this manner. The River Euphrates ran quite thorough the Town, round about whose banks the politic Prince cut many and deep channels: into which when the Babylonians were securely merry at a general feast, he suddenly drained and emptied the River, conveying his own forces into the Town all along the dry and yielding Channel; and in a little time made himself master of it. From the Persians it revolted in the reign of Darius Hystaspes: and that sustenance might not be wanting to the men of war, they strangled the most part of the women, being thought in actions of this quality, not so much as necessary evils. When they had for twenty months so obstinately defended the Town, that the Persians had less hope than ever of prevailing; Zopyrus one of Darius' Captains, mangling his body, and disfiguring his face by cutting off his nose and ears, fled to the Babylonians, complaining of the tyranny of his King. They crediting his words, and knowing his prowess, committed the charge of the whole army unto him, as a man, to whom such barbarous usage had made the King irreconcilable. But he taking the best opportunity, delivered both the Town and Soldiers into the hands of his Sovereign. Which made Darius often say, that he had rather have one Zopyrus, than twenty Babylous. Here died Alexander the Great, after whose death the Grecian Captains regardful rather of their own ambitions, than the common loyalty, divided the Empire among themselves; leaving the body of the King 8 days unburied. A wonderful change of fortune, that he who living thought the world too small for his valour, being dead should find no place big enough for his body. After this taking of it by the Macedonians, the glories and magnificence hereof began to decline, lessened unto a fourth part in the time of Queen Curtius' the historian; in solitudinem redacta, reduced to desolation in the days of Pliny; and being turned into a Park, in which the Kings of Persia did use to hunt, in the time of Saint Hi●rome. That wondrous change occasioned partly by the injury of time, partly by the neglect of the Macedomans, who removed the Seat Royal of their Empire more towards Greece: but principally by Seleucus Nicanor, who offended with the Babylonians, built the City of  
3. Seleucia, the second City of note in all this Country, situate in a place more commodious and healthy, near the meeting of Tigris, and Euphrates, and about 40 miles more North than Babylon, out of which he drew 500000 persons for the peopling of it. Nor did this new City rob the old only of its power and greatness, but also of its very name; being called Babylon in some of the ancient Authors; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as (for one) by Stephanus. In the primitive times of Christianity, the Bishop of this See was accounted for the Primate of the Chaldaeans; with a super-intendency over the Christians of India also, as before was said. But this Supplanter was in time brought to ruin also, And  
4. Bagdad, a new City raised from the ruins of it; built near the foundations of Seleucia by Bugia●er the twentieth Caliph of the Mahometans, at the expense (as some write) of eighteen millions of Crowns; which because of the many Gardens contained in it had the name of Bagdad, the word so signifying in the Arabic tongue. First built upon the Western bank of the River Tigris near to its confluence with Buphrates; but in the year 1095. removed to the other side of the River, by Mustetaher, the 45 Caliph of the Sarac●●, because less subject to the inundations of that furious River. But it was reckoned still for the same City, as if built by Bugiafer, by whom being made the seat of his Royal Residence, (whose Successors were from hence called the Caliphs' of Babylon) it flourished in great pride and splendour, till taken and saked by Allan, or Haalan a Tartarian Captain, who here starved Musteatzem, the last Caliph of it, and rooted out his whole posterity, as if the Caliphate and the City were to end together. But the Town revived again, though the Caliph could not; continuing to this day a City of great wealth and traffic, but nothing comparable unto what it was for beauty and bigness; being not above seven miles in compass, and having nothing in the buildings to be justly bragged of. Taken by Solyman the Magnificent with the rest of the Country, it became subject to the Turks; from them recovered by Abas the King of Persia, Anno 1625. and again recovered by the Turks, about the year 1640. In which changes it can be no marvel that she hath lost much of her former splendour. Maintained especially at the present by the trade of Aleppo, to which, besides such goods as go up the water, there pass yearly many Caravans, or troops of Merchants, each of them having in it some hundreds (if not thousands) of Camels laden with commodities. For whose safe lodging, as they pass (the ways being generally ill provided for Travellers, in these Eastern Countries) there are some houses of receipt built at the public charge, or by some special Benefactor, to preserve his memory; most of them strong, and many very fair and lovely: which in the dominions of the Persians they call Caravane-Ruwes; in the Turkish, Canes. And for communicating the success of their business unto the place from whence they came, they make use of Pigeons, which is done in this manner. When the Hen-Pigeon fitteth, or hath any young, they take the Cock, and set him in an open Cage: whom, when they have traveled a day's journey, they let go at liberty, and he straight flieth home to his Mate. When they have trained them thus from one place to another, and that there be occasion to send any advertisements, they tie a letter about one of their necks, which at their return home is taken off by some of the house, advertised thereby of the estate of the Caravan. The like is also used betwixt Ormus, and Balsora. But of this enough.  
5. Ctesiphon, on the River Tigris, not far from Seleucia, by whose fall it rose; occasioning the decay thereof, as that did of Babylon. So Pliny, speaking of the fall of Babylon, by the building of Seleucia so near unto it; then adding, invicem ad hanc exhauriend in, Ctesiphontem juxta tertium ab ea Lapidem condidere Parthi. First built, saith Marcellinus, by Vardanes, afterwards beautified and walled by Pacorus, a Parthian King; and by him made the seat-royal of the Persian Kingdom. Many times besieged and assaulted by the Roman Emperors; but most commonly without success; and amongst others, by Julian the Apostate, that bitter enemy of the Gospel, who here breathed out his soul to Satan, in these dying words, Vicisti tandem Galileae. But Vardanes (whosoever he was) cannot of right be called the first founder of it, who raised it rather from the rubbish of an old foundation: this City being the same with that which Moses calleth Calne; and Ezekiel, Canneh, Gen. 11. and Ezek. 27. 23. and therefore rightly said by Pliny to be built in Chalanitide, or the Region of Chalne.  
6. Sipparum, remarkable for the great Trench made near it, to receive the over flow of Euphrate●, which otherwise might have annoyed the City of Babylon: in compass 1280 furlongs or 160 miles; In depth 20 fathoms. A vast and expenseful work; but that nothing was to be admired when Babylon itself was up and in full prosperity.  
7. Apamia, a City of Seleucus foundation also, situate at the fall of Pison into the River of Tigris.  
8. Vologesia, placed by Ptolemy amongst the Cities of Chaldaea, but by Marcelinus in Assy●ia; built or repaired by one of the Vologeses Kings of Persia, and from him denominated.  
9 Borsippa, by Ptolemy called Barsita, memorable for the great victory which Cyrus the first Persian Monarch, obtained here against Nabonid the King of Babylon, by Sealiger called Darius Medus, (of which more anon): whom having vanquished, he pardoned him (as he saith) his life, and gave him the government of Carmania.  
10. Balsora, the Port Town to Babylon, situate at the fall of Euphrates into Sinus Persicus, and consequently of great wealth and trading: The riches of Arabia, Persia, and some part of India, being landed here, and so carried to BABYLON, and thence up the water to A●eppo. Supposed to be the City of Teredon, mentioned by Ptolemy; built or repaired by Nabuchadnezzar, and not long since taken from the Turk by Abas, the Persian.   

7. ASSYRIA.  
ASSYRIA is bounded on the East, with Media, by which parted by the mountain called Coachras; on the West, with Mesopotamia, from which divided by the River Tigris; on the North, with some part of Turcomania, and part of Chaldaea. So called from Assur the son of Sem, by whom first inhabited. But having long since lost that name, as to vulgar speech, it is by Niger called Ad●nsa; by Murcator, Sarh; by the Turks, Arzerum.  
The Country very plain, and level, exceeding fruitful, and abounding in Rivers. For besides Tig●is, which washeth one whole side thereof, Ptolemy assigneth to this Country the Rivers of 2. Lyc●●, 3. Cuprus, and 4. Gorgos; all of good note, and all of them increasing, with their tributary Streams, the greatness of Tigris.  
The people were anciently great warriors, and together with the Babylonians or Chaldaeans, commanded a great part of the East; extending their dominion from the Mediterranean Sea, to the River Indus; insomuch that not the people of this Province only, but of all the Provinces almost of this spacious Empire, had the name of Assyrians. The men for all this, exceeding formal in their habit, wearing long robes which trailed on the very ground, their hair long, their hats or Caps Pyramidal like the Persian Mucre; not stirring out of doors but perfumed with Musk, rings on their fingers, and a Sceptre in their hands; and very frequent in their washings, especially after copulation. As for their women, it was an ancient custom with them, to expose the fairest unto sale in the open Market; and with the money given for those, to put off such as were deformed and not so amiable. And hence perhaps the Fathers of our times have learned this leston of giving less portions with such daughters as will sell themselves, but greasing the fat sow (as the saying is) with the addition of some hundreds; which made the merry fellow say, That the money were a good match if the wench were away.  
The Christian faith was first here planted by Saint Judas, and took such deep root in that plantation, that it could never be pulled up, notwithstanding the cruel persecutions raised against it by the Kings of Persia; who when they saw there was no means to destroy it by violence, attempted in the next place to corrupt it with heresy. And to that end, as also to revenge himself upon the Emperor Heraclius, a great Champion of the Orthodox belief against Nestorianism, Chosroes the great King of Persia enforced all the Christians of his Empire unto those opinions, which he knew that Emperor condemned; permitting none who were counted Catholics within his Dominions. By means whereof, and afterwards for want of Preachers to instruct them otherwise (the Saracons having conquered the Persian Empire) Nestorianism prevailed so far, that it extended over all the Country's East of Tigris, as far as India; and Northwards too amongst the Tartars, of which more hereafter. Governed by their own Patriarch who resideth at Mosul, now the chief City of this Country; and honoured by his people with the Title of Jacelich, mistaken or pronounced amiss for Catholic; an attribute given anciently to all Orthodox Prelates.  
The Opinions held by them as Nestorians, were, 1. That there were two persons in our Saviour, as well as two natures; but yet confessing that CHRIST from the first instant of his conception, was both God and man. 2. That the blessed Virgin ought not to be called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or the Mother of God; but yet acknowledging her to be the Mother of God the Son: 3. That Nestorius, condemned for these opinions in the third and fourth General Councils, was an holy man; for whose sake they condemn Saint Cyrill his professed Antagonist, and all those Councils wherein any censure was laid upon him. In other points, though differing from the Church of Rome, they are right enough, (their rejecting Episcopal Confirmation excepted only) as 1. in celebrating the Sacrament of the Lords Supper with leavened bread; 2. communicating in both kinds; 3. enjoining no necessity of auricular Confession; 4. contracting marriages in the second degree of Consanguinity; 5. permitting 2. and third marriages unto men in Orders, after the death of their first wives; 6. not praying before the Cross, nor giving religious worship to the Crucifix, or other Images. So much for these Nestorians, if so named aright, considering the qualifications added unto their opinions; now (but corruptly) called Nostranes; the greatest Sect of Christians in all the East.  
The solemnities which these Christians use in contracting marriage, because not very usual, I will here relate. Their Wives they never see till the day of their marriage, but hearing a good report of the young Woman, negotiate with her parents for her. Agreed upon the business, they meet in the Chancel of the Church, wherein there is a partition with an hole in it: the Bridegroom and his friends standing on the one side; the Bride and her kindred on the other. When there, the Cassisse or Churchman biddeth the Bridegroom to put his hand thorough the hole in the Partition, and take his Bride by the hand, which he doth accordingly: the mother of the Bride, with a sharp-pointed instrument, made of purpose, pricking the Bridegroom's hand all over, with sufficient eagerness. If when he feeleth the smart, he lets go her hand, they take it for a sign that he will not love her; but if he hold her fast, and wring her hand till she cry again, they take it for a very good Omen, and are glad they have so well bestowed her. After the marriage consummate, if a male-child be born unto them, the Father loseth his own name, and is called by the name of his eldest Son: so as if the Father's name be Moses, and his Son's name Joseph; the Father is no more called Moses, but Abda-Joseph, or the Father of Joseph. So highly do they reverence marriage, and the fruit thereof, posterity.  
It was anciently divided into these six parts, 1. Arraphachitis, bordering on Armenia Major; so called for Arphaxaditis, or the plantation of Arphaxad, the Son of Sem. 2. Adiab●ne, bordering on Mesopotamia, so called, quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or inaccessible, because fenced with such unfordable Rivers, Tigrus, and Euphrates, that there was no easy coming to it; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as it is in Suidas: or rather for Adiavenena, from Diavas, and Adiavas, the chief Cities of it (the same which Ptolemy called Lycus, and Caprus) as in Marcellinus. 3. Calacine, and 4. 〈◊〉 from Sittace, and Calach, two chief Cities of it; of which more anon. 5. Arbelites, and 6. Apollomates, from Apollonia and Arbela, two others of the principal Cities.  
Here than we have four of the Cities of Assyria brought unto our hand, 1. Calach, one of those four which Nimrod built in the Land of Assur, Gen. 10. 11. and one of them to which the Ten Tribes were transplanted by Salmanasser, 2 Kings 17. 6. & 18. 11. of such esteem in those elder days, that Calacine, as Ptolemy, or Calachene as Serabo more rightly calleth it, did take name from hence. 2. Sirtace, situate about two nules from, the banks of Tigris, in the way from Babylon to Suja. A City, when it gave name to the parts adjoining, both great and populous; well seated, in a fruitful soil, and well shaded with trees of several sorts; supposed by the situation of it to be that Accad, (or rather built in or near the place of it) which was one of the first four Cities of Nimrods' Kingdom. 3. Arbel; on the banks of the River Caprus, built as some say by Belus, (or Belochus) Priscus, an Assyrian King, whence it had the name. Near unto which there is a place which Strabo calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or Cupressetum, conceived by some to be the place where Noah framed the Ark. 4. Apollonia, built after the Macedonian conquest, as appeareth by the name which is wholly Greek: not otherwise observable but for giving the name of Apoilomates to the Country adjacent. Add unto these, 5. Gaguamela, situate in the middle space betwixt Lycus and Caprus; memorable for the last and greatest battle betwixt Alexander and Darius the King of Persia: who had he made good the Eastern banks of the River Tigris, might easily have hindered the Macedonians from coming over: the River being so extremely swift and violent, that the Macedontans were not able to pass it but by linking their hands and arms together, and making one entire body to oppose the current; and therewith all of so great depth, that the footmen were fain to hold their Bows and Arrows over their heads, to keep them from being moistened and made unservicable. But having miserably lost this opportunity by the cowardice of Mazeis, who had the keeping of this pass; he was enforced to venture all upon a battle: drawing unto this place an Army of 50000 horse, and 200000 foot, in their account who speak least of it (for Arrianus makes it above a Million.) Opposed by Alexander with no more than 40000 foot, and 7000 horse of his Europaeans; but those victoriously successefule 40000 of the Persians slain, (but Diodorus Siculus speaks of 900000) with the loss of 300 Macedanians only, as is said by Curtius, In memory of which notable victory, a Mountain near the place of the battle, was by Alexander called Nicator, known by that name to Strabo and some other ancients. 6. Rehoboth, another of the four Cities, which Nimrod is said to have built in Assur; by some supposed to be Birrha, an ancient City upon Tigris, and bordering so near unto Mesopotamia, that by Ptolony it is place in it. Of which more anon. 7. Rhesen, another of the Cities of Nimrods' building, seated by Moses between Calach and Ninive, Gen. cap. 10. v. 12. and there commended for a great Cou. Which Character with the site thereof have induced some learned men to think it to be the same which is by Xenophon called Larissa, seated by him on the River Tigris, much about this place, and said to be a City of such strength and greatness, that it was no less than two Parasing, or four miles in compass, the walls in height a hundred foot, twenty five in breadth; so strongly cemented, that Cyrus, who besieged it, could have never taken it if a casual Eclipse of the Sun had not discouraged the desendants. But whether this conjecture be good or not, we have here Larassa for another of the principal Cities. 8. Nixive, by the Greeks and Lutines called Ninus; first built by Nimrod, and called Ninive with relation unto Ninus, his son or Nephew, after the example of Cain whose steps he followed: of whom it is said that he built a City, and called after the name of his son Enoch, Gen. 4. 17. I know the building of this City is by son ascribed to Assar, grounding themselves on that of Moses, Gen. 10. 11. Out of that Land went forth Assur, and built Ninive & c. But I like better of their judgement who take Assar in this place for the name of the Country and not of the man; making the Text to speak of Nimrod, and to say of him, Eregressus est in Assur, etc. that is to say, And he went forth to Assur or the land of Assyria, and there built Ninive, Rehoboth, and the rest there named. A City so enlarged by some of the succeeding Kings, that it came at last to be bigger than Babylon, in compass 480 furlongs, or 60. miles; and therefore said in the Book of Jonah, to be a City of three day's journey, in circuit, as indeed it was; accounting 20 miles for a days journey, according to the common estimate of those elder times, as also of the Greeks and Romans in the times succeeding. Nor was it of less strength than greatness, the walls an hundred foot high, and so broad that three Carts might go a breast on the top thereof: and in those walls 1500 Turrets, each of 200 foot in height. So strong, that it was thought to have been impregnable, especially because of an ancient Prophecy, which signified that the Town should never be taken, till the River became an enemy to it. A Prophecy which induced Sardanapalus to make it the seat of his war against Belochus, and Arbaces, then in arms against him: who having besieged it three years without hope of success, at last the River overflowing, carried before it twenty furlongs of the Wall. Which accident so terrified the effeminate King, that he burned himself in the midst of his enemies, and left the Town to the Besiegers. Threatened destruction by the preaching of the Prophe: Jonah, it escaped then upon repentance. But the people going on in their wicked courses, it was destroyed by Astyages King of the Medes, that it might no longer be an encouragement to the Assyrians to rebel against him, as formerly against some of his Predecessors: and so destroyed, that in the time of Saint Cycil of Alexandria, as himself affirmeth in the comment on the Prophet Nihum, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that one scold scarce discern in what place it stood. 9 Mosul, at this time, and for long since, the chief of Assyria, seated on the Tigris, and raised out of the ruins of Ninive: of most note for being the ordinary abiding place of the Nestorian Patriarch, who either in the City itself, or the Monastery of Saint Hermes near adjoining to it, hath his constant Residence. The Nestorians in this City so considerable both in power and number, that though it be in the hands of Mahometans, either Turks or Persians, yet there are numbered in it fifteen Christian Churches, and at least 40000 souls. A Sect so maligned by the Pope, (whom they commonly call the Reprobate Bishop) for the greatness of the jurisdiction which this Patriarch hath; that not contented to withdraw the Indians from him, (whereof more hereafter) Pope Julius the third, see up an Antipatriarch against him, to whom he gave the title of the Catholic of Musal also; to whom the Nestorians dwelling in the Northern parts of Mesopotamia (if some writers of the Papal party may be believed) do submit themselves. 10. Arzeri, of greater strength than Mosul, though of less antiquity and repute; from which the whole Province of Assyria, is now called Arzirum. And 11. Scheheruer, at this time of the greatest note, as being the ordinary Residence of the Turkish Beglerbeg or Bassa, who hath 10000 Timariot under his command, to defend this Country, and be ready for any service, as occasion is.   

MESOPOTAMIA.  
MESOPOTAMIA, is bounded on the East, with the River Tigris, by which parted from Assycia; on the West, with Euphrates, which divideth it from Comagena, a Province of Syria; on the North, with Mount Taurus, by which separated from Armenia Major; and on the South, with Chaldaea, and Arabia Deserta, from which last it is parted by the bend of Euphrates also.  
In the Scripture it is called most commonly by the name of Padan Aram, that is Syria Culta; but that name properly belonging to the North-parts of it: Aram or Syriae, because inhabited originally by the Aramites, whom the Greeks call Sylli; and Padan or Culta, from the fruitfulness and riches of it, exceeding plentifully stored both with corn and wine, and furnished with all necessaries for the life of man; in that regard by Strabo called Mesopoamia Felix. The Southern parts hereof being barren and full of Deserts, not having any herbage in them, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, nor any kind of Tree, as we read in Xenophon; amongst some of the ancient Writers, had the name of Arabia: partly because so like in nature to Arabia Deserta, and partly because planted with Arabian Colonies. The name which comprehends both parts is sometimes Syria Trans-fluutalis, or Syria beyond the River (Euphrates,) of which see 2 Sam. 10. 16. But generally in the Hebrew it is called Arom-Naharatjn, which the Greeks render properly by Mesopotamia, or the Country in the middle of Rivers; environed by Tigris on the East, and Enphrates on the West and South; the River Chabaras or Abaras, passing also thorough it. The Latins generally call it by the same name which the Greeks had given it: Priscian only to show his faculty in Grammar, calling it Medamna, by the Turks now Diarbech.  
As is the Country, such the People, the most Adjective of any we have met with hitherto; able at no time to stand by themselves, but still requiring the addition of some neighbour Nation to be joined unto them. Nothing that they can call their own, their Name, their Language, nor their Country. Beholding for their Nime in the North, to Syria, in the South, to Arabia; the (haldaeans also putting in for a share, and challenging those parts which lie next Assyria, to belong to them. Their Language anciently the Syriack, at this day the Arabic. Their Country successively subjected to the Babylonians, Assyrians, Medes and Persians. From them first conquered by the Romans, under the conduct of Pompey; reduced into the form of a Province, by the Emperor Traian; more fully settled and confirmed by Aurelianus. But being recovered by the Persians, they fell together into the power of the Saracens, and are now commanded by the Turks. Never appearing of themselves on the Stage of action, but when once God showed his mighty power in their many weaknesses, and raised them up to be a Scourge to the house of Israel; of which see Judges chap. 3. v. 8. Hired afterwards by Adaedezer King of Syria Zobah, in his war against David; by whom most shamefully defeated, 2 Sam. 10. 16, 18. Yet notwithstanding memorable in the Book of God for the birth of Abraham and Rebecca; the long abode of Jacob, and the birth of his Children: in that respect affording an Original to the Hebrew Nation.  
The Christian faith was first preached here by Saint Thaddaeus, one of the 70. Disciples, Anno 43. upon this occasion. Agbarus the Toparch, or Prince of Edessa, one of the chief Cities of this Country, having been long afflicted with an incurable infirmity, and hearing of the fame of JESUS, beseeched him by a special message to come and help him: whereunto our Saviour made this Answer, that he could not visit him in person, the things he was to do, whilst upon the earth, being to be performed only in the land of Canaan; but that he would take care of his health in convement time. Accordingly, not along after his Ascension, Saint Thomas the Apostle, by immediate revelation from our Saviour, sent Thaddaeus thither; by whom the Prince was cured, and the Gospel preached, and many of the Nation convered to it; the At's whereof, together with the Copies of the several Letters from Agbarus to CHRIST, and from CHRIST to him, preserved in the Archives of Edessa, were by Eusebius translated out of the Syriack, and inserted into the body of his Ecclesiastical History, lib. 1. cap. 14. Once planted, it found good increase, continuing in the purity of it till about the year 530. at what time one Jacobus Syrus (so called from his birth and abode in Syria) took on him the defence of the Errors of Eutyches, touching the unity of natures in CHRIST our Saviour. Whose followers finding the Patriarches of Antirch too vigilant over them, removed for the most part further off, seding themselves in Babylonia, and Mesopotamia, where they contained in great numbers: Governed by their own Patriarch, to whom the Jacobites in Syria are also subject, who takes unto himself the title of Patriarch of Antioch, and is successively called Ignatius, as if the undoubted Successor of that Saint and Martyr; superior in that regard to the Patriarch of Jerusalem who is also a Jacobite. The Patriarchal See, fixed in the Monastery of Saphran, near the City of Merdin; but the Residence of the Patriarch for the most part at Caramit: the number of Christians under his obedience, computed formerly at 160000 Families, reduced since unto 50000. That which they hold as Jacobites, distinct from all other Christians, is 1. The acknowledgement but of one nature, one will, and one operation (as there is but one person) in Christ our Saviour. 2. In signing their Children before Baptism, in the Face or Arm, with the sign of the Cross, imprinted with a burning iron. 3. Retaining Circumcision, and using it in both Sexes. 4. Affirming the Angels to consist of two substances, Fire, and Light; and 5. Honouring the memory of Dioseurias (of Alexandria) and Jacobus Syrus, condemned by the ancient Councils. The points wherein they differ from the Church of Rome,  
1. Not enjoining on the People the necessity of Confession to a Priest, before they admit them to communicate.  
2. Not admitting Purgatory, nor Prayers for the Dead.  
3. Administering the Sacrament of the Eucharist in both kinds.  
4. Allowing the marriage of Priests; And  
5. Teaching that the souls of men deceased, are not admitted presently to the Vision of God, but remain somewhere in the Earth, to expect Christ's coming. In which last, (letting aside the determination of the place) as they have many of the Father's concurring with them; so to the first (touching the unity of nature in our Saviour Christ) they have of late added such qualifications, as possibly may make it capable of an Orthodox sense.  
Chief Rivers of this Country, (besides Tigris and Euphrates, of which more hereafter,) 1. Chabiras, which rising in Mount Masius, passing directly South, falleth into Euphrates; as also doth, 2. Syngarus, by Pliny, called Masca, arising out of the Mountain Syngarus, which is but the more Western part of the said Mount Masius. Which names of Masea, Masius, and the Masicni (being the name of a People dwelling thereabouts) show plainly that they go upon very good grounds who place Mesch, or Mesich, one of the sons of Aram in these parts of the Country.  
It was divided anciently into, 1. Anthemasia, 2. Chalcitis. 3. Gaulinitis. 4. Accabene. 5. Ancorabitis, and 6. Ingine: each part containing several Cities or Towns of name. These six when conquered by the Romans reduced unto two Provinces only, viz. 1. Mesopotamia, lying on the South of Mount Masius, or the head of Chaboras; and 2. Osrloene on the North: this last so named from one Osrhoes, the Prince or Governout of these parts in the time of the Persians, as Procopius telleth us.  
Chief places of the whole, 1. Edessa, the Metropolis of Osrhoene, situate on the River Scirtas, which runneth thorough the midst of it, not far from the fall thereof into Euphrates. Memorable for the Story of Agbarus before related, amongst Church-Historians: and in the Roman Histories, for the death of the Emperor Caracalla, slain here by the appointment of Macrinus, Captain of his guard. The occasion this. The Emperor conscious to himself of his own unworthiness, employed one Maternianus to inquire amongst the Magicians in the Empire, who was most likely to succeed him: by whom accordingly advertised that Macrinus was to be the man. The letters being brought unto Caracalla, as he was in his Chariot, were by him delivered with the rest of the Packets, to the hands of Macrinus, (who by his Office was to be attendant on the Emperiours person) that he might open them, and signify unto him the contents thereof at his better leisure. Finding by this the danger in which he stood, he resolved to strike the first blow; and to that end entrusted Martialis, one of his Centurions, with the execution; by whom the Emperor was here killed as he withdrew himself, Levandae vesicae gratia, as my Author hath it. So impossible a thing it is to avoid one's Destiny; so vain a thing for any Prince to think of destroying his Successor: and therefore very well said to Nero in the times of his tyranny, Omnes licet occider is, Successorem tunm occidere non potes, that though he caused all the men of eminence to be forthwith murdered; yet his Successor would survive him, and escape the blow. But to return unto Edessa, in following times it was made one of the four Tetrarchies of the Western Christians when they first conquered Syria, and the Holy Land; the two first Governors or Tetrarches, successively succeeding Godfrey of Bovillon in the Kingdom of Jerusalem. But in the year 1142. it was again recovered by Sanguine the Turk, Father of Noradin Sultan of Damascus, and by the loss thereof no fewer than three Archbishoprics withdrawn from the obedience of the See of Antioch.  
2. Cologenbar, another strong piece adjoining, besieged on the taking of Edessa, by the same Sanguine, who was here stabbed in a drunken quarrel by one of his familiar friends; and the Fort saved for that time.  
3. Nisibis, situate somewhat to the East of Mount Masius, called also Antiochia Mygdonia; from the River Mygdonius, which runneth thorough it; and afterwards Constantia, from Constantius the Son of Constantine. A City of great note in those elder times, a Roman Colony, and the Metropolis of the Province of Mesopotamia, properly and specially so called: which being besieged by Supores the King of Persia, (Constantius ruling in the East) and in no small danger to be lost, was gallantly defended by James the then Bishop of it, whom Theodoret calls not only, Episcopum Civitatis, sed Principem & Ducem, not the Bishop only of the City, but the Prince and Captain of it, libr. 2 cap 31. So little inconsistency was there found in those early days betwixt the Episcop all function and civil businesses, that the Bishops were not interdicted from the Acts of war, when the necessities of the State did invite them to it. The City not long after most unworthily delivered to the said Sapores by the Emperor Jovinian; which drew along with it in short time the loss of the Province.  
4. Vr, seated on the East of Nisibis, betwixt it and Tigris; and so placed by Ammianus who had traveled this Country. Conceived to be the Birth-place of Abraham, and called Vr of the Chaldees, Gen. 11. 28. either because the Chaldees were in those days possessed of the place; or because the name of Chaldaea did comprehend also those parts of this Country which lay towards Tigris, as was shown before. For that the place from which Terah the Father of Abraham did return to Haran in Mesopot amia, was rather situate in this coast where Vr is placed by Ammianus, than betwixt the Lakes of Chaldaea and the Persiau Golf, where most Writers place it, may appear probable for these reasons.  
1. Because it is said by Josuah, chap. 24. ver. 12. That Terah the Father of Abraham and the Father of Nachor dwelled on the other side of the Flood; that is to say on the further side of the River Emphrates, and that too 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as the Septuagim; ab initio, as the Vulgar Latin; in the first beginning. Which cannot be understood of any Vr, placed on or near the Lakes of Chaldaea, those being on this side of that River. 2. Because all the rest of Abraham's Ancestors from Phaleg downwards, were seated in the Northern parts of Assyria and Mesopotamia: and it were strange that Terah should be planted so far from the rest of his kindred. 3. Because from Vr in Mesopotamia near the banks of Tigris, the way to Canaan, (to which Terah did intend to go) was directly by Haran: whereas if he had dwelled (as some say he did) by the Lakes of Chaldaea, his way had been directly West thorough Arabia Deserta, and not to have traveled, with his family, so far North as Haran; and then to have fallen back as much Southward, as he had gone Northward, crossing Euphrates twice with his herds and cattle. 5. Haran, the place to which Terah did remove when he went from Vr, and from which Abraham did remove when he went towards Canaan, so named in memory of Haran the son of Terah: but called afterwards by the name of Carrae, and by that name well known to the Roman Writers for the death of Crassus, that wealthy Roman, whose estate, (besides the tenth which he offered to Hercules, and three month's corn distributed amongst the poor) amounted to 7100. Talents, which comes in our money to one Million, 331250. l. But all his wealth could not preserve him from the slaughter, slain near this City, with the routing of his Army also by Horodes King of Parthia; of which briefly Lncan, 
— miscrando funere Crassus  
Assyrias Latio maculavit sanguine Carras.  Which may be Englished to this purpose, 
By a defeat lamented Crassus stains  
With Roman blood the Assyrian Carras Plai.  Called the Assyrian Carrae by Poetical Licence, because the Assyrians formerly had been Lords thereof. And no less memorable was it in the times foregoing, for a famous Temple of the Moon, worshipped here (but in no place else) under both Sexes: some honouring it as female Deity, then called Dea Luna; and others in the shape and dress of a man, and called Deus Lunus. But with this fortune and success, as faith Spartianus, qut Lunam foemineo nomine putabat nuncupandam, is mulieribus semper inserviat; that they who worshipped it in the form of a Woman, should be always subject to their Wives (I trow there were but few of that Religion) qui vero Marem deum crederet, is uxori dominetur; but he that worshipped it as a man, should preserve the mastery. 6. Amida, near the River Tigris, the Metropolis of Mesopotamia when one Province only, and before it fell into the hands of the Romans: much beautified by Constantius the Son of Constantine, by whom named Constantias. But that new name dying with him, the old revived: of great strength, as a strontire Town against the Persians, and by them much aimed at. Honoured of late times with the Residence of the Patriatch of the Jacobite Christians, as the chief City of this Province: for this cause also made the dwelling of the Pseudo-Patriarch of the Nestorians (or Nostranes) of the Pope's erection; and the chief Seat also of the Bassa or other Officer, governing this Country for the Turks; by whom called Caramit, or Kara Amida, that is to say, Amidae the black, because it was walled with black stone. 7. Phalga, or Phaliga, at the meeting of Chaberas with Euphrates not far from Carrae, mentioned by Stephanus, and Arrianus, and by Ptolemy mistakingly called Pharga; the seat or first plantation of Phaleg, one of Abraham's Ancestors: Serug, another of them giving name to 8. Sarug, about a day's journey off from Haran, spoken of by some later writers. 9 Singara, on the River so named, a well fortified City in the time of Ammianus, by whom mentioned, lib. 20. 10. Berabde, mentioned by the same Author, by whom said to have been a very strong Fort, seated on a pretty high hill, and bending towards the banks of Tigris; before whose times it had anciently been called Phoenicha. 11. Virta, supposed to have been the work of Alexander the Great, circled with walls, environed with half-moones and Bulwarks, and made unaccessible: in vain besieged by Sapores the Persian King after the taking of Bezabde. The same perhaps with the Birtha of Ptolemy. 12. Merdin, not far from which in the Monastery of Saphran, is the patriarchal See of the Jacobite Sectaries.  
The first Inhabitants of these Countries, though united from the first beginning under the same Princes, and form of Government; came from several Families: all the three sons of Noah concurring as it were in this plantation. From Nimrod, Havilah, and others of the posterity of Chus, the son of Ham, came the Babylonians: with whom Chesed the Son of Nachor, of the house of Sem, intermingling families; or being the Author of their language, or of some other signal benefit; gave to them the name of Chaldim, whence came that of Chaldaeans. From Assur, Arphaxad, and those of Arphaxads posterity, intermingled with the Sons of Mash, the son of Aram, came the Mesopotamians, and Assyrians. And that Japhet also and his Children may put in for a part, the neighbourhood of the Medes, and Albanese, descended from him, makes it somewhat probable.  
But, whatsoever parents they descended from, Nimrod the Son of Chus made so bold with them, as to bring them under his command: planting in Chaldaea, the Cities of Babylon, and Calne; in Assyria, Ninive, Rhesem, and Calach; and finally Rehoboth (if that were Birtha, as some think it was) in Mesopotamia. By these strong Forts he kerbed the natives, and assured his power; being the first that altered the Paternal form of Government, and drew unto himself the government of several Nations, not having any dependence upon one another. The foundation thus laid by him, his Successors soon raised the building to a wondrous height; advancing the Assyrian Empire, from the Mediterranean Sea, to the River Indus; and that too in a shorter time than could be imagined, but that the world was then divided into petit States, not cemented together with the ligaments of power and policy: for though there be little found of Belus the Son of Nimrod, but that he spent most of his time in draining the marshes, and making firm ground of those vast fens which lay near to Babylon, which were works of peace: yet by those and the like works of peace he so settled his affairs at home, that he gave his Son Ninus the better opportunity to look abroad; who mightily improved his Empire, and was the greatest and most powerful of all that line; extending his dominions from the River Indus, to the Mediterranean; and from the Caspian Sea, to the Southern Ocean. His Successors we shall find in the following Catalogue of  

The Assyrian Monarches.  
A. M.  
1798 1. Nimrod, called by some Saturnus Babylonius, the Son of Chus, and Nephew of Cham, was the first who altered the Paternal government, and usurped dominion over others; making Babylon his Imperial City. 47.  
1845. 2. Belus, or Jupiter Babylonicus, the Son of Nimrod, whose Image was worshipped by the old Idolaters under the names of Bel and Baal. 62.  
1907. 3. Ninus, the Son of Belus, conquered Armenia, Syria, Media, Bactria, and the Persian Provinces, and removed the Imperial Seat to Ninive, by him much beautified and enlarged. 52.  
1959 4. Semiramis, the wife of Ninus, subdued the Arabians; but invading the Indians also, she was vanquished and slain by their King Staurobates. Of this great Lady it is said, she was born in Ascalon, a Town of Syria, and exposed to the fury of wild beasts. But being born not to die so ingloriously, she was brought up by shepherds, and at full age presented to the Syrian Viceroy, who gave her in marriage to his only Son. Going with him to the wars, she fell in acquaintance with Ninus, who liking her person and spirit, took her to his bed. This bred in him a greater affection towards her, so that he granted her at her request, the command of the Empire for five days; making a Decree that her will in all things should be punctually performed: which boon being gotten, she put on the Royal Robes, and (as some Writers do report) commanded the King to be slain. Having thus gotten the Empire, she exceedingly enlarged it, leading with her an Army consisting of one hundred thousand Chariots of war, three millions of Foot, and half a million of Horse. A woman in whom there was nothing not to be honoured or applauded, but her insatiable lusts: in which if the Greek writers say true (as we have no reason to believe it of so gallant a woman) she was very guilty.  
2001 5. Ninus II. the Son of Ninus and Semiramis.  
2039 6. Aria's 30.  
2069 7. Arabius 40.  
2109 8. Belus II. 30.  
2139 9 Armamatrites.  
2177 10. Belochus Prisc. 35.  
2212 11. Belochus Jun. Balaeus 52.  
2264 12. Altades 32.  
2296 13. Mamitns 30.  
2326 14. Mancaleus 30.  
2356 15. Spherus 20.  
2376 16. Mancaleus II. 30.  
2406 17. Sparetus 40.  
2446 18. Ascatades 40.  
2486 19 Amintes 45.  
2511 20. Belochus Jun. 45.  
2556 21. Bellopares 30.  
2586 22. Lamprides 22.  
2618 23. Sasares 20.  
2638 24. Lampares 20.  
2668 25. Panmas 45.  
2713 26. S●ramas 19  
2732 27. Mitreus' 27.  
2759 28. Tatanes 32.  
2791 29. Tautes 40.  
2831 30. Tineus 30.  
2861 31. Dercillus 40.  
2901 32. Eupales 38.  
2939 33. Loastines 45.  
2984 34. Pyrithiades 30.  
3014 35. Ophrateus 20.  
3034 36. Ophraganeus 50.  
3084 37. Ascrasapes 24.  
3126 38. Sardanapalus, by Eusebius called Tonosconcolos, the last King of this Race. Of which being 38. in all, there is scarce any thing remaining but the very names: registered in this order by Berosus, or rather by Friar Annius a Monk of Viturbum in Tuscany, who hath thrust upon the world, the fancies of his own brain, under the name of that ancient Historian. The chief Kings of note after Semiramis, were,   
1. Ninus, or Zameis her Son; who by his Deputies and Lieutenants subdued the Arrians, Bactrians, and Caspians, but was otherwise a man of effeminate and unkingly carriage. And therefore is conceived to be the elder Bacchus, so much celebrated amongst the Grecians.  
2. Belus the second, who recovered that Country which afterwards was called Judaea, to the Assyrian Empire, from which it had revolted in the time of his Predecessor, (on the defeat of Amraphel, one of his Lieutenants, by the sword of Abraham,) and subdued many other nations.  
3. Belochus Prise. the tenth King, who by some writers is said to be the Author of Divination by the flying of Birds, called Auspicium. For of Sooth-saying there were in all four kinds.  
1. This Auspicium, quasi Avispicium, taken from the flight of birds, either on the right hard, or on the left; (and hence the Proverb cometh, avi sinistra, good luck, because in giving, the right hand is opposite to the receivers left;) or from the number of the birds, whence R●mulus had promised to him the Empire, before his Brother, because he had seen the double number of Vultures: or lastly, from the nature of them, whence the same Romulus, seeing the Vultures, was (saith Florus) spei plenus urbem bellatriem fore, ta illi sauguini, & praedae assuetae aves pollicebantur.  
2. Aruspicium, ab inspiciendo, in which the soothsayers observed whether the Beast to be sacrificed came to the Altars willingly, or not: whether the entrails were of a natural colour, exulcerate, &c or whether any part were wanting. All Histories afford variety of Examples in this kind; I need give no particular instance. A kind of Divination said to be practised first by the Tuscans, or Etrurians; instructed in the knowledge thereof by one called Tages, who appearing to certain Ploughman out of a Furrow, caught them this mystery, and so vanished.  
3. Tripudium, so called quasi Terripudium, and Terripavium, from the trembling or shaking of the Earth, was a conjecture of future successes, by the rebounding of crumbs cast unto Chichens. We have an instance of this in the life of Tiberius Gracchus, who being seditiously busy in promoting the Law Agraria, was forewarned by the keeper of his Chickens to desist from that enterprise, because when he had thrown the crumbs to the Coop, there came out but one of the Chickens only, and the same without eating went back again, which was taken for a sign of ill luck, as the greedy devouring of them had been of good. But Tiberius slighting the advertisement, and pursuing his design, was the same day slain.  
4. Augurium, so called ab avium garritu, was a prediction from the chirping or chattering of birds; as also from the sounds and voices heard they knew not whence, nor on what occasion. In which later kind the death of Caesar was divined from the clattering of Armour in his house, and the poisoning of Germanicus by the sounding of a Trumpet of its own accord: in the former, an Owl screeching in the Senate-house was deemed ominous to Augustus; and a company of Crows following Setanus to his house with great noise and clamour, was judged to be fatal to that great Favourite; and so it proved.  
4. Manitus, the thirteenth King; who revived again the ancient Discipline, corrupted by the sloathfulness and effeminacy of his Predecessors; and by the terror of his name awed the Egyptians.  
5. Ascatades, the eighteenth King, more absolute in Syria, and the Western-parts, than any of the Kings before him.  
6. Sardanapalus, the last King of this Race, who being wondrous effeminate, and utterly unable to govern so great an Empire, gave opportunity to Arbaces his Lieutenant in Media to conspire against him. By whom, associated with Belochus Governor of Babylon, he was besieged in his City of Ninive: and there reduced unto such extremities, that gathering his treasures all together, he burned himself and them in one funeral Pile, eo solum facto virum imitatus, as is said by Justine. The treasure which he is said to have burnt with him amounted to one hundred Millions of Talents of Gold, and a thousand Millions of Talents of Silver: which in our English money comes to twenty thousand and five hundred Millions of pounds. A mass of money, which as it must be long in gathering, so probably it had not seen the Sun in many years, and therefore grown rusty, desired a fire to purge it. This Sardanapalus afforded it, it may be to end his life with that, in which he placed his Summum Bonum: It may be in spite unto his enemies; and it is possible it might be in policy, that so great a treasure not falling to the possession of his foes, might so much the more disable them from making resistance against, or detaining the Empire from his next rightful Successors. For it is of all things the most foolish, both to lose our Treasure, and with it to enrich our Adversaries. On which consideration the Spaniards fired their Indian Fleet at Gades, and the Genoese theirs at Tripoli; that their lading might not come into the Possession of their enemies, the English and Mahometans. After the death of this Sardanapalus, Arbaces took Media and Persia with the confining Provinces: Belochus strengthened himself in Assyria, Chaldaea, and the adjacent Regions, his Kingdom being called the Kingdom of Assyria.  

The new Kings of Assyria and Chaldaea.  
A. M.  
3146. 1. Phul Belochus, the beginner of this new Monarchy.  
3194. 2. Phul Assur, destroyed Galilee, and subdued the Kingdom or Damascus, the same who is called Tiglah Ph●lassar in the holy Scriptures.  
3217. 3. Salmanassar, who destroyed Samaria, and ruined the Kingdom of Israel, and carried the 10 Tribes to perpetual Captivity. This is the Nabonassar of the Chr●nologers.  
3227. 4. Sennacherib, whose blasphemous host was vanquished by Angels from heaven, and he himself murdered by his two sons Adramelech and Sharezer. 7.  
3233. 5. Asserhaddon, who revenging his Father's death on his brothers, was deposed by his Deputy of Chaldaea, and the seat Royal transferred from Ninive to Babylon. 10.  
3243. 6. Merodach Baladan, governor of Babylon, succeeded his Master in the Throne, conceived by some to be the Mardocempades of Ptolemy, by others to be also the fame King who by his Captain Holofernes did so plague Judaea.  
3283. 7. Ben Merodach 30th son of Merodach Baladan. 21.  
3304. 8. Nabopullassar, who vanquished Pharaoh Necho King of Egypt. 25.  
3339. 9 Nabuchodonosor the Great, by some called the Hercules of the East: who conquered Egypt in the life of his Father, with whom he reigned for a time, and mightily enlarged the City of Babylon, he joined also with Astyages King of Medes, in subverting the proud City of Ninive; and in the 18th. year of his reign destroyed Jerusalem, and carried the People captive unto Babylon. But in the last seven years of his reign he was so distracted, that he lived not much unlike the Beasts of the Field; according to the word of God spoken by Daniel, chap. 4. during which time his son Evilmerodach, his daughter Nicocris with Niglissat her husband, and Laborasaradach their son, governed his Empires as Protectors; and therefore are by some reckoned as Kings. Finally Nabuchadnezzar having recovered his senses, was again restored unto the Throne, and died, when he had reigned in all 44. years.  
3583. 10. Evilmerodach; the son of Nabuchadnezzar, slain by Astyages, King of the Medes. 26.  
3409. 11. Balthassar, son of Evilmerodach (the Nabonidus of Berosus, a Prince of a dissolute and cruel nature, was in the later end of his reign assailed by Cyaxares the Son of Astyages, (whom the Scriptures call Darius Medus,) and by Cyrus the Persian; by whom he was slain in the 17th. year of his reign, and the Empire of the Babylonians was transferred to the Medes and Persians. A. M. 3426.   
That this was the end of Balthassar, is the common opinion. But Josephus Scaliger in his learned and industrious work, De emendatione temporum, maketh him to be slain in a tumult by his own people: who elected into the Empire a Noble man of the Medes, called in profane stories, Nabonidus; in divine, Darius Medus; who after a 17 years' reign was slain by Cyrus' King of the Persians. But by the leave of so worthy a man, this cannot hold good. For the Lord by his Prophet Jeremy, had pronounced, (Chap. 27.) That all Nations should serve Nabuchadnezzar, and his son, and his son's son, whereas Nabonidus was a Prince of strange blood, and so the Nations were not to serve him; and in Balthassar, the son's son of Nabuchadnezzar, was this word accomplished. But let us examine his arguments, and withal the scoffs, which very prodigally he bestoweth on such as maintain the contrary opinion: Natio Chronologorum, the whole rout of Chronologers; boni & diligentes viri, good simple meaning men; & addunt alta nihil veriora, are his first compliments; Vt igitur, quod Chronologorum est, omnesresiptscant, etc. therefore that they may repent their ever being Chronologers, he bringeth in Berosus, Cited by Josephus, in his first book against Appion. But Berosus there maketh Nabonidus (to whom he saith the Kingdom of Balthassar was by the people delivered) to be a Babylonian, and not as Scaliger would have him say, a noble man of the Medes: neither can the authority of Berosus countervail that of Daniel, who in his 6 Chapter telleth Balthassar, that his Kingdom should be divided among the Medes and Persians. His second argument is drawn from the nature of the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as it is in the same Chapter, and Darius the Mede took the Empire: by which word took is employed (saith he) not a forcible in vasion, but a willing acceptance of the Empire offered. To this we answer, that Darius indeed took the Empire quietly and willingly, being offered unto him by Cyrus, and his army consisting of Medes and Persians: who according to the word of God, had taken it from Balthassar, Darius being then absent. Quid si probavero (saith he) eum cognominatum fuisse Medum? he hath yet one trick more than all these; and Medus must not be the national name, but the surname of Darius, which he proveth out of a fragment of Megasthenes, cited by Eusebius, in his work de praeparatione Evangelica, where he is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. an argument of all others the most slight and trivial. For besides that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 may there as well be the name of his Nation, as of his Family; and besides that it thwarteth the places of Jeremy and Daniel already quoted; it is diametrally opposite to another place of the same Daniel, in his ninth chapter; where he is called Darius, of the seed of the Medes. Of this Dariuses more anon when we come into Media. As for Nabonidus, questionless he was the same with Balthassar. For besides that Josephus, and Berosus, attribute to either of them the reign of 17. years, the same Josephus (who might best know the truth in this case) telleth us that Balthassar was by the Babylonians called Naboandel; a name not so great a stranger to Nabonidus, as Scaligers Darius, or Herodotus his Labonitus. But in this we must pardon Joseph. Scorn and contradiction was a part of his essence. For had he not been in some things singular, in all, peremptory; he had neither been a Saliger, nor the son of Julius.  
But leaving Joseph to the singularity of his own conceits; we find nothing done by the Assyrians or Chalaeans after this subjection, which might denote them to have been once the Lords of so great an Empire. Successively enslaved by the Medes, Persians, and Macedonians; then by the Persians again, afterwards by the Saracens, next by the Turks, a third time by the Persians, once again by the Turks of the Ottoman Family, unto whom now subject: never endeavouring to assert in the way of war, or opposition, either their ancient reputation, or their native liberties; but suffering themselves to be won, lost, fought for, and again recovered by their quarrelsome Masters, as if they had no title to their own Country, but were born to follow the fortunes of all pretenders. The reason of which is principally to be ascribed to the form of Government used amongst the Persians, which was so despotical and absolute, if not tyrannical, that they held all the people conquered by them in the nature of slaves; not suffering any to grow great in a state of inheritance, or to enjoy any place of power and profit under them in the conquered Provinces, but at the pleasure of the Prince: as it is now used amongst the Turks of the Ottoman Empire. By means whereof, the great men having no alliances amongst themselves, and as few dependants amongst the people; were never able to take head against the Conqueror; but in the fall of the present Prince fell together with him: it being a good rule of Machiavet, that where the ancient Nobility is in good regard linked in alliances with themselves, and well respected by the common and inferior people, there it is difficult for the Invader, though a Conqueror, to win a Country, and harder to keep it being conquered. But on the other side, where Nobility is quite worn out, & the Prince doth hold his Subjects in the nature of slaves, there both the Conquest will be easy, and soon assured. For to what purpose should the Subjects resist the Conqueror, or stand any longer to their King, than he stands to himself, when they are sure the Conqueror can lay upon them no heavyer burdens, than they were accustomed to before; and have withal a flattering hope that their new Masters may be gentler to them, than their former were? It fares with them no otherwise than with Aesop's Ass, which refused to make the opportunity of an escape from the hands of the enemy, by which he was taken, because he knew it was not possible they should lay more load upon his back, than his old Master made him bear. To which condition the Chaldeans and Assyrians being brought by the Persians, and never accustomed to the taste of a better fortune: have followed the same successes as the Persians did; falling together with them from one hand to another; the particular account of whose estate we shall find in Persia: taking this only for the close, that when Solyman the Magnificent had discomfited Tamas King of Persia, and taken the great City of Bagdat; Caramit, Merdin, and the rest both in Assyria, Chaldaea, and Mesopotamia, submitted to him without any resistance, and received his Garrisons. And for a confirmation of his estate he received at the hand of the Caliph of Babylon, who by an old Prerogative had the nomination or confirmation at the least of the Kings of Assyria, and the Sultan's of Egypt, the Royal Ornaments and Ensigns, Anno 1534. incorporating by that means those Regions into his estates, and making them Provinces of his Empire; in which he left a Beglerbeg at Bagdat to command in chief; and divers Sanziacks in their several and respective Provinces. And though the Persian Kings have since taken, and are still possessed of some places of importance in them; yet I account them in regard of the said investiture, and the long possession following on it, for Provinces of the Turkish Empire: as I do Media of the Persian, though Tauris and some other pieces of it be possessed by the Turks.    

OF MOUNT-TAURUS.  
MOUNT-TAURUS is a constant and continual Ridge of hills, which extend from the Mediterranean to the Indian Seas; running thorough the whole length of Asia from West to East, and dividing it, as the Aequator doth the Globe, into North and South. It was called Taurus from the word Tur or Taur, which in the Syriack and Chaldaean signifieth a mountain, the common name of all high mountains being made peculiar unto this, by reason of its greatness and continued length; yet so, that it had other names also in some parts thereof, according to the Regions and Nations by which it passed, and on which it bordered. The course where of is thus set down by Sir Walter Ralegh: premising only, that it beginneth in the Province of Lycia, a Region of Asia Minor, near the Mediterranean. These Mountains (saith he) which sunder Cilicia from the rest of Asia the less, on the North thereof are called Taurus; and where they part it from Comagena a Province of Syria, they are called Amanus. On the East side of the River Euphrates (which forceth itself a way thorough it) it sometimes resumeth the name of Taurus, as in Ptolemy's three first Tables of Asia, and sometimes taketh the name of Niphates, as in the fourth: retaining that uncertain appellation, so long as they bound. Armenia from Mesopotamia. After the River Tigris hath also cut them asunder, they continue the name of Niphates altogether, until they separate Assyria and Media, but then they call themselves Coatras: although between the upper and lower Media, they appear not always, but are seen discontinued, and broke in pieces; such parts of it as are found in the middle of that Country being called Orontes, those which lie more towards the East being named Coronus; out of the Southern parts whereof issueth the River of Bagradus, which divideth the ancient Persia from Caramania. Continuing further Eastward by the name of Coronus, they give unto the Parthians and Hyrcanians their proper Countries: and afterwards change themselves into the Mountains of Seripht, out of which riseth the River Margus. And now beginning to draw towards the end of their course, they first make themselves the South border of Bactria; and are then known by the name of Paropamisns: and after take unto themselves the name of Caucasus, where the famous Rivers Indus, Hydaspis', and Zaradrus, have their first beginnings. In this point do they hold their heads exceeding high, to equal the Mountains of Imaus, whom they encounter within the 35, 36. & 37. Degrees of Latitude, and the 140 Degree of Longitude: known by no other name than this, till finally they terminate their course in the Indian Seas. So far, and to this purpose, that noble Gentleman. It may be added hereunto, that though the ancient Writers could trace the course of this Mountain no further than the meeting of it with Imaus; yet later observations follow it to the wall of China: the parts beyond Caucasus being now known by the names of Delanguer, and Naugrocot. But this is to be understood only of the main body of these Mountains, which hold on in an even course from West to East; not of those spurs and branches of it, which shoot either to the North or South: such as are the Anti-Taurus in some parts of the lesser Asia; the Gordiaan hills, and the Montes Moschici, with those which Pliny calleth Pariedri, others Pariardes, in Armenia Major: and that of Caboras, which showeth itself on the North-East of Assyria, with divers others.  
In such a continual course of Mountains it must needs be that many fierce Nations did inhabit in former times, not easily subdued, nor so soon reduced unto civility, as such who were possessed of places less desensible, and fitter for commerce and traffic with the rest of mankind. And they continued in these late times the last which were brought under by the Turks, and Persians, the mightiest Monarches of those parts; though bordering on, or totally environed with their dominions. Two Kingdoms they afforded of long continuance: one towards the West where it closeth with the Mountains of Anti-Taurus, and divideth Syria Comagena from Armenia Major; the other towards the East, separating Media from Hyrcania. For want of other names to describe them by, we will call the first the Kingdom of Aladeules, and the last the Kingdom of Bathaman; according to the names of the two last Kings.  
1. The Kingdom of ALADEULES contained that part of this Mountainous tract, which beginning in or about Anti-Taurus, extended itself as far towards the East, as to the banks of the River Tigris, where they part Mesopotamia from Armenia Major. Inhabited by a people naturally very fierce and warlike, more famous for nothing than their want of all things, who as men dwelling in a rough and barren Country, could little profit themselves by husbandry, and therefore gave themselves to grazing, breeding on their pastures some store of horse and camels, which they sold to others, but especially maintaining themselves and their families by hunting and stealing. Supposed to come originally from the Cappadoc●●s, and A●menians of the lesser Asia, which by long and continual wars in the former Ages, were forced to forsake their dwellings, and for safety of their lives to fly to these unpeopled and desolate Mountains. Where searching every hill and dale, and following the opportunity of Springs and Rivers, but chiefly the mildest Temperature of the Air, and most cheerful aspect of the Sun: they built in many places poor villages, and afterwards some better Towns. The principal of which is named Maras, so called as it is conceived from the River Marsyas, which rising out of the Mountain Calene, passeth by the same, and not far off falleth into the River Euphrates.  
When it was made a Kingdom first, it is hard to say, the Kings here of being mean and inconsiderable in the eye of the world; not worth the conquering, and wanting power to conquer others and enlarge their territories: nor indeed worthy any King but one of their own, who could content himself with reigning over rocks and Mountains. The last was Aladeules so much spoken of in the Turkish Histories, and by them called the Mountain King. Conceived by some writers to have been the Author of such a Paradise, as we shall find described when we come to Drangiana, a Province of Persia; and by that means grown formidable to his neighbouring Princes. But that which made him most really and truly known in the stories of the former times, was the stout opposition which he made against the Turks, in their wars with Persia: He had before given no small check to the proceedings of Bajazet the second in his conquest of the Caramanian Kingdom; and no less troubled Selimus the son of Bajazet, in his Persian wars, impeaching what he could the greatness of the Ottoman family. Fought with by Selimus, he made good his ground with a great deal of courage, till betrayed by Alis Beg, General of his horse; and seeing his Army terrified by the shot of the Turks, he was fain to fly. But being at last taken, and put to death by the command of Selimus, his Kingdom was converted to a Turkish Province, Anno 1515. and so continueth to this day.  
2. The Kingdom of BAHAMAN was situate more towards the East, amongst the Mountains which divide Media from Hyrcania, as before was said. The Mountains in those parts so high, that Travellers at the end of a two day's journey, may discern the middle Region of the Air to be beneath them; exceeding troublesome to ascend, about 50 miles in height when once got to the top; but more dangerous by reason of the Rocks and precipices in the going down: full of inhospitable straits, and so cold and barren, that were not Sovereignty a temptation above all resitance, no man would take upon him the command of so poor a Kingdom. And yet in this extremity of height and cold, there is great quantity of Sulphur, which makes it sparkle in the night, like the hill Vesuvius, in Italy: by means where of here are many Hot-Bathes, three of them walled about, two open; to which resort unsound & decrepit people in very great multitudes. The chief Town of it Larry-Joon, in the ordinary road or pass betwixt Omoal the last Town of Hyrcania, and Damoan the first of Media. But the King's Seat was in a village called Ryna, where he had a Castle so built upon the best advantages of art and nature, that it seemed invincible: adorned, above, with gardens, flowers, and most pleasant fruits; and fumished beneath with a Rivulet of purest water, which pleasantly passing thorough the Castle, fell into the Vallo. A Castle of so large a circuit, that besides the King's Family or Court, it was able to admit a garrison of 10000 men.  
The last king hereof was the foresaid Bahaman, derived from a long descent of Royal Ancestors, comparing for antiquity with the Persian Sophies: who though ill-neighboured on both sides, by the Tartarian on the one, and the Kings of Persia on the other; yet had they with great fortune, policy, and valour, maintained their Royalties, against all pretenders. But Abas the late Persian Sophy, having either conquered or reduced Hyrcania, picked a quarrel with Bahaman: pretending that by the opportunity of his situation he might rob his Caravans, hinder his progress towards the Hyrcanian Sea, and turn into other Channels all the Streams or Rivers, which rising from Mount Taurus watered and enriched his Persian territories. And though Bahaman never had attempted any of the things objected, yet it was cause enough of quarrel that he might so do: and therefore is besieged in his Castle of Ryna, with an Army of 30000 men. Finding no possibility to prevail by force, the General of the Persians proceeds by treachery: invites the old King into his Camp under colour of parley, and by his means drew his two sons out of the Castle to the parley also. Whom having got into his power, he first caused their heads to be cut off; and after making use of their seals and signets, obtains a surrender of the place; and with it the possession of this mountainous Kingdom, Anno 1601. or thereabouts, united ever since to the Crown of Persia.   

OF TURCOMANIA.  
TURCOMANIA is bounded on the East with Media, and the Caspian Sea; on the West with the Euxine Sea, Cappadocia, and Armenia Minor; on the North, with Tartary; and on the South, with Mesopotamia and Assyria. So called from the Turcomans or Turks; who from hence made their first expedition for the conquest of Persia, and after spread themselves over all those parts of Europe, Asia, and afric, now in their possession. A Country which consisteth of four several Provinces, each province having to its self its particular story; and therefore we must look upon it as it is now divided into those four parts, that is to say, 1. Armenia Major, or Turcomania properly and specially so called. 2. Colchis, now called Mengrelia. 3. Iberia, now named Georgia; and 4. Albania, which they now term Zuiria.  

1. ARMENIA MAJOR.  
ARMENIA MAJOR is bounded on the East with Media, and some part of the Caspian Sea; on the West, with the River Euphrates, which parteth it from Armenia Minor, in the lesser Asia; on the North, with Colchis or Mengrelia; and on the South, with Mesopotamia and some part of Assyria.  
It was called Armenia, as some say quasi Aram-Mini or the Minni of Syria: but as others say, quasi Har-mini, that is to say Mons Mini, or Montana Miniadis: the Mini or Minni, being a region of this tract, mentioned by Jeremy the Prophet, chap. 5. ver. 27. and by him placed betwixt Ararat and Askenaz, which show the situation of it to be hereabouts. Major was added to it for distinction sake, to difference it from Armenia Minor: and now it is called Turcomania, as the first seat in which the Turcomans or Turks did fix themselves, after their eruption out of Scythia.  
The Country in the most parts overspread with hills, branches of those huge mountains of Taurus, and Anti-Taurus; but intermixed with fertile and delightful valleys, liberally furnished with cattle, and good store of fruits, though much subject to deep snows, which do much annoy it. The Riches of it not to be better estimated than by the frankness of Tigranes, once King hereof. Who being fined by Pompey at 6000 Talents, not only very readily laid down that sum, but added of his own accord to every Roman Soldier 50 Drachmas of Silver, 1000 Drachmas to each Captain, and to every Colonela Talent. For though Tigranes had added some part of Media, and the whole Kingdom of Syria, unto his estate: yet those being new Acquests, and not fully settled, were not much likely for the present, to enrich his coffers: new conquered Provinces being for the most part more chargeable than beneficial to the Victor.  
The people are generally great bodies, of comely personage, and patient of all kind of labour; good Archers, when put to it, but careless of honour got by war; merry, desirous to be at ease, and apt to be soothed. The women tall, but homely, of a manly look, most of them skilful at their bow, or some other weapon. Their families for the most part great, the Father and all his posterity to the third and fourth generation living under a roof, after whose death the eldest whether Son or Brother hath the chiefest Rule. In diet and clothing all alike: and in most places they are said to be very industrious, painful in tillage, and well seen in manufactures, especially rich tapestries, Grograins, and watered Chamlets: with which they traffic into most Cities of the Turks and other Mahometans, privileged as they say, by a Charter under Mahomet's own hand, above other Christians; and upon that occasion more dispersed in the Eastern Countries, than any Nation in the world, the Jews excepted.  
They have a language of their own which they call the Armenian, not only used amongst them in common talk, but in sacred offices: the Scriptures being translated into that language also, and that as the people do affirm by the hand of Saint chrysostom, at such time as (on the solicitation of the Empress Eudoxia, his most eager enemy) he was confined to the lesser Armenia, by the Emperor Arcadius, to whom also they ascribe the invention of the Armenian Characters, or letters, still in use amongst them.  
They received the Christian faith by the preaching of Saint Bartholomew, and were anciently of the jurisdiction of the Patriarch of Constantinople, as a Province of the Pontic Diocese, which together with the Asian Diocese, and that of Thrace, were by the Council of Chalcedon laid unto that Patriarchate. But falling into the opinions of Eutyches touching one nature only in CHRIST our Saviour, they withdrew themselves long since, from the communion of the Greeks, whom they hold in greater detestation than all other Christians; and chose two Patriarches of their own, of whom more anon. Other opinions which they hold besides those of Eutyches, which yet they labour to make capable of an Orthodox sense, and those wherein they differ from the Church of Rome, as 1. Denying Purgatory, and prayers for the dead. 2. Admitting none to be made Priests except those that be married. 3. Denying the body of Christ to be really under the species of bread and wine; and 4. Rebaptising such as come to their Communion from the Latin Churches; are these that follow: in which they differ also from most Churches else, viz. in receiving Infants to the Lords Table, immediately after Baptism. 2. In abstaining from ●●●lear beasts. 3. In fasting on Christmas day; and 4. In holding their children over the fire, as a necessary circumstance in Baptism, because John the Baptist told the people which followed him, that CHRIST should baptise them with the Holy Ghost, and with fire; in which place he meaneth not material fire, but the lively purgation of the Holy Ghost, according to the nature of fire. The Church of this sect is Governed by two Patriarches, whereof the one hath under his jurisdiction this Turcomania; comprehending 150000 Families, besides very much Monasteries: and the other hath under him the two Provinces of Armenia the lesser, and Cilicia, comprehending 20000 Families, or thereabouts. The first residing anciently in Sebastia, the Metropolis of the greater Armenia; the second originally at Melitene, the Metropolis of Armenia Minor, but of late at Sis, a small City, not far from Tarsus in Cilicia. Both honoured with the title of Catholics, and having under them to the number of 30. Bishops.  
Chief Rivers of this Country, 1. Araxes, which rising out of Mount Abos, an Armenian Mountain, first runneth Eastward as far as Media, and then bendeth itself towards the North, and after a long course is divided into two Branches; whereof the one falleth into the Caspian Sea, the other into, 2. Cyrus, another great River of this Country. The fountain of this last in Mount Caucasus in the furthest North of Turcomania; and falling into a Lake, there meeteth with 3. Cambyses, another great River of these parts; and so together hasten to the Caspian also. 4. Euphrates, by the Turks called Frat, by the Hebrews, Perah, famous in Scripture for its watering the garden of Eden, hath its fountain in the hills which they call Niphates, as is said by Strabo. A River of great length and swiftness. For having forced itself a passage through the Mountains of Taurus, it runneth in the West of Mesopotamia, with a stream so violent, that they who go by water from by'r or Birra, a Town on the North-West of Mesopotamia, to the City of Bagdat, are fain to come back again by land, selling those Boats for eight crowns which they bought for 50. At Apamia, a City of Chaldaea it is joined with Tigris, with which the greatest branch of it passeth thorough the City of Babylon, and so into the Persian Gulf: the rest of it being cut into many Channels, for fear it should overflow and drown the Country, are quite lost in the Lakes of Chaldea. 5. Tigris, a swifter stream than that, whence it had the name; the word in the Median tongue signifying an Arrow. A River of so strong a course, that it passeth thorough the Lake Thonitis, without mixture of Waters, and affordeth the Armenians an easy passage to Bagdat: who on a few Rafis born up with Goatskins blown full of wind, and boards laid upon them, make their voyage thither. It is called Heddekel in the Scripture, one of the four Rivers which watered the garden of Paradise; situate in an Island made by the embracement of this River and Euphrates, with their several Branches. Rising originally out of the Lake of Thelpitis, in Armenia Major, where now we are; it is presently almost swallowed by the gaping Earth; and passing under the huge bulk of Taurus, breaketh forth again; and compassing the East parts of Mesopotamia, which it divides from Assyria; meets with Euphrates, as before. Of which its first and second birth, thus the Poet Lucan.  
At Tigrin subito tellus absorbet hiatu,  
Occultosque tegit cursus; rursusque renatum  
Fonte novo flumen pelagi non abnegat undas.  
That is to say.  
Tigris, soon swallowed by the thirsty earth,  
Finds there a burial where it had its birth:  
But breaking out at a new spring, vouchsafes  
With the Salt Seas to mixed it sweeter waves.  
Mountains of most note, are, 1. Abos, glorying in the fountains of the great River Araxes. 2. Periardes, or Periarges as Ptolemy, Pariedri, as Pliny calleth it, a branch or spur of the great mountain Taurus. 3. Vdacespes, another branch of that great Mountain. 4. Some part of Anti-Taurus. 5. The Mountains called Montes Moschici, more towards the North, abutting upon Cappadocia, and the Euxine Sea: which name they took from Mesech, or Mosoch the son of Japhet, preserving the remembrance of his planting there. 6. Niphates, one of the spurs of Taurus, out of which the famous River Euphrates is said to issue. 7. The Gordiaean Mountains, conceived by many learned men to be the mountains of Ararat, on one of the tops whereof called Baris, the Ark of Noah is most generally affirmed to rest. Affirmed by many ancient writers of the Christian Church, and countenanced not only by Josephus and some others of the Elder Historians; but by the Septuagint themselves: who in the 37 chap. of Esay v. 38. and 2 Kings 19 37. have rendered Ararat by Armenia. And be it so, let Ara●a be Armenia, and consequently the mountains of Ararat be Armenian Mountains: yet doth it not follow hereupon, that the Ark rested on the Gordiaean mountains, or any others of this Country, as they would conclude. We may infer as Logically, for aught I can see, that the Garden of Eden must be looked for in Armenia also; because situate in the circlings of Euphrates, and Tigris, two Armenian Rivers. Those Rivers have indeed their fountains in Armenia Major, but compass not the Garden of Eden, till after a long course they encounter each other in the spacious plains of Babylonia. And so those mountains, though they have the name of the Mountains of Ararat or Armenia, because there first grown to a discemable and supper-eminent height above all the mountains of those parts: became not the resting place of the Ark, till after a further course towards the East, they were grown to their fullest height; which is in those parts of it betwixt Scythia, and Persia, which are called Mount Caucasus: not that Mount Cancasus, which lieth on the North of Colchis, and Iberia, out of which the River Cyrus is said to rise; but that which lieth on the East-side of the Caspian Sea, where Mount Taurus and Imaus do cross each other. But of this elsewhere.  
It was divided heretofore into many Provinces, the principal whereof had (I grant) its name from the Gordiaean Mountains, called in some writers Cordiaei, from whence the Province had the name of Goraene, but most commonly called Corduene, bordering on Assyria. The Kingdom once of Zarbi●nus, who siding with Lucullus against Tigranes' King of Armenia, was by Tigranes murdered with his wife and Children; but honoured by Lucullus with a stately and magnificent funeral. 2. The 2d. Province of vote is called Cotacene, near the Montes Moschici. 3. Tosarene bordering on the River Cyrus. 4. Colthene on the banks of Araxes. 5. Sophene, near the turnings of the River Euphrates; mistake by some industrious and knowing men, to be the Syria Soba of the Holy Scriptures. 6. Basisine, on the North-West, near the springs of that River. But what Cities did belong to each, I find no where specified  
Those of most consequence in the whole, 1. Artaxata, by Florus called Caput Gentis: of most esteem in those times, and the seat-royal of the Kings of Armenia from its first foundation. Built by Artaxes, one of the Progenitors of Tigranes, at the persuasion of Annibal, whilst he abode in this Country: who liking the situation of the place, drew on it the model of a strong and gallant City, according to which Platform it was presently built. Taken and sacked by the Romans, as a daughter of Carthage, by Corbulo in the time of Nero, it never could revive again to its former splendour: in the middle ages called Esechia, and at this day Coy, or Coim; if not built rather out of the ruins of it. A City memorable for two great battles near unto it; the first between Luculius on the one sid, against Mithridates and Tigranes on the other; wherein the Romans were victors: the second between Selimus Emperor of the Turks, and Hysmael the Persian Sophy; wherein the Turks were conquerors, Anno 1514. A victory which he bought with the loss of 30000 of his best men, and such a terror to the whole Army, that the Turks to this day call it, the only day of doom. The fields adjoining to the Town wherein this cruel battle was fought, called the Chalderan fields. 2. Sebastia, now Suassia, seated on Euphrates, where it meeteth with the Mountain Taurus, the residence of the Patriarch of the Armenians, at their first separarion from the See of Constantinople; the Metropolis at that time of all Armenia: so named in honour of Augustus, whom the Greeks call Sebastos. But of late divested of that dignity, the patriarchal See, by reason of the fierce wars raging in this Country betwixt the Persians and the Turks, being removed to the Monastery of Ecmeazin, near the City of Ervan in Persia, in the dominions of which King these Armenian Christians live in great abundance, by the name of Jelphelins. 3. Tigraneceria, beautified and enlarged, if not first founded, by Tigranes' abovementioned, by whom replenished with people of several Nations, whose Countries he had taken from them, and enriched in a manner with the wealth of all his Kingdom: there being no Armenian, either Prince or Peasant, who sent not somewhat towards the adorning of it. But taken by Lucullus without great resistance, those several Nations not agreeing amongst themselves: and therein besides other Treasure, no less than 8000 Talents in ready money. The City situate near a River, which Tacitus calleth Nicesorius. 4. Arsamosata, by Pliny called Arsimote, on the banks of Euphrates. 5. Cholna, so called in memory of Hul, or Chul the son of Aram, one of the first Planters of this Country, 6. Baraza, by the Emperor Leo much enlarged and beautified, dignified with the new name of Leontopolis; and for a while made the Metropolis of the Province. 7. Ars●rata, by Strabo called Arxata. 8. Theodosiopolis, built on the foundation of some of the more ancient Cities, by the Emperor Theodosius, and of him thus named. 9 Colonia, the strongest and most defensible City hereof, when possessed by the Romans. 10. Clamassun, a strong Town on the banks of Euphrates, taken by Selimus the first in his way towards Persia; and therewith livery and seisin of the rest of this Country, since wholly conquered by his Successors. 12. Chars, not far from the same River also, supposed to be the Chorsa of Ptolemy, of which not long since the ruins only; but in three weeks so repaired and fortified by the Turks, Anno 1579. that it is thought to be impregnable. 13. Thespia, giving name of old to the Lake Thespitis, and to the Region called Thespites; but now not in being. 14. Arminig, now of greatest name, and esteemed the Metropolis of this Country: situate in that part of the Lake of Vaslan (the Martiana palus of the ancient writers) which lieth next to this Country; and by that well fortified; the only City of Armenia possessed by the Persians, who are the Lords of all that Lake, of which more hereafter. 15. Van, both for natural situation, and the works of art, accounted by the Turks for their strongest Bulwark in these parts against the Persians; and for that cause well garrisoned, and as well munitioned.  
This Country was first planted by Hul or Chul the son of Aram, and by Mesech one of the sons of Japhet, who with their families or Colonies possessed the same: the one leaving the remainder of his name in the Montes Moschici; the other in the Town called Cholna and the Region called Colthene by Ptolemy, Cholobatene by Stephanus. Advanced to the honour of a Kingdom assoon as any, that of Babel excepted, Ninus the third from Nimrod finding Barzanes King hereof, whom he forced to acknowledge his superiority, and to aid him in his wars against Zoroaster the King of Bactria. Kings of most note in times succeeding, for we have no constant Cata legue of them, were 1. Araxes, who being warred on by the Persians, was promised victory by the Oracle, on the sacrifice of his two fair daughters. Willing to satisfy the Gods, and yet spare his children, he sacrificed two of the daughters of Musalcus, a noble man of this Country, by whom in revenge hereof his own daughters were slain, and himself so closely followed, that swimming the River then called Helmns, he was therein drowned, and thereby gave unto that River the name of Araxes. 2. Artaxa, the founder of the great City Artaxata; spoken of before. 3. Tigranes, the most mighty King that ever reigned in Armenia, to which he added by his prowess Galatia, and a great part of Cilicia in Asia Minor, the whole Countries of Media, Syria, and Phoenicia. But siding with Mithridates, whose daughter he had married, against the Romans, he was by Lucullus overthrown in two great: battles, and outed of the greatest part of his dominions. Hearing that Pompey had succeeded Lucullus in command of the Army, and trusting more unto his goodness than a wiseman would, he put himself into his power: by whom condemned in a great sum of money for the charge of the war, and stripped of all the rest of his estates; he was suffered to enjoy Armenta Major, Syria being made a Province, Sophene given to Ariobarzanes King of Cappadocia, Media left unto itself, and the lesser Armenia conferred on one of his Sons, who being found guilty of some practice with the King of Parthia, was carried Prisoner unto Rome, and his Country brought into the form of a Province. 4. Artavasdes, circumvented by Mar. Antony, who led him Prisoner to Rome, but (catenis, i.e. quid honori ejus deesset, aureis, as the Historian tells us of him) it was in chains of Gold for his greater honour; giving Armenia to one of the sons of Cleopatra. And though 5. Artaxias recovered his Father's Kingdom, yet he and his Successors held it but as Vassals of the Roman Empire: the Senate after that confirming and sometimes nominating the Armeni in Kings. Continuing in this estate till the time of Trajan, it was by him reduced to the form of a Province, (made after that a part of the Pontic Diocese) who adding Mesopotamia also unto his dominions, make Tigris the Eastern border of his Empire, which Augustus thought fit to limit with the banks of Euphrates. But long it held not in that form, being governed by its own Kings, as it was before Trajan's time, in the reign of Constantius, Julian, and the Emperors following; whom they acknowledged and revered as their Lords in chief, till the time of Justinian the second (he began his Empire Anno 687.) when subdued by the Saracens. Recovered by that Emperor, but soon lost again, it continued subject to the Saracens, till the breaking in of the Turks, Anno 844. of whom more anon. The greatest part of the Turks emptying themselves into Perfect, and other Countries which they took from the Eastern Emperors, the Christians of Armenia began to take heart again, and to have Kings of their own, by whom governed, till again subdued by Occadan, or Hoccata son of Cingis, the first Cham of the Fartars. Nor did the Tartars make so absolute a conquest of it as to extinguish either Christianity, or the race of the Kings: Haithon, surnamed Armentus, reigning after this, and going in person to Mangu, the great Cham of Tartary, Anno 1257. And in our own Chronicles, in the reign of King Richard the second, we find mention of one Leon an Armenian King, who came hither to sue for aid against the Turks, by whom then dispossessed of his estates. By Ussan-Cassanes, one of the Princes of this Country, (of whom more hereafter) who had the fortune to obtain the Crowh of Persia, Anno 1472. it was made a Province of that Kingdom: and so continued till the year 1515. when conquered by Selimus the first, and by him made a part of the Turkish Empire; more fully settled and assured in the reign of Amurath the third, who by causing many Forts and Garrisons to be planted in it, made the conquest absolute.  
The Arms of this Kingdom, when a Kingdom, governed by Princes of its own of the Christian faith, were Gules, 3 heads of a Buck Argent, Crowned Or.   

2. COLCHIS.  
COLCHIS is bounded on the East, with Iberia; on the West, with the Euxine Sea, and past of the Tartars Precopenses; on the North, with Tartary, from which parted by those vasl hills, which the Romans called Caucasi; and on the South, with Armenia Major, from which separated by the Montes Moschici.  
The reason of the name I find not. Nor can yield unto Bochartus, who fetcheth the original of the name and Nation, from Cusluhim, one of the sons of Mizraim, the son of Cham: the Etymology of the name being too much wrested, and Egypt too far off to give a being to Colchis in those early days: though possibly in times succeeding, the Egyptians hearing by the Greeks of the wealth of the Country, might send Colonies of their people thither, as to other places. It is now called Mengrelia.  
The Country said to be very fruitful if the care of the husbandman were not wanting. Their vines they plant at the feet of great trees, which twining about the arms thereof lad them full of Grapes: with which, and other fruits rising from the Earth, they used of late times to furnish the Storehouses of their Kings, for want of ready money to fill his Coffers; their tributes being paid in such commodities. Formerly of great fame for abundance of gold found in the sands of their Rivers issuing from the Caucasian Mountains. The thing affirmed by Appianus in his Mithridatica; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Many of their springs saith he, which come out of Caucasus, carry veins of Gold. The like saith Strabo also, and some other Ancients. With which, and out of their rich Mines both of Gold and Silver, the Kings hereof were so well furnished with those metals, that the furniture of their Chambers were all of Gold, and the beams of their Lodgings were made of Silver. But now so destitute of both, that the people for want of money to buy and sell with, are enforced to barter their commodities, and change one for another.  
The people at the present very rude and barbarous; so inhuman and void of natural affection, that they sell their children to the Turks. The better sort of them much given to belly-cheer, dancing and singing loose sonnets of love and dalliance; using much wine in their in tertainments, which the more their Guests drink, the better welcome; inflamed wherewith they offer them for a cooler their wives or Sisters, with charge to yield them all content, esteeming it no small credit to them if it be accepted. Nor are the women much averse from the entertainment, whether to please themselves or obey their husbands, let them tell that can.  
The Christian faith was first here planted in the time of the Emperor Justinus, by whose persuasion Taurus Prince of the Colchi, then at the Court in Constantinople, became a Christian, and being baptised, was returned back into his Country, with the title of King. But Cabades the King of Persia much ofended at it, proclaimed war against him: which hindered the further progress of the Gospel, till the year 860. About which time Methodius and Cyrill, two reverend men, were by the Patriarch of Constantinople employed in this service; which they successfully effected: in that regard they hold to the communion of the Church of Greece, and belong to the jurisdiction of that Patriarch. To whom conform in most dogmatic points of their Religion, and in many practical. And though they have a distinct language of their own, which hath no affinity with the Greek, yet do they celebrate their Divine Offices in the Greek tongue, and follow the Rituals of that Church; which few of them understand any better than the Vulgar Papists of France, Spain, or Germany, do the Latin service. Whether it be that they have no learned men amongst them, either to translate their old Liturgic, or to compose a new, or that they hold tall alterations in Religion to be matters of danger; or that ignorance is the best mother of devotion (as is thought by others) I am nor able to determine.  
The chief Rivers of this Country, are, 1. Hippus, 2. Cyaneus, 3. Chaeristus, all rising out of the Caucasian Mountains, and falling into the Euxine. 4. Phasis, the principal of all, rising out of the Mo●es Moschici, or Armenian Mountains, and there called Boas. Navigable with smaller vessels a great way up into the Country, and with great ships 18 miles from the Sea. Memorable amongst the Ancients for the landing of the Argonatutes, in the mouth thereof; and those delicate fowl called from hence Phasides, or Phasiani, (Pheasants,) which they brought with them into Europe.  
As for this expedition of the Argonauts, being the most remarkable action in those elder ages of the world, when Piracy and depredations were accounted for Heroical virtues: it was no other than the adventure of some noble Grecians, for the gold of Cholchos. The Age wherein it happened was about the 11 year of Gideon the Judge of Israel. The chief Adventurers, Jason, Orpheus the famous Poet, Castor and Pollux the Sons of Tindarus, Telamonius and Peleus the Sons of Aeacius, and Fathers of A●ax and Achilles; Lacries the Father of Ulysses, Amphiaraus the Soothsayer, Hercules, Theseus, Meleager, with many others of like note. These moved with the great noise of the wealth of Colchos, and the riches of King Aetus, then therein reigning, resolved upon a voyage thither, embarked in a ship called Argos (whence the name of Argonauts) whereof one Typhis was chief Pilot. Passing the Hellespont, Propontick, and Thracian Bosphorus, they came into the Euxine Sea: and after many difficulties and strarge Adventures (which such Knight's Errants could not choose but encounter with) they landed in the River Phasis, and came to the King's Court, and there were kindly entertained. But finding the King's Treasures to be too well guarded to be took by force (said by the Poets to be kept by a Dra●●n always waking) they practised with Medea, the daughter of Aetes, to assist them in robbing her Father. Who being in love with Jason, on promise of marriage with him, assented to it: by whose Attisices (which the Poets call Magical charms) the Guardians being circumvented, and the treasure gotten, they all, together with Medea, embarked again, and of ere a long and dangerous voyage returned into Greece. This is the substance of the Story; which being the greatest and most notable voyage which the grecians in those early days had undertaken, occasioned the Poets to advance it to the highest pitch, and to disguise it with many fictions, and ingenious fancies. But not without some ground entitled to the Golden Fleece (which they make the end of the design). For the Rivers, as before was said, having Golden sands, which fell down from the mountains, (as in many other parts of the world they are found to have) it was the custom of the people to lay many Fleeces of wool in the descent of those Rivers, in which the grains of Gold remained, though the water passed through, which Strabo witnesseth to be true.  
But leaving these Adventurers to pursue their fortunes, let us go forward to survey the Colchian Cities; the principal whereof, 1. Dioscurias, a Town of great wealth and trade, founded by Amphitus, and Telchius two Spartans, the Charioteers of Castor and Pollux, (and so named in honour of their Masters, whom the Greeks call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉) which two Spartans passing further East, were afterwards the founders of the Nation from them called Heniocht, or the Chariot-drivers. A Town of such resort by Merchants from most parts of the world, that here were spoken 300 different languages; insomuch that the Romans (as Pliny saith) were fain to maintain here 130 Interpreters, for dispatch of business, and negotiating with those Merchants. 2. Sybaris, the seat-Royal of the Colchian Kings, about nine miles from which was the Temple of Mars, to which Medea is reported to have brought the Argonauts. 3. Siganeam, near the mouth of the River Cyaneus; as is also, 4. Aea, by Ptolemy called Aeapolis, an Egyptian Colony, planted there by Sesosoris (in the time of Rehoboam the Son of Solomon) at what time he attempted but without success the conquest of Colchis. 5. Neapolis, so called from the newness or late foundation of it, when that name was given. 6. Phasis, so called from the River, upon which it is situate, retaining both the site and name to this very day: the ordinary residence of the Turkish Begl●rbe●, by whom called Phassum. 7. Alvati, a well fortified place. More in the land are placed by Ptolemy, 8. Mechlessus, 9 Sarace, 10. Zadris, 11. Surium; etc. not much observable.  
The first Inhabitants of this Country most probably came of out of the neighbouring Armenia, and therefore the posterity of Hul or Chul, from whence perhaps the name of Colchis: to whom in tract of time, some Colonies out of Egypt (a seafaring people) moved with the great fame of the riches and wealth hereof, did adjoin themselves; the Colchians on that ground, (or from some part of his Army left there by Sesostris) being said by Ammianus Marcellinus to be the ancient offspring of the Egyptians. The most ancient of their Kings was Aetes spoken of before: who entertaining Phryxus flying out of grease from the fury of his stepdame Ino, with great store of treasure, occasioned the Argonauts, as well in way of revenge, as in hope of booty, to make that famous expedition for the Gold of Colchos, disguised under the fiction of the Golden Fleece. Of most note after him, Selauces, and Esubops, who first discovered the rich mines of Gold and silver, of which metals they made all their Utensils, even the beams of their Chambers. The fame whereof drew thither Sesostris the great King of Egypt, who being vanquished in the field was fain to lay aside all those hopes which he brought with him thither, and return back to Egypt in worse state than he came; but that he left behind him an Egyptian Colony in the City of Aea; which after occasioned others of that Country to repair hither also. Living in peace and unmolested from this time forwards, they were unhappily engaged by Tigranes of Armenia, to side with him against the Romans; and in his overthrow gave such advantage to the Victor, that Orodes the King of Colchis was fain to submit himself to Pompey, to dismiss his forces, leave his fastnesses, and finally to redeem his peace, by sending to him a Bedstead of purest Gold, and many other rich presents. After this, the Romans had here their Agens, and received hence some annual profits, but never brought it to the form of a Province. Distressed between the Persians and Constantinopolitans, they had much ado to stand upright; though betwixt both they kept themselves in a kind of liberty: as of late times, betwixt the Persians, Turks, and Tartars, their too potent Neighbour's. But at the last Anno 1579. Amurath the third, to make the safer passage for his forces in Georgia, sent Uluzales his Admiral with a great Fleet into the Euxine Sea, who coming up the River Phasis took the City of Fassum, fortified it, and laid so certain a foundation of a future conquest; that though the Mengrelians did not long after demolish some of his fortifications, yet they were afterwards repaired, and Fassu made the seat of a Turkish Beglerbeg, as it still continueth.   

3. IBERIA.  
I BERIA is bounded on the East, with Albania; on the West, with Colchis; on the North, with the Caucasian Mountains; and one the South, with the Montes Moschici: by the first mountains parted from Sarmatia Asiatica, and by the last from Armenia Ma●or.  
It was so called from the River Iberus, which running thorough it, falleth at last into the more noted River Cyrus: but is now called Georgia, and that as some say from Saint George the Cappadocian Martyr, whom here they have in very great reverence, as their tutelary Saint and Patron: as others say, from George a Cappadocian Bishop, by whose preaching they were brought unto Christianity; and some again will have them called properly Gordiaeans, and corruptly Georgians, from their near neighbourhood to those mountains. But the most probable opinion is, as I conceive, that they took this name from the Georgi, whom Pliny reckoneth amongst other of the Caspian nations. Though to say truth, the name of Georgia extendeth somewhat further than that of Iberia, as comprehending also that part of Armenia Major which lies next to Media, and the whole Country of Albania, if I guess a right.  
The Country for the greatest part, is covered with Mountains, woods, and thickets, and in that regard unconquerable for the difficulty of the mountainous passages; yet notwithstanding it is very fruitful in many places, having many fertile plains, and wealthy valleys; well watered, and of great increase to the husbandman, if he be not wanting to himself in care and industry.  
Of the old Iberians it is written, that they were a very warlike nation, and used to set as many Pillars about the grave of a dead man, as he had slain Enemies in his life: as also that those of the same Tribe or family had all things common; he being the Ruler which was eldest: and that some of them did derive themselves from the Children of David begotten on the wife of Vriah, for that cause never marrying out of their own kindred. The present Georgians very warlike, strong of body, and valorous in fight; for along time defended themselves and Country from the Turks and Persians, with great prudence making use of the one against the other. But overpowred by the vast multitude of Turks breaking in upon them, they have lost many of their best Forts, and much of their liberty.  
The Christian faith was first here planted in the time of Constantine the Great, by means of a Christian captive women (such extraordinary ways doth God find out to promote his Gospel): who being of a most devout life, and exemplary piety, had by her prayers to CHRIST restored a young child to health which was thought past cure; and healed the Queen hereof of a desperate malady, when no help of Physic would prevail. Whereupon the King sent Ambassadors to Constantine, desiring Ministers and Preachers to be sent to Iberia, to instruct the people in the faith: which was done accordingly. Since that time, Christianity hath flourished in this Country without interruption; though by Mahometans, and Pagans, on all sides encompassed: agreeable in doctrinal points to the Church of Greece, whose Rituals also the People do to this day follow. Not subject for all that to the Patriarch of Constantinople, (though of his Communion) but to their own Metropolitan only; who hath under him about 18 Bishops, and resideth for the most part in Saint Catharines' Monastery on Mount Sinai. By means of which remote dwelling of their principal Pastor, Mahometanism hath got some sooting, and Jesuitism began to creep in amongst them. The occasion of which last was this.  
About the year 1614 the Persians making an inroad into this Country, took the City of Cremer, and therein Cetaba, the mother of Prince Teimurazes, whom leading her captive into Persia, and not able to prevail with her to turn Mahometan, they most cruelly murdered. Some of the Jesuits then travelling in those Country's, and willing out of that sad accident to advance the fame of their Society, together with the Catholic cause, cut off the head of a dead man whom they found in the way, anoined it with oil and odours, brought it into Georgia, and signified unto the Prince, that they had with them the head of the blessed Martyr Cetaba, desiring leave to live in some Monastery, and have the keeping of the holy Relic committed to them. This easily believed, and granted, the head was placed with great honourin the Church of Saint George at Aberdall; much resort to it from all parts by diseased persons: whom if past cure, the Jesuits sent home again, prescribing them in the way of preparation a long time of repentance; if curable by outward means which they applied, the cure was presently ascribed to the holy Relic. Grown famous by this means, they gained many Proselytes to themselves; and had no small hope of prevailing on Prince Teimurazes to submit himself to the Pope, as the Vicar of CHRIST. When in the heat of all their glories, a letter cometh from Maacla, a Lady attendant on the Princess, (but then living in Persia, as a slave or bondmaid) signifying that her Master by her persuasion, had got into his power the body of his mother Cetaba; which he might ransom if he pleased; two Travellers withal, who came out of Persia with the Jesuits, reporting what they see them do with the dead man's head. By which means the Imposture being discovered, the body of the Queen was sent for, the false Relic was cast out of the Church, and the falser Jesuits into prison, and next out of the Country.  
Rivers of note I find not any, either in Ptolemy or any of our modern writers, but what are touched upon before, except only the River of Iberus spoken of before, from which the Country is thus named. The whole in general so destitute of waters, that Pompey in his march this way against the Albanians, was fain to carry 10000 bladders filled with water for the use of his Army.  
Places of most antiquity and importance in it, 1. Artaxissa, 2. Vasada, 3. Lubium, 4. Arm●stica, all named by Piolomy; this last by Pliny called Harmastis. 5. Cremen, the chief City now possessed by the Georgians. 6. Cachete, honoured with a fair Church, the most beautiful of all the Country, dedicated by the name of Saint George. 7. Triala, where are to be seen the ruins of a large City, and many Churches; by what name anciently called, I find not. 8. Altuncala, or the Golden Castle, a strong fortress, and the ordinary residence of the Georgian Princes, since the time of the wars betwixt the Persians and the Turks. 9 Archichelech, a strong Castle taken by Solyman the Magnificent in his wars against Tamburlaine as King of Persia, and ever since holden by the Turks. 10. Teflis, a large and capacious Town, forsaken by the Georgians at the coming of Mustapha, General of Amurath the third against the Persians: who liking the situation of it, caused it to be repaired and fortified, planted thereon an hundred pieces of Ordinance, and left therein a Garrison of 6000 Soldiers. 11. Lo●●, distant from Teflis about two day's journey of a Carrier's pace, strengthened with a lofty Castle, environed with deep ditches, and a thick wall, amounting to a mile in compass. Seized on by Ferat Bassa, the Successor of Mustapha, who repaired the walls, planted thereon 200 small pieces of Ordinance, and garrisoned it with 7000 Turks for defence thereof. 12. Tomanis, a short days march from Lors, the Country lying betwixt both full of rich fields and pastures, abounding with corn, fruit, and cattle. Nigh unto which the said Fer at raised a new Fortress for the better command of the straits and passages, leading from thence to Lori, and so to Teflis (the Key of Media or Sirvan) the wall whereof being 1700 yards in compass, he caused to be planred with 200 pieces of Artillery; and with incredible dihgence cut down a thick wood which lay before it, and otherwise would have been a receptacle of thiefs, or Enemies. 13. Glisca, 14. Bascapan, etc. possessed and fortified by the Turks to make good their footing in this Country. But possibly most of these strong holds now possessed by the Turks may be within the bounds of Armenia Major, and Alhania, though within the Country of the Georgians, that name not being limited to Iberia, as was said before.  
The first Inhabitants hereof were such who were brought hither by Tubal, the son of Japhet, from whom this people at the first, as Josephus hath it, had the name of Thobeli. But that name growing out of knowledge, the nations in it of most note were the Tibareni, Mossynoeci, Chalybes, and of less esteem the Biseries, Sapires, Macrones, etc. united at the last in the name of Iberi, from the River Iberus, of which Pliny speaketh, the principal of all this Country. Too fruitful of increase for so narrow a dwelling, some of them put themselves to seek their fortunes, where after long wand'ring they fell upon the Coast of Spain next the Pyrenees, where they stayed themselves, giving the name of Iberus to the chief River there, and of Iberia to the Country. Of which more before. Such of them as remained behind continued an unconquered people, under the government of their own Kings, till the time of Tigranes' King of Armenioe. By whom invited to his aid against the Romans, they came in accordingly: and in his fall discomfited by Lucullus in three several battles, were fain to stand upon their guard as well as they could: first holding fair with Pompey who succeeded Lucullus in his charge. But breaking out again on a new temptation, they were encountered by him. In which battle 9000 of their men being slain and 10000 taken, they were constrained to sue for peace, not otherwise to be obtained till Artaces the King of these Iberians, gave his sons for Pledges. After this Feudataries to the Roman and Grecian Emperors, till the fatal inundation of the Saracens had so weakened that Empire, that the Kings hereof acknowledged no more subjection to those of Constantinople, till Constantinople itself became the Imperial seat of the Ottoman Family; in whose quarrels with the Persian Sophies, this Country began to suffer a new invasion: some Towns and Forts of it being taken by Solyman, in his march or passage against Tamas. Afterwards in the time of Amurath the third, who set his mind most eagerly on the war with Persia, a great part of it was subdued by Mustapha the Turkish General: who inviting the widow Princess and her two sons to come to his tent, sent the young Princes to Constantinople, and by that means had opportunity to assure his purchases. And though the Persians did their best to assist the Georgians, yet proved they but a kind of miserable comforters; as much punishing or plaguing this poor Country with their aides, as the Turks by their armies. So that now it stands divided betwixt the Grand Signior and its natural Princes: the Georgian Princes holding the greatest part, but the Turks being in possession of the strongest holds; kept by them under colour of securing their way to Persia, for which this Country is indeed but unhappily seated.   

4. ALBANIA.  
ALBANIA is bounded on the East, with the Caspian Sea; on the West, with Iberia; on the North, with the Caucasian Monntains; on the South, with the Moschici. So named from the Albani, who did once inhabit it; and of late called Sairia; but reckoned in these last ages as a part of Georgia.  
The Country of so rich a soil, that without the least labour of the husbandman, the Earth doth naturally and liberally afford herstore, and where it is but once sown, will yield two or three reapings. But being ill husbands on it in former times, they occasioned Strabo to give them this note for a remembrance, That they needed not the use of the Sea, who knew no better how to make use of the Land. The people anciently so simple that they could not reckon above an hundred; ignotant of weights, measures, and the use of money. Old age they had in high esteem, but held it utterly unlawful to make speech of the dead. And of these Pliny doth report that they were gray-headed from their very youth, and could see as well by night as by day; the verity of which last may be somewhat questionable. But withal they are affirmed to have been a stout and courageous people, strong bodies, patient of toil and labour, as they are at this day. And well the men may be courageous and stout, where the women are so truly masculine. Of whom it is affirmed by Authors of undoubted credit, that they were exercised in Arms and martial feats, as if descended lineally from the ancient Amazons; whom Plutarch placeth in this tract, reporting some of them to be aiding to these Albanians in their war with Pompey: which possibly might be no other than some the more noble Albanian Dames.  
Principal Rivers of this Country, 1. Soana, giving name to the Soani, one of the Nations of these parts mentioned by Pliny. 2. Coesius, 3. Gerrus, 4. Albanus, whence perhaps the name of Albani came unto this people. 5. Cyrus, (by Plutarch called Cyrnus) spoken of in Armenia Major, but more properly belonging to this Country, because herein it hath its spring, and the greatest part of its course also. For rising out of the Mountain Caucasus, which shuts up this Province on the North, it passeth thorough the midst of it, till it come to the borders of Armenia, where it beginneth to bend more towards the East: and having received into its Channel all the former Rivers, besides many others of less note, falleth with twelve mouths into the Caspian or Hyrcanian Sea. Mountains of note here are not any, but what are common unto them with other Nations: the Montes Moschici on the South, and Caucasus upon the North, being rather common boundaries betwixt several nations, than peculiar unto any one; though from the last the Iberians, and these Albanians, be in some writers called Caucasioe Gentes.  
Cities and Towns I find many in it, but little of them more than their very names. 1. Chabala, by Pliny called Cabalaca, and honoured with the Character of Insignior Albamoe urbs, the most noted City of this Country. 2. Albana, so called from the River Albanus, upon which it was seated. 3. Teleba, 4. Namechia, 5. Thelbis, 6. Getarra, near unto the influx of the River Cyrus. How these are called, or whether any thing be remaining of them, I am not able to say. The chief now being, and worthy to be so accounted, is the City of Derbent, situate near the Caspian Sea, from which to Teflis a City spoken of before, remain the foundations of a high and thick wall, affirmed to have been built by Alexander the Great, to defend these parts against the eruptions of the Northern unconquered nations. The Town environed with two walls, and so defended by difficult and narrow passages of the rocks, that it is not easily accessible: but taken for all that by Mustapha the Turkish General, Anno 1587. and made the ordinary residence of a Turkish Bassa. Conceived to be the Caucasiae Portae of the Ancients, which Pliy honoureth with the title of ingens naturae miraculum: by Egesippus for the strength of it called Portoe Ferrea; with reference to which by the Turks called Demir-can, the word signifying in their language, a gate of iron. The other places of this tract are either of no account and estimation, or else are specified before amongst the Cities and good Towns of the Georgians, of whose Country this is now a part: yet we may add 2. Subran, upon the borders of Media. 3. Sancta Maria, north of Derbent; both of them on, or near the banks of the Caspian Sea.  
The first Inhabitants of this Country, seem to have been of the plantation of Gether the Son of Aram, and Nephew of Joephet, whose memory was long preserved in the City of Getara beforementioned; So called by him or some of his posterity in remembrance of him. The People living somewhat out of the common road, were little troubled with Invaders from foreign parts; neither the Persians nor Macedonians looking so far North. Nor possibly had the Romans taken notice of them, had they not engaged themselves with Tigranes first, and afterwards with Mithridates. Falling on Pompey with an Army of 40000, and well beaten by him, they were content to sue for peace. But finding that the Iberians also had took up Arms, they engaged again, levying an Army of 12000 horse and 50000 foot, in which Oroezes their King, with his brother Cosis, were in person present. And though they had made good the banks of the River Cyrus; yet being ill armed, and for the most part only with skins of beasts, they made but small resistance against the Romans; notwithstanding the gallant charge of Cosis, who assaulted Pompey, and had the honour to be siain by him in the place. After this overthrow, and their giving pledges unto Pomper for their good behaviour, we find little mention of them in the Stories of the Roman Empire, till the time of Iraan. Who having conquered and reduced Armenia Major to the form of a Province, resolved to show his power to these neighbouring nations: and to that end imposed a King on the Albant of his own appointment, and made the Kings of Colchis, and Iberia, do their homage to him. In times succeeding no news of them; either because remote from the stage of Action, or serving under the command of some greater nation, where their name occurs not. Conquered by Occadan, or Hoccata the Cham of Partarie, together with Iberia, and Armenia, they were a while subject to that Empire: and possing in succeeding times by the name of Georgians, partook of the same fortunes with them. Now at the mercy of the Turk, who by reason of the strong footing which he hath gotten amongst them is become a dreadful neighbour to them, if not acknowledged by them for their Lord in chief.  
Thus having taken a survey of all the Provinces of the Turkish Empire both in Europe and Asia, and touched upon the means by which they are possessed of Egypt, whereunto all the rest of their hold in Afriet, serves but for an accessary; we will now look upon the story of this people, their first original, the great success of their affairs, the Princes under whose command they have made these conquests. Which having done, we will proceed to a Description of the Persons, Manners, and Conditions of the Turks themselves, their power and policy, with other things considerable in so great an Empire.  
And first for the original of the Turkish Nation, they were most probably the Descendants of those Turcoe, whom Pliny and Pomponius Mela place about the fens of Moeotis. Of whom thus Mela, speaking of the Gelani a Scychian people. Juxta Thyrsagetae Turcaeque Vast as sylvas occupant, alunturque, vinard, etc. Next unto them (saith he) live the Thyrsagetae and the Turcae, possessed of vast woods, and maintained by hunting; and then a rough and desert Country with continual rocks, as far as to the Arymphetans. And Pany mustering up the barbarous nations of those parts, joins the Tussagetoe (or Thyrsagetoe) with the Turks, and placeth them next the Arympheians, as Mela doth, usque adsolundines solunasis fall bus asperas, spreading themselves unto the rough deserts, and woody valleys. Not known by action (though by name) till the time of Tiberius the second, who began his Empire Anno 577. when pressing hard on the Avares, a neighbouring Nation, they compelled them to forsake their seats and pass into Europe, where they made themselves masters of Pannonta, now called Hungary. In the time of Heraclius, we find them with other barbarous nations at the siege of Constantinople, but under the command of the Persians. After which they began to set up for themselves, and in the year 763. made a road into those Countries which we last described, and loading themselves with prey and booty, returned home again. But liking better of these parts that their own poor dwellings, in the year 844. they broke once more thorough the Caspian straits, and passing through Iberia, seized on Armenia Major, and there fixed themselves; giving it the name of Turcomania: in which wide and spacious Country they roamed up and down, without any certain habitation, removing their herds and families from one place to another, as they had formerly been used to do in the sennes of Moeotis; and as the Tartars and wild Arabs do until this day. And so they lived, a poor and contemptible nation, till Maehomet the Sultan of Persia, rebelling against his Lord and Master the Caliph of Babylon, called in these Turks unto his aid; and by their help obtained a signal victory. The victory obtained, the Turks desire their wages, and a fair dismission; but could speed in neither; the Sultan being loath to part with such a necessary mischief, till his affairs were better settled; and therefore shuting up the passages of the River Araxes, which he before had opened for them: Provoked wherewith, under the conduct of Tangrolipix, their principal Leader, they began to spoil and waste the Country, a multitude of needy people, and some of the discontented Soldiers coming daily to them. Assaulted by the Persians, in the first battle they not only got a notable victory, but such store of Armour, horses, and other necessaries, as made them able to encounter with the Sultan himself: whom having overthrown and slain in the second fight, Tangrolipix is by both Armies proclaimed King of Persia, in the year one thousand and thirty, or thereabouts.  
There were at this time amongst the Turks two most noted Tribes, the Selzuccian, and the Ogazian. Of the Selzuccian, Tangrolipix, Cutlu Muses, and Ducat were the heads: of which Tangrolipix as the chief of that Clan or Family was settled in the throne of Persia; Cutlu Muse's furnished with an Army against the Christians, possessed himself of a great part of Asix Minor; Melech and Ducat, by the like favour of their Cousin the Persian Sultan, were vested into the Cities of Aleppo and Damascus, with their several Territories. But the line of Tangrolipix and the rest being all worn out, as hath been shown in our descriptions of Syria and Anatolia; the man of most nobility amongst the Turks was Ottoman, the chief of the Ogazian family, Nephew of Solyman Prince of Machan, a small territory in the Realm of Persia. Which Solyman, flying the fury of the Tartars when they conquered Persia, was drowned in crossing the River Euphrates, as he passed with his few Subjects towards Asia Minor, the best place of refuge for his Nation; leaving the chief-ship of his Tribe to Ethrogul his some: who obtained of the last Aladine of the Selzucciaen Family, the village of Saguta in Bythinia for himself and his small handful of people. To him succeeded his son Ottoman, in the year 1280. who to revenge some injuries done unto his people by the improvident Christians, took from them Castle after Castle; and in the end possessed himself of the City of Nice, not long before the Imperial Seat of the Grecian Emperors. Emboldened with such great successes, and heating of the death of Aladins the second, whom he acknowledged for his Lord, he took unto himself the Title of Sultan, Anno 1300. from which before he had abstained. To this time, and these small beginnings, we must reduce the first foundation of the Ottoman Empire; increased unto its present greatness by the courage and good fortune of these Princes following.  
The Kings of the Turks of the Oguzian or Ottoman Family.  

1300. 1. Ottoman, the son of Ethrogul, the first Turkish Sultan of this line, added to his small territory the greatest part of Bythinia, and some part of Pontus. 28.  
1328. 2. Orcanes, took the City Prusa, and made it his residence; and was the first that put footing in Europe, where he got Gallipolis, and other pieces.  
1350. 3. Amurath, won the Thracian Chersonese, the strong City of Adrianople, with the Countries of Servia, and Bulgaria, where he was slain by a common Soldier in the fields of Cossova. 23.  
1373. 4. Bajazet, made himself master of a great part of Thrace, Macedon, and Achaia. He was taken prisoner by Tamerlane, and brained himself in an iron cage, in which the insolent Conqueror used to carry him. 26.  
1399. 5. Mahomet, united the dismembered Empire of his Father, and enlarged it with the more absolute conquest of Dacia, part of Sclavonia, and the rest of Macedon. 17.  
1416. 6. Amurath II. subdued from the Constantinopolitan Empire, all Achaia, Thessaly, Epirus; he shaked the State of Hungary, and died before the Walls of Croy. 34.   

The Ottoman Emperors.  
1450. 7. Mahomet II. sumamed the Great, and first Emperor of the Turks, ruined the two Empires of Constantinople, and Trabezond, twelve Kingdoms, and two hundred Cities. 31.  
1481. 8. Bajazet II. subdued the Caramanian Kingdom, and part of Armenia; and drove the Venetians from Morea, and their part, of Dalmatia. 31.  
1512. 9 Sclimus, having poisoned his Father, subverted the Mamalucks of Egypt; bringing it, together with Palestine, Syria, and Arabia, under the yoke of the Turks. 7.  
1519. 10. Solyman the Magnificent, surprised Rhodes, Belgrade, Buda, with a great part of Hungary, Babylon, Assyria, Mesopotamia. 48.  
1567. 11. Selimus II. an idle and effeminate Emperor, by his Deputies took from the Venetians, the Isle of Cyprius, and from the Moors, the Kingdom of Tunis, and Algiers. 8.  
1575. 12. Amurath III took from the disagreeing Persians, Armenia, Media, and the City Tauris, and the fort Guierino from the Hungarians. 20.  
1595. 13. Mahomet III took Agria in Hungary, which Kingdom had likely been lost, if he had pursued his victory, at the battle of Keresture. 8.  
1603. 14. Achmat, who the better to enjoy his pleasures, made peace with the Germane Emperor, and added nothing to his Empire. 15.  
1618. 15. Mustapha, brother to Achmat, succeeded; a novelty never before heard of in this Kingdom; it being the Grand Signeurs common policy to strangle all the younger brothers: howsoever this Mustapha was preserved, either because Achmat being once a younger brother, took pity on him; or because he had no issue of his own body, and so was not permitted to kill him.  
1618. 16. Osmen, succeeded his Uncle Mustapha; and being unsuccesseful in his war against Poland, was by the Janissaries slainin an uproar, and Mustapha again restored; yet long enjoyed be not his throne: for the same hand that raised him, plucked him down, and seated young Amurath in the place.  
1623. 17. Morat (or Amurath the IV.) Brother of Osmen, of the age of 13. years, succeeded on the second deposition of his Uncle Mustapha, who proved a stout and masculine Prince, and bend himself to the reviving of the ancient discipline. To the great good of Christendom, he spent his stomach on the Persians.  
18. Ibrahim, the brother of Morat, preserved by the Sultaness his mother in his brother life; and by her power deposed again for interdicting her the Court. He spent a great part of his reign in the war of Crete, against the Venetians; but without any great success.  
1648. 19 Mahomet IU. son of Ibrahim, now reigning: Lord of all this vast Empire, containing all Dacia, and Greece, the greatest part of Sclavonia and Hungary, the Isles of the Aegean Sea, and a great part of the Taurican Chersonese in Europe; of all the Isles and Provinces, which we have hitherto described in Asia; and in afric of all Egypt, the Kingdoms of Tunis and Algiers, with the Ports of Suachem, and Erocco. Nor is their stile inferior to so vastan Empire, Solyman thus styling himself in his Letter to Villerius great Master of the Rhades, at such time as he intended to invade that Island: i.e. Solyman King of Kings, Lord of Lords, most high Emperor of Constantinople and Trabezond; he most mighty King of Persia, Syria, Arabia, and the Holy Land; Lord of Europe, Asia, and Africa; Prince of Meccha, and Aleppo, Ruler of Jerusalem, and Sovereign Lord of all the Seas and Isles thereof.   
As for the persons of the Turks, they are generally well-complexioned, of good stature, proportionably compacted, no idle talkers, nor doers of things superfluous; hot and venereous, servile to their Prince, and zealous in their Religion. They nourish no hair upon their heads, except it be a Tust on the top of their Crowns; by which they think that Mahomet will snatch them up into Paradise at the day of judgement. For which reason they keep on of all sides, though never so poor, accounting it an approbrious thing to see any men uncover their heads; saying when they dislike of any thing which they see, or hear, I had as lief thou hadst shown me thy bare skull. In their familiar salutation they lay their hands on their bosoms, and a little incline their bodies; but when they accost a person of rank, they bow almost to the ground, and kiss the hem of his garment. Walking up and down they never use, and much wonder at the often walking of Christians. Biddulph relateth, that being at his ambulatory exercise with his companion; a Turk demanded them whether they were out of their way, or their wits? If your way (quoth the Turk) lay toward the upper end of the Cloister, why come you downwards? If to the neither end, why go you back again? Shooting is their chief recreation, which they also follow with much laziness, sitting on carpets in the shadow, and sending some of their slaves to fetch their arrows. They prefer, as they pass the streets, the left hand before the right, as being thereby made master of his sword with whom they walk. As they shave their heads, so they wear their berds long, as a sign of freedom; but their slaves keep theirs shaved and close cut.  
The women are of small stature, for the most part ruddy, clear, and smooth as the polished Ivory; as neither afflicted with the weather, and often frequenting the baths: of a very good complexion, seldom going abroad, and then masked; lascivious within doors, pleasing in matters of incontinency, and they are accounted most beautiful, which have the greatest eyes, and are of the blackest hue. Every Turk is permitted to have four wives, and as many slaves as he is able to keep, yet are they to meddle with none but their own, the offending women being drowned, and the man dismembered. These women live in great awe and respect of their husband, never sitting with him at the table, but waiting till he hath done, and then withdrawing into some room. If their husband hath been abroad, at his coming in they all rise from their stools whereon they fate, kiss his hand, and make an obeisance, and stand as long as he is in presence. The children which they have, they carry not in their arms as we do, but astride on their shoulders; they live immured from the sight of the world: and permit not any male children, no not their own sons, to come among them after they are twelve years old. From their husbands they cannot be divorced, but on special occasion: but their husbands may put away their wives, or give them to their slaves, when and as often as they list. Far better is it with the sisters or the daughter of the Sultan; to whom when her Father or brother bestoweth her on one of the Bassas, giveth her a dagger, saying I give thee this man to be thy slave or bedfellow; if he be not loving, obedient, and dutiful unto thee, I give thee here this Canzharre or dagger to cut off his head. When they are ma● ryed, their husbands come not to bed unto them, till they are sent for, and then also they creep in at the bed's feet. That ever any of their Ladies made use of their daggers, I could never read, only I find, that Lutzis Bassa, the chief man of the Empire next the Sultan himself, and of him very much beloved, having given his wise, which was sister to Solyman the Magnificent, a box on the ear, was upon complaint by her made, thrust from all his honours, banished into Macedon, and had doubtless been slain, if the Emperor's love and his own merits had not pleaded for him. And this is all the Prerogative of the Sultan's daughter: her sons being accounted as mere and ordinary Turks only, and never being preferred above the rank of a common Captain.  
The better sort of the Turks use the Schivonian Tonque, the vulgar speak the Turkish language, which being originally the Tartarian, borrowed from the Persians their words of State; from the Arabic their words of Religion; from the Grecians their words or terms of war; and from the Italians, their terms of navigation.  
They were formerly idolatrous Pagans, and were first initiated in Mahometanism, when they got the Sovereignty of the Persian Sceptre. The degrees in their Religion are, 1. The Saffoes or Novices. 2. The Calsi, or readers. 3. The Hegi, or writers of books, for printing they use not. 4. The Napi, or young Doctors. 5. The Caddi, whereof there is at least one in every City, to judge of offences. 6. The Mudressi, who use to oversee the Caddis. 7. The Medlis, or principal Church Governor under the Musti. 8. The Caldelescats, whereof there are only three, one of Greece, the other for Anatolia, the third for Egypt and Syria: These sit with the Bassas in the Divano, to determine of temporal suits. 9 The Musti, whose sentence in law and religion is uncontrollable. He abaseth not himself to sit in the Divano, nor affordeth more reverence to the Emperor than he doth to him.  
His forces are either for the Sea, or the land. His Sea forces are great in regard of his spacious seacoasts, vast woods, and number of Subjects: he never suffered but one memorable defeat, which was that at Lepanto; yet the next year he showed his Navy whole and entire. Galleys are his only vessels, which being unable to cope with ships of any bigness, were not only the occasion of that overthrow, but also have heartened the Florentine, only with six great ships of war, to swager in the Seas; so that for more safety the tribute of Egypt is of late sent to Constantinople by land. The Captain Bassa, or Admiral, notwithstanding with a Navy of 60 fail, makes a yearly progress about the Seas, and Sea Towns, to annoy the enemy, suppress Pirates, collect the tributes, and to redress the abuses committed in the maritime Towns, belonging to the Admirallity: which annual circuit is begun in May, and ended in October.  
Their land forces are either horse or foot, they which served on horseback are the Spali and Asapi: these latter serving to weary the enemies, and dull there swords with there multitudes; of whole bodies the Janissaries use to make mounts whereon to assault the wall of a besieged Town: and are by them so contemned, that a Janisary once sold a of them for a sheep's head. As for the Spali, they till they are enrolled into pay, are of the same original and education with the Janissaries; and called by the same name Azamaglans. Their pay is ten aspers a day. The Turk is able and doth maintain 150000 Horses at little or no cost, which no other Prince can do with 14. millions of Gold; for wheresoever any Parcel of Land is conquered, it is divided into divers parts, and committed to the manuring of divers men, whom they call Timariot. These are to pay unto the Emperor certain rents, and at their own charges to send to his wars so many horse, excellently appointed for the field: and which is the chief point of their service to keep the subjects and all parts of his Empire in awe. For being as they are dispersed in all quarters of his Dominions; the people can no sooner stir, but these will be assembled and fall upon them. These Timariot are in all accounted 719000 fight men, whereof 257000 have their abode in Europe, and 402000 in Asia and Aprica. Were it not for these Timartors as the Turks saying is, no Grass would grow where the Grand Signeurs horse hath once set his hoof: for if the care of manuring the ground were committed to Paisants and not to military men, the greatest part of this Empire would grow waist and desolate. These Timariot were instituted by Ottomon the first Turkish King of this Family, and a curse by him laid on them that should annihilate the institution. The name is derived from the Turkish word Timaz signifying a stipend.  
But the nerves and Sinews of this warlike body, are the Janissaries; who by original being Christians, are chosen by the Turkish Officers, every five years, out of his European dominions: and so distributed abroad to learn the language, customs, and religion of the Turks; afterward according to there strength, will, or disposition, placed in divers chambers. They of the first chamber are preferred some to be Chiausies, such as go on Embassies, and execute judgements; others to Sanziacks, or Governors of Cities; some to be Bassas or commanders of horsemen; and others to be Beglerbegs (idest, Lord of Lords) to command the rest in general. They of the other chambers are the Janissaries or Praetorian Soldiers of the Guard, to whose faith and trust the care of the Emperor's Person is committed. The tithing of these young springals is as we have said every fifth year, and oftener sometimes, as occasions serve. By which means he not only disarmeth his own subjects and keepeth them from attempting any stir or innovation in his Empire: but spoileth all the Provinces he most feareth, of the Flower, Sinews and strength of their People; choice being made of the strongest youths only, and fittest for war. These before they are enrolled in pay, are called Azamoglans, and behave themselves with much submissiveness towards their Seniors and governor's: but when once they are honoured with the title of Janissaries, they grow by degrees into an intolerable pride and haughtiness: till of late they were not permitted to marry, neither now can any of their sons be accounted any other than a natural Turk, (whom of all the rest they account the basest) the eldest only excepted: to whom this Prerogative was granted by Amurath the third when he came to the crown. They are in number 40000. of which 16000 are always resident in Constantinople. In this City they are diversely employed, being as Constables to see the Peace kept; as Clerks of the Market to see to the weights and measures; as Officers to arrest common offenders; as Warders to look to the gates, to guard the houses of Ambassadors, and to travel with strangers for their more safety; in which charge they are very faithful. There pay is but five aspers a day, and two gowns yearly; neither are their hopes great, the command of 10, 20, and 100 men being their greatest preferment; yet are they very obsequious to their Captain or Aga, who is inferior to the meanest Bassa, though in power perhaps above the chiefest. For the crafty Turks join not power and authority, and if they observe the Janissaries to love and respect their Aga, they quickly deprive him of life and office. The Founder of this Order was Amurath the first, Anno 1365. their greatest establisher Amurath the second: their name signifieth young Soldiers. Now concerning these Jamazaries, we will farther consider the sway they bear in designing the Successor. 2. There insoleney towards the Emperor, and his Officers. 3. Their behaviour in the vacancy of the throne; and 4. Their punishments.  
1. Concerning the first, I never find any particular sway the Janissaries carried in the designation of their Emperor, till the death of Mahomet the Great; when the Bassas having chosen Coreub the son of Bajazet, were overruled by the Aga and his Janissaries; who more inclined to Bajazet his Father and son to Mahomet. Though I am not ignorant, that when this Mahomet succeeded in the Throne, the joyful acclamations made by the Soldiers was accounted the chiefest sign of his secure and perpetuated establishment. But the chief instance of their power herein, was the inthronizing of Selimus the first, who being but the seventh son of this Bajazet, was not only preferred by them before his brethren in his Father's life time, but by their aids also be severally mastered them, and in the end poisoned his Father. To omit other examples, even of late Anno 1622. they slew the young Emperoun Osmen, drew his Uncle Mustapha out of prison, and established him in the Royalty.  
2. As for the next, the first example in which I find them peccant toward their Prince, was at the beginning of the reign of the abovementioned Bajazet; when hearing of the intended death of Achmet Bassa whom they loved, they broke open the Court gates, and told the Emperor, They would teach him like a drunkard a beast and a rascal as he was, to use his great place and calling with more sobriety and discretion. Not long after conceiving further displeasure against the said Bajazet, they shook their weapons against him, and refused to take him into the midst amongst them; and were not, without great and vile submission on his part, appeased. Against Selimns the first, they also mutined, when being resolved to winter in Armenia, for the better pursuit of his victories against the Persian, he was by them forced to return home unto Constantinople. Against Solyman they mutined so violently, that they compelled him to displace Rustan his chief Bassa or favourite. Against Amurath the 3d. for placing over them a new Aga, they so strongly opposed themselves; that first they set fire on Constantinople, and burnt therein, besides shops and warehouses, twentyfive great Inns, seven Temples, and 15000 houses, and in the end constrained him to give them money, and to yield also into their hands two of his chief Counsellors, by them supposed to be their adversaries; whom they drew about the streets. Finally, (to omit the tumult 1622 abovenamed) in the year 1600 they grew so discontented with Mahomet the 3d. that they not only threatened to destroy the Principal Officers of the Court, and the banishment of the Sultaness his Mother, but the deposing of himself also.  
3. Now for the third, I find it to have been the custom of these Janissaries, between the deaths of an old Emperor, and the beginning of a new, to commit divers insolences; as the rifling of the houses of the Jews and Christians, among whom they dwell; the murdering of the Bassas, and principal men about the Court, whom they suspected not to have favoured them; and a number of the like outrageous mischiefs. Of these we find frequent mention, as after the death of Amurath the 2d. and Mahomet the Great: at which last time the Merchants of Constantinople, being natural Turks, escaped not their ravenous hands; neither could Mahomet-Bassa avoid the fury of their swords. This spoil they took for so certain a due, that if they were disappointed of it, they would presently raise commotions both in Court, Field, and City, unless some present satisfaction were made them. To this end Ackmat distributed among them two millions and an half of Ducats; Selimus the first, two millions; others made an encicase of their daily pay. But Selimus the 2d. distributing among them 100000 Sultanies only, was by them prohibited to enter into his Seraglio, till he had enlarged his bounty: and the great Bassoes were rapped about the pate with their callivers, for persuading them to quietness. Now to prevent the dangerous and factious liberty, which in the vacancy of the Empire was usually committed, the death of the old Emperor was with all secrecy concealed, till the arrival of the new. To omit others, I will instance in the deaths of Mahomet the first, and Solyman only. This Solyman died at the siege of Sigeth in Hungary, which was so cunningly concealed by Mahomet-Bassa the space of twenty days; that before the Janissaries knew of it, his son Selimus had possessed himself of Constantinople, and came also to their Army then in retreat homewards. For this Mahomet privately strangled the Physicians and Apothecaries which knew of his death, commanded the Soldiers to go on in their siege, and divers times showed them the Emperor sitting in his horselitter, as (being troubled with the Gout) he used to do: and when the City was taken, marched home with his dead body, sitting still in the same manner. So after the death of Mahomet the first, the Bassas of the Court called their Divanos, as formerly they used, gave order for the levying of an Army, as if some war were intended, and the King's Physicians went up and down with their Potions, as if they had him still in cure. But the Pensioners and Janissaries misdoubting the matter, with all egerness desired to see him, which when the Bassas durst not deny, they appointed the next day for their visit. The next day the body was apparelled in royal large robes, placed in a chair, at the end of a long gallery, and a little boy cunningly set behind him to move the King's hand to his head, as if he should struck his beard, as his manner was: which signs of life and strength the Soldiers seeing, held themselves contented, and so was his death concealed the space of 41 days.  
4. As for the last, These insolent and unsufferable pranks committed so commonly by these masterfull slaves, so exceedingly stomached Ba●azet the 2. that he secretly purposed with himself, for curing so dangerous a disease, to use as desperate a remedy; which was to kill and destroy suddenly all the Janissaries. It is like that this Ba●azet being a Scholar, had read how Constantine the Great had cassed the Praetorian Soldiers, and destroyed their camp, as men that were the causes of all the stirs in his Empire, and whose pride was come to an intolerable height: and having the same cause to destroy his Janissaries, hoped to have done it with as much ease and safety as the other did; but they having notice of the plot, for the time continued so united and linked together, that he durst not then attempt it; and afterward siding with his son Selimus, cast him out of his Throne into his grave. Since which time the Emperors never durst punish them openly, but when any of them proveth delinquent, he is sent privately in the night time to Pera over-against Constantinople, where by the way he is drowned, and a piece of Ordinance shot off, to signify the performing of the Sultan's command.  
Now for the Emperors themselves, we will consider them in matters of pleasure, in matters of ceremony, and in matters of State, the last being considerable in three main points, which are the murdering of their brethren, the removing of their sons, their revenue, and therein a touch of their goverenment. To these we will add, what apparent symptoms may be observed to prognosticate the standing, decreasing, and increasing of this puissant Monarchy.  
1. For the first, he hath not so few as 500 (sometimes a 1000) choice virgins kept in a Seraglio by themselves, all slaves born of Christian Parents, and indeed the rarest beauties of his Empire. When he is disposed to take his pleasure with any of them, they are all ranked in a gallery, and she is by the Aga of the women prepared for his bed, to whom he giveth his handkerchief. She that beareth him the first son, is honoured with the title of Sultaness (Queen Mother we may call her) neither can he make any of them free, unless he marry them. When the Sultan dieth, all his women are carried into another Seraglio, where they are strictly looked too, and liberally provided for, and not seldom times are bestowed by the succeeding Sultan, on his great Bassas, and such us he chiefly favoureth, which is a principal honour. They are attended on by women, and eunuchs; these being not gelded only, but deprived of all their genitals, and supplying the uses of nature with a silver quill: which in humane custom was brought in among them by Selimus the second, because he had seen a Gelding cover a mare.  
2. These ceremonies are either performed by them, which is for the most part the building of a Mosche only to help to the salvation of their souls: or towards them by others, which are most apparent in the entertainment of Ambassadors. For when such come to his presence, they are led between two of his Courtiers, and coming before the Throne on both sides (whereof the Bassas sit with admirable silence, resembling rather Statues than men;) they bow themselves to the ground with all humility, laying their hands on their breasts, but never uncovering their heads, which (as we before noted) is counted an undecency. When they are to depart, they go all backwards, it being accounted very irreverent to turn their backparts towards a Prince so glorious. The reason why they are thus brought in between two, is said to be for their greater honour: but is indeed a fear that they have, lest the Grand Seignieur, under the pretence of a Saluration, or the delivery of an Embassy, should be stapped. Which wariness they have used, ever since the time that Miles Cobiletz, a Servian, scrambling from among the slain at the battle of Cassona, and being admitted to the speech of Amurath the first, the Author of that overthrow; stabbed him into the belly with his dagger.  
3. Amongst all the jars and discontents that be, none have been with more unkindness begun, or more eagerness prosecuted, than those of brothers: and that not only in private families, but in the stems of Princes; the multitude of Pretendants, being the original of most civil wars. To prevent these public emotions, the Emperors of Habassia use to immure up all their younger children in the hill Amaza; the Persians do put out the eyes of their younger brothers; and the Turks do murder them: strange and horrid courses, whereby to avoid the fear of a war in the State, they stir up a war in their own bowels. The first amongst the Turks that began this barbarous cruelty, was Bajazet the first, on his brother Jacup; whom immediately after his Father's death he strangled with a bowstring: this being the only instument of their Fratricide, because thereby none of the blood-royal of Ottoman is spilt on the ground. After him, Mahomet the Great, caused his young brother then at nurse, to die the death; and was not without much ado persuaded from being the executioner himself. Amurath the third, caused his five brethren to be at once strangled before his face; and Mahomet, his son, no fewer than nineteen in one day. By this course they imagine their own estate to be infinitely secured, as knowing that Mustapha a younger son, stirred a rebellion against Amurath; and Zemes against Bajazet, both the second of those names: that Solyman, Musa, and Isa, severally afflicted Mahomet the first, and Corcut, Selimus; the first of these names also. But yet they will not know, that nothing sooner putteth their younger Brothers into these acts of hostility, than an inevitable certainty of a violent and unnatural death: whereas were they but sure of life, and a liberal and Princely maintenance, it is more than probable, they would rest content, as in other Kingdoms the younger Princes do. And notwithstanding their barbarous policy, in particular, they are not quite free from fear, as knowing the counterfeits have heretofore much disturbed the quiet of their Predecessors: for thus we find Amurash the second to have been vexed by one that took upon him the name of Mustapha elder brother to Mahomet, then late deceased; who was much furthered and aided by the Greek Princes. This hath been one of the vulgar policies of Princes to kindle flames of sedition in their neighbour's Countries. In the infancy of the Roman Empire we find a counterfeit Agrippa, after that a counterfeit Nero, and before two counterfeit Alexanders in Syria. But never was Realm so often troubled with these Mock-kings, as England; a counterfeit Richard the 2d. being made in the time of Hen. the 4th. a counterfeit Mortimer, in the time of Hen. the 6th. counterfeit Duke of York, a ounterfeit Earl of Warwick, under Henry the 7th. and a counterfeit Edw. the 6th. under Q. Mary. To prevent these walking spirits, Mahomet the third, laid out the dead bodies of his Father and nineteen brethren, as a common spectacle for all that passed by, or would come to behold them. Of late indeed the Grand Signeur Mustapha, miraculously scaped the bowstring twice; 1. when his brother Achmat, and 2ly. when Osmen his young Nephew were made Sultan's, and was the first that in this Empire did ever succeed in the collateral line: as Ibrahim the late Sultan was the second, on the death of Morat or Amurath the fourth, his elder brother.  
4. The removing of the young Princes is done for three reasons: 1. to wean them from the pleasures of the Court, 2ly. to train them up in arms, and inure them to hardness, 3ly. and principally to avoid the danger of a Competitour, where of old Princes are especially jealous. The common places destinated to this Princely exile, are Amasia in Cappadocia, Magnesia in Lydia, and such like Towns of Anatolia. Neither do the old Sultan's by such a great distance think themselves secure altogether; but carry a vigilant eye over their son's actions, and have intelligence of almost every particular thought, the least suspicion being cause sufficient to destroy them; so we find Mustapha, son to Solyman, the hopefullest branch that ever sprang from the Ottomon tree, to have been shamefully strangled by the command of his Father, upon a rumour only of a marriage which he was said to have negotiated with the Persian King's Daughter. When these Princes are once settled in their government, it is a crime meriting no less punishment than death, to depart thence and come unto Constantinople, before their Father's death; or unless they are by their Fathers sent for. Of this we have a Tragical example in Mahomet a Prince of great hope, son to Bajazet the second: who desiring to see the fashion of his Father's Court, left Magnesia to which he was by his Father confined; and attended by two or three Gentlemen, came in the habit of a seafaring man to Constantinople, and having obtained his desire he returned to his charge. This strange action being quickly divulged abroad, and by divers variously entercepted, stirred such jealousies in the suspicious head of his old Father, that he took order not long after to have him secretly poisoned.  
5. As for the ordinary revenue, it consisteth either in money received, or in money saved. The money saved, is first by the Tartars, of whom he commands continnally 60000 to attend him in his wars without any pay but the spoil of the Enemy. And second by the Timariot, who nourish and bring into the Field more horses than any Prince in Christendom can keep (as we have already said) for 14 millions of Gold. The money received (according to Boterus) is only 15 millions of Sulianies, which is nothing in respect of so great an Empire: the chief reason whereof is the Tyrannical government of the Turk, which deters men from tillage, merchandise, and other improvements of their estates; as knowing all their gettings to lie at the Grand Signieurs mercy. His extraordinary revenue is uncredible; For besides that no Ambassador cometh before him empty handed; no man is master of his own wealth, further than it stands with the Emperor's liking: so that his great Bassas are but as sponges to suck up riches till their cofiers swell; and then to be squeezed into his Treasury. These men, as he advanceth without envy, so can he destroy without danger: no man here hoping for Partakers, if he should resist, as not being ignorant that one man's fortune is built on the desired overthrow of another. Such riches as they gain, if they hap to die naturally, return to the Emperor's coffers, who giveth only what he pleaseth to the Children of the deceased. These Bassas have in their particular Provinces, their Divanoes, or Law-Courts, where justice hath been administered formerly with great integrity; but now not a little corrupted; yet the comfort is, that such as miscarry in their right, shall without delay know what to trust to; and the Bassas upon complaint to the Emperor are sure to die for it. Over these Bassas (the chief of whom is the Uizier Bassa, or Precedent of the Council) preside two Beglerbeggs; one for Greece, the other for Anatolia.  
6. Concerning the present state of the Empire, many judge it to be rather in the wane, than the increase, which judgement they ground upon good reasons, whereof these are the chief.  
1. The body is grown too monstrous for the head: the Sultan's since the death of Solyman never accompanying their Armies in person (except Morat, or Amurath the fourth) but rioting and wasting their bodies and treasures at home.  
2. The Janissaries, who have been accounted the principal strength of this Empire, are grown more factious in the Court, than valiant in the Camp: corrupted with ease and liberty, drowned in prohibited wines, enscebled with the continual converse of women, and fallen from their former austerity of discipline.  
3. They have of late given no increase unto their Dominions: and as in the paths of virtue, non progredi est ●egredi; so in Empires, by violence gotten, when they cease to be augmented, they begin to be diminished.  
4. Rebellions have in these latter times been in this Empire strangely raised, and mightily supported; which commotions the former Sultan's were never acquainted with.  
5. The greatness of the Empire is such, that it laboureth with nothing more than the weightiness of itself; so that it must in a manner needs decline Pondere pressa suo, overburdened with its own mightiness. For as in a natural body, a surfeit killeth more than fasting; so in the body Politic also, too much extent doth sooner draw on a ruin, than either too little or a mediocrity.  
6. The Sons of the Grand Signieur, whose bravery of mind is ever suspected by their Fathers, are nursed up (contraty sometimes to their natural inclinations) in all effeminacy; which once rooted in them in their youth, doth always after subject them to the softness and baseness of libidinous pleasure.  
7. They have lost much of that fear and terror, which formerly their very name did carry with it: insomuch that not the Venetians only have by Sea often mated, and once overthrown them; the Hungarians withstood their greatest forces, for the space of 200 years, by land; the Polonians forced them to dishonourable retreat and composition: but the poor Prince of Transylvania did divers times discomfit them, with the death of many of their Bassas; the Florentines with six ships only, intercepteth their trade; and the poor Emir of Sidon held it out against them many years together.  
8. By the avarice and corruption reigning in the Court; all peace and war, all Counsels and informations, all injuries and favours, being now made saleable. And  
9 It is visible and apparent, that their Empire was long sin ce at the highest: Et naturaliter quod procedere non potest, recedu, as Velleius hath it: when an Empire can ascend no higher, by the ordinary course of nature it must have a fall. All these are more than probable Prognostics of a sinking Monarchy; and yet there is a greater than any of these, that is to say, the present State of Affaires. The young Emperor Mahomet the fourth, now reigning, is but a weak staff to support so vast an Empire: considering not only the infinite casualties to which children are naturally subject; but the dangers which he may justly fear from a Rebellious Soldiery, and a Factious Court; Who by the murder of one Emperor, and the deposition of two, have made themselves so formidable, but withal so odious in the sight of the Imperial house, that there is no way left to save them from a merited vengeance, but to translate the Empire tosome other Family; though by the rooting out of this. Which whensoever it shall happen, either by the natural death, or unnatural destruction of the present Sultan, it will draw with it an extermination of the Ottoman race: which I look on as a matter not to be avoided, except by miracle. Supposing then the line of Ottoman to fail, (as it is most probable that it will) what will become of this vast Empire? Three there will be to offer at it, viz. the Crim-Tartar, the Janissaries, and the Bassas, And first the Crim-Tartar may plead a composition, made by his Ancestors, with the Princes of the Ottoman family; which is, that he supplying them with 60000 men at his own charges, should on the failer of the heirs males succeed in this Empire. Besides which, he may hope for no small succours, not only from the rest of the Tartarian Princes, but even from the Great Cham himself, to recover his Estate herein, if withheld from him: thereby to add unto the Present greatness and renown of the Tartars, the access of such a foacious Empire. 2. The Bassas may conceive no small possibilities of dividing this great Empire among themselves, parely by the Example of Alexander's Captains, who after their master's death (there being yet some of the blood Royal remaining) parted amongst themselves not only the new-gotten Provinces, which they had conquered from the Persians; but even the Kingdom of Macedon, his old Inheritance: partly by an example in their own Histories, by which it appeareth, that after the death of Aladine the 2d. Caraman, Sarachan, Aedin, Carasus, and the rest of the more powerful Commanders, divided among them the whole Turkish Kingdom in the Lesser Asia: and partly by the opportunity which they have as Govemours in their several Provinces, and having so many bands of Soldiers under their command; which may easily invest them as Proprietaries in those Estates, of which they have already such a fair possession. And so we find the Sultan's or Provincial Governors of the Caliphs' of Babylon, to have done before them. 3. The Janissaries may also build their hopes on as fair foundations, as being the Sword and Buckler of the Ottoman Empire; got, and maintained by their valour chiefly, who to excite them to the Enterprise have the Example of the Pratorian Guards of the Roman Empire (a body far more Politic and better compacted than this is); who out of their own company created the far greater part of the Roman Emperors, neither the Provinces or Senate daring to oppose them in it. But above all Examples that of the Mamalucks of Egypt doth make fairest for them; who were born of Christian Parents, as these are; appointed for the Guard of the Sultan's, as these are; purposely entertained and enured to the wars, to take from the natural subjects, the use of Arms, as these are; men of approved valour, and the chief Bulwark of that Kingdom against the Christians, as these are: and then why may they not be like them in this last Attempt, for setting in their Master's Throne, as these Mamalucks did. Add hereunto, that they are already in (a manner) possessed of Constantinople, the head town and heart of the Empire; and their hopes are not vain. For my part I hold them to be the men most like, unless the Princes of Christendom lay aside private malice, join all in arms to strip this proud Peacock of his feathers: and (upon so blessed an advantage) to break in pieces with a rod of iron, this insolent and burdensome Monarchy. A thing rather to be desired than expected. But this by way of supposition, and as in a dream, I awake.  
The ensign of this Empire (or arms of it) is the Croissant, or half moon; but how blazoned I cannot tell you: not are the learned yet resolved on the beginnings of that bearing. Some derive it to them, from the Eastern Gentiles, who worshipped the Moon under both sexes; as we learn in Spartianus. Some make it common to them, with the other mahometans; and they derive it from a pretended miracle of Mahomet: who to show his power, is said to have made the Moon fall into his lap in two pieces; and to have restored her whole again to the heavens. Others are of opinion, that it was taken by the Grand Signior at the winning of Constantinople; ut signum victae gentis penes quam orientis imperium esset. And of this mind is Justus Lipsius, induced thereto as it seemeth, by the figure of the Croissant born in some old Bizantine coins. A pretty plausible conceit; and therefore till we have a better, may pass as currant as the money.  
And thus much I thought convenient to insert in this place, concerning the original, proceeding, and continuance; the natural dispositions, policies, and forces of the Turks: this being as the only Province which retaineth their name; so both the first they were possessed of, and the last which they have fully conquered of all their Dominions.   
And thus much of Turcomania.   

OF MEDIA and PERSIA.  
THese I have joined together also, because the affairs thereof have been so united, in making up the second of the four great Monarchies, and running the same fortunes ever since, that they are hardly to be parted in course of story, though each must have unto itself a distinct chorography. First then, we begin with MEDIA.  
MEDIA is bounded on the East, with Parthia, and some part of Hyrcania, Provinces of the Persian Empire; on the West, with Armenia Major, and some part of Assyria; on the North, with the Caspian Sea, and those parts of Armenia Major which now pass in the account of Georgia; and on the South, with Persia. So called from Madai the son of Japhet, by whom first planted and possessed, after that general dispersion made at Babel. Known by this name amongst the ancients both Greeks and Romans; but at this time called Sheirvan by the Turks and Persians: the word signifying in the language of this Country, a Milkie-Plain.  
The Country of a large extent, and of so different nature, as one would think it not the same. The North parts lying betwixt Mount Taurus and the Hyrcanian Sea, very cold and comfortless: so barren, that for the most part they make their bread of dried Almonds, and their drink of the juice of certain herbs. Fruit-trees they have but few, and those but of Apples; nor any droves of tame cattle, as in other places, their food being generally on Ventson, or the flesh of wild beasts took in hunting. But on the Southside of the Taurus, the soil is very rich, and the Country pleasant, plentiful both of corn and wine, and all things necessary: full of fat pastures, some of them so large in compass, that 50000 horses do graze upon it.  
The people anciently great Warriors, as those who ruined the great Empire of the Babylonians; and laid upon themselves and their own virtue the foundation of the second Monarchy. But being not long after incorporated into the same Empire with the Persians, have not only ever since followed the same fortunes with them, but participate of their nature also: and therefore we shall hear more of their Character when we come to Persia. Polygamy anciently amongst them, so far from being esteemed a sin or an inconvenience, that it was a punishment for the common Villager to have less than seven wives; or the woman, if of noble birth, fewer than five husbands. In their wars they use commonly to envenom their Arrows with an oil or liquor, made of a bituminous water called Naphta, whereof there is great plenty both here, in Persia, and Assyria. The oil called Oleum Mediacum, from this people only because their invention, and by them most mischievously used. The Arrow which was anointed with it, being shot from a slacker bow (for a swift and strong motion took away its virtue) did burn the flesh wherein it fastened with so great a violence, that nothing but dust could mitigate the fury of it, water increasing rather than diminishing that malignant flame.  
The Christian Religion was first here planted by Saint Thomas, but never had the happiness to be so universally embraced as in other places; always opposed and suppressed, either by Paganism in the time of the old Porsian Kings; or by Mahometanism, since the first conquest of this Country by the power of the Saracons. Some Christians yet there be amongst them either of the Armenian or Nestorian Sects, (as in all other parts of the Persian Empire) the specialties of whose Religion have been elsewhere spoke of. Here live also very many Jews, indulged the free exercise of their Religion: many of which are the Descendants of those Tribes which were transplanted hither by Salmanassar. But the Religion generally embraced and countenanced is that of Mahomet, according to the Sophian or Persian Sects, the Language of which Nation they do also speak, though they had a language of their own, different from that of the Parthian, Elamite or Persian, as appeareth Acts 2. v. 9 where they are reckoned as distinct.  
Mountains of chief note, 1. Orontes, 2. Coronus, 3. Chabor as, the boundary betwixt Media and Assyria, 4. Jasonium, 5. Lagoas; all of them (except Chaboras only) the disjointed branches of Mount Taurus: which is here more broken and divided than in any part of his course besides.  
Out of these flow their principal Rivers, 1. Amandus, 2. Strato, and 3. Carindas'; of greatest eminence in this Country, in the time of Ptolemy, but otherwise of no great account or observation. 4. Canac, the Divider of this Province from Armenia Major, but whether any of the former under this new name, I am not able to aff●●m. Add hereunto the great Lake, now called Argis (by the Persians, V●●sthlar) but by Strabo named Martiana Palus, situate in the confines of Assyria, Media, and Armenia; of the fish whereof, dried by the Sun and wind, and sold into divers other Conntreys, the people of these parts raise a great commodity.  
In former times it was divided into many Provinces, the principal of which 1. Tropatene, 2. Charome●●rene, 3. Daritis, 4 Marciane, 5. Amariace, and 6. Syro-Media: these and the rest reduced to two in the later reckonings, viz. Atropatia, and 2. Media Major.  
1. ATROPATIA is that part hereof which lieth betwixt Mount Taurus and the Caspian Sea. So called from that Atropatus, Governor of these parts in the time of Darius, the last persian Monarch, who so valiantly held out against the Macedonians. The Tropatene, (as I take it) of the ancient Writers. A patten, cold, and unhospitable Country, as before described: and for that cause allotted for the dwelling of many of the captive Israelites brought hither by Salmanassar when he conquered that Kingdom: their numbers being found so great in this Northern Region, that benjamin the Jew, reckoned no fewer than 50000 of them in one City only, which he calleth by the name of Madai. And that great numbers of them were transplanted hither, appeareth by that passage 2 Kings 17. 6. where it is said, that they were placed in Halan and Habor by the River of Gozan, and in the Cities of the Medes. Now Halah or Chalah seems almost probably to be that Region of Assyria which Ptolemy calleth Chalatone, in the North of that Country towards Media; Habor, or Chabor, to be that Mount Chaberus, which parteth this Country from Assyria, in which Mountainous tract there was in those times a City of the same name also. Betwixt which City and the banks of the Caspian Sea, I find in Ptolemy the City Gauzania in the 40th. degree and 40 minutes of Northern Latitude: in which there are apparent footsteps of the name of the River Gozin, upon whose banks it was most likely to be seated.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Hamadum, by Benjamin the Jew called Madai, replenished in his time with families of the captive Israelites. 2. Gaurazania, another dwelling of those Tribes, spoken of before. 3. Mandigarsis, of which nothing extant but the name. 4 Gelan, the Gela of the ancients, whom the Greeks call Cadusii. 5. Bochu, more towards the the Caspian Sea, hence called Mare de Bochu. 6. Eres, a place of great strength, but possessed by the Turks, and made the residence of some of their principal Officers: taken by Mustapha, General of the Turkish forces in the time of Amurath the 3d. and by him fortified as the Gate and entrance of this Country. 7. Sumachia, or Shamaki, betwixt Eres and Derbent, taken by Osman Bassa, at the same time, Anno 1578. and made the Residence of a Beglerbeg, Anno 1583. Conceived to be the Cyropolis of Ptolemy, by the Persina's called Cyreckbata, bearing the name of Cyrus the great Persian Monarch, by whom built or beautified. Remarkable at the present for a Pillar of flint-stones, inter-woven with the heads of many of the Persian nobility, most barbarously slain by one of the late Sultan's, and this Pillar here erected for a terror to others.  
2. MAJOR MEDIA, or MEDIA specially so called, is that part hereof which lieth on the South of the Mountain Taurus. Commended by the Ancients for one of the godliest Countries in all Asia: the fields (saith Ammianns) yielding abundance of Corn and Wine, for their fatness and fertility very rich, and no less pleasant for fresh Springs and clear veins of water: where one may see plenty of green Meadows, and in them a breed of generous horses, which they call Nisoei, mounted by as valiant and generous Riders, who with great jollity use to go unto the wars, and charge furiously upon the Enemy. The men commended by Polybius (〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 etc.) as well as the Country.  
Cities of most note in it, 1. Ecbatana, of as great antiquity as Babylon; for we find that Semiramis the wife of Ninus in a war made against the Medes, who had then rebelled, taking an affection to the place, caused watercourses to be made to it from the further side of the Mountain Orontes, digging a passage thorough the hills, with great charge and labour. Destroyed by the injury of time it was re-edified by Deioces the sixth King of the Medes, and afterwards much beautified and enlarged by Seleucus Nicanor, Successor unto Alexander in his Asian Conquests. For beauty and magnificence little inferior to Babylon or Ninive, before described. In compass 180 or 200 Furlongs, which make about 24 Italian miles. The walls thereof affirmed in the book of Judith to be 70. Cubits high, 50. Cubits broad, and the Towers upon the Gates 100 Cubits higher; all built of hewn and polished stone, each stone being six Cubits in length, and three in breadth. But this is to be understood only of the innermost wall, there being seven in all about it, each of them higher than the other, and each distinguished by the colour of their several Pinnacles; which gave unto the eye a most gallant Prospect. From which variety of colours it is thought to have the name of Agbatha, or Agbathana. In former times the ordinary residence of the Monarches of the Medes and Persians in the heats of the summer, as Susa (the chief City of Susiana) in the cold of winter. The Royal Palace being about a mile in compass, was built with all the cost and cuuning that a stately mansion did require: some of the beams thereof of silver, and the rest of Cedar; but those of Cedar strengthened with Plates of Gold. Said by josephus to be built by the Prophet Daniel. Which must be understood no otherwise in the truth of Story, than that he over-saw the Workmen, or contrived the Model, appointed to that office by Darius Medus, to whom the building of the same is ascribed by others. Neglected by the Kings of the Parthian race, it became a ruin. 2. Tauris, situate in or near the place of Echatana, out of whose rubbish it was built. Distanta 150 miles from the Caspian Sea, under the shadow of Orontes, now called Baronta, but opening Southwards towards a large and spacious Campagn: in compass about six miles, and beautified on the South-west within a large and pleasant garden, the work of Sultan Tamas, who resided here often; the buildings for the most part of brick, which flat Roofs (as generally in all the East) well peopled, as containing 200000 persons of all sorts and Sects. Of great trading, subdued by the Turks by whom it was thrice taken within very few years, viz. by Selimus the first, Anno 1514. by Solyman the Magnificent, Anno 1530. and by Osman Bassa, general of Amarath the 3d. Anno 1585. But this last finding it too chargeable to be always garrisoned, and nototherwise tenable but by force, pulled down the walls, and built a large and capacious Citadel: both Town and Citadel recovered by Emir-Hamze Mirza, Prince of Persia, and father of Sultan Sofy, Anno 1614 after it had been for a hundred years a continual prey unto the Turks. 3. Arsacia, so named by Ptolemy, and by the name conjectured to be built by some of the Parthian race. Ruined long since, but more beautifully revived than ever in the present. 4. Casbin, raised from the ruins of that Town. Situate in a fair and open place on the banks of a little River, which serveth 〈◊〉 for household uses, but not for traffic. Exceedingly enriched by removal of the Court from Tauris hither, in the time of Tamas, partly invited thereunto by the richness of the soil, and the commodiousness of the place, but chiefly that he might without danger attend the Turks, who began to encroach on his dominions. In compass about seven miles, beautified with a large marketplace, many stately Mosques, and the Sultan's Palace: this last adjoining to the first, convenient enough, but neither of great state nor beauty. 5. Rages, or Raga, mentioned in the book of Tobit, so called from Ragas the son of Phaleg, the founder of it: situate near the spacious Plain, so memorable for the great breed of horses spoken of before; and therefore in that book called the Plain of Rages. Repaired afterwards by the Greeks, it was named Europus, and so stands in Ptolonty. 6. Nassivan, supposed by some to be the Artasata, more probably the Nasman●, of the Ancient Writers: a place much aimed at by the Turks in their Persian wars. 7. Ardoville, on or near the banks of the great lake Argis, spoken of before: the birthplace and chief Seat of Guine and Aider the first Authors of the Sophian Sect, and the burrall place of Sultan Hysmael the first Persian Sultan of that line. 8. Sultania, about six day's journey from Taurus, environed with high Mountains, the tops of which continually covered with snow, may be seen far off: founded by Alyaptu, the 8th. King of the sixth or Tartarian Dynasty; and by him made the Royal Seat of the Persian Sultan's, whence it had the name. But ruinated by the Tartars, it retaineth nothing now of its former splendour, but the Mosques, or Temples (one of them, the fairest in the East) which the Tartars spared. 9 Tyroan, in the Territory of Sultania, situate in a large Plain, but not far from the Mountains; beautified with a fair Marketplace, many pleasant Gardens of private men, and one belonging to the King, environed with a wall of greater Circuit than the City. 10. Turcoman, in the middle way betwixt Tauris and Casbin. 11. Damoan, at the foot of Taurus, a Town of 200 houses, not here considerable but for the signification of the name; which is said to signify a Second Plantation: and being situate at the foot of so high a Mountain, occasioneth some of the Jews to think that the Ark rested not far off, as perhaps it did not. 12. Maran●, in the Extremity of the Country, but of lesser note.  
The first Inhabitants hereof were the posterity of Madai, as before was said; Ragan the son of Phaleg taking up those parts which lay next Assyria. Divided in long tract of time into several Tribes as the Codus●, Amariacle, Margasi, Sagartii, Debryces, Tapyri, and some others. Governed by King; immediatelly from the first Plantation: for we find that Pharnus King hereof was overthrown and slain by Ninus the grandsonne of Nimrod: After this made subject to the Assyrians, their Kings were only 〈◊〉 at the best but Homagers, perhaps no better than Provincial Governors under that great Monarnarchy. Of most esteem amongst them was that Arsaeus, who with an Army of 800000. men (if the number be not mistaken) encountered the Cadusii, by whom discomfited and slain. But the Cadusii so broken, that they were fain to put themselves under the power of the Persians, and so continued till the time of Arbaces, the last of these Provincials, and the first Monarch of the Medes. He living in the time of Sard●napalus, had the chance to see his Lord and Master in a woman's dress, spinning among his Concubines, & otherwise behaving himself in a brutish manner, which so moved him, that he resolved to be no longer subject to so vile a Monster. Communicating his thoughts unto Belochus Governor on Babylon, and well seen in Astrology, he was encouraged to proceed; and sped so well, that having made themselves Masters of Ninive, the Imperial City (though Sardanapalus for a time put them shrewdly to it) they divided betwixt them his Estates. To Belochus fell Assyria, and Babylonia, with the Provinces of the West of Tigris: to Arba●es, Media and the rest, which now make up the Kingdom of Persia. But being a mild Prince, and desirous by fair and gentle means to assure his Empire, he confirmed the Persian Satrapa's in their former Governments; reserving nothing to himself but a titular Sovereignty. Of whom and his Successors more, when we have taken in the rest of the Provinces.  

PERSIA.  
PERSIA is bounden on the East, with India; on the West, with Media, Assyria, and Chaldaea; on the North, with Tactarie; on the south, with the main Ocean. So called from Persis the predominant Province of it, that which gave law to all the rest: as that is said to do from Perseus, the son of Jupiter and Danae; affirmed by the Grecians to have conquered these Eastern Countries, and to have left his name to this. Of which thus Isidore, Persae populi à Perseo Rege sunt vocati, qui à Graecia in Asiam transiens ibi barbaras gemes gravi diuturnoq● bello perdomuit, et victor nomen subactae Genti imposuit. In the Scripture it is constantly called Elam, till the time of Daniel the Prophet, from Elam, the son of Sem, who was planted there. But after that the Medes and Persians had subdued Babylon, and transferred the supreme Monarchy to themselves, we find this people called by the name of Paras, (whence the name of Persian seems to come), the word Paras, (or Pharas) signifying as much as horsemen. Given therefore to this Nation, as it is supposed, from an Edict of Cyrus, who not only taught them the art of horsemanship, but set forth a law, that it should be a repoach to any man to go on foot, sive multum sive parum ●tin●ris esset conficiendum, whether the journey that he had to go were long or little. Called sometimes also Achaemenis, from Achaemenes the son of Perses, one of the first known Kings hereof; and by that name, Non tot Achaemeniis arm antur Susa Sagittis, they occur in the second of Propertius. Where by A haemeniae Sagittae, he means Persian Arrows.  
It is of very great extent, stretched out in length from the 82. degree of Longitude, to the 120. being 38 degrees in all; and in breadth from the 23. degree of Northern Latitude, to the 43. being 20 more; According unto which position, with reference to the heavenly bodies, we shall find it seated under the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth, Climates: the longest summers day in the Southern parts being thirteen hours and almost three quarters, and fifteen hours one quarter in the parts most Northwards.  
The Country not alike in all places, as it is impossible it should in so great a compass. But generally it is of a pure and wholesome air, the high hills shading it on the one side from heat of the Clime under which it lieth; and the warmth of the Sea, wherewith encompassed, cherishing a great part thereof. And so it is affirmed to be by Quintus Curtius. Regio non alia in tota Asia salubrior habetur; temperatum coe●um, hine perpetuum Jugum opacum et umbrosum, quod astus levat; illinc mare adjunctum, quod modico tepore terras fovet. Then for the Earth, it is by reason of the great heat of the Sun, very dry and sandy, in many parts destitute of water, few Rivers, and not many Lakes; by consequence neither well peopled, nor manured, for the greatness of it: men loving to inhabit (and I cannot blame them) where they may have the use of water. Which notwithstanding, it is furnished with all necessaries both for life and pleasure; one part affording that which the other wanteth, as shall be showed in the description of the several Provinces.  
The people anciently were trained up to the wars, but chiefly unto Archery from their very childhood. Indulged the liberty of having as many wives as they pleased, they never saw the children begotten of them, until five years old. At that age sent unto their Fathers, they were taught presently to handle the Bow and Arrows. Upon this ground we find the Bow of Elam mentioned by the Prophet J●remy chap. 4. and the Quiver of Elam by the Prophet Esaiah chap. 22. v. 6. as the Arms peculiar to that Nation, or most used amongst them. They were good horsemen also, and well skilled at their darts and slings, till wealth, and ease, and the pride of so great an Empire, made them wholly feminine: depriving them of those abilities both of mind and body, wherein they did excel most Nations in their harder times. In all their fortunes very obsequious, if not servile, to their Kings and Princes; in whose presence it was a crime to spit, but to deny obedience unto his commands an offence so heinous, as was not to be punished with less than the loss of life, and want of burial. In this observance of their Kings, followed, if not out-striped, by the modern Persian. A race of men, affirmed to be cunctorum hominum mitissimi, the most meek or patient of the world, especially compared with those of the same Religion, the Turks and Tartars. Not haters of learning, as the Turks; But studious, many of them in Physic, and Astrology; most of the better sort much delighted in Poetry, which they give their minds to. For the most part addicted to hospitality, magnificent in expense, Lordly in their compliments, fantastical in their Apparel, maintainers of Nobility, and desirous of peace. Such as apply themselves to Trades, and Mechanic arts, prove excellent in the making of Silks, and Cloth of Gold: those which betake themselves to war, proving very good Soldiers, as the Turks have found unto their cost, who by their long wars against them have got nothing but blows. The women said to be neat and cleanly, truly loving, gorgeous in Attire, and delightful in the sequestrations of pleasure.  
Their Religion at the first was Paganism, wherein directed principally by their Priests or Magis; men of a strict austere life, forbidding outward ornaments, and the use of gold; making the ground their bed, and the Herbs their food: their whole time spent in offering to the Gods the prayers and sacrifices of the people, as if they only might be heard; or else in divinations and foretelling of things to come, from whence the names of Magic and Magician are derived unto us. Studious in the knowledge of God and nature, and therefore called by Suidas, not only Philoso●●hi, Lovers of wisdom; but Philothei, the Lovers of God. Of such esteem that as Cicero telleth us, the Persian Kings were not admitted to the Throne, till they were trained up in the discipline of the Magis: and of such power and intimacy in the Royal Court, that one of those Magis, on the death of Cambyses, possessed himself of the Persian Monarchy. In a word, such as the Druids were to the Galls and Britan's, the Gymnosophists or brahmin's to the ancient Indians, and the Chaldaeans in the Empire of Babylon, the same, if not of greater sway in affairs of moment, were the Persian Magi. And Persians they must be if Magis; none but the Natives of that Country being to be admitted of that Society: though by a Metaphor applied to the Professors of the same Arts, though of other Countries; as those which came from the East to worship Christ are by Saint Matthew called Magi (Mat. 2. 1.) though they came from Arabia.  
The people than were Gentiles as to their Religion; and besides other Gods which the Gentiles worshipped, they were great Idolaters of the Fire; which they offered sacrifice unto in time of peace, and carried it with them as their Tutelar Deity in the time of war. At what time (especially if the King were there in person) it was born in the very front of their Army, attended on by their Priests, and followed by a train of boys all clothed in Scarlet, to the number of 365. according to the number of the days of the year. In this equipage, with a great deal of pomp besides, did Darius set forwards to fight with Alexander, at the battle of Issus in Cilicia. A superstition derived from them to the Medes and Assyrians, their next-neighbouring Nations, and not extinguished to this day in some parts of this Country; in which many of these Fire-worshippers are still remaining. But from a God, it grew in time to be a Gentlemanushar, and to attend on Kings and persons of greatest eminence: used to be born before the Emperors of Rome, as a point of State. Insomuch that Commodus though fallen out with his Sister Lncilla, permitted her notwithstanding to enjoy her Seat in the public Theatre, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and fire to be born before her, as in former times; as we are told by Hexodian.  
The Christian faith was first planted in the Provinces of the Persian Kingdom by Saint Thomas the Apostle: and held in all points answerable to those of the Catholic Church, till Sapores to despite the Emperor Heraclius, a right Orthodox Prince, commanded that all the Christians in his Dominions should conform themselves to the opinions and tendries of the Nestorian Sect, by that means universally spread over all these Provinces. With whom here live now intermingled some Armenian Christians, who with their Patriarch removed hither, when their own Country was made the seat of a long and miserable war betwixt the Persian and the Turk: but found not here so safe a dwelling as they did expect, 1200 of them being slain by Abas the late Persian Sultan, on a suspicion that they went about to reconcile themselves to the Pope of Rome (whom he held to be more inclinable to the Turk than to him,) in the year 1609. Which notwithstanding (so miserable a condition do these Christians live in) he suffered two Convents of Augustine and Carmelite Friars, to be settled at the same time even in Spawhawn itself; and many Jesuits to live peaceably up and down the Country, which serve for little else than to give intelligence. Here are also many Jews dispersed over all the Provinces of this Empire; allowed their Synagogues, and public places of assembly. But the Religion publicly authorized and countenanced, is that of Mahomet, imposed on this Country by the Saracens, when by them subdued: differing in some points from the Turks, especially about the true Successor of that falls Seducer (of which more anon) the cause of the long wars betwixt those nations.  
As for the Persian language it is very ancient, supposed to be as old as the Confusion at Babel: some words whereof, by Daniel and Ezra which lived in the Persian Court, have been made use of in some parts of the holy Scripture. A tongue which still hath left some remainders of it, in the language of the modern Persian (as those of judgement in this tongue have delivered to us): notwithstanding so long tract of time, and the conquest of this Country by the Greeks, Arabians, Turks, and Tartars. Not spoken only in this Country, nor limited within the Provinces of the Persian Empire, but used also in the Court and Camp of the Great Mongul, and some parts of Zagathay: and where not vulgar unto all, studied and understood by persons of more eminent sort, as the Latin by the Gentry of these western parts. Insomuch as he that hath this Language, may travel over all the East without an Interpreter.  
Rivers here are but few, as before was said, and those few not navigable; by consequence of little note or estimation. The principal of those that be, are 1. Eulaeus, the chief River of Susiava, emptying itself into Sinus Persicus: a River of so pure a stream, that the great Persian Kings would drink of no other water. 2. Ochus in Bactria, a River of the greater note amongst the Ancients, because it was navigable; opening with a fair Channel into the Caspian Sea, to which it hasteneth from Mount Taurus; and so doth also, 3. Oxus in Margiana, a fatal bound to these great neighbours. A River which the Persians have seldom passed to enlarge their dominions, but they received some notable overthrow at the hand of the Scythians: and when the Tartars made over it under the conduct of Saba the Cham of Zagathay, for the invasion of Persia, they were shamefully beat back again by Hysmael sophy. Nor is it less memorable in old stories for the famous passage of Alexander over it, in pursuit of the murderers of Darius. For having followed Bessus to the banks of this River, and not knowing how to pass over his men, there being neither ships upon it, nor timber near at hand to build them, he caused a great number of bags and bladders to be stuffed with straw, and so in 3 days transported his Army. So that I may truly say with his own Historian, Unum id Consilium quod necessit as subjecerat, iniit; necessity is the best Author of fine inventions. 4. Zioberis in Hyrcania, which rising out of the same mountainous tract (as the two last-mentioned) after a long course above ground, in the open light, hideth himself again for the space of 38 miles, and then breaketh out at a new fountain; and falleth into 5. Rhadaga, another chief River of those parts. And this Alexander the Great found to be true, by casting two Oxen into the River Zioberis, which by the current of the stream were carried under the ground, and brought to light where the River had its rise again. 6. Hidero, by what name known unto the Ancients I am not able to say, but of great note amongst modern Travellers for the fall thereof into the Sea: so steep and strong, that the people are said to sacrifice or banquet under the fall thereof, the stream so violently shooting over their heads, that it never wetteth them.  
Mountains of most note, are those which pass by the name of Tanrus, which having left Media on the West, passeth thorough the Northern Provinces of the Persian Empire, dividing Parthia from Hyrcania, and Paropamisus from Bactria, and Aria from Margiana. Known by the names of Coronus, the Scriphian hills, Paropamisus, Caucasus; whereof more as occasion serveth in their proper places.  
It is divided into the particular Provinces of 1. Susiana, 2. Persis, 3. Carmania, 4. Ormuz, 5. Gedrosia, 6. Drangiana, 7. Aria, 8. Parthia, 9 Arachosia, 10. Paropamisus, 11. Hyrcania, and 12. Margians. Which we will severally survey in the Chorography and story, till we have joined them altogether in the Persian Monarchy; and then pursue the history as conjunct and fashioned into the body of one Empire.   

1. SUSIANA.  
SUSIANA is bounded on the East, with Persis; on the West, with Babylonia or Chaldea; one the North, with Assyria; on the South, with a branch of the River Tigris, and some part of the Gulf of Persia.  
It was so called quasi Cusiana, or the Land of the Chusites, from Chus the eldest son of Ham, and the grandsonne of Noah; by whose son Havilah, it was first peopled; and therefore called in Scripture the land of Havilah, this being that land of Havilah, which the River Pison is said to encompass, in the Book of Genesis. The difference betwixt them is, that that land of Havilah lay on both sides of the River Euphrates (which the Country of Susiana doth not) and was the Eastern bound of the Ismaelites, Amalekites, and other Nations intermingled in those parts of Arabia. For whereas Saul is said in the first of Sam. chap. 15. ver. 7. to have smitten the Amalekites from Sur to Havilah, that is say from the Red Sea to the gulf of Persia: it must be understood of Havilah in the first extent; but neither of Havilah in the East Indies (so called from a son of Jocktan) or of that part of Havilah which lay on the East side of Euphrates, and is that Susiana, in which now we are: it being no where found that Saul was so great a Traveller as to see the Indies; or of such puissance as to force a passage thorough the Countries of the Chaldeans and Babylonians. But the name of Havilah being lost, that of Cusiana or Susiana did still remain; preserved to this day in that of Chusestan, by which now called.  
The Country memorable in the Scriptures for Gold, Bdellium, and the Onyx-stone; which doth abundantly set forth the richness and commodities of it: Bdellium being a Tree (for of the other two nothing need be said) about the bigness of an Olive, yielding a certain Gum very sweet to smell to, but bitter of taste; which in time hardeneth to a Pearl, as Eugubinus and Beroaldus have delivered to us.  
Divided anciently into many particular Regions, or at least known by several names in its several quarters. For where it bordered upon Tigris, it was called Melitene; Cabandone, where it touched upon Persis; where it confined on the Elymeans, it had the name of Cissia; and near the wall or Ditch called Fallum Pasini, it was called Characene. Watered besides Eulaeus, and Tigris before spoken of, with the Rivers Orontes, and Masaeus, with that branch of the River Tigris which Ptolemy called Basilius; Curtius, Pasi-Tigris; and the Scriptures, Pison.  
Chief Cities hereof, 1. Aracca, spoken of by Ptolemy, the same which the Scriptures call Erech, and one of the four which Nimrod built in the first beginning of his Empire, Gen. 11. Remembered by Tibullus for the fountains of Naphtah (of which the Medians made their oil spoken of before) a bituminous liquor, easily taking fire, but not easily quenched. Of which thus the Poet, Audet Areccaeis aut unda perhospita Campis.  
Where by unda perhospita, he meaneth that bituminous liquor called Napthta, issuing from the fields of Erech, as the learned Salmasius hath observed in his notes on Solinus. 2. Susa, the Shusan of the book of Hester, and Nehemiah, honoured with the residence of the Persian Monarches in winter, as Ecbatana in summer. Situate on the River Eulaeus, by the Prophet Daniel called Ulai. Built, as some say, by Memnon the son of Tithonus, slain by the Thessalonians in the Trojan wars: the walls whereof as Cassiodorus hath reported, cemented with Gold. But howsoever, it was doubtless a magnificent City, and of infinite wealth: Alexander finding in it 50000 Talents of gold uncoined, besides silver wedges, and Jewels of inestimable value. Memorable for the great feast here made by Ahasuerus of 180 day's continuance for his Lords and Princes: imitated by the Persian Sultan's to this very day; who with a Royal Feast of the like continuance do annually entertain their Nobles. Now nothing but a ruin, and perhaps not that. 3. Elymais, the chief City of the Elymaei, by Ptolemy (unless his Copies be corrupted) mistakingly called Eldimaei. Situate on the banks of Eulaeus also, near the border of Persis (the Nation of the Elamites or Elymaei taking part of both Provinces). Of great note anciently for a sumptuous Temple of Diant, sacrilegiously ransacked by Antiochus, of which see 1 Mac. 6. 2. and of such wealth, by reason of the concourse of Pilgrims thither, that Severus Sulpitius calleth it Oppidum opulentissimum, a most opulent City. 4. Sela, on the banks of Eulaeus also; reckoned by Ammianus amongst the most eminent of this Province: so named from Selah the son of Arphaxad, who first planted there. To whom the building of the City of Susa is ascribed by Eustathius in his Hexameron, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 are that Author's words; perhaps more truly than to Memnon: and unto whom the Original of the Cossaei, whom Prolomy placeth in this tract, is referred by Eusebius. 5. Tarsianu, another of the Cities mentioned by Ammianus (who takes notice only of the chiefest,) the same no doubt which Ptolemy calls Tariana, and joins next to Sela. 6. Agra, upon the banks of Tigris, not far from Erech. But there is little left of these, but what is to be found in the ancient Writers; now hardly visible in their Ruins; The Towns of most note now remaining, being 1. Jaaroone, inhabited for the most part by Jews, of which here are no sewer than a thousand families; supposed to be the descendants of those whom Salmanassar transplanted out of the Kingdom of Israel. 8. Saum. 9 Casa, of which little mémorable.  
The first Inhabitants hereof were the Chusites of the house of Havilah, the son of Chus; the Cossaei and the Susiani, descended from Sala the son of Arphaxad; and the Elymaei, the posterity of Elam the son of Sem. Betwixt the two last Nations long and frequent wars, till the Kings of Babylon or Assyria composed the differences, by making both subject to their Empire. After this, nothing memorable in the story of it, till the transplanting of the tem Tribes into the Regions of Assyria, and the Cities of Media. At which time, as many of the Israelites were removed hither; so many of this Nation were sent out (with others) to possess themselves of the void places of those Tribes. Called Cutheans by the Jews, because the most considerable number of them came from this Province, called in the Scriptures Cush, by Josephus Cutha, and by him reckoned for a Region of Persia, as indeed it was, the time wherein he lived considered: difference only in the Dialect or form of speech; that Country which the Hebrews called Chus, being named Cuth by the Chaldaeans; by the Persians Chuzestan: that name continuing to this day.   

2. PERSIS.  
PERSIS hath on the East, Carmania; on the West, Susiana; on the North, Media; and on the South, some part of the Persian Bay or Sinus Persicus, which took name from hence. The reason of the name we have had before; this being the predominant Province which in fine gave both name and law to the rest of this Empire. It had anciently been called Cephene, but now most commonly by the name of Ears, or Farsishan; more near to Pharas, the old name of it both in the Arabic and Hebrew.  
Such parts hereof as lie towards the North are cold and hilly, not apt to bear either fruit or com●, in any plenty. Some Emeralds they find there, but not very clear. Those parts which lie towards the Persian Gulf, of as bad a nature, though of different quality, sandy, and hot, and beareth little fruit but Dates, and few trees but Palm. But betwixt both there lieth a rich and pleasant Country, abounding with come, fruit, and cattle; great store of Roses, of Rose-water consequently, wherewith and with those skins which we call commonly by the name of Cordovans from another occasion, they use to furnish all the adjoining Provinces. And to make up the Character of a happy Country, to which nothing wanteth, it is well stored with Lakes and Rivers; the chief whereof are 1. Bagradas, which divideth this Province from Carmania. 2. Rhogomanes, by some called Araxes, now Bindimir, on whose banks stood the renowned Persepolis. 3. Orantes, dividing Persis from Susiana, where it falls into the Bay. 4. Brisoana, ending its course in the same Sea also.  
Mountains of note I find not any but those which part this Region from Susiana; not known by any special name (for aught I can find) but of sufficient note for the difficult passages out of one Country into the other, called Pylae Persidis, defended by Ariobarzanes, a Noble Persian, against Alexander the Great, who was here very handsomely beaten, and forced to save himself by a close retreat. And though Alexander was showed a By-path afterwards, whereby he fell on Ariobarzanes ere he was aware; yet he was taught by this hard lesson, that if those who kept the straits of Cilicia, and the banks of Tigris and Euphrates had made like resistance, he had not bought the Persian Monarchy in so cheap a Market.  
It was divided anciently into Paraticine, bordering on Media. 2. Mardiene, joining on the Gulf or Bay of Persia. 3. Misdia, lying betwixt both. Each of which, with the several nations intetmingled here as in other places, had their several Cities. The chief whereof 1. Ausinza, seated on the Bay betwixt the mouths of Bagradas and Brisoana. 2. Jonacapolis, on the same Bay also, near the influx of Rhogomanes, or Araxes. 3. Axima, more within the land, now called Lansilla. 4. Marrasium. 5. Obroatis, or Orebatis, as some Copies have it. 6. Pasarracha, in the Greek text of Ptolemy called Pasacgadt, and Pasagrada by Qu. Curtius. Memorable for the Sepulchre of Cyrus the first Persian Monarch. Which violated by a Soldier of Alexander's, in hope of finding some rich booty, he met with nothing but this modest inscription, Cyrus ego sum qui Persicum regnum consistui: quicunque ades mortalium, ne mihi tantillum telluris invideas, qua corpus meum obtegitur. The Sacrilegious Soldier though a Macedonian, put to death by Alexander. 7. Persepolis, the chief City of this Province, and of all the East, called therefore Regia Orientis, by Qu. Curtius; situate near the banks of the River Araxet, and built for the most part of Cypress wood, the walls of the houses being made of Marble, digged out of an adjoining Mountain. Affirmed by Diodorus Siculus, who at large describes it, to be the richest and goodliest City in all the world. And well we may believe him for the richness of it, Alexander finding here 120000 Talents, in ready money for his own share, after the Soldiers had made what spoil they listed of coin, Plate, Bullion, Images of Gold and Silver, and Jewels of unspeakable value. But the chief beauty of it was the Royal Palace, built on an hill, environed with a treble wall, the first of 16 Cubits height, the second of thirty, and third of sixty; all of them of black polished marble, with stately battlements, and in the Circuit of the whole Palace an hundred Turrets; which gave to the beholders far and near a most goodly Prospect. Nor was the inside of less beauty, than the outside of Majesty: the Roofs thereof shining with Ivory, silver, gold, and Amber; and the King's throne being wholly composed of Gold, and the richest Pearls. But rich and stately though it were, and one of the greatest Ornaments of the Eastern world; it was by Alexander in a drunked fit consumed with fire, at the instigation of Lais that infamous strumpet; as in revenge for so many Cities of the Greeks, which the Persians formerly had burnt in the Grecian wars. And though Alexander in his sober sense did repent him of it, and gave order that it should be re-edisied; yet did it never rise to its former height; the Conqueror dying shortly after, and that purpose with him. So ruined in the age of Qu. Curtius, (who lived in the time of Claudius Caesar), that he professeth vestigium ejus non inveniri nisi Araxes amnis ostendert, that no footsteps of it had been found, if not shown and pointed out by the River Araxes, on whose banks it stood. But by the fall thereof rose 8. Shyras, now the chief City of this Province, situate in a fair large plain hemmed about with mountains, under one of which it is plealantly seated; in compass about nine miles, well built and beautified with fair Gardens and magnificent Mosques: two of which larger than the rest, are made more eminent by the addition of two Spires or Sceeples covered with a painting of Gold and Azure; the fabrics for the most part of Mosaic work, as light almost by night as day, by reason of a thousand Lamps burning nightly in them. A City (as is said by a modern Traveller) which for good wine, pretty women, peasant fruits, and a gallon People, may hold comparison with the best in P●rsia. 9 Moyown, on the North-east of Shyras, delightfully situate amongst woods and fruitful pastures, and blessed not only with good wine, but wholesome waters; of which last, few parts of Persia have much cause to brag. 10. Bamaraw, on the South-west of Shyras towards Carmania, chiefly remarkable for the ruins of an ancient Castle, situate on the top of a losty mountain. 11. Goyaam, a Town of a thousand houses. 12. Berry, of no great bigness, but of most esteem by reason of a fair Mosque, a School for the Arabic tongue, and the Sepulchre of one of their false Prophets; of which the Persians, besides Mahomet and Mortis-Ali, do acknowledge many.  
The first Inhabitants here were of the posterity of Elam the son of Sem, and such who under his conduct were settled here; called from hence Elamites in the usual stile of holy Scriptures, by the Greeks and Latins, Elymaei: who spreading themselves into Susiana, and by degrees also into other Provinces, became so considerable, that the name of Elamite and Elam were of great renown: having a language to themselves distinct from that of the Medes and Parthians, as is appatent Act. 2. and comprehending under that appellation the adjoining Regions, as appears plainly in the eighth of the Prophet Damel, where Susa is said to be in the Province of Elam. How the name was changed into that of Persia, hath been shown before. Such as continued in this Province, divided into the Tribes of the Mesabatee, Rapsit, Hippophagis, Suzaei, Megores, and Stabaei, were at first under the command of their own Princes only: amongst which Cherdolaomer is of greatest fame, who having the conduct of some Adverture●rs of this nation, associated himself with Amramphel the leader of some Assyrian Troops: and by the name of the Kings of Elam and Assyria invaded Palestine, subdued the City of Sodom, took Lot prisoner, and in the end were overthrown by the forces of Abraham. Of no note after this expedition till the time of Perses the Father of Achaemenes, who being Provincial Governor of these Countries under Sardanapalus, joined with Arbaces and Belochus in the war against him: and by the victory, got for himself the dominion over those estates, which he had formerly ruled for the Assyrians; with reference to the Kings of Media as the Supreme Lords; whose Successors, till the time of Cyrus, take in order thus.  

The Kings of Persis.  
1. Perses, from whom perhaps the name of Persis may be more properly derived, than either from Perseus the son of Danae; or the son of that Perseus by Andromeda.  
2. Achaemenes, from whom the Persians had the name of Achaementi, and the succeeding Kings were called Achaemenides.  
3. Cambyses, in some places of Herodotus called also Darius.  
4. Cyrus, from whose second son named Teispeus, descended that Darius, the son of Hystaspis, one of the seven Persian Princes, who got the Kingdom on the expiration of the present line, and the extirpation of the Magis; of which more hereafter.  
5. Cambyses II. the son of Cyrus.  
6. Cyrus' TWO surnamed the Great, son of Cambyses and Mandane the daughter of Astyagos King of Media: who joining with Cyaxares, or Darius Medus, overthrew the Babylonian Empire; and translated thereby the Supreme power to the Medes and Persians. Of which more hereafter.    

CARMANIA.  
CARMANIA is bounded on the East, with Gedrosia, and some part of Aria; on the West, with part of Persis, and the Gulf of Persia, from hence called also by the name of Sinus Carmanicus; on the North, with Parthia; and on the South, with the main Indian Ocean. So called from the Carmani, a chief People of it: but the reason of that name I sinned not. It is now generally called Chyrman; those parts of it which lie next to Parthia, which Ptolemy calleth Carmania Deserta, being now named Mingia, and by some Dulcinde.  
The Country for the most part barren, and but ill inhabited. That part which Ptolemy calleth Carmania Deserta, being truly such; a wilderness or very Desert, having in it neither Town nor village, but some scattered houses, and those but ill provided of food and necessaries, full of unprofitable sands, destitute of water; and of a very hot and unhealthy air. And though the other part hereof which lieth towards the Ocean, hath a Sea coast of above 200 leagues in length, and many Rivers emptying themselves into it, yet are they not the richer by it: the shores being full of rocks, and the Rivers small; so that they neither have good Port nor safe coming to it. The best commodities here of (besides their Manufactures) are Dates, Myrrh, Arsenic, some few mines of silver, more of brass and iron, and good store of Alabaster. In which regard, the Inhabitants hereof were anciently called Ichihyophagi, because they lived wholly upon fish, the Country yielding little else for the life of man. Carmani sine veste ac frage, sine pecore ac sedibus, piscium cute se velant, carne vescuntur, praeter capita toto corpore hirsuti. The Carman's (saith Pomponius Mela) have neither fruits, nor raiment, nor house, not cattle; but cloth themselves with the skins, and feed themselves with the flesh of fishes; hairy not only in their heads, but over all their bodies also. Where by the way, Ammianus Marcellinus must be out in his informations, who telleth us of these very Carman's, that their Country though far less than that of Arabia Felix, and far more obscure, was as well replenished with Rivers, and for fertility of soil not inferior to it. But we must understand the one of the best parts of Carmania; the other of Deserta only.  
Amongst the Rivers which he reckoneth of greater name than the rest, he mentioneth 1. Saganis, 2. Sagareus, and 3. Hydriacus. Of which Saganis only is named by Prolomy, the other Rivers or the same under divers names, being 1. Dara, 2. Andanius, 3. Cathrappis, 4. Achindura, 5. Salarus (the Sagareus as I take it of Ammianus) 6. Caudriaces, 7. Zoromba, and 8. Samidace, most of them falling into the Gulf of Persia, few navigable, or of any use in the way of trading.  
Mountains of most note 1. that called Semiramis, from some exploit of that great Lady. 2. Strongeius, so named from the roundness of it; and 3. a continued ridge of hills, dividing this Country from Gedrosia.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Cantharis, 2. Agris, 3. Tisa, honoured by Ptolemy with the names of Cities. 4. Cyrza, and 5. Gocharta, two Port-Towas. 6. Alexandera, bearing the name of that great Conqueror, who here or hereabouts kept his Bacchanalia, whereof more anon. 7. Portospant, by Ammianus called Ortospana, and by him reckoned amongst the fairest and richest of all the Country. 8. Armuzt, (or Armuzium as Pliny calleth it,) on the shore of the Gulf, giving name to a Promoatory neer-adjoining, and to the Noble Isle of Ormus, of which more anon. 9 Guntroone, not longsince a poor village; but since the fall of Ormus (from which not above nine miles distant) grown a populous Town, consisting at the least of a thousand houses. 10. Jasques, at the opening of the Parsian Gulf into which it looketh, whence the Promontory of it called Carpella, is of late named Capodi Jasques. 11. Carmania, the Metropolis or mother City of the Province, in former times of good esteem; and now of passing good repute both for cloth of gold, and the making of the best Scymitars. A weapon of such value amongst the Mahometans, and so esteemed of by the Turks, that at the overthrow of their Navy at the battle of Corsu, Anno 1574. most of them who were taken Prisoners threw their Scymnars into the Sea, for fear the Christians should be masters of such excellent weapons. It is now called Chyrman, by the name of the Province, as in former times; with very little difference from the ancient name. 12. Lar, more within the land towards Persis, seated in a barren and inhospitable Country, full of huge heaps of sands, both loose and dangerous, moved and removed as the wind sitteth into plains and Mountains; without grass, water, herbs, or any other necessary for the use of Travellers, the City being served with rain-water only, entertained with great joy when it falleth, and kept in cisterns. The City notwithstanding large, and of good capacity, containing not long since to the namber of 5000 houses; of which the greatest part, in the year 1590. were thrown down by an earthquake: now most remarkable for a fair Marketplace of about 180 paces square; a goodly Mosque, adorned with Masaick work, and a strong Castle seated on the top of an hill, furnished with great plenty of Ordinance brought hither from Ormus. This once a Kingdom of itself, or the head City of a Kingdom, acknowledging no subjection to the Persian Sophies: till conquered to that Crown by Emangoli Chawn Duke of Shyras, who sent hence as much treasure as was said to load 700 Camels; and put to death the poor King with his whole posterity, Anno 1604. or thereabouts. 13. Tecoa, or Dea-chow, a Town of the jurisdiction of Lar, not far from which is a huge wall cut out of the solid rock by incredible labour, which served formerly both for the boundary and defence of that sandy Kingdom against the Persians.  
The ancient Inha bitants hereof, were the posterity of Sabta, the son of Chus, who wanting room on the coast of Arabta Felix, where they were first planted, passed over into Sophta (from them so named) an Island of the Persian Gulf, and afterwards into the main land of Carmania, where they built and gave name to the City of Sabis, which we find in Ptolemy. Divided in some tract of time into the several Nations of the Sazota, Ara, Charadra, Chelonophagi, Cabadinae, and Pasagarda.  
Neither the People nor the Country memorable in the way of story; but by Accident only: it being here that Alexander being returned out of India, kept his Baechanalia, in imitation of Bacchus, who first conquered that Nation. Night and day he was continually feasting with his friends, on a scaffold drawn with eight horses; his Companions following in their Chariots: some adorned with Purple and Silk; others with Flowers and Green Boughs; themselves wearing Garlands on their heads, and carrying their Carousing Cups in their hands. In this Army there was neither Helmet, Sword, Arrow, or Buckler seen: all their Armour, was Cups, Barrels, and Flagons; their Skirmishing Eating, Drinking, Laughing, and Singing. Attended they were by Minstrels, playing on their Flutes; by Women, dancing; Boys, shouting; all playing the drunken fools most naturally. Thus march they through the Country of Carmania, in as great dissoluteness, as if BACCHUS himself had indeed been there, and led the Mummery; and for seven whole days this sottishness continued. So that Curtius well observeth, Si quid victis saltem adversus comessantes animi fuisset, mille hercule viri, modo & sobrii, septem dierum crapula graves in suo triumpho capere potuerunt: a thousand Persians, sober and well provided, had their hearts been answerable to so good an opportunity, might have destroyed this drunken Army, and redeemed at once the honour of their Country, and their own liberty.   

4. ORMUS.  
ORMUS, not so much memorable for the greatness, as the wealth, the conveniency of the situation of it, is an Island situate in the entrance of the Persian Gulf: commanding not long since over some part of the Continent of Carmania, and some few Towns of Arabia Felix, and most of the Lands of the Bay. And therefore before we come to speak of the Isle itself, we must take a brief survey of the Sea or Bay called Sinus Persicus, according to our method in other places.  
SINUS PERSICUS, the Gulf or Bay of Persia, so famous, so full of Lands, and so much frequented (I use the words of Ammianus Marcellinus) beginneth at Harmozonta, (the name which Prolomy calls Armuza) a Cape or Promontory of Carmania, from which unto a Cape or foreland of Arabia Feltx, which the Inhabitants call Maces, the passage is so straight and narrow, that one may very easily see to the opposite shore. The Straight once passed, the Bay beginneth to open and enlarge itself, as far at the City of Teredon (now called Balsora) where Euphrates after many downfalls is lost in the Sea. The whole Gulf measured by the shores of Orbicular form, in compass 20000 Furlongs, (or 2500 Italian miles) in all the coasts and sides whereof the Villages and Towns stand exceeding thick, affording frequent passage to and fro for shipping. So far, and to this purpose he. To which description of his, so exact and punctual, our late Navigations have not added much; but the change of names: the whole Bay being now called Mare Elkariffe, and the entrances thereunto the Streits of Balsora; these last so called because they opened the way to the Town of Balsora the most noted Empory of those parts in the times foregoing.  
Chief Isles hereof, besides those on the Arabian shore, of which we have already spoken, are, 1. Taxiana, on the coast of Susiana. 2. Tabiana. 3. Sopththa, and 4. Alexandri, or the Isle of Alexander, on the shores of Persis. Of which that which is called Sopththa, seems to take name from Sabta the son of Chus, planted upon the opposite shore of Arabia Felix, and therein giving name to the City of Sapthta, which we find in Ptolemy: And finally joying to Carmania, there are the Lands called 5. Sagdana, the chief Town whereof was anciently named Miltus; and 6. Vorochtha, fituate at the very mouth of the Straits, now called ORMUS, by the name of the Town and Promontory of Armuza, in Carmania, near adjoining to it, and unto which it did in former times belong.  
This Island situate as is said at the mouth of the Gulf or Bay of Persia, is in compass about 20 miles, stony, and full of rocks, in a manner barren of all necessaries except salt, wherewith their very Rocks are covered, and of salt-stones many houses built. So destiture of all things fitting for the life of man, that the Inhabitants had all their victuals, even the very water which they drank, from some of the adjoying Countries. The air so hot in time of Summer, that the people rest themselves in caves, covered over with wood, where they stand or sit in water up to the chin: and have loopholes in the tops of their houses to let in the wind. Which notwithstanding, in regard of the situation, it was of late one of the richest Empories in all the world, the wealth of Persia and East-India being brought hither, and conveyed hence up by water to the River Euphrates, and so by boats or on camels backs, to Aleppo, Alexandretta, Tripoli; from whence dispessed into all the Countries on the Mediterranean, and to some beyond.  
The people hereof in their persons, habit, and Religion, participate somewhat of the Arabians, but most of the Persians. Mahometans for the most part of the Saphian Sect: the rest, but few in number, of the Christian faith, to which converted by the preachings of Father Gasper, a Portugal Jesuit; since the settling of that Nation there.  
The chief and only City was of the same name with the Island, founded some seven hundred years a go by one Mahomet Dranku, descended from the Kings of Saba, in Arabia Felix, who with many families of the Saboeans passed over the Straits into Carmania, and the Isles adjoining, and liking the situation of this Island, built this City in it, which he called Ormus, or Armuzium, according to the name of the Town and Promontory upon which it heath. The City seated at one end of the Isle; about 2 miles in compass: well built, and adorned with a fair market place, some Churches, and a well-fortisied Castle furnished with all necessaries to maintain a Siege. By reason of its wealth and resort of Merchants, grown to such esteem, that it gave occasion to this Distich, 
Si terrarum Orbis quaqua patet, annulus esset,  
Illius Ormusium gemmadecusque foret.  That is to say, 
Were all the World a Ring, this Isle alone  
Might of that Ring be thought to be the Stone.   
It was first under its own King, whose dominion extended also into some part of the Continent on either side, and over all the rest of the Lands within the Gulf. His Revenue of no great yearly value till the coming of the Portugoels hither, by whom it was discovered under the conduct of Albukerque, Anno 1506. Who having fortified some part of it for their own defence, and made it the Staple of their trade for the Indian Merchandise, so enriched the same, that the Revenue of those Kings (though Vassals and Tributaries to the Portugoels) amounted to 14000 Seriffs yearly. In this flourishing state it stood till the year 1622. when Abas the Sultan of Persia having received some affront at the hands of the Portugueze, or desuous to remove the trade of Ormuz to some Port of his own; gave order to Emangoly Chawn, the Duke of Shiras, to laysrege unto it, with an Army of 15000 men. Who seeing no hopes of mastering it by his land-forces only, furnished himself with the ships and Cannon of some English Merchants, to whom he promised many things which he never performed. For being once master of the City he destroyed it utterly, removing the Ordinance to Lar, the wealth thereof to his own treasury of Shiras, the materials of the houses to Gombroon spoken of before: the Portugueze, and Christian natives passing over unto Musbakat in Arabia Felix. Since which time though the English Captains that adventured in it, were disappointed of the spoil which they did expect: yet so much honour hath been given by the King of Persia to the English Nation, that their Agent who resideth at Gombroon takes custom of all strangers which do traffic thither.   

5. GEDROSIA.  
GEDROSIA is bounded on the West, with Carmania; on the East, with Cambaia or Guzarat a Province of India; on the South, with the main Indian Ocean; on the North, with Drangiana and Arachosia. The reason of the name I find not. Now by Mercator, called Gest; by Castaldus, Circan.  
The Country desolate and barren, like the worst part of Carmania, much destitute of fresh water, and covered over with loose sands, dangerous to the native and stranger both. Some rain they have, but not sufficient to allay the heat and drought which they suffer under, and yet by reason of that heat it assordeth in some places Nard and Myrrh, with some other spices. Some Brooks here are, or rather Torrents, which falling from the hills do somewhat qualify the indisposition of the soil, and make it habitable, The chief of which was called Arbius anciently; the chief Mountain Baetius.  
Towns of most name in it, 1. Rhagiana, honoured by Ptolemy with the name of a City; and 2. a Port or Harbour called Mulierum portus, or the Haven of women. 3. Arbis, upon the banks of the River Arbius, presented so us also by the name of a City. 4. Musarna, the chief of the Musarnae, a chief tribe of this Country. 5. Parsis, or rather Easis, as the Greek text hath it, the Metropolis of the whole Province in the time of Ptolemy. 6. Gest, the chief City at the present; but for nothing memorable.  
The old Inhabitants hereof were the Masarnae bordering on Arachosia, the Parsirae towards Carmania, the Rh●mae on the banks of Indus, and the Orbitae, or Arbituri; on the shores of the Ocean. The Country of no note in preceding times, till made famous by the follies of Alexander. Who finding by the hard bout which he had with Porus that there was little hopes of the Conquest of India, would needs make a fruitless voyage to see the Ocean. And having satisfied himself with the sight of that furious Element (as if his very seeing it had sufficiently subdued it to him), landed his Army on this coast. Where in his march for want of victuals, water, and other necessaries, he lost more men in the vast and uncomfortable Deserts of this Country, than in all the military services he had put them too: the Army which he carired with him into India, amounting 15000 Horse, and 120000 Foot, whereof hardly the fourth part came back to Babylon. So dearly did he pay for his indiscretion.   

6. DRANGIANA.  
DRANGIANA hath on the South, Gedrosia; on the North and West bounded with Aria; on the East, with Arachosia; So called from Drangius, now Ilment, the chief River of it: the modern name thereof being Sigestan, from Sige, the now principal City.  
The Country very hilly, and so closed with Mountains, that the River above named is scarce able to force its passage thorough them. Of no great beauty to invite or reward a Conqueror; yet with the rest, brought under the great Persian Monarches; the fortunes of which Crown they have always followed. So meanly planted that Ptolemy findeth in it but ten Towns of name: the chief whereof, 1. Ariaspe, mistook perhaps for Agriaspe; and if so, than the mother City of the Agriaspae, whom Curtius placeth in this Tract. 2. Propthasia, by some of the Ancients called Phradag, the Metropolis of this poor Province; much boasted of by the old Inhabitants hereof who had seen no better, (as Countrey-villagers use to brag of the next market-Town) and said by Ammianus to be rich, and of high renown, the quality of the place consideted. Still of some note amongst the Natives, by whom called Sistan. 3. Arivada. 4. Pharazana, of which nothing memorable. 5. Sige, now of most credit in this Country, from hence called Sigestan. 6. Timocant. 7. Mulebet, the chief seat of the Kingdom of Aladine, or Aleadine, who had here a Fooles-Paradise of his own, of which more anon.  
The old Inhabitants hereof were the Bairii, and the Darandae, from which last, the greatest of the two, the Country might perhaps be called originally Darandiana, abbreviated to Drandiana, and at last corrupted easily into Drangiana. But I offer this only as conjectural. They were called also by some Writers by the name of Arabians, and that as Ammianus thinks, because they descended from that people: but I think rather from a branch of the River Arabius, which parteth this Country from Gedrosia. For I conceive the Arabians were too wise to forsake their own Country, and go so far, to get so little by the bargain. Together with the rest of the Persian Provinces, subdued by Alexander; who being in this Country, happened on the discovery of the treason intended against him by Philotas, the son of Parmenio, the most renowned of all his Captains. After this little memorable till these later days, when it grew famous by means of Aladine a seditious Persian, Lord of the valley of Mulebet, spoken of before, who there made a terestrial Paradise, which he promised to all his Partisans: but the company growing too great for the safety of the Kingdom, they were quickly dispersed: and Alading, with his Fools-Paradise, both taken away together, Anno 1262. Some attribute this fiction of Paradise to Aladeules, the Mountain King of Taurus, vanquished by Selim the first. The whole story is this, out of Palm Venstus. Aladine inhabited a valley in this Country, the entrance into which he fortified with a strong Castle called Tigade. Hither he brought all the lusty youths and beautiful maidens of the adjoining Provinces. The women were confined to their chambers, the men to prison; where having endured much sorrow, they were severally cast into dead sleeps, and conveyed to the women: by whom they were entertained with all the pleasures, youth and lust could desire, or a sensual mind affect. Having enjoyed this happiness a whole day, they were in a like sleep conveyed to their irons. Then would Alidine inform them how they had been in Paradise, and that he could seat them there eternally, if they durst hazard themselves in his quarrels. This when they had sworn to do, they were destinated to the massacre of such Princes as were like to prove his bad neighbours; and they accordingly did execution. But neither he nor Aladeules were the first who trained up their followers in the Arts of murder. One there was before either of them, whom the Writers of those ●mes call the Old man of the Mountains, inhabiting the mountainous parts of Tyre and Sidon; and from thence sending his Disciples in the like Temptations, to make away the Western Princes whom he stood in sear of, during the course of the Holy wars. For out of his School came those Wretches, who murdered the Count of Tripoli, being in the Church at his Devotions; and desperately slew Conrade Marquis of Montferrat, walking openly in the marketplace at Tyre; and with like carelesseness of their own lives dangerously wounded Prince Edward (after King of England) sitting in his Tent. These the Italians call Assassins, (whence the word to Assassinate) intimating thereby a desperate Cutthroat, but the reason of that name is not yet agreed on: mistakingly by some Latin Writers of the darker times called Arsacidae, and their commander Rex Arsacidarum, as if descended from Arsaces, the founder of the Arsacidan race of the Kings of Persia.   

7. ARACHOSIA.  
ARACHOSIA hath on the West, Drangiana; on the East, the great River Indus; on the South, Gedrosia; and Paropomisus on the North. So called from Arachosia the chief City of it; but now best known by the name of Cabul, the name of the chief City at this present.  
Of the Country I find little spoken, but that it is watered with a branch of the River Indus, or rather with some nameless River which falleth into it. By the overflowings whereof is made a Lake which Ammianus calleth Arachotoscrene, by Ptolemy called Arachotos, after the name of Arachotos' the chief Town of it, near to which it is.  
Towns here were once thirteen, whose names and situation we find in Ptolemy, but little or nothing of them in other Writers. The principal, 1 Arochotos, on the Lake so named, said to be built by Semiramis in her march towards India, and by her to have been named Cephene. 2. Alexandria, or (for distinctions sake) Alexandria Arachosiae, the work of Alexander the Great, in his like march against the Indians: built at the foot of one of the branches of Mount Taurus shooting towards the South, and peopled with a Colony of 7000 old Macedonian Soldiers, forespent with age, and with the travel of the wars, whom he left there to inhabit it: his Army being here recruited with the forces which had served under Parmenio, consisting of 12000 Grecians and Macedonians. It is now called Cabul, accounted the chief City of it, in that capacity gives the name of Cabul unto all the Province. 3. Arbaca, seeming by the name to be the work of one Arbaces, but whether of Arbaces the great King of the Medes, I am not able to say. 4. Choaspa, near some River of that name, as I conjecture; there being besides Choaspes the chief River of Media, another of that name also in India; and probably another hereabouts to give name to this Town. 5. Phoclis, 6. Sigara, 7. Dammana, of which I find nothing but the names. 8. Sin, now a Town of name amongst them, but not much observable.  
The old Inhabitants hereof were the Pargyetae, called also Arimaspae, and Euergetae, a powerful Nation of themselves, brought under the command of Alexander by means of Amenides, sometimes the Secretary of Darius, whom he made their Governor. And besides them the Syeri, Rophitae, and the Eoritae, which three made up the main body of the Arachosians, committed by Alexander to the government and command of Menon. Following after this the fortunes of the Persian Empire, they changed their Masters as that did, till the coming in of the Tartars. Since that time governed for the most part by a King of their own, especially since the dividing of the Kingdom of Persia amongst Tamerlanes children: some of which held it as a distinct estate, by the names of the Kings of Cabul; till growing great by the conquest of some parts of India, they took unto themselves the name of the Great Mongul; Now Lords not only of this Country, but of the greatest part of India on this side of Ganges: of whom we shall speak more when we are in India, that being the chief Seat of their Power and Empire.   

8. PARAPOMISUS.  
PAROPAMISUS is bounded on the South, with Arachosia; on the North, with Bactria, from which parted by the main body of Mount Taurus, which is here called Paropamisus, by the name of the Country: on the East, with some part of India; on the West, with Aria. So called quasi Paro●anesus, from the resemblance which it hath to an Island, begirt on all sides almost with Rivers: in which respect by Ptolemy called Paropanisus, and not Paropamisus; by which last name the Latins for the most part call it, some of them Paropamissus, with a double ss. But that name being lost long since, it is now by some called Dache, by others Candahor, but most commonly Sublestar.  
The Country mountainous and hilly, here and there intermixed with Valleys: the Mountains of great height, and exceeding barren; the Valleys indifferent fruitful, but so over-shadowed with those hills, that the clearest day in some places seems but like a twilight. The people as obscure as their Country, scarce known to any of their neighbours in the time of Alexander; the barbarous nations nearest to them esteeming them unworthy of their acquaintance. Agreste hominum genus, & inter Barbaros maxime inconditum, as it is in Curtius.  
Rivers of most note herein, 1. Oxus, (of which before) which rising out of Mount Caucasus, passeth Northwards, and afterwards divideth Bactria from Sogdiana. 2. Dargamanis, 3. Coacus, both owing their original to some of the branches of Mount Taurus. Which chain of hills, beginning hereabouts to draw towards their end are towards the West called Paroetes, where they give being to the River Dargamanis, before named; more Eastward they have the name of Parapomisus; and Caucasus they are properly called where they are thwarted by Imaus, in the very point, as it were, where Scythia, India, and the Persian territories do encounter Each other. The hills in that place mounted to so great an height, that from the tops thereof the Stars appear much greater than in other places: the rising and setting of which are from hence easily discerned: made memorable by the fable of Promotheus, who is said to have been bound here by command of Jupiter; on which, vistum Promethea fuisse antiquit as tradit, saith the Historian. Prometheus is indeed by the Poets feigned to have stolen fire from heaven, and to have made a man of clay: for which presumptuous fact, Jupiter bound him on the hill Caucasus; where a vulture continually fed on his his Liver. But according either to the truth of Story, or their guess at least, who make some Story the ground of Every Fable; Prometheus being a very wise man, instructed the dead and clayie carcases of others with wisdom; and that being very desirous to learn the nature of the stars, (which is the fire he stole from heaven) he made the highest part of Mount Caucasus his study, where the inward care he had to accomplish his desire, might justly have been compared to a Vulture gnawing on his entrails; and of this opinion is Saint Augustine. But far more memorable is it made for being the resting place of the Ark of Noah, whereof we have already spoken in our General Preface.  
Places of most consideration in it, 1. Naulibis, and 2. Ortospana, both named by Ptolemy, and reckoned by Amminus for the most famous of this Country. But in what their same consisted I cannot find. 3. Parsiana, 4. Gazaca, 5. Doroacana, 6. Bagarda; all named by Ptolemy; but not else observable. 7. Candihor, now the Metropolis of the Country, a Town of great trade, by reason of the situation of it on the borders of India; in that respect giving to the whole Country the nameof Candahor. By which name reckoned for a Kingdom, and used amongst the many titles in the Style Imperiall. Nothing considerable of it in the course of Story, but that being once brought under by the Persian Monarches, it followed the fortune of the rest till these latter times; when the Persians being overlaid by the Tertars, it became subject to some Kings of the race of TamerLane, reigning in this Province, till brought under by the Kings of Cabul, of the same extraction. Finding those King's intent on the conquest of India, they freed themselves from all subjection to that Crown, and had Kings of their own, till the year 1600. or thereabouts, when the last King, unable to defend himself against Abduxa King of the Usbeques (a Tartarian people, but subject in some sort to the Crown of Persia) surrendered his Kingdom to Echebar the Great Mongul (descended from the old Kings of Cabul) whose dominions border close upon it. Recovered to the Persian Crown by Mirza, the son of Abas, and father of Soffie the now Sultan; a Prince of much gallantry, but of more misfortunes: the Persian Sophies, since that conquest, using the title of Kings of Candahor, in the Regal stile.   

9 ARIA.  
ARIA is bounded on the East, with Paropamisus; on the West, with Parthia; on the North, with Margiana; and on the South, with Drangiana, from which last parted by the mountain Bagoas. A name in old times given to the Province of Media, especially by the Grecians, till changed (as they say) into Media, on the coming thither of Medea. For so Pansanias, amongst others, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i.e. coming into the Country then called Aria, she caused it after her own name to be called Media. But the name of Aria was not lost, though it were removed; remaining proper to this Country till these later ages; now changed with little alteration into that of Eri.  
The Country much subject unto heats, environed with deserts, heaths, and forests; yet near the mountains which defend them from the heat of the Sun, they have some fruitful Champagnas; bearing very good fruits, and amongst others, a strong wine, and of long continuance; keeping both taste and colour above 80 years. They have also here a Drug somewhat like to Myrrh, and a kind of Saphyr, but not right.  
Rivers of note I meet with none but that which Ptolemy calleth Arias, by the name of the Province, making a Lake of the same name. The fountain of which River he maketh to be in Paroumisus, and the fall thereof in the said Like: the waters of it first increased by a nameless Stream falling from the Mountains called Seriphi, being that part of Taurus which divideth this Country from Margiana.  
Anciently it was populous and well-inhabited, containing above 30 Towns of name and note. Those of most consequence, 1. Aria, on the banks of the River Arias, the seat of the Aria, whom Pliny speaketh of in this Tract: but whether they received this name from the Province, or bestowed their own name upon it, I determine not. 2. Bataxa, 3. Sotera, 4. Orbitana, 5. Sarmagana, 6. Artacanda, by Strabo called Artacana, 7. Nisibis, mentioned both by Ptolemy and Ammianus, 8. Alexandria, bearing the name of the Great Conqueror, by whom planted and made a Colony of his Macedonians, for the better awing of the Country, which by some former rebellions had been troublesome to him. But these, and most of those remembered by Ptolemy, being grown out of knowledge, there remains now of special note, 9 Heri, or Eri, seated not far from the place of the ancient Aria, but much superior to it in strength and greatness. Said by Maginus to be in compass thirteen miles, and so plentifully stored with Roses, that the inhabitants of the Country call it the City of Roses. Naturally of a strong situation, compassed about with a very good wall, and watered with deep Channels, conveyed unto it by Tamerlanc, that most puissant Tartar, by whom either founded or repaired. 10. Sasuar, a place of good importance, and the second in esteem next to Herit itself.  
The old Inhabtants were the Masdarami, Nisar, Astaren, the Cassirota, Obares, Drachamae, Borgi, Paranti, etc. united altogether in the name of Arians, by that name subject to the Persians, and subdued by Alexander. Against whom when they had rebelled, and were worsted by him, they were compelled to betake themselves to the strength of a Cave, seated upon the top of an inaccessible Rock, and with small force easily defended. But to Alexander nothing was impossible For piling up a great mass of timber, equal unto the mouth of the Cave, when the wind served opportunely, he put fire unto it, and by that means so filled the Cave with fire and smoke, that some of them were stifled, some half-burnt, and the rest forced to yield to the Victor's mercy. Nor was this the only action of note during that Rebellion, though it was the greatest. The common Soldier also had his honour in it. Sarlibarzanes, a Persian, whom Alexander had trusted with the command of this Province, had drawn them unto this Revolt, and became their head. Who to express his courage in the sight of the Arians, challenged the proudest He of the Macedonians to a single combat. The challenge cheerfully accepted by one Eriguis, one of the most aged in the Army: and saying aloud, ostendam quales milites Alexander habet, he valiantly charged upon the Rebel; and at the second venew slew him. The Arians after this trial of their disabilities, remained in quiet, taking the same fortunes as the rest of the Persians did, in their change of Masters. Of late, by Mahomet Codubanda, it was aliened for a time from the Crown of Persia, and given to Sultan Abas, his second son, who took unto himself in his Father's life-time the title of the King of Heri. But coming to the Crown by the murder of his elder Brother, and the death of his Father, he united Heri once again to the Regal Diadem, but kept as a distinct title in the Royal stile.   

10. PARTHIA.  
PARTHIA is bounded on the East, with Aria; on the West, with Media; on the North, with Hyrcania; and on the South, with that part of Carmania, which by Ptolemy and others of the Ancients was called Deserta. The reason of the name we shall see anon. But that name being laid aside it is now called Arach.  
The Country walled as it were round with Mountains, and in most parts overgrown with woods; by which defended from those heats to which otherwise it would be subject, it produceth many things of necessary use for the life of the people; but nothing for riot and excess. In other places where the shade of the wood is wanting, the whole Country is in a manner but a sandy Desert, dangerous to Travellers, and impassable even with the help of Guides, the sands continually driven from one place to another, taking away all tracts of a beaten way. For which cause there be certain Castles at each three miles' end, built at the King's charge, as well for the direction as the reception of Passengers; and Cawseys of many miles in length, in some other places, for their better travelling; the sands on each side of them so loose and light, that if a man should fall aside, he were lost remediless.  
The people anciently were very courageous and stout, as commonly they are in all barren Countries, and were withal of a Scythian extract and original. Exceeding spare of diet, and good reason for it, the Country not affording any superfluities; but otherwise much given to pleasures, allowing themselves plurality of wives and Concubines. Good horsemen, and to that so used, that they consulted of all business both private and public, when they were on horseback. Such lovers of the wars, that they accounted no man happy after his decease but who died in battle; esteeming of all others but as fools or Cowards. Their Soldiers for the most part Slaves, whom they trained up unto their weapons, and to manage horses: insomuch as of 50000 horse which the Parthian King had in the field against Marcus Antonius, there were not above 800. Freemen. But their greatest same consisted in the handling of their Bow and Arrows, esteemed the best Archers in the world, and not underservedly; having the Art of shooting backwards, and making their Retreat or flight more terrible, than their charge or onset. Whence that of Senoca.  
Terga conversi metuenda Parthi.  
The Parthians flight  
Doth most affright.  
Which, with the manner of their fight, more copiously described by Lucan thus.  
Pugna levis, bellumque fugax, turmaeque fugaces,  
Et melior cessisse loco quam pellere miles.  
Illita terra dolis, nec Martem cominus unquam  
Ausa pati virtus, sed longe tendere nervos.  
Which I find thus Englished to my hand.  
Light skirmish, fleeing war, and scattered bands,  
And better Soldiers when they run away,  
Than to cut off an enemy that stands.  
Their crafty Gall-thraps on the ground they lay,  
Nor dares their courage come to downright blows,  
But fight best furthest off, most trusting to their bows.  
From hence it was that M. Crassus, in his expedition against them, being told by an ginger, that his enterprise would prove unprosperous, by reason of some ill aspect which he had found in Scorpio; Tush (said he) I fear not Scorpio, but Sagittarius. And to these warlike exercises of horse and Archery, the temper of the Air and Soil, gave no small advantages, the dry Air seasoning their Bowstrings, and their large fields affording them sufficient room to train their horses. Coelum enim quod siccum est, nervos intentos facti; Regio tota plana est, et ob eam rem equis accomodata, as it is in Dion. But this is to be understood not of Parthia only, but the whole Country of Persia; subject at that time to the power of the Parthian Kings. Next to these Parthians, the English have been looked on formerly, as the ablest Bowmen, having gotten by their bow and arrows as many notable victories over the French, as the Partians ever did obtain upon the Romans. But at this time Archery both here, and elsewhere, is quite laid aside, the Gun silencing all offensive weapons: how justly I determine not. The point hath been long since debated betwixt: Sir John Smith, and Sir Roger Williams; many great wits appeared upon either side; and the sum of their several Arguments drawn up together by Sir Clement Edmunds in his judicious observations upon Casirs' Commentaries, to which the Reader may repair for his satisfaction. All I shall say is only this, that victories as great as any in those elder days have been obtained with far less bloodshed, since the Gun came up, than in any of the times before it.  
The Religion of this People hath suffered under the same changes with the rest of Persia, but they have a language of their own, mixed of Mede and Scythian. For which besides the testimony of humane Authors, we have the Authority of Scriptures; where the Parthians, Elamites, and Medes, are named as Nations of a several language, or a different Dialect at the least, Acts 2.  
Rivers of note I find not any, nor any Mountains proper and peculiar to them: Coronus, part of the great Mountain Taurus, lying in common betwixt them and Hyrcania; as Masdoranus doth betwixt them and Aria, and the hills called Parchoatras, betwixt them and the Deserts of Carmania. So that for want of such known Landmarks, the finding out of their ancient Cities would be very difficult, if any learned Antiquary should undertake it.  
The Country anciently more populous, the towns and villages thicker set, than they be at the present: many Cities, and 2000 villages having, been overthrown with Earthquakes. In Ptolemy we find the names of 25. of their Cities distributed into the 4 Provinces or Tetrarchies of Camisene towards Hyrcania; Par●hiens, bordering on Media; Paracanticene, confining on Aria; Tabiene, neighbouring Carmanta. The principal of which, and of those that are now in being, 1. Genonia. 2. Charax. 3. Are 〈◊〉. 4. Apama, which by the name seems to have been of the foundation of Seleucus. 5. Dardamana. 6. Syndaga. 7. Pasacarta. 8. Hecatompyle, the Royal City, so called from the number of an hundred Gates in the walls thereof, by which we may conjecture at the ancient greatness: the Parthians, which had seen no greater, calling it by the glorious name of Half the world. 9 Hispaan, commonly called Spahan, or Spawhawn, raised out of the ruins of Hecatompyle, and as that was, the Regal City for these parts. In compass about nine miles, of figure round, and seated in the midst of a large and capacious Plain, beautified with many pleasant Gardens, goodly Baths, and handsome Mosques. But the greatest glory of it lieth in the marketplace or Midan, quadrangular in form, but the sides unequal; cloistered about, and well stored with merchandise of all sorts, but drugs especially: the Court or Quadrangle, serving for horseraces, and other warlike exercises which are done on horseback. On the westside a magnificent Mosque, built of white Marble five yards high, and the rest above that of brick; curiously interwoven with Araback Poesies. In the midst a fait Conduit, wherewith they purify themselves when they go to their prayers. On another side the Royal Palace, wrought in the Front with Antique works; the Floors on the inside covered with rich Persian Carpets; and the Roofs chargeably embossed with Gold and Azure, 10. Jelphea, on the other side of the River on which Spawhawn is seated, as the Burgh of Southwark is to London; wholly inhabited (at this time) by Armenian Christians, from hence called Jelphelines, who live here in great freedom, both for person, and conscience, but that their spoll-money is taxed at an higher rate. 11. Groom, a right pleasant and healthy City, well built, of large streets, and seated on the banks of a small but delightful River, issuing out of the Coronian Mountains, near to which it standeth. Consisting at the present of 2000 Families, but anciently, as may be gathered from some ruins, of far greater compass. Much honoured by the Persians for the Sepulchre of Fatima, the daughter of Mahomer, from whom the Sophian Sect and Princes do derive their Pedigree. 12. C●him, a rich and pleasant City, about 60 miles from Spawhawn, well-built, and peopled by a number of 〈◊〉 who for the making of Silks, Satins, and cloth of Gold, are in great esteem. Beautified amongst other things with a stately and magnificent Caravanus-Raw, built by Sultan Abas, for the reception of Strangers, whether Merchants or other Travellers, but fit to entertian any Prince of Asia. The City of no great age, the work either of Vssan-Cassanes, the Armenian, who got the Crown of Persia, in the year 1470. or at the highest of Cassam, the son of Axan and Grandsonne of Tangrolipix, the first Turk here reigning; from one of which it had this name. 13. Tawgehawt, where the Persian Kings have a house of pleasure, of no great receipt, but for the cost and ofnaments of it, and the delectableness of the Gardens adjoining to it, not yielding to any in this large Empire: and for Grots, Echoes, Labyrinths, and the other excellencies of Art, perhaps not followed in the world, especially considering that it standeth in the middle of a sandy Desert.  
The Parthians were originally a Scythian Nation, banished their own Country, and glad to plant themselves in this barren Region, calling themselves by the name of Parthians, which in their language signifieth as much as Exiles. A People so obscure and poor, either not knowing or not caring for the use of money, that none of Alexander's great Captains would vouchasafe to be their Governor; but let it lie as an Appendix of Media, to the Kings whereof it had originally been subject, till one Philip, a man of small regard, took the place upon him. Falling at last, with the rest of Alexander's Asian purchases, into the hands of Seleucus, it was governed by the Lieutenants of the Syrian Kings, till the time of Seleucus Calinicus, the fourth of that house. During whose reign, Arsaces' a noble Parthian, provoked by some indignities, slew the Governor, and took the estate upon himself, persuading all the rest of the Provinces to do the like: and thrived so well in his design, that he not only gained the Kingdom of Parthia, but united to it all the Provinces lying on the East of Euphrates. Of whom and his Successors more, in the story of Persia. After this nothing singular which concerns this Province, but that as this Arsaces did recover the Persian liberty from the power of the Greeks; so Gempsas, one of the Sultan's of this Province also, redeemed (though but for a little time) this Parthia and the parts adjoining, from the yoke of the Tartars; as shall be shown in prosecution of the Persian History.   

11. HYRCANIA.  
HYRCANIA is bounded on the South with Parthia; on the North, with the Hyrcanian or Caspian Sea; on the East, with Margiana; and on the West, with Atropatia, or Atropatene (as Ammianns calleth it) the North part of Media. Divided from Parthia by the interposition of Coronus, part of the main body of mount Taurus. The way thorough which, said by the Persians to be cut out at one blow by the Scymitar of Mortis Haly, their second Mahomet, as not above forty yards in breadth, in the broadest parts of it, the hills on both sides to wring to the very clouds. With small strength easily defended against mighty Armies, and possibly may be the same which the Ancients called Portae Caspiae, before described.  
It took the name of Hyrcania, from Hyrcana, a large and spacious forest betwixt it and Scythia; sometimes called Caspia also, from the Caspii, a chief People of it; of whom it is reported, that when their Parents came to the age of 70 years, they used to shut them up, and starve them, as being then no longer useful to the Commonwealth. But both those names growing out of use, it is by Mercator called Diargument; by some late Travels Mezendram; by some others Corcam.  
Those parts hereof which lie towards the South are said to yield abundance of wheat, wines, figs, and fruit: those towards the Caspian Sea, as plentiful of Grass and pasture. But betwixt both, nothing in a manner but continual forests, and those so intricate and thick, that it is a matter of no small difficulty to find passage thorough them. Full, as most other Forests are in those Eastern parts, of Panthers, Leopards, Lions, Tigers: these last of such an horrible fierceness, that it grew into a common Proverb used of cruel men, that they had sucked an Hyrcanian Tiger; Hyrcanaeg, admorunt ubera Tigers, as it is in Virgil.  
Principal Rivers of this Country, 1. Zioberis, spoken of before. 2. Maxera, or Mazeras, mentioned by Pliny, Ptolemy, and Ammianus; and 3. Secanda; all falling into the Caspian or Hyrcanian Sea. A Sea which had the names of Caspian, and Hyrcanian, from the Caspit and Hyrcani, bordering text unto it; now from the Town of Bochu, in Atropatia, called Mare di Bochu. Fashioned in an Oval form, the length thereof from North to South 700 miles, and 600 miles from East to West. Stormy, and troublesome, by reason of those many great Rivers which fall into it from all the Provinces adjoining; which notwithstanding it hath no visible commerce with the Ocean; nor doth it at any time overflow its banks: finding some passage under ground to discharge itself of those vast streams of water which are poured into it. Well traded by the Moscovite Merchants, who having the command of the River Volge (which with 70 mouths doth open into this Sea) sail over it, and land at Farabant, or some other of the Port-Towns, where they trade for silks. Some Lands here are in it, but not many, or of any great fame but only that they served the Nations which lay near it for a place of retreat, in time of the Tartarian tempest under Tamerlane; as the Isles of Venice did to the Italians at the coming of Attila.  
Places of most consideration, 1. Hyrcania, once the Metropolis of the Province, and so called by Ptolemy; still extant, but of less esteem, and still called Hyrcan. 2. Tambrace, in old times of the greatest strength, and most defensible, but taken by Antiochus Magnus in the war against Arsaces' the Parthian for the recovery of those Countries then revolted from him. 3. Adrapsa, 4. Masaca, 5. Anarosa; of which we find the names, amongst others, in the ancient Writers. 6. Asharaffe, two miles from the Sea, in a spacious Plain, containing about 2000 houses; and now of most reputation of all this Province, by the long Residence therein of Abas, the late Persian Sultan; who built there a magnficent Palace, & another two miles off at a place called Abassebaut. The furniture whereof, besides costly Carpets, in Plate and Jewels, at such time as Sir Dodmore Cotton was there Ambassador, is said to have been valued by a knowing Merchant, at 20 millions of Pounds. But I fear the Merchant had more skill in silks than Jewels; such a vast sum to be expended on the furniture of one Palace only, being beyond the possibility of the Revenue of the Persian Sophies; hardly amounting towards all charges to five millions of Crowns. 7. Farabant, on a navigable Arm of the Caspian Sea; for beauty, wealth, and greatness, of most note in this Country. Well traded from all parts of this Inland Sea, especially by the Russian Merchant, as before is said; whose ships come hither in March, and return in July; it being from hence to Astrachan but ten dates sail. Beautified with goodly Gardens, a Royal mansion of the kings, and aspacious Marketplace. 8. Chiacoporo, near the Sea also, but on the banks of a River; the water whereof is said for eleven months to be fresh and sweet, and for the eight month very salt. 9 Barfrushdee, twelve miles from the Sea, well furnished with wood and water. 10. Omoall, a Town of about 3000 houses, seated on the North side of the Taurus, in a pleasant and fruitful soil; resorted to by the people of so many Nations, that seven languages are there commonly spoken. Once larger, as appeareth by some ruins, than it is at the present; by some conceived to be the Nabarca of the Ancients, honoured in those times with an Oracle. 11. Strava, a town of great traffic, for raw silks especially. 12. Mesandre, whence the whole Province (or rather the parts adjoining to it) hath the name of Mezendrum.  
The old Inhabitants hereof, besides the Caspii, were the Maxerae, Astabeni, Chrindi, and the Arsitenses; united in the name of Hyrcans in the time of the Persians, and by that name well known at the coming of Alexander. Against whom they so defended themselves by tying the boughs and twigs of their Trees together, that it was impossible for him to come at them till with incredible pains and labour he had caused their woods to be cut down: at sight whereof the People, who supposed the King had too much other business, and of more importance, than to put himself unto that trouble, did submit unto him. Falling to the share of Scleucus, they were the first people that were gained by Arsaces, and joined with him in recovering their former liberty, though they got nothing by the bargain but the change of their Master. In all times since, they have been looked upon as Members of the Persian Empire, till the conquest of it by the Tartars; in the distractions of whose great Empire after Tamerlanes death, it fell to some Princes of his house; who governed here under the vassalage and protection of the Tartars of Zagathay. Recovered not long since to their old obedience by Sultan Abas: who for the better settling the affairs hereof, removed the Seat Royal from Spawhawn, to which before he had transferred it from the City of Casbin, to Ashtrasse, than a small town, now the chief of this Country.   

12. MARGIANA.  
MARGIANA is bounded on the West, with Hyrcania; on the East, with Bactria; on the North, with part of Tartary, from which severed by the River Oxus; on the South, with Aria, divided from it by the Mountains. So called from the River Margus which runs throw the Country: but is now named Tremigen.  
The Country environed with Mountains, and in most places of it full of sandy Deserts. But where it is watered with the Rivers, Arias, and Margus, it is very fruitful, stretching itself into a large and spacious plain, containing in the circuit near 200 miles. The Plain once compassed with a wall by Antiochus Soter, King of Syria: more memorable for the huge stocks of Vines which are said to be in it, as big in bulk as two men can fathom, and sometimes bearing branches of grapes two Cubits long. The more to be admired in regard there is no other place near unto it where the vine will grow. And if the Ark rested on the top of Mount Caucasus, as it is most probable it did; why may not this be some of the remainder of that first Vineyard which was planted by Noah, when he descended from these Mountains, as is affirmed by the constant tradition of the people which inhabit here.  
The people mixed of Scythian and Persian breed, partaking of the fierceness of the one, and the behaviour of the other. Conform unto the Persians, in Religion, language and apparel; distinguished from them in the colour of their Turbans only, which are commonly Green; and therefore by the Persians called jeselbas', or Green-caps; the Turbans of the Persian being always Red.  
Chief Rivers of this Country are, 1. Margus, the peculiar River of it, which rising out of the foot of the Mountains, and passing thorough the midst of the Province, receiveth into its channel the River, 2. Arias, hastening out of Aria; and so together lose themselves in 3. Oxus, dividing the Margians from the Tartars. Out of the joint streams of which several Rivers is made a large Lake now called Sabacamber, but anciently Palus Oxiana, from the principal River.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Alexandria, or Alexandria Margiana for distinction sake; one of the fix towns built by Alexander for defence of this Country; called afterwards Seleucia from Seleucus; next Antiochia from Antiochus Soter King of Syria, by whom fortified with a very strong wall. It is now called Indion, and esteemed for the chief of the Country. 2. Jasonium, seated on the confluence of Margus with a nameless River issuing from the Seriphian Mountains. 3. Nigaea, as the printed books of Ptolemy call it; but mistook for Nissa, or Nysaea. 4. Argadina. 5. Rhea; of which nothing memorable. 6. Maran, near to which Ishmael the first of the Sophian race, discomfited the forces of Saba the Cham of Zagathay.  
The old Inhabitants here of were the Massagetes, and the Parni, taking up the midlands; the Derbiceae, bordering upon Oxus; and the Tapyri, dwelling towards the East. United by the name of Margians they were subdued by the Kings of Persia, from whom won by Alexander to his Empire: who to assure himself hereof built fix Cities in it, two towards the South, and four towards the East, all situate on the tops of hills, and built at such convenient nearness that they might afford succour to each other, as occasion served. After this nothing singular in the story of them; involved in the same fortunes with the rest of Persia, till Persia was conquered by the Tartars. Since which time, though the rest of the Persian Provinces were freed from the Tartarian yoke by Gempsas, the Sultan of Parthia, and King of Persia for a time, yet part of this Province, and of Bactriana, are still subject to them.   

13. BACTRIA.  
BACTRIA or BACTRIANA, is bounded on the West, with Margiana; on the East & North, with the River Oxus, dividing it from Sogdiana; on the South, with Paropamisus, from which parted by the hills so named, and the Mountain Caucasus. It took this name from Bactra, the chief City of it; and is now called Chorassin, but by some named Batter.  
The Country towards the River Oxus, is for the most part well manured, and affordeth plenty of Wheat, and all sorts of fruits excepting Olives; rich metals, and some precious stones, as Emeralds, Chrysolites, and Jacinthes. Plenty of pastures there be also, well stored with cattle, and those of bigger bulk than in other places. But the greatest part hereof to the South and West is nothing but a sandy Desert; and by reason that the sands are driven up and down by contrary winds, no tract or beaten way is to be discerned: insomuch as Travellers rest all day, and take their journey in the night, that they may guide themselves by the course of the Stars, as upon the Sea, not without great danger of being lost or buried, whilst alive, in that sandy Ocean.  
The people heretofore a puissant and warlike nation, not without great difficulty conquered by the Assyrians, nor with less by the Persians; always in arms, cruel, and resembling the Scythians, whose near neighbours they were: and (which may very well pass for their greatest virtue) multum à Persarum luxu abhorrentes, abhorting naturally from the Persian luxuries. But withal unnatural to their Parents, whom when old they cast unto their dogs, kept for that purpose, and called Canes Sepulchrales, or burial dogs. The women gorgeous in apparel, and proud of gesture, but prodigal of their bodies to their meanest slaves. The men to this day do retain their ancient stoutness; but hard beset betwixt the Persians and the Tartars, who severally pretend a dominion over them.  
No Province of the Persian Empire hath so many Rivers. The principal of which are 1. Artamis, and 2. Zariaspes, mingling streams together, as do also 3. Ochus, and 4. Orgomanes; all four contributing their waters to the River Oxus. Of Oxus, being rather a boundary betwixt the Persian and the Tartar, than rightly proper unto either, we have spoke already.  
Towns of most observation in it, 1. Bactra, the Metropolis or chief City of it, situate at the foot of the Mountains Sogdii; giving the name of Bactria unto all the Province. It is now called Bochor, and still keeps the dignity of the Metropolitan: the seat of the Chief-Priest or Bishop of the Mahometans of Zagathay (to which this City, and great part of the Country also, doth now belong) having here his residence, in power and reputation equal to the King himself. Well fortified, and stored with all military provisions: the birthplace (as Maginus faith) in these latter Ages of Avicenna, that learned Philosopher and Physician; and in the first Ages of Zoroaster the more learned ginger. 2. Ebusmt, once the Regal seat, and therefore honoured by Ptolemy with the name of Regia. 3. Zarispe, or Charispe, the chief City of the Charispae, a great Tribe of this Country. 4. Charracharta, mentioned by Ptolemy and Amnaianus: these two, upon the River Oxus. 5. Eucratidia, built or repaired by the Macedonians; as the name, being merely Greek, doth seem to intimate. 6. Alicodra, as ancient as the rest, but of no great note in the course of business. 7. Iseigias, of a later date, but of greater beauty than any of those before spoken of: superior to Bochor in elegancy, state and greatness, though not in dignity; and held by some to be the pleasantest of the East.  
This Country was as soon peopled as any since the general Deluge. It had not else been possible that Zoroaster King hereof in the time of Ninus, and by him assaulted, should bring into the field an Army of 400000 men of this, and perhaps some other of the neighbouring Provinces, as most credible writers say he did. Encountering Ninus with this Army he prevailed at first, and slew of the Assyrians near an hundred thousand. But Ninus having better opportunities of recruiting his forces, invaded him a second time with an Army of 1700000 foot, and 200000 horse (the greatest on record in all ages since that time, except that of Semiramis) with which he over came Zoroaster, slew him in the field, and united Bactria to his Empire. Unto this Zoroaster is ascribed the invention of Astronomy, but on no good ground: that Art or Science being studied before the flood, (if Seths Pillars mentioned by Josephus be of any credit): and therefore probably no otherwise to be ascribed to Zoroaster, than as to the Reviver of it; or because he first committed that unto writing, which he had received by tradition; or because he brought those confused notions which he had received from others, into rule and method. He being slain, and Bactra his chief City taken by the wit of Semiramis, than the wife of Menon (but on the merit of that service made the wife of Ninus) the Buctrians became subject unto the Assyran Kings, after to the Monarches of the Medes and Persian. In the expiring of which great Monarchy Bessus a false and cruel Traitor, did command this Province and having villainously slain Darius, his Lord and Master, assumed unto himself the title of King of Persian, under the name of Art●xenxes. But being betrayed by Spitamenes one of his Confederates, by him delivered unto Alexander, and by Alexander put to a cruel death the Bactrians became subject to the Macedonians, and in that right unto Seleucus and the Kings of Syria. But long it held not in that State; one Theodatus, who formerly had the Governm●ent of it for the Syrian Kings; taking unto himself the title of king, and the possession of the Country, about the same time that Arsaces and the Parthians made the like revolt. Wrested from his posterity by one Enthydemus, the recovery of it was attempted by Antiochus Magnus: and the whole cause put to the trial of a barrel. In which, though Antiochus had the better, and showed more personal valour in it than any time after: yet he was glad to come to a composition, and left to Euthydemus both the Crown and the Country. Made not long after an accession to the Parthian Kingdom; it continued part thereof whilst that Kingdom stood: and in the time of Ptolemy (as long time before) had for the chief tribes or nations of it the Salatarae, and Zariaspae towards the North; the Comani, or Coamoni (as Pliny calleth them) dwelling in the South; the middle parts being taken up by the Thocari, said to be gens magna; the Scorde, Savadii, Maricae, Tambyzi, Amarispe, and others of as little note. In the often changes and alterations of the Persian State, one of the last Nations which submitted to the new Pretenders: and at this time so neutral betwixt the Persians, and the Cham of Tartary, that it is wholly under the power of either. More averse from the Persian government since the alteration of Religion made there by Hysinael, and the rest of the Sect of Mortis Halt: these Bactrians being of the old race of Mahometans which adhered to Haumar, Osmen, and Abubecher, as the true Successors of their false Prophet: and therefore illaffected to the Sophian faction, whom they call commonly Caphars, or Heretics, for the innovations by them made in the Law of Mahomet.  
Thus having taken a survey of those several Provinces which constitute the Persian Empire, and shown by what means they were first united into one estate: we must next look upon the names and actions of those mighty Monarches, who have successively, and from time to time enjoyed the Sovereignty. By what good chance Arbaces from a Deputy or Lieutenant of Media, obtained the Diadem for himself, we have shown before: and we have shown how liberally he enfeoffed the Vice-Roys of the several Provinces (which in the division made betwixt him and Belochus, fell unto his share;) in the propriety and command of those Country's, which before they held. Nothing reserved unto himself, and his posterity, but the title only; and perhaps some acknowledgements made to them, as the Lords in chief. Nor left he less liberty to his own Medians, than to the rest of the Provinces: which turning to licentiousness was so hurtful to them, that they were glad at last of that wholesome severity, which Deioces, a more Lordly King, began to exercise: who taking to himself a guard, building the Royal City of Ecbatana, and fortifying some other places of importance, first brought the people under the command of law: in that regard not unfitly called by Herodotus, the first King of the Medes.  

Kings of the Medes.  
A. M  
3146. 1. Arbaces, at first Governor of the Medes under Sardanapalus the Assyrian; but joining with Belochus, overcame his Master, and was the first founder of the Median Monarchy  
3174. 2. Mandanes, the son of Arbaces. 50.  
3224. 3. Sisarmus. 30.  
3254. 4. Medidus, by some called Artyras. 25.  
3279. 5. Cardicceus, whom some call Arbianes. 13.  
3292. 6. Deioces, the founder of Ecbatana, and the Legislator of the Medes, whom he first brought under the command of Law, and a Regal Government, the former Kings having left the reigns so loose on the necks of the peopl, that they seemed to reign by courtesy only; and had no more authority amongst their Subjects, than any of the mean Lords had upon their Vassals.  
3303. 7. Phraortes, a man of great prowess and fortune; he made all Asia stand in fear, and compelled the Persians to be his tributaries; but was after overtopped by the Scythians. 22.  
3331. 8. Cyaxares, united to his Empire the Saracens, and the Parthians. The King was so overlaid by the Scythians, who in the reign of Phraortes, had broke into Media; that he was little better than their rent-gatherer. But having endured them for above two years, he plotted their final extirpation, and committed his design to the Nobles, who willingly gave ear to it. One night they invited the chief of the Scythians to a banquet, where having well liquored them, and put them all to the sword, the base sort willingly returned homeward. 40.  
3371. 9 Astyages, the son of Cyaxares, who having married his Daughter Mandane, to Cambyses the Tributary King of Persia; dreamt that she had made as much water as drowned all Asia: hereupon he commanded Harpagus, one of his Noble men, to see the Child killed; but he loathing so cruel a fact, committed the charge of executing the King's commandment, to Mithridates the King's herdsman. He preserved the life of the young infant, to whom he gave the name of Cyrus, whose fortune at last lifted him up to the Kingdom of Persia: when abhorring his Grandfather for that intended cruelty, he both bereft him of his Kingdom, and confined him to Hyrcania, when he had reigned thirty five years. A. M. 3406.  
3406. 10. Cyaxares II. in the Scripture called Darius Medus, son to Astyages, of the age of 52. years succeeded his father. For Cyrus pretending no quarrel to his Uncle who had never wronged him; left him the Kingdom of Media; and took unto himself the Sovereignty of Persia, which before was tributary to the Medes; not making any other alteration in the State of Media.   
At this division of the Median Empire, as Torniellus in his Annals, (and that not improbably) is of opinion, it was also agreed on, that Cyrus should take the daughter and only child of Cyaxares to wife; that they should both join together, in subduing of their neighbours; that whatsoever they won, should belong to Cyaxares, (who was even then an old Prince) during his life; and that Cyrus should be his heir. In the twentieth year of their several reigns, they took Babylon, slew Baltazar, and destroyed the Empire of the Chaldaeans. This action, the Scriptures attribute wholly to Cyaxares, who is by them called Darius Medus; whereof Saint Hierome allegeth three reasons: 1. Ordo aetatis, 2. Regm, 3. Propinquitatis. 1. Darius was the elder; 2. the Empire of the Medes was more famous than that of the Persians; and 3. the Uncle ought to be preferred before the Nephew. We may add to these three, the composition abovementioned, made between these Princes, at the beginning of their reigns or the death of Astyages. The Greek Writers attribute the victory only to Cyrus, and that on three reasons also. The Persians desirous to magnify Cyrus their own Conntrey-man, gave him all the glory of the action; and from the Persians the Greeks had it. Secondly, Cyrus was only employed in the siege, (Darius then being absent) and by his valour and conduct was the Empire of the Chaldaeans ruined. And thirdly, Darius lived not fully two years after the great victory; s that before remote Nations had taken notice of the conquest, Cyrus was actually in the Throne. Josephus only in the 11 Chapter of his Book, cutteth the thread even between these two Princes, and telleth us that Darius, with his 〈◊〉 Cyrus, destroyed the estate of the Babylonians. That this Darius Medus of Daniel, is the Cyaxares of the Greeks, is more than manifest. For Josephus in the place above-cited telleth us, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 That he was Astyages son, and is otherwise called by the Greeks: now ask the Greeks what was the name of the son of Astyages, and Xenophon will tell you, that it was Cyaxares. As for the name of Nabonidus, which Joseph Scaliger in spite of reason, and the whole world of Chronologers, would thrust upon this Darius Medus; we have already refeled it, though we are not ignorant that Helvicus and Calvisius, two most worthy Writers, have followed him, as in all his Canon, so also in this particular Error. But to proceed unto the course of the Persian history, after the death of this Cyaxares, Cyrus succeeded in his Throne, and the Empire of the Medes was incorporated in that of the Persians, as it hath ever since continued, if not subject to it.  

The first Dynasty, or Race of the Persian Monarches, of the house of Achaemenes.  
3406. 1. Cyrus, who having vanquished Astyages, united to the Empire of Persia the whole Kingdom of Media; the Countries of Armenia, Phrygia, Lydia, some part of Arabia, and all the Provinces possessed by the Babylonian and Assyrian Monarches. After which victories, he was slain by Tomyris a Queen of the Scythians, as some Writers say: others affirming that he escaped alive (but wounded) out of the battle, died in his own Kingdom, and was buried at Pasagarda, a Town of Persis. This Cyrus is magnified by Xenophon, as Aeneas is by Virgil, and Ulysses by Homer. 29.  
3434. 2. Cambrses, the son of Cyrus, subdued Psamniticus King of Egypt, which Country he united to his Empire. Having a mind to marry his own Sister, he was told by his Lawyers that they knew no law which admitted such marriages, but that there was a law, that the Persian Kings might do what they listed. This King was a very bloody Tyrant.   The Inter-regnum of the Magi. 
Cambyses at his expedition into Egypt, constituted Patizithes, one of the Magis, Viceroy in his absence. He hearing of the King's death, conferred the Kingdom on his own son Smerdis, making the people believe, that he was the brother of Cambyses: A matter of no difficulty, considering, how retirement from the public view was a chief point of the Persian majesty. But the Nobles either knowing the true Smerdis to be slain, or suspecting the overmuch retiredness of the new King; began to search out the matter. Otanes had a daughter, which was one of the King's Concubines; her he commanded when the King took next his pleasure with her; to feel whether he had an years: for Cambyses (in I know not what humour) had cut off the ears of this Magus. This commandment she obeying, found out the falsehood. The seven Princes informed of this imposture, join together, and slew this Pseudo-Smerdis, in the eighth month of his reign. This done, to avoid contention, they agreed among themselves, that the seven Princes meeting on the Palace green, should acknowledge him for King, whose horse before the rising of the Sun, first neighed. The evening before the day appointed, the horsekeeper of Darius the son of Hystaspis, brought his master's horse into the green, together with a mare, which the horse then covered. In the morning the Princes met; and Darius his horse knowing the place, and longing for his mare, neighed lustily: on which the Princes presently acknowledge Darius for their King.  

The restoring of the Kingdom.  
3443. 3. Darius Hystaspis, one of the seven Persian Princes, descended from Cyrus the fourth King of the Persians, thus elected King, took Babylon (which had revolted) by the ingenious fetches of Zopirus; and overran all Asia and some part of Greece. 36.  
3479. 4. Xerxes, to revenge the overthrow at Marathron, attempted to subdue the Greeks: by whom he was overthrown in the naval battle of Salam●s; and that famous and honourable exploit of the Grecians, at Thermopylae. 21.  
3500. 5. Artaxerxes Long●manus, was he who sent Esdras to rebuild the Temple of the Lord; and received Themistocles, being banished from Athens. This also was he, as some would have it, whom the Scriptures call Ahasuerus, the Husband of Hester; though others choose rather to place that story in the time of Xerxes. 44.  
3544. 6. Darius' II. surnamed Nothus, in whose time the Egyptians revolted and chose a King of their own. 19  
3563. 7. Artaxerxes II. from the greatness of his memory surnamed Mnemon; under whom happened that famous retreat of Xenophon with an handful of Grecians thorough most of the Provinces of this Empire; by which they showed the way to the Macedenians.  
3599. 8. Ochus, a great Tyrant, but a valiant Prince, recovered Egypt, subdued Syria, Cyprus, and some part of India; and was at last slain by Bagoas, one of the Eunuches of his Chamber.  
3625. 9 Arses, the son of Ochus, most villainously murdered by the same Eunuch, for fear he should revenge the death of his Father.  
3629. 10. Darius' III. Governor of Armenia, and Cousin German of Ochus, before his coming to the Crown named Codomannus; by the means of the said Bagoas made sole Monarch of Persia. But being vanquished by Alexander the Great in the three battles of Granicus, Cilicia, and Arbela, the Empire of the Persians was transferred to the Grecians, A. M. 3635.   
The certain Revenues of this great Monarchy, seem to have been 14560 Talents; for so much the last Darius received yearly. But what the casual and extraordinary Intrado was, is not easy to say, though manifest it is, and demonstrable by many strong and evident reasons, that they far exceeded the certain. For first, the Persian Monarches were Kings of 127 Provinces; Secondly, Darius offered to Alexander for the ransom of his mother and two daughters, 30000 Talents of Gold; Thirdly, Alexander found in the Treasury of Damascus, 2600 Talents; in that of Susa, 50000 Talents of Gold uncoined; in that of ‛ Pasagardis, 60000 Talents; in that of Ecbatana, 26000 Talents; in that of Persepolis, 120000 Talents; in all 204600 Talents: besides the infinite riches of the Treasury of Babylon, yielded into his hands by Bagoph●●nes, and other places of note, no● particularly specified; an huge and most unspeakable sum. Fourthly, in that the gold and riches which Alexander, now a Conqueror, sent from Persia to Macedon and Greece, (besides that which every Captain and common Soldier had provided and laid up for his own maintenance) loaded ten thousand Mules, and five thousand Camels.  
After this overthrow of the Persian Monarchy, this Nation lay obscure 535 years, viz. from the 3635 year of the world, to the 228 year of CHRIST: of which time they were 83 years under the Syrian Successors of Alexander; and 452 years under the Arsacidan Kings of Parthia 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 etc. as Herodi●in. For after Darius had lost his Kingdom to Alexander the Macedonian, and after the Victor himself was dead also; the more potent Captains divided Asia among them. But discords often arising, and the Macedonions puissance, by these often broils, not smally broken; Arsaces' one of the Parthian Nobility, persuaded the barbarous people of the East, and among them the Persians, to cast off the Greek yoke, and stand for their liberty: he himself taking upon him the title of King, and inversting himself with a Diadem, A. M. 3718. The Persians by this revolt, got little or nothing, having indeed not changed the Tyranny, but the Tyrant only: these Parthian Princes lording it with as high an insolency, as ever the old Persian Monarches, or the Kings of Syria, did before. From this Arsaces, all the rest of his Successors, and those too of the family of Artabanus, or the second race of arthian Kings, took that name upon them: as the Roman Emperors that of Caesar, or the old Egyptian Kings the name of Pharaoh. Their usual stile was Rex Regum, or King of Kings: and by that stile with arrogance and insolence enough, Vologeses thus inscribed his letters to Vespasian the Roman Emperor, Arsaces, Rex Regum, Flavio Vespasiano: giving himself the title of Kings of Kings; but the other nothing but his bare names only. To which, Vespasian without taking notice of the Parthians pride, returned his answer to him with this superscription, Fl. Vespasianus Regi Regum Arsacidi: whether with more scorn, or modesty, it is hard to say. They also called themselves the Brethren of the Sun and Moon, which were the chiefest Gods they worshipped. Great Princes questionless they were, and kept the Romans harder to it, than all the Kings and States in the world besides: whose names and acts occur in these following Catalogues of  

2. The Arsacidan or Parthian race of the Kings of Persia.  
A. M.  
3718. 1. Arsaces', the founder of the Parthian family.  
3741. 2. Mithridates, or Arsaces' the 2d. assaulted by Antiochus Magnus with an Army of 120000 men, but without success.  
3761. 3. Pampatius.  
3773. 4. Phraartes, the son of Pampatius.  
3783. 5. Mithridates' II. brother of Phraartes, subdued the Medes, and extended his Empire to Euphrates.  
6. Phraartes II. slain in a war against the Scythians.  
3857. 7. Artabanus Uncle to Phraartes the 2d.  
8. Pacorus, the son of Artabanus.  
9 Mithridates' III. brother of Pacorus.  
3903. 10. Horodes, brother of Mithridates, whom he overcame, and caused to be slain in his own sight. He also vanquished M. Crassus, and flew 20000 Romans: and because Crassus was reported to be wondrous covetous, he caused molten gold to be poured down his throat. A miserable death, but in respect of the divine Providence a most just revenge upon him for his sacrilege, in robbing the Temple of Jerusalem, as he marched towards the Parthians. The overthrow, and the disgrace which thereby happened to the Romans, was not long afterwards recompensed by Ventidius, one of the Lieutenants of Mark Antony the Triumvir, who flew great numbers of them in a pitched field, and amongst others Pacorus the King's son; the day of the battle being the same, in which Crassus had before been vanquished. After this victory, for which Ventidius had the honour of a Triumph (and the first Triumph that ever the Romans had beheld for a Parthian victory) he was in a fair way to have ruined this Kingdom, to have shrewdly shaken it at the least, had not Antony in an envious humour called him from that service. Finally, Horodes was slain by his son Phraartes.  
11. Phraartes III. a valiant Prince, but wicked and cruel. Against him marched Marcus Antonius with a populous Army, which wanted little of an absolute overthrow, of 16 legions, scarce six returning home in safety. This King submitted himself and Kingdom unto Augustus, restoring the Roman ensigns, and freeing the Captives taken at the defeat of Crassus. The only mark of the Parthians subjection, was their receiving Kings at the appointment of the Senate and Emperors of Rome: which also was of no long continuance.  
12. Phraartes' IV. son of Phraartes the 3d. whom he slew and succeeded.  
13. Orodes II. son of Phraartes the fourth, slain in a conspiracy.  
14. Vonon, substituted in the place of Orodes, but outed by  
15. Tiridates who was also dispossessed of his life and Kingdom by Artabanus, a stranger to the blood of the Arsacidaes, the family of Arsaces' giving place to that of this Artabanus; of which family we have the names of twelve Kings successively reigning: the most considerable of them being Chosroes, the 8th. King of this line, from whom the Emperor Trdjan gained Armenia and Mesopotamia, adding them to the Roman Empire, members whereof they did continue till regained to the Persian Crown by Sapores the 9th King of the next Persian Dynasty. But for those twelve Kings of this house they are these.   

The 3d. Dynasty of the Kings of Persia, and the 2d. of the Parthian Race.  
1 Artabanus.  
2 Bardanes.  
3 Goteres.  
4 Vonones.  
5 Vologeses.  
6 Artabanus II.  
7 Pacorus.  
8 Chosroes.  
9 Parmaspates.  
10 Vologeses II.  
11 Vologeses III.  
12 Artabanus III. the last King of this new race of the Parthians, whose overthrow by the valour of Artaxerxes the first Persian King of the 4th. Dynasty, occasioned the translation of the Diadem to the natural Persians; after it had continued in two Parthian families for the space of 470 years. Which Translation as it was wrought by the unresistable power of God, who only hath the disposing of Crowns and Sceptres; so in the way of second causes it may be principally referred to the barbarous massacre of this people by Antonius Caracalla the Roman Emperor. Who having negociated a marriage with the daughter of this Artabanus, and going (as he gave it out) to solemnize the nuptials; was met by the old King accompanied with the flower of his Nobility, and the choicest of his Soldiers, and other Subjects in Triumphal Ornaments. Which honourable train was no sooner come near his Army, but he commanded his Soldiers, (on a watchword given) to put them all to the sword, the King himself hardly escaping with his life. Caracalla being dead, and Macrinus succeeding in the Throne, the Parthians set upon him to revenge that slaughter. But understanding after a long fight of three day's continuance, that Macrinus had slain Caracella, they made peace with him: but were so weakened and unable to hold their own, that it made the Persians once more think of recovering to their own Nation the Regal power. For Artaxerxes, a noble and generous Persian (his name perhaps suggesting some high thoughts unto him) did so much husband the opportunity, that he slew Artabanus the last King of the Parthians, and once more brought the royal seat into Persia. Yet was not this so easilly effected, the Parthians notwithstanding their former losses, maintaining a cruel fight for three days together: so difficult was it to vanquish that Nation, when their forces were broken; impossible when they were whole. Artaxerxes, proud of this success, sent a peremptory embassy to Alexander Severus, the than Roman Emperor, to have all the Provinces of Asia, which had formerly belonged to the Persian Monarchy, redelivered to him: a matter not so easily granted as demanded. For Severus so suppress so insolent an enemy, marched towards Persia with an Army Romanly appointed; which, to find his enemy more work he divided into three parts: whereof the first was to march into Media; the second into Persia; the third himself led in the midway between both, to succour both as occasion required. But his device succeeded not happily: for his two Annies being by the Persians broken, he with much danger and hast retired back with the third. This was a good beginning for the Persian Empire, the establishment followed not long after: Valerianus the Emperor being vanquished and taken prisoner by Sapores the second King of this race. So that now the name of the Persian grew so terrible to the Romans, that Co●stantine the Great, transplanted many of the Colonies and Garrisons of the Northwest part of the Empire, into the East; to keep the Persian from growing to far upon the Roman Provinces; and removed also the feat of the Empire nigher unto them, from Rome to Constantinople. And thus having shown the beginning and establishment, the foundation and building of the new Kingdom of the Persians: take along with you the Catalogue of their Kings, until they once more lost the sovereignty of their own Nation, and became slaves again.   

The 4th. Dynasty, or race of the Persian Kings.  
228 1 Artaxerxes 15.  
243 2 Sa●ores 31.  
272 3 Ormi●●●e● 1.  
275 4 Vararanes 3.  
278 5 Vararanes II. 16.  
294 6 Vararanes III.  
294 7 Narses 7.  
302 8 Misdues 7.  
310 9 Sapar II. 70.  
380 10 Artaxerxes II. 11.  
391 11 Sapores III. 5.  
396 12 Varanes IV. 10.  
406 13 Isdigertes 21.  
427 14 Vararanes IV. 20.  
447 15 Vararanes V. 17.  
464 16 Perozes 20.  
484 17 Valens 4.  
488 18 Cabades, dispossessed by  
499 19 Lambases 4.  
503 20 Cabades, again restored.  
533 21 Cosross Magnus 48.  
581 22 Hormisda 8.  
589 23 Cosross II. 39  
628 24 Siroes 1.  
629 25 Adhesi●.  
26 Sarbatus.  
27 Barnarius.  
630 28. Hormisda II. the 28. and last King of the race of Artaxerxes, or the fourth Dyn●●sty: of whom besides the two first Kings, whose Acts are spoken of before, the most remarkable were, 1. Vararanes the second, in whose time Carus the Emperor passing over Euphrates, and laying sieige to Ctesiphon, was there slain by a thunderbolt. 2. Narses, the son of Varar●nes, who first discomfited Galerius, one of the Caesars, in the Empire of Diocletian, and totally ruined his Army: for which Galerius being forced to lackey it by the Emperors Chariotin his purple Robes, was so highly shamed, that to recover his credit he set upon Narses once again, routed him, and took Prisoners his wives and children. 3. Sapores the second, the son of Misdates, who began his reign before his birth. For his Father dying without issue, left his wife with Child: which Child the Magis having signified by their art to be a male, the Persian Princes caused the Crown and Royal Ornaments to be set upon his Mother's belly, acknowledging him thereby for their future King. A great and puissant Prince he proved; holding continual war with Constantine and his Successors till the death of Valens, and gaining from them the best part of Mesopotamia: but withal a great Persecuter of the Christians, of whom no fewer than 20000 are said to have suffered in his time. 4. Isdigertes, a Prince so esteemed of by Arcadius the Eastern Emperor, that he made him Protector of his Empire during the minority of his son Theodosius: which trust he Royally performed, and was a great friend unto the Christians in his own dominions. 5. Cabades, first outed of his Kingdom by Zamaspes, and restored again, was the first Persian King who permitted the free exercise of the Christian Religion. He slew Zeliobes' a King of the Huns coming to his aid against the Romans, because he had before promised to assist the Emperor; and rooted the Manichean Sect out of his estates. 6. Cosroes the son of Cabades, surnamed the Gre●t, a Constant enemy of the Romans, from whom he conquered a great part of Syria, and took and sacked the City of Antioch. But finding the war brought home to his own doors by Mauritius, who was afterwards Emperor, and his own Countries in a flame, he took such thought of it that he died of a fever. 7. Cosroes the second, as great an enemy to the Emperor Heraclius, from whom he took all that was left of Mesopotamia, Syria, and the Holy Land, with the City of Jerusalem itself: most of it recovered by Heraclius; in despite of whom he caused all the Christians in his Kingdom to turn Nestorians. 8. Hormisda the second, the last of this Dynasty, who being first weakened by Civil and Domestic dissensions, was vanquished by Haumar and his Saracens, Anno 634. burying so the glory of this renowned Nation, in the grave of oblivion and infamy.   
The Saracen icall Caliphs', having added this Kingdom to their huge Empire, appointed here their Deputies, whom they honoured with the name of Sultan's: not one Supreme for the whole Kingdom, but several Governors or Sultan's for each several Province; called by new names, and moulded into many Toparchtes, as Chorazan, Mauzenabar, Usbeck, and I wot not what; the Sultan's acting of themselves, and warring upon one another, as their humours led them, without relation to the Caliph, or Lord in chief. During which bustles it so happened that Mahomet, the Sultan of Persia (so called because he was the chief in command and power) picking a quarrel with his neighbour the Sultan of Babylon, (Pi●●iris he is called in some Christian writers, by whom taken or mistaken for the Caliph himself) made war upon him. But finding him countenanced and supported by the power of the Caliph, invited the Turks, then possessed of some part of Armenia Major, to come in to his aid: by whose means he overthrew the Caliphs' forces, and might have got the Sovereignty of Persia unto himself, if he had used his victory and his friends with any tolerable discretion. But denying to pay these Turks their wages, and send them home, he occasioned them to make head against him under the conduct of Tangrolipix their principal leader; to whom being once in arms, several discontented persons of the natural Persians did unite themselves. Encouraged with which additions, and being furnished with Horse and Armour, and other necessaries, by the spoil of the Country; they give battle to the Sultan himself: whom having vanquished and slain, Tangrolipix by the joint consent of both Armies is made King of Persia; the Founder of 

The fifth Dynasty, or the Turkish Race of the Kings of Persia.  
1030. 1 Tangrolipix, of whom sufficiently before.  
2. Axan, the son of Tangrolipix, by whom Cutlu Muses, his near Kinsman, was sent with great forces against the Christians, whom he dispossessed of a great part of Asia Minor.  
3. Balak, Sultan of Persia, in the beginning of the wars in the holy land, undertaken by the Western Christians; against whom he is reported to have sent his forces. Of whose Successors I find nothing till the time of  
1198 4 Cassanes, the last King or Sultan of the Turks; vanquished in the year 1202 by the Cham of Tartary. Which makes me very apt to think, that after the death of Axan, or his next Successor, the Turks lost the Sovereignty of Persia, though they kept the possession of some parts of it; the Soveraingty thereof being recovered by the Caliphs' of Babylon: and that it was so held by both, till the Tartars dispossessed the one, and destroyed the whole progeny of the other, as before was noted. And this I find to be the opinion of Benjamin Tuledensis, a learned Jew, which had traveled most part of the East; to whose judgement herein I subscribe as most found and rational.    

The sixth Dynasty, or the Tartarian race of the Kings of Persia.  
1260. 1 Haalon, or Ulah-Kuhkan, by Occata the great Cham, made King of Persia, exterminated the whole race of the Caliph of Bagdet.  
1266. 2. Habkakaihon, the son of Haalon.  
1282. 3. Nicador Oglan, by Haiton called Tangador, who made himself a Mahometan, and was named Hamed, the brother of Habkakaihon.  
1284. 4. Argon-Khon, the eldest son of Habkakaihon.  
1292. 5. Geniotukhon, brother of Argon-Khon.  
1295. 6. Badukhan, the Uncle of the last, of which three there is little memorable.  
1296. 7. Gazun, the son of Argon-Khon, who made Casbin his Imperial seat.  
1305. 8. Alyaptu, who transferred the Court to Tauris, and is said to have been the founder of Sultania, a chief City of Media; the brother of Gazun.  
1317. 9 Abusaid, son of Alyaptu, that reigned in Persia. After whose death, Anno 1337. (being the 736. of the Mahometan Hegira) the more potent Princes of the Tartars seized on the several parts and Provinces of it, every one calling himself King of that part or Province which he was possessed of. And amongst them Gempsas the Sultan or Sultan of Parthia (though a Persian born) put in for a share, and made himself master of his own Province, and some parts adjoining: made on that ground by some of our Christian writers (who very imperfectly have transmitted to us the affairs of this Country) the sole King of Persia. In this confusion it continued till the coming of Tamerlane, who like a furious Whirlwind driving all before him, composed the differences, by getting all unto himself. But as Philosophy doth teach us, that no violent motion is of long continuance, so the course of business, and the success of actions may instruct us also, that a Kingdom forced to bow under the command of a prosperous Army, is not so well assured to the Victor, but that the fury of the war once past, it may return again to its former liberty, or open a more easy passage to some new Invader. And so it fared with the conquests and successes of Tamerlane, whose issue quickly lost this Kingdom, and almost all the rest of his other purchases: leaving but little memory of their names and actions. For partly by his own imprudence in cantoning his Estates amongst his Children, and partly by the weakness of his Successors in the Realm of Persia: this Kingdom did relapse immediately to the same confusions in which he found it; having almost as many Sovereign Kings, as Provinces. Most of them Homagers perhaps to the Kings of the house of Tamerlane, and those who afterwards succeeded in the Title of Kings of Persia of the Turcoman or Armenian Dynasty: not yet reduced unto this Grown, notwithstanding the great and prosperous successes of the Sophtan Family. But for the Kings of the race of Tamerlane, who only in their times had the honour to be called Kings of Persia (and well enough content with that): such as they were we find them in this order following.  
1405. 10. Mirza Charok, the fourth son of Tamerlane, succeeded by his appointment in the Realm of Persia.  
1447. 11. Oleghbeg, son of Mirza Charok, vanquished and slain by his own son.  
1450. 12. Abdalatise, slain not long after by his own Soldiers.  
1451. 13. Abdula, the son of Oleghbeg, and brother of Abdalatife, vanquished by  
1453. 14. Abusaid II. descended from Moroncha, the third son of Tamerlane, succeeded on the death of Abdula.  
1461. 15. Zeuzes, whom some call Jooncha, others Malaonchres, discomfited and slain in battle by Ussan-Cassanes, Anno 1472. which was about 70 years from the death of Tamerlane.   

The seventh Dynasty of the Turcoman, or the Armenian race of the Kings of Persia.  
1472. 1. Vssan-Cassanes by some called Asymbeius, by others more truly Ozem-Azembec, was the son of Tracheton, one of those poor Armenian or Turcoman Princes dispossessed by Bajazet the first, and restored by Tamerlane. Encroaching on his neighbours, he was warned to desist by Zeuzes the Persian King, with whom encountering in a pitched field he overcame him, and got that Kingdom by the victory.  
1478. 2. Jacub, the second son of Ussan-Cassanes, having put by his elder Brother, attained the Throne; and repulsed the Mamalucks out of Mesopotamia and Assyria, which they had invaded: He was after poisoned by his wife.  
1490. 3. Julaver, a Kinsman of Jacubs, succeeded him in the estate, which he held only three years, and then left it to  
1493. 4. Barsinger, a Prince of the same blood, who living in adultery with the wife of Jacub, had conspired his death. 2.  
1495. 5. Rustan, assaulted by Atder or Secaider of the Sophian faction, who then began to be of power.  
1498. 6. Alamat, or Hagaret, the last King of this Turcoman or Armenian race; first vanquished Secaider at the battle of Derbent, and cut off his head: but was after overthrown and slain by Hysmacl the son of Aider; upon the quarrel and occasion which here followeth.   
Mahomet the Impostor and first Emperor of the Saracens, by his last Will and Testament, bequeathed the succession into that Estate, to Hali his near Kinsman, and the Husband of Fatime, his Eldest Daughter. But Abubezar, Haumar, and Osmen, three powerful men, and the Chief Commanders of the Army in the time of Mahomet, successively followed one another in the Supreme Dignity. After their death, Hali enjoyed that honour for a little while, supplanted first, and afterwards vanquished and slain by Muhavias' a great man of war, who succeeded in it; and to secure himself therein, slew Hasem or Ossan, the son of Hali, and eleven of the sons of that Ossan; the twelt called Musa Ceredine escaping with life. From him descended lineally one Guine the Lord of Ardoville in Media; who considering that their had been no Caliph in long time before, began to plot the establishing of that high honour in his own family, as the right Heirs to it. A man of so great reputation amongst the people, that Tamerlane having made a conquest of Persia, thought it no dishonour to his greatness, to bestow a friendly visit on him. Dying, he left his hopes and projects to his son called Atder, who afterwards for the purity of Religion pretended by him, had the adjunct of Tzophy; the word so signifying in that language: who also proved of such esteem and power with all sorts of men, that Ussan-Cassanes, the first King of the Armenian or Turcoman race thought fit to make him Husband unto one of his Daughters. But on the contrary, Jacub the son of Vssan, and some of his Successors, seeing him grow unto such power and estimation with the common people; and fearing what he could do, and not what he would do, endeavoured to depress him by all means that might be. Which he not able to remedy, as the Case then stood, practised to add unto his party under the popular pretence of reforming things that were amiss in their Religion: and grew so powerful in the end, that he gave battle unto Restan and Alamat, the two last Kings of the former race. But Alamat having got the victory, caused him to be slain; and delivered Hysmael and Solyman his two sons, into the hands of Amazar, a chief Commander of his own, by him to be kept in perpetual prison. But Amazar a man of a more ingenuous disposition, afforded them not only liberty, but also good education: insomuch that Hysmael Sophi, a towardly young Gentleman, undertook revenge for the death of his Father, which work he fulfilled, having overcome and slain King Alamat, and his son Elvan. After this victory, he being crowned King, or Shaugh of Persia, altered the form of Religion: making Hali, and himself the true Successors of Mahomet; but condemning Abubezer, Haumar, and Osmen, with the Turks, as rebels and Schismatics.  
Hence proceeded the divers wars, which to the Persians loss, have happened between them and the Turks: the Persians burning whatsoever book or Monument they find concerning those three; and the Turks holding it more meritorious to kill one Persian than seventy Christians. Surius in his Commentaries, writing purposely of the Acts of Hysma●●, saith, that the Jews on some fond conceit were persuaded that he was the Messiah they had so long looked for: But it proved quite contrary, there never being Prince that more vexed and grieved them.  

The eighth Dynasty, or Sophian race of the Kings of Persia.  
1505. 1. Hysmael Sophi, the founder of this Family, overthrown by Selimus the first, in the Calderan fields. 20.  
1525. 2. Tamas, the Son of Hysmael, vanquished by Solyman the Magnificent, who took from him the Countries of Chaldea, Assyria, and Mesopotamia, with some part of Media. 53.  
1578. 3. Aider, the second son of Tamas, obtained the Kingdom, imprisoning his elder brother; but his cruelty being much feared, he was made away by the practice of Periancona, his own Sister, having reigned only 15 days.  
4. Hysmael II. eldest son of Tamas, restored unto his Father's Throne; but murdered with the privity of his Sister also, who found him of too rough a nature for her to govern; having reigned near two years.  
1579. 5. Mahomet Codabanda, advanced unto the throne by his Sister's faction, (as being of a milder and more tractable nature) at his first entrance caused her to be beheaded for the former murders. During his time, not fully settled in the State, Amurath the 2d. by his Lieutenants won from him almost all Armenia, Media, and great part of Georgia. 7.  
1585. 6. Abas, the second son of Mahomet, having treacherously practised the death of Mirza, his elder brother, suceeeded his Father, recovered almost all which the Turks had gained, and added the Kingdoms of Ormus, Heri, Candahor, and Hyrcania, to the Crown of Persia.  
7. Soffie, the Nephew of Abas by his son Mirza, (whose eyes he caused to be put out on a false suspicion) at the age of fifteen years succeeded: committed by his Grandfather during his minority to the protection of Emangoly, Chawn, or Duke of Shyras. A Prince, who since he came to age, hath had a good hand against the Turks, attempting the recovery of Bagdel and other places, which had been taken from them in the time of Abas.   
The Government of these Persian Kings, though it be despotical and severe, hath a great deal less of the Tyrant in it than any other of the Mahometan Kings or Princes: these cherishing their Brethren, maintaining Nobility amongst them, and encouraging industry; which makes them to be better served than the Turk or Tartar; to both whom they are far inferior both in power and treasure. Their Officers of of State, and men of principal inployment, for the most part Eunuches (as generally in all the Empires of the East): such Persons being thought most trusty; because abstracted from the obligations of wife and children, they study more the Prince's service than their own advantages. Their forces consist most of Horse, to which they are inclined more generally than to serve on root: and yet the greatest body of horse which they have brought at any time into the field, came not to above 30000; but those well furnished and appointed; maintained on Lordships and Estates after the manner of the Turkish Timariot. The Foot-soldiers of his own Countries, but poor and raw, and very seldom stand their ground. That defect being for the most part supplied by Mercinaries. The inconvenience of which being found by Sultan Abas, he served himself of children bought of Christian Parents, near the Euxine Sea (from whence the Egyptian Sultan's had their Mamalucks) whom they call by the name of Cozel-Bassas, or Redcap's, so named from the colour of their Turbans, trained up by them in their Religion, and warlike Discipline; as the Turks their Janissaries; yet far inferior to the Turk, against whom if they have prevailed since the time of Abas, they may ascribe the greatest part of their good fortune to those divisions and Rebellions which in these late times have been frequent in the Turkish Empire. And as for their Sea-forces they are inconsiderable: For though they have a large Sea-coast both on the Persian Bay, the Caspian Sea, and the Southern Ocean, yet are they very poor in shipping; suffering the Moscovite to engross the trade of the Caspian Sea; the Portug ●● to manage that of the Southern Ocean; as formerly that also of the Persian Bay, till the taking of Ormuz.  
The Revenues of this Kingdom in the time of Hysmael the first Sophy, were exceeding great: insomuch that Tamas, his Successor to ingratiate himself with all sorts of people, released them of all kinds of Customs imposed on Merchandise either imported or exported. And this they say amounted to the sum of 90000 Tomans yearly: which, reckoning every Toman at 20 Crowns, made up a million and 800000 Crowns of annual income. Which notwithstanding, his Revenue was computed at four or five millions of Crowns yearly; raised out of Domain lands, the tenth of fruits, the profit of mines, and the 〈◊〉 paid by every subject when he sets up shop. But Tamas finding this not to be sufficient to maintain his Royalty, doubled the value of his money, and thereby for the present his Revenues also. Since that they have been much impaired by the Conquests made upon them by the Turks, who had got from them so much land as maintained 40000 Timariot, and yielded to the grand Signeur one million of yearly income: whether improved again or not to their former height, I am not able to determine.   
And so much for Persia.   

OF TARTARY.  
ARTARIA is bounded on the East, with China, the Orient all Ocean, and the straits of Anian, by which parted from America; on the West, with Russia, and Podotra, a Province of the Realm of Poland; on the North, with the main Scythick or frozen Ocean; and on the South, with part of China, from which separated by a mighty wall; the the River Oxus, parting it from Bactria, and Margiana, two Persian Provinces; the Caspian Sea, which separates it from Media and Hyrcania; the Caucasian Mountains interposing betwixt it and Turcomania; and the Euxine, which divideth it from Anatolia and Thrace. So called from the Tartars, a puissant and mighty people now possessed hereof; the reason of whose name we shall show hereafter.  
It containeth all those great and spacious Provinces which the ancients called Seres, Scythia extra Imaum, Scythia intra Imaum, Sacae, Sogdiana, the greatest part of Sarmatia Asiatica, and part of Sarmatia Europaea: extending itself the whole length of Asia from the River Tanais to the Eastern Ocean, taking in Taurica Chersonesus, and some other parts of Europe also. So that if we measure it by miles, it is said to contain 5400 from East to West, and 3600 from North to South: a greater quantity of ground than the Turkish Empire, but of less fertility and account.  
In measuring by the way of degrees, it reacheth from the 50. degree of Longitude, to the 195. which is 145. degrees from West to East: and from the 40th. degree of Northern Latitude, unto the 80th. which is within ten degrees of the Pole itself. By which account it lieth from the beginning of the sixth Clime, where the longest day in summer is 15 hours; till they cease measuring by Climates, the longest day in the most Northern parts hereof being full six months; and in the winter-half of the year, the night as long.  
The Country lying under such different Meridian's, and such distant Climes, must needs be such as no general Character can be given of it, and therefore we shall defer that, with the names of the Rivers, and chief Mountains, to the description of the several and particular Provinces. But for the people, being much of the same nature in every part, we may take the measure of them here. Affirmed to be of square Stature, broad faces, hollow eyes, thin beards, thick lips, flat noses, ugly Countenances; swart of complexion, not so much by the heat of the Sun, (which keeps far enough off) as their natural sluttishness. Barbarous every where in behaviour, especially in those parts which they call Asiatica, and Antiqua: but withal very strong of body, swift of footmanship, vigilant in time of service, and patient of all extremities both of cold and hunger. The women suitable to the men, scorning or wanting ornaments to set themselves out, or when they do, they seldom go beyond copper, feathers, or such precious gewgaws.  
In behaviour they are rude and barbarous, as before was said; eacing their Enemies when they take them, as in way of revenge, first letting out their blood which they receive into Cupe, and use it as wine unto their feast. Though swift of foot, yet generally they love to ride though it be but on Oxen: about whose necks, as about their horses, when they travel, they use little bells, with which music they are much delighted. Their spearh, even in their common talk, is a kind of whining; and their singing little better than the howling of wolves. They eat commonly with unwashed hands, the dirt and grease about their fingers serving as a sauce for their meat, which they devour greedily, and with little chewing; and for their ordinary drink use mares milk. Homely of habit, made of the coursest stuff, and reaching no lower than the knee: and if they go to the charge of furs, contrary to the custom of other people, they wear the hairy side outwards, and the skin next their own bodies; only to show the richness of their Apparel. And yet so proud in this beggary, that they account the Christians but as dogs, contemn all the rest of the world, and think their Cham the only considerable Prince, by whose name they swear, as by their Gods.  
In matter of Religion it is hard to say whether Mahometanism or Paganism be of most extent: some parts hereof being wholly Pagan, some wholly Mathometan, and some mix of both. But of the two the Pagan is the better Gentleman, as being of the elder house, and of more Antiquity: the Sect of Mahomet not being entertained amongst them till the year 1246.  
And yet these have not so prevailed, as to extinguish the remainders of Christianity, of which there are amongst them many several Churches. The Christian faith first planted amongst the Scythians by the preaching of Saint Andrew, and Saint Philip, two of the Apostles. Overgrown in these later Ages by the Sect of Nestorians, either by the diligence of their Preachers, or for want of others to instruct them in more Orthodox Tenets. Before the prevailing of the Tartars, besides the Circassian Christians of whom more anon, there are in the most remote parts of Tartary, whole Kingdoms of that Religion; as namely that of Te●duc, than the chief of all; besides some numbers of them in Tangath, Cauchinteles, Cassar, Samarchan, Karthim, Suchair, Ergimul, and Caraiam, where in the time of Paulus Venetus, who surveyed these parts about the year they lived intermingled with the Pagans. Not so diminished since the conquest of those Countries by the Tartars, but that they are of a considerable number, especially in Cathay itself: where they are said to have a Metropolitan in the City of Cambalu (the principal City of that Empire) and he so honoured by the Great Cham, that they receive their Crowns successively from no hands but his.  
As for the Tartars, they are by the Chronologer Genebrard, said to be the offspring of the Ten Tribes, whom Salmanassar led away captive, and that especially for three reasons. The first is, that the word Tatari, by which name (saith he) they ought rather to be called, than by that of Tartari, signifieth in the Syriack and Hebrew tongues, a Remnant. But unto this it is answered, that the name of this people is derived from the River Tartar, as some; or from the Region called Tartar, where they first dwelled, as most think: and again, that though the Hebrew word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signify a remnant, yet can it not properly be applied to the Tartars; who so infinitely exceed the Jews, that they cannot be thought to be a remainder of them. Secondly, he allegeth for proof thereof, that this people use circumcision, the character of the Jewish Nation. And here unto it is replied, that circumcision was common to many people, besides the Jews, as to the Egyptians, Aethiopians, etc. and that rather as a national custom, than a religious ordinance; and again, that the Tartars cannot be proved to have received circumcision, before they received Mahometanism. Thirdly, there is brought to confirm this opinion a place of Esdras, cap 13. lib. 2. where it is said, that the Ten Tribes (that they might the better keep God's Statutes) passed over the River Euphrates, and after a journey of an year and a half, came into a Country called Arf●reth. To refel which, those of the contrary opinion find no better course, than by showing the impossibilities of it. For the Tartars (when their name was first known) were mere Idolaters, had no remembrance of the Law, observed not the Sabbath, nor any other point of Jewish religion: and so the Ten Tribes retired not hither to keep God's Statutes. Secondly, Euphrates lieth quite West from Assyria, and those places to which Salmanassar transplanted the Israelites; and so it could not be passed over in a journey towards the North. And Thirdly, it is very improbable, that the ten Tribes should either be so simple, as to leave Assyria, where they were peaceably settled; or so valiant, as to force a passage through those Countries of Scythia; which neither Persians, Greeks, or Romans were able to withstand in the best of their fortunes.  
To let pass therefore all imaginations of a foreign Pedigree, the truth is, that they were no other than a Ruder and more Northern brood of Scythians, who pressed by want, or otherwise oppressed by the King of Tenduch unto whom they were subject, armed themselves against him, obtained a memorable victory, and settled Cingis their chief Captain in the Royal Throne. Anno 1162. After which growing of more power, and enlarging their dominions further; they united in the name of Tartars all the Scythian Nations: as Mahomet did those of the three Arabia's in the name of Saracens; or as in former times, the many several Tribes of the Germane Nations, were united in the names of Franks or Alemen. Not known in Europe by this name till their many great and signal victories had made them formidable, which was about the year 1212. within very little of which time they had made themselves Masters of a larger Empire, than that of Macedon or Rome, in their greatest glories. But being of a hasty growth it decayed as suddenly; the greatest part of their European purchases being conquered from them by the Dukes of Moscovy, and the Kings of Poland; as their acquests in Asia, and Asrick, by the Turks and Persians. Yet still they are possessed of so large a territory, that were they not distracted into several States; or did those several states depend upon one Supreme; that one Supreme might very easily give law unto all his Neighbours; and make the Turks and Persians tributaries, as in former times. But laying aside these speculations of what they might do if united under one command: let us now look upon them as they are divided into these five parts, that is to say, 1. Tartary. Precopensis, 2. Asiatica, 3 Antiqua, 4. Zagathay, and 5. Cathay.  

1. TARTARY PRECOPENSIS.  
TARTARY PRECOPENSIS is bounded on the East, with the River Tanais, now Don; on the West, with the River Borysthenes, now called Nerper, by which last parted from P●dol●●, a Province of Poland; on the North, with part of Russia; and on the South, with some part of the Euxine Sea: and by this account lying totally within Europe.  
It had the name of Precopensis, from Precopia a chief Town thereof. By some called Tartary Minor, to distinguish it from the greater body of that people: the Inhabitants hereof most commonly passing by the name of Crim-Tartars, from the Town of Crim, in which their Cham or Emperor doth reside most usually. The Country by them now possessed, part anciently of Sarmatia Europaea, was inhabieed by a warlike nation called the Tauri; from whom those parts hereof which lie betwixt the Empire of Russia, and the two Rivers Tanais and Borysthenes, were called Tauro Scythia; that which shooteth out into the Sea, encompassed with the Euxine on the one side, and Palus Maotis on the other, being called Taurica Chersonesus. In the description whereof at this place and time, as formerly I made bold with some part of Asia to lay together the estate of the Russian Empire: so now to satisfy for that trespass, I shall make bold with part of Europe, to lay together the discourse and affairs of Tartary,  
The whole Country plentiful of fruits, and the soil indifferently disposed to tillage and grazing, though more accustomed unto the last: the people more delighting in their herds of cattle, than in the fullness of their Garners. Camels, Horse, Oxen, Sheep, and Goats they have plenty of; great store of delicate fowl, and abundance of fish, bred in the large Fens of Moeotis: and in their forest's plenty of all sorts of Venison. Which Character as it belongeth generally to all the Country, so most especially to the Chersonese or Demy-Iland. United to the main land with so narrow an Isthmus, that the Tartars once went about to dig it thorough: from whence some say they had the name of Precopenses, Precoph in the Sclavonian tongue signifying a deep trench, or a digging thorough. In length not above 24 German, or 96. Italian miles; in breadth but 60 of the one, or 15 of the other. Blessed with a very temperate Air, and a gentle winter: which beginning with the last of December ends the first of March. Never extreme, and when the frosts are at the sharpest, but of short continuance. Divided in the midst with a chain of hills extended from the East to West, the boundary of the Dominions of the Turk and Tartar.  
The people of the same complexion and composition, as the rest of the Tartars; and not much different in manners. Their diet, Roots, Cheese, Garlic, and of the poorer sort, for the most part horseflesh (none but the better sort presuming upon Beef or Venison, though of both abundance) which they eat without bread or any thing else: and therefore when they go to the wars every Soldier takes two horses with him, the one to serve upon, and the other to kill. And yet for all this havoc which they make of horseflesh, there are few years in which they sell not 40 or 50 thousand in the fairs of Moscow. Towns they build none, scarce willing to maintain those which were built to their hands. Nor have they (except men of trades and manufactures) any standing houses, removing up and down with their Droves of cattle, moving their houses with them, (which they build on wheels) from one place to another. Of money they make no esteem, preferring brass and steel before other metals, because more useful to them for Swords and Knives. Good Soldiers for the most part, especially at the Bow and A rows; to which so accustomed from their childhood that they can shoot as readily backward as forward. Trained also of late times to the Harquebuse, well skilled in handling the Turkish Scymitars, and their horsemen's Staves. Not to be vanquished but by death, as men that are resolved rather to die than be taken Prisoners: and if victorious, more intent upon taking Captives (especially young Boys and Girls, whom they sell to the Turks) than upon any other Booty or spoils of war.  
The Religion most embtaced and countenanced is that of Mahomet, mingled with some of their old Principles of Christianity: for they confess that CHRIST shall be the Judge both of quick and dead in the day of judgement, and punish those that speak irreverently of him. In that regard more favourable to the Christians than other Mahometans, which makes great store of Grecian and Armenian Christians to dwell amongst them. The language which they speak is their own Tartarian, but intermixed with much of the Arabic, and Turkish Tongues, and when they write, they use either Chaldaean or Arabian Characters.  
Rivers of most note in it, are 1. Borysthenes, & 2. Tanais, which though they have their spring-heads in the Empite of Russia (as was there declared) have their falls in this: the first in the Euxine Sea, in the 57th. the other into Palus Moeotis in the 67th. Degree of Longitude; by which we may conjecture somewhat of the length of the Country. 3. Hipanes, 4. Carcimitis, falling into the Euxine. 5. Agaris, and 6. Byces, which lose themselves in the Fens of Moeotis; As do also 7. Pasiascus, 8. Gerus, 9 Lycus, from the mainland, and 10. Istrianus from the Taurican Chersonese. By the confluence of which waters, and many others falling from the Asian side, the lake or Fens of Moeotis are of great extent, in compass at least a thousand miles, well stored with fish, and still retaining somewhat of the sweetness of those many Rivers which are emptied into it. So called from the Moeotae who formerly inhabited on the banks hereof, and giving name to an excellent kind of fish which were called Moeotides by the Ancients. At this day generally called Mar delle Zabahe, by the Italians commonly Mar della Tana, the sea of Tanais, and sometimes also Mere Bianco, or the White Sea, to difference it from the Euxine, which they call the Black, for the reasons formerly delivered. Passing directly towards the South, it is straightened by a narrow Channel not above four miles in breadth though about 24 in length, called anciently by the name of Bosphorus Cimmerius. Bosphorus, because Oxen did use to swim over it; Cimmerius from the Cimmerii who possessed the adjoining Country on the Asian side: but known at this day by the name of Stretto di Caffa; from the City Capha near unto it; and by the Inhabitants Vospero, more near the original. Out of this Straight that confluence of waters which do meet in the Maeotick Fens do make their way into the Euxine. According to that of Lucan.  
Quaque Fretum currens Maeotidas egeritundas.  
Where the Maeotick Pools at last  
Thorough a narrow Streight makes haste.  
Chief Cities of it at the present, 1. Capha, or Caffa, in the Chersonese not far from the Straight called hence Stretto di Caffa; a flourishing Empory, and furnished with a large and capacious Haven. Heretofore possessed by the Genoese, who by the benefit of this Port, and the plantation which they had in Perah on the North side of Constantinople, engrossed into their own hands the whole trade of the Euxine. Taken by Mahomet the Great, Anno 1475. it became subject to the Turks, and drew into that thraldom all the Southern parts of the Chersonese which depended on it: deprived thereby of the greatest part of its former lustre, the Christian Churches being destroyed, the Towers and public buildings razed, the houses of the Genoa Merchants which were fair and beautiful destroyed and ruined; yet still the principal of this biland, or Demy-Iland; and anciently better known by the name of Theodosia, and by that name remembered in Ammianus. 2. Precoph, in Latin called Precopia; a Town and Castle situate in or near the place where stood the Eupateria of the Ancients: called also Pompeiopolis, Heraclea, and A●hillis Cursus. 3. Corsunum, the Chersonesus of Ptolemy, anciently a Greek Colony; & then accounted for the chief of the whole Peninsula: ric●, populous, and well-traded, by reason of the Haven which was safe and large; and of great beauty and magnificence, as the ruins testify. By the Turks at this day called Sari-Germanum, or the yellow Tower, the soil about it being of a Saffron colour. 4. Cremam, or Crim, the ancient Seat of the Chams or Prince's of these Tartars; and at that time the fairest and greatest of this Biland. Situate in the midst thereof, and fortified with a strong Castle, for the height of the walls, and depth of the ditch esteemed impregnable; supposed to be the Taphrae of Pliny, or the Taphros of Ptolemy. Mentioned by Florus, as then lately taken by some Roman Emperor, and so most likely to be Trajan, the first that ever extended the Roman Empire beyond Danubius and the Euxine. Situate in the very Isthmus, and so commanding both the Euxine and the Lakes of Moeotis; as Corinth betwixt the Aegean and Ionian Seas. 5. Panticapaeum, situate on the very Bosphorus, and now called Vospero by the natives: the ancientest City of this Peninsula, and said by Ammianus to be the mother of all the Greek Colonies which were planted in i●. 6. Tanas', the Tanais of Ptolemy and other ancients, because situate on the mouth of that River, or rather betwixt the two mouths of it, distant from one another a degree of Longitude. A town of great trade, and well frequented by the Merchants of all those Countries which border on the Euxine Sea: but subject to the Turks who hath there a Garrison, and by them called Azac. 7. Ingermenum, situate on a large and losty Mountain, and fortified with a Tower or Castle of stone, under which there is a Church, with great charge and Art cut out of the Rock: formerly of great wealth and fame, now decayed and ruinous. 8. Jamboli, by some called Balachium. 9 Mancopia, by the Turks called M●ngutum, 10. Circum; all boasting of their several Castles. 11. Oczakow, or Ocz●●covia, situate near the influx of the great River Borysth●nes into the Bay of Carcimitis; and so most like to be built in the place of that which Ptolemy calleth Olbiah, Pliny, Olbiopolis. Honoured of late times (since the taking of Taurica by the Turks) with the residence of the great Cham: from whence these 〈◊〉 are by some called Olsanenses. 12. Metropolis as Ptolemy, or rather M●letopolis as Pl●ny calleth it; a Colony in old times of the Milesians, not far from Olbia. Besides all which, and many others mentioned by the ancient Writers of which there is nothing now remaining; the Court of the great 〈◊〉 in Summer time makes a movable City; built upon Wheel-houses, and transported from one place to another, as occasion serveth: which houses at every station are orderly disposed of into Streets, and lanes, and by the Tartars are called Agara, or a Town of Carts.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were of Scythian race; for by that name some elder writers call not only the true and proper Scythians lying on both sides of Imaus; but even the Sauromatae or Sarmatians also; and those not only of Sa●matia Asiatica bordering next unto them, but even such European nations, as lived on the Northern banks of Ister, and the Euxine Sea. And so they are affirmed to be by Ptolemy himslf, though otherwise more exact than any in distinguishing Sarmatia Europaea from Asiatica; and Asiatica from the Scythians For speaking of the Nations of Sarmatia Europaea, inhabiting on the Palus Moeotis, he ranks them thus. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. i. e. And all along the coasts of Moeotis, dwell the jazyges (distinct from those called Metanastae) and the Rhoxolani; and more within the land, the Hamaxobii and Alani, Scythians. More towards the banks of the Euxine, and in the Chersonese itself, dwell the ancient Tauri, subdivided into the several Nations of the Sin●hi, Napaei, and Arinchi, by the said Ptolemy included in the general name of ●au●o Sovt●. To none but these of all the European Sarmatians doth he give this name. And therefore I conceive them to have been those Scythians against whom Darius Kings of Persia made his fruitless war. Picking a quarrel with this people, because their King had denied to give him one of his daughters to wife; or to revenge, as others more improbably say, the inroad which the Scythians formerly had made into Asia; he drew together an army of 700. thousand. Passing over the Thracian Bosphorus, he came at last to the banks of the Ister, where it parteth Moldavia and Bulgaria; and there for the passage of his men caused a bridge to be built; to the keepers whereof he left a Cord of 60. knots: commanding them every day to untie one knot, and if he came not back before all were united, to return to their houses. This done he marched towards his enemies, who still fled before him; leading him into the most desert and unhabitable parts of their Country: and when they had brought him into a straight, sent Ambassadors to him with a bird, a mouse, a ●rog, and an handful of Arrows; willing the Persians, if they could, to expound that Radle. Darius' willing to hope the best of his design, conjectured that the Scythians did submit unto him, by delivering into his hands their Air, Earth, Water, and Arms, Hierog●yphicall signified in their present. But Gobrias, one of the seven Princes made this exposition, that if the Persians could not fly like a bird thorough the air, or like a mouse creep under the earth, or like a frog swim over the water, they could by no means scape the Persian Arrows. And to say truth this Commentary best agreed with the Text. For these Scythians following close upon him, or rather driving him before them, and vexing him with continual skirmishes, forced him to make such haste to get over the River, that he lost 80000 of his men in the sight and flight. This was the only memorable Action of these European Scythians in those elder ages: more memorable in the times succeeding for their horrid cruelty, than any argument of their valour. For it is said of these Tauri, or Tauro Scythae, that for the pleasing of their Gods, especially of 〈◊〉 whom they called Orsiloche, they used to sacrifice all such strangers as they could lay hands on, and with their heads most barbarously adorned the walls of her Temples. An inhumanity with which the Christian Advocates of the Primitive times, did much use to upbraid the Gentiles; taunting them with the sacrifices of Diana Taurica (so named from hence) as inconsistent with the nature of a God or goodness: most rightly giving them this brand or censure, that they were not sacra, but Sacrilegia. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Better it was to be of no Religion, than of one so cruel.  
But to go forwards with the story, in the actions of the Greeks and Romans we hear nothing of them, unless it were that the Emperor Trajan (as Florus seems to intimate) took the City of Taphre. Which if he did, he added by that action somewhat to his own honour, but nothing to the Roman Empire: this people being never reckoned amongst their Provinces. Nor hear we any thing by name of their infesting the Roman territories (as the other barbarous Nations did) except they passed in the account of the 〈◊〉 Alani, Huns, Avares, or other of the Scythian or Sarmatian people, by which the majesty of that Empire was trod under foot. But what the Persians, Greeks, and Romans were not able to do, was with ease effected by the Tartars: who in the time of Joccatha, or Hoccata, the next to Cingis, under the conduct of Bathu, or Roydo, one of their most renowned Commanders, subdued all these parts, together with Russia, on the North Bulgaria, and Hungary on the East. Subject at first to the command of the Great Cham of Cathaia, as the rest of the Tartarians were, they came at last to have a Prince of their own; one L●chtan Cham, descended from the aforesaid Bathu, and (as it was pretended) of the blood of Cingis. They grew at last of so great power by conquering the Asiatic Tartars which lay nearest to them, that Mahomet the Great thought fit to keep them down before grown too strong for him: and therefore under colour of taking in the City of Capha, then possessed by the Genoese, made himself master of the greatest part of the Taurican Chersonese, and the Port of Tanais; thereby commanding both Moeotis and the Enxine Sea. In the time of Selimus the first, who had married a daughter of this Crim-Tartar (for so they call him) and was aided by him with an Army of 15000 men against his Father; the Turks and these Tartarians grew into a League. The chief conditions of it were, that the Tartar should aid the Turk upon all occasions, with 60000 horse, if it were required; that they shall not make war with any of their neighbours, (except the Moscovite) without leave of the Turk; that they shall pay yearly to the Grand Signieur in the way of tribute 300 Christians; that the new Cham, upon the death or deposition of his Predecessor, shall receive from the Great Turk a Royal Banner in token of his Confirmation in that estate: that in reward of these services the Crim-Tartar shall have yearly from the Grand Signieur 5500 Ducats in the way of pension; and succeed finally in the Turkish Empire, if ever the male issue of the house of Ottoman should chance to fail. According unto this agreement the Tartars have been aiding to the Turks from time to time against the Persians, Polanders, Hungarians, Moldavians, and indeed whom not, and that with great and puissant Armies, the Great Cham sometimes arming 150000 of his own Subjects (leaving but one man in an house to attend their cattle) and sometimes adding 50000 Circassians, and others of the Asian Tartars. And for the Moscovite, whom he is left at liberty to assault by this Capitulation; he hath had so hard an hand upon him, that in the year 1571 they pierced as far as to the City of Moscow, and set fire on the Suburbs: which flaming into the City built most of wood, and then reckoned to be 30 miles in compass, within the space of four hours burnt the greatest part of it, and therein no fewer than 800000 of all sorts of people: A quarrel not to be composed, the Tartar not only laying claim to the Kingdoms of Casan and Astrachan, which the Ruff possesseth; but even to Moscovie itself, as hath there been shown. Nothing so punctual is the Turk on his part, to perform the contract, who not content to have the Tartar for his friend, or at the worst his Homager, hath of late times attempted to make him his slave or Vassal. For Amurath the third, quarrelling Mahomet the Crim-Tartar for a design to intercept Osman Bassa in his way from Persia to Constantinople; authorised the said Osman to war upon him: by whom the poor Crim and his two sons, betrayed by some of his own Counsellors (corrupted with Turkish Gold) were strangled with a Bowstring; Islan a brother of the Crims, first sworn a Vassal to the Turk, put into the place; and over him a Turkish Beglerbeg or Bassa to command in chief. What hopes he hath of succeeding in the Turkish Empire, if the house of Ottoman should fail, hath been already taken into consideration, in our discourse upon that subject.  
What the Revenue of this Prince is, it is hard to say; his subjects having little money, and living most upon the bartery of their cattle. But besides what he hath in Lands or customs, and the 5500 Ducats yearly which he receiveth from the Turk; he hath the tenth of all the spoils which are got in the wars, and a Checkine for every Captive, for some two or three (whosoever taketh them) according unto their estates.  
As for his power, what he can do in horse we have seen already; And as for foot, and Ammunition, and other necessaries, he is supplied with them by the Turk, (who doth sometimes espouse his quarrels) by whose assistance they have brought the Moscovites to some extremities. And upon confidence of the favour and protection of the Grand Signieur, the Cham then being, upon the death of Stephen Bathori (whom Amurath the 3d. commended to the Crown of Poland) sent Ambassadors to negotiate his election to that Kingdom: and to induce them thereunto promised them in his letters amongst other things, that their Pope should be his Pope, their Luther his Luther; and that rather than put them unto any charge to find his Table, he could live with Horseflesh. His Embassy entertained with Laughter, as it well deserved.   

2. TARTARY DESERTA.  
TARTARY DESERTA is bounded on the West, with Precopensis, and the Empire of Russia; on the East, with Antiqua and Zagathay, from which last parted by the River Spane, which falleth into the Caspian Sea about the middle of it, and the great Lake of Kitay, from East to west; on the North, with the Scythick or frozen Ocean; and on the South, with part of the Euxine Sea, the Caucasian Mountains, and some part of the Caspian.  
It took this name from the many Deserts which are in it, and is called also Asiatica, to difference it from Pre●opensis, which is wholly in Europe: or because it taketh up the whole Continent of Sarmatia Asiatica, according to the bounds thereof laid down by Ptolemy, except some part hereof incorporated to the Russian Empire.  
The Country of itself sufficiently fruitful, if well mannured; and were it in the hands of a laborious and industrious people, would yield large increase: as appears by the ill husbandry of the Tartars, who sow nothing on it but Mill and Puateum (grains unknown to us) and that without giving it any ullage, receive very plentiful returns of both. But the Tartar being a Nation that hateth Agriculture, and laugheth at Christian for living on the tops of Reeds, (so they call our bread) neglect all that which is not of a rank pasture for their Herds and cattle; moving from one place to another as the grass faileth them; which maketh it so full of Deserts, and so empty of Towns, as to deserve the name of Tartarta Deserta.  
The people or Inhabitants of it are of several sorts; derived from three several Originals, and disposed of in three several parts. 1. The Samoyede, dwelling towards the Northern Ocean, who are wholly Idolaters. 2. the Circassians, bordering on the Euxine, for the most part Christians; and 3. the Tartars, planted betwixt both, being all Mahometans. These again subdivided into several Tribes, which they call their Hordes, of which the most considerable are, 1. the Nagaian Tartars, 2. the Zavalhanses, 3. the Thumenenses, 4. the Kirgessi: besides the Hordes or Kingdoms of Casan and Astrachan added unto the Empire of Russia, where described already; and others of inferior note, not here considerable.  
But before we come to speak of these people in their several places, we must first look upon the whole Country as presented to us under the name of Sarmatia Asiatica: bounded by Ptolemy as before, save that it did extend more Westwards, and was unknown to him in the Northern parts of it; now possessed by the Moscovite. So populous in the time of that Author, that he giveth us the names of forty several Nations which did then inhabit it, and of about as many Towns of good estimation. Of which there are few or none remaining: and for the names of some of the principal of them, we shall have them presently.  
Rivers of most note in it, 1. Marabius, 2. Rhombitus the Greater, and 3. the Less; 4. Auticus, 5. Theophanius, 6. Psathis, 7 Thesyris, 8. Corax, and 9 Vardanes; all of them falling into the Euxine, and Moeotick Fens. 10. Udonis, 11. Alnuta, and 12. Rha, paying their tributes to the Caspian or Hrrcanian Sea. Of these the principal is Rha, by the modern Latins called Volgo, by the Tartars Edi, rising in Russia, not far from the City of Moscow, (where we have described it). Most memorable, besides the seventy mouths or Channels, wherewith it openeth into the Caspian, for a medicinable and wholesome root growing on both sides thereof, which the Physicians call Rha, by the name of the River, and for distinctions sake Rha Pontic, to difference it from Rhubarb, or Rha Barbarum, as of a different nature from it, this last being purgative, and the other more apt to bind. 13. Ob, a River unknown to Ptolemy, rising out of the lake of Kitay, a Lake in bigness like the Sea, and full of many little Lands (most of them inhabited). Which River at its first parting from this Lake is said to be of 8 miles' breadth; and growing still bigger and bigger, emptieth itself at last in the Northern Ocean, the present boundary betwixt the Russian and the people in the North of this Country.  
Principal Mountains of this part, 1. Corax, giving name unto the River issuing out of it. 2. Montes Hippici, extended towards the Caspian Sea. 3. Montes Ceraunii, lying in the furthest parts hereof (then known unto my Author) to the North and East. 4. Caucasus, or Caucasii Montes, extended from the Euxine to the Cuspian Seas, and parting Sarmatia Asiatica from Colchis, Iberia, and Albania. A chain of hills of which Aristotle saith, acumine & latitudine omnium maximi, etc. that for height and breadth they are the greatest of the East, the tops whereof are lightened by the Sunbeams in midnight till almost daybreak, when it is dark-night in the valleys beneath. Not passable for horse or foot (except they creep along by the Euxine shore) but at one place only, called Sarmatiae Pylae, or the Gates of Sarmatia; by others named Caucasie Portae, from the hills adjoining. Situate in the 81 degree of Latitude; and not far from the Caspian Sea: but that so intricate and narrow, that very small force may keep it against strong Armies. So carefully did Almighty God in his heavenly Providence, shut up this fierce and barbarous people, from the rest of Mankind, by such unfordable Waters, and impassable Mountains: not to be freed out of their prison, till he thought good to use them, as the executioners of his wrath and vengeance, for the punishment of sinful and impenitent Nations. This said, we will consider those particular Nations, which before we named, and are now possessed of it in their several places.  
1. Opposite to the Preco●enses lie the CIRCASSIANS, extended from the Cimmerian Bosphorus and the Fens of Maeotis, towards the Eastern shores of the Euxine Sea, for the space of 500 miles, and reaching 200 miles towards the North. The name imposed on them by the Tartars; whereas before, they were called by Pliny, Zigae, by some writers Zychi, conceived to be the Zinchi of Ptolemy.  
The Country very fitly seated for trade and merchandise, as having a fair and large Sea-coast, with many Rivers opening into it (nine of those spoken of before passing thorough these tracts) and not a few capacious Bayss, and commodious Havens. Of which the principal were Sinus Cerceticus, or the Bay of Cercetis, Syndi, and Bata two known Havens, and specified by my Author with the adjunct of Portus. But these conveniences not much looked after by the present Inhabitants, who are more inclined to the wars, than to trades, or merchandise. A stout and military people, trained to their weapons from their childhood; and sold as soon as trained to it by unnatural Parents. For from these parts did the Mamalucks of Egypt fetch their first Original; from hence supply themselves with a perpetual Seminary of slaves and Soldiers, raised by degrees unto the highest dignities of that slavish Empire. And from these parts the Persian Sophies are supplied with their Cozzel-Bassas, disciplined and instructed by them like the Turkish Janissaries.  
The Christian faith was here planted in the year 860 or thereabouts, by the Ministry of Cyrill (or Chiarill) and Methodius, employed in that service by the Patriarch of Constantinople. In which respect their Churches are of the Greek Communion, conform thereto in rites and doctrine, and of the jurisdiction of that Patriarch: but differing from them very much in matters practical. For it is ordinary with these half Christians not to baptise their children till eight years old; to hear divine service standing without their Churches, into which they very seldom enter (especially the Gentlemen) till the 40th. or (as some say) the 60th. year of their age: dividing the whole course of their life betwixt God and the Devil, in dedicating their youth unto theft and Robbery, their old Age (when they can no longer commit those villainies) to the difficult business of repentance.  
Places of most observation amongst the Ancients, 1. Cimmerium, a Town and Promontory, so called from the Cimmerii, once the chief people of these parts; of whom more anon; situate on the very shore of the Bosphorus, from hence denominated. 2. Phanagoria, in old times a well-traded Empory; situate on a little Island raised out of the Sea by the care and industry of the Greeks, who had here a Factory. 3. Apathurgus, by Pliny called Apaturum, memorable for a Temple of Venus surnamed Apaturia (which name she gave unto this place) because (saith Strabo) when the Giants assaulted her, she craved help of Hercules, who slew them all one after another. 4. Gerusa, by Ptolemy honoured with the title of Civitas; the Gargaza of Diodorus, now called Saint George's. 5. Oenuntia, near the mouth of the River Thesyris. 6. Araza, more within the land, which with 7. Ampsacis, hath the name of a City also. The name of their chief Havens we have seen before. But few of these or any other mentioned by the ancient Authors, being now visible in their ruins: the chief of those which are now extant are 1. Locoppa, 2. Conioco; but of no great note.  
The people anciently though divided into the several Tribes of the Thyrsagetae, Zigae, Turcae, the Huns, Avares, and Moeotae, all noted Nations; besides the Coaxtrae, Zinchi, Tyrambae, Pselii, and others as obscure as they: were better known by the name of Cimmerians, in which those several tribes concentred. Descended in the right of that common original from Gomer the son of Japhet, first planted in the mountainous places of Albania: his posterity known by the name of Gomerii, afterwards Cimmerii, left there a memorial of themselves in the mountains called Cimmerini. But that Country proving both too barren, and too narrow for them, some of them passed into Phrygia Major, where they built the City Cimmeris, not unknown to Pliny, in whose time it was extant: and others in some tract of time keeping the Euxine on their left hand fixed themselves in these parts, here giving name to the Town and Promontory Cimmerion, to the Cimmerian Besphorus, and generally to all the people descended of them. From these particularly as the stout and valiant Nation of the Cimbri do derive their Pedigree; so from these and the children of Mesech, Magog, and Tubal, the Sarmatians both of Europe and Asia, the Moscovites, and perhaps the Scythians, are to fetch their Original: all of them great and puissant Nations, and all involved promiscuously in the name of the Scythians. Renowned for no other action more than the memorable expedition which they made into Media in the Greater, and Lydia in the Lesser Asia: the Cimmerians by themselves alone, or by them as principal the rest of these Sarmatians in a body together as a Scythian People. Distressed with want, or to disburden their small Country of superfluous multitudes, these Cimmerii in the time of Nabulassar, or Salmanassar King of Assyria, communicating their design with the rest of the Scythians to enlarge their quarters, holding along the course of the Euxine Sea, and passing thorough the Country of Colchis, first seized on some parts of Pont us and Paphlagonia. Where having fortified the Promontory on which Sinope was after built, and leaving there their carriages and the weakest of their train with sufficient guards, they marched into Lydia, reputed (as it was indeed) for a wealthy Region. There they possessed themselves of Sardis, the royal City, and after of the rest of the Country or the most part of it; Ardis, the son of Gyges', who then reigned in Lydia, not being able to withstand them. Both besides being wearied with long war, and grown more pliant by degrees unto one another (as in like case betwixt the Saxons and the Danes) it proved no difficult matter for Halyattes, the grandchild of Ardis, to compound the business: assigning to the Cimmerians all those parts of his dominions which lay beyond the River Halys, and settling his Lydians in the rest. By this transaction there were so good correspondences betwixt the Nations, that when Cyaxares, King of the Medes, invaded the Country of these Cimmerians, under colour of the invasion which the Seythians had made in Media; Halyattes did espouse the quarrel, and appeared in their aid. In following times, growing into confidence of one another, and mixed in marriages and blood they became one people; or at least passed not under the account of strangers, or the name of Aliens. Such end had this most notable expedition of these Cimmerians; not much remembered after this for the like undertake. Yet here they held their own, though in other names, governed by many petit Princes, but all associated with Mithridates against the Romans: that King being so great amongst them, that his son Machares, having married into some of their families, was made King of Bosphorus. But Machares having made his peace with Lucullus, the Romans never looked this way. Nor hear we much of them in succeeding times till the invasion of the Tartars, by whom subdued, they acknowledged at first the Great Cham for their Sovereign Lord: whose power declining, they have successively been subject to the Crim-Tartar, the Turk, and Moscovite, but most commonly to the Crim-Tartar as their nearest neighbour and most able to hurt them. And him they furnish on command with 50000 horse for the Grand Signeurs service: yet so that they supply the Persian with his Cozzel-Bassas, and sometimes serve under him for pay, as they do under any which will entertain them. Governed like the Suissers, by their several Commonalties, yet so, that every Commonalty hath some principal man (which the Swissers have not) whom they call Morseys, (that is Dukes) to direct and order them.  
2. Betwixt these and the River Volga dwell the ZAVOLHENSES, one of the greatest Hordes or Tribes, of all the Tartars; and therefore called Horda Magna. Of these the Crims, or Precopenses were a Castling only, proceeding out of this great Swarm or Nest of Hornetts, though afterwards they became their masters. Of the Country or the People we say nothing here: having sufficiently spoken of both already. Their chief Town hath the name of Bo'gar, situate on the River Volga, and from thence so named: Volgar, and Bolgar differing but little in Orthography, and not much in sound.  
This Country, as I take it by the situation, should be that which Ptolemy calleth Mithridat is Regio: whether so called in honour of him by the Princes of the neighbouring Cimmerians, with whom he had contracted alliance; or that he had made any conquests there; or from some other Prince of the same name; I determine not. And in this tract were those two Pillars advanced unto the honour of Alexander, in Ptolemy called Columnoe Alexandri, in whose time they stood without defacement: there being also Altars erected to him, or in memory of him, near the Banks of Tanais; occurring in the same Author by the name of A●oe Alexandri. Which probably occasioned the error of Qu. Curtius, who brings Alexander in pursuit of the Scythian war, as far as Tanais: whereas it is apparent by the course of his actions, that he never got beyond the River jaxartes; distant from Tanais no less than 2000 miles.  
This Tribe first governed by its own King, whom they called Vlu-Cham, or the Great Cham, was in the year 1506. subdued by the Crim-Tartar, and made subject to him. Afterwards conquered by Basilius the Great Duke of Mos●ovy, who thereupon assumed the title of King of Bolgar, which his Successors still preserve, with the Town itself; well garrisoned to keep open the whole course of the River Volga, by which they manage the great trade of the Caspian Sea. But for the main body of this people, they returned again to their obedience to the Crim●, as being a limb of the same body with him, and are subject unto his commands: though by reason of their neighbourhood to the Moscovite, and commerce with that Nation, they frame themselves both to their language, habit, and behaviour.  
3. East of the Zavolhenses, on the other side of the Volga, dwell the NOIHACENSES, or NAGAIANS', spreading as far as the borders of Zagathay, and declining Southward towards the Caspian Sea, and the Montes Hippici. Accounted the best men of war of all the Tartars, but more fierce and cruel than the rest: void of all Arts, not having, or contemning, money, or the use of Corn. Horseflesh and Mare's Milk, their best diet; the flesh either roasted by the Sun, or heated by continual hanging at their sadle-bow. And with such cheer (nor worse nor better) did Azim Can, one of the Princes of this Tribe, entertain Jenkinson and other English men in their travels to the Caspian from the River Volga. Their chief Town, if possibly it deserve that name, is called Scharayirzik, the Residence of one of their Princes; and the next, Sellisture, where the said Jenkinson found the Cham, as in the prime place of his abode. The Government is by several Morseys, the Heads or Chiefs, no doubt, of their several Clans: agreeing well enough together against the Moscovite, whom they infest with frequent inroads, and put him to the charge of continual Garrisons, at Casan, Astrachan, and Wiatra. Their wars for the most part only proedatorie, rather to get some present booty, than out of any hope to enlarge their dominion: and therefore commonly pacified, and sent home with presents. The Great Duke is so good a Statesman, as to think the expense of money cheaper than that of blood; especially when he hath to deal with such an Enemy, who hath neit her any Town of consequence, or fixed place of dwelling, and consequently nothing to be got but blows. Their Morseys, formerly more in number, were of late times reduced unto three; of which he of Scharayick was the Chief; to whose direction, and appointment (especially in matters which concerned the public) the other two do commonly submit themselves.  
4. Betwixt these Nagaians', and the Circassians, lie those Tribes which they call the KIRGESSI, spreading as far as to the mouths or influx of the River Volga: but intermixed with the Heselites, and Baschurides, two other of the Tartarian Tribes, but of less power. Their life, for the most part in continual motion, removing with their wives and families from one place to another; and governing themselves in their removes, by the sight of the Polestar. Partly Mahometan, partly Gentile; but the Gentiles make the greater number, not burying their dead bodies, as in other places, but hanging them upon a tree, though they stink again: certain enough that they will be devoured or sweetened, before they return back to the same Station. Much reverence yet they give their Priests, by whom sanctified & besprinkled in their public meetings with a certain mixture compounded of blood, milk, earth, and Cowdung. A most sweet confection, but good enough for them that desire no better. And yet with these the Moscovite is fain to hold fair compliance, and to send them every year some presents, for fear they should join with the Nagatans', or otherwise disturb him in his Caspian Trade down the River Volga.  
5. The THUMENSES or THUMENTARTARS lie more North than any of these Tartarians; having on the South, the Zavolhenses, and the territory of Viatka in the Empire of Russia. A warlike people, and living near a dangerous neighbour: for which cause they do not straggle so abroad in petit companies, as the others do, but keep together in great bodies. For the most part much delighted in Negromancy and conjurations. In which the devil so befools them, that he suffereth them to raise tempests, and sometimes by Diabolicaell illusions to defeat their enemies. The only Hord of all Deserta, which still continue in obedience to their natural Lord the great Cham of Cathay. And unto these we may adjoin the Molgomozans, all Gentiles, and the most barbarous of all; living in Caves, and feeding upon worms, and mice, and Serpents, and such other Vermin, as would be poison unto any but such Molgomozans, who are more poisonous than those creatures.  
These Hordes, together with the Kingdoms of Casan, and Astrachan, and such of the Russian Provinces as lie on the East of Tanais and the River Duina, make up that Country which anciently passed under the name of Sarmatia Asiatica: inhabited originally, by the Descendants of Gomer, Mesech, Tubal, Magog, the sons of Japhet, spreading themselves more Northwards as they grew in numbers, out of Aloania, Iberia, Colchis, and the Pontic or Cimmerian Nations. Divided into the Tribes or Families of the Olandae; Gerri, Samocolchi; Sovani, Seci, Scim●itoe, Agaritae, Merdi, Conapseni, Chaenides, Basilici; Hyperborei, H●pp●phagi, and others of as little note: these last so called from their eating of horses, which diet they have left unto their Successors. So like in manners and conditions to the neighbouring Scythians, that they passed commonly by that name: and by that name are memorable for the expedition by them made into Asia the Greater, at such time as the Cimmerians fell into Asia Minor. For passing without opposition thorough the Sarmatian straits, where they might have been easily kept out, and leaving behind them the more barren Country of Albania, they fell into Media, where they were encountered, but victorious, by Phraartes, than King of the Medes. Who finding that he was not able to remove them by force, assayed it by cunning; and first persuaded them to look towards the South, as into richer Countries, and more like to yield them full content. Hereupon, full of prey and presents, they marched towards Egypt, out were met in Syria by Psamniticus the Egyptian King, who had heard of their coming, and thought it best to entertain them on the way, and not to bid them welcome at home to his greater cost. Outvying the Median (as of the two the richer Prince) he loaded them with gifts and treasure, and so sent them back again into Media; from whence they came: where for many years they afflicted that people and the neighbouring Provinces, doubling their tributes, and using all kind of insolences: till in the end, Cy●xares, the son and Successor of Phraartes, acquainting some of his most faithful subjects with his design, caused the better part of them to be plentifully feasted, made them druak, and slew them; recovering thereby the possession of his whole estate. Afterwards, imitated by the English in their Hock-tide slaughter. Such of them as escaped this blow, and were not willing to be subject to the Kings of Media (as many of them were) were suffered to return home by the same way they came, where at their coming, they found foul work made by their wives and their slaves, the story whereof we had when we were in Russia. After this we hear nothing of them in the stories of the Greeks and Romans, unless those Amazon:, who attended their Queen Thalestris, when she bestowed a visit on Alexander, were rather of these Sarmarian Amazon:, than of those of Pontus and Thermodon, as I think they were: the nearness of their dwelling to Hyrcania, in which place they found him, inducing me to this opinion. But possible enough it is, (though it be not certain) that some of these Sarmatian tribes, though by other names, hearing of the successes of the Huns, Avares, and other barbarous nations which made havoc of the Roman Empire; might join themselves unto them, and make up their numbers: those nations being else two small to compound such Armies, as by them were brought into the field against the Romans, with out such like helps. What their estate hath been since subdued by the Tartars, hath been shown already.   

3. ZAGATHAY.  
ZAGATHAY is bounded on the East, with the Mountain Imaus, by which it is parted from Cathay; on the North, with the main Scythick or Frozen Ocean; on the West, with Tartary Deserta, from which separated by the River Soane, and the Lake of Kitay; and on the South, with the Caspian Sea, and the River Oxus, by which divided from the Empire of Persia. So called from Zigathay, a brother of one of the Great Cham's, on whom it was conferred for his better maintenance; the Scythia intra montem Imaum, of the ancient writers.  
The Country spreading out so far, on all sides; as before appeareth, comprehendeth all those Provinces and tracts of ground, which angiently were called 1. the Country of the Sacae, 2. Sogdiana, 3. Zagathay, specially so called, 4. Turchestan; included anciently in the name of Scythia intra montem Imaum; and 5. the Terra incognita which Ptolemy makes to be the Northern boundary of that part of Scythia. By taking a survey of all which particulars, we shall find the temper of the whole.  
1. SACAE, or the Country of the Sacans, is bounded on the East, with the mountain Imaus; on the West, with Sogdiana; on the North, with Zagathay, properly and specially so called; on the South, with the River Oxus, by which parted from Bactria. So called from the Sacae, the Inhabitants of it; but the reason of their name I find not.  
The Country anciently either barren, or ill manured; full of vast Forests, wide Deserts, and the like unhabitable places. Few or no Cities in it, and not many villages (civitates autem non habent, as my Author hath it) the people living for the most part in Caves, or otherwise wand'ring up and down with their droves of cattle. Called for that reason Nomades by some ancient writers. The name not proper to these only, but common to all those who followed the like roving life, as the Sarmatians, wild Arabians, Saracens, and the Inhabitants of Libya and Numidia in afric. Only one fortified place they had, which from the materials of it had the name of Turris Lapidea, (〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, in the Greek) or the Castle of Stones; Part hereof being peopled for the most part by Camels, or travellable only with those Creatures, had the name of Camelorum Regio.  
Divided it was anciently into many Tribes, the Caratoe, and Comari, near the River Jaxartes; the Massagetae, and Comedoe, near the hills called Ascatanas; the Bylcae and Grynaei, more within the Country. All joined in one by the name of Sacae; and by that name made a very fortunate Progress into Armoniae (to which they had an easy passage by the Northern banks of the Caspian Sea) and therein gave name unto the Province called Sacasena. But proceeding into Cappadocia, and there slain by the Persians in the midst of their Feast, they left there also some resemblance of their name, in an annual festival called Sarea, celebrated by the Persians in memorial of their good success in the war against them. Such as stayed here, being overcome by Cyrus the first Persian Monarch, did so good service to that Prince, that Amorges the King of these Sacoe, is said to have rescued him from the hands of the Scythians, by whom otherwise he had been slain, or taken Prisoner. In the declining of that Kingdom, they were subdued by Alexander at the end of his Scythian, and Sogdian wars; who hereabouts, by Cobortanes a noble Persian, was presented with a Bevy of beautiful Ladies, one of the which was that Barsine whom he made his wise, and had by her that Hercules, whom Polysperchon and his faction proclaimed King of Macedon. Not memorable in the following times for any thing which they did or suffered; as they have been made by the opinion or mistake of others. Who building Castles in the Air, will needs derive the Saxons (our famous Ancestors) from this Original: as if they were called Saxons, quasi Sac-sonnes, or the sons of Sacae. A fancy in my poor conceit, of no ground at all. For either the number of these Sacae, when they left these parts, must be great, or little. I little, how can we conceive it possible they should force their way through those valiant Nations of both Sarmatias; who to the last maintained their liberties and estate against the Romans. If great enough to force their passage (for stout and provident Nations use not to give passage to great Armies, but they pay dear for it) how can we think it possible they should be shut up in a corner of Germany, betwixt the River Albis and the Cimbrick Chersonees. The Saxons then, whatsoever they were, were no sons of the Sacae; and what in likelihood they were hath been elsewhere shown.  
2. SOGDIANA hath on the East, the Sacoe; on the North and West, Zagathay specially so called; on the South, the River Oxus, parting it from Margiana. So called from a cha in of Mountains named Montes Sogdii, being the chief of all this Country, though of themselves a spur or branch of the Mountain Caucasus.  
The Country indifferently fruitful, and very rich in pasturage, because very well watered. For besides Oxus and Jaxartes, which are common unto them and others; they have many Rivers of their own. The principal of which, 1. Dymus, and 2. Araxates, both navigable and capable of very good ships; both also running down the hills with a headlong course, and passing through the champain Country, empty themselves at last in the lake called Oxiana; as is affirmed by Ammianus, but as Ptolemy faith, into Jaxartes.  
Places of most consideration it, 1. Drepsa, the Metropolis or mother-City of this people. By Pliny called Panda, by Solinus Darapsa; situate on the River Oxus. 2. Oxiana, on the same River, and from thence denominated. 3. Maruca, on the same River also. 4. Alexandria, called for distinctions sake, Alexandria Oxianoe; which name declareth both the founder and the situation. 5. Alexandria, for the same cause of distinction, named Alexandria ultima: either because the last City which he built in these parts, or because it lay furthest off on the borders of the Scythians; against whose invasions or eruptions it was said to be built. 6. Tribarra, one of the chief hereof in the time of Ammianus Marcellinus. 7. Cyroschata, more memorable, and not less ancient, than any of those named before, by Qu. Curtius' called Cyropolis, built by Cyrus, to fortify his borders against the Scythians. It held out against the great Macedonian, a long time: and he himself coming nigher to the wells, than discretion would permit an ordinary General, had such a blow on the neck with a stone, that he fell to the ground, his eyes swimming in his head, and his whole Army giving him for slain. But reviving he took the Town by a mine, and levelled it with the ground, in revenge of so great a danger.  
The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Oxydracoe, and Candari, dwelling at the foot of the Sogdian mountains; the Oxianis, and Cherasmii, near the banks of Oxus; the Jasii, and Tachori, near the River Jaxartes; the Drepsiani in the East parts bordering on the Sacoe; whose chief City was Drepsa: descended from their several roots, but all called Sogdians. Conquered by Alexander, not without danger to his own person, as before was said, at the solicitation of Spitamenes a noble Persian, it rebelled again. Who being suppressed, and the Country in some measure quieted, Arimazes, a native of the Province, renewed the war. Who followed with 30000 men, encamped upon the top of an hill, in a place of such notable advantage, that Alexander, neither by force nor fair words, could get him out of it. He therefore dealt with 300 of his youngest and most active men, on the promise of great reward, to climb the hill, and without any noise to show themselves at the back of the Enemy. Which having performed with the loss of 30 of their company, Alexander sent one Cophes to Arimazes, to let him know that the whole Army of Macedon was at his back: who terrified with what he saw, more with what he feared, gave up the place, and was scourged and crucified for his labour. So necessary in the Art of warrefare is a piece of wit. After this time, it ran the same alterations and change of fortunes, as the Persians did; till they were conquered by the Tartars, unto whom still subject.  
3. ZAGATHAY specially so called, is bounded on the East, with Cathay; on the West, with Turchestan, and part of the Caspian Sea; on the North, with the Country of the Samoyeds, the Terra Incognita of the Ancients; on the South, with the Sacae, and Sogdiana. Anciently part of Scythia intra montem Imaum, and took this new name from Zagathay, the first Prince hereof since the time of the Tartars.  
The Country reasonably fruitful, but not so rich in the natural temper of the soil, as the industriousness of the people, more civil far than any other of the Tartars; studious of good letters, lovers of Arts as well ingenious as Mechanic; well skilled in manufactures, and very seldom without the confluence of foreign Merchants. Populous, and well-stored with towns and villages; both for their own more handsome dwelling, and the entertainment of others.  
Chief Rivers of it, 1. Jaxartes, now called Chesel, the principal of all this Country: great of itself, but made much greater by the waters of 2. Daix, another River of good note, rising out of the mountain called Norosus, and falling with many others into Jaxartes; mixed with whose streams they are dischannelled in the Caspian Sea. 3. Jartus, and 4. Polytimetas, falling into Oxus. Others there are whose names I find not in my Authors, descending from the mountains of this Northern Region, which are great and many. As viz. 1. Norosus, spoken of before. 2. Aspisii, on the North of that. 3. Toporus, more unto the North. 4. The mountains called Sychi, more Northward still. 5. Those called Anaroei, besides 6. Imaus, of most name, but common unto Cathay as well as to Zagathay.  
Cities of most observation in it, 1. Aspabota, the only Town ascribed by Ptolemy to this Country, and by him honoured with the title of Civitas. 2. Zabaspia, of less antiquity, but of greater estimation at the present time. Situate on the mouth of the River Oxus (now called Abias') on the brink of the Caspian, and much frequented by the Merchants of foreign Countries, chiefly from India, and Cathay. 3. Marachanda, ancient, and of fame, but placed by Ptolemy, (why I know not) amongst the Cities of Bact●ia: differing herein from the common and received opinion of other Authors, by whom this City is affirmed to be on the North side of Oxus, and consequently not within that Province. Made good by Spitamenes, (who having delivered the Traitor Bessus into the hands of Alexander, revolted from him) against the Macedonian Army; by which besieged under the command Menedemus. But Menedemus being slain, with some of his Soldiers, Spitamenes escaped hence to Bactria, where he was slain by his own wife, and his head presented to the Conqueror. Here was it also that Alexander, being then Master of the Town, in a drunken fit slew his dear friend Clyt●us, who at the battle of Granicus had saved his life, by receiving a blow which was aimed at him. It was afterwards called Samarch and, the seat-royal of Tamerlane, by whom enriched with all the spoils and treasures he got in the wars; there being brought hither from Damascus only (and by that one instance we may guests at the rest) 8000 Caemel● laden with the choicest moveables. Still the chief Residence of the Chams of Zagathay, but far short of that magnificence which once it held. 4. Bichend, of no Antiquity, nor of such great name as the Regal Samarchand, but at this time of greater wealth; situate somewhat in the midland, but populous, and a well-traded Town. 5. Azara, memorable for being made the Rendezvous of that mighty Army which Tamerlane raised against the Turks, consisting in the total of 1200000 fight men when it was at the biggest. 6. Maranis, from which place the said Tamerlane, having received his aids from China, began his march.  
These Tartars, called Zagathayans, by the name of their Country, are of a different government from that of the Great Cham of Cathay, though subject to him at the first: and have so been ever since the time of Zaicham or Bathu, the third great Cham; who gave it unto Zagathay, a younger son, whence it had the name. To Zagathay succeeded Og, by some called Zaincham, (the Father of Tamerlane) a peaceable and quiet Prince, who rather studied to preserve than enlarge his Empire. But Tamerlane being of a fiercer and more warlike nature, made the first proof of his valour and good fortune against the Moscovite (for spoiling a City which had put itself under his protection) whom he overthrew with the slaughter of 25000 foot, and 15000 of his horse. Moved with this notable exploit, and the hopes of greater, Gino Cham, the great Emperor of the Tartars gave him to wife his only daughter, and therewithal declared him his heir apparent. Encouraged and enabled with this advancement he first broke down the wall of China, encountered with the King thereof, overcame him in battle, and imposed on him the sum of 300000 Crowns of yearly tribute. Having left things quiet at his back, and taking with him a great part of the forces of Chin●, he advanced forwards against B●●azet, the fourth King of the Turks; of the greatness of whose growing Empire he began to be jealous. Passing along the lefthand shores of the Caspian Sea, and so through Albania, and the rest of the Provinces which lay in his way (which he took and conquered as he went) he came at last into Asia Minor, where near the City of Sebastia, he encountered with Bajazet, vanquished him; slew 200000 of his men, and carried him away captive in an iron Cage. Restoring those Princes dispossessed by Bajazet unto their estates, and taking to himself all the Turkish Provinces in Anatolia; he bestowed a derivate visit on Constantinople, which seen, he marched towards Syria, subdued both that Province and the Kingdom of Egypt, then possessed by the Ma●alucks; visited Jerusalem, and did honour to the holy Sepulchre; returned by Babylon, and won it, and with it the whole Countries of Babylonia and Assyria. And taking Persia in his way, impatronized himself of that Kingdom also; and such parts of India, as either lay near Persia, or his own dominions: now made the Sovereign Lord of all the Regions and Kingdoms in both Asias, excepting the chief India; for which the rich Kingdom of Egypt may be put in balance. Come home at last to Samarchand, he there died in peace. A Prince of strong body, but lovely lineaments, his eyes bearing in them such rays of majesty, that ordinary men could scarce endure to look upon them. His hair long, contrary to the custom of the Mahometans, (for the most part shaved on their heads) for which he pretended a descent from Samson. Perfect in the Arabian learning, and a lover of all learned men, a hater of Idols, and Polytheism, and a great friend to the Christians. More fortunate in the conquering of so many Kingdoms, than in ●aying any sure foundation to maintain his conquests. For by holding his seat Royal in Samarchand, Camb●ln, and other the chief Cities of Cathay, he gave the remote Provinces the opportunity of returning to their former Governors: and by parcelling his estates amongst his Children, and kindred, this mighty flood which had so quickly overflown both Asias, returned in very little time within its own proper and original banks. Even Zagathay itself, divided from the Empire of Cathay, had its King apart (hardly acknowledging the great Cham for the Lord in chief) the most considerable of whom was that Saba, who in the new beginnings and unsetledness of the Sophian Empire, invaded Persia: but instead of recovering that Kingdom into the power of the Tartars, he lost some Provinces of his own. Hyrcania, Margiana, and some part of Bactria, being since subdued by Abas the late Sultan. Nothing since memorable, that I meet with in the affairs of this part of the Empire of Tartary.  
4. JURCHESTAN is bounden on the East, with Zagathay specially so called; on the West, with the River So●ne, parting it from Deserta; on the North, with those deserts which Ptolemy blindeth under the name of 〈◊〉; and on the South, with the Caspian Sea. So called from the Turks, some of which people when they left their first Seats near the Fens of Moeotis, settled in this Country, and here still continue.  
The Country as desert and ill planted, as the rest of Tartary, not so much out of any defect in the soil itself, as in the humour of the people: who though originally Turks, do yet compose themselves unto the lives of the Scythian or Tartarian Nomads, neglecting tillage, and abiding in no place longer than that place affords them pasturage for their cattle: huge herds of which they keep as their greatest treasure, but more to clothe their backs with the skins, than to fill their Bellies with the flesh.  
Amongst the Rivers of most note we may reckon, 1. Rhymnus, mentioned by Ptolemy, which by the position of it in the 91 degree of longitude, seems to be of this Tract. It riseth out of the mountains called Montes Rhymnici, giving name to the River, or taking name from it. 2. Ardock, not known by that name amongst the Ancients, and whether known at all or not, I am not able to say. Shaping its course towards the North, and weary of so cold a clime, and such barbarous people, after a long and swift course of a thousand miles, it hideth itself under the ground for five hundred more: but breaking out again, and finding little or no hope of a better fortune, loseth itself for ever in the great Lake of Kitay.  
To look for Towns amongst a people which delight not in settled houses, were a labour lost: yet some I find ascribed unto them. The principal, but of no great note, 1. Calba, and 2. Occrra; Then there is 3. Cr●stina, situate on or near the Lake of Kitay, never without the company of Russian and Tartarian Merchants: the Russians sailing to it by the River Ob; and the Zagathaian Tartars travelling to it by land. By these two nations more peopled, to maintain their traffic, than by the Turcomans themselves, in whose land it standeth.  
These Turcon●ans are of the posterity of some of those Turca, who wanting room, or otherwise oppressed with want, forsook their ancient dwelling near the Fens of Moeotis, and the coasts of the Euxine Sea, to seek new dwellings, Anno 844. That their whole body settled here, and from hence made their conquest quest of Persia, as some very industrious men are of opinion, I by no means grant. For when the Sultan of Persia, having by the means of Tangrolipix and those Mercenary Turks whom he invited to his aid, obtained the victory; and thought it fit for his affairs to detain them longer in his service: it is said he shut up the passages of the River Araxes, to hinder them from returning to their habitations. The shutting up of which River, and fortifying against them all the passages and bridges of it, had not served his tum, if the Turks had come from this place: for than he must have manned against them the River Oxus, and such as lay betwixt them and him in the common road. Nor is it probable, that the Turcomans' dwelling in this Province, on the East side of the River Volga, would undertake the fording of that dangerous and violent Water, and force themselves a way thorough Albania, and Armenia, with no greater numbers than 3000 men, which was the whole strength that they carried with them. So that it is not to be doubted but that they came first into Persia out of Turcomania, and not out of Turchestan: and probable enough, that when they first left their own abode, and came unto the Northwest shores of the Caspian Sea, they might there divide themselves; Some of which leaving that Sea on the left hand, and passing thorough the Sarmatian or Albanian straits, made their way into Armenia, and those parts of Iberia, which from them are now called Turcomiania. The residue keeping that Sea on the right hand, and crossing the Volga, where they found the passage most easy for them, settled themselves in these parts of Scythia which they found less peopled, now from them named Turchestan. Some of which hearing of the good success of their Countrymen in the Conquest of Persia, might afterwards join with them to assure that purchase. Governed since their first coming hither by the Chiefs of their several Clans, whom they honour with the title of Cham's; but all of them tributaries, and vassals to the Cham of Zagathay.  
5. That part of the Kingdom of Zagathay, which anciently passed under the name of TERRA INCOGNITA, and was accounted the Northern limit of Scythia intra Imaum, hath on the South, Turchestan, and part of Zagathay, strictly and specially so called; extending Northwards to the Scythick or Frozon Ocean; and bounded on the West, with the River Ob.  
The Inhabitants of this Northern Tract are now called by the name of Samoyeds; neither the people nor the Country known to the ancient Romans: and indeed neither of them worth the knowing. The men black haired, naturally be●trdless, and not to be discemed from women, but that the women wear a long lock down to their ears. Clad from the head to the feet in Deer-skins, or Seil-skins, with the hairy side outwards; (nothing more wise in that than the other Tartars). Their kind of life more rude than theirs, if more rude may be, ranging from place to place to place without any propriety of house or dwelling; the leader of each company their Priest's whom they call their Popa who at every one of their Removes is to offer sacrifice. Idolaters they are all, and most of then Witches, especially such as live most towards the East, and furthest off from the Moscovite, who many times destroy their Idols, and rob them of the skins of Bevers, black Foxes, and Sables, wherewith those Idols are set forth to the public view, but bestow on them greater heats in a good Fire; into which they commonly use to cast them.  
These Zagathaian Provinces, with those of Margiana, and Bactria, before described, made that part of Scythia, which anciently was called Scythia intra montem Imaum: though in the time of Ptolemy, when Margiana, Bactria, Saca, and Sogdiana, were reckoned of as Provinces of the Kingdom of Persia; this Scythia was restrained within narrower bounds, and comprehended only Turchestan and the Special Zagathay. Inhabited besides the several Nations dwelling in the four Persian Provinces, by many fierce and savage Tribes, as the Alan●, Alanoesi, Saubeni, and Massaei, towards Terra incoguita; the Tectosages, and Asiota, near the Mountain Imaus; the Jaxartae on the banks of the River so called; and the Mologeni, not far off; the Zarata, and Sasones, near the Mountains Alan●; the Galactophagi, or milk-eaters, more towards the East; the Taporaeai, and the Sychis, by the hills so named; and many others not material to be here remembered. All now united under the general name of Tartars, by whom first subdued.  
And now we are at last come to Scythia, truly so named; Sarmatia Europaea and Asiatica being called so only by way of participation and resemblance; because the inhabitants thereof had so much in them of the manners and conditions of these natural Scythians. Here therefore we intent to speak something of them, their name, Antiquity, disposition, customs, and the most memorable actions relating to them, as far as we can go by the light of story.  
First, for the name, the Gracian Fablers have derived it from one Scythes the son of Hercules, begotten by him on a Monster, half woman, half Viper. The Gramarians, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifying to be fierce and angry; whence it is said of the Jewish Puritans, who fasted to be seen of men 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they looked with a sour, severe, and a dissigured Countenance. Goropius Becanus doth derive it rather from the Dutch word Schutten, signifying to shoot: agreeable enough to the custom and exercise of the Scythians, who are observed by Herodotus, Pliny, Lucian, and other of the ancient Writers, to be very good Archers. But that the word Schutten signifieth the same in the ancient Scythick; or that the High-Dutch was originally the tongue of the Scythians, will not so easily appear.  
Letting that pass therefore as a matter not to be defined, let us look on the Antiquity of these Scythian Nations: and we shall find it to be great, if not greatest of all. Scytharum gens semper antiquissima, That the Scythcans were of all others, the most ancient people, was received for an Oracle, in the elder ages of the world: and so resolved by way of verdict, when the great controversy touching the Antiquity of those Nations was to be determited betwixt the Egyptian and the Scythian, who contended for it. And this hath passed with such a general approbation, that it is, now to be disputed. In which regard I am so far of the judgement of Becanus in that particular as to conceive that the Country's lying on the North of Mount Caucasus (on which the Ark is thought most probably to have rested) were peopled by the sons of Noah before they traveled towards the West, or set themselves on building the Tower of Babel. We had else no doubt heard somewhat amongst our Antiquaries, of the settling of some of those Adventurers in these Northern Regions, when giving off that enterprise, and falling upon new plantations, they either went themselves, or sent forth their Colonies, into all places of the world. But of any such plantations, ne gry quidem, not one word say they. Nor can it probably be supposed that Z●roaster the King of Bactria could have raised 400000 fight men out of that one Province (though some of the adjoining Provinces were took into the reckoning) in those early days, in which he did encounter Ninus the great Assyrian; had the Bactrians, and the rest of these Scythian nations been but a Castling as it were of some second swarm, and not coavall with the first. But besides these presumptions we have other proofs: viz. an old and constant tradition on this side the Mountains, that the great Vineyard of Margiana was of Noah's planting; and 2. the affirmation of Porcius Cato, (though one of the writers of Friar Annius) in Scythia Sagarenatum mortale genus, that mankind was repaired in these parts of Scythia, so called from Sabatius Sagar, an Armenian King, whose Dominions did extend thus far. So that I look upon it as a matter of strong presumption, if not demonstrably concludent, that these People were of the first plantation which was made after the flood; before the rest of the world was peopled by the Confusion of Languages: Scytharum gens semper antiquissima, could not else hold good.  
As for their dispositions, and natural inclinations, they are said by Trogus, or his Epitomator Justine, to be Gens & laboribus & bellis aspera, A Nation patient of labours, and fierce in war; of bodily strength immense and vast; yet so much masters of their affections, that they made no further use of their greatest victories, than the augmentation of their fame. Theft they esteemed the greatest crime, and that they punished so severely, that their Flocks and Herds might and did safely wander from one place to another, without fear of stealing. In them they placed their greatest wealth, feeding themselves with the milk thereof, and making their raiment of the skins. Silver and gold they contemned as much as it was coveted by others● there being no desire of riches, where there was no use. Mcum, and Tuum, those common Barretours, and authors of debate amongst other men, were not known amongst them: and therefore did not care for tillage, or made any enclosures, nor troubled themselves with the care of building. But putting their wives and children upon wains, or wagons, covered with hides against the weather, they removed from one place to another, no longer staying upon one, than they found grass and herbage to sustain their cattle. So just in all their actions, that they needed not the restraint of laws; and had attained to such an eminent degree of humane perfection, as not to cover. In a word, that moderation which the Greeks endeavoured to attain unto by the help of learning and Philosophy, was to these so natural: that the ignorance of vice did as much contribute to their welfare, as the knowledge of virtue. Such are the ancient Scythians affirmed to be. And being such, it was a wonder that the great Monarches of the world who had wealth at will, should make war upon them, amongst whom there was nothing to invite an Army, or reward a Conq verour. Yet either on desire of glory, or to add unto the former multitudes over whom he reigned, they were first invaded by Cyrus the great Persian Monarch, who quarrelling with Tomyris Queen of the Massagetes, a warlike Nation, inhabiting on both sides of the River Oxus, discomfited her Army, and slew her son Spargapises, who commanded it. In revenge whereof, the Queen having in a second battle obtained the victory, and took Cyrus' prisoner, is said to have cut off his head, and cast it into a boul of blood, with this scornful taunt, Satia te sanguine quem sitiisti, now drink thy fill of blood which thou hast so thirsted. But others tell us otherwise of the success of this fight. By whom it is reported that the horse of Cyrus being disordered on the sight of some Elephants which came from India to her aid, and himself dangerously wounded, the Scythians had won the victory, but for the coming in of Amorges King of the Sacons, (who of a conquered Enemy was become his Confederate) by whom he was rescued, and b the 20000 fresh men which he brought with him, obtained the honour of the day; though long he lived not to enjoy it, dying not long after of the wounds he had received. With Alexander they are said to begin the war, as loath to be behindhand with him; arming themselves upon the building of Alexandria ultima, so near their borders, which they conceived rather intended for a curb to hold them down, than for a btidle to keep them in. But being repulsed, and wife enough to suffer what they could not hinder, they sued for peace, and had it granted; Alexander being called away by the revolt of the Bactrians, a matter of more conseqnence than these Scythian brabbles. With Alexander's, Successors they had nothing to do, nor with the Persian Kings of the Parthian race: the Parthians being their Allies, and of Scythian breed. And for the Romans, it is well observed by the Historian, Romanorum arma andivere magis quaem sensere, that they had heard much of their valour, but never felt it: Remaining undisturbed in their honest poverty, till the Tartars an obscure and beggarly people broke out of their Prison, and carried the whole World before them.  
As for their Kings, I find some of their names laid down, but without any note of time in which their reigns might be supposed to begin or end. Nor can I think that the Kings occurring in that Catalogue, did either reign in the same place, or over the same Nations, or that they succeeded one another. Howsoever we will take their names as they come before us in this list of 

The Kings of Scythia.  
1. Scytheses.  
2. Napis.  
3. Phitra.  
4. Sagillus.  
5. Targitana.  
6. Plinus.  
7. Scholypethus.  
8. Panaxagora.  
9 Tanais.  
10. Indathyrsus.  
11. S●Ulius.  
12. Spargapisis.  
13. Tomyris.  
14. Aripethes.  
15. Seiles.  
16. Octimasdes.  
17. Lanthinus, the last of all those Scythian Kings who are conceived to have the government of these warlike Nations. But for my part I dare not say that ever any one King did command the whole people generally; each Tribe or Nation having their particular Kings, as in other places not reduced into form and order. And therefore for those Kings, if such Kings there were (as for some of them I durst venture to swear the contrary) they must be such as in their several Countries were of greatest same, most taken notice of in the world, or employed in the conduct of their joint and united forces; and so conceived to be the Kings of the whole Scythian Nation; as Cassibeline, King of the Trinobantes, and perhaps not that, is by some writers said to be the King of the Britain's, because he had the conduct of their forces against Julius Caesar.     

CATHAY.  
CATHAY is bounded on the West, with Zagathay, from which parted by the Mountain Imaus; on the East, with the Oriental Sea, and some part of China; on the North, with the Scythick, or Frozen Ocean; and on the South, with China only. So called, as some think, from the Chatae, an old Scythian people.  
The Country, notwithstanding the cold Clime under which it lieth, is said to be abounding in wheat, rice, wool, hemp, silk, and musk: Great store of that medicinal root called Rhubarb, or Rha-barbarum, to difference it from the Rhapontick growing on the banks of Volga. They have also very great herds of Camels, of whose hair they make those stuffs which are hence called Camelets, or Chamlets: and such an infinite breed of horses, that the great Cham feedeth yearly 10000 white mares, which he keeps for their milk. Some of their Rivers are reported also to yield golden sands. But whether it be so or not, certain it is, that it is so well provided of all things both for necessary use, and the pleasures of life, that it is thought to be inferior to few Countries of Europe. The Air indeed not so temperate, as in many places; in summer-times extremely hot, and in winter miserably cold: the thunders and lightnings being here so terrible, that in summer many men die for fear, when they hear it. The winds no less violent than the thunder, do sometimes tear up trees by the roots, and beat men from their horses; but seldom bring with them any storm of rain: the greatest showers which they have, hardly wetting the ground.  
The people are generally very warlike, strong of body, quick of action, fearless of the greatest dangers, patient both of want and labour: of mean stature, little eyes, sharp-sight, and thin beards. Industrious they are in several manufactures, of a good wit for dispatch of business: more honourable than the rest of the Tart●●ars, as loving to dress themselves gorgeously, to far sumptuously (if there be occasion) to live in handsome houses, and to frequent the most populous and best-traded Cities. They account not any for a wife till she bear them children, nor till then do meddle with their dowries; but repudiate them at a certain time, if they find them bar●en. They reverence their Cham, or Emperor, even to adoration: not suffering any stranger to come in his presence, except he be first purged: if any any otherwise presume, it is present death.  
The Religion publicly allowed and conntenanced, is that of Mahomet, but so that they obey the Pentateuch of Moses, and observe many things there commanded. It was much laboured by Pope Innocent, and King Lewis of France, that they should receive the Christian faith; and they found some inclinations in the people, and chief Princes to it. But finding by the Mahomentan Agents, who then laboured to bring them to their superstition, that Mahomet allowed of many wives, and other things more agreeable to their fleshly lusts, they conformed to that: Yet so, that there are many Idolaters in Cathay itself (I mean Cathay strictly so called) and some Christians also; the state of whose affairs we have shown before.  
Chief Rivers of the whole, 1. Palysanga, navigable up to the City of Cambalu, to which it is a means of conveying great store of merchandise. 2. Caromoram, so broad and deep that no bridge can be made over it. 3. Quiam, one of the greatest in the world; in length about an hundred day's journey; for breadth, in most places six miles, in many eight, and in some ten. 4. Quiantu, about half a mile over, and well stored with fish. Here are also very many Lakes, both large, and useful, as 1. the Lake of Cani●lu, in which are said to be so many pearls as would make them of no value, if every man might have leave to fish for them: which is therefore interdicted (without special licence) upon pain of death. 2. the Lake of Caraim, about an hundred miles in circuit, and so full of fish as might suffice for all the Country, did they love to eat of it. Their mountains we shall climb over in their several places.  
It comprehendeth those two large and ample Provinces which the Ancients called Serica, and Scythia extra montem Imaum: the first conceived to be Cathay especially so called; the last now named Altay, and subdivided into several Regions, of which more anon.  
1. SERICA, hath on the East some part of China; on the South, the rest of China, and some part of India; on the North, Altay, or S●yshia extra moutem Imaum; on the West, the mountains of Imans. In which I follow not the bounds laid down by Ptolemy, who for want of that knowledge in these remote Countries which these latter ages have afforded, is fain to shut it up on the North and East, with a Terra incognita. At the present it is called CATHAY, and that most probably from the Chatae a Scythian People, who subduing the old Inhabitants, became masters of it.  
But for the name of Serica, it was derived originally from Sera, the chief City of it; whence the people had the name of Seres; very industrious in their times, and amongst other things in the making of silks (made of a fine wool growing on the leaves of trees) from hence named Serica. Of great esteem amongst the Romans, as is said by Pliny, Tan● multiplici apere, tam longinquo orbe potitur, ut in publico matrona transluceat; being fa●●e fetched, and dear-bough, they were good for Ladies. Nor were they industrious only, but chaste and temperate. The names of Thiefs and whores were not known amongst them. They eat not any unclean flesh, nor used the company of their wives, either after conception, or during their menstrual purgations. So moderate of diet, that they lived commonly to the age of 200 years; the quietness and mildness of their disposition helping much thereto. Of yellow hair, watchet or Sea-green eyes, and good composure. Men of few words, but very just in all which they said or did Governed by a common Council of 5000 men, every one of which was to find an Elephant for the use of the State.  
If you will take the character both of the Country and People from Ammianus Marcellinus, he will give it thus. First of the Country, that it is plentiful and large, circled about with a chain of mountains, the two famous Rivers Oechar des and Banthisis with a still and slow stream running thorough the middle of the enclosed plain, spaciously stretched out to the sides of the pr●cipices: in one place large and open, in another lying flat and low with an easy descent; in which regard they have abundance of corn, store of cattle, and plenty of Orchards. The temperature of the Air pleasant and wholesome, the constitution of the weather clear and pure, the blowing of gentle winds most commodious, and the woods with a pretty glimmering of light, both within and under them: from whence the people with much sprinkling of water, softening that which the trees bring forth like a kind of Fleece, comb a most fine and tender matter, which they spin into silk, serving in former times for the nobility and gentry, now become common to those also of inferior rank. Then for the People, he saith that they are a frugal Nation, lovers of quiet, not troublesome unto their neighbours, without the use of Arms, and the knowledge of battles, declining the company of Strangers, and so far from covetousness, or curiosities, that when any Merchants come unto them to buy their silks, without much beating of the price, they let them have such things as are bred amongst them, without looking after the commodities of other Countries. So he. And if he did not overact the Panegyrist (as I see no reason why he should) never were people happier in the place of their dwelling, nor Country happier in its people.  
Chief Mountains of it (and mountains they had very many) were 1. the Montes Casii, and 2. Auzacii towards the East. 3. the Annibae, environing a great part of the Country. 4. the Asmirae●, 5. and those called Serici, near the City S●ra. 6. Tagurus. 7. Ennodorus, and 8. Ottorocorus. But by what names now called it is hard to say. Out of which flowed these principal Rivers, 1. Oechardes, by Pliny called Cambris, rising out of the montes Auzacii; 2. Psitara, issuing out of the Asmiris; 3. Ba●tisus, whose fountain is in the montes Casii; and 4. Lanos.  
Towns of chief note amongst them, 1. Sera, which gave the name of Serica, and Seres, to the Province and people. 2. Ottorocora, near the hills so called; whence it had the name. 3. Issedon, for distinctions sake called Issedon Serica, to difference it from another of that name in Scythia, called Issedon Scythica; the chief City of the Issedones, gens magna, one of the greatest Nations in all the Country, as is said by Ptolemy. 4. Orosana, 5. Drosache, 8. Daxata, of which little memorable. But these and all the rest (about nine more named by Ptolemy) being all decayed, let us next look on the chief Cities, as it stands at the present, by the name of Cathay: The principal whereof, 1. Cambalu, supposed to be the Issedon Serica of the Ancients; Built of free stone, and situate in the midst of the Country, as the heart and centre to the rest. It is seated on the River Polysanga, honoured with the great Cham's residence, and enriched with a mighty confluence of Merchants of all sorts. Besides other merchandises, there are every year 10000 Carts loaded with silk, sent thither from China. This City is in compass 28 miles, besides the suburbs: in which, besides other inhabitants of all sorts, are 50000 Astrologers, or rather fortune-tellers. 2. Xundu, the Royal Palace of the Emperor, is of a souresquare figure, every side extending 8 miles in length. Within this quadrant is another, whose sides are 6 miles long: and within that another of four miles square, which is the Palace itself. Between these several Walls, are Walks, Gardens, Orchards, Fishponds, places for all manner of exercise; and Parks, Forests, Chases for all manner of game. 3. Car●tan, where the women are said to gild their teeth. 4. Gouza, a fair City and a great, adorned with many Icol-M●n●steries. 5. Careanfu, near which there groweth an herb called Chiar-Cathay, of admirable effect against many diseases, and so esteemed of by the natives, that they value an Ounce of this, at a Sack of Rhubarb. 6. Segui, the residence of a Nestorian Bishop.  
The old Inhabitants hereof, in those parts which lay next the Scythians, are said to have been Ambr●pophagi, or man-eaters, most probably a Scythian Nation, that custom being so abhortent from the mildness of the Serican temper. Or else, we must correct the Copies of Ptolemy, by the History of Ammianus Marcellinus, who instead of Anthropophagis, placeth the Alitrophagi in the self same tract. The other Nations not distained with the like reproaches, are the Sizyges, and Anabi, not far off the Auzac●an mountains; the Pialae near the River Oechardes; the Geranaei, and Rhabbanaei, their nearest neighbours; the Throam dwelling towards the East, the Batae and Ottocororae more towards the South. These with the residue, governed by a Common Council of 5000 men, every one of which was to find an Elephant for the service of the Commonwealth, as was said before. And more than this we hear not of them in the way of story: the natives never going abroad to vent their wares, and having little speech with Strangers, when they come amongst them. Being vanquished by the Cha●ae, a Scythian Nation, from whom it is likely that it took the name of CATHAY; (for in this I go but by conjecture:) they continued under Kings of their own, till subdued by the Tartars; against whom they made such stout resistance, being besieged by ingis in their principal City, that when they wanted stones to cast out of their engines, they supplied that want with molten silver, and held it out so long, that Cingis finding victuals to grow short in his Camp, commanded that every tenth man should be eaten. But at the last being undermined, the Town was taken, the Citizens massacred, and their King or Emperor (as some call him) slain: after whose death, and not before, Cingis assumed the title of Cham, or Emperor. The residue of their story we shall have hereafter.  
ALTAY, called also SCYTHIA EXTRAIMAUM, is bounded on the South, with Cathay; on the West, with the mountain Imaus; on the North, with Tartary Amiqua; on the East, with the Ocean. Called Scythia, because planted by a brood of the Scythians. Extra Imaum was put to it, to difference it from that part of Scythia which lay on the West side of that mountain, nearest unto the Greeks and Romans. But now the Mountain, and the Country, have the name of Altay.  
To look upon it as it standeth by the name of Scythia extra Imaum, we find not any thing delivered of the Rivers or Mountains of it, but what is common unto them with the neighbouring nations: the mountains called Auzacii, Casii, and Ennodorus, being common unto this with Serica, as Imaus jointly to both the Scythia's, which it divided anciently the one from the other: though now this last be reckoned to belong to Cathay alone, because the Tartars on both sides of it profess themselves subjects to that Cham. This the most famous mountain in the East of Asia; beginning at the shores of the Scythick or Frozen Ocean; and extending thence directly Southwards unto Cape Coma●i, a Promontory of the Southern or Indian Seas. By which account it divideth the Greater Asia into East and West, as Taur●s doth into North and South, which Mountain it crosseth in right Angles, about the Longitude of 140. as before was said. That part hereof which lieth on the South of Taurus, was by the Ancients called Bitigo; and by the modern is named Gates: of which we shall speak more when we come to India. That on the North of Taurus, called Imaus properly, was anciently most memorable for dividing the vast Countries of the Scythians into Scythia intra Imaum, and Scythia extra Imaum; a division much observed by the old Geographers: now chiefly memorable for being the Sepulchre of some of the Chams of Tartary; most generally known by the name of Altay, but by some called Belgion.  
Chief Towns hereof were 1. Auzic●a, at the foot of the hills so named. 2. Chaurana, the chief City of the Chauranaei. 3. Saeta. 4. Issedon Scythica, so called to difference it from the other of that name in Serica. These with the rest, and all the Country, as far as it was known in the days of Ptolemy, inhabited by the Ab●i, Happophagis, or horse-eaters, a diet still used by the Tartars or modern Scythians. 2. The Issedones, who are said by Pomponius Mela to make Carousing Cups of their Father's heads, first trimed and gilded. 3. The Chauranaei, and 4. the Chatae; who being (as it seemeth) the most potent Nation, caused all the rest to be called by the name of Cathay; communicating that name also to the conquered Seres. Besides the possessions of which Tribes, there were also the Regions of Acbassa, Casia, and Auzacitis, these last so called from the Mountains upon which they bordered.  
More than this we have not to say of this Country by the name of Scythia, there being nothing memorable of it in the course of story, or worth the observation in the way of Chorography. Let us therefore look upon it, as presented to us by the name of ALTAY: though therein I shall trouble myself no further than by giving a brief touch on the several parts of it. Of which the most that can be said, will be but little for the information of the judicious Readers; who are not to be bettered by the names of places, if there be not something in them of further use. Now for these Provinces the principal of them are, 1. Cascar, 2. Chesmur, 3. Lop, 4. Camul, 5. Tainfu, 6. Caindu, 7. Carazan, 8. Cardandan, 9 Erginul, 10. Tanguth.  
1. CASCAR, bordering upon China, a Mahometan Country, but admitting of some Christians also. In some parts both sexes do indulge themselves this mutual privilege, that if the husband or the wife be absent above twenty days, the other party is at liberty to marry again.  
2. CHESMUR, the inhabitants whereof are generally both Idolaters, and Enchanters, causing the dumb Idols to speak, the winds to rise, and the sun to be darkened. For studying which black Arts (if they come to them by study) they have many Monasteries, in which their Hermits or monastics live a strict kind of life, and are very abstemious.  
3. LOP, memorable for a great Desert of thirty day's journey: so true a Desert, that whosoever doth not mean to be starved must carry all his victuals with him. Dangerous to travellers, if not beforehand made acquainted with their danger; the evil spirits using to call men by their names, and make them go astray from their company, where they perish with famine, or are devoured with wild beasts. The chief Town hereof called Lop, giving name to both.  
4. CAMUL, an Idolatrous Country, the people whereof account it a great honour to them to have their wives and sisters at the pleasure of such as they entertain. From which brutish custom when restrained by Mango Cham, they petitioned him at three years' end to be restored again to their former liberty; protesting they could never thrive since they left that custom. Which desire of theirs was at last granted, and is still in use.  
5. TAINFV, more civil than the rest, the people being very industrious and good Artificers, making the most part of the Arms which are used by the Cham; and some also which they fell to Merchants.  
6. CAINDU, with a Town in it of the same name, of great resort by Merchants (such as we commonly call petit Chapman) for the women's veils here made, with very great Art, of the barks of Trees. And it is well that they have veils to hide their shamelessness, the women of this Tract being prostituted unto every Traveller.  
7. CARAZAN, inhabited by a barbarous and savage people, who in the daytime live in dens for fear of Serpents, with which (and some of them ten paces long, and ten spans in thickness) they are much infested; and in the night go forth to prey upon Wolves and Lions. They have an use, that when any stranger cometh into their houses, of an handsome shape, to kill him in the night; not out of desire of spoil, or to eat his body, but that the soul of such a comely body, might remain amongst them.  
8. CARDANDAN, near Carazan, and as savage as that. The people whereof draw black lines on their bodies, which they count for the greatest Ornament. In case of sickness they send not to the Physician, but the next Enchanters: who taking Counsel of the Devil, apply some remedy; or if they think the man past cure, they tell him that his offences are grown too great to admit of help; and so put him off.  
9 ERGINUL, possessed by an Idolatrous people, but mixed with some Mahometans, and Nestorian Christians. In which Country they have certain Bulls as big as Elephants, with mains of fine white hair like silk, some of which they tame; and betwixt them and their Kine engender a race of strong and laborious Beasts, not inferior in that kind to Oxen. Here is alsofound a beast of an exquisite shape, but not bigger than a Goat, which at every full Moon hath a swelling under the belly, which being cut off by the Hunters, and dried in the Sun, proveth to be the best Musk in the World.  
10. TANGUT, the greatest and most potent of all the rest, inhabited by an industrious and laborious people, amongst whom the Art of printing is said to have been extant a thousand years. Blessed heretofore with a great increase of Christianity; but now the Gentiles or Idolaters make the greatest part, with some Mahometans amongst them. And for the serving of those Idols, they have not only many large and beautiful Temples, built in the manner of Christian Churches, and capable of 4 or 5000 persons; but also many fair Monasteries for the use of their Votaries and Recluses. They are possessed of many Towns, most of them well fortified, and planted with good store of Artillery. The chief of which, 1. Sachian, bordering on the Desert of Lop, inhabited by some of all three Religions; in which it is affirmed that they first used the Art of printing. 2. Campion, the Metropolis, or Mother City of this Country: where the Christians in the time of Paulus Venetus had three fair Churches: now over-numbred by the Gentiles. who have here many Monasteries for the use of their jaols, and many Religious persons dedicated to their service only. Who though they live more honestly than the rest of their Order, and hold it an impiety to tempt a woman to the act of lust; yet if the woman make the offer, they hold it no small si●●e to refuse her courtesy. 3. Su●cuir, situate amongst Mountains clothed with Rhubarb, from whence conveyed by Merchants over all the world, but so neglected by the natives, that did not the foreign Merchant bring it into request, they would scorn to gather it. This once a Kingdom of itself, but subject now, with Ta●guth, to the Cham of Cathay, or the Great Cham of Tartary.   

5. TARTARY ANTIQVA.  
TARTARY ANTIQVA hath on the South, Altay; on the West, and North, the main Scythick Ocean; on the East the straits of Anian, by which parted from America. So called, because the first habitation of the Tartars, who from this den or Jail, made their first eruptions, and have since overgrown so much of Asia.  
The Country cold, and comfortless, as lying under the Polar Circle, and in part beyond it: not fit for any but for such as can live no where else: yet heretofore a receptacle of many Christians (though those of the Nestorian Sect) who here enjoyed that liberty of their Religion, which the Persians and Sa●●●en● denied them in more pleasing Countries. It containeth many Regions, some not considerable. Those of most note, are 1. Thebet, 2. Tabor, 3. Tendu●, 4. Bargu, 5. Anian, and 6. Tartar.  
1. THEBET, a fenny Region, and full of woods, rich in Coral which they find on the Seashore, and use it instead of money. So named from the chief City of it, the ordinary Seat of the Abassi, or Pope of this Idolatrous people; much reverenced, and having in his power the disposing of all Offices which concern the service of their Idols; They have also some good store of Musk; and abundance of wild beasts which are bred in their Forests. But no beasts wilder than the people, who in times past (if not at the present also) used to bury their Parents in their own bowels, and to make drinking cups of their skulls; for fear lest in the midst of their jollity they should forget their Progenitors. Yet not more barbarous than immodest; it being contrary to their custom to take a wife that is a Virgin. And therefore the Mother's use to prostitute their daughters to the Merchant-Strangers, who having had their pleasure of them gratify them with a Jewel or some other present; which they wear on their wedding day: she being the most acceptable Bride to her husband, who bringeth the greatest Dowry with her of those base rewards. It contained once eight petit Kingdoms, (Homagers to the Kings of Tenduc) with many Cities: but now laid desolate by the Tartar.  
2. ●ABOR, once a distinct Kingdom also. One of the Kings whereof in the year 1540 came to the Courts of Charles the fifth, and Francis the first; where he found Princely entertainment. But upon proof that he was a Factor for the Jews, and secretly solicited many vato that Religion, by the command of Charles, he was burnt at Mantua.  
3. TENDV●, a populous Kingdom of itself, but greater in name and power, the Kings hereof commanding all these North-East parts, as far as the borders of Cathay. Christian in Religion, till the Conquest of it by the Tartars, though according to the Nestorian tendries: but now Mahometan ●or the most part, with some remainders, and but few, of Christianity. Divided into many large and spacious Provinces, as Chin●hintales, Cerguth, Egrigaia, Cercham, others of less note, so called according to the names of their principal Towns, or having some Towns in them of the name of the Provinces.  
Those of most note in Tenduc Itself, 1. Coras, the ordinary sepulture of the Kings of Tenduc, before it was subdued by the Tartars, and since that also. 2. Ca●acoras, where Cingis was first honoured with the Title of King. The Kings hereof bearing the port of Kings, and the office of Priests, were anciently called by the name of Presbyter Johannes, or Prester John: a title now erroneously conferred by some on the Emperor of the Abassines or Aethiopians in Asrick. Concerning which it is a wonder, that Joseph Scaliger, a man of such infinite reading, should be so deceived: and by the authority of his judgement deceive so many. For finding that there was a Presbyter Johannes in the North of Asia, and hearing vulgarly that title given unto him in afric; he fell upon a fancy that this A●assine Emperor was formerly of so great power, as to extend his empire over India, and the North of Asia; and in this last, for the assurance of his conquests, to hold his residence. A monstrous, and undefensible fancy. For besides that all histories, even those of the Abyssines themselves, are silent in it: how improbable is it, that a King reigning in the heart of A●●●k, should subdue the most remote parts of Asia; and there keep his Court: so many great States and most puissant Nations, being interposed? or that so memorable an exploit should be buried in silence, and found in no record but in Scaligers head? Besides it is well known, and generally granted, that the Presbyter John of Asia, was by Sect a Nestorim; but he that is so called in afric, of the Sect of the Jacobites: and further, that the Christians of Aethiop●● are circumcised, which never was reported of those of Asia.  
Letting this pass therefore as an unwarrantable, and ill-grounded fancy, we are to know that formerly this Province of Tenduc, was under the old Kings of Cathay, till the time of Cin-Cham, the King thereof. After whose death a certain Nestort●n shepherd (that is to say, the master of great flocks of sheep) being Governor of the Yaymans', a People of Tenduc, took to himself the title of king of Tenduc▪ whom they called by the name of Pr●●st John, or Prince John (the same word in their language, as in the Hebr●●, signifieth both Priest and Prince.) Dying he bequeathed his estate and flocks to his brother Unt-●ham, (commonly called in one word Uncham) a greater sheep-master than he, whose flocks ranged over all the past ures of the Mo●es, or Monguls and Tartars, though dwelling fourteen day's journey off, whom he had in subjection: the title of Priest John, or Presbyter Johannes, going along with the dignity and Royal estate. And though afterwards this Uncham was subdued by the Tartars, yet his posterity for long time were suffered to enjoy the title of Kings and Presbyters; (but Vassals, and Homagers, to the Great Cham): the Great Cham's, in regard of their nobility, and royal parentage, bestowing their daughters on them in marriage; as is said by William de Rubraquis, who traveled in these Countries, Anno 1253. the King hereof being then named George (the fourth from Uncham) but commonly called Presbyter Johannes, as his Fathers were  
4. BARGV, on the extreme Northwest, bordering on both those sides the cold Scythick Ocean situate under the North-star; of the same nature, both for the soil and people, as that of the Tartars. And  
5. ANIAN, on the North-East, opposite unto it, giving name unto the Streight● of A●ia●, lying betwixt Tartary and America, which straits the Tartars, and some other of these Northern nations, are thought to have passed over, and to plant that Country.  
6. TARTAR, so called of the great River Tartar, the principal of this Northern Tract, and giving name unto the Tartars: this being their Original Country, where they lived like beasts, having neither faith, nor letters, nor habitation, nor the use of Arms, nor any reputation amongst their neighbours. In matter of Religion, the worst sort of gentiles, worshipping the Sun, Moon, Fire, and the very Earth: to which they offered in the morning fasting, the first of their meats and drinks.  
Their Idols made of Felt, and placed on both sides of the doors of their tents or booths, as the preservers of their cattle, and the Authors of milk. Divided into five Clans, or Tribes, denominating so many Towns and territories in which they dwel●, that is to say, 1. Mongul. 2. Yek●-Mongul, or the Great Mongul) 3. Sommongul, or the water-Mongul. 4. Mercat. 5. Metrit: each of them Governed by its Chief, as commonly it is amongst barbarous Nations; though all those Chiefs subordinate to some higher power. Oppressed by Uncham, or Unt-cham, the King of Tenduc, who invaded their pastures, and compelled them to pay unto him the tenth of their cattle, with joint consent they removed somewhat further off, and denied their Tribute. This opportunity was taken by Cingis, one of the Tribe of the Yek●-Monguls, and so well husbanded, that they admitted him for their King. For publishing abroad amongst the Credulous people, that an armed man appeared to him in his sleep, with a white horse, and said, ● Cangius, or Cingis, it is the will of immortal God, that thou be Governor of the Tartars, and free them from bondage, and paying tribute; he found, a general belief; especially amongst those of his own Clan, who joining themselves to him, followed him, as their Ringleader, in all his actions. Thus backed and strengthened he made war against the Sommonguls, ●lew their Commander, and subdued them: and by their help, successively assaulted the Mercats, and Metrits, whom he also vanquished. And having thus subdued all the Clans of the Tartars, and added the estates of Theb●t, and Tanguth, unto his Dominions, he was by the consent of the seven Princes, or Chiefs of their Clans, (Thebet●, and Tanguth being added to the former number) placed on a seat on a piece of Felt, (the best throne they had or could afford) and saluted King; with as great reverence and solemnity as their state could yield. And first to make trial of his power, and their obedience, he commanded the seven Chiefs or Princes to surrender their places, and each of them to cut off the head of his eldest son: which was done accordingly. Had John of Leiden been a Scholar, as he was but a Butcher, I should think he had studied the Acts of Cingis, and proceeded by them. Assured by this of their fidelity and obedience, he set upon the Naymans', a people of the Kingdom of Tenduc, whom he overcame. And now conceiving himself fit for some great alliance, he sent to Uncham, and demanded one of his daughters for his wife, Which Uncham with some threats, but more scorn, denying; he marched against him, slew him in the field, and possessed his daughter, and with her also his estate. Proud with this good success, and encouraged by so great an increase of power, he invaded the Kingdom of Cathay; pretending for that also the authority of an heavenly vision, in the name of the immortal God: in which attempt, discomfited at first with a very great overthrow, but at last victorious; conquering the several nations of it by one and one, till in the end he brought the war to the chief City of that Kingdom, which at last he took, and therewithal the title of Cham or Emperor. Continuing in this dignity for the space of six years, and every year adding somewhat to his dominions, he was at last wounded in the knee at the Castle of Thaygin, of which wound he died, and was honourably buried in Mount Altay.  
This is the best account I am able to give of the beginning of this great Empire, the original of this spreading Nation, and the description of the Country of their first habitation. They that have christened some of the most Northern parts of it by the names of the Tribes of Dan, and Napthalim, and accordingly placed them in their Maps, might with more credit have supplied those vacant places, which they knew not otherwise how to fill, with the pictures of wild beasts, or monstrous fishes: which might well enough have pleased the eye, without betraying the judgement of the looker on. Of his Successors I am able to make no certain Catalogue, their names being doubtfully delivered, and the succession much confounded amongst our writers: the names of the Provincial Sultan's being many times imposed upon us, instead of those of the Chams themselves. But we will wade through those difficulties as well as we can, and exhibit as perfect a Catalogue of them, as the light of story will direct me: first adding (what should have been before remembered) that it is recorded, that Cingis before he joined battle with Uncham, consulted with his Diviners and Astrologers of the success. They taking a green reed, cloven it asunder, writ on the one the name of Cingis, and Uncham on the other; and placed them not far asunder. Then fell they to reading their Charms, and conjurations; and the reeds fell a fight in the sight of the whole Army, Cing●s Reed overcoming the other: whereby they foretold the joyful news of victory to the Tartars, which accordingly happened. And this was the first step by which this base and beggarly Nation began to mount unto the chair of Empire and Sovereignty; whereas before they lived like beasts, having neither letters, nor faith, nor dwelling, nor reputation, nor valour, nor indeed any thing befitting a man, as before was said.  

The great Chams of Tartars.  
A. C.  
1162. 1. Cingis, Cinchius, Zingis, or Changius, was made King or Cham of the Tartars; he subdued Tenduch, and Cathaia, changing the name of Scythians, and Scythia, to Tartartans, and Tartari●. 6.  
1168. 2. Jocuchan Cham, or Hoccata, succeeded. In his time the name of Tartar was first known in Europe, Anno 1212. in which year they drove the Polesockie from the banks of the Euxine Sea. By his Captain Bathu, or Ro●do, he subdued Moscovia; planted his Tartars in Taurica Chersonesus; wasted Hungary, Bosnia, Servia, Bulgaria; and by his other Captains, took P●rsia from the Turks.  
3. Zaincham, Bathu, or Barcham, ruined the Turks Kingdom of Damascus, and Asia the less.  
4. Gino Ch●m, whose daughter conveyed the Empire unto her husband Tamerlane or Tamberl●ne.  
1370. 5. Tamir-Cutlu, Tamir-Cham, or Tamerlane, a great tyrant, but withal an excellent Soldier. It is thought, that he subdued more Provinces in his life-time, than the Romans had done in 800 years. Of whose acts we have spoke at large. Dying, he divided his great Empire amongst his Children, as Persia to Miza Charok his fourth son, Zagathay to another, (perhaps unto Sautochus his eldest son) and so to others.  
1405. 6. Lutrochin, the second son of Tamerlane, succeeded in Cathay, though the eldest was before proclaimed, which his Father had before prognosticated: who when his sons came to him before his death, laid his hand on the head of Sautochus who was the eldest, but lifting up the chin of Lutrochin, who was the second. He lived not long, succeeded to by  
7. Atlan, who added little to his estate.  
8. Mango Cham, to whom Haiton an Armenian Prince (and the chief Compiler of the Tartarian History) went for aid against the Caliph of Bagdt. By whose persuasion the said Mango Cham is said to have been christened, with all his household▪ and many nobles of both sexes.  
9 Cublay Cham, the son of Mango.  
10. Tamor Cham, the Nephew of Cablay by his son Cingis.  
11. Dem●r Cham, the great Cham of Cathay in the year 1540 or thereabouts. What the names of the Chams are, who have since reigned, we cannot learn; nor what memorable acts have been done among them. The great distance of Countries, and difficulty of the journey have hindered further discoveries. For the great Cham, and his next neighbour the King of China, will neither suffer any of their subjects to travel abroad; nor permit any foreiners to view their dominions, or enter into them; unless either Ambassadors or Merchants, and those but sparingly, and under very great restraints, to avoid all giving of intelligence touching their affairs.   
The government is tyrannical; the great Cham being Lord of all; and in his tongue, (besides which they have almost no laws) consisteth the power of life or death. He is called by the simple vulgar, the shadow of spirits, and son of the immortal God: and by himself is reputed to be the Monarch of the whole world. For this cause every day assoon as he hath dined, he causeth his trumpets to be sounded; by that sign giving leave to the other Kings and Princes of the earth, to go to dinner. A fine dream of universal Monarchy. At the death of the Cham, the seven chief Princes assemble to crown his son; whom they place on a black corpse cloth; telling him, if he reign well, heaven shall be his reward; if ill, he shall not have so much as a corner of that black cloth to rest his body on: then they put the crown on his head, and kissing his feet, swear unto him fealty and homage. And at the funeral of these great Monarches, they use to kill some of his guard-Soudiers, whereof he hath 12000 in continual pay; saying unto them, It● & domino nostro se●v●●e in ●●ia vita. Paulus Venetus reporteth, that at the obsequies of Man●o Cham, no fewer than 10000 were slain on this occasion.  
There Cham's are for the most part severe justicers, and punish almost every small fact with sudden death; but theft especially: Insomuch that a man in Cambalu taking a pa●l of milk from a woman's head, and beginning to drink thereof, upon the woman's outcry was apprehended; and cut a sunder with a sword, so that the blood and the milk came out together. Nor are Adultery or lying punished with less than death, and so ordained to be by the laws of Cingis, their first Emperor, a wiser man, than possibly could be expected from so rude a Country, and of so little breeding in the knowledge of books or business: the Tartars being utterly without the use of letters, till the conquest of the Huyri, a Cathaian nation, but of Christian faith.  
What forces the Great Cham's, in the height of their power, were able to draw into the field, may be conjectured at by the Army of Tamerlane, consisting of 1200000 horse and foot, as was said before. And looking on them as confined within Catarrh, we shall find them not inferior to the greatest Princes. For Cubla● Cham, long after the division of this great estate, which was made by Tamerlane, had in the field against Naian his Uncle, and one Caidu, who had then rebelled, an Army of 100000 foot, and 360000 horse; there being 500000 horse on the other side. Which made almost a million of men in both Armies. And this is probable enough, if report be true touching the Chams of Zagathay and those of ●urchestan, (before reduced under the obedience of the other) of which the first is said to have been able to raise 300000 horse, and the last an hundred thousand more. For standing forces, he maintains 12000 horse, distributed amongst four Captains, for the guard of his person: besides which he hath great forces in every Province, and within four miles of every City, ready to come upon a call, if occasion be: so that he need not fear any outward invasion, and much less any homebred rebellions.  
Of the Revenues of the Cham, I can make no estimate, but may conclude them to be what he list himself: he being the absolute Lord of all, the Subject without any thing he can call his own. But that which ordinarily doth accrue unto him, is the tenth of wool, Silk, hemp, co●, and cattle. Then doth he draw into his own hands all the gold and silver which is brought into the Country, which he causeth to be melted, and preserved in his treasury imposing on his people instead of money, in some places Cockleshells, in others a black coin made of the bark of trees, with his stamp upon it. And besides this, hath to himself the whole trade of Pearl-fishing, which no body upon pain of death dare fish for, but by leave from him. So that his Treasury is conceived to be very rich, though his Annual income be uncertain, or not certainly known.   
And so much for Tartary.   

OF CHINA.  
CHINA is bounded on the East, with the Oriental Ocean; on the West, with India; on the North, with Tartary, from which separared by a continued chain of hills, part of those of Ararat; and where that chain is broken off, or interrupted, with a great wall extended 400 Leagues in length: built as they say, by Tzaintzon, the 117th King hereof; and on the South, partly with Cau●hin-China, a Province of India, partly with the Ocean.  
It was called anciently Sine, or Sinarum Regio, by which name it is still called at the present by our modern Latinist's; and from whence that of China seems to be derived. By Paulus Venet●s called Mangi, by the neighbouring Countries Sanglai, by the natives Ta'en, and Taybin●o, which last, signifies no other than a Realm; or by way of excellence, the Realm. By the Arabians it is called Tzinin; and the inhabitants call themselves by the name of ●angis.  
It is said to contain in circuit 69516 D●ez of China measure, which reduced to our European measure, will make a compass in the whole of 3000 Leagues: the length thereof extended from the borders of India, to Col●m, one of the Northern Provinces of this Continent, 1800 Leagues. But they that say so, speak at random. For besides that 1800 Leagues in length, must needs carry a greater compass than 3000 Leagues; they make it by this reckoning to be bigger than Europe, which I think no sober man will gran●. And answerable to this vast compass, it is said also to contain no fewer than 15. Provinces, every one of which is made to be of a greater Continen●●han the greatest Realm we know in Europe: Yet not a Continent of waste ground, or full of unhabitable Deserts, as in other places; but full of goodly Towns and Cities. The names of which Provinces, and the number of their Towns and Cities, I have thought fit once for all to lay down in this Diagramme following.  

The Provinces, Cities, and Towns in China.  Pro. Cit To. 1 Canton 37 190 2 Foquien 33 99 3 Olam 90 130 4 Sisnam 44 150 5 To●enchia 51 155 6 Cans●● 24 122 7 Minchian 25 29 8 Ochian 19 74 9 Honan 20 102 10 Pagnia 47 150 11 Taitan 47 78 12 Quinchen 45 113 13 Chagnian 43 95 14 Susnam 41 105 15 Quinsay 31 114  
By which it doth appear, that in these fifteen Provinces there are 591 Cities; 1593. walled Towns; and besides them 1154 Castles, 4200 Towns unwalled, and such an infinite number of Villages, that the whole Country seems to be but one City only.  
It reacheth from the 130th, to the 160th Degree of Longitude: and from the Tropic of Cancer, to the 53d degree of Latitude. So that it lieth under all the Climes from the third to the nineth, inclusively: the longest Summers day in the Southern parts, being thirteen hours and forty minutes; increased in the most Northern parts, to 16 hours, and 3 quarters. Enjoying by this site an air somewhat of the hottest, especially in those parts whichly near the Tropic; but with all very sound and healthy, and fit for the production of the choicest fruits.  
The Country very rich and fertile insomuch that in many places they have two, and in some three harvests in a year; well cultivated, and sowed with all manner of grain, and planted with the best kind of fruits; which do not only come to a speedy maturity, but to more excellency and perfection than any of these Western parts. The like is also said of their Pearls, and Bezoar; fairer and of greater virtue than those of America, or any other part of the world besides. Particularly it aboundeth with Wheat, Barley, Rice, Wool, Cotton, Olives, Vines, Flax, Silk, all kind of metals, Fruits, Cattle, Sugar, Honey, Rhubarb, Camphire, Ginger, all kinds of Spices, medicinal woods called China-wood, by the name of the Country, Musk and Salt: the custom for which last in one City only, which is that of C●●t●●, amounteth to the yearly value of 180000 Crowns. It yieldeth also an Herb, out of which they press a delicate juice, which doth not only serve them instead of wine, but preserveth their health, and freeth them from many of those inconveniences which the immoderate use of wine doth breed to others. Such store of Poultry of all sorts, but of Ducks especially, that in the Town of Canton only before mentioned, it is thought there are 12000 eaten every day, one day with another.  
The people are for the most part of swart complexion, but more or less, according to their nearness to the heats of the Sun; short-nosed, black-eyed, and of very thin beards. They wear their garments very long, and are so much delighted with their own fashion and composure, that as the Neg●o●s use to paint the devil 〈◊〉 as a colour contrary to their own: so when these Chinots use to draw the picture of deformed persons, they set him forth in a short coat, broad eyes, long nose, and a bushy beard. They are much given unto their B●●lics, and eat thrice a day, but then not immoderately: drink their drink hot, and eat their meat with two sticks of Ivory, Ebony, or the like, not touching their meat with their hands at all, and therefore no great foulers of linen. The use of silver forks, with us, by some of our Spruce gallants taken up of late, came from hence into Italy, and from thence to England. Their marriages they celebrate most commonly in the New-Moon, and many times put them off till March, when the year beginneth with them as it doth with us: in which solemnity they spare for no c●st or charge, music, and stageplays, and good cheer many days together. Yet doth not this take them off a jot from their natural industry, and their proficiency in Manufactures and Mechanic Arts. For the son is bound to follow his father's occupation: which law preventing the roving about of idle people, and exciting in each breast an emulation of every Art; maketh the Inhabitants excellent Artificers. In giving alms they are bountiful to the maimed, and the lame; but reject the blind, as being sufficiently able to get sustenance for themselves by corporal labour; as grinding of Corn, etc. They have long enjoyed the benefit of Printing, before it was known in Europe: but print not as we do, from the left hand to the right; nor as the Jews, from the right hand, to the left; but from the top of the leaf, dowaward to the bottom. Guns also have been used among them time out of mind: whence they are so well conceited of themselves, that they use to say, They themselves have two eyes, the Europaeans one, and the rest of the people of the world, not one. A pretty flourish of self-praising. Now Guns were in use in these Eastern Countries, and consequently also amongst them, even when Bacchus made his expedition into India (which was some three or four years before, or after the departure of Israel out of Egypt,) Sir Walter Raleigh seemeth to affirm: because Philostratus in the life of Apoll nius Tyanaeus, telleth us how Baccl●us was beaten from a City of Oxyd●acae, by thunder and lightning; which he interpreteth to be the Cannon. But certainly himself in another place of his most excellent book, acknowledgeth this Philostratus to have written fabulously: and therefore no fic● foundation for a conceit so contrary to probability, and the opinion of all times. Besides, whereas Dion telleth us, that by the benefit of thunder and lightning from Heaven, Severus discomfited Pes●●ninus N●ger; and by the same means, was himself repulsed from the wall of Petra in Arabia; we may (if this interpretationhold good) as easily maintain, that Severus had great Ordnance in his Camp, and the Arabians, in their Town. As for P●●●ting, whether John Gertrudenberg learned it of the Chinois; or whether good inventions, like good wits, do sometimes jump, I dare not determine: sure I am that he first taught it in Europe; and as some say, in the year 1440. At Halam a Town of Holland, It is first said to be practised; and at Mentz, perfected. Now whereas it is by some doubted, whether the Art of Printing be available to the proficiency and advancement of Learning, or not; I must not herein be both a Judge, and a party; but must leave the decision of the point to men uninteressed. Only this I dare boldly say, that this most excellent invention hath been much abused, and prostituted to the lust of every foolish and idle paper-blurrer: the treasury of learning being never so full, and yet never more empty, overcharged so with the froth and scum of foolish and unneceslary discourses. In which (though all Nations have their share therein, and we of late as much as any) the Dutch have been accounted the most blame-worthy: who not content to scatter their poor conceptions only amongst themselves, and print them in their own tongue only (as our English Paper-Blurers do) publish them in the Latin to the eye of others, and send them twice a-year to the public Marts, though neither worth the Readers eye, nor the Printers hand. Scriptorum plus est hodie quam muscarum olim cum caletur maxim; the complaint once of an old Comedian, was never truer than at the present.  
But not to dive too deep into this dispute, the people, as before was said, are good Artisicers, ingenious and excellent in all things which they take in hand: the porcelaine dishes, curious carvings, and the fine painted works which we have in Tables, Leathers, Stuffs, being brought from thence. A politic and judicious Nation; but very jealous of their women, and great tyrants over them, not suffering them to go abroad, or sit down at the Table if any stranger be invited, unless he be some very near kinsman. A tyranny or restraint, which the poor women give no cause for, being said to be very honest, and much reserved; not so much as showing themselves at a window for fear of offence: and if they use painting, as most of them do, it is rather to preserve themselves in the good affections of their husbands, than for any other lewd respects. For the most part of a fair hair, whereof very curious: binding it about their heads with Ribbons of silk, garnished with pearls and precious stones. Neat in their dress, and very costly in their apparel, with reference to their estates, and the degree of their husbands: the richer sort wearing Satin striped with Gold, and interlaced with very rich Jewe's; the poorer in Serge, and razed velvets. They have most of them little feet, which they take great pride in, and for this cause bind them up hard from their very infancy: which they endure patiently though it be very painful, because a small foot is accounted for so great a grace. And yet it is conceived that this proceedeth not so much from their own curiosity, as from the jealousy of the men, who have brought it in; to the end that they should not be able to go but with a great deal of pain, and that going with so ill a grace, and so little case, they should have no desire to stir much abroad. A custom so ancient and received, that it hath got the force of law; and if any mother should do otherwise in breeding their daughters, they would undergo some censure or mark of infamy. If a desire to see their Parents get them the freedom of a visit, they are carried to them in close chairs, and attended by so many waiters, that it is not possible that any man either so see them, or hold any discourse with them.  
Of both Sexes it is thought that this Country containeth no fewer than 70 Millions. Which though it seem to be a number beyond all belief; yet it is knowingly averred, and may be thought probable enough, if we consider the spaciousness of the Country; 2. The secret goodness of the stars, and temperature of the air; 3. The abundance of all things necessary to life; 4. That it is not lawful for the King to make any war, but merely defensive, and so they enjoy perpetual peace; 5. That it is not lawful for any 〈◊〉 to go out of the Country; and 6. That here the Sea is as well peopled as whole Provinces elsewhere. For the ships do resemble a City; in which they buy, sell, are born, and die. And on the River which watret● the walls of ●anquin, up to Paquin, which is no less than 300 leagues, the ships are said to be so thick ranked, that it seemeth to be a continual street.  
The people hereof in matters of Religion, are generally all Gentiles, and conceive thus of the creation▪ That there was one 〈◊〉, who created Panzon, and Panzona, whose posterity remained 90000 years; but they for their wickedness being destroyed, Ta'en created L●titz●m, who had two horns; from the right came men, from the left came women. When any of them dieth, they cloth him in his best apparel, all perfumed, set him in his best chair, and there all his nearest kindred kneeling before him, take their leave with tears. When he is coffined, they place him in a room richly furnished, and set by him a table full of viands and good cheer, with candles continually burning on it. Not much unlike to which ceremonies, we find, how whilst the funeral was preparing for Francis the French King, his Status apparelled in royal robes, with the Crown, Sceptre, etc. was laid on his bed; whither dinner and supper was daily served in, with the like state and solemnity as when he was living. But to return again to my dead Chinois; when he had lain, as is above said, fifteen days, he is carried forth to his funeral, the place whereof is in the fields: for to be buried within the walls, were a thing of all others the most wretched. Hither, when they are in the manner of a procession, come; they burn his body, and with it men, cattle, and other provision, for his attendance and sustenance in the other world: as they use in the funerals of 〈◊〉. As great Idolaters as any, sacrificing to the very devil, and that upon the same reason, as the most ignorant sort of the Gentiles do, because forsooth he is a wicked and mischievous creature, and would otherwise hurt them.  
Yet in the middle of this darkness there appeareth some light, whereby we may perceive that Christianity had some footing here in the times foregoing; For they believe, that God is an immortal spirit; that by him the first man was made of nothing; that the soul dieth not with the body, but is capable of reward and punishment in another ●ife, according to the works it hath done in this. Which lest they should be thought to be only some remainders of the light of nature, the ●arned men amongst the ancient Greeks and Romans, having so much 〈◊〉 as this, without the Gospel; we may here add, that the Idol most generally worshipped by them, is painted with three heads looking one on another, signifying, as themselves affirm, that they have all but one will: which makes some think they had been anciently instructed in the doctrine of the holy Trinity. They have also the picture of a very fair woman holding a Child in her Arms, who as they say, was daughter of some great King, and that she was delivered of that Infant when she was a Virgin. And as some add, they have portraitures, of the fashion, and with the marks or Characters of the twelve Apostles (as usually painted in some part of the Christian Church): of whom they are able to say nothing, but that they were great Philosophers who lived virtuously here, and were therefore made Angels in Heaven. And finally they hold that there is a great number of Saints, or men estated in an eminent degree of happiness, who in their times exceeded others in knowledge, industry, or valour, or lived an austere life without wronging any man, or otherwise deserved nobly of the commonwealth, as the Authors of some signal benefit unto their Country. These I conceive to be some evident remainders of Christianity, or the Remembrances rather of that Christianity which formerly was known amongst them: First planted here (as may be probably collected) by Saint Thomas, or some of his Disciples, an ancient Breviary or Liturgy of the Indian Churches, giving good hint to it; Where it is said, Per D. Thomam regnum coelorum volavit et ascendit ad S●nas: i. e. that by Saint Thomas the Kingdom of Heaven was preached unto those of China. Some Characters here were also of it in the time of the Tartars, though now obliterated, and not visible but in these defacements. And in this state it stood till the time of our Fathers, in which the Jesuits (commendably industrious in the propagation of the Christian faith) not without great danger to themselves, have endeavoured, and in part effected, their conversion. For though they have gained but few Proselytes, (in regard of those infinite numbers of people which are said to live here) yet some Converts they have made amongst them, and thereby sown those seeds of that saving truth (though mingled with some Tares of their own) which may in time increase and spread over all the Country.  
Hills of great note here are not many, here being but one Mountain touched upon by Ptolemy, in his description of the Country called Sinarum Regio, which we conceive to be this China: agreeable unto the observation of modern writers, by whom it is affirmed to be so plain and level, and so unswelled with hills at all, that they have Carts and Coaches driven with sails, as ordinarily as drawn with horses, in these parts. Not the less destitute of Rivers for this want of mountains, Ptolemy naming in it, 1. Aspthara. 2. Senus. 3. Ambastus, and 4. Cotiaris; all which had there their fount and fall: and yet he knew the out-skirts of the Country only. Here are also many great Lake●, not inferior to some Seas in bigness; so plentiful in fish, as if they contended with the soil, which should be most profitable: and yet so little swelled with winds (though the winds many times blow strongly) that both upon these Lakes, and on the Rivers and Seacoasts, they pass up and down in sinal barks, with no other sail than a bough set up an-end in the midst of them; by the help whereof they make good speed in their navigations. Nor do these Lakes or Rivers use to overslow their banks, or endamage the Country: but when they do, it brings some fatail ruin with it; as in the year 1557 when the Lake of Sancey breaking out overwhelmed seven Cities, many Towns, and of Villages, and Country people, almost infinite numbers.  
Towns of most note amongst the Sinae, though nothing but the names be remaining of them, 1. Bramna; and 2. Rhabana, honoured with the title of Civitates. 3. Aspithra. 4. Achatara, more within the land; but all four under some degree of Northern Latitude. 5. Thine, the Metropolis of the Country, by some called Sinae. 6. Sarata. 7. Catoranagara; these on the Southside of the line. But in this Ptolemy was mistaken, it being found by the more certain observations of our later writers, that no part of Chin: comes within 20 degrees of the Equinoctial; and so not capable of having any Towns or Cities of a Southern Latitude. Here was also a large by called Sinaerum Sinus; a Promontory named Notium, in the fourth degree of Northern Latitude; and another named Satyrocum, lying under the Aequinox. More than this, of the Cities of the ancient Sinae, I have nothing to say, which I dare offer to the Reader.  
But to behold them as they are presented to our view in the modern China, it hath been said, that for number there are no fewer than 591 Cities, and those so uniformly built, so conformably to one another, that they differ not in form, and fashion, but in quantity only. Much like the Cities of Utopia mentioned by Sir Thomas More, Idem situs omnibus, eadem, quatenus per locum licet, rerum facties; so near resembling one another, that he who knoweth but one of them, may conjecture at all. And this is the manner of their building. Most of their Cities have the benefit of some navigable River near which they stand: the waters whereof serve them both for navigation, and domestic uses. Two great Streets crossing one another in the very midst, so broad, that ten horsemen may ride a breast in the narrowest of them; so straight, that a man standing in the middle, may see either end: each end being shut up with a Gate of great strength and beauty; and those Gates fortified and strengthened with thick plates of iron. Generally greater and more stately than those of Europe, but defective in that point of elegancy which the Magnificent Churches, and more sumptuous buildings for the dispatch of public businesses, in these parts abound with. Their private houses for the most part are also low, and destitute of Porches, Windows, Galleries; the principal ornaments and graces of Architecture. Nor are their Cities built only for resort, or trade, but for strength and safety, environed with deep and broad ditches, the wals of brick or stone, strong above belief, planted with Ordnance and Artillery in convenient places: and every night the Gates not only locked but sealed; not to be opened till unsealed by the principal Magistrate.  
But not to rest ourselves on this general Character, let us take a more particular view of some of the principal. And in that list we find 1. Quins●y, called Suntien by the natives, containing once in circuit an hundred miles, and having in the midst of it a Lake of 30 miles' compass, in which Lake are two goodly Lands, and in them two magnificent Palaces, adorned with all necessaries, either for majesty, or convenience; in which are celebrated the public feasts, and the marriages of the better sort. The Lake is nourished with divers Rivers, the chief being Polysango, and Cacam●can; on which Rivers 12000 bridges lift up their stately heads: and under whose immense Arches, great ships, with sails spread abroad, and top and top-gallant, may and do usually pass. It was also said to have had ten market-places, each of them four miles asunder, and every one in form quadrangular, the sides thereof half a mile in length. Here were said also to be twelve Companies of tradesmen or Artisans, each company having 12000 shops; and in all a million and 600000 Families. But now on the removal of the Court from hence to Cambalu by the Tartars; and since to Nanquin and Piquin by the Prince; of the house of Hombu, seconded partly the fury of the wars, and partly by the violence of Earthquakes; it hath lost no small part of her ancient beauty, and renown. 2. Vnguen, famous for the abundance of sugar there made. 3. Nanquin, seated 9 leagues from the Sea, on a fair and navigable River, whereon ride for the most part no fewer than 10000 of the King's ships, besides such as belong to private men. The Town in compass 30 miles, being girt with three fair brick walls, having large and stately Gates: The streets in length two leagues, wide, and paved; the number of houses is about 200000. so that it may equal four of the fairest Cities of Europe. 4. Paquin or Pagnia, where the King continually resideth; and that, either because the air hereof is more healthful and pleasant, than any of the other, or because it lieth near unto the Tartars, with whom the Chinois are in perpetual war: so that from hence the dangers which may by their invasions happen unto the Country, may with more convenience be either prevented, or remedied. The City said to be inferior to Nanquin for bulk and beauty, but to exceed it in multitude of Inhabitants, Soldiers, and Magistrates, occasioned by the King's abode. Environed on the South, with two walls, of so great breadth that twelve horsemen may run a breast upon them; on the North, with one wall only, but that so strong and vigilantly guarded, that they fear as little annoyance on that side as they do on the other. But the greatest Omament hereof is the Royal Palace, compassed about with a triple wall, the outwardmost of which would well environ a large City: within which space, besides the many lodgings for Eunuches and other Courtiers, are Groves, hills, fountains, Rivers, and the like places of pleasure: larger in circuit, but not comparable for the Arts of Architecture to the Royal Palaces of Europe. 5. Canton, supposed to be the Caltigara of Ptolemy; by the Chinois called Quamchen, the least of the Metropolitan Cities of this Country, but beautified with many triumphant Arches, a navigable River, large streets, and many goodly bridges. Fortified with deep trenches, 83. Bulwarks, and seated in so rich a soil both for Fowl and Catteil, that here are said to be eaten daily 6000 hogs, and 12000 Ducks, besides proportionable quantity of other victuals. If this be one of the least of their Metropolitans, what may we fancy of the greatest? A Town in which the Portugals drive a wealthy trade, being permitted in the daytime to come within the City itself; but at night excluded, and forced to find lodging in the Suburbs. By reason of which restraint, they have settled their Mart at Macaan, the Port-Town to this, where they have their Factor, and many Families, the Town being almost wholly peopled by them. 6. Suchean, seated in the marshes like Venice, but more commodiously, because those marshes are of fresh water; the streets and houses founded upon piles of pinetree; with many bridges, and conveniencies for passage both by land and water. Well traded, as the fittest Centre for dispersion of merchandise from all the other Ports of the Kingdom: by the multitude and frequency of ships, almost denying faith to the eyes, which would think all the ships of China to be here assembled. So infinitely rich, that the small Region whereof it is the head containing but eight Cities more, payeth 12 millions to the king of yearly income. 7. Hamseu, the Metropolis of the Province of Chequian, about two day's journey from the Sea (of which distance from the Sea is Sucheau also) in compass less than Namquin, but better builded: no place in it taken up with gardens, Orchards, or other pleasures; but all employed for shops, houses, and other edifices. So beautified with Triumphant Arches, erected to the honour of deserving Magistrates, that in one street there are 300 of great mass or workmanship. The Temples magnificent and many; the bank-sides of the Channels watering every street, beset with trees of shade, and most excellent fruits: and in the middle of the City a round high mountain, which gives the eye a gallant prospect into every street. And not far off a pleasant Like, of great breadth and length, the banks whereof are beautified with groves and gardens, and the Lake itself even clothed with vessels of all sorts, on which the Citizens use to feast, and entertain their idle time with plays and spectacles. Two Cities so replenished with all kind of pleasures, that the Chinois use it for a Proverb, Thien Xam, thien thum, ti Xamsu hum, that is to say, look what the Hall or Presence Chamber is in heaven, that Hamseu and Sucheau are on earth. 8 Focheo, beautified amongst many other Stately structures, with a magnificent Tower erected on 40 marble pillars of great elegancy, cost, and bigness, every pillar being 40 spans in height, and 12 in breadth: not to be parallelled, as some say, by any the like work in Europe. 9 Lochiau, in which are 70000 families. 10. Colans, famous for the best Porcelain. 11. Xaitou, whose Harbour is never without 500 ships. 12. Scianhay, within 24. hours' sail of the Isle of Japan, and therefore defended with a strong Garrison and a Navy. Situate in a pleasant and wholesome soil, the whole Country so set forth with trees, as if it were one continued Orchard. So populous, that it containeth 40000 households, most of which get their livelihood by weaving Cottons: it being supposed that here are 200000 persons which attend that maintenance. 13. Chinchi●●su, whence by a River made by hand there is a passage to Sucheau; the water of which never freezeth, and for that cause so clogged with ships in time of winter, that the passage is stopped with the multitudes of them. 14. Cergivan, of the same fashion with the rest, though of lesser note. So like they are to one another, that we may say with Ovid on the like occasion.  
— Fancies non omnibus una,  
Nec diversa tamen, qualem decet esse sororum.  Which I find thus Englished by George Sandys. 
Amongst them all no two appear the same,  
Nor differ more than Sisters well became.  
The ancient Inhabitants of this Country, in the time of Ptolemy, were towards the North, the Semantini, bordering a mountain of that name, and the only one remembered in all this Country; more Southward, the Acadra, and Aspithrae; Towards the Sea the Anabastae, and Ichthyophagi (these last so called from living wholly upon fish.) From what Original they came it is hard to say, whether from the Indians, or the Scytheses: or that it was primitively planted by some of the posterity of Noah, before the enterprise of Babel; which last may propably be concluded from the extreme populousness of the Country, the many magnificent Cities, their industry and ingenuity in all Arts and Sciences, not to be taught them by their neighbours, more ignorant in those things than themselves. And hereunto the Chronicles of China seem to give some ground, which tell us of 340 Kings, which for the space of four thousand years have therein reigned. For as their Chronicles inform us, (if they may be credited) the Country being without Rule or settled government, was first reduced into order by one Vitey, the Son of Ezolom, by whom the people were instructed in Physic, Astrology, Divination, and the art of tillage: to which this Vitey, having found out the way of cutting or sawing timber, added the use of Ships and Houses, and many other the effects of mechanical hands. Having by the valour of Lincheon one of his Commanders, subdued a great part of the Country, he drew them into Towns and villages, distributed them into Offices, and several trades, disposing those of the same trade into Streets by themselves, and commanding that no man without leave from himself, or his Officers, should follow any other trade than that of his Father. He prescribed them also the fashion of their Garments, taught them the art of making and dying Silks: and having reigned an hundred years, left the Kingdom well established unto his posterity. Of this race there are said to have been 217 Kings, who held the State 2257 years. The last of them was that Tzaintzon, who being ill-neighbored by the Scythians (not yet called Tartars) built that vast wall spoken of before, extended 400 Leagues in length, and at the end of every League a strong Rampart or Bulwark, continual'y garrisoned, and well furnished with all warlike necessaries. He being slain by some of his Subjects, burdened and wasted with this work, the race of Vitey ended; and that of Anchosan succeeded, a Prince of much prudence, but greater courage; In his line it continued under 25 Kings, but shrewdly shaken towards the close by a civil war, betwixt Trunthey the 23 of this house, and his Nephew Laupy. Hardly well settled under Quiontey the last of this house, when Tzobu, a great Tyrant of the other faction, set upon him, and slew him. And so the majesty of the blood-royal being trod under foot, the Crown was also tossed from one hand to another, and made a prey unto the strongest: there being of the race of this Tzobu, eight Kings, reigning 62▪ year. Of the race of Diana, five Kings, who reigned thirty one. Of the race of Tzoy, three only, who reigned thirty seven. Of the race of Tenc●, one and twenty, who held the Crown 294 years: and eight there were who reigned 120 years, of the house of Tautzom. Of other upstart families to the number of five, were fourteen Kings also, who governed only for the space of 66 years: And then one Zaitzon, deriving himself from Vifey, the first King of this Country, obtained the Kingdom; which he, and seventeen of his posterity, for the space of 320 years, governed with much peace and honour. Forfar, the last King of that Royal Family, foretold by prophecy that he should be deprived of his Kingdom by one who had an hundred eyes, neglected the Advertisement, as unworthy credit: but it fell out agreeable to that prediction, when vanquished by Ch●●●-baan (which word signifieth an hundred eyes) Lieutenant unto Vzan, a Tartarian Prince, but feudatary and Vassal to the Great Cham. China thus made a Province of the Tartarians, was governed for the space of 93 years, under nine Tartar-Kings, Tributaries to the Great Cham: and when it did revolt in the days of Gino-Cham, the fourth from ●ingis, it was reduced again by the valour of Tamerl●e. For though Hombu, or Combu, the new elected King of China, having expelled the Tartars, and repaired the breaches of the wall by them thrown down, had brought into the field an Army of 350000 horse and foot: yet nothing could withstand the fortune of Tamerlane, who obtained the victory, with the slaughter of 60000 Chinois. But wisely moderating his prosperity, he thought it the best and safest way, to let that Nation have a King of their own; imposing on him the fine of 300000 Crowns of ready money, and such other conditions as were most pleasing to the victor, and yet not destructive to the vanquished. Before this time the Chinois were possessed of a great part of that Country which we now call by the name of Cathay; which lying without the wall of China, was taken from them by Tamerlane, and made by him part of the Empire of Tartary. Which possibly might be the reason, (part of Ca●hay being anciently a member of the Kingdom of China, and still retaining somewhat of their customs and ingenuity) that by some writers, easily misguided by such probability, Cathay and China have been reckoned to be one and the same. Nor did the Empire of the Chinois extend in those times only over part of S●ythia, but also over part of India, and most of the Oriental Lands. But the Princes of the house of Hombu finding their own Kingdom large enough to content their desires, abandoned all the Accessories and Outparts of their Dominions: prompted thereunto, not only by their own moderation, but by some misfortunes which befell them. For as we find that the Romans having by the fury of two violent tempests, lost no fewer than 206 of their ships and galleys, resolved to abandon (and for a long time did forbear) the Seas, which had used them so unkindly: So the Chinois having received a great overthrow, and loss of 800 ships, nigh unto Ze●lan, they freed all the Lands from obedience unto them, and contented themselves with the bounds which nature had bestowed on them. And of their moderation herein, we have a late example. For when the people of Corea, a small Island a butting on the confines of China, were invaded by the Japonites, they submitted themselves unto the King of China: who having repulsed the enemy, and thereby cleared his own Country from danger, presently redelivers over unto the Coreans, their Town and liberty. A rare fact of a contented people. Which whether it favoured of greater moderation or magnanimity, I am not able to determine. In this family hath the Realm continued under twelve Kings for the space of 200 years and upward, reckoning from Hombu unto Boneg: who being the twelfth of this line, succeeded his elder brother, unfortunately slain with a fall from an horse. Reported for a Prince of good disposition, great judgement, and a severe Justiciary. But whether still alive, or who hath since succeeded, if he be deceased, I am yet unsatisfied: though whosoever he be that now sits in the throne, or at least pretends a right unto it, he hath but little joy in this great estate; the Tartars being called in to a bet some differences touching the succession: who finding their advantages, and the unwarlikeness of the People, are said to have lately broken down the Partition-wall, and let in infinite numbers of their Countrymen, and made themselves Masters in short time of the best parts of the Country. In which estate it now standeth, for aught I have heard unto the contrary.  
The Government of this Kingdom is merely tyrannical; there being no other Lord but the King; no title of dignity or nobility ever known amongst them; nor toll or duty paid unto any but to him: the younger Princes of the blood being mantained by stipends, and annual pensions, large enough to support their trains, but without any Lands or Tenants, for fear of drawing on them any great dependences. The King alone is the general Landlord, and him the subjects do not only reverence as a Prince, but adore like a God. For in the chief City of every Province, they have the King's portraiture made of gold, which is always covered with a veil: and at every New-moon, the Magistrates and other inferior Officers use to kneel before it, as if it were the King himself. By these and other artifices of the like contrivement the Common-people are kept in such awe and fear, that they are rather slaves than subjects: calling their King the l●mp of the world, and Son of the evershining Sun, without whose light they were able to see nothing. In every Province, except Paquin and Tolenchia only, he hath his Deputies or Viceroys, maintained by liberal stipends from the public treasury: but those he governeth by himself. Some laws they have, and those affirmed to have been written 2000 years since, as is like enough they were. So strongly do they favour of the ignorance and Atheism of the darkest times: the manner of life by them allowed, most obscene and shameless, their idolatries' most gross and palpable, their exorcisms ridiculous, and the prostitution of their Virgins most abominable, and the variety of sensual profanations, to an illuminated mind most base and contemptible. In a word, nothing commendable in their course of life (notwithstanding the brags which they make of themselves) but their Arts and industry.  
The forces which this King is able to draw into the Field must needs be infinite, considering that incredible number of subjects under his command. For whereas France is thought to contain 15 millions of people; Italy, with the Isles, as many; Germany, with the Swissers and Belgic Provinces, about that proportion; Spain not above seven Millions, and the Kingdom of England about four: this Country one-is computed at 70 millions; which is more by 15 millions than all together. Proportionably his Levies must be so much greater than can be ordinarily raised out of those Countries. But because it may be thought that his subjects, though more in number, may be less trained to the wars than those of Europe; the contrary is affirmed by such as have taken an estimate of the forces which every Province is bound to entertain in continual readiness. And by that estimate it appeareth, that in the year 1557 (though a time of peace) there were dispersed in the fifteen Provinces of this Realm, to the number of five millions; 846500 Foot, and 948350 Horse. Nor is he less powerful for Sea-service, having continually great Fleets for the guard of his costs in continual attendance; and many more ready to set out when there is occasion: insomuch that the Chinois use to say in the way of a Proverb, that their King is able to make a bridge of ships from China to Malaca, which are 500 leagues asunder. Some of these ships (whereof the King hath above a thousand of his own, besides those of his subjects) of great magnificence and beauty: the Officers and Soldiers in all which are exceeding well paid, and rewarded answerably to their merits. And as this King is able to raise greater forces than any, from his own estates; so doth he also de facto do it, when the urgency of his affairs do require it of him: his ordinary stint being 300000 foot, and 200000 horse, without which complete number (not only in the muster-rols, but in bodies of men) he vouchsafes not to go into the field.  
Answerable unto these great Levies of men; must be his Revenue: which they who have traveled in this search, (if they tell us true, and do not build upon an hope of not being confuted, as for my part I fear they do) affirm to be 120 millions of Crowns; answered unto him out of the profit of the mines of Gold, Silver, and other metals; the tenth of all commodities which the Earth brings forth; the tolls imposed on that uspeakable quantity of merchandise, which passeth on so many navigable Rivers from one Town to another; the customs taken of all those rich wares which are brought into Europe, and the gabelle laid on Salt in all parts of his Kingdom. Out of which sum, the payment of his Fleet discharged, the entertainment of the Soldiers satisfied, and his Court defrayed; there remaineth 40 millions of Crowns de claro to be disposed of, either in his treasury, or private pleasures, or the works of magnificence, and ostentation.  
And so much for China.   

OF INDIA.  
INDIA is bounded on the East, with the Oriental Ocean, and some part of China; on the West, with the Persian Empire; on the North, with some branches of Mount Taurus, which divide it from Tartary; and on the South, with the Indian Ocean. So called from the River Indus, the nearest of esteem and note in all the Country, towards these parts of the world.  
It is conceived to be the largest Country of any one name in the world, except China and Tartary; affirmed by Pomponius Mela, to be of such a great extent on the Seacoasts of it, that it was as much as a ship could sail in 40 days. Extended from 106, to 159 Degrees of Longitude; and from the Aequator to the 44th degree of Northern Latitude. By which account it lieth from the beginning of the first, to the end of the sixth Clime: the longest Summers-day in the Southern parts being 12 hours only, and in the parts most North, 15 hours and an half.  
Concerning the monstrous Fables which the ages foregoing have delivered to us of this Country, give me leave to say, that as the Poets used of old to fill up the times of which they were ignorant, with strange fictions, and prodigious metamorphoses; or as our modern Geographers, in the Maps of the world, fill up those unknown parts thereof, of which they can give us no certain description, with strange pictures and uncouth shapes of beasts and trees: so also the writers in former ages have filled the more remote Countries, of which they knew little, with such impossible and incredible relations. Hence there have been attributed to this India, the fables of men with dog's heads; of men with one leg only, yet of great swiftness; of such as live by sent; of men that had but one eye, and that in their foreheads; and of others, whose ears did reach unto the ground. It is reported also that this people by eating a dragon's heart and liver, attain to the understanding of the languages of beasts; that they can make themselves, when they list, invisible; that they have two tubs, whereof the one opened yields wind, the other rain, and the like. But these relations, and the rest of this strain, I doubt not but the understanding Reader knoweth how to judge of, and what to believe. For my part I am of the same mind with Curtius, Plura equidem transcribo quam credo; nec enim affirmare aus●us sum quae dubito, nec subducere sustineo quae accepi: I may perhaps relate some things which I do not credit, but shall not let them pass without some censure; that so I neither may impose any thing on the Readers belief, nor defraud him any thing conducible to his contentation.  
The Country, to report no more of it than it doth deserve, enjoyeth an exact temperature of the air; two Summers, (or one as long as two,) and a double increase: blest with all things which are either necessary to the life of man, or of convenience and delight; particularly with mines of Gold and Silver, and with precious stones; with spices of all sorts, and Civet's; with the best medicinable drugs; metals of all kinds, except Copper and Lead; abundance of all sorts of cattle, except horses. Somewhat defective also in Wheat and Vines, that so this Country might be beholding unto others, as well as others to this. Famed also for abundance of Camels, Apes, Dragons, Serpents, Rhinocerots, Elephants. These last more savouring of reason and human ingenuity, or else more tractable and docile, than any brute Creature whatsoever. Of this we have a fair instance in the story of the Acts of Alexander. The Elephant which King Porus sat on, finding his Master strong and lusly, rushed boldly into the thickest of the Enemy's Army: but when he once perceived him to be faint and weary, he withdrew himself out of the battle, kneeled down, and into his own trunk received all the Arrows which were directed at his master.  
The greatness of the Creature makes it yet more admirable, that either he should have soul enough of his own, to actuate so vast a body; or being of such strength and bigness should submit himself to the instructions of another: some of these Indian Elephants, as Aelianus hath affirmed, being nine Cubits high, and as many long, and in breadth or thickness about five Cubits. Nor doth the Sea afford less plenty or variety, than we find on shore: yielding abundance of the richest and fairest Pearls, huge shoals of fish, and amongst them the Whale or great Leviathan; exceeding the proportion of that land-monster the Elephant. For though the ordinary dimension of the Whale be but 36 Cubits in length, and eight in thickness: yet Nearchus in Arianus is said to have measured one in these Indian Seas, which was of the length of 50 Cubits, and of breadth proportionable: not to say any thing of that incredible report of Pliny, who speaketh of some Indian Whales which were nine hundred and threescore Foot, or four Acres long.  
The people are of five sorts, and as many Religions, that is to say the Natural Indians, derived from the Original Inhabitants of it▪ 2. Moors, or Arabians, who more than two hundred years ago possessed themselves of some Sea-Towns driving the Natives up higher into the Country; 3. Jews, scattered and dispersed (as in other places) into all parts of it; 4. Tartars, in those parts and Provinces which are under the Great Mongul; and 5. Portugueze, who have many Colonies and Factories in the Ports and Islands; but brag as if they had made a conquest of all the Country. Which notwithstanding, considering that the Natural Indians are by far the greatest number, we must relate to them only in the Character, which is made of this people. Affirmed to be tall of stature, strong of body, and of complexion inclining to that of the Negroes: of manners Civil, and ingenuous, free from fraud in their dealings, and exact keepers of their words. The Common sort but meanly clad, for the most part naked, content with no more covering than to hide their shame. But those of greater estates and fortunes (as they have amongst them many ancient and Noble families) observe a majesty in both Sexes, both in their Attendants and Apparel; sweetening the last with oils, and perfumes, and adorning themselves with Jewels, Pearls, and other Ornaments befitting. They eat no flesh, but live on Barley, Rice, Milk, Honey, and other things without life.  
The W●me● not of much fairer complexion than the men, yet of lovely countenances, wear their hair long and loose, but covered with a thin vail of Calicut Lawn. Their ears hung with many rings, so great and heavy, that they are torn, and stretched to much disproportion; their noses also ringed, and behung with Jewels according to their estate and quality. Servilely obsequious to their husbands, whose affections they divide amongst them without jar or jealousy: the men allowed here, as in all the East, the use of many wives, whom they buy of their parents for a yoke of Oxen; and may marry as often as they list. In which they have too great a privilege above the women, who after the decease of their common husband, do either burn in the same flame with him, or else are forced to doom themselves to perpetual Widowhood. But of this we may speak more hereafter when we come to the particulars.  
The Christian faith was first planted in these Countries by Saint Thomas, from whom the remainders of Christianity take denomination; and unto whom the Records and Miniments of that Church do ascribe their conversion. For in one of their Treviaries written in the Chaldaean tongue, and translated into Latin by Father John Maria Campa●● a Jesuit, we find it thus, Per D. Thomam evanuit error Idololatriae ab Indis, etc. i. e. By Saint Thomas, the errors of Idolatry vanquished out of the Indies; by Saint Thomas, they received the Sacrament of Baptism, and the Adoption of Sons; by Saint Thomas, they believed and confessed the Father, the Son, and Holy-Ghost; by Saint Thomas, they kept the faith received of one God: And finally by Saint Thomas, the splendour of saying doctrine did appear to all India. His body as they say, entombed in the City of Maliapar, upon the Coast of Choromand●ll; the truth of which tradition I dispute not here. But this plantation of the Gospel by the hand of Saint Thomas was not universal over all the Country; but in some parts and Provinces only: or else was forced to give ground a while to prevailing Heathenism. For in the reign of Constantine, we read how the Indians living on the further-side of the Rive Ganges (for so I understand the Indi interiores of my Author) were converted to the Faith byr● the ministry of one Frumentius, of the City of Tyr●●, who having spent the greatest part of his time amongst them, was employed in that service, and consecrated the first Bishop (for those Churches) by the great Athanasius of Alexandria. But being the foundation of this building was laid by Saint Thomas, the remainder of Christians here being, ascribe the whole work to him; called therefore Christians of Saint Thomas. Governed originally by their own Bishops, subordinate to an Archbishop of their own also, residing at Augamale fifteen miles from Cochin, one of the chief Cities of this Country: who for long time acknowledged obedience to the Patriarch of Musal, by the name of the Patriarch of Babylon, as by these Christians of India he is still termed. The number of these Christians computed at 15 or 16 thousand families; or at 70000 persons in the account of others: inhabiting for the most part in that large tract of ground, which beginning at the outlets of Ind●●s and Ganges, stretcheth unto the Cape or Promontory called Cape Comari. The points wherein they differed from the Church of Rome, 1. Their administering the Sacrament of the Eucharist in bread seasoned with salt; 2. Administering in both kinds, but using instead of wine (which is scatce or not at all to be had in this Country) the juice of raisins softn●d in water over night, and so pressed forth; 3. Not baptising children until 40 days old, xcept it be in danger of death; 4. Permitting no Images in their Churches, but that of the Cross; 5. Allowing one marriage to their Priests, but debaring the second; 6. In painting God with three heads on one body to denote the Trinity. 7. Denying the use of extreme Unction; and 8. Not acknowledging the Pope's Supremacy. And in this State they stood till the year 1599, when by the solicitation of the Portugals, they renounced their obedience to the Patriarch of Musall, and submitted their Churches to the jurisdiction of the Pope of Rome, in a National Synod held at Diamper, not far from Maliapar by the Archbishop of Goa (the Primate of the Portugals in those parts) not only rejecting all opinions contrary to the Romish Tenets, but delivering all their Books and Liturgies to be altered and reform by the said Archbishop, according to the Rites and doctrines of the Church of Rome, which was done accordingly.  
But these comparatively to the rest, come not to an handful; the main body of the People wallowing in their Gentilism; and still retaining many of those ancient Customs, which they used of old: as viz. 1. Not knowing their wives after they have born them two children; 2. Nor keeping them, if after five years' ●●habitation, they can raise no issue by them; but then exchanging them for others; 3. Rewarding none for any military exploit, if they bring not with them in their hands the head of an enemy; 4. Killing their Friends, before they were withered or decayed by Age, or sickness. To these they have since added others of a later invention, perhaps more barbarous, of which we may have opportunity to speak anon. Their Priests or learned men, in the time of old were called Brachmanes from one Brachman, the prescriber of their Rites and Laws, by whom instructed in the Rudiments of their Philosophy; a Sect of which, from their going naked, had the name of Gymnosophists; who were to them as the Chaldaei, to the Assyrians; the Magis, to the Persians; and the Druids, to the ancient Britan's. Had in great Reverence by the People, and living for the most part an austere and solitary life in Caves and Deserts; feeding on herbs, poorly apparelled, and for a time abstaining from all carnal pleasures: but that time past, they may indulge themselves more liberty, and admit the company of women. Others of them live together with the common-people, as being their ordinary Priests. Of these, the great Alexander, when he was in this Country, surprised ten; one of them called by the name of Calanus, with whom he had a great deal of communication: propounding to him many strange questions, and receiving back to many of them, (as himself confessed) some not unsatisfying though strange answers. To these Gymnosophists, or brahmin's the Bramines do now succeed, both in place and authority; but differ from them most extremely in point of learning, and the civilities of their lives: these Bramines being the most impure, libidinous, and sensual beasts in all the Country; privileged with the first night's lodging of every Bride, which when sated with their filthy lust, they sell, or traffic with, to strangers; serving as Stallions to old men, and as Panders to young; so fleshed in wickedness, and ignorant of all good letters, that they have nothing of a man but the voice and shape. Mahometanism is also entertained in a great part of the Country, first brought in by the Tartars, and neighbouring Persians unto whom conterminous; but much increased by the victories of the Great Mongul: who being originally a Tartar, and of that Religion, hath caused it to be propagated in most parts of his large dominions.  
Mountains of most note in it, besides Caucasus, and some other of the branches of Taurus or Arara●, common to this, and the Tartarian and Persian Empires, 1. Sardonix, full of mines of those precious stones which are called after the name of the Mountain. 2. Vindius. 3. Bittigo. 4. Adisathras. 5. Those called Apocopi, and 6. Those named Orodii. And on the further side of Ganges. 7. Se●yrrus. 8. Maeandrus. 9 Those called Damusi, and 10. Semanthinus; part of this last extending also unto China. All of them very fruitful in the production of mines, and Rivers, as will appear by looking over the particulars when we come unto them.  
But the Mountain of Chief note of all is that which Ptolemy calleth Bitigo, and is now named Gates, the Southern part of the great Mountain Imaus spoken of before: extended from Mount Caucasus, where it crosseth the Taurus in right Angels, to Cape Comari, a known Promontory of Industan, or the Hither India (which it divideth into East and West) for the space of 400 leagues and upwards. Conceived by Postellus a learned Writer, to be that Mount Sephar, mention whereof is made in the 10th of Genesis, where it is said to be the utmost Eastern limit of the Sons of Joktan, Gen. 10. v. 30. With probability enough, for aught I can see, the sons of Joktan being settled in these parts of India, and the Provinces of the Persian Empire which lie nearest to them. And so far Stephanus doth concur with postel, as to affirm of this Mount Sephar, that it is Mons Indiae, an Indian Mountain: both of them grounding on Saint Hierom, who expressly saith, Sopheramons' Orientis in India, juxta quem habitaverunt filii Jectam, i. e. that Sephar, or Sopher, is the name of a Mountain of the East in India; near to which dwelled the sons of Jocktan. More probably, without doubt, than that we should transfer it into Amercia, as I see some do; and make it there to be the great Mountain of the Andes, which runneth the whole length of Peru, from one end to the other; and thence as some will have it to the straits of Magellan. Which should we grant, we must not look for Joktan, or the sons of Joktan, either in Arabia Felix, where Bochartus placeth them; nor in the Eastern parts of Asia, where most probably they may be found: but we must cross the vast Oriental Ocean, and look for them in a place where they never were: besides, that granting this for true, we must allow America to have been known in the time of Moses; which no Author that I ever met with did so much as dream of.  
Rivers of most note are, 1. Indus, which ariseth out of that part of Taurus which the Ancients called Paropamisus, the Moderns, Naugrocot; and having received into it 19 other Rivers, after a course of 900 miles, falleth into the Ocean at seven Mouths, that is to say 1. Sagappa, being the most Western, 2. Sinthum, 3. Aureum, 4. Cariphi, 5. Sappara, 6. Sabalassa, 7. Lonibare, the most Eastward. But five of these being chaoked with sands, or drawn into the neighbouring Channels, there now remains but only two. A River famous in Records and ancient stories for giving name unto the Country, and that so celebrated voyage of Alexander, who sailed down it towards the Indian Ocean: the voyage holding above five months, of which there is said to have passed no day wherein he sailed not 15 miles, or 600 Furlongs. 2. Ganges, which riseth as some say from the Mountain Imaus, (or rather from that part of Taurus, where Imaus falleth right upon it,) and falling headlong down the Rocks, is first collected into a Lake, or Pool (supposed by others for the fountain and Original of it) whence with a gentler pace it passeth towards the Ocean; taking in by the way, as is said by Pliny, 30 navigable Rivers. In the narrowest place of eight miles' breadth, in the broadest 20. seldom so shallow but that the depth thereof is 100 foot, or 20 Geometrical paces. Parted into five great Channels it falleth at last into the Sea; the first of which most towards the West, is called Cambysum, 2. Magnum, 3. Camberychum, 4. Psendostomum, and 5. that which lieth furthest towards the East, called Autiboli. This River erroneously supposed to be that Pison which watered Paradise: and to increase the reputation of the error, we find it countenanced by Josephus, and other no less eminent names; and also backed by some traditions of the people which inhabit near it. By whom it is affirmed that one of the Bengalan Kings sent men up the River, who came at last to a pleasant place, blest with a fragrant Earth, sweet air, and quiet waters; beyond which they could go no further. The truth and reality whereof doth so possess them, that at the mouth of this River called Gangasagie, such as are weary of this world use to cast themselves into the current, and are presently devoured by a fish called Seadogs, by whom they hope to find a quick passage to Paradise. The occasion of which error among the Ancients proceeded from those words of the Scripture, in which it is affirmed of Pison, that it compassed the land of Havilah: which granting that it did, inferreth not that either this River must be Pison, or that India is intended by that Havilah. For besides Havilah the son of Jocktan, planted in some part of India; there was another Havilah the son of Chus, settled in the land of Havilah or Chasiana, not far from Babylon: this last indeed watered by the River Pison, and the first by Ganges; too far asunder, and divided by too many Nations, to be taken or mistaken one for another. But not less famous, because none of those which neighboured the garden of Eden: perhaps of greater fame than any of those which did. For to this River do the superstitious Indians make their solemn Pilgrimages, vainly conceiving that they shall be sure of their eternity, if at the time of their death they may drink of this water. To the overflowings of this River do the People ascribe the fertility of the Country's adjoining, as the Egyptians do to Nilus. And finally, by this River was the whole Country anciently, and at this present is, divided into two main parts, (each subdivided into many particular Provinces) viz. 1. India intra Gangem, 2. India extra Gangem. Of each of which we will first take a brief survey with reference to the state and story of it in preceding times; and then consider them with reference to the present age.  

INDIA INTRA GANGEM.  
INDIA INTRA GANGEM, is bounded on the East, with the River Ganges till the fall thereof into the Sea, and after that with that large and spacious Bay, called anciently Sinus Gangeticus, now the Gulf of Bengala; on the West, with Paropamisus, Arachosia, Gedrosia, Provinces of the Persian Empire; and part of the Arabian Seas: on the North, where it is broadest, with Mount Taurus, branched into Paropamisus, Caucasus, and other parts; and on the South, where it endeth in a sharp point or Promontory, by Ptolemy called Commaria extrema, but now Cape Commari, with the Indian Ocean. So named from being situate on this side of Ganges; by the moderns Indostan.  
The Country of the same nature formerly, as it is at the present, not altered but by changing of the channels of Indus; which being shifted by an Earthquake, turned a great part of the once neighbouring Region to a sandy Desert: Indus (as many other of the Indian Rivers) fattening and enriching all the land which it overfloweth. The people of those elder times much like the Scythians, especially in their course of life, living without Cities, Temples, Houses, in their movable tents: their food the bark of a tree called Tala, which served for bread; and the flesh of bucks, does, and other venison, with the skins whereof they made their Garments. All of them Freemen, but no Slaves to be found amongst them. Less warlike than the Scythians, but as great Contemners of death as they: the very women contending eagerly amongst themselves, which should accompany their Husband (one husband having many wives) to his Funeral Pile. Of which thus Saint Hierome, Hae igitur contendunt de amore viri, & ambitio summa certantium est ac testimonium castitatis dignam morte censeri. A custom still retained amongst them; of which somewhat hath been said already, and more is to be said in another place.  
Principal Rivers of this part, 1. Hydaspes, by Ptolemy (and by him only) called Bidaspes, one of the furthest bounds of Alexander's conquests. 2. Suastus, 3. Coa, 4. Acesines, very memorable in the Gests of Alexander. 5. Sandabilis, 6. Zaradrus: all coming from the Northern Mountains, and all falling (Hydaspes with three other Rivers first received into it) into the greater bed of Indus. 7. Diamna, 8. Sorabus, and 9 Soa, falling from the like Northern Mountains, into the main Channel of Ganges. 10. Naragonas, issuing from Mount Vindius. 11. Baris, from Bittigo. 12. Chaberis, from Adisathras. 13. Tindis, from the hill called Vxentus; and 14. Tina, from the Orodian Mountains, with many others of less note. By what names called at the present, I determine not; nor find I any which have dared to adventure on it. But doubtless to be found in 1. Catamul, 2. Cebcha, 3. Ray, 4. Chenao, 5. Rebeth, all tributaries unto Indus, which is now called Schind. 6. Taphi, 7. Harunda, 8. Chambel, 9 Jamena, which empty their waters into Ganges; the which, with such others of the principal Rivers as are now known by name unto us, shall occasionally be touched on in that which followeth. Besides which Rivers, here is a famous Lake mentioned in the Gests of Alexander, (but the name occureth not) not much above a mile in circuit, but exceeding pleasant, shaded on every side with woods; memorable for the great refreshment which it gave to Alexander's Army, when even pined with thirst.  
The Country so exceeding populous in the time of Ptolemy, that it afforded him the names of more noted Cities, than any one Country in the world. Of which 1. Cottiara, 2. Nigama, 3. Sa●●da, 4. Rarassa, 5. Masopelle, and 6. Pityndra, are honoured with the name of Metropoles; as being the head Cities of their several and respective Nations. 7. Ozene, 8. Sora, 9 Palibothra, 10. Gange, 11. Batana, 12. Hippocura, 13. Carara, 14. Modura, 15. Orthura, and 16. Mala●ga, mentioned as the Royal seats of several Princes; by the name of Regiae. 17. ●ardaxem●, 18. T●●dis, 19 A●gari, 20. Curula, 21. Chaberis, on the River so called. 22. Palura, on the shores of the Golf of Bengala, and 23. Palura, on the banks of Cambysum. 24. Tilegramocum; marked out above the rest with the name of Civitates, (Cities) and therefore probably of more note than others not so distinguished. And finally 25. Monogsassum, 26. Simylla, near a Promontory of the same name; 27. Nitra, 28. Maziris, 29. Elancorum, 30. Colchi, 31. Salur, 32. Sobura, 33. Poduca, 34. Melange, 35. Maliarpha, 36. Contacissyla, 37. Nosygne. 38. Barygaza. Specified as the most noted and celebrious Empories; besides 39 Canthimus, 40. Stathmus, (and 41 a Road opposite to Chrysas) two commodious Stations or Roads for shipping. The names and situation of these places is the most we find of them, which makes me pass them over with a bare recital, only to show how populous and well planted this Country was in the time of my Author.  
Of less name, but of more note in the course of story; 1. Nysa, built by Bacchus at the time of his Indian conquest, and called thus by the name of his Nurse, to preserve her memory, his mother dying in Childbirth of him. Replenished by him with his sick and wounded Soldiers, whose posterity continued here till the time of Alexander, who spared the City and the people for his love to Bacchus, who was therein worshipped in a Temple of his own foundation, planted about with Bayss, Vines, and Ivy, whose shidie branches covered the roof of it. In the midst thereof an Image, with all the Instruments belonging to a plentiful Vintage, all of Gold or Silver. 2. Taxilla, or Taxiala as Ptolemy calleth it, seated betwixt Indus and Hydaspes in the Region called Varsa, and built most probably by Taxiles a puissant King of India, in the time of Alexander. Adorned in elder times with a Temple dedicated to the Sun, and therein with an Ivory image of A●ax, a Golden Statue of Alexander, and the portraiture of King Porus made in copper. The floor of Mosaical work powdered with Pearls, the walls of red marble interlaied with gold, which made it shine a far off, like a flash of lightning. 3. Nagarna, called also Dionysiopolis; in memory of Bacchus who was also called Dionysius, and Liber Pater. 4. Adorn, by Diodorus called Aornos, and Avernus by Strabo; so strongly seated on a Rock, that Hercules was not able to force it: which made Alexander, imitating, and therein out-going the Acts of Hercules, assault it with the greater force, and at last he carried it. 5. Bucephala, built by Alexander on the banks of Hyd●spes, and named thus in memory of Bucephalus his beloved horse, which had served him in all the course of his Fortunes, and died hereabouts, being then thirty years old. 6. Pireta, another of his foundations, so called by the name of his dog, whom he dearly loved. 7. Alexandria, on the banks of Indus, another of his foundations also. 8. Mazage, on the West of Indus, one of the first Towns of India taken by the Macedonians, though garrisoned within, and environed without by an host of 300000 men: but yielded after some resistance, with the use of her own body, by Cleophe the Queen thereof, who received it back with other favours from the hands of the Conqueror. 9 Nora, a strong City on the same side of Indus, taken by Polysperchon, one of his Commanders. 10. Samus, on the banks of the same River, taken by Alexander in the course of his navigation down that sea of waters; the Inhabitants whereof fought against him with poisoned Arrows, with one of which Ptolemy, afterward King of Egypt, was dangerously wounded, and cured with an herb which Alexander dreamt he had seen in the mouth of a Serpent. 11. Oxydrace, the chief City of the Oxydracans, at the siege whereof Alexander is said to be the first that scaled the walls, and the last that could do so: the ladder breaking as soon as he was at the top. Standing thus alone as a mark to all their darts, he was by the Soldiers desired to leap down amongst them; but he in a daring bravado leapt into the Town among his enemies, where it was not only his good hap to light upon his feet, but to have an old tree at his back to defend him behind. In this posture he is said to have maintained the fight a long time against all the Soldiers of the Town; killing two of them with his own hands, and by that example teaching the rest to be more mannerly: till being wearied, and dangerously wounded, he was forced to leave his feet, and commit the weight of of his body to his knees. In this case Leonatus, Peucestes, and some other of his Captains, came to assist him; who defended their dying Master, till the whole Army entered the Town, and put all the people to the sword, in revenge of their King, whose life they had little hope to enjoy, though he with much danger did afterward recover. For my part I give little or no credence to this story, ranging it in the same Catalogue of truth with the Adventures of Donzel del Phoebo, Rosicler, Beliams, Amadis, and the rest of the rabble of Knights errand. Neither is this the first time that Curtius hath disgraced the soundness of Alexander's judgement, and the truth of his actions, with the like idle and impossible fables: though indeed in that particular, he saith that it was multo magis ad temeritatis quam ad gloriae famam. And 12. Nicaea, built by Alexander on the banks of Acesines, in memory of his many great and signal victories. Not far from which finding how unwilling his Soldiers were to pass further East, he purposed to leave behind him some Monument of his great exploits, and to make his fame immortal amongst the Indians. And to that end he caused the form of his Camp to be enlarged, and the Cabins to be made bigger than sufficed for his men to lodge in, the Mangers to be set higher than his horses could reach, Armour and Bits for horses of too great a ●ize (made not for use, but ostentation of his might,) to be scattered up and down the Camp for the savage people to wonder at in the times to come. By means whereof he got nothing amongst knowing men but a suspicion that his Actions were indeed less memorable than they are reported to have been, since he so vainly laboured to have them thought greater than indeed they were.  
The old Inhabitants hereof were the Indo-Scythae, inhabiting on the North-West of Indus, the Mazagae, Sadani, Piratae, Limyrices, Aii, the Soringi, Arvari, Oxydracae, Malli, and Lambatae; the Gandarides, or Gangarides, near the munch of Ganges; the Caspiraei, under the shades of Mount Vindius. The Musicani, Chatziaei, Polindae, Phyllitae, Bittigi, Chadramotitae, Pezuari, Adisathri, Mandalae, Dryllophitae, Sabarae, Pandioni, with many others to the number 122 several nations, if Megasthenes be not out in his reckoning; too many and too impertinent to be mustered here.  
Originally descended from the Sons of Noah before they left these Eastern parts to go towards the unfortunate valley of Shinaar. We could not else have found this Country so full of people in the days of Semiramis, the wife of Ninus: who leading an Army compounded of several nations to the number of four millions and upwards (if Ctesias, and Diodorus Siculus who reports it from him be of any credit, but certainly the greatest Army that was ever raised) was encountered by Staurobates King of India, with greater forces made up of natural Indians only, by whom she was vanquished and slain. A matter beyond all belief, though neither Army could make up a fourth part of that number, if the Indians had been no other than some one of those Colonies which were sent from BABEL; or rather a second or third Swarm of those former Colonies, which went thence under the command of the first Adventurers. For that any of the first Adventurers, who were present at the building of the Tower of BABEL, traveled so far East, is not affirmed by any who have laboured in the search of their plantations. So that I take it for a matter undeniable, that the plantation of India preceded the attempt of BABEL; though by whom made there is nothing to be said for certain. Yet if I might have liberty to express my own conceptions, I am inclinable to believe that all the Eastern parts of Persia, with China, and both the Indias, were peopled by such of the sons of Sem, as went not with the rest to the Valley of Shinaar. For otherwise I can see no reason, that the posterity of Japher should plant the greatest part of the Lesser Asia, and the whole Continent of Europe, with the Isles thereof; and that the sons of Cham should spread themselves over Babylonia, Palestine, the three Arabiaes, and the whole Continent of afric; the posterity of Sem being shut up in a corner of the Greater Asia, hardly so big as some one Province taken up by the other Adventurers. And therefore that I may allow to the sons of Sem an equal Latitude, I think it not improbable to fix them in these Eastern Countries, spreading themselves this way as they grew in numbers, before the rest of the Adventurers went to seek new fortunes at the Tower of BABEL. And being that the Country was large and wealthy, and might have room enough to spare for some second comers (especially descending from the same root with them) I doubt not but to place here also all the sons of Jocktan, Havilah, Chatsarmaveth, Saba, Abimail, who have left here some tract or monument of themselves, as hath been shown at large in our GENERAL PREFACE; and as concerning Ophir, shall be showed hereafter. To proceed therefore to our Story, the next who made any invasion on this Country, after that of Semiramis, was Bacchus or Liber Pater, the son of Jupiter and Semele, accompanied with Hercules Aegyptius; not much more fortunate than she: the forces of Bacchus being defeated, and Hercules forced to throw away his Golden Shield. But what they could not do by Arms, they effected by Arts. Bacchus instructing them in the use of wine, oil, sacrifices, and the Art of Architecture, and drawing them into Towns and Cities, for that cause honoured as a GOD. To Hercules they ascribe the Nation of the Pandioni, proceeding from a daughter of his called PANDAEA: the memory of both preserved in Statues and Pillars erected by them.  
After this unattempted till the time of Alexander, who having made a full conquest of the Persian Empire, invaded India with an Army of an 120000 fight men. Beginning with CLEOPHE, Queen of the Mazagae, a people of Indo-Scythia, he brought her to conformity, possessed himself both of her person and estate; on whom he begot a son called Alexander, who is said to have succeeded in her Dominions. Being passed over the River Indus, Taxiles (by some called Omphis) a prudent Prince, whose Kingdom is affirmed to be bigger than Egypt, submitted of his own accord, offering his service and assistance to promote his conquest, and presenting him with a Crown of Gold, and 80 Talents of ready money. The King made welcome, but his money not so much as looked on: the Macedonian being so far from fingering of this Indian gold, that he gave him a thousand Talents of his own treasure. Encouraged by this Royal dealing, Abiajares, another puissant Prince of the opposite faction unto Taxiles, submitted also, and was as graciously received: Porus, whose Kingdom lay on the other side of Hydaspes, would not be so conquered, and therefore mustereth up his forces, and valiantly made good the banks of the River. But vanquished at the last, not without much difficulty, he was made a Prisoner to the Victor; who honouring the man for his brave resistance, gave him his liberty and Kingdom with a great enlargement. The Conqueror had a great desire to go further East, but the Soldiers would not be persuaded: sufficiently taught by Porus, what they were to look for, if the Indiansshould unite their forces. Unable to prevail, he erected in the place twelve Altars, as high as Towers, where he observed many solemn Games and Sacrifices: and having sacrificed to Hydaspes, Indus, and Acesines, he sailed down Indus towards the Southern Ocean; which seen at distance, he turned towards Gedrosia, and thence to Babylon, where he died.  
After his death Eumenes raised some part of his forces hence. But the Macedonians being plunged in a Civil war, one Androcottus stirred up the Indians to recover their freedoms; making himself at first their Captain, but at last their King. Possessed of all that had been conquered by the Greeks, he was encountered by Seleucus, who had then got the command of Asia: against whom he brought an Army of 600000 fight men. Frighted wherewith, Seleucus made peace with him, and contracted a solemn League betwixt them; continued with the interchange of friendly Offices amongst their posterity; and more confirmed by an interview betwixt Antiochus the Great, and Saphagasenus, one of the Successors of Andracottus; by whom Antiochus was presented with 150 Elephants, and the promise of some treasure to be sent after him. By the Posterity of Andracottus was the Kingdom held till the prosperity and full height of the ROMAN Empire. The power whereof though they rather knew by report, than trial, yet was it not amiss to entertain a potent, though remote State, in terms of amity. Therefore they sent Ambassadors unto Augustus, who presented him with a number of Tigers, (which beasts (saith Dion) till then, the Roman people had never seen) and which was the most pleasing, a little boy born without arms, who with his feet could bend a bow, shoot, and play on wind instruments, as exactly as others with their hands. Tra●an the Emperor had a great desire to see this Country, but was diverted from that purpose by matters of more necessary importance to the State of his Empire. Moved with the same of Antoninus, the Roman Emperor, they sent a solemn Embassy to him; making him Umpire in some Controversies which they had with the Bactrians: from which Ambassadors it is probable that Ptolemy the Geographer who then lived, might receive his informations of the estate of this Country. The like they did to Julian the Apostate also, then setting forwards on his expedition against the Persian; desiring his friendship and alliance. How it was with them in the time of Constantine and Justinian, hath been shown already. After these times by little and little, histories have been in a manner silent concerning the affairs hereof; but for some conquests made on the parts next Persia, by the Chaliphs' of Bagdet. For notwithstanding that there was continual traffic from the Red Sea hither; and between the Persians, Turkish, and Indian Merchants for spices, and the other commodities of this Region; yet were not these Merchants acquainted with the state of the Country; because they entered not into it, but were met by the Indian Merchants at Sarmachand, being as it were the common Emporie. Neither did the Egyptians at all enter into India, but were met by the Indians at Ormus, or some other Island: even as now the Chinois, make some of the Philippinae, the staple of their trade with the Spaniards; whom they licence not to come into the Continent among them. But our modern navigators have withdrawn this mask of obscurity, and show us her lively portraiture in as lively colours. One of the first which broke the ice, and gave us any certainty of their affairs, was Sir John Mandeville, accounted at his coming back for the greatest Fabler in the world: so incredible seemed his reports of the magnificence of those Kings, and the wealth of their Countries, and the many rarities which he found amongst them. But better thought of by our neighbours, he obtained a Monument in a Convent at Liege, the Friars of which keep some things of his, Comme pour honourable memory de son excellent, for an honourable memorial of his Excellencies. Many of his Relations since confirmed by the Portugals, who under the conduct of Vasquez de Gama first discovered this Country, by the new way of the Cape of good hope, Anno 1497. By whom and some later observations, we have been informed, that in this part of India were no fewer than 47 Kingdoms, whereof some few have still their own natural Kings; the rest all subject to the power of the Great Mogul. Contracted into a lesser number by joining many lesser territories into one Division, we shall look on it as distributed into 15 Provinces. Some have reduced them unto five, but give us neither the bounds nor extent of any of them. And others in the description of their travels, ramble up and down with such uncertainties, (most of them being men of trades and ignorance) that though they tell us where they lodged, and what entertainments they did meet with; yet we shall hardly know by them (for I think they did not know themselves) in what Province they were; or to what part the several Towns thorough which they passed, did of right belong. So that our passage thorough these Countries (having such blind guides to follow) will be full of difficulty, and not so satisfactory to the Reader as he might expect. Howsoever, I desire him to bear me company, whilst I take the best survey I can of these 15 Provinces, to which the whole may be most handsomely reduced: that is to say, 1. Dulsinda, 2. Pengab, 3. Ma●dao, 4. Delly, 5. Agra, 6. Sanga, 7. Cambaia, 8. Decan, 9 Canara, 10. Malabar, 11. Narsinga, 12. Oristan, 13. Botanter, 14. Patenaw, and 15. Bengala.   

1. DULSINDA.  
DULSINDA is bounded on the East, with the River Indus; on the West, with Paropamisus, and Arachosia, two Persian Provinces; but for the most part, under the command of the Great Mogul; on the North, with Caucasus, by which parted from Tartary; on the South, with the Kingdom of Cambaia. So that it taketh up all the Northern parts of this Estate, which lie upon the West of the River Indus: from which River called by the Natives Sinda, most probable it is that it took this name: and therefore I have written it with an s, Dulsinda, and not Dulcinda with a c, as I see some do, but on no good reason.  
The Country by reason of the Northern situation of it more temperate, but less fruitful than the rest of India. The seat, in ancient times, of the Mazagae, and Indo-Scythae, when subdued by Alexander. Made up at present, of many lesser Kingdoms, and smaller Provinces, denominated, for the most part, from the principal Tows, and Cities of them, as in other places.  
Amongst which those of most esteem, are 1. Caximir, Cascimir, or Chesmur, (for by all these names it is called) the chief of a Kingdom once, unto which it gave name, till subdued by Echebar, the Mogul; who in a pleasant Island, (in the midst of a great and deep Lake, about three leagues off the City) beset round with Trees, built a Royal Palace: which he honoured sometimes with his Court, removed hither from Lahor, partly the better to assure this new conquered Kingdom; but principally because his Palace at Lahor, and therein an infinite deal to Treasure, had but newly been consumed by fire. The City itself situate in the most healthy Country of all India, encompassed with high Mountains, covered for the most part of the year with snow; the rest a delicate, goodly plain, diversified with Pastures, Woods, Cornfields, Meadows, Parks, Gardens, and Rivers, even to admiration. The air hereof, and of the Country round about, by reason of the Northern situation of it, and the snowy Mountains, very cool and temperate. The soil abundantly productive of Wheat, Rice, and Vines; which last they plant at the foot of the Mulberry-tree, which seemeth by this means, to bear double fruits. Both Town and Kingdom subdued by Echebar, the Mogul, about the year 1597. their own dissensions more conducing to that subjugation, than any visible force which he brought before it. 2. Roree, a Fort of the Moguls towards Paropamisus; but bordering upon the Country of Multan, to which People it properly belongeth: garrisoned not so much for fear of the Persian, (for Paropamisus, now called Cabal, is his ancient Patrimony,) but to preserve the People from the spoil of Thiefs, who always hang about the Mountains. 3. In the most Northern parts hereof, stood the Nagara of Ptolemy; mistake by some for the modern Agra, of which more anon. 4. Sestan, the chief City as I take it, of the Kingdom of Rebat; situate on the East of Caxim●r, betwixt it and the Indus: in the same Latitude with that, but not of so temperate an air; the snowy Mountains much conducing to the Temperature of the Realm of Caximir., 5. Mul●an, a great and ancient City, and the chief of a Kingdom, on the South of Caximir, or Chesmur, and about three French leagues from the banks of the River Indus. The ordinary thoroughfare of the Caravans, in the way from Lahor to Spahan, (the chief Seat of the Sophy or King of Persia) forced to abide there divers days, sometimes ten or twelve, to enrich the Town, which of itself is of no great trading nor otherwise able to subsist but by this device. 6. Duckee, a Fort or Garrison, situate in the straits of the Mountains to secure the Caravans, and protect other Passengers from the danger of Robbers, hover in these hill-countr●es, the outparts of this Empire.   

2. PENGAB.  
OPposite to Dulsinda, on the Eastern-side of the River Indus, but more inclining towards the South, lieth the Country, or Division rather, which my Author calleth by the name of PENGAB; bounded on the West, with Indus, which divideth it from Dulsinda; on the South, with the Kingdom of Mandoa; on the North, and East, with those many Kingdoms, which we have comprehended under the name of Botanter.  
The reason of the name I find not, nor any thing memorable of the Country; but that it was divided in the time of Ptolemy, into the Provinces of the Lambatae, Caspiria, Cylindrine, and Suastene: subdued by Alexander in his expedition into India: the famous Rivers of Acesines, and Hydaspis' (but by what names now called I find not) having here their course. So that it seemeth to have been a part of the Kingdom of Porus, or that the Kingdom of Porus was a part of this.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Lahor, on the Eastern banks of Indus, affirmed to be the fairest and most ancient City in both the Indies; of most esteem for wealth and greatness. In compass about sixteen miles, and honoured for a while with the ordinary Residence of the Great Mogul, till on the burning of his Palace, spoken of before, he removed his Court to Caximir, from thence to Fatipore, and at last to Agra. Since that time made the Seat of the eldest son, or heir apparent, sent hither for avoiding all occasion of factions, which their living in the Court might breed. A City of exceeding great trade, as being the chief Staple for the Spices in these parts, and other commodities of India, from hence transported into Persia by the way of Candahor, the principal Town of Arachosia; and so to Spahan the chief City of the Sophian Empire, where they are sold, by reason of so long and chargeable a journey, at excessive rates. It is said that 12000 Camels at the least pass every year thorough it with their lading, besides what is ferried down the River, and brought up by the Portugals, who therewith traded unto Ormus till that Town was taken. By this we may conjecture at the wealth hereof, but more by that great Mass of treasure which a late Governor hereof did leave behind him. At whose death Echebar the Mogul (for the Mogul is the heir General unto all men's wealth) found in his Coffers three millions of Gold ready coined, great quantity of Gold and Silver uncoined, and some store of Jewels: besides Horses, Elephants, Household-furniture, and other goods almost invaluable. 2. Sultan-puare, of more antiquity than beauty; yet of good esteem. 3. Athec, in the common Road from Lahor to China; reported in the description of the travels of Benedictus a Goes, a Portugal Jesuit, to be a month's journey from Lahor, and yet in the same Province with it. Which if it be true, either the Province must be large, or his journey's short: or if not true, we must remember that we had it from the pen of a Jesuit. And yet as great as this Province or Division is affirmed to be, we do not find the names of any more Towns of consideration which may be said with confidence to belong unto it.   

3. MANDAO.  
THe Kingdom of MANDAO is bounded on the North, with Pengab; on the South, with the Realm of Agra; on the East, with Delly; and on the West, with the River Indus. So called from Mandao, the chief City of it.  
The Country more mountainous and rugged than the rest of these Provinces, by reason of the many branches of Mount Bittigo, the Southern part of the Imaus, which do overrun it: in other things partaking of the riches of India. The men, as most of those who live in such mountainous tracts, of a warlike temper; comparatively with the rest of the Indians: the women here anciently as valiant as the men in other places; riding astride, and practised in the Arts of Horsemanship: for that cause called Amazons; some of which are said to be still remaining. Insomuch as it is written in the stories hereof, that the King of this Country not long since going to the wars, was accompanied by the Queen his Wife marching in the Front of two thousand women all well mounted and prepared for service.  
Chief Cities hereof▪ 1. Mandao, seated on the banks of the River Mandova, (the Manda of Ptolemy and the Ancients) whence it had the name. A City of great note, said to be 30 miles in compass; yet so well fortified, and furnished with all necessaries so: defence and resistance, that it held out twelve years against Mirumudius, or Merhamed, the Great Mogul, who then besieged it. Surrendered at the last, and with it the Kingdom. Memorable for the great battle fought before it betwixt the said Merhamed, then coming to the relief thereof; and Badurius King of Cambaia who had then distressed it: in which fight Badurius lost his tents and Treasures, and was fain to fly disguised unto Diu, to crave aid of the Portugals. 2. Moltan, once the chief City of a Kingdom, or a Kingdom rather of itself, but of no great note: the women whereof though not so good Soldiers as their Ancestors of the female sex, yet to come as near them as they can, use boots and spurs when they take a journey, and so fitted fit astride the saddle. 3. Scernus, on the River so called, of more Antiquity than greatness; as is also▪ 4. Polymbothie, the Palibothra of Ptolemy and others of the ancient writers, than the chief Town of the Palibothei (by Pliny and Strabo, called Prasii) a People of as great authority and power as any in India.  
This once a Kingdom of itself of great power and wealth, till Badurius King of Cambaia having conquered the Realm of Citor, and therewith a great part of Sanga, made an attempt upon this also. Galgee then King of Mandao finding himself too weak for so strong an Enemy, craved aid of Merhamed (of Miramudius as the Latins) the Mongul Tartar, then reigning in Chabul or Arachosia, and possessed of some parts of India also since the times of Tamerlane. Who compounding an Army of his own subjects, some mercenary Persians, and a great body of Zagathaian Tartars, from whom originally descended, came in accordingly: discomfited the vast Anny of Badurius, consisting of of 150000 horse, and 500000 foot, in two set battles, the first at Doceti, the next at Mandao; and following his blow possessed himself of the whole Kingdom of Cambaia. But not content with that success, quarrelled the Mandoan King in whose aid he came; besieged him in his principal City, which at last he won, and therewithal the Kingdom also: the wretched King showing hereby a fair both evidence and example to succeeding ages, that the easiest way for a Prince to ruin his own estate, and endanger his neighbours, is to admit a Foreign power into his own Dominions, which he cannot as easily thrust out, as he hath brought them in.   

4. DELLY.  
DELLY is bounded on the West, with Mandao; on the East, with the Kingdom of Botanter; on the North, with the Eastern parts of Pengab; on the South, with the Eastern parts also of the Kingdom of Agra. So named from DELLY the chief City of it, by some called Delin.  
The Country, besides what is common to it with the rest of India, is said to be more abundantly stored than any other part of it with horses, Elephants and Dromedaries. Of the people nothing singular, except it be that many of them taking more delight in thee very than honest trades, live for the most part upon spoil: but those especially whom they call by the name of Belemi, being such of the nobility or better sort, who since the conquest of their Country by the Great Moguls, have lived like Outlaws on the Mountains. Of the same temper with the Resbutes in Cambaia, and the Agwans in Sanga and Dulsinda; who rather than submit themselves to a foreign yoke, (as they count that of the Mongull) choose to forsake their proper dwellings, and all honest ways and means of living.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Delly, A City not only honoured heretofore with the residence of the Great Moguls, who from hence pass in common appellation, by the names of the Kings of Delly, and that amongst their most knowing Subjects; but beautified with many sepulchers of their ancient Kings, whose funerals and Coronations were herein celebrated. And though deserted of late times, by the Great Moguls, moving their Courts from place to place, as they enlarged their Empire, and increased their conquests: yet still a great many of the Nobles, and not a few Captains and Commanders, do frequent the same; and have their houses and pleasure of retirement in it. 2. Tremel, upon the Western side of the River Mandova; but not much observable. 3. Doceti, memorable for the great battle fought near unto it, in which Merhamed the Mongul overthrew the forces of Badurius, and thereby opened a fair way to the Realm of Cambaia.  
This Country governed a long time by its natural Princes, was at last conquered by some Moors or Saracens, coming from Persia or Arabia, but I find not which, who grew to so great power and wealth, that Sanosaradine, a Mahometan, one of their Descendants, dreamt of no less than the conquest of all India, if not of the whole Continent of Asia also. Having about the year 1300 (memorable for the beginning of the Ottoman Empire) subdued by little and little all the neighbouring Princes which made head against him; he pierced at last into Canora, now called Decan, and conquering a great part of it returned back to Delly. The pursuit of his victories he left un●o one Abdessa his Lieutenant there, who added the rest of that Country to his Master's territories; but kept the possession to himself, confirmed therein by Sanosaradine, with the Title of Regent. But Sanosaradine dying in a war against the Persians, left for his Successor a son so unlike his Father, that the conquered Provinces revolted from him unto other Masters, more able to govern and protect them. Confined unto its former bounds, it remained notwithstanding of sufficient power to preserve itself, from any of their equal neighbours, till the rising of the Great Monguls: whose puissance being unable to withstand, it submitted at the last to Adabar, the son of Merhamed, the second Emperor of this line: who to assure himself of the people's loyalty, and confirm his conquests, settled his Court a while at Delly, the chief City of it; from whence removed on the next prosporous emergency, as before was noted.   

5. AGRA.  
THe Realm of AGRA is bounded on the North, with Delly, and Mandao; on the South, with Sang●, and Cambaia; on the West, with Indus, which parteth it from the Province of Sinda, a part of the Kingdom of Cambaia; on the East, with Oristan, or Orixa. So called from Agra the chief City of it, and the Seat Royal, of late times, of the Great Monguls.  
The Country said to be the best and most pleasant of India, plentiful in all things, and such a delicate, even piece of ground, as the like is hardly to be seen. Well watered, as with other Rivers, so most especially with those of Tamtheo and Jemena; which last runneth thorough the midst of it, North and South, or rather from the Northwest to the Southeast: from whence bending more directly Eastwards, it falleth at last into the Ganges, or that which is supposed to be Ganges, for the bed of that great River is no: ncertainly known. The People for the most part Gentiles; Mahometanism coming in with the Great Mogul; and generally inclining somewhat to the Pythagorean. For such as live upon the banks of the River Jemena, neither eat flesh, nor kill any thing. The waters of which River they esteem so sacred, that thereof they usually make their Temple, and say their prayers therein, but naked (in which posture they both dress their meat and eat it): lodging upon the ground, being imposed by them as a penance, and so conceived.  
Places of most esteem herein, 1. Fattpore, or Fettebarri, on the Westside of the River, a very fair and goodly City, once beautified with a Royal Palace here built by Echebar (after the removal of his Court from Cascimar) with many spacious gardens belonging to it, but much decayed, since the fixing of the Court at Agra, to which most of the Stones are carried, and no small quantity of Corn sowed within the Walls. 2. Agra, on the North bank of the River Jemena; inferior to Lanor for wealth and greatness, but far more populous: the constant residence of the Court here in these latter times, drawing to it great resort of all sorts of People. By some supposed to be the Nagara of Ptolemy; but such a supposition as is built on no better ground, than some resemblance of the names. For Ptolemy's Nagara is by him placed on the Western-side of Indus, in the Latitude of 33. whereas this Agra standeth on the East of the River Jemena, five Degrees more Southwards, in the Latitude of 28. But what it loseth in Antiquity, it hath got in honour: the Town and Territory being a peculiar Kingdom, till Echebar the Mogul subdued it, Anno 1598. in his passage from Lahor to Decan. But it lost nothing by the hand. For Echebar delighted in the situation of it (and that withal it stood in the midst of his Kingdoms) made it the Seat Royal of his Empire; fixed there, for the most part ever since: by means whereof exceedingly increased in wealth, beauty and greatness: the very Castle in which the Mogul usually resideth, being two miles in compass, environed with most high and unscalable walls, and fortified with great store of Ordinance. The whole space betwixt it and Fatipore, being 18. miles, affirmed to be a continual Market: and all the Interval from hence to the Town of Lahor (from which distant 600 miles towards the South) adorned with continual Rows of Trees on both sides of the ways, most of them bearing a kind of Mulberry; and at every ten miles' end, houses erected by the King or some of the Nobles, for beautifying the way to the Regal City, preserving their own memory, and the safe lodging of Passengers, in danger otherwise, by night of Thiefs and Cutthroats. 3. Hendee, a Town more towards the South, beautified with a fair Castle of the Kings, cut out of the main Rock, and wrought with carved work round about, fortified with 50 pieces of Ordinance, and thought impregnable: for that cause made a Prison for great persons. Here are also two Hospitals for such Captains (and Captains only) as are maimed in the wars. 4. Beani, twelve course or 18. miles from Fattipore; the most noted place for Indigo in all the Indies; for the making whereof they have here twelve mills. Which Indigo, (by the way) groweth on a small shrub like our Goose-berry-bushes, bearing seed like a Cabbage-seed: which being cut down, are laid in heaps for half a year, and when rotten, brought into a vault, to be trodden with Oxen from the Stalks, and being ground small and fine at the Mills, is last of all boiled in furnaces, refined and sorted.   

6 SANGA.  
SANGA is bounded on the North, with the East parts of the Realm of Agra; on the South and West, with Cambaia; from which parted on the West, by the Mountain Gate; and on the East, with Oristan. The reason of the name I find not: this Country being too far South to be so called from Sangalassa, a Town of chief note near the fountains of Indus, where placed by Arianus, lib. 5.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Azmere, or Agimer, 180 miles from Agra. At the end of every course (each course a mile and an half) a fair pillar erected, and at every tenth course a fair Seraglio (such as we call Inns) for the entertainment of Travelers. All built by Echebar, who wanting Children, is said to have gone in Pilgrimage, on foot from Arra to Azimere, saying his prayers at the end of every course, and lodging all night at the tenth. 2. Citor, the chief City of Sanga, and once a Kingdom of itself, or the chief of that Kingdom. Situate in the middle way betwixt Surat, a known Port of Cambata, and Agra spoken of before: and most magnificently built on the top of a rocky hill, to which the passage is so narrow, and so well fortified, (there being in it three Gates, at the top, the middle, and the bottom) that thereby, and by other advantages of Art and nature, it was thought impregnable. Affirmed to he 12, miles in compass, beautified with many goodly buildings both public and private; but once more glorious than it is; here being to be seen the ruins of 100 Temples, and above 100000 houses, either demolished by the wars, or suffered to decay by the great Moguls, who would not willingly have any thing in the Indies of more Antiquity, than themselves; and therefore are rather inclined to build new Cities, than uphold the old. The greatness and Antiquity of it have made some men think that it was the Royal Seat of Porus. Others affirm the same of Delly, but neither rightly: the Kingdom of Porus lying more towards the River Indus, and not so far South. Governed not long since by a Queen called Crementina, not more fair than valiant, who revolting from Badurius King of Cambaia, to whom she formerly had paid tribute; was dispossessed of the Town of Citor, where she had fortified herself with 30000. foot, and 2000 horse: the People in a desperate resolution, laying all their treasures on an heap, which they burned together with themselves; in which flame it is said that there perished 70000 persons. But the Cambatan did not long enjoy his victory. For not long after both the City and a great part of the Country, was conquered by the great Mogul, the mountainous parts hereof being held against him by Ramee, the Son or successor of Qu. Crementina: till seeing himself destitute of all better helps, he put himself into the hands of one of the Sons of the late Sultan, by whom reconciled unto his Father. Some other Towns there are in this Province, and in that of Agra before mentioned, and those of good esteem perhaps amongst the natives; but of no observation or importance in the course of business.   

7 CAMBAIA.  
CAMBAIA hath on the East Delly and part of Mandao; on the West, Gedrosia a Province of the Persian Empire; on the North, Dulsinda, and the rest of Mandao; on the South, the main Ocean, and some part of Decan. It lieth on both sides of the Indus; and is so called from Cambaia, the chief Province of it. The whole divided into 1. Sinda. 2. Guzarate, and 3. Cambaia specially so called.  
1. SINDA hath on the East the River Indus, by which separated from Mandao; on the North, that part of Sanga which is called Dulsinda; on the West, parts of Gedrosia, and Guzarate; and on the South, the rest of Guzarate only: coasting along the Western banks of the River Indus, whence it had the name; that River being now called Sinned, as was said before. And for this reason, as I take it, the Western part of Sanga lying North of this, took the name of Dulsinda, and not Dulcinda (with a C) as most commonly written.  
The Country for the generality very rich and fertile; but in some places nothing but a sandy Desert, inhabited for the most part by wild Asses, Foxes, Deer, and some wilder beasts; but none so wild as the Caelies, a robbing nation, so numerous withal, that they sometimes rob whole Caravans as they pass that way, notwithstanding the many Forts and Castles built of purpose to secure those passages.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Tutta, (or Gutu Nagar Tutta) on the banks of Indus, a Town of great trade, but most frequented by the Portugals; who here receive such Indian commodities, as come down the water from Labour; returning Pepper in exchange, which they bring up the River from their other Factories. 2. Lawribander, at the mouth or outlet of the Indus, three day's journey from Tutta, the Port-town unto which it is, notwithstanding that distance. Supposed to be situate in or near the place of that Alexandria which Alexander built in memory of his navigation down this River to the Indian Ocean. An Haven much frequented because free from worms, which about Surat, and other Havens on these Seas, so infest the ships, that without much cost and care bestowed upon them, they make them unable to return. 3. Calwalla, memorable for the Tenure, as given by Echebar the Mongul to a company of Women and their posterity for ever, to bring up their daughters to dancing, and more wanton exercises. 4. Radempoore, a great Town with a strong Castle, seated at the edge of the Deserts: thorough which those that are to pass use here to provide themselves of water and other necessaries for their journey. 5. Nuraquemire, a pretty Town on the further side of the Deserts, esteemed a Paradise by such as have passed thorough those uncomfortable and dangerous sands, for the space of ten or twelve day's journey. 6. Sarrama, a large Town, twenty miles from Tutta; the Centre in which all lines meet, and from whence the distances of all Towns in Sinda, are accustomably measured.  
The Country anciently subject to the Kings of Cambaia, and in the right of that Crown to the Great Mongul: but the people for the most part so untamed and masterful, that except in some of the greater Towns they pay no Tributes, and in some places even within half a day's journey of Tutta, will acknowledge no King, but rob and spare whom they please. If at any time the Mogul sends a force against them, (as he doth sometimes) they fire their houses, made like a Beehive of straw and mortar, which are soon rebuilded; and retire themselves unto the Mountains. Yet one good quality they have amongst many ill ones. When they have robbed a Traveller, or took money of him in the way of toll or custom for his passage by them, they will conduct him honestly to the end of the Deserts, lest any should rob him but themselves.  
2. GUZARATE hath on the North, Sinda; on the South, the main Ocean; the River Indus on the East; on the West, Gedrosia, which the Indians call Nawatacoes, but the Persians, Circam.  
The Soil of the same temper and fertility with that of Cambaia, specially so called; and there we shall speak further of it. The common people whom they call Guzorates of the same disposition generally with the rest of the Indians: but the greatest part of the Country is possessed by the Resbutes or Ras●ooches, the ancient Inhabitants of this tract. Who when their Country was subdued by the Moors or Saracens, retired unto the Mountains and fatuesses of it, standing upon their guard, and were never yet subdued by the Great Monguls. Who though possessed of the Seashores, and most Towns of consequence, are fain to leave the inland parts and open Countries to the power of these Outlaws: who either prey upon the people, or force them to compound for their peace and quiet at uncertain prices. Their Arms most commonly a Sword, Buckler, and Lance; well-horsed, and resolute in any thing which they undertake: which made one of the Moguls say of them, that no men in the world knew to die, but they.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Diu, in a Peninsula looking towards Persia, but on the Eastside thereof, near the mouth of Indus. Possessed by the Portugal, and by them fortified with a strong and impregnable Citadel, built with the leave and liking of King Badurius, thereby to buy their aid against Merhamed the Mongul who had newly vanquished him. A matter of such consequence to the Crown of Portugal, that John Bornwell elius confined to India for some Crimes by him committed, undertook (in hope by the merit of that service to obtain his pardon) to carry the first news of it in a small vessel not above 18 foot long, and but 6 foot broad (the best which for the present could be provided): which with great courage he performed, and thorough that large, wide, and tempestuous Ocean, came in safety with his news to Lisbon, to the great joy of the King, but greater admiration of all sorts of people. Scarce settled in their new possession, when besieged by Solyman Bassa, Admiral to Solyman the Magnificent, with a Flcet of 80 ships and Galleys, Anno 1537. offended with the Portugals for aiding the King of Persia, more for diverting the Spice-trade unto Alexandria. In which he had so ill success, that having assaulted it in vain with his Land-forces, he was fain to raise his siege in such haste and tumult, that he left his great O dnance behind him. 2. Sauran, a Town and Castle of the Resbutes, spoken of before; and by them held against the power of the Great Mongul. 3. Boldra, a very fair and beautiful City, but of no great compass. 4. Ardovat, not far from the banks of the Indus, on the North of this Region towards Sinda. 5. Madibat, by some called Amadabat, affirmed to be both for wealth and greatness the chief of Guzarate, near as big as London; well walled, and situate on a plain near the River's side; seldom without Merchants of all Religions, Jews, Gentiles, Christians, Moors, some of all, and neither. 6. Saringt, 7. Periano, 8. Serkeffe; this last remarkable for the Sepulchers of the old Kings of Cambaia, fair, and well kept, and visited from all parts of the Kingdom.  
Nothing considerable in this part of the Country, as to point of story, but what is common to them with the rest of Cambaia; but that the Rasbutes, or Rasbooches still remain unconquered. Possessed not only of the hills and Mountains, but of some strong holds: and governed by the Heads of their Casts or Tribes: all which acknowledge the Morgul for their Superior in regard of his power; but none of them obey him as their Lord or Sovereign: conceiving it to be some abasement of their own authority, if they admit of him as an Umpire to compose their differences, which they sometimes do.  
3 CAMBAIA specially so called, hath on the North, Mandao; on the South, the main Ocean, and some part of Decan; on the East, Delly, from which parted by a ridge of Mountains; on the West, the Main Ocean, with some part of Guzarate. It standeth on the East-sides of the out-less of Indus, running along the Seashore for 500 miles, and took this name from Cambaia the chief City of it.  
The Country said to be the most fruitful of all India, abounding in Rice, Wheat, Sugar, Spices of all sorts, and choicest fruits: of silk and Cotton so great plenty that they fraught yearly forty of fifty ships with those commodities. In the mountains they find Diamonds, Chalcedonies, and a kind of Onyx-stone, which are called Cornelines, and corruptly Cornelians. Amongst the Rarities hereof, they reckon the Abades, a great Beast, twice as big as a Bull, having on their snouts a little horn, and the hide so hard as no man can pierce it with a thrust; which is the Rhinocerot of the Ancients.  
The people effeminate and unwarlike, and therefore not much used by the Moguls in a war of consequence; to supply which defect he furnisheth himself with Soldiers out of Persia, of which his standing bands consist; most of their Sultan's and Commander's of that Nation also. More given to merchandise than war, and therein thought to be as cunning (if not deceitful withal) as any people in the world: treacherous in their trust, proud in their carriage, bloody upon advantage, and much given to Venery; ignorant of letters, but well practised in Mechanical Arts. In matters of Religion, for the most part Gentiles; not knowing, or contemning the Law of Mahomet; but very punctual in their own heathenish superstitions. The Bannians in this Country, being natural Indians, nuzzled in Paganism, and so wedded to their old Idolatries, that no persuasions can prevail with them, make the greatest number: and seem to be all Pythagoreans in some opinions, for they eat not any thing that hath blood or life, but feed on Rice, Roots, Plantons and such natural fruits; paying a large Revenue yearly to the Great Mogul, that no Oxen may be killed amongst them. And because new opinions should not grow amongst them, they marry in their own Tribes only, and never out of their own Trades; secure thereby as they conceive from all innovations.  
Cities of most observation in it, 1. Cambaia, three miles from the Indus, and as many in compass, one of the nearest and best built in all the East. So populous withal, that it is thought to contain 130000 Families, and is therefore called the Cairo of the Indies. Of most esteem in all this Kingdom (though far less than Madabay) to which it doth impart its name. 2. Barocho, Southwards of Cambaia on the top of an hill, with a fair River underneath it: well-walled, and noted for the best Calicuts (a kind of linen Cloth so called from the City of Calicut, where it was first made) not to be matched in all the Indies. 3. Swalley, still more unto the South, and about a mile from the Seashore; but giving name unto a large and capacious Bay, where the ships ride which trade at Surat. 4. Surat, about ten miles from the Bay of Swaller, from whence the River navigable but by Boats and Shallops; fortified with a Castle of Stone well stored with Ordnance. The houses for the most part of Sun-dried bricks, very large and lasting: built with flat roofs, but battlemented on all sides for fear of falling; and beautified with goodly Gardens of Pomgranats, Melons, Figs, and Lemons, interlaced with Riverers and Springs. Made of late years a Factory for the English Merchants, who have here their Precedent, and a magnificent house for the reception and staple of their Commodities. 5. Neriand, a great Town, and as remarkable for the making of Indigo; which growing on a small shrub like our Goose-berry-bushes, bears a seed like a Cabbage seed, and being cut down, is laid in heaps for half a year. Grown rotten, it is brought into a vault to be trod by Oxen from the Stalks, than ground in Mills, and finally boiled in furnaces, refined and sorted, and so sold to the Merchant. 6. Daman, upon the Seaside over against ‛ Diu, and possessed as that is by the Portugals. A beautiful and pleasant Town, fortified with a strong Castle: at the North-end of it, of white chalky stone, well planted with Ordnance: opposite whereunto on the Southside of the Town, a goodly Church, edged atop with white. Which with the houses, for the most part of the same colour also, afford a pleasing prospect to the sailors by. 7. Cumpanel, situate on the top of an high mountain, and environed with a sevenfold wall, once the Seat Royal of the Kings of Camba●●. 8. Da●aitote, a place of such strength that the great M gulls could never get it by force. Rendered at the last upon composition, conditioned they should still be governed by a King of their own. 9 Netherby, a great market of brazen ware, beasts, and Armour. 10. Ba●nd●r●. 11. Tanai, etc.  
This Kingdom taking in Guzarate and Sinda, as parts hereof, is extremely populous, said to contain 60000 Towns and Villages very well inhabited: but the people not accustomed to, or unfit for wars. Anciently governed by Kings of their own, it was first subdued by the 〈◊〉 or Moors, Anno 1423. under the conduct of one Mahomet or Machamut: who having forced the Resbutes or naturals of the Country to betake themselves unto the Mountains, was made Kings hereof. To him succeeded his soane Mamudius, one of no great action. But what he wanted was supplied by his son Badurius, who having conquered the Kingdom of Citor, invaded that of Mandao also. His Army for that war consisted of 500000 foot, 150000 horse, 1000 great pieces of Ordinance, 500 wagons loaded with powder & shot, and as many wain-loads of gold and silver to pay his Army. But being discomfited in two great battles, by Merhamed the Mongul Tartar, whom Galg●e the Mandoan King had called in to his aid, he shaved his beard, and fled in a disguise to Diu then possessed by the Portugals, whom he licenced in that distress to build the Citadel: slain afterwards by a mean mariner, at his return from the Portugal Viceroy, whom he had visited on shipboard. And though Mamudius his Successor endeavoured to free his Kingdom from both pretenders: yet weakened with the loss of so great an Army he was not able to effect it. First driven from Diu, which he had besieged both by Sea and land, to his great dishonour; and after vanquished in battle by Adabar the son of Merhamed, not far from Serkeffe, the ancient buriall-place of the Kings of Cambaia, but then the Sepulchre of the Kingdom: which by that victory fell to the Great Monguls, who have since enjoyed it.   

8 DECAN.  
DECAN is bounded on the East, with Narsinga; on the West, with the Indian Ocean; on the North, with Delly and Cambaia; on the South, with Malavar, and Canara. The reason of the name we shall have anon.  
It lieth along the Sea-coast, for the space of 250 miles, betwixt Aliga, and Bate, two noted Rivers; extending East, as far as the Mountain Gates, and afterwards thrusting into the North betwixt Cambara and those mountains till it meet with Delly. The soil much of the same nature with the rest of India, but not so flourishing as Cambaia. The People for the most part Mahometaus, which Religion was first planted there by the conquests of Sa Nosaradine, 350 years ago; yet not without some entermixture of their ancient Gantilism.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Bider, the Seat Royal of Mamudza, once sole King of this Country, who to beautify and adorn this City, commanded every one of his Prefects, or subordinate Governors, being eighteen in number, to build here a Palace, and to reside therein certain months in the year; each one to leave a son there in perpetual hostage. Situtate in the most Northern parts of the Country near the borders of Delly; from the King whereof Mamudza had then newly revolted: and therefore would make sure of this place, as most in danger. 2 Visapore, bordering on Cambaia, the Princely Seat of Idalean, one of the Kings of Decan, after it was dismembered into several Kingdoms. 3. Danager, confiningon Canara, a beautiful and flourishing City, once the chief Seat of Nisalamoccus, or 〈◊〉, another of the Kings hereof after that division. 4. Decan, so called by the name of the Province, of which the chief City next to Bider the Imperial Seat. Six miles from which there is an hill encompassed with an high wall, and kept by a strong Garrison, because of the great store of Diamonds which are digged out of it. The town so wealthy, that the people generally are attired in silks, or the purest tiffany. 5. Sintacora, on the mouth of the River Aliga, where it falleth into the Sea. 6. Goa, a Sea-Town also, situate in a little but most pleasant Island called Ticuarinum, fifteen miles in compass; opposite to the mouth or outlet of the River Mandova. A noted Empory, and one of the chief keys which unlock the Indies; for number of Inhabitants, magnificent buildings, and pleasantness of situation, one of most note in all this Country. Possessed by the Portugals, who have here their Arsenal, and harbour for their Indian Fleet; by which they do command these Seas. So strongly fortified withal, that though beleaguered by Idalcan (of whom before) with 35000 horse, 6000 Elephants, and 250 piece of Ordnance, Anno 1573. yet he could not force it. Made in regard of the convenient situation and strength thereof, the ordinary Residence of the Portugal Viceroy, who hath here his Counsel, Chancellor, and other Officers, for the government of such parts of India as belong to that Crown: as also of the Archbishop or Primate of the Indian Churches planted by that nation, who is hence called the Archbishop of Goa. 7. Chaul, a Sea-Town in the hands of the Portugals also; and by them well fortified: Insomuch as Nisamalocco, assaulting it at the same time with a very great Army, was said to leave it as he found it. 8. Balaguate, in the uplands or Hill-Country, whence it had the name: Bal● in the Persian language signifying a top, or summit of a mountain, and Guate an Hill. 9 Brampore, once the chief seat of another Kingdom; now the chief City of those parts of Decan which are subject to the Great Mongul. Situate on a great River in the midst of a spacious Plain, beautiful, and of very great trading; in bigness equal unto Paris, yet yielded to Echebar the Mogul, without any resistance, Anno 1600. Miram then King thereof forsaking it, and betaking himself to 10. Syra, a strong hold both by art and nature. Situate on the top of an hill, in compass five leagues, and environed with a triple wall, furnished with victuals, and all other necessary provisions, sufficient to maintain 60000 men many years; 3000 great pieces of Ordnance planted on the walls. Besieged herein by Echebar with an Army of 2000●0 fight men, he held our against him: till over come by promises of fair correspondence, drawn out of his hold (some of his Counsellors being bribed to persuade him to it) he was detained by the Mogul; and the Commanders won by rewards and hopes yielded up the Fort, and therein all the Princes of the Royal family, accustomably kept therein when the Throne was full; which vacant, the next Heir was taken hence, to succeed unto it. Of the same nature as it seemeth with the hill Amara in Ethropia.  
The Country formerly inhabited by a people called Venaz 〈◊〉, by Religion Gentiles, and held by them till the year 1300, when overcome by 〈◊〉 a 〈◊〉 and King of Delly: who driving the Inhabitants into the Hill-Countries, possessed himself of a great part of it, compelling them to submit unto his Religion. The residue hereof subdued by Abd●●a, whom Sa Nosaradine left here to pursue the war, was by him governed with great justice for 20 years: when dying, he left his government to his son Mamudza, confirmed by the Successor of Sa Nosaradine in his Father's Regency on the payment of an annual tribute. Mamudza soon finding that the young King was of no great Spirit, not only refused to pay the tribute imposed upon him, but took unto himself the title of King of Decan: giving this nameunto the Country (before called Canara) in regard that he had filled it with a Mongrel body of Christians, Mahomet●ins, and Gentiles, acknowledging no common Parent, nor agreeing in language, customs, or Religion; the word 〈◊〉 signifying in that tongue, as much as an illegitimate brood, or a body of Bastards. Out of these he made choice of twelve (others say eighteen) whom he appointed Governors of so many Province: not daring to trust any of the old Nobility, or of the Natives of the Country: and hoping that these Slaves thus promoted by him, would be more subject to command. But here his silly hopes deceived him. For these Slaves either governed by their master's example, who had done the like unto the son and Heir of Sa Nosaradine, or presuming on their own strength, and some foreign aids, left to their master nothing but an empty title, each one becoming absolute in his several Province. Nor did his Successors for any long time enjoy that title; Daquem the last of them being taken at Bider his chief City: and thereupon the name of King usurped by every one of those petit Tyrants. Reduced at last into fewer hands, such of them as were left became considerable Princes; as appear by the great Army raised by Id tlean for the siege of Goa. But in the end, distressed on the one side by the Portugals, who embarred their trade, and invaded on the other side by the Great Mogul with most puissant Armies; Melie entitled King of Decan, and Miram King of Br●mpore, were in fine subdued by Echebar, about the year 1600. Against whom and his Successors, though the Venazarari still hold out, as the Resbutes or 〈◊〉 do in the Realm of Cambaia; and that the King of Amdanager, and perhaps some other petit Princes, are not yet brought under: yet we may look on the Mongul as the Lord of this Country; the residue of these Roytele●●, and petit Princes, (if any of them be remaining) being Homagers or Vassals to him. Against whose further Progress to the Cape of Comari, which Echebar so greedily aimed at, the puissant Kings of 〈◊〉, and those of Malabar, have opposed their power: whose Kingdoms and estates we must next survey, before we take a view of those other provinces, which are now under the command of that mighty Monarch.   

9 CANARA.  
CANARA is bounded on the North, with Decan (where of anciently it was a part) on the South, with Malabar; on the East, with Narsinga, from which separated by the Mountain Gates; on the West, with the Ocean. The reason of the name I find not; nor much worth the searching.  
The Country hath a fair Sea-Coast, with many capacious Harbours to it, which cannot but add much to the wealth thereof; as liberally furnished in the inland parts, with Rice, Figs, and Sugars; but destitute of Wheat, Pulse, and Barley. Not much the poorer for that want, the people either not knowing or not regarding the use of bread; but living on such fruits as the earth produceth of itself without the charge or care of the husbandman. In other things, but little differing, if at all, from the rest of the 〈◊〉: their Religion for the most part Paganish; but intermixed with Mahometans.  
Principal Towns and Cities of it, 1. Me●inde, a commodious Haven. 2. Onor, a Port-Town of good note, sometimes held by the Portugals. 3. Buicalia, situate in the richest part of all this Country; never possessed by the Portugals, but under contribution to them. 4. Mangalor, a town of great wealth and trade; fortified with a strong Castle, once destroyed by the Portugueze, but recovered and repaired by the King of Narsinga, who is Lord of this Country. 5. Mayendre, more within the land. And so is also 6. Lispar, famous for her Quarries of Adamant. 7. Solsette, in a Peninsula of 20 miles' compass containing 36. Villages, and 80000 Inhabitants: the Town about 9 miles from Goa, and subject with the whole Peninsula to the Portugals.  
This Country is now subject to the Kings of Narsinga; but formerly under the command of its own Princes: the name of Canara, compreheading in those times all that Country also, which is now called Decan. Conquered by Sa Nosaradine and Abdessa, and by Mamudza cantoned into many Praefectures, this part reverting to its old name, fell to the Narsingan, who taking his advantages, in the minority of one of their Princes, became Master of it. And when the Idalcan, (for I take that not so much for the name of a man, as a Title of dignity) quarrelled his possession of it, as appertaining properly to the Kingdoms of Decan, Chrismarao then King of Narsinga, brought a powerful Advocate to defend his right, that is to say, an Army of 606000 Foot, 29650 Horse, and 537 Elephants: every Elephant having a Tower on his back with four men in it, with which strong Argument the Idalean being confuted in the Schools of war, with much difficulty saved himself, though he lost his cause: the Narsingan ever since continuing quiet in the possession of this Country; except only some of the Sea-Towns in the power of the Portugals. Who in the year 1567. destroyed in those few places by them possessed no fewer than 200 of their Idol-Temples, with many of their Pagodes, or Idols in them; converting the Rents and Lands which belonged unto them, with the Revenues raised from the several Ports which they hold herein, to the maintenance of a College of Jesuits in Salsette, and other Religious houses founded by them, in their other Cities.   

10. MALABAR.  
MALABAR is bounded on the North, with Canara, from which parted by the River Gangeraco; on the East, with the great Mountain Gates, by which divided from the Realm of Narsinga; on the West and South, with the main Ocean. On the Coast whereof it doth extend for the space of 300 miles, that is to say, from the River Gangeraco, to the Cape Comori, which I conceive to be the Commaria Extrema of Ptolemy, though others take it for the Promontory by him called Cory. But the breadth hereof is nothing answerable to the length, not above 50. miles where broadest, and ending towards the Cape in a point or Conus,  
The Country more populous, for the bigness, than any in India; enjoying a very temperate Air, and a fruitful Soil, well watered, and indented with many Creeks: unfit for Corn, but plentiful in Rice, and all manner of Spices, as Ginger, Cinnamon, Cassia, Pepper, and most excellent fruits. Amongst their Trees, there is one whose name my Author speaks not, which bears Dates like unto the Palm; out of which they have not only wood for Fewell, but they draw from it, wine, sugar, oil, fine cloth and cordage: another tree, which beareth Cotton, and Cypress, or Cobweb-lawn, of the leaves whereof they make a fine stuff like to Satin or Taffeta. They have also great store of Apes, and Monkeys, Parats, Paraqueetoes, and other Creatures not known in these parts but from thence: not to say any thing of their Lions, Elephants, Bears, Bugles, common to them with others of their Indian neighbours. The flowers there always in their Verdure, and the Trees perpetually green, by reason that the Air is so sweet and temperate.  
The people are of coalblack colour (differing therein from the rest of the Indians, swarth and complexioned like the Olive) well limbed, and wearing their hair long and curled: about their heads an handkerchief wrought with gold and silver, and about their middle a cloth, which hangeth down to conceal their nakedness. Of manners treacherous and bloody, more properly to be termed desperate than stout and valiant; and for more surety in their wars, they use poisoned Arrows, as they do also in their thieving both by Sea and Land, to which more addicted. In Religion for the most part Gentiles, and more besotted generally on their Idolatries, than the rest of these Nations. The Pagode, or Idol which they worship, seated upon a brazen throne, and crowned with a rich Diadem. From his head issue out four horns, from his mouth four Tusks; his eyes fiery like a Glow-worm, his nose flat and ugly, his visage terrible, his hands like claws, his legs and thighs like those of a Lion. In a word, we cannot paint the Devil in a more ugly figure, than they do their God. Unto this Pagode, or his Priest, they offer the virginity of all their daughters: the Pagode having in the place of his privy parts a Bodkin of gold and silver, upon which the Bride (married most commonly at ten or twelve years of Age) is forcibly set; the sharpness of it being such, that it forceth out the blood in great abundance: and if she prove with child that year, it is said to be of his begetting, and the more esteemed. Others with more humanity, instead of torturing their daughters to this wretched Idol (parallel almost to the offering of their sons to Moloch amongst the Syrians) present them to the Bramini, or Idol-Priest, to be deflowered the first night of the wedding: and without one of these two handsels, no man is suffered to enjoy the use of his wife, not their Kings themselves. More privileged yet than many women neighbouring on them, in that they are not compelled to burn themselves with their husband's bodies: but may have many Husbands either successively or at once, as they list themselves: and if at once, she sends her children to that husband (as we know who did) who she thinks to have the best right to them.  
The Country very well watered, as we said before, and parted by large Rivers into many Provinces; as if intended naturally to be cantonned into many Kingdoms. Divided at present, and long since, into those of 1. Cononor. 2. Calcutta. 3. Granganor, 4. Chochin. 5. Cai-Colam. 6. Coulan, and 7. Travancor.  
1. CONONOR, joineth to Canara, extending Southward on the shore about 20 miles, where is bordereth on the Kingdom of Calicut. The chief Cities of which, 1. Cononor, giving name to the whole Kingdom, well built, and beautified with a very fair Haven, not more safe than spacious, capacious of the greatest vessels, and for that cause much frequented by foreign Merchants; but specially by the Portugals, who for the assuring of their trade have here a Citadel, erected and well garrisoned with the King's consent. 2. Cota, not far from Cangeraco, the border betwixt this and Canara. 3. Peripatan, on the confines of Calicute. 4. Marabia. 5. Tramopatan. 6. Main, intermediate Towns, but not much observable.  
2. CALICUTE, South from Cononor, extending on the Seashore 25 Leagues, and situate in the most pleasant and fruitful part of all Malabar. Chief Towns whereof, 1. Pandaram, on the skirts of Cononor. 2. Tanor, a retiring place of the Kings. 3. Patangale. 4 Chatua, on the borders of Cranganor. 5. Chale, a strong piece, once in the hands of the Portugueze, but in the year 1601 recovered by the King of Calicute, who had besieged it with an Army of 90000 men. 6. Capacote, the Haven to Calicute. 7. Calicute, the chief City of the Kingdom, to which it gives name, in length upon the Sea three miles, and a mile in breadth; containing about 6000 houses, but standing some of them far asunder, mean and low-built, few of them exceeding the height of a man on horseback; the soil being so hollow and full of water, that it is not capable of the foundation of an heavier building; for that cause unwalled. Insomuch that Merchant's houses are here valued but at 20. Crowns, those of the common sort at no more than ten. Which notwithstanding, of great trading, and much frequented by Arabians, Persians, Syrians, Indians, yea the very Tartars, these last from the furthest parts of Catha● 6000 miles distant. The common Staple in those times of all Indian Merchandise, till distracted into several Ports by the power of the Portuga●s: who being more industrious, and better Architects, have forced a foundation on the shore for a very strong Castle, by which they do command the Haven, and receive custom of all Merchandise going in and out. The inconvenience whereof being found by the King of Calicute, he besieged it with 100000 men: and though the Portugals held it out a whole winter together, yet in the end they were fain to quit it, but first den olished it to the ground, that it might not be made useful to those of Calicute. A City of exceeding wealth, and of no less wantonness; the men here using to change wives with one another, to confirm their Amity's: & the women spending their whole time in adorning themselves with Rings and Jewels, about their ears, necks, legs, arms, and upon their breasts; though going naked for the most part, one would think that a little dressing might suffice them. If covered, it is only with a smock of Calicut, a kind of linen cloth here made, and from hence so called: and that not used but by those of the better sort.  
3. CRANGANOR, lieth on the South of Calicute, a small Kingdom, and affording little worth the speaking of: but that a great part of the Inhabitants of it are of those old Christians, whom they call Christians of Saint Thomas. Cranganor, the chief City, which gives name to the whole, assumed to be so full of them, that they amount unto the number of 70000; vexed and exposed to public scorn both by the Idolaters and Mahometans, amongst whom they live. The City rich, commodiously built for trade, at the mouth of a River, which watering with his crooked streams the most part of the Country, makes it fat and flourishing.  
4. COCHIN, more South than Cranganor, extended on the shore for the space of 40. Leagues: and therein many Christians of the first plantation, besides some converts made of later times by the Jesu●tes. Towns of most note herein. 1. Augamale, the Arch-Bishops Sceva of those ancient Christians, fifteen miles from Cochin. 2. Cochin, a Bishops See, but of later erection, and the chief City of this Kingdom, which takes name from hence. Situate on the mouth or outlet of the River Mangat, by which almost encompassed like a Demy-Iland; Of great trade in regard of its Haven, very safe and spacious; as also by the friendship of the Portugal Nation. By whose power and favour they have not only freed themselves from the King of Calicute, to whom before they did acknowledge some subjection; but drawn from thence a great part of the traffic also: this King permitting them to erect a Castle on the Haven, to secure their trade; which the other on good reasons of State forced them to destroy. The King hereof in some respect superior unto him of Calicute, when a Vassal to him: this King being the Pipe or Chief Bishop, as it were, of all the Bramines: for which cause reverenced by all the Kings of Malabar, (as the Pope by many Princes of these Western parts) who look upon him as the head of their superstit●or, no pay him many Annual duties.  
5. CAI-COLAM, is on the South of Cochin, with which agreeing both in the temper of the Air, and the fertility of the Earth: which notwithstanding, the King hereof is not so rich as his other neighbours. Here live also marry of the old Christians, taking name from Saint Thomas; but those so destitute of Priests and Ministers to instruct them in the Principles of Christianity, that once in three years there came some formerly from the Patriarch of Muzall, in Assyria, to baptise their children. Better I hope provided for in these later days: since their embosoming and reconcilement to the Church of Rome. Their chief Town of the same name with the Country, hath a very fair Haven, in the fashion of a Semicircle; well traded till destroyed by the Portugals; but since that re-edified. Of less note there are many both Towns and Villages, but such as do deserve here no particular mention.  
6. COULAN, upon the South of Cai-Colam, extended 20. Leagues more Southwards upon the Shores, is said to be destitute of corn, but plentiful of pepper, and most sorts of spices. So stored with Horses, and sit Riders to serve upon them, that the King hereof keeps 20000 Horse in continual readiness either for invasion or Defence. This Kingdom, as the rest before, taketh name from the chief City of it, which is called Coulan, 24. miles from Cochin, and once a member of this Kingdom; of great resort by foreign Merchants, by reason of the fair and commodious Haven. In former times the ordinary Seat of the Cobritin, or chief Priest of the Bramines, till removed to Cochin: and held to be the Metropolis or mother City of all Malabar; the rest being thought to be but Colontes of this. Both in the City and the Country there are many Christians, as well of the original foundation of Christianity, as of the late improvements which are made by the Jesuits.  
7. TRAVANCOR, called also TRANCANOR, reacheth from the Kingdom of Coulan, to the Cape of Comarim, and turning towards the East, bendeth again unto the North, as far as Cael, in the Kingdom of Bisnagar or Narsinga. By which account it hath the benefit of the Sea on all sides except towards the North: reaching in breadth from the West Seas unto the East about 90 miles. The Country, as the rest before, inhabited by many with the name of Christians, if they may be called so which want Sacraments: the condition of these Thomaean Christians in former times being so unhappy, that in 50 years before the coming of the Jesuits, (if the Jesuits may be believed from whom we have it) they had seen no Priest, nor other Minister of the Gospel. Chief Towns hereof, (for of those many others of less note I shall make no mention) are 1. Travancor, the chief City, which gives name to the Province, but neither well-built, nor of very much trading. 2. Quilacare, the head City of a peculiar Signory, but held of the Kings of Trancanor, as their next and immediate Lords, though all those Kings also Feudataries of the Crown of Narsinga. And were that the worst Tenure by which they hold, it might be tolerable; but there is a matter of worse consequence which attendeth these besotted Princes. The Kingdom here is but a pomp of twelve years' continuance, and then endeth in a sad Catastrophe. For at the end of those twelve years, the King repairs to Quilacare, prayeth before the Id●l above mentioned, then mounteth on a Scaffold covered with s●lk or Tapestry, and in the sight of all his People, gathered together to behold this strange solemnity, cutteth off his nose, ears, lips and other parts, which he casts towards the Idol, and in conclusion cuts his own Throat for his final Sacrifice: his designed Successor being present at this bloody Sacrifice, who at the twelve years' end is to do the like. Never was Sceptre bought at so dear a rate: For though all Crowns be lined with thorns, yet here the pomps of sovereignty be less lasting than in other places; the entrance full of fears, and the end, of horrors.  
These Kingdoms heretofore but one, till the year 900 or thereabouts, were branched and cantoned into these seven by Sarama pereimal, the sole Monarch. He by the solicitation of some Arabians, trading to his Ports, became Mahometan; and therein so devout, that he resolved upon a Pilgrimage to Meccha, there to end his days. At his departure, he divided his estates into these seven parts, distributing them amongst the nearest of his kindred: assigning unto him of Coulan the pre-eminence in sacred matters, and the Imperial dignity unto him of Cale●ute, with the title of Samorin, that is to say, Chief Emperor, or as some write, a God on earth. He only privileged with the right and power of coinage; the rest to be subordinate, if not subject to him. From Percimals setting forwards to the City of Meccha, the Malabars' account their reckonings, and begin their years; as the Christians from the birth of their Lord and Saviour. And for a time his hests were punctually observed. But the Kingdom of Calicute being weakened by the power of the Portugals, the other Kings began to free themselves from that subjection, and in the end to cast off all Relation to him, and to his Prerogatives. Yet still he is esteemed of more power and majesty, than any of the rest of the Kings of Malabar; and looked with more reverence than any of them. The certainty of his Revenues I have no where met with, but conjecture them to be very great; first in regard of that infinite trading which is managed from most parts of the World in his Port of Calicute; the customs and imposts upon which must needs be of exceeding value; and secondly in reference to the wealth of private Merchants, many of which are said to equal some Kings in afric, and Dukes in Europe not a few.  
Quid Domini facient? audent cum talia Fures.  
And if the man such riches have,  
Then what must he that keeps the Knave?  
What Forces he is able to raise may be fully seen by that which hath been said before; wherein we find him with an Army of 90000 men besieging and taking in the Fort of Chalen; with another of 100000. beleagursing the Castle which the Portugals had built near his City of Calicute. And when the said Portugals stirred up the King of Cochin to make head against him, he fell upon them suddenly both by Sea and Land, with 60000 Land-souldiers, and 200 good Vessels of war for the service at Sea. Sufficient force to reduce the rest of these petit Kings to their old acknowledgements, but that some of them to avoid the danger, have put themselves under the Vassalage, or protection at the least, of the Great Mongul: others by suffering the Portugals to build forts in their Kingdoms, have engaged them in defence of their estate against this pretender. His forces consist most of Foot, Horse being unserviceable in these Countries, by reason of those many Rivers which interlace it. And these Foot are compounded most of Gentry which they there call Nairos, trained to their weapons when they are but seven years of Age; every one to that weapon which he most delighteth in; which makes them very expert and nimble at them: much privileged for that cause by the Laws of the Country; and so esteemed of by the King, that out of them his Sisters choose what men they please to be their Husbands; some of them by that means being made the Fathers of the King succeeding.  
Nothing else memorable touching the affairs of Calicute, but the way of succession to the Kingdom: the Crown descending upon none of the King's Children, but on the son of his Eldest Sister, or nearest kinswoman. For being that one of the Bramines hath always the maidenhead of his Queens, and that some of these Stallions are continually allowed to keep them company; it is presumed, or very probably supposed, that the Queen's Children are the Bramines, and not the Kings.   

8. NARSINGA.  
NARSINGA is bounded on the South, with Travancor; on the West, with the Mountain Gates; on the North, with Oristan or Orixa; on the East, with the Golf of Bengala. So called from 〈◊〉 the chief City of it, and the Royal residence of the King.  
The 〈◊〉 is said to be in length 600 miles, or as some say of as much extent as can be traveled in six Months: plentiful in the same commodities which the rest of India do hafford, except Pepper and some other spices which are proper to Malabar. Not so well furnished with Rivers, as some other places: which want is liberally supplied by water falling from the Mountains, and received into trenches, meers, and 〈◊〉, which do wonderfully cool, moisten, and enrich the land, causing the Corn and cattle to prosper above all imagination. Most destitute in this kind is the Province of Choromandel, in which if any year passeth without rain, they fall into such extremities, that they are fain to ●ell their children.  
The People, in Religion 〈◊〉, so worshipping one God, as the Lord of all, which is taught them by the light of nature, that they join the Devil or their Pagodes in Commission with him, where to induced by the persuasion of their beastly Bramines, who thereout suck no small advantage. Some Christians there are intermixed, of the old plantation, especially in Ma●apur, and the Region of Choromandel: but not to well instructed in the Principles of their own belief, as to be able to convince or convert the Gentiles, nor to dissuade them from the use of some Heathenigh customs, though barbarous, inhuman, and against all reason; not used in any place but amongst the Indians. Amongst which I reckon for most savage, the forcing of poor women to burn themselves with their husband's bodies, the women's kindred not the husbands thrusting them on these hard conditions, who reckon it a disgrace to their family, if she should refuse. And because they will be sure not to have that infamy stick upon them, they have ordered that the woman who shall so refuse, must shave her head, and break her Jewels, and not be suffered to eat, drink, or sleep, or company with any body till her death. A life more miserable than the Flames which they seek to shun. This makes them leap into the fire with joy and greediness, and to contend which shall be foremost: she being thought to have been most loving during his life, which is now most willing to accompany him in his death, and offer herself to his Mane, at the funeral pile: whereunto thus alludeth the Poet.  
Et 〈…〉, quae viva sequatur  
〈◊〉 r●est non licuisse mori.  
〈…〉 & praebent pectora sammae:  
〈…〉  
A shame 'tis not to die: they therefore strive,  
Who may be famed to follow him alive.  
The Victor burns, yields to the flame her breast;  
And her burnt face doth on her husband rest.  
Chief Cities of this Country, 1. 〈◊〉, on the borders of Travancer, belonging anciently to the Kings of 〈◊〉, now to those of 〈◊〉, the people whereabout called Paraut, are a kind of Christians, who live for the most part by fishing for Pearl, which they fell to the Portugals, and Bengalan Merchants. 2. 〈◊〉, the chief City of the Province called Musulipatan, the Lord whereof is a Moor, of the 〈◊〉 sect; but a Vassal to the Kings of Narsinga. 3. Chamdagrin, one of the Seat-Royals of the King. 4. Prepett, three miles from Chamdag●●n, memorable for an yearly feast here celebrated in honour of 〈◊〉 (once s●le King of Malavar) reckoned for a Saint at least in these parts of India: the offerings at which accustomably amount unto 200000 Crowns. 5. Chadambaram, the Mo●he-City of these 〈◊〉 Solemnities, which are done to Pereimal, who hath here a Temple endowed with 30000 Ducats of annual reat, all consumed by the Brahmins belonging to it, who pretend to have been born out of P●re●●alls head. 6. Madura, honoured with the residence of the Cho●an●t●● or the Chief Prelsc of the Brahmins of this Kingdom; so numerous, that in this Town, and the territories of it only, are thought to be no fewer than an hundred thousand. The seat also of one of three 〈◊〉, or tributary Kings of the Crown of Narsinga: the other two residing at 7. 〈◊〉, and S. 〈◊〉, the Chief Towns of their Principalities, but not else observable. 9 Mahapur, called also St. Thomas, from an opinion that the body of that Apostle was here interred: martyred here by the 〈…〉, whose posterity, in other things like unto other men, are said to have one legand foot as big as an Elephants: a punishment inflicted on the whole Generation for the sin of their Ancestors: How true this is I cannot say, but sure I am that Dorotheus faith, that he resteth at Calaem●na, where he was slain with a dart. However, the Portugali, to make some use of the old tradition, removed some bones from this place which were said to be his, and enshrined them in Goa, their own City; much visited by profitable 〈◊〉, to their great enriching. The City once so large and populous, that it contained 330 Temples for the use of divers Nations which resorted thither. In these later days desolate and forlorn, inhabited only by some old Christians, till the Portugueze began again to people it with new Colonies. 10. Choromandel, giving name to a large Sea-Coast, lying on the West side of the Golf of Bengala. 11. Casta, a Town of Choromandel, in which the woman is not burned with her Husband, as in other places of this Country; but buried quick in the same grave with him. 12. Negapatan, in the same Region, inhabited for the most part by Saint Thomas Christians. 13. Tarnassari, once the head City of a Kingdom to called, the King whereof was able to bring into the field, 100000 horse and foot, and 100 armed Elephants, but now subject to the King of Narsinga. The people black, but so out of love with their own colour, that they willingly prostitute their wives or daughters, to any people of a whiter and more clear complexion. 14. Bisnagar, once the chief City of this kingdom, whence the King is sometimes called the King of Bisnagar. In those times 24 miles in compass, with nine Gates in it, (amongst others) continually guarded with Soldiers; and a magnificent Palace not elsewhere equalled. In the year 1565. sacked by four of the Mahometan Kings of Decan, who with their joint forces had invaded this kingdom, it became desolate and forsaken; and the Court removed to 15. Penegardc, eight day's journey within the Land (Bisnagar being seated on the borders of Decan) But long it had not stayed there when removed to 16. Narsinga, where it hath ever since been fixed, which is now the chief City of this Kingdom, unto which it gives name, though the King many times call himself by the name of that City where he resideth for the present.  
Of the Antiquity of this kingdom I have little to say; these Eastern parts not being known at all till these later times, nor well known in these. About the year 1550 their King then reigning was imprisoned by three of his Captains or Commanders; who showed him only once a year to his Subjects, parting the power and government amongst themselves. He being dead, and his son kept in the like restraint, Romaragio the first Captain ascended the Throne, Timaragio managed the Estate, and Bengahe commanded the Army. But these Usurpers being overthrown by the kings of Decan, in the year 1565. Timaragio the Survivor took the charge of all; whose son, to make himself sure of the kingdom, murdered his imprisoned Sovereign (the life and liberty of kings being much of a date) whence followed many broils and troubles touching the Succession, till settled in the person of Chrismarao, the undoubted Heir: who did not only restore peace and quiet to Narsinga itself, but recovered Canara out of the hands of the Idalcan, who had before endangered his estate therein. Of the great Army which he led against this Idalcan, we have spoke already: adding here only, that before he went upon this enterprise (called the journey of Rachiol) he sacrificed in nine days 2036 Beasts to the Country Idols, the flesh whereof he caused to be distributed amongst the poor; Routed at first, and being persuaded by some about him to go out of the field, he is said to have made this Noble Answer, that he had rather the Idalcan should boast that he had slain him, than vanquished him. And thereupon leaping into the thickest of his enemies, and well followed by the valiantest of his Friends, he obtained the victory. But this vast Army of 606000 foot, 30000 Horse, 537 Elephants, with necessaries answerable to such infinite multitudes, speaks only what he can do on extreme necessity, or when he hath some long time of preparation, as he had in that Action. The power of Kings is better measured by their standing forces, than by premeditated Levies. And herein this Prince comes not much short of his greatest neighbours: his standing bands consisting of 40000 Nairos, or Gentlemen of his own Kingdom, which serve on foot; 20000 Horse, who are either Persians or Arabians, and 200 Elephants; well paid, and kept in continual readiness: his foot defrayed out of his Revenues, his Horse maintained like the Turks Timariot out of cerrain lands distributed amongst his Captains (some of which are said to have a million of Crowns per Annum) to furnish him with these stable bands of Horses and Elephants.  
As for his Revenue it is reckoned at 12 millions yearly, out of which he is thought to lay up three, defraying with the rest the expense of his household, and the entertainment of his Foot. This sum amassed together out of the lands, mines, and forests of the Country, which are wholly his; and the waters of of some Rivers, (sold by him to his subjects) which he monopolizeth; the common people having nothing but their Arms and Labour. Of which, the mines, forests, and one third of the lands, he retaineth to himself; the other two being divided amongst his Captains. So that it is no marvel if so rich a Country yield him such an income, considering it is all his own. I do rather wonder (of the two) it should yield no more.   

9 ORISTAN.  
ORISTAN or ORIXA, is bounded on the South, with Narsinga; on the West, with Delly, and Mandao; on the North, with the Kingdoms of Botanter; on the East, with the Golf of Bengala, and part of Patanaw or Patan●; so called from Orissa, the chief City of it.  
The Country hath plenty of Rice, cloth of Cotton, and a fine stuff like silk, made of grass, and there called Yerva; with which, together with Long Pepper, Ginger, Mirabolins, and other commodities here growing, they use to load 25 or 30 Ships from the Haven of Orissa only. The people so well governed, or so hating theft, that in the time of their own kings, before they came under the Moguls, a man might have traveled with Gold in his hand without any danger. In other points of the same temper and religion with the rest of the Indians subject to that Prince.  
It is generally well watered, and interlaced with many Rivers, which do much moisten and refresh it, but none so beneficial to the Kings hereof, as the River Guangen (of old called Chaberis) the waters whereof esteemed sacred by the Kings of Calicure and Narsinga, and much used by them in their sacrifices and superstitious purgations, are wholly engrossed by this King, who selleth them to those Princes at excessive rates. Besides which Rivers it is watered with a fair Sea-coast, of 350 miles in length; that is to say, from Cape Guadarino in the South, which divides it from the Realm of Narsinga; to Cape Leogorae in the East, which parts it from Bengala. But for all that not very much traded, because not so well provided of commodious Havens, as many other Indian Provinces of a far less Territory.  
Towns of most note herein, 1. Orissa, on the Seaside, or not far from it, the best traded Port of all this Kingdom; to which the name thereof is to be ascribed, as the Head-City of the Country. 2. Cate●ha, six day's journey within the land, the ordinary residence of their Kings, before it was subdued by the Great Monguls. 3. Angeli, a well-frequented Port, at the bottom of the Golf of Bergala, from whence many ships are yearly laden with Indian wares. 4. Bacolli, or Bacola, more within the land, and once the head City of a Kingdom, but a very poor one. 5. Simergan, where they held it an impiety to eat flesh, or kill any beast. 6. Senerpate, of which little memorable. Nor do I find any thing which deserves much memory in the affairs of this Kingdom; but that the Kings hereof were Gentiles, subdued not many years since by the K. of Patanaw: and both, grown weaker by that war, by Echebar, the Great Mongul.   

10. BOTANTER.  
BOTANTER (under which name I comprehend all those petit Kingdoms which are crowded together in the North and North-East of this part of 〈◊〉) hath on the South, Oristan and 〈◊〉; on the West, the River Guenga or Chaberis, by which parted from the Realms of Sa●g●; on the North, the Zagathaian Tartars, divided from it by some branches of Mount Taurus; on the East, the famous River Ganges. So called from Bottia, the principal City of Botanter, which is the chief of these small Kingdoms.  
The Country great, of three month's journey in extent, full of high Mountains, one of which may be seen five day's journey off, in which are said to dwell a people with ears of a span long or more, whom otherwise those of the Valleys count as Apes. In those parts which are next Sanga, they are white, and 〈◊〉 i in others, more inclined to the Olive Colour. Their garments they wear close to their bodies, so straight that one cannot see a pleit or wrinkle; and those they never put off by night nor day, whilst they are able to hang on: nor do they wash at any time, for fear of defiling so pure a Creature as the water. Content with one wife (deservedly to be held a miracle in these Eastern parts) and yet cohabit not with her after two or three Children. When any of them die, the Soothsayer is to tell them what to do with his body: according to whose direction (first consulting his Books) they burn, bury, or eat it. Few Tow●s of note there are amongst them. The principal, 1. Bottia, the Metropolis of it. 2. Calamur, and 3. N●gar●●t, their Staples for the sale of their cloth, (most of the people being Weavers) bought of them by the Chinors, and 〈◊〉 Merchants, who resort frequently to those markets. This a distinct Kingdom of itself, the Kings whereof are called Dermair, but 〈◊〉 to the great Mongul. And so 〈◊〉  
2. 〈◊〉, another Kingdom of this Tract, frontier upon Cauch●-China, beyond 〈◊〉; so called from 〈◊〉, the chief Town of it. The Country rich, by reason that it may be drowned, and dried up again, when the people will; full of good pastures by that means, and those well stored with Sheep, Goats, Swine, Deer, and other cattle, though the people neither kill nor eat them. But on the contrary build Hospitals for them, in which when lame and old they are kept till they die. Yet many times they eat their money, and I cannot blame them; their small money being▪ Almonds.  
3. GOURENS, a kind of Desert or unpeopled Country, joineth close to this. In which are few Villages, grass longer than a man, and therein many Buffs, Tigers, and other wild bast, none wilder than the Thiefs who frequent the wildernesses.  
In this Tract also are the Kingdoms of RAME, and RECON, joining upon Zag●th●●, or endining towards it; possessed by the Mongul Tartars from the time of Tamerlane, if not before: but Fendataries to the Kings of Ch●bul or Arachosie, who commanded in the North-East of Pers●●, and these North parts of India: and from those places drew his Army or the greatest part of it, when called unto the aid of G●lgee, the King of M●nd●o. Here is also the Kingdom of TIPPURA, naturally fenced with hills and mountains; and by that means hitherto defended against the Mongul Tartar●, their bad neighbours; with whom they have continual wars. But of these Northern Kingdoms lying towards Tartary, there is but little to besaid, and that little of no certain knowledge: those parts being hitherto so untravelled, that they may pass in the Account of a Terra Inc●gnita.   

11. PATANAW.  
PATANE or PATANAW, is bounded on the North, with the Realms of 〈◊〉 on the East, with Ganges; on the West, with Oristan; and on the South, with the Kingdom and Gulf of Bengala. So called from Pata●e the chief City of it. There is another Kingdom of th●● name in the further India: but whether it were so called because a Colony of this; or from some resemblances in the nature of the several Countries, or from the signification of the word in the Indian language; I am not able to determine. Certain I am, that though they have the same name, yet they are under several Governments, and situate in far distant places: no other wise agreeing than in some resemblances, as Holland in the Low-Countries doth with Holland in Lincol●shire.  
The Country yieldeth veins of Gold which they dig out of the pits, and wash away the earth from it in great Bolls. The people tall, and of slender making, many of them old: great Praters, and as great dissemblers. The women so bedecked with silver and copper, especially about the feet, that they are not able to endure a shoe. Both Sexes use much washing in the open Rivers, and that too intermixed together in their natural nakedness; especially such as live near the banks of the River Jemenae (esteemed more holy than the rest) which from Agra passing thorough this Country, falleth into Ganges.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1. Patane, a large town and a long one, built with very broad streets; but the houses very mean and poor, made at the best of earth and hurdles, and thatched over head. The Metropolis of this Kingdom, because the ancientest, and that which gives the name unto it. 2. Bannaras', a great Town on Ganges, to which the Gentiles from remote Countries use to come in pilgrimage, to bathe themselves in the holy waters of that River. The Country betwixt this and Patanaw, very fair and flourishing, and beautified upon the Road with handsome Villages. 3. Siripur, the chief Seat of one of the old Princes of this Country; not yet subdued by the Great Mongu's. 4. Ciandecan, on the bottom of the Gulf of Bengala; the Seat of another of their Kings. One of which memorable for a trick put upon the Jesu●es when blamed by them for the worship of so many Pagodes, as contrary both to the law of God and nature. For causing them to rehearse the Decalogue, he told them that he did offead no more against those commandments in worshipping so many Pagodes, than they themselves in worshipping so many Saints. 5. 〈◊〉, a fair City (for a City of Moors) once part of Patanaw, since ascribed to Bengala.  
The people of this Country properly called Patanea●●, but corruptly Parthians, w●re once of great command and power in these parts of India. Lords for a time, of a great part of the Kingdom of Bengala, into which driven by Baburxa, the Mongul Tartar, the Father of Emanpaxda, and Grandfather of E●hebar. Their last King being slain in that war, twelve of ●heir chief Princes joined in an Aristocraty, and warring upon Emanpaxda had the better of him. After this, their Successors attempted Oristan, and added that also to their Estate. But they could not long make good their fortunes; subdued by Ethebar the Mongul, and made subject to him. Three of them, viz. the Prince of Siripur, the King of 〈◊〉, and he whom they call Mausadalion, retain, as yet (for aught I can learn unto the contrary) as well their ancient Paganism, as their natural liberty. The other nine, together with Mahometanism, have vassail●d themselves to the great Mongul, now the Lord Paramount of the Country.   

12. BENGALA.  
BENGALA is bounded on the North, with Patanaw; on the East, with the Kingdoms of Pegu; on the South and West, with the Gulf of Bengala; So called from Bengala the chief City of it.  
It containeth in length on the Gulf and River 360 miles, and as much in breadth into the Land A Country stored with all things necessary to the life of man, great plenty of Wheat, Rice, Sugar, Ginger, and Long-Pepper. Such abundance of Silk, & Cotton, and of Flesh and Fish, that it is impossible that any Country should exceed it in those commodities. And which crowns all, blest with so temperate and sweet an air, that it draws thither people of all sorts to inhabit it. Here is also, amongst other rarities, a Tree called Moses, which beareth so delicate a fruit, that the Jews and Mahometans who live here, affirm it to be the fruit which made Adam to sin.  
The natural Inhabitants for the most part, are of white complexion, like the Europaeans, subtle of wit, and of a courteous disposition, well skilled in dealing in the world, much given to traffic, and intelligent in the way of Merchandise, if not somewhat deceitful. No● ignorant of other Arts, but with some imattering in Philosophy, Physic, and Astrology. Stately and delicate both in their Diet and Apparel: not naked as in others of these Indian Provinces, but clothed in a shirt or smock reaching to their feet, with some upper Garment over that. The women of an ill name for their unchastity, though Adultery be punished with cutting off of their noses. Neat, if not curious and too costly in this one custom, that they never seeth meat twice in the same Pot, but for every boiling buy a new one. In Religion, for the most part Mahometans, especially on the Seashores, which lay most open and commodious to the Arabians; by whom Mahometanism was here planted many ages since.  
Of Rivers we need take no care having spoke of Ganges. That with its many Channels may abundantly serve to water so small a Province. But hereof more anon in a place more proper. Proceed we now unto the Cities. The principal whereof, 1. Bengala, which gave name to the whole Kingdom, situate on a branch of the River Ganges, and reckoned for one of the most beautiful Towns of all the Indies. Exceedingly enriched by trade, but more by Pilgrimages, by reason of the holiness and divine operations ascribed by the Indians to the waters of it: there being few years in which not visited by three or four hundred thousand Pilgrims. 2. Gouro, the seat-royal of the ancient Kings. 3. Catig●n, on the bottom of the Gulf of Bengala, a well-traded Port. 4. Taxd●, once a Town of great traffic, and situate in those times on the banks of Ganges; now by the changing of the Channel (occasioned by the frequent overflowings of it) above a league off from the River. 5. Porto Grande, and 6. Por●o P●qu●no, two Towns of the Portugals, but without Forts for defence, or rules for Government. Places like the Asylum, which was built by Romulus; whereunto such as dare not stay in their own Countries, or any well-regulated Cities, use to make their resort; privileged here to live in all kind of licentiousness.  
Here is also in the North parts of this Province, or adjoining to it, the City and Kingdom of ARACHAN. Lying along the banks of Ganges, but so remote from the Sea, that it is 50 miles distant from the nearest branch of it. Wealthy, and populous withal; governed heretofore by a King of its own, so wallowing in wealth and sensual pleasures, that he had in this City and the parts adjoining twelve Royal Palaces or Seraglios, all stowed with women for his Iust. Now subject with Bengala and Patanaw, betwixt which it lieth, to the Empire of the great Monguls.  
There are also some small Lands in the Gulf of Bengala, which I account unto that Kingdom. 1. Bazacata, now called Basse. 2. Barassae, of which name there are five in Prolomy, three of them by Mercator said to be Mind●nao, Cailon, and Subut. 3. Two, called the Lands of Good fortune, by him placed under the Ae●uator, and said to be inhabited by Anthropophagis, or man eaters; as also were three more which he calls 4. Sabadibae, now named Cainam. 5. I●sulae Satyrorum, or the 〈◊〉 of Satire's, three in number, the people whereof were reported to have tails like Satyrs▪ And 6. those called Maniolae, in number ten, (now Islas de Pracel) reported by Ptolemy to be so stored with Adamant stones, that they violently drew to them any ships or vessels, which had iron in them: for which cause they which used these Seas fastened the planks of their ships with wooden pins. But our later Navigators find no such matter unless perhaps it be in the exploits of Sir Huon of Bourdeaux, where indeed we meet with such an Island, in the course of his Errantrie.  
But to return again to the Kingdom of Bengala, we find it of a different constitution from the rest of the Kingdoms of these parts. Not governed by a family of Successive Princes, descended from the Stem of a Royal Ancestry, as the others are. Chance, or necessity, had brought thither many Abassines, or Aethiopians, who made a conquest of the Country; and chose a King out of themselves. To keep when they had gotten, and perpetuate the Regal honour to the Abassine Nation, they procured thence yearly certain thousands of Slaves, whom they trained up unto the wars, advanced unto the higest commands in civil and military service; and out of them elected one for their Lord and Sovereign: as the Mamalucks in the Kingdom of Egypt, whom her●in they followed. By some Arabians trading with them, they came in time to admit Mahometanism amongst them; on 〈◊〉 Seacoasts especially. Dispossessed first of some part of their Kingdom, lying about Satagan, by the Pataneans; when driven to seek new dwellings by Baburxa, the Mongul Tartar: and of their whole Kingdom by the valour and good fortune of Echebar, who added it unto the rest of his estate.  
Thus have we drawn together all the Indian Provinces on this side of Ganges (the Kingdoms of M●labar and Narsinga being but a Parenthesis in the construction of this sentence) into the hands of the Mongul. So called for his descent from the Mongul-Tartars, one of the five great Tribes or Nations into which that People were divided. Derived originally from the famous and mighty Tamerlane, who having added almost all the greater and lesser Asia, unto his estates: left Persia, with the parts of Ind●● which lay nearest to it on the North, to Myrza Charrok, his fourth, son. But his issue failing in Abdula, the 4th. of that line, those estates fell to Abusaid, descended from Marom●ha, the third son of Tamerlane: Whose son and Successor called Zeuzes, by some Malaonchres, being disseized of the greatest part of the Kingdom of Persia, by Ussan-Cassanes: the rights of all, with the possession of Arachosia (now called Chabul) and Paropamisus (now Candahor or Sablestan) together with so much of India as was held by those Princes, remained in Hamed, one of the younger sons of Abu●●●aid; whose posterity laying hold on such opportunities as were offered to them, have made themselves Masters in few years of this mighty Empire. Whose Successors and their achievements we shall here present.  

The Great Monguls.  
1473. 1. Hamed, the son of Abuseful, of the race of Tamerlane, after the conquest of Persia by Vss●●-Cassanes, succeeded in Chabus, Candahor, and the parts of the Realms of India subject to the Tartars.  
1500. 2. Babor, or Baburxa, in danger to be dispossessed of most of his Estates by the neighbouring V●beques, living upon the borders of Persia, Tartary, and India, whom at last he quieted; enlarged his dominions by the conquest of some part of Patanaw, and other Kingdoms in the North.  
1532. 3. Hamoyen, the son of Babor, or Baburxa, commonly called Emanpaxda, vanquished by the Parthians, or Pataneans, and their confederates, craved aid of Tamas, the 2d. Persian Monarch of this line, on promise to conform to the Sophian Sect: and by that and confirmed and settled his affairs, but held himself to the former Principles of his Irreligion.  
4. Merhamed, or Miramudius, son of Emanpaxda, called in by Galgee the King of Mand●o, against Badurius the Cambaian, vanquished the Cambaian King in two pitched fields, and conquered the Kingdoms of Mandao, and Balassia, with some other Provinces.  
5. Adabar, the son of Merhamed, added the Realms of Delly and Cambaia, unto his Dominions.  
1550. 6. Mahomet Selabdin, commonly called Eohebar, brother of Adabar, the most fortunate and victorious Prince of all this family, subdued the Kingdoms of Caxi●●ir, Agra, Decan, Orissa, Bengala, Patanaw, and divers others of less note.  
1605. 7. Selim, surnamed Jangheere, the son of Echebar, who added nothing that I hear of, to his father's conquests.  
1627. 8. Blockie, the grandchild of Selim by his eldest son, (wickedly murdered by the practice of Curroon at Agra) proclaimed King on the death of his Grandfather; but shortly after made away by Asaph Chawn, so to make room for  
1627. 9 Curroon, the third son of Selim or Jangheere, and son-in-law unto Assaph Chawn; having by his own Ministers, and the hands of his Father-in-law, murdered the proclaimed King his Nephew, and all the other Princes of the Royal blood, succeeded into the Estates, and was crowned at Agra. A wicked and bloody Prince, still living for aught I hear to the contrary.   
To look a little on these Princes, their estate and power; in matters of Religion they have generally been Mahometans, that Religion being long since embraced by the Tartars, from whom they originally descended. But not so scrupulous or precise in that profession, as to endeavour the suppressing of any other opinions: both Echebar, and his son Jangheere, being so inclined unto Christianity, that they permitted the Jesuits to build Colleges and Churches in Agra itself the Imperial City, and many other chief Cities in his dominions. Of Echebar it is reported, that being doubtful what Religian to adhere unto, he caused 30 Infants to be so brought up that neither their Nurses nor any body else should speak unto them; resolving to addict himself to the Religion of that Country, whose language should be spoken by them, as most agreeable to nature: and he did accordingly. For as those Children spoke no language, so was he positive, and resolved in no Religion. Able to see the values of Mahomet, and the horrible impieties of the Gentiles, but not willing to conform unto the strict●●●●●t Christianity. And though Selim who succeeded, to content his Mahometan Subjects, declared himself for that Religion; yet his affairs being once settled, and his Throne confirmed, he became as Neutral as his Father. Sultan Curr●on now Reigning, of the same Neutrality, and 'tis well he is so, there being no Religion so impure and bloody, which he would not dishonour by his known ungraciousness.  
The Language spoken by these Princes, and their natural Subjects the Mogores, or Mongul-Tartars, is said by some to be the Turkuh. But I think rather that it is some Language near it, than the very same: And that the Language which they speak is the ancient Scythian or Tartarian, from which the Turks (a Scythian people) differ but in Dialect, a sprinkling of the Persian intermixed amongst it. A mixture not to be denied, in regard of their long dwelling in that Country, the entercouse which their Subjects of those parts have with these of India, and that the greatest part of their Soldiers, Officers and Commanders, are supplied from thence.  
Their Government is absolute, if not Tyrannical, the Great Mongul being Lord of all, and heir to every man's estate which is worth the having: the persons and purses of his Subjects at his sole disposing, so that he may amass what treasures, and raise what forces for the Wars his need requireth, or the Avarice or Ambition of his Ministers shall suggest unto him. First, for his Treasures, it is conceived that his Revenue doth amount yearly to Fifty Millions of Crowns, and there are reasons to persuade that it may be more. The Country very rich, and notably well traded from all parts of the world, the Impost upon which is of infinite value, besides the vast sums of money brought into his Dominions from all Countries whatsoever, which hold traffic here; their commodities not being to be parted with but for ready coin. The whole Land being also his, he estates it out for no term certain, retaining a third part of the profits to himself, and leaving two thirds to the Occupants, to be held by them during pleasure. Who if they thrive upon their bargains, they thrive not for themselves, but him: it being in his power, if he want patience to expect the Incumbents death, to enter on the whole estate of the Tenant by the way of Escheat: but if he tarry till the death of the Occupant, it falls to him of course, the wife and children of the deceased being fairly dealt with, if he content himself with the personal estate, and leave the Land to them to begin anew. For instance, of those huge sums which in so rich a Country may be had this way, it is said that when the Vice Roy of Lahor died, he left to Echebar three millons of Gold, besides Silver, Jewels, Horses, Elephants, Furniture and Goods, almost invaluable: And of one Raga Gagnar, another of his great Officers, that at his death the Great Mongul seized of his into his hands 3300 pound weight of Gold, besides Plate and Jewels. Besides these means of heaping treasure, all the Mines of the Country are wholly his, and the Presents given by all sorts of Suitors, hardly to be numbered; none being admitted to his presence which comes empty handed. Finally, if Badurius, which was King of Cambaia only, could bring into the field at once 500 Tun of gold and silver to pay his Army; and after the loss of all that treasuee, advanced upon the sudden the sum of 600000 Crowns, which he sent to Solyman the Magnificent to come to succour him; both which it is well known he did: What infinite Treasures must we think this Prince to be master of, who hath more than four times the estate of the King of Cambaia, and far more trading now than in former times?  
By the like Parallel we may conjecture somewhat at his Forces also. Badurius the Cambaian brought into the field against Merhamed, and the King of Mandae, as was partly touched upon before, 150000 Horse, 500000 Foot, 2000 Elephants armed, 2000 pieces of brass Ordnance, of which were four Basilisks, each of them drawn with 100 yoke of Oxen; and 500 Carts loaded with powder and shot. What then may we conceive of this Prince, who is Lord of so much a greater estate than he, but that his Levies may be raised proportionably to so great Dominions? But because possibly Badurius did extend himself to the utmost of his power, and having lost two Battles, was never able to recruit again, which no wise Prince would do but in great extremities: It is conceived that the Mongul, without running any such hazards on the loss of a Battle, can in an instant raise 50000 Elephants, 300000 Horse, and Foot proportionable; and ye● have stock enough for an Aftergame, if that he should chance to lose the first. But it is seldom that he hath advanced to so high a Muster. For in his action upon the Kingdoms of Decan, he had but an Hundred thousand men, and a thousand Elephants for fight; though possibly of all sorts of people there might be more than double that number. For in his ordinary removes in time of Progress, it is said that his followers of all sorts amount unto two hundred thousand; and that his Tents do usually take up as much ground as the City of London. Yet notwithstanding this great power, the fortunes of this Empire have not only been at a stand, since the deathof Echebar; But the Rasbooches in Cambaia, the Venazarari in Decan, and other puissant Rebels in other parts of his Dominions, hold out still against him, some of them being said to command as much land as a pretty good Kingdom, and to have always in a readiness 20000 Horse, & 50000 foot, to make good their Mountains. Nature or Divine Providence hath given to Empires, as to men, a determinate growth, beyond which there is no exceeding.   

2 INDIA EXTRA GANGEM.  
INDIA EXTRA GANGEM is that part of the great Continent of India, which lieth on the further side of the River Ganges, from the spring or fountain of it, wheresoever it be, to the fall thereof into the sea by the first and last mouth thereof, which is called Antholi: The other four being reckoned into the other part of India, on this side of that River. From hence extended Eastward as far as China and the Oriental Ocean, on other parts bounded as before.  
The Country in those elder times so renowned for wealth, that one Tract of it had the name of The Silver Region, and an other of The Golden Chersonese: this last supposed to be the Ophir of Solomon, of which more hereafter. The People of the same nature and disposition, in the elder times, as those which did inhabit on the hither side of the Ganges: not so well known to the Greeks or Romans as the others were, by reason of the remoteness of their situation; nor so well discovered at the present. So that the best Account we shall be able to give of it, will no: be so exact and punctual as of that before: with reference either to the estate hereof in the times of the Ancients, or the affairs of it in these dates.  
Mountains of most note in it, 1. Bepyrrus, 2. Maeandrus, 3. Semanthinus; and 4 these called Damasi, touched upon before, in our general discourse of India. Out of which, and from other Springs, flow these following Rive●s, 1. Catabeda, 2. Bocosanna, 3. Sadus, 4. Temala, 5. Besynga, 6. Chrysaoras, 7. Polanaas, 8. Attabas, these three last in the part hereof called the Golden Chersonese. 9 Daonas, and 10. Dorias, rising out of the Mountains called Damasi. Others there are whose names I meet with in my Author, but of no great note: by what names any of them now distinguished, it is hard to say. Nor find I any who have dared to adventure on it.  
Of the chief Towns, 1. Balanga, 2. Cirtatha, 3. Tasile, 4. Tagma, and 5. Malthura, have the name of being the Metropoles of their several Nations. 6. Triglyphon, only honoured with the name of Regia; more memorable perhaps for the white Crows, and bearded Hens, which are said to have been thereabouts, than for being the Seat-Royal of some petit Prince. After these 1. Sada, on the banks of the River Sadus, 2. Samba, 3. Sabara, 4. Col●, 5. Zabae, and 6. Sinda, have the name of Cities. 7. Baracura, 8. Berabonna, 9 Bobynga, 10. Tacola, 11. Sabana, and 12. Thibon b●stus, are marked out for the most noted Emportes, or Towns of trade; the memory of Sabana being still preserved in the Frith of Sabaor, betwixt this Chersonese and Sumatra. Others there are not noted by those special Adjuncts, of which, 1. Cocconagaoa, and 2. Balonoa, in the Golden Chersonese; 3. Rhandamarcotta, in the Midlands, 4. Pentapolis, near the mouth of Ganges called Antibolum; 5. Agm●gara, near the Bay called ●inus Magnus; and 6. Corygaza, one of the principal Towns of the 〈◊〉, may be some of the chief.  
The old Inhabitants hereof, besides the Marandae last spoken of, were the Gangarides, and Gangaent, inhabiting on the banks of Ganges; the Tacorae: bordering on the Mountain Bepyrrus; as the Tilaedae on Maeand●us; and the Ammachaes, and Cabo●aeh, near the hills called Damasi. The Basadae, said to be crooked, short, and thick; but of a cheerful aspect, and clear complexion: of which composition also the inhabitants of the Golden Chersonese were observed to be: the Barrae, and Cudutae, on the Bay called Sinus Magnus; the Lestori, a Thievish and Piratical people, who lived in Caves, and were affirmed to be of so hard a skin, that it was not penetrable by an Arrow These, with the rest, too many to be here recited, the issue in most likelihood of Chavilath and Saba the sons of Joktan; of whom we find so many footsteps in Sabara Civitate, Sabaraco Sinu, Sabana Emporio, Sobanus Fluvio; and in the Country's now called Ava, and the Kingdom of Cavelan. Of any of their actions we find little in ancient stories, or of the power of any of their former Kings: but that it was given out in the time of Alexander, that beyond the Ganges lived a Prince called Aggramen●s (the most powerful King of all those Countries) able to bring into the field 200000 Foot, 20000 Horse, 3000 Elephants, and 2000 armed Chariots. With which report though Alexander was the more inflamed to try masteries with him; yet his Soldiers were so terrified with it (remembering the hard bout which they had with Porus) that no persuasions could prevail with them to go further Eastward. Nor hear we much of them after this, unless the conversion of the Indians in the time of Constantine, may be applied to those on that side of the River, as perhaps it may.  
As for the later observations and discoveries of it, we find it (as most barbarous Countries else till reduced to Order) dismembered and subdivided into many estates, almost as many Realms as Cities, and distinct governments amongst them, as Tribes and Nations. Most of them Gentiles in Religion, with whom the name of Christ and Christianity not so much as heard of, till the coming of the Jesuits thither; who have not only obtained leave, but some invitations, for the promoting of the Gospel. And for Mahometamsm, though it had got some footing on the Seacoasts of the Golf of Bengala, as lying most convenient for the trade of the Arabian Merchants: yet on the North, and midland parts, and those towards China, and the Oriental Seas, it was as little heard of as Christianity. But for the Kingdoms of this part, I mean the chief of them, to which as many of the rest as are worth the looking after are to be reduced, they are those of, 1. Brama or Barma, 2. Cauchin-China, 3. Camboia, 4. Jangoma, 5. Siam, and 6. Pegu.   

BRAMA.  
THe Kingdoms of BRAMA or BARMA have on the West, the River Ganges; on the North, part of Cathay in Tartary; on the East, Cauchin-China; and on the South, the Kingdoms of Pegu. So called from the Brachmanes, Bramanes, or Brames, possessed for many ages passed of these North, West Countries. By the transposing of a Letter, they are now called the Kingdoms of Barma.  
The Country of these Brames or Bramanes, extendeth Northwards from the nearest of the Peguan Kingdoms for the space of 150 Leagues, but far more from West to East: watered with many great and remarkable Rivers, issuing from the Lake Chiamay, which though 600 miles from the Sea, and emptying itself continually into so many Channels, contains four hundred miles in compass, and is nevertheless full of waters for the one or the other.  
By the overflowing of which Rivers, and the commodiousness of the Lake, the Country is wonderfully enriched, as Ae●ypt by the overflowings of 〈◊〉 Which notwithstanding, there are in it many huge forests, in the West especially, and therein many Lions, Tigers, Ounces, Serpents, and other Creatures of a mischievous and 〈◊〉 Nature.  
The whole Country containeth the Kingdoms of 1. Calam, 2. Prom, 3. Melintay, 4. Mirand●, 5. Became, 6. Tangu, 7. Av●, and 8. Brama.  
Of 1. MELINTAY and 2. MIRANDA, I find little written, but that they were conquered with the rest, by the Viceroy of Tangu, in the first rising of his fortunes, becoming the foundation of his following greatness. Of 3. BACAM, it is said that it is plentifully enriched with Mines, both of Gold and Silver. In 4. CAVILAN, commonly and contractedly called CALAM, we find apparent footsteps of the name of Chavilah the son of Jocktan. Of the rest more is to be said, not much.  
5. PROM, though it be a little Kingdom, is exceeding populous, and stored with a warlike people. Given by the second King of Pegu of the Tanguan Race, to a younger son; who being by his Father commanded to the siege of M●rmolan which had then revolted, not only did decline the service, but rebelled against him; and by the strength of this small Kingdom held it out three years. But seeing his Father's fortunes in a manner desperate, he repented of his disobedience; and went unto his aid, with an Army of 50000 men of his Natural Subjects. Treacherously poisoned on the way by his chiefest Counsellor, for fear the Crime of his Revole would be charged on him.  
6. TANGV, is the name of one of these Bramian Kingdoms, so called from the chief Town thereof: formerly subject with the rest to the Kings of Pegu, and governed by their several Viceroys. One of which taking his advantage of the wars between the Kings of Pegu and S●am, began to set up for himself, and husbanded his affairs so well, that he became sole Lord of these Bramian Kingdoms; as afterwards of all the rest in this part of India. Not long enjoyed by his successor, when dispossessed and slain by one whom he married to his Sister, and made Governor of this very Province. In which he bore himself so stiffly, that being sent for by his King to aid him against some of his Rebels, and to bring all the inhabitants of the Country with him; he answered that he would send one half; to send all, unreasonable. Inceased with which denial the King armed against him; but he put the Leaders to the sword, and seized their followers. After this being now in Arms, and despairing of reconcilement, he took upon himself the title of King of Tangu; and to secure himself therein, joined with the King of Arrachan against his Sovereign, whom he most barbarously slew (after he had put himself into his hands) with his wife and children. Neither enjoyed he long the fruits of his villainy, subdued not long after, with the rest of these Indian Princes, by the King of Barma; of which more hereafter.  
7. AV A, another of these Kingdoms, and one of the plantations of Chavilah also, is liberally furnished with all things necessary for the life of man. It affordeth also store of Rubies, which they dig out of the Mountains; a certain creature which breeds Musk, together with great plenty of horse and Elephants. Their chief City is called Ava, which name it giveth to the River upon which it is built, issuing out of the Lake of ●h●amay, and communicates the same to the whole Province. Subject for many ages passed to the Kings of Pegu, till conquered by the Viceroy of Tangu, as before is said; and by him given, with the Title of King, unto one of his brothers. Who rebelling against the son and successor of his Benefactor, and by him slain in single Combat, this Kingdom was conferred on a son of the Conqueror. A Prince of more virtue than his brother, and one which grew at last unto so great power, that in the bustles or combustions of the Kingdom of Pegu, he surprised or forced the Fort of Siri●●ngh, formerly given unto the Portugals by the King of Arrachan, slew all the Soldiers, and spitted Philip de Britto, who commanded in it. After which, gathering together the dispersed Peguans, and repairing part of the City for them, he was likely to have made himself a good bargain by it, if the sudden coming of the King of Barma, had not spoiled his markets.  
8. BRAMA or BARMA, the most Southern of these Bramian kingdoms, the king where of was feudatary to the kings of Pegu, or of their appointment. Of no account when the Portugals came first acquainted with India, nor in many years after; now of most renown. For sitting still when all the rest of their neighbours w●re embroiled in wars, they gathered so much power and strength, that in the end, one of the later kings hereof observing how the forces of his neighbouring Princes were consumed, and their treasures wasted; levied an Army of 300000 fight men, 40000 Elephants, with all things suitable. And with this power subdued the kingdoms of Macin, and Arrachan; conquered the Cities of Pegu and Odia, (the two chief Cities of these parts) invaded the kingdom of Siam, and possessed himself of it; making in little time all the lesser Princes to become his Tributaries, as they still continue.   

CAUCHIN-CHINA.  
CAUCHIN-CHINA is bounded on the West, with the Kingdoms of Brama; on the East, with the Great Realm of China; on the North, extending towards Tartary; and on the South, bordering on Camboia.  
The Country aboundeth with Gold, Silver, Aloes, and great store of silks, of which the Inhabitants make 〈◊〉, and other stuffs. It affordeth also plenty of Porcelain Earth, which being made into Cups, Dishes, and other Utensils of household, is sold by the name of China-ware: well counterfeited of late amongst us, by putting a white crust on our Po●●ers earth, as neat for use and show as the natural China.  
The people very stout and warlike, especially for Foot-service, though they have many horses here, and those fit for war. Well-practised on their Pieces also, on which they spend great store of powder, but not so much in war, as in sports and triumphs: yet making much more than they spend, the earth in some parts yielding very fit materials for that commodity. Trained up to Manufactures, especially to the making of Powder, S●lks, and Porcelain, which they sell to the Chinese. Idolaters, for the most part, as 〈…〉 whose Characters and language they also use: but so that there appear some inclinations unto Christianity, in many of them, who have erected many Crosses, and do admit the pictures of the Blessed Virgin, and the final judgement. Men not unlikely to have made a further Progress in the Gospel, if they had met with better Teachers than these Laymens' books.  
The chief City hereof is called Cauchin-China by the name of the Province, situate on a River coming out of China; and passing hence into the bottom of a large and capacious Bay. The whole Country divided into three Provinces, and as many Kings, over which one Paramount: but he and they the Tributaries of the King of China. Belonging hereunto is a little Island called Ainao, ten miles from the land, where the Inhabitants have a great trade of fishing for Pearls The only Province of the Indies, which is wholly subject to the power of a foreign Prince; the Portugals holding in this Continent many Towns and Cities, but no whole Provinces.   

3 CAMBOIA.  
CAMBOIA is bounded on the North, with Cauchin-Chin●; on the East and South, with the Ocean; on the West, with parts of the Kingdom of Stam, and the Realms of Jangoma. So called from C●mbo●a the chief City of it. Divided commonly into the Kingdom of Champa, and Cambota specially so called.  
1. CHAMPA, the Northern part hereof bordereth Cauchin-China, and is liberally provided of all necessaries: besides which, there is plenty of Gold, and of the wood called Lignum Aloes, prized at the weight thereof in silver, much used in Baths, and at the funerals of great persons. This a distinct kingdom of itself, but subject with the rest to the king of Barma. The chief City of it, called by the name of Champa, which it communicates to the Country, is situate near the Seaside, and of very good traffic.  
2. CAMBOIA specially so called, lieth South of Champa, a very great and populous Country, well stored with Elephants and Rhinocerots, which last the Indians call Abades. It yieldeth also great plenty of a sweet-wood which they call Calumba, as precious and as much esteemed of as the wood of Aloes, (if not the same, or some Species of it as I think it is) together with abundance of Rice, Flesh, and Fish; well-watred with the River Mecon issuing out of China, & having received many lesser streams falleth first into a great Lake of 200 miles' compass, and thence into the Indian Ocean, making betwixt the Lake and that an hundred Lands. By the overflowings of this River the whole Country is enriched (as Egypt by the like overflowings of Nilus): the inhabitants at those times betaking themselves to their upper Rooms, and passing altogether by boats from one place to another.  
The people are conceived to be strong and warlike, though more inclined to merchandise and navigagation than to deeds of Arms. Idolaters of the worst kind, esteeming Men and Beasts of a like condition in regard of any future judgement; of late beginning to set up, and adore the Cross, which is (it seems) the first Principle of Religion, in which the Friars are wont to instruct their Converts. Not weaned as yet, by these new Teachers, from burning the women with their Husbands, common to them with many other Indian people, not from burning their Nobles with the King, used only here; but voluntarily to express their loves, not upon constraint.  
The chief Towns of it, 1. Camboia, one of the three prime Cities of this part of India; the other two being Od●●, and Pegu, of which more anon. Situate on the River Mecon before destroyed: where it hath its fall into the Sea; well traded, as the Staple for all this Country, the commodities whereof are brought hither, and here sold to the Merchant. 2. Cudurmuch, twelve league from Camboia, on the same River also. 3. Coul, on the Seaside in the very South-west Angle of all the Country. The Kings whereof, once absolute, and at their own disposing, till invaded by a vast Army of the neighbouring Laos; in which their King being slain, and his forces weakened, his son and Successor was constrained to become a V●ss● to the crown of Siam. But fearing the loss of his estate, when that Kingdom was made subject to the Kings of Pegu, in the year 1598. he applied himself unto the Portugals, offered them a Peninsula (part of his dominions) extending three leagues into the Sea; and sent to the Jesuits for some of their Society to live and preach amongst his people. Not able for all these honest Policies to preserve himself from being made a Feudatary of the King of Barma.   

4 JANGOMA.  
JANGOMA or the Country of the LAOS, is bounded on the East, with Camboia and Champa, from which parted by the River Menon; on the West, with the River of Pegu, by which divided from that Kingdom; on the South, with the Realm of Siam; on the North, with Brama.  
It took this name from Jangoma the chief province of it, the other two (for here be three of them in all) being those of Livet, and Curror. All of them joined together called the Country of the Laos, by the name of the people, a mighty Nation and a stout, by Religion Gentile; naked from the middle upwards, and t●●ssing up their hair like a cap. Their Country very rich and level, but very ill-neighboured by the Gu●o●● (Paulus Venetus giveth them the name of Gang●gu) who possess the mountains: whence falling in great companies to hunt for men whom they kill and eat, they commit cruel butcheries amongst them. Insomuch as this people, not able to defend themselves against their fury, or rather wanting good leaders to conduct and order them (for it is said that they can make a million of men) were fain to put themselves under the protection of the King of Siam, whom they obeyed no further than the humour took them.  
Towns they have none of any note, except those three which give name to the several Provinces; and those of no note neither but for doing that. The people for the most part live on the banks of their Rivers, where they have Cottages of Timber; or else upon the Rivers in boats and shallops, as the Tartarians of the Deserts in their Carts or wheel-houses. One of their Rivers (commonly called the River of Laos) said to extend 400 Leagues within the land, as far as tartary, and China; and from July to September to invert its course, and flow back strongly toward its fountain. Not governed by any certain rule or order, till they submitted to the Patronage of the king of Siam; and then no oftener than they listed: though for their sakes, that king engaged himself in a war against the Cannibals, their most deadly enemies, accompanied with 25000 foot, 20000 Horse, and 10000 Elephants. Secured by his protection from the 〈◊〉 of those Cannibals (of whom otherwise they had been devoured) in the year 1578 they descended the River in great multitudes, to the number of 200000, and fell into the Realm of Camboia. But they made an unprosperous adventure of it. For though the king of Camboia lost his life in the battle, ye he gave ●hem such a fatal blow, that they were almost all slain, drowned, or captived in the fight. Weakened wherewith they became an easy prey to the Viceroy of Tangu, when he first made himself sole Master of this part of India. Who giving to his brother the kingdom of Ava, and leaving to his eldest son the kingdom of Pegu, with the Sovereignty over all the rest, conferred this Country, with the title of king of Jangoma, on a younger Son. But he, begotten on a daughter of the king of Pegu, and born after his Father had attained this whole Indian Empire, was easily persuaded by the ●alapoies, (so they call their Priests) that his Title was better than that of his Elder Brother, who was born before it. Prevented in his claim by the kings of Arrachan and Tangu, by whom that king was slain, and his kingdom wasted. How he sped afterwards I find not. But probable it is, that he submitted with the rest to the king of Barma.   

5. SIAM.  
SIAM, is bounded on the North, with Jangoma, and part of Pegu; on all other parts, with the wide Ocean, save that it toucheth on the East, with a part of Camboia, and on the West, with a poin● of Pegu. So called from Siam the chief of all those kingdoms which pass under this name, as that from Siam the chief City of it.  
The Country of greater length than breadth, stretcheth itself Southwards into the Sea many hundred miles, in form of a Peninsula or Denty-Iland, called anciently Aurea Chersonesus, or the Golden Chersonese: one of the five famous Chersonese or Peninsulaes' of the elder writers; the other four being Peloponnesus in Greece, the Thracian Chersonese near Propontis, the Taurican Chersonese in the Euxine, and the Cimbrian Chersonese in the North of Germany, now part of Denmark. It had the name of Aurea, or the Golden, superadded to it, from its plenty of Gold, for which much celebrated by the Ancients, both Greeks, and Romans (and therefore not improbably thought by some to be solomon's Ophir) still famous with the rest of the Countries of the kingdom of Siam, for abundance of Gold, Silver, Tinn, and other metals; great quantity of Pepper sent yearly thence, with store of Elephants, and horses: the whole Country very fat, and fertile, well stored with Rice, Corn, Grass, and all other necessaries.  
The people generally much addicted to pleasures, if not to Luxury; delighted much with Music and rich apparel; and such as stand much upon their honour. For their instruction in good letters they have public Schools, where their own Laws, and the mysteries of their own religion, are taught them in their natural Language; all other Sciences in strange tongues understood by none but by the learned. To tillage they can frame themselves, and are painful in it; but by no means will follow any Mechanical Arts, which they put over to their Slaves. In Religion for the most part Gentiles, worshipping the four Elements amongst other Gods; to each of which as they are severally affected, so are their bodies to be disposed of: either burnt, buried, hanged, or drowned, after their decease; as in their lives they were most devoted to the fire, Earth, Air, or Water. Some Christians here also in and about the parts possessed by the Portugals; but more Mahometans: who possessing two hundred Leagues of the Seacoasts of this Country, have planted that religion in most part of the Country now by them possessed.  
It containeth in it many kingdoms, some of little note; those of most observation, 1. Malaca, 2. Patane, 3. Jor, 4. Muan●ay, and 5. Siam, properly and specially so called. Of which Malaca is now in the hands of the Portugals, Jor and Patane are possessed by the Arabians or Saracens; the other two have followed the fortunes of the kings of Siam.  
1. The kingdom of MALACA taketh up the South part of the Golden Chersonese, extended towards the North from the Cape or Promontory which Ptolemy calleth Malanco●in, in the extreme South-point hereof near unto Sabana, than a noted Emporie, for the space of 270 miles. So called from Malaca the chief City of it, of old times called Musicana, or built very near it, from whence this Tract is called by Strabo, Musicani terra. The City seated on the banks of the River Gaza, which is here said to be 15 miles in breadth; by the frequent overflowings whereof, and the nearness of it to the Line (being but two degrees to the North) the Air hereof, and all the territory belonging to it, is very unwholesome; and for that cause the Country but meanly populous. In compass it is said to be 20 miles, of great wealth, because of almost infinite trading; for Spices, Unguents, Gold, Silver, Pearls, and previous Stones, the most noted Emporie of the East. Insomuch that is said by Ludovico Barthema, who was there before the Portugals knew it, that it was traded by more ships than any one City in the world, more by far since the coming of the Portugals to it, than it was before. The People (as in all this tract) of an Ash-colour, with long hair hanging over their faces; bloody and murderous, specially when they meet one another in the Night. Few other Towns of any note in a place so unhealthy, except 2. Sincapura, situate East of Malaca, near the Promontory of old called Magnum; supposed by some to be the Zaba of Ptolemy; and that more probably than that it should be his Palura, as Maginus would have it; Palura being a City of the Hither India, and different at the least 20 degrees of Langitude from any part of this Chersonese. But whatsoever it was called in the former times, it was in these latter ages the mother of Malaca; the greatest part of the Trade and people being removed from thence to this newer foundation: before which time it was the best frequented Emporie in these parts of the East. 3. Palo Zambilan, 120 miles on the West of Malaca, from whence to Sincapura, coasting about the Southern Cape (now called Cape Liampo) we have a Seashore of 270 miles, as before was said. No other habitation of any reckoning, but a few sheds upon the shore for the use of Fishermen, and some scattered Villages in the land the People dwelling most on Trees for fear of Tigers.  
This Tract in former times possessed by the Kings of Siam, about the year 1258 b● came a kingdom of itself; founded by Paramisera, and some other of the Javan Nobility, who flying the tyranny of their own king, came into this Country, where they were lovingly received by Sangesinga, then reigning under the S●amite, in Sincapura. Him they perfidiously slew, and invested Paramisera in his Dominion. Outed of which by the King of Siam, he was forced to seek a new dwelling, and after two or three Removes, fell upon the place where Malaca now standeth, which City, pleased with the commodiousness of the situation, he is said to have built. The trade of Sincapura in short time removed hither also, which so increased the wealth and power of the Kings hereof, that joining with the Moors who began to plant themselves on the shores adjoining, and receiving withal the Law of Mahomet, they began to cast off all subjection to the Kings of Siam, to whom the son and Successor of P●ramisera had submitted his new-raised kingdom, and became their Homager. Incensed wherewith, the S●amite about the year 1500 sent out a Navy of 200 Sail to distress it by Sea, and an Army of 30000 men and 400 Elephants to besiege it by land. But before he was able to effect any thing, hindered by Tempests, and the insolences of some of his Soldiers, the Portugals, in the year 1511, under the conduct of Albuquerque had possessed themselves of it, who built there a Fortress and a Church. And though Alod●nus the son of the expelled King (whose name was Mahomet) endeavoured the regaining of his Estate, and that the Saracens, Hollanders, and the kings of For and Achen (two neighbouring Princes) envying the great fortunes of the Portugals, have severally and successively laboured to deprive them of it: yet they still keep it in defiance of all opposition which hath been hitherto made against them.  
2. North unto that of Malaca lieth the kingdom of YOUR, JOR, or JOHOR; so called of Jor, or Johor, the chief City of it. Inhabited for the most part by Moors, or Saracens, Mahometanism by their means prevailing on the Natives of the Country also. A Kingdom of no great extent, but of so much power, that joining his Land-forces with the Navy of the King of Achen, he besieged Malaca, and built a Royal Fort before it: in which, when taken by Paul de Lima, by the defeat of this king, were found 900 pieces of brass Ordnance. After this, picking a quarrel with the king of Pahan, he burned his houses, barns, provisions, and the Suburbs of the City itself: but in the course of his affairs, was interrupted by the King of Achen (one of the Kings in the Isle of Sumatra) his old confederate, who after 29 day's siege took the City of Jor. What afterwards became of this king or kingdom, I am not able to resolve. In former times it did acknowledge him of Siam for the Lord in chief.  
3. More Northward yet lieth the kingdom of PATANE, denominated from Patane the chief City of it: but different from Patane, in the other India, as Cleveland in Yorkshire from Cleveland in Germany; or Holland in the Low-Countries from Holland in Lincoln hire, as hath been fully shown before. The City made of wood and Reed, but artificially wrought and composed together: the Mesquit only (most of the people being Mahometans) is built of brick. The Chinois make a great part of the Inhabitants of it, insomuch that in this small City there are spoke three languages, viz. the Chinese, used by that people, the Malayan (or language of Malaca) which is that of the Natives; and the Siam, to the King whereof this small Crown is Feudatary. Built of such light stuff and combustible matter, it must needs be in great danger of fire; and was most miserably burnt in the year 1613 by some Javan Slaves in revenge of the death of some of their Fellows: at which time the whole City was consumed with fire the Mesquit, the Queen's Court, and some few houses, excepted only. The Country governed of late years by Queens, who have been very kind to the English, and Hollanders, granting them leave to erect their Factories in Patane. Not memorable for any great exploit by them performed, but that a late Queen a little before that dismal fire, offended with the King of Pan or Pahan, who had married her Sister, and reigned in a little Island not far off, she sent against him a Fleet of 70 Sail, and 4000 men: by which compelled to correspond with her desires, he brought his Queen and her children with him to make up the breach.  
4. The Kingdom of SIAM, strictly and specially so called, is situate on the main-land (the rest before described being in the Chersonese,) betwixt Camboia on the East, Pegu on the West, the kingdom of Muantay on the North, and the main Ocean on the South. The chief Cities of it, 1. Socotai, memorable for a temple made wholly of mettle, 80. spans in height, raised by one of the Kings; it being the custom of this Country, that every king at his first coming to the Crown, is to build a Temple which he adorneth with high S●eples, and many Idols. 2. Quedoa, renowned for the best Pepper, and for that cause very much frequented by foreign Merchants. 3. Tavay, upon the Sea-coast where it joineth to Pegu. Whence measuring along the shores till we come to Champa before mentioned; being all within the Dominions of the king of Siam (not reckoning the Chersonese into this Account) we have a Seacoastof the length of 600 Leagues. 4. Lugor, upon the seaside also, near that little Isthmus, which joineth the Cherson see to the land; from whence to Malaca is 600 miles' sail all along the coast. 5. Calantan, the head City of a little kingdom but subject to the Crown of Siam. 6. Siam, the chief City of this part of the kingdom, which it giveth this name to. A goodly City, and very commodiously seated on the River Menam, for trade and merchandise. So populous and frequented by foreign nations, that besides the natives here are said to be thirty thousand households of Arabians. The Houses of it high built, by reason of the Annual deluge, during which time they live in the Upper rooms; and unto every house a boat for the use of the family. Those of the poorer sort dwell in little sheds made of reed and timber; which they remove from place to place for the best convenience of their markets. And yet so strong that being besieged by the Tanguan Conqueror, than king of Pegu, Anno 1567. with an Army of fourteen hundred thousand fight men, for the space of 20 months together, it resolutely held good against him: not gained at last by force but treason, one of the Gates being set open to him in the dead time of the right, and by that means the City taken. The people hereof are thought to be inclining to Christianity, but hitherto so ill instructed in the principles of it, that they maintain amongst many other strange opinions, that after the end of 2000 years (from what time I know not) the world shall be consumed with fire, and that under the ashes of it shall remain two eggs, out of which shall come one man and one woman, who shall people the world anew.  
5. MVANTAY the last of these Kingdoms, lieth betwixt Jangoma and Siam: memorable for nothing more than the City of Odia, or Vdi●, the principal of all the Kingdoms of Siam, and the usual residence of those Kings. Situate on the banks of the River Ca●pumo, and containing in it 400000 Inhabitants, of which 50000 are trained to the wars, and in continual re●diness for prelent service. For though this King be Lord of nine several Kingdoms, yet he useth none of them in his wars but the natural Siamites, and those of this City and the rest of his Subjects of Muant●y. It is said that for the use of this City only (being eated like Venice upon many little Lands not bridged together) there are no fewer than 200000 skiffs, and shallops; serving to waste the people from one place to another. By means hereof of great strength, and almost impregnable. But being beleaguered by the Tanguan or 〈◊〉 Conqueror with ten hundred thousand fight men (an Army big enough to have bury●d a greater City than this; if every man had but cast a shovel full of earth upon it) it was won at last.  
The Government of these kings of Siam, was absolute heretofore, if not tyrannical, he being sole Lord of all the land in his kingdoms, which he either gave to his Nobles, or Farmed out to Husbandmen, during life or pleasure, but never passed over unto any, the right of Inheritance. And these he grants unto his Subjects, besides rents in money, upon condition to mairtain a determinate number of horse, Foot, and Elephants: thereby enabled without further charge unto the Subject to levy 20000 Horse, and 250000 Foot for present service; besides far greater numbers out of the residue of his people, if occasion be. And for his ordinary Guard he was said to keep 6000 Soldiers, and 200 Elephants, of which beasts he is reported to have 30000, of which every tenth Elephant is trained up to the war. By reason of so great a power he became Master of the Realms of Camboia, and Champa; held those of M●l●ca, J●r, Pahan, and Patane, as his Vassals and Tributaries with that of Jangoma and the Laos, under his protection. But when the fatal time was come; and that his City of Siam was betrayed to the king of Pegu, he poisoned himself upon the news; his son becoming Tributary to the Peguan Victor. This son of his, too much a Prince to be a Subject, revolted from a son of the Peguan, a vicious and tyrannical King, (degenerating from the gallantries of so worthy a Father) by whom he was besieged in Siam with 900000 fight men. Unable to resist this Army, if he had presently declared such a resolution, he entertained the king with Treaties, and promises of delivering the City to him, till the third month after, (which was March) when ordinarily the River was to overflow all the Country for 120 miles about: by which sudden and violent inundation, and the sword together (the Siamites waiting diligently for the opportunity) there perished all of this great Army except 70 thousand. After this blow, the conquering Siamite Anno 1600 besieged and endangered the City of Pegu, of which more anon: and dying in the year 1605. left his estate unto his Brother. Whose son succeeding, settled a Factory in Siam of the English Merchants Anno 1612. and was in a fair way of obtaining the sovereignty of Pegu, then destroyed and wasted; if the violent and unresitable coming of the king of Barms had not crossed him in it; to whom now subject with the rest of the Indian Princes on that side of the River.   

6. PEGV.  
PEGV is bounded on the East, with Jangoma, and a part of Siam; on the North, with the kingdoms of Brama; on the West and South, with the kingdom and Golf of Bengala. So called from Pegu the chief City, as that is by the name of the River upon which it standeth. Divided commonly into the kingdoms and estates of 1. Verma, 2. Macin, 3. Orrachan, 4. Martavan, and 5. Pegu specially so called.  
1. VERMA is the name of a small kingdom bordering upon Bengala, and so denominated from Verma, the chief Town thereof. A kingdom which hath no Port or Haven at all; and therefore wholly freed of Moors and Mahometans, which can be said of no other of these Indian kingdoms.  
The people black, naked above the Waste, and covered beneath it only with a veil of Cotton: in matter of Religion Gentiles, and in wane right valiant. This last apparent by the long and frequent wars which they had with the Peguans: to whom made Tributary in conclusion, but not fully conquered.  
2. MACIN, so called from Macin the chief City thereof, is another of these Peguans kingdoms. Of small esteem but for the great quantity of the sweet-wood by the Latines called Lignum vitae, by the natives Calamba, so much in use for Funerals and Baths, (as was said before;) held also by the Indians for a Sovereign and unparallelled Medicine against many dangerous diseases; great quantities whereof are brought hence yearly by the Merchant. One of the first kingdoms which was conquered by the king of Barma, (upon whom it bordereth) in the beginning of his Fortunes.  
3. ORRACHAN or Arrachan, lieth on the West of Macin, and the South of Verma, environed round with mountains and impassable woods. Chief Towns thereof, 1. Dia ga, taken and destroyed by the Portugals, in the quarrels betwixt them and the king of Arrachan. Anno 1608. ●. Sundiva, situate in an Island unto which it gives name, fix leagues off from the continent of Bengala, to which it formerly belonged. Subdued by the Portugals, Anno 1602. and from them taken by this king about two years after, and made a member of his kingdom. The Island 30 leagues in compass, very strong, fruitful, and the Town well fortified. 3. Arrachan, the head City, which gives name to all, distant from the Sea 45 miles, but seated on a large and capacious River. The king and kingdom of no note, till the ruins of Pegu, to the Crown whereof it once pertained. In the desolation of which State the king hereof combining with him of Tangu, besieged the second Tanguan king in the Castle of Macan; and had betwixt them the whole pillage of that wealthy City, together with the possession of the best Towns of it. After this victory, he returned to Arrachan in triumph, leading with him the white Elephant: of the king of Pegu, sumptuously adorned; the brother and two sons of the Peguan following in the Pageant. A solemn and magnificent entry. The better to assure himself of his new dominions, this king bestowed upon the Portugals the fort of Siriangh, on the River of Pegu. For which favour ill-requited by the Portugals, who had taken his son, and put him to a grievous ransom, they broke out into open wars. In the pursuit whereof, after many losses, the king recovered from them the Isle of Sundiva, and manning out a Fleet of 1200 sail (of which 75 were of so great burden as to carry every one, twelve pieces of Ordnance) and in that fleet 30000 Soldiers, 8000 hand-guns, and 3500 greater pieces, besieged the Fortress: assisted in that action also by the king of Tangu. And though he failed in his design, yet like enough he had prevented the king of Av●, who took it in the year 1613 as before is said, had he not been outed in the mean time of his own kingdom, by the king of Barma: of whole great rise, the conquering of the Realms of Macin and Arrachan, were the first foundation.  
4. MARTAVAN, the richest of these kingdoms, lieth South to Arrachan, a little turning towards the West. The soil so fertile that it yieldeth three Harvests in a year, and sent annually 15 ships to Cochin, and as many to Mala●a, laden with Rice. Rich also in Mines of Iron, lead, steel, brass, silver, gold, and Rubies: and very liberally provided of Springs and Rivers. The Forest's well-stored with Hearts, Boars, and Buffoles, store of Pines and Palms: the woods with Sugarcanes, many excellent fruits; the ordinary herbs and shrubs either Medicinal or odoriferous. The principal City of it called also Martavan, situate on an Haven open at all times of the year, and not choked with sands, as usually other Havens are in the Indian winter: of great trading, much splendour, and a temperate a●●. Faithful unto the last to the Crown of Pegu, to the Kings whereof their own were subjects and in that constancy they twice repulsed the king of Siam who then had conquered the most part of the Kingdom of Pegu. Angry whereat, the Siamite caused two of his cowardly Captains to be cast into a cauldron of scalding oil: and at the third assault became master of it. Bannalaius the old King hereof (99 years old) with his heir apparent, and 200000 of his Subjects, being compelled to hide themselves in the woods and Deserts.  
5. PEGV, the most predominant Kingdom, lieth like a Crescent or halfmoon on the Gulf of Bengala; extending on that coast from Negrais unto Tavan the next Town of Siam, for the space of three hundred miles, and upwards; but little less in breadth, if not quite as much. So called from the River Pegu, which runs thorough the midst of it, and gives this name also unto Pegu the most noted City.  
The Soil hereof exceeding fruitful, by reason of the annual overflowings of the River, which do yearly fatten it, fit to bear wheat, and of Rice yielding an incredible quantity. It affordeth also many Rubies, great numbers of Civet-Cats, plenty of ●●cca, (a Gum there made by Ants, as here Bees make wax) store of Elephants, and abundance of Parats which speak plainer, and are much fairer than in any place else.  
The people of a mean stature, somewhat corpulent, and naturally beardless. If any straggling hair thrust forth, they always carry Pincers with them, to pull them out. Nimble and strong, but yet not very fit for war; spending too much of their strength in the love of women, to which most passionably addicted. They black their teeth, because they say that dogs teeth be white: and wear no clothes but on their heads and about their nakedness. Said by the Jews to be descended from some of the Tribes of Israel confined hither by Solomon: but by the Peguans themselves, to be begotten of a dog and a China woman, which were saved here upon a Shipwreck. By Religion for the most part Gentiles, imagining innumerable worlds one after another, and a determinate number of Gods for every world: more Orthodox in assigning after this life according to the merits of the party deceased, one place of Torments, and another of Delights and pleasures, if they had not added a third also for satisfaction.  
Chief Cities of this Kingdom, 1. Cousin, seated in a Territory full of Woods, as those Woods of Tigers, Wild Boars, Apes, and Parats: the houses made of Canes, which serve here for timber, (some of them being as big as Hogsheads) covered over with thatch. 2. Joccabel, a great City, on the River Pegu. 3. Diana, on the same River also, where they make Barks or Vessels as big as Galleasses; which serve both for trade and liabitation. 4. Coilan, a City foursquare, and each square four miles. 5. Lanagon, a pleasant Town, and full of Palm-trees. 6. Dala, in which were the King's Stables for his ordinary Elephants: his four White Elephants (for so many he had) being always kept about the Court, not seen abroad but in great solemnities, when trapped in furnitures of Gold, and no less honoured by the people, than the King himself: called therefore King of the White Elephant by the neighbouring Princes. 7. Silvanpede, where many victualling Barks are made to serve for dwelling on the Sea. 8. Meucao, where they use to unload such goods as are to pass by Land to Pegu. Neighboured by the strongest Castle in all this Kingdom, and therefore chosen by the King for his place of Retreat, when distressed by the Kings of Arrachan; and Tangu. To the last of which making choice to yield up his person, with his Wife and Children, because he had married him to his Sister, he was by him perfidiously and basely murdered. 9 Siriangh, a strong piece on the mouth of the River, given by the King of Arrachan; to the Portugals, and by them committed to the keeping of Philip de Britto, in the year one thousand six hundred, or thereabouts. Who having made it good against him, and the King of Tangu his Associate, for the space of thirteen years together; was at last forced to yield himself prisoner to the King of Av●, by whom cruelly tortured on a spit. 10. Pegu, the glory of these parts, great, strong, and beautiful; Divided into two Towns, the Old and the New; the Old, inhabited by Merchants, the New, by the King and his Nobility. The houses made of wood, but covered with Tiles; a Coco-Tree before every house, yielding a comfortable shade, and a pleasant show. The Steetes as straight as any line, and so broad that ten or twelve men may ride abrest in the narrowest of them. In figure square, each square having five Gates, besides many Turrets; all of them beautifully gilded. The whole well walled with walls of stone, environed on all sides with great Datches; and in the midst the Royal Palace, walled and ditched about, most sumptuously gilded; but specially the Temple or Idol-chapel, the walls whereof were hid with Gold, the Roof tiled with Silver.  
In this magnificent Palace lived the Peguan Kings, in as much pomp and pleasure as the world could yield: his empire not extending only over these kingdoms now described, but over all the Provinces or kingdoms of the Bramane also; which he governed by his several Vice-Roys, or rather TRIBUTARY kings. A happiness too great to continue long. For in the year 1567. the Viceroy or Tributary king of Tangu, by the aid of his faction, and reputation of his virtues, entered into rebellion, and slaying the Nobles of the Land, usurped that kingdom. After this he subdued the Cities and kingdoms of Calam, Melintay, Prom, Miranda, and Ava, inhabited all of them by the Brames or Bramanes; and therefore taking to himself the title of king of Brama, because his fame and fortunes took their rise from his victories over them. Following the course of his Successes, he first assailed the Cities of Odia, and Siam, but repulsed with loss. To make amends for which misfortune, he beleaguered Pegu, and subdued it; and by the reputation which he got in that action, returning to the siege of Siam, had it yielded to him. Dying he gave the kingdom of Ava unto one of his Brothers; that of Peam to one of his grandsonnes; the kingdom of Jangoma to a younger son, but born after the time of his obtaining the Crown of Pegu; and finally that of Pegu, with the Sovereignty over all the rest, to his eldest son, a Prince of vicious and tyrannical nature; and not more cruel to his subjects, than they disobedient to him. Whereupon preparations are made on both sides, the people to defend their liberty, the King to preserve his Royalty. During these civil discords, the titulary king of Stam, whose late overthrow was not yet fully digested, came violently into the Country of Pegu; burning Corn, Grass, and Fruits; killing man, woman, and child, and having satisfied his Fury, returned to his home. This spoil of the fruits of the Earth, was but a prologue to an unsupportable famine, which consumed all the inhabitants of this flourishing kingdom, except such whom the Granaries of the City of Pegu preserved, Anno 1598. For here the Fathers devoured their Children, the stronger preyed upon the weaker; not only devouring their more fleshy parts, but their entrails also: nay they broke up the skulls of such as they had slain, and sucked out their brains. This calamity incited another Tributary Prince of Tangu, to make his best advantage out of his neighbour's affliction; though made his Brother-in-Law, and advanced to great honours by his Father. For justly fearing the displeasure of his angry Prince, to whose aid he had refused to come, when sent for by him, he joined himself with the king of Arrahan, besieged his Lord and Sovereign in the Fort of Meccao. Brought to extremities, the unfortunate Prince, thought best to put himself into the hands of his brother of Tangu; who assaulted and entered Pegu, where he found as much treasure as 600 Elephants, and as many horses, could conveniently carry away. This havoc being made, he villainously murdered the King, Queen and their Children, and departed; leaving the gleaning of his spoil to the King of Arrachan: who, Anno 1600, was expelled by the King of Siam, who enjoyed it not long. For the King of Barma having with an Army of an hundred thousand fight men, and forty thousand Elephants, subdued the Kingdoms of Macin, and Arrachan, followed the currents of his Victories; conquered Siam, drove the king thereof from PEGV, where he hath built a most Magnificent Palace: and is now the sole Monarch of the twelve kingdoms of this India.  
A more particular relation of this King, and his new-settled Estate, we cannot yet understand: what his Revenues are, what his Government, what his Forces. Merchants, whose inquisitiveness into the State-Matters of other Princes, is dangerous to their trading, cannot give us any full satisfaction: Scholars and Statists are not permitted to observe; and such of the Natives as could give us the most light, are not suffered to travel. Only we may conjecture by the great Wealth of those several Princes, and the vast Armies by them raised in their several Territories, that his Annual Revenues, Casualties, and united Forces must be almost infinite.   
And so much for INDIA.   

OF THE ORIENTAL LANDS.  
THE ORIENTAL LANDS, so called from their situation in the Oriental or Eastern Seas, may be divided into the Lands of 1. Japan, 2. the Philippinae, 3. the Isles of Bantam, 4. the Moluccoes, 5. those called Sinde, or the Celebes, 6. Java, 7. Borneo, 8. Sumatra, 9 Ceilan, and 10. certain others of less note.  

1. JAPAN.  
JAPAN is an aggregate body of many Lands, separated by small Gulfs, straits, and turnings of the Sea, but taking name from Japan, the chief of all. Some reckon them to be 66. in all; others ascribe that number to so many Kingdoms into which these Lands (be they in number more or less) use to be divided. But whatsoever the number be (the certainty whereof I can no where find) there are three only of account, to which the several petit Kingdoms are now reduced: that is to say, 1. Japan specially so called, which containeth 53 Kingdoms; of which 26 are under the King of Meace, 12 under the King of Amagunce, the other 15 under other Princes of inferior note. II. Ximo, which containeth in it nine Realms, the principal whereof are those of Bungo and Figen. III. Xicoum, which comprehendeth four only of these petit Signeuries.  
JAPAN, the chief of all these Lands, to which the residue may be accounted of but as Appurtenances, is situate over against the straits of Anian, towards which it looketh to the North: distant from New Spain on the East 150 leagues, or 450 English miles; and 60 leagues from Cantan a Province of China, opposite to it on the West. On the South it hath the vast Ocean, and those infinite shoals of Lands which are called the Phillippinae, and the Isle's neighbouring upon them. Extending in length from West to the East 200 leagues, but the breadth not proportionable thereunto: in some places not above ten leagues over, and in the broadest parts but thirty.  
The Country mountainous and barren, but of a very healthy air, if not too much subject unto cold, yet in some places they have Wheat ripe in the month of May; but their Rice, which is their principal sustenance, they gather not before September. The surface of the Earth, clothed with woods and forests, in which some Cedars of so tall and large a body, that one of them only is sufficient to make a Pillar for a Church: the bowels of it stored with divers metals, and amongst others with such inexhausible mines of gold, that Paulus Venetus reporteth some of the Palaces of their Kings to be covered in this time with sheets of gold, as ours in Europe are with lead. But I find no such matter in our latter travellers. Their Fields and Meadows full of cattle, but hitherto not made acquainted with the making of Butter; their Fens much visited by wild-Ducks, as their house yards with Pigeons, Turtles, Quails, and pullen.  
The People for the most part of good understanding, apt to learn, and of able memories; cunning and subtle in their dealings. Of body vigorous and strong, accustomed to bear Arms until 60 years old. Their complexion of an Olive-Colour, their beards thin, and the one half of the hair of their heads shaved off. Patient they are of pain, ambitious of glory, uncapable of suffering wrong, but can withal dissemble their resentments of it till opportunity of revenge. They reproach no man for his poverty, so it come not by his own unthrifciness, for which cause they detest all kinds of gaming, as the ways of ill-husbandry; and generally abhor standering, these, and swearing. Their mourning commonly is in white, as their feasts in black; their teeth they colour black also to make them beautiful; they mount on the right side of the horse, and sit, (as we are used to rise) when they entertain. In Physic they eat salt things, sharp, and raw; and in their salutations they put off their shoes. The very Antipodes of our world in customs, though not in site: and the true type or Figure of the old English Puritan, opposite to the Papist in things fit and decent, though made ridiculous many times by that opposition. In other things they do much resemble those of China, if not the more ceremonious of the two: washing their infant-childrens in the nearest River, as soon as born; and putting off their shoes when they go to meat.  
The people have but one Language, but that so intermingled with the words of others nations, that it seems rather to be many languages than one. They have long used the Art of printing, which probably enough they might have from China: the Characters whereof are a kind of Brachygraphy, and signify not only letters, but some whole words also. In matter of Religion, Gentiles, adoring anciently the Sun, Moon, and the Stars of Heaven, and giving divine honour to wild beasts, and the Stags of the Forests: but specially worshipping some of their deceased Priests and Princes, by the names of Fotoques, and 〈◊〉 the first of which they use to pray for goods of the other world, and to the last for Temporal blessings. The●● Priests they call by the name of Bonzes, settled in goodly Conven●s, and endowed with very large Revenues: who though divided into eleven different (if not contrary) Sects, do well enough agree in denying the providence of God, and the immortality of the soul. Of late times by the care and diligence of the 〈◊〉 Christianity hath begun to take footing here; whether with such a large increase as their letters, called Epistolae Japanicae, have been pleased to tell us, I am somewhat doubtful. They tell us there of some Kings of these Lands whom they have converted and baptised; that within 50 miles of 〈◊〉 they had 50 Churches, 200 at the least in all, that in the year 1587. the number of their Converts was two hundred thousand. Of this, if the one half be but true, we have great cause to praise God for it, and to give them the commendation of their pains and industry: not letting pass the memory of the first 〈◊〉 who was Father Xavier, one of the first foundation of this Society, (employed in this 〈◊〉 by Ign●t●●s, the first founder of it) who landed here about the year 1556.  
Rivers of note I find not any, though the Island be generally well-watered: more memorable for two mountains in it, than for all the Rivers. One of which called Fig●noiama, is said to transcend the clouds in height; the other (but without a name) useth to cast forth dreadful flames, like Stcilian Aetna; on the top whereof the Devil environed with a white and shining cloud, doth sometimes show himself unto such of his 〈◊〉 as live about this hill an abstemious life, like the ancient Hermits.  
Chief Cities of the whole Lands, 1. Meaco, seated in Japan, and the chief of that Island, formerly 21 miles in compass, but now by reason of their wars, scarce a third part of it. The ordinary residence of the 〈◊〉 or three principal Magistrates, which sway the affairs of all these Lands: o● whom the first entitled 〈◊〉 hath the chief care in sacred matters; the 2d named Voo, doth preside in Civil; and the third called 〈◊〉 manageth the concernments of Peace and War. At this time it is used for the common E●p●●y of the trade of 〈◊〉 that people not permitting Merchants to come amongst them, but bringing to this place their merchandise, as the common Staple, where they are sure to meet with Chapmen to buy it of them. 2. Ossacay, a great and renowned City, conceived to be the richest in all the East; of so great trade, that every ordinary merchant is said to be worth 30000 Crowns. 3. 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 at the foot of the i'll so called, and about nine miles from Meaco. An University of the B●nze●, for whose convenience and study, one of the Kings of Japan is said to have founded in this Town, and about that mountain, 3800 Convents, and to endow it with the third part of the Revenues of the Kingdom of Vorn. These Colleges or Convents now reduced to 800 only: but still the University of such same and credit, that they give not the command or government of it unto any but the King's son, or his nearest kinsman. 4. Bano●m, another of their Universities, where they give degrees; affirmed to be as big as Paris. 5. Bongo, the chief of all that Province; in which the Jesuits have a College; the Japonues learn the Portugal language, and the Europaeans that of Japan. 6. Coia, the sepulture of their Princes, or of some part of them: it being anciently ordained, that if their whole bodies be not here interred, they must at least send one of their teeth. 7. Fiongo, about 18. leagues from Meaco, the subject of many great misfortunes. Destroyed in part by Nabunanga one of the Kings of this Island, who lived Anno 1550: that which he left, terribly shattered by an Earthquake Anno 1596. most of the ruins of it since consumed by fire. 8. Amangasaqui, five leagues from the Sea. 9 Surungo, as big as London with the Suburbs. 10 Ed●o, a much fairer than that, and the chief Seat of one of their Kings. 11. Firando, a seat-royal also of some other King, where, in the year 1613. there was a Factory established for the English Merchants. 12. Ochinofamanus, one of their most noted Havens. 13. Tosa, or 〈◊〉 giving name to one of the Lands.  
These Lands utterly unknown to the Ancients, were first discovered by Antonio Mota, a Portugal, in the year 1542. I know Mercator taketh it for the Aure● Chersonesus spoken of by Ptolemy; and I cannot choose but wonder at it. The situation of it so far distant from that of the Chersonese, that either Mercator must be grossly out in his conjecture; or Ptolemy as much mistaken in his informations; which no man hitherto can justly accuse him of. But passing by the improbability of Mercators' fancy, we are to know, that in former times these Lands were subject to one Prince, whom they obeyed and reverenced with great affection: which government continued, as themselves report, 1600 years in great State and Majesty. But in the end, the Dairi, (so they call their King) addicting himself wholly unto pleasures, and laying the burden of Government upon other men's shoulders, his Deputies or inferior Officers usurped Rega● power, plumed themselves with Eagles feathers, used in their styles the name of Jucatas, or Kings; and in a word, left nothing but the name of Dairi, to their Lord and Sovereign. His issue to this day do enjoy that title, and but little else: the Princes bordering on Meac●, once his Royal seat, hardly allowing him sufficient means to find himself victual and Apparel; but otherwise befooling him with as glorious titles, as if he were possessed still of his ancient power. Only they let him execute the place of an Harald, in giving Arms, and selling dignities and honours; which brings him in the greatest profit he hath to trust to. Of all these Kings, he which can make himself Lord of Coquinai (which are the five Realms about Meaco) is called Prince of Tenza, and esteemed Sovereign of the rest. Which height of dignity Nabunanga before mentioned, in his time attained to; after him Faxiba, and since him Taicosuma: that sovereignty being now in a likely way to become hereditary. For Faxiba having brought under his command most of these small Kingdoms, transported the vanquished Kings, and the chief of their Nobles, out of one Country into another: to the end that being removed out of their own Realms, and amongst strange subjects, they should remain without means to revolt against him. A merciful and prudent course. Having reduced into his power at least 50 of these petit Kingdoms, he divided the greatest part of the conquered territories. amongst his own faithful friends and followers: binding them to supply him with certain numbers of men upon all occasions. By which, and other politic courses, he so settled himself in those estates, that Taicosuma his son succeeded without opposition, who had he lived would have abolished the vain title of the Dairis; or took it to himself as he had the power; solicited thereto by the King of 〈◊〉 But dying in or about the year 1607. Fere●sama his son succeeded; and may be still alive for aught I can learn.  
What the Revenues of this King are, it is hard to say. I guess them to be very great, in regard he maketh two millions of Crowns yearly, of the very Rice which he reserveth to himself from his own demeasns. The store of Gold, and precious stones which these Islands yield, being wholly his, must needs add much unto his Coffers. And for his power, it is said that Faxiba was able to raise so good an Army out of the estates demised by him to his faithful followers; that he resolved once on the conquest of China and to that end had caused timber to be felled for 2000 vessels for the transporting of his Army. And had he lived a little longer, 'tis probable enough he might have shaken that great Kingdom, the 〈◊〉 being so much the better Soldiers, that a small party of them would defeat a good Army of 〈◊〉 The fear whereof made the King of China after his decease correspond so fairly with his Successor.  
Adjoining to Japan, betwixt it and China, lieth the Island of COREA, extended in length from North to South: the people whereof being distressed by the Japonites, called in the Chinese, by whom delivered from their Enemies, and restored to liberty, as before was noted.   

2. PHILIPPINAE.  
South of Japan, lieth a great fry of Islands which are now called PHILIPPINAE in honour of Philip the second, King of Spain, in whose time discovered by Legaspi a Spanish Captain, 〈◊〉 1564. Strangely mistaken by Mercator for the Barussae of Ptolemy, those being placed by him in the bottom of the Gulf of Bengali, five degrees South of the Aequator; these sicuate on the East of China, ●● 13 or 14 degrees of Northern Latitude: those being only five in number, these reckoned at above ten thousand.  
The Air in all of them generally very mild and temperate, especially in the midland parts; that on the shores, somewhat inclining unto heat. The soil abundantly fruitful of all commodities both for necessity, and delights; that is to say, Rice, Pulse, Wax, Honey, Sugar Canes, many pleasant fruits, the fairest Figs of all the world, plenty of fish, variety of Birds and Beasts, as well wild as tame, great store of Cotton Wool, some Mines of Gold, and of other metals great abundance.  
Of all these Islands there are only forty in possession of the King of Spain, belonging properly to A●ia, but by him placed under the Government of New Spain in America, because discovered by 〈◊〉 at the instigation or procurement of Don Lewis de Velasco, who was then Viceroy of that Province. In these 40 Lands there are thought to be at the least a million of people subject to that Crown; many of which have been converted by the Friars and Jesuits unto Christianity. Of these the principal in account are, 1. LUSSON, affirmed to contain in compass 1000 miles; beautified by the Spaniards with a fair City, seated on a commodious Haven, which they call Manilla, in which resides the Deputy or Lieutenant Governor for all these Lands; and the bishop of the Philippines for ordering all affairs of those Churches. II. MINDANAO, 380 Leagues in compass; in which are many good Towns, as 1. 〈◊〉 2. Pavadoes, 3 Subut, 4. Dapiro, and some others. III. TANDAIR, more fruitful than any of the rest, and of good extent, 160 Leagues in circuit; more specially called Philippina, because first discovered, and so named. IV. PALOHAN, as much mistaken by Mercator for the Bazacata of Ptolemy.  
These, with the rest, subject in former times to the Kings of China, till they did voluntarily abandon them, and confine their Empire within the Continent. On this relinquishment the people fell into Civ●● wars, every man getting what he could for himself, and the stronger preying on the weaker: which factions and divisions gave great help to the Spaniard in the conquest of those few which are under their power. Lands of more importance to the Spaniards, than is commonly thought: and therefore furnished by them at their first plantations, with Bulls, Kine, Horses, and Mares, which before they wanted, and do now reasonably abound with. For besides the abundance of victuals, and some plenty of Gold which they find therein, the situation is very fit to subdue the rest of the neighbouring Lands; to settle the commerce betwixt China and Mexico; to bring on a continual trade betwixt the Lands of this Sea, and those of America; and finally to prevent the Moors or Arabians from planting their Mahometanism any further Eastwards.  
Not far from these, on the South of Japan bending towards the west, is another great heap of Rocks and Lands. Some of them rich in Gold, and furnished with very choice fruits, and other necessaries, and peopled with a stout and warlike breed of men, well skilled in Archery. The chief whereof have the names of 1. Lequin Major, 2. Lequin Minor, 3. Hermosa, 4. Reix Magos, etc. of which little memorable. And not far off those called 5. Ciumbabon, in which is said to be a Plantanimal, or sensible tree, and 6. Matban, unfortunately remarkable for the death of Magellanus, slain there in a battle with the Natives.   

3. The Isles of BANDAN.  
THe Isles of BANDAN are in number seven, that is to say 1. Mira, 2. Rosalargium, 3. A●●, 4. Rome, 5. Nerra, 6 Ganuape, the least of all, continually burning, and for that cause deserted of its inhabitants, and 7. Bandan, bigger than any of the rest, and therefore giving name to all. Situate South of the Philippines, in the seventh degree of Southern Latitude. More fruitful of Nutmegs, than any other of all these parts, for which cause never without the concourse of foreign Merchants from Java, Malaca, and China; and of late times from these Northern Countries of Europe also. Where by the way, the Nutmeg-tree is like a Peach or Peach-tree, the innermost part where of is the Nutmeg itself, covered over with a thin film or coat, which we call by the Arabian name of Mac●z or Mace; and over that the fruit itself, as it is in Peaches, Malacotons,, and such fruits as those.  
The people barbarous and rude, slothful, of weak bodies, and dull of wit; living contusedly together without rule or order. Some of them still continue in their ancient Paganism; but the greatest part are thought to be Mahometans, in which Religion very zealous, and so devout that they will not go unto their work or worldly businesses, till they have visited the M●squits, and there done their devotions. A shame or Pattern shall I say in this, unto many Christians. All of them bloody and revengeful, but yet so far from wronging the body of a dead Enemy, that they use to bury it with sweet odours.  
Some Towns they have, of which the principal, 1. Nera, and 2. Lontoor, joined in a league against the rest; the quarrel rising from the cutting down of certain trees, proceeding to the butchery of one another, and ending in the loss of their common liberty. Subject in show to the King of Botone one of the Moluccoes; but too much at their own disposing They had not else entered into quarrels with one another. Which opportunity being taken by the watchful Hollanders, they did not only settle four Faatories there; but for the security of their trade, and to awe the Natives, they have built three Forts. They had also turned one of their Mesquits to a Fortress. Whereat the people were so incensed that they promised liberty to their Slaves, to get them out of i●: who falling desperately on fired it over their heads, and killed every man of them. The English Merchants have some trading also in these Lands, more acceptable than the other, because not so insolent.  
There is not far off another Island, not in this account, called Timor, situate in the tenth degree of Southern Latitude; the chief of many little Lands which lie round about it; but not else observable, except it be for that abundance of Sanders both white and yellow, which growing there, is greedily exchanged by the Inhabiants for I●on, Hatchets, Swords, Knives, and the like commodities.   

4. The MOLUCCOES.  
THe MOLUCCOES are in number many, the King of Terenate which is one of them, being said to have dominion over 70 Lands; but the determinate number of them I do no where find. Situate on both sides of the Aequator, and consequently of an hot and intemperate air: the soil so dry and spongious, that it sucketh up the greatest shewr of Rain that doth fall amongst them, before it can pass into the Sea. Not very well furnished with necessaries for the life of man; but that defect supplied with the abundance of Spices which are growing here, Cinnamon, Ginger, Nutmegs, Mastic, Aloes, Pepper, and the like commodities, for which the Merchants bring them all things that the Country wants. But 'tis the Clove, which is the great Riches of these Lands, and peculiar in a manner to them. A spice, which groweth on Trees like Bay-trees, yielding blossoms, first white, then green (at which time they yield the pleasantest smell in the world) and last of all Red and hard, which are the Cloves. Of nature so extreme hot, that if a Pail of water should only stand in the Room in which they are cleansed and sorted, the Cloves in two days would dry it up. Of which nature the unspun silks of China are affirmed to be.  
The people for the most part Idolaters, intermixed with some Mahometans dwelling on the shores, and of late times with Christians in their several factories. Of several Originals, and different languages, but all in general fraudulent, perfidious, treacherous, inhuman, and of noted wickedness. Few of them clothed, nor much caring to hide their shame; Not civilised by the cohabitation of more modest and civil Nations. Pity such ill conditions should be lodged in such handsome bodies: the people being said to be better proportioned than the other Indians; and for strength and valour not followed by any of them.  
Of all the Lands which pass under this name, there are not above five or six of any reckoning: that is to say, 1. Terenate. 2. Tidor. 3. Macir. 4. Rachian. 5. Machian, and 6. Botone: none of them above six leagues in compass, many not so much; the whole cluster of them thronged together in a girdle of no more than 25 leagues in the Circumference. Some reckon Polerone amongst them, a little Island not far off (if not one of the number) and well stored with Cloves. Frequented first by the English Merchants, from them taken by the insolent and ingrateful Hollanders: who being to restore it upon composition, cut down all the Clove-trees, so to deprive the English of the benefit of it.  
Of the rest, Re●hian, and Tidore have their proper Kings; So hath Botone also, if that be one of them, the King whereof had anciently some title and authority over those of Bandan. Macir, and Mach●●n, are subject to the King of Ternate, who is a Mahometan in Religion, and said to be the Lord of 70 Lands. This the most puissant member of this scattered body; and for that cause most aimed at by all Competitors: the Spaniards having here one Fortress, and the Hollanders three: both nations hated by the Natives, whom they consume and waste in the wa●es betwixt them; but of the two, the Spaniard looked on by the people as the more Gentleman; the other stomached and despised for their sordid dealings. Nothing else memorable in the story or chorography of them, but that they were discovered by the conduct of Magellanus, in the reign of Charles the fifth, who employed him in it, Anno 1519. And that there is in Ternate a prodigious mountain, in height above the clouds of the Air, and in nature agreeing with the Element of fire, which it seems to mount to: huge flames whereof, with dreadful thunders, and a dark smoke, it sends forth continually.   

5 The SINDAE or SELEBES.  
Near the Moluccoes, and almost intermingled with them, are a set of Lands which Ptolemy calleth SINDAE, and the Moderns, SELEBES, many in tale, but not above four of any weight, that is to say, 1. SELEBES. 2. Gilolo, 3. Amboina. 4. Macasser, of which the two first are situate under the Aequator, and the last somewhat on the South of it: all of them in the time of Ptolemy inhabited by Anthropophagis, and a long time after; insomuch as the Kings of the Moluccoes, did use to send their condemned persons into these Lands, there to be devoured. Which said in general, we will take a more particular view of them as they lie before us.  
1. SELEBES, which gives name to the rest, and hath under it many lesser Lands, is large and rich. The foil thereof exceeding fertile, the people tall and comely, and of colour, not so much black, as ruddy. Much given to Piracy, and all Idolaters till of late. Governed by many Kings or petit Princes, the cause of much contention, and many quarrels: three of which are said to have been converted to Christianity, and for that cause much hated by their heathenish Subjects, who thereupon rebelled against them. It is situate West of the Moluccos, and hath therein a Town called Zion, honoured with the abode of one of their Christian Kings: but possibly not so called until their conversion; the proper name thereof being Cian. 2. Nibon, in the South, and 3. Terolli, in the North parts of it.  
2. GILOLO, called also ●atachina, is one of those Islands, which our late Navigators include under the name of Del Mor. Of large extent, conceived to be half as big as Italy. By that account (the truth whereof I do very much doubt) greater than Ze●lan is in compass, though of less reputation: that being governed by its own Princes, this subject for the most part to the king of Ternate. Situate East of the Moluccos, exceeding plentiful of Rice, well stored with wild hens, and on the shores provided of a kind of Shellfish, which in taste much resembleth mutton. A tree they have which they call by the name of Sag●●, of the pith whereof they make their bread, and of the sap or juice of it they compose a pleasing drink which serveth them instead of wine. The air intemperately hot; the people well proportioned, but rude and savage; some of them Gentiles, some Malome●ans, of which last Religion is their king. The chief Town of it is Batchame or Batachina, (whence the new name unto the Island) in which the Hollanders have a Fort to defend their Factory.  
3. AMBOINA, South of the Aequator, and the third of the Sinda, hath many Lands of less note which depend upon it, and do communicate in the name. In compass about five hundred miles, said by Maginus to be extremely rough and barren; which must be understood with reference to some kinds of grain. For otherwise it is very fertile, abundantly productive of Rice, Citrons, Lemons, Oranges, Coquo-nuts, Sugarcanes, and other fruits; and very plentiful of Cloves. Which last, as it makes some to reckon it amongst the Moluccos, so may it be the reason why the Island is defective in such fruits as require much moisture: the Clove being of so hot a temper, as before was noted, that it draweth to it all the moisture of the Earth which is near unto it.  
The people much given to Piracy, wherewith they do infest all the neighbouring Lands. Defamed for Cannibals, or man-caters: it being here a constant custom, that when their parents are grown old, or sick of any incurable disease, they give them unto one another to be eaten by them. They have one Town of more note than other, which they call Amboyna, by the name of the Island. First taken by the Portugals, and by them secured with a strong fortress: during whose power here, the Jesuits who had in it their several Residences converted many to Christianity. But in the year 1605. the Island and the Fort both were conquered by Stephen of Hagan for the States of the united Provinces: who having cleared the Country of the Portugal Forces, possessed themselves of it. Received by the natives at their first coming with joy and triumphs: but they got little by the change, as they found soon after; their new Masters being more burden some and unsufferable than the old had been. For claiming in the right of conquest, they think they may oppress the Natives by the law of Arms, and engross all trade unto themselves as the true Proprietaries. Infamous even amongst the rude and savage Indians for their barbarous inhumanity executed upon some of the English (the greatest Patrons under God which they have in the world) whom in the year 1618. they most cruelly tortured, and most wickedly murdered, under colour of some plot to betray their Fortress: but in plain truth for no other reason but because they were more beloved by the Inhabitants, and began to gain upon their trade.  
4. West of Amboina, and South-west of Celebes, lieth the 4th of these Lands called MACASSAR, said to contain from East to West 600 miles; plentiful of Rice, Flesh, Fish, Salt, and Cotton-wool; not destitute of Gold and Pearls, and well stored with Sanders (Sandalum it is called in Latin) a medicinal wood, growing like a Nut-tree: of several colours, white, red, yellow, but the red, the best: the fruit in making, like a Cherry, but of no esteem. In some parts overgrown with woods, in which certain fiery Flies make nightly such shining light, as if every twig or bough were a burning Candle. In the middle covered with high Mountains, out of which flow many navigable Rivers.  
The people for the most part Gentiles, intermixed on the Seacoasts with some Mahometans. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Senderem, the King's Seat, situate near a large Lake, very commodiously for traffic. 2. Macassar, an English factory, so called according to the name of the Island.  
Near to these Islands, and somewhat North to Battachina are some other Isles, plentiful of all things necessary for the life of man, but inhabited by a thievish and Piratical people: the principal of which, 1. Terrao, 2. Sanguine, 3. Solor, 4. Moratay, in which last they eat Battata Roots instead of bread, besides some others of less note, Most of the People Gentiles, except those of Sangum, the King whereof being gained to the Christian Faith, by some of the Jesuits, hath brought many of his subjects to the same Religion.   

6. BORNEO.  
WEst of these Celebes, lieth BORNEO, of more note and greatness, than any hitherto described in these Indian Seas. In compass after their account who speak most sparingly, 2200 miles; but as some say no less than three month's sail about. Situate under the Aequator, which parteth the dominions of the King of Borneo, and the King of Laus: opposite on the North, to Camboia; on the South, to Java; on the East, to Celebes; on the West, unto the Isle of Sumatra.  
The Country said to be provided naturally of all things necessary; yet said withal to be unfurnished of Asses, Oxen, herds of cattle, except only horses, and those but of small stature neither: the greatest riches of it being Camphire, Ag●trick, and some mines of Adamants. Erroneously conceived by Mercator to be the Insula bonae Fortunae spoken of by Ptolemy; that being seated opposite to the outlets of Ganges, in the Latitude of a hundred forty five Degrees, and fifteen minutes; this Eastward some Degrees of the Golden Chersonese, and consequently twenty degrees Distant at the least from that Island in Ptolemy.  
The people generally more white than the rest of the Indians, of good wits, and approved integrity, though all Mahometans or Gentiles. Divided betwixt two Kings, and two Religions; the King of Borneo and his Subjects being all Mahometans; those of Laus still remaining in their ancient Gentilisim. These think the Sun and Moon to be man and wife, and the Stars their children; ascribing to each of them divine honours, to the Sun especially, whom they salute at his first rising with great Reverence, saying certain verses. Their public businesses are treated of commonly in the night, at which time the Counsellors of State meet, and ascend some tree, viewing the Heavens till the Moon rise, and then go to the Senate-house. The same Apparel generally of both Religions; but thin, by reason of the great heat of the Air, a shirt of Silk, or of Calicut, or some such slight stuff, worn more for modesty than for warmth.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1. Borneo, situate in the Northwest part of the Island near a goodly bay, but in the middle of the Fens like the City of Venice; and seated as that is, on Piles, the building sumptuous, of hewed stone, covered with the leaves of the Co●●-tree. The Town so large as to contain 25000 Houses in the smallest reckoning, the principal of all the Island, which takes name from hence. 2. Cabura. 3. Taiaopura. 4. Tamaoratas. 5. Malano; all of them noted for fair Cities, or commodious Havens. 6. Sagadana, a Factory of English. 7. Lavi, on a large Bay in the Southeast part of the Island, the ordinary Seat of the King of Laus. 8. Paro, on another capacious Bay, not far from Lavi, and directly opposite to Borneo: that being seated on the Northwest, and this on the Southeast of the Island. Betwixt these two Kings is the whole divided; but so that he of Borneo hath the greatest part of it, and therefore keeps the greater State: not to be spoken with but by the mouth of some of his own Interpreters; and in his Palace served by no other Attendants than Maids or Women.   

7. JAVA.  
OPposite to Borneo towards the South lie the Isles of JAVA, two in number; both situate South of the Aequator, both of great Circumference, and commonly distinguished into Major and Minor, or the Greater and the Lesser Java.  
1. JAVA-MAJOR, the more Northward of the two, and by much the bigger, is said to be in compass 3000 miles, and that by them who elsewhere reckon Borneo for the biggest of these Seas. But the truth is, that the South-parts of this Island not being perfectly discovered make the ameasurement thereof to be very uncertain. Conceived most probably to be the Jabadiu of Ptolemy, the most Northern part whereof is placed by him in the 8th Degree of Southern Latitude: said by him to afford much gold and silver, to be exceeding fruitful of all other necessaries; and finally that the name did signify 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or the Island of Barley. All which agreeth punctually with the present Island, the word, Jabad signifying a kind of grain much like our Barley, and Diu in the Persian and Indian tongues signifying an Island. And so in Jabadiu, we have found the Island of java, the mutation of B. into V. being very ordinary.  
Then for the riches and fertility of it, it is said to yield great plenty of fruits, and come, but of Rice especially; flesh of all sorts, salted and sent from hence into other Countries; great store of fowl, both wild and tame; plenty of gold, some precious Stones, and the best kind of brass; silks in abundance, and great quantities of pepper, ginger, Cinnamon, and some other spices. In a word so befriended by the bounty of nature, that Scaliger calleth it Epitome Mundi, or the whole World contracted in a lesser Volume, But withal it is much exposed unto storms and tempests, from which seldom free.  
The people of a middle Stature, corpulent, and of broad faces, most of them naked or covered only with a slight silken stuff, and that no lower than the knee: accounted the most Civil people of all the Indians, as fetching their descent from China: but withal treacherous, very proud, much given to lying, and very careless of their words, to which so used, that they count it not amongst their Faults. And therefore when a king of theirs had broke promise with the Hollanders, and was challenged for it, he answered that his tongue was not made of bone. Cruel they are also said to be, and implacable, if once offended: accustomed of old to eat the bodies of their friends: accounting no burial so honourable; nor obsequy, so applausive. This also a custom amongst many of the rest of the Indians, and so hath been ever since the beginning of the Persian Monarchy. Herodoius reporteth how Darius Hystaspis understanding of this custom, and withal knowing how the Grecians use to burn their dead; sent to the Greeks, that it was his pleasure they should eat the bodies of their dead: But they used all means of persuasion and entreaty, not to be forced to so brutish and barbarous a custom. Then commanded he the Indians, to conform themselves to the fashion of the Grecians; but they all more abhorred to burn the dead, than the Greeks did to eat them. So impossible is it for a custom either to be suddenly left off, or to seem undecent and inconvenient, if once thoroughly settled.  
In matter of Religion they are all Mahometans or Gentiles, according to the fancy of their several Kings, whereof in this Island there are very many, one for every great Tribe, or more powerful Family. Zealous in their Religion which soever it be, as appears by the sad story of the daughter of the King of Ballambua, murdered by her husband the King of Passarva, the second night after her wedding, with all her Attendants, because they would not be Mahometans, which was his Religion. Yet in some common Principles they agree well enough, punishing Adulery with death; in which case the woman chooseth her nearest kinsman for her Executioner: but otherwise spending day and night in much sloth and dalliance. Of the two, Gentilism is the mo●e diffused, because most ancient; the Sect of Mahomet not being introduced till the year 1560. though of a very swift growth, and of a great increase for so short a time.  
Their chief Towns, 1. Pa●aruaan, near a burning hill, which in the year 1586. break forth exceedingly, oppressed infinite numbers of men, and cast great stones into the City for three days together. 2. ●●ctam, a Town of 1000 Households, the Inhabitants whereof are Gentiles, and have their Temples in the Woods: the Chief-Priest of whose superstition hath his dwelling here, of great authority and power over all the Island. 3. Ballambua, 4. Passarva, 5. Taban, 6. Matara, 7. Daum●, 8. Taggal, 9 Surrabaia, 10. Catabaon; the Seats of so many of their Kings; some of them also furnished of convenient Havens. 11 BANIAM, the seat also of a King, but of most trade in all the Island, seldom without the company of English, Portugals, and Hollanders; the principal Factory of the English in all the Indies, though they have many besides this. The Town unwholesomely seated in a moorish ground, and much subject to fire. 12. Sund●, situate in a place abounding in pepper. 13. Agracan, a convenient Port; Here was also in the time of Ptolemy a Town called 14. Argyropolis, or the Silver City, long ago destroyed. And now there is, 15. Sura, a new Town in the territories of the King of Bantam, built by some of the Subjects of the King of Passarva, who being oppressed by their own King, came into this part of the Country, where they go● leave to build this City. The people whereof live quietly according to their own Laws, follow their Husbandry abroad, but never marry; and yet do not want a constant Succession, adopting some of the other Javans into their Society, as they find their numbers to diminish.  
Of the story of this Island I can say but little. Divided into many petit and inconsiderable Kingdoms; and those divided too by Mountains; crossing the Island in the middle from West to East, which cut off all commerce and correspondence betwixt one another. Some of these Kings Mahometans, some Gentiles, as before was said; all subject or Homagers at least to one of the Kings of the Gentiles, who hath his dwelling in the midst of the Island. Next him, the King of Tub●n was conceived to be richest, and the King of Ballambua of the greatest territory, whose Family, after long war and bloodshed, begun in the murder of his daughter, is said to be wholly rooted out by the King of Passarva. These Kings much reverenced by their subjects, and so well obeyed, that whatsoever they command, is done, be it never so dangerous.  
2. JAVA-MINOR, situate on the South of the other, is said to be 2000 miles in compass, and to be very near the firm land of Terra Australis in●ognita, or the Southern Continent. Not very well known to any of our late Adventurers; but generally affirmed (not so much on certain knowledge as unsure conjecture) to be of the same nature and condition with the greater java. The Inhabitants hereof in the time of Paulus Venetus, who had traveled in it, reported to be Cannibals, Idolaters, devourers of their Parents and dearest friends, and to worship all day whatsoever they saw first in the morning. Divided then into eight Kingdoms, distinguished by the names of their principal Towns. Six whereof he had seen, which are these that follow. 1. Felech, where the Townsmen were Moor●s, and the Paisants Gentiles. 2. Basma, which did acknowledge the Great-Cham of Tartary for Lord in chief; but without paying of any tribute. 3. Samara, where none of the North-Stars could be seen. 4. Lambri, in which some men were said to have tails like dogs. 5. Fanfur, in which they have a Tree, the wood whereof put in water, will sink like iron; of which they use to make Lances that will pierce an Armour. And 6. Dragorian, of which there is nothing memorable or prodigious, but that the people of it use to eat their nearest kinsmen; and that no Prodigy at all, because used by others.  
To these two we may join MADURA, on the North of the greater java, fertile of Rice, but otherwise of so waterish and moist a Soil, that the men and cattle use to go knee-deep when they sow it. The chief Town whereof is called Arosbay. And on the East of the same java the Island Baly, exceeding populous for the bigness, supposed to contain 600000 Inhabitants; and very well provided of Bulls, Buffais, Goats, Horses, Swine, many kind of fruits, and some store of metals.   

8. SUMATRA.  
SUMATRA lieth on the North of the Greater Java, betwixt it and the Straight of Sincapura the most Southern Town of the Golden Chersonese. The Straight in that place so straight and narrow not above a musket shot in breadth, that some conccive this Island to have been formerly joined unto it by some little Isthmus, since worn away by the violence and working of the Sea: and that this Island, and not the Land of Malaca was that Golden Chersonese which we find in Ptolemy. More probably by far, than that we should run after to the Isle of Japan situate on the East of China, so far from any part of India, where it is placed by the Author of the Atlas Minor.  
The length hereof, extended from the Northwest to the Southeast, is said by some to be 900. by others but 700 miles, the breadth 200, and the whole compass one and twenty hundred. Strangely affirmed by some writers to be the biggest of all ●he East; who yet assign a greater circuit unto Java, and as great to Borneo. Situate under the Aequator, which divideth it into two parts, very near an equality: that on the North-side reaching unto five degrees, that on the southside but to seven degrees from the line itself. By which account there is little difference betwixt the length of a day and night; both much at one in all times of the year whatever.  
The air hereof by consequence must be very hot, but withal unwholesome, not so much in regard of the extreme heats, as by reason of the gross vapours drawn from the many Fens and Rivers which are found to be in it; and the thick woods which intercept the free course of a purging wind. The soil not capable of such grain as in other places, except Rice or Millet (for I know not otherwise how to render the Latin, Milium) but yielding Ginger, Pepper, Camphire, Agarick, and Cassia, in great abundance. It affordeth also great plenty of Wax and Honey, store of Silks and Cottons; rich mines not only of tin, iron, sulphur, and other Minerals; but of Gold such quantity, that some conceive this Island to be Salomon's Ophir. And if Pedrunka Sirie one of the Kings of this Island, in a letter written to King James did not brag too impudently, it may be probable enough. For by that letter it appeareth that all the furnitures of his house, and the trappings of his Elephants, and horses, withal his Armour, were of pure Gold, and that he had in his dominions a whole Mountain of Gold; King of which Golden Mountain he entitleth himself in his Regal Style.  
The Inhabitants are many of them good Artificers, cunning Merchants, or expert Mariners. All of them Gentiles till about two hundred and thirty years since, at what time by the diligence of some Arabian Merchants trading to this Island, Mahometanism began to spread upon the Coasts. But in the inland parts of the Country they are Gentiles still, and still retain amongst them their old barbarous customs. The most loving men unto their enemies that were ever known; for otherwise they would never eat them. Having eaten they use their skulls instead of money, which they exchange or barter for such necessaries as their wants require▪ and he is thought to be the wealthiest man amongst them, who hath most of this coin. Those of the other Religion though in most points and customs they agree with the rest of the Mahometans, have this one singular to themselves: which is, that once every year on a certain day they go solemnly unto their Mesquits to see if Mahomet be come; leading a spare Horse for him to ride upon: which (missing him) is mounted at their coming back, by the best man in the company. Of any great Progress that Christianity hath made here, I have no good evidence.  
That here are many and great Rivers, hath been said before, but their names I find not. Here are also many Mountains, and those great and high; that of most note called Balalvanus, said to burn continually. Out of which, or not far off do arise two Fountains, of which the one is said to run pure Oil, and the other the best Balsamum: which I bind no man to believe but such as have seen it.  
Chief Towns hereof 1. Achen, the Seat Royal of that Kingdom, beautified with the Regal Palace, to which they pass thorough seven Gates one after another, with green Courts between the three outermost; those three continually guarded with women expert at their weapons, and using both swords and Guns; the only ordinary guard that he hath for his person. The materials of this Palace mean, but the furniture costly; the walls thereof being hanged commonly with Veivet and Damask, and some times with cloth of Gold. 2. Pedir. 3. Pacem, 4. Cambar, 5. Menantab●, 6. Aura, and 7. Andragde, the seats of so many of their Kings. 8. Passaman, a Town of great trade, but situate in a moorish and unhealthy place; found so experimentally by too many of the English, who have there their Factory. 9 Priamon, and 10. Teco●, of a more healthy air, but not so commodious in their Havens as is that of Passaman: these 3 Towns standing in that part of the Country where the Pepper groweth.  
All that we know touching the story of this Country, is that the Portugals, when they first came hither, found in it nine and twenty kings; reduced since to a smaller number. For Abraham, sometimes a Slave, afterwards King of Achen, having turned Mahometan, by the help of the Turks and Arabians subdued the Realms of Pedir and Pacem. Aladine who succeeded him, being once a Fisherman and grown famous for his exploits at Sea, was by this King preferred to the marriage of one of his Kinswomen, made his Lord Admiral, and by him trusted with the protection of his son and heir: of whom instead of a Protector he became the murderer, and usurped the State unto himself. When King, he added to his Crown the Kingdoms of Arundell, or Aura, and Manucabo, and almost all the rest in the North-part of the Island. In this king's time, the English were first settled in their Factory there. Grown old (an hundred years at least) he was imprisoned by his eldest Son, impatient of a longer stay, alleging that his age had made him unfit for government, Anno 1604. The name of the New King Sultan Pedrucka Sirie, who in his letter to King James spoken of before, styles himself the Sole King of Sumatra: either with greater brag than truth, or else because the Kingdoms of Tecoo, Priaman, and Baronse, being conquered by him, all the rest were become his Tributaries. Associated with the forces of the King of Jor, or Johor, who had married his Sister, he besieged Malaca, and distressed it: But being beaten from it by the Portugals, he turned the tide of his displeasure upon his Confederate, and subdued that Kingdom; who with the King of Siak (some other petit Prince near Jor) and two of their brethren, were in the year 1613. brought Prisoners to Achem.  
The Government of this King is absolute, and merely arbitrary, executing what he hath a mind to without form of Law. So cautelous, that without his Placard no stranger can have ingress into his dominions, or free Egress out of them. Nor is admittance to his presence granted unto any whom he first sends not for by an Officer with a Gilded Staff. He is conceived to be strong both by Sea, and Land, his Country populous, his Elephants many and well trained, able to put to Sea 120, or if need be 200 Galleys and Frights fit for any service, most of which carry Demi-Cannon, Culverin, Sakar, Minion, and other the like Ordnance of Brass. So great a Master of his Subjects, that in 21 days he had a goodly Channel drawn about his Palace, from a River which was eight miles off. Of his Revenues I am able to make no conjecture, but think him to be full of Gold, by that great quantity of Golden furnitures which he hath about him.  
And now I am fallen on this King's Gold, I cannot but take notice of some Lands on the West of Sum●tra, called Aureae Insulae, of the Golden Lands; the chief of which named Andramania, is possesed by Cannibals, or man-eaters. Opposite unto which on the East side of this Island, are those called Linga, Banca, and Bintam; which last is said to be very woody, well watered, and to afford a commodious Station for shipping. The houses built of stone, but thatched except that of the King (for even these sorry Lands love to have a King of their own) whose house more eminently seated, is more handsomely covered.   

9 ZEILAN.  
West of Sumatra, somewhat inclining to the North, is the Island of ZEILAN, ten Degrees distant from the Aequator, and near adjoining to the Promontory in the hither India which Ptolemy calleth by the name of Cory. The length hereof computed at 250 miles, the breadth at 150 miles only; the whole circumference at 700 or 800 miles. Conjectured by the situation, and other probable inducements, to be the Taprobane of the ancient Writers. Ortelius and most other intelligent men of these later times are of that opinion. Only Morcator, who hath carried the Golden Chersonese to the Isle of Japan; and fixed Taprobane in that of Sumatra, (in which last I must confess he hath many Partners) will have this Island to be that which Ptolemy calls Nanigeris, though that be four Degrees more West than the Promontory of Cory, to which this Isle in former times seems to have been joined.  
Taking it therefore for an evident and undoubted truth, that this Zeilan or Ceilan is the Taprobane of the Ancients, we will a little look on the State of that Island, with reference to the times when those Authors lived. By Ptolemy affirmed to be plentiful in Rice, Honey, Ginger, Gold, Silver, Precious Stones, and all kind of metals; By Pliny, that the Gold is purer, and the Gems fairer, than any in India; that there were also Groves of Palm-trees, and great store of Elephants, is declared by Aelian and some others. Watered with many fair and pleasant Rivers, viz. 1. Soana, 2. Azanus, 3. Baracus, 4. Gandes, 5. Phasis: the hills in many places having a full prospect over the adjoining Valleys; the chief of which were Malea, and those called Calibi, the vales perpetually enriched with the choicest fruits. Exceeding populous for the bigness, and stored with many Towns of note. Of which Magrammum only hath the name of a Metropolis. 1. Marga●a, 2. Jogana, 3. Sindocanda, 4. Hodoca, 5. Nabartha, 6. Dogana, 7. Dionysiopolis, 8. Bocana, 9 Abara●ha, 10. Procurum, 11. Nagadiba, and 12. Anubingara, have the name of Cities. 13. Moduttum, and 14 Talaco●um, noted for the Towns of traffic; 15. Priapis, 16. Mardus, 17. Rhizala, 18. Spa●ana, and 19 that of the Sun, for commodious Havens; 20. Anurogrammum being honoured with the Title of Regia, or the Royal City. As for the name, it is said by Ptolemy to have been first called Taprobane, than Simondi Insula, and finally in his time Salice, and the People Salae; from whence the name of S●lan or Seilan seems to be derived.  
To take a view of it at the present, I find it said to be of an Oval form, divided from the main land by a narrow Channel, the Heavens refreshing it with their dews, the Air with a fragrant freshness, and the waters with their many Rivers and Fountains; the Earth diversified into lofty hills, and lowly Valleys; her inward Chambers filled with Metals, and Jewels, her outward Coat of the pleasantest colour, stored with whole woods of Cinnamon; besides Fruits, Lemons, Oranges, etc. bettering those of Spain. Of Fouls and Beasts great plenty both wild and tame; and the best breed of Elephants in all the world. Destitute only of the Vine, the want of which supplied with a pleasant drink made of the juice of fruits, more natural to them than the other, and so preservative of life that the people are reported to be longer lived than in any other parts. In a word so abounding in all contentments, that the Indians hold it to be Paradise, and take upon them to point out some of Adam's footings, left for a memorial in some parts of it. And to confirm them in their Error, they have an Hill there which the Spaniards call by the name of Picode Adam, affirmed to be seven Leagues in height, from whence Adam ascended into Heaven: for that cause visited by the Moors or Arabians, with continual Pilgrimages.  
The people for the most part tall and straight of body, naked from the girdle upwards, unwarlike, and much given unto ease and pleasures; So queasy stomached that the poorest of them will not eat that meat which another hath touched; inclined to bravery, and therefore make wide holes in their ears, which they stretch out with Jewels to their very shoulders. Cunning Artificers in all metals, one of them making a Crucifix of such exquisite workmanship, that it seemed to give life to the dead; and was sent by the Archbishop of Goa to the King of Spain, as the rarest Jewel which had evergraced his Royal Cabiner. They are also very active, and well skilled in juggling, both men and women, travelling thorough India with their tricks and Hobby-horses, by which they get themselves both delight and money. In matter of Religion, they are generally Idolaters, especially the Natives, whom they call Cingalas, which live in the Inlands; the Seacoasts (as in other Lands) being filled with Mahometans. No Christians that I hear of but in Columbo, a Town of the Portugals.  
Cities of most repute amongst them, 1. Candie, the Seat of one of their Kings, supposed to be the Sindocande of Ptolemy, memorable for the statues of their supposed Adam, most artificially wrought, of five or six Fathoms high, Symetrically proportionable to the print of his foot, which they conceive to have amongst them. 2. Ventane, of great renown for an Idol-Temple, in compass 130 paces, of great height, and all white except the top, which hath the Spires thereof so gilded, that when the Sun shines, men are not able to look upon them. 3. Janasipatan, 4. Triqui-Le●ale (supposed to be the Tarichi of Ptolemy, 5. Batecolom, 6. Vilassem 7. Tanamaca, 8. Laula, 9 Galle, the Seats of so many of their Kings. 10. Nagarita, conceived to be the Nagiri; as 11. Agena, the Jogana of Ptolemy. 12. Colmuchi, the Seat Royal of the chief King of this Island, situate on a capacious Bay in the South-west of it, and of most trade in all this Country: many great ships laden with Cinnamon, Gems, Elephants, and other Indian commodities, going yearly hence. Fortified by the Portugals (by whom called Columbo) with a very strong Castle, built with the Kings leave at first, to secure their trading; but since used by them as a curb to hold him in with, and to compel him to pay tribute.  
This Country first discovered to be an Island by Onesicritus, Admiral of Alexander's Fleet, was in the time of Ptolemy inhabited by several Nations. The principal of which were the Galthi, and Muduls dwelling in the North, the Rhogandani, and Nanigiri in the South; the Sindocandae in the West, and the Tarachi in the East: the middle parts being taken up by the Anurogrammi, Nagadibi, Soani, Semni. But little or nothing is said of them in the way of story, but that they were good Mimics, did imitate the tunes of birds, and could speak to two at once, as if double-tongued; that they were very studious of Astrology, and worshipped the Sun and the Host of Heaven; that some of their Ambassadors coming to Rome, in the time of Claudius Caesar, solemn a Laeva oriri mirati sunt, etc. admired to see the Sun rise on the wrong side of them; and finally that the King was chosen by the people with respect had to his age and clemency; who being enthroned, appointed thirty Judges to administer justice to the Subject, without the Major part of whom, sentence of death was to pass on no man. In following times this Monarchy (for such it was in the time of those Authors) was broken into many pieces: the Portugals finding nine Kings in it, at their first coming hither, all homagers or Tributaries to the King of Colnuchi. After that this their chief King was wickedly murdered by his Barber, who drove the other Kings out of the Country, and for a while usurped the Monarchy to himself. Since which time, having once again recovered their Kingdoms, six of them (as I have somewhere read, but remember not where) put themselves under the protection of the Great Mongul, and became his Feudataries.  
Near hereunto on the Coasts of Malabar, are the Lands which they call Maldivae, many in number, but so called from the principal of them, as that from Maldiva, a noted and well-traded Empery, where the King resideth. Not very plentiful of necessaries for the use of man, did not the Palm alone supply them in all other wants. Inhabited by an industrious and sober people, who make themselves long garments of Silk or Flax brought from other places, wherewith more modestly adorned than the rest of the Indians: and by their fishing draw up shells of such mingled colours, that they serve amongst the Siamites instead of money.   

10. LANDS OF LESS NOTE.  
BEsides these Lands represented to us by their several names, and some who have nothing but their names to take notice of; there by many thousands of less note which we find in gross: these Indian Seas being so prodigiously full of Lands, that it is almost impossible to believe there should be such multitudes; but utterly impossible to credit what is told us of them. Some of the most remarkable of them we have touched upon, as Accessories or Appurtenances to some greater Lands. The rest we shall present only in the general muster, together with a taste of some of those strange reports, with which some men have fouled their Papers, and abused their Readers. Of the Philippines, there are said to be 11000. though but 40 of them in possession of the King of Spain. More South, but over against China, is another fry of them affirmed by Mariners to be no fewer than 7448 and (as if nature had delighted to disport herself by sowing Lands in these Seas) another Shoal of them about India, no fewer in number than 127000: all which laid together would make a Continent as large as three or four parts of Europe; and are still groaning under the burden of Heathenism. These Lands stand so nigh unto one another, that they seem not only to such as are a far to be all but one firm land; but whosoever also passeth between them, may with his hands touch the boughs of the trees on the one side, and on the other. Of these and the other Indian Lands, travellers relate many incredible fables; viz. that here be hogs that have two teeth growing out of their snows, and asmany behind their ears, of a span and a half long; a tree whose Western part is rank poison; and the Eastern part an excellent preservative against it. They tell us also of a fruit, that whosoever eateth, shall for the space of 12 hours be out of his wits; and of a stone, on which whosoever sitteth, shall suddenly have a rupture in his body. We are told also that here abouts are taken Tortoises of that bigness, that ten men might sit and dine within one of the shells; And that there is a tree, which all the day time hath not a flower on it, but within half an hour after Sunset, is full of them. All huge and monstrous lies, and not fit for credit. Galvano reporteth also, that in some of these Lands there is a fruit, of which if a woman that is with child eat, her child will presently move; that there is a River plentifully stored with fish, whose water is yet so hot, that it doth immediately scald off the skin of any beast that is cast into it; that some of the men have tails; and most of their swine horns: that they have oysters which they call Bra●, the shells whereof are of so large compass, that they Christian Children in them; that in the Sea there are stones which grow and increase like fish, of which the best lime is made; that there is a bird called Monicodia●a, which having no feet is in a continual motion; and that there is a hole in the back of the Cock, in which the Hen doth lay her eggs, and hatch her young ones. Ibid no man to believe these Relations: for my part I say with Herace, 
Quodcunque ostendis mihi sic, incredulus odi.  
What ever thus thou tell'st me, I  
Will always hate it as a lie.    
And so much for these Eastern-Ilands.    

An Advertisement to the Reader touching the Errata of this part.  
IN the first place the Reader is to be advertised that Fol. 63. from the 24th. line to the 32, I have adventured to prove the Alamatha of Ptolemy to be the Chamath, or Hamath-Sobab, of the Holy Scriptures: The place ill pointed, but the judicious Reader will easily find out the scope and meaning. Yet if this shall not be approved of, I should then think it to be that Elam or Helam, where David discomfited the Army of the Mesopotamians; mention whereof is made 2 Sam. 10. v. 16, 17. In the next place he is to know, that Fol. 91. within the compass of five lines, the victory which Asa king of Judah obtained against the numerous Army of Ethiopians, is twice repeated: in the first place ascribed to jethir, in the next to Maresha. But being that Scripture doth more clearly ascribe it unto Maresha, (though the other also hath good Authors) let that of jethir be supplied in this manner following. 5. jethir, or jatthir, in the North Border of this Tribe, towards Eleutheropolis: a City anciently of the Levites, in S. Hieroms time called by the name of jethira, and then replenished altogether with Christians; now nothing but the name remaining, 6. Maresa, etc. And finally whereas Ajalon p. 87. is placed in the Tribe of Ephraim, and page 90 in the Tribe of Dan, the reason is, because being situate in the Borders of both Tribes, it is by some writers ascribed to Dan, and by others to Ephraim. The like may be also said of Michpas, mentioned also in two Tribes according as it is disposed of by several Authors. Which being advertised, such literal faults as do occur in this third Book, may be mended thus.  
FOl. 4. line 62. for nine read six 7. 37. for doubtful 1. doughty ib. 52. for right r. sight 11. 26 for Pamphylia r. Lycaonia 12. 42. for perspicuous r. perspicacious 11. 22. for Rome r. Roni 14. 22. for Caousum r. Cucusum 18. 64. for pride and fa●l r. pride and folly 19 6. for Streets r. Straits 20. 6 for Cycus r. Ca●cus 23. 1. for comprehended r. comprehending 25. 47. for Many r. a mine 27. 67 for Cicilia r. Cilicia 29 1. for Hiliades r. Miltiades 34. 29. for Esburich r. Esbuith 38. 18. d. Stomalymne 60. 9 d. by the jews or Hebrews once called Reblatha 61. 5 for long after r. not long after 63. 34. for and a Town r. if a Town ib. 37. for Barathius r. Barathene for here sometimes are the Towns r. among the Towns ib. 38. for by which r. to which 65. 16. for this City r. the City of Damascus 71. 37 for forbearing r. forbidding 75. 21. for Amorites r. Moabites ib. for Reason r. Recem 76. 28. for Livias' r. julias' 100 34. for of which they were r. of which line Og and the Kings of Basan were 113. 18. d. this and 114. 43 for Serah r. Selah 118. for 500 r. 50. fol. 120. 7. & 181. 23. for Tuledensis r. Tudelensis. 122. 27. for Trocomania r. Tu●comania ib. 55. for hearse r. house 127. 45. d. containing Susiana 131. 4 to Chaldaea, add, and on the South with Susiana, a Province of Persia 132. 3. for Cities r. Rivers for Adiavenena r. Adiavena ib. 30. for 900000. r. 90000. 137. 19 for ab inspiciendo r. ab Aras inspiciendo 138. 11. for 30th. r. the 118. 51. for where r. when 159 17. for Gauzarania r. Gauzania 159. for which r. with ib. 61. for subdued r. till subdued 160. 11. for Nasmana r. Nasuana 163. 30. for Thessalonians r. Thessalians ib 64. for different r. difference 167. 62 for 24000. r. 240000. fol. 173. 37. for Travels r. Travellers 181. 48. for that reigned in Persia r. the last of the race of Haal●● that reigned in Persia 183. 26. for the 2d. t. the 3d. 190. 6 for that r. yet 195. 59 d. the chief 191. 50 for besides r. sides 197. 32 for it is now r. it is not now 207. 23 for Now r. Now that ib. 36. for Halam r. Harlem 210. 28. for maintenance r. manufacture 214. 27. for vanquished r. vanished 56. for Diamper r. Liamper 115. 1. for a Sect r. some 119. 29. for Angels r. angel's 217. 18. for Nagarna r. Nagara 220. 3. to Paropamisus add with Arachosia now called 222. 8. for Tamtheo r. Ta●lico. 56. for Arra, r. Agra 223. 21. & 24. for Sanga r. India 224 for Delly r. Sauga 225 33d. Delly and ib. 37 for Delly r. Cambaia ib. 45 for near r. more near 233 41 for Mandao r. Sanga 234 4 & 10 for Sangar. Pengab.   

A TABLE OF THE LONGITUDE and Latitude of the chief Towns and Cities mentioned in this Book.  
A Achem 132 30 3 40 Aden 82 0 13 50 Agra 118 10 34 0 Aleppo 72 30 38 0 Amboino 162 50 42 20A Amodabat 169 50 23 10 Antioch 72 30 39 0 Apamea 61 30 43 40 Arachan 129 10 24 10 Ardovat 140 50 25 0 Arminig 76  41  Ava 142 30 27 30 Amastro 66 30 44 30 B Babylon 82 20 33 0 Baccu 88 50 42  Balsora 82 40 31 10 Banda 164 0 450 A Baticalla 111 30 12 40 Pengala 125 10 21 20 Bethlehem 65 45 31 50 Bisnagar 114 20 14 10 Bulgar 88 30 54 30 C Cabul 112 20 31 0 Caindu 137 30 47 40 Calcutta 112 40 10 30 Cambalu 161 10 51 40 Camboia 142 20 11 40 Campion 148 0 57 30 Cananor 112 50 11 0 Candahor 110 40 33 40 Capha 68 50 48 0 Calamines 149 0 9 0 Cauchin China 140 30 20 0 Cranganor 113 0 9 40 Ceraso 73 0 44 40 Choromandel 115 20 22 30 Chesmur 115 10 3 0 Chianfu 147 30 27 0 Chirman 98 30 27 30 Cincapura 136 40 1 20 Cochin 114 0 9 40 Colmucho 117 30 6 40 Comori 115 10 7 10 Coulan 114 30 7 10 Cantan 149  25  Chaul 109 40 17 30 D Damascus 74 30 35 0 Decan 113 20 14 0 Delly 114 0 19 10 Derbent 84 50 42 20 Diu 108 0 20 30 Dornate 137 50 7 50 E Ephesus 60 30 39 40 Eres 87 40 40 50 Ergimul 150 0 58 20 F Famagusta 69 20 30 30 Fasso 57 50 45 40 G Gabara 80 50 36 10 Gaza 70 50 39 10 Gest 107 30 26 30 Gilolo 161 30 1 10 ●oa 112 20 14 40 H Heri 99 50 30 0 Hormar 165 25 35 10 Jerusalem 72 20 33 0 I Jesdi 94 40 32 0 Indio 105 40 38 0 Jericho 73  33  Joppa 71 20 34 0 Istigias 110 30 39 40 L Lequin Major 165 0 28 0 Liompo 160 20 34 40 Lop 134 20 53 0 M Macao 140 10 23 20 Machan 160 40 0 30 Macin 85 30 25 50 Malaca 136 30 2 50 Maldiva 113 0 3 20 Maliapar 118 0 13 20 Mamora 155 40 0 40 Mandao 121 0 25 0 Mangalor 112 0 11 30 Martavan 134 30 17 10 Meccha 73 30 25 0 Medina Talnabi 73 0 27 30 Meaco 170 30 37 0 Mindanao 160 40 7 0 Moltan 114 20 24 30 Multan 109 50 29 20 Mongul 159 29 60 40 Mushal 84 0 34 50 N Naguian 97 0 53 30 Naim 94 10 33 40 Nayman 140 0 65 10 Narsinga 119 0 18 0 Nazareth 72 40 34 10 Nicomedia 63 10 44 20 Nisabul 102 10 38 40 Nice 57 41 40  Ninive 82 36 40  O Odia 138 30 12 0 Onor 111 40 19 10 Orixa 118 40 20 40 Ormus 91 20 27 30 Oxiana 107 41 20  P Pacem 132 0 4 0 Pedir 131 10 4 0 Pegu 135 0 20 10 Ptolemais 66 40 29 40 Persepolis 90 40 30 40 Patane 138 10 6 50 Q Quianfu 144 40 42 30 Quinsay 153 0 40 0 R Rhabana 196 30 47 0 Rhodes 61 40 37 20 Rages 79 10 28 0 Regis 82 10 36 0 S Sablestan 114 0 30 0 Sarmachan 130 0 47 0 Samaria 72 20 33 40 Sciro 57 30 41 10 Siam 139 10 14 30 Sidon 72 10 36 30 Sinned 109 30 27 0 Sirrah 90 40 30 40 Smirna 60 20 40 30 Sigestan 105 0 31 0 Sultania 92 40 37 20 Succuit 143 10 56 0 Sunda 138 8 64 0 A Susis 73 40 48  Scarpanto 62 10 36 0 T Tangu 152 0 63 30 Talcan 85 0 47 0 Tarnassar 119 40 17 10 Tarsus 71 20 40 0 Tauris 90 30 38 10 Tenduc 168 30 67 30 Thebet 138 50 44 0 Trabezond 74 30 44 40 Tripoli 72 20 27 0 Troy 59 0 42 30 Tire 72 10 36 3 Tidore 160 40 0  V Van 86 30 36 50 Varma 130 20 20 10 X Xamdu 168 40 55 40 Xara 130 0 17 0 Z Zagaspi 101 20 42 30 Zama 74 40 11 40 Zibit 70 0 22 20  
The end of the third Book.   

cosmography, The Fourth Book: PART I.  
CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHY and HISTORY OF AFRICA, AND ALL THE PRINCIPAL Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof.  
By PETER HEYLIN.  
C. JUL. SOLIN. cap. 33. Vltra hos (Aethiopes) monstrosa gentium facies; Aliae sine naribus aequali totius oris planitie, informs habent cultus: Aliis concreta Ora sunt modicoque tantum foramine calamis avenarum pastus hauriunt. Nonnullae linguis carent, in vicem sermonis utentes nutibus, manibusque.  
PTOLOM. GEOG. l. 1. cap. 5. Constat per ipsas temporum traditiones, quasdam partes Continentis terrae quae à nobis habitatur, nondum propter difficilem magnitudinis peragrationem, ad notitiam pervenisse: quasdam vero non tales, ac fertur, esse, etc. necesse ergo est ut ibi novissimis temporis nostri traditionibus penitus quasi adhaereamus.  
LONDON, Printed for Henry Seile, 1652.   


AFRICA Descriptio Nova Impensis Henrici Seile 1652   map of Africa   

cosmography, The Fourth Book: PART I.  
CONTAINING THE chorography and HISTORY OF afric, And all the chief Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof.  

OF afric.  
afric is bounded on the East by the Red-Sea, and Bay of Arabia, by which parted from Asia; on the West, by the main Atlantic Ocean, interposing betwixt it and America; on the North, by the Mediterranean Sea, which divides it from Europe and Anatolia; and on the South, with the Aethhiopic Ocean, separating it from Terra Australis incognita, or the Southern Continent; Parted from all the rest of the World, except Asia only, to which joined by a narrow Isthmus not above 60 miles in length. Memorable for the great design which Cleopatra the last Queen of Egypt had upon it, which in brief was this: When Mark Anthony was encountered by Augustus in the Naval battle of Actium, Cleopatra fearing the success, fled through the midst of all his Fleet, with the 60 Galleys which were appointed for her guard; Being come to the North part of this Isthmus, she gathered together all her portable treasures, and intended to hoist her shipping out of the Mediterranean, and hale them over the Land to the Red-Sea; whence she had purposed to take sail, and together with her Sweetheart Anthony and some other choicest friends, to seek out some other place of dwelling far enough from the Romans; But from this, Anthony, who fled after her, and vainly hoped for a change of fortunes, did at last dissuade her.  
The Form hereof is like a Pyramid reversed; the Basis of which, from Tanger on the Strait of Gibraltar to the point where it joineth unto Asia, is reckoned at the breadth of 1920 Italian miles; the Conus of it very narrow; But from the Conus or Pyris to the most Northern part of the Basis, it extendeth itself the space of 4155 miles, being much less than Asia, and far bigger than Europe.  
By the Grecians it is called most commonly Libya, (of which more hereafter) part of it taken for the whole: by the Aethiopians, Alkebu-lam; by the Indians, Besecath. But the most noted name thereof is Africa, which Josephus out of Cleodenus and Polyhistor, deriveth from Epher or Apher, one of the Nephews of Abraham by Midian the son of Keturah. The Arabians, by whom it is called Ifrichia, derive it from the Verb Faruch, signifying to divide; because more visibly divided both from their own Country, and the rest of the World, than any other part thereof which was known unto them. Some of the Greek Fablers fetch it from one Afer a Companion of Hercules, whom he attended unto Spain. Some fetch it out of Aphar, an Hebrew word, signifying Dust, agreeable to its sandy and dusty soil: Festus an old Grammarian, from A Privativum, and the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which imports a Country void of cold, as suitable to the fiery temper of the Air. By Bochartus, who brings all from the old Phaenician, it is said to be derived from Peruc, Spica, an Ear of corn; which mollified into Feric, came at last to afric, that is to say, a Country plentiful in Corn. Which Etymology of his may receive some countenance from that great plenty of Corn which was bred in this Country, especially in those parts hereof which the Romans called the Proper afric, whereof we shall speak more when we come to Barbary; the whole Continent taking from that Province the name of afric. But in my mind, (if that from the Hebrew Epher or Aphar, be not worth accepting) I should prefer the Etymon of Festus before any other; unless we might be sure that Carthage anciently was called Africa, as Suidas telleth us it was: for then without all peradventure we would seek no further. For other more particular names by which it hath been called in some elder writers, i.e. Olympia, Oceanica, Eschatica, Coryphe, Ammonis, Hesperia, Ortygia, and perhaps some others, it is enough to our design to take notice of them.  
It is situate for the most part under the Torrid Zone, the Aequator crossing it almost in the very midst; and for that cause supposed by many of the Ancients not to be inhabited at all, or but very thinly in the middle and more Southern parts of it; or if at all, with such strange people, as hardly did deserve to be counted men. Pomponius among others was of this opinion, guessing the inward parts thereof to be taken up by such strange Brutes, as the Cynophanes, who had heads like dogs: 2. The Sciapodae, who with the shadow of their Foot could and did use to hide themselves from the heats of the Sun: 3. The Gamosaphantes, a naked people, ignorant of the use of weapons, and therefore fearfully avoiding the sight of men: 4. The Blemmyae, who being without heads, had their eyes and mouths in their breasts: 5. The Aegypani, who had no other humane quality to declare them to be men, but the shape and making of their bodies. These people (as they thought) possessed some small portion of the midland parts of this great Country; the rest they knew not, or conceived to be unhabitable, in regard of the great heats thereof. But late discoveries and navigations have found the contrary; the Country proving in most parts to be well inhabited; and the coolness of the nights, by mists, dews, and gentle gales of wind, to mitigate the heat of the day.  
Quodque die Solis vehementi excanduit aestu,  
Humida nox resicit, paribusque refrigerat horis.  
That is to say,  
What the Sun burns by day, the Night renews,  
And doth as much refresh with moistening dews.  
For notwithstanding that it be in some places full of sandy deserts, a disease incident to some parts of Arabia, Persia, and other Countries of a more Northernly situation; yet it is said by some, who speak it upon knowledge, that the greatest part of those Regions which lie under the Line or near it, (both in America and here) have so many goodly Fountains, Rivers, and little Brooks, such abundance of Cedars and other stately Trees of shade, so many sorts of delicate Fruits ever bearing and at all times beautified with blossoms; as may make them hold comparison with any others supposed to be of a more temperate situation.  
But as was said before, the Ancients knew not much of this Country, and therefore spoke upon conjecture, or more doubtful hear-say. For though Hanno a noble Carthaginian, employed by that State, discovered much of the Western Shores of this great Peninsula, yet he ventured not much into the Land; nor did his Journal (either suppressed by the Romans, or not much took notice of) give any great light to other Nations to pursue those Voyages; being writ in the Carthaginian tongue, but since translated into Greek, and published at Basil by Sigismond Gelenius, ann. 1533. As little credit did it find in former times, that some Phoenicians in the days of Pharaoh Neco, passing down the Red Sea, should sail about the Coasts of afric to the Streits of Gibraltar, and so return again to Egypt by the Mediterranean; as we find in Herodotus, that they did. But what those Ages disbelieved or esteemed impossible, is now grown ordinary; the Circumnavigations about this Country being very frequent, since first performed by Vasques de Gama, an Adventurous Portugal, in the year 1497. by means whereof these latter Ages are better instructed in the particulars of it then the former were; who knew not much beyond the limits of the Roman Empire and some parts adjoining upon Egypt, more than the strange Beasts, and more strange Reports which they had from hence, occasioning hereby the Byword, Africa semper aliquid apportat novi.  
Touching the State of Christianity in this great Continent, it is very weak; most of those Regions which Christian religion had once gained from Idolatry, Mahometism having since regained from Christianity: Insomuch that not only the North-part of afric near the Mediterranean. from Spain to Egypt, where the Gospel once so exceedingly flourished, that three hundred Catholic Bishops were at one time banished thence by Gensericus King of the Vandals, is at this present utterly void of Christians, (except some few Towns belonging to the King of Spain) but even in all this vast Country, thrice as big as Europe, there is not any one Region entirely Christian, but the Kingdom of Habassia only, and perhaps not that; none where the Christians are intermingled with Mah●metans, but only Egypt; nor where mingled with Idolaters, but in Longo and Angola, and some few Towns upon those Coasts in the hands of the Portugals. So little benefit have those Nations gotten by our late Discoveries; it being Gain, not Godliness, which the Merchant aims at.  
The Nations inhabiting this Country, or dispersed in it, may be reduced to Africans properly so called, Egyptians, Habassines, Arabians, Jewes● and some European Christians: the European Christians only in their Forts and Garrisons, the Jews in all the good Towns where Trade is stirring, the Arabians chiefly on the Seacoasts bordering on the Red-Sea, but wandering in great herds or companies all about the Country with their wives and children; the Habassines and Egyptians in their several kingdoms: The Africans again subdivided into Moors and Caferes, of which the Moors are wholly under the Law of Mahomet the Caferes dwelling in the inland and more Southern parts, not discovered anciently, in their wont Gentilism. Accordingly, the Languages herein spoken are different also; The Portugal or Spanish being used by the Europaeans; 2. The Chaldee or Syriack by the jews; 3. The Arabic by those of that Nation, and in all Barbary except Morocco only; 4. The Habassine, and 5. The Egyptian, in those Kingdoms; 6. That called Aquel-amarig, or the Noble language, supposed to be the natural and original language of the Roman Africans, intermixed with some Arabian words, and spoken generally in Morocco, and so amongst some of the inhabitants of Barbary nearest to Mount Atlas; 7. That named Sungai, used in Tombutum, Guinea, and others of the people of the Land of Negroes; and 8. That called Gubeo, spoke by those of Aithiopia inferior, and such of the Land of Negroes as lie next unto it.  
In reference to the State of the Roman Empire, it contained only the Dioceses of Egypt, afric, and part of the Diocese of Spain. The Diocese of Egypt subdivided into the Provinces of, 1. Libya superior, 2. Libya inferior, 3. Thebais, 4. Augustanica, 5. Arcadia, and 6. Aegyptus specially so called; distinguished by other names in the Nicene Council: That of afric, into Tripolitana, 2. Byzacena, 3. Zeugitana, 4. Numidia, 5. Mauritania Caesariensis, 6. and Mauritania Sitifensis; that other part of Mauritania, called Tingitana, being laid to the Diocese of Spain. The rest of this Peninsula, as they never conquered, so it never was much taken into consideration. But being more perfectly discovered now then in former times, (though not so perfectly as that I can be able to promise an exact account of it) it is divided commonly into these seven parts; 1. Egypt, 2. Barbary or the Roman afric, 3. Numidia, 4. Libya, neither of which the same with those of the ancient Romans, 5. Terra Nigritarum 6. Aethiopia superior, and 7. Aethiopia inferior. Such of the Islands as do properly belong unto any of these, shall make up the eighth. In the Descriptions whereof we will follow the Method of Plautanus, and begin with Egypt, as being peopled and possessed before all the residue.  

OF EGYPT.  
EGYPT is bounded on the East with Idumaea, and the Bay of Arabia; on the West with Barbary, Numidia, and part of Libya; on the North with the Mediterranean Sea; on the South with Aethiopia Superior, or the Abassine Empire.  
This Country in the holy Scriptures is called Misraim, from Misraim the son of Chus, and grandson of Cham, by whom first planted after the flood; the footsteps of which name do remain amongst the Arabians, who still call it Misre. Named in the same regard in the Book of Psalms, the Land of Ham; a name retained in some of the sacred offices of the old Egyptians, where (as Plutarch witnesseth) it was called Chemia, for Chamia no doubt, as that from Cham or Ham, the first stock of their nation. In Profane Authors it hath had the several names of, 1. Aeria, from the serenity of the Air, which is never clouded; 2. Potamia, from the propinquity of the Sea, washing two sides of it; 3. Ogygia, from Ogyges a supposed king thereof; 4. Melampodus, from the black colour of the soil; 5. Osiria, from their God Osiris, here in high esteem; and finally, 6. Aegyptus, which in the end prevailed over all the rest, either from Aegyptus the Brother of Danaus once King hereof, (in the stories of this Nation better known by the name of Ramese) or from Aegyptus the old name of the River Nilus, by whose annual overflowings made both rich and famous; and of the soil and rubbish which that River brought with it from the higher Countries, it was by some supposed to have been raised into firm land and gained out of the sea; Called therefore in some Writers by the name of Nili donum, or the gift of Nilus. Yet some there be who would have it called Aegyptus for Aigupthus, and that derived from Ai, and Coptus, which signifieth the Land or Country of Coptus, that being supposed to have been anciently the chief City of it. And some again will have the name derived from Chioth, by which the Egyptians call themselves to this very day.  
It containeth in length from the Mediterranean to the City of Asna, or Sy●●e, bordering on Aethiopia, 562 Italian miles; in breadth (exclusively of Cyrene and Libya) from Rosetta unto Damiata, or from the most Westerly Branch of Nilus to the farthest East, 160 of the same miles; to which the adding of those two Provinces make a great accession: Situate under the second and fi●t Climates, so that the longest day in Summer is but 13 hours and an half.  
By reason of this Southernly situation of it, the Air is here very hot and offensive, so that to avoid the insupportable heats thereof, and to have the benefit of some fresh wind, the Inhabitants are accustomed to build high Towers in all their Towns, on which they use to solace and refresh themselves. The soil made fruitful by the overflowings of Nilus, (whereof more anon) is so exceeding plentiful of all sorts of Grain, that it was called Horreum populi Romani, the Granary or Storehouse of the People of Rome: which City it did annually furnish with four month's provision; insomuch that it was said by Pliny, that the greatness of the Roman Empire could not long continue without the corn and wealth of Egypt, the plenty or famine of that City depending wholly on this Country. It abounds also with rich Pastures, in which they feed great store of Camels, Horses, Asses, Oxen, Sheep, and Goats, greater of growth then usually in most places else; and by reason of the moorishness of the Country, they have great store of Fowls: Of Poultry they have also good numbers about their houses, hatched in a different manner from all other Countries, not by the sitting of the Hen, but the heat of Furnaces, or Ovens; in which their eggs are orderly laid in dung, and by a gentle heat brought to animation. It is also liberally furnished with great plenty of Metals, some precious Stones, good Wines, and the choicest Fruits, as Lemons, Oranges, Pomgranats, Citrons, Figs, Cherries, and such as these, excellent both for taste and colour; and of Palm-trees a great abundance; of which though we have spoke before, yet we shall here more fully declare the nature and strange properties of them: They grow in couples, Male and Female, both thrust forth God's full of seed, but the Female is only fruitful, and that not except growing by the Male, and having his seeds mixed with hers. The pith of these Trees is an excellent Salad, better than an Artichoke, which in taste it very much resembleth. Of the branches they make Bedsteds, Latices, etc. of the leaves, Baskets, Mats, Fans, etc. of the outward husk of the Cod, Cordage; of the inner, Brushes. The fruit it bears, best known by the name of Dates, are in taste like Figs: and finally, it is said to yield whatsoever is necessary to the life of Man. It is the nature of this Tree, though never so ponderous a weight were put upon it, not to yield to the burden, but still to resist the heaviness of it, and to endeavour to lift and raise itself the more upwards. For this cause planted in Churchyards in the Eastern Countries, as an Emblem of the Resurrection: instead whereof we use the Yew-tree in these cold Regions. For the same reason, given to Conquerors as a token of Victory; it being the Emblem of Hieroglyphic of a Soldier's life. Hence figuratively used for precedency; as, Huic equidem consilio palmam do, in Terence; sometimes for the Victory itself; as, Non auferent tamen hanc palmam, in Plinic, & plurimarum palmarum homo, for a man that had won many prizes in the Fence-School, as in Tully, pro Roscio; more naturally for the sign of Victory, as in that of Horace, 
— Palmaque nobilis,  
Terrarum Dominos evehit ad Deos.  That is to say, 
The Palm, of victory a sign,  
Equal's men to the Powers Divine.   
The People, though the Country lie in the same Clime with Barbary, are not black, but tawny, or Olive-coloured; affirmed by Pomponius Mela to weep and mourn over the bodies of their dead, daubed over with dung; to have held it a great impiety to burn or bury them, but having imbalmed them to lay them in some inward room of their Houses: the men to keep themselves at home, for the household businesses, the women to follow merchandise and affairs abroad; the men to carry burdens upon their heads, and the women theirs upon their shoulders: Antipodes in these last to most other Nations. But certainly they were a witty and ingenious People, the first Inventors of Geomotry, Arithm●tick, Physic, as also of Astronomy, Necromancy, and Sorcery. They first taught the use of Letters to the neighbouring Phoenicians, by them imparted to the Greeks. Accustomed at the first to express their conceits in the shape of Birds, Beasts, Trees, etc. which they termed Hieroglyphics; of which two or three Examples out of Orus, will not be impertinent. For Eternity they painted the Sun and Moon, as things which they believed to have had no beginning, nor were likely to have any end: for a Year, they painted a snake, with his tail in his mouth, to show how one year succeeding another, kept the World still in an endless circle. For a month, they painted a Palmtree, because at every new Moon, it sendeth forth a new branch. For God, they painted a Falcon; as well for that he soared so high, as that he governeth the lesser birds. For integrity of life, they painted fire and water, both because these Elements are in themselves most pure, and because all other things are purified by them. For any thing that was abominable to the Gods, they painted a Fish, because in their Sacrifices the Priests never used them; and the like. From this manner of expressing one's self, the invention of Letters is thought to have had its original (though learned by them no question of the children of Israel, when they lived amongst them:) the History whereof, take briefly and word for word, out of Tacitus. Primi per formas animalium Aegyptii, etc. The Egyptians first of all expressed the conceptions of the mind, by the shapes of beasts; and the most ancient monuments of man's memory, are seen graven in stones; and they say, that they are the first inventors of Letters. Then the Phoenicians, because they were strong at Sea, brought them into Gr●ece; and so they had the glory of that, which they received from others: For there goeth a report, that Cadmus sailing thither in a Phoenician ship, was the Inventor of that Art among the Greeks, when they were yet unexpert and rude. Some report that Cecrops the Athenian, or Livius the Theban, and Palamedes the Grecian, did find out sixteen Characters at the time of the Trojan War; and that afterward Simonides added the rest. But in Italy the Etrurians learned them of Demaratus the Corinthian; and the Aborigines, of Evander the Arcadian. So far Tacitus. That the Phoenicians were the first inventors of Letters, I dare not affirm; and as backward am I to refer the glory hereof to the Egyptians; for certainly the Hebrews were herein skilled before either: yet that the Phoenicians were herein Schoolmasters to the Greeks, I think I may with safety maintain, having Lucan in consent with Tacitus.  

Phoenices primi (fama si creditur) ausi  
Mansuram rudibus vocem signare figuris.   

Phoenicians first (if fame may credit have)  
Dared in rude Characters our words engrave.   
Of this mind also is Isidore of Sevill in the first book of Originations, who also addeth, that for that cause the Fronts of Books, and the Titles of Chapters were written in red letters, as it is by some still in use. Hinc est quod & Phoeniceo colore librorum capita describantur, quia ab ipsis literae initium habuere, cap. 3. As for these less vulgar Letters which the Latins call Cyphrae, and whereof every exercised Statesman have peculiar to himself; they were first invented by Julius Caesar, when he first began to think of the Roman Monarchy; and were used by him in his Letters to his more private and tried friends, that if by misfortune they should be intercepted, the contents of them should not be understood; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, ne obvia literarum lectio cuivis esset. Augustus' one of the greatest Politicians of the World had another kind of obscure writing; for in his Letters of more secrecy and importance, he always used 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, to put the letter immediately following in the order of the Alphabet, for that which in ordinary writing he should have used. As for brachygraphy, or the Art of writing by short Characters, so useful for the taking of a Speech or Sermon as it is spoken: I find in Dion, that Moecenae that great favourite of Augustus Caesar, and favourer of Learning, did first invent them, ad celeritatem scribendi, for the speedier dispatch of writing: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 (they are the very words of my Author) 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. Isidor in the second Chapter of his book above mentioned, ascribeth it to Aquila the Libertus or freed man of this Moecenae: and to Tertius Persannius, and Philargius, who added to this invention. Yet had all they their chief light in it from Tullius Tito, a freedman of Cicero's who had undertaken and compassed it in the Prepositions, but went no further. At the last it was perfected by Seneca, who brought this Art into order and method; the whole volume of his contractions consisting of 5000 words. Deinde Seneca contracto omnium, digestóque & aucto numero, opus effecit in quinque millia. But now I make haste to take a survey of these Egyptians as they stand at the present, much differing from the ingenuity and abilities of their Predecessors.  
For such as have observed the nature of the Modern Egyptians, affirm them to have much degenerated from the worth of their Ancestors, prone to innovations devoted to luxury, cowardly, cruel, addicted naturally to cavil, and to detract from whatsoever is good and eminent. In their dealing with other men more observant than faithful, of a wit much inclining to craftiness, and very eager on their profit: Of person, of a mean stature, tawny of complexion, and spare of body, but active and quick of foot. Such as inhabit in the Cities apply themselves to merchandise; grow rich by Trading; reasonably well habited, and not much differing from the Turks in their dress and Fashion. Those in the Country who betake themselves to Husbandry, affirmed to be a savage and nasty People, crusted over with dirt, and stinking of smoke; sit company for none but those of their own condition. Nothing now left amongst them of the Arts of their Ancestors but an affectation which they have unto Divinations; to Fortune-telling great pretenders, by which, and by some cheating-tricks in which very well practised, great numbers of them wander from one place to another, and so get their livelihood: occasioning the vagabonds and stragglers of other Nations, who pretend unto the same false Arts, to assume their names. The whole body of the Inhabitants now an Hochpot or medley of many Nations, Moors, Arabians, Turks; the natural Egyptian making up the least part of the reckoning.  
The Women of the same complexion with the men, but well form and featured, did they not too much affect a seeming corpulency; which if they cannot get in flesh, they will have in clothes. Very fruitful in child bearing, and quick of dispatch when they are in labour: some of them having three or four children at a Birth; those that are born in the eighth month living to good Age, and not in danger of death, as in other Countries. Such of them as dwell in Cities, cover their faces with black Cypress bespotted with red; their arms, and ankles, garnished with bracelets and hoops of gold, silver, or some other Metal. Those in the Country, for a vail use some dirty clout, having holes only for their eyes, which little is too much to see and abstain from loathing. Both in the City and the Country, contrary to the custom in all places else, the women use to make water standing, and the men couring on their knees.  
The old Egyptians were so eminent in Arts and Learning, that from them Pythagoras and Democritus learned their Philosophy; Lycurgus, Solon, and Plato their Forms of Government. Orpheus and Homer their Poetical fictions of the Gods. Particularly, here flourished Aristarchus that famous and learned Grammarian, 2. Herodian, a diligent Student and searcher into curious ●rts, 3. Ammonius, the Master of Plotinus, 4. Didymus, surnamed Chalcenteros, for his indefatigable industry in several Sciences, 5. Manethon, an old Historian, of whom we have nothing but some fragments, 6. Appianus, an Historian of a later date, whose works are extant, 7. Didymus the Grammarian, 8. Cl. Ptolomaeus, the Geographer; 9 Achilles Statius the Poet; 10. And before all, the profound Philosopher Mercurius, ●●●named Trismegistus. And after their conversion to the faith of Christ, 1. Pantaenus, the first Reader of Divinitic in the Schools of Alexandria; 2. Origen, and 3. Clemens Alexandrinus, both skilled in the universality of Learning; 4. Dionysius; 5. Athanasius, and 6. Cyril; all three Bishops of Alexandria, and the glories of their several times. Now nothing but ignorance and Barbarism to be found amongst them.  
The Christian faith was first here planted by S. Mark, whom all Antiquity maketh the first Bishop of Alexandria. His successors, till the time of Heraclus and Dionysius, chosen continually out of the Presbytery or Cathedral. Clergy; afterwards out of the Clergy at large. Their Jurisdiction settled by a ●anon of the Council of Nice, over all the Churches in the whole Diocese of Egypt, (taking the word Diocese in the Civil notion) containing Libya, Pentapolis, and Egypt specially so called; to which, though Epiphanius adds Thebais, Maraeotica, and Ammoniaca, yet he adds nothing in effect. Thebais and Maraeotica being parts of Egypt, as Ammoniaca was of Libya. Afterwards the Aethiopian or Abassine Churches became subject to this Patriarch also, and do acknowledge to this day some relation to him. By the coming in of the Saracens, and the subjugation of this Country, Christianity fell here into great decay; languishing so sensibly since those times, especially since the conquest of it by the Turks, that whereas Brochardus in his time reckoned three hundred thousand Christians, in the last estimate which was made of them, they were found to be but fifty thousand. This small remainder of them, commonly called Cophti, either from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, scindo, because they retained the use of Circumcision with their Christianity, or from Coptus a chief Town in Egypt, in which many of them did reside; or finally by abbreviation from Aegop●to, corrupted from Aegyptii, their own National name. They are all Jacobites in Sect, from whom they differ notwithstanding in some particulars, in some from all other Christian Churches, in many from the Church of Rome. The points most proper to them, 1. Using Circumcision with their Baptism, but rather as a National then Religious custom; though in that sense also laid aside, as is said by some, by the persuasion of some Legates from the Pope of Rome, in a Synod held in Cairo, An. 1583. 2. Conferring all sacred Orders under the Priesthood, on Infants immediately after haptism; their Parents, till they come to sixteen years of age, performing what they promised in their behalf, viz. Chastity, fasting on Wednesday and Friday, and the four Lents of the year. 3. Reputing Baptism not to be of any efficacy, except ministered by the Priest, in the open Church, in what extremity soever. 4. And yet not baptising any Children till the sortieth day, though they die in the interim. 5. Giving to Infants the Sacrament of the Eucharist, assoon as Christened. 6. Contracting marriages even in the second Degree of Consanguinity, without dispensation. 7. Observing not the Lords day, nor any of the Festivials, except only in Cities. 8. And in their Liturgies, reading the Gospel written by Nicodemus. The points wherein they differ from the Church of Rome, 1. Administering the Sacrament of the Lords Supper under both kinds. 2. Administering in leavened bread. 3. Admitting neither Extreme unction, nor the use of the Eucharist to those that are sick. 4. Nor Purgatory, nor Prayer for the dead 5. Not using Elevation in the act of Administering. And 6. Reckoning the Roman Church for Heretical and esteeming no better of the Latins than they do of the Jews. In these opinions they continue hitherto against all Opponents and persuasions: For though Baronius in the end of the sixth Tome of his Annals, hath registered an Ambassage from Marcus the then Patriarch of Alexandria, to Pope Clement the 8. wherein he is said to have submitted himself and the Churches of Egypt to the Pope of Rome; yet upon further search made, it was found but a Cheat, devised to hold up the reputation of a sinking cause. The Patriarch of Alexandria still adhereth to his own Authority; though many of late, by the practice and solicitation of some busy Friars, have been drawn to be of the Religion of the Church of Rome, and to use her Liturgies.  
What their Religion was before Christianity, is obvious to the eye of a vulgar Reader; even the worst of Gentilism; these People not only worshipping the Sun, Moon, and the Stars of Heaven, creatures of greatest use and glory; nor only sacrificing to Jupiter, Hercules, Apollo, and the rest of the Gods, (many of whom were Authors in their several times of some public benefit to mankind) as did other Gentiles; but attributing Divine honours to Crocodiles, Snakes, Serpents, Garlic. Leeks and Onions. For which, as worthily condemned by the Christian Fathers, so most deservedly exposed unto public scorn, by the pens of the Poets.  
Porrum & caepe nesas violare, & laedere morsu.  
Felice's populi, quibus haec nascuntur in Hortis  
Numina.— Quis nescit qualia demens  
Aegyptus portenta col●t, etc.  
Which may be rendered to this purpose.  
To bite an Onion or a Leek, is more  
Than deadly sin. The Numen they adore  
Grows in their Gardens. And who doth not know  
What monstrous Shapes for Gods in Egypt go?  
But the God most esteemed by them, and by all sorts of the Egyptians the most adored, was Apis, a coal black Ox, with a white star in his forehead, the Effigies of an Eagle on his back, and two hairs only in his tail. But it seemeth his Godship was not so much respected by Strangers. For Cambyses when he conquered Egypt, ran him with his sword thorough the thigh and caused all his Priests to be scourged: And Augustus being here, would not vouchsafe to see him, saying, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that the Gods and not the Oxen of Egypt were the object of his devotions. A speech most truly worthy so brave an Emperor.  
Amongst the Rarities of this Country, some were the works of nature, and some of industry and magnificence. Of this last kind, I reckon the Labyrinth, the Pyramids, and the Ph●ros; all of them admirable in their several kinds, the envy of the Ages past, and the astonishment of the present. Of the Labyrinth we shall speak anon, in the course of our business. Look we now on the Pyramids, many in number, three most celebrated and one the principal of all, situate on the South of the City of Memphis, and on the Western banks of Nilus. This last, the chief of the World's seven Wonders, square at the bottom, is supposed to take up eight acres of ground. Every square 300. single paces in length, ascended by 255. steps, each step above three Foot high, and a breadth proportionable; growing by degrees narrower and narrower till we come to the top, and at the top consisting but of three stones only, yet large enough for 60. men to stand upon. No stone so little in the whole as to be drawn by any of our Carriages, yet brought thither from the Arabian Mountains. How brought, and by what Engine mounted, is an equal wonder. Built for the Sepulchre of Cheops, an Egyptian King (as were the rest for others of those mighty Princes) who employed in it day by day twenty years together, no fewer than 366000. men continually working on it. The charges which they put him to, in no other food than Garlic, Radishes, and Onions, being computed at a thousand and eight hundred Talents. The next to this in bulk and beauty, is said to be the work of a daughter of Cheops, enabled (as Herodotus writeth) both to finish her Father's undertaking, and raise her own unto the height, by the prostitution of her body, requiring but one stone towards the work from each one of her Customers; but the tale unlikely. Nor is it of a greater Truth. though affirmed by Josephus, and supposed by many good Divines, that the drudgery put upon the Israelites did concern these Pyramids: the Materials of these works being stone; their employment, brick: But past all doubt, advanced by those considerate Princes upon good advice, and not for ostentation only of their power and glories. For by this means they did not only eternize their memory to succeeding Ages, but for the present kept the Subject from sloth and idleness; who being a People prone unto Innovations, were otherwise like enough to have fed that sin in the change of Government, if not thus prudently diverted.  
Next these Pyramids, I place the Isle and Tower of Pharos, the Island opposite unto Alexandria, once a mile distant from the Land, but joined to the Continent by Cleopatra on this occasion. The Rh●dians than Lords of the Sea, used to exact some tribute or acknowledgement out of every Island within those Seas; and consequently out of this. Their Ambassadors sent unto Cleopatra to demand this tribute, she detained with her seven days, under colour of celebrating some solemn Festivals; and in the mean time, by making huge dams and banks in the Sea, with incredible both charge and speed, united the Island to the shore. Which finished, she sent the Rhodians away emptyhanded, with this witty jeer telling them that they were to take Toll of the Islands, and not of the Continent. A work of great rarity and magnificence, both for the bigness of it, taking up seven Furlongs of ground, and for that cause called Heptastadium, and that incredible speed wherewith it was finished. As for the Watch Tower, called in Greek and Latin Pharos, by the name of the Island, it was built by Ptolemy Philadelphus for the benefit of Sailors (the Seas upon that coast being very unsafe and full of Flats) to guide them over the Bar of Alexandria. Deservedly esteemed another of the World's seven Wonders: the other five being 1. the Mausolaeum, 2. the Temple of Ephesus, 3. the Walls of Babylon, 4. the Colossus of Rhodes, and 5. the Statue of Jupiter Olympicus. This Watchtower, or Pharos, was of wonderful height, ascended by degrees, and having many Lanterns at the top, wherein lights burned nightly, as a direction to such as sailed by Sea. The Materials were white marble the chief Architect, Sostratus of G●idos, who ingraved on the work this inscription, Sostratus of Gnidos, the son of Dexiphanes, to the God's protectors, for the safeguard of Sailors. This inscription he covered with plaster, and thereon ingraved the name and title of the King the Founder: to the end that the King's name being soon wasted and washed away, his own which was written in marble, might be eternised to posterity, as the Founder of it. Nigh unto this Pharos, Caesar pursuing Pompey into Egyp●, and having discontented the King thereof, by demanding pay for his Soldiers, had his Navy which here lay at anchor assaulted by Achilles, one of young Ptolemy's servants, Caesar himself being then in Alexandria. Hearing of the skirmish he hasted to the Pharos, meaning to succour his Navy in person: but the Egyptians making towards him on all sides, he was compelled to leap into the Sea, and swim for his life. And though to avoid their Darts he sometimes ducked: yet held he still his left hand above the water, and in it divers Books, which he carried safe unto his ships; and animating his men, got the victory. It is said that Egypt hath only two doors; the one by land, which is the strong Town of Peleusium, or Damiata; the other by water, which is this Pharus: Tota Aegyptus maritimo accessu, Pharo; pedestre verò, Pelusio, velut claustris munita existimatur, saith Opius.  
Amongst the rarities of Nature, we may reckon those strange Beasts and Fishes, proper almost unto this Country, i e. the Crocodile, the Ichneumon, the Hippopotamus (or Sea-horse) the Ibis, the Asp, and many several sorts of Serpents. To speak of which particularly were a work more proper to a Natural History, than a Geographical. And yet the Crocodile, more proper unto Egypt then all the rest, cannot be parted with in silence: A creature of a strange nature, hatched of an egg no bigger than that of a Turkey; and yet increasing to the length of thirty foot: his tail as long as all the rest of his body, with which he is accustomed to entail his prey, and draw it into the River: His feet armed with claws, and his back with impenetrable scales; his mouth so wide (of which he moveth only the upper jaw) that he is able to swallow a whole Heifer: equally used to both Elements, but better sighted in the water, then on the land: Cowardly, though a Creature of prey, and such as usually flies from those which dare set upon him; and easily vanquished by the Dolphin, who swimming under the water woundeth him in the belly, where assaultable only. Whether so easily destroyed by the Ichncumon (a kind of Water-Rat) skipping into his mouth, and gnawing his way out again, as old Writers say, hath of late been questioned. That which I look on as a rarity of the greatest moment, if not rather to be accounted supernatural) is that, about five miles from the City of Cairo, there is a place in which on every Good Friday yearly, there appear the heads, legs and arms of men rising out of the ground, to a very great number: which if a man draw near unto them, or touch any of them, will shrink again into the earth. Supposed by some to be an Imposture of some Watermens only, who stick them overnight in the sands, and keeping them secret to themselves, obtain thereby the Ferrying over of many thousands of People, to behold the sight. But Stephen Dupleis, a sober and discerning man, in the opinion of Goulartius, who reports it from him, conceived otherwise of it, affirming surely that he was an eye-witness of the wonder, that he had touched divers of these rising Members, and that as he was once so doing to the head of a child, a man of Cairo cried out unto him, Kali, Kali ante materasde, that is to say, Hold, hold, you know not what you do. A strange Forerunner (if it be of undoubted credit) of the Resurrection of the whole Body, presented yearly in the rising of these several parts.  
Of less dispute, but not less rarity in nature, are these that follow. 1. That in all this Country it never raineth; or if a cloud do sometimes happen to dissolve upon them, it bringeth on their bodies innumerable sores, and strange diseases. 2. The annual overflowing of the River Nilus, and the many memorable things which are said to follow on the same. Of which it is thus said by Lucan; 

Terra suis contenta bonis, non indiga mercis,  
Aut Jovis; in solo tanta est fiducia Nilo:   

The earth content with its own wealth, doth crave  
No Foreign Mart, nor Jove himself; they have  
Their hopes alone in Nilus' fruitful wave.   This Nilus hath his head, not in the Mountains of the Moon, as the Ancients thought, but in the Lake Zembre, in Aethiopia Interior: and running in one continual Channel (excepting where it brancheth into little Islands, as it sometimes doth) till it washeth the midland of Egypt, is before its influx into the Sea, divided into seven great streams, opening into the Sea with so many mouths, namely, 1. Heracleoticum, 2. Bolviticum, 3. Schaniticum, 4. Patinicum, 5. Mendesium, 6. Caniticum, 7. Pelusaicum. The first and last of these currents (which are the only two now left) being far distant from other, and growing into one, at the first point of the River's division, make that part of Egypt which is called Delta, because to such as come to this Country out of Greece, Italy, or Anatolia, it resembleth the Greek letter Δ. The other part is called Thebais, from Thebes, the chief City of it.  
This Nilus from the 15. day of June, swelleth above his banks, for the space of 40. days; and in as many more, gathereth his waters again to their proper bounds. If it flow not to the height of fifteen Cubits, than the earth is deficient in her abundance of increase, for want of moisture: and if the waters surmount the superficies of the Earth, more than seventeen Cubits, then, like a drunken man, it cannot produce its natural operation, as having his stomach (as it were) over-laid, and surcharged with too much liquor: but if the mean be granted, there is no Country which can brag of the like Fertility; the Corn being all housed before the 20. of May. During this Inundation, they keep their beasts and cattle on the tops of such little hills, which either the Providence of Nature or the industry of man hath prepared for them; where they abide till the decrease of the Waters; and on these hills also stand the most of their Towns and Villages, appearing in the time of the Flood, like so many Islands, and holding a commerce and continual traffic by the intercourse of Boats and Shallops, by which they do transport their marketable commodities from one place to another. And if it chance at any time that the River doth not thus overflow the Country, it is not only the Forerunner to a following dearth, but prognosticateth some ensuing mischief to the Prince and State. Confirmed by the testimony of good and creditable Authors; who have told us that in the 10. and 11. years of Cleopatra, the River increased not at all: that it was noted as a Foreteller of the Fall of those two great, but unfortunate Princes, Cleopatra & her Sweetheart Antonius. A second commodity which ariseth from the overflowings of Nilus, is the health which it bringeth with it in most parts of the Country; the Plague which oftentimes miserably rageth upon the first day of the flood, abating instantly: insomuch that whereas 500 may die of that disease in the City of Cairo but the day before, there dieth not one of it on the day following. A third wonder in this River, is, that keeping its waters united in a body together after it falleth into the Sea; it changeth the colour of the Mediterranean further than any part of it can be seen from the shore. Add unto these the many living creatures which the slime thereof engendereth on the withdrawing of the River to its natural channel: whereof Ovid thus, 
Sic ubi deseruit madidos septemfluus agros  
Nilus, & antiquo sua flumina reddidit alveo,  
Plurima Cultores versis Animalia glebis  
Inveniunt.  Which I English thus. 
So when the Seven-mouthed Nile the fields forsakes,  
And to his ancient Channel him betakes,  
The Ploughmen many living Creatures find,  
By turning up the mud that's left behind.  Amongst which Creatures so engendered, are said to be such innumerable heaps of Frogs, that if Nature, or Divine Providence rather, did not furnish this Country with a proportionable number of Storks, by whom they are greedily devoured, the Plague of Frogs would come a second time upon them to their utter destruction. Now because Nilus runneth in its certain Channels, and that the People have no other water to make use of for all necessities, there are many By-trenches and deep Ditches cut in convenient places, (by the care and munificence of their Kings) to receive its waters, and to communicate them to the People, who know almost no other drink then the waters hereof, and indeed they need not, the water of this River being of such excellent both taste and virtue, that when Pescominus Niger saw his Soldier's murmur for want of Wine, What (said he) do you grumble for wine, having the waters of Nile to drink?  
On the banks of the River stood that famous Labyrinth built by Psamniticus, which we have touched upon before; situate on the South of the Pyramids, and North of Arsinoe, or the City of Crocodiles. It contained within the compass of one continued wall, a thousand houses, and twelve Royal Palaces, all covered with Marble, and had only one entrance, but innumerable turnings and returnings, sometimes one over another, and all in a manner envious to such as were not well acquainted with them: The building more under the ground, then above; the Marble stones laid with such art, that neither Wood nor Cement was employed in any part of the Fabric; the Chambers so disposed, that the Doors upon their opening did give a report no less terrible than a crack of Thunder; the main Entrance all of White-marble, adorned with stately Columns, and most curious Imagery: The end at length being attained, a pair of Stairs of 90 steps conducted into a gallant Portice, supported with Pillars of Theban stone; which was the entrance into a fair and spacious Hall, (the place of their general Conventions) all of polished Marble, set out with the Statues of their Gods. A work which afterwards was imitated by Daedalus in the Cretan Labyrinth; though that fell as short of the glories of this, as Minos was inferior unto Psamniticus in power and riches.  
On the Banks of this River also grew those sedgy Weeds called Papyri, of which Paper was made in former times: They divided it into thin flakes, (into which it naturally parteth) then laying them on a Table, and moyst'ning them with the glutinous waters of the River, they prested them together, and after dried them in the Sun. By means of this Invention, Books being easier to be transcribed and reserved then formerly, Ptolemy Philadelphus made his excellent Library at Alexandria: and understanding how Attalus King of Pergamus, by the benefit of this Egyptian Paper, strove to exceed him in that kind of magnificence, prohibited the carrying of it out of Egypt. Hereupon Attalus invented the use of Parchments, made of the skins of Calves and Sheep; from the materials called Membranae, and Pergamena from the place where they were invented. The convenience whereof was the cause that in short time the Egyptian Paper was worn out of use; in place whereof succeeded our Paper made of Rags, the Authors of which excellent Invention our Progenitors have forgotten to commit to memory. Before the use of these Papers and Parchments were first made known, I observe three ways of writing amongst the Ancients, (I hope I shall be pardoned this short digression.) 1. On the inward side of the Bark of a Tree, which is in Latin called Liber, and whence Books have the name of Libri. 2. On Tables framed out of the main body of a Tree, which being called Caudex, gave the Latins occasion to call a Book Codex. 3. They used to cover their Tables over with Wax, and thereon to write what they had to signify, from whence a Letter-carrier was named Tabellarius. The Instrument wherewith they wrote, was a sharp-pointed Iron, which they called Stylus, a word now signifying (the Original derived from hence) the peculiar kind of Phrase which any man useth; as, Negligens stylus, in Quintilian; and Exercitatus stylus, in Cicero. I should have also noted, that they used sometimes to write in Leaves; That the Sibyls Oracles being so written and scattered abroad, had the name of Sibyllae Folia, and that from thence we have the phrase of a Leaf of Paper. But of this Argument enough.  
Having thus done with the Rarities concerning Nilus, and that great increase of wealth which accrued thereby to all the Country, in the improvement of the natural commodities of the Earth: let us next look on the Red-Sea, and the great Riches which that brought unto this Kingdom, in the way of Trading. A Sea whereof we have spoke already, as to the reason of the name, the extent thereof, and the several Islands contained in it; and therefore shall not need to repeat it here. That which is proper to this Country, and to this alone, is the fame it hath for the miraculous passage of the Israelites through it as upon dry-land, and the drowning of Pharaohs Cenchres and all his people, at large commemorated in the books of Holy Scriptures: as also for that through it the Spices of India and Arabia were brought to Alexandria, and thence by the Venetians dispersed through all Europe, Africa, and Asia. I suppose I shall not do amiss to set down historically out of Galuano, a relation of the beginning, continuance, and period of the Traffic through this Sea, by which all Europe formerly received so great commodity. Know then (saith he) that Ptolemy Philadelphus, 277 years before the Incarnation was the first that set on foot this Navigation: Cosir (of old called Myos-Hormos) on the seaside, being the ordinary Haven, out of which they hoist sail for India; and into which they returned, full fraught with their commodities. From hence they were by land conveyed to Coptus, and so down the Nile to Alexandria: by which Traffic the City grew exceeding rich; insomuch that the Custom-house there yielded Ptol-Auletes 7 millions and an half of gold yearly. The Romans being Lords of Egypt, enhansed the Customs to double that sum: they sent into India every year (as Pliny witnesseth) 120 ships, whose lading was worth 1200000 Crowns; and there was made in return of every Crown, 100 When the Vandals, Lombard's, Goths, and Moors had torn in pieces the Roman Empire, all commerce between Nations began to cease. At last perceiving the inconvenience, they began anew: conveying the Indian commodities, partly by land, partly by water, unto Capha in Taurica Chersonesus, belonging to the Genoese: Next Trabezond was made the Mart-town, than Sarmachand in Zagatate, where the Indian, Turkish, and Persian Merchants met to barter wares: the Turks conveying their merchandise to Damascus, Baratti, and Aleppo; from whence the Venetians transported it to Venice, making that the common Emporium of Christendom. Once again, viz. Anno 1300. the Sultan's of Egypt restored the passage by the Red-Sea; which having continued more than 200 years, is now discontinued by the Portugals, Spaniards, English and Dutch, which bring them to their several homes by the back side of afric: So that not only the Traffic of Alexandria is almost decayed, and the Riches of the Venetians much diminished; but the Drugs and Spices have lost much of their virtue, as impaired by too much moisture. So much saith he, touching the course and alteration of this Trading: to which I shall take leave to add, That for the better and more quick return of such Commodities as were usually brought into this Sea, some of the Kings of Egypt attempted formerly to cut a main Channel from it, to the River Nilus, passable by Ships of greatest burden; the marks of whose proud attempts are remaining still. Sesostris was the first who designed the work, having before with good success cut many Trenches from the River, and some Navigable, into many places of the Country; by which unprofitable Marshes were drained, the Country strengthened, Trade made easy, and the People better furnished with water then in former times. Darius' the great Persian Monarch, seconded the same Project; so did one of the Ptolemy's; The like is said of a Capricious Portugal in these later times. But they all gave it over on the same consideration, which was a fear lest by letting in the Red-Sea they might drown the Country, and perhaps make a second Deluge in the parts of Greece and Asia Minor which lay nearest to them; that Sea being found to be much higher than the Mediterranean, and the flats of Egypt.  
But here we are to understand, that all which hitherto hath been spoken concerning Egypt, relates to Egypt strictly and specially so called, containing only so much of the Country of Egypt as lieth upon the Banks and Channels of the River Nilus; and not to all that tract of ground which lay betwixt the Red-Sea and the borders of Libya, which was reckoned in the compass of the kingdom of Egypt; much less as comprehending Libya and Cyrene also, though now accounted Members of that great Body, and anciently parts or Provinces of the Diocese of it. For Egypt, in the largest sense and acception of the word, may be, and generally is divided into these three parts, viz. 1. Egypt, in the general notion, or the Kingdom of Egypt, extended on the Mediterranean from the borders of Idumaea to the the Roman Libya or Marmarica, lying Westward of the mouth of Nilus, called Heracleoticum, and on the borders of Aethiopia Superior, from the said Red-Sea, to the Country of Libya Interior. 2. Libya, or Marmarica, lying betwixt Egypt properly so called, and the Province of Cyrene, or Pentapolis. And 3. Cyrene or Pentapolis, reaching from that Libya to the greater Syrtis, where it bordered with that part of the African Diocese, which is now called the Kingdom of Tunis. And in this first acception of it we shall now proceed to a Survey of the Mountains, and chief Cities; which done, we shall describe the other in their proper places; and then unite them all in the General Story.  
As for the Mountains of this Country, there are very many: there were no living else for the people in the time of the overflowings of the River. The principal of these, 1. Those called Montes Libyei, lying in a long chain on the West of Nilus; 2. Alabastrinus; 3. Porphyritus; 4. Troigus; 5. Basanitus on the East thereof. Betwixt these Hills the course of the River is so hemmed in on both sides, that at the upper part of the stream where it first entereth into Egypt, the space betwixt the Mountains is not above four miles broad, enlarging afterwards to eight, then about Cairo to thirty seven; thence opening wider and wider, till we come to the breaches of the Delta, as the Country doth increase in breadth. On these and other of the Mountains and lesser Hills, stand most part of the Towns, the receptacles of the Countrypeople in the time of the Flood, rising when lest, to fifteen cubits, or seven yards and an half.  
Rivers of note here are none but Nilus, nor indeed any one but that; that being sufficient of itself to enrich this Country, which otherwise would be nothing but a Sandy Desert. But what they want in Rivers, is supplied with Lakes and Trenches, which serve for watering their cattle, tempering of mortar for their buildings, and other such inferior uses; sometimes perhaps for drink for the poorer sort, who cannot be conveniently furnished with the waters of Nile. Amongst the Trenches (which were many, as before was said) those of most estimation were the Works of Ptolemy and the Emperor Trajan: the first falling into that branch of the Nile, which maketh the Isle called Heracleotis; the other into the main body of it, not far from Cairo. These two, by reason of the many fresh springs which fall into them, have the name of Rivers in old Authors; and betwixt these was seated the Land of Goshen, extending from Nilus to the Red-Sea, on the East and West. The chief of note amongst the Lakes, were those called, 1. Mareotis, not far from Alexandria, by Pliny called Arapotes, Maria by Ptolemy; all which names are now lost, and changed into that of Lagodi Antacon, from a Town of that name near unto it. 2. Laccus, supposed to be the same which in the book of Maccabees is called Asphar, lib. 1. cap. 9 And 3. Moeris, now called Buchaira, more memorable than the rest, in compass 3500 furlongs, 50 fathom deep, in the midst whereof were two Pyramids 50 fathoms above the water, and as much beneath it: the Fish of this Lake, for one fix months in the year, said to be worth twenty of their pounds a day to the King's Exchequer; for the other six, each day a Talon. 4. The Lakes called Amari, into which the Trench or River called Ptolomaeus, doth discharge its waters, conveyed from thence into the Red-Sea.  
The whole divided anciently into two parts only, 1. That called Delta, betwixt the two extreme branches of the River Nilus, the form of which letter it resembleth to him who standing on the Seashore could take a view of it. 2. That called Thebais, from Thebes the principal City of it, comprehending all the rest of the course of that River, shut up on both sides with the Mountains spoken of before. But this Division leaving out all those parts hereof which lie on the East-side towards the Arabian Golves, and on the West as far as to the borders of Libya Marmarica: the Macedonians laying it all together, divided it into 18 canters or Districts, by them called Nomi, increased in the time of Ptolemy the Geographer to 46. Ortelius out of divers Authors hath found 20 more. When conquered by the Romans, and made a Diocese of the Empire, it was divided into four Provinces, (not reckoning Marmarica, and Cyrene into the account:) that is to say, 1. Aegyptus specially so called, containing all the Delta, and the District or Nomus of Mareotica, bordering on Marmarica, 2. Augustanica, so called from Augustus Caesar, on the East of the Delta, betwixt it and Arabia Petraea. 3. Arcadia, so called from the Emperor Arcadius, in whose time it was taken out of Thebais, lying on both sides of the River, from the Delta to the City of Antinous. 4. Thebais, extending on both sides of the River from the borders of Libya Marmarica to the Red-Sea, (as the other doth) unto Aethiopia. Divided otherwise by some, into Superiorem, reaching from Aethiopia to the City of Antinous; Mediam, stretching thence to the point of the Delta; and Inferiorem, which comprehendeth all the rest. But at this time, that part hereof which lieth on the South and East of Cairo, is called Saved, or Salved, honoured heretofore with the dwelling of the ancient Pharaohs, because nearest unto Aethiopia their most puissant neighbour. 2. That betwixt Cairo, Rosetta, and Alexandria, hath the name of Errifia, wherein the Ptolomaean Princes did most reside, because most convenient for receiving supplies of men from the States of Greece. And finally, that from Cairo to Tenese and Damiata, is now called Maremna, in which the Turks and Mamalucks made the seat of their Empire, because more neighbouring to the Christians, whom they stood in fear of, as likewise to invade them upon that side. In the whole Country there was reckoned in the time of Amasis the 2d. no fewer than 20000 Cities: but if the Towns and Villages be not reckoned in, I should much doubt of the account. By Diodorus Siculus it is said that there were 3000 in his time: but Ortelius, on a diligent search, finds 300 only.  
Those of most note in the Province of Augustanica, 1. Pelusium, the most Eastern City of Egypt towards Idumaea, situate on the most Eastern channel of Nilus, called hence Pelusiacum; by Ammianus said to be the work of Peleus the Father of Achilles, commanded by the Gods to purge himself in the Lake adjoining, for the murder of his brother Phocus. Accounted for the chief door of Egypt towards the Land, as Pharos was to those who came thither by Sea; the Metropolis of the Province of Augustanica, the birthplace of Ptolemy the Geographer, and the Episcopal See of S. Isidore, surnamed Pelusiotes, whose eloquent and pious Epistles are still extant. Out of the ruins hereof (if not the same under another title) arose, 2. Damiata, memorable for the often Sieges laid unto it by the Christian Armies; for none more than that under John de Brenne the titulary King of Jerusalem, and the Princes of Europe, An. 1220. During which (being of 18 month's continuance) the Famine and the Pestilence so extremely raged, that the Town in a manner was dispeopled, before the Besiegers knew any thing of their condition: till in the end two venturous Soldiers, admiring the silence and solitude of so great a City, in a Bravado scaled the walls, but found no man to make resistance: the next day the whole Army entered, where they found in every house and every corner of the streets whole heaps of dead bodies, none to give them burial; A lamentable and ruthful spectacle! 3. Heros, or Civitas Heroum, in the Arabian Isthmus, at the very bottom of the Golf; remarkable for the first interview betwixt Jacob and Joseph, after his coming into Egypt. 4. Heliopolis, or the City of the Sun, now called Betsames, in the Scriptures On, of which Potiphar the Father of Asenath (whom Pharaoh married unto joseph) was priest or Prince, as is said Gen. 41. 45. Given (as josephus telleth us) for an habitation to the sons of jacob; by consequence one of the chief Cities of the Land Rameses' or Goshen; and memorable in times succeeding for a public Temple built for the jews with the consent of Ptolemy surnamed Philadelphus, by Onias the Highpriest, then dispossessed of his authority and office by the power of Antiochus: a Temple much esteemed by the Hellinists or Grecizing jews; and though Schismatical at the best in its first original, yet not Schismatical and Idolatrous, as was that of Mount Garizim. 5. Bubustis, somewhat more North than Heliopolis, by some of the Ancients called Avaris, by the Scriptures Pibeseth, another City of that tract, now better known by the name of Zioth, supposed to be the same which the Notitia calleth Castra judaeorum; memorable in times of Paganism for a famous Temple of Diana. 6. Arsinoe, on the shore of the Red Sea, so called in honour of Arsinoe sister of Philadelphus, and wife to Lysimachus King of Thrace; afterwards called Cleopatris, in honour of Queen Cleopatra: now better known by the name of Sues; Of great commerce and trading in the time of the Ptolemy's: Now almost abandoned, and would be utterly deserted, were it not made the station of the Turkish Galleys, that command the Gulf: which being framed at Cairo of such Timber as is brought thither by sea from the Woods of Cilicia, and sometimes from the Shores of the Euxine Sea, are again taken in pieces, carried from Cairo unto this City on the backs of Camels, and here joined together. Conceived to be the same which in former times was called Baal Zephon (of which see Exod. 14. 9) the last incamping-place of the Tribes of Israel, who from hence passed through the Red Sea, as upon dry land. 7. Gleba Rubra, by the Greeks called Hiera Bolus, and sometimes Erythra Bolus also more near the Latin; the redness of the soil giving name unto it: situate on the River or Trench of Tralan: more memorable for a misfortune that befell it then for any thing else; purposely burnt by Amenophis the fifth, upon this occasion: Being blind, he was assured by some of his Wizards that if he washed his eyes with the Urine of a Woman which had never known any but her own husband, he should be restored unto his sight. After a long search and many vain trials, he met with one whose water cured him; whom he took to wife: and causing all the rest whom he had made trial of, to be brought together to this Town, he set sire on the City, and burned both it and all the women there assembled; which tale, if true, is little to the credit of the Dames of Egypt.  
Places of most note and observation in the Province of Egypt strictly and specially so called, are 1. Alexandria situate Westward of the Delta, over against the Isle of Pharos; and built upon a Promontory thrusting itself into the Sea; with which on the one side, and the Lake Mareotis on the other, it is exceeding well defended: the Work of Alexander the Great, and by him peopled with Greeks immediately after his conquest of Egypt. The Regal Seat of the Ptolemy's, whilst Egypt did maintain the State of a Kingdom: and afterwards the Metropolis of it, when a Roman Diocese; Adorned with many stately buildings; of which most memorable the Serapium (or Temple of their God Separis) for sumptuous workmanship, and the magnificence of the Fabric, inferior to none but the Roman Capitol: and next to that, the Library erected by Philadelphus, who had stored it with 700000. Volumes; unfortunately burnt in the War against Julius Caesar; a City of great trading, and infinite Riches; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the greatest Empory of the World, as is said by Strabo. Wanton with which, the Citizens so abounded in all licentiousness both of life and speech▪ that they spared not the Emperor himself, if he came in their way. But they paid dearly for their folly. For Caracalla not so patient of a Contumely as some wiser Princes, having felt the lashes of their tongues, when he was amongst them, assembled all the youth of the City, as if out of them he would have chosen some to attend his Person; and suddenly gave command to his Soldiers, to put them all to the sword. A slaughter so great and universal, that the River Nilus coloured with the blood of the slain, might not improperly at that time be called a Red Sea. In this City, Anno 180. Gantenus read here both Divinity and Philosophy to all such as would come to hear him: which as it is conceived to give the first hint to the instituting of Universities in the rest of Christendom; so from that small beginning the Schools of Alexandria grew so great and eminent, that Nazianzen calleth them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the shop, or workhouse, as it were, of all kinds of Learning. Much short of what it was even in point of trading, especially since the diversion of the Trading from the Bay of Arabia; and utterly divested of those beauties which once it had. Inhabited at the present by a mixture of Nations, Moors, Jews, Turks, Greeks, and Christian Cophtives; more for some little gain which they reap by Traffic, than any pleasure in the place; Now called Scanderia by the Turks, remarkable only for the house of the Patriarch (though he dwell for the most part in Cairo) and a Church in which S. Mark their first Bishop was said to be buried. 2. Canopus, situate east of Alexandria, and on the principal branch of the Nile, called Heracleoticum, so called from Canopus the Pilot of Menelaus, who having suffered shipwreck upon this coast, was there interred by his Master: A Town so branded in old times for varieties of all kind of beastliness and luxury, that as Seneca very well observed, he that avoided the viciousness and debauchery of it, could not scape the infamy: the very place administering matter for suspicion. 3. Rosetta, on the same branch of the River, and not far from Canopus, out of whose ruins it arose; built by a Slave of one of the Egyptian Caliphs', unwalled and destitute of all Fortifications, but plentifully accommodated with all sorts of commodities, and well frequented by the Merchant. 4. Nicopolis, now called Munia, the Monument of some eminent Victory, and probably of the conquest of Egypt by the Macedonians; the name being Greek, and the Town standing within 30. Furlongs of Alexandria. 5. Aphrodites and Aphroditopolis, so called from Venus who was here worshipped: situate betwixt the two middle branches of the Nile. 6. Sais, betwixt the same branches of the River also; whence that Nomus or Division had the name of Saites. It is now called Sibnit, or Signiti. 7. Plinthine, on the Seaside; and 8. Hierax, more within the land: the chief Towns of the Region called Maraeotica.  
In Arcadia, called also Heptanomus, because it contained seven of the Nomis or Divisions into which Egypt was distributed by the Macedonians, the Places of most note were and are 1. Memph●●▪ on the Western bank of Nile, not far from the sharp point of the Delta, where the River first beginneth to divide itself; the Regal City of the old Egyptian Pharaohs, by one of which who removed the Seat Royal from Thebo hither, it is said to be built; and called thus by the name of his daughter. In compass, when it flourished, about 20. miles; Great, populous, and adorned with a world of Antiquities; amongst others with the Temples of Apis, Venus, and Scrapis, beset with Sphyr●●●▪ now nothing left of the Ruins of it, but the Statues of some monstrous Resemblances, sufficient to ●hew what it hath been formerly. The Pyramids before described, stood not far from hence; to which the Poet relateth, saying, Barbara Pyramidum sileat miracula Memphis. 
Let barbarous Memphis brag no more  
Of her Pyramids, as before.  2. Babylon, called for distinctions sake, Babylon Aegyptiorum, built on the other side of the River, and somewhat more unto the North: said to be founded by Cambyses the Persian Monarch, the first that made this Kingdom stoop to the yoke of a foreigner; and by him peopled with some Babylonians or Chaldaeans, transplanted hither. Great, as appear by the ruins; amongst which many of the Christian Temples and Monasteries do lie there in rubbish; the Castle whereof served long after for the Garrison of the three Legions, appointed to defend this Country in the time of the Romans. This, thought by some to be the Babylon mentioned by S. Peter in his 1 Epistle cap. ult. which the following words, and Mark my son, (S. Mark being the first Bishop of the Alexandrians, and the Apostle of Egypt) may make somewhat probable: but the truth and reality hereof, I dispute not now. Out of the ruins of this City arose, 3. Cairo, now, and for many Ages past the chief of this Country: raised from the ashes of old Babylon by the Chaliphs' of Egypt, and by the Mamalucks made the Seat-Royal of their Kingdom. In compass not above eight miles, but full of Streets, the number of which said to be 18000. every one of them fortified with a Gate at each end; which being well barred, made every several street an impregnable fortress. Found so by Selimus the first, when he conquered Egypt, who spent three days in forcing his way through it with his numerous Army. The private buildings very mean; the public, specially the Mosques, beyond thought magnificent. Visited every seventh year with a dreadful Pestilence; yet still so populous, that it is conveived to be in good health▪ if there die not above a thousand in a day, or 300000 within that year. Adorned with many delicate Orchards both within the City, and without; full of variety of contentments, and neighboured by a pleasant Lake, but made more pleasant by the company which meet there in Boats, for their mutual solace and delights. Fortified at the South end with a stately Castle (the Palace of the Mamaluck Sultan's) situate on the top of a Mountain, overlooking the City, and a great part of the Country also. So large, that it seemeth a City of itself, immured with high walls, divided into many partitions or several Courts, in times past the places of exercise; and entered by doors of iron. Destroyed for the most part, by Selimus, for fear of giving opportunity to some rebellion; or envying the Mamalucks the glory of having been the Masters of so brave a Mansion: that which is left, now serving for the habitation of the Turkish Bassa, who hath the Government of this Kingdom 4. Matared, or Matarea, not far from Cairo; the soil whereof is said to be so rich and fertile, that the People are fain to cover it with sand or gravel, so moderating the extreme rankness of it. 5. Arsinoe, on the West side of the Nile, and somewhat South of the famous Labyrinth before described; called also (to difference it from another of the same name on the shores of the Red-Sea) the City of Crocodiles, in regard of the divine honours there done that Monster. 6. Nilopolis, or Nili Civitas, in the Island called Heracleotis, made by the embracements of the River: most memorable for being the Episcopal See of Cheraemon, a right godly Prelate; of whom see Eusebius in the 6 Book and 34 Chap. of his Ecclesiastical History. 7. Troia, on the Eastern stream which makes that Island, not much observable but for giving name to the Montes Troici lying near unto it, out of which were digged the stones which made the Pyramids. 8. Cynopolis, in a little Island up the water. 9 Hermopolis, or the City of Mercury, called also Hermopolis magna, to difference it from another of that name not far from Alexandria; to which they give the Adjunct of Parva. 10. Antinous, now Antius, founded by Adrian the Emperor, in honour of Antinous his especial favourite; the most Southern City of this Province, on the banks of the Nile. 11. Dionysias, or the City of Bacchus, situate on the Southern end of the Lake of Moeris, in the Nomus or Division called Oasis parva. 12. Clysma, upon the shores of the Golf, a Roman Garrison.  
Cities of most note in the Province of Thebais, 1. Panopolis, the Panos of Antoninus, one of the greatest of this part. 2. Ptolomais, the foundation of one of the Ptolemy's, and the goodliest City of this Province, succeeding unto Thebes both in power and greatness. 3. Saiet, a fair and large Town, six day's journey from Cairo, going up the water; but by what name called amongst the Ancients, I do nowhere find. Affirmed (erroneously, I think) to be the dwelling-place of Joseph and Mary, when they fled with CHRIST our Saviour from the fury of Herod. Beautified with a goodly Temple, but now somewhat ruinous; of the foundation of Helena the mother of Constantine. The City much resorted to (on the strength of this Tradition only) by many aged Christian Cophties, who desire to die there. 4. Diospolis, or the City of Jupiter; all of them on the banks of the River. 5. Tentyra, in a little Isle so called, made by the circlings of the Nile: The inhabitants whereof were the only men who durst encounter the Crocodile; A creature of a terrible name, but a cowardly nature; of which it is said by Ammianus Marcellinus, that it assaulteth those which fly from it, and flieth from those who do assault it; In that point very like the Devil, of whom it is said by the Apostle James, 4, 7. that if he be resisted, he will fly from us. Or as the good old Poet hath it, Est Leo, si fugias; si stas, quasi Musca recedit. 
Give ground, a Lion he will be;  
Stand to it, and away flies he.  6. Coptos, upon the head of a Trench or watercourse which falleth into the Nilus, on the South of Tentyra, but on the other side of the River; in old times a most noted Emporie for Indian and Arabian wares; from whence not only the Christians of this Country are thought to have the name of Cophties, but the whole Country to be originally called Aegyptus, from Ai-Coptus, or the land of Coptus. 7. Thebes, the residence and foundation of that great Tyrant Busiris, in compass 140 furlongs, or 17 miles and an half; called also Hecatompylae, from the number of an hundred Gates which were said to be in it. So beautified with Colossuses, Temples, Palaces, the Sepulchers of the old Egyptian Pharaohs, and other Ornaments of State, that it was thought 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, to be the Nonesuch of the world. Decayed on the removing of the Court to Memphis, it became a ruin so long since, that there was nothing left of it in the time of juvenal; as he telleth us, saying, Atque vetus Thebes centum jacet obruta portis. 
Old Thebes, yielding to the Fates,  
Lies buried with its hundred Gates.  8. Abydus, now called Abutick, once the seat-royal of Memnon, from thence called Memnonium, renowned for the Temple of Osiris; more for the Statue of Memnon, which though made of stone▪ did at the rising of the sun yield a vocal sound. 9 Elephantis, on the banks of Nile, neighboured by Crophi and Mophi, two sharp Rocks, betwixt which the River falling-down with a violent current, makes the Lesser Cataract; of which, and of the greater, we shall speak more fully in Aethiopia. The City seated in an Island of the River Nile, on the borders of Aethiopia sub Aegypto, (as the Ancients called it) known unto Ptolemy by the name of Elephantina, but to our Ecclesiastical writers by the name of Tabenna. Memorable in times of Heathenism for the Town and Temple of Onuphis, wherein stood the Nilometrium or standing-pillar, by which they did observe the increase of the River; removed since to the Castle of Michias, two miles from Cairo: in times of Christianity, for the dwellings of infinite numbers of Monks and Hermits, called from this place Tabenisiotae. 10. Syene, (now Asna) a little North of Elephantis, situate directly under the Tropic of Cancer, and memorable for a deep Well there digged by some Astronomers; which when the Sun entered into that Sign, was wholly enlightened with his beams, without any shadow; so perpendiculary did the body of it stand over the pit. This the last City of Egypt towards Aethiopia.  
And now I should proceed, according to my Method in other places, to the Story of Egypt: but being that Libya and Cyrene are now accounted Members of it, the fortunes whereof they have also followed in all or most of the mutations of State & Government, I shall first take a view of them as the limbs of this body, and show you how they were united under that one Head, by which now directed.   

2. MARMARICA.  
2. LIBRA or MARMARICA, hath on the East, Egypt, properly so called; on the West, Cyrene; on the North, that part of the Mediterranean Sea, which was hence called Mare Libycum, and sometimes Parthenium; and on the South, some part of Aethiopia Superior.  
It had the name of Libya, from the old Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying black, agreeable to the complexion of the people, which is black and swarthy; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, antiqua lingua Graca niger, saith a learned Writer; or possibly enough from Lub, an Arabian word signifying thirst, as suitable unto the nature of the soil, which is dry and sandy, in which respect called by the Greeks Xero-Libya, or Libya sicca. From hence the Southwind, blowing from these Coasts towards Greece and Italy, had the name of Lybs, and the Promontory in Sicily opposite unto it, that of Lilybaeum. It was also called Marmarica, perhaps from the Marmaridae, a chief People of it, though placed by Ptolemy in Cyrene: and sometimes Barca, from Barce a chief City in it; of late times Barca Marmarica, by both names united.  
The Country for the most part very dry and barren, and but meanly peopled; insomuch as Alexander passing through part of it towards the Temple of jupiter Hammon, in the space of four days saw neither Man, Beast, Bird, Tree, nor River. Covered over in most places with a thick, light sand, which the winds remove up and down continually, turning valleys into hills, and hills into valleys. Found by Cambyses to his cost, who as basely esteeming of the Gods as he did of his Subjects, sent part of his Army into this Country to destroy the Temple above mentioned; but in the passage towards that prohibited place, fifty thousand of them were overwhelmed and smothered in a storm of sand, the rest with much ado escaping. Called therefore Xero-Libya, or Libya Sicca, as before was noted; and Libya sitiens, thirsty Libya, (— per calidas Libyae sitientis arenas) in that Verse of Lucan.  
The people, neighbours unto Egypt; and consequently much of the same condition. Said by Herodotus (by whom they are called Adyrnachidae) to be governed by the like Laws and Customs as the Egyptians were; but to differ from them in their habit. Of colour dark and black, of constitution lean and dry, and inclining to Melancholy; angry on every light occasion, very litigious, and eager prosecutors of their deuce. By an old observation among themselves, they abstained both from Beef and Hog-meat. So obstinate in denying their accustomed Tributes, that he who could not show the marks of his sufferings for it, either black or blue, was accounted no body: And so resolved to conceal any thing disgraceful to them, that if any of them were apprehended for a Robbery, no torment could compel him to tell his name. At this time, little differing in person, temper or condition, from the Egyptians, Moors, and Arabes, intermixed amongst them.  
Converted to the faith of Christ, with, or not long after the rest of Egypt, of which then reckoned for a Province, it became part of the Patriarchate of Alexandria; whose jurisdiction over it was confirmed by the Council of Nice: to the calling of which famous Council, this Country occasionally concurred, by bringing into the World that wretched Arius, who with his Heterodexies and contentious Cavils had disturbed the Church. His Heresy condemned in that famous Council; but his Person, by the Divine justice of God, reserved to a more remarkable punishment. Being sent for by the Emperor Constantine to make a Recantation of his former Heresies, he first writ out a Copy of his own Opinions, which he hid in his bosom; and then writing out the Recantation expected from him, took oath that he did really mean as he had written: which words the Emperor referred to the Recantation, he to the Paper in his bosom. But God would not be so cozened, though the Emperor was. For as he passed in triumph through the streets of Constantinople, he drew aside into a private house of Ease, where he voided his guts into the draught, and sent his soul as an Harbinger to the Devil to make room for his body.  
Not more infamous for the birth of this Miscreant, who denied the Divinity of Christ; then famous for the birth of one of the Sibyls, hence surnamed Libyca, by whom the same had been foreshewn. Which Sibyls seem to have taken denomination from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. jovis consiliorum consciae. They were in number ten, viz. 1. Persica, 2. Libyca, 3. Delphica, 4. Cumaea, 5. Samia, 6. Hellespontiaca, 7. Tiburtina, 8. Albunea, 9 Erythraea, and 10. Cumana; which last is affirmed to have written the Nine books of the Sibyls. They were all presented by an old woman to Tarqvinius Superbus; but he not willing to pay so great a sum of money as was demanded, denied them; whereupon the old women burnt three of them, requiring as much money for the other six, as for all; which being denied, she also burned the other three, ask as much for the three remaining, as for the rest; which Superbus, amazed, gave, and the old Trot vanquished. These books contained manifest tokens of the kingdom of Christ, his name, his birth, and death. They were burned by the Arch-traitor Stilico. So that those Prophecies of theirs which are now extant, are for the most part only such as had been extracted out of other writings, where their authority had been quoted. Concerning which, though Causabon and some other of out great Philologers conceive them to be piae frauds, composed of purpose by the Fathers of the Primitive times, to win credit to the Faith of CHRIST; yet dare I not so far disparage those most godly men, as to believe they would support so strong an edifice with so weak a prop, or borrow help from falsehood to evict a truth; Or if they durst have been so impudently venturous, how easy had it been for their learned Adversaires, Porphyry, Julian, and the rest of more eminent note, to have detected the Imposture, and silenced the Christian Advocates with reproach and scorn? But of this enough here; more at large elsewhere.  
Rivers of note I find not any. 'Tis well, if in a Country so full of sands, there be any at all: some Lakes I meet with in my Authors, the principal of which, 1 Laccus, 2 Lacus Lacomedis, now Linxamo, 3 Cleartus; sufficient to preserve their few cattle from the taint of thirst. The Mountains of most note, those called Anogombri, 2. and that named Azar; this last extended West and East in a straight line, from the 51 degree of Longitude, to the 53. 3 Aliphus; 4 Ogdomus; 5 Tmodes; 6 Alpis; not much observable, but that they serve for Landmarks to discover the Country.  
Towns of note there are none now in it. Of most esteem in former times, 1 Batrachus, by some called Menelaus, an Haven-town. 2 Phthia, and 3 Anesisphyra, two Port-towns also. 4 Tetrapyrgia, so called from its four Towers, the Antipyrgus of Ptolemy. 5 Mesuchis, more within the land. 6 Mazacila, another midland town. 7 Chaereola, mentioned among the chief Cities of this tract, by Ammianus. 8 Paraetonium, now Porto-rassa, which with Pelusium are by Florus called the two Horns of Egypt, which whosoever held fast, would be sure to master it. By some old writers it had formerly been called Ammonia, as we read in Stephanus and Strabo, from the Temple of Jupiter Hammon, seated very near it. So anciently honoured with an Oracle, (if that were any honour to it) that Semiramis is said to have come hither to inquire of her death; Perseus and Hercules, touching their Adventures. The like, but not long after, was done by Alexander the Great: but the Oracle by that time had learned to flatter, and puffed him up with a proud conceit of being the son of that God whom he came to worship. The Temple seated in the middle of a vast sandy Desert, environed with a pleasant and delightful Grove, about six miles or more in circuit, watered with wholesome springs, refreshed with a temperate air, and shaded with Fruit-bearing trees, which carried in their leaves a perpetual spring; Fortified with a triple wall, within the first whereof was a Royal Palace of the kings, within the second a Seraglio for his Women, in the third Lodgings for the Officers of Court; The Oracle fitly placed (so the Priests would have it) near the Seraglio of the Ladies; Before the entrance a fair Fountain, wherein the Oblations were first washed, then offered. A place of great repute in sacred and Civil estimate; all the adjoining Country taking hence the name of Ammoniaca, and by that name reckoned amongst the Provinces of the Patriarchate of Alexandria. 9 Antiphra, on the East border of it, towards Alexandria. 10 Barce, called afterwards Ptolemais, by the name of one of the Ptolemy's, by whom repaired and beautified. Of such account, that from hence the whole Country had the name of Barca, and the Inhabitants of Barcaei, (— Latéque furentes Barcaei) as in that of Virgil.  
The old Inhabitants hereof, were the Libyarchae and Bassachitae, in the North; the Ogdoni, Buzes, and Adyrmachidae, in the South; the Goniatae, and Prosaditae, in the midland parts; the Libyaegyptii, bordering nearest unto Egypt, with the people whereof so intermingled, as to make up betwixt them but one name and nation. Others there were of less, or as little note, but all descended properly of Naphtuhim the son of Misraim▪ from whom the name of Neptune, originally a Libyan Deity, seems to be deri●ed ●et so, that Lehabin his brother must come in for a share; the founder, as it is conceived, of the Libyaegyptii before mentioned. Being then of the same original with those of Egypt, they followed the same fortunes also, till the times of the Ptolemy's; by whom sometimes given for portion, with the title of a kingdom to their younger children. By the last will and testament of Apion, the last King hereof, a Bastard-son of Ptolemy surnamed Euergetes, the seventh King of that house, bequeathed unto the Senate and People of Rome. By whom first suffered to live under them, as a Free-Estate ●●ll the conquest of Egypt; then reckoned as a part of that, and so accordingly described by Ptolomic; wh●re Libya, Marmarica, and Ammoniaca, occur amongst the Nomis or Divisions of i● Afterward made a distinct Province of that Diocese and governed by a Lord Precedent, under the Praesectus Augustalis, or Supreme Commander for the Emperors.   

3. CYRENE.  
CYRENE is bounded on the East with Marmarica, on the West with Africa Propria, or the Realm of Tunis, and some part of the Mediterranean, and the Creater Syrtis; on the North with the Mediterranean wholly; on the South with Libya Inferior, or the Deserts of Libya.  
It took this name from Cyrene the chief City of it, from whence sometimes also called Cyrenaica; by Pliny and some other Roman Writers it is called Pentapolis, from five chief Cities which were in it, viz 1 Cyrene, 2 Ptolemais, 3 Arsinoe 4 Darnis, 5 Berenice; by Ammianus for the same reason Libya Pentapolis, the name of Libya extending over many of these Roman Provinces. And finally, at the present, it passeth with that last described by the name of Barca, or Barca Marmarica: the whole extent whereof in length from the Greater Syrtis unto Egypt, is no less than 13000 miles, but the breadth not above 200.  
The Country in the South parts desolate and barren, stored with few Towns, and not many Villages; the People living up and down in scattered houses and at such a distance, as if it were in so many Islands. Destitute not of Springs and Rivers only, but of Rain-water too, the Clouds not very often dropping: if any fell, it was dried up presently by the ●ands. But within fifteen miles of the Sea▪ indifferently fruitful, and well inhabited.  
The People in old times were said to have been utterly ignorant of buying and selling, of fraud and stealing, not knowing or not caring for the use of money; con●ent with little, not superfluous in their clothes or buildings, their houses for the most part (except only in their greater Cities) made of Osier-twigs. Much altered in the first part of their character, since the coming of the Arabians hither; now a Thievish nation, given wholly to Robbery and spoil. So lazy, that they will not manure or till their Land, but provide themselves with Corn from Sicily, laying their Children to pawn for it, till by their Thieving they can raise a sufficient sum to discharge the debt.  
One only River I find in it, but of fame enough to serve for many; By Ptolemy called Luthon, by Pliny Lethon, by the Poets Lethe. Swallowed by the Earth not far from its first original, it riseth up again about Berenice feigned therefore by the Poets to come from Hell, and to create forgetfulness in all them that drink of it; it being the condition of the dead to remember nothing. Thence the occasion of the fancy. Some Lakes I find also in it, whereof one occasioned by this River, not far from the Sea; another more within the land (where indeed more necessary) near Paliurus. With Mountains better stored, (though not much better for them) the principal whereof, 1. Those called Herculis Arenae, the Sands of Hercules, thwarting the Country East and West; 2. Bucolicus, on the South of those; and 3 Volpos, a long ridge of hills; bordering upon Africa Propria.  
Cities of most note in it, 1. Apollonia, in the East parts, near the Promontory called Zephyrium, in the confines of Libya or Marmarica. 2. Cyrene, in the West of that; once of such power, that it contended with Carthage for some preeminencies: Then the chief Lady of this tract, which it gave this name to. The birth place of Eratosthenes the Mathematician, Callimachus the Poet, and of that Simon of Cyrene▪ whom the Jews compelled to carry our Saviour's Cross. 3. Ptolemais, betwixt Cyrene and Arsinee, built or repaired by Ptolemy Philadelphus; the Episcopal City of Synesius, a learned and religious Bishop of the Primitive times, as appears by his Epistles extant. 4. Arsinoe, on the East side of the River Lathon, so called in honour of Arsinoe, the sister of Philadelphus, and wife of Magas once King of this Country. 5 Berenice, on the Western bank of the said River; so called from Berenice the mother, or (another of the same name) the daughter of Magas: the furthest Town of all this Country, bordering on the Promontory called Boreum, and the greater Syrtis. This last a Quick sand very dangerous to Mariners, in compass 635 miles, and by them carefully avoided. 6. Paliurus, more within the land, but on the borders of Liby● or Marmarica, South to Apollonia. 7 Aptungiss, now Lungifari, by Ptolemy called Aptuchi Fanum. 8. Herculis Turris, the Tower of Hercules, near the greater Syrtis; erected in the honour of Hercules, his kill of the Dragon▪ and robbing the Orchards of the Hesperides of their golden Apples. Those Hesperideses said to be Eagle, Arethusa, and Hesperethusa, the three daughters of Atlas: their Orchard placed by Ptolemy betwixt this Tower and Paliurus; by Pomponius, in the Atlantic Islands; by Virgil, in Mauritania Tingi●ania; by Pliny, both in Mauritania and this Cyrene; and possibly in all alike. 9 Zemythus. 10 Acabis, in the midlands; all worn out of memory. 11 Fessan, of greatest name now, though scarce worth the naming.  
The old Inhabitants of this Country, were the Asbetae on the East, the Barcitae near the Greater-Syrtis, the Macatutae and Laganici, near the Mountains of Hercules; all probably descended from Naphtuhim the son of Mizraim, of whom there still remain some footsteps in Aptuchi Fanum, the ●ane or Temple of Aptuchus. This Aptuchus by some mistakingly called Autuchus, and by the Grecians said to be the son of Cyrene, and the brother of Aristaeus: who being sent out to seek their fortunes, Aristaeus fell into the Isle named Ceos; and Aptuchus or Autuchus into Libya, both by them first planted. Neptune, the Deity of this Country, by the Egyptians called Neptitim, seems to come from Naphtuhim; most highly worshipped by this people, because he first taught them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the Art of training Horses to the Coach or Chariot; in which the Cyreneans after grew so expert, that they could drive their Chariots in a round or circle, and always keep their Chariot-wheels in the selfsame tract. Of no great power, till Battus a noble Spartan landing in this Country, had built the City of Cyrene; and founded it in so good a course of life and discipline, that in short time it came to have dominion over the most part of this Country, and to contend with Carthage about their territories. Warred on by Apryes King of Egypt, they sued unto the Greeks ●or aid, and by their assistance overcame him. Long after which, falling at odds among themselves, they craved aid of Ptolemy the first of that race, by whom they were finally subdued. Left by him at his death to Magus, a son of his last wife by a former husband, whom he had married to Arsinoe one of his daughters; it came again to the Crown of Egypt, by the marriage of Berenice the daughter and heir of Magus, with the son of Ptolemy Philadelphus. Aliened from which Crown again, for the preferment of some of the younger Princes, and in the end given by one of the Ptolemy's, the last king hereof, to the People of Rome. Reduced into the form of a Province by Augustus Caesar, by whom united in one Government with the Isle of Crete; but made a Province of itself by the following Emperors: never since separated from the fortune and affairs of Egypt, to which now we hasten.  
That the Kingdom and Nation of Egypt was of great Antiquity, is not a matter to be doubted; the question in this point, betwixt them and the Scythian, being not easily decided. Whether it were so ancient, as the Egyptians say, may perhaps be controverted. By them it was affirmed, that they had the memory and story of 13000 years, and a succession of 330 Kings in the time of Amasis the second, who was Cotemporary with Cyrus. Which number of years, if understood of solary years, measured by the course of the Sun, must not be allowed of, because it maketh them many thousand years older than the Creation: but if of Lunary, which is most agreeable unto the Account of the Egyptians, who reckoned their years by months, it will amount unto no more than to 1000 or 1100 years, and so fall answerably to the times following after the Flood. But for their Kings, 330 in their reckonings, and those of 24 or 25 several Dynasties, the matter is not so soon made up: For either those Kings, must not be all Kings, or Supreme Lords of Egypt, as the Pharaohs were, but their several Regent's or Vicegerents, armed with Regal power; those Dynasties not the successions of so many Regal families, but of their Substitutes and Lieutenants, many of which might live successively under one Supreme: or else we must needs look on Egypt, as distracted in those times into several kingdoms, amongst the Princes of those Dynasties before remembered: or finally, we must look for some of those Kings and Princes before the Flood. By either of these ways, the business may be well agreed: For if that most of them were but the names of several Regent's, (as probable enough it is) there might be many such in the reign of one King; according to the King's fancy, the merit of particular persons, or the necessities of State: Changes of great Officers, especially if grown too great, are not new nor strange. If they were all Kings or Supreme Rulers, (as is also probable) we find not any thing of moment to persuade the contrary, but that many of them lived and reigned in their several parts (as in other Countries in those times) till the greater had devoured the less. Or if they were the names of such Sovereign Princes as had the sole command of Egypt before the Flood, (as some think they were) they might amount in all to so great a number, and so many Dynasties; the iniquity of those times, the ambition of great persons, and consequently the short lives of the Kings being duly pondered. That Egypt and most part of the world was peopled before the Flood, hath been already proved in our General Preface: If peopled, than no question under some form of Government, the names of which Governors (call them Kings, or Rulers, or what else we please) might be preserved in Egypt on pillars of brass or stone, or otherwise transmitted by tradition unto Cham the Father of Mizraim, by whom this Country was first planted after the Confusion of Babel. But that old stock of Kings and People being destroyed in the general Deluge, the Children of Mizraim succeeded next in their desolate dwellings: yet so, that the posterity of Chus and L●habim, two others of the sons of Cham, had their shares therein. From the first of which descended the Inhabitants of those parts of Egypt, which lay along the shores of the Red-Sea, or Golf of Arabia: in which respect not only one of the Nomis or Divisions bordering on the Isthmus, had the name of Arabia; but the people dwelling on those shores, were called Arabes, divided into the Arabes Azarei, and Arabes Adei. And from the other came that mixture of Nations, called Libyaegyptii▪ or Libian and Egyptians intermixed together, inhabiting in Maraeotica and the Western parts. But though these People were derived from several Ancestors, they made one Nation in the total: Subject to Mizraim as their chief, and after his decease, unto his Successors in the Kingdom of Egypt. Concerning whom we may observe, that in Cham our greatest Antiquaries find the name of jupiter Hammon; Mizraim they guess to be Osiris the great God of Egypt. To him succeeded Typhon not by right of blood, but by usurpation. Who dispossed by Lehabim, the brother of Mizraim (whom the Greeks call Hercules Egyptius) the Kingdom was restored to Orus the son of Osiris. During the time of these few Princes happened all those things which are recorded in the Scriptures concerning Egypt: from the first going down of Abraham in the time of Osiris, to the advancement of joseph in the Reign of Orus: in which there passed the 15. 16. & 17. Dynasties of Regal Vice Royes; Lieutenants only, as I take it▪ to those mighty Princes. The Kings themselves called generally by the name of Pharaoh, though they had all their proper and peculiar names: as afterwards their Successors here had the name of Ptolemy, and the Roman Emperors, that of Caesar. Not troubling ourselves therefore with their many Dynasties, we will lay down the Succession of their Kings, as well as we can; the disagreement of Historians and Chronologers, touching this Succession, being irreconcilable.  

The Pharaohs or Kings of Egypt, of Egyptian Race.  
A. M.  
1. Mizraim, the son of Cham, by the Gricians called Osiris, in whose time Abraham went into Egypt.  
2 Typhon, an Usurper.  
3 Orus, the son of Osiris, restored unto the Kingdom by his Uncle Lehabim: the Advancer of joseph.  
2207. 4 Amasis' Themosis, or Amos, in whose time jacob went down into Egypt. 25.  
2233. 5 Chebron. 12.  
2245. 6 Amenophis, or Amenophthis, 21.  
2266. 7 Amarsis, the sister of Amenophthis, 22.  
2288. 8 Mephres.  
2300. 9 Mespharmuthesis. 25.  
2325. 10 Thamosis, or Thuthmosis, 10.  
2335. 11 Amenophthis' II. supposed to be Memnon, and the Vocal Statue, 31.  
2366. 12 Orus II. the Busiris of the Grecians, a bloody Tyrant, who commanded the male-childrens of Israel to be slain, 37.  
2403. 13 Acencheres, by some called Thermutis, the daughter of Amenophthis the second, and afterwards the wife of Orus, who preserved Moses, 12.  
2416. 14 Rathosis the son of Orus, 6.  
2422. 15 Acencherus, 12.  
2449. 16 Cenchres, by some called Arenasis, Bocchoris by others; drowned in the Red-Sea with his horse and chariots, 16.  
2453. 17 Acherres, 8.  
2462. 18 Cherres, 10.  
1472. 19 Armais by the Grecians called Danaus, whose 50. daughters being married to the 50. sons of his brother Egyptos, murdered their husbands: for which cause Danaus being forced out of Egypt, passed into Greece, where attaining to the Kingdom of Argos, he gave unto the Grecians the name of Danai.  
1575. 20 Ramese, surnamed Egyptus, the brother of Danaus.  
1550. 21 Amenophthis, III.  
2590. 22 Sethos, or Sesothis' 55.  
2645. 23 Rhapsaces or Ranses, 66.  
2711. 24 Amenophthis, IV. 40.  
2751. 25 Ramese, II. 26.  
2777. 26 Thuoris 7. After whose death succeeded a Race of twelve Kings, called the Diospolitanis, who held the Kingdom for the space of 177 years; their names we find not but that one of the latest of them, whose daughter Solomon married, was called Vaphra; and perhaps Ogdoos who removed the Royal Seat from Thebes to Memphis, might be another, and the eighth, as his name importeth.  
2961. 39 Smendes, the Sisac of the Scriptures, who made War upon Rehoboam the son of Solomon; conceived to be the Sesostris of Herodotus and others of the ancient Writers. Of whom it is reported, that being a king of great wealth and puissance, he had brought under subjection all his neighbouring Princes: whom he compelled in turns to draw his Chariot. It happened that one of these unfortunate Princes, cast his eye many times on the Coach wheels: and being by Sesostris demanded the cause of his so doing, he replied, that the falling of that spoke lowest, which but just before was in the height of the wheel, put him in mind of the instability of Fortune. The King deeply weighing the parable, would never after be so drawn in his Chariot. He also was the first that encountered the Scythians in battle; having already in conceit conquered them, before he led his Army against them. The Scythians much marvelled that a King of so great Revenues would wage War against a Nation so poor; with whom the fight would be doubtful, the Victory unprofitable; but to be vanquished a perpetual infamy and disgrace. For their parts they resolved to meet him, as an Enemy, whose overthrow would enrich them. When the Armies came to join, the Egyptians were discomfited, and pursued even to their own doors by the Enemy. But the Scythians could not enter the Country, because of the ●ens, with whose passage they were unacquainted; and so they returned.  
2987. 40 Pseusenes, conceived to be the Cheops of Herodotus. founder of the vast Pyramid before described, 41.  
3028. 41 Nepher-Cherres. 4.  
3032. 42 Amnoiphtis, V.  
3041. 43 Opsochon, the Asychis of Herodotus.  
3047. 44 Psamuchos, 9  
3056. 45 Psusennes, II. 14.  
3070. 46 Sesonchis, 21.  
3091. 47 Vsorthon, 15.  
3106. 48 Takellotis, 13.  
3119. 49 Patubastis, 40.  
3159. 50 Osorchon, the second Hercules Aegyptius, as some will have it, 8.  
3167. 51 Psamnis, 15.  
3185. 52 Bochoris, called So, 2 King. 17. 4. taken and burnt by Sabacon the King of Ethiopia. 44.  
3229. 53 Sabacon King of Ethiopia, 8.  
3238. 54 Sevachus son of Sabacon. 14.  
3252. 55 Tarachon, falsely supposed to be the Therah of the Scriptures. 18.  
3270. 56 Stephinates, 7.  
3277. 57 Niclupses, 6.  
3288. 58 Psamniticus, who first made the Grecians acquainted with Egypt, 54.  
3335. 59 Necho, who slew Josiah at the battle of Megiddo, 25.  
3360. 60 Psamnis' II. 6.  
3366. 61 Aprios, called Hophra, jer. 44. subdued by Nabuchadnezzar, and deposed by Amasis. 25.  
3391. 62 Amasis' II. 44.  
3435. 63 Psamnites, or Psamniticus II. a King of six months only; vanquished by Cambyses, the second Monarch of Persia, who united Egypt to that Empire, under which it continued till the time of Darius the sixth King of the Medes and Persians, in the II. year of whose reign it revolted from him, and became a kingdom of itself, as in former times.  
3555. 64 Amyrtaeus, the first King after the Revolt, 6.  
3561. 65 Nepherites, 6.  
3567. 66 Achoris, 12.  
3579. 67 Psamnites III, 1.  
3580. 68 Nepherites II. a King of two months only.  
69 Nectanebos, 18.  
3598. 70 Teos, 2.  
3600. 71 Nectanebos II. the last King of the natural Egyptian race, that ever governed Egypt, by the name or a King. For in the 18 of the reign of this King, Egypt waa again recovered by the valour of Ochus the eighth Emperor of Persia. And when Alexander had overthrown Darius. he came & without blows won this fertile kingdom; which yielded him, during his life, the yearly value of 6000 talents. After his death, this kingdom fell to the share of Ptolomeus the son of Lagus, from whom all the subsequent Kings of Egypt were called Ptolemy's,   

The Ptolomean Kings of Egypt.  
A. M.  
3641. 1 Ptolemy, one of Alexander's Captains, reputed the son of Lagus, but supposed to be the son of Philip of Macedon, and half-brother to Alexander. 40.  
3681. 2 Ptol. Philadelphus, who filled the Library of Alexandria with 700000 Volumes, and caused the 72 Interpreters to translate the Bible.  
3717. 3 Ptol Euergetes, the son of Philadelphus, vanquished Seleucus Callinicus, and probably had subdued that kingdom, if not called back by domestic dissensions. 26.  
3743 4 Ptol. Philopater, a cruel, voluptuous, and incestuous Prince; cruelly slew Cleomenes the last king of Sparta, who had fled to his father for relief in the time of his exile. 17  
3760. 5 Ptol. Epiphanes, at the age of five years succeeded his father; protected by the Romans against Antiochus the Great of Syria, who had an aim upon his kingdom. 28.  
3784. 6 Ptol. Philometor, the son of Epiphanes, by Cleopatra the daughter of the great Antiochus; protected in his nonage by the Romans also: caused himself to be crowned king of Syria, but again relinquished it. 35.  
3829. 7 Ptol. Euergetes II. for his desormity called Physcon, the brother of Ptol. Philometor: A wicked Prince, and one that spent the greatest part of his reign in a causeless war against Cleopatra his wife and sister. 29.  
38●8. 8 Ptol. Lathurus, reigned 16 years with Cleopatra his mother, by whom dispossed of his estate for the space of ten years; after her death was sole Lord of Egypt. His brother Alexander being taken by the Queen-mother as her Associate in the time of his deprivation, and passing in the Account of the Kings of Egypt.  
3892 9 Ptol. Auletes, the son of Lathurus, surnamed also Dionysius, whose Brother being settled by him in the Isle of Cyprus, was most unjustly suipped by the power of the Romans, and he himself outed of Egypt by his own subjects, but restored by the a●d & love of Pompey.  
3922. 10 Ptol. Dionysius called also Junior, or the younger, together with Cleopatra his wife and sister, succeeded Auletes in the throne, which they held together by the space of three years. In the last of which, Pompey was barbarously slain on the shores of Egypt, by the command of Achilles the young King's Governor; and the young King himself unfortunately slain in the Alexandrian Tumult against Julius Caesar.  
3925. 11 Cleopatra, the wife and sister of Dionysius, restored to the Crown of Egypt by the bounty of Caesar, of whom exceedingly beloved for her wit and beauty. After which she governed Egypt 19 years in her own sole right, with great pomp and splendour: when being embarked in the bed and fortunes of Marc. Antony, she killed herself not long after his fatal overthrow at the battle of A●●um, that she might not be ●ed in triumph through Rome.   
These Ptolomean Princes of Egypt, were for the most part in wars with the Kings of Syria, in which they were by turns victorious, and vanquished; neither Prince having cause to boast of his bargain. After the death of Cleopatra, whose life and love with Marcus Antunius I will not now relate; this Country fell to the share of the Roman Emperors, and was by them highly prized, and warily looked into. The Governor hereof was but a Gentleman of Rome; no Senator being permitted to come into it; it being a maxim of State, not to suffer men of great houses to come into that Country, whose revolt may endanger the whole Empire. Of this nature was Egypt. For besides the natural situation of the place very defensible; and besides the abundance of money, with which it was stored; this Country alone furnished the City of Rome with Corn, for four month's yearly. Whence Vespasian being chosen Emperor by the Syrian Legions, and hearing of the defeat of his concurrent Vitellius, hastened hither; to this end only, that detaining the ordinary provision of victuals, he might by famine compel the City of Rome to stand at his devotion: Vt urbem quoque externe opis indigam ●ame urgeret● as the Historian hath observed. When made a Province of that Empire, it was counted as the Emperor's sole Peculiar: afterwards made (as well it might) an entire Diocese of itself, subordinate to the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis. In the division of the Empire allotted to the Constantinopolitans, whose Government being thought to be insupportable by this wanton People, they called in the Saracens, by whom the Greek Garrisons were cast out, and the Country made subject to Haumar the third of the Caliphs'. Afterwards, weary of them also, they would have a Caliph of their own revolting totally from the Caliph of Bagdat. So that from this time forwards we shall meet with two Caliphs' at a time, the one residing at Cairo in Egypt, to whom the Saracens or Moors of Spain and afric did submit themselves; the other at Bagdat, who Lorded it over all the rest, at least as to the supreme title and some chief Prerogatives, though the main power was cantonned and disposed of among their Sultan's.  

The Caliphs' of Egypt.  
A. Ch. A. H.  
870 247. 1 Achmades, or Achmat. 10.  
88● 257. 2 Tolen. 3.  
883. 260. 3 Hamaria. 29.  
903. 280. 4 Abarun, slain by Muctaphi, the Caliph of Babylon.  
940. 317. 5 Achid Muhamid, the son of Tangi. 3.  
943. 320. 6 Abigud, the son of Achid. 27.  
970. 347. 7 Meaz Ledin, Illahi, of the race of Phatime and Hali. 5.  
975. 352. 8 Aziz, the son of Meaz. 21.  
996. 373. 9 Elhachain. 23.  
1019. 396. 10 Etaber Leazizdin Illah●. 16.  
1035. 412. 11 Musteratzer Billahi. 60.  
1096. 472. 12 Musteale. 5.  
1100. 477. 13 Elamir Bahacan Illahi. 35  
1135. 512. 14 Elhapit Ladin Illahi.  
15 Etzahar.  
16 Elphaiz.  
17 Etzar Ledin Illahi, the the son of Elphaiz the last Caliph, or King of Egypt, of the race of Phatime: the Turks succeeding after his death in this opulent kingdom. Concerning which we are to know, that Elphaiz the father of Etzar, being overpowered by Almericus King of Jerusalem craved aid of Norradine the Turkish Sultan of Damascus, which he received under the conduct of Sarracon, or Shirachoch, a right valiant and stout Commander; who taking his advantages, not only cleared the Country of Almericus, but got the whole kingdom to himself; dashing out the brains of Elphaiz with his horsemans-mace. And though Etzar his son assumed for a while the title of Caliph; yet the destruction of himself, and the whole Phatimean family, rooted out by Sarracon, soon put an end to that claim, and left the kingdom in the peaceable possession of the Turkish Sultan's.   

The fourth dynasty, or the Race of the Turkish Kings or Caliphs' of Egypt.  
1163. 1 Asereddin, surnamed Shirachoch, called Sarracon by the Christian writers; the first of the Turks which reigned in Egypt; of the Noble family of Alub.  
1186. 2 Zeli-heddin, called Saladine by the Christian writers, the son (or as some say, the nephew) of Sarracon or Shirachoch; confirmed in his estate by the Caliph of Bagdet, under whose jurisdiction he reduced the Egyptian Schismatics; He obtained also the kingdom of Damascus, conquered Mesopotamia, Palestine, and in the year 1190 regained the City of Jerusalem. A Prince who wanted nothing to commend him to succeeding Ages, nor to glorify him in the kingdom of Heaven, but the saving knowledge of CHRIST JESUS.  
1199. 3 Elaziz, the second son of Saladine, succeeded in the Realm of Egypt, which he exchanged afterwards with his brother Eladel for the kingdom of Damascus.  
4 Eladel, or El-Aphtzel, by the Christian writers called Meledine, succeeded upon this exchange, in the kingdom of Egypt: and overcame the Christians, without the loss of a man, at the siege of Cairo, by letting loose the Sluices of Nilus, which drowned their Army, and forced them to covenant with him at his own pleasure.  
1210. 5 Elchamul.  
1237. 6 Melech Essalach, by the Christian writers called Melechsala, the son of Elchamul, who overcame Lewis the 9 of France; and going with that King towards Damiata, was slain by the soldiers of his guard, called Mamalucks.  
1242. 7 Elmutan, the son of Melech Essalach, succeeded for a time in his Father's throne; But the Mamalucks being resolved to obtain the kingdom for themselves, enforced him to fly to a Tower of Wood, which they set on fire; & the poor Prince, half burned, leaping into a River (which ran close by it) was there drowned: & the Mamalucks settled in the kingdom, An. 1245.   
These Mamalucks were the offspring of a People on the banks of the Euxine Sea, vulgarly called the Circassians: whom Melechsala either bought of their Parents, or (at the second hand; of the Tartars, then newly Masters of those Countries, to supply the want of valour in the idle and effeminate People of Egypt: and out of them selected a choice Band of men for the guard of his person. Knowing their strength, and finding their opportunity, they treacherously slew Melechsala their Lord and Master; appointing one Azeddin Ibek, a Turco-man by nation, and therefore by most Christian writers called Turquimeneius, (one of their own number) a man of great spirit and valour, to succeed in the Throne. Unwilling to re-give the Supreme Authority into the hands of the Egyptians; and not permitting their own sons to enjoy the name and privilege of Mamalucks', they bought yearly certain numbers of Circassian slaves, whom they committed to the keeping of the Egyptians, by them to be instructed in the Egyptian language, and the Law of Mahomet. Being thus fitted for employment, they were taught the Discipline of War, and by degrees advanced unto the highest Offices of power and trust; as now the Janissaries are in the Turkish Empire: in choice and ordering of whom, as the Ottoman Turks were Precedented by those of Egypt; so it is possible enough that the Janissaries may make as great a Change in the Turkish Empire, as the Mamalucks did in the Egyptian. So unsafe a thing it is for a Prince to commit the sole guard of his person, or the defence of his Dominions, to the hands of such, whom not the sense of natural duty, but the hopes of profit or preferment may make useful to him. For thus we find, that Constantius a King of the Britain's was murdered by his Guard of Picts: most of the Roman Emperors, by the hands of those whom they entrusted either with the guard of their persons, or the command of their Armies: And I think no man can be ignorant how many times the Princes and Estates of Italy have been brought into the extremest dangers, by trusting too much to the honesty of mercenary Soldiers and Commanders. Take we for instance the proceedings of Giacopo Picinino, who with his Followers first took Pay of Ferdinand the first of Naples; left him, to fight for his vowed Enemy john Duke of Calabria the son of Renè Duke of Anjou; whom also he forsook in his greatest need. The like we find of Francisco Sforza, first entertained by the Duke of Milan, from whom he revolted to the Florentines, from them to the Venetians; and being again received into the Pay of the State of Milan, made use of their own Army to subdue that City. Nor can I speak better of the Swissers or their dealing in this kind with the French Kings, the Sforza's Dukes of Milan; and with whom not (to say the truth) that ever trusted or employed them.  
Now as it is unsafe for a Prince to commit the custody of his person, or the defence of his Estates to the faith of Foreigners; so is it dangerous to him to call in such aids, and to commit his fortunes either wholly or principally unto their fidelity. A moderate supply of men, money, or munition, from a confederate King, is, I confess, in most cases convenient, in some necessary: as well to save their Natives from the sword; as to try a friend, and interest an Ally in the same cause. But to invite so great a number of Succours, as from Helpers may become Masters, and oppress the people whom they came to defend; is that Rock on which many Realms have suffered shipwreck, and which a good Pilot of the State should with all care avoid. For as in the sickness of the body natural, it is hurtful to a man's health and life, to take more physic than it may (after the effect thereof be wrought) either digest, or put out again: so in the body politic, it is a perilous matter to receive more succours, than what (after they have done the deed they were sent for) we may either with conveniency reward and settle with us, or at liberty expel. Of all Surfeits, this of Foreign supplies is most uncurable: and Ne quid nimis, if in nothing else true, is in this case, oracle. There is no Kingdom (I am verily persuaded) under the Sun, which hath not been by this means conquered; no Commonwealth, which hath not been by this means ruined. To relate all examples, were infinite and tedious; to infer some, pleasing to the Reader; and to illustrate the point, not unnecessary. To begin with former times: Philip of Macedon, called into Greece to assist the Thebans against the Phocians, brought all that Country, in a manner, under his command. The Romans, by aiding the Sicilians against the Carthaginians, possessed themselves of that flourishing Island; by assisting the Hedui against the Sequani, mastered France; by succouring Androgeus against Cassibelan, seized on Britain; by siding with the Aetolians against Perseus, united to their Empire all the Kingdom of Macedon; and by the same course what not? In after-ages, the Britain's called in the Saxons, and were by them thost out of all; the Irish called in the English, by whom they were in process of time totally subdued; and the Indians called in the Mogul-Tartars, who now Lord it over them. These foreign supplies are invited or let into a Country, commonly in four cases. First, when some one man upon discontent or desire of revenge, openeth them a way to a Country: upon which motives, Narses invited the Lombard's into Italy; and Count Julian brought the Moors into Spain: the one to be revenged on the Empress Sophia, who had despitefully reviled him; the other to revenge himself on King Rodorick, who had ravished his daughter. Secondly, when a weaker Faction makes way for them, to maintain their cause against a stronger: On which ground the Duke of Burgundy being oppressed by the faction of Orleans, made way for Henry the fifth to pass into France; and the Leaguers drew the Spaniards in, to hold up their declining cause against Henry the 4th. Thirdly, when an ambitious Prince makes use of a foreign power, to usurp upon the rights of another man: And for that cause Ludowick Sforze persuaded Charles the 8. to undertake the Conquest of the Realm of Naples, that by the countenance of his Arms he might appropriate to himself the Dukedom of Milan. Fourthly, when a King overburthened by a foreign or domestic force, which he is not able to resist, requires the help of a foreign friend: in which case, Plus à medico quam a morbo mali, the Physic proves many times worse than the Disease: for thus the Kings of Naples of the house of Arragon, being in danger of the French, drew in the Aids of Ferdinand the Catholic, the Cousin-German once removed of the King then being: And the Caliphs' of Egypt, not able to withstand the forces of Almericus, craved aid of the Turks; by which mean both those kingdoms were made a prey to their foreign friends, and by avoiding Scylla fled into Charybdis. Nay many times it so happeneth, that these foreign succours join in design with those against whom they were called, and divide the conquered State between them: And so we find that the Burgundians being called by Stilico into Gaul, to prevent the breaking in of the Franks or French, joined with them in a common league against the Romans, whom they dispossessed at last of all that Country. Only amongst so many examples to this purpose, we find the Low-Country-men to have prospered by these foreign aids; who by the assistance of the English, ransomed themselves from that yoke of bondage which was intended to be put upon them by the King of Spain. This I acknowledge to be true, and look upon it as a great Argument of the integrity and honesty of the English Nation; although it be as true withal, that the English never had such an Army there, as to be able to subdue them. But give me such another instance, I will quit the cause: for the same Low-Country-men found it otherwise with the Duke of Anjou, Brother to Henry the 3. of France, whom they created Duke of Brabant, and their Governour-Generall; permitting him to bring in as many of the French, as either his authority or their own moneys were able to raise: who was no sooner settled in that command, but he made it his chief business to seize upon their strongest Holds, and to be a more absolute Prince amongst them, than ever the Spaniards or Burgundians had been before. So that I think I may conclude, that these foreign Succours are the last to be tried, and the least to be trusted, of any remedies in State. But it's now more than time to return to the Mamalucks; and in them to  

The third dynasty of the Egyptian Kings, or the Race of the Mamalucks.  
A. Ch.  
1255. 1 Turquimeneius, who being promoted to the kingdom, released King Lewis, whom Melechsala his predecessor had taken prisoner; but performed not half of the conditions agreed upon.  
2 Clothes (by some called Elmutahaz) taking advantage of the miseries of the Turks then distressed by the Tartars, seized on the greatest part of Syria and Palestine.  
1260. 3 Bandocader perfected the begunconquests of Clothes, and took from the Christians the strong City of Antioch, carrying on his Armies as far as Armenia, where he did much spoil.  
4 Melechsait, or Melechsares, restored the power of the Mamalucks in Syria and Palestine; where it had been much impaired by Edward the son of Henry the 3. of England, and Henry Duke of Mecklenburgh, etc.  
1289. 5 Elpis, or Alphix, recovered from the dissenting Christians, the strong Cities of Tripoli, Berytus, Tyre, and Sidon; all which he razed to the ground, that they might not be any more serviceable to the affairs of the Christians.  
1291. 6 Araphus, or Eustrephus, by birth a Germane, released Henry Duke of Mecklebourg, after he had been prisoner 26 years. He rooted the Christians out of Syria, took Ptolomais the last Town they there held, and so razed it, that he made it fit to be ploughed.  
7 Melechnesar, when he was Lieutenant to Arapbus, was discomfited by Cassanes, a great Prince of the Tartars, with the loss of 40000 Egyptians: but Cassanes being departed, he recovered again all Syria, and destroyed Jerusalem; for which service he was afterward made Sultan of Egypt.  
8 Melechadel, whom I suppose to be that Sultan that governed Egypt, when Tamberlane with unresistable violence conquered it; but of this I am not certain; neither can I meet with any constant and continued series (which I dare rely on) of his successors in this kingdom, till I come to  
9 Melechella, or Melechnaser, who in the year 1423. subdued the Isle of Cyprus, and made the Kings thereof to be from thenceforth Tributaries to the Mamaluck Sultan's.  
1465. 10 Cathbeyus, who much reform the State of Egypt, and was a professed enemy of Bajazet 2. the 8th King of the Ottomans.  
1498. 11 Mahomet the son of Cathbeyus, deposed by the Mamalucks, for fear the kingdom might by him be made hereditary; it being against their usual custom, that the son should succeed his father in the name and privileges of a Mamaluck.  
1499. 12 Campson Chiarsesius, succeeded on the deposing of Mahomet.  
13 Zanballat, who dethroned Campson, and not long after was deposed by  
1500. 14 Tonombeius; outed of his Estate by the joint-consent of the Mamalucks, so to make way for Campson Gaurus.  
1501. 15 Campson II. surnamed Gaurus, reform the disordered and factious estate both of Court and Country, and for the space of 16 years governed very prosperously: But siding at the last with Hysmael the Persian Sophy against Selimus the first of that name, the 3. Emperor and ninth King of the Ottoman family, he drew his Kingdom into a war, in which his Armies were overthrown, and himself slain in battle.  
1517. 16 Tonombeius II. succeeded Campson Gaurus both in his Kingdom and misfortunes: vanquished in his first year by the said Selimus the first, An. 1517. Who having conquered this rich Kingdom, was used to say, That he had gotten a Farm to feed his Gomoglans, or young Soldiers. So Egypt became a Province of the Turkish Empire, as it still continueth.   
What the Revenues of it were in the time of the Pharaohs, I am not able to affirm. Great they must be, beyond the proportion of belief, or else they could never have been Masters of sufficient Treasure to finish those vast Structures which they undertook. Twelve thousand and five hundred Talents they amounted Annually unto in the time of the Ptolemy's, which of our money makes the sum of Two Millions and 347750 pounds. Which sum, Augustus Caesar (appropriating this Province to himself) is said to have doubled: But whether he had it all in Money, or part hereof in Money, and the rest in Corn, I determine not. Certain it is, that there was yearly shipped hence for Rome, in the time of that Emperor, Two hundred thousand Measures of Wheat, every Measure weighing Twenty pound weight; which cometh to Seven Millions and an hundred forty thousand of our English Bushels: Sold by him, or distributed gratis amongst the Poor, as he saw occasion. So that there might be very well some abatement in Money, considering that the Corn amounted to so great a sum. Nor were they much less, if ought at all, when the Mamalucks ruled in this Country. For Campson Gaurus, at his coming to the Throne, gave no less than Ten millions of Ducats, at one clap, amongst his Soldiers. But the Turks at this day, partly through their Tyrannical government, and partly through the discontinuance of the usual Traffic through the Red-Sea, receive no more than Three Millions; one of which is hoarded in his own Coffers; the second is appropriated unto his Vicegerent Bashaw, for support of his charge; the third is distributed among his Garrison-souldiers, and such of them as by land guard his own Million to Constantinople; for by sea he dareth not venture it, for fear of the Florentine, who with a few ships Lordeth it in the Mediterranean.   
And so much for EGYPT.   

OF BARBARY.  
BARBARY is bounded on the East with Cyrenaica; on the West with the Atlantic Ocean; on the North with the Mediterranean, the Straits of Gibraltar, and some part of the Atlantic also; on the South with Mount Atlas, by which separated from Libya Inferior, or the Deserts of Libya.  
It containeth in it the whole Diocese of afric, & part of the Diocese of Spain: subject in former times to the Commonwealth of Carthage, and the great Kings of Mauritania and Numidia. When conquered by the Romans, they gave to that part of it which they won from the Carthaginians, the name of Africa; calling that Province by the name of the whole Peninsula; and afterwards extended it over all the rest of the Country on the North of Atlas. Which name it held till the subjugation of it by the Saracens, by whom called BARBARY, either from Barber, signifying in their language an uncertain murmur, such as the speech of the Africans seemed to them to be; or from the word Bar signifying, a Desert; which doubled, made up first Barber, and after Barbary.  
It is situate under the third and fourth Climates; so that the longest Summers day in the parts most South amounteth to thirteen hours three quarters, increased in the most Northern parts to fourteen hours and a quarter. In length extended from the Atlantic Ocean to the greater Syrtis, for the space of 1500 miles; in breadth from Mount Atlas to the Mediterranean, where narrowest 100 miles; but towards the Straits, where broadest, almost three hundred.  
The Country in such parts as lie nearest to the Mediterranean, is full of hills, covered with woods, and stored with plenty of Wild-beasts; provided reasonably well of most sorts of Fruits, but unfit for Wheat, insomuch that most of the Inhabitants live of Barley-bread. Betwixt which and Mount Atlas is a Champain country, watered with many pleasant Rivers issuing from that Mountain, and liberally furnished with Cherries, Figs, Pears, Plumes, Apples of all kinds; abundance of Oil, Honey, Sugar; some Mines of Gold, and that for purity and sineness nowhere to be bettered. Here are also besides large Herds of cattle, some Elephants, Lions, Dragons, Leopards, and others of the like savage nature, and of Apes great multitudes; Horses good store, of excellent both strength and beauty. But taking it in the best parts, it falleth extremely short of that infinite fertility which is ascribed to it by the Writers of elder times. For besides the miracle of five hundred ●ars of Corn growing on one stalk, (whereof more anon) Pliny reporteth, that not far from the City of Tacape, in the way to Leptis, a man might see a great Date-tree overshadowing an Olive, under the Olive a Figtree, under that a Pomegranate, under that a Vine, and under all, Pease, Wheat, and 〈◊〉; all growing and flourishing at one time. It is affirmed also by the same Author, that the Vin● beareth twice a year, that some fruits or other are gathered in it at all times of the year; and that a 〈◊〉 of ground of four cubits square, was usually rent out at so many Denarii: by which account, (as the learned Budaeus doth compute it) an Acre of that ground must be worth yearly 12800 of the Roman Sestertii, which make 320 Crowns. An infinite and unparallelled increase of the Fruits of the Earth, if the Author were not out in his valuation.  
The People are of a duskish colour, but inclining to blackness: much of the same nature with the Arabians, by whose numerous families formerly they were overspred; but the Africans of the two the better active of body, well skilled in Horsemanship, but impatient of labour; covetous of honour, inconstant, crafty, and unfaithful; studious in matters of their Law, and in some of the Liberal Sciences, especially Philosophy and the Mathematics, of which in many parts of the Mahometan Countries they are admitted to be Readers: they are also said to be stately of gate, exceedingly distrustful, in their hate implacable, and jealous of their women beyond all compare. The women of a comely body, and well featured, beautiful in blackness, of delicate soft skins; and in their habit and apparel beyond measure sumptuous: so dressed, to make themselves more amiable in the eyes of their husbands; for otherwise not permitted to stir abroad, and seldom to see any body but those of their own houses.  
The Language spoken at the present in most of the Maritime Towns, except those of Fez and Morocco, is the Arabic tongue. In those two Kingdoms, and most part of the Country-villages, the Punic or old African, the ancient languages of the Country: the Punic, spoken in all places where anciently the Carthaginians were of any power; the African (whatsoever it was) in the parts of Mauritania, not subject to them. Of the Latin there is no remainder; which though it was the Language of the Roman Colonies, yet never could it spread so far as to extinguish or suppress the old natural tongues: and in the Colonies themselves so much degenerated in short time, so barbarously and imperfectly spoken; that a Sister of the Emperor Severus, who lived in Leptic, a Roman Colony, coming to Rome to see her Brother, spoke it so incongruously, that the Emperor was ashamed to hear it. And though the Sermons of S. Augustine, an African Bishop, were preached in Latin, because preached in Hippo his Episcopal See, which was then a Colony of the Romans; yet he confesseth that he was sometimes fain to use such words as were not Latin, to be the better understood of his Congregation.  
The Christian faith was first planted, in that part hereof which was called Africa Propria by Epaenetus, one of the 70 Disciples; by Dorotheus in his Synopsis, affirmed to be the first Bishop of Carthage: In Mauritania, by S. Simon the Apostle, surnamed Zelotes. Metaphrastes addeth, that S. Simon Peter preached here also, when by the Decree of Claudius Caesar he was forced from Rome; and at his going hence, left Crescens his Disciple to promote the work. But by whomsoever planted first, it found good increase, and was so propagated in short time over all this Country, that in the year 250. or before, there were in it above 90 Bishops; for so many were assembled in the Synod of Labesitum: and in the year 398. when the faction of the Donatists was of greatest power, we find no sewer than 214 Catholic Bishops met together in the Council of Carthage. Which as it is an argument of the great increase of Christianity, in those parts of Africa; so it shows also that the Church was in ill condition; so overpowered by the violence of that mighty faction, who had at least 270 Bishops of their own opinion; that the Orthodox party was necessitated to increase the number of Bishops, for fear of being over-balanced by the contrary side, if ever the difference should come to be examined in a public meeting. These Bishops ranked into six Classes, according to the number of the African Provinces: the Bishops of each Province subject to their own Metropolitan, who in this Diocese (contrary to the usage of all other Churches) had the name of Primates: but all of them subordinate to the Primate of Carthage, originally invested with Patriarchal jurisdiction over all these parts. Latius fusa est nostra Provincia: Habet enim Numidiam, & Mauritanias duas, sibi cohaerentes, are S. Cyprians words. Which show, that Leo Africanus was a better Geographer than an Historian or Divine: He would not else have told us in such positive terms, that those of Barbary remained in their old Idolatry till 250 years before Mahomet's birth, at what time they received the Gospel, and not before. But the good man mistook the reviving of the Orthodox faith, in the time of Justinian, after it had been long suppressed by the Vandals of the Arian faction (who at one time banished hence 300 Catholic Bishops) for the first planting of the Gospel. Otherwise not to be excused. But after this Reviver, it held not long, when suppressed by the Saracens; and so suppressed, that except it be in some few Towns possessed by the King of Spain, and the Crown of Portugal, there is no tract of Christianity to be discerned in all this Country; Mahometism being elsewhere universally embraced amongst them.  
Amongst the men of most note for Soldiery, which have been born in this Country, we may reckon Amilcar the Carthaginian, and his three sons: 2. Annibal, 3. Asdrubal, and 4. Mago; men hardly to be paralleled in any Ages: 5. Masinissa, King of the Numidians, one of their Cotemporaries: and in the following times. 6. Septimius Severus, the Roman Emperor. Amongst those addicted to the Muses, those of most note, 1. Terence, 2. Apuleius. But for Divines, no Region in the world afforded men of more eminent note, nor better deserving of the Church. 1. Tertullian, 2. Cyprian, 3. Inlius Africanus, 3. Arnobius, 4. Lactantius, 5. Victorinus Afer, 6. Optatus Melevitanus, 7. Victor Vticensis, and above all, 8. the most learned and divine S. Augustine, a man of such admirable abilities, and indefatigable industry, so constant a Defender of all Orthodox doctrines against the Heretics of those times, that he deservedly got the name of Malleus Haereticorum.  
Principal Mountains of this Country, besides Mount Atlas, (of which hereafter by itself) 1. Phocra, 2. Heptadelphus, and 3. Atlas' minor in Mauritania Tingitana; 4. Cinnaba, 5. Garas, 6. Madethubadus, and 7. those called Gariphi, in Caesariensis, 8. Thambes, 9 Mampsarus, 10. Vsaletus, and 11. Zuchabarus, in Africa Propria. Of which, and others, we may speak more, if occasion be, in our description of the Provinces in which they are. And for the Rivers of most note, though none of any long course in so narrow a Country: we have in Tingitana, 1. Sala, falling into the Atlantic, out of Atlas' minor; 2. another of the same name, and the same exit also, but far more to the North, towards the Strait of Gibraltar; 3. Mosocath, mollified by Sallust the Historian into Mulucha, and by him placed betwixt the Numidians and the Moors; 4. Malva, the boundary at this day betwixt the Kingdoms of Fez and Algiers; 5. Phthuth, of more same than any, of which more anon: in Caesariensis, 6. Nasabath, 7. Sisaris, and 8. Sorbetes: in Africa Propria, or the Kingdom of Tunes, 8. Rubicatus, which rising out of Mount Thambes, falleth into the Mediterranean near Hippo Regius; 9 Triton, which issuing out of the hill called Vsaletus, and making the great Fen called Tritonia Palus, endeth its course also in the Mediterranean; and finally, 10. Bagradas, the greatest in all this tract, which rising out of Mount Atlas, first runneth towards the East, and then receiving from the hill called Mampsarus the addition of another Stream, passeth directly Northward to the City of Utica, and there ends his course.  
Having thus laid together the chief Metes and Land marks, I should now proceed to the description of the several Provinces hereof, as in other places. But because each part almost hath had for these later times its particular History, and that it is divided at the present into several Government, and under the command of several Princes: I will here lay down so much of the Story of it as concerns the whole, before such division; and afterwards pursue the History and chorography of the several parts. And for the whole we are to know, that this Country was first peopled by P●ut the third son of Cham: who leaving his brother Mizraim well settled in the Land of Egypt, passed towards the West; and leaving Lehabim his nephew betwixt him and Mizraim, possessed himself of all the rest from the greater Syrtis to the Ocean. Remainders of whose name we find in the River Phut, (by Ptolemy called Phthuth, with but little difference, save that it savoureth more of the African roughness) near which Josephus findeth a Region called the Country of Phut, a Nation called he Phuteans: seconded herein by S. Hierome, who speaking of this Regio Phutensis in Mauritania, (where the River Phuth is placed by Ptolemy) voucheth in general terms the testimony of old Writers, both Greek and Latin. So that of this there is no question to be made. Such Nations as descended of this Plantation, shall be hereafter spoke of in their several Provinces. Governed at first by the Chiefs of their several families; but in the end reduced under the command of the Kings of Mauritania and Numidia, and the State of Carthage. The two first, Natives of this Country, of the race of Phut; the last descended also of the seed of Cham, their common Parent, by the line of Canaan; who on the conquest of their Country by the Children of Israel, forced to seek new dwellings; and having store of ships to transplant themselves and their families, settled in the maritime parts of Mauritania, and Africa properly so called. For, that the people of those parts, though lost into other names and families, were anciently of a Canaanitish or Phoenician, race, may be made apparent, 1. By the nearness of their Language, the Punic or Phoenician, and old Hebrew tongue, differing only in the dialect and pronunciation. 2. By the name Poeni, or Phoeni, little differing from that of the Phoenices. 3. By this testimony of S. Augustine, who telleth us in the Comment on S. Paul's Epistle to the Romans, begun, but not finished by him; Interrogati Rustici nostri quid sint, respondent Punici Chanani; that is to say, that when any of the Inhabitants of this Country (he himself was one) were asked what they were, they answered, Chanaanites. 4. We find in Herodotus, how Cambyses having totally conquered Egypt, intended a war against the Carthaginians, who were then a State (it seemeth) of some power: but the Phoenicians, being the only Seafaring men Cambyses then had, absolutely denied to be employed in that service; they being sprung from the same tree, that the Carthaginians were. 5. We read in Procopius, (out of which it is cited by Evagrius Scholasticus) how on two marble-pillars, situate nigh unto Tingis or Tanger, there was in the Phoenician language and character engraved, Nos fugimus à fancy Joshuah praedonis, filii Nave: that is to say, We fly from the face of that Robber, Joshuah the son of Nun. The settling of this people there, a great incitement questionless unto Dido to come thither also; who feared as much danger from her brother Pygmalion King of Tyre, whose hands had been embrued in the blood of her husband, as the others did from the sword of Josuah. Gathering together all her treasures, which were very great, accompanied with her brother Barca and her sister Anna, the set sail for afric; and landing in the Bay, where after stood the City of Carthage, she obtained leave to build a Fort of no greater bigness than the could compass round about with an Ox's hide. This the beginning of that City; hence the name of Byrsa, which at first it had. First founded in or about the year of the world 3070. which was about 144 years after the building of Solomon's Temple, 143 years before the building of Rome, and about 290 years from the destruction of Troy. By which account (I note this only by the way) it is impossible that Dido or Elisa (for by both these names we find her called) should ever see the face of Aenaeas, unless it were in picture, or imagination; and therefore as impossible she should either fall in love with him, or be got with child by him, or finally kill herself on her being forsaken. All which being delivered by Virgil in his excellent Poem, did for long time obtain a general belief with most sorts of men. Hereunto consenteth Ausonius, who honouring the Statue of this abused Princess with an Epigram of 18 verses, among others gives us these four.  

Invida cur in me stimulasti Musa Maronem,  
Fingeret ut nostra damna pudicitiae?  
Vos magis Historicis (Lectores) credit de me,  
Quam qui furta deum, concubitusque canunt.   

Why didst thou stir up Virgil, envious Muse,  
Falsely my name and honour to abuse?  
Of me let Histories be heard, not those,  
Who to the World, Jove's theft and lusts expose.   
Credible it is, that Aenaeas being driven on the coast of afric, was by some Prince there courteously entertained, as a man whose fame had been his harbinger: but why the story should be fastened on Dido, I see not. Perhaps the unfortunate death of this Queen, who laid violent hands on herself, gave occasion to the Poet to fain, that it was for the love of Aenaeas: whereas it was indeed to avoid the lust and fury of Jarbas, a potent King in afric, who violently desired to have his pleasure on her.  
But to proceed. This City thus founded in a place commodious for trade and merchandise, in short time grew exceeding wealthy; And having wealth enough to hire mercenary soldiers (of which the needy Mauritanians & Numidians did afford good store) they conquered all the Seacoasts from Cyrene to the Streits of Hercules (now called the Streits of Gibraltar) and so much also towards the South, as was worth the conquering; within which space possessed of 300 Cities. Grown to such height, that all the African Kings and Princes, and amongst them the Kings of Numidia and Mauritania, were at their devotion: They began to cast their eyes on Sicily, a wealthy Island, lying near unto their Coast; which questionless they had possessed, if the Romans, envious of their greatness, and fearing their neighbourhood, had not took upon them the defence of the Mumertines, and under that pretence got some footing in it. The end of this war, after many brave exploits on both sides, was the driving the Carthaginians out of Sicil, their abandoning all the Islands betwixt them and Italy, and the payment of 3200 Talents, amounting to about two millions of Crowns. And such end had the first Punic war, managed for the most part in Sicil: during which time, and the first war there managed by the Carthaginians, afric itself was twice invaded; first by Agathocles Tyrant of Syracuse, (or so commonly called) and afterwards by Regulus a Roman General; but with no other great success, than the spoil of the Country. The second followed not long after, but the Scene was altered: begun in Spain, prosecuted in Italy, and ended in afric. Begun by Annibal the son of Amilcar, descended from Barca the brother of Dido or Elisa; who having conquered a great part of Spain, and thereby both increased his reputation and experience, conducted his victorious Army through Gaul, and over the Alps, into Italy itself; defeated the Army of the Romans, and slew some of their Consuls; so prosperous in the battle of Cannae, where the whole strength of Rome was broken, that had he followed his good fortune, and made use of his victory, he might within four or five days after have dined in the Capitol. Having for 18 years together held them work in Italy, he was called home to defend afric from the forces of Scipio: who having driven the Carthaginians out of Spain, had very prudently translated the war to Carthage. The issue was, that on the loss of the battle of Nadagara, the Carthaginians were necessitated to submit themselves to the will of the Conqueror; that is to say, to deliver up all their Elephants, together with all their Ships and Galleys excepting ten; to make no war without leave of the Romans, to pay for the charges of the war 10000 Talents, and such other extremities. So ended the second Punic war, An. V. C. 602. And the third followed not long after; not any way occasioned by those of Carthage, but out of the inveterate hatred of the people of Rome, who would not think themselves safe whilst that City stood, and therefore sent another Scipio to lay siege unto it; by whom, after a long and stout resistance, it was at last taken and destroyed; the Treasure which was found in it, notwithstanding their former losses, and the low estate it was reduced to, besides what was consumed by fire, and reserved by the soldiers, amounting to 470000 pound weight of silver, which cometh to a Million, four hundred and ten thousand pounds of our English money.  
Such end had Carthage, and therewithal the rest of the States of Africa, who though in hatred to the Carthaginians they had armed against her, and aided the Romans in these wars, yet they soon found their own fortunes buried in the selfsame Grave. Subverted, one after another, as occasion was, they became all subject unto Rome, their Kingdoms and Estates turned to Roman Provinces. Of these were reckoned seven in all, that is to say, 1 Africa Propria, called also Zeugitana, and Proconsularis, 2 Byzacena, 3 Tripolitana, 4 Numidia, 5 Mauritania Caesariensis, 6 Sitisensis, and 7 Tingitana. Of which the last (I know not why) was laid to the Diocese of Spain, called therefore Hispania Transfretana. Spain on the other side of the Sea, by some elder Writers: the other six made up the Diocese of afric, subordinate to the Praefectus Praetorius for Italy, who had here his Vicarius or Lieutenant. In this condition it continued, till subdued by the Vandals, a Germane nation, inhabiting beyond the Elb on the Coast of the Baltic, where now lie the Dukedoms of Mecklenbourg and Pomerania. Their memory still retained there in the stile of those Princes, who call themselves Deuces Vandalorum; and in the Confederacy of the Hanse-towns, called by some Latin Writers, Civitates Vandalicae. A Nation of great power, and numbers, (the Burgundians being only a part of these) one of the five into which Pliny doth divide the Germans. In the 11. year of the Empire of Arcadius and Honorius, they were invited into Gaul by the treacherous practices of Stilico, Lieutenant of the Western Empire; and after an abode of three years passed into Spain, together with the Suevi and Alani their Associates. But after 18 years, the Goths made that place too hot for them also. So that they could not but willingly accept the offer of Bonifacius, the Emperor's Vicegerent in Africa: who stomacking to see his Office bestowed on Castinus an unworthy man, and his enemy; betrayed the Country to these Vandals, in the last year of the life and reign of Gundericus; an Arian in Religion, as were the rest of the Nation, to which induced by their neighbourhood and acquaintance with the Goths: which Heresy as they brought with them into afric, driving thence all the Orthodox Christeans; so they continued in it till their extirpation.  

The Vandal Kings of Africa.  
A. C.  
412. 1 Gundericus, who first invaded Gaul, Spain, and afric. 16.  
428. 2 Gensericus, who at the request of Eudoxia the widow of Valentinian, invaded Italy and sacked the City of Rome, the spoil whereof for 14 days he gave to his soldiers: but at the request of Eudoxia, whom he afterward married, he did not burn it. This Eudoxia was wife to the Western Emperor Valentinian; who having a mind to a Lady of Rome, the wife of one Maximus, he cunningly slipped the Ring of Maximus off his finger, and by that token sent for the Lady to the Court; and when she was come, ravished her. To revenge this disgrace, Maximus slew Valentinian, made himself Emperor, and forced Eudoxia to be his wife. But she stomacking a match so unequal to her high birth, and having some incling of the manner of her husband's death, sent for Gensericus into Italy. This Gensericus conquered Carthage and Hippo, and reigned 48 years.  
476. 3 Honoricus, son of Gensericus. 7.  
484. 4 Gundebundus, son to Genzo the brother of Honoricus. 15.  
499. 5 Trasimundus, brother to Gundebundus. 24.  
523. 6 Hildericus, the son of Honoricus, deposed.  
530. 7 Gilmir, the son of Genzo, one of the Descendants of Gensericus; overcome by Belisarius a worthy and politic Leader, whom the Emperor Justinian employed in that service.   
And thus ended the Kingdom of the Vandals, (having continued in Spain and Africa, 146 years) by the valour of Belisarius. Who after this good service, was employed by Justinian against the Goths, then reigning in Italy; against whom he proceeded very fortunately: but being on I know not what envy, called to Constantinople, his eyes were put out, and he was forced to beg his bread at the Gate of the Temple of S. Sophia. A bad reward for so good a servant. But to go on: Justinian having regained afric, to honour his new Conquest, exempted it from the command of the Praetorio-Praefectus of Italy, to which formerly subject; and increasing the number of the African Provinces by the addition of the Isle of Sardinia, made it a Praefecture of itself; appointing his Praefectus Praetorio Africa to reside in Carthage, as the chief City of his charge; which he then also raised to a Consular Province, having in former times been Proconsular only. But long it held not in this state: For in the year 647. the Romans were finally expulsed by Hucba a famous Leader, whom Osmen the third Caliph of the Saracens had designed to this service. afric, from that time forwards, reckoned amongst the Provinces of the Saracenical or Mahometan Empire. But in the end, the Authority of the Caliphs' growing less and less, and every one of their Sultan's or Provincial Officers getting what he could for himself; this Country was distracted into many Kingdoms and Principalities, but all at last reduced to four of most consideration; that is to say, the Kingdoms of 1 Tunis, 2 Tremesen or Algeirs, 3 Fesso, and 4 Morocco. To the Chorography and History whereof we do now proceed, adding hereto in the fifth place the Isles of Barbay.  

1. TUNIS.  
THe Kingdom of TUNIS (in Latin called Regnum Tunctanum) hath on the East Cyrene, on the West the Kingdom of Algeirs or Tremesin, on the North the Mediterranean, on the South Mount Atlas. So called from Tunis the chief City of it.  
The Country towards the East barren and destitute of water; but in the Western parts sufficiently plentiful of Corn and other fruits, and generally well set with Trees. The people more patient of labour then the rest of Barbary, and for that cause perhaps more healthy; but questionless of so good constitution, that they live commonly to great Age, unless a violent death prevent them; and are not much afraid of sickness, or much troubled with it.  
It contains in it the two whole Provinces of Africa Propria (or Africa Minor, as some call it) and the Numidia of the Romans, called since Numidia Antiqua, to difference it from the present Numidia, lying on the other side of Mount Atlas. The principal Mountains of which Countries, besides those spoken of already, were 1 Audas, 2 Buzara, 3 Cinna, 4 Dios, or the Hills of Jupiter, 5 Gillius, by some named Gigion, and 6 those called Thizibi. Rivers of most esteem with them, though not much with others, besides those mentioned before, 1 Ampsaga, now called Collo, and by some Sat Gemar, which divideth this Kingdom from that of Tremesen; 2 Catuda; 3 Cyniphus, issuing from the hills called Zuchabarus, and falling into the Sea not far from Tripoli. Besides which there were some great Lakes; the chief whereof, 1 Hipponites near Mount Cinna; 2 the Lake of Pallas, or that called Palus Tritonia, where Minerva was said to have showed herself the Inventress of Spining and of Oil, and for that much worshipped by this People; 3 Sylura, another great Lake, but not so famous as the former, because not honoured by a Goddess.  
The whole divided by the Romans into these four parts, viz. 1. Africa specially so called, lying on the Sea, from the River Ampsaga to the Lesser Syrtis; 2. Tripolitana, from the Lesser Syrtis to the Greater; 3. Numidia, lying on the West of Zeugitana, or Africa Propria; and 4. Byzacena, so called from Byzacium, or Byzacina, a chief City of it; the territory whereof so extremely fruitful, that 400 Ears of corn were sent to Rome in the time of Augustus, and 360 in the time of Domitius Nero, growing on one stalk. But this Division being long since worn out of memory, it is divided at the present into the Provinces of, 1. Ezzab, 2. Tripoli, 3. Tunis, 4 Constantina, 5. Bugia. 1. EZZAB is that part of this Kingdom which lieth next to Cyrene: A small Region, and not very fruitful; yet the Inhabitants hereof are conceived to be rich, (the richer, in regard they are free from tributes) their wealth not rising from the commodities of their own Country, which affordeth them little else besides Dates and Olives; but from such merchandise which they buy of the Venetians, and sell to the Numidians. The richest, those of Mesrata, (a little Province of this Tract) which lieth near the Sea. Towns it hath some, but none of note: the chief of which, 1. Mesurata, 2. Sibeca, both upon the Sea; of which the first gives name unto that little Province spoken of before. Of more note in the former times was Philoeni Villa, situate on the Greater Syrtis, near the Promontory then called Hippi, but now Cabo de Surta; memorable for the adjoining Altars called Phileni Arae, erected by the Carthaginians upon this occasion. Some controversies being grown betwixt those of Carthage and Cyrene, about their bounds; it was agreed, that two men at a set hour should be sent out of each City towards the other; and where they met, there to be fixed the Meer-stone of their several Territories: The Phileni, two brothers nominated for Carthage, were so quick of foot, that they had gotten a good way into the Country of the Cyrenenses, before they were met; wherewith the Cyreneans much enraged, put to them this choice, either to go so much back again, or to die in the place: This last accepted by the Phileni, who preferred the common good of their Country before their own; for preservation of whose name and honour to succeeding Ages, the grateful Carthaginians did erect these Altars.  
2. West of the Province of Ezzab, lieth that of TRIPOLI, which together with Ezzab made that Province which the Romans called Tripolitana: Not much more fruitful than the other, except in Barley; but more commodiously seated in regard of the Sea, which is here more safe for navigation, the former lying wholly on the greater Syrtis. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Leptis Magna, so called to distinguish it from another, but of less note, and therefore called Leptis Parva, situate in the (now) Province of Tunis. A town of so great wealth and trade, that it was worth a Talon daily to the Carthaginians. 2. Euphranta, called also Pyrgos Euphranta from some strong Tower in it, on the Western-bank of the greater Syrtis. 3. Cinsterna, on the Eastern side of the River Cyniphus. 4. Cabis, the utmost City of this Province westward; the same which Ptolemy calls Tacapa, situate at the fall of the River Triton into the lesser Syrtis. 5. Sabratha, and 6. Heva; not else observable, but that together with Leptis Magna they made up that one City which the Romans called from thence Tripoli. 7. Tripoli, founded by the Romans, and by them peopled with Colonies from those three Cities before mentioned. A City of great name and riches, till destroyed by the Saracens: By whom rebuilt adorned with many fair Temples, Colleges, and Hospitals; and flourishing in much wealth and lustre, it became a Kingdom of itself, but subject to the Kings of Tunis, till taken by the Genoes' with a Fleet of 20 sail, and by them sold to the King of Fez. Recovered not long after by the King of Tunis, it came once more to have a King of its own; till by the valour of Peter of Navarre, it was conquered for Ferdinand the Catholic, the first Monarch of Spain; whose Nephew Charles the 5. conferred it on the Knights of S. John of Jerusalem, then expelled from Rhodes: whom the Turks under Sinan Basa General of Selimus the second, dispossessed by force, An. 1551. since that the ordinary Residence of the Turkish Begterbeg for these African Provinces, and made an usual retreat for Pirates▪ who infest these Seas, and do much mischief to the Coasts of Sicil, Italy, and others of the Christian Countries.  
3. The Province of TUNIS, lying Westward to that of Tripoli, taketh up so much of this Kingdom, as anciently contained the Province of Byzacena; and so much of the Roman afric, as lieth on the East of the River called Guadilharbar, the Hipponites Lacus of the Ancient writers. The Country anciently so fruitful, that it yielded usually an increase of an hundred and fifty fold: For proof of which, besides the testimony of approved Authors, the wonderful, if not prodigious Ears of Corn which before we heard of, may serve sufficiently. Now indigent, and so unprovided of all Grain for the use of their families, that they are fain to furnish themselves out of other places: the People not daring to manure or sow their land, for fear of the Arabians, who ever and anon fall into these parts, and spoil what they meet with.  
Places of most note in it, in the elder times, 1. Adrumetum, or Adrumystus, now called Machometta, once a Roman Colony, and the Metropolis of the Province of Byzacena; by consequence, in the times of Christianity an Archbishops See: walled and repaired by the Emperor Justinian, and by his command called Justiniana. 2. Zama, the encamping place of Annibal before his battle with Scipio. 3. Nadagora, memorable for the great battle betwixt the two renowned Generals of Rome and Carthage, not paralleled since their own times, nor in those before them. In which the great Controversy between those Cities being to be tried, the fortune of the day fell unto the Romans: For though Annibal showed his singular judgement in ordering his Soldiers, as Scipio could not but acknowledge; yet being far the weaker in horse, and by an Order of the Senate of Carthage to fight in a place of disadvantage, he could do no marvels: the Romans with the loss of no more than 1500 of their own men, killing 20000 of the Carthaginians in the fight and chase. 4. Salera, the first place took by Scipio after the landing of his Army. 5. Utica, a Tyrian Colony, beautified with an Haven capable of the greatest ships; much spoke of in the wars of Carthage, and memorable for the death of Cato (hence surnamed Utican) who here slew himself, for fear of falling into the hands of Caesar. It is now called Biserta. 6. Byzacium, seated in liberal and fruitful soils, as was shown before; whence the Province had the name of Byzacena. 7. Ruspinum, made by Caesar the seat of his war in afric, against the sons and faction of Pompey: as memorable in the times succeeding, for being the Epi●copal See of S. Fulgentius. 8. Thystrus, remarkable for the Tragedy of the Gordianis: Of which the Father in this City was saluted Emperor by the Soldiers, in hatred to Maximinus then their Emperor, whose Procurator they had slain in a tumult: but his party being discomfited by Capellianus whom Maximinus sent against him, and his son killed in the defeat; upon the hearing of the news, he here hanged himself. 9 Hippagreta, on a great Lake betwixt Carthage and Utica; once of the Towns which held out longest for the Mercinaries, in their desperate Rebellion against the Carthaginians; by which the Estate of that great City was in danger of ruin, at the end of the first Punick war. 10. CARTHAGE, once the Lady and Mistress of afric; situate in the bottom of a safe and capacious Bay, the entrances whereof were very strongly fortified both by art and nature; Environed with the Sea, except upon one side only, where joined unto the Land by a narrow Isthmus about two miles and an half in breadth: In compass 24 miles; but measuring by the outward wall, it was 45. For without the wall of the City itself, there were three walls more, betwixt each of which there were three or four Streets, with Vaults under ground of 30 foot deep, wherein they had place for 300 Elephants and all their Fodder, with Stables over them for 4000 Horse and all their Provender; and Lodging in those Out-streets for the Riders of the said Horse, and for 20000 Foot besides, which never came within the City to annoy or pester it. On the South side stood the Castle called Byrsa, which took up two miles and an half in compass; first built by Dido, on that ground which she obtained of the Libyans, when she got leave to buy only so much land of them, as she could compass round about with an Ox's hide. In that, the sumptuous Temple of their ancient Deities, Juno, Apollo, Aesculapius, Belus. On the Westside, a standing Pool made of the Sea-water; let into it by so narrow a passage, that there was but 70 foot open for the Sea to enter: On which they had a stately Arsenal, with their Ships and Galleys riding by it. Of the foundation and affairs of this mighty City we have spoke already. The Government of it first by Kings, those absolute enough at first, afterwards limited by the Senate, and finally made merely titulary by the power of the People: which unproportionable mixture is much condemned by Aristotle in the 2. of his Politics. Their Territories, before the second Punic war, when they were at the greatest, extended on the Seacoasts of the Mediterranean, from the Greater Syrtis to the Streits, and so unto the River Iberus, for the space of 2000 miles in length: their Revenues answerable, and readily brought in, by reason of their infinite trading. Which made the Roman people think themselves unsafe, whilst this City stood. Resolved on the destruction of it, they sent against it L. Martius and M. Manlius, their two Consuls, with a puissant Army: to whom the Carthaginians willingly delivered up their Arms and Shipping, contracting only for the preservation of the City itself, which was faithfully promised. But when they had withal given up the sons of their principal men to be sent to Rome for Pledges of their future loyalty; they were told, that a City consisted not in walls, but in laws and government. These with the Corporation, should remain as formerly; the Town to be removed ten miles further off, where there was no Sea to thrive and grow rich upon. Enraged herewith, it was resolved to abide the utmost; but they wanted necessaries for resistance. That want supplied for want of Iron to make Arms, with Gold and Silver; the Houses pulled down to furnish them with timber to build a Navy; and noble Ladies cutting off the hair of their heads, to make Ropes and Cordage; 25000 Women listed to defend the walls. But the fatal moment being come, a second Scipio is sent thither to dispatch the work; by whom at last the Town was taken, and for 17 days together consumed with fire; the Queen and multitudes of the People burning themselves in the Temple of Aesculapius, because they would not fall into the hands of the Romans. Re-edified by julius Caesar, and made a Colony, it recovered some part of her former lustre; but so, that her chief glory was rather to be sought for in her ancient, than her present fortunes. Populi Romani Colonia, olim Imperii ejus pertinax amula, & priorum excidio rerum, quam ope prasentium clarior; was her character in the times of Pomponius Mela. But in this last Estate, accounted for the Metropolis of the Diocese of afric, the Residence of the Vicarius or Lieutenant-General, and the See of the chief Primate of the African Churches; who had 164 Bishops under him in that one Province wherein Carthage stood. Destroyed in the succeeding times by the Vandals, and after that by the Saracens; it is at last reduced to nothing but a few scattered houses, not above five and twenty shops, one Temple: all the rest a ruin. So truly said the ancient Poet, 
Sic patet exemplis Oppida posse mori.  
Thus by examples do we see,  
That Towns may die as well as we.   
Of note at the present, 1. Tunis, supposed to be the Themisa or Thunisa of Ptolemy; of small account till the last destruction of Carthage, by whose fall it rose. Situate not far from the ruins of that famous City, in compass about five miles, and in that compass said to contain 10000 households. Of great traffic, and well frequented by the Merchants of foreign nations, chiefly from Genoa and Venice. Remarkable in the Story of the Holy Wars, for the sieges and successes of two of our English Princes; that namely of King Edward the first, in his father's life time; and that of Henry the fourth, then but Earl of Derby: by both which (though the last served only under the command of the French) the City was compelled to a Composition; Lewis the 9 commonly called S. Lewis, dying at the first siege of it. 2. Goletta, a strong Fort, built for defence of the Haven of Tunis, in a Demy-Iland, divided from the main Land by two narrow passages, but so that it commands them both. Taken, but not without extreme difficulty, by Charles 5. Ann. 1535. together with the Turkish Navy riding in the Lake fast by it; but again recovered by the Turks about 40 years after, Ann 1574. 3. Cairoan, built by Hucba, who first conquered afric for the Saracens, in a sandy Desert, about 100 miles from Tunis, and 36 from any part of the Sea, to secure himself from any invasion, which the commodiousness of the Sea might bring upon him. Adorned by the first founder of it, with an admirable Temple raised on Pillars of Marble, who placed also in it a College of Priests, and made it the chief Residence of his posterity for the space of 170 years, who reigned here under the great Caliphs' as the Sultan's of afric. Destroyed by the Arabians, in the 424 year of their Hegira, but regained from them by the King of Morocco; and still of such esteem amongst these Mahometans, that their chief men are brought thither to be buried from all parts of the Country, hoping by the prayers of those Priests to find a shorter way to Heaven then in other places.  
4 More Westward yet lies the Province named CONST ANTINA, so called from Constantina the chief City of it. Extended from the Lake Hipponites, now named Guaditharbar, to Constantine a Mountain bordering on Bugia, which I conceive to be the same with Mons Audus in Ptolemy. The soil hereof said to be very rich and fruitful both for Corn and cattle, yielding abundance of Fruits, and great store of Butter. Rubricatus, by Orosius called Ordalio, now Ludog, the chief River of it.  
Principal Cities of this Province, 1. Tabraca, on the East; and 2. Hippo Regius, on the Western bank of Rubricatus: both Roman Colonies, but this last most famous, in being the Episcopal See of renowned S. Augustine. 3. Bona, the birthplace of that Father, built by the Romans about an hundred miles from the Sea, but situate in a large Plain, containing 40 miles in length, 25 in breadth: so rich and fertile, that the Town flourisheth to this day, adorned with a sumptuous Mosque, and never without the company of Merchants coming from Genoa, Tunes, and the Isle of Zerby, for their Fruits and Butter. 4. Thuburnica, another Colony of the Romans. 5. Sicca Veneria, another Town of the same nature; by Solinus called Veneria only, and by Pliny, Sicca. 6. Culcua, another of the Roman Colonies, by the Moors now called Cucutina, but Constantina by the Latins, and most Nations else; Now the chief City of this Province, situate near a Mountain of the same name near the edge of Bugia. An ancient City, but containing still 8000 families, many sumptuous buildings, amongst which a large Temple, two Colleges, and three or four Monasteries frequently visited by the Merchant, every Trade having here its peculiar Street; their chief commodities, Wool, Cloth, Silks, Oil, and some sorts of Fruits; which they exchange for Dates, or Slaves, who are here good merchandise. The City for the most part fenced about with high craggy rocks; and where those want, with strong walls, of a great height, and most exquisite workmanship, declaring the antiquity of it; A further argument whereof may be a fair Triumphal Arch not far from the City, and some Hot Baths, after the manner of the Romans.  
5. Most Westward lieth the Province of BUGIA, extended from Mount Constantine to the River Ampsaga, now called Chollo or Sef-Gemar: which with so much of Constantina as lieth on the Westside of Rubricatus, made up that Province which the Romans called by the name of Numidia. The length hereof 150 miles on the Mediterranean, the breadth not above half so much. Narrower than Mauritania, as is said by Pliny; sed ditior & magis culta, but the richer of the two, and the better peopled. The Country of a sat soil, plentiful both in fruits and corn, but most fit for pasturage; to which the people were so addicted, that many of them cared not for building Houses, (instead whereof they used the Hold of a Ship with the Keel turned upwards) but removed from one place to another, as their Pastures failed them. From thence called Nomads by the Grecians, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifying to feed or graze. The people of good metal, swift of foot, and well skilled in horsemanship; but better in the onset and to give a charge, then in standing to it: such as the wild Arabians are now said to be.  
Chief Towns hereof (besides Thuburnica, Culcua, Bona, Hippo, spoken of before, belonging to Numidia, though not to Bugia) 1. Bugia, built by the Romans on the side of a lofty Mountain looking into the Sea; by some conceived to have been the Thebuaca of Ptolemy, now the chief City of this Province, adorned with many sumptuous Mosques, some Monasteries and Colleges for Students in the Law of Mahomet, and many fair Hospitals for relief of the Poor; Fenced also with a strong Castle. Secured by the strength whereof, and growing rich by the fruitfulness of the situation, the Citizens began to grow proud and wanton; working much mischief to the Spaniards by their Galleys which they had at sea, till taught more modesty by Peter of Navarre a Spanish Captain, A. 1508. by whom the Town was taken, and the people plundered. 2. Chollo, upon the Seaside, the Chollops Magnus (as I take it) of Ptolemy; reported for a wealthy City. 3. Nicaus, seated towards Mount Atlas, in a pleasant and delightful country; which though interspersed with many hills, yet being those hills are clothed with woods, yield them good store of Goats and Horses, and feed the Valleys with fresh springs which do issue from them; they rather add then detract any thing from the pleasures of it. 4. Madaura, by some called Madurus, the birthplace of Apuleius. 5. Thunudromum, another of the Roman Colonies. 6. Cirta, or Cirta Julia, the Metropolis of Numidia when a Roman Province, and formerly the Seat-royal of Syphax King of the Masaesyli, within whose country it was reckoned in former times, though afterwards laid unto this Province. Situate near the mouth of the River Ampsaga, and memorable for the tragedy of Sophonisba, the daughter of Asdrubal of Carthage; a Lady of most exquisite beauty, and yet carried more charms in her tongue then in her eyes. espoused first unto Masinissa King of the Numidians, but after upon reason of State married unto Syphax: who being took prisoner by his Rival, and brought to Cirta, the Lady upon hopes of liberty and honour both, bestowed herself on her first Lover: but Scipio fearing lest that marriage might withdraw Masinissa from the Roman party, caused the Lady to be seized on; which Masinissa not being otherwise able to prevent or remedy, sent her a Cup of poison, which she drank and died.  
Of these Numidians there is much mention in the Stories of Rome and Carthage; employed by this last City in all their wars, both in Spain, Italy, and Sicil. Siding at last with Scipio against that State, they did good service to the Romans in the weakening and destruction of that City; whose fall they did not long survive: first conquered in the war of Jugurth; after the death of Juba, made a Roman Province. Their Kings, as far as I can trace the succession of them, follow in this Order.  

The Kings of the Numidians.  
1 Gala, the Father of Masinissa.  
2 Desalces, the brother of Gala; according to the laws of the Country, which gave the Crown unto the brother, not the son of the former King, (like the law of Tanistry in Ireland) succeeded Gala.  
3 N. N. a son of Desalces, in the absence of Masinissa, then serving under the Carthaginians in the wars of Spain, possessed himself of the throne: slain not long after by a Rebel.  
4 Masinissa, son of Gala, recovered the kingdom of his Fathers; but again outed by Syphax and the Carthaginians, betwixt whom and Masinissa, touching Sophonisba, there was deadly feud. Aided by Scipio and the Romans, with whom associated against Carthage, he not only recovered his own kingdom, but was gratified with the greatest part of that which belonged to Syphax. A professed Enemy to Carthage, (the final ruin whereof he lived to see) till the time of his death, being then ninety years of Age.  
5 Micipsa, the son of Masinissa; of whom nothing memorable.  
6 Jugurth, the son of Mastanabilis, one of the Brethren of Micipsa, having wickedly made away the two sons of Micipsa, usurped the kingdom; & manifestly withstood the Romans, whose attempts sometimes by force, sometimes by subtlety, but chiefly by money and bribes, he overthrew and made frustrate: Et fuit in Ingurtha (saith Florus) quod post Annibalem timeretur. At last, being broken by Metellus, vanquished by Marius, and by Bocchus delivered into the hands of Sylla, he was by Marius led in triumph to Rome. In this Triumph was carried 3700 pound weight in Gold; in Silver-wedges, 5775 pound weight; and in ready Coin, 28900 Crowns: it being the custom of the Romans in their Triumphs, to have carried before them all the riches and money which they had brought out of the conquered Countries, to put into the common Treasury.  
7 Hiempsal, son of Bocchus king of Mauritania; gratified for his Father's treachery in betraying Jugurth, with the kingdom of Numidia: Relieved Marius, in his exile.  
8 Hiarbas, another of the Marian faction, preferred to the Numidian Crown, but vanquished and deprived by Pompey, at that time one of Sylla's Captains.  
9 Hiempsal II. preferred by Pompey to this kingdom.  
10 Juba, the son of Hiempsal the second, who siding with Pompey against Caesar, in the Civil wars, gave a great overthrow to Curio one of Caesar's Lieutenants; Curio himself slain, his whole Army routed, such as were taken prisoners murdered in cold blood. But being discomfited by Caesar, after Pompey's death, Numidia was made a Province of the Roman Empire.   
Thus by the fall of Carthage, and the death of Juba, came the whole Provinces of Africa Propria, and Numidia (containing the now Kingdom of Tunis) into the power of the Romans. Of which, the Nations of most note were the Nigitimi, on the Eastern parts of the Mediterranean, the Machyni, near the Lesser Syrtis; the Libya-Phoenices and Mideni, bordering upon Carthage; the jonii, Navatrae, and Cirtesii, taking up all the Seacoasts of Numidia. Such as inhabited more Southwards on the back of these, not so much considerable: None of them to be stayed upon, but the Libya-Phaenices, a mixed people of the old Libian and new Phoenicians, as the Libyaegyptii were of the said Libian and the neighbouring Egyptians. The memory of all of them so defaced by the violent inundation of the Arabians, that there is scarce any tract or footsteps of them in all the Country. When conquered by the Saracens, they were at first subject to the Caliph or Sultan of Cairoan: after the spoil whereof by the Arabians, subdued by Abdul Mumen King of Morocco, and by him added to that Kingdom. In the distractions of that State, made a peculiar Kingdom by some of the Relics of the Stock of the Almohades, who took unto himself the title of King of Tunis, that City being his chief Seat. By him transmitted unto his posterity, till the days of our Grandfathers; when Muleasses, one of the youngest sons of Sultan Mahomet, having first murdered Maimon his eldest brother, and put out the eyes of twenty of the rest, usurped the Sovereignty. Rosetta, the only one of those Princes who escaped this massacre, by the aid of Solyman the magnificent obtained the Crown: outed thereof not long after by Charles the fifth, appearing in favour of Muleasses, An. 1535. But the Tyrant did not long enjoy his ill-gotten Sovereignty, when his eyes were were also put out by his own son Amida, and so committed to close prison: Nor did Amida enjoy it long, dispossessed by Abdamelech his father's brother. To Abdamelech, Mahomet his son succeeded, and in his life another Mahomet the brother of Amida; who being supported by the Turks, recovered from the Christians the strong Fort of Coletta; and dying, left the Turk his heir, who doth now possess it.   

2. TREMESEN, or ALGIERS.  
THe Kingdom of TREMESEN is bounded on the East with the River Ampsaga, (now called Ma●or) by which parted from the Kingdom of Tunis; on the West with the Kingdoms of Fez and Morocco, from which separated by the River Malutha or Malva. So called from Tremesen or Teleusine, the chief City of it. Called also the Kingdom of Algiers, from the City so named, sometimes the Seat-royal of their Kings.  
In the flourish of the Roman Empire, it had the name of Mauritania Casariensis: Mauritania, because a part of the Kingdom of Juba King of Mauritania, of which more anon; Casariensis, from Caesarea the chief City of it, as that so called in honour of Augustus Caesar, on whom the Kings hereof depended. Time made more anciently the Kingdom of the Masaesyli one of the most powerful Nations in all this tract, over whom reigned Syphax before mentioned; called therefore by Strabo, Masaesylilia, with good propriety; and corruptedly, Massylia.  
The Kingdom extended in length from East to West, for the space of 380 miles, but of breadth not answerable: Is generally of the same nature (as to the Soil and Air) with the rest of Barbary; sufficiently fruitful towards the Sea, more barren and uncomfortable in the Southern parts. But meanly peopled, by reason of the continual spoils made by the Arabians, who possess the Deserts; and the Cities of it much wasted by continual wars. Nor have the People any peculiar Character, but what belongeth to others of these Africans also.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Guagyda, inconveniently seated, as paying their accustomed tributes to the King of Tremesen, their natural Prince, and contribution to the Arabians, who are here so numerous and powerful, that the Kings themselves of this small kingdom were fain to buy their peace of them at excessive rates. 2. Tigedent, sometimes famous, and abounding with men of learning; now almost forsaken, by reason of the ill neighbourhood of these Arabians. 3. Tebocrit, inhabited for the most part by Weavers. 4. Bresch, the Inhabitants whereof use to paint a black Cross on their cheek, and another on the palm of their hands: the reason of which custom they are ignorant of, but some conceive it to be a remembrance of their Christianity. 5, Ned-Roma, built as the people do pretend, by the ancient Romans, as an Epitome or Abridgement of that mighty City, to which it is said to have some resemblance; and that imported by the name, which signifieth in their language, Like to Rome. Perhaps the same which Ptolemy calleth Novum oppidum or the New-town, than a Roman Colony. 6. Batha, once a great City, since decayed by wars. 7. Oran, a noted Haven on the Mediterranean, said to contain no sewer than 10000 Families. Powerful at Sea, and much infesting with their Galleys the Coasts of Spain; till taken for Ferdinand the Catholic▪ by Peter of Navarre A. 1506 since which time peopled & possessed by the Spaniards: In vain besieged by the Turks, A. 1562. 8. Masalquivir, a fair and capacious Haven on the same Sea also, and taken by the said Peter of Navarre, about the same time. 9 Haresgol, in former times of much esteem amongst the Moors; but being destroyed by the King or Sultan of Cairoan, it bequeathed its greatness unto Tremesen, which after grew into renown. 10. Tremesen, once adorned with many beautiful Mosques, and five sumptuous Colleges, curiously wrought with Mosuick work. So populous, that there were reckoned in it 16000 families; and so well fortified, that it held out seven years against Joseph the great King of Fez: not taken after that, though they were very much weakened by Abulthasen or Albohacen his son, successor, under a siege of 30 months. By those, and the succeeding troubles it hath undergone, exceedingly impaired both in strength and beauty. More ancient, 11. Siga, an African City, and a Roman Colony; the retiring place of Syphax and Bocchus, sometimes Kings of this Country. 12. Arsenaria, another Colony of the Romans. 13. Jol, the seat-royal of king Bocchus, after such time as this country was conferred upon him by the Romans, on the taking of Jugurth: called afterwards Caesarea, in honour of Augustus Caesar, whose Feudatories the Kings hereof were then accounted; or as some say, in honour of Claudius Caesar, by whom made a Colony: the Metropolis of it also when a Roman Province, which from hence was called Caesariensis. Situate in or near the place where Oran now stands, which seemeth to have risen out of the ruins of it. 14. Saldae, a Roman Colony also, out of whose ruins rose Algiers. 15. Algiers, by the Arabians called Gezeir, now the chief City of this Kingdom, situate near the Sea, in the form of a Triangle, with an Haven to it, but neither great, nor safe from the north-winds, which do much annoy it. The buildings very beautiful; the public Inns, Baths, and Mosques, exceeding sumptuous; every Trade having a several place or street by itself. But that which is the greatest grace of it, is the situation of the houses standing in even streets one above another upon the rising of a steep Hill; so that the windows of one street or row of housing do all along overlook the tops of the other next beneath, which yieldeth to the Sea a most pleasant prospect. A City not so large, as strong; and not so strong, as famous. Famous for being the receptacle and retrait-place of the Turkish Pirates, who domineer so infinitely over the Mediterranean, to the great damage of the Merchants of all Nations, that frequent those seas. Famous also for the shipwreck which Charles the fifth here suffered, who besieging this Town, lost in the haven of it at one tempest, besides an infinite number of Karvels and small Boats, divers strong Galleys, 140 ships, a great many excellent pieces of Ordinance; such a number of gallant Horses, that in Spain the race of horses for service had like to have been lost for ever; and above half his men. It long enjoyed the benefit of proprietary princes, (but Homagers or Tributaries to the Kings of Tremesen) till such time as Selimes and Mahomet falling out, made the first, and that an irreparable breach in the Government. For Selimes, to strengthen his side, implored the aid of Hairaccius Barbarossa, a noble Pirate; who taking his best advantage, slew the disjointed Brethren, and settled himself in the kingdom: which he had scarce made warm, when he left it to Hairadine Barbarossa his brother, An. 1514: This Hairadine drove the Spaniards out of Bugia, and was so renowned for Martial prowess, that Solyman the magnificent made him Lord High-Admiral of his Fleet: which office, when to the prejudice of Christendom he had fortunately and for long time undergone; he died lamented, and made the Turk the heir of his kingdom; the kingdom of Tremesen being made subject to the Turks much about that time. 16. Tetuan, and 17. Sargel, situate Westward of Algiers; Towns of Trade and Piracy.  
The old Inhabitants of this Kingdom, when a Roman Province, were the Herpiditani, Taladusii, Thalesssii, Malchubii, Maccurebi, Chituae, and others of as little note; the most predominant Nation being the Masasyli, over whom (and in that over all the rest) reigned Syphax, spoken of before; unfortunately famous for his tragical love to Sophonisba; for whose sake siding with the Carthaginians against the Romans, he was vanquished and sent prisoner to Rome. His kingdom given to Masinissa King of the Numidians, continued in his line till the death of Jugurth; and then bestowed upon the Kings of Mauritania, part of whose kingdom it was reckoned in the following times, till made a Province of the Empire by the Emperor Clandius. Won from the Romans by the Vandals, and then by the Saracens, it followed the fortunes of these last, while they stood and flourished: But growing into many distractions, and every Sultan or Provincial Governor shifting for himself, it became a Kingdom, under the stile and title of the kingdom of Tremesen. The majesty of it much impaired by Abulthasen or Albohacen king of Fez, who brought it, not long after, under his command. Recovering after some short time its former liberty, it became a Kingdom once again, and so continued till the time of Abuchemen; who incurring the hatred of his people, because by his supine neglect the Spaniards had surprised and taken Oran and Masalquivir, their two best Havens, made an easy passage for his brother Abuzeiden to the Regal diadem. Abuzeiden scarce well settled, lost it to Hairadine Barbarossa, An. 1515. He to Charles' the fifth, by whom Abuchemen was restored, becoming Homager and Tributary to the Crown of Spain. But his successor Abdulla, weary of the Spanish servitude, put himself under the protection of Solyman the magnificent, as a Prince of his own Religion; to whom at his decease he left the possession of his Kingdom also; ever since subject to the Turks; whose Beglerbeg or Supreme Officer for these African Provinces, resides for the most part in Algiers, and hath 40000 Timariot under his command.   

3. FEZ, & 4. MOROCCO.  
THese Kingdoms I have joined in title, because united for the most part in the story and affairs thereof, and of late times making but one entire Estate under the Xeriffes of Morocco: and therefore handled both together in the point of History, though of a different consideration in the way of Chorography.  
They contain in them the whole Country of Mauritania, truly and properly so called; divided anciently into Tingitana, and Sitifensis: Caesariensis being naturally a Numidian Region, the Masasyli and the rest of the Inhabitants of it, of Numidian breed; not laid to Mauritania, nor accounted any part thereof, till the death of jugurth, when given to Bocchus King hereof, in reward of his treason for betraying that unhappy Prince into the hands of the Romans.  
It took this name from the Mauri, the Inhabitants of it, when that name first given; the word Tania, signifying a Nation, being added to it; as in Britannia, Lusitania, Aquitania, and perhaps some others; and the name of Mauri given them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifieth amongst other things obscure or black, by reason of the darkness of their complexion. Accounted in their times, an hardy, but a bloody people; careless of life, fearless of death; implacable, if once offended, their thirst of revenge not to be quenched but by blood. Mauri sunt genus hominum suapte nature cadis avidissimum, nibilque non facile audens, & desperatis similes, contemptu viz. mortis & periculorum: the character given of them in Herodians time, and it holds good still; notwithstanding the intermixture of Goths and Saracens incorporated into the same nation with them, and passing by the same name in the Writers of the middle time. Post baec Mauri totam Hispaniam & Provinciam Burgundiam etc. dominio suo manciparunt, as my Author hath it; where by Moors we are to understand the Saracens which came out of afric.  
Chief Mountains of this Country, 1. Atlas' Minor, so called to difference it from the greater Mountain of that name, from which it is seven degrees more North, but shooteth as that doth with a point or Promontory into the main Atlantic Ocean, on the South of Salla. 2. Durdus, extended also into Caesariensis, 3. Diur, 4. Phocra, of which little memorable. Rivers of most note, 1. Sala, 2. Subur, 3. Zilia, 4 Phuth, 5. Diur, 6. Cusa; all falling into the Atlantic: this last the same, as I conjecture, which our modern Writers call Ommirabili. And for the rest, we must find amongst them, 1. Sifelmel, 2. Tinsist, 3. Niffis, the names of the chief Rivers, as at this time called.  
The old Inhabitants here of in the time of the Romans, were the Metagonita near the Streits, giving name unto Metagonitis an adjoining Promontory; the Succosii, Verbicae, Nectiberes, Vacuatae, Voli; and on the East-side the Mauresii. These last participating of that common name, in which all united. Called by the Latins, Mauri; by the Greeks, Maurusii: The Etymology as before. Their descent originally from Phut, the son of Cham; whose memory preserved here in the River Phut. To that, the coming of the Chanaanites, of the same extraction, served but as an Accessary. From those two fountains sprang the whole Nation of the Mauri. Governed by Kings; the most considerable of which when first known to the Romans, was that Bocchus, who betrayed Jugurth his friend and son in law, into the hands of the Romans: gratified for that treachery with the Country of the Masasyli, (reckoned for part of Mauritania from that time forwards) as Hiempsal one of his sons was, not long after, with the Kingdom of Numidia. The whole Estates of Bocchus, Syphax, and Masinissa, united by this means in the person of Juba one of his posterity; the most potent Prince of all these parts: who falling in the African war against Julius Caesar, Numidia was forthwith made a Province of the Roman Empire; Crispus Salustius being made the first Governor of it. But Mauritania, extending at that time from the Ocean to the River Ampsagus, he gave to Bocchus and Bogud, two of his Confederares, but descended of the old Regal family. Bogud unluckily taking part with Mark Antony against Augustus, was by Bocchus, who declared for the other side, dispossessed of his part, (that which now makes the Kingdom of Fez) in which confirmed for his good service, by the conquering Emperor. Juba the son of the former Juba, grown famous for his eminent learning, was of a Prisoner made a Prince; invested affect the death of Bocchus in all the Dominions of his father, except Numidia: and by the bounty of Augustus, a great Patron of Learning, advanced to the marriage of Selene, daughter of Antony and Cleopatra. After whose death, and the death of Ptolemy their son, murdered by Caligula, Mauritania was by Claudius added to the patrimony of the Roman Empire; divided into two Provinces, viz. Caesariensis, betwixt the two Rivers Malva and Ampsaga, now the Kingdom of Tremesen; and Tingitana, from the River Malva to the Western Ocean. This last divided into Tingitana, and Sitifensis, (the River now called Ommirobili being the boundary betwixt them) by the Emperor Constantine: who leaving Sitifensis to the Diocese of afric, laid Tingitana (why I know not) unto that of Spain. Cained from the Romans by the Goths, after by the Saracens; they became members of those Empires; in the declining of the last, divided into the two Kingdoms of Fez and Morocco, to the description and history whereof we do now proceed.   

3. MOROCCO.  
THe Kingdom of MOROCCO hath on the East the River Malva, by which parted from Tremesen; on the West, the Atlantic Ocean; on the South Mount Atlas; and on the North the Kingdom of Fez. So called from Morocco, the chief City of it; in former times known by the name of Mauritania Sitifensis, from Sitiphis, in those times the principal City, as Procopius telleth us.  
The Country said to be fruitful of all things necessary to life, pleasing to the fight, and sweet to smell to: particularly, well stored with Grain and Pulse, plentiful of Oil, Honey and Sugar, liberally furnished with Dates, Grapes, Figs, Apples, Pears, and all sorts of Fruits; exceedingly well stocked with cattle, but with Goats especially, whose skins afford a very excellent kind of leather, and of their fleece materials for the finest Chamlets, which are here made in most of their Cities. The whole Country divided commonly into these seven parts, viz. 1. Guzzula, 2. Sus, 3. Morocco specially so called, 4. Hea. 5. Hascora, 6. Duccala, and 7. Tedles.  
1. GUZZULA, the most Southern Province of this Kingdom hath on the East some part of Tremesen, on the West Sus or Susa, from which parted by a ridge of Mountains called Ilda; on the South Mount Atlas; and on the North, part of the territory of Morocco, and the rest of Susa. The Country rich in Mines of Brass, Iron, and other metals, of which are made many Utensils for domestic uses, exported hence into other places. The People barbarous and rude, not easily acknowledging subjection to the Kings of Morocco; and at continual wars amongst themselves, except only for two months in the year; which being the time of their public Marts, and then much visited with Strangers from other Countries, they lay aside their private quarrels, and cheerfully entertain such Merchants as repair unto them. Walled Towns here are not any, but some very great Villages; the chief whereof, 1. Guzula, on the Northern bank of the River Sus, whence the name of the Province. 2. Tagressa, not far off, but on the other side of the water, towards the foot of Mount Atlas. 3. Tedza, inclining towards the borders of Morocco. Of these nothing memorable.  
2. West of Guzzula, lieth the Province of SUS or SUSA, so called from the River Sus, (with which well watered) or giving name to it. Rich in Gold-Mines, the cause of continual wars amongst the people; well stored with Sugarcanes, which the Inhabitants know neither how to boil nor purify; and on the Seashores furnished with great plenty of Amber, bought by the Portugals of the people at an easy rate. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Cape D'Aguer, on a Promontory so called; a place of such importance to the Portugals, that the taking of it by Mahomet then King of Sus (after of Morocco also) made them all the Forts which they had in this Country. 2. Tagavast, a 〈◊〉 and wealthy Town, the greatest in the Province, and situate in a large Plain near the foot of Mount Atlas. 3. Teijent, situate in a spacious Plain also, but on the banks of the River Sus: divided into three parts, each a mile from the other; which joined together, make the exact figure of a Triangle. 4. Messa, or Massa, seated at the influx of the said River, on the Promontory called Ca●● Gilen: three Towns in one; not much the better for the Sea, and but ill befriended by the Land, as leated in a barren and unpleasing soil; remarkable for a fair Temple, the beams and raster● of which are made of the bones of Whales, which usually are left dead on the sh●re. 5. Taro●●●, a large Town, built by the Africans, before the conquest of this Country by the Geths' or Saracens; the Residence of the Viceroy for the Kings of Fez, when the Lords of this kingdom, but more enriched of late by the Merchants of France and England, who have here a Staple for their Sugars. By this Commerce the people made more civil then in other parts of this Province: the whole number of them thought to amount to 3000 families. 6. Tedza, more within the land, bigger than Taradant, but less wealthy; the chief Ornament of it being a fair Mahometan Temple, liberally furnished with Priests and Readers of that Law, at the common charge. Not far from hence the Hill Anchisa, where it snoweth at all seasons of the year, and yet the people go extreme thin in the sharpest Winter. Nothing else memorable of this Province, but that a little before the Xeriffe made himself King of Morocco, it had the title of a Kingdom, and gave the title of King to Mahomet the second Xeriffe, made King of Tarada●t or Sus, before he dispossessed his brother of the Crown of Morocco. 3. Northward of Sus, lieth the Province of MOROCCO, specially so called, the most fruitful and best peopled part of Barhary; not much unlike to Lombardy in wealth, and pleasures: the very Hills hereof as fruitful as the Valleys in other places. To which fertility of the so●l, the Rivers 1 Tinsist, and 2 Asisin●ad, give no small advantage, though much defaced by the frequent incursions of the Portugals, who have extremely spoiled this Country. Places of most observation in it, 1. Delgumaba, built upon a very high Mountain, and environed with many other Hills; at the foot whereof the Fountain of Asisi●uad. 2. Elgiumuba, a small but ancient Town, on the River Sisseva. 3. Tesrast, a small Town upon Asifinuad. 4. Imizmizi, situate on a Rock, spacious, and seated near the entrance of a narrow way leading into Guzzala. 5. Tenezze, an old Town, but very well fortified. 6. Agnet, upon the River Tensift, all ruined except the Fort, and some scattered houses: formerly second unto none but Morocco, (from which distant 24 miles) the Hills and Valley about it adorned with pleasant Gardens, fruitful Vineyards, a fair River, and Fields so fertile that they yield a fifty-fold increase. 7. Se●sina, where they have snow at all times of the year. 8. Temnella, an Heretical Town differing in opinion from the rest of the Mahometan Sect; and so well grounded in their ●enets, that they challenge all their Opposites to a Disputation. 9 Hantera, very full of Jews. 10. Morocco, the principal of this province, and of all the Kingdom situate in or near the place where once stood the 〈◊〉 Ilemerum of Ptolemy. Once reckoned amongst the greatest Cities of the World, at what 〈◊〉 was ●a●d to contain 100000 families: since so defaced and wasted by the depredations of the Arabians, and the removal of the Seat-Royal to Fez, when that Kingdom was in the Ascendent, that it is hardly a third part so great as formerly. The founder of it Joseph, surnamed Telesinus, the second King of the house of the Almoravides; but much enlarged and beautified by Abdul-Mumen, one of his successors. The principal buildings in it are the Church and the Castle: the Church of Mosque, one of the greatest in the World, adorned with many sumptuous pillars, brought out of Spain, when the M●●rs had the possession of that Country; and beautified with a stately Steeple, in compass at the bottom an hundred yards, and of so great height, that the Hills of Azati (one of the branches of the Lesser Atlas) being 130 miles distant, may be thence easily discerned: the Castle very large, and strong, on a Tower whereof stand three Globes made of pure Gold, weighing 130000 Barbary Ducats; which divers Kings have gone about to take down and convert into money, but all desisted in regard of some cross accident or other which befell them in it; insomuch that the common people think them to be guarded with spirits.  
4. North of Morocco, on the further side of Tensift and Asifinuad, is the Province of HEA: Rough, mountainous, and woody, yet watered with many pleasant Rils, and would be plentiful enough in all commodities, if the industry of the people were not wanting to it. A sort of people little better than merely barbarous, without all Artists either Ingenious or Mechanic; except some Surgeons, whom they keep to circumcise their Children; and some few Teachers of their Law, which can hardly ●ead. Their food a Pap made of Barley-meal, which in stead of Spoons they claw forth with their fingers; the Ground they eat on, serving for table, stools and napkins. At endless ●eud with one another; yet so kind to strangers, that in one of their chief Towns, called 1 Tedneft. the Gentlemen used to cast lots who should entertain them. A town of good esteem in former times, situate in a large Plain on the River Tensift: but in the year 1514. almost wholly abandoned, upon a rumour that the Arabians had a purpose to sell it to the Portugals. 2. Teculeth, seated on a good Port, and once very well traded, there being in it at that time 1000 families, some Hospitals, and a beautiful Musque; in the year 1514. destroyed by the Portugals. 3. Tenent, a Sea-town in the hands of the Portugals. 4. Flmuridin, a strong piece, as the name importeth, the word signifying the Disciples Fort; so called, because a certain Heretic in the Law of Mahomet (whereof this Kingdom yields good plenty) retired hither with his Disciples, fortified it and defended it against the King of M●recco. 5. Iguillinguigu●l, seated on the top of an hill, and fortified by the Countrypeople (or old African Moers● against the Arabians. 6. Tefethne, beautified with a pretty Haven, but not capable of any great sh●pping. 7. Taglesse, a Den of Thiefs and Cutthroats. 8. Tesegdelt; as courteous and civil, as the other barbarous: At the Gates whereof a Guard is set fo● entertainment of Strangers; whom if they have no acquaintance there, they are to provide of Accommodation in some Gentleman's house, where it 〈◊〉 them nothing but thanks, and some kind acknowledgement.  
5. Northwards of Hea, stands the Province of DUCALA, bounded on the West with the main Atlantic, and on the North with the River Ommirobili, by which parted from the Kingdom of Fez. Of three day's journey long, about two in breadth; thrusting into the Ocean with a craggy Promontory, which some of the Ancients called Ulagium, others the Promontory of the Sun; 〈◊〉 by the Christians of Europe called the Cape of Cantin; by the Moors, Gebelelhudi●. Populous enough, the quality of the men considered, ignorant both of letters and of all good manners: Yet not ●o populous as it hath been in former times, much of the Country being abandoned for fear of the Portugals who have taken all their best towns on the Sea-coast, and destroyed the rest. Amongst these, 1. Azasi, at the foot of the hills so called; surprised by the Portugals, under colour of making a Storehouse for their Merchandise. 2. Azamez, seated at the mouth of the River Ommirobili, the furthest town of this kingdom towards that of Fez; the people whereof were extremely addicted unto Sodomy, till subdued by the Portugeze. 3. Elmedina, once the Metropolis of this Province; but now for feat of those Invaders, in a manner desolated. 4. Conte, of the foundation of the Goths. 5. Tic, built by the old African Moors, but possessed by the Portugals. 6. Subeit, 7. Teneracost, 8. Centpuis, 9 Terga, 10. Bulahuan; all sacked and ruined by the same people, when they took Azamor (the Key of this Province) which was in the year 1513. At which time it is said, that Mahomet King of Fez passing through this Province with an Army to repress these insolences, at every Altar (whereof here are many in the Roads) kneeled, and said unto this effect: Lord, thou knowest that the cause of my coming into this wild place, is only to free this people of Duccola from the rebellious and wicked Arabians, and their cruel Enemies the Christians: which purpose if thou dost not approve of, let the punishment fall upon my person, but not upon my followers who deserve it not. With greater piety than could be looked for from a blind Mahometan.  
6. Eastward of Duccala, along the banks of Ommirobili, lieth the Province of HASCORA, a fruitful Country, intermixed of rich fields and pleasant gardens: furnished with most sorts of choicest fruits, and amongst others, Grapes of such extraordinary greatness, that they are said to be as big as a Pullet's egg; Good store of Honey it hath also, and some Mines of Iron. Inhabited by a more civil people than any of the rest, and consequently more deserving so rich a soil. Places of most importance in it. 1. Ezo, an old town, situate on a lofty mountain. 2. Eluinina, of a later erection. 3. Alemdine, conquered for the King of Fez by a Merchant, whose Paramour the Prince or Governor hereof had taken from him: Situate in a pleasant, but little Valley, but begirt with hills, and well inhabited by Gentlemen, Merchants, and Artificers. 4. Tagodast, on the top of an hill, environed with four others of equal height.  
7. More East, betwixt Hascora and the River Malva, is the Province of TEDLES, bounded on the East with the Kingdom of Tremesen, and on the North with that of Fez, from which last parted by the River Servi, which on the North east border of it meets with Ommirob●li. The whole Province in form triangular; of no great either length or breadth, but sufficiently fruitful, and well inhabited for the bigness. Some Towns it hath, and those not meanly populous for so small a Province; the chief whereof, 1. Tesza, built by the old African-Moors, and beautified with many Mahometan Mosques; the walls of which made of a kind of Marble, which they here call Tesza, whence the name of the town. 2. Esza, seated on the River Ommirobili, where it receiveth that of Deyme, which rising out of Atlas-Minor, and passing by Tesza last mentioned, doth here lose its name. 3. Chythite, renowned for the stout resistance which it hath made from time to time against those of Fez. 4. Ethiad, abounding in all sorts of victuals.  
These Provinces make up the Kingdom of Morocco: infested miserably while it remained subject to the Kings of Fez, by the Portugals on the one side, and the wild Arabians on the other. Concerning which last people we are to know, that when the Saracens conquered afric, they contented themselves with the command, and left unto the Natives the possession of it; forbidding the Arabians (with whose course of life they were well acquainted) to pass over Nilus. Elcain, the last of the successors of Hucba in the Kingdom of Cairoan, having subdued the rest of afric, and added it unto his Estate, passed forwards into Egypt, which he conquered also, assuming to himself the title of Caliph: But in his absence, the Lieutenant whom he left in afric rebelled against him, and acknowledging the Caliph of Bagdet for his lawful Lord, received of him for this good service the Kingdom of Africa. Despairing to recover his lost Estate, and yet not willing that it should be useful unto his Enemies, he licenced the Arabians, for a Ducat a man, to pass over the Nile with their tents and families: On which agreement, almost half the Tribes of Arabia Deserta, and many of Arabia Felix, went into Africa; where they sacked Tripoli, Cairoan, and the rest of the principal Cities; tyrannising over all Barbary, till restrained at last by Joseph the founder of Morocco, (of whom more hereafter.) Since which time, though they lost their unlimited Empire, yet they still swarm like Locusts over all the Country; and neither apply themselves to tillage, or building houses, or any civil course of life; nor suffer those to live in quiet, who would otherwise manure and improve the Country. The rest of the Story of these Kingdoms we shall have anon, when we have taken a Survey of the Kingdom of Fez.   

4. FEZ.  
THe Kingdom of FEZ is bounded on the South with the Realm of Morocco, on the North with parts of the Atlantic and Mediterranean; on the East with Malva, parting it from the Kingdom of Tremesen; and on the West with the Atlantic wholly.  
It takes this name from Fez the chief City of it. Known to the Ancients by the name of Mauritania Tingitana, so called from the City Tingis (now Tanger) then of greatest note. Called also Hispania Transfretana, Spain on the other side of the Sea, because a part of that Diocese: and by some (Pliny amongst others) Bogudiania, from B●gud one of the Kings hereof, to whom given by Caesar: by others Ampelusia, from its abundance of Vines. The Inhabitants of it, by the Spaniards, now called Alarbes.  
The Country of good temperature in regard of the Air, if not in some places of the coldest: but very unequally disposed of in respect of the Earth; here being in it many Deserts and large Forests, not well inhabited; but intermixed with many rich and delightful Fields. So that taking the estimate in the gross, it may be said to be a rich and flourishing Country, hardly inferior unto any. The particularities of which are to be considered in the Characters of the several Provinces, into which it now doth stand divided, that is to say, 1 Temesna, 2 Fez specially so called, 3 Elchaus or Chaus, 4 Garet, 5 Algara, 6 Erritis, and 7 Habat.  
1. TEMESNA hath on the South the River Ommirabili, on the West the Ocean; extended in length from West to East 80 miles, and in breadth 70. A champain Country, very level; and once so populous, that it contained 40 Cities, and 300 Castles; most of them ruined by the wars, and the wild Arabians, the greater destroyer of the two. The principal of those remaining, 1 Teyeget, near the River Ommirabili, once of greater note, but now inhabited only by poor people, and a few Smiths compelled to live there for the making of Iron-instruments to manure the land. 2. Thagia, on the course of the said River; much visited by those of Fez, for the Sepulchre of an holy Prophet, who was there interred; the Fessans going thither in pilgrimage with such numbers of men, women and children, that their Tents seem sufficient to lodge an Army. 3. Adendun, more towards the Sea, but on a small River called Guirla, well walled, and fenced on one side by a Lake or Pool. 4 Amsa, on the shore of the Atlantic, once of great trade, and well frequented both by the English and the Portugals, by which last destroyed. 5. Munsor, destroyed in like manner by the wild Arabians. 6. Nuchaida, situate in so fertile and rich a soil, that the inhabitants would have given a Camel's burden of Corn for a pair of shoes; Nothing now left of it but one Steeple, and a piece of the wall. 7. Rabut or Rubut, built by Mansor, or Almansor, a King of Morocco, near the mouth of the River Burugrug, and by him made one of the best peopled Towns in afric; built after the model of Morocco, but now so wasted, that there are not in it above 500 families; most of the ground within the walls being turned into meadows, vineyards and gardens. 8. Fanzara, on the River Subu, the Subur of Ptolemy, falling not far off into the other. 9 Mahmora, in the same tract also, once possessed by the Spaniards; near which the Portugals received a great defeat by the King of Fez, for want of good intelligence betwixt them and the Castilians. 10. Salla, the Sala of Ptolemy, by the inhabitants called Zale, in ordinary Maps by mistaking, Cale; at the mouth of the River Rebato, which the ancient Writers called Sala, as they named the Town. Beautified by King Almansor (who is here interred) with a stately Palace, a goodly Hospital, a fair Temple, and an Hall of Marble, cut in Mosaich works: intended for the burial-place of his posterity. A town much traded formerly by the Christian Merchants, of England, Flanders, Genoa and the Golf of Venice. Took by the Spaniards An. 1287. and within ten days lost again: and of late times made a nest of Pirates, as dangerous to those which ●ailed in the Ocean, as the Pirates of Algiers to the Mediterrean. Whose insolences the King of Morrcco not able to suppress for want of shipping, desired the aid of His Majesty Charles King of Great-Britain; by whom the Town being blocked up by Sea, and besieged to the Landward by the King of Morocco, it was at last compelled to yield, the works thereof dismantled, the Pirates executed, and 300 Christian Captives sent unto His Majesty, to be by him restored to their former liberty; to the great honour of His Majesty, and the English Nation, An 1632.  
As for the fortunes of this Province, they have been somewhat different from the rest of this Kingdom; trained by a factious Prophet to revolt from the King of Fez and Morocco, whose Estate they very much endangered, sending an Army of 50000 men to the Gates of Morocco. But being discomfited by Joseph, surnamed Telephinus, he followed them into their own Country, which he wasted with great cruelty for ten months together, consuming above a million of them, and leaving the province to the mercy of Wolves and Lions. Repeopled afterwards by Almansor with Arabian Colonies: Given about fifty years after that, by the Princes of the Marine family, to more civil Inhabitants, by whom the Arabians were expelled, and the Province consequently reduced into some good Order.  
2. Westward of Temesna lieth the Province of FEZ, properly and specially so called. Extended in length from the River Burugrug to the River Inavis, for the space of 100 miles. A very fruitful Province, well stored with cattle, and exceeding populous; the Villages hereof as big as the better sort of Towns in other places; but contrary to the custom of other Countries, better inhabited on the hills then amongst the valleys; the people making choice of the mountains for their habitation, as places of defence and safety; but husbanding the valleys which lie nearest to them. Places of most consideration in it, 1. Macarmeda, on the River Inavis, in a goodly Plain, but in a manner all ruined except the walls. 2. Gualili, memorable for the Sepulchre of Idris, the first founder of Fez. 3. Peitra Rossa, where they have some Lions so tame, that they will gather up bones in the streets like dogs, without hurting any body. 4. Agla, where they have brought their Lions to so strange a cowardice, that they will run away at the voice of a child; whence a Bracchadochio is called proverbially a Lion of Aga. 5. Pharaoh, by reason of the name thought by the Vulgar to be founded by some King of Egypt; but the Latin Inscriptions therein feund, declare it to have been some work of the ancient Romans. 6. Maquille, of more antiquity than note. 7. Fez, the Metropolis of this Province, and the chief of the Kingdom, supposed to be the Volubilis of Ptolemy, but much enlarged and beautified by some new Accessions. Situate for the most part upon little hillocks, and watered by a pleasant and gentle Rivers (derived by Aquaducts and Conduits, into all parts of the City) which they now call the River of Fez, conceived by some learned men to be that which was anciently called Phuth, from Phut the first Planter of the African Nations. A City so beautiful and well seated, as if Nature and Art had played the Wantoness, and brought this forth as the fruit of their dalliance. The Founder or enlarger of it, one of the Race of the false Prophet Mahomet, his name Idris, who built on the East side of the River; that on the West side, being the Work of one of his sons: both so increasing that at last they were joined together. To these the Suburbs being added, have made a third. The whole called Fez, from Fezian Arabic word, signifying Gold, whereof great quantity was found when they digged the Foundations: Divided into three parts, by the River, all of which contain 82000 households, and 700 Mosques, or Saracenicall Temples: the chief of which is Carne, or Carnven, being a mile and a half in compass. It hath 31 gates, great and high; the roof is 150 yards long, and 80 broad: round about are divers Porches, containing 40 yards in length, and 30 in breadth; under which, are the public storehouses of the Town. About the walls are Pulpits of divers sorts, wherein the Masters of their Law read unto the people, such things, as they think to pertain to their salvation. The Revenue hereof is 200 Ducats a day of the old Rents; for so it was, Anno 1526. when Leo Afer wrote. The Merchants have here a Court, or Exchange, enclosed with a strong wall, with 12 Gates, and 15 streets. There is also a College called Amarodoc, a most curious and delicate building. It hath three Cloisters of admirable beauty, supported with 8 square pillars of divers colours: The roof curiously carved, and the Arches of Mosaique work of gold and azure. The gates are of brass, fair wrought; and the doors of the private chambers of inlaid Work. This College did cost the Founder, king Abuchenen, or Abu Henen, 480000 Crowns. Here are finally said to be in it many Hospitals, little inferior to the Colleges in building and beauty, all very liberally endowed; and about an hundred hot Baths well built, with four Halls to each, and certain Galleries without, where they put off their clothes when they go to bathe themselves: and besides these 200 Inns, built three stories high, each of them having 120 Chambers in it, with Galleries before all the doors for their Guests to walk in.  
3. Eastward of the Territory of Fez, lieth the Province of CHAUS. extended in length from the River Gurngrut, or Gurguigarn, by which parted from Temesna, and Fez, to the borders of Tremesen for the space of 190 miles, and 170 miles in breadth. So that it is thought to contain one third part of the whole Kingdom: but meanly populous for the bigness, the Country being poor and barren, and the Inhabitants fierce and warlike; more given to prosecute their quarrels, then to Trade or Tillage. Chief Towns hereof, 1 Ham Lisnan, a Town built in the more mountainous parts of the Country by the old Africans. Famous for the Temple of an Idol here worshipped; to which at certain times men and women resorted in the night; where, after their devotions ended, and the Candles put out, every man lay with the woman he first touched; the exact platform of the Family of Love, if all be true which is told us of them; and anciently, but faisly, charged on the Primitive Christians. 2 Tezza, adorned with three Colleges, many Baths, and Hospitals, and some beautiful Temples; one of them larger, though not fairer than that of Fez; in both Towns men of the same Trade have a street by themselves: for greatness, wealth, and numbers of People, esteemed the third City of this Kingdom. 3. Dubdu, an ancient Town, but not much observable. 4 Teurert, seated on the top of an Hill, in the midst of a Plain, but compassed about with Deserts. 5 Beni sesseten neighboured by Iron Mines, in which their greatest bravery and wealth consisteth: the women here wearing Iron-rings for ornaments to their ears and fingers. 6 Tezergui, subject to the Arabians. 7. Adaggia, the most Eastern Town of all this Region, situate in a Peninsula, made by the consluences of Muluso and Malva. In this Country is the head of the River Subur, which rising out of a great Lake in the woods of the Mountain Seligus, and receiving many lesser waters, with a large and Navigable stream falleth into the Ocean.  
4. Northwards of Chaus lieth the Region called GARET, extended thence as far as the Mediterranean; and reaching East and West from the River Malva, where it bordereth on Tremesen, to that of Nochor, where it toucheth on Errif, and Algaria. The length hereof 25 Leagues, the breadth but twenty. The soil in most places dry and delart, like the Sands of Nismidia: especially all along the banks of the Malva, near unto which from the Mediterranean to Chaus, it is wholly desert and unpeopled, not well inhabited in the most fruitful parts of it, being full of mountains; the worse for the ill neighbourhood of the Spaniards possessed of 1 Chesusa, and 2 Medela, two chief Towns hereof. 3 Pennon de Veles, by some called Velez de Gomenera, fituate on the shore of the Mediterranean, betwixt two high Mountains; built by the Africans or Goths; but now in the possession of the Spaniards also. 4 Jasserin, situate on the Sea also, founded by the Mahometans of the Marine Family. 5 Tezzora standing on an hill, to which there is but one passage only.  
5. Westward of Garet lieth ASGARA, extended from thence unto the Ocean: Shut up on the South east-side with the great Mountains Zalaga, Zaron, and Gomara, out of which last runneth the River Luccus, called Lix by Ptolemy. The Air hereof very temperate, and the soil as sertile; supplying with the overplus of its Commodities, the mountainous parts of Fez, and the Deserts of Garet. Once full of Towns, till ruined and destroyed by the wars. A Monument whereof, 1 Giumba, built by the ancient Africans, of which remains nothing but the Ditches. 2 Larache, in Latin Larissa, the Lixa of Ptolemy, situate at the mouth of the Lix or Luccus, and furnished with a good Port, but of difficult entrance, garrisoned when possessed by the Moors with 300 light horse, and 300 Harcabuziers; but better fortified then before, since possessed by the Spaniards, into whose hands it was put by Muley Sheck king of Morocco and Fez, when worsted by Muley Sidan his younger Brother, in the beginning of the civil Wars betwixt them. 3 Cusar Elcubin given by Almanser to a poor Fisher, who had entertained him unknown, one night in his Cottage, when he lost his Company in Hunting: Adorned with many Temples, one College of Students, and a stately Hospital.  
6. On the North of Asgara is the Province of EL-HABAT, or HABAT coasting along the Atlantic Ocean to the mouth of the Straits, in length 100 miles, about 80 in breadth. The Country very plentiful of all manner of necessaries and very well Peopled; the mountains which are here of a great height, being well inhabited. In former times replenished with many Cities, both of the foundation of the Goths, Romans, and old African Moors, now much diminished by the Wars. Those of most note. 1 Ezaggen, the Inhabitants whereof by an ancient Privilege granted by the Kings of Fez, were licenced to drink wine, though prohibited by the Law of Mahomet. Situate on a mountain, near the River Guarga, about 35 leagues from Fez: and garrisoned with 400 Horse for fear of the Portugals, who sometimes make their excuisions thither. 2 Basra, once a walled Town and the Walls still standing, but very little or no Town in them. 3 Homar, sometimes wel-peopled, but now little inhabited by reason of the ill neighbourhood of the Portugals, who command that Coast. 4 Banirendo, in a manner deserted for the same reason. 5 Alcazaer, to distinguish it from another of this name called Alcazer Guer, taken together with Arzilla and Tangier by Alfonso the fifth of Portugal, Anno 1470. Night to which Town the three Kings Sebastian of Portugal, Mahomet and Abdemelech Competitors for this Kingdom, were slain in a day. There was also slain at the same time the great English Rebel Stuckley, who fled out of Ireland to Rome, Anno 1570. Where he was lovingly entertained by the Pope then being, as a good Son of the Church: by whom appointed for the Conquest of Ireland, and for that end furnished with 800 Soldiers paid by the King of Spain; and by his Holiness created Marquis of Leinster, Earl of Wexford and Caterlogh, Viscount Murraugh, and Baron of Rosse. Thus furnished, he began his journey toward Ireland, Anno 1578. but hearing of these Wars, and desirous to make a party in them, he lost all his honours with his life. 6 Arzilla a Sea-Town, 70 miles distant from the Streits, now possessed by the Portugals. 7 Tanger a great Town, and very ancient, distant from the Streits about 30 miles, belonging to the Portugals also. In former times it was called Tingis, a Colony of the Canaanites, and by them built at their first coming thither, when they fled from the sword of Josuab, testisied by the two Pillars erected near this City, which before we spoke of: and from that name caused all this part of Mauritania to be called Tingitania. Made afterwards a Colony by the Emperor Claudius, who named it Traducta Julia; but the old name prevailed, and outlived the new. Near to this Town it is said that Hercules overcame Antaeus, a monstrous Giant of 64 Cubits high, as his Legend telleth us. And not far off was an high Mountain called Abyla, opposite to which in the coast of Spain was another called Calpe, on which the said Hercules placed his so famous Pillars. 8 Sexta, or Senta, situate on or near that mountain unfortunately memorable for giving the title of an Earl to Julian, who first brought the Saracens into Spain, beautified in those following times with many Temples, Colleges, and I earned men: taken by the Portugals with the help of the English, Anno 1415. and now in the possession of the King of Spain. The only Town of all the Estates of Portugal, which in the late revolt of that Kingdom doth remain unto him. 9 Julia Constantia, so called, and made a Roman Colony, by Augustus Caesar. 10 Laxus, a Roman Colony of the plantation of Claudius, in old times said to have been the Court or Palace of the Giant Antaeus. Not far from whence (that Antaeus might not dwell alone) the old Geographers have placed the habitation of Geryon, as proper a Gentleman as himself, in a small Island of the Streits called Gerionis Insula, and by some Erythia.  
7. Eastward of Habat is the Province of ERRIF, extended from the mouth of the Streits, where it joineth to Habat, as far as to the River Nochor (supposed to be the Meluchath of the Ancient Writers) by which parted from Garet: A mountainous and cold Country in respect of the rest of Barbary, full of Woods and Forests; but plentiful enough of Vines, Figs, and Olives; and not without some herds of Goats, though otherwise not well stored with cattle. In length 140 miles, in breadth 40 only; inhabited by a race of valiant men, but excessive Drunkards. The Towns hereof not many, though full of Villages; The chief of which, 1 Mazagon, near unto the Streits; a very strong Town, and of great importance, but possessed by the Portugals; in vain besieged by Abdalla the first, with an Army of 200000 men, Anno 1562. 2 Mezemme, seated on a mountain. 3 Beni Jerso of like situation, once beautified with a goodly College for the Professors of the Mahometan Law, who here publicly taught it, as in an University; the Inhabitants whereof were in that regard freed from all exactions. Destroyed together with the Library of it, by some wicked Tyrant, Anno 1509. the Books therein being valued at 4000 Ducats, 4 Terga. 5 Tegassa, 5 Gebbe; of which little memorable.  
Thus having looked over the particular Provinces of these two Kingdoms, we must next look upon them also in the general story, from the time of the Saracenical conquest; First let into this Country by the Treason of Julian, and for a while subject to the great Caliph or Successor of Mahomet: afterwards to the King or Caliph of Cairoan, who extended his Empire to the Ocean. But that Kingdom being overthrown by the coming in of the Arabians, these Provinces with the rest were afflicted by them; till the rising of the kingdom of Fez: begun in the person of Idris, of the blood of Mahomet, by Hali, and his daughter Fatima: who persecuted by the opposite faction, fled into Mauritania, where he grew into such reputation, that in short time he got both swords into his hands, Dying about the 185 year of the Hegira, he left his power unto his son, of the same name with his father; the first founder of Fez. Opposite whereunto on the other side of the water, one of his sons (but his name I find not) built another City, which in time grew into emulation with it: and raising by that means a faction in the house of Idris, gave opportunity to Joseph the son of Teifin or Telephine of the house of Luntune, then famous for bridling the Arabians, and founding the City of Morocco, to suppress that family: who killing the Princes of that line, and 30000 of their subjects, broke down the walls which parted the two Cities from one another, united them by bridges, and so made them one. Drawn into Spain by the diffention of the Saracens there amongst themselves, he added all which they held in that kingdom unto his dominions: held by his successors, as long as they were able to hold Morocco: the Catalogue of which Princes, called the house or family of the Almoravides, with that of the Race of the Almohades, is this which followeth.  

The Kings or Miramomolims of Morocco.  
1 Teifin, or Telephine, the first of the Almoravides, that reigned in afric.  
2 Joseph, surnamed Telephinus, the son of Teifin, founded Morocco, subdued the Kingdom of Fez, and added the Estate of the Moors in Spain unto his Dominions.  
3 Hali, the son of Joseph.  
4 Albo-Halis, the son of Hali, supposed to be the publisher of the Works now extant in the name of Avicenne, compiled at his command by some of the most learned Arabian Doctors: vanquished and slain by  
5 Abdelmon, or Abdel-Mumen, the first of the Almohades; of obscure parentage, but raised to so great power by the practices of Almohad a juggling Prophet of those times, that he overthrew the king, and obtained the kingdom of the Almoravides both in Spain and afric, An. 1150. to which he also added the Realm of Tunis and Cairoan.  
6 Joseph II. or Aben-Joseph, the son of Abdelmon.  
7 Jacob, or Aben-Jacob, surnamed Almansor; a puissant and prudent Prince, of whom much before; son of Joseph II.  
8 Mahomet, surnamed Enaser, or the Green, the brother of Almansor: Discomfited by the Christians of Spain at the battle of Sier-Morena, An. 1214. lost his dominions; there being slain in this battle 200000 of the Moors, as some Writers say; who add, that the Spaniards for two days to-gether burned no other fuel but the Pikes, Lances, and Arrows of their slaughtered Enemies, yet could not consume the one half of them.  
9 Caid Arrax, Nephew of Mahomet Enaser, by his son Buxaf: slain at the siege of Tremezezir, a Castle of Tremesin, which was held against him.  
10 Almorcada, a kinsman of Caid Arrax, outed of his estate, and slain by Budebuz, of the same house of the Almohades.  
11 Budebuz, the last of the house of the Almohades, settled in this Estate by the aid and valour of Jacob Aben Joseph the new King of Fez: but dealing faithlesly and ungratefully with him, he was warred on by the said Jacob Ben Joseph, vanquished and slain in battle; the sovereignty by that means translated unto those of the Marine family, An. 1270. or thereabouts.   
But before I do proceed further with this Marine family, I must again look back upon Mahomet Enaser, whom I conceive (the putation of the time being so agreeable) to be the Admiralius Murmelius mentioned by Matthew Paris, to whom our king John, An. 1214. is said to have sent such a degenerous and unchristian Embassage. Which strange name of Admiralius Murmelius was by that good Writer unhappily stumbled at, instead of Miramomolim (which also is corrupted from Amir Elmumenim, that is to say, Princeps Fidelium) an Attribute which the great kings of the Saracen-Moors did much affect, and retained it long time amongst them. The story this, King John being overlaid by his Baron's wars, and the invasions of the French, sent Ambassadors to this great Prince (then ruling over a great part of Spain and Barbary) for aid against them, offering to hold his kingdom of him, and to receive withal the Law of Mahomet. The Moor exceedingly offended at it, told the Ambassadors that he had lately read the book of Paul's Epistles, which he liked so well, that were he now to choose a Religion, he would have embraced Christianity before any other: But every man (saith he) ought to die in his own Religion; the greatest thing which he disliked in that Apostle, being (as he said) the changing of the Faith in which he was born. This said, he called unto him Robert of London Clark, one of the Ambassadors (a man ill chose for such an Errand, if the tale be true) of whom he demanded the form of the English Government, the situation and wealth of the Country, the manners of the people, the life and person of the king, in which being satisfied, he grew into such a dislike of that King, that ever after he abhorred the mention of him. This is the substance of the story in Matthew Paris: But you must know he was a Monk, to which brood of men King John was held for a mortal Enemy; and therefore this Relation not to pass for Gospel.  
But whatsoever opinion King John might have of the power of this King (to whom 'tis possible enough he might send for aid) certain it is that he was grown so low in his Reputation, after the loss of that great battle in Siera Morena, that not only the Spanish Moors withdrew their obedience from him (as a Prince unable to support them) but those of afric did revolt also from the Crown of Morocco (extremely weakened by that blow) after his decease. For Comoranca Aben Zein of the house of Abdaluad seized upon Tremesen, in the time of Caid Arrax his Successor; as Bucar Aben Merin of the noble Marine Family (descended from a Christian stock) did the like at Fez. Settled in his estate by the vanquishment of Almorcada the Miramomolim; he left it to Hiaja his son, under the governance and protection of a Brother of his called Jacob Ben Joseph. But the young Prince dying shortly after, left his new Kingdom to his Uncle: who aiding Budebuz (before mentioned) dispossed Almorcada of the Realm of Morocco: and afterwards having just cause of quarrel against this Budebuz invaded his Dominions, overcame and slew him; and once again transferred the Imperial seat from Morocco to Fez. In him began the Empire of the Marine Family, who held their Residence in Fez, as the first seat of their power; Morocco being Governed by an under-King, the rest of the Provinces of that Kingdom Cantonned into several States; the Seacoasts in some tract of time being gained by the Portugals. And in his line (but with great confusions) the Royal dignity remained till the year 1500. and somewhat after. Three only were of note in the course of business, that is to say, 1 Jacob Ben Joseph, the advancer of the Marine Family to the Realm of Morocco; the establisher thereof in that of Fez; and of great power and influence in the affairs of the Moors in Spain, where he held Algeir and Tariffe, Towns of great importance; slain treacherously by one of his familiar friends, at the siege of Tremesen. 2 Aben Joseph the second, a younger son of this first Joseph (the issue of Bucalo his elder brother being quite extinct) succeeded after Abortade, the fixed of the Marine Family in the Throne of his Father; and had added thereunto the Realm of Tremesen, if not diverted by the revolt of Alboali his eldest son, continually in Arms against him. 3 Alboacen, the son of this Aben Joseph and the eighth of the Marine Family, who after a siege of 30 months took the City of Tremesen, & with that the Kingdom. But not so fortunate in his Wars against the Christian Kings of Spain, against whom he led an Army of 400000 Foot, and 70000 Horse, with all other necessaries; but vanquished by the two kings of Castille and Portugal, with far lester forces (their Army consisting but of 25000 foot, and 14000 horse) at the River of Salado not far from Tariff, Anno 1340, Deposed soon after his return by his son Alboanen, who lost all which his Father and the first of the Aben joseph's had gained in Spain; their Empire after this declining even in afric itself; the Kingdom of Tremesen, and the greatest part of the new Kingdom of Tunis, withdrawing themselves from their obedience in the East parts of Barbary; as the Portugals prevailed upon them in the West. The Kingdom of the Marine's thus approaching near its fatal Period, it fortuned about the year 1508 that Mahomet Ben Amet a Native of Dara, in the further Numidia or Bilodulgerid, pretending a descent from their Prophet Mahomet, caused himself to be called Xeriff, the name by which the kindred and Successors of that Impostor use to call themselves; and being a poor Hermit only (with which Mountebanks and the high opinion of their Sanctity, this People have from time to time been extremely fooled) plotted to make his sons the chief Princes of Mauritania. To this end he sent them in Pilgrimage to Meccha, whence they returned with such an opinion of Sanctity, that Mahomet King of Fez made Amet the elder of them Governor of the famous College of Amadurach; the second called Mahomet, Tutor to his Children; the youngest named Abdel staying at home with his Father. In those days the Portugals grievously infested the Provinces of the Realm of Morocco; to repress whose insolences Mahomet and Amet obtained Commission; though much opposed therein by the King's brother, who told him how unsafe it was to trust to an armed hypocrisy; assuring him that if they once came unto any power (which under colour of Religion they might quickly raise) it would not be easy to suppress them. But this good counsel was rejected, and the war went forwards. Furnished with an Army, they discomfit Lopes Barriga, Commander of the Portugal forces under King Emanuel; compel that King to abandon all his footing there; they subdue Duccala, Sus, and Hea, three Provinces of the Realm of Morocco; enter that City poison the tributary King, and salute Amet King thereof by the name of the Xeriffe of Morocco, investing Mahomet the other brother in the kingdom of Sus. In the career of their successes died the king of Fez; and Amet his successor, an improvident young Prince, confirms his Quondam-Tutors in their new Estates, conditioned they should hold of him as the Lord in chief, and pay him the accustomed tributes.  

The Xeriffes of Morocco.  
A. C. 1 Amet, denied both tribute and superiority to the King of Fez, whom he overthrew in a set field; and was after vanquished and dispossessed of his Kingdom, (upon some quarrel breaking out) by his brother Mahomet.  
1554. 2 Mahomet King of Sus, having got A. C. the Kingdom of Morocco, united Fez unto it also by the vanquishment of Amet the King thereof; slain after all his Victories by the Turks of his Guard.  
1557. 3 Abdalla, the son of Mahomet.  
1572. 4 Abdalla II. Son of the former had twelve Brothers, of which he slew ten. Hamet being spared by reason of his supposed simplicity, and Abdelmelech escaping to the Turks.  
5 Mahomet II. Son of Abdalla the second expelled by Abdelmelech and the Turks, fled to Sebastian King of Portugal, who together with the two Competitors were slain in one day at the battle of Alcazar Guer, Anno 1578.  
1578. 6 Hamet II. the Brother of Abdalla the ad. who added parts of Libya, and Numidia, to the Realm of Morocco, not absolutely subdued before.  
1603. 7 Muley Sheck the eldest son of Hamet, opposed in his succession by Boferes and Sidan his two younger brethren; in which War he died; as did also Boferes his Brother. From whom Abdalla, II. son of Muley Sheck had regained Morocco.  
1607. 8 Sidan the third son of Hamet, immediately on the death of his Father caused himself to be proclaimed King of Fez, (where he was with his father when he died) and having won Morocco from Abdalla the son of Muley Sheck, became master of that kingdom also. Stripped afterwards of Fez and Morocco both by the opposite factions; distressed by Hamet Ben Abdela a Religious Hermit, who hoped to get all for himself; and aided by Side Hean one of like hypocrisy, who seemed to aim but at a Limb of that great Estate; by whose assistance he was once more possessed of Morocco. These tumults on the Land being pacified in long tract of time, and the Country brought to some degree of peace and quietness. (though never absolutely reduced under his command, as in former times) a Rabble of Pirate's nest themselves in Salla. a Port-town of the Realm of Fez: creating thence great mischief to him both by sea and land; and not to him only, but to all the Merchants of other Countries, whose business led them towards th●se Seas. Unable to suppress them for want of shipping, he craved aid of King Charles of England: by whose assistance he became Master of the Port, destroyed the Pirates, and sent Three hundred Christian Captives for a Present to his Sacred Majesty, An. 1632. Nor stayed he here; but aiming at the general good of Trade, and Mankind, he sent a Letter to His Majesty to lend him the like aid against those of Algiers, who did as much in●est the Mediterranean, as the Pirates of Salla did the Ocean. The tenor of which Letters, as savouring of more piety than could be possibly expected from a Mahometan, and much conducing to the honour of his Sacred Majesty, I have here subjoined.   
The Letter of the King of Morocco, to the King of England.  
WHen these our Letters shall be so happy as to come to your Majesty's sight, I wish the Spirit of the righteous God may so direct your mind, that you may joyfully embrace the Message I send, presenting to you the means of exalting the Majesty of God, and your own Reward amongst men. The Regal power allotted to us, makes us common Servants to our Creator; then, of those People whom we govern: So that observing the duties we owe to God, we deliver blessings to the World; in providing for the public good of our States, we magnify the honour of God, like the Celestial Bodies, which though they have much veneration, yet serve only to the benefit of the World. It is the Excellency of our Office, to be Instruments whereby happiness is delivered unto the Nations. Pardon me Sir! this is not to instruct, (for I know I speak to one of a more clear and quick sight than myself) but I speak this, because God hath pleased to grant me a happy Victory over some part of those Rebellious Pirates that have so long molested the peaceful Trade of Europe, and hath presented further occasion to root out the generation of those who have been so pernicious to the good of our Nations: I mean; since it hath pleased God to be so auspicious to our beginnings in the Conquest of Salla, that we might join and proceed in hope of like success in the war against Tunis, Algiers, and other places (Dens and Receptacles for the inhuman villainies of those who abhor Rule and Government.) Herein whilst we interrupt the corruption of malignant Spirits of the World, we shall glorify the great God, and perform a Duty that will shine as glorious as the Sun and Moon, which all the Earth may see and reverence: A work that shall ascend as sweet as the perfume of the most precious Odours in the nostrils of the Lord; A work grateful and happy to men; A work whose memory shall be reverenced so long as there shall be any that delight to hear the Actions of Heroick and magnanimous Spirits; that shall last as long as there be any remaining amongst men that love and honour the piety and virtue of Noble minds. This Action I here willingly present to You, whose piety and virtues equal the greatness of your power: that we who are Servants to the Great and mighty GOD, may hand in hand triumph in the glory which this Action presents unto us. Now because the Lands which you govern, have been ever famous for the unconquered strength of their Shipping, I have sent this my trusty Servant and Ambassador to know whether in your Princely wisdom you shall think fit to assist me with such Forces by Sea, as shall be answerable to those I provide by Land: which if you please to grant, I doubt not but the Lord of Hosts will protect and assist those that fight in so glorious a Cause. Nor ought you to think this strange, that I who much reverence the Peace and accord of Nations, should exhort to a War. Your great Prophet CHRIST JESUS was the Lion of the Tribe of JUDAH, as well as the Lord and Giver of Peace: which may signify unto you, that he which is a lover and maintainer of Peace, must always appear with the terror of his Sword, and wading through Seas of blood, must arrive to Tranquillity. This made JAMES your Father of glorious memory, so happily renowned amongst all Nations. It was the noble fame of your Princely virtues, which resounds to the utmost corners of the Earth, that persuaded me to invite you to partake of that Blessing, wherein I boast myself most happy. I wish God may heap the riches of his blessings on you, increase your happiness with your days, and hereafter perpetuate the greatness of your Name in all Ages.  
Such was the Letter of that King; whose motion in all probability might have took effect, had not the Troubles which not long after broke out in Scotland, put off the design. And therefore laying by the thoughts of his future purposes, let us take a view of the Revenues and Forces of this mighty Empire, before the late distractions made it less considerable. And first-for the Revenues of it, the Xeriffs are the absolute Lords of the whole Estate, and of his Subjects goods and bodies. The tenth and first-fruits of all sorts of Fruits, Corn and cattle, he demands of course, though many times contented in the name of the first-fruits with one in twenty. The fifth part of a Ducat he receiveth for every Acre of Land throughout his Dominions; the other four parts for every Fire, and as much for every Head whether male or female, which is above fifteen years of age. In Merchandise he receiveth of every Native two in the hundred, of an Alien ten; and hath a large Impost also upon every Mill. When any of his greater Officers or Judges die, he is sole Heir of all their Goods; and yet advanceth great sums by the sale of those Offices. And in the levying of such Taxes as are extraordinary, he useth to demand more than he means to take; that the People finding him content to abate somewhat of his Due, may think themselves to be fairly dealt with.  
As for their Forces, it is evident in matter of Fact, that Abdulla the first, at the siege of Mazagon, a Town held by the Portugals, An. 1562. had no less than 200000 men; and that Abdel-Melech at the battle of Alcazar Guez, against king Sebastian, had 40000 Horse and 80000 Foot, besides Voluntaries, and wild Arabians; it being supposed that he might have raised 30000 Horse more (notwithstanding the strong party which was made against him) had he thought it necessary. It is said also that Abdalla kept in constant pay 60000 Horse, of which 15000 were quartered in the Realm of Sus, 25000 in Morocco, and the other in 20000 in the kingdom of Fez: out of which he called 5000 of the best and ablest for the guard of his person, well mounted and as richly furnished. Besides these he hath bodies of Horse in continual readiness, maintained according to the manner of the Turks Timariot: and by Pensions given amongst the Chiefs of the Arabians, who live like Outlaws in the mountains, and up and down in the skirts of of his Country, is furnished at his need with supplies from them. Well stored with Ammunition also, there being 46 Quintals of Gunpowder laid up monthly, in his famous Arsenal at Morocco: and yet not able to stay long (not above 3 months) upon any action, in regard that all his Soldiers live on his daily allowance; which maketh them, when his Provisions are consumed, to dissolve and scatter.   

THE ISLES OF BARBARY.  
THe ISLES of BARBARY, which make up the fifth and last part thereof, are situate near the African shores of the Mediterranean, assigned by Ptolemy to the Province of Africa Propria. In number sixteen: 1 Hydra's. 2 Calathe, 3 Dracontias, now called Chelbi. 4 Aegymnus, by Strabo called Aeginarus, and now Guietta. 5 Larunesia, now Mollium. 6 Lapedusa, now Lampedosa. 7 Mesyrus, 8 Pontia, 9 Gaia; all of little note. 10 Insula Glauconis, with a City of the same name in it, now called Goza, and subject to the Knights of Malta. 11 Aethusa, by some called Aegusa, and consequently mistaken for Aegates, which lieth near Sicily. Of more note are the five that follow, viz.  
1. COSYRA, now called Pantalaria, equally distant from afric and the Isle of Sicil, 60 miles from each. In length about thirty miles, and in breadth not above ten. Mountainous for the most part, and full of a black kind of Stone: the soil not very proper for Corn, and void of Rivers; but plentiful of Figs, Melons, and Cotton-wool; well stored with Kine and Oxen, but without Horses. The People poor; by Religion Christians, and subject to the King of Spain: very good Swimmers of both sexes, and in their speech and habit coming near the Moors. It hath a Town in it of the same name with the Island, situate on the Seaside in the Northern part of it, defended with a very strong Castle.  
2. CERCINA, now with little difference called Carchana, situate near the coast of afric, at the entrance (as it were) of the lesser Syrtis: In length 25 miles, in breadth half as much, but in some places not above five. Exceeding fruitful in old times, able to furnish (as they did) the wants of Caesar and his Army, when he warred in afric; Magno frumenti numero Cercinae invento, naves onerarias, quarum ibi satis magna copia, complete, atque in castra ad Caesarem mittit, are the words of the History. It hath a Town of the same name; Of no great note in way of story, but for an handsome piece of wit here showed by Annibal. Who flying from Carthage, met here some Merchants of that City, who had there some shipping in the Haven, and standing in some doubt le●t by their discovery of his flight he might be pursued, pretended a Sacrifice to Hercules, the Tyrian Deity, to which he invited all the Sailors, and borrowed all their Sails to set up a tent for their entertainment; which having got into his hands, and leaving them asleep, he made on for Asia, secure enough not to be pursued until out of danger.  
3. LOTOPHAGITIS, now called Zerby, and by some Gerbe, is situate in the bottom of the Bay of Tripoli, divided from the main Land by a narrow Ford. The Island full of Bogs and Marshes, without other water, and in the midst of it somewhat hilly; indifferently fruitful, yielding, Dates, Olives, Barley, Mill, and the like commodities; inhabited by 30000 men, dwelling in low Cottages, and but simply apparelled. It had in it anciently two Cities, 1 Meninx, which sometimes gave name unto the Island, called Meninx by some elder Writers. 2 Gerrapolis, both now destroyed: instead whereof there is now one of more note than the rest, called by the same name with the Island, and fortified with a very strong Castle. Subject unto the Turks, but governed by a poor King of its own. Both Fort and Island taken by the Christian Fleet, in the year 1559. for the King of Spain, to whom Caravanus the King thereof did submit himself, conditioning to pay the yearly Tribute of 6000. Crowns, one Camel, four Ostriches, four Sparrow Hawks, and four Falcons. But the Christians were scarce warm in their new possession, when besieged in the Castle by Pial Bassa, to whom after some extremities they were fain to yield: there perishing in this unfortunate Action, by sword, famine, and sickness, 15000 Christians.  
4. GAULOS, or GAUDUS, by the Inhabitants called Gaudica, is distant about five miles from the Isle of Malta; to the Knights whereof it doth belong, given to them by the bounty of Charles the fifth. The Island 30 miles in compass, well watered and very fruitful. So great an Enemy to Serpents and all venomous Creatures, that they neither breed here, nor will live here brought from other places. The People Christians, but they speak the same Language with the neighbouring Saracens. The chief Town is of the same name with the Island, beautified with a Capacious Haven, lying betwixt the West and South, and strongly fortified. Cruelly pillaged by the Turks in the year 1551. who carried hence 3000 Souls into endless thraldom.  
5. MALTA, the chief of the African Lands, lieth betwixt Tripoli in Barbary, and the Isle of Sicil: distant from this last about 60 miles, and from the other 180. In circuit about sixty miles, in length 20, and in breadth 12. situate in the beginning of the fourth Clime, and eighth Parallel; so that the longest day in Summer is but 14 hours.  
Anciently it was called Melite, and by that name occurreth not only in Ptolemy and other Writers, but also in the Book of the Acts, in the story of St. Paul's Shipwreck, this being the place where he and all his company were cast on land: in memory whereof was built a little Chapel in the place of his Landing. So called most probably 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, from the abundance of honey which it yielded in former times: Cicero charging it on Verres, that he came home loaded with 400 measures of honey, and store of Melitensian Raiments: I am non quaero unde 400 amphoras mellis habueris, unde tantum Melitensium Vestium, saith that famous Orator. The joining of which two together, declare that he had robbed the same place for both; this Island being a near neighbour of Sicil, which Verres governed then as Praetor. Nor is it strange that an Island of the coast of afric, and using for the most part the Phocinian or Punic Language, should borrow its Appellation from the Greek: many of that Nation coming hither from the Isle of Sicil, and inhabiting here; and the whole Island sometimes subject to the power of the Sicilian Greeks, though for the most part under the command of the State of Carthage.  
It is situate wholly on a Rock, being not above three foot deep in earth; by consequence, of no great fertility, the want of which is supplied with the plenties of Sicil. Yet have they here no small store of Pomegranates, Citrons, Oranges, Melons, and other excellent fruits, both for taste and colour. They have also great abundance of Cotten Wool (Gossypium the Latinists call it) which they sow as we do our Corn; the growth and ordering of this Wool, hath been shown already, when we were in Syria. For the commodity of this Wool, and the cloth made of it, the Romans had this Island in great esteem; thinking themselves happy when they gained it from the Carthaginians.  
The natural Inhabitants of it are said to be churlish and uncivil; of the African Language and complexion; but followers of the Church of Rome, the Religion whereof these Knights are sworn to defend: The Women fair, but hating company, and going covered. The whole number of both Sexes, supposed to be 20000. possessed of 90 Villages, and four Cities. Places of note, 1 Malta, so called by the name of the Island, in the middle of which it is situate; built on an hill, but counted of no great importance, the strength and safety of the Island lying in defence of the Shores and Havens. 2 St. Hermes a strong Castle at the point of a long Languet or tongue of Rock, thrusting out betwixt the two best Havens, both which it notably defendeth. Took by the Turks, Anno 1565, but at no cheaper rate than 20000 shot of Cannon, and the loss of 10000 of their men. 3 Valette situate on the same Languet, not far from the Castle of S. Hermes, (or rather lying close unto it) extended the whole breadth of the said Languet from the one Sea to the other: and so commanding both the Havens. Built since the departure of the Turks, impregnably Fortified, and called thus by the name of Valets, the great Master who so gallantly repulsed their fury. In this Town the great Master hath his Palace, and the Knights their several Alberges or Seminaries, all very fair and handsome buildings. 4 Burgo, a lirtle Town or City on another Languet, lying in the Eastern Haven, at the extremity of which Promontory in a Demy Island stands the strong Castle of 5 S. Angelo, built on a Rock, opposite to Valette, on the other side of the Haven; and found impregnable by the Turks, who in vain besieged it. 6 Isola a small City and better deserving the name of a Town, situate in another Promontory, on the South of the other; defended on the Westside by a strong Platform, at the point of the Foreland, and on the Eastside by the impregnable Castle of S. Michael, in vain assaulted by the Turks, who on their ill success at the Siege hereof gave over the enterprise, and sailed home.  
The People of this Island originally were a Tyrian or Phoenician Colony, but intermixed in tract of time with some Greek Plantations, coming hither out of Sicil, as before was said: For the most part dependant on the Fortunes of Carthage, afterwards of Rome, till subdued by the Saracens; By the Spaniards taken from the Moors, and by Charles the fifth given to the Knights of the Rhodes, not long before expelled thence by Solyman the Magnificent, Anno 1522. These Knights are in number 1000; of whom, 500 are always to be resident in the Island. The other 500 are dispersed through Christendom, at their several Seminaries, in France, Spain, Italy and Germany; and at any summons, are to make their personal appearance. These Seminaries (Alberges they call them) are in number seven, viz. one of France in general, one of Auvergn, one of Provence, one of Castille, one of Arragon, one of Italy, and one of Germany; over every one of which they have a Grand Prior, who in the Country where he liveth, is of great reputation. An eight Seminary they had in England, till the suppression of it by Henry the 8. yet they have some one or other, to whom they give the title of Grand Prior of England. Concerning the original and riches of these Knights, we have spoken when we were in Palestine; now a word or two only of their places, and the election of their great Master. None are admitted into the Order, but such as can bring a testimony of their Gentry for six descents; and when the Ceremonies of their Admission (which are many) are performed, they swear to defend the Church of Rome, to obey their Superiors, to live upon the Revenues of their Order only, and withal to live chastely. Of these there be 16 of great authority (Counselors of State we may fitly call them) called the Great Crosses; out of whom, the officers of their Order, as the Marshal, the Admiral, the Chancellor, etc. are chosen: and who, together with the Master, punish such as are convict of any crime, first by degrading him, 2 by strangling him, and 3 by throwing him into the Sea. Now when the Great Master is dead, they suffer no Vessel to go out of this Island, till another be elected; lest the Pope should intrude on their election; which is performed in this manner. The several Seminaries nominate two Knights, and two also are nominated for the English: these 16 from amongst themselves choose eight; these eight choose a Knight, a Priest, and a Frier-servant; and they three, out of the 16 Great Crosses, elect the great Master. The great Master being thus chosen, is styled (though but a Friar) The most illustrious, and most reverend Prince, the Lord Friar N. N. Great Master of the Hospital of S. John of Jerusalem, Prince of Malta, Gauls, and Goza. Far different I assure you, from that of the first Masters of this Order, who called themselves only Servants to the poor Servitors of the Hospital of Jerusalem; or that of the Master of the Templars, who was only entitled The humble Minister of the poor Knights of the Temple.  
This Island is conceived to yield to the great Master the yearly rent of 10000 Ducats, the greatest part whereof ariseth out of Cotton-wool; besides which, he hath towards the maintaining of his Estate, the tenth part of the prizes which are won from the Turks; and certain thousands of Crowns yearly out of the treasure of the Order, which is great and rich; and one of the best Commanderies in every Nation. And for the scouring of the Seas, and securing their Harbours, they have many good Galleys, each of them able to contain 500 Soldiers, and to carry 16 piece of Ordinance; with which they make excursions many times to the coasts of Greece.   
And so much for BARBARY.   

MOUNT ATLAS.  
IN our way from Barbary to Libya Interior, we must pass over Mount Atlas, a ridge of hills, of exceeding great height, and of no small length. So high that the top or Summit of it is above the clouds, at least so high that the eye of man is not able to discern the top of it. Extat in hoc Marimons cui nomen Atlas (saith Herodotus) Ita sublimis ut ad illius verticem oculi mortalium pervenire non possint. Yet notwithstanding, it is always covered with snow in the heats of Summer. Difficult of ascent by reason of the sharp and craggy precipices which occur in many places of it; the rest where plainer, and more even, of such wondrous steepness, that the precipices of the Rocks seem the safer way. Full of thick woods, and yielding to the Countries on the North side of it, the greatest part of the Rivers, which refresh and moisten them: and where it bordereth on the proper or Roman Africa, of such self-fertility, that it affordeth excellent fruits of its natural growth, not planted, graffed, or inoculated by the hand of man. The beginning of it is on the shores of the Western Seas, which from hence have the name of the Atlantic Ocean; in the 26 Degree, and 30 Minutes of Northern Latitude; and passing on directly Eastward, draw near unto the borders of Egypt, part of Marmarica, or the Roman Libya only interposing. It is now called Anchisa, and Montes Clari; And took the name of Atlas from Atlas a King of Mauritania, who dwelled at the bottom of this Mountain; feigned by the Poets to be turned into this hill by Perseus, and the head of Medusa. Of the daughters of this King, their golden fruit, and the famous Gardens of the Hespirides, we have spoke already; though some remove the place of their habitation more into the West (then by us disposed of) and others into certain Lands of the Western Ocean, which we shall meet withal hereafter. He was said to have been a man of such wondrous height, that the Heavens rested on his shoulders; of which, when weary, he discharged his burden on the shoulders of Hercules; the ground of the fiction either taken from the height of the Mountain, the top whereof seemeth to touch the sky; or from his extraordinary knowledge in Astronomy (as the times than were) whereby he came to be acquainted with the motions of the Stars and Planets. In which knowledge he instructed Hercules, when he came unto him. But for the more Authentic description of it, take it thus from Virgil.  
— Jamque volans apicem & latera ardua cernit  
Atlantis duri, Coelum qui vertice fulcit.  
Atlantis, cinctum assiduè cui nubibus atris  
Piniferum caput, & vento pulsatur & imbri.  
Nix humeros infusa tegit, tum flamina mento  
Praecipitant senis; & glacie riget horrida barba.  
Which may be Englished in these words.  

Then flying▪ he the top and sides descries  
Of Atlas, whose proud head support's the skies.  
Atlas, whose Pinie head with Clouds enclosed  
Is to the storms of wind and rain exposed.  
Now hide's the Snow his Arms, now tumbleth down  
Upon his Chin; his Beard with ice o'er grown.    

OF LIBYA INTERIOR.  
LIBYA INTERIOR is bounded on the North with Mount Atlas, by which parted from Barbary and Cyrenaica; on the East with Libya Marmarica, interposed betwixt it and Egypt, and part of Aethiopia Superior, or the Habassine Empire; on the South with Aethiopia Inferior, and the Land of the Negroes; and on the West with the main Atlantic Ocean.  
The reason of the name we have seen before, given to this Country in regard of its contiguousness and resemblance to the other Libya; or else because descended from the children of Lehabim, by which that Country was first planted. For of King Libs, or Queen Libya (the daughter of Epaphus, and Cassiopaea) and other the like fictions of the Greeks, I shall take no notice. Distinguished from the other, by the addition of Interior, as lying more within the main land of Africa, the other being partly a Maritine Country.  
Of the nature of the soil and people we shall speak anon, when we come to take a view of its several parts. Look we now on it as it stood in the time of the Romans: when, though not so well traveled or discovered as in these last times: yet have we more particulars of it, as to the names and situation of the Rivers, Mountains, and chief Towns, than any of our later Writers have presented to us. The Rivers of most note, 1 Salathus, 2 Chusarus, 3 Ophiodus, 4 Noius, 5 Massa, 6 Sobus, 7 Daradus, 8 Stachiris, and 9 Masitholus; all of them paying tribute to the Western or Atlantic Ocean. Mountains of most note, 1 Mandrus, out of which floweth the River Salathus, 2 Sagapola, which gives being to the River Sobus. 3 Ryssadius, from whence Stachiris. 4 the Mountain called Deorum Currus (of which more anon) whence Massitholus, and Mount Capas, out of which Daradas, have their first Originals. Then there are, 5 Mount Vsurgala, and 6 Mount Girgiris, from the first of which the River Bagradas, and from the last that of Cyniphus, do derive their waters; and passing thorough the breaches of Atlas (of which these Mountains seem to be some dismembered l●mbs) cross the whole breadth of the Roman afric, to make themselves a way to the Mediterranean. Besides these, more within the Land, we find the famous Rivers of Gir, and Niger: of which the first maketh the two great Lakes of Nuba, and Cheloindas'; the second, those as great, or greater called Nigritis, and the Lake of Libya; which makes me wonder by the way, that in a Country so well watered as this seems to be, our Modern Writers should complain of such want of water, as if there were neither Spring nor River, nor Pond, nor Lake, nor any thing to moisten and refresh the earth, but the dews of Heaven, or some pits of salt and brackish water, not worth the tasting. Ptolemy must either be mistaken, which I hardly think; or our late Travellers not so punctual in their observations, which I rather credit: or else the Rivers which were here in the time of my Author, In his arenarum vastitatibus disperduntur, must be dried up and swallowed in these sandy Deserts, as Maginus telleth us; or finally there hath happened some later conflagration then that of Phaeton, to which the want of water may be better attributed, than it was to his. Of which thus the Poet, 
Hinc facta est Libye, raptis humoribus aestu  
Arida.— Which Geo. Sandys thus rendereth.  
A Sandie Desert Lybia then became,  
Her full veins emptied by the thirsty flame.   
Places of note and name in those elder times, 1 Salathes, on the River so named, 2 Bagaxi, 3 Jarzitha, and 4 Babiba, are honoured with the name of Cities. 5 Garama, 6 Gira, and Nigira, the Metropoles of their several Nations. Then there were two Havens of some good esteem, the one called Magnus Portus, the other Portus Perphosius; besides 43 other Towns and Cities (twelve of these on the banks of the River Niger:) whose names and situation do occur in Ptolemy; which shows the Country not to be so unhabitable and void of people, as was pretended by some other (but less diligent) Writers.  
Nations of most note in it in the former times, were the Getuli, on the back of Mauritania, a resolute and unconquered People, Genus insuperabile bello, as we find in Virgil: 2 the Garamantes, dwelling South of Cyrenaica▪ and giving name to a large and spacious territory, called Vallis Garamantica; supposed to be the most remote Nation towards the South, as the Indians were towards the East, whence we have ultra Garamantas & Judos, in another Poet: 3 the Pyrrhaei, an Aethhiopic Nation, on the South of the River Gir: 4 the Nigritae, originally Aethiopians also, inhabiting on the North of the River Niger; 5 the Odranguli, of the same original extraction, possessing the Country between the Mountains Capha, and Thala; 6 the Perorsori, dwelling near the hills called Deorum Currus; 7 the Meinaci, at the foot of Mount Thala; 8 the Nabae on the West of Vallis Garamantica. 9 the Derbici, dwelling on the west of the hill Aranga. And 10 the Psylli, placed by Ptolemy amongst the Inhabitants of Cyrene, but so near the borders of this Country, and so far from the civilities of those Nations which conversed either with Rome or Carthage, that they may more properly be thought to belong to this. Of a nature so venomous, that they could poison a Snake. Insomuch, that when their wives were delivered, they would throw their children amongst a bed of Serpents, supposing that child to be born of an adulterate bed, the very smell of whose body would not drive away a whole brood of the like poisonous vermin. Others there were of less note, which that Author calleth Minores Gentes; many in number, of small fame, and therefore not material to be here inserted; those of most note, the Africerones (whom some Authors call the Gampsaphantes) honoured with the Attribute of Gens Magna, the greatest as it seems of those lesser Nations. None of them of much note in the way of story, except they were these Libyans which are so famoused in Herodotus for an expedition they made against the South wind. For when this wind blowing abroad the hills and deserts of sand, had dried up those many rills and waters they had among them, they to revenge this injury, by common consent armed themselves, and went to fight against him. But they took not the South winde unprepared. For he mustered up his forces, encountered them with such a brave volley of sand, that he overwhelmed and slew them all. A better friend was the North wind to the Citizens of Rhegium, in Italy, and better was he rewarded for it; for having scattered a mighty fleet, which Dionysius prepared against them, he was by the common-council, made free of their City. That part of Caesar's war which was managed here, we shall hereafter meet with on another occasion.  
Thus having took a view of the state of this Country, as it stood of old; we will next look upon it in its present condition; as comprehending the whole Provinces of 1 Biledulgerid, or Numidia. 2 Libya Deserta, or Sarra; and 3. a great part of that Country which is now called Terra Nigritarum. But because the greatest part of this last Country is to come under another Account, we will here only take the two first into consideration.  

1. NUMIDIA.  
1. NUMIDIA, is bounded on the East with Egypt, on the West with the Atlantic Ocean; on the North with Mount Atlas which parteth it from Barbary, and Cyrene; on the South with Libya Deserta.  
It was thus first called by John Leo, an African Writer, to whose description of all Africa we are much beholding; because of that resemblance which the People of it have to the old Numidians, which is after the custom of the Nomads, living without houses, under their Wagons, and Carts, as Lucan testifieth of them, thus 

Nulla domus, plaustris habitant, migrare per arva  
Mos, atque errantes circumvectare Penates.   

They dwell in wains, not houses; and do stray  
Through fields, and with them lead their gods each way.    
And worthily may they owe their names to them, from whom they borrow so much of their nature: for the people to this day spend their lives in hunting, and stay but three or four days in a place, as long as the grass will serve the Camels. This is the cause why this Country is so ill peopled, the Towns so small in themselves, and so remote from others. An example hereof is Teffet a great City in their esteem, which yet containeth but 400 households, and hath no neighbours within 300 miles of it.  
The Country aboundeth with Dates, whence it is called Dactylorum regio, and in the Arabic Biledulgerid, which signifieth also a Date-region. These Dates are (to speak properly) the fruit of the Palm Trees, usually growing in hot Countries, of which some are male, some female; the first bringing forth only flowers; the other fruit: and yet the male so beneficial to the increase of the Dates, that unless a flowered bough of the male be engrafted into the female, the Dates never prove good, in case they bear any Dates at all, as before was noted. This fruit is the chief diet of the people: but this sweet meat hath sour sauce; for it commonly rotteth their teeth betimes. As for the stones of these Dates, they feed their Goats with them, whereby they grow fat, and yield store of milk. The Air hereof, of so sound a nature, that if a man be troubled with the French disease, he shall there, without any course of Physic, find a present remedy.  
The natural Inhabitants of this Country, are said to be base and vile people, thiefs, murderers, treacherous, and ignorant of all things; feeding most commonly on Dates, Barley, and Carrion; accounting Bread a Diet for their Festival Days. But the Arabians who are intermingled with them, in most part of the Country, affirmed to be (comparatively with the Natives) ingenuous, liberal, and civil. The Garments of these Numidians, of the coursest cloth, so short that they cover not half the body: the richer sort, distinguished by a Jacket of blue Cotton with wide sleeves. Their Steeds are Camels, which they ride on without stirrup, or so much as a saddle; a leather, thrust thorough on hole made in the nose of the Camel, serves them for a bridle; and to save the charge of Spurs they make use of a goad. Their Religion, Mahometism, to which perverted (Christianity having once had some footing here) in the year 710. the Azanaghi and other people of those parts then subdued by the Saracens: who held them for a Nation of so little reckoning, that no man of account amongst them would descend so low, as to be their Prince, but left them to be ruled as in former times, by the Chiefs or Heads of their several Clans!  
The chief River which is left, hath the name of Dara, and possibly enough may be the Daradus of Ptolemy: the rest which are mentioned in that Author, rising out of Mount Atlas, and falling headily this way, finding these barren wildernesses to afford them the readiest Channels, are trained along by the allurements of the Sands, and are either swallowed up in great Lakes; or being too liberal to the thirsty sands in their way to the Sea, die at the last for thirst in the midst of the Deserts.  
The Principal of their Provinces (if capable of a distinction into better and worse.) 1 DARA; more cultivated than the rest, because of the River running thorough it, whence it hath its name: 250 miles in length, indifferently fruitful, where the River doth overflow and water it; and of so different a nature from all the rest, that here the Country people have some scattered Villages, the better sort their several Castles. 2 PESCARA, so called from the chief Town of it, exceedingly infested with Scorpions; the sting whereof is present death. 3 FIGHIG, so called from the chief Town also, inhabited by an industrious and witty People (in respect of the rest) some of which betake themselves to Merchandise; some to the study of their Law, which they study at Fez, and grow rich upon it. 4 TEGORARIN, a large Region, and well inhabited, better than any except Dara; as having in it 50 Castles or gentlemen's houses, and 100 Villages. The people wealthy in regard of the gread trade which they drive with the Negroes; and pretty good husbands in manuring their land on which they are forced to lay much soil; and will therefore let some of it Rent-free to strangers, reserving only the dung of themselves and their cattle. 5 BILEDULGERID, specially so called, abundantly fruitful in Dates, whence it had the name, but destitute of Corn by reason of the extreme dryness of the soil; and yet hath in it many Towns of good note among them. Of less note, 6 Tesset, 7 Segelmesse, 8 Zeb, 9 Tebelbeti, and 10 Fessen, so called from the chiefest of their Towns and Villages.  
Towns of most note both now and in former times, besides those spoken of before, 1 Timugedit, in the Province of Dara, the birthplace of Mahomet Ben Amet and his three sons, the founders of the Xeriffian Empire. 2 Tafilete, in the said Province, to which place Mahomet the second of these sons and first King of Morocco of that Family, confined his eldest brother Amet, having took him prisoner, Anno 1544. 3. Teffet, a great Town of 400 houses, but so poorly neighboured that there is no other inhabited place within 300 miles of it; but of that before. 4 Techort, the inhabitants whereof are very courteous to strangers, whom they entertain at free-cost; and choose rather to marry their daughters to them then to any of the Natives. 5 Eboacah, the most Eastern Town in all this Country, distant about 100 miles from the borders of Egypt. 7 Debris, one of the chief Cities of the Garamantes, of great renown in former times for Wells or Fountain of the Sun, the waters whereof being lukewarm at the Sunrising, cooled more and more till noon, was then very cold, and so continued until midnight; afterwards by degrees growing hotter and hotter, as if it had a natural Antipathy with the Sun, hottest when that was furthest off; and cold when nearest. 8 Masucha, seated on a Rock, garrisoned by Jugurth for a place of refuge, but taken by Marius, in the prosecution of that War. 8 Capsa, the chief City of all this tract, said to be built by Hercules; but questionless of very great strength, anguibus arenisque vallata, made inaccessible (saith the Historian) by the thick Sands and multitudes of Serpents which were harboured in them; but easily forced by Marius in his Wars with Jugurth, and utterly destroyed by Caesar in his war against Juba.  
It seems by this, that those people neighbouring Mount Atlas were much at the disposal of the Kings of Mauritania in the times foregoing; and so they have been also in these latter times! For though neglected by the Romans, who thought it an high point of wisdom not to extend their Empire beyond that Mountain; yet the Saracens had not long possessed themselves of those parts of Barbary, which was in the year 698; but within twelve years (Anno 710.) they subdued this Country, and planted their Religion in it, though not themselves. Nor was Amet, the first Xeriffe of Morocco warm in that estate, when he thought it best for him to secure himself in it by the conquest of this: to whose successors, the chiefs of the Tribes hereof render some acknowledgements.   

2. LIBYA DESEETA.  
2. LIBYA DESERTA, is bounded on the north with Numidia, or Biledulgerid, to which contiguous; on the East with Nubia a Kingdom and Province of the Land of Negroes; on the South with the land of Negroes wholly, and on the West with Gualata, another Province of these Negroes interposed betwixt it and the Atlantic.  
The reason of the name of Libya we have had before. To which Deserta was added upon very good reasons, as well to difference it from the other Libya, a Province of Egypt, as to express the barren and sandy condition of it: in which respect by the Arabians called Sarra, signifying in their language a rude and inhabitable Desert, as this Country is. So truly such, that men may travel in it eight days together without finding water, or seeing any tree, and no grass at all. The water which they have is drawn out of pits, exceeding brackish, and many times those pits so covered with the Sands that men die for thirst: the Merchants therefore carrying their water with them on the backs of Camels; which if it fail, they kill their Camels, and drink a water which they wring out of their guts. And yet as dangerous and uncomfortable as these Deserts be, they are very much traveled by the Merchants of Fez and Tremesen, trading to Agades and Tombatum, in the land of Negroes.  
The People differ not much from the Numidians in shape or qualities; but if a worse of quality, it must be the Lybian. They did once worship a God called Psaphon, who when he lived, taught divers Birds which he caught, and then set at liberty, to say these words, viz. Psaphon is a great god: which the simple people hearing, and admiring at it, afforded him Divine honours. Converted at last to the Christian Faith, they remained a while in the profession of the Gospel: exterminated by the Saracens about the year 710. who having added Numidia or Biledulgerid to their former conquests, planted their Superstitions in this Country also.  
This Country is divided (as others into Provinces) into five great Deserts, to which those of less note are to be referred.  
1. ZANHAGA, beginning at the borders of Gualata (interposed betwixt it and the Atlantic Ocean) and extending Eastward to the Salt-pits of Tegaza; having on the South Gualata and Tombutum in the land of Negroes, so destitute of water, that there is one pit only at the end of each hundred mile, brackish and unwholesome; and in the Deserts of Azaoad and Araoan which are parts of this, but one in an 150 or 200 miles riding.  
2. ZVENZIGA, extended from the Salt-pits of Tegaza Eastward, to the Desert of Targa; bounded on the North with Segelmesse and Tebelbeti, Numidian Provinces; and on the South with the Deserts of Ghir and Guber. So void of water, (especially in that part thereof which is called Gogden) that in nine day's travel there is not so much as one drop to be seen, but what they carry on their Camels.  
3. TARGA, extended Eastward to the Desert of Ighidi; and reaching from Tegorarin in the North, to the Desert of Agader in the South: the best conditioned part of all this Country, well watered, of a temperate A●re, and a soil reasonably fruitful. In length from North to the South 300 miles; and liberally stored with Manna, which they gather into little vessels, and carry to Agadez to sell. Mingled in water or with pottage it is very cooling, and drank of in their Feasts, as a special dainty.  
4. LEMPTA, extendeth from the Deserts of Ighidi, unto that of Bordea.  
5. BORDEA, which reacheth to the borders of Nubia. Of these two there is little to be said in several, but that this last was discovered lately by one Hamar, a guide to a Caravan of Merchants; who blinded with the sands wandered out of his way, and causing sand to be given him at every twenty miles' end, found by the smell at last that they begun to draw nigh some inhabited Place, and told them of it 40 miles before they came to it.  
Cities of note we hope for none, where we find no water. Of such as go for Cities here, the most considerable, 1 Tegaza, rich in veins of Salt, resembling Marble, which the Inhabitants, being 20 days distant from any habitation, and consequently many times in danger to die for famine, exchange for Victuals with the Merchants of Tombutum, who come hither for it: Much troubled with the South winds, which doth so drive the sands upon them, that it causeth many of them to lose their sight. 2. Huaden, or Hoden, a known resting place, and a great refreshment to the Merchant in the midst of these Deserts. 3 Guargata on the brink of a Lake, fed by a River of hot water; affirmed to be a Town of elegant building, and inhabited by a wealthy People, 4 Toberaum, of little note, but that it serveth for a Stage or baiting place to the weary Traveller. Of which kind there are said to be others at the extremities or ends of each several Deserts; the Havens of such men as sail in these sandy Seas; but not else observable.  
Nor is there much, if any thing, observable of them in the way of story, but that not looked after by any of the great Conquerors, either Greeks or Romans, much of the Country was possessed by Arabian Colonies (men fit enough to plant in such barbarous Nations) at such time as the Saracens planted their Religion here. The Government of the Country since, as it was before, by the Chiefs of their several Clans, or Families, who as they know no Law themselves, so do the People show as much ignorance of it in their lives and actions: differing but little from brute Beasts, more than shape and speech.   
And so much for LIBYA INTERIOR.   

OF TERRA NIGRITARUM.  
TERRA NIGRIT ARUM, or THE LAND OF NEGROES, is bounded on the East with Aethiopia Superior, on the West with the Atlantic Ocean, on the North with Libya Deserta, and on the South with the Aethhiopic Ocean, and part of Aethiopia Inferior. So called from the Nigritae, the chief of the Nations here inhabiting in the time of Ptolemy: and they so named from the River Niger, of which more anon.  
The Country very hot, by reason of ifs situation under the Torrid Zone: yet very well inhabited, full of people, and in some places always green; well watered, and exceeding fruitful, specially in those parts which lie within the compass of the overflowings of the River Niger, and on the further side of the River Sanaga; abundantly well stored both with Corn, cattle, and Garden-ware for the use of their Kitchens; well Wooded, and those Woods well furnished with Elephants and other Beasts, both wild and tame. Their greatest want (but such a want as may be born with) is the want of Fruit-trees, few of which they have; and those they have, bear one kind of fruit only, which is like the Chestnut, but somewhat bitterer. Rain here doth neither hurt nor help; their greatest welfare consisting in the overflowings of Niger, as that of Egypt in the inundations of Nile. In some parts liberally enriched with Mines both or Gold and Silver, very fine and pure: so that had not the Portugals affected the honour of discovering New-Worlds as much as Wealth, they might have made as rich a Factory here, as at the Indies.  
The inhabitants, till the coming of the Portugals thither, were for the most part so rude and barbarous, that they seem to want that use of Reason which is peculiar unto man; of little wit, and destitute of all Arts and sciences; prone to luxury, and for the greatest part Idolaters, though not without some small admixture of Mahumetans. When the Portugals first sailed into these Coasts, they hereof took the Ships for great Birds with white wings; and after, upon better acquaintance, they could not be brought to believe, but that the Eyes which were casually painted on the beaks of the ships, were the eyes by which they saw how to direct themselves in their course. Guns seemed to them, for their hideous noise, to be the works of the Devil; and for Bagpipes, they took them to be living creatures; neither when they had been permitted to feel them, would they be persuaded but that they were the work of Gods own hands. The very Nobles (if so noble a name may without offence be given to such blockish people) are so dull and stupid, that they are ignorant of all things which belong to civil society; and yet so reverend of their King, that when they are in his presence, they never look him in the face, but sit flat on their buttock, with their elbows on their knees, and their hands on their faces. They use to anoint their hair with the fat of Fishes, which makes them stink more wretchedly than they would do otherwise. Of complexion they are for the most part Coal-black, whence the name of Negroes; but on the Southside of the River Senaga, they are only Tawny: the Blacks so much in love with their own complexion, that they use to paint the Devil white; which I find thus versified.  
The Land of Negro is not far from thence,  
Nearer extended to th' Atlantic Main;  
Wherein the black Prince keeps his residence,  
Attended by his jetty coloured Train:  
Who in their native beauty most delight,  
And in contempt do paint the Devil white.  
They have tried all Religions, but agree in none. Idolaters at the first, as others the Descendants of Cham: Afterwards it is said that they received the Rites and Religion of the Jews, (but the time and occasion of it I do no where find) in which they continued very long: But that being worn out at the last, Christianity prevailed in some Kingdoms of it. In the year 973. Mahometism began to get ground amongst them, by the diligence and zeal of some of the Preachers of that Law: the first who were reduced that way being those of Melli; after which Tombuto, Oden, Gualata, were infected with the same poison also. In the end, all the rest of this Country followed their example, except the Kingdom of Borneo, some part of Nubia, and the Coasts of the Atlantic Ocean, which continue in their ancient Gentilism: Christianity being confined to a corner of Nubia (if still there remaining) and some few Garrisons belonging to the Crown of Portugal. And as they are of different Religions, so are they also of several Languages: those of Gualata, Guinea, Tombutum, Melli, and Gugonti, speaking the Language called Sungai; the Guberoi, Canontes, Chaesenae, and Gangrates etc. that called Guber; Gualata, a language of its own; and those of Nubia, one resembling the Arabic, Chaldaean, and Egyptian.  
Mountains of most note in it, in the former times, were those of 1. Arvaltes, and 2. Arangus, and 3. that called Deorum currus; this last supposed to be the same which is now called Punta de Lopes Gonsales; but that more probably which they now call Cabo de Sierra Leona, a large Promontory, thrusting itself into the Sea; discerned afar off by the Sailor and the Country people, as well by reason of his height, reaching to the clouds, as the continual lightnings and thunders which do issue thence.  
Rivers of most note, besides Nile, which watereth it on the East, 1 Senaga, or Canaga, which riseth out of the Lake of Guoga, supposed to be the same which Ptolemy calleth Lacum Chelonidem; and if so, then must this be the River Gir, of which he saith, that having fallen into that Lake, and there swallowed up, it thence produced another River, whose name he telleth not, little inferior unto Nilus for the length of its course, the variety of strange Creatures which are bred therein, or the distinction which it maketh in the face of this Country: the people on the one side of it, being Black, on the other Tawny; the soil on the one side very barren, on the other fruitful. In the end having run his race, he falleth into the Atlantic by two great outlets. 2 Niger, a River better known to Ptolemy by name then nature; now found to have its rise from a great Lake within two degrees of the Equinoctial, whence running northwards for a time, he hideth himself under ground for the space of 60 miles together: when rising up again, and making a great Lake called the Lake of Borneo, he bendeth his course directly Westward, and taking in many less Channels, he teareth the earth into many Islands, and at last falleth into the Sea. Of as long course, and the same wondrous nature, as the River Nilus. For from the fifteenth day of June, it overfloweth all the adjacent fields, the space of 40 days together, and in so many more, recollecteth his waters, into their proper Channels; the whole Country being indebted to these inundations, for its fertility, which otherwise could be but small, since the dryness of the soil can afford no exhalations, whereby clouds may be generated, and the earth refreshed with moistures, or revived with dews.  
Chief Cities of this Country in the time of Ptolemy, 1 Nigira, the Metropolis of the Country, 2. Panagra, 3 Malachath, 4 Anygath, 5 Thumondacana, 6 Suluce: and others to the number of 17 in all; situate all along the course of the River Niger: Of all which we have nothing now remaining but the situation and the names, which that Author giveth us. So that the memory of all the Ancient Towns and People being quite defaced, we must look upon it now as it standeth divided at this time into several Kingdoms, 25 at the least in all (some say many more) the chief of which are these that follow.  
1. ORA ANTEROSA, A large tract of ground on the Western Ocean, extended from Cape Blance to the River Carthage, sandy and barren, but reasonably well peopled. The Inhabitants hereof called Azanaghi, were accounted formerly very rude and barbarous; much civilised since the Portugals and other Christian Nations began to trade there; of middle stature, complexioned between black and ash colour; great liars, very treacherous, poor and parsimonious, and very patient in extremes both of heat, and hunger. The chief Towns, 1 Porto di Dio (we may call it God's Port) and 2 Porto deal Riscatto, two frequented Havens, thus named occasionally by the Portugueze, at their first coming thither. 3 Arquin, a strong Fortress of the Portugals, situate on or near the Promontory now called Cape Blance, and giving name unto some Lands, five or six in number, lying near unto it, called the Isles of Arquin, inhabited by a barbarous People, named the Azanhays; but of no great note. These coasts discovered first by the Portugals, An. 1452. under the conduct of Prince Henry, son of John the first, or by his encouragement and directions.  
2. GVALATA, distant from the Ocean 100 miles, (the Province of Ora Anterosa being interposed) is but a small Country, though a Kingdom, containing in it but three Burrow Towns, with some Territory of ground and petty Hamlets belonging to them. Fruitful only in Dates, Mill, and Pulse; but of these two last no great abundance. The Inhabitants Coal-black, hospitable towards strangers, to their power, but poor and miserable; without Laws, settled form of Government, Gentry and Judges.  
3. AGADEZ bordering on Targa, one of the five Deserts of Libya; the People of it generally given to grazing, their houses made of green boughs, which upon every change of Pasture they carry with them. So that we are to look for few Towns among them, but these movable Villages. One of good note it hath, called Agadez, by the name of the Country, inhabited for the most part by Merchant's Strangers, who drive a great Trade betwixt this and Tremesen. The Town well walled, the houses of a better building than the Country promiseth; the People civiller, and more fair conditioned then the rest of the Negroes, seated commodioustly on a River which falleth into the Senaga, and by that means hath correspondence with the Ocean also. The King hereof, a Tributary to the King of Tombuto, payeth him 15000 Crowns of Annual tribute.  
4. CANON, a large Province on this side of the River Canaga, full of woods, mountainous, and in some parts desert; but plentiful enough of Corn, Rice, Citrons, and Pomgranats, with good store of Cotton wool. Well-watered besides that great River with some lesser Streams. Sufficiently populous, and stored with good Towns and Villages, the habitations of the Shepherds and Husbandmen; as the chief Town called Canon, is of wealthy Merchants. This the Seat-Royal of their King, a Tributary also unto him of Tombuto; environed with a wall, built of a Chalk stone, as most part of the houses are.  
5. CASENA, on the East of Canon, but less fruitful far, the Country overgrown with vast woods, and the soil untractable; affording only Mill, and Barley, but of that good plenty. The People as black as any Coal, with great noses, and most prominent lips. Their houses very poor and mean, and their Towns accordingly; none of them numbering more than 300 Families.  
6. SANAGA, lying on the other side of that River, from which thus named, extendeth to the Atlantic Ocean, as far as to the Promontory which by Ptolemy named Arsinarium, is now called Cape Vert, or Caput Viride. The Country full of rich Pastures, goodly Trees, and most sorts of Fruits; plentiful enough of Mill and Pulse, but ill provided of other Corn, and no Grapes at all. Well watered both with Lakes and Rivers. No tame beasts about their fields, but Goats, Cows and Oxen; of Lions, Leopards, Wolves and Elephants, too great a plenty. The people extreme black, much given to lying, treacherous, very full of talk, excessively venereous, and extremely jealous. A King they have, but such a one as holdeth but by courtesy only, having no certain Rents or Revennes, but what given By his Nobles.  
7. GAMBRA or GAMBEA, a small Kingdom on the River so named, but bordering in some places on the Atlantic. In those parts very pleasant, the Trees always flourishing, the air very hot; in other parts of the same nature with Sanaga, but that this affords good store of Rice, which the other doth not.  
8. TOMBUTUM, on the further side of the River Sanaga: exceeding plentiful of Corn, cattle, Milk, and Butter. Destitute of Salt, but what they buy of sorrein Merchants at excessive rates; and small store of horses. Well watered by a branch also of the River Niger, and many wells of purpose made to receive such waters, as by artificial Dikes and Channels are derived from both. The People courteous, rich, and pleasant, spending whole days and nights in singing and dancing. Their food, Flesh, Butter, Milk, and Fish, which they mingle together, and make it neither toothsome nor wholesome. The chief Towns, 1 Tombuto, which gives name to this Kingdom, situate about twelve miles from a branch of the Niger, and founded by the Saracens or Arabians in the 610. year of their Hegira. The houses all of mud and thatch, except one fair Church, and the King's palace, both of lime and stone. Inhabited by wealthy Merchants, who manage a great trade betwixt this and Fez. 2 Gago, the residence of the King; large, without walls, the buildings very poor and mean, except such as belong unto the King or the chief Nobility. The Merchants rich, and their wares sumptuous and precious, but excessive dear. The Town about 400 miles distant from Tombuto, situate in a fruitful Country for Rice, Fruits, and Flesh, and well replenished with fresh water. 3 Cabra, a large Town, but unwalled, and of no better building than the other two.  
9 MELLI, lying on the East of Tombutum, is a spacious and fruitful Province, situate all along on a branch of the River Niger, in breadth 300 miles, and abundantly fertile, especially in Corn, cattle, and Cotton Wool: the people generally very wealthy; of greater wit, civility and industry than the rest of the Negroes. The chief Town of it is called Melli, unwalled, but large, as containing in it 6000 families furnished with many Temples, Priest and Readers of the Mahometan Law, which those of this Country did first unhappily admit of. This the Seat-royal of their Kings, who are very courteous unto strangers; but Homagers and Tributaries to the King of Tombutum.  
10. GHENEOA, situate betwixt Gualata, Tombutum, and Melli, but so that it bordereth in one place on the Ocean also; is a wealthy Country: but hath neither Town or Castle in it, except that wherein the King resideth, who is a Vassal also to the king of Tombutum. That town the residence also of their Priests, Doctors, and Merchants: of which the Priests and Doctors are apparelled in white, but all the rest in black, or blue Cotton. The people have great traffic with the Merchants of Barbary; and though made very rich by the overflowings of Niger, and the wealth of the Country, they have great store of Gold uncoined; yet in buying and selling at home, they use iron-mony.  
11. GUBER lieth on the East of the former Province; of the same length, and naturally well sensed with lofty mountains. Exceeding populous, and thick set with Villages, in which dwell their Husbandmen and Shepherds, rich in their numerous herds of all sorts of cattle, as also great quantities of Rice and Pulse: the people very industrious, and good Artificers. Their principal Town is called Guber also, a town of 6000 families, the usual residence of their King; full of wealthy Merchants, and rich in Manufactures.  
12. GIALOFI lieth betwixt the two great Rivers of Sanaga and Gambia. The people whereof are of such admirable dexterity, that they can leap upon an horse when he is in his fnll gallop, stand in the saddle when he runneth fastest; turn themselves about upon his back, and suddenly sit down. Of their Country I find little, of their Story nothing, but that Bemoin one of their kings, being overlaid with Civil wars, in the year 1489. went for aid to the king of Portugal, and gave great hopes of his Conversion to the Christian faith; But being shamefully murdered by Pedro de Vas the Portugal General, the hopes of Christianity in these parts fell together with him.  
13. GVINEA, is a Sea-coast Country, extended from Sierra Leona (so called from the Lion like roaring of the Waves beating on that Promontory) in the tenth degree of Longitude, to the borders of Benin in the 30. But the Portugals comprehend under this name the whole Sea coast of afric from Cape Blanco and the Country of Ora Anterosa, to Angola and Congo inclusively, in the Lower Aethiopia. But take it in the proper sense, as before limited, and we shall find it to be rich in Gold, Ivory, Rice, Barley, cotton-wool, and a sort of Pepper which the Portugals call Pimienta del Rabo, the Natives Melegneta, and we Guinie-pepper: of double the efficacy of the Pepper which come from India; and therefore forbidden to be sold by the Kings of Portugal, for fear their Indian trade should be discontinued. Well stored with Sheep and Poultry and of Dates good plenty; All other Fruits which they want or care for, are brought thither from Gualata. Birds in abundance, and Of Elephants and Apes too many. A Tree they have, by them called Mignolo, the Bark whereof being cut doth afford a most excellent liquor, more pleasant, strong, and nourishing, than the choiceest Wines; which they drink of in their great Feasts, even to drunkenness. The people of both Sexes very rude and barbarous, aswel in their habit, as their manners; yet amongst many barbarous customs they have one most commendable, which is the breeding of their Maidens: When marriageable, they place in an house severed from the rest of their Cities like a Cloister or Monastery: where for a years space they are trained up by some old man of best estimation. At the years end they are brought out well apparelled with Music and Dances; where the young men please themselves in the choice of their wives. For whom having bargained with their Parents, they satisfy the old man for his care and pains in their Education. They keep one day of rest weekly, but therein differ from all Nations in the world besides, that they keep their Sabbath upon the Tuesday. Distracted into as many Kingdoms as great Tribes or Families: the Kings thereof subordinate unto one another, as they lie more within the Land, till they end all in a subjection to the King of Mandinga. Places of most note, 1. Songus the principal of Mandinga, about 100 Leagues Eastward from the Cape of Palms. 2 Budomel, the chief Town of the Kingdom so called. 3 Uxoo, in the Centre of all the Country. 4 Mina, a strong hold of the Portugals, situate near the Cape called Cabo de Trois pentas the three pointed Cape; named sometimes also S. George de Mina, by the name of the Cappadocian Martyr, and the Mines of Gold which they hoped to find there; By which, and by the Fort of Arquin, which they have upon Cape Blanco in the North part of this Land of the Negroes, they command all the Countries which they call by the name of Guinea. This Town not built until the year 1485. in the beginning of the reign of John the 2d. though the discovery of these coasts had been made before An. 1452. under the conduct of Prince Henry Duke of Viseo, Son of John the first. By whose encouragement the Portugueze did first employ themselves in foreign Discoveries, and became enamoured of the Seas.  
14. BENIN, beth directly East of Guinea, by the Portugals reckoned for a Province or Kingdom of it: the King whereof is said to have 600 Wives, with all which twice a year he goeth out in Pomp. The Gentlemen (if I abuse not the name) have most of them 80 Wives, some more; he that is poorest, ten, or twelve, and the more the merrier. The people thereof do cut and raze their skin with three lines drawn to the Navel; esteeming it necessary to salvation. They use all, both men and women, to go naked till they are Married; and then robe clothed only from the waist to the knees: so that had our Sir Thomas Moor lived in these parts, he had in some measure had his desire. For he among other strange plots in his Utopian Commonwealth, telleth us, how there it is the custom, for some reverend old Sire to bring in naked, the young man; and some hoary old Matron, to present naked, the young woman; between whom a Marriage is propounded. For, faith he, in buying a horse, the chapman not only vieweth his naked carcase, but taketh off all his trappings and saddle, lest under them some blame might be hidden: and why then in choosing of a wise, should we take one, of whom we see no more than the face (unius Palmae spatium) and perhaps scarce that. The learned and ingenuous Author of the New Atlantis, though he dislike of Marriages made upon such uncertainties, yet he would have this discovery made by some friends of the Parties, not by them themselves: it being as he saith very inconvenient, that after such a plain and familiar sight of each others person, there should be a refusal upon either side. But these new Projects I refer to your modest censures.  
15. GVANGARA lieth on the North of Benin, a wealthy and well peopled Country; but their Towns and Villages very mean, except that called by the same name with the Country, where the King resideth, which is somewhat better than the rest, well traded, and full of rich Merchants. The King hereof of so great Revenues, that he keepeth seven thousand Archers, and five hundred Horse in continual pay; but Homager and Tributary to the King of Bornum.  
16. BORNUM, a large and opulent Country on the West of Guangara, is there extended to the length of 500 miles. Distinguished equally in a manner into hills, and valleys: the hills inhabited by Neatherds, and Shepherds, breeding great flocks and herds of cattle, with Mill, and many other fruits to us unknown; the Vales replenished with many Market-Towns, and as full of Corn. The People are of no Religion, but live like beasts, without propriety so much as in their wives or children: nor are they differenced by names, as in other places, but by some mark upon their bodies. Which though it seem strange to us of this present Age, yet was it thus in part, with out Saxon Ancestors. Whence have we else the names of White, Brown, Black, Grace, Green, and Tawny; or those of Long, Short, Low, Curl, crisp, and others, but from such Originals? not to say any thing of the names of Trades, and Occupations, so familiar with us. The name of their chief City is Borneo, where the King resideth. A potent Prince, who keepeth in continual pay three thousand horse, and great numbers of Foot, and yet is said to have no other Revenue then what he getteth by strong hand from his Enemies. Which if it be true, those Kings must needs be good Warriors, and have great successes also in their undertake: it being also said of these Kings of Borneo, that all the Furniture of their Horses, all the Dishes, Cups, and Platters which they eat or drink in, yea the very Chains for his Dogs were of finest Gold.  
17. Gaoga lieth betwixt Borneo, and the Deserts of Nubia: the Country almost square, each side thereof extended 500 miles. The People ignorant, rude, uncivil, but specially those which dwell in the mountains: their houses built most of boughs and leaves, which once dry, easily take fire; but the best is, they are soon repaired: their greatest wealth is in their cattle, which they keep most tenderly. About the year 1420. they were brought into subjection by a Negro-Slave, who having slain his Master, by the help of his wealth grew strong enough to encroach on his neighbours; and selling such Captives as he took, for horses of Egypt, became King of Gaoga, and in fine very gracious with the Mamaluck Sultan's. His Suceessors have since so enlarged their Territories, that they are second unto none but the Kings of Tombutum.  
18. NUBIA hath on the West Gaoga, bounded on the North with Egypt, extended Eastward unto Nilus, by which parted from Aethiopia Superior, or the Habassine Empire. So called from the Nubae, an ancient and potent people of this Tract, spoken of by Ptolemy: the great Lake, anciently called Nubea Palus, being hence denominated. A distinct people from those of the same name, dwelling on the shores of the Red-Sea, near unto Sinus Avalites, who from the shortness of their stature passed in account for Pigmies; 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, saith Hesychius an old Grammarian: these being a strong and potent Nation, and well skilled in wars. Insomuch as Cyriacus once a King hereof, understanding of some pressures laid upon the Christians of Egypt, is said to have raised 100000 Horse for their aid and succour; but by the persuasions of the Patriarch of Alexandria, went back unsought with. For at that time the Country was wholly Christian, and had been so from the very days of the Apostles; but are now fallen off again to their former Idolatries, or become Mahometans, for want of Ministers to instruct them. It is recorded by Alvarez, the writer of the Aethhiopic History, that at his being in the Court of the Abassine Emperor, there came Ambassadors out of Nubia to entreat a supply of Pastors to instruct their Nation, and repair Christianity amongst them; but were unchristianly rejected.  
Here is a Poison in this Country of which the tenth part of a grain will dispatch a man in a quarter of an hour, and is sold for ten Ducars' an ounce; the Customs for which unto the King is as much as the price unto the Merchant. But for this one ill Commodity they have many good; that is to say, Corn, Sugar, Civet, Sanders, Ivory, all in great abundance; some store of Gold, and other Metals. The Country naturally sandy, but well refreshed with Lakes and Rivers, which do much enrich it; insomuch as the people generally are very wealthy, and manage a great trade with the Merchants of Cairo and Egypt. Their chief City is called Dangala, large and well frequented; said to contain no fewer than 10000 families; but their houses built of nothing but thatch and mortar. In other parts, especially towards the river Nilus, they have many Villages; few or none of them worth the naming.  
There are many other Kingdoms in this Land of Negroes, besides those in Guinea, but of lesser note; as 19 BITO, 20. TEMIANO, 21. ZEGZEG, 22. ZANFARA, 23. GOTHAN, 24. MEDRA, 25. DAUM. Of which there is nothing to be spoken, but of their poverty or riches, blessings or curses common to them with the rest of these Nations; and therefore I purposely omit them.  
This Country, or a great part of it, was anciently accounted part of Libya Interior; inhabited besides the Nubae and Nigritae spoken of before, by the Nabathrae dwelling about the hill Arvates, the Aronca near the hill Arangus, the Agargina, Xylinces, and Alchalinces, Aethhiopic Nations. Not much considerable in the business of former times; nor much discovered (not very perfectly at this day) till the year 973 at what time certain Mahometan Preachers, out of a superstitious zeal to propagate their Sect, first opened the way into these Countries: the People then living like bruit beasts, without King, Law, or any form of Government; scarce knowing how to sow their lands; clad in the skins of as very beasts as themselves, and challenging no propriety in wives or children. First conquered by Joseph King of Morocco, of the race of the Almohades; and after that by the five Nations of Libya Deserta, who divided them into fifteen parts, every one of those five Nations possessing three of them. One of the Kings of these Libyant, named Soni Heli, being slain by Abuaci Ischia General of his forces, and the rest terrified with that blow, An. 1526. the Negroes once again recovered their long lost liberty, and instituted divers Kings of their own. Amongst them, Izchia was most deservedly made King of Tombutum, who managed his affairs so well, that he conquered the Kings of Guber, Agadez, Canon, Melli, Zanfora, Zegzeg, Ghenaeoa, Gambea, and Casena; which he made his Tributaries. So that his successors are now the greatest of those five Kings, who have the supreme power over all the rest. The other four, 1. the King of Mandinga, lording it over the Realms of Benin, Giolofi, and the Kings of Guinea: 2. the King of Borneo, the only one that is descended of the Libyan race, in greatness of command next to him of Tombuto; 3. the King of Gualata, whose Kingdom is confined within that one Province, but therein absolute and supreme; and 4. the King of Gaoga, Paramount over all the rest.  
But because the greatest power is in the hands of the King of Tombuto, who possibly enough may in short time bring all the rest under his command, we will take a more particular view of his estate; affirmed to be the richest Prince in these parts of afric, and to have many Plates and Sceptres of gold, some of which weigh 1300 pound weight. When any of his Subjects do appear before him, they kneel on both their knees, and bowing their heads unto the ground, cast sand over their shoulders and upon their heads, going forwards still upon their knees. His Court he keeps in a royal manner, continually guarded with 3000 Horse, but with many more Foot, all armed with Bows and empoisoned Arrows. To the Jews a very bitter Enemy, whom he admitteth not to trade in his kingdoms, and confiscating the goods of all such of his Subjects as hold traffic with them. Zealous of the Mahometan Law, and liberal in stipends to the Doctors and Professors of it. Of greater power than any other beyond Atlas, but the Habassine Emperor. And though Amet the Xeriffe of Morocco, in the year 1589. had some hand upon him, and conquered a great part of this kingdom, even as far as Gago, extending his Empire six month's journey by Camels beyond Morocco; yet it held not long: this King again recovering what was taken from him; and being since that time in as eminent power, as ever in any times before.  
And so much for TERRA NIGRITARUM.   

OF AETHIOPIA SUPERIOR.  
AETHIOPIA SUPERIOR, is bounded on the East with the Red-Sea, and the Sinus Barbaricus; on the West with Libya Interior, the Realm of Nubia, in the Land of the Negroes, and part of the Kingdom of Congo in the other Aethiopia; on the North with Egypt, and Libya Marmarica; and on the South with the Mountains of the Moon, by which parted from the main body of Aethiopia Inferior.  
It was first called Aetheria, and afterwards Atlantia, as Pliny telleth us. In the end, the Grecians gave it the name of Aethiopia, from the Greek words 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying to burn, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a Countenance; because the violent heats of the Sun had so scorched the Countenances of the Inhabitants. The additions of Sub Aegypto, Superior, and Interior, serve only to distinguish it from the other Aethiopia, which lieth further off from Egypt, on the outside of this. It is called also Regnum Abyssinorum, from the Abaseni, or Abyssini, a people of Arabia Felix, who passing over the Red-Sea (not above seven miles broad in the narrowest place) came and settled here. And in the Scripture it is styled by the name of Ludim, from Lud the son of Mizraim, who first planted it, as hath been proved by many strong and concluding Arguments in our general Preface.  
It is situate on both sides of the Equinoctial, extending from the South Parallel of seven Degrees, where it meeteth with some part of the other Aethiopia; to the Northern end of the Isle of Meroe, situate under the fist Parallel on the North of that Circle. And though by this Account it fall short of the dimensions assigned by some, who extend it from one Tropic unto the other; yet is it of a very great length, no less than 1500 miles; the breadth about half as much, the whole circumference amounting to 4300 miles. Yet so, that all this vast tract of ground, is not to be understood of that part of the Country which is under the command of the Abassine Emperor, commonly but mistakingly called Prestor John: but of the whole Country of Aethiopia, as before limited and extended; containing besides his Estate, the Kingdoms of Adel and Adea, and the Provinces of Quiloa and Melindi; which two last are now reckoned of as parts of Aethiopia Inferior: The Isle of Meroe in the North is possessed by Mahometans, the most bitter enemies of this King: all on the West of Nilus, betwixt it and the Southeast of Nubia, inhabited by the Anzichi, an Idolatrous and man-eating Nation, subject to a great Prince of their own: and all the Coasts of the Red-Sea, as well within the Streits of Babel Mandel as without, except the Port of Erocco only, enjoyed by Arabians and Moors, who do acknowledge no subjection unto his commands; but are under the Kings of Adel and Adea before mentioned.  
But taking it in the largest signification and extent hereof (according unto which we must here describe it) it comprehendeth the three Countries called anciently Aethiopia Sub Aegypto, Trogloditica, and Regio Cinnamomifera. Of these the two last are by some reckoned but as parts of the first: though certainly the Troglodytes were a different Nation from the Aethiopians. For past all doubt the Troglodytes were Originally an Arabian people, so called quia 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 subeunt, from their living in Caves and dens: in which respect their part of this Country had the name of Arabia Trogloditica, in Dioscorides, and some others of the Ancient Writers. Of these it is affirmed by Pomponius Mela, that they were not the Masters of any wealth, and that their speech was rather a gnashing of the teeth, than any articulate and intelligible Pronunciation. Nullarum opum Domini sunt Trogloditae, strident magis quam loquuntur. As for their houses, they were (saith he) no better than Caves, and their food than Serpents. With whom concurreth Pliny also for their dwelling in Caves, and consequently for the reason of the name, saying positively, Trogloditae speluncas excavant. Called for the same reason in the holy Scripture, 2 Chron. 12. 3. by the name of Succhaei; the word Succoth (whence that name derived) not only signifying in the Hebrew Tents, or Tabernacles, but Caves, and Dens; and so translated Psal. 10. v. 9 and Job 38. v. 40. As for that part hereof which was called Regio Cinnamomifera, taking up the Southern parts in the time of Ptolemy, it took that name from the abundance of Cinnamon, which was then growing by it, now not a tree of it to be found in all this Country; as the Portugals, who have looked narrowly for it, have affirmed unto us. Shipped at Mosylon, a noted Emporie, placed by Ptolemy in the ninth degree of Northern Latitude; it was thence transported into Egypt and other Countries; as is said by Pliny, Portus Mosylitus quo Cinnamomum devehitur: the Spice in some Authors being called Mosulum, by the name of the Town. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Of Cinnamon the best is that which is called Mosulon, because brought from the City of that name in Aethiopia, saith Simeon Sethi in his Tract de Facultatibus Ciborum. As for this Cinnem●n (I note this only by the way) it is the inner bark of a Tree, as big as an Olive, with Leaves like Bay leaves: the drying of which maketh it roll together, and every three years is renewed, and stripped off again. Some think it came first from the Sinae or the Country which the Romans called Sinarum Regio, the Moderns China; and that it was so called, quasi Sinae Amomum, the Amomum of the Sinae; Amomum being the name of a sweet perfume growing in Assyria and Armenia. But than it should be written Sinamomum and not Cinnamomum: yet to give the greater credit to the former opinion, they of Ormus call it Bar● Chinae, or the wood of China. But of this enough.  
To go on therefore unto Aethiopia itself. The people of it in old times were said to have been great Astrologers; the first ordainers also of sacred Ceremonies, and in both to be Tutors to the Egyptians. They were also noted to be very good Archers, and to draw the longest and strongest Bows of any Nation: the Persian Bow (though those the greatest of all Asia) being only three Cubits long; but these of Aethiopia, four. Utuntur etiam Aethiopes quatuor cubitorum arcubus, as we read in Strabo; the like is said also by Herodotus and Diodorus. Their Arrows small, but strong; for the most part poisoned; Aethiopum geminata venenis Vulnera, as we find in Claudian; and for that inhumanity very much condemned. But not to spend our time too much upon these particulars, Pliny reciteth two strange things of this Country: 1. That the Air and ground are so patching hot, that the people not only dare not go out of doors without shoes, but that they roast their meat also by setting it in the Sun. 2. That there is a Lake, whose waters are thrice a day, and thrice a night, exceeding salt and unpleasing; but at all other times most sweet and delicate to the palate.  
This Country being as big as Germany, France, and Italy laid together, is but meanly populous; the distemperature of the Climate, and the dry barrenness of the ground, not admitting a multitude. For this cause afric is by Strabo compared to a Leopard's skin, the distance of whose spots showeth the dispersedness of the towns, and habitations in those torrid countries. A Country scarce in Wheat, but sufficiently plentiful in Rice, Barley, Beans, Pease, and the like; they have abundance of Sugars, Minerals of all sorts, and infinite herds of Oxen, Sheep, Goats Finally, there is no Country under heaven fitter for increase of Plants and Living creatures, if industry were not deficient. But in regard of this defect, they are destitute of many necessary things, which otherwise the natural commodities of the Country would supply them with: For they have here great store of Flax, but make no Cloth; plenty of Vines, yet make no wine, except it be to serve the palaces of the King and the Patriarch. Abundance of Sugar canes, and Mines of Iron; but know not how to make use of either unto any advantage. Rivers and Brooks in many places, but will not take the pains to dig Channels or trenches to derive their waters to the rest of the land which want them: those Rivers almost choked with Fish, their Woods crammed with Venison, which they trouble not themselves to catch.  
By this we may conjecture somewhat of the people also; Lazy and given unto their ease, ill-clothed, and not much better housed; extremely inclined to Barbarism, destitute of all learning, not to be credited unless they swear by the life of their Emperors; they hate a Smith equally with the Devil: their colour is generally olive-tawny, excepting only their King himself, who is always of a white complexion, (a wonderful prerogative, if true.) This blackness of their bodies, by the Poet attributed to the burning of the world by Phaeton. 
Sanguine tum credunt, in corpora summa vocato,  
Aethiopum populos nigrum traxisse colorem.  Which may be thus Englished: 
Their blood (its thought) drawn from the outward part,  
The Aethiopians grew so black and swart.  But the true cause hereof, whatsoever it be, may perhaps be looked upon hereafter, when we come to America.  
The Christian faith was first made known in this Country by the Eunuch of Queen Candace, who was baptised by Philip the Evangelist, and one of the Seven; more generally embraced by the pains and preaching of S. Matthew the Apostle hereof; but not totally propagated over all this Empire till the reign of Abraham, An. 470. who in his life entitled himself the Defender and Propagator of the Religion of CHRIST, and after his death was generally honoured as a Saint. Suppressed in part by the coming in of the Abasenes and other Arabians, it was again revived and more universally received then in former times, in the reign of David king of the Axumite Aethiopians: who in a war against Dunmus king of the Humerites in Arabia Felix, solemnly vowed to the God of the Christians to become one of his Followers, if he got the victory: And so accordingly he did, sending his Ambassadors to the Emperor Justinian for some Bishops and other learned men to instruct his people. The particulars of those Opinions wherewith they have since corrupted the purity of the true Religion, I find thus registered. 1. They use to circumcise their Children, both males and females. 2. They baptise the males 40, and the females 80 days after their circumcision. 3. After the receipt of the Sacrament, they are not to spit till Sunset. 4. They profess but one nature, and one will in CHRIST. 5. They accept only the three first General Counsels. 6. Their Priests live by the labour of their hands, for they allow them nothing, and permit them not to beg. 7. They baptise themselves every Epiphany day in Lakes and ponds, because that day they suppose Christ to have been baptised by John in Jordan. 8. They eat not of those Beasts which in the old Law are reckoned for unclean. 9 They keep the Saturday or Jewish Sabbath equally solemn with the Lords Day. 10. They administer the Eucharist to Infants presently after Baptism. 11. They teach, that the Reasonable soul of man is derived from their parents by Seminal propagation. 12. That Infants dying unbaptised, are sanctified in the womb by virtue of the Eucharist received by the Mother after her Conception. And finally, they show a Book of eight volames, writ, as they say, by the Apostles assembled at Jerusalem for that purpose; the Contents whereof they observe most solemnly. These are the most material points in which they differ from the Tenaries of the Catholic Church; And there are other points in which they differ only from the Church of Rome, as viz. 1. Administering in both kinds; 2. Without either Elevation or Reservation; 3. Rejecting massy Images, and 4. Extreme Unction; 5. Allowing the first marriages to their Priests and Bishops; and 6. in renouncing all relation to the Pope of Rome, who to the business of these Churches is a very stranger, and so hath been from the very first foundation of them. For it appears by the Canons of the Nicene Council, extant in the Arabic, and translated into Latin by Pisanus, that the Patriarch (or Abuna, as they call him) of these Abassine Churches, was in those times subordinate to the Alexandrian, confirmed in that Supremacy by the Fathers which were there assembled; and constantly ever since approved and practised by these Churches; in the Liturgies whereof, the name of the Alexandrian is remembered before their own. To this Patriarch, by an ancient privilege belongeth the seventh place in the Sessions of all General Councils; the Archbishop of Seleucia (or Babylon) only interposing betwixt him and the Patriarch of Jerusalem. Elected by the Abassine Monks of St. Antony's Order remaining in Jerusalem, and confirmed by the Patriarch of Alexandria, (of which Order, and of whose jurisdiction he must always be) he is sent into this Country to take his charge: where in some points of Civil nature he hath equal privilege with the Emperor himself; and in Spiritual, hath the sole power of excommunicating an obstinate Sinner. All other Ecclesiastical Dignities, from the Bishopric to the lowest Benefice, are conferred by the Emperor only.  
The principal Mountains of it in the former times, had the names of 1 Prionotus, 2 Isius, 3 Monodactylus, 4 Gaurus, and 5 Mons Satyrorum; all of them in that part which was called Trogloditica; 6 Garbala, 7 Elephas, and 8 Mast in the Isle of Meroe: the rest of the Country flat and level, or the hills not eminent. Rivers of most note, 1 Astapus (now Abanni) arising out of a great Lake called Coloe, now the Lake of Barcena. 2 Astaboras, now Tacassi; both falling into the River Nilus. 3. Nilus, of which before when we were in Egypt; whose spring unprofitably sought for in the elder times, is now said to be out of the Lake Zembre in the other Aethiopia, eleven Degrees beyond the Aequator: whence passing through spacious Deserts, large Lakes, and many great Kingdoms, he at last entereth into this. Here in some places struggling amongst broken Rocks, and less free passages, he falleth with such a wonderful noise into the Valleys beneath, that a Colony planted by the Persians near one of these Cataracts, (so they call those huge falls of his) were so dulled and deafened with the noise, that they were fain to abandon their habitations. Nor doth it only dull and deafen the neighbouring people, but the very hills do seem to tremble at the noise it maketh. Of which thus the Poet, 
Cuncta tremunt undis, & multo murmure montis,  
Spumeus invictis albescit fluctibus amnis.  Which may be Englished in these words; 
The noise the Mountains shakes, who roar for spite  
To see th' unvanquished Waves clothed all in white.   
Of these Cataracts there are two most noted: the one called Catarractes Major, in the borders of this Country towards Egypt, but South of both the Cities of Philae and Pselcis, Aethiopian cities; the other called Catarractes Minor, not far from Elephantis a City of Egypt, neighbouring to Scions, the last City of that Country towards this. So turbulent is this River amongst the Hills. And yet as terrible as these falls are supposed to be, one may divers times see the Country people in a little Boat not able to contain above two persons, to venture down them without fear; appearing after they have been long tossed in the waters a great distance off, as if they had been shot out of an Engine. Nor is he of such quiet passage in the open Countries, but that the Inhabitants of this Kingdom are fain to cut many Ditches, Sluices, and By-channels to receive his waters; which if not kerbed and lessened by such ways as these, might by some sudden overflowing much endanger Egypt: in respect whereof the Sultan's of Egypt have paid for long time to the Abassine Emperors an annual tribute. Which when the Great Turk, supposing it a needless charge, had once denied; this people, by the command of their Emperor, did open their Sluices, and break down the Dams; whereby the water fell so violently and so fast into Egypt, that the Turk was not only glad to continue the tribute, but to give them great sums of money to make up their works. But others say, that this acknowledgement was paid by the Egyptian Kings, not so much for keeping up the waters from drowning Egypt, as for fear the Habassine Emperors should divert the Stream, and so deprive that Country of the benefit of it. But I incline rather to the former. Here are also said to be some Lakes of that poisonous nature, that whosoever drinketh of them, doth either immediately fall mad, or else is troubled for long time with continual drowsiness. Of which thus Ovid, 
Aethiopesque Lacus, quos si quis faucibus hausit,  
Aut furit, aut patitur mirum gravitate soporem.  Which may be paraphrased in these words: 
Who doth not know the Aethiopian Lake?  
Of which whoever drinks, his thirst to slake,  
Either grows mad, or doth his soul oppress  
With an unheard of heavy drowsiness.   
To look upon the State as it stood in the former times, we find in it besides the Lakes and Rivers before mentioned, three capacious Bays, that is to say, Sinus Adulicus, 2 Sinus Avalites, and 3 Sinus Barbaricus; the two last neighboured by the now Countries of Aden and Quiloa. Havens of note, and Rhodes for shipping, there were five in all, viz 1 Bathus, or the deep Haven, 2 Dioscorum Portus, or the Haven of Castor and Pollux, 3 Theon Soterum, or the Haven of the Saviour-Gods, 4 Portus Evangeliorum, Gospel Port, or the Port of good News. And 5 Serapionis, the Port of Serapion, with a Promontory of the same name near adjoining to it. For other Promontories, which in so long a tract of Sea must needs be many; the principal were, 1 Basium, 2 Mnemium, 3 Dimetris, 4 Aspis, 5 Ara Amoris, 6 Colobon, 7 the Promontory of Saturn, 8 Mosylon, with a noted Empory of the same name, 9 Aromata, near another well frequented Empory of the same name also; and 10 that of Noticornu. Then for the Towns of greatest Trading, besides those last mentioned, we have, 1 Avalites, 2 Malao, 3 Mundi, 4 Cube, and 5 Acane, in the Bay of Avalites, 6 Opone in the Bay of Barbaria, 7 Essina, on the South of the Aequinoctial. Then for their Cities, we have amongst many others, the names of 1 Epitherias, by Ptolemy called Ptolemais Ferarum, 2 Adulis, and 3 Avalites, giving names unto their several Bays, 4 Rapta, the Metropolis of that part of this Country which was called Barbaria, lying along the shores of the Sinus Barbaricus; which as it taketh name from the River Raptus, upon which it is situate; so they do both agree in communicating it to the Promontory called Raptum. 5 Meroe, the chief City of the Isle so called. 6 Sabath in the Bay of Adutis, which possibly might be some Colony of the Sabaeans in Arabia Felix. 7 Coloe, by Pliny called Tolen, not far from the great Luke so named, 8 Cambusis by Ptolemy called Cambysi Aerarium, from some treasures laid up here by Cambyses the Persian, in his invasion of this Country. 9 Auxumi the chief City of the Auxumites, a most potent people of these parts; and the Seat Royal of the old Aethiopian Kings. 10 Napata, as Ptolemy; but by most others called Tanape, of old the residence of the Aethiopian Emperors, sacked and ruined by Petronius, precedent of Egypt. For when Candace (the Predecessor, I believe, of her whose Eunuch was baptised by Philip) had ransacked and wasted Egypt with fire and sword; Petronius, Lieutenant to Augustus, drove them home, harried the whole Country, put this City to the spoil; and to prevent the like inroads, fortified the Frontiers of his Province. Philaes, upon the borders of Egypt, garrisoned by the Romans till the time of Dioclesian, and by him abandoned. Of some of these, and others not here mentioned, we may have opportunity to speak more hereafter, in the survey of some of these particular Provinces, into which this Country stands divided at this present time.  
And for the Provinces comprehended at this time within the bounds and limits of this Aethiopia, as before laid down, they are said to make up 70 Kingdoms, most of them subject to the Abassine Emperor, the principal of which are, 1 Guagere, 2 Tigremaon, 3 Angote, 4 Amgata, 5 Damut, 6 Goijami, 7 Bagamedrum, 8 Barnagassum, 8 Adel, 9 Adea, 10 Dancali, 11 Dobas, 12 Fatigar, 13 Xoa, 14 Barus. Concerning which I must premise, that I find the Relations of them to be very imperfect, many times disagreeing, sometimes false: So that I must profess myself to be less satisfied in the description of this Country then in any of the rest which have gone before. Such as it is, I here present it to the Reader.  

1. GVAGERE.  
GVAGERE containeth only the Island of Meroe, an Island of much note and fame amongst the Ancients; made by the confluences of Nilus and Astaborus, the two chief Rivers of this Country. The length hereof 350 miles, the breadth 125. abundantly plentiful of Gold, Silver, Brass, Iron, Ivory, Precious stones, and an excellent kind of Mineral Salt. Well stored with most sorts of beasts both tame and wild; and of the last sort with Lions, Leopards, Rhinocerots, Elephants, and Dragons.  
The People are of the same nature and complexion with the rest; Mahometans by Religion, and the professed Enemies of the Abassine Emperor, against whom they do not only defend themselves by the advantages and benefit of their situation; but confederating with the Turks and Arabians, fall many times with great forces into his Dominions. It is said by Pliny of the Inhabitants of this Island, that twice a year, viz. When the Sun is in the 16th. degree of Taurus, and the 14th. of Leo, they have the Sun so perpendicular above their heads, that he casts no shadow. More anciently memorable for their long lives, than their great exploits, attaining ordinarily to 120 years of Age, and therefore called Macrobii by the old Greek Writers. The women said to be of such great breasts in the former times, that they did suckle their children over their shoulders (as some women are now said to do near the Cape of good Hope) the dug being bigger than the child. Of which thus Juvenal.  In Meroe crasso, majorem Infante mamillam. 
In Meroe the Mother's pap  
Is bigger than the child in lap.  
The Principal Cities hereof, 1 Meroe, which gave that name unto the Island, but took the same from Meroe, a sister of Cambyses King of Persia, or as Eusebius saith, from Merida, the mother of Chenephris, a King of Egypt. Josephus telleth us, that in former times it had been called by the name of Saba; on authority of whose mistake it hath been made the Regal City of that Queen of Sheba (the Queen of Egypt and Aethiopia as Joseph calleth her) who came to Solomon. An opinion so received amongst these Islanders, that the name of Meroe being laid by, they have restored the name of Saba to this City, as of greater eminence. The City said by some to contain about 5000 houses, great and sumptuous, the streets thereof to be large and spacious with Galleries on each side before the doors of their houses, where men walk safe from all extremities of heat or rain. Beautified with four chief Gates, (besides others of inferior note) built of Alabaster and Jasper, wrought with Antique works: the doors belonging to those Gates, of Cedar, curiously wrought; the ways which lead unto them, for the space of two Leagues beset with Palms, Orange-trees, Cedars, Cypresses, and others no less useful both for shade and fruit. In the place where the four streets going from these Gates, do cross each other, a goodly Arch erected upon stately Pillars, fairly wrought and gilded; with the Statue of S. Matthew, made of brass, but gilded, on the top thereof. Such it is said to be by some. Others think there is no such City; it may not be so beautiful, as those some have made it. The other Towns of note and name in it, in former times, 2 Sacolche, 3 Darorum Vicus, 4 Eser; of which we have little but the names.  
This Island was once a peculiar Kingdom; he being chosen for their King who excelled the rest in strength, person, or in stock of cattle; but those Kings so subject to their Priests, that by a Messenger or Herald they were sentenced by them unto death, and others advanced unto the throne; And thus it stood till one of the more provident Kings, forcing the Temple with his armed Soldiers, slew all these Priests; and freed himself and his Successors from so great a slavery. Afterwards made a Province of the Kingdom of Aethiopia; honoured for the most part with the Seat of those Kings, and memorable in those times for the Table of the Sun; which was a place near the City of Meroe, always furnished with variety of roasted meats, set there by night at the charge and command of the King (much taken as it seemeth with this costly vanity) and eaten in the day time by all that would. called therefore the Table of the Sun, because ascribed unto his bounty by the ignorant People. In the declining of this Kingdom, occasioned by the inundation of the Saracens and other Arabians, this Island was seized on by that People, and hath been ever since kept by them, together with the rest of the Country lying betwixt it and Egypt, in which are contained as some write, the Kingdom of Damote, Sua, and Jasculum, anciently belonging to this Empire, now dismembered from it: not much observable but for being a thoroughfare to great troops of Pilgrims, which every Lent pass by them out of the Abassine Dominions to the Sepulebre, and other like places in and near Jerusalem.   

2. TIGREMAON.  
TIGREMAON, hath on the north Guagere, and the River Marabo, by which last parted from Barnagasse; on the South the Realm of Angote; on the West, Nilus. On the East it is said to extend to the Red-Sea, but the Sea parts thereof possessed by the Turks, and the adjoining Coasts by the Moors and Arabians; the inland parts promiscuously inhabited, especially more towards the Sea, by Christians and Ethnics. Divided into many inferior Regions, the principal whereof 1. Sabaiu, 2 Torrates, 3 Balgada, so called perhaps from the chief Towns of them, and 4 Tigrai, the most large and ample of all these subordinate Provinces, as containing in it 17 great tracts under so many Lieutenants which rule all affairs both of Peace and War. The People black of colour, deformed of shape, in condition miserable, of conditions wicked. Some Rivers they have, but dried up in Summer; yet so that with a little digging they find water in them. Their chief City Caxumo, or Cassumo, supposed to be the same which Ptolemy calleth Auxume, Stephanus Axomites, Procopius Auzomide: by all of them esteemed the Metropolitan City of Ethiopia, and the Seat Royal of their Kings. In witness whereof are many ancient buildings yet remaining, some Pillars which resemble the Egyptian Obelisks, admirable for their height and workmanship: 60 foot high, and full of Characters or Letters in graven on them, which now none can read. The Aethiopian Auxumites, the most potent Nation of this Country, had their name from hence: more probably conceived to be the Regal Seat of Candace, (mentioned in the Acts) than any other of the Kingdom; and still affirmed to be honoured with the Court of their Emperors. Others I know have fixed his Court in Beimalechi, but I know not in what part to find it: some in a Royal Palace near that Lake of Zembre, built in the year 1570, by some European Architects sent hither by Francis Duke of Florence: and many will allow him no fixed Seat at all, but tell us that he moveth with his Tents in a Royal Progress from one place to another, which wand'ring Court, or moving City, is said to be no less than ten miles in compass, when the Pavilions which belong to it are disposed of into rank and order.  
This Kingdom is governed by a Prince of its own, but one who is an Homager and Tributary to the Abassine Emperor, to whom he payeth yearly 200 horses of the best Arabian breed, infinite quantities of silks, great store of Cotton-Wool, and abundance of Gold; but the determinate proportion, I have nowhere met with.   

3. ANGOTE.  
ANGOTE is bounded on the North with Tigremon, on the West with Nilus, on the South with the Kingdom of Amara, on the East with Dancali and Xoa. Indifferently compounded of hills and valleys, both extremely fertile, productive of the choicest fruits, and great herds of cattle. The people eat but once in 24 hours, and for the most part make that meal in the night; their diet raw Venison, or smoked Beef: the money most in use amongst them, Salt, Pepper, and Iron. Which custom of using Salt, pepper, and the like instead of money, was in former times amongst most people the only bartery or way of exchange. So in Homer, Glaucus golden Armour was valued at an hundred Kine, and Diomedes Armour at ten only. Afterward in Justice commutative, it was deemed convenient to have some common Judge, or valuation of the equality or inequality of goods: the invention of which the Jews attribute to Cain, the Grecians to Hermodice the wife of Midas, the Romans to Janus. It is called Nummus, or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because it was ordained by law: Pecunia, either because in elder times the chief of their wealth consisted in cattle, as now among the Irish; or from a Cow (Pecus) which was stamped on it: and Moneta, à monendo, as Suidas faith; because when the Romans stood in need of money, juno monebat, juno admonished them that they should use justice, and there should be no want of money. To this Goddess, Dea Pecunia, the Romans erected a Temple, and worshipped it in the figure of a Woman holding a pair of Scales in one hand, and a Cornucopia in the other: by the Poet called Regina Pecunia, and not unfitly, the greatness of her power considered.  
But to return again to Angote: I find not much spoken of the Country in the way of story; nor meet I with the names of any of their Towns or Cities; unless that 1 Angote itself, as also 2 Abugana, 3 Giannamora, two of the principal provinces of it, may possibly be so called from their principal Towns, as perhaps they are.   

4. AMARA.  
AMARA hath on the North Angote, on the South Damut, on the West it stretcheth towards the Nile, and on the East bounded with the Realm of Xoa. The Country very plain and champaign, little swelled with hills, sufficiently fruitful, and well stored with all forts of cattle. The chief City of it called Amara by the name of the Province, situate in the midst of the Empire; and though not much distant from the Aequator, if not plainly under it, yet blessed with such a temperate air, such a fruitful soil, such ravishing pleasures of all sorts, that some have taken (but mistaken) it for the place of Paradise: So strangely Heaven, Earth, Nature, and Humane industry have joined their helps together to enrich and beautify it.  
But that which is the greatest Ornament of this Province, and indeed of the whole Empire of AEthiopia, is the Mountain Amara, situate in a large and delightful Plain: the bottom of the Hill in circuit 90 miles, and a day's journey high; the Rock so smooth and even (but lesser and lesser towards the top) that no wall can be more evenly polished: the way up to it is cut out within the Rock, through which are divers holes forced to let in the light; so easy of ascent, that one may ride up with great pleasure, and in the midst of the Ascent a spacious Hall, as it were to rest in: the top itself is a large plain 20 leagues in circuit, compassed with an high wall, to the end that neither man nor beast fall down upon any chance; beautified towards the South with a rising hill, out of which issueth a sweet Spring, which watering the several palaces and gardens of it, uniteth itself into a Lake for the use of cattle: the Plain enriched with all sorts both of fruit and grain; adorned with two magnificent Monasteries, in each of which are founded 1500 Knights of the Order of S. Anthony, a Religious Militia; and honoured with 34 Palaces, in which the younger sons of the Emperor are continually enclosed, to avoid sedition: they enjoy there whatsoever is fit for delight or Princely education; and from hence some one of them, who is most hopeful, or best liked, is again brought out, if the Emperor die sonless, to be made successor. This mountain hath but one ascent up, as before was said, which is impregnably fortified; and was destinate to this use Anno 470, or thereabouts, by the Emperor Abraham Philip, advised hereunto, as he gave out, by an heavenly vision. In one of these Palaces is a famous Library, wherein are said to be many books, which with us are either in part or totally lost; as the Oracles of Enoch, with the mysteries which escaped the flood, being by him engraven on pillars; the whole works of Livy, and others. Which being heretofore translated by the Saracens into the Arabic tongue (when having plundered all the most famous Libraries of the East and West, they burned the Originals, out of a plot to make that language as renowned and as generally studied as the Greek or Latin) are said by some good fortune to be here preserved.   

5. DAMUT.  
DAMUT hath on the North Amara, on the West Bagamedrum, on the South Goiamy, and on the East the great Lake of Barcena, and some part of Zanguebar, one of the Provinces of Aethiopia Exterior. The Country plentifully furnished with Gold, Ginger, Grapes, Fruits, and Living creatures of all sorts. For none more famed then for their Slaves, sold in great numbers into Arabia, Egypt, Persia, India; and much esteemed by them who buy them, for their abilities in was, dexterity in business, but specially for their fidelity in all things which they undertake. For this cause placed in Offices of great trust and power by many of the Eastern Princes, who using a tyrannical Form of Government, and not daring to trust the sword into the hands of their Subjects, or to advance them unto places of Court or Counsel, do for the most part arm these Slaves, and trust them also with the conduct of their chief Affairs. A trust, in which they never falsified or failed in a true discharge, but when presuming of their power, and those Advantages which so great a trust and power had presented to them, they got into their hands the Kingdom of Bengala, and kept it many years in a succession of the Abassine Slaves, wherewith they still made up their numbers, till outed not long since by the Great Mongal.  
The Oxen of this Country are said to be near as great as Elephants, their horns so large that they serve as Tankards to carry, and as Barrels to keep either wine or water. Here is also said to be a kind of Unicorn, very fierce and wild, fashioned like an horse, but no bigger than an Ass; but we must think these Unicorns to be but Rhinocerots, or else we shall very much mistake the truth of the matter. And for the People (to go them both over once again) they are for the most part Gentiles; some Christians intermixed amongst them, who have sundry Monasteries.  
To this Kingdom belongeth the Principality of Couch, said to have more Gold in it then all Peru; a Mountain all of Gold, if the Friars say true. The People Gentiles, but the Prince not long since gained to the Christian ●aith, into which he was baptised by the Abbot or chief Governor of the Monasteries on the hill Amara: Gradeus the Emperor being his Godfather, by whom named Andrew. And here they have an hill of great height, and very difficult ascent, from the top whereof they use to cast headlong such of the Nobility, as by the Emperor's sentence are condemned to die. What Towns they have either in that Kingdom or this Principality, I am not able to resolve, unless, 1 Damut, and 2 Couch may be two, and the two most eminent, as giving name to those estates.   

6. GOIAMY.  
GOIAMY, hath on the North Damut, on the West Bagamedrum, on the South and East some Provinces of the other Aethiopia. The Country in the North parts full of Deserts and Rocky Mountains, in the residue plentifully furnished with all things necessary. Great store of Gold they find, but drossy; the people not knowing how to refine and purify it; or loath here (as in other places of this Empire) to take pains that way; for fear of drawing in the Turks and Arabians to partake of the booty.  
It containeth in it many Rivers or rather Torrents, which come tumbling down the hills with a mighty violence, and a terrible fall, making a noise not much inferior to a clap of thunder: and amongst other Lakes, two of special note, which for their greatness seem to be Seas; in which, as some report, Mermaids, and Tritons or Men-fish use to show themselves; and out of which it is thought by others that the Fountains of Nilus do arise; and both true alike. But past all doubt the Abassines themselves are of this opinion; and therefore in the stile of the Negaz (so they call their Emperor) he is termed King of Goiamy, with this addition, In which are found the Fountains of Nilus. Deceived alike in their opinion touching this particular, the Springs or Fountains of that River being further South: though possibly having lost himself in these vast Lakes, and issuing hence into a more contracted Channel, he may be said to have a second birth from hence, though not the first. And these I take to be the Lakes, which were discovered by the Romans in the time of Nero. Who following the design of some other great Potentates, Sesostris, Cambyses, Alexander and Philadelphus, in discovering the true Original of this famous River, employed two Centurions in that service; who aided in it by the then King of the Aethiopians, are said to have come at last unto certain great Marshes (most probably the lower and sedgy parts of these Lakes now mentioned) of whose extent the Inhabitants themselves were ignorant; nor possible to be discovered any further, the weeds having so overgrown the water, that there was no further passage to be made by boat, and less by wading.  
Betwixt this Country and Damut, which we last passed thorough, is said to be a Province of Amazons, warlike and fierce, and very expert at the Bow; whose Queen knoweth no man, and by the rest honoured as a Goddess. These, they say, were first instituted by the Queen of Saba: as true, as that which some have added of the Phoenix visible in this Country, of Griffons, and of Fowls so big that they make a shadow like a Cloud. Which strange reports I have here added, to supply the defect of Towns and Cities of which I meet not with so much as the naked names; as undiscovered places in our Maps and Charts, are filled up with Monsters.   

7. BAGAMEDRUM.  
BAGAMEDRUM, or SAGAMEDRUM (for I find both names) lieth on the West of Goiamy, betwixt the Northern parts thereof, and the River Nilus: and keeping all along the course of that River, as far as Guagere or Meroe, encountreth with the Southern point of Barnagasso. Some do extend it also beyond that Island, but making the whole length thereof but 600 miles, do confate themselves. The greatest Province of this Empire it may probably be, cateris hujus AEthiopiae amplissimum, as they say it is; but if extended the whole length of it, it must be 1500 miles, not 600 only.  
The Country plentiful in Mines of the purest Silver, which they cannot draw thence but by fire, which makes it run like long rods or Ropes of Mettle. And yet as large, and wealthy as they say it is, I am more to seek for Towns and rich Cities in it, then in the Deserts of Libya, or the sands of Arabia. Merchants and Travellers for the most part go no further than the Sea coasts of the Country, of which they give us more exact and full informations, knowing but little of the Inlands; and of the Natives such as have traveled abroad into other Kingdoms, rude and ignorant men, know little more of their own Empire, than the place they lived in. Or probably their best Cities not containing above 2000 houses, few of them so many, and those patched up of thatch, dirt, and hurdles (unless some of the Nobility or wealtheir Merchant's are provided better) they may have no great reason to speak much of them; or to acquaint us with the names of such sorry places, as are indeed not worth the naming. Which I conceive to be the true condition of most or all the Inland Towns in this large Estate.   

8. BARNAGASSO.  
BARNAGNES or BARNAGASSUM, hath on the West Guagere, or the Isle of Meroe; on the South-west as some say, a point of Bogamedrum; on the South Dangali, and Adel; on the East, the Red Sea, or Bay of Arabia; on the North it stretcheth towards Egypt, the Kingdoms of Jasculum and Sua, possessed by the Mahometans, being interposed.  
The Country very sertile, full of Towns and Villages, and exceedingly well stored with pleasant Riverets, besides the neighbourhood of the Red Sea on the one side, Nile and Abanhi on the other. Remarkable for a Mountain in the Western part of it, which being spacious in the beginning groweth straight by little and little, and then enlargeth itself again to a League in circuit. On the top thereof a Royal Palace, a Church, a Monastery, and two very large Cisterns, with a piece of ground able to entertain and keep 500 men. To be ascended one way only, and that but to a certain mark; to which being come, they are drawn up with Cords and Baskets to the top of all; not to be took by force, by reason of the impossibility of ascent; nor by long siege, or any extremity of Family, in regard it yields provision enough to maintain itself. Accounted therefore the chief Hold of all this Province against Turks and Moors.  
It containeth besides Barnagasso itself, the two Provinces of Canfila, and Dafila; though rather subject to the Governor or Viceroy of it, than parts and members of the same. Towns of most moment in the whole, I Beroa, or Barua, conceived by some to be the Colony of Ptolemy, the Residence of the Vice Roy, situate on a pleasant and fish full River. 2 Zameta, honoured sometimes also with the Vice Royes' presence; but rather as a retiring place in times of leisure, than a Town of strength. 3 Suachen situate in an Hand of the Red Sea, or Bay of Arabia, one of the richest Cities of the Eastern parts and beautified with a goodly and capacious Haven, secured by nature from all storms, or smooth tides, sure Anchorage, and able to receive 300 great ships of burden. Situate in a little Island, the whole circumference whereof it taketh up, insomuch that vessels of all sorts, both within the Haven and without, do usually unlade themselves at the doors of the Merchants, to which the Ship beaks serve for bridges. A wealthy and well traded Town both by Sea and Land, to which from the more in land parts of the Abassine Empire the Mountains open a safe passage for the carriage and re carriage of their commodities. Taken by the Turks long since with all the rest of the Country lying betwixt it and Egypt, and made the seat of a Turkish Beglerbeg or Bassa, whom in imitation of the Romans, they call the Beglerbeg of Abassia; as if by the possession of this small part of that Empire, they would entitle the Grand Signior unto all the rest. The Town conceived by some to be that which Ptolemy calleth Ostium Sabasticum, or rather Sabaiticum, as called by Strabo. Others will have it to be the Ptolomais Ferarum, or the Epitherias, as Pliny calleth it of the Ancient Writers. And some again will have it to be the Succhaes of Pliny, by whom reckoned among the Cities of the Troglodytes (who are called Succhaei in the Scriptures, as before was noted) in whose part of the Country it is seated, and to which name it hath some resemblance. 4 Bisam, not far from Erocco, remarkable for a Monastery situate on the top of an high Rock environed with dreadful Precipices upon every side; in which live 3000 Monks, eating by three and three together, in a common refectory. this being the chief of six others in this Province of Barnagasso, the furthest not above 30 miles distant. For maintenance of whom, and a great number of poor Children which they daily feed, besides the Tithes of all the Mountain in which it standeth (fruitful and rich, and at least 30 miles in compass) they have many good Farms at the foot of the said Mountain, and an hundred small Villages appertaining to them, out of which they raise yearly great provision of Corn, and above 2000 head of Catteil; their Revenues out of Tigremaon being reckoned in. A Revenne able to maintain them and their Hospitality in regard their Novices or young Monks are sent abroad to earn their living, or to manure their Lands, and attend the husbandry of the house: the elder only being found at the charge of the Monastery, though all alike bound to the performance of Religious Offices. 5 Erocco another noted Port on the Red Sea or Bay of Arabia, to which a passage openeth thorough the Streits of the Mountains, as it doth to Suachen; conceived to be the Adulis of Ptolemy, the Aduliton of Pliny: Now in possession of the Turks, or at their command, 6 Santar, 7 Giabel, 8 Laccari, and 9 Abarach; these four last in the Province of Dafila.  
This Country at the present, and for long time past, is subject both to the Great Neguz, or the Frestegian of Aethiopia, and the Grand-Signeur of the Turks; naturally subject to the one, and tributary to the other. Governed by a King of their own, whom they call Barnagassus, by the name of his Province, a Vassal and Homager to the Aethiopian; to whom he payeth the yearly tribute of 150, of the best breed of Horses, besides some quantities of Silk, and some other commodities: but so ill neighboured by the Turks, that he is fain to pay also to the Beglerbeg or Bassa a resident at Suachen, 1000 Ounces of Gold yearly for a composition For the Turks having by the conquest of Egypt made themselves masters of those Countries towards Aethiopia, which formerly were allied to, or confederate with the Mamaluck Sultan's; within short time (viz. An. 1558.) possessed themselves also of the town of Suachen and the parts adjoining; made it the residence of one of their Beglerbegs or Bassa's, and gave him the title of Beglerbeg of Abassia, as before was said: Forgot by the industrious Collector of the Turkish History, in his enumeration of the Beglerbegs or Bassas of afric. To this they added not long after all the rest of the Sea coasts, and the Port of Erocco; and not content therewith, after some short breathing made a further inroad; in which they did so waste the Country, that in the end they compelled the Barnagassian (not being aided by the Neguz) to this Composition.   

9 DANGALI, & 10. DOBAS.  
SOuth and South east of Barnagasso, lie the two Kingdoms of DANGALI and DOBAS; that of Dangali bordering on the Red Sea, the other more within the Land: both of them held by the Mahometans or Arabian Moors; both in continual enmity with the Abassine Emperors; and both of like nature in regard of the soil and people.  
DANGALI hath on the North Barnagasso, on the South some part of the Kingdom of Adel; on the East the Red-Sea or Gulf of Arabia, on the West Dobas before mentioned. It taketh upsome part of the Arabic Bay within the Streits of Babelmandel; and without those Streits, the greatest part of that spacious Bay which anciently was called Sinus Avaliticus, as far as to the Promontory then called Mosylon, (neighboured by a noted Emporie of the same) now the Cape of Docono; near unto which the Sea makes a little Gulf, and suddenly streitneth itself again, so as the Channel cannot be above ten or twelve leagues broad; And in this Channel are five or six Lands which hinder the passage; so as Sailors must have good experience, to avoid the Rocks which lie near those Lands.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1 Bebul, or Babel, which gives name to the Streits of Babel Mandel; a narnow Frith, opening out of the Bay of Arabia into the Aethiopian Ocean. 2 Vella, a well-frequented Port, conceived to be the same which Strabo calleth Antiphila; not found by that name in Ptolemy. 3 Zagnani, and 4 Zama, in a Province of this Kingdom called Lacca. 5 Docano, near the Cape so called, and therefore probably the Mosylon of the ancient Writers. 6 Dangali, not far from the Seaside, which gives name to the Kingdom. Nothing else memorable of this Kingdom, but that there are in it two great Lakes, wherein live Crocodiles, as in Nilus.  
On the South-west of Dangali lieth the Realm of DOBAS, extended on the West to the borders of Angote. The Country large, containing twelve, or as some say, 24 several Presectures: Of so good Pasturage, that the Kine hereof are of greater size then in other places, and those for number not easily matched in all this Empire. The people such professed Enemies of the Christian faith, that they suffer not any man to marry, till he hath killed twelve Christians. Some reckon them for Tributaries to the Prete, or Negus; but it is only when they list: so far from being Contributioners towards the support of his estate, that they take from him what they can. The chief of their towns, 1 Doba, which gives name to the whole kingdom. 2 baly, upon the same River, but more near the head, on which Dobas standeth.   

11. ADEL.  
ADEL is bounded on the North with some parts of Dangali and the Red Sea; on the South with Adea; on the East with the Red-Sea, and the Indian or Arabian Ocean; on the West with Fatigar; extended on the Sea coast from the Cape of Docono, to the Cape of Guardasu, conceived most probably to be the Ardmata of Ptolemy, a noted Promontory in his time.  
The Country plentiful of Flesh, Honey, Wax, Corn, Gold and Ivory; great flocks of Sheep, and many of those Sheep of such burdensome Fleeces, that their tails weigh 25 pounds; some Kine they have, which have horns like a Stag; others but one horn only, and that in the forehead, about a foot and an half long, but bending backwards. The People inhabiting on the Sea coasts, are of Arabian parentage, and of the Mahometan religion; those towards the Inland Countries, of the old Aethhiopic race, and wholly Gentiles.  
Chief towns hereof, 1 Zeila, a noted Port town, situate in or near the place where Ptolemy placeth Avalites; stored with variety of merchandise, and yielding some representation of Antiquity in the building thereof, being lime and stone, materials not much used amongst them in these later times. Of great both beauty and esteem, till the year 1516. when sacked and burnt by the Portugals; before that time the most noted Emporie of all Aethiopia for the Indian trade. 2 Barbora, seated on the same Sea-coast, well frequented by Merchants, and possibly may be the Mundi or Malao of Ptolemy; neighboured by a lofty Promontory, which they call Mount Fellez. 3 Met, another of the Sea-towns near the Cape of Guardafuni, supposed to be the Acane of the Ancient writers. 4 Assam, 5 Selir, and 6 Bidar, on the Seacoasts also. 7 Arar, the principal of the Kingdom, more within the Land and about 38 Leagues from Zeila.  
This Country formerly a member of the Aethiopian Empire, is of late grown to so great strength and reputation, that the Kings hereof have freed themselves from all signs of subjection to that Crown, and think themselves the mightier Princes of the two. Advanced to this repute and power by Gradogna, or Guadameth, who reigned here in the year 1540 by whom Clandius the Neguz was so overlaid, and his Country so destroyed by continual incursions, that he was forced to abandon his Frontiers, retire himself into the heart of his Estates, and crave aid of the Portugals. And though by their assistance and the help of their shot, he was twice victorious; yet in the third battle he was vanquished, and in the fourth An 1559 slain upon the place. This King accounted for a Saint by the Moors and Saracens, in regard of his continual wars against the Christians, did so establish the affairs of his little Kingdom, and left it so well settled unto his successors, that the Abassine Emperor hath ever since left it out of his Titles; though many other of those small Kingdoms are reckoned in the Imperial stile, in which he hath as little power as he hath in this. It is said also, that in the battle wherein Claudius was slain, and his Army routed, consisting of 60000 Foot and 500 Horse of his own Subjects, besides the Portugals: the King of Adel got into his possession the greatest mass of Coin and treasure that was ever seen. A victory obtained as well by policy as force; the Abassines being seldom fought with, or their Country wasted and depopulated by the Kings of Adel, till by the strict observance of their Lenten Fast, they were grown so weak, that they were not able to discharge their domestic businesses, and therefore most unable to resist a prevailing Enemy.   

12. ADEA.  
ADEA or ABEX, as some call it, hath on the North the Kingdom of Adel, on the South and West some parts of the Abassine Empire, on the East the Sea. Extended from the Cape of Guardafu, where it joineth with Adel, along the greatest part of the Bay, called of old Sinus Barbaricus; of the reason of which name hereafter.  
The Country plentifully fertile, shaded with Woods and spacious Forests, and those Woods liberally furnished both with Fruits and cattle; the Champagn-Country not less fruitful in Wheat, Barley, and other necessaries, besides a great store of Horses. The people of an Olive-colour, in some places more inclined to black: Not clothed but from the girdle downward; nor very well armed in time of war, but with poisoned Arrows; Mahometans in Religion, Arabians by original extraction, whose language they retain with some little difference in pronunciation.  
Places of most observation in it, 1. Adea. which gives name to the whole Kingdom, because the old residence of the Kings. 2 Carfur upon the Sea-coast sometimes called Opone, than a noted Emporie, and situate near the Promontory called Zingis extrema. 3. Azun, and 4 Zazelle, supposed to be the Essina and Tonica of the Ancient writers. 5 Magadazo, a petit Kingdom of itself: a wealthy and well traded Town, situate in a fruitful and delightful soul, and neighboured by a safe and capacious Haven; much traded by the Portugals, who bring from Ada in Arabia Felix, and Cambaia in India, their Spices, Silks, and other Indian commodities, which here they batter and exchange for Honey, Wax, Gold, and Abassine Slaves, which last they value as the chiefest merchandise which this Country yieldeth. First built by some Arabian Moors, who flying from the King of Laza their mortal enemy, under the conduct of seven brethren, came into these parts, where they founded this City, and that of Brava in the Province of Barus, of which more hereafter.  
The Inhabitants are originally of Arabia, as before was said; who many hundred years ago became Lords of all the Seacoasts of both Aethiopia's, as far as to the Cape does Corrientes, which is somewhat to the South of the Tropic of Capricorn. The Kings hereof in former times, Vassals to the Abassine Emperor, to whom they paid an yearly tribute; this Kingdom still remaining amongst his titles: but since the taking of Magadazo, made so obnoxious to the power and command of the Portugals, that the Estate of the Abassine in it is but merely titular.   

13. FATIGAR, & 14. XOA.  
FATIGAR hath on the East Adel, and some part of Adea: on the West the little Realm of Xoa; on the South Barus, another Province of this Empire. The Country Champagne, sufficently fruit full of Corn and cattle, not meanly furnished with pleasant and delicious fruits. Most memorable for a Lake of twelve miles' compass, on the top of a Mountain, well stored with Fish; from whence and from the rest of the Mountain issue many Rivers, which much every the valleys and fields adjoining. The chief Town hereof, (if any one be better than other) I conceive to be Fatigar, giving this name unto the Kingdom, or so called from it.  
Westward of Fatigar, lieth the little Realm of XOA bordering West on Amara, Southward upon Damut; furnished with great store of Corn and cattle, but not much beautified with Towns of any consideration. Nothing observable in the History or Description of it, but that together with Fatigar and others of the midland Provinces, it hath continued constant in obedience to the Abassine Emperors; notwithstanding all those misadventures, which have happened to that Empire in these later days.   

15. BARUS.  
ON the South East of Adea lieth the Province of BARUS, extended Eastward to some part of Sinus Barbaricus; and touching at the Western point upon that of Fatigar. The soil and People much of the same condition with the rest of Aethiopia. Mahometans upon the Shores, but Christians for the generality in the midland parts. Those Christians subject (as the rest) to the Abassine Emperor; but he hath neither place of strength, or consideration in all the Country; those of most note, viz. 1 Brava, once a Free Town, and governed after the manner of a Commonwealth by twelve Aldermen or Common Counsellors, descended from the seven Arabian Brethren by whom first built; the founders of Magadora also, as before was said. But now, together with 2 Pate, and 3 Gogia, all upon the Sea, made subject to the Portugals; by whom taken under the Conduct of Tristran de Cugna.  
Besides these, there are many other Kingdoms mustered in the Style Imperial, (the swelling vanity whereof we shall see anon) but of so little observation in the course of business, and so obscure in the esteem of such as have spoken of them, that it is enough to tell you where to find their names: and having found their names, to bid you not to seek for more, there being nothing else in them which is worth the knowing.  
As for the body aggregated of these several Members, it was first planted, as is noted and proved elsewhere, by Ludim the son of Mizraim and the Nephew of Cham: from whence this Nation in the Scripture have the name of Ludim. A nation not much taken notice of in the first Ages of time, but by an Error of Josephus: who giving too much credit to some Talmudical Tales, or willing to advance the reputation of the Jews to the highest pitch, telleth us a story how the Aethiopians invaded and endangered Egypt, how they were beaten back by Moses; the City of Meroe besieged and taken by him, or rather delivered to his hands by Tharbis the daughter of the King who had fallen in love with him, and on the betraying of the City was married to him. All this not only questioned but rejected by discerning men as a Jewish Fable that hath no ground to stand upon in true Antiquity. With little better fortune, and as little truth do the Aethiopians tell the story of their own Original. By whom we are informed that Chus the son of Cham first reigned in this Aethiopia, to whom succeeded his son Regma, and next after Dedan: that from the death of Dedan till the reign of Aruch (the certain time whereof they tell not) the People lived in Caves and holes digged under the ground, as did the Troglodytes an ancient Nation of this Country in the times long after: that Arac first built the City of Aruma, and by that pattern taught them the use of Towns and Cities. But the main part of the Legend is the story of Maqueda a Queen hereof, and the fourth from Aruch, whom they will have to be the Queen of Sheba, famous in both Testaments, for the Royal Visit which she bestowed upon Solomon. Of whom they tell us, that being got with child by Solomon when she was in his Court, she was delivered of a Son, whom she caused to be called Melech, or Melilech, and at the age of 20 years to be sent to his Father. By whom instructed in the Law, and circumcised, and called by the name of David, he was returned into his Country, with Azarias' the son of Zadok the Priest, who had stolen the two Tables of the Law and carried them with him into Aethiopia; where the old Queen resigned the Empire to her son. His Successors afterwards called David, till Indion (as they call him) the Eunuch of Queen Candace returning home baptised the young Prince by the name of Philip. This is the substance of the Legend, as related by them in their own Chronicles (but we know that they are no Gospel.) That Chus planted in Arabia, hath been shown already, as also what absurdities must needs arise from supposing the Land of Chus to be this Aethiopia. Therefore most probable it is that this Country was first peopled by the children of Ludim, as before was said. To whom the Abassenes coming out of Arabia Felix, might be after added: and in some tract of time be of such great power, as to put their name upon the Country. For that the Abassenes were originally an Arabian People, appeareth by Stephanus one of the old Chorographers, who out of Vranius (An ancienter Author than himself) hath told us this, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. Another Stephanus, and he a very learned Grammarian and Lexicographer, hath as he thinks decided the controversy, by making Sheba the son of Chus the Progenitor of the Arabians; and Sheba the son of Regma the Father of the Aethiopians; and for this cause hath fitted us with this pretty Criticism, that Sheba when it is written with 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Samech must be rendered AEthiopia; and Arabia when writ with 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Shin. But this by no means will be found to agree the controversy: it being evidently clear that both Sheba the son of Chus, and Sheba the son of Regma were originally settled in Arabia, as there hath been shown; though I deny not but that some of the Posterity of Chus in those elder time, (before the coming over of the Abasine nations) might either out of too much populosity or desire of change, cross over the Arabian Gulf and take up such parts of this Country as the Ludims had not fully peopled, with whom conjunct at last, both in name and government. And as for Maynedu (supposing that to be her name) she was doubtless Queen of the Sabaeans in Arabia Felix; not of the Aethiopians, in the waste of afric. For besides the longsomness of the way, too much for a Woman and a Queen to travel, it is very probable that the Son of Solomon by this Lady would never have suffered Egypt to have lain in quiet, whilst Sesac the King thereof made war upon Rehoboam, the Son of Solomon also, and so by consequence his half Brother: But to leave these uncertain Fables, the first action of moment which we meet with in unquestioned Story, touching these Aethiopians, is that which happened betwixt them and Cambyses the Persian Monarch; who having by force of Arms united Egypt to Persia, conceived it to be worth his labour to unite Ethiopia unto Egypt also: Upon this Resolution he sent Ambassadors to that King, to search into the passages of his Country, and discover his strengths; and by them sent a Tun of wine, some Bracelets, a Purple habit, and a Box of sweet ointments to present him with. Which Presents being tendered to him, he looked upon the Unguents and the Purple Robe as too slight and effeminate: the Bracelets he conceived to be bonds or fetters, and openly laughed at them, as too weak to hold in a Prisoner: but with the Wine he was very well pleased, and sorrowed that his Country yielded no such liquor. But understanding well enough what this visit aimed at, he gave the Ambassadors at their parting (amongst other gifts) an Aethiopian Bow of great length and strength, requiring them to tell their Master, that until every Persian could bend that Bow (the Aethiopian Bows being a foot longer than the Persian, as before was noted) it would be no safe warring upon his Dominions; and that he had good cause to thank the Gods for giving the Aethiopians so contented minds, as not to think of conquering their Neighbours kingdoms. Lying far off, and parted from Egypt by vast mountains, we find then not looked after by the Macedonians. Nor had the Romans meddled with them, had they not been provoked by Candace, the Queen hereof, during the Empire of Augustus: who having made a War on Egypt, was by Petronius, Governor of that Province, brought to such conformity, that she was fain to sue for peace, and to purchase it with the loss of some part of her Country. To keep them quiet for the future, Philae an Aethiopian City, but on the borders of Egypt, is made a Garrison by the Romans, and the seat of their Deputy for these parts: held by them till the Empire of Dicclesian, and by him abandoned, because the charge of keeping it did exceed the profit. After this, growing into power and reputation, the Aethopian Kings were reckoned of as friends to the Roman Empire; in so much as Justinian sent unto Helistheus, as Justin his Successor did unto Archetas, the then Kings of this Country, to crave their brotherly assistance against the Persians.  
Of their Conversion to the Faith in the reign of a second Candace (unless as Pliny thinketh, Candace was the general name of all their Queens) we have spoke already. To which the Aethiopians add, that after the baptising of their first Philip (the son of that Candace) by the hands of the Eunuch, the Emperor's succeeding had the name of Philip. Till the religious life of John, a Cotemporary of the Emperor Constans, honoured as a Saint after his decease, made them take his name. Some building upon this Tradition, have to the name of John prefixed that of Presbyter, because (as they affirm) he executeth as well the Sacerdotal as the Regal Office; Rex idem hominum Divumque Sacerdos; the very Anius of the Poet: And this so commonly received, that he is vulgarly called by the name of Prester John, and his estate the Empire of Prester John; with no truth at all. Others more probably conceive, that this vulgar name of Prester-John, is but a corruption or mistake for Praetegian or Precious John; and that the word Prete (by which his Subjects call him) importeth no less. And yet I more incline to those, who finding that the word Prestegan signifieth an Apostle, in the Persian tongue, and Prestigani, an Apostlical man: do thereupon infer● that the title of Padescha Prestigiani, an Apostolic King, was given unto him for the Orthodoxy of his belief, which not being understood by some, instead of Prestegian, they have made Priest John, in Latin Presbyter Johannes; as by a like mistake, one Pregent (or Pragian as the French pronounce it) commander of some Galleys under Lewis the 12. was by the English of those times called Prior John. Prestegian then, not Priest-John, is his proper adjunct; contractedly, but commonly called the Prete by the Modern French who usually leave out s before a consonant. Their Empire greater heretofore, than it is at the present, shrewdly impaired of late times by the Turks and Arabians: of which the first have taken from him all his Countries from the Isle of Meroe unto Egypt; with all the Seacoasts of Barnagasso; the later as much encroaching on them on the rest of the Maritine parts of his Dominions. But from none have they suffered more than the Kings of Adel, who have divers times laid waste their Country, discomfited some of them in the open Field, and in the year 1558. slain their King in battle. Not cured of those wounds to this very day. For Adam, who succeeded Claudius that was slain in battle, was so far from being able to revenge the death of his Predecessor, that being suspected to incline to Mahometanism, he was defeated by the under king of Barnagasso. Since which time they have so languished by intestine dissensions, that though Alexander the third (if there were ever such a King, which I find much doubted) is said to have settled his affairs by the aid of the Portugals; and that some strange successes have been since reported of a later Emperor; yet the truth is, that the estate hereof hath been so imbroiled in civil Wars, and so many of their Emperors successively murdered, that the power and reputation of it is exceedingly weakened, and the Country made a prey to impuissant Enemies. For in the year, Anno 1603. the Emperor Melech Gogad, succeeding in the throne by the deposition and imprisonment of his Predecessor (under colour of Bastardy) was not long after slain by one Zezelezeus, and James or Jacob advanced unto the Empire: James not long after vanquished and slain by one Sazinosius; and he so terribly disquieted with Treasons and Conspiracies, that in the year 1607 he was fain to sue for aid to the King of Spain, and tender a submission of the Abossine Churches to the Pope of Rome. But the spirit of Rebellion being conjured up, could not so easily be laid down (though there followed a long calm between) but that it broke out again within few years past (that is to say, about the year 1648) more violently than it did before: a powerful Rebel starting up, who dispossessed the Prete of almost all his Kingdoms, and reduced the issue of the war unto one Town only, in which he had besieged his person. And in all probability he had got that too, and with that the Empire had not a French man then living in the Country, found means to put himself into it; who training the people of the place to the use of Arms (according to the way of Europe) made a sally out upon the Enemy, routed him, and so raised the siege, and by that means preserved the Emperor and the Empire from most certain ruin.  
Yet notwithstanding these disasters, these later Emperors have still preserved their majesty amongst their Subjects, whom they hold in servitude enough, though they keep not such a distance as in former Ages, when the Prete was honoured as a God, and used to show himself but thrice in a year, viz. on Christmas, Easter, and Holirood day: by which retiredness it was thought that he made his presence more acceptable; some holding nothing to be more derogatory from the Majesty of a King, then to make himself too common an object for the eye of the vulgar. The like kind of state was once kept by those Kings of France of the first Merovignian line; who withdrawing themselves from all public affairs; used only to show themselves (as we have already said) on May-day. A greater retiredness than this, was that which Valleda Queen of the Tencteri (a people of the Rhine) is reported by Tacitus to have used; for when the rest of the Germans then in arms, sent Ambassadors to her to inform her of their victory against the Romans, they were prohibited either to speak to her or to see her; Arcebantur aspectu, quo venerationis plus inesset. Such a keeping of state, the politic Prince Tiberius used, when the Germane legions mutined; for he daigned not himself to see them pacified, but sent his son; the reason was, quia majestati major è longinquo reverentia And no doubt the same keeping of distance swayed much with him, when he forsook Rome, and kept Court privately at Caprea: though I deny not, but a propension to follow his unnatural pleasures the more securely, together with his deformities on his face, had also their powers upon his resolutior.  
The title of this great and mighty Emperor, (but neither so great or mighty in power as in title) runneth thus: N. N. Supreme of his Kingdoms, and the Beloved of GOD, the Pillar of Faith, sprung from the stock of Judah, the son of David, the son of Solomon, the son of the Column of Zion, the son of the seed of Jacob, the son of the hand of Mary, the son of Nahu after the flesh, the son of S. Peter and Paul after the spirit; Emperor of the higher and lesser Aethiopia, and of the most mighty Kingdoms, Dominions, and Countries of Xoa, Goa, Caffares, Fatigar, Angotae, Balignazo, Adea, Vangne, Goyami, where are the fountains of Nile, Amara, Banguamedron, Ambea, Vangucum, Tigremaon, Sabaim, the birthplace of the Queen of Saba, Bernagassum; and Lord of all the Regions unto the confines of Egypt.  
It seemeth by this title, that these Aethiopian Emperors, however the truth of story goeth, conceive themselves to be sprung from Solomon, & Maqueda (or Nizaule as joseph nameth her) the Queen of the South. For better confirmation whereof, it is by some reported, that the Arms of this Kingdom are the same with those of the Tribe of judae, which are a Lion rampant in a field Or: and that the Motto of them is to this effect, viz. The Lion of the Tribe of Judah shall overcome. But Bara, an expert Herald, giveth this Prince no such Coat-armour; his Arms, according to him, being Luna, a cross portate Mars, charged with a crucifix Sol, between two scourges of the second. And yet not altogether to discredit the old Tradition, so generally received amongst them, it may be probable enough, that when the Abassens came into Aethiopia, some of the Sabaeans their next neighbours came along for company, and amongst them some of the Royal race of the Queen of Sheba; with some of which, by reason of their great Nobility, some of the Abassine Emperors might think fit to match. Nor is it any matter of impossibility, but that Solomon (considering his course of life) might get a son upon the body of that Queen, from whom the Aethiopian Princes might be thus descended.  
As for the Government of these Emperors, it is absolutely Regal, or to say better, perfectly Despotical: the people being treated by them more like slaves than subjects; taking away Sign●uries, and giving them unto whom he pleaseth, the deprived party not daring to express the least discontent. By them so reverenced, that it was anciently a custom, if the King were blind, or lame, or maimed, for the Subject to inflict on his own body the like impression: still had in so much honour by the greatest Subject, that at his bare name they bow their bodies, and touch the ground with one of their fingers; and reverence his Pavilion as they pass by, though he be not in it. He on the other side seldom appeareth to his Subjects but with his Crown upon his head, and a Silver Crucifix in his hand; his face then covered with a piece of Watchet-Taffata, which he lifteth up and putteth down, according as he is minded to grace the party with whom he talketh.  
As for his Forces and Revenues, some of our late Observations speak nothing but wonders. Some say his Empire reacheth from the Red Sea to the Atlantic Ocean, and from one Tropic to the other: Some, that he is of so great Riches, that he is able to purchase a moiety of all the world, if it were to be sol; others, that he is able to raise for any present service a million of men; And he himself is said to have offered to the Portugals one million of money, and another of men, if they would employ it in a war against the Infidels. But notwithstanding these great brags, I cannot think this Emperor to be such a Miracle as some of these Reports have made of him: For they that speak most knowingly of his Revenues, affirm that the ordinary expenses of his Court and Army being discharged, he coffereth up but three millions of Crowns per annum, which is no great matter; and upon extraordinary emergencies of war and trouble, will be easily wasted, or brought into a narrower compass. And yet to make up this Revenue, besides the Crown Lands or Demain Imperial. he layeth some Tax or other upon every house, receiveth the tenth of all that is digged out of their Mines, and levieth on the great Lords the Revenue of any one of their Towns, which he pleaseth to choose, so it be not that in which the Lords themselves inhabit.  
This, though it be no great Intrado, considering the large extent of his Dominions, and form of his Government, yet it is greater in proportion then his Forces are. For notwithstanding the report of Alvarez, and his own great brag of raising a million of men for present service; it is well known that he was never able to advance half that number in his greatest necessity; and amongst those whom he can raise, there are but few who can deserve the name of Soldiers: for the people being poor and beggarly, and brought up in a servile and base condition, are naturally destitute of that courage and alacrity of spirit which should be in men professing Arms, or fit for noble undertake; and are besides, on certain jealousies of State, so disused from war, that they know not how to use their weapons when there is occasion. So that for my part I consider him as a weak and impuissant Prince, of no authority or influence out of his Dominions; nor able to defend himself from the continual incursions of his neighbours (some of them mean and petit Princess) which lie nearest to him. Land-locked on every side from traffic and commerce with the Seas, encroached upon Northward by the Turks; confronted on the West by the King of Borneo, who possesseth not a tenth part of the Land of Negroes; on the East continually bearded and baffled by the King of Adel, sometimes a Vassal of his own; and on the South with the Gallae a barbarous Nation of the other Aethiopia, who lay all waste before them wheresoever they come; and finally in these later times by his own Subjects also. Injuries not to be endured, had he power to help it.  
But the chief Stay of this Estate, is an Order of Knighthood entitled by the name of S. Antony, to which every Father that is of the Degree of a Gentleman is to destinate one of his sons, if he have above two, but not the eldest. And out of these they cull about 12000 Horse, which are to be the standing Guard of the Emperor's person: their Oath is, To defend the Frontiers of the Empire, to preserve Religion, and to make head against the Enemies of the Faith. The Abbats of this Order (for it is partly Religious, partly Military) live in the Mountain of Amara; where they have two Monasteries, as well for the training up of these Knights in the time of their youth, as their retirement when grown old and discharged from service.   
And so much for Aethiopia Superior.   

Of AETHIOPIA INFERIOR.  
AETHIOPIA INFERIOR is bounded on the East with the Red-Sea (that name extending from the bottom of the Gulf of Arabia to the Southern Ocean) on the West with the Aethhiopic Ocean; on the North with Terra Nigritarum, and the higher Aethiopia; and on the South, where it endeth in a point or Conus, with the Main Ocean parting it from the Southern undiscovered Continent.  
It was called Aethiopia for the reason before delivered. Inferior was added for distinctions sake, because somewhat of a lower situation than the other is. By Ptolemy called Aethiopia Interior, because lying more within the Land, and remote from knowledge then the nearer did: and by late Writers for the contrary reason called Aethiopia Exterior, because situate without and beyond the other.  
It comprehendeth all Ptolemy's Aethiopia Interior, part of his Aethiopia Sub Aegypto, and all those Lands to him unknown. which he giveth us under the name of Terra Incognita. The Country so little discovered in those elder times, that we find mention only of some eminent Mountains, as 1. Canchis. 2. Lon. 3. Zipha. 4. Barditis. 5. Moschi, one only Region known by name, called Agisimba, and of that nothing but the name, and that it was a Province of a large extent. The people not distinguished here, as in other places, by their Tribes and Families; but only by their kind of diet; some of them being called Anthropophagis, from their eating of men, and others Ichthyophagi from their living on fish. Of these the first inhabiteth on the Eastern shores, near the Bay of Barbaria; the principal of whom had the name of Rapsii: the last on the shores of the Western Ocean, near Magnus Sinus, or the Great Bay; called also from their Western situation, by the name of Hesperii. Nothing else told us of these parts by the Ancient Writers, but that the Lakes or Fens of Nilus were occasioned by the great abundance of snow which fell from the Mountains of the Moon: and that in many parts hereof, there were Rhinocerots, Tigers, Elephants, but these last all white.  
Such was the face of this Country in those elder days. The Character of it at the present, generally and in brief is thus given by Aubanus, viz. That it is mountainous in the West, sandy in the midst, and desert towards the East. But for the several qualities of the soil and people, being of very different tempers; we shall give the better description of them in their several enclosures, then as presented thus in common. In the mean time to take a view of the Hills and Rivers of most reckoning in it; the principal of their Mountains are I those called Cantaberes. in the Province of Angola; 2 Lunae Montes, formerly accounted for the boundary of both Aethiopia's, now found to belong unto this alone. A chain of Hills, but known by no particular name, lying under the Tropic of Capricorn, full of sharp Rocks, of an incredible height, and inhabited by a barbarous and savage People; the valleys underneath of so great a depth, that they seem to emulate the Mountains.  
In this Country is the Lake of Zembre, so much renowned for giving birth to the greatest Rivers of the world; though itself but 50 miles in compass. For out of the abundance hereof flow the famous Rivers, 1 Nilus, which passing thorough some part of this Country, and traversing the whole length of the Abassian and Egyytian Empires, endeth its long course in the Mediterranean. 2. Zaire the greatest of all Africa, but unknown to the Ancients, which running Eastward thorough the Kingdoms of Manicongo, and taking in the lesser streams of 1 Vamba, 2 Barbela, 3 Coanza, 4 Lelunda, makes many Islands in his way, and at the last by a mouth of 28 miles' wideness disgorgeeth his full stomach in the Western Ocean. 3 Cuama, which making his passage towards the East and much increased by the addition of six great Rivers, after a long course of 700 miles (in all which it is navigable) loseth itself in the Indian or Aethiopick Ocean: and 4 Fluvius Spiritus Sancti, or the River of the Holy Ghost, which shaping a course opposite unto that of Nilus, endeth it in conclusion in the Southern Seas. It is divided most properly into these four parts, that is to say, 1 Zanquebar. 2 Monomotapa, 3 Cafraria, 4 Manicongo. Some also add the Country of Aian, subdivided into the two Kingdoms of Adel and Adea. But these we have ascribed with better reason to the other Aethiopia, within the bounds whereof they are wholly situate.  

1. ZANGVEBAR.  
ZANGVEBAR, or ZANZIBAR is bounded on the East with the Red-Sea, or the Indian Ocean; on the West with the Kingdoms of Manicongo, and part of the other Aethiopia: on the North with the higher Aethiopia only; on the South with Monomotapa. The reason of the name I find not.  
It containeth in it the great Province of Agisimba, placed by the old Writers in Aethiopia Interior & so much of the other as lieth on the South of the River Raptus, now called Quilimanci, by which parted from the Kingdoms of Adel and Adea. The Country on both sides of that River known in old times by the name of Barbarians, giveth to a large adjoining Bay the name of Sinus Barbaricus; and was much famed in those elder times for the best sort of Myrrh: the Myrrah Trogloditica, & Myrrah Barbara, or Barbarica, being used for the same, by some of the Ancients, because the Troglodytes and the people of this Barbaria, joined on one another. Here was also in those elder times a good race of Ginger; of which faith Dioscorides, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that it is the Bark of a Tree brought out of Barbara. Where by the way the Scholiasts upon that Author, and Pliny in the 12 Book have been much mistaken; whereof the first takes this Barbara or Barbaria for some part of the Indies; the other thinketh that the Myrrh of these parts had the name of Barbara, from the dr●ssiness and coursness of it, as if so called only because unrefined. The principal Town hereof called Rapta, by the name of the River; seated not far from the Sea, and by reason of the great Trade of it, esteemed the Metropolis of Barbaria in the time of Ptolemy. A noted Promontory of the same name was not fat from hence.  
To come again to Zanzibar, as it is now called; The Country is affirmed to be low and fenny, and very much overflown with unruly Rivers; and withal so full of Woods and Forests, that for want of passage for the wind, the Air is generally (as in all Fenny Countries of the like obstruction) exceeding pestilent. The people of complexion black, and of curled hair: Mahometans on the Seacoasts; in the Inland parts Idolaters, extremely given to Witchcraft and Divinations. Naked above the waste, and beneath covered only with the skins of Beasts, or some such mingled-colour stuff as the Scottish Plad. The Moors which dwell on the Seacoasts, use to adventure on the Seas in little Vessels, sowed together with leathern thongs, and calked with gum; having no other fails in them then the Leaves of Palm-trees. Boats of as slight a making, as those used anciently by the Britan's, whereof thus the Poet: 
Primùm cana silix, madefact● vimine parvam  
Texitur in puppim; caesoque induta juvence  
Vectoris patience, tumidum superenatat Amnem.  Which I find thus rendered to my hand: 
The moistened Osier of the hoary Willow  
Is woven first into a little Boat;  
Then clothed in Bullocks hides, upon the Billow  
Of a proud River lightly doth it float.   
It containeth in it to the number of 15 Provinces, that is to say, 1 Melinde, 2 Mombaza, 3 Quiloa, 4 Mosambique, 5 Sofasa, all along the Coasts; 6 Moenhemage, 7 Corova, 8 Calen, 9 Anzuga, 10 Monzalo, 11 Badin, 12 Mombra, 13 Mombizo, 14 Embroe, and 15 Macaos, more within the Land. Of the nine last, not being perfectly discovered, and therefore likely to yield nothing of note and credit, we shall now be silent. But the first six lying upon the Shores or near it, and consequently better known to Merchants, Travellers, and the like Adventurers, shall be surveyed in order as they lie before us.  
1. MELINDE is the name of a little Kingdom on the South of the Realm of Adea, in the Higher Aethiopia, from which parted by the River Raptus, now called Quilimanci: so named from Melinde, the chief City of it; well walled and seated in a fruitful and delightful soil; abundantly productive of Rice, Mill, Flesh, Lemons, Citrons, and most sorts of fruits; but not well furnished with Corn, the greatest part whereof is brought out of Cambaia a Province of India. The houses built of lime and stone, after the manner of Europe. The Inhabitants on the Sea coasts of Arabian breed, and of that Religion; those of the Inlands, which are of the original Natives, for the most part Heathens. Most of them of an Olive colour, but inclining to white; the Women generally of as white complexions as in other places; but they have some black people also: And all of them more civil in their Habit, course of life, and entertainment in their houses, than the rest of this Country. Great friends unto the Portugals, and befriended by them, ever since the kind entertainment which they gave unto Vasques de Gama, whom they furnished with Pilots to direct him in his way to India, when first discovered by that People.  
2. MOMBAZA is the name of another of these petit Kingdoms, of the same nature for the temper of the soil and people that Melinde is. So called from Mombaza the chief City of it, situate from Melinde about 70 miles, in a little Island of 12 miles' compass; but of good influence on some part of the Continent also. The Isle and City said to have some resemblance unto the Rhodes. The Town about a league in circuit, environed with a wall, and fortified with a Castle; the Streets thereof very narrow, but well built, most of the houses being brick, and the Mosques capacious. The King hereof a Mahometan, as are most of his Subjects, and a bitter enemy of the Christians. For which cause, and upon some discourtesies received from them, the Town was taken by Vasques de Gama, An. 1500. but abandoned again by reason of the unhealthy Air, not well agreeing with the constitution of the Portugals. Afterwards having taken in Alibeg and five Turkish Galleys, the better to enable themselves against the Portugals; the Town was taken and ruinated by Thomas de Cotigno, sent thither An. 1589. by the Portugal Viceroy residing in Goa; there being taken at that time (besides the spoil of the City) all the Turkish Galleys, and in them 23 greater, and as many lesser Pieces of Ordinance: such of the Turks and Citizens as escaped the slaughter, and had the opportunity of coming to them, yielded themselves into their power, to avoid the fury of the Imbians, a man-eating people, who had before besieged the City; and gathering up such glean as were left by the Portugals, devoured the King, and as many of the principal Citizens as they could get into their hands. 2 Ampaza, the second Town of note, was taken by the Portugals about two years after.  
3. QVILOA lieth on the South of Mombaza. The Country rich and pleasant, the Inhabitants for the most part of Arabian Ancestry; of complexion near unto a white, their women comely, sumptuou in attire, and of civil carriage; neat in their houses, which are generally well built and richly furnished. Touching the ordering of this Sex (of whose honour they are very tender) the people of this Quiloa are said to have a strange custom amongst them, more to be mentioned for the rarity than the decency of it; which is the sowing up of the private passages of nature in their female children, leaving only a small vent for their urine: Thus sowed, they keep them carefully at home, till they come to be married: And she that is by her Husband found to want this sign of her perpetual Virginity, is with all kind of ignominy sent back to her Parents, and by them as disgracefully received.  
It took this name from Quiloa the chief Town thereof, situate in a little Island, but near the shore, from which parted by a narrow Fryth, opposite to the mouth of the River Coava, by some called Quiloa. First built in the 400 year of the Hegira, by Ali, the son of Suttan Hischen, who not agreeing very well with his other Brethren, because their Mothers were Persians, and his an Abssine, sought new Adventures in these parts, and bought this Island. His Successors grown rich and powerful by the trade of Sofala, extended their Dominions far within the Land: and so adorned Quiloa, the chief Town of their Kingdom, that for sumptuous and magnificent buildings, there were few like it in those parts. Proud of their many good successes they provoked the Portugals, by whom under the conduct of Vasques de Gama, An. 1500. the City itself was taken, the King made a Tributary, and with his leave some Fortresses erected by them in convenient places. Secure and wanton by this means, they pick a quarrel with Abraham then the King of this Country, whom in the year 1505. they deposed from his Kingdom, and placed another in his Throne, under colour of not paying the conditioned Tribute. For which the Arabians rose in Arms, displaced their new King, demolished their Fortifications, and sent them to learn better moderation in their prosperous Fortunes, An. 1509. The business coming after to a composition, the Quiloan convenanted for the yearly Tribute of 1500 Marks of Gold paid unto the Portugals, to live in peace, and quietly enjoy his own without further trouble.  
4. MOSAMBIQVE lieth on the South of Quiloa, so called of Mosambique the chief City of it, situate in a little Island, the principal of three, opposite all of them to the mouth of the River Moghincats, and bordering on the Promontory of old called Prassum, spoken of by Ptolemy, and by him made the furthest known place of all this Coast. In the Island there are said to be sheep whose tails are 25. pound weight, as in other places of these Countries, and some parts of Syria; Hens, black in feathers, flesh, and bone; and if sodden make the water as black as ink, but yet sweeter in taste then any other. Of Pork good store, the more because the people are for the most part of the Law of Mahomet, by which all hog-meat is forbidden. The in land parts more barren, but very populous: so ignorant and rude when the Portugals first came among them, that for a Shirt, a Razor, and a little Bell, they sold fifteen Kine, and then fell out among themselves who should have the Bell. The Town conveniently seated on a large and spacious Haven, and fortified with a very strong Castle, in the hands of the Portugals: who in their going to the Indies, and returning back, use to call in here and fit themselves with all things necessary to pursue their voyage. A Town of so great wealth and trading, that the Captain of the Castle in the time of his Government (which continueth only for three years) is said to lay up 300000 Ducats for his Lawful gains of the Gold that cometh from Sofala. A gain so great, that at the end of his three years, he is to serve for three years more at some place or other of the East Indies, at his own charge, without any allowance from the King or State of Portugal; and then permitted to return to his native Country. Such of that Nation as are suffered to inhabit here, are enjoyed to be married, to the end the Island should be well-peopled, and as well maintained; which otherwise perhaps might have few else in it, but the Garrison Soldiers, and the Factors of particular Merchants.  
5. SOFALA lieth on the South of Mosambique, from which parted by the River Cuama, the greatest River of those parts; and thence extended to the mountains which they call Manica, by which separated from Monomotapa. So called from Sofala, the chief City of it, situate in a little Island (as the former are) but with great influence on the Land adjoining. Both Town and Island subject unto the power of the Portugals who have a Fort, the better to secure the Factory by them here erected; one of the richest in the world; the People bringing hither great quantity of Gold (of which they have most plentiful Mines) which they exchange with them for their cloth, and other commodities. It is supposed that the Gold brought into this Town amounteth to two Millions yearly. The supposition so agreeable to all other circumstances, that little question need be made of the truth thereof. Insomuch as this Country for its abundance of Gold and Ivory, is by some thought to be that land of Ophir, to which Solomon sent; and of this opinion Ortelius in his Thesaurus was the first Author; but in my mind, upon no probable conjectures, and against very strong presumption. For first Ophir the son of Joctan of whom mention is made in the 10. of Gen. vers. 29. and from whom the land of Ophir, in all likelihood took its name; is in the next verse said to have planted in the East: whereas this Sofala is situate South-west from Chaldea; in which the confusion of Tongues, and dispersing of the People, began. And secondly, it is impossible for the Navy of Solomon which lay at Ezion Geber, in the Bay of Arabia, to have spent three years in coming hither, and returning: which we find to have been the usual times of finishing the voyage to Ophir, 1 Kings ch. 10. Ophir then is some part of India; but whether it were the Island of Sumatra, or that of Zeilan, or one of the Molucco's, or the land of Malaza, called by the Ancient Aurea Chersonesus, I dare not determine; considering what worthy men maintain these several opinions.  
6. MOENHEMAGE, or MONOEMUG, the only inland Province of any note, hath on the East Mombaza, and Quiloa; on the West the famous River Nilus; on the North some part of the Dominions of the Abassine Emperors; on the South Mosambique. The Conntry very plentiful of Mines of Gold, yet the People use it not for money but barter it in exchange with the Portugal Merchants for Silks & Taffatas, with which they use to clothe themselves from the Girdle downwards. In stead of money, they make use of Red Counters, much resembling Glass. Governed by a King of their own, who holds confederacy with the Kings of Mombaza and Quiloa, for the better ordering of their Trade. To whom are also subject a wild and cruel people called Agag▪ inhabiting on Lake Zembre and the banks of the Nilus; dispersed about the fields in their homely cottages, black. Cannibals, and of an horrible aspect; more horrible than otherwise they would be, by drawing lines upon their cheeks with an iron-instrument, and forcing their eye lids to turn backwards. By the assistance of this people the King of Moenhemage hath hitherto preserved his Estate against the King of Monomotapa: and they themselves by some of their own Leaders did so distress the King of Congo, that they forced him to retire to a small Island, where he hardly scaped a violent and untimely death, most of his people being starved. Of which more hereafter.  
Touching the rest of these Provinces, we can say but little, and that little of no great note or certainty; but that they differ for the most part from one another both in speech and behaviour; each Village under a several King, and each in continual quarrel with its next neighbours, whom if they overcome, they eat. At leisure times they live by hunting, and the flesh of Elephants. And amongst these, but more upon the Borders of the Abassine Empire, I place the Gallae, a Nationless nation, as it were, without house or dwelling, without Law or Government; as barbarous and horrid as the agag's (whom some call Jagge or Giacqui) are affirmed to be; who watching their advantages, and joined together in some Arts of doing mischief, have made of late such desolations in the Countries of the Prestor-John.   

2. MONOMOTAPA.  
MONOMOTAPA, BENOMOTANA, or BENOMOTAXA (for by all these names it is called) is bounded on the North with the River Cuama, by which and the Mountain of Magnice, it is parted from Zanzibar; on the West and South by the River of the Holy-Ghost, by which separated from Cafraria; and on the East by the main Ocean. So that it is almost an Island; said to contain in compass 750 Spanish leagues, or 3250 Italian miles.  
The Air hereof is said to be very temperate, and the Country very good and pleasant, yet full of Forests. Well watered, besides the two great Rivers before mentioned with the Streams of 1 Panami, 2 Luanga, 3 Arruga, 4 Mangeano, and certain others, which carry gold with them in their sands. By means whereof, it 〈◊〉 not only abundance of Corn, but great store of Pasturage, on which they breed infinite Herds of cattle, and other Beasts very large and great: such store of Elephants, that they kill 5000 yearly form other reason but to make merchandise of their Teeth: their Gold-Mines great and small reckoned to 3000; some in the hills of Magnice, others in the Provinces of Matuca and Boro: the places where the Mines are, known without further Art in the discovery of them, by the dryness and barrenness of the loil; as if Nature could not hoard up gold in her spacious bosom, but she must needs be barren of all good works.  
The People are of mean stature, and black complexions; but strong and active, courageous, and of such footmanship, that they out run horses. Their Apparel Cotton-Cloth, which they make, or buy from some other place: their Diet Flesh Fish Rice, Mill, and an Oil called Susiman. Their Religion Paganism for the most part; yet they worship not Idols, but believe in one God only, which they call Mozimo: and seem not much averle from the Christian faith, to which one of their Kings was once converted. They punish nothing more severely than Witchcraft, Adultery, and Theft: and in the punishment of Delinquents they use no Prisons, but execute them as soon as apprehended, which is the reason that the Vulgar have no doors to their houses, that being a privilege for the Nobles. They may have as many Wives as they will, but the first the principal, and her Children only to be heirs: the women here very much respected (as a second England) the Emperor himself, if he meeteth any of them in the streets, giving them the way. Not to be married till their Menstrua or Natural purgations testify their ability for conception; and therefore they solemnize the first Flux thereof with a liberal Feast.  
Provinces of most note in it, and adjoining to it, but reckoned as Members of this Empire, are  
1. Matuca, rich in Mines of Gold, the Inhabitants whereof are called Botonghi, who though they dwell between the Line and the Tropic, have in the winter such deep snows on the tops of their Mountains, that if they come not speedily down, they are frozen to death.  
2. TORRA or BUTVA, extended from the mouth of the River of the Holy Ghost, or di Spirito Santo, to Cabo Corrientes (Caput Currentium in the Latins, wealthy in fat pastures and great herds of cattle; more in her unexhaustible Mines of Gold. Most memorable for a large, and in those times an impregnable fortress, built formerly by some foreign Prince to secure the Mines; built of square stones, and every stone of marvellous greatness, without any sign of cement or other mortar; the walls hereof 25 spans thick, but the height not answerable; over the Gate certain characters written, which the most learned of the Moors could never read. Perhaps the work of some of the Aethiopian or Abassin● Emperors, when their power and Empire was at the highest. By the Inhabitants, who conceive it to be a work beyond humane power, it is thought to have been built by Devils: but by those who take Sofala for the Land of Ophir, ascribed to Solomon though situate 510 miles more Westward then Sofala, by their own account. The Air here very cold, by reason of the sharp blasts coming from the Pole-Antartick; so much the colder, in that they have no wood or other fuel, but what they make themselves of the dung of their cattle.  
3. BORO, and 4 QVITICVI, both furnished with Gold also in their Mines and Rivers, but not so pure as that of Torra and Matuca; yet such as serve their turn so well as to spoil all industry; the people here being very careless in providing necessaries, which they presume the Moors (I mean the Arabian Moor) will bring them in exchange hereof.  
5. INHAMBAN, governed by a King of its own, but Vassal and Tributary to the Emperor of Monomotapa; the King whereof in the year 1560. was Christened by Gonsalvo Silveria a Spanish Jesuit, by the name of Constantine; his Queen baptised by the name of Mary: but I find nothing of the further progress of Christianity. Touching 6 Matana, 7 Melemba, 8 Quinbebe, 9 Berteca, and 10 Bavagul, five other Provinces of this Empire, I can meet with little but their names.  
Cities of note here are not many, hardly Towns or Villages; the houses being here so thin, that from the border of Sofala to the Fort of Torra, being 510 miles, as before is said, there is no sign of any building either old or new. The principal of those that be, 1. Tongum in the Province of Inhamban, and the Seat royal of those Kings; memorable for the baptism of the King and Queen, which was there performed. 2. Simbus, supposed to be so called from the Agisymba of Ptolomic, the chief town of the Province of Torre or Batne, distant from Sofala one and twenty day's journey, and neighboured by the remains or ruins of the old Fortress before described. 3. Benomotaxa, where the King or Emperor make his usual residence, giving this name to the whole Kingdom, but taking it from the King himself, whom they call Benomotaxa, or Monomotapa, the word in their language signifying a King or Emperor.  
The King hereof accounted one of the greatest of afric, hath under his command, besides the Provinces described, some part of Cafraria. Of great riches in regard of his Mines of Gold, which so abundantly supply all the Royal occasions, that he exacteth no kind of tribute from his Subjects, but some certain day's service in his Works; and from his Nobles gifts and presents, without which none of them are to come before him. His forces great, the multitudes of men considered; but weak, for want of skill to train them, and Arms wherewith to fit them for modern service, the Arms they most use being only Darts and Targets. For which cause, (and in regard the people of the subject Kingdoms are so prone to Rebellions, that he is fain to keep the Heirs of the Tributary Kings as Hostages of their Father's loyalty) he wageth mercenary Soldiers of other Nations, whom he distributeth abroad in his several Provinces: and amongst these it is affirmed, that he hath a strong Battaillon of Amazons, a warlike race of women who inhabit about the Lake of Zambre, and the out-skirts of Zanzibar; compared by some, for their fidelity and prowess, to the Turkish Janissaries. And yet not trusting wholly to the saith of these Mercenaries, it is said that he keeps 200 Mastiffs for the Guard of his person. Much reverenced by his Subjects, by whom he is served upon the knee; and when he cougheth or drinketh, all those that are about him make such a shout, that the town rings of it. In one particular they differ from most Nations else, which is, that such as are admitted into his presence are bound to sit down, in token of reverence; to stand before him, being a sign of the greatest dignity which can be afforded unto any. Once in a fair way to have advanced Christianity in his Dominions, when in the year 1560. the King hereof was baptised by Gonsalvo the Jesuit, by the name of Sebastian, (that being the name of the King of Portugal then reigning.) But afterwards on the suggestions of some Arabians then in great place about him, having caused the Jesuit to be slain, he was warred upon by the King of Portugal with an Army of 1600 men, under the conduct of Francisco Barretio; to whom he offered very honourable amends for the injury done: but Barretio having in hope swallowed all the Gold in the Country, would not admit of any peaceable agreement, but referred the business to a battle; in which being overcome himself, and his whole forces not long after consumed by sickness, the hopes of Christianity, and the Portugals interest in that Kingdom, fell together with him.   

3. CAFRARIA.  
CAFRARIA is bounded on the East with Rio di Spirito Santo, or the River of the Holy Ghost; on the South and West with the main Ocean; on the North extended to some parts of Manicongo, and the Province of Zanzibar. So called from the word Cafars, which in the Arabian tongue signifieth an Heretic; a name by them given to Christians, Heathens, and those of their own Religion also, which differ in opinion from them; but given to this Region by some late Writers, because destitute of another name.  
The Country for so much of it as hath been discovered, is said to be full of great Herds of cattle, and flocks of Sheep, abundance of Deer, Antilopes, Baboons, Foxes, Hares, Ostriches, Pelicans, Herons, Geese, Ducks, Pheasants, Partridges; in a word all things necessary for the life of man, were it somewhat better stored with Corn. Exceedingly well watered, and as liberally stored with Woods and Forests: the Hills thereof so intermixed with grassy Valleys, that pity 'tis so beautiful and rich a Country should be inhabited by so barbarous and rude a people; who being utterly unprovided of towns and houses, live in woods like beasts. Of colour black, thick lips, flat noses, long shaped heads, and most monstrous ears, extended far beneath their shoulders, by hanging in them ironchains, glass, bullets, Bells, and such ponderous babbles. These Ornaments common to both sexes, who also use (for their greater beauty) most hideously to slash themselves in all parts of their bodies, even their very bellies; as if no lace could better sort with their naked skins, with which only, except some flap of leather to hide their privities, they are here apparelled.  
But amongst all the several Nations which inhabit this most flourishing Country, none are more barbarous than those whom they call the Imbians, dwelling not far from the Cape of good Hope; tall, square, and strong, addicted always to War and Rapine, and feeding on the flesh both of their conquered Enemies, and their dying friends, whose death they hasten for the Shambles: The skulls of whom they use for their drinking Cups. Their weapons poisoned Arrows and Poles burnt at the end: And in their Wars they always carry fire before them, menacing thereby to roast or boil all such as they overcome. Their King (if such a sacred name become such an impious Monster) they account for Lord of all the earth, as the Pertugals of all the Seas: and he with the old Giantlike Arrogance, not only threateneth the destruction of men, but shooteth his poisoned Arrows against Heaven itself, as often as the rain or heat offends him. In the year 1589. about 80000 of them made an inroad into Zanzibar, laid desolate all the Country as far as Mombaza, which City they besieged, sacked, and devoured the People of it; which Tragedy we have heard before, in our description of Mombaza, a Realm of Zanzibar.  
Towns here are none, scarce so much as houses; and those so mean that they deserve not to be so called: except it be some sheds on the Sea sides for the use of Saylors. Of most note in it is Soldania, situate on a large and capacious Road, about fifteen or sixteen Leagues from the Cape of good Hope: not so much noted for the building, as the Bay itself, where such as are to fail towards the Indies, use to take in fresh water, and make provision of things necessary for so long a Voyage.  
But that which is of most note in all this Country is the Cape itself; discovered by the Portugals, under the conduct of Bartholomew Diaz, in their first Indian undertake, by whom, for the continual Tempests which he found about it, it was first called Tormentosa: But afterwards having doubled the Cape, and thereby finding good hopes of a prosperous voyage, they caused it to be called Cabo di Bunna S●peranza, or the Cape of good Hope: Vasques di Gama, the first discoverer of this way to the wealth of India, being then their Admiral. An. 1597. It consisteth of three great points or headlands, of which that which is nearest us, is the Cape of good Hope: the middlemost hath the name of Cabo Falso, because mistaken for the other by some of the Portugals, returning homewards: the third called Cabo della Guglia, or the Cape of Needles, by reason of those sharp points which shoot towards the Sea. On the top of the Cape, a large and pleasing plain, adorned with great variety of flowers, and covered with a carpet of grass; it is called the Table of the Cape, and yieldeth a large prospect over the Sea on all sides. The Sea here is very rough and tempestuous, and hath to the Spaniards proved oftentimes very unkind: whereupon a Spanish Captain being sore vexed with a storm, expostulared with GOD why he suffered his good Catholics to endure such torments, and permitted the English Heretics and Blasphemers, to pass so easily.  
The Country is not subjected unto any one Prince, the Natives being governed by the Chiefs of their several Clans; nor find I hitherto that either the Portugals or Spaniards have took possession of any one part of it, in the name of the whole. So that for aught I know, the best title to it doth belong to the King of England; for whom possession was taken of it in the reign of King James, by one Captain Fitz-Herbert, who called the Ascent unto the Table King James his Mount. But whether this Act of his beget any good title, or whether the title of a Country lying so far off be held worth the owning, I leave to be determined of by Lawyers and Statesmen.   

4 MANICONGO.  
MANICONGO is bounded on the South with Cafraria, and the Mountains of the Moon; on the West with the Aethhiopic Ocean; on the North with the Realm of Benin and other parts of the land of the Negroes; and on the East with Zanzibar, and some part of the Abassine Empire. So called from Congo or Manicongo, the principal of those many Kingdoms which are united in this Name.  
The Air hereof so temperate, that their Winter is like the Antumn in Rome, insomuch as the People do not use to change their garments, or make more fire then, then at other times: the tops of the Mountains free from cold, and the nights so equal to the days that for the greatest part of the year there is little difference, the Country being situate under the Aequator, though more of it on the North than the South thereof. Not over hot notwithstanding in the heats of Summer, by reason of the cool winds which then blow continually, and the great dews which falling in the night make some compensation for the extreme fervour of the day. The soil so exceeding fruitful in the production of herbs, plants, fruits, and such store of Pasturage, that they have here great herds of cattle, large flocks of Sheep, plenty of Goats, Stags, Deer, Hares and Coneys; Elephants of that bigness that their teeth weigh 200 pounds; and Serpents of so vast a bulk that they will eat a whole Deer at once: not to say any thing of their fowl both wild and tame, which they have here in great abundance.  
The People of mean stature, black of complexion, thick lips, and having the apple of the eye of divers colours, which makes them ghastly to behold; strong and long-lived, with very little hair on their heads, but that all naturally curled. In Religion for the most part Heathens, some worshipping the Sun and Moon, others the Earth, as the Mother and Nurse of all things; and some again wild Beasts and Serpents. So populous, that without any sensible diminution of their infinite numbers, it is supposed that they fell 28000 Slaves to the Portugals yearly; by whom they are sent into Brasil▪ there to work in the Mines and Sugar houses. The Christian faith admitted in some few of their Provinces, but specially in that of Congo, where first preached, in the reign of John the 2. king of Portugal, An. 1490. by Gonzalvo ae Susa, who having converted and baptised the King's Uncle, and one of his Sons, prevailed so far upon the King, that in the end he and his Queen, and many of his principal Subjects did embrace the Gospel. Received there by the people with such infinite joy, that when their first Bishop came to live amongst them, they caused the ways from the Seaside to the City of Banza (being 150 miles) to be covered with Mats; and offered to him all the way as he went, Lambs, Chicken, Kids, Partridges, Fish, Venison, and other necessaries, to testify their rejoicings in that happy change. And, though many of the Subjects in the other Provinces were baptised accordingly, and for a time embraced the Faith; yet after some small trial of it they relapsed to their former Heathenism, either unable or not willing to conform to so strict a Rule.  
Principal Rivers of this Country, 1 Bengo, 2 Coanza, 3 Dande, 4 Barbela, 5 Ambrizi, 6 Loza, 7 Zaire. This last the greatest of them all, if not of all Africa also: of which though we have spoke already, we shall add this here; That it falleth into the Aethhiopic Sea with so great a violence, that for ten miles commonly, for fifteen sometimes, the waters of it do retain their natural sweetness, not intermingled nor corrupted with the salt Sea-waters; Nor can the people fail above five miles against the stream, by reason of the Cataracts or huge falls which it hath from the Mountains, more terrible and turbulent than those of Nile. And for the Mountains of most note, they are 1 Sierra, Complida, or the Long mountain; 2 Mons Christalli, or the Crystalline mountain, so called from the abundance of Crystal which is found therein; 3 Sierra de Sol, the Mountain of the Sun, of excessive height: 4 Montes Sal nitri, so called from their abounding in that kind of Mineral; and 5 the Mountains of Cabambe. rich in Mines of Silver.  
It containeth in it many large and ample Provinces, of which we have this general muster in the stile Imperial, wherein their King calleth himself King of Congo, Bamba, Sango, Sandi, Bangu, Batti, Pemba, Abundi, Matana, Quisoma, Angola, and Cacango; Lord of the Congemes, Amolaze, Langelungi, Anzuichi, Cucchi, and Zoanghi. Many of these not so well discovered as to afford us any matter fit for our discourse; the principal of those that be, are  
1. ANGOLA bounded on the South with Cafraria, on the North with the Provinces of Bamba and Pemba, on the East with some part of Zanzibar, on the West with the main Ocean. The Country rich in Mines of Silver, and most excellent Copper; some store of Kine and Horses brought out of Europe, which they kill rather for their tails, the wearing whereof is held for a special ornament, then keep for any other use: their chiefest diet being Dogs, which they fat for the Shambles; and to that dainty so affected, that at the first coming of the Portugals thither, they would give twenty slaves and upwards for a good large Dog. By this we may conjecture somewhat at the nature of the people, who besides this are said to be much given to sorcery and divinations by the flight of Birds, skilful in medicinal herbs and poisons, and by familiarity with the Devil able to tell things to come. Permitted as most Pagans are, to have as many wives as they will; who with the rest of the women, whether maids or widows, use at the first sight of every New Moon to turn up their bare bums in defiance of her, as the cause of their troublesome purgations.  
In this Country are the Mountains called Cantaberes, rich in Mines of Silver; but those Mines not suffered to be digged, for fear of drawing some unnecessary war upon them; so that they use Glass-beads for money and therewith also do adorn the persons of greatest eminence. Their principal City called Cabazza, is about 150 miles from the Sea, and the Royal residence of their Kings, but not else observable.  
This Country was first discovered by the Portugals under the conduct of Diego Can, An. 1486. the King hereof at that time Vassal unto him of Congo, and so continued till that King did embrace the Gospel, whereupon they revolted from him, and have since subsisted of themselves without such dependence. At first they held good correspondency with the Portugals, and allowed them free traffic in their dominions: But after their revolt from the King of Congo, with whom the Portugals were in league, they put to death as many of them as they found in Cabazza, An. 1578. under colour of some pretended treason. To be revenged of this soul murder, Paul Diaz, Governor of these parts for the King of Portugal, arming such people as he had, with two Galleys and some other Vessels passed up the River of Coanza, wasting the Country on both sides: Against whom the King of Angola raised an Army of a Million of men; but amongst those multitudes of men there were so few Soldiers, that an handful of the Portugals, aided with some of the forces of the King of Congo, gave him a notable defeat, A. 158●. Since that, the trade with Portugal is revived again, and the King hereof hath expressed some good affections unto Christianity, sending unto the King of Congo for some Priests to instruct him in it, but obtained them not; the state of Religion in that kingdom being then declining.  
To this king belong also the two Provinces of Matana and Quisoma, though both used in the titles of the King of Congo: of which the first lying towards the Sea, is said to be of a wholesome air, and a fertile soil, outwardly furnished with fruits, and inwardly with Mines of Crystal and other metals; but not very rich, for want of some convenient Haven to bring on commerce. The other lying towards a great Lake called Aque Lunda, was once governed after the manner of a Commonwealth; but tributary at that time to the K. of Congo, as of later times to the Kings of Angola, by whom brought under this new yoke, by reason of the aid they had given the Portugals in their wars against him.  
2. BAMBA hath on the South the River of Conza, by which parted from Angola; on the North the River Ambrize, by which divided from Songo, on the East Pemba; on the West the Aethhiopic Ocean. The Country rich in Mines of Silver, well stored with Beasts and Birds, as well tame as wild: Amongst the Birds Parrots both green and grey, and many which are taught to sing, not much inferior for their music to the birds of Canaries. Amongst the Beasts of most note is that called the Zebre. shaped like a Mule, but from the ridge of the back to the belly so streaked with lines of white, black, and yellow, and those streaks naturally set in such even proportion, as yieldeth to the eye a most pleasing object. But wild, and of so swift a foot, that Velox ut Zebra, to be as swift as a Zebre, is grown into a Proverb amongst the Portugals. The men so strong, that it is said of them, that at one blow they will cut off the head of an Ox. or strike a Slave quite thorough the middle, into two pieces; and to be able to carry in their arms a vessel of wine, weighing 325 pound weight, containing the fourth part of a But; and hold it so till it be quite drawn out. It containeth in it many Signeuries, most of them called by the names of their principal Towns. The chief of which, 1 S. Paul, situate on the Sea side, opposite to theisle of Leanda, inhabited for the most part by Portugal families. 2 Bamba, which giveth name to this Province, and is situate about 100 miles from the Sea, betwixt the Rivers of Lose and Ambrizi.  
3. PEMBA hath on the West Bamba, on the East the Lake Zombre, and the River Barbela; on the North Batta, and on the South Angola, Esteemed to be the richest and most pleasant Country of all Manicongo; the Fields in all parts thereof beset with Palm trees, but intermixed with other fruit trees, which are always green. The water of so good a nature that it never hurteth any that drink of it: the Air exceeding wholesome, and the earth as fruitful; productive of all sorts of grain, but specially of that which they call Luco, in form like mustard seed, but bigger, which they grind in an hand-mill, and make thereof a Bread not inferior to Wheat. The People much reclaimed from their ancient Barbarism since the coming of the Portugals thither, whom they imitate both in behaviour and apparel. So well skilled in the virtues of Medicinal herbs, that every one is his own Physician, Chirurgeon, and Apothecary. Anciently clothed with Mats, and trimmed up with Feathers; retained still by the Villages and poorer sort in some part of the Country. Their chief City, formerly had the name of Banza, so called because the King's Court (as the word doth signify) but since the receiving of the Gospel it is called S. Saviour's; distant from the Sea 150 miles, beautified (since it became Christian) with a Bishops See, and a fair Cathedral, in which are 28 Canons, with other Officers, and Ornaments accustomably belonging to the lake Foundations. The Town itself situate on the side of a large and lofey Mountain; on the top whereof is a spacious Plain, two Dutch miles in compass, full of Villages, Burroughs, and scattered houses, which are thought to house 100000. persons, most of them Portugals, and their Servants.  
4. BATTA hath on the West and South Pemba, on the East the Mountains of the Sun, and those called Sal nitri; on the North Pango. Of the Soil and People there is nothing singular to be said, but that the inhabitants hereof are more military, and better furnished for the Wars than the rest of these Provinces: necessitated thereunto by the ill neighbourhood of a fierce and savage People, dwelling about the spurs and branches of the Mountains before mentioned, whom they call Jags or Giacchi. These naturally and originally of the Land of Negroes, abandoned the parts about Seirra Leona, where before they dwelled, and to the number of 12000 fell into the Mountainous parts of this Region, under the conduct of one Elembe, where they are since grown into a People; and become a terror to their neighbours. Greedy devourers of man's flesh, which they prefer before that of Beefs or Mutton; not yet so qualified by the change of their Country as to build houses, sow or plant, or to breed up cattle; finding it far the easier life to maintain themselves by the labour and spoil of others. And which is yet most strange of all, though they have each of them many wives, ten or twenty a piece, yet they have no children; but strangle them assoon as born, lest they should be an hindrance to their often wander. But as Pliny once said of the Esseni, Gens aterna est in qua nemo nascitur: so we may also say of these, that they do not want succession, though they breed no children; selecting out of their Captives and stolen children, some of either Sex (but neither steal nor take them captive under twenty years old) to be the Seminary (as it were) of a new posterity. Against these Monsters those of Batta are armed continually, not otherwise able to defend themselves, their wives and children, from their hands and teeth: insomuch as this one Province, though none of the biggest, is able to raise 70000 men, well armed, and fit for any service. The principal of their Towns is Batta, which gives name to the Province; situate on the banks of the River Lelanda, and the Seat of the Viceroy, who is always of the blood Royal, honoured sometimes with sitting at the Kings own Table, which none else may do, and of so great authority in all consultations that no body dares to contradict him.  
5. PANGO, is bounded on the South with Batta, on the East extended to the Mountains of the Sun, which close up this Country; on the North with Sunda; and on the West with parts of Pemba, and Sango. Of the People, little singular, of the Country less. Neighboured on the North-east towards Sierra de Crystal, with the Languelungi, supposed by some to be the Aethiopes Hesperii, spoken of by Ptolemy; a barbarous Nation, but of so considerable power, that they are found amongst the rest in the Style Imperial. This once a Kingdom of itself, not subject till of late times to the Kings, of Congo. The chief Tow of it called Pango, is seated on the Western bank of the River Barbele; the ordinary residence of the Viceroy, and the name giver to the whole Province.  
6. SUNDA, is bounded on the South with Batta, on the North with the great River Zaire; on the East with Barbele; and on the West with part of Songo. The Country rich in several Metals, but the Inhabitants prefer Iron before any other, because it doth afford them Materials for Swords, Knives, and Armour; well furnished also with Martrons, Sables, and other Futrs of great esteem amongst Foreign Merchants. This is the best Region of this Kingdom, not above 40 miles in breadth, betwixt Batta and the River of Zaire; nor much more in length. Their chief City hath the name of Sunda, which it communicateth to the whole.  
7. SONGO, is bounded on the East with Batta, and Anzichana; on the West with the Aethhiopic Ocean; on the North with the Kingdom of Loanga; and on the South with the River Ambrizi, by which parted from the Realm of Bamba. It lieth on both sides of the great River Zaire, which is here so turbulent and broad, and so full of Lands, that the one part of it hath little or no commerce with the other. The chief Town hereof called Songo gives this name to the Country; in which is nothing singular for the Soil or People.  
8. ANZICHANA, hath on the West, part of Songo and Loango▪ extended thence unto the East as far almost as the Lake of Zembre; on the North some part of the Land of Negroes, on the South the Zaire. So called from the Anziqui, the Inhabitants of it. The cruelest Cannibals in the world; for they do not only eat their Enemies, but their Friends and Kinsfolk. And that they may be sure not to want these Dainties, they have shambles of man's flesh, as in other parts of Beef or Mutton. So covetous withal, that if their Slaves will yield but a penny more when sold joint by joint then if sold alive, they will cut them out, and sell them so upon the Shambles. Yet with these barbarous qualities they have many good. Affirmed to be so cunning at the Bow and Arrows, that they will discharge 28 Arrows (for so many do their Quivers hold) before the first of them falls to ground and of so great fidelity to their Masters, and to those which trust them, that they will rather choose to be killed then either to abuse the trust, or betray their Master. For that cause more esteemed by the Portugals, than their other Slaves. And for the same, and that only, worthy of so good a Country; said to be rich in Mines of Copper, and very plentiful of Sanders both red and grey; which tempered with Vinegar, is found by the Portugals to be a certain remedy against the Pox; as the smoke thereof against the head-ache. Towns they have none, or none at least of any reckoning, which deserve place here.  
9 LOANGO hath on the East Anzichana, on the West the Atlantic Ocean, on the North Benin, one of the Realms of Guinea in the Land of Negroes; and on the South the Province of Songo, from which parted by the River Loango, whence it hath its name. The Country very hot, as lying under the Line, but well peopled, indifferently fruitful, and more stored with Elephants, than any other of these parts; strenching in length 200 miles within the Land, and for the most part very well watered. The Inhabitants, whom they call Bramas. by Religion Heathens, but of old accustomed (as the Anziqui and other of these barbarous Africans) unto Circumcision. Governed by a King of their own, once subject to the Kings of Congo; but of late times, both he and the King of the Anziqui (for they are also under the command of one Sovereign Prince) have freed themselves from that subjection, though still the King of Congo be called King of both. Their King they call by the name of Mani-Loanga. Their Towns of note, 1 Penga, the Haven to the rest. 2 Morumba, 30 Leagues more Northwards, and within the 1 and; the inhabitants of which Towns being more civil than the rest, apparel themselves with the leaves of Palm trees; but not so well skilled in the nature of that excellent Tree as the more civilised People of the Realms of Congo, who out of the leaves thereof well cleansed and purged draw a fine long thread, of which they make Velvets, Damasks, Satins, Taffetas, Sarcenets, and the lake fine Stuffs.  
10. Having thus looked upon the chief Provinces of this Kingdom seated on the Continent, Let us next look upon the Lands. The principal of which LO ANDA, situate over against the Town of S. Paul in the Province of Bamba; said to be first made out of the sands of the Ocean, and the mire of Coanza, cast into an heap, and at last made into an Island. Now beautified with a very fair Haven, of the same name with the Island, possessed by the Portugals. The Island destitute of Rivers, but so well furnished with waters, that every where within less than half a yard digging, they find sweet and good: Waters so contrary to the Sea from whence they come, that when the Sea ebbs from it, they be salt and brackish; when it floweth towards the Island then most fresh and sweet. But most remarkable is this Island for the Cockle fishing, which the Women going a little into the Sea, take up together with the sands, in baskets, and part them from the sand, as they lie on the shore; the shells of which being naturally distinguished into drivers colours, serve over all the Kingdom of Congo, instead of money; which is a matter of such moment unto this King that he entertains a Governor in the Island for no other reason, but to take care about this fishing.  
Besides this, there are many Lands in the River of Zaire, now subject to the Kings of Congo, but heretofore in continual Wars against them; fight in Boats which they made of the bodies of a Tree, by them called Liconde. The tree so big, that two or three men or more are not able to fathom it: insomuch that many times a Boat is made of one of the largest of them, able to contain 200 men. Upon the shores of these Lands, and in others of their Bays and Creeks, they have so great numbers of Anchioves, that in winter time they will leap upon the Land of their own Accord.  
Compacted of these several Members, and of the rest expressed in the Style Imperial, is the Realm of Congo, so called from Congo the chief Province, but now distinguished from the rest by the name of Pemba; which being of more power, or of better fortune, than any of the other, or of all together hath given both Law and name unto them. Discovered by the Portugals under Diego Can, An. 1486. at what times these Kings were at the greatest: called by their subjects Mani Congo, or the Kings of Congo, the word Mani, signifying in their Language a Prince or Lord; the name communicated since to the Kingdom also. Of their affairs before this time there is nothing certain. What hath since happened in this Kingdom may best be seen in the ensuing Catalogue of 

The Kings of Congo.  
1486. 1 John not so called till converted to the Faith of Christ, and then baptised by this name, in honour of John the 2. King of Portugal, Anno 1490. in whose reign this discovery and Conversion happened.  
2 Alphonso, eldest son of John, zealous in the advancement of the Christian Faith, and for that opposed by Panse Aquitine his younger Brother: whom with a very small Army, zealously invocating the assistance of Jesus Christ, he is said to have vanquished. A Prince, who during his long reign of 50 years did seriously promote the Gospel, and caused all Idols in his Kingdom to be overthrown, and Churches to be built, and furnished in convenient places.  
3 Pedro, the son of Alphonso, in whose time was founded the College of 28 Canons, in the Cathedral Church of S. Cross, in the Town of S. Saviour's.  
4 Francisco the son of Pedro, who reigned not long.  
5 Diego, or James, one of the kinsmen of Francisco, in whose time Religion growing into discredit, by the scandalous lives of some of the Secular Clergy; John the 3. King of Portugal sent four Jesuits thither; who are said to have converted in five months 5000 persons; and to build three Churches.  
6 Henry, the brother of Diego, after a sharp War touching the Succession, in which were slain all the Portugals of S. Saviour's, except the Priests, at last succeeded; not long after slain in battle against the Anziques.  
7 Alvarez, the son of Henry, forced by the Jags or Giacchi to abandon Congo, and betake himself, together with the Portugal Priests, to an Island of the River Zaire: where he continued, till restored to his Crown by the aid of Sebastian King of Portugal; after by famine he had lost almost all his company.  
8 Alvarez II. Son of Alvarez the first, who much solicited Sebastian and Henry Kings of Portugal, to send him a new supply of Preachers; the old store being wasted in the Lands of Zaire.  
9 Alvarez III. Son of Alvarez the 2. not being born in Lawful wedlock, was opposed by one of his Sisters and a younger Brother, both of lawful birth; whom he overthrew, Anno 1587. and in the place of the victory founded a Church in honour of the Virgin Mary.    
Touching the Forces and Revenues of these Kings of Congo, I am able to say nothing certain; but that he is a Prince of great power and riches. His Riches visible by the great treasures which he draweth from the Mines of silver, and of other Metals in his Kingdom, from the trade of Cockle shells; the only money of his Realm, which he keeps wholly to himself; the great gain which he makes by Slaves and from Elephant's teeth; the presents which he hath in way of Tribute from the King of Angola. And though it be not easy to say what he layeth up yearly, because he hath not his Revenue in Coin, as most Princes have; yet it is thought that he is as rich and well furnished with all things, as any Monarch in afric.  
As for his Forces, they consist most in the multitudes of his Subjects, which were they well armed and used to the Wars, would make him formidable to the rest of the African Princes. And though he hath no garrisons or Towns of war, but must crust, if once invaded, unto Castles of bones; yet he doth rest secure enough from all fear of danger except out of Europe: being able to raise against his Rebels, or any of his invading neighbours; 400000 men out of Bamba only; all armed according to their manners and 70000 men at least well exercised in Wars against the Jags, from the Province of Batta; besides what may be drawn from his other Provinces.  
The Arms of this King are Mars, five swords meeting in Base Sol, which Coat was taken by Alphonso, the second King in this Catalogue, because in the battle which he fought against Panse Aquitine, he and his Soldiers saw (or supposed they saw) such a number of shining swords hanging in the Air, with their points turned directly upon the Enemy.   
And so much for Aethiopia Inferior.   

OF THE ISLES OF afric.  
IN tracing out the Isles of afric, we must observe another course than that which we have taken in Europe and Asia: these Lands not belonging to any part of the Continent, nor under the command of any great Prince, in the account of whose Estates they might be considered; but being all of them independent and sui juris, and therefore to be handled by themselves apart. In our chorography of which, and the stories of them, (as far forth as my Authors will direct me in it) I am now to travel; beginning first with those that lie in the Red-Sea, or Indian Ocean, and so proceeding by the Cape of Good Hope to the Streits of Hercules: that from thence we may have the shorter passage into America, and there 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, conclude our journey. These than we will consider either joint or separate, as delivered to us by the names of 1 The Aethhiopic Lands, 2 Socotara, 3 Madagascar, 4 Mohelia, 5 S. Helen's, 6 S. Thomas, 7 The Prince's Island, 8 The Gorgades or Lands of Cape Vird. 9 The Canaries or the Fortunate Lands, 10 Madera, 11 The Island of Holy Port, and 12 The HESPERIDES.  

1. THE Aethiopic LANDS.  
1. THE Aethiopic LANDS, so called because they lie upon the Coast of Aethiopia Superior, which were only known unto the Ancients, are more in number then in weight: some of them situate within the Streits of the Red Sea or the Gulf of Arabia; others without those Streits in the open Ocean.  
1. Of those within the Streits, not reckoning such as lie upon the shores of Arabia Felix, of which we have already spoken; there is 1 Asiarte or Astrata, now called Cainssa. 2 Ara Palladis, so called from some Altar of that Goddess, which was there erected. 3 Gypseris, by Pliny called Cyris, but Gypsus in Justinians Code, renowned in former times for its plenty of metals. 4 Macaria, or the fortunate Lands, so called from the fertility and pleasures of it. 5 Orneon, or the Isle of Birds, from the great plenty of Birds which was found therein. 6 Daphnis, by Ptolemy called Daphnine, opposite to a famous Port-town of the same name in the Continent. 7 Bacchias, so called from Bacchus, unto whom consecrated. 8 Anti-Bacchias, so named because opposite to it. 9 Acanthine, supposed by some to be now called Anghotina. 10 Insula Diodori, conceived by the Learned to be the same which is now called Babel Mandel, and giveth name unto the Streits or entrance of the Bay of Arabia, now called the Streits of Babel Mandel. 11 Isidis Insula, memorable for a Temple dedicated to the Goddess Isis; and for a well frequented Port called Portus Isidis; the same which is now called Pascua, as Bel-forest thinketh. 12 Mundi, an Island in the Bay of Avalitos', opposite to a noted Emporie of the same name of the shores of that Bay. Besides all which, we find in Ptolemy two Lands by the name of Thrisitides, two more called Chelonitides or Cathratae, two others passing by the name of Gomadeae, together with the Isles of Myron, Pan, and that called Insula Magorum; which make up one and twenty in all; but of no note or observation in the course of business, or the conduct of humane affairs.  
Those of most note in the Open Ocean, which still preserveth the name of the Red-Sea, and is sometimes called the Indian, sometimes the Arabian Ocean, and by a particular name Pelagus Hypadis, are but four in number; that is to say, 1 Myrica, by the Translator of Ptolemy called Myrsiaca; 2. 3. two Lands called by the name of Menan, a degree more Northwards then the other; and 4 Amicusia, as Stephanus; or Amici jusula, as called by Ptolemy, the most North of all; which I conjecture to be that which is now called by the name of Socotara, the most noted Island of this Sea. I know that many Learned men will have this Island to be that which Ptolemy and others of the Ancients call Dioscoridis: but because Dioscoridis, by all those Ancients, is made to be an Island of Arabia Felix, and Socotara by all the Moderns affirmed to be an Isle of afric; I can by no means yield unto it. Again, it is affirmed by our best modern Geographers, that Socotara lieth over against Cape Guardafu, (the Aromata of Ptolemy, as before is said) from which distant not above 30 leagues: which site and distance sort well with Amicusia, but can by no means be applied unto Dioscoridis; Amicusia being placed but two Degrees on the East of that Promontory in the Longitude of 85. whereas Dioscoridis is situate from it almost four degrees, in the Longitude of 86, and 40 Minutes; besides as great or greater difference in their several Latitude. So that supposing it for granted, that Socotara is that Island which was anciently called Amicusia; and having cleared my way so far, I now proceed to the Description and affairs thereof.   

2. SOCOTARA.  
2. SOCOTARA, the greatest Island of these Shores, is situate, as before was said, against Cape Guardafu, from which distant about 30 leagues; Abadalenry a small Island lying in the midst, that is to say, 15 leagues from the Cape, and 14 from the Island. The length here of 60 miles, 25 the breadth; divided in the middle by craggy Mountains of great height, the top of which are for the most part covered with sands. The Island extremely vexed with winds and molested with dryness, insomuch as it is destitute of most things necessary for the life of man; affording nothing towards it of the growth of the Earth, but some small quantity of Mill, Dates, and some kind of Fruits. Provided notwithstanding of some good Pastures for the breed of cattle, and liberally furnished with medicinal Drugs, as Cinnabar, Dragon's blood, which is a Red gum issuing from the bark of a tree; and the best Aloes in the world, from hence called Aloes Socotrina.  
The People of an Ash-colour, very rude and barbarous; their bread for the most part of Dates, the rest of their food being milk and butter; their hair long, and their clothing only enough to hide their nakedness. The Women as good Soldiers as the Men; countenancing or occasioning the tradition of the Arabians, that they came from the Amazons: And the better Husbands of the two, governing all affairs both within and without. All of them by profession Christians, governed by a Bishop of their own, with some few Priests, but ignorant enough of all things which concern Religion. More generally Circumcised then Christened, though both used among them. Jacobites in Sect, as the Abassines their neighbours are; and zealous worshippers of the Cross, which they always hang about their necks. So pertinaciously addicted unto Magic, and therein so expert, that they bring incredible things to pass: not to be weaned from those black Arts, though the Bishop excommunicate all such as use them. They hold opinion that S. Thomas suffered shipwreck upon their Coasts, as he sailed towards India; and that his Ship being drawn to land, was turned into a Church: but it appeareth neither by their life or doctrines, that any Apostolical man hath set foot amongst them.  
They live for the most part in Caves, or Cabins of no other stuff than the boughs of trees; so that we are to look for few Towns among them. The principal, 1 Zocotara, giving name to the Island, the place of the King's residence, and a Bishops See. 2 Tamarind, and 3 Delisha, two Port-towns, and reasonably well traded, in the hands of the Natives: as 4 Coro, and 5 Benin, two other Ports, possessed and garrisoned by the Portugals. The King hereof a Vassal to the King of Fartac, one of the petit Princes of Arabia Felix, not far from Aden; in habit and Religion Turkish: Attended on when the Relater was there, An. 1614 by five Camels and five Horses only, yet those all in the Island.  
Nigh hereunto are two Islands, (those possibly which Ptolemy calleth Monan) the one inhabited by men only, and the other by women; who do meet at their accustomed times to preserve their kind, but make no long stay, the Air of the one being found unhealthy for the constitution of the other Sex. The other Lands of these Coasts, scattered up and down in the Bay of Barbaria, (but not known by any name in the time of Ptolemy) as 1 Don Garcia, 2 the three Brethren, 3 S. Brandon, 4 Francis, 5 Mascadenna, 6 Comoro, and many others of as small note, are not worth the speaking of.   

3. MADAGASCAR.  
3. MADAGASCAR, the greatest of the world, is situate over against Mosambique in Aethiopia Inferior, supposed to be the Menuthias of Ptolemy, the only Island by him named on the Coast of that Country; but by the Portugals called the Isle of S. Laurence, because discovered by them on the day of that Saint, An. 1506. The length hereof affirmed to be 1200 miles, (which is longer than Italy) and 4000 in compass: the middle part hereof opposite to the Promontory which Ptolemy calleth Prassum, now the Point of Mosambique, from which distant 170 miles: in reference to the Heavenly Bodies, situate from the 17 Degree of Southern Latitude to the 26.  
The Country plentiful of all things necessary for the life of man, particularly of Mill, Rice, Hony, Wax, Cotton wool, Sugars, Stags, Goats, Deer, and other Creatures both wild and tame; Lemons and other cooling fruits, some store of Ginger, Cloves but little different from those of India, Red Sanders, Saffron, Amber, and some Mines of Silver, Iron, Gold, and Copper: not to say any thing of their Beefs and Muttons, so large, and good, and so good cheap, that for a twopenny Bead or some such trifle they will sell Beefs and Sheep of good taste and bigness: such numbers of Elephants, that they send thence yearly great store of Ivory: and amongst other rare fruits, they have plenty of those which they call Cocos or Coconuts; a kind of Date as big as a Cabbage; the liquor in it, about the quantity of a pint, tastes like wine and sugar, the kernel big enough to content two men; and like good Ale it affords not only meat and drink, but clothing; as also furniture for their houses, tackle for their ships, fuel for the fire, and timber for building; the body of the Tree being straight and high, and towards the top diversified into many branches. A Country far too good for so bad a people.  
For they, as Traveller's report, and most Writers testify, are treacherous, inhospitable, ignorant both of ● rayers and Festivals, destitute of the distinction of time into years and months, not knowing any proper names for the days of the week, nor able to reckon above ten; naked, except their privities which they cover with Cotton. Idolaters in the midland parts, & Mahometans upon the shores. Commendable only for their hate to Polygamy, and restraining themselves to one wife; the defiling of the marriage bed severely punished: but otherwise so eager upon copulation, that their Boys at the age of twelve years, and the Girls at ten, think they stay too long, if they keep their Virginities any longer; some of them, like Quartilla in P●tronius Arbiter, begin so early, ut nunquam meminerint se Virgines fuisse, that they remember not the time when they lost their Maidenheads. Of colour they are black, and of strong composition; their breasts and faces cut and pinked, to appear more beautiful. Much given unto the wars, well armed according to their Country manner, and exceeding good Archers. Amongst them there are some white people, said to come from China.  
It hath in it many fair Rivers, but their names I find not: and at the mouths of those Rivers some convenient Havens, into which they admit the sorrein Merchants, but suffer none to come on land; which the Merchant hath no cause to be sorry for, finding himself not safe on shipboard from their treacherous practices. So that we can give but small Account of their Towns and Cities, except it be the bare recital of their names: as viz. 1. S. Augustine's, on a fair Bay in the South-west point, as 2 Gangomar in the North-east of it; 3 Antabosta, 4 Point-Antogil, 5 Santo-Jacobo, 6 Matatana, 7 Angoda, 8 Herendo, 9 Andro-arco, and 10 Roma or New-Rome, so entitled by some zealous Romanist, in hope to have it thought that the Popes of Rome have got some footing in this Island.  
This Island known, but very imperfectly, in the time of Marcus Paulus Venetus, who telleth us many strange things of it; but none more strange than that of the Bird called Ruck, of such incredible strength & bigness, that it could snatch up an Elephant as easily as a Kite doth a Chicken. Discovered by the Portugals in the year 1506. as before was said; and since frequented by the English and Holland Merchants: by whom we are informed no further touching the Estate and Affairs thereof, but that it is divided into four parts, under so many Kings, each of them in continual wars against one another, but well enough agreed to defend themselves against the coming in of Strangers: yet as some say, they would be well enough content with an English Plantation; either in love to our Nation, whom they acknowledge to be more courteous than the Portugals, and not so covetous as the Dutch; or else by the strength of our Shipping, and the reputation of our interest in it, to keep off all others.   

4. MOHELIA, & 5. MAURITIUS Island.  
Adjoining to Madagascar, and as it were attending on it, I find divers Lands; some on the Northwest, some directly East. On the Northwest we have 1 Meottey, 2 Chamroe, 3 Mohelia, and 4 Joanna Island; on the East, 5 the Island of Mauritius, and 6 England's Forest. Of these Mauritius is the greatest, but Mohelia the best inhabited.  
4. MOHELIA situate on the Northwest of Madagascar, is about 20 miles in length, and 16 in breadth: abounding in Goats, Hens, Coconuts, Lemons, Oranges, Pomcitrons, Pulse, Sugarcanes; store of Fish taken on the shores, and other necessaries. The People of complexion black, of composition large and strong, courageous, affable, less treacherous than their neighbours of Madagascar. Of the same Language and Religion with those of Arabia, from whence they seem to have descended; but by reason of their commerce and intercourse with the Portugals, they speak that tongue also. The Women of the like complexion: to amend which, and seem more lovely, they pinks their arms and faces in several shapes. Both sexes no otherwise apparelled then their natural garments, with some Plantain. Leaves about their middle to hide their shame.  
Their Religion that of Mahomet, as before is said: their Priests in great esteem amongst them; so their Temples also, which they keep clean and neatly matted, not suffering any man to enter with his shoes on his feet. Their chief Town Merianguea, at the West end of the Isle, strong and well-garrisoned. Heretofore under the command of one King alone; of late divided into two Principalities: one of the last Kings leaving two daughters, the one married to a Native, the other to an Arabian Lord.  
5. Larger than this, on the East of Madagascar, is the Isle of MAURITIUS, so called by the Hollanders in honour of Maurice Prince of Orange, in whose time they first set footing in it; but by the Portugals called De Cerne, and by some Cygnaea. In compass about 100 miles: well stored with Beefs, Hogs, Goats, most sorts of Fish; and liberally endowed with all the blessings of Nature, sweet Waters, most delicious Fruits, Woods fit for any use both of food and building; plenty of Ebony of all colours, but the best coalblack. Yet altogether destitute of humane Inhabitants: insomuch as we may say of this, as the Poet of the World, before Man was made: 
Sanctius his Animal, mentisque capacius altae  
Deerat adhuc, & quod dominari in caetera posset.  Which may be Englished in these words: 
But yet the Chief, with Supreme power possessed,  
Was wanting, he that should command the rest.    

6. S. HELEN'S, & 7. The Isles of ASCENTION.  
6. AS destitute of Inhabitants as the Isle of Mauritius, is that of S. HELEN, on the West side of the Cape of Good Hope, & in the 16 Degree of Southernly Latitude; no other Island interposing betwixt Madagascar and it, except those of Don Alvarez, and of Tristram de Acugna, near the Cape itself; but of so little note as not worth the naming. The Island very high and hilly, and mounting from the Sea with so steep an ascent, that the Mariners have amongst them a merry saying, that A man may choose whether he will break his heart going up, or his neck coming down.  
It was thus called because discovered by the Portugals on S. Helen's day: not then inhabited nor since, the King of Spain suffering none to dwell there, because it had been made an unlawful receptacle for uncustomed Goods, whereby he lost exceedingly both in power and profit. Stored by the Portugals at the first Discovery with Goats, Hogs, Hens, and other Creatures: as also with Figs, Lemons, Oranges, and the like Fruits, which there thrive exceedingly: and grow all the year long. Intended by them for a Stage in their going and coming to and from the Indies: in which they might refresh themselves, and bestow their sick, whence they are taken off by the next year Fleet. Used for the same purpose by the English and Hollanders, who so domineer about the Island, that the Portugals dare not Anchor near it, or own their property, if they see any shipping in the Rode. No buildings in it but the ruins of a little Chapel, destroyed by the Hollanders: and some fragment of a little Village begun by some Portugal Mariners, but demolished by the King of Spain.  
7. Northwest from hence is the Isle of Ascension, so called because discovered on Ascension day: but not inhabited, nor any use at all made of for aught I can find. Of the same bigness with S. Helen's, 30 miles in compass, and about 700 English miles distant from it.   

8. S. THOMAS, 9 the PRINCE'S Island, and 10 the Isle of ANNIBON.  
8. THe Island of S. THOMAS is situate directly under the Aequator, of Orbicular form, the Diameter being 60 miles; by consequence the Perimeter or compass 180; and just so many from the shore of the Realm of Congo. At the first discovery nothing but a continual Forest, now very well inhabited both by Portugals and Negroes: these last brought hither from the opposite Continent, with whom the Air agrees so well, that they attain generally to 110 years of Age, few of the Portugals unto fifty. The Air so vehemently hot that it fort not with the constitution of the Europaeans.  
The Country destitute of wheat, which if sown here, turneth all to blade, and brings forth no Ear, nor will any fruits here prosper that have any stone in them: but so abundant in Sugar canes and well stored with Sugars, that 40 Ships are hence loaded yearly, with that one commodity; for making which, they have here 70 Ingenios', or Sugar-houses, and in each of them 200 Slaves, in some 300 which belong to the works; six days in seven these Slaves work for their Masters, and the seventh for themselves; which they spend in sowing and planting their Seeds, Fruits, and Provisions. Where by the way, these Sugar-works or Ingenios' are a late invention; the boiling and baking of Sugar (as it is now used) not being above 200 years old; and the refining of it more new than that: first found out by a Venetian in the days of our Fathers, who is said to have got above 100000 Crowns by this Invention, and to have left his son a Knight; who (though he was no Knight of the Post) in very little time brought it all to nothing. Before which Art of boiling and refining Sugars, our Ancestors not having such luxurous Palates, sometimes made use of rough Sugar, as it came from the Canes; but most commonly pleased themselves with honey, more wholesome, because more natural than these forced Inventions. But to proceed in the description of this Island, in the midst there of thereof there is said to be a woody Mountain, overshadowed continually with Clouds, which so moisten the trees that grow there in a great abundance, that from thence falleth a sufficient quantity of waters to refresh their Fields, and feed their Sugarcanes; notwithstanding the extreme heat of the Clime and Air.  
The Religion here allowed of is the Christian only, first preached here by the Portugals or brought hither with them. The Church hereof governed by a Bishop, his title the Bishop of S. Thomas, but his charge extendeth also over all the Churches in the Realm of Congo. The principal City of it hath the name of Pavoasan, a Colony of Portugals, consisting of 700 Families, or about that number: situate on a fine River, and a pleasant Haven: seldom without the company of Portugal Merchants, who bring hither in exchange for Sugars, Wheat, Wine, Cheese, Hides, and other things more necessary than those Sugars, for the life of Man. Took by the Hollanders in the year 1599 but again recovered or abandoned.  
9 THE PRINCE'S ISLAND, (Insula Principis in the Latin) so called for that the Revenues of it were allotted to the Prince of Portugal, is situate in three Degrees of Northern Latitude. The Country very fruitful for the bigness of it; but not much observable: except it be for being taken for the Hollanders by Julian Clerehagen, Anno 1598. abandoned not long after to the former Owner. Attended, as is fit for a Prince's Island, by a Mess of Chaplains, viz. 1. the Isles of S. Matthew, 2 S. Cross, 3 S. Paul, and 4 S. Conception. and waited on by seven servants (so many Lands near Cape Vero) all in Coats of Green, called by one common name, Barbacene. But because the former four yield no matter of History. and these last seven have no other Inhabitants but Birds; we may be thought having said thus much of them, to have said enough.  
10. Southwest hereof, but on the other side of the Line, lieth the Isle of Annobon, (Insula Anniboni as the Latins call it) So named because discovered upon New years day. Inhabited, and of very good fishing all along the Coasts of it; but that Fishing made unsafe by Crocodiles, and other venomous and hurtful Creatures, which are said to be about the shores in great abundance.   

11. The GORGADES, or Isles of CAPE VERD.  
11. THe GORG ADES, or Lands of Cape Verd (Insulae Capitis Viridis, as the Latins call them) are 9 in number; called by the last name because situate over against Cape Verd (Promontorium Capitis Viridis) in the Land of Negroes. Their names 1 S. Anthony, 2 S. Vincent, 3 Buenavista, 4 S. Lucy's, 5 Insula Salis, the Isle of Salt, 6 DelFogo, or the Isle of Fire, 7 S. Nicholas, 8 Maggio, or Majo, 9 S. Jago. Some add to these a tenth, called Brava Discovered all in the year 1440 by a Geneose called Antonio de Noli, employed therein at the charges & direction of Henry Duke of Visco one of the younger sons of K. John of Portugal, the first of that name. Of the most little to be said. The principal, and indeed the only ones which are now inhabited, are Majo, Del Fogo, S. Jago, 1 Majo is of most repute for a Lake of two Leagues long; the waters whereof are by the heat of the Sun turned into Salt, which is here made in great abundance. 2 Deal Fogo is so called from the Flakes of fire which it sends forth usually, and fell so thick upon the Ship of Sir Anthony Shirley when he took the Island, An. 1596. that one might have writ his name in the ashes on the upper Deck, with the top of his finger. 3. The principal of all S. Jago, yet but seven miles long; rocky and mountainous, but full of very pleasant Valleys, and well inhabited. The chief Town of it called Riblera, or Ribiera la grande, a Colony of Portugals; situate on a fine River and a beautiful Haven: taken and sacked by Sir Francis Drake, in the year 1585., and after by Sir Anthony Shirley, An. 1596.  
The name of Gorgades, as the more ancient of the two, is almost forgotten. Given to those Lands, as supposed (but I cannot see upon what grounds) to be the seat of the Gorgon's; the proper habitation or dwelling place of Medusa and her two fair sisters. This Medusa said, or rather fabled by the Poets, to have been a Woman of great beauty; Who either for suffering her body to be abused by Neptune, in one of the Temples of Pallas, or for preferring herself before Pallas, had by the said Goddess, her hair turned into Snakes; and this property annexed unto them, that whosoever looked on her, should be turned into stones: which quality is retained after she was slain, and beheaded by Perseus. Thus and far more sabulously the Poets. The Historians (for as some think, omnis fabula fundatur in historia) relate, how this Medusa was indeed a Lady of such exceeding beauty, that all men that saw her, were amazed: and of such a wise and subtle brain, that for that cause only men attributed unto her a Serpent's head. She abounding in wealth, and by piracy molesting the Seas of Europe, was invaded by an Army of Grecians, under the leading of Perseus; who in a single combat slew her. Perseus when he plucked off her helmet, admiring that beauty which he had destroyed, cut off her head, and carried it into Greece: where the people beyond measure wondered at the rare compositure of her face, and the exceeding beauty of her hair; and are therefore said to have by her head been metamorphosed into stones. Pausanias' in his Corinthiacks so reports the story.   

12. The CANARIES.  
THe CANARIES are in number seven, situate over against the Coast of Libya Interior; so called from Canaria, one of the principal of the number. By Pliny, Ptolemy, and other of the Ancient Writers they were called Insulae Fortunatae, the fortunate Lands; and amongst them of greatest note five being made the fixed place of the first Meridian; removed since to S. Michael's one of the Azores. But those Ancients knew but six of them by name, and in the naming of these six do not well agree. By Pliny, whom Solinus followeth, they are said to be 1 Ombrio, 2 Junonia Major, 3 Junonia Minor, 4 Caprariae, 5 Nivaria, and 6 Canariae. By Ptolemy thus reckoned, 1 Aprositus, 2 Hera (or Junonia) 3 Pluitania, 4 Casperia, 5 Canaria, and 6 Pincuria; Where we may note also to our purpose, that though these Authors disagree in all the rest of the names (Junonia being added by the Translator unto Ptolemy's Hera) yet they agree in making Canaria to be one; which showeth that one to be of eminence enough to give the name of Canary Lands unto all the rest. Called Fortunate, from an opinion which the Ancients had of their fruitfulness and other excellencies; in which respects, several Countries, in those times had the names of Macaria, Felix, Fortunate. Now better known by the new names of 1 Canary, 2 Palma, 3 Tenaritte, 4 Gomero, 5 Ferro, 6 Lanserotte, and 7 Fuerte Ventura.  
1. CANARIA or Canaria Magna, because the biggest of the Cluster is said to be 90 miles in compass, and to contain 9000 persons: Plentiful in Barley, Honey, Wax, Sugar Canes, Goats, Kine, and Camels; of which, and of their Cheese, and the skins of Beasts they raise great profit: but from nothing more than from their Wood (whereof they have very great abundance) used by the Clothier for the well colouring of his Cloth. From hence and from the other of these Lands which bear this name, come the fine singing Birds called Canary Birds; and so do also those rich Wines (the fruit of the rhenish Grape transplanted) which we call Canaries. A sort of wine, if not sophisticated and abused, which is said to sum less into the head, please the palate more, and better help the natural weakness of a cold stomach (if moderately and discreetly used) then any other Wines whatsoever. Brought hence in such abundance to supply our luxury, that no less than 3000 Tuns hereof are vended yearly into England and the Netherlands only.  
2. PALMA, the one of the least in circuit, but as rich as any; fruitful in Wine and Sugars; abundantly well stored with cattle, and great plenty of Cheese; and therefore made the victualling place of the Spanish Fleets, as they pass to Brasil, and Peru. This Island together with Canary, and Tenariffe, make up the Bishopric of the Canaries, one of the Bishops where of was that Melchior Canus a Dominican Friar, whose works now extant in defence of the Church of Rome, show him to have been a moderate and learned man, and Master of a perfect Ciceronian stile. The residue of the Lands are of the Diocese of Madera.  
3 TENARIFFE, some what less than the Grand Canary, but of the same fertility and condition with it, is most remarkable for a Mountain of so great an height, that it may be seen 90 Leagues at Sea, in a fair clear day. Some reckon it 15 miles high, others 15. Leagues, and some advance it to 60 miles, but with little credit. With truth enough most of our Travellers and Geographers hold it to be the highest in the whole world. The Form, Pyramidal, in shape agreeing to these Prodigies of Art and Wonder, the Egyptians Pyramids. The top whereof ending in a sharp point, called the Pike of Tenarisse, is said to be seldom without snow; and therefore problably conceived to be the Nivaria of Pliny.  
4. HIERRO, or FERRI insula, so called from the Iron Mines therein, is by some thought to be the Pluitalias, by others the Aprositus of Ptolemy; and some again more probably the Ombrio of Pliny, if this and Ptolemy's Pluitalias be not one and the same, as for my part I think they be. And it might possibly have those names in the Greek and Latin, because it hath in it no fresh waters but what they do receive in showers, and preserve in Cisterns: it being added by late Writers (which the Ancients knew not) that these showers do daily fall upon them from the Leaves of a tree, which always covered with a Cloud doth distil these waters, preserved in a large Cistern underneath the tree, for the use of Man and Beast throughout the Island.  
5. GOMERA, now as civil and well cultivated as any of the rest, was the most barbarous of all when first discovered: it being here, and here only the ordinary sign and evidence of their Hespitality, to let their friends lie with their wives, and receive theirs in testimony of reciprocal kindness: for which cause here, as in some places of the Indies, the Sister's son did use accustomably to inherit.  
6. LANSAROTE the first of these Islands which was made subject to the Crown of Castille, discovered by some adventurous biscain's An 1393. by whom spoiled and pillaged, and the poor King and Queen thereof and 170 of their Subjects of better quality brought away Prisoners into Spain. On this discovery the Kings of Castille challenged a propriety in all these Lands; of which more anon.  
In this of Lansarote there was an Episcopal See erected by Pope Martin the 5. removed unto the Isle of Canary in the time of Ferdinand the Catholic.  
7. FVERTE-VENTURA, of the same nature with the rest, supposed to be the Capraria of Pliny, and the Casperia of Ptolemy, but not else observable. Near unto these, but not within the name and notion of the Fortunate or Canary Isles, are certain others of less note, that is to say, I Gratiosa, 2 S. Clara, 3 Roca, 4 Lobos, 5 Alegranco, and 6 Infierno, small and of no Account, nor yielding any matter of observation.  
The knowledge of these Lands being lost with the Roman Empire, they lay concealed and undiscovered till the year 1330. or thereabouts, when an English, or as some say, a French ship, distressed by tempest, did in that misfortune fall upon them. Notice whereof being given in the Court of Portugal, in the reign of King Alphonso the fourth, Lewis de Ordo was designed for the conquest of them. Who being repulsed at Gomera, An. 1334. gave the intercourse over, though on this ground the Portugals build their first claim unto these Lands. But the news spreading by degrees to the Court of Rome, Clement the sixth thought fit to make a grant of them to Prince Lewis of Spain, son of Alphonso de la Cerde the right heir of Castille, by the old name of the Fortunate Lands; and to assist him in the conquest, caused Levies of Soldiers to be made both in France and Italy. Which coming to the ears of the English Ambassadors in the Pope's Court, they seared some transport had been made of the British Lands (than which they thought that none could better deserve the name of the Fortunate Lands) and in all haste dispatched a Post to the Court of England, for the preventing of the danger. The People at the time of this first Discovery were so rude and ignorant, that they did eat their flesh raw for want of fire; and tilled or rather turned up the earth with the horns of Oxen, for want of Ploughs or Tools of Iron; their Beards they shaved with a sharp flint, and committed the care of their children to the nursing of Goats. To kill a Beast was conceived to be the basest office that could be possibly put upon them, and therefore commonly imposed on Prisoners and condemned persons, who being thus made the common Slaughtermen, were to live separate from the rest. Their Government by Kings, in each Island one: when at their deaths, they sit up naked in a Cave, propped against the wall with a staff in his hand, and a vessel of Milk fast by him, the better to enable him for his journey to the other world; and leaving him in the Grave with these solemn words, Depart in peace, O thou blessed Soul. The like Funeral they bestowed also on the chief of their Nobles. Yet was not the Government in those times so purely Regal, but that they had a Common Council (as it were) out of all the Lands, consisting of 130 persons: who did not only direct in Civil matters, but in Sacred also, prescribing to the People both their Faith and Worship; and for their pains were privileged with the first night's lodging with every Bride, which the Husband was to offer to some one of them.  
But to return unto the Story, nothing being done by Lewis de la Cerde, in pursuance of the Pope's Donation, it happened in the year 1393. that some Adventurers of Biscay, setting out certain Ships from Sevil to seek their Fortunes at Sea, fell amongst these Lands, And having pillaged Lansar●te as before was said, and observed the number, greatness, and situation of all the rest, returned into Spain with great store of Wax, Hides, and other commodities, with which those Lands did abound: extremely welcome to King Henry, who then reigned in Castille, and did intend from that time forwards to possess himself of them. By Catharine the Dowager of this King Henry, during the minority of John the 2. the Conquest of them was committed to John of Betancourt, an adventurous Frenchman, (conditioned he should hold them under the sovereignty of the Crown of Castille) by whom four of the Lands were subdued, though he himself perished in the action, An. 1417. Young Betancourt the son, not able to subdue Canary, to which most of the Islanders had retired, fortified himself as well as he could in the Isle of Lansarote, and took unto himself the title of King; which he left not long after to one Menault, in whose time the Lands under his command received the Gospel. and had a See Episcopal in the Isle of Lansarote. But this new King making money by the sale of his subjects (as well of the new Christians, as the old Idolaters) complaint was made of him in the Court of Castille: and Pedro Barva de Campos with three ships of war is sent against him: with whom unable to contend, with the good leave and liking of the King of Castille, he sold his interest in these Lands to one Fernando Peres a Knight of Sevil, who by the wealth and power of that City made good his purchase, and left it unto his Successors. But we must know that the posterity of this Peres enjoyed the four lesser Lands only; Canaria itself, Tenarisse, and the Isle of Palms, being under the command of their own Kings, and so continued till the reign of Ferdinand the Catholic, who in the year 1483. under the conduct of Alphonso of Muxica, and Pedro de Vera, two noble Captains, became master of them; and translated the Episcopal See from Lansarote to the Great Canary. So that although the Portugals claim these Lands in right of the first discovery, yet the possession hath gone always with the Crown of Castille. Divided at the present into two Estates, (but the one subordinate to the other) Gomera, Lansarote, and Hierra, being in the hands of some private Subjects; those which belong unto the Crown, being Canaria, Palma, Tenarisse, and Fuerte-Ventura, are said to yield yearly to the King 50000 Ducats; the Seat of Justice being fixed in the Isle of Canaria, unto which all the rest resort as they have occasion.   

13. MADERA, & 14. HOLY-PORT.  
13. MADERA, the greatest Island of the Atlantic, is situate in the Latitude of 32 over against the Cape of Cantin in Morocco; in compass 140 miles, some add 20 more. So called of the wilderness of Trees there growing, when first discovered; the Portugals naming that Madera, which the Latins call Materia & we English Timber: with which the Isle was so over grown, that the best way to clear it and make it habitable, was by consuming them with fire; which raged so horribly for the time, that the people employed in it were fain to go far into the Sea to refresh themselves. But the Husbandry was well bestowed; the Ashes making so good compost to enrich the soil, (as burning the Turf of barren lands, and ploughing the Ashes of it, on some grounds with us) that at the first it yielded sixty fold increase. And though the first virtue of that experiment be long since decayed, yet still it yieldeth thirty fold in most places of it; fruitful withal of a kind of Plant used in dying Clothes, which is hence called Mader; and of Sugar Canes in such a wonderful manner, that for a time the fifths of the Sugars herein made amounted yearly to 60000 Azzobes; now not half so much. The Isle wonderfully fruitful also of Honey, Wax, rich Fruits, and the choicest Wines, the Slips where of were brought from Candy, bringing forth here more grapes than leaves, and Clusters of two, three, and four spans long. The Hills well stored with Goats; the Plains with numerous Herds of cattle; the Woods with Peacocks, Thrushes, Pigeons: these last so ignorant of the injury which Man might do them, that at the first coming of the Portugals thither, they would suffer themselves to be taken up; but now have wit enough to keep out of danger.  
The whole Island in all parts well watered, having besides many pleasant Springs, eight handsome Riverets, wherewith the Earth refreshed and moistened, yields the sweeter Herbage; which otherwise by reason of the heat of the Air (never very cool) might not be so nourishing. The chief City of it hath the name of Fouchial the See of an Archbishop, and the Seat of Justice: known to the Romans by the name of Junonis, or Antolala, as many learned men conceive; and again forgotten, it was of late times discovered by one Machan an English man, who was cast upon it by a tempest, An. 1344. who burying there his wife, or some other woman which he had in his company, writ on her tomb his name and coming thither, with the cause thereof; which gave the Portugals occasion to look further after it. Desolate, and unpeopled at the first discovery; now exceeding populous, and of no small advantage to the Crown of Portugal, to which first united, An. 1420. under the conduct of Prince Henry before mentioned.  
14. INSULA PORTUS SANCTI, or the Isle of HOLY-PORT, is distant from Madera about 40 miles, neighbouring the Coasts of Mauritania Tingitana, and therefore probably conceived to be the Cerne of Ptolemy. So called, because discovered by some Portugal Mariners (by the direction and encouragement of the said P. Henry) on All-hallows day, An. 1428. Desolate and habited at the first discovery, but now very well peopled. In compass about 15 miles; well stored with Corn and Fruits, great shoals of Fish upon their shores, plenty enough of Beefs and Goats; but such abundance of Coneys (bred of one Do Coney brought thither when great with young) that the Inhabitants were no less pestered with them in these later times, than the Baleares were of old; insomuch that they were out of hope to withstand the mischief, or repair the damages sustained by them: A little Island not far off, breedeth nothing else. The chief Town of it P●rto Santo, or HolyPort, seated on a convenient Rode, but a sorry Haven: was taken by Sir Amias Preston, in our wars with Spain, An. 1596. but being sacked and spoiled, was again abandoned. In former times called Cerne, as before was said, and reckoned for the most remote Colony which the Carthaginians or Phoenicians had in the Western Ocean, beyond which they conceived the Sea to be unnavigable, (proved otherwise by Hanno's voyage) choked with mud and weeds. Called therefore Cerne ultima (AEthiopum populos alit ultima Cerne) by Festus Rufus, and others of the Ancient writers.   

15. THE HESPERIDESES.  
15. THE HESPERIDESES, by Pliny and Pomponius Melae, are said to be two in number, situate in the Atlantic Seas, but we find not where. Much memorised and chanted by the Ancient Poets, for the giving a safe and pleasant habitation to the daughters of Atlas which they call by the name of Hesperides also); the curious Gardens by them planted, and the Golden Apples of it which were kept by a Dragon, and took hence by Hercules. But the Historians remove these Gardens out of the Sea into the main Land of afric, and fix them in Cyrene, where already spoken of. Which not withstanding, it is granted that there were anciently some Lands in the Atlantic Ocean, noted by this name, and said to be exceeding fruitful of their own accord: and therefore probably the same which Plutarch in the Life of Sertorius calleth Insulae Atlantica, and describes them thus. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, etc. They are (saith he) two Lands parted by a narrow Streit of the Sea, distant from the main land of afric 10000 furlongs (which in our account cometh to 1250 miles) called also the Isles of Blessed Souls, and the Fortunate Lands. They have rain there very seldom, but a fine sweet Dew, which makes the Earth exceeding fruitful both for tillage and planting fruits, which sometimes grow without any care or labour of the husbandman; sufficient by their plenty and sweetness to maintain the people, much given to ease, and hardly troubling themselves with any business. The Air for the most part very temperate, never extreme in any changes of the season; the rigour of the Northern and Eastern winds being by so long a passage thither very much abated; as on the other side the Western and South-Eastern winds do much refresh it with such Mists as they bring from the Sea, to the great comfort of the people. A place so generally sweet, that the Barbarous people in it have a constant and approved opinion, that these should be the Elysian Fields, the seats of the blessed souls departed, described by Homer: with the report whereof Sertorius was so highly taken, that he intended to have given over the pursuit of the Civil wars, and there to spend the rest of his days in peace and happiness; which he had done, if the Cilicians, men accustomed unto spoil and rapine, had not took him off. So far and to this purpose Plutarch. But what these Lands are, and where now to be sound, (for in regard of their great distance from the Coast of afric, they cannot be the Fortunate Lands spoken of before) I cannot easily determine: unless we should conjecture, as Ortelius doth, that they are the Lands of Cuba and Hispaniola, on the Coasts of America; to the Story and chorography whereof we are now to hasten.   
And so much for the Isles of afric.    

A Table of the Longitude and Latitude of the principal Towns and Cities mentioned in this Part.  
A Long. Latit. Agadez 39 20. 25.30. Alexandria 67.0. 31.20. Algiers 33.0. 35.20. Amara 63.30. 5.0. A. Angola 45.10. 7. 0. A. Asna 66.30. 25. Azamor 18.30. 32.40. Arquin 11.10. 20.20. Adrimetum   B Babel Mandel 80.01. 12.50. Bagamedrum 62.36. 6.0. Barca 62  Benin 41.0 7. 40. Bona 37.10. 35.40. Borno 4430. 17.10. Brava 74.30. 0.30. Budomel 10.20. 1430. Bugia 34.30. 35.10. Babylon Egypt   C Cairo 67.30 30.0. Cyrene 53.30 32.0 Canaria 9.30 27.20 Carthage   Cirta   D Damlata 69.0 32.40 Damut 51.0 11.20 Dancall 65.0 17.30 Dara 66.50 12.0 Docono 78.20 12.30 F Fatigar 74.0 2.40 A. feoff 21.50 32.50 Fierro 6.20 26.30 Fort ventura 11.0 28.0 Fouchial 8.10 31.30 G Gamba 64.49 17.30 A. Guoga 55.0 22.0 Goyami 57.0 14.0 A. Gualata 13.30 23.30 Guber 29.20 10.40 H Holy Port 10.0 32.30 L Lanserot 11.40 29.30 M Madagascar 77.0 19.0 A. Midazo 78.0 5.10 Malta 46.0 35.30 Manicongo 47.20 7.0 A. Morocco 20.0 30.30 Melinde 71.20 3.20 A. Meroe 68.20 16.15 Mezzata 47.4 30.40 Mina 28.50 6.20 Mombaza 72.0 4.50 A. Mosambique 70.20 14.40 Memphis   N Nubia 60.0 17.40 O Oran 29.40 35.0 P Palma 6.20 28.0 Pascar 59.40 1.20 A. Q Quiloa 69.50 8.56 R Rameses' 68.30 30.30 S Sabaim 68.20 8.40 Septa 22.0 35.40 Suachem 72.40 18.40 Sus 27.30  Salla   T Tangier 30.50 35.0 Tefethne 16.10 30.0 Tegnit 27.40 28.10 Teient 17.0 30.30 Tenariffe 8.10 27.30 Thesset 20.0 29.10 Telesine 29.0 34.10 Tigremahon 65.0 6.0 Tombuto 20.50 15.0 Tunis 40.0 36.0 Thebes in Egypt   V Vella 77.0 13.0 Ut●ca   Z Zacatera 88.0 12.50 Zegreg 36.40 14.40 Zeila 80.0 11.20 Zigec 45.50 40.50 Zimbaus 59.0 25.20 A.  
A is the Mark of a Southern Latitude.  
The End of the First Part of the Fourth Book.   

cosmography, The Fourth Book: PART II.  
CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHY & HISTORY OF AMERICA, AND ALL THE PRINCIPAL Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Lands of it.  
By PETER HEYLIN.  
Matth. 24. 14. Et praedicabitur hoc Evangelium regni, in universo Orbe, in testimonium omnibus Gentibus: & tunc veniet consummatio.  
S. Hieronym. in locum. Signum Dominici adventus, est Evangelium in toto Orbe praedicari, ut nullus sit excusabilis: quod aut jam completum, aut brevi cernimus complendum.  
LONDON, Printed for Henry Seile. 1652.   


AMERICAE Descriptio Nova Impensis HENRICI SEILE Will: Trevethen. sculp 1652   map of America   

cosmography, Lib. IU. Part. II.  
CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHY & HISTORY OF AMERICA, And all the principal Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof.  

OF AMERICA.  
AMERICA, the fourth and last part of the World, is bounded on the East with the Atlantic Ocean, and the Vergivian Seas, by which parted from Europe and Africa; which Seas, the Mariners call Mare del Nort; on the West with the Pacifique Ocean, by the Mariners called Mare deal Zur, which divides it from Asia; on the South with some part of Terra Australis Incognita, from which separated by a long, but narrow Streit, called the Streits of Magellan; the North bounds of it hitherto not so well discovered, as that we can certainly affirm it to be Island or Continent.  
It is called by some, and that most aptly, THE NEW WORLD: New, for the late Discovery; and World, for the vast greatness of it. The most usual, and yet somewhat the more improper name, is that of America; because Americus Vespacius an Adventurous Florentine, discovered a great part of the Continent of it. But since the first light he had to find out those parts, came from the directions and example of Columbus who first led the way; and that Sebastian Cabot touched at many places which Americus Vespacius never saw: it might as properly have been called Columbana, Sebastiana, or Cabotia. The most improper name of all, and yet not much lessured then that of America, is, the West Indies: West in regard of the Western situation of it from these parts of Europe; and Indies, either as mistook for some part of India, at the first Discovery, or else because the Seamen used to call all Countries, if remote, and rich, by the name of India.  
Many are of opinion, but rather grounded on conjectural presumptions, then Demonstrative Arguments, that America was known long before our late Discoveries. Their Reasons drawn, 1. From the Doctrine of the Antipodes, which being maintained by many of the Ancient Writers, inferreth (as they think) a knowledge of these parts of the World which are opposite to us. But unto this it may be answered, that the knowledge of the Antipodes amongst the Ancients was by supposition, at the best by Demonstration only, and not in fact; or thuss that it was known that there were Antipodes, but the Antipodes were not known. 2ly. It is said that Hanno a noble 〈◊〉 discovered a great Island in the Western Ocean, and after a long voyage returned home again, not wanting Sea-room, but Victuals, as he told the Senate. But he that writ the actions of Hanno in this famous Voyage, (which some conceive to be Hanno himself) informs us that he sailed not Westwards, but more towards the South: and therefore this great Island, whatsoever it was, (whether Madera or some one of the Fortunate Lands, I determine not) could not be America. 3. It is alleged that Plato in his Timaus speaks of a great Island of the Atlantic Ocean, Libyam & Africam adaquans (as out of him Tertullian hath it) as big as Libya, and afric properly so called: which he confesseth to be drowned long before his time, and therefore possibly never extant but in some men's fancies. 4. That Aristotle in the Book de Mundo (if that Book be his) speaks of an Island very fruitful, and full of navigable Rivers; discovered by the Carthaginians, and by them forbidden to be planted upon pain of death. Which Island being affirmed by that Author to be Multorum dierum itinere a Gadibus remota, hath made some men conceive it to be this America, or some of the great Lands of it. As if it might not be as well one of the Azores, or perhaps Madera, or some other of the Lands in the Road of Hannos voyage. Certain I am, that one of the best friends the Phoenicians have, who would not gladly lose such an opportunity of ennobling their performances in Navigation, (could any thing be built upon it) doth wave the whole Relation as of doubtful credit, and knoweth of no such place as is there described by that Author, whosoever he were. 5. Some have produced these Verses of Seneca, to infer a knowledge of this Country amongst the Ancients. Viz.  
Venient annis secula seris,  
Quibus Oceanus vincula rerum  
Laxet, & ingens pateat tellus,  
Novosque Typhis detegat Orbs,  
Nec sit Terris ultima Thule.  
Which may be Englished in these words:  
In the last days an Age shall come,  
Wherein the all-devouring Foam  
Shall lose its former bounds, and show  
Another Continent to view.  
New-Worlds, which Night doth now conceal,  
A second Typhis shall reveal;  
And frozen Thule shall no more  
Be of the Earth the furthest Shore.  
But this Argument can bring no necessary, nor so much as a probable inference of any such Continent as this, then known to Seneca: the Poet in that Chorus showing as well the continual dangers, as the possible effects of Navigation; that there might be, not that there were more Lands discovered, than those formerly known. 6. Some hold this Country to be the Land of Ophir, to which Solomon is said in the holy Scriptures to have sent for Gold. But Ezion-Geber, which is there also said to be the station where his Navy lay, was situate in the bottom of the Red Sea, or Bay of Arabia: whereas if he had sent this way, his shipping must have lain at Joppa, or some other Port of the Mediterranean, and from thence set forwards thorough the Streits of Gibraltar, and so plainly Westward. 7. Finally, in the History of Wales writ by David Powel, it is reported that Madoc the son of Owen Gwinedth Prince of Wales, of purpose to decline engaging in a Civil war raised in that Estate, in the year 1170. put himself to Sea, and after a long course of Navigation came into this Country; where after he had left his men, and fortified some places of advantage in it, he returned home for more supplies, which he carried with him in ten Barks; but neither he nor they looked after by the rest of that Nation. To which some add, that here is still some smattering of the Welsh or British tongue to be found amongst them; as that a Bird with a white head is called Pengwin, and the like: in which regard some sorry Statesmen went about to entitle Queen Elizabeth unto the sovereignty of these Countries; Others more wise, dissuaded from that vain Ambition, considering that Welsh men, as well as others, might be cast upon those parts by force of tempest, and easily implant some few words of their own among the people there inhabiting. And though I needs must say for the honour of Wales, that they have more grounds for what they say, than those which look for this New World in the Atlantis of Plato, the Atlantic Lands of Aristotle and Plutarch, or the Discoveries of Hanno the Carthaginian: yet am I not so far convinced of the truth thereof, the use of the Mariner's Compass being not so ancient (without which such a Voyage could not be performed) but that I may conclude with more satisfaction, that this Country was unknown to the former Ages.  
But now, as Mela the Geographer said once of Britain, then newly conquered by the Romans; Britannia qualis sit, qualesque progeneret, mox certiora & magis explorata dicentur; quip jam diu clausam aperit ecce Principum maximus (he means Claudius Caesar) nec indomitarum modo sed & incognitarum ante se Gentium Victor: so may we say of America, on these late discoveries: What kind of Country it is, and what men it produceth, we do, and shall know more certainly then in former times; since those puissant Kings of Spain have laid open all the parts thereof, inhabited not only by unvanquished, but even unknown Nations. For God remembering the promise of his Son, that his Gospel should before the end of the World be preached to all Nations, stirred up one Christopher Colon or Columbus, born at Nervy, in the Signory of Genoa, to be the instrument for finding out those parts of the World, to which the sound of the Gospel had not yet arrived. Who being a man of great abilities, and born to undertake great matters, could not persuade himself (the motion of the Sun considered) but that there was another World to which that glorious Planet did impart both his light and heat when he went from us. This World he purposed to seek after, and opening his Design to the State of Genoa, An. 1486, was by them rejected. On this repulse he sent his brother Bartholomew to King Henry the seventh of England; who in his way happened unfortunately into the hands of Pirates, by whom detained a long while, but at last enlarged. Assoon as he was set at liberty, he repaired to the Court of England, where his Proposition sound such cheerful entertainment at the hands of the King, that Christopher Columbus was sent for to come thither also. But God had otherwise disposed of this rich purchase. For Christopher not knowing of his Brother's imprisonment, not hearing any tidings from him, conceived the offer of his service to have been neglected; and thereupon made his Desires known at the Court of Castille: where after many delays, and six year's attendance on the business, be was at last furnished with three ships only, and those not for Conquest, but Discovery. With this small strength he sailed on the main Ocean more than 60 days. yet could see no Land, so that the discontented Spaniards began to mutiny; and partly out of scorn to be under the command of a Stranger, partly desirous to return, would not go a foot forwards. Just at that time it happened that Columbus did discern the clouds to carry a clearer colour than they did before: and probably conceiving that this clearness proceeded from some nigh habitable place, restrained the time of their expectation within the compass of three days; passing his word to return again if they did not see the Land within that time. Toward the end of the third day, one of the Company called Rodrigo de Triane (he deserves to have his name recorded, being no otherwise rewarded for such joyful news) descried Fire; an evident Argument that they drew near unto some shore. The place discovered was an Island on the Coast of Florida, by the Natives called Guhanani; by Columbus S. Saviour's; now counted one of the Lucaios. Landing his men, and causing a Tree to be cut down, he made a Cross thereof, which he e●ected near the place where he came on Land; and by that Ceremony took possession of this NEW WORLD, for the Kings of Spain, Octob. 11. An. 1492. Afterwards he discovered Cuba and Hispaniola, and with much treasure and content returned towards Spain: and after three other great Voyages fortunately finished, he died in the year 1506. and lieth buried at Sevil. Preferred for this good service by the Fing themselves, first to be Admiral of the Indies, and next unto the title of Duke De la Vega, in the Isle of Jamaica; but so maligned by most part of the Spaniards, that Bobadilla being 〈◊〉 into those parts for redress of grievances, loaded him with Irons, and returned him 〈◊〉 into Spain. Nor did they only stick after his death to deprive him of the honour of this Discovery (attributing it to I 〈◊〉 not what Spaniard whose Cards and Descriptions he had seen) but i● his life would often say that it was a mitter of no such difficulty to have sound these Countries: and that if he had not done it when he did, some body else might have done it for him. Whose peevishriess he confuted by this modest artifice, desiring some of then who insolently enough had contended with him couching this Discovery, to make an Egg stand firmly upon one of its ends. Which when they could not do upon many Trials, he gently bruising one end of it, made it stand upright; letting them see without any further reprehension, how easy it was to do that thing which we see another do before us.  
But to proceed, Columbus having thus led the way, was seconded by Americus V●spusius, an old venturous Florentine, employed therein by Emanuel King of Portugal; from whom the Continent or Main land of this Country, hath the name of Americas by which still known and 〈◊〉 commonly called. To him succeeded John Cabot, a Venetian, the Father of Sebastian Cabot, in behalf of Henry the seventh of England, who discovered all the North-east Coasts hereof, from the Cape of Florida in the South, to New found land and Terra di Laborador in the North causing the American Roytelets to turn all Homagers to that King and the Crown of England. Followed herein by divers private Adventurers and undertakers, out of all parts of Europe bordering on the Ocean. Ferdinand Magellanus was the first that compassed the whole World, and found the South Passage, called Fretum Magellanicum to this day: followed herein by Drake and Cavendish of England. Frobisher and Davies attempted a Discovery of the Northwest passage; Willoughby and Burroughs of the North-east. So that according to that elegant saying of the learned Verulam, in his Advancement of learning, this great building the World, had never thorough lights made in it till these our days: by which as almost all parts of Learning, so in especial this of Navigation, and by consequence of cosmography also, hath obtained an incredible proficiency in these later times.  
For in the Infancy and first Ages of the World, (pardon me I beseech you this short but not unprofitable digression) men lived at home, neither intent upon any foreign Merchandise, not inquisitive after the Lives and Fortunes of their Neighbours: or in the Language of the Poet, 

Nondum caesa suis peregrinum ut viseret Orbem,  
Montibus, in liquidas Pinus descenderat undas.   

The Pine left not the Hills on which it stood  
To seek strange Lands, or rove upon the Flood.    
But when the Providence of God had instructed Noah how to build the Ark, for the preservation of himself and his children from the general Deluge: the Posterity which descended from him had thereby a pattern for the making of Ships and other Vessels (perfected in more length of time) whereby to make the waters passable, and maintain a necessary intercourse betwixt Nation and Nation. 'tis true, the Heathen Writers which knew not Noah, attribute the invention of shipping to sundry men, according to such informations or traditions, as they had received: Strabo, to Minos' King of Crete; Diodorus Siculus to Neptune, who was therefore called the God of the Seas, and Tibullus to the People of Tyre, a Town indeed of great wealth and traffic, and the most famous Empory of the elder times; saying Prima ratem ventis credere docta Tyrus. 
The Tyrians first the Art did find  
To make Ships travel with the wind.   
And questionless the Tyrians, and the rest of the Phoenicians enjoying a large Sea-coast, and many safe and capacious Havens, being in these times most strong at Sea, and making so many fortunate Navigations into most parts of the then known World, might give the Poet some good colour for his affirmation. From the Phoenicians, the Egyptians (their next neighbours) might derive the Art of Navigation; though being an ingenuous People they did add much to it. For whereas the first Vessels were either made of the body of some great Tree, made hollow by the Art of man; or else of divers boards fashioned into a Boat, and covered with the skins of Beasts; (such as are still in use amongst these Americans) the Phoenicians brought them first into strength and form; but the Egyptians added Decks unto them. By Danaus' King of Egypt when he fled from his brother Rameses', the use of shipping was first brought amongst the Grecians: who before that time knew no other way of crossing their narrow Seas, but on Beams or Rasters tied to one another. Nave primus a● Egypto Danaus advenit, ante cnim Ruibus navigabatur, as it is in Pliny: where we may see the true and genuine difference betwixt Ratis and Navis; though now both used indifferently for all sorts of shipping. Amongst the Grecians those of Crete were the ablest Seamen; which gave occasion to Aristotle to call Crete the Lady of the Sea; and to Strabo to make Mino; the Inventor of Ships. In following times, the Carthaginians, being a Colony of Tyre, were most considerable in this kind; and by the benefit of their shipping much distressed the Romans. But so it happened (as all things do and must concur to God's public purposes in the alteration of Estates) that a Tempest separating a Quinqueremis or Gallie of five banks of Oars, from the rest of the Carthaginian Fleet, cast it on the shore of Italy: by which accident the Romans learning the Art of Shipwrights, soon became Masters of the Sea. That France and Spain were taught the use of shipping by the Greeks and Phoenicians; is a thing past questioning: Marseilles in the one being a Phocean, and Gades in the other a Tyrian Colony. As for the Belgians and the Britain's, it is probable that they first learned it of the Romans (though formerly they had some way to transport themselves from one shore to the other.) For Caesar telleth us of the Belgae, Ad eos Mercatores minimeè commeant, that they were not at all visited by Foreign Merchants. And the same Caesar found the Seas betwixt France and Britain so ill furnished with Vessels, that he was said to make ships to transport his Army: Singulari Militum studio circiter sexcentas & duodetriginta Naves invenit, as his own words are. Having thus brought Navigation to the greatest height which it had in those days; let us look back again on the Inventors of particular Vessels; and the Tackle unto them belonging. That the Phoenicians first invented open Vessels, and the Egyptians Ships with Decks, hath been said before: and unto them also is referred the Invention of Galleys with two Banks of Oars upon aside; which kind of Vessels grew so large in the course of time, that Ptolemy Philopator is said to have made a Callie of 50 banks. Great Ships of burden, called Ciraera, we owe to the Cypriots; Cock boats, or Skiffs (Scaphas) to the Illyrians or Liburnians: Brigantines (Celoces) to the Rhodians; and Frigates or light Barks (Lembos) unto the Cyrenians. The Phaselis, and Pamphyli (which we may render Men of War) were the invention of the Pamphylians, and the Inhabitants of Phaselis a Town of Lycia, in Asia Minor. As for Tackle, the Boeotians invented the Oar; Daedalaus and his son Icarus, the Masts and Sails: Which gave occasion to the Poets to seign, that flying out of Crete they made wings to their bodies; and that Icarus soaring too high, melted the Wax which fastened his wings unto his shoulders, and thereby perished; the truth being, that presuming too much on this new invention, he ran himself upon a Rock, and was cast away. For Hippagines, vessels for the transporting of Horse, we are indebted to the Salaminians; for grappling hooks, to Anacharsis; for Anchors to the Tuscans; and for the Rudder, Helm, or Art of Steering to Typhis the chief P●lot in the famous Argo: who noting that a Kite when she flew, guided her whole body by her Tail; effected that in the devices of Art, which he had observed in the works of Nature. By these helps some great Voyages were performed in the elder times; the greatest, those of Jason Ulysses, and Alexander, with the Fleets of Solomon, and the Egyptian Kings. Of these, Jason and his companions. say led in the ship called Argo, through the Euxine Sea, and part of the Mediterranean; Ulysses through the Mediterranean only; small gullets if compared with the Ocean. Alexander's journey so famoused, and accounted then so hazardous, was but sailing down the River Indus, and four-hundred surlongs into the Ocean; and for the Fleets of Solomon, and the Kings of Egypt, it is very apparent, that they went with great leisure, and crawled close by the shore-side: otherwise it had been impossible to have consumed three whole years in going from Ezion-Geber into India, and returnning again; which was the usual time of these voyages, as appeareth in 1 King. 10. 22. After the fall of the Roman Monarchy, the most potent States by Sea in the Mediterranean were the Genoese and Venetians, in the Ocean the English and the Hans-towns, neither of which ever attempted any great discoveries.  
But in the year 1300. one Flavio, of Malphi in the Realm of Naples, found out the Compass, or Pixis Nautica, consisting of 8 winds only, the four principal, and four collateral: And not long after, the people of Bruges and Antwerp perfected that excellent invention, adding 24 other subordinate winds or points. By means of this excellent Instrument, and with all by the good success of Columbus: the Portugals, Eastward; the Spaniards, Westward; and the English, Northwards, have made many glorious and fortunate Expeditions; which had been utterly impossible to have been performed, and had been foolishly undertaken, when that help was wanting. I know there hath been much pains taken by some learned men, to prove the use of the Mariner's Compass to be far more ancient than is now commonly pretended. Fuller, a very learned and industrious man, but better skilled in the Hebrew tongue, than the philology of the Greeks and Latins, will have it known to Solomon, and by him taught unto the Tyrians and Phaenicians (the most famous Seamen of old times) but he brings no Argument of weight to make good the cause. Nor is it possible that such an excellent invention, so beneficial to the common good of all mankind, should have been forgotten and discontinued for the use of more than 2000 years, if ever the Tyrians and Phoenicians had been masters of it; who could not possibly conceal it (had they been so minded) from the Common-Mariners, or they not have communicated it for gain, or desire of glory, to the Greeks and Romans, under whom successively they lived. As little moment do I find in some other Arguments, as that the Lapis Heraclius of the Ancient writers, or the Versoria of Plautus, should be by them intended of the Mariner's Compass. For plainly the Versoria of Plautus, is no other than that piece of tackle which our Mariners now call the Belin, by which they use to turn their Sails, and fit them to the change of every wind. And so much doth appear by the Poet himself, in the Comedy which he calls Mercator; saying, Hinc ventus nunc secundus est, cape modo Versoriam. So called from Verso, to turn often; or from Versum the first Supine of Verto; whence Velum vertere is a common phrase amongst the Latins, used for the shifting of the Sail as the wind doth vary. As for the Load stone, it is called indeed Heraclius Lapis, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by the Greeks, not because Hercules Tyrius whom the Phoenicians invocated when they were at Sea, had first found out the virtue of it, as our Fuller thinketh; but because first found near Heraclea, a City of Lydia. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, saith Hesychius the old Grammarian. Called for the same reason Magnes, by the writers both Greek and Latin, because first found in the Territory of Magnesia, a City of Lydia also, whereof Heraclea was a part. So Suidas telleth us for the Greeks, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉: Heraclium Lapidem quidam Magnesiam reddiderunt, quia Heraclea pars est Magnesiae. Called for the very same reason Lydius Lapis also, and by them known only as a touch stone. Thus old Lucretius for the Latins, 

Quem Magneta vocant patrio de nomine Graii,  
Magnetum quia sit patriis de finibus ortus.   

Which Stone the Greeks do Magnes name,  
Because it from Magnesia came.    
But I have rambled further than I did intend, drawn by the virtue of the Loadstone too much out of my way. It is time now to return again into America: where the Spaniards at their first Arrival found the People without all manner of Apparel, nought skilled in Agriculture, making their bread either of a Plant called Maize, or a kind of Root called Jucca; a Root wherein is a venomous liquor not inferior to the most deadly poisons; but having first queezed out this juice, and after dried and prepared the Root, they made their Bread of it. They worshipped Devilish Spirits, whom they called Zemes; in remembrance of whom they kept certain Images made of Cotton wool, like our children's Babies: to which they did great reverence, as supposing the Spirit of the Zemes to be in them; and to blind them the more, the Devil would cause these Puppets to seem to move, and to make a noise: They stood also in so great fear of them, that they durst not displease them; for if their wills were not fulfilled, the Devil straight executed vengeance upon some of their Children; so holding this infatuated People in perpetual thraldom. So ignorant they were of all things which they had not seen, that they thought the Christians to be immortal: wondering exceedingly at the Sails, Masts, and Tackle of their Ships; themselves knowing no Ships or other Vessels, but huge Troughs made of some great bodied tree. But this opinion of the Christians immortality (in the sense they meant it) did not long continue: for having taken some of them, they held their heads under the water till they had quite choked them; by which they knew them to be mortal like other men. Quite destitute of all good learning, they reckoned their time by a confused observation of the course of the Moon: and strangely admired to see the Spaniards know the health and affairs of one another, only by reading of a Letter. Of a plain and honest nature, for the most part, they were found to be; Loving and kind in their entertainments, and apt to do good offices both private and public, according to their understandings: encouraged thereunto by an opinion which they had, that beyond some certain hills (but they knew not where) those which lived honestly and justly, or offered up their lives in defence of their Country, should find a place of everlasting peace and happiness. So natural is the knowledge of the Souls immortality, and of some Ubi for the future reception of it, that we find some tract or other of it in most barbarous Nations. And as for Gold and Silver, which the new come Christians so adored, they esteemed them no otherwise then as dross; though many times they adorned themselves therewith for the colours sake, as they did also with shells, feathers, and the like fine Gewgaws.  
Of complexion most of these Americans were reasonably fair and clear, little inclining unto blackness: notwithstanding that a great part of this Country lieth under the same parallel with AEthiopia, Libya, and the Land of Negroes. So that the extraordinary heat of the Sun is not (as some imagine) the cause of that blackness: though accidentally it may turn the skin into such a colour; as we see in many Country-Lasses, even in colder Climates, whose faces are continually exposed to the Sun and weather. Others more wise in their own conceits (but in no bodies else) will have the Natural Seed of the Africans to be black of colour; contrary both to sense and reason, Experience and true Natural Philosophy being both against it. And some will have this Blackness laid as a curse on Cham, (from whose posterity the African Nations do derive themselves) because, forsooth, he had carnal knowledge of his wife when they were in the Ark: a fancy as ridiculous, as the other false. So that we must refer it wholly to God's secret pleasure, though possibly enough the curse of God on Cham and on his posterity (though for some cause unknown to us) hath an influence on it.  
Touching the Original of this People, it is most probable that they descended from the Tartars; for which there are some Arguments of especial weight. For first, it may be proved in the way of Negation, that they came not from Europe, as having no remainder of the Arts. Learning, and Civilities of it: And secondly, that they came not from afric, in regard they have no black men amongst them, except some few which dwell on the Sea coasts over against Guinea in afric, from whence they are supposed by some rempest to have been brought hither: Thirdly, that they have not the least token or show of the arts and industry of China, India, or any civil Region on that side of Asia. The affirmative Arguments prove first, that they came from Asia; next in particular from Tartary. That they came out of Asia, is more than manifest, in that the Westside of the Country towards Asia is far more populous than the East towards Europe: of which there can be no other reason assigned, than that three parts were first inhabited, and that from hence the rest was peopled. Next, the idolatry of the people, and the particularities thereof, their incivility, and barbarous qualities, tell us that they are most like the Tartars of any. Thirdly, the Westside of America if if it be not Continent with Tartary, is yet disjoined by a very small Strait, as may be perceived in all our Maps and Cards, as also in the Description of these Countries: so that there is into these Countries a very quick and easy passage. And fourthly, the people of Quivira, which of all the Provinces of America is the the nearest unto Tartary, are said to, follow in their whole course of their life, the Seasons and best pasturing of their cattle, just like the Scythian Nomads, or Tartarian Hordes; an evident argument of their Original descent.  
But from what Root soever they did first descend, certain it is that they had settled here many Ages since, and overspread all the parts and quarters of this spacious Continent; there being no place which the Spaniards or any other Adventurers found desolate or waste, and without Inhabitants. But their numbers much diminished since these late Discoveries; the Spaniards behaving themselves most inhumanely towards this unarmed and naked People, killing them up like sheep appointed to the slaughter, or otherwise consuming them in their Mines and works of drudgery. And had not Charles the fifth ordained with most Christian prudence, that the Natives should not be compelled to work in the Mines against their wills, but that the Spaniards should provide themselves of Slaves elsewhere, the Natives in a little longer time had been quite exterminated, to the great reproach of Christianity and the Gospel. For so exceeding barbarous and bloody were they at their first coming thither, that Haithney, a Nobleman amongst them, being persuaded to embrace the Christian faith, demanded first what he should get by being of that Religion? and was answered, that he should get Heaven & the joys there of: Then would he know, what place was destinate to such as died unbaptised? and was answered, that they went to Hell, & the torments of it: Finally, ask unto which of these two Places the Spaniards went? and being told they went to Heaven; he renounced his Baptism, protesting that he would rather go to Hell with the unbaptized, then to live in Heaven with so cruel a people. The rest were driven unto the Font like so many horses to the watering place; and received into the Church of Christ without any instruction: inso much that one old Friar (as himself confessed to Charles the fifth) had Christened 700000 of them, and another of that rank 300000. never acquainting them with any of the Articles of the Christian faith, or points of Religious conversation, (except it were to be obedient to their Pastors and Teachers.) Yet here I must confess, (for I am ●oth to defraud any man of his due) there hath been made a great improvement of Christianity: the number of Christians in this Country, being thought by some learned men of the Church of Rome to equal all those of the Latin Churches in Europe. And though perhaps constrained at first unto it as a new Religion, and of a stricter Rule than that which before they had; yet by long time and education, it is now grown more plausible and familiar to them. The Church hereof governed by the four Archbishops of 1 Mexico, 2 Lima. 3 S. Foy & 4 Dominico; who have under them 25 Suffragan Bishops, all liberally endowed and provided for.  
When this new world came first acquainted with the old, Isabel Queen of Castille, would not permit any of her husband Ferdinando's subjects to be planted here, viz. Arragonians, or Valentians, but licenced the Castilians, Andalusians, biscain's▪ and the rest of her own people only, envying the wealth hereof to the rest. When she was dead, Ferdinando licenced generally all the Spaniards, excluding only the Portugals. But so rich a prize could not so warily be sensed, but that Portugals, French, English, and now of late the Low-country-men have laid in their own Barns part of the Spaniards harvest; who well hoped to have had a Monopoly of so wealthy a Region, and to have enjoyed without any rival or competitor, the possession (I cannot say the love) of a country so abundantly fruitful. For though some of the Kings of Spain, have been used to say, that they loved the East Indies for their Mistress only, in whose favours they could patiently enough endure a Rival; but esteemed America as their wife, in whose love they could not brook a Competitor without fowl dishonour; yet by his leave (or without it rather) some of his neighbours have made bold with his wife in these later times, though in the affections of his Mistress they have greater interest. But these attempts of the English and Hollanders, have been an occasion of great strength to the whole Country. For whereas in our first Wars with Spain, our private Adventures found the Seacoasts almost naked of defence, and thereupon many a rich and prosperous voyage to these parts: the Spaniards upon sight of that weakness and disadvantage, so strongly fortified their Havens and Sea-Towns, that towards the later end of the reign of Queen Elizabeth, we were not able to accomplish that with great and public Forces, which before had been performed by small and private; which caused our Captains and Adventurers, failing oftentimes in the Continent, to make up their Market on the Seas, in the return of the Spanish Navies, as they yet do.  
This New World is very plentiful of Spices, Fruits, and such Creatures which the old World never knew; stocked with such store of Kine and Bulls, (brought hither out of Europe since the first discovery) that the Spaniards kill thousands of them yearly, for their tallow and hides only; blest with such abundance of Gold, that they found in many of their Mines more Gold than Earth: a Metal which the Americans not regarding, greedily exchanged for hammers, knives, axes, and the like tools of iron; for before, they were wont to make their Canoes or Boats plain without, and hollow within, by the force of fire. Other particularities shall be specified in the particular Descriptions of the several Countries. I shall now only take a brief view of such of their Beasts and Fowls, as either this old World did not know, or knew not in such shapes and qualities, as are there presented. Their Lions less in greatness then those in Africa, are said to be of colour grey, and so nimble as to climb Trees; their Dogs snouted like Foxes, but deprived of that property which the Logicians call Proprium quarto modo, for they could not bark: their Hogs with talons sharp as Razors, and the navel of their bodies on the ●idge of their backs: their Stags and Deer without Horns; their Sheep (they call them Lamas) not only profitable as with us, for food and raiment, but accustomed to the carrying of burdens, some of of 150 pound weight. Amongst such strange Beasts as this old World kew not, we may reckon that deformed one (whose name I find not) whose forepart resembleth a Fox, the hinder part an Ape, except the Feet only which are like a Man's: beneath her belly a Receptacle like a Purse where she keeps her young till they be able to shift for themselves, never coming thence but when they suck, and then in again. The Armadilla is in form like a barbed Horse, seeming to be armed all over, and that with Artificial (rather than natural) Plates, which do shut and open. The Vi●ugue resembleth a Goat, but greater and more profitable; of the Fleece whereof they make Rugs. Cover, and Stuffs; and in the Belly find the Bezoar, sometimes two or three, a loveraign Antidote against Poisons and venomous Diseases. A kind of Hare resembling a Want in his feet, and a Cat in his tail, under whose chin nature hath fastened a little Bag, which she hath also taught him to use as a Store house; for in this, having filled his Belly, he preserveth the remnant of his Provision. The Pigritia, a little Beast (not so named for nought) which in fourteen days cannot go so far as a man may easily throw a stone. Then for their Birds, they have them there in such variety of colours, that the Indians will perfectly represent in Feathers whatsoever they see drawn with Pencils; insomuch as a Figure of S. Francis made of Feathers was presented to Pope Sixtus Quintus, whose eye could not discern them to be natural colours, but thought them pencil-work, till he made trial with his fingers. One called the Tominejo, of all colours, so little that it seems no bigger than a Bee or Butterfly; the mouth thereof no bigger than the eye of a needle; yet yielding not to the Nightingale in the sweetness of its note and Music; the Bird and Nest put into Gold Scales, not weighing above 24. grains, yet beautified with Feathers of so many colours, especially in the neck and breast, that the Indians make great use of them in their Feather pictures. Others as big as these are little. The Condores of such strength and greatness, that they will fall upon a Sheep or Calf, open it, and eat it. Like Miracles of nature have they in their Fruits and Plants, more proper unto Natural History then to this Discourse: and many medicinal Drugs of rare operation, which I leave to the consideration of the Learned Herbarists. I am too much a Fool to be a Physician, and therefore will not deal in such things as are out of my Element. Yet somewhat of this kind we may chance to meet with in the Description and Survey of the several Provinces, into which this new World is divided.  
The whole is naturally divided into two great Peninsulas; whereof that towards the North is called Mexicana, from Mexico the chief City and Province of it, supposed (for the most Northern parts of it are not yet discovered) to contain 13000 miles in compass. That towards the South, hath the name of Peruana, from the great Country of Peru, the circumnavigation whereof is reckoned at 17000 Italian miles. The Isthmus which joineth these two together, very long but narrow; in some places not above twelve miles from Sea to Sea; in many not above seventeen. By the Spaniards it is called the Streite of Darien, from a River of that name in Peruana, near unto the Isthmus, and is so small a Ligament for so great a Body that some have thought of turning these two Peninsulas into perfect Lands. Certain it is, that many have motioned to the Council of Spain, the cutting of a navigable channel through this small Isthmus, so to shorten their common voyages to China, and the Moluccoes. But the Kings of Spain have not hitherto attempted it; partly because if he should employ the Americans in the work, he should lose these few of them, which his people have suffered to live; partly because the Slaves which they yearly buy out of Africa, do but suffice for the Mines and Sugar-houses; but principally, lest the passages by the Cape of good hope, being left, those Seas might become a receptacle of Pirates. Which doubtless was a very prudent and Politic consideration. Many times I have read of the like attempts began, but never of any finished. Sesostris King of Egypt, Darius of Persia, one of the Ptolemy's, and a late capricious Portugal, had the like Plot, to make a passage from the Red-Sea to the Mediterranean: so had Caesar, Caligula, and Nero, Emperors of Rome, upon the Corinthian Isthmus. Another of the same nature, had Charles the great, to let the Rhine into the Danow; the like had Lucius Verus to join the Rhine, and the Rhone: all which, in their peculiar places, we have already touched. Nicanor also King of Syria, intended to have made a channel, from the Caspian to the Euxine Sea; an infinite project: but neither he nor any of the rest could finish these works; God it seemeth, being not pleased at such proud and haughty enterprises. And yet perhaps the want of treasure hath not been the least cause why the like projects have not proceeded; besides the dreadful noises and apparitions, which (as we have already said) continually affrighted the workmen.  
Not less observable than this great but unsuccessful design, of cutting a passage thorough this Isthmus from one Sea to the other, was that notable, but a like successless Attempt of John Oxenham, an adventurous Englishman, in a passage over it by Land. This man being one of the Followers of Sir Francis Drake, arriving in a small Bark with ●0 of his Companions, a little above Nombre di Dios▪ the chiefest Town of all the Isthmus, drew his Ship on Land, covered it with boughs, and marched over the Land with his Company guided by Negroes, till he came to a River. There he cut down Wood, made him a Pinnace, entered the South Sea, went to the Isle of Pearls, where he stayed ten days: intercepted in two Spanish Ships (who feared no Enemy on that side) 60000 pound weight of Gold, 200000 pound weight in bars of silver, and returned in safety to the Land. And though by the mutiny of some of his own Company he neither returned into his Country, nor unto his ●hip: yet is it an Adventure not to be forgotten, in that never attempted by any other; and by the Spanish Writers recorded with much admiration.  
But to return to the Division of this Country, and the two main parts thereof which this Streit uniteth: Mexicana, or the Northern Peninsula, may be most properly divided into the Continent and Lands: the Continent again into the several Provinces of 1 Estotiland, 2 Nova Francia, 3 Virginia; 4 Florida, 5 Califormia, 6 Nova Gallicia, 7 Nova Hispania, and 8 Guatimala; each of them branched into many sub divisions, and lesser Territories. Peruana, or the Southern Peninsula, taking in some part of the Isthmus, as before we did, hath on the Continent the Provinces of 1 Castilia Aurea, 2 Nova Granado, 3 Peru, 4 Chile, 5 Paraguay, 6 Brasil, 7 Guiana, and 8 Paria, with their several members, parts, and particular Regions. The Lands which belong to both dispersed either in the Southern Ocean, called Mare del Zur, where there is not any one of note, but 1. Those called Los Ladrones, and 2 the Lands of Solomon: or in the Northern Ocean, or Mare deal Norte, reduced unto 3 the Caribes, 4 Porto Rico, 5 Hispaniola, 6 Cuba, and 7 Jamaica. In the survey of which particulars we will begin with those which lie on the North-east of this great Continent, not possessed by the Spaniard; and passing thorough the Plantations of such other Nations as have any footing in the same, come by degrees to the Estates of the King of Spain, that we may lay them altogether without interruption: beginning with Estotiland, the most Northern part, and that which (as some say) was discovered first.  

OF ESTOTILAND.  
ESTOTILAND, as under that name we comprehend those Regions of the Mexicana which lie most towards the North and East, hath on the East the main Ocean, on the South, Canada, or Nova Francia; on the West, some unknown Tract not yet discovered; and on the North a Bay or Inlet of the Sea called Hudsons' Straits, and called so from Henry Hudson an Englishman, who by this way endeavoured to find out a more commodious and quick passage to Cathay and China, than had been formerly discovered. It comprehends, 1 Estotiland specially so called, 2 Terra Corterialis, 3 Newfound Land, and 4 the Isles of Bacaleos.  
1. And first Estotiland specially so called, is the most Northern Region on the East side of America, lying betwixt Hudsons' Straits on the North; and Terra Corterialis, on the South. The soil sufficiently enriched with natural endowments, said to have in it Mines of Gold and other Metals; but I doubt it lieth too much North for Gold, whatsoever it may do for Brass and Iron. The People rude and void of goodness, naked, notwithstanding the extreme cold of the Country; not having either the wit or the care to cover their bodies with the skins of those Beasts which they kill by hunting; though their Bellies teach them to keep life by the Flesh thereof. Said by the first Discoverers to sow Corn, to make Beer or Ale, and to have many Barks of their own with which they traded into Groenland; as also to have many Cities and Castles, some Temples consecrate to their Idols, where they first Sacrificed men, and after eat them. The Language which they spoke, expressed in Characters of their own; but some knowledge of the Latin Tongue there had been amongst them, and Latin Books in the Library of one of their Kings, understood by few.  
Such were the Reports made of this Country by the first Discoverers, who were certain Fishermen of Freezland, cast by a Tempest on this Coast about the year 1350. Six of them only got on Land, where all died save one: who after along wand'ring from one Prince's Court to another, found means to return into his own Country: the King whereof called Zichumi, being a great Adventurer in the feats of Arms, prepared for the further Discovery and Conquest of it. Animared thereunto by the opportune coming of Nicolo and Antonio Zeni, two noble Gentlemen of Venice, who desiring to see the fashions of the World, furnished a ship at their own charges, and passing the Straits of Gibraltar held their course northward, with an intent to see England and Flanders. But driven by tempest on this Island, An. 1380. They were kindly welcomed by the King, then newly prosperous in a War against those of Norway: who liked Nicolo so well, that he gave him a command in his Navy, and under his good conduct won many Lands, discovered Groenland, and provided for the conquest of Estotiland also. But Nicolo in the main time dying, the business was pursued by his brother Antonio, the King in person making one in the undertaking: who liked the Country so well, being once possessed of it, that he built a City in it, and there determining to spend the rest of his days, sent back Antonio unto Freezland, with the most of his People.  
This is the substance of the story of the first Discovery, published long since by one Francisco Marcellino out of the Letters of the Zeni, which had they been considered of as they might have been, we had not so long wanted the acquaintance of this part of the World. But whether it were that their reports were esteemed as fabulous by the States of Europe, or that the time was not yet ripe for this great Discovery; there was nothing done in pursuance of it: Zichumi never going back to his own Country, and Freezland not long after conquered by the Kings of Norway. So that the knowledge of it was quite lost again till these later days. Said in the Letters of the Zeni, to be well stored with Fowl, and the Eggs of Birds which they found there for their refreshing: the Haven where they Landed to be called Cape Trin; the People to be of small Stature, fearful, and to hide themselves in Caves, at the sight of the Freezlanders: that there was a Mountain always burning or casting smoke; together with a certain Spring, whence issued a water as black as Pitch; but no such Cities, Forts, and Temples, as the Fisherman spoke of. The Country West from Freezland 1000 miles.  
To give you the face of it as it stand, as the present, it is said to be well cultivated, fruitful of all necessaries for the life of man, and rich in metals; but extreme cold: watered with four Rivers, which rising out of an high Mountain in the midst of the Country, disperse themselves over all parts of it. The People said to be more ingenious, of better judgements, and more skilled in most Mechanic Arts than the rest of the Americans were at the first Discovery; which argueth some more civil People to have been formerly amongst them. Their Garments of the skins of Beasts or Sea-Calves; with which also they covered the outside of their Boats, to Keep out the water, and make them able to endure the Sea. What Towns they have, and whether the name of Cape Trin be still remaining, I am not able to discover; this Country lying still for the most part hidden in a Northern Mist. All we can say, is, that some English names have been imposed of late on some Capes and Promontories lying on the Northern shores hereof towards Hudsons' Straits, by Hudson and such others of the English Nation who pursued that enterprise. Of which sort are Prince Henry's Foreland; towards the East, almost at the entries of those Straits: and then proceeding towards the West, Cape Charles, Kings Foreland: and last of all, Cape Wolstenham, at the end thereof, where these Straits open into a large and capacious Bay, called hudson's Bay. But of these more particularly in another place, where we endeavour the Discovery of such parts of the World as are yet unknown, and so within the compass of a Terra incognita.  
2. TERRA CORTERIALIS hath on the North Estotiland, on the South New-France. So called from Gaspar Corterialis, who in the year 1500 left his name unto it. It is called also Terra di-Laborodoro, both from the pains required of the Husbandman, and the great recompense which it gives him: in the same sense as Campania in the Realm of Naples is named Terra di Lavoro. By the French, who succeeded in the possession hereof after the Spaniard had forsaken it, it was called New-Bretagne, with reference to Bretagne in France their own natural Country.  
The People at the first coming of Corterialis were found to be barbarous enough, well coloured, swift of foot, and very good Archers: their clothing of Beasts skins, their habitations Caves, or some sorry Cottages; their Religion Paganism, or none; their directions Sooth-saying. Not so forgetful of the Law which Nature had planted in them, as not to know the necessary use of marriage; but extremely jealous. Better conditioned at the present then in former times, by their near neighbourhood to the French, and commerce with Foreigners: affirmed to be very well disposed, to feed most generally on Fish, and to adorn themselves with Bracelets of brass or silver. Their chief Towns, 1 Breast, 2 Sancta Maria, 3 Cabo Marzo, of which little memorable.  
The Country first discovered by Sebastian Cabot, the son of John Cabot before mentioned: who in the year 1499. at the charges and encouragement of King Henry 7. setting sail from Bristol, first made the discovery of these parts, as far as to the Latitude of 67 and an half, (which brings Est●tiland within the compass also of his Discoveries.) The Land which 〈◊〉 first saw, he called Prima Vesta; and an Island lying before it he called S. john's, because discovered on the day of S. John Baptist. They found upon the Country plenty of White Bears, Stags greater than ours, Scut-fish of a yard long, and such store of Cod fish (which the Inhabitants called Baccalaos) that their multitudes sometimes stayed his ships, hence the occasion of their name. Recurning home, he found great preparations for a war in Scotland: so that nothing else was done in this Discovery by the English Nation. But three years after, Gaspar Corterialis a Portugueze, setting sail from Lisbon, fell upon those parts of Cabots' Discoveries, which since bear his name: from whence he brought the piece of a gilded Sword of Italian workmanship, left there most probably by one of the Cabots' Returning again the next year, he was no more heard of; drowned in the sea, or slain by the Savages on the land; as was his brother Michael, in the year next following. Neglected after this, till the French having planted in Nova Francia, cast an eye upon it; who gave the name of Breast to a town hereof, (according to the name of a noted Port in little Bretagne:) but whether they settled any Colony in it, or only did resort unto it in the way of trading, I am not able to determine.  
3. NEWFOUNDLAND, (Terra Nova, as the Latins call it) is a great Island lying on the South of Corterialis; from which parted by a Frith or Streit called Gulf des Chasteaux. So called from the late discovery of it, when discovered first, though it be some forces of years ago: as Wickhams' College in Oxford hath the name of New College, though founded divers Ages past, because it was the Newest when that name was given.  
The dimensions of the Country I have nowhere met with. But for the quantity hereof it is said to be better inhabited in the North parts then in the South, though the South the fitter of the two for habitation. Furnished upon the sea coasts with abundance of Codfish, as also with Herrings, Salmon, Thornbacks, Smelts, Oysters, and Muscles with Pearls in them. Within the Land a goodly Country, naturally beautified with Roses, sown with Pease, planted with stately Trees, and otherwise diversified both for pleasure and profit: the Air hereof never very extreme, more temperate in the depth of winter then with us in England, the brock's being never so frozen over, that the ice is able to bear a dog; & those little Frosts but seldom holding 3 nights together. The people of reasonable stature, full eyed, broad faced, but beardless, their faces coloured with Ochre; their houses, Poles set round meeting together in the top, and covered over with skins, an hearth or fire-place in the midst; their Boats of Bark, 20 foot long, and 4 in breadth, not weighing above 100 pound weight, every of which will carry four men, and is by them carried to all places of their Removes.  
Places of most importance in it are the several Havens (of which it is conceived to have more, and more commodious, than any one Island of the World for the bigness of it): not beautified with towns or buildings, but yielding very safe stations to the greatest ships: the chief whereof 1 Rennosa or Roigneuse, on the North of the Promontory called Cape de Raz the Southeast Angle of the Island; of much resort for fishing, from several Countries. 2 Portus Formosus, or Fair-Haven, three miles' North of the other, capable of great ships, and bearing into the main land above 40 miles. Situate in the Latitude of 46. and 40 minutes. 3 Thornbay, by the Portugals named Enseada Grande. 4 Trinity Bay on the North of Cape S. Francis, by the Portugals called Bahia de la Conception; a large Bay, five miles broad in the narrowest place, yet safe withal and of very good Anchorage. 5 Bona Vesta, the name of a Port and Promontory. 6 Whitebay, or Bay-Blanche, as the French call it, safe and capacious, on the North of the promontory of S. John. Betwixt which and Cape de Grat, on the North-east Angle of the Island, is no Port of note. Then on the Southside of the Island, and the West of Cape de Raz, is 7 Port Trespassez, 8 Port Presenza, and 9 Port des Basques (or the biscain's Haven) and on the Westside, having doubled the Cape de Raye, in the South-west Angle of the Island, there is 10 S. George's Bay; all of them safe, capacious, and of great resort.  
4. Before the Island, at the distance of 25 Leagues from Cape de Raye, lieth a long bank or ridge of ground, extended in length many hundred leagues, in breadth 24 leagues where broadest, in other places but sixteen; and all about it certain Lands, which Cabot by one common name called BACALAOS (that name peculiar now unto one alone) from the great multitudes of Codfish (by the Natives called Bacalaos) which swarmed hereabouts; so numerous, that they hindered the passage of his ships, as before was noted, and lay in such shoals upon the Coasts, that the Bears caught them with their claws and drew them on land. The Government at that time by Kings, before whom the People in the most formal expressions of duty and reverence used to rub their noses, or struck their foreheads: which if the King observed or accepred of, and meant to grace the party which had so adored him, he turned his head to his left (shoulder as a mark of favour.  
The first Discoverers of this Country (but not known then to be an Island) were the two Cabots, John, and his son Sebastian, employed herein by Henry the 7. 1497. as before was noted: the business being laid aside at his coming back, was afterwards revived by Thorn and Eliot, two of Bristol; who taking a more perfect view of it than was took by the Cabots, ascribed to themselves the discovery of it, and animated King Henry the 8, unto the enterprise, which was done An. 1527 but with ill success. In the mean time the Normans, Portugals, and Britons of France had resorted to it; and changed the names which by the English had been given to the Bays and Promontories. But the English would not so relinquish their pretensions to the Premier Seisin: And therefore in the year 1583. Sir Humphrey ●ilbert took possession of it in the name of the Queen of England, interdicted all other Nations the use of Fishing, and intended to have settled there an English Colony. But being wracked in his return, the sending of the Colony was discontinued till the year 1608. when undertook by John Guy a Merchant of Bristol, who most successfully performed it; the Colony so prospering in a little time, that they had Wheat, Rye, Turnips, Coleworts of their own sowing; some probability of metals, a certainty of Sables, Musk, and other precious commodities, besides their fishing, though that the great occasion of their settling there. Such plenty is there found of Ling and Codfish, all about the Coasts, that ordinarily our men take 200 or 300 of them within four hours' space; which they convey from hence to all parts of Europe.   

OF CANADA.  
CANADA is bounded on the North with Corterialis, on the South with New-England, on the East with the Main Ocean; the Countries lying on the West, either not yet discovered, or not perfectly known. So called from the River Canada, the greatest, not of this Province only, but of all this Peninsula. A River which hath its Fountain in the undiscovered parts of this Northern Tract, sometimes enlarged into great Lakes, and presently reduced to a narrower channel, with many great windings and Reaches in it. Having embosomed almost all the rest of the Rivers of this Country, it emptieth itself into the Great Bay of St. Laurence, over against the Isle of Assumption, being at the mouth 40 Leagues in breadth, and 150 Fathom deep. It is also called Nova Francia from the French, who following the tract of Cabot and Corterialis made a further Discovery of these parts, and planted several Colonies in them. The business first undertaken by Jaques Cartier, An. 1534. received here gladly by the Natives, with singing, dancing, and expressing much sign of joy: pursued by Monsieur Roberval, sent thither in the year 1542. by King Francis the first, not only to discover the Country, but to plant some parts of it, who built there a fair Fortress for his greater safety; followed therein by divers others of that Nation, in their several times.  
The nature of the soil and people we shall best discover in the several parts of it; each differing from one another, and so not easily conformed to a general Character. Look we now only on the principal Rivers of the whole, 1 Canada, of which before, 2 Pemtegonet or Norumbegue, as some call it, of which more hereafter. 3. Quimbeque falling into the Ocean as the others do, 4 Rio S. Johan, ending its course in a large Bay called Bay Francoise, interposed betwixt Nova Scotia and the rest of this Country. 5 Les trois Riviers, which rising far north, and passing thorough two great Lakes, falleth into the Canada, 6 Sagnenay, of the same Original, Course, and Fall. A River of so strong a Current, that it suffereth not the Sea to flow up its Channel; so deep, that in many places it attaineth to 100 Fathoms; and though but narrow at the mouth, yet groweth it broader and broader upwards: and having received many lesser streams, looseth itself at last, where the other doth.  
It containeth in it the several Regions of 1 Novia Francia, specially so called, 2 Nova Scotia, 3 Norumbegue, and 4 the Isles adjoining.  
1. NOVA FRANCIA specially so named, is situate on the South of Corterialis, and on the North of the great River Canada towards the East; but on both sides of it, in the Western and more inland parts. The Country naturally full of Stags, Bears, Hares, Matterns and Foxes, whose flesh the People did eat raw (till more civilised) having first dried it either in the smoke or Sun, as they do their Fish. They have also store of Coneys, Fowl and Fish great plenty; one Fish more memorable than the rest, which they call Adothnel, whose body and head is like that of a Greyhound. But their greatest Jewels are their Chains of Esurgnie; a shellfish of the whitest colour, excellent for the staunching of blood; which they fashion into Beads and Bracelets, and so wear, or sell them. Not very plentiful of fruits, or fit for tillage; yet it becedeth some Corn, and of pulse good plenty. The Air more cold then in other Countries of like height, partly by reason of the greatness of the River, which being wholly of fresh water, and so large withal, chilleth the Air on both sides of it; partly because of the abundance of Ice, and those hills of snow which the northwind passeth over in the way to this Country.  
The People, when the French first discovered them, very rude and barbarous; few of them furnished with houses, but removing from one place to another, as their food decayed, and carrying all their goods with them (a thing easily done) upon those removes. Such as lived towards the Sea, or the greater Rivers, somewhat better housed. For in the day time they fish in their Boats, which they draw unto the Land at night, and turning them upside down, sleep under them. As ill apparelled as housed for they went all naked, except a little piece of skin before their Privities. Some of them had their heads quite shaved, excepting one Bush of hair on the top of the Crown, which they suffered to grow to the length of an horses Tail, tied up with Leather-strings in a knot. Each man allowed his two or three wives apiece; and they so constant to their Husband that they never marry after his death, but keep themselves continually in a mourning habit, a vizard as it were, made of grease and Coal-dust, which they spread over all their bodies. The women labour more than the men, both in fishing and husbandry; digging the ground instead of Ploughing, with certain pieces of wood, where they sow their Maiz (a Plant of which they make their Bread, in most parts of America) Idolaters in general before the coming of the French, as they are most of them at this day; the French and others which have planted in these Northern parts having added little more unto Christianity, then by the Colonies they brought with them. Yet in the midst of this darkness they saw so much light, as to believe that when they died, they went immediately to the Stars, from thence conveyed to certain green and pleasant fields full of flowers and fruits. Plain Evidence that they believed the immortality of the soul, and that there was some place appointed for reception of it.  
The chief Towns of it at that time, 1. Hochelaga, round in figure, compassed about with three Course of timber Ramparts, one within the other, sharp at the top, about two Rods high; with one gate only to give entrance, and that well fortified (in their kind) with Piles and Bars. It had in it 50 great houses, in the midst of every one a Court, and in the middle of that Court a place which they made their fire on. Situate far within the Land, about six or seven Leagues from the banks of the River Canada, in the most pleasant part of the Country; and therefore made the seat of their King whom they highly reverenced, and carried him on their shoulders sitting on a Carpet of skins. 2 Stadac, or Stadacone, and 3. Quebecque, which the French call S. Croix, on the course of the same River also; this last a Colony of the French. 4 Tadonsac, a safe but small Haven, not capable of above 20 ships; at the mouth of Saguenay. 5 Franco-Roy, a Castle built by Monseiur Roberval, when he came first into this Country. 7 S. Lewis, designed for a French Colony by Monseiur de Champlain, An. 1611. but never came to great effect: yet so much Champlain got by the undertaking, that he left it his name to a great Lake of this Country (full of little Lands) in the Lands of the Uroqueis, inhabiting on the South of the river Canada, into which it emptieth itself at the last.  
2. NOVA SCOTIA containeth that part of the Countries of Canada or Nova Francia, which the French call Accadie or Cadie, (being a Peninsula or Demy-Iland) with so much of the main-land as lieth between the River Canada and the large Bay called Bay-Francoise, from the River of S. Croix upon the West, to the Isle of Assumption on the East. So called by King James, in the Grant of these Countries to Sir William Alexander, after Lord Secretary of Scotland, and by King Charles for his approved fidelity most deservedly created Earl of Sterling. The Letters Patents of which Donation bear Date Anno 1621. What time the French having been outed of their holds here by Sir Sam. Argal Governor of Virginia, had abandoned the South parts of Canada, and betook themselves more into the North, and the higher parts of the Course of that River. And in pursuance of this Grant, the said Sir William Alexander in the year 1622. sent a Colony hither: and having procured a new Map to be made of the Country, caused the Peninsula lying on this side of the Bay Francoise to be called Nova Caledonia; that on the North thereof to be called Nova Alexandria; giving new names also unto most of the Ports and Promontories. For the better accomplishment of which business, he obtained also a Patent for advancing a certain number of Persons to the hereditary dignity of Baronet's, or Knights of Nova Scotia, as we call them commonly, distinguished from others by a Ribbin of Orange tauney; the money raised upon which Patent was to be wholly employed towards this Plantation. But being unable with those helps (as certainly Plantations are of too great burden for a private person) or willing to employ his money to more profit, he sold Port-Royal to the French, and after discontinued his endeavours in it.  
Places of most importance in it, 1. Port Royal, in Accadie or Nova Caledonia, on the Bay-Francoise, once made a Colony of the French by Monsieur de Monts, An. 1604. continued with much difficulty till the year 1613. when destroyed by Sir Samuel Argal then Governor of the English Plantations in Virginia, by reason that the Jesuits whose neighbourhood he liked not of, had begun to nest there. Sold since again unto the French, as before is said, by whom still possessed. 2 S. Luke's Bay, by the French called Port au Monton. 3 Gasp, a noted Port in New-Alexandria, opposite to the Isle of Assumption. 4 Gachepe, on a fair Bay in the same Coast also.  
3. NORUMBEGA hath on the North-east Nova Scotia, on the South west Virginia. The air is of a good temper, the soil fruitful, and the people in differently civil; all of them, as well men as women, painting their faces. The men are much affected to hunting; and therefore never give their daughters to any, unless he be well skilled in that game also. The Women are here very chaste, and so well love their husbands, that if at any time they chance to be slain, the widows will neither marry, nor eat flesh, till the death of their husbands be revenged. They both dance much; and for more nimbleness, sometimes stark naked. The Sea upon the Coasts so shallow and so full of sands, that it is very ill failing all along these shores. The towns, or habitations rather, so differently called by the French, Portugals, and Spaniard, that there is not much certainty known of them. Yet most have formerly agreed upon Norumbegua, or Arampec, as the Natives call it; said to be a large, populous, and well-built town, and to be situate on a fair and capacious River of the same name also. But later Observations tell us there is no such matter; that the River which the first Relations did intend, is called Pemtegonet, neither large nor pleasant; and that the place by them meant is called Agguncia, so far from being a fair City, that there are only a few sheds or Cabins covered with the barks of trees, or the skins of beasts. Howsoever I have let it stand on the first reports, it being possible enough that the Town might fall into decay, deserted on the coming of so many several Pretenders; and that the Sheds or Cabins which the last men speak of, may be only the remainders of it.  
4. Adjoining to these Countries of Canada are several Lands not joined in any common name, but yet deserving some consideration in this place and time. The principal whereof, 1 NATISCOTEC, called the Isle of Assumption, situate in the very mouth of the River, was first discovered by Jaques Carher, An. 1534. in length 35 Leagues, seven or eight in breadth. The Island very plain and level, of a fruitful soil, beautified with Trees of several sorts, replenished with great plenty both of Fowl and Fish, and furnished with convenient Rhodes, though with no good Havens. Not hitherto inhabited, for aught I can find. 2 RAMEAE, a fry of little Lands in the great Golf of S. Laurence, on the South of Natiscotec, first found out or frequented by the Citizens of S. Malo in Bretagne, An. 1590. of great resort for the Morse-fishing, used upon the Coasts, which is here so gainful, that a French Bark in a very little time killed 1500 of them. These Morses (take this by the way) are a kind of Sea-Horses, or Sea-oxens, with two teeth of a foot long growing downwards out of the upper Jaw, sold dearer than Ivory, because esteemed a Sovereign Antidote against poisons. They have also four feet, no ears, the horns about half an ell in length; the skin when dressed, twice as thick as that of a Bull; their flesh when young, as sweet and tender as a Veal. So fat and unctuous that with the bellies of five of them, there is made usually an Hogshead of Train-oil, as good as that of the Whale. 3. BRION, a small Island on the South of the Rameae, about two Leagues in length, and as many in breadth; of a rich soil, fat pasturage, well shaded with tall and lofty trees; and neighboured by a smaller Island called Isle Blanch, of the like fertility. 4. BRITON, (Insula Britonum) so named from Jaques Breton a Frenchman, in the time of Francis the first, called also the Island of S. Laurence, is situate on the South east of the Isle of Brion, in form triangular, in compass about 80 Leagues; pleasant and fruitful, though for the most part swelled with hills. Destitute of Rivers but interlaced with great Arms of the Sea, well stored with shellfish; and in the midst thereof a great Lake full of little Lands: the Woods replenished with plenty of Deer, black Foxes, and a Bird called Pengwin. Inhabited by the Natives only, though the Portugals did sometimes endeavour a Plantation in it; but finding the Air too cold for them, they again deserted it. The chief Haven is by the English called Newport, by the French Port aux Anglois, from the great resort of the English to it, in regard of their fishing. 5. ISLE DE SABLE, by the French so called from the sands which lie high about it; distant from the Breton Isle about 30 Leagues to the South, 15 Leagues in compass, but more long then broad, and of unsafe Landing. The planting of it, in regard of the safety of the place, attempted twice by the French, and once by the Portugals, but without success. 6. Others of less note, as Menego, and Les Isles des Oiseaux, I pass over purposely; there being nothing or but little to be spoken of them.  
So it appears by this Account that though the French have given the name of Nova Francia, to all these Countries; yet they never had the honour of the first discovery, wherein the English and the Portugueze had precedency of them: nor are possessed of any considerable part thereof, the Scots putting in for a large share; the English Masters of the best Ports, and all the Inlands of the Country in the hands of the Savages. Of these some great and powerful Nations oversway the rest the chief whereof are the Yroquois on the North-east of Norumbegua, neighboured by the Ochataignins, the Alboumequins, and the Nebicerines', the Souriquois, and Etechimins of Accadie and new Alexandria: the Montagnets, and the Attogovantans, on the banks of the Canada. All of them stout and hardy people, false of their words, treacherous in their practices, and merciless in their revenges. So well acquainted with the factions and divisions of Europe, that they know how to make use of one Nation against another; and by that means to keep themselves in their first estate, without being subject unto any. So that the footing which the English, French, or Scots have obtained amongst them, serve rather to secure themselves in the way of their Trading, then to entitle them unto any possession or command in the Country; the French being shut up in a few weak Forts on the North of the Canada; the Scots pretending only to a Bay or two in the South of Accadie; and the English being only Tenants at the will of the Natives for such conveniency of fishing as they have in the adjoining Lands.   

OF VIRGINIA.  
VIRGINIA hath on the North Canada, on the South Florida; on the East Mare del Noort; the western boundaries not known, or not well discovered. So called in honour of Queen Elizabeth, that Virgin-Monarch; when discovered (to any purpose) by Sir Walter Raleigh, An. 1584. By the natural Inhabitants called Apalchen, from a Town of that name; one of the chief in all the Country.  
The Inland parts hereof are Mountainous and barren, full of thick woods, a Receptacle for wild Beasts, and the wilder Savages. Towards the Sea more plain and fruitful, as will appear by the Survey of its several Provinces; Premising first that Virginia in the full Latitude thereof extendeth from the 34th. degree where it joins with Florida, unto the 44th. where it quartereth on Norumbega.  
The first Discovery hereof by the two Cabots, Father and Son, An. 1497. did first entitle the Crown of England to this Country; The Design after seconded by one Mr. Hare, bringing thence certain of the petit Kings or Princes hereof; who did Homage to K. Henry the 8. then sitting in his Royal Throne in the Palace of Westminster: but nothing further done in pursuance of it. And though John Verazzani, a noble Florentine, at the encouragement and charge of King Francis the first, An. 1524. discovered more of the Country then Cabot did; yet the French too much in love with the pleasures of France, or entangled in Civil Wars amongst themselves, looked no further after it: Insomuch that the Country lying thus neglected, was re-discovered by the charges and direction of Sir Walter Raleigh, than Captain of the Guard, and in great power and favour with Queen Elizabeth, An. 1584. who sending Master Philip Amadas, and Master Arthur Barlow upon this employment, did by them take possession of it in Queen Elizabeth's name, in honour of whom he caused it to be called Virginia. The next year he sent hither a Colony under the conduct of the noble Sir Richard Greenvile: who not supplied with necessaries for their subsistence, returned home again. In the year 1587., a second Colony is sent hither, but as successless as the first: the business being undertaken only on a private Purse, not owned as the interest of the State, or of public moment, till the year 1606. In the mean time the North parts of this Country being more perfectly discovered by Captain Bartholomew Gosnold, An. 1602. and the middle parts being taken up by the Hollanders not long after, that is to say, in the year 1609. the whole became divided into these three parts, 1 New-England, 2 Novum Belgium, 3 Virginia stristly and specially so called. To which the Isles of the Bermudas shall come in for a fourth.  
NEW ENGLAND hath on the North east Norumbegua, and on the South-west Novum Belgium. So called by the Adventurers by whom first planted, not so much because opposite to Nova Albion, as some men conceive; as in imitation of the like adjuncts of distinction, given by the French and Spaniards to Nova Francia, Nova Hispania, Nova Gallicia, Nova Granada, and the like.  
The Country situate in the middle of the Temperate Zone, betwixt the degrees of 41. & 44. equally distant from the Arctic Circle, and the Tropic of Cancer; by consequence naturally of the same degree of heat with France or Italy: But by reason of the thick mists which arise from the Seas adjoining, those heats so moderated, that the Air is found to be exceedingly agreeable to an English body. The soil not only fruitful of such commodities as grow there naturally but also of all sorts of grain which were brought from England. Great store of Woods and trees both for fruit and building; plenty of Deer within the Woods, of salt and fish upon the shores; and as for Turkeys, Partridges, Swans, Geese, Cranes, Ducks, Pigeons, such a full variety, as serves not only for necessity, but for Pride and Luxury. The Commodities of most note for maintaining of Traffic, rich Furs, and many sorts of Fish, some Amber, Flax, Linen, Iron, Pitch, Masts, Cables, Timber fit for shipping: in a word whatsoever comes to England by the way of the Sound, might be at better rates, and with far less trouble be supplied from hence; at least, if we believe the Relations of it published in the year 1622.  
The People for the most part well enough disposed, if not roughly handled, hospitable, and more civil than the rest of their Neighbours. So tractable and docile in matters of Religion, that liking well the Rites and Ceremonies of the English at their first settling there Anno 1608. they would use to say that King James was a good King, and his God a good God, but their Tanto naught. Which Tanto was an evil Spirit which did haunt and trouble them every Moon, and therefore they worshipped him for fear. which notwithstanding, I find not any great increase of Christianity amongst the Natives: our English Undertakers thinking it sufficient if they and their houses served the Lord, without caring what became of the souls of the wretched People; which hitherto have sat in darkness and the shadow of death, notwithstanding those New lights which have shined amongst them. And as for those Newcomers which have planted there, all English, though some immediately out of Holland; I cannot better tell you of what strain they were, then in the words of John de La●●, Novi Orbis lib. 3. cap 8. where he observeth, Primos hosce Colonos, uti & illos qui postea accesserunt, potissimùm aut omnino fuisse ex eorum hominum Secta, quos in Anglia Brownistas & Puritanoes vocant, quales non pauci & in Belgium superioribus annis se receperunt, & hinc ad socios sunt profecti. They were (saith he) either for the most part or altogether of that Sect, which in England are called Brownists or Puritans; many of which had formerly betaken themselves to Holland, but afterwards went thence to join with their Brethren in New-England.  
Principal Rivers of this part, 1 Tamescot, where our men found. Oysters of nine inches long. 2 Nansic, a River of the Tarentines, one of the chief Nations of this tract. 3 Sagahadoc, of most note, and deservedly too: Of a mile and an half broad at the mouth or influx, and so upwards for the space of a day's journey, where it maketh a large Lake three day's journey broad, with six Lands in it; nourished with two large Channels, the one from the North east, the other from the Northwest, each of them rising from a Lake, the least of which four days journey long, two broad, the other double it. Of less note, 4 Apanawapesk, 5 Ramassoc, 6 Ashamahaga, etc.  
The Country on the Sea side full of notable Havens, populous, and very well inhabited; insomuch as Captain Smith reckoned in the space of 70 miles above twenty Havens, some of them capable of 500 or 1000 sail; most of them sheltered from the furies of wind and sea, by the interposition of some Lands, of which about 200 lie upon that Coast. In the space of 70 miles he reckoneth forty Villages of the Barbarous people, the chief of which, 1 Macadacut, 2 Segocket, 3 Pemmaquid, 4 Nusconcus, 5 Kennebecque, etc. all called by the name of some Brook or water upon which they were seated. Since added by the English, 1 S Georges Fort, the first Plantation of the English, built by them at the mouth of the River Sagahadoc, in a Demy-Iland, An. 1607. 2 New Plymouth, seated in a large and capacious Bay; at the first building (An. 1620.) consisting of nineteen families only, but in short time improved to an handsome Town: which as it was the first Town, so it was the first Church which was settled there, modelled according to the form of Mr. Robinson's Church in Holland, that notorious Separatist, and after made a pattern to the rest of these Churches, each absolute and Independent in itself, without subordination unto any Superior. For my part, I behold Episcopacy as the Primitive Government of the Church of Christ: but if there were no other Pretenders to it then Presbytery and Independency. I should as soon look for the sceptre and shrone of Christ (as they please to phrase it) in the Co-ordination of New England, as in the Presbyteries of Geneva, or the Kirk of Scotland. 3 Bristol, upon the Seaside also, but more North than Plymouth. 4 Barstaple, so called with reference to a noted Sea town of that name in Devonshire; as 5 Boston, with like reference to as noted a Sea port in Lincolnshire. 6 Quillipiack, on the Bay of Massachusets; a Town of an old name, but a new plantation.  
This part of Virginia first discovered by Captain Gosnold, An 1602. and the next year more perfectly surveyed by some of Bristol, was by King James An. 1606. granted unto a certain Corporation of Knights, Gentlemen, and Merchants, to be planted and disposed of for the public; Sir John Popham, then Chief Justice of the Common Pleas, being one of the Chief also in that Commission. By his encouragement, and principally at his charge, a Colony was sent thither An. 1607. under the presidency of Captain George Popham, and Ralegh Gilbert, who built the Fortress of S. George at the mouth of Sagahadoc. But the Precedent dying the next year, and not long after him the Chief-Justice also, the Colony despairing of good success, returned home again. Successlesly again attempted An. 1614 the Undertakers were resolved to make further trial of their fortune, and in the year 1616 sent our eight ships more: but it never settled into form till the year 1620. when by the building of New Plymouth, and some encouragements sent thence to bring others on, it grew in very short time to so swift a growth, that no Plantation for the time ever went beyond it. The growth of old Rome and New England had the like foundation: both Sanctuaries, Ad quae turba omnis ex finitimis gentibus novarum rerum cupida confluxit, as Livy telleth us of the one; resorted to by such of the neighbouring Nations, as longed for innovations in Church and State.  
2. NOWM BELGIUM or NIEUW NEDERLANDT, hath on the North-east New-England, on the South-west Virginia specially so called. So named from the Netherlanders, who began their plantation in it An. 1614 the Country being then void, and consequently open to the next Pretender, according to that Maxim in the Civil laws, Quae nullius sunt, in bonis dantur occupanti. And yet they had some better title than a bare Intrusion, having bought Hudsons' Cards and Maps, and otherwise contented him for the charge and pains of his Discovery, An. 1609. Of which more anon.  
This part of the Country extended from the 38. Degree and an half, to the 41. 15. of a good temperature both of Air and soil: fruitful of those things which the Earth brought forth of its own accord, abundance of wild Grapes, and Nuts, Trees of great height and bulk for shipping; plenty of Herbage, store of Plants, the effects of nature: and where the People did their part, such increase of Maize (a Plant of which they make their Bread) as showed their care and industry to be well bestowed. Since the planting of the Hollanders there, abundantly well furnished (within their command) with Wheat and other sorts of Grain; as also of Flax, Hemp, and such other Commodities as were brought hither out of Europe. The Woods replenished with Deer, and the Plains with Fowl; the Rivers not inferior to any in Sturgeons, Salmon, and other the best sort● of Fish which can swim in the water.  
The People though divided into many Nations, and of different Languages, are much of the same disposition with the other Savages. Clad in Beasts skins, for the most part without certain dwellings, dwelling toegether many Families of them under one poor roof, made of Poles meeting at the top, and covered with the bark of Trees. Their household stuff a Tobacco Pipe, a wooden dish, and an Hatchet made of a broad flint; their weapons, Bow and Arrows, but their Arrows made or headed with the bones of fishes. Their Religion Idolatry, or worse, their chief God the Devil, whom they worship under the name of Menetto; but with less pomp and Ceremony than is used in afric. Of manners, fearful and suspicious (not without good cause) wonderful greedy of revenge; but if well used, tractable and obedient unto their Superiors; fickle, but very faithful unto those who trust them: conceived to be inclinable to the Christian Faith, if they had fallen into the hands and command of those who had studied godliness more than gain.  
Rivers of note they have not many. That want supplied by many large and capacious Bays, all along the Coast; the principal of those that be 1 Manhattes, by some called Nassovius, but by the Dutch commonly Noordt Rivier, which falleth into the Sea at May Port, so called by Cornelius May, the Master of a Ship of Holland, at their first Plantation; another channel of it, which from the noise thereof they call Hellgate, emptying itself against an Island called the Isle of Nuts. The River about 15, or 16. Fathom deep at the mouth thereof, affordeth a safe Road for shipping, but of difficult entrance. 2 Zuid Rivier, so called because more Southerly than the other; as fair as that, but hitherto not so well discovered.  
Towns here are few either of the old or New Plantations. The Natural Inhabitants live together in Tribes, many Families of those Tribes under one Roof, as before was said; but those Families so remote from one another, that their Habitations are not capable of the name of a Town, and hardly of a scattered Village. Nor do I find that either the Hollanders or the English (who now divide the whole among them) are much given to building; The title of the Dutch being subject unto some disputes; and the Possession of the English not confirmed and settled. Hudson an Englishman, had spent some time in the Discovery of this Country, and given his name to one of the Rivers of it. With him the Hollanders, An. 1609. as before is said, compounded for his Charts, and Maps, and whatsoever he could challenge in the right and success of that his Voyage. But they were hardly warm in their new habitations, when Sir Samuel Argal. Governor of Virginia, specially so called (having dispossessed the French of that part of Canada, now called Nova Scotia, An. 1613.) disputed the possession with them; alleging that Hudson, under whose sale they claimed that Country, being an Englishman, and licenced to discover those Northern parts by the King of England, could not alienate or dismember it (being but a part or Province of Virginia) from the Crown thereof. Hereupon the Dutch Governor submits himself and his Plantation to his Majesty of England, and the Governor of Virginia for, and under him. But a new Governor being sent from Amsterdam in the year next following, not only failed in paying the conditioned Tributes; but began to fortify himself, and entitle those of Amsterdam to a just propriety. To which end, he gave unto the Country the name of New netherlands, conferred new names on all the Bays and Rivers of it; and possessed himself of a little Island near that Branch of the Noordt-River, which themselves call Hellgate: where he laid the foundation of a Town, called New-Amsterdam; and built a Fortress by the name of Orange-Fort, which he garrisonned, and planted with five pieces of Cannon, complaint whereof being made unto King Charles, and by him represented to the States of Holland: it was declared by the said States in a public instrument, that they were no ways interessed in it, but that it was a private undertaking of the West-Indian Company of Amsterdam; and so referred it wholly to his Majesty's pleasure. Which being declared, a Commission was forthwith granted to Sir George Calvert, Lord Baltimore to plant the Southern parts thereof, which lie next Virginia, by the name of MARY-LAND; the like not long after to Sir Edmund Loyden, for planting and possessing the more Northern parts which lie towards New-England, by the name of Nova Albion. And though the Hollanders did then seem willing to be gone, and leave all they had there, for the sum of 2500. l. yet taking advantage of the troubles which not long after followed in England, they have not only raised their demands to a greater height; but furnished the Native Indians with Arms, and taught them how to use their Weapons. A most mischievous and wicked Act; not only tending to the damage and discouragement of the present Adventurers, but even unto the extirpation of all Christians out of all these Countries. But the best is, they were the first that smarted by it; the Savages thus armed and trained, fell fowl upon them, destroying their Farme-Houses, and forcing them to betake themselves to their Forts and Fastnesses. What hath been since done (for the giving of new names to some of the old places, I look on as a thing of nothing) either in getting out the Dutch, or planting Colonies of the English, I can hardly say: but I fear that little will be acted, or to little purpose, till it be made a Work of more public interest.  
3. VIRGINIA specially so called, hath on the North-east Nieu Netherlandt, on the South west, Florida, the name restrained to this part only, since the two last Plantations, which before was common to the whole. The Country lieth extended from the 34. to the 38. degree of Northern Latitude; by consequence the Air inclined unto heats, if not refreshed and moderated by a constant Gale of Eastern winds which they call the Breeze; and the blasts driving on it from the open Seas. Diversified most pleasantly into hills and valleys; the Mountains clothed with woods, and the Fields with fruits. The soil so fruitful that an Acre of Land well ordered will return 200 Bushels, or 25 Quarter of Corn. Said also to be rich in veins of Allom, as also in Pitch, Turpentine, store of Cedars, Grapes, Oil, plenty of sweet Gams, several sorts of Plants for the Dyers use, some Mines of Iron and Copper, of Timber trees almost infinite numbers; as also great abundance of cattle, Fish, Fowl, Fruit, and of Maiz no scarcity. Some Crystal found amongst the Mountains, on the shore some Pearls; nothing deficient either in the soil or Air for the encouragement and reward of a thriving Nation.  
The People are but few in number for so large a Country, and those as different in size, as in speeeh or manner; Some of them, whom they call Sasques-hanoxi, of so vast a greatness, that in comparison of the English they seemed as Giants: clad with the skins of Bears, and Wolves in so strange manner that the head of the Beast hung before their breasts instead of a Jewel; their Arms, Bows, Arrows, and a Club. Some on the other side, whom they call Wigcocomoci; of so low a stature, that in relation to the other, they appear as Pigmies. But generally they are all of tall stature, well limbed, for the most part without Beards, and the one half of the head kept shaved: clothed in loose Mantles made of the skins of Deer, with an Apron of the same to hide their nakedness; the rest of their bodies painted over with the figures of Serpents or of some other Creature of as horrid shape. Strong and accustomed to the cold which they patiently endure, or feel not: wavering and inconstant, crafty, and somewhat more industrious than the rest of the Savages; but given to anger, and as greedy of revenge as any. Gods they have many, for they worship all things (and them only) which are like to hurt them, as Fire, Water, Lightning, Thunder etc. So that it may be said of them, as once Lactantius said of the ancient Romans (did not the ignorance of these poor Wretches render them excusable, and make them fitter objects for our Prayers and pity, than our scorns) Dignissimi homines qui Deos suos semper haberent praesentes. One Devil-God above all the rest (they call him Oak) whom they worship, as themselves confess, more for fear then Love. Not yet converted from these horrible and gross Idolatries by the long neighbourhood of the English; accused in that respect most justly by those of Rome.  
No Country for the bigness of it can be better watered, or yield fairer Rivers, the principal of which 1 Powhatan (so called by the name of that petit Roitelet, whose Territory it passeth thorough) which having run a course of an hundred miles, and Navigable all that way by smaller Vessels, is at his fall into the Sea about three miles broad. 2 Apamatuck, 3 Nansamund, and 4 Chikahamania, all Tributaries to Pawhatan. 5 Pamanuke, fourteen miles more North than Pawhatan, but of lesser note. 6 Toppahanock, Navigable 130 miles. 7 Patawomeke, passable by Boat 140 miles, and six or seven miles broad where it falleth into the Sea; increased by many lesser streams which come out of the Mountains, and generally well stored with Fish. 8 Pawtunxut, of a shorter Race, but a deeper Channel than most of the former (16. or 18. Fathom deep) and of more choice of fish then the others are.  
Along the Banks of these Rivers dwell their several Tribes, scarce any one of which making up an hundred men (that of Patawomeke excepted, which is able to arm after their manner 160) many not yielding above 30. and some not so many. Their Habitations not containing above ten or twelve houses a piece, but in those houses sundry particular Families, are for the most part covered with the barks of Trees; so placed, that the Common Market place standeth in the midst, at an equal distance; the houses of their Weroances (or the chiefs of their Tribes) and that which serveth them for a Temple, being somewhat finer than the rest. And of these Habitations some are presented to us by the names of Ooanoke, by the English called the Blind Town, 2 Pemeoke, 3 Shycoake, said by my Author to be Civitas ampla, a large City, but we must understand him with Relation to the rest of this Country. 4 Chowanoak, 5 Secatan; 6 Mattaken, 7 Weopomioke, 8 Pyshokonnok, said to be inhabited by none but women, 9 Chipano▪ 10 Muscamunge, both upon the Sea; most of them called by the name of those several Tribes which inhabit in them.  
In reference to the English and their Plantations, we are to know that they made choice of the Southside of a large and goodly Bay for the place of their dwelling. A Bay which thrusting itself a great way up into this Country, and receiving into it many of the Rivers before mentioned, is by the Natives called Chesepoack, and yieldeth the only safe entrance into this part of the Country: the Capes thereof for that cause fortified by the English; that on the Southern point being called Cape Henry, and the other Cape Charles, according to the names of the two young Princes. Towns of most note which have been either since built or frequented by them, 1 James Town (Jacobipolis, so named in honour of King james; on the Southside of that Bay, not far from the River Chikahamania: first founded in the year 1606, at what time it was trenched about, and some Ordnance planted on the Works. 2 Henry's Town (Henricopolis) so named in honour of Prince Henry, the eldest son of King james, built in a convenient place more within the Land, 80 miles from james Town. 3 Dales-gift, so called, because built and planted at the charge of Sir Thomas Dale, An. 1610. 4 Bermuda, an open Burrough five miles from Henricopolis. 5 Ketoughtan, a noted and frequented Port in the Bay of Chesepoack, very much traded by the English. 6 Wicocomoco the chief Town of Pawhatan, one of the Roitelets of this Country; much courted by the English at their first settling here, and a long time after: a Crown being sent him by King james with many other rich presents, the better to sweeten and oblige him; but for all that he proved a treacherous and unfaithful neighbour.  
The sum of the Affairs of this last Plantation, is, that the business being resumed in the year 1606, and a Commission granted to certain Noblemen and Merchants to advance the work, they fell in hand, by the Counsel and encouragement of Capt. Smith, with the building of james Town (having first fortified Cape Henry) in which Town he fixed a Colony of 100 men. These being almost consumed by famine and other miseries, were the next year recruited with 120 more brought by Captain Newport: but a Fire having casually consumed their houses, once again discouraged them. But the houses being re-edified, and a Church added to the houses, by the industry of Smith their Governor, the Colony began to flourish, and to increase in reputation amongst the Savages. especially having made (as they believed) a friend of Pawhatan. In the year 1609. the Lord De la Ware was appointed Governor, and Smith commanded to return; who left here 490 persons, (and of them 200 expert Soldiers) 3 Ships, 7 Boats, 24 great Guns, 300 Muskets, with victuals and ammunition necessary; and 39 of their Weroances or Petit-Kings Tributaries and Contributioners to the English. Sir Thomas Gates and Sir George Summer, sent thither with 9 ships and 500 men, lost a great part of their numbers in the Isle of Bermudaz: the rest not well according with the old Plantation, were at the point of returning home, when happily the Lord De la Ware arrived with three Ships more, An. 1610. But falling into a desperate sickness, and come home to England, he recommended the estate of the English there to Sir Thomas Dale, who furnished them with Men, cattle, and other necessaries: after whom came Sir Thomas Gates with 300 men, and some heads of cattle. And then the Government hereof being conferred on Henry Earl of Southampton, the affairs here began to settle in a prosperous way; when unexpectedly in the year 1621. the Savages falling on them (fearing no such treachery) killed 340 of their men; and had also then surprised James Town, if one of the Savages, who had received the Christian faith, had not discovered their intention. Since that, recovered of that blow, it went happily forwards: and might by this time have been raised to some power and greatness, if the English by diverting on some by plantations, and by employing indigent and necessitous persons in so great a work, had not discouraged the design. For certainly one might say of this Plantation, as the Scripture doth of the Camp of David in the time of Saul, that few or none were sent unto it (except the Principals) but such as were in distress, or debt, or some way or other discontented: men never likely to advance and pursue a business of such public interest. Commendable howsoever in this particular, (though perhaps that commendation do belong to their Governors) that being here, they kept themselves constantly to those Forms of Worship which were established and observed in the Church of England.  
As for the Natives of the whole, they were divided (as was said) into several Tribes, every Tribe under the command of their several Chiefs: which Chiefs though many in number, and of little power, knew well enough how to keep their State unto their Subjects, and to show it also unto Strangers. For when Powhatan was pleased to give audience unto Captain Newport and the rest of the English sent from Smith, they found him on a Bed of Mats, his Pillow of Leather embroidered with white Beads and Pearl, attired with a Robe of skins like an Irish Mantle: at his head and feet an handsome young woman; on each side of the room twenty others, with their necks and shoulders painted Red▪ and about their necks a great chain of Beads; his principal men sitting before them in like manner. Yet notwithstanding this great State, (and great it was indeed for such pe●it Princes) he and the rest became so subject to the English, that in Smith's time they did not only pay their Tributes or Contributions, but at his command would send their Slaves and Subjects to James-Town, to receive correction for wrongs done to the Colony. And it is probable enough that those of New-England, being the greater and more powerful Plantation (as followed with the stronger zeal, and carried on by the united purses of a prevalent Faction) were of like influence also amongst the Natives; though I find it not expressed in so many particulars.  
4. The Isles of BERMUDAZ, many in number (some say 400 at the least) are situate directly East from Virginia, from which they are distant 500 English miles, 3300 of the same miles from the City of London. So called from John Bermudaz a Spaniard, by whom first discovered Called also the Summer-Ilands, from the shipwreck of Sir George Summer upon that Coast; so much delighted with the sadness of the misadventure, that he endeavoured what he could to settle a Plantation in it.  
That of more same and greatness than all the rest, to which the name is now most properly ascribed, is situate in the Latitude of 32. & 30 minutes. Well stored, when first discovered, with plenty of Hogs, divers fruits, Mulberries, Palmitoes, Cedars; as also of Silkworms, Pearls and Amber, and such rich Commodities: of Fowl so infinite an abundance, that our men took a thousand of one sort, as big as a Pigeon, within two or three hours. The Air hereof very sound and healthy, found by experience (the best Argument in such a point) to be agreeable to the body of an English man; yet terribly exposed to tempests of rain, thunder, and lightning: For which, and for the many shipwrecks happening on the Coasts thereof, and want of other Inhabitants to be said to own it; the Manners have pleased to call it the Island of Devils. The soil affirmed to be as fertile as any, well watered, plentiful in Maize, of which they have two Harvests yearly: that which is sowed in March, being cut in July; and that which is sowed in August, being mowed in December. No ven●mous creature to be found in all the Island, or will live, brought hither. And besides these Commodities, of so safe a being, so fenced about with Rocks and ●lets, that without knowledge of the passages, a Boat of ten Tuns cannot be brought into the Haven; yet with such knowledge, there is entrance for the greatest ships. The English have since added to there strengths of nature, such additional helps, by Blockhouses, Forts and Bulwarks in convenient places, as may give it the title of Impregnable.  
It was first discovered (but rather accidentally then upon design) by John Bermudaz, a Spaniard, about the year 1522. and thereupon a Proposition made in the Council of Spain, for settling a Plantation in it; as a place not to be avoided by the Spanish Fleets in their return from the Bay of Mexico by the Streits of Bahama. Neglected notwithstanding, till the like accidental coming of Sir George Summer, sent to Virginia with some Companies of English by the Lord De la Ware, An. 1609. Who being shipwracked on this Coast, had the opportunity to survey the Island; which he so liked, that he endeavoured a Plantation in it, at his coming home. An. 1612. the first Colony was sent over under Richard More, who in three years erected eight or nine Forts in convenient places, which he planted with Ordinance. An. 1616. a new Supply is sent over under Captain Daniel Tucker, who applied themselves to sowing Corn, setting of Trees brought thither from other parts of America, and planting that gainful Weed Tobacco. An. 1619. the business is taken more to heart, and made a matter of the Public, many great Lords and men of Honour being interessed in it: Captain Butler sent thither with 500 men, the Isle divided into Tribes or canters, to each Tribe a Burrow; the whole reduced to a settled Government both in Church and State, according to the Law of England. After this, all things so succeeded, that in the year 1623. here were said to be three thousand English, ten Forts, and in those Forts fifty pieces of Ordinance; their numbers since increasing daily, both by Children borne within the Island, and supplies from England.   

OF FLORIDA.  
FLORIDA is bounded on the North-east with Virginia; on the East with Mare del Noort; on the South and some part of the West with the Gulf of Mexico; on the rest of the West with part of New Gallicia, and some Countries hitherto not discovered. Extended from the River of Palms in the 25 degree of Latitude to Rio de Secco in the 34. which evidently speaketh it for a Country of large dimensions.  
It was first discovered by the English under the conduct of Sebastian Cabat, An. 1497. afterwards better searched into by John de Ponce, a Spaniard, who took possession of it in the name of that King, An. 1527. and by him called Florida, either because he landed there upon Palm-Sunday, which the Spaniards call Pascua di Flores, or Pascha Florida; or else quia Florida erat Regio, by reason of that fresh verdure and flourishing estate in which he found it. But by the Natives it is said to be called Jaquasa.  
This Country lying Parallel to Castille in Spain, is said to be of the same temper both for Aire and Soil, but that it is abundantly more fruitful: the heart of the ground not being here worn out by continual Tillage as perhaps it may be in the other. For here they have great abundance of Maize (the natural breadcorn of the Country) which they sow twice a year, viz. March and June, and reap in the third month after, laying it in some public Barns, and thence distribute it to the neccssities of particular persons. Well stored with several sorts of Fruit, as Mulberries, Cherries, Chelnuts, Grapes, and Plums of both excellent taste and colour: Beasts wild and came of all kinds which these Countries yield; and of like sorts of Fowl. The Woods and Forests full of the largest Okes, and the loftiest Cedars; some Cypress-Trees and Bays of a large proportion; with great plenty of that Wood which the Inhabitants call Pavame, and the French name Sassafras; the bark whereof is Medicinal against some Diseases; and another Tree which we call Esquine, affirmed to be a Sovereign and present Remedy for the French disease. It is also said to be enriched with some Mines of Gold and Silver, neglected by the Natives, till the coming of the Spaniards and French put a price upon them; and to have in it Emeralds of great worth and beauty, with many Tarquoises and Pearls. Others report that all the Gold and Silver which they have amongst them came from some ships which had been wracked upon those Coasts: contrary whereunto it is said by the Natives, that in the Hills which they call Apalatei, there are found great Veins of a reddish Metal, which the French concluded to be Gold, though they wanted time and opportunity to search into them.  
The People are of an Olive-Colour, great stature, and well proportioned; naked except their Privities, which they hide with the skins of Stags: their Arms and knees stained with divers paintings not to be washed off; their hair black, and hanging down as low as their thighs. Cunning they be, and excellent in the Arts of dissimulation. So stomachful that they do naturally love War and Revenge, insomuch that they are continually in War with one or other. They are crafty also and very intelligent, as appeareth by the Answer they gave to Ferdinando Soto, a Spaniard, who was here among them An. 1549. For when he went to persuade the people that he was the son of God, and came to teach them the Law: Not so, replied a Floridan, for God never bade thee to kill and slay, and work all kind of mischief against us. The Women when their Husbands are dead, use to cut off their hair close to their ears, and strew it on his Sepulchre; and cannot marry again, till their hair be grown long enough to cover their shoulders. Hermaphrodites are here also in great plenty, whom they use as beasts to carry their luggage, and put them to all kind of drudgery. They have all a gross belief of the souls immortality, but are otherwise Idolaters.  
Mountains this Country hath not many, as being generally plain and level; the chiefest those called Apalatei before mentioned; supposed by the Inhabitants to be rich in Mines of Gold. Rivers of most note, 1 Rio Secco, 2 Rio Grande, 3 Serraevahi; the two first named so by the Spaniards, and the last by the Natives: 4 Garunna, 5 Ligeiss, 6 Axona, 7 Sequana, and 8 Charente, so called by the French, according to the names of the best Rivers in France; both French and Spaniards having severally and successively the possession of it. Here are also 9 Rio de Flores, or the River of Flowers; 10 Rio de Neives, or the River of Snow; and 11 Rio de Spirito Santo, or the River of the Holy Ghost, all of them falling into the Bay of Mexico. A particular description of these Rivers, their rise, course, and greatness, I find not in any of my Authors. Only Mercator telleth us of a twelfth River, called Porto Riale, reckoned the chiefest of this Country, the mouth whereof is three miles broad, where it openeth into the Sea betwixt two Promontories, the one towards the West, and the other pointing to the North. Some of these Rivers are affirmed to be haunted with Crocodiles, a creature dangerous alike both by Land and Water.  
The Country not so well discovered and planted hitherto as to be divided into Provinces, is commonly distributed into several Tribes, as were all Nations of the World at their first Discovery. The principal of these they reckon the Quevenes, Marianes, Canagadi, Camoni, Avavares, and Malicones, the Susolas, Quitones, and other names not usual unto us of Europe; though these more passable than many which have gone before: mollified perhaps by the French and Spaniards, and not presented to us in their natural roughness; all governed by their Paracoussi, or several Chiefs, and those at deadly Feuds, and continual Wars with one another. Some have adventured on the names of particular Provinces, as Panuca, Avanares, Abarduosia, Joguazia, Apalchia, Anthia, Samovia, Colas; but they acquaint us neither with their site nor bounds: except it be that Panuca lieth on the borders of Hispania Nova, beyond the large and spacious Bay of the Holy Ghost; and Calos near the Cape called Cape di Florida. Others distinguish it by the names of the several Roytelets, which varying with the change of the person, makes that division to be very variable and uncertain also. But it is generally agreed that the Peninsula, which pointeth on the Isle of Cuba, hath the name of Tegesta or Florida specially so called; the name of Florida being first given by John Ponce unto this part only, though afterwards communicated unto all the rest of this Country. A Demy-Iland stretching in length from the South to the North 100 Leagues; in breadth where broadest 30 Leagues, and in some places 20 only. Well known by the Cape of Martyrs, looking into the Isle of Cuba; the River of the holy Ghost, and three goodly Bays, the chief whereof, that entitled to S. Joseph; all opening into the Gulf of Mexico, or the Bay of New Spain The whole environed about, save where it is joined unto the Continent, with Bars of sands, and scattered Lands, which serve unto it as the outworks to some notable Fortress.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1 S. Helen's, on or near a Promontory, so named where this Country bordereth on Virginia: once fortified and possessed by the Spaniard, but not long since abandoned. 2 Fort de Charles, Arx Carolina in the Latin, built by the French upon the Banks of the River Maio, and so called in honour of Charles the ninth, in whose time the Conquest of this Country was undertaken: but ruined by the Spaniard in the War between them. 3 Port Royal, a well frequented Haven on the Mouth of the River, of that name; but whether there be any Town now remaining, I am not able to say. More in the Land (for these lie all upon the Borders towards Virginia, Apalche supposed to be a place of great consideration, and in regard of the opinion which was had of the wealth thereof; (but found to be a small Town, of but 40 Cottages) and therefore first attempted and took in by the Spaniard, in their invasion of this Country under Pamphilus of Narvaes', An. 1528. recovered by the Natives after his departure. 5 Ant, an open Burrough, nine days journey from Apalche, where the Savages gave the Spaniards a sharp encounter, and slew many of them; but being vanquished at the last, they forsook the Town; of itself not tenable. 6 Ocalis, an unwalled Town, but consisting of 600 Sheds (for I dare hardly call them Houses) the chief of the Kingdom of Acuera. 7 Osachile, the chief Seat of the King so called; and, 8 Vitacuchus, a Burrow of 200 Cottages, the principal of the Kingdom of Vitacuchus, both taken by the Spaniards at the same time also. 9 S. Matthews, on the Eastern shore of the Demi-Iland above mentioned, possessed and fortified by the Spaniard. 10 S. Augustine's on the same shore, but more South than the other, situate at the mouth of a small River so named, fortified by the Spaniard with many a strong Castle: but for all that taken by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1485. there being found in the Fort of S. John, in which the strength of the Town consisted, 18 brass pieces, and 20000 Florents in ready money, for the pay of the Garrison. Repaired afterwards more strongly than ever formerly. The Spaniards have also Garrisons in two other places of this Country, viz. S. Philip, and S. Jago; but I cannot say distinctly in what part they are.  
The Government of this Country, is of one kind only, though managed by several persons: the Supreme power residing in the Chiefs of their several Tribes; at such continual enmity with one another, that they very seldom Join together in any Counsels, wherein the public is concerned. So that the Spaniards may affirm of the present Floridans, as the Romans did of the ancient Britan's; Nec quicquam adversus Validissimas gentes utilius nobis fuit, quam quod in common non consulebant. The not communicating of their Counsels, hastened on their bondage. Yet in the Government of these Chiefs there was somewhat of the Parliamentary way used with us in Europe. For as in all matters of concernment those Chiefs advised with their Counsel, so if it were a business which concerned the public, their Priests and others of most note for gravity and wisdom, were admitted to the Consultation. But being severally too weak for a strong Invader, and never joined together to defend themselves, they made themselves an easy prey to the French and Spaniards. Et sic dum singuli pugnabant, universi vincebantur; by trusting to their single forces they were all subdued. For in the year 1512 John Ponce a Native of Leon in Spain, setting sail with three ships from the Island of Porto Rico, on Palm-Sunday fell on the Peninsula before described, and for that cause or from the flourishing verdure of it, called it Florida; but did no more than scour along upon the coasts, and give new names to such of the Promontories and Rivers as he had discovered; and having only a slight skirmish with some of the Savages returned back again. The business eight years after was again revived by Vasques de Ayllon, who setting sail from the Haven of Plata, in Hispaniola, attained unto the North-east parts of this Continent, bordering on Virginia, where he left names unto the Promontory of S. Helen and the River of Jordan: and having treacherously enslaved some of the Natives (whom he had invited to a Feast) prepared for Spain; where he obtained the King's Patent for a new Plantation. But his perfidiousness could not prosper. For in the year 1524 coming with his ships upon this Coast, one of them perished on the Rocks, and 200 of his men being killed at their landing, he gave over the Enterprise: the Spaniards hitherto making no more use of these Discoveries, then wickedly to enrich themselves by stealing Men, whom as wickedly they sold for Slaves. Nor had the voyage of Pamphilus de Narvaez An. 1528. any better end; though undertaken with a Band of 400 foot and 80 horse. For having took possession of the Country in the name of his Sovereign Charles the fifth, finding some hopes of great treasures to be had at Apalche (distant above a month's journey from the place of his landing) he would needs march thither. In which action, though he got that and some other Towns, yet he lost himself; few of his men returning safe into their Country, and they not knowing what became of their General. As fruitless, but more famous was the enterprise of Hernandes a Soto, begun in the year 1538. and continued till 1543. who with a little Army of 350 Horse, and 90 Foot, overran a great part of the Country, and brought many of the Petit Princes under the command of Spain. But making only a Depraedatorie war of it to enrich himself, and waste the Country, without settling any Colony, or building any fortifications in it to make good his gettings, the Action ended with his life, which he lost by a Fever: the remnant of his Soldiers, whom the war had spared, under the conduct of Ludovico Muscoso di Alvarado, recovering Mexico not without great difficulties.  
And so the Spaniards leave the Stage, and the French enter, sent on this voyage by Gaspar Coligni Admiral of France, An. 1562. under the conduct of Ribault; who falling on that part of the Continent which heath on the East side of the Peninsula, gave the first Promontory which he touched at the name of Cape Francois: and after running Northward along that Coast, new-named the Rivers thereof by the names of the Seine, the Loire, the Somme, the Garund, and others of most note in his own Country. Coming as far North as the great River of Porto-Royal, he there built a little Fortress which he called Fort Charles, where he left 26 of his men to keep possession, and returned for France: his soldiers following not long after, as well as they could, destitute of supplies from home, and not able with so small a number to command them there. The Action reinforced about two years after under the conduct of Landonier, who had accompanied Ribault in the former voyage: by whom some further progress was made in this undertaking, and a little Town built on the banks of the River Maio, (so called by Ribault, because in that month discovered by him) which he named Charles-Fort, Arx Carolina in the Latin. But a mutiny happening amongst his men, and some complaints made of him in the Court of France; he was called home, and Ribault sent again to pursue the enterprise: Who entering on his charge in August, An. 1565. was presently set on by the Spaniards both by sea and land; his ships forced violently on the Rocks, the new Town sacked, the Colony put unto the sword, very few escaping; Ribault himself murdered in cold blood by the Enemy, after faith given him for his life. It was thought that above 600 French were slain in this action. So ended the French hopes in Florida, the King being then preparing for a new Civil war, and loath to engage himself against the Spaniard, till the year 1627. when at the charge of Dominicus Gurgius a private person, out of an honest zeal to the honour of his Country, and to cry quittance with the Spaniards for their treacherous cruelty, it revived again. And though he found the Spaniards, after the defeat of Ribault, had repaired and fortified Arx Carolina, and raised two Castles more on the banks of the Maio, which they had furnished with such Pieces as they took from the French, and garrisoned with 400 soldiers: Yet giving a courageous onset, by the aid of the Savages, (to whom the name and neighbourhood of the Spaniards was exceeding odious) he forced them all, demolished the works, and hanged all such of the Soldiers as the sword had spared; and so returned into France: where in stead of honour and reward for so great a service, he was in danger of losing both his life and fortunes, compelled to lurk amongst his friends till the times were changed. The Spaniards after this, to keep some kind of possession, though not finding it in riches answerable to their greedy desires, fortified S. Matthews and S. Augustine's on the East-side of the Demy Island, with the Castles of S. Philip and S. Jago in other parts of the Country towards the North east: thinking himself so strong in the Gulf of Mexico, that no foreign forces dare appear on that side of the Country. So that it seems he plays the part of Aesop's Dog in the Manger, neither resolved to plant there himself, nor willing that any others should.  
Having thus taken a survey of the main Land of Florida, let us next take a view of such Lands as lie dispersed up and down in the Seas adjoining, called by one general name LUCAIOS or LUCAIAE INSULAE; many in number, but reducible to these three heads, 1 The Tortugas, 2 ●he Martyrs, & 3 The Lucaios specially so called.  
1 THE TORTUGAS are seven or eight little Lands lying on an heap at the South west point of the Peninsula, called the Cape of Florida, in the height of 25 Degrees; distant from the Port of Havana in the Isle of Cuba (opposite unto which they lie) about six leagues. Well known amongst the Sailors, because much avoided; or rather avoided because known, the danger of their company making their further acquaintance shunned.  
2 THE MARTYRS, called also the Caios, are three great Rocks rather than Lands, covered with a white sand, and full of bushes; the middle most of the three the greatest: situate over against the Southeast Promontory of the said Peninsula, called from hence Cabeca de los Martyrs, or the Cape of Martyrs. Denominated thus by John Ponce the Spaniard, in his first discovery of this Country, because they seemed afar off to have some resemblance to men impaled upon Stakes, as many of the Martyrs were in the Primitive times. Infamous for the many shipwrecks which have since there happened; but of great observation amongst Sea faring men, because they know by leaveing these Rocks or Lands on the left hand of them, that they are already entered in the Streits.  
3. THE LUCAIOS specially lie dispersed on the East of the Peninsula; many in number, and so called from Lucaioneque, the greatest and most Northern of them, situate in the 27 degree of Latitude; of more length than breadth, but hitherto known by name only. Of greater note, though not so big, is that called 2 Bahama, in the middle way betwixt Lucaoneyn and the Peninsula; in length 13 Leagues, and eight in breadth; memorable for giving name to the violent current interposing betwixt it and the Demy-Iland, called the Streits of Bahama, yet not so strait but that they are 16 miles in breadth, though of so forcible a Course, that many times neither wind nor Oars can prevail against it. 3 Guanahani, the most famous of all these Lands, because the first that was discovered by Columbus, being then almost out of hope of proceeding further; who thereupon caused it to be called S. Saviour's; well shaded at that time with Trees, full of fresh Springs, and very plentiful of Cotton: now overgrown with shrubs, and bushes. 4 Guanima, by Columbus when first discovered, called S. Maria de Conception; begird about with Rocks and quick sands, but otherwise of a pleasant and fruitful soil, full or delicate Springs. Others there are to the number of 24. or thereabouts, whose names occur in many of our larger Maps: but being we find nothing of them but their very names, I shall not trouble myself with the Nomenclature.  
Of all in general it is said that they obeyed their King so strictly (for a King they had) that if he commanded them to leap down from an high Rock, they performed the same; though he gave no reason but his Will. The Women of so perfect beauty, that many of the bordering Nations forsook their own Countries, to enjoy their Loves: their shape and beauty the more discernible in regard not suffered to wear any thing till their purgations, nor after that but nets of Cotton, filled with leaves of Herbs. But now, and long since, there are neither men nor women to be found in any of them: the People being long since wasted by the Spaniards in the Mines of Cuba and Hispaniola; or consumed by Famine and Diseases, or otherwise made away in Prisons, and by several Torments; to the number of a Million and 200000, as some have told us. And so we pass unto the other side of those Northern Conntries; opposite to Nova Francia, Virginia, and the main Land of Florida: that when we fall into the Countries now possessed by the Spaniard, we may not wander out of them till this work be finished; except it be to take a progress into some of the Lands, which cannot otherwise be visited but by such a start.   

OF CALIFORMIA  
CALIFORMIA in the large and general acception of it, containeth all those Provinces of Mexicana, which lie on the Westside of that Northern Peninsula, beyond Nova Gallicia, and New Spain: though in the stricter, limited to that Province only which lieth like a Demy-Iland on the other side of a long and spacious Gulf, called Mer Vermiglio, and from hence the Bay of Califormia. But taking it in the largest sense, it hath on the West, and so unto those undiscovered parrs which lie furthest North, to the Streits of Anian. So witnesseth John de Laet, 1. 6. c. 11. CALIFORMIA communiter dicitur quicquid terrarum Novae Hispaniae atque Galliciae ad Occidentem objicitur, ad extremos Americae Septentrionalis terminos, & Fretum quod vulgo Anian vocant. Limited in the stricter sense and acception of it, to an Island (as it is now generally conceived to be) extended in a full length from North to South, on the West hereof. So that for our more regular proceeding in the chorography and Story of it, we must divide it into the Continent and the Island: the Continent subdivided into the two large Provinces of 1 Quivira, and 2 Cibola; the Island into 3 Califormia specially so called, and 4 Nova Albion.  
And first, the Continent of this part which we call Califormia, hath on the East some parts of Nova Gallicia, and besides that those vast and undiscovered Countries which lie on the Westside of Canada and Virginia, on the opposite shore: bound on the North with the unknown parts of this Mexicana; on the Northwest, with the Streits of Anian, if such Streits there be; on the West, with the Sea interposing betwixt it and the Island called Mer Vermiglio; and on the South and South-west with the rest of Nova Gallicia, from which parted by a great River called Rio del Noort: A River, which rising in the 40 degree of Northern latitude, first parteth Tignez a Province of Quivira, from that of New-Mexico, one of the Provinces of Nova Gallicia; and after a long course falleth into the Sea called Mer Vermiglio, above Cinoloa, another of the Provinces of that Division. Divided as before was said, into the two great Provinces of 1 Quivira, and 2 Cibola.  
1 QVIVIRA, taking up the most Northern parts of this side of America, is said to be very plain and level; of few trees, not many houses, nor much stored of people; quite destitute of fruits and corn, and yielding nothing for man's life but the flesh of beasts, which they eat raw, and swallow down in great bits without any chewing. The men apparelled in Buls-skins from the head to the feet; the women, though in a cold Country, with no other garment than their hair, which they wear so long, that it serveth them in stead of a vail to hide their nakedness. They live in Hoards and companies, like the Hoards of the Tartars, not having any certain dwellings (except some chief men) but remove from one place to another, like the ancient Nomads. Near neighbours unto Tartary, from whence (not being much distant from it) it is supposed that the Inhabitants first came, and from hence by degrees peopled all America.  
The Country being full of herbage, breeds great store of cattle; differing not much in bigness from those of Europe, but that they have an high bunch betwixt their shoulders, bristled upon the back like Boars, with somewhat which resembleth the name in Horses, and the beard in Goats; their legs short, and clad with fetlocks, their horns short, but sharp; the whole Beast of an aspect so horrid, that an Horse will not venture near them, till well acquainted. Yet in these Beasts lie all their Riches; these being to this people, as we say with us of our Ale to drunkards, meat, drink, and cloth, and more too: For the hides yield them houses, or at least the covering of them; their bones, bodkins; their hair, thread; their sinews, ropes; their horns, maws, and bladders, vessels; their dung, fire; their Calveskins, budgets to draw and keep water; their blood, drink; and their flesh, meat. There is thought to be some traffic from China, or Cathay, hither: For when Vasques di Coronado conquered it, he saw in the further Sea certain ships, not of common making, which seemed to be well laden, and did bear in their prows the figure of Pelicans; which could not be conjectured to come from any Country but one of these two. I know some place this Country more within the Land: and others are so far from letting it look towards any part of the Sea, that they have laid it close unto the back of Virginia. For my part, I have laid it along the Coasts, upon good authority; though I deny not but that some parts hereof may be more remote. Or else to reconcile the difference, it may thus be ended; that the maritime parts being known by other names, the Inlands might retain more specially the name of Quivira, as we have seen in many other Countries before described.  
And this I am the rather inclined to think, because I find mention of three Provinces on the North of Cibola, but in the way unto Quivira; the one called Seio, the other called Cicuic, and the third Tignez: which I look upon as the maritime parts of the same one Country; but better peopled and frequented then the Inlands are, because lying in the way of traffic. The principal Towns of which Provinces, 1 Acus, or Acuco, a small town, but situate in a strong and defensible place; about which groweth some store of Cotton, which from the place the Natives call by the name of Acuco. 2 Tignez, on the banks of a River so called; inhabited by a stout and courageous people, who being resolved not to fall alive into the hands of the Spaniards, when besieged by Vasques de Coronado, after they had held out above six weeks, laid all their householdstuff and treasure in an heap together, which they set on fire; and taking their wives and children into the midst of their ranks, made a desperate Sally on the Enemy. A resolution worthy of a better fortune, most of them being slain in the fight, and the rest trod under the horses feet, or drowned in passing over the River. Yet would not those few which were left give up the Town, till it was fired about their ears, and no longer tenable: the Spaniard buying this victory (notwithstanding the great odds of their Arms) with the loss of most of their horses, the death of seven of their men, and the wounding of eighty. 3 Cicuic, a small Burrough, but the chief of that Province, four day's journey from Tignez: from whence the whole way unto Quivira, specially so called, being 90 miles, hath in it neither stone, nor tree, nor any landmark; insomuch as the Spaniards were fain to make heaps of Cowdung, to serve for their direction in their coming back.  
The first discovery of this Country is to be attributed to the diligence of Antonio de Mendoza Viceroy of Mexico, who desirous to get wealth and honour by some new Adventures, employed in the discovery of these Northern parts Prior Marco de Nisa. By him and by a Negro which he had for his Guide, there was some light gotten of Cibola, the next Province to this; but so disguised in lies, and wrapped up in fictions, that that light was little more than darkness. Yet by that glimmering, Francisco Vasques di Coronado, in the year 1540 undertook the business; and sped so well, that having made his way through Cibola, he took the Town of Tignez, as we heard before, and laid his way open to Quivira. Moved to a further journey by the report of the Savages, (who desired to hasten him out of their Country) telling him of the wealth of a Tatarax, who reigned in the inland parts of Quivira, a Bearded man (those of this Country wearing none) of a white complexion, and one who in his Chapel worshipped a Cross and the Queen of Heaven. On went the Spaniards towards Quivira, and found out the Tatarax, a poor naked Prince, master of no more treasure than a brazen plate hanging on his breast, and without any such sign of Christianity as they did expect. So frustrated of all their hopes, and having got-nothing but their labour for their pains, and the honour of a new discovery, with the loss of many of their men they returned to Mexico, An. 1542. Some Friars made bold to stay behind, but were all slain by the people of Quivira, except only one, who like Jobs messenger was left to carry news of the murder: The Spaniards never after looking into these cold Countries, where nothing else was to be gotten but blows and hunger.  
2. CIBOLA hath on the North Quivira, on the South and Southeast parts of New Gallicia, from which divided by the River called Rio del Nort, as before was said; the Westside of it washed with the Mer Vermiglio, interposed betwixt it and the Island, ot California specially so called. By the Natives it is called Zuni.  
The Air hereof indifferently temperate, if not too much subject in the winter to frosts and snows. The Country for the most part levelly, rarely swelled with hills, but those very rocky. No Trees that bear them any fruit; few Trees at all, except it be a Wood of Cedars, from which abundantly supplied both with fuel and timber, plenty of Maize, and small white Pease, which they make their bread of; great store of Venison, but they kill it only for the skin; some quantities of Sheep, known for such by their Fleeces only, but otherwise as big each of them as an Horse or Ox, some of their horns weighing fifty pounds. Of Lions, Bears, and Tigers so great a number, that they have more then enough for themselves, and could well spare them to their neighbours.  
The People generally well limbed, and tall of stature, ingenious in respect of some other Savages; and though naked except their Privities only, or covered only with a Mantle, yet those Mantles wrought in divers colours, which with some quantity of Cotton which they have amongst them (none of it growing in their Country) show them to be an industrious Nation, and to maintain a course of trade with some of their neighbours. A further Argument of which is those painted skins, which they have from Cicuique, or some other Country which lies towards the Ocean; my Author telling that they travel for them eight day's journey towards the North; and probably enough may be some of those Commodities which the Inhabitants of the maritime Provinces of Quivira do receive from Cathay or China, with which they are supposed to traffic, as before was said. Like industry is noted in the Women also, one of which will grind and knead more Maize in a day, than the women of Mexico do in four. In other things not differing from the rest of the Savages.  
This Country was first made known to the Spaniards by the Travels of Friar Marco de Nisa, employed on new Discoveries by Antonio de Mendoza, as before was said. Leaving Conliacan, the most Northern Province of Nova Gallicia, he overcame a tedious Desert four day's journey long, at the end of which he met some people who told him of a pleasant Country four day's journey further, unto which he went: And staying at a place called Vacapa, he dispatched the Negro, whom he took with him for his Guide, to search towards the North; by whom he was advertised after four day's absence, that he had been informed of a large and wealthy Province called Cibola, a month's journey thence, wherein were seven great Cities under the Government of one Princess, the houses of which were built of stone, many stories high, the Lintrels of their Doors adorned with Turquoises; with many other strange reports of their markets, multitudes, and riches. But neither the Friar nor the Negro had the hap to see it: the Negro being killed on the very borders, and the Friar so terrified with the news, that he thought it better to return, and satisfy the Vice Roy with some handsome Fiction, then put himself upon the danger of a further journey. To that end he enlarged and amplified the Reports which the Negro sent him; gave to the Deserts in his way the name of the Kingdoms of Tonteac and Marata; ascribed unto this last a great City called Abacus, once well inhabited, but at that time destroyed by wars; to the other a more civil and well clothed People, then in other places. Inflamed with which reports Vasques de Coronado undertook the action, but found the Friar to be a Friar; nothing of moment true in all his Relations: the Kingdom of Marata to be found only in the Friar's brains; Tonteac to be nothing but a great Lake, on whose Banks had once been many Cottages, now consumed by Wars. And as for the seven Cities of such wealth and bigness, he found them to be seven poor Burroughs; all situate within the compass of four Leagues, which made up that so famous Kingdom which the Friar dreamt of. The biggest of them held about 500 Cottages; the rest of them not above half that number. One of them, lest he might be said to return without doing something, he besieged, and took: but found it such an hot piece of service, that he was twice beaten down with stones, as he scaled the Rampires: but having taken it at the last, he found in it great plenty of Maize to refresh his Army, and caused the Town (consisting of 200 houses or thereabouts) to be called Granada, for some resemblance which it had to that City in Spain. Such as have since endeavoured the Discovery of these Northwest parts, and sailed along the shores hereof on Mer Vermiglio, have added hereunto the names of some points or Promontories: known in the Maps by the names of Po de S. Clara, not far from the mouth or influx of Rio del Nor, 2 Las Plaias', 3 S. Michael, 4 Rio de Toron, 5 Laque deal Oro bordering on Quivira; and 6 Rey Coronado, on the East of that.  
Betwixt this Region and Quivira specially so called, lieth a Country, which the said Vasques names Tucayan, memorable for the famous River of Huex, on the Banks whereof for the space of 20 Leagues stand 15 Burroughs well-built, and furnished with Stoves, (if he hath not in this part of the Story out-lied the Friar) as in other cold, but more civil Countries, against the extremities of Winter. This Region stretching seven days journey to the River of Cicuique, I reckon to belong to the North-east parts of Cibola. As I do also the fruitful Valley of Aroia de Corazones which they passed in their way hither from Conliacan; with the Town and Territory of Chichilticala, and the Valley of Nuestra Sennora, or our Lady's Dale, in the South parts of it: not knowing otherwise what Province to refer them to.  
Proceed we now unto the Island, the other general part of this Division, parted from Cibola and New Gallicia by a narrow Sea called Mere Vermiglio; and by some, the Golf of Califormia; environed on all other parts by the main Ocean. Extended in a great length from the 22d. degree of Northern Latitude to the 42d. but the breadth not answerable. The most Northern point hereof, called Cabo Blance, of which little memorable. The most Southern, called the Cape of S. Lucas, remarkable for the great prize there taken from the Spaniards by Captain Cavendish in his Circumnavigation of the World, An. 1587. Supposed informer times to have been joined, in the North parts of it, above the Latitude of 27. to the rest of the Continent, and so described in most of our later Maps, till the year 1626. and after that in the Chart or Map of John de Laet, An. 1633. which I wonder at: himself affirming, that in many of the old Maps it was made an Island; l. 6 cap. 11. and that he had seen a fair Map in parchment, a very fair and ancient draught, Quae Califormiam in ingentis Insulae modum, a Continente divideret, in which it was expressed for a spacious Island, lib. 6. cap. 17. The reason of the Error was, that those who first endeavoured the Discovery of it, sailing up the Sea of Mer Vermiglio, found it to grow narrower and narrower towards the North; till it seemed to be no bigger than some mighty River; but that of such a violent current that no Boat was able to pass upwards with wind or Oar, unless haled up with Cords by the strength of men. And taking it to be a River, they gave it the name of Rio de Bona Guia; known by that name, and continued in the opinion of being a River till the year 1620 or thereabouts. At what time some Adventurers beating on these Coasts fell accidentally upon a straight but violent passage, on the North hereof, which brought them with a strong current into Mer Vermiglio: discovering by that Accident, that the waters falling into that Sea, was not a River, as formerly had been supposed; but a violent breaking in of the Northern Ocean; by consequence that this part of Califormia was not a Demi-Iland or Peninsula but a perfect Island. And looking on it as an Island, we have divided it into Nova Albion, and Califormia specially so called.  
1. And first Califormia specially so called, containeth the Southern parts hereof, as far as to the Latitude of 38. where it bordereth on Nova Albion, of which Country though so near to New Spain, and New Gallicia, and though discovered so long since, we yet know but little: the Spaniards either wanting men for new Plantations, or finding small encouragements here to invite them to it. Furnished on the Seacoasts with great plenty both of Fish and Fowl, which they find in great Lands of Weeds floating on the Seas: and more within the Land, with a kind of Beast haired like a Goat, and with teats like a Cow, but otherwise resembling Deer, which they kill with their Dogs. Some Mountains in it said to cast Fire Ashes, which the Spaniards for that reason call Cacofogo. The People numerous, and thick set; insomuch that on the Banks of the supposed River of Bona Guia were numbered three and twenty Nations, all of several Languages. In their persons like the rest of the Savages; but of different dresses. Some of them painting their Faces all over, some half way only; others with painted Vizards resembling faces: holes in their nostrils for their Pendants; the tips of their Ears loaded, if not overloaded, with the bones of Fishes hanging at them. A girdle about their waste, to which they fasten a bunch of feathers that hang down behind them like a Tail: the Women using the like Bunches before them also. Their chief God the Sun, (as that of Cibola is the Water) which they most affectionately worship, as the cause of the increase of their fruits and plants. Joined in commission with which God, they were taught by Alarcon a Spaniard to worship a wooden Cross (the more irrational Idolatry of the two) which he caused to be erected at his coming away, with instructions to kneel before it every morning, at the first rising of the Sun: so teaching them to worship their two Idols at once, or to translate their devotions from the Sun a Creature of God's, to a plain wooden Cross (of which they knew nothing but the form) the work of a Carpenter. It is also told us of this people, that each family is ordered by the Father of it, without other government: yet so well managed, that they allowed but one wife to a man and punished Adultery with death; the Maids not suffered to converse or talk with men before their marriage, but to abide at home and work; the Widows not to marry again, till they had mourned at least half a year for the death of their Husbands. Matters more savouring an Viopian Commonwealth, than a Califormian.  
Places of most observation in it, 1 The Capes of S. Clara, and S. Lucas; the first on the South east point of the Peninsula towards New Gallicia; the other on the South-west towards Asia. 2 S. Crosses, (Sinus S. Crucis) a capacious and convenient Haven near the Cape of S. Clara, so called because discovered upon Holy-Rood day. 3 Cabo di las Plaias', more within the Bay; so named, because the shore showed in little hillocks, without grass or shrubs; the Spanish word signifying as much. 4 Cabo Boxo, towards the bottom of the Gulf, (from whence the land on the other side may be easily seen) in the Latitude of 29. 5 S. Andrews, a convenient Haven, and not far off an Island of the same name, with some Cottages in it. 6 S. Thome, an Island of 25 Leagues in compass, at the mouth of the Gulf; rising towards the the South in an high Mountain, under which a convenient Road for shipping, the Sea being thereabouts 25 sathoms. Then on the other side towards the Sea, we have 7 S. Abad, a convenient Haven, surrounded with a Country which seemed rich and pleasant. 8 Cape Irinidado, a Promontory well known to Sea men. 9 Cape de Cedros so called from the Cedars growing near it, in the Latitude of 28, & 15 minutes; with an Island not far off of the same name also. 10 Cape Enganno, in the Latitude of 31. 11 Puebla de las Canoas', so named from the multitude of Boats (by themselves called Cances) which the people used: four degrees more Northward than that Cape. And 12 Cabo de Galera, so named from the resemblance which it had to an Hat, in the Latitude of 36. But these two last I take to be within the Country of Seyo, one of the Provinces of Quivira. Understand here, that these are only the names of places, not of Towns or Villages, (for whether there be any such, I am yet unsatisfied:) and that there are many other Promontories, Bays, Rivers and Lands on both sides of this Region, which I find no names for.  
The first discovery of this Country we owe to Ferdinando Cortes (of whom more hereafter) who in the year 1534. furnished out two ships from the Haven of S. Jago in the Western shores of Hispania Nova, to search these Seas: who making some small progress in it, encouraged him the next year to pursue it in person; and passing up the Gulf as high as to the River of S. Peter and Paul, (so called, because discovered on the 29 of June, the Annual feast of those Apostles) for want of victuals and other necessary provisions, returned back again. The business having slept a while, was in the year 1539. awakened by Francisco de Vlloa, one that had accompanied Cortes the time before: who did not only search to the bottom of the Gulf, but having thoroughly canvassed all the Eastern shores, he turned his course, and made as fortunate a Discovery also of the Western coasts. Landing, he took possession of the Country with the wont ceremonies for the King of Spain, and in the place set up a Cross to serve as a Remembrance of his being there. After him followed Fernando the Alarcon, who discovered many Leagues up the course of the supposed River of Buena Guia, where Naguacatus one of the Chiefs of their Clans or Tribes did submit unto him: advancing so far towards the North, that at the last he heard news of Cibala; but unprovided at that time for a journey thither. And on the other side, Rodorico Cabrillo, in the year 1642. coasting along the Western shores of this Country, discovered two small Lands beyond Cape Galera; the one of which he called S. Luke's, and the other the Island of Possession: and beyond them a fair Haven, which he called Sardinas, more properly belonging to the Province of Seyo. But yet not finding what they looked for, which was Gold and Silver; and hungry Honour yielding but a poor subsistence: the further search of these Countries was quite laid aside; almost as little known now, as before Columbus first set sail upon New Discoveries.  
4. NOVA ALBION formerly conceived to be a part of the Continent, hath of late times been found to have taken up but some part of this Island; lying about the 38 degree of Latitude, and so Northwards as far as to Cape Blanco, as they call it now. Discovered by Sir Francis Drake in his Circumnavigation of the World, An. 1577. and by him named Nova Albion, in honour of England, his own Country, which was once called Albion.  
The Country abundantly replenished with Herds of Deer, grazing upon the hills by thousands: as also with a kind of Coneys, in their feet somewhat l●ke a Want, and on each side a Sack where they keep such victuals as they cannot eat. The flesh of these Coneys serves the People for food; and of their skins, the kings or Chiefs of their several Tribes, make their Royal robes. The men quite naked; the Women with a piece of Mat instead of an Apron, chaste, and obedient to their Husbands. Their houses made of Turf and Osier, so wrought together, as serves to keep them from the Cold: in the midst whereof they have an Hearth where they make fire, about which they lie along upon Beds of Bulrushes. What Towns they have, and whether they have any or not, and by what names called if they have any, must be referred to a further Discovery: there being nothing to that purpose delivered hitherto. And yet not seated so far North, but that it may be capable of a further light, if any noble Undertakers would adventure on it.  
The English were no sooner landed, but the Inhabitants presented themselves before the General, with presents of Feathers, and Calls of Network made of Bulrushes; which he received and requited with great humanity. The news of their Arrival being carried further, one of their Kings thought fit to bestow a visit on them. A person of a goodly stature, attired in Coney-skins, with many tall men attending on him; one going before him with a Mace, at which hanged three Crowns; with as many Chains; the Chains of bone, but the Crowns of Knit-work, made of Feathers, very ingeniously composed. After him followed many of the common sort, every one having his face painted with white, black, and some other colours; and every one with some present or other in their hands, even the very Boys. Being brought into the General's presence, the Mace-bearer made a long Speech, which might be well meant, though not understood: and that being ended, the King caused the Crown to be put upon the General's head, and the three Chains about his neck: the Common People offering Sacrifices about the Fields in great Solemnity. Not to be interdicted those Superstitions, though the English (whom they took for Gods) seemed offended at them. Finally, after much kindness expressed on both sides, the General promising in the name of the Queen of England, to take them into his protection; he caused a Pillar to be erected in the place; on which he fastened the Arms of England, the Queen's name, and his own, and so returned unto his Ships. But the Country lying so far off that no benefit could redound by it to the English Nation, but the honour of the first Discovery: the name of Nova Albion by little and little was forgotten, and at last quite left out of the Maps or Charts; only a Point or Promontory, by the name of Po de Francisco Draco, being left unto us to preserve his memory. And though we have caused the name of Nova Albion to be restored unto the Maps, as it was before: yet we must let the Reader know, that the name of New Albion hath been given lately with as much propriety, but more hopes of profit and advantage, to that part of Virginia which lieth betwixt Mary Land and New England, as before was noted.  
Opposite to Cape Blance, in the extreme North parts of America, the supposed Kingdom of ANIAN, from whence the Streits of Anian which are thought by some to part America from Asia, do derive their name; is conceived to lie. Supposed, and supposed only; for not certainly known: the very being of such a Kingdom, and such Streits, being much suspected.   

OF NOVA GALLICIA.  
NOVA GALLICIA is bounded on the East and South with Nova Hispania, or New Spain; on the West with the River Buena Guia, and the Gulf of Califormia; the Countries beyond it on the North not discovered hitherto. So called because of some resemblance which it was thought to have to Gallicia a Province of Spain in Europe; the word Nova being added to it for distinctions sake.  
It is situate between the 18. and 28. degree of Northern Latitude, which measured from the Port of the Nativity (by the Spaniards called Natividad, and contractedly Navidad) where it confineth on New Spain, to the most Northern border of Cinaloa, makes 300 Leagues: the breadth hereof, for so much as is possessed by the Spaniards, but an hundred only. But taking in New Biscay, and Nova Mexicana into the Account, the breadth will be greater than the length.  
The Air hereof generally very temperate, but more inclined to heat then cold, many times subject unto Thunders and great storms of rain; but for the most part of so sound a constitution, that the Inhabitants attain to a good old Age; contagious diseases seldom known amongst them. The ground by consequence somewhat of the driest; if not moistened with the morning dews, which fall very frequently: and whether by the temperature of the Air or Soil, apt to produce a kind of Gnat (which the Latins call Cimices) affirmed to be as big as a bean, which by their stings do very often plague the People, and raise blisters on their bodies as big as Walnuts.  
The Country more Mountainous than plain, and in most parts sandy; Quarries of stone in many places, but little Marble, or any other stone of value. Good store of Mines of Brass and Silver, few of Gold or Iron; and amongst all their Metals a great Mixture of Lead. The soil so rich that it yields 60 measures of Wheat for one; and for one of Maize, above two hundred: the Rivers plentiful of Fish, and the Woods of Beasts; great store of Bees without stings, which make their Honey in the Forests without other Hives. And as for Apples, Pears, Citrons, Figs, Malcotons, and other European Fruits, they thrive better here then they do in Spain, except the Cherry and the Olive: of which the last is most an end undermined by Emmets, and the first thrusts out such an harvest of Leaves (occasioned by the natural rankness of the ground) that they seldom come to their perfection.  
The people wavering and inconstant, apt upon any discontent to forsake their houses, betake themselves unto the woods, and many times to return to their ancient Barbarism. Crafty, and docile even in matters which concern Religion: but slothful and impatient of any labour, to which not to be hired but for very great wages. Much given to singing, dancing, and sometimes to drinking; and were it not that they loved their Liquor, few of them would betake themselves to the cares of Husbandry. Of stature reasonably tall; their garments for the most part a shirt of Cotton, with a Mantle over it, fastened with two Buckles about their shoulders. They dwell in Villages and Towns, according to the greatness of their several Tribes: those Tribes commanded by their Chiefs, who succeed hereditarily; but subject to the Judges and other Officers of the King of Spain. As for the Spaniards who here dwell, they betake themselves generally to merchandise, and the search of metals, some few to husbandry and grazing; but make not the best use which they might of the Country: For though here be great plenty both of Sugarcanes and of Caccineel, yet they neglect to refine the one, and attend the ordering of the other; finding perhaps an easier or a greater profit in the other Commodities.  
Mountains of most note in all this Country, is that betwixt Guadalaiara and Zacatecas, a League in height, but of such a precipice withal, that no horse nor cattle can ascend it: their other hills rocky, but clothed with woods, full of vast Pines, large Okes, and great store of Wolves. The River of most name is that called Bazania, which rising out of the Lake of Mechuacan in Nova Hispania, falls down a Cataract about four Leagues from Guadalaiara, of ten fathoms deep, and so tumbleth into Mare deal Zur: in no place fordable, nor having any passage over it but on Reeds and Rafts, on which the passenger sitteth with his commodities, his horse swimming by; not safe at any time, and at most times dangerous. Some Lakes here be of 20, some of 12 Leagues compass; environed with rich Pastures on every side. Those of less note shall be remembered in their proper places.  
It comprehends the Provinces of 1 Cinaloa, 2 Conliaoan, 3 Xalisco, and 4 Guadalaiara; on the Western Shores, 5 Zacatecas, 6 New Biscay, 7 Nova Mexicana, more within the Land. Of all these somewhat shall be said, though of each but little.  
1. CINALOA, is the most northern Province of New Gallicia, bounded upon the West with the River of Buena Guia, and some part of the Bay of Califormia; on the East with a long chain of Mountains, called the Hills of Tepecsuan; on the North with the South parts of Cibola, on the South with Conliacan.  
The Air for the most part clear and healthy; the Soil fat and fruitful productive of Maize, Pulse, a sort of long Pease which the Latins call Phaseoli, but we have no proper English name for; of which abundantly plentiful. Great store of cotton-wool, wherewith both Sexes are apparelled. Well watered with the Rivers, 1 Petatlan, 2 Tamochala 3 Pascua, 4 Yaquim; of no long course, all of them rising from the hills of Tepersuam, and those but 36 Leagues distant from the Seashores. By reason of these Rivers here are very rich pastures, which breed great store of Kine, Oxen, and other cattle.  
The People are generally tall, higher than the Spaniards by a hand breadth, warlike and strong, not conquered by the Spaniard without great difficulty; their Arms a Bow and poisoned Arrows, with great massy Clubs. Their Garments for the most part of cotton-wool; their hair nourished to a great length, which the men tie up in a Knot, but the Women suffer to hang down to the full length of it. Both Sexes at the first coming of the Spaniards thither, without Clothes at all, but to hide their shame; most miserably poor, worshippers of the Sun, and not a few Cannibals amongst them.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1 S. Philip and Jacob, situate on the bank of a River about 42 Leagues from the Town of Couliacan, but of no great note; 2 S. john's de Cinaloa, a Colony of the Spaniards planted here long sixce; and reinforced by a supply brought thither in the year 1554 by Francisco de Tharra; scarce able to defend themselves from the old Inhabitants, who ever and anon disturb them with a fresh Alarm. Besides these here are only some scattered Villages, and those not many: the Spaniards finding only 25 old Forts in all the Country, when they first made themselves Masters of it under the Conduct of Nonnez de Guzman, Anno 1542. People every where submitting without any resistance, or if they gathered to an head, soon dispersed again. For what could naked men do against an Army?  
2. COULIACAN, or CULUCAN, lieth on the South of Cinaloa, coasting along the Bay of Califormia, which it hath on the West; and part of New Biscay on the East. The Country well provided of fruits, inferior unto none for all sorts of Provisions; and not without some Mines of Silver found out by the Spaniards. The chief Rivers of it, 1 Rio de Macheras or the River of Women, in the North part of the Province; so called because the Spaniards found there more women than men; occasioning the opinion that it was inhabited by Amazons. 2 Rio de Sal, a goodly River; both sides whereof are very well Peopled. 3 Piastla, more towards Xalisco.  
The People not much different from the rest of Gallicia, save that their Women were more handsome both for dress and personage: all clothed in Garments of Cotton-wool, when first known to the Spaniards; and yet the men not free from the Sin of Sodom. Their houses neatly thatched with straw; and over the Lintrels of the Doors some Paintings as shameless as the very foulest of Aretine's Postures. Ignorant of Gold, which they had no Mines of; but of late times acquainted, to their cost, with Silver; which they are compelled to dig, and refine for the Spaniards.  
Chief Towns hereof 1 Hiustla, on the River so called, about a day's journey from the Sea; well built and artificially contrived in respect of others; never recovered of that blow which it had from the Spaniards, who in the Conquest of this Country wasted all before them. 2 Quinola, near Rio des Mugeres. 3 Quatrabarrios, an old Town but new named by the Spaniards, because it consisted of tour parts. 4 El Leon, an old Burrough which from a Lion there found, had this new name also. 5 Couliacan on a River so named, once the chief of this Province. 4 S. Michael, on the River of Women, built by Nonnez de Guzman, in the Latitude of 25. but afterwards deserted or removed rather to a fitter place: and now fixed in the Valley of Harroba, two Leagues from the Sea, in a flourishing and wealthy Soil both for Corn and Pasturage. The whole Country conquered by the Spaniards, Anno 1531. under Nonnez de Guzman; most barbarously burning down the Towns, and destroying the People; as if they came not to subdue but root out the Nation.  
3. XALISCO, or GALESCO, as some Writers call it, hath on the North Couliacan, on the South New Spain, on the East the Province of Guadalaiara; on the West the large Bay of Califormia. So called from Xalisco the chief Town of it, when subdued by the Spaniards.  
The Soil hereof very fit for Maize, which it yields good store of, but not often herbage good for cattle, which is reckoned for their greatest want. The North parts called Chiametla, of the two most fruitful, and better peopled; having in it store of Wax and Honey, with some Mines of Silver. The People formerly Man-eaters, and much given to quarrel; from which Reform since their Conversion to the Gospel: Tenacious still of one of their ancient Customs, which is to carry the smallest burden upon their shoulders, and not under their arms; which to do they think very much mis-becoming.  
Chief Rivers hereof 1 S. Sebastian's, 2 Rio de Spiritu Sancto, and 3 the great and famous River of Barania spoken of before. Upon the banks of which are situate their most principal Towns, viz. 1 Xalisco, giving name to the whole Province, and to a large Promontory, called by the Spaniards Sierra de Xalisco, thrusting itself into the Bay of Califormia, over against the islands called the Three Maries; the City taken and destroyed by Nonnez de Guzman, Ana 1530. 2 Compostella, now the chief City of the Country, and a Bishops See; founded by the said Nonnez de Guzman, An. 1531. when he had fully conquered the Country: by whom peopled with Spaniards, and by him called Del Spiritu Saato. But founded in so ill a place, and so bad an air, destitute both of food for men and grass for horses, as plainly showed him to have better judgement in Soldiery then in Architecture. 3 Purification, a small Burrough on the Seaside, and in the extremity of this Country towards Nova Hispania, near the Port of Natividad. 4 S. Sebastian in Chiametla, on the River so called, first built by Francisco de Tharra above mentioned; who having found hereabouts some rich Mines of Silver, brought hither in the year 1554 a new Spanish Colony; and building houses for his Miners in convenient places, occasioned the whole Tract to be called the Tharra.  
4 GVADALAIARA hath on the West Xalisco, on the East and South some parts of Nova Hispania, on the North the Province of Zacatecas; well watered with the River Barania which runneth thorough the midst thereof, some of his by-streams moistening the other parts. The Country very wealthy in Mines of Silver, plentiful of Maize, and fortunate in the production of Wheat and such other fruits, as were brought hither out of Europe. The Character of the People we have before applied in general to all the Natives of New Gallicia, but most peculiar unto these.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1 Guadalaiara, so called by the name of the Province, situate on the banks of the River Barania, or some branch thereof, in a sweet air and a most rich and pleasing soil; where founded by Nonnez de Guzman, An. 1531. when he had perfected his Conquest: better advised in the choice of the place, then in that of Compostella before mentioned. A City, of so good esteem, that it passeth for the Metropolis of all New-Gallicia; honoured with the Courts of Judicature; the residence of the King's Treasurers, & a Bishops See, removed hither from Compostella, A. 1570. Beautified on this last occasion with a fair Cathedral, a Convent of Franciscans, and another of Augustine Frier. 2 Del Spiritu Santo, built by the said Nonnez in that part of this Country which is called Tepique: but not else observable. 3 Sancta Maria de los Lagos, built by the same founder, 30 leagues on the East of Guadala●ara, and the best defence of all this Province against the Chichimecas, a barbarous and untamed people on the North and East parts of this Country: who harbouring themselves in the thickest of the woods, and some unknown Caves, do many times pray upon the Country, which they would utterly destroy, if not thus repressed.  
5. ZACATECAS is bounded on the South with Guadalaiara, on the North with New Biscay, on the West with Culnacan and some part of Xalisco, on the East with Panuc● one of the Provinces of New Spain.  
The Country of a different nature. In the west parts, called properly Los Zacatecas, rich in Mines of Silver, (no one Province more) but destitute of Wheat, Maize, Water, and all other provisions; as if it were designed for some wealthy Miser, who could live upon the sight of treasure. The Eastern parts properly called Vxitipa, not so well furnished with Silver, but most abundantly provided with all sorts of fruits; their woods replenished with Deer, their fields with Corn, and every tree giving entertainment to some Bird or other; in a word, nothing wanting in it either for necessity or pleasure. Of the People I find nothing singular, but that they are affirmed to be more industrious than the most of their neighbours; whether by force or nature (the Spaniards compelling them to drudge in their Silver-mines) I determine not.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1 Los Zacatecas, neighboured by most wealthy Mines, 40 Leagues on the North of Guadalaiara; inhabited by about 500 Spaniards, who have here a Convent of Franciscans. 2 S. martin's, 27 Leagues from Zacatccas, the Mines whereof were first opened by Francisco de Tharra before mentioned; who with many slaves, and all things necessary for a war, was sent upon that errand by Lewis de Velasco, than Viceroy of Mexico, An. 1554. The town inhabited by a Colony of 400 Spaniards, besides women and children. 3 S. Luke's, & 4 De Avinno, built amongst Mines as wealthy as those before, by the same De Tharra: as also was 5 Erena, a small Town, but of the same estate for Silver; distant from Zacatecas 25 leagues towards the Northwest. 6 Number de Dios, in the most Northern parts of this Country, 68 leagues from Guadalaiara; the foundation of the same De Tharra. Who having conquered the Natives, and quieted them after some Rebellions by gentle usage, built this Town in a pleasant and fruitful soil: and having got the Government of the Countries which he had discovered, drew hither so many of the Spaniards and chief men of the Natives, by granting them the propriety of some Silver Mines, that it became the chief and best peopled Town of all this Province. 7 Durango, in the valley of Guadiana, about eight Leagues distant from Nombre di Dios, peopled by a Colony of Spaniards conducted thither by Alfonso Pacheco, at the appointment of De Tharra, to whom the Spaniards are indebted for all this treasure. 8 Neres de Frontera, first built for the repressing of some of the Savages, who used to infest the borders towards Guadalaiara, during the Regency of the Marquis of Villa Maurique, who then commanded in New Spain.  
As for VXITIPA. it belonged once unto the Province of Panuco▪ subdued by Lopez de Mendoza, employed therein by Nonnez de Guzman, An. 1529. at that time Governor of that Province. D●membred from it since the Conquest of Zacatecas, and made a Member of the Prafecture of New Gallicia. The chief Town of it called S. Lewis, built in a pleasant Valley by the said Pacheco, and by him peopled with a Colony of Spaniards: the town not distant from Panuco above twenty Leagues.  
6. NOVA BISCAIA, or New Biscay, hath on the South Los Zacatecas; on the West Cinalca; on the North Nova Mexicana; the Countries towards the East not discovered hitherto. So called by Francisco de Tharra, by whom first subdued; from the near neighbourhood which it had unto Nova Gallicia, of which since reckoned for a part.  
The Country subject in the Winter to great Frosts and Snows; but notwithstanding well provided for of all things necessary; and wonderfully enriched with Mines of Silver. They have also some of Lead, which serve very fitly for the Melting and Purifying of the other; used to this purpose not alone in these Mines of New Biscay, but in those also of New Spain. The People resolute and stout, not Conquered at the first Attempt, nor won so much by force, as by fair persuasions.  
Places of most observation in it, 1 S. Barbara, and 2. S. john's, about three Leagues distant; built only for the benefit of the Mines adjoining. 3 End, the furthest Town which the Spaniards have towards the North, of whom a Colony was there planted (by reason of the adjoining Mines) by Roderigo deal Rio, who did also Fortify it, by the direction of de Tharra, under whom a Colonel. Distant from S. Barbara, and S. John about twenty Leagues, and an hundred and twenty Leagues from Los Zacatecas. More North by seventy Leagues at least, and within this Region, but not within the power of the Spaniard, are said to be those four great Towns which the Spaniards call Las Quatro Cienagas; but I have nothing of them certain.  
This Country first subdued by Francisco de Tharra; who after he had built Durango in the North parts of Las Zacatecas, and assured that Province, advanced with a Troop of 130 horse, for the Discovery and Conquest of his Northern Neighbours. Encountered at the first more with hunger and thirst then with any opposition of the Inhabitants; insomuch that they were said to eat their Horses: and afterwards by the Rebellion of the Natives, who killed the greatest part of such Horses as were left uneaten. But not discouraged herewith, nor with the many difficulties which he found in his way, being compelled to hew his passage thorough the Woods by the swords of his Soldiers, he prevailed at last; and having settled it in peace, returned by the way of Cinoloa, which he also Conquered; and planted there a Colony in the Town of S. John's, as was said before.  
7. NOVA MEXICANA, is bounded on the South with New Biscay, on the West with Quivira; the Countries on the North and East not discovered hitherto, though some extend it Eastwards as far as Florida. Extended 250 Leagues from the Town and Mines of S. Barbara, and how much beyond that none can tell; the Relations of this Country being so uncertain, and indeed incredulous, that I dare say nothing positively of the soil or People, but much less of the Towns and Cities which are said to be in it so named by Antonio de Espeio, a Citizen of Mexico in New Spain, by whom discovered and subdued.  
For first, they tell us of the People, that they are of great st●ature (and that like enough, but not so probable) that they have the Art of dressing Chamois and other Leather, as well as the best Leather-Dresser in all Flanders: or that they have Shoes and Boots so well sewed and soled, that no shoe Maker in all S. martin's could do it better. Then for their Towns, that they are very fair and goodly, the houses well built of Lime and Stone, some of them four Stories, and in most of them Stoves for the Winter Season. The Streets even, and ordered in an excellent Manner. Particularly they tell us of a Town called, 1 Chia, one of the five chief Towns of the Province of Cuames, which is said to contain eight Market-Places, and all the houses to be plastered and painted in most curious Manner. 2. Of Acoma, that it is stuate on the top of a Rock, a great Town, yet no way unto it but by Ladders; and in one place a pair of stairs but exceeding narrow, hewn out of the Rock; exceedingly well fortified by Nature (they say true in that, if any thing were true which they tell us of it) and all their water kept in Cisterns (but no body can tell from whence they have it.) 3. Of Conibas, on a Lake so called, the City seven Leagues long, two broad; (a second Ninive) but the Houses scatteringly built amongst Hills and Gardens, which takes up a great deal of the room: Inhabited by a People of such strength and courage, that the Spaniards only faced it, and so went away. Much of this stuff I could afford you, but by this taste we may conjecture of the rest of the Feast.  
The Country first discovered by Augustino Royaz, a Franciscan Friar, Anno 1580, who out of Zeal to plant the Gospel in the North, accompanied with two other Friars of that Order, and eight Soldiers, undertook the Adventure. But one of the Monks being killed by the Savages, the Soldiers played the Poltrons, and gave over the Action. On their return, Beltram a Friar of the same Order (from whose mouth we must have the former Fictions) desirous to preserve the lives of his Fellows which stayed behind, encouraged one Antonio de Espeio, a Native of Cordula, but a Citizen of Mexico, to engage in such an holy Cause: who raising a Band of 150 horse, accompanied with many Slaves, and Beasts of Carriage, undertook the business. I omit the many Nations of the Conchi, Pasnugates, Tobosi, Patarabyes, Tarrahumares, Tepoanes, and many other as hard names, which he passed thorough in his way. But coming at the last to a great River which he called Del Nor there he made a stand; caused the Country on both sides of it to be called Nova Mexicana, and a City to be built which he called New Mexico, situate in the 37th degree of Northern Latitude, and distant from old Mexico five hundred Leagues: the name since changed to that of S. Fogi, but still the Metrrpolis of that Province, the Residence of the Governor, and a pretty Garrison consisting of two hundred and fifty Spaniards. Some other Towns he found at his coming hither, viz. 2 Socorro, so called by the Spaniards because of that succour and relief they found there for their half starved Bodies. 3 Senecu, 4 Pilabo, and 5 Seviletta, old Towns, but now Christened by the Spaniards, when the Inhabitants thereof did embrace the Gospel; each of them beautified with a Church. 6 S. john's, built afterwards in the year 1599 by John de Onnate, who with an Army of five thousand followed the same way which Espeio went; and having got a great deal of Treasure laid it up in this place, that it might be no encumbrance to him in his Advance. This is the most I dare rely on for this Country: And this hath no such Wonders in it, but what an easy Faith may give credit to: though I had rather believe the Friar's whole Relations, then go thither to disprove any part thereof.   

OF NOVA HISPANIA.  
NOVA HISPANIA is bounded on the East with a fair and large Arm of the Sea called the Bay of New Spain, and the Golf of Mexico; on the West with parts of Nova Gallicia, and Mare deal Zur; on the North with the rest of New Gallicia, some part of Florida, and the Golf; on the South with Mare del Zur, or the South-sea only. So called with relation to Spain in Europe, as the chief Province of that Empire in this New World; with reference to which the Kings of Spain call themselves R●ges Hispaniarum in the Plural number.  
It extendeth from the 15. Degree of Latitude to the 26. exclusively, i. measuring it on the East-side by the Bay of Mexico to the North of Panuco; but six degrees less, measuring it on the Westside to the Port of Natividad, where it joineth with Gallicia Nova. Or making our account by miles, it is in breadth from Panuco unto Mare del Zur, 200 Spanish leagues, or 600 Italian miles; but hardly half as much on the other side. The length hereof from the East point of Jucutan to the borders of Gallicia Nova, 1200 Italian miles, or 400 Leagues, which is just double to the breadth.  
The air exceeding temperate, though situate wholly under the Torrid Zone: the heats thereof much qualified by those cooling blasts, which fan it from the Sea on three sides of it; and by those frequent showers which fall continually in June, July, and August, the hottest seasons of the year. Abundantly enriched with inexhaustible Mines of Gold and Silver, some of Brass and Iron; plenty of Coco-nuts, of which we have spoke before; great store of Cassia; such a wonderful increase of Coccineel, that 5670 Arrobas of it (each Arroba containing 25 Bushels of our English measure) have been shipped for Europe in one year. Where by the way, this Coccineel groweth on a small tree or shrub having very thick leaves, which they call a Tuna, planted and ordered by them as the French do their Vines: out of the seed whereof ariseth a small worm at first no bigger than a Flea, and the greatest not much bigger than our common Lady-cows, which they much resemble; which feeding on the leaves, and overspreading all the ground in which they are, are gathered by the Natives twice a year, stifled with ashes or with water (but this last the best) dried to a powder in the shade, and so transported into Europe. Here is also great plenty of Wheat, Barley, Pulse of all sorts, and of all such Plants and Roots as we set in Gardens for the kitchen; Pomgranats, Oranges, Lemons, Cittons, Malcotoons, Figs and Cherries, even to superfluity; Apples and Pears in less abundance, few Grapes, and those few they have not fit for wine; Plenty of Maize, and other Plants unknown in Europe; Birds and Beasts, wild and tame of all sorts, and of each no scarcity. Net thus in all places of it, nor in all alike; but some in one, some in another, according to the constitution of the soil and air: which is so different in this Country, that in such parts hereof as are hot and dry, their Seedtime is in April or May, their Harvest in October; but in such places of it as are low and moist, they sow their Corn in October, and reap in May: thus having two Harvests in a year, and yet but one.  
The People more ingenious than the rest of the Savages, exquisite at some Mechanic Arts, especially in the making of their Feather pictures; and so industrious withal, so patient both of thirst and hunger, that they will set at it an whole day without meat or drink, turning every Feather to the light, upwards, and downwards, every way, to see in which posture it will best fit the place intended to it. No better Gold smiths in the world, nor men more expert anywhere in refining Metals. Curious in painting upon Cotton whatsoever was presented to the eye. But yet so barbarous withal, that they thought the Gods were pleased with the blood of men, which sometimes they sacrificed unto them. So ignorant, that when they first saw the Spaniards on Horse back, they thought the horse and man to have been one creature; and would ask what the Horses said, when they heard them neigh: So careless of the worth of Gold, that they would part with great quantities of it for Knives, Glass-beads, little Bells, and such pe●it trifles. But whatsoever they once were, is not now material: the Spaniards having made such havoc of this wretched people, that in 17 years they destroyed above 6 millions of them; roasting some, plucking out the eyes of others, consuming them in their Mines, and mercilessly casting them amongst wild beasts where they were devoured. And as for those who do remain, besides their own natural ingeniosities, they have since learned the Civilities and Arts of Europe. What else concerns this soil and people, we shall show more particularly, if we find it necessary, in their proper places.  
Amongst the Rarities of this Country (though there be many Plants in it of a singular nature) I reckon that which they call Magney, or Meet, said to be one of the principal: a Tree which they both plant and dress as we do our Vines. It hath on it 40 kind of Leaves fit for several uses: For when they be tender, they make of them Conserves, Paper, Flax, Mantles, Mats, Shoes, Girdles, and Cordage; upon them there grow certain Prickles, so strong and sharp, that the People use them in stead of Saws. From the top of the Tree cometh a Juice like Syrup; which if you seeth it, will become Honey; if purified, Sugar; they may make also wine and vinegar of it. The Bark of it roasted maketh a good Plaster for hurts and sores; and from the highest of the Boughs comes a kind of Gum●, a sovereign Antidote against Poisons.  
Nor is it less a Rarity, though less useful to the good of Mankind (except it be to keep them in continual mind of the Fires of Hell) that they have a Mountain in this Country called Propocampeche (situate in the Province of Mexico) which vomiteth Flames of Fire like Aetna: and another in the Province of Guaxaca, which sendeth forth two burning streams, the one of Red Pitch, and the other of Black; a fit resemblance of those Fountains of Fire and Brimstone. Though they have many other Mountains, yet these most memorable. And as for Rivers, though very well provided of that watery commodity, yet here are none remarkable for length or greatness, but Panuco only, of which more presently. The want thereof supplied by some famous Lakes, and the neighbourhood of the Gulf of Mexico. Amongst the Lakes, the principal are those of Mexico (whereof more anon) and that of Chapala, bordering upon Gallicia Nova, which for its greatness hath the name of Mare Chapalicum, out of which there is made yearly great abundance of Salt. But that which is of greatest beauty is the Golf of Mexico, the greatest and goodliest of the World: in form completely Circular, in compass no less than 900 miles, environed with the main Land, the Peninsulas of Florida and Jucutan, and the Isle of Cuba: two only Passages in and out, and both well fortified; the one betwixt the Point of Jucutan and the Isle of Cuba, where the Tide with a violent current entereth; the other betwixt the said Island and the Cape of Florida, where it makes as violent an exit: the Sea so heady in the midst, and yet safe enough, that ships are not to sail in it directly forwards, but must bend either towards the North or South, as their journey lieth, Upon this Golf the King of Spain hath always some ships in readiness; by which he more assureth his Estates in this part of America, then by all his Garrisons.  
It comprehendeth the Provinces of 1 Panuco, 2 Mexicana, 3 Mechoacan, 4 Tlascala, 5 Guax●●a, 6 Chiapa, 7 Jucutan. Some others of less note, but reduced to these.  
1 PANUCO, the most Northern Province of all New Spain, by some called Guastecan, is bounded on the ●ast with the Golf of Mexico; on the West with Vxitipa, a member of the Province of Zacate●●●IN New Gallicia; on the North with Florida, and some Countries not yet discovered, from which 〈◊〉 by the River of Palms; on the South-west with Mechuacan, and on the South with Mexicana. So called from Panuco the chief River of it, which rising out of the hills of Tepecsuan, bordering upon Cinoloa and Couliacan; and dividing New Biseay from the Province of Zacatecas, passeth thorough the middle of this Country, and so at last into the Golf.  
The length hereof is reckoned to be 50 leagues, and the breadth as much. Divided into three provinces: That towards Mexicana, called A●●tuxetlan, of a fruitful soil, and not without some Mines of Gold; once very populous, till in the year 1522. dispeopled in a manner by Ferdinando Cortes in his war against them. The other called Chila, less fruitful, but possibly for want of People to improve the Land: for being formerly of a stout courageous nature, and trusting overmuch to their ●ens and Fastnesses, they put the Spaniards to such trouble when they warred upon them, that the conquerors to secure themselves from all future dangers, endeavoured to root them out and destroy them utterly. The third lieth towards the River of Palms, inclined to barrenness, and unpleasant; but the name I find not.  
Chief Towns hereof at the coming of the Spaniards hither, 1 Las Caxas, 2 Yxicuyan, 3 Nachapatan, 4. Taquinite, 5 Tuzeteco, desolate and laid waste by the cruel Spaniards. Of most note now, 6 Tan●hipa, and 7 Tameclipa, two small Burroughs in the Province of the River of Palms (for so I call it) inhabited by the Natives only. 8 S. Kallap, another small Town, but in the Province of Chila, inhabited by a few Christians, with a Convent of Augustinian Friars; sacked by the Savages in the year 1571. 9 Tamp●●e, or S. Lewis de Tampice, a Colony of the Spaniards, situate on the North banks or the River Panuco, and at the very mouth thereof, where it hath a very large Haven, but so barred with sands, that no ship of great burden can make use of it; the River otherwise so deep, that Vessels of 500 tun might sail 60 leagues at least in it against the stream. 10 S. Stevaen del Puerto, on the Southern side of that River, in the Latitude of 23. about 65 Leagues on the North of Mexico, from the Sea eight leagues; now the Metropolis, and town of greatest trade in all this Country. Built by Ferdinando Cortes in the place where formerly had stood Panuco, once the chief City of the Province, but by him destroyed. Opposite hereunto on the other side of the River, lie great store of Salt-pits, out of which the people of this town raise their greatest profit. 11 S. Jago de los Valles, or S. James in the Valleys, 25 leagues Westward (but inclining to the South withal) from S. Scevan del Puerto; situate in an open Country, and therefore fenced about with a Wall of Earth: to the Inhabitants whereof (all Spaniards, as in that before) the King of Spain hath granted many fair possessions, to defend those parts (then being the borders of his Estates) against the Savages.  
This Country first attempted by Francisco Garaio, but the conquest of it finished by Cortes, as before is said: each striving, as it seemeth, who should most deface it, and be enroled for the greatest manslayer of the two. But having carried on the course of their Victories almost as far as to the River of Palms, they desisted there; either because already glutted with humane blood, or that the conquest of those parts would not quit the charge. Insomuch as in all that Country from the River of Palms to the Cape of Florida, though lying all along on the Golf of Mexico, the Spaniards have not one foot of Ground: secure enough, because it lieth all along that Golf, that no other Nation can possess it.  
2. MECHV AC AN hath on the North-east Panuco, on the East Mexicana, on the South part of Tlascala, on the West the main Ocean, and on the North the Province of Xalisco in New Gallicia. So called from the abundance of Fish which their Lakes and Rivers did afford them; the word in their own language signifying Locum Piscosum, or a Country of Fish.  
The breadth hereof on the Seacoasts is 80 Leagues, in the borders towards Mexicana, but sixty only. The length I find not yet agreed on. Blessed with an Air so sound and sweet that sick Folk come hither out of other Countries, to recover their health: Well stored with Rivers, some Lakes, innumerable Springs of running water, and here and there some hot Baths issuing from the Rocks. The Soil so plentifully productive of all sorts of grain (even to admiration) that in some parts hereof four Measures of Seed have brought forth 600 Measures of the same grain, in the following Harvest. Well Wooded, and by reason of its Springs and Rivers, full of excellent Pastures; and yet not yielding unto any part of all America, for Medecinal Herbs and Plants of very Sovereign Nature for the good of Mankind. It affordeth also store of Amber, Mulberry Trees, Silk, Wax, Honey, and such other things, as chiefly serve for Pomp and pleasure.  
The People tall of stature, but strong and Active: of a good wit, and skilled in many excellent Manufactures. They speak four Languages of their own; but that most generally used, is by the Spaniards called the Tarascuan Tongue; which though it be an elegant and copious Language, yet most of them speak the Spanish also. More pliant to the Manners and Apparel of that Nation, than the rest of New Spain (the Mexicans excepted only) and so inclinable to the Gospel; that they are almost all gained from their old Idolatries. Insomuch that the whole Country being divided into 50 Parishes; every Parish hath its several Priests and inferior Ministers, who in the Language of the place do instruct the People, in which they Preach to them, and hear their Confessions: besides many Convents of Dominicans and Augustine Friars.  
It containeth in it upwards of 150 Towns or Burroughs, besides scattering Villages; 90 of which have Free Schools in them, and almost every one a spital for relief of the Sick. The principal thereof, 1 Zinzoutza, the seat of the old Kings of Mechuachan; in the first times of Christianity in this Country, made a Bishops See, till removed to Pascuar. The first Bishop Vasquez de Quiroga. 2 Pascuar, of no great note at present, but that the Bishops See was removed thither, because nearer to Mexico, from which distant 47 Leagues. 3 Valladolit, now the chief City of this Province, and the Bishops See, removed hither from Pascuar, and here finally settled in a fair Cathedral, Anno 1544. situate near, a large Lake (said to be bigger than that of Mexico) which doth not only afford the City great store of Fish, but yieldeth them the opportunity of several pleasures which they take in Boats upon the Water. The Lake and City by the Natives called Gnayangareo. 4 S. michael's, in the way from Mexico (from which distant about 40 Leagues) to the silver Mines of Zacatecas. First built by Lewis de Velasco, than Viceroy of Mexico, to defend the People of this Province, from the Chichamechas, a barbarous and hitherto an unconquered People who terribly molest the Nations upon whom they border. 5 S. Philip's, built at the same time by the said Velasco 6 Conception de Salaya, seventeen Leagues from Valladolit, 35 from Mexico; of the foundation of Martin Enriquez the Viceroy, An. 1570. to be a Stage for Travellers, in their journeys Northwards. 7 Guaxanato, bordering on Panuco, and not far from S. Jago de Los Valles, rich in Mines of Silver. Then on the Sea, we have 8 Acatlan, on the borders of New Gallicia, two miles from the Ocean; A Town of not above 30 houses, with a little Church; but neighboured by a large and safe Road for shipping (by the Spaniards called Malacca) which makes it seldom without the company of Sailors 9 Natividad, (or Portus Nativitatis) a noted and convenient Haven, from whence they commonly set sail to the Philippine Lands; pillaged and burnt by Captain Cavendish in his Circumnavigation of the World. 10 S. Jago (or S. Jago de Buena Speranza) a little on the South of Natividad; the shores whereof are said to be full of Pearls. 11 Colima ten Leagues from the Sea, but more South than the other, built in the year 1522 by Gonsalvo de Sandovall. 12 Zacatula, by the Spaniards called Conception, situate on the Banks of a large (but nameless) River, which rising about the City of Tlascala, passeth by this Town, and thence with two open mouths runneth into the Sea.  
This Province, at the coming of the Spaniards hither, was a distinct Kingdom of itself, not subject nor subordinate to the Kings of Mexico, as were most of the Princes of these parts: the Frontiers of the Kingdom fenced with stakes of wood, like a Palizado, to hinder any sudden incuision of the Mexican Forces. The last King called Tangayvan Bimbicha, submitted of his own accord to Cortes, An. 1522. and willingly offered himself to Baptism. But the Spaniards were not pleased with either, because deprived thereby of the spoil of the Country. But at last Nonnez de Guzman, than Precedent of the Courts of Justice in Mexico, picked a quarrel with him, accused him falsely (as is said by the very Spaniards) of some practices against his King; burned him alive with most barbarous and unheard of cruelty, and so confiscated his estate.  
3. Mexicana, is bounded on the East with the Golf of New Spain, on the West with Mechuachan: on the North with Panuco and some part of Nova Gallicia; on the South with Tlascala, and part of the Southern Sea; so called from Mexico, the chief City not of this Province only but of all America.  
It is in breadth from North to South, measuring by the Bay of Mexico, 130 Leagues; thence growing narrower in the midland parts hardly above sixty; and on the shores of Mare deal Zur, not above seventeen. The length hereof extendeth from one Sea to the other, that is to say, from the point of Lobos in the Province of Papantla, on the Golf of Mexico, to the Haven of Acapulco; on the Southern Ocean: but the determinate number of miles I do nowhere find. But measuring it from 17 degrees and an half of Latitude, unto the 22. and allowing something for the slope; we may conclude it to be much of the length, as it is breadth, that is to say about 130 Leagues.  
The Country is inferior to Peru in the plenty and purity of Gold and Silver, but far exceeding it both in the Mechanical and ingenious Arts which are here professed, and in the abundance of fruits and cattle▪ of which last here is such store, that many a private man hath 40000 Kine and Oxen to himself. 〈◊〉 is here also in great plenty; that only, which is drawn out of the Lake whereon Mexico standeth, being reported worth 20000 Crowns yearly, to the King's Exchequer. The People for the most part witty and industrious, full of valour and courage; good Handicraftsmen, if they stoop so low as to Trades and Manufactures; rich Merchants if they give themselves to more gainful traffic; And hardy Soldiers, if trained up and employed in service. Their ancient Arms were Slings, and Arrows, since the coming of the Spaniards practised on the Harcubuize. In a word, what was said before of New Spain in general, as to the soil and People of it, is most appliable to this.  
Chief Rivers hereof, 1 Los Yopes, which parteth this Province from that of Tlascala. 2 Citala, and 3 Mitla, both running Eastward towards the Gulf. 4 Papagaio, in the way from Mexico to Acapulco; with a fair bridge over it. 5 Las Balsas of a violent course, and in bigness equal unto Tagus in Spain; passable only by a bridge made of Rants and Reeds, not very strongly joined together. 6. The River of S. Francis, both large and swift, but in some parts fordable. Mountains of note I find not any which require a more particular consideration; and so pass them over.  
Towns of most note in it, 1 Mexico, the seat of an Archbishop, and of the Spanish Viceroy, who hath the power to make Laws and Ordinances, to give directions and determine controversies; unless it be in such great causes which are thought fit to be referred to the Council of Spain. This City was first situate in the Lakes and Lands, like Venice, everywhere interlaced with the pleasant currents of fresh, and sea-waters; and carrying a face of more civil government than any of America; though nothing, if compared with Europe. But the Town being destroyed by Cortes, it was built afterwards on the firm Land, on the Edge of the Lake, and bordering on a large and spacious Plain. The Plain on which it bordereth, is said to be 70 Leagues in compass, environed with high hills, on the tops whereof the snow lieth continually. In the middle of which ●lain are two great Lakes, the least of them forty miles in circuit, the one Salt and the other fresh, each of them alternately ebbing and flowing up into the other. On the Banks, of the Salt Lake standeth the City of Mexico with many other goodly Towns, and stately houses: on which Lake also, 50000 Wherries are continually plying. The Town in compass six miles, and containeth 6000 houses of Spaniards, and 60000 of Indians. It is a byword, that at Mexico there are four fair things, viz. The Women, the Apparel, the Horses, and the Streets. Here is also a printing-house, an University and a Mint; the Cathedral Church, ten Convents of Nuns, several houses of Jesuits, Dominicans, Franciscans, Augustinians, and other Religious Orders some Colleges, many Spitles and Hospitals, and other public buildings of great State and beauty. By the Natives it was anciently called Temistatan, the name of Mexico being given on a new occasion, of which more hereafter: most miserably endamaged by the breaking in of the waters, Anno 1629. which swelled so high that they not only overwhelmed the meaner houses, but the Vice-Roys Palace; drowned many thousands of the People, and destroyed the household 〈◊〉 of the rest. Occasioned by the avarice of the King's Ministers, who had inverted the money to their private use which should have fortified the Banks. 2 Tezcuco, situate on the same Lake, but six Leagues from Mexico; heretofore twice as big as Sevil; and for the beauty of the streets, and elegancy of the houses not inferior to any. Served with fresh water from the hills, brought in Pipes and Conduits, though seated on the brink of a Salt Lake. 3 Quitlavaca, built wholly in the Lake like Venice, and therefore by the Spaniards called Venezuela: a City of 2000 households: the way unto it over a Causeway made of fl●nts; half a League long, and about twenty spans in breadth. 4. Vztacpalapa, half in the Lake, and half without, with many Ponds of fresh water, and a beautiful Fountain; A City of 10000 Households, six Leagues from Tezcuco, and two from Mexico. 5 Mexicaltzingo▪ a borough of 4000, and 6 Cuyccan, one of 6000 Families, both upon the Lake: beautified in the times of their Paganism with many Temples, so gorgeously set out to the eye, that afar off they seemed of silver, most of them now converted into Monasteries and Religious houses. 7 Chulula, the fairest of all the Lake, scarce excepting Mexico, with which it anciently contended both for state and bigness: said to contain 20000 Families, and to be beautified with so many Temples▪ that their Turrets equalled the number of the days of the year. The People so addicted unto their Idolatries, and so barbarous in their bloody and beastly Sacrifices, that no sewer than 6000 Infants of both Sexes were yearly murdered on their Altars. 8 Mestitlan, seated on an high hill, begirt about with most pleasant Groves and shady Woods: A Town of about 30000 Inhabitants, the Villages about the hill being reckoned in; situate 14 Leagues, or two days journey from Mexico, in the way to the Province of Panuco; the high way on both sides set with fruitful Trees, to the great comfort and refreshment of the way-faring man. 9 Clantinolleper, twenty Leagues from Mestitlan, a Manor to which 40000 of the Natives do owe suit, and service. 10 Autepeque, on the South of the City of Mexico, at the foot of the Mountain Propopampeche; a Town belonging to the Marquis of Valla, and seated in the most delicious place of all New Spain. 11 Acachicha, on the North-east of Mexico, betwixt it and the Golf, bordering on the Province of Pepantla. 12 Acapulco, an Haven Town of the South-sea, situate on a safe and capacious Bay; at the entrance of it a League broad, and in the body of it full of convenient Stations and Docks for shipping: so that it is accounted the safest Haven of all those Seas. At the bottom of it towards the west, stands the Town and Castle, the Castle opportunely seated on a little fore-land both to command the Town, and secure the Port; well walled and fortified with four very strong Bulwarks, on which are planted good store of Ordinance; the Garrison consisting ordinarily of 400 Soldiers: strengthened the rather in regard of the usual intercourse which is betwixt this Port and the Philippine Lands.  
The Original Inhabitants of this Country (as far at least as their Records are able to reach) were the Chichimecas, now the most rude and barbarous Savages of all these parts; together with the Ottomies, somewhat more civil than the rest, but yet rude enough. By these possessed till about the year 902. as it is conjectured from their Annals, when vanquished and disseized by some new come●s, whom they called by one name Navatlacoes; issuing as it is conceived from those parts of Gallicia Nova, which are now called Nova Mexicana, An. 720. or thereabouts, but lingering in their march and wasting all the Countries as they lay before them. Of these there were seven Tribes in all, i.e. the Sachimilci, the Chalcae, the Tepanecae, the Culvae, the Tlafluici, the Tlascaltecae, all of them settled in these parts▪ and the five first about the Lake, before the coming in of the 7 Tribe, which was that of the Mexicans, so called from Mexi their chief Captain; who much delighted with the situation and conveniences of Temistitan then a ruined town, caused it to be rebuilt, and beautified by the name of Mexico. This town from that time forwards was reputed the head-City of their Commonwealth; the six Tribes governing in common, or the Chiefs rather of those Tribes in the names of the whole, after an Aristocratical manner. But weary at the last of this equal power, which the prevalency of some Tribes had made very unequal, the Mexicans, one of the weakest of the Tribes, oppressed by the rest, resolved to separate themselves, and to commit the ordering of their affairs to a King of their own: at first elected by themselves; but afterwards when they had conquered most of the other Tribes, the choice entrusted unto six, one for every Tribe, (the Tlascalt●cae which was the seventh of their Tribes, and the Founders of Tlascala, governing themselves long before, as a State apart) who in their choice had an especial eye on those which were strong and active, and fit for military employments; the people holding it a commendable meritorious act to kill their Kings, if once they were reputed Cowards. The Polity and Institutes of this Mexican Kingdom, I forbear to write of, further than as they lie before me in the way of their Story, digested by the government and succession of their several Kings, whose names and actions do occur in the following Catalogue, of 

The Kings of Mexico.  
A. Ch.  
1322. 1 Acamapitzli, Nephew to the King of Couliacan, but of the Mexican blood by the Father's side, elected for the first King; who joined Conliacan and Tonganeam unto his Estate, and settled that kingdom at his death in the way of Election.  
1373. 2 Vitzovitzli, son of Acamapitzli, subdued the Tribe of the Suchimilchi, and others of the neighbouring Nations.  
1394. 3 Huizilihuiel son of Vitzilovitli, conquered the Tribes of the Chalcae and Culvae, with many other Nations of the old Inhabitants.  
1415. 4 Chimal Pupuca, son of Huizilihuiel, won the Town of Tequixsuiac, and reduced the rebellious Chalcae under his command.  
1425. 5 Iscoalt brother of Huizilihuiel, by the valour of his Cousin Tlacaellec, freed himself from the yoke of the Tepanecae, to whom the Mexicans had before been Tributaries; and added their dominions unto his estate, conquering all the Nations round about him. After whose death the Electors by a joint consent chose Tlacaellec for their King, as a man of whose virtue they had formerly made trial. But he very nobly refused it, saying, that it was more convenient for the Commonwealth, that another should be King, and that he should execute that which was for the necessity of the State, than to lay the whole burden upon his back: and that without being King, he would not leave to labour for the public, as well as if he were. Upon this generous refusal they made choice of Motecumo the first.  
1438. 6 Motecumo, one of the Brothers of Chimalpupuca, brought in the custom of using no other Sacrifices at their Coronations, but of such Prisoners as the new King should first take in the wars. By the valour and good fortune of Tlacaellec, he subdued so many of the Nations (whose names I hold unnecessary to be here repeated) that he extended his estate from one Sea to the other.  
1467. 7 Axayacaci, the Nephew of Ischoalt by his son Tecozomoeliqueto, enlarged his Empire by the conquest of Tetentepeque, 200 miles from Mexico, to fit himself with Sacrifices for his Coronation; and brought the Lord of Tlatelulco who rebelled against him, to so hard a strait, that he was forced to break his neck from the top of a Temple.  
1479. 8 Ticoicatzi, the son of Azayacaci, added twelve Cities, with their Territories, to the Mexican Empire.  
1484. 9 Abuczozin, brother of Ticoicatzi, extended his borders to Guatimala, repaired or rebuilt a great part of Mexico, and brought thither a channel of fresh water.  
1502. 10 Motecuma II. Son of Axaacaci, before his Coronation conquered 44 Cities. He ordained that no Plebeian should bear any Office in his Court, and in the 18. year of his Reign was subdued by Cortes.    
As for this Cortes, to whom the Spaniards stand indebted for the Kingdom of Mexico, he was born in M●deline▪ a Town of Estremaduram, 1485. and in the nineteenth year of his Age, employed himself in the Trade and business of America, for the improvement of his Fortunes, Anno 1511. he went as Clerk unto the Treasurer for the Isle of Cuba, where he husbanded his Affairs so well, by carrying 〈◊〉. Sheep and Mares, and bringing Gold for them in Exchange, that in short time he was able to put in 2000 Castellins for his stock as Partner with Andrew de Duero, a wealthy Merchant. Grown richer, he was taken to be Partner with James Velasques in the Discovery of Tabasco, and the parts near Jucutan, An. 1518. And now resolved to venture all his stock both of friends and money, he furnished himself of eleven Ships, and with 550 men set sa●l from Spain, and arrived at the Island of Acusamill (now called Santa Crux) and failing up the River of Tabasco, sacked the Town of Potonchon, the Inhabitants refusing to ●ell him victual. After this by the help of his Horse and Ordinance he discomfited 40000 of the naked Savages, gathered together to revenge themselves for the sack of that Town; and received the King thereof in vassalage to the Crown of Spain. Being told that Westward he should meet with some Mines of Gold, he turned his course for the Haven of S. John de Vlloa, where landing he was entertained by Tendilli, Governor of the Town and Country for the King of Mexico, who understanding of his coming, and that he was the Servant of so great an Emperor (of which Tendilla had informed him by especial Messengers) he sent him many rich Presents both of Gold and Silver. Inflamed at the sight hereof, he resolved to go unto the place where such Treasures were; took possession of the Country in the name of Charles the fifth King of Spain and Emperor; and building there the Town de la vera Crux, left in it 150 of his men. Attended by no more than 400 Foot, 15 Horse, and six pieces of Ordnance, he pursued his Enterprise, by practice gained unto him those of Z●mpoallan, and Tlascalla, whom he understood to be illaffected to Motecuma: assisted with whose Forces he passed on for Mexico, sacked the Town of Chololla (a Town of 40000 households) in his ma●ch, he was kindly received into Mexico by the frighted King▪ whom he caused to acknowledge himself a 〈◊〉 to Spain, and to present him in the name of a Tribute with so much Treasure as amounted to 160000 Castellins of Gold. A quarrel growing not long after, Motecuma the unhappy King was by one of his own Subjects killed in the Tumult, and the Spaniards driven out of the Town. But aided with the whole Forces of the Tlascalans, and a recruit of more Spaniards (sent thither on a Design against him) he made up an Army of 100000 Savages, 900 Spanish Foot, 80 Horse, 17 pieces of Ordnance: and having with great diligence made ready a Navy of 13 Galliots, and 6000 Canons or Boats; la●d siege unto the City both by Sea and Land. After a Siege of three months, the City is taken, sacked and burnt, August 13. 1521. But afterwards rebuilt more beautifully than it was before. Thus fell this mighty Kingdom into the hands of the Spaniards by the valour and good fortune of Cortes, a private Adventurer, endowed for that good Service by Charles the fifth with the Town and Territory of Tecoan●peque, in the Province of Guaxaca, and many other fair estates in the Province of Mexico, and dignified with the title of Marquels of Valla.  
As for the Kings of Mexico, they are said to have worn a Crown resembling that which is now used by the Dukes of Venice. His Coronation held with great pomp, but most bloody Sacrifices. His Revenues thought to be almost infinite, raised out of all Commodities and paid in kind, whether Natural or Artificial only, the King participating of the fruits of all men's Labour, and sharing with them in their wealth; some paying in Cups full of powder of Gold of two handfuls a piece; some Diadems, and Beads of Gold; ●●ates of Gold of three quarters of a yard long, and four fingers broad; Tur●●sse ● stones, Golden Targets, rich Feather-Pictures, etc. Not to say any thing of matters of inferior value: all which in such a wealthy and large estate, must needs afford him a Revenue equal to the greatest Monarch. And for the encouragement of his Soldiers and Men of War, here were ordained three Orders of Knighthood, (or at least such distinctions of personal merit, as had resemblance to such Orders) the first distinguished by a Red Ribbon, the second called the Lion or Tiger Knight, and the third the Grey Knight: all privileged amongst other things to be clothed in Cotton, wear Breeches, to adorn themselves with gold and silver, and to have Vessel gilt or painted: high points, and not permitted unto any else. But it is time that I proceed to the rest of the Provinces.  
4. TLASCALA lieth betwixt Mexicana and Guaxaca, extended from one Sea to the other. The length here of from Sea to Sea an hundred Leagues; the breadth along the shores of the Gulf reckoned 80 Leagues, on the South Sea not above eighteen. So called from the abundance of Maize which they make their bread of; the word in that Language signifying Lecum panis, or the place of Bread, the same with Bethlehem in the Hebrew.  
The Country very plentiful both of Corn and Cattell, full of rich Pastures, and wonderfully stored with Maize: Level and plain except towards the Sea, where occurreth a large chain of craggy Mountains; The richer in the fruits of Nature for those fair and pleasant Rivers wherewith it is watered; the principal of which 1. Rio de Grijalva, so called from John de Grijalva, who first discovered it; employed herein by James Velasques, the advancer of Cortes. 2 Rio de Zempoall so called from the Town of Zempoalian about which it riseth. 3 Zahuate, which makes its way thorough the chain of Mountains before mentioned, and falleth with the former into the Golf. 4 Rio de Zacatula, a River of the longest course in all this Province; rising near Tlascala, and falling many Leagues off into Mare deal Zur. The People much of the same nature with those of Mexico, though upon jealousies of State their most bitter enemies; of which the Spaniards made good use to advance their Conquests on that Kingdom.  
Places of most importance in it, 1 Tlascala itself, which gives name to the Province: in former times governed after the form of a Commonwealth, according to the Democratical Models. Situate on a little Hill betwixt two Rivers; and in the middle of a large, but pleasant Plain, 60 miles in compass. So populous at the coming of the Spaniards hither, that it contained 300000 Inhabitants, now scarce 50000. It had four Streets (or rather Quarters) each of them governed by a Captain in time of war: and in the midst a Marks place so fair and spacious, that 30000 persons might assemble in it, to buy and sell, or for any other business. 2 Puebba de los Angelos, (the City of Angels) but most commonly Angelos: built by Sebastian Ramir●z, An. 1531. in the way from Vera Crux to the City of Mexico, from which last 22 leagues distant. A Bishops See, and thought to contain in it 1500 families. 3 Zempoallan, on the River so named, the Inhabitants whereof did great service to Ferdinando Cortes in his conquest of Mexico. 4 Napuluca; of great resort for a Fair of cattle; and such a kind of Court for ordering the trade thereof, as we call the Pie powders. 5 Guaxocingo, a pleasant and well● peopled town, situate at the foot of the burning Mountain before mentioned, by the ashes and embers whereof the fields are many times annoyed. 6 Segura, or Segura de la Frontera in the Region of Tepeac, built by Cortes the next year after the conquest of Mexico, with fair streets and handsome houses, by whom peopled with Spaniards. 7 Vera Crux, the first town built in this Country by the said Cortes, now a Bishops See: situate near unto the Gulf, and a great thoroughfare from thence to the City of Mexico, from which distant about 60 leagues. 8 S. John de ullua, the most noted Port of all this Province; fenced with a Peer against the fury both of winds and sea, defended naturally by Rocks and Quicksands lying before it, and by two Bulwarks well fortified and manned on both sides of the entrance. 9 Medellin, built by Cortes An. 1525. and planted with Spaniards: so called in memory of a town of the same name in Estremadara, in which he was born: situate on the banks of the River Almeria.  
The Tlalscallans were originally one of the seven Tribes which drove the Chichimecas out of their possessions: and either finding no room left for them on the Banks of the Lake, or else willing to subsist alone, withdrew themselves from the rest, founded the City of Tlascala, and there erected a Democratical Estate. Stomached for this by the other Tribes, and many times invaded by those of Mexico, after they had subdued the rest: they still maintained themselves against all attempts; and in the end assisted Cortes in the destruction of that Kingdom they so deadly hated. Privileged for that reason by the Spaniards, and exempted from all kind of tribute (except it be an handful of Wheat for every person) and suffered to live under his protection in the former Government. The Province given us by this name, said to contain 200 good Towns and Burroughs, 1000 Villages and upwards, and in them 150000 of the Natives, besides Spanish Colonies. Distributed into 36 Classes or Rural Deaneries for Ecclesiastical Government, in which are thought to be 30 Convents and Religious Houses.  
5 GVAXATA is bounded on the West with Tlascala, on the East with Jucutan and Chiap● one of the Provinces of Guatimala, on the North with the Bay of Mexico, and on the South with Mare del Zur. Extended on the South-sea to the length of an hundred miles, but on the Bay to fifty only: in breadth from sea to sea where it bordereth on Tlascala, 120 leagues; not above 60 where it confineth on Chiapa. So called from Guaxata once the chief town of these parts, now named Antequera.  
The Air heteof very ●ound and sweet, and the Soil as fruitful: plentiful not only of those commodities which are common with the other Provinces of this Country; but of such quantities of Silks, and store of Mulberries, that if the Natives paid their Tithes as the Spaniards do, that very Revenue would suffice to endow five Bishoprics, as good as that which is there already: scarce any River of this Country, but hath Sands of Gold: such plenty of Coccinele (a rich grain used in dying Scarlets, of which before) as also of Cassia, Gold, Silver, and other metals, that if the people did but add some industry to the wealth of the Country, they might be the richest men in all America. But being naturally slothful, and impatient of labour, they lose all opportunities of gathering riches, and live but from hand to mouth, as we use to say. Docile enough, and so indulgent unto those who take pains to teach them, that here are reckoned 120 Convents of Dominican Friars, besides other Schools; these last conceived the greater number  
It is subdivided into many particular Provinces (we may call them Wapentakes or Hundreds) as 1 Misteca, 2 Tutopeque, 3 Zapoteca, 4 Guazacoalco, 5 Gueztaxatla, and 6 the Vale of Guaxata; this last most memorable, in that it gave the title of Marquesso del Valle to the famous Cortes. Towns of most observation. 1 Teozopotlan, once the chief town of Zapoteca, and the seat of their King. 2 Cuertlavaca, of great note for a Labyrinth not far off, hewn out of the Rock, but by whom none knoweth. 3 Antequera, in the valley of Guaxata, a stately City, and beautified with a fair Cathedral, as that with Marble-pillars of great height and thickness. 4 S. Illifonso in the Province of Zapoteca. 5 S. Jago in the Valley of Nexapa, seated upon a lofty hill. 6 Del Spiritu Santo, distant about three leagues from the shores of the Golf, in the Province of Guazacoalco; the foundation of Gonsalvo de Sandoval, A. 15●6. 7 Aguatulco, or Guatulco, a noted and convenient Port on the South-sea; much used by those which trade from Peru to Mexico, and from Mexico to any Port of the Southern seas. By consequence rich, and therefore plundered to the purpose both by Drake, and Cavendish, in their voyages about the world. 8 Tacoantepeque a Port of the same Sea also, but of far less note. Burroughs and 〈◊〉 in all 650. inhabited by 150000 of the Natives liable to tribute, besides women and persons under age, not reckoning the Spaniards in the number.  
6 JUCUTAN, environed on three parts by the Sea like a Demi-Iland, is fastened to the Continent only where it meets with Guaxaca; the furthest point of it opposite to the Isle of Cuba. Discovered first by Fernandes de Cordova, employed therein by Don Christopher Morante, An 1517▪ and called Jucutan, not as some conceit it, from Joctan the son of Heber, who they think came out of the East, where the scripture placeth him (Gen. 10. 30.) to inhabit here; but from Jucutan, which in the language of the Country signifieth, What say you? For when the Spaniards at their first coming hither asked the name of the place, the Savages not understanding what they meant, replied Jucutan, that is, what say you? whereupon the Spaniards always after called it by this name.  
The compass of it, taking the Province of Tabasco into the account, is said to be 900 miles, or 300 leagues. The Air hot, and the Country destitute of Rivers; not otherwise provided of water but by pits and trenches, which abundantly supply that want. Sufficiently barren, the soil not bearing Wheat, or any European fruits, nor many of the growth of America in other places. Nor have they Mines of Gold or Silver, or any other Metal, to enrich the people: who must either live by trades and labour, or else beg their bread. Nothing remarkable in the Country, but that here seemed to be some remnants of Christianity, at the Spaniards first coming hither: the people constantly observing a kind of Baptism, which they call in their own language a second birth, expressing by that word a Regeneration; not suffering any one to marry until so initiated. And possible enough it is, that this may be the Country upon which Madoc ap Owen fell; who though he might by some good fortune be brought back to Wales, yet that he should make any such second voyage hither, as is said in their Chronicles, I by no means grant.  
Towns of most observation in it, 1 Merida, almost in the n●vel of it, situate in the 20 degree of Latitude, the ordinary seat of the Governor▪ and the ●ee of a Bishop: distant from the Sea on each side about twelve leagues; and called snap Town of that name in Spain, with which it is thought to have some resemblance 2 〈◊〉▪ 30 leagues from Merida, beautified with a most sumptuous Monastery of Franciscan ●riers. 3 Campeche (or S. Francisco, as the Spaniards call it) situate on the shore of the Golf; A town when first known to the Spaniards of 3000 houses, and beautified with such monuments of art and industry, as showed that there was some what in this people which was not barbarous. since that not more observable, then for being suddenly surprised by Parker an English Captain, A 1596. who carried away with him the Governor, the wealth of the town, and many prisoners, besides a great ship full of gold, silver, and other the like precious commodities, designed for the King of Spain's own use. 4 Tabasco, situate in the best part of this Country, so different from all the rest, that it is made by some a distinct province from it. By the Spaniards called Valla de Nuestra Sennora de la Victoria, most commonly Victoria only; and that in memory of the first fortunate victory which Cortes had upon this people, arming themselves against him for the sacking of Pontonchan. 5 Pontonchan, sacked by Cortes for denying to supply him with victual. 6 Salamanca, so called with reference to a town of that name in Spain.  
Along the Coast of this Country lie many Lands, viz. 1 La Zarza, 2 Desconoscida, 3 Triangulus, 4 Vermeia, 5 Los Negrillos, 6 Los Alacranes, all within the Golf. Without it. 7 Zaratan, 8 Pant●ia, 9 Lamanay, 10 De Mucheres, or the Isle of Women; 11 Cozamul, by some called Acusamil. This last the biggest, as 15 leagues long, 5 broad; and the most remarkable, as being the usual way which the Spaniards traveled in their discoveries of this Country from the Isle of Cuba. For here first landed Fernando de Corduba, An. 1517. who passing over to Jucutan (but four leagues distant) brought back nothing but stripes. Here the next year arrived John de Grijalva, in the same pursuit; who passing by Jucutan to the Province of Guaxata, left his name behind him to a River. And finally here landed the most fortunate Cortes, who coasting about the Demi Island, landed near Tabasco, and there first hanselled his good fortune with a notable victory. Yet neither the Island nor Peninsula discovered perfectly, till the year 1527. when both subdued by Francisco de Monteio, to the Crown of Spain. The Island now called Santa Crux.   

OF GVATIMALA.  
GVATIMALA is bounded on the North by Jucutan, and the Golf of Honduras; on the South with Mare del Zur; on the East (or Southeast rather) with Castilia Aurea; on the West with New Spain. Extended 300 leagues in length upon the Coasts of Mare deal Zur; but measuring by a straight line, not above 240: the breadth thereof 180 leagues, where broadest; in most places narrower. So called from Guatimala the chief Province; as that from the prime City of it, honoured with the seat of the Governor, and the Courts of Justice.  
The nature of the soil and people (if differing in any material thing from those before) we will consider in the View of those several parts into which this Country is divided. The principal whereof, 1 Chiapa, 2 Verapaz, 3 Guatimala specially so called, 4 Honduras, 5 Niceragua, 6 Veragua. The rest of less note, easily reduced to these.  
1 CHIAPA hath on the West New Spain, on the East Verapaz; on the North, part of Jucutan; and Mare deal Zur, upon the South. Extended 40 leagues in length, not much less in breadth; and anciently inhabited by four Nations, all of several Languages.  
The soil not very natural for Corn or Fruits: though Pot herbs brought from Spain thrive well, as do Beans and Lentils; yet Vines and other richer fruits seldom come to good. Wood-vines they have, which yield a very pleasant pulp; and if well ordered, might be brought to afford more profit. Their trees, most of them, greater than in other places, as Pines, Oaks, Cedars, and the Cypress, whole Woods of Walnuts, but the Nut not so big as those of Europe. Some of their Trees yield Rosin, some such precious gums, as in other places are not usual; and some there are whose Leaves being dried into a powder, afford a sovereign plaster for exulcerate sores: And they have need too often to make use of these Plasters, the Country being full of Snakes and other venomous Creatures (some of the Snakes no less than 20 foot in length) whose poison being strong and deadly, doth require such helps. Of the People nothing singular, that I have met with; but that they are more musical and exact in painting then the rest of the Natives.  
Towns of most note in it, 1 Cividad Real, built by the Spaniards in the Country of the Chiapenses, at the foot of an hill, situate in a round Plain, encompassed about with Mountains like an Amphitheatre: afterwards made a Bishops See, and privileged by the Kings of Spain to be governed by such City-Magistrates as they call Alcaids. 2 Chiapa, in a vale adjoining; before the building of the other, of most note in this Province: yet still before it in regard of its situation, this Valley being better fraught with Pears, Apples, Wheat and Maize, than all the rest of the Country. 3 Tecpatlan, once the chief of the Zoaques, possessed of 25 Villages in this Province; now beautified with a Monastery of Dominican ●riers. 4 Capanavatzla, the principal Town of twenty five which the Quelenes held in this tract: remarkable for nothing but a Convent of the same Dominicans. 5 S. Bartholmews, another town in the territory of the same Quelenes: near which is said to be a great Pit, or opening of the earth, into which if any man casts a stone, though never so little, there presently followeth a loud and fearful noise like a clap of thunder. 6 Guevetlan, built by Pedro de Alvaridi, when he was Governor of these parts; the chief Town of a little Province called Soconusco. 7. Casapualca, a small Burrough, but memorable for a Well in the fields adjoining; the waters whereof are noted to rise and fall, as the Ocean doth flow or ebb, and at equal distances of time. Of thirteen Townships which the Zeltales were possessed of, I find no one named; though painted all of them, and set forth to the eye of the Traveller, with Coccinele, of which their Territory hath good plenty.  
And now I am fallen upon these Rarities of Nature, I cannot but take notice (though somewhat out of my Method) of a River by the Spaniards called Rio Blanco, which turns wood to stones: of a Spring in the Cantred of Tafixa, which in the Summer is full of water, in the Winter dry; of another in the same Cantred, which for one three years, though it rain never so little, is full of water, and the next three years hath none at all; and so successively by turns: and finally, that the chief River of the Province, having received into it many lesser streams, is swallowed up near a Village of the Chiapenses, called Otztutan, never after seen. None of them samed for Golden Sands, as are those of Guaxata; though it be thought there be some Veins of gold and silver, but hitherto neglected for want of Slaves to work the Mines.  
2 VERAPAZ is bounded on the West with Chiapa, on the East with Guatimala and Hondura, on the North with Jucutan, and on the South with the Territory of Soconusco. In Latin called Provincia Verae Pacis; by the Spaniards Verapaz, because not conquered by the sword, but won to the obedience of the King of Spain by the preaching of the Dominican ●riers.  
The Country 30 Leagues in length, and as much in breadth, full of high Hills and deep Valleys, but no fruitful plains; generally overgrown with Woods, very large and thick, which so hinder the free passage of the winds, that the Air hereof is very shewery: Insomuch that for nine months in the year they have always rain, not altogether free from it in the other three. By reason of this moisture much annoyed with Mosquits a kind of Gnats, very injurious to their Fruits, with which otherwise (as with 〈◊〉 other necessaries) they were well provided. No Mines of Gold or Silver discovered hitherto, 〈◊〉 the Spaniards have many times in vain attempted it. Instead whereof some of their Trees drop a kind of Amber, which they call Liquid amber; some Mastic, and some other Gums; they have also many Medicinal woods, as Sarzaparilla, that called China-wood, and many others.  
The People tractable and conform to the Spanish Government, except the Lecandones, and Pachu●●● some Remainders of the ancient Savages, who keeping in the Mountains and craggy Rocks of this Country, have hitherto retained both their Native Freedom, and their old Idolatries. No Towns here●n possessed by the Spaniard, and but fourteen Villages in all, in which they live mingled with the old Inhabitants. The principal of these S. Augustin●s, not so much memorable in itself, as for the neighbourhood of a Cave betwixt two Mountains, from which the Rain descending turns into Alabaster, naturally fashioned into Pillars and other Portraitures. Into which al●o many Springs do convey their waters, which there being joined into a body, make an handsome River, able almost at the first appearance to bear a Boat. A Port they also have at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea called G●l●o Dulcet ● but of so little use and Trading that I find no 〈◊〉 for it, unless it should be that Yztapa which Herrera speaks of, by whom placed in Guatimala.  
3 GVATIMALA specially so called, is bounded on the West with Verapaz, from which parted by the River ●●alapa; on the East with Nicaragua; on the North with Honduras, and on the South with Mare del Zur or the Pacificque Ocean. Extended 30 Leagues from the North to the South, and on the Sho●es of Mare del Zur, not above seventeen. But reckoning in 〈◊〉 Chalu●eca, and S. Saviour's, three adjoining Regions, by some made Provinces distinct, the dimensions of it must be much greater both for length and breadth.  
The Country Mountainous, but withal very full of Rivers; by consequence commodious both for 〈◊〉 and hunting▪ Fruitful of Wheat, Maize, and other Provisions, but those fruits not lasting. Not so much subject unto rain as they are in Verapaz, but more troubled with winds. Full of rich Pastures, and those Pastures of great Herds of cattle. Good store of Cotton-wool, some Balsamum, and other Medicinal 〈◊〉; as also of the best Sulphur, and many Apothecary's Drugs which I have no skill of. The People Pusillanimous and fearful▪ greater proficients in Christianity and Civility than most of the Savages. but so that it is thought they would relapse again to their ancient Paganism, and revive again the●● old barbarous 〈◊〉. if not held in by the bridle of fear, and the 〈◊〉 of power. The 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to be good 〈◊〉 and the Women good Spinners.  
Chief Rivers hereof, 〈◊〉, a River of a course but of 13 Leagues, yet of great depth, and navigable half the way, which falleth into Mare deal Zur. 2 Lempas▪ watering the Burrow of S. Sa●●● which hath 〈◊〉 from a great Lake, and his fall in the same Sea also. Here is also said to be a Lake ●eet the Village of Ystepeque, of the waters whereof are made both Sulphur and Allom. And here is said to be a Volcana or burning Mountain, which though it hath vomited no ●ire of late, the matter of it being spent; yet the said Monuments of his Furies do remain among them; another not far off which still casts out smoke.  
Towns of most note, 1 Guatimala, or S. Jago de Guatimale, the chief Town of the Province, situate on a little River betwixt both 〈◊〉, by one of which most terribly wasted. An 1541. But being 〈◊〉, it hath since exceedingly flourished▪ by reason of the Bishops See, the residence of the Governor, and the Courts of Justice. 2 S Salvador, 40 Leagues Eastwards from Guatimala, by the Natives called 〈◊〉: situate on the River Guacapa, seven Leagues from the Sea and neighboured by a great Lake of five Leagues compass. 3 Acaxutla, at the mouth of the same River, the Port Town to 〈◊〉. 4●● Trinidad, by the Natives called Samsonate, the most noted Empory of this Country; the 〈◊〉 at Bartery betwixt the Inhabitants of New Spain, and those of Peru. 5 S. michael's, two Leagues from the Bay of Fonseca, which serves unto it for an Haven. 6 Xeres de la Fontera, the chief Town of the Cantrea of Chulut●can, by which name it was formerly known situate on the Frontiers towards Nicaragua, and to the South east of the Bay of Fonseca; that Bay so named in honour of Roderick Fonseca Bishop of Burges, and Precedent of the Council for the Indies, An. 1532. by Giles 〈◊〉 〈◊〉▪ who first discovered it; About and in this Bay are ten little Lands, four of which inhabited, and plentifully furnished with wood, water, and salt.  
4. HONDURA hath on the South Guatimala, specially so called; on the West, the Bay or Arm of 〈…〉 Dulce▪ by which parted from Verapaz: on the North and East the Sea called Mare del Nort; on the South east Nicaragua; on the South Guatimala specially ●o called. In length 〈…〉 of that Sea 150 Leagues, and about 80 Leagues in breadth from North to 〈…〉 of Honduras, or Fonduras imposed upon it from the depth of the Sea about the 〈◊〉 Head land of it, called the Cape of Honduras.  
The whole Country either Hills, or Valleys, little Champagne in it: fruitful of Maize and wheat, and of very 〈…〉 age; made so by the constant overflowings of their Rivers about Michaelmass; which do not only soil their grounds, but water their Gardens. The principal of them, 1 Haguara, 2 Chamalucon, 3 Vlna, all neighboured by fertile fields, and pleasant meadows. Some Mines of Gold and Silver are conceived to be here, but not yet discovered; the people being so slothful and given to idleness, that they had rather live on Roots, then take pains in tilling of their land; and therefore not easily entreated to toil for others, but where necessity and strong hand do compel them to it.  
Towns of most note, 1 Valladolit, by the Natives called Commyagna. 40 leagues distant from the Sea, situate in a pleasant and fruitful Valley, on the banks of the River Chamalucon; and honoured with a Bishops See, fixed here about the year 1558. built near the place where once Francisco de Mont●io Governor of this Province had planted a Colony of Spaniards, An. 1530. by the name of S. Maria de Commyagna. 2 Gracias di Dios, 30 leagues Westward of Valladolit, bu●●t by Gabriel de Royas, An. 1530. to be a place of defence for those who worked in the Mines, against the Savages. But finding himself unable to make it good, he defaced and left it: Re-edified again by Gonsalvo de Alvarado and since well inhabited. 3 S. Peter's, eleven ●eagues distant from the Port of ●avallos, but seated in a most healthy air, and therefore made the dwelling place of the Farmers of the King's Customs who have their houses in this town, and follow their business in the other, as occasion is ● Porto de Cavallos, so called from some horses thrown overboard in a violent tempest: the most noted Heaven of these parts, and strong by natural situation; but so ill guarded and defended, that in the year 1591. it was pillaged by Captain Christopher Newport; and An 1596. by Sir Anthony Shirley. Deserted on those spoils and not since inhabited. 5 S. Thomas de Castille, 18 leagues from Cavallos, naturally strong, and forrified according to the Rules of Art: to which as to a place of more strength and safety, Alfonso Briado de Castilia Precedent of the Sessions of Guatimala, removed both the Inhabitants and Trade o● Cavalios. 6 Traxillo, seated on the rising of a little hill betwixt two Rivers (one of them that which is called Haguara) distant from Cavallos 40 leagues to the East, and 60 leagues to the North of Valadolit: surprised and pillaged by the English, An. 1576. Not far hence towards the North-east lieth the Cape of Honduras, from whence the shore drawing inwards till it join with Jucutan, makes up a large and goodly Bay called the Golf of Honduras. 7 S. George de Olancho, so named of the valley Olancho, in which it is seated; a valley noted heretofore for some golden Sands, which Guaejape, a River of it, was then said to yield.  
5 NICARAGVA is bounded on the North with Honduras, on the East with Mare del Nort and the Province of Veragua, on the South with Mare del Zur, on the West with Guatimala. By Didaco Lopez de Salsedo who first subdued it, it was called the New kingdom of Leon; but the old name by which they found it called at their coming thither, would not so be lost.  
The Country destitute of Rivers, except that part hereof towards Veregua, called Costa Rica, reckoned a Province of itself. The want hereof supplied by a great Lake or a little Sea, called the Lake of Nicaragua, 120 leagues in compass, ebbing and flowing like the Sea: upon the banks of which stand many pleasant villages and single houses. A Lake well stored with Fish, but as full of Crocediles: and having made its way by a mighty Cataract, emptieth itself into the Sea about four leagues off. Not very rich in Corn, (most of which is brought them from Peru) but well stored with cattle; level and plain, and shadowed with frequent trees; one amongst others of that nature, that a man cannot touch any part of it, but it withereth presently. Affirmed to be as full of Parrots, as England of Crows; stored with great plenty of Cotton wool, and abundance of Sugar canes. In a word so pleasing generally to the eye, that the Spaniards call it by the name of Mahomet's Paradise.  
The People for the most part speak the Spanish tongue, and willingly conform themselves to the Spanish garb both of behaviour and apparel: well weaned from their old barbarous customs, retained only by some Mountainers, whom they call Chontales. All of good stature, and of colour indifferent white. They had before they received Christianity, a settled and politic form of government: only as Solon appointed ●o law for a man's killing of his father, so had this people none for the killer of a King; both of them conceiting that men were not so unnatural as to commit such crimes. A Thief they judged not to death, but adjudged him to be slave to that man whom he had robbed, till by his service he had made satisfaction: A course more merciful, and not less just, than the loss of life.  
Chief towns hereof, 1 Leon, or Leon de Nicaragua, situate on the Lake aforesaid; the Residence of the Governor, and the Bishops See; built in a sandy soil, and begirt with woods. 2 Granada, on the same Lake, sixteen leagues from Leon, beautified with a fair Church and a strong Castle, both founded by Ferdinando de Cordova: the City seated in a liberal and wealthy soil, well furnished with Sugarcanes; for the refining of which here are many Work houses, which they call Ingenios'. 3 Segovia, distant from the former about 30 leagues; rich in veins of Silver. 4 Jaen, (all called according to the names of some Towns in Spain) situate at the end of the Lake aforesaid, from whence by a long and narrow channel it d●●●mbogu●th into the Sea near the Port of S. John. 5 Realeio, about a league distant from the Port of Possession, in the Latitude of 12 degrees & 40 minutes, inhabited for the most part by Shipwrights and Mariners. 6 Nicoia, giving name to a little territory, within the bounds whereof standeth 7 Avarines also. 8 Cartago, 40 leagues from Nicoia, equally distant from both Seas, on each of which it hath a convenient Port: this Town the principal of that part which is called Costa Rica.  
6 VERAGVA hath on the West Costa Rica, on the East bounded with the District of Panama; washed on both other sides by the sea: extended 50 leagues in length from West to East; not above 25 where narrowest, from one sea to the other. The name given to it from the River Veragua, of greatest note in it at the first Discovery.  
The ●oil hereof Mountainous and exceeding barren, not fit for tillage, and less useful in feeding cattle; sufficiently provided of Maize and Potherbs, but else of little necessary for the life of man, unless the People could eat Silver, or drink Aurum Potabile. Of both which Metals, but especially of Gold, here are such never-perishing Mines, that the Spaniards think them able to supply all wants, and cure all Diseases. Once being asked what made them so greedy of that Mettle: it was answered, That they were much troubled with grief of heart, for which Gold was a most Sovereign Medicine. And as the Country, such the People, hardy, courageous, and warlike, and such as bear the Spanish yoke with great impatience: the stoutest and most untameable People, being bred most commonly in Mountainous and woody Countries.  
Chief Rivers of this little Province, 1 Veragua, which gives name unto it. 2 Belen, by the old Inhabitants called Yebra, at the mouth of which Columbus purposed to have settled a Spanish Colony, for the better transporting of his Gold. But finding that the Channel, on the ceasing of some rain which had fallen before, was become so shallow, that no ship could go in or out, he gave over that purpose. 3 Lafoy Trinidad. 4 Lafoy Conception: all falling into Mare del Nort. Their chief Towns, 1 Conception, on the Mouth of that River, the seat of the Governor. 2 Lafoy Trinidad, on the banks of that River, near the Port of Belen, and six Leagues Eastwards of La Conception. 3 S. Foy (oppidum S. Fidis) twelve Leagues from Conception on the South, where the Spaniards melt, and cast their Gold into Bars and Ingots. 4 Carlos, not far from the shores of Mare deal Zur. 5 Philippina, on the West of Carlos. Each seated on a large and capacious Bay. Before which Bays lie a Fry of Islands, which the Spaniards call Zebaco, from the chief amongst them. Thirty in all; the principal Zebaco, Cabaio, S. Marry, S. Martha, inhabited in former times, now not much frequented; the People being dragged into the Continent to work in the Mines.  
This Country oweth its first Discovery unto divers men, according to the several Members and divisions of it: The last in order, being the first that was discovered, but the last that was conquered, had the honour to be visited by Columbus himself. Who driving up and down these coasts in the year 1502 hit on the entrances of the River, which afterwards he caused to be called Belen; where hearing that there was plenty of Gold in the Mines of Hurira not far off, he intended to fortify. But the River falling him as was said before; and finding nothing fit to sustain his men, he bent himself though unwilling to a further search. He had before touched upon Honduras also; but I find not that he landed on it: the settling of these Countries being destinated to another hand. Twenty years after this the most fortunate Cortes having fully quieted and composed the affairs of Mexico, resolved to make his Master Lord of the rest of America. And to that end sent out his Officers and Commanders into several parts; by Pedro de Alvarado. he subdued Guatimala▪ Hondura, by Christopher de Olid: Veragua, and Nicaragua, by Consalvo de Corduba. But fearing lest the conquered Provinces might revolt again, he resolved to visit them in person. Attended by a choice Band of 150 horse, and as many foot, and 3000 Mexicans, he began his journey in October, 1524: and held on his progress as far as to Truxillo: where finding that Gonsales de Cordova had so played his game, as there was no neccssity of going further, he made a stand, having marched above 400 Leagues with his little Army. Returning back another way, in April 1526. he came home to Mexico, with whose return we conclude also our survey of the Northern Peninsula, containing all America Septentrionalis, or Mexicana.  
And so much for Mexicana.   

OF PERVANA.  
PERVANA the other of the two great Peninsulas into which the vast Continent of the NEW WORLD doth now stand divided, hath the form of a Pyramid reversed: more answerably thereunto then afric, though that so resembled. Joined to the other by a straight and narrow Isthmus, called the Straits of Darien, whereof we shall have opportunity to speak more anon: which looks but like a stone mislaid in so great a building; or the first step by which we are to climb the top, as in other Pyramids.  
The name derived from Peru, the chief Province of it; the Circumnavigation said to be 1700 miles. Nothing else to be said in the general, but what will serve more fitly for particular places; except it be the description of some prime Mountains and principal Rivers: which being of too long a course to be reckoned unto any one particular Province, may more properly deserve place here. Of these the chief 1 Orellana, or the River of Amazons, called by the first name from Francisco de Orellana, a Spaniard, who first discovered it; by the second from the Amazons a kind of stout and warlike Women, who are said to have inhabited on the banks thereof. The Fountain of it in Peru, the fall in the North Sea, or Mare del Nort. A River of so long a course, that the said Orellana is reported to have sailed in it 5000 miles, the several windings and turnings of it being reckoned in: and of so violent a current, that it is said to keep its natural taste and colour above 30 miles after it falleth into the Sea; the channel of it of that breadth, where it leaveth the Land, that it is accounted 60 Leagues from one point to the other. 2 Orenoque, navigable 1000 miles by ships of burden, and 2000 miles by Boats and Pinnaces, having received into it an hundred Rivers; openeth into the same Sea with 16 mouths, which part the Earth into many Lands (some equal to the Isle of Wight) the most remote of those Channels 300 miles distant from one another. By some it is called Raliana, from Sir Walter Raleigh, who took great pains in the discovery and description of it; or rather in discovering it so far, as to be able to describe it. 3 Maragnon, of a longer course than any of the other, affirmed to measure at the least 6000 miles, from his first rising to his fall; and at his fall into the Sea, to be no less than 70 Leagues from one side to the other▪ More properly to be called a Sea, than many of those great Lakes, or largest Bays, which usually enjoy that name. 4 Rio de la Placa, a River of a less course than the other, but equal unto most in the world besides; in length from its first Fountain 2000 mile; in breadth at his fall into the Sea, about 60 Leagues; and of so violent a stream, that the sea for many Leagues together, altereth not the taste of it. All these as they do end their Race in the Atlantic▪ so they begin it from the main body of the Andes, or at the least some Spur or branch of that great body.  
But before we venture further on more particulars, we are to tell you of these Andes, that they are the greatest and most noted Mountains of all America; beginning at Timama a Town of Popayan, in the New Realm of Granada, and thence extended Southwards to the straits of Magellan, for the space of 1000 Leagues and upwards. In breadth about 20 Leagues where they are at the narrowest; and of so vast an height withal, that they are said to be higher than the Alps, or the head of Caucasus, or any of the most noted Mountains in other parts of the World. Not easy of ascent, but in certain Paths, by reason of the thick and unpassable Woods, with which covered in all parts thereof which lie towards Peru (for how it is on the other side, or by what People it is neighboured, is not yet discovered) barren, and craggy too withal, but so full of venomous Beasts, and poisonous Serpents, that they are said to have destroyed a whole Army of one of the Kings of Peru, in his match that way. Inhabited by a People as rude and savage as the place, and as little hospitable. The most noted Mountains of America, as before was said, and indeed the greatest of the World. Of ●ame sufficient of themselves not to be greatned by the addition of impossible Figments, or improbable Fictions. Among which last I reckon that of Abraham Ortelius a right learned man, who will have these Mountains to be that which the Scripture calleth by the name of Sephar, Gen. 10. 30. and there affirmed to be the utmost Eastern limit of the sons of Joktan: the vanity and inconsequences of which strange conceit, we have already noted when we were in India.  
Proceed we now unto the particular descriptions of this great Peninsula comprehending those large and wealthy Countries, which are known to us by the names of 1 Castilia Aurea, 2 The New Realm of Granada. 3 Peru, 4 Chile, 5 Paragnay, 6 Brasil, 7 Guyana, and 8 Paria, with their several Lands. Such other Isles as fall not properly and naturally under some of these, must be referred unto the general head of the American Lands in the close of all.   

OF CASTILIA DEL ORO.  
CASTILIA del ORO, Golden Castille. (Aurea Castilia, as the Latins) is bounded on the East and North with Mare del Noort, on the West with Mare del Zur and some part of Veragua, on the South with the New Realm of Granada. Called by the name of Castille, with reference to Castille in Spain, under the favour and good fortune of the Kings whereof it was first discovered: Aurea was added to it, partly for distinctions sake, and partly in regard of that plenty of Gold which the first Discoverers found in it. It is also called Terra Firma, because one of the first parts of Firm land which the Spaniards touched at, having before discovered nothing but some Lands only.  
The So●l and People being of such several tempers, as not to be included in one common Character, we w●ll consider both apart in the several Provinces, of 1 Panama, 2 Darien, 3 Nova Andaluzia, 4 〈◊〉, & 5 the little Province De la Hacha.  
1 PANAMA, or the District of Panama, is bounded on the East with the Golf of Vraba, by which parted from the main land of this large Peninsula; on the West with Veragua one of the Provinces of Guatimala in Mexicana; washed on both the other sides with the Sea. So called of Panama the town of most esteem herein, and the Juridical Resort of Castilia Aurea.  
It taketh up the narrowest part of the Strait or Isthmus, which joins both Peninsulas together: not above 7 or 8 leagues over in the narrowest place betwixt Panama and Porto Bello, if measured by a stra●t line from one town to the other; though 18 leagues according to the course of the Road betwixt them, which by reason of the hills and rivers is full of turnings. Of some attempts to dig a Channel through this Isthmus to let the one Sea into the other, and of the memorable expedition of John 〈◊〉 ●ver it by land, we have spoke already.  
The Air hereof ●oggie, but exceeding hot, and consequently very unhealthy, chiefly from May unto November: the Soil either mountainous and barren, or low and miry; naturally so unfit for grain, that 〈…〉 nothing but Maize, and that but sparingly; better for pasturage, in regard of its plenty of grass and the goodness of it: so full of Swine at the Spaniards first coming hither, that they thought they never should destroy them; now they complain as much of their want or paucity. As for the Inhabitants, whatsoever they were formerly is not now material: most of the old stock rooted out by the Spaniards, and no new ones planted in their room; so that the Country in all parts except towards the Sea, is almost desolated or forsaken.  
The Country, as before was said, of little breadth, and yet full of Rivers: the principal whereof, 1 〈◊〉, by the Spaniards called Rio de Lagartos, or the River of Crocodiles, (many of which are harbe●●ed in it) which falleth into Mare deal Noort betwixt Nombre de Dios, and Porto Beleno. 2 Sardini●●a▪ 3 S●nd●na, 4 Rio de Colubros▪ or the River of Snakes; & 5 Rio de Comagre, all falling into the same Sea. Then on the other side, 6 Chepo, whose sands in former times yielded plenty of gold. 7 Rio de las 〈◊〉, on the banks whereof groweth great store of timber for the building of ships. 8 De Congos, emptying itself into the Bay of S. Michael's.  
●owns of most note, 1 S. Philip, seated on a safe and strong Haven called Porto Belo, built in this place by the appointment of King Philip the second, but by the counsel of John Baptista Anton●lli, to be the 〈◊〉 or the trade betwixt Spain and Panama; partly in regard of the unhealthiness of Nombre d● Dios, where it was before, but chiefly because that Town was found to have l●en too open to the invasions of the English. Fortified with two strong Castles (on each side of the Haven one) but for all that surprised and pillaged by the English under Captain Parker, in the year 1601. 2 Nombre de Dios, conventently seated in the Upper-sea, for a Town of trade; and for that reason made the Staple of such commodities as were trucked betwixt Peru and Spain; which brought from Spain, and landed here, were from hence conveyed over the Land to Panama, and there shipped for Peru; or brought so from Peru and landed at Panama, were by land brought unto this place, and here shipped for Spain▪ It to●k this name from Didaco Niquesa a Spanish Adventurer, who having been distressed by tempests was driven in here, and bid his men go on shore en nombre de Dios, in the name of God. In reference 〈…〉 by the Latins, borrowing a Greek word, it is called Theonymas. Of great trade once, on the occasion before mentioned: but in the year 1584. the trade was removed unto Porto Belo, by the counsel of Ant●nelli before named; and some years after that, the Inhabitants also. To hasten which, the taking of this town by Sir Francis Drake, served exceeding fitly. 3 Acla, on the Coast of the same Sea also, but on the South east of Nombre de Dios. 4 Nata, or S▪ Jago de Nata, situate on the Lower sea on the borders of Verag●a, about 30 leagues on the west of Panama. 5 Panama, the chief City of Castilia Aurea▪ the Residence of the Governor of the Courts of Justice, honoured with a Bishops See, a 〈◊〉 to the Atchbishop of Lima; and beautified with three fair Monasteries, and a College of 〈◊〉. Seated in the 9▪ degree or Northern Latitude; and so near the Sea, that the waves come close unto the wall. A town through which the wealth of Spain and Peru posseth every year: yet not containing above 350 houses; the number of the Soldiers greater than that of the Citizens. 6 S. Crux la Real, a League from Panama, inhabited totally by Negroes brought out of Guinea.  
This Province was the first of those on the Firm land which were discovered by Columbus. But I find not that he left any name unto it, or to any River or Promontory of it, but only to a little Island lying on the shore near Porto Belo, which he caused to be called Los Bastimentoes; because being cast hereon by chance, he found good store of Maize and other provisions, called Bastimentoes by the Spaniard. But the chief Lands of this Province, are those which Columbus never saw, called the Lands of Pearls, situate in the Southern sea, opposite to Panama, from which distant 17 leagues or thereabouts. In number above twenty, but two only inhabited, the one called Tarorequi, the other Deal Rio; the rest of them rather Rocks than Lands. Much famed not only for the abundance, but the excellency of the Pearls there found, fairer than those of Margarita and Cubagna so much commended. Once very profitable to the Spaniards, till by their cruelty and covetousness they unpeopled the Lands, and destroyed the Pearls. Inhabited now only by a few Negroes, and some Slaves of Nicaragua, who live here to attend the grazing of their Master's cattle in the fields and pastures.  
2 DARIEN hath on the North the District of Panoma, on the South New Granada, on the East the River of Darien whence it hath its name, and the Golf of Vraba, and on the West the main Southern Ocean.  
The Country of a temperate Air, and a fruitful Soil: so happy in the production of Melons and such other fruits, that within twenty days after they are sown, they are fully ripe. With like felicity it bringeth forth Grapes and other fruits, either natural hereunto, or brought hither from Europe. A tree here is called Hovo, not elsewhere known; the shade of which is conceived to be so wholesome, that the Spaniards seek them out to sleep under them. Out of the Blossoms of it they distil a perfumed Water; of the Bark a Bath or lavatory, good for the opening of the pores, and redress of weariness; and from the Roots they draw a Liquor which they use to drink of. Of Beasts and Fowl great plenty, whether wild or ●ame; and some of them not heard of in other places.  
Principal Rivers hereof, 1 Darien, whence it hath the name; A clear water, and much drank of, but of a slow course and a narrow channel, able to bear no bigger Vessels than those of one piece of wood used among the Savages: we may call them Troughs. But with this slow course it falleth at last into the Golf of Vraba, a large Arm of the Sea, which pierceth far into the Land, and at the mouth is said to be eight leagues over. 2 Rio de las Redas', & 3 De la Trepadera, both emptying themselves into the Golf of Vraba. 4 Corobaci, on the same side of the Country also. 5 Beru, a River of the South-Sea, not much observable, but that some have laboured to derive the Etymology of Peru from thence.  
Towns of most note, though few of any, 1 Dariene, on the Bank of the Golf of Vraba; oftentimes so unhealthy by the Mists which do thence arise, that the Inhabitants use to send their sick people to the fresh Air of Corobarie to revive their spirits. By the Spaniards it was called S. Maria Antiqua, afterwards the Antique of Darien, being new built by one Eucisus a Spanish Adventurer, An. 1510. and grew so suddenly into wealth and reputation, that within four years it was made an Episcopal See: But being built too near the Banks of the Dariene, in a moorish and unhealthy place, both the Episcopal See, and the chief Inhabitants were removed to Panama. Some other Colonies of the Spaniards have been planted here; but either forsaken by themselves, or destroyed by the Savages: so that now from Acla to the bottom of the Golf of Vraba, the Spaniards have not in their own hands either Town or Village. Nothing but some few scattered houses in all that tract, for the use of the Natives, who formerly made their Nest, like Birds, on the tops of trees. 2 Bizu, 3 Los Angadesos, two small villages on the other side of the Country, possessed by the Savages. Besides these, and some sorry sheds here and there dispersed, all the rest a Desert. So that not being able to maintain the reputation of a distinct Province, the government here of hath of late been devolved on the Perfect of Panama.  
3 NOVA AND ALUSIA hath on the West the River Darien, and the Golf of Vraba; on the East the Province of S. Martha, on the North the main Ocean, and on the South the new Realm of Granada. So called with reference to Andalusia a Province of Spain. Called also by some Writers Carthagena, from Carthagena now the chief City of it.  
It is in length from the Golf of Vraba to the River of Magdalen 80 Leagues, and near upon as much in breadth. Mountainous, and very full of woods, but in those woods great store of Rosin, Gums, and some kinds of Balsams. Here is also said to be a Tree, which whosoever toucheth, is in danger of poisoning. The Soil, by reason of the abundance of rain which falls upon it, very moist and spewie; insomuch that few of our European fruits have prospered in it. Few veins of Gold in all the Country, except only in that part hereof which is called Zena, where the Spaniards at their first coming found great store of treasure: But it was taken out of the graves and Monuments of the dead, not found in Mines, or digged for as in other places: such being the reputation of that Territory in former times, that the Nations far and near did carry the bodies of their Dead to be buried in it, with great quantity of Gold, Jewels, and other Riches. The Natives very fierce and stout, whiles they were a People: But giving the Spaniards many overthrows before fully conquered, they have been so consumed and wasted by little and little, that there are not many of them left.  
Chief Rivers hereof, 1 Rio de los Redos, & 2 Rio de los▪ Anades, both falling into the Bay of Vraba. 3 Zenu, which passing thorough the Province abovementioned, to which it gives name, falleth into the Ocean over against the Island Fuerte. 4 S. Martha, of long course, and much estimation: For rising in the most Southern parts of the New Realm of Granada, near the Aequinoctial, it passeth thorough the whole length of that Kingdom, and at the last mingleth its streams with that of the River Magdalen, not far from Mopox. By the Natives it is called Cauca. And as for Mountains, those of most note are a continual Ridge of hills by the Spaniards called Cordillera, by the Natives Abibe; craggy, and difficult of ascent; in breadth affirmed to be 20 leagues, but the length uncertain, the furthest ends of them towards the South not discovered hitherto.  
Places of most importance in it, 1 Carthagena, situate in a sandy Peninsula, ten degrees distant from the Aequator: well built, and for the bigness of it of great wealth and state; consisting of 500 houses or thereabouts, but those neat and handsome. Beautified with a Cathedral Church, three Monasteries, and one of the best Havens of all America. Well fortified on both sides since the taking of it by Sir Francis Drake, who in the year 1585. took it by assault, and carried thence besides inestimable sums of money, 240 Brass pecces of Ordinance. 2 Tolu, by the Spaniards called S. Jago, twelve miles from Carthagena; memorable for the most sovereign Balsam of all these parts, called the Balsam of Tolu; little interior, if at all, to the Balsam of Egypt. 3 Mopox, or Santa Crux de Mopox, near the Confluences of the Rivers of Martha and magdalen's. 4 Baranca de Malambo, on the Banks of the River Magdalen, six leagues from the Ocean; where such Commodities as are brought by sea for the New Realm of Granada, use to be unshipped, and carried by Lighters or small Boats up the River. 5 Sebastian de Buena vista, built by Alfonso de Oieda, An. 1508. in his first attempt upon this Country, situate on a rising ground near the mouth of the Bay of Vraba, a league and an half from the sea. 6 Villa de Maria, 30 leagues South of Carthagena, but of no great note.  
4 S. MARTHA hath on the West Nova Andalusia, on the East Rio de la Hacha, on the North the main Ocean, on the South the New Realm of Granada: about 70 leagues in length, and as much in breadth. So called from S. Martha the chief City of it.  
The Country mountainous and barren, not fit for pasturage or tillage; productive notwithstanding of Lemons, Oranges, Pomgranats, and such other fruits as are brought hither out of Spain. The Air on the Seacoasts very hot and scalding, and in the midland parts as cold, because of the neighbourhood of some Mountains always covered with snow. The principal of those Mountains, a long Ridge of Hills by the Spaniards called Las Sierras Nievadas, or the Snowy mountains; discernible by the Mariners 30 leagues at sea, by whom called the Mountains of Tairona, from a valley of that name beneath them; the Inhabitants whereof by the advantage of those hills have hitherto preserved their liberty against the Spaniards. The rest though subject to the Spaniards, have their several ●●ings, affirmed to be an arrogant and ill-natured people; made worse perhaps than indeed they are, by reason of their hate to the Spaniards, whose government they live under with great unwillingness.  
Chief Rivers of this Province, 1 Rio Grando de la Magdalena; which hath its fountain in the hills of the new Realm of Granada, not far from the Aequat●r, but its fall into the Ocean betwixt Carthagena and S. Martha, in the Latitude of 12 Degrees; where dividing itself, it maketh an Island of 5 leagues long, and after openeth into the Sea with two wide mouths; discernible for ten leagues space from the rest of the Main, by the taste and colour of the water. 2 Rio de Cazaze, which falleth into the Magdalen, as doth also 3 Caesar, by the Natives called Pompatao; which having its fountain near the City of Kings in the Vale of Vpar, passeth directly towards the South, till it meet with 4 Ayumas▪ another River of this Tract; accompanied with whom he runneth westward for the space of 70 leagues, and endeth in the great River of magdalen's, as before is said, near the Forest of Alpuerte. 5 Bubia, 6 Piras, 7 Don Diego 8 Palamini, 9 Gayza, falling into the Ocean.  
Towns of most observation, 1 S. Martha, situate on the shores of the Ocean, in the Latitude of ten Degrees & 30 Minutes; neighboured by a safe and convenient Haven, defended from the winds by an high Mountain near unto it, and honoured with an Episcopal See. Small, and ill built when it was at the best; nor well recovered of the spoil it suffered by Sir Francis Drake, An▪ 1595. and by Sir Anthony Shirley the next year after. 2 Tenariffe on the Banks of the Magdalen, 40 leagues from S. Martha. 3 Tanalameque, by the Spaniards called Villa de las Palmas, twenty leagues to the South of Tenariffe▪ 4 Cividad de los Reges, or the City of the Kings, situate in the Vale of Vpar, on the banks of a deep and violent River called Guatapori, which not far off falleth into the Caesar: ●●ll neighboured by the Inhabitants of the Vale of Toirona, not hitherto reduced under the command of the Kings of Spani. 5 Ramada, by the Spaniards called New Salamanca, in the same Valley of Vpar; as liberally furnished with veins of Brass, as it is with stones. 6 Ocanna, on the western Reach of the River Caesar, equally distant from its confluence with Ayumas, and its fall into Magdalen.  
5 RIO DE LA HACHA is the name of a little Province lying on the North-east of S. Martha: environed on two sides with the main Ocean, and on the third (which is that of the East) with a large and spacious Arm of the Sea called Golfo de Venezuela: the Extremities hereof North west called Cabo la Vela; on the North-east, Cabo di Coqui boccoa.  
It took this name from the Town and River of La Hatha, a small Town, consisting of no more than an hundred houses, but big enough to give name to so small a Province. Built on a little hill about a mile from the Sea; the Haven inconvenient and exposed to the Northern winds, but the Soil about it very rich, fruitful of all such Plants as are brought from Spain; well stored with veins of Gold, excellent Salt-wiches, and some Gems of great worth and virtue. Distant 8 leagues from New Salamanca, and 18 leagues from the Cape la Vela: surprised and sacked by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1595. 2 Rancheria, six leagues on the East of De la Hacha, inhabited for the most part by such as get their living by Pearl-fishing. 3 Topia, five leagues from La Hach, and almost as much from the Sea: the Fields whereof lying betwixt the Town and New Salamanca, were terribly wasted by the English; in the year aforesaid; because the Governor of New Salamanca, with whom they had contracted for 4000 Ducats not to burn that Town, would not stand to his bargain.  
These Countries discovered by Columbus, and by him called Terra Firma, as before was said; were afterwards brought under the power of Spain, by two several men, employed in the subduing of their several parts, An. 1508. To Didaco Niquesa was allotted the government and conquest of those parts hereof which lie on the West of the Bay of the Vraba, containing the Praefectures of Darien and Panama, by the name of Castilia del Oro: And to Alfonso Oreda, all that lay on the East of that Gulf, by the name of Nova Andalusia. But these two finished not the work, though they first begun it: Encisus discovering further on the River of Dariene, than Niquesa had done before him; and Balbon finding out the way to the South sea, where Panama and the best of their trading lieth, which neither of the other had thought upon. Both afterwards joined into one Province, the Praefectures of S. Martha and Rio de la Hacha (when conquered and subdued by the Spaniard) being added to it. One of their last Kings which held out against the Spaniards, was called Abibeia, who had his Palace on the top of a tree, (as most of his subjects had their houses) from which when Francisco de Vasques a Spanish Captain could by no other Rhetoric win him to descend; he laid his Axe to the Root, and began to fell it: which seen, the poor Prince was fain to come down, and compound both for his life and Palace at the will of his Enemies.   

OF NOVA GRANADA.  
NOVA GRANADA, or the new Realm of Granada, is bounded on the North with Castilia Aurea; on the West with Mare del Zur; on the East with Veneznela. The Countries lying on the South, are not yet discovered, shut up with vast Hills, and impassable Mountains; except only in those parts which lie near the Sea, where the Wa●●yeth open to Peru. Thus called by Gonsalvo Ximenez, the first Discoverer, who being a Native of Granada in Spain, gave this name unto it.  
It is in length 130 Leagues, and as much in breadth; reckoning Popayan for a part of it, though by some made a distinct government. So that we may divide the whole into these two parts, Granada specially so called, lying on the West: and 2 Popayana, lying toward; Mare deal Zur.  
1. GRANADA specially so called, hath an Air for the most part well tempered betwixt heat and cold; with little difference (if any) betwixt Summer and Winter, and not much in the length and shortness of days. The Country full of Woods, but of great fertility; well stored with Corn and Pasturage, many Herds of cattle; some veins of Gold and other Metals, and in that part hereof which is called Tunia, great plenty of Emeralds▪ and amongst their woods, that called Guajacan, Medicinable for the 〈◊〉 disease, grows in great abundance. The People tall and strong of body▪ not very industrious, the 〈◊〉 part of their time being spent in songs and dances. The Women of a white and more clear complexion then any of their neighbours, and more handsomely habited; apparelled in black, or particoloured Mantles, girt about their middles; their hair tied up, and covered most an end with Chaplets intermixed with flowers, and artificially composed.  
Rivers of note I find not any, but those of S. Martha, and ● Magdalen, described before: nor any distinction of it into several Provinces, but that the names of Tunia, Bagota, Paunches, Colymae, and Mus●, by which the Savages were distinguished, when first known to the Spaniards; with reference to which the principal of their Towns are by some described.  
Towns then of greatest note, 1 S. Foy de Bagota. but commonly S. Foy, the Metropolis of this new Realm the See of an Archbishop, and the 〈…〉 the Governor. Built by Gonsalvo Ximinez de Quesada, at the foot of the Mountains, not far from the Lake of Guatavita, on the banks of which they used to sacrifice to their Idols. The Town inhabited by 600 Families of Spaniards, besides those of the Natives; and situate in the fourth Degree of Northern Latitude. 2 S. Michael twelve Leagues on the North of S. Foy, a well-traded market. 3 Tocayma in the territory of the Paunches, a barbarous and man●eating People, till reclaimed by the Spaniards, and masters of the richest part of all the Country. The Town about 15 Leagues from S. Foy, towards the North east; and seated on the banks of Pati, a little River, which not f●● off is swallowed up in the body of Magdalen. 4 Tudela is the Country of the Musi and Colymae, two warlike Nations; 〈◊〉 on the banks of the River Zarbi, and made a Colony of the Spaniards at their first coming hither; but deserted by them not long after, for fear of Savages, though the want of Provisions was pretended. 5 Trimdado, on the same River, but somewhat lower, and more remote from the Savages; by whom notwithstanding much annoyed: the fields thereof full of veins of Crystal, Emeralds, Adamants, and Chalcedonians. 6 Lafoy Palma, built by the Spaniards in the same territory of the Musi and Colymae, Anno 1572. 7 Tunia, so called according to the name of the Tribe or Province in which it is situate; built on the top of an high Hill that it might serve for a retreat and Fortress against the Savages; now a well-traded Emporie, and very wealthy, the Inhabitants being able to impress 200 horse for present service. 8 Pampelona, 60 Leagues from S. Foy, towards the North east, rich in Mines of Gold, and Herds of cattle. 9 Merida, on the North of Pampiona, the furthest Town of all this Province on the North east towards Veneznela; As 10 S. John de Los Lianos, or S. John upon the Plains is in the Southeast, 50 Leagues from S. Foy, and seated in a corner full of veins of Gold.  
2. POPAYANA lieth on the West of new Granada, strictly and specially so called; from which parted by the River Martha, which hath its original in this Country; on the North bounded with Nova Andaluzia, or Carthagena; and with Mare del Zur upon the West. Extended in length from North to South 130 Leagues at the least; and from the River to the Sea betwixt 30 and 40.  
The Country, over-cloud with rain, breeds but little Maize, less Wheat, and almost no cattle; though in some places richer than it is in others. The People anciently Man-eaters, and as rude as any; now more industrious and affable than the other Americans; especially about Popayan, where the soil is also better tempered then in other places. The Rivers of most note beside that of S. Martha, which we have spoken of already: and some lesser streams which fall into it; are 1 Rio di S. Juan, 2 Rio de Cedros▪ 3 Rio de S. Jago; all falling into Mare deal Zur.  
Cities and Towns of greatest note, 1 Popayan, called by the name of the King hereof, when first known to the Spaniards; situate on a nameless but pleasant River, in the midst of a Plain, of great wealth, and a healthy Air; in two Degrees and 30 Minutes of Northern Latitude; the ordinary residence of the Governor, and See of a Bishop. The building fair unto the eye, but slight; excepting the Cathedral, and a Monastery of the Friars called De mercede, which are strong and lasting. 2 Antiochia, (or Sancta Fides de Antiochia) on the borders of Nova Andaluzia, 100 Leagues distant from Popayan. Seated upon a little River which falls into the Martha, from which twelve Leagues distant. 3 Caramanta on the Martha itself. 4 Patia in a pleasant Valley, on the banks of a small River, but of excellent water. 5 S▪ Anne in the Cantred of Anzerman, by which name it is sometimes called: Built on a little Hill betwixt two sweet Rivers, and compassed round about with a Grove of most pleasant Fruits. 6 S. Jago de Arma, the chief Town of the Cantred of Arma; situate in a territory very rich in Gold, but otherwise unprovided of all manner of necessaries: Fifty Leagues to the North-east of Popayan. 7 Carthage in the Province of Quimbaia, 22 Leagues from S. Jago de Arma, seated in a Plain betwixt two torrents, seven Leagues from the River of S. Martha. 8 Cali, a League from that River, but on the banks of another, in the Latitude of four Degrees: neighboured by a vast and mighty Mountain, at whose foot it standeth; where built by Sebastian de Betalcuzar, the first discoverer of this Country. 9 Bonaventure on a Bay so called in the Southern Ocean; a small Town, but of great use for the conveyance of the Commodities of new Spain unto Popayan, and other Towns of this Province. 10 Timana, 80 Leagues from Popayan towards the East, at the foot of that vast ridge of Mountains called the Andes; which hereabouts taking their beginning, extend as far Southwards as the Streits of Magellan. 11 S. Juan de Pasto, situate in a pleasant Valley, but one Degree from the Aequator. 12 Sebastian de la Plata, so called of its Silver Mines, in the Southeast confines of the Province. 13 Almaguer, on the sides of a plain but barren Mountain. 14 Madrigal, by the Natives called Chapan Chicu; in a barren soil, were not Gold a supplement of all wants, which is there found in some abundance.  
To this Province belong also some Lands in the Southern Ocean, that is to say, 1 The Isle of Palms, South of the Cape of Corrientes, so called from the abundance of Palms which are growing in it. 2 Gorgona, opposite to the mouth or outlet of Rio de S. Juan, an Island of three Leagues in compass, the Hills so high, the Valleys so extremely low, the Sun so little seen amongst them, and the Woods so dark, that some have likened it to Hell. Not much observable, but that it did afford a lurking place unto Francis Pizarro, in his attempts upon Peru, when repulsed from landing on that Coast. 3 Deal Gallo, a small Island, not a League in circuit, on the South of Gorgona.  
This whole Country thus divided into two Praefectures, but both subordinate to the Juridical Resort in the City of S. Foy de Bagota; is indebted for its first Discovery to two several persons. Granada specially so called, was first discovered by Gonsalvo Ximinez de Quesada, employed therein by Ferdinand de Lugo, Admiral of the Canary Lands, Anno 1536. who passing up the River of Magdalen without molestation (more than the difficulties of the ways thorough Fens and Forests) as far as the Cantred of Bagota, was there encountered by that King, whom he easily vanquished: and wasting all his territories, carried with him thence great quantity of Gold, Emeralds, and other treasure. The residue of those Petit Princess which then governed in their several Tribes, either submitted to him without opposition, or else were vanquished at the first rising. Having discovered and subdued every several Province, and miserably murdered Sangipa the last King of Bagota, of whom he had made use in subduing the Paunches; he caused it to be called The new Realm of Granada▪ for the reason formerly laid down: and summing up the spoils he had gotten in this easy war, he found them to amount to 1800 Emeralds, 191294 Pezoes' of the finest Gold, 35000 of a courser and inferior alloy. In his return he heard the news of Sebastian de Betalcazars' marching on the other side of the River of S. Martha; who having at the same time discovered and subdued the Province of Popayana, was beating out his way towards the North Sea, and from thence to Spain. This Betalcazar, being by Francisco Pezarro the Conqueror of Peru, made Governor of the Town and Province of Quito▪ and having s●●ured all the Country to the very Sea, resolved to open a way homewards thorough those Regions, which lay betwixt his own Province, and Mare deal Noort: And this he did resolve the rather, in regard that he had been informed, that a rich Country, full of Gold, was in that Tract possessed by Popayan and Columbaz, two Petit Princes, but yet the greatest in those parts. Encountered in his march by the Roytelets of Patia and Pasto, he soon made them weary, and retire themselves into the Woods and impassable Mountains; and passing slowly on, came at last to Popayan. Where though the Savages entertained him with some frequent skirmishes, yet they grew quieter by degrees; giving the Spaniards leave to possess themselves of their best Towns, and to build others in such places as they thought convenient. But this was after the first Conquest, according to the coming over of succeeding Colonies: The first Conquest being finished Anno 1536. when the New Realm of Granada was subdued by Ximinez.   

OF PERV.  
PERV is bounded on the East with that vast ridge of Mountains which they call the Andes; on the West with Mare del Zur, on the North with Popayan, an Appendix of the New Realm of Granada, on the South with Chile. So called from the River Peru, which being one of the first of note which the Spaniards met with in this Country, occasioned them to give that name to the whole.  
It is in length from North to South 700 Leagues, but the breadth not equal. In some places 100 Leagues broad, in others 60. in the rest but 40. more or less according to the windings of the Seas and Mountains. Divided commonly into three parts, all of so different a nature from one another, as if they were far distant both in site and soil. These parts the Plains, the Hill Countries, and the Andes the Plains, extended on the Sea shore, in all places levelly without Hills; the Andes a continual ridge of Mountains without any Valleys; the Sierra, or Hill-Countries composed of both. Each part stretched out from North to South, the whole length of the Country: the Plains from the Sea shore to the Hill-Countries, for the most part ten Leagues broad, in some places more; the Hill-Countries 20 Leagues in breadth where narrowest, and as much the Andes. In the Plains it never raineth, on the Andes continually in a manner; in the Hill-Countries Rain from September to April, after that fair weather. In the Hill Countries the Summer beginneth in April, and endeth in September; in the Plains their Summer beginneth in October, and endeth in April. So that a man may travel from Summer to Winter in one day; be frozen in the morning at his setting forth, and scorched with heat before he come to his journey's end. Some other differences there are, as that the Andes are covered with Woods and Forests, whereas the Hill Countries are bare and naked; the Plains, where there are store of Rivers, and the benefit of the Sea besides, sandy and dry, and in most places destitute both of Fruits and Corn; ●n some parts of the Hill Countries where there are no Rivers, and a Rain but seldom, plenty of Roots, Maize, Fruits, and all other necessaries. In the Plains there never bloweth any but the Southerly wind, though it bring no rain with it; and in the Hills, winds from every Coast, and of every nature, some bringing Rain, some Snow, some claps of Thunder, and others fair weather at the heels of them. Insomuch that it is observed, that such of the Inhabitants of the Plains as go up to the Sierra, or Mountains, do find such pains in the head and stomach, as fresh water soldiers when first Sea-sick.  
Not to pursue these differences any further in the several parts, we will look upon the whole in gross▪ which we shall find but meanly furnished for the bigness, with those Commodities which so large a Country might afford: insomuch as many of the People live most on Roots, here being little Wheat, and not such quantities of Maize (the ordinary bread grain of the Americans) as to serve their multitudes. Nor find I that the cattle of Europe have been either brought hither in any great numbers, or are grown to any great increase. Instead of which they have in their woods and pastures infinite numbers of beasts somewhat like wild Goats, (which they call Vicagues) and great store of a kind of sheep by them called Pacos, profitable both for fleece and burden; as big as a small breed of Horses, but in taste as pleasing as our Mutton, and no less nourishing. A Creature so well acquainted with its own abilities, that when he findeth himself overloaded, no blows or violence shall make him move a foot forwards till his load be lessened; and of so cheap a diet, that he is content with very little, and sometimes passeth three whole days without any water. The Camels of these parts, and not much unlike them.  
This as it is by some accounted for a Creature proper to this Country only (though in that mistaken) so may it pass amongst the Rarities hereof: many of which it hath both in Beasts, and Plants, and in inanimate bodies also. Amongst their Plants they have a Fig tree, the North part whereof looking towards the Mountains, bringeth forth its Fruits in the Summer only; the Southern part looking to the Sea, fruitful only in Winter. Some as deservedly do count the Coca for a wonder, the Leaves whereof being dried, and form into Lozenges, (or little Pellets) are exceeding useful in a journey. For melting in the mouth, they satisfy both hunger and thirst, and preserve a man in strength, and his spirits in vigour: and generally are esteemed of such sovereign use, that it is thought that 100000 Baskets full of the Leaves of this Tree are sold yearly at the Mines of Potosia only, each of which at the Markets of Cusco would yield 12. d. or 18. d a piece. Another Plant they tell us of, but I find no name for it, which if put into the hands of a sick person, will instantly discover whether he be like to live or die. For if on the pressing it in his hand he look merry and cheerful, it is an assured sign of his Recovery: as on the other side, of death, if sad and troubled. Amongst their Beasts, besides those spoken of before, they reckon that which they call the Huanacu: of which it is observed that the Males stand Centinel on the Mountains, while the Females are feeding in the Valleys: and if they see any men coming towards them, they set out their throws, to give their Females notice of some danger near: whom when they come up to them, they put in the front of the Retreat, interposing their own bodies betwixt them and their enemy. Nor want they Rarities of nature even in things inanimate: here being said to be a round Lake near the Mines of Po●●●i, whose water is so hot, though the Country be exceeding cold, that they who bathe themselves are not able to endure the heats thereof if they go but a little from the Banks: there being in the midst thereof a boiling of above 20 foot square. A Lake which never doth decrease, though they have drawn a great stream from it to serve their Mettal-Mills.  
More profitable though less rare, those Metals, which those Mills are made for; and not less profitable, one of those Vulgar Plants, I mean Tobacco, growing more abundantly here then in other Countries of America: for which cause, and the resemblance which it hath to Henbane, in form and quality, it is called the Henbane of Peru by Gerrad and some others of our Modern Herbalists. A Plant, which though in some respect being moderately taken, it may be serviceable for Physic: yet besides the consumption of the purse, and impairing of our inward parts; the immodetate, vain, and fantastical abuse of this stinking weed, corrupteth the natural sweetness of the breath, stupifieth the brain, and indeed is so prejudicial to the general esteem of our Countrymen, that one faith of them, Anglorum corpora qui huic plantae tantopere indulgent, in Barbarorum naturam degenerasse videntur. The two chief Virtues ascribed unto it (pardon me I beseech you this short digression) are that it voideth Rheum, and is found to be a sovereign Antidote against Lues Venerea. that loathsome Disease of the French Pox: For this last, like enough it is, that so unclean a Disease may be helped with such an unsavoury Medicine. But for the second it may perhaps consist more in opinion, than truth or reality; the Rheum which it is said to void, being no more than what it breedeth at the present. We may as well conclude that Botled-Ale is good for the breaking of wind (which effect we find commonly to follow on the drinking of it) though indeed it be only the same wind which itself conveyed into the Stomach. But Tobacco is by few now taken as Medicinal; it is of late times grown a Goodfellow, and fallen from a Physician to a Compliment. An humour which had never spread so far amongst us, if the same means of prevention had been used by the Christian Magistrates, as was by Morat Bassa among the Turks: who commanded a Pipe to be thrust thorough the Nose of a Turk whom he found taking Tobacco, and so to be carried in derision all about Constantinople. It is observed that the taking of Tobacco was first brought into England by the Mariners of Sir Francis Drake, An. 1585. And that it happened not unfitly in the way of an Antidote to that immoderate use of drinking, which our Low Country Soldiers had brought out of the Netherlands much about that time, An. 1582. Before which time, the English of all Northern People were deemed to be most free from that Swinish Vice, wherein it is to be feared that they have much outgone their Teachers, the Dutch. Certain it is, that it is taken so excessively by both these Nations, that I may justly say with a learned Fleming, Herbae ejus non dicam usus sed abusus, non modo in Anglia, sed in Belgio, & alibi, insanum in modum jam adolevit.  
But the greatest riches of this Country is most out of sight hid in the Bowels of the earth, but found in those never decaying Mines of Gold and Silver; more eminently abounding in this one Province then in all America. For instance whereof we may take the Silver Mines of Potozi, discovered in the year 1545. the fifth of which, payable into the King's Exchequer, amounted in forty years to a 111 millions of Pezoes', every Pezo being valued at six shillings and six pence; and yet a third part of the whole was discharged of that payment. By this one we may guess somewhat of the rest; as by the proportion of one member the dimensions of the whole body may be probably a●med a●●; unless the riches of these Mines be beyond conjecture; of which it is affirmed by some knowing men, that they yield in many places more Gold than Earth. Upon which ground it is conceived by Arias Montanus, and some other very learned men, that this Peru is that land of Ophir to which solomon's Nav● went for Gold, induced thereunto by that Text of the Chron. lib. 2. cap, 3. ver. 6. That the Gold was the Gold of Paruaim. A fancy not of so sandy a foundation, as many others of that kind, if Peru had been the old name of this Country, and not newly given it by the Spaniards. By means whereof not only Spain, but all Europe also is better furnished with gold and silver, then ever formerly. For in the first Ages of the World our Ancestors the Britain's (I must digress here once again) had no other money then Iron-rings, and Brass-rings, which they used for instruments of Exchange; and in the Roman Provinces, we read that the most usual Materials of their coin, was most time's Brass, and sometimes Leather. Corium forma publica percussum, as it is in Seneca Of which last sort we find that Frederick the Emperor made use at the siege of Milan; and the English, in the time of the Baron's Wars. And why not so? considering that no longer since in the year 1574▪ the Hollanders being then reduced to some extremities, made money of Past board. But this happeneth only in Cases of necessity, the two Metals of gold and silver having for many hundred years (though not in such abundance as in latter times) been the chief instruments of Exchange and Bartery betwixt man and man, & questionless will so continue to the end of the World. I know Sat Thomas More in the second ●ook of his Utopia, preferreth Iron before Gold, because more necessary for all uses; Vt sine quo non magis quam sine igne atque aqua vivere Mortales queant: and that he giveth us there a Plot to bring gold and silver into contempt, telling us how the Vtopians use to employ those Metals, in making Chamber pots, and Vessels of more unclean necessities; eating and drinking for the most part in glass or earth. He telleth us also how they make chains and fetters of Gold, to hold in their rebellious slaves, and Malefactors; how they punish infamous persons by putting Gold Rings upon their Fingers, Jewels of Gold in their ears, and chains of gold about their necks: how they adorn their little children with precious Jewels, which gaieties when they come to Age, and see them worn by none but such little children, they use to cast away of their own accord; as with us our elder Boys leave off without constraint their Babies, Cobnuts, and other Crepundia. He further telleth us how the Ambassadors of the Anemoliis (a confederate State of the Vtopians) coming amongst them richly and gorgeously attired, were took for slaves, by reason of their Golden Chains, and the meanest of their Followers thought to be the Ambassadors: how the elder Boys derided the Strangers for wearing jewels, as if they had been children still; and how the People laughed at their chains of Gold, as being too weak to shackle such sturdy Fellows. Now though it pleased that wise State to have any Gold or Silver at all amongst them, it was not (as he telleth us) out of any esteem which themselves had of it, but therewith to provide themselves of Foreign aids, and pay their Armies, when the nec●ss●●es of their affairs, or other reason of State did require the same. How this device would sort with the humours of those People whom Lucian anciently did Fable, and some of later times more 〈◊〉 do fancy to have their dwelling in the Moon: I am not able to say, as having hitherto had no comm●●ce nor correspondence with the Inhabitants thereof: though possibly I may endeavour it in the end of this Book, and find it to sort well enough with their condition. Certain I am this sublunary World of ours will never brook it. And so I leave it▪ and look back again on the Mines of Peru: the extraordinary plenty of gold and silver which those and the rest of the New world, have furnished the old World withal, being conceived by many knowing and judicious men, to be the cause of the dearness of all commodities at the present times, compared unto the cheapness of the times foregoing: for where much is, there greater prices will be given, then in other places. And yet there want not some that add also other causes, of the high prizes of our days: viz. Monopolies, Combinations of Merchant's and Craftsmen; transportation of Grain, pleasure of great personages, the excess of private 〈…〉 the like: but these last I rather ta●e to be concauses, the first being indeed the principal. For, (a● that excellent Sir Henry Savil, hath it in the end of his notes on Tacitus) the excessive abundance 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, things which consist merely on the constitution of men, draweth necessarily 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, those things which nature requireth, to an higher rate in the Market. Captá ab Augusto Alexandra faith Orosius) Roma in tantum opibus ejus crevit, ut dupla majora quam antehac rerum venalium p●●tia statuerentur. As for that question, whether of the two Kingdoms be happier, that which supplieth itself with money, by Traffic and the works of Art; or that which is supplied by M●nes growing, as the gift of nature, I find it by this tale in part resolved. Two Merchants departing from Spain to get gold, touched upon part of Barbary, where the one buyeth Moor to dig and 〈◊〉 with; the other fraughteth his vessel with sheep: and being come to the Indies, the one finding Mines, set his slaves to work, and the other happening in grassy ground, put his sheep to grazing. The Maves grown cold and hungry, call for food and clothing; which the sheep-master by the increase of his stock had in great abundance● so that what the one got in gold with ●oil, charges and hazard both of 〈…〉 and health, he gladly gave unto the other in exchange or Bartery, for the continual supply of 〈◊〉▪ Clothes, and other necessaries for himself and his servants. In the end the Mines being exhaust●d, and all the money thence arising exchanged with the Shepherd for such necessaries as his wants 〈◊〉▪ home comes the Shepherd in great triumph, with abundance of wealth, his Companion b●●nging nothing with him but the Tale of his travels. But I dare not take upon me to determine this po●●t. Only I add, that the English and the Hollanders by the benefit of their Manufactures and continual Traffic, did in conclusion weary the late King of Spain, King Philip the second, and out-vied him as it were) in wealth and treasure; notwithstanding his many Mines of Gold and silver in Barbary, India, Mexicana, Guinea, some in Spain and Italy, and these of Peruana which now we handle, and which have given occasion unto this Discourse or Digression rather.  
It is now time to take a view of the People also, affirmed to be (for the most part) of great simplicity; yet some of them (those specially which lie near the Aequator) to be great dissemblers, and never to discover their conceptions freely. Ignorant of Letters, but of good courage in the Wars, well s●illed in managing such weapons as they had been used to, and fearless of death; the rather prompted to this last by an old opinion held amongst them, that in the other world they shall eat, and drink, and make love to Women. And therefore commonly at the Funeral of any great person who was attended ●● in his life, they use to kill and bury with him one or more of his servants to wait upon him after death. in the manner or their living much like the Jews; but not in habit: conform therein to the other Savages, but that those cover their upper parts with some decent garment, and leave the other Members 〈◊〉. But this is only near the Aequator; both Sexes elsewhere wearing Mantles to their very Heels. habited in one fashion over all the Country, except the dressing of their heads, wherein scarce any one doth agree with another, but hath his fashion to himself. The Women less esteemed here then in other places, treated as Slaves, and sometimes cruelly beaten upon slight occasions: the men (as S. Paul saith of the ancient Gentiles) leaving the natural use of the woman, and burning in their lusts towards one another. For which it God delivered them into the hands of the Spaniards, they received that recompen●e which was meet.  
Rivers of most note 1 S. Jago, on the borders towards Popayana; a River of a violent course, and so great a depth, that it is 180 Fathoms deep at the influx of it. 2. Tombez, opening into a fair and capacious Bav, over against the Isle of Puna, on the further side of the Aequator; an Island of twelve Leagues in compals, and exceeding fruitful. 3 Guagaquil, of a longer course than any of the other two, and falling into Mare deal Zur on the South of Tombez; over against the Isle of Lobos. No Island after this of note upon all this Coast. If any come in our way which runneth towards the East, we shall meet with them in the view of the several Provinces; and so we shall of the Hills or Mountains which are most considerable; the Andes having been already touched on. Take we now notice of the great Lake of Titicaca, in which twelve Rivers are reported to lose themselves; in compass 80 Leagues, and usually Navigable with ships and barks. The waters of it not so salt as those of the sea, but so thick that no body can drink them; yet on the banks of it many habitations, as good as any in Peru. By a fair water course or River it passeth into a less Lake, which they call Aulaga, and thence most probably findeth a way into the Sea, or else is swallowed in the Bowels of that thirsty earth; but the first more likely.  
It is divided commonly into three Juridical Resorts, viz. of 1 Quito, 2 Lima, and 3 Charcos; each having under it many several and subordinate Provinces; too many and of too small note to be here considered. We will therefore look upon the chief, and of greatest reckoning, 1 Quito, 2 Los Quixos, 3 Lima, 4 Cusco, 5 Charcos, and 6 Collao; three on the Sea, and the other three in the midlands; to which the Lands of it shall be joined in the close of all.  
1. QVITO is bounded on the North with Popayan, on the West with Mare del Zur; on the South with the Province of Lima, and on the East with that of Los Quixos. So named from Quito the chief Town and Province of the first division.  
The soil as fertile and as fit for the fruits of Europe, as any other in Peru: well stored with cattle, especially the Pacos or Peruvian sheep; and plentifully furnished both with Fish and Fowl. In many parts great store of Nitre, of which they make most approved good Gunpowder: and in some Rivers, especially that of S. Barbara, many veins of Gold. The people generally industrious, especially in the making of Cloth of Cotton, equal almost to silks for fineness; of constitution strong and healthy; but given to lying, drinking and such other vices: with which they are so much in love that though they are conceived to be apt of Learning, yet not without great difficulty brought to the Christian Faith, nor willingly reclaimed from their ancient Barbarism. Extremely punished with the Pox, an hereditary disease amongst them; the very Girls and untouched Virgins so infected with it, that neither Tobacco, Guajacan, nor Sarsa parilla, all which this Country doth afford in a great abundance, is able to preserve them from it.  
Towns of most observation in it, 1 Carangues, a large and sumptuous Palace of the ancient Kings, so named because situate in the Territory of the Carangues, a barbarous, bloody, and man-eating people; subdued by Guayanacapa, one of the mightiest of the Kings of Peru; from whom revolting, and withal killing many of his Ministers and Garrison-Souldiers, they were upon a second conquest brought to the banks of a great Lake into which 20000 of them being killed, were thrown. The Lake from thenceforth called Yaguarcoch● or the Lake of blood. 2 Otavallu, another Palace of the Kings, but far inferior to the other; yet giving name unto the Cantred in which it standeth. 3 Quito, the chief of this Resort, and once the Regal seat of its proper Kings (till made subject by Guayanacapa before mentioned) the ruins of whose Palace are now remaining. By the Spaniards it is called S. Francisco, built on the declivity of an Hill, not above 30 minutes from the Equinoctial, well fortified, and as well furnished with Ammunition: inhabited by about 500 Spaniards besides the Natives. The streets whereof straight and broad: the buildings decent: the principal of which, the Cathedral Church, the Courts of Justice, and two Convents of Dominican and Franciscan Friars. The Town and Territory much annoyed by a Flaming Mountain, or Vulcano; which in the year 1560 cast out such abundance of cinders, that if a rain had not happened beyond expectation, had made great spoil upon the place. 4 Tacunga fifteen Leagues from Quito; and 5 Rhiobamba in the Territory of the Purvasii 40 Leagues from that; each of them honoured with another of those ancient Palaces. 6 Thomebamba neighboured by another of the King's Palaces, but more magnificent than the former; situate in the Country of the Canares: amongst whom anciently the Women tilled the Land, and did all without doors; whiles the Men stayed at home and spun, and attended housewifry. 7 Cuenca 64 Leagues from Quito, on another Road, situate in a Country full of Gold, Silver, Brass, Iron, and veins of Sulphur. 8 Loxa, sixteen Leagues southwards of Cuenca, situate in the fifth Degree of Southern Latitude, and in a sweet and pleasant Valley called Guxibamba, between two fine Riverets. The Citizens well furnished with Horse and Armour, but not otherwise wealthy. 9 Zamora, twenty Leagues on the East of Loxa; and 10 Jaen, 35 from that: both situate in the Province of Quachimayo, and both so called in reference to two Cities of those names in Spain: Then on the Sea coasts, there are, 11 Portus Votus (Pucrto Veio as the Spaniards call it) not far from the Seaside, but in so ill an Air that it is not very much frequented. Said to be one of the first Towns of this Country possessed by the Spaniards, who digged up hereabouts the bones of a monstrous Giant; whose Cheek-teeths were four fingers broad. 12 Mantu the Port Town to Porto Ve●o, from whence the trade is driven betwixt Panuma and Peru; the town itself situate in a rich vein of Emeralds. 13 Guayaquill, or S. Jago de Guayaquil, called also Gulata; seated at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea, near the influx of the River Guayaquil; a noted and much frequented Empory. 14 Castro, a Colony of Spaniards planted, An. 1568 in that part of this Country which they call Provincia de los Esmeraldoes, bordering on Popayan. 15 S. Michael, by the old Natives called Piura, the first Colony which the Spaniards planted in Peru, but otherwise of no estimation. 16 Payta, a small Town, but neighboured by the safest and most frequented Haven of all this Country; as guarded from the wind by the Cape of S. Helen's on the North, and Punta Piurina on the South; two eminent Promontories. The Town burnt An. 1587. by Capt. Cavendish; Who at the same time also pillaged the Isle of Puna, the most noted Island of this Tract, situate in the Bay of Tombez, as was said before. Fruitful of all things necessary to the life of man; Parats for pleasure, Sarzaparilla for his health. The people in preceding times so stout and Warlike that they maintained a long War with those of Tombez, till in the end composed by the mediation of the King of Peru (to whom the King hereof (for a King it had) became an Homager; as since their embracing of the Gospel, to the Kings of Spain.  
2 LOS QVIXOS, lieth on the East of Quito, and the west of El Dorada, (one of the canters of Guiana, so called from its abundance of Gold) but little different in the nature of the soil and people from the Province of Quito, but that this is somewhat the more barren, and less stored with those rich metals which the Spaniards come for. The People have also a distinct tongue of their own, though they both understand and speak the Peruvian language.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1 Baeza, built in the year 1559. (which was within two years of the first discovery of this Region) by Giles Ramirez de Avila; 18 leagues from Quito towards the East: now the seat of the Governor. 2 Archidona, 20 leagues on the Southeast of Baeza. 3 Avila, on the North of Archidona; so called with reference to Ramirez de Avila before mentioned, or to a Town of that name in Spain. 4 Sevilla deal Oro, a Colony of the Spaniards, as the others are.  
On the East of this Province lieth the Cantred of Canelam, inhabited by a blockish and ignorant People, and destitute of all things necessary for the comforts of life. Most mercilessly tormented, and cast to dogs to be devoured, by Pizarro, because they could not show him the readiest way to some richer Country than their own; this being the most barren Region of that part of Peru which they call La Sierra, or the Hill-Countries. More Eastwards yet in that part which they call the Andes, he the canters of the Bracomori, commonly called Juan de Salinas, by the name of the first Discoverer of it: A Country not inferior unto many for the quantity of Gold, superior to any for the pureness of it. Chief Towns of which, 1 Valladolit, 2 Loiola, by the Natives called Cumbinama; 3 S. Jago de las Montannas' (or S. James of the Mountains) all Spanish Colonies; and all of the foundation of John de Salinis a Loiola, once the Pro-Praefect of the Province, by whom first thoroughly subdued to the Crown of Spain.  
3 LIMA, called also LOSREYES, is bounded on the North with Quito▪ on the South with Charcas, on the West with Mare del Zur, on the East with Collao and the Province of Cusco. So named from Lima or Los Reyes, the chief City of it. Extended from the 6. to the 16. Degree of Southern Latitude: or measuring it from the Promontory del Aguja North, to Arequipa on the South, it reacheth to 250 leagues. The soil of the same nature with that of Quito, but more distributed into Valleys, and better peopled.  
Ilaces of most observation, 1 Miraslores in the valley of Zanu, 110 leagues on the North of Lima, and about five leagues distant from the Sea, on which it hath an Haven belonging to it, called Chencepen. The Town well seated, and inhabited by a wealthy people, made such by the abundance of Sugar canes in the neighbouring Valley. 2 Truxillo, in the rich and flourishing Valley of Chimo, on the banks of a small, but pleasant River, and about two leagues from the sea; where it hath a large, but unsafe Haven, which they call El Azzecife de Trugillo. The Town itself situate in the 7. Degree and 30 minutes of Southern Latitude: well built and rich, one of the principal of Peru; inhabited by 1500 Spaniards besides the Natives and beautified with four Convents of several Orders. 3 Lafoy Parilla, in the valley of the Santa, in which it standeth, and by which it is furnished with a safe and convenient Road for shipping 20 leagues Southwards of Truxillo, and neighboured by rich Mines of silver not long since discovered. 4 Arnedo, seated amongst Vineyards in the Valley of Chancay, ten leagues North of ●ima. 5 Lima, by the Spaniards called Cividad de los Reyes, or the City of Kings, situate in the Valley of Lima, the most fruitful part of all Peru, in the Latitude of twelve Degrees and an half. Built with much art, for all the chief streets answer to the Marketplace; scarce any private house which hath not water conveyed into it from the River; environed round about with sweet fields, and most pleasant gardens. The founder of it Francisco Pizarro, who laid the first stone on eight day (which the Spaniards call the Feast of Kings) whence it had the name, An. 1553. A Town of greater wealth than bigness, the Riches of Peru passing yearly thorough it: well housed, whether we respect the private or public edifices: the Cathedral Church, made after the the model of that of Sevil; the Convents of Religious Orders, the Courts of Justice● and the Palaces of the Archbishop and Viceroy, being all fair and goodly buildings; the Cathedral Church so well endowed, that the Revenues of the Archbishop do amount yearly to 30000 Ducats, besides what belongeth to the Canons and other Ministers. 6 Collao, the Haven town to Lima, from which two leagues distant: a Town of 600 families, for the most part Sea men; every house having some Cellar in it for the stowage of Wine, Tobacco, Cables, Pitch, etc. for the use of Mariners; besides those, public warehouses for the several commodities which pass from Lima ●ither, or from hence to Lima. Unfortified till the year 1579. when sacked and spoiled of infinite treasures by Sir Francis Drake; since that time strengthened by two Bulwarks, and a wall of earth, with 30 peace of Brass Ordnance planted on the works. 7 Pachacama in the Valley so called, but ●oar leagues on the South of Lima: memorable for a Temple, in which Pizarro found above 900000 Ducats of gold and silver, not reckoning in those infinite treasures which the soldiers had laid hands on before his coming. 8 Guarco, a Colony of 300 Spaniards, sixteen leagues on the South of Pachacama; environed with the best fields for Wheat in all Peru. 9 Valverde, in a Valley of the same name, so called from the perpetual greenness of it; best furnished with Vines, and those affording the best wines of all this Country. A large Town, consisting of 500 Spaniards, besides women and children, and other inhabitants of the Country: well traded, considering its distance from the Sea, Puerto Quemado the Haven to it being six leagues off; and beautified with a fair Church, an Hospital, three Friaries, and the handsomest women of these parts. Distant from Lima 35 leagues. 10 Castro Verreyna, in the Valley of Chocol●cocha, 60 leagues from Lima, enriched with Mines of the purest Silver, digged out of a dry and ●ar●en hill, always covered with snow, and standing in so sharp an air, that the Spanish women will not be delivered in it, but are carried further off to be brought to bed. From hence, as I conjecture, comes that vein of Tobacco, which our Good-fellows celebrate by the name of the right Verreinas. 11 Arequipa in the Valley of Quilca, 120 leagues from Lima, a pleasing and delightful town; which situate at the foot of a flaming mountain, (from which in the year 1600 it received much harm) enjoyeth a fresh and temperate Air, and a soil always flourishing. The silver of Plata and Potosi passeth thorough this town, and is shipped for Panama, at an Haven belonging to it, situate on the mouth of the River. Chile (upon which Arequipa standeth) but distant from the town about 14 leagues. 12 Caxamalca, more within the land, but more towards the North; heretofore beautified with a Royal Palace of the Kings of Peru; memorable for the imprisonment and murder of Atabilaba, or Athnalpa, the last King of this Country, vanquished not far off by Francisco Pizarro. 13 Cachapoyaro, in the Cantred so called the best inhabited of any one Cantred of those parts, supposed to contain in it 20000 of the Natural Inhabitants which pay duties to the Kings of Spain; and so esteemed for beautiful women, that from hence the Kings were anciently furnished with their Concubines. 14 Leon de Gua●uco, (the addition given it from the Province in which it standeth) a Colony of Spaniards, rich, sweet, and very Pleasantly seated: beautified heretofore with a most magnificent Palace of the Kings; as now with some Religious houses, a College of Jesuits, and the dwellings of many of the Nobility. Many other midland Towns there are, but of no great note, and therefore purposely passed over.  
4 CUSCO comprehendeth, as the chief, all those several Provinces of the Hill Countries, and the Andes, which lie Southwards of the Province or Cantred of Guanaco. Blessed with a sweet and temperate Air, not over scalded with the Sun, nor dulled with the distempers of the Evening mists: the Country full of fresh Rivers, notable good pasturage and great herds of cattle; well stored with Coca which is gathered here in some abundance, and most excellent Venison.  
Places of most repute in it, 1 Bombon, in the same Latitude with Lima; neighboured by a Lake called Laguna de Chinca cocha, ten leagues in compass, begirt about with pleasant hills, and built upon with many rich and as pleasant villages; out of which runneth the River Marannon, one of the greatest of these parts, supposed by the Inhabitants to end his course in the Mare del Noort. 2 Parcos, once beautified with a Regal Palace, seated on the top of a little hill, and begirt about with craggy mountains. 3 Guamanga, by the Spaniards called S. Juan de la Vittoria, situate under the 13 Degree of Southern Latitude, on the banks of a fresh and pleasing stream: well built, the houses being all of stone, and tiled or slatted; three Churches, one of them a Cathedral, besides divers Convents. 4 Bilcar, supposed to be built in the very Centre of Peru; where still remain the ruins of a sumptuous Palace. 5 Guancabelica, a new Town, or but newly raised into esteem, supposed to contain at the present 2000 Spaniards, and double that number of the Natives. Increased since the year 1566. from a beggarly Village to this greatness, by the Mines of Quicksilver then discovered: Mines of such Riches, that the King's part out of them amounteth yearly to above 40000 Pezoes', which is about 130000▪ l. of our English money. And yet this is not all the benefit he receives from them neither; that Mineral being found so necessary for the purifying and speedy extraction of their Gold, that it is not said without cause by the Chemists, that Quicksilver gives the matter to Gold, and Sulphur the form. 6 CUSCO, in the Latitude of 13 Degrees and 30 minutes, about 130 leagues on the East of Lima; and situate in a rugged and unequal soil, begirt with Mountains; but on both sides of a pleasant and commodious River. Once the seat-royal of the Ingas or Peruvian Kings; who the more to beautify this City, commanded every one of his Nobility to build here a Palace for their continual abode: still of most credit in this Country, both for beauty and bigness, and the multitudes of Inhabitants; here being thought to dwell 3000 Spaniards, and 10000 of the Natives, besides women and children. The Palace of the Kings advanced on a losty mountain, was held to be a work of so great magnificence, built of such huge and massy stones, that the Spaniards thought it to have been the work rather of devils then of men. Now miserably defaced, most of the stones being tumbled down to build private houses in the City; some of the Churches raised also by the ruins of it, and amongst them perhaps both the Bishop's Palace and Cathedral, whose annual Rents are estimated at 20000 Ducats. Yet did not this vast Building yield more lustre to the City or Cusco, than a spacious Marketplace; the Centre in which those highways did meet together, which the Ingas had caused to be made cross the Kingdom, both for length and breadth, with most incredible charge and pains, for the use of their Subjects. Of which more hereafter. 7 S. Francisco de la Vittoria, at the foot of the Andes, a Spanish Colony, and about 20 leagues from Cusco. 8 S. Juan del Oro, in the Valley of Caravayan, neighboured with rich Mines of the purest Gold, whence it had the name; a Colony of Spaniards also. Beyond the Andes lie some Countries much samed for wealth; the discovery whereof hath often been attempted by the Spaniards, sometimes with loss, not seldom with some hopes of a better fortune, but hitherto without success.  
5 COLLAO lieth on the South of those Provinces which we have comprehended under the name of Cusco; having on the West the rest of Lima, on the South Los Charchos, on the East those unknown Countries beyond the Andes. Shut up on the East and West by two mountainous Ridges; which keeping in one main body till they come beyond the City of Cusco, do there divide themselves, and grow wider and wider, not to meet again.  
The Country plain and full of Rivers; well stored with rich pastures, and those pastures with great herds of cattle: barren of Corn, and not well furnished with Maize; instead whereof they make their bread of a Root called Popa, dried in the sun and bruised to powder; of which the Spaniards make great gain at the Mines of Potosi. Yet notwithstanding this great want, it is thought to be the most populous part of all Peru; the soundness and temperature of the Air (which is here very much commended) as much conducing to the populositie of a Country as the richness and plenties of the Soyl. The people also of a clearer and more solid judgement than the rest of Peru: and so well skilled in the observations of the course of the Moon, that the Spaniards at their coming hither, found the year distinguished into Months, weeks, days; for each of which they had a proper and significant name. The famous Lake of Titicaca is within this Province.  
Places of greatest note in it, 1 Chuquinga, naturally strong and almost inaccessible, environed either with unfordable waters, or impassable Mountains: one Causey only leading to it, which for the space of three Leagues, is said to be capable but of one at once. 2 Ayavire, ennobled with many fair and costly buildings; specially with Monuments of the dead which exceed the rest both in cost and number: for that cause by the Spaniards called Las Sepulturas. The Inhabitants of this Tract much wasted by the Civil Wars which the Spaniards had amongst themselves. 3 Hatuncolla the Metropolis or chief Town of this Province, as the name doth signify: not far from which the famous River Caravaya, famous for the abundance of Gold in the sands thereof, hath its first original. 4 Chiquita, a Colony of the Spaniards, on the banks of the Lake of Titicaca; a Town of so great trade and riches, that the Governor hereof is named immediately by the King; his place being estimated at the worth of 50000 Ducats yearly. 5 Tiaguanaco, at the mouth or outlet of that Lake; supposed to be the most ancient Burrough of Peru: now most remarkable for the ruins of certain great and stupendious buildings, some of the stones whereof are said to be 30 foot long, fifteen foot in breadth, and six in thickness: not to be brought thither without the help of Iron Engines (which this People had not till of late) but by some strange Arts. 5 Dela Paz, or Nuestra Sennora de la Paz, by the Spaniards called also Pueblo Neuvo, and by the Natives Chiquiabo, according to the name of the Cantred in which it standeth, is situate at the ●oot of a little Mountain, by which defended from the injuries of wind and weather; but overlooking a large plain of great fertility, well watered, and well wooded both for fruits and fuel. 7 Chilane, 8 Acos, 9 Pomata, 10 Cepita; and others of as little note.  
6. LOS CHARCAS on the North is bounded with Lima, and Collao; on the South with Chile; on the West with Mare del Zur; on the East with some Countries not yet well discovered, interposed betwixt it and the Province of Rio de la Plata. This also called by the name of Plata, according to the name of the chief City of it.  
The Country extended in length from North to South, but 300 Leagues; but measuring by the Seashores, above 400. Not very rich in corn or cattle, though in many places furnished with good Pasture-grounds; but for the inexhaustible Mines of Gold and Silver, not to be equalled in Peru. Of these the principal those of Porco and Potosi, but these last the chief: out of which comes that mass of Silver, which yieldeth the King so much profit yearly, as before was mentioned. The Mine 200 Fathoms deep, to which they do descend by Ladders made of raw Hides, 800 steps: some of the workmen not seeing the Sun many months together; many fall down with their loads of silver on their backs, pulling others after them; and many dying in the Works for want of Air. For the refining of this Silver there are 52 Engines or Silver Mills upon a River near unto it; 22 more in the Valley of Tarapia not far off, besides many which they turn with horses. The Poet's words never more literally verified then in these deep Mines; where speaking of the Iron-Age, he describes it thus; 
Nectantum segetes, alimentaque debita dives  
Poscebatur humus; sed itum est in viscera terra;  
Quasque recondiderat, Stygiisque admoverat umbris,  
Fffodiuntur opes, irritamenta malorum.  Which I find thus rendered by George Sundys. 
Nor with rich Earth's just nourishments content,  
For treasure they her secret entrails rend.  
That powerful evil, which all power invades,  
By her well hid, and wrapped in Stygian shades.   
Places of most importance in it, 1 Plata, so called from the rich Mines of Silver, found in Mount Porco near adjoining, well emptied by the ancient Ingas, but searched into again by Francisco Pizarro, who (it is thought) might have raised hence 200000 Ducats of yearly income, if hopes of greater at Potosi had not took him off. The town commodiously seated in a fruitful soil, in the 19th. degree of Latitude, and 180 Leagues distant from the City of Cusco; honoured with the seat of the Governor, and the Courts of Justice; and beautified (besides many Religious houses) with a fair Cathedral; the See of the best endowed Bishopric of all Peru; his Revenues being estimated at 80000 Ducats of yearly Rents. By the Natives it is called Chuquisacay. 2 Oropesa, twenty Leagues from Plata, built by Don Francis de Toledo, when Viceroy here, in the rich and pleasant Valley called Cochabamba, An, 1565. 3 Potosi, neighboured by those wealthy Mines already mentioned. Discovered first in the year 1545▪ before which time this Town was but a sorry Village; now the best peopled and frequented in all the Province; said to be constantly inhabited by four or five thousand Spaniards, many more of the Natives; not so few as 30000 Workmen appertaining to it, but lodged in the Villages adjoining: besides the infinite resort of Merchants in pursuit of profit, and idle Gallants who come hither for their Lusts and Pleasures. Situate in the 21 degree and 40 Minutes of Southern Latitude, in a cold and very barren soil; yet plentifully furnished with all commodities, both for necessity and delight. For as the money is, so the Market always. 4 Misque, a small Town, but one which furnisheth Potosia, with good plenty of wine, as 5 Lagunilla, and 6 Tarixa, do with Wheat, Maize, Sugar, and choice of fruits. 7 Arica, the most noted Haven of this Country, in the Latitude of 19 Degrees, and 80 Leagues or thereabouts from the Mines of Potosia; the wealth whereof brought hither on the backs of their sheep, is here shipped for Lima; the truth hereof experienced by Sir Francis Drake, who seized here on three Spanish Ships, in one of which was 57 Bars of silver, each of them twenty pound weight apiece. Few other Towns, if any, upon all this coast, which is altogether Rocky, barren, and unfit for habitation; accordingly but little peopled, or not at all.  
Come we now to the Peruvian story, which we shall sum up with as much brevity as we can: The People generally governed by the Chief of their Tribes, as in all Countries else where neither the Arms of Foreigners, nor the ambition of some few of the Natives, had not diminished any thing of those Natural Rights. Not subject to any one Supreme till these latter times; the Ingas, or Monarches of Peru growing unto their greatness but a little before their Fall. Their Territory at the first so small that it was not above five or six Leagues in compass; situate in that part of the Country where the City of Cusco now standeth. Opposed at their first encroachments by the Cannares, a valiant Nation, and likely to have had the better, if the Ingas had not helped themselves by a piece of wit: giving it out, that their Family had not only been the Seminary from which mankind came; but the Authors of that Religion also which was then in use; particularly that the whole world having been destroyed by a Flood, except only seven (so far they hit upon the truth) which seven had hid themselves in a Cave called Paticambo; where having lived in safety till the fury of the waters had been assuaged, they came abroad at last and repeopled the Country; that Viracocha the Creator, and great God of Nature had appeared to one of them, and taught him how, and with what rites he would be worshipped; which rites were afterwards received over all Peru. And finally that the same Viracocha had appeared lately to the chief of their Family; assuring him that he would aid him with invisible forces against all their enemies. This tale soon gained belief amongst those Barbarians; and that belief drew many to take part with the Ingas, by that aid victorious. This is supposed to have happened 400 years before the Spaniards put an end to this flourishing Kingdom, which was in the year 1533. Within which time they had brought all this Country which we now call Peru, and many of the adjoining Provinces under their Dominion. Their Kings were called Ingas, as the Egyptians Pharaoh, the Tartars Cham; the word Inga signifying an Emperor, as Capa Ingas (by which they also sometimes called them) the only Emperors. Much reverenced by their Subjects and so faithfully served, that never any of their Subjects were found guilty of Treason. Nor wanted they good arts whereby to indeer their Subjects, and keep them out of leisure to foment new factions. The way of indeerment, by the fair and satisfactory distribution of the spoils gotten in the wars, whether Lands or Goods: all which they divided into three parts: allotting the first unto the service of the Gods; the second for the maintenance of the King, his Court, and Nobles; the third to the relief of the common people. A distribution far more equal than that of Lycurgus, or the Lex Agraria of the Romans. But when there was no cause of wars, they kept the people busted in their Works of Magnificence as building Palaces in every one of the Conquered Provinces, which served not only as Forts to assure the Conquest, but were employed as Storehouses to lay up Provisions, distributed amongst the people in times of dearth. But that which was the work as of great trouble, so of chiefest use, was the cross-ways they made over all the Country, the one upon the Mountains, and the other on the Plains, extending 500 Leagues in length: a work to be preferred before any both of Rome and Egypt. For they were forced to raise the ground in many places to the height of the Mountai●●, and lay the Mountains levelly with the flattest Plains; to cut thorough some Rocks, and underprop others that were ruinous; to make even such ways as were uneasy, and support the Precipices: and in the Plains to vanquish so many difficulties, as the uncertain foundation of a sandy Country must needs carry with it. Kept to these tasks, the people had no leisure to think of practices: yet well content to undergo them, in regard they saw it tended to the Public Benefit. And for the Caciques (so they call the Nobility) the Inga did not only command them to reside in Cusco, to be assured of their persons: but caused them to send their Children to be brought up there; that they might serve as Hostages for the Father's Lovalty. They ordered also that all such as repaired to Cusco the Imperial City, should be attired according to his own Country fashion; so to prevent those Leagues and Associations, which otherwise without any note or observation might be made amongst them. Many such Politic Institutions were by them devised, which had little of the Barbarous in them, and clearly showed that there were other Nations which had Eyes in their Heads besides those of China. What else concerns the story of them, offereth itself in the following Catalogue of   

The Kings of Peru.  
1. Manga-Capac, descended of the chief of the first seven Families, the first who laid the foundation of this puissant Monarchy; subdued the Cannares, and built the City of Cusco.  
2. Sinchi-Rocha, eldest son of Mango, subdued a great part of Collao, as far as Chancara.  
3. Loque-Yupanqui; the son of Sinchi, conquered Chiquito, Ayavire, the Canus, and the Inhabitants about Titicaca, the first advancer of the service of Viracocha, from whom he did pretend to have many visits.  
4. Mayta-Capac, the son of Yupanqui, subdued all the rest of Collao, the Province of Chuquiapa, and a great part of the Charcas.  
5. Capac Yupanqui, or Yupanqui II. the son of Mayta, enlarged his Kingdom Westward unto Mare del Zur.  
6. Rocha II. or Yncha Rocha, eldest son of Yupanqui the second, enlarged his Kingdom towards the North, by the conquest of the great Province of Antabuyallam, and many others.  
7. Jahuar-Huacac, son of Rocha the second, added to his Estates (by the valour of his brother Mayta) all the Southern parts from Arequipa to Tacaman. Deposed by the practice of his son.  
8. Viracocha, the son of Huacac, having settled and enlarged his Empire; raised many great and stately works, and amongst others many Aqueducts, of great use but charge. For fear of him, Hancohualla, King of the Chuncas, with many thousands of his People forsook their Country.  
9 Pachacutec-Ynca, son of Virachoca, improved his Kingdom by the conquest of many Provinces lying towards the Andes, and South-Sea; with that of Caxamalcu Northwards.  
10. Yupanqui III. or Yncha Yupanchi, son of Pachacutec, subdued the Conches, and Moxes, with some part of Chile.  
11. Yupanqui IU. or Tapac Ynca Yupanchi, son of Yupanqui the third, extended his Dominions as far as Quito.  
12. Huayna Capac, or Guaynacapac, son of Yupanqui the fourth, the most mighty Monarch of Peru, conquered the whole Province of Quito; and is supposed to be the founder of those two great Roads spoken of before.  
13. Huascar, or Guascar Ynca, the eldest son of Guaynacapa, after a reign of five years deposed and slain by his Brother.  
14. Athualpa, or Atubaliba, the third son Guaynacapa, by the daughter and heir of the King of Quito: into which Kingdom he succeeded by the will of his Father. Commanded by his Brother to do Homage for the Kingdom of Quito, he came upon him with such power, that he overcame him, and so gained the Kingdom. Vanquished afterwards by Pizarro at the battle of Caxamalca, he was taken Prisoner. And though he gave in ransom for his life and liberty, an house piled up on all sides with Gold and Silver, valued (as some say) at ten millions of Crowns; yet they per fidiously slew him.  
15. Mango-Capac II. the second son of Guaynacapac, 1533 substituted by Pizarro in his ●rothers Throne; after many vicissitudes of Fortune, was at last slain in the City of Cusco; and so the Kingdom of the Ingas began and ended in a Prince of the same name; as it had happened formerly to some other Estates.  
Let us next look ●pon the birth and fortune of that Pizarro, who subdued this most potent and slourishing Kingdom, and made it a member of the Spanish Empire; and we shall find that he was born at Trusiglio, a village of Navarr; and by the poor whore his mother, laid in the Church-porch and so left to God's providence: by whose direction (there being none found that would give him the breast) he was nourished for certain days, by sucking a Sow. At last, one Gonsalles, a soldier, acknowledged him for his son, put him to nurse, and when he was somewhat grown, set him to keep his Swine: some of which being strayed, the boy durst not for fear return home, but betook himself to his heels, ran unto Sevil, and there shipped himself for America; where he attended Alfonso de Dioda in the discovery of the Countries beyond the Golf of Vraba; Balboa in his voyage to the South Sea; and Pedro de Avila in the conquest of Panama. Grown rich by these Adventures, he associated himself with Diego de Almagro, and Fernando Luques a rich Priest: who betwixt them raised 220 soldiers, and in the year 1525▪ went to sack their Fortunes on those Southern Seas, which Balboa had before discovered. After divers repulses at his landing, and some hardship which he had endured, Pizarro at the length took some of the Inhabitants of Peru of whom he learned the wealth of the Country; and returning thereupon to Spain, obtained the King's Commission for the conquest of it; excluding his Companions out of the Patent, but taking in Almagro of his own accord. Thus furnished he landeth in Peru again, at such time as the wars grew hot betwixt the two Brethren for the Kingdom; and taking part with the faction of Guas●ar, marched against Atubaliba; whom he met with in the Plains of Caxamalca, but rather prepared for a parley, then to fight a Battle. Pizarro taking this advantage, picked a quarrel with him, and suddenly charged upon him with his Horse and Ordnance, shying his Guard without resistance; and coming near the King's person (who was then carried on men's shoulders) pulled him down by the Clothes, and took him Prisoner. With him they took as much Gold as amounted to 80000 Castellans; and as much Silver as amounted to 7000 Marks (every Mark weighing eight ounces) of his household Pla●e; and in the spoil of Caxamalca, almost infinite riches. This, with the King's ransom, came to so great a sum, that besides the fifth part which Pizarro sent to the Emperor, and that which Pizarro and his Brethren kept unto themselves; every Footman had 7200 Ducats, and every Horseman twice as much, for their part of the spoil; besides what they had gotten in the way of plunder. How they dealt afterwards with the miserable King, their Prisoner, hath been shown already. Upon which Act, though they put many fair pretences; yet God declared that he was not pleased with their proceedings; few of the greatest undertakers going to the Grave in peace. For though Pizarro in reward of so great a service was made the first Viceroy of Peru, and created Marquis of Anatilla; yet having put to death Almagro, his chief companion, who had raised a strong faction in that State; he was after slain at Lima, by some of that faction, in revenge of the death of their Commander. The like unfortunate end befell all the rest; his brother John slain by the Peruvians, Martin, in Lima with himself; Ferdinando secretly made away in prison; and finally Gonsales the fourth Brother (with the son of Almagro) severally executed for their treason's and Insurrections which they had acted in this Country against their King. So little joy doth wealth ill-gotten bring along with it, to the owners thereof. And here I am to leave Pizarro, whose strange both fortunes and misfortunes in the course of his life, are to be paralleled only with the like of Sinan, a great Bassa in the Court of Selimus the first; who being born of base parentage, as he being a child was sleeping in the shade, had his genitals bitten off by a Sow. The Turkish Officers which usually provided young boys for the service of the Grand Signieur, being in Epyrus (for that was Sinans Country) and hearing of this so extraordinary an Eunuch; took him among others, along with them to the Court; where under Mahomet the great, Bajazet the second, and his son Selimus, he so exceedingly thrived, that he was made the chief Bassa of the Court; and so well deserved it, that he was accounted Selimus right hand, and was indeed the man, to whose valour especially, the Turks owe their Kingdom of Egypt; in which Kingdom, than not fully settled, he was also slain.  
But to return unto Peru, no question but the Forces and Revenues of it were exceeding great. For though we find no particular musters which they made of their men; or what great Armies they drew with them into the Field; yet by their great successes, and many victories, we may conclude them to be masters of great Bands of men, and skilful in the Arts of conduct. Nor can we otherwise conjecture at the greatness of their yearly income, but by the greatness of their treasure; so infinite and almost incredible, that all the Vessels of the King's house, his Table, and kitchen were of Gold and Silver; Statues of Giants in his Wardrobe, together with the resemblances in proportion and bigness, of all the Beasts, Birds, Trees, Plants, and Fishes, which were found in that Kingdom, of the purest Gold; Ropes, Budgets, Troughs, Chests, all of Gold or Silver; Billets of Gold piled up together, as if they had been Billets of Wood cut out for the fire, three houses full of pieces of Gold, and five full of Silver. All which, besides infinite other treasures, fell into the hands of a few poor Spaniards: who grew so wanton hereupon, that they would give 1500 Crowns for an horse, 60 Crowns for a small Vessel of Wine, and forty for a pair of Shoes: Consuming all upon their Lusts, and sacrificing their Gods of Gold to their God the Belly.   

OF CHILE.  
HILE is bounded on the North with the Desert of Alacama 90 Leagues in length, interposed betwixt it and Peru: on the West with Mare del Zur: on the South with the Streits of Magellan; and on the East as far as to Rio de la Plata, with the main Atlantic; the Countries lying on the East betwixt it and Paragnay, not yet well discovered.  
This Country lieth wholly beyond the Tropic of Capricorn, by consequence in the temperate Zone: extended in length from the borders of Peru, to the mouth of the Streits, 500 Leagues, but the breadth variable and uncertain. Called Chile from the word I'll (which in more tongues than ours doth signify as much as cold) from the extreme coldness of the Air and Clime; so vehement here in our Summer Solstice, that many times both the Horses and the Riders are frozen to death, and hardened like a piece of Marble.  
The soil hereof in the midland parts Mountainous and unfruitful; towards the Seaside, level, fertile, and watered with divers Rivers flowing from the Mountains: productive of Maize, Wheat, and most excellent pasturage; plenty of Gold and Silver, abundance of Honey, store of cattle, and Wine enough for the use of the people; the Vines brought hither out of Spain prospering here exceedingly; as do also all the Fruits and Plants which are sent from hence into this Country. The people very tall and warlike, some of them of a Gigantine stature, affirmed (but I believe it not) to be eleven foot high; yet well conditioned with this greatness, where not much provoked. Their garments of the skins of Beasts, their Arms Bow and Arrows: white of complexion, but as hirsute and shaggie-haired, as the rest of the Savages.  
Rivers of note there are not any but what will fall within the view of its several Provinces: Divided commonly into 1 Chile, specially so called, and 2 Magellanica.  
1. CHILE specially so called, is bounded on the North with the Desert of Alacama; on the South with Magellanica; on the West with Mare del Zur; and on the East with some unknown Countries, lying betwixt it and Paragnay, or the Province of Rio de la Plata, not above 20 Leagues in breadth, but in length 300. The reason of the name, together with the nature of the soil and people, we have seen before.  
Principal Rivers of this part, 1 Rio de Copayapo▪ giving name unto a Promontory near the influx of it, in the Northern borders of this Province. 2 Rio de Coquimbo, 3 La Ligua, 4 Topocalma, 5 Cacapool, 6 Canten; all falling into Mare deal Zur; and besides these, a nameless, but more famous River, which in the day time runneth with a violent current, and in the night hath no water at all. The reason of it is, because this River having no constant Fountain, is both begun and continued by the Snow falling from the Mountains; which in the heat of the day melted into water, is precipitately carried into the Sea; but congealed in the coldness of the night, yields no water at all, whereby the Channel becometh empty.  
Places of most observation in it, 1 Gopiapo, giving name to a fertile Valley, in the most Northern tract hereof; and neighboured by a small but commodious Haven. 2 Serena, a Colony of the Spaniards, on the Seaside, not far from the influx of Rio de Coquimbo, on whose banks it is seated; where built by Baldivia the Conqueror and first Governor of this Province, An. 1544. The territory round about it rich in Mines of Gold: the Town itself of 200 houses, but so well peopled, that at the landing of some of the English under Captain Drake, they presently sent out 300 Horse and 200 Foot to compel them back unto their ships, which they did accordingly. 3 S. Jago, the chief of all this Province, (though not above 80 houses in it) because the Residence of the Governor, and the Courts of Justice; adorned with a Cathedral Church, and some Convents of Dominican and Franciscan Pryers; situate in the 34 Degree of Southern Latitude, on the banks of the River Topacalma; at the mouth whereof is the Haven of Val paraiso, the best and most noted of this Country; out of which the English under Drake took a Spanish ship, and therein 25000 Pesoes of the purest Gold, besides other Commodities. 4 Conception, 70 Leagues on the South of S. Jago, situate on the shores of a large and capacious Bay (by the Natives called Penco) by which and the mountains on all sides so strongly fenced, that the Governor when distressed by the Savages (as sometimes they are) retireth hither for his safety. Well fortified in such places as are accessible, and garrisoned with 500 soldiers, besides the Townsmen. Opposite hereunto lieth the Isle of S. Marry, so near the shore, that it seems to have been rend from it by the force of the Sea; fruitful, and very well provided of Swine and Poultry, but the people so in fear of the Spaniards dwelling in Conception, that they dare not kill or eat either, but by leave from them. 5 Auracona (so I think they call it) a strong Fortress in the Country of the Auracans, the most potent Nation of these parts, who weary of the Spanish yoke, revolted against Baldivia, overcame him in a set fight, and at last killed him: this piece being thereupon forsaken, & of no more use. 6 De los Confines, built by Baldivia in the borders of the Country of those Auracans, to serve for a defence to the Mines of Ongol near adjoining: distant from the Sea shores about 18 Leagues, enlarged by Garsias de Mendoza, and by him called Villa Neuva de los infants. 7 Imperiale, in the 38 Degree and 40 Minutes of Southern Latitude, situate on the banks of the River Cauten, an Episcopal See, and the best Fortress of the Spaniards in all this Province. Fortified and made a Colony of Spaniards in the year 1551 and by Baldivia called All Impertale, because they found an Eagle with two heads made in wood, on the doors of their houses; a monument perhaps of some Germans, who had here been shipwrackt. A Town of so great wealth and power before known to the Spaniards, that in a war betwixt them and the Araucans', spoken of before, they are said to have brought upto the field 300000 men. 8 Villa Rica, another Colony of Spaniards, 16 Leagues on the Southeast of Imperiale, and 25 Leagues from the shores of Mare deal Zur. 9 Baldivia, the most noted Town of all these parts, situate in the Valley of Guadallanguen, in the Latitude of 40 Degrees or thereabouts: adorned with a safe and capacious Haven, and neighboured by Mines of Gold of such infinite riches, that Baldivia (by whom built for defence of those Mines) received thence daily by the labour of each single workman, 25000 Crowns a man, and sometimes more. Sacked by the Savages An. 1599 since repaired by the Spaniards. 10 Osorno, on the Banks of the Bay of Chilve, (or Ancud, as the Savages call it) situate in a barren soil, but well stored with Gold, and thought to be more populous than Valdivia itself. 11 Castro, the most Southern Town of all this Province, in the Latitude of 44. built in a large and fruitful Island of the Bay of Ancud, said to be 50 Leagues in length, but the breadth unequal; in some parts nine, in others not above two Leagues. 12 S. Juan de la Frontera, on the further side of the Andes, towards Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata.  
To this Province there belong also certain Lands lying on the coasts and shores hereof. 1 S. Mary's, spoken of before. 2 Mocha, upon the South of that, five Leagues from the Continent, fruitful of grain, and very good pasturage; sufficient to maintain the Inhabitants of it, who being the descendants of those Americans who fled hither to avoid the tyranny of the Spaniards, hitherto have made good their liberty against that Nation: of which so jealous, that they would not suffer the English under Drake and Cavendish to land amongst them, for fear they had been Spaniards, or some friends of theirs 3 Castro, which we have spoken of already.  
2. MAGELLANICA is bounded on the North with Chile, and the Province of Rio de la Plata; on the South with Fretum Magellanicum, or the Streits of Magelian; on the West with Mare del Zur; on the East with Mare del Noort, or the main Atlantic. So called from Magellanus, by whom first discovered; of whom we shall speak more hereafter.  
It is in length from the borders of Chile to the mouth of the Streits, 300 Leagues: in breadth from one Sea to the other, where broadest, above 400 Leagues; in some but 90 only, and in others less, according as it draweth towards the point of the Pyramid. The inland parts of the Country not yet discovered: those on the Sea side observed to be rocky and unfruitful, exposed for the most part of the year to such bitter colds, that the Snow lieth always on the Mountains. The people said to be tall of stature, and some of them of a Gigantine bigness, reported to be ten or eleven foot high; and by the Spaniards for that reason are called Patagons. Both great and less, sufficiently rude and barbarous, quite naked, and unfurnished of any houses, notwithstanding the rigour of the cold.  
No Houses doth imply no Towns, and therefore we must look for none, in so rude a Country, as hath not hitherto conversed with more civil Nations. So that the most that we can do, is to coast the shores, and see what names of Ports or Promontories we can find therein. And first upon the Sea coasts towards Mare deal Zur, they place (beginning at the North, and so descending) 1 The Promontory called Cabo de las Islas. 2 The Port or Haven of S. Stephen. 3 The Valley of Nuestra Sennora, or our Lady's Valley. 4 The Promontory called Punta Delgado. 5 Porto de los Reyes. 6 Ancon Sinsalida, on the banks of a semicircular Bay, the receptacle of many Rivers, and not a few Lands. 7 Cabo de la Victoria, or the Cape of Victory, situate betwixt that Bay and the mouth of the Streits, so called from the name of the Ship in which some of Magellanes soldiers did first compass the world. For Ferdinand Magellano a noble Portugal, and well skilled in Navigation, at the persuasion or command of Charles the fifth, to whom (upon some discontents received in the Court of Emanuel King of Portugal) he had made offer of his service, undertook the finding out (if possible) a shorter cut to the Moluccos, then discovered formerly. In the year 1520 he began his voyage, and keeping on the coast to the South of Rio de la Plata, about the end of October, fell upon the Cape of Virgins, at the very entrance of this Strait, which on the doubling of this Cape he was fallen upon; and by the end of November (not before) was fully clear of these narrow Seas, since called Fretum Magellanicum, and entered into Mare deal Zur. Afterwards passing the Moluccos, he was killed in a fight against the Islanders of S. Matthew, a little Island not far off, but more near the Pilippins; which notwithstanding the ship called Victoria, returned to Spain in safety, and brought the welcome news of their good success.  
We use to say that Sir Francis Drake was the first that sailed round about the world, which may be true in a mitigated senses viz. that he was the first Captain, or man of note that achieved this enterprise, Magellanus perishing in the midst of it; and therefore is reported to have given for his device, a Globe, with this motto, Tu primus circumdedisti me. This navigation was begun, An. 1577, and in two years and an half with great vicissitude of fortune, finished; concerning which his famous voyage, a Poet then living, directed to him this Epigram.  

Drake pererrati novit quem terminus orbis,  
Quemque, simul mundi vidit uterque polus:  
Sitaceant homines, facient te sydera notum;  
Sol nescit comitis non memor esse sui.   

Drake, whom th'encompassed earth so fully knew,  
And whom at once both poles of heaven did view:  
Should men forget thee, Sol could not forbear  
To chronicle his fellow traveller.   
This Fretum Magellanicum, these Magellan straits, are in the 52 degree; and are by M. John Davis, who professeth to know every Creek in them, thus described. “ For 14 Leagues within the Cape of S. Marry, lieth the first strait, where it ebbeth and floweth with a violent swiftness: the straight not being fully half a mile broad, and the first fall into it very dangerous and doubtful. Three leagues this strait continueth, when it openeth into a sea, eight miles long, and as much broad; beyond which, lieth the second strait, right West, South-west from the first; a perilous and unpleasing passage, three leagues long, and a mile in breadth. This strait openeth itself into another sea, which is extended even to the Cape of victory; where is the straight properly called the straight of Magellane; a place of that nature, that which way soever a man bend his course, he shall be sure to have the wind against him. The length hereof is 40 leagues; the breadth in some places two leagues over, in others not fully half a mile. The Channel in depth 200 Fathoms, so no hope of Anchorage; the course of the water full of turnings and change; withal so violent, that when a ship is once entered, there is no returning. On both sides of it are high Mountains continually covered with snow; from which proceed those counter-winds, which beat with equal fury on all parts thereof. A place assuredly not pleasing to view, and very hazardous to pass. So far, and to this purpose M. Davis.  
But to proceed, the way thus opened, was traveled not long after, An. 1525. by Garsias de Loyasa; next in the year 1534, by Simon de Alcazavo, and four years after by three ships of the Bishop of Placenza in Spain; but none of them had the hap or courage to adventure thorough; till undertaken and performed by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1577▪ after which it grew more familiar amongst the seamen; Howsoever, we are so much debtors to the attempts of others, as that we owe to them the most part of the names of those Bays and Promontories, which they discovered in the search: though many of them since new named by the English and Hollanders. Those of most note, proceeding from Cabo de la Victoria, 1 Cabo de Quade. 2 Cape Gallant 3 Cordes Bay. 4 Cape Froward, being the very point or Conus of this great Pyramid. 5 Porto Famine. 6 ● little Isle called Elizabeth's Island; and at the exit of the straight into Mare deal Noort, the Cape of Virgins. Then bending Northward toward the great River of Plata, we find upon the main Ocean 1 Rio de la Crux, neighboured by a Promontory called Cabo de las Bareras; where Magellano stayed all September, and the greatest part of October, in expectation of an opportunity to discover further. 2 The Bay of S. Julian, out of which he set sail for this adventure, about the later end of August, leaving there two of his companions condemned of mutiny. 3 The Port of Desire. 4 A large Promontory called the Cape of S. George. 5 The outlets of a fair River, named Rio de los Camerones. 6 A goodly Haven entitled Puerto de los Leones. 7 The Cape called Punta de terra plana. 8 The Bay of Amegada. 9 The Promontory called the Cape of S. Andrews. And 10 the River of S. Anne, beyond which lieth the Province of the River. This is the most that I can say touching Magellanica, as to the Havens, Rivers, Points and Promontories; and this is nothing (as we see) but a Nomenclator. It must be better peopled and more discovered, before it can afford discourse of more variety. All we can add, is that the passage back again from Mare del Zur to the Atlantic, hath not been found so safe and easy, as from the main Atlantic unto Mare del Zur. Attempted first by Ladrilliro a Spaniard, at the command of Garcia de Mendoza, Governor of Chile; and attempted only: performed not long after the voyage of Sir Francis Drake, by D. Pedro Sarmiento, employed therein by Francis de Toledo, Viceroy of Peru, with much difficulty, and no less danger; so much, that few have since endeavoured to return that way.  
As for the fortunes & affairs of the Province of Chile, to which we have made this an Appendix, we are to understand that it was first discovered by Almagro de Alvarado, one of Pizarro's chief friends and associates. But he having other designs in his head about Peru, which he intended for himself, and to out Pizarro, did discover it only: the conquest of it being reserved for Baldivia, whom Pizarro on the settling of his affairs by the death of Almagro, had employed in that action. He going soldierlike to work, not only did subdue the people; but as he gained ground, built some Fortress, or planted Colonies of Spaniards in convenient places. This done about the year 1544. his ill luck was to meet with a more stubborn and untractable people, then either Cortes or Pizarro had done before him; who quickly weary of the yoke, besieged one of his Forts, encountered Baldivia himself coming with too small a power to relieve his people, vanquished and slew him in the field. Some add that they poured Gold into his throat (as the Parthians are reported to have done to Crassus) bidding him satiate himself with that which he so much thirsted. After this blow given in the year 1551▪ the Savages recovered the rich valleys of Auranco, Tucapel, and Purene; which they keep from them till this day: The Towns of Los Confines, and Villa Rica, both on the borders of those Valleys, then deserted also. Nor stayed they there, though they took time to breathe a little. For in the year 1599 (having provided themselves of 200 Corslets, and seventy Muskets) they broke out again; surprised and sacked the Town of Baldivia; forced Imperiale, after a whole years' siege to surrender without any conditions; and in the year 1604. took Osorno by famine. Of thirteen Cities which the Spaniards had possessed amongst them; they had taken nine; some of them since recovered, but the most demolished. As ill it thrived with them in Magellanica, where Pedro de Starmiento undertook the planting of two Colonies to command those Streits, An. 1584. The one he settled near the mouth of the Strait, which he called by the name of Nombre de Jesus, and left therein 150 of his men; the other he intended on the narrowest place of the Strait, to be called Cividad del Roy Philip, which he resolved to fortify, and plant with Ordnance. But winter coming on, he left there others of his men, promising to relieve them shortly with all things necessary. But such was his unhappy face, that after many shipwrecks and disappointments which befell unto him in the pursuit of his design; he was at last taken by the English, under the command of Sir Walter Raleigh, who was there in person: and his two Colonies for want of timely succours, either starved at home, or eaten by the Savages as they ranged the Country.   

OF PARAGVAY.  
PARAGVAY is bounded on the South with Magellanica; on the East with the main Atlantic; on the North with Brasil; on the West with some unknown Countries betwixt it and Chile. So called from the River Paraguay (one of the greatest of the world) which runneth thorough it: the River and the Province both by the Spaniards called Rio de la Plata, from the great store of Silver they expected from it.  
The Country (for so much as hath been discovered) is said to be of a fruitful soil; capable of Wheat and other fruits of the Fruits of Europe, which thrive here exceedingly; nor do the cattle increase less which were brought from Spain, both Kine and Horses multiplying in a wonderful manner. Well stored with Sugar Canes; and not unfurnished with Mines both of Brass and Iron; some veins of Gold and Silver, and great plenty of Amethystis. Of Stag's great plenty▪ and of Monkeys almost infinite numbers; not to say any thing of Lions, Tigers, and such hurtful Creatures, which a few would be thought too many. Of the People there is nothing said, but what hath been before observed of the other Savages.  
Chief Rivers of it, 1 De la Plata, whose course we have described already. 2 Rio de Buenos Airs so called from the chief Town by which it runneth. 3 Zarcaranna, which riseth in the Country of the Diaguitas, and falling into a Lake at the end of his course, doth from thence pass into the body of De la Plata. 4 Estero, which rising in the Valley of Chalcaqui, and passing thorough two great Lakes, meets with 5 the Bermeio, and both together fall into De la Plata near the Town of S. Foy. 6 Pilcomayo, which hath its Fountain near the Mines of Potosi, in the Province of Charcos; but his fall in the same River with those before. Then on the North side of that River, there is 7 that of S. Saviour, or S. Salvador, as the Spaniards call it; 8 Rio Nigro, or the Black River, of a longer course; but buried in the end, as the other is in the Deeps of La Plata. 9 Yquaan, and 10 several others, whose united streams make the great River Parana, the second River of esteem in all this Country: But swallowed in that of Plata. Besides these 11 Rio de S Martin, and 12 Rio Grande falling into the Ocean.  
It comprehendeth the three Provinces of 1 Rio de la Plata, 2 Tucaman, and 3 La Crux de Sierra. The rest not conquered by the Spaniard, of not well discovered, cannot be properly reduced under any Method.  
1. RIO DE LA PLATA, or the Province of De la Plata, lieth upon both sides of that River; ascending many Leagues up the water, but not extended much upon either side. The reason of the name, the quality of the soil and people, we have seen before.  
Chief Towns hereof 1 Buenos Ayres, or Neustra Sennora de Buenos Ayres, by others called Cividad de La Trinidad, seated on the Southern bank of the River of Plata, where built by Pedro de Mendoza, An. 1535. Deserted by the Inhabitants, and again new-Peopled by Cabesa de Vacca, An. 1542. It was afterwards again abandoned: and finally in the year 1582 re-edified and planted with a new Colony. Situate on the rising of a little hill, in the 34 Degree and 45 Minutes of Southern Latitude, and about 64 Leagues from the Mouth of the River; fortified with a mud Wall, and a little Castle, with some pieces of Ordnance; yet neither large, nor much frequented, containing but 200 Inhabitants. 2 S. Fe, or S Fidei, 50 Leagues up the River from Buenos Ayres, on the same side of the water near the confluence of it with the River Estero: of the same bigness as the other, but somewhat richer: the People here being given to clothing, which Manufacture they exchange with the Brasilians for Sugar, Rice & other necessary Commodities. 3 Neustra Sennora del Assumption, but commonly Assumption only, higher up the River, from the mouth whereof 300 Leagues distant: situate in the Latitude of 25. and almost in the midst betwixt Peru, and Brasil; well built and very well frequented, as the chief of the whole Country. Inhabited by three sorts of men, first natural Spaniards, of which here are accomp●ed 400 Families; 2. The Mestizoes, begotten by the Spaniard upon the Natives; and 3 Mulatos born of the Spaniards and the Negroes; of which two last here are thought to be many thousands. Not far off is a great Lake called Ytupuam, in the midst whereof an huge Rock, above 100 Fathom high above the water. 5 Cividad Real. by the Spaniards called also Ontiveros, by the Natives Guayra, 80 Leagues North from the Town of Assumption; situate on the banks of the River Parana, in a fruitful soil, but a sickly Air: for which cause, and the frequent insurrections of the Savages, but meanly peopled. 6 S. Anne, on the banks of the same River Parana; 7 S. Salvador, on a River of the same name. Besides these, there are up the River above Assumption, three noted Ports. 8 Puerto de Guaybiamo, 9 Puerto de la Candelaria, and 10 Puerto de Los Reyes, but whether Towns, or only Havens on that River for dispersing and bartering their Commodities, I am not able to say. The last save one memorable for the defeat of John de Ayolas and the death of 80 of his men by the hands of the Savages.  
2. TUCUMAN lieth on the West of Rio de la Plata, extending towards the confines of Chile, thorough which they make their way unto Mare del Zur, as thorough the Province of Rio de la Plata unto Mare del Nort: the exact bounds hereof to the North and South not yet resolved on.  
The Country, for so 〈◊〉 hereof as lieth towards Chile, well manured and fruitful; that towards Magellanica, barren, 〈◊〉, and not well discovered; no veins of Gold or Silver in it, though situate in a temperate and agreeable Air. Watered by the two Rivers of 1. Salado, so called from the brackishness and saltness of its and 2 Deal Estero, spoken of before, so named because sometimes it breaketh out of his banks. The Inhabitants now civilised both in manners and habit, in both which they conform to the garb of the Spaniards.  
Chief Towns hereof 1 S. Jago del Estero, on the banks of that River, by the natural Inhabitants called Varco: the principal of this small Province, honoured with a Bishops See, and the seat of the Governor; and distant about 180 Leagues from Buenos Airez. 2 S. Michael de Tucuman, seated at the foot of a rocky mountain, but near a very fruitful soil both for Corn and Pasturage, distant 28 Leagues from S. Jago. 3 Talavera or Nuestra Sennora de Talavera, but by the Natives called Esteco; situate on the River Salado before mentioned, in a fruitful soil, and inhabited by an industrious People, grown wealthy by their Manufactures of Cotton-woolls, which grow hereabouts in great abundance: with which they drive a great trade at the Mines of Potosi, from hence distant but 140 Leagues. 4 Corduba, in a convenient pi●ce for trade, as being equally distant from S. Juan ae la Frontera, in the Praefecture of Chile; and S. Foy, in Rio de la Plata: 50 Leagues from each; and seated in a Road from Peru unto Buenos Airs; much traveled consequently by those who go from Peru to Brasil or Spain. 5 New London, and 6 New Cordura, built at such time as Garsius de Mendoza, son of the Marquis of Cannete. and Vice Roy of Peru, was Governor of this Province: but both abandoned not long after. Besides these, 7 Morata, 8 Chocinoca, 9 Sococha, & 10 Calabinda; Townships belonging to the Natives.  
3. SCRUX DE SIERRA, is the name of a little Territory lying towards Peru, on the North of the River Guapay, and in the Country of the Chiquitoes and Cheriguanaes', two Tribes of the Savages: by some accounted to Peru, because under the Juridical Resort of Char●os, but so far distant from the nearest bounds of that Province (100 Spanish leagues at least) that I think fitter to account it to the Province of Paraguay, betwixt the banks of which River and that of Guapay it is wholly seated.  
The soil abundantly productive of Maize and Wines; plenty of most sorts of American fruits, which I can give no English name to; a kind of Palm, of whose trunk they make great store of meal, of good taste and nourishment. But neither soil nor Air agreeable to the fruits of Europe, which ripen slowly, and soon die. So destitute of Rivers, that the Inhabitants were fain to make use of Rain water, preserved in pits: the cause of no small wants, and of many great murders, the people either dying for thirst, or killing one another for some water to quench it.  
Chief Towns hereof, 1 Sancta Crux, situate at the foot of a great Mountain, whence the name of the Province; but situate in open field, enlarging itself into many Plains, and thirsty Valleys: neighboured by a Brook or Torrent breaking from the Rocks; which four leagues from the town is become a Pond, and plentifully doth supply the town with Fish. 2 Baranca, 60 leagues from the Mines of Potosi. 3 Tomina, 4. Lagunilla, and 5 Tarixa; three Forts erected for defence of this Province against the incursions and Alarms of the Cherignanaes'. 6 Neyva Ri●ja, once a Colony of the Spaniards, but sacked and dispeopled by the Cherignanaes', when the Count of Neyva was Viceroy of Peru: at what time Nuflo de Chaves, who in the year 1548. first discovered those parts, was treacherously slain by one of the Savages.  
The principal Nations of this Country, when first known to the Spaniards, were the Quirandies, Timbues, and Carcares, the Chanes, Chiminei, Guaranyes, the Guayacurves, Cacoves, Guaxarapi, etc. on both sides of the River of Plata: the Tucumanes, Juries, and Diagnitas, in the Cantred of Tucuman; more Northward, where the Spaniards have as yet no hold, the Chunesses, Xaquesses, Xacoaes, and the Xarayes, great and powerful Nations, hitherto unconquered. The first discovery of this Country ascribed to John Dias de Solis, a Spanish Adventurer; who in the year 1515. passing up the River to the Latitude of 34 Degrees, and 40 minutes; and unadvisedly landing with too small a power, was there unfortunately slain. The design after prosecuted by Sebastian Cabot, An 1526. who sailed against the stream as high as the River Parana: at the reception of which, the great River called till then by the name of Paraguay, begins to be called De la Plata. Here built he the Fortress called Fort Cabot; and 30 leagues more up the River, that called S. Anne, (both long since ruined) where Diego Garcias a Portugal found him, in the year next following. In the year 1535. the business was resumed by Pedro de Mendoza, who built the Town of Buenos Ayres; and sent John de Aiolas to discover Northwards; of whose unhappy end we have heard before: Not fully settled till the year 1540 when Alvares Nonnez, commonly called Cabesa de Vacca, made a more full discovery of it, and planted Colonies of Spaniards in convenient places. Nothing since done for the further planting of the Country, though some places have been marked out for new Plantations; here being little Gold and Silver, and consequently not much temptation to draw on the Spaniards to the work.   

OF BRASIL.  
BRASIL is bounded on the East with Mare del Noort, or the main Atlantic; on the West with some undiscovered Countries, lying betwixt it and the Andes; on the North with Guiana from which parted by the great River Maragnon; and on the South with Paraguay, or the Province of Rio de la Plata. The reason of the name I find not, except it came from the abundance of that wood called Brasil wood, which was found amongst them; as the famous Isle of Cyprus from its plenty of Cypresses.  
It reacheth from the 29. to the 39 Degree of Southern Latitude; or measuring it by miles, it is said to be 1500 miles from North to South, and 500 miles in breadth from the Sea to the Andes: which must be understood with reference to the whole extent of it; for otherwise all that which is possessed by the Portugals under the name of Brasil is so short of taking up all the breadth hereof, that they possess nothing but the Sea coasts, and some few Leagues (comparatively) within the land, the greatest part of it being so far from being conquered, that it hath not hitherto been discovered.  
The Country full of Mountains, Rivers, and Forests, diversified into Hills and Plains always pleasant and green. The Air for the most part sound and wholesome, by rea on of the fresh winds which do reign amongst them; there being all along the Coasts certain quick winds rising from the South, about two hours before Noon, which do much benefit the Inhabitants: yet in regard it is somewhat moust, it is hold to be more agreeable to old men then to young. The soil in most parts very fruitful, were it not clo●ed with too much rain; but howsoever liberally provided of Sugar c●nes (no one Country more) 〈◊〉 of which they have their Ingenios' (as they call them) or Sugar houses in most parts of the Country▪ in which they entertain many thousand slaves, brought hither yearly from Guinea and Congo, and other maritime parts of afric. A trade in which the Portugals are much delighted, and I cannot blame them; there being few years in each of which they bring not out of Brasil to Portugal 150000 〈◊〉 of Sugar, every Arrobe containing 25 Bushels of our English measure. Here is also infinite quantities of that red wood used in dying Cloth, which we commonly call Brasil wood; (but whether the wood took that name from the Country, or the Country rather from the wood, I determine not) the trees whereof are of that incredible greatness, that whole families live on an Arm of one of them, every tree being as populous as the most of our villages. In other Commodities common to them with the other Americans, we need not give particular ●●stance.  
Amongst the Rarities hereof, are reckoned 1 the Plant called Copiba, the bark of which being cut doth send out a Balm. the sovereign verve whereof is to well known to the very Beasts▪ that being but by venomous serpents, they re●ort unto it for their cure. 2 The Herb called Sentida or Viva, which toughly touched well close the leaves and not open them again till the man that had offended 〈◊〉 be gone out of sight. 3. A kind of Wheat in the Valley near unto S. Sebastian, which is continually 〈◊〉, and always ripe; or never wholly ●pe, because always growing: for when one Ear doth g●an, another doth bloom; when one is ripe and yellow, another is green. 4 The Oxesish, with eye● and eyelids, two arms a cubit long, and at each an hand with five fingers and nails, as in a man; under the arms two tears, inwards, like a Cow, in every female. 5 A Creature found of late about the Bay of All Saints, which had the face of an Ape, the feet of a Lion, and all the rest of a man; of such a terrible aspect, that the Soldier who shot him fell down dead; but this I rather look on as an aberration of Nature than a rarity in her. 6 Beasts of such strange shapes, and such several kinds, that it may be said of Brasil, as once of afric, Semper aliquid apportat novi; every day some new object of Admiration.  
The people here are endowed with a pretty understanding: as may seem by him, who tartly blamed the covetousness of the Spanish, for coming from the other end of the world to dig for Go●d; and holding up a wedge of Gold, cried out, Behold the God of the Christians! But in most places they are barbarous, the men and women go stark naked, and on high festival days hang Jewels in their lips: these 〈◊〉; days are when a company of good neighbours come together to be merry, over the roasted body of a 〈◊〉 whom they cut in collops, called Boucon, and eat with great greediness, and as much delectation. They have two 〈◊〉 qualities, as being mindful of injuries, and forgetful of benefits. The Men cruel without measure; and the Women infinitely lascivious. They cannot pronounce the Letters L. F. R. The reason of which one being demanded, made answer; because they had amongst them neither Law, Faith, no● Rulers. They are able Swimmers, as well Women as Men; and will stay under water an hour together. Women in Travel are here delivered without any great pain, and presently go about their business be longing to good housewives. The goodman (according to the fashion of one kinder sorts of Husbands in England, who are said to breed their wife's children) being sick in their stead, and keeping their ●ed; so far that he hath ●rothes made him, is visited by his 〈◊〉 or Neighbours, and hath Junkets sent to comfort him. And amongst these there are some Rarities, if not Monstrosities in Nature: it being said of those which live towards the Andes, that they are hairy all over like Beasts, such as Orson is feigned to have been in the old Romance; and probably so engendered also; that the Guaymares disbowell women with child, and roast the children; and finally that the savage Nation of Camucuiara have their Paps almost down unto their knees, which they tie about their waste when they run, or go faster than ordinary.  
Rivers of note I find not any till I come to Maragnon, though that a Boundary rather betwixt this and Guiana, then proper unto this alone. If any chance to come in our way, as we cross the Country, we shall not pass them over without some remembrance. And so proceed we to the division of the Country, not into Provinces or Nations, as in other Places, but into Praefectures, or Captainships as the Portugals call them. Of which there are 13 in all, which we shall severally touch on as we trace the coast, from the Province of Rio de la Plata, unto that of Guiana; that is to say,  
1. The Captainship of S. VINCENT bordering on Rio de la Plata, inhabited by the most civil People of all Brasil. Chief Towns whereof 1 Santos, at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea, capable of good Ships of burden, but distant from the Main three Leagues. A Town of no more than 120 houses, yet the best of this Praefecture; beautified with a Parish Church, and two Convents of Friars. Taken and held two months by Sir Tho: Cavendish, An. 1591. since that environed with a Wall, and fortified with two Castles. 2 S. Vincents better built, but not so well fitted with an Haven; of about 70 houses, and 100 Inhabitants. 3 Itange, and 4 Cananea, two open Burroughs, but capable of lesser Vessels. 5 S. Paul, upon a little Mountain, at the foot whereof run two pleasant Rivers, which fall not far off into the River of Iniambis. A Town of about 100 houses, one Church, two Convents, and a College of Jesuits; neighboured by Mines of Gold found in the Mountains called Pernabiacaba. 6 S. filips a small Town on the banks of Iniambis, which there begins to enlarge itself, and passing thence falleth at the last in the River Parana, one of the greatest Tributaries to Rio de la Plata.  
2. Of RIO DE JANEIRO, or the River of January, so called because entered into that month by John Diaz de Solis, Ana 1515. neglected by the Portugals, it was seized on by the French under the conduct of Villegagnone, employed herein by Admiral Chastillon, a great friend of the Huguenots, to whom it was intended for a place of Refuge (as New-England afterwards for the like) but within three years after their first coming hither (An. 1558) regained by the Portugals, and the French put unto the sword. Places of most consideration in it, 1 Collignia, the Fort and Colony of the French, so named in honour of Gaspar Colligni (commonly called Chastillon) by whose encouragement it was founded. Situate on the Bay of the River Janeiro, which the French called Ganabara. 2 S. Sebastian's, built at the mouth of the same bay by the Portugals, after they had expelled the French, and fortified with four strong Bulwarks. 3 Angra des Reyes, distant twelve Leagues Westward from the Mouth of the Bay; not long since made a Portugal Colony. Besides these, there are two great Burroughs of the natural Brasilians, in which are said to be above 2000 Inhabitants.  
3. Of the HOLY GHOST (del Spiritu Santo) one of the most fertile Provinces of all Brasil; well stored with Cotton-wool, and watered with the River Parayba, large and full of Fish. The only Town of note in it, is Spiritu Santo, inhabited by about 200 Portugals. The chief buildings of it, a Church dedicated to S. Francis, a Monstery of Benedictines, and a College of Jesuits; the chief conveniency, a safe and commodious Haven, capable of the greatest Vessels.  
4. Of PORTO SEGURO, the secure Haven, so called by Capralis who first discovered it, when being tossed at sea by a terrible tempest, he had here refreshed himself. Chief Towns hereof 1. Porto Seguro, built on the top of a white Cliff, which commands the Haven; of more Antiquity than Fame; of more same then bigness; as not containing fully 200 Families. 2 Santa Crux, three Leagues from the other; a poor Town, with as poor an Harbour: the Patrimony and Inheritance of the Dukes of Avera in the Realm of Portugal. 3 Santo Amaro, or S. Omers, once of great note for making Sugars; for which use here were five Ingenios', o● Sugar Engines; deserted by the Portugals for fear of the Savages, against whom they had not power enough to make good the place; and the Sugars destroyed of purpose, that they might not come into the hands of the barbarous People.  
5 Of DES ILHEOS, or of the Isles, so named from certain Lands lying against the Bay on which the principal Town is seated, called also I●heos, or the Island (with like Analogy as a Town of good note in Flanders, hath the name of Insula, or Lisle) The town consisting of about 150 or 200 Families, situate on a little River, but neighboured by a great Lake of 12 Leagues in compass (out of which that River doth arise) full of a great but wholesome Fish, which they call Monatos, some of which are affirmed to weigh eight and twenty pounds. This Colony, much endangered by the Guaymuris, a Race of Savages more Savage than any of their Fellows: who being driven out of their own Country fell into this Praefecture, which they had utterly destroyed, if some of S. George's Relics, as the Jesuits tell us (but I bind no man to believe it) sent by their General from Rome, An. 1581. had not stayed their fury, and given the Portugals the better.  
6. Of TODOS LOS SANTOS, or All Saints, so called from a large Bay of that name, upon which it lieth; in breadth two Leagues and an half, 18 Fathoms deep, and full of many little Lands, but flourishing and pleasant, and well stored with Cotton Wool. A Bay in which are many safe Stations and Roads for shipping, and therefore of great use and consequence in those furious seas. Memorable for the hardy Enterprise of Peter Heynes, a Dutch man, Admiral of the Navy of the United Provinces; who in the year 1627. seized on a Fleet of Spaniards, consisting of 26 Sail of ships (four of them being Men of War) all lying under the protection of the Forts and Castles built for the safety of that Bay. For thrusting in amongst them with his own ship only (the rest not being able to follow) he so laid about him, that having sunk the Vice Admiral, he took all the rest, conditioning only for their lives: notwithstanding all the shot which was made against him from the Ships and Castles, and 42 Pieces of Ordnance planted on the shore. Chief Towns hereof 1 S. Salvador, built on a little hill, on the North side of the Bay, by Thomas de Sousa; adorned with many Churches, and Religious houses; and fortified (besides the wall) with three strong Castles, the one called S. Antony, the other S. Philip, and the third Tapesipe. Yet not so strong by reason of some hills adjoining which command the Town, but that it was taken by the Hollanders, An. 1624. recovered by the Spaniards the next year after, and since lost again. 2 Paripe more within the Land, four Leagues from S. Saviour's. 3 Seregippe deal Rey, a small Town and seated on as small a River, but amongst many rich Pastures, and some veins of silver.  
7. Of FERNAMBUCK, one of the richest Praefectures for Tobacco, Sugar, and the great quantity of Brasil-Wood, which is brought hence yearly for the Dyer's, in all this Country; but destitute of Corn, and most other necessaries, with which supplied from the Canaries, and sometimes from Portugal. Chief Towns hereof, 1 Olinda, the largest and best peopled of all Brasil: containing above 2000 persons, not reckoning in the Churchmen, nor taking she great number of slaves which they keep for their Sugar-Works into the Accempt: for whose use they have here eight Parochial Churches, five Religious houses, and some Hospitals. Situate near the Sea side, but on so uneven a piece of ground, as makes it not capable of a Regular fortification; the Haven being little, and not very commodious, but defended at the entrance by a well built Castle; and that well planted with Brass pieces. Which not withstanding, in the year 1595 the Castle and the Suburbs along the Port (wherein they used to stow all their chief Commodities) were took by Capt. James Lancaster, and some few of the English, who having tarried in the Haven above a month, brought home with him eight of his own ships, four Frenchmen, and three Hollanders which came in by chance; all laden with the choicest Merchandise of Brasil and India. 2 Amatta de Brasil, ten miles from Olinda, the Inhabitants whereof live by selling the Brasil wood. 3 S. Laurenzo, a well frequented Village, but as yet unwalled. 4. Poincur, upon a River so named. 5 Antonio de Cabo, near the Cape of S. Augustine's; both of good note for the great quantity of Sugars which are made in each. 6 Garasu, about five Leagues from Olinda, inhabited for the most part by poor and Mechanical persons, till the year 1632. when taken by the Hollander, and planted with a people of higher quality. This Praefecture, belonging formerly to the Earls of Albuquerque (a great house in Spain) is now wholly in the hands of the States of the Provinces united: the town of Olinda being took by them in the year 1629. the Port and all the Avenues unto it so strongly fortified, that they have hitherto enjoyed it.  
8. Of TAMARACA, so called from an Island of that name, distant about five miles from Olinda; of no great note but for the Haven, and an impregnable Castle on the top of an hill for defence thereof. Which when the Hollanders could not take, they built a strong Bulwark at the mouth of the port, and so blocked it up, that it hath since been of no use to the Spaniard. This the least Praefecture in Brasil, but withal the ancientest; extended three Leagues only in length, and but two in breadth: the Patrimony of the Earls of Monsanto in Portugal, who received hence yearly, when entire, thirty thousand Ducats. But his Rents much diminished, if not quite inverted, since the loss of the Haven.  
9 Of PARAIBA, so called from a River of that name (but by the Spaniard called Domingo) of most note herein. On the banks whereof standeth Paraiba, the chief Town of it, at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea, about three Leagues from the Main, but capable of pretty good ships to the very Town. The Town inhabited not long since by 500 Portugals, besides Slaves and Negroes. Not walled, till they began to stand in fear of the Hollanders, on the loss of Olinda, but more secured by a strong Castle on the Promontory called Cabo Delo, which the Hollanders have in vain attempted, then by any works within the Land. A Castle which acknowledgeth the French for the Founders of it, who for a while were possessed of this Tract, and gave name to an adjoining Haven called Port Francois; but outed by the Portugal, Anno 1584. who have since held their footing in it, but with fear of the Hollanders, especially since their taking of a little Island lying over against them, called the Isle of Noronha.  
10. Of RIO GRANDE, so called from the River Poteingi (as the Natives term it) which the Portugals call Rio Grande, or the great River, not made a Praefecture till of late. For lying open, as it were, to the next Pretender, some of the French began to fix here, Anno 1597. But the King of Spain not willing to have any such neighbour, commanded the Captain of Paraiba, to drive them thence; which was done accordingly. But then the Savages beginning to rise up in Arms, the Captain of Paraiba was fain to seek aid from him of Fernambuck; by whose help having slain five thousand, and took three thousand of them, the rest became Vassals to the Portugals: who built here an impregnable Castle (which is all the footing they have in it) well manned and furnished with Ammunition and all other necessaries; very few Portugals, except those of the Garrison, being yet come over.  
11. Of SIARA, a late Praefecture also, in which the Portugals have no more than a Castle, with a dozen houses or thereabouts, besides that of the Governor adjoining to it. So named from an Haven called Siara, but of no great note, and capable but of little Vessels. Of some trade in regard of the Crystal, cotton-wool, and some precious stones, found in the Country hereabouts: and certainly would be of greater, if once the Portugals would be active and pursue the Conquest; here being great plenty of Sugar Canes, but no works to make it.  
12. Of MARAGNON, an Island lying in the mouth of the great River so called, in the furthest parts of Brasil Northwards, and many Leagues distant from Siara the last of their Praefectures; the Country intervening not yet discovered, or otherwise made known unto us then by the names of the Ports and Promontories found upon the Coast. An Island of a fruitful soil, if pains and husbandry were not wanting: affording naturally Maize, and a Root called Maniot, both which the Savages use for bread; good store of Cotton-wools, Saffron, Brasil-wood, and the best Tobacco; and in some places Balm and Amber. Watered with many fresh Rivers, and pleasant Springs: well-wooded both for Timber and Fuel: and in a word, blessed with so temperate an Aise (though so near the Aequator) that no place can be more commodious for the life of man. The People strong of body, healthy and long lived without any boldness; industrious in their Feather-works and Manufactures of Cotton; the Women curious in ordering their hair, fruitful in Child bearing, and that till so years old and sometimes more. Both Sexes naked till their Marriage; and then apparelled only from the waist to their knees.  
The Villages hereof possessed by the Natives, consisted but of four great Houses; each of them two or three hundred foot in length, and twenty or thirty foot in breadth; so placed as they resembled a Quadrangular Cloister: And in each House so many Households, that commonly each of their Villages or Taves (for so they called them) contained three hundred persons, and some twice that number: Of these were twenty seven in all, whose names I hold impertinent to be mustered here: The total estimate of the People when the French came thither, amounting to 12000 Souls. For the French Trading in this Island, and carrying themselves courteously amongst the Natives, found them not unwilling to admit a Colony of that Nation, if sent over to them: by whose aid they might free themselves from all other Pretenders, and be instructed in the Gospel. Accordingly a Colony, and four Capuchin Friars, are sent over to them Anno 1612. Some Savages gained unto the Faith, and a strong Castle called S. Lewis commodiously built, and planted with 22 pieces of Ordnance; the effect of that Voyage. But long they had not rested there when dis-seized by the Portugals, sent thither under the Conduct of Hierome de Albuquerque, Anno 1614 Who to the Castle of S. Lewis which the French had built, added those of S. Mary, and S. Francis, planted two Villages in the Island by the names of S. Andrew, and S. Jago, and ever since have held it without molestation.  
13. Of PARA, the most Northern Praefecture of Brasil, towards Guiana; so called from the River of Para (supposed to be a branch of the River of Amazons) which runneth thorough it. The River at the mouth of it, two miles in breadth, and in the middle of the Channel fifteen Fathoms deep: on the Banks whereof (but on an higher ground than the rest) the Portugals have built the Castle of Para, in form Quadrangular, and well walled except towards the River: the Country thereabouts inhabited by 300 Portugueze, besides the Garrison.  
Now for the Fortunes of the whole, it never did acknowledge any one Supreme. Divided into many Tribes, and each Tribe governed by their Chiefs, as in other Countries. These Tribes so many, and the Muster of their names so useless, that I now forbear it. In this estate they lived when discovered first; but by whom first discovered, will not be agreed on. The Spaniards, to get some colour of a Title for the Crown of Castille, ascribe it to John Pinsone, and Diego de Lepe, two of their own Country; who as they say, had Landed on it in the year 1500, before the coming of Capralis, though the same year also. The Portugals attribute the Discovery of it to Pedro Alvarez de Caprali, sent by their King Emanuel to the East-Indies: who being driven over hither from the Coast of Guinea, took possession of it, and as a Monument thereof, advanced a Cross, giving the name of Sanctae Crucis, or the Holy Cross, to this new Discovery. That name changed afterwards to Brasil from the abundance of that Wood (as it is conceived) which was found amongst them. Notice hereof being given to the Court of Portugal, Americus Vespucius a Noble Flerentine, and after him John de Empoli, another of that Nation in the year 1503. were by Emmanuel employed in a further Discovery. Who speeding fortunately in it, the Portugals did accordingly send over some Plantations thither. But a great controversy growing betwixt them and the Spaniard, to whether of the two it of right belonged: the Spaniard was content to yield it to the Crown of Portugal, though by the Bull or Edict of Pope Alexander the sixth (by whom the whole undiscovered World was divided betwixt those two Kings) it seemed to fall within the Grant to the Crown of Castille. Enjoyed by this Emmanuel, and the Kings succeeding till the death of Sebastian (which Sebastian the Jesuits look on as the Founder of all their Colleges in this Country) and by the Spaniards since the death of Henry (whose reign continued but a year) though in the name and right of the Crown of Portugal; that Nation being so prudently jealous of their interess in it, that they would suffer any of the Subjects of Spain to grow great amongst them. By them possessed entirely without any Rivals (I mean for so much of the Country as they had subdued) till of late years the Hollanders put in for a part; and got the Praefectures of Fornanback, and Todos Los Sanctos (or the Bay) by the Right of War. The rest with all the other Members of the Crown of Portugal, in the late Revolt of that Nation from the King of Spain, submitting unto John the 4th, of the house of Bragance, whom the Portugueze had made their King, Anno 1639.   

OF GVIANA.  
GVIANA is bounded on the East with the Main Atlantic; on the West with the Mountains of Peru, or rather some undiscovered Countries interposed betwixt them; on the North with the River Orenoque, and on the South with that of the Amazons. The reason of the name I find not, unless it be so called from the River Wia, of which more anon.  
It is situate on both sides of the Line, extended from the fourth Degree of Southern, to the eighth of the Northern Latitude. The Air, notwithstanding this situation under the Aequator, affirmed to be temperate, the Eastern winds (which they call the Brizes) constantly blowing about Noon, and mitigating the extreme hears thereof by their cooler blasts. The Country towards the Sea side flat and level, the inland parts more mountainous and swelled with hills: in all places so adorned with Nature's Tapestry, the boughs and branches of the Trees never unclothed or left naked, (fruit either ripe or green growing still upon them) that no Country in the world could be better qualified. The particular Commodities of it we shall see anon, when the particular parts hereof come into Discourse.  
Of the People it is said in general, that they have amongst them no settled Government; and though they acknowledge some superiority in the Chiefs of their Tribes, yet it is only voluntary, as long and as little as they please. Adultery and Murder, which are only punishable, not otherwise expiated but by the death of the Offender. The richer sort have two or three Wives, and sometimes more; the poor but one, and hardly able to keep here they that have more, and they who have but one, alike jealous of them; and if they take them in Adultery, without any further ceremony or formalities of Law, they beat out their brains. Their wives, especially the elder, they use for Servants; and he which hath most such, is the greatest man. Without Religion, or any notion of a Godhead; not so far onwards on the way to the worship of the true God, as to be Idolaters: for though Idolatry be mistaken in the proper Object, it supposeth a Deity; and they who have this Principle, That there is a God, have learned one, and not the least of the points of their Catechism. Their Accounts amongst themselves they keep with a bundle of sticks; which they diminish or increase according to the times of their contract. Their Funerals they solemnize with a Feast, but with such diversity in the deportment of both Sexes, that whiles the Women howl extremely, the Men perform the Obsequies with singing and excessive drinking; the one as improper for a Feast, as the other for a Funeral.  
Rivers of most note in it, besides 1 Orenoque. & 2 the River of Amazons, and those rather boundaries betwixt this and the neighbouring Provinces, then proper unto th●● alone. 3 Arrawari, 4 Conawini, 5 Caspurough, or Cassipure, all falling into the same main Atlantic, betwixt the River of Amazons and Wiapoco: the last arising out of the Lake of the Arachosi half a mile broad at the mouth or influx into the Sea, and but five spans deep. 6 Wiapoco, of which more hereafter. 7 Wia, 8 Cajane. 9 Marwine, 10 Essequebe, a River of twenty day's journey long, betwixt Wiapoco and the River of Orenoque or Raliana.  
The whole divided commonly into these four parts, 1 Rio de las amazons, or the River of Amazons, 2 Wiapoco or Guiana specially so called, 3 Orenoque, and 4 the Isles of Guiana.  
1. RIO DELAS amazons, or the River of Amazons, containeth that part of this Country which lieth along the tract of that famous River. The soil in some places dry and barren, in others fertile and productive of the choicest fruits. Full of large Woods, and in those Woods most sort of Trees which are to be found in America: One amongst others of most note, (and perhaps peculiar to Guiana) which they call the Totock; a tree of great bulk, and as great a fruit; this last as big as a man's head, and so hard withal, that when the fruit grows ripe and ready to fall, the people dare not go into the woods without an helmet or some such shelter over their heads, for fear of beating out their brains. The Kernels of it, for the most part ten or twelve in number, have the taste of Almonds, and are said to be provocative in point of Venery. Of which the Savages have this Byword, Pigue seek in Saccowe p●ngean Tot●●ke; that is to say, Eat Totock, if thou wouldst be potent in the Acts of Venus. Here are also Sugarcanes in some places; and the Plant called Pita, the taste whereof is said to be like Strawberries, Claret-wine, and Sugar.  
The principal Inhabitants of this part of the Country, the Yaos, Cockettuway, Patt●cui, Tockianes, Tomoes'. and Wackehanes dwelling on the Continent; the Maraons', and Arowians possessed of the Lands. Towns of note I have met with none amongst them; though every house (most of them 150 foot in length, 20 in breadth, and entertaining at the least an hundred persons) might pass sufficiently for a Village. Yet they are safer housed then so, for otherwise their houses would afford them but little comfort in the overflowings of the River, which drown all the Country: and therefore they betake themselves to the tops of trees, and there remain, like Birds, with their several families, till the waters be drawn in again. and the earth become more comfortable for habitation. Yet I find some of these their dwellings called by proper names, as 1 Matarem, 2 Roakery, 3 Anarcaprock, 4 Haaman, 5 Womians, and 6 Co●●mymne. But I find nothing but their names, and enough of that.  
The first Discoverer of this River and the parts adjoining, was Orellana the Lieutenant of Gonsales Piz●rro, whom his brother Francisco Pizarro then Viceroy of Peru had made the Governor of Quito. Moved with the noise of some rich Countries beyond the Andes, he raised sufficient forces, and passed over those Mountains; where finding want of all things for the life of man, they made a Boat, and 〈◊〉 Orellana to bring in provisions. But the River which he chanced into, was so swift of course, that he was not able to go back; and therefore of necessity to obey his fortune in following the course of that strong water. Passing along by divers desolate and unpeopled places, he came at last into a Country planted and inhabited; where he first heard of the Amazons (by those Savages called Comapuyaras) of whom he was bidden to beware as a dangerous people: And in the end having spent his time in passing down this River from the beginning of January to the end of August 1540 he came at last into the Sea; and getting into the isle of Cubana, sailed into Spain: the course of his voyage down the water he estimated at 180 leagues (or 5400 English miles) but found no Amazons in his passage, as himself affirmed; only some masculine women showed themselves intermixed with the men, to oppose his landing; and in some places he found men with long hair like women; either of which might make these parts believed to be held by Amazons. But to proceed, Arriving at the Court of Spain, he got Commission for the conquest of the Countries by him discovered; and in the year 1549. he betook himself unto the service. But though he found the mouth of the River. one of them at least, he could never hit upon the Channel which brought him down, though attempted often. Which ill success, with the consideration of his loss both in fame and fortunes, brought him to his grave; having got nothing but the honour of the first discovery, and the leaving of his name to that famous River, since called Orellana. The enterprise pursued, but with like success, by one Pedro de Orsna, An. 1560. after which the Spaniards gave it over. And though the English and the Hollanders have endeavoured an exact discovery, and severally begun some Plantations in it, yet they proved as unfortunate as the others; their Quarters being beaten up by the neighbouring Portugals, before they were sufficiently fortified to make any resistance.  
2. WIAPOCO, or GVIANA especially so called, taketh up the middle of this Country, on both sides of the River of Wiapoco, whence it hath its name. A River of a long course, but not passable up the stream above 16 miles, by reason of a Cataract, or great fall from the higher ground: in breadth betwixt that Cataract and the Aestuarium, about the tenth part of a mile; at the Aestuarium or influx a whole mile at least, and there about two fathoms deep.  
The Country on both sides of this River very rich and fertile; so natural for Tobacco, that it groweth to nine handfuls long. Sugarcanes grow here naturally without any planting, and on the shrubs great store of Cotton, and the die by some called Orellana. Plenty of Venison in their Woods, and of Fish in their Rivers; their fields well stored with Beasts, which themselves call Moyres, in shape and use resembling Kine, but without any horns. The people generally of a modest and ingenious countenance; Naked, but would wear clothes if they had them, or knew how to make them. Their bread is made of a Plant called Cassavi; of which also being dried and chewed, and then strained thorough a wicker-vessel, they make a kind of drink in colour like new Ale, but not so well tasted, and of less continuance. The greatest part of their food is Fish, which they intoxicate with a strong-sented wood, and so take them up as they l●e floating on the top of the water. Much troubled with a worm like a Flea, (by the Spaniards called Nignas) which get under the nails of their Toes, and multiply there to infinite numbers, and the no less torture of the Patient, without speedy prevention: No better remedy found out, then to pour Wax melting hot on the place affected; which being pulled off when 'tis cold draws the Vermin with it, sometimes 800 at a pull. The women of such easy child birth, that they are delivered without help, and presently bring the child to his father (for they have so much natural modesty as to withdraw from company upon that occasion) who washeth it with water, and painteth it with several colours, and so returneth it to the mother.  
Rivers of note here are very many; no Country under Heaven being better watered, nor fuller of more pleasant and goodly streams. The names of some of them on both sides of the Wiapoco we have had before: the chief of which I take to be Wia, affirmed to be of a long course, a goodly River all the way, and at the mouth thereof to be large and broad; which passing thorough the heart of the Country in the 4 Degree & 40 minutes of Northern Latitude, may possibly occasion both the whole, and this part more specially to be called Wiana, & by the Dutch who cannot pronounce the double W, Guyana. Certain I am that by the name of Wiana I have found it written in approved Authors. But what need further search be made after lesser Rivers, (which will offer themselves to us of their own accord) when we have a Lake to pass over like a Sea for bigness, (magnum, famosum, & vastum instar maris, as my Author hath it) by the Yaos or Jaos called Raponowinin, by the Caribes (the old Inhabitants of this Country) Parimen? Situate about a day's journey from the River Essequebo: and neighboured by the great and famous City Manoa, which the Spaniards call El Dorado (or the Golden City) from the abundance of Gold, in coin, plate, armour, and other furniture, which was said to be in it. The greatest City, as some say, not only of America, but of all the world. For Diego de Ordas, one of the Companions of Cortes in his Mexican wars, and by him condemned for a mutiny, put into a Boat alone without any victual, and so cast off to seek his fortune; affirmed at his return, that being taken by some of the Guianians, and by them carried to their King then residing at Manoa, he entered the City at high-noon, traveled all the rest of that day, and the next also until night, before he came to the King's Palace; but then he faith that he was led blindfold all the way: And therefore possibly enough this City might be no such miracle as the story makes it; Don Diego being either abused by the reports of the Savages, or willing to abuse the world with such empty fictions. For though the Spaniards and the English have severally sought, and that with incredible diligence to find out this City, yet none of them have hitherto had the fortune to fall upon it. So that I fear it may be said in the Poet's language, 

— Et quod non invenis usquam,  
Esse putes nusquam— i. e.   

That Which is nowhere to be found,  
Think not to be above the ground.    
Nor is there much more credit to be given unto his Relations of the great Court kept here by one of the Ingas; who being forsaken, one of the younger Brethren of Atabaliba the last King of Peru, at the conquest of that Kingdom with many thousands of his Followers came into this Country, and subduing the Caribes, erected here a second Peruvian Monarchy. For besides that Atabaliba had no brethren but Guascar and Mango who both died in Peru, how improbable must it needs appear, that this Guianian King, knowing so well the thirst of the Spaniards after Gold, would either suffer him to return and disclose the secrets of his State; or send him away loaded with Gold, as 'tis said he did? Who showeth his Treasure to a Thief, doth deserve to lose it. And therefore letting pass these dreams of an El Dorado, let us descend to places of less Magnificence, but of greater reality. Amongst which I reckon 1 Caripo, most memorable for a Colony of English there planted by Capt. Robert Harcourt, An. 1608. situate on the banks of the Wiacopo, near the mouth thereof, on the advantage of a Rock, and that Rock so difficult of access, that they feared no danger from an Enemy. The Air so found and answerable to the constitution of an English body, that of 30 which were left there for three years together, there died but six, and those six rather by misfortune and some cross accident, then by any diseases. 2 Gomeribo, on the top of an hill near the mouth of the Bay of Wiacopo, possessed a while by some Hollanders, but soon deferred. 3 Moyemon a Village of the Paragoti, on the banks of the River Marwinen. 4 Crewinay, on the other side of the same River, possessed by the Caribes: the King of the first (for each Tribe had its several Princes) being named Maperitaka, affirmed to be a virtuous man, and kind to strangers; of the later, Minapa. 5 Tanparamun●n, about an hundred Leagues from the mouth of that River. And 6 Moreshego, four day's journey from the other; both possessed by the Caribes. The King, or Cacique of those last, at Cap. Harcourts' being there (of which time we speak) named Areminta; affirmed to have a skin like a piece of Buff.  
The principal Families of this part, besides the Yaos, or Jagos, and the Maraons' spoken of before, who possess almost all the Seacoasts of this Country, are said to be Arwaccae, the Sapayoy, the Mayos, and the Aracou●i; of different Languages, and Customs, though near neighbours unto one another. Originally inhabitants of the Island of Trinidado, and the River of Orenoque: whence driven by the Spaniards they came into this Tract, and beating the old Inhabitants whom they call by the common name or Cariber, higher into the Country, possessed themselves of the Sea shores, and the parts adjoyning● each Tribe or Family being governed by its several Chief, as before was intimated. The Nether●landers for a time had some footing in it, but they quickly left it; endeavouring nothing more in the ●●me of their short stay amongst them, then to make the People dis-affected to the English; of whose pretensions to these parts, and designs to plant them they had good Intelligence. And so much was confessed by some of the Natives, when they had found by good experience and acquaintance, how much the English were abused in those misreports. Afterwards in the year 1604. Captain Charles Leigh set Sail from Woolwich on the Thames, and in May fell upon the River of Wiapoco, where he was kindly entertained, gratified with an House and Garden, and his Aid craved against the Caribes and their other Enemies. He took possession of the Country in the name of King James and the Crown of England; and caused the River of Wiapoco to be called (by his own name) Caroleigh: but that name ended with his life, and that shortly after, he dying in his return on shipboard. The design went forwards notwithstanding, and in the year 1608 an English Colony is brought hither by Captain Harcourt, a new possession taken in the name of King James, the Colony planted at Carpo before mentioned; the Country further searched into by that Noble Gentleman, then ever formerly by any, or by many since. After three years, the Colony wanting fit supply, returned home again; the Plantation never since pursued, though by some projected. Yet so far are these Savages beholding to the English Nation, that as they did defend them at their being there against the Caribes, so at their going off they taught them the use of Arms, and put them into a posture of defence; enabling them thereby to preserve themselves against all their Enemies.  
3. ORENOQUE, or the Province of the River of Orenoque comprehendeth the North parts of Guyana, lying upon and toward, the Banks of that famous River of which we have already spoken. The Country very rich and pleasant, consisting of large Plains, many miles in compass, adorned with the embroidery of Flowers, and unknown Plants, exceeding pleasant to the eye; and sometimes interlaced with hills, reported to be furnished with rich Mines of Gold and Silver. The Rivers liberally stored with Fish, and the Forests both with Beasts and Fowls. No Country in America, not Peru itself, said to be comparable to it for abundance of Treasure. Some also add a whole Mountain of Crystal to be seen afar off from Winecaporo: and tell us (but in general terms) of more goodly Cities then elsewhere in all Peruana, but neither the Spaniards nor the English could ever see them, though they diligently searched into most parts of this Country.  
The People, as of several Nations, so of several Natures: The Capuri, and Macureos, for the most part Carpenters, live by making Cunoas' or Boats, which they fell into Guiana for Gold, and to Trinadado for Tobacco, in the immoderate taking whereof they exceed all Nations. When a Cacique or Commander dyeth, they make great lamentation; and after the flesh is putrified and fallen from the bones, they take up the Skeleton, and hang it up in the house where he dwelled, decking his skull with Feathers of all colours, and hanging gold Plates about the bones of his arms and thighs. Of the Tivitivas dwelling upon some of the Northern branches, it is affirmed by Sir Walter Raleigh, that are a goodly and valiant People, and to have the most manly and most deliberate speech of any Nation in the World. A People which eat of nothing that is set or sown: the children of Dame Nature and therefore will not be beholding for their livelihood unto Art, or Industry; using the tops of the Palmito Tree for Bread; Fish Deer, and Swine's flesh, for the rest of their sustenance. The Assawy, Saymae, Wikeri, and Aroras, affirmed to be as black as Negroes, but with smother hair: And to use Arrows dipped in so strange a poison, as doth not only bring death, but death with most unspeakable torments, especially if the wounded party be permitted to drink. Of the Arwacae of this Tract I find nothing singular, but that when any of their Kings or Caciques die, their wives and nearest of the kindred beat their bones to powder, and mingle it with their drink like spice.  
Places of most importance in it (for to speak any thing particularly of those many Rivers which fall into the Orenoque, were an endless labour) 1 Comolaha, on the South of Orenoque, but somewhat distant, in which they keep some Annual Fairs for the sale of Women. One of our English men, left by Sir Walter Raleigh, Anno 1595. affirmeth that he bought eight of them (the eldest not above eighteen) for a halfpenny red hafted knife, which he brought from England: But withal telleth us for his credit that he gave them to some Savages of his acquaintance. 2. Morequito, a known Port upon some branch of the Orenoque; of much use to the English in their first Discovery of these parts. 3 Wenicapora so called from another branch of that River bearing this name; from whence was showed an high Hill said to be of Crystal, but so far off, that it was thought better to believe then to go and see. Others report of this Mountain that above it there is a mighty River, which falling down this Cataract on the lower grounds, makes a terrible noise, as if 1000 Bells were knocked one against another. And possible enough it is, that this great fall of water discerned far off, may (with the help of Sunshine) carry some resemblance of a Crystalline Mountain. 4 S. Thome, situate on the Main Channel of the River Orenoque, a Town of 140 houses, stretched out in length for half a mile, but slightly built; a Parish Church in the midst of it, and at the West end a Convent of Franciscan Friars. The only Town of all Guiana possessed by the Spaniards; not fortified till against the last coming of Sir Walter Raleigh, Anno 1617., but taken by him at that time, and since that by the Hollanders, An. 1629. though by both quitted not long after, it returned to the Spaniards.  
The several Nations of this Tract have been named before. Discovered first by Diego de Ordas, An. 1531. furnished with a Patent for the conquest of it by Charles the fifth. But not hitting on the right Channel, or otherwise not able to overcome the difficulties which lay before him, he returned to Spain: effecting nothing but the opening of the way to others. Followed herein by Hierom de Ortal, Anno 1533. and after by Herrera, who proceeded further than the others, Anno 1536. and finally by Gonsalvo Ximenez de Quesada and Antonio Berreo with far better fortune; who beginning their journey from the New Realm of Granada in the search of Guiana, fell casually into this great River, as Orellana did before into that of the Amazons. But yet not perfectly discovered till the year 1595. in which Sir Walter Raleigh having taken Prisoner this Antonio Berreo, and learning of him the success of his Expedition, resolved upon the undertaking: and searched so far into the Country by the course of this River, that some have since called it Raliana. The business followed the next year (after his return) by Captain Laurence Keymis, employed by Raleigh in that service, who at his coming found the Country possessed by the Spaniards, by whom 20 or 30 of the movable houses of the Savages had been laid together like a Town and all the Natives who wished well to the English, dispersed and scattered. So that without any other effect of his journey, than the finding out the true mouth of the Orenoque (which he first discovered) he set sail for England. In the mean time it had been moved at the Court, that a Colony of English should be planted there, and some proportionable force sent over to make good the Action. But the motion upon good advice rejected, first in regard of the distance of it from the main body of our strength: and 2. because the Spaniards bordering near upon it, might easily cast out our small Forces and make the enterprise dishonourable to the English Nation, who had then the better of him in the point of Honourable Achievements. It was permitted notwithstanding unto private Adventurers to try their Fortunes on it, without engaging of the State: whereupon followed the Voyages of Leigh, and Harcourt, before spoken of. But they not being able to go thorough with so great a business, let it fall again. And so it rested till the last unfortunate Voyage of Sir Walter Raleigh, licenced by Commission under the great Seal to search into some Mines of Gold and Silver, which he was credibly informed of when he was in this Country. A design followed with great hopes by the Undertakers, most of them being persons of honour, and well attended: but so unfortunate in the issue (the Spaniards being made acquainted with it before his coming) that at the taking of S. Thome, he lost his own Son, and a great part of his Forces; and after his return (not able with the residue to make good his ground against the Enemy) was executed on a former Attaindure, in the old Palace of Westminster, Octob. 29. An. 1618. Of whom I cannot choose but note what is said by Camden Clarentieux, in his Annals: Vir erat nunquam satis Landato study & Regiones remotas detegendi, & Navalem Angliae gloriam promovendi. And so I leave him to his rest in the bed of peace.  
4. THE LANDS which properly are accounted of as parts of Guiana, lie either scattered on the shore, or in the mouths or bodies of the greater Rivers: some of them not inhabited, others of no name; and none at all of any reckoning. Only the Isle of 1 Trinidado, and 2 Tabago, are of some esteem: which though somewhat further off from the shores of this Conntry, yet being that of Trinidado lieth in the mouth of the Orenoque, and that both of them with Guiana pass but for one Prefecture or Provincial Government, we shall describe them in this place.  
1. TRINIDADO, or Insula S. Trinitatis, lieth at the mouth of the River Orenoque over against Paria, from which separated by a Frith or Streit, by Columbus who first discovered it called Boca del Drago, or the Dragon's mouth, because of the dangerousness of the passage. Extended from the ninth to the tenth Degree of Northern Latitude; the most Southern Angle of it called Punta del Gallo, as that on the North east Punta de Galera. The Frith or Streit but three miles over, yet made more narrow by the interposition of four or five little Lands, which the Sea breaketh thorough with great violence, leaving only two entrances for shipping into the Golf, called the Golf of Paria. The length hereof 25 leagues, the breadth 18. of a cloudy and unhealthie Air, but a fertile Soil, abundantly well stored with such commodities as are of the natural growth of America, viz. Maize, Sugarcanes, cotton-wool, and the best kind of Tobacco, much celebrated formerly by the name of a Pipe of Trinidado. Here is also a sufficiency of Fruits and cattle for the use of the Natives; and here and there some veins of Gold and other metals: such store of Pitch, that innumerable ships might be laden with it; but that it is conceived to be unfit for the calking of ships, because it softeneth in the sun. The place in which it groweth, by the Spaniards called Terra de Brea, by the Natives Pichen.  
The People of the same nature and disposition with the other Americans: distinguished into several Tribes, but most of them reduced under the power of two petit Princes. But the greatest part of the Inhabitants, to avoid the tyranny of the Spaniards, forsook their Country, and ferried over into Guiana, where before we found them. The chief Town of it called S. joseph's, situate on the South side of the Island, on the banks of a little River which the Natives call Carone, the ordinary residence of the Governor, who hath under him besides this Island the Provinces of Guiana and El Dorado (for so go his titles) yet a small Town, consisting but of 40 houses, when it was taken An. 1595. by Sir Walter Raleigh; Antonio Berreo the Governor of it being then made prisoner, who furnished his taker with many notions (and some merely fabulous) towards the discovery of Guiana.  
This Island first discovered by Christopher Columbus in his third voyage, An. 1497. was by him called La Trinidad, it may be with some reference to the form hereof, shooting into the Sea with three Points or Promontories. Nothing else memorable in the fortunes and story of it, but what is touched upon before.  
2. TABAGO lieth on the North-east of La Trinidad, from which 8 miles distant: full of safe Harbours for the bigness, watered with 18 little Rivers, and well stored with Woods; amongst which some Palmito trees, some like that of the Brasil-wood, others not elsewhere to be found. Of Fowl and Fish sufficient to maintain itself. Now called New Walcheren, with reference to an Island of that name in Zealand, by some of the Low Countrymen, who begin to plant there.   

OF PARIA.  
PARIA is bounded on the East with Guiana, and the Lands in the mouth of the Orenoque; on the West with the Golf or Bay of Venezuela, and part of the new Realm of Granada; on the North with the main Atlantic Ocean, or Mare deal Noort; the Countries lying on the South not discovered hitherto.  
It took this name from a mistake of the Spaniards (as Peru, and Jucutan on the like) who ask, as all men do, the names of those new Regions which they discovered, and pointing to the hills afar off, were answered Paria, that is to say, high hills, or Mountains (for here begins that ledge of Mountains which are thence continued for the space of 3600 miles, to the streits of Magellane) and so hath it ever since held the name of Paria. By some Writers it is also called Nova Andalusia; but I adhere unto the former.  
The nature of the soil and people being very different, will be more properly considered in the several parts: The whole divided into the Continent and the Lands; which with their subdivisions, may be branched into these particulars, viz. 1 Cumania. 2 Venezuela. 3 S. Margarita. 4 Cubagna, and 5 the lesser Lands.  
1. CUMANA hath on the East the Golf of Paria, and the River Orenoque; on the West Venezuela: on the North and South bounded as before. So called from Cumana, one of the Rivers of it; on the banks whereof some Dominican Friars (who first set sooting in this Country) built themselves a Monasteri●; that name communicated afterwards unto all the rest of this Tract.  
It is extended East and West to the breadth of 110 Leagues; the length thereof from North to South, said to be 400. But there is little of it known, and less of it planted by the Europeans; except some places near the Sea: there being no part of all America, the description whereof hath come so imperfectly to our hands, as they have of this. For except it be the names of some Bays or Promontories, and of two or three most noted Rivers, there is not much that doth require our consideration.  
The Country, for so much as hath been discovered, neither rich nor pleasant; and consequently the 〈◊〉 looked after: covered with shrubs, and overgrown with unprofitable Briers and Bushes. Heretofore samed for Pearl fishing, all along the Coast, from the Golf of Paria to that of Venezuela, called therefore Costa ae las Perlas; but that gainful trade hath long since failed it. Now only of esteem for a vein of most excellent Salt, found near the Promontory of Araya, and the Bay of Cariaco; gathered and digged up thereabouts in great abundance, and yet never diminishing. The parts adjoining take from hence the name of Selina; the Promontory bordering on the Frith called Boca del Drago, the title or appellation of Cape Salinus. Of some strange Creatures in this Country, as the Beast called Capa, the soles of whose feet are like a shoe; a kind of Hog, which lives altogether upon Ants or Pismires; Parrots, and Bats, of more than ordinary greatness, I forbear to speak.  
Of the People I find nothing singular, except it be, that having plenty of good fruits, as of Fish and Flesh, they use themselves to a far worse dyet, feeding on Horseleeches, Bats, Spiders, Grasshoppers, Worms, Lice, and such other Vermin. In other things they seem to have a mixture of all ill customs used amongst the Savages of Asia, afric, and America; as multitudes of wives, prostituting these wives for the first night's lodging, to the Piacoes, or Priests; and for any after, to their Guests; taking great pairs to 〈◊〉 their Teeth, and putting strange colours on their bodies instead of garments; highminded, treacherous, and revengeful; accustomed to the use of poisoned arrows, which they envenom 〈◊〉 Snakes blood, and other mixtures. In one thing only different from the rest of their neighbours, which is the fencing of their Grounds or Orchards with a Cotton-thred, as high as one's Girdle; and an opinion which they have, that whosoever breaketh it, or goes over or under it, shall die immediately. More safe in that persuasion, then by brazen walls.  
Rivers of most note, though of little, 1 Rio de Canoas'. 2. Rio de Neveri. 3 Cumana de Bordones. The chief Havens or Roads for shipping, 1 Moxino. 2 S. Foy. And 3 that called Commenagot. The places or most consideration, 1 Cumana, a Colony of Spaniards, on the bank of the River of that name; but distant about two miles from the Sea, on which it hath a safe and convenient Harbour; the Town so hedged about with Woods, that nothing can be seen of it till one come into it, except it be the Govert●●● 〈◊〉 house, seated upon the top of a lofty Mountain. 2 S. Jage, a strong Fortress built by the Spaniards 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of the salt Lake, or Salinas, in the year 1622. on some intelligence that the Hollanders had a purpose to take them from him; fortified by the rules of Art, and planted with 30 pieces of Ordnance, the one half of 〈◊〉 3 S. Michael de Neveri, on the River so called, a Fort of the Spaniards. 4 Gua●iba, a Village of the Natives.  
The Country first discovered in the third voyage of Christopher Columbus; but the possession of it was first taken by two Dominicans, who out of a Religious zeal to plant the Gospel in these parts; founded themselves a 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the place where the burrow of Cumana was after built, An. 1513. and doubtless had sped very well in their holy purpose, if some covetous Spaniards had not treacherously seized upon one of the Chiefs of their Tribes, and carried him with his Wife and Train into Spanish bendage. For this the poor Monks suffered death; I may call it martyrdom; their death revenged by Alfonso de Oieda, An. 1520. and he not long after slain by the Savages, who also at the same time destroyed two Convents of Dominican & Franciscan Friars which had been founded in the year 1518. A second force sent hither under Gonsalvo de Ocampo, wasteth a great part of the Country, beheads one of their Kings, and hangs some of his people. But that strength being withdrawn or defeated also, Diego de Castellon is sent over by the Council resident in Hispaniola, to secure the possession of the Country; by whom the Castle first, and after the Burrow of Cumana, was built and planted. Some other Attempts there were for a further conquest, but they proved nothing but attempts; except the building of the Castle of S. Michael de Neveri by Hierome of Ortal, and the discovery of some of the inland Provinces 150 leagues from the Seaside, by Antonio Sedenno, An. 1537. of which nothing followed, but the Registering of that tedious March.  
2. VENEZVELA is bounded on the East with Cumena; on the West with the Bay of Venezuela, the Lake of Maracaybo, and the New Realm of Granada. So called by Alfonso de O●eda, one of the first Discoverers of it, An. 1599 because he found a Burrow of some of the Savages situate in the midst of the waters, to which was no passage but by Boat: the word importing as much as Little Venice.  
It is in length from East to West 130 leagues; in breadth where broadest about 80. The 〈◊〉 so plentiful of all forts both of fruit and grain; the Country so replenished with all kind of cattle, and excellent pastures to maintain them, that the neighbouring Nations call it by the name of the Granary. Such store there goeth from hence of Wheaten meal, Biscoct, Cheese, Hogs-flesh, Ox hides, and Cloth of Cotton ready made, as very well deserves that title. Here is also very great plenty of 〈◊〉 Wild-beasts for hunting, Mines of Gold and other metals; besides an infinite deal of Sarzaparilla sent to Europe yearly.  
The People of the same nature and disposition with those of Cumana, with whom they do participate in all points of that Character. The women (which was there omitted) trained up to ride, 〈◊〉, leap, and swim, as well as the men; to till the land, and look to the business of the house, whilst the men hunt or fish, to bring in provision. They count it a great part of beauty, to have very thick thighs; which they effect, by binding their legs hard below the knee, from their very childhood. Shameless enough till married, after more reserved; though rather for fear of a divorce, then for love of modesty.  
Rivers of note I meet with none; in stead of which many convenient Harbours and capacious Bays. The chief, that called Golfo triste, from some shipwrecks or the like misfortune happening to the Namer of it. 2 The Bay of Coro or Venezuela, large and spacious, which by a Frith or Streit of half a league over, receiveth the tribute of 3 The great Lake called the Lake of Maracaybo, by the Spaniards called Lugo de Nuestra Sennora, or our Lady's Lake, in compass about 80 leagues; on the banks where of dwell many Nations of the Savages, and into which there falleth a River from the Realm of Granadae, by which the two Provinces maintain commerce with one another.  
Places of most importance in it, 1 Maracapana, the furthest Port upon the East, and one of the best on all this Coast; in which the Spaniards of Cubagna had once a Garrison, under colour of defending the Country against the Savages, but in plain truth to use it for an opportunity to seize upon their persons and carry them away for Slaves. Those parts hereby unpeopled, or but meanly populous. 2 Venezuela, the most Western Town of all the Province, commonly called Coro, situate in the Latitude of 11 Degrees▪ built on the Sea, where it hath an Haven on each side; the one capacious, but not safe; the other safe enough, but not very capacious. But being built in a sweet and healthy air, and neighboured by the richest soil of all the Country, it hath been long the ordinary seat of the Governor, and the See of a Bishop (Suffragan to the Archbishop of Domingo in Hispaniola.) Once suddenly surprised by the English, An. 1595. and burnt to ashes, but as suddenly repaired again. 3 Caravalleda, or Nuestra Sennora de Caravalada, 80 leagues from Coro towards the East, seated upon the Sea near an unsafe Haven, and defended from assault by the Castle of Caracas, so called from the name of the Tribe in which it standeth. Near unto which the hills arise to so great an height, that they seem to equal the Pike of Tenarisse so much talked of. 4 S. Jago de Leon, in the same tribe of the Caracas, took by the English the same year. 5 Nova Valentia, 25 leagues from S. Jago de Leon, and from Coro 60. 6 New Xeres, lately built, fifteen leagues on the South of New Valentia. 7 Nova Segovia, one league only from New Xerez; situate on the banks of Baraquicemiti, the most noted River of this tract. 8 Tucuyo, in the Valley so called; not very large, but plentifully loaded with rich Sugar canes, for which some Sugar works or Ingenios' are here lately built. 9 Truxillo, or Nuestra Sennora de la Paz eighteen leagues on the South of the great Lake of Maracaybo, on which the Inhabitants hereof have a Village which belongs unto it, where they hold a factory for the sale of their wires. 10 Laguna, on the bottom of the Lake itself; not else observable but for the multitude of Tigers which do haunt about it.  
This Country discovered by Columbus, and named by Alfonso de Oreda, as before is said, was first pretended to for Neighbourhoods-sake, by the Spaniards planted in Cubagna. Afterwards John de Anpuez, by order from the Counsel resident at Domingo in Hispeniola, was employed in the Discovery of it, An. 1527. But Charles the fist having taken up great sums of money of the Velseri, a wealthy Family of Augspurg, pawned this Country to them; by whom Ambrose Alfinger was sent with 400 foot and 80 horse, to take possession. But he and his Successors in that employment, not minding so much the Conquest as the spoil of the Country; the Counsel of Domingo undertook the business once again; and in the year 1545. sent over one John de Caravayal, who treading in the steps of the Germans, or rather outgoing them in all forts of Rapine, was outed on a second order by one John Perez de Tolosa, by whom the Province was reduced into some good order. In the year 1550. the Negroes, brought hither in great multitudes out of afric, began to mutiny; but their Design discovered, and themselves all slain. Peace and contentment following after all these troubles, the Country was in little time so thoroughly planted, and the Natives so encouraged in their several Tribes, that notwithstanding the destructions made by the Germans and Spaniards, here were reckoned not long since above 100000 of the Savages, not numbering those above fifty or under eighteen years of Age; who by an Order of the Counsel of Spain for these parts of America, are exempt from Taxes.  
3. MARGARITA is an Island situate over against the Selina or Salt-Lake in Cumana; from the Main-land whereof it is distant about seven Leagues. So called from the abundance of Pearls which the Spaniards found at the first Discovery, which the Latinists call Margaritas, and from them the Spaniards. Which though it signify no other than the Vulgar or common Pearl, yet here were also store of those of the greater estimate, such as the Romans by the figure of Antiphrasis called Uniones, because they always grew in couples. Nulli duo reperiuntur indiscreti, saith Pliny; unde nomen Unionum soilicet Romanae imposuere deliciae.  
The Isle affirmed to be 16 Leagues in length, and six in breadth; situate under the 11. Degree of Northern Latitude. Well stored with Pearls upon the Shores, when first discovered; but even then when most plentifully stored with that Commodity, she had not water of her own to quench her thirst, compelled to fetch it from Cumana. Otherwise plentiful enough both of Maize, and Fruits. The People obsequiously servile to their Lords, the Spaniards; so long accustomed unto bondage, that it is now grown another nature. Places of most importance in it, 1 Monpater, in the East corner of the Island, a Fort of the Spaniards built for securing their rich Trade of Pearl fishing, and to defend their ships which lie there at Anchor: within the command whereof is a little Burrough, and the house of the Governor. 2 El valle de Santa Luzia, two Leagues from the Sea, a Spanish Colony. 3 Makanao, the chief Village of the Natives.  
This Island first discovered in the third Voyage of Columbus, Anno 1498. grew suddenly into great esteem, by reason of the rich Pearl fishing, which they found on the shores thereof. And in regard the Natives were so ready to betray their Treasures (of which themselves made little reckoning) they found more favour from the Spaniards, and obtained more liberties from the King, than the rest of the Savages. Insomuch that the Spaniards either could not or would not compel them to dive into the Sea for Pearl; but bought Negro slaves from Guinea, and the Coasts of afric, whom they enforced with great Torments to dive unto the bottom of the Sea, many times seven or eight Fathom deep, to bring up the shells, in which that Treasure was included: where many of them were drowned, and some maimed with Sharks, and other Fishes. But that rich Trade is much diminished of late, if it fail not quite. The cause thereof to be imputed to the unsatiable avarice of the Spaniards, so greedy upon Pearl, that they destroyed the very Seed, and making gain of whatsoever they could meet with, for a little present profit lost the hopes of the future. The Island since less famous, and not much frequented. Visited to its cost in the year 1601, by the English under Captain Parker, who received here 500 l. in Pearls for the ransom of Prisoners; and took a Ship which came from the Coast of Angola, laden with 370 Negroes, to be sold for Slaves.  
4. CUBAGNA is an Island lying betwixt Margarita and the Promontory of Aroya upon the Continent; from the first distant but one League, from the other six; itself in compass about three. Rich on the shores, by the abundance of Pearls which were found about them, but very beggarly on the Land. Destitute both of grass and water, by consequence of cattle also, except only Coneys, and but few of those. So that like many a Gallant who spend all upon the back, and nothing on the belly, she had her outside laced with Pearls, but within nothing to be found but want and hunger. Their bread and water brought them out of other Countries; and their Fruits too, if they desired to have any; here being very few Trees, and those most of Guyayacan. But so abundant in this Treasure, that the King's Fifths for many years amounted to 15000 Ducats yearly out of this poor Island.  
In this respect it was presently resorted to, and possessed by the Spaniards, who planted here a Colony which they called New Cadiz: and grew in short time unto so great power, that they made themselves Masters of the Port of Maracapana Venezuela, one of the best upon those Seas. But in the year 1521. hearing that the Savages of Cumana had destroyed the Convent of Franciscans on the opposite Shore, they cowardly forsook the Island, and fled to Hispaniola. Sent back again by the Counsel there, under the conduct of James de Castellon, by whom the Town was made more beautiful and strong then ever formerly. In great esteem as long as the Pearl fishing did continue; now, with that decayed. Yet still the Island doth deserve some consideration, for a Fountain on the East part of it near unto the Sea: continuing, though the Pearls be gone; which yieldeth a Bitumineus substance like oil, Medicinable for some diseases, and is found two or three Leagues off, floating on the Sea: more profitable for the good of Mankind, and more easily found, than the Pearls which sunk unto the bottom, and maintained our pride.  
Four miles from hence, but appendent to it, lieth a little Island called Coche, three miles in compass, but so abundantly stored with Pearls, that it hath been worth in that one commodity for some months together, above a thousand pounds a month of our English money. First peopled, upon that occasion, An 1529. but the occasion failing, the Plantation ended, the Isle being now unpeopled, as not worth the looking after.  
5. THE LESSER LANDS of this Praefecture or Provincial Government, lie all along upon the Coast of Venezuela, from East to West; the principal of which 1 Tortuga, 12 or 14 miles on the West of Margarita; four miles in length, hardly one in breadth; but yielding such good store of Salt, that three or four ships are laded with it every year. Well furnished with Goats and Guayacan; but not else considerable: except for being naturally fenced about with Rocks, and yielding a convenient Harbour for the use of Mariners. 2 Bonaire, opposite to the Bay of Golfo triste, in the Latitude of twelve Degrees; well furnished with Sheep and Goats, and other cattle, brought out of Spain, and peopled with some Savages out of Hispaniola, whom the Spaniards Christened and sent thither: some Spaniards with their Governor intermixed amongst them. The Island 16 miles in compass: not fruitful naturally but in Trees, which are great and numerous. 3 Curacaos, nine miles on the West of Bonaire, and as many in compass. Of a more fertile soil by far, and of very rich Pastures: the People given to grazing, and make great store of Cheese, tramported thence to other places: the Island having towards the North, a convenient Harbour. 4 Aruba, on the North east of Curacaos, from which nine miles distant: in compass not above five miles, for the most part levelly. One hill it hath (amongst some others) fashioned like a Sugar-loaf. Inhabited by few Savages, and fewer Spaniards.  
The other Lands on this Coast, as the Tostigos, lying Eastwards of Margarita; 2 Blanca, 3 Orchilla, 4 Rocca, and 5 the Isle des Aves, or of Birds, interposed betwixt Tortuga and Bonaire; some of them rather Rocks than Lands: few stored with any living Creatures for the use of men; and none of them at all with men to mannre and dress them: I pass over here. And so proceed from these Lands of the Province of Paria, to those which are subordinate to the Counsel of S. Domingo, and make a Province of themselves. But first we must go back, and bring up some of the Lands of Mare deal Zur, which could not be reduced to any of the former Provinces.   
And so much of PERUANA.   

OF THE AMERICAN LANDS: And first of those which are in MARE DEL ZUR.  
THE AMERICAN LANDS, scattered up and down the Shores of this New World, are commonly divided into those of Mare deal Zur, or the Pacifique Ocean; and those of the Atlantic, or Mare deal Noort. The first so called by Magellanus, the first Discoverer: who passing thorough those troublesome and tempestuous Streits which now bear his name, found such a change upon his coming into the Main, that he gave it the name of Mare deal Zur (quod à tranquillitate vocavit Mare del Sur, faith the Author of the Atlas Minor) from the calm and peaceable temper of it. By the Latins called Mare Pacisicum, in the same regard. Called also the Southern Ocean, because of its situation on the Southside of America, in reference to some part of the Golf of Mexico, and the Streits of Anian. Not known unto the Spaniards till discovered by Nonnius Vasques de Balboa, conducted hither by one of the Caciques or petit Kings of the Country about Nombre di Dios; Who seeing the Spaniards so greedy after Gold, told them that he would bring them to a place where their thirst should be satisfied. Accordingly he brought them to the opposite shore, this Balboa being the chief man in that Adventure: who discovering further on the Sea, opened the way unto Pizarro, and the rest that followed to the golden treasures of Peru: Executed notwithstanding this good service by Don Pedro de Avila, within short time after. But the more full discovery of it is to be ascribed unto Magellanus and some later Adventurers, though the Spaniards got nothing by the bargain. For formerly, as long as this Southern Sea was unknown to any but themselves, they conveyed their Gold and treasures from one place to another, from Panama to Peru from Peru to Panama, without loss or charge, and thought their Ports upon that shore to be unaccessible. But after the way unto this Sea was found out by Magellanus; Drake, Cavendish, and the rest of our English Adventurers did so scour these Coasts, that they left them neither Port, nor Ship, which they did not ransack; as hath been evidenced before in some particulars.  
As for the Lands of this Sea, they lie most of them so near the shores, as if placed there by Nature to serve as Outworks to defend the Continent. Many in tale, but few of consideration; and of those few some of the chief have been described already in their proper places, as parts and members of the Province upon which they lie. The residue which lie too far off to come under such consideration, must be mentioned here; and those reduced to these two Heads, 1 Los Ladrones, & 2 the Lands of John Fernandes.  
1. LOS LADRONES are certain Lands situate betwixt the main Land of America and the Philippine Lands, in the Longitude of 185. and the 4. Degree of Northern Latitude. So called by Magellanus who first discovered them, because of the thievishness of the Inhabitants, (Insulae Latronum is their name in Latin) who had stolen his Cock boat, which he was forced by main force to recover from them. And they continue still both their name and nature. Found such by Cavendish and Noert in their several Voyages, to whom they came under colour of buying Iron (a commodity which they highly prise) but either closely or openly stealing whatsoever they met with. The people tall of stature, brown of complexion, and inclining to corpulency; extremely active, and good Divers, continuing a long time under the water, as if alike fitted to both Elements; insomuch as the Hollanders then with Noort, to make trial of it, cast five pieces of Iron into the Sea, all fetched out by one of them: The women as good at it as the men. Both Sexes given to filthy and promiscuous lusts; for which branded (many of them) with the marks of their incontinency, the Pox having eaten off both their Lips and Noses.  
Their Religion is worshipping the Devil, whose Images they have in wood on the head of their Boats; the Chapel and the Saint fit for such devotions. But for the nature of these Lands, and what subjection the Inhabitants of it yield to the King of Spain, I am yet to seek. But like enough they yield as little as some others do, which yet are reckoned by our Authors to be parts of America.  
2. The Lands of John Fernandes, are two in number: so called from John Fernandes the first Discoverer, An. 1574. each of them five or six miles in compass, and about 300 miles distant from the shores of Chile. Situate in the 33. Degree of Southern Latitude; rocky and barren, but well wooded, and those woods replenished with Goats, but their flesh not so savoury as in other places. Some store of Sanders there is in them, and of Palms no scarcity. Plenty of Fish upon the shores, for which cause visited sometimes by the Spaniards living in Peru: and fitted with commodious Harbours and Roads for shipping, which makes them not neglected by other Nations as they pass this way. None else of note in all this Sea, but such as lie upon the Shores of their several Provinces; which we have looked upon already. And therefore passing thorough the Straits, and coming up unto the Lands of Paria, where before we left; we will now look on those of Mare deal Noort, or that part of the Atlantic which washeth the shores of this New world (the reason of which names we have seen before) subordinate to the Counsel or Government of S. Domingo, viz. 1 the Caribes, 2 Porto Rico, 3 Hispaniola, 4 Cuba, and 5 Jamaica. The rest already spoken of in their proper places.  

1. THE CARIBES.  
THE CARIBES or Cannibal Lands, are in number many; 27 of them known by their proper names; the rest, of less note (though some of these of little enough) not yet so distinguished. Called thus in general, because inhabited by Cannibals and Man-eating People (at their first Discovery) as the word Caribes doth import. They lie extended like a Bow from the Coast of Paria unto the Isle of Porto Rico: of different temper, as must needs be in such variety; and therefore not within the compass of a general Character. Some of the principal we shall consider more distinctly; and for the rest it will be trouble enough to name them, or else pass them by.  
1. GRANADA the nearest of this crew to the Main-land of Cumana, is situate in the Latitude of 12 Degrees and 15 Minutes; in form like a Crescent or half Moon, the two horns not a mile asunder, the whole length but six. Shaded all over with thick Woods, but notwithstanding of a rich and fruitful soil. A Haven in it of good use; but no Town of note. The People of the same ill condition with the other Savages, but more wit to hide it; most mischievously intended when they seem most kind; and then the more to be avoided.  
2. S. VINCENT 18 miles on the North of Granada, is of so blessed a soil, that it brings forth abundance of Sugarcanes without charge to the Husbandman, Watered with many pleasant Rivers, and full of safe and convenient Bays for the use of Mariners. In figue Circular, the Diameter being six miles over; the Circle by consequence eighteen. The People but of mean stature, slothful, and studious only for their Belly: their love to which makes them to adventure in their small Boats, hewn out of the body of a Tree, to pass into the Continent, and return again, without help of the Compass; though distant from it at the nearest, above 30 miles.  
3. BARBADOS on the North-east of S. Vincent, in the Latitude of 13 Degrees, and 20 Minutes. Of an Oval form, 17 or 18 miles in compass. The soil in show like that of England, but far more fruitful: on the East side thrusting out itself with Points and Angles, which yield some Bays, but full of Quick Sands, and unsafe for shipping, on the South furnished with a large and commodious Harbour. Not very well provided of for Fruits or cattle, till made a Colony of the English; who have brought thither from their own Country, Swine and Kine; Oranges, and the like from others. The chief Commodity made hitherto of this Plantation, comes by the planting of Tobacco; and by a kind of course Sugar called Barbados Sugar, which must be quickly spent or will melt to nothing. Were they in stock, and not forced to make a quick return of their Commodities, they might make here as good Sugars as in other places. Yet this Plantation said to be worth all the rest which are made by the English; who (as I take it) are the sole Colony in it: The Island but at the courtesy of the Spaniard; without whose leave and liking not of force to hold it.  
4. MATININO on the Northwest of the Barbados, by the Savages called Madaninam, with little difference. Everywhere swelled with Hills, of which three most eminent for height: one of them, which way soever a man looks upon it, carrying the resemblance of an Hat. Inhabited in the time of Peter Martyr the Historian, with none but Women: afterwards, with a more fierce and barbarous People then the rest of these Lands: but neither Men or Women to be seen of late: whether destroyed, or removed further from the shores for fear of their destruction, is a thing uncertain.  
5. DOMINICA, seated on the North of Matinino, twelve Leagues in length; exceeding fruitful of Tobacco, which they sell unto the Europaeans for Hatchets, Knives, and other Instruments of Iron. Famed for two Fountains of Hot-water, and a commodious Haven at the West side of it, into which falleth a River 20 paces broad. The People as barbarous as ever Cannibals or Man eaters to this very day: At deadly enmity with the Spaniards, and to no man trusty, but where they cannot hurt or dare not. Both Sexes wear their hair long, and colour their bodies over with Oaker. Yet bloody and barbarous though they be, they are ruled by a King of their own, distinguished from the rest in his dress or habit, whom they most readily obey.  
6. DESSEADA, or the Land of Desire, on the North east of Dominica, Discovered by Columbus in his second Voyage; naked of Trees, and at the first sight afar off, not unlike a Galley. Of great use to the Spaniards, who always take it in their way from the Canaries to the parts of America, and back again at their return.  
The like use do they make of 7. The Isle of GVADALUPE, parallel to this, but directly Westward: at which the Fleets which come from Spain use to take fresh water, and there disperse themselves to their several Ports. Eight miles in length, and of good Anchorage in most parts of the Sea adjoining. North-cast from hence lieth  
8. S. Maria del Antigna, commonly called ANTIGNA only, and by some mistakingly ANTEGO. Seven leagues in length, and as much in breadth; difficult of access, and destitute of fresh water, but well replenished of woods, and provided of Fens. Of late times made a Colony of the English, who do still possess it.  
9 S. CHRISTOPHER, on the Northwest of Guadalupe, in the Latitude of 17 Degrees & 20 Minutes. The length six miles, the breadth in many places four, and in some but two: much swelled with hills, and towards the East provided of several Salt-wiches. The French and English had sometimes in it their several Colonies: by whom the Natives were destroyed, or otherwise compelled to forsake their dwellings; convict, as was pretended, of some manifest treacheries. But the two Colonies did not long enjoy the sole possession; ejected by Frederick de Toledo, as he passed this way with his Navy; t●ough suffered to return to their former dwellings, as 〈◊〉 profitable then dangerous to the Crown of Spain. Their chief employment and commodity lies in their Tobacco, by some much commended. Joining hereto, or but a League from it at the most, is  
10. The Isle of NIEVES, affirmed to be five leagues in compass; well wooded and as pleasantly watered; insomuch as the Inhabitants of the Isle of Dominica used to come hither for their pleasures, but for hunting chiefly. Now famed for some Baths or Hot Waters, found out by the English, who in the year 1528. placed a Colony in it. But whether subsisting of itself, or a part of their Plantation in S. Christopher's, I am yet to learn.  
11. SANCTA CRUX, by the Inhabitants called Ayay, on the Northwest of S Christopher's, and the Southeast of Porto Rico, from which last distant 15 leagues. Woody and mountainous; not well provided of fresh waters; but on the Westside furnished with a safe and commodious Road, under the covert of the mountains. Amongst their fruits some that resemble a green Apple; which tasted, so i● flames the tongue, that for 24 hours it swelleth in so great extremity, as makes it altogether useless, but after that by little and little it abates again. The like happeneth also to the face, if washed before sunrising with their Fen-waters, which are very frequent in this Island; after the rising of the sun, without any harm at all. In this there is a Colony of the English also, but of later standing than those of S. Christopher's and Barbados.  
Some of the principal of the rest, 1 Anguilla, 2 Barbada, 3 S. Bartholmews, 4 S Lucy's, 5 S. martin's, 6 Montferrat, 7 Rotunda, 8 Saba, 9 Virgo Gorda, & 10 Sumbrero; of which we have little but the names: the rest, though known by several names, are not worth the naming. Only we are to add concerning the whole Nation of Caribes, once here inhabiting, that they did usually hunt for Men, as Men for Beasts, roving as far as Porto Rico to seek after their prey; and what they caught, was sure to go to the pot, in the worst sense too. Columbus, when he was at the Isle of Guadalupe, found 30 Captive Children which were reserved to be eaten, and in their houses divers vessels filled with Man's flesh, and some upon the spit ready to be roasted. Nor had they laid aside this diet, till after the year 1564. but how long I know not: For at that time, a Spanish ship coming to water at the Isle of Dominica, they cut her Cables in the night, haled her to the land, and devoured all that were in her. But the Lands have been of late times well cleared of these Monsters; some of them brought unto better order, but the most destroyed as the common Enemies of mankind; the Lands where they dwelled being either totally deserted, or taken up by the Europaeans and their several Colonies.   

2. PORTO RICO. And 3. MONICO.  
PORTO RICO lieth on the Northwest of Sancta Crux, from which distant about 15 Leagues, and near upon as many from Hispaniola, 136 Leagues from the main Land of Paria, and not much less from the Cape of Coquibocco in Rio de la Hacha, a Province of Castilia Aurea. It took this name from the chief Town and Haven of it; but was called by Columbus at the first discovery S. Johannis Insula, o● the Isle of S. John's; by the Natives Boriguen.  
It is situate under the 18 and 19 Degrees of Northern Latitude; in form quadrangular, but of a greater length than breadth, such as the Geometricians call oblongum: The length thereof being 30 Leagues, and the breadth but 20. The Air hereof very pleasant and temperate, not scorched with furious heats in Summer, nor made offensive by the fall of continual rains; exposed sometimes (chiefly in August and September) to the trouble somness of sudden tempests, called Hericanos. The soil indifferently fruitful, though somewhat Mountainous: here being (besides other Hills of inferior note) a ridge of high Hills which run cross the Country from the one end unto the other. Their chief commodities Sugar canes, Ginger, Cassia, and great store of Hides: the European Cattle having so abundantly increased, that they kill thousands for their skins; leaving the flesh to be a prey unto Dogs and Birds. Some Mines here were of Gold and Silver, but consumed long since. And so are all the Natives also; of whom, in that respect, impertinent to give any Character.  
Chief Rivers of the Island, 1 Cairobon, 2 Boyaman: of divers fountains, and of several and divided courses. 3 Luysa, & 4 Toa, two Rivers growing out of one. The Spring of that one in the Mountains of Guayamo, whence running Northwards in one Channel 16 Leagues together, doth afterwards divide itself into those two streams. 5 Guiano. 6 Arezibo. 7 Guabiabo; of lesser note; but all of them, as well as all the rest before, concluding in some safe and capacious Haven.  
Places of most importance in it, 1 Porto Rico the chief town, built in a little Island, on the North side of the greater, but joined unto it with huge piles, and vast expenses, by the command of Philip the first, An. 1514. Well built, with large streets, and convenient houses, according to the model of the Cities of Spain; and beautified with a fair Cathedral; the Bishop one of the Suffragans of the Archbishop of S. Domingo in Hispaniola. The town unwalled, but fortified with two strong Castles: the one of which secures the Haven, and the other the Town. In vain attempted, and with the loss of 40 or 50 men, by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1595. but taken two years after by George Earl of Cumberland, who had a purpose to have peopled it with an English Colony. Discouraged from it by the death of 400 of his men, by change of Air, and some intemperance of Diet; he set sail for England, doing no other hurt to the Town or Island, but the disfurnishing it of 70 piece of Ordnance, and some part of their treasure, which he brought home with him. 2 S. Germane, in the Western part of the Island, but four Leagues from the Sea; once the chief of the Island, now both unfortified, and small. 3 Arezibo, on the River so called. 4 Luysa, the most noted Port of the Eastern parts, situate on the mouth of the River so named.  
Eastward hereof betwixt it and Hispaniola, lies the Island of Mona, (might not this think we be so called by Madoc ap Owen Gwinedth, of whom before?) three Leagues in compass; rocky and of a brackish earth; but fit for the production of Lemons, Oranges, and such kind of fruits, which are here in plenty. Not far off▪ but more towards the West, Monico, or Monetta, as our English call it, where they found such infinite store of Fowl, that they flew over their heads as thick as Ha●l, and made them almost deaf with the very noise; their Eggs so thick upon the ground, that they loaded two Boats with them in three hours, and could hardly pass forwards without treading on them.  
But to return to Porto Rico, or the Isle of S. John's, it was first touched upon by Columbus in his second voyage, An. 1493. but first inhabited by John Ponce of Leon, An. 1510. who being courteously entertained by Aiguabana, the chief Prince thereof, planted a Colony of Spaniards in the North part of the Island, which he called Caparra. The Colony ten years after that removed to Guanica, and from thence to S. Germane: carrying with it the repute of the chief town of all the Island, upon every remove, till the building of Porto Rico, where it since hath fixed. The Island, very populous for the bigness of it, when the Spaniards came to it: but the Natives long ago consumed by several Butcheries; and as some write, not above 1500 Spaniards in all the Country. What else concerns the story of it, we have seen before.   

4 HISPANIOLA.  
HISPANIOLA lieth on the West of Porto Rico; the distance we have seen already. By the Inhabitants called Haitic, and by some Quisqueia; but by Columbus it was honoured with the name of Hispaniola, or little Spain; and of late times beginneth to be called S. Domingo, from the chief Town of it.  
The form thereof Triangular, extended in a sharp Angle, called Cabo del Enganno, towards Porto Rico: the Western end fashioned like a large Bay, or Semicircle; the Northern point of which is named S. Nicholas; the Southern, Cabo de Donna Maria. The length affirmed to be 150 Leagues, the breadth in some places 60. in some but 30. thence growing less and less till it come unto the Eastern Angle; the whole compass estimated at 400. Situate betwixt the 18 & 20 Degrees of Northern Latitude. Of an Air much infested with Morning-heats, but cooler in the Afternoon by the constant blowing of a Sea-gale, which they there call Virason.  
The Country for the most part beautiful and flourishing; the Trees always in their Summer-livery, and the Meadows green, as if it did enjoy a perpetual Spring. In many places swelled with high craggy Mountains, whence the name of Hayty, that word so signifying in the natural language of the Natives. Of such an excellent herbage, that the cattle brought hither out of Spain have increased almost beyond Arithmetic; grown wild for want of proper Owners; and hunted unto death like the Stags of the forest, though only to rob them of their skins. The soil so fertile, that in the space of sixteen day's Herbs and Roots will grow ripe, & be fit to be eaten. So plentifully stored with Ginger, and Sugarcanes, that in the year 1587. there were shipped hence 27500. pound weight of Ginger, and 900. Chests of refined Sugar; an evident argument of the riches and fertility of it. A further proof hereof may be, the rich Mines of Gold, in which they used to find Gold without mixture of dross or other metals. 2 The great increase of Sugar, one Cane here filling twenty, sometimes thirty measures. 3 The wonderful yield of Corn, amounting in some places to an hundred fold. But the Mines were long ago exhausted, insomuch as the Inhabitants are fain to use brass-money: but in stead of those of Gold, they have found out others of Brass and Iron, and some few of Silver; but not much searched into of late for want of Workmen.  
The reason of that want to be ascribed unto the Covetousness and Cruelty of the Spanish Nation: who out of an unsatiable thirst for Gold, consumed the people in their Mines; and out of the like thirst for Blood, killed so many of them, that in few years they destroyed three Millions of the Natives. And it is probably supposed, that had not Charles the 5. restrained them by a Penal Edict from compelling the Natives against their wills to those works of servitude, there had not been one Native left in all this Island, nor in any other part of their Plantations. Such as are left, are said to be of low stature, of black hair, and a complexion somewhat inclining to that colour: not differing in manners, habit, or Religion from the Spaniards there.  
Rivers of most note, 1 Ozama, on whose Banks stands Domingo, the chief Town of the Island, capable of the greatest ships to the very Wharf. 2 Nigua, which passing thorough rich Pastures, or making the Pastures rich, by its secret virtue; runneth towards the West: as do also, 3 Yaquimo, 4 Nizao, and 5 Neyba. 6 Hayna, of a contrary course to the other three. 7 Yaqui, or Jacho, which falleth into the Northern Seas. 8 Nicayagua, 9 Cocitemuco, 10 Xanique. These three last famous heretofore for their Sands of Gold. Some speak of 30000 Brooks and Rivers, which are found in this Country; two parts of which vast number had their Golden Sands. A thing so far beyond the charity of the strongest Faith, (though reported by a grave and Reverend Author) that I know not what Interpretation to put upon it, except every Watercourse, Ditch, and Gutter, may be reckoned in.  
The whole divided, when the Spaniards first came amongst them, into several Provinces or Kingdoms, as 1 Higuey, 2 Jacuaguia, 3 Samana, in the Eastern parts. 4 Yaquimo, 5 Boaruco, and 6 Xaragua, towards the South. 7 Guahabu, and 8 Cabaya, in the West: and in the North▪ 9 Cibao, rich in Mines of Gold; 10 Marien, the Landing place of Columbus; and 11 Maguana in the centre of the Island, the King whereof in the time of Columbus was named Conabo, of greatest power of any of those peti● Roytelets. Another division of it hath been made by Nature, parting it by four Rivers, all rising from one Mountain in the midst of the Island into four Divisions: the River Jache running towards the North; 2 Nubiba hastening to the South; 3 Yuna, or Junna towards the East; and 3 Hatibonico to the West. But these divisions being long since grown out of use, we will survey the chief of the Towns and Cities of it, as they come before us.  
And they are 1 S. Domingo, first built by Bartholomew Columbus, Anno 1494. on the East bank of the Ozama; and afterwards (in the year 1502) removed by Nicolas de Obando, than Governor of the Island to the opposite shore. Situate in a pleasant Country, amongst wealthy Pastures, and neighboured with a safe and capacious Haven: the houses elegantly built, most of them of stone, and the whole well walled▪ beside a Castle at the West end of the Peer to defend the Haven: enriched by the residence of the Governor, the Courts of Justice, the See of an Archbishop (and besides many Convents and Religious houses) an Hospital endowed with 20000 Ducats of yearly Rent. Esteemed of greatest Trade and concourse of Merchants till the taking of Mexico, and the Discovery of Peru; since that 〈◊〉 sensibly decaying; and now reduced unto the number of 600 Families of Spaniards; the greatest p●●t of the City, and all the Suburbs, inhabited by Negro, Mulatos. and other Strangers. Not yet 〈◊〉 of the hurt it had by Sir Francis Drake, who in the year 1586 ●ook it by force, and held it for the space of a month, burning the greatest part of the houses, and suffering the rest to be redeemed a certain price. 2 Salvaleon, 28 Leagues to the East of Domingo. 4 Jaguana, called also Santa 〈◊〉 del Porto, from a safe and beautiful Haven adjoining to it; situate in the West part of the Island, of no great bigness, consisting of no more than 150 houses, when it was at the greatest; but made much less by Captain Newport, who in the year 1591. burned it to the ground. 4 Cotuy, in the North of the Island, opposite to S. Domingo, from which distant almost 60 Leagues: a little Town, but formerly of great esteem for its Mines of Gold. 5 Conception de la Vega, the foundation of Christopher Columbus; for whose sake afterwards adorned with a See Episcopal. 6 Puerto de la Plata, 40 Leagues from Domingo on the Northern shore; where built on a commodious Bay by Nicholas de O●●●● before mentioned, by whom also fortified: the second Town of wealth and Trade in all the Island. 7 Az●a, now called Compostella, a noted Haven, and much resorted to for Sugars, which it yields abundantly.  
This Island was first discovered by Columbus (for I believe not that it was any of the fortunate Lands which we read of in the life of Sertorius) in the first voyage which he made: conducted hither by some of he Inhabitants of the Isle of Cuba. Landing, and gaining the good will of the Savages, by gentle usage, he obtained leave of one of their King or Caciques to build a Fortress in his Country, which he called Navided or Natividad, leaving in it 36 Spaniards to keep possession: whom he found both mastered and murdered at his coming back. Being now better furnished for a new Plantation, he built the Town called Isabel, (in honour of Isabel Queen of Castille) near the Mines of Cibao; which afterwards was deserted also, and the Colony removed unto S. Domingo: the Spaniards sending one Colony after another, till at last their number was increased unto 14000. besides women and children. But having rooted out the Natives by their infinite cruelties, and exhausted the riches of the Country with as infinite covetousness: they betook themselves to fresher Quarters, abandoning the Island to devour the Continent. Once had the Islanders rebelled, and fortified themselves in the Province of Baoruco; a place so naturally strong, that there was little need of the helps of Art. Not brought to leave that fastness but on such conditions as made the Spaniards less insolent, and themselves less slaves.   

5. CUBA.  
CUBA lieth on the West of Hispaniola, from which parted by a Frith, or narrow Channel, interposed betwixt the two Capes of S. Nicholas, and that of Mayzi. Backed on the North with a fry of Lands, called the Lucaios, and some part of the Peninsula of Florida; extended towards the East to the extreme point or Foreland of Jucutan, called Cape de Gotache, from which distant about 50 Leagues, and neighboured on the South with the Isle of Jamaica.  
It is in length from East to West, that is to say, from Cape Mazie towards Hispaniola, to the Cape of S. Anthony, 230 Leagues; in breadth where broadest hardly 40, but fifteen in others. For the fertility of the soil contending with Hispaniola for the pre-eminence; but in the temperature of the Air a great deal before it. Liberally stored with Ginger, Cassia, Mastic, Aloes, Cinnamon and Sugar, (not reckoning such commodities as are common unto this with others) besides great plenty of Flesh, and Fish; and of Fowl no scarcity. The Gold more drossy in the Mine, then in Hispaniola, but the Brass more perfect. Hilly, and full of lofty Mountains; but those Mountains clad with divers trees, some of which drop the purest Rosin, and the Hills sending to the Valleys many notable Rivers. Pestered with many sorts of Serpents, not so much out of any ill condition of the Soil and Air, as by an old Superstition of the Savages: in former times not suffered to kill them when they might (this being a Dish reserved for the higher Powers) not able afterwards to destroy them when it would have been suffered.  
What other Savage Rites they had, is not now material, the Spaniards having took an Order that they should not trouble us in that particular. Yet thus much we may add in memory of the first Inhabitants, that an old man of 80 years, one of the Caciques of the Island, addressed himself unto Columbus at his first coming hither, advising him to use his Fortune with moderation, and to remember that the souls of men have two journeys when they leave this world; the one foul and dark prepared for the injurious and cruel person; the other delectable and pleasant for the men of peace. It is said also of them that they knew not the use of money, nor understood the niceties of Meum and Tuum: Tenants in common to the blessings which the earth brought forth, and Coheirs of Nature.  
Amongst the Rarities of this Island, they mention a Fountain out of which floweth a pitchy substance, which is found frequently on the Seas into which it falleth, excellent for the Calking of ships: Secondly, a Navigable River (but the name not told us) the waters of which were so hot, that a man could not endure to hold his hand in them. They tell us also thirdly of a Valley 15 Leagues from S. Jago, which produceth stones exactly round, as if made for pleasure; but yet merely natural. But these no greater Rarities then in other places: nor altogether so great as in Hispaniola. Of which they tell us of a fair River, whose waters are Salt, and yet none but fresh streams fall into it: Of another Lake (three Leagues in compass) on the top of the Mountains, into which many Rivers were known to run without any Exit. Neither of these so strange or rare as the Cucuyo, a kind of Scarab or Beetel: the eyes and wings whereof when opened give so great a light, in the darkest places, that a man may see to read and write by it, as well as by Candle.  
Rivers of most note, 1 Cante, much annoyed with Crocodiles (a Beast not common in these Lands, nor elsewhere in this) exceeding dangerous to such as repose themselves on the Banks of the River. 2 Arimao, which disburdeneth itself near the Port of Xagua. 3 Rio de Porcos, full of Rocks and quicksands, at the entrances of it. 4 Rio Escondida, passing betwixt Habana, and the Port of Marancas, 5 Marien, and 6 Tanne, of less note: Besides these, there is Xagua, a safe Station and Road for shipping; of a narrow entrance, but large and spacious when once entered, above ten Leagues in length, and of breadth proportionable. So fenced on all sides from the winds, that ships lie here in ●afety without any Anchor. Some other Bayss there be as useful, though not so considerable.  
Towns of most consequence, 1 S. Jago in the South part of the Island, situate about two Leagues from the Main, but in the bottom of a large and capacious Gulf, the most noted Port of all these Seas. Built by Don Diego de Velasques, An 1514. Afterwards made a Bishops See, beautified with a Cathedral; some Religious houses; once not inferior unto any for numbers of People, though now few enough. 2 Baracao, 30 Leagues on the East of S. Jago, the same Foundation as the other; and neighboured by great quantities of Eben-wood. 3 S. Salvador, by some called Bayamo, according to the old name of the Province in which it standeth; built by Velasco in the most pleasant and richest part of all the Island; but not so fitly, as the other, for Trade and Merchandise. 4 Porto deal Principe, an Haven Town in the North parts: not far from which is the Fountain of a pitchy or bituminous liquor, spoken of before; which I conceive to be much of the same nature with the Fountains of Naphta in the East. 5 Trinidad, another of Velascos' foundations, nine or ten leagues Eastward of the Port of Xagua: once well frequented, but now forsaken, and mere nothing. 6 Havana, in the North parts, opposite to Florida, a noted and well traded Port; so strongly situate and fortified both by nature and Art, that it seems impregnable. The Entrances defended with two notable Castles; a greater than either opposite to the mouth of the Haven; all so commodiously built, and well planted with Ordnance, that they are able to keep out and scatter the greatest Navy. Near one of them standeth an high Tower, from the top whereof notice is given unto the Guards, of every ship that cometh within view of the Watchmen. The best assurance, not only of this Island but the Bay of Mexico; and therefore honoured for the most part with the seat of the Governor, and the greatest Trade of all these Seas: the ships which are bound for Spain from all parts of the Gulf, tarrying here for one another, till all met together, and setting fail from hence by the Streits of Bahama, amongst the Isles of the Lucaios.  
This Island one of the first which was discovered by Columbus: who having almost tired the Spaniards with the expectation, first fell upon the Island of Guahanani, one of the Lacaios, to which he gave the name of S. Saviour's. From thence he sailed to Baracoa, on the North of this Island, which he caused to be called Fernandina, in honour of Ferdinand the Catholic▪ King of Castille and Arragon; at whose charge and the encouragement of Isabel his Heroic Queen, he pursued this enterprise▪ Landing, he asked the People if they knew Cipango (by which name Paulus Venetus calls the Isle of Japan) and they conceiving that he enquired after Cibao (of great note for the richest Mines in Hispaniola) pointed towards Hayty; some of them going with him to conduct him thither. Cuba by this means laid aside, and all the thoughts of Spain upon Hispaniola, where they found many golden provocations to invite their stay; till hungering after more Gold, and some new Plantations, they passed over hither: and in few years by the prudent conduct of Velasco, got such footing in it, and made that footing good by so many Colonies; that their title and possession was beyond dispute; and so continueth to this day.   

6. JAMAICA.  
JAMAICA lieth on the South of Cuba, from which distant 20 Leagues, and as much, or very little more, from Hispaniola. Discovered in the second voyage of Columbus, by whom named S. Jago; that name changed afterwards to Jamaica.  
It is in length from East to West about 50 Leagues, and in breadth 20. the whole compass estimated at 150. the middle of it under the 18 Degree of Northern Latitude. Of a rich soil, abundantly provided of all things necessary: well stocked with Cattle, and no less plentifully stored with most sorts of Fruits, which either Industry or Nature have supplied it with. Great store of cotton-wool; and such abundance of Jaccu (a Root whereof the Savages once made their bread) that it was deemed the Granary of the neighbouring Lands. And were it not disfurnished of convenient Ports (which is all the want of it) would be as much frequented by the seafaring men, as any other in those parts. Once very populous now destitute of all the natural Inhabitants: this Island, and that of Porto Rico, losing in few years 60000 by the Spaniards cruelties. Cruelties which not only raged upon the men, but destroyed posterity: the Women, here and elsewhere so abominating their sad condition, that they strangled their Children in the birth, to the end they might not live to serve such a cruel Nation.  
Chief Towns hereof (for though it be well watered, it hath no great Rivers) 1 Sevilla, in the North-part of the Island, beautified with a goodly Monastery, the Abbot whereof hath all Episcopal jurisdiction, and is privileged to wear a Mitre; in nothing more ennobled, then that Peter Martyr the Historian (to whose Decades all succeeding Ages are to be beholding, for the chorography, and History of these parts of the World) was once Abbot here. 2 Mellilla, a small Town, but memorable for the unfortunate shipwreck of Columbus, on the shores adjoining. 3 Oristan, on the South of the Island, fourteen Leagues from Sevil. 4 De la Vega, now a ruin only, once a Spanish Colony; and of great fame for giving the title of Dukes to Christopher Columbus, and his brother Bartholomew. Since whose time nothing happened prejudicial to the State of this Island by the hands of any but the Spaniards; till conquered, but not held by Sir Anthony Shirley, An. 1596.  
Thus having took a short Survey of the several parts of this great Body; we now briefly take a view of the Government and Forces of it. The Government committed chiefly to two great Viceroys, the one of Nova Hispania, who resides at Mexico; the other of Peru, who abideth at Lima; the principal Cities of those Kingdoms. The first hath jurisdiction over all the Provinces of Nova Gallicia, Nova Hispania, Guatimala, Castilia Aurea, and the Provinces of the Mexican Lands; the other over those of Peru, Chile, Rio de la Plata, and the new Realm of Granada. Such scattered pieces as they hold in Guyana, Paria, and the Caribes, with their Forts in Florida, being reduced to some of these. Of these the Vice Roy of Peru is of greatest power, because he hath the nomination of all the Commanders and Officers within his Government: which in the other are reserved to the King himself. But that of New Spain counted for the better preferment, because of its nearness unto Spain (in respect of the other) the beauties of the City of Mexico, and the Civilities of the People. For the administration of Justice, and ordering the Affairs of the several Provinces, there are ten chief Courts, from which there lieth no Appeal: that is to say, 1 Guadalaiara, for Gallicia Nova. 2 Mexico, for New Spain. 3 S. Domingo, for the Province of the Lands. 4 Guatimala, for the division so named. 5 And Panama, for Castilia Aurea. Then for the other Government, Quitos, Lima, and Charcas, in the Realm of Peru. 9 Imperiale, for Chile. 10 S. Foy, for the New Realm of Granada. From these, though no Appeal doth lie in matter of justice; yet both from them and the two Viceroys an Appeal may lie in affairs of State, or point of Grievance. And to this end there is a standing Counsel in the Court of Spain, which is called the Counsel of the Indies, consisting of a Precedent, eight Counsellors, two Proctors Fiscal (which we call the Solicitors General) and two Secretaries, besides other Officers: to whom it appertaineth to take care of all matters which concern the Government of these Countries; to appoint the Viceroys, to dispose of all the great offices (except those of the Government of Peru) and spiritual Dignities; to appoint Visiters to go into those Provinces for the examining the actions of all Officers, hearing the grievances of the People, and to displace or punish as they find occasion; but with the King's privity and consent.  
As for the Estates of private men, they which hold Lands or Royalties from the Crown of Spain, hold them but for life (except it be the Marquis of Valsa in New Spain, of the race of Cortes) after their deaths returning to the King again; who gives them commonly to the eldest son, or the next of blood; but so that they receive it as a mark of his favour, and not from any right of theirs. And though they have many times attempted to make these Commanderies and Estates hereditary, and offered great sums of money for it, both to Charles' the fifth, and Philip the second; yet they could never get it done; the Kings most prudently considering, that these great Lords having the command of the Estates and Persons of their several Vassals, would either grind them into powder without any remedy; or upon any Inquisition into their proceedings, take an occasion to revolt. Both dangers of no small importance, both by this uncertainty of their present Tenure, exceeding happily avoided.  
The Revenue which the King receiveth hence, is said to be three Millions of Ducats yearly: most of it rising out of the Fifths of the Mines of Gold and silver: the rest by Customs upon Manufactures and all sorts of Merchandise, and the Acknowledgements reserved upon Lands and Royalty. But out of this there goeth great Exits, that is to say to the two Vice-Roys 12000 Ducats; to the Precedent and Officers of the Counsel of the Indies in Spain 20000 Ducats; to the Judges and Officers of the several Courts of Judicature very liberal Pensions; to every Archbishop and Bishop, of which there are 29. in all 2000 Ducats at the least, and to some much more to mend their Benefices. Then reckoning in the infinite Charges, in maintaining Garrisons, and entertaining standing Bands both of Horse and Foot, in several parts of this Estate; and the continual keeping of a strong Armada, to conduct his Plate-Fleets to Spain, there must be made a great abatement, and the sum will bear it. For howsoever at the first his Revenues came from hence without any great charge, more than the keeping of a few Soldiers to awe the Savages; yet after he fell fowl with England, and startled the Hollanders to Rebellion, he was compelled to fortify all his Havens, and secure his Ports, and to maintain a strong Armada at the Sea to Convoy his Treasures. Before which time, the English (as is instanced in several places) did so share in his Harvest, that they left him scarce enough to pay his Workmen; which if they should attempt again upon any breach, they would find it very difficult, if not impossible, to effect any thing on the Coasts, as in former times; or indeed any other way but by making themselves too strong for him at Sea, and thereby either intercept his Fleets, or hinder them from coming to him to supply his needs.   
And so much of the AMERICAN Lands.    

A TABLE OF The Longitude and Latitude of the chief Towns and Cities mentioned in this Second Part.  
A Longit. Latit. Acapulco 276. 0. 18. 0. Almeria 272. 15. 20. 0. Ancon 321. 0. 6. 20. Anegadas 296. 0. 50. 0. A. S Anna Equitum 318. 10. 27. 30. A. Antigna 330. 20. 16. 10. Antiochia 300. 50. 6. 40. Arica 300. 30. 20. 0. A. Ascension 353. 20. 18. 50. A. Aravalo 298. 10. 1. 30. Acuzamil 286. 30. 19 0. S. Augustin 293. 0. 29. 50. B Bahama 296. 30. 27. 0. Barbades 322. 0. 13. 0. Bovincas 296. 50. 15. 50. C Campa 351. 40. 62. 50. Cartagena 300. 0. 20. 10. Carthago 299. 30. 3. 10. Caxamalca 298. 30. 11. 30. A. Chessapiake 308. 0. 38. 0. Chiafmetlan 260. 0. 25. 40. Chile 299. 0. 36. 30. A. Colima 267. 20. 19 50. Collao 300. 0. 16. 0. A. Coquimbo 301. 20. 20. 40. A. Corduba 316. 20. 33. 0. A. Coano 259. 40. 31. Couliacan 266. 30. 27. 0. Cusco 297. 20. 13. 30. A. D Darien 295. 40. 5. 30. Deseada 320. 0. 15. 20. Dominica 359. 40. 14. 0. OF Estade 305. 10. 47. 40. Fernambuc 351. 40. 9 20. G Gorgona 295. 10. 3. 20. Granada 318. 20. 11. 0. Guajaquil 294. 30. 2. 30. A. Guadalquahol 282. 20. 31. 0. Guana●● 294. 50. 8. 10. A. Guardalupe 319. 20. 15. 20. Guatimala 303. 0. 24. 20. H Hangnedo 310. 30. 54. 0. Havana 292. 10. 20. 0. Hochelaga 300. 50. 44. 10. Hunedo 324. 0. 51. 30. I Jabaque 315. 15. 17. 15. S. Jago 298. 10. 30. 10. Isabel 305. 20. 18. 50. L Lempa 274. 10. 16. 50. Lima 296. 40. 23. 30. Loxa 293. 30. 9 50. A. M Malagnana 306. 0. 23. 40. Malones 279. 40. 13. 40. Maracapana 312. 10. 8. 0. Margarita 314. 10. 10. 50. Mexico 283. 0. 38. 30. Martha 301. 20. 10. 40. S. Michael 291. 40. 6. 10. A. S. Michael 327. 10. 47. 20. Mona 309. 30. 18. 0. Monsorate 319. 10. 15. 40. Montroyal 301. 0. 45. 40. Mopox 301. 10. 10. 0. N Navaca 300. 20. 17. 10. Niccia 284. 30. 10. 40. Nives 318. 40. 16. 20. Nombre de Dios 294. 30. 9 20. Norumbega 315. 40. 43. 40. P Paca 302. 50. 31. 10. A. Paito 290. 30. 5. 10. A. Panama 294. 30. 8. 30. Panuco 270. 10. 22. 20. Pasto 304. ●0. 1140. A. Pina 296. 20. 3. 0. Plata 305. 0. 19 50. A. Popayan 297. 20. 1. 50. Possession 241. 30. 32. 20. Potosi 315. 10. 21. 10. A. Q Quilcoa 298. 50. 16. 30. A. Quintete 303. 40. 34. 40. A. Quito 293. 10. 0. 10. Quivira 233. 0. 41. 40. R Roca 311. 0. 11. 10. Roquelay 314. 10. 50. 0. S Saba 317. 30. 17. 20. Salinas 321. ●0. 53. 0. S. Salvadore 321. 10. 5. 0. Sante 294. 40. 9 30. A. Saona 309. 0. 16. 50. Sorand 351. 40. 61. 0. T Tabaco 322. 10. 10. 40. Tarnaco 270. 15. 24. 40. Tavasco 275. 40. 18. 20. Testigos 316. 10. 11. 0. Thomebamba 293. 40. 1. 50. A. Tiquisana 305. 20. 16. 0. A. Tochtipec 274. 40. 19 0. Tortuga 303. 50. 20. 20. Totonteac 248. 20. 36. 0. Trinidad 295. 50. 21. 20. Tumbez 291. 40. 4. 10. A. V Valparaiso 300. 0. 33. 0. A. Vllao 242. 10. 30. 30. Vraba 297. 20. 7. 30. Vrcos 301. 0. 14. 50. A. Wococan 307. 30. 34. 0. Z Zacatula 269. 4. 20. 0.  
A. is the mark of Southern Latitude.  
The End of the Second Part of the Fourth Book.   

AN APPENDIX To the Former Work, ENDEAVOURING A DISCOVERY OF THE UNKNOWN PARTS OF THE WORLD.  
ESPECIALLY OF Terra Australis Incognita, OR THE Southern Continent.  
BY PETER HEYLIN.  
HORAT. DE ARTE POET. 
— Pictoribus atque Poetis  
Quidlibet audendi semper fuit aequa Potestas.   
LONDON, Printed for Henry Seile, 1652.   

AN APPENDIX To the Former Work, Endeavouring a Discovery Of the UNKNOWN PARTS of the WORLD.  
AND here we are upon a new and strange Adventure, which no Knight Errand ever undertook before. Of things unknown, as there is commonly no desire, so less discourse can probably be made upon them. By unknown therefore we must understand less known, or not well discovered; and in that sense we may as well endeavour to say somewhat of them, as others with more pains and hazard to attempt the discovery. And to say truth, even in the known parts of the World there is much unknown; as in the best and most flourishing Kingdoms of the Earth there is some waste ground, either not cultivated at all or not so well inhabited as the rest of the Country. For besides many vast tracts of ground in the North and Northwest parts of Tartary, and such parts of India as he Northwards towards Delanguer, Nangrocot, the East parts of Caucasus, and the Realms of Cathay; it is conceived that the greatest part of the midlands of afric are undiscovered to this day, or the knowledge of them so imperfect as comes near a nescience. And for America, not reckoning in the Northern Borders (which are in part to be the subject of this enquiry) it is affirmed of the Midlands by John de Lactantio, (who hath made the most exact description of it that was ever extant) Minimasui part perlustratum esse, that the least part of them hath been discovered hitherto to any purpose. Leaving these therefore as before without further search, we will divide the UNKNOWN WORLD into these two parts, 1 Terra Incognita Borealis, and 2 Terra Incognita Australis; which with their Subdivisions we will now pursue.  

TERRA INCOGNITA BOREALIS.  
TERRA INCOGNITA BOREALIS, is that part of the Unknown World which lieth towards the North; and is to be considered in these three notions. 1. As directly under the Pole, which for distinctions sake we will call Orbis Arcticus; 2. As lying to the North-east on the back of Europe, and Asia; or 3. on the Northwest, on the back of America.  
1. ORBIS ARCTICUS is that part of Terra Borealis Incognita▪ which lieth under or about the Arctic Pole: the situation and dimensions of which being taken with the Astrolabe by an Oxford-Frier, are by Mercator thus described out of the itinerary of James Cnoxe of Bo● le duc, or the Besche a Town of Brabant.  
Under the Arctic Pole (saith he) is said to be a black Rock of wondrous height, about 33 leagues in compasss; the Land adjoining being torn by the Sea into four great Lands. For the Ocean violently breaking thorough it, and disgorging itself by 19 Channels, maketh four Euripi, of 〈◊〉 Whirlpools, by which the waters are finally carried towards the North, and there swallowed into the Bonels of the Earth. That Euripus or Whirpool which is made by the Scythick Ocean, hath five 〈◊〉, and by reason of his straight passage, and violent course, is never frozen: the other on the back of Greenland, being 37 leagues long, hath three inlets, and remaineth frozen three months yearly. Between these two there lieth an Island, on the North of Lappia and B●●rmia, inhabited as they say by Pigmies, the tallest of them not above four foot high. A certain Scholar of Oxford reporteth, that these four Euripi are carried with such furious violence towards some Gulf, in which they are finally swallowed up, that no ship is able with never so strong a Gale to stem the Current; and yet that there is never so strong a wind as to blow a Windmill. The 〈◊〉, Ciral●us Cambrensis 〈◊〉 his Book De mirabilibus Hiberniae. So far and to this purpose he. But Blundevile our Countryman is of another opinion (as indeed who not?) neither believing that Pliny or any other of the Roman Writers came hither to describe this Promontory: or that the Oxford Friar without the Assistance of some cold Devil of the middle Region or the Air (and consequently able to endure all weathers) could approach so near as to measure these cold Countries with his Astrolabe, or take the height of this Blacks Rock with his jacob's Staff. Leaving this therefore as more fit for Lucian's Dialogues, than any serious discourse; we will proceed to matters of more truth and certainty.  
2. THE NORTH WEST parts of Terra incognita Borealis, are those which lie on the back of Estotiland, the most Northern Province of America: by which it hath been much endeavoured to find out a passage to Cathay and China, and not to go so far about as either by the Cape of Good Hope, or the Streits of Magellan. Attempted first by Sebastian Cabot, An. 1497. at the charge of Henry the 7th. of England. But having discovered as far as to the 67 Degree of Northern Latitude, by the mutiny of his Mariner's he was forced to return; where finding great preparations for a War with Scotland, that business for the present was laid aside. Resumed by Gaspar Corteriaglis, a Portugal, An. 1500, and after by Stephen Gomez a Spaniard, in the year 1525. bu● neither of them went to far to the North as Cabot. Pursued with greater industry, but as bad Success by Sir Martin Frobisher, who made three Voyages for these parts (the first of them in the year 1576.) and brought home some of the Natives, a Sea Unicorn horn (still kept in the great Wardrobe of Windsor Castle) and a great deal of the Ore of that Country, found upon trial, when in England, not to quit the cost. A great Promontory which he passed by, he called Queen Elizabeth's Foreland, in whose name he took possession of it; and the Sea running not far off, he called Frobishers Streits. The Seas full set with Icy Lands, some of them half a mile about, and 80 Pathoms above water; the People like the Samoeds, the worst kind of Tartars, in their lives and habit. John Davies followed the Design An. 1585. at the encouragement of Sir Francis Walsingham then Principal Secretary of Estate: and having in three Voyages discovered to the Latitude of 73 by reason of the many difficulties which he found in the Enterprise, and the death of Mr. Secretary, he was fain to give over; leaving unto a narrow Sea on the North of Estotiland the name of Fretum Davis in the Latitude of 65 and 20 Minutes, by which name still called. After him followed Weymouth, Hall, Hudson, Balton, Baffin, Smith, all English. The result of whose endeavours was the finding of some cold 〈◊〉 and points of Land, which they named King James his Cape, Queen Ann's Cape, Prince Henry's Foreland, Saddle Island, Barren Island, Red goose Island, Digges his Island; all of them betwixt 80 and 81. and the imposing on some passages and parts of the Sea the names of Hackluyts, Hendland, Smith's Bay, Hudsons' Streits, Maudlin's Sound, Fair Haven, and the like marks and ●monuments of their undertake. Nothing achieved of public moment but the Discovery of an Island called Cherry Island in the Latitude of 74 and the Shores of a large piece of the Continent, which they caused to be called King James his New Land, but most commonly Greenland; where they found many white Bears, with white, grey and Dun Foxes, Partridges, Geese, and some other Provisions, Sea-Unicorns Horns, great store of Morses (or Sea horses) the Oil and Teeth whereof yield no small Commodity. But most considerable for the Trade of Whale-fishing, which our men use yearly upon those Coasts; of whose Oil, Bones, and Brain (this last supposed to be the true Sperma Coeti, now used as Medicinal) they raise very great profit.  
3. THE NORTH EAST PARTS of Terra Incognita Borealis, are those which lie on the North of Russia and Tartary; by which the like passage towards Cathay and China hath been oft attempted; and hitherto with like success. Endeavoured first by Sebastian Cabor, the son of John Cabot so often mentioned before, by whom trained up in the Discovery of the North east parts of America. His employment failing here in England, he betook himself unto the service of the King of Spain; and coming out of Spain, An. 1549. was by King Edward the sixth made Grand Pilot of England, with an Annual Pension of 1661. 13 s. 4d. In the year 1553. he was the chief Dealer and Procurer of the Discovery of Russia and the North-east Voyages, undertaken and performed by Sir Hugh Willoughby, Chancellor, Burrough Jenkinson, and after prosecuted by Pet and Jackman. Some of which perished in the Action, and were frozen to death; their ship being found the next year hemmed about with ice, and a particular Account of all things which had happened to them. Others with better fortunes found the way to Russia (since that time made a common Voyage without dread or danger) and passing down the Volga to the Caspian Sea, and by that to Persia, were kindly entertained in the Court of the Sophy. The Hollanders in the year 1594 and in some years after, tried their Fortune also, under the conduct and direction of one William Barendson, their chief Pilot; but went no further than the English had gone before them; yet gave new names unto all places as they passed, as if they had been the first Discoverers; with pride and arrogance enough. Nothing since done of any note or consideration for the opening of this North-east passage, or giving us any better Account of the North of Tartary, or any Countries beyond that; but what we had many Ages since out of Paulus Venetus; so that we are but where we were, in a Terra Incognita. And though I would not willingly discourage any noble Actions, or brave and gallant undertake: Yet when I look upon the natures of those Shores and Seas, those tedious Winter's of ten months with no Summer following; the winds continually in the North, and the Main Ocean paved with Ice so long together: I cannot choose but rank the hopes of these Northern Passages amongst those Adventures which are only commendable for the difficulties presented in them.   

TERRA AVSTRALIS INCOGNITA.  
WIth better hopes we may go forwards on the next Discovery, and try what may be done on TERRA AUSTRALIS, or the Southern Continent; though hitherto INCOGNITA also, almost as much unknown as the Arctic Lands, which none but my good Friar of Oxon had the hap to meet with. A Continent conceived by our learned Brerewood, to be as large as Europe, Asia and afric▪ and that upon such strength of Reasons, as cannot be easily overborn by any opposite. His Arguments in brief are these, 1. That as touching Latitude, some parts thereof come very near to the Aequator, if they come not also on this side of it: and as for Longuitude, it keepeth along, though at several distances, the whole continual course of the other Continents. 2. It is clearly known, that in the other two Continents, the Land which lieth on the North side of that Line, is four times at the least as large as that which lies South thereof: and therefore since the earth is equally poized on both sides of her Centre; it must needs be that the Earth in answerable measure and proportion must advance itself in some places above the Sea, on the South side of the Line, as it doth in others on the North. By consequence, what is wanting in the South parts of the other two Continents, to countervail the North parts of them, must of necessity be supplied in the Southern Continent.  
The Country being so large, so free from the encumbrances of Frosts and Ice, and endless Winters; I have oft marvelled with myself that no further progress hath been made in Discovery of it: considering chiefly by the site and position of the Country, especially in those parts which lie nearest Asia, that there is nothing to be looked for elsewhere, either of profit or of pleasures, but may there be found. Whether it be, that there is some Nil ultra put to humane endeavours; or that this people are not yet made ripe enough to receive the Gospel; or that the great Princes of the Earth think it no good Policy to engage themselves in New Discoveries, till the Old be thoroughly planted, and made sure unto them; or that the Merchant, who in matters of this nature hath a powerful influence, thinks his hands full enough already; and being settled in so many and so wealthy Factories, will not adventure upon more. Which of all these, or whether all of these together be the cause of this stop, I am nor able to determine. Certain it is that here is a large field enough for Covetousness, Ambition, or Desire of glory to spend themselves in; enough to satisfy the greatest and most hungry appetite of Empire, Wealth, and Worldly pleasures; besides the Gallantry and merit of so brave an Action. Most which hath hitherto been done in it, hath been by the encouragements of the Vice Royes of New Spain, and Peru: by the first of which we came acquainted with the Coasts of Nova Guinea; by the Later, with those Countries called the Lands of Solomon but whether Continent or Lands, not yet fully known.  
And yet we must not rob Magellanus of his part of the honour, who passing thorough the Streits, which now bear his name, discovered those parts of it which from the fire thence seen he called Terra del Furgo, found by the Hollanders of late under James le Maire to be an Island. Nor do the English or the Dutch want their part herein, though what they did, was rather Accidental, then upon Design. For in the year 1593. Sir Richard Hawkins being bound for the Streits of Magellan, was by a cross wind driven on some part of this Continent, to which he gave the name of Hawkings his Maiden Land; A Promontory of it shooting into the Sea with three points he called Point Tremontein, and a pleasant Isle not far off, by the name of Fair Island. Saying along these Coasts in the 50 Degree of Southern Latitude, for the space of 60 miles and upwards, he found the Country as he passed to be very pleasant; and by the fires which he saw in the night to be well inhabited. By the like accident, An. 1999. Sibald de Weert, a Hollander, in his return from the Streits of Magellan fell upon some Lands of this Southern Continent, in the Latitude of 50 Degrees and 40 Minutes, which he caused to be called Sibalds Island. And besides these we owe to the Portugals the discovery of such parts hereof, as they fell on in their way to the Eastern Indies; of which we have little but the names, as Psittacorum Terra, so called from the abundance of Parrots which they saw on the Coasts, over against the Cape of good Hope. 2 Beach, a Region yielding Gold, and possessed by Idolaters; with the two Kingdoms of 3 Lucach▪ and 4 Maletur; all three against the Isles of Java, from which little distant.  
But the greatest light we have to see by into this dark business, is by the Voyages and Adventures of the Spaniards, employed by the two Viceroys of Peru, and Mexico, as before was said. For in the year 1543. the Governor of New-Spain then being, sent Villa Lobos with a Fleet towards the Moluccos, who in that Voyage made a Discovery of a rich and flourishing Country which he named Nova Guinea, by others since his time called Terra de Piccinacoli; and in the year 1563, Castro the Licentiate, than Viceroy of Peru, sent a Fleet from Lima, which under the conduct of Lopes Garcia de Castr●, discovered the Lands of Solomon. To which if we subjoin the success of the Hollanders in the Discovery of Fretum le Maire, and the Land, adjoining: the best Description we can make of this Southern Continent, must be in the Chorography and History of their Adventures; viz. 1 Terra del Fogo, 2 Insulae Solomonis, 3 Nova Guinea: beginning first with Terra del Fogo, because nearest to us.  
1. TERRA DEL FVEGO, l●es on the other side of the Strait of Magellane, heretofore thought to be a part of Terra Australis Incognita, or the Southern Continent, but is now discovered to be an Island, by one Jacob Mayre of Amsterdam, accompanied by Cornelius Schouten of Horn, both Hollanders. They began their Voyage on the 15. of June. An. 1615 and on the 19 of January Following they fell even with the Strait of Magellan. On the 24. of the same Month they had the sight of another Strait, which seemed to separate this Terra del ●uego from the rest of the Southern Continent; and on the 25. they 〈◊〉 into it. That part of the Land which (being entered into the Strait) they had on the West, they called Terra Mauritit de Nassaw; that on the East Statenland; the Strait itself, Fretum le Maire. The entrance into the Strait they ●ound to be in 55 degrees of Southern Latitude, and 50 Minutes, the Waters running into the North-Sea with so violent an Eddie, Vt adversum maris aestum difficulter superare 〈◊〉 ●aith he, who in the way of Journal or Ephemerideses, hath described the whole course of this Voyage. In the whole course whereof nothing so much observable (besides this Discovery) as that they ●ound that at their coming home they had lost a day (as must needs happen unto such, as in so tedious a Voyage had traveled Westward) that being Saturday to them which was Sunday to the Hollan●●ers, and to the rest of Europe though they had calculated the days since their going out with all exactress So that if there were any such Morality in the Sabbath, as some men pretend, these men must either keep their Sabbath on a different day from the rest of their Countrymen or otherwise to 〈◊〉 lie with them, must be guilty of the breach of the Sabbath all the rest of their lives. But of this 〈◊〉 at large elsewhere. To return therefore to this Strait, it is said to be seven ●utch miles, or 28 of 〈◊〉 in length, and of a fair and equal breadth; plentiful of good fish; especially of Sea-calves, and Whales. About the inserting of which Strait into the third Edition of my Microcosm, I received a Letter at such time as the Parliament was held in Oxon, An. 1625. subscribed G. B. and a little 〈◊〉 that, Sub granda storidus: which whether it were the Gentleman's Motto, or the Anagram of his name, I am not able to say, having never heard more of him from that time forwards, though his 〈…〉 in that next Edition of that Work. For my encouragement wherein he gave me this direction following. The News (saith he) of this New Streit coming into Spain, it pleased that King in the year 1618., to send and sear●● whether the truth were answerable unto the Report. And finding it 〈◊〉 much broader than the other, and not above seven Dutch miles long: decreed, that being the more 〈◊〉 and compendious way for Navigators, and less subject to dangers; his Auxiliary Forces should be sent that way into the East Indies, to defend the Philippinae and Molucco Lands, and the way by the Cape of good Hope to be left. In regard that every such voyage▪ requireth twice as much time: besides the variety of winds and often change of the Air, not only troublesome, but full of dis●●●es, consumeth the one half of the men before they return. Whereas ●●is way gaineth time (and if need be, they may dispatch business in the West as they travel into the East) without any extraordinary danger or loss of men. So far the very words of my letter. The intelligence given me in this L●tter, I find confirmed in a Relation of the Voyage made by Captain. Don juan de More, Anno, 618, at the command and charge of the King of Spain, who presently armed and furnished eight tall Ships, to send this new way unto his Philippines and Moluccos, under the conduct of Petrus Michaeles de Cordoel●n. Since it hath been found by experience, that even from our parts to the Moluccos, through this ●retum de Mayre, is but a passage of eight months: Sine ulla insigni navigantium called, saith the Narrator. But of this strait enough, to 〈…〉 my unknown 〈◊〉- willers 〈◊〉, and inform my Reade●: extremely sorry that the Gentleman was 〈…〉 to 〈◊〉 his name, that so his memory might have l●ved in these Papers, if they themselves bedest nate to a longer life.  
Now for the nature of the s●il, it is said to be very full of Mountains; but those Hills apparelled with woods, intermixed with Vall●es; the Valleys for the most part full of little Brooks which fall down from the Mountain's, and afford good Pasturage; the Seacoasts well provided of Bays and Roads, not unsafe for shipping: though the Air everywhere, but chiefly near the Sea, be much subject to Tempests. As for the People, they are said to be of a white complexion; but their Face, Arms, and Thighs, coloured with a kind of O●er: of full stature and well proportioned their hair black which they wear long to seem more terrible. The men most generally naked the women only shaded on their secret parts, with a pace of Leather.  
Towns they have none, nor any Habitations which deserve the name of Houses; so that the most which we can do is to Coast the Island. In which we find towards Mare deal Noort 1. A large Arm of the Sea, called Entrado de S. Sebastian. 2. The Cape of S. Ives 3▪ Mauritius land. 4. Promontorio de Buen Suscio. or the Cape of Good Success. Opposite where unto in another Island is the Cape of S. 〈…〉 and betwixt them the Strait called Fretum le Maire. Then in the New South Sea, as they call it, there are 5. Barnwelts Island, 6. the Lands of S. Ildesonso; 7. Cape Horn on a fair Promontory, in the South west And: which doubled, the Country goes along with a straight shore, on which I find some Bays and Capes, but no names unto them; till we come to the Western entrances of the Streits of Magellan, opposite unto Cape Victoria, so often mentioned.  
2. INSULAE SOLOMONIS, or the Lands of Solomon, are situate on the West of Terra del Fogo, 11 degrees on the South of the Equinoctial. Discovered in the year 1567., by Lopes Garcia de Castro, sent by the Vice Roy of Peru to find out new Countries. By whom thus named, in hope that men would be the rather induced to inhabit in them; imagining that Solomon had his Gold from these Lands of Ophir.  
In number they are many, but 18. the principal: Some of which 300 miles in compass, others 200, and others of them less till we come to fifty, and beneath that, none. All liberally furnished with Dogs, Hogs, Hens, Cloves, Ginger, Cinnamon, and some veins of Gold. The chief of these eighteen, are, 1 Guadalcanal, supposed to be the greatest of them; upon the coast whereof the Spaniards sailed 150 Leagues, where they found a Town which they burned and sacked, because the People of it in a sudden surprise, had killed fourteen of their men. 2 S Isabel, 150 leagues in length, and eighteen in breadth; the Inhabitants, some black, some white, some of brown complexion. 3 S. Nicolas 100 Leagues in compass, inhabited by a People which are black of hue, but said to be more witty than the other Savages. All of them situate betwixt the Strests of Magellan, and the Lands of Thiefs; and yet not well agreed upon amongst our Authors, whether to be accounted Lands, or a part of the Continent: The Spaniards having layled 700 Leagues on the Coasts hereof, and yet not able to attain unto any certainty. But being they pass generally in Account for Lands, and by that name are under the Vice Roy of Peru▪ who appoints their Governors, let them pass so still.  
3. NOVA QVINEA lieth beyond the Lands of Solomon, in respect of us preceding 〈◊〉 have begun from the Land of Fire. Discovered, as before was said An. 1543. by Vilia Lobu● (Horrera attributes the discovery of it to Alvarez de Saavedra, and sets it higher in the year 1527.) more perfectly made known, if I guess aright by Fernando de Quir. Who being sent with two Ships to make a more full discovery of the Lands of Solomon, and taking his course about the height of the Magellan streits, discovered a main Land coming up close to the Aequinoctial, on the Coasts whereof he 〈◊〉 800 Leagues, till he found himself at last in the Latitude of 15 Degrees, discovering a large Bay into which fell two great Rivers, where he purposed to settle a Plantation, and to that end presented a Petition to the King of Spain. This Country I conceive by the site and position of it to be Nova Guinea, coming up close as that doth to the Aequinoctial; and after turning to the South towards the Tropic of Capricorn where it joineth with Malatur. And taking it for granted, as I think I may, I shall afford the Reader this Description of it, out of his Memorials; in which it is soberiy affirmed to be a Terrestrial Paradise for wealth and pleasures. The Country plentiful of Fruits, Coco-nuts, Almonds of four sorts, Pom●citrens, Dates, Sugar canes, and Apples: plenty of Swine, Goats, H●ns, Partridges, and other Fowl, with some Kine and Buffals. Nothing inferior (as it seemeth) to Guinea in the Land of Negroes; and from thence so named. For, as he saith, he saw amongst them Silver, and Pearls, and some told him of Gold; the Countries on the Coast seeming to promise much felicity within the Land. The Air he found to be whole and temperate, the Sea shores to be full of Bayss, Havens, and the Exits of Rivers, making show as of another China. The Inhabitants he affirmeth to be innumerable, some white, some like the Mulatos, other-like the Negroes; diversified in Habit, as well as Colour. Their 〈◊〉 made of three sorts of Roots: without Government, but not without Religion; for they had their several Oratories and places of 〈◊〉, but neither King, nor Laws, nor Arts. Divided by that want, and in daily wars with one another; their Arms, Bows, Arrows, and other weapons, but all made of wood. Of this Country whatsoever it was (if not Nova Guinea) he took possession in the name of the Catholic King, and set up both a Cross, and a Chapel in it; the Chapel dedicated to the Lady of Loretto.  
The precise time of this Discovery I have nowhere found but the time spent about it is by him affirmed to be 14 years. to the no small endamagement of his health and fortunes. Nor do I find that any care was taken of his Petition, or any thing else done by others in pursuance of his Propositions. Whether it were on any of the reasons before laid down; or that there was no credit given to his affirmations, I determine not. Not find I that he gave any names to the Bayss or Promontories, as he passed along; but either took such names as were given before, or found not any thing worth the naming. And for such names as were given before (still taking Ferdinando Quir's new Country for Nova Guinea) we find a Promontory called Cape Hermoso, in the East parts hereof near the Lands of Nolomon, and not far from the Aequator. 2 Another in the Western part, but as near the Aequinox, called Point Primiro. 3▪ A third in the first bend of the Coast towards the South called Cape de Buena Deseada or the Cape of good desires. 4 Rio de Valcanes'. 5 Rio de Lorenzo. 6 Rio de S. Augustino, on the East or Cape Formoso towards the Streits. 7 The Rivers of S. Peter. 8. S. Paul. 9 S. Andrew. And 10 S. James, betwixt Cape Formoso and Primiro.  
But being there is little certain of these last discoveries, and the greatest certainty we have of that little, is nothing but a List of names without any thing observable in the state and story of the same, they may still retain the old name of Terra Incognita And therefore I will try my fortune, and without troubling the Vice Royes of Peru, and Mexico, or taking out Commission for a new Discovery, will make a search into this Terra Australis for some other Regions, which must be found either here or nowhere. The names of which, 1 Mundus alter & 〈◊〉. 2 Utopia. 3. New Atlantis. 4 Fairy Land 5 The Painter's Wives Island. 6 The Lands of Chivalry. And 7 The New World in the Moon.  
1. MUNDUS ALTERET IDEM, another world and yet the same, is a witty and ingenious invention of a learned Prelate▪ writ by him in his younger days (but well enough becoming the austerity of the gravest head) in which he distingu●sheth the Vices, Passions, Humours, and ill Affections most commonly incident to mankind, into several Provinces; gives us the Character of each, as in the descriptions of a Country, People, and chief Cities of it: and sets them forth unto the eye in such lively colours, that the vicious man may see there in his own Deformities, and the well-minded man his own imperfections. The Scene of this design laid by the Reverena Author, in this Terra Australis; the Decorum happily preserved in the whole Discovery; the style acutely clear, the invention singular. Of whom and his New World I shall give you that Eulogy which the Historian doth of Homer, Nec ante illum quem ille im●taretur, neque post illum qui eum imitari posset, inventus est.  
2. UTOPIA is a Country first discovered by Si● Thomas More, after Lord Chancellor of England; and by him made the Scene of a Commonwealth, which neither Solon nor Lycurgus, nor any of the Legislators of former times did ever dream of; nor had been fancied by Plato, Aristotle, Tully, or any who have written the Ideas of a form of Government, though not reducible to practise. Some of his Plots we have took notice of already, as viz. his device to bring Gold and Silver into contempt by making of those metals, Chains and Fetters for their Malefactors, Pans of Close-stools, chamberpots, and Vessels of such unclean use; by imposing it as a penalty on infamous persons, to wear Gold Rings upon their Fingers, and the like devices: as also his device to prevent mistakes and dislikes in marriages, by giving the parties a full view of each other, naked. Many more projects of this nature, some of them possible enough, but so unpracticable, so beyond hope of being looked on in the modelling of a Commonwealth, that we may reckon his device amongst those strange fancies, quae nunquam antea spe concepta, ne dum opere tentata erant. The man indeed (considering the times he lived in) of rare abilities; but his Utopia 〈◊〉 only to the Meridian of this Southern Continent, this Terra Australis Incognita, in which now we are and to no place else.  
3. NEW ATLANTIS is an Island of this Southern Continent, discovered by Sir Francis Bacon, the learned Viscount of S. Alban; one of Sir Thomas Moor's successors in the place of Lord Chancellor, but far before him in the Excellency and feasibility of his invention. It had this name with reference to Atlantis▪ an Island of the Western or Atlantic Ocean, mentioned in the Works of Plato; both alike invisible. But for his falling on this Island his description of it, the City of Ben. Salem and the manner of his reception there, such handsome probabilities, and so fairly carried, that to one not acquainted with the State of the World, it would seem a Reality. But above all things, the inventions and designs of Solomon's House, for perfecting the works of nature, or rather improving nature to the best advantages of life, and the benefit of mankind are beyond comparison. The man, I must confess had his personal errors (I know none without them) of good and bad qualities equally compounded, Mores ejus vigore & levitate mixtissimi, as Paterculus once said of Piso: not one amongst many thousands (to pursue that Character) qui aut otium validius diligat, out facilius sufficiat negotio. A man of a most strong Brain, and a Chemical Head. Who if he had been entertained with some liberal Salary, abstracted from all Affairs both of State and Judicature, and furnished with sufficiency both of means and helps, for the going on in his design, would, I am confident, have given us such a body of natural Philosophy, and made it so sub●ervient to the public good, that neither Aristotle or Theophrastus amongst the A●●●ents▪ nor Paracelsus or the rest of our later Chemists, would have been considerable.  
4. FAIRY LAND, is another part of this Terra Incognita; the habitation of the Fairies, a pretty kind of little fiends, or Pigmy devils, but more inclined to sport them mischief; of which old Women, who remember the times of Popery, tell us many fine stories. A cleanlyer and more innocent cheat was never put upon poor ignorant people, by the Monks and Friars. Their habitation here or no where; though sent occasionally by Oberon and their other Kings, to our parts of the World For not being reckoned amongst the good Angels, nor having malice enough to make them Devils (but such a kind of mid●ng Spirits, as the Latins call Lemures Larvae) we must find out some place for them neither Heaven or Hell and most likely this. Their Country never more ennobled, then by being made the Scene of that excellent Poem. called the Facrie Queen. Intended to the honour of Queen Elizabeth, and the greatest persons in her Court: but shadowed in such lively colours, framed so exactly by the Rules of Poesy, and representing such Ideas of all moral goodness; that as there never was a Poem more Arti●cial: so can no Ethical discourse, more fashion and inflame the mind to the love of virtue. Invisurum facilius aliquem quam imitaturum shall be Spencer's Motto; and so I leave him to his rest.  
5. The PAINTER'S WIVES ISLAND, is an Island of this Tract mentioned by Sir Walter Raleigh, in his History of the World. Of which he was informed by Don Pedro de Sarmiento, a Spanish Gentleman, employed by his King in planting some Colonies on the Streits of Magellan (which we have touched upon before) Who being taken Prisoner by Sir Walter in his going home, was asked of him about some Island which the Maps presented in those Streits, and might have been of great use to him in his undertaking. To which he merrily replied, that it was to be called the Painter's Wives Island, saying, that whilst the Painter drew that Map. his wife sitting by, desired him to put in one Country for her, that she in her imaginations might have an Island of her own. His meaning was, that there was no such Island as the Maps presented. And I fear the Painter's wife hath many Lands and some Countries too upon the Continent, in our common Maps, which are not really to be found on the strictest search.  
6. THE LANDS OF CHIVALRY are such Lands, Provinces, and Kingdoms in the Books of Errantry, which have no being in any known part of the World and therefore must be sought in this. A gross absurdity but frequent in those kind of Writers, who in describing the Adventures of their Knights, in despite of Geographie (with which indeed they had no acquaintance) have not only disjoined Countries which are near together, and laid together Countries which are far remote; but given us the description of many Lands, Provinces, and mighty Kingdoms, which as the ingenious Author of the History of Don Quixot, merrily observeth, are not to be found in all the Map. Of this sort is the Isle of Adamants in Sir Huon of Bordeaux; the Fayery-Iland in the History of Amadis de Gaul; the hidden Island and that of the Sage Aliart in S. Palmerin of England; the Lands of Lindaraza, and the Devilish Fauno, with the Kingdom of Lyra (of which the Amazonian Lady Archisipoza was the rightful Queen) and many others of that kind in the Mirror of Knighthood; and divers of like nature in Palmerin de Oliva, Primaleon, and Belianis of Greece. Parismus, the Romance of Romances, and indeed who not of all that Rabble? Handsomely humoured by Michael de Cervantes in his Island of Barutaria. of which the famous Sancho Panca was sometimes Governor, and the Kingdom of Micomicona. And yet I cannot but confess (for I have been a great Student in these Books of Chivalry) that they may be of very good use to Children or young Boys in their Adolescency. For besides that they divert the mind from worse cogitations, they perfect him that takes pleasure in them in the way of reading, beget in him an habit of speaking, and animate him many times to such high conceptions as really may make him fit for great undertake.  
7. THE NEW WORLD IN THE MOON, was first of Lucian's discovering; a man of eminent parts, but as ill a Conscience, Apostatising from the faith in which he was b●ed. Aristophanes had before told us in one of his Comedies of a Nephelococcygia, or a City of Cuckoos in the Clouds. But Lucian was the first who found out this New World in the Moon: of which and of the Inhabitants of it, he affordeth us in one of his Dialogues a conceited Character. But of late times, that World which he there fancied, and proposed but as a fancy only, is become a matter of a more serious debate: and some have laboured with great pains to make it probable, that there is another World in the Moon, inhabited as this is by persons of divers Languages, Customs, Polities, and Religions. and more than so, some means and ways proposed to consideration for maintaining an intercourse and commerce betwixt that and this. But being there are like endeavours to prove that the Earth may be a Planet, why may not this Southern Continent be that Planet, and more particularly that Moon, in which this other World is supposed to be? Certainly there are stronger hopes of finding a New World in this Terra Australis, then in the Body of that Planet; and such perhaps as might exceed both in profit and pleasure the later discoveries of America.  
But I am no discourager of industry and ingenuity, which I love and honour wheresoever I find it. I know great Truths have many times been startled upon less presumptions. Nor would I be mistake, as if in my pursuit of this Terra Incognita, I put scorn on any of sublimer thoughts; or that I would have any man so much in love with the present World, as not to look for another World in the Heaven above. It is reported that in some controversy betwixt the Polander and the Duke of Moscovie, the King of Poland sent the Moscovite a curious Globe, representing the whole Heavenly Bodies, with the particular motion of each several Sphere: To which the Muscovite returned this unworthy Answer, Tu mihi Coelum mittis, Red mihi Terras de quibus contendimus; You send me Heaven, faith he, but that will not satisfy, unless you give me back those Lands which are now in question. And much I fear there are too many of this mind, who would not lose their part on Earth for all Heaven itself. Whom I desire if any such peruse these Papers, to consider, That as much as the most flourishing Country which is here described, doth fall short of that Paradise wherein God placed our father Adam; so much and infinitely more did that Earthly Paradise fall short of the unspeakable glories of the kingdom of Heaven. To the diligent and careful search of which Heavenly Kingdom I heartily commit the Reader: not doubting but the Works of GOD which are here presented, and that viciss●ude of Humane affairs which is herein touched at, may prompt him to some serious thoughts of that mighty GOD who made all these Works, in whom is no show nor shadow of change. To whom be given all Glory, both in this World, and that to come.  
Quicquid enim Lurae gremio complectitur Orbis,  
Permutat variátque vices, trepidóque tumultu  
Aestuat & nunquam sentit pars una quietem.  
Nam ruit in sese, & civili vulnere semper  
Aut cadit, aut perimit; alióque renascitur ore,  
Rursus ut intereat; sic non est omnibus unum  
Partibus ingenium, non vis nativa. Sed Orbs  
Astri●eri, & nitidi sublimis Regia Coeli  
Immunis senii, & vultu immutabilis uno  
Perpetuum servat solida & sincera tenorem.  
The Verses are G. buchanan's, in his Book De Spharea. Which I thus translate, and therewithal conclude this Work.  
The World beneath the Moon, its shapes doth vary,  
And change from this to that; nor can it tarry  
Long in one state: but with itself doth jar,  
Kills, and is kil●'d, in endless Civil war.  
New-formed again, 'tis but to die. The frame  
Neither of Bodies nor of Minds the same.  
But That above the Spheres, the Heavens on high  
In which GOD reigns in glorious Majesty;  
Free from old Age, unchanged, and of one face,  
Always presents itself in equal Grace.  
Non nobis, Domine, non nobis, sed Nomini tuo detur Gloria.   
FINIS.   

The Emendation of the Errata in the Fourth Book.  
FOl. 3 lin. 1. for Longo, read Congo. f. 7. l. 3. for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. 83. for entail, r. entangle. ib. 18. for surely, r. soberly. 11. 29. for Salved, r. Sa●●d. ●6. 34. for likewise, r. likeliest. 16. 28. for 13000. r. 1300. fol. 19 4. for Therah, r. Zerah. 21. 14. for Alub r. A●ub. 34. 10 deal ●ime made. 36. 58. for made them, r. made them quit. 39 7. for Erritus, r. Erriffe. 16. 31. for Agu, r. Agla. 40. 9 for Algaria, r Asgara. 41. 30. for Sexta & Senta, r. Septa & Seuta ib. 38. for these, r. the. 42. 10 for Sire, r. Sierra. ib. 52. for putation, r. computation. 41. 20. for are, r. all. 43. 20 for Alg●ek, r. Algzire. 43. 67. for 1554. r. 1544. fol. 44. 8. for Il. r. the. 50. 63. for first King, r. second King. 53. 56. for Oden, r. and then. 54 30. for Carthage, r. Canaga. 62. 35. for Amgara, r. Amara. 66 38. for or, r. of. 73. 56 for Barbarians, r. Barbaria. 87. 38. for five, r. for. ib. 48. 50. for Tenaritte, r. Tenarisse. ib. 53. for wood, r. Woad. ib. 61. for the one, r. one, 89 38. for Azzobes, r. Arrobes. 97. 26. for Gubananis. r. Guahanani. 16. 50. for turn at, r. atturn. 29. 20. for use, r. space. 102. 17. for Rhone, r. Rhosne, 103 37. for Nova F●ancia, r. Canada, or Nova Francia. 118. l. 1. for specially, r. specially so called. 4. for Lucayoncyn, r Luca●oneque. 119. 16 ● like a Demy-Iland. 8. for on the ●rest, r. on the West New Spain & New Gallicia. 19 for bound, r. bounded, 123. 30. for in r. and. 125. 38. for Hiustla, r. Piastla. 128. 1. for S Fagi, r. S. Fe. 122. 30. for last I take to be, r. placed by ay de Eaet. ib. 52. d. more properly belonging to the Province of Seio. 129. 55. for M●te, r. Me●l. 135. l. 38 42. & 59 for Guaxata, r. Guaxaca. 156. 47. for Diada, r. Oieda. 160. 41. for River, r. River of Plate. 159. 55. for S. Matthew, r. Mathan. 170. for Wiacopo, r. Wiapoco. 196. 58. for Fairy Island, r. Firm Island. l. 60 for Archisipoza, r. Archisilora.   

An advertisement to the Reader, concerning the ensuing TABLES.  
SHort Tables may not seem proportionable to so long a Work, especially in an Age wherein there are so many that pretend to learning, who study more the Index than they do the Book. But to this Work short Tables will be long enough, considering that the Running titles on the top of each leaf, direct the Reader to a view of those Countries which he is to travel; and consequently to as much knowledge of those things which concern those Countries as this Work can give him. Howsoever that I may not be wanting in any poimt to the Readers ease, I have drawn those titles into Method by the course of the Alphabet; and added all the rest of the Provinces both great and small, which are herein mentioned and described: with the names of those Estates and Nations, whether old or new, the sum of whose affairs is here drawn together. This being done in the first of these Tables, I have reduced into a second the names of those particular Nations, with their several Tribes (the principal of them at the least) which anciently inhabited those Kingdoms, Provinces, and Islands, the chorography and History whereof is my chief endeavour: that being marshaled by themselves, they be no hindrance to the Reader in the search of those places, which he hath more desire to visit. And finally whereas there are many things in this Work looking towards philology, and some particulars not easily reducible to the other Tables, I have digested the chief of them into a third; leaving the rest unto the consideration of the studious Reader, who possibly might take it ill if nothing should be left to his care and memory.   

A Table of the principal Countries, Provinces, Mountains, Seas, and Islands, contained and described in this Book.  

A  
ABruzzo 157  
Apulia 61  
Apennine hills 37  
Alps M. 131  
Aeolian Isles 72  
Adriatic Sea 100  
Argow 141  
Aquitanica 153  
Aquitain 178  
Anjou 167  
Auxerrois 158  
Amiens Vidamate 160  
Auvergn 174  
Aubigni 172  
Angolesm 177  
Armaignac 181  
Albret 182  
Agenois 182  
Aurange 187  
Avignon 187  
Alderney 198  
Andaluzia 225  
Algarve 239  
Azores 239  
Asturia 219  
Arragon 249  
Anglesey 317   

Lib. II.  
Austrasia 48, 63  
Artois 9  
Alsatia 60  
Algow 67  
Arthusen 125  
Aggerrhuis 132  
Astrachan 158  
Austria 74  
Ausbach 83  
Alsen 128  
Absyrtides 197  
Anhalt 104  
Arbe 197  
Achaia propria 219  
Arcadia 221  
Argolis 225  
Achaia 228  
Attica 228  
Athens 229  
Aetolia 236  
Athamanis 237  
Acarnania 238  
Albania 240  
Aegean Sea 254  
Aegina 257  
Andros 258  
Anaphne 259  
Astypalea ibid.   

Lib. III.  
Asia 13  
Asia minor 5  
Asia propria 14  
Anatolia 5  
Amazons 9  
Aeolis 21  
Amathusia 42  
Ammonites 76  
Auranitis 80  
Aser 83  
Arabia 111  
Deserta 112  
Petrosa 113  
Felix 117  
Amal●k●●s 115  
Assy●ia 131  
Adiabene 131, 13●  
Arrapachitis 131  
Aladeule 140  
Armenia major 142  
Armenia minor 14  
Albania 149  
Atropatia 159  
Arachosia 169  
Aria 170  
Altai 200  
Anian 203 & l 4.  
Agra 222  
Au●ea Chersonesus  
Ava 239  
Arracan 235  
Amboina 251   

Lib. IV.  
Africa 1  
Africa propria 28, 29  
Augustanica 12  
Arcadla Egyptiaca 12  
Ammoniaca 15  
Afgara 40  
Algeirs 24  
Atlas M. 48  
Agadez 54  
Aethiopia superior 59  
Aethiop●a inferior 23  
Aethhiopic Isles 84  
Angore 64  
Amcora 64  
Adel 67  
Adea 68  
Agasymba 73  
Ag●ig●, or G●ace●i 76, 80  
Angola 79  
Aurichana 81  
Ascension Isle 86  
Anmb●n 86  
Altlant●●ae I●●. 90  
Antig●ca 95  
Andes M. 1●1  
Antigo 180  
Australis Incognita 193   

B  
BAsilica●e 60  
B●i 62  
Belgica 153 & l, 2, 3  
Barrois 158  
Brie 158  
Bou●ogri●s 160  
B●e●agne 165  
Beausse 170  
Berry 171  
B●u bon 173  
Beaupolis 173  
Buche 179  
Bearn 180  
Bigorre 181  
Bresse 191  
Burgundy K 189  
Burgundy D 193  
Burgundy C 1●9  
Burgund●e T●antiu●ane 133  
Bi●cay 221  
Betica 212  
Bae●uria 228  
Baleares 248  
Britain 256  
Bardsey 348  
〈◊〉 295   

Lib. II.  
Belgium 3  
〈◊〉 D. 14  
〈◊〉 18  
Bu●en E. 28  
Beve●land 24  
Be●g 50  
B●sgow 67  
Bavaria 69  
B●mberg B. 82  
Baden 86  
Bohem●a 88  
Brandenb●rg 95  
Brunswick 109  
Brenrens B. 115  
Borglave 126  
Baltic Sea 126  
Baltic Islands 126  
Bornholm 128  
Bleseida 130  
Bodia or Bodner 144  
Biarmia 156  
Bosnia 193  
Be●larab●a 204  
Bulgaria 209  
Boeotia 232  
Bosp●orus Thracius 254  
Bosph. Cimmetius l. 3. 187   

Lib. III.  
Bythinia 6  
Be●k. 〈◊〉. 80  
B●njamin 92  
Babylonia 128  
Bahaman K. 141  
Bac●ria 175  
Bargu  
Botanter 234  
Benga●a 235  
〈◊〉 Brama 238, 239  
Banram 250  
Bo●neo 252   

Lib. IV.  
Ba●b●rie 25  
Ba●buia Antiqua 73  
Bugia 32  
B●●edulgerid 50  
Benin 56  
Bornum 56  
Bagamedrum 68  
Barnagassum 66  
Barus 69  
Batta 80  
Bambu 79  
Bucidaos 105  
Brion 108  
B●iton Isle 108  
Bersi●daz 113  
Brasil 164  
Batiama 118  
Bonaire 127  
Barbados 179  
Boriquen 180  
Borealis Incognita 191   

C  
CEltica 153  
Campania 55  
Campagna di Roma 84  
Ca●abria 59  
Superior 60  
Inferior 59  
Capitanate 62  
Capri 63  
Capraria 112  
Camerine 95  
Chioggia 101  
Corsica 118  
Champagne 157  
Cominges 181  
Charrolois 194  
Corduba K. 225  
Corvo 241  
Castille 233  
Catalonia 245  
Cerdagne 247  
Connaught 311  
Cassiterides 318   

Lib. II.  
Cambray B. 13  
Cleveland 48  
Colon B. 53  
Carinthia 77  
Carniola 77  
Cimbrick Chersonese 121  
Codonama 128  
Corelia 156  
Curland 168  
Condora 156  
Casan 158  
Croatia 193  
Carpathian Mountains 181  
Contado di Zara 195  
Corinthia 228  
Chaonia 238  
Constantinople 250  
Cyclades 257  
Cythera 260  
Crete 260  
Candie 260. 263  
Canca 264  
Claudia 265  
Cia 265  
Corcyra 268  
Curzola 197  
Cephalonia 267   

Lib. III.  
Cappadocia 13  
Caria 25  
Cilicia 31  
Chios 35  
Claros 37  
Coos 38  
Carpathos 38  
Cyprus 41  
Coole Syria 64  
Comagena 61  
Chusites 116  
Colchis 145  
Cus●ian Sea 173  
Circassais 190  
Chaldaea 127  
Carmania 165  
Cathay 198  
Cascar Chesmur Camul Carazan Cardandan Caindu 201  
China 206  
Citor K. 222  
Cambaia 223 224  
Canara 226  
Cononor 227  
Calcutta 228  
Cranganor 228  
Cochin 228  
Cai-Coulan 228  
Coulan 228  
Couch 234  
Champa 240  
Camboia 240  
Cauchin China 239   

Lib. IV.  
Cyrene 16  
Carthage 30  
Constantina 31  
Chaus 42  
Couch 63  
Cafraria 77  
Canary Islands 87  
Cosyra 45  
Corcina 46  
Canon 54  
Casena 54  
Canada 106  
Cicuic 119  
Cibola 120  
Cou●iacan 125  
Cinaloa 124  
Califormia 119. 121  
Chiapa 137  
Costu Rica 139  
Chiametla 138  
Castilia Aurea 142  
Carthagena 142  
Cusco 153  
Collao 153  
Crux de la Sierra 163  
Charcha 154  
Chilemalca 152  
Clide 158  
Capitaniae de S. Vincent 155  
di Rio di janiere di Spitito Sancto di Porto Segaro does Ilheos' 155  
di Todos los San. di Fernambuc di Timaraca di Paraiba 156  
di Rio Grandee di Siara di Muzaggion di Paria 157  
Cumana 174  
Cubagna 176  
Caribes 179  
S. Christopher 180  
Cuba 182   

D  
Dauphin 190   

Lib. II.  
Denmark 120  
Ditmarsh 122  
Dwina 160  
Dalmatia 194  
Dacia 200  
Dardania  
Doris 236  
Doles 257   

Lib. III.  
Doris 25  
Drusians 57  
Decapolis 82  
Dan 82. 89  
Dead Sea 74  
Drangiana 168  
Dialsinda 219  
Delby 221  
Diu 224  
Decan 225   

Lib. IV.  
Duccala 37  
Dara 50  
Damut 64  
Dancali 69  
Dobas 69  
Darien 143  
Dominica 181  
Deseada 179   

E  
EUrope 32  
Exarchate 78  
Extremadura 228  
Ebuica 247  
England 258  
East Angles 278  
East-Saxons 277   

Lib. II.  
East-Friseland 115  
Estland 167  
Elis 220  
Epirus 238  
Euxine Sea 253  
Erithynnus 253  
Euboea 256  
Echinades 260   

Lib. III.  
Ephraim 87  
Ergimul 201   

Lib. IV.  
Egypt 3. 12  
Erriffe 41  
El-Habat ib.  
Estotiland 183   

F  
FErrara 79  
Flaminia 77  
Friuli 98  
Florence D. 108. 109  
France 145  
France special 154  
Isle of France 156  
Forest 172  
Foix 180  
Paial 240  
Flores 241  
Frumentaria 247   

Lib. II.  
Flanders 7  
Flammengant 7  
Imperiall 8  
Gallicant 8  
Franconia 81  
Fionia or Fuinen 127  
Fimera 128  
Falstri ib.  
Frozen Ocean 133  
Finmark 143  
Finland 144  
Freezland 134   

Lib. IV.  
Fez 38 39  
Fatigar 68  
Fuerte ventura 888  
Florida 115  
Fretum Davis 103  
Fretu●n le More 194  
Fairie-land 196   

G  
GIglio 112  
Genoa S. 115  
Geneva S. 139  
Grisons B. 143  
Gallia 145  
Cisalpina 120  
Comata 153  
Braccata 127  
Gast●nois 155  
Guisnes 160  
Guise 161  
Gurenne 179  
Gascoign 180  
Garneley 197  
Gaipascoa 221  
Gallicia 223  
Gades 227  
Gibraltar ab.  
Granada 229  
Gratiosa 241  
S. George's 141   

Lib. II.  
Gelderland 27  
Groyningen 29  
Germany 36  
Gu●ick 49  
Gothland Cont. 140  
Gothland Isle 145  
Groinland 134  
Greece 215  
Gyaros 258   

Lib. III.  
Galatia 11  
Gadites 78  
G lead M. 69  
Galilee 81  
G●sh●r 80  
Gau●onitis 80  
Geo● gia 147  
Geodiosia 168  
Gazurate 223  
Goa 225  
Gouren 234   

Lib. IV.  
Guzzala 36  
Garet 40  
Goza 45  
Gaulos 46  
Gualata 54  
Gumbra Ghenega Gialofi Guber Guinea 55  
Guangara 56  
Guega 57  
Guagere 62  
Goyami 65  
Gallae 72 76  
Gorgades 87  
Gomera 88  
Guanahani 118  
Guadalaiara 126  
Guaxaca 135  
Guatimala 137, 138  
Guiana 169, 170  
Guadalupe 180   

H  
HIero 72  
Histria 99  
He truria 107  
Haspurge B. 141  
Helvetia  
Heurepoix 155  
Hispania 207  
Hebrides 316  
Holy Land 320   

Lib. II.  
Hainalt 11  
Holland 21  
South Holland 21  
North Holland 22  
Horn E. 19  
Hegow 66  
Hanaw 80  
Henneberg E. 83  
Hassia 111  
Holstein 122, 123  
Hollandia 129  
Hemodes 128  
Hyperborean Monte 153  
Hungary 182  
Haemus M. 213  
Hell. spont 254  
Helen 259   

Lib. III.  
Hermon M. 69  
Jerusalem 93  
Hyrcania 173   

Lib. IV.  
Hea 37  
Hascora 38  
S. Helen's 85  
Hierro 88  
Holy Port 89  
Hesperides 90  
Hondura 139  
Hispaniola 181   

I  
ITalie 34  
Isle of Naples 63  
Ischia 63  
Isles of the Adriatic 100, 196  
Ilva 111  
Ividot 162  
Jarsey 197  
Ireland 306  
Ila 316  
Jona 316   

Lib. II.  
Juitland 125  
Iseland 133  
Jugra 157  
Illyr●cum 192  
Imbrus 255  
Ionian Sea 265  
Ithaca 268  
Illyris 195   

Lib. III.  
jonia 21  
Isauria 28  
Icaria 37  
Icarian Sea 37  
Ishtob 80  
Ituraea 77  
Issachar 82  
Judaea 88  
Judah 91  
Idumaea 97  
Ismaelites 116  
Iberia 147  
Imaas M. 1, 200  
India 213  
Intra Gangem 216  
Extra Gangem 237  
Isles of Bengala 235  
Jangoma 240  
jor 244  
japan 247  
java major 252  
java minor 253   

Lib. IV.  
Inhamban 77  
Imbians 74 78  
S. lago 87  
jamaica 184  
Insulae Solomonis 194   

K  
KEnt K. l. 1. 276  
K●nites l. 2. 115  
Kirgesse's l. 2. 192   

L  
LAtium 84  
Lipara 72  
Laity of the Church 77  
Luca S. 114  
Lombardie 120  
Liguria 115  
Lugdunensis 153. 192  
Limaign 174  
Limosin 176  
La March 177  
Languedock 183  
Lionois 192  
Lusitanica 212. 238  
Leon and Oviedo 219  
Lemster 309  
Lundie 318   

Lib. II.  
Limbourg 15  
Luxenbourg 14  
Liege B. 16  
Luickland 16  
Lorein 62  
Lucht●nberg 87  
Lunenbourg 110  
Lawenburg 110  
Lusatia 94  
Lip E. 114  
Langeland 128  
Lawland 128  
Lapland 143  
Livonia 166  
Lettenland 168  
Lituania 169  
Lucinia 192. 195  
Lesina 196  
Laciosia 222  
L●burnades 196  
Locris 235  
Lemnos 255  
Leucadia   

Lib. III.  
Leuco-Syria 13  
Lydia 22  
Lycia 26  
Lycaonia 27  
Lesbes 31  
Lapethia 43  
Lop 201  
Lamor 220  
Laos 240  
Lequin 249   

Lib. IV.  
Libya 14  
Libya Deserta 51  
Latophagitis 46  
Loango 81  
Loande ib.  
Lanserotte 88  
Lucaios 117. 118  
Lima 152  
Ladrones 178  
Lands of Chivairie 196   

M  
MOlosse 58  
Mazara 71  
Mona 71  
Muriano 101  
Marca Anconitana 81  
Marca Trevigiana 97  
Mediterranean Sea 67  
Malam●cco 101  
Milan 121  
Mantua 124  
Modena 126  
Montferrat 128  
Maine 168  
Monpensier 174  
Mu cia 232  
Montpelier 247  
Majorca K. 246  
Majorca Island 247  
Minorca 247  
Mercia 280  
Munster 311  
Meath 3●9  
Man 316  
S. Mary's 240  
S. Michael 240   

Lib. II.  
Marquisate of the Empire 19  
Machlyn 19  
Mark 51  
Muers 49  
Mentz B. 55  
Montbelgard 61  
Moravia 93  
Mecklenburg 100  
Magdeburg 104  
Mis●ia 102  
Mansfield 104  
Moscovie 154  
Mosaiskie 154  
Mordwitz 159  
Massovia 173  
Mellida 197  
Moldavia 204  
Moesia 208  
Mes●ene 221  
Mycenae 227  
Megaris 232  
Macedon 242  
Mygdonia 244  
Melos 159   

Lib. III.  
Metapontus' 8  
Mysia 38  
Midianites 75. 115  
Moabites 75  
Ma●asi●s 80. 66  
Mesopo●amia 137  
Media 158  
Margiana 174  
Mand●o 220  
Mou●a● 220  
Moguls 236  
Ma●●bar 227  
Ma●●ur  
Ma●●● 242  
〈◊〉 243  
Ma●●●●an 244  
Ma●●n 244  
M●aco 247  
Mindanao 249  
Macastar 25●  
Madura 253  
Mald●vae 251  
M●lucco●s 250   

Lib. IV.  
Mauritania 35  
Caesariensis 34  
Sitifensis 36  
Tingitana 38  
Morocco K. 36  
Morocco Pr. 37  
Mamalucks 21. 23  
Malta 46  
mely 55  
Meroe 62  
Monomotapa 76  
Manicongo 78  
Madagascar  
Mohelia 85  
Mauritius 85  
Marie-land 111  
M●xico 101, 102  
Mexico 131  
Mechuacan 130  
Martyrs' Isles 117  
Magellanica 159  
Magellane Straits 160  
Maragnon 169  
Ma●ga●●ta 176  
Matinino 179  
Mona 18●  
Monico 181  
Mundus alter & idem 195   

N  
NAple● K. 54  
Na●bonensis 153, 184  
Normandy 162  
Nivernois 173  
Navarie 211  
No●thumberland K. 279  
North-Wales 292   

Lib. II.  
Nam●r 13  
Na●●● 79  
N●●●hg●ia 87  
N●●●gred the Great 155  
N●vegrod Infe●●er 159  
〈…〉 Ocean 153  
N●rwe● 131  
Nova Zemla 160  
Noricum 74  
Negrepont 256  
Naxos 258  
Nurenberg 87   

Lib. III.  
Naph●hali 82  
N●barhaea 113  
Nag●ans 192  
Narsinga 231   

Lib. IV.  
Numidia antiqua 32  
Numicia nova 49  
Nubia 57  
Norumbega 107  
Nutiscow 107  
Nicaragua 139  
New Bretagne 104  
Nova Francia 106  
Newfoundland 104  
Nova Scotia 107  
New England 109  
Novum Belgium 110  
Nova Albion 111, 122  
Nova Gallicia 124  
New Biscay 127  
New Mexico 127  
Nova Hispania 129  
New Granado 146  
Nova Guinea 195  
New Atlantis 196  
New World in the Moon. 197   

O  
ORleanois 170  
Oleron 197  
Orange, v● Aurange  
Olava 211  
Oviedo 219  
The Oc●an 26, 256  
Orcades 315   

Lib. II.  
Overyssell 26  
Oldenburg 117  
Oeland 145  
Obdora 156  
Osilia 168  
Oeballa 212  
O●tygia 257   

Lib. III.  
Os●oene 136  
Ormus 167  
O●istan 233   

Lib. IV.  
Ora Anterosa 54  
Oren●qae 171  
Orbis A●cticus 191   

P  
PUglia 61  
Prochita 63  
Principate 57  
Papacy 86, 87, etc.  
S. Peter's patrimony 82  
Pisa S. 110  
Plan●sia 112  
Parma D. 127  
Piedmont 134  
Paris 156  
Picardy 159  
Ponthe●a 160  
Perch 163  
Poictou 175  
Perigert 177  
Prevince 186  
P●en●an Meu●ains 206  
Portugal 238  
Pico 241  
Powisland 292  
Pomona 315  
Pietland 300   

Lib. II.  
S. Paul E. 9  
Pfirtz 61  
Palatinate of the Rhine 56  
Palatinate of Northgoia 87  
Pannonia 182  
Pomerania 98  
Permia 157  
Petzora 156  
Ple●cow 154  
Poland K. 165  
Poland Fr. 176  
Podolia 171  
Podlassia 173  
Prussia 173  
Pharus 196  
Pontus 210  
Peloponnesus 218  
Phocis 233  
Propontis 254  
Proconnesus 254   

Lib. III.  
Pontus' 8  
Gala●icus 8  
P●lemoniacus 9  
Cappadocius 9  
Paphlagonia 10  
Phrygia major 6  
Phrygia minor 15  
Pergamus K. 20  
Pisidia 28  
Pamphilia 28  
Patmos 37  
Paphia 42  
Phoenicia 52  
Palmyrene 62  
Palestine 70  
Philistims 88  
Peraea 75  
Panchaia 118  
Paneas 82  
Persia 160  
Persis 164  
Parapomisus 169  
Parthia 170  
Pengab 220  
Patenaw 234  
Patane 242  
Prom 239  
Pega 243▪ 244  
Polerone 249  
Philippine Islands 249   

Lib. IV.  
Pharos 9  
Prince's Island 86  
Palma 87  
Panuco 130  
Peruana 141  
Panama 142  
Peru 148  
Pa●ia 174  
Porto Rico 180  
Psittacoram Regio  
Painter's Wives Island   

Q  
QUereu 177   

Lib. IV.  
Quiloa 74  
Quiticui 77  
Quivira 119  
Q●itos 151  
Qix●s 152   

R  
ROmandiola 77  
Rome 85  
Rhaetia 91  
Rethelois 161  
Rochelois 178  
Rouverghe 184  
the Isle 197  
Rousillou 246  
Rothsay 316   

Lib. II.  
Ravestein 19  
Ravensburg 114  
Rip 125  
Russia 150  
Russia Nigra 172  
Rhezan 157  
Ragusi 195, 197  
Rascia 207   

Lib. III.  
Rhodes 38  
Reubenites 75  
Red Sea 120  
Rio de la Hacha l. 4. 44   

S  
SIcil 67  
Stromboli 72  
Sardinia 75  
Sabinia 82  
Spoletano Ducato 81  
Sienna S. 110  
Savoy 134▪ 135  
Switzerland 181  
Saniterre 160  
Soissons K. 161  
Sologue 170  
Sark 198  
Spain 207  
〈◊〉- Saxons K. 276  
South-Wales 293  
Scotland 296  
Sodore 316  
Schecland 315  
Sorlinges or Silly Isles 318  
Sunderland 320   

Lib. II.  
Schowen 24  
Spires B. 57  
Sungow 61  
Suevia or Schwaben 66, 67  
Saltzburg B. 71  
Stiermark 76  
Solms E. 80  
Swartzenberg E. 83  
Silesia 93  
Saxony D. 101  
Saxony Pr. 103, 105  
Storemar▪ h 123  
Sleswick 125  
Selandania 126  
Scandia 129  
Sconia 129  
Swethland 139  
Sweden 142  
Scrufinia 143  
Smolensko 154  
Severia 157  
Sarmatia Europaea 160  
Sarmatia Asiatica l. 3. 190  
Samogitia 169  
Se●avonia 191  
Servia 207  
Savia 193, 182  
Sicyonia 219  
Sparta 222  
Samothracia 254  
Salamis 257  
Scyros 258  
Seriphia 259  
Sporades 259  
Strophades 265   

Lib. III.  
Solae 30  
Samos 36  
Salaminia 43  
Syria 48  
Syria propria 57  
Syria Sobab 60  
Syria Maacha 61  
Samaria 85  
Simeon 90  
Saracens 114, 121, 123  
Sophene 144  
Susiana 162  
Scythia 197  
Sacae 193  
Sogdiana 194  
Samoyeds 196  
Serica 199  
Sinda 223  
Sanga 222  
Sincapura  
Siam K. 241  
Siam Pr. 242  
Sindae or Selebes 251  
Sumatia 254   

Lib. IV.  
Sus 36  
Siara 51  
Sanaga 55  
Sofala 57  
Sunda 80  
Songo 82  
Seio 119  
Soconusco 137  
Solomoni Jus. 194   

T  
TErra di Lavoro 55  
Terra di Otranto 61  
Tuscanie D. 107  
Tyrrhenia 107  
Tuscan Isles 111  
Tierasche 161  
Tourein 168  
Tarraconensis 212  
Toledo K. 232  
Tercera 240  
Thule 316. l. 2. 133  
Thanet 319   

Lib. II.  
Tolen 24  
Triers B. 54  
Tirol 78  
Tosinge 128  
Tuver 159  
Trondheim 132  
Turingia 101  
Transylvania 201  
Thebes 233  
Thessalia 242  
Thrace 248  
Thracius B●s●herus 254  
Thynnus 253  
Thassus 255  
Thera 260   

Lib. III.  
Troy K. 15  
Tenedes 31  
Trabezond Emp. 9  
Trachonitis 79  
Taurus M. 1. 140  
Turcomania 142  
Turks 150  
Turchestan 196  
Tartary 185  
Precopensis 186  
Deserta 189  
Antiqua 202  
Tartar Pr. 203  
Thumenses 192  
Tainfu 201  
Tanguth 201  
Thebet Tabor Tenduc 202  
Tarnassar 229  
Travancor 229  
Tangu 239  
Tippara 234  
Terenate 250   

Lib. IV.  
Thebais 13  
Tunis K. 29  
Tremesen 34  
Taradant 36  
Tedles 38  
Temesna 39  
Targa 51  
Terra Nigritarum 53  
Tombutum 55  
Trogloditua 59  
Tigrenaon 63  
Torra 76  
Tenariffe 80  
Terra Cort●rialis 104  
Tortugas 117  
Tiguer 120  
Tlascalla 134  
Tabasco 135  
Tucayan 121  
Trimdado 173  
Tabagua 173  
Tortuga 177  
Terra deal Fuego 193   

U  
VA! de Noto 70  
Vulcantan Isles 72  
Urbine D. 95  
Umbria 81  
Venice S. 96  
Venice C. 101  
Valesia 140  
Valois 154  
Veromendois 161  
Vendosine 171  
Venuiscine 187  
Valentia 244  
Ulster 310   

Lib. II.  
Utrecht 26  
Vindelicia 69  
Veteravia 79  
Voitland 103  
Volodomir 159  
Volhinia 171  
Valachia 205  
Valeria 182, 192  
Veggia 197   

Lib. III.  
Verma 244   

Lib. IV.  
Virginia 109, 111  
Uxitipa 126  
Utrapaz 137  
Veragua 139  
Venezuela 175  
S. Vincent. 179  
Utopia 195   

W  
WAlisland 140  
West-Saxon K. 276  
Wales 288  
North Wales 292  
South-Wales 293  
Wight 319   

Lib. II.  
Walchere 23  
West-Friseland 24  
Wurtzburg B. 82  
Wittenberg 85  
Wa●deck 102  
Westphalia 113  
Waltersdike 24  
Worms B. 57  
Waggerland 122  
Wardhuis 132  
Wibor●h 126  
Wheen 127  
Wiatka 158  
Wototine 159  
Willoughbtes Island 160  
Wind●●chland 192   

X  
XAntoign 178   

Lib. IV.  
Xoa 68  
Xalisco 125   

Z Lib. II.  
ZEland 23  
Zutphen 28  
Zemla N●va 160  
Zaculeia 202  
Zara 195, 197  
Zant 266   

Lib. III.  
Zabulon 84  
Zavolhenses 192  
Zagathay 193  
Zeilan or Seilan 255   

Lib. IV  
Zerby Isle 46  
Zanaga 51  
Zuenziga 51  
Zanzibar 73  
Zoca●ora 83  
Zacatecas 126  
Mare del Zur 178   
The End of the first Table.   

A Table of the ancient names of the Tribes and Nations which are herein specified; as they are delivered by Ptolemic, Strabo, Pliny, and the rest of the old GEOGRAPHERS.  

A  
APuli 61  
Allobroges 131, 138  
Ambiani 159  
Abrincantes 163  
Armorici 165  
Ambiliates 165  
Andes or Andegavi 167  
Aryerni 174, 194  
Aguenses 179  
Auscri 180  
Agathenses 185  
Arbigenses 185  
Arecomaci 185  
Andibeo 188  
Apincenses 190  
Acasiani 191  
Astures 219  
Antrigones 222  
Arivacae 235  
Auxitani 245  
Attrebatii 272   

Lib. II.  
Attrebates 10  
Aduatici 24  
Alemanni  
Alauni 74, 161  
Ambilia 74  
Ambilantii 74  
Ambidramui 74  
Angriva●it 114  
Achaei 217  
Achivi 258  
Ambrones 117  
Argivi 226  
Arti 128, 177  
Agathyrsi 161. & l. 1. 300  
Ao●si 170  
Avarini 174  
Avares 187. & l. 13. 150, 191  
Azuli 185  
A●avici 1 b.  
〈◊〉 111  
Aesitstraei 241   

Lib. III.  
Aus●ae  
Adubeni 113  
Ag●aei 1 ib.  
Adramaei Avaritae Abuceni 121  
Aegaei 121  
Albani 149. & l. 2. 240  
Arymphaei 150  
Amatindae 163  
Auradrae 166  
Arbi●ti 168  
Agria pae 168  
Aso●ma●e 169  
A●●i 170  
Ast●●ni 171  
Amarispae 176  
Astorbent 174  
Aeschienses 174  
Alani 188, 197  
Arioche 188  
Argaritae 193  
Anabi 200  
Alanoesi 197  
Asiotae 197  
Aletrophage 200  
Abaei 201  
Aspithrae 110  
Acadrae 1b.  
Anabastae 210  
A●i Arvari Adisathrae 217  
Animachae 238   

Lib. IV.  
Aegypiani 2  
Adyrmachidae 16  
Arabes Azari 17  
Arabes Adri ib.  
Asbetae 17  
Africerones 49  
Auroncae Agargeni Achalinces 57   

B  
BRutii 59  
Bellovaci 154  
Bellocassi 165  
Baiocenses 163  
Bituriges Cubi  
Bituriges losci & ubisci 179  
Boy 173 & l 2. 71, 72. 88  
Bigerrones 181  
Biterenses 187  
Bedii 223  
Bastuli 228  
Bastitani 235, 245  
Bructeri 98  
Belgae 272. & l. 2  
brigants 272, & 312  
Blanii 312   

Lib. II.  
Batavi 25  
Brixantes 78  
Biephi 203  
Boiemi 88  
Bemi ib.  
Bary 94  
Bast●rnae 185, 208  
Borussi 173, 175  
Breuci 185  
Bessi 153, 204  
Bardo 252   

Lib. III.  
Byceni 11  
Batrii 169  
Borgi 171  
Basisici 193  
Bylci 194  
Batae 200  
Bittigi 217  
Basavae 238  
Barrae 238   

Lib. IV.  
Belemmyae 2  
Bassachites 16  
Bures 16  
Barcitae 17   

C  
CAmpans 55  
Calabri 59  
Cyclopes 68  
Cenomanni 98, 167  
Carni 131  
Centrones 136  
Celtae  
Catarauni 157  
Caletes 163  
Carnutes 171  
Cadurci 177  
Convenares 180  
Conserani 180  
C●vari 191  
Cherusci 198  
Cantabri 222  
Cilini 223  
Capori ib.  
Carpentani 232, 235  
Celtici 233 & 242  
Cast●l●ini 235, 248  
Contestani 245  
Celuberi 245  
Cetretani 249  
Caserani 248  
Cantiani 272  
Cattieuchlani 272  
Coritani 272  
Cornavii 273  
Caledonii 300  
Cantae 300  
Cantini ib.  
Cornubii 300  
Cauci 312  
Cariendi 312   

Lib. II.  
Caninefates 25  
Caleucones 68  
Carni 78  
Charitini 85  
Chasmari 102  
Cherusci 107, 114  
Catti 11  
Chauci 110  
Chauci majores 114  
Chauci minores 116  
Chanani 114  
Charades 126  
Cimb●i 122, 123  
Cobandi 126  
Chuni 185  
Culi 126  
Chedini 135  
Ceraunii 198  
Cucoensii 203  
Cribizi 211   

Lib. III.  
Cures 25  
Cassanitie 120  
Carthobeni 113  
Cynaed●●olpitae 121  
Cattabani 121  
Caucasy 149  
Cassaei 163  
Cadusy 159, 160  
Chetonophagi 166  
Cabadini 166  
Caspii 173  
Chirondi 174  
Charispae 175  
Coamani 176  
Cimmerii 191  
Coaxtrae 191  
Castoritae 171  
Canapseni 193  
Chaenides 193  
Caratae 194  
Camari Candari Comedae 194  
Cherasosii ib.  
Cabocae 238  
Chatae 199, 201  
Chauranaei 201  
Caspiraei Chatzaei Chadrammotitae 217  
Cadutae 238   

Lib. IV.  
Cirtesii 33  
Chituae 35   

D  
DEcenses 191  
Deceits 116, 188  
Dittam 235  
Danmonii 272  
Durotriges 272  
Dobuni 273  
Damnii 300  
Dimetae  
Darnii 312  
Dauciones 239  
Daci 185  
Davi 105  
Daursii 198  
Danduto 103  
Dardani 208  
Dinensii 211  
Danai 226  
Dolopes 242  
Dolongi 252   

Lib. III.  
Debryces 163  
Darandae 169  
Derbicae 174  
Drepsiani 194  
Dryllophitae 217   

Lib. IV.  
Derbici 49   

E  
Euganei 103  
Euburiades 116  
Euburones 163  
Engolismenses 177  
Edetani 245, 249  
Ericni 312   

Lib. II.  
Elysii 128▪ 177  
Estii 166. 168  
Ercuniates 185  
Epicnemidii 235   

Lib. III.  
El●sari 121  
Elymaei 163  
Euergetae 169  
Eoritae 169   

F  
FErentini 18  
Falisci 180  
Fidenates  
Flussates 180  
Frisii 198. & l. 2. 25. 116   

Lib. II.  
Francones 81  
Finni 143. 144  
Frankes 81   

G  
GUbbales 285  
Gagari 219  
Gallaici 223  
Gallaici Braccarii 242  
Gallaici Lucenses 242  
Geresaeni 233  
Gadeni 300  
Gaugani 312   

Lib. II.  
Gothini 94  
Gutae 130  
Gothones 141  
Gythones 175  
Galindae 175  
Gepidae 187   

Lib. III.  
Gerraei 121  
Georgi 147  
Gordiaei 147  
Gelaeni 150  
Gelae 159  
Gerri 193  
Grynaei 194  
Geranaei 200  
Galactophagi 197  
Gandarides 217  
Gangeni 238   

Lib. IV.  
Goniatae 16  
Getuli 49  
Garamantes 49  
Gampsap hantes 2. 49   

H  
HIrpini 58  
Hetruxi 107  
Heneti 102. 103. l. 2. 11  
Hedui 173. 194  
Helvii 184   

Lib. II.  
Hermanduri 71. 103  
Heruli 99 100  
Helveronae 173  
Hunni 187. & l. 3. 191  
Hunugari 187  
Helotes 224   

Lib. III.  
Heptacometae 10  
Homeritae 121  
Hyrcani 173  
Hamaxobii 188  
Hyperborei 193  
Hippophagis 193   

Lib. IV.  
Hesperii 73. 80  
Herpiditani 35   

I  
IApyges 81  
Ingauni 116  
Insubres 121  
Indigetes 248  
Illercones 248  
Illergetes 249  
Jaccetani 249  
Iceni 272   

Lib. II.  
Intuergi 50  
jazyges Metanastae 185  
jassii 185  
japides 19h  
Inachii 226   

Lib. III.  
jazyges 188  
jasii 194  
jaxartae 198  
Issedones 221  
Indo-Scythae 217   

Lib. 4.  
jonii 33  
jerbicae 35  
Ichthy ophagis 73 & l. 3. 210   

L  
LAtini 38  
Laurentini 38  
Lucani 60  
Laestrigones 68  
Lepontii 131  
Libyci 135  
Lingones 157  
Lexobii 165  
Lemovices. 177  
Lestoraces' 186  
Lancienses 219  
Lemari 223  
Lusitani 242  
Lacetani 249  
Lapithae 242   

Lib. 2.  
Leuci 62  
Longimani 102  
Longiduni 102  
Longobardi 107. 186  
Livoni 168  
Liburni 198  
Latovici 185  
Leleges 202   

Lib. III.  
Lydians 23  
Lyci 26  
Lycaones 27  
Limyrices 217  
Lestori 238  
Lambatiae 217   

Lib. IV.  
Libyarchae 16  
Lybi Aegyptii 16  
Libyi Phoenices 33  
Loganici 17   

M  
MEsapii 61  
Medalli 136  
Meldi 15●  
Mentilienses 187  
Marbogi 222  
Meatae 300  
Menapii 312. & l. 2. 29   

Lib. II.  
Morini 17  
Mattiaci 25  
Mazaei 198  
Medionatrices 62  
Ma●si 49, 122  
Marcomanni 75 93  
Marsigni 94  
Moesi 208  
Myrmydons 242  
Molossi 238   

Lib. III.  
Massigni 10  
Mysi 23  
Materni 103  
Minoei 121  
Margasi 160  
Mesabatae 165  
Megores 165  
Masarnae 169  
Masdorami 173  
Maxerae 174  
Maricae 176  
Moeotae 187, 191  
Merdi 193  
Massagetae 194. 175  
Massaei 197  
Maragae 217  
Malli 217  
Mosogeni 197  
Musicani 217  
Marandae 238   

Lib. IV.  
Macututae 17  
Mathymi 33  
Medini 33  
Malchubii 35  
Maccharobi 35  
Mauri 35  
Maurusii 35  
Metagoniae 35  
Masaesili 34  
Meinari 49  
Macrobii 62   

N  
NAnnetes 167  
Novantes 3●0  
Nagnatae 311. 312   

Lib. II.  
Nervii 17  
Nemetes 57  
Norici 71. 74  
No●isci 88 71  
Naithones 96  
Neteriates 103  
Naharvali 173   

Lib. III.  
Nysxi 173  
Nabathaei 113  
Napaei 188   

Lib. IV.  
Nigitimi 33  
Novatae 33  
Nectiberres 35  
Nigritae 46  
Nubae 46  
Nabatrae 57   

O  
OXili 110  
Ossismi 167  
Oretani 298  
Ottad●i 272  
O●dovices 288   

Lib. II.  
Osyli 161  
Osoniates 185   

Lib. III.  
O●ympem ●19  
O●bitae 169  
O●cheni 113  
Obares 113  
O●andae 193  
Oxydracae 19● 2●7  
Oxiani 19●  
Occacororae 200  
Opun●i 235  
Ozolae 235   

Lib. IV.  
Ogdoni 16  
Odianguli 4●   

P  
PEligni 59  
Precutini 59  
Piceni 57  
Picentes 81  
Picentini 57  
Parisii 157  
Pictones 175  
Pe●●gorii 177  
Pesici 219  
Pictis 300   

Lib. II.  
Phrundusii 126  
Pniraei 1●6  
P●atunae 1●8  
Pagiritae 161  
Phinni 175  
Pagarini 170  
Phrungudiones 175  
Paeones 1ST  
Parii 195  
Pe●rustae 168  
Picentii 208  
Peucini 211  
Pelasgi 220   

Lib. III.  
Proselimnitae 17  
Phryges' 17  
Pisi●ae 28  
Pasagarrae 166  
Pa●sarae 168  
Pa●gyetae 169  
Parambi 173  
Parni 174  
Pselli 191  
Pialae 200  
Piratae 217  
Pezuari 217  
Polindae 217  
Phyllitae 217   

Lib. IV.  
Prosditae 16  
Poeni  
Perasori 49  
Pyrrhaei 49  
Psilli 49   

Q  
Quadi l. 2. 75 93   

R  
RUtuli 84  
Rhaeti 131  
Rhemi 157  
Rhodones 167  
Ruteni 184  
Regni 272  
Rhobegnii 312   

Lib. II.  
Ramuraci 61  
Rugusci 68  
Rugii 98  
Reudigni 102  
Rutheni 161  
Rox●lani 161. 185. & l. 3. 188  
Rossi 161  
Rhatacensii 203  
Rasc●ani 207   

Lib. III.  
Raubeni 113  
Ramnae 168  
Rochitae 169  
Rhabbanaei 200  
Rapsy l. 4. 73   

S  
SAmnites 57  
Salentini 61  
Sicano 68  
Siculi 68  
Sabini 82  
Sadani 131  
Salii 131. 187  
Salassi 135  
Senones 121. 157  
Salures 163  
Suessiones 159  
Samnitae 170  
Segusiani 173  
Santones 178  
Senitii 188  
Sigestorii 188  
Secusiani 192  
Scyrani 194. 195  
S●uri 223  
Segalauni 191  
Silures 288  
Selgovio 300   

Lib. II.  
Sicambri 29. 81. & l. 1. 198  
Suentes 68  
Sevates 74  
Salii 81. & l. 1. 198  
Suardones 103  
Saxons 107. 113. 123. & l. 1. 265  
Sigalones 123  
Subalingii 123  
Sueones 139 42  
Suethidi 39 42  
Sitones 145  
Suiones 145  
Siculi 202  
Sauromatae 161  
Savari 170  
Sondini 175  
Scordisci 185  
Sclavini 198  
Sardiotae 198  
Sartones 198  
Strimonii 152  
Sapaei 152  
Sa●i 152   

Lip. III.  
Soli 113  
Sachalites 121  
Sabaei 147  
Soani 149  
Suscani 161  
Sazaei 165  
Stabaei 165  
Sagartii 160  
Sazarae 166  
Sieri 169  
Salatarae 176  
Scordae 176  
Savari 176  
Sinchi 188  
Sythi 117  
Samocolchi 193  
Socan●● 193  
Seci 193  
Seres 199  
Scimnitae 193  
Sozyges 200  
Semantini 210  
Sadani 217  
Soringi 217  
Sabari 217   

Lib. IV.  
Succusii 35   

T  
TArentini 61  
Tyrrheni 107  
Tusci 107  
Taurini 134  
Tectosages 184 & l. 2. 11. 197  
Tolosates 184  
Turones 167  
Tricassini 191  
Teucteri 198  
Turdetani 209. 228  
Turduli 228  
Tuditani 242  
Trinobantes 272  
Talzalli 300   

Lib. II.  
Tungri 17  
Treveri 55  
Tribochi 161  
Taurisci 171. 177. 203  
Turingi 102  
Tricornesii 208  
Teutones 128  
Triballi 211  
Tegeates 222  
Talantii 241   

Lib. III.  
Thynni 6  
Themiscyry 8  
Tibareni 10  
Trogmi  
Tolibosti 11  
Turcae 150. 191  
Thyrsagetae 150. 191  
Tapyri 160  
Tombyzi 176  
Thocari 176  
Tauri 186. 188  
Tauro-Scythae 188  
Thyrambae 191  
Tachozi 194  
Taporaei 197  
Thoani 200  
Tacoraei 238  
Tilaedae 238   

Lib. IV.  
Taladusii 35  
Thaloffii 35  
Troglodytes 59 & l. 2. 210   

U  
VEstini 59  
Umbri 81  
Volsci 84  
Veneri 103. 165  
Veii 10●  
Veragri 131  
Valenses 131. 140. 141  
Veromandui 159  
Venelhocassi 163  
Vaccaei 1●0  
Velauni 184  
Volcrae 185  
Vencienses 187  
Vasionenses 188  
Valentini 191  
Vocontii 191  
Vascones 216. 221  
Varduli 222  
Ve●tones 238  
Vermins 300  
Vacomagi 300  
Vo●entii 312  
Veniculi 312  
Velibori 312  
Utarni 312  
Vodii 312   

Lib. II.  
Ubii 53  
Vangiones 57  
Veredonenses 62  
Vindelici 67. 68 69  
Vingeli 70  
Virthungi 85  
Varini 96  
Vandali 101  
Venedi 175  
Vardae 198   

Lib. IV.  
Veli 35  
Vacuatae 35   

W  
WInithi l. 2. 96. 99 192  
Werciani l. 2. 185  
Winnili l. 2. 186   

X  
XIlinces l. 4. 57  
Xanthi ●3   

Z  
ZOelae 219   

Lib. III.  
Zaviaspae 176  
Zigae 190. 191  
Zychis or Zinchi 190  
Zaratae 197   
The End of the first Table.   

A TABLE OF SOME PRINCIPAL THINGS herein contained, not properly reducible to the other two.  

A  
S Augustine's tart reply to an Atheistical demand l. 1 f. 2. The Order of Friars by him founded, 92. a.  
Augustane Confession why so called 1. 2. f. 67. by whom, and where confirmed, 67. 71. etc.  
Aristotle the Praecursor of Christ in rebus naturalibus l. 1. f. 2. why he conceived the World to have been eternal ibid.  
Abilene the tetrarchy of Lysanias where it was, l. 3. f. 64. and 81. Why reckoned Luke 3. amongst the portions of Herod's children, lib. 3. 64.  
Abassines by whom converted 1. 4. f. 60. their Hetrodoxies and Opinions ibid.  
Ark of Noah where made l. 3. f. 132. in what place it rested after the Flood l. 1. in f. 7, 8. and l. 3. 174.  
Assur the son of Sem where planted l. 1. f. 10. and l. 3. 131. The Assyrians descended of him: why so easily conquered by all Invaders ibid. f. 139.  
Arphaxad the father of the Chaldaeans l. 1. f. 10. first settled in the Region called Arrapachitis, ib. and l. 3. 131.  
Aram the son of Sem the founder of the Syrians l. 1. 10. l. 3. 48. the large extent of that name in holy Scripture ibid.  
Almodad the son of Jock●am, where most probably fixed l. 1. 12.  
Askenaz the son of Gomer, first settled in Bythinia and Phrygia Minor l. 1. 15. and l. 3. 6. 18.  
Ananim the father of the Hamanientes, an African People l. 1. 14.  
Antoeci what they are in Geographie l. 1. 25.  
Antipodes what they are l. 1. 25. The tenet touching them derided by some of the Ancients ib. condemned of Heresy in the darker times of the Church ib.  
Amphiscii why so called, and what they are in Geographie l. 1. 25.  
Armes why first used l. 1. 47. by whom first quartered 221. Why those of England give place in the same Es●●cheon to the Arms of France 286.  
Anakim the name of a Gigantine race of men, and why given unto them l. 3. 91.  
Annals what they are l. 1. 21. and how they differ from Histories ib. Augustus, or an essay of the means and Counsels by which he reduced the Commonwealth of Rome to the state of a Monarchy l. 1. 44.  
Albigenses what they were, and why so called l. 1. 193. The 〈◊〉 and substance of their story 192, 193. 147.  
Anabaptists their furies and proceeding in the City of Mun●●er. l. 2. 114. Their demands in the Insurrection of the 〈◊〉 183.  
Adamites why so called, and what l. 2. 89. and by whom destroyed ib. 〈◊〉, why made the God of the winds l. 1. 72.  
Aetna, the violent burnings of it l. 1. 69. and the cause thereof 69, 70.  
A●tila the Hun, why called Flagelum Dei l. 1. 184 & l. 1. 186. his bloody end, ibid. his Coat of Arms l. 2. 190.  
Amphictyones what they were, and of their authority l. 2. 230. 233, 234.  
Areopagites what they were, and from whence so called l. 2. 231.  
Amethyst a precious stone, and the virtues of it l. 3. 41.  
Asia whence so called at first l. 3. 3. the several notions of the word, and in what sense used in holy Scripture 5. 21. the estate of Christianity in it 4. amongst whom divided ibid.  
Amazon why so called l. 3. 9 Their dwelling place 9 193. the sum and substance of their affairs l. 3. 9  
Augur and Aruspex how they differ l. 3. 137. whence they had their names ibid.  
Avi sinistra what it meaneth, and the reason of it l. 3. 137.  
Aspendus Citharista, a Proverb, and the meaning of it l. 3. 36.  
Arvisian wines much celebrated l. 3. 36. in what place they grow ib.  
Amiclas silentium pe●did●t, a Byword, and from whence it came l. 1. 65.  
Aulaea, Tapestries, why so called, and by whom invented l. 3. 20.  
Adciatick Sea, whence it had the name l. 1. 100 the great extent thereof in some ancient writers, ib. & 101. married to the Duke of Venice every holy Thursday 101.  
Amyris insanit an old Proverb; the meaning & occasion of it l. 1. 61.  
Assassins who they were, & where l. 3. 19 and f. 53. thence the word Assassinate.  
〈◊〉 from whence so called l. ●●36. 47. of what several nations they consisted 68 their affairs and story ib.  
Argon ●●uts who they were, and whence so denominated l. 3. 146. their expedition into 〈◊〉 ibid. Their return by land from.  
Argosies great ships of burden, whence they had their name l. 2. 159.  
Archery w●ere most practised in the elder times l. 〈◊〉 171. the excellency of the English at it 172. whether Guns or that to be preferred ib.  
Austrasia what provinces it contained when first made a Kingdom l. 2. 63. the story and Kings thereof ibid.  
Africa whence it had the name l. 4. 1, 2. the estate of Christianity in it how much decayed. 2. the several Languages therein spoken. 3. The monstrous things reported of it by some of the Ancients 2.  
Armenians in what points they differ from other Christians lib. 3. 142. how, and by whom their Church is governed.  
Alcoran the Book of the Mahemetan Law, why so called lib. 3. 121. how highly reverenced ib. the doctrinals thereof, etc. reduced unto eight Commandments, ibid.  
Amber where it groweth, how gathered, and the verrues of it l. 2. 172.  
America not known to the ancients l 4. by whom first discovered 95. 97 the people of it not so black as the Africans 100 That they are descended from the Tartars 100 The estate of Christianity in it ibid. The ingenuity of the People in their Feather-pictures 101.  
Armadilla a strange beast in America the description of it 101.  
Australis Incognita, the vast greatness of it l. 4. why not yet discovered. 193.  
Aes Corinthium what it was, how highly prized, and how occasioned l. 2. 227.  
An●r●yram naviget, a Proverb, and to whom appliable lib. 2. 233.  
Anchorets, whence so called l. 1. 93●. buried whilst alive ib.  
Abades, a strange Beast, the Rhinocerot of the Ancients lib. 3. 224.  
Aloes, a precious wood, worth its weight in Silver l. 3. 240. Aloes Zocatrina, from what place it comes l. 4. 84.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 an old byword & the meaning of it l. 2. 258.  
Arroba a Spanish measure, the content thereof l. 3. 129.   

B  
BAbel, the attempt only of some bold Adventurers, and not of all the sons of Noah lib. 1. 17. the languages occasioned then, not 72 in number, as by some supposed 9 the stupendious greatness of the Project l. 3. 129.  
Burgundians why so called l. 1. 189. when first converted to the Faith ib. their Affairs and Story ibid.  
Beanfort, why made the surname of the Children of J●hn of Gaunt l. 1. 167.  
Bishops' coaeval in most places with Christianity l. 1. ●0. 144. 147. 167. l. 2. 216. l. 3. 73. 112. l. 4. 6. etc. how, and why hated by the Biscayne's l. 1. 222. and the ill consequents thereof ibid. 221.  
Belgae, the valiantest of the Galls in the time of Caesar, and for what reason's l. 2. 4.  
Baltic Sea, why so called l. 2. 126. why it doth not ebb and flow like to other Sea's ib.  
Bel and Baal, whence the names derived l. 3. 136. why that of Belzebub a name for the Prince of devils 85.  
Blind and Lame mentioned 2 Sa. 5. 6. what they were most probably l. 3. 94.  
Bdelium mentioned Gen. 2. 12. what conceived to be l. 3. 163.  
Belerophontis Literae, a Byword, the occasion of it l. 3. 26.  
brachygraphy, or the Art of short writing by whom first invented l. 4. 13.  
Bos in Lingua, a Proverb, the meaning and original of it lib. 2. 228.  
Benedictines or Black Monks, by whom instituted l. 1. 92. ib. their habit and increase ib.  
Black Friars or Dominicans, by whom founded l. 1. 92. why so called ib.  
Baths, not permitted by the Emp. Adrian to be used promiscuously by both Sexes l. 2. 141. b. The inconvenience arising from that intermixture ibid.  
Bezoar, the sovereign nature of it l. 4. 101. found in the belly of a beast called the Vicague ibid. that of China and the East more excellent than that of America l. 3. 206.  
Brachmanes, what they were amongst the Indians l. 3. 214 their authority and course of life 215. succeeded in the first by the modern Bramines 215.   

C  
CReation of the World, and the Motives of it l. 1. 1. the concurrence of each person to it 3. The matter of it and the Method ib. how long since done 3.  
Chaos or first matter of the world, expressed by Moses in the names of Heaven and Earth l. 1. 3. how described by Ovid ib.  
Cities by whom first built, and on what design l. 1. 6. the causes of the greatness and magnificence of them 5.  
Climes what they be, how many, and how distinguished l. 1. 25.  
Commentaries what they properly are, and how they differ from History l. 1. 21.  
Chronologies, how they differ from History l. 1. 21. by whom best performed ib.  
Chorography what it is l. 1. 27. how it differeth from Geography ibid.  
Cosmography defined 28. the general Latitude of the Notion ib.  
Consul's when first ordained in Rome l. 1. 40. who the first So●e Consul 10. when the office ended ibid.  
Caesar the name at first of the Roman Emperors l. 1. 45. after of the designed Successor ibid. the unfortunate end of most of them. 46.  
Cardinals by whom first ordained l. 1. 89. the election of the Popes assigned to them only, and by whose authority 125.  
Capuam esse Cannae Annibali, a Byword, and the occasion of it l. 1. 56.  
Campi Catalaunici, where lib. 1. 184.  
Colonies why planted by the Romans l. 1. 184. the number of them, and how distributed ib. whether more useful than a Fortress ibid.  
Constantine converted to the Faith, and on what occasion l. 1. 47. his new Modelling of the Empire 48. Of which one of the chief Subverters 48. He cassed the Praetorian Guards 46. His Donation forged 89.  
Chersoneses what they are, why so called, and how many of them l. 2. 121.  
Christmas sports in Twelftide, by whom first instituted l. 1. 274.  
Chus the son of Cham first planted in Arabia l. 1. 13. and 3. 116. His posterity (the Ch●●sites) why called Aethiopians l. 3. 116. mistaken for the Aethiopians of afric l. 1. 13. l. 3. 116 & l. 4. 69.  
Cas●uhim more likely to be found in Casiotis than Colchis l. 1. 13.  
Cimmerians the posterity of Gomer l. 1. 15. 152. first settled in Albania and Phrygia Major ib. & l. 3. 17. gave name to Bosphorus Cimmerius l. 2. 42. l. 3. 187. In Europe better known by the name of  
Cimbri, the same with the Cimmerians l. 1. 152. & l. 2. 142. the Cimbrick Chersonese named from them l. 2. 121. Their attempt upon the Roman Empire l. 1. 186.  
Citim the son of Japhet, first settled in the Isle of Cyprus l. 1. 16. & l. 3. 44. his posterity spreading into Macedonia lib. 2. 244. from thence into Aetolia, and so into Italy l. 1. 37.  
Chats●rmaveth the Father of the Chadro mati●ae, an Indian People l. 1. 11, 12.  
Cappadocians generally so lewd that they grew a Byword l. 3. 12. v. K.  
Coa, and Vestis Coa a light garment much used by the Dames of Rome l. 3. 38. the Coan wine (vinum Cos) as much cried up by the good-fellows of that City ibid.  
Colophonem addere, a Proverb, and from whence it came l. 3. 22.  
cotton-wool, where it groweth, and how l. 3. 58. l. 4. 45, 46. & Passim a●ibi.  
Cuspinians happy guess at the Arms of Germany l. 2. 119.  
christians where first so called, and with what solemnity l. 3. 49. extremely hated by the Gentiles ib. Their persecutions, and increase 50.  
Chimaera the Monster what it was l. 3. 26. and how tamed by Beleroph●n ib.  
Carmel a mountain of Syria l. 3. 53. mistcok by the Gentiles for a God ib. The Friars Carmelites thence named ib. & l. 1. 92.  
Curtius' taxed for overstraining the Acts of Alexander l. 3. 217.  
Cloves where they grow most plentifully, and the nature of them l. 3. 249.  
Circassians where they dwell l. 3. 191. their opinions and practice ibid.  
Cophti, the name of the Christians of Egypt whence to be derived lib. 4. 6. their Tenets in matter of Religion, and estate at the present ibid.  
Capthorim to be found in Coptus a Town of Egypt l. 1. 14. carried against all reason into Cappadocia ib. & l. 3. 13.  
Chusites why rendered Ethiopians in our English Bibles l. 3. 116. the Translation justified ib. the actions ascribed unto them not possible to be understood of the Ethiopians of afric l. 4. 69. the mistake laid on the Expositors l. 3. 116.  
Caliph the name of the Successors of Mahomet l. 3. 124. The Succession of them ibid. & 125. & l. 4. 21.  
Crocodiles their monstrous shape, and where most usual l. 4. 9  
Coco-nuts a most excellent fruit, and of several uses l. 4. 84.  
Cinnamon what it is, where and how it groweth, and from whence so called l. 4. 59  
cyphers or private Characters for writing, by whom first invented l. 4. 5.  
Chaldaeans great Astrologers l. 3. 128. the name communicated unto all who professed that Art ib. so called from Chesed the Son of Nachor 127.  
Cistercians or White Monks whence so called l. 1. 92. by whom ordained ib.  
Capuchin Friars, by whom first instituted, and why so called l. 1. 92.  
Centaurs the fable of them whence it took beginning l. 2. 242.  
Cretensis n●scit Pelagus, a Proverb, the occasion of it l. 2. 261.  
Carthusian Monks by whom instituted l. 1. 92. their straight kind of life ib.  
Cocchinel a precious die, how and where it groweth l. 4. 148.  
Corybates the Priests of Cybele l. 2. 26.  
Curetes what they were, and from whence so called lib. 2. 236. and 262.   

D  
Dictator's what they were in the State of Rome l. 1. 42. A Catalogue of them 43.  
Diaries what they are, and how they differ from History l. 1. 21.  
Delinquents how to be proceeded with l. 1. 58 gained more by favours than by rigour 59  
Druids what they were, and from whence so called l. 1. 212. Their chief seat in F●●nce 170. in Britain 318.  
Dues observed as lucky or unlucky unto divers men l. 1. 83. l. 3. 95.  
Dodanim the son of Jav●n first settled in Rhodes l. 1. 14. & l. 3. 39 his posterity passing into Epirus l. 2. 239. and there naming the Dodonian Grove 238.  
David George a monstrous Heretic and what his Tenets l. 2. 22.  
Dedan the son of Regma planted upon the shores of the Persian Gulf l. 1. 13.  
Drusians what they are; their Religion and Country l. 3. 49. of their power and strength 57  
Dositheans a Samaritan Sect, and their superstitions l. 3. 86.  
Divination by Birds, and the kinds of it l. 3. 137.  
Damasken Plums, Damask Roses, and Damask linen, from whence so called l. 3. 64, 65.  
Drinking when first in fashion among the English 149  
Despot the title of the Heir apparent in the Eastern Empire l. ●2. 207. communicated after to inferior Prince's ib. the Despots of Rascial. l. 2. 207. of Servia 208. and of Bulgaria 212.  
Drake Sir Fra. how said to be the first that sailed about the world lib. 4. 159. by whom followed.   

E  
Epoch what it is in account of time, l. 1. 21. the several Epoches in story 22.  
Europe whence so called l. 1. 32, 33. the original languages still in it 33.  
Edward the 3d. his claim ●nto the Crown of France, mistaken in our common Chronicles l. 1. 150. 151. not prejudiced at all by the Salic Law ib.  
Enemies to be licenced flight l. 1. 196. how to be dealt withal when they are in our power lib. 1. 58.  
Exarch what he was, and by whom ordained l. 1. 78. his proper Territory 79. the Catalogue and succession of ●hem ib.  
Electors of Germany how many l. 2. 44. by whom ordained ibid. Their Offices, and how performed ib.  
Election of the Popes l. 1. 91▪ of the Dukes of Venice 105. of the Germane Emperors l. 2. 44. of the great Master of Malta l. 4. 47. the ordinary means for obtaining the Crown of Bohemia l. 2. 90.  
interviews betwixt great Princes reckoned inconvenient l. 1. 117.  
Elam the son of Sem where planted l. 1. 13. l. 3. 163.  
Elisha the son of Javan, settled in Elis of Pelopomesus l. 1. 16. and after in the Isles of Greece l. 2. 220. thence called the Isles of Elisha Ezek● 27. 7. l. 1. 16.  
Emir of Sidon what he is l. 3. 55. his power and strength 57  
Endymionis somnum, a Proverb, the occasion of it l. 3. 25.  
Etymologies ridiculous of Europe l. 1. 32. of the Hugonots 168. of the Walloons l. 2. 4. of the Lombard's 186.  
Essen●, why so called, their opinions and Dogmata l. 3. 71.  
Egypt peopled in probability before the flood l. 1. 6. l. 4. 17. Some of the Dynasties of their Kings to have been before it. ib.  
Elephants their vast greatness, and docile nature l. 3. 213.  
Eunuch's why most employed by the Eastern Monarches l. 3. 183.   

F  
FLight to be permitted an enemy, and debarred from a Soldier l. 1. 159.  
Franks or French of what Nations they consisted, and why so called l. 1. 198. Their actions and achievements 199. By whom converted to the faith, and on what occasion 147. th● Antipathy between them and the Sp●ni●rds 152. the vastness of their Empire, and the reasons of the decay thereof 200. The name of Franks given by the Turks to all Western Christians l. 3. 55.  
Formalities of the Homage done by Edward the 3d. to the French King l. 1. 183. at the degradation of Priests l. 2. 66. at the investiture of the Dukes of Carinthia 77. of Maurice Duke of Saxony 107. of Albert Duke of Prussia 175. of the Duke of Moscovie 163. at the marriages of the Nestorians l. 3. 131. at the Coronation of the Great Cham 204. at the presenting of Ambassadors to the Grand Signeur 155. at the funerals in China 208.  
Free Cities what they are, how many, and in what estates l. 2. 41.  
Figtree why cursed by our Saviour, as is said in the Gospels l. 3. 73.  
Frankincense where it growth, and how l. 3. 117, 118. offered to the Gods 119.  
Friars, and their several Orders l. 1. 92. in what esteem among the people 93.  
Fire worshipped by the Persians l. 3. 161. carried in State before the Romans ib.  
Foreign Guard dangerous to a Prince's person l 4. 21▪ as foreign Aides unto a kingdom 22. On what occasions usually sought, and when most necessary lb.  
Fides Attica a Proverb, the original of it l. 2. 229.  
Franse●scans or Grace Friars, why so called and by whom founded l. 1. 92. by the French called Cerdeliers ib.   

G  
Gentlemen of Venice what they are, and in what esteem l. 1. 104.  
Gallican Church the power and privileges of it l. 1. 481.  
Gabats a leprours' kind of People in what parts they dwell lib. 1. 181.  
Guel●es and Gibellines whence so called, and when l. 1. 109. & l. 2. 88 the fancy of the Elves and Goblins derived from thence ib.  
Germans whence so named l. 2. 36. how terrible at first to the Romans 43 their original extraction 42. possessed of the Western Empire 43. the power of the Emperors impaired, and by what means 47, 48. now merely titular 118. Guicciardine gelded by the Inquisition l. 1. 89. and the substance of him in that place ib.  
Guns where invented and by whom l. 2. 39 not used in India at the expedition of Bacchus l. 3. 207.  
Goths their original and first seat l. 2. 141. their Kings before they left the East 142. Their successes and affairs in Italy. l. 1. 49. in France 185. in Spain 213, 214.  
S. George the Cappadocian, a famous Martyr l. 3. 12. his Cenotaphium at Lidd ● in the holy Land 87. highly esteemed among the Turks 62. his Bank in Genoa l. 1. 119. made Patron of the most Noble Order of the Garter 287. Gyges' whence said to have a Ring by which made invisible l. 3. 24.  
Gaulonites what they were l. 3. 72. for what cause named Galileans ib.  
Geter the son of Aram planted in Albania l. 1. 10. & l. 3. 149.  
Gomer the son of Japhet first settled in Albania also l. 1. 16. & l. 2. 17. Of his posterity see Cimmerians.  
Galileans of what stock they were l. 3. 81. scorned by the Jews 85. Their zeal unto Religion 72. 85. oru Saviour called a Galilean, and why 82.  
Gipsies, from whence they have both their name, and feats l. 4. 6.  
Grecians, in what they differ from the Church of Rome l. 2. 217. by which maliciously and unjustly persecuted ib. Their language not of such extent as in former times ibid.   

H  
H. a Letter ominous to the State of England l. 2. 274.  
Hebrew not the primitive language l. 1. 18. nor at all peculiar to the Jews ib.  
History defined l. 1. 21. the necessary use of it, and to whom 19, 20. how it differeth from Annals, Commentaries, etc. 21.  
Heteroson what they are in Geography, and from whence so called l. 1. 25.  
Hydrography what it is, and by whom best written l. 1. 27.  
Harlots whence used for the name of a common Prostitute li. 1. 163. Holy oil of Rheims in what state attended l. 1. 158. not so ancient as the French pretend ib.  
Hugonots whence so called lib. 1. 168. Their great power once, and present condition 148.  
Ho●k-tide sports, the original of them, and from whence so named l. 1. 283.  
Havilah the son of Chus, first planted about Babylonia l. 1. 13. called thence the Land of Havilah, in the second of Gen. lib. 3. 163.  
Havilah the son of Jo●ktan first seated in India l. 1. 12. the Kingdoms of Ava and Chavilah so called from him ib. & l. 3. 239.  
Hollanders their great strength at Sea l. 2. 21. the great benefit they make by fishing on the Coast of England l. 1. 262 & l. 2. 5. Their base cheat put upon the English at the Isle of Polerone l. 3. 249. and bloody butchery at Ambo●na 251.  
Hanse-Towns why so called, how many, and of what power at Sea l. 241.  
Hercynian Forrest, the beginning and extent thereof l. 242.  
Harpies the Fable and the Moral l. 2. ●65.  
Homer's birth, how contended for l. 3. 22. where born, and why called Moeonides 23, 24.  
Hellenists what they were, and why so called l. 2. 215. & l. 3. 70. in what differing from the other Jews ib.  
Herodians what they were, and from whence denominated lib. 3. 72.  
Hamath or the Land of Hamath l. 3. 57 the Kings and Story of it ibid.  
Hegira, the Mahometan Epoch l. 1. 22. from whence so called lib. 3. 158. the unsteadfastness of Scaliger about it ibid.  
Hieroglyphics what they were, and by whom first used l. 4. 4. some particulars of them.  
Hul or Ch●● the son of Aram, in what parts first settled l. 1. 10. l. 3. 144.  
S. Hierome a Father of the Church, where born l. 2. 183. the Order of Monks by him instituted lib. 1. 92.  
Huanacu a strange beast, and the nature of it l. 4. 148.   

I  
INfluence of the heavenly bodies on particular Countries l. 1. 19 Japhet how made partaker of the blessing of God, Gero 9 27. both in the Literal sense, and the Mystical l. 1. 33.  
Italians derived from Cetim the son of Japhet l. 1. 37. so called from the Aetolians 37, 38. by whom converted to the faith 36. their scandalous lives how punished, and by what instruments 50.  
Italy the name at first of the East parts of the Country only l. 1. 59 communicated after to the whole ib. & 34. the Kings thereof after the ruin of the Empire 52. abandoned by the Emperors, and for what reasons ib. & 51.  
Lands how caused l. 1. 23, whether better seated than the Continent ib.  
Isthmian Games l. 2. 227.  
Joctan and his posterity settled Originally in the East l. 1. 11, 12. & l. 3. 138. the improbalities of their fixing in Arabia Felix 11. greater of their transplanting into America l. 4. 135.  
Jarach the son of Joctan, more probably to be found in Arachosia than Insula Hieracum lib. 1. 12.  
Javan the son of Japhet, the father of the jonians and Athenians l. 1. 16. l. 2. 228. l. 3. 22.  
Japyx the name of the Northwest wind, and why given unto it l. 1. 61.  
Inquisition when and why ordained l. 1. 231. The manner of proceeding in it ib. not admitted into many of the Papal Country's ib.  
Ireland why never conquered till the reign of King James lib. 1. 314.  
John Baptists head how pitifully mangled by the Papists l. 2. 50.  
julius Scaliger his censure of Hesiodus controlled by Velleius l. 2. 232. his base character of the English censured l. 1. 263.  
joseph Scaliger his singularity about Nabonidus l. 3. 138. and Darius Medus, 〈◊〉. His unsteadfastness about the Hegira 158.  
Interim of Germany what it was, and how ill liked of all parties l. 2. 67.  
Imperial Chamber why erected, and where settled l. 2. 49. Imperial Cities v. Free.  
joan the Virgin, not a witch, as the English l. 2. 63. nor so miraculously sent as the French pretend ibid. what she was indeed ibid.  
Invention of Clocks, and Watches, l. 2. 4. of Pictures in glass, and laying colours in oil ib. of Printing 22. of Guns 39 Leathern Ordnance 174 Of wildfire Of the Battleax l. 3. 9 of Watchwords 256. Of Dice, Chess, etc. 23. Of tragedies 35. Of Sails for ships 37. Of Arithmetic and Astromony 52. Of the Purple die 54. Of Crystal glass ib. Of Pastorals, Hour-glasses, military Engines l. 1. 68 Of Comedies 70 Of the Mariner's compass lib 1. 57 and l. 4. 99 Of Tacle for ships l. 4. 98. of Letters, and Ciphers 5. of brachygraphy 6. Of Paper l. 4. 9  
Jacobites what they are, and where most numerous l. 3. 133. their Opinions ib. 134.  
Indians or Christians of St. Thomas, what they hold in matter of Religion l. 3. 214. The submission of their Churches to the Pope ibidem.  
Indigo, where and how it groweth l. 3. 222.  
Jamizaries, their institution and number l. 3. 153▪ their office and power ib. their insolences and punishments 154. the likeliest men to carry the Turkish Empire, if the line of Ottomon should ●ail 157.  
Jetur the son of Ishmael, the father of the Ituraeans l. 3. 77.  
Jews not suffered to land in Cyprus l. 2. 42. expulsed out of England France, and Spain 206. in danger to be stoned every Moundy-Thursday ib. The hopes and hindrances of their conversion ib. the restitution of their Kingdom not denied by Christ 107.  
Israel and Judah when divided l. 2. 102. the reasons why no more united, though some opportunities were offered 101.  
Jealousy a predominant passion amongst the Italians l. 1. 53. as also amongst the Moors and Spaniards 208. the English little subject to it ib. 200. and the Dutch much less l. 2. 141. b.  
Jesuits by whom first instituted l. 92, 93. their vow of Mission 93. grown formidable to the Pope's ib. industrious in planting Christianity in the barbarous nations l. 3. 208. Chief Factors for the Kings of Spain l. 1. 201. They and the Presbyterian or Puritan Preachers the great Incendiaries of Christendom l. 1. 92.  
Judges of Hell, what and who they were l. 2. 257, 262. and why so accounted of ib.   

K  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Proverb, and of of whom intended l. 2. 261.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, proverbially used for a wicked person l. 3. 12.  
Kings called an ordinance of man, and why l. 1. 5. who of them anciently anointed 216. ●ow they take precedency 286. not to use their people to the wa●s l. 2. 33. the Legend of the Kings of Colen l. 2. 54.  
King's evils a disease l. 1. 131▪ the Cure thereof hereditary to the kings of England 283.  
Knigh●ood v. Order   

L  
LVd the son S●m, the father of the Lydians in Asia Minor l. 1. 10. l. 3. 24.  
Lehabim the Father of the Liby-Aegypti● l. 1. 14. & l. 4. 16.  
Ludim the son of Mizraim, the father of the E●hiopians in afric l. 1. 14. & l. 4. 69. improperly rendered Lydians in our English▪ Bibles Jer. 16. 9 Ibid  
Lady of Loretto her Legend l. 3. 88 the sumptuosity of her Temple l. 1. 81.  
Latins, the Inhabitants of Latium, and from whence so called l. 1. 34. The Latin tongue not the language of Italy 36. The reasons of the spreading and extent thereof ib.  
Lombard's their original and first kings l. 2. 186. their affairs in Italy 1. 1. 51. the subversion of their kingdom there 51.  
Luther his Birth, & first contentions with the Pope l 2. 105. the success and spreading of his doctrine 106. and by what means specially Ibid. the Government of the Lutheran Churches 41. the condition of their Minister's ib. their Rites and Ceremonies not much different from those in the Church of England ibid.  
Laber●as prophet●nd● what, and where most in use l. 2. 166.  
Liburns the name of a light vessed l 2. 191. and of such chairs as we call Sedans ibid. and from whence so named ibid.  
Libanus a famous mountain, why so named l. 3. 51. the length, course and branches of it ib & 9  
Lysanias the Tetrarch of Abil●ne, whose son he was l. 3. 81. why reckoned Luke 3. among H●ro●a● Children 64.  
〈◊〉 why scattered and divided among the Tribes l. 3. 96. The liberal maintenance allowed them ibid.  
L●by●●th of Egypt l. 4. 9 for what causes made ib imitated by Minos in that of Cre●el l. 2. 261.  
Letters, the first original, and history of them lib. 2. ●. 2. & lib. 4 4, 5.  
Lemn●a or Terra Lemnia, the sovereign virtues of it l. 2. 256 how made and ordered ib. why called Terra 〈◊〉 ib.   

M  
MAn why created unarmed and naked l. 1. 4. the image of God in him, what it doth consist in ibid.  
Monarchy, the nearest form of government to that of God lib. 1. 5. The Monarches of 〈◊〉 253. of the English 〈◊〉 26●. of the Assyrians l. 3. 136. of the Medes and Persians 167.  
Ma●res of the Palace, their institution and authority l. 1. 199. the Catalogue and succession of them ibid.  
Mistress of the 〈◊〉 by the Medes l. 3. 193. of the Romans by M●thridates 10. of the Danes by the English lib. 1. 283. of the French in S●e●l 74. of the Hugo●ots by the French 148.  
Mork● their original and increase l. 1. 92 by whom first brought under certain rules ibidem their several and particular Orders 92. etc. Me●h● and Mount Seph●r mentioned Gen. 10. in what place they were l. 1. 12. l. ●. 12. 15.  
Morastick life how accounted of in the former times l. 1. 96. whether to be preferred before a sociable ibid.  
Mosaic work, what it is l. 1. 102. Marche●a mul●er is a barbarous custom of the Scots lib. 1. 296. whence named and by whom abrogated ib.  
Moscovites, by whom converted; and of what opinions in religion l. 2. 151. from what Original they come 161.  
Mares why used in battle among some of the Ancients l. 2. 211. Minotaur the Fable and true stoty of it l. 3. 261  
Mshridates the Author of the Antidote so named lib. 3. 10. the Sum and substance of his Story ibid.  
Masick the several sorts and effects thereof l. ●. 17. used by the primitive Christians in Gods public service ibid.  
Mysiorum postremus, a Proverb, and the meaning of it l. 3. 18. Myrtoum Mare where it was, and from whence so named l. 3. 38. Mastic what it is, where growing, and how gathered lib. 3. 35.  
Melchites what they are, and from whence denominated l. 3. 50.  
Maronites whence so called, their Tenets, and place of dwelling l. 3. 50. Their reconciliation with the Pope but a matter of compliment ibid.  
Mahomet, his birth and breeding l. 3. 100LS. his design to coin a new Religion ib. the causes of the great groweth and increase thereof 123. his success and victories 123, 124.  
Mongul, a Tribe of Tartars l. 3. 203. the Title of the great Emperers of the hither India 236. the Catalogue and succession of them ibid.  
Magis, what they were in Persia l. 3. 161. Their esteem and power ibid.  
Miramomooline what the word doth signify lib. 4. 42. the Miramomlines of Morocco ibid.  
Mariner's compass by whom first invented, and by whom perfected l. 1. 57 & l. 4. 99 erroneously ascribed to Solomon ib.  
Magnes why used to signify the Loadstone by the Latin Writers l. 4. 99  
Morses, or Sea-horses, the description, and use made of them l. 4. 105.  
Money not the only instrument of exchange in the elder times lib. 4. 65. by what names called, and why ibid. Made sometimes of Leather and pasteboard 149. 150.  
Mesech the son of Aram, planted about Mons Masius l. 1. 10. & l. 3. 136.  
Mesech or Mosoch the son of Japhet, settled amongst the Montes Moschici in Armenia Major l. 1. 15, 16. & l. 3. 144.  
Mogog the son of Ja●het in Co●e-Syria and the borders of Ib●ria l. 1. 15. l. 3. 64.  
Mizraim the son of Cham, the Father of the Nation of Egypt l. 1. 14. & l. 4. 3. 18.  
Messene Scrvilior a Proverb, the occasion of it l. 2. 21.  
Mastiff Dogs, why called Molosse by the Latins l. 2. 238.  
Mercea, an order of Religious persons, their institution, and employment l. 1. 237.   

N  
NAtional Animosities to what cause ascribed l. 1. 19  
No●mans what they were originally l. 1. 164. & lib. 2. 135. Their actions and Achievements ibid. when first fixed in France lib. 1. 164.  
Nuns, why so called, and by whom first instituted lib. 1. 93. Their particular Orders ibidem. of ill report for their unchastity ibid.  
Nemaean Games, by whom first instituted, and on what occasion l. 2. 225.  
Names fatal to some Kingdoms l. 3. 109.  
Nethinims what they were, and in what employed l. 3. 92.  
Noah's seven Precepts, or the Precepts of the sons of Noah lib. 3. 71.  
Naphtha the nature of it, and where most used lib. 3. 158. 163.  
Nomades where they dwelled, and from whence denominated lib. 3. 193. l. 4. 32.  
Navigation, the Original and story of it l. 4. 97. what nations most-famous for it in the former times 98. and who at present ib. & l. 1. 165.  
North-East passage by whom at●tempted and pursued l 4. 194. Of the North-West passage ib. The little probability of doing any good in either ib.  
Nimrod, the Founder of the Babylonian and Assyrian Kingdoms l. 1. 13. l. 3. 136.  
Nestorians whence so called l. 2. 131. their Tenets in Religion ibid. much hated by the Pope, and why 133.  
Naphtuchim the son of Mizraim, where first planted l. 1. 14 & l. 4. 17. the name of Neptune, by some said to be thence derived ibid.  
Nutmegs, how they grow, a●d where most plentiful l. 3. 250.   

O  
OCean the Collection of waters l. 1. 26. the causes of its ebbing and flowing ibid. the Etymology of the name, and vast greatness of it 256.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, a kind of Divination lib. 1. 49. an experiment of it ibid.  
Ostra●●s●n, what it was, whence called, and with whom in use l. 2. 229.  
Ovation, how it differeth from a Triumph lib. 1. 41. from whence so called ib. in what cases granted ibid.  
Oracles which most famous lib. 2. 224. Their ambiguity and decay 234, 235.  
O●mpick Games by whom first instituted and restored l. 2. 220. where held, and who were Judges in them ib. All the Victors at one time of one City in Ita●y l. 1. 60.  
Ostrich Feathers, why and how long the Cognizance of the Prices of Wales l. 1. 295.  
Ovid why banished into Pontus l. 2. 210.  
Oleum Mediacum, v. Naphta.  
Ophir not the Province of Sofala in Ethiop●a. l. 4. 75. where it rather was l. 1. 12.  
Order of Knighthood, of Avis 244. Al●antara l. 1. 237. of the Annun●iada 128. of Saint Andrew 306. of Saint Antony l. 4. 72. of the Blood of our Lord Jesus Christ 87. Of the Bath 285. of narovets 287. of the Crescent 170. of Calatrava 237. of Dutch Knights l. 2. 180. of the Dragon l. 2. 190. of the Elephant l. 2. 138. of the Golden Fleece l. 2. 31. of the Jennet 204. of the Garter l. 2. 87. of the Holy Ghost l. ● 105. of Saint Jagol. 1. 237. of Saint John l. 3. 109. and l. 4. 47. of Jesus Christ 244. of Saint M●●hael 204. of Saint Mark 107. of Merced l. 237. of Mon●esal. 1. 251. of Nov● Sco●ia. 1. 106. & l 4. 107. of the Pairrie or twelve Peers 204. of the Round Table l. 1. 287. of the Star l. 1. 204. of Saint Stephen l. 1. 113. of the Sepulchre l. 3. 109 of the Templars l 3. 109. of Saint Saviour l. 1. 151. of the Glorious Virgin l. 1. 107.  
Oratorians an order of Religious persons by whom first instituted l. 1. 93. used for a counterpoise to the fesu●es ib.   

P  
PErise● and 〈◊〉 what they are in Ge●graphy lib. 1. 25.  
Praetorian Guards by whom instituted and by whom cassiered l. 1. 46. Their▪ power the great authority of their Captains Augu●t●. n. 20.  
Peter-p●●e, by whom first granted to the Popes l. 1. 91. b.  
●woprd● a new Order devised by constantine, and what it was l. 1. 46.  
Pathru ●● first planted in the land of Pathor● l. 1. 14. & l. 4. 13.  
Phal●g, whe●e probably first planted l. 1. 16. & l. 3.  
Phut, the son of 〈◊〉 F●ther of the Moors or 〈◊〉 l. 1. 14. 15. l. 4. 26, 27.  
Pope of P●●a what it signifieth l. 1. 87. Common at first to other Bishop's ib. the opportunities those of Rome had to advance their greatness ib. a The meanus and steps by which they did attain to their temporal power 89. and still keep the same 90. how easy to be made hereditary 90, 91. Their Forces and Revenues 91. etc.  
Presbyterian Discipline by whom first framed l. 1. 139. and how after propagated 140. the introduction of it into the signory of Genevi 139. and the Realm of Scotland 298. why so importunately desired by some in England 266. Petalism what it was, and where most in use l. 1. 70.  
P●ct● what they were, and the story of them l. ●. 300.  
Pr●testan● where first so called and why l. 2 56. the whole story of them 105▪ 106. the causes of the great increase of their Doctrines 106. their principal oversight 107.  
P●●lipicks given by Tull● for the name of his Orations against M. Antony l. 2 235.  
Pasiphae, how far the Fable of her may be thought historical lib. 2. 262.  
Parchment, in Latin Pergan●●na, where invented first l. 3. 21.  
Phryges' sero sapiunt, a Proverb, and the occasion of it lib. 3. 17.  
Proselytes what amongst the 〈◊〉 l. 3. 71. the several sorts of them and to what obliged b.  
〈◊〉 whence they had the● name lib. 3. ●1. Their 〈◊〉 and authority amongst he people. 72.  
〈◊〉 of the Jews provided of a liberal maintenance l. 3. 96. who they were whom they called the Chief Priests 73 of the High Priest and when made a Saleable 〈◊〉 73. how 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 were High Priests at the same time ibid. Their power and succession after the Captivity l. 3. 104.  
〈◊〉. who and why so called l. 3. 87.  
〈◊〉 how many and why so named l. 3. 95.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 alluded to 〈◊〉 14▪ what and where it was lib. 3. 95.  
〈◊〉 where it was indeed lib. 3. 127. the several fancies and opinions touching that particular ibid.  
Prometheus, why feigned to be tortured by a Vulture l. 3. 170.  
Pyramids of 〈◊〉 their vast greatness, by whom built, and why l. 4. 7.  
〈◊〉 where first invented, and why so called l. 4. 9  
〈◊〉 where first invented, and by whom l. 2. 22. how much abused in these later times lib. 3. 207.  
Palms anciently used as a sign of Victory l. 4. 4. Set by the Christians in Churchyards, and for what reason ibid. of the rare nature of the Tree l. 4. 50.  
Pigsneys where●● 〈◊〉 dwell. l. 4. 57  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the name of the King of 〈◊〉 l. 3. 202 〈◊〉 ascribed by Scaliger to the Abassine Emp. ib. The ground of the mistake, and right name of that Prince l. 4. 70.  
Pigritia, the name of a strange Creature in 〈◊〉 l. 4.  
Pelleneaa vestas, a Byword, and the meaning of it l. 2. 219.  
Pluto, why fancied by the Poets for the God of Hell. l. 2. 237.   

R  
River's, their use, and cond●●ons requisite for 〈…〉 l. 1. 27. the banks of great River, how defensible l. 3. 19  
〈…〉 the meaning and occasion of it l. 1. 162.  
〈◊〉 naturally ingraffed in the heart of man l. 1. 31. how it standdeth in relation to the parts of the World 31. 32.  
Rome, of what circuit in her glory l. 1. 85. the number of its inhabitants ib. the extent of her Dominions 47. once made a Goddess, and by whom l. 3. 24. Her Revenues computed at 150. millions of Crowns l. 1. 47. Her Empire subverted by Constantine, and how 48.  
Roman Emperors, the succession of them l. 1. 45. cut off by violent deaths till the time of Constantine 46. and the cause thereof ib. their negligence and degenerate sloth 48.  
Rex Romanorum what he is l. 2. 47. by whom and for what cause ordained.  
Rhine, the fountain and course thereof l. 2. 6. 42. the several branches by which it falleth into the Ocean l. 2. 6.  
Rhodian Laws, the Rule in former times of all marine causes l. 3. 49. and for how long they so continued ibid.  
Red Sea from whence it had the name lib. 3. 120. how far extended by that name, ibid. & l. 4. 83.  
Rhabard or Rhubard where it groweth, and the virtues of it l. 3. 190. 202.  
Retiredness from the Vulgar eye used by divers Princes lib. 4. 71.  
Regma the son of Chus first planted on the shores of the Persian Gulf l. 1. 13 & l. 3. 119.  
Riphath the son of Gomer, found in Paphlagonia lib. I. 15.  
Rhamnusia why given for an adjunct unto Nemesis, and what Nemesis was l. 2. 229.   

S  
SEla the son of Arphaxad, in what parts settled l. 1. 10. l. 3. 163.  
Sheba, Sabta, and Sabteca, the sons of Chus, all planted in Arabia Felix, and there the founders of the puissant nation of the Sabaeans lib. 1. 13. lib. 3. 119.  
Sabaeans of Arabia the Desert, from what root they came lib. 3. 113.  
Seba the son of Jocktan, planted upon the River Indus, or the Golden Chersonese l. 1. 12. l. 3. 238.  
Schola Salerm by whom writ, and to whom dedicated lib. 1. 57  
Siculae Gerrae l. 1. 68 Vesperi Siculi 74. Siculi Tyranni 73. three bywords, and the meaning of them.  
Sardonicus risus, a Proverb, and the meaning of it l. 1. 75.  
Salic Law what it truly is l. 1. 149. not so ancient as the French pretend ib. nor at all regarded by them but to serve the turns of some Usurpers ibid. the inconveniences and injustice of it ib.  
Seminaries for the English, by whom first erected, and where lib. 1. 158.  
Sterling-money, why so called l. 1. 199.  
Spaniards from whence they do descend l. 1. 212, by whom converted to the Faith 210. The dependence of the Popes on the Crown thereof ibid. their aim at the fifth Monarchy ib. the greatness of their Empire 252. and the weakness of it 253. their cruelty towards the Americans l. 4. 100 etc.  
Spa, medicinable waters, where, and for what most useful l. 2. 17.  
Soldiers and great Commanders unfortunate for the most part, and why l. 2. 229.  
Scanacrbeg his life and story l. 2. 241. what became of his body ib. & 194.  
Scots why so called l 1. 296. their proceedings in the Reformation 298. their Kingdom held in vassalage to the Crown of England 105, 106.  
Salmacida spolia a Proverb, and the meaning of it l. 3. 25.  
straits of Mountains, not to be abandoned by the Defendants l. 3. 30. the losing of such Passes of what fatal consequence 19  
Syriack language what it was, and of what ingredients l. 3. 51. 72. when first made vulgar to the Jews ib.  
Syrian Goddess what she was l. 2. 58. her magnificent Temple, ib. the deceits and juggling of her Priests, ib.  
Syrorum multaolera; Sylli contra Phoenices; two Proverbs, and the meaning of them 3. 58.  
Seleucus a great builder l. 3. 59 his strange rise and fortunes 68  
Saduces whence they had their name l. 3. 7l. their opinions and dogmata, ib.  
Scribes what they were, when instituted l. 3. 72. and of what authority 73.  
Samaritans what they were, l. 3. 81. Their Religion, Tenets, and Sects 85, 86. how hated by the Jews, and why 86. 88  
Simeon the son of Jacob, how dispersed in Israel, as his father prophesied l. 3. 90.  
Solomon's Porch, mentioned Joh. 10. 3. where and what it was 94.  
Sclaves or Sclavonians whence so called l. 2. 298. Their affairs and story, ib. given as a name to Bondmen, and on what occasion 191.  
Saracens why so called l. 3. 111. 114. their Character in formertimes 114. they resort to Mahomet 124. Their successes, victories, and Caliphs' 125. etc.  
Scythians their original, antiquity, and achievements l. 3. 197. Their expedition into Media l. 3. 196. and success in Lydia 191.  
So h-saying how many kinds, and by whom each kind thereof invented l. 3. 137.  
Sardanapalus an effeminate king l. 3. 160. why he burned his Treasure l. 3. 137.  
Silks why called Serica by the Latins l. 3. 199.  
Sibyls what they were, how many, and where they dwelled l. 4. 15. not counterfeited by the ancient Father's ib.  
Silver and Gold where most plentiful l. 4. 149. the rich mines of Potosi 154. how vilified by the Vtopians 150. the causes of the dearness of things in our days 150. not so advantageous to a State, as trade and merchandise ib.  
Samia Vasa what and how highly prized l. 3. 37.  
Styx, a River of Greece, the usual oath of the God. l. 2. 222.  
Sugars, when and by whom first refined l. 4. 80. what used instead thereof in the elder times ib. the great quantities thereof sent yearly by the Portugals from the Isle of S. Thomas, ib. and from their Sugar-works in Brasi.  
Seriphiae Ranae, an old Proverb, the occasion and meaning of it l. 2. 261.   

T  
topography what it is li. 2. 27. how it differeth from Geography, ib.  
Tars●h the son of Javan, planted about Tarsus in Cilicia l. 1. 16. l. 3●. 31. not in Tar●essus, as some say l. 1. 16.  
Thiras the Father of the Thra●ans, by some called Thracians l. 1. 17. & lib. 2. 348  
Togarma or Torgama, the son of Taphet, founder of the Tro●mi, or Trogmades, in Cappadocia. l. 1. 15. l. 3. 13.  
Tubal the son of ●avan, first planted in Iberia l. 1. 16. l. 3. 148. the Spaniards how derived from him l. 1. 212.  
Triumphs their original and majesty l. 1. 41. in what they differed from an Ovation ib. in what cases denied a Conqueror 41. 42. when discontinued and laid by 42.  
Taramula a disease, how cured, l. 1. 62.  
Tolosanum Aurum, a Proverb; the meaning and occasion of it l. 1. 184.  
Tragedies by whom invented l. 3. 35.  
Tule of most Christian King, why given unto the Kings of France l. 1. 200. of Catholic King, to the Kings of Spain 252. of Defender of the F●●th to England 285. of Defenders of the Church to the Swissers l. 2. 142. b. of Basileus to the Kings of Bulgaria l. 2. 211. of F●agellum Dei, to Attila the King of the Huns l. 1. 184. l. 2. 216.  
Tenedia Securis, a Byword, the occasion of it l. 3. 34.  
Tails of sheep (and of no beasts else) why used in Sacrifice l. 3. 58.  
Troy not besieged ten years together by the Greeks, and at last how taken li. 3. 16.  
Temple re-edified by Zorobabel, in what it differed from the former l. 3. 94. repaired and beautified by Herod ib. the several Courts about it 94, 95. all of them in the name of the Temple ib.  
Turks, their original, and conquests l. 3. 150. Their Kings and Emperors 151. Their persons, customs, and Religion 152. Their Estate and power 153. 156.  
Timariot what they be, their institution and number l. 3. 153.  
Tartarians not the Progeny of the Tribes of Israel l. 3. 186. from whence most probably descended 203. their affairs and victories 203, 204.  
Tamerlane his birth and parentage l. 3. 195. the sum and substance of his story ib.  
Sr. Thomas Moor, no friend to Friars l. 1. 93. his new plot for wooing not approved of l. 4. 56. his device to bring Gold and silver into contempt fit for none but Utopians l. 4. 149.  
Traffic, and the story of it l. 4. 9, 10. more advantageous to a State than mines of Gold and Silver. ib.  
Taba●●● where most plentiful l. 4. 149. why called the Henbane of 〈◊〉. the fantastic use therecondemned, and the virtues ascribed unto it, examined Ibid. by whom first brought into England ibid.  
Theocra●ia, or the Government of the Jews, under God himself l. 3. 100   

V  
Vina Massica whence so called and of what esteem l. 1. 57  
Vidames in France, how many and what they are l. 1. 170.  
Vandals, the same which the Latins call Waldenses l. 1. 193. Their life and doctrines, ib.  
Ulysses not so far as Lasbon l. 1. 258. the sum and substance of his story l. 2. 264.  
Venus, whence called Cytheraea l. 2. 260. whence Dea Cypr. l. 3. 4. 43. whence Paphia. l. 3. 43. the brutishness of the Cypriots both men and women in their Feasts, and Sacrifices 42, 43.  
Vr the birthplace of Abraham, a Town of Mesopotamia l. 3. 135. that it was not in Chaldaea, as by most supposed ib.  
Us or Hus, the Country and dwelling of job, whereabouts it was l. 3. 112.  
Virgil's Fable of Dido disproved l. 4. 27. his Aeneas suspected l. 3. 16.  
Vand●l●, their first Seat l. 2. 200. their affairs, story, and the succession of their King's l 4. 28, 29.  
Vaivod, the meaning of the word l. 2. 203. the Varvods of Transilvania ib. of Moldavia, 204. and Wala●hia 206.  
Versoria in Plautus, what it is l 4 99 not used there for the Mariner's compass, as by some supposed ib.  
Vicugue, a strange, but profitable beast among the Americans, and the nature of it l. 4. 101. the Bezoar found in the belly of 12 ib.   

W  
WOrld why created l. 1. 1. how long since 3. Peopled before the general Flood 6. the East parts planted before the attempt at Babel 17, 18. l. 3. 217. called Cosmos by the Greeks, and Mundus by the Latins from the beauties of it l. 1. 31. unequally divided in respect of Religion 31, 32.  
Walloons what they are, and why so called l. 2. 4. & li. 1. 288.  
Writing the original of it l. 4. 4. and the several forms l. 3. 207.  
White-friar's from whence so called, and by whom first institututed l. 1. 92. called also Carmelites, and why, ib.  
Whales, their dimensions and vast greatness l. 2. 213.   

X  
XErufe why used for the title of the Kings of Morocco l. 4. 43. the Catalogue and succession of them, ib.   

Y  
YEugh-trees why planted in Churchyards l 4. 4.   

A Computation of the foreign Coins herein mentioned, with the English.   I s d Hebrew Talon in gold 4500   Hebrew Talon in Silver 375   Alexandrian Talent 375   Egyptian Talon 250   Babylonian Talon 218 15  Attic Talon 187 10  Sestertium of Rome 7 16 3 A Shekel 00 2 6 Argenteus Mat. 26. 15. 00 2 6 A Drachma 00 00 70b A Rubble 00 13 4 A Sultany 00 7 6 A Ducat 00 6 8 A French Crown 0 6 6 A Xeriffe 0 6 0 A Rix Doller 0 4 8 A Floren 0 3 0 A Frank 0 2 0 A Livre 0 2 0 A Gulden 0 2 0 A Spanish Real 0 0 6 A Sous 0 0 1 q● A Turkish Asper 0 0 1q A Maravidis 0 0 0q